summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/info/latex2e-help-texinfo
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900
committerNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900
commite0c6872cf40896c7be36b11dcc744620f10adf1d (patch)
tree60335e10d2f4354b0674ec22d7b53f0f8abee672 /info/latex2e-help-texinfo
Initial commit
Diffstat (limited to 'info/latex2e-help-texinfo')
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog3365
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile155
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS209
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/README23
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws255
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi18
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/README8
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/asy/list.asy236
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.eps1302
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.pdfbin0 -> 10128 bytes
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.pngbin0 -> 74651 bytes
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.txt18
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.css24
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk17174
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html24815
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.info18241
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdfbin0 -> 1082921 bytes
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi19044
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt16791
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml19395
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ltx-help.el291
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.dbk6789
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.html11882
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.info8122
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.pdfbin0 -> 675395 bytes
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.txt7230
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.xml7504
27 files changed, 162891 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ea8730ed19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog
@@ -0,0 +1,3365 @@
+2018-10-15 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * NEWS Version for CTAN
+
+2018-10-14 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * easyurls.py Make links be to latexref.xyz
+ * mirroring.html Make links be to latexref.xyz
+ * writing.html Make links be to latexref.xyz
+
+2018-10-14 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * easyurls.py Broken link in header to index.html.
+ * writing.html Minor wording change.
+
+2018-10-13 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * index.html Link to writing.html.
+ * latex2e.texi Minor wording changes.
+ * mirroring.html Wording changes. Suggest url "latexref/" rather than
+ "latexrefman/" as it is shorter and matches latexref.xyz.
+ * writing.html Shorten some parts, fix list bullets.
+
+2018-10-12 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi Fix overfull lines in PDF.
+
+2018-10-12 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi Add \phantom, etc. Move it and \smash to menu
+ under Spacing in math mode.
+ * keeptrack.csv Mark \phantom, \vphantom as done (\hphantom not there).
+ * Makefile Change svn commands in commitready target.
+
+2018-10-10 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi New entry for \smash, starting from Bob's upload.
+ Change to October.
+ * keeptrack.csv Mark \smash as done.
+ * Makefile Commented out commitready target as it did work for the
+ addtion of _005csmash.html and bs-smash.html.
+
+2018-10-07 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * writing.html Link to keeptrack.csv, wording changes.
+ * common.texi Put https on start of home page address, so it works
+ when accessing via a file:// url.
+
+2018-10-07 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * keeptrack.csv File to keep track of which commands have been done,
+ and which need doing.
+ * keeptrack.py Script to make and update keeptrack.csv.
+ * Makefile Add code to commitready target for just before committing.
+ Takes the split .html files and adds any new ones, and drops any ones
+ that are gone.
+ * source2e.ind Reference index, from compiling source2e.tex.
+
+2018-10-05 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Class and package structure): @item
+ before first text in @enumerate.
+
+2018-10-05 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * writing.html Written. Brief outline of how to contribute an entry.
+
+2018-09-23 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi Add text to "About this document" pointing to
+ latexref.xyz.
+ * mirroring.html Adjust wording, drop CSS for LaTeX.
+
+2018-09-23 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi Some wording changes to backslash-space.
+ * Makefile Add "<hr/>" at the bottom of split pages.
+ * mirroring.html Written. Brief instructions on mirroring.
+
+2018-09-21 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi Move \makeatletter & \makeatother and \@ifstar to
+ section on defining commands. Promote Environments to a section.
+ Some wording changes.
+ * latex2e-help-texinfo-tree/latex2e Delete .html files that no longer
+ apply (declarations).
+ * Makefile Need a target to automatically do html files
+ that need to be added and deleted to/from the svn, just before
+ committing. Commented out for the moment.
+
+2018-09-19 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e-help-texinfo-tree/latex2e Add directory, with all its
+ HTML files, to repo.
+ * latex2e.texi Change to September 2018 date.
+ * Makefile Add easyurls to htmlsplit target.
+
+2018-09-15 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * easyurls.py Added ability to inject text into top of index.html.
+ Added that it does not make pointers to files created by @anchor(..).
+ * latex2e.texi Restore Starting & ending anchor.
+ * latex2elocal.css Changed name to latexreflocal.css
+ * latex.css Add quotes on @import ...
+ * Makefile Keep split files from having a footer.
+ * _version.py Incorporated contents into easyurls.py, to make it
+ self-contained.
+
+2018-09-08 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * Makefile (t2html_home): use https://latexref.xyz.
+
+2018-08-09 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi Correct wording in a couple of spots.
+ * latex2elocal.css Add for hosts to put in local styling.
+ * latex.css Move optional stylings to prior file.
+
+2018-08-09 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\cite) Add reference to bibliographic styles.
+ (\rotatebox) Correct displayed command, adjust wording.
+
+2018-08-03 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * index.html: new file to make the checkout a web site;
+ used for new domain http://latexref.xyz.
+
+2018-07-25 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (copying) Acknowledge Martin Herbert Dietze for
+ latex2e-reference material.
+ (Lengths) Adjust wording.
+
+2018-07-16 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.css (div.referenceinfo): try not floating right,
+ maybe it will look better at the start of the line.
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (\alph ...): \ast rather than @ast, since @ast is
+ not a Texinfo command.
+
+2018-07-08 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * Makefile (t2html_home): use PRE_BODY_CLOSE; Texinfo's About
+ button is something else.
+ (check-dw): better removal of intentional doubles in text.
+ * latex2e.texi: remove doubled words.
+
+2018-07-05 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * Makefile Try out making split HTML's.
+ * latex2e.css Put a minimal amount of styling in the split pages.
+
+2018-07-03 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi Do a CTAN release following the checklist in the
+ file CTAN. Zip file contents from "make dist" looks OK to me.
+
+2018-07-02 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: typos, underfull boxes, mirror wording.
+
+2018-07-02 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Finished checking entries against
+ latex2e-reference. Removed that item from xx list.
+ (CTAN) Added section.
+
+2018-07-02 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi:Check entries against
+ latex2e-reference. Through "Modes".
+
+2018-07-01 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi:Check entries against
+ latex2e-reference. Through the \t's.
+
+2018-07-01 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi:Check entries against
+ latex2e-reference. Through the \m's.
+
+2018-06-30 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Index): Merge General Index and Concept Index.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip): one
+ anchor for each.
+
+2018-06-30 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi:Try adding anchors that have URL's that
+ are easy to figure out. Add them in a couple of places, notably
+ in lists of parameters.
+ (Predefined lengths) Delete, moving contents to \mbox & \makebox.
+
+2018-06-29 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Put @noindent's following
+ @end examples where they are needed in PDF.
+
+2018-06-29 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Command line options) <-interaction>:
+ use @var{mode} to avoid overfull box in index. Use - for printed
+ output, and no @ftable.
+ (common.texi): minimize url.
+
+2018-06-28 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Command line): both - and -- work in TL,
+ and, I hope, in MiKTeX.
+
+2018-06-29 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Under- and underfull lines in PDF
+ are gone.
+
+2018-06-29 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Fix over- and underfull lines in PDF.
+ Through page 100.
+
+2018-06-28 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Command line) Fix synopsis calling syntax. Added
+ examples of putting commands on the command line,
+ and of recovering from errors. This finishes latex-info; I have
+ removed it from the todo's.
+
+2018-06-27 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Terminal input/output) Added synopsis, examples.
+ (Command line) Give synopsis calling syntax. Expanded
+ into sections the command options, including a discussion of shell
+ escape. Put in stub for putting commands on the command line,
+ and for recovering from errors.
+
+2018-06-26 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Front/back matter) Expanded the entries for the
+ table of contents, for the index, and for the glossaries. Added
+ many examples, adjusted wording. Added description of options for
+ .isty files.
+
+2018-06-21 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Special insertions) Rearranged the lists so that
+ the examples come first. That eases finding things for readers, since
+ all examples are in the same place vertically. Added Unicode for
+ HTML where available.
+
+2018-06-20 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\sbox & \savebox) Combined the two. Added examples,
+ adjusted wording
+ (lrbox) Adjust wording.
+ (\usebox) Adjust wording, add error messages.
+
+2018-06-19 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\strut) Added.
+ (\mbox & \makebox) Add examples, cross-references, adjust wording.
+ (\fbox & \framebox) Change name, add examples, adjust wording.
+
+2018-06-18 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: let's make "uppercase" and "lowercase" one word?
+ Break some long (>=80 chars) lines, though many remain.
+
+2018-06-17 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Spaces) Do vertical spacing commands.
+ Add subsections for \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip, and the
+ \bigbreak, etc. Add examples, particularly tricky was \addvspace.
+
+2018-06-16 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Spaces) Did horizontal spacing commands.
+ Add subsections for \hss and for tie, ~. Change the two subsections
+ on \(SPACE) to one, giving \@ its own subsection. Add examples, adjust
+ wording, add error messages.
+ (\mbox & \makebox) Combine the two sections into one. This needs more
+ work, including examples and error messages.
+
+2018-06-12 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Sectioning) Add subsections for \appendix and for
+ \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter. List the sectioning
+ parameters secnumdepth and tocdepth. Add Larger book template in
+ part as example of frontmatter, appendix, etc. Also add article
+ template. Adjust wording of some other sections, such as Tables
+ of Contents, to fit changes. Add examples. Adjust wording of main
+ Sectioning section.
+
+2018-06-11 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Sectioning) Make subsections for \part, \chapter,
+ \section, etc. Add examples. Adjust wording of main section.
+
+2018-06-09 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math miscellany) Move dots to separate subsection
+ under Math symbols. Move \overline, etc. to separate subsection
+ after Math accents. Move \imath and \jmath to Math symbols.
+ Change rest to a menu, with synopses and examples, and error
+ messages where appropriate. Adjust wording.
+
+2018-06-07 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\pagestyle) Add description of mechanism,
+ with example. Modify description of \makeboth, \makeright.
+ * graphics/Makefile Add. Make the graphics.
+ (list.eps) Have it generated by Asymptote, to make it smaller
+ and vector.
+
+2018-06-07 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\pagenumbering) Add gobble, examples, refs to
+ page styles and counters.
+ (\maketitle) Improve example to contain all four declarations.
+
+2018-06-06 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math spacing) Adjust wording.
+ (Page styles) Add example, adjust wording.
+
+2018-06-06 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math functions) Make the @math{...} stuff not
+ appear in the HTML. Add comment about amsmath allowing users to
+ create their own.
+ (Math accents) Make the @math{...} stuff not
+ appear in the HTML.
+
+2018-06-05 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math formulas) Adjust wording, including a suggestion
+ that new math docs should use the AMS packages. Add subsection to
+ symbols for Caligraphic, \boldmath, and blackboard bold.
+
+2018-06-04 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Modes) Include all six modes, with the vertical ones.
+ Adjust wording.
+ (Making paragraphs) Add \par. Combine \noindent and \indent.
+ Add \parindent to \parskip.
+
+2018-06-01 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Page breaking) Next in latex-info. Adjust wording.
+ Add examples and a few error messages.
+ (\clearpage & \cleardoublepage) Combine the two into one.
+
+2018-06-01 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Line breaking) Next in latex-info (split with
+ page breaking). Adjust wording. Add examples and a few error
+ messages. Adjust wording.
+ (sloppypar) Add.
+
+2018-06-01 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Letters) Next in latex-info. Adjust wording.
+ (\mlabel) Brought text from fr on customization of label
+ printing, added example.
+
+2018-05-31 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Lengths) Next in latex-info is Lengths.
+ Adjust entries, adding examples and error messages.
+ (Definitions) \newlength adjusted, examples added. Make
+ synopses fit pattern elsewhere, including adding case of
+ no square brackets. Adjust wording of optargdefault in both
+ \newcommand and \newenvironment.
+
+2018-05-30 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (footnote) Next in latex-info is Footnotes.
+ Fold examples together into Footnotes in Tables subsection. Move
+ Parameters subsection material to \footnote. Adjust wording.
+
+2018-05-29 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (thebibliography) Add examples. Adjust wording.
+
+2018-05-28 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (picture) Add examples. Adjust wording.
+ Add menu items, readjust menu order. Add examples for many
+ menu subjects and adjust wording.
+
+2018-05-24 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (verbatim) Expand on problems putting
+ it in argument of macros, add examples.
+ (verse) Adjust wording.
+
+2018-05-23 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi Continue going through latex-info. Through that
+ doc's Environments. Adjust wording as it arises.
+ (minipage, parbox) Expand on options, add examples.
+
+2018-05-19 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi Continue going through latex-info. Through that
+ doc's Cross References, Commands, Page Layout. Adjust wording
+ as it arises, including adding error messages.
+
+2018-05-18 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * text: "GNU/Linux", @TeX{} Live, MiK@TeX{}, just @samp.
+
+2018-05-17 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi Going through http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-info
+ (CTAN package latex-info), making sure this doc has everything
+ the older one has. So far, Counters done. Also adjust wording
+ as it arises.
+
+2018-05-17 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\include & \includeonly) Combine the two. Include
+ discussion of many edge cases, with examples.
+ (Splitting the input) Add typical case example.
+ (\endinput) Added.
+ (\input) Adjust wording to fit changes.
+
+2018-05-04 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@biosency.com>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Color): Translate node Color from Jim's r609 —
+ subnodes need further translation work.
+
+2018-04-30 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * Makefile (dist) Add latex2e-es.pdf.
+ * latex2e.texi (list) Add h0 description accidentally omitted.
+ (picture) Add additional synopsis, adjust wording.
+
+2018-03-22 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@biosency.com>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (All document): Use « tapuscrit » instead or as
+ an alternartive to « machine à écrire » for tt font family.
+ (Top, Color, Graphics): Add Color and Graphics nodes and sub-nodes
+ thereof, without translation.
+ (description): Translate edits from Jim r609 2018-03-04
+
+ * latex2e.texi (description): @var{}-ify « text of first item »
+ and « text of second item »
+ (description): « labeled list of items » -> « list of labeled items »
+ (Color package options): @code{}-ify « color » in title, as it is
+ the package name.
+ (Graphics package options, Graphics package configuration):
+ @code{}-ify « graphics » in title, as it is the package name.
+
+2018-03-21 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * -- Prepare upload distribution to CTAN with correct file mtimes.
+ * makedist.sh Delete. (Better to use Makefile)
+ * CTAN Create Notes on uploading a distribution.
+
+2018-03-28 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * Makefile (dist): rm zip file before remaking it;
+ unzip -l rather than -t for more useful info.
+
+2018-03-21 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Graphics): Couple of typos, small rewordings.
+ * makedist.sh Create. Bash script for making .zip for
+ a distribution for CTAN.
+
+2018-03-04 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Graphics): Create as a new chapter. Include all
+ commands and options from grfguide.pdf.
+ * list.txt Create. ASCII graphic of the list illustration.
+
+2018-03-04 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Color): Create. Include all commands and
+ options from grfguide.pdf.
+ * latex2e.css (code) Create file, so in HTML inside of @math{} the
+ code elements will be in monotype.
+ * Makefile Include CSS file in texi2html line; put in dependence
+ to css file in %.html line.
+
+2018-02-22 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\spacefactor): Create. Describe the space factor
+ along with the command. Create sub-menu.
+ (\(SPACE) and \@) Move to live below \spacefactor.
+ (\frenchspacing) Also move to below \spacefactor.
+ (\normalsfcodes) Create, below \spacefactor.
+
+2018-02-22 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (list): Convert legend for picture from caption
+ to a table.
+
+2018-02-21 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend): Create.
+
+2018-02-19 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\list),
+ (\item),
+ (trivlist): minor wording and formatting updates.
+ (\AtBeginDocument, \AtEndDocument): @subsection commands needed.
+ Various typos etc. throughout.
+
+2018-02-11 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (list environment): Move list parameters to this
+ entry.
+
+2018-01-02 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (thebibliography, Upper and lower case): Align
+ on Karl's r598 edits of 2017-10-29.
+ (\protect, Text symbols): Typos.
+
+2017-10-29 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: typos, wording.
+ * aspell.en.pws: more exceptions.
+
+2017-10-17 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (document header): Uppercase title 1st
+ letter. Make PlainTeX a flag, not sure what the best translation
+ of this is.
+ (@TeX{} engines, Class and package commands): use @value{PlainTeX} flag.
+ (Document class options): Add @PkgIndex{geometry}.
+ (\newlenth, \newsavebox, \value): Add Jim's edits of r366 2015-06-20.
+ (\providecommand): Add Jim's edits of r348 2015-05-29.
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Typo.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): typo.
+ (\newsavebox): Use « baquet » rather than « bac » to translate
+ « bin ».
+ (Special insertions, Non-English characters): Rename node
+ « Non-English characters » to « Additional Latin letters ». Add an
+ anchor for backward compatibility.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Document class options): Add @PkgIndex{geometry}.
+
+2017-10-08 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Mark tabbing node translation from French as TODO.
+ (thebibliography): Fix description about \refname, as sometimes it
+ is also \bibname.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Environments): Typo in thebibliography entry.
+ (tabbing): Typo.
+ (thebibliography): Fix description about \refname, as sometimes it
+ is also \bibname.
+
+2017-10-06 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Make EnvIndex and PkgIndex macro usable on the
+ same line as text.
+ (Low-level font commands): Fix table column width. Fix translation from English.
+ (tabbing): Mention algorithm2e and listings packages.
+ (Upper and lower case): Mention textcase package.
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Make EnvIndex and PkgIndex macro usable on the
+ same line as text.
+ (tabbing): Some more translation of the French version. Plus mention
+ algorithm2e and listings packages.
+ (Upper and lower case): Mention textcase package.
+
+2017-10-04 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (tabbing): Partial translation of tabbing node
+ rewrite, and add examples.
+ (Upper and lower case): Use @samp{...} rather than ``...''. Add
+ closing @}. Solve overfull box in @example.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands, Special insertions)
+ (Upper and lower case): Translate Jim's edits from r578 of
+ 2017-08-06.
+ (tabbing): Rewrite this node, and add examples.
+ (table): Typo.
+
+
+2017-10-03 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): Typo.
+ (quotation and quote): Typoes.
+
+2017-08-24 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi,
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Low-level font commands): remove width percentages.
+
+2017-08-22 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: push iftexthenelse macro and HAS-MATH flag to common.texi
+ (Low-level font commands): Restore cmss & cmtt. `@dmn{}%' -> `%'.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: push iftexthenelse macro and HAS-MATH flag to common.texi
+ (Low-level font commands): Restore cmss & cmtt. `@dmn{}%' -> `@dmn{%}'.
+
+ * common.texi: push iftexthenelse macro and HAS-MATH flag to common.texi
+
+2017-08-22 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Low-level font commands): Refer to
+ https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide. Use multitables to achieve Jim's
+ goal of having 1st column entry on the same line as 2nd column
+ entry, it seems cleaner than itemize + '@t{@ }'. Add comment why
+ cmss & cmtt were dropped ?
+ (Low-level font commands/\baselinestretch): Some rewording + say
+ explicitely that the given example is doubling line skip.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Layout, Low-level font commands): Translate
+ Jim's r363 edits of 2015-06-16, as well as my edits on top of them
+ to latex2e.texi made in this revision.
+
+2017-08-09 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * NEWS-fr: Typoes.
+
+ * Makefile.1: Add common.texi to the list of files to be zipped
+ into distribution.
+
+2017-08-09 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (\@startsection) Added defaults for book, article,
+ and report classes.
+
+2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * README-fr: Convert from latin-9 to utf-8 to comply with CTAN
+ requirements.
+
+2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * Makefile.1: rename README-fr to README in the zipped archive.
+
+ * NEWS-fr: svn propset keywords to Id for leading timestap to be
+ uptodate
+
+ * README-fr: Typoes. Extend the leading English part fo the French
+ readme to comply with CTAN requirements.
+
+2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * README-fr: Port GNA! -> Puszcza. `non officiel' -> `officieux'
+ for consistency with manual. Mention other people translate
+ `moving argument' by `argument mouvant'.
+
+2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * NEWS-fr: Add delivery note --- translated from Jim's, thank you
+ Jim!
+
+ * Makefile.1 (update-date-en): Make awk version generation script
+ for en insensitive to Locale --- due to my migrating from MSYS1 to
+ MSYS2.
+ (fr,en,es): Robustify output genreric targets for them to concern
+ only manual output.
+ (tag): Port from GNA! to Puszcza the tag taget.
+ (help): document target tag
+
+ * latex2e-fr.{dbk,.dvi,.html,.info,.pdf,.texi,.txt,.xml}: Compilation for August 2017 delivery to CTAN.
+
+2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Update version & copyright notice for August 2017 delivery to CTAN.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.{dbk,.dvi,.html,.info,.pdf,.texi,.txt,.xml}: Compilation for August 2017 delivery to CTAN.
+
+2017-08-06 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * README: update for move to puszcza/tug.
+
+2017-08-05 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (Upper and lower case) Added.
+
+2017-08-01 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: copyright 2017.
+
+2017-08-01 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Environment, Declaration, \makeatletter and \makeatother)
+ (\@@ifstar, \@@startsection): put a sectionning title to node.
+ (\@@ifstar): @cindex star-variants with key star-variants.
+ (Sectioning): Add anchor to secnumdepth counter for reference from
+ \@@startsection node.
+ (\@@startsection): Reword the explanation of redefining \section
+ as \@@startsection and how \section keeps is standard calling form
+ when redefined. heading -> title for consistency. @code{}-ify
+ class names, book, report & article. Use anchor to
+ secnumdepth. Typoes. rubber -> typically rubber. Solve overfully
+ hbox in example by not repeating explanations in examplified LaTeX
+ comments, rather make a simple link. style [...] file -> package
+ [...] file. redefined [...] sectional units -> redefined [...]
+ sectional unit title commands.
+ (Class and package commands): Amend Karl's r574 edit of
+ 2017-07-31, `When a document is processed using that class' ->
+ `When a document using that class is processed', as one usually
+ specify the class in the document itself, not on the command line,
+ although the latter is possible.
+
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (document header): update copyright for
+ translation.
+ (About this document, Class and package commands): Translate
+ Karl's r574 edits of 2017-07-31.
+ (Environment, Declaration, \makeatletter and \makeatother)
+ (\@@startsection,\@@ifstar): put a sectionning title to node.
+ (\@@startsection): Complete translation of Jim's r562 of
+ 2017-07-26 for this node, w/o moving the node under node
+ Sectionning.
+ (Sectioning): Add anchor to secnumdepth counter for reference from
+ \@@startsection node.
+
+2017-07-31 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): Add \CheckCommand
+ and \DeclareRobustCommand as per Jim's r568 2017-07-30 edits + my
+ own modifications in latex2e.texi.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Class and package commands/\CheckCommand): Use &
+ define term "long" for long command + improve description.
+ (Class and package commands/\DeclareRobustCommand): Improve
+ existing description. Add mention to etoolbox macros.
+
+2017-07-31 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * Makefile.1: Extend check-dw to handle other languages. Add
+ target help.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (document header): update version.
+ (About this document): Fix some leftover English/automatic
+ translated French. Typo.
+ (\pageref): Translate some leftover English.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (document header): update version.
+
+
+2017-07-31 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * Makefile.1: Add targets <lang><format>, like enpdf, frpdf,
+ eninfo, etc...
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (document header, About this document): Take
+ edits from Karl's r333 of 2015-05-12. and . Plus all my
+ modfifications in latex2e.texi --- like using common.texi for
+ project home page and bug report. `http://www.ctan.org/...' ->
+ `http://ctan.org/...'. Reword `non officiel' -> `officieux'.
+ (Overview): Take edits from Jim's r412+413 of 2015-08-21.
+ (Starting and ending): Typo. rewording `sections' -> `rubriques'.
+ (Output files): English quotes `` '' to French quotes
+ « ». Concerning .log, add @dfn{fichier journal} (the French for
+ ``log file''). Typo. Translate leftover English in .lot/.lof/.toc
+ cindex.
+ (@TeX{} engines): @TeX{} -> @TeX{} de base --- ie Plain-@TeX{}. Typo.
+ (@LaTeX{} command syntax): Typo.
+ (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Take edits from Jim's r564 of
+ 2017-07-26.
+ (\@@startsection): Preliminary taking into account of Jim's r562
+ of 2017-07-26.
+ (Class and package commands): Translate leftover English sentance.
+ (Floats): Translate leftover English
+ title. @PkgIndex{flafter}. Typo. Place URL to F. Mittelback
+ article in in round-bracket like in the English version.
+ (array): @PkgIndex{amsmath}
+ (displaymath): Take edits from Jim's r412 2015-08-21, plus my
+ modifications to latex2e.texi.
+ (picture): `sections' -> `rubriques'.
+ (\oval): English quotes `` '' to French quotes « ».
+ (table): Exchange order of \caption and \label in example to align
+ on the English version.
+ (Units of length): Translate to French leftover English @cindex
+ about mu.
+ (\parbox): Same change as in latex2e.texi, @dfn{}-ize and
+ @cindex-ize `paragraphe mode', so remove @code{} around
+ `paragraph'. Typo & some rewording.
+ (\today): Translate to French leftover English about datetime package.
+ (\addtocontents): @code{}-ify title.
+ (\addtocontents): Translate to French this node leftover in
+ English.
+ (Glossaries): Translate to French leftover English word. Fix translation.
+ (Indexes): Typo.
+
+ * common.texi: New file, for flags common to all 3 manuals.
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: Use common.texi for defining project home page
+ and bug report address.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (document header): @include common.texi for URL's
+ and other flags that we want to make common between all the translations.
+ (document titlepage): take home page URL from common.texi
+ (About this document): take home page URL from common.texi, same
+ for bug report address. @cindex bug report.
+ (Floats): @PkgIndex{flafter}.
+ (\@@startsection): @code{}-ify book and report class names.
+ (array): @PkgIndex{amsmath}.
+ (displaymath): @var{}-ify `math text'. Move upward sentence
+ `@LaTeX{} will not break the @var{math text} across lines.' in
+ order not to interrupt description about equation
+ numbering. @PkgIndex{amsmath}. Suppress verbous sentance `Those
+ facilities are the best approach for such output in new
+ documents.' and replace by add `significantly more' before
+ `extensive displayed equation facilities'. `options' -> `ways' in
+ order not to create confusion with package options.
+ (\parbox): @dfn{}-ize and @cindex-ize `paragraphe mode', so remove
+ @code{} around `paragraph'.
+ (\includeonly): Typo.
+ (\addcontentsline): extension -> filename extension.
+
+2017-07-31 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (About this document): latex2e frozen, not retired;
+ clarify usrguide status.
+ (Class and package commands): clarify \NeedsTeXFormat.
+ vincent xxx's + other typos.
+
+2017-07-30 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (\@DeclareRobustCommand): Add.
+
+2017-07-30 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (\@ifstar): Translate from the French version.
+ (\@startsection): Move to Sectioning.
+
+2017-07-27 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * Makefile.1 (compare-nodes, compare-nodes-fr, compare-nodes-es):
+ new targets to compare node lists between languages. compare-nodes
+ is made a synonym of compare-nodes-fr because the Spanish
+ translation does not reuse the same node names.
+
+2017-07-26 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (<header comment>): Add reference to
+ https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/lc2fr-apb.pdf, as far as
+ translation is concerned.
+ (Starting and ending): Fix @cindex translation.
+ (\@@startsection): Typo.
+ (\@@ifstar): Typo.
+ (Document classes): Add menu entries `Additional packages' and
+ `Class and package construction', as per Jim's r560 edits of 2017-07-21.
+ (Document class options): typo.
+ (Additional packages): Create new node entry, as per Jim's r560
+ edits of 2017-07-21.
+ (Class and package commands, Class and package construction): New
+ nodes, as per Jim's r560 edits of 2017-07-21.
+ (document): Add \AtBeginDocument &
+ \AtEndDocument sub node, as per Jim's r397 edits of 2015-08-11.
+ (itemize): Typo.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Class and package construction): Re-word avout
+ \makeat's surrounding, because the catcode must be changed outside
+ a macro definition, and not within it so that any @-char is
+ interpreted as a letter in the definition. Reword `interact' -> `interfere'.
+ (Class and package structure): Use an enumerate env for
+ enumerating. @dfn{...}-ize name of each part of the class/package file.
+ @code{...} -> @file{...} for file names.
+ (Class and package commands): Clarify that within
+ error/warning/info message, command \space is useful only after a
+ command name, as the usual space char can be used otherwise. Fix
+ prototype of \DeclareLOption* --- takes no @var{option}.
+ (Class and package commands): \IfFileExists, \InputIfFileExists,
+ use argument in description. Use @file{...} for file names. Add
+ @comment about at-macros for handling release date with more
+ refinement.
+ (Class and package commands): \ExecuteOptions, push @var{option}
+ into @code{...} for @code{\ds@@@var{option}}.
+ (Class and package commands): @comment, I do not understand ``that
+ you invoked''.
+ (Class and package commands): @var{option+s+ list} -> @var{option
+ list}.
+ (Class and package commands): If your code -> If your _own_ code
+ (Class and package commands): Cascaded package loading, clarify
+ text about how options get through.
+ (Class and package commands): \ProcessOpitons `Execute the code
+ +for+ each option' -> `Execute the code _associated with_ each
+ option'
+ (Class and package commands): @dfn{}-ize `global' and `local'
+ options.
+ (Class and package commands): Use enumerate env for enumerating.
+ (Class and package commands):
+ `@code{\ProcessOptions*}@var{\@@options}' ->
+ `@code{\ProcessOptions*}', fix this, probably a confusion with
+ `ds@...' macros.
+ (Class and package commands): \ProvidesClass, \ProvidesPackage,
+ give synopsis with and w/o brief additional info.
+ (Class and package commands): optional part/portion -> optional
+ argument.
+ (Class and package commands): Place a version number also in the
+ brief additional information, as this is what people usually do.
+ (Class and package commands): smcmem -> smcmemo for consistency.
+ (Class and package commands): `by using the optional +calls+' ->
+ `by using the optional _arguments_'.
+ (Class and package commands): \ProvidesFile, relate @var{...}
+ arguments and description text.
+ (Class and package commands): \RequirePackage, author -> document
+ author, to distinguish from class/package authors.
+
+2017-07-26 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (\makeatletter and \makeatother) Give an example
+ replacing the \@startsection one that migrated from there.
+
+2017-07-26 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (\@startsection) Translate from French. Add text
+ and examples, including example of inventing new sectioning type.
+
+2017-07-21 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Typos.
+
+2017-07-12 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: added class and package commands from clsguide.pdf.
+
+2017-06-09 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (abstract): typo.
+ (\raggedleft): typo.
+ (\circle): Make \circle & \circle* two different synopsis rather
+ than signalling * as an optional argument by square bracketing it.
+ (Spacing in math mode): Typo.
+ (\hspace): Make \hspace & \hspace* two different synopsis rather
+ than signalling * as an optional argument by square bracketing
+ it. Typo.
+ (\addvspace): Typo (use masculine gender for espace when vertical,
+ feminine seems to be used only for horizontal space).
+ (tugboat template): Take Karl's edit of 2016-11-30 + translate to
+ French --- well maybe I should add that TUG articles have to be
+ written in English, and maybe I should add a template for cahiers
+ de GUTember.
+
+2016-11-30 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: assorted typos and rewordings.
+ - not "itemization"
+ - "paragraph" not "paragraphe"
+ - "sign" not "signe"
+ - "useful" not "usefull"
+ Also, "ctan.org" not "www.ctan.org".
+
+ (tugboat template): update.
+
+2016-11-24 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: Place the English license in the @copying
+ section, and push the translation to an annex.
+
+ * Makefile.1 (fr, en, es): Change dependancy order so that license
+ check happens first.
+ (license-check-{fr, en, es}): Make the comparison relative to the
+ license as in latex2e.texi, and fix `/std/err' to `/dev/stderr'.
+ (distclean clean mostlyclean): Add license.texi to the files to be
+ cleaned off.
+ (txt_files): Remove license.texi from the list of files
+ to zip into the distributed archive.
+
+ * Makefile (txt_files): Remove license.texi from the list of files
+ to zip into the distributed archive.
+
+2016-11-23 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * license.texi: dos2unix + svn propset svn:eol-style to LF.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Cross references): Add word label to concept
+ index, and make it an @dfn{...} in the node text. `running the
+ document' -> `compiling the document'.
+ (\label): `number' -> `reference number'.
+ (abstract): Solve some overful hbox in @example...@end example
+ blocks.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (document header comment): Refer to
+ http://gdt.oqlf.gouv.qc.ca/ as one of the source for French
+ vocabulary.
+ (Cross references, \label, abstract): Same changes as in
+ latex2e.texi.
+ (Cross references, \label, \pageref, \ref): Take Jim's rev481
+ edits + fix some typoes.
+ (\includeonly): Fix typo.
+
+ * Makefile.1: Add check-license-<lang> targets to check that the
+ license is same as in license.texi
+
+2016-11-21 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * ltx-help.el (latex-help-file): Make this variable a defcustom
+ for selecting the manuel translation.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (copying): Restore license text without @include'sion of
+ license.texi, make it delimited by @comment's.
+ (dircategory): fix `LaTeX2e-fr' -> `latex2e-fr'
+ (throughout document): Use proper unbreakable space before colons.
+ (tabular, \newtheorem): typoes.
+ (\address): @var{...} instead of @code{...} for the argument + typoes.
+ (\cc): typoes + add example from latex2e.texi
+ (\closing): typo.
+ (\signature): Typoes, translate @var name.
+ (Command line): Typoes.
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Restore license text without @inclusion of
+ license.texi, make it delimited by @comment's.
+ (\cc): Add `, as in:' before example.
+
+2016-11-19 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * license.texi: Ooops... add this file.
+
+2016-11-19 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.{xml,dvi,html,info,pdf,txt}: Make these files again
+ for the license.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Restore original English license text by
+ @inclusion of license.texi, and push translation thereof to an
+ annex.
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Make license text @include-ed
+
+ * NEWS-fr: Mention that original English license text is restored,
+ and translation thereof pushed to an annex.
+
+ * Makefile.1 (txt_files): Add license.texi file.
+
+ * Makefile (txt_files): Add license.texi file.
+
+2016-11-18 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * Makefile.1: Make variable txt_tiles a macro, so that NEWS-fr and
+ README-fr be delivered instead of NEWS and README for target
+ dist-fr.
+
+ * NEWS-fr: add news for November 2016 CTAN delivery.
+
+2016-11-18 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.{xml,dvi,html,info,pdf,txt}: Make these files.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Add reference to
+ package macros2e.
+ (picture): Add reference to package picture.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Add reference
+ to package macros2e.
+ (picture): Fix typos. Add reference to package picture.
+ (\protect): Rephrase `argument mobile' to `argument mouvant'
+
+ * README-fr: Make it clear the motivation for changing `argument
+ mobile' into `argument mouvant'.
+
+ * Makefile.1 (spell-$(1)): Take in edit by Karl (rev 546) on Makefile
+
+2016-11-15 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math miscellany): Use `math' instead of `text' for
+ the @var{...} name.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Math miscellany): Use `math' instead of `texte'
+ for the @var{...} name. Use `@ifset HAS-MATH' instead of `@iftex'
+ for displaying how the example looks like.
+ (\(SPACE) and \@@): `@key{espace}' -> `@key{<espace>}' + fix typo
+ missing \ in @code{\ }.
+
+2016-10-31 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * Makefile (spell): A-Z intended in range.
+
+2016-09-14 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.{dbk,html,info,txt,xml,pdf}: Update French manuals.
+
+2016-09-13 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\@@ifstar): New node.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Comment that
+ documenting \@ifstar is TODO.
+
+2016-09-13 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand, Spaces)
+ (\(SPACE) and \@@, \(SPACE) after control sequence): Complete
+ taking on Karl's rev497 edits.
+
+2016-09-13 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\discretionary, Footnotes in section headings)
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand, Math miscellany, \(SPACE) and \@@)
+ (Text symbols): Align on Karl's rev533 changes.
+ (\(SPACE) after control sequence): Rename node --- old name was
+ ``\(SPACE) after CS'' --- as per Karl's rev497 edits.
+
+2016-09-12 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Document class options): Remove @dmn{...} for
+ ``inches''.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Document class options): Remove @dmn{...} for
+ ``pouces''. Use comma instead of point as decimal symbol. Fix
+ left-over non translated word ``by''.
+ (Floats): Indicate that ``Here'' means ``Ici'', and fix left-over
+ non translated word ``For''.
+
+2016-09-09 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Document class options): @dmn{...}-ize the units
+ in the text from Jim's rev383 changes.
+ (All over document): Create PkgIndex macro and use it to add packages
+ to index.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Take left over Jim's rev383 changes ---
+ including further fix from Karl's rev 533. Move HAS_MATH flag
+ definition (as per Karl's rev533 changes). Fix typo inside
+ EnvIndex macro definition. Create PkgIndex macro for adding
+ packages to index.
+ (All over document): Use PkgIndex macro to add packages to index.
+ (Overview): Use term ``paquet'' instead of ``paquetage'' in the
+ cindex for ``paquet de macro'', to be in line with the text body.
+ (Document class options): As compared with Jim's rev383 changes,
+ @dmn{...}-ize the units.
+ (Math symbols): Fix typo in \uplus entry.
+
+2016-09-07 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Same changes as in latex2e.texi
+ (Document class options): Minor editorial change.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Align on Karl's rev538
+ change, ie clarify that @var{débutdéf} and @var{findéf} are
+ executed within a group. Rename @var{débutdéf} and @var{findéf} to
+ @var{défdébut} and @var{déffin}
+
+ * latex2e.texi: new iftexthenelse macro.
+ (Footnotes in a table): Minor editorial change to avoid overfull hbox.
+ (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol): Do not mention
+ Unicode for PDF output, and show the LaTeX commands producing the
+ symbols.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): clarify that @var{begdefn}
+ and @var{enddefn} are executed within a group. Plus clarify that
+ _body_ is also treated within a group. Replace word ``executed''
+ by ``processed'' because not only execution but also expansion
+ prior to it happens within a group.
+
+2016-09-05 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Add an
+ @findex for ``group''.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Align on
+ Karl's 2016-09-03, plus some typo/translation fixes. Add an @findex
+ for ``groupe''.
+
+ * README-fr,
+ * NEWS-fr: New file, translation of NEWS plus some French specifics.
+
+ * README: Clarify that
+ https://mail.gna.org/listinfo/latexrefman-discuss is for archives
+ and subsription.
+
+2016-09-04 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Whole file, suppress any trailing blanks.
+
+2016-09-04 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Fix translation of sub node menu entry text.
+ (Overview): Fix spelling. Fix leftover English. ``paquetage de
+ macros'' -> ``paquet de macros'', because here work ``package'' is
+ less formal (not using the kernel packaging mechanism).
+ (@LaTeX{} command syntax): Translate title.
+ (Fonts): in ``Low-level font commands'' menu entry, improve
+ translation (notably translat ``shape'' by ``allure'').
+ (Font styles): Use French guillemets.
+ (Low-level font commands): Fix spelling. ``shape'' -> ``allure''
+ (Layout): Fix menu entry Texinfoing.
+ (\centering): Fix spelling.
+ (\centering): Fix typo.
+ (minipage): Fix spelling.
+ (Footnotes in a table): Fix typo.
+ (Lengths): Provide menu entry text index translation where needed.
+ (Spaces): Fix spelling + provide ref text translation where needed.
+
+2016-09-03 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): wording,
+ examples, xref.
+ * aspell.en.pws: additions.
+
+2016-08-31 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * aspell.en.pws: additions.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Document class options): add a5paper.
+ (\discretionary): English description.
+
+ (Footnotes in section headers): wording, add index entries.
+
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): more attempts at clarity;
+ simplify examples.
+
+ (Math miscellany): add \mathdollar \mathellipsis \mathparagraph
+ \mathsection \mathsterling \mathunderscore \mathunderscore.
+ (Text symbols): add \textsection, \textquotesingle.
+
+2016-04-12 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Document class options): Improve wording by
+ reusing package variable @var{pkg} in the synopsis description.
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Fix typo.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Use term `positional
+ parameter' in addition of `@code{#@var{n}}'. `argument parameters' ->
+ `positional parameters'.
+ (Reserved characters): `\backslash' -> `\textbackslash' in the
+ @findex in accordance with description.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Document class options): Align \usepackage
+ description on latest latex2e.texi, improve wording by reusing
+ package variable @var{paquo} in the synopsis description.
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Align description on latest
+ latex2e.texi by @code{...}-ifying all the occurrence of
+ `\@var{cmd}'. Fix typoes.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): nargs starting from 0
+ rather than from 1. Fix typoes. `argument positionnel' ->
+ `paramètre positionnel'.
+ (Reserved characters): `\backslash' -> `\textbackslash' in the
+ @findex in accordance with description. Fix typoes.
+
+2016-04-12 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (top comment, Top): Make version under quotes to
+ avoid incorrect French ``de Avril 2016'' or ``du Avril 2016''
+ instead of ``d'Avril 2016''.
+ (Document classes): Typoes.
+
+ * latex2e-{es,fr}.texi (top comment): Update dates in copyright
+ notice up to 2016.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (top comment): `Copyright' -> `Tous droits
+ réservés ©' + add ``Vincent Belaïche'' as translator.
+
+2016-04-11 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (top comment, Using BibTeX): Replace CTAN
+ central server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment by Petra
+ Rübe-Pugliese.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (top comment, Output files, Using BibTeX):
+ Replace CTAN central server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment
+ by Petra Rübe-Pugliese.
+ (Output files, Using BibTeX): Typoes.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (top comment, Output files): Replace CTAN central
+ server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment by Petra
+ Rübe-Pugliese.
+
+2016-04-08 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * NEWS: Add NEWS entry for the Apr 2016 release --- assuming
+ English will be released also.
+
+ * Makefile.1 (dist-xx, dist): Fix pior check that there aren't any
+ uncommited changes before making the zip.
+
+2016-04-07 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.{dbk,html,info,txt,xml,pdf}: Update French manuals
+ for distribution 2016-04-08 to CTAN.
+
+2016-04-07 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Updated @set UPDATED.
+
+ * aspell.es.pws: new file.
+
+ * aspell.fr.pws: new file.
+
+ * Makefile.1: new file evolved from Makefile, to be merged
+ later-on with Makefile once Karl has more time to review it and
+ validate the design. Compared to orignal Makefile the changes are
+ as follows, where xx denotes the language, ie is a two letter word
+ in {en,fr,es}:
+
+ - make it futureproof w.r.t. to new languages addition.
+
+ - make it safer:
+ - test for uncommitted changes before preparing distribution zip
+ - automate @set UPDATED flag before preparing distribution zip
+
+ - add target dist-xx, to prepare distribution for language xx only, this
+ triggers automatic update of @set UPDATED flag for the corresponding
+ language
+
+ - modify spell and spell-en target so as to support all languages. I had
+ to add custom dicitionnary for fr and es. spell will check all the
+ languages, use spell-en for English only. My aspell seems to be too
+ old to support --mode=texinfo, so I could not test it.
+
+ - modify target dist so that french is added to the zip file. Please
+ note that dist will not trigger automatic update of the @set UPDATED
+ flag, before Makefile cannot know which manual has been updated and
+ which not. This will also make the uncommitted check.
+
+ - add target updated-date-xx to automatically update @set UPDATED flag
+ in the xx manual
+
+ - add target updated-xx to do updated-date-xx + rebuild all outputs for
+ xx
+
+ - add target tag to make a tag, you can use this as follows for default
+ CTAN tag (which is `ctanYYYY-MM-DDTHH:mm:SS', where
+ YYYY-MM-DDTHH:mm:SS is an ISO time stamp):
+
+ make tag
+
+ or you can do this for make tag `foo' with message `Some message':
+
+ make tag TAG=foo "MESSAGE=Some message"
+
+
+2016-04-04 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Add EnvIndex macro to make indexing environments
+ consistent and throughout the manual. Replace any @findex of an
+ environment by a call to this macro.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Same as latex2e.texi.
+ (filecontents): Typoes.
+ (table): Typo (table evironment name mistakenly translated to
+ French).
+ (\\): Typoes.
+ (\enlargethispage): translate cindex entry to French.
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: Same as latex2e.texi.
+ (filecontents): Align to latest text in latex2e{,-fr}.texi.
+
+2016-04-02 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: Add @BES and @BESU macro definitions.
+ (Símbolos de Texto): Use @BES macro rather than @math for
+ \textperiodcentered so that the other-than-PDF is clean. `$' ->
+ `\$' for \textdollar.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): Use @BES macro rather than @math
+ for \textperiodcentered and \trademark so that the other-than-PDF
+ is clean. `$' -> `\$' for \textdollar.
+ (\makeatletter and \makeatother): re-indent
+ \@startsection example for solving the overfull hbox in the PDF
+ output.
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Text symbols): \textquestiondown
+ Typo. \textexclamdown `haut en bas' -> `culbuté'. Use @BES macro
+ rather than @math for \textperiodcentered and \trademark so that
+ the other-than-PDF is clean. `$' -> `\$' for \textdollar. `marque
+ de fabrique' -> `marque de commerce' for \texttrademark.
+ (\@@startsection): re-indent \@startsection example for solving
+ the overfull hbox in the PDF output, and fix some wrong reference.
+
+2016-03-31 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.{dbk,dvi,html,info,pdf,texi,txt,xml}: make fr.
+
+2016-03-29 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Improve translation of
+ break/breaking, use `saut/sauter à' rather than `rupture/rompre'.
+ (Spaces): Typo.
+ (Special insertions): Typo.
+ (Text symbols): Fix typo adding `comp' into
+ `\textcapitalcompwordmark' and `\textascendercompwordmark', and
+ translate this item.
+ (Math miscellany): Same change as in latex2e.texi
+ (\bigskip \medskip \smallskip): Same change as in latex2e.texi
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math miscellany): Remove @findex useless as we are in an ftable.
+ (\bigskip \medskip \smallskip): Replace @table by @ftable, and
+ remove @findex corresponding to @item's
+ (Text symbols): Fix typo adding `comp' into
+ `\textcapitalcompwordmark' and `\textascendercompwordmark'
+
+
+2016-03-17 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ Reword descrition of \epsilon and \varepsilon.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): About \epsilon ``Greek-letter'' ->
+ ``lunate'', plus add some notice that ``Similar to Greek text
+ letter''. About \varepsilon ``curly'' or ``rounded small'' ->
+ ``script small letter''.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): About \varepsilon ``en forme de
+ 3 retourné'' -> ``minuscule de ronde''.
+
+2016-03-15 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Fix compilation errors.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): Fix compilation errors.
+
+2016-03-14 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi Define flags NotInPlainTeX, NeedsAMSSymb and
+ NeedsSTIX, in order to factorize text of `Math symbols' node.
+ (Math symbols): Remove that \varnothing is reverse of \emptyset,
+ but make it variant. Add items for \revemptyset and varnothing.
+ Factorize text with news flags flags NotInPlainTeX, NeedsAMSSymb
+ and NeedsSTIX. \rangle, fix unicode code point. \smile: add
+ `smile' into meaning.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): Progress translation of this
+ node and make same changes as for latex2e.texi.
+
+2016-03-08 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Typoe in `Modes' menu entry.
+ (eqnarray): `or' -> `ou'.
+ (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node + same changes
+ as in latex2e.texi.
+ (Modes): Typoes + same changes as in latex2e.texi.
+ (\ensuremath): new node.
+ (\(SPACE) and \@@): `guillemet anglais' -> `guillemet-apostrophe'.
+ (Text symbols): Progess translation of this node + same changes as
+ in latex2e.texi.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Remove description how to make
+ \leadsto mode independent, and add a reference to new node
+ \ensuremath. Also clarify "Unless said otherwise" for this that
+ these commands are only available in math mode as this is not true
+ for \ldots.
+ (Modes): Point to new node \ensuremath
+ (\ensuremath): new node.
+ (Text symbols): Add pilcrow character for \P, similar change for \S.
+
+2016-03-06 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node.
+
+2016-02-29 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\circle): Use term ``disque'', in addition to
+ ``cercle plein'' (solid circle). @dmn{...}-ify unit.
+ (\makebox (picture)): Typo.
+ (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node.
+
+2016-02-22 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): Fix @code{'}->@code{''} for \textquotedblright
+ (Splitting the input): @dfn{...}-ify `root file' and add it to concept index
+ (\include): Replace `See next section' -> `See @ref{\includeonly}'.
+ (\includeonly): `@var{file}s' -> `@var{file1}, @var{file2}, @dots{}'
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol): `croix-mortuaire' -> `obèle'
+ (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node.
+ (Text symbols): Start translation of this node.
+ (\thinspace): `imbriqué' -> `emboîté', as per Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary
+ (Text symbols): Fix @code{'}->@code{''} for \textquotedblright
+ (Splitting the input, \include, \includeonly, \input): Translate these nodes.
+ (Splitting the input): @dfn{...}-ify `root file' and add it to concept index
+ (\include): Replace `See next section' -> `See @ref{\includeonly}'.
+ (\includeonly): `@var{file}s' -> `@var{file1}, @var{file2}, @dots{}'
+
+2016-02-15 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\noindent): `..' -> `...'.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (About this document, @LaTeX{} command syntax)
+ (Document class options, Document class options)
+ (Page layout parameters, Sectioning, enumerate, \item, \line)
+ (\thicklines, \thinlines, \cite, \newtheorem, \newtheorem, \newtheorem)
+ (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, \signature): @tie{} -> UTF-8
+ unbreakable space.
+ (Environment): `..' -> `...' + translation of text in example.
+ (\centering): Typo.
+ (quotation and quote, \newenvironment & \renewenvironment)
+ (\noindent, \signature): `..' -> `...'.
+ (Math symbols): Progress translation + @tie{} -> UTF-8 unbreakable
+ space.
+
+2016-02-11 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (abstract): @code{...}-ify words `article' &
+ `report' when they refer to classes.
+ (array): @code{...}-ify words `array' when it refers to
+ environment.
+ (array): Ellipsis `..' -> `...'.
+ (\multicolumn): Add empty blank line after `@end example'.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Throughout document align on Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary the following:
+ `indentation/indenter' -> `renfoncement/renfoncer', `en mode affichage' -> `en hors-texte'.
+ (\@@startsection): `@var{indent}' -> `@var{retrait}', indent(ation) -> retrait or renfoncement.
+ (Document class options): Added flegn concerns display mode formula only.
+ (Environments): `mise en vedette' -> `en hors texte'
+ (abstract): `abtracts' -> `résumé', and update translating this
+ node as per Jim's rev 486 of 2015-12-05T13:22:45+01 edit.
+ (Environment): Ellipsis `..' -> `...', and add
+ `Voir @ref{Environments} pour une liste des environnements.' as
+ per Jim's rev 486 of 2015-12-05T13:22:45+01 edit.
+ (array): Update translation ad per Jim's edits rev 391 of
+ 2015-08-02T22:57:00+02 and with fixes from rev 469 by Karl of
+ 2015-11-01T23:58:36+01, and rev 503 by Karl of
+ 2016-02-10T00:11:11+01
+ (eqnarray): `style d'affichage' -> `hors texte'.
+ (itemize, minipage, quotation and quote): `Indentation' -> `Renfoncement'.
+ (tabular): Ellipsis `..' -> `...', from rev 469 by Karl of
+ 2015-11-01T23:58:36+01. Typo.
+ (\multicolumn): Update translation as per Jim's edit rev 390 of
+ 2015-08-02T20:08:26+02
+ (\verb): Typo.
+ (verse): indent(ation) -> retrait or renfoncement.
+ (\\): Ellipsis `..' -> `...', from rev 469 by Karl of
+ 2015-11-01T23:58:36+01.
+ (\footnotetext): Typo.
+ (Making paragraphs, \indent, \noindent): indent(ation) -> retrait
+ or renfoncement.
+ (Letters): `style d'affichage' -> `hors texte'. indente -> renfonce.
+
+
+2016-02-09 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (array): the directive is just p{...}, not @p{...}.
+ Noted by Vincent.
+
+2016-02-08 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (lrbox): Use Synopsis instead of in-line
+ @code{...}. `cmd' -> `\@var{cmd}'. @ref{...}-ify @code{\sbox}.
+ (\raisebox): @var{...}-ify some synopsis arguments.
+ (\addcontentsline): Remove args from @findex entry. Use synopis
+ rather than in-line @code{...}. Specify @var{unit} to be `figure',
+ resp. `table', when @var{ext} is `lof', resp. `lot'. Use `text'
+ everywhere instead of `text', `entry' and `name'. Fix `\contentsline'
+ description. Add third argument `num' to `\contentsline' and describe it.
+ (Indexes): Clarify `extension' is a filename extension. Add
+ missing antislash to \printindex and \indexspace.
+ (Letters): Typo. @code{...}-ify word `letter' when the environment
+ name. Add word `body' concerning whatever lies in the letter
+ environment body.
+ (\closing): @var{...}-ify argument.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: In file header, add reference to the
+ French/English LaTeX glossary published in the ``Cahier
+ GUTenberg'' #49 (2017), page 19--45.
+ (Top): Typo.
+ (itemize): Typo.
+ (\discretionary): Typo.
+ (\vfill): Translate this node.
+ (\vspace): Take fixes from rev 469 by Karl (2015-11-01T23:58:36+01).
+ (\opening): Take fixes from rev 469 by Karl (2015-11-01T23:58:36+01).
+ (lrbox): Translate this node.
+ (\raisebox): Complete translation of this node.
+ (Front/back matter): Typo.
+ (Tables of contents): `article' -> `entrée', as per Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary.
+ (\addcontentsline): Translate this node, with same edits as in latex2e.texi.
+ (\addtocontents): Translate this node.
+ (Glossaries): Translate this node.
+ (Indexes): Translate this node, with same edits as in latex2e.texi.
+ (Letters): Typoes. `clôture' -> `salutation'. Typo. Complete
+ translation with same edits as in latex2e.texi.
+ (\address): Translate this node.
+ (\cc): Translate this node.
+ (\closing): Translate this node with same edits as in latex2e.texi.
+ (\encl): Translate this node.
+ (\location): Translate this node.
+ (\makelabels): Typo.
+ (\opening): Typo.
+
+2016-02-05 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Line breaking, \discretionary): Add node
+ \discreionary, need completion.
+ (\protect): `they must be' -> `one solution is', as there are
+ alternative solution consisting in robustification of fragile
+ command. Move concept index entry "moving arguments" next to
+ concept first occurrence. Fix typo.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking, \discretionary): Add \discretionary node
+ (\linebreak & \nolinebreak): Translate this node.
+ (Page breaking): Translate this node.
+ (\protect): Translate this node, with same changes as in latex2e.texi.
+
+2016-02-04 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Spacing in math mode): Add @xref{\thinspace} to
+ the \thinspace entry.
+ (Math miscellany): Complete translation of this node. Clarify
+ discretionary multiplication and add example. Make TeX output only
+ when compilation is with TeX and fix some of the examples.
+ (\(SPACE) and \@@): Typo.
+ (\thinspace): Translate this node.
+ (Boxes): Translate intro in this node.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Spacing in math mode): Add @xref{\thinspace} to
+ the \thinspace entry.
+ (Math miscellany): Clarify discretionary multiplication and add
+ example. Make TeX output only when compilation is with TeX and fix
+ some of the examples.
+
+2016-02-02 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Reword copyright notice from
+ Automatic-translation French to real French.
+ (Environments): Remove spurious space.
+ (tabular): Typo.
+ (\hyphenation): Translate this node.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Typo. Align on change done by Jim
+ on rev 482 2015-11-30T12:06:12.
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Align on changes done by Jim on rev
+ 345 2015-05-27T02:05:34+02. Also `@var{cmd}' or `@var{\cmd}' ->
+ `@cmd{\@var{cmd}}'.
+ (Math miscellany): Start translation of this node.
+ (Spaces): Typo in menu.
+ (\(SPACE) after CS): Typo. Translate remain pieces left over in
+ English, notably title. Align on rev 497 2016-02-01 by Karl (ie
+ make only a brief mention of xspace), plus my rewording in
+ latex2e.texi.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): `@var{cmd}' or
+ `@var{\cmd}' -> `@cmd{\@var{cmd}}'
+ (\typein): `@var{cmd}' -> `@cmd{\@var{cmd}}'. Add `starred form' to concept index.
+ (\(SPACE) after control sequence): Rewording mention that xspace
+ alter standard behaviour. I gather the the intention was not to
+ say that individual commands alter the standard behaviour --- as
+ xspace package does --- but rather that some individual command do
+ not following the standard behaviour, and amongst them, those
+ defined with the xspace package.
+
+2016-02-01 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\(SPACE) after control sequence): replace xspace
+ details with a mere mention. Rename node from
+ \(SPACE) after control sequence.
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): don't say "command".
+
+2016-01-30 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): mention "\ "
+ after control sequences, as noted by Vincent.
+
+2016-01-27 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Marginal notes): Typoes.
+ (Subscripts & superscripts): Typo.
+ (Math functions): Translate this node to French.
+ (Math accents): Translate this node to French.
+ (Math miscellany): Initiate translation of this node to French.
+ (Non-English characters): Translate this node to French.
+ (\today): Translate this node to French.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math functions): make `\sup' formatted as a math
+ operator when in TeX output, update comment accordingly.
+ (Additional Latin letters): Add information that \dh, \DH, \dj,
+ \DJ, \th and \TH do not exist in OT1 font encoding --- I got this
+ infomation from the comprehensive package.
+ (Additional Latin letters): \ng & \NG, `Latin' -> `Lappish'.
+ (\today): @samp-ify the example date.
+ (\today): Add information about localization by multilingual
+ packages & classes.
+
+2016-01-26 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Additional Latin letters): rename from
+ Non-English characters (leave anchor behind). Suggestion from
+ Vincent, 25 Jan 2016 17:27:30.
+
+2016-01-24 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\item): oops, should have been a subsection.
+ (throughout): use three dots consistently for displayed ellipses;
+ will fix in-text ellipses later.
+
+2016-01-23 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Environment[s], \item): fix undefined references.
+ (cross-reference): replace with "cross reference", for consistency.
+
+2016-01-22 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * aspell.en.pws: add more exceptions.
+ * latex2e.texi: fix typos, refilling.
+
+2016-01-15 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\setlength, \addtolength, \settodepth)
+ (\settoheight, \settowidth): Place synopsis in a Synopsis
+ paragraph, rather than in title, simplify title, use \@var{len}
+ for the length command (rather than \gnat). Add ``length command''
+ to concept index of \selength node with @dfn-fying it, and remove
+ quote in the other nodes.
+ (Predefined lengths): Make the formula defining \totalheight a
+ math formula.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Floats): Typo
+ (\setlength, \addtolength, \settodepth, \settoheight)
+ (\settowidth, Predefined lengths): Translate these nodes to
+ French, with taking into account changes done to latex2e.texi
+ (Special insertions): Fix menu entry syntax.
+ (Reserved characters): Translate this node to French
+ (Symbols by font position): Add this node, after update made to
+ latex2e.texi
+
+2015-12-14 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): section->rubrique, sectionement->rubricage
+ (@LaTeX{} command syntax): Add node ``\makeatletter and \makeatother''.
+ (\makeatletter and \makeatother): New node, translated from
+ English version, plus improvement as changes in latex2e.texi, plus
+ \@startsection example made a separate node with more information.
+ (\@@startsection): New node.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Change ``read by
+ TeX and LaTeX'' to ``read by TeX for LaTeX''. Change ``character
+ code'' to ``character category code'', and introduce term
+ ``catcode''. Use the term ``private commands'' for commands with
+ an ``@'' in their names. Improve wording about command names with
+ a single non-letter. Suppress chiasmus of ``\documentclass and
+ \usepackage'' w.r.t. ``.sty and .cls files''. Add TODO @comment
+ about making \@startsection a separate node, see French version.
+ (\makelabels) Add reminder TODO comment to align on French
+ version.
+
+2015-12-10 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (array, center): Adjust wording, add examples.
+
+2015-12-05 Kevin Ryde <user42_kevin@yahoo.com.au>
+
+ * ltx-help.el (ltxh-buffer-substring): defalias to use
+ 'buffer-substring-no-properties if available.
+ (latex-help-get-cmd-alist): support :: and (line 123).
+ Mail of 03 Dec 2015 17:49:05.
+
+2015-12-03 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (abstract): Add examples.
+
+2015-12-03 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\onecolumn, \twocolumn): Adjust wording (make
+ first sentence a one-sentence description).
+
+2015-12-02 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\flushbottom): Adjust wording.
+
+2015-12-01 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newtheorem): Add case of no optional arguments
+ to synopsis, with summary in body.
+
+2015-11-29 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand and \newenvironment): Minor wording
+ adjustments, mostly for consistency with subsequent practice.
+
+2015-11-29 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Cross references): Add examples, and description of
+ forward references.
+
+2015-11-28 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Counters): Adjust wording and add examples
+ for \setcounter and \addtocounter.
+
+2015-11-28 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Counters): Add variable `counter' to description
+ of the counter-formatting commands. (From latex.texinfo.)
+
+2015-11-27 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Adjust wording.
+
+2015-11-26 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\newsavebox, \newtheorem, \newfont): Complete
+ translation of this node, and align on latest English version.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newtheorem): Typo.
+ (\newfont): `11pt' -> `1100' in the example, when the at clause
+ has the `scaled FACTOR' form.
+
+2015-11-26 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Add node for this,
+ as a subnode of the description of definition of commands.
+
+2015-11-25 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Reserved characters): Split out symbols by font
+ position. Distinguish between output in text body font and
+ output in typewriter font.
+
+2015-11-09 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Introduce the
+ concept of positional parameter.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Remove the text that
+ starred & nonstarred forms have the same effect, and restore the
+ original text that starred forms ban the use of \par in arguments.
+ Tell that the only allowed characters in environment names are
+ letters and character `*'. Use the term positional parameter, and
+ tell that expansion is within begdefn, not within environment,
+ which was misleading. @samp{...}-ify `Shakespear' outside of
+ @example...@end example.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Output files): Typo.
+ (tabular): Typoes.
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Typo. Introduce the concept of positional parameter.
+ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Complete the translation
+ and make the same text improvements as in latex2e.texi.
+
+2015-11-06 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parbox): Tell that `position=m' equates the
+ default behaviour.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\parbox): Same as latex2e-fr.texi.
+
+2015-11-05 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\fussy): Typo.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (verbatim): Translate this node.
+ (\verb): Clean-up left over English words.
+ (\obeycr & \restorecr, \fussy, \sloppy): Translate this node.
+
+2015-11-04 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (tabular): wording `@code{*-expression}' -> `@code{*}-expression'.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (tabular): Complete translation of this node.
+
+2015-11-03 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\parbox): Correct description of \parbox vertical
+ alignment after comment from Denis Bitouzé.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\parbox): Same as for latex2e.texi.
+
+2015-11-01 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\vspace): mention behavior if used in hmode.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (throughout): consistently use ... instead of
+ .. for code ellipses.
+
+2015-10-27 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (enumerate): Typo.
+ (itemize): Restore missing example.
+ (thebibliography): `label' -> `étiquette', `cite_key' ->
+ `clef_de_cite'. Change wording concerning `\refname' in standard classes.
+ (\bibitem, \cite, \nocite, Using BibTeX, theorem): Translate this node.
+ (\cleardoublepage, \newpage): Improve wording `page actuelle' ->
+ `page courante'.
+ (\typeout): Typo `\espace' -> `\space'.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\bibitem): 1/ Add to concept index "citation
+ key". 2/ @var{...}-ify word label where applicable for consistency
+ with @var{cite_key}. 3/ `see next section' -> `@pxref{\cite}'.
+ (\cite): 1/ Add reference to node \bibitem. 2/ @samp{...}-ify the
+ example possibly produced typeset text.
+ (\nocite): Add `Synopsis:' and `@example ... @end example'
+ encapsulation thereof.
+ (Using BibTeX): 1/ `@var{style}' -> `@var{bibstyle}'. 2/
+ `@file{@var{bibfile}.bib}' -> `@file{@var{bibfile1}.bib},
+ @file{@var{bibfile2}.bib}, @dots{}'.
+
+2015-10-27 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (titlepage): Add example.
+
+2015-10-25 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * Correct errors reported by CTAN, including my lack
+ of a SVN $Id tag for the README.
+
+2015-10-24 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * New release, version of October 2015, for CTAN, since there
+ were lots of updates over the summer. Just English for the
+ moment; we need to smooth the process for other languages.
+
+ * Makefile (distzip): the phony target was not doing the recipies;
+ changed name of a variable to distzip.
+
+2015-10-12 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * Makefile (dist): remove spanish stuff, just do english.
+
+2015-10-12 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Footnotes): Add remark that getting biblio
+ references in footnotes depends on the bibliographic style.
+
+2015-10-11 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Page breaking): Translate menu entries
+ (\cleardoublepage, \clearpage, \newpage, \enlargethispage)
+ (\pagebreak & \nopagebreak): Translate these nodes
+ (Footnotes, \footnote, \footnotemark, \footnotetext)
+ (Footnotes in a table, Footnotes in section headings): Take into
+ account Jim's edits of 2015-10-09, 2015-10-04, 2015-10-03, &
+ 2015-09-29.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\cleardoublepage, \clearpage): Clarify that only
+ pending floating tables & figures are cleared.
+ (\newpage): `see @code{\clearpage} above' -> `@pxref{\clearpage}'
+ (Footnotes): Make the exact quotation of Noël Coward, and correct
+ his first name spelling.
+
+2015-10-11 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Multiple references to a footnote): Add this node.
+ Adjust related nodes.
+
+2015-10-11 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Footnotes of footnotes): Add this node.
+
+2015-10-10 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\makelabels): Add more on how to customize
+ label sizes, etc.
+
+2015-10-09 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Environments): Merge menu entries for nodes
+ quote & quotations after Jim's edits of 2015-09-28
+ (quotation and quote): Merge nodes quote & quotations after Jim's
+ edits of 2015-09-28
+ (tabbing): Translate this node.
+
+2015-10-09 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Footnotes in a section heading): Add node,
+ provide examples.
+
+2015-10-08 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\makelabels): @var{...}-ify argument 'to addess',
+ and @code{...}-ify class name.
+ (\signature): Improve wording. Remove spurious space before '\\'
+ in the \signature example with picture.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Low-level font commands): typo.
+ (\item): typo.
+ (Letters): Translate from Jim's updates.
+ (Letters): Remove menu entries for \startbreaks & stopbreaks, as
+ per Jim's update.
+ (\makelabels): Translate from Jim's updates and improve text
+ significantly.
+ (\name): Translate this node.
+ (\opening): Translate this node.
+ (\ps): Add synopsis, as per Jim's update.
+ (\signature): Translate this node.
+ (\startbreaks, \stopbreaks): Remove nodes \startbreaks &
+ stopbreaks, as per Jim's update.
+ (\telephone): Take into account Jim's updates.
+
+2015-10-04 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Footnotes in a table): Provide examples.
+ Fold minipage discussion into opening.
+
+2015-10-03 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Footnotes, Footnotes in a table): Provide examples.
+ This is a confusing topic.
+
+2015-09-29 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Footnotes): Provide examples.
+
+2015-09-28 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\quotation and \quote): Combine the two,
+ contrast them, provide example.
+
+2015-09-27 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Letters): \opening is required.
+
+2015-09-26 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\makelabel): Reword, add examples. Omit \stopbreaks
+ and \startbreaks as those are not user-directed commands.
+
+2015-09-25 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\signature): Reword, add examples.
+
+2015-09-23 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Letters \address, \closing, \location): Add examples.
+ The intent of \location is hard to understand; for Willy the Mailboy?
+
+2015-09-23 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Letters): Add synopsis, examples.
+
+2015-09-22 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (filecontents): Add Jim's 2015-09-18 (r439) edits.
+ (\addvspace): Add Jim's 2015-09-13 (r432) edits.
+ (\vspace): Translate this node.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (filecontents): Use `write' instead of `create' also in concept index. Improve wording
+
+
+ * latex2e{,-es,-fr}.texi: Improve Emacs cookie to force LF eol
+
+ * latex2e{,-es,-fr}.{dbk,html,info,txt,xml}: Set svn property svn:eol-style to LF
+
+ * latex2e-{es,fr}.{dbk,html,info,txt,xml}: Compile these files
+ again, because of eol problem.
+
+2015-09-21 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e-{es,fr}.{dbk,dvi,html,info,pdf,txt,xml}: Compile these files
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\addvspace): typo.
+
+2015-09-18 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (filecontents): Corrections suggested by JB.
+
+2015-09-17 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * ChangeLog: Correct typo on Jim's surname Hefferson->Hefferon.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Subscripts & superscripts): typo sub->super. Improve wording.
+ (\hrulefill \dotfill): Use `@dmn{...}' rather than
+ `@tie{}...' for the spacing to unit.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\newline): Translate this node.
+ (figure): place \label after caption, following Jim's 2015-09-11
+ change.
+ (Subscripts & superscripts): translate Jim's 2015-09-15 update.
+ (\hrulefill \dotfill) Merge nodes \hrulefill and \dotfill, and
+ take Jim's 2015-09-13 additions
+
+2015-09-15 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Subscripts & superscripts): Add examples.
+
+2015-09-15 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Starting and ending): Add @cindex environment
+ (Spaces, \(SPACE) and \@@, \(SPACE) after CS): Move text how to
+ control space gobbling after a control sequence from node
+ `\(SPACE) and \@@' to a new node `\(SPACE) after CS', and add more
+ tricks to do that.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Starting and ending)
+ (Spaces, \(SPACE) and \@@, \(SPACE) after CS)(Spaces): Same
+ changes as for latex2e.texi.
+ (Overview): add @: after some abbrev ending periods.
+ (Font styles): Follow Karl's changes of
+ 2015-04-26, "deux choses très différentes"->"deux constructions
+ sans relation l'une avec l'autre"
+ (Starting and ending): Follows Karl's change of 2015-04-26
+ (\- (hyphenation)): Translate this node.
+ (\noindent): Follow Jim's changes of 2015-09-14: example + how to
+ suppress indentation in a whole document.
+ (Spaces, \@@, \(SPACE)): rename node \AT->\@@ following Karl's
+ change of 2015-05-05, and \SPACE->(SPACE) following Jim's change
+ of 2015-09-08.
+ (\frenchspacing) Add new nodes, following Jim's edits of 2015-09-12.
+ (beamer template, book template): Follow Karl's changes of
+ 2015-04-26: transpose to make alphabetical.
+ (beamer template, tugboat template, beamer template): Translate
+ these nodes.
+ (Command line): Follow Karl's changes of 2015-04-26: xref TeX
+ engines, --help, etc.
+ (eqnarray): Follows Karl's change 2015-04-26 `much
+ like'->`similar', plus typo.
+
+
+2015-09-14 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\noindent): Add example.
+
+2015-09-14 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Spacing in math mode): Add missing @findex entries
+ for \thickspace, \medspace & \thinspace. Typo tht->that.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Units of length, Spacing in math mode):
+ Translate these nodes, move the math spacing to the `Spacing in
+ math mode' node, following the Jim's 2015-09-06 change.
+
+2015-09-13 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\hrulefill \dotfill): Add example, merge the
+ two nodes.
+
+2015-09-13 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\addvspace): Add explanation, and link to
+ Lengths.
+
+2015-09-12 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\vspace, \vfill): Add wording and example to
+ each node.
+
+2015-09-12 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\frenchspacing): Move node to Spacing.
+
+2015-09-12 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\frenchspacing): Add this node.
+
+2015-09-11 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newline): Add description of what happens in
+ a table. Add example.
+
+2015-09-11 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\\): Split \\ from \\*. Mention
+ \newline. Add example.
+
+2015-09-09 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\(SPACE) and \@): Combine the two nodes. Include
+ description of \@ both before and after a period.
+
+2015-09-08 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\(SPACE)): Extend explanation. Change name to
+ include the parens (possible a newbie would type \SPACE?)
+
+2015-09-07 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Lengths, \hspace): Give a definition of rigid
+ and rubber lengths, and of infinite stretchability. Adjust
+ definition of \hspace to not use square braces as metacharacter.
+
+2015-09-06 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Spacing in math mode): Move math mode lengths
+ to here and add whether they work also in text mode.
+
+2015-09-04 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Add macroes BES & BESU to support compilation of math symbols with texi2pdf.
+ (Symbolic footnotes): Complete translation of this node
+ (Making paragraphs): typo ligne->lignes.
+ (Marginal notes): Translate this node.
+ (Math formulas): Translate this node.
+ (Subscripts & superscripts): Translate this node.
+ (Math symbols): Initiate translation of this node (not yet complete...).
+ (Spacing in math mode): Translate section title.
+ (\thispagestyle): Translate this node.
+ (Spaces): typo, change gender of word `espace' (feminine instead
+ of masculine as far as spacing is concerned).
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Add macroes BES & BESU to support compilation of math symbols with texi2pdf.
+ (Math symbols): typo succceeds-> succeeds, (symbols \succ & \succeq).
+ (Marginal notes): Add reference to Document class options as far
+ as one-sided, two-sided and two-column layouts are concerned.
+ (Subscripts & superscripts): Use @var{...} instead of @i{...} for argument `exp'.
+ (Math symbols): Use macros BES and BESU in roder to fix broken texi2pdf compilation.
+ (Math symbols): typo operatior->operator (symbols \cap, \circ, \cup, \bigodot, \oplus, \otimes
+ (Math symbols): symbol \varsigma : variant \pi->\sigma ; symbol \vartheta : variant \pi->\vartheta.
+ (\makebox): reword is specified->can be overriden, because width is optional.
+ (\makebox): @code{...}-ify environment name picture.
+
+2015-08-29 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\linethickness): Typo.
+ (\thicklines, \thinlines, \shortstack, \/, \hrulefill)
+ (\bigskip \medskip \smallskip, tabular, Lengths, \dotfill, \addvspace): Translate this node.
+ (table): Typo.
+ (Units of length): Add this node from Jim's 2015-08-26 edits.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Lengths): Make `length' a @dfn{...} rather than a @code{...}.
+ (Units of length): add concept index entries `ex' and `m-width'
+ (\addvspace): @var{...}-ify word `length'.
+
+
+2015-08-27 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Units of length): Use `@dmn{...}' rather than
+ `@tie{}...' in new node added by Jim.
+
+2015-08-26 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Units of length): Add new node in Lengths.
+
+2015-08-25 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (tabular): typo : horozontal->horizontal.
+
+2015-08-24 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (picture): (width,height)(x offset,y offset)->(@var{width},@var{height})(@var{xoffset},@var{yoffset})
+ (picture): make position a concept index entry, and @dfn{...}-ize it.
+ (picture): Improve wording as far as the two arguments of picture environment are concerned.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (minipage): complete translation of this node.
+ (picture): Translate this node.
+ (\framebox (picture)): @var{width}->@var{largeur}
+
+2015-08-23 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (file preamble): Add comment about glossary
+ resources useful for French translation
+ (file preamble) improve wording.
+ (Layout): add Float menu entry, as per Jim Hefferon's 2015-08-22 and 2015-08-21 changes.
+ (Floats, figure, table) Translate Jim Hefferon's 2015-08-22 and
+ 2015-08-21 changes to French.
+ (\centering): typo
+ (flushleft, \raggedright): Improve wording.
+ (flushright, \raggedleft): Translate these nodes.
+ (quotation, Making paragraphs): ligne blanche->ligne à blanc
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Floats): typo insert comma.
+ (Floats): figure->float
+ (Floats): make "float page" a concept index entry, and @dfn{...} it.
+ (Floats): restrict the word "specifier" to one letter element of
+ parameter, use word "argument" for the full string of specifiers.
+ (Floats): typo acceptible->acceptable
+ (figure): text->title, improve @var name
+ (flushright): string->control sequence
+ (table): make title a @var, and add missing optional loftitle argument.
+
+2015-08-22 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Floats): Change some wording, move description of
+ how float body is typeset to figure and table nodes.
+
+2015-08-22 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (various): Corrected Subversion mistake overwriting
+ changes in other spots.
+
+2015-08-21 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Floats, figure, table): Break the float material
+ common out to a separate node. Add descriptions of how to deal
+ with issues. Shrink the figure and table nodes by the common
+ material.
+
+2015-08-20 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Output files, @TeX{} engines, \line)
+ (Glossaries): Remove @acronym on Karl's request
+ (\raggedright): Translate this node to French.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Output files, @TeX{} engines): Remove @acronym on Karl's request
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (Glosarios): Remove @acronym on Karl's request
+
+2015-08-19 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\parbox): reword.
+ (flushleft): missing period.
+
+ * Makefile (xref_suffixes): no auxs or tocs.
+
+2015-08-19 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (flushleft): string->control sequence.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (flushleft): Translate this node. Reword string->control sequence.
+
+ * Makefile (xref_suffixes): New variable usable for realclean target doing a *real* clean.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\oval): Reword 'portion' to 'half' and also add
+ optional arguments 'tr', 'br', 'bl' and 'tl'.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Top, Starting and ending): Starting &
+ ending->Starting and ending, node renaming.
+ (Overview): typo in chapter title
+ (Overview): Translates 2015-08-14/18 changes by Jim Hefferon,
+ this implies making node 'Starting and ending' a subnode of node
+ 'Top', and creating new nodes 'Output files', '@TeX{} engines' and
+ '@LaTeX{} command syntax'
+ (Environment, Declaration): new nodes, sbubnodes of '@LaTeX{}
+ command syntax', translated from 2015-08-14 change by Jim
+ Hefferon.
+ (description, enumerate): Translate 2015-08-17 changes by Jim
+ Hefferon.
+ (list, \item): Translate 2015-08-13 changes by Jim Hefferon: add
+ \item node, and subordiante it to list node.
+ (\multiput): Finalize translation of this node.
+ (\oval): Translate this node, with rewording portion->half. Add
+ also optional arguments 'tr', 'br', 'bl' and 'tl'.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Overview): file-> input file, for sake of clarity.
+ (Overview): Programs that implementation @LaTeX{}->Programs that
+ can compile @LaTeX{} source.
+ (Output files, @TeX{} engines): Use @acronym{...} for DVI and PDF.
+ (@TeX{} engines): command->system command, for sake of clarity.
+ (@LaTeX{} command syntax): command->command names, for sake of clarity.
+
+2015-08-18 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (eqnarray, equation): Add more description. Add
+ example to eqnarray. Add note about amsmath to equation.
+
+2015-08-17 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (enumerate): Add more description. Combine best
+ parts of this and description description.
+
+2015-08-17 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (description): Add error message if \item is
+ left out.
+
+2015-08-14 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Environment, Declaration): Create these two nodes
+ subordinate to LaTeX command syntax. Refer node item to LaTeX
+ command syntax.
+
+2015-08-13 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (list, \item): Add node for this command, subordinate to
+ the list node.
+
+2015-08-13 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (array): Fix description of optional position
+ argument for array.
+
+2015-08-12 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (displaymath): Integral wrong. Couple of other
+ typos.
+
+2015-08-11 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (document): Add nodes for \AtBeginDocument and
+ \AtEndDocument.
+
+2015-08-11 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (displaymath): Add detail and an example. Include
+ note on why $$ is not recommended.
+
+2015-08-09 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (description): Add detail and an example.
+
+2015-08-08 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (center, \centering): Add detail, including
+ distinguishing the two and examples.
+
+2015-08-05 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\indent): remove "width of" concering concerning
+ \parindent length.
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (Acentos): Change "sobre" to "debajo de" for \b
+ (\indent): change "al ancho de la longitud" to "la longitud"
+ concerning \parindent length.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Tables of contents): Translation of this node.
+ (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Boxes): Typoes.
+
+2015-08-03 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (array): Adjust wording.
+
+2015-08-02 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (array): Refer to tabular for details. Add suggestion
+ to use amsmath to get fences, and change example to make
+ justification vaguely defensible.
+
+2015-08-02 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (multicolumn): Adjust description of how intercolumn
+ material is placed. I shall get this right eventually, I suppose.
+
+2015-08-01 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (multicolumn, vline, cline, hline): Adjust
+ wording.
+
+2015-07-31 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (vline, cline, hline): Add examples. Also describe
+ how columns are counted.
+
+2015-07-30 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Correct menu item French translation for "Making paragraphs"
+ (itemize): typo, remove left-over English word "dash"
+ (Making paragraphs): typoes.
+ (\indent, \noindent, \parskip, \parbox): Translate to French these nodes.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): Correct -- for --- for en-dash
+
+2015-07-29 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (Acentos): Make references between \underbar and \b.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Accents): Make references between \underbar and \b.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Accents, quote): Translate these nodes.
+ (Accents): Make references between \underbar and \b.
+
+2015-07-22 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (tabular, multicolumn): Add more content,
+ and examples.
+
+2015-07-22 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Page layout parameters): Add marginal notes
+ parameters; correct some default values and adjust wording
+ for uniformity.
+
+2015-07-15 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Page layout parameters): Add paperheight
+ and paperwidth; also list those sizes in Document class options.
+
+2015-07-13 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Done all symbols.
+
+2015-07-11 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Through the S's.
+
+2015-07-10 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Through the P's.
+
+2015-07-09 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Into the P's. Move
+ the unicode glyph to the start of each entry to make
+ easier scanning for the desired symbol.
+
+2015-07-08 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.belaiche@gmail.com>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking, \savebox): Translation to French.
+ (Sectioning): Typo.
+
+2015-07-08 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Through the N's.
+
+2015-07-07 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Through the M's.
+
+2015-07-06 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): More L's.
+
+2015-07-05 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Unicode code points into L's.
+
+2015-07-03 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Unicode code points through G.
+
+2015-07-02 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Unicode code points through D.
+
+2015-07-02 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Unicode code points through B.
+
+2015-07-01 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Add unicode code points to a few;
+ experiment with relevant info.
+
+2015-06-23 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\flushbottom, \raggedbottom): Expand definition.
+ Change word from `declaration' to `command'.
+
+2015-06-22 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\twocolumn): Expand definition of the two-column
+ parameters.
+
+2015-06-21 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\twocolumn): Expand definition of the double
+ float parameters.
+
+202015-06-20 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\twocolumn): Add example.
+
+2015-06-20 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\value, \newlength): wording.
+
+2015-06-19 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Document class options): mention the geometry package.
+ (@TeX{} engines) <xelatex>: mention xdv files.
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand): reorder examples; still in process.
+
+2015-06-18 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newsavebox): wording.
+
+2015-06-17 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newfont): put obsolete note earlier.
+ (\newtheorem): wording.
+
+2015-06-16 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Low-level font commands): reformat the tables.
+
+2015-06-11 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Low-level font commands): More about options.
+
+2015-06-11 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Low-level font commands): Add some information about
+ options.
+
+2015-06-09 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Let's consistently have one blank line
+ between the sectioning command and the following index entries,
+ one blank line above @example, and two blank lines above @node.
+ It's a theory ...
+ (\newfont): wording. Typos.
+
+2015-06-09 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newfont): Couple of minor wording changes.
+
+2015-06-06 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newfont): Expand definition. Add example.
+ Warn that it is obsolete.
+
+2015-06-06 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newtheorem): Expand definition. Add examples
+ covering both optional arguments.
+
+2015-06-05 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newsavebox): Expand definition.
+
+2015-06-04 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Document class options): To a4paper, etc.,
+ add note that pdflatex, xelatex, lualatex do not set physical
+ page size.
+
+2015-06-03 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\value): Expand description, put in warning about
+ \protect, add examples.
+
+2015-06-02 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\protect): Expand description, add examples.
+
+2015-05-30 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newlength): Add details, including that the name
+ must begin with a backslash.
+
+2015-05-29 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\providecommand): Add node.
+
+2015-05-28 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Realized environments
+ do delimit scope.
+
+2015-05-27 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Copy recent edits to
+ \newcommand over to \newenvironment; make needed adjustments.
+
+2015-05-26 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Add two fine points
+ about \newcommand.
+
+2015-05-25 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * Makefile (texi2html_top): New variable.
+ (texi2html): use it.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\label),
+ (Font styles),
+ (\newcounter, \stepcounter, \refstepcounter),
+ (\newcommand & \renewcommand):
+ tweak new and old examples and text.
+ (Math formulas): Consistently use "xx" with "not in plain".
+
+2015-05-25 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Add examples. Drop
+ square brackets around * since square brackets are significant.
+
+2015-05-22 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\label): Add example of \label picking up
+ numbering in two places.
+
+2015-05-19 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Font styles): Add that \mathxx commands do not
+ nest. Move them to make a different, third, area. Break \emph out of
+ non-semantic command list.
+
+2015-05-17 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (many nodes): Corrections to typos reported by
+ Justin Gassner.
+
+2015-05-16 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcounter, \stepcounter, \refstepcounter): Expand
+ definitions, particularly of the definition of one counter numbered
+ within the other.
+
+2015-05-15 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\usecounter): Expand definition; give example.
+
+2015-05-13 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Counters): reword to clarify backslash.
+
+2015-05-12 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (@settitle): unofficial.
+ (About this document): reword a bit.
+ (UPDATED): now it's May.
+ More indexing.
+
+ * Makefile (check-dw): new target.
+ * latex2e.texi: remove doubled words.
+
+ * Makefile (txt_files): add aspell.en.pws.
+ (check-en): try spell-en first.
+
+2015-05-08 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Non-English characters): tersely define \dj \DJ
+ and \ng \NG (without typesetting).
+ * Makefile (spell): exclude \command names.
+ * aspell.en.pws: new file.
+
+2015-05-08 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+ and Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (LaTeX command syntax): (Re-)include description of
+ command syntax, inspired by alt-latex-info.
+
+2015-05-08 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * Makefile (en, es, fr, spell, svr, svd): new targets.
+ (all): rework target.
+ (all_suffixes, txt_files): new vars.
+
+2015-05-07 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: some typos.
+ * latex2e-es.texi: can't use \sup with current texinfo.tex.
+ * Makefile: simplify to be maintainable at the cost of some
+ redundancy (sorry, Vincent).
+
+2015-05-06 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol):
+ use @U to show the footnote symbols.
+
+2015-05-05 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: More indexing. Always ", etc.". Use of @dmn.
+ (Modes): re-paragraph the descriptions.
+ (\@@): Rename from \AT, now that Texinfo can handle @ in node names.
+
+2015-04-26 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Starting and ending): rename from
+ Starting & ending. Leave anchor behind.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Starting & ending): make a section.
+ Notes for a new syntax section.
+ More on the example document.
+ From Jim, 22 Apr 2015 15:06:24 +0000.
+ (beamer template, book template): transpose to make alphabetical.
+ (Command line): xref TeX engines, --help, etc.
+
+2015-04-23 Jim Hefferon <jhefferon@smcvt.edu>
+ and Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Output files, TeX engines): new nodes.
+ Jim's original msg, 20 Apr 2015 12:42:23.
+ (Independently, eliminate some "very"s throughout.)
+
+2015-04-20 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (About this document, Overview): more clearly
+ separate these nodes. From Jim, 14 Apr 2015 19:57:21.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Document classes): Add descriptions of built-in
+ LaTeX classes. From Jim, 12 Apr 2015 22:10:47.
+
+2015-04-10 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Font styles): mention \nocorr and \nocorrlist.
+ (\/): mention automatic insertion from \textit and \itshape, etc.
+ From Jim, 10 Apr 2015 00:13:39.
+
+2015-04-08 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\bigskip \medskip \smallskip): add defaults,
+ other tweaks. From Jim Hefferon, 7 Apr 2015 23:45:50.
+
+2015-04-07 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: start update for 2015.
+ Index pict2e (was curve2e) and other packages.
+ (\put): format synopsis like others, etc.
+ (\newcounter): metavar name supercounter.
+
+2015-02-22 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * Makefile (texi2html): use -c TOP_NODE_UP_URL
+ (to be in next Texinfo release).
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math functions): avoid \sup, since @sup
+ is now a Texinfo command (for the next release).
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol):
+ \Roman for second @item. Typo reported by Jose Atria.
+
+2014-11-19 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Progress translation to French
+
+ * Makefile: add targets check-fr, check-en & check-es.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (node figure): typo occuped->occupied.
+ (node filecontents): Make it clear that it is about
+ files not documents.
+
+2014-10-20 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * Makefile: Add target `check' to compile each manual once with tex
+ and once with makeinfo. This is faster than using target `all'.
+
+2014-10-19 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\setcounter): replace @var{\counter} by @var{counter}
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (\setcounter): Same change as latex2e.texi
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (\setcounter): Same change as latex2e.texi.
+ Progress Translation to French.
+
+2014-10-17 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (\pagenumbering): use @backslashchar{} within
+ @vincentb in order to compile with tex.
+
+2014-10-17 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): fix explanation of
+ optarg; its default value is never "def", that was a misreading
+ of latex209.dtx. Rename to optargval. From Vincent.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\alph): avoid UTF-8 or @document*, sorry.
+ (\thinspace): this is not the place to use @dmn.
+ (figure) <bottomnumber, etc.>: these are counters not control
+ sequences, so no \.
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (\put): @vincentb, not @vincenb.
+
+2014-09-25 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\put): Make coordinates within @var{...} and add
+ explicit reference to them in the text.
+ (\usebox): typo add missing closing curly bracket
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (\put): Same as latex2e.texi (except that
+ \usebox node was ok).
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (nodes \put, \usebox): Same as
+ latex2e.texi. Progress translation to French.
+
+2014-09-19 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (document header): Set @documentencoding and
+ @documentlanguage.
+ (document footer): Add Emacs file local variable to specify
+ ispell dictionary.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\pagenumbering): Clarify that \pagenumber
+ also resets page number to 1.
+ (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol):
+ add UTF-8 symbols next to symbol names for \fnsymbol.
+ (\newcounter): rename @var{cnt} ->
+ @var{countername}, and @var{countername} -> @var{super}, and make
+ it explicit in the text that @var{super} is the name of a counter.
+ (\newlength): @code{length} command -> @dfn{length} command.
+ (document footer): Add Emacs file local variable to specify
+ encoding.
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: Similar changes as latex2e.texi.
+ (\newlength): Also translate length to longitud, as this is
+ not a reserved word, we just mean an instruction to manage one
+ length.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Similar changes as latex2e.texi. Progress
+ translation to French.
+
+2014-09-10 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\thinspace): em -> @dmn{em}.
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (\thinspace): same as latex2e.texi.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Progress translation to French.
+
+2014-09-08 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Progress translation to French.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (node Modes): replace `-' by `---', and `The box
+ make by' by `The box made by'.
+ (node Math miscellany): correct typo `for examp*l*e'.
+
+2014-08-30 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (\vector): correct bug involved by renaming
+ y-slop/x-slop to declivex/declivey --- as I used @vincentb macro
+ encapsulation to mark my change, it made \ of \vector no longer a
+ "other" character.
+
+2014-08-29 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * Makefile: add definition of variable all, for clean to work. Add
+ squeaky as a synonym of realclean. Add in comment generic line for
+ other language being zipped to to dist.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Progression traduction
+
+ * latex2e.texi (node Page layout parameters): correct typo clase -> classes
+ (node array): `in that row' -> `in each row of that column
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (node array): `el número de elementos y deben
+ tener el formato' -> `cual formato debe tener cada linea en esta
+ columna'
+
+
+2014-08-24 Vincent Belaïche <vincentb1@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (node Boxes): add @code{...} encapsulation.
+ (\dashbox): replace @code{...} by @var{...} for \dashbox
+ parameters in last sentence. (nodes \line & Glossaries) add
+ @acronym{...} around CTAN.
+ (\makebox of picture): use @example environment for the
+ synopsis, and @var{...} for the parameters.
+ (\vector): rename x-slope, and x both to xslope, respectively
+ for y-slope and y, and use consistently @var{...} encapsulation.
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (node Cajas): same as latex2e.texi.
+ (\dashbox): same as latex2e.texi. Rename parameter
+ @var{dlargo} to @var{glargo}, with 'g' for guión (aka
+ dash).
+ (nodes \line & Glossarios): same as latex2e.texi.
+ (\makebox of picture): same as latex2e.texi.
+ (\vector): same as latex2e.texi.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi (node Boxes): same as latex2e.texi.
+ (\dashbox): same as latex2e.texi.
+ (nodes \line & Glossaries): same as latex2e.texi.
+ (\makebox of picture): same as latex2e.texi.
+ (\vector): same as latex2e.texi.
+ Progress further translation to French.
+
+2014-08-17 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.b.1@hotmail.fr>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (node Layout) Add @code{...} around \headheight
+ and \footskip in `Page layout parameters' menu entry
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: Same change as in latex2e.texi
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Same change as in latex2e.texi. Continue
+ progressing translation to French.
+
+2014-08-11 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.b.1@hotmail.fr>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Add @code{...} encapsulation in some places to
+ class names letter, slides, book, report, article, and to
+ environement theorem.
+ (Document class options) Add missing closing bracket.
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: Same changes as for latex2e.texi.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Same changes as for latex2e.texi. Progress
+ translation to French.
+
+
+2014-08-10 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.b.1@hotmail.fr>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: (Overview) change wording about case sensitivity.
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: (Descripción) same change change as for latex2e.texi about case sensitivity.
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: (Overview) same change change as for
+ latex2e.texi about case sensitivity. (Whole document) Put in place
+ same structure as for original and progress translation.
+
+2014-08-01 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.b.1@hotmail.fr>
+
+ * latex2e-fr.texi: Creation --- still very approximate & preliminary...
+
+ * Makefile: Make it generic
+
+2014-07-20 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.b.1@hotmail.fr>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\LaTeXe),
+ * latex2e-es.texi (\LaTeXe): document LaTeX2e log.
+
+2014-05-19 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * May 2014 release for TeX Live 2014.
+
+2014-02-28 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (filecontents): tweak language.
+ (Font styles): mention my disagreement with the oft-stated
+ notion that \tt, et al., are "obsolete".
+
+2014-02-27 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.b.1@hotmail.fr>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (filecontents): Clarify that LaTeX2e default
+ filecontents environment DOES NOT overwrite existing files, you
+ need filecontents package for that.
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (filecontents): Align on the English version.
+
+2014-02-26 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.b.1@hotmail.fr>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: Align Spanish translation with changes made by
+ Karl on 2014-02-23, and also some changes done before that.
+
+2014-02-25 Vincent Belaïche <vincent.b.1@hotmail.fr>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Correct typo, rm duplicate 2014 in copyright notice.
+
+2014-02-23 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (@title): put the "unofficial" label here,
+ not just the subtitle.
+ (Typefaces): Rename to "Fonts", since the chapter is about both,
+ and the latter is far more commonly used. Also fix truncated
+ sentence about italic correction.
+
+2014-02-02 Vincent Belaiche <vincent.b.1@hotmail.fr>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (\includeonly, \input): correct @code for
+ @section titles, plus \@fnsymbol not \fnsymbol.
+ http://gna.org/bugs/?21582
+
+2014-01-31 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi (filecontents): new node from
+ Vincent Belaiche. http://gna.org/bugs/?21569
+ * latex2e.texi: likewise, plus edits.
+
+2013-05-13 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Font styles): mention \oldstylenums.
+ (picture): \unitlength default is 1pt.
+
+2013-04-25 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): mention * form;
+ try to clarify optional arg defaults.
+ (beamer template): link to one of the many web pages about this.
+ (\AT): make example output better match input.
+
+2013-04-25 Mandar Mitra <mandar.mitra@gmail.com>
+
+ * ltx-help.el (latex-help): handle try-completion returning a
+ string for a partial match, vs. t for exact match.
+
+2013-04-25 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * ltx-help.el: untabify, doc fixes.
+
+2012-05-10 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * May 2012 release for TeX Live 2012.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (About this document): mention a few other docs.
+ (eqnarray): don't use it; reference Madsen article
+ (figure): ! float specifier, \*number parameters.
+ (Math accents): mention \mathring.
+
+2012-04-25 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: Index \extracolsep, template list at
+ http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates, other template updates,
+ etc.
+
+2011-05-12 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * May 2011 release for TeX Live 2011.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): \texttwelveudash is a 2/3 em-dash,
+ and remove spurious duplicate \textordfeminine entry.
+ Report from Eric Jablow, 12 Apr 2011 05:17:47.
+
+2011-05-05 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Document templates): Add link to
+ http://www.howtotex.com/templates.
+
+2011-05-03 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Overview): mention other engines, etc.
+ (About this document): new node, for bug address, home page, etc.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Page layout parameters): discuss \linewidth
+ vs. \columnwidth vs. \textwidth vs. \hsize in more detail.
+
+2010-09-03 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e-es.texi: translation to Spanish, from Nacho Pacheco,
+ 27 Aug 2010 19:15:47.
+ * Makefile: also build the Spanish.
+
+2010-09-03 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: update TUGboat sample.
+
+ * Makefile (%.html): use new perl makeinfo (texi2html), so no need
+ for g_t kludge.
+
+2010-07-12 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * July 2010 release for TL 2010.
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): add many from ltoutenc.
+
+2009-12-25 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Symbolic footnotes): new section.
+
+2009-11-01 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Accents): add \underbar, although it isn't an accent.
+ (Math miscellany): better distinguish \underline and \underbar.
+
+2009-10-27 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Line breaking, Page breaking): move to earlier,
+ matching top-level @menu.
+
+2009-09-07 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * September 2009 release for TL 2009.
+
+2009-04-23 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Indexes): add considerably more info.
+
+2008-06-12 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * 2.0 release for ctan.org/get/doc/latex-info, and TeX Live 2008.
+
+2007-11-05 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \put \raggedbottom
+
+2007-11-04 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \ps \psi \Psi \pushtabs
+
+2007-11-03 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \protect
+
+2007-10-29 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (math): \Pr \prec \preceq \prime \prod \propto.
+
+2007-10-28 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): \poptabs \pounds.
+
+2007-10-25 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \perp \phi \pi \Pi \pm \pmod
+
+2007-10-24 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \part \partial
+
+2007-10-23 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \parskip
+
+2007-10-22 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \parsep
+
+2007-10-21 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \parindent
+
+2007-10-20 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \parbox
+
+2007-10-17 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \paragraph \parallel
+
+2007-10-16 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \pagestyle
+
+2007-10-15 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \pagenumberingstyle \pageref
+
+2007-10-11 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \oplus \oslash \otimes
+
+2007-10-10 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \onecolumn \opening
+
+2007-10-08 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \dot \oe \OE \oint \omega \Omega \ominus
+
+2007-10-07 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\oddsidemargin)
+
+2007-10-06 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \obeycr, \restorecr; split page/line breaking into
+ separate chapters.
+
+2007-10-05 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \not \notin \nu \nwarrow \o \O
+
+2007-10-04 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\normalmarginpar \normalsize)
+
+2007-10-03 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \nopagebreak
+
+2007-06-27 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \flat \flushbottom
+
+2007-06-26 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \evensidemargin \exists \exp \fbox \fboxrule
+ \fboxsep
+
+2007-06-25 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \epsilon \equiv \eta
+
+2007-06-24 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \em \emptyset \encl
+
+2007-06-23 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \doublerulesep \downarrow \Downarrow \ell
+
+2007-06-22 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \dot \doteq \dotfill
+
+2007-06-21 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \displaystyle
+
+2007-06-20 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \deg \delta \Delta \det \diamond \Diamong
+ \diamondsuit \dim \div
+
+2007-06-19 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \ddag \ddagger \ddot
+
+2007-06-18 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \dblfloatpagefraction \dblfloatsep
+ \dbltextfloatsep \dbltopfraction
+
+2007-06-17 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \day \month \year; put xref chapter earlier.
+
+2007-06-16 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \dashbox \dashv \date
+
+2007-06-15 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \d \dag \dagger
+
+2007-06-14 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \cos \cosh \cot \coth \cup
+
+2007-06-13 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \cong \coprod \copyright
+
+2007-06-12 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \columnsep \columnseprule \columnwidth
+
+2007-06-11 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \cline \closing \clubsuit
+
+2007-06-03 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \chi \circ \circle[*]
+
+2007-06-01 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \centering \chapter \check
+
+2007-05-31 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \caption \cc \cdot \cdots
+
+2007-05-30 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \cal \cap
+
+2007-05-24 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \bottomfraction, \bowtie, \Box, \breve, \bullet, \c.
+
+2007-05-23 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \boldmath, \bot.
+
+2007-05-22 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\bigskip, \bmod)
+
+2007-05-21 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Math Symbols): \big operators
+
+2007-05-19 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Using BibTeX): \bibliography, \bibliographystyle
+
+2007-05-18 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\bf, \bibitem)
+
+2007-05-17 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (verse environment, \beta)
+
+2007-05-15 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (titlepage, verbatim): environments.
+ (\verb).
+
+2007-05-14 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (theorem): environment.
+
+2007-05-12 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (tabbing): environment.
+
+2007-04-12 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\AT): new node for \@.
+
+2007-04-11 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (tabbing): \a' \a` \a= for accents.
+
+2007-04-10 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (Accents): \~ for tilde accent.
+
+2007-04-09 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \|
+
+2007-04-06 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \\ in its various contexts
+
+2007-04-02 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: macron accent
+ * latex2e.texi (Accents): \= for macron.
+
+2007-04-01 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: \: \; \<
+
+2007-03-30 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: through \.
+
+2007-03-28 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: remove unneeded @page, fix over/underfull boxes, etc.
+
+2007-03-27 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi: remove node pointers
+ * latex2e.texi: \*: discretionary multiplication.
+
+2007-03-21 Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
+
+ * latex2e.texi (\SPACE): new node.
+
+ * latex2e.texi: remove comments, single space after @node for ease
+ of searching.
+
+(This ChangeLog file is in the public domain.)
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e50c84652e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+# $Id: Makefile 706 2018-10-13 15:35:22Z jimhefferon $
+# Public domain. Originally written 2006, Karl Berry.
+# Makefile for latexrefman.
+
+en_tex_output = latex2e.dvi latex2e.pdf
+es_tex_output = latex2e-es.dvi latex2e-es.pdf
+fr_tex_output = latex2e-fr.dvi latex2e-fr.pdf
+#
+xref_suffixes := ky cp vr fn cp pg tp
+xref_suffixes := $(xref_suffixes) $(addsuffix s,$(xref_suffixes))
+xref_suffixes := aux log toc $(xref_suffixes)
+mi_suffixes = dbk html info txt xml
+en_mi_output = $(addprefix latex2e., $(mi_suffixes))
+es_mi_output = $(addprefix latex2e-es., $(mi_suffixes))
+fr_mi_output = $(addprefix latex2e-fr., $(mi_suffixes))
+#
+all_suffixes = dvi pdf $(mi_suffixes)
+
+
+# how to build.
+#
+texi2dvi = texi2dvi --batch --tidy --build-dir=$*.t2dvi
+texi2pdf = texi2pdf --batch --tidy --build-dir=$*.t2pdf
+#
+makeinfo = makeinfo
+texi2docbook = $(makeinfo) --docbook
+texi2html = $(makeinfo) --no-split $(htmlopts)
+texi2info = $(makeinfo) --no-split
+texi2txt = $(makeinfo) --plaintext --no-split
+texi2xml = $(makeinfo) --xml
+#
+htmlopts = --html --css-include=latex2e.css $(t2html_top) $(t2html_home) -c WORDS_IN_PAGE=10000
+#
+# Go somewhere useful from Top:
+t2html_top = -c TOP_NODE_UP_URL=http://tug.org/texinfohtml/
+#
+# Put a link in the footer:
+t2html_home = -c PRE_BODY_CLOSE="<hr/><div class='referenceinfo'>\
+<a href='https://latexref.xyz/'>\
+<i>Unofficial LaTeX2e reference manual</i></a></div>"
+
+%.pdf: %.texi
+ $(texi2pdf) $<
+%.dvi: %.texi
+ $(texi2dvi) $<
+#
+%.dbk: %.texi
+ $(texi2docbook) -o $@ $<
+%.html: %.texi %.css
+ $(texi2html) $<
+%.info: %.texi
+ $(texi2info) $<
+%.txt: %.texi
+ $(texi2txt) -o $@ $<
+%.xml: %.texi
+ $(texi2xml) $<
+
+
+# targets follow.
+#
+default: check-en
+
+# to test changes, build a subset: html and info (since these formats
+# exercise significantly different code paths), and pdf for tex.
+check_suffixes = html info pdf
+#
+check-en: spell-en $(addprefix latex2e., $(check_suffixes))
+check-es: $(addprefix latex2e-es., $(check_suffixes))
+check-fr: $(addprefix latex2e-fr., $(check_suffixes))
+check: check-en check-es check-fr
+
+# Build per language.
+en: $(en_mi_output) $(en_tex_output)
+es: $(es_mi_output) $(es_tex_output)
+fr: $(fr_mi_output) $(fr_tex_output)
+
+# To build everything in all languages.
+all: en es fr
+
+# Sort of following the GNU sequence of clean targets.
+distclean clean mostlyclean:
+ rm -rf latex2e*.t2* latex2e-help-texinfo-tree*
+
+realclean maintainer-clean: distclean
+ rm -f $(addprefix latex2e*., pdf dvi $(mi_suffixes) $(xref_suffixes))
+
+
+# dist for CTAN. Update NEWS before uploading!
+#
+txt_files = ChangeLog Makefile NEWS README \
+ aspell.en.pws latex2e.css ltx-help.el
+# html_files = index.html mirroring.html writing.html
+figure_files = list.eps list.pdf list.png list.txt
+figure_source_files = asy/list.asy
+distname = latex2e-help-texinfo
+distzip = $(distname).zip
+#
+htmlsplit = $(distname)-tree
+htmlsplitzip = $(htmlsplit).zip
+#
+dist: en es
+ rm -rf $(distname)
+ mkdir $(distname) && cd $(distname) && ln -s ../* .
+ mkdir $(distname)/spanish && cd $(distname)/spanish && ln -s ../../* .
+ rm -f $(distzip)
+ zip -q $(distzip) \
+$(addprefix $(distname)/, $(txt_files) \
+ latex2e.texi common.texi $(en_mi_output) latex2e.pdf) \
+$(addprefix $(distname)/spanish/, $(es_mi_output) latex2e-es.pdf) \
+$(addprefix $(distname)/latex2e-figures/, $(figure_files)) \
+$(addprefix $(distname)/graphics/, README $(figure_source_files))
+ rm -rf $(distname)
+ @ls -l $(distzip); unzip -l $(distzip)
+
+# Get many small .html files
+htmlsplit: en
+ rm -rf $(htmlsplit)
+ mkdir $(htmlsplit) && cd $(htmlsplit) && ln -s ../* .
+ rm -f $(htmlsplitzip)
+ cd $(htmlsplit) && $(makeinfo) $(htmlopts) latex2e.texi
+ cd $(htmlsplit) && zip -q ../$(htmlsplitzip) -r latex2e
+ src/easyurls.py --directory $(htmlsplit)/latex2e --action softlink --lower_case --rewrite_index
+# rm -rf $(htmlsplit)
+# @ls -l $(htmlsplitzip); unzip -l $(htmlsplitzip)
+
+# Right before a commit, delete html files that are gone and and add new ones
+htmlsplitstatus = cd $(htmlsplit)/latex2e && svn status *.html
+commitready: htmlsplit
+ $(htmlsplitstatus) | sed -n 's/^\!//p' | xargs -r svn rm
+ $(htmlsplitstatus) | sed -n 's/^\?//p' | xargs -r svn add
+
+# A hacky spell check target.
+# Remove \commandnames to reduce exception list, but not {args} or
+# [args], since they are often words.
+spell spell-en:
+ sed -e 's/\\[a-zA-Z]*//g' latex2e.texi \
+ | aspell list --mode=texinfo --add-extra-dicts=`pwd`/aspell.en.pws \
+ | sort -f -u
+
+# Check for doubled words.
+# http://www.math.utah.edu/~beebe/software/file-tools.html#dw
+# The first sed expression elides a few @-command lines which cause
+# duplicates; the second expr some text in the middle of lines.
+check-dw:
+ sed -e 's/^@\(item\|anchor\|.index\) .*//' \
+ -e 's/ da da\|{test test}\|[iI][jJ]//g' \
+ latex2e.texi | dw
+
+# Convenience targets to svn revert the generated files,
+# and svn diff the source files.
+svr:
+ svn revert $(addprefix latex2e*., $(all_suffixes))
+ svn status
+svd:
+ svn diff $(txt_files) *.texi
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1db1926a59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+$Id: NEWS 712 2018-10-15 23:08:38Z jimhefferon $
+NEWS for latex2e.texi, aka the latex2e-help-texinfo package.
+Public domain. Originally written 1995, Torsten Martinsen.
+Spanish translation originally from Nacho Pacheco (currently unmaintained).
+French translation originally from Vincent Belaiche.
+
+Changes in October 2018 release:
+
+The main change is that we now offer the manual in a version that
+is split into separate web pages for each section or subsection.
+This new version is more host-friendly. To celebrate we have
+set up a host.
+ https://latexref.xyz
+We still offer the one-page version.
+ http://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html
+So you now have an easy-to-remember way to access the reference.
+
+If you'd like to host a mirror of the manual, whether to have a
+convenient local reference or to offer a service to the community, we've
+included instructions at https://latexref.xyz/dev/mirroring.html.
+
+In addition to the format news, there were many bug fixes and new entries,
+including \smash and \phantom.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Changes in July 2018 release:
+
+We have gone through the two documents latex-info and
+latex2e-reference and checked that any information in those documents
+is in this one.
+
+There have also been other changes, including switching to a single
+unified index, a more uniform entry format, and many more examples and
+error messages. There are a number of entirely new entries such as
+ones on \strut, caligraphic math fonts, \boldmath, and blackboard
+bold. There have also been adjustments to the organization such as
+having separate sections for \part, \chapter, etc., and some
+combinations such as that of \clearpage and \cleardoublepage.
+
+In addition, there were many bug fixes, including greatly shrinking
+the size of one of the graphics.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Changes in April 2018 release:
+
+There is a new chapter on color and a new chapter on graphics
+inclusion (all the commands from grfguide.pdf are now covered),
+there is much greater coverage of the list environment including a
+diagram of the parameters, and a description of the tabbing
+environment.
+
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in Aug 2017 release:
+
+Besides the usual bug fixes, some of the changes in this version
+include coverage of \makeatletter and \makeatother, \@startsection,
+and commands for writing classes and packages, as well as improvements
+in the descriptions of floats, the letter environment, \raisebox,
+\onecolumn and \twocolumn, and many more.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in Apr 2016 release:
+
+Provide first complete French translation --- still not fully aligned
+on the latest revisions of the English version.
+
+Fix \newfont description. Clarify discretionary multiplication and
+\discretionary. Clarify space gobbling after control word. Making
+environment indexing consistent, improve some synopsis syntax, notably
+for optional parameters. Improve naming of Math symbols. Usual bug and
+typo fixes.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in Oct 2015 release:
+
+Many examples added, often using typical constructs.
+Extend many entries to include points frequently asked.
+Show list of math characters using Unicode glyphs.
+Translations not yet part of update; needs to be worked out.
+Thanks to Vincent Belaiche for many contributions.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in May 2015 release:
+
+Usual bug fixes, more indexing, template updates.
+Improve document and LaTeX overview, including general syntax.
+Mention common engines, core classes, output files, italic corrections, pict2e.
+Clarify optional arguments.
+Avoid using plain's \sup, since @sup will be a Texinfo command.
+For HTML, make the Up from Top be http://tug.org/texinfohtml.
+Exception word list for spell checking, and make target for spell
+ checking and doubled words.
+-
+French translation begun (only in sources); Spanish translation updated.
+Thanks to Vincent Belaiche and Jim Hefferon for their many contributions.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in May 2014 release:
+
+Usual bug fixes, template updates.
+Add filecontents description, fnsymbol info, non-obsolescence of \tt et al.,
+ mostly due to Vincent Belaiche.
+Updates to Spanish translation, also from Vincent.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in May 2013 release:
+
+Usual bug fixes, template updates.
+Mention \unitlength default (1pt) and \oldstylenums.
+Fix in ltx-help.el to find correct nodes for environments, etc.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in May 2012 release:
+
+Template updates and references.
+More on floats.
+Mention a few other documents.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in May 2011 release:
+
+Usual bug fixes, additional background info.
+TUGboat sample document updated.
+Discussion of width parameters.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in July 2010 release:
+
+Usual bug fixes. Added a number of control sequences from ltoutenc that
+typeset particular glyphs.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in September 2009 release:
+
+A bit more about figures and indexes, use of @table where appropriate in
+the source, usual array of minor fixes, added references, etc.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in release 2.0:
+
+After discussions with Torsten and Stephen Gilmore, maintainership of
+this document has been handed off to me. See the README for more
+project info.
+
+Dozens of missing commands added; all mathematical symbol commands in
+basic LaTeX are now included. Also a few usage examples, template
+documents, default values, and more. Of course plenty more work could
+be done, contributions welcome.
+
+The Info file is now named latex2e.info, for consistency. ltx-help.el
+updated accordingly.
+
+Derived files generated with the current TeX and Texinfo.
+
+Karl Berry (karl@freefriends.org), June 12 2008
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in release 1.6:
+
+Some minor bug fixes; thanks to Piet van Oostrum and Ralf
+Fassel for those.
+
+The node previously named 'List of Commands' is now named 'Command
+Index' so that the Emacs command Info-index may work. Suggested by Ralf
+Fassel. 'ltx-help.el' has therefore been updated. You _must_ use the
+ltx-help.el included in this release with version 1.6 of latex2e.texi.
+A bug has also been fixed in ltx-help.el; thanks to Kurt Hornik for
+this.
+
+As always, bug reports and comments are welcome.
+
+Torsten Martinsen, April 24 1996
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in release 1.3:
+
+A selection of low-level NFSS2 commands added.
+A short description of how to use BibTeX.
+Concept index cleaned up.
+Function index should be complete now.
+Better formatting.
+Description of recommended naming conventions for labels.
+Several minor omissions and errors fixed.
+
+Torsten Martinsen, March 13th 1995
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in release 1.4:
+
+NOTE: The name of the generated Info file is now `latex' and not `latex2e'.
+More commands added to function index (ahem).
+Index generally improved.
+A few omissions fixed.
+
+Torsten Martinsen, April 5th 1995
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Changes in release 1.5:
+
+All menu items now have one-line descriptions.
+Major cleanup of next/previous links.
+Some other minor cleanups.
+NOTE that my mail address has changed.
+Emacs Lisp file 'ltx-help.el' for use with AUC TeX included.
+
+Torsten Martinsen, April 9 1996
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/README b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..71c25461d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/README
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+$Id: README 712 2018-10-15 23:08:38Z jimhefferon $
+README for latex2e.texi, aka the latex2e-help-texinfo package.
+Public domain. This README file originally written 2008, Karl Berry.
+
+This project is an attempt to write a reference manual for core LaTeX.
+It is unofficial and the LaTeX Project members have not reviewed it.
+
+https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/ (the project home page)
+has more information, including links to the current output in various
+formats, sources, mailing lists, and other infrastructure.
+
+We offer two web versions of the manual. A version that is split
+into separate web pages for each section or subsection is here.
+ https://latexref.xyz
+We also have a single-page version.
+ http://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html
+
+Help is most definitely wanted. (Search for "xx" in the source for just
+a few of the known deficiencies.) Please email any bug reports, new
+material, general discussion, whatever, to latexrefman@tug.org (see
+http://lists.tug.org/latexrefman for archives and subscription via the web).
+
+
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bb004ce1fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+personal_ws-1.1 en 0
+AAF
+ArtBox
+Avant
+BD
+BES
+BESU
+Biemesderfer
+BleedBox
+Botway
+CTAN's
+CropBox
+EE
+EF
+EnvIndex
+FC
+Garde
+Halmos
+Kleene
+LAH
+Lappish
+Martinsen
+MediaBox
+NeedsAMSSymb
+NeedsSTIX
+NotInPlainTeX
+O'Brian
+Overstrike
+PkgIndex
+Supremum
+TrimBox
+ae
+afterskip
+arabic
+aring
+arrayrulewidth
+arraystrech
+ary
+baselinestretch
+bb
+bbllx
+bblly
+bburx
+bbury
+beforeskip
+beginparpenalty
+bigfoot
+bigski
+bigskip
+bigskipamount
+bm
+bowtie
+bp
+builtin
+cdots
+cmd
+columnsep
+columnseprule
+columnwidth
+coproduct
+cosecant
+cp
+cprotect
+datetime
+dblfloatpagefraction
+dcolumn
+ddagger
+ddots
+del
+delim
+doublerulesep
+doublestruck
+dvi
+dvitype
+eg
+ek
+endparpenalty
+eng
+enumi
+enumii
+enumiii
+enumiv
+env
+envlab
+errorstop
+errorstopmode
+eth
+evensidemargin
+executivepaper
+f's
+fbox
+fboxrule
+fd
+fleqn
+floatpagefraction
+fn
+fnsymbol
+fontencoding
+fontfamily
+fontseries
+fontshape
+footmisc
+footnoterule
+footnotesep
+footskip
+greek
+hacek
+headheight
+headsep
+hiresbb
+homomorphism
+hungarian
+idx
+ifstar
+indentfirst
+indexspace
+infinum
+intercolumn
+itemindent
+itempenalty
+itemsep
+lR
+labelenumi
+labelenumii
+labelenumiii
+labelenumiv
+labelitemi
+labelitemii
+labelitemiii
+labelitemiv
+labelsep
+labelwidth
+ldots
+leadsto
+leftmargin
+leftmargini
+leftmarginii
+leftmarginiii
+leftmarginiv
+leftmarginv
+leftmarginvi
+legalpaper
+lethead
+letheadflag
+letterpaper
+lhd
+linespread
+listparindent
+lr
+lrbox
+lunate
+makeidx
+makelabel
+marginparpush
+marginparsep
+marginparwidth
+marginsep
+medskipamount
+medspace
+mfirstuc
+mhchem
+mho
+mistyped
+mpfootnote
+multind
+multiset
+mx
+natheight
+natwidth
+negthinspace
+niques
+notitlepage
+oddsidemargin
+oe
+onecolumn
+oo
+openany
+openbib
+openright
+oslash
+outdent
+overbar
+overdot
+overlines
+overlining
+pagebox
+pagebreak
+pagestyle
+paperheight
+paperwidth
+parsep
+partopsep
+pict
+pixelation
+printindex
+ptr
+radians
+rescale
+revemptyset
+rhd
+rightmargin
+secnumdepth
+selectfont
+setspace
+showidx
+smallskip
+smallskipamount
+sp
+sqsubset
+sqsupset
+startsection
+subitem
+subitems
+subregion
+superscripted
+tabcolsep
+teck
+tecks
+texi
+texinfo
+textcase
+textheight
+textstyle
+th
+thickspace
+titlepage
+tocbibbind
+tocdepth
+tocloft
+topmargin
+topsep
+topskip
+totalheght
+totalheight
+twocolumn
+twoside
+ulem
+underbar
+underbrace
+unlabelled
+unlhd
+unrhd
+upharpoonright
+usefont
+usrguide
+varnothing
+vdots
+verbatimbox
+vert
+xdv
+xelatex
+xindy
+xyz
+zet
+Dietze
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e27678fcd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+@c $Id: common.texi 701 2018-10-08 14:32:37Z jimhefferon $
+@c Public domain.
+@set LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman
+@set LTXREFMAN_BUGS latexrefman@@tug.org
+@clear HAS-MATH
+@iftex
+@set HAS-MATH
+@macro iftexthenelse {then,else}
+\then\@c
+@end macro
+@end iftex
+@ifnottex
+@macro iftexthenelse {then,else}
+\else\@c
+@end macro
+@end ifnottex
+
+
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/README b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bff28795fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/README
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+This directory contains the source for the graphics used in the document.
+
+The asy/ directory contains the source for graphics produced with
+Asymptote.
+
+TeXinfo wants the graphics in ../latex2e-figures/. Note that
+different TeXinfo output formats require different graphic formats.
+
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/asy/list.asy b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/asy/list.asy
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1a6c5fdb39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/asy/list.asy
@@ -0,0 +1,236 @@
+import settings;
+// settings.outformat="pdf";
+
+unitsize(1pt);
+
+void leftbar(picture pic, pair a, pair d, pen p=currentpen)
+{
+ picture opic;
+ // was: Draw(opic,-0.5d--0.5d,p+solid);
+ Draw(opic,-0d--0.5d,p+solid);
+ add(pic,opic,a);
+}
+picture leftbar(pair a, pair d, pen p=currentpen)
+{
+ picture pic;
+ leftbar(pic,a,d,p);
+ return pic;
+}
+void rightbar(picture pic, pair a, pair d, pen p=currentpen)
+{
+ picture opic;
+ // was: Draw(opic,-0.5d--0.5d,p+solid);
+ Draw(opic,-0.5d--0d,p+solid);
+ add(pic,opic,a);
+}
+picture rightbar(pair a, pair d, pen p=currentpen)
+{
+ picture pic;
+ leftbar(pic,a,d,p);
+ return pic;
+}
+
+arrowbar BeginLeftBar(real size=0)
+{
+ return new bool(picture pic, path g, pen p, margin margin) {
+ real size=size == 0 ? barsize(p) : size;
+ leftbar(pic,point(g,0),size*dir(g,0)*I,p);
+ return true;
+ };
+}
+
+arrowbar LeftBar(real size=0)
+{
+ return new bool(picture pic, path g, pen p, margin margin) {
+ int L=length(g);
+ real size=size == 0 ? barsize(p) : size;
+ leftbar(pic,point(g,L),size*dir(g,L)*I,p);
+ return true;
+ };
+}
+arrowbar EndLeftBar(real size=0)=LeftBar;
+
+arrowbar LeftBars(real size=0)
+{
+ return new bool(picture pic, path g, pen p, margin margin) {
+ real size=size == 0 ? barsize(p) : size;
+ BeginLeftBar(size)(pic,g,p,margin);
+ EndLeftBar(size)(pic,g,p,margin);
+ return true;
+ };
+}
+arrowbar BeginRightBar(real size=0)
+{
+ return new bool(picture pic, path g, pen p, margin margin) {
+ real size=size == 0 ? barsize(p) : size;
+ rightbar(pic,point(g,0),size*dir(g,0)*I,p);
+ return true;
+ };
+}
+
+arrowbar RightBar(real size=0)
+{
+ return new bool(picture pic, path g, pen p, margin margin) {
+ int L=length(g);
+ real size=size == 0 ? barsize(p) : size;
+ rightbar(pic,point(g,L),size*dir(g,L)*I,p);
+ return true;
+ };
+}
+arrowbar EndRightBar(real size=0)=LeftBar;
+
+arrowbar RightBars(real size=0)
+{
+ return new bool(picture pic, path g, pen p, margin margin) {
+ real size=size == 0 ? barsize(p) : size;
+ BeginRightBar(size)(pic,g,p,margin);
+ EndRightBar(size)(pic,g,p,margin);
+ return true;
+ };
+}
+arrowbar BeginLeftBar=BeginLeftBar(),
+ LeftBar=LeftBar(),
+ EndLeftBar=EndLeftBar(),
+ LeftBars=LeftBars(),
+ BeginRightBar=BeginRightBar(),
+ RightBar=RightBar(),
+ EndRightBar=EndRightBar(),
+ RightBars=RightBars();
+
+// Simulate text lines
+real em=10pt; // Computer Modern
+real baselineskip=1.2*em;
+real textpen_wd=0.8*em;
+pen textpen = linewidth(textpen_wd)+mediumgray+squarecap+opacity(0.5); // simulate text lines
+pen surrounding_environmentpen = textpen; // simulate text lines
+pen labelpen = black+font("OT1","cmr","m","it")+fontsize(7);
+
+// basic list
+real pagewidth=8cm;
+real pageleftmargin=0.25cm;
+real pagerightmargin=0.25cm;
+real baseline; // keep track of vert location of baseline
+
+int num_lines_above = 2;
+int num_lines_first_item_first_paragraph = 3;
+int num_lines_first_item_second_paragraph = 1;
+int num_lines_second_item = 3;
+int num_lines_below = 2;
+
+// list parameters
+// LaTeX's book 10 defaults; not suitable for illustration
+// real leftmargin=2.5*em;
+// real rightmargin=0*em;
+// real topsep=8pt;
+// real parskip=0pt;
+// real partopsep=2pt;
+// real labelwidth=leftmargin;
+// real labelsep=0.5*em;
+// real parsep=4pt;
+// real itemindent=parsep;
+// real listparindent=itemindent;
+// real itemsep=4pt;
+// parameters shown on the diagram
+real leftmargin=2.5*em;
+real rightmargin=1.5*em;
+real topsep=8pt;
+real parskip=4pt;
+real partopsep=2pt;
+real labelwidth=3em;
+real labelsep=0.5*em;
+real parsep=4pt;
+real itemindent=16pt;
+real listparindent=5pt;
+real itemsep=8pt;
+
+real labelleftedge = (pageleftmargin+leftmargin+itemindent)-(labelwidth+labelsep);
+real labelrightedge = labelleftedge+labelwidth;
+
+// helper lines
+// draw((pageleftmargin+leftmargin,0)--(pageleftmargin+leftmargin,-30),green);
+// draw((pageleftmargin+leftmargin+itemindent,0)--(pageleftmargin+leftmargin+itemindent,-30),green);
+// draw((pageleftmargin+leftmargin+itemindent-labelwidth,0)--(pageleftmargin+leftmargin+itemindent-labelwidth,-30),blue);
+// draw((pageleftmargin+leftmargin+itemindent-labelwidth-labelsep,0)--(pageleftmargin+leftmargin+itemindent-labelwidth-labelsep,-30),red);
+
+path lne;
+
+// lines above list
+baseline=0;
+lne = (pageleftmargin,baseline)--(pagewidth-pagerightmargin,baseline);
+draw(lne,surrounding_environmentpen);
+for (int line_no=0; line_no<(num_lines_above-1); ++line_no) {
+ baseline = baseline-baselineskip;
+ lne=(pageleftmargin,baseline)--(pagewidth-pagerightmargin,baseline);
+ draw(lne,surrounding_environmentpen);
+}
+label("Surrounding environment, preceding material",(0.5*(pageleftmargin+pagewidth-pagerightmargin),baseline),labelpen);
+real bot_preceding_material = baseline-0.5*textpen_wd;
+
+// list first item
+baseline=baseline-baselineskip-topsep-parskip-partopsep;
+real top_item_one = baseline+0.5*textpen_wd;
+draw((labelleftedge,baseline)--(labelrightedge,baseline),textpen); // label
+label("Label",(0.5*(labelleftedge+labelrightedge),baseline),labelpen);
+draw((labelrightedge+labelsep,baseline)--(pagewidth-pagerightmargin-rightmargin,baseline),textpen); // rest of label line
+label("\makebox[0em][l]{First item}",((pageleftmargin+leftmargin)+3.5em,baseline),labelpen);
+for (int line_no=0; line_no<(num_lines_first_item_first_paragraph-1); ++line_no) {
+ baseline = baseline-baselineskip;
+ draw((pageleftmargin+leftmargin,baseline)--(pagewidth-pagerightmargin-rightmargin,baseline),textpen);
+}
+real bot_item_one_par_one = baseline-0.5*textpen_wd;
+
+// first item's second paragraph
+baseline = baseline-baselineskip-parsep;
+real top_item_one_par_two = baseline+0.5*textpen_wd;
+draw((pageleftmargin+leftmargin+listparindent,baseline)--(pagewidth-pagerightmargin-rightmargin,baseline),textpen);
+label("\makebox[0em][l]{First item, second paragraph}",((pageleftmargin+leftmargin)+3.5em,baseline),labelpen);
+for (int line_no=0; line_no<(num_lines_first_item_second_paragraph-1); ++line_no) {
+ baseline = baseline-baselineskip;
+ draw((pageleftmargin+leftmargin,baseline)--(pagewidth-pagerightmargin-rightmargin,baseline),textpen);
+}
+real bot_item_one = baseline-0.5*textpen_wd;
+
+// list second item
+baseline=baseline-baselineskip-itemsep-parsep;
+real top_item_two = baseline+0.5*textpen_wd;
+draw((labelleftedge,baseline)--(labelrightedge,baseline),textpen); // label
+label("Label",(0.5*(labelleftedge+labelrightedge),baseline),labelpen);
+draw((labelrightedge+labelsep,baseline)--(pagewidth-pagerightmargin-rightmargin,baseline),textpen); // rest of label line
+label("\makebox[0em][l]{Second item}",((pageleftmargin+leftmargin)+3.5em,baseline),labelpen);
+for (int line_no=0; line_no<(num_lines_second_item-1); ++line_no) {
+ baseline = baseline-baselineskip;
+ draw((pageleftmargin+leftmargin,baseline)--(pagewidth-pagerightmargin-rightmargin,baseline),textpen);
+}
+real bot_item_two = baseline-0.5*textpen_wd;
+
+// lines after list
+baseline=baseline-baselineskip-topsep-parsep-partopsep;
+real top_following_material = baseline+0.5*textpen_wd;
+label("Surrounding environment, following material",(0.5*(pageleftmargin+pagewidth-pagerightmargin),baseline),labelpen);
+draw((pageleftmargin,baseline)--(pagewidth-pagerightmargin,baseline),surrounding_environmentpen);
+for (int line_no=0; line_no<(num_lines_below-1); ++line_no) {
+ baseline = baseline-baselineskip;
+ draw((pageleftmargin,baseline)--(pagewidth-pagerightmargin,baseline),surrounding_environmentpen);
+}
+
+// vertical markers
+real v_x = pagewidth-pagerightmargin+6pt;
+draw(Label("{\scriptsize $v_0$}",red),reverse((v_x,bot_preceding_material)--(v_x,top_item_one)),red,bar=LeftBars);
+draw(Label("{\scriptsize $v_1$}",red),reverse((v_x,bot_item_one_par_one)--(v_x,top_item_one_par_two)),red,bar=LeftBars);
+draw(Label("{\scriptsize $v_2$}",red),reverse((v_x,bot_item_one)--(v_x,top_item_two)),red,bar=LeftBars);
+draw(Label("{\scriptsize $v_3$}",red),reverse((v_x,bot_item_two)--(v_x,top_following_material)),red,bar=LeftBars);
+
+// horizontal markers
+real h_y_top = top_item_one+3pt;
+draw(Label("{\scriptsize $h_0$}",blue),reverse((labelleftedge,h_y_top)--(labelrightedge,h_y_top)),blue,bar=LeftBars);
+draw(Label("{\scriptsize $h_1$}",blue),reverse((labelrightedge,h_y_top)--(labelrightedge+labelsep,h_y_top)),blue,bar=LeftBars);
+
+real h_y_mid = bot_item_one-3pt;
+draw(Label("{\scriptsize $h_2$}",blue),(pageleftmargin+leftmargin,h_y_mid)--(pageleftmargin+leftmargin+listparindent,h_y_mid),blue,bar=LeftBars);
+
+real h_y_bot = bot_item_two-3pt;
+draw(Label("{\scriptsize $h_3$}",blue),(pageleftmargin,h_y_bot)--(pageleftmargin+leftmargin,h_y_bot),blue,bar=LeftBars);
+draw(Label("{\scriptsize $h_4$}",blue),(pageleftmargin+leftmargin,h_y_bot)--(pageleftmargin+leftmargin+itemindent,h_y_bot),blue,bar=LeftBars);
+draw(Label("{\scriptsize $h_5$}",blue),(pagewidth-pagerightmargin-rightmargin,h_y_bot)--(pagewidth-pagerightmargin,h_y_bot),blue,bar=LeftBars);
+
+
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.eps b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.eps
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..17cea74f45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.eps
@@ -0,0 +1,1302 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0
+%%Creator: dvips(k) 5.995 Copyright 2015 Radical Eye Software
+%%Title: list_.dvi
+%%CreationDate: Fri Jun 8 10:35:27 2018
+%%Pages: 1
+%%PageOrder: Ascend
+%%BoundingBox: 189 310 422 481
+%%HiResBoundingBox: 189.816995 310.126502 421.183005 480.873498
+%%DocumentFonts: CMTI7 CMMI8 CMR6
+%%EndComments
+%DVIPSWebPage: (www.radicaleye.com)
+%DVIPSCommandLine: dvips -R -Pdownload35 -D600 -O61.417bp,185.327bp
+%+ -T612bp,792bp -tletterSize -q -olist_.ps list_.dvi
+%DVIPSParameters: dpi=600
+%DVIPSSource: TeX output 2018.06.08:1035
+%%BeginProcSet: tex.pro 0 0
+%!
+/TeXDict 300 dict def TeXDict begin/N{def}def/B{bind def}N/S{exch}N/X{S
+N}B/A{dup}B/TR{translate}N/isls false N/vsize 11 72 mul N/hsize 8.5 72
+mul N/landplus90{false}def/@rigin{isls{[0 landplus90{1 -1}{-1 1}ifelse 0
+0 0]concat}if 72 Resolution div 72 VResolution div neg scale isls{
+landplus90{VResolution 72 div vsize mul 0 exch}{Resolution -72 div hsize
+mul 0}ifelse TR}if Resolution VResolution vsize -72 div 1 add mul TR[
+matrix currentmatrix{A A round sub abs 0.00001 lt{round}if}forall round
+exch round exch]setmatrix}N/@landscape{/isls true N}B/@manualfeed{
+statusdict/manualfeed true put}B/@copies{/#copies X}B/FMat[1 0 0 -1 0 0]
+N/FBB[0 0 0 0]N/nn 0 N/IEn 0 N/ctr 0 N/df-tail{/nn 8 dict N nn begin
+/FontType 3 N/FontMatrix fntrx N/FontBBox FBB N string/base X array
+/BitMaps X/BuildChar{CharBuilder}N/Encoding IEn N end A{/foo setfont}2
+array copy cvx N load 0 nn put/ctr 0 N[}B/sf 0 N/df{/sf 1 N/fntrx FMat N
+df-tail}B/dfs{div/sf X/fntrx[sf 0 0 sf neg 0 0]N df-tail}B/E{pop nn A
+definefont setfont}B/Cw{Cd A length 5 sub get}B/Ch{Cd A length 4 sub get
+}B/Cx{128 Cd A length 3 sub get sub}B/Cy{Cd A length 2 sub get 127 sub}
+B/Cdx{Cd A length 1 sub get}B/Ci{Cd A type/stringtype ne{ctr get/ctr ctr
+1 add N}if}B/CharBuilder{save 3 1 roll S A/base get 2 index get S
+/BitMaps get S get/Cd X pop/ctr 0 N Cdx 0 Cx Cy Ch sub Cx Cw add Cy
+setcachedevice Cw Ch true[1 0 0 -1 -.1 Cx sub Cy .1 sub]{Ci}imagemask
+restore}B/D{/cc X A type/stringtype ne{]}if nn/base get cc ctr put nn
+/BitMaps get S ctr S sf 1 ne{A A length 1 sub A 2 index S get sf div put
+}if put/ctr ctr 1 add N}B/I{cc 1 add D}B/bop{userdict/bop-hook known{
+bop-hook}if/SI save N @rigin 0 0 moveto/V matrix currentmatrix A 1 get A
+mul exch 0 get A mul add .99 lt{/QV}{/RV}ifelse load def pop pop}N/eop{
+SI restore userdict/eop-hook known{eop-hook}if showpage}N/@start{
+userdict/start-hook known{start-hook}if pop/VResolution X/Resolution X
+1000 div/DVImag X/IEn 256 array N 2 string 0 1 255{IEn S A 360 add 36 4
+index cvrs cvn put}for pop 65781.76 div/vsize X 65781.76 div/hsize X}N
+/dir 0 def/dyy{/dir 0 def}B/dyt{/dir 1 def}B/dty{/dir 2 def}B/dtt{/dir 3
+def}B/p{dir 2 eq{-90 rotate show 90 rotate}{dir 3 eq{-90 rotate show 90
+rotate}{show}ifelse}ifelse}N/RMat[1 0 0 -1 0 0]N/BDot 260 string N/Rx 0
+N/Ry 0 N/V{}B/RV/v{/Ry X/Rx X V}B statusdict begin/product where{pop
+false[(Display)(NeXT)(LaserWriter 16/600)]{A length product length le{A
+length product exch 0 exch getinterval eq{pop true exit}if}{pop}ifelse}
+forall}{false}ifelse end{{gsave TR -.1 .1 TR 1 1 scale Rx Ry false RMat{
+BDot}imagemask grestore}}{{gsave TR -.1 .1 TR Rx Ry scale 1 1 false RMat
+{BDot}imagemask grestore}}ifelse B/QV{gsave newpath transform round exch
+round exch itransform moveto Rx 0 rlineto 0 Ry neg rlineto Rx neg 0
+rlineto fill grestore}B/a{moveto}B/delta 0 N/tail{A/delta X 0 rmoveto}B
+/M{S p delta add tail}B/b{S p tail}B/c{-4 M}B/d{-3 M}B/e{-2 M}B/f{-1 M}
+B/g{0 M}B/h{1 M}B/i{2 M}B/j{3 M}B/k{4 M}B/w{0 rmoveto}B/l{p -4 w}B/m{p
+-3 w}B/n{p -2 w}B/o{p -1 w}B/q{p 1 w}B/r{p 2 w}B/s{p 3 w}B/t{p 4 w}B/x{
+0 S rmoveto}B/y{3 2 roll p a}B/bos{/SS save N}B/eos{SS restore}B end
+
+%%EndProcSet
+%%BeginProcSet: texps.pro 0 0
+%!
+TeXDict begin/rf{findfont dup length 1 add dict begin{1 index/FID ne 2
+index/UniqueID ne and{def}{pop pop}ifelse}forall[1 index 0 6 -1 roll
+exec 0 exch 5 -1 roll VResolution Resolution div mul neg 0 0]FontType 0
+ne{/Metrics exch def dict begin Encoding{exch dup type/integertype ne{
+pop pop 1 sub dup 0 le{pop}{[}ifelse}{FontMatrix 0 get div Metrics 0 get
+div def}ifelse}forall Metrics/Metrics currentdict end def}{{1 index type
+/nametype eq{exit}if exch pop}loop}ifelse[2 index currentdict end
+definefont 3 -1 roll makefont/setfont cvx]cvx def}def/ObliqueSlant{dup
+sin S cos div neg}B/SlantFont{4 index mul add}def/ExtendFont{3 -1 roll
+mul exch}def/ReEncodeFont{CharStrings rcheck{/Encoding false def dup[
+exch{dup CharStrings exch known not{pop/.notdef/Encoding true def}if}
+forall Encoding{]exch pop}{cleartomark}ifelse}if/Encoding exch def}def
+end
+
+%%EndProcSet
+%%BeginProcSet: special.pro 0 0
+%!
+TeXDict begin/SDict 200 dict N SDict begin/@SpecialDefaults{/hs 612 N
+/vs 792 N/ho 0 N/vo 0 N/hsc 1 N/vsc 1 N/ang 0 N/CLIP 0 N/rwiSeen false N
+/rhiSeen false N/letter{}N/note{}N/a4{}N/legal{}N}B/@scaleunit 100 N
+/@hscale{@scaleunit div/hsc X}B/@vscale{@scaleunit div/vsc X}B/@hsize{
+/hs X/CLIP 1 N}B/@vsize{/vs X/CLIP 1 N}B/@clip{/CLIP 2 N}B/@hoffset{/ho
+X}B/@voffset{/vo X}B/@angle{/ang X}B/@rwi{10 div/rwi X/rwiSeen true N}B
+/@rhi{10 div/rhi X/rhiSeen true N}B/@llx{/llx X}B/@lly{/lly X}B/@urx{
+/urx X}B/@ury{/ury X}B/magscale true def end/@MacSetUp{userdict/md known
+{userdict/md get type/dicttype eq{userdict begin md length 10 add md
+maxlength ge{/md md dup length 20 add dict copy def}if end md begin
+/letter{}N/note{}N/legal{}N/od{txpose 1 0 mtx defaultmatrix dtransform S
+atan/pa X newpath clippath mark{transform{itransform moveto}}{transform{
+itransform lineto}}{6 -2 roll transform 6 -2 roll transform 6 -2 roll
+transform{itransform 6 2 roll itransform 6 2 roll itransform 6 2 roll
+curveto}}{{closepath}}pathforall newpath counttomark array astore/gc xdf
+pop ct 39 0 put 10 fz 0 fs 2 F/|______Courier fnt invertflag{PaintBlack}
+if}N/txpose{pxs pys scale ppr aload pop por{noflips{pop S neg S TR pop 1
+-1 scale}if xflip yflip and{pop S neg S TR 180 rotate 1 -1 scale ppr 3
+get ppr 1 get neg sub neg ppr 2 get ppr 0 get neg sub neg TR}if xflip
+yflip not and{pop S neg S TR pop 180 rotate ppr 3 get ppr 1 get neg sub
+neg 0 TR}if yflip xflip not and{ppr 1 get neg ppr 0 get neg TR}if}{
+noflips{TR pop pop 270 rotate 1 -1 scale}if xflip yflip and{TR pop pop
+90 rotate 1 -1 scale ppr 3 get ppr 1 get neg sub neg ppr 2 get ppr 0 get
+neg sub neg TR}if xflip yflip not and{TR pop pop 90 rotate ppr 3 get ppr
+1 get neg sub neg 0 TR}if yflip xflip not and{TR pop pop 270 rotate ppr
+2 get ppr 0 get neg sub neg 0 S TR}if}ifelse scaleby96{ppr aload pop 4
+-1 roll add 2 div 3 1 roll add 2 div 2 copy TR .96 dup scale neg S neg S
+TR}if}N/cp{pop pop showpage pm restore}N end}if}if}N/normalscale{
+Resolution 72 div VResolution 72 div neg scale magscale{DVImag dup scale
+}if 0 setgray}N/@beginspecial{SDict begin/SpecialSave save N gsave
+normalscale currentpoint TR @SpecialDefaults count/ocount X/dcount
+countdictstack N}N/@setspecial{CLIP 1 eq{newpath 0 0 moveto hs 0 rlineto
+0 vs rlineto hs neg 0 rlineto closepath clip}if ho vo TR hsc vsc scale
+ang rotate rwiSeen{rwi urx llx sub div rhiSeen{rhi ury lly sub div}{dup}
+ifelse scale llx neg lly neg TR}{rhiSeen{rhi ury lly sub div dup scale
+llx neg lly neg TR}if}ifelse CLIP 2 eq{newpath llx lly moveto urx lly
+lineto urx ury lineto llx ury lineto closepath clip}if/showpage{}N
+/erasepage{}N/setpagedevice{pop}N/copypage{}N newpath}N/@endspecial{
+count ocount sub{pop}repeat countdictstack dcount sub{end}repeat
+grestore SpecialSave restore end}N/@defspecial{SDict begin}N
+/@fedspecial{end}B/li{lineto}B/rl{rlineto}B/rc{rcurveto}B/np{/SaveX
+currentpoint/SaveY X N 1 setlinecap newpath}N/st{stroke SaveX SaveY
+moveto}N/fil{fill SaveX SaveY moveto}N/ellipse{/endangle X/startangle X
+/yrad X/xrad X/savematrix matrix currentmatrix N TR xrad yrad scale 0 0
+1 startangle endangle arc savematrix setmatrix}N end
+
+%%EndProcSet
+%%BeginProcSet: color.pro 0 0
+%!
+TeXDict begin/setcmykcolor where{pop}{/setcmykcolor{dup 10 eq{pop
+setrgbcolor}{1 sub 4 1 roll 3{3 index add neg dup 0 lt{pop 0}if 3 1 roll
+}repeat setrgbcolor pop}ifelse}B}ifelse/TeXcolorcmyk{setcmykcolor}def
+/TeXcolorrgb{setrgbcolor}def/TeXcolorgrey{setgray}def/TeXcolorgray{
+setgray}def/TeXcolorhsb{sethsbcolor}def/currentcmykcolor where{pop}{
+/currentcmykcolor{currentrgbcolor 10}B}ifelse/DC{exch dup userdict exch
+known{pop pop}{X}ifelse}B/GreenYellow{0.15 0 0.69 0 setcmykcolor}DC
+/Yellow{0 0 1 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Goldenrod{0 0.10 0.84 0 setcmykcolor}DC
+/Dandelion{0 0.29 0.84 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Apricot{0 0.32 0.52 0
+setcmykcolor}DC/Peach{0 0.50 0.70 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Melon{0 0.46 0.50 0
+setcmykcolor}DC/YellowOrange{0 0.42 1 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Orange{0 0.61
+0.87 0 setcmykcolor}DC/BurntOrange{0 0.51 1 0 setcmykcolor}DC
+/Bittersweet{0 0.75 1 0.24 setcmykcolor}DC/RedOrange{0 0.77 0.87 0
+setcmykcolor}DC/Mahogany{0 0.85 0.87 0.35 setcmykcolor}DC/Maroon{0 0.87
+0.68 0.32 setcmykcolor}DC/BrickRed{0 0.89 0.94 0.28 setcmykcolor}DC/Red{
+0 1 1 0 setcmykcolor}DC/OrangeRed{0 1 0.50 0 setcmykcolor}DC/RubineRed{
+0 1 0.13 0 setcmykcolor}DC/WildStrawberry{0 0.96 0.39 0 setcmykcolor}DC
+/Salmon{0 0.53 0.38 0 setcmykcolor}DC/CarnationPink{0 0.63 0 0
+setcmykcolor}DC/Magenta{0 1 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/VioletRed{0 0.81 0 0
+setcmykcolor}DC/Rhodamine{0 0.82 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Mulberry{0.34 0.90
+0 0.02 setcmykcolor}DC/RedViolet{0.07 0.90 0 0.34 setcmykcolor}DC
+/Fuchsia{0.47 0.91 0 0.08 setcmykcolor}DC/Lavender{0 0.48 0 0
+setcmykcolor}DC/Thistle{0.12 0.59 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Orchid{0.32 0.64 0
+0 setcmykcolor}DC/DarkOrchid{0.40 0.80 0.20 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Purple{
+0.45 0.86 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Plum{0.50 1 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Violet{
+0.79 0.88 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/RoyalPurple{0.75 0.90 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC
+/BlueViolet{0.86 0.91 0 0.04 setcmykcolor}DC/Periwinkle{0.57 0.55 0 0
+setcmykcolor}DC/CadetBlue{0.62 0.57 0.23 0 setcmykcolor}DC
+/CornflowerBlue{0.65 0.13 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/MidnightBlue{0.98 0.13 0
+0.43 setcmykcolor}DC/NavyBlue{0.94 0.54 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/RoyalBlue{1
+0.50 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Blue{1 1 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Cerulean{0.94 0.11
+0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Cyan{1 0 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/ProcessBlue{0.96 0 0 0
+setcmykcolor}DC/SkyBlue{0.62 0 0.12 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Turquoise{0.85 0
+0.20 0 setcmykcolor}DC/TealBlue{0.86 0 0.34 0.02 setcmykcolor}DC
+/Aquamarine{0.82 0 0.30 0 setcmykcolor}DC/BlueGreen{0.85 0 0.33 0
+setcmykcolor}DC/Emerald{1 0 0.50 0 setcmykcolor}DC/JungleGreen{0.99 0
+0.52 0 setcmykcolor}DC/SeaGreen{0.69 0 0.50 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Green{1 0
+1 0 setcmykcolor}DC/ForestGreen{0.91 0 0.88 0.12 setcmykcolor}DC
+/PineGreen{0.92 0 0.59 0.25 setcmykcolor}DC/LimeGreen{0.50 0 1 0
+setcmykcolor}DC/YellowGreen{0.44 0 0.74 0 setcmykcolor}DC/SpringGreen{
+0.26 0 0.76 0 setcmykcolor}DC/OliveGreen{0.64 0 0.95 0.40 setcmykcolor}
+DC/RawSienna{0 0.72 1 0.45 setcmykcolor}DC/Sepia{0 0.83 1 0.70
+setcmykcolor}DC/Brown{0 0.81 1 0.60 setcmykcolor}DC/Tan{0.14 0.42 0.56 0
+setcmykcolor}DC/Gray{0 0 0 0.50 setcmykcolor}DC/Black{0 0 0 1
+setcmykcolor}DC/White{0 0 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC end
+
+%%EndProcSet
+%%BeginFont: CMR6
+%!PS-AdobeFont-1.0: CMR6 003.002
+%%Title: CMR6
+%Version: 003.002
+%%CreationDate: Mon Jul 13 16:17:00 2009
+%%Creator: David M. Jones
+%Copyright: Copyright (c) 1997, 2009 American Mathematical Society
+%Copyright: (<http://www.ams.org>), with Reserved Font Name CMR6.
+% This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1.
+% This license is in the accompanying file OFL.txt, and is also
+% available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL.
+%%EndComments
+FontDirectory/CMR6 known{/CMR6 findfont dup/UniqueID known{dup
+/UniqueID get 5000789 eq exch/FontType get 1 eq and}{pop false}ifelse
+{save true}{false}ifelse}{false}ifelse
+11 dict begin
+/FontType 1 def
+/FontMatrix [0.001 0 0 0.001 0 0 ]readonly def
+/FontName /CMR6 def
+/FontBBox {-20 -250 1193 750 }readonly def
+/PaintType 0 def
+/FontInfo 9 dict dup begin
+/version (003.002) readonly def
+/Notice (Copyright \050c\051 1997, 2009 American Mathematical Society \050<http://www.ams.org>\051, with Reserved Font Name CMR6.) readonly def
+/FullName (CMR6) readonly def
+/FamilyName (Computer Modern) readonly def
+/Weight (Medium) readonly def
+/ItalicAngle 0 def
+/isFixedPitch false def
+/UnderlinePosition -100 def
+/UnderlineThickness 50 def
+end readonly def
+/Encoding 256 array
+0 1 255 {1 index exch /.notdef put} for
+dup 48 /zero put
+dup 49 /one put
+dup 50 /two put
+dup 51 /three put
+dup 52 /four put
+dup 53 /five put
+readonly def
+currentdict end
+currentfile eexec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+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+cleartomark
+{restore}if
+%%EndFont
+%%BeginFont: CMMI8
+%!PS-AdobeFont-1.0: CMMI8 003.002
+%%Title: CMMI8
+%Version: 003.002
+%%CreationDate: Mon Jul 13 16:17:00 2009
+%%Creator: David M. Jones
+%Copyright: Copyright (c) 1997, 2009 American Mathematical Society
+%Copyright: (<http://www.ams.org>), with Reserved Font Name CMMI8.
+% This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1.
+% This license is in the accompanying file OFL.txt, and is also
+% available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL.
+%%EndComments
+FontDirectory/CMMI8 known{/CMMI8 findfont dup/UniqueID known{dup
+/UniqueID get 5087383 eq exch/FontType get 1 eq and}{pop false}ifelse
+{save true}{false}ifelse}{false}ifelse
+11 dict begin
+/FontType 1 def
+/FontMatrix [0.001 0 0 0.001 0 0 ]readonly def
+/FontName /CMMI8 def
+/FontBBox {-24 -250 1110 750 }readonly def
+/PaintType 0 def
+/FontInfo 10 dict dup begin
+/version (003.002) readonly def
+/Notice (Copyright \050c\051 1997, 2009 American Mathematical Society \050<http://www.ams.org>\051, with Reserved Font Name CMMI8.) readonly def
+/FullName (CMMI8) readonly def
+/FamilyName (Computer Modern) readonly def
+/Weight (Medium) readonly def
+/ItalicAngle -14.04 def
+/isFixedPitch false def
+/UnderlinePosition -100 def
+/UnderlineThickness 50 def
+/ascent 750 def
+end readonly def
+/Encoding 256 array
+0 1 255 {1 index exch /.notdef put} for
+dup 104 /h put
+dup 118 /v put
+readonly def
+currentdict end
+currentfile eexec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+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+cleartomark
+{restore}if
+%%EndFont
+%%BeginFont: CMTI7
+%!PS-AdobeFont-1.0: CMTI7 003.002
+%%Title: CMTI7
+%Version: 003.002
+%%CreationDate: Mon Jul 13 16:17:00 2009
+%%Creator: David M. Jones
+%Copyright: Copyright (c) 1997, 2009 American Mathematical Society
+%Copyright: (<http://www.ams.org>), with Reserved Font Name CMTI7.
+% This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1.
+% This license is in the accompanying file OFL.txt, and is also
+% available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL.
+%%EndComments
+FontDirectory/CMTI7 known{/CMTI7 findfont dup/UniqueID known{dup
+/UniqueID get 5000825 eq exch/FontType get 1 eq and}{pop false}ifelse
+{save true}{false}ifelse}{false}ifelse
+11 dict begin
+/FontType 1 def
+/FontMatrix [0.001 0 0 0.001 0 0 ]readonly def
+/FontName /CMTI7 def
+/FontBBox {-27 -250 1268 750 }readonly def
+/PaintType 0 def
+/FontInfo 9 dict dup begin
+/version (003.002) readonly def
+/Notice (Copyright \050c\051 1997, 2009 American Mathematical Society \050<http://www.ams.org>\051, with Reserved Font Name CMTI7.) readonly def
+/FullName (CMTI7) readonly def
+/FamilyName (Computer Modern) readonly def
+/Weight (Medium) readonly def
+/ItalicAngle -14.04 def
+/isFixedPitch false def
+/UnderlinePosition -100 def
+/UnderlineThickness 50 def
+end readonly def
+/Encoding 256 array
+0 1 255 {1 index exch /.notdef put} for
+dup 44 /comma put
+dup 70 /F put
+dup 76 /L put
+dup 83 /S put
+dup 97 /a put
+dup 98 /b put
+dup 99 /c put
+dup 100 /d put
+dup 101 /e put
+dup 102 /f put
+dup 103 /g put
+dup 104 /h put
+dup 105 /i put
+dup 108 /l put
+dup 109 /m put
+dup 110 /n put
+dup 111 /o put
+dup 112 /p put
+dup 114 /r put
+dup 115 /s put
+dup 116 /t put
+dup 117 /u put
+dup 118 /v put
+dup 119 /w put
+readonly def
+currentdict end
+currentfile eexec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+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
+cleartomark
+{restore}if
+%%EndFont
+TeXDict begin 40258584 52099344 1000 600 600 (list_.dvi)
+@start /Fa 202[30 30 30 30 30 30 48[{}6 49.8132 /CMR6
+rf /Fb 137[34 13[41 104[{}2 66.4176 /CMMI8 rf /Fc 136[45
+32 37 23 28 29 1[35 35 38 56 18 2[21 35 32 21 32 35 32
+32 35 13[38 6[43 5[44 25[21 44[{}24 58.1154 /CMTI7 rf
+end
+%%EndProlog
+%%BeginSetup
+%%Feature: *Resolution 600dpi
+TeXDict begin
+%%BeginPaperSize: Letter
+/setpagedevice where
+{ pop << /PageSize [612 792] >> setpagedevice }
+{ /letter where { pop letter } if }
+ifelse
+%%EndPaperSize
+ end
+%%EndSetup
+%%Page: 1 1
+TeXDict begin 1 0 bop Black Black 982 3416 a @beginspecial
+6.810139 @llx -166.761932 @lly 238.176147 @urx 3.985056
+@ury 2313 @rwi @setspecial
+%%BeginDocument: list_0.eps
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 6 -167 239 4
+%%HiResBoundingBox: 6.81013865 -166.76194 238.176148 3.98505604
+%%Creator: Asymptote 2.372.37
+%%CreationDate: 2018.06.08 10:35:27
+%%Pages: 1
+%%Page: 1 1
+/Setlinewidth {0 exch dtransform dup abs 1 lt {pop 0}{round} ifelse
+idtransform setlinewidth pop} bind def
+newpath 7.06013865 0 moveto
+ 218.864298 0 lineto
+0.5 .setopacityalpha
+0.75 setgray
+7.97011208 Setlinewidth
+0 setlinecap
+1 setlinejoin
+10 setmiterlimit
+stroke
+newpath 7.06013865 -11.9105037 moveto
+ 218.864298 -11.9105037 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 13.0153905 -37.7165951 moveto
+ 42.7916498 -37.7165951 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 47.7543597 -37.7165951 moveto
+ 203.976169 -37.7165951 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 31.8736881 -49.6270989 moveto
+ 203.976169 -49.6270989 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 31.8736881 -61.5376026 moveto
+ 203.976169 -61.5376026 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 36.836398 -77.4182742 moveto
+ 203.976169 -77.4182742 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 13.0153905 -101.239282 moveto
+ 42.7916498 -101.239282 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 47.7543597 -101.239282 moveto
+ 203.976169 -101.239282 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 31.8736881 -113.149785 moveto
+ 203.976169 -113.149785 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 31.8736881 -125.060289 moveto
+ 203.976169 -125.060289 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 7.06013865 -150.866381 moveto
+ 218.864298 -150.866381 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 7.06013865 -162.776884 moveto
+ 218.864298 -162.776884 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 224.81955 -33.7464272 moveto
+ 221.06955 -33.7464272 lineto
+1 .setopacityalpha
+1 0 0 setrgbcolor
+0.5 Setlinewidth
+1 setlinecap
+stroke
+newpath 224.81955 -15.8806716 moveto
+ 221.06955 -15.8806716 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 224.81955 -33.7464272 moveto
+ 224.81955 -15.8806716 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 224.81955 -73.4481063 moveto
+ 221.06955 -73.4481063 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 224.81955 -65.5077705 moveto
+ 221.06955 -65.5077705 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 224.81955 -73.4481063 moveto
+ 224.81955 -65.5077705 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 224.81955 -97.2691138 moveto
+ 221.06955 -97.2691138 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 224.81955 -81.3884422 moveto
+ 221.06955 -81.3884422 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 224.81955 -97.2691138 moveto
+ 224.81955 -81.3884422 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 224.81955 -146.896213 moveto
+ 221.06955 -146.896213 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 224.81955 -129.030457 moveto
+ 221.06955 -129.030457 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 224.81955 -146.896213 moveto
+ 224.81955 -129.030457 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 42.7916498 -30.7688013 moveto
+ 42.7916498 -34.5188013 lineto
+0 0 1 setrgbcolor
+stroke
+newpath 13.0153905 -30.7688013 moveto
+ 13.0153905 -34.5188013 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 42.7916498 -30.7688013 moveto
+ 13.0153905 -30.7688013 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 47.7543597 -30.7688013 moveto
+ 47.7543597 -34.5188013 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 42.7916498 -30.7688013 moveto
+ 42.7916498 -34.5188013 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 47.7543597 -30.7688013 moveto
+ 42.7916498 -30.7688013 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 31.8736881 -84.3660681 moveto
+ 31.8736881 -80.6160681 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 36.836398 -84.3660681 moveto
+ 36.836398 -80.6160681 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 31.8736881 -84.3660681 moveto
+ 36.836398 -84.3660681 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 7.06013865 -132.008083 moveto
+ 7.06013865 -128.258083 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 31.8736881 -132.008083 moveto
+ 31.8736881 -128.258083 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 7.06013865 -132.008083 moveto
+ 31.8736881 -132.008083 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 31.8736881 -132.008083 moveto
+ 31.8736881 -128.258083 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 47.7543597 -132.008083 moveto
+ 47.7543597 -128.258083 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 31.8736881 -132.008083 moveto
+ 47.7543597 -132.008083 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 203.976169 -132.008083 moveto
+ 203.976169 -128.258083 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 218.864298 -132.008083 moveto
+ 218.864298 -128.258083 lineto
+stroke
+newpath 203.976169 -132.008083 moveto
+ 218.864298 -132.008083 lineto
+stroke
+showpage
+%%EOF
+
+%%EndDocument
+ @endspecial 0.000000 TeXcolorgray 1189 2140 a Fc(Surr)m(ounding)26
+b(envir)m(onment,)f(pr)m(e)m(c)m(e)m(ding)e(material)p
+0.000000 TeXcolorgray 1082 2360 a(L)m(ab)m(el)p 0.000000
+TeXcolorgray 244 w(First)j(item)p 0.000000 TeXcolorgray
+1480 2686 a(First)g(item,)f(se)m(c)m(ond)f(p)m(ar)m(agr)m(aph)p
+0.000000 TeXcolorgray 1082 2890 a(L)m(ab)m(el)p 0.000000
+TeXcolorgray 244 w(Se)m(c)m(ond)h(item)p 0.000000 TeXcolorgray
+1191 3298 a(Surr)m(ounding)h(envir)m(onment,)f(fol)s(lowing)i(material)
+p 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 TeXcolorrgb 2829 2242 a
+Fb(v)2863 2251 y Fa(0)p 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 TeXcolorrgb
+2829 2615 a Fb(v)2863 2624 y Fa(1)p 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000
+TeXcolorrgb 2829 2780 a Fb(v)2863 2789 y Fa(2)p
+1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 TeXcolorrgb 2829 3185 a Fb(v)2863
+3194 y Fa(3)p 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 TeXcolorrgb
+1120 2243 a Fb(h)1161 2252 y Fa(0)p 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000
+TeXcolorrgb 1265 2243 a Fb(h)1306 2252 y Fa(1)p
+0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 TeXcolorrgb 1174 2805 a Fb(h)1215
+2814 y Fa(2)p 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 TeXcolorrgb
+1050 3202 a Fb(h)1091 3211 y Fa(3)p 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000
+TeXcolorrgb 1219 3202 a Fb(h)1260 3211 y Fa(4)p
+0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 TeXcolorrgb 2649 3202 a Fb(h)2690
+3211 y Fa(5)p Black 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 TeXcolorrgb
+eop end
+%%Trailer
+
+userdict /end-hook known{end-hook}if
+%%EOF
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.pdf b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..820030a187
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.png b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4ccda19f80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.txt b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fc2b8046b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+.......................................................................
+..............Surrounding environment, preceding material.............. -
+ | v0
+ |---h0--|-h1-| |
+ ..Label.. .....First item..................................... -
+ ............................................................
+ ............................................................ -
+ | v1
+ ........First item, second paragraph .................. -
+ |-h2-| | v2
+ |
+ ..Label.. .....Second item.................................... -
+ ............................................................
+ ............................................................ -
+|-h3--|-h4-| |-h5-| |v3
+ |
+..............Surrounding environment, following material.............. -
+.......................................................................
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.css b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.css
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7e784f2dbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.css
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+/* $Id: latex2e.css 690 2018-09-15 15:20:19Z jimhefferon $
+ Minor css for latexrefman. Public domain.
+ Originally written by Jim Hefferon and Karl Berry, 2018. */
+
+/* So you can style for yourself */
+@import url("/css/latexreflocal.css");
+
+
+BODY {
+ margin-top: 1em;
+ margin-left: 1em; /* auto results in two-digit <ol> lost off left */
+ margin-right: 1em;
+ margin-bottom: 1em;
+ /* the idea is to use the whole window, unless it is ridiculously
+ wide, probably with too-small fonts, too. */
+ max-width: 64em;
+}
+
+/* Because we want @math{... @code ...} to be upright, not slanted,
+ and Texinfo won't fix it. */
+code {font-style:normal; font-family:monospace; }
+
+/* We put a link to our own home page at the bottom. */
+div.referenceinfo {font-size:small;}
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5c203240fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk
@@ -0,0 +1,17174 @@
+<?xml version="1.0"?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.2//EN" "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.2/docbookx.dtd" [
+ <!ENTITY tex "TeX">
+ <!ENTITY latex "LaTeX">
+]>
+<book id="latex2e.dbk" lang="en">
+<!-- $Id: common.texi 701 2018-10-08 14:32:37Z jimhefferon $ -->
+<!-- Public domain. -->
+
+
+<title>&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (October 2018)</title>
+<!-- %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) -->
+
+<!-- latex 2.09 commands should all be present now, -->
+<!-- xx but latex2e stuff is missing. -->
+<!-- xx random list of a few of the missing items is at the end of this file -->
+<!-- -->
+<!-- xx ctan, distributions, components of TeX -->
+<!-- xx classes and packages - required, additional, useful; oberdiek; fonts -->
+<!-- -->
+<!-- xx merge permuted-index -->
+<!-- xx merge latex-manual from savannah -->
+<!-- xx merge display style math -->
+<!-- xx JH explain nfss somewhere -->
+<!-- xx JH expand BiBTeX -->
+<!-- xx JH expand theorem, AMS math -->
+<!-- xx JH something on code listings -->
+<!-- xx JH ligatures -->
+<!-- xx JH \xspace -->
+<!-- xx JH \stretch -->
+<!-- xx JH \mathstrut -->
+<!-- xx JH \phantom https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/4519/how-do-i-create-an-invisible-character -->
+<!-- xx JH \baselineskip https://texfaq.org/FAQ-baselinepar -->
+<!-- xx JH \contentsline, \@@dottedtocline? -->
+<!-- xx JH more on \write18, beyond what's mentioned in Command line. -->
+<!-- xx JH \numexpr, \dimexpr, \glueexpr, \muexpr -->
+<!-- -->
+<!-- xx The typeset source2e has an index with all kernel -->
+<!-- xx commands, though some are internal and shouldn't be included. -->
+<!-- xx classes.dtx et al. define additional commands. -->
+<!-- xx See also http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e. -->
+
+<bookinfo><legalnotice><para>This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
+document preparation system, version of October 2018.
+</para>
+<para>This manual was originally translated from <filename>LATEX.HLP</filename> v1.0a in the
+VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
+George&#160;D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The
+&latex;&#160;2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The
+&latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl
+Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges
+using <citetitle>Hypertext Help with &latex;</citetitle>, by Sheldon Green, and
+<citetitle>&latex; Command Summary</citetitle> (for &latex;&#160;2.09) by
+L.&#160;Botway and C.&#160;Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users
+Group as <citetitle>&tex;niques</citetitle> number 10), as reference material. We also
+gratefully acknowledge additional material appearing in
+latex2e-reference by Martin Herbert Dietze. (From these references no
+text was directly copied.)
+</para>
+<para>Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013,
+2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018 Karl Berry.
+
+Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
+
+Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
+</para>
+<!-- start of License -->
+<para>Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+</para>
+
+<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+</para>
+<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
+<!-- end of License -->
+</para></legalnotice></bookinfo>
+<!-- Merge into one index (arbitrarily chosen to be the concept index). -->
+
+
+
+<para>This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
+document preparation system, version of October 2018.
+</para>
+<para>This manual was originally translated from <filename>LATEX.HLP</filename> v1.0a in the
+VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
+George&#160;D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The
+&latex;&#160;2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The
+&latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl
+Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges
+using <citetitle>Hypertext Help with &latex;</citetitle>, by Sheldon Green, and
+<citetitle>&latex; Command Summary</citetitle> (for &latex;&#160;2.09) by
+L.&#160;Botway and C.&#160;Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users
+Group as <citetitle>&tex;niques</citetitle> number 10), as reference material. We also
+gratefully acknowledge additional material appearing in
+latex2e-reference by Martin Herbert Dietze. (From these references no
+text was directly copied.)
+</para>
+<para>Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013,
+2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018 Karl Berry.
+
+Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
+
+Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
+</para>
+<!-- start of License -->
+<para>Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+</para>
+
+<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+</para>
+<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
+<!-- end of License -->
+</para>
+
+
+<!-- Best Effort Symbol -->
+
+
+<chapter label="" id="Top">
+<title>&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual</title>
+
+<para>This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of
+October 2018) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system.
+</para>
+
+
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="1" id="About-this-document">
+<title>About this document</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>home page for manual</primary></indexterm>
+<para>This is an unofficial reference manual for the &latex;2e document
+preparation system, which is a macro package for the &tex;
+typesetting program (see <link linkend="Overview">Overview</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This document&#8217;s home page is <ulink url="https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman">https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman</ulink>. There
+you can get the sources, subscribe to the mailing list or read its
+archives, see other infrastructure, and get the current output in
+various formats. In particular, the output comes in two web formats.
+Probably the most convenient one, shown at <ulink url="http://latexref.xyz/">http://latexref.xyz/</ulink>,
+has pages for each topic and so is good for a quick lookup; see also the
+note there about easy-to-remember links. The other, shown at
+<ulink url="http://svn.gnu.org.ua/viewvc/latexrefman/trunk/latex2e.html?view=co">http://svn.gnu.org.ua/viewvc/latexrefman/trunk/latex2e.html?view=co</ulink>,
+has all the information on single page.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>&latex; vs. &latex;2e</primary></indexterm>
+<para>In this document, we will mostly just use &#8216;&latex;&#8217; rather than
+&#8216;&latex;2e&#8217;, since the previous version of &latex;&#160;(2.09) was
+frozen decades ago.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>unofficial nature of this manual</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>&latex; Project team</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><email>latexrefman@tug.org</email> email address</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&latex; is currently maintained by a group of volunteers
+(<ulink url="http://latex-project.org">http://latex-project.org</ulink>). The official documentation written by
+the &latex; project is available from their web site. This document is
+completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the &latex;
+maintainers.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bug reporting</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>reporting bugs</primary></indexterm>
+Do not send bug reports or anything else about this document to them.
+Instead, please send all comments to <email>latexrefman@tug.org</email>.
+</para>
+<para>This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources
+of information about &latex;, at all levels. Here are a few
+introductions.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr">http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr</ulink>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>latex-doc-ptr document</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Two pages of recommended references to &latex; documentation.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc">http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc</ulink>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>first-latex-doc document</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide">http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide</ulink>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>usrguide official documentation</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of &latex;.
+Many other guides by many other people are also available, independent
+of &latex; itself; one such is the next item:
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort">http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort</ulink>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>lshort document</primary></indexterm>
+<para>A short introduction to &latex;, translated to many languages.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><ulink url="http://tug.org/begin.html">http://tug.org/begin.html</ulink>
+</term><listitem><para>Introduction to the &tex; system, including &latex;, with further
+references.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="2" id="Overview">
+<title>Overview of &latex;</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>overview of &latex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>basics of &latex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Knuth, Donald E.</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Lamport, Leslie</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>&latex; overview</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally
+created by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers
+(<ulink url="http://latex-project.org">http://latex-project.org</ulink>). It is widely used, particularly for
+complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>macro package, &latex; as</primary></indexterm>
+<para>A &latex; user writes an input file containing text along with
+interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text
+should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands
+that interface with Donald&#160;E. Knuth&#8217;s &tex; typesetting program
+(the technical term is that &latex; is a <firstterm>macro package</firstterm> for the
+&tex; engine). The user produces the output document by giving that
+input file to the &tex; engine.
+</para>
+<para>The term &latex; is also sometimes used to mean the language in which
+the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
+available to a &latex; user.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Lamport &tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>pronunciation</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The name &latex; is short for &#8220;Lamport &tex;&#8221;. It is pronounced
+LAH-teck or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document,
+produce the logo with <literal>\LaTeX</literal>. Where use of the logo is not
+sensible, such as in plain text, write it as &#8216;<literal>LaTeX</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="2.1" id="Starting-and-ending">
+<title>Starting and ending</title>
+
+<anchor id="Starting-_0026-ending"/><!-- old name -->
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>starting and ending</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ending and starting</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>hello, world</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
+and ending. This is a small example.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\begin{document}
+Hello, \LaTeX\ world.
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>Every &latex; document has a <literal>\begin{document}</literal> line and an
+<literal>\end{document}</literal> line.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>document class, defined</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Here, the &#8216;<literal>article</literal>&#8217; is the <firstterm>document class</firstterm>. It is implemented
+in a file <filename>article.cls</filename>. You can use any document class on your
+system. A few document classes are defined by &latex; itself, and vast
+array of others are widely available. See <link linkend="Document-classes">Document classes</link>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>preamble, defined</primary></indexterm>
+<para>You can include other &latex; commands between the
+<literal>\documentclass</literal> and the <literal>\begin{document}</literal> commands.
+This area is called the <firstterm>preamble</firstterm>.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\begin{document}</literal>, <literal>\end{document}</literal> pair defines an
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>environment</primary></indexterm>
+<firstterm>environment</firstterm>; the &#8216;<literal>document</literal>&#8217; environment (and no others) is
+required in all &latex; documents (see <link linkend="document">document</link>). &latex; make
+available to you many environments that are documented here
+(see <link linkend="Environments">Environments</link>). Many more are available to you from external
+packages, most importantly those available at CTAN (see <link linkend="CTAN">CTAN</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output from
+a &latex; input file.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="2.2" id="Output-files">
+<title>Output files</title>
+
+<para>&latex; produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files.
+The main output file&#8217;s name ends in either <filename>.dvi</filename> or <filename>.pdf</filename>.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>.dvi</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>.dvi file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>latex command</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>xdvi command</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>dvips command</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>dvipdfmx command</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>dvitype command</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="output-files-dvi"/><para>If &latex; is invoked with the system command <command>latex</command> then it
+produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension <filename>.dvi</filename>. You
+can view this file with a command such as <command>xdvi</command>, or convert
+it to a PostScript <literal>.ps</literal> file with <command>dvips</command> or to a
+Portable Document Format <literal>.pdf</literal> file with <command>dvipdfmx</command>.
+The contents of the file can be dumped in human-readable form with
+<command>dvitype</command>. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are
+available (<ulink url="http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware">http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware</ulink>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>.pdf</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>.pdf file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>pdf&tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>pdflatex command</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="output-files-pdf"/><para>If &latex; is invoked via the system command <command>pdflatex</command>,
+among other commands (see <link linkend="TeX-engines">&tex; engines</link>), then the main output is
+a Portable Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a
+self-contained file, with all fonts and images included.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>&latex; also produces at least two additional files.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>.log</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>transcript file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>log file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>.log file</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="output-files-log"/><para>This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
+loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps
+additional information for any errors.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>.aux</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>auxiliary file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>.aux file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cross references, resolving</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>forward references, resolving</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>references, resolving forward</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="output-files-aux"/><para>Auxiliary information is used by &latex; for things such as
+cross references. For example, the first time that &latex; finds a
+forward reference&#8212;a cross reference to something that has not yet
+appeared in the source&#8212;it will appear in the output as a doubled
+question mark <literal>??</literal>. When the referred-to spot does eventually
+appear in the source then &latex; writes its location information to
+this <literal>.aux</literal> file. On the next invocation, &latex; reads the
+location information from this file and uses it to resolve the
+reference, replacing the double question mark with the remembered
+location.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>.lof file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>list of figures file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>.lot file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>list of tables file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>.toc file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>table of contents file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>contents file</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&latex; may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename
+ending. These include a <literal>.lof</literal> file that is used to make a list of
+figures, a <literal>.lot</literal> file used to make a list of tables, and a
+<literal>.toc</literal> file used to make a table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of
+contents etc.</link>). A particular class may create others; the list is
+open-ended.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="2.3" id="TeX-engines">
+<title>&tex; engines</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>engines, &tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>implementations of &tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>UTF-8</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Unicode input, native</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>TrueType fonts</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>OpenType fonts</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a &tex;
+implementation (see <link linkend="Overview">Overview</link>). This section gives a terse
+overview of the main programs (see also&#160;<link linkend="Command-line">Command line</link>).
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>latex</literal>
+</term><term><literal>pdflatex</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>pdf&tex; engine</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>etex command</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>e-&tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="tex-engines-latex"/><para>In &tex; Live (<ulink url="http://tug.org/texlive">http://tug.org/texlive</ulink>), if &latex; is invoked
+via either the system command <command>latex</command> or <command>pdflatex</command>,
+then the pdf&tex; engine is run (<ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex">http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex</ulink>).
+When invoked as <command>latex</command>, the main output is a <filename>.dvi</filename>
+file; as <command>pdflatex</command>, the main output is a <filename>.pdf</filename> file.
+</para>
+<para>pdf&tex; incorporates the e-&tex; extensions to Knuth&#8217;s original
+program (<ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/etex">http://ctan.org/pkg/etex</ulink>), including additional
+programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty of
+extensions of its own. e-&tex; is available on its own as the system
+command <command>etex</command>, but this is plain &tex; (and produces
+<filename>.dvi</filename>).
+</para>
+<para>In other &tex; distributions, <command>latex</command> may invoke e-&tex;
+rather than pdf&tex;. In any case, the e-&tex; extensions can be
+assumed to be available in &latex;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>lualatex</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>lualatex command</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Lua&tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="tex-engines-lualatex"/><para>If &latex; is invoked via the system command <command>lualatex</command>, the
+Lua&tex; engine is run (<ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex">http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex</ulink>). This
+program allows code written in the scripting language Lua
+(<ulink url="http://luatex.org">http://luatex.org</ulink>) to interact with &tex;&#8217;s typesetting.
+Lua&tex; handles UTF-8 Unicode input natively, can handle OpenType
+and TrueType fonts, and produces a <filename>.pdf</filename> file by default.
+There is also <command>dvilualatex</command> to produce a <filename>.dvi</filename> file,
+but this is rarely used.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>xelatex</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>xelatex command</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Xe&tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>.xdv file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>xdvipdfmx</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="tex-engines-xelatex"/><para>If &latex; is invoked with the system command <command>xelatex</command>, the
+Xe&tex; engine is run (<ulink url="http://tug.org/xetex">http://tug.org/xetex</ulink>). Like Lua&tex;,
+Xe&tex; natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType
+fonts, though the implementation is completely different, mainly using
+external libraries instead of internal code. Xe&tex; produces a
+<filename>.pdf</filename> file as output; it does not support DVI output.
+</para>
+<para>Internally, Xe&tex; creates an <literal>.xdv</literal> file, a variant of DVI,
+and translates that to PDF using the (<literal>x</literal>)<literal>dvipdfmx</literal>
+program, but this process is automatic. The <literal>.xdv</literal> file is only
+useful for debugging.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Other variants of &latex; and &tex; exist, e.g., to provide
+additional support for Japanese and other languages ([u]p&tex;,
+<ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex">http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex</ulink>, <ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex">http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex</ulink>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="2.4" id="LaTeX-command-syntax">
+<title>&latex; command syntax</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>command syntax</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ character starting commands</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>[...] for optional arguments</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>{...} for required arguments</primary></indexterm>
+<para>In the &latex; input file, a command name starts with a backslash
+character, <literal>\</literal>. The name itself then consists of either
+(a)&#160;a string of letters or (b)&#160;a single non-letter.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; commands names are case sensitive so that <literal>\pagebreak</literal>
+differs from <literal>\Pagebreak</literal> (the latter is not a standard command).
+Most commands are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all
+commands in the same case as they are defined.
+</para>
+<para>A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These
+arguments may be either required or optional. Required arguments are
+contained in curly braces, <literal>{...}</literal>. Optional arguments are
+contained in square brackets, <literal>[...]</literal>. Generally, but not
+universally, if the command accepts an optional argument, it comes
+first, before any required arguments.
+</para>
+<para>Inside of an optional argument, to use the character close square
+bracket&#160;(<literal>]</literal>) hide it inside curly braces, as
+in&#160;<literal>\item[closing bracket {]}]</literal>. Similarly, if an optional
+argument comes last, with no required argument after it, then to make
+the first character of the following text be an open square bracket,
+hide it inside curly braces.
+</para>
+<para>Some of &latex;&#8217;s commands are a <firstterm>declaration</firstterm>. Such a command
+changes the value the meaning of some other command or parameter. For
+instance, the <literal>\mainmatter</literal> declaration changes the typesetting of
+page numbers from roman numerals to arabic (see <link linkend="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter &amp;
+\mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</link>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; has the convention that some commands have a <literal>*</literal> form that
+is related to the form without a <literal>*</literal>, such as <literal>\chapter</literal> and
+<literal>\chapter*</literal>. The exact difference in behavior varies from command
+to command.
+</para>
+<para>This manual describes all accepted options and <literal>*</literal>-forms for the
+commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="2.5" id="Environment">
+<title>Environment</title>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{<replaceable>environment name</replaceable>}
+ ...
+\end{<replaceable>environment name</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>An area of &latex; source, inside of which there is a distinct
+behavior. For instance, for poetry in &latex; put the lines between
+<literal>\begin{verse}</literal> and <literal>\end{verse}</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{verse}
+ There once was a man from Nantucket \\
+ ...
+\end{verse}
+</screen>
+<para>See <link linkend="Environments">Environments</link> for a list of environments. Particularly notable is
+that every &latex; document must have a <literal>document</literal> environment,
+a <literal>\begin{document} ... \end{document}</literal> pair.
+</para>
+<para>The <replaceable>environment name</replaceable> at the beginning must exactly match that at
+the end. This includes the case where <replaceable>environment name</replaceable> ends in a
+star&#160;(<literal>*</literal>); both the <literal>\begin</literal> and <literal>\end</literal> texts must
+include the star.
+</para>
+<para>Environments may have arguments, including optional arguments. This
+example produces a table. The first argument is optional (and causes
+the table to be aligned on its top row) while the second argument is
+required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}[t]{r|l}
+ ... rows of table ...
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="2.6" id="CTAN">
+<title>CTAN: the Comprehensive &tex; Archive Network</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>CTAN</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The Comprehensive &tex; Archive Network, CTAN, is the &tex; and
+&latex; community&#8217;s repository of free material. It is a set of
+Internet sites around the world that offer material related to &latex;
+for download. Visit CTAN on the web at <ulink url="https://ctan.org">https://ctan.org</ulink>.
+</para>
+<para>This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
+typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
+person or a small number of people. For instance, many publishers have
+a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher&#8217;s
+specifications.
+</para>
+<para>In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features such
+as search by name or by functionality.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>DANTE e.V.</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>mirrors of CTAN</primary></indexterm>
+<para>CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites. One of the
+sites is the core. This site actively manages the material, for
+instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages. It is
+hosted by the German &tex; group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the
+world help out by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their
+collections with the core site and then in turn making their copies
+publicly available. This gives users close to their location better
+access and relieves the load on the core site. The list of mirrors is
+at <ulink url="https://ctan.org/mirrors">https://ctan.org/mirrors</ulink>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="3" id="Document-classes">
+<title>Document classes</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>document classes</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>classes of documents</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\documentclass</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The document&#8217;s overall class is defined with this command, which is
+normally the first command in a &latex; source file.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass[<replaceable>options</replaceable>]{<replaceable>class</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>article class</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>report class</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>book class</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>letter class</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>slides class</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The following document <replaceable>class</replaceable> names are built into &latex;.
+(Many other document classes are available as separate packages;
+see <link linkend="Overview">Overview</link>.)
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>article</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="document-classes-article"/><para>For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>book</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="document-classes-book"/><para>Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
+matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
+(see <link linkend="Front_002fback-matter">Front/back matter</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>letter</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="document-classes-letter"/><para>Mail, optionally including mailing labels
+(see <link linkend="Letters">Letters</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>report</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="document-classes-report"/><para>For documents of length between an <literal>article</literal> and a <literal>book</literal>,
+such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>slides</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="document-classes-slides"/><para>For slide presentations&#8212;rarely used today. In its place the
+<literal>beamer</literal> package is perhaps the most prevalent (see <link linkend="beamer-template">beamer
+template</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Standard <replaceable>options</replaceable> are described in the next section.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="3.1" id="Document-class-options">
+<title>Document class options</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>document class options</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, document class</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class options</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>global options</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can specify <firstterm>global options</firstterm> or <firstterm>class options</firstterm> to the
+<literal>\documentclass</literal> command by enclosing them in square brackets. To
+specify more than one <replaceable>option</replaceable>, separate them with a comma.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass[<replaceable>option1</replaceable>,<replaceable>option2</replaceable>,...]{<replaceable>class</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Here is the list of the standard class options.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>10pt option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>11pt option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>12pt option</primary></indexterm>
+<para>All of the standard classes except <literal>slides</literal> accept the following
+options for selecting the typeface size (default is <literal>10pt</literal>):
+</para>
+<screen>10pt 11pt 12pt
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>a4paper option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>a5paper option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>b5paper option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>executivepaper option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>legalpaper option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>letterpaper option</primary></indexterm>
+<para>All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper
+size (these show height by width):
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>a4paper</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>210 by 297mm (about 8.25 by 11.75&#160;inches)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>a5paper</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>148 by 210mm (about 5.8 by 8.3&#160;inches)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b5paper</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>176 by 250mm (about 6.9 by 9.8&#160;inches)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>executivepaper</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>7.25 by 10.5&#160;inches
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>legalpaper</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>8.5 by 14&#160;inches
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>letterpaper</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>8.5 by 11&#160;inches (the default)
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pdfpagewidth</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pdfpageheight</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>geometry</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>geometry</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>When using one of the engines pdf&latex;, Lua&latex;, or Xe&latex;
+(see <link linkend="TeX-engines">&tex; engines</link>), options other than <literal>letterpaper</literal> set
+the print area but you must also set the physical paper size. One way
+to do that is to put <literal>\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth</literal> and
+<literal>\pdfpageheight=\paperheight</literal> in your document&#8217;s preamble.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>geometry</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>geometry</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>geometry</literal> package provides flexible ways of setting the print
+area and physical page size.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>draft option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>final option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>fleqn option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>landscape option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>leqno option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>openbib option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>titlepage option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>notitlepage option</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Miscellaneous other options:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>draft</literal>
+</term><term><literal>final</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>black boxes, omitting</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Mark (<literal>draft</literal>) or do not mark (<literal>final</literal>) overfull boxes with a
+black box in the margin; default is <literal>final</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>fleqn</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>flush left equations</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>centered equations</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>equations, flush left vs. centered</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>landscape</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>landscape orientation</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>portrait orientation</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>leqno</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>left-hand equation numbers</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>right-hand equation numbers</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>equation numbers, left vs. right</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>openbib</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>bibliography format, open</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Use &#8220;open&#8221; bibliography format.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>titlepage</literal>
+</term><term><literal>notitlepage</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>title page, separate or run-in</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title information and
+for the abstract also, if there is one. The default for the
+<literal>report</literal> class is <literal>titlepage</literal>, for the other classes it is
+<literal>notitlepage</literal>.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The following options are not available with the <literal>slides</literal> class.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>onecolumn option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>twocolumn option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>oneside option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>twoside option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>openright option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>openany option</primary></indexterm>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>onecolumn</literal>
+</term><term><literal>twocolumn</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Typeset in one or two columns; default is <literal>onecolumn</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>oneside</literal>
+</term><term><literal>twoside</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\evensidemargin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oddsidemargin</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is <literal>oneside</literal>, except
+that in the <literal>book</literal> class the default is <literal>twoside</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page. For two-sided
+printing, the <literal>\evensidemargin</literal> (<literal>\oddsidemargin</literal>) parameter
+determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left
+side of the page and the text&#8217;s left margin, with <literal>\oddsidemargin</literal>
+being 40% of the difference between <literal>\paperwidth</literal> and
+<literal>\textwidth</literal>, and <literal>\evensidemargin</literal> is the remainder.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>openright</literal>
+</term><term><literal>openany</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default is
+<literal>openright</literal> for <literal>book</literal>, and <literal>openany</literal> for <literal>report</literal>.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>clock option to <literal>slides</literal> class</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <literal>slides</literal> class offers the option <literal>clock</literal> for printing
+the time at the bottom of each note.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="3.2" id="Additional-packages">
+<title>Additional packages</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>loading additional packages</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>packages, loading additional</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>additional packages, loading</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\usepackage</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Load a package <replaceable>pkg</replaceable>, with the package options given in the comma-separated
+list <replaceable>options</replaceable>, as here.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage[<replaceable>options</replaceable>]{<replaceable>pkg</replaceable>}.
+</screen>
+<para>To specify more than one package you can separate them with a comma,
+as in <literal>\usepackage{<replaceable>pkg1</replaceable>,<replaceable>pkg2</replaceable>,...}</literal>, or use multiple
+<literal>\usepackage</literal> commands.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>global options</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, global</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Any options given in the <literal>\documentclass</literal> command that are unknown
+to the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
+<literal>\usepackage</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="3.3" id="Class-and-package-construction">
+<title>Class and package construction</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>document class commands</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, document class</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new class commands</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can create new document classes and new packages. For instance, if
+your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a
+standard header for each page, then you could create a new class
+<literal>smcmemo.cls</literal> and begin your documents with
+<literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>What separates a package from a document class is that the commands in a
+package are useful across classes while those in a document class are
+specific to that class. Thus, a command to set page headers is for a
+package while a command to make the page headers say <literal>Memo from the
+SMC Math Department</literal> is for a class.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class and package difference</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>difference between class and package</primary></indexterm>
+</para>
+<para>Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign <literal>@</literal> as a
+character in command names without having to surround the code
+containing that command with <literal>\makeatletter</literal> and
+<literal>\makeatother</literal>. See <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</link>. This allow
+you to create commands that users will not accidentally redefine.
+Another technique is to preface class- or package-specific commands with
+some string to prevent your class or package from interfering with
+others. For instance, the class <literal>smcmemo</literal> might have commands
+<literal>\smc@tolist</literal>, <literal>\smc@fromlist</literal>, etc.
+</para>
+
+
+
+<sect2 label="3.3.1" id="Class-and-package-structure">
+<title>Class and package structure</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class and package structure</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class file layout</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package file layout</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, document class</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class options</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package options</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A class file or package file typically has four parts.
+</para><orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>In the <firstterm>identification part</firstterm>, the file says that it is a &latex;
+package or class and describes itself, using the <literal>\NeedsTeXFormat</literal>
+and <literal>\ProvidesClass</literal> or <literal>\ProvidesPackage</literal> commands.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>The <firstterm>preliminary declarations part</firstterm> declares some commands and
+can also load other files. Usually these commands will be those needed
+for the code used in the next part. For example, an <literal>smcmemo</literal>
+class might be called with an option to read in a file with a list of
+people for the to-head, as <literal>\documentclass[mathto]{smcmemo}</literal>, and
+therefore needs to define a command
+<literal>\newcommand{\setto}[1]{\def\@tolist{#1}}</literal> used in that
+file.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>In the <firstterm>handle options part</firstterm> the class or package declares
+and processes its options. Class options allow a user to start their
+document as <literal>\documentclass[<replaceable>option list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>class
+name</replaceable>}</literal>, to modify the behavior of the class. An example is when you
+declare <literal>\documentclass[11pt]{article}</literal> to set the default
+document font size.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>Finally, in the <firstterm>more declarations part</firstterm> the class or package usually does
+most of its work: declaring new variables, commands and fonts, and
+loading other files.
+</para></listitem></orderedlist>
+<para>Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as <filename>stub.cls</filename>
+where &latex; can find it, for example in the same directory as the
+<filename>.tex</filename> file.
+</para>
+<screen>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{stub}[2017/07/06 stub to start building classes from]
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+\LoadClass{article}
+</screen><indexterm role="cp"><primary>class file example</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
+passing them all to the <literal>article</literal> class, and then loads the
+<literal>article</literal> class to provide the basis for this class&#8217;s code.
+</para>
+<para>For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
+Class Guide, at
+<ulink url="http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf">http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf</ulink> (much
+of the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
+<ulink url="https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf">https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf</ulink>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="3.3.2" id="Class-and-package-commands">
+<title>Class and package commands</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class and package commands</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, class and package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\AtBeginDvi{specials}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AtBeginDvi</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Save in a box register things that are written to the <filename>.dvi</filename> file
+at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\AtEndOfClass{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\AtEndOfPackage{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AtEndOfClass</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AtEndOfPackage</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Hook to insert <replaceable>code</replaceable> to be executed when &latex; finishes
+processing the current class or package. You can use these hooks
+multiple times; the <literal>code</literal> will be executed in the order that you
+called it. See also <link linkend="_005cAtBeginDocument">\AtBeginDocument</link>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\CheckCommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>num</replaceable>][<replaceable>default</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definition</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\CheckCommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>num</replaceable>][<replaceable>default</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definition</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\CheckCommand</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\CheckCommand*</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new command, check</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Like <literal>\newcommand</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</link>) but does
+not define <replaceable>cmd</replaceable>; instead it checks that the current definition of
+<replaceable>cmd</replaceable> is exactly as given by <replaceable>definition</replaceable> and is or is not
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>long command</primary></indexterm>
+<firstterm>long</firstterm> as expected. A long command is a command that accepts
+<literal>\par</literal> within an argument. The <replaceable>cmd</replaceable> command is expected to be
+long with the unstarred version of <literal>\CheckCommand</literal>. Raises an
+error when the check fails. This allows you to check before you start
+redefining <literal>cmd</literal> yourself that no other package has already
+redefined this command.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassError{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>error text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>help text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageError{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>error text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>help text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassWarning{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageWarning{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassWarningNoLine{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageWarningNoLine{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>warning text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassInfo{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageInfo{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ClassInfoNoLine{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PackageInfoNoLine{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>info text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ClassError</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PackageError</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ClassWarning</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PackageWarning</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ClassWarningNoLine</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PackageWarningNoLine</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ClassInfo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PackageInfo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ClassInfoNoLine</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PackageInfoNoLine</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.
+</para>
+<para>For <literal>\ClassError</literal> and <literal>\PackageError</literal> the message is
+<replaceable>error text</replaceable>, followed by &tex;&#8217;s <literal>?</literal> error prompt. If the
+user then asks for help by typing <literal>h</literal>, they see the <replaceable>help
+text</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>The four warning commands are similar except that they write
+<replaceable>warning text</replaceable> on the screen with no error prompt. The four info
+commands write <replaceable>info text</replaceable> only in the transcript file. The
+<literal>NoLine</literal> versions do not show the number of the line generating the
+message, while the other versions do show that number.
+</para>
+<para>To format the messages, including the <replaceable>help text</replaceable>: use
+<literal>\protect</literal> to stop a command from expanding, get a line break with
+<literal>\MessageBreak</literal>, and get a space with <literal>\space</literal> when a space
+character does not allow it, like after a command. Note that &latex;
+appends a period to the messages.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\CurrentOption</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\CurrentOption</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can only
+be used within the <replaceable>code</replaceable> argument of either <literal>\DeclareOption</literal>
+or <literal>\DeclareOption*</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\DeclareOption{<replaceable>option</replaceable>}{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\DeclareOption*{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareOption</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareOption*</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>class options</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package options</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, class</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Make an option available to a user to invoke in their
+<literal>\documentclass</literal> command. For example, the <literal>smcmemo</literal> class
+could have an option <literal>\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}</literal> allowing
+users to put the institutional logo on the first page. The class file
+must contain <literal>\DeclareOption{logo}{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal> (and later,
+<literal>\ProcessOptions</literal>).
+</para>
+<para>If you request an option that has not been declared, by default this
+will produce a warning like <literal>Unused global option(s): [badoption].</literal>
+Change this behaviour with the starred version
+<literal>\DeclareOption*{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}</literal>. For example, many classes extend
+an existing class, using a declaration such as
+<literal>\LoadClass{article}</literal>, and for passing extra options to the
+underlying class use code such as this.
+</para>
+<screen>\DeclareOption*{%
+\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
+}
+</screen>
+<para>Another example is that the class <literal>smcmemo</literal> may allow users to keep
+lists of memo recipients in external files. Then the user could invoke
+<literal>\documentclass[math]{smcmemo}</literal> and it will read the file
+<literal>math.memo</literal>. This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
+passes the option to the <literal>article</literal> class.
+</para>
+<screen>\DeclareOption*{\InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.memo}{}{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}}
+</screen>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\DeclareRobustCommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>num</replaceable>][<replaceable>default</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definition</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\DeclareRobustCommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>num</replaceable>][<replaceable>default</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definition</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareRobustCommand</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareRobustCommand*</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new command, definition</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Like <literal>\newcommand</literal> and <literal>\newcommand*</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp;
+\renewcommand</link>) but these declare a robust command, even if some code
+within the <replaceable>definition</replaceable> is fragile. (For a discussion of robust and
+fragile commands see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>.) Use this command to define new
+robust commands or to redefine existing commands and make them
+robust. Unlike <literal>\newcommand</literal> these do not give an error if macro
+<replaceable>cmd</replaceable> already exists; instead, a log message is put into the
+transcript file if a command is redefined.
+</para>
+<para>Commands defined this way are a bit less efficient than those defined
+using <literal>\newcommand</literal> so unless the command&#8217;s data is fragile and the
+command is used within a moving argument, use <literal>\newcommand</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>etoolbox</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>etoolbox</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <filename>etoolbox</filename> package offers the commands
+<literal>\newrobustcmd</literal>, <literal>\newrobustcmd*</literal>, as well as the commands
+<literal>\renewrobustcmd</literal>, <literal>\renewrobustcmd*</literal>, and the commands
+<literal>\providerobustcmd</literal>, and <literal>\providerobustcmd*</literal>. These are
+similar to <literal>\newcommand</literal>, <literal>\newcommand*</literal>,
+<literal>\renewcommand</literal>, <literal>\renewcommand*</literal>, <literal>\providecommand</literal>, and
+<literal>\providecommand*</literal>, but define a robust <replaceable>cmd</replaceable> with two
+advantages as compared to <literal>\DeclareRobustCommand</literal>:
+</para><orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>They use the low-level e-&tex; protection mechanism rather than the
+higher level &latex; <literal>\protect</literal> mechanism, so they do not incur
+the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>They make the same distinction between <literal>\new&#8230;</literal>,
+<literal>\renew&#8230;</literal>, and <literal>\provide&#8230;</literal>, as the standard
+commands, so they do not just make a log message when you redefine
+<replaceable>cmd</replaceable> that already exists, in that case you need to use either
+<literal>\renew&#8230;</literal> or <literal>\provide&#8230;</literal> or you get an error.
+</para></listitem></orderedlist>
+
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\IfFileExists{<replaceable>file name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>true code</replaceable>}{<replaceable>false code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\InputIfFileExists{<replaceable>file name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>true code</replaceable>}{<replaceable>false code</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\IfFileExists</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\InputIfFileExists</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Execute <replaceable>true code</replaceable> if &latex; finds the file <filename><replaceable>file
+name</replaceable></filename> or <replaceable>false code</replaceable> otherwise. In the first case it executing
+<replaceable>true code</replaceable> and then inputs the file. Thus the command
+</para>
+<screen>\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{%
+ \includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{!! img.pdf not found}
+</screen>
+<para>will include the graphic <filename>img.pdf</filename> if it is found and otherwise
+give a warning.
+</para>
+<para>This command looks for the file in all search paths that &latex; uses,
+not only in the current directory. To look only in the current
+directory do something like <literal>\IfFileExists{./filename}{<replaceable>true
+code</replaceable>}{<replaceable>false code</replaceable>}</literal>. If you ask for a filename without a
+<literal>.tex</literal> extension then &latex; will first look for the file by
+appending the <literal>.tex</literal>; for more on how &latex; handles file
+extensions see <link linkend="_005cinput">\input</link>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\LoadClass[<replaceable>options list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\LoadClassWithOptions{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\LoadClass</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\LoadClassWithOptions</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Load a class, as with <literal>\documentclass[<replaceable>options
+list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release info</replaceable>]</literal>. An example is
+<literal>\LoadClass[twoside]{article}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The <replaceable>options list</replaceable>, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+<replaceable>release date</replaceable> is optional. If present it must have the form
+<replaceable>YYYY/MM/DD</replaceable>.
+<!-- BTW, there are at-macros documented in macros2e.pdf to check the version -->
+<!-- and do some actions conditionnally on version later or not to some -->
+<!-- date. -->
+</para>
+<para>If you request a <replaceable>release date</replaceable> and the date of the package
+installed on your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the
+screen and in the log like this.
+</para>
+<screen>You have requested, on input line 4, version `2038/01/19' of
+document class article, but only version `2014/09/29 v1.4h
+Standard LaTeX document class' is available.
+</screen>
+<para>The command version <literal>\LoadClassWithOptions</literal> uses the list of
+options for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed
+to it via <literal>\PassOptionsToClass</literal>. This is a convenience command
+that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the standard
+<literal>article</literal> class, without having to track which options were passed.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ExecuteOptions{<replaceable>options-list</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ExecuteOptions</primary></indexterm>
+<para>For each option <replaceable>option</replaceable> in the <replaceable>options-list</replaceable>, in order, this command
+executes the command <literal>\ds@<replaceable>option</replaceable></literal>. If this command is not
+defined then that option is silently ignored.
+</para>
+<para>It can be used to provide a default option list before
+<literal>\ProcessOptions</literal>. For example, if in a class file you want the
+default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
+<literal>\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\NeedsTeXFormat{<replaceable>format</replaceable>}[<replaceable>format date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\NeedsTeXFormat</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often issued
+as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
+<literal>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}</literal>. When a document using that class is
+processed, the format name given here must match the format that is
+actually being run (including that the <replaceable>format</replaceable> string is case
+sensitive). If it does not match then execution stops with an error
+like &#8216;<literal>This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.</literal>&#8217;
+</para>
+<para>To specify a version of the format that you know to have certain
+features, include the optional <replaceable>format date</replaceable> on which those features
+were implemented. If present it must be in the form <literal>YYYY/MM/DD</literal>.
+If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
+<replaceable>format date</replaceable> then you get a warning like this.
+</para>
+<screen>You have requested release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only
+release `2016/02/01' is available.
+</screen>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\OptionNotUsed</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\OptionNotUsed</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be used
+within the <replaceable>code</replaceable> argument of either <literal>\DeclareOption</literal> or
+<literal>\DeclareOption*</literal>.
+</para>
+<!-- I cannot reproduce this behavior as it is documented in clsguide. -->
+<!-- In the absence of a @code{\DeclareOption*} declaration, @LaTeX{} issues -->
+<!-- on the console a warning like @code{LaTeX Warning: Unused global -->
+<!-- option(s): [unusedoption].} with the list of not-used options when it -->
+<!-- reaches @code{\begin@{document@}}. -->
+
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PassOptionsToClass{<replaceable>option list</replaceable>}{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\PassOptionsToPackage{<replaceable>option list</replaceable>}{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PassOptionsToClass</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\PassOptionsToPackage</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Adds the options in the comma-separated list <replaceable>option list</replaceable> to the
+options used by any future <literal>\RequirePackage</literal> or <literal>\usepackage</literal>
+command for package <replaceable>package name</replaceable> or the class <replaceable>class name</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>The reason for these commands is: you may load a package any number of
+times with no options but if you want options then you may only supply
+them when you first load the package. Loading a package with options
+more than once will get you an error like <literal>Option clash for package
+foo.</literal> (&latex; throws an error even if there is no conflict between the
+options.)
+</para>
+<para>If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can collapse
+that to once, for example replacing the two
+<literal>\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}</literal> and
+<literal>\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}</literal> with the single command
+<literal>\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>However, imagine that you are loading <filename>firstpkg</filename> and inside that
+package it loads <filename>secondpkg</filename>, and you need the second package to be
+loaded with option <literal>draft</literal>. Then before doing the first package
+you must queue up the options for the second package, like this.
+</para>
+<screen>\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{secondpkg}
+\RequirePackage{firstpkg}
+</screen>
+<para>(If <literal>firstpkg.sty</literal> loads an option in conflict with what you want
+then you may have to alter its source.)
+</para>
+<para>These commands are useful for general users as well as class and package
+writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the <literal>graphicx</literal>
+package with the option <literal>draft</literal> and also wants to use a class
+<literal>foo</literal> that loads the <literal>graphicx</literal> package, but without that
+option. The user could start their &latex; file with
+<literal>\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\documentclass{foo}</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProcessOptions</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProcessOptions*<replaceable>\@options</replaceable></literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProcessOptions</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProcessOptions*</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked. Include it
+in the class file as <literal>\ProcessOptions\relax</literal> (because of the
+existence of the starred command).
+</para>
+<para>Options come in two types. <firstterm>Local options</firstterm> have been specified for this
+particular package in the <replaceable>options</replaceable> argument of
+<literal>\PassOptionsToPackage{<replaceable>options</replaceable>}</literal>,
+<literal>\usepackage[<replaceable>options</replaceable>]</literal>, or
+<literal>\RequirePackage[<replaceable>options</replaceable>]</literal>. <firstterm>Global options</firstterm> are those given
+by the class user in <literal>\documentclass[<replaceable>options</replaceable>]</literal> (If an option
+is specified both locally and globally then it is local.)
+</para>
+<para>When <literal>\ProcessOptions</literal> is called for a package <filename>pkg.sty</filename>, the
+following happens:
+</para><orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>For each option <replaceable>option</replaceable> so far declared
+with <literal>\DeclareOption</literal>, it looks to see if that option is either a
+global or a local option for <literal>pkg</literal>. If so then it executes the
+declared code. This is done in the order in which these options were
+given in <filename>pkg.sty</filename>.
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>For each remaining local option, it executes the command
+<literal>\ds@</literal><replaceable>option</replaceable> if it has been defined somewhere (other than by
+a <literal>\DeclareOption</literal>); otherwise, it executes the default option code
+given in <literal>\DeclareOption*</literal>. If no default option code has been
+declared then it gives an error message. This is done in the order in
+which these options were specified.
+</para></listitem></orderedlist>
+<para>When <literal>\ProcessOptions</literal> is called for a class it works in the same
+way except that all options are local, and the default <replaceable>code</replaceable> for
+<literal>\DeclareOption*</literal> is <literal>\OptionNotUsed</literal> rather than an error.
+</para>
+<para>The starred version <literal>\ProcessOptions*</literal> executes the
+options in the order specified in the calling commands, rather than in
+the order of declaration in the class or package. For a package this
+means that the global options are processed first.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesClass{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable> <replaceable>brief additional information</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesClass{<replaceable>class name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesPackage{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable> <replaceable>brief additional information</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesPackage{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvidesClass</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvidesPackage</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and
+the log file.
+</para>
+<para>When you load a class or package, for example with
+<literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}</literal> or <literal>\usepackage{test}</literal>, &latex;
+inputs a file. If the name of the file does not match the class or
+package name declared in it then you get a warning. Thus, if you invoke
+<literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}</literal>, and the file <filename>smcmemo.cls</filename> has
+the statement <literal>\ProvidesClass{xxx}</literal> then you get a warning like
+<literal>You have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document
+class provides 'xxx'.</literal> This warning does not prevent &latex; from
+processing the rest of the class file normally.
+</para>
+<para>If you include the optional argument then you must include a date,
+before any spaces, of the form <literal>YYYY/MM/DD</literal>. The rest of the
+optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally identifies the
+class, and is written to the screen during compilation and to the log
+file. Thus, if your file <filename>smcmemo.cls</filename> contains the line
+<literal>\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]</literal> and
+your document&#8217;s first line is <literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}</literal> then you
+will see <literal>Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to ask
+to be warned if the version of the class or package is earlier than
+<replaceable>release date</replaceable>. For instance, a user could enter
+<literal>\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]</literal> or
+<literal>\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]</literal> to require a class or package
+with certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier
+than the given date. (Although, in practice package users only rarely
+include a date, and class users almost never do.)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ProvidesFile{<replaceable>file name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>additional information</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ProvidesFile</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
+configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in that
+file and you get in the log a string like <literal>File: test.config
+2017/10/12 config file for test.cls</literal> for <replaceable>file name</replaceable> equal to
+&#8216;<literal>test.config</literal>&#8217; and <replaceable>additional information</replaceable> equal to
+&#8216;<literal>2017/10/12 config file for test.cls</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\RequirePackage[<replaceable>option list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\RequirePackageWithOptions{<replaceable>package name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>release date</replaceable>]</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\RequirePackage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\RequirePackageWithOptions</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Load a package, like the command <literal>\usepackage</literal> (see <link linkend="Additional-packages">Additional
+packages</link>). The &latex; development team strongly recommends use of
+these commands over Plain&#160;&tex;&#8217;s <literal>\input</literal>; see the Class
+Guide. An example is
+<literal>\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The <replaceable>option list</replaceable>, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+<replaceable>release date</replaceable>, if present, must have the form <replaceable>YYYY/MM/DD</replaceable>. If
+the release date of the package as installed on your system is earlier
+than <replaceable>release date</replaceable> then you get a warning like <literal>You have
+requested, on input line 9, version `2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but
+only version `2000/01/01' is available</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\RequirePackageWithOptions</literal> version uses the list of options
+for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to it
+via <literal>\PassOptionsToClass</literal>. This is a convenience command to allow
+easily building classes on existing ones without having to track which
+options were passed.
+</para>
+<para>The difference between <literal>\usepackage</literal> and <literal>\RequirePackage</literal> is
+small. The <literal>\usepackage</literal> command is intended for the document file
+while <literal>\RequirePackage</literal> is intended for package and class files.
+Thus, using <literal>\usepackage</literal> before the <literal>\documentclass</literal> command
+causes &latex; to give error like <literal>\usepackage before
+\documentclass</literal>, but you can use <literal>\RequirePackage</literal> there.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="4" id="Fonts">
+<title>Fonts</title>
+<anchor id="Typefaces"/><!-- old name -->
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>typefaces</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fonts</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Two important aspects of selecting a <firstterm>font</firstterm> are specifying a size
+and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="4.1" id="Font-styles">
+<title>Font styles</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>font styles</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>type styles</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>styles of text</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The following type style commands are supported by &latex;.
+</para>
+<para>In the table below the listed commands, the <literal>\text...</literal> commands,
+is used with an argument, as in <literal>\textit{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>. This is
+the preferred form. But shown after it, in parenthesis, is the
+corresponding declaration form, which is sometimes useful. This form
+takes no arguments, as in <literal>{\itshape <replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>. The scope of
+the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end
+of the current group. In addition, each has an environment form such as
+<literal>\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, are
+cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying either of
+<literal>\sffamily\bfseries</literal> or <literal>\bfseries\sffamily</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nocorrlist</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nocorr</primary></indexterm>
+<para>One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert italic
+corrections if needed (see <link linkend="_005c_002f">\/</link>). Specifically, they insert the
+italic correction unless the following character is in the list
+<literal>\nocorrlist</literal>, which by default consists of a period and a comma.
+To suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use
+<literal>\nocorr</literal> at the start or end of the command argument, such as
+<literal>\textit{\nocorr text}</literal> or <literal>\textsc{text \nocorr}</literal>.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\textrm (\rmfamily)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textrm</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rmfamily</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Roman.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textit (\itshape)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textit</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\itshape</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Italics.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textmd (\mdseries)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textmd</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mdseries</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Medium weight (default).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textbf (\bfseries)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbf</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bfseries</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Boldface.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textup (\upshape)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textup</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\upshape</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Upright (default).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textsl (\slshape)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textsl</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\slshape</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Slanted.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textsf (\sffamily)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textsf</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sffamily</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Sans serif.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textsc (\scshape)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textsc</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\scshape</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Small caps.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\texttt (\ttfamily)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\texttt</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ttfamily</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Typewriter.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textnormal (\normalfont)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textnormal</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\normalfont</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Main document font.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>emphasis</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\emph</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Although it also changes fonts, the <literal>\emph{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> command
+is semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
+substitute for <literal>\textit</literal>. For example, <literal>\emph{<replaceable>start
+text</replaceable> \emph{<replaceable>middle text</replaceable>} <replaceable>end text</replaceable>}</literal> will result in the
+<replaceable>start text</replaceable> and <replaceable>end text</replaceable> in italics, but <replaceable>middle text</replaceable>
+will be in roman.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
+switch to the given style, that is, are <emphasis>not</emphasis> cumulative. They are
+used as declarations: <literal>{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>...}</literal> instead of
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>{...}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>(The unconditional commands below are an older version of font
+switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most
+circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
+what you want.)
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bf</primary></indexterm><literal>\bf</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>bold font</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Switch to bold face.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cal</primary></indexterm><literal>\cal</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>script letters for math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>calligraphic letters for math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\it</primary></indexterm><literal>\it</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>italic font</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Italics.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rm</primary></indexterm><literal>\rm</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>roman font</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Roman.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sc</primary></indexterm><literal>\sc</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>small caps font</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Small caps.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sf</primary></indexterm><literal>\sf</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>sans serif font</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Sans serif.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sl</primary></indexterm><literal>\sl</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>slanted font</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>oblique font</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Slanted (oblique).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tt</primary></indexterm><literal>\tt</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>typewriter font</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>monospace font</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fixed-width font</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The <literal>\em</literal> command is the unconditional version of <literal>\emph</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The following commands are for use in math mode. They are not
+cumulative, so <literal>\mathbf{\mathit{<replaceable>symbol</replaceable>}}</literal> does not
+create a boldface and italic <replaceable>symbol</replaceable>; instead, it will just be in
+italics. This is because typically math symbols need consistent
+typographic treatment, regardless of the surrounding environment.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathrm</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathrm</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Roman, for use in math mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathbf</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathbf</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Boldface, for use in math mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathsf</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathsf</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathtt</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathtt</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathit</literal>
+</term><term><literal>(\mit)</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Italics, for use in math mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathnormal</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathnormal</primary></indexterm>
+<para>For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathcal</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathcal</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathversion</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math, bold</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bold math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>In addition, the command <literal>\mathversion{bold}</literal> can be used for
+switching to bold letters and symbols in
+formulas. <literal>\mathversion{normal}</literal> restores the default.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oldstylenums</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>numerals, old-style</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>old-style numerals</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lining numerals</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>textcomp</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>textcomp</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Finally, the command <literal>\oldstylenums{<replaceable>numerals</replaceable>}</literal> will typeset
+so-called &#8220;old-style&#8221; numerals, which have differing heights and
+depths (and sometimes widths) from the standard &#8220;lining&#8221; numerals,
+which all have the same height as uppercase letters. &latex;&#8217;s
+default fonts support this, and will respect <literal>\textbf</literal> (but not
+other styles; there are no italic old-style numerals in Computer
+Modern). Many other fonts have old-style numerals also; sometimes the
+<literal>textcomp</literal> package must be loaded, and sometimes package options
+are provided to make them the default. FAQ entry:
+<ulink url="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf</ulink>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="4.2" id="Font-sizes">
+<title>Font sizes</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>font sizes</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>typeface sizes</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sizes of text</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The following standard type size commands are supported by &latex;.
+The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font
+size used (in points) with the &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217;, and
+&#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217; document size options, respectively (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class
+options</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tiny</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\scriptsize</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnotesize</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\small</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\normalsize</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\large</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Large</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\LARGE</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\huge</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Huge</primary></indexterm>
+
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="4"><colspec colwidth="23*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="7*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="7*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="5*"></colspec><thead><row><entry><para>Command </para></entry><entry><para><literal>10pt</literal> </para></entry><entry><para><literal>11pt</literal> </para></entry><entry><para><literal>12pt</literal>
+</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry><para><literal>\tiny</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>5 </para></entry><entry><para>6 </para></entry><entry><para>6
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\scriptsize</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>7 </para></entry><entry><para>8 </para></entry><entry><para>8
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\footnotesize</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>8 </para></entry><entry><para>9 </para></entry><entry><para>10
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\small</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>9 </para></entry><entry><para>10 </para></entry><entry><para>10.95
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\normalsize</literal> (default)
+</para></entry><entry><para>10 </para></entry><entry><para>10.95 </para></entry><entry><para>12
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\large</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>12 </para></entry><entry><para>12 </para></entry><entry><para>14.4
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\Large</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>14.4 </para></entry><entry><para>14.4 </para></entry><entry><para>17.28
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\LARGE</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>17.28 </para></entry><entry><para>17.28 </para></entry><entry><para>20.74
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\huge</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>20.74 </para></entry><entry><para>20.74 </para></entry><entry><para>24.88
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\Huge</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>24.88 </para></entry><entry><para>24.88 </para></entry><entry><para>24.88
+</para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>The commands are listed here in declaration forms. You use them by
+declaring them, as with this example.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{quotation} \small
+ The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao.
+\end{quotation}
+</screen>
+<para>The scope of the <literal>\small</literal> lasts until the end of the
+<literal>quotation</literal> environment. It would also end at the next type style
+command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it in
+extra curly braces <literal>{\small We are here, we are here, we are
+here!}</literal>. You can instead use the environment form of these commands;
+for instance, <literal>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="4.3" id="Low_002dlevel-font-commands">
+<title>Low-level font commands</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>low-level font commands</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>font commands, low-level</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
+packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
+ones.
+<!-- xx but it should be complete -->
+<!-- xx something about ultimately reading ENCFAM.fd? -->
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="low-level-font-commands-fontencoding"/><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontencoding{<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontencoding</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There are a
+large number of valid encodings. The most common are <literal>OT1</literal>,
+Knuth&#8217;s original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
+<literal>T1</literal>, also known as the Cork encoding, which has support for the
+accented characters used by the most widespread European languages
+(German, French, Italian, Polish and others), which allows &tex; to
+hyphenate words containing accented letters. For more, see
+<ulink url="https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide">https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide</ulink>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-fontfamily"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontfamily{<replaceable>family</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontfamily</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>families, of fonts</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>font catalogue</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Select the font family. The web page
+<ulink url="http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/">http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/</ulink> provides one way to browse
+through many of the fonts easily used with &latex;. Here are
+examples of some common families.
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><colspec colwidth="4*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="37*"></colspec><tbody><row><entry><para><literal>pag</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Avant Garde
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>fvs</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Bitstream Vera Sans
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>pbk</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Bookman
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>bch</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Charter
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>ccr</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Computer Concrete
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>cmr</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Computer Modern
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>cmss</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Computer Modern Sans Serif
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>cmtt</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Computer Modern Typewriter
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>pcr</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Courier
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>phv</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Helvetica
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>fi4</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Inconsolata
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>lmr</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Latin Modern
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>lmss</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Latin Modern Sans
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>lmtt</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Latin Modern Typewriter
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>pnc</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>New Century Schoolbook
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>ppl</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Palatino
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>ptm</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Times
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>uncl</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Uncial
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>put</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Utopia
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>pzc</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Zapf Chancery
+</para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-fontseries"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontseries{<replaceable>series</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontseries</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>series, of fonts</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Select the font series. A <firstterm>series</firstterm> combines a <firstterm>weight</firstterm> and a
+<firstterm>width</firstterm>. Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible
+combinations. Some common combined series values include:
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><colspec colwidth="2*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="17*"></colspec><tbody><row><entry><para><literal>m</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Medium (normal)
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>b</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Bold
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>c</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Condensed
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>bc</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Bold condensed
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>bx</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Bold extended
+</para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>weights, of fonts</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The possible values for weight, individually, are:
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><colspec colwidth="2*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="18*"></colspec><tbody><row><entry><para><literal>ul</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Ultra light
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>el</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Extra light
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>l</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Light
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>sl</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Semi light
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>m</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Medium (normal)
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>sb</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Semi bold
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>b</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Bold
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>eb</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Extra bold
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>ub</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Ultra bold
+</para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>widths, of fonts</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The possible values for width, individually, are (the meaning and
+relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces):
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><colspec colwidth="2*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="15*"></colspec><tbody><row><entry><para><literal>uc</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Ultra condensed
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>ec</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Extra condensed
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>c</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Condensed
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>sc</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Semi condensed
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>m</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Medium
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>sx</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Semi expanded
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>x</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Expanded
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>ex</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Extra expanded
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>ux</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Ultra expanded
+</para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>When forming the <replaceable>series</replaceable> string from the weight and width, drop the
+<literal>m</literal> that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both
+weight and width are <literal>m</literal>, in which case use just one
+(&#8216;<literal><literal>m</literal></literal>&#8217;).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontshape{<replaceable>shape</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontshape</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>shapes, of fonts</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-fontshape"/><para>Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="2"><colspec colwidth="2*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="19*"></colspec><tbody><row><entry><para><literal>n</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Upright (normal)
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>it</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Italic
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>sl</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Slanted (oblique)
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>sc</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Small caps
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>ui</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Upright italics
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>ol</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>Outline
+</para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and
+small caps are often missing as well.
+</para>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-fontsize"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontsize{<replaceable>size</replaceable>}{<replaceable>skip</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontsize</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>font size</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\baselineskip</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Set the font size and the line spacing. The unit of both parameters
+defaults to points (<literal>pt</literal>). The line spacing is the nominal
+vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline. It is stored in the
+parameter <literal>\baselineskip</literal>. The default <literal>\baselineskip</literal> for
+the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the <literal>\fontsize</literal>.
+Changing <literal>\baselineskip</literal> directly is inadvisable since its value is
+reset every time a size change happens; see <literal>\baselinestretch</literal>, next.
+</para>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-baselinestretch"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\baselinestretch</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\baselinestretch</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&latex; multiplies the line spacing by the value of the
+<literal>\baselinestretch</literal> parameter; the default factor is 1. A change
+takes effect when <literal>\selectfont</literal> (see below) is called. You can
+make a line skip change happen for the entire document, for instance
+doubling it, by doing <literal>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0}</literal> in
+the preamble.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>setspace</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>setspace</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>double spacing</primary></indexterm>
+<para>However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
+<filename>setspace</filename> package. In addition to offering a number of spacing
+options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in places
+where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and figure
+captions. See the package documentation.
+</para>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-linespread"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\linespread{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linespread</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Equivalent to
+<literal>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal>, and
+therefore must be followed by <literal>\selectfont</literal> to have any effect.
+Best specified in the preamble, or use the <literal>setspace</literal> package, as
+just described.
+</para>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-selectfont"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\selectfont</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\selectfont</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The effects of the font commands described above do not happen until
+<literal>\selectfont</literal> is called, as in
+<literal>\fontfamily{<replaceable>familyname</replaceable>}\selectfont</literal>. It is often useful
+to put this in a macro:
+
+<literal>\newcommand*{\myfont}{\fontfamily{<replaceable>familyname</replaceable>}\selectfont}</literal>
+
+(see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</link>).
+</para>
+<anchor id="low-level-font-commands-usefont"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\usefont{<replaceable>enc</replaceable>}{<replaceable>family</replaceable>}{<replaceable>series</replaceable>}{<replaceable>shape</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\usefont</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The same as invoking <literal>\fontencoding</literal>, <literal>\fontfamily</literal>,
+<literal>\fontseries</literal> and <literal>\fontshape</literal> with the given parameters,
+followed by <literal>\selectfont</literal>. For example:
+</para>
+<screen>\usefont{ot1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+</screen>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="5" id="Layout">
+<title>Layout</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>layout commands</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Commands for controlling the general page layout.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="5.1" id="_005conecolumn">
+<title><literal>\onecolumn</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\onecolumn</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>one-column output</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\onecolumn
+</screen>
+<para>Start a new page and produce single-column output. If the document is
+given the class option <literal>onecolumn</literal> then this is the default
+behavior (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>). This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="5.2" id="_005ctwocolumn">
+<title><literal>\twocolumn</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\twocolumn</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>multicolumn text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>two-column output</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<screen>\twocolumn
+\twocolumn[<replaceable>prelim one column text</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is given
+the class option <literal>twocolumn</literal> then this is the default
+(see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>). This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>If the optional <replaceable>prelim one column text</replaceable> argument
+is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column
+typesetting starts.
+</para>
+<para>These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\columnsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="twocolumn-columnsep"/><para>The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with a
+command such as <literal>\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}</literal> You must change
+it before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good
+place.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnseprule</primary></indexterm><literal>\columnseprule</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="twocolumn-columnseprule"/><para>The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway between
+the two columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that there is no rule.
+Change it with a command such as
+<literal>\setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}</literal>, before the two-column
+environment starts.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\columnwidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="twocolumn-columnwidth"/><para>The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to
+<literal>\textwidth</literal>. In two-column mode by default &latex; sets the
+width of each of the two columns to be half of <literal>\textwidth</literal> minus
+<literal>\columnsep</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>In a two-column document, the starred environments <literal>table*</literal> and
+<literal>figure*</literal> are two columns wide, whereas the unstarred environments
+<literal>table</literal> and <literal>figure</literal> take up only one column (see <link linkend="figure">figure</link>
+and see <link linkend="table">table</link>). &latex; places starred floats at the top of a page.
+The following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="twocolumn-dbltopfraction"/><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dbltopfraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\dbltopfraction</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
+occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning that
+the height of a <literal>table*</literal> or <literal>figure*</literal> environment must not
+exceed <literal>0.7\textheight</literal> . If the height of your starred float
+environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following actions
+to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the document:
+</para>
+<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Use the <literal>[tp]</literal> location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put
+the bulky float on a page by itself, as well as at the top of a page.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>Use the <literal>[t!]</literal> location specifier to override the effect of
+<literal>\dbltopfraction</literal> for this particular float.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>Increase the value of <literal>\dbltopfraction</literal> to a suitably large number,
+to avoid going to float pages so soon.
+</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
+<para>You can redefine it, as with
+<literal>\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="twocolumn-dblfloatpagefraction"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dblfloatpagefraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\dblfloatpagefraction</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction
+that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of blank space.
+&latex;&#8217;s default is <literal>0.5</literal>. Change it with <literal>\renewcommand</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="twocolumn-dblfloatsep"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dblfloatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\dblfloatsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance
+between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page. The default is
+<literal>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</literal> for a document set at <literal>10pt</literal> or
+<literal>11pt</literal>, and <literal>14pt plus2pt minus4pt</literal> for a document set at
+<literal>12pt</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="twocolumn-dbltextfloatsep"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dbltextfloatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\dbltextfloatsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or
+bottom of a page and the main text. The default is <literal>20pt plus2pt
+minus4pt</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="twocolumn-dbltopnumber"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dbltopnumber</primary></indexterm><literal>\dbltopnumber</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the
+maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The &latex;
+default is <literal>2</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<!-- From egreg at http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/142232/339 -->
+<para>This example uses <literal>\twocolumn</literal>&#8217;s optional argument of to create a
+title that spans the two-column article:
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+\newcommand{\authormark}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
+\begin{document}
+\twocolumn[{% inside this optional argument goes one-column text
+ \centering
+ \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
+ \large Author One\authormark{1},
+ Author Two\authormark{2},
+ Author Three\authormark{1} \\[1em]
+ \normalsize
+ \begin{tabular}{p{.2\textwidth}@{\hspace{2em}}p{.2\textwidth}}
+ \authormark{1}Department one &amp;\authormark{2}Department two \\
+ School one &amp;School two
+ \end{tabular}\\[3em] % space below title part
+ }]
+
+Two column text here.
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="5.3" id="_005cflushbottom">
+<title><literal>\flushbottom</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\flushbottom</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
+height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
+page. This is most often used when making two-sided documents since the
+differences in facing pages can be glaring.
+</para>
+<para>If &tex; cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
+then you get a message like &#8216;<literal>Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active</literal>&#8217;. If you get that, one option is to
+change to <literal>\raggedbottom</literal> (see <link linkend="_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</link>). Alternatively,
+you can adjust the <literal>textheight</literal> to make compatible pages, or you
+can add some vertical stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs,
+as in <literal>\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}</literal>. Your last option
+is to, in a final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages
+(see <link linkend="_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\flushbottom</literal> state is the default only if you select the
+<literal>twoside</literal> document class option (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="5.4" id="_005craggedbottom">
+<title><literal>\raggedbottom</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\raggedbottom</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>stretch, omitting vertical</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
+rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
+document the facing pages may be different heights. This command can go
+at any point in the document body. See <link linkend="_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</link>.
+</para>
+<para>This is the default unless you select the <literal>twoside</literal> document class
+option (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="5.5" id="Page-layout-parameters">
+<title>Page layout parameters</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>page layout parameters</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>parameters, page layout</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>layout, page parameters for</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>header, parameters for</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footer, parameters for</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>running header and footer</primary></indexterm>
+
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\columnsep</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnseprule</primary></indexterm><literal>\columnseprule</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\columnwidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnsep</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnseprule</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnwidth</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-columnsep"/><anchor id="page-layout-parameters-columnseprule"/><anchor id="page-layout-parameters-columnwidth"/><para>The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between the
+columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class option
+<literal>twocolumn</literal> is in effect (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>).
+See <link linkend="_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</link>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\headheight</primary></indexterm><literal>\headheight</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\headheight</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-headheight"/><para>Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in the
+<literal>article</literal>, <literal>report</literal>, and <literal>book</literal> classes is &#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217;,
+at all type sizes.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\headsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\headsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\headsep</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-headsep"/><para>Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of
+the main text. The default in the <literal>article</literal> and <literal>report</literal>
+classes is &#8216;<literal>25pt</literal>&#8217;. In the <literal>book</literal> class the default is: if the
+document is set at 10pt then it is &#8216;<literal>0.25in</literal>&#8217;, and at 11pt and 12pt
+it is &#8216;<literal>0.275in</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\footskip</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footskip</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-footskip"/><para>Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of
+the page footer. The default in the <literal>article</literal> and <literal>report</literal>
+classes is &#8216;<literal>30pt</literal>&#8217;. In the <literal>book</literal> class the default is: when
+the type size is 10pt the default is &#8216;<literal>0.35in</literal>&#8217;, while at 11pt it is
+&#8216;<literal>0.38in</literal>&#8217;, and at 12pt it is &#8216;<literal>30pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linewidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\linewidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linewidth</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-linewidth"/><para>Width of the current line, decreased for each nested <literal>list</literal>
+(see <link linkend="list">list</link>). That is, the nominal value for <literal>\linewidth</literal> is to
+equal <literal>\textwidth</literal> but for each nested list the <literal>\linewidth</literal>
+is decreased by the sum of that list&#8217;s <literal>\leftmargin</literal> and
+<literal>\rightmargin</literal> (see <link linkend="itemize">itemize</link>).
+<!-- The default varies with the font size, paper width, two-column mode, -->
+<!-- etc. For an @code{article} document set in 10pt, the default is -->
+<!-- @samp{345pt}, while in two-column mode that becomes @samp{229.5pt}. -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparpush</primary></indexterm><literal>\marginparpush</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\marginsep</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\marginparwidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparpush</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginsep</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparwidth</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-marginparpush"/><anchor id="page-layout-parameters-marginsep"/><anchor id="page-layout-parameters-marginparwidth"/><para>The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the horizontal
+space between the text body and the marginal notes, and the horizontal
+width of the notes.
+</para>
+<para>Normally marginal notes appear on the outside of the page, but the
+declaration <literal>\reversemarginpar</literal> changes that (and
+<literal>\normalmarginpar</literal> changes it back).
+</para>
+<para>The defaults for <literal>\marginparpush</literal> in both <literal>book</literal> and
+<literal>article</literal> classes are: &#8216;<literal>7pt</literal>&#8217; if the document is set at 12pt,
+and &#8216;<literal>5pt</literal>&#8217; if the document is set at 11pt or 10pt.
+</para>
+<para>For <literal>\marginsep</literal>, in <literal>article</literal> class the default is
+&#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217; except if the document is set at 10pt and in two-column mode
+where the default is &#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>For <literal>\marginsep</literal> in <literal>book</literal> class the default is &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217; in
+two-column mode and &#8216;<literal>7pt</literal>&#8217; in one-column mode.
+</para>
+<para>For <literal>\marginparwidth</literal> in both <literal>book</literal> and <literal>article</literal>
+classes, in two-column mode the default is 60% of <literal>\paperwidth
+&#8722; \textwidth</literal>, while in one-column mode it is 50% of that
+distance.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oddsidemargin</primary></indexterm><literal>\oddsidemargin</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\evensidemargin</primary></indexterm><literal>\evensidemargin</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oddsidemargin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\evensidemargin</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-oddsidemargin"/><anchor id="page-layout-parameters-evensidemargin"/><para>The <literal>\oddsidemargin</literal> is the extra distance between the left side of
+the page and the text&#8217;s left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the
+document class option <literal>twoside</literal> is chosen and on all pages when
+<literal>oneside</literal> is in effect. When <literal>twoside</literal> is in effect, on
+even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is
+<literal>evensidemargin</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&#8217;s default is that <literal>\oddsidemargin</literal> is 40% of the
+difference between <literal>\paperwidth</literal> and <literal>\textwidth</literal>, and
+<literal>\evensidemargin</literal> is the remainder.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paperheight</primary></indexterm><literal>\paperheight</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paperheight</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-paperheight"/><para>The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print area.
+Normally set with a document class option, as in
+<literal>\documentclass[a4paper]{article}</literal> (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class
+options</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paperwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\paperwidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paperwidth</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-paperwidth"/><para>The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print area.
+Normally set with a document class option, as in
+<literal>\documentclass[a4paper]{article}</literal> (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class
+options</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textheight</primary></indexterm><literal>\textheight</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textheight</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-textheight"/><para>The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is set at
+a nominal type size of 10pt then for an <literal>article</literal> or <literal>report</literal>
+the default is &#8216;<literal>43\baselineskip</literal>&#8217;, while for a <literal>book</literal> it is
+&#8216;<literal>41\baselineskip</literal>&#8217;. At a type size of 11pt the default is
+&#8216;<literal>38\baselineskip</literal>&#8217; for all document classes. At 12pt it is
+&#8216;<literal>36\baselineskip</literal>&#8217; for all classes.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\textwidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textwidth</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-textwidth"/><para>The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an
+<literal>article</literal> or <literal>report</literal> document, the default is &#8216;<literal>345pt</literal>&#8217;
+when the chosen type size is 10pt, the default is &#8216;<literal>360pt</literal>&#8217; at 11pt,
+and it is &#8216;<literal>390pt</literal>&#8217; at 12pt. For a <literal>book</literal> document, the default
+is &#8216;<literal>4.5in</literal>&#8217; at a type size of 10pt, and &#8216;<literal>5in</literal>&#8217; at 11pt or 12pt.
+</para>
+<para>In multi-column output, <literal>\textwidth</literal> remains the width of the
+entire page body, while <literal>\columnwidth</literal> is the width of one column
+(see <link linkend="_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</link>).
+</para>
+<para>In lists (see <link linkend="list">list</link>), <literal>\textwidth</literal> remains the width of the
+entire page body (and <literal>\columnwidth</literal> the width of the entire
+column), while <literal>\linewidth</literal> may decrease for nested lists.
+</para>
+<para>Inside a minipage (see <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>) or <literal>\parbox</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cparbox">\parbox</link>), all the width-related parameters are set to the
+specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the
+<literal>minipage</literal> or <literal>\parbox</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hsize</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-hsize"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hsize</primary></indexterm><literal>\hsize</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>This entry is included for completeness: <literal>\hsize</literal> is the &tex;
+primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should not
+be used in normal &latex; documents.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topmargin</primary></indexterm><literal>\topmargin</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>topmargin</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-topmargin"/><para>Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the
+paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is computed
+based on many other parameters: <literal>\paperheight &#8722; 2in &#8722;
+\headheight &#8722; \headsep &#8722; \textheight &#8722; \footskip</literal>,
+and then divided by two.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\topskip</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topskip</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="page-layout-parameters-topskip"/><para>Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of
+the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default is the
+same as the font size, e.g., &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217; at a type size of 10pt.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="5.6" id="Floats">
+<title>Floats</title>
+
+<para>Some typographic elements, such as figures and tables, cannot be broken
+across pages. They must be typeset outside of the normal flow of text,
+for instance floating to the top of a later page.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; can have a number of different classes of floating material.
+The default is the two classes, <literal>figure</literal> (see <link linkend="figure">figure</link>) and
+<literal>table</literal> (see <link linkend="table">table</link>), but you can create a new class with the
+package <filename>float</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>Within any one float class &latex; always respects the order, so that
+the first figure in a document source must be typeset before the second
+figure. However, &latex; may mix the classes, so it can happen that
+while the first table appears in the source before the first figure, it
+appears in the output after it.
+</para>
+<para>The placement of floats is subject to parameters, given below, that
+limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and
+the bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued that the limits prevent
+them all from fitting on a page then &latex; places what it can and
+defers the rest to the next page. In this way, floats may end up
+being typeset far from their place in the source. In particular, a
+float that is big may migrate to the end of the document. In which
+event, because all floats in a class must appear in sequential order,
+every following float in that class also appears at the end.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>placement of floats</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>specifier, float placement</primary></indexterm>
+<para>In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak
+where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its
+<replaceable>placement</replaceable> argument. The possible values are a sequence of the
+letters below. The default for both <literal>figure</literal> and <literal>table</literal>, in
+both <literal>article</literal> and <literal>book</literal> classes, is <literal>tbp</literal>.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(Top)&#8212;at the top of a text page.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(Bottom)&#8212;at the bottom of a text page. (However, <literal>b</literal> is not
+allowed for full-width floats (<literal>figure*</literal>) with double-column
+output. To ameliorate this, use the <filename>stfloats</filename> or
+<filename>dblfloatfix</filename> package, but see the discussion at caveats in the
+FAQ: <ulink url="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat</ulink>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>h</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(Here)&#8212;at the position in the text where the <literal>figure</literal> environment
+appears. However, <literal>h</literal> is not allowed by itself; <literal>t</literal> is
+automatically added.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>here, putting floats</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>float</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>float</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To absolutely force a float to appear &#8220;here&#8221;, you can
+<literal>\usepackage{float}</literal> and use the <literal>H</literal> specifier which it
+defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
+<ulink url="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere</ulink>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>p</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>float page</primary></indexterm>
+<para>(Page of floats)&#8212;on a separate <firstterm>float page</firstterm>, which is a page
+containing no text, only floats.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>!</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, &latex;
+ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can appear
+and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the page.
+The <literal>!</literal> specifier does <emphasis>not</emphasis> mean &#8220;put the float here&#8221;;
+see above.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Note: the order in which letters appear in the <replaceable>placement</replaceable> argument
+does not change the order in which &latex; tries to place the float;
+for instance, <literal>btp</literal> has the same effect as <literal>tbp</literal>. All that
+<replaceable>placement</replaceable> does is that if a letter is not present then the
+algorithm does not try that location. Thus, &latex;&#8217;s default of
+<literal>tbp</literal> is to try every location except placing the float where it
+occurs in the source.
+</para>
+<para>To prevent &latex; from moving floats to the end of the document or a
+chapter you can use a <literal>\clearpage</literal> command to start a new page and
+insert all pending floats. If a pagebreak is undesirable then you can
+use the <filename>afterpage</filename> package and issue
+<literal>\afterpage{\clearpage}</literal>. This will wait until the current page
+is finished and then flush all outstanding floats.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>flafter</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>flafter</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
+(although on the same output page) if there is a <literal>t</literal> specifier in
+the <replaceable>placement</replaceable> parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting
+the <literal>t</literal> is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed
+at the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using
+the <filename>flafter</filename> package or using the command
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\suppressfloats</primary></indexterm>
+<literal>\suppressfloats[t]</literal>, which causes floats for the top position on
+this page to moved to the next page.
+</para>
+<para>Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
+non-float text (change them with
+<literal>\renewcommand{<replaceable>parameter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>decimal between 0 and 1</replaceable>}</literal>):
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bottomfraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\bottomfraction</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bottomfraction</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="floats-bottomfraction"/><para>The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at
+the bottom; default &#8216;<literal>.3</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\floatpagefraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\floatpagefraction</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\floatpagefraction</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="floats-floatpagefraction"/><para>The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats;
+default &#8216;<literal>.5</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textfraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\textfraction</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textfraction</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="floats-textfraction"/><para>Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
+much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
+different page. The default is &#8216;<literal>.2</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topfraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\topfraction</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topfraction</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="floats-topfraction"/><para>Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
+floats; default &#8216;<literal>.7</literal>&#8217;.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with a
+command of the form <literal>\setlength{<replaceable>parameter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>length
+expression</replaceable>}</literal>):
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\floatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\floatsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\floatsep</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="floats-floatsep"/><para>Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default
+&#8216;<literal>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\intextsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\intextsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\intextsep</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="floats-intextsep"/><para>Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default
+&#8216;<literal>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</literal>&#8217; for 10 point and 11 point documents,
+and &#8216;<literal>14pt plus4pt minus4pt</literal>&#8217; for 12 point documents.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textfloatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\textfloatsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textfloatsep</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="floats-textfloatsep"/><para>Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
+default &#8216;<literal>20pt plus2pt minus4pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with a
+command of the form <literal>\setcounter{<replaceable>ctrname</replaceable>}{<replaceable>natural
+number</replaceable>}</literal>):
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>bottomnumber</primary></indexterm><literal>bottomnumber</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>bottomnumber</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="floats-bottomnumber"/><para>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page;
+default 1.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>dbltopnumber</primary></indexterm><literal>dbltopnumber</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>dbltopnumber</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="floats-dbltopnumber"/><para>Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
+two-column page; default 2.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>topnumber</primary></indexterm><literal>topnumber</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>topnumber</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="floats-topnumber"/><para>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
+default 2.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>totalnumber</primary></indexterm><literal>totalnumber</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>totalnumber</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="floats-totalnumber"/><para>Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The principal &tex;&#160;FAQ entry relating to floats
+<ulink url="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats</ulink> contains
+suggestions for relaxing &latex;&#8217;s default parameters to reduce the
+problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the
+float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach&#8217;s article &#8220;How to
+influence the position of float environments like figure and table in
+&latex;?&#8221;
+(<ulink url="http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf">http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf</ulink>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="6" id="Sectioning">
+<title>Sectioning</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sectioning commands</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>part</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>chapter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>section</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subsection</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subparagraph</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\part</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\chapter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\section</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subsection</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paragraph</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subparagraph</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Structure your text into divisions: parts, chapters, sections, etc. All
+sectioning commands have the same form, one of:
+</para>
+<screen><replaceable>sectioning-command</replaceable>{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+<replaceable>sectioning-command</replaceable>*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+<replaceable>sectioning-command</replaceable>[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>For instance, declare the start of a subsection as with
+<literal>\subsection{Motivation}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The table has each <replaceable>sectioning-command</replaceable> in &latex;. All are
+available in all of &latex;&#8217;s standard document classes <literal>book</literal>,
+<literal>report</literal>, and&#160;<literal>article</literal>, except that <literal>\chapter</literal> is
+not available in <literal>article</literal>.
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="3"><colspec colwidth="25*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="25*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="40*"></colspec><thead><row><entry><para>Sectioning unit </para></entry><entry><para>Command </para></entry><entry><para>Level
+</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry><para>Part
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\part</literal> </para></entry><entry><para>-1 (<literal>book</literal>, <literal>report</literal>), 0 (<literal>article</literal>)
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>Chapter
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\chapter</literal> </para></entry><entry><para>0
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>Section
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\section</literal> </para></entry><entry><para>1
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>Subsection
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\subsection</literal> </para></entry><entry><para>2
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>Subsubsection
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\subsubsection</literal> </para></entry><entry><para>3
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>Paragraph
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\paragraph</literal> </para></entry><entry><para>4
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>Subparagraph
+</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\subparagraph</literal> </para></entry><entry><para>5
+</para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>*</literal>-form of sectioning commands</primary></indexterm>
+<para>All these commands have a <literal>*</literal>-form that prints <replaceable>title</replaceable> as usual
+but is not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents.
+An example of using this is for an appendix in an <literal>article</literal> . The
+input <literal>\appendix\section{Appendix}</literal> gives the output &#8216;<literal>A
+Appendix</literal>&#8217; (see <link linkend="_005cappendix">\appendix</link>). You can lose the numbering&#160;&#8216;<literal>A</literal>&#8217;
+by instead entering <literal>\section*{Appendix}</literal> (articles often omit a
+table of contents and have simple page headers so the other differences
+from the <literal>\section</literal> command may not matter).
+</para>
+<para>The section title <replaceable>title</replaceable> provides the heading in the main text, but
+it may also appear in the table of contents and in the running head or
+foot (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page styles</link>). You may not want the same text in these
+places as in the main text. All of these commands have an optional
+argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> for these other places.
+</para>
+<para>The level number in the table above determines which sectional units are
+numbered, and which appear in the table of contents. If the sectioning
+command&#8217;s <replaceable>level</replaceable> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<literal>secnumdepth</literal> then the titles for this sectioning command will be
+numbered (see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link>). And, if <replaceable>level</replaceable> is less
+than or equal to the value of the counter <literal>tocdepth</literal> then the table
+of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit
+(see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; expects that before you have a <literal>\subsection</literal> you will have
+a <literal>\section</literal> and, in a book, that before a <literal>\section</literal> you will
+have a <literal>\chapter</literal>. Otherwise you can get a something like a
+subsection numbered &#8216;<literal>3.0.1</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>secnumdepth</primary></indexterm><literal>secnumdepth</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>secnumdepth counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>section numbers, printing</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="sectioning-secnumdepth"/><anchor id="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"/><para>Controls which sectioning commands are
+numbered. Suppress numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than
+<replaceable>level</replaceable> <literal>\setcounter{secnumdepth}{<replaceable>level</replaceable>}</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005csetcounter">\setcounter</link>). See the above table for the level numbers. For
+instance, if the <literal>secnumdepth</literal> is 1 in an <literal>article</literal> then a
+<literal>\section{Introduction}</literal> command will produce output like &#8216;<literal>1
+Introduction</literal>&#8217; while <literal>\subsection{Discussion}</literal> will produce output
+like &#8216;<literal>Discussion</literal>&#8217;, without the number. &latex;&#8217;s default
+<literal>secnumdepth</literal> is&#160;3 in <filename>article</filename> class and &#160;2 in the
+<filename>book</filename> and <filename>report</filename> classes.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>tocdepth</primary></indexterm><literal>tocdepth</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>tocdepth counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>table of contents, sectioning numbers printed</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="sectioning-tocdepth"/><anchor id="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"/><para>Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of contents.
+The setting <literal>\setcounter{tocdepth}{<replaceable>level</replaceable>}</literal> makes the
+sectioning units at <replaceable>level</replaceable> be the smallest ones listed
+(see <link linkend="_005csetcounter">\setcounter</link>). See the above table for the level numbers. For
+instance, if <literal>tocdepth</literal> is&#160;1 then the table of contents will
+list sections but not subsections. &latex;&#8217;s default
+<literal>secnumdepth</literal> is&#160;3 in <filename>article</filename> class and &#160;2 in the
+<filename>book</filename> and <filename>report</filename> classes.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+
+<sect1 label="6.1" id="_005cpart">
+<title><literal>\part</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\part</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>part</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sectioning, part</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\part{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\part*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\part[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Start a document part. The standard &latex; classes <literal>book</literal>,
+<literal>report</literal>, and <literal>article</literal>, all have this command.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a document part, in a book.
+</para>
+<screen>\part{VOLUME I \\
+ PERSONAL MEMOIRS OF U.\ S.\ GRANT}
+\chapter{ANCESTRY--BIRTH--BOYHOOD.}
+My family is American, and has been for generations,
+in all its branches, direct and collateral.
+</screen>
+<para>In each standard class the <literal>\part</literal> command outputs a part number
+such as &#8216;<literal>Part I</literal>&#8217;, alone on its line, in boldface, and in large
+type. Then &latex; outputs <replaceable>title</replaceable>, also alone on its line, in
+bold and in even larger type. In class <literal>book</literal>, the &latex;
+default puts each part alone on its own page. If the book is two-sided
+then &latex; will skip a page if needed to have the new part on an
+odd-numbered page. In <literal>report</literal> it is again alone on a page, but
+&latex; won&#8217;t force it onto an odd-numbered page. In an <literal>article</literal>
+&latex; does not put it on a fresh page, but instead outputs the part
+number and part title onto the main document page.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal>&#160;form shows <replaceable>title</replaceable>
+but it does not show the part number, does not increment the
+<literal>part</literal> counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> will appear as the part title in
+the table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>) and in running
+headers (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page styles</link>). If it is not present then <replaceable>title</replaceable>
+will be there. This example puts a line break in <replaceable>title</replaceable> but leaves
+out the break in the table of contents.
+</para>
+<screen>\part[Up from the bottom; my life]{Up from the bottom\\ my life}
+</screen>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a part is&#160;-1
+(see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link> and see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>indentfirst</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>indentfirst</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>In the class <literal>article</literal>, if a paragraph immediately follows the part
+title then it is not indented. To get an indent you can use the package
+<filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>One package to change the behavior of <literal>\part</literal> is <filename>titlesec</filename>.
+See its documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="6.2" id="_005cchapter">
+<title><literal>\chapter</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\chapter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>chapter</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\chapter*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\chapter[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Start a chapter. The standard &latex; classes <literal>book</literal> and
+<literal>report</literal> have this command but <literal>article</literal> does not.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a chapter.
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter{Loomings}
+Call me Ishmael.
+Some years ago---never mind how long precisely---having little or no
+money in my purse, and nothing particular to interest me on shore, I
+thought I would sail about a little and see the watery part of
+the world.
+</screen>
+<para>The &latex; default starts each chapter on a fresh page, an
+odd-numbered page if the document is two-sided. It produces a chapter
+number such as &#8216;<literal>Chapter 1</literal>&#8217; in large boldface type (the size is
+<literal>\huge</literal>). It then puts <replaceable>title</replaceable> on a fresh line, in boldface
+type that is still larger (size <literal>\Huge</literal>). It also increments the
+<literal>chapter</literal> counter, adds an entry to the table of contents
+(see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>), and sets the running header
+information (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page styles</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal>&#160;form shows <replaceable>title</replaceable> on a fresh line, in boldface.
+But it does not show the chapter number, does not increment the
+<literal>chapter</literal> counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does
+not affect the running header. (If you use the page style
+<literal>headings</literal> in a two-sided document then the header will be from the
+prior chapter.) This example illustrates.
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter*{Preamble}
+</screen>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> will appear as the chapter title
+in the table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>) and in
+running headers (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page styles</link>). If it is not present then
+<replaceable>title</replaceable> will be there. This shows the full name in the chapter
+title,
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter[Weyl]{Hermann Klaus Hugo (Peter) Weyl (1885--1955)}
+</screen>
+<para>but only &#8216;<literal>Weyl</literal>&#8217; on the contents page. This puts a line break in
+the title but that doesn&#8217;t work well with running headers so it omits
+the break in the contents
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter[Given it all\\ my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
+</screen>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is&#160;0
+(see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link> and see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>indentfirst</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>indentfirst</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. To get an indent use the package
+<filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>You can change what is shown for the chapter number. To change it to
+something like &#8216;<literal>Lecture 1</literal>&#8217;, put in the preamble either
+<literal>\renewcommand{\chaptername}{Lecture}</literal> or this
+(see <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</link>).
+</para>
+<screen>\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\@chapapp}{Lecture}
+\makeatother
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To make this change because of the primary language for
+the document, see the package <filename>babel</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>In a two-sided document &latex; puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if
+necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any
+running headers. To make that page completely blank,
+see&#160;<link linkend="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</link>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To change the behavior of the <literal>\chapter</literal> command, you can copy its
+definition from the &latex; format file and make adjustments. But
+there are also many packages on CTAN that address this. One is
+<filename>titlesec</filename>. See its documentation, but the example below gives a
+sense of what it can do.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
+\titleformat{\chapter}
+ {\Huge\bfseries} % format of title
+ {} % label, such as 1.2 for a subsection
+ {0pt} % length of separation between label and title
+ {} % before-code hook
+</screen>
+<para>This omits the chapter number &#8216;<literal>Chapter 1</literal>&#8217; from the page but unlike
+<literal>\chapter*</literal> it keeps the chapter in the table of contents and the
+running headers.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="6.3" id="_005csection">
+<title><literal>\section</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\section</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>section</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\section{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\section*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\section[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Start a section. The standard &latex; classes <literal>article</literal>,
+<literal>book</literal>, and <literal>report</literal> all have this command.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a section.
+</para>
+<screen>In this Part we tend to be more interested in the function,
+in the input-output behavior,
+than in the details of implementing that behavior.
+
+\section{Turing machines}
+Despite this desire to downplay implementation,
+we follow the approach of A~Turing that the
+first step toward defining the set of computable functions
+is to reflect on the details of what mechanisms can do.
+</screen>
+<para>For the standard &latex; classes <literal>book</literal> and <literal>report</literal> the
+default output is like &#8216;<literal>1.2 <replaceable>title</replaceable></literal>&#8217; (for chapter&#160;1,
+section&#160;2), alone on its line and flush left, in boldface and a
+larger type (the type size is <literal>\Large</literal>). The same holds in
+<literal>article</literal> except that there are no chapters in that class so it
+looks like &#8216;<literal>2 <replaceable>title</replaceable></literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal>&#160;form shows <replaceable>title</replaceable>.
+But it does not show the section number, does not increment the
+<literal>section</literal> counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does
+not affect the running header. (If you use the page style
+<literal>headings</literal> in a two-sided document then the header will be from the
+prior section.)
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> will appear as the section title
+in the table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>) and in
+running headers (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page styles</link>). If it is not present then
+<replaceable>title</replaceable> will be there. This shows the full name in the title of the
+section,
+</para>
+<screen>\section[Elizabeth~II]{Elizabeth the Second,
+ by the Grace of God of the United Kingdom,
+ Canada and Her other Realms and Territories Queen,
+ Head of the Commonwealth, Defender of the Faith.}
+</screen>
+<para>but only &#8216;<literal>Elizabeth II</literal>&#8217; on the contents page and in the headers.
+This has a line break in <replaceable>title</replaceable> but that does not work with headers
+so it is omitted from the contents and headers.
+</para>
+<screen>\section[Truth is, I cheated; my life story]{Truth is,
+ I cheated\\my life story}
+</screen>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a section is&#160;1
+(see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link> and see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>indentfirst</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>indentfirst</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>In general, to change the behavior of the <literal>\section</literal> command, there
+are a number of options. One is the <literal>\@startsection</literal> command
+(see <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</link>). There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including <filename>titlesec</filename>. See the documentation but the
+example below gives a sense of what they can do.
+</para>
+<!-- credit: egreg https://groups.google.com/forum/#!topic/comp.text.tex/tvc8oM5P4y4 -->
+<screen>\usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
+\titleformat{\section}
+ {\normalfont\Large\bfseries} % format of title
+ {\makebox[1pc][r]{\thesection\hspace{1pc}}} % label
+ {0pt} % length of separation between label and title
+ {} % before-code hook
+\titlespacing*{\section}
+ {-1pc}{18pt}{10pt}[10pc]
+</screen>
+<para>That puts the section number in the margin.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="6.4" id="_005csubsection">
+<title><literal>\subsection</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subsection</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subsection</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\subsection{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\subsection*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\subsection[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Start a subsection. The standard &latex; classes <literal>article</literal>,
+<literal>book</literal>, and <literal>report</literal> all have this command.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a subsection.
+</para>
+<screen>We will show that there are more functions than Turing machines and that
+therefore some functions have no associated machine.
+
+\subsection{Cardinality} We will begin with two paradoxes that
+dramatize the challenge to our intuition posed by comparing the sizes of
+infinite sets.
+</screen>
+<para>For the standard &latex; classes <literal>book</literal> and <literal>report</literal> the
+default output is like &#8216;<literal>1.2.3 <replaceable>title</replaceable></literal>&#8217; (for chapter&#160;1,
+section&#160;2, subsection&#160;3), alone on its line and flush left, in
+boldface and a larger type (the type size is <literal>\large</literal>). The same
+holds in <literal>article</literal> except that there are no chapters in that class
+so it looks like &#8216;<literal>2.3 <replaceable>title</replaceable></literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal>&#160;form shows <replaceable>title</replaceable>.
+But it does not show the section number, does not increment the
+<literal>section</literal> counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> will appear as the section title
+in the table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>). If it is
+not present then <replaceable>title</replaceable> will be there. This shows the full name in
+the title of the section,
+</para>
+<screen>\subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
+ Chemical Elements} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow}
+</screen>
+<para>but only &#8216;<literal>&#x03B1;,&#x03B2;,&#x03B3;
+paper</literal>&#8217; on the contents page.
+</para>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is&#160;2
+(see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link> and see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>indentfirst</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>indentfirst</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the
+<literal>\subsection</literal> command. One is the <literal>\@startsection</literal> command
+(see <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</link>). There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including <filename>titlesec</filename>. See the documentation but the
+example below gives a sense of what they can do.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
+\titleformat{\subsection}[runin]
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries} % format of the title
+ {\thesubsection} % label
+ {0.6em} % space between label and title
+ {} % before-code hook
+</screen>
+<para>That puts the subsection number and <replaceable>title</replaceable> in the first line of
+text.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 label="6.5" id="_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">
+<title><literal>\subsubsection</literal>, <literal>\paragraph</literal>, <literal>\subparagraph</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subsubsection</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subsubsection</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paragraph</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subparagraph</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subparagraph</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\subsubsection{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\subsubsection*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\subsubsection[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\paragraph{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\paragraph*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\paragraph[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\subparagraph{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\subparagraph*{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\subparagraph[<replaceable>toc-title</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Start a subsubsection, paragraph, or subparagraph. The standard
+&latex; classes <literal>article</literal>, <literal>book</literal>, and <literal>report</literal> all have
+these commands, although they are not commonly used.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a subsubsection.
+</para>
+<screen>\subsubsection{Piston ring compressors: structural performance}
+Provide exterior/interior wall cladding assemblies
+capable of withstanding the effects of load and stresses from
+consumer-grade gasoline engine piston rings.
+</screen>
+<para>The default output of each of the three does not change over the
+standard &latex; classes <literal>article</literal>, <literal>book</literal>, and
+<literal>report</literal>. For <literal>\subsubsection</literal> the <replaceable>title</replaceable> is alone on
+its line, in boldface and normal size type. For <literal>\paragraph</literal> the
+<replaceable>title</replaceable> is inline with the text, not indented, in boldface and
+normal size type. For <literal>\subparagraph</literal> the <replaceable>title</replaceable> is inline
+with the text, with a paragraph indent, in boldface and normal size type
+(Because an <literal>article</literal> has no chapters its subsubsections are
+numbered and so it looks like &#8216;<literal>1.2.3 <replaceable>title</replaceable></literal>&#8217;, for
+section&#160;1, subsection&#160;2, and subsubsection&#160;3. The other
+two divisions are not numbered.)
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal>&#160;form shows <replaceable>title</replaceable>. But it does not increment the
+associated counter and produces no table of contents entry (and does not
+show the number for <literal>\subsubsection</literal>).
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>toc-title</replaceable> will appear as the division title
+in the table of contents (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>). If it is
+not present then <replaceable>title</replaceable> will be there.
+</para>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a subsubsection is&#160;3, of
+a paragraph is&#160;4, and of a subparagraph is&#160;5
+(see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link> and see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>indentfirst</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>indentfirst</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <filename>indentfirst</filename>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>titlesec</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>titlesec</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these commands.
+One is the <literal>\@startsection</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</link>).
+There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including
+<filename>titlesec</filename>. See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 label="6.6" id="_005cappendix">
+<title><literal>\appendix</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\appendix</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>appendix</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>appendices</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\appendix
+</screen>
+<para>This does not directly produce any output. But in a book or report it
+declares that subsequent <literal>\chapter</literal> commands start an appendix. In
+an article it does the same, for <literal>\section</literal> commands. It also
+resets the <literal>chapter</literal> and <literal>section</literal> counters to&#160;0 in a
+book or report, and in an article resets the <literal>section</literal> and
+<literal>subsection</literal> counters.
+</para>
+<para>In this book
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter{One} ...
+\chapter{Two} ...
+ ...
+\appendix
+\chapter{Three} ...
+\chapter{Four} ...
+</screen>
+<para>the first two will generate output numbered &#8216;<literal>Chapter 1</literal>&#8217; and
+&#8216;<literal>Chapter 2</literal>&#8217;. After the <literal>\appendix</literal> the numbering will be
+&#8216;<literal>Appendix A</literal>&#8217; and &#8216;<literal>Appendix B</literal>&#8217;. See <link linkend="Larger-book-template">Larger book template</link>
+for another example.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>appendix</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>appendix</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <filename>appendix</filename> package adds the command
+<literal>\appendixpage</literal> to put a separate &#8216;<literal>Appendices</literal>&#8217; in the document
+body before the first appendix, and the command <literal>\addappheadtotoc</literal>
+to do the same in the table of contents. You can reset the name
+&#8216;<literal>Appendix</literal>&#8217; with a command like
+<literal>\renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}</literal>, as well as a
+number of other features. See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+
+<sect1 label="6.7" id="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">
+<title><literal>\frontmatter</literal>, <literal>\mainmatter</literal>, <literal>\backmatter</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frontmatter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>book, front matter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mainmatter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>book, main matter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\backmatter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>book, back matter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>book, end matter</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\frontmatter
+\mainmatter
+\backmatter
+</screen>
+<para>Format a <literal>book</literal> class document differently according to which part
+of the document is being produced. All three commands are optional.
+</para>
+<para>Traditionally, a book&#8217;s front matter contains such things as the title
+page, an abstract, a table of contents, a preface, a list of notations,
+a list of figures, and a list of tables. (Some of these front matter
+pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not numbered.) The
+back matter may contain such things as a glossary, notes, a
+bibliography, and an index.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\frontmatter</literal> declaration makes the pages numbered in
+lowercase roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each
+chapter&#8217;s title appears in the table of contents; if you use other
+sectioning commands here, use the <literal>*</literal>-version (see <link linkend="Sectioning">Sectioning</link>).
+The <literal>\mainmatter</literal> changes the behavior back to the expected
+version, and resets the page number. The <literal>\backmatter</literal> leaves the
+page numbering alone but switches the chapters back to being not
+numbered. See <link linkend="Larger-book-template">Larger book template</link> for an example using the three.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="6.8" id="_005c_0040startsection">
+<title><literal>\@startsection</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@startsection</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>section, redefining</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\@startsection{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>level</replaceable>}{<replaceable>indent</replaceable>}{<replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable>}{<replaceable>afterskip</replaceable>}{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Used to help redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning
+divisions such as <literal>\section</literal> or <literal>\subsection</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Note that the <filename>titlesec</filename> package makes manipulation of sectioning
+easier. Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
+satisfied with <literal>\@startsection</literal>, some cannot. For instance, in
+the standard &latex; <literal>book</literal> and <literal>report</literal> classes the commands
+<literal>\chapter</literal> and <literal>\report</literal> are not constructed in this way. To
+make such a command you may want to use the <literal>\secdef</literal> command.
+<!-- xx define, and make a cross reference to, secdef. -->
+</para>
+<para>Technically, <literal>\@startsection</literal> has the form
+</para>
+<screen>\@startsection{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}
+ {<replaceable>level</replaceable>}
+ {<replaceable>indent</replaceable>}
+ {<replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable>}
+ {<replaceable>afterskip</replaceable>}
+ {<replaceable>style</replaceable>}*[<replaceable>toctitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>so that issuing
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}
+ {<replaceable>level</replaceable>}
+ {<replaceable>indent</replaceable>}
+ {<replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable>}
+ {<replaceable>afterskip</replaceable>}
+ {<replaceable>style</replaceable>}}
+</screen>
+<para>redefines <literal>\section</literal> to have the form
+<literal>\section*[<replaceable>toctitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}</literal> (here too, the
+star&#160;<literal>*</literal> is optional). See <link linkend="Sectioning">Sectioning</link>. This implies that
+when you write a command like <literal>\renewcommand{section}{...}</literal>,
+the <literal>\@startsection{...}</literal> must come last in the definition. See
+the examples below.
+</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry><term><replaceable>name</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="startsection-name"/><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002fname"/><para>Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header. This counter
+must be defined separately. Most commonly this is either
+<literal>section</literal>, <literal>subsection</literal>, or <literal>paragraph</literal>. Although in
+those cases the counter name is the same as the sectioning command
+itself, you don&#8217;t have to use the same name.
+</para>
+<para>Then <literal>\the</literal><replaceable>name</replaceable> displays the title number and
+<literal>\</literal><replaceable>name</replaceable><literal>mark</literal> is for the page headers. See the third
+example below.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>level</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="startsection-level"/><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"/><para>An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command.
+See <link linkend="Sectioning">Sectioning</link> for the list of standard level numbers.
+</para>
+<para>If <replaceable>level</replaceable> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<literal>secnumdepth</literal> then titles for this sectioning command will be
+numbered (see <link linkend="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</link>). For instance, if
+<literal>secnumdepth</literal> is 1 in an <literal>article</literal> then the command
+<literal>\section{Introduction}</literal> will produce output like &#8220;1
+Introduction&#8221; while <literal>\subsection{Discussion}</literal> will produce
+output like &#8220;Discussion&#8221;, without the number prefix.
+</para>
+<para>If <replaceable>level</replaceable> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<replaceable>tocdepth</replaceable> then the table of contents will have an entry for this
+sectioning unit (see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>). For instance, in an
+<literal>article</literal>, if <replaceable>tocdepth</replaceable> is 1 then the table of contents will
+list sections but not subsections.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>indent</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="startsection-indent"/><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002findent"/><para>A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with respect
+to the left margin. To have the title flush with the margin use
+<literal>0pt</literal>. A negative indentation such as <literal>-\parindent</literal> will move
+the title into the left margin.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="startsection-beforeskip"/><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"/><para>The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space that
+is inserted before this sectioning unit&#8217;s title. This space will be
+discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the top of a fresh
+page. If this number is negative then the first paragraph following the
+header is not indented, if it is non-negative then the first paragraph
+is indented. (Note that the negative of <literal>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</literal>
+is <literal>-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt</literal>.)
+</para>
+<para>For example, if <replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable> is <literal>-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</literal>
+then to start the new sectioning unit, &latex; will add about 3.5 times
+the height of a letter x in vertical space, and the first paragraph in
+the section will not be indented. Using a rubber length, with
+<literal>plus</literal> and <literal>minus</literal>, is good practice here since it gives
+&latex; more flexibility in making up the page (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The full accounting of the vertical space between the baseline of the
+line prior to this sectioning unit&#8217;s header and the baseline of the
+header is that it is the sum of the <literal>\parskip</literal> of the text font,
+the <literal>\baselineskip</literal> of the title font, and the absolute value of
+the <replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable>. This space is typically rubber so it may stretch
+or shrink. (If the sectioning unit starts on a fresh page so that the
+vertical space is discarded then the baseline of the header text will be
+where &latex; would put the baseline of the first text line on that
+page.)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>afterskip</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="startsection-afterskip"/><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"/><para>This is a length. If <replaceable>afterskip</replaceable> is non-negative then this is the
+vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit&#8217;s title header. If it
+is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so that it
+becomes part of the next paragraph. In this case the absolute value of
+the length gives the horizontal space between the end of the title and
+the beginning of the following paragraph. (Note that the negative of
+<literal>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</literal> is <literal>-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt</literal>.)
+</para>
+<para>As with <replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable>, using a rubber length, with <literal>plus</literal> and
+<literal>minus</literal> components, is good practice here since it gives &latex;
+more flexibility in putting together the page.
+</para>
+<para>If <literal>afterskip</literal> is non-negative then the full accounting of the
+vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit&#8217;s header and
+the baseline of the first line of the following paragraph is that it is
+the sum of the <literal>\parskip</literal> of the title font, the
+<literal>\baselineskip</literal> of the text font, and the value of <replaceable>after</replaceable>.
+That space is typically rubber so it may stretch or shrink. (Note that
+because the sign of <literal>afterskip</literal> changes the sectioning unit
+header&#8217;s from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
+<literal>afterskip</literal> to cancel part of the <literal>\parskip</literal>.)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>style</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="startsection-style"/><anchor id="_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"/><para>Controls the styling of the title. See the examples below. Typical
+commands to use here are <literal>\centering</literal>, <literal>\raggedright</literal>,
+<literal>\normalfont</literal>, <literal>\hrule</literal>, or <literal>\newpage</literal>. The last command
+in <replaceable>style</replaceable> may be one that takes one argument, such as
+<literal>\MakeUppercase</literal> or <literal>\fbox</literal> that takes one argument. The
+section title will be supplied as the argument to this command. For
+instance, setting <replaceable>style</replaceable> to <literal>\bfseries\MakeUppercase</literal> would
+produce titles that are bold and uppercase.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>These are &latex;&#8217;s defaults for the first three sectioning units that
+are defined with <literal>\@startsection</literal>, for the <filename>article</filename>,
+<filename>book</filename>, and <filename>report</filename> classes. For section, the <replaceable>level</replaceable> is
+1, the <replaceable>indent</replaceable> is 0pt, the <replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable> is <literal>-3.5ex
+plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</literal>, the <replaceable>afterskip</replaceable> is <literal>2.3ex plus 0.2ex</literal>,
+and the <replaceable>style</replaceable> is <literal>\normalfont\Large\bfseries</literal>. For
+subsection, the <replaceable>level</replaceable> is 2, the <replaceable>indent</replaceable> is 0pt, the
+<replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable> is <literal>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</literal>, the
+<replaceable>afterskip</replaceable> is <literal>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</literal>, and the <replaceable>style</replaceable> is
+<literal>\normalfont\large\bfseries</literal>. For subsubsection, the <replaceable>level</replaceable>
+is 3, the <replaceable>indent</replaceable> is 0pt, the <replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable> is
+<literal>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</literal>, the <replaceable>afterskip</replaceable> is
+<literal>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</literal>, and the <replaceable>style</replaceable> is
+<literal>\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Here are examples. They go either in a package or class file or in the
+preamble of a &latex; document. If you put them in the preamble they
+must go between a <literal>\makeatletter</literal> command and a
+<literal>\makeatother</literal>. (Probably the error message <literal>You can't use
+`\spacefactor' in vertical mode.</literal> means that you forgot this.)
+See <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</link>.
+</para>
+<para>This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered. It says
+<literal>\renewcommand</literal> because &latex;&#8217;s standard classes have already
+defined a <literal>\section</literal>. For the same reason it does not define a
+<literal>section</literal> counter, or the commands <literal>\thesection</literal> and
+<literal>\l@section</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand\section{%
+ \@startsection{section}% <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002fname"><replaceable>name</replaceable></link>
+ {1}% <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"><replaceable>level</replaceable></link>
+ {0pt}% <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002findent"><replaceable>indent</replaceable></link>
+ {-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex}% <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"><replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable></link>
+ {2.3ex plus.2ex}% <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"><replaceable>afterskip</replaceable></link>
+ {\centering\normalfont\Large\bfseries}% <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"><replaceable>style</replaceable></link>
+ }
+</screen>
+<para>This will put <literal>subsection</literal> titles in small caps type, inline with the paragraph.
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand\subsection{%
+ \@startsection{subsection}% <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002fname"><replaceable>name</replaceable></link>
+ {2}% <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"><replaceable>level</replaceable></link>
+ {0em}% <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002findent"><replaceable>indent</replaceable></link>
+ {-1ex plus 0.1ex minus -0.05ex}% <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"><replaceable>beforeskip</replaceable></link>
+ {-1em plus 0.2em}% <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"><replaceable>afterskip</replaceable></link>
+ {\scshape}% <link linkend="_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"><replaceable>style</replaceable></link>
+ }
+</screen>
+<para>The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands.
+This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to
+display that counter.
+</para>
+<!-- From https://groups.google.com/forum/#!searchin/comp.text.tex/startsection%7Csort:relevance/comp.text.tex/sB-nTS-oL08/ZZeKYdG0llMJ -->
+<screen>\setcounter{secnumdepth}{6}% show counters this far down
+\newcounter{subsubparagraph}[subparagraph]% counter for numbering
+\renewcommand{\thesubsubparagraph}% how to display
+ {\thesubparagraph.\@arabic\c@subsubparagraph}% numbering
+\newcommand{\subsubparagraph}{\@startsection
+ {subsubparagraph}%
+ {6}%
+ {0em}%
+ {\baselineskip}%
+ {0.5\baselineskip}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize}}
+\newcommand*\l@subsubparagraph{\@dottedtocline{6}{10em}{5em}}% for toc
+\newcommand{\subsubparagraphmark}[1]{}% for page headers
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="7" id="Cross-references">
+<title>Cross references</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cross references</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>label</primary></indexterm>
+<para>We often want something like &#8216;<literal>See Theorem~31</literal>&#8217;. But by-hand typing
+the 31 is poor practice. Instead you should write a <firstterm>label</firstterm> such as
+<literal>\label{eq:GreensThm}</literal> and then <firstterm>reference</firstterm> it, as with
+<literal>See equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}</literal>. &latex; will automatically
+work out the number, put it into the output, and will change that number
+later if needed.
+</para>
+<screen>We will see this with Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm}. % forward reference
+...
+\begin{theorem} \label{th:GreensThm}
+ ...
+\end{theorem}
+...
+See Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm} on page~\pageref{th:GreensThm}.
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; tracks cross reference information in a file having the
+extension <filename>.aux</filename> and with the same base name as the file containing
+the <literal>\label</literal>. So if <literal>\label</literal> is in <filename>calculus.tex</filename> then
+the information is in <filename>calculus.aux</filename>. &latex; puts the
+information in that file every time it runs across a <literal>\label</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>forward reference</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>reference, forward</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The behavior described in the prior paragraph results in a quirk that
+happens when your document has a <firstterm>forward reference</firstterm>, a <literal>\ref</literal>
+that appears before the associated <literal>\label</literal>. If this is the first
+time that you are compiling the document then you will get &#8216;<literal>LaTeX
+Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross references right</literal>&#8217;
+and in the output the forward reference will appear as two question
+marks&#160;&#8216;<literal>??</literal>&#8217;, in boldface. A similar thing happens if you
+change some things so the references changes; you get the same warning
+and the output contains the old reference information. In both cases,
+resolve this by compiling the document a second time.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>cleveref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>cleveref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <literal>cleveref</literal> package enhances &latex;&#8217;s
+cross referencing features. You can arrange that if you enter
+<literal>\begin{thm}\label{th:Nerode}...\end{thm}</literal> then
+<literal>\cref{th:Nerode}</literal> will output &#8216;<literal>Theorem 3.21</literal>&#8217;, without you
+having to enter the &#8220;Theorem.&#8221;
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="7.1" id="_005clabel">
+<title><literal>\label</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\label</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\label{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Assign a reference number to <replaceable>key</replaceable>. In ordinary text
+<literal>\label{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> assigns to <replaceable>key</replaceable> the number of the
+current sectional unit. Inside an environment with numbering, such as a
+<literal>table</literal> or <literal>theorem</literal> environment, <literal>\label{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal>
+assigns to <replaceable>key</replaceable> the number of that environment. Retrieve the
+assigned number with the <literal>\ref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> command
+(see <link linkend="_005cref">\ref</link>).
+</para>
+<para>A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
+punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are
+distinguished, as usual.
+</para>
+<para>A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+separated by a colon or period. Thus, <literal>\label{fig:Post}</literal> is a
+label for a figure with a portrait of Emil Post. This helps to avoid
+accidentally creating two labels with the same name, and makes your
+source more readable. Some commonly-used prefixes:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>ch</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>for chapters
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>sec</literal>
+</term><term><literal>subsec</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>for lower-level sectioning commands
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>fig</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>for figures
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>tab</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>for tables
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>eq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>for equations
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>In the auxiliary file the reference information is kept as the text of
+a command of the form
+<literal>\newlabel{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}{{<replaceable>currentlabel</replaceable>}{<replaceable>pagenumber</replaceable>}}</literal>.
+Here <replaceable>currentlabel</replaceable> is the current value of the macro
+<literal>\@currentlabel</literal> that is usually updated whenever you call
+<literal>\refstepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Below, the key <literal>sec:test</literal> will get the number of the current
+section and the key <literal>fig:test</literal> will get the number of the figure.
+(Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and tables.)
+</para>
+<screen>\section{section name}
+\label{sec:test}
+This is Section~\ref{sec:test}.
+\begin{figure}
+ ...
+ \caption{caption text}
+ \label{fig:test}
+\end{figure}
+See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="7.2" id="_005cpageref">
+<title><literal>\pageref</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pageref</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cross referencing with page number</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>page number, cross referencing</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\pageref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Produce the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding
+<literal>\label</literal>{<replaceable>key</replaceable>} command appears.
+</para>
+<para>If there is no <literal>\label{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> then you get something like
+&#8216;<literal>LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on
+input line 11.</literal>&#8217;
+</para>
+<para>Below, the <literal>\label{eq:main}</literal> is used both for the formula number
+and for the page number. (Note that the two references are forward
+references so this document would need to be compiled twice to resolve
+those.)
+</para>
+<screen>The main result is formula~\ref{eq:main} on page~\pageref{eq:main}.
+ ...
+\begin{equation} \label{eq:main}
+ \mathbf{P}=\mathbf{NP}
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="7.3" id="_005cref">
+<title><literal>\ref</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ref</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cross referencing, symbolic</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>section number, cross referencing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>equation number, cross referencing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>figure number, cross referencing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnote number, cross referencing</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\ref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Produces the number of the sectional unit,
+equation, footnote, figure, &#8230;, of the corresponding
+<literal>\label</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005clabel">\label</link>). It does not produce any text,
+such as the word &#8216;Section&#8217; or &#8216;Figure&#8217;, just the bare number itself.
+</para>
+<para>If there is no <literal>\label{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> then you get something like
+&#8216;<literal>LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on
+input line 11.</literal>&#8217;
+</para>
+<para>In this example the <literal>\ref{popular}</literal> produces &#8216;<literal>2</literal>&#8217;. Note that
+it is a forward reference since it comes before <literal>\label{popular}</literal>
+so this document would have to be compiled twice.
+</para>
+<screen>The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Plain \TeX
+\item \label{popular} \LaTeX
+\item Con\TeX t
+\end{enumerate}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>cleveref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>cleveref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The <filename>cleveref</filename> package includes text such as &#8216;<literal>Theorem</literal>&#8217; in the
+reference. See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="8" id="Environments">
+<title>Environments</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>environments</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\begin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\end</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior.
+An environment begins with <literal>\begin</literal> and ends with <literal>\end</literal>,
+like this:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{<replaceable>environment-name</replaceable>}
+ ...
+\end{<replaceable>environment-name</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>The <replaceable>environment-name</replaceable> at the beginning must exactly match that at
+the end. For instance, the input
+<literal>\begin{table*}...\end{table}</literal> will cause an error like:
+&#8216;<literal>! LaTeX Error: \begin{table*} on input line 5 ended by
+\end{table}.</literal>&#8217;
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>group, and environments</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Environments are executed within a group.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="8.1" id="abstract">
+<title><literal>abstract</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>abstract</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>abstract</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>abstracts</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{abstract}
+...
+\end{abstract}
+</screen>
+<para>Produce an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. This environment
+is only defined in the <literal>article</literal> and <literal>report</literal> document classes
+(see <link linkend="Document-classes">Document classes</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Using the example below in the <literal>article</literal> class produces a displayed
+paragraph. Document class option <literal>titlepage</literal> causes the abstract
+to be on a separate page (see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>); this is the
+default only in the <literal>report</literal> class.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{abstract}
+ We compare all known accounts of the proposal made by Porter Alexander
+ to Robert E Lee at the Appomattox Court House that the army continue
+ in a guerrilla war, which Lee refused.
+\end{abstract}
+</screen>
+<para>The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column document (for
+a more flexible solution, use the package <filename>abstract</filename>).
+</para>
+<!-- Adopted from http://www.tex.ac.uk/FAQ-onecolabs.html -->
+<screen>\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+ ...
+\begin{document}
+\title{Babe Ruth as Cultural Progenitor: a Atavistic Approach}
+\author{Smith \\ Jones \\ Robinson\thanks{Railroad tracking grant.}}
+\twocolumn[
+ \begin{@twocolumnfalse}
+ \maketitle
+ \begin{abstract}
+ Ruth was not just the Sultan of Swat, he was the entire swat
+ team.
+ \end{abstract}
+ \end{@twocolumnfalse}
+ ]
+{ % by-hand insert a footnote at page bottom
+ \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+ \footnotetext[1]{Thanks for all the fish.}
+}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.2" id="array">
+<title><literal>array</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>array</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>array</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>arrays, math</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{array}{<replaceable>cols</replaceable>}
+ <replaceable>column 1 entry</replaceable> &amp;<replaceable>column 2 entry</replaceable> ... &amp;<replaceable>column n entry</replaceable> \\
+ ...
+\end{array}
+</screen>
+<para>or:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{array}[<replaceable>pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>cols</replaceable>}
+ <replaceable>column 1 entry</replaceable> &amp;<replaceable>column 2 entry</replaceable> ... &amp;<replaceable>column n entry</replaceable> \\
+ ...
+\end{array}
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in math
+mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics environment
+such as <literal>equation</literal> (see <link linkend="equation">equation</link>). Inside of each row the
+column entries are separated by an ampersand, (<literal>&amp;</literal>). Rows are
+terminated with double-backslashes (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This example shows a three by three array.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation*}
+ \chi(x) =
+ \left| % vertical bar fence
+ \begin{array}{ccc}
+ x-a &amp;-b &amp;-c \\
+ -d &amp;x-e &amp;-f \\
+ -g &amp;-h &amp;x-i
+ \end{array}
+ \right|
+\end{equation*}
+</screen>
+<para>The required argument <replaceable>cols</replaceable> describes the number of columns, their
+alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. For instance,
+<literal>\begin{array}{rcl}...\end{array}</literal> gives three columns: the
+first flush right, the second centered, and the third flush left. See
+<link linkend="tabular">tabular</link> for the complete description of <replaceable>cols</replaceable> and of the
+other common features of the two environments, including the optional
+<replaceable>pos</replaceable> argument.
+</para>
+<para>There are two ways that <literal>array</literal> diverges from <literal>tabular</literal>. The
+first is that <literal>array</literal> entries are typeset in math mode, in
+textstyle (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>) except if the <replaceable>cols</replaceable> definition specifies
+the column with <literal>p{...}</literal>, which causes the entry to be typeset in
+text mode. The second is that, instead of <literal>tabular</literal>&#8217;s parameter
+<literal>\tabcolsep</literal>, &latex;&#8217;s intercolumn space in an <literal>array</literal> is
+governed by
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arraycolsep</primary></indexterm>
+<literal>\arraycolsep</literal>, which gives half the width between columns. The
+default for this is &#8216;<literal>5pt</literal>&#8217; so that between two columns comes
+10pt of space.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the <filename>amsmath</filename>
+package. It comes with environments <literal>pmatrix</literal> for an array
+surrounded by parentheses&#160;<literal>(...)</literal>, <literal>bmatrix</literal> for an array
+surrounded by square brackets&#160;<literal>[...]</literal>, <literal>Bmatrix</literal> for an
+array surrounded by curly braces&#160;<literal>{...}</literal>, <literal>vmatrix</literal> for
+an array surrounded by vertical bars&#160;<literal>|...|</literal>, and
+<literal>Vmatrix</literal> for an array surrounded by double vertical
+bars&#160;<literal>||...||</literal>, along with a number of other array constructs.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The next example uses the <filename>amsmath</filename> package.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble
+
+\begin{equation}
+ \begin{vmatrix}{cc} % array with vert lines
+ a &amp;b \\
+ c &amp;d
+ \end{vmatrix}=ad-bc
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>array (package)</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>array (package)</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>dcolumn</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>dcolumn</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are many packages concerning arrays. The <filename>array</filename> package has
+many useful extensions, including more column types. The <filename>dcolumn</filename>
+package adds a column type to center on a decimal point. For both see
+the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.3" id="center">
+<title><literal>center</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>center</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>center</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>centering text, environment for</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+ <replaceable>line1</replaceable> \\
+ <replaceable>line2</replaceable> \\
+ ...
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
+centered within the left and right margins. Use
+double-backslash, <literal>\\</literal>, to get a line break (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>center</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+If some text is too long to fit on a line then &latex; will insert line
+breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any
+interword space.
+</para>
+<para>This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
+<link linkend="_005ccentering">\centering</link> to avoid such space, for example inside a <literal>figure</literal>
+environment.
+</para>
+<para>This example produces three centered lines. There is extra vertical
+space between the last two lines.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+ A Thesis Submitted in Partial Fufillment \\
+ of the Requirements of \\[0.5ex]
+ the School of Environmental Engineering
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>In this example, depending on the page&#8217;s line width, &latex; may choose
+a line break for the part before the double backslash. If so, it will
+center each of the two lines and if not it will center the single line.
+Then &latex; will break at the double backslash, and will center the
+ending.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+ My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink
+ alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\
+ I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>A double backslash after the final line is optional. If present it
+doesn&#8217;t add any vertical space.
+</para>
+<para>In a two-column document the text is centered in a column, not in the
+entire page.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="8.3.1" id="_005ccentering">
+<title><literal>\centering</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\centering</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>centering text, declaration for</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>{\centering ... }
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{group}
+ \centering ...
+\end{group}
+</screen>
+<para>Center the material in its scope. It is most often used inside an
+environment such as <literal>figure</literal>, or in a <literal>parbox</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>This example&#8217;s <literal>\centering</literal> declaration causes the graphic to be
+horizontally centered.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{figure}
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png}
+ \caption{CTAN Lion} \label{fig:CTANLion}
+\end{figure}
+</screen>
+<para>The scope of this <literal>\centering</literal> ends with the <literal>\end{figure}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Unlike the <literal>center</literal> environment, the <literal>\centering</literal> command does
+not add vertical space above and below the text. That&#8217;s its advantage
+in the above example; there is not an excess of space.
+</para>
+<para>It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how &latex;
+formats paragraph units. If <literal>ww {\centering xx \\ yy} zz</literal> is
+surrounded by blank lines then &latex; will create a paragraph whose
+first line &#8216;<literal>ww xx</literal>&#8217; is centered and whose second line, not centered,
+contains &#8216;<literal>yy zz</literal>&#8217;. Usually what is desired is for the scope of the
+declaration to contain a blank line or the <literal>\end</literal> command of an
+environment such as <literal>figure</literal> or <literal>table</literal> that ends the
+paragraph unit. Thus, if <literal>{\centering xx \\ yy\par} zz</literal> is
+surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph with two
+centered lines &#8216;<literal>xx</literal>&#8217; and &#8216;<literal>yy</literal>&#8217;, followed by a new paragraph with
+&#8216;<literal>zz</literal>&#8217; that is formatted as usual.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.4" id="description">
+<title><literal>description</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>description</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>description</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>labelled lists, creating</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>description lists, creating</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{description}
+ \item[<replaceable>label of first item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of first item</replaceable>
+ \item[<replaceable>label of second item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of second item</replaceable>
+ ...
+\end{description}
+</screen>
+<para>Environment to make a list of labeled items. Each item&#8217;s <replaceable>label</replaceable> is
+typeset in bold and is flush left, so that long labels continue into the
+first line of the item text. There must be at least one item; having
+none causes the &latex; error &#8216;<literal>Something's wrong--perhaps a
+missing \item</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>This example shows the environment used for a sequence of definitions.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{definition}
+ \item[lama] A priest.
+ \item[llama] A beast.
+\end{definition}
+</screen>
+<para>The labels &#8216;<literal>lama</literal>&#8217; and &#8216;<literal>llama</literal>&#8217; are output in boldface, with the
+left edge on the left margin.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\item</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Start list items with the <literal>\item</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005citem">\item</link>). Use the
+optional labels, as in <literal>\item[Main point]</literal>, because there is
+no sensible default. Following the <literal>\item</literal> is optional text, which
+may contain multiple paragraphs.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bold typewriter, avoiding</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>typewriter labels in lists</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a font
+change given in argument style (see <link linkend="Font-styles">Font styles</link>) then it will come
+out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter with
+<literal>\item[\texttt{label text}]</literal> then it will appear in bold
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way around this, in this
+example to get non-bold typewriter, is to use declarative style:
+<literal>\item[{\tt label text}]</literal>. Similarly, get the standard roman
+font with <literal>\item[{\rm label text}]</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>For other major &latex; labelled list environments, see <link linkend="itemize">itemize</link>
+and <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>. Unlike those environments, nesting
+<literal>description</literal> environments does not change the default label; it is
+boldface and flush left at all levels.
+</para>
+<para>For information about list layout parameters, including the default
+values, and for information about customizing list layout, see
+<link linkend="list">list</link>. The package <filename>enumitem</filename> is useful for customizing
+lists.
+</para>
+<para>This example changes the description labels to small caps.
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{%
+ {\hspace{\labelsep}\textsc{#1}}}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.5" id="displaymath">
+<title><literal>displaymath</literal></title>
+<!-- http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/40492/what-are-the-differences-between-align-equation-and-displaymath -->
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>displaymath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>displaymath</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{displaymath}
+ <replaceable>mathematical text</replaceable>
+\end{displaymath}
+</screen>
+<para>Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display style
+and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global option
+<literal>fleqn</literal>; see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>.
+</para>
+<para>In the <literal>displaymath</literal> environment no equation number is added to the
+math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the
+<literal>equation</literal> environment (see <link linkend="equation">equation</link>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; will not break the <replaceable>math text</replaceable> across lines.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Note that the <filename>amsmath</filename> package has significantly more extensive
+displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of
+ways in that package for having math text broken across lines.
+</para>
+<para>The construct <literal>\[<replaceable>math text</replaceable>\]</literal> is essentially a synonym for
+<literal>\begin{displaymath}<replaceable>math text</replaceable>\end{displaymath}</literal> but the
+latter is easier to work with in the source file; for instance,
+searching for a square bracket may get false positives but the word
+<literal>displaymath</literal> will likely be unique. (The construct
+<literal>$$<replaceable>math text</replaceable>$$</literal> from Plain&#160;&tex; is sometimes
+mistakenly used as a synonym for <literal>displaymath</literal>. It is not a
+synonym, because the <literal>displaymath</literal> environment checks that it isn&#8217;t
+started in math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
+environment start, because the <literal>displaymath</literal> environment has
+different vertical spacing, and because the <literal>displaymath</literal>
+environment honors the <literal>fleqn</literal> option.)
+</para>
+<para>The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{displaymath}
+ \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3
+\end{displaymath}
+</screen>
+<para>Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version
+<literal>\( \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3 \)</literal> produces.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.6" id="document">
+<title><literal>document</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>document</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>document</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+<para>The <literal>document</literal> environment encloses the entire body of a document.
+It is required in every &latex; document. See <link linkend="Starting-and-ending">Starting and ending</link>.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="8.6.1" id="_005cAtBeginDocument">
+<title><literal>\AtBeginDocument</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AtBeginDocument</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>beginning of document hook</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\AtBeginDocument{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Save <replaceable>code</replaceable> and execute it when <literal>\begin{document}</literal> is
+executed, at the very end of the preamble. The code is executed after
+the font selection tables have been set up, so the normal font for the
+document is the current font. However, the code is executed as part of
+the preamble so you cannot do any typesetting with it.
+</para>
+<para>You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.6.2" id="_005cAtEndDocument">
+<title><literal>\AtEndDocument</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AtEndDocument</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>end of document hook</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\AtEndDocument{<replaceable>code</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Save <replaceable>code</replaceable> and execute it near the end of the document.
+Specifically, it is executed when <literal>\end{document}</literal> is executed,
+before the final page is finished and before any leftover floating
+environments are processed. If you want some of the code to be executed
+after these two processes then include a <literal>\clearpage</literal> at the
+appropriate point in <replaceable>code</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.7" id="enumerate">
+<title><literal>enumerate</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>enumerate</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>enumerate</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lists of items, numbered</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{enumerate}
+ \item[<replaceable>optional label of first item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of first item</replaceable>
+ \item[<replaceable>optional label of second item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of second item</replaceable>
+ ...
+\end{enumerate}
+</screen>
+<para>Environment to produce a numbered list of items. The format of the
+label numbering depends on the nesting level of this environment; see
+below. The default top-level numbering is &#8216;<literal>1.</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>2.</literal>&#8217;,
+etc. Each <literal>enumerate</literal> list environment must have at least one item;
+having none causes the &latex; error &#8216;<literal>Something's wrong--perhaps a
+missing \item</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>This example gives the first two finishers in the 1908 Olympic marathon.
+As a top-level list the labels would come out as &#8216;<literal>1.</literal>&#8217; and
+&#8216;<literal>2.</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{enumerate}
+ \item Johnny Hayes (USA)
+ \item Charles Hefferon (RSA)
+\end{enumerate}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\item</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Start list items with the <literal>\item</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005citem">\item</link>). If you
+give <literal>\item</literal> an optional argument by following it with square
+brackets, as in <literal>\item[Interstitial label]</literal>, then the next item
+will continue the interrupted sequence (see <link linkend="_005citem">\item</link>). That is, you
+will get labels like &#8216;<literal>1.</literal>&#8217;, then &#8216;<literal>Interstitial label</literal>&#8217;, then
+&#8216;<literal>2.</literal>&#8217;. Following the <literal>\item</literal> is optional text, which may
+contain multiple paragraphs.
+</para>
+<para>Enumerations may be nested within other <literal>enumerate</literal> environments,
+or within any paragraph-making environment such as <literal>itemize</literal>
+(see <link linkend="itemize">itemize</link>), up to four levels deep. This gives &latex;&#8217;s
+default for the format at each nesting level, where 1 is the top level,
+the outermost level.
+</para>
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>arabic number followed by a period: &#8216;<literal>1.</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>2.</literal>&#8217;,&#160;&#8230;
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>lowercase letter inside parentheses: &#8216;<literal>(a)</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>(b)</literal>&#8217;&#160;&#8230;
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>lowercase roman numeral followed by a period: &#8216;<literal>i.</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>ii.</literal>&#8217;,&#160;&#8230;
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>uppercase letter followed by a period: &#8216;<literal>A.</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>B.</literal>&#8217;,&#160;&#8230;
+</para></listitem></orderedlist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enumi</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enumii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enumiii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enumiv</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="enumerate-enumi"/><anchor id="enumerate-enumii"/><anchor id="enumerate-enumiii"/><anchor id="enumerate-enumiv"/><para>The <literal>enumerate</literal> environment uses the counters <literal>\enumi</literal> through
+<literal>\enumiv</literal> (see <link linkend="Counters">Counters</link>).
+</para>
+<para>For other major &latex; labeled list environments, see
+<link linkend="description">description</link> and <link linkend="itemize">itemize</link>. For information about list layout
+parameters, including the default values, and for information about
+customizing list layout, see <link linkend="list">list</link>. The package <filename>enumitem</filename> is
+useful for customizing lists.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelenumi</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelenumii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelenumiii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelenumiv</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="enumerate-labelenumi"/><anchor id="enumerate-labelenumii"/><anchor id="enumerate-labelenumiii"/><anchor id="enumerate-labelenumiv"/><para>To change the format of the label use <literal>\renewcommand</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</link>) on the commands <literal>\labelenumi</literal>
+through <literal>\labelenumiv</literal>. For instance, this first level list will be
+labelled with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing
+period.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Alph example</primary></indexterm>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\textbf{\Alph{enumi}}}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item Shows as boldface A
+ \item Shows as boldface B
+\end{enumerate}
+</screen>
+<para>For a list of counter-labeling commands see <link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic
+\roman \Roman \fnsymbol</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.8" id="eqnarray">
+<title><literal>eqnarray</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>eqnarray</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>eqnarray</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>equations, aligning</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>aligning equations</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>align environment, from <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>amsmath package, replacing <literal>eqnarray</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Madsen, Lars</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <literal>eqnarray</literal> environment is obsolete. It has infelicities,
+including spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements.
+(See &#8220;Avoid eqnarray!&#8221; by Lars Madsen
+<ulink url="http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf">http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf</ulink>). New documents
+should include the <filename>amsmath</filename> package and use the displayed
+mathematics environments provided there, such as the <literal>align</literal>
+environment. We include a description only for completeness and for
+working with old documents.
+</para>
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{eqnarray}
+ <replaceable>first formula left</replaceable> &amp;<replaceable>first formula middle</replaceable> &amp;<replaceable>first formula right</replaceable> \\
+ ...
+\end{eqnarray}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{eqnarray*}
+ <replaceable>first formula left</replaceable> &amp;<replaceable>first formula middle</replaceable> &amp;<replaceable>first formula right</replaceable> \\
+ ...
+\end{eqnarray*}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>eqnarray</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Display a sequence of equations or inequalities. The left and right
+sides are typeset in display mode, while the middle is typeset in text
+mode.
+</para>
+<para>It is similar to a three-column <literal>array</literal> environment, with items
+within a row separated by an ampersand&#160;(<literal>&amp;</literal>), and with rows
+separated by double backslash&#160; <literal>\\</literal>).
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\* (for <literal>eqnarray</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+The starred form of line break (<literal>\\*</literal>) can also be used to separate
+equations, and will disallow a page break there (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nonumber</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>equation numbers, omitting</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The unstarred form <literal>eqnarray</literal> places an equation number on every
+line (using the <literal>equation</literal> counter), unless that line contains a
+<literal>\nonumber</literal> command. The starred form <literal>eqnarray*</literal> omits
+equation numbering, while otherwise being the same.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lefteqn</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The command <literal>\lefteqn</literal> is used for splitting long formulas across
+lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
+zero width.
+</para>
+<para>This example shows three lines. The first two lines make an inequality,
+while the third line has not entry on the left side.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{eqnarray*}
+ \lefteqn{x_1+x_2+\cdots+x_n} \\
+ &amp;\leq &amp;y_1+y_2+\cdots+y_n \\
+ &amp;= &amp;z+y_3+\cdots+y_n
+\end{eqnarray*}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.9" id="equation">
+<title><literal>equation</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>equation</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>equation</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>equations, environment for</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>formulas, environment for</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+ <replaceable>mathematical text</replaceable>
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<para>The same as a <literal>displaymath</literal> environment (see <link linkend="displaymath">displaymath</link>)
+except that &latex; puts an equation number flush to the right margin.
+The equation number is generated using the <literal>equation</literal> counter.
+</para>
+<para>You should have no blank lines between <literal>\begin{equation}</literal> and
+<literal>\begin{equation}</literal>, or &latex; will tell you that there is a
+missing dollar sign.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The package <filename>amsmath</filename> package has extensive displayed equation
+facilities. New documents should include this package.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.10" id="figure">
+<title><literal>figure</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>figure</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>figure</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>inserting figures</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>figures, inserting</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{figure}[<replaceable>placement</replaceable>]
+ <replaceable>figure body</replaceable>
+ \caption[<replaceable>loftitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>} % optional
+ \label{<replaceable>label}</replaceable> % optional
+\end{figure}
+</screen>
+<para>or:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{figure*}[<replaceable>placement</replaceable>]
+ <replaceable>figure body</replaceable>
+ \caption[<replaceable>loftitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>} % optional
+ \label{<replaceable>label}</replaceable> % optional
+\end{figure*}
+</screen>
+<para>Figures are for material that is not part of the normal text. An
+example is material that you cannot have split between two pages, such
+as a graphic. Because of this, &latex; does not typeset figures in
+sequence with normal text but instead &#8220;floats&#8221; them to a convenient
+place, such as the top of a following page (see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The <replaceable>figure body</replaceable> can consist of imported graphics
+(see <link linkend="Graphics">Graphics</link>), or text, &latex; commands, etc. It is typeset in a
+<literal>parbox</literal> of width <literal>\textwidth</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The possible values of <replaceable>placement</replaceable> are <literal>h</literal> for &#8216;<literal>here</literal>&#8217;,
+<literal>t</literal> for &#8216;<literal>top</literal>&#8217;, <literal>b</literal> for &#8216;<literal>bottom</literal>&#8217;, and <literal>p</literal> for
+&#8216;<literal>on a separate page of floats</literal>&#8217;. For the effect of these options on
+the float placement algorithm, see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>.
+</para>
+<para>The starred form <literal>figure*</literal> is used when a document is in
+double-column mode (see <link linkend="_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</link>). It produces a figure that
+spans both columns, at the top of the page. To add the possibility of
+placing at a page bottom see the discussion of <replaceable>placement</replaceable> <literal>b</literal>
+in <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>.
+</para>
+<para>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <link linkend="Cross-references">Cross
+references</link>).
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\caption</primary></indexterm>
+The optional <literal>\caption</literal> command specifies caption text for the
+figure. By default it is numbered. If <replaceable>loftitle</replaceable> is present, it is
+used in the list of figures instead of <replaceable>title</replaceable> (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of
+contents etc.</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This example makes a figure out of a graphic. &latex; will place that
+graphic and its caption at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
+end of the document, on a page of floats.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{figure}[t]
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{CTANlion.png}
+ \caption{The CTAN lion, by Duane Bibby}
+\end{figure}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.11" id="filecontents">
+<title><literal>filecontents</literal>: Write an external file</title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>filecontents</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>filecontents</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>filecontents*</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>filecontents*</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>external files, writing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>writing external files</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{filecontents}{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
+ <replaceable>text</replaceable>
+\end{filecontents}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{filecontents*}{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
+ <replaceable>text</replaceable>
+\end{filecontents*}
+</screen>
+<para>Create a file named <replaceable>filename</replaceable> and fill it with <replaceable>text</replaceable>. The
+unstarred version of the environment <literal>filecontents</literal> prefixes the
+content of the created file with a header; see the example below. The
+starred version <literal>filecontents*</literal> does not include the header.
+</para>
+<para>This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it often
+appears before the <literal>\documentclass</literal> command. It is typically used
+when a source file requires a nonstandard style or class file. The
+environment will write that file to the directory containing the source
+and thus make the source file self-contained. Another use is to include
+<literal>bib</literal> references in the file, again to make it self-contained.
+</para>
+<para>The environment checks whether a file of that name already exists and if
+so, does not do anything. There is a <filename>filecontents</filename> package that
+redefines the <literal>filecontents</literal> environment so that instead of doing
+nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file.
+</para>
+<para>For example, this document
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\begin{filecontents}{JH.sty}
+\newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+\end{filecontents}
+\usepackage{JH}
+\begin{document}
+Article by \myname.
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>produces this file <filename>JH.sty</filename>.
+</para>
+<screen>%% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
+%% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+%% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
+%%
+\newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.12" id="flushleft">
+<title><literal>flushleft</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>flushleft</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>flushleft</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>left-justifying text, environment for</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ragged right text, environment for</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{flushleft}
+ <replaceable>line1</replaceable> \\
+ <replaceable>line2</replaceable> \\
+ ...
+\end{flushleft}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>flushleft</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long
+then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and
+stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use a double
+backslash, <literal>\\</literal>. For the declaration form
+see&#160;<link linkend="_005craggedright">\raggedright</link>.
+</para>
+<para>This creates a box of text that is at most 3 inches wide, with the text
+flush left and ragged right.
+</para>
+<screen>\noindent\begin{minipage}{3in}
+\begin{flushleft}
+ A long sentence that will be broken by \LaTeX{}
+ at a convenient spot. \\
+ And, a fresh line forced by the double backslash.
+\end{flushleft}
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
+
+
+
+<sect2 label="8.12.1" id="_005craggedright">
+<title><literal>\raggedright</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\raggedright</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ragged right text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>left-justifying text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>justification, ragged right</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<screen>{\raggedright ... }
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{<replaceable>environment</replaceable>} \raggedright
+ ...
+\end{<replaceable>environment</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and
+ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as <literal>quote</literal>
+or in a <literal>parbox</literal>. For the environment form
+see&#160;<link linkend="flushleft">flushleft</link>.
+</para>
+<para>Unlike the <literal>flushleft</literal> environment, the <literal>\raggedright</literal>
+command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex;
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit&#8217;s format, the
+scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or <literal>\end</literal>
+command that ends the paragraph unit.
+</para>
+<para>Here <literal>\raggedright</literal> in each second column keeps &latex; from doing
+very awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column. Note
+that <literal>\raggedright</literal> is inside the curly braces <literal>{...}</literal> to
+delimit its effect.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{rp{2in}}
+ Team alpha &amp;{\raggedright This team does all the real work.} \\
+ Team beta &amp;{\raggedright This team ensures that the water
+ cooler is never empty.} \\
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.13" id="flushright">
+<title><literal>flushright</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>flushright</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>flushright</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ragged left text, environment for</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>right-justifying text, environment for</primary></indexterm>
+
+<screen>\begin{flushright}
+ <replaceable>line1</replaceable> \\
+ <replaceable>line2</replaceable> \\
+ ...
+\end{flushright}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>flushright</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+<para>An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long
+to fit the margins then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that
+avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new
+line use a double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>. For the declaration form
+see&#160;<link linkend="_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</link>.
+</para>
+<para>For an example related to this environment, see&#160;<link linkend="flushleft">flushleft</link>.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="8.13.1" id="_005craggedleft">
+<title><literal>\raggedleft</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\raggedleft</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ragged left text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>justification, ragged left</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>right-justifying text</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<screen>{\raggedleft ... }
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{<replaceable>environment</replaceable>} \raggedleft
+ ...
+\end{<replaceable>environment</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and
+ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as <literal>quote</literal>
+or in a <literal>parbox</literal>. For the environment form
+see&#160;<link linkend="flushright">flushright</link>.
+</para>
+<para>Unlike the <literal>flushright</literal> environment, the <literal>\raggedleft</literal>
+command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex;
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit&#8217;s format, the
+scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or <literal>\end</literal>
+command that ends the paragraph unit.
+</para>
+<para>For an example related to this environment, see&#160;<link linkend="_005craggedright">\raggedright</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.14" id="itemize">
+<title><literal>itemize</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>itemize</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>itemize</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\item</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lists of items</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>unordered lists</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bulleted lists</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bullet lists</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{itemize}
+ \item[<replaceable>optional label of first item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of first item</replaceable>
+ \item[<replaceable>optional label of second item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of second item</replaceable>
+ ...
+\end{itemize}
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a list that is unordered, sometimes called a bullet list. The
+environment must have at least one <literal>\item</literal>; having none causes the
+&latex; error &#8216;<literal>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>This gives a two-item list.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{itemize}
+ \item Pencil and watercolor sketch by Cassandra
+ \item Rice portrait
+\end{itemize}
+</screen>
+<para>As a top-level list each label would come out as a bullet, &#8226;.
+The format of the labeling depends on the nesting level; see below.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\item</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Start list items with the <literal>\item</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005citem">\item</link>). If you
+give <literal>\item</literal> an optional argument by following it with square
+brackets, as in <literal>\item[Optional label]</literal>, then by default it will
+appear in bold and be flush right, so it could extend into the left
+margin. For labels that are flush left see the <link linkend="description">description</link>
+environment. Following the <literal>\item</literal> is optional text, which may
+contain multiple paragraphs.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelitemi</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelitemii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelitemiii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelitemiv</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="itemize-labelitemi"/><anchor id="itemize-labelitemii"/><anchor id="itemize-labelitemiii"/><anchor id="itemize-labelitemiv"/><para>Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
+They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such
+as <literal>enumerate</literal> (see <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>). The <literal>itemize</literal> environment
+uses the commands <literal>\labelitemi</literal> through <literal>\labelitemiv</literal> to
+produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase
+roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting
+level). These are the default marks at each level.
+</para>
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>&#8226; (bullet, from <literal>\textbullet</literal>)
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">--<!-- /@w --></emphasis> (bold en-dash, from <literal>\normalfont\bfseries\textendash</literal>)
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>* (asterisk, from <literal>\textasteriskcentered</literal>)
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>. (centered dot, rendered here as a period, from <literal>\textperiodcentered</literal>)
+</para></listitem></orderedlist>
+<para>Change the labels with <literal>\renewcommand</literal>. For instance, this makes
+the first level use diamonds.
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmargin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmargini</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmarginii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmarginiii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmarginiv</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmarginv</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmarginvi</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="itemize-leftmargin"/><anchor id="itemize-leftmargini"/><anchor id="itemize-leftmarginii"/><anchor id="itemize-leftmarginiii"/><anchor id="itemize-leftmarginiv"/><anchor id="itemize-leftmarginv"/><anchor id="itemize-leftmarginvi"/><para>The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
+the left margin of the <literal>itemize</literal> list is determined by the
+parameters <literal>\leftmargini</literal> through <literal>\leftmarginvi</literal>. (Note the
+convention of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command
+name to denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: <literal>2.5em</literal> in
+level 1 (<literal>2em</literal> in two-column mode), <literal>2.2em</literal> in level 2,
+<literal>1.87em</literal> in level 3, and <literal>1.7em</literal> in level 4, with smaller
+values for more deeply nested levels.
+</para>
+<para>For other major &latex; labeled list environments, see
+<link linkend="description">description</link> and <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>. For information about list
+layout parameters, including the default values, and for information
+about customizing list layout, see <link linkend="list">list</link>. The package
+<filename>enumitem</filename> is useful for customizing lists.
+</para>
+<para>This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost itemized
+lists.
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parskip example</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
+space between items. Here is an example defining an <literal>itemize*</literal>
+environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
+within a single item (<literal>\parskip</literal> is not list-specific,
+see <link linkend="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent &amp; \parskip</link>):
+</para>
+<screen>\newenvironment{itemize*}%
+ {\begin{itemize}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+ \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
+ {\end{itemize}}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.15" id="letter">
+<title><literal>letter</literal> environment: writing letters</title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>letter</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>letter</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+<para>This environment is used for creating letters. See <link linkend="Letters">Letters</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.16" id="list">
+<title><literal>list</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>list</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>list</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lists of items, generic</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{list}{<replaceable>labeling</replaceable>}{<replaceable>spacing</replaceable>}
+ \item[<replaceable>optional label of first item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of first item</replaceable>
+ \item[<replaceable>optional label of second item</replaceable>] <replaceable>text of second item</replaceable>
+ ...
+\end{list}
+</screen>
+<para>An environment for constructing lists.
+</para>
+<para>Note that this environment does not typically appear in the document
+body. Most lists created by &latex; authors are the ones that come
+standard: the <literal>description</literal>, <literal>enumerate</literal>, and <literal>itemize</literal>
+environments (see <link linkend="description">description</link>, <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>, and <link linkend="itemize">itemize</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Instead, the <literal>list</literal> environment is most often used in macros. For
+example, many standard &latex; environments that do not immediately
+appear to be lists are in fact constructed using <literal>list</literal>, including
+<literal>quotation</literal>, <literal>quote</literal>, and <literal>center</literal> (see <link linkend="quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &amp;
+quote</link>, see <link linkend="center">center</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This uses the <literal>list</literal> environment to define a new custom
+environment.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcounter{namedlistcounter} % number the items
+\newenvironment{named}
+ {\begin{list}
+ {Item~\Roman{namedlistcounter}.} % labeling
+ {\usecounter{namedlistcounter} % set counter
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{3.5em}} % set spacing
+ }
+ {\end{list}}
+
+\begin{named}
+ \item Shows as ``Item~I.''
+ \item[Special label.] Shows as ``Special label.''
+ \item Shows as ``Item~II.''
+\end{named}
+</screen>
+<para>The mandatory first argument <replaceable>labeling</replaceable> specifies the default
+labeling of list items. It can contain text and &latex; commands, as
+above where it contains both &#8216;<literal>Item</literal>&#8217; and &#8216;<literal>\Roman{...}</literal>&#8217;.
+&latex; forms the label by putting the <replaceable>labeling</replaceable> argument in a box
+of width <literal>\labelwidth</literal>. If the label is wider than that, the
+additional material extends to the right. When making an instance of a
+list you can override the default labeling by giving <literal>\item</literal> an
+optional argument by including square braces and the text, as in the
+above <literal>\item[Special label.]</literal>; see <link linkend="_005citem">\item</link>.
+</para>
+<para>The mandatory second argument <replaceable>spacing</replaceable> has a list of commands.
+This list can be empty. A command that can go in here is
+<literal>\usecounter{<replaceable>countername</replaceable>}</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cusecounter">\usecounter</link>). Use this
+to tell &latex; to number the items using the given counter. The
+counter will be reset to zero each time &latex; enters the environment,
+and the counter is incremented by one each time &latex; encounters an
+<literal>\item</literal> that does not have an optional argument.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makelabel</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="list-makelabel"/><para>Another command that can go in <replaceable>spacing</replaceable> is
+<literal>\makelabel</literal>, which constructs the label box. By default it puts
+the contents flush right. Its only argument is the label, which it
+typesets in LR mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). One example of changing its
+definition is that to the above <literal>named</literal> example, before the
+definition of the environment add
+<literal>\newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}</literal>, and between
+the <literal>\setlength</literal> command and the parenthesis that closes the
+<replaceable>spacing</replaceable> argument also add <literal>\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel</literal>.
+Then the items will be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the
+second code line to <literal>\let\makelabel\fbox</literal> puts the labels inside a
+framed box. Another example of the <literal>\makelabel</literal> command is below,
+in the definition of the <literal>redlabel</literal> environment.
+</para>
+<para>Also often in <replaceable>spacing</replaceable> are commands to redefine the spacing for the
+list. Below are the spacing parameters with their default values.
+(Default values for derived environments such as <literal>itemize</literal> can be
+different than the values shown here.) See also the figure that follows
+the list. Each is a length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). The vertical spaces are
+normally rubber lengths, with <literal>plus</literal> and <literal>minus</literal> components,
+to give &tex; flexibility in setting the page. Change each with a
+command such as <literal>\setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}</literal>.
+For some effects these lengths should be zero or negative.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\itemindent</primary></indexterm><literal>\itemindent</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-itemindent"/><para>Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond <literal>leftmargin</literal>, of the
+first line each item. Its default value is <literal>0pt</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\itemsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\itemsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-itemsep"/><para>Vertical space between items, beyond the <literal>\parsep</literal>. The defaults
+for the first three levels in &latex;&#8217;s &#8216;<literal>article</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>book</literal>&#8217;,
+and &#8216;<literal>report</literal>&#8217; classes at 10 point size are: <literal>4pt plus2pt
+minus1pt</literal>, <literal>\parsep</literal> (that is, <literal>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>), and
+<literal>\topsep</literal> (that is, <literal>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>). The defaults at
+11 point are: <literal>4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt</literal>, <literal>\parsep</literal> (that is,
+<literal>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>), and <literal>topsep</literal> (that is, <literal>2pt
+plus1pt minus1pt</literal>). The defaults at 12 point are: <literal>5pt plus2.5pt
+minus1pt</literal>, <literal>\parsep</literal> (that is, <literal>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>), and
+<literal>\topsep</literal> (that is, <literal>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\labelsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-labelsep"/><para>Horizontal space between the label and text of an item.
+The default for &latex;&#8217;s &#8216;<literal>article</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>book</literal>&#8217;,
+and &#8216;<literal>report</literal>&#8217; classes is <literal>0.5em</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\labelwidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-labelwidth"/><para>Horizontal width. The box containing the label is nominally this wide.
+If <literal>\makelabel</literal> returns text that is wider than this then the first
+line of the item will be indented to make room for this extra material.
+If <literal>\makelabel</literal> returns text of width less than or equal to
+<literal>\labelwidth</literal> then &latex;&#8217;s default is that the label is typeset
+flush right in a box of this width.
+</para>
+<para>The left edge of the label box is
+<literal>\leftmargin</literal>+<literal>\itemindent</literal>-<literal>\labelsep</literal>-<literal>\labelwidth</literal>
+from the left margin of the enclosing environment.
+</para>
+<para>The default for &latex;&#8217;s &#8216;<literal>article</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>book</literal>&#8217;, and
+&#8216;<literal>report</literal>&#8217; classes at the top level is
+<literal>\leftmargini</literal>-<literal>\labelsep</literal>, (which is <literal>2em</literal> in one column
+mode and <literal>1.5em</literal> in two column mode). At the second level it is
+<literal>\leftmarginii</literal>-<literal>\labelsep</literal>, and at the third level it is
+<literal>\leftmarginiii</literal>-<literal>\labelsep</literal>. These definitions make the
+label&#8217;s left edge coincide with the left margin of the enclosing
+environment.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmargin</primary></indexterm><literal>\leftmargin</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-leftmargin"/><para>Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment
+(or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level list), and the
+left margin of this list. It must be non-negative.
+</para>
+<para>In the standard &latex; document classes, a top-level list has this set
+to the value of <literal>\leftmargini</literal>, while a list that is nested inside
+a top-level list has this margin set to <literal>\leftmarginii</literal>. More
+deeply nested lists get the values of <literal>\leftmarginiii</literal> through
+<literal>\leftmarginvi</literal>. (Nesting greater than level five generates the
+error message &#8216;<literal>Too deeply nested</literal>&#8217;.)
+</para>
+<para>The defaults for the first three levels in &latex;&#8217;s &#8216;<literal>article</literal>&#8217;,
+&#8216;<literal>book</literal>&#8217;, and &#8216;<literal>report</literal>&#8217; classes are: <literal>\leftmargini</literal> is
+<literal>2.5em</literal> (in two column mode, <literal>2em</literal>), <literal>\leftmarginii</literal> is
+<literal>2.2em</literal>, and <literal>\leftmarginiii</literal> is <literal>1.87em</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\listparindent</primary></indexterm><literal>\listparindent</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-listparindent"/><para>Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
+<literal>\leftmargin</literal>, for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list
+item. A negative value makes this an &#8220;outdent&#8221;. Its default value
+is <literal>0pt</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\parsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-parsep"/><para>Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. In the &#8216;<literal>book</literal>&#8217;
+and &#8216;<literal>article</literal>&#8217; classes The defaults for the first three levels in
+&latex;&#8217;s &#8216;<literal>article</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>book</literal>&#8217;, and &#8216;<literal>report</literal>&#8217; classes at 10
+point size are: <literal>4pt plus2pt minus1pt</literal>, <literal>2pt plus1pt
+minus1pt</literal>, and <literal>0pt</literal>. The defaults at 11 point size are:
+<literal>4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt</literal>, <literal>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>, and
+<literal>0pt</literal>. The defaults at 12 point size are: <literal>5pt plus2.5pt
+minus1pt</literal>, <literal>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>, and <literal>0pt</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\partopsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\partopsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-partopsep"/><para>Vertical space added, beyond <literal>\topsep</literal>+<literal>\parskip</literal>, to the top
+and bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded by
+a blank line. (A blank line in the &latex; source before the list
+changes spacing at both the top and bottom of the list; whether the line
+following the list is blank does not matter.)
+</para>
+<para>The defaults for the first three levels in &latex;&#8217;s &#8216;<literal>article</literal>&#8217;,
+&#8216;<literal>book</literal>&#8217;, and &#8216;<literal>report</literal>&#8217; classes at 10 point size are: <literal>2pt
+plus1 minus1pt</literal>, <literal>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>, and <literal>1pt plus0pt
+minus1pt</literal>. The defaults at 11 point are: <literal>3pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>,
+<literal>3pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>, and <literal>1pt plus0pt minus1pt</literal>). The
+defaults at 12 point are: <literal>3pt plus2pt minus3pt</literal>, <literal>3pt plus2pt
+minus2pt</literal>, and <literal>1pt plus0pt minus1pt</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightmargin</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightmargin</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-rightmargin"/><para>Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right
+margin of the enclosing environment. Its default value is <literal>0pt</literal>.
+It must be non-negative.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\topsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-topsep"/><para>Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition
+to <literal>\parskip</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent &amp; \parskip</link>). The defaults for
+the first three levels in &latex;&#8217;s &#8216;<literal>article</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>book</literal>&#8217;, and
+&#8216;<literal>report</literal>&#8217; classes at 10 point size are: <literal>8pt plus2pt minus4pt</literal>,
+<literal>4pt plus2pt minus1pt</literal>, and <literal>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>. The
+defaults at 11 point are: <literal>9pt plus3pt minus5pt</literal>, <literal>4.5pt
+plus2pt minus1pt</literal>, and <literal>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>. The defaults at 12
+point are: <literal>10pt plus4pt minus6pt</literal>, <literal>5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt</literal>,
+and <literal>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>This shows the horizontal and vertical distances.
+</para>
+<informalfigure><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="latex2e-figures/list.eps" format="EPS"></imagedata></imageobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="latex2e-figures/list.pdf" format="PDF"></imagedata></imageobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="latex2e-figures/list.png" format="PNG"></imagedata></imageobject><textobject><literallayout>.......................................................................
+..............Surrounding environment, preceding material.............. -
+ | v0
+ |---h0--|-h1-| |
+ ..Label.. .....First item..................................... -
+ ............................................................
+ ............................................................ -
+ | v1
+ ........First item, second paragraph .................. -
+ |-h2-| | v2
+ |
+ ..Label.. .....Second item.................................... -
+ ............................................................
+ ............................................................ -
+|-h3--|-h4-| |-h5-| |v3
+ |
+..............Surrounding environment, following material.............. -
+.......................................................................</literallayout></textobject></mediaobject></informalfigure>
+
+<para>The lengths shown are listed below. The key relationship is that the
+right edge of the bracket for <replaceable>h1</replaceable> equals the right edge of the
+bracket for <replaceable>h4</replaceable>, so that the left edge of the label box is at
+<replaceable>h3</replaceable>+<replaceable>h4</replaceable>-(<replaceable>h0</replaceable>+<replaceable>h1</replaceable>).
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>v0</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase><literal>\topsep</literal> + <literal>\parskip</literal></mathphrase></inlineequation> if
+the list environment does not start a new paragraph, and
+<literal>\topsep</literal>+<literal>\parskip</literal>+<literal>\partopsep</literal> if it does
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>v1</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para><literal>\parsep</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>v2</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para><literal>\itemsep</literal>+<literal>\parsep</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>v3</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Same as <replaceable>v0</replaceable>. (This space is affected by whether a blank line
+appears in the source above the environment; whether a blank line
+appears in the source below the environment does not matter.)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>h0</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para><literal>\labelwidth</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>h1</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para><literal>\labelsep</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>h2</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para><literal>\listparindent</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>h3</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para><literal>\leftmargin</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>h4</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para><literal>\itemindent</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>h5</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para><literal>\rightmargin</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The list&#8217;s left and right margins, shown above as <replaceable>h3</replaceable> and <replaceable>h5</replaceable>,
+are with respect to the ones provided by the surrounding environment, or
+with respect to the page margins for a top-level list. The line width
+used for typesetting the list items is <literal>\linewidth</literal> (see <link linkend="Page-layout-parameters">Page
+layout parameters</link>). For instance, set the list&#8217;s left margin to be one
+quarter of the distance between the left and right margins of the
+enclosing environment with
+<literal>\setlength{\leftmargin}{0.25\linewidth}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Page breaking in a list structure is controlled by the three
+parameters below. For each, the &latex; default is
+<literal>-\@lowpenalty</literal>, that is, <literal>-51</literal>. Because it is negative,
+it somewhat encourages a page break at each spot. Change it with,
+e.g., <literal>\@beginparpenalty=9999</literal>; a value of 10000 prohibits a
+page break.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@beginparpenalty</primary></indexterm><literal>\@beginparpenalty</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-beginparpenalty"/><para>The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default <literal>-51</literal>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@itempenalty</primary></indexterm><literal>\@itempenalty</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-itempenalty"/><para>The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default <literal>-51</literal>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@endparpenalty</primary></indexterm><literal>\@endparpenalty</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="list-endparpenalty"/><para>The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default <literal>-51</literal>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>enumitem</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>enumitem</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The package <literal>enumitem</literal> is useful for customizing lists.
+</para>
+<para>This example has the labels in red. They are numbered, and the left
+edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text.
+See <link linkend="_005cusecounter">\usecounter</link>.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{color}
+\newcounter{cnt}
+\newcommand{\makeredlabel}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1.}}
+\newenvironment{redlabel}
+ {\begin{list}
+ {\arabic{cnt}}
+ {\usecounter{cnt}
+ \setlength{\labelwidth}{0em}
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{0.5em}
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{1.5em}
+ \setlength{\itemindent}{0.5em} % equals \labelwidth+\labelsep
+ \let\makelabel=\makeredlabel
+ }
+ }
+{\end{list} }
+</screen>
+
+
+<sect2 label="8.16.1" id="_005citem">
+<title><literal>\item</literal>: An entry in a list</title>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\item text of item
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\item[<replaceable>optional-label</replaceable>] text of item
+</screen>
+<para>An entry in a list. The entries are prefixed by a label, whose default
+depends on the list type.
+</para>
+<para>Because the optional label is surrounded by square brackets
+&#8216;<literal>[...]</literal>&#8217;, if you have an item whose text starts with &#8216;<literal>[</literal>&#8217;, you
+have to hide the bracket inside curly braces, as in: <literal>\item
+{[} is an open square bracket</literal>; otherwise, &latex; will think it
+marks the start of an optional label.
+</para>
+<para>Similarly, if the item does have the optional label and you need a
+close square bracket inside that label, you must hide it in the same
+way: <literal>\item[Close square bracket, {]}]</literal>. See <link linkend="LaTeX-command-syntax">&latex;
+command syntax</link>.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the enumerate list has two items that use the default
+label and one that uses the optional label.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{enumerate}
+ \item Moe
+ \item[sometimes] Shemp
+ \item Larry
+\end{enumerate}
+</screen>
+<para>The first item is labelled &#8216;<literal>1.</literal>&#8217;, the second item is labelled
+&#8216;<literal>sometimes</literal>&#8217;, and the third item is labelled &#8216;<literal>2.</literal>&#8217;. Because
+of the optional label in the second item, the third item is not
+labelled&#160;&#8216;<literal>3.</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.16.2" id="trivlist">
+<title><literal>trivlist</literal>: A restricted form of <literal>list</literal></title>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{trivlist}
+ ...
+\end{trivlist}
+</screen>
+<para>A restricted version of the list environment, in which margins are not
+indented and an <literal>\item</literal> without an optional argument produces no
+text. It is most often used in macros, to define an environment where
+the <literal>\item</literal> command as part of the environment&#8217;s definition. For
+instance, the <literal>center</literal> environment is defined essentially like
+this:
+</para>
+<screen>\newenvironment{center}
+ {\begin{trivlist}\centering\item\relax}
+ {\end{trivlist}}
+</screen>
+<para>Using <literal>trivlist</literal> in this way allows the macro to inherit some
+common code: combining vertical space of two adjacent environments;
+detecting whether the text following the environment should be
+considered a new paragraph or a continuation of the previous one;
+adjusting the left and right margins for possible nested list
+environments.
+</para>
+<para>Specifically, <literal>trivlist</literal> uses the current values of the list
+parameters (see <link linkend="list">list</link>), except that <literal>\parsep</literal> is set to the
+value of <literal>\parskip</literal>, and <literal>\leftmargin</literal>, <literal>\labelwidth</literal>,
+and <literal>\itemindent</literal> are set to zero.
+</para>
+<para>This example outputs the items as two paragraphs, except that (by
+default) they have no paragraph indent and are vertically separated.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{trivlist}
+\item The \textit{Surprise} is not old; no one would call her old.
+\item She has a bluff bow, lovely lines.
+\end{trivlist}
+</screen>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.17" id="math">
+<title><literal>math</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>math</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>math</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>in-line formulas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{math}
+<replaceable>math</replaceable>
+\end{math}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>math</literal> environment inserts given <replaceable>math</replaceable> material within
+the running text. <literal>\(...\)</literal> and <literal>$...$</literal> are synonyms.
+See <link linkend="Math-formulas">Math formulas</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.18" id="minipage">
+<title><literal>minipage</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>minipage</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>minipage</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>minipage, creating a</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{minipage}{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}
+ <replaceable>contents</replaceable>
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{minipage}[<replaceable>position</replaceable>][<replaceable>height</replaceable>][<replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}
+ <replaceable>contents</replaceable>
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
+<para>Put <replaceable>contents</replaceable> into a box that is <replaceable>width</replaceable> wide. This is like a
+small version of a page; it can contain its own footnotes, itemized
+lists, etc. (There are some restrictions, including that it cannot have
+floats.) This box will not be broken across pages. So <literal>minipage</literal>
+is similar to <literal>\parbox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cparbox">\parbox</link>) but here you can have
+paragraphs.
+</para>
+<para>This example will be 3&#160;inches wide, and has two paragraphs.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{minipage}{3in}
+ Stephen Kleene was a founder of the Theory of Computation.
+
+ He was a student of Church, wrote three influential texts,
+ was President of the Association for Symbolic Logic,
+ and won the National Medal of Science.
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
+<para>See below for a discussion of the paragraph indent inside a
+<literal>minipage</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The required argument <replaceable>width</replaceable> is a rigid length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+It gives the width of the box into which <replaceable>contents</replaceable> are typeset.
+</para>
+<para>There are three optional arguments, <replaceable>position</replaceable>, <replaceable>height</replaceable>, and
+<replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable>. You need not include all three. For example, get the
+default <replaceable>position</replaceable> and set the <replaceable>height</replaceable> with
+<literal>\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm] <replaceable>contents</replaceable> \end{minipage}</literal>.
+(Get the natural height with an empty argument, <literal>[]</literal>.)
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>position</replaceable> governs how the <literal>minipage</literal>
+vertically aligns with the surrounding material.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(synonym <literal>m</literal>) Default. Positions the <literal>minipage</literal> so its
+vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what
+Plain &tex; calls <literal>\vcenter</literal>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Match the top line in the <literal>minipage</literal> with the baseline of the
+surrounding text (Plain &tex;&#8217;s <literal>\vtop</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Match the bottom line in the <literal>minipage</literal> with the baseline of the
+surrounding text (Plain &tex;&#8217;s <literal>\vbox</literal>.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>To see the effects of these, contrast running this
+</para>
+<screen>---\begin{minipage}[c]{0.25in}
+ first\\ second\\ third
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
+<para>with the results of changing <literal>c</literal> to <literal>b</literal> or&#160;<literal>t</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>height</replaceable> is a rigid length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+It sets the height of the <literal>minipage</literal>. You can enter any value
+larger than, or equal to, or smaller than the <literal>minipage</literal>&#8217;s natural
+height and &latex; will not give an error or warning. You can also set
+it to a height of zero or a negative value.
+</para>
+<para>The final optional argument <replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable> controls the placement of
+<replaceable>content</replaceable> inside the box. These are the possible values are (the
+default is the value of <replaceable>position</replaceable>).
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Place <replaceable>content</replaceable> at the top of the box.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Place it in the vertical center.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Place it at the box bottom.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>s</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Stretch <replaceable>contents</replaceable> out vertically; it must contain vertically
+stretchable space.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The <replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable> argument makes sense when the <replaceable>height</replaceable> option
+is set to a value larger than the <literal>minipage</literal>&#8217;s natural height. To
+see the effect of the options, run this example with the various choices
+in place of <literal>b</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>Text before
+\begin{center}
+ ---\begin{minipage}[c][3in][b]{0.25\textwidth}
+ first\\ second\\ third
+ \end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+Text after
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>indentation of paragraphs, in minipage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph indentation, in minipage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parindent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>By default paragraphs are not indented in a <literal>minipage</literal>. Change
+that with a command such as <literal>\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}</literal> at
+the start of <replaceable>contents</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnotes in figures</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>figures, footnotes in</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Footnotes in a <literal>minipage</literal> environment are handled in a way that is
+particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
+<literal>\footnote</literal> or <literal>\footnotetext</literal> command puts the footnote at
+the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it
+uses the <literal>\mpfootnote</literal> counter instead of the ordinary
+<literal>footnote</literal> counter (see <link linkend="Counters">Counters</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This puts the footnote at the bottom of the table, not the bottom of the
+page.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center} % center the minipage on the line
+\begin{minipage}{2.5in}
+ \begin{center} % center the table inside the minipage
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \textsc{Monarch} &amp;\textsc{Reign} \\ \hline
+ Elizabeth II &amp;63 years\footnote{to date} \\
+ Victoria &amp;63 years \\
+ George III &amp;59 years
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>If you nest minipages then there is an oddness when using footnotes.
+Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next
+<literal>\end{minipage}</literal> which may not be their logical place.
+</para>
+<para>This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic. They
+are vertically centered.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+ ...
+\begin{center}
+ \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]{nyc.png}}
+ \hspace{0.1\textwidth}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+ \begin{tabular}{r|l}
+ \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &amp;Pop (million) \\ \hline
+ The Bronx &amp;$1.5$ \\
+ Brooklyn &amp;$2.6$ \\
+ Manhattan &amp;$1.6$ \\
+ Queens &amp;$2.3$ \\
+ Staten Island &amp;$0.5$
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.19" id="picture">
+<title><literal>picture</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>picture</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>picture</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>creating pictures</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>pictures, creating</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para><screen>\begin{picture}(<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>)
+ <replaceable>picture commands</replaceable>
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{picture}(<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>)(<replaceable>xoffset</replaceable>,<replaceable>yoffset</replaceable>)
+ <replaceable>picture commands</replaceable>
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+<para>An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows,
+boxes, circles, and text. Note that while this environment is not
+obsolete, new documents typically use much more powerful graphics
+creation systems, such as <literal>TikZ</literal>, <literal>PSTricks</literal>, <literal>MetaPost</literal>,
+or <literal>Asymptote</literal>. These are not covered in this document; see CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>This shows the parallelogram law for adding vectors.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unitlength</primary></indexterm>
+<screen>\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+\begin{picture}(6,6) % picture box will be 6cm wide by 6cm tall
+ \put(0,0){\vector(2,1){4}} % for every 2 over this vector goes 1 up
+ \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ first leg}}
+ \put(4,2){\vector(1,2){2}}
+ \put(5,4){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ second leg}}
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,1){6}}
+ \put(3,3){\makebox(0,0)[r]{sum\ }}
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+<para>You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an
+exact location.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{color,graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{center}
+\setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth}
+\begin{picture}(1,1) % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
+ \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}}
+ \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}}
+\end{picture}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>The red&#160;X will be precisely a quarter of the <literal>\linewidth</literal> from
+the left margin, and <literal>0.35\linewidth</literal> up from the bottom. Another
+example of this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get
+repeat material on each of a document&#8217;s pages.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>picture</literal> environment has one required argument, a pair of
+numbers (<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>). Multiply these by the value
+<literal>\unitlength</literal> to get the nominal size of the output, the space that
+&latex; reserves on the output page. This nominal size need not be how
+large the picture really is; &latex; will draw things from the picture
+outside the picture&#8217;s box.
+</para>
+<para>This environment also has an optional argument
+(<replaceable>xoffset</replaceable>,<replaceable>yoffset</replaceable>). It is used to shift the origin. Unlike
+most optional arguments, this one is not contained in square brackets.
+As with the required argument, it consists of two real numbers.
+Multiply these by <literal>\unitlength</literal> to get the point at the lower-left
+corner of the picture.
+</para>
+<para>For example, if <literal>\unitlength</literal> has been set to <literal>1mm</literal>, the
+command
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+</screen>
+<para>produces a box of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters. The
+picture&#8217;s origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner
+is there, and the upper-right corner is at (110mm,220mm). When you
+first draw a picture you typically omit the optional argument, leaving
+the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
+picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate
+optional argument.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>position, in picture</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Each <replaceable>picture command</replaceable> tells &latex; where to put something by
+naming its position. A <firstterm>position</firstterm> is a pair such as <literal>(2.4,-5)</literal>
+giving the x- and y-coordinates. A <firstterm>coordinate</firstterm> is a not a length,
+it is a real number (it may have a decimal point or a minus sign). It
+specifies a length in multiples of the unit length <literal>\unitlength</literal>,
+so if <literal>\unitlength</literal> has been set to <literal>1cm</literal>, then the coordinate
+2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters.
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&#8217;s default for <literal>\unitlength</literal> is <literal>1pt</literal>. it is a rigid
+length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). Change it with the <literal>\setlength</literal> command
+(see <link linkend="_005csetlength">\setlength</link>). Make this change only outside of a <literal>picture</literal>
+environment.
+</para>
+<para>Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at
+the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears
+as an argument, as with <literal>\put(1,2){...}</literal>, it is not enclosed in
+braces since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also,
+unlike in some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are
+further up the page.
+</para>
+<para>There are four ways to put things in a picture: <literal>\put</literal>,
+<literal>\multiput</literal>, <literal>\qbezier</literal>, and <literal>\graphpaper</literal>. The most
+often used is <literal>\put</literal>. This
+</para>
+<screen>\put(11.3,-0.3){...}
+</screen>
+<para>places the object with its reference point at coordinates
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>(11.3,-0.3)</mathphrase></inlineequation>. The reference points for various objects will be
+described below.
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>LR box</primary></indexterm>
+The <literal>\put</literal> command creates an <firstterm>LR box</firstterm> (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+Anything that can go in an <literal>\mbox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</link>) can
+go in the text argument of the <literal>\put</literal> command. The reference point
+will be the lower left corner of the box. In this picture
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+...\begin{picture}(1,1)
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,0){1}}
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,1){1}}
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+<para>the three dots are just slightly left of the point of the angle formed
+by the two lines. (Also, <literal>\line(1,1){1}</literal> does not call for a
+line of length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of
+1.)
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\multiput</literal>, <literal>qbezier</literal>, and <literal>graphpaper</literal> commands are
+described below.
+</para>
+<para>This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using <literal>\qbezier</literal> for
+that curve.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{picture}(3,1.5)
+ \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}} % x axis
+ \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}} % y axis
+ \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}} % left side rectangle
+ \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}} % right side
+ \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
+ \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
+ \thicklines % below here, lines are twice as thick
+ \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}}
+ \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}}
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+
+
+<sect2 label="8.19.1" id="_005cput">
+<title><literal>\put</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\put</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\put(<replaceable>xcoord</replaceable>,<replaceable>ycoord</replaceable>){<replaceable>content</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Place <replaceable>content</replaceable> at the coordinate (<replaceable>xcoord</replaceable>,<replaceable>ycoord</replaceable>). See
+the discussion of coordinates and <literal>\unitlength</literal> in <link linkend="picture">picture</link>.
+The <replaceable>content</replaceable> is processed in LR mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>) so it cannot
+contain line breaks.
+</para>
+<para>This includes the text into the <literal>picture</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\put(4.5,2.5){Apply the \textit{unpoke} move}
+</screen>
+<para>The reference point, the location (4.5,2.5), is the lower left of the
+text, at the bottom left of the &#8216;<literal>A</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.2" id="_005cmultiput">
+<title><literal>\multiput</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\multiput</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\multiput(<replaceable>x</replaceable>,<replaceable>y</replaceable>)(<replaceable>delta_x</replaceable>,<replaceable>delta_y</replaceable>){<replaceable>num-copies</replaceable>}{<replaceable>obj</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Copy <replaceable>obj</replaceable> a total of <replaceable>num-copies</replaceable> times, with an increment of
+<replaceable>delta_x,delta_y</replaceable>. The <replaceable>obj</replaceable> first appears at position
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>(x,y)</mathphrase></inlineequation>, then at <inlineequation><mathphrase>(x+\delta_x,y+\delta_y)</mathphrase></inlineequation>, and so on.
+</para>
+<para>This draws a simple grid with every fifth line in bold (see also
+<link linkend="_005cgraphpaper">\graphpaper</link>).
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{picture}(10,10)
+ \linethickness{0.05mm}
+ \multiput(0,0)(1,0){10}{\line(0,1){10}}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,1){10}{\line(1,0){10}}
+ \linethickness{0.5mm}
+ \multiput(0,0)(5,0){3}{\line(0,1){10}}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,5){3}{\line(1,0){10}}
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.3" id="_005cqbezier">
+<title><literal>\qbezier</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\qbezier</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\qbezier(<replaceable>x1</replaceable>,<replaceable>y1</replaceable>)(<replaceable>x2</replaceable>,<replaceable>y2</replaceable>)(<replaceable>x3</replaceable>,<replaceable>y3</replaceable>)
+\qbezier[<replaceable>num</replaceable>](<replaceable>x1</replaceable>,<replaceable>y1</replaceable>)(<replaceable>x2</replaceable>,<replaceable>y2</replaceable>)(<replaceable>x3</replaceable>,<replaceable>y3</replaceable>)
+</screen>
+<para>Draw a quadratic Bezier curve whose control points are given by the
+three required arguments <literal>(<replaceable>x1</replaceable>,<replaceable>y1</replaceable>)</literal>,
+<literal>(<replaceable>x2</replaceable>,<replaceable>y2</replaceable>)</literal>, and <literal>(<replaceable>x3</replaceable>,<replaceable>y3</replaceable>)</literal>. That is,
+the curve runs from <replaceable>(x1,y1)</replaceable> to <replaceable>(x3,y3)</replaceable>, is quadratic, and is
+such that the tangent line at <replaceable>(x1,y1)</replaceable> passes through
+<replaceable>(x2,y2)</replaceable>, as does the tangent line at <replaceable>(x3,y3)</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>This draws a curve from the coordinate (1,1) to (1,0).
+</para>
+<screen>\qbezier(1,1)(1.25,0.75)(1,0)
+</screen>
+<para>The curve&#8217;s tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the
+curve&#8217;s tangent line at (1,0).
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>num</replaceable> gives the number of calculated
+intermediate points. The default is to draw a smooth curve whose
+maximum number of points is <literal>\qbeziermax</literal> (change this value with
+<literal>\renewcommand</literal>).
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.4" id="_005cgraphpaper">
+<title><literal>\graphpaper</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\graphpaper</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\graphpaper(<replaceable>x_init</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_init</replaceable>)(<replaceable>x_dimen</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_dimen</replaceable>)
+\graphpaper[<replaceable>spacing</replaceable>](<replaceable>x_init</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_init</replaceable>)(<replaceable>x_dimen</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_dimen</replaceable>)
+</screen>
+<para>Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the <literal>graphpap</literal> package.
+The grid&#8217;s origin is <literal>(<replaceable>x_init</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_init</replaceable>)</literal>.
+Grid lines come every <replaceable>spacing</replaceable> units (the default is 10).
+The grid extends <replaceable>x_dimen</replaceable> units to the right and <replaceable>y_dimen</replaceable> units up.
+All arguments must be positive integers.
+</para>
+<para>This make a grid with seven vertical lines and eleven horizontal lines.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{graphpap} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{picture}(6,20) % in document body
+ \graphpaper[2](0,0)(12,20)
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+<para>The lines are numbered every ten units.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.5" id="_005cline">
+<title><literal>\line</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\line</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\line(<replaceable>x_run</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_rise</replaceable>){<replaceable>travel</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Draw a line. It slopes such that it vertically rises <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> for
+every horizontal <replaceable>x_run</replaceable>. The <replaceable>travel</replaceable> is the total horizontal
+change&#160;&#8212; it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>x</mathphrase></inlineequation>. In the special case of vertical lines, where
+(<replaceable>x_run</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_rise</replaceable>)=(0,1), the <replaceable>travel</replaceable> gives the change in
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+<para>This draws a line starting at coordinates (1,3).
+</para>
+<screen>\put(1,3){\line(2,5){4}}
+</screen>
+<para>For every over 2, this line will go up 5. Because <replaceable>travel</replaceable>
+specifies that this goes over 4, it must go up&#160;10. Thus its
+endpoint is <inlineequation><mathphrase>(1,3)+(4,10)=(5,13)</mathphrase></inlineequation>. In particular, note that
+<inlineequation><mathphrase><replaceable>travel</replaceable>=4</mathphrase></inlineequation> is not the length of the line, it is the change in
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>x</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+<para>The arguments <replaceable>x_run</replaceable> and <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> are integers that can be
+positive, negative, or zero. (If both are 0 then &latex; treats the
+second as 1.) With
+<literal>\put(<replaceable>x_init</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_init</replaceable>){\line(<replaceable>x_run</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_rise</replaceable>){<replaceable>travel</replaceable>}}</literal>,
+if <replaceable>x_run</replaceable> is negative then the line&#8217;s ending point has a first
+coordinate that is less than <replaceable>x_init</replaceable>. If <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> is negative
+then the line&#8217;s ending point has a second coordinate that is less than
+<replaceable>y_init</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>If <replaceable>travel</replaceable> is negative then you get <literal>LaTeX Error: Bad \line or
+\vector argument.</literal>
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>pict2e</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics packages</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>pict2e</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>pict2e</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>TikZ</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>TikZ</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>PSTricks</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>PSTricks</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>MetaPost</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>MetaPost</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>Asymptote</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>Asymptote</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Standard &latex; can only draw lines with a limited range of slopes
+because these lines are made by putting together line segments from
+pre-made fonts. The two numbers <replaceable>x_run</replaceable> and <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> must have
+integer values from &#8722;6 through&#160;6. Also, they must be
+relatively prime, so that <replaceable>(x_run,y_rise)</replaceable> can be (2,1) but not
+(4,2) (if you choose the latter then instead of lines you get sequences
+of arrowheads; the solution is to switch to the former). To get lines
+of arbitrary slope and plenty of other shapes in a system like
+<literal>picture</literal>, see the package <filename>pict2e</filename> on CTAN. Another solution
+is to use a full-featured graphics system such as <filename>TikZ</filename>, or
+<filename>PSTricks</filename>, or <filename>MetaPost</filename>, or <filename>Asymptote</filename>
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.6" id="_005clinethickness">
+<title><literal>\linethickness</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linethickness</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\linethickness{<replaceable>dim</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Declares the thickness of subsequent horizontal and vertical lines in a
+picture to be <replaceable>dim</replaceable>, which must be a positive length
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). It differs from <literal>\thinlines</literal> and
+<literal>\thicklines</literal> in that it does not affect the thickness of slanted
+lines, circles, or ovals.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.7" id="_005cthinlines">
+<title><literal>\thinlines</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thinlines</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.4pt. This is the default
+thickness, so this command is unnecessary unless the thickness has been
+changed with either <link linkend="_005clinethickness">\linethickness</link> or <link linkend="_005cthicklines">\thicklines</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.8" id="_005cthicklines">
+<title><literal>\thicklines</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thicklines</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.8pt. See also
+<link linkend="_005clinethickness">\linethickness</link> and <link linkend="_005cthinlines">\thinlines</link>. This command is illustrated
+in the Trapezoidal Rule example of <link linkend="picture">picture</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.9" id="_005ccircle">
+<title><literal>\circle</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\circle</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\circle{<replaceable>diameter</replaceable>}
+\circle*{<replaceable>diameter</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Produces a circle with a diameter as close as possible to the specified
+one. The <literal>*</literal>&#160;form produces a filled-in circle.
+</para>
+<para>This draws a circle of radius 6, centered at <literal>(5,7)</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\put(5,7){\circle{6}}
+</screen>
+<para>The available radii for <literal>circle</literal> are, in points, the even
+numbers from 2 to 20, inclusive. For <literal>circle*</literal> they are all the
+integers from 1 to 15.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.10" id="_005coval">
+<title><literal>\oval</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oval</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\oval(<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>)
+\oval(<replaceable>width</replaceable>,<replaceable>height</replaceable>)[<replaceable>portion</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument
+<replaceable>portion</replaceable> allows you to produce only half or a quarter of the oval.
+For half an oval take <replaceable>portion</replaceable> to be one of these.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>top half
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>bottom half
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>right half
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>left half
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Produce only one quarter of the oval by setting <replaceable>portion</replaceable> to
+<literal>tr</literal>, <literal>br</literal>, <literal>bl</literal>, or <literal>tl</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>This draws the top half of an oval that is 3 wide and 7 tall.
+</para>
+<screen>\put(5,7){\oval(3,7)[t]}
+</screen>
+<para>The (5,7) is the center of the entire oval, not just the center of the
+top half.
+</para>
+<para>These shapes are not ellipses. They are rectangles whose corners are
+made with quarter circles. These circles have a maximum radius of
+20pt (see <link linkend="_005ccircle">\circle</link> for the sizes). Thus large ovals are just
+boxes with a small amount of corner rounding.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.11" id="_005cshortstack">
+<title><literal>\shortstack</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\shortstack</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\shortstack[<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>line 1</replaceable> \\ ... }
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a vertical stack of objects.
+</para>
+<para>This labels the <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation> axis.
+</para>
+<screen>\put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}} % x axis
+\put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}} % y
+\put(-0.25,2){\makebox[0][r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}}
+</screen>
+<para>For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack.
+In the above example the <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</link> puts the stack flush
+right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits slightly to
+the left of the <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation>&#160;axis.
+</para>
+<para>The valid positions are:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Make objects flush right
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Make objects flush left
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Center objects (default)
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (for <literal>\shortstack</literal> objects)</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Separate objects into lines with <literal>\\</literal>. These stacks are short in
+that, unlike in a <literal>tabular</literal> or <literal>array</literal> environment, here the
+rows are not spaced out to be of even heights. Thus, in
+<literal>\shortstack{X\\o\\o\\X}</literal> the first and last rows are taller than
+the middle two. You can adjust row heights either by putting in the
+usual interline spacing with <literal>\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}</literal>,
+or by hand, via an explicit zero-width box <literal>\shortstack{X \\
+\rule{0pt}{12pt} o\\o\\X}</literal> or by using <literal>\\</literal>&#8217;s optional
+argument <literal>\shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\shortstack</literal> command is also available outside the
+<literal>picture</literal> environment.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.12" id="_005cvector">
+<title><literal>\vector</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vector</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\vector(<replaceable>x_run</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_rise</replaceable>){<replaceable>travel</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Draw a line ending in an arrow. The slope of that line is: it
+vertically rises <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> for every horizontal <replaceable>x_run</replaceable>. The
+<replaceable>travel</replaceable> is the total horizontal change&#160;&#8212; it is not the
+length of the vector, it is the change in <inlineequation><mathphrase>x</mathphrase></inlineequation>. In the special case
+of vertical vectors, if (<replaceable>x_run</replaceable>,<replaceable>y_rise</replaceable>)=(0,1), then
+<replaceable>travel</replaceable> gives the change in <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+<para>For an example see <link linkend="picture">picture</link>.
+</para>
+<para>For elaboration on <replaceable>x_run</replaceable> and <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> see <link linkend="_005cline">\line</link>. As
+there, the values of <replaceable>x_run</replaceable> and <replaceable>y_rise</replaceable> are limited. For
+<literal>\vector</literal> you must chooses integers between &#8722;4 and 4,
+inclusive. Also, the two you choose must be relatively prime. Thus,
+<literal>\vector(2,1){4}</literal> is acceptable but <literal>\vector(4,2){4}</literal> is
+not (if you use the latter then you get a sequence of arrowheads).
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.13" id="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">
+<title><literal>\makebox</literal> (picture)</title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makebox (for <literal>picture</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\makebox(<replaceable>rec-width</replaceable>,<replaceable>rec-height</replaceable>){<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\makebox(<replaceable>rec-width</replaceable>,<replaceable>rec-height</replaceable>)[<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Make a box to hold <replaceable>text</replaceable>. This command fits with the
+<literal>picture</literal> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because <replaceable>rec-width</replaceable> and <replaceable>rec-height</replaceable> are numbers specifying
+distances in terms of the <literal>\unitlength</literal> (see <link linkend="picture">picture</link>). This
+command is similar to the normal <literal>\makebox</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp;
+\makebox</link>) except here that you must specify the width and height. This
+command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This makes a box of length 3.5 times <literal>\unitlength</literal> and height 4
+times <literal>\unitlength</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\put(1,2){\makebox(3.5,4){...}}
+</screen>
+<para>The optional argument <literal><replaceable>position</replaceable></literal> specifies where in the box
+the <replaceable>text</replaceable> appears. The default is to center it, both horizontally
+and vertically. To place it somewhere else, use a string with one or
+two of these letters.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Puts <replaceable>text</replaceable> the top of the box.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put <replaceable>text</replaceable> at the bottom.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put <replaceable>text</replaceable> on the left.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put <replaceable>text</replaceable> on the right.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.14" id="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">
+<title><literal>\framebox</literal> (picture)</title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\framebox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\framebox(<replaceable>rec-width</replaceable>,<replaceable>rec-height</replaceable>){<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\framebox(<replaceable>rec-width</replaceable>,<replaceable>rec-height</replaceable>)[<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>This is the same as <link linkend="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</link> except that it puts a frame
+around the outside of the box that it creates. The reference point is
+the bottom left corner of the frame. This command fits with the
+<literal>picture</literal> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+<literal>\unitlength</literal> (see <link linkend="picture">picture</link>). This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This example creates a frame 2.5&#160;inches by 3&#160;inches and puts
+the text in the center.
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{\unitlength}{1in}
+\framebox(2.5,3){test text}
+</screen>
+<para>The required arguments are that the rectangle has overall width
+<replaceable>rect-width</replaceable> units and height <replaceable>rect-height</replaceable> units.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>position</replaceable> specifies the position of
+<replaceable>text</replaceable>; see <link linkend="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</link> for the values that it can
+take.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxrule</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxsep</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The rule has thickness <literal>\fboxrule</literal> and there is a blank space
+<literal>\fboxsep</literal> between the frame and the contents of the box.
+</para>
+<para>For this command, you must specify the <replaceable>width</replaceable> and <replaceable>height</replaceable>. If
+you want to just put a frame around some contents whose dimension is
+determined in some other way then either use <literal>\fbox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox
+&amp; \framebox</link>) or <literal>\frame</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cframe">\frame</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.15" id="_005cframe">
+<title><literal>\frame</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frame</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\frame{<replaceable>contents</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Puts a rectangular frame around <replaceable>contents</replaceable>. The reference point is
+the bottom left corner of the frame. In contrast to <literal>\framebox</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</link>), this command puts no extra space is put
+between the frame and the object. It is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.19.16" id="_005cdashbox">
+<title><literal>\dashbox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dashbox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\dashbox{<replaceable>dash-len</replaceable>}(<replaceable>rect-width</replaceable>,<replaceable>rect-height</replaceable>){<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\dashbox{<replaceable>dash-len</replaceable>}(<replaceable>rect-width</replaceable>,<replaceable>rect-height</replaceable>)[<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Create a dashed rectangle around <replaceable>text</replaceable>. This command fits with the
+<literal>picture</literal> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+<literal>\unitlength</literal> (see <link linkend="picture">picture</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The required arguments are: dashes are <replaceable>dash-len</replaceable> units long, with
+the same length gap, and the rectangle has overall width
+<replaceable>rect-width</replaceable> units and height <replaceable>rect-height</replaceable> units.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>position</replaceable> specifies the position of
+<replaceable>text</replaceable>; see <link linkend="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</link> for the values that it can
+take.
+</para>
+<para>This shows that you can use non-integer value for <replaceable>dash-len</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<screen>\put(0,0){\dashbox{0.1}(5,0.5){My hovercraft is full of eels.}}
+</screen>
+<para>Each dash will be <literal>0.1\unitlength</literal> long, the box&#8217;s width is
+<literal>5\unitlength</literal> and its height is <literal>0.5\unitlength</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>As in that example, a dashed box looks best when <replaceable>rect-width</replaceable> and
+<replaceable>rect-height</replaceable> are multiples of the <replaceable>dash-len</replaceable>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.20" id="quotation-_0026-quote">
+<title><literal>quotation</literal> &amp; <literal>quote</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>quotation</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>quotation</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph indentations in quoted text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>quote</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>quote</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{quotation}
+ <replaceable>text</replaceable>
+\end{quotation}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{quote}
+ <replaceable>text</replaceable>
+\end{quote}
+</screen>
+<para>Include a quotation. Both environments indent margins on both sides by
+<literal>\leftmargin</literal> and the text is right-justified.
+</para>
+<para>They differ in how they treat paragraphs. In the <literal>quotation</literal>
+environment, paragraphs are indented by 1.5em and the space
+between paragraphs is small, <literal>0pt plus 1pt</literal>. In the <literal>quote</literal>
+environment, paragraphs are not indented and there is vertical space
+between paragraphs (it is the rubber length <literal>\parsep</literal>).
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{quotation} \small\it
+ Four score and seven years ago
+ ... shall not perish from the earth.
+ \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
+\end{quotation}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.21" id="tabbing">
+<title><literal>tabbing</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>tabbing</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>tabbing</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tab stops, using</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lining text up using tab stops</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>alignment via tabbing</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabbing}
+<replaceable>row1col1</replaceable> \= <replaceable>row1col2</replaceable> ... \\
+<replaceable>row2col1</replaceable> \&gt; <replaceable>row2col2</replaceable> ... \\
+...
+\end{tabbing}
+</screen>
+<para>Align text in columns, by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as
+was done on a typewriter. This is less often used than the environments
+<literal>tabular</literal> (see <link linkend="tabular">tabular</link>) or <literal>array</literal> (see <link linkend="array">array</link>) because
+in those the width of each column need not be constant and need not be
+known in advance.
+</para>
+<para>This example has a first line where the tab stops are set to explicit
+widths, ended by a <literal>\kill</literal> command (which is described below):
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabbing}
+\hspace{0.75in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \kill
+Ship \&gt; Guns \&gt; Year \\
+\textit{Sophie} \&gt; 14 \&gt; 1800 \\
+\textit{Polychrest} \&gt; 24 \&gt; 1803 \\
+\textit{Lively} \&gt; 38 \&gt; 1804 \\
+\textit{Surprise} \&gt; 28 \&gt; 1805 \\
+\end{tabbing}
+</screen>
+<para>Both the <literal>tabbing</literal> environment and the more widely-used
+<literal>tabular</literal> environment put text in columns. The most important
+distinction is that in <literal>tabular</literal> the width of columns is
+determined automatically by &latex;, while in <literal>tabbing</literal> the user
+sets the tab stops. Another distinction is that <literal>tabular</literal>
+generates a box, but <literal>tabbing</literal> can be broken across pages.
+Finally, while <literal>tabular</literal> can be used in any mode, <literal>tabbing</literal>
+can be used only in paragraph mode and it starts a new paragraph.
+</para>
+<para>A <literal>tabbing</literal> environment always starts a new paragraph, without
+indentation. Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need
+to use the starred form of the <literal>\hspace</literal> command at the beginning
+of a tabbed row. The right margin of the <literal>tabbing</literal> environment is
+the end of line, so that the width of the environment is
+<literal>\linewidth</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>row, tabbing</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <literal>tabbing</literal> environment contains a sequence of <firstterm>tabbed
+rows</firstterm>. The first tabbed row begins immediately after
+<literal>\begin{tabbing}</literal> and each row ends with <literal>\\</literal> or
+<literal>\kill</literal>. The last row may omit the <literal>\\</literal> and end with just
+<literal>\end{tabbing}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>At any point the <literal>tabbing</literal> environment has a current tab stop
+pattern, a sequence of <inlineequation><mathphrase><replaceable>n</replaceable> &gt; 0</mathphrase></inlineequation> tab stops, numbered 0, 1,
+etc. These create <replaceable>n</replaceable> corresponding columns. Tab stop&#160;0 is
+always the left margin, defined by the enclosing environment. Tab
+stop number&#160;<replaceable>i</replaceable> is set if it is assigned a horizontal
+position on the page. Tab stop number&#160;<replaceable>i</replaceable> can only be set if
+all the stops 0, &#8230;, <inlineequation><mathphrase>i-1</mathphrase></inlineequation> have already been set; normally
+later stops are to the right of earlier ones.
+</para>
+<para>By default any text typeset in a <literal>tabbing</literal> environment is typeset
+ragged right and left-aligned on the current tab stop. Typesetting is
+done in LR mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The following commands can be used inside a <literal>tabbing</literal> environment.
+They are all fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (tabbing)</primary></indexterm><literal>\\ (tabbing)</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>End a tabbed line and typeset it.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\= (tabbing)</primary></indexterm><literal>\= (tabbing)</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Sets a tab stop at the current position.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\&gt; (tabbing)</primary></indexterm><literal>\&gt; (tabbing)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\&gt;</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Advances to the next tab stop.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\&lt;</primary></indexterm><literal>\&lt;</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing
+the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\+</primary></indexterm><literal>\+</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if
+necessary.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\-</primary></indexterm><literal>\-</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if
+necessary.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\' (tabbing)</primary></indexterm><literal>\' (tabbing)</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e.,
+everything from the most recent <literal>\&gt;</literal>, <literal>\&lt;</literal>, <literal>\'</literal>,
+<literal>\\</literal>, or <literal>\kill</literal> command, to the previous column and aligned
+to the right, flush against the current column&#8217;s tab stop.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\` (tabbing)</primary></indexterm><literal>\` (tabbing)</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab
+stop&#160;0. However, it can&#8217;t move text to the right of the last
+column because there&#8217;s no tab stop there. The <literal>\`</literal> command moves
+all the text that follows it, up to the <literal>\\</literal> or
+<literal>\end{tabbing}</literal> command that ends the line, to the right margin
+of the <literal>tabbing</literal> environment. There must be no <literal>\&gt;</literal> or
+<literal>\'</literal> command between the <literal>\`</literal> and the <literal>\\</literal> or
+<literal>\end{tabbing}</literal> command that ends the line.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\a (tabbing)</primary></indexterm><literal>\a (tabbing)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\a' (acute accent in tabbing)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\a` (grave accent in tabbing)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\a= (macron accent in tabbing)</primary></indexterm>
+<para>In a <literal>tabbing</literal> environment, the commands <literal>\=</literal>, <literal>\'</literal> and
+<literal>\`</literal> do not produce accents as usual (see <link linkend="Accents">Accents</link>). Instead,
+use the commands <literal>\a=</literal>, <literal>\a'</literal> and <literal>\a`</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\kill</primary></indexterm><literal>\kill</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like <literal>\\</literal> except
+that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it.
+Any <literal>\=</literal>, <literal>\+</literal> or <literal>\-</literal> commands in that line remain in
+effect.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\poptabs</primary></indexterm><literal>\poptabs</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\poptabs</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last <literal>\pushtabs</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pushtabs</primary></indexterm><literal>\pushtabs</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing
+tab stop positions in the middle of a <literal>tabbing</literal> environment.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tabbingsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\tabbingsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Distance of the text moved by <literal>\'</literal> to left of current tab stop.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>This example typesets a Pascal function:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabbing}
+function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \&gt; begin \= \+ \\
+ \&gt; if \= n &gt; 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+\end{tabbing}
+</screen>
+<para>The output looks like this.
+</para>
+<screen>function fact(n : integer) : integer;
+ begin
+ if n &gt; 1 then
+ fact := n * fact(n-1);
+ else
+ fact := 1;
+ end;
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>algorithm2e</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>algorithm2e</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>listings</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>listings</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>minted</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>minted</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>fancyvrb</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>fancyvrb</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>This example is just for illustration of the environment. To actually
+typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim environment
+(see <link linkend="verbatim">verbatim</link>) would normally be best. For pretty-printed code,
+there are quite a few packages, including <literal>algorithm2e</literal>,
+<literal>fancyvrb</literal>, <literal>listings</literal>, and <literal>minted</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.22" id="table">
+<title><literal>table</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>table</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>table</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tables, creating</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>creating tables</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{table}[<replaceable>placement</replaceable>]
+ <replaceable>table body</replaceable>
+ \caption[<replaceable>loftitle</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>} % optional
+ \label{<replaceable>label}</replaceable> % also optional
+\end{table}
+</screen>
+<para>A class of floats (see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>). They cannot be split across pages
+and so they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but instead
+are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a following page.
+</para>
+<para>This example <literal>table</literal> environment contains a <literal>tabular</literal>
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{table}
+ \centering\small
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Author}}
+ &amp;\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Piece}} \\ \hline
+ Bach &amp;Cello Suite Number 1 \\
+ Beethoven &amp;Cello Sonata Number 3 \\
+ Brahms &amp;Cello Sonata Number 1
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Top cello pieces}
+ \label{tab:cello}
+\end{table}
+</screen>
+<para>but you can put many different kinds of content in a <literal>table</literal>,
+including text, &latex; commands, etc.
+</para>
+<para>For the possible values of <replaceable>placement</replaceable> and their effect on the
+float placement algorithm, see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>.
+</para>
+<para>The table body is typeset in a <literal>parbox</literal> of width <literal>\textwidth</literal>.
+It can contain text, commands, graphics, etc.
+</para>
+<para>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <link linkend="Cross-references">Cross
+references</link>).
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\caption</primary></indexterm>
+The <literal>\caption</literal> command is also optional. It specifies caption text
+for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional
+<replaceable>lottitle</replaceable> is present then that text is used in the list of tables
+instead of <replaceable>title</replaceable> (see <link linkend="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</link>).
+</para>
+<para>In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a page,
+unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{table}[b]
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{r|p{2in}} \hline
+ One &amp;The loneliest number \\
+ Two &amp;Can be as sad as one.
+ It's the loneliest number since the number one.
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Cardinal virtues}
+ \label{tab:CardinalVirtues}
+\end{table}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.23" id="tabular">
+<title><literal>tabular</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>tabular</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>tabular</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lines in tables</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lining text up in tables</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}[<replaceable>pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>cols</replaceable>}
+ <replaceable>column 1 entry</replaceable> &amp;<replaceable>column 2 entry</replaceable> ... &amp;<replaceable>column n entry</replaceable> \\
+ ...
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular*}{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}[<replaceable>pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>cols</replaceable>}
+ <replaceable>column 1 entry</replaceable> &amp;<replaceable>column 2 entry</replaceable> ... &amp;<replaceable>column n entry</replaceable> \\
+ ...
+\end{tabular*}
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of horizontal rows.
+Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically in columns. This
+illustrates many of the features.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textit{Player name} &amp;\textit{Career home runs} \\
+ \hline
+ Hank Aaron &amp;755 \\
+ Babe Ruth &amp;714
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar
+between them. This is specified in <literal>tabular</literal>&#8217;s argument
+<literal>{l|l}</literal>.
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>&amp;</primary></indexterm>
+Put the entries into different columns by separating them with an
+ampersand, <literal>&amp;</literal>. The end of each row is marked with a double
+backslash, <literal>\\</literal>. Put a horizontal rule below a row, after a double
+backslash, with <literal>\hline</literal>.
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>tabular</literal></primary></indexterm>
+After the last row the <literal>\\</literal> is optional, unless an <literal>\hline</literal>
+command follows to put a rule below the table.
+</para>
+<para>The required and optional arguments to <literal>tabular</literal> consist of:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>pos</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Optional. Specifies the table&#8217;s vertical position. The default is to
+align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of the
+surrounding text. There are two other possible alignments: <literal>t</literal>
+aligns the table so its top row matches the baseline of the surrounding
+text, and <literal>b</literal> aligns on the bottom row.
+</para>
+<para>This only has an effect if there is other text. In the common case of a
+<literal>tabular</literal> alone in a <literal>center</literal> environment this option makes
+no difference.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>cols</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Required. Specifies the formatting of columns. It consists of a
+sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the types of
+column and intercolumn material.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>A column of left-aligned items.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>A column of right-aligned items.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>A column of centered items.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>|</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>@{<replaceable>text or space</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Insert <replaceable>text or space</replaceable> at this location in every row. The <replaceable>text
+or space</replaceable> material is typeset in LR mode. This text is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>If between two columns there is no @-expression then &latex;&#8217;s
+<literal>book</literal>, <literal>article</literal>, and <literal>report</literal> classes will put on
+either side of each column a space of length <literal>\tabcolsep</literal>, which by
+default is 6pt. That is, by default adjacent columns are
+separated by 12pt (so <literal>\tabcolsep</literal> is misleadingly named
+since it is only half of the separation between tabular columns). In
+addition, a space of 6pt also comes before the first column and
+after the final column, unless you put a <literal>@{...}</literal> or <literal>|</literal>
+there.
+</para>
+<para>If you override the default and use an @-expression then &latex; does
+not insert <literal>\tabcolsep</literal> so you must insert any desired space
+yourself, as in <literal>@{\hspace{1em}}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>An empty expression <literal>@{}</literal> will eliminate the space. In
+particular, sometimes you want to eliminate the space before the first
+column or after the last one, as in the example below where the
+tabular lines need to lie on the left margin.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{flushleft}
+ \begin{tabular}{@{}l}
+ ...
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{flushleft}
+</screen>
+<para>The next example shows text, a decimal point between the columns,
+arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on it.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{r@{$.$}l}
+ $3$ &amp;$14$ \\
+ $9$ &amp;$80665$
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\extracolsep</primary></indexterm>
+<para>An <literal>\extracolsep{<replaceable>wd</replaceable>}</literal> command in an @-expression causes an
+extra space of width <replaceable>wd</replaceable> to appear to the left of all subsequent
+columns, until countermanded by another <literal>\extracolsep</literal>. Unlike
+ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an
+@-expression. An <literal>\extracolsep</literal> command can be used only in an
+@-expression in the <literal>cols</literal> argument. Below, &latex; inserts the
+right amount of intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches
+wide.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular*}{4in}{l@{\extracolsep{\fill}}l}
+ Seven times down, eight times up \ldots
+ &amp;such is life!
+\end{tabular*}
+</screen>
+<para>To insert commands that are automatically executed before a given
+column, load the <literal>array</literal> package and use the <literal>&gt;{...}</literal>
+specifier.
+<!-- xx should fully explain array, tabularx, and all other base packages... -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>p{<replaceable>wd</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width <replaceable>wd</replaceable>, as if
+it were the argument of a <literal>\parbox[t]{wd}{...}</literal> command.
+</para>
+<para>A line break double backslash <literal>\\</literal> may not appear in the item,
+except inside an environment like <literal>minipage</literal>, <literal>array</literal>, or
+<literal>tabular</literal>, or inside an explicit <literal>\parbox</literal>, or in the scope of
+a <literal>\centering</literal>, <literal>\raggedright</literal>, or <literal>\raggedleft</literal>
+declaration (when used in a <literal>p</literal>-column element these declarations
+must appear inside braces, as with <literal>{\centering .. \\
+..}</literal>). Otherwise &latex; will misinterpret the double backslash as
+ending the row. Instead, to get a line break in there use
+<literal>\newline</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewline">\newline</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>*{<replaceable>num</replaceable>}{<replaceable>cols</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Equivalent to <replaceable>num</replaceable> copies of <replaceable>cols</replaceable>, where <replaceable>num</replaceable> is a
+positive integer and <replaceable>cols</replaceable> is a list of specifiers. Thus the
+specifier <literal>\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}</literal> is equivalent to
+the specifier <literal>\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}</literal>. Note that
+<replaceable>cols</replaceable> may contain another <literal>*</literal>-expression.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>width</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Required for <literal>tabular*</literal>, not allowed for <literal>tabular</literal>. Specifies
+the width of the <literal>tabular*</literal> environment. The space between columns
+should be rubber, as with <literal>@{\extracolsep{\fill}}</literal>, to allow
+the table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
+are likely to get the <literal>Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
+...</literal> warning.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Parameters that control formatting:
+<!-- xx defaults, own node (xref from array)? -->
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arrayrulewidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\arrayrulewidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="tabular-arrayrulewidth"/><para>A length that is the thickness of the rule created by <literal>|</literal>,
+<literal>\hline</literal>, and <literal>\vline</literal> in the <literal>tabular</literal> and <literal>array</literal>
+environments. The default is &#8216;<literal>.4pt</literal>&#8217;. Change it as in
+<literal>\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arraystretch</primary></indexterm><literal>\arraystretch</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="tabular-arraystrech"/><para>A factor by which the spacing between rows in the <literal>tabular</literal> and
+<literal>array</literal> environments is multiplied. The default is &#8216;<literal>1</literal>&#8217;, for
+no scaling. Change it as <literal>\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\doublerulesep</primary></indexterm><literal>\doublerulesep</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="tabular-doublerulesep"/><para>A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the
+<literal>||</literal> specifier. The default is &#8216;<literal>2pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tabcolsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\tabcolsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="tabular-tabcolsep"/><para>A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
+&#8216;<literal>6pt</literal>&#8217;. Change it with <literal>\setlength</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The following commands can be used inside the body of a <literal>tabular</literal>
+environment, the first two inside an entry and the second two between
+lines:
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="8.23.1" id="_005cmulticolumn">
+<title><literal>\multicolumn</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\multicolumn</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\multicolumn{<replaceable>numcols</replaceable>}{<replaceable>cols</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Make an <literal>array</literal> or <literal>tabular</literal> entry that spans several columns.
+The first argument <replaceable>numcols</replaceable> gives the number of columns to span.
+The second argument <replaceable>cols</replaceable> specifies the formatting of the entry,
+with <literal>c</literal> for centered, <literal>l</literal> for flush left, or <literal>r</literal> for
+flush right. The third argument <replaceable>text</replaceable> gives the contents of that
+entry.
+</para>
+<para>In this example, in the first row, the second and third columns are
+spanned by the single heading &#8216;<literal>Name</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{lccl}
+ \textit{ID} &amp;\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &amp;\textit{Age} \\
+ \hline
+ 978-0-393-03701-2 &amp;O'Brian &amp;Patrick &amp;55 \\
+ ...
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>What counts as a column is:&#160;the column format specifier for the
+<literal>array</literal> or <literal>tabular</literal> environment is broken into parts, where
+each part (except the first) begins with <literal>l</literal>, <literal>c</literal>, <literal>r</literal>,
+or&#160;<literal>p</literal>. So from <literal>\begin{tabular}{|r|ccp{1.5in}|}</literal>
+the parts are <literal>|r|</literal>, <literal>c</literal>, <literal>c</literal>,
+and&#160;<literal>p{1.5in}|</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The <replaceable>cols</replaceable> argument overrides the <literal>array</literal> or <literal>tabular</literal>
+environment&#8217;s intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn
+entry. To affect that area, this argument can contain vertical bars
+<literal>|</literal> indicating the placement of vertical rules, and <literal>@{...}</literal>
+expressions. Thus if <replaceable>cols</replaceable> is &#8216;<literal>|c|</literal>&#8217; then this multicolumn
+entry will be centered and a vertical rule will come in the intercolumn
+area before it and after it. This table details the exact behavior.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{|cc|c|c|}
+ \multicolumn{1}{r}{w} % entry one
+ &amp;\multicolumn{1}{|r|}{x} % entry two
+ &amp;\multicolumn{1}{|r}{y} % entry three
+ &amp;z % entry four
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule because
+the <literal>\multicolumn</literal> has the <replaceable>cols</replaceable> specifier &#8216;<literal>r</literal>&#8217; with no
+initial vertical bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a
+vertical rule; although the first <replaceable>cols</replaceable> does not have an ending
+vertical bar, the second <replaceable>cols</replaceable> does have a starting one. Between
+entry two and entry three there is a single vertical rule; despite that
+the <replaceable>cols</replaceable> in both of the surrounding <literal>multicolumn</literal>&#8217;s call for
+a vertical rule, you only get one rule. Between entry three and entry
+four there is no vertical rule; the default calls for one but the
+<replaceable>cols</replaceable> in the entry three <literal>\multicolumn</literal> leaves it out, and
+that takes precedence. Finally, following entry four there is a
+vertical rule because of the default.
+</para>
+<para>The number of spanned columns <replaceable>numcols</replaceable> can be 1. Besides giving
+the ability to change the horizontal alignment, this also is useful to
+override for one row the <literal>tabular</literal> definition&#8217;s default intercolumn
+area specification, including the placement of vertical rules.
+</para>
+<para>In the example below, in the <literal>tabular</literal> definition the first column
+is specified to default to left justified but in the first row the entry
+is centered with <literal>\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}</literal>.
+Also in the first row, the second and third columns are spanned by a
+single entry with <literal>\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}}</literal>,
+overriding the specification to center those two columns on the page
+range en-dash.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{l|r@{--}l}
+ \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}
+ &amp;multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}} \\ \hline
+ Baroque &amp;1600 &amp;1760 \\
+ Classical &amp;1730 &amp;1820 \\
+ Romantic &amp;1780 &amp;1910 \\
+ Impressionistic &amp;1875 &amp;1925
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>Although the <literal>tabular</literal> specification by default puts a vertical
+rule between the first and second columns, no such vertical rule appears
+in the first row here. That&#8217;s because there is no vertical bar in the
+<replaceable>cols</replaceable> part of the first row&#8217;s first <literal>\multicolumn</literal> command.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.23.2" id="_005cvline">
+<title><literal>\vline</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vline</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Draw a vertical line in a <literal>tabular</literal> or <literal>array</literal> environment
+extending the full height and depth of an entry&#8217;s row. Can also be
+used in an @-expression, although its synonym vertical
+bar&#160;<literal>|</literal> is more common. This command is rarely used in the
+body of a table; typically a table&#8217;s vertical lines are specified in
+<literal>tabular</literal>&#8217;s <replaceable>cols</replaceable> argument and overridden as needed with
+<literal>\multicolumn</literal> (see <link linkend="tabular">tabular</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The example below illustrates some pitfalls. In the first row&#8217;s second
+entry the <literal>\hfill</literal> moves the <literal>\vline</literal> to the left edge of the
+cell. But that is different than putting it halfway between the two
+columns, so between the first and second columns there are two vertical
+rules, with the one from the <literal>{c|cc}</literal> specifier coming before the
+one produced by the <literal>\vline\hfill</literal>. In contrast, the first row&#8217;s
+third entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two
+columns. In the second row, the <literal>ghi</literal> is the widest entry in its
+column so in the <literal>\vline\hfill</literal> the <literal>\hfill</literal> has no effect and
+the vertical line in that entry appears immediately next to the
+<literal>g</literal>, with no whitespace.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{c|cc}
+ x &amp;\vline\hfill y &amp;\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\ % row 1
+ abc &amp;def &amp;\vline\hfill ghi % row 2
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.23.3" id="_005ccline">
+<title><literal>\cline</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cline</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\cline{<replaceable>i</replaceable>-<replaceable>j</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>In an <literal>array</literal> or <literal>tabular</literal> environment, draw a horizontal rule
+beginning in column&#160;<replaceable>i</replaceable> and ending in column&#160;<replaceable>j</replaceable>. The
+dash, <literal>-</literal>, must appear in the mandatory argument. To span a single
+column use the number twice, as with <literal>\cline{2-2}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second
+rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the
+third and fourth columns. The two lines are side-by-side, at the same
+height.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{llrr}
+ a &amp;b &amp;c &amp;d \\ \cline{1-1} \cline{3-4}
+ e &amp;f &amp;g &amp;h
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.23.4" id="_005chline">
+<title><literal>\hline</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hline</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing <literal>tabular</literal> or
+<literal>array</literal> environment. It&#8217;s most commonly used to draw a line at the
+top, bottom, and between the rows of a table.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the top of the table has two horizontal rules, one above
+the other, that span both columns. The bottom of the table has a single
+rule spanning both columns. Because of the <literal>\hline</literal>, the
+<literal>tabular</literal> second row&#8217;s line ending double backslash&#160;<literal>\\</literal>
+is required.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{ll} \hline\hline
+ Baseball &amp;Red Sox \\
+ Basketball &amp;Celtics \\ \hline
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.24" id="thebibliography">
+<title><literal>thebibliography</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>thebibliography</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>thebibliography</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bibliography, creating (manually)</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{thebibliography}{<replaceable>widest-label</replaceable>}
+ \bibitem[<replaceable>label</replaceable>]{<replaceable>cite_key}</replaceable>
+ ...
+\end{thebibliography}
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a bibliography or reference list. There are two ways to produce
+bibliographic lists. This environment is suitable when you have only a
+few references and can maintain the list by hand. See <link linkend="Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</link>
+for a more sophisticated approach.
+</para>
+<para>This shows the environment with two entries.
+</para>
+<screen>This work is based on \cite{latexdps}.
+Together they are \cite{latexdps, texbook}.
+ ...
+\begin{thebibliography}{9}
+\bibitem{latexdps}
+ Leslie Lamport.
+ \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+\bibitem{texbook}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit{The \TeX book}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end{thebibliography}
+</screen>
+<para>This styles the first reference as &#8216;<literal>[1] Leslie ...</literal>&#8217;, and so that
+<literal>\cite{latexdps}</literal> produces the matching &#8216;<literal>... based on [1]</literal>&#8217;.
+The second <literal>\cite</literal> produces &#8216;<literal>[1, 2]</literal>&#8217;. You must compile the
+document twice to resolve these references.
+</para>
+<para>The mandatory argument <replaceable>widest-label</replaceable> is text that, when typeset, is
+as wide as the widest item label produced by the <literal>\bibitem</literal>
+commands. The tradition is to use <literal>9</literal> for bibliographies with less
+than 10 references, <literal>99</literal> for ones with less than 100, etc.
+</para>
+<para>The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as &#8216;<literal>Bibliography</literal>&#8217;.
+To change it there are two cases. In the <filename>book</filename> and <filename>report</filename>
+classes, where the top level sectioning is <literal>\chapter</literal> and the
+default title is &#8216;<literal>Bibliography</literal>&#8217;, that title is in the macro
+<literal>\bibname</literal>. For <filename>article</filename>, where the class&#8217;s top level
+sectioning is <literal>\section</literal> and the default is &#8216;<literal>References</literal>&#8217;, the
+title is in macro <literal>\refname</literal>. Change it by redefining the command,
+as with <literal>\renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}</literal> after
+<literal>\begin{document}</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Language support packages such as <filename>babel</filename> will automatically
+redefine <literal>\refname</literal> or <literal>\bibname</literal> to fit the selected
+language.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="8.24.1" id="_005cbibitem">
+<title><literal>\bibitem</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bibitem</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\bibitem{<replaceable>cite_key</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\bibitem[<replaceable>label</replaceable>]{<replaceable>cite_key</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Generate an entry labeled by <replaceable>label</replaceable>. The default is for &latex; to
+generates a number using the <literal>enumi</literal> counter. The <firstterm>citation key</firstterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>citation key</primary></indexterm>
+<replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> is a string of
+letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but not comma).
+</para>
+<para>See <link linkend="thebibliography">thebibliography</link> for an example.
+</para>
+<para>The optional <replaceable>label</replaceable> changes the default label from an integer to the
+given string. With this
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{thebibliography}
+\bibitem[Lamport 1993]{latexdps}
+ Leslie Lamport.
+ \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+\bibitem{texbook}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit{The \TeX book}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end{thebibliography}
+</screen>
+<para>the first entry will be styled as &#8216;<literal>[Lamport 1993] Leslie ...</literal>&#8217; (The
+amount of horizontal space that &latex; leaves for the label depends on
+the <replaceable>widest-label</replaceable> argument of the <literal>thebibliography</literal>
+environment; see <link linkend="thebibliography">thebibliography</link>.) Similarly, <literal>... based on
+\cite{latexdps}</literal> will produce &#8216;<literal>... based on [Lamport 1994]</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>If you mix <literal>\bibitem</literal> entries having a <replaceable>label</replaceable> with those that
+do not then &latex; will number the unlabelled ones sequentially. In
+the example above the <literal>texbook</literal> entry will appear as &#8216;<literal>[1]
+Donald ...</literal>&#8217;, despite that it is the second entry.
+</para>
+<para>If you use the same <replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> twice then you get &#8216;<literal>LaTeX
+Warning: There were multiply-defined labels</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>Under the hood, &latex; remembers the <replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> and <replaceable>label</replaceable>
+information because <literal>\bibitem</literal> writes it to the auxiliary file
+<filename><replaceable>filename</replaceable>.aux</filename>. For instance, the above example causes
+<literal>\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993}</literal> and
+<literal>\bibcite{texbook}{1}</literal> to appear in that file. The <filename>.aux</filename>
+file is read by the <literal>\begin{document}</literal> command and then the
+information is available for <literal>\cite</literal> commands. This explains why
+you need to run &latex; twice to resolve references: once to write it
+out and once to read it in.
+</para>
+<para>Because of this two-pass algorithm, when you add a <literal>\bibitem</literal> or
+change its <replaceable>cite_key</replaceable> you may get &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may
+have changed. Rerun to get cross-references right</literal>&#8217;. Fix it by
+recompiling.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.24.2" id="_005ccite">
+<title><literal>\cite</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cite</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\cite{<replaceable>keys</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\cite[<replaceable>subcite</replaceable>]{<replaceable>keys</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Generate as output a citation to the references associated with
+<replaceable>keys</replaceable>. The mandatory <replaceable>keys</replaceable> is a citation key, or a
+comma-separated list of citation keys (see <link linkend="_005cbibitem">\bibitem</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This
+</para>
+<screen>The ultimate source is \cite{texbook}.
+ ...
+\begin{thebibliography}
+\bibitem{texbook}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit{The \TeX book}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end{thebibliography}
+</screen>
+<para>produces output like &#8216;<literal>... source is [1]</literal>&#8217;. (You can change the
+appearance of the citation with bibliography styles. More is in
+<link linkend="Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</link>.)
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>subcite</replaceable> is appended to the citation. For
+example, <literal>See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook}</literal> might produce
+&#8216;<literal>See 14.3 in [1, p.&#160;314]</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>In addition to what appears in the output, <literal>\cite</literal> writes
+information to the auxiliary file <filename><replaceable>filename</replaceable>.aux</filename>. For
+instance, <literal>\cite{latexdps}</literal> writes &#8216;<literal>\citation{latexdps}</literal>&#8217;
+to that file. This information is used by Bib&tex; to include in your
+reference list only those works that you have actually cited; see
+<link linkend="_005cnocite">\nocite</link> also.
+</para>
+<para>If <replaceable>keys</replaceable> is not in your bibliography information then you get
+&#8216;<literal>LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references</literal>&#8217;, and in the output
+the citation shows as a boldface question mark between square brackets.
+There are two possible causes. If you have mistyped something, as in
+<literal>\cite{texbok}</literal> then you need to correct the spelling. On the
+other hand, if you have just added or modified the bibliographic
+information and so changed the <filename>.aux</filename> file (see <link linkend="_005cbibitem">\bibitem</link>) then
+the fix may be to run &latex; again.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.24.3" id="_005cnocite">
+<title><literal>\nocite</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nocite</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen><literal>\nocite{<replaceable>keys</replaceable>}</literal>
+</screen>
+<para>Produces no output but writes <replaceable>keys</replaceable> to the auxiliary file
+<filename><replaceable>doc-filename</replaceable>.aux</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>The mandatory argument <replaceable>keys</replaceable> is a comma-separated list of one or
+more citation keys (see <link linkend="_005cbibitem">\bibitem</link>). This information is used by
+Bib&tex; to include these works in your reference list even though you
+have not cited them (see <link linkend="_005ccite">\cite</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="8.24.4" id="Using-BibTeX">
+<title>Using Bib&tex;</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>using Bib&tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bib&tex;, using</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bibliography, creating (automatically)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bibliographystyle</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bibliography</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>As described in <literal>thebibliography</literal> (see <link linkend="thebibliography">thebibliography</link>), a
+sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the
+Bib&tex; program. This is only an introduction; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>With Bib&tex;, you don&#8217;t use <literal>thebibliography</literal>
+(see <link linkend="thebibliography">thebibliography</link>). Instead, include these lines.
+</para>
+<screen>\bibliographystyle{<replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable>}
+\bibliography{<replaceable>bibfile1</replaceable>, <replaceable>bibfile2</replaceable>, ...}
+</screen>
+<para>The <replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable> refers to a file <filename><replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable>.bst</filename>, which
+defines how your citations will look. The standard <replaceable>bibstyle</replaceable>&#8217;s
+distributed with Bib&tex; are:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>alpha</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication.
+The bibliographic items are sorted alphabetically.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>plain</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Labels are integers.
+Sort the bibliographic items alphabetically.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>unsrt</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Like <literal>plain</literal>, but entries are in order of citation.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>abbrv</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Like <literal>plain</literal>, but more compact labels.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Many, many other Bib&tex; style files exist,
+tailored to the demands of various publications. See CTAN&#8217;s listing
+<ulink url="http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib">http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib</ulink>.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\bibliography</literal> command is what actually produces the
+bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
+files named <filename><replaceable>bibfile1</replaceable>.bib</filename>, <filename><replaceable>bibfile2</replaceable>.bib</filename>,
+&#8230; These contain your database in Bib&tex; format. This shows a
+typical couple of entries in that format.
+</para>
+<screen>@book{texbook,
+ title = {The {{\TeX}}book},
+ author = {D.E. Knuth},
+ isbn = {0201134489},
+ series = {Computers \&amp; typesetting},
+ year = {1983},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley}
+}
+@book{sexbook,
+ author = {W.H. Masters and V.E. Johnson},
+ title = {Human Sexual Response},
+ year = {1966},
+ publisher = {Bantam Books}
+}
+</screen>
+<para>Only the bibliographic entries referred to via <literal>\cite</literal> and
+<literal>\nocite</literal> will be listed in the document&#8217;s bibliography. Thus you
+can keep all your sources together in one file, or a small number of
+files, and rely on Bib&tex; to include in this document only those that
+you used.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.25" id="theorem">
+<title><literal>theorem</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>theorem</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>theorem</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>theorems, typesetting</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{theorem}
+ <replaceable>theorem body</replaceable>
+\end{theorem}
+</screen>
+<para>Produces &#8216;<literal>Theorem <replaceable>n</replaceable></literal>&#8217; in boldface followed by <replaceable>theorem
+body</replaceable> in italics. The numbering possibilities for <replaceable>n</replaceable> are described under
+<literal>\newtheorem</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</link>).
+</para>
+<screen>\newtheorem{lem}{Lemma} % in preamble
+\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}
+ ...
+\begin{lem} % in document body
+ text of lemma
+\end{lem}
+
+The next result follows immediately.
+\begin{thm}[Gauss] % put `Gauss' in parens after theorem head
+ text of theorem
+\end{thm}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsthm</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsthm</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Most new documents use the packages <literal>amsthm</literal> and <literal>amsmath</literal>
+from the American Mathematical Society. Among other things these
+packages include a large number of options for theorem environments,
+such as styling options.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.26" id="titlepage">
+<title><literal>titlepage</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>titlepage</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>titlepage</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>making a title page</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>title pages, creating</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{titlepage}
+ ... text and spacing ...
+\end{titlepage}
+</screen>
+<para>Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading and
+with succeeding pages numbered starting with page one.
+</para>
+<para>In this example all formatting, including vertical spacing, is left to
+the author.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{titlepage}
+\vspace*{\stretch{1}}
+\begin{center}
+ {\huge\bfseries Thesis \\[1ex]
+ title} \\[6.5ex]
+ {\large\bfseries Author name} \\
+ \vspace{4ex}
+ Thesis submitted to \\[5pt]
+ \textit{University name} \\[2cm]
+ in partial fulfilment for the award of the degree of \\[2cm]
+ \textsc{\Large Doctor of Philosophy} \\[2ex]
+ \textsc{\large Mathematics} \\[12ex]
+ \vfill
+ Department of Mathematics \\
+ Address \\
+ \vfill
+ \today
+\end{center}
+\vspace{\stretch{2}}
+\end{titlepage}
+</screen>
+<para>To instead produce a standard title page without a <literal>titlepage</literal>
+environment, use <literal>\maketitle</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.27" id="verbatim">
+<title><literal>verbatim</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>verbatim</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>verbatim</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>verbatim text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>simulating typed text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>typed text, simulating</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>code, typesetting</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>computer programs, typesetting</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{verbatim}
+<replaceable>literal-text</replaceable>
+\end{verbatim}
+</screen>
+<para>A paragraph-making environment in which &latex; produces as output
+exactly what you type as input. For instance inside <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable>
+the backslash&#160;<literal>\</literal> character does not start commands, it
+produces a printed &#8216;<literal>\</literal>&#8217;, and carriage returns and blanks are taken
+literally. The output appears in a monospaced typewriter-like font
+(<literal>\tt</literal>).
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{verbatim}
+Symbol swearing: %&amp;$#?!.
+\end{verbatim}
+</screen>
+<para>The only restriction on <literal>literal-text</literal> is that it cannot include
+the string <literal>\end{verbatim}</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>cprotect</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>cprotect</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros, for
+instance in the argument to a <literal>\section</literal>. This is not the same as
+commands being fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>), instead it just cannot appear
+there. (But the <literal>cprotect</literal> package can help with this.)
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>listings</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>listings</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>minted</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>minted</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code. There are
+packages that are an improvement the <literal>verbatim</literal> environment. For
+instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external
+files, or parts of those files. Such packages include <literal>listings</literal>,
+and <literal>minted</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>fancyvrb</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>fancyvrb</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>verbatimbox</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>verbatimbox</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments is
+<literal>fancyvrb</literal>. Another is <literal>verbatimbox</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="8.27.1" id="_005cverb">
+<title><literal>\verb</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\verb</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>verbatim text, inline</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\verb <replaceable>char</replaceable> <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable> <replaceable>char</replaceable>
+\verb* <replaceable>char</replaceable> <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable> <replaceable>char</replaceable>
+</screen>
+<para>Typeset <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable> as it is input, including special characters
+and spaces, using the typewriter (<literal>\tt</literal>) font.
+</para>
+<para>This example shows two different invocations of <literal>\verb</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>This is \verb!literally! the biggest pumpkin ever.
+And this is the best squash, \verb+literally!+
+</screen>
+<para>The first <literal>\verb</literal> has its <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable> surrounded with
+exclamation point, <literal>!</literal>. The second instead uses plus, <literal>+</literal>,
+because the exclamation point is part of <literal>literal-text</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The single-character delimiter <replaceable>char</replaceable> surrounds
+<replaceable>literal-text</replaceable>&#160;&#8212; it must be the same character before and
+after. No spaces come between <literal>\verb</literal> or <literal>\verb*</literal> and
+<replaceable>char</replaceable>, or between <replaceable>char</replaceable> and <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable>, or between
+<replaceable>literal-text</replaceable> and the second occurrence of <replaceable>char</replaceable> (the synopsis
+shows a space only to distinguish one component from the other). The
+delimiter must not appear in <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable>. The <replaceable>literal-text</replaceable>
+cannot include a line break.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>visible space</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal>-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible
+space character.
+</para>
+<para>The output from this will include a character showing the spaces.
+</para>
+<screen>The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>url</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>url</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package <literal>url</literal>
+provides an option that is better than the <literal>\verb</literal> command, since
+it allows line breaks.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>listings</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>listings</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>minted</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>minted</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
+<literal>\verb</literal>. One is <filename>listings</filename>, another is <filename>minted</filename>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>cprotect</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>cprotect</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You cannot use <literal>\verb</literal> in the argument to a macro, for instance in
+the argument to a <literal>\section</literal>. It is not a question of <literal>\verb</literal>
+being fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>), instead it just cannot appear there.
+(But the <literal>cprotect</literal> package can help with this.)
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.28" id="verse">
+<title><literal>verse</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>verse</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>verse</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>poetry, an environment for</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{verse}
+ <replaceable>line1</replaceable> \\
+ <replaceable>line2</replaceable> \\
+ ...
+\end{verse}
+</screen>
+<para>An environment for poetry.
+</para>
+<para>Here are two lines from Shakespeare&#8217;s Romeo and Juliet.
+</para>
+<screen>Then plainly know my heart's dear love is set \\
+On the fair daughter of rich Capulet.
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>verse</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>Separate the lines of each stanza with <literal>\\</literal>, and use one or more
+blank lines to separate the stanzas.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{verse}
+\makebox[\linewidth][c]{\textit{Shut Not Your Doors} ---Walt Whitman}
+ \\[1\baselineskip]
+Shut not your doors to me proud libraries, \\
+For that which was lacking on all your well-fill'd shelves, \\
+\qquad yet needed most, I bring, \\
+Forth from the war emerging, a book I have made, \\
+The words of my book nothing, the drift of it every thing, \\
+A book separate, not link'd with the rest nor felt by the intellect, \\
+But you ye untold latencies will thrill to every page.
+\end{verse}
+</screen>
+<para>The output has margins indented on the left and the right, paragraphs
+are not indented, and the text is not right-justified.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="9" id="Line-breaking">
+<title>Line breaking</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>line breaking</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>breaking lines</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to
+translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To
+produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines
+(and these lines must be broken into pages).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; usually does the line (and page) breaking in the text body for
+you but in some environments you manually force line breaks.
+</para>
+<para>A common workflow is to get a final version of the document content
+before taking a final pass through and considering line breaks (and page
+breaks). This differs from word processing, where you are formatting
+text as you input it. Putting these off until the end prevents a lot of
+fiddling with breaks that will change anyway.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="9.1" id="_005c_005c">
+<title><literal>\\</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ force line break</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new line, starting</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>line break, forcing</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\\
+\\[<replaceable>morespace</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>or one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\\*
+\\*[<replaceable>morespace</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>End the current line. The optional argument <replaceable>morespace</replaceable> specifies
+extra vertical space to be inserted before the next line. This is a
+rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>) and can be negative. The text before
+the line break is set at its normal length, that is, it is not stretched
+to fill out the line width. This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The starred form, <literal>\\*</literal>, tells &latex; not to start a new page
+between the two lines, by issuing a <literal>\nobreak</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\title{My story: \\[0.25in]
+ a tale of woe}
+</screen>
+<para>Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in &latex;. In
+particular, don&#8217;t start new paragraphs with <literal>\\</literal>. Instead leave a
+blank line between the two paragraphs. And don&#8217;t put in a sequence of
+<literal>\\</literal>&#8217;s to make vertical space. Instead use
+<literal>\vspace{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}</literal>, or
+<literal>\leavevmode\vspace{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}</literal>, or
+<literal>\vspace*{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}</literal> if you want the space to not be thrown
+out at the top of a new page (see <link linkend="_005cvspace">\vspace</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\\</literal> command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text
+such as in a <literal>tabular</literal> or <literal>array</literal> environment or in an
+equation environment.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\\</literal> command is a synonym for <literal>\newline</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cnewline">\newline</link>) under ordinary circumstances (an example of an
+exception is the <literal>p{...}</literal> column in a <literal>tabular</literal>
+environment; see <link linkend="tabular">tabular</link>).
+</para>
+<!-- credit: David Carlisle https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/82666 -->
+<para>The <literal>\\</literal> command is a macro, and its definition changes by context
+so that its definition in normal text, a <literal>center</literal> environment, a
+<literal>flushleft</literal> environment, and a <literal>tabular</literal> are all different.
+In normal text when it forces a linebreak it is essentially a shorthand
+for <literal>\newline</literal>. It does not end horizontal mode or end the
+paragraph, it just inserts some glue and penalties so that when the
+paragraph does end a linebreak will occur at that point, with the short
+line padded with white space.
+</para>
+<para>You get &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: There's no line here to end</literal>&#8217; if you use
+<literal>\\</literal> to ask for a new line, rather than to end the current line.
+An example is if you have <literal>\begin{document}\\</literal> or, more likely,
+something like this.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+ \\
+ In that vertical space put your mark.
+ \end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>Fix it by replacing the double backslash with something like
+<literal>\vspace{\baselineskip}</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.2" id="_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">
+<title><literal>\obeycr</literal> &amp; <literal>\restorecr</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\obeycr</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\restorecr</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new line, output as input</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The <literal>\obeycr</literal> command makes a return in the input file (&#8216;<literal>^^M</literal>&#8217;,
+internally) the same as <literal>\\</literal>, followed by <literal>\relax</literal>. So each
+new line in the input will also be a new line in the output. The
+<literal>\restorecr</literal> command restores normal line-breaking behavior.
+</para>
+<para>This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code.
+See <link linkend="verbatim">verbatim</link> instead.
+</para>
+<para>With &latex;&#8217;s usual defaults, this
+</para>
+<screen>aaa
+bbb
+
+\obeycr
+ccc
+ddd
+ eee
+
+\restorecr
+fff
+ggg
+
+hhh
+iii
+</screen>
+<para>produces output like this.
+</para>
+<screen> aaa bbb
+ ccc
+ddd
+eee
+
+fff ggg
+ hhh iii
+</screen>
+<para>The indents are paragraph indents.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.3" id="_005cnewline">
+<title><literal>\newline</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newline</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new line, starting (paragraph mode)</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify
+the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph mode
+(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>), the <literal>\newline</literal> command is equivalent to
+double-backslash (see <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>). This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>However, the two commands are different inside a <literal>tabular</literal> or
+<literal>array</literal> environment. In a column with a specifier producing a
+paragraph box such as typically <literal>p{...}</literal>, <literal>\newline</literal> will
+insert a line end inside of the column; that is, it does not break the
+entire tabular row. To break the entire row use <literal>\\</literal> or its
+equivalent <literal>\tabularnewline</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>This will print &#8216;<literal>Name:</literal>&#8217; and &#8216;<literal>Address:</literal>&#8217; as two lines in a
+single cell of the table.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{p{1in}{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
+ Name: \newline Address: &amp;Date: \\ \hline
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>The &#8216;<literal>Date:</literal>&#8217; will be baseline-aligned with &#8216;<literal>Name:</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.4" id="_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">
+<title><literal>\-</literal> (discretionary hyphen)</title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\- (hyphenation)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>hyphenation, forcing</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Tell &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at that point. When you
+insert <literal>\-</literal> commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
+those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that &latex;
+might otherwise have chosen. This command is robust (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct
+hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The
+<literal>\-</literal> command is for exceptional cases.
+</para>
+<para>For example, &latex; does not ordinarily hyphenate words containing a
+hyphen. Below, the long and hyphenated word means &latex; has to put
+in unacceptably large spaces to set the narrow column.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{rp{1.75in}}
+ Isaac Asimov &amp;The strain of
+ anti-intellectualism
+ % an\-ti-in\-tel\-lec\-tu\-al\-ism
+ has been a constant thread winding its way through our
+ political and cultural life, nurtured by
+ the false notion that democracy means that
+ `my ignorance is just as good as your knowledge'.
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>Commenting out the third line and uncommenting the fourth makes a much
+better fit.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\-</literal> command only allows &latex; to break there, it does not
+require that it break there. You can insist on a split with something
+like <literal>Hef-\linebreak feron</literal>. Of course, if you later change the
+text then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
+care.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.5" id="_005cdiscretionary">
+<title><literal>\discretionary</literal> (generalized hyphenation point)</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>hyphenation, discretionary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>discretionary hyphenation</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\discretionary{<replaceable>pre-break</replaceable>}{<replaceable>post-break</replaceable>}{<replaceable>no-break</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Handle word changes around hyphens. This command is not often used in
+&latex; documents.
+</para>
+<para>If a line break occurs at the point where <literal>\discretionary</literal> appears
+then &tex; puts <replaceable>pre-break</replaceable> at the end of the current line and puts
+<replaceable>post-break</replaceable> at the start of the next line. If there is no line
+break here then &tex; puts <replaceable>no-break</replaceable>
+</para>
+<para>In &#8216;<literal>difficult</literal>&#8217; the three letters <literal>ffi</literal> form a ligature. But
+&tex; can nonetheless break between the two f&#8217;s with this.
+</para>
+<screen>di\discretionary{f-}{fi}{ffi}cult
+</screen>
+<para>Note that users do not have to do this. It is typically handled
+automatically by &tex;&#8217;s hyphenation algorithm.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.6" id="_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">
+<title><literal>\fussy</literal> &amp; <literal>\sloppy</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fussy</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sloppy</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>line breaks, changing</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Declarations to make &tex; more picky or less picky about line
+breaking. Declaring <literal>\fussy</literal> usually avoids too much space between
+words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. Conversely,
+<literal>\sloppy</literal> avoids overfull boxes while suffering loose interword
+spacing.
+</para>
+<para>The default is <literal>\fussy</literal>. Line breaking in a paragraph is
+controlled by whichever declaration is current at the blank line, or
+<literal>\par</literal>, or displayed equation ending that paragraph. So to affect
+the line breaks, include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of
+the command.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="9.6.1" id="sloppypar">
+<title><literal>sloppypar</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>sloppypar</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sloppypar environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{sloppypar}
+ ... paragraphs ...
+\end{sloppypar}
+</screen>
+<para>Typeset the paragraphs with <literal>\sloppy</literal> in effect (see <link linkend="_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">\fussy &amp;
+\sloppy</link>). Use this to locally adjust line breaking, to avoid
+&#8216;<literal>Overfull box</literal>&#8217; or &#8216;<literal>Underfull box</literal>&#8217; errors.
+</para>
+<para>The example is simple.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{sloppypar}
+ Her plan for the morning thus settled, she sat quietly down to her
+ book after breakfast, resolving to remain in the same place and the
+ same employment till the clock struck one; and from habitude very
+ little incommoded by the remarks and ejaculations of Mrs.\ Allen,
+ whose vacancy of mind and incapacity for thinking were such, that
+ as she never talked a great deal, so she could never be entirely
+ silent; and, therefore, while she sat at her work, if she lost her
+ needle or broke her thread, if she heard a carriage in the street,
+ or saw a speck upon her gown, she must observe it aloud, whether
+ there were anyone at leisure to answer her or not.
+\end{sloppypar}
+</screen>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.7" id="_005chyphenation">
+<title><literal>\hyphenation</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hyphenation</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>hyphenation, defining</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\hyphenation{<replaceable>word1</replaceable> ...}
+</screen>
+<para>Declares allowed hyphenation points within the words in the list. The
+words in that list are separated by spaces. Show permitted points for
+hyphenation with a dash character, <literal>-</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Here is an example:
+</para>
+<screen>\hyphenation{hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness}
+</screen>
+<para>Use lowercase letters. &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches
+exactly. Multiple <literal>\hyphenation</literal> commands accumulate.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.8" id="_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">
+<title><literal>\linebreak</literal> &amp; <literal>\nolinebreak</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linebreak</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nolinebreak</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>line breaks, forcing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>line breaks, preventing</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\linebreak
+\linebreak[<replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>or one of these.
+</para>
+<screen>\nolinebreak
+\nolinebreak[<replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>Encourage or discourage a line break. The optional <replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>
+is an integer that allows you to soften the instruction. The default is
+4, so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force
+or prevent the break. But for instance, <literal>\nolinebreak[1]</literal> is a
+suggestion that another place may be better. The higher the number, the
+more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Here we tell &latex; that a good place to put a linebreak is after the
+standard legal text.
+</para>
+<screen>\boilerplatelegal{} \linebreak[2]
+We especially encourage applications from members of traditionally
+underrepresented groups.
+</screen>
+<para>When you issue <literal>\linebreak</literal>, the spaces in the line are stretched
+out so that it extends to the right margin. See <link linkend="_005c_005c">\\</link>
+and&#160;<link linkend="_005cnewline">\newline</link> to have the spaces not stretched out.
+</para>
+
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="10" id="Page-breaking">
+<title>Page breaking</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>page breaking</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>breaking pages</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Ordinarily &latex; automatically takes care of breaking output into
+pages with its usual aplomb. But if you are writing commands, or
+tweaking the final version of a document, then you may need to
+understand how to influence its actions.
+</para>
+<!-- credit: H Vogt https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/115563 -->
+<para>&latex;&#8217;s algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
+than just waiting until there is enough material to fill a page and
+outputting the result. Instead, &latex; typesets more material than
+would fit on the page and then chooses a break that is optimal in some
+way (it has the smallest badness). An example of the advantage of this
+approach is that if the page has some vertical space that can be
+stretched or shrunk, such as with rubber lengths between paragraphs,
+then &latex; can use that to avoid widow lines (where a new page starts
+with the last line of a paragraph; &latex; can squeeze the extra line
+onto the first page) and orphans (where the first line of paragraph is
+at the end of a page; &latex; can stretch the material of the first
+page so the extra line falls on the second page). Another example is
+where &latex; uses available vertical shrinkage to fit on a page not
+just the header for a new section but also the first two lines of that
+section.
+</para>
+<para>But &latex; does not optimize over the entire document&#8217;s set of page
+breaks. So it can happen that the first page break is great but the
+second one is lousy; to break the current page &latex; doesn&#8217;t look as
+far ahead as the next page break. So occasionally you may want to
+influence page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.
+</para>
+<para>See <link linkend="Layout">Layout</link> for more material that is relevant to page breaking.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="10.1" id="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">
+<title><literal>\clearpage</literal> &amp; <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\clearpage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>flushing floats and starting a page</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>starting a new page and clearing floats</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cleardoublepage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>starting on a right-hand page</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\clearpage
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\cleardoublepage
+</screen>
+<para>End the current page and output all of the pending floating figures and
+tables (see <link linkend="Floats">Floats</link>). If there are too many floats to fit on the
+page then &latex; will put in extra pages containing only floats. In
+two-sided printing, <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> also makes the next page of
+content a right-hand page, an odd-numbered page, if necessary inserting
+a blank page. The <literal>\clearpage</literal> command is robust while
+<literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&#8217;s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</para>
+<!-- credit: https://www.tex.ac.uk/FAQ-reallyblank.html -->
+<para>The <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> command will put in a blank page, but it
+will have the running headers and footers. To get a really blank
+page, use this command.
+</para>
+<screen>\let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage
+\newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{%
+ \clearpage
+ {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}%
+}
+</screen>
+<para>If you want &latex;&#8217;s standard <literal>\chapter</literal> command to do this then
+add the line <literal>\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The command <literal>\newpage</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewpage">\newpage</link>) also ends the current
+page, but without clearing pending floats. And, if &latex; is in
+two-column mode then <literal>\newpage</literal> ends the current column while
+<literal>\clearpage</literal> and <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> end the current page.
+</para>
+
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="10.2" id="_005cnewpage">
+<title><literal>\newpage</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newpage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new page, starting</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>starting a new page</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\newpage
+</screen>
+<para>End the current page. This command is robust (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&#8217;s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</para>
+<para>While the commands <literal>\clearpage</literal> and <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> also
+end the current page, in addition they clear pending floats
+(see <link linkend="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</link>). And, if &latex; is in
+two-column mode then <literal>\clearpage</literal> and <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> end
+the current page, possibly leaving an empty column, while
+<literal>\newpage</literal> only ends the current column.
+</para>
+<para>In contrast with <literal>\pagebreak</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak &amp; \nopagebreak</link>),
+the <literal>\newpage</literal> command will cause the new page to start right where
+requested. This
+</para>
+<screen>Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+continent,
+\newpage
+\noindent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the
+proposition that all men are created equal.
+</screen>
+<para>makes a new page start after &#8216;<literal>continent,</literal>&#8217; and the cut-off line is
+not right justified. In addition, <literal>\newpage</literal> does not vertically
+stretch out the page, as <literal>\pagebreak</literal> does.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="10.3" id="_005cenlargethispage">
+<title><literal>\enlargethispage</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enlargethispage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>enlarge current page</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\enlargethispage{size}
+\enlargethispage*{size}
+</screen>
+<para>Enlarge the <literal>\textheight</literal> for the current page. The required
+argument <replaceable>size</replaceable> must be a rigid length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). It may be
+positive or negative. This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>A common strategy is to wait until you have the final text of a
+document, and then pass through it tweaking line and page breaks. This
+command allows you some page size leeway.
+</para>
+<para>This will allow one extra line on the current page.
+</para>
+<screen>\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
+</screen>
+<para>The starred form <literal>\enlargesthispage*</literal> tries to squeeze the material
+together on the page as much as possible, for the common use case of
+getting one more line on the page. This is often used together with an
+explicit <literal>\pagebreak</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="10.4" id="_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">
+<title><literal>\pagebreak</literal> &amp; <literal>\nopagebreak</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pagebreak</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nopagebreak</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>page break, forcing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>page break, preventing</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<screen>\pagebreak
+\pagebreak[<replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\nopagebreak
+\nopagebreak[<replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>Encourage or discourage a page break. The optional <replaceable>zero-to-four</replaceable>
+is an integer that allows you to soften the request. The default is 4,
+so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
+prevent the break. But for instance <literal>\nopagebreak[1]</literal> suggests to
+&latex; that another spot might be preferable. The higher the number,
+the more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&#8217;s page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</para>
+<para>If you use these inside a paragraph, they apply to the point following
+the line in which they appear. So this
+</para>
+<screen>Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+continent,
+\pagebreak
+a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition
+that all men are created equal.
+</screen>
+<para>does not give a page break at &#8216;<literal>continent,</literal>&#8217; but instead at
+&#8216;<literal>nation,</literal>&#8217; since that is where &latex; breaks that line. In
+addition, with <literal>\pagebreak</literal> the vertical space on the page is
+stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom
+margin. This can look strange, and if <literal>\flushbottom</literal> is in effect
+this can cause you to get &#8216;<literal>Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active</literal>&#8217;. See <link linkend="_005cnewpage">\newpage</link> for a command that
+does not have these effects.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="11" id="Footnotes">
+<title>Footnotes</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnotes, creating</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Place a footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
+</para>
+<screen>No&#235;l Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
+to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making
+love.\footnote{%
+ I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}
+</screen>
+<para>You can put multiple footnotes on a page. If the footnote text becomes
+too long then it will flow to the next page.
+</para>
+<para>You can also produce footnotes by combining the <literal>\footnotemark</literal> and
+the <literal>\footnotetext</literal> commands, which is useful in special
+circumstances.
+</para>
+<para>To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
+include a bibliographic style with that behavior (see <link linkend="Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</link>).
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="11.1" id="_005cfootnote">
+<title><literal>\footnote</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnote</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\footnote{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\footnote[<replaceable>number</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Place a footnote <replaceable>text</replaceable> at the bottom of the current page.
+</para>
+<screen>There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's
+\textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{%
+ After reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained,
+ ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method
+ of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed
+ at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}
+</screen>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>number</replaceable> allows you to specify the number of
+the footnote. If you use this then &latex; does not increment the
+<literal>footnote</literal> counter.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnotes, symbols instead of numbers</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fnsymbol, and footnotes</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@fnsymbol</primary></indexterm>
+<para>By default, &latex; uses arabic numbers as footnote markers. Change
+this with something like
+<literal>\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}</literal>, which
+uses a sequence of symbols (see <link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
+\fnsymbol</link>). To make this change global put that in the preamble. If
+you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
+<literal>\setcounter{footnote}{0}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; determines the spacing of footnotes with two parameters.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnote parameters</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>parameters, for footnotes</primary></indexterm>
+
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnoterule</primary></indexterm><literal>\footnoterule</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="footnote-footnoterule"/><para>Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page&#8217;s
+footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document classes (except
+<literal>slides</literal>, where it does not appear) is: vertical thickness of
+<literal>0.4pt</literal>, and horizontal size of <literal>0.4\columnwidth</literal> long.
+Change the rule with something like this.
+</para>
+<!-- Credit egreg: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/21917 -->
+<screen>\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{% Kerns avoid vertical space
+ \kern -3pt % This -3 is negative
+ \hrule width \textwidth height 1pt % of the sum of this 1
+ \kern 2pt} % and this 2
+</screen>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnotesep</primary></indexterm><literal>\footnotesep</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="footnote-footnotesep"/><para>The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
+(see <link linkend="_005cstrut">\strut</link>). By default, this is set to the normal strut for
+<literal>\footnotesize</literal> fonts (see <link linkend="Font-sizes">Font sizes</link>), therefore there is no
+extra space between footnotes. This is &#8216;<literal>6.65pt</literal>&#8217; for &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217;,
+&#8216;<literal>7.7pt</literal>&#8217; for &#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217;, and &#8216;<literal>8.4pt</literal>&#8217; for &#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217;. Change
+it as with <literal>\setlength{\footnotesep}{11pt}</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The <literal>\footnote</literal> command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&#8217;s default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
+<literal>\footnote</literal>; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
+sectioning command such as <literal>\chapter</literal> (it can only be used in outer
+paragraph mode; see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). There are some workarounds; see
+following sections.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Footnotes, in a minipage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>mpfootnote counter</primary></indexterm>
+<para>In a <literal>minipage</literal> environment the <literal>\footnote</literal> command uses the
+<literal>mpfootnote</literal> counter instead of the <literal>footnote</literal> counter, so
+they are numbered independently. They are shown at the bottom of the
+environment, not at the bottom of the page. And by default they are
+shown alphabetically. See <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link> and <link linkend="Footnotes-in-a-table">Footnotes in a table</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="11.2" id="_005cfootnotemark">
+<title><literal>\footnotemark</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnotemark</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\footnotemark
+\footnotemark[<replaceable>number</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>Put the current footnote mark in the text. To specify associated text
+for the footnote see&#160;<link linkend="_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</link>. The optional argument
+<replaceable>number</replaceable> causes the command to use that number to determine the
+footnote mark. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode
+(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+</para>
+<para>If you use <literal>\footnotemark</literal> without the optional argument then it
+increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional <replaceable>number</replaceable>
+then it does not. The next example produces several consecutive footnote
+markers referring to the same footnote.
+</para>
+<screen>The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.}
+and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+</screen>
+<para>If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value of the
+common mark. This example gives the same institutional affiliation to
+both the first and third authors (<literal>\thanks</literal> is a version of
+<literal>footnote</literal>), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+</para>
+<screen>\title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
+\author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds}
+ \and A C Doyle\thanks{Durham University}
+ \and S Holmes\footnotemark[1]}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+</screen>
+<para>This uses a counter to remember the footnote number. The third sentence
+is followed by the same footnote marker as the first.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcounter{footnoteValueSaver}
+All babies are illogical.\footnote{%
+ Lewis Carroll.}\setcounter{footnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}}
+Nobody is despised who can manage a crocodile.\footnote{%
+ Captain Hook.}
+Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value{footnoteValueSaver}]
+Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby.
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>cleveref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>cleveref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>hyperref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>hyperref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>This example accomplishes the same by using the package <filename>cleveref</filename>.
+</para>
+<!-- from SE user Jake http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/10116/339 -->
+<screen>\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % in preamble
+\crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
+...
+The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker, Evers, 1994.}
+The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers, Chance, 1990.}
+But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>hyperref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>hyperref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>It will work with the package <filename>hyperref</filename>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="11.3" id="_005cfootnotetext">
+<title><literal>\footnotetext</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnotetext</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\footnotetext{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\footnotetext[<replaceable>number</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Place <replaceable>text</replaceable> at the bottom of the page as a footnote. It pairs with
+<literal>\footnotemark</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</link>) and can come anywhere after
+that command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+The optional argument <replaceable>number</replaceable> changes the number of the footnote
+mark.
+</para>
+<para>See <link linkend="_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</link> and&#160;<link linkend="Footnotes-in-a-table">Footnotes in a table</link> for usage
+examples.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="11.4" id="Footnotes-in-section-headings">
+<title>Footnotes in section headings</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnote, in section headings</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>table of contents, avoiding footnotes</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
+</para>
+<screen>\section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}
+</screen>
+<para>causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
+section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
+contents, where it is not likely to be desired. The simplest way
+to have it not appear on the table of contents is to use the optional
+argument to <literal>\section</literal>
+</para>
+<screen>\section[Please]{Please\footnote{%
+ Don't footnote in chapter and section headers!}}
+</screen>
+<para>No <literal>\protect</literal> is needed in front of <literal>\footnote</literal> here because
+what gets moved to the table of contents is the optional argument.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="11.5" id="Footnotes-in-a-table">
+<title>Footnotes in a table</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnote, in a table</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Inside a <literal>tabular</literal> or <literal>array</literal> environment the <literal>\footnote</literal>
+command does not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but
+the footnote text does not appear. The solution is to use a
+<literal>minipage</literal> environment as here (see <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>).
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Ship} &amp;\textsc{Book} \\ \hline
+ \textit{HMS Sophie} &amp;Master and Commander \\
+ \textit{HMS Polychrest} &amp;Post Captain \\
+ \textit{HMS Lively} &amp;Post Captain \\
+ \textit{HMS Surprise} &amp;A number of books\footnote{%
+ Starting with HMS Surprise.}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>Inside a <literal>minipage</literal>, footnote marks are lowercase letters. Change
+that with something like
+<literal>\renewcommand{\thempfootnote}{\arabic{mpfootnote}}</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The footnotes in the prior example appear at the bottom of the
+<literal>minipage</literal>. To have them appear at the bottom of the main page, as
+part of the regular footnote sequence, use the <literal>\footnotemark</literal> and
+<literal>\footnotetext</literal> pair and make a new counter.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+ \setcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}} \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Woman} &amp;\textsc{Relationship} \\ \hline
+ Mona &amp;Attached\footnotemark \\
+ Diana Villiers &amp;Eventual wife \\
+ Christine Hatherleigh Wood &amp;Fiance\footnotemark
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{minipage}% percent sign keeps footnote text close to minipage
+ \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+ \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+ Little is known other than her death.}%
+ \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+ \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+ Relationship is unresolved in XXI.}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>For a floating <literal>table</literal> environment (see <link linkend="table">table</link>), use the
+<filename>tablefootnote</filename> package.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{tablefootnote} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{table}
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Date} &amp;\textsc{Campaign} \\ \hline
+ 1862 &amp;Fort Donelson \\
+ 1863 &amp;Vicksburg \\
+ 1865 &amp;Army of Northern Virginia\tablefootnote{%
+ Ending the war.}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Forces captured by US Grant}
+\end{table}
+</screen>
+<para>The footnote appears at the page bottom and is numbered in sequence with
+other footnotes.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="11.6" id="Footnotes-of-footnotes">
+<title>Footnotes of footnotes</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footnote, of a footnote</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>bigfoot</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>bigfoot</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
+footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package
+<filename>bigfoot</filename> extends &latex;&#8217;s default footnote mechanism in many
+ways, including allow these two, as in this example.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{bigfoot} % in preamble
+\DeclareNewFootnote{Default}
+\DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph] % create class \footnotefrom{}
+ ...
+The third theorem is a partial converse of the
+second.\footnotefrom{%
+ First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="12" id="Definitions">
+<title>Definitions</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>definitions</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="12.1" id="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">
+<title><literal>\newcommand</literal> &amp; <literal>\renewcommand</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newcommand</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, defining new ones</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, redefining</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>defining a new command</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new commands, defining</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\newcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\newcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\newcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\newcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\newcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or one of these.
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\renewcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\renewcommand{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\renewcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\renewcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\renewcommand*{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Define or redefine a command. See also the discussion of
+<literal>\DeclareRobustCommand</literal> in <link linkend="Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</link>.
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>starred form, defining new commands</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>*-form, defining new commands</primary></indexterm>
+The starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain
+multiple paragraphs of text (in plain &tex; terms that it not be
+<literal>\long</literal>).
+</para>
+<para>These are the parameters:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>cmd</replaceable>
+</term><listitem>
+<para>Required; the command name. It must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>,
+and must not begin with the four letter string <literal>\end</literal>. For
+<literal>\newcommand</literal>, it must not be already defined. For
+<literal>\renewcommand</literal>, this name must already be defined.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>nargs</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of arguments
+that the command takes, including any optional argument. Omitting this
+argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that the command has no
+arguments. If you redefine a command, the new version can have a
+different number of arguments than the old version.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is optional, with default value <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
+(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> does not take an optional argument.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>positional parameter</primary></indexterm>
+<para>That is, if <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is used with square brackets, as in
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>[<replaceable>optval</replaceable>]{...}...</literal>, then within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> the
+parameter&#160;<literal>#1</literal> is set to the value of <replaceable>optval</replaceable>. On the
+other hand, if <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> is called without the square brackets
+then within <replaceable>defn</replaceable> the parameter <literal>#1</literal> is set to the value of
+<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>. In either case, the required arguments start with
+<literal>#2</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Omitting <literal>[<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]</literal> is different from having the
+square brackets with no contents, as in <literal>[]</literal>. The former sets
+<literal>#1</literal> to the value of <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>; the latter sets <literal>#1</literal>
+to the empty string.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>defn</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of
+<literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal>. The parameters <literal>#1</literal>, <literal>#2</literal>,
+... <literal>#<replaceable>nargs</replaceable></literal> are replaced by the values that you supply when
+you call the command (or by the default value if there is an optional
+argument and you don&#8217;t exercise the option).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>&tex; ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
+sequence, as in &#8216;<literal>\cmd </literal>&#8217;. If you actually want a space there, one
+solution is to type <literal>{}</literal> after the command (&#8216;<literal>\cmd{} </literal>&#8217;, and
+another solution is to use an explicit control space (&#8216;<literal>\cmd\ </literal>&#8217;).
+</para>
+<para>A simple example of defining a new command:
+<literal>\newcommand{\RS}{Robin Smith}</literal> results in <literal>\RS</literal> being
+replaced by the longer text. Redefining an existing command is similar:
+<literal>\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small QED}}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>If you try to define a command and the name has already been used then
+you get something like &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</literal>&#8217;. If you try
+to redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
+something like &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: \hank undefined</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>Here the first command definition has no arguments, and the second has
+one required argument.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\student}{Ms~O'Leary}
+\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
+</screen>
+<para>Use the first as in <literal>I highly recommend \student{} to you</literal>. The
+second has a variable, so that <literal>\defref{def:basis}</literal> expands to
+<literal>Definition~\ref{def:basis}</literal>, which ultimately expands to
+something like &#8216;<literal>Definition~3.14</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>Similarly, but with two required arguments:
+<literal>\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1 \times #2$}</literal> is invoked as
+<literal>\nbym{2}{k}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>This example has an optional argument.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}
+</screen>
+<para>Then <literal>\salutation</literal> gives &#8216;<literal>Dear Sir or Madam:</literal>&#8217; while
+<literal>\salutation[John]</literal> gives &#8216;<literal>Dear John:</literal>&#8217;. And
+<literal>\salutation[]</literal> gives &#8216;<literal>Dear :</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>This example has an optional argument and two required arguments.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\lawyers}[3][company]{#2, #3, and~#1}
+I employ \lawyers[Howe]{Dewey}{Cheatem}.
+</screen>
+<para>The output is &#8216;<literal>I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe</literal>&#8217;. The optional
+argument, the <literal>Howe</literal>, is associated with <literal>#1</literal>, while
+<literal>Dewey</literal> and <literal>Cheatem</literal> are associated with <literal>#2</literal>
+and&#160;<literal>#3</literal>. Because of the optional argument,
+<literal>\lawyers{Dewey}{Cheatem}</literal> will give the output &#8216;<literal>I employ
+Dewey, Cheatem, and company</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>The braces around <replaceable>defn</replaceable> do not define a group, that is, they do not
+delimit the scope of the result of expanding <replaceable>defn</replaceable>. For example,
+with <literal>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}</literal>, in this sentence,
+</para>
+<screen>The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}.
+</screen>
+<para>the words &#8216;<literal>met the</literal>&#8217; would incorrectly be in italics. The solution
+is to put another pair of braces inside the definition:
+<literal>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.2" id="_005cprovidecommand">
+<title><literal>\providecommand</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\providecommand</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, defining new ones</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>defining a new command</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>new commands, defining</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\providecommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+\providecommand*{<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>defn</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
+If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
+as <literal>\newcommand</literal>. If a command of this name already exists then
+this definition does nothing. This is particularly useful in a file
+that may be loaded more than once, such as a style file.
+See <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</link> for the description of the arguments.
+</para>
+<para>This example
+</para>
+<screen>\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+From \myaffiliation.
+</screen>
+<para>outputs &#8216;<literal>From Saint Michael's College</literal>&#8217;. Unlike <literal>\newcommand</literal>,
+the repeated use of <literal>\providecommand</literal> does not give an error.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.3" id="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">
+<title><literal>\makeatletter</literal> &amp; <literal>\makeatother</literal></title>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\makeatletter
+ ... definition of commands with @ in their name ..
+\makeatother
+</screen>
+<para>Use this pair when you redefine &latex; commands that are named with an
+at-sign character&#160;&#8216;<literal><literal>@</literal></literal>&#8217;. The <literal>\makeatletter</literal>
+declaration makes the at-sign character have the category code of a
+letter, code&#160;11. The <literal>\makeatother</literal> declaration sets the
+category code of the at-sign to code&#160;12, its default value.
+</para>
+<para>As &tex; reads characters, it assigns each one a category code, or
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>catcode</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>character category code</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>category code, character</primary></indexterm>
+<firstterm>catcode</firstterm>. For instance, it assigns the backslash
+character&#160;&#8216;<literal><literal>\</literal></literal>&#8217; the catcode&#160;0. Command names
+consist of a category&#160;0 character, ordinarily backslash, followed
+by letters, category&#160;11 characters (except that a command name can
+also consist of a category&#160;0 character followed by a single
+non-letter symbol).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&#8217;s source code has the convention that some commands use
+<literal>@</literal> in their name. These commands are mainly intended for package
+or class writers. The convention prevents authors who are just using a
+package or class from accidentally replacing such a command with one of
+their own, because by default the at-sign has catcode&#160;12.
+</para>
+<para>The pair <literal>\makeatletter</literal> and <literal>\makeatother</literal> changes the
+default code and then changes it back. Use them inside a <filename>.tex</filename>
+file, in the preamble, when you are defining or redefining commands
+named with <literal>@</literal>, by having them surround your definition. Don&#8217;t
+use these inside <filename>.sty</filename> or <filename>.cls</filename> files since the
+<literal>\usepackage</literal> and <literal>\documentclass</literal> commands already arrange
+that the at-sign has the character code of a letter, catcode&#160;11.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>macros2e</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>macros2e</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign in their names see
+<ulink url="http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e">http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e</ulink>.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the class file has a command
+<literal>\thesis@universityname</literal> that the user wants to change. These
+three lines should go in the preamble, before the
+<literal>\begin{document}</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\thesis@universityname}{Saint Michael's College}
+\makeatother
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.4" id="_005c_0040ifstar">
+<title><literal>\@ifstar</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@ifstar</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, star-variants</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>star-variants, commands</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\mycmd}{\@ifstar{\mycmd@star}{\mycmd@nostar}}
+\newcommand{\mycmd@nostar}[<replaceable>nostar-num-args</replaceable>]{<replaceable>nostar-body</replaceable>}
+\newcommand{\mycmd@star}[<replaceable>star-num-args</replaceable>]{<replaceable>star-body</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Many standard &latex; environments or commands have a variant with the
+same name but ending with a star character&#160;<literal>*</literal>, an asterisk.
+Examples are the <literal>table</literal> and <literal>table*</literal> environments and the
+<literal>\section</literal> and <literal>\section*</literal> commands.
+</para>
+<para>When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward
+because <literal>\newenvironment</literal> and <literal>\renewenvironment</literal> allow the
+environment name to contain a star. For commands the situation is more
+complex. As in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command,
+given above as <literal>\mycmd</literal>, which peeks ahead to see if it is followed
+by a star. For instance, &latex; does not really have a
+<literal>\section*</literal> command; instead, the <literal>\section</literal> command peeks
+ahead. This command does not accept arguments but instead expands to
+one of two commands that do accept arguments. In the synopsis these two
+are <literal>\mycmd@nostar</literal> and <literal>\mycmd@star</literal>. They could take the
+same number of arguments or a different number, or no arguments at all.
+As always, in a &latex; document a command using at-sign&#160;<literal>@</literal>
+must be enclosed inside a <literal>\makeatletter ... \makeatother</literal> block
+(see <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This example of <literal>\@ifstar</literal> defines the command <literal>\ciel</literal> and a
+variant <literal>\ciel*</literal>. Both have one required argument. A call to
+<literal>\ciel{night}</literal> will return &quot;starry night sky&quot; while
+<literal>\ciel*{blue}</literal> will return &quot;starry not blue sky&quot;.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand*{\ciel@unstarred}[1]{starry #1 sky}
+\newcommand*{\ciel@starred}[1]{starry not #1 sky}
+\newcommand*{\ciel}{\@ifstar{\ciel@starred}{\ciel@unstarred}}
+</screen>
+<para>In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
+arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007&#8217;s
+<literal>``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond},
+\agentsecret{James}{Bond}.''</literal> is equivalent to entering the commands
+<literal>``My name is \textsc{Bond}, \textit{James} textsc{Bond}.''</literal>
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand*{\agentsecret@unstarred}[2]{\textit{#1} \textsc{#2}}
+\newcommand*{\agentsecret@starred}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\agentsecret}{%
+ \@ifstar{\agentsecret@starred}{\agentsecret@unstarred}}
+</screen>
+<para>There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work of
+<literal>\@ifstar</literal>. The <filename>suffix</filename> package allows the construct
+<literal>\newcommand\mycommand{<replaceable>unstarred version</replaceable>}</literal> followed by
+<literal>\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{<replaceable>starred version</replaceable>}</literal>. And
+&latex;3 has the <filename>xparse</filename> package that allows this code.
+</para>
+<screen>\NewDocumentCommand\foo{s}{\IfBooleanTF#1
+ {<replaceable>starred version</replaceable>}%
+ {<replaceable>unstarred version</replaceable>}%
+ }
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.5" id="_005cnewcounter">
+<title><literal>\newcounter</literal>: Allocating a counter</title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newcounter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>counters, defining new</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\newcounter{<replaceable>countername</replaceable>}
+\newcounter{<replaceable>countername</replaceable>}[<replaceable>supercounter</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>Globally defines a new counter named <replaceable>countername</replaceable> and initialize it
+to zero (see <link linkend="Counters">Counters</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The name <replaceable>countername</replaceable> must consist of letters only. It does not
+begin with a backslash. This name must not already be in use by another
+counter.
+</para>
+<para>When you use the optional argument <literal>[<replaceable>supercounter</replaceable>]</literal> then the
+counter <replaceable>countername</replaceable> will be reset to zero whenever
+<replaceable>supercounter</replaceable> is incremented. For example, ordinarily
+<literal>subsection</literal> is numbered within <literal>section</literal> so that any time you
+increment <replaceable>section</replaceable>, either with <literal>\stepcounter</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</link>) or <literal>\refstepcounter</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</link>), then &latex; will reset <replaceable>subsection</replaceable> to
+zero.
+</para>
+<para>This example
+</para>
+<screen>\newcounter{asuper} \setcounter{asuper}{1}
+\newcounter{asub}[asuper] \setcounter{asub}{3} % Note `asuper'
+The value of asuper is \arabic{asuper} and of asub is \arabic{asub}.
+\stepcounter{asuper}
+Now asuper is \arabic{asuper} while asub is \arabic{asub}.
+</screen>
+<para>produces &#8216;<literal>The value of asuper is 1 and that of asub is 3</literal>&#8217; and
+&#8216;<literal>Now asuper is 2 while asub is 0</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>If the counter already exists, for instance by entering <literal>asuper</literal>
+twice, then you get something like &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \c@asuper
+already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual.</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>If you use the optional argument then the super counter must already
+exist. Entering <literal>\newcounter{jh}[lh]</literal> when <literal>lh</literal> is not a
+defined counter will get you &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: No counter 'lh'
+defined.</literal>&#8217;
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.6" id="_005cnewlength">
+<title><literal>\newlength</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newlength</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lengths, allocating new</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>rubber lengths, defining new</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>skip register, plain &tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>glue register, plain &tex;</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\newlength{<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Allocate a new length register (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). The required argument
+<replaceable>arg</replaceable> must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>. The new register holds
+rubber lengths such as <literal>72.27pt</literal> or <literal>1in plus.2in minus.1in</literal>
+(a &latex; length register is what plain &tex; calls a <literal>skip</literal>
+register). The initial value is zero. The control sequence
+<literal>\<replaceable>arg</replaceable></literal> must not be already defined.
+</para>
+<para>An example:
+</para>
+<screen>\newlength{\graphichgt}
+</screen>
+<para>If you forget the backslash then you get &#8216;<literal>Missing control sequence
+inserted</literal>&#8217;. If the command sequence already exists then you get
+something like &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined.
+Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.7" id="_005cnewsavebox">
+<title><literal>\newsavebox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newsavebox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>box, allocating new</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\newsavebox{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Define \<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>, the string consisting of a backslash followed by
+<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>, to refer to a new bin for storing material. These bins hold
+material that has been typeset, to use multiple times or to measure or
+manipulate (see <link linkend="Boxes">Boxes</link>). The bin name \<replaceable>cmd</replaceable> is required, must
+start with a backslash, \, and must not already be a defined command.
+This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This allocates a bin and then puts typeset material into it.
+</para>
+<screen>\newsavebox{\logobox}
+\savebox{\logobox}{LoGo}
+Our logo is \usebox{\logobox}.
+</screen>
+<para>The output is &#8216;<literal>Our logo is LoGo</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>If there is an already defined bin then you get something like
+&#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \logobox already defined. Or name
+\end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>The allocation of a box is global.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.8" id="_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">
+<title><literal>\newenvironment</literal> &amp; <literal>\renewenvironment</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newenvironment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\renewenvironment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>environments, defining</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>defining new environments</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>redefining environments</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\newenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\newenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\newenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\newenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\newenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\newenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or one of these.
+</para>
+<screen>\renewenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\renewenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\renewenvironment{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\renewenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\renewenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+\renewenvironment*{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>nargs</replaceable>][<replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>]{<replaceable>begdef</replaceable>}{<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Define or redefine the environment <replaceable>env</replaceable>, that is, create the
+construct <literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>} ... <replaceable>body</replaceable> ... \end{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>*</literal>-form of environment commands</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text. However, the body of these
+environments can contain multiple paragraphs.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>env</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Required; the environment name. It consists only of letters or the
+<literal>*</literal> character, and thus does not begin with backslash, <literal>\</literal>.
+It must not begin with the string <literal>end</literal>. For
+<literal>\newenvironment</literal>, the name <replaceable>env</replaceable> must not be the name of an
+already existing environment, and also the command <literal>\<replaceable>env</replaceable></literal>
+must be undefined. For <literal>\renewenvironment</literal>, <replaceable>env</replaceable> must be the
+name of an existing environment.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>nargs</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
+that the environment takes. When you use the environment these
+arguments appear after the <literal>\begin</literal>, as in
+<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}{<replaceable>arg1</replaceable>} ... {<replaceable>argn</replaceable>}</literal>. Omitting
+this is equivalent to setting it to 0; the environment will have no
+arguments. When redefining an environment, the new version can have a
+different number of arguments than the old version.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Optional; if this is present then the first argument of the defined
+environment is optional, with default value <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable> (which
+may be the empty string). If this is not in the definition then the
+environment does not take an optional argument.
+</para>
+<para>That is, when <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable> is present in the definition of the
+environment then you can start the environment with square brackets, as
+in <literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}[<replaceable>optval</replaceable>]{...} ... \end{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>.
+In this case, within <replaceable>begdefn</replaceable> the parameter <literal>#1</literal> is set to the
+value of <replaceable>optval</replaceable>. If you call <literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal> without
+square brackets, then within <replaceable>begdefn</replaceable> the parameter <literal>#1</literal> is
+set to the value of the default <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>. In either case,
+any required arguments start with <literal>#2</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Omitting <literal>[<replaceable>myval</replaceable>]</literal> in the call is different than having the
+square brackets with no contents, as in <literal>[]</literal>. The former results
+in <literal>#1</literal> expanding to <replaceable>optargdefault</replaceable>; the latter results in
+<literal>#1</literal> expanding to the empty string.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>begdef</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
+<literal>\begin{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>. Within <replaceable>begdef</replaceable>, the parameters
+<literal>#1</literal>, <literal>#2</literal>, ... <literal>#<replaceable>nargs</replaceable></literal>, are replaced by the
+values that you supply when you call the environment; see the examples
+below.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>enddef</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
+<literal>\end{<replaceable>env</replaceable>}</literal>. This may not contain any parameters, that is,
+you cannot use <literal>#1</literal>, <literal>#2</literal>, etc., here (but see the final
+example below).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>All environments, that is to say the <replaceable>begdef</replaceable> code, the environment
+body, and the <replaceable>enddef</replaceable> code, are processed within a group. Thus, in
+the first example below, the effect of the <literal>\small</literal> is limited to
+the quote and does not extend to material following the environment.
+</para>
+<para>If you try to define an environment and the name has already been used
+then you get something like &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</literal>&#8217;. If you try
+to redefine an environment and the name has not yet been used then you
+get something like &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: Environment hank undefined.</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>This example gives an environment like &latex;&#8217;s <literal>quotation</literal>
+except that it will be set in smaller type.
+</para>
+<screen>\newenvironment{smallquote}{%
+ \small\begin{quotation}
+}{%
+ \end{quotation}
+}
+</screen>
+<para>This has an argument, which is set in boldface at the start of a
+paragraph.
+</para>
+<screen>\newenvironment{point}[1]{%
+ \noindent\textbf{#1}
+}{%
+}
+</screen>
+<para>This one shows the use of a optional argument; it gives a quotation
+environment that cites the author.
+</para>
+<screen>\newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
+ \begin{quotation}
+ \noindent\textit{#1}:
+}{%
+ \end{quotation}
+}
+</screen>
+<para>The author&#8217;s name is optional, and defaults to &#8216;<literal>Shakespeare</literal>&#8217;. In
+the document, use the environment like this.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
+ ...
+\end{citequote}
+</screen>
+<para>The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use in
+<replaceable>enddef</replaceable>, in this case in a box (see <link linkend="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox &amp; \savebox</link>).
+</para>
+<screen>\newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
+\newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
+ \sbox\quoteauthor{#1}%
+ \begin{quotation}
+}{%
+ \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---\usebox{\quoteauthor}
+ \end{quotation}
+}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.9" id="_005cnewtheorem">
+<title><literal>\newtheorem</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newtheorem</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>theorems, defining</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>defining new theorems</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>theorem-like environment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>environment, theorem-like</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<screen>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>]
+\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Define a new theorem-like environment. You can specify one of
+<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> and <replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>, or neither, but not both.
+</para>
+<para>The first form, <literal>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}</literal>, creates
+an environment that will be labelled with <replaceable>title</replaceable>; see the first
+example below.
+</para>
+<para>The second form,
+<literal>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>]</literal>,
+creates an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing
+counter <replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>, so this counter will be reset when
+<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> is reset. See the second example below.
+</para>
+<para>The third form
+<literal>\newtheorem{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>]{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}</literal>,
+with optional argument between the two required arguments, creates an
+environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
+<replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>. See the third example.
+</para>
+<para>This command creates a counter named <replaceable>name</replaceable>. In addition, unless
+the optional argument <replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable> is used, inside of the
+theorem-like environment the current <literal>\ref</literal> value will be that of
+<literal>\the<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable></literal> (see <link linkend="_005cref">\ref</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This declaration is global. It is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Arguments:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>name</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>The name of the environment. It is a string of letters. It must not
+begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>. It must not be the name of an
+existing environment, and the command name <literal>\<replaceable>name</replaceable></literal> must not
+already be defined.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>title</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>The text to be printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
+number. For example, &#8216;<literal>Theorem</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Optional; the name of an already defined counter, usually a sectional
+unit such as <literal>chapter</literal> or <literal>section</literal>. When the
+<replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> counter is reset then the <replaceable>name</replaceable> environment&#8217;s
+counter will also be reset.
+</para>
+<para>If this optional argument is not used then the command
+<literal>\the<replaceable>name</replaceable></literal> is set to <literal>\arabic{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Optional; the name of an already defined theorem-like environment. The
+new environment will be numbered in sequence with <replaceable>numbered_like</replaceable>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
+sequentially. The example below has a declaration in the preamble that
+results in &#8216;<literal>Definition&#160;1</literal>&#8217; and &#8216;<literal>Definition&#160;2</literal>&#8217; in the
+output.
+</para>
+<screen>\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}
+\begin{document}
+\section{...}
+\begin{defn}
+ First def
+\end{defn}
+
+\section{...}
+\begin{defn}
+ Second def
+\end{defn}
+</screen>
+<para>This example has the same document body as the prior one. But here
+<literal>\newtheorem</literal>&#8217;s optional argument <replaceable>numbered_within</replaceable> is given as
+<literal>section</literal>, so the output is like &#8216;<literal>Definition&#160;1.1</literal>&#8217; and
+&#8216;<literal>Definition&#160;2.1</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<screen>\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+\begin{document}
+\section{...}
+\begin{defn}
+ First def
+\end{defn}
+
+\section{...}
+\begin{defn}
+ Second def
+\end{defn}
+</screen>
+<para>In the next example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
+second of which calls for the new <literal>thm</literal> environment to use the same
+counter as <literal>defn</literal>. It gives &#8216;<literal>Definition&#160;1.1</literal>&#8217;, followed
+by &#8216;<literal>Theorem&#160;2.1</literal>&#8217; and &#8216;<literal>Definition&#160;2.2</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<screen>\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+\newtheorem{thm}[defn]{Theorem}
+\begin{document}
+\section{...}
+\begin{defn}
+ First def
+\end{defn}
+
+\section{...}
+\begin{thm}
+ First thm
+\end{thm}
+
+\begin{defn}
+ Second def
+\end{defn}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.10" id="_005cnewfont">
+<title><literal>\newfont</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newfont</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fonts, new commands for</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>defining new fonts</primary></indexterm>
+
+<!-- @findex .fd @r{file} -->
+<para>This command is obsolete. This description is here only to help with old
+documents. New documents should define fonts in families through the
+New Font Selection Scheme which allows you to, for example, associate a
+boldface with a roman (see <link linkend="Fonts">Fonts</link>).
+<!-- This is done either by using -->
+<!-- @file{.fd} files or through the use of an engine that can access system -->
+<!-- fonts such as Xe@LaTeX{} (@pxref{@TeX{} engines}). -->
+</para>
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\newfont{\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>font description</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Define a command <literal>\<replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal> that will change the current font.
+The control sequence must not already be defined. It must begin with a
+backslash, <literal>\</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>at clause, in font definitions</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>design size, in font definitions</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <replaceable>font description</replaceable> consists of a <replaceable>fontname</replaceable> and an optional
+<firstterm>at clause</firstterm>. &latex; will look on your system for a file named
+<filename><replaceable>fontname</replaceable>.tfm</filename>. The at clause can have the form either
+<literal>at <replaceable>dimen</replaceable></literal> or <literal>scaled <replaceable>factor</replaceable></literal>, where a
+<replaceable>factor</replaceable> of &#8216;<literal>1000</literal>&#8217; means no scaling. For &latex;&#8217;s purposes,
+all this does is scale all the character and other font dimensions
+relative to the font&#8217;s design size, which is a value defined in the
+<filename>.tfm</filename> file.
+</para>
+<para>This defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few characters in each.
+</para>
+<screen>\newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt}
+\newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 1100}
+\testfontat abc
+\testfontscaled abc
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.11" id="_005cprotect">
+<title><literal>\protect</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\protect</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fragile commands</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>robust commands</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>All &latex; commands are either <firstterm>fragile</firstterm> or <firstterm>robust</firstterm>. A
+fragile command can break when it is used in the argument to certain
+other commands. Commands that contain data that &latex; writes to an
+auxiliary file and re-reads later are fragile. This includes material
+that goes into a table of contents, list of figures, list of tables,
+etc. Fragile commands also include line breaks, any command that has an
+optional argument, and many more. To prevent such commands from
+breaking, one solution is to preceded them with the command
+<literal>\protect</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>For example, when &latex; runs the <literal>\section{<replaceable>section
+name</replaceable>}</literal> command it writes the <replaceable>section name</replaceable> text to the
+<filename>.aux</filename> auxiliary file, moving it there for use elsewhere in the
+document such as in the table of contents. Any argument that is
+internally expanded by &latex; without typesetting it directly is
+referred to as a
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>moving arguments</primary></indexterm>
+<firstterm>moving argument</firstterm>. A command is fragile if it can
+expand during this process into invalid &tex; code. Some examples of
+moving arguments are those that appear in the <literal>\caption{...}</literal>
+command (see <link linkend="figure">figure</link>), in the <literal>\thanks{...}</literal> command
+(see <link linkend="_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</link>), and in @-expressions in the <literal>tabular</literal> and
+<literal>array</literal> environments (see <link linkend="tabular">tabular</link>).
+</para>
+<para>If you get strange errors from commands used in moving arguments, try
+preceding it with <literal>\protect</literal>. Every fragile commands must be
+protected with their own <literal>\protect</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Although usually a <literal>\protect</literal> command doesn&#8217;t hurt, length
+commands are robust and should not be preceded by a <literal>\protect</literal>
+command. Nor can a <literal>\protect</literal> command be used in the argument to
+<literal>\addtocounter</literal> or <literal>\setcounter</literal> command.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the <literal>\caption</literal> command gives a mysterious error
+about an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each
+<literal>\raisebox</literal> command with <literal>\protect</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{figure}
+ ...
+ \caption{Company headquarters of A\raisebox{1pt}{B}\raisebox{-1pt}{C}}
+\end{figure}
+</screen>
+<para>In the next example the <literal>\tableofcontents</literal> command gives an error
+because the <literal>\(..\)</literal> in the section title expands to illegal &tex;
+in the <filename>.toc</filename> file. You can solve this by changing <literal>\(..\)</literal>
+to <literal>\protect\(..\protect\)</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents
+...
+\section{Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)}
+...
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.12" id="_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend">
+<title><literal>\ignorespaces &amp; \ignorespacesafterend</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ignorespaces</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ignorespacesafterend</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>spaces, ignore around commands</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, ignore spaces</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\ignorespaces
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\ignorespacesafterend
+</screen>
+<para>Both commands cause &latex; to ignore spaces after the end of the
+command up until the first non-space character. The first is a command
+from Plain &tex;, and the second is &latex;-specific.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>ignorespaces</literal> is often used when defining commands via
+<literal>\newcommand</literal>, or <literal>\newenvironment</literal>, or <literal>\def</literal>. The
+example below illustrates. It allows a user to show the points values
+for quiz questions in the margin but it is inconvenient because, as
+shown in the <literal>enumerate</literal> list, users must not put any space between
+the command and the question text.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item\points{10}no extra space output here
+ \item\points{15} extra space between the number and the `extra'
+\end{enumerate}
+</screen>
+<para>The solution is to change to this.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\points}[1]{%
+ \makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}
+</screen>
+<para>A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text. The
+commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names. But,
+as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
+<literal>\fullname</literal> will reproduce that.
+</para>
+<screen>\makeatletter
+\newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\@honorific{#1}} % remember title
+\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1} % put title before name
+\makeatother
+\begin{tabular}{|l|}
+\honorific{Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones} \\ % no extra space here
+\honorific{ Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones} % extra space before title
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>To fix this, change to
+<literal>\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\@honorific~#1}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\ignorespaces</literal> is also often used in a <literal>\newenvironment</literal>
+at the end of the <replaceable>begin</replaceable> clause, that is, as part of the second
+argument, as in <literal>\begin{newenvironment}{<replaceable>env
+name</replaceable>}{... \ignorespaces}{...}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>To strip spaces off the end of an environment use
+<literal>\ignorespacesafterend</literal>. An example is that this will show a much
+larger vertical space between the first and second environments than
+between the second and third.
+</para>
+<screen>\newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}}
+\begin{eq}
+e=mc^2
+\end{eq}
+\begin{equation}
+F=ma
+\end{equation}
+\begin{equation}
+E=IR
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<para>Putting a comment character&#160;<literal>%</literal> immediately after the
+<literal>\end{eq}</literal> will make the vertical space disappear, but that is
+inconvenient. The solution is to change to
+<literal>\newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}\ignorespacesafterend}</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="13" id="Counters">
+<title>Counters</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>counters, a list of</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>variables, a list of</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Everything &latex; numbers for you has a counter associated with
+it. The name of the counter is often the same as the name of the
+environment or command associated with the number, except that the
+counter&#8217;s name has no backslash&#160;<literal>\</literal>. Thus, associated with
+the <literal>\chapter</literal> command is the <literal>chapter</literal> counter that keeps
+track of the chapter number.
+</para>
+<para>Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;&#8217;s standard document
+classes to control numbering.
+</para>
+<screen>part paragraph figure enumi
+chapter subparagraph table enumii
+section page footnote enumiii
+subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+subsubsection
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>mpfootnote</literal> counter is used by the <literal>\footnote</literal> command
+inside of a minipage (see <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>). The counters <literal>enumi</literal>
+through <literal>enumiv</literal> are used in the <literal>enumerate</literal> environment, for
+up to four levels of nesting (see <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Counters can have any integer value but they are typically positive.
+</para>
+<para>New counters are created with <literal>\newcounter</literal>. See <link linkend="_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</link>.
+</para>
+
+
+
+<sect1 label="13.1" id="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">
+<title><literal>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</literal>: Printing counters</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>counters, printing</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if
+the counter <replaceable>counter</replaceable> has the value 1 then a
+<literal>\alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> in your source will result in a lowercase
+letter&#160;a appearing in the output.
+</para>
+<para>All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
+instance, <literal>\alph{enumi}</literal>. Note that the counter name does not
+start with a backslash.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Print the value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable> in lowercase letters: &#8216;a&#8217;, &#8216;b&#8217;,
+... If the counter&#8217;s value is less than 1 or more than 26 then
+you get &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: Counter too large.</literal>&#8217;
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\Alph{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Print in uppercase letters: &#8216;A&#8217;, &#8216;B&#8217;, ... If the counter&#8217;s value
+is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: Counter
+too large.</literal>&#8217;
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arabic{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\arabic{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Print in Arabic numbers such as &#8216;<literal>5</literal>&#8217; or &#8216;<literal>-2</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\roman{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\roman{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Print in lowercase roman numerals: &#8216;i&#8217;, &#8216;ii&#8217;, ... If the
+counter&#8217;s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
+&latex; does not print anything in the output.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Roman{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\Roman{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Print in uppercase roman numerals: &#8216;I&#8217;, &#8216;II&#8217;, ... If the
+counter&#8217;s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
+&latex; does not print anything in the output.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fnsymbol{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\fnsymbol{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Prints the value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable> using a sequence of nine symbols that
+are traditionally used for labeling footnotes. The value of
+<replaceable>counter</replaceable> should be between&#160;1 and&#160;9, inclusive. If the
+counter&#8217;s value is less than 0 or more than 9 then you get &#8216;<literal>LaTeX
+Error: Counter too large</literal>&#8217;, while if it is 0 then you get no error or
+warning but &latex; does not output anything.
+</para>
+<para>Here are the symbols:
+</para>
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="4"><colspec colwidth="10*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="30*"></colspec><thead><row><entry><para>Number</para></entry><entry><para>Name</para></entry><entry><para>Command</para></entry><entry><para>Symbol
+</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry><para>1</para></entry><entry><para>asterisk</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ast</literal></para></entry><entry><para>*<!-- -->
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>2</para></entry><entry><para>dagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\dagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2020;
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>3</para></entry><entry><para>ddagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ddagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2021;
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>4</para></entry><entry><para>section-sign</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\S</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x00A7;
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>5</para></entry><entry><para>paragraph-sign</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\P</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x00B6;
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>6</para></entry><entry><para>double-vert</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\parallel</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2016;
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>7</para></entry><entry><para>double-asterisk</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ast\ast</literal></para></entry><entry><para>**<!-- -->
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>8</para></entry><entry><para>double-dagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\dagger\dagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2020;&#x2020;
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para>9</para></entry><entry><para>double-ddagger</para></entry><entry><para><literal>\ddagger\ddagger</literal></para></entry><entry><para>&#x2021;&#x2021;
+</para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.2" id="_005cusecounter">
+<title><literal>\usecounter</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\usecounter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>list items, specifying counter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>numbered items, specifying counter</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\usecounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Used in the second argument of the <literal>list</literal> environment
+(see <link linkend="list">list</link>), this declares that list items will be numbered by
+<replaceable>counter</replaceable>. It initializes <replaceable>counter</replaceable> to zero, and arranges that
+when <literal>\item</literal> is called without its optional argument then
+<replaceable>counter</replaceable> is incremented by <literal>\refstepcounter</literal>, making its value
+be the current <literal>ref</literal> value (see <link linkend="_005cref">\ref</link>). This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Put in the document preamble, this example makes a new list environment
+enumerated with <replaceable>testcounter</replaceable>:
+</para>
+<screen>\newcounter{testcounter}
+\newenvironment{test}{%
+ \begin{list}{}{%
+ \usecounter{testcounter}
+ }
+}{%
+ \end{list}
+}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.3" id="_005cvalue">
+<title><literal>\value</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\value</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>counters, getting value of</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\value{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Expands to the value of the counter <replaceable>counter</replaceable>. (Note that the name
+of a counter does not begin with a backslash.)
+</para>
+<para>This example outputs &#8216;<literal>Test counter is&#160;6. Other counter
+is&#160;5.</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcounter{test} \setcounter{test}{5}
+\newcounter{other} \setcounter{other}{\value{test}}
+\addtocounter{test}{1}
+
+Test counter is \arabic{test}.
+Other counter is \arabic{other}.
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\value</literal> command is not used for typesetting the value of the
+counter. For that, see <link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</link>.
+</para>
+<para>It is often used in <literal>\setcounter</literal> or <literal>\addtocounter</literal> but
+<literal>\value</literal> can be used anywhere that &latex; expects a number, such
+as in <literal>\hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}</literal>. It must not be
+preceded by <literal>\protect</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This example inserts <literal>\hspace{4\parindent}</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\setcounter{myctr}{3} \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
+\hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.4" id="_005csetcounter">
+<title><literal>\setcounter</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\setcounter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>counters, setting</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>setting counters</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\setcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Globally set the counter <replaceable>counter</replaceable> to have the value of the
+<replaceable>value</replaceable> argument, which must be an integer. Thus, you can set a
+counter&#8217;s value as <literal>\setcounter{section}{5}</literal>. Note that the
+counter name does not start with a backslash.
+</para>
+<para>In this example if the counter <literal>theorem</literal> has value 12 then the
+second line will print &#8216;<literal>XII</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<screen>\setcounter{exercise}{\value{theorem}}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman{exercise}.
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.5" id="_005caddtocounter">
+<title><literal>\addtocounter</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addtocounter</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\addtocounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>&#160;</screen>
+<para>Globally increment <replaceable>counter</replaceable> by the amount specified by the
+<replaceable>value</replaceable> argument, which may be negative.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the section value appears as &#8216;<literal>VII</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<screen>\setcounter{section}{5}
+\addtocounter{section}{2}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.6" id="_005crefstepcounter">
+<title><literal>\refstepcounter</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\refstepcounter</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\refstepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Globally increments the value of <replaceable>counter</replaceable> by one, as does
+<literal>\stepcounter</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</link>). The difference is that this
+command resets the value of any counter numbered within it. (For the
+definition of &#8220;counters numbered within&#8221;, see <link linkend="_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</link>.)
+</para>
+<para>In addition, this command also defines the current <literal>\ref</literal> value
+to be the result of <literal>\thecounter</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>While the counter value is set globally, the <literal>\ref</literal> value is set
+locally, i.e., inside the current group.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.7" id="_005cstepcounter">
+<title><literal>\stepcounter</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\stepcounter</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\stepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Globally adds one to <replaceable>counter</replaceable> and resets all counters numbered
+within it. (For the definition of &#8220;counters numbered within&#8221;,
+see <link linkend="_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</link>.)
+</para>
+<para>This command differs from <literal>\refstepcounter</literal> in that this one does
+not influence references&#160;&#8212; it does not define the current
+<literal>\ref</literal> value to be the result of <literal>\thecounter</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.8" id="_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear">
+<title><literal>\day</literal> &amp; <literal>\month</literal> &amp; <literal>\year</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\day</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\month</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\year</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; defines the counter <literal>\day</literal> for the day of the month
+(nominally with value between 1 and 31), <literal>\month</literal> for the month of
+the year (nominally with value between 1 and 12), and year <literal>\year</literal>.
+When &tex; starts up, they are set from the current values on the
+system. The related command <literal>\today</literal> produces a string
+representing the current day (see <link linkend="_005ctoday">\today</link>).
+</para>
+<para>They counters are not updated as the job progresses so in principle they
+could be incorrect by the end. In addition, &tex; does no sanity
+check:
+</para>
+<screen>\day=-2 \month=13 \year=-4 \today
+</screen>
+<para>gives no error or warning and results in the output &#8216;<literal>-2, -4</literal>&#8217; (the
+bogus month value produces no output).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="14" id="Lengths">
+<title>Lengths</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lengths, defining and using</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A <firstterm>length</firstterm> is a measure of distance. Many &latex; commands take a
+length as an argument.
+</para>
+<para>Lengths come in two types. A <firstterm>rigid length</firstterm> such as <literal>10pt</literal>
+does not contain a <literal>plus</literal> or <literal>minus</literal> component. (Plain &tex;
+calls this a <firstterm>dimen</firstterm>.) A <firstterm>rubber length</firstterm> (what Plain &tex;
+calls a <firstterm>skip</firstterm>) such as as with <literal>1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm</literal>
+can contain either or both of those components. In that rubber length,
+the <literal>1cm</literal> is the <firstterm>natural length</firstterm> while the other two, the
+<literal>plus</literal> and <literal>minus</literal> components, allow &tex; to stretch or
+shrink the length to optimize placement.
+</para>
+<para>The illustrations below use these two commands.
+</para>
+<screen>% make a black bar 10pt tall and #1 wide
+\newcommand{\blackbar}[1]{\rule{#1}{10pt}}
+
+% Make a box around #2 that is #1 wide (excluding the border)
+\newcommand{\showhbox}[2]{%
+ \fboxsep=0pt\fbox{\hbox to #1{#2}}}
+</screen>
+<para>This example uses those commands to show a black bar 100&#160;points
+long between &#8216;<literal>XXX</literal>&#8217; and &#8216;<literal>YYY</literal>&#8217;. This length is rigid.
+</para>
+<screen>XXX\showhbox{100pt}{\blackbar{100pt}}YYY
+</screen>
+<para>As for rubber lengths, shrinking is simpler one: with <literal>1cm minus
+0.05cm</literal>, the natural length is 1cm but &tex; can shrink it down
+as far as 0.95cm. Beyond that, &tex; refuses to shrink any more.
+Thus, below the first one works fine, producing a space of
+98&#160;points between the two bars.
+</para>
+<screen>XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{101pt}\hspace{100pt minus 2pt}\blackbar{101pt}}YYY
+
+XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{105pt}\hspace{100pt minus 1pt}\blackbar{105pt}}YYY
+</screen>
+<para>But the second one gets a warning like &#8216;<literal>Overfull \hbox (1.0pt too
+wide) detected at line 17</literal>&#8217;. In the output the first &#8216;<literal>Y</literal>&#8217; is
+overwritten by the end of the black bar, because the box&#8217;s material is
+wider than the 300pt allocated, as &tex; has refused to shrink
+the total to less than 309&#160;points.
+</para>
+<para>Stretching is like shrinking except that if &tex; is asked to stretch
+beyond the given amount, it will do it. Here the first line is fine,
+producing a space of 110&#160;points between the bars.
+</para>
+<screen>XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 10pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+
+XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 1pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+</screen>
+<para>In the second line &tex; needs a stretch of 10&#160;points and only
+1&#160;point was specified. &tex; stretches the space to the required
+length but it gives you a warning like &#8216;<literal>Underfull \hbox (badness
+10000) detected at line 22</literal>&#8217;. (We won&#8217;t discuss badness.)
+</para>
+<para>You can put both stretch and shrink in the same length, as in
+<literal>1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>If &tex; is setting two or more rubber lengths then it allocates the
+stretch or shrink in proportion.
+</para>
+<screen>XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{100pt}% left
+ \hspace{0pt plus 50pt}\blackbar{80pt}\hspace{0pt plus 10pt}% middle
+ \blackbar{100pt}}YYY % right
+</screen>
+<para>The left and right bars take up 100&#160;points, so the middle needs
+another 100. The middle bar is 80&#160;points so the two
+<literal>\hspace</literal>&#8217;s must stretch 20&#160;points. Because the two are
+<literal>plus 50pt</literal> and <literal>plus 10pt</literal>, &tex; gets 5/6 of the stretch
+from the first space and 1/6 from the second.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>plus</literal> or <literal>minus</literal> component of a rubber length can contain
+a <firstterm>fill</firstterm> component, as in <literal>1in plus2fill</literal>. This gives the
+length infinite stretchability or shrinkability so that &tex; could set
+it to any distance. Here the two figures will be equal-spaced across
+the page.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{godel.png}%
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{einstein.png}%
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
+<para>&tex; actually has three levels of infinity for glue components:
+<literal>fil</literal>, <literal>fill</literal>, and <literal>filll</literal>. The later ones are more
+infinite than the earlier ones. Ordinarily document authors only use
+the middle one (see <link linkend="_005chfill">\hfill</link> and see <link linkend="_005cvfill">\vfill</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length, so
+that after <literal>\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}</literal> and
+<literal>\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}</literal> then the value of
+<literal>\zlength</literal> is <literal>3in</literal>.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="14.1" id="Units-of-length">
+<title>Units of length</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>units, of length</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&tex; and &latex; know about these units both inside and outside of
+math mode.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>pt</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>pt</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Point</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="units-of-length-pt"/><para>Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two decimal
+places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>pc</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>pica</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>pc</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="units-of-length-pc"/><para>Pica, 12 pt
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>in</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>in</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>inch</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="units-of-length-in"/><para>Inch, 72.27 pt
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>bp</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>bp</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Big point</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="units-of-length-bp"/><para>Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in
+PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>cm</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Centimeter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>cm</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="units-of-length-cm"/><para>Centimeter
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>mm</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Millimeter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>mm</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="units-of-length-mm"/><para>Millimeter
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>dd</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Didot point</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>dd</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="units-of-length-dd"/><para>Didot point, 1.07 pt
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>cc</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Cicero</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>cc</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="units-of-length-cc"/><para>Cicero, 12 dd
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>sp</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Scaled point</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>sp</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="units-of-length-sp"/><para>Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ex</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>x-height</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>ex</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>m-width</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>em</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>em</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="Lengths_002fem"/><anchor id="Lengths_002fen"/><anchor id="Lengths_002fex"/><anchor id="units-of-length-em"/><anchor id="units-of-length-en"/><anchor id="units-of-length-ex"/><para>Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer of
+the font. The x-height of the current font <firstterm>ex</firstterm>, traditionally the
+height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical
+lengths. Similarly <firstterm>em</firstterm>, traditionally the width of the capital
+letter M, is often used for horizontal lengths (there is also
+<literal>\enspace</literal>, which is <literal>0.5em</literal>). Use of these can help make a
+definition work better across font changes. For example, a definition
+of the vertical space between list items given as
+<literal>\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex}</literal> is more
+likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a definition
+given in points.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>mu, math unit</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>mu</primary></indexterm>
+<para>In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
+<firstterm>mu</firstterm> given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family. See <link linkend="Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="14.2" id="_005csetlength">
+<title><literal>\setlength</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\setlength</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lengths, setting</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Set the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> to <replaceable>amount</replaceable>. The length name <replaceable>len</replaceable>
+must begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>. The <literal>amount</literal> can be a
+rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that &latex; understands (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of
+length</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Below, with &latex;&#8217;s defaults the first paragraph will be indented
+while the second will not.
+</para>
+<screen>I told the doctor I broke my leg in two places.
+
+\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+He said stop going to those places.
+</screen>
+<para>If you did not declare <replaceable>len</replaceable> with <literal>\newlength</literal>, for example if
+you mistype the above as
+<literal>\newlength{\specparindent}\setlength{\sepcparindent}{...}</literal>,
+then you get an error like &#8216;<literal>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt;
+\sepcindent</literal>&#8217;. If you omit the backslash at the start of the length name
+then you get an error like &#8216;<literal>Missing number, treated as zero. &lt;to be
+read again&gt; \relax l.19 \setlength{specparindent}{0.6\parindent}</literal>&#8217;
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="14.3" id="_005caddtolength">
+<title><literal>\addtolength</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addtolength</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lengths, adding to</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\addtolength{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>amount</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Increment the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> by <replaceable>amount</replaceable>. The length name
+<replaceable>len</replaceable> begins with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>. The <literal>amount</literal> is a
+rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that &latex; understands (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of
+length</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Below, if <literal>\parskip</literal> starts with the value <literal>0pt plus 1pt</literal>
+</para>
+<screen>Doctor: how is the boy who swallowed the silver dollar?
+\addtolength{\parskip}{1pt}
+
+Nurse: no change.
+</screen>
+<para>then it has the value <literal>1pt plus 1pt</literal> for the second paragraph.
+</para>
+<para>If you did not declare the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> with <literal>\newlength</literal>, if
+for example you mistype the above as
+<literal>\addtolength{\specparindent}{0.6\praindent}</literal>, then you get
+something like &#8216;<literal>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt; \praindent</literal>&#8217;.
+If you leave off the backslash at the start of <replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
+<literal>\addtolength{parindent}{1pt}</literal>, then you get something like
+&#8216;<literal>You can't use `the letter p' after \advance</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="14.4" id="_005csettodepth">
+<title><literal>\settodepth</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\settodepth</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\settodepth{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Set the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> to the depth of box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <replaceable>text</replaceable> argument. The length name <replaceable>len</replaceable> must
+begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>This will show how low the character descenders go.
+</para>
+<screen>\newlength{\alphabetdepth}
+\settodepth{\alphabetdepth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+\the\alphabetdepth
+</screen>
+<para>If you did not set aside the length <replaceable>len</replaceable>, if for example you
+mistype the above as <literal>\settodepth{\aplhabetdepth}{abc...}</literal>,
+then you get something like &#8216;<literal>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt;
+\aplhabetdepth</literal>&#8217;. If you leave the backslash out of <replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
+<literal>\settodepth{alphabetdepth}{...}</literal> then you get something like
+&#8216;<literal>Missing number, treated as zero. &lt;to be read again&gt; \setbox</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="14.5" id="_005csettoheight">
+<title><literal>\settoheight</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\settoheight</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\settoheight{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{text}
+</screen>
+<para>Sets the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> to the height of box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <literal>text</literal> argument. The length name <replaceable>len</replaceable> must
+begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>This will show how high the characters go.
+</para>
+<screen>\newlength{\alphabetheight}
+\settoheight{\alphabetheight}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+\the\alphabetheight
+</screen>
+<para>If no such length <replaceable>len</replaceable> has been declared with <literal>\newlength</literal>, if
+for example you mistype as
+<literal>\settoheight{\aplhabetheight}{abc...}</literal>, then you get something
+like &#8216;<literal>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt; \alphabetheight</literal>&#8217;. If
+you leave the backslash out of <replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
+<literal>\settoheight{alphabetheight}{...}</literal> then you get something like
+&#8216;<literal>Missing number, treated as zero. &lt;to be read again&gt; \setbox</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="14.6" id="_005csettowidth">
+<title><literal>\settowidth</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\settowidth</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\settowidth{<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Set the length <replaceable>len</replaceable> to the width of the box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <replaceable>text</replaceable> argument. The length name <replaceable>len</replaceable> must
+begin with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>This measures the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
+</para>
+<screen>\newlength{\alphabetwidth}
+\settowidth{\alphabetwidth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+\the\alphabetwidth
+</screen>
+<para>If no such length <replaceable>len</replaceable> has been set aside, if for example you
+mistype the above as <literal>\settowidth{\aplhabetwidth}{abc...}</literal>,
+then you get something like &#8216;<literal>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt;
+\aplhabetwidth</literal>&#8217;. If you leave the backslash out of <replaceable>len</replaceable>, as in
+<literal>\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...}</literal> then you get something like
+&#8216;<literal>Missing number, treated as zero. &lt;to be read again&gt; \setbox</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="15" id="Making-paragraphs">
+<title>Making paragraphs</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>making paragraphs</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraphs</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To start a paragraph, just type some text. To end the current
+paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, separated by
+two empty lines.
+</para>
+<screen>It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession
+of a good fortune, must be in want of a wife.
+
+However little known the feelings or views of such a man may be on his
+first entering a neighbourhood, this truth is so well fixed in the minds
+of the surrounding families, that he is considered the rightful property
+of some one or other of their daughters.
+
+``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day,
+``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
+</screen>
+<para>The separator lines must be empty, including not containing a comment
+character, <literal>%</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Once &latex; has gathered all of a paragraph&#8217;s contents it divides that
+content into lines in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph
+(see <link linkend="Line-breaking">Line breaking</link>).
+</para>
+<para>There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don&#8217;t put a
+blank line in math mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>); here the line before the
+<literal>\end{equation}</literal>
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+ 2^{|S|} &gt; |S|
+
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<para>will get you the error &#8216;<literal>Missing $ inserted</literal>&#8217;. Similarly, the blank
+line in this <literal>section</literal> argument
+</para>
+<screen>\section{aaa
+
+bbb}
+</screen>
+<para>gets &#8216;<literal>Runaway argument? {aaa ! Paragraph ended before \@sect was
+complete</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+
+
+<sect1 label="15.1" id="_005cpar">
+<title><literal>\par</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\par</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph, ending</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis (note that while reading the input &tex; converts two
+consecutive newlines to a <literal>\par</literal>):
+</para>
+<screen>\par
+</screen>
+<para>End the current paragraph. The usual way to separate paragraphs is with
+a blank line but the <literal>\par</literal> command is entirely equivalent. This
+command is robust (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This example uses <literal>\par</literal> rather than a blank line simply for
+readability.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\syllabusLegalese}{%
+ \whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou}
+</screen>
+<para>In LR mode or a vertical mode the <literal>\par</literal> command does nothing but
+it terminates paragraph mode, switching &latex; to vertical mode
+(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+</para>
+<para>You cannot use the <literal>\par</literal> command in a math mode. You also cannot
+use it in the argument of many commands, such as the <literal>\section</literal>
+command (see <link linkend="Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</link> and <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp;
+\renewcommand</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\par</literal> command is not the same as the <literal>\paragraph</literal>
+command. The latter is, like <literal>\section</literal> or <literal>\subsection</literal>, a
+sectioning unit used by the standard &latex; documents
+(see <link linkend="_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\par</literal> command is not the same as <literal>\newline</literal> or the line
+break double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>. The difference is that <literal>\par</literal>
+ends the paragraph, not just the line, and also triggers the addition of
+the between-paragraph vertical space <literal>\parskip</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent
+&amp; \parskip</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The output from this example
+</para>
+<screen>xyz
+
+\setlength{\parindent}{3in}
+\setlength{\parskip}{5in}
+\noindent test\indent test1\par test2
+</screen>
+<para>is: after &#8216;<literal>xyz</literal>&#8217; there is a vertical skip of 5&#160;inches and then
+&#8216;<literal>test</literal>&#8217; appears, aligned with the left margin. On the same line,
+there is an empty horizontal space of 3&#160;inches and then
+&#8216;<literal>test1</literal>&#8217; appears. Finally. there is a vertical space of
+5&#160;inches, followed by a fresh paragraph with a paragraph indent of
+3&#160;inches, and then &latex; puts the text &#8216;<literal>test2</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="15.2" id="_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent">
+<title><literal>\indent</literal> &amp; <literal>\noindent</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\noindent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parindent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>indent, forcing</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\indent
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\noindent
+</screen>
+<para>Go into horizontal mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). The <literal>\indent</literal> command
+first outputs an empty box whose width is <literal>\parindent</literal>. These
+commands are robust (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line.
+See <link linkend="_005cpar">\par</link> for the difference between this command and <literal>\par</literal>. To
+start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted
+paragraph, use <literal>\noindent</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>In the middle of a paragraph the <literal>\noindent</literal> command has no effect,
+because &latex; is already in horizontal mode there. The
+<literal>\indent</literal> command&#8217;s only effect is to output a space.
+</para>
+<para>This example starts a fresh paragraph.
+</para>
+<screen>... end of the prior paragraph.
+
+\noindent This paragraph is not indented.
+</screen>
+<para>and this continues an interrupted paragraph.
+</para>
+<screen>The data
+
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{rl} ... \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\noindent shows this clearly.
+</screen>
+<para>To omit indentation in the entire document put
+<literal>\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}</literal> in the preamble. If you do that,
+you may want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs,
+<literal>\parskip</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent &amp; \parskip</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>indentfirst</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>indentfirst</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Default &latex; styles have the first paragraph after a section that is
+not indented, as is traditional typesetting in English. To change that,
+look on CTAN for the package <literal>indentfirst</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="15.3" id="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">
+<title><literal>\parindent</literal> &amp; <literal>\parskip</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parindent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parskip</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph indentation</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical space before paragraphs</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{\parskip}{<replaceable>horizontal len</replaceable>}
+\setlength{\parinden}{<replaceable>vertical len</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Both are a rubber lengths (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). They give the indentation
+of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages
+(see <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>), and the vertical space between paragraphs.
+</para>
+<para>This, put in the preamble,
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+\setlength{\parskip}{1ex}
+</screen>
+<para>arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented,
+but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase
+&#8216;<literal>x</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>In standard &latex; documents, the default value for <literal>\parindent</literal>
+in one-column documents is <literal>15pt</literal> when the default text size is
+<literal>10pt</literal> , <literal>17pt</literal> for <literal>11pt</literal>, and <literal>1.5em</literal> for
+<literal>12pt</literal>. In two-column documents it is <literal>1em</literal>. The default
+value for <literal>\parskip</literal> in &latex;&#8217;s standard document styles is
+<literal>0pt plus1pt</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="15.4" id="Marginal-notes">
+<title>Marginal notes</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>marginal notes</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>notes in the margin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>remarks in the margin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginpar</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\marginpar{<replaceable>right</replaceable>}
+\marginpar[<replaceable>left</replaceable>]{<replaceable>right</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Create a note in the margin. The first line of the note will have the
+same baseline as the line in the text where the <literal>\marginpar</literal>
+occurs.
+</para>
+<para>The margin that &latex; uses for the note depends on the current layout
+(see <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link>) and also on <literal>\reversemarginpar</literal>
+(see below). If you are using one-sided layout (document option
+<literal>oneside</literal>) then it goes in the right margin. If you are using
+two-sided layout (document option <literal>twoside</literal>) then it goes in the
+outside margin. If you are in two-column layout (document option
+<literal>twocolumn</literal>) then it goes in the nearest margin.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\reversemarginpar</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\normalmarginpar</primary></indexterm>
+<para>If you declare <literal>\reversemarginpar</literal> then &latex; will place
+subsequent marginal notes in the opposite margin to that given in the
+prior paragraph. Revert that to the default position with
+<literal>\normalmarginpar</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>When you specify the optional argument <replaceable>left</replaceable> then it is used for
+a note in the left margin, while the mandatory argument <replaceable>right</replaceable> is
+used for a note in the right margin.
+</para>
+<para>Normally, a note&#8217;s first word will not be hyphenated. You can enable
+hyphenation there by beginning <replaceable>left</replaceable> or <replaceable>right</replaceable> with
+<literal>\hspace{0pt}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparpush</primary></indexterm><literal>\marginparpush</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="marginal-notes-marginparpush"/><para>Minimum vertical space between notes; default &#8216;<literal>7pt</literal>&#8217; for
+&#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217; documents, &#8216;<literal>5pt</literal>&#8217; else.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\marginparsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="marginal-notes-marginparsep"/><para>Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default
+&#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217; for &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217; documents, &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217; else.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\marginparwidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="marginal-notes-marginparwidth"/><para>Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217; document
+is &#8216;<literal>90pt</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>83pt</literal>&#8217; for &#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217;, and &#8216;<literal>68pt</literal>&#8217; for
+&#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217;; &#8216;<literal>17pt</literal>&#8217; more in each case for a two-sided document.
+In two column mode, the default is &#8216;<literal>48pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The standard &latex; routine for marginal notes does not prevent
+notes from falling off the bottom of the page.
+<!-- @TeX{} FAQ entry on this topic (xx when there): -->
+<!-- @url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=marginparside}. -->
+<!-- (+marginfix) -->
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="16" id="Math-formulas">
+<title>Math formulas</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math formulas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>formulas, math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math mode, entering</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>math</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>math</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>displaymath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>displaymath</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>environment, <literal>equation</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>equation</literal> environment</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+<para>Produce mathematical text by putting &latex; into math mode or display
+math mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). This example shows both.
+</para>
+<screen>The wave equation for \( u \) is
+\begin{displaymath}
+ \frac{\partial^2u}{\partial t^2} = c^2\nabla^2u
+\end{displaymath}
+where \( \nabla^2 \) is the spatial Laplacian and \( c \) is constant.
+</screen>
+<para>Math mode is for inline mathematics. In the above example it is invoked
+by the starting <literal>\(</literal> and finished by the matching ending <literal>\)</literal>.
+Display math mode is for displayed equations and here is invoked by the
+<literal>displaymath</literal> environment. Note that any mathematical text
+whatever, including mathematical text consisting of just one character,
+is handled in math mode.
+</para>
+<para>When in math mode or display math mode, &latex; handles many aspects of
+your input text differently than in other text modes. For example,
+</para>
+<screen>contrast x+y with \( x+y \)
+</screen>
+<para>in math mode the letters are in italics and the spacing around the plus
+sign is different.
+</para>
+<para>There are three ways to make inline formulas, to put &latex; in math
+mode.
+</para>
+<screen>\( <replaceable>mathematical material</replaceable> \)
+$ <replaceable>mathematical material</replaceable> $
+\begin{math} <replaceable>mathematical material</replaceable> \end{math}
+</screen>
+<para>The first form is preferred and the second is quite common, but the
+third form is rarely used. You can sometimes use one and sometimes
+another, as in <literal>\(x\) and $y$</literal>. You can use these in paragraph
+mode or in LR mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+</para>
+<para>To make displayed formulas, put &latex; into display math mode with
+either:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{displaymath}
+ <replaceable>mathematical material</replaceable>
+\end{displaymath}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+ <replaceable>mathematical material</replaceable>
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<para>(see <link linkend="displaymath">displaymath</link>, see <link linkend="equation">equation</link>). The only difference is that
+with the <literal>equation</literal> environment, &latex; puts a formula number
+alongside the formula. The construct <literal>\[ <replaceable>math</replaceable> \]</literal> is
+equivalent to <literal>\begin{displaymath} <replaceable>math</replaceable>
+\end{displaymath}</literal>. These environments can only be used in paragraph
+mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\displaystyle</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some differences.
+One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts; in display
+math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they are closer
+together.
+</para>
+<para>Sometimes you want the display math typographical treatment to happen in
+the inline math mode. For this, the <literal>\displaystyle</literal> declaration
+forces the size and style of the formula to be that of
+<literal>displaymath</literal>. Thus <literal>\(\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty
+x_n\)</literal> will have the limits above and below the summation sign, not next
+to it. Another example is that
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{r|cc}
+ \textsc{Name} &amp;\textsc{Series} &amp;\textsc{Sum} \\ \hline
+ Arithmetic &amp;\( a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b) \)
+ &amp;\( na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac{b}{2}\) \\
+ Geometric &amp;\( a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^{n-1} \)
+ &amp;\(\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}\) \\
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>because it has no <literal>\displaystyle</literal>, the &#8216;<literal>Arithmetic</literal>&#8217; line&#8217;s
+fraction will be scrunched. But, because of its <literal>\displaystyle</literal>,
+the &#8216;<literal>Geometric</literal>&#8217; line&#8217;s fraction will be easy to read, with
+characters the same size as in the rest of the line.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsfonts</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsfonts</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>mathtools</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>mathtools</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of
+packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics,
+<filename>amsmath</filename> and <filename>amssymb</filename> (also be aware of the <filename>mathtools</filename>
+package that is an extension to, and loads, <filename>amsmath</filename>). New
+documents that will have mathematical text should use these packages.
+Descriptions of these packages is outside the scope of this document;
+see their documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="16.1" id="Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">
+<title>Subscripts &amp; superscripts</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>superscript</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subscript</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>exponent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>_</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>^</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis (in math mode or display math mode), one of:
+</para>
+<screen><replaceable>base</replaceable>^<replaceable>exp</replaceable>
+<replaceable>base</replaceable>^{<replaceable>exp</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or, one of:
+</para>
+<screen><replaceable>base</replaceable>_<replaceable>exp</replaceable>
+<replaceable>base</replaceable>_{<replaceable>exp</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Make <replaceable>exp</replaceable> appear as a superscript of <replaceable>base</replaceable> (with the caret
+character,&#160;<literal>^</literal>) or a subscript (with
+underscore,&#160;<literal>_</literal>).
+</para>
+<para>In this example the <literal>0</literal>&#8217;s and <literal>1</literal>&#8217;s are subscripts while the
+<literal>2</literal>&#8217;s are superscripts.
+</para>
+<screen>\( (x_0+x_1)^2 \leq (x_0)^2+(x_1)^2 \)
+</screen>
+<para>To have the subscript or superscript contain more than one character,
+surround the expression with curly braces, as in <literal>e^{-2x}</literal>.
+This example&#8217;s fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression
+for the exponent.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{displaymath}
+ (3^3)^3=27^3=19\,683
+ \qquad
+ 3^{(3^3)}=3^{27}=7\,625\,597\,484\,987
+\end{displaymath}
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; knows how to handle a superscript on a superscript, or a
+subscript on a subscript, or supers on subs, or subs on supers. So,
+expressions such as <literal>e^{x^2}</literal> and <literal>x_{i_0}</literal> give correct
+output. Note the use in those expressions of curly braces to give the
+<replaceable>base</replaceable> a determined <replaceable>exp</replaceable>. If you enter <literal>\(3^3^3\)</literal> then
+you get &#8216;<literal>Double superscript</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a
+superscript. In this example the integral has both. They come out in
+the correct place without any author intervention.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{displaymath}
+ \int_{x=a}^b f'(x)\,dx = f(b)-f(a)
+\end{displaymath}
+</screen>
+<para>Note the parentheses around <literal>x=a</literal> to make the entire expression a
+subscript.
+</para>
+<para>To put a superscript or subscript before a symbol, use a construct like
+<literal>{}_t K^2</literal>. The empty curly braces <literal>{}</literal> give the
+subscript something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally
+attaching to a prior symbols.
+</para>
+<para>Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or
+display math mode, as in <literal>the expression x^2</literal>, will get you
+the error &#8216;<literal>Missing $ inserted</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>mhchem</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>mhchem</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is to
+typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as
+<filename>mhchem</filename>; see CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="16.2" id="Math-symbols">
+<title>Math symbols</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math symbols</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>symbols, math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>greek letters</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>symbols</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>symbols</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+<para>&latex; provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that
+anyone uses. For example, if you include <literal>$\pi$</literal> in your source,
+you will get the pi symbol &#x03C0;. See the <filename>Comprehensive
+&latex; Symbol List</filename> at
+<ulink url="https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/">https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/</ulink>.
+</para>
+<para>Here is a list of commonly-used symbols. It is by no means exhaustive.
+Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its symbol class,
+which determines the spacing around it, is given in parenthesis. Unless
+said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can be used only in math
+mode. To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current
+mode, see <link linkend="_005censuremath">\ensuremath</link>.
+</para>
+<!-- xx Add Negation: for negations of relevant symbols -->
+<!-- Useful: http://www.w3.org/TR/WD-math-970515/section6.html -->
+
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\|</primary></indexterm><literal>\|</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2225; Parallel (relation). Synonym:&#160;<literal>\parallel</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\aleph</primary></indexterm><literal>\aleph</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2135; Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\alpha</primary></indexterm><literal>\alpha</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B1; Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\amalg</primary></indexterm><literal>\amalg</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2A3F; Disjoint union (binary)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\angle</primary></indexterm><literal>\angle</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2220; Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than
+sign&#160;<literal>&lt;</literal> and angle bracket&#160;<literal>\langle</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\approx</primary></indexterm><literal>\approx</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2248; Almost equal to (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ast</primary></indexterm><literal>\ast</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2217; Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed
+(binary). Synonym:&#160;<literal>*</literal>, which is often a superscript or
+subscript, as in the Kleene star. Similar:&#160;<literal>\star</literal>, which is
+five-pointed, and is sometimes used as a general binary operation, and
+sometimes reserved for cross-correlation.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\asymp</primary></indexterm><literal>\asymp</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x224D; Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\backslash</primary></indexterm><literal>\backslash</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>\ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus&#160;<literal>\setminus</literal>, and
+<literal>\textbackslash</literal> for backslash outside of math mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\beta</primary></indexterm><literal>\beta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B2; Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigcap</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigcap</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22C2; Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
+binary intersection&#160;<literal>\cap</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigcirc</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigcirc</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x26AA; Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function
+composition&#160;<literal>\circ</literal>.
+<!-- bb Best unicode symbol for this? -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigcup</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigcup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22C3; Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary
+union&#160;<literal>\cup</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigodot</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigodot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2A00; Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigoplus</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigoplus</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2A01; Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigotimes</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigotimes</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2A02; Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigtriangledown</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigtriangledown</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x25BD; Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down
+(operator).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigtriangleup</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigtriangleup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x25B3; Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up (operator).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigsqcup</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigsqcup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2A06; Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\biguplus</primary></indexterm><literal>\biguplus</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2A04; Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus
+(operator). (Note that the name has only one p.)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigvee</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigvee</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22C1; Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigwedge</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigwedge</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22C0; Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bot</primary></indexterm><literal>\bot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22A5; Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered
+set, or a contradiction (ordinary). See also&#160;<literal>\top</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bowtie</primary></indexterm><literal>\bowtie</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22C8; Natural join of two relations (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Box</primary></indexterm><literal>\Box</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x25A1; Modal operator for necessity; square open box
+(ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+<!-- bb Best Unicode equivalent? -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bullet</primary></indexterm><literal>\bullet</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>bullet symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x2022; Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication
+dot&#160;<literal>\cdot</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cap</primary></indexterm><literal>\cap</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2229; Intersection of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator&#160;<literal>\bigcap</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cdot</primary></indexterm><literal>\cdot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22C5; Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet
+dot&#160;<literal>\bullet</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\chi</primary></indexterm><literal>\chi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C7; Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\circ</primary></indexterm><literal>\circ</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2218; Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar:
+variable-sized operator&#160;<literal>\bigcirc</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\clubsuit</primary></indexterm><literal>\clubsuit</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2663; Club card suit (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\complement</primary></indexterm><literal>\complement</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2201; Set complement, used as a superscript as in
+<literal>$S^\complement$</literal> (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. Also used:
+<literal>$S^{\mathsf{c}}$</literal> or&#160;<literal>$\bar{S}$</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cong</primary></indexterm><literal>\cong</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2245; Congruent (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\coprod</primary></indexterm><literal>\coprod</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2210; Coproduct (operator).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cup</primary></indexterm><literal>\cup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x222A; Union of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator&#160;<literal>\bigcup</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dagger</primary></indexterm><literal>\dagger</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2020; Dagger relation (binary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dashv</primary></indexterm><literal>\dashv</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22A3; Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation). Similar:
+turnstile&#160;<literal>\vdash</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ddagger</primary></indexterm><literal>\ddagger</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2021; Double dagger relation (binary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Delta</primary></indexterm><literal>\Delta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x0394; Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\delta</primary></indexterm><literal>\delta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B4; Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Diamond</primary></indexterm><literal>\Diamond</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x25C7; Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\diamond</primary></indexterm><literal>\diamond</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22C4; Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large
+diamond&#160;<literal>\Diamond</literal>, circle bullet&#160;<literal>\bullet</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\diamondsuit</primary></indexterm><literal>\diamondsuit</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2662; Diamond card suit (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\div</primary></indexterm><literal>\div</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x00F7; Division sign (binary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\doteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\doteq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2250; Approaches the limit (relation). Similar: geometrically equal
+to&#160;<literal>\Doteq</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\downarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\downarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2193; Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar:
+<literal>\Downarrow</literal> double line down arrow.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Downarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Downarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21D3; Double line down arrow (relation). Similar:
+<literal>\downarrow</literal> single line down arrow.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ell</primary></indexterm><literal>\ell</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2113; Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\emptyset</primary></indexterm><literal>\emptyset</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2205; Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is
+<literal>\varnothing</literal>.
+<!-- bb Why Unicode has \revemptyset but no \emptyset? -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\epsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\epsilon</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03F5; Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to
+Greek text letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small
+letter epsilon <literal>\varepsilon</literal>&#160;&#x03B5;. Related:
+the set membership relation <literal>\in</literal>&#160;&#x2208;.
+<!-- src: David Carlisle http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/98018/339 and -->
+<!-- Unicode referenced there asserts varepsilon is much more widely used. -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\equiv</primary></indexterm><literal>\equiv</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2261; Equivalence (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\eta</primary></indexterm><literal>\eta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B7; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\exists</primary></indexterm><literal>\exists</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2203; Existential quantifier (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\flat</primary></indexterm><literal>\flat</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x266D; Musical flat (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\forall</primary></indexterm><literal>\forall</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2200; Universal quantifier (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frown</primary></indexterm><literal>\frown</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2322; Downward curving arc (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Gamma</primary></indexterm><literal>\Gamma</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x0393; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\gamma</primary></indexterm><literal>\gamma</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B3; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ge</primary></indexterm><literal>\ge</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2265; Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for&#160;<literal>\geq</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\geq</primary></indexterm><literal>\geq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2265; Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for&#160;<literal>\ge</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\gets</primary></indexterm><literal>\gets</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2190; Is assigned the value (relation).
+Synonym:&#160;<literal>\leftarrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\gg</primary></indexterm><literal>\gg</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x226B; Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less
+than&#160;<literal>\ll</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hbar</primary></indexterm><literal>\hbar</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x210F; Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\heartsuit</primary></indexterm><literal>\heartsuit</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2661; Heart card suit (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hookleftarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\hookleftarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21A9; Hooked left arrow (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hookrightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\hookrightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21AA; Hooked right arrow (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\iff</primary></indexterm><literal>\iff</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x27F7; If and only if (relation). It is <literal>\Longleftrightarrow</literal>
+with a <literal>\thickmuskip</literal> on either side.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Im</primary></indexterm><literal>\Im</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2111; Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part&#160;<literal>\Re</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\imath</primary></indexterm><literal>\imath</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dotless i, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (see <link linkend="Math-accents">Math
+accents</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\in</primary></indexterm><literal>\in</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2208; Set element (relation). See also: lowercase lunate
+epsilon&#160;<literal>\epsilon</literal>&#x03F5; and small letter script
+epsilon&#160;<literal>\varepsilon</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\infty</primary></indexterm><literal>\infty</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x221E; Infinity (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\int</primary></indexterm><literal>\int</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x222B; Integral (operator).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\iota</primary></indexterm><literal>\iota</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B9; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Join</primary></indexterm><literal>\Join</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2A1D; Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain
+&tex;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\jmath</primary></indexterm><literal>\jmath</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dotless j, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (see <link linkend="Math-accents">Math
+accents</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\kappa</primary></indexterm><literal>\kappa</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03BA; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Lambda</primary></indexterm><literal>\Lambda</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x039B; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lambda</primary></indexterm><literal>\lambda</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03BB; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\land</primary></indexterm><literal>\land</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2227; Logical and (binary). This is a synonym for <literal>\wedge</literal>.
+See also logical or&#160;<literal>\lor</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\langle</primary></indexterm><literal>\langle</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x27E8; Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar:
+less-than&#160;<literal>&lt;</literal>. Matches&#160;<literal>\rangle</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lbrace</primary></indexterm><literal>\lbrace</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x007B; Left curly brace
+(opening). Synonym:&#160;<literal>\{</literal>. Matches&#160;<literal>\rbrace</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lbrack</primary></indexterm><literal>\lbrack</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x005B; Left square bracket (opening).
+Synonym:&#160;<literal>[</literal>. Matches&#160;<literal>\rbrack</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lceil</primary></indexterm><literal>\lceil</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2308; Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the bottom
+shaved off (opening). Matches&#160;<literal>\rceil</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\le</primary></indexterm><literal>\le</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2264; Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for&#160;<literal>\leq</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leadsto</primary></indexterm><literal>\leadsto</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21DD; Squiggly right arrow (relation). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+To get this symbol outside of math mode you can put
+<literal>\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}</literal> in the
+preamble and then use <literal>\Leadsto</literal> instead.
+<!-- bb Best Unicode equivalent? -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Leftarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Leftarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21D0; Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation). Similar:
+single-line left arrow&#160;<literal>\leftarrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\leftarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2190; Single-line left arrow (relation).
+Synonym:&#160;<literal>\gets</literal>. Similar: double-line left
+arrow&#160;<literal>\Leftarrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftharpoondown</primary></indexterm><literal>\leftharpoondown</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21BD; Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftharpoonup</primary></indexterm><literal>\leftharpoonup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21BC; Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Leftrightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Leftrightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21D4; Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation).
+Similar: single-line double headed arrow&#160;<literal>\leftrightarrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftrightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\leftrightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2194; Single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
+double-line double headed arrow&#160;<literal>\Leftrightarrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leq</primary></indexterm><literal>\leq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2264; Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for&#160;<literal>\le</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lfloor</primary></indexterm><literal>\lfloor</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x230A; Left floor bracket (opening). Matches:&#160;<literal>\floor</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\lhd</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x25C1; Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary).
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
+<filename>amssymb</filename> and use&#160;<literal>\vartriangleleft</literal> (which is a relation
+and so gives better spacing).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ll</primary></indexterm><literal>\ll</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x226A; Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater
+than&#160;<literal>\gg</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lnot</primary></indexterm><literal>\lnot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x00AC; Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym:&#160;<literal>\neg</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\longleftarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\longleftarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x27F5; Long single-line left arrow (relation). Similar: long
+double-line left arrow&#160;<literal>\Longleftarrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\longleftrightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\longleftrightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x27F7; Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: long
+double-line double-headed arrow&#160;<literal>\Longleftrightarrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\longmapsto</primary></indexterm><literal>\longmapsto</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x27FC; Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
+(relation). Similar: shorter version&#160;<literal>\mapsto</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\longrightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\longrightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x27F6; Long single-line right arrow (relation). Similar: long
+double-line right arrow&#160;<literal>\Longrightarrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lor</primary></indexterm><literal>\lor</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2228; Logical or (binary). Synonym: wedge&#160;<literal>\wedge</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mapsto</primary></indexterm><literal>\mapsto</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21A6; Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar (relation).
+Similar: longer version&#160;<literal>\longmapsto</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mho</primary></indexterm><literal>\mho</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2127; Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mid</primary></indexterm><literal>\mid</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2223; Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of
+<literal>\mid</literal> is for a set <literal>\{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Similar: <literal>\vert</literal> and&#160;<literal>|</literal> produce the same single-line
+vertical bar symbol but without any spacing (they fall in class
+ordinary) and you should not use them as relations but instead only as
+ordinals, i.e., footnote symbols. For absolute value, see the entry
+for&#160;<literal>\vert</literal> and for norm see the entry for&#160;<literal>\Vert</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\models</primary></indexterm><literal>\models</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22A8; Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash
+(relation). Similar: long double dash&#160;<literal>\vDash</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mp</primary></indexterm><literal>\mp</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2213; Minus or plus (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mu</primary></indexterm><literal>\mu</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03BC; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nabla</primary></indexterm><literal>\nabla</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2207; Hamilton&#8217;s del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\natural</primary></indexterm><literal>\natural</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x266E; Musical natural notation (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ne</primary></indexterm><literal>\ne</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2260; Not equal (relation). Synonym:&#160;<literal>\neq</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nearrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\nearrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2197; North-east arrow (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\neg</primary></indexterm><literal>\neg</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x00AC; Logical negation (ordinary).
+Synonym:&#160;<literal>\lnot</literal>. Sometimes instead used for
+negation:&#160;<literal>\sim</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\neq</primary></indexterm><literal>\neq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2260; Not equal (relation). Synonym:&#160;<literal>\ne</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ni</primary></indexterm><literal>\ni</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x220B; Reflected membership epsilon; has the member
+(relation). Synonym:&#160;<literal>\owns</literal>. Similar: is a member
+of&#160;<literal>\in</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\not</primary></indexterm><literal>\not</literal>
+</term><listitem><!-- the "@ "s put in spaces so the not slash doesn't hit the next char. -->
+<para>&#x0020;&#160;&#160;&#160;&#160;Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a
+following operator (relation).
+</para>
+<para>Many negated operators are available that don&#8217;t require <literal>\not</literal>,
+particularly with the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For example, <literal>\notin</literal>
+is typographically preferable to <literal>\not\in</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\notin</primary></indexterm><literal>\notin</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2209; Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset
+of&#160;<literal>\nsubseteq</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nu</primary></indexterm><literal>\nu</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03BD; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nwarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\nwarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2196; North-west arrow (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\odot</primary></indexterm><literal>\odot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2299; Dot inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator&#160;<literal>\bigodot</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oint</primary></indexterm><literal>\oint</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x222E; Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle
+(operator).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Omega</primary></indexterm><literal>\Omega</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03A9; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\omega</primary></indexterm><literal>\omega</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C9; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ominus</primary></indexterm><literal>\ominus</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2296; Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oplus</primary></indexterm><literal>\oplus</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2295; Plus sign inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator&#160;<literal>\bigoplus</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oslash</primary></indexterm><literal>\oslash</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2298; Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\otimes</primary></indexterm><literal>\otimes</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2297; Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary). Similar:
+variable-sized operator&#160;<literal>\bigotimes</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\owns</primary></indexterm><literal>\owns</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x220B; Reflected membership epsilon; has the member
+(relation). Synonym:&#160;<literal>\ni</literal>. Similar: is a member
+of&#160;<literal>\in</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parallel</primary></indexterm><literal>\parallel</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2225; Parallel (relation). Synonym:&#160;<literal>\|</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\partial</primary></indexterm><literal>\partial</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2202; Partial differential (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\perp</primary></indexterm><literal>\perp</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x27C2; Perpendicular (relation). Similar:&#160;<literal>\bot</literal> uses the
+same glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class
+ordinary.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\phi</primary></indexterm><literal>\phi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03D5; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<literal>\varphi</literal>&#160;&#x03C6;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Pi</primary></indexterm><literal>\Pi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03A0; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pi</primary></indexterm><literal>\pi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C0; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<literal>\varpi</literal>&#160;&#x03D6;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pm</primary></indexterm><literal>\pm</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x00B1; Plus or minus (binary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\prec</primary></indexterm><literal>\prec</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x227A; Precedes (relation). Similar: less than&#160;<literal>&lt;</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\preceq</primary></indexterm><literal>\preceq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2AAF; Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
+equals&#160;<literal>\leq</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\prime</primary></indexterm><literal>\prime</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2032; Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary).
+Typically used as a superscript: <literal>$f^\prime$</literal>; <literal>$f^\prime$</literal>
+and <literal>$f'$</literal> produce the same result. An advantage of the second
+is that <literal>$f'''$</literal> produces the desired symbol, that is, the same
+result as <literal>$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$</literal>, but uses rather less
+typing. You can only use <literal>\prime</literal> in math mode. Using the right
+single quote&#160;<literal>'</literal> in text mode produces a different character
+(apostrophe).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\prod</primary></indexterm><literal>\prod</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x220F; Product (operator).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\propto</primary></indexterm><literal>\propto</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x221D; Is proportional to (relation)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Psi</primary></indexterm><literal>\Psi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03A8; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\psi</primary></indexterm><literal>\psi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C8; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rangle</primary></indexterm><literal>\rangle</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x27E9; Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing).
+Similar: greater than&#160;<literal>&gt;</literal>. Matches:<literal>\langle</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rbrace</primary></indexterm><literal>\rbrace</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x007D; Right curly brace
+(closing). Synonym:&#160;<literal>\}</literal>. Matches&#160;<literal>\lbrace</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rbrack</primary></indexterm><literal>\rbrack</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x005D; Right square bracket
+(closing). Synonym:&#160;<literal>]</literal>. Matches&#160;<literal>\lbrack</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rceil</primary></indexterm><literal>\rceil</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2309; Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches&#160;<literal>\lceil</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Re</primary></indexterm><literal>\Re</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x211C; Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary). Related:
+double-line, or blackboard bold, R&#160;<literal>\mathbb{R}</literal>; to access
+this, load the <filename>amsfonts</filename> package.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\restriction</primary></indexterm><literal>\restriction</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21BE; Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym:
+<literal>\upharpoonright</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\revemptyset</primary></indexterm><literal>\revemptyset</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x29B0; Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related:
+<literal>\varnothing</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>stix</filename> package.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rfloor</primary></indexterm><literal>\rfloor</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x230B; Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
+off (closing). Matches&#160;<literal>\lfloor</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\rhd</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x25C1; Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary).
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead
+load <filename>amssymb</filename> and use&#160;<literal>\vartriangleright</literal> (which is a
+relation and so gives better spacing).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rho</primary></indexterm><literal>\rho</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C1; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<literal>\varrho</literal>&#160;&#x03F1;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Rightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Rightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21D2; Implies, right-pointing double line arrow
+(relation). Similar: right single-line arrow&#160;<literal>\rightarrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2192; Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+Synonym:&#160;<literal>\to</literal>. Similar: right double line
+arrow&#160;<literal>\Rightarrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightharpoondown</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightharpoondown</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21C1; Right-pointing harpoon with barb below
+the line (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightharpoonup</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightharpoonup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21C0; Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the
+line (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightleftharpoons</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightleftharpoons</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21CC; Right harpoon up above left harpoon down
+(relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\searrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\searrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2198; Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\setminus</primary></indexterm><literal>\setminus</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x29F5; Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash,
+like \ (binary). Similar: backslash&#160;<literal>\backslash</literal> and also
+<literal>\textbackslash</literal> outside of math mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sharp</primary></indexterm><literal>\sharp</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x266F; Musical sharp (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Sigma</primary></indexterm><literal>\Sigma</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03A3; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sigma</primary></indexterm><literal>\sigma</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C3; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<literal>\varsigma</literal>&#160;&#x03C2;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sim</primary></indexterm><literal>\sim</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x223C; Similar, in a relation (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\simeq</primary></indexterm><literal>\simeq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2243; Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallint</primary></indexterm><literal>\smallint</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x222B; Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a
+display (operator).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smile</primary></indexterm><literal>\smile</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2323; Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\spadesuit</primary></indexterm><literal>\spadesuit</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2660; Spade card suit (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqcap</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqcap</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2293; Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar:
+intersection&#160;<literal>cap</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqcup</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqcup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2294; Square union symbol (binary). Similar:
+union&#160;<literal>cup</literal>. Related: variable-sized
+operator&#160;<literal>\bigsqcup</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsubset</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsubset</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x228F; Square subset symbol (relation). Similar:
+subset&#160;<literal>\subset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsubseteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsubseteq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2291; Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or
+equal to&#160;<literal>\subseteq</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsupset</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsupset</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2290; Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
+superset&#160;<literal>\supset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsupseteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsupseteq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2292; Square superset or equal symbol (binary).
+Similar: superset or equal&#160;<literal>\supseteq</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\star</primary></indexterm><literal>\star</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22C6; Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary
+operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary).
+Similar: the synonyms asterisk&#160;<literal>*</literal> and <literal>\ast</literal>, which
+are six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript,
+as with the Kleene star.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subset</primary></indexterm><literal>\subset</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2282; Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subseteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\subseteq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2286; Subset or equal to (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\succ</primary></indexterm><literal>\succ</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x227B; Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less
+than&#160;<literal>&gt;</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\succeq</primary></indexterm><literal>\succeq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2AB0; Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less
+than or equal to&#160;<literal>\leq</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sum</primary></indexterm><literal>\sum</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2211; Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital
+sigma&#160;<literal>\Sigma</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\supset</primary></indexterm><literal>\supset</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2283; Superset (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\supseteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\supseteq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2287; Superset or equal to (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\surd</primary></indexterm><literal>\surd</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x221A; Radical symbol (ordinary). The &latex; command
+<literal>\sqrt{...}</literal> typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar
+that extends to cover the argument.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\swarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\swarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2199; Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tau</primary></indexterm><literal>\tau</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C4; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\theta</primary></indexterm><literal>\theta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B8; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<literal>\vartheta</literal>&#160;&#x03D1;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\times</primary></indexterm><literal>\times</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x00D7; Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See
+also&#160;<literal>\cdot</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\to</primary></indexterm><literal>\to</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2192; Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+Synonym:&#160;<literal>\rightarrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\top</primary></indexterm><literal>\top</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22A4; Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set
+(ordinary). See also&#160;<literal>\bot</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\triangle</primary></indexterm><literal>\triangle</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x25B3; Triangle (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\triangleleft</primary></indexterm><literal>\triangleleft</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x25C1; Not-filled triangle pointing left
+(binary). Similar:&#160;<literal>\lhd</literal>. For the normal subgroup symbol you
+should load <filename>amssymb</filename> and use&#160;<literal>\vartriangleleft</literal> (which
+is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\triangleright</primary></indexterm><literal>\triangleright</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x25B7; Not-filled triangle pointing right
+(binary). For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
+<filename>amssymb</filename> and use&#160;<literal>\vartriangleright</literal> (which is a
+relation and so gives better spacing).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unlhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\unlhd</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22B4; Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For the
+normal subgroup symbol load <filename>amssymb</filename> and
+use&#160;<literal>\vartrianglelefteq</literal> (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unrhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\unrhd</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22B5; Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package. For the
+normal subgroup symbol load <filename>amssymb</filename> and
+use&#160;<literal>\vartrianglerighteq</literal> (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Uparrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Uparrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21D1; Double-line upward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line up-pointing
+arrow&#160;<literal>\uparrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\uparrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\uparrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2191; Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges
+(relation). Similar: double-line up-pointing
+arrow&#160;<literal>\Uparrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Updownarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Updownarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21D5; Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+arrow&#160;<literal>\updownarrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\updownarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\updownarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2195; Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+arrow&#160;<literal>\Updownarrow</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\upharpoonright</primary></indexterm><literal>\upharpoonright</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x21BE; Up harpoon, with barb on right side
+(relation). Synonym:&#160;<literal>&#92;restriction</literal>.
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\uplus</primary></indexterm><literal>\uplus</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x228E; Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in
+the middle (binary). Similar: union&#160;<literal>\cup</literal>. Related:
+variable-sized operator&#160;<literal>\biguplus</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Upsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\Upsilon</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03A5; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\upsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\upsilon</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C5; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varepsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\varepsilon</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B5; Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is
+more widely used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
+<literal>\epsilon</literal>&#160;&#x03F5;. Related: set
+membership&#160;<literal>\in</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vanothing</primary></indexterm><literal>\vanothing</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2205; Empty set symbol. Similar: <literal>\emptyset</literal>. Related:
+<literal>\revemptyset</literal>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <filename>amssymb</filename> package.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varphi</primary></indexterm><literal>\varphi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C6; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <literal>\phi</literal>&#160;&#x03D5;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varpi</primary></indexterm><literal>\varpi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03D6; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <literal>\pi</literal>&#160;&#x03C0;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varrho</primary></indexterm><literal>\varrho</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03F1; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <literal>\rho</literal>&#160;&#x03C1;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varsigma</primary></indexterm><literal>\varsigma</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03C2; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+<literal>\sigma</literal>&#160;&#x03C3;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vartheta</primary></indexterm><literal>\vartheta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03D1; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+<literal>\theta</literal>&#160;&#x03B8;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vdash</primary></indexterm><literal>\vdash</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x22A2; Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash
+(relation). Similar: turnstile rotated a
+half-circle&#160;<literal>\dashv</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vee</primary></indexterm><literal>\vee</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2228; Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related:
+logical and&#160;<literal>\wedge</literal>. Similar: variable-sized
+operator&#160;<literal>\bigvee</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Vert</primary></indexterm><literal>\Vert</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2016; Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
+bar&#160;<literal>\vert</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>For a norm symbol, you can use the <filename>mathtools</filename> package and put in
+your preamble
+<literal>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}</literal>. This gives you
+three command variants for double-line vertical bars that are correctly
+horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred
+version <literal>$\norm*{M^\perp}$</literal> then the height of the vertical bars
+will match the height of the argument, whereas with
+<literal>\norm{M^\perp}</literal> the bars do not grow with the height of the
+argument but instead are the default height, and <literal>\norm[<replaceable>size
+command</replaceable>]{M^\perp}</literal> also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
+the size given in the <replaceable>size command</replaceable>, e.g., <literal>\Bigg</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vert</primary></indexterm><literal>\vert</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x007C; Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line
+vertical bar&#160;<literal>\Vert</literal>. For such that, as in the definition of a
+set, use&#160;<literal>\mid</literal> because it is a relation.
+</para>
+<para>For absolute value you can use the <filename>mathtools</filename> package and in your
+preamble put
+<literal>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}</literal>. This gives you
+three command variants for single-line vertical bars that are correctly
+horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred
+version <literal>$\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$</literal> then the height of the
+vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas with
+<literal>\abs{\frac{22}{7}}</literal> the bars do not grow with the height of
+the argument but instead are the default height, and
+<literal>\abs[<replaceable>size command</replaceable>]{\frac{22}{7}}</literal> also gives bars that
+do not grow but are set to the size given in the <replaceable>size command</replaceable>,
+e.g., <literal>\Bigg</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\wedge</primary></indexterm><literal>\wedge</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2227; Logical and (binary). Synonym:&#160;<literal>\land</literal>. See also
+logical or <literal>\vee</literal>. Similar: variable-sized
+operator&#160;<literal>\bigwedge</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\wp</primary></indexterm><literal>\wp</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2118; Weierstrass p (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\wr</primary></indexterm><literal>\wr</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x2240; Wreath product (binary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Xi</primary></indexterm><literal>\Xi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x039E; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\xi</primary></indexterm><literal>\xi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03BE; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\zeta</primary></indexterm><literal>\zeta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&#x03B6; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The following symbols are most often used in plain text but &latex;
+provides versions to use in mathematical text.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathdollar</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathdollar</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathparagraph</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathparagraph</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, &#x00B6;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathsection</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathsection</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Section sign in math mode &#x00A7;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathsterling</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathsterling</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Sterling sign in math mode: &#163;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathunderscore</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathunderscore</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Underscore in math mode: _.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+
+<sect2 label="16.2.1" id="Blackboard-bold">
+<title>Blackboard bold</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>blackboard bold</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>doublestruck</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{amssymb} % in preamble
+ ...
+\mathbb{<replaceable>uppercase-letter</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Provide blackboard bold symbols, sometimes also known as doublestruck
+letters, used to denote number sets such as the natural numbers, the
+integers, etc.
+</para>
+<para>Here
+</para>
+<screen>\( \forall n \in \mathbb{N}, n^2 \geq 0 \)
+</screen>
+<para>the <literal>\mathbb{N}</literal> gives blackboard bold symbol &#x2115;
+representing the natural numbers.
+</para>
+<para>If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an error
+but you get strange results, including unexpected characters.
+</para>
+<para>There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the
+capital letters; look on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.2.2" id="Calligraphic">
+<title>Calligraphic</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>calligraphic fonts</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>script fonts</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fonts, script</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\mathcal{<replaceable>uppercase-letters</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Use a script-like font.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the graph identifier is output in a cursive font.
+</para>
+<screen>Let the graph be \( \mathcal{G} \).
+</screen>
+<para>If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not get
+an error. Instead you get unexpected output. For instance,
+<literal>\mathcal{g}</literal> outputs a close curly brace symbol, while
+<literal>\mathcal{+}</literal> outputs a plus sign.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.2.3" id="_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">
+<title><literal>\boldmath</literal> &amp; <literal>\unboldmath</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>boldface mathematics</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>symbols, boldface</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\boldmath</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unboldmath</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode):
+</para>
+<screen>\boldmath \( <replaceable>math</replaceable> \)
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\unboldmath \( <replaceable>math</replaceable> \)
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\boldmath</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unboldmath</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Declarations to change the letters and symbols in <replaceable>math</replaceable> to be in
+a bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular
+(non-bold) default. They must be used when not in math mode or display
+math mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). Both commands are fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>In this example each <literal>\boldmath</literal> command takes place inside an
+<literal>\mbox</literal>,
+</para>
+<screen>we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
+</screen>
+<para>which means <literal>\boldmath</literal> is only called in a text mode, here LR
+mode, and explains why &latex; must switch to math mode to set <literal>v</literal>
+and <literal>u</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>If you use either command inside math mode, as with <literal>Trouble: \(
+\boldmath x \)</literal>, then you get something like &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Font Warning:
+Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11</literal>&#8217; and &#8216;<literal>LaTeX
+Font Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line
+11</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>bm</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>bm</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are many issues with <literal>\boldmath</literal>. New documents should use
+the <filename>bm</filename> package provided by the &latex; Project team. A complete
+description is outside the scope of this document (see the full
+documentation on CTAN) but even this small example
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{bm} % in preamble
+...
+we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
+</screen>
+<para>shows that it is an improvement over <literal>\boldmath</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.2.4" id="Dots">
+<title>Dots, horizontal or vertical</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ellipses</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dots</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern
+continues.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{array}{cccc}
+ a_{0,0} &amp;a_{0,1} &amp;a_{0,2} &amp;\ldots \\
+ a_{1,0} &amp;\ddots \\
+ \vdots
+\end{array}
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; provides these.
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="ellipses-cdots"/><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cdots</primary></indexterm><literal>\cdots</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line, as
+in &#x22EF;. Used as: <literal>\( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1}
+\)</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="ellipses-ddots"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ddots</primary></indexterm><literal>\ddots</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Diagonal ellipsis, &#x22F1;. See the above array example for a
+usage.
+</para>
+<anchor id="ellipses-ldots"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ldots</primary></indexterm><literal>\ldots</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Ellipsis on the baseline, &#x2026;. Used as: <literal>\(
+x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \)</literal>. Another example is the above array example. A
+synonym is <literal>\mathellipsis</literal>. A synonym from the <filename>amsmath</filename>
+package is <literal>\hdots</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in
+<literal>The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken</literal>. (In a paragraph
+mode or LR mode a synonym for <literal>\ldots</literal> is <literal>\dots</literal>.)
+</para>
+<anchor id="ellipses-vdots"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vdots</primary></indexterm><literal>\vdots</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Vertical ellipsis, &#x22EE;. See the above array example for a
+usage.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The <filename>amsmath</filename> package has the command <literal>\dots</literal> to semantically
+mark up ellipses. This example produces two different-looking outputs
+for the first two uses of the <literal>\dots</literal> command.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble
+ ...
+Suppose that \( p_0, p_1, \dots, p_{n-1} \) lists all of the primes.
+Observe that \( p_0\cdot p_1 \dots \cdot p_{n-1} +1 \) is not a
+ multiple of any \( p_i \).
+Conclusion: there are infinitely many primes \( p_0, p_1, \dotsc \).
+</screen>
+<para>In the first line &latex; looks to the comma following <literal>\dots</literal> to
+determine that it should output an ellipsis on the baseline. The second
+line has a <literal>\cdot</literal> following <literal>\dots</literal> so &latex; outputs an
+ellipsis that is on the math axis, vertically centered. However, the
+third usage has no follow-on character so you have to tell &latex; what
+to do. You can use one of the commands: <literal>\dotsc</literal> if you need the
+ellipsis appropriate for a comma following, <literal>\dotsb</literal> if you need
+the ellipses that fits when the dots are followed by a binary operator
+or relation symbol, <literal>\dotsi</literal> for dots with integrals, or
+<literal>\dotso</literal> for others.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="16.3" id="Math-functions">
+<title>Math functions</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math functions</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>functions, math</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper
+spacing.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arccos</primary></indexterm><literal>\arccos</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Inverse cosine
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arcsin</primary></indexterm><literal>\arcsin</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Inverse sine
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arctan</primary></indexterm><literal>\arctan</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Inverse tangent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arg</primary></indexterm><literal>\arg</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Angle between the real axis and a point in the complex plane
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bmod</primary></indexterm><literal>\bmod</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Binary modulo operator, used as in <literal>\( 5\bmod 3=2 \)</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cos</primary></indexterm><literal>\cos</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Cosine
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cosh</primary></indexterm><literal>\cosh</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Hyperbolic cosine
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cot</primary></indexterm><literal>\cot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Cotangent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\coth</primary></indexterm><literal>\coth</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Hyperbolic cotangent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\csc</primary></indexterm><literal>\csc</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Cosecant
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\deg</primary></indexterm><literal>\deg</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Degrees
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\det</primary></indexterm><literal>\det</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Determinant
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dim</primary></indexterm><literal>\dim</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Dimension
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\exp</primary></indexterm><literal>\exp</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Exponential
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\gcd</primary></indexterm><literal>\gcd</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Greatest common divisor
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hom</primary></indexterm><literal>\hom</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Homomorphism
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\inf</primary></indexterm><literal>\inf</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Infinum
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ker</primary></indexterm><literal>\ker</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Kernel
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lg</primary></indexterm><literal>\lg</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Base 2 logarithm
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lim</primary></indexterm><literal>\lim</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Limit
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\liminf</primary></indexterm><literal>\liminf</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Limit inferior
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\limsup</primary></indexterm><literal>\limsup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Limit superior
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ln</primary></indexterm><literal>\ln</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Natural logarithm
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\log</primary></indexterm><literal>\log</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Logarithm
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\max</primary></indexterm><literal>\max</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Maximum
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\min</primary></indexterm><literal>\min</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Minimum
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pmod</primary></indexterm><literal>\pmod</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Parenthesized modulus, as used in <literal>\( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \)</literal>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Pr</primary></indexterm><literal>\Pr</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Probability
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sec</primary></indexterm><literal>\sec</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Secant
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sin</primary></indexterm><literal>\sin</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Sine
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sinh</primary></indexterm><literal>\sinh</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Hyperbolic sine
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sup</primary></indexterm><literal>\sup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>sup
+<!-- don't try to use \sup with dvi/pdf output since that turned into a -->
+<!-- Texinfo command and it's not worth hassling with different versions -->
+<!-- when it's just three roman letters anyway. -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tan</primary></indexterm><literal>\tan</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Tangent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tanh</primary></indexterm><literal>\tanh</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Hyperbolic tangent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The <filename>amsmath</filename> package adds improvements on some of these, and also
+allows you to define your own. The full documentation is on CTAN, but
+briefly, you can define an identity operator with
+<literal>\DeclareMathOperator{\identity}{id}</literal> that is like the ones
+above but prints as &#8216;<literal>id</literal>&#8217;. The starred form
+<literal>\DeclareMathOperator*{\op}{op}</literal> sets any limits above and
+below, as is traditional with <literal>\lim</literal>, <literal>\sup</literal>, or <literal>\max</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="16.4" id="Math-accents">
+<title>Math accents</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math accents</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>accents, mathematical</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters
+in math. These are different from accents in normal text
+(see <link linkend="Accents">Accents</link>).
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\acute</primary></indexterm><literal>\acute</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>acute accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Math acute accent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bar</primary></indexterm><literal>\bar</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>bar-over accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>macron accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Math bar-over accent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\breve</primary></indexterm><literal>\breve</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>breve accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Math breve accent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\check</primary></indexterm><literal>\check</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>check accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>h&#225;&#269;ek accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Math h&#225;&#269;ek (check) accent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ddot</primary></indexterm><literal>\ddot</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>double dot accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Math dieresis accent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dot</primary></indexterm><literal>\dot</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>overdot accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dot over accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Math dot accent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\grave</primary></indexterm><literal>\grave</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>grave accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Math grave accent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hat</primary></indexterm><literal>\hat</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>hat accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>circumflex accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Math hat (circumflex) accent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathring</primary></indexterm><literal>\mathring</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>ring accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Math ring accent <!-- don't bother implementing in texinfo -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tilde</primary></indexterm><literal>\tilde</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>tilde accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Math tilde accent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vec</primary></indexterm><literal>\vec</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>vector symbol, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Math vector symbol
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\widehat</primary></indexterm><literal>\widehat</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>wide hat accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Math wide hat accent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\widetilde</primary></indexterm><literal>\widetilde</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>wide tilde accent, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Math wide tilde accent
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>When you are putting an accent on an i or a j, the tradition is to use
+one without a dot, <literal>\imath</literal> or <literal>jmath</literal> (see <link linkend="Math-symbols">Math symbols</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="16.5" id="Over_002d-and-Underlining">
+<title>Over- and Underlining</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>overlining</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>underlining</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or
+putting braces over or under some material.
+</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\underline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Underline <replaceable>text</replaceable>. Works inside math mode, and outside.
+The line is always completely below the text, taking account of
+descenders, so in <literal>\(\underline{y}\)</literal> the line is lower than in
+<literal>\(\underline{x}\)</literal>. This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>ulem</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>ulem</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Note that the package <filename>ulem</filename> does text mode underlining and allows
+line breaking as well as a number of other features. See the
+documentation on CTAN. See also&#160;<link linkend="_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill">\hrulefill &amp; \dotfill</link> for
+producing a line, for such things as a signature.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\overline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\overline{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put a horizontal line over <replaceable>text</replaceable>. Works inside math mode, and
+outside. For example, <literal>\overline{x+y}</literal>.
+Note that this differs from the command <literal>\bar</literal> (see <link linkend="Math-accents">Math
+accents</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\underbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put a brace under <replaceable>math</replaceable>. For example, this
+<literal>(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3)</literal> emphasizes the telescoping part.
+Attach text to the brace by using subscript, <literal>_</literal>, or superscript,
+<literal>^</literal>, as here.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{displaymath}
+ 1+1/2+\underbrace{1/3+1/4}_{&gt;1/2}+
+ \underbrace{1/5+1/6+1/7+1/8}_{&gt;1/2}+\cdots
+\end{displaymath}
+</screen>
+<para>The superscript appears on top of the expression, and so can look
+unconnected to the underbrace.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\overbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\overbrace{<replaceable>math</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put a brace over <replaceable>math</replaceable>, as with
+<literal>\overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}</literal>. See also
+<literal>\underbrace</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>mathtools</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>mathtools</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The package <filename>mathtools</filename> adds an over- and underbrace, as well as
+some improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="16.6" id="Spacing-in-math-mode">
+<title>Spacing in math mode</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>spacing within math mode</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math mode, spacing</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>When typesetting mathematics, &latex; puts in spacing according to the
+normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter <literal>y=m x</literal> then
+&latex; ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x,
+as <inlineequation><mathphrase>y=mx</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+<para>But &latex;&#8217;s rules sometimes need tweaking. For example, in an
+integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the
+<literal>f(x)</literal> and the <literal>dx</literal>, here done with the <literal>\,</literal> command.
+</para>
+<screen>\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; provides the commands that follow for use in math mode. Many
+of these spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
+<firstterm>mu</firstterm>. It is defined as 1/18em, where the em is taken from the
+current math symbols family (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of length</link>). Thus, a
+<literal>\thickspace</literal> is something like 5/18 times the width of
+a&#160;&#8216;<literal>M</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\;</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thickspace</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-thickspace"/><para>Synonym: <literal>\thickspace</literal>. Normally <literal>5.0mu plus 5.0mu</literal>. Math
+mode only.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\:</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\&gt;</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\:</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\&gt;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medspace</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-medspace"/><para>Synonym: <literal>\medspace</literal>. Normally <literal>4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu</literal>.
+Math mode only.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\,</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\,</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thinspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>thin space</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="Spacing-in-math-mode_002f_005cthinspace"/><anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-thinspace"/><para>Synonym: <literal>\thinspace</literal>. Normally <literal>3mu</literal>, which is 1/6em.
+Can be used in both math mode and text mode (see <link linkend="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace &amp;
+\negthinspace</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This space is widely used, for instance between the function and the
+infinitesimal in an integral <literal>\int f(x)\,dx</literal> and, if an author does
+this, before punctuation in a displayed equation.
+</para>
+<screen>The antiderivative is
+\begin{equation}
+ 3x^{-1/2}+3^{1/2}\,.
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\!</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\!</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\negthinspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>thin space, negative</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-negthinspace"/><para>A negative thin space. Normally <literal>-3mu</literal>. The <literal>\!</literal> command is
+math mode only but the <literal>\negthinspace</literal> command is available for
+text mode (see <link linkend="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\quad</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>quad</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\quad</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-quad"/><para>This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space
+surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space between
+two equations inside a <literal>displaymath</literal> environment. It is available
+in both text and math mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\qquad</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\qquad</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="spacing-in-math-mode-qquad"/><para>A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em. It is available in
+both text and math mode.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+
+<sect2 label="16.6.1" id="_005csmash">
+<title><literal>\smash</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical spacing, math mode</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math mode, vertical space</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\smash{<replaceable>subformula</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Typeset <replaceable>subformula</replaceable> as if its height and depth were zero.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the exponential is so tall that without the
+<literal>\smash</literal> command &latex; would separate its line from the line
+above it, and the uneven line spacing might be unsightly.
+</para>
+<screen>To compute the tetration $\smash{2^{2^{2^2}}}$,
+evaluate from the top down, as $2^{2^4}=2^{16}=65536$.
+</screen>
+<para>(Because of the <literal>\smash</literal> the printed expression could run into the
+line above so you may want to wait until the final version of the
+document to make such adjustments.)
+</para>
+<para>This pictures the effect of <literal>\smash</literal> by using <literal>\fbox</literal> to
+surround the box that &latex; will put on the line. The
+<literal>\blackbar</literal> command makes a bar extending from 10&#160;points below
+the baseline to 20&#160;points above.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\blackbar}{\rule[-10pt]{5pt}{30pt}}
+\fbox{\blackbar}
+\fbox{\smash{\blackbar}}
+</screen>
+<para>The first box that &latex; places is 20&#160;points high and
+10&#160;points deep. But the second box is treated by &latex; as
+having zero height and zero depth, despite that the ink printed on the
+page still extends well above and below the line.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\smash</literal> command appears often in mathematics to adjust the
+size of an element that surrounds a subformula. Here the first radical
+extends below the baseline while the second lies just on the baseline.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+\sqrt{\sum_{0\leq k&lt; n} f(k)}
+\sqrt{\vphantom{\sum}\smash{\sum_{0\leq k&lt; n}} f(k)}
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<para>Note the use of <literal>\vphantom</literal> to give the <literal>\sqrt</literal> command an
+argument with the height of the <literal>\sum</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">\phantom &amp; \vphantom
+&amp; \hphantom</link>).
+</para>
+<para>While most often used in mathematics, the <literal>\smash</literal> command can
+appear in other contexts. However, it doesn&#8217;t change into horizontal
+mode. So if it starts a paragraph then you should first put a
+<literal>\leavevmode</literal>, as in the bottom line below.
+</para>
+<screen>xxx xxx xxx
+
+\smash{yyy} % no paragraph indent
+
+\leavevmode\smash{zzz} % usual paragraph indent
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>mathtools</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>mathtools</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The package <literal>mathtools</literal> has operators that provide even finer
+control over smashing a subformula box.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.6.2" id="_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">
+<title><literal>\phantom</literal> &amp; <literal>\vphantom</literal> &amp; <literal>\hphantom</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>spacing, math mode</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>horizontal spacing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical spacing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math mode, spacing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>invisible character</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>character, invisible</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\phantom{<replaceable>subformula</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\vphantom{<replaceable>subformula</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\hphantom{<replaceable>subformula</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\phantom</literal> command creates a box with the same height, depth,
+and width as <replaceable>subformula</replaceable>, but empty. That is, this command causes
+&latex; to typeset the box but not its ink. The <literal>\vphantom</literal>
+variant also produces an invisible box with the same height and depth as
+<replaceable>subformula</replaceable>, but it has width zero. And <literal>\hphantom</literal> makes a
+box with the same width as <replaceable>subformula</replaceable> but with height and depth
+zero.
+</para>
+<para>Without the <literal>\vphantom</literal> in this example, the top bars of the two
+square roots would be at different heights.
+</para>
+<screen>\( \sqrt{\vphantom{a^3}a}\cdot\sqrt{a^3} \)
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\vphantom{a^3}</literal> causes the first <literal>\sqrt</literal> to have inside
+it a box of the same height as the second <literal>\sqrt</literal>, so &latex;
+makes the bars align.
+</para>
+<para>These commands often are combined with <literal>\smash</literal>. See <link linkend="_005csmash">\smash</link>
+for another example of the use of <literal>\vphantom</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>mathtools</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>mathtools</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The three phantom commands appear often but note that &latex; provides
+a suite of other commands to work with box sizes that may be more
+convenient, including <literal>\makebox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</link>) as well
+as <literal>\settodepth</literal> (see <link linkend="_005csettodepth">\settodepth</link>), <literal>\settoheight</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005csettoheight">\settoheight</link>), and <literal>\settowidth</literal> (see <link linkend="_005csettowidth">\settowidth</link>).
+In addition, the <filename>mathtools</filename> package has many commands that offer
+fine-grained control over spacing.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>All three commands produce an ordinary box, without any special
+mathematics status. So to do something like attaching a superscript you
+should give it such a status, for example with the <literal>\operatorname</literal>
+command from the package <filename>amsmath</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>While most often used in mathematics, these three can appear in other
+contexts. However, they don&#8217;t cause &latex; to change into horizontal
+mode. So if one of these starts a paragraph then you should prefix it
+with <literal>\leavevmode</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="16.7" id="Math-miscellany">
+<title>Math miscellany</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>math miscellany</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities. Here are
+some that don&#8217;t fit into other categories.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="16.7.1" id="Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">
+<title>Colon character <literal>:</literal> &amp; <literal>\colon</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>:</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>colon character</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>:</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\colon</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>:
+\colon
+</screen>
+<para>In mathematics, the colon character, <literal>:</literal>, is a relation.
+</para>
+<screen>With side ratios \( 3:4 \) and \( 4:5 \), the triangle is right.
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Ordinary &latex; defines <literal>\colon</literal> to produce the colon character
+with the spacing appropriate for punctuation, as in set-builder notation
+<literal>\{x\colon 0\leq x&lt;1\}</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsmath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsmath</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>But the widely-used <filename>amsmath</filename> package defines <literal>\colon</literal> for use
+in the definition of functions <literal>f\colon D\to C</literal>. So if you want
+the colon character as a punctuation then use <literal>\mathpunct{:}</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.7.2" id="_005c_002a">
+<title><literal>\*</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>multiplication, discretionary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>breaks, multiplication discretionary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>line breaks, multiplication discretionary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>discretionary breaks, multiplication</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\*</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\*
+</screen>
+<para>A multiplication symbol that allows a line break. If there is a break
+then &latex; puts a <literal>\times</literal> symbol, &#x00D7;, before
+that break.
+</para>
+<para>In <literal>\( A_1\* A_2\* A_3\* A_4 \)</literal>, if there is no line break then
+&latex; outputs it as though it were <literal>\( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \)</literal>. If
+a line break does happen, for example between the two middle ones, then
+&latex; sets it like <literal>\( A_1 A_2 \times \)</literal>, followed by the
+break, followed by <literal>\( A_3 A_4 \)</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.7.3" id="_005cfrac">
+<title><literal>\frac</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fraction</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frac</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\frac{<replaceable>numerator</replaceable>}{<replaceable>denominator</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Produces the fraction. Used as: <literal>\begin{displaymath}
+\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi\sigma}} \end{displaymath}</literal>. In inline math
+mode it comes out small; see the discussion of <literal>\displaystyle</literal>
+(see <link linkend="Math-formulas">Math formulas</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.7.4" id="_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">
+<title><literal>\left</literal> &amp; <literal>\right</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>delimiters, paired</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paired delimiters</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>matching parentheses</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>matching brackets</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>null delimiter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\left</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\right</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\left <replaceable>delimiter1</replaceable> ... \right <replaceable>delimiter2</replaceable>
+</screen>
+<para>Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. The delimiters
+are sized according to the math they enclose. This makes a unit vector
+surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+ \left(\begin{array}{c}
+ 1 \\
+ 0 \\
+ \end{array}\right)
+</screen>
+<para>Every <literal>\left</literal> must have a matching <literal>\right</literal>. Leaving out the
+<literal>\left(</literal> in the above gets &#8216;<literal>Extra \right</literal>&#8217;. Leaving off the
+<literal>\right)</literal> gets &#8216;<literal>You can't use `\eqno' in math mode</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>However, the two delimiters <replaceable>delimiter1</replaceable> and <replaceable>delimiter2</replaceable> need
+not match. A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as
+below. Use a period, &#8216;<literal>.</literal>&#8217;, as a null delimiter.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+ f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
+ 1 &amp;\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\
+ f(n-1)+3n^2 &amp;\mbox{--else}
+ \end{array}\right.
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<para>Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
+backslash, <literal>\{</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.7.5" id="_005csqrt">
+<title><literal>\sqrt</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>square root</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>roots</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>radical</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqrt</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\sqrt{<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}
+\sqrt[<replaceable>root-number</replaceable>]{<replaceable>arg</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>The square root, or optionally other roots, of <replaceable>arg</replaceable>. The optional
+argument <replaceable>root-number</replaceable> gives the root, i.e., enter the cube root of
+<literal>x+y</literal> as <literal>\sqrt[3]{x+y}</literal>.
+The radical grows with the size of <replaceable>arg</replaceable> (as the height of the
+radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets steeper, until for
+a large enough <literal>arg</literal>, it is vertical).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; has a separate <literal>\surd</literal> character (see <link linkend="Math-symbols">Math symbols</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="16.7.6" id="_005cstackrel">
+<title><literal>\stackrel</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>stack math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>relation, text above</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\stackrel</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\stackrel{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>relation</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Put <replaceable>text</replaceable> above <replaceable>relation</replaceable>. To put a function name above an
+arrow enter <literal>\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="17" id="Modes">
+<title>Modes</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>modes</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>As &latex; processes your document, at any point it is in one of six
+modes. They fall into three categories of two each, the horizontal
+modes, the math modes, and the vertical modes. Some commands only work
+in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of
+the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.
+</para>
+<itemizedlist><listitem><anchor id="modes-paragraph-mode"/><indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph mode</primary></indexterm>
+<para><firstterm>Paragraph mode</firstterm> is what &latex; is in when processing ordinary
+text. It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into
+pages. This is the mode &latex; is in most of the time.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>left-to-right mode</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>LR mode</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="modes-lr-mode"/><para><firstterm>LR mode</firstterm> (for left-to-right mode; in plain &tex; this is called
+<firstterm>restricted horizontal mode</firstterm>) is in effect when &latex; starts
+making a box with an <literal>\mbox</literal> command. As in paragraph mode,
+&latex;&#8217;s output is a string of words with spaces between them. Unlike
+in paragraph mode, in LR mode &latex; never starts a new line, it just
+keeps going from left to right. (Although &latex; will not complain
+that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to put
+that box into a line, it could very well complain that the finished LR
+box won&#8217;t fit there.)
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>math mode</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="modes-math-mode"/><para><firstterm>Math mode</firstterm> is when &latex; is generating
+an inline mathematical formula.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>display math mode</primary></indexterm>
+<para><firstterm>Display math mode</firstterm> is when &latex; is generating a displayed
+mathematical formula. (Displayed formulas differ somewhat from inline
+ones. One example is that the placement of the subscript on <literal>\int</literal>
+differs in the two situations.)
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical mode</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="modes-vertical-mode"/><para><firstterm>Vertical mode</firstterm> is when &latex; is building the list of lines and
+other material making the output page. This is the mode &latex; is in
+when it starts a document.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>internal vertical mode</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="modes-internal-vertical-mode"/><para><firstterm>Internal vertical mode</firstterm> is in effect when &latex; starts making a
+<literal>\vbox</literal>. This is the vertical analogue of LR mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></itemizedlist>
+<para>For instance, if you begin a &latex; article with &#8216;<literal>Let \( x \) be
+...</literal>&#8217; then these are the modes: first &latex; starts every document in
+vertical mode, then it reads the &#8216;<literal>L</literal>&#8217; and switches to paragraph
+mode, then the next switch happens at the &#8216;<literal>\(</literal>&#8217; where &latex;
+changes to math mode, and then when it leaves the formula it pops
+back to paragraph mode.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>inner paragraph mode</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>outer paragraph mode</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="modes-inner-paragraph-mode"/><anchor id="modes-outer-paragraph-mode"/><para>Paragraph mode has two subcases. If you use a <literal>\parbox</literal> command
+or a <literal>minipage</literal> then &latex; is put into paragraph mode. But it
+will not put a page break here. Inside one of these boxes, called a
+<firstterm>parbox</firstterm>, &latex; is in <firstterm>inner paragraph mode</firstterm>. Its more usual
+situation, where it can put page breaks, is <firstterm>outer paragraph mode</firstterm>
+(see <link linkend="Page-breaking">Page breaking</link>).
+</para>
+
+<sect1 label="17.1" id="_005censuremath">
+<title><literal>\ensuremath</literal></title>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\ensuremath{<replaceable>formula</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Ensure that <replaceable>formula</replaceable> is typeset in math mode.
+</para>
+<para>For instance, you can redefine commands that ordinarily can be used only
+in math mode, so that they can be used both in math and in plain text.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\dx}{\ensuremath{dx}}
+In $\int f(x)\, \dx$, the \dx{} is an infinitesimal.
+</screen>
+<para>Caution: the <literal>\ensuremath</literal> command is useful but not a panacea.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\alf}{\ensuremath{\alpha}}
+You get an alpha in text mode: \alf.
+But compare the correct spacing in $\alf+\alf$ with that in \alf+\alf.
+</screen>
+<para>Best is to typeset math things in a math mode.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="18" id="Page-styles">
+<title>Page styles</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>styles, page</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>page styles</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The style of a page determines where &latex; places the components of
+that page, such as headers and footers, and the text body. This
+includes pages in the main part of the document but also includes
+special pages such as the title page of a book, a page from an index, or
+the first page of an article.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>fancyhdr</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>fancyhdr</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The package <filename>fancyhdr</filename> is very helpful for constructing page
+styles. See its documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="18.1" id="_005cmaketitle">
+<title><literal>\maketitle</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>titles, making</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\maketitle</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\maketitle
+</screen>
+<para>Generate a title. In the standard classes the title appears on a
+separate page, except in the <literal>article</literal> class where it is at the top
+of the first page. (See <link linkend="Document-class-options">Document class options</link> for information about
+the <literal>titlepage</literal> document class option.)
+</para>
+<para>This example shows <literal>\maketitle</literal> appearing in its usual place,
+immediately after <literal>\begin{document}</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\title{Constructing a Nuclear Reactor Using Only Coconuts}
+\author{Jonas Grumby\thanks{%
+ With the support of a Ginger Grant from the Roy Hinkley Society.} \\
+ Skipper, \textit{Minnow}
+ \and
+ Willy Gilligan\thanks{%
+ Thanks to the Mary Ann Summers foundation
+ and to Thurston and Lovey Howell.} \\
+ Mate, \textit{Minnow}
+ }
+\date{1964-Sep-26}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+Just sit right back and you'll hear a tale, a tale of a fateful trip.
+That started from this tropic port, aboard this tiny ship. The mate was
+a mighty sailin' man, the Skipper brave and sure. Five passengers set
+sail that day for a three hour tour. A three hour tour.
+ ...
+</screen>
+<para>You tell &latex; the information used to produce the title by making
+the following declarations. These must come before the
+<literal>\maketitle</literal>, either in the preamble or in the document body.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\author{<replaceable>name1</replaceable> \and <replaceable>name2</replaceable> \and ...}</primary></indexterm><literal>\author{<replaceable>name1</replaceable> \and <replaceable>name2</replaceable> \and ...}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>author, for titlepage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>\author</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\and for <literal>\author</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>Required. Declare the document author or authors. The argument is a
+list of authors separated by <literal>\and</literal> commands. To separate lines
+within a single author&#8217;s entry, for instance to give the author&#8217;s
+institution or address, use a double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>. If you omit
+the <literal>\author</literal> declaration then you get &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Warning: No
+\author given</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\date{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\date{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>date, for titlepage</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Optional. Declare <replaceable>text</replaceable> to be the document&#8217;s date. The <replaceable>text</replaceable>
+doesn&#8217;t need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all. If you
+omit <literal>\date</literal> then &latex; uses the current date (see <link linkend="_005ctoday">\today</link>).
+To have no date, instead use <literal>\date{}</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thanks{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\thanks{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>thanks, for titlepage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>credit footnote</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Optional. Produce a footnote. You can use it in the author information
+for acknowledgements as illustrated above, but you can also use it in
+the title, or any place a footnote makes sense. It can be any text at
+all so you can use it for any purpose, such as to print an email
+address.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\title{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\title{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>title, for titlepage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for <literal>\title</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>Required. Declare <replaceable>text</replaceable> to be the title of the document. Get line
+breaks inside <replaceable>text</replaceable> with a double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>. If you
+omit the <literal>\title</literal> declaration then you get &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: No
+\title given</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>To make your own title page, see&#160;<link linkend="titlepage">titlepage</link>. You can either
+create this as a one-off or you can include it as part of a renewed
+<literal>\maketitle</literal> command. (Many publishers will provide a class to use
+in place of <literal>article</literal> that formats the title according to their
+house requirements.)
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="18.2" id="_005cpagenumbering">
+<title><literal>\pagenumbering</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pagenumbering</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>page numbering style</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\pagenumbering{<replaceable>number-style</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Specifies the style of page numbers, and resets the page number. The
+numbering style is reflected on the page, and also in the table of
+contents and other page references. This declaration has global scope
+so its effect is not delimited by braces or environments.
+</para>
+<para>In this example, before the Main section the pages are numbered
+&#8216;<literal>a</literal>&#8217;, etc. Starting on the page containing that section, the pages
+are numbered &#8216;<literal>1</literal>&#8217;, etc.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{document}\pagenumbering{alph}
+ ...
+\section{Main}\pagenumbering{arabic}
+ ...
+</screen>
+<para>The argument <replaceable>number-style</replaceable> is one of the following (see
+also&#160;<link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</link>).
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>arabic</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Arabic numerals: 1, 2, &#8230;
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>roman</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>lowercase Roman numerals: i, ii, &#8230;
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>Roman</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>uppercase Roman numerals: I, II, &#8230;
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>alph</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>lowercase letters: a, b, &#8230; If you have more than 26 pages then you
+get &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: Counter too large</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>Alph</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>uppercase letters: A, B, &#8230; If you have more than 26 pages then you
+get &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: Counter too large</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>gobble</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>hyperref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>hyperref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&latex; does not output a page number, although it
+does get reset. References to that page also are blank. (This does not
+work with the popular package <filename>hyperref</filename> so to have the page number
+not appear you may want to instead use <literal>\pagestyle{empty}</literal> or
+<literal>\thispagestyle{empty}</literal>.)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Traditionally, if a document has front matter&#8212;preface, table of
+contents, etc.&#8212;then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. The
+main matter of a document uses arabic. See <link linkend="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter
+&amp; \backmatter</link>.
+</para>
+<para>If you want to address where the page number appears on the page,
+see&#160;<link linkend="_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</link>. If you want to change the value of page
+number then you will manipulate the <literal>page</literal> counter
+(see <link linkend="Counters">Counters</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="18.3" id="_005cpagestyle">
+<title><literal>\pagestyle</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pagestyle</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>header style</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footer style</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>running header and footer style</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\pagestyle{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Declaration that specifies how the page headers and footers are typeset,
+from the current page onwards.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>fancyhdr</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>fancyhdr</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A discussion with an example is below. Note first that the package
+<filename>fancyhdr</filename> is now the standard way to manipulate headers and
+footers. New documents that need to do anything other than one of the
+standard options below should use this package. See its documentation
+on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>Values for <replaceable>style</replaceable>:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>plain</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>The header is empty. The footer contains only a page number, centered.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>empty</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>The header and footer is empty.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>headings</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put running headers and footers on each page. The document style
+specifies what goes in there; see the discussion below.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>myheadings</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Custom headers, specified via the <literal>\markboth</literal> or the
+<literal>\markright</literal> commands.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Some discussion of the motivation for &latex;&#8217;s mechanism will help you
+work with the options <literal>headings</literal> or <literal>myheadings</literal>. The
+document source below produces an article, two-sided, with the pagestyle
+<literal>headings</literal>. On this document&#8217;s left hand pages, &latex; wants (in
+addition to the page number) the title of the current section. On its
+right hand pages &latex; wants the title of the current subsection.
+When it makes up a page, &latex; gets this information from the
+commands <literal>\leftmark</literal> and <literal>\rightmark</literal>. So it is up to
+<literal>\section</literal> and <literal>\subsection</literal> to store that information there.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass[twoside]{article}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+\begin{document}
+ ... \section{Section 1} ... \subsection{Subsection 1.1} ...
+\section{Section 2}
+ ...
+\subsection{Subsection 2.1}
+ ...
+\subsection{Subsection 2.2}
+ ...
+</screen>
+<para>Suppose that the second section falls on a left page. Although when the
+page starts it is in the first section, &latex; will put
+&#8216;<literal>Section&#160;2</literal>&#8217; in the left page header. As to the right header,
+if no subsection starts before the end of the right page then &latex;
+blanks the right hand header. If a subsection does appear before the
+right page finishes then there are two cases. If at least one
+subsection starts on the right hand page then &latex; will put in the
+right header the title of the first subsection starting on that right
+page. If at least one of 2.1, 2.2, &#8230;, starts on the left page but
+none starts on the right then &latex; puts in the right hand header the
+title of the last subsection to start, that is, the one in effect during
+the right hand page.
+</para>
+<para>To accomplish this, in a two-sided article, &latex; has <literal>\section</literal>
+issue a command <literal>\markboth</literal>, setting <literal>\leftmark</literal>
+to &#8216;<literal>Section&#160;2</literal>&#8217; and setting <literal>\rightmark</literal> to blank.
+And, &latex; has <literal>\subsection</literal> issue a command <literal>\markright</literal>,
+setting <literal>\rightmark</literal> to &#8216;<literal>Subsection&#160;2.1</literal>&#8217;, etc.
+</para>
+<para>Here are the descriptions of <literal>\markboth</literal> and <literal>\markright</literal>:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\markboth{<replaceable>left-head</replaceable>}{<replaceable>right-head</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\markboth{<replaceable>left-head</replaceable>}{<replaceable>right-head</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Sets both the right hand and left hand heading information for either a
+page style of <literal>headings</literal> or <literal>myheadings</literal>. A left hand page
+heading <replaceable>left-head</replaceable> is generated by the last <literal>\markboth</literal>
+command before the end of the page. A right hand page heading
+<replaceable>right-head</replaceable> is generated by the first <literal>\markboth</literal> or
+<literal>\markright</literal> that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by
+the last one that came before that page.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\markright{<replaceable>right</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\markright{<replaceable>right</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="18.4" id="_005cthispagestyle">
+<title><literal>\thispagestyle</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thispagestyle</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>page style, this page</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\thispagestyle{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Works in the same way as the <literal>\pagestyle</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</link>),
+except that it changes to <replaceable>style</replaceable> for the current page only. This
+declaration has global scope, so its effect is not delimited by braces
+or environments.
+</para>
+<para>Often the first page of a chapter or section has a different style. For
+example, this &latex; book document has the first page of the first
+chapter in <literal>plain</literal> style, as is the default (see <link linkend="Page-styles">Page
+styles</link>).
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+\begin{document}
+\chapter{First chapter}
+ ...
+\chapter{Second chapter}\thispagestyle{empty}
+ ...
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>plain</literal> style has a page number on it, centered in the footer.
+To make the page entirely empty, the command
+<literal>\thispagestyle{empty}</literal> immediately follows the second
+<literal>\chapter</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="19" id="Spaces">
+<title>Spaces</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>spaces</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>white space</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. Some of
+these are best suited to mathematical text; see&#160;<link linkend="Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in
+math mode</link>. Some spacing commands are suitable for both regular text
+and mathematical text; versions of some of these commands are in this
+chapter.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="19.1" id="_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad">
+<title><literal>\enspace</literal> &amp; <literal>\quad</literal> &amp; <literal>\qquad</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\quad</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\qquad</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\enspace
+\quad
+\qquad
+</screen>
+<para>Insert a horizontal space of 1/2em, 1em, or 2em. The
+em is a length defined by a font designer, often thought of as being the
+width of a capital&#160;M. One advantage of describing space in ems is
+that it can be more portable across documents than an absolute
+measurement such as points (see <link linkend="Lengths_002fem">Lengths/em</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This puts a suitable gap between two graphics.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{womensmile.png}%
+ \qquad\includegraphics{mensmile.png}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>See <link linkend="Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</link> for <literal>\quad</literal> and <literal>\qquad</literal>. These
+are lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice
+in many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with
+<literal>\hspace</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.2" id="_005chspace">
+<title><literal>\hspace</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hspace</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\hspace{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}
+\hspace*{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Insert the horizontal space <replaceable>length</replaceable>. The <replaceable>length</replaceable> can be
+positive, negative, or zero; adding negative space is like backspacing.
+It is a rubber length, that is, it may contain a <literal>plus</literal> or
+<literal>minus</literal> component, or both (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). Because the space is
+stretchable and shrinkable, it is sometimes called <firstterm>glue</firstterm>.
+</para>
+<para>This makes a line with &#8216;<literal>Name:</literal>&#8217; an inch from the right margin.
+</para>
+<screen>\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]{Name:\hspace{1in}}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal>-version inserts horizontal space that non-discardable.
+More precisely, when &tex; breaks a paragraph into lines any white
+space&#8212;glues and kerns&#8212;that come at a line break are discarded. The
+<literal>*</literal>-version avoids that (technically, it adds a non-discardable
+invisible item in front of the space).
+</para>
+<para>In this example
+</para>
+<screen>\parbox{0.8\linewidth}{%
+ Fill in each blank: Four \hspace*{1in} and seven years ago our
+ fathers brought forth on this continent, a new \hspace*{1in},
+ conceived in \hspace*{1in}, and dedicated to the proposition
+ that all men are created \hspace*{1in}.}
+</screen>
+<para>the 1&#160;inch blank following &#8216;<literal>conceived in</literal>&#8217; falls at the start
+of a line. If you erase the <literal>*</literal> then &latex; discards the blank.
+</para>
+<para>Here, the <literal>\hspace</literal> separates the three graphics.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{lion.png}% comment keeps out extra space
+ \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{tiger.png}%
+ \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{bear.png}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>Because the argument to each <literal>\hspace</literal> has <literal>minus 0.25cm</literal>,
+each can shrink a little if the three figures are too wide. But each
+space won&#8217;t shrink more than 0.25cm (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.3" id="_005chfill">
+<title><literal>\hfill</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hfill</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>stretch, infinite horizontal</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>infinite horizontal stretch</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\hfill
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but that can stretch
+horizontally as far as needed (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This creates a one-line paragraph with &#8216;<literal>Name:</literal>&#8217; on the left side
+of the page and &#8216;<literal>Quiz One</literal>&#8217; on the right.
+</para>
+<screen>\noindent Name:\hfill Quiz One
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fill</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <literal>\hfill</literal> command is equivalent to <literal>\hspace{\fill}</literal> and
+so the space can be discarded at line breaks. To avoid that instead use
+<literal>\hspace*{\fill}</literal> (see <link linkend="_005chspace">\hspace</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Here the graphs are evenly spaced in the middle of the figure.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+ ...
+\begin{figure}
+ \hspace*{\fill}%
+ \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph0.png}}%
+ \hfill\vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph1.png}}%
+ \hspace*{\fill}%
+ \caption{Comparison of two graphs} \label{fig:twographs}
+\end{figure}
+</screen>
+<para>Note the <literal>\hspace*</literal>&#8217;s where the space could otherwise be dropped.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.4" id="_005chss">
+<title><literal>\hss</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hss</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>horizontal space</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>horizontal space, stretchable</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, inserting horizontal</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\hss
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a horizontal space that is infinitely shrinkable as well as
+infinitely stretchable (this command is a &tex; primitive). &latex;
+authors should reach first for the <literal>\makebox</literal> command to get the
+effects of <literal>\hss</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Here, the first line&#8217;s <literal>\hss</literal> makes the Z stick out to the right,
+overwriting the Y. In the second line the Z sticks out to the left,
+overwriting the X.
+</para>
+<screen>X\hbox to 0pt{Z\hss}Y
+X\hbox to 0pt{\hss Z}Y
+</screen>
+<para>Without the <literal>\hss</literal> you get something like &#8216;<literal>Overfull \hbox
+(6.11111pt too wide) detected at line 20</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.5" id="_005cspacefactor">
+<title><literal>\spacefactor</literal></title>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\spacefactor=<replaceable>integer</replaceable>
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\spacefactor</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Influence &latex;&#8217;s glue stretch and shrink behavior. Most user-level
+documents do not use this command.
+</para>
+<para>While &latex; is laying out the material, it may stretch or shrink the
+gaps between words. (This space is not a character; it is called the
+<firstterm>interword glue</firstterm>; see <link linkend="_005chspace">\hspace</link>). The <literal>\spacefactor</literal> command
+(from Plain&#160;&tex;) allows you to, for instance, have the space
+after a period stretch more than the space after a word-ending letter.
+</para>
+<para>After &latex; places each character, or rule or other box, it sets a
+parameter called the <firstterm>space factor</firstterm>. If the next thing in the input
+is a space then this parameter affects how much stretching or shrinking
+can happen. A space factor that is larger than the normal value means
+that the glue can stretch more and shrink less. Normally, the space
+factor is 1000. This value is in effect following most characters, and
+any non-character box or math formula. But it is 3000 after a period,
+exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000 after a colon, 1500 after
+a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or closing double quote or single quote. Finally, it is 999
+after a capital letter.
+</para>
+<para>If the space factor&#160;<replaceable>f</replaceable> is 1000 then the glue gap will be the
+font&#8217;s normal space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is
+3.3333&#160;points). Otherwise, if the space factor <replaceable>f</replaceable> is greater
+than 2000 then &tex; adds the font&#8217;s extra space value (for Computer
+Modern Roman 10 point this is 1.11111&#160;points), and then the font&#8217;s
+normal stretch value is multiplied by <inlineequation><mathphrase>f /1000</mathphrase></inlineequation> and the normal
+shrink value is multiplied by <inlineequation><mathphrase>1000/f</mathphrase></inlineequation> (for Computer Modern Roman
+10 point these are 1.66666 and 1.11111&#160;points).
+</para>
+<para>For example, consider the period ending <literal>A man's best friend is his
+dog.</literal> After it, &tex; puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the
+glue to stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much, as the glue
+after <literal>friend</literal>, which does not end in a period.
+</para>
+<para>The rules for space factors are even more complex because they play
+additional roles. In practice, there are two consequences. First, if a
+period or other punctuation is followed by a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or right single or double quote then the spacing effect of that
+period carries through those characters (that is, the following glue
+will have increased stretch and shrink). Second, if
+punctuation comes after a capital letter then its effect is not in place
+so you get an ordinary space. This second case also affects abbreviations
+that do not end in a capital letter (see <link linkend="_005c_0040">\@</link>).
+</para>
+<para>You can only use <literal>\spacefactor</literal> in paragraph mode or LR mode
+(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). You can see the current value with
+<literal>\the\spacefactor</literal> or <literal>\showthe\spacefactor</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>(Comment, not really related to <literal>\spacefactor</literal>: if you get errors
+like &#8216;<literal>You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode</literal>&#8217;, or &#8216;<literal>You
+can't use `\spacefactor' in math mode.</literal>&#8217;, or &#8216;<literal>Improper \spacefactor</literal>&#8217;
+then you have probably tried to redefine an internal command.
+See <link linkend="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</link>.)
+</para>
+
+
+
+<sect2 label="19.5.1" id="_005c_0040">
+<title><literal>\@</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>at-sign</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>period, sentence-ending</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>period, abbreviation-ending</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>period, spacing after</primary></indexterm>
+<anchor id="_005cAT"/><!-- old name -->
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen><replaceable>capital-letter</replaceable>\@.
+</screen>
+<para>Treat a period as sentence-ending, where &latex; would otherwise think
+it is part of an abbreviation. &latex; thinks that a period ends an
+abbreviation if the period comes after a capital letter, and otherwise
+thinks the period ends the sentence. By default, in justifying a line
+&latex; adjusts the space after a sentence-ending period (or a question
+mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than it adjusts the space
+between words (see <link linkend="_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This example shows the two cases to remember.
+</para>
+<screen>The songs \textit{Red Guitar}, etc.\ are by Loudon Wainwright~III\@.
+</screen>
+<para>The second period ends the sentence, despite that it is preceded by a
+capital. We tell &latex; that it ends the sentence by putting
+<literal>\@</literal> before it. The first period ends the abbreviation
+&#8216;<literal>etc.</literal>&#8217; but not the sentence. The backslash-space, <literal>\ </literal>,
+produces a mid-sentence space.
+</para>
+<para>So: if you have a capital letter followed by a period that ends the
+sentence, then put <literal>\@</literal> before the period. This holds even if
+there is an intervening right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or
+double quote, because the spacing effect of that period carries through
+those characters. For example, this
+</para>
+<screen>Use the \textit{Instructional Practices Guide},
+(a book by the MAA)\@.
+</screen>
+<para>will have correct inter-sentence spacing after the period.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\@</literal> command is only for a text mode. If you use it outside of
+a text mode then you get &#8216;<literal>You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical
+mode</literal>&#8217; (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Comment: the converse case is a period ending an abbreviation whose last
+letter is not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last
+word in the sentence. For that case follow the period with a
+backslash-space, (<literal>\ </literal>), or a tie, (<literal>~</literal>), or <literal>\@</literal>.
+Examples are <literal>Nat.\ Acad.\ Science</literal>, and <literal>Mr.~Bean</literal>, and
+<literal>(manure, etc.\@) for sale</literal> (note in the last one that the
+<literal>\@</literal> comes before the closing parenthesis).
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="19.5.2" id="_005cfrenchspacing">
+<title><literal>\frenchspacing</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frenchspacing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nonfrenchspacing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>spacing, inter-sentence</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\frenchspacing
+\nonfrenchspacing
+</screen>
+<para>The first declaration causes &latex; to treat spacing between sentences
+in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a sentence.
+The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more
+(see <link linkend="_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</link>); this is the default.
+</para>
+<para>Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the
+space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
+exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words
+that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring <literal>\frenchspacing</literal>
+(the command is from Plain &tex;) switches to the tradition that all
+spaces are treated equally.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="19.5.3" id="_005cnormalsfcodes">
+<title><literal>\normalsfcodes</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\normalsfcodes</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>spacing, inter-sentence</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\normalsfcodes
+</screen>
+<para>Reset the &latex; space factor values to the default
+(see <link linkend="_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.6" id="_005c_0028SPACE_0029">
+<title>Backslash-space, <literal>\ </literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\NEWLINE</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\SPACE</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\TAB</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a
+backslash followed by a space. Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a space. By default it produces white space of length
+3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt.
+</para>
+<para>When you type one or more blanks between words, &latex; produces white
+space. But that is different than an explicit space. This illustrates.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{l}
+One blank: makes some space \\
+Three blanks: in a row \\
+Three spaces:\ \ \ in a row \\
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>On the first line &latex; puts some space after the colon. On the
+second line &latex; collapses the three blanks to output one
+whitespace, so you end with the same space after the colon as in the
+first line. &latex; would similarly collapse a blank followed by a
+tab, or a blank and a newline and a blank. However, the bottom line
+asks for three spaces so the white area is wider. That is, the
+backslash-space command creates a fixed amount of horizontal space.
+(Note that you can define a horizontal space of any width at all with
+<literal>\hspace</literal>; see&#160;<link linkend="_005chspace">\hspace</link>.)
+</para>
+<para>The backslash-space command has two main uses. It is often used after
+control sequences to keep them from gobbling the space that follows, as
+in <literal>\TeX\ is nice</literal>. (But using curly parentheses, as in
+<literal>\TeX{} is best</literal>, has the advantage of still working if the next
+character is a period.) The other common use is that it marks a period
+as ending an abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in <literal>So
+says Prof.\ Smith</literal> (see <link linkend="_005c_0040">\@</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Under normal circumstances, <literal>\</literal><keycap>tab</keycap> and <literal>\</literal><keycap>newline</keycap>
+are equivalent to backslash-space, <literal>\ </literal>.
+</para>
+<!-- @PkgIndex{xspace} -->
+<!-- Some individual commands, notably those defined with the @code{xspace}, -->
+<!-- package do not follow the standard behavior. -->
+
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.7" id="_007e">
+<title><literal>~</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>~</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tie</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, hard</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, unbreakable</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>NBSP</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen><replaceable>before</replaceable>~<replaceable>after</replaceable>
+</screen>
+<para>The tie character, <literal>~</literal>, produces a space between <replaceable>before</replaceable> and
+<replaceable>after</replaceable> at which the line will not be broken. By default the white
+space has length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus
+1.11111pt (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Here &latex; will not break the line between the final two words.
+</para>
+<screen>Thanks to Prof.~Lerman.
+</screen>
+<para>In addition, despite the period, &latex; does not use the
+end-of-sentence spacing (see <link linkend="_005c_0040">\@</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could cause
+confusion. But they also reduce &latex;&#8217;s options when it breaks lines
+into paragraphs, so you can use too many. They are also matters of
+taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers. Nevertheless,
+here are some usage models, many of them from the &tex;book.
+</para>
+<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references:
+<literal>Chapter~12</literal>, or <literal>Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}</literal>, or
+<literal>Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}</literal>. When cases are enumerated inline:
+<literal>(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>siunitx</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>siunitx</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+</listitem><listitem><para>Between a number and its unit: <literal>$745.7.8$~watts</literal> (the
+<filename>siunitx</filename> package has a special facility for this) or
+<literal>144~eggs</literal>. This includes between a month and a date:
+<literal>October~12</literal> or <literal>12~Oct</literal>. In general, in any expressions where
+numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space:
+<literal>AD~565</literal>, or <literal>2:50~pm</literal>, or <literal>Boeing~747</literal>, or
+<literal>268~Plains Road</literal>, or <literal>\$$1.4$~billion</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: <literal>equals~$n$</literal>, or
+<literal>less than~$\epsilon$</literal>, or <literal>given~$X$</literal>, or <literal>modulo~$p^e$
+for all large~$n$</literal> (but compare <literal>is~$15$</literal> with <literal>is $15$~times
+the height</literal>). Between mathematical symbols in apposition with nouns:
+<literal>dimension~$d$</literal> or <literal>function~$f(x)$</literal> (but compare <literal>with
+length $l$~or more</literal>). When a symbol is a tightly bound object of a
+preposition: <literal>of~$x$</literal>, or <literal>from $0$ to~$1$</literal>, or <literal>in
+common with~$m$</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>Between symbols in series: <literal>$1$,~$2$, or~$3$</literal> or <literal>$1$,~$2$,
+\ldots,~$n$</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>Between a person&#8217;s forenames and between multiple surnames:
+<literal>Donald~E. Knuth</literal>, or <literal>Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo</literal>, or
+<literal>Charles~XII</literal> (but you must give TeX places to break the line so
+you may do <literal>Charles Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin</literal>).
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>Before a dash: <literal>pages 12~--14</literal> or <literal>it is~--- it must be
+said~--- plausible</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></itemizedlist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.8" id="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">
+<title><literal>\thinspace</literal> &amp; <literal>\negthinspace</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thinspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\negthinspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>thin space</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, thin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>thin space, negative</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, negative thin</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\thinspace
+\negthinspace
+</screen>
+<para>Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6em and
+-1/6em. These are the text mode equivalents of <literal>\,</literal> and
+<literal>\!</literal> (see <link linkend="Spacing-in-math-mode_002f_005cthinspace">Spacing in math mode/\thinspace</link>). You can use
+<literal>\,</literal> as a synonym for <literal>\thinspace</literal> in text mode.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\negthinspace</literal> command is used in text mode mostly for
+fiddling with spaces. One common use of <literal>\thinspace</literal> is as the
+space between nested quotes.
+</para>
+<screen>Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace''
+</screen>
+<para>Another use is that some style guides call for a <literal>\thinspace</literal>
+between an ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides,
+though, think the three dots are quite enough already). Still another
+use is between initials, as in <literal>D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.9" id="_005c_002f">
+<title><literal>\/</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\/</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>italic correction</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen><replaceable>before-character</replaceable>\/<replaceable>after-character</replaceable>
+</screen>
+<para>Insert an <firstterm>italic correction</firstterm>, a small space defined by the font
+designer for each character, to avoid the character colliding with
+whatever follows. When you use <literal>\/</literal>, &latex; takes the correction
+from the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has been
+applied to the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space.
+</para>
+<para>Here, were it not for the <literal>\/</literal>, the <replaceable>before-character</replaceable>
+italic&#160;f would hit the <replaceable>after-character</replaceable> roman&#160;H
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\companylogo}{{\it f}\/H}
+</screen>
+<para>because the italic letter leans far to the right.
+</para>
+<para>If <replaceable>after-character</replaceable> is a period or comma then don&#8217;t insert an
+italic correction since those punctuation symbols have a very small
+height. However, with semicolons or colons as well as with normal
+letters, the italic correction can help.
+</para>
+<para>When you use commands such as <literal>\textit</literal> or <literal>\itshape</literal> to
+change fonts, &latex; will automatically insert any needed italic
+correction (see <link linkend="Font-styles">Font styles</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Roman characters can also have an italic correction. An example is in
+the name <literal>pdf\/\TeX</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done
+in a different way.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.10" id="_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill">
+<title><literal>\hrulefill</literal> &amp; <literal>\dotfill</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hrulefill</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dotfill</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\hrulefill
+\dotfill
+</screen>
+<para>Produce an infinite horizontal rubber length (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>) that
+&latex; fills with a rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of
+white space.
+</para>
+<para>This outputs a line 2 inches long.
+</para>
+<screen>Name:~\makebox[2in]{\hrulefill}
+</screen>
+<para>This example, when placed between blank lines, creates a paragraph that
+is left and right justified and where the middle is filled with evenly
+spaced dots.
+</para>
+<screen>\noindent John Aubrey, RN \dotfill{} Melbury Lodge
+</screen>
+<para>To make the rule or dots go to the line&#8217;s end use <literal>\null</literal> at the
+start or end.
+</para>
+<para>To change the rule&#8217;s thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
+here
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{%
+ \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern\z@}
+</screen>
+<para>which changes the default thickness of 0.4pt to 1pt.
+Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\dotfill}{%
+ \leavevmode\cleaders\hb@xt@1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern\z@}
+</screen>
+<para>which changes the default length of 0.33em to 1.00em.
+</para>
+<para>This example produces a line for a signature.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{minipage}{4cm}
+ \centering
+ \hrulefill\\
+ Signed
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
+<para>The line is 4cm long.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.11" id="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">
+<title><literal>\bigskip</literal> &amp; <literal>\medskip</literal> &amp; <literal>\smallskip</literal></title>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\bigskip
+\medskip
+\smallskip
+</screen>
+<para>Produce an amount of vertical space, large or medium-sized or
+small. These commands are fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Here the skip suggests the passage of time (from <emphasis>The Golden Ocean</emphasis> by
+O&#8217;Brian).
+</para>
+<screen>Mr Saumarez would have something rude to say to him, no doubt: he
+was at home again, and it was delightful.
+
+\bigskip
+``A hundred and fifty-seven miles and one third, in twenty-four hours,''
+said Peter.
+</screen>
+<para>Each command is associated with a length defined in the document class
+file.
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="bigskip"/><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigskip</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigskipamount</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The same as <literal>\vspace{\bigskipamount}</literal>, ordinarily about one line
+space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the <literal>book</literal> and
+<literal>article</literal> classes is <literal>12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="medskip"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\medskip</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medskipamount</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The same as <literal>\vspace{\medskipamount}</literal>, ordinarily about half of a
+line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the <literal>book</literal>
+and <literal>article</literal> classes is <literal>6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="smallskip"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\smallskip</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallskipamount</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The same as <literal>\vspace{\smallskipamount}</literal>, ordinarily about a
+quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the
+<literal>book</literal> and <literal>article</literal> classes is <literal>3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Because each command is a <literal>\vspace</literal>, if you use on in mid-paragraph
+then it will insert its vertical space between the line in which you use
+it and the next line, not necessarily at the place that you use it. So
+these are best between paragraphs.
+</para>
+<para>The commands <literal>\bigbreak</literal>, <literal>\medbreak</literal>, and <literal>\smallbreak</literal>
+are similar but also suggest to &latex; that this is a good place to
+put a page break (see <link linkend="_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak">\bigbreak &amp; \medbreak &amp; \smallbreak</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.12" id="_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak">
+<title><literal>\bigbreak</literal> &amp; <literal>\medbreak</literal> &amp; <literal>\smallbreak</literal></title>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\bigbreak
+\medbreak
+\smallbreak
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a vertical space that is big or medium-sized or small, and
+suggest to &latex; that this is a good place to break the page. (The
+associated penalties are -200, -100, and -50.)
+</para>
+<para>See <link linkend="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</link>, for more. These commands
+produce the same vertical space but differ in that they also remove a
+preceding vertical space if it is less than what they would insert (as
+with <literal>\addvspace</literal>). In addition, they terminate a paragraph where
+they are used: this example
+</para>
+<screen>abc\bigbreak def ghi
+
+jkl mno pqr
+</screen>
+<para>will output three paragraphs, the first ending in &#8216;<literal>abc</literal>&#8217; and the
+second starting, after an extra vertical space and a paragraph indent,
+with &#8216;<literal>def</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.13" id="_005cstrut">
+<title><literal>\strut</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\strut</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>strut</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\strut
+</screen>
+<para>Ensure that the current line has height at least <literal>0.7\baselineskip</literal>
+and depth at least <literal>0.3\baselineskip</literal>. Essentially, &latex;
+inserts into the line a rectangle having zero width,
+<literal>\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]{0pt}{\baselineskip}</literal> (see <link linkend="_005crule">\rule</link>).
+The <literal>\baselineskip</literal> changes with the current font and fontsize.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the <literal>\strut</literal> keeps the box inside the frame from
+having zero height.
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[2in]{\strut}
+</screen>
+<para>This example has four lists. In the first there is a much bigger gap
+between items 2 and&#160;3 than there is between items 1 and&#160;2.
+The second list fixes that with a <literal>\strut</literal> at the end of its first
+item&#8217;s second line.
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+\noindent\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}
+ \item test
+ \item test
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}
+ \item test
+ \item test
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+</screen>
+<para>The final two lists use <literal>\fbox</literal> to show what&#8217;s happening. The
+third list&#8217;s <literal>\parbox</literal> goes only to the bottom of its second
+&#8216;<literal>test</literal>&#8217;, which happens not have any characters that descend below
+the baseline. The fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed
+extra below-baseline space.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>TikZ</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>TikZ</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>Asymptote</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>Asymptote</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The <literal>\strut</literal> command is often useful in graphics, such as in
+<filename>TikZ</filename> or <filename>Asymptote</filename>. For instance, you may have a command
+such as <literal>\graphnode{<replaceable>node-name</replaceable>}</literal> that fits a circle around
+<replaceable>node-name</replaceable>. However, unless you are careful the <replaceable>node-name</replaceable>&#8217;s
+&#8216;<literal>x</literal>&#8217; and &#8216;<literal>y</literal>&#8217; will produce different-diameter circles because
+the characters are different sizes. A careful <literal>\graphnode</literal> might
+insert a <literal>\strut</literal>, then <replaceable>node-name</replaceable>, and then draw the circle.
+</para>
+<para>The general approach of using a zero width <literal>\rule</literal> is useful in
+many circumstances. In this table, the zero-width rule keeps the top of
+the first integral from hitting the <literal>\hline</literal>. Similarly, the
+second rule keeps the second integral from hitting the first.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{rl}
+ \textsc{Integral} &amp;\textsc{Value} \\
+ \hline
+ $\int_0^x t\, dt$ &amp;$x^2/2$ \rule{0em}{2.5ex} \\
+ $\int_0^x t^2\, dt$ &amp;$x^3/3$ \rule{0em}{2.5ex}
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available
+optional argument to put in more vertical room, that won&#8217;t work here.
+Changing the first double backslash to something like <literal>\\[2.5ex]</literal>
+will put the room between the header line and the <literal>\hline</literal>, and the
+integral would still hit the line.)
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.14" id="_005cvspace">
+<title><literal>\vspace</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical space</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, vertical</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\vspace{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}
+\vspace*{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Add the vertical space <replaceable>length</replaceable>. The <replaceable>length</replaceable> can be positive,
+negative, or zero. It is a rubber length&#8212;it may contain a <literal>plus</literal>
+or <literal>minus</literal> component (see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This puts space between the two paragraphs.
+</para>
+<screen>And I slept.
+
+\vspace{1ex plus 0.5ex}
+The new day dawned cold.
+</screen>
+<para>(See <link linkend="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</link> for common inter-paragraph
+spaces.)
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>*</literal>-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable. More
+precisely, &latex; discards vertical space at a page break and the
+<literal>*</literal>-version causes the space to stay. This example leaves space
+between the two questions.
+</para>
+<screen>Question: Find the integral of \( 5x^4+5 \).
+
+\vspace*{2cm plus 0.5cm}
+Question: Find the derivative of \( x^5+5x+9 \).
+</screen>
+<para>That space will be present even if the page break happens to fall
+between the questions.
+</para>
+<para>If you use <literal>\vspace</literal> in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
+horizontal mode) then the space is inserted after the line containing
+the <literal>\vspace</literal> command; it does not start a new paragraph at the
+<literal>\vspace</literal> command.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
+the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{document}
+1) Who put the bomp in the bomp bah bomp bah bomp?
+\vspace{1in plus 1fill}
+
+2) Who put the ram in the rama lama ding dong?
+\vspace{1in plus 1fill}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.15" id="_005cvfill">
+<title><literal>\vfill</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vfill</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>stretch, infinite vertical</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>infinite vertical stretch</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\vfill
+</screen>
+<para>End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length that is
+infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as needed
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+</para>
+<para>It is often used in the same way as <literal>\vspace{\fill}</literal>, except that
+<literal>\vfill</literal> ends the current paragraph whereas <literal>\vspace{\fill}</literal>
+adds the infinite vertical space below its line, irrespective of the
+paragraph structure. In both cases that space will disappear at a page
+boundary; to circumvent this see the starred option
+in&#160;<link linkend="_005cvspace">\vspace</link>.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines contain
+the text &#8216;<literal>Lost Dog!</literal>&#8217; and the second &#8216;<literal>Lost Dog!</literal>&#8217; is exactly
+halfway between them.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{document}
+Lost Dog!
+\vfill
+Lost Dog! % perfectly in the middle
+\vfill
+Lost Dog!
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.16" id="_005caddvspace">
+<title><literal>\addvspace</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addvspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical space</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>space, inserting vertical</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\addvspace{<replaceable>vert-length</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Add a vertical space of <replaceable>vert-length</replaceable>. However, if there are two or
+more <literal>\addvspace</literal>&#8217;s in a sequence then together they only add the
+space needed to make the natural length equal to the maximum of the
+<replaceable>vert-length</replaceable>&#8217;s in that sequence. This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>). The <replaceable>vert-length</replaceable> is a rubber length
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This example illustrates. The <literal>picture</literal> draws a scale. In a
+standard &latex; article the length <literal>\baselineskip</literal> is 12pt.
+The two rules here are 22pt apart: the sum of the
+<literal>\baselineskip</literal> and the 10pt from the first <literal>addvspace</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{color}
+\begin{document}
+\setlength{\unitlength}{2pt}%
+\noindent\begin{picture}(0,0)%
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,-1){25}{{\color{blue}\line(1,0){1}}}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,-5){6}{{\color{red}\line(1,0){2}}}
+\end{picture}%
+\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}%
+\par\addvspace{10pt}% \addvspace{20pt}%
+\par\noindent\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}%
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>Now uncomment the second <literal>\addvspace</literal>. It does not make the gap
+20pt longer; instead the gap is the sum of <literal>\baselineskip</literal>
+and 20pt. So <literal>\addvspace</literal> in a sense does the opposite of
+its name &#8212; it makes sure that multiple vertical spaces do not
+accumulate, but instead that only the largest one is used.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below
+an environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a
+<literal>theorem</literal> environment begins and ends with <literal>\addvspace</literal> so
+that two consecutive <literal>theorem</literal>&#8217;s are separated by one vertical
+space, not two.
+</para>
+<para>A error &#8216;<literal>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</literal>&#8217; pointing to an
+<literal>\addvspace</literal> means that you were not in vertical mode when you hit
+this command. One way to change that is to precede <literal>\addvspace</literal>
+with a <literal>\par</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005cpar">\par</link>), as in the above example.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="20" id="Boxes">
+<title>Boxes</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>boxes</primary></indexterm>
+
+<!-- xx Expand on boxes and glue, for xref from elsewhere. -->
+<para>At its core, &latex; puts things in boxes and then puts the boxes on a
+page. So these commands are central.
+</para>
+<para>There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating boxes.
+One useful adjunct to the commands here is <filename>adjustbox</filename>.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="20.1" id="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">
+<title><literal>\mbox</literal> &amp; <literal>\makebox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mbox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makebox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>box</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>make a box</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>hyphenation, preventing</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\mbox{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\makebox{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\makebox[<replaceable>width</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\makebox[<replaceable>width</replaceable>][<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Create a box, a container for material. The <replaceable>text</replaceable> is typeset in
+LR mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>) so it is not broken into lines. The
+<literal>\mbox</literal> command is robust, while <literal>\makebox</literal> is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Because <literal>text</literal> is not broken into lines, you can use <literal>\mbox</literal>
+to prevent hyphenation. In this example, &latex; will not hyphenate
+the table name, &#8216;<literal>T-4</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<screen>See Table~\mbox{T-4}
+</screen>
+<para>The first two command versions, <literal>\mbox</literal> and <literal>\makebox</literal>, are
+roughly equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the
+<replaceable>text</replaceable>. (They are like plain &tex;&#8217;s <literal>\hbox</literal>.)
+</para>
+<para>In the third version the optional argument <replaceable>width</replaceable> specifies the
+width of the box. Note that the space occupied by the text need not
+equal the width of the box. For one thing, <replaceable>text</replaceable> can be too small;
+this creates a full-line box
+</para>
+<screen>\makebox[\linewidth]{Chapter Exam}
+</screen>
+<para>with &#8216;<literal>Chapter Exam</literal>&#8217; centered. But <replaceable>text</replaceable> can also be too wide
+for <replaceable>width</replaceable>. See the example below of zero-width boxes.
+</para>
+<anchor id="mbox-makebox-depth"/><anchor id="mbox-makebox-height"/><anchor id="mbox-makebox-width"/><anchor id="mbox-makebox-totalheight"/><para>In the <replaceable>width</replaceable> argument you can use the following lengths that refer
+to the dimension of the box that &latex; gets on typesetting
+<replaceable>text</replaceable>: <literal>\depth</literal>, <literal>\height</literal>, <literal>\width</literal>,
+<literal>\totalheight</literal> (this is the box&#8217;s height plus its depth). For
+example, to make a box with the text stretched to double the natural
+size you can say this.
+</para>
+<screen>\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+</screen>
+<para>For the fourth command version the optional argument <replaceable>position</replaceable>
+gives position of the text within the box. It may take the following
+values:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>The <replaceable>text</replaceable> is centered (default).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>The <replaceable>text</replaceable> is flush left.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Flush right.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>s</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Stretch the interword space in <replaceable>text</replaceable> across the entire <replaceable>width</replaceable>.
+The <replaceable>text</replaceable> must contain stretchable space for this to work. For
+instance, this could head a press release:
+<literal>\noindent\makebox[\textwidth][s]{\large\hfil IMMEDIATE\hfil
+RELEASE\hfil}</literal>
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>A common use of <literal>\makebox</literal> is to make zero-width text boxes. This
+puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\pts}[1]{\makebox[0em][r]{#1 points\hspace*{1em}}}
+\pts{10}What is the air-speed velocity of an unladen swallow?
+
+\pts{90}An African or European swallow?
+</screen>
+<para><indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>TikZ</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>TikZ</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>Asymptote</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>Asymptote</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The right edge of the output &#8216;<literal>10 points </literal>&#8217; (note the ending space)
+will be just before the &#8216;<literal>What</literal>&#8217; (note the space after
+&#8216;<literal>points</literal>&#8217;). You can use <literal>\makebox</literal> similarly when making
+graphics, such as in <filename>TikZ</filename> or <filename>Asymptote</filename>, where you put the
+edge of the text at a known location, regardless of the length of that
+text.
+</para>
+<para>For boxes with frames see&#160;<link linkend="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</link>. For colors
+see&#160;<link linkend="Colored-boxes">Colored boxes</link>.
+</para>
+<para>There is a related version of <literal>\makebox</literal> that is used within the
+<literal>picture</literal> environment, where the length is given in terms of
+<literal>\unitlength</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</link>).
+</para>
+<para>If you put a double-backslash into <replaceable>text</replaceable> then &latex; will not
+give you a new line; for instance <literal>\makebox{abc def \\ ghi}</literal>
+outputs &#8216;<literal>abc defghi</literal>&#8217; while <literal>\makebox{abc def \par ghi}</literal>
+outputs &#8216;<literal>abc def ghi</literal>&#8217;, but neither go to a second line. To get
+multiple lines see&#160;<link linkend="_005cparbox">\parbox</link> and&#160;<link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.2" id="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">
+<title><literal>\fbox</literal> &amp; <literal>\framebox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fbox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\framebox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\fbox{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\framebox{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\framebox[<replaceable>width</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\framebox[<replaceable>width</replaceable>][<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Create a box with an enclosing frame, four lines surrounding the space.
+These commands are the same as <literal>\mbox</literal> and <literal>\makebox</literal> except
+for the frame (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</link>). The <literal>\fbox</literal> command is
+robust, the <literal>\framebox</literal> command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<screen>\fbox{Warning! No work shown, no credit given.}
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; puts the text into a box that cannot be split or hyphenated.
+Around that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four lines making
+a frame.
+</para>
+<para>The first two command invocations, <literal>\fbox{...}</literal> and
+<literal>\framebox{...}</literal>, are roughly the same. As to the third and
+fourth invocations, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box
+width as <replaceable>width</replaceable> and the position of the text inside that box as
+<replaceable>position</replaceable>. See <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</link> for the full description but
+here is an example creating an empty box that is 1/4in wide.
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[0.25in]{\strut}}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\strut</literal> inserts a vertical height of <literal>\baselineskip</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cstrut">\strut</link>).
+</para>
+<para>These parameters determine the frame layout.
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="fbox-framebox-fboxrule"/><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxrule</primary></indexterm><literal>\fboxrule</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>frame, line width</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>frame rule width</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\fboxrule</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box. The default is
+0.2pt. Change it with a command such as
+<literal>\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}</literal> (see <link linkend="_005csetlength">\setlength</link>).
+</para>
+<anchor id="fbox-framebox-fboxsep"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\fboxsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>frame, separation from contents</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>\fboxsep</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The distance from the frame to the enclosed box. The default is 3pt.
+Change it with a command such as <literal>\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005csetlength">\setlength</link>). Setting it to 0pt is useful sometimes:
+this will put a frame around the picture with no white border.
+</para>
+<screen>{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+ \framebox{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{prudence.jpg}}}
+</screen>
+<para>The extra curly braces keep the effect of the <literal>\setlength</literal> local.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>As with <literal>\mbox</literal> and <literal>\makebox</literal>, &latex; will not break lines
+in <replaceable>text</replaceable>. But this example has &latex; break lines to make a
+paragraph, and then frame the result.
+</para>
+<screen>\framebox{%
+ \begin{minipage}{0.6\linewidth}
+ My dear, here we must run as fast as we can, just to stay in place.
+ And if you wish to go anywhere you must run twice as fast as that.
+ \end{minipage}}
+</screen>
+<para>See <link linkend="Colored-boxes">Colored boxes</link> for colors other than black and white.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>picture</literal> environment has a version of this command where the
+units depend on <literal>picture</literal>&#8217;s <literal>\unitlength</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox
+(picture)</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.3" id="_005cparbox">
+<title><literal>\parbox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parbox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph mode</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph, in a box</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\parbox{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>contents</replaceable>}
+\parbox[<replaceable>position</replaceable>]{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>contents</replaceable>}
+\parbox[<replaceable>position</replaceable>][<replaceable>height</replaceable>]{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>contents</replaceable>}
+\parbox[<replaceable>position</replaceable>][<replaceable>height</replaceable>][<replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>contents</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a box of text that is <replaceable>width</replaceable> wide. Use this command to make
+a box of small pieces of text, of a single paragraph. This command is
+fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{picture}(0,0)
+ ...
+ \put(1,2){\parbox{1.75in}{\raggedright Because the graph is a line on
+ this semilog paper, the relationship is
+ exponential.}}
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+<para>The <replaceable>contents</replaceable> are processed in a text mode (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>) so
+&latex; will break lines to make a paragraph. But it won&#8217;t make
+multiple paragraphs; for that, use a <literal>minipage</literal> environment
+(see <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The options for <literal>\parbox</literal> (except for <replaceable>contents</replaceable>) are the same
+as those for <literal>minipage</literal>. For convenience a summary of the options
+is here but see&#160;<link linkend="minipage">minipage</link> for a complete description.
+</para>
+<para>There are two required arguments. The <replaceable>width</replaceable> is a rigid length
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). It sets the width of the box into which &latex;
+typesets <replaceable>contents</replaceable>. The <replaceable>contents</replaceable> is the text that is placed
+in that box. It should not have any paragraph-making components.
+</para>
+<para>There are three optional arguments, <replaceable>position</replaceable>, <replaceable>height</replaceable>, and
+<replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable>. The <replaceable>position</replaceable> gives the vertical alignment of the
+<literal>parbox</literal> with respect to the surrounding material. The possible
+values are <literal>c</literal> or <literal>m</literal> to make the vertical center of the
+<literal>parbox</literal> lines up with the center of the adjacent line (this is the
+default), or <literal>t</literal> to match the top line of the <literal>parbox</literal> with
+the baseline of the surrounding material, or <literal>b</literal> to match the
+bottom line.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>height</replaceable> overrides the natural height of the
+box.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <replaceable>inner-pos</replaceable> controls the placement of
+<replaceable>content</replaceable> inside the <literal>parbox</literal>. Its default is the value of
+<replaceable>position</replaceable>. Its possible values are: <literal>t</literal> to put the
+<replaceable>content</replaceable> at the top of the box, <literal>c</literal> to put it in the vertical
+center, <literal>b</literal> to put it at the bottom of the box, and <literal>s</literal> to
+stretch it out vertically (for this, the text must contain vertically
+stretchable space).
+</para>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.4" id="_005craisebox">
+<title><literal>\raisebox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\raisebox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\raisebox{<replaceable>distance</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\raisebox{<replaceable>distance</replaceable>}[<replaceable>height</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\raisebox{<replaceable>distance</replaceable>}[<replaceable>height</replaceable>][<replaceable>depth</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Raise or lower <replaceable>text</replaceable>. This command is fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by
+lowering the vertical bar symbol.
+</para>
+<!-- credit: egreg https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/278631/121234 -->
+<screen>\newcommand\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}}
+$f\restricted{A}$
+</screen>
+<para>The first mandatory argument <replaceable>distance</replaceable> specifies how far to raise
+the second mandatory argument <replaceable>text</replaceable>. This is a rigid length
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). If it is negative then it lowers <replaceable>text</replaceable>. The
+<replaceable>text</replaceable> is processed in LR mode so it cannot contain line breaks
+(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The optional arguments <replaceable>height</replaceable> and <replaceable>depth</replaceable> are dimensions. If
+they are specified, they override the natural height and depth of the
+box &latex; gets by typesetting <replaceable>text</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="raisebox-depth"/><anchor id="raisebox-height"/><anchor id="raisebox-width"/><anchor id="raisebox-totalheight"/><para>In the arguments <replaceable>distance</replaceable>, <replaceable>height</replaceable>, and <replaceable>depth</replaceable> you can
+use the following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that
+&latex; gets on typesetting <replaceable>text</replaceable>: <literal>\depth</literal>, <literal>\height</literal>,
+<literal>\width</literal>, <literal>\totalheight</literal> (this is the box&#8217;s height plus its
+depth).
+</para>
+<para>This will align two graphics on their top (see <link linkend="Graphics">Graphics</link>).
+</para>
+<!-- credit: FAQ https://texfaq.org/FAQ-topgraph -->
+<screen>\usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{calc} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{center}
+ \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{lion.png}}
+ \qquad
+ \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{meta.png}}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>The first <literal>\height</literal> is the height of <filename>lion.png</filename> while the
+second is the height of <filename>meta.png</filename>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.5" id="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">
+<title><literal>\sbox</literal> &amp; <literal>\savebox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sbox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\savebox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>box, save</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\sbox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\savebox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\savebox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>width</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\savebox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}[<replaceable>width</replaceable>][<replaceable>pos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Typeset <replaceable>text</replaceable> just as with <literal>\makebox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp;
+\makebox</link>) except that &latex; does not output it but instead saves it
+in a storage bin named <replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>. The bin name <replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable> begins
+with a backslash, <literal>\</literal>. You must have previously allocated the bin
+<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable> with <literal>\newsavebox</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</link>).The
+<literal>\sbox</literal> command is robust while <literal>\savebox</literal> is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This creates and uses a bin.
+</para>
+<screen>\newsavebox{\fullname}
+\sbox{\fullname}{John Jacob Jingleheimer Schmidt}
+ ...
+\usebox{\fullname}! His name is my name, too!
+Whenever we go out, the people always shout!
+There goes \\usebox{\fullname}! Ya da da da da da da.
+</screen>
+<para>One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a <literal>\newcommand</literal> is
+efficiency, that &latex; need not repeatedly retypeset the contents.
+See the example below.
+</para>
+<para>The first two command invocations,
+<literal>\sbox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> and
+<literal>\savebox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal>, are roughly equivalent.
+As to the third and fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify
+the box width as <replaceable>width</replaceable>, and the position of the text inside that
+box as <replaceable>position</replaceable>. See <link linkend="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</link> for the full
+description.
+</para>
+<para>In the <literal>\sbox</literal> and <literal>\savebox</literal> commands the <replaceable>text</replaceable> is
+typeset in LR mode so it does not have line breaks (see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). If
+you use these then &latex; doesn&#8217;t give you an error but it ignores
+what you want: if you enter <literal>\sbox{\newbin}{test \\ test}</literal> and
+<literal>\usebox{\newbin}</literal> then you get &#8216;<literal>testtest</literal>&#8217;, while if you
+enter <literal>\sbox{\newbin}{test \par test}</literal> and
+<literal>\usebox{\newbin}</literal> then you get &#8216;<literal>test test</literal>&#8217;, but no error or
+warning. To fix this use a <literal>\parbox</literal> or <literal>minipage</literal> as here.
+</para>
+<!-- credit: egreg https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/41668/121234 -->
+<screen>\savebox{\abin}{%
+ \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{minipage}}
+ ...
+\usebox{\abin}
+</screen>
+<para>As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin&#8217;s contents, this puts
+the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the
+header. &latex; only typesets it once.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{graphicx} % all this in the preamble
+\newsavebox{\sealbin}
+\savebox{\sealbin}{%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}%
+ \begin{picture}(0,0)%
+ \put(1.5,-2.5){%
+ \begin{tabular}{c}
+ \includegraphics[height=2in]{companylogo.png} \\
+ Office of the President
+ \end{tabular}}
+ \end{picture}%
+}
+\markright{\usebox{\sealbin}}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>picture</literal> environment is good for fine-tuning the placement.
+</para>
+<para>If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like
+&#8216;<literal>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt; \nobin</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.6" id="lrbox">
+<title><literal>lrbox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>lrbox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{lrbox}{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}
+ <replaceable>text</replaceable>
+\end{lrbox}
+</screen>
+<para>The <replaceable>text</replaceable> inside the environment is saved in the bin
+<literal><replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable></literal>. The <replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable> must begin with a
+backslash. You must create this bin in advance with <literal>\newsavebox</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</link>). This is the environment form of the <literal>\sbox</literal>
+and <literal>\savebox</literal> commands, and is equivalent to them. See <link linkend="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox &amp;
+\savebox</link> for the full information.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the environment is convenient for entering the
+<literal>tabular</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\newsavebox{\jhbin}
+\begin{lrbox}{\jhbin}
+ \begin{tabular}{c}
+ \includegraphics[height=1in]{jh.png} \\
+ Jim Hef{}feron
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{lrbox}
+ ...
+\usebox{\jhbin}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.7" id="_005cusebox">
+<title><literal>\usebox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\usebox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>box, use saved box</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\usebox{<replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Produce the box most recently saved in the bin <replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable> by the
+commands <literal>\sbox</literal> or <literal>\savebox</literal>, or the <literal>lrbox</literal>
+environment. See <link linkend="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox &amp; \savebox</link> for more information and examples.
+(Note that <replaceable>box-cmd</replaceable> starts with a backslash.) This command is
+robust (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="21" id="Color">
+<title>Color</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>color</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can add color to text, rules, etc. You can also have color in a box
+or on an entire page and write text on top of it.
+</para>
+<para>Color support comes as an additional package. So put
+<literal>\usepackage{color}</literal> in your document preamble to use the
+commands described here.
+</para>
+<para>Many other packages also supplement &latex;&#8217;s color abilities.
+Particularly worth mentioning is <filename>xcolor</filename>, which is widely used and
+significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding
+&#8216;<literal>HTML</literal>&#8217; and &#8216;<literal>Hsb</literal>&#8217; color models.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="21.1" id="Color-package-options">
+<title><literal>color</literal> package options</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>color package options</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, color package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage[<replaceable>comma-separated option list</replaceable>]{color}
+</screen>
+<para>When you load the <filename>color</filename> package there are two kinds of available
+options.
+</para>
+<para>The first specifies the <firstterm>printer driver</firstterm>. &latex; doesn&#8217;t contain
+information about different output systems but instead depends on
+information stored in a file. Normally you should not specify the
+driver option in the document, and instead rely on your system&#8217;s
+default. One advantage of this is that it makes the document portable
+across systems. For completeness we include a list of the drivers. The
+currently relevant ones are: <filename>dvipdfmx</filename>, <filename>dvips</filename>,
+<filename>dvisvgm</filename>, <filename>luatex</filename>, <filename>pdftex</filename>, <filename>xetex</filename>. The two
+<filename>xdvi</filename> and <filename>oztex</filename> are essentially aliases for <filename>dvips</filename>
+(and <filename>xdvi</filename> is monochrome). Ones that should not be used for new
+systems are: <filename>dvipdf</filename>, <filename>dvipdfm</filename>, <filename>dviwin</filename>,
+<filename>dvipsone</filename>, <filename>emtex</filename>, <filename>pctexps</filename>, <filename>pctexwin</filename>,
+<filename>pctexhp</filename>, <filename>pctex32</filename>, <filename>truetex</filename>, <filename>tcidvi</filename>,
+<filename>vtex</filename> (and <filename>dviwindo</filename> is an alias for <filename>dvipsone</filename>).
+</para>
+<para>The second kind of options, beyond the drivers, are below.
+</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry><term><literal>monochrome</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Disable the color commands, so that they do not generate errors but do
+not generate color either.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>dvipsnames</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Make available a list of 68 color names that are often used,
+particularly in legacy documents. These color names were originally
+provided by the <filename>dvips</filename> driver, giving the option name.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>nodvipsnames</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Do not load that list of color names, saving &latex; a tiny amount of
+memory space.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="21.2" id="Color-models">
+<title>Color models</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>color models</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A <firstterm>color model</firstterm> is a way of representing colors. &latex;&#8217;s
+capabilities depend on the printer driver. However, the <filename>pdftex</filename>,
+<filename>xetex</filename>, and <filename>luatex</filename> printer drivers are today by far the
+most commonly used. The models below work for those drivers. All but
+one of these is also supported by essentially all other printer drivers
+used today.
+</para>
+<para>Note that color combination can be additive or subtractive. Additive
+mixes colors of light, so that for instance combining full intensities
+of red, green, and blue produces white. Subtractive mixes pigments,
+such as with inks, so that combining full intensity of cyan, magenta,
+and yellow makes black.
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="color-models-cmyk"/><varlistentry><term><literal>cmyk</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1,
+inclusive. The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second is
+magenta, and the others are yellow and black. A number value of 0 means
+minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity. This model is often
+used in color printing. It is a subtractive model.
+</para>
+<anchor id="color-models-gray"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>gray</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive. The colors are shades
+of grey. The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white.
+</para>
+<anchor id="color-models-rgb"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>rgb</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1,
+inclusive. The first number is the intensity of the red component, the
+second is green, and the third the blue. A number value of 0 means that
+none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full intensity.
+This is an additive model.
+</para>
+<anchor id="color-models-RGB"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>RGB</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(<filename>pdftex</filename>, <filename>xetex</filename>, <filename>luatex</filename> drivers) A comma-separated
+list with three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive. This model is a
+convenience for using <literal>rgb</literal> since outside of &latex; colors are
+often described in a red-green-blue model using numbers in this range.
+The values entered here are converted to the <literal>rgb</literal> model by
+dividing by 255.
+</para>
+<anchor id="color-models-named"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>named</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Colors are accessed by name, such as &#8216;<literal>PrussianBlue</literal>&#8217;. The list of
+names depends on the driver, but all support the names &#8216;<literal>black</literal>&#8217;,
+&#8216;<literal>blue</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>cyan</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>green</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>magenta</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>red</literal>&#8217;,
+&#8216;<literal>white</literal>&#8217;, and &#8216;<literal>yellow</literal>&#8217; (See the <literal>dvipsnames</literal> option in
+<link linkend="Color-package-options">Color package options</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="21.3" id="Commands-for-color">
+<title>Commands for color</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>color package commands</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>These are the commands available with the <filename>color</filename> package.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="21.3.1" id="Define-colors">
+<title>Define colors</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>color</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>define color</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>color, define</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\definecolor{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{<replaceable>model</replaceable>}{<replaceable>specification</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Give the name <replaceable>name</replaceable> to the color. For example, after this
+</para>
+<screen>\definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}
+</screen>
+<para>you can use that color name with <literal>Hi ho,
+\textcolor{silver}{Silver}!</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change and
+not be misleading.
+</para>
+<screen>\definecolor{logocolor}{RGB}{145,92,131} % RGB needs pdflatex
+\newcommand{\logo}{\textcolor{logocolor}{Bob's Big Bagels}}
+</screen>
+<para>Often a document&#8217;s colors are defined in the preamble, or in the class
+or style, rather than in the document body.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="21.3.2" id="Colored-text">
+<title>Colored text</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>color</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>colored text</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<screen>\textcolor{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{...}
+\textcolor[<replaceable>color model</replaceable>]{<replaceable>color specification</replaceable>}{...}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\color{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}
+\color[<replaceable>color model</replaceable>]{<replaceable>specification</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>The affected text gets the color. This line
+</para>
+<screen>\textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:}
+Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
+</screen>
+<para>causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black. You
+can use a color declared with <literal>\definecolor</literal> in exactly the same
+way that we just used the builtin color &#8216;<literal>magenta</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<screen>\definecolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{rgb}{1.0,0.11,0.0}
+I'm thinking about getting a \textcolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{sports car}.
+</screen>
+<para>The two <literal>\textcolor</literal> and <literal>\color</literal> differ in that the first is
+a command form, enclosing the text to be colored as an argument. Often
+this form is more convenient, or at least more explicit. The second
+form is a declaration, as in <literal>The moon is made of {\color{green}
+green} cheese</literal>, so it is in effect until the end of the current group
+or environment. This is sometimes useful when writing macros or as
+below where it colors everything inside the <literal>center</literal> environment,
+including the vertical and horizontal lines.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center} \color{blue}
+ \begin{tabular}{l|r}
+ UL &amp;UR \\ \hline
+ LL &amp;LR
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>You can use color in equations. A document might have this definition
+in the preamble
+</para>
+<screen>\definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0}
+</screen>
+<para>and then contain this equation.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+ \int_a^b \textcolor{highlightcolor}{f'(x)}\,dx=f(b)-f(a)
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<para>Typically the colors used in a document are declared in a class or style
+but sometimes you want a one-off. Those are the second forms in the
+synopses.
+</para>
+<screen>Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and
+{\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team.
+</screen>
+<para>The format of <replaceable>color specification </replaceable> depends on the color model
+(see <link linkend="Color-models">Color models</link>). For instance, while <literal>rgb</literal> takes three
+numbers, <literal>gray</literal> takes only one.
+</para>
+<screen>The selection was \textcolor[gray]{0.5}{grayed out}.
+</screen>
+<para>Colors inside colors do not combine. Thus
+</para>
+<screen>\textcolor{green}{kind of \textcolor{blue}{blue}}
+</screen>
+<para>has a final word that is blue, not a combination of blue and green.
+</para>
+<!-- xx address coloring a line of a table? -->
+
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="21.3.3" id="Colored-boxes">
+<title>Colored boxes</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>color</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>colored boxes</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>box, colored</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<screen>\colorbox{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}{...}
+\colorbox[<replaceable>model name</replaceable>]{<replaceable>box background color</replaceable>}{...}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\fcolorbox{<replaceable>frame color</replaceable>}{<replaceable>box background color</replaceable>}{...}
+\fcolorbox[<replaceable>model name</replaceable>]{<replaceable>frame color</replaceable>}{<replaceable>box background color</replaceable>}{...}
+</screen>
+<para>Make a box with the stated background color. The <literal>\fcolorbox</literal>
+command puts a frame around the box. For instance this
+</para>
+<screen>Name:~\colorbox{cyan}{\makebox[5cm][l]{\strut}}
+</screen>
+<para>makes a cyan-colored box that is five centimeters long and gets its
+depth and height from the <literal>\strut</literal> (so the depth is
+<literal>-.3\baselineskip</literal> and the height is <literal>\baselineskip</literal>). This
+puts white text on a blue background.
+</para>
+<screen>\colorbox{blue}{\textcolor{white}{Welcome to the machine.}}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\fcolorbox</literal> commands use the same parameters as <literal>\fbox</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</link>), <literal>\fboxrule</literal> and <literal>\fboxsep</literal>, to
+set the thickness of the rule and the boundary between the box interior
+and the surrounding rule. &latex;&#8217;s defaults are <literal>0.4pt</literal> and
+<literal>3pt</literal>, respectively.
+</para>
+<para>This example changes the thickness of the border to 0.8 points. Note
+that it is surrounded by curly braces so that the change ends at the end
+of the second line.
+</para>
+<screen>{\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}
+\fcolorbox{black}{red}{Under no circumstances turn this knob.}}
+</screen>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="21.3.4" id="Colored-pages">
+<title>Colored pages</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>color</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>colored page</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>page, colored</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>background, colored</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<screen>\pagecolor{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}
+\pagecolor[<replaceable>color model</replaceable>]{<replaceable>color specification</replaceable>}
+\nopagecolor
+</screen>
+<para>The first two set the background of the page, and all subsequent pages,
+to the color. For an explanation of the specification in the second
+form see <link linkend="Colored-text">Colored text</link>. The third returns the background to normal,
+which is a transparent background. (If that is not supported use
+<literal>\pagecolor{white}</literal>, although that will make a white background
+rather than the default transparent background.)
+</para>
+<screen> ...
+\pagecolor{cyan}
+ ...
+\nopagecolor
+</screen>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="22" id="Graphics">
+<title>Graphics</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can use graphics such as PNG or PDF files in your &latex; document.
+You need an additional package, which comes standard with &latex;.
+This example is the short how-to.
+</para>
+<screen>\include{graphicx} % goes in the preamble
+ ...
+\includegraphics[width=0.5\linewidth]{plot.pdf}
+</screen>
+<para>To use the commands described here your document preamble must contain
+either <literal>\usepackage{graphicx}</literal> or
+<literal>\usepackage{graphics}</literal>. Most of the time, <filename>graphicx</filename> is the
+better choice.
+</para>
+<para>Graphics come in two main types, raster and vector. &latex; can use
+both. In raster graphics the file contains an entry for each location
+in an array, describing what color it is. An example is a photograph,
+in JPG format. In vector graphics, the file contains a list of
+instructions such as &#8216;<literal>draw a circle with this radius and that
+center</literal>&#8217;. An example is a line drawing produced by the Asymptote
+program, in PDF format. Generally vector graphics are more useful
+because you can rescale their size without pixelation or other problems,
+and because they often have a smaller size.
+</para>
+<para>There are systems particularly well-suited to make graphics for a
+&latex; document. For example, these allow you to use the same fonts
+as in your document. &latex; comes with a <literal>picture</literal> environment
+(see <link linkend="picture">picture</link>) that has simple capabilities. Besides that, there are
+other ways to include the graphic-making commands in the document. Two
+such systems are the PSTricks and TikZ packages. There are also systems
+external to &latex;, that generate a graphic that you include using the
+commands of this chapter. Two that use a programming language are
+Asymptote and MetaPost. One that uses a graphical interface is Xfig.
+Full description of these systems is outside the scope of this document;
+see their documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="22.1" id="Graphics-package-options">
+<title><literal>graphics</literal> package options</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics package options</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, graphics package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage[<replaceable>comma-separated option list</replaceable>]{graphics}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage[<replaceable>comma-separated option list</replaceable>]{graphicx}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>graphicx</literal> package has a format for optional arguments to the
+<literal>\includegraphics</literal> command that is convenient (it is the key-value
+format), so it is the better choice for new documents. When you load
+the <filename>graphics</filename> or <filename>graphicx</filename> package with <literal>\usepackage</literal>
+there are two kinds of available options.
+</para>
+<para>The first is that &latex; does not contain information about different
+output systems but instead depends on information stored in a
+<firstterm>printer driver</firstterm> file. Normally you should not specify the driver
+option in the document, and instead rely on your system&#8217;s default. One
+advantage of this is that it makes the document portable across systems.
+</para>
+<para>For completeness here is a list of the drivers. The currently relevant
+ones are: <filename>dvipdfmx</filename>, <filename>dvips</filename>, <filename>dvisvgm</filename>, <filename>luatex</filename>,
+<filename>pdftex</filename>, <filename>xetex</filename>. The two <filename>xdvi</filename> and <filename>oztex</filename> are
+essentially aliases for <filename>dvips</filename> (and <filename>xdvi</filename> is monochrome).
+Ones that should not be used for new systems are: <filename>dvipdf</filename>,
+<filename>dvipdfm</filename>, <filename>dviwin</filename>, <filename>dvipsone</filename>, <filename>emtex</filename>,
+<filename>pctexps</filename>, <filename>pctexwin</filename>, <filename>pctexhp</filename>, <filename>pctex32</filename>,
+<filename>truetex</filename>, <filename>tcidvi</filename>, <filename>vtex</filename> (and <filename>dviwindo</filename> is an
+alias for <filename>dvipsone</filename>). These are stored in files with a
+<filename>.def</filename> extension, such as <filename>pdftex.def</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>The second kind of options are below.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>demo</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Instead of an image file, &latex; puts in a 150&#160;pt by 100&#160;pt
+rectangle (unless another size is specified in the
+<literal>\includegraphics</literal> command).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>draft</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead the file name is
+printed in a box of the correct size. In order to determine the size,
+the file must be present.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>final</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(Default) Override any previous <literal>draft</literal> option, so that the
+document shows the contents of the graphic files.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>hiderotate</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Do not show rotated text. (This allows for the possibility that a
+previewer does not have the capability to rotate text.)
+<!-- what does it show? -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>hidescale</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Do not show scaled text. (This allows for the possibility that a
+previewer does not have the capability to scale.)
+<!-- what does it show? -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>hiresbb</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>In a PS or EPS file the graphic size may be specified in two ways. The
+<literal>%%BoundingBox</literal> lines describe the graphic size using integer
+multiples of a PostScript point, that is, integer multiples of 1/72
+inch. A later addition to the PostScript language allows decimal
+multiples, such as 1.23, in <literal>%%HiResBoundingBox</literal> lines. This
+option has &latex; to read the size from the latter.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="22.2" id="Graphics-package-configuration">
+<title><literal>graphics</literal> package configuration</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>configuration, graphics package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>EPS files</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>JPEG files</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>JPG files</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>PDF graphic files</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>PNG files</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>These commands configure the way &latex; searches the file system for
+the graphic.
+</para>
+<para>The behavior of file system search code is necessarily platform
+dependent. In this document we cover GNU/Linux, Macintosh, and Windows, as
+those systems are typically configured. For other situations consult
+the documentation in <filename>grfguide.pdf</filename>, or the &latex; source, or your
+&tex; distribution&#8217;s documentation.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="22.2.1" id="_005cgraphicspath">
+<title><literal>\graphicspath</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\graphicspath</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\graphicspath{<replaceable>list of dir names inside curly brackets</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Declare a list of directories to search for graphics files. This allows
+you to later say something like <literal>\includegraphics{lion.png}</literal>
+instead of having to give its path.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; always looks for graphic files first in the current directory.
+The declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory
+<filename>pix</filename>, and then <filename>../pix</filename>.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{graphicx} % or graphics; put in preamble
+ ...
+\graphicspath{ {pix/} {../pix/} }
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\graphicspath</literal> declaration is optional. If you don&#8217;t include
+it then &latex;&#8217;s default is to search all of the places that it
+usually looks for a file (it uses &latex;&#8217;s <literal>\input@path</literal>). In
+particular, in this case one of the places it looks is the current
+directory.
+</para>
+<para>Enclose each directory name in curly braces; for example, above it says
+&#8216;<literal><literal>{pix}</literal></literal>&#8217;. Do this even if there is only one directory.
+Each directory name must end in a forward slash, <filename>/</filename>. This is true
+even on Windows, where good practice is to use forward slashes for all
+the directory separators since it makes the document portable to other
+platforms. If you have spaces in your directory name then use double
+quotes, as with <literal>{&quot;my docs/&quot;}</literal>. Getting one of these rules wrong
+will cause &latex; to report <literal>Error: File `<replaceable>filename</replaceable>' not
+found</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Basically, the algorithm is that with this example, after looking in the
+current directory,
+</para>
+<screen>\graphicspath{ {pix/} {../pix/} }
+...
+\usepackage{lion.png}
+</screen>
+<para>for each of the listed directories, &latex; concatenates it with the
+file name and searches for the result, checking for <filename>pix/lion.png</filename>
+and then <filename>../pix/lion.png</filename>. This algorithm means that the
+<literal>\graphicspath</literal> command does not recursively search subdirectories:
+if you issue <literal>\graphicspath{{a/}}</literal> and the graphic is in
+<filename>a/b/lion.png</filename> then &latex; will not find it. It also means that
+you can use absolute paths such as
+<literal>\graphicspath{{/home/jim/logos/}}</literal> or
+<literal>\graphicspath{{C:/Users/Albert/Pictures/}}</literal>. However, using
+these means that the document is not portable. (You could preserve
+portability by adjusting your &tex; system settings configuration file
+parameter <literal>TEXINPUTS</literal>; see the documentation of your system.)
+</para>
+<para>You can use <literal>\graphicspath</literal> anywhere in the document. You can use
+it more than once. Show its value with
+<literal>\makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput@path}\makeatother</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The directories are taken with respect to the base file. That is,
+suppose that you are working on a document based on <filename>book/book.tex</filename>
+and it contains <literal>\include{chapters/chap1}</literal>. If in
+<filename>chap1.tex</filename> you put <literal>\graphicspath{{plots/}}</literal> then
+&latex; will not search for graphics in <filename>book/chapters/plots</filename>, but
+instead in <filename>book/plots</filename>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="22.2.2" id="_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions">
+<title><literal>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<screen>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{<replaceable>comma-separated list of file extensions</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Declare the filename extensions to try. This allows you to specify the
+order in which to choose graphic formats when you include graphic files
+by giving the filename without the extension, as in
+<literal>\includegraphics{functionplot}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>In this example, &latex; will find files in the PNG format before PDF
+files.
+</para>
+<screen>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.png,PNG,.pdf,.PDF}
+ ...
+\includegraphics{lion} % will find <filename>lion.png</filename> before <filename>lion.pdf</filename>
+</screen>
+<para>Because the file name <filename>lion</filename> does not have a period, &latex; uses
+the extension list. For each directory in the graphics path
+(see <link linkend="_005cgraphicspath">\graphicspath</link>), &latex; will try the extensions in the order
+given. If it does not find such a file after trying all the directories
+and extensions then it reports &#8216;<literal>! LaTeX Error: File `<filename>lion</filename>'
+not found</literal>&#8217;. Note that you must include the periods at the start of the
+extensions.
+</para>
+<para>Because GNU/Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the list of
+file extensions is case sensitive on those platforms. The Windows
+platform is not case sensitive.
+</para>
+<para>You are not required to include <literal>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</literal> in
+your document; the printer driver has a sensible default. For example,
+the most recent <filename>pdftex.def</filename> has this extension list.
+</para>
+<screen>.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
+</screen>
+<para>You can use this command anywhere in the document. You can use it more
+than once. Show its value with
+<literal>\makeatletter\typeout{\Gin@extensions}\makeatother</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="22.2.3" id="_005cDeclareGraphicsRule">
+<title><literal>\DeclareGraphicsRule</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DeclareGraphicsRule</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\DeclareGraphicsRule{<replaceable>extension</replaceable>}{<replaceable>type</replaceable>}{<replaceable>size-file extension</replaceable>}{<replaceable>command</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Declare how to handle graphic files whose names end in <replaceable>extension</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>This example declares that all files with names have the form
+<filename>filename-without-dot.mps</filename> will be treated as output from MetaPost,
+meaning that the printer driver will use its MetaPost-handling code to
+input the file.
+</para>
+<screen>\DeclareGraphicsRule{.mps}{mps}{.mps}{}
+</screen>
+<para>This
+</para>
+<screen>\DeclareGraphicsRule{*}{mps}{*}{}
+</screen>
+<para>tells &latex; that it should handle as MetaPost output any file with an
+extension not covered by another rule, so it covers <filename>filename.1</filename>,
+<filename>filename.2</filename>, etc.
+</para>
+<para>This describes the four arguments.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>extension</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>The file extension to which this rule applies. The extension is anything
+after and including the first dot in the filename. Use the Kleene star,
+<literal>*</literal>, to denote the default behaviour for all undeclared extensions.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>type</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>The type of file involved. This type is a string that must be defined
+in the printer driver. For instance, files with extensions <filename>.ps</filename>,
+<filename>.eps</filename>, or <filename>.ps.gz</filename> may all be classed as type <literal>eps</literal>.
+All files of the same type will be input with the same internal command
+by the printer driver. For example, the file types that <filename>pdftex</filename>
+recognizes are: <literal>jpg</literal>, <literal>jbig2</literal>, <literal>mps</literal>, <literal>pdf</literal>,
+<literal>png</literal>, <literal>tif</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>size-file extension</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>The extension of the file to be read to determine the size of the
+graphic, if there is such a file. It may be the same as <replaceable>extension</replaceable>
+but it may be different.
+</para>
+<para>As an example, consider a PostScript graphic. To make it smaller, it
+might be compressed into a <filename>.ps.gz</filename> file. Compressed files are not
+easily read by &latex; so you can put the bounding box information in a
+separate file. If <replaceable>size-file extension</replaceable> is empty then you must
+specify size information in the arguments of <literal>\includegraphics</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>If the driver file has a procedure for reading size files for
+<literal>type</literal> then that will be used, otherwise it will use the procedure
+for reading <filename>.eps</filename> files. (Thus you may specify the size of bitmap
+files in a file with a PostScript style <literal>%%BoundingBox</literal> line if no
+other format is available.)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>command</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>A command that will be applied to the
+file. This is very often left blank. This command must start with a
+single backward quote. Thus,
+<literal>\DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{`gunzip -c
+#1}</literal> specifies that any file with the extension <filename>.eps.gz</filename> should
+be treated as an <literal>eps</literal> file, with the BoundingBox information
+stored in the file with extension <filename>.eps.bb</filename>, and that the command
+<literal>gunzip -c</literal> will run on your platform to decompresses the file.
+</para>
+<para>Such a command is specific to your platform. In addition, your &tex;
+system must allow you to run external commands; as a security measure
+modern systems restrict running commands unless you explicitly allow it.
+See the documentation for your &tex; distribution.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="22.3" id="Commands-for-graphics">
+<title>Commands for graphics</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics package commands</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>commands, graphics package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>These are the commands available with the <filename>graphics</filename> and
+<filename>graphicx</filename> packages.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="22.3.1" id="_005cincludegraphics">
+<title><literal>\includegraphics</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>including graphics</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>importing graphics</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>EPS files</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>JPEG files</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>JPG files</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>PDF graphic files</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>PNG files</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\includegraphics</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses for <filename>graphics</filename> package:
+</para>
+<screen>\includegraphics{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
+\includegraphics[<replaceable>urx</replaceable>,<replaceable>ury</replaceable>]{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
+\includegraphics[<replaceable>llx</replaceable>,<replaceable>lly</replaceable>][<replaceable>urx</replaceable>,<replaceable>ury</replaceable>]{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
+\includegraphics*{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
+\includegraphics*[<replaceable>urx</replaceable>,<replaceable>ury</replaceable>]{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
+\includegraphics*[<replaceable>llx</replaceable>,<replaceable>lly</replaceable>][<replaceable>urx</replaceable>,<replaceable>ury</replaceable>]{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Synopses for <filename>graphicx</filename> package:
+</para>
+<screen>\includegraphics{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
+\includegraphics[<replaceable>key-value list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
+\includegraphics*{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
+\includegraphics*[<replaceable>key-value list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Include a graphics file. The starred form <literal>\includegraphics*</literal> will
+clip the graphic to the size specified, while for the unstarred form any
+part of the graphic that is outside the box of the specified size will
+over-print the surrounding area.
+</para>
+<para>This
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{plot.pdf}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>will incorporate into the document the graphic in <filename>plot.pdf</filename>,
+centered and at its nominal size. You can also give a path to the file,
+as with <literal>\includegraphics{graphics/plot.pdf}</literal>. To specify a list
+of locations to search for the file, see <link linkend="_005cgraphicspath">\graphicspath</link>.
+</para>
+<para>If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes. An example
+is <literal>\includegraphics{&quot;sister picture.jpg&quot;}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\includegraphics{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}</literal> command decides on the
+type of graphic by splitting <replaceable>filename</replaceable> on the first dot. You can
+use <replaceable>filename</replaceable> with no dot, as in <literal>\includegraphics{turing}</literal>
+and then &latex; tries a sequence of extensions such as <literal>.png</literal> and
+<literal>.pdf</literal> until it finds a file with that extension
+(see <link linkend="_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</link>).
+</para>
+<para>If your file name contains dots before the extension then you can hide
+them with curly braces, as in
+<literal>\includegraphics{{plot.2018.03.12.a}.pdf}</literal>. Or, if you use
+the <filename>graphicx</filename> package then you can use the options <literal>type</literal> and
+<literal>ext</literal>; see below. This and other filename issues are also handled
+with the package <filename>grffile</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so &latex; can
+move it to the next page if fitting it on the current page is awkward
+(see <link linkend="figure">figure</link>).
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{figure}
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=3cm]{lungxray.jpg}
+ \caption{The evidence is overwhelming: don't smoke.} \label{fig:xray}
+\end{figure}
+</screen>
+<para>This places a graphic that will not float, so it is sure to appear at
+this point in the document even if makes &latex; stretch the text or
+resort to blank areas on the page. It will be centered and will have a
+caption.
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{caption} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{pix/nix.png}
+ \captionof{figure}{The spirit of the night} \label{pix:nix} % optional
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>This example puts a box with a graphic side by side with one having
+text, with the two vertically centered.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+ ...
+\begin{center}
+ \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.4\textwidth]{plot}}
+ \hspace{1em}
+ \vcenteredhbox{\begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ f(x)=x\cdot \sin (1/x)
+ \end{displaymath}
+ \end{minipage}}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>If you use the <filename>graphics</filename> package then the only options involve the
+size of the graphic (but see <link linkend="_005crotatebox">\rotatebox</link> and <link linkend="_005cscalebox">\scalebox</link>).
+When one optional argument is present then it is
+<literal>[<replaceable>urx</replaceable>,<replaceable>ury</replaceable>]</literal> and it gives the coordinates of the top
+right corner of the image, as a pair of &tex; dimensions (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units
+of length</link>). If the units are omitted they default to <literal>bp</literal>. In
+this case, the lower left corner of the image is assumed to be at (0,0).
+If two optional arguments are present then the leading one is
+<literal>[<replaceable>llx</replaceable>,<replaceable>lly</replaceable>]</literal>, specifying the coordinates of the image&#8217;s
+lower left. Thus, <literal>\includegraphics[1in,0.618in]{...}</literal> calls for
+the graphic to be placed so it is 1&#160;inch wide and 0.618&#160;inches
+tall and so its origin is at (0,0).
+</para>
+<para>The <filename>graphicx</filename> package gives you many more options. Specify them
+in a key-value form, as here.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+ \includegraphics[width=1in,angle=90]{lion}
+ \hspace{2em}
+ \includegraphics[angle=90,width=1in]{lion}
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<para>The options are read left-to-right. So the first graphic above is made
+one inch wide and then rotated, while the second is rotated and then
+made one inch wide. Thus, unless the graphic is perfectly square, the
+two will end with different widths and heights.
+</para>
+<para>There are many options. The primary ones are listed first.
+</para>
+<para>Note that a graphic is placed by &latex; into a box, which is
+traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the
+PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic&#8217;s printed area may
+go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when &latex; makes up a
+page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the
+graphic.
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="includegraphics-width"/><varlistentry><term><literal>width</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this width. An example
+is <literal>\includegraphics[width=1in]{plot}</literal>. You can use the standard
+&tex; dimensions (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of length</link>) and also convenient is
+<literal>\linewidth</literal>, or in a two-column document, <literal>\columnwidth</literal>
+(see <link linkend="Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</link>). An example is that by using the
+<filename>calc</filename> package you can make the graphic be 1&#160;cm narrow than
+the width of the text with
+<literal>\includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>height</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="includegraphics-height"/><para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height. You can
+use the standard &tex; dimensions (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of length</link>), and also
+convenient are <literal>\pageheight</literal> and <literal>\textheight</literal> (see <link linkend="Page-layout-parameters">Page
+layout parameters</link>). For instance, the command
+<literal>\includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]{godel}</literal> will make the
+graphic a quarter of the height of the text area.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>totalheight</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="includegraphics-totalheght"/><para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus
+depth. This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated. For
+instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero height
+but a large depth.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>keepaspectratio</literal>
+</term><listitem><anchor id="includegraphics-keepaspectratio"/><para>If set to <literal>true</literal>, or just specified as here
+</para>
+<screen><literal>\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...}</literal>
+</screen>
+<para>and you give as options both <literal>width</literal> and <literal>height</literal> (or
+<literal>totalheight</literal>), then &latex; will make the graphic is as large as
+possible without distortion. That is, &latex; will ensure that neither
+is the graphic wider than <literal>width</literal> nor taller than <literal>height</literal> (or
+<literal>totalheight</literal>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>scale</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Factor by which to scale the graphic. To make a graphic twice its
+nominal size, enter <literal>\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}</literal>. This
+number may be any value; a number between 1 and&#160;0 will shrink the
+graphic and a negative number will reflect it.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>angle</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Rotate the graphic. The angle is taken in degrees and counterclockwise.
+The graphic is rotated about its <literal>origin</literal>; see that option. For a
+complete description of how rotated material is typeset,
+see <link linkend="_005crotatebox">\rotatebox</link>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>origin</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>The point of the graphic about which the rotation happens. Possible
+values are any string containing one or two of: <literal>l</literal> for left,
+<literal>r</literal> for right, <literal>b</literal> for bottom, <literal>c</literal> for center, <literal>t</literal>
+for top, and <literal>B</literal> for baseline. Thus, entering the command
+<literal>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}</literal> will turn the
+picture upside down about that picture&#8217;s center, while the command
+<literal>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}</literal> will turn its
+picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character <literal>c</literal>
+gives the horizontal center in <literal>bc</literal> or <literal>tc</literal>, but gives the
+vertical center in <literal>lc</literal> or <literal>rc</literal>.) The default is <literal>lB</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>To rotate about an arbitrary point, see <link linkend="_005crotatebox">\rotatebox</link>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>These are lesser-used options.
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="includegraphics-viewport"/><varlistentry><term><literal>viewport</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show. Takes four arguments,
+separated by spaces and given in &tex; dimensions, as with
+<literal>\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}</literal>. The
+dimensions default to big points,&#160;<literal>bp</literal>. They are taken
+relative to the origin specified by the bounding box. See also the
+<literal>trim</literal> option.
+</para>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-trim"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>trim</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Gives parts of the graphic to not show. Takes four arguments, separated
+by spaces, that are given in &tex; dimensions, as with
+<literal>\includegraphics[.., trim= 0in 0.1in 0.2in 0.3in, ...]{...}</literal>.
+These give the amounts of the graphic not to show, that is, &latex;
+will crop the picture by 0&#160;inches on the left, 0.1&#160;inches on
+the bottom, 0.2&#160;inches on the right, and 0.3&#160;inches on the
+top. See also the <literal>viewport</literal> option.
+</para>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-clip"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>clip</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>If set to <literal>true</literal>, or just specified as here
+</para>
+<screen>\includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...}
+</screen>
+<para>then the graphic is cropped to the bounding box. This is the same as
+using the starred form of the command,
+<literal>\includegraphics*[...]{...}</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-page"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>page</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Give the page number of a multi-page PDF file. The default is
+<literal>page=1</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-pagebox"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>pagebox</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Specifies which bounding box to use for PDF files from among
+<literal>mediabox</literal>, <literal>cropbox</literal>, <literal>bleedbox</literal>, <literal>trimbox</literal>, or
+<literal>artbox</literal>. PDF files do not have the BoundingBox that PostScript
+files have, but may specify up to four predefined rectangles. The
+MediaBox gives the boundaries of the physical medium. The CropBox is the
+region to which the contents of the page are to be clipped when
+displayed. The BleedBox is the region to which the contents of the page
+should be clipped in production. The TrimBox is the intended dimensions
+of the finished page. The ArtBox is the extent of the page&#8217;s meaningful
+content. The driver will set the image size based on CropBox if
+present, otherwise it will not use one of the others, with a
+driver-defined order of preference. MediaBox is always present.
+</para>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-interpolate"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>interpolate</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Enable or disable interpolation of raster images by the viewer. Can be
+set with <literal>interpolate=true</literal> or just specified as here.
+</para>
+<screen>\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}
+</screen>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-quiet"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>quiet</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Do not write information to the log. You can set it with
+<literal>quiet=true</literal> or just specified it with
+<literal>\includegraphics[...,quite,...]{...}</literal>,
+</para>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-draft"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>draft</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>If you set it with <literal>draft=true</literal> or just specify it with
+</para>
+<screen>\includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...}
+</screen>
+<para>then the graphic will not appear in the document, possibly saving color
+printer ink. Instead, &latex; will put an empty box of the correct
+size with the filename printed in it.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>These options address the bounding box for Encapsulated PostScript
+graphic files, which have a size specified with a line
+<literal>%%BoundingBox</literal> that appears in the file. It has four values,
+giving the lower <inlineequation><mathphrase>x</mathphrase></inlineequation> coordinate, lower <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation> coordinate, upper
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>x</mathphrase></inlineequation> coordinate, and upper <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation> coordinate. The units are
+PostScript points, equivalent to &tex;&#8217;s big points, 1/72&#160;inch.
+For example, if an <filename>.eps</filename> file has the line <literal>%%BoundingBox 10
+20 40 80</literal> then its natural size is 30/72&#160;inch wide by
+60/72&#160;inch tall.
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="includegraphics-bb"/><varlistentry><term><literal>bb</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Specify the bounding box of the displayed region. The argument is four
+dimensions separated by spaces, as with <literal>\includegraphics[.., bb=
+0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}</literal>. Usually <literal>\includegraphics</literal> reads the
+BoundingBox numbers from the EPS file automatically, so this option is
+only useful if the bounding box is missing from that file or if you want
+to change it.
+</para>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-bbllx"/><anchor id="includegraphics-bblly"/><anchor id="includegraphics-bburx"/><anchor id="includegraphics-bbury"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Set the bounding box. These four are obsolete, but are retained for
+compatibility with old packages.
+</para>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-natwidth"/><anchor id="includegraphics-natheight"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>natwidth, natheight</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>An alternative for <literal>bb</literal>. Setting
+</para>
+<screen>\includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...}
+</screen>
+<para>is the same as setting <literal>bb=0 0 1in 0.618in</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-hiresbb"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>hiresbb</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>If set to <literal>true</literal>, or just specified as with
+</para>
+<screen>\includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...}
+</screen>
+<para>then &latex; will look for <literal>%%HiResBoundingBox</literal> lines instead of
+<literal>%%BoundingBox</literal> lines. (The <literal>BoundingBox</literal> lines use only
+natural numbers while the <literal>HiResBoundingBox</literal> lines use decimals;
+both use units equivalent to &tex;&#8217;s big points, 1/72&#160;inch.) To
+override a prior setting of <literal>true</literal>, you can set it to <literal>false</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>These following options allow a user to override &latex;&#8217;s method of
+choosing the graphic type based on the filename extension. An example
+is that <literal>\includegraphics[type=png,ext=.xxx,read=.xxx]{lion}</literal>
+will read the file <filename>lion.xxx</filename> as though it were
+<filename>lion.png</filename>. For more on these, see <link linkend="_005cDeclareGraphicsRule">\DeclareGraphicsRule</link>.
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="includegraphics-type"/><varlistentry><term><literal>type</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Specify the graphics type.
+</para>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-ext"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>ext</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Specify the graphics extension.
+Only use this in conjunction with the option <literal>type</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-read"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>read</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Specify the file extension of the read file.
+Only use this in conjunction with the option <literal>type</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="includegraphics-command"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>command</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Specify a command to be applied to this file. Only use this in
+conjunction with the option <literal>type</literal>. See <link linkend="Command-line-options">Command line options</link>
+for a discussion of enabling the <literal>\write18</literal> functionality to run
+external commands.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="22.3.2" id="_005crotatebox">
+<title><literal>\rotatebox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>rotation</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>rotating graphics</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>rotating text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rotatebox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis if you use the <filename>graphics</filename> package:
+</para>
+<screen>\rotatebox{<replaceable>angle</replaceable>}{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Synopses if you use the <filename>graphicx</filename> package:
+</para>
+<screen>\rotatebox{<replaceable>angle</replaceable>}{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}
+\rotatebox[<replaceable>key-value list</replaceable>]{<replaceable>angle</replaceable>}{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Put <replaceable>material</replaceable> in a box and rotate it <replaceable>angle</replaceable> degrees
+counterclockwise.
+</para>
+<para>This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \rotatebox{45}{Character} &amp;\rotatebox{45}{NATO phonetic} \\
+ A &amp;AL-FAH \\
+ B &amp;BRAH-VOH
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>The <replaceable>material</replaceable> can be anything that goes in a box, including a graphic.
+</para>
+<screen> \rotatebox[origin=c]{45}{\includegraphics[width=1in]{lion}}
+</screen>
+<para>To place the rotated material, the first step is that &latex; sets
+<replaceable>material</replaceable> in a box, with a reference point on the left baseline.
+The second step is the rotation, by default about the reference point.
+The third step is that &latex; computes a box to bound the rotated
+material. Fourth, &latex; moves this box horizontally so that the left
+edge of this new bounding box coincides with the left edge of the box
+from the first step (they need not coincide vertically). This new
+bounding box, in its new position, is what &latex; uses as the box when
+typesetting this material.
+</para>
+<para>If you use the <filename>graphics</filename> package then the rotation is about the
+reference point of the box. If you use the <filename>graphicx</filename> package
+then these are the options that can go in the <replaceable>key-value list</replaceable>,
+but note that you can get the same effect without needing this
+package, except for the <literal>x</literal> and <literal>y</literal> options
+(see <link linkend="_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</link>).
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>origin</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>The point of the <replaceable>material</replaceable>&#8217;s box about which the rotation happens.
+Possible value is any string containing one or two of: <literal>l</literal> for
+left, <literal>r</literal> for right, <literal>b</literal> for bottom, <literal>c</literal> for center,
+<literal>t</literal> for top, and <literal>B</literal> for baseline. Thus, the first line here
+</para>
+<screen>\rotatebox[origin=c]{180}{moon}
+\rotatebox[origin=lB]{180}{LeBateau}
+</screen>
+<para>will turn the picture upside down from the center while the second will
+turn its picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character
+<literal>c</literal> gives the horizontal center in <literal>bc</literal> or <literal>tc</literal> but gives
+the vertical center in <literal>lc</literal> or <literal>rc</literal>, and gives both in
+<literal>c</literal>.) The default is <literal>lB</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>x, y</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with
+<literal>\rotatebox[x=<replaceable>&tex; dimension</replaceable>,y=<replaceable>&tex;
+dimension</replaceable>]{...}</literal> (see <link linkend="Units-of-length">Units of length</link>). These give the offset
+from the box&#8217;s reference point.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>units</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>This key allows you to change the default of degrees counterclockwise.
+Setting <literal>units=-360</literal> changes the direction to degrees clockwise and
+setting <literal>units=6.283185</literal> changes to radians counterclockwise.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="22.3.3" id="_005cscalebox">
+<title><literal>\scalebox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics, scaling</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics, resizing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>scaling</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>resizing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>text, scaling</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>text, resizing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\scalebox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\reflectbox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<screen>\scalebox{<replaceable>horizontal factor</replaceable>}{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}
+\scalebox{<replaceable>horizontal factor</replaceable>}[<replaceable>vertical factor</replaceable>]{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}
+\reflectbox{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Scale the <replaceable>material</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>This example halves the size, both horizontally and vertically, of the
+first text and doubles the size of the second.
+</para>
+<screen>\scalebox{0.5}{DRINK ME} and \scalebox{2.0}{Eat Me}
+</screen>
+<para>If you do not specify the optional <replaceable>vertical factor</replaceable> then it
+defaults to the same value as the <replaceable>horizontal factor</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>You can use this command to resize a graphic, as here.
+</para>
+<screen>\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}
+</screen>
+<para>If you use the <filename>graphicx</filename> package then you can accomplish the same
+thing with optional arguments to <literal>\includegraphics</literal>
+(see <link linkend="_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</link>).
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\reflectbox</literal> command abbreviates
+<literal>\scalebox{-1}[1]{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}</literal>. Thus, <literal>Able was
+I\reflectbox{Able was I}</literal> will show the phrase &#8216;<literal>Able was I</literal>&#8217;
+immediately followed by its mirror reflection.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="22.3.4" id="_005cresizebox">
+<title><literal>\resizebox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics, scaling</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>graphics, resizing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>scaling</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>resizing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>text, scaling</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>text, resizing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\resizebox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<screen>\resizebox{<replaceable>horizontal length</replaceable>}{<replaceable>vertical length</replaceable>}{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}
+\resizebox*{<replaceable>horizontal length</replaceable>}{<replaceable>vertical length</replaceable>}{<replaceable>material</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Given a size, such as <literal>3cm</literal>, transform <replaceable>material</replaceable> to make it
+that size. If either <replaceable>horizontal length</replaceable> or <replaceable>vertical length</replaceable>
+is an exclamation point&#160;<literal>!</literal> then the other argument is used
+to determine a scale factor for both directions.
+</para>
+<para>This example makes the graphic be a half inch wide and scales it
+vertically by the same factor to keep it from being distorted.
+</para>
+<screen>\resizebox{0.5in}{!}{\includegraphics{lion}}
+</screen>
+<para>The unstarred form <literal>\resizebox</literal> takes <replaceable>vertical length</replaceable> to be
+the box&#8217;s height while the starred form <literal>\resizebox*</literal> takes it to
+be height+depth. For instance, make the text have a height+depth of a
+quarter inch with <literal>\resizebox*{!}{0.25in}{\parbox{1in}{This
+box has both height and depth.}}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>You can use <literal>\depth</literal>, <literal>\height</literal>, <literal>\totalheight</literal>, and
+<literal>\width</literal> to refer to the original size of the box. Thus, make the
+text two inches wide but keep the original height with
+<literal>\resizebox{2in}{\height}{Two inches}</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="23" id="Special-insertions">
+<title>Special insertions</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>special insertions</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>insertions of special characters</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; provides commands for inserting characters that have a
+special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="23.1" id="Reserved-characters">
+<title>Reserved characters</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>reserved characters</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, reserved</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>special characters</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, special</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&latex; sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For
+example, the percent sign&#160;<literal>%</literal> is for comments. They are
+called <firstterm>reserved characters</firstterm> or <firstterm>special characters</firstterm>.
+</para>
+<screen># $ % &amp; { } _ ~ ^ \
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\#</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\$</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\%</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\&amp;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\_</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\{</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\}</primary></indexterm>
+<para>If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
+body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
+put a backslash&#160;<literal>\</literal> in front of the character. Thus,
+typing <literal>\$1.23</literal> will produce&#160;<literal>$1.23</literal> in your output.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\~</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\^</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbackslash</primary></indexterm>
+<para>As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
+use <literal>\~{}</literal> (omitting the curly braces would result in the next
+character receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text
+body font circumflex use <literal>\^{}</literal>. To get a backslash in the font
+of the text body, enter <literal>\textbackslash{}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use
+<literal>\verb!!</literal> as below (the double backslash&#160;<literal>\\</literal> is only
+there to split the lines).
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+ \# \$ \% \&amp; \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
+ \verb!# $ % &amp; { } _ ~ ^ \!
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="23.2" id="Upper-and-lower-case">
+<title>Upper and lower case</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>uppercase</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lowercase</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, case of</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\uppercase{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\lowercase{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\MakeUppercase{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+\MakeLowercase{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Change the case of characters. The &tex; primitives commands
+<literal>\uppercase</literal> and <literal>\lowercase</literal> only work for American
+characters. The &latex; commands <literal>\MakeUppercase</literal> and
+<literal>\MakeLowercase</literal> commands also change characters accessed by
+commands such as <literal>\ae</literal> or <literal>\aa</literal>. The commands
+<literal>\MakeUppercase</literal> and <literal>\MakeLowercase</literal> are robust but they have
+moving arguments (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of a
+command within <replaceable>text</replaceable>. But they do change the case of every other
+Latin letter inside the argument <replaceable>text</replaceable>. Thus,
+<literal>\MakeUppercase{Let $y=f(x)$</literal>} produces &#8216;<literal>LET Y=F(X)</literal>&#8217;. Another
+example is that the name of an environment will be changed, so that
+<literal>\MakeUppercase{\begin{tabular} ... \end{tabular}}</literal> will
+produce an error because the first half is changed to
+<literal>\begin{TABULAR}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; uses the same fixed table for changing case throughout a
+document, The table used is designed for the font encoding T1; this
+works well with the standard &tex; fonts for all Latin alphabets but
+will cause problems when using other alphabets.
+</para>
+<para>To change the case of text that results from a macro inside <replaceable>text</replaceable>
+you need to do expansion. Here the <literal>\Schoolname</literal> produces
+&#8216;<literal>COLLEGE OF MATHEMATICS</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\schoolname}{College of Mathematics}
+\newcommand{\Schoolname}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase
+ <!-- /@w -->\expandafter{\schoolname}}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>textcase</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>textcase</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The <filename>textcase</filename> package brings some of the missing feature of the
+standard &latex; commands <literal>\MakeUppercase</literal> and
+<literal>\MakeLowerCase</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>mfirstuc</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>mfirstuc</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package
+<filename>mfirstuc</filename>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="23.3" id="Symbols-by-font-position">
+<title>Symbols by font position</title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>accessing any character of a font</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>font symbols, by number</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>You can access any character of the current font using its number with
+the <literal>\symbol</literal> command. For example, the visible space character
+used in the <literal>\verb*</literal> command has the code decimal 32, so it can be
+typed as <literal>\symbol{32}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a <literal>'</literal>
+prefix, or hexadecimal (base 16) with a <literal>&quot;</literal> prefix, so the previous
+example could also be written as <literal>\symbol{'40}</literal> or
+<literal>\symbol{&quot;20}</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="23.4" id="Text-symbols">
+<title>Text symbols</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>text symbols</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>symbols, text</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>textcomp package</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
+running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not
+available in OT1. Unless you are using Xe&latex; or Lua&latex; then
+you may need to load the <literal>textcomp</literal> package.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\copyright</primary></indexterm><literal>\copyright</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcopyright</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcopyright</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>copyright symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#169; The copyright symbol.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dag</primary></indexterm><literal>\dag</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dagger, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x2020; The dagger symbol (in text).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ddag</primary></indexterm><literal>\ddag</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>double dagger, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x2021; The double dagger symbol (in text).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\LaTeX</primary></indexterm><literal>\LaTeX</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>&latex; logo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>logo, &latex;</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The &latex; logo.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\LaTeXe</primary></indexterm><literal>\LaTeXe</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>&latex;2e logo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>logo, &latex;2e</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The &latex;2e logo.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\guillemotleft (&#171;)</primary></indexterm><literal>\guillemotleft (&#171;)</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\guillemotright (&#187;)</primary></indexterm><literal>\guillemotright (&#187;)</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\guilsinglleft (&#8249;)</primary></indexterm><literal>\guilsinglleft (&#8249;)</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\guilsinglright (&#8250;)</primary></indexterm><literal>\guilsinglright (&#8250;)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>double guillemets</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>single guillemets</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>left angle quotation marks</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>right angle quotation marks</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>double angle quotation marks</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>single angle quotation marks</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>French quotation marks</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>quotation marks, French</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#171;, &#187;, &#8249;, &#8250;
+Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ldots</primary></indexterm><literal>\ldots</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dots</primary></indexterm><literal>\dots</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textellipsis</primary></indexterm><literal>\textellipsis</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>ellipsis</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#8230; An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): <literal>\ldots</literal>
+and <literal>\dots</literal> also work in math mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lq</primary></indexterm><literal>\lq</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>left quote</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>opening quote</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#8216; Left (opening) quote.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\P</primary></indexterm><literal>\P</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textparagraph</primary></indexterm><literal>\textparagraph</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>paragraph symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>pilcrow</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x00B6; Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pounds</primary></indexterm><literal>\pounds</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textsterling</primary></indexterm><literal>\textsterling</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>pounds symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sterling symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#163; English pounds sterling.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\quotedblbase (&#8222;)</primary></indexterm><literal>\quotedblbase (&#8222;)</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\quotesinglbase (&#8218;)</primary></indexterm><literal>\quotesinglbase (&#8218;)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>double low-9 quotation mark</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>single low-9 quotation mark</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>low-9 quotation marks, single and double</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#8222; and &#8218;
+Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rq</primary></indexterm><literal>\rq</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>right quote</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>closing quote</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#8217; Right (closing) quote.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\S</primary></indexterm><literal>\S</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textsection</primary></indexterm><literal>\textsection</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>section symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x00A7; Section sign.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\TeX</primary></indexterm><literal>\TeX</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>&tex; logo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>logo, &tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The &tex; logo.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textasciicircum</primary></indexterm><literal>\textasciicircum</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>circumflex, ASCII, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ASCII circumflex, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>^ ASCII circumflex.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textasciitilde</primary></indexterm><literal>\textasciitilde</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>tilde, ASCII, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ASCII tilde, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>~ ASCII tilde.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textasteriskcentered</primary></indexterm><literal>\textasteriskcentered</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>asterisk, centered, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>centered asterisk, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>* Centered asterisk.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbackslash</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbackslash</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>backslash, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>\ Backslash.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbar</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbar</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical bar, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bar, vertical, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>| Vertical bar.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbardbl</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbardbl</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>vertical bar, double, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bar, double vertical, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>double vertical bar, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x23F8; Double vertical bar.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbigcircle</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbigcircle</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>big circle symbols, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>circle symbol, big, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x25EF; Big circle symbol.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbraceleft</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbraceleft</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>left brace, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>brace, left, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>{ Left brace.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbraceright</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbraceright</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>right brace, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>brace, right, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>} Right brace.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbullet</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbullet</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>bullet, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#8226; Bullet.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcircled{<replaceable>letter</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcircled{<replaceable>letter</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>circled letter, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x24B6; Circle around <replaceable>letter</replaceable>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcompwordmark</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcompwordmark</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcapitalcompwordmark</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcapitalcompwordmark</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textascendercompwordmark</primary></indexterm><literal>\textascendercompwordmark</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>composite word mark, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cap height</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ascender height</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Used to separate letters that would normally ligature. For example,
+<literal>f\textcompwordmark i</literal> produces &#8216;<literal>fi</literal>&#8217; without a ligature. This
+is most useful in non-English languages. The
+<literal>\textcapitalcompwordmark</literal> form has the cap height of the font
+while the <literal>\textascendercompwordmark</literal> form has the ascender height.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textdagger</primary></indexterm><literal>\textdagger</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dagger, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x2020; Dagger.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textdaggerdbl</primary></indexterm><literal>\textdaggerdbl</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dagger, double, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>double dagger, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x2021; Double dagger.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textdollar (or <literal>\$</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textdollar (or <literal>\$</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>dollar sign</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>currency, dollar</primary></indexterm>
+<para>$ Dollar sign.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textemdash (or <literal>---</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textemdash (or <literal>---</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>em-dash</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#8212; Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in
+<literal>The playoffs --- if you are fortunate enough to make the playoffs ---
+is more like a sprint.</literal>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textendash (or <literal>--</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textendash (or <literal>--</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>e-dash</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#8211; En-dash (used for ranges, as in <literal>See pages 12--14</literal>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\texteuro</primary></indexterm><literal>\texteuro</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>euro symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>currency, euro</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>eurosym</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>eurosym</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The Euro symbol: &#8364;. For an alternative glyph design, try the
+<filename>eurosym</filename> package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own
+Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textexclamdown (or <literal>!`</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textexclamdown (or <literal>!`</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>exclamation point, upside-down</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#161; Upside down exclamation point.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textgreater</primary></indexterm><literal>\textgreater</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>greater than symbol, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&gt; Greater than symbol.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textless</primary></indexterm><literal>\textless</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>less than symbol, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&lt; Less than symbol.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textleftarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\textleftarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>arrow, left, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>left arrow, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x2190; Left arrow.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textordfeminine</primary></indexterm><literal>\textordfeminine</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textordmasculine</primary></indexterm><literal>\textordmasculine</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>feminine ordinal symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>masculine ordinal symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ordinals, feminine and masculine</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#170;, &#186; Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textperiodcentered</primary></indexterm><literal>\textperiodcentered</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>period, centered, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>centered period, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x00B7; Centered period.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquestiondown (or <literal>?`</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquestiondown (or <literal>?`</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>question mark, upside-down</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#191; Upside down question mark.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotedblleft (or <literal>``</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotedblleft (or <literal>``</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>left quote, double</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>double left quote</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#8220; Double left quote.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotedblright (or <literal>''</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotedblright (or <literal>''</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>right quote, double</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>double right quote</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#8221; Double right quote.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquoteleft (or <literal>`</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquoteleft (or <literal>`</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>left quote, single</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>single left quote</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#8216; Single left quote.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquoteright (or <literal>'</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquoteright (or <literal>'</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>right quote, single</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>single right quote</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#8217; Single right quote.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotesingle</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotesingle</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>quote, single straight</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>straight single quote</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>single quote, straight</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x0027; Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotestraightbase</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotestraightbase</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotestraightdblbase</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotestraightdblbase</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>quote, straight base</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>straight quote, base</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>double quote, straight base</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>straight double quote, base</primary></indexterm>
+<!-- Unicode doesn't have these https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quotation_mark -->
+<para>Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textregistered</primary></indexterm><literal>\textregistered</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>registered symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#174; Registered symbol.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textrightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\textrightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>arrow, right, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>right arrow, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x2192; Right arrow.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textthreequartersemdash</primary></indexterm><literal>\textthreequartersemdash</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>three-quarters em-dash</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>em-dash, three-quarters</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#xFE58; &#8220;Three-quarters&#8221; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\texttrademark</primary></indexterm><literal>\texttrademark</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>trademark symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x2122; Trademark symbol.
+</para>
+<!-- ?? Diff from \textthreequartersemdash? In Unicode? -->
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\texttwelveudash</primary></indexterm><literal>\texttwelveudash</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>two-thirds em-dash</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>em-dash, two-thirds</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#xFE58; &#8220;Two-thirds&#8221; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textunderscore</primary></indexterm><literal>\textunderscore</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>underscore, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>_ Underscore.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textvisiblespace</primary></indexterm><literal>\textvisiblespace</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>visible space symbol, in text</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#x2423; Visible space symbol.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="23.5" id="Accents">
+<title>Accents</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>accents</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, accented</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letters, accented</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>polyglossia</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>polyglossia</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>multilingual support</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&latex; has wide support for many of the world&#8217;s scripts and languages,
+through the <literal>babel</literal> package and related support if you are using
+pdf&latex;, or <filename>polyglossia</filename> if you are using Xe&latex; or
+Lua&latex;. This section does not cover that support. It only lists
+the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. The
+<literal>\capital...</literal> commands shown here produce alternative forms for use
+with capital letters. These are not available with OT1.
+</para>
+<para>Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated with
+lowercase &#8216;<literal>o</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\i (dotless i)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dotless i</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Note that <literal>\i</literal> produces a dotless i,
+<!-- @dotless{i}, -->
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\j (dotless j)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dotless j</primary></indexterm>
+and <literal>\j</literal> produces a dotless j.
+<!-- @dotless{j}. -->
+These are often used in place of their dotted counterparts when they are
+accented.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\&quot;</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitaldieresis</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\&quot; (umlaut accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitaldieresis</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>umlaut accent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dieresis accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#246; Umlaut (dieresis).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\'</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalacute</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\' (acute accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalacute</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acute accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#243; Acute accent.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\.</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\. (dot-over accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dot accent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dot-over accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#559; Dot accent.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\=</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalmacron</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\= (macron accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalmacron</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>macron accent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>overbar accent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bar-over accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#333; Macron (overbar) accent.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\^</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalcircumflex</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\^ (circumflex accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalcircumflex</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>circumflex accent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>hat accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#244; Circumflex (hat) accent.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\`</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalgrave</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\` (grave accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalgrave</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>grave accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#242; Grave accent.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\~</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitaltilde</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\~ (tilde accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitaltilde</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tilde accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#241; Tilde accent.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\b</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\b (bar-under accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bar-under accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>o_ Bar accent underneath.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underbar</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>underbar</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Related to this, <literal>\underbar{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> produces a bar under
+<replaceable>text</replaceable>. The argument is always processed in LR mode
+(see <link linkend="Modes">Modes</link>). The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline,
+thus crossing through descenders. See also <literal>\underline</literal> in
+<link linkend="Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</link>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\c</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalcedilla</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\c (cedilla accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalcedilla</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cedilla accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#231; Cedilla accent underneath.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\d</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitaldotaccent</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\d (dot-under accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitaldotaccent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dot-under accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#7885; Dot accent underneath.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\H</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalhungarumlaut</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\H (Hungarian umlaut accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalhungarumlaut</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>hungarian umlaut accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#337; Long Hungarian umlaut accent.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\k</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalogonek</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\k (ogonek)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalogonek</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ogonek</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#491; Ogonek. Not available in the OT1 encoding.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\r</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalring</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\r (ring accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalring</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ring accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>o* Ring accent.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\t</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitaltie</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\newtie</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalnewtie</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\t (tie-after accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitaltie</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newtie</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalnewtie</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tie-after accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>oo[ Tie-after accent. The <literal>\newtie</literal> form is centered in
+its box.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\u</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalbreve</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\u (breve accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalbreve</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>breve accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#335; Breve accent.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\v</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalcaron</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\v (breve accent)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalcaron</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>hacek accent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>check accent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>caron accent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#466; H&#225;&#269;ek (check, caron) accent.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="23.6" id="Additional-Latin-letters">
+<title>Additional Latin letters</title>
+
+<anchor id="Non_002dEnglish-characters"/><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Latin letters, additional</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letters, additional Latin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>extended Latin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>special characters</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>non-English characters</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>characters, non-English</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting letters beyond
+A&#8211;Z that extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other
+than English.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\aa</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\AA</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\aa (&#229;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AA (&#197;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>aring</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#229; and &#197;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ae</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\AE</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ae (&#230;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AE (&#198;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ae ligature</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#230; and &#198;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\dh</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\DH</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dh (&#240;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DH (&#208;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Icelandic eth</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>eth, Icelandic letter</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Icelandic letter eth: &#240; and &#208;. Not available with OT1
+encoding, you need the <filename>fontenc</filename> package to select an alternate
+font encoding, such as T1.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\dj</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\DJ</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dj</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DJ</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke. Not
+available with OT1 encoding, you need the <filename>fontenc</filename> package to
+select an alternate font encoding, such as T1.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ij</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\IJ</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ij (ij)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\IJ (IJ)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ij letter, Dutch</primary></indexterm>
+<para>ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\l</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\L</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\l (&#322;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\L (&#321;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>polish l</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#322; and &#321;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ng</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\NG</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ng</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\NG</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\o</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\O</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\o (&#248;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\O (&#216;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>oslash</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#248; and &#216;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\oe</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\OE</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oe (&#339;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\OE (&#338;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>oe ligature</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#339; and &#338;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ss</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\SS</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ss (&#223;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\SS (SS)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>es-zet German letter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sharp S letters</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#223; and SS.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\th</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\TH</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\th (&#254;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\TH (&#222;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Icelandic thorn</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>thorn, Icelandic letter</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Icelandic letter thorn: &#254; and &#222;. Not available with OT1
+encoding, you need the <filename>fontenc</filename> package to select an alternate
+font encoding, such as T1.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="23.7" id="_005crule">
+<title><literal>\rule</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rule</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\rule{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>thickness</replaceable>}
+\rule[<replaceable>raise</replaceable>]{<replaceable>width</replaceable>}{<replaceable>thickness</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a <firstterm>rule</firstterm>, a filled-in rectangle.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Halmos symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tombstone</primary></indexterm>
+<para>This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol,
+often used to mark the end of a proof.
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>amsthm</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>amsthm</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The <filename>amsthm</filename> package includes this command, with a somewhat
+different-looking symbol.
+</para>
+<para>The mandatory arguments give the horizontal <replaceable>width</replaceable> and vertical
+<replaceable>thickness</replaceable> of the rectangle. They are rigid lengths
+(see <link linkend="Lengths">Lengths</link>). The optional argument <replaceable>raise</replaceable> is also a rigid
+length, and tells &latex; how much to raise the rule above the
+baseline, or lower it if the length is negative.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a line, a rectangle that is wide but not tall.
+</para>
+<screen>\noindent\rule{\textwidth}{0.4pt}
+</screen>
+<para>The line is the width of the page and 0.4&#160;points tall. This line
+thickness is common in &latex;.
+</para>
+<para>A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in the
+output, but can cause &latex; to change the output around it.
+See <link linkend="_005cstrut">\strut</link> for examples.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="23.8" id="_005ctoday">
+<title><literal>\today</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\today</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>date, today&#8217;s</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>today&#8217;s date</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\today
+</screen>
+<para>Produce today&#8217;s date in the format &#8216;<literal><replaceable>month</replaceable> <replaceable>dd</replaceable>,
+<replaceable>yyyy</replaceable></literal>&#8217;. An example of a date in that format is &#8216;<literal>July 4,
+1976</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>polyglossia</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>polyglossia</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Multilingual packages such as <filename>babel</filename> or <filename>polyglossia</filename>, or
+classes such as <filename>lettre</filename>, will localize <literal>\today</literal>. For example,
+the following will output &#8216;<literal>4 juillet 1976</literal>&#8217;:
+</para>
+<screen>\year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
+\documentclass{minimal}
+\usepackage[french]{babel}
+\begin{document}
+\today
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para><literal>\today</literal> uses the counters <literal>\day</literal>, <literal>\month</literal>, and
+<literal>\year</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear">\day &amp; \month &amp; \year</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>datetime</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>datetime</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A number of package on CTAN work with dates. One is <filename>datetime</filename> package
+which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO standards.
+</para>
+<para>The date is not updated as the &latex; process runs, so in principle the
+date could be incorrect by the time the program finishes.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="24" id="Splitting-the-input">
+<title>Splitting the input</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>splitting the input file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>input file</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; lets you split a large document into several smaller ones.
+This can simplify editing or allow multiple authors to work on the
+document. It can also speed processing.
+</para>
+<para>Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is always one
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>root file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>file, root</primary></indexterm>
+<firstterm>root file</firstterm>, on which &latex; compilation starts. This shows such
+a file with five included files.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{ % comment out lines below to omit compiling
+ pref,
+ chap1,
+ chap2,
+ append,
+ bib
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\include{pref}
+\mainmatter
+\include{chap1}
+\include{chap2}
+\appendix
+\include{append}
+\backmatter
+\include{bib}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>This will bring in material from <filename>pref.tex</filename>, <filename>chap1.tex</filename>,
+<filename>chap2.tex</filename>, <filename>append.tex</filename>, and <filename>bib.tex</filename>. If you compile
+this file, and then comment out all of the lines inside
+<literal>\includeonly{...}</literal> except for <literal>chap1,</literal> and compile again,
+then &latex; will only process the material in the first chapter.
+Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to print.
+However, the advantage of the <literal>\includeonly</literal> command is that
+&latex; will retain the page numbers and all of the cross reference
+information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in
+your output correctly.
+</para>
+<para>See <link linkend="Larger-book-template">Larger book template</link> for another example of <literal>\includeonly</literal>.
+</para>
+
+
+
+<sect1 label="24.1" id="_005cendinput">
+<title><literal>\endinput</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\endinput</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\endinput
+</screen>
+<para>When you <literal>\include{filename}</literal>, inside <filename>filename.tex</filename> the
+material after <literal>\endinput</literal> will not be included. This command is
+optional; if <filename>filename.tex</filename> has no <literal>\endinput</literal> then &latex;
+will read all of the file.
+</para>
+<para>For example, suppose that a document&#8217;s root file has
+<literal>\input{chap1}</literal> and this is <filename>chap1.tex</filename>.
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter{One}
+This material will appear in the document.
+\endinput
+This will not appear.
+</screen>
+<para>This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end of a
+file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during mailing.
+It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize errors is to
+put <literal>\endinput</literal> halfway through the included file and see if the
+error disappears. Now, knowing which half contains the error, moving
+<literal>\endinput</literal> to halfway through that area further narrows down the
+location. This process rapidly finds the offending line.
+</para>
+<para>After reading <literal>\endinput</literal>, &latex; continues to read to the end of
+the line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless.
+This allows you, for instance, to close an <literal>\if...</literal> with a
+<literal>\fi</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="24.2" id="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">
+<title><literal>\include</literal> &amp; <literal>\includeonly</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\include</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\includeonly</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\includeonly{ % in document preamble
+ ...
+ <replaceable>filename</replaceable>,
+ ...
+ }
+ ...
+\include{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>} % in document body
+</screen>
+<para>Bring material from the external file <filename><replaceable>filename</replaceable>.tex</filename> into a
+&latex; document.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\include</literal> command does three things: it executes
+<literal>\clearpage</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</link>), then it
+inputs the material from <filename><replaceable>filename</replaceable>.tex</filename> into the document,
+and then it does another <literal>\clearpage</literal>. This command can only
+appear in the document body. The <literal>\includeonly</literal> command controls
+which files will be read by &latex; under subsequent <literal>\include</literal>
+commands. Its list of filenames is comma-separated, and it can only
+appear in the preamble.
+</para>
+<para>This example root document, <filename>constitution.tex</filename>, brings in
+three files, <filename>preamble.tex</filename>, <filename>articles.tex</filename>, and
+<filename>amendments.tex</filename>.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+ preamble,
+ articles,
+ amendments
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\include{preamble}
+\include{articles}
+\include{amendments}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>The file <filename>preamble.tex</filename> contains no special code; you have just
+excerpted the chapter from <filename>consitution.tex</filename> and put it in a
+separate file just for editing convenience.
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter{Preamble}
+We the People of the United States,
+in Order to form a more perfect Union, ...
+</screen>
+<para>Running &latex; on <filename>constitution.tex</filename> makes the material from the
+three files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary
+files <filename>preamble.aux</filename>, <filename>articles.aux</filename>, and
+<filename>amendments.tex</filename>. These contain information such as page numbers
+and cross-references (see <link linkend="Cross-references">Cross references</link>). If you now comment out
+<literal>\includeonly</literal>&#8217;s lines with <literal>preamble</literal> and <literal>amendments</literal>
+and run &latex; again then the resulting document shows only the
+material from <filename>articles.tex</filename>, not the material from
+<filename>preamble.tex</filename> or <filename>amendments.tex</filename>. Nonetheless, all of the
+auxiliary information from the omitted files is still there, including
+the starting page number of the chapter.
+</para>
+<para>If the document preamble does not have <literal>\includeonly</literal> then
+&latex; will include all the files you call for with <literal>\include</literal>
+commands.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\include</literal> command makes a new page. To avoid that, see
+<link linkend="_005cinput">\input</link> (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary
+information).
+</para>
+<para>See <link linkend="Larger-book-template">Larger book template</link> for another example using <literal>\include</literal>
+and <literal>\includeonly</literal>. That example also uses <literal>\input</literal> for some
+material that will not necessarily start on a new page.
+</para>
+<para>File names can involve paths.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+ chapters/chap1,
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\include{chapters/chap1}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name &#8216;<literal>amo amas amat</literal>&#8217;,
+this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux:
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+ &quot;amo\space amas\space amat&quot;
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\include{&quot;amo\space amas\space amat&quot;}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>and this works under MiK&tex; on Windows:
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+ {&quot;amo amas amat&quot;}
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\include{{&quot;amo amas amat&quot;}}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>nested <literal>\include</literal>, not allowed</primary></indexterm>
+<para>You cannot use <literal>\include</literal> inside a file that is being included or
+you get &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested.</literal>&#8217; The
+<literal>\include</literal> command cannot appear in the document preamble; you will
+get &#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: Missing \begin{document}</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>If a file that you <literal>\include</literal> does not exist, for instance if you
+<literal>\include{athiesm}</literal> but you meant <literal>\include{atheism}</literal>,
+then &latex; does not give you an error but will warn you &#8216;<literal>No file
+athiesm.tex.</literal>&#8217; (It will also create <filename>athiesm.aux</filename>.)
+</para>
+<para>If you <literal>\include</literal> the root file in itself then you first get
+&#8216;<literal>LaTeX Error: Can be used only in preamble.</literal>&#8217; Later runs get
+&#8216;<literal>TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]</literal>&#8217;. To fix
+this, you must remove the inclusion <literal>\include{root}</literal> but also
+delete the file <filename><replaceable>root</replaceable>.aux</filename> and rerun &latex;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="24.3" id="_005cinput">
+<title><literal>\input</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\input</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\input{<replaceable>filename</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; processes the file as if its contents were inserted in the
+current file. For a more sophisticated inclusion mechanism see
+<link linkend="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">\include &amp; \includeonly</link>.
+</para>
+<para>If <replaceable>filename</replaceable> does not end in &#8216;<literal>.tex</literal>&#8217; then &latex; first tries
+the filename with that extension; this is the usual case. If
+<replaceable>filename</replaceable> ends with &#8216;<literal>.tex</literal>&#8217; then &latex; looks for the
+filename as it is.
+</para>
+<para>For example, this
+</para>
+<screen>\input{macros}
+</screen>
+<para>will cause &latex; to first look for <filename>macros.tex</filename>. If it finds
+that file then it processes its contents as thought they had been
+copy-pasted in. If there is no file of the name <filename>macros.tex</filename> then
+&latex; tries the name <filename>macros</filename>, without an extension. (This may
+vary by distribution.)
+</para>
+<para>To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name &#8216;<literal>amo amas amat</literal>&#8217;,
+this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux:
+</para>
+<screen>\input{&quot;amo\space amas\space amat&quot;}
+</screen>
+<para>and this works under MiK&tex; on Windows:
+</para>
+<screen>\input{{&quot;amo amas amat&quot;}}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="25" id="Front_002fback-matter">
+<title>Front/back matter</title>
+
+
+
+<sect1 label="25.1" id="Table-of-contents-etc_002e">
+<title>Table of contents etc.</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>table of contents, creating</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tableofcontents</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>.toc file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\listoffigures</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\listoftables</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>.lof file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>.lot file</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\tableofcontents
+\listoffigures
+\listoftables
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a table of contents, or list of figures, or list of tables. Put
+the command in the input file where you want the table or list to
+go. You do not type the entries; for example, typically the table of
+contents entries are automatically generated from the sectioning
+commands <literal>\chapter</literal>, etc.
+</para>
+<para>This example illustrates the first command, <literal>\tableofcontents</literal>.
+&latex; will produce a table of contents on the book&#8217;s first page.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+% \setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+ ...
+\chapter{...}
+ ...
+\section{...}
+ ...
+\subsection{...}
+ ...
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter
+and section listings but not subsection listings, because the
+<literal>\section</literal> command has level&#160;1. See <link linkend="Sectioning">Sectioning</link> for level
+numbers of the sectioning units. For more on the <literal>tocdepth</literal>
+see <link linkend="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</link>.
+</para>
+<para>Another example of the use of <literal>\tableofcontents</literal> is in <link linkend="Larger-book-template">Larger
+book template</link>.
+</para>
+<para>If you want a page break after the table of contents, write a
+<literal>\newpage</literal> command after the <literal>\tableofcontents</literal> command, as
+above.
+</para>
+<para>To make the table of contents &latex; stores the information in an
+auxiliary file named <filename><replaceable>root-file</replaceable>.toc</filename> (see <link linkend="Splitting-the-input">Splitting the
+input</link>). For example, this &latex; file <filename>test.tex</filename>
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+\section{First section}
+\subsection{First subsection}
+ ...
+</screen>
+<para>writes the following line to <filename>test.toc</filename>.
+</para>
+<screen>\contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}First section}{2}
+\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}First subsection}{2}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>section</literal> or <literal>subsection</literal> is the sectioning unit. The
+hook <literal>\numberline</literal> lets you to change how the information appears
+in the table of contents. Of its two arguments, <literal>1</literal> or <literal>1.1</literal>
+is the sectioning unit number and <literal>First section</literal> or <literal>First
+subsection</literal> is the title. Finally, <literal>2</literal> is the page number on which
+the sectioning units start.
+</para>
+<para>One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to get the
+contents page correct you must run &latex; twice, once to store the
+information and once to get it. In particular, the first time that you
+run &latex; on a new document, the table of contents page will be empty
+except for its &#8216;<literal>Contents</literal>&#8217; header. Just run it again.
+</para>
+<para>The commands <literal>\listoffigures</literal> and <literal>\listoftables</literal> produce a
+list of figures and a list of tables. They work the same way as the
+contents commands; for instance, these work with information stored in
+<filename>.lof</filename> and <filename>.lot</filename> files.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>polyglossia</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>polyglossia</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>To change the header for the table of contents page do something like
+the first line here.
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents}
+\renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots}
+\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Tables}
+</screen>
+<para>Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two.
+Internationalization packages such as <filename>babel</filename> or <filename>polyglossia</filename>
+will change the headers depending on the chosen base language.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>tocloft</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>tocloft</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>tocbibbind</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>tocbibbind</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures
+and tables. One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the
+default, such as spacing, is <filename>tocloft</filename>. And, <filename>tocbibbind</filename>
+will automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to the table of
+contents.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="25.1.1" id="_005caddcontentsline">
+<title><literal>\addcontentsline</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addcontentsline</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>table of contents entry, manually adding</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\addcontentsline{<replaceable>ext</replaceable>}{<replaceable>unit</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\contentsline</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Add an entry to the file specified by <replaceable>ext</replaceable>. Usually <replaceable>ext</replaceable> is
+one of <literal>toc</literal> for the table of contents, <literal>lof</literal> for the list of
+figures, or <literal>lot</literal> for the list of tables.
+</para>
+<para>The following will result in an &#8216;<literal>Appendices</literal>&#8217; line in the table of
+contents.
+</para>
+<screen>\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+</screen>
+<para>It will appear at the same indentation level as the sections, will be in
+boldface, and will be assigned the page number associated with the point
+where it appears in the input file.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> command writes information to the file
+<filename><replaceable>root-name</replaceable>.<replaceable>ext</replaceable></filename>. It writes that information as the
+text of the command
+<literal>\contentsline{<replaceable>unit</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}{<replaceable>num</replaceable>}</literal>, where
+<literal><replaceable>num</replaceable></literal> is the current value of counter <literal><replaceable>unit</replaceable></literal>. The
+most common case is the table of contents and there <replaceable>num</replaceable> is the
+page number of the first page of <replaceable>unit</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>This command is invoked by the sectioning commands <literal>\chapter</literal>,
+etc., and also by <literal>\caption</literal> inside a float environment. But it is
+also used by authors. For example, in a book to have the preface
+unnumbered, you may use the starred <literal>\chapter*</literal>. But that does not
+put in table of contents information, so you can enter it manually, as
+here.
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter*{Preface}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\protect\numberline{}Preface}
+</screen>
+<para>In the <filename>.toc</filename> file &latex; will put the line <literal>\contentsline
+{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}</literal>; note the page number
+&#8216;<literal>3</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<!-- xx how hardwired are these values? other unit names? -->
+
+<para>All of the arguments for <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> are required.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>ext</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Typically one of the strings <literal>toc</literal> for the table of contents,
+<literal>lof</literal> for the list of figures, or <literal>lot</literal> for the list of
+tables. The filename extension of the information file.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>unit</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>A string that depends on the value of the <replaceable>ext</replaceable> argument:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>toc</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>For the table of contents, this is the name of a sectional unit:
+<literal>part</literal>, <literal>chapter</literal>, <literal>section</literal>, <literal>subsection</literal>, etc.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>lof</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>For the list of figures: <literal>figure</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>lot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>For the list of tables: <literal>table</literal>.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>text</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>The text of the entry. You must <literal>\protect</literal> any commands that are
+fragile (see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> command has an interaction with
+<literal>\include</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">\include &amp; \includeonly</link>). If you use them at
+the same level, as with
+<literal>\addcontentsline{...}{...}{...}\include{...}</literal> then lines
+in the table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution
+is to move <literal>\addcontentsline</literal> into the file being included.
+</para>
+<para>If you use a <replaceable>unit</replaceable> that &latex; does not recognize, as here
+</para>
+<screen>\addcontentsline{toc}{setcion}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+</screen>
+<para>then you don&#8217;t get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
+will not make sense.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="25.1.2" id="_005caddtocontents">
+<title><literal>\addtocontents</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addtocontents{<replaceable>ext</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\addtocontents{<replaceable>ext</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Add <replaceable>text</replaceable>, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to
+the auxiliary file with extension <replaceable>ext</replaceable>. This is most commonly used
+for the table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also
+applies to the list of figures and list of tables.
+</para>
+<para>This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the
+&#8216;<literal>Contents</literal>&#8217; header.
+</para>
+<screen>\tableofcontents\newpage
+\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace*{3ex}}
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\addtocontents</literal> command has two arguments. Both are
+required.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>ext</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Typically one of: <filename>toc</filename> for the table of contents, <filename>lof</filename> for
+the list of figures, or <filename>lot</filename> for the list of tables. The
+extension of the file holding the information.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>text</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>The text, and possibly commands, to be written.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>The sectioning commands such as <literal>\chapter</literal> use the
+<literal>\addcontentsline</literal> command to store information. This command
+creates lines in the <filename>.toc</filename> auxiliary file containing the
+<literal>\contentsline</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</link>). In contrast,
+the command <literal>\addtocontents</literal> puts material directly in that file.
+</para>
+<para>The <literal>\addtocontents</literal> command has an interaction with
+<literal>\include</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">\include &amp; \includeonly</link>). If you use them at
+the same level, as with
+<literal>\addtocontents{...}{...}\include{...}</literal> then lines in the
+table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution is to
+move <literal>\addtocontents</literal> into the file being included.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="25.1.3" id="_005cnofiles">
+<title><literal>\nofiles</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nofiles</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\nofiles
+</screen>
+<para>Prevent &latex; from writing any auxiliary files. The only output will
+be the <filename>.log</filename> and <filename>.pdf</filename> (or <filename>.dvi</filename>) files. This command
+must go in the preamble.
+</para>
+<para>Because of the <literal>\nofiles</literal> command this example will not produce a
+<filename>.toc</filename> file.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\nofiles
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+\chapter{...}
+ ...
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; will not erase any existing auxiliary files, so if you insert
+the <literal>\nofiles</literal> command after you have run the file and gotten
+a <filename>.toc</filename> then the table of contents page will continue to show
+the old information.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.2" id="Indexes">
+<title>Indexes</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>indexes</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makeindex</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\index</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.idx</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>This document has an index.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{makeidx} \makeindex
+ ...
+\begin{document}
+ ...
+Recall Wilson's Theorem: \index{Wilson's Theorem}
+a number \( n&gt;1 \) is prime if and only if the factorial of \( n-1 \)
+is congruent to \( -1 \) modulo~\( n \).
+ ...
+\printindex
+ ...
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>\usepackage{makeidx}</literal> and <literal>\makeindex</literal> in the preamble
+bring in the relevant commands.
+</para>
+<para>Producing an index is a three stage process. First, in the document
+body you declare index entries with the <literal>\index</literal> command
+(see <link linkend="_005cindex">\index</link>). When you run &latex;, the <literal>\index</literal> writes its
+information to an auxiliary file <filename><replaceable>root-name</replaceable>.idx</filename>. Next, to
+alphabetize and to do other manipulations you run an external command,
+typically <command>makeindex</command> or <command>xindy</command> (see <link linkend="makeindex">makeindex</link>).
+These output a file <filename><replaceable>root-name</replaceable>.ind</filename>. Finally, you bring the
+information back into your document and typeset it with the
+<literal>\printindex</literal> command (see <link linkend="_005cprintindex">\printindex</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>showidx</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>showidx</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>multind</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>multind</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>There are many packages that apply to indexing commands. The
+<literal>showidx</literal> package causes each index entries to be shown in the
+margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing
+the index. The <literal>multind</literal> package supports multiple indexes. See
+also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic,
+<ulink url="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind</ulink>.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="25.2.1" id="_005cindex">
+<title><literal>\index</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index entry</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\index</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\index{<replaceable>index-entry-string</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Declare an entry in the index. This command is fragile
+(see <link linkend="_005cprotect">\protect</link>).
+</para>
+<para>For example, as described in <link linkend="Indexes">Indexes</link>, one way to get an index from
+what&#8217;s below is to compile the document with <literal>pdflatex test</literal>, then
+process the index entries with <literal>makeindex test</literal>, and then compile
+again with <literal>pdflatex test</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+ ...
+Ackermann function\index{Ackermann!function}
+ ...
+rate of growth\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate}
+</screen>
+<para>All three index entries will get a page number, such as &#8216;<literal>Ackermann,
+22</literal>&#8217;. &latex; will format the second as a subitem of the first, on the
+line below it and indented, and the third as a subitem of the second.
+Three levels deep is as far as you can nest subentries. (If you add
+<literal>\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison}</literal> then
+<command>makeindex</command> says &#8216;<literal>Scanning input file test.idx....done (4
+entries accepted, 1 rejected)</literal>&#8217; and nothing appears in the index).
+</para>
+<para>If you enter a second <literal>\index</literal> with the same
+<replaceable>index-entry-string</replaceable> then you will get a single index entry with two
+page numbers (unless they happen to fall on the same page). Thus,
+adding <literal>as for Ackermann.\index{Ackermann}</literal> later in the same
+document as above will give an index entry like &#8216;<literal>Ackermann, 22,
+151</literal>&#8217;. Also, you can enter the index entries in any order, so for
+instance <literal>\index{Ackermann!function}</literal> could come before
+<literal>\index{Ackermann}</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index, page range</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Get a page range in the output, like &#8216;<literal>Hilbert, 23--27</literal>&#8217;, as here.
+</para>
+<screen>W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+ ...
+D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\(}
+ ...
+disapproved of his marriage.\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\)}
+</screen>
+<para>If the beginning and ending of the page range are equal then the system
+just gives a single page entry, not a range.
+</para>
+<para>If you index subentries but not a main entry, as with
+<literal>\index{Jones!program}</literal> and <literal>\index{Jones!results}</literal>, then
+the output is the item &#8216;<literal>Jones</literal>&#8217; with no comma or page number,
+followed by two subitems, like &#8216;<literal>program, 50</literal>&#8217; and &#8216;<literal>results,
+51</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>&#8216;see&#8217; and &#8216;see also&#8217; index entries</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index entries, &#8216;see&#8217; and &#8216;see also&#8217;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\seename</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\alsoname</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>babel</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>babel</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>polyglossia</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>polyglossia</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+<para>Generate a index entry that says &#8216;<literal>See</literal>&#8217; by using a vertical bar
+character: <literal>\index{Ackermann!function|see{P\'eter's
+function}}</literal>. You can instead get &#8216;<literal>See also</literal>&#8217; with <literal>seealso</literal>.
+(The text &#8216;<literal>See</literal>&#8217; is defined by <literal>\seename</literal>, and &#8216;<literal>See also</literal>&#8217;
+by <literal>\alsoname</literal>. You can redefine these either by using an
+internationalization package such as <filename>babel</filename> or <filename>polyglossia</filename>,
+or directly as with <literal>\renewcommand{\alsoname}[1]{Also see
+#1}</literal>.)
+</para>
+<para>The &#8216;<literal>See</literal>&#8217; feature is part of a more general functionality. After
+the vertical bar you can put the name of a one-input command, as in
+<literal>\index{group|textit}</literal> (note the missing backslash on the
+<literal>\textit</literal> command) and the system will apply that command to the
+page number, here giving something like <literal>\textit{7}</literal>. You can
+define your own one-input commands, such as
+<literal>\newcommand{\definedpage}[1]{{\color{blue}#1}}</literal> and then
+<literal>\index{Ackermann!function|definedpage}</literal> will give a blue page
+number (see <link linkend="Color">Color</link>). Another, less practical, example is this,
+</para>
+<!-- credit Ian Thompson https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/272572/121234 -->
+<screen>\newcommand\indexownpage[1]{#1, \thepage}
+ ... Epimenides.\index{self-reference|indexownpage}
+</screen>
+<para>which creates an entry citing the page number of its own index listing.
+</para>
+<para>The two functions just described combine, as here
+</para>
+<screen>\index{Ackermann!function|(definedpage}
+ ...
+\index{Ackermann!function|)}
+</screen>
+<para>which outputs an index entry like &#8216;<literal>function, 23--27</literal>&#8217; where the page
+number range is in blue.
+</para>
+<para>Consider an index entry such as &#8216;<literal>&#x03B1;-ring</literal>&#8217;. Entering
+it as <literal>$\alpha$-ring</literal> will cause it to be alphabetized according to
+the dollar sign. You can instead enter it using an at-sign, as
+<literal>\index{alpha-ring@$\alpha$-ring}</literal>. If you specify an entry
+with an at-sign separating two strings, <literal><replaceable>pos</replaceable>@<replaceable>text</replaceable></literal>,
+then <replaceable>pos</replaceable> gives the alphabetical position of the entry while
+<replaceable>text</replaceable> produces the text of the entry. Another example is that
+<literal>\index{Saint Michael's College@SMC}</literal> produces an index entry
+&#8216;<literal>SMC</literal>&#8217; alphabetized into a different location than its spelling
+would naturally give it.
+</para>
+<para>To put a <literal>!</literal>, or <literal>@</literal>, or <literal>|</literal> character in an index
+entry, preceding it with a double quote, <literal>&quot;</literal>. (The double quote
+gets deleted before alphabetization.)
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>index</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>index</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond that
+provided by <filename>makeidx</filename>. One is <filename>index</filename>, which allows for
+multiple indices and contains a command
+<literal>\index*{<replaceable>index-entry-string</replaceable>}</literal> that prints the
+<replaceable>index-entry-string</replaceable> as well as indexing it.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indexentry</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>idx file</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The <literal>\index</literal> command writes the indexing information to the file
+<filename><replaceable>root-name</replaceable>.idx</filename> file. Specifically, it writes text of the
+command
+<literal>\indexentry{<replaceable>index-entry-string</replaceable>}{<replaceable>page-num</replaceable>}</literal>,
+where <replaceable>page-num</replaceable> is the value of the <literal>\thepage</literal> counter. On
+occasion, when the <literal>\printindex</literal> command is confused, you have to
+delete this file to start with a fresh slate.
+</para>
+<para>If you omit the closing brace of an <literal>\index</literal> command then you get a
+message like this.
+</para>
+<screen>Runaway argument? {Ackermann!function
+! Paragraph ended before \@wrindex was complete.
+</screen>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="25.2.2" id="makeindex">
+<title><command>makeindex</command></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index, processing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>makeindex</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><command>makeindex</command> program</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.ind</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.idx</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>makeindex <replaceable>filename</replaceable>
+makeindex -s <replaceable>style-file</replaceable> <replaceable>filename</replaceable>
+makeindex <replaceable>options</replaceable> <replaceable>filename0</replaceable> ...
+</screen>
+<para>Sort, and otherwise process, the index information in the auxiliary file
+<replaceable>filename</replaceable>. This is a command line program. It takes one or more
+raw index files, <filename><replaceable>filename</replaceable>.idx</filename> files, and produces the
+actual index file, the <filename><replaceable>filename</replaceable>.ind</filename> file that is input by
+<literal>\printindex</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cprintindex">\printindex</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.isty</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>index, style file</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>makeindex, style file</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The first form of the command suffices for many uses. The second allows
+you to format the index by using an <firstterm>index style file</firstterm>, a
+<filename>.isty</filename> file. The third form is the most general; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>This is a simple <filename>.isty</filename> file.
+</para>
+<screen>% book.isty
+% $ makeindex -s book.isty -p odd book.idx
+% creates the index as book.ind, starting on an odd page.
+preamble
+&quot;\\pagestyle{empty}
+\\small
+\\begin{theindex}
+\\thispagestyle{empty}&quot;
+
+postamble
+&quot;\n
+\\end{theindex}&quot;
+</screen>
+<para>The description here covers only some of the index formatting
+possibilities in <replaceable>style-file</replaceable>. For a full list see the documentation
+on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>A style file consists of a list of pairs: <replaceable>specifier</replaceable> and
+<replaceable>attribute</replaceable>. These can appear in the file in any order. All of the
+<replaceable>attributes</replaceable> are strings, except where noted. Strings are
+surrounded with double quotes, <literal>&quot;</literal>, and the maximum length of a
+string is 144 characters. The <literal>\n</literal> is for a newline and <literal>\t</literal>
+is for a tab. Backslashes are escaped with another backslash,
+<literal>\\</literal>. If a line begins with a percent sign, <literal>%</literal>, then it is a
+comment.
+</para>
+<variablelist><anchor id="makeindex-preamble"/><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>preamble</primary></indexterm><literal>preamble</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Preamble of the output file. Defines the context in which the index is
+formatted. Default: <literal>&quot;\\begin{theindex}\n&quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-postamble"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>postamble</primary></indexterm><literal>postamble</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Postamble of the output file. Default: <literal>&quot;\n\n\\end{theindex}\n&quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-group-skip"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>group_skip</primary></indexterm><literal>group_skip</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indexspace</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group for
+entries starting with &#8216;<literal>a</literal>&#8217;, etc. This specifier gives what is
+inserted when a new group begins. Default: <literal>&quot;\n\n \\indexspace\n&quot;</literal>
+(<literal>\indexspace</literal> is a rubber length with default value <literal>10pt
+plus5pt minus3pt</literal>).
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-letheadflag"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>lethead_flag</primary></indexterm><literal>lethead_flag</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>An integer. It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter. If
+it is 0 (which is the default) then other than <literal>group_skip</literal> nothing
+will be inserted before the group. If it is positive then at a new
+letter the <literal>lethead_prefix</literal> and <literal>lethead_suffix</literal> will be
+inserted, with that letter in uppercase between them. If it is negative
+then what will be inserted is the letter in lowercase. The default
+is&#160;0.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-lethead-prefix"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>lethead_prefix</primary></indexterm><literal>lethead_prefix</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>If a new group begins with a different letter then this is the prefix
+inserted before the new letter header. Default: <literal>&quot;&quot;</literal>
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-lethead-suffix"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>lethead_suffix</primary></indexterm><literal>lethead_suffix</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>If a group begins with a different letter then this is the suffix
+inserted after the new letter header. Default: <literal>&quot;&quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-0"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_0</primary></indexterm><literal>item_0</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is put between two level&#160;0 items. Default: <literal>&quot;\n \\item
+&quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-1"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_1</primary></indexterm><literal>item_1</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Put between two level&#160;1 items. Default: <literal>&quot;\n \\subitem &quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-2"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_2</primary></indexterm><literal>item_2</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>put between two level&#160;2 items. Default: <literal>&quot;\n \\subsubitem &quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-01"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_01</primary></indexterm><literal>item_01</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is put between a level&#160;0 item and a level&#160;1 item.
+Default: <literal>&quot;\n \\subitem &quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-x1"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_x1</primary></indexterm><literal>item_x1</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is put between a level&#160;0 item and a level&#160;1 item in the
+case that the level&#160;0 item doesn&#8217;t have any page numbers (as in
+<literal>\index{aaa|see{bbb}}</literal>). Default: <literal>&quot;\n \\subitem &quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-12"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_12</primary></indexterm><literal>item_12</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is put between a level&#160;1 item and a level&#160;2 item.
+Default: <literal>&quot;\n \\subsubitem &quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-item-x2"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>item_x2</primary></indexterm><literal>item_x2</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is put between a level&#160;1 item and a level&#160;2 item, if the
+level&#160;1 item doesn&#8217;t have page numbers. Default: <literal>&quot;\n
+\\subsubitem &quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-delim-0"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>delim_0</primary></indexterm><literal>delim_0</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Delimiter put between a level&#160;0 key and its first page
+number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, <literal>&quot;, &quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-delim-1"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>delim_1</primary></indexterm><literal>delim_1</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Delimiter put between a level&#160;1 key and its first page
+number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, <literal>&quot;, &quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-delim-2"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>delim_2</primary></indexterm><literal>delim_2</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Delimiter between a level&#160;2 key and its first page number. Default:
+a comma followed by a blank, <literal>&quot;, &quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-delim-n"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>delim_n</primary></indexterm><literal>delim_n</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Delimiter between two page numbers for the same key (at any
+level). Default: a comma followed by a blank, <literal>&quot;, &quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-delim-r"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>delim_r</primary></indexterm><literal>delim_r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is put between the starting and ending page numbers of a range.
+Default: <literal>&quot;--&quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-line-max"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>line_max</primary></indexterm><literal>line_max</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>An integer. Maximum length of an index entry&#8217;s line in the output,
+beyond which the line wraps. Default: <literal>72</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-indent-space"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>indent_space</primary></indexterm><literal>indent_space</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>What is inserted at the start of a wrapped line. Default:
+<literal>&quot;\t\t&quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-indent-length"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>indent_length</primary></indexterm><literal>indent_length</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>A number. The length of the wrapped line indentation. The default
+<literal>indent_space</literal> is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the
+default here is <literal>16</literal>.
+</para>
+<anchor id="makeindex-page-precedence"/></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>page_precedence</primary></indexterm><literal>page_precedence</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>A document may have pages numbered in different ways. For example, a
+book may have front matter pages numbered in lowercase roman while main
+matter pages are in arabic. This string specifies the order in which
+they will appear in the index. The <command>makeindex</command> command supports
+five different types of numerals: lowercase roman <literal>r</literal>, and numeric
+or arabic <literal>n</literal>, and lowercase alphabetic <literal>a</literal>, and uppercase
+roman <literal>R</literal>, and uppercase alphabetic <literal>A</literal>. Default:
+<literal>&quot;rnaRA&quot;</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>xindy</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><command>xindy</command> program</primary></indexterm>
+<para>There are a number of other programs that do the job
+<command>makeindex</command> does. One is <command>xindy</command>, which does
+internationalization and can process indexes for documents marked up
+using &latex; and a number of other languages. It is highly
+configurable, both in markup terms and in terms of the collating order
+of the text, as described in its documentation.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="25.2.3" id="_005cprintindex">
+<title><command>\printindex</command></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>index, printing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\printindex</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\printindex
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\printindex</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Place the index into the output.
+</para>
+<para>To get an index you must first include
+<literal>\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex</literal> in the document preamble and
+compile the document, then run the system command <command>makeindex</command>,
+and then compile the document again. See <link linkend="Indexes">Indexes</link> for further
+discussion and an example of the use of <literal>\printindex</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.3" id="Glossaries">
+<title>Glossaries</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>glossary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>glossaries</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acronyms, list of</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makeglossary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\printglossaries</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+ ...
+\newglossaryentry{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}{<replaceable>settings</replaceable>}
+ ...
+\gls{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}.
+ ...
+\printglossaries
+</screen>
+<para>The <filename>glossaries</filename> package allows you to make glossaries, including
+multiple glossaries, as well as lists of acronyms.
+</para>
+<para>To get the output from this example, compile the document (for instance
+with <literal>pdflatex filename</literal>), then run the command line command
+<literal>makeglossaries filename</literal>, and then compile the document again.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{...}
+\usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+\newglossaryentry{tm}{%
+ name={Turing machine},
+ description={A model of a machine that computes. The model is simple
+ but can compute anything any existing device can compute.
+ It is the standard model used in Computer Science.},
+ }
+\begin{document}
+Everything begins with the definition of a \gls{tm}.
+ ...
+\printglossaries
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>That gives two things. In the main text it outputs &#8216;<literal>... definition
+of a Turing machine</literal>&#8217;. In addition, in a separate sectional unit headed
+&#8216;<literal>Glossary</literal>&#8217; there appears a description list. In boldface it says
+&#8216;<literal>Turing machine</literal>&#8217; and the rest of the item says in normal type
+&#8216;<literal>A model of a machine &#8230; Computer Science</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makeglossary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\printglossaries</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><filename>.glo</filename> file</primary></indexterm>
+<para>The command <literal>\makeglossary</literal> opens the file that will contain the
+entry information, <filename><replaceable>root-file</replaceable>.glo</filename>. Put the
+<literal>\printglossaries</literal> command where you want the glossaries to appear
+in your document.
+</para>
+<para>The <filename>glossaries</filename> package is very powerful. For instance, besides
+the commands <literal>\newglossaryentry</literal> and <literal>\gls</literal>, there are similar
+commands for a list of acronyms. See the package documentations on
+CTAN.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="25.3.1" id="_005cnewglossaryentry">
+<title><literal>\newglossaryentry</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>glossary, entries</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newglossaryentry</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\newglossaryentry{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}
+{
+ name={<replaceable>name</replaceable>},
+ description={<replaceable>description</replaceable>},
+ <replaceable>other options</replaceable>, ...
+}
+</screen>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<screen>\longnewglossaryentry{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}
+{
+ name={<replaceable>name</replaceable>},
+ <replaceable>other options</replaceable> ...,
+}
+{<replaceable>description</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Declare a new entry for a glossary. The <replaceable>label</replaceable> must be unique for
+the document. The settings associated with the label are pairs:
+<literal><replaceable>key</replaceable>=<replaceable>value</replaceable></literal>.
+</para>
+<para>This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers &#x211D; in the
+glossary.
+</para>
+<screen>\newglossaryentry{R}
+{
+ name={\ensuremath{\mathbb{R}}},
+ description={the real numbers},
+}
+</screen>
+<para>Use the second command form if the <replaceable>description</replaceable> spans more than one
+paragraph.
+</para>
+<para>For a full list of <replaceable>key</replaceable>s see the package documentation on CTAN but
+here are a few.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>name</primary></indexterm><literal>name</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(Required.) The word, phrase, or symbol that you are defining.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>description</primary></indexterm><literal>description</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(Required.) The description that will appear in the glossary.
+If this has more than one paragraph then you must use the second command
+form given in the synopsis.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>plural</primary></indexterm><literal>plural</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>The plural form of <replaceable>name</replaceable>. Refer to the plural form using
+<literal>\glspl</literal> or <literal>\Glspl</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cgls">\gls</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>sort</primary></indexterm><literal>sort</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>How to place this entry in the list of entries that the glossary holds.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>symbol</primary></indexterm><literal>symbol</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>A symbol, such as a mathematical symbol, besides the name.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="25.3.2" id="_005cgls">
+<title><literal>\gls</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>glossary, entry reference</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\gls</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\gls{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}
+\glspl{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}
+\Gls{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}
+\Glspl{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Refer to a glossary entry. The entries are declared with
+<literal>\newglossaryentry</literal> (see <link linkend="_005cnewglossaryentry">\newglossaryentry</link>).
+</para>
+<para>This
+</para>
+<screen>\newglossaryentry{N}{%
+ name={the natural numbers},
+ description={The numbers $0$, $1$, $2$, $\ldots$\@},
+ symbol={\ensuremath{\mathbb{N}}},
+ }
+ ...
+Consider \gls{N}.
+</screen>
+<para>gives the output &#8216;<literal>Consider the natural numbers</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>The second command form <literal>\glspl{<replaceable>label</replaceable>}</literal> produces the plural
+of <replaceable>name</replaceable> (by default it tries adding an &#8216;<literal>s</literal>&#8217;). The third form
+capitalizes the first letter of <replaceable>name</replaceable>, as does the fourth form,
+which also takes the plural.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="26" id="Letters">
+<title>Letters</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letters, writing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>writing letters</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{letter}
+\address{<replaceable>senders address</replaceable>} % return address
+\signature{<replaceable>sender name</replaceable>}
+\begin{document}
+\begin{letter}{<replaceable>recipient address</replaceable>}
+\opening{<replaceable>salutation</replaceable>}
+ <replaceable>letter body</replaceable>
+\closing{<replaceable>closing text</replaceable>}
+\end{letter}
+ ...
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>Produce one or more letters.
+</para>
+<para>Each letter is in a separate <literal>letter</literal> environment, whose argument
+<replaceable>recipient address</replaceable> often contains multiple lines separated with a
+double backslash,&#160;(<literal>\\</literal>). For example, you might have:
+</para>
+<screen> \begin{letter}{Ninon de l'Enclos \\
+ l'h\^otel Sagonne}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+</screen>
+<para>The start of the <literal>letter</literal> environment resets the page number to 1,
+and the footnote number to 1 also.
+</para>
+<para>The <replaceable>sender address</replaceable> and <replaceable>sender name</replaceable> are common to all of the
+letters, whether there is one or more, so these are best put in the
+preamble. As with the recipient address, often <replaceable>sender address</replaceable>
+contains multiple lines separated by a double
+backslash&#160;(<literal>\\</literal>). &latex; will put the <replaceable>sender name</replaceable>
+under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
+hand-written signature.
+</para>
+<para>Each <literal>letter</literal> environment body begins with a required
+<literal>\opening</literal> command such as <literal>\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}</literal>.
+The <replaceable>letter body</replaceable> text is ordinary &latex; so it can contain
+everything from enumerated lists to displayed math, except that commands
+such as <literal>\chapter</literal> that make no sense in a letter are turned off.
+Each <literal>letter</literal> environment body typically ends with a
+<literal>\closing</literal> command such as <literal>\closing{Yours,}</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ for letters</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Additional material may come after the <literal>\closing</literal>. You can say who
+is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like <literal>\cc{the
+Boss \\ the Boss's Boss}</literal>. There&#8217;s a similar <literal>\encl</literal> command for
+a list of enclosures. And, you can add a postscript with <literal>\ps</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&#8217;s default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it
+by a length of <literal>\longindentation</literal>. By default this is
+<literal>0.5\textwidth</literal>. To make them flush left, put
+<literal>\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}</literal> in your preamble.
+</para>
+<para>To set a fixed date use something like
+<literal>\renewcommand{\today}{1958-Oct-12}</literal>. If put in your preamble
+then it will apply to all the letters.
+</para>
+<para>This example shows only one <literal>letter</literal> environment. The three lines
+marked as optional are typically omitted.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{letter}
+\address{Sender's street \\ Sender's town}
+\signature{Sender's name \\ Sender's title}
+% optional: \location{Mailbox 13}
+% optional: \telephone{(102) 555-0101}
+\begin{document}
+\begin{letter}{Recipient's name \\ Recipient's address}
+\opening{Sir:}
+% optional: \thispagestyle{firstpage}
+I am not interested in entering a business arrangement with you.
+\closing{Your most humble, etc.,}
+\end{letter}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>These commands are used with the <literal>letter</literal> class.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="26.1" id="_005caddress">
+<title><literal>\address</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\address</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\address{<replaceable>senders address</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Specify the return address, as it appears on the letter and on the
+envelope. Separate multiple lines in <replaceable>senders address</replaceable> with a
+double backslash,&#160;<literal>\\</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often put
+in the preamble. However, it can go anywhere, including inside an
+individual <literal>letter</literal> environment.
+</para>
+<para>This command is optional: if you do not use it then the letter is
+formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto pre-printed
+letterhead paper. If you do use the <literal>\address</literal> declaration then it
+is formatted as a personal letter.
+</para>
+<para>Here is an example.
+</para>
+<screen>\address{Stephen Maturin \\
+ The Grapes of the Savoy}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="26.2" id="_005ccc">
+<title><literal>\cc</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cc</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cc list, in letters</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\cc{<replaceable>name0</replaceable> \\
+ ... }
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent. This
+command is optional. If it appears then typically it comes after
+<literal>\closing</literal>. Put the names on different lines by separating them
+with a double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>, as in:
+</para>
+<screen>\cc{President \\
+ Vice President}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="26.3" id="_005cclosing">
+<title><literal>\closing</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\closing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letters, ending</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>closing letters</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\closing{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Produce the letter&#8217;s closing. This is optional, but usual. It appears
+at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature. For example:
+</para>
+<screen>\closing{Regards,}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="26.4" id="_005cencl">
+<title><literal>\encl</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\encl</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>enclosure list</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\encl{<replaceable>first enclosed object</replaceable> \\
+ ... }
+</screen>
+<para>Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
+optional; when it is used, it typically is put after <literal>\closing</literal>.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, <literal>\\</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\encl{License \\
+ Passport}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="26.5" id="_005clocation">
+<title><literal>\location</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\location</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\location{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>The <replaceable>text</replaceable> appears centered at the bottom of the page. It only
+appears if the page style is <literal>firstpage</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="26.6" id="_005cmakelabels">
+<title><literal>\makelabels</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makelabels</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\makelabels % in preamble
+</screen>
+<para>Optional, for a document that contains <literal>letter</literal> environments. If
+you just put <literal>\makelabels</literal> in the preamble then at the end of the
+document you will get a sheet with labels for all the recipients, one
+for each letter environment, that you can copy to a sheet of peel-off
+address labels.
+</para>
+<para>Customize the labels by redefining the commands <literal>\startlabels</literal>,
+<literal>\mlabel</literal>, and <literal>\returnaddress</literal> (and perhaps <literal>\name</literal>) in
+the preamble. The command <literal>\startlabels</literal> sets the width, height,
+number of columns, etc., of the page onto which the labels are printed.
+The command <literal>\mlabel{<replaceable>return address</replaceable>}{<replaceable>recipient
+address</replaceable>}</literal> produces the two labels (or one, if you choose to ignore the
+<replaceable>return address</replaceable>) for each letter environment. The first argument,
+<replaceable>return address</replaceable>, is the value returned by the macro
+<literal>\returnaddress</literal>. The second argument, <replaceable>recipient address</replaceable>, is
+the value passed in the argument to the <literal>letter</literal> environment. By
+default <literal>\mlabel</literal> ignores the first argument, the <replaceable>return
+address</replaceable>, causing the default behavior described in the prior paragraph.
+</para>
+<para>This illustrates customization. Its output includes a page with two
+columns having two labels each.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{letter}
+\renewcommand*{\returnaddress}{Fred McGuilicuddy \\
+ Oshkosh, Mineola 12305}
+\newcommand*\originalMlabel{}
+\let\originalMlabel\mlabel
+\def\mlabel#1#2{\originalMlabel{}{#1}\originalMlabel{}{#2}}
+\makelabels
+ ...
+\begin{document}
+\begin{letter}{A Einstein \\
+ 112 Mercer Street \\
+ Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+ ...
+\end{letter}
+\begin{letter}{K G\&quot;odel \\
+ 145 Linden Lane \\
+ Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+ ...
+\end{letter}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>The first column contains the return address twice. The second column
+contains the address for each recipient.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>envlab</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>envlab</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The package <literal>envlab</literal> makes formatting the labels easier, with
+standard sizes already provided. The preamble lines
+<literal>\usepackage[personalenvelope]{envlab}</literal> and <literal>\makelabels</literal>
+are all that you need to print envelopes.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="26.7" id="_005cname">
+<title><literal>\name</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\name</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\name{<replaceable>name</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Optional. Sender&#8217;s name, used for printing on the envelope together
+with the return address.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="26.8" id="_005copening">
+<title><literal>\opening</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\opening</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letters, starting</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\opening{<replaceable>salutation</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Required. Follows the <literal>\begin{letter}{...}</literal>. The argument
+<replaceable>salutation</replaceable> is mandatory. For instance:
+</para>
+<screen>\opening{Dear John:}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="26.9" id="_005cps">
+<title><literal>\ps</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ps</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>postscript, in letters</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\ps{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Add a postscript. This command is optional and usually is used after
+<literal>\closing</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>\ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="26.10" id="_005csignature">
+<title><literal>\signature</literal></title>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\signature{<replaceable>first line</replaceable> \\
+ ... }
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\signature</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The sender&#8217;s name. This command is optional, although its inclusion is
+usual.
+</para>
+<para>The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing.
+&latex; leaves some vertical space for a handwritten
+signature. Separate multiple lines with a double
+backslash,&#160;<literal>\\</literal>. For example:
+</para>
+<screen>\signature{J Fred Muggs \\
+ White House}
+</screen>
+<para>&latex;&#8217;s default for the vertical space from the <literal>\closing</literal> text
+down to the <literal>\signature</literal> text is <literal>6\medskipamount</literal>, which is
+six times <literal>\medskipamount</literal> (where <literal>\medskipamount</literal> is equal to
+a <literal>\parskip</literal>, which in turn is defined by default here to
+0.7em).
+</para>
+<para>This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters in
+the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a
+<literal>letter</literal> environment and before the <literal>\closing</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>You can include a graphic in the signature as here.
+</para>
+<screen>\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\
+ My name}
+</screen>
+<para>For this you must put <literal>\usepackage{graphicx}</literal> in the preamble
+(see <link linkend="Graphics">Graphics</link>).
+</para>
+
+<!-- I think this is not a user-level command; it is used to keep from breaking -->
+<!-- the page between the closing and the signature -->
+<!-- @node \stopbreaks and \startbreaks -->
+<!-- @section @code{\stopbreaks} and @code{\startbreaks} -->
+
+<!-- @findex \startbreak -->
+<!-- @findex \stopbreaks -->
+
+<!-- @example -->
+<!-- @code{\stopbreaks} -->
+<!-- text -->
+<!-- @code{\startbreaks} -->
+<!-- @end example -->
+
+<!-- The @code{\stopbreaks} inhibits page breaking. The @code{\startbreaks} resumes -->
+<!-- normal page breaking. -->
+<!-- -->
+<!-- -->
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="26.11" id="_005ctelephone">
+<title><literal>\telephone</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\telephone</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\telephone{<replaceable>number</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>The sender&#8217;s telephone number. This is typically in the preamble, where
+it applies to all letters. This only appears if the <literal>firstpage</literal>
+pagestyle is selected. If so, it appears on the lower right of the
+page.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="27" id="Terminal-input_002foutput">
+<title>Terminal input/output</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>input/output, to terminal</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>terminal input/output</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+
+<sect1 label="27.1" id="_005ctypein">
+<title><literal>\typein</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\typein</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<screen>\typein{<replaceable>prompt-msg</replaceable>}
+\typein[<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>]{<replaceable>prompt-msg</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Print <replaceable>prompt-msg</replaceable> on the terminal and cause &latex; to stop and
+wait for you to type a line of input. This line of input ends when you
+hit the return key.
+</para>
+<para>For example, this
+</para>
+<screen>As long as I live I shall never forget \typein{Enter student name:}
+</screen>
+<para>coupled with this command line interaction
+</para>
+<screen>Enter student name:
+
+\@typein=Aphra Behn
+</screen>
+<para>gives the output &#8216;<literal>... never forget Aphra Behn</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<para>The first command version, <literal>\typein{<replaceable>prompt-msg</replaceable>}</literal>, causes
+the input you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the
+input file in place of the <literal>\typein</literal> command.
+</para>
+<para>In the second command version the optional argument <literal><replaceable>cmd</replaceable></literal>
+argument must be a command name &#8212; it must begin with a backslash, \.
+This command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you
+typed. For example, this
+</para>
+<screen>\typein[\student]{Enter student name:}
+\typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+</screen>
+<para>gives this output on the command line,
+</para>
+<screen>Enter student name:
+
+\student=John Dee
+Recommendation for John Dee.
+</screen>
+<para>where the user has entered &#8216;<literal>John Dee.</literal>&#8217;
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="27.2" id="_005ctypeout">
+<title><literal>\typeout</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\typeout</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\typeout{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Print <literal>msg</literal> on the terminal and in the <literal>log</literal> file.
+</para>
+<para>This
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\student}{John Dee}
+\typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+</screen>
+<para>outputs &#8216;<literal>Recommendation for John Dee</literal>&#8217;. Like what happens here with
+<literal>\student</literal>, commands that are defined with <literal>\newcommand</literal> or
+<literal>\renewcommand</literal> (among others) are replaced by their definitions
+before being printed.
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&#8217;s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
+and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to <literal>msg</literal>. As above,
+use the command <literal>\space</literal> to get a single space, independent of
+surrounding spaces. Use <literal>^^J</literal> to get a newline. Get a percent
+character with <literal>\csname @percentchar\endcsname</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>This command can be useful for simple debugging, as here:
+</para>
+<screen>\newlength{\jhlength}
+\setlength{\jhlength}{5pt}
+\typeout{The length is \the\jhlength.}
+</screen>
+<para>produces on the command line &#8216;<literal>The length is 5.0pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="28" id="Command-line">
+<title>Command line</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>command line</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Synopsis (from a terminal command line):
+</para>
+<screen>pdflatex <replaceable>options</replaceable> <replaceable>argument</replaceable>
+</screen>
+<para>Run &latex; on <replaceable>argument</replaceable>. In place of <command>pdflatex</command> you can
+also use <command>xelatex</command>, or <literal>lualatex</literal>, or <literal>dviluatex</literal>, or
+<literal>latex</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>For example, this will run &latex; on the file <filename>thesis.tex</filename>,
+creating the output <filename>thesis.pdf</filename>.
+</para>
+<screen>pdflatex thesis
+</screen>
+<para><indexterm role="fn"><primary>.tex, default extension</primary></indexterm>
+Note that <filename>.tex</filename> is the default file extension.
+</para>
+<para>pdf&tex; is a development of the original &tex; program, as are
+Xe&tex; and Lua&tex; (see <link linkend="TeX-engines">&tex; engines</link>). They are completely
+backward compatible. But the original program had a custom output
+format, DVI, while the newer ones can output directly to PDF. This
+allows them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF such as
+hyperlinks, support for modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and
+ubiquitous viewing programs. In short, if you run <command>pdflatex</command> or
+<command>xelatex</command> or <command>lualatex</command> then you will by default get PDF
+and have access to all its modern features. If you run <command>latex</command>,
+or <literal>dvilualatex</literal>, then you will get DVI. The description here
+assumes pdf&latex;.
+</para>
+<para>See <link linkend="Command-line-options">Command line options</link>, for a selection of the most useful
+command line options. As to <replaceable>argument</replaceable>, the usual case is that it
+does not begin with a backslash, so the system takes it to be the name
+of a file and it compiles that file. If <replaceable>argument</replaceable> begins with a
+backslash then the system will interpret it as a line of &latex;
+input, which can be used for special effects (see <link linkend="Command-line-input">Command line
+input</link>).
+</para>
+<para>If you gave no arguments or options then <command>pdflatex</command> prompts for
+input from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering
+<literal>&lt;control&gt;-D</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>If &latex; finds an error in your document then by default it stops and
+asks you about it. See <link linkend="Recovering-from-errors">Recovering from errors</link> for an outline of what
+to do.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="28.1" id="Command-line-options">
+<title>Command line options</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>options, command line</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>These are the command-line options relevant to ordinary document
+authoring. For a full list, try running &#8216;<literal>latex --help</literal>&#8217; from the
+command line.
+</para>
+<para>With many implementations you can specify command line options by
+prefixing them with &#8216;<literal>-</literal>&#8217; or &#8216;<literal>--</literal>&#8217;. This is the case for
+both &tex; Live (and Mac&tex;) and MiK&tex;. We will use both
+conventions interchangeably.
+</para>
+<variablelist><indexterm role="fn"><primary>--version command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+<varlistentry><term><literal>-version</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Show the current version, like &#8216;<literal>pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX
+Live 2015/Debian)</literal>&#8217; along with a small amount of additional information,
+and exit.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--help command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-help</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--interaction command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-interaction=<replaceable>mode</replaceable></literal>
+</term><listitem><para>&tex; compiles a document in one of four interaction modes:
+<literal>batchmode</literal>, <literal>nonstopmode</literal>, <literal>scrollmode</literal>,
+<literal>errorstopmode</literal>. In <firstterm>errorstop mode</firstterm> (the default), &tex;
+stops at each error and asks for user intervention. In <firstterm>batch
+mode</firstterm> it prints nothing on the terminal, errors are scrolled as if the
+user hit <literal>&lt;return&gt;</literal> at every error, and missing files cause the
+job to abort. In <firstterm>nonstop mode</firstterm>, diagnostic message appear on the
+terminal but as in batch mode there is no user interaction. In
+<firstterm>scroll mode</firstterm>, &tex; only stops for missing files or keyboard
+input.
+</para>
+<para>For instance, starting &latex; with this command line
+</para>
+<screen>pdflatex -interaction=batchmode <replaceable>filename</replaceable>
+</screen>
+<para>eliminates most terminal output.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--jobname command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-jobname=<replaceable>string</replaceable></literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Set the value of &tex;&#8217;s <literal>jobname</literal> to the string. The log file
+and output file will then be named <filename><replaceable>string</replaceable>.log</filename> and
+<filename><replaceable>string</replaceable>.pdf</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>When you run <literal><command>pdflatex</command> <replaceable>options</replaceable> <replaceable>argument</replaceable></literal>, if
+<replaceable>argument</replaceable> does not start with a backslash then &tex; considers it
+the name of a file to input. Otherwise it waits for the first
+<literal>\input</literal> instruction and the name of the input file will be the job
+name. This is used to name the log file the output file. The
+<literal>jobname</literal> option overrides that process and directly specifies the
+name. See <link linkend="Command-line-input">Command line input</link> for an example of its use.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--output-directory command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-output-directory=<replaceable>directory</replaceable></literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Write files in the directory <replaceable>directory</replaceable>. It must already exist.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--shell-escape command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--no-shell-escape command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--enable-write18 command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--disable-write18 command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>--shell-escape</literal>
+</term><term><literal>--no-shell-escape</literal>
+</term><term><literal>--enable-write18</literal>
+</term><term><literal>--disable-write18</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Enable or disable <literal>\write18{<replaceable>shell command</replaceable>}</literal>. The first two
+options are for with &tex; Live or Mac&tex; while the second two are
+for MiK&tex;.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>sagetex</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>sagetex</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a
+&latex; file. For instance the package <filename>sagetex</filename> allows you to
+have the mathematics software system <emphasis>Sage</emphasis> do calculations or draw
+graphs and then incorporate that output in your document. For this
+&tex; provides the <literal>\write18</literal> command.
+</para>
+<para>But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen if you
+compiled a &latex; file from the Internet. By default <literal>\write18</literal>
+is disabled. (More precisely, by default &tex; Live, Mac&tex;, and
+MiK&tex; only allow the execution of a limited number of &tex;-related
+programs, which they distribute.)
+</para>
+<para>If you invoke &latex; with the option <literal>no-shell-escape</literal>, and in
+your document you call <literal>\write18{ls -l}</literal>, then you do not get an
+error but the log file says &#8216;<literal>runsystem(ls -l)...disabled</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--halt-on-error command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-halt-on-error</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Stop processing at the first error.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--file-line-error command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>--no-file-line-error command-line option</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-file-line-error</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>-no-file-line-error</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Enable or disable <literal><replaceable>filename</replaceable>:<replaceable>lineno</replaceable>:<replaceable>error</replaceable></literal>-style
+error messages. These are only available with &tex; Live or Mac&tex;.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="28.2" id="Command-line-input">
+<title>Command line input</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>input, on command line</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>As part of the command line invocation <literal>pdflatex <replaceable>options</replaceable>
+<replaceable>argument</replaceable></literal> you can specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting
+<replaceable>argument</replaceable> with a backslash. This allows you to do some special
+effects.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>package, <literal>hyperref</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>hyperref</literal> package</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>For example, this file (which uses the <filename>hyperref</filename> package for
+hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a
+PDF.
+</para>
+<screen>\ifdefined\paperversion % in preamble
+\newcommand{\urlcolor}{black}
+\else
+\newcommand{\urlcolor}{blue}
+\fi
+\usepackage[colorlinks=true,urlcolor=\urlcolor]{hyperref}
+ ...
+\href{https://www.ctan.org}{CTAN} % in body
+ ...
+</screen>
+<para>Compiling this document <filename>book.tex</filename> with the command line
+<literal>pdflatex book</literal> will give the &#8216;<literal>CTAN</literal>&#8217; link in blue. But
+compiling it with <literal>pdflatex &quot;\def\paperversion{}\input book.tex&quot;</literal>
+has the link in black. (Note the use of double quotes to prevent
+interpretation of the symbols by the command line shell; your system may
+do this differently.)
+</para>
+<para>In a similar way, from the single file <filename>main.tex</filename> you can compile
+two different versions.
+</para>
+<!-- credit Paul Gaborit: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/220101/121234 -->
+<screen>pdflatex -jobname=students &quot;\def\student{}\input{main}&quot;
+pdflatex -jobname=teachers &quot;\def\teachers{}\input{main}&quot;
+</screen>
+<para>The <literal>jobname</literal> option is there because otherwise both files would be
+called <filename>main.pdf</filename> and the second would overwrite the first.
+</para>
+<para>A final example. This loads the package <filename>graphicx</filename> with the option
+<literal>draft</literal>
+</para>
+<!-- credit Herbert Voss: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/17236/121234 -->
+<screen>pdflatex -jobname=aa &quot;\RequirePackage[draft]{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}&quot;
+</screen>
+<para>so the graphic files are read for their size information but not
+incorporated into the PDF. (The <literal>jobname</literal> option is there because
+otherwise the output file would be <filename>graphicx.pdf</filename>, as
+<literal>\RequirePackage</literal> does an <literal>\input</literal> of its own.)
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="28.3" id="Recovering-from-errors">
+<title>Recovering from errors</title>
+
+<para>If &latex; finds an error in your document then it gives you an error
+message and prompts you with a question mark, <literal>?</literal>. For instance,
+running &latex; on this file
+</para>
+<screen>\newcommand{\NP}{\ensuremath{\textbf{NP}}}
+The \PN{} problem is a million dollar one.
+</screen>
+<para>causes it show this, and wait for input.
+</para>
+<screen>! Undefined control sequence.
+l.5 The \PN
+ {} problem is a million dollar one.
+?
+</screen>
+<para>The simplest thing is to enter &#8216;<literal>x</literal>&#8217; and <literal>&lt;return&gt;</literal> and fix the
+typo. You could instead enter &#8216;<literal>?</literal>&#8217; and <literal>&lt;return&gt;</literal> to see other
+options.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>&#8216;<literal>*</literal>&#8217; prompt</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>prompt, &#8216;<literal>*</literal>&#8217;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\stop</primary></indexterm>
+<para>There are two other error scenarios. The first is that you forgot to
+include the <literal>\end{document}</literal> or misspelled it. In this case
+&latex; gives you a &#8216;<literal>*</literal>&#8217; prompt. You can get back to the command
+line by typing <literal>\stop</literal> and <literal>&lt;return&gt;</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name. For instance,
+instead of <literal>pdflatex test</literal> you might type <literal>pdflatex tste</literal>.
+</para>
+<screen>! I can't find file `tste'.
+&lt;*&gt; tste
+
+(Press Enter to retry, or Control-D to exit)
+Please type another input file name:
+</screen>
+<para>The simplest thing is to enter <literal>&lt;Control&gt;</literal> and &#8216;<literal>d</literal>&#8217; (holding
+them down at the same time), and then retype the correct command line.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<appendix label="A" id="Document-templates">
+<title>Document templates</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>document templates</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>templates, document</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will
+be useful. Additional template resources are listed at
+<ulink url="http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates">http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates</ulink>.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="A.1" id="beamer-template">
+<title><literal>beamer</literal> template</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>beamer</literal> template and class</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>template, <literal>beamer</literal></primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>The <literal>beamer</literal> class creates presentation slides. It has a vast
+array of features, but here is a basic template:
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{beamer}
+
+\title{Beamer Class template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+\date{July 31, 2007}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% without [fragile], any {verbatim} code gets mysterious errors.
+\begin{frame}[fragile]
+ \frametitle{First Slide}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ This is \verbatim!
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>One web resource for this:
+<ulink url="http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/">http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/</ulink>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="A.2" id="article-template">
+<title><literal>article</literal> template</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>template, <literal>article</literal></primary></indexterm>
+
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\title{Article Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{First section}
+Some text.
+
+\subsection{First section, first subsection}
+Additional text.
+
+\section{Second section}
+Some more text.
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="A.3" id="book-template">
+<title><literal>book</literal> template</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>template, <literal>book</literal></primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>This is a straightforward template for a book. See See <link linkend="Larger-book-template">Larger book
+template</link> for a more elaborate one.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\chapter{First}
+Some text.
+
+\chapter{Second}
+Some other text.
+
+\section{A subtopic}
+The end.
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="A.4" id="Larger-book-template">
+<title>Larger <literal>book</literal> template</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>template, <literal>book</literal></primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>This is a more elaborate template for a book. It has
+<literal>\frontmatter</literal>, <literal>\mainmatter</literal>, and <literal>\backmatter</literal> to
+control the typography of the three main areas of a book
+(see <link linkend="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</link>). The book has a
+bibliography and an index.
+</para>
+<para>Notable is that it uses <literal>\include</literal> and <literal>\includeonly</literal>
+(see <link linkend="Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</link>). While you are working on a chapter you
+can comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to
+<literal>\includeonly</literal>. That will speed up compilation without losing any
+information such as cross-references. (Material that does not need to
+come on a new page is brought in with <literal>\input</literal> instead of
+<literal>\include</literal>. You don&#8217;t get the cross-reference benefit this way.)
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass[titlepage]{book}
+\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex
+
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\includeonly{%
+ frontcover,
+ preface,
+ chap1,
+ ...
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\include{frontcover}
+ % maybe comment out while drafting:
+\maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright}
+\tableofcontents
+\include{preface}
+\mainmatter
+\include{chap1}
+...
+\appendix
+\include{appena}
+...
+\backmatter
+\bibliographystyle{apalike}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}
+\bibliography
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index}
+\printindex
+\include{backcover}
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="A.5" id="tugboat-template">
+<title><literal>tugboat</literal> template</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>template, TUGboat</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>TUGboat template</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>ltugboat</literal> class</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><citetitle>TUGboat</citetitle> is the journal of the &tex; Users Group,
+<ulink url="http://tug.org/TUGboat">http://tug.org/TUGboat</ulink>.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{ltugboat}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{ifpdf}
+\ifpdf
+\usepackage[breaklinks,hidelinks]{hyperref}
+\else
+\usepackage{url}
+\fi
+
+%%% Start of metadata %%%
+
+\title{Example \TUB\ article}
+
+% repeat info for each author.
+\author{First Last}
+\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
+\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
+\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
+
+%%% End of metadata %%%
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+This is an example article for \TUB{}.
+Please write an abstract.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is an example article for \TUB, linked from
+\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
+
+We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the
+\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF}
+output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
+
+The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more):
+% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
+\begin{verbatim}[\small]
+\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
+\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
+\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
+\mf \MFB
+\plain \POBox \PS
+\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP
+\TUB \TUG \tug
+\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+
+\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph
+
+\acro{FRED} -&gt; {\small[er] fred} % please use!
+\cs{fred} -&gt; \fred
+\meta{fred} -&gt; &lt;fred&gt;
+\nth{n} -&gt; 1st, 2nd, ...
+\sfrac{3/4} -&gt; 3/4
+\booktitle{Book of Fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format
+\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue.
+
+This file is just a template. The \TUB\ style documentation is the
+\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}. (For
+\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using
+\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location,
+\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.)
+
+Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
+\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty
+\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
+
+\makesignature
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+</appendix>
+<chapter label="" id="Index">
+<title>Index</title>
+
+<!-- Keep `Command Index' working for ltx-help.el. -->
+<anchor id="Command-Index"/>
+<index role="cp"></index>
+
+</chapter>
+</book>
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a1cd59daf2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html
@@ -0,0 +1,24815 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
+<html>
+<!-- This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a
+document preparation system, version of October 2018.
+
+This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the
+VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
+George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The
+LaTeX 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The
+LaTeX2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl
+Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges
+using Hypertext Help with LaTeX, by Sheldon Green, and
+LaTeX Command Summary (for LaTeX 2.09) by
+L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer (published by the TeX Users
+Group as TeXniques number 10), as reference material. We also
+gratefully acknowledge additional material appearing in
+latex2e-reference by Martin Herbert Dietze. (From these references no
+text was directly copied.)
+
+Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013,
+2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018 Karl Berry.
+
+Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
+
+Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. -->
+<!-- Created by GNU Texinfo 6.5, http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ -->
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8">
+<title>LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (October 2018)</title>
+
+<meta name="description" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (October 2018)">
+<meta name="keywords" content="LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (October 2018)">
+<meta name="resource-type" content="document">
+<meta name="distribution" content="global">
+<meta name="Generator" content="makeinfo">
+<link href="#Top" rel="start" title="Top">
+<link href="#Index" rel="index" title="Index">
+<link href="#SEC_Contents" rel="contents" title="Table of Contents">
+<link href="http://tug.org/texinfohtml/" rel="up" title="(dir)">
+<style type="text/css">
+<!--
+/* $Id: latex2e.css 690 2018-09-15 15:20:19Z jimhefferon $
+ Minor css for latexrefman. Public domain.
+ Originally written by Jim Hefferon and Karl Berry, 2018. */
+
+/* So you can style for yourself */
+@import url("/css/latexreflocal.css");
+
+
+
+a.summary-letter {text-decoration: none}
+blockquote.indentedblock {margin-right: 0em}
+blockquote.smallindentedblock {margin-right: 0em; font-size: smaller}
+blockquote.smallquotation {font-size: smaller}
+div.display {margin-left: 3.2em}
+div.example {margin-left: 3.2em}
+div.lisp {margin-left: 3.2em}
+div.smalldisplay {margin-left: 3.2em}
+div.smallexample {margin-left: 3.2em}
+div.smalllisp {margin-left: 3.2em}
+kbd {font-style: oblique}
+pre.display {font-family: inherit}
+pre.format {font-family: inherit}
+pre.menu-comment {font-family: serif}
+pre.menu-preformatted {font-family: serif}
+pre.smalldisplay {font-family: inherit; font-size: smaller}
+pre.smallexample {font-size: smaller}
+pre.smallformat {font-family: inherit; font-size: smaller}
+pre.smalllisp {font-size: smaller}
+span.nolinebreak {white-space: nowrap}
+span.roman {font-family: initial; font-weight: normal}
+span.sansserif {font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: normal}
+ul.no-bullet {list-style: none}
+BODY {
+ margin-top: 1em;
+ margin-left: 1em; /* auto results in two-digit <ol> lost off left */
+ margin-right: 1em;
+ margin-bottom: 1em;
+ /* the idea is to use the whole window, unless it is ridiculously
+ wide, probably with too-small fonts, too. */
+ max-width: 64em;
+}
+
+/* Because we want @math{... @code ...} to be upright, not slanted,
+ and Texinfo won't fix it. */
+code {font-style:normal; font-family:monospace; }
+
+/* We put a link to our own home page at the bottom. */
+div.referenceinfo {font-size:small;}
+
+-->
+</style>
+
+
+</head>
+
+<body lang="en">
+<h1 class="settitle" align="center">LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (October 2018)</h1>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<a name="SEC_Overview"></a>
+<h2 class="shortcontents-heading">Short Table of Contents</h2>
+
+<div class="shortcontents">
+<ul class="no-bullet">
+<li><a name="stoc-About-this-document-1" href="#toc-About-this-document-1">1 About this document</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Overview-of-LaTeX" href="#toc-Overview-of-LaTeX">2 Overview of LaTeX</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Document-classes-1" href="#toc-Document-classes-1">3 Document classes</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Fonts-1" href="#toc-Fonts-1">4 Fonts</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Layout-1" href="#toc-Layout-1">5 Layout</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Sectioning-1" href="#toc-Sectioning-1">6 Sectioning</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Cross-references-1" href="#toc-Cross-references-1">7 Cross references</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Environments-1" href="#toc-Environments-1">8 Environments</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Line-breaking-1" href="#toc-Line-breaking-1">9 Line breaking</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Page-breaking-1" href="#toc-Page-breaking-1">10 Page breaking</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Footnotes-1" href="#toc-Footnotes-1">11 Footnotes</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Definitions-1" href="#toc-Definitions-1">12 Definitions</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Counters-1" href="#toc-Counters-1">13 Counters</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Lengths-1" href="#toc-Lengths-1">14 Lengths</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Making-paragraphs-1" href="#toc-Making-paragraphs-1">15 Making paragraphs</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Math-formulas-1" href="#toc-Math-formulas-1">16 Math formulas</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Modes-1" href="#toc-Modes-1">17 Modes</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Page-styles-1" href="#toc-Page-styles-1">18 Page styles</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Spaces-1" href="#toc-Spaces-1">19 Spaces</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Boxes-1" href="#toc-Boxes-1">20 Boxes</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Color-1" href="#toc-Color-1">21 Color</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Graphics-1" href="#toc-Graphics-1">22 Graphics</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Special-insertions-1" href="#toc-Special-insertions-1">23 Special insertions</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Splitting-the-input-1" href="#toc-Splitting-the-input-1">24 Splitting the input</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Front_002fback-matter-1" href="#toc-Front_002fback-matter-1">25 Front/back matter</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Letters-1" href="#toc-Letters-1">26 Letters</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Terminal-input_002foutput-1" href="#toc-Terminal-input_002foutput-1">27 Terminal input/output</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Command-line-1" href="#toc-Command-line-1">28 Command line</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Document-templates-1" href="#toc-Document-templates-1">Appendix A Document templates</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Index-1" href="#toc-Index-1">Index</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+
+<a name="SEC_Contents"></a>
+<h2 class="contents-heading">Table of Contents</h2>
+
+<div class="contents">
+
+<ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-About-this-document-1" href="#About-this-document">1 About this document</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Overview-of-LaTeX" href="#Overview">2 Overview of LaTeX</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Starting-and-ending-1" href="#Starting-and-ending">2.1 Starting and ending</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Output-files-1" href="#Output-files">2.2 Output files</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-TeX-engines-1" href="#TeX-engines">2.3 TeX engines</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-LaTeX-command-syntax-1" href="#LaTeX-command-syntax">2.4 LaTeX command syntax</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Environment-1" href="#Environment">2.5 Environment</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-CTAN_003a-the-Comprehensive-TeX-Archive-Network" href="#CTAN">2.6 CTAN: the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Document-classes-1" href="#Document-classes">3 Document classes</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Document-class-options-1" href="#Document-class-options">3.1 Document class options</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Additional-packages-1" href="#Additional-packages">3.2 Additional packages</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Class-and-package-construction-1" href="#Class-and-package-construction">3.3 Class and package construction</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Class-and-package-structure-1" href="#Class-and-package-structure">3.3.1 Class and package structure</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Class-and-package-commands-1" href="#Class-and-package-commands">3.3.2 Class and package commands</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Fonts-1" href="#Fonts">4 Fonts</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Font-styles-1" href="#Font-styles">4.1 Font styles</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Font-sizes-1" href="#Font-sizes">4.2 Font sizes</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Low_002dlevel-font-commands-1" href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">4.3 Low-level font commands</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Layout-1" href="#Layout">5 Layout</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005conecolumn-1" href="#g_t_005conecolumn">5.1 <code>\onecolumn</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ctwocolumn-1" href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">5.2 <code>\twocolumn</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cflushbottom-1" href="#g_t_005cflushbottom">5.3 <code>\flushbottom</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005craggedbottom-1" href="#g_t_005craggedbottom">5.4 <code>\raggedbottom</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Page-layout-parameters-1" href="#Page-layout-parameters">5.5 Page layout parameters</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Floats-1" href="#Floats">5.6 Floats</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Sectioning-1" href="#Sectioning">6 Sectioning</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cpart-1" href="#g_t_005cpart">6.1 <code>\part</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cchapter-1" href="#g_t_005cchapter">6.2 <code>\chapter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csection-1" href="#g_t_005csection">6.3 <code>\section</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csubsection-1" href="#g_t_005csubsection">6.4 <code>\subsection</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csubsubsection_002c-_005cparagraph_002c-_005csubparagraph" href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">6.5 <code>\subsubsection</code>, <code>\paragraph</code>, <code>\subparagraph</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cappendix-1" href="#g_t_005cappendix">6.6 <code>\appendix</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfrontmatter_002c-_005cmainmatter_002c-_005cbackmatter" href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">6.7 <code>\frontmatter</code>, <code>\mainmatter</code>, <code>\backmatter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c_0040startsection-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">6.8 <code>\@startsection</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Cross-references-1" href="#Cross-references">7 Cross references</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005clabel-1" href="#g_t_005clabel">7.1 <code>\label</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cpageref-1" href="#g_t_005cpageref">7.2 <code>\pageref</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cref-1" href="#g_t_005cref">7.3 <code>\ref</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Environments-1" href="#Environments">8 Environments</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-abstract-1" href="#abstract">8.1 <code>abstract</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-array-1" href="#array">8.2 <code>array</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-center-1" href="#center">8.3 <code>center</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ccentering-1" href="#g_t_005ccentering">8.3.1 <code>\centering</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-description-1" href="#description">8.4 <code>description</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-displaymath-1" href="#displaymath">8.5 <code>displaymath</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-document-1" href="#document">8.6 <code>document</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cAtBeginDocument-1" href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument">8.6.1 <code>\AtBeginDocument</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cAtEndDocument-1" href="#g_t_005cAtEndDocument">8.6.2 <code>\AtEndDocument</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-enumerate-1" href="#enumerate">8.7 <code>enumerate</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-eqnarray-1" href="#eqnarray">8.8 <code>eqnarray</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-equation-1" href="#equation">8.9 <code>equation</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-figure-1" href="#figure">8.10 <code>figure</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-filecontents_003a-Write-an-external-file" href="#filecontents">8.11 <code>filecontents</code>: Write an external file</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-flushleft-1" href="#flushleft">8.12 <code>flushleft</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005craggedright-1" href="#g_t_005craggedright">8.12.1 <code>\raggedright</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-flushright-1" href="#flushright">8.13 <code>flushright</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005craggedleft-1" href="#g_t_005craggedleft">8.13.1 <code>\raggedleft</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-itemize-1" href="#itemize">8.14 <code>itemize</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-letter-environment_003a-writing-letters" href="#letter">8.15 <code>letter</code> environment: writing letters</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-list-1" href="#list">8.16 <code>list</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005citem_003a-An-entry-in-a-list" href="#g_t_005citem">8.16.1 <code>\item</code>: An entry in a list</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-trivlist_003a-A-restricted-form-of-list" href="#trivlist">8.16.2 <code>trivlist</code>: A restricted form of <code>list</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-math-1" href="#math">8.17 <code>math</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-minipage-1" href="#minipage">8.18 <code>minipage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-picture-1" href="#picture">8.19 <code>picture</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cput-1" href="#g_t_005cput">8.19.1 <code>\put</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmultiput-1" href="#g_t_005cmultiput">8.19.2 <code>\multiput</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cqbezier-1" href="#g_t_005cqbezier">8.19.3 <code>\qbezier</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cgraphpaper-1" href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper">8.19.4 <code>\graphpaper</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cline-1" href="#g_t_005cline">8.19.5 <code>\line</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005clinethickness-1" href="#g_t_005clinethickness">8.19.6 <code>\linethickness</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cthinlines-1" href="#g_t_005cthinlines">8.19.7 <code>\thinlines</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cthicklines-1" href="#g_t_005cthicklines">8.19.8 <code>\thicklines</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ccircle-1" href="#g_t_005ccircle">8.19.9 <code>\circle</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005coval-1" href="#g_t_005coval">8.19.10 <code>\oval</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cshortstack-1" href="#g_t_005cshortstack">8.19.11 <code>\shortstack</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cvector-1" href="#g_t_005cvector">8.19.12 <code>\vector</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029-1" href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">8.19.13 <code>\makebox</code> (picture)</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029-1" href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">8.19.14 <code>\framebox</code> (picture)</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cframe-1" href="#g_t_005cframe">8.19.15 <code>\frame</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cdashbox-1" href="#g_t_005cdashbox">8.19.16 <code>\dashbox</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-quotation-_0026-quote-1" href="#quotation-_0026-quote">8.20 <code>quotation</code> &amp; <code>quote</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-tabbing-1" href="#tabbing">8.21 <code>tabbing</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-table-1" href="#table">8.22 <code>table</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-tabular-1" href="#tabular">8.23 <code>tabular</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmulticolumn-1" href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn">8.23.1 <code>\multicolumn</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cvline-1" href="#g_t_005cvline">8.23.2 <code>\vline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ccline-1" href="#g_t_005ccline">8.23.3 <code>\cline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005chline-1" href="#g_t_005chline">8.23.4 <code>\hline</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-thebibliography-1" href="#thebibliography">8.24 <code>thebibliography</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cbibitem-1" href="#g_t_005cbibitem">8.24.1 <code>\bibitem</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ccite-1" href="#g_t_005ccite">8.24.2 <code>\cite</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnocite-1" href="#g_t_005cnocite">8.24.3 <code>\nocite</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Using-BibTeX-1" href="#Using-BibTeX">8.24.4 Using BibTeX</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-theorem-1" href="#theorem">8.25 <code>theorem</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-titlepage-1" href="#titlepage">8.26 <code>titlepage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-verbatim-1" href="#verbatim">8.27 <code>verbatim</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cverb-1" href="#g_t_005cverb">8.27.1 <code>\verb</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-verse-1" href="#verse">8.28 <code>verse</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Line-breaking-1" href="#Line-breaking">9 Line breaking</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c_005c-1" href="#g_t_005c_005c">9.1 <code>\\</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr-1" href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">9.2 <code>\obeycr</code> &amp; <code>\restorecr</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewline-1" href="#g_t_005cnewline">9.3 <code>\newline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c_002d-_0028discretionary-hyphen_0029" href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">9.4 <code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen)</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cdiscretionary-_0028generalized-hyphenation-point_0029" href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary">9.5 <code>\discretionary</code> (generalized hyphenation point)</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy-1" href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">9.6 <code>\fussy</code> &amp; <code>\sloppy</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-sloppypar-1" href="#sloppypar">9.6.1 <code>sloppypar</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005chyphenation-1" href="#g_t_005chyphenation">9.7 <code>\hyphenation</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak-1" href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">9.8 <code>\linebreak</code> &amp; <code>\nolinebreak</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Page-breaking-1" href="#Page-breaking">10 Page breaking</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage-1" href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">10.1 <code>\clearpage</code> &amp; <code>\cleardoublepage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewpage-1" href="#g_t_005cnewpage">10.2 <code>\newpage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cenlargethispage-1" href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage">10.3 <code>\enlargethispage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak-1" href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">10.4 <code>\pagebreak</code> &amp; <code>\nopagebreak</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Footnotes-1" href="#Footnotes">11 Footnotes</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfootnote-1" href="#g_t_005cfootnote">11.1 <code>\footnote</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfootnotemark-1" href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">11.2 <code>\footnotemark</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfootnotetext-1" href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext">11.3 <code>\footnotetext</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Footnotes-in-section-headings-1" href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings">11.4 Footnotes in section headings</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Footnotes-in-a-table-1" href="#Footnotes-in-a-table">11.5 Footnotes in a table</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Footnotes-of-footnotes-1" href="#Footnotes-of-footnotes">11.6 Footnotes of footnotes</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Definitions-1" href="#Definitions">12 Definitions</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand-1" href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">12.1 <code>\newcommand</code> &amp; <code>\renewcommand</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cprovidecommand-1" href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand">12.2 <code>\providecommand</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother-1" href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">12.3 <code>\makeatletter</code> &amp; <code>\makeatother</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c_0040ifstar-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar">12.4 <code>\@ifstar</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewcounter_003a-Allocating-a-counter" href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">12.5 <code>\newcounter</code>: Allocating a counter</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewlength-1" href="#g_t_005cnewlength">12.6 <code>\newlength</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewsavebox-1" href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox">12.7 <code>\newsavebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment-1" href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">12.8 <code>\newenvironment</code> &amp; <code>\renewenvironment</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewtheorem-1" href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">12.9 <code>\newtheorem</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewfont-1" href="#g_t_005cnewfont">12.10 <code>\newfont</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cprotect-1" href="#g_t_005cprotect">12.11 <code>\protect</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend-1" href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend">12.12 <code>\ignorespaces &amp; \ignorespacesafterend</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Counters-1" href="#Counters">13 Counters</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol_003a-Printing-counters" href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">13.1 <code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cusecounter-1" href="#g_t_005cusecounter">13.2 <code>\usecounter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cvalue-1" href="#g_t_005cvalue">13.3 <code>\value</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csetcounter-1" href="#g_t_005csetcounter">13.4 <code>\setcounter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005caddtocounter-1" href="#g_t_005caddtocounter">13.5 <code>\addtocounter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005crefstepcounter-1" href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter">13.6 <code>\refstepcounter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cstepcounter-1" href="#g_t_005cstepcounter">13.7 <code>\stepcounter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear-1" href="#g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear">13.8 <code>\day</code> &amp; <code>\month</code> &amp; <code>\year</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Lengths-1" href="#Lengths">14 Lengths</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Units-of-length-1" href="#Units-of-length">14.1 Units of length</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csetlength-1" href="#g_t_005csetlength">14.2 <code>\setlength</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005caddtolength-1" href="#g_t_005caddtolength">14.3 <code>\addtolength</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csettodepth-1" href="#g_t_005csettodepth">14.4 <code>\settodepth</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csettoheight-1" href="#g_t_005csettoheight">14.5 <code>\settoheight</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csettowidth-1" href="#g_t_005csettowidth">14.6 <code>\settowidth</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Making-paragraphs-1" href="#Making-paragraphs">15 Making paragraphs</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cpar-1" href="#g_t_005cpar">15.1 <code>\par</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent-1" href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent">15.2 <code>\indent</code> &amp; <code>\noindent</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip-1" href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">15.3 <code>\parindent</code> &amp; <code>\parskip</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Marginal-notes-1" href="#Marginal-notes">15.4 Marginal notes</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Math-formulas-1" href="#Math-formulas">16 Math formulas</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Subscripts-_0026-superscripts-1" href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">16.1 Subscripts &amp; superscripts</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Math-symbols-1" href="#Math-symbols">16.2 Math symbols</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Blackboard-bold-1" href="#Blackboard-bold">16.2.1 Blackboard bold</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Calligraphic-1" href="#Calligraphic">16.2.2 Calligraphic</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath-1" href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">16.2.3 <code>\boldmath</code> &amp; <code>\unboldmath</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Dots_002c-horizontal-or-vertical" href="#Dots">16.2.4 Dots, horizontal or vertical</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Math-functions-1" href="#Math-functions">16.3 Math functions</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Math-accents-1" href="#Math-accents">16.4 Math accents</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Over_002d-and-Underlining-1" href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining">16.5 Over- and Underlining</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Spacing-in-math-mode-1" href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">16.6 Spacing in math mode</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csmash-1" href="#g_t_005csmash">16.6.1 <code>\smash</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom-1" href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">16.6.2 <code>\phantom</code> &amp; <code>\vphantom</code> &amp; <code>\hphantom</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Math-miscellany-1" href="#Math-miscellany">16.7 Math miscellany</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Colon-character-_003a-_0026-_005ccolon" href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">16.7.1 Colon character <code>:</code> &amp; <code>\colon</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c_002a-1" href="#g_t_005c_002a">16.7.2 <code>\*</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfrac-1" href="#g_t_005cfrac">16.7.3 <code>\frac</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cleft-_0026-_005cright-1" href="#g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">16.7.4 <code>\left</code> &amp; <code>\right</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csqrt-1" href="#g_t_005csqrt">16.7.5 <code>\sqrt</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cstackrel-1" href="#g_t_005cstackrel">16.7.6 <code>\stackrel</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Modes-1" href="#Modes">17 Modes</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005censuremath-1" href="#g_t_005censuremath">17.1 <code>\ensuremath</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Page-styles-1" href="#Page-styles">18 Page styles</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmaketitle-1" href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">18.1 <code>\maketitle</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cpagenumbering-1" href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering">18.2 <code>\pagenumbering</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cpagestyle-1" href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">18.3 <code>\pagestyle</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cthispagestyle-1" href="#g_t_005cthispagestyle">18.4 <code>\thispagestyle</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Spaces-1" href="#Spaces">19 Spaces</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad-1" href="#g_t_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad">19.1 <code>\enspace</code> &amp; <code>\quad</code> &amp; <code>\qquad</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005chspace-1" href="#g_t_005chspace">19.2 <code>\hspace</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005chfill-1" href="#g_t_005chfill">19.3 <code>\hfill</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005chss-1" href="#g_t_005chss">19.4 <code>\hss</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cspacefactor-1" href="#g_t_005cspacefactor">19.5 <code>\spacefactor</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c_0040-1" href="#g_t_005c_0040">19.5.1 <code>\@</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfrenchspacing-1" href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing">19.5.2 <code>\frenchspacing</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnormalsfcodes-1" href="#g_t_005cnormalsfcodes">19.5.3 <code>\normalsfcodes</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Backslash_002dspace_002c-_005c-" href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029">19.6 Backslash-space, <code>\ </code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_007e-1" href="#g_t_007e">19.7 <code>~</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace-1" href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">19.8 <code>\thinspace</code> &amp; <code>\negthinspace</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c_002f-1" href="#g_t_005c_002f">19.9 <code>\/</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill-1" href="#g_t_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill">19.10 <code>\hrulefill</code> &amp; <code>\dotfill</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip-1" href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">19.11 <code>\bigskip</code> &amp; <code>\medskip</code> &amp; <code>\smallskip</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak-1" href="#g_t_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak">19.12 <code>\bigbreak</code> &amp; <code>\medbreak</code> &amp; <code>\smallbreak</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cstrut-1" href="#g_t_005cstrut">19.13 <code>\strut</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cvspace-1" href="#g_t_005cvspace">19.14 <code>\vspace</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cvfill-1" href="#g_t_005cvfill">19.15 <code>\vfill</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005caddvspace-1" href="#g_t_005caddvspace">19.16 <code>\addvspace</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Boxes-1" href="#Boxes">20 Boxes</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox-1" href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">20.1 <code>\mbox</code> &amp; <code>\makebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox-1" href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">20.2 <code>\fbox</code> &amp; <code>\framebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cparbox-1" href="#g_t_005cparbox">20.3 <code>\parbox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005craisebox-1" href="#g_t_005craisebox">20.4 <code>\raisebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox-1" href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">20.5 <code>\sbox</code> &amp; <code>\savebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-lrbox-1" href="#lrbox">20.6 <code>lrbox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cusebox-1" href="#g_t_005cusebox">20.7 <code>\usebox</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Color-1" href="#Color">21 Color</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-color-package-options" href="#Color-package-options">21.1 <code>color</code> package options</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Color-models-1" href="#Color-models">21.2 Color models</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Commands-for-color-1" href="#Commands-for-color">21.3 Commands for color</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Define-colors-1" href="#Define-colors">21.3.1 Define colors</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Colored-text-1" href="#Colored-text">21.3.2 Colored text</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Colored-boxes-1" href="#Colored-boxes">21.3.3 Colored boxes</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Colored-pages-1" href="#Colored-pages">21.3.4 Colored pages</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Graphics-1" href="#Graphics">22 Graphics</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-graphics-package-options" href="#Graphics-package-options">22.1 <code>graphics</code> package options</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-graphics-package-configuration" href="#Graphics-package-configuration">22.2 <code>graphics</code> package configuration</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cgraphicspath-1" href="#g_t_005cgraphicspath">22.2.1 <code>\graphicspath</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions">22.2.2 <code>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cDeclareGraphicsRule-1" href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsRule">22.2.3 <code>\DeclareGraphicsRule</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Commands-for-graphics-1" href="#Commands-for-graphics">22.3 Commands for graphics</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cincludegraphics-1" href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">22.3.1 <code>\includegraphics</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005crotatebox-1" href="#g_t_005crotatebox">22.3.2 <code>\rotatebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cscalebox-1" href="#g_t_005cscalebox">22.3.3 <code>\scalebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cresizebox-1" href="#g_t_005cresizebox">22.3.4 <code>\resizebox</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Special-insertions-1" href="#Special-insertions">23 Special insertions</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Reserved-characters-1" href="#Reserved-characters">23.1 Reserved characters</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Upper-and-lower-case-1" href="#Upper-and-lower-case">23.2 Upper and lower case</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Symbols-by-font-position-1" href="#Symbols-by-font-position">23.3 Symbols by font position</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Text-symbols-1" href="#Text-symbols">23.4 Text symbols</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Accents-1" href="#Accents">23.5 Accents</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Additional-Latin-letters-1" href="#Additional-Latin-letters">23.6 Additional Latin letters</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005crule-1" href="#g_t_005crule">23.7 <code>\rule</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ctoday-1" href="#g_t_005ctoday">23.8 <code>\today</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Splitting-the-input-1" href="#Splitting-the-input">24 Splitting the input</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cendinput-1" href="#g_t_005cendinput">24.1 <code>\endinput</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly-1" href="#g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">24.2 <code>\include</code> &amp; <code>\includeonly</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cinput-1" href="#g_t_005cinput">24.3 <code>\input</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Front_002fback-matter-1" href="#Front_002fback-matter">25 Front/back matter</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Table-of-contents-etc_002e-1" href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">25.1 Table of contents etc.</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005caddcontentsline-1" href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">25.1.1 <code>\addcontentsline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005caddtocontents-1" href="#g_t_005caddtocontents">25.1.2 <code>\addtocontents</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnofiles-1" href="#g_t_005cnofiles">25.1.3 <code>\nofiles</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Indexes-1" href="#Indexes">25.2 Indexes</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cindex-1" href="#g_t_005cindex">25.2.1 <code>\index</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-makeindex-1" href="#makeindex">25.2.2 <code>makeindex</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cprintindex-1" href="#g_t_005cprintindex">25.2.3 <code>\printindex</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Glossaries-1" href="#Glossaries">25.3 Glossaries</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewglossaryentry-1" href="#g_t_005cnewglossaryentry">25.3.1 <code>\newglossaryentry</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cgls-1" href="#g_t_005cgls">25.3.2 <code>\gls</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Letters-1" href="#Letters">26 Letters</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005caddress-1" href="#g_t_005caddress">26.1 <code>\address</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ccc-1" href="#g_t_005ccc">26.2 <code>\cc</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cclosing-1" href="#g_t_005cclosing">26.3 <code>\closing</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cencl-1" href="#g_t_005cencl">26.4 <code>\encl</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005clocation-1" href="#g_t_005clocation">26.5 <code>\location</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmakelabels-1" href="#g_t_005cmakelabels">26.6 <code>\makelabels</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cname-1" href="#g_t_005cname">26.7 <code>\name</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005copening-1" href="#g_t_005copening">26.8 <code>\opening</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cps-1" href="#g_t_005cps">26.9 <code>\ps</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csignature-1" href="#g_t_005csignature">26.10 <code>\signature</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ctelephone-1" href="#g_t_005ctelephone">26.11 <code>\telephone</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Terminal-input_002foutput-1" href="#Terminal-input_002foutput">27 Terminal input/output</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ctypein-1" href="#g_t_005ctypein">27.1 <code>\typein</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ctypeout-1" href="#g_t_005ctypeout">27.2 <code>\typeout</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Command-line-1" href="#Command-line">28 Command line</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Command-line-options-1" href="#Command-line-options">28.1 Command line options</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Command-line-input-1" href="#Command-line-input">28.2 Command line input</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Recovering-from-errors-1" href="#Recovering-from-errors">28.3 Recovering from errors</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Document-templates-1" href="#Document-templates">Appendix A Document templates</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-beamer-template-1" href="#beamer-template">A.1 <code>beamer</code> template</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-article-template-1" href="#article-template">A.2 <code>article</code> template</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-book-template-1" href="#book-template">A.3 <code>book</code> template</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Larger-book-template-1" href="#Larger-book-template">A.4 Larger <code>book</code> template</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-tugboat-template-1" href="#tugboat-template">A.5 <code>tugboat</code> template</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Index-1" href="#Index">Index</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+
+
+
+
+<a name="Top"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#About-this-document" accesskey="n" rel="next">About this document</a>, Up: <a href="http://tug.org/texinfohtml/" accesskey="u" rel="up">(dir)</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="LaTeX2e_003a-An-unofficial-reference-manual"></a>
+<h1 class="top">LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual</h1>
+
+<p>This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of
+October 2018) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#About-this-document" accesskey="1">About this document</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Bug reporting, etc.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Overview" accesskey="2">Overview</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">What is LaTeX?
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="3">Document classes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Some of the various classes available.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="4">Fonts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Italic, bold, typewriter, etc.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Layout" accesskey="5">Layout</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Controlling the page layout.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="6">Sectioning</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Parts, Chapters, Sections, etc.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="7">Cross references</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Automatic referencing.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Environments" accesskey="8">Environments</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Such as enumerate &amp; itemize.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="9">Line breaking</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Influencing line breaks.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Page-breaking">Page breaking</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Influencing page breaks.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">How to produce footnotes.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Define your own commands, etc.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Internal counters used by LaTeX.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">The length commands.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Paragraph commands.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">How to create mathematical formulas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Various styles of page layout.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Spaces">Spaces</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Horizontal and vertical space.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Boxes">Boxes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Making boxes.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Color">Color</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Defining and using colors.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Graphics">Graphics</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Importing graphics from outside LaTeX.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Special-insertions">Special insertions</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting reserved and special characters.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Dealing with big files by splitting.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Front_002fback-matter">Front/back matter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Letters">Letters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">The <code>letter</code> class.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Terminal-input_002foutput">Terminal input/output</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">User interaction.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Command-line">Command line</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">System-independent command-line behavior.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Document-templates">Document templates</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Starter templates for various document classes.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Index">Index</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">General index.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="About-this-document"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="n" rel="next">Overview</a>, Previous: <a href="#Top" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Top</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="About-this-document-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">1 About this document</h2>
+
+<a name="index-home-page-for-manual"></a>
+<p>This is an unofficial reference manual for the LaTeX2e document
+preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX
+typesetting program (see <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This document&rsquo;s home page is <a href="https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman">https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman</a>. There
+you can get the sources, subscribe to the mailing list or read its
+archives, see other infrastructure, and get the current output in
+various formats. In particular, the output comes in two web formats.
+Probably the most convenient one, shown at <a href="http://latexref.xyz/">http://latexref.xyz/</a>,
+has pages for each topic and so is good for a quick lookup; see also the
+note there about easy-to-remember links. The other, shown at
+<a href="http://svn.gnu.org.ua/viewvc/latexrefman/trunk/latex2e.html?view=co">http://svn.gnu.org.ua/viewvc/latexrefman/trunk/latex2e.html?view=co</a>,
+has all the information on single page.
+</p>
+<a name="index-LaTeX-vs_002e-LaTeX2e"></a>
+<p>In this document, we will mostly just use &lsquo;LaTeX&rsquo; rather than
+&lsquo;LaTeX2e&rsquo;, since the previous version of LaTeX&nbsp;(2.09) was
+frozen decades ago.
+</p>
+<a name="index-unofficial-nature-of-this-manual"></a>
+<a name="index-LaTeX-Project-team"></a>
+<a name="index-latexrefman_0040tug_002eorg-email-address"></a>
+<p>LaTeX is currently maintained by a group of volunteers
+(<a href="http://latex-project.org">http://latex-project.org</a>). The official documentation written by
+the LaTeX project is available from their web site. This document is
+completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the LaTeX
+maintainers.
+<a name="index-bug-reporting"></a>
+<a name="index-reporting-bugs"></a>
+Do not send bug reports or anything else about this document to them.
+Instead, please send all comments to <a href="mailto:latexrefman@tug.org">latexrefman@tug.org</a>.
+</p>
+<p>This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources
+of information about LaTeX, at all levels. Here are a few
+introductions.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><a href="http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr">http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr</a></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-latex_002ddoc_002dptr-document"></a>
+<p>Two pages of recommended references to LaTeX documentation.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><a href="http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc">http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc</a></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-first_002dlatex_002ddoc-document"></a>
+<p>Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><a href="http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide">http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide</a></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-usrguide-official-documentation"></a>
+<p>The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of LaTeX.
+Many other guides by many other people are also available, independent
+of LaTeX itself; one such is the next item:
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><a href="http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort">http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort</a></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-lshort-document"></a>
+<p>A short introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><a href="http://tug.org/begin.html">http://tug.org/begin.html</a></dt>
+<dd><p>Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX, with further
+references.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Overview"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Document classes</a>, Previous: <a href="#About-this-document" accesskey="p" rel="prev">About this document</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Overview-of-LaTeX"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">2 Overview of LaTeX</h2>
+
+<a name="index-overview-of-LaTeX"></a>
+<a name="index-basics-of-LaTeX"></a>
+<a name="index-Knuth_002c-Donald-E_002e"></a>
+<a name="index-Lamport_002c-Leslie"></a>
+<a name="index-LaTeX-overview"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally
+created by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers
+(<a href="http://latex-project.org">http://latex-project.org</a>). It is widely used, particularly for
+complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics.
+</p>
+<a name="index-macro-package_002c-LaTeX-as"></a>
+<p>A LaTeX user writes an input file containing text along with
+interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text
+should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands
+that interface with Donald&nbsp;E. Knuth&rsquo;s TeX typesetting program
+(the technical term is that LaTeX is a <em>macro package</em> for the
+TeX engine). The user produces the output document by giving that
+input file to the TeX engine.
+</p>
+<p>The term LaTeX is also sometimes used to mean the language in which
+the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
+available to a LaTeX user.
+</p>
+<a name="index-Lamport-TeX"></a>
+<a name="index-pronunciation"></a>
+<p>The name LaTeX is short for &ldquo;Lamport TeX&rdquo;. It is pronounced
+LAH-teck or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document,
+produce the logo with <code>\LaTeX</code>. Where use of the logo is not
+sensible, such as in plain text, write it as &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Starting-and-ending" accesskey="1">Starting and ending</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">The standard beginning and end of a document.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Output-files" accesskey="2">Output files</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Files produced.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#TeX-engines" accesskey="3">TeX engines</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Programs that can compile TeX and LaTeX.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="4">LaTeX command syntax</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">General syntax of LaTeX commands.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Environment" accesskey="5">Environment</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Area of the source giving distinct behavior.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#CTAN" accesskey="6">CTAN</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Our repository.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Starting-and-ending"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Output-files" accesskey="n" rel="next">Output files</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Starting-and-ending-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">2.1 Starting and ending</h3>
+
+<a name="Starting-_0026-ending"></a><a name="index-starting-and-ending"></a>
+<a name="index-ending-and-starting"></a>
+<a name="index-hello_002c-world"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
+and ending. This is a small example.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{article}
+\begin{document}
+Hello, \LaTeX\ world.
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Every LaTeX document has a <code>\begin{document}</code> line and an
+<code>\end{document}</code> line.
+</p>
+<a name="index-document-class_002c-defined"></a>
+<p>Here, the &lsquo;<samp>article</samp>&rsquo; is the <em>document class</em>. It is implemented
+in a file <samp>article.cls</samp>. You can use any document class on your
+system. A few document classes are defined by LaTeX itself, and vast
+array of others are widely available. See <a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-preamble_002c-defined"></a>
+<p>You can include other LaTeX commands between the
+<code>\documentclass</code> and the <code>\begin{document}</code> commands.
+This area is called the <em>preamble</em>.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\begin{document}</code>, <code>\end{document}</code> pair defines an
+<a name="index-environment"></a>
+<em>environment</em>; the &lsquo;<samp>document</samp>&rsquo; environment (and no others) is
+required in all LaTeX documents (see <a href="#document">document</a>). LaTeX make
+available to you many environments that are documented here
+(see <a href="#Environments">Environments</a>). Many more are available to you from external
+packages, most importantly those available at CTAN (see <a href="#CTAN">CTAN</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output from
+a LaTeX input file.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Output-files"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#TeX-engines" accesskey="n" rel="next">TeX engines</a>, Previous: <a href="#Starting-and-ending" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Starting and ending</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Output-files-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">2.2 Output files</h3>
+
+<p>LaTeX produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files.
+The main output file&rsquo;s name ends in either <samp>.dvi</samp> or <samp>.pdf</samp>.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>.dvi</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_002edvi-file"></a>
+<a name="index-latex-command"></a>
+<a name="index-xdvi-command"></a>
+<a name="index-dvips-command"></a>
+<a name="index-dvipdfmx-command"></a>
+<a name="index-dvitype-command"></a>
+<a name="output-files-dvi"></a><p>If LaTeX is invoked with the system command <code>latex</code> then it
+produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension <samp>.dvi</samp>. You
+can view this file with a command such as <code>xdvi</code>, or convert
+it to a PostScript <code>.ps</code> file with <code>dvips</code> or to a
+Portable Document Format <code>.pdf</code> file with <code>dvipdfmx</code>.
+The contents of the file can be dumped in human-readable form with
+<code>dvitype</code>. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are
+available (<a href="http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware">http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>.pdf</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_002epdf-file"></a>
+<a name="index-pdfTeX"></a>
+<a name="index-pdflatex-command"></a>
+<a name="output-files-pdf"></a><p>If LaTeX is invoked via the system command <code>pdflatex</code>,
+among other commands (see <a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a>), then the main output is
+a Portable Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a
+self-contained file, with all fonts and images included.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>LaTeX also produces at least two additional files.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>.log</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-transcript-file"></a>
+<a name="index-log-file"></a>
+<a name="index-_002elog-file"></a>
+<a name="output-files-log"></a><p>This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
+loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps
+additional information for any errors.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>.aux</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-auxiliary-file"></a>
+<a name="index-_002eaux-file"></a>
+<a name="index-cross-references_002c-resolving"></a>
+<a name="index-forward-references_002c-resolving"></a>
+<a name="index-references_002c-resolving-forward"></a>
+<a name="output-files-aux"></a><p>Auxiliary information is used by LaTeX for things such as
+cross references. For example, the first time that LaTeX finds a
+forward reference&mdash;a cross reference to something that has not yet
+appeared in the source&mdash;it will appear in the output as a doubled
+question mark <code>??</code>. When the referred-to spot does eventually
+appear in the source then LaTeX writes its location information to
+this <code>.aux</code> file. On the next invocation, LaTeX reads the
+location information from this file and uses it to resolve the
+reference, replacing the double question mark with the remembered
+location.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-_002elof-file"></a>
+<a name="index-list-of-figures-file"></a>
+<a name="index-_002elot-file"></a>
+<a name="index-list-of-tables-file"></a>
+<a name="index-_002etoc-file"></a>
+<a name="index-table-of-contents-file"></a>
+<a name="index-contents-file"></a>
+<p>LaTeX may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename
+ending. These include a <code>.lof</code> file that is used to make a list of
+figures, a <code>.lot</code> file used to make a list of tables, and a
+<code>.toc</code> file used to make a table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>). A particular class may create others; the list is
+open-ended.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="TeX-engines"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="n" rel="next">LaTeX command syntax</a>, Previous: <a href="#Output-files" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Output files</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="TeX-engines-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">2.3 TeX engines</h3>
+
+<a name="index-engines_002c-TeX"></a>
+<a name="index-implementations-of-TeX"></a>
+<a name="index-UTF_002d8"></a>
+<a name="index-Unicode-input_002c-native"></a>
+<a name="index-TrueType-fonts"></a>
+<a name="index-OpenType-fonts"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a TeX
+implementation (see <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>). This section gives a terse
+overview of the main programs (see also&nbsp;<a href="#Command-line">Command line</a>).
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>latex</code></dt>
+<dt><code>pdflatex</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-pdfTeX-engine"></a>
+<a name="index-etex-command"></a>
+<a name="index-e_002dTeX"></a>
+<a name="tex-engines-latex"></a><p>In TeX Live (<a href="http://tug.org/texlive">http://tug.org/texlive</a>), if LaTeX is invoked
+via either the system command <code>latex</code> or <code>pdflatex</code>,
+then the pdfTeX engine is run (<a href="http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex">http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex</a>).
+When invoked as <code>latex</code>, the main output is a <samp>.dvi</samp>
+file; as <code>pdflatex</code>, the main output is a <samp>.pdf</samp> file.
+</p>
+<p>pdfTeX incorporates the e-TeX extensions to Knuth&rsquo;s original
+program (<a href="http://ctan.org/pkg/etex">http://ctan.org/pkg/etex</a>), including additional
+programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty of
+extensions of its own. e-TeX is available on its own as the system
+command <code>etex</code>, but this is plain TeX (and produces
+<samp>.dvi</samp>).
+</p>
+<p>In other TeX distributions, <code>latex</code> may invoke e-TeX
+rather than pdfTeX. In any case, the e-TeX extensions can be
+assumed to be available in LaTeX.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>lualatex</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-lualatex-command"></a>
+<a name="index-LuaTeX"></a>
+<a name="tex-engines-lualatex"></a><p>If LaTeX is invoked via the system command <code>lualatex</code>, the
+LuaTeX engine is run (<a href="http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex">http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex</a>). This
+program allows code written in the scripting language Lua
+(<a href="http://luatex.org">http://luatex.org</a>) to interact with TeX&rsquo;s typesetting.
+LuaTeX handles UTF-8 Unicode input natively, can handle OpenType
+and TrueType fonts, and produces a <samp>.pdf</samp> file by default.
+There is also <code>dvilualatex</code> to produce a <samp>.dvi</samp> file,
+but this is rarely used.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>xelatex</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-xelatex-command"></a>
+<a name="index-XeTeX"></a>
+<a name="index-_002exdv-file"></a>
+<a name="index-xdvipdfmx"></a>
+<a name="tex-engines-xelatex"></a><p>If LaTeX is invoked with the system command <code>xelatex</code>, the
+XeTeX engine is run (<a href="http://tug.org/xetex">http://tug.org/xetex</a>). Like LuaTeX,
+XeTeX natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType
+fonts, though the implementation is completely different, mainly using
+external libraries instead of internal code. XeTeX produces a
+<samp>.pdf</samp> file as output; it does not support DVI output.
+</p>
+<p>Internally, XeTeX creates an <code>.xdv</code> file, a variant of DVI,
+and translates that to PDF using the (<code>x</code>)<code>dvipdfmx</code>
+program, but this process is automatic. The <code>.xdv</code> file is only
+useful for debugging.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Other variants of LaTeX and TeX exist, e.g., to provide
+additional support for Japanese and other languages ([u]pTeX,
+<a href="http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex">http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex</a>, <a href="http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex">http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="LaTeX-command-syntax"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Environment" accesskey="n" rel="next">Environment</a>, Previous: <a href="#TeX-engines" accesskey="p" rel="prev">TeX engines</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="LaTeX-command-syntax-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">2.4 LaTeX command syntax</h3>
+
+<a name="index-command-syntax"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c-character-starting-commands"></a>
+<a name="index-_005b_002e_002e_002e_005d-for-optional-arguments"></a>
+<a name="index-_007b_002e_002e_002e_007d-for-required-arguments"></a>
+<p>In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a backslash
+character, <code>\</code>. The name itself then consists of either
+(a)&nbsp;a string of letters or (b)&nbsp;a single non-letter.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX commands names are case sensitive so that <code>\pagebreak</code>
+differs from <code>\Pagebreak</code> (the latter is not a standard command).
+Most commands are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all
+commands in the same case as they are defined.
+</p>
+<p>A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These
+arguments may be either required or optional. Required arguments are
+contained in curly braces, <code>{...}</code>. Optional arguments are
+contained in square brackets, <code>[...]</code>. Generally, but not
+universally, if the command accepts an optional argument, it comes
+first, before any required arguments.
+</p>
+<p>Inside of an optional argument, to use the character close square
+bracket&nbsp;(<code>]</code>) hide it inside curly braces, as
+in&nbsp;<code>\item[closing bracket {]}]</code>. Similarly, if an optional
+argument comes last, with no required argument after it, then to make
+the first character of the following text be an open square bracket,
+hide it inside curly braces.
+</p>
+<p>Some of LaTeX&rsquo;s commands are a <em>declaration</em>. Such a command
+changes the value the meaning of some other command or parameter. For
+instance, the <code>\mainmatter</code> declaration changes the typesetting of
+page numbers from roman numerals to arabic (see <a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</a>).
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX has the convention that some commands have a <code>*</code> form that
+is related to the form without a <code>*</code>, such as <code>\chapter</code> and
+<code>\chapter*</code>. The exact difference in behavior varies from command
+to command.
+</p>
+<p>This manual describes all accepted options and <code>*</code>-forms for the
+commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Environment"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#CTAN" accesskey="n" rel="next">CTAN</a>, Previous: <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax" accesskey="p" rel="prev">LaTeX command syntax</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Environment-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">2.5 Environment</h3>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{<var>environment name</var>}
+ ...
+\end{<var>environment name</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>An area of LaTeX source, inside of which there is a distinct
+behavior. For instance, for poetry in LaTeX put the lines between
+<code>\begin{verse}</code> and <code>\end{verse}</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{verse}
+ There once was a man from Nantucket \\
+ ...
+\end{verse}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>See <a href="#Environments">Environments</a> for a list of environments. Particularly notable is
+that every LaTeX document must have a <code>document</code> environment,
+a <code>\begin{document} ... \end{document}</code> pair.
+</p>
+<p>The <var>environment name</var> at the beginning must exactly match that at
+the end. This includes the case where <var>environment name</var> ends in a
+star&nbsp;(<code>*</code>); both the <code>\begin</code> and <code>\end</code> texts must
+include the star.
+</p>
+<p>Environments may have arguments, including optional arguments. This
+example produces a table. The first argument is optional (and causes
+the table to be aligned on its top row) while the second argument is
+required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}[t]{r|l}
+ ... rows of table ...
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="CTAN"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Environment" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Environment</a>, Up: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="u" rel="up">Overview</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="CTAN_003a-the-Comprehensive-TeX-Archive-Network"></a>
+<h3 class="section">2.6 CTAN: the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network</h3>
+
+<a name="index-CTAN"></a>
+
+<p>The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network, CTAN, is the TeX and
+LaTeX community&rsquo;s repository of free material. It is a set of
+Internet sites around the world that offer material related to LaTeX
+for download. Visit CTAN on the web at <a href="https://ctan.org">https://ctan.org</a>.
+</p>
+<p>This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
+typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
+person or a small number of people. For instance, many publishers have
+a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher&rsquo;s
+specifications.
+</p>
+<p>In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features such
+as search by name or by functionality.
+</p>
+<a name="index-DANTE-e_002eV_002e"></a>
+<a name="index-mirrors-of-CTAN"></a>
+<p>CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites. One of the
+sites is the core. This site actively manages the material, for
+instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages. It is
+hosted by the German TeX group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the
+world help out by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their
+collections with the core site and then in turn making their copies
+publicly available. This gives users close to their location better
+access and relieves the load on the core site. The list of mirrors is
+at <a href="https://ctan.org/mirrors">https://ctan.org/mirrors</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Document-classes"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="n" rel="next">Fonts</a>, Previous: <a href="#Overview" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Overview</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Document-classes-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">3 Document classes</h2>
+
+<a name="index-document-classes"></a>
+<a name="index-classes-of-documents"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cdocumentclass"></a>
+
+<p>The document&rsquo;s overall class is defined with this command, which is
+normally the first command in a LaTeX source file.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass[<var>options</var>]{<var>class</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-article-class"></a>
+<a name="index-report-class"></a>
+<a name="index-book-class"></a>
+<a name="index-letter-class"></a>
+<a name="index-slides-class"></a>
+<p>The following document <var>class</var> names are built into LaTeX.
+(Many other document classes are available as separate packages;
+see <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>.)
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>article</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="document-classes-article"></a><p>For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>book</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="document-classes-book"></a><p>Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
+matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
+(see <a href="#Front_002fback-matter">Front/back matter</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>letter</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="document-classes-letter"></a><p>Mail, optionally including mailing labels
+(see <a href="#Letters">Letters</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>report</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="document-classes-report"></a><p>For documents of length between an <code>article</code> and a <code>book</code>,
+such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>slides</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="document-classes-slides"></a><p>For slide presentations&mdash;rarely used today. In its place the
+<code>beamer</code> package is perhaps the most prevalent (see <a href="#beamer-template">beamer template</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Standard <var>options</var> are described in the next section.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Document-class-options" accesskey="1">Document class options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Global options.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Additional-packages" accesskey="2">Additional packages</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Bring in packages.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="3">Class and package construction</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Create new classes and packages.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Document-class-options"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Additional-packages" accesskey="n" rel="next">Additional packages</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document classes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Document-class-options-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">3.1 Document class options</h3>
+
+<a name="index-document-class-options"></a>
+<a name="index-options_002c-document-class"></a>
+<a name="index-class-options"></a>
+<a name="index-global-options"></a>
+
+<p>You can specify <em>global options</em> or <em>class options</em> to the
+<code>\documentclass</code> command by enclosing them in square brackets. To
+specify more than one <var>option</var>, separate them with a comma.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass[<var>option1</var>,<var>option2</var>,...]{<var>class</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Here is the list of the standard class options.
+</p>
+<a name="index-10pt-option"></a>
+<a name="index-11pt-option"></a>
+<a name="index-12pt-option"></a>
+<p>All of the standard classes except <code>slides</code> accept the following
+options for selecting the typeface size (default is <code>10pt</code>):
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">10pt 11pt 12pt
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-a4paper-option"></a>
+<a name="index-a5paper-option"></a>
+<a name="index-b5paper-option"></a>
+<a name="index-executivepaper-option"></a>
+<a name="index-legalpaper-option"></a>
+<a name="index-letterpaper-option"></a>
+<p>All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper
+size (these show height by width):
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>a4paper</code></dt>
+<dd><p>210 by 297mm (about 8.25 by 11.75&nbsp;inches)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>a5paper</code></dt>
+<dd><p>148 by 210mm (about 5.8 by 8.3&nbsp;inches)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>b5paper</code></dt>
+<dd><p>176 by 250mm (about 6.9 by 9.8&nbsp;inches)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>executivepaper</code></dt>
+<dd><p>7.25 by 10.5&nbsp;inches
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>legalpaper</code></dt>
+<dd><p>8.5 by 14&nbsp;inches
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>letterpaper</code></dt>
+<dd><p>8.5 by 11&nbsp;inches (the default)
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-_005cpdfpagewidth"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cpdfpageheight"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-geometry"></a>
+<a name="index-geometry-package"></a>
+
+<p>When using one of the engines pdfLaTeX, LuaLaTeX, or XeLaTeX
+(see <a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a>), options other than <code>letterpaper</code> set
+the print area but you must also set the physical paper size. One way
+to do that is to put <code>\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth</code> and
+<code>\pdfpageheight=\paperheight</code> in your document&rsquo;s preamble.
+<a name="index-package_002c-geometry-1"></a>
+<a name="index-geometry-package-1"></a>
+</p>
+<p>The <code>geometry</code> package provides flexible ways of setting the print
+area and physical page size.
+</p>
+<a name="index-draft-option"></a>
+<a name="index-final-option"></a>
+<a name="index-fleqn-option"></a>
+<a name="index-landscape-option"></a>
+<a name="index-leqno-option"></a>
+<a name="index-openbib-option"></a>
+<a name="index-titlepage-option"></a>
+<a name="index-notitlepage-option"></a>
+<p>Miscellaneous other options:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>draft</code></dt>
+<dt><code>final</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-black-boxes_002c-omitting"></a>
+<p>Mark (<code>draft</code>) or do not mark (<code>final</code>) overfull boxes with a
+black box in the margin; default is <code>final</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>fleqn</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-flush-left-equations"></a>
+<a name="index-centered-equations"></a>
+<a name="index-equations_002c-flush-left-vs_002e-centered"></a>
+<p>Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>landscape</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-landscape-orientation"></a>
+<a name="index-portrait-orientation"></a>
+<p>Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>leqno</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-left_002dhand-equation-numbers"></a>
+<a name="index-right_002dhand-equation-numbers"></a>
+<a name="index-equation-numbers_002c-left-vs_002e-right"></a>
+<p>Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>openbib</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-bibliography-format_002c-open"></a>
+<p>Use &ldquo;open&rdquo; bibliography format.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>titlepage</code></dt>
+<dt><code>notitlepage</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-title-page_002c-separate-or-run_002din"></a>
+<p>Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title information and
+for the abstract also, if there is one. The default for the
+<code>report</code> class is <code>titlepage</code>, for the other classes it is
+<code>notitlepage</code>.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>The following options are not available with the <code>slides</code> class.
+</p>
+<a name="index-onecolumn-option"></a>
+<a name="index-twocolumn-option"></a>
+<a name="index-oneside-option"></a>
+<a name="index-twoside-option"></a>
+<a name="index-openright-option"></a>
+<a name="index-openany-option"></a>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>onecolumn</code></dt>
+<dt><code>twocolumn</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Typeset in one or two columns; default is <code>onecolumn</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>oneside</code></dt>
+<dt><code>twoside</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cevensidemargin"></a>
+<a name="index-_005coddsidemargin"></a>
+<p>Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is <code>oneside</code>, except
+that in the <code>book</code> class the default is <code>twoside</code>.
+</p>
+<p>For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page. For two-sided
+printing, the <code>\evensidemargin</code> (<code>\oddsidemargin</code>) parameter
+determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left
+side of the page and the text&rsquo;s left margin, with <code>\oddsidemargin</code>
+being 40% of the difference between <code>\paperwidth</code> and
+<code>\textwidth</code>, and <code>\evensidemargin</code> is the remainder.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>openright</code></dt>
+<dt><code>openany</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default is
+<code>openright</code> for <code>book</code>, and <code>openany</code> for <code>report</code>.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-clock-option-to-slides-class"></a>
+<p>The <code>slides</code> class offers the option <code>clock</code> for printing
+the time at the bottom of each note.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Additional-packages"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="n" rel="next">Class and package construction</a>, Previous: <a href="#Document-class-options" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Document class options</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document classes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Additional-packages-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">3.2 Additional packages</h3>
+
+<a name="index-loading-additional-packages"></a>
+<a name="index-packages_002c-loading-additional"></a>
+<a name="index-additional-packages_002c-loading"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cusepackage"></a>
+<p>Load a package <var>pkg</var>, with the package options given in the comma-separated
+list <var>options</var>, as here.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage[<var>options</var>]{<var>pkg</var>}.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>To specify more than one package you can separate them with a comma,
+as in <code>\usepackage{<var>pkg1</var>,<var>pkg2</var>,...}</code>, or use multiple
+<code>\usepackage</code> commands.
+</p>
+<a name="index-global-options-1"></a>
+<a name="index-options_002c-global"></a>
+<p>Any options given in the <code>\documentclass</code> command that are unknown
+to the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
+<code>\usepackage</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Class-and-package-construction"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Additional-packages" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Additional packages</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document classes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Class-and-package-construction-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">3.3 Class and package construction</h3>
+
+<a name="index-document-class-commands"></a>
+<a name="index-commands_002c-document-class"></a>
+<a name="index-new-class-commands"></a>
+
+<p>You can create new document classes and new packages. For instance, if
+your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a
+standard header for each page, then you could create a new class
+<code>smcmemo.cls</code> and begin your documents with
+<code>\documentclass{smcmemo}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>What separates a package from a document class is that the commands in a
+package are useful across classes while those in a document class are
+specific to that class. Thus, a command to set page headers is for a
+package while a command to make the page headers say <code>Memo from the
+SMC Math Department</code> is for a class.
+<a name="index-class-and-package-difference"></a>
+<a name="index-difference-between-class-and-package"></a>
+</p>
+<p>Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign <code>@</code> as a
+character in command names without having to surround the code
+containing that command with <code>\makeatletter</code> and
+<code>\makeatother</code>. See <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</a>. This allow
+you to create commands that users will not accidentally redefine.
+Another technique is to preface class- or package-specific commands with
+some string to prevent your class or package from interfering with
+others. For instance, the class <code>smcmemo</code> might have commands
+<code>\smc@tolist</code>, <code>\smc@fromlist</code>, etc.
+</p>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Class-and-package-structure" accesskey="1">Class and package structure</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Layout of the file.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Class-and-package-commands" accesskey="2">Class and package commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">List of commands.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Class-and-package-structure"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Class-and-package-commands" accesskey="n" rel="next">Class and package commands</a>, Up: <a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="u" rel="up">Class and package construction</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Class-and-package-structure-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">3.3.1 Class and package structure</h4>
+
+<a name="index-class-and-package-structure"></a>
+<a name="index-class-file-layout"></a>
+<a name="index-package-file-layout"></a>
+<a name="index-options_002c-document-class-1"></a>
+<a name="index-options_002c-package"></a>
+<a name="index-class-options-1"></a>
+<a name="index-package-options"></a>
+
+<p>A class file or package file typically has four parts.
+</p><ol>
+<li> In the <em>identification part</em>, the file says that it is a LaTeX
+package or class and describes itself, using the <code>\NeedsTeXFormat</code>
+and <code>\ProvidesClass</code> or <code>\ProvidesPackage</code> commands.
+
+</li><li> The <em>preliminary declarations part</em> declares some commands and
+can also load other files. Usually these commands will be those needed
+for the code used in the next part. For example, an <code>smcmemo</code>
+class might be called with an option to read in a file with a list of
+people for the to-head, as <code>\documentclass[mathto]{smcmemo}</code>, and
+therefore needs to define a command
+<code>\newcommand{\setto}[1]{\def\@tolist{#1}}</code> used in that
+file.
+
+</li><li> In the <em>handle options part</em> the class or package declares
+and processes its options. Class options allow a user to start their
+document as <code>\documentclass[<var>option list</var>]{<var>class
+name</var>}</code>, to modify the behavior of the class. An example is when you
+declare <code>\documentclass[11pt]{article}</code> to set the default
+document font size.
+
+</li><li> Finally, in the <em>more declarations part</em> the class or package usually does
+most of its work: declaring new variables, commands and fonts, and
+loading other files.
+</li></ol>
+
+<p>Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as <samp>stub.cls</samp>
+where LaTeX can find it, for example in the same directory as the
+<samp>.tex</samp> file.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesClass{stub}[2017/07/06 stub to start building classes from]
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+\LoadClass{article}
+</pre></div>
+<a name="index-class-file-example"></a>
+
+<p>It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
+passing them all to the <code>article</code> class, and then loads the
+<code>article</code> class to provide the basis for this class&rsquo;s code.
+</p>
+<p>For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
+Class Guide, at
+<a href="http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf">http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf</a> (much
+of the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
+<a href="https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf">https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Class-and-package-commands"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Class-and-package-structure" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Class and package structure</a>, Up: <a href="#Class-and-package-construction" accesskey="u" rel="up">Class and package construction</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Class-and-package-commands-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">3.3.2 Class and package commands</h4>
+<a name="index-class-and-package-commands"></a>
+<a name="index-commands_002c-class-and-package"></a>
+
+<p>These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\AtBeginDvi{specials}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cAtBeginDvi"></a>
+<p>Save in a box register things that are written to the <samp>.dvi</samp> file
+at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\AtEndOfClass{<var>code</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\AtEndOfPackage{<var>code</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cAtEndOfClass"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cAtEndOfPackage"></a>
+<p>Hook to insert <var>code</var> to be executed when LaTeX finishes
+processing the current class or package. You can use these hooks
+multiple times; the <code>code</code> will be executed in the order that you
+called it. See also <a href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument">\AtBeginDocument</a>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\CheckCommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\CheckCommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cCheckCommand"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cCheckCommand_002a"></a>
+<a name="index-new-command_002c-check"></a>
+<p>Like <code>\newcommand</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a>) but does
+not define <var>cmd</var>; instead it checks that the current definition of
+<var>cmd</var> is exactly as given by <var>definition</var> and is or is not
+<a name="index-long-command"></a>
+<em>long</em> as expected. A long command is a command that accepts
+<code>\par</code> within an argument. The <var>cmd</var> command is expected to be
+long with the unstarred version of <code>\CheckCommand</code>. Raises an
+error when the check fails. This allows you to check before you start
+redefining <code>cmd</code> yourself that no other package has already
+redefined this command.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ClassError{<var>class name</var>}{<var>error text</var>}{<var>help text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\PackageError{<var>package name</var>}{<var>error text</var>}{<var>help text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ClassWarning{<var>class name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\PackageWarning{<var>package name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ClassWarningNoLine{<var>class name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\PackageWarningNoLine{<var>package name</var>}{<var>warning text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ClassInfo{<var>class name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\PackageInfo{<var>package name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ClassInfoNoLine{<var>class name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\PackageInfoNoLine{<var>package name</var>}{<var>info text</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cClassError"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cPackageError"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cClassWarning"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cPackageWarning"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cClassWarningNoLine"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cPackageWarningNoLine"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cClassInfo"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cPackageInfo"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cClassInfoNoLine"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cPackageInfoNoLine"></a>
+<p>Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.
+</p>
+<p>For <code>\ClassError</code> and <code>\PackageError</code> the message is
+<var>error text</var>, followed by TeX&rsquo;s <code>?</code> error prompt. If the
+user then asks for help by typing <code>h</code>, they see the <var>help
+text</var>.
+</p>
+<p>The four warning commands are similar except that they write
+<var>warning text</var> on the screen with no error prompt. The four info
+commands write <var>info text</var> only in the transcript file. The
+<code>NoLine</code> versions do not show the number of the line generating the
+message, while the other versions do show that number.
+</p>
+<p>To format the messages, including the <var>help text</var>: use
+<code>\protect</code> to stop a command from expanding, get a line break with
+<code>\MessageBreak</code>, and get a space with <code>\space</code> when a space
+character does not allow it, like after a command. Note that LaTeX
+appends a period to the messages.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\CurrentOption</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cCurrentOption"></a>
+<p>Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can only
+be used within the <var>code</var> argument of either <code>\DeclareOption</code>
+or <code>\DeclareOption*</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\DeclareOption{<var>option</var>}{<var>code</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\DeclareOption*{<var>code</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cDeclareOption"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cDeclareOption_002a"></a>
+<a name="index-class-options-2"></a>
+<a name="index-package-options-1"></a>
+<a name="index-options_002c-class"></a>
+<a name="index-options_002c-package-1"></a>
+<p>Make an option available to a user to invoke in their
+<code>\documentclass</code> command. For example, the <code>smcmemo</code> class
+could have an option <code>\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}</code> allowing
+users to put the institutional logo on the first page. The class file
+must contain <code>\DeclareOption{logo}{<var>code</var>}</code> (and later,
+<code>\ProcessOptions</code>).
+</p>
+<p>If you request an option that has not been declared, by default this
+will produce a warning like <code>Unused global option(s): [badoption].</code>
+Change this behaviour with the starred version
+<code>\DeclareOption*{<var>code</var>}</code>. For example, many classes extend
+an existing class, using a declaration such as
+<code>\LoadClass{article}</code>, and for passing extra options to the
+underlying class use code such as this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\DeclareOption*{%
+\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
+}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Another example is that the class <code>smcmemo</code> may allow users to keep
+lists of memo recipients in external files. Then the user could invoke
+<code>\documentclass[math]{smcmemo}</code> and it will read the file
+<code>math.memo</code>. This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
+passes the option to the <code>article</code> class.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\DeclareOption*{\InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.memo}{}{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}}
+</pre></div>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\DeclareRobustCommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\DeclareRobustCommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]{<var>definition</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cDeclareRobustCommand"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cDeclareRobustCommand_002a"></a>
+<a name="index-new-command_002c-definition"></a>
+<p>Like <code>\newcommand</code> and <code>\newcommand*</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a>) but these declare a robust command, even if some code
+within the <var>definition</var> is fragile. (For a discussion of robust and
+fragile commands see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>.) Use this command to define new
+robust commands or to redefine existing commands and make them
+robust. Unlike <code>\newcommand</code> these do not give an error if macro
+<var>cmd</var> already exists; instead, a log message is put into the
+transcript file if a command is redefined.
+</p>
+<p>Commands defined this way are a bit less efficient than those defined
+using <code>\newcommand</code> so unless the command&rsquo;s data is fragile and the
+command is used within a moving argument, use <code>\newcommand</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-etoolbox"></a>
+<a name="index-etoolbox-package"></a>
+<p>The <samp>etoolbox</samp> package offers the commands
+<code>\newrobustcmd</code>, <code>\newrobustcmd*</code>, as well as the commands
+<code>\renewrobustcmd</code>, <code>\renewrobustcmd*</code>, and the commands
+<code>\providerobustcmd</code>, and <code>\providerobustcmd*</code>. These are
+similar to <code>\newcommand</code>, <code>\newcommand*</code>,
+<code>\renewcommand</code>, <code>\renewcommand*</code>, <code>\providecommand</code>, and
+<code>\providecommand*</code>, but define a robust <var>cmd</var> with two
+advantages as compared to <code>\DeclareRobustCommand</code>:
+</p><ol>
+<li> They use the low-level e-TeX protection mechanism rather than the
+higher level LaTeX <code>\protect</code> mechanism, so they do not incur
+the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
+</li><li> They make the same distinction between <code>\new&hellip;</code>,
+<code>\renew&hellip;</code>, and <code>\provide&hellip;</code>, as the standard
+commands, so they do not just make a log message when you redefine
+<var>cmd</var> that already exists, in that case you need to use either
+<code>\renew&hellip;</code> or <code>\provide&hellip;</code> or you get an error.
+</li></ol>
+
+
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\IfFileExists{<var>file name</var>}{<var>true code</var>}{<var>false code</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\InputIfFileExists{<var>file name</var>}{<var>true code</var>}{<var>false code</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cIfFileExists"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cInputIfFileExists"></a>
+<p>Execute <var>true code</var> if LaTeX finds the file <samp><var>file
+name</var></samp> or <var>false code</var> otherwise. In the first case it executing
+<var>true code</var> and then inputs the file. Thus the command
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{%
+ \includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{!! img.pdf not found}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>will include the graphic <samp>img.pdf</samp> if it is found and otherwise
+give a warning.
+</p>
+<p>This command looks for the file in all search paths that LaTeX uses,
+not only in the current directory. To look only in the current
+directory do something like <code>\IfFileExists{./filename}{<var>true
+code</var>}{<var>false code</var>}</code>. If you ask for a filename without a
+<code>.tex</code> extension then LaTeX will first look for the file by
+appending the <code>.tex</code>; for more on how LaTeX handles file
+extensions see <a href="#g_t_005cinput">\input</a>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\LoadClass[<var>options list</var>]{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\LoadClassWithOptions{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cLoadClass"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cLoadClassWithOptions"></a>
+<p>Load a class, as with <code>\documentclass[<var>options
+list</var>]{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release info</var>]</code>. An example is
+<code>\LoadClass[twoside]{article}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The <var>options list</var>, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+<var>release date</var> is optional. If present it must have the form
+<var>YYYY/MM/DD</var>.
+</p>
+<p>If you request a <var>release date</var> and the date of the package
+installed on your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the
+screen and in the log like this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">You have requested, on input line 4, version `2038/01/19' of
+document class article, but only version `2014/09/29 v1.4h
+Standard LaTeX document class' is available.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The command version <code>\LoadClassWithOptions</code> uses the list of
+options for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed
+to it via <code>\PassOptionsToClass</code>. This is a convenience command
+that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the standard
+<code>article</code> class, without having to track which options were passed.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ExecuteOptions{<var>options-list</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cExecuteOptions"></a>
+<p>For each option <var>option</var> in the <var>options-list</var>, in order, this command
+executes the command <code>\ds@<var>option</var></code>. If this command is not
+defined then that option is silently ignored.
+</p>
+<p>It can be used to provide a default option list before
+<code>\ProcessOptions</code>. For example, if in a class file you want the
+default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
+<code>\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\NeedsTeXFormat{<var>format</var>}[<var>format date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cNeedsTeXFormat"></a>
+<p>Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often issued
+as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
+<code>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}</code>. When a document using that class is
+processed, the format name given here must match the format that is
+actually being run (including that the <var>format</var> string is case
+sensitive). If it does not match then execution stops with an error
+like &lsquo;<samp>This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.</samp>&rsquo;
+</p>
+<p>To specify a version of the format that you know to have certain
+features, include the optional <var>format date</var> on which those features
+were implemented. If present it must be in the form <code>YYYY/MM/DD</code>.
+If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
+<var>format date</var> then you get a warning like this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">You have requested release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only
+release `2016/02/01' is available.
+</pre></div>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\OptionNotUsed</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cOptionNotUsed"></a>
+<p>Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be used
+within the <var>code</var> argument of either <code>\DeclareOption</code> or
+<code>\DeclareOption*</code>.
+</p>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\PassOptionsToClass{<var>option list</var>}{<var>class name</var>}</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\PassOptionsToPackage{<var>option list</var>}{<var>package name</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cPassOptionsToClass"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cPassOptionsToPackage"></a>
+<p>Adds the options in the comma-separated list <var>option list</var> to the
+options used by any future <code>\RequirePackage</code> or <code>\usepackage</code>
+command for package <var>package name</var> or the class <var>class name</var>.
+</p>
+<p>The reason for these commands is: you may load a package any number of
+times with no options but if you want options then you may only supply
+them when you first load the package. Loading a package with options
+more than once will get you an error like <code>Option clash for package
+foo.</code> (LaTeX throws an error even if there is no conflict between the
+options.)
+</p>
+<p>If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can collapse
+that to once, for example replacing the two
+<code>\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}</code> and
+<code>\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}</code> with the single command
+<code>\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>However, imagine that you are loading <samp>firstpkg</samp> and inside that
+package it loads <samp>secondpkg</samp>, and you need the second package to be
+loaded with option <code>draft</code>. Then before doing the first package
+you must queue up the options for the second package, like this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{secondpkg}
+\RequirePackage{firstpkg}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>(If <code>firstpkg.sty</code> loads an option in conflict with what you want
+then you may have to alter its source.)
+</p>
+<p>These commands are useful for general users as well as class and package
+writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the <code>graphicx</code>
+package with the option <code>draft</code> and also wants to use a class
+<code>foo</code> that loads the <code>graphicx</code> package, but without that
+option. The user could start their LaTeX file with
+<code>\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\documentclass{foo}</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ProcessOptions</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ProcessOptions*<var>\@options</var></code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cProcessOptions"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cProcessOptions_002a"></a>
+<p>Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked. Include it
+in the class file as <code>\ProcessOptions\relax</code> (because of the
+existence of the starred command).
+</p>
+<p>Options come in two types. <em>Local options</em> have been specified for this
+particular package in the <var>options</var> argument of
+<code>\PassOptionsToPackage{<var>options</var>}</code>,
+<code>\usepackage[<var>options</var>]</code>, or
+<code>\RequirePackage[<var>options</var>]</code>. <em>Global options</em> are those given
+by the class user in <code>\documentclass[<var>options</var>]</code> (If an option
+is specified both locally and globally then it is local.)
+</p>
+<p>When <code>\ProcessOptions</code> is called for a package <samp>pkg.sty</samp>, the
+following happens:
+</p><ol>
+<li> For each option <var>option</var> so far declared
+with <code>\DeclareOption</code>, it looks to see if that option is either a
+global or a local option for <code>pkg</code>. If so then it executes the
+declared code. This is done in the order in which these options were
+given in <samp>pkg.sty</samp>.
+</li><li> For each remaining local option, it executes the command
+<code>\ds@</code><var>option</var> if it has been defined somewhere (other than by
+a <code>\DeclareOption</code>); otherwise, it executes the default option code
+given in <code>\DeclareOption*</code>. If no default option code has been
+declared then it gives an error message. This is done in the order in
+which these options were specified.
+</li></ol>
+
+<p>When <code>\ProcessOptions</code> is called for a class it works in the same
+way except that all options are local, and the default <var>code</var> for
+<code>\DeclareOption*</code> is <code>\OptionNotUsed</code> rather than an error.
+</p>
+<p>The starred version <code>\ProcessOptions*</code> executes the
+options in the order specified in the calling commands, rather than in
+the order of declaration in the class or package. For a package this
+means that the global options are processed first.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ProvidesClass{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var> <var>brief additional information</var>]</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ProvidesClass{<var>class name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ProvidesPackage{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var> <var>brief additional information</var>]</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\ProvidesPackage{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cProvidesClass"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cProvidesPackage"></a>
+<p>Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and
+the log file.
+</p>
+<p>When you load a class or package, for example with
+<code>\documentclass{smcmemo}</code> or <code>\usepackage{test}</code>, LaTeX
+inputs a file. If the name of the file does not match the class or
+package name declared in it then you get a warning. Thus, if you invoke
+<code>\documentclass{smcmemo}</code>, and the file <samp>smcmemo.cls</samp> has
+the statement <code>\ProvidesClass{xxx}</code> then you get a warning like
+<code>You have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document
+class provides 'xxx'.</code> This warning does not prevent LaTeX from
+processing the rest of the class file normally.
+</p>
+<p>If you include the optional argument then you must include a date,
+before any spaces, of the form <code>YYYY/MM/DD</code>. The rest of the
+optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally identifies the
+class, and is written to the screen during compilation and to the log
+file. Thus, if your file <samp>smcmemo.cls</samp> contains the line
+<code>\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]</code> and
+your document&rsquo;s first line is <code>\documentclass{smcmemo}</code> then you
+will see <code>Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to ask
+to be warned if the version of the class or package is earlier than
+<var>release date</var>. For instance, a user could enter
+<code>\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]</code> or
+<code>\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]</code> to require a class or package
+with certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier
+than the given date. (Although, in practice package users only rarely
+include a date, and class users almost never do.)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ProvidesFile{<var>file name</var>}[<var>additional information</var>]</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cProvidesFile"></a>
+<p>Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
+configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in that
+file and you get in the log a string like <code>File: test.config
+2017/10/12 config file for test.cls</code> for <var>file name</var> equal to
+&lsquo;<samp>test.config</samp>&rsquo; and <var>additional information</var> equal to
+&lsquo;<samp>2017/10/12 config file for test.cls</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\RequirePackage[<var>option list</var>]{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\RequirePackageWithOptions{<var>package name</var>}[<var>release date</var>]</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cRequirePackage"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cRequirePackageWithOptions"></a>
+<p>Load a package, like the command <code>\usepackage</code> (see <a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a>). The LaTeX development team strongly recommends use of
+these commands over Plain&nbsp;TeX&rsquo;s <code>\input</code>; see the Class
+Guide. An example is
+<code>\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The <var>option list</var>, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+<var>release date</var>, if present, must have the form <var>YYYY/MM/DD</var>. If
+the release date of the package as installed on your system is earlier
+than <var>release date</var> then you get a warning like <code>You have
+requested, on input line 9, version `2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but
+only version `2000/01/01' is available</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\RequirePackageWithOptions</code> version uses the list of options
+for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to it
+via <code>\PassOptionsToClass</code>. This is a convenience command to allow
+easily building classes on existing ones without having to track which
+options were passed.
+</p>
+<p>The difference between <code>\usepackage</code> and <code>\RequirePackage</code> is
+small. The <code>\usepackage</code> command is intended for the document file
+while <code>\RequirePackage</code> is intended for package and class files.
+Thus, using <code>\usepackage</code> before the <code>\documentclass</code> command
+causes LaTeX to give error like <code>\usepackage before
+\documentclass</code>, but you can use <code>\RequirePackage</code> there.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Fonts"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="n" rel="next">Layout</a>, Previous: <a href="#Document-classes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Document classes</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Fonts-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">4 Fonts</h2>
+<a name="Typefaces"></a>
+<a name="index-typefaces"></a>
+<a name="index-fonts"></a>
+
+<p>Two important aspects of selecting a <em>font</em> are specifying a size
+and a style. The LaTeX commands for doing this are described here.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Font-styles" accesskey="1">Font styles</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Select roman, italics, etc.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Font-sizes" accesskey="2">Font sizes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Select point size.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands" accesskey="3">Low-level font commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Select encoding, family, series, shape.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Font-styles"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Font-sizes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Font sizes</a>, Up: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fonts</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Font-styles-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">4.1 Font styles</h3>
+
+<a name="index-font-styles"></a>
+<a name="index-type-styles"></a>
+<a name="index-styles-of-text"></a>
+
+<p>The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
+</p>
+<p>In the table below the listed commands, the <code>\text...</code> commands,
+is used with an argument, as in <code>\textit{<var>text</var>}</code>. This is
+the preferred form. But shown after it, in parenthesis, is the
+corresponding declaration form, which is sometimes useful. This form
+takes no arguments, as in <code>{\itshape <var>text</var>}</code>. The scope of
+the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end
+of the current group. In addition, each has an environment form such as
+<code>\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, are
+cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying either of
+<code>\sffamily\bfseries</code> or <code>\bfseries\sffamily</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cnocorrlist"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnocorr"></a>
+<p>One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert italic
+corrections if needed (see <a href="#g_t_005c_002f">\/</a>). Specifically, they insert the
+italic correction unless the following character is in the list
+<code>\nocorrlist</code>, which by default consists of a period and a comma.
+To suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use
+<code>\nocorr</code> at the start or end of the command argument, such as
+<code>\textit{\nocorr text}</code> or <code>\textsc{text \nocorr}</code>.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\textrm (\rmfamily)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextrm"></a>
+<a name="index-_005crmfamily"></a>
+<p>Roman.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textit (\itshape)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextit"></a>
+<a name="index-_005citshape"></a>
+<p>Italics.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textmd (\mdseries)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextmd"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmdseries"></a>
+<p>Medium weight (default).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbf (\bfseries)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextbf"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cbfseries"></a>
+<p>Boldface.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textup (\upshape)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextup"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cupshape"></a>
+<p>Upright (default).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textsl (\slshape)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextsl"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cslshape"></a>
+<p>Slanted.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textsf (\sffamily)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextsf"></a>
+<a name="index-_005csffamily"></a>
+<p>Sans serif.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textsc (\scshape)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextsc"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cscshape"></a>
+<p>Small caps.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\texttt (\ttfamily)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctexttt"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cttfamily"></a>
+<p>Typewriter.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textnormal (\normalfont)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextnormal"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnormalfont"></a>
+<p>Main document font.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-emphasis"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cemph"></a>
+<p>Although it also changes fonts, the <code>\emph{<var>text</var>}</code> command
+is semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
+substitute for <code>\textit</code>. For example, <code>\emph{<var>start
+text</var> \emph{<var>middle text</var>} <var>end text</var>}</code> will result in the
+<var>start text</var> and <var>end text</var> in italics, but <var>middle text</var>
+will be in roman.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
+switch to the given style, that is, are <em>not</em> cumulative. They are
+used as declarations: <code>{\<var>cmd</var>...}</code> instead of
+<code>\<var>cmd</var>{...}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>(The unconditional commands below are an older version of font
+switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most
+circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
+what you want.)
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\bf</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbf"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-bold-font"></a>
+<p>Switch to bold face.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cal</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccal"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-script-letters-for-math"></a>
+<a name="index-calligraphic-letters-for-math"></a>
+<p>Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\it</code>
+<a name="index-_005cit"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-italic-font"></a>
+<p>Italics.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rm</code>
+<a name="index-_005crm"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-roman-font"></a>
+<p>Roman.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sc</code>
+<a name="index-_005csc"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-small-caps-font"></a>
+<p>Small caps.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sf</code>
+<a name="index-_005csf"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-sans-serif-font"></a>
+<p>Sans serif.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sl</code>
+<a name="index-_005csl"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-slanted-font"></a>
+<a name="index-oblique-font"></a>
+<p>Slanted (oblique).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tt</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctt"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-typewriter-font"></a>
+<a name="index-monospace-font"></a>
+<a name="index-fixed_002dwidth-font"></a>
+<p>Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>The <code>\em</code> command is the unconditional version of <code>\emph</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The following commands are for use in math mode. They are not
+cumulative, so <code>\mathbf{\mathit{<var>symbol</var>}}</code> does not
+create a boldface and italic <var>symbol</var>; instead, it will just be in
+italics. This is because typically math symbols need consistent
+typographic treatment, regardless of the surrounding environment.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\mathrm</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmathrm"></a>
+<p>Roman, for use in math mode.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathbf</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmathbf"></a>
+<p>Boldface, for use in math mode.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathsf</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmathsf"></a>
+<p>Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathtt</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmathtt"></a>
+<p>Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathit</code></dt>
+<dt><code>(\mit)</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Italics, for use in math mode.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathnormal</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmathnormal"></a>
+<p>For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathcal</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmathcal"></a>
+<p>Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-_005cmathversion"></a>
+<a name="index-math_002c-bold"></a>
+<a name="index-bold-math"></a>
+<p>In addition, the command <code>\mathversion{bold}</code> can be used for
+switching to bold letters and symbols in
+formulas. <code>\mathversion{normal}</code> restores the default.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005coldstylenums"></a>
+<a name="index-numerals_002c-old_002dstyle"></a>
+<a name="index-old_002dstyle-numerals"></a>
+<a name="index-lining-numerals"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-textcomp"></a>
+<a name="index-textcomp-package"></a>
+
+<p>Finally, the command <code>\oldstylenums{<var>numerals</var>}</code> will typeset
+so-called &ldquo;old-style&rdquo; numerals, which have differing heights and
+depths (and sometimes widths) from the standard &ldquo;lining&rdquo; numerals,
+which all have the same height as uppercase letters. LaTeX&rsquo;s
+default fonts support this, and will respect <code>\textbf</code> (but not
+other styles; there are no italic old-style numerals in Computer
+Modern). Many other fonts have old-style numerals also; sometimes the
+<code>textcomp</code> package must be loaded, and sometimes package options
+are provided to make them the default. FAQ entry:
+<a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Font-sizes"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands" accesskey="n" rel="next">Low-level font commands</a>, Previous: <a href="#Font-styles" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Font styles</a>, Up: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fonts</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Font-sizes-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">4.2 Font sizes</h3>
+
+<a name="index-font-sizes"></a>
+<a name="index-typeface-sizes"></a>
+<a name="index-sizes-of-text"></a>
+
+<p>The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX.
+The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font
+size used (in points) with the &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo;, and
+&lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo; document size options, respectively (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005ctiny"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cscriptsize"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cfootnotesize"></a>
+<a name="index-_005csmall"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnormalsize"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clarge"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cLarge"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cLARGE"></a>
+<a name="index-_005chuge"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cHuge"></a>
+
+<table>
+<thead><tr><th>Command</th><th><code>10pt</code></th><th><code>11pt</code></th><th><code>12pt</code></th></tr></thead>
+<tr><td><code>\tiny</code></td><td>5</td><td>6</td><td>6</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\scriptsize</code></td><td>7</td><td>8</td><td>8</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\footnotesize</code></td><td>8</td><td>9</td><td>10</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\small</code></td><td>9</td><td>10</td><td>10.95</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\normalsize</code> (default)</td><td>10</td><td>10.95</td><td>12</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\large</code></td><td>12</td><td>12</td><td>14.4</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\Large</code></td><td>14.4</td><td>14.4</td><td>17.28</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\LARGE</code></td><td>17.28</td><td>17.28</td><td>20.74</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\huge</code></td><td>20.74</td><td>20.74</td><td>24.88</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\Huge</code></td><td>24.88</td><td>24.88</td><td>24.88</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>The commands are listed here in declaration forms. You use them by
+declaring them, as with this example.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{quotation} \small
+ The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao.
+\end{quotation}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The scope of the <code>\small</code> lasts until the end of the
+<code>quotation</code> environment. It would also end at the next type style
+command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it in
+extra curly braces <code>{\small We are here, we are here, we are
+here!}</code>. You can instead use the environment form of these commands;
+for instance, <code>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Low_002dlevel-font-commands"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Font-sizes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Font sizes</a>, Up: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fonts</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Low_002dlevel-font-commands-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">4.3 Low-level font commands</h3>
+
+<a name="index-low_002dlevel-font-commands"></a>
+<a name="index-font-commands_002c-low_002dlevel"></a>
+
+<p>These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
+packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
+ones.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dd><a name="low-level-font-commands-fontencoding"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\fontencoding{<var>encoding</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfontencoding"></a>
+<p>Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There are a
+large number of valid encodings. The most common are <code>OT1</code>,
+Knuth&rsquo;s original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
+<code>T1</code>, also known as the Cork encoding, which has support for the
+accented characters used by the most widespread European languages
+(German, French, Italian, Polish and others), which allows TeX to
+hyphenate words containing accented letters. For more, see
+<a href="https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide">https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide</a>.
+</p>
+<a name="low-level-font-commands-fontfamily"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\fontfamily{<var>family</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfontfamily"></a>
+<a name="index-families_002c-of-fonts"></a>
+<a name="index-font-catalogue"></a>
+<p>Select the font family. The web page
+<a href="http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/">http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/</a> provides one way to browse
+through many of the fonts easily used with LaTeX. Here are
+examples of some common families.
+</p>
+<table>
+<tr><td><code>pag</code></td><td>Avant Garde</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>fvs</code></td><td>Bitstream Vera Sans</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>pbk</code></td><td>Bookman</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>bch</code></td><td>Charter</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>ccr</code></td><td>Computer Concrete</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>cmr</code></td><td>Computer Modern</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>cmss</code></td><td>Computer Modern Sans Serif</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>cmtt</code></td><td>Computer Modern Typewriter</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>pcr</code></td><td>Courier</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>phv</code></td><td>Helvetica</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>fi4</code></td><td>Inconsolata</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>lmr</code></td><td>Latin Modern</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>lmss</code></td><td>Latin Modern Sans</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>lmtt</code></td><td>Latin Modern Typewriter</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>pnc</code></td><td>New Century Schoolbook</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>ppl</code></td><td>Palatino</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>ptm</code></td><td>Times</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>uncl</code></td><td>Uncial</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>put</code></td><td>Utopia</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>pzc</code></td><td>Zapf Chancery</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<a name="low-level-font-commands-fontseries"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\fontseries{<var>series</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfontseries"></a>
+<a name="index-series_002c-of-fonts"></a>
+<p>Select the font series. A <em>series</em> combines a <em>weight</em> and a
+<em>width</em>. Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible
+combinations. Some common combined series values include:
+</p>
+<table>
+<tr><td><code>m</code></td><td>Medium (normal)</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>b</code></td><td>Bold</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>c</code></td><td>Condensed</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>bc</code></td><td>Bold condensed</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>bx</code></td><td>Bold extended</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<a name="index-weights_002c-of-fonts"></a>
+<p>The possible values for weight, individually, are:
+</p>
+<table>
+<tr><td><code>ul</code></td><td>Ultra light</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>el</code></td><td>Extra light</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>l</code></td><td>Light</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>sl</code></td><td>Semi light</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>m</code></td><td>Medium (normal)</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>sb</code></td><td>Semi bold</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>b</code></td><td>Bold</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>eb</code></td><td>Extra bold</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>ub</code></td><td>Ultra bold</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<a name="index-widths_002c-of-fonts"></a>
+<p>The possible values for width, individually, are (the meaning and
+relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces):
+</p>
+<table>
+<tr><td><code>uc</code></td><td>Ultra condensed</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>ec</code></td><td>Extra condensed</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>c</code></td><td>Condensed</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>sc</code></td><td>Semi condensed</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>m</code></td><td>Medium</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>sx</code></td><td>Semi expanded</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>x</code></td><td>Expanded</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>ex</code></td><td>Extra expanded</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>ux</code></td><td>Ultra expanded</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>When forming the <var>series</var> string from the weight and width, drop the
+<code>m</code> that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both
+weight and width are <code>m</code>, in which case use just one
+(&lsquo;<samp><code>m</code></samp>&rsquo;).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\fontshape{<var>shape</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfontshape"></a>
+<a name="index-shapes_002c-of-fonts"></a>
+<a name="low-level-font-commands-fontshape"></a><p>Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+</p>
+<table>
+<tr><td><code>n</code></td><td>Upright (normal)</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>it</code></td><td>Italic</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>sl</code></td><td>Slanted (oblique)</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>sc</code></td><td>Small caps</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>ui</code></td><td>Upright italics</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>ol</code></td><td>Outline</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and
+small caps are often missing as well.
+</p>
+<a name="low-level-font-commands-fontsize"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\fontsize{<var>size</var>}{<var>skip</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfontsize"></a>
+<a name="index-font-size"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cbaselineskip"></a>
+<p>Set the font size and the line spacing. The unit of both parameters
+defaults to points (<code>pt</code>). The line spacing is the nominal
+vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline. It is stored in the
+parameter <code>\baselineskip</code>. The default <code>\baselineskip</code> for
+the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the <code>\fontsize</code>.
+Changing <code>\baselineskip</code> directly is inadvisable since its value is
+reset every time a size change happens; see <code>\baselinestretch</code>, next.
+</p>
+<a name="low-level-font-commands-baselinestretch"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\baselinestretch</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cbaselinestretch"></a>
+<p>LaTeX multiplies the line spacing by the value of the
+<code>\baselinestretch</code> parameter; the default factor is 1. A change
+takes effect when <code>\selectfont</code> (see below) is called. You can
+make a line skip change happen for the entire document, for instance
+doubling it, by doing <code>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0}</code> in
+the preamble.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-setspace"></a>
+<a name="index-setspace-package"></a>
+
+<a name="index-double-spacing"></a>
+<p>However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
+<samp>setspace</samp> package. In addition to offering a number of spacing
+options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in places
+where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and figure
+captions. See the package documentation.
+</p>
+<a name="low-level-font-commands-linespread"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\linespread{<var>factor</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005clinespread"></a>
+<p>Equivalent to
+<code>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<var>factor</var>}</code>, and
+therefore must be followed by <code>\selectfont</code> to have any effect.
+Best specified in the preamble, or use the <code>setspace</code> package, as
+just described.
+</p>
+<a name="low-level-font-commands-selectfont"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\selectfont</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cselectfont"></a>
+<p>The effects of the font commands described above do not happen until
+<code>\selectfont</code> is called, as in
+<code>\fontfamily{<var>familyname</var>}\selectfont</code>. It is often useful
+to put this in a macro:<br>
+<code>\newcommand*{\myfont}{\fontfamily{<var>familyname</var>}\selectfont}</code><br>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="low-level-font-commands-usefont"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\usefont{<var>enc</var>}{<var>family</var>}{<var>series</var>}{<var>shape</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cusefont"></a>
+<p>The same as invoking <code>\fontencoding</code>, <code>\fontfamily</code>,
+<code>\fontseries</code> and <code>\fontshape</code> with the given parameters,
+followed by <code>\selectfont</code>. For example:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usefont{ot1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+</pre></div>
+
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Layout"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="n" rel="next">Sectioning</a>, Previous: <a href="#Fonts" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Fonts</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Layout-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">5 Layout</h2>
+
+<a name="index-layout-commands"></a>
+
+<p>Commands for controlling the general page layout.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005conecolumn" accesskey="1">\onecolumn</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Use one-column layout.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn" accesskey="2">\twocolumn</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Use two-column layout.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom" accesskey="3">\flushbottom</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Make all text pages the same height.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom" accesskey="4">\raggedbottom</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Allow text pages of differing height.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Page-layout-parameters" accesskey="5">Page layout parameters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"><code>\headheight</code> <code>\footskip</code>.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Floats" accesskey="6">Floats</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Figures, tables, etc.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005conecolumn"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn" accesskey="n" rel="next">\twocolumn</a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005conecolumn-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">5.1 <code>\onecolumn</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005conecolumn"></a>
+<a name="index-one_002dcolumn-output"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\onecolumn
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Start a new page and produce single-column output. If the document is
+given the class option <code>onecolumn</code> then this is the default
+behavior (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>). This command is fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ctwocolumn"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom" accesskey="n" rel="next">\flushbottom</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005conecolumn" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\onecolumn</a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ctwocolumn-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">5.2 <code>\twocolumn</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005ctwocolumn"></a>
+<a name="index-multicolumn-text"></a>
+<a name="index-two_002dcolumn-output"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\twocolumn
+\twocolumn[<var>prelim one column text</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is given
+the class option <code>twocolumn</code> then this is the default
+(see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>). This command is fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>If the optional <var>prelim one column text</var> argument
+is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column
+typesetting starts.
+</p>
+<p>These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\columnsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccolumnsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="twocolumn-columnsep"></a><p>The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with a
+command such as <code>\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}</code> You must change
+it before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good
+place.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\columnseprule</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccolumnseprule"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="twocolumn-columnseprule"></a><p>The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway between
+the two columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that there is no rule.
+Change it with a command such as
+<code>\setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}</code>, before the two-column
+environment starts.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\columnwidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccolumnwidth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="twocolumn-columnwidth"></a><p>The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to
+<code>\textwidth</code>. In two-column mode by default LaTeX sets the
+width of each of the two columns to be half of <code>\textwidth</code> minus
+<code>\columnsep</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>In a two-column document, the starred environments <code>table*</code> and
+<code>figure*</code> are two columns wide, whereas the unstarred environments
+<code>table</code> and <code>figure</code> take up only one column (see <a href="#figure">figure</a>
+and see <a href="#table">table</a>). LaTeX places starred floats at the top of a page.
+The following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dd><a name="twocolumn-dbltopfraction"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\dbltopfraction</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdbltopfraction"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
+occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning that
+the height of a <code>table*</code> or <code>figure*</code> environment must not
+exceed <code>0.7\textheight</code> . If the height of your starred float
+environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following actions
+to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the document:
+</p>
+<ul>
+<li> Use the <code>[tp]</code> location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put
+the bulky float on a page by itself, as well as at the top of a page.
+
+</li><li> Use the <code>[t!]</code> location specifier to override the effect of
+<code>\dbltopfraction</code> for this particular float.
+
+</li><li> Increase the value of <code>\dbltopfraction</code> to a suitably large number,
+to avoid going to float pages so soon.
+</li></ul>
+
+<p>You can redefine it, as with
+<code>\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="twocolumn-dblfloatpagefraction"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\dblfloatpagefraction</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdblfloatpagefraction"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction
+that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of blank space.
+LaTeX&rsquo;s default is <code>0.5</code>. Change it with <code>\renewcommand</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="twocolumn-dblfloatsep"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\dblfloatsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdblfloatsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance
+between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page. The default is
+<code>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</code> for a document set at <code>10pt</code> or
+<code>11pt</code>, and <code>14pt plus2pt minus4pt</code> for a document set at
+<code>12pt</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="twocolumn-dbltextfloatsep"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\dbltextfloatsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdbltextfloatsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or
+bottom of a page and the main text. The default is <code>20pt plus2pt
+minus4pt</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="twocolumn-dbltopnumber"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\dbltopnumber</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdbltopnumber"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the
+maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The LaTeX
+default is <code>2</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>This example uses <code>\twocolumn</code>&rsquo;s optional argument of to create a
+title that spans the two-column article:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+\newcommand{\authormark}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
+\begin{document}
+\twocolumn[{% inside this optional argument goes one-column text
+ \centering
+ \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
+ \large Author One\authormark{1},
+ Author Two\authormark{2},
+ Author Three\authormark{1} \\[1em]
+ \normalsize
+ \begin{tabular}{p{.2\textwidth}@{\hspace{2em}}p{.2\textwidth}}
+ \authormark{1}Department one &amp;\authormark{2}Department two \\
+ School one &amp;School two
+ \end{tabular}\\[3em] % space below title part
+ }]
+
+Two column text here.
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cflushbottom"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom" accesskey="n" rel="next">\raggedbottom</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\twocolumn</a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cflushbottom-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">5.3 <code>\flushbottom</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cflushbottom"></a>
+
+<p>Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
+height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
+page. This is most often used when making two-sided documents since the
+differences in facing pages can be glaring.
+</p>
+<p>If TeX cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
+then you get a message like &lsquo;<samp>Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active</samp>&rsquo;. If you get that, one option is to
+change to <code>\raggedbottom</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>). Alternatively,
+you can adjust the <code>textheight</code> to make compatible pages, or you
+can add some vertical stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs,
+as in <code>\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}</code>. Your last option
+is to, in a final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\flushbottom</code> state is the default only if you select the
+<code>twoside</code> document class option (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005craggedbottom"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Page-layout-parameters" accesskey="n" rel="next">Page layout parameters</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\flushbottom</a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005craggedbottom-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">5.4 <code>\raggedbottom</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005craggedbottom"></a>
+<a name="index-stretch_002c-omitting-vertical"></a>
+
+<p>Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
+rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
+document the facing pages may be different heights. This command can go
+at any point in the document body. See <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a>.
+</p>
+<p>This is the default unless you select the <code>twoside</code> document class
+option (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Page-layout-parameters"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Floats" accesskey="n" rel="next">Floats</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\raggedbottom</a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Page-layout-parameters-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">5.5 Page layout parameters</h3>
+
+<a name="index-page-layout-parameters"></a>
+<a name="index-parameters_002c-page-layout"></a>
+<a name="index-layout_002c-page-parameters-for"></a>
+<a name="index-header_002c-parameters-for"></a>
+<a name="index-footer_002c-parameters-for"></a>
+<a name="index-running-header-and-footer"></a>
+
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\columnsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccolumnsep-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\columnseprule</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccolumnseprule-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\columnwidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccolumnwidth-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ccolumnsep-2"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccolumnseprule-2"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccolumnwidth-2"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-columnsep"></a><a name="page-layout-parameters-columnseprule"></a><a name="page-layout-parameters-columnwidth"></a><p>The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between the
+columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class option
+<code>twocolumn</code> is in effect (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
+See <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\headheight</code>
+<a name="index-_005cheadheight"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cheadheight-1"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-headheight"></a><p>Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in the
+<code>article</code>, <code>report</code>, and <code>book</code> classes is &lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo;,
+at all type sizes.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\headsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cheadsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cheadsep-1"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-headsep"></a><p>Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of
+the main text. The default in the <code>article</code> and <code>report</code>
+classes is &lsquo;<samp>25pt</samp>&rsquo;. In the <code>book</code> class the default is: if the
+document is set at 10pt then it is &lsquo;<samp>0.25in</samp>&rsquo;, and at 11pt and 12pt
+it is &lsquo;<samp>0.275in</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\footskip</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfootskip"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfootskip-1"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-footskip"></a><p>Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of
+the page footer. The default in the <code>article</code> and <code>report</code>
+classes is &lsquo;<samp>30pt</samp>&rsquo;. In the <code>book</code> class the default is: when
+the type size is 10pt the default is &lsquo;<samp>0.35in</samp>&rsquo;, while at 11pt it is
+&lsquo;<samp>0.38in</samp>&rsquo;, and at 12pt it is &lsquo;<samp>30pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\linewidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005clinewidth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005clinewidth-1"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-linewidth"></a><p>Width of the current line, decreased for each nested <code>list</code>
+(see <a href="#list">list</a>). That is, the nominal value for <code>\linewidth</code> is to
+equal <code>\textwidth</code> but for each nested list the <code>\linewidth</code>
+is decreased by the sum of that list&rsquo;s <code>\leftmargin</code> and
+<code>\rightmargin</code> (see <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\marginparpush</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmarginparpush"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\marginsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmarginsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\marginparwidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmarginparwidth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmarginparpush-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmarginsep-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmarginparwidth-1"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-marginparpush"></a><a name="page-layout-parameters-marginsep"></a><a name="page-layout-parameters-marginparwidth"></a><p>The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the horizontal
+space between the text body and the marginal notes, and the horizontal
+width of the notes.
+</p>
+<p>Normally marginal notes appear on the outside of the page, but the
+declaration <code>\reversemarginpar</code> changes that (and
+<code>\normalmarginpar</code> changes it back).
+</p>
+<p>The defaults for <code>\marginparpush</code> in both <code>book</code> and
+<code>article</code> classes are: &lsquo;<samp>7pt</samp>&rsquo; if the document is set at 12pt,
+and &lsquo;<samp>5pt</samp>&rsquo; if the document is set at 11pt or 10pt.
+</p>
+<p>For <code>\marginsep</code>, in <code>article</code> class the default is
+&lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo; except if the document is set at 10pt and in two-column mode
+where the default is &lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>For <code>\marginsep</code> in <code>book</code> class the default is &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo; in
+two-column mode and &lsquo;<samp>7pt</samp>&rsquo; in one-column mode.
+</p>
+<p>For <code>\marginparwidth</code> in both <code>book</code> and <code>article</code>
+classes, in two-column mode the default is 60% of <code>\paperwidth
+- \textwidth</code>, while in one-column mode it is 50% of that
+distance.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\oddsidemargin</code>
+<a name="index-_005coddsidemargin-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\evensidemargin</code>
+<a name="index-_005cevensidemargin-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005coddsidemargin-2"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cevensidemargin-2"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-oddsidemargin"></a><a name="page-layout-parameters-evensidemargin"></a><p>The <code>\oddsidemargin</code> is the extra distance between the left side of
+the page and the text&rsquo;s left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the
+document class option <code>twoside</code> is chosen and on all pages when
+<code>oneside</code> is in effect. When <code>twoside</code> is in effect, on
+even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is
+<code>evensidemargin</code>.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX&rsquo;s default is that <code>\oddsidemargin</code> is 40% of the
+difference between <code>\paperwidth</code> and <code>\textwidth</code>, and
+<code>\evensidemargin</code> is the remainder.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\paperheight</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpaperheight"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cpaperheight-1"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-paperheight"></a><p>The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print area.
+Normally set with a document class option, as in
+<code>\documentclass[a4paper]{article}</code> (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\paperwidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpaperwidth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cpaperwidth-1"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-paperwidth"></a><p>The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print area.
+Normally set with a document class option, as in
+<code>\documentclass[a4paper]{article}</code> (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textheight</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextheight"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextheight-1"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-textheight"></a><p>The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is set at
+a nominal type size of 10pt then for an <code>article</code> or <code>report</code>
+the default is &lsquo;<samp>43\baselineskip</samp>&rsquo;, while for a <code>book</code> it is
+&lsquo;<samp>41\baselineskip</samp>&rsquo;. At a type size of 11pt the default is
+&lsquo;<samp>38\baselineskip</samp>&rsquo; for all document classes. At 12pt it is
+&lsquo;<samp>36\baselineskip</samp>&rsquo; for all classes.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textwidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextwidth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextwidth-1"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-textwidth"></a><p>The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an
+<code>article</code> or <code>report</code> document, the default is &lsquo;<samp>345pt</samp>&rsquo;
+when the chosen type size is 10pt, the default is &lsquo;<samp>360pt</samp>&rsquo; at 11pt,
+and it is &lsquo;<samp>390pt</samp>&rsquo; at 12pt. For a <code>book</code> document, the default
+is &lsquo;<samp>4.5in</samp>&rsquo; at a type size of 10pt, and &lsquo;<samp>5in</samp>&rsquo; at 11pt or 12pt.
+</p>
+<p>In multi-column output, <code>\textwidth</code> remains the width of the
+entire page body, while <code>\columnwidth</code> is the width of one column
+(see <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>).
+</p>
+<p>In lists (see <a href="#list">list</a>), <code>\textwidth</code> remains the width of the
+entire page body (and <code>\columnwidth</code> the width of the entire
+column), while <code>\linewidth</code> may decrease for nested lists.
+</p>
+<p>Inside a minipage (see <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>) or <code>\parbox</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cparbox">\parbox</a>), all the width-related parameters are set to the
+specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the
+<code>minipage</code> or <code>\parbox</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005chsize"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-hsize"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\hsize</code>
+<a name="index-_005chsize-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>This entry is included for completeness: <code>\hsize</code> is the TeX
+primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should not
+be used in normal LaTeX documents.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\topmargin</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctopmargin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-topmargin"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-topmargin"></a><p>Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the
+paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is computed
+based on many other parameters: <code>\paperheight - 2in -
+\headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip</code>,
+and then divided by two.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\topskip</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctopskip"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctopskip-1"></a>
+<a name="page-layout-parameters-topskip"></a><p>Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of
+the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default is the
+same as the font size, e.g., &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo; at a type size of 10pt.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Floats"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Page-layout-parameters" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Page layout parameters</a>, Up: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="u" rel="up">Layout</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Floats-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">5.6 Floats</h3>
+
+<p>Some typographic elements, such as figures and tables, cannot be broken
+across pages. They must be typeset outside of the normal flow of text,
+for instance floating to the top of a later page.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX can have a number of different classes of floating material.
+The default is the two classes, <code>figure</code> (see <a href="#figure">figure</a>) and
+<code>table</code> (see <a href="#table">table</a>), but you can create a new class with the
+package <samp>float</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>Within any one float class LaTeX always respects the order, so that
+the first figure in a document source must be typeset before the second
+figure. However, LaTeX may mix the classes, so it can happen that
+while the first table appears in the source before the first figure, it
+appears in the output after it.
+</p>
+<p>The placement of floats is subject to parameters, given below, that
+limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and
+the bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued that the limits prevent
+them all from fitting on a page then LaTeX places what it can and
+defers the rest to the next page. In this way, floats may end up
+being typeset far from their place in the source. In particular, a
+float that is big may migrate to the end of the document. In which
+event, because all floats in a class must appear in sequential order,
+every following float in that class also appears at the end.
+</p>
+<a name="index-placement-of-floats"></a>
+<a name="index-specifier_002c-float-placement"></a>
+<p>In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak
+where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its
+<var>placement</var> argument. The possible values are a sequence of the
+letters below. The default for both <code>figure</code> and <code>table</code>, in
+both <code>article</code> and <code>book</code> classes, is <code>tbp</code>.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dd><p>(Top)&mdash;at the top of a text page.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dd><p>(Bottom)&mdash;at the bottom of a text page. (However, <code>b</code> is not
+allowed for full-width floats (<code>figure*</code>) with double-column
+output. To ameliorate this, use the <samp>stfloats</samp> or
+<samp>dblfloatfix</samp> package, but see the discussion at caveats in the
+FAQ: <a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat</a>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>h</code></dt>
+<dd><p>(Here)&mdash;at the position in the text where the <code>figure</code> environment
+appears. However, <code>h</code> is not allowed by itself; <code>t</code> is
+automatically added.
+</p>
+<a name="index-here_002c-putting-floats"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-float"></a>
+<a name="index-float-package"></a>
+
+<p>To absolutely force a float to appear &ldquo;here&rdquo;, you can
+<code>\usepackage{float}</code> and use the <code>H</code> specifier which it
+defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
+<a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere</a>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>p</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-float-page"></a>
+<p>(Page of floats)&mdash;on a separate <em>float page</em>, which is a page
+containing no text, only floats.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>!</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX
+ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can appear
+and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the page.
+The <code>!</code> specifier does <em>not</em> mean &ldquo;put the float here&rdquo;;
+see above.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Note: the order in which letters appear in the <var>placement</var> argument
+does not change the order in which LaTeX tries to place the float;
+for instance, <code>btp</code> has the same effect as <code>tbp</code>. All that
+<var>placement</var> does is that if a letter is not present then the
+algorithm does not try that location. Thus, LaTeX&rsquo;s default of
+<code>tbp</code> is to try every location except placing the float where it
+occurs in the source.
+</p>
+<p>To prevent LaTeX from moving floats to the end of the document or a
+chapter you can use a <code>\clearpage</code> command to start a new page and
+insert all pending floats. If a pagebreak is undesirable then you can
+use the <samp>afterpage</samp> package and issue
+<code>\afterpage{\clearpage}</code>. This will wait until the current page
+is finished and then flush all outstanding floats.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-flafter"></a>
+<a name="index-flafter-package"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
+(although on the same output page) if there is a <code>t</code> specifier in
+the <var>placement</var> parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting
+the <code>t</code> is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed
+at the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using
+the <samp>flafter</samp> package or using the command
+<a name="index-_005csuppressfloats"></a>
+<code>\suppressfloats[t]</code>, which causes floats for the top position on
+this page to moved to the next page.
+</p>
+<p>Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
+non-float text (change them with
+<code>\renewcommand{<var>parameter</var>}{<var>decimal between 0 and 1</var>}</code>):
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\bottomfraction</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbottomfraction"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cbottomfraction-1"></a>
+<a name="floats-bottomfraction"></a><p>The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at
+the bottom; default &lsquo;<samp>.3</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\floatpagefraction</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfloatpagefraction"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfloatpagefraction-1"></a>
+<a name="floats-floatpagefraction"></a><p>The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats;
+default &lsquo;<samp>.5</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textfraction</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextfraction"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextfraction-1"></a>
+<a name="floats-textfraction"></a><p>Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
+much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
+different page. The default is &lsquo;<samp>.2</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\topfraction</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctopfraction"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctopfraction-1"></a>
+<a name="floats-topfraction"></a><p>Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
+floats; default &lsquo;<samp>.7</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with a
+command of the form <code>\setlength{<var>parameter</var>}{<var>length
+expression</var>}</code>):
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\floatsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfloatsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfloatsep-1"></a>
+<a name="floats-floatsep"></a><p>Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default
+&lsquo;<samp>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\intextsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cintextsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cintextsep-1"></a>
+<a name="floats-intextsep"></a><p>Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default
+&lsquo;<samp>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</samp>&rsquo; for 10 point and 11 point documents,
+and &lsquo;<samp>14pt plus4pt minus4pt</samp>&rsquo; for 12 point documents.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textfloatsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextfloatsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextfloatsep-1"></a>
+<a name="floats-textfloatsep"></a><p>Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
+default &lsquo;<samp>20pt plus2pt minus4pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with a
+command of the form <code>\setcounter{<var>ctrname</var>}{<var>natural
+number</var>}</code>):
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>bottomnumber</code>
+<a name="index-bottomnumber"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-bottomnumber-1"></a>
+<a name="floats-bottomnumber"></a><p>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page;
+default 1.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>dbltopnumber</code>
+<a name="index-dbltopnumber"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-dbltopnumber-1"></a>
+<a name="floats-dbltopnumber"></a><p>Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
+two-column page; default 2.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>topnumber</code>
+<a name="index-topnumber"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-topnumber-1"></a>
+<a name="floats-topnumber"></a><p>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
+default 2.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>totalnumber</code>
+<a name="index-totalnumber"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-totalnumber-1"></a>
+<a name="floats-totalnumber"></a><p>Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>The principal TeX&nbsp;FAQ entry relating to floats
+<a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats</a> contains
+suggestions for relaxing LaTeX&rsquo;s default parameters to reduce the
+problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the
+float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach&rsquo;s article &ldquo;How to
+influence the position of float environments like figure and table in
+LaTeX?&rdquo;
+(<a href="http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf">http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Sectioning"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="n" rel="next">Cross references</a>, Previous: <a href="#Layout" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Layout</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Sectioning-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">6 Sectioning</h2>
+
+<a name="index-sectioning-commands"></a>
+<a name="index-part"></a>
+<a name="index-chapter"></a>
+<a name="index-section"></a>
+<a name="index-subsection"></a>
+<a name="index-paragraph"></a>
+<a name="index-subparagraph"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cpart"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cchapter"></a>
+<a name="index-_005csection"></a>
+<a name="index-_005csubsection"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cparagraph"></a>
+<a name="index-_005csubparagraph"></a>
+
+<p>Structure your text into divisions: parts, chapters, sections, etc. All
+sectioning commands have the same form, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"><var>sectioning-command</var>{<var>title</var>}
+<var>sectioning-command</var>*{<var>title</var>}
+<var>sectioning-command</var>[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>For instance, declare the start of a subsection as with
+<code>\subsection{Motivation}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The table has each <var>sectioning-command</var> in LaTeX. All are
+available in all of LaTeX&rsquo;s standard document classes <code>book</code>,
+<code>report</code>, and&nbsp;<code>article</code>, except that <code>\chapter</code> is
+not available in <code>article</code>.
+</p>
+<table>
+<thead><tr><th width="25%">Sectioning unit</th><th width="25%">Command</th><th width="40%">Level</th></tr></thead>
+<tr><td width="25%">Part</td><td width="25%"><code>\part</code></td><td width="40%">-1 (<code>book</code>, <code>report</code>), 0 (<code>article</code>)</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="25%">Chapter</td><td width="25%"><code>\chapter</code></td><td width="40%">0</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="25%">Section</td><td width="25%"><code>\section</code></td><td width="40%">1</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="25%">Subsection</td><td width="25%"><code>\subsection</code></td><td width="40%">2</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="25%">Subsubsection</td><td width="25%"><code>\subsubsection</code></td><td width="40%">3</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="25%">Paragraph</td><td width="25%"><code>\paragraph</code></td><td width="40%">4</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="25%">Subparagraph</td><td width="25%"><code>\subparagraph</code></td><td width="40%">5</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<a name="index-_002a_002dform-of-sectioning-commands"></a>
+<p>All these commands have a <code>*</code>-form that prints <var>title</var> as usual
+but is not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents.
+An example of using this is for an appendix in an <code>article</code> . The
+input <code>\appendix\section{Appendix}</code> gives the output &lsquo;<samp>A
+Appendix</samp>&rsquo; (see <a href="#g_t_005cappendix">\appendix</a>). You can lose the numbering&nbsp;&lsquo;<samp>A</samp>&rsquo;
+by instead entering <code>\section*{Appendix}</code> (articles often omit a
+table of contents and have simple page headers so the other differences
+from the <code>\section</code> command may not matter).
+</p>
+<p>The section title <var>title</var> provides the heading in the main text, but
+it may also appear in the table of contents and in the running head or
+foot (see <a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a>). You may not want the same text in these
+places as in the main text. All of these commands have an optional
+argument <var>toc-title</var> for these other places.
+</p>
+<p>The level number in the table above determines which sectional units are
+numbered, and which appear in the table of contents. If the sectioning
+command&rsquo;s <var>level</var> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<code>secnumdepth</code> then the titles for this sectioning command will be
+numbered (see <a href="#Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</a>). And, if <var>level</var> is less
+than or equal to the value of the counter <code>tocdepth</code> then the table
+of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit
+(see <a href="#Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</a>).
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX expects that before you have a <code>\subsection</code> you will have
+a <code>\section</code> and, in a book, that before a <code>\section</code> you will
+have a <code>\chapter</code>. Otherwise you can get a something like a
+subsection numbered &lsquo;<samp>3.0.1</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>secnumdepth</code>
+<a name="index-secnumdepth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-secnumdepth-counter"></a>
+<a name="index-section-numbers_002c-printing"></a>
+<a name="sectioning-secnumdepth"></a><a name="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"></a><p>Controls which sectioning commands are
+numbered. Suppress numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than
+<var>level</var> <code>\setcounter{secnumdepth}{<var>level</var>}</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>). See the above table for the level numbers. For
+instance, if the <code>secnumdepth</code> is 1 in an <code>article</code> then a
+<code>\section{Introduction}</code> command will produce output like &lsquo;<samp>1
+Introduction</samp>&rsquo; while <code>\subsection{Discussion}</code> will produce output
+like &lsquo;<samp>Discussion</samp>&rsquo;, without the number. LaTeX&rsquo;s default
+<code>secnumdepth</code> is&nbsp;3 in <samp>article</samp> class and &nbsp;2 in the
+<samp>book</samp> and <samp>report</samp> classes.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>tocdepth</code>
+<a name="index-tocdepth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-tocdepth-counter"></a>
+<a name="index-table-of-contents_002c-sectioning-numbers-printed"></a>
+<a name="sectioning-tocdepth"></a><a name="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"></a><p>Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of contents.
+The setting <code>\setcounter{tocdepth}{<var>level</var>}</code> makes the
+sectioning units at <var>level</var> be the smallest ones listed
+(see <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>). See the above table for the level numbers. For
+instance, if <code>tocdepth</code> is&nbsp;1 then the table of contents will
+list sections but not subsections. LaTeX&rsquo;s default
+<code>secnumdepth</code> is&nbsp;3 in <samp>article</samp> class and &nbsp;2 in the
+<samp>book</samp> and <samp>report</samp> classes.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cpart" accesskey="1">\part</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a part.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cchapter" accesskey="2">\chapter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a chapter.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csection" accesskey="3">\section</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a section.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csubsection" accesskey="4">\subsection</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a subsection.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph" accesskey="5">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Lower divisions.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cappendix" accesskey="6">\appendix</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Start appendices.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter" accesskey="7">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">The three parts of a book.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection" accesskey="8">\@startsection</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Layout of sectional units.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cpart"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cchapter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\chapter</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cpart-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.1 <code>\part</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cpart-1"></a>
+<a name="index-part-1"></a>
+<a name="index-sectioning_002c-part"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\part{<var>title</var>}
+\part*{<var>title</var>}
+\part[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Start a document part. The standard LaTeX classes <code>book</code>,
+<code>report</code>, and <code>article</code>, all have this command.
+</p>
+<p>This produces a document part, in a book.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\part{VOLUME I \\
+ PERSONAL MEMOIRS OF U.\ S.\ GRANT}
+\chapter{ANCESTRY--BIRTH--BOYHOOD.}
+My family is American, and has been for generations,
+in all its branches, direct and collateral.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In each standard class the <code>\part</code> command outputs a part number
+such as &lsquo;<samp>Part I</samp>&rsquo;, alone on its line, in boldface, and in large
+type. Then LaTeX outputs <var>title</var>, also alone on its line, in
+bold and in even larger type. In class <code>book</code>, the LaTeX
+default puts each part alone on its own page. If the book is two-sided
+then LaTeX will skip a page if needed to have the new part on an
+odd-numbered page. In <code>report</code> it is again alone on a page, but
+LaTeX won&rsquo;t force it onto an odd-numbered page. In an <code>article</code>
+LaTeX does not put it on a fresh page, but instead outputs the part
+number and part title onto the main document page.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>*</code>&nbsp;form shows <var>title</var>
+but it does not show the part number, does not increment the
+<code>part</code> counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
+</p>
+<p>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the part title in
+the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>) and in running
+headers (see <a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a>). If it is not present then <var>title</var>
+will be there. This example puts a line break in <var>title</var> but leaves
+out the break in the table of contents.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\part[Up from the bottom; my life]{Up from the bottom\\ my life}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a part is&nbsp;-1
+(see <a href="#Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</a> and see <a href="#Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-indentfirst"></a>
+<a name="index-indentfirst-package"></a>
+
+<p>In the class <code>article</code>, if a paragraph immediately follows the part
+title then it is not indented. To get an indent you can use the package
+<samp>indentfirst</samp>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-titlesec"></a>
+<a name="index-titlesec-package"></a>
+
+<p>One package to change the behavior of <code>\part</code> is <samp>titlesec</samp>.
+See its documentation on CTAN.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cchapter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csection" accesskey="n" rel="next">\section</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpart" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\part</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cchapter-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.2 <code>\chapter</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cchapter-1"></a>
+<a name="index-chapter-1"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\chapter{<var>title</var>}
+\chapter*{<var>title</var>}
+\chapter[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Start a chapter. The standard LaTeX classes <code>book</code> and
+<code>report</code> have this command but <code>article</code> does not.
+</p>
+<p>This produces a chapter.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\chapter{Loomings}
+Call me Ishmael.
+Some years ago---never mind how long precisely---having little or no
+money in my purse, and nothing particular to interest me on shore, I
+thought I would sail about a little and see the watery part of
+the world.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The LaTeX default starts each chapter on a fresh page, an
+odd-numbered page if the document is two-sided. It produces a chapter
+number such as &lsquo;<samp>Chapter 1</samp>&rsquo; in large boldface type (the size is
+<code>\huge</code>). It then puts <var>title</var> on a fresh line, in boldface
+type that is still larger (size <code>\Huge</code>). It also increments the
+<code>chapter</code> counter, adds an entry to the table of contents
+(see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>), and sets the running header
+information (see <a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The <code>*</code>&nbsp;form shows <var>title</var> on a fresh line, in boldface.
+But it does not show the chapter number, does not increment the
+<code>chapter</code> counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does
+not affect the running header. (If you use the page style
+<code>headings</code> in a two-sided document then the header will be from the
+prior chapter.) This example illustrates.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\chapter*{Preamble}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the chapter title
+in the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>) and in
+running headers (see <a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a>). If it is not present then
+<var>title</var> will be there. This shows the full name in the chapter
+title,
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\chapter[Weyl]{Hermann Klaus Hugo (Peter) Weyl (1885--1955)}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>but only &lsquo;<samp>Weyl</samp>&rsquo; on the contents page. This puts a line break in
+the title but that doesn&rsquo;t work well with running headers so it omits
+the break in the contents
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\chapter[Given it all\\ my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is&nbsp;0
+(see <a href="#Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</a> and see <a href="#Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-indentfirst-1"></a>
+<a name="index-indentfirst-package-1"></a>
+
+<p>The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. To get an indent use the package
+<samp>indentfirst</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>You can change what is shown for the chapter number. To change it to
+something like &lsquo;<samp>Lecture 1</samp>&rsquo;, put in the preamble either
+<code>\renewcommand{\chaptername}{Lecture}</code> or this
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</a>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\@chapapp}{Lecture}
+\makeatother
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-babel"></a>
+<a name="index-babel-package"></a>
+
+<p>To make this change because of the primary language for
+the document, see the package <samp>babel</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>In a two-sided document LaTeX puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if
+necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any
+running headers. To make that page completely blank,
+see&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</a>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-titlesec-1"></a>
+<a name="index-titlesec-package-1"></a>
+
+<p>To change the behavior of the <code>\chapter</code> command, you can copy its
+definition from the LaTeX format file and make adjustments. But
+there are also many packages on CTAN that address this. One is
+<samp>titlesec</samp>. See its documentation, but the example below gives a
+sense of what it can do.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
+\titleformat{\chapter}
+ {\Huge\bfseries} % format of title
+ {} % label, such as 1.2 for a subsection
+ {0pt} % length of separation between label and title
+ {} % before-code hook
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This omits the chapter number &lsquo;<samp>Chapter 1</samp>&rsquo; from the page but unlike
+<code>\chapter*</code> it keeps the chapter in the table of contents and the
+running headers.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csection"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csubsection" accesskey="n" rel="next">\subsection</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cchapter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\chapter</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csection-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.3 <code>\section</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005csection-1"></a>
+<a name="index-section-1"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\section{<var>title</var>}
+\section*{<var>title</var>}
+\section[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Start a section. The standard LaTeX classes <code>article</code>,
+<code>book</code>, and <code>report</code> all have this command.
+</p>
+<p>This produces a section.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">In this Part we tend to be more interested in the function,
+in the input-output behavior,
+than in the details of implementing that behavior.
+
+\section{Turing machines}
+Despite this desire to downplay implementation,
+we follow the approach of A~Turing that the
+first step toward defining the set of computable functions
+is to reflect on the details of what mechanisms can do.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>For the standard LaTeX classes <code>book</code> and <code>report</code> the
+default output is like &lsquo;<samp>1.2 <var>title</var></samp>&rsquo; (for chapter&nbsp;1,
+section&nbsp;2), alone on its line and flush left, in boldface and a
+larger type (the type size is <code>\Large</code>). The same holds in
+<code>article</code> except that there are no chapters in that class so it
+looks like &lsquo;<samp>2 <var>title</var></samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>*</code>&nbsp;form shows <var>title</var>.
+But it does not show the section number, does not increment the
+<code>section</code> counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does
+not affect the running header. (If you use the page style
+<code>headings</code> in a two-sided document then the header will be from the
+prior section.)
+</p>
+<p>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the section title
+in the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>) and in
+running headers (see <a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a>). If it is not present then
+<var>title</var> will be there. This shows the full name in the title of the
+section,
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\section[Elizabeth~II]{Elizabeth the Second,
+ by the Grace of God of the United Kingdom,
+ Canada and Her other Realms and Territories Queen,
+ Head of the Commonwealth, Defender of the Faith.}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>but only &lsquo;<samp>Elizabeth II</samp>&rsquo; on the contents page and in the headers.
+This has a line break in <var>title</var> but that does not work with headers
+so it is omitted from the contents and headers.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\section[Truth is, I cheated; my life story]{Truth is,
+ I cheated\\my life story}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a section is&nbsp;1
+(see <a href="#Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</a> and see <a href="#Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-indentfirst-2"></a>
+<a name="index-indentfirst-package-2"></a>
+
+<p>The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <samp>indentfirst</samp>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-titlesec-2"></a>
+<a name="index-titlesec-package-2"></a>
+
+<p>In general, to change the behavior of the <code>\section</code> command, there
+are a number of options. One is the <code>\@startsection</code> command
+(see <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</a>). There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including <samp>titlesec</samp>. See the documentation but the
+example below gives a sense of what they can do.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
+\titleformat{\section}
+ {\normalfont\Large\bfseries} % format of title
+ {\makebox[1pc][r]{\thesection\hspace{1pc}}} % label
+ {0pt} % length of separation between label and title
+ {} % before-code hook
+\titlespacing*{\section}
+ {-1pc}{18pt}{10pt}[10pc]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>That puts the section number in the margin.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csubsection"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph" accesskey="n" rel="next">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csection" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\section</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csubsection-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.4 <code>\subsection</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005csubsection-1"></a>
+<a name="index-subsection-1"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\subsection{<var>title</var>}
+\subsection*{<var>title</var>}
+\subsection[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Start a subsection. The standard LaTeX classes <code>article</code>,
+<code>book</code>, and <code>report</code> all have this command.
+</p>
+<p>This produces a subsection.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">We will show that there are more functions than Turing machines and that
+therefore some functions have no associated machine.
+
+\subsection{Cardinality} We will begin with two paradoxes that
+dramatize the challenge to our intuition posed by comparing the sizes of
+infinite sets.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>For the standard LaTeX classes <code>book</code> and <code>report</code> the
+default output is like &lsquo;<samp>1.2.3 <var>title</var></samp>&rsquo; (for chapter&nbsp;1,
+section&nbsp;2, subsection&nbsp;3), alone on its line and flush left, in
+boldface and a larger type (the type size is <code>\large</code>). The same
+holds in <code>article</code> except that there are no chapters in that class
+so it looks like &lsquo;<samp>2.3 <var>title</var></samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>*</code>&nbsp;form shows <var>title</var>.
+But it does not show the section number, does not increment the
+<code>section</code> counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
+</p>
+<p>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the section title
+in the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>). If it is
+not present then <var>title</var> will be there. This shows the full name in
+the title of the section,
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
+ Chemical Elements} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>but only &lsquo;<samp>&#x03B1;,&#x03B2;,&#x03B3;
+paper</samp>&rsquo; on the contents page.
+</p>
+<p>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is&nbsp;2
+(see <a href="#Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</a> and see <a href="#Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-indentfirst-3"></a>
+<a name="index-indentfirst-package-3"></a>
+
+<p>The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <samp>indentfirst</samp>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-titlesec-3"></a>
+<a name="index-titlesec-package-3"></a>
+
+<p>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the
+<code>\subsection</code> command. One is the <code>\@startsection</code> command
+(see <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</a>). There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including <samp>titlesec</samp>. See the documentation but the
+example below gives a sense of what they can do.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
+\titleformat{\subsection}[runin]
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries} % format of the title
+ {\thesubsection} % label
+ {0.6em} % space between label and title
+ {} % before-code hook
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>That puts the subsection number and <var>title</var> in the first line of
+text.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cappendix" accesskey="n" rel="next">\appendix</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csubsection" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\subsection</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+
+<a name="g_t_005csubsubsection_002c-_005cparagraph_002c-_005csubparagraph"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.5 <code>\subsubsection</code>, <code>\paragraph</code>, <code>\subparagraph</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005csubsubsection"></a>
+<a name="index-subsubsection"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cparagraph-1"></a>
+<a name="index-paragraph-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005csubparagraph-1"></a>
+<a name="index-subparagraph-1"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\subsubsection{<var>title</var>}
+\subsubsection*{<var>title</var>}
+\subsubsection[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\paragraph{<var>title</var>}
+\paragraph*{<var>title</var>}
+\paragraph[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\subparagraph{<var>title</var>}
+\subparagraph*{<var>title</var>}
+\subparagraph[<var>toc-title</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Start a subsubsection, paragraph, or subparagraph. The standard
+LaTeX classes <code>article</code>, <code>book</code>, and <code>report</code> all have
+these commands, although they are not commonly used.
+</p>
+<p>This produces a subsubsection.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\subsubsection{Piston ring compressors: structural performance}
+Provide exterior/interior wall cladding assemblies
+capable of withstanding the effects of load and stresses from
+consumer-grade gasoline engine piston rings.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The default output of each of the three does not change over the
+standard LaTeX classes <code>article</code>, <code>book</code>, and
+<code>report</code>. For <code>\subsubsection</code> the <var>title</var> is alone on
+its line, in boldface and normal size type. For <code>\paragraph</code> the
+<var>title</var> is inline with the text, not indented, in boldface and
+normal size type. For <code>\subparagraph</code> the <var>title</var> is inline
+with the text, with a paragraph indent, in boldface and normal size type
+(Because an <code>article</code> has no chapters its subsubsections are
+numbered and so it looks like &lsquo;<samp>1.2.3 <var>title</var></samp>&rsquo;, for
+section&nbsp;1, subsection&nbsp;2, and subsubsection&nbsp;3. The other
+two divisions are not numbered.)
+</p>
+<p>The <code>*</code>&nbsp;form shows <var>title</var>. But it does not increment the
+associated counter and produces no table of contents entry (and does not
+show the number for <code>\subsubsection</code>).
+</p>
+<p>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the division title
+in the table of contents (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>). If it is
+not present then <var>title</var> will be there.
+</p>
+<p>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a subsubsection is&nbsp;3, of
+a paragraph is&nbsp;4, and of a subparagraph is&nbsp;5
+(see <a href="#Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</a> and see <a href="#Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-indentfirst-4"></a>
+<a name="index-indentfirst-package-4"></a>
+
+<p>The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <samp>indentfirst</samp>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-titlesec-4"></a>
+<a name="index-titlesec-package-4"></a>
+
+<p>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these commands.
+One is the <code>\@startsection</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</a>).
+There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including
+<samp>titlesec</samp>. See the documentation on CTAN.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cappendix"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+
+<a name="g_t_005cappendix-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.6 <code>\appendix</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cappendix"></a>
+<a name="index-appendix"></a>
+<a name="index-appendices"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\appendix
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This does not directly produce any output. But in a book or report it
+declares that subsequent <code>\chapter</code> commands start an appendix. In
+an article it does the same, for <code>\section</code> commands. It also
+resets the <code>chapter</code> and <code>section</code> counters to&nbsp;0 in a
+book or report, and in an article resets the <code>section</code> and
+<code>subsection</code> counters.
+</p>
+<p>In this book
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\chapter{One} ...
+\chapter{Two} ...
+ ...
+\appendix
+\chapter{Three} ...
+\chapter{Four} ...
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>the first two will generate output numbered &lsquo;<samp>Chapter 1</samp>&rsquo; and
+&lsquo;<samp>Chapter 2</samp>&rsquo;. After the <code>\appendix</code> the numbering will be
+&lsquo;<samp>Appendix A</samp>&rsquo; and &lsquo;<samp>Appendix B</samp>&rsquo;. See <a href="#Larger-book-template">Larger book template</a>
+for another example.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-appendix"></a>
+<a name="index-appendix-package"></a>
+<p>The <samp>appendix</samp> package adds the command
+<code>\appendixpage</code> to put a separate &lsquo;<samp>Appendices</samp>&rsquo; in the document
+body before the first appendix, and the command <code>\addappheadtotoc</code>
+to do the same in the table of contents. You can reset the name
+&lsquo;<samp>Appendix</samp>&rsquo; with a command like
+<code>\renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}</code>, as well as a
+number of other features. See the documentation on CTAN.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection" accesskey="n" rel="next">\@startsection</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cappendix" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\appendix</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+
+<a name="g_t_005cfrontmatter_002c-_005cmainmatter_002c-_005cbackmatter"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.7 <code>\frontmatter</code>, <code>\mainmatter</code>, <code>\backmatter</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cfrontmatter"></a>
+<a name="index-book_002c-front-matter"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmainmatter"></a>
+<a name="index-book_002c-main-matter"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cbackmatter"></a>
+<a name="index-book_002c-back-matter"></a>
+<a name="index-book_002c-end-matter"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\frontmatter
+\mainmatter
+\backmatter
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Format a <code>book</code> class document differently according to which part
+of the document is being produced. All three commands are optional.
+</p>
+<p>Traditionally, a book&rsquo;s front matter contains such things as the title
+page, an abstract, a table of contents, a preface, a list of notations,
+a list of figures, and a list of tables. (Some of these front matter
+pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not numbered.) The
+back matter may contain such things as a glossary, notes, a
+bibliography, and an index.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\frontmatter</code> declaration makes the pages numbered in
+lowercase roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each
+chapter&rsquo;s title appears in the table of contents; if you use other
+sectioning commands here, use the <code>*</code>-version (see <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>).
+The <code>\mainmatter</code> changes the behavior back to the expected
+version, and resets the page number. The <code>\backmatter</code> leaves the
+page numbering alone but switches the chapters back to being not
+numbered. See <a href="#Larger-book-template">Larger book template</a> for an example using the three.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</a>, Up: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="u" rel="up">Sectioning</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.8 <code>\@startsection</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_0040startsection"></a>
+<a name="index-section_002c-redefining"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\@startsection{<var>name</var>}{<var>level</var>}{<var>indent</var>}{<var>beforeskip</var>}{<var>afterskip</var>}{<var>style</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Used to help redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning
+divisions such as <code>\section</code> or <code>\subsection</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Note that the <samp>titlesec</samp> package makes manipulation of sectioning
+easier. Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
+satisfied with <code>\@startsection</code>, some cannot. For instance, in
+the standard LaTeX <code>book</code> and <code>report</code> classes the commands
+<code>\chapter</code> and <code>\report</code> are not constructed in this way. To
+make such a command you may want to use the <code>\secdef</code> command.
+</p>
+<p>Technically, <code>\@startsection</code> has the form
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\@startsection{<var>name</var>}
+ {<var>level</var>}
+ {<var>indent</var>}
+ {<var>beforeskip</var>}
+ {<var>afterskip</var>}
+ {<var>style</var>}*[<var>toctitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>so that issuing
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection{<var>name</var>}
+ {<var>level</var>}
+ {<var>indent</var>}
+ {<var>beforeskip</var>}
+ {<var>afterskip</var>}
+ {<var>style</var>}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>redefines <code>\section</code> to have the form
+<code>\section*[<var>toctitle</var>]{<var>title</var>}</code> (here too, the
+star&nbsp;<code>*</code> is optional). See <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>. This implies that
+when you write a command like <code>\renewcommand{section}{...}</code>,
+the <code>\@startsection{...}</code> must come last in the definition. See
+the examples below.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>name</var></dt>
+<dd><a name="startsection-name"></a><a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fname"></a><p>Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header. This counter
+must be defined separately. Most commonly this is either
+<code>section</code>, <code>subsection</code>, or <code>paragraph</code>. Although in
+those cases the counter name is the same as the sectioning command
+itself, you don&rsquo;t have to use the same name.
+</p>
+<p>Then <code>\the</code><var>name</var> displays the title number and
+<code>\</code><var>name</var><code>mark</code> is for the page headers. See the third
+example below.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>level</var></dt>
+<dd><a name="startsection-level"></a><a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"></a><p>An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command.
+See <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a> for the list of standard level numbers.
+</p>
+<p>If <var>level</var> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<code>secnumdepth</code> then titles for this sectioning command will be
+numbered (see <a href="#Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</a>). For instance, if
+<code>secnumdepth</code> is 1 in an <code>article</code> then the command
+<code>\section{Introduction}</code> will produce output like &ldquo;1
+Introduction&rdquo; while <code>\subsection{Discussion}</code> will produce
+output like &ldquo;Discussion&rdquo;, without the number prefix.
+</p>
+<p>If <var>level</var> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<var>tocdepth</var> then the table of contents will have an entry for this
+sectioning unit (see <a href="#Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</a>). For instance, in an
+<code>article</code>, if <var>tocdepth</var> is 1 then the table of contents will
+list sections but not subsections.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>indent</var></dt>
+<dd><a name="startsection-indent"></a><a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002findent"></a><p>A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with respect
+to the left margin. To have the title flush with the margin use
+<code>0pt</code>. A negative indentation such as <code>-\parindent</code> will move
+the title into the left margin.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>beforeskip</var></dt>
+<dd><a name="startsection-beforeskip"></a><a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"></a><p>The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space that
+is inserted before this sectioning unit&rsquo;s title. This space will be
+discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the top of a fresh
+page. If this number is negative then the first paragraph following the
+header is not indented, if it is non-negative then the first paragraph
+is indented. (Note that the negative of <code>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</code>
+is <code>-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt</code>.)
+</p>
+<p>For example, if <var>beforeskip</var> is <code>-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>
+then to start the new sectioning unit, LaTeX will add about 3.5 times
+the height of a letter x in vertical space, and the first paragraph in
+the section will not be indented. Using a rubber length, with
+<code>plus</code> and <code>minus</code>, is good practice here since it gives
+LaTeX more flexibility in making up the page (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The full accounting of the vertical space between the baseline of the
+line prior to this sectioning unit&rsquo;s header and the baseline of the
+header is that it is the sum of the <code>\parskip</code> of the text font,
+the <code>\baselineskip</code> of the title font, and the absolute value of
+the <var>beforeskip</var>. This space is typically rubber so it may stretch
+or shrink. (If the sectioning unit starts on a fresh page so that the
+vertical space is discarded then the baseline of the header text will be
+where LaTeX would put the baseline of the first text line on that
+page.)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>afterskip</var></dt>
+<dd><a name="startsection-afterskip"></a><a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"></a><p>This is a length. If <var>afterskip</var> is non-negative then this is the
+vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit&rsquo;s title header. If it
+is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so that it
+becomes part of the next paragraph. In this case the absolute value of
+the length gives the horizontal space between the end of the title and
+the beginning of the following paragraph. (Note that the negative of
+<code>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</code> is <code>-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt</code>.)
+</p>
+<p>As with <var>beforeskip</var>, using a rubber length, with <code>plus</code> and
+<code>minus</code> components, is good practice here since it gives LaTeX
+more flexibility in putting together the page.
+</p>
+<p>If <code>afterskip</code> is non-negative then the full accounting of the
+vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit&rsquo;s header and
+the baseline of the first line of the following paragraph is that it is
+the sum of the <code>\parskip</code> of the title font, the
+<code>\baselineskip</code> of the text font, and the value of <var>after</var>.
+That space is typically rubber so it may stretch or shrink. (Note that
+because the sign of <code>afterskip</code> changes the sectioning unit
+header&rsquo;s from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
+<code>afterskip</code> to cancel part of the <code>\parskip</code>.)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>style</var></dt>
+<dd><a name="startsection-style"></a><a name="g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"></a><p>Controls the styling of the title. See the examples below. Typical
+commands to use here are <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>,
+<code>\normalfont</code>, <code>\hrule</code>, or <code>\newpage</code>. The last command
+in <var>style</var> may be one that takes one argument, such as
+<code>\MakeUppercase</code> or <code>\fbox</code> that takes one argument. The
+section title will be supplied as the argument to this command. For
+instance, setting <var>style</var> to <code>\bfseries\MakeUppercase</code> would
+produce titles that are bold and uppercase.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>These are LaTeX&rsquo;s defaults for the first three sectioning units that
+are defined with <code>\@startsection</code>, for the <samp>article</samp>,
+<samp>book</samp>, and <samp>report</samp> classes. For section, the <var>level</var> is
+1, the <var>indent</var> is 0pt, the <var>beforeskip</var> is <code>-3.5ex
+plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>, the <var>afterskip</var> is <code>2.3ex plus 0.2ex</code>,
+and the <var>style</var> is <code>\normalfont\Large\bfseries</code>. For
+subsection, the <var>level</var> is 2, the <var>indent</var> is 0pt, the
+<var>beforeskip</var> is <code>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>, the
+<var>afterskip</var> is <code>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</code>, and the <var>style</var> is
+<code>\normalfont\large\bfseries</code>. For subsubsection, the <var>level</var>
+is 3, the <var>indent</var> is 0pt, the <var>beforeskip</var> is
+<code>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>, the <var>afterskip</var> is
+<code>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</code>, and the <var>style</var> is
+<code>\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Here are examples. They go either in a package or class file or in the
+preamble of a LaTeX document. If you put them in the preamble they
+must go between a <code>\makeatletter</code> command and a
+<code>\makeatother</code>. (Probably the error message <code>You can't use
+`\spacefactor' in vertical mode.</code> means that you forgot this.)
+See <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</a>.
+</p>
+<p>This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered. It says
+<code>\renewcommand</code> because LaTeX&rsquo;s standard classes have already
+defined a <code>\section</code>. For the same reason it does not define a
+<code>section</code> counter, or the commands <code>\thesection</code> and
+<code>\l@section</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand\section{%
+ \@startsection{section}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fname"><var>name</var></a>
+ {1}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"><var>level</var></a>
+ {0pt}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002findent"><var>indent</var></a>
+ {-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"><var>beforeskip</var></a>
+ {2.3ex plus.2ex}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"><var>afterskip</var></a>
+ {\centering\normalfont\Large\bfseries}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"><var>style</var></a>
+ }
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This will put <code>subsection</code> titles in small caps type, inline with the paragraph.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand\subsection{%
+ \@startsection{subsection}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fname"><var>name</var></a>
+ {2}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"><var>level</var></a>
+ {0em}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002findent"><var>indent</var></a>
+ {-1ex plus 0.1ex minus -0.05ex}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"><var>beforeskip</var></a>
+ {-1em plus 0.2em}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"><var>afterskip</var></a>
+ {\scshape}% <a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"><var>style</var></a>
+ }
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands.
+This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to
+display that counter.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setcounter{secnumdepth}{6}% show counters this far down
+\newcounter{subsubparagraph}[subparagraph]% counter for numbering
+\renewcommand{\thesubsubparagraph}% how to display
+ {\thesubparagraph.\@arabic\c@subsubparagraph}% numbering
+\newcommand{\subsubparagraph}{\@startsection
+ {subsubparagraph}%
+ {6}%
+ {0em}%
+ {\baselineskip}%
+ {0.5\baselineskip}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize}}
+\newcommand*\l@subsubparagraph{\@dottedtocline{6}{10em}{5em}}% for toc
+\newcommand{\subsubparagraphmark}[1]{}% for page headers
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Cross-references"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="n" rel="next">Environments</a>, Previous: <a href="#Sectioning" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Sectioning</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Cross-references-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">7 Cross references</h2>
+
+<a name="index-cross-references"></a>
+
+<a name="index-label"></a>
+<p>We often want something like &lsquo;<samp>See Theorem~31</samp>&rsquo;. But by-hand typing
+the 31 is poor practice. Instead you should write a <em>label</em> such as
+<code>\label{eq:GreensThm}</code> and then <em>reference</em> it, as with
+<code>See equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}</code>. LaTeX will automatically
+work out the number, put it into the output, and will change that number
+later if needed.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">We will see this with Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm}. % forward reference
+...
+\begin{theorem} \label{th:GreensThm}
+ ...
+\end{theorem}
+...
+See Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm} on page~\pageref{th:GreensThm}.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>LaTeX tracks cross reference information in a file having the
+extension <samp>.aux</samp> and with the same base name as the file containing
+the <code>\label</code>. So if <code>\label</code> is in <samp>calculus.tex</samp> then
+the information is in <samp>calculus.aux</samp>. LaTeX puts the
+information in that file every time it runs across a <code>\label</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-forward-reference"></a>
+<a name="index-reference_002c-forward"></a>
+<p>The behavior described in the prior paragraph results in a quirk that
+happens when your document has a <em>forward reference</em>, a <code>\ref</code>
+that appears before the associated <code>\label</code>. If this is the first
+time that you are compiling the document then you will get &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX
+Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross references right</samp>&rsquo;
+and in the output the forward reference will appear as two question
+marks&nbsp;&lsquo;<samp>??</samp>&rsquo;, in boldface. A similar thing happens if you
+change some things so the references changes; you get the same warning
+and the output contains the old reference information. In both cases,
+resolve this by compiling the document a second time.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-cleveref"></a>
+<a name="index-cleveref-package"></a>
+<p>The <code>cleveref</code> package enhances LaTeX&rsquo;s
+cross referencing features. You can arrange that if you enter
+<code>\begin{thm}\label{th:Nerode}...\end{thm}</code> then
+<code>\cref{th:Nerode}</code> will output &lsquo;<samp>Theorem 3.21</samp>&rsquo;, without you
+having to enter the &ldquo;Theorem.&rdquo;
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005clabel" accesskey="1">\label</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cpageref" accesskey="2">\pageref</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Refer to a page number.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cref" accesskey="3">\ref</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Refer to a section, figure or similar.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005clabel"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cpageref" accesskey="n" rel="next">\pageref</a>, Up: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cross references</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005clabel-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">7.1 <code>\label</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005clabel"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\label{<var>key</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Assign a reference number to <var>key</var>. In ordinary text
+<code>\label{<var>key</var>}</code> assigns to <var>key</var> the number of the
+current sectional unit. Inside an environment with numbering, such as a
+<code>table</code> or <code>theorem</code> environment, <code>\label{<var>key</var>}</code>
+assigns to <var>key</var> the number of that environment. Retrieve the
+assigned number with the <code>\ref{<var>key</var>}</code> command
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a>).
+</p>
+<p>A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
+punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are
+distinguished, as usual.
+</p>
+<p>A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+separated by a colon or period. Thus, <code>\label{fig:Post}</code> is a
+label for a figure with a portrait of Emil Post. This helps to avoid
+accidentally creating two labels with the same name, and makes your
+source more readable. Some commonly-used prefixes:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>ch</code></dt>
+<dd><p>for chapters
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>sec</code></dt>
+<dt><code>subsec</code></dt>
+<dd><p>for lower-level sectioning commands
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>fig</code></dt>
+<dd><p>for figures
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>tab</code></dt>
+<dd><p>for tables
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>eq</code></dt>
+<dd><p>for equations
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>In the auxiliary file the reference information is kept as the text of
+a command of the form
+<code>\newlabel{<var>label</var>}{{<var>currentlabel</var>}{<var>pagenumber</var>}}</code>.
+Here <var>currentlabel</var> is the current value of the macro
+<code>\@currentlabel</code> that is usually updated whenever you call
+<code>\refstepcounter{<var>counter</var>}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Below, the key <code>sec:test</code> will get the number of the current
+section and the key <code>fig:test</code> will get the number of the figure.
+(Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and tables.)
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\section{section name}
+\label{sec:test}
+This is Section~\ref{sec:test}.
+\begin{figure}
+ ...
+ \caption{caption text}
+ \label{fig:test}
+\end{figure}
+See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cpageref"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cref" accesskey="n" rel="next">\ref</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005clabel" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\label</a>, Up: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cross references</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cpageref-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">7.2 <code>\pageref</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cpageref"></a>
+<a name="index-cross-referencing-with-page-number"></a>
+<a name="index-page-number_002c-cross-referencing"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\pageref{<var>key</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding
+<code>\label</code>{<var>key</var>} command appears.
+</p>
+<p>If there is no <code>\label{<var>key</var>}</code> then you get something like
+&lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on
+input line 11.</samp>&rsquo;
+</p>
+<p>Below, the <code>\label{eq:main}</code> is used both for the formula number
+and for the page number. (Note that the two references are forward
+references so this document would need to be compiled twice to resolve
+those.)
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">The main result is formula~\ref{eq:main} on page~\pageref{eq:main}.
+ ...
+\begin{equation} \label{eq:main}
+ \mathbf{P}=\mathbf{NP}
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cref"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpageref" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\pageref</a>, Up: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cross references</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cref-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">7.3 <code>\ref</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cref"></a>
+<a name="index-cross-referencing_002c-symbolic"></a>
+<a name="index-section-number_002c-cross-referencing"></a>
+<a name="index-equation-number_002c-cross-referencing"></a>
+<a name="index-figure-number_002c-cross-referencing"></a>
+<a name="index-footnote-number_002c-cross-referencing"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\ref{<var>key</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produces the number of the sectional unit,
+equation, footnote, figure, &hellip;, of the corresponding
+<code>\label</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005clabel">\label</a>). It does not produce any text,
+such as the word &lsquo;Section&rsquo; or &lsquo;Figure&rsquo;, just the bare number itself.
+</p>
+<p>If there is no <code>\label{<var>key</var>}</code> then you get something like
+&lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on
+input line 11.</samp>&rsquo;
+</p>
+<p>In this example the <code>\ref{popular}</code> produces &lsquo;<samp>2</samp>&rsquo;. Note that
+it is a forward reference since it comes before <code>\label{popular}</code>
+so this document would have to be compiled twice.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Plain \TeX
+\item \label{popular} \LaTeX
+\item Con\TeX t
+\end{enumerate}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-cleveref-1"></a>
+<a name="index-cleveref-package-1"></a>
+
+<p>The <samp>cleveref</samp> package includes text such as &lsquo;<samp>Theorem</samp>&rsquo; in the
+reference. See the documentation on CTAN.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Environments"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="n" rel="next">Line breaking</a>, Previous: <a href="#Cross-references" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Cross references</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Environments-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">8 Environments</h2>
+
+<a name="index-environments"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cbegin"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cend"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior.
+An environment begins with <code>\begin</code> and ends with <code>\end</code>,
+like this:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{<var>environment-name</var>}
+ ...
+\end{<var>environment-name</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <var>environment-name</var> at the beginning must exactly match that at
+the end. For instance, the input
+<code>\begin{table*}...\end{table}</code> will cause an error like:
+&lsquo;<samp>! LaTeX Error: \begin{table*} on input line 5 ended by
+\end{table}.</samp>&rsquo;
+</p>
+<a name="index-group_002c-and-environments"></a>
+<p>Environments are executed within a group.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#abstract" accesskey="1">abstract</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Produce an abstract.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#array" accesskey="2">array</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Math arrays.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#center" accesskey="3">center</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Centered lines.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#description" accesskey="4">description</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Labelled lists.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#displaymath" accesskey="5">displaymath</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Formulas that appear on their own line.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#document" accesskey="6">document</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Enclose the whole document.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#enumerate" accesskey="7">enumerate</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Numbered lists.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#eqnarray" accesskey="8">eqnarray</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Sequences of aligned equations.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#equation" accesskey="9">equation</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Displayed equation.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#figure">figure</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Floating figures.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Writing multiple files from the source.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Flushed left lines.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#flushright">flushright</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Flushed right lines.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Bulleted lists.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#letter">letter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Letters.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#list">list</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Generic list environment.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#math">math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">In-line math.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Miniature page.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#picture">picture</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &amp; quote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Include a quotation.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Align text arbitrarily.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#table">table</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Floating tables.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#tabular">tabular</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Align text in columns.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Bibliography or reference list.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#theorem">theorem</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Theorems, lemmas, etc.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">For hand crafted title pages.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Simulating typed input.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#verse">verse</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">For poetry and other things.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="abstract"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#array" accesskey="n" rel="next">array</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="abstract-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.1 <code>abstract</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-abstract"></a>
+<a name="index-abstract-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-abstracts"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{abstract}
+...
+\end{abstract}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. This environment
+is only defined in the <code>article</code> and <code>report</code> document classes
+(see <a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Using the example below in the <code>article</code> class produces a displayed
+paragraph. Document class option <code>titlepage</code> causes the abstract
+to be on a separate page (see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>); this is the
+default only in the <code>report</code> class.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{abstract}
+ We compare all known accounts of the proposal made by Porter Alexander
+ to Robert E Lee at the Appomattox Court House that the army continue
+ in a guerrilla war, which Lee refused.
+\end{abstract}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column document (for
+a more flexible solution, use the package <samp>abstract</samp>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+ ...
+\begin{document}
+\title{Babe Ruth as Cultural Progenitor: a Atavistic Approach}
+\author{Smith \\ Jones \\ Robinson\thanks{Railroad tracking grant.}}
+\twocolumn[
+ \begin{@twocolumnfalse}
+ \maketitle
+ \begin{abstract}
+ Ruth was not just the Sultan of Swat, he was the entire swat
+ team.
+ \end{abstract}
+ \end{@twocolumnfalse}
+ ]
+{ % by-hand insert a footnote at page bottom
+ \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+ \footnotetext[1]{Thanks for all the fish.}
+}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="array"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#center" accesskey="n" rel="next">center</a>, Previous: <a href="#abstract" accesskey="p" rel="prev">abstract</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="array-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.2 <code>array</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-array"></a>
+<a name="index-array-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-arrays_002c-math"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{array}{<var>cols</var>}
+ <var>column 1 entry</var> &amp;<var>column 2 entry</var> ... &amp;<var>column n entry</var> \\
+ ...
+\end{array}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{array}[<var>pos</var>]{<var>cols</var>}
+ <var>column 1 entry</var> &amp;<var>column 2 entry</var> ... &amp;<var>column n entry</var> \\
+ ...
+\end{array}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in math
+mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics environment
+such as <code>equation</code> (see <a href="#equation">equation</a>). Inside of each row the
+column entries are separated by an ampersand, (<code>&amp;</code>). Rows are
+terminated with double-backslashes (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This example shows a three by three array.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{equation*}
+ \chi(x) =
+ \left| % vertical bar fence
+ \begin{array}{ccc}
+ x-a &amp;-b &amp;-c \\
+ -d &amp;x-e &amp;-f \\
+ -g &amp;-h &amp;x-i
+ \end{array}
+ \right|
+\end{equation*}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The required argument <var>cols</var> describes the number of columns, their
+alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. For instance,
+<code>\begin{array}{rcl}...\end{array}</code> gives three columns: the
+first flush right, the second centered, and the third flush left. See
+<a href="#tabular">tabular</a> for the complete description of <var>cols</var> and of the
+other common features of the two environments, including the optional
+<var>pos</var> argument.
+</p>
+<p>There are two ways that <code>array</code> diverges from <code>tabular</code>. The
+first is that <code>array</code> entries are typeset in math mode, in
+textstyle (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>) except if the <var>cols</var> definition specifies
+the column with <code>p{...}</code>, which causes the entry to be typeset in
+text mode. The second is that, instead of <code>tabular</code>&rsquo;s parameter
+<code>\tabcolsep</code>, LaTeX&rsquo;s intercolumn space in an <code>array</code> is
+governed by
+<a name="index-_005carraycolsep"></a>
+<code>\arraycolsep</code>, which gives half the width between columns. The
+default for this is &lsquo;<samp>5pt</samp>&rsquo; so that between two columns comes
+10pt of space.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsmath"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package"></a>
+
+<p>To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the <samp>amsmath</samp>
+package. It comes with environments <code>pmatrix</code> for an array
+surrounded by parentheses&nbsp;<code>(...)</code>, <code>bmatrix</code> for an array
+surrounded by square brackets&nbsp;<code>[...]</code>, <code>Bmatrix</code> for an
+array surrounded by curly braces&nbsp;<code>{...}</code>, <code>vmatrix</code> for
+an array surrounded by vertical bars&nbsp;<code>|...|</code>, and
+<code>Vmatrix</code> for an array surrounded by double vertical
+bars&nbsp;<code>||...||</code>, along with a number of other array constructs.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsmath-1"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package-1"></a>
+
+<p>The next example uses the <samp>amsmath</samp> package.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble
+
+\begin{equation}
+ \begin{vmatrix}{cc} % array with vert lines
+ a &amp;b \\
+ c &amp;d
+ \end{vmatrix}=ad-bc
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-array-_0028package_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-array-_0028package_0029-package"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-dcolumn"></a>
+<a name="index-dcolumn-package"></a>
+
+<p>There are many packages concerning arrays. The <samp>array</samp> package has
+many useful extensions, including more column types. The <samp>dcolumn</samp>
+package adds a column type to center on a decimal point. For both see
+the documentation on CTAN.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="center"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#description" accesskey="n" rel="next">description</a>, Previous: <a href="#array" accesskey="p" rel="prev">array</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="center-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.3 <code>center</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-center"></a>
+<a name="index-center-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-centering-text_002c-environment-for"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center}
+ <var>line1</var> \\
+ <var>line2</var> \\
+ ...
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
+centered within the left and right margins. Use
+double-backslash, <code>\\</code>, to get a line break (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>).
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-_0028for-center_0029"></a>
+If some text is too long to fit on a line then LaTeX will insert line
+breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any
+interword space.
+</p>
+<p>This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
+<a href="#g_t_005ccentering">\centering</a> to avoid such space, for example inside a <code>figure</code>
+environment.
+</p>
+<p>This example produces three centered lines. There is extra vertical
+space between the last two lines.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center}
+ A Thesis Submitted in Partial Fufillment \\
+ of the Requirements of \\[0.5ex]
+ the School of Environmental Engineering
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In this example, depending on the page&rsquo;s line width, LaTeX may choose
+a line break for the part before the double backslash. If so, it will
+center each of the two lines and if not it will center the single line.
+Then LaTeX will break at the double backslash, and will center the
+ending.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center}
+ My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink
+ alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\
+ I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>A double backslash after the final line is optional. If present it
+doesn&rsquo;t add any vertical space.
+</p>
+<p>In a two-column document the text is centered in a column, not in the
+entire page.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ccentering" accesskey="1">\centering</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Declaration form of the <code>center</code> environment.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ccentering"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#center" accesskey="u" rel="up">center</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ccentering-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.3.1 <code>\centering</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005ccentering"></a>
+<a name="index-centering-text_002c-declaration-for"></a>
+
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">{\centering ... }
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{group}
+ \centering ...
+\end{group}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Center the material in its scope. It is most often used inside an
+environment such as <code>figure</code>, or in a <code>parbox</code>.
+</p>
+<p>This example&rsquo;s <code>\centering</code> declaration causes the graphic to be
+horizontally centered.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{figure}
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png}
+ \caption{CTAN Lion} \label{fig:CTANLion}
+\end{figure}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The scope of this <code>\centering</code> ends with the <code>\end{figure}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Unlike the <code>center</code> environment, the <code>\centering</code> command does
+not add vertical space above and below the text. That&rsquo;s its advantage
+in the above example; there is not an excess of space.
+</p>
+<p>It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. If <code>ww {\centering xx \\ yy} zz</code> is
+surrounded by blank lines then LaTeX will create a paragraph whose
+first line &lsquo;<samp>ww xx</samp>&rsquo; is centered and whose second line, not centered,
+contains &lsquo;<samp>yy zz</samp>&rsquo;. Usually what is desired is for the scope of the
+declaration to contain a blank line or the <code>\end</code> command of an
+environment such as <code>figure</code> or <code>table</code> that ends the
+paragraph unit. Thus, if <code>{\centering xx \\ yy\par} zz</code> is
+surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph with two
+centered lines &lsquo;<samp>xx</samp>&rsquo; and &lsquo;<samp>yy</samp>&rsquo;, followed by a new paragraph with
+&lsquo;<samp>zz</samp>&rsquo; that is formatted as usual.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="description"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#displaymath" accesskey="n" rel="next">displaymath</a>, Previous: <a href="#center" accesskey="p" rel="prev">center</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="description-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.4 <code>description</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-description"></a>
+<a name="index-description-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-labelled-lists_002c-creating"></a>
+<a name="index-description-lists_002c-creating"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{description}
+ \item[<var>label of first item</var>] <var>text of first item</var>
+ \item[<var>label of second item</var>] <var>text of second item</var>
+ ...
+\end{description}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Environment to make a list of labeled items. Each item&rsquo;s <var>label</var> is
+typeset in bold and is flush left, so that long labels continue into the
+first line of the item text. There must be at least one item; having
+none causes the LaTeX error &lsquo;<samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a
+missing \item</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>This example shows the environment used for a sequence of definitions.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{definition}
+ \item[lama] A priest.
+ \item[llama] A beast.
+\end{definition}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The labels &lsquo;<samp>lama</samp>&rsquo; and &lsquo;<samp>llama</samp>&rsquo; are output in boldface, with the
+left edge on the left margin.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005citem"></a>
+<p>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005citem">\item</a>). Use the
+optional labels, as in <code>\item[Main point]</code>, because there is
+no sensible default. Following the <code>\item</code> is optional text, which
+may contain multiple paragraphs.
+</p>
+<a name="index-bold-typewriter_002c-avoiding"></a>
+<a name="index-typewriter-labels-in-lists"></a>
+<p>Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a font
+change given in argument style (see <a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a>) then it will come
+out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter with
+<code>\item[\texttt{label text}]</code> then it will appear in bold
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way around this, in this
+example to get non-bold typewriter, is to use declarative style:
+<code>\item[{\tt label text}]</code>. Similarly, get the standard roman
+font with <code>\item[{\rm label text}]</code>.
+</p>
+<p>For other major LaTeX labelled list environments, see <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>
+and <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>. Unlike those environments, nesting
+<code>description</code> environments does not change the default label; it is
+boldface and flush left at all levels.
+</p>
+<p>For information about list layout parameters, including the default
+values, and for information about customizing list layout, see
+<a href="#list">list</a>. The package <samp>enumitem</samp> is useful for customizing
+lists.
+</p>
+<p>This example changes the description labels to small caps.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{%
+ {\hspace{\labelsep}\textsc{#1}}}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="displaymath"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#document" accesskey="n" rel="next">document</a>, Previous: <a href="#description" accesskey="p" rel="prev">description</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="displaymath-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.5 <code>displaymath</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-displaymath"></a>
+<a name="index-displaymath-environment"></a>
+
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{displaymath}
+ <var>mathematical text</var>
+\end{displaymath}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display style
+and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global option
+<code>fleqn</code>; see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>.
+</p>
+<p>In the <code>displaymath</code> environment no equation number is added to the
+math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the
+<code>equation</code> environment (see <a href="#equation">equation</a>).
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX will not break the <var>math text</var> across lines.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsmath-2"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package-2"></a>
+
+<p>Note that the <samp>amsmath</samp> package has significantly more extensive
+displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of
+ways in that package for having math text broken across lines.
+</p>
+<p>The construct <code>\[<var>math text</var>\]</code> is essentially a synonym for
+<code>\begin{displaymath}<var>math text</var>\end{displaymath}</code> but the
+latter is easier to work with in the source file; for instance,
+searching for a square bracket may get false positives but the word
+<code>displaymath</code> will likely be unique. (The construct
+<code>$$<var>math text</var>$$</code> from Plain&nbsp;TeX is sometimes
+mistakenly used as a synonym for <code>displaymath</code>. It is not a
+synonym, because the <code>displaymath</code> environment checks that it isn&rsquo;t
+started in math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
+environment start, because the <code>displaymath</code> environment has
+different vertical spacing, and because the <code>displaymath</code>
+environment honors the <code>fleqn</code> option.)
+</p>
+<p>The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{displaymath}
+ \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3
+\end{displaymath}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version
+<code>\( \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3 \)</code> produces.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="document"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#enumerate" accesskey="n" rel="next">enumerate</a>, Previous: <a href="#displaymath" accesskey="p" rel="prev">displaymath</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="document-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.6 <code>document</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-document"></a>
+<a name="index-document-environment"></a>
+
+
+<p>The <code>document</code> environment encloses the entire body of a document.
+It is required in every LaTeX document. See <a href="#Starting-and-ending">Starting and ending</a>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument" accesskey="1">\AtBeginDocument</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Hook for commands at the start of the document.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cAtEndDocument" accesskey="2">\AtEndDocument</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Hook for commands at the end of the document.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cAtBeginDocument"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cAtEndDocument" accesskey="n" rel="next">\AtEndDocument</a>, Up: <a href="#document" accesskey="u" rel="up">document</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cAtBeginDocument-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.6.1 <code>\AtBeginDocument</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cAtBeginDocument"></a>
+<a name="index-beginning-of-document-hook"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\AtBeginDocument{<var>code</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Save <var>code</var> and execute it when <code>\begin{document}</code> is
+executed, at the very end of the preamble. The code is executed after
+the font selection tables have been set up, so the normal font for the
+document is the current font. However, the code is executed as part of
+the preamble so you cannot do any typesetting with it.
+</p>
+<p>You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cAtEndDocument"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\AtBeginDocument</a>, Up: <a href="#document" accesskey="u" rel="up">document</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cAtEndDocument-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.6.2 <code>\AtEndDocument</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cAtEndDocument"></a>
+<a name="index-end-of-document-hook"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\AtEndDocument{<var>code</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Save <var>code</var> and execute it near the end of the document.
+Specifically, it is executed when <code>\end{document}</code> is executed,
+before the final page is finished and before any leftover floating
+environments are processed. If you want some of the code to be executed
+after these two processes then include a <code>\clearpage</code> at the
+appropriate point in <var>code</var>.
+</p>
+<p>You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="enumerate"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#eqnarray" accesskey="n" rel="next">eqnarray</a>, Previous: <a href="#document" accesskey="p" rel="prev">document</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="enumerate-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.7 <code>enumerate</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-enumerate"></a>
+<a name="index-enumerate-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-lists-of-items_002c-numbered"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{enumerate}
+ \item[<var>optional label of first item</var>] <var>text of first item</var>
+ \item[<var>optional label of second item</var>] <var>text of second item</var>
+ ...
+\end{enumerate}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Environment to produce a numbered list of items. The format of the
+label numbering depends on the nesting level of this environment; see
+below. The default top-level numbering is &lsquo;<samp>1.</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>2.</samp>&rsquo;,
+etc. Each <code>enumerate</code> list environment must have at least one item;
+having none causes the LaTeX error &lsquo;<samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a
+missing \item</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>This example gives the first two finishers in the 1908 Olympic marathon.
+As a top-level list the labels would come out as &lsquo;<samp>1.</samp>&rsquo; and
+&lsquo;<samp>2.</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{enumerate}
+ \item Johnny Hayes (USA)
+ \item Charles Hefferon (RSA)
+\end{enumerate}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005citem-1"></a>
+<p>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005citem">\item</a>). If you
+give <code>\item</code> an optional argument by following it with square
+brackets, as in <code>\item[Interstitial label]</code>, then the next item
+will continue the interrupted sequence (see <a href="#g_t_005citem">\item</a>). That is, you
+will get labels like &lsquo;<samp>1.</samp>&rsquo;, then &lsquo;<samp>Interstitial label</samp>&rsquo;, then
+&lsquo;<samp>2.</samp>&rsquo;. Following the <code>\item</code> is optional text, which may
+contain multiple paragraphs.
+</p>
+<p>Enumerations may be nested within other <code>enumerate</code> environments,
+or within any paragraph-making environment such as <code>itemize</code>
+(see <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>), up to four levels deep. This gives LaTeX&rsquo;s
+default for the format at each nesting level, where 1 is the top level,
+the outermost level.
+</p>
+<ol>
+<li> arabic number followed by a period: &lsquo;<samp>1.</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>2.</samp>&rsquo;,&nbsp;&hellip;
+</li><li> lowercase letter inside parentheses: &lsquo;<samp>(a)</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>(b)</samp>&rsquo;&nbsp;&hellip;
+</li><li> lowercase roman numeral followed by a period: &lsquo;<samp>i.</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>ii.</samp>&rsquo;,&nbsp;&hellip;
+</li><li> uppercase letter followed by a period: &lsquo;<samp>A.</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>B.</samp>&rsquo;,&nbsp;&hellip;
+</li></ol>
+
+<a name="index-_005cenumi"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cenumii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cenumiii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cenumiv"></a>
+<a name="enumerate-enumi"></a><a name="enumerate-enumii"></a><a name="enumerate-enumiii"></a><a name="enumerate-enumiv"></a><p>The <code>enumerate</code> environment uses the counters <code>\enumi</code> through
+<code>\enumiv</code> (see <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>).
+</p>
+<p>For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see
+<a href="#description">description</a> and <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>. For information about list layout
+parameters, including the default values, and for information about
+customizing list layout, see <a href="#list">list</a>. The package <samp>enumitem</samp> is
+useful for customizing lists.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005clabelenumi"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clabelenumii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clabelenumiii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clabelenumiv"></a>
+<a name="enumerate-labelenumi"></a><a name="enumerate-labelenumii"></a><a name="enumerate-labelenumiii"></a><a name="enumerate-labelenumiv"></a><p>To change the format of the label use <code>\renewcommand</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a>) on the commands <code>\labelenumi</code>
+through <code>\labelenumiv</code>. For instance, this first level list will be
+labelled with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing
+period.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cAlph-example"></a>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\textbf{\Alph{enumi}}}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item Shows as boldface A
+ \item Shows as boldface B
+\end{enumerate}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>For a list of counter-labeling commands see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="eqnarray"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#equation" accesskey="n" rel="next">equation</a>, Previous: <a href="#enumerate" accesskey="p" rel="prev">enumerate</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="eqnarray-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.8 <code>eqnarray</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-eqnarray"></a>
+<a name="index-eqnarray-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-equations_002c-aligning"></a>
+<a name="index-aligning-equations"></a>
+
+<a name="index-align-environment_002c-from-amsmath"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package_002c-replacing-eqnarray"></a>
+<a name="index-Madsen_002c-Lars"></a>
+<p>The <code>eqnarray</code> environment is obsolete. It has infelicities,
+including spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements.
+(See &ldquo;Avoid eqnarray!&rdquo; by Lars Madsen
+<a href="http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf">http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf</a>). New documents
+should include the <samp>amsmath</samp> package and use the displayed
+mathematics environments provided there, such as the <code>align</code>
+environment. We include a description only for completeness and for
+working with old documents.
+</p>
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{eqnarray}
+ <var>first formula left</var> &amp;<var>first formula middle</var> &amp;<var>first formula right</var> \\
+ ...
+\end{eqnarray}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{eqnarray*}
+ <var>first formula left</var> &amp;<var>first formula middle</var> &amp;<var>first formula right</var> \\
+ ...
+\end{eqnarray*}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-_0028for-eqnarray_0029"></a>
+<p>Display a sequence of equations or inequalities. The left and right
+sides are typeset in display mode, while the middle is typeset in text
+mode.
+</p>
+<p>It is similar to a three-column <code>array</code> environment, with items
+within a row separated by an ampersand&nbsp;(<code>&amp;</code>), and with rows
+separated by double backslash&nbsp; <code>\\</code>).
+<a name="index-_005c_005c_002a-_0028for-eqnarray_0029"></a>
+The starred form of line break (<code>\\*</code>) can also be used to separate
+equations, and will disallow a page break there (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cnonumber"></a>
+<a name="index-equation-numbers_002c-omitting"></a>
+<p>The unstarred form <code>eqnarray</code> places an equation number on every
+line (using the <code>equation</code> counter), unless that line contains a
+<code>\nonumber</code> command. The starred form <code>eqnarray*</code> omits
+equation numbering, while otherwise being the same.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005clefteqn"></a>
+<p>The command <code>\lefteqn</code> is used for splitting long formulas across
+lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
+zero width.
+</p>
+<p>This example shows three lines. The first two lines make an inequality,
+while the third line has not entry on the left side.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{eqnarray*}
+ \lefteqn{x_1+x_2+\cdots+x_n} \\
+ &amp;\leq &amp;y_1+y_2+\cdots+y_n \\
+ &amp;= &amp;z+y_3+\cdots+y_n
+\end{eqnarray*}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="equation"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#figure" accesskey="n" rel="next">figure</a>, Previous: <a href="#eqnarray" accesskey="p" rel="prev">eqnarray</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="equation-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.9 <code>equation</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-equation"></a>
+<a name="index-equation-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-equations_002c-environment-for"></a>
+<a name="index-formulas_002c-environment-for"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{equation}
+ <var>mathematical text</var>
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The same as a <code>displaymath</code> environment (see <a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a>)
+except that LaTeX puts an equation number flush to the right margin.
+The equation number is generated using the <code>equation</code> counter.
+</p>
+<p>You should have no blank lines between <code>\begin{equation}</code> and
+<code>\begin{equation}</code>, or LaTeX will tell you that there is a
+missing dollar sign.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsmath-3"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package-3"></a>
+
+<p>The package <samp>amsmath</samp> package has extensive displayed equation
+facilities. New documents should include this package.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="figure"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#filecontents" accesskey="n" rel="next">filecontents</a>, Previous: <a href="#equation" accesskey="p" rel="prev">equation</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="figure-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.10 <code>figure</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-figure"></a>
+<a name="index-figure-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-inserting-figures"></a>
+<a name="index-figures_002c-inserting"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{figure}[<var>placement</var>]
+ <var>figure body</var>
+ \caption[<var>loftitle</var>]{<var>title</var>} % optional
+ \label{<var>label}</var> % optional
+\end{figure}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{figure*}[<var>placement</var>]
+ <var>figure body</var>
+ \caption[<var>loftitle</var>]{<var>title</var>} % optional
+ \label{<var>label}</var> % optional
+\end{figure*}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Figures are for material that is not part of the normal text. An
+example is material that you cannot have split between two pages, such
+as a graphic. Because of this, LaTeX does not typeset figures in
+sequence with normal text but instead &ldquo;floats&rdquo; them to a convenient
+place, such as the top of a following page (see <a href="#Floats">Floats</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The <var>figure body</var> can consist of imported graphics
+(see <a href="#Graphics">Graphics</a>), or text, LaTeX commands, etc. It is typeset in a
+<code>parbox</code> of width <code>\textwidth</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The possible values of <var>placement</var> are <code>h</code> for &lsquo;<samp>here</samp>&rsquo;,
+<code>t</code> for &lsquo;<samp>top</samp>&rsquo;, <code>b</code> for &lsquo;<samp>bottom</samp>&rsquo;, and <code>p</code> for
+&lsquo;<samp>on a separate page of floats</samp>&rsquo;. For the effect of these options on
+the float placement algorithm, see <a href="#Floats">Floats</a>.
+</p>
+<p>The starred form <code>figure*</code> is used when a document is in
+double-column mode (see <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>). It produces a figure that
+spans both columns, at the top of the page. To add the possibility of
+placing at a page bottom see the discussion of <var>placement</var> <code>b</code>
+in <a href="#Floats">Floats</a>.
+</p>
+<p>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a>).
+<a name="index-_005ccaption"></a>
+The optional <code>\caption</code> command specifies caption text for the
+figure. By default it is numbered. If <var>loftitle</var> is present, it is
+used in the list of figures instead of <var>title</var> (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This example makes a figure out of a graphic. LaTeX will place that
+graphic and its caption at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
+end of the document, on a page of floats.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{figure}[t]
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{CTANlion.png}
+ \caption{The CTAN lion, by Duane Bibby}
+\end{figure}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="filecontents"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#flushleft" accesskey="n" rel="next">flushleft</a>, Previous: <a href="#figure" accesskey="p" rel="prev">figure</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="filecontents_003a-Write-an-external-file"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.11 <code>filecontents</code>: Write an external file</h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-filecontents"></a>
+<a name="index-filecontents-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-filecontents_002a"></a>
+<a name="index-filecontents_002a-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-external-files_002c-writing"></a>
+<a name="index-writing-external-files"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{filecontents}{<var>filename</var>}
+ <var>text</var>
+\end{filecontents}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{filecontents*}{<var>filename</var>}
+ <var>text</var>
+\end{filecontents*}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Create a file named <var>filename</var> and fill it with <var>text</var>. The
+unstarred version of the environment <code>filecontents</code> prefixes the
+content of the created file with a header; see the example below. The
+starred version <code>filecontents*</code> does not include the header.
+</p>
+<p>This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it often
+appears before the <code>\documentclass</code> command. It is typically used
+when a source file requires a nonstandard style or class file. The
+environment will write that file to the directory containing the source
+and thus make the source file self-contained. Another use is to include
+<code>bib</code> references in the file, again to make it self-contained.
+</p>
+<p>The environment checks whether a file of that name already exists and if
+so, does not do anything. There is a <samp>filecontents</samp> package that
+redefines the <code>filecontents</code> environment so that instead of doing
+nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file.
+</p>
+<p>For example, this document
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{article}
+\begin{filecontents}{JH.sty}
+\newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+\end{filecontents}
+\usepackage{JH}
+\begin{document}
+Article by \myname.
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>produces this file <samp>JH.sty</samp>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">%% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
+%% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+%% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
+%%
+\newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="flushleft"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#flushright" accesskey="n" rel="next">flushright</a>, Previous: <a href="#filecontents" accesskey="p" rel="prev">filecontents</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="flushleft-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.12 <code>flushleft</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-flushleft"></a>
+<a name="index-flushleft-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-left_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for"></a>
+<a name="index-ragged-right-text_002c-environment-for"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{flushleft}
+ <var>line1</var> \\
+ <var>line2</var> \\
+ ...
+\end{flushleft}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-for-flushleft"></a>
+<p>An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long
+then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and
+stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use a double
+backslash, <code>\\</code>. For the declaration form
+see&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a>.
+</p>
+<p>This creates a box of text that is at most 3 inches wide, with the text
+flush left and ragged right.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\noindent\begin{minipage}{3in}
+\begin{flushleft}
+ A long sentence that will be broken by \LaTeX{}
+ at a convenient spot. \\
+ And, a fresh line forced by the double backslash.
+\end{flushleft}
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005craggedright" accesskey="1">\raggedright</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Declaration form of the <code>flushleft</code> environment.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005craggedright"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#flushleft" accesskey="u" rel="up">flushleft</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005craggedright-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.12.1 <code>\raggedright</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005craggedright"></a>
+<a name="index-ragged-right-text"></a>
+<a name="index-left_002djustifying-text"></a>
+<a name="index-justification_002c-ragged-right"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">{\raggedright ... }
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{<var>environment</var>} \raggedright
+ ...
+\end{<var>environment</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and
+ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code>
+or in a <code>parbox</code>. For the environment form
+see&nbsp;<a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>.
+</p>
+<p>Unlike the <code>flushleft</code> environment, the <code>\raggedright</code>
+command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit&rsquo;s format, the
+scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code>
+command that ends the paragraph unit.
+</p>
+<p>Here <code>\raggedright</code> in each second column keeps LaTeX from doing
+very awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column. Note
+that <code>\raggedright</code> is inside the curly braces <code>{...}</code> to
+delimit its effect.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{rp{2in}}
+ Team alpha &amp;{\raggedright This team does all the real work.} \\
+ Team beta &amp;{\raggedright This team ensures that the water
+ cooler is never empty.} \\
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="flushright"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#itemize" accesskey="n" rel="next">itemize</a>, Previous: <a href="#flushleft" accesskey="p" rel="prev">flushleft</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="flushright-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.13 <code>flushright</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-flushright"></a>
+<a name="index-flushright-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-ragged-left-text_002c-environment-for"></a>
+<a name="index-right_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for"></a>
+
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{flushright}
+ <var>line1</var> \\
+ <var>line2</var> \\
+ ...
+\end{flushright}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-_0028for-flushright_0029"></a>
+<p>An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long
+to fit the margins then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that
+avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new
+line use a double backslash, <code>\\</code>. For the declaration form
+see&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a>.
+</p>
+<p>For an example related to this environment, see&nbsp;<a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005craggedleft" accesskey="1">\raggedleft</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Declaration form of the <code>flushright</code> environment.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005craggedleft"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#flushright" accesskey="u" rel="up">flushright</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005craggedleft-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.13.1 <code>\raggedleft</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005craggedleft"></a>
+<a name="index-ragged-left-text"></a>
+<a name="index-justification_002c-ragged-left"></a>
+<a name="index-right_002djustifying-text"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">{\raggedleft ... }
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{<var>environment</var>} \raggedleft
+ ...
+\end{<var>environment</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and
+ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code>
+or in a <code>parbox</code>. For the environment form
+see&nbsp;<a href="#flushright">flushright</a>.
+</p>
+<p>Unlike the <code>flushright</code> environment, the <code>\raggedleft</code>
+command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit&rsquo;s format, the
+scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code>
+command that ends the paragraph unit.
+</p>
+<p>For an example related to this environment, see&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="itemize"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#letter" accesskey="n" rel="next">letter</a>, Previous: <a href="#flushright" accesskey="p" rel="prev">flushright</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="itemize-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.14 <code>itemize</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-itemize"></a>
+<a name="index-itemize-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-_005citem-2"></a>
+<a name="index-lists-of-items"></a>
+<a name="index-unordered-lists"></a>
+<a name="index-bulleted-lists"></a>
+<a name="index-bullet-lists"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{itemize}
+ \item[<var>optional label of first item</var>] <var>text of first item</var>
+ \item[<var>optional label of second item</var>] <var>text of second item</var>
+ ...
+\end{itemize}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a list that is unordered, sometimes called a bullet list. The
+environment must have at least one <code>\item</code>; having none causes the
+LaTeX error &lsquo;<samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>This gives a two-item list.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{itemize}
+ \item Pencil and watercolor sketch by Cassandra
+ \item Rice portrait
+\end{itemize}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>As a top-level list each label would come out as a bullet, &bull;.
+The format of the labeling depends on the nesting level; see below.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005citem-3"></a>
+<p>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005citem">\item</a>). If you
+give <code>\item</code> an optional argument by following it with square
+brackets, as in <code>\item[Optional label]</code>, then by default it will
+appear in bold and be flush right, so it could extend into the left
+margin. For labels that are flush left see the <a href="#description">description</a>
+environment. Following the <code>\item</code> is optional text, which may
+contain multiple paragraphs.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005clabelitemi"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clabelitemii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clabelitemiii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clabelitemiv"></a>
+<a name="itemize-labelitemi"></a><a name="itemize-labelitemii"></a><a name="itemize-labelitemiii"></a><a name="itemize-labelitemiv"></a><p>Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
+They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such
+as <code>enumerate</code> (see <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>). The <code>itemize</code> environment
+uses the commands <code>\labelitemi</code> through <code>\labelitemiv</code> to
+produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase
+roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting
+level). These are the default marks at each level.
+</p>
+<ol>
+<li> &bull; (bullet, from <code>\textbullet</code>)
+</li><li> <b>-<span class="nolinebreak">-</span><!-- /@w --></b> (bold en-dash, from <code>\normalfont\bfseries\textendash</code>)
+</li><li> * (asterisk, from <code>\textasteriskcentered</code>)
+</li><li> . (centered dot, rendered here as a period, from <code>\textperiodcentered</code>)
+</li></ol>
+
+<p>Change the labels with <code>\renewcommand</code>. For instance, this makes
+the first level use diamonds.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005cleftmargin"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cleftmargini"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cleftmarginii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cleftmarginiii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cleftmarginiv"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cleftmarginv"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cleftmarginvi"></a>
+<a name="itemize-leftmargin"></a><a name="itemize-leftmargini"></a><a name="itemize-leftmarginii"></a><a name="itemize-leftmarginiii"></a><a name="itemize-leftmarginiv"></a><a name="itemize-leftmarginv"></a><a name="itemize-leftmarginvi"></a><p>The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
+the left margin of the <code>itemize</code> list is determined by the
+parameters <code>\leftmargini</code> through <code>\leftmarginvi</code>. (Note the
+convention of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command
+name to denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: <code>2.5em</code> in
+level 1 (<code>2em</code> in two-column mode), <code>2.2em</code> in level 2,
+<code>1.87em</code> in level 3, and <code>1.7em</code> in level 4, with smaller
+values for more deeply nested levels.
+</p>
+<p>For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see
+<a href="#description">description</a> and <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>. For information about list
+layout parameters, including the default values, and for information
+about customizing list layout, see <a href="#list">list</a>. The package
+<samp>enumitem</samp> is useful for customizing lists.
+</p>
+<p>This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost itemized
+lists.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005cparskip-example"></a>
+<p>Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
+space between items. Here is an example defining an <code>itemize*</code>
+environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
+within a single item (<code>\parskip</code> is not list-specific,
+see <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent &amp; \parskip</a>):
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newenvironment{itemize*}%
+ {\begin{itemize}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+ \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
+ {\end{itemize}}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="letter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#list" accesskey="n" rel="next">list</a>, Previous: <a href="#itemize" accesskey="p" rel="prev">itemize</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="letter-environment_003a-writing-letters"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.15 <code>letter</code> environment: writing letters</h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-letter"></a>
+<a name="index-letter-environment"></a>
+
+
+<p>This environment is used for creating letters. See <a href="#Letters">Letters</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="list"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#math" accesskey="n" rel="next">math</a>, Previous: <a href="#letter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">letter</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="list-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.16 <code>list</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-list"></a>
+<a name="index-list-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-lists-of-items_002c-generic"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{list}{<var>labeling</var>}{<var>spacing</var>}
+ \item[<var>optional label of first item</var>] <var>text of first item</var>
+ \item[<var>optional label of second item</var>] <var>text of second item</var>
+ ...
+\end{list}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>An environment for constructing lists.
+</p>
+<p>Note that this environment does not typically appear in the document
+body. Most lists created by LaTeX authors are the ones that come
+standard: the <code>description</code>, <code>enumerate</code>, and <code>itemize</code>
+environments (see <a href="#description">description</a>, <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>, and <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Instead, the <code>list</code> environment is most often used in macros. For
+example, many standard LaTeX environments that do not immediately
+appear to be lists are in fact constructed using <code>list</code>, including
+<code>quotation</code>, <code>quote</code>, and <code>center</code> (see <a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &amp; quote</a>, see <a href="#center">center</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This uses the <code>list</code> environment to define a new custom
+environment.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcounter{namedlistcounter} % number the items
+\newenvironment{named}
+ {\begin{list}
+ {Item~\Roman{namedlistcounter}.} % labeling
+ {\usecounter{namedlistcounter} % set counter
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{3.5em}} % set spacing
+ }
+ {\end{list}}
+
+\begin{named}
+ \item Shows as ``Item~I.''
+ \item[Special label.] Shows as ``Special label.''
+ \item Shows as ``Item~II.''
+\end{named}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The mandatory first argument <var>labeling</var> specifies the default
+labeling of list items. It can contain text and LaTeX commands, as
+above where it contains both &lsquo;<samp>Item</samp>&rsquo; and &lsquo;<samp>\Roman{...}</samp>&rsquo;.
+LaTeX forms the label by putting the <var>labeling</var> argument in a box
+of width <code>\labelwidth</code>. If the label is wider than that, the
+additional material extends to the right. When making an instance of a
+list you can override the default labeling by giving <code>\item</code> an
+optional argument by including square braces and the text, as in the
+above <code>\item[Special label.]</code>; see <a href="#g_t_005citem">\item</a>.
+</p>
+<p>The mandatory second argument <var>spacing</var> has a list of commands.
+This list can be empty. A command that can go in here is
+<code>\usecounter{<var>countername</var>}</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>). Use this
+to tell LaTeX to number the items using the given counter. The
+counter will be reset to zero each time LaTeX enters the environment,
+and the counter is incremented by one each time LaTeX encounters an
+<code>\item</code> that does not have an optional argument.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cmakelabel"></a>
+<a name="list-makelabel"></a><p>Another command that can go in <var>spacing</var> is
+<code>\makelabel</code>, which constructs the label box. By default it puts
+the contents flush right. Its only argument is the label, which it
+typesets in LR mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>). One example of changing its
+definition is that to the above <code>named</code> example, before the
+definition of the environment add
+<code>\newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}</code>, and between
+the <code>\setlength</code> command and the parenthesis that closes the
+<var>spacing</var> argument also add <code>\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel</code>.
+Then the items will be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the
+second code line to <code>\let\makelabel\fbox</code> puts the labels inside a
+framed box. Another example of the <code>\makelabel</code> command is below,
+in the definition of the <code>redlabel</code> environment.
+</p>
+<p>Also often in <var>spacing</var> are commands to redefine the spacing for the
+list. Below are the spacing parameters with their default values.
+(Default values for derived environments such as <code>itemize</code> can be
+different than the values shown here.) See also the figure that follows
+the list. Each is a length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). The vertical spaces are
+normally rubber lengths, with <code>plus</code> and <code>minus</code> components,
+to give TeX flexibility in setting the page. Change each with a
+command such as <code>\setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}</code>.
+For some effects these lengths should be zero or negative.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\itemindent</code>
+<a name="index-_005citemindent"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="list-itemindent"></a><p>Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond <code>leftmargin</code>, of the
+first line each item. Its default value is <code>0pt</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\itemsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005citemsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="list-itemsep"></a><p>Vertical space between items, beyond the <code>\parsep</code>. The defaults
+for the first three levels in LaTeX&rsquo;s &lsquo;<samp>article</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>book</samp>&rsquo;,
+and &lsquo;<samp>report</samp>&rsquo; classes at 10 point size are: <code>4pt plus2pt
+minus1pt</code>, <code>\parsep</code> (that is, <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>), and
+<code>\topsep</code> (that is, <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>). The defaults at
+11 point are: <code>4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt</code>, <code>\parsep</code> (that is,
+<code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>), and <code>topsep</code> (that is, <code>2pt
+plus1pt minus1pt</code>). The defaults at 12 point are: <code>5pt plus2.5pt
+minus1pt</code>, <code>\parsep</code> (that is, <code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>), and
+<code>\topsep</code> (that is, <code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\labelsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005clabelsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="list-labelsep"></a><p>Horizontal space between the label and text of an item.
+The default for LaTeX&rsquo;s &lsquo;<samp>article</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>book</samp>&rsquo;,
+and &lsquo;<samp>report</samp>&rsquo; classes is <code>0.5em</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\labelwidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005clabelwidth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="list-labelwidth"></a><p>Horizontal width. The box containing the label is nominally this wide.
+If <code>\makelabel</code> returns text that is wider than this then the first
+line of the item will be indented to make room for this extra material.
+If <code>\makelabel</code> returns text of width less than or equal to
+<code>\labelwidth</code> then LaTeX&rsquo;s default is that the label is typeset
+flush right in a box of this width.
+</p>
+<p>The left edge of the label box is
+<code>\leftmargin</code>+<code>\itemindent</code>-<code>\labelsep</code>-<code>\labelwidth</code>
+from the left margin of the enclosing environment.
+</p>
+<p>The default for LaTeX&rsquo;s &lsquo;<samp>article</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>book</samp>&rsquo;, and
+&lsquo;<samp>report</samp>&rsquo; classes at the top level is
+<code>\leftmargini</code>-<code>\labelsep</code>, (which is <code>2em</code> in one column
+mode and <code>1.5em</code> in two column mode). At the second level it is
+<code>\leftmarginii</code>-<code>\labelsep</code>, and at the third level it is
+<code>\leftmarginiii</code>-<code>\labelsep</code>. These definitions make the
+label&rsquo;s left edge coincide with the left margin of the enclosing
+environment.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\leftmargin</code>
+<a name="index-_005cleftmargin-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="list-leftmargin"></a><p>Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment
+(or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level list), and the
+left margin of this list. It must be non-negative.
+</p>
+<p>In the standard LaTeX document classes, a top-level list has this set
+to the value of <code>\leftmargini</code>, while a list that is nested inside
+a top-level list has this margin set to <code>\leftmarginii</code>. More
+deeply nested lists get the values of <code>\leftmarginiii</code> through
+<code>\leftmarginvi</code>. (Nesting greater than level five generates the
+error message &lsquo;<samp>Too deeply nested</samp>&rsquo;.)
+</p>
+<p>The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX&rsquo;s &lsquo;<samp>article</samp>&rsquo;,
+&lsquo;<samp>book</samp>&rsquo;, and &lsquo;<samp>report</samp>&rsquo; classes are: <code>\leftmargini</code> is
+<code>2.5em</code> (in two column mode, <code>2em</code>), <code>\leftmarginii</code> is
+<code>2.2em</code>, and <code>\leftmarginiii</code> is <code>1.87em</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\listparindent</code>
+<a name="index-_005clistparindent"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="list-listparindent"></a><p>Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
+<code>\leftmargin</code>, for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list
+item. A negative value makes this an &ldquo;outdent&rdquo;. Its default value
+is <code>0pt</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\parsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cparsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="list-parsep"></a><p>Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. In the &lsquo;<samp>book</samp>&rsquo;
+and &lsquo;<samp>article</samp>&rsquo; classes The defaults for the first three levels in
+LaTeX&rsquo;s &lsquo;<samp>article</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>book</samp>&rsquo;, and &lsquo;<samp>report</samp>&rsquo; classes at 10
+point size are: <code>4pt plus2pt minus1pt</code>, <code>2pt plus1pt
+minus1pt</code>, and <code>0pt</code>. The defaults at 11 point size are:
+<code>4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt</code>, <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>, and
+<code>0pt</code>. The defaults at 12 point size are: <code>5pt plus2.5pt
+minus1pt</code>, <code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>0pt</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\partopsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpartopsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="list-partopsep"></a><p>Vertical space added, beyond <code>\topsep</code>+<code>\parskip</code>, to the top
+and bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded by
+a blank line. (A blank line in the LaTeX source before the list
+changes spacing at both the top and bottom of the list; whether the line
+following the list is blank does not matter.)
+</p>
+<p>The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX&rsquo;s &lsquo;<samp>article</samp>&rsquo;,
+&lsquo;<samp>book</samp>&rsquo;, and &lsquo;<samp>report</samp>&rsquo; classes at 10 point size are: <code>2pt
+plus1 minus1pt</code>, <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>1pt plus0pt
+minus1pt</code>. The defaults at 11 point are: <code>3pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>,
+<code>3pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>1pt plus0pt minus1pt</code>). The
+defaults at 12 point are: <code>3pt plus2pt minus3pt</code>, <code>3pt plus2pt
+minus2pt</code>, and <code>1pt plus0pt minus1pt</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rightmargin</code>
+<a name="index-_005crightmargin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="list-rightmargin"></a><p>Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right
+margin of the enclosing environment. Its default value is <code>0pt</code>.
+It must be non-negative.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\topsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctopsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="list-topsep"></a><p>Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition
+to <code>\parskip</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent &amp; \parskip</a>). The defaults for
+the first three levels in LaTeX&rsquo;s &lsquo;<samp>article</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>book</samp>&rsquo;, and
+&lsquo;<samp>report</samp>&rsquo; classes at 10 point size are: <code>8pt plus2pt minus4pt</code>,
+<code>4pt plus2pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>. The
+defaults at 11 point are: <code>9pt plus3pt minus5pt</code>, <code>4.5pt
+plus2pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>. The defaults at 12
+point are: <code>10pt plus4pt minus6pt</code>, <code>5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt</code>,
+and <code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>This shows the horizontal and vertical distances.
+</p>
+<div class="float">
+<img src="latex2e-figures/list.png" alt="latex2e-figures/list">
+</div>
+<p>The lengths shown are listed below. The key relationship is that the
+right edge of the bracket for <var>h1</var> equals the right edge of the
+bracket for <var>h4</var>, so that the left edge of the label box is at
+<var>h3</var>+<var>h4</var>-(<var>h0</var>+<var>h1</var>).
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>v0</var></dt>
+<dd><p><em><code>\topsep</code> + <code>\parskip</code></em> if
+the list environment does not start a new paragraph, and
+<code>\topsep</code>+<code>\parskip</code>+<code>\partopsep</code> if it does
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>v1</var></dt>
+<dd><p><code>\parsep</code>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>v2</var></dt>
+<dd><p><code>\itemsep</code>+<code>\parsep</code>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>v3</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Same as <var>v0</var>. (This space is affected by whether a blank line
+appears in the source above the environment; whether a blank line
+appears in the source below the environment does not matter.)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>h0</var></dt>
+<dd><p><code>\labelwidth</code>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>h1</var></dt>
+<dd><p><code>\labelsep</code>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>h2</var></dt>
+<dd><p><code>\listparindent</code>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>h3</var></dt>
+<dd><p><code>\leftmargin</code>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>h4</var></dt>
+<dd><p><code>\itemindent</code>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>h5</var></dt>
+<dd><p><code>\rightmargin</code>
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>The list&rsquo;s left and right margins, shown above as <var>h3</var> and <var>h5</var>,
+are with respect to the ones provided by the surrounding environment, or
+with respect to the page margins for a top-level list. The line width
+used for typesetting the list items is <code>\linewidth</code> (see <a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a>). For instance, set the list&rsquo;s left margin to be one
+quarter of the distance between the left and right margins of the
+enclosing environment with
+<code>\setlength{\leftmargin}{0.25\linewidth}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Page breaking in a list structure is controlled by the three
+parameters below. For each, the LaTeX default is
+<code>-\@lowpenalty</code>, that is, <code>-51</code>. Because it is negative,
+it somewhat encourages a page break at each spot. Change it with,
+e.g., <code>\@beginparpenalty=9999</code>; a value of 10000 prohibits a
+page break.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\@beginparpenalty</code>
+<a name="index-_005c_0040beginparpenalty"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="list-beginparpenalty"></a><p>The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default <code>-51</code>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\@itempenalty</code>
+<a name="index-_005c_0040itempenalty"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="list-itempenalty"></a><p>The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default <code>-51</code>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\@endparpenalty</code>
+<a name="index-_005c_0040endparpenalty"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="list-endparpenalty"></a><p>The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default <code>-51</code>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-enumitem"></a>
+<a name="index-enumitem-package"></a>
+
+<p>The package <code>enumitem</code> is useful for customizing lists.
+</p>
+<p>This example has the labels in red. They are numbered, and the left
+edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text.
+See <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{color}
+\newcounter{cnt}
+\newcommand{\makeredlabel}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1.}}
+\newenvironment{redlabel}
+ {\begin{list}
+ {\arabic{cnt}}
+ {\usecounter{cnt}
+ \setlength{\labelwidth}{0em}
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{0.5em}
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{1.5em}
+ \setlength{\itemindent}{0.5em} % equals \labelwidth+\labelsep
+ \let\makelabel=\makeredlabel
+ }
+ }
+{\end{list} }
+</pre></div>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005citem" accesskey="1">\item</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">An entry in a list.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#trivlist" accesskey="2">trivlist</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">A restricted form of <code>list</code>.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005citem"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#trivlist" accesskey="n" rel="next">trivlist</a>, Up: <a href="#list" accesskey="u" rel="up">list</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005citem_003a-An-entry-in-a-list"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.16.1 <code>\item</code>: An entry in a list</h4>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\item text of item
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\item[<var>optional-label</var>] text of item
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>An entry in a list. The entries are prefixed by a label, whose default
+depends on the list type.
+</p>
+<p>Because the optional label is surrounded by square brackets
+&lsquo;<samp>[...]</samp>&rsquo;, if you have an item whose text starts with &lsquo;<samp>[</samp>&rsquo;, you
+have to hide the bracket inside curly braces, as in: <code>\item
+{[} is an open square bracket</code>; otherwise, LaTeX will think it
+marks the start of an optional label.
+</p>
+<p>Similarly, if the item does have the optional label and you need a
+close square bracket inside that label, you must hide it in the same
+way: <code>\item[Close square bracket, {]}]</code>. See <a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax">LaTeX command syntax</a>.
+</p>
+<p>In this example the enumerate list has two items that use the default
+label and one that uses the optional label.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{enumerate}
+ \item Moe
+ \item[sometimes] Shemp
+ \item Larry
+\end{enumerate}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The first item is labelled &lsquo;<samp>1.</samp>&rsquo;, the second item is labelled
+&lsquo;<samp>sometimes</samp>&rsquo;, and the third item is labelled &lsquo;<samp>2.</samp>&rsquo;. Because
+of the optional label in the second item, the third item is not
+labelled&nbsp;&lsquo;<samp>3.</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="trivlist"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005citem" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\item</a>, Up: <a href="#list" accesskey="u" rel="up">list</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="trivlist_003a-A-restricted-form-of-list"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.16.2 <code>trivlist</code>: A restricted form of <code>list</code></h4>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{trivlist}
+ ...
+\end{trivlist}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>A restricted version of the list environment, in which margins are not
+indented and an <code>\item</code> without an optional argument produces no
+text. It is most often used in macros, to define an environment where
+the <code>\item</code> command as part of the environment&rsquo;s definition. For
+instance, the <code>center</code> environment is defined essentially like
+this:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newenvironment{center}
+ {\begin{trivlist}\centering\item\relax}
+ {\end{trivlist}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Using <code>trivlist</code> in this way allows the macro to inherit some
+common code: combining vertical space of two adjacent environments;
+detecting whether the text following the environment should be
+considered a new paragraph or a continuation of the previous one;
+adjusting the left and right margins for possible nested list
+environments.
+</p>
+<p>Specifically, <code>trivlist</code> uses the current values of the list
+parameters (see <a href="#list">list</a>), except that <code>\parsep</code> is set to the
+value of <code>\parskip</code>, and <code>\leftmargin</code>, <code>\labelwidth</code>,
+and <code>\itemindent</code> are set to zero.
+</p>
+<p>This example outputs the items as two paragraphs, except that (by
+default) they have no paragraph indent and are vertically separated.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{trivlist}
+\item The \textit{Surprise} is not old; no one would call her old.
+\item She has a bluff bow, lovely lines.
+\end{trivlist}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="math"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#minipage" accesskey="n" rel="next">minipage</a>, Previous: <a href="#list" accesskey="p" rel="prev">list</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="math-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.17 <code>math</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-math"></a>
+<a name="index-math-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-in_002dline-formulas"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{math}
+<var>math</var>
+\end{math}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>math</code> environment inserts given <var>math</var> material within
+the running text. <code>\(...\)</code> and <code>$...$</code> are synonyms.
+See <a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="minipage"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#picture" accesskey="n" rel="next">picture</a>, Previous: <a href="#math" accesskey="p" rel="prev">math</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="minipage-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.18 <code>minipage</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-minipage"></a>
+<a name="index-minipage-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-minipage_002c-creating-a"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{minipage}{<var>width</var>}
+ <var>contents</var>
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{minipage}[<var>position</var>][<var>height</var>][<var>inner-pos</var>]{<var>width</var>}
+ <var>contents</var>
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Put <var>contents</var> into a box that is <var>width</var> wide. This is like a
+small version of a page; it can contain its own footnotes, itemized
+lists, etc. (There are some restrictions, including that it cannot have
+floats.) This box will not be broken across pages. So <code>minipage</code>
+is similar to <code>\parbox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cparbox">\parbox</a>) but here you can have
+paragraphs.
+</p>
+<p>This example will be 3&nbsp;inches wide, and has two paragraphs.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{minipage}{3in}
+ Stephen Kleene was a founder of the Theory of Computation.
+
+ He was a student of Church, wrote three influential texts,
+ was President of the Association for Symbolic Logic,
+ and won the National Medal of Science.
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>See below for a discussion of the paragraph indent inside a
+<code>minipage</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The required argument <var>width</var> is a rigid length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>).
+It gives the width of the box into which <var>contents</var> are typeset.
+</p>
+<p>There are three optional arguments, <var>position</var>, <var>height</var>, and
+<var>inner-pos</var>. You need not include all three. For example, get the
+default <var>position</var> and set the <var>height</var> with
+<code>\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm] <var>contents</var> \end{minipage}</code>.
+(Get the natural height with an empty argument, <code>[]</code>.)
+</p>
+<p>The optional argument <var>position</var> governs how the <code>minipage</code>
+vertically aligns with the surrounding material.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dd><p>(synonym <code>m</code>) Default. Positions the <code>minipage</code> so its
+vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what
+Plain TeX calls <code>\vcenter</code>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Match the top line in the <code>minipage</code> with the baseline of the
+surrounding text (Plain TeX&rsquo;s <code>\vtop</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Match the bottom line in the <code>minipage</code> with the baseline of the
+surrounding text (Plain TeX&rsquo;s <code>\vbox</code>.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>To see the effects of these, contrast running this
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">---\begin{minipage}[c]{0.25in}
+ first\\ second\\ third
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>with the results of changing <code>c</code> to <code>b</code> or&nbsp;<code>t</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The optional argument <var>height</var> is a rigid length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>).
+It sets the height of the <code>minipage</code>. You can enter any value
+larger than, or equal to, or smaller than the <code>minipage</code>&rsquo;s natural
+height and LaTeX will not give an error or warning. You can also set
+it to a height of zero or a negative value.
+</p>
+<p>The final optional argument <var>inner-pos</var> controls the placement of
+<var>content</var> inside the box. These are the possible values are (the
+default is the value of <var>position</var>).
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Place <var>content</var> at the top of the box.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Place it in the vertical center.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Place it at the box bottom.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>s</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Stretch <var>contents</var> out vertically; it must contain vertically
+stretchable space.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>The <var>inner-pos</var> argument makes sense when the <var>height</var> option
+is set to a value larger than the <code>minipage</code>&rsquo;s natural height. To
+see the effect of the options, run this example with the various choices
+in place of <code>b</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Text before
+\begin{center}
+ ---\begin{minipage}[c][3in][b]{0.25\textwidth}
+ first\\ second\\ third
+ \end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+Text after
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-indentation-of-paragraphs_002c-in-minipage"></a>
+<a name="index-paragraph-indentation_002c-in-minipage"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cparindent"></a>
+<p>By default paragraphs are not indented in a <code>minipage</code>. Change
+that with a command such as <code>\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}</code> at
+the start of <var>contents</var>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-footnotes-in-figures"></a>
+<a name="index-figures_002c-footnotes-in"></a>
+<p>Footnotes in a <code>minipage</code> environment are handled in a way that is
+particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
+<code>\footnote</code> or <code>\footnotetext</code> command puts the footnote at
+the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it
+uses the <code>\mpfootnote</code> counter instead of the ordinary
+<code>footnote</code> counter (see <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This puts the footnote at the bottom of the table, not the bottom of the
+page.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center} % center the minipage on the line
+\begin{minipage}{2.5in}
+ \begin{center} % center the table inside the minipage
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \textsc{Monarch} &amp;\textsc{Reign} \\ \hline
+ Elizabeth II &amp;63 years\footnote{to date} \\
+ Victoria &amp;63 years \\
+ George III &amp;59 years
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>If you nest minipages then there is an oddness when using footnotes.
+Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next
+<code>\end{minipage}</code> which may not be their logical place.
+</p>
+<p>This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic. They
+are vertically centered.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+ ...
+\begin{center}
+ \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]{nyc.png}}
+ \hspace{0.1\textwidth}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+ \begin{tabular}{r|l}
+ \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &amp;Pop (million) \\ \hline
+ The Bronx &amp;$1.5$ \\
+ Brooklyn &amp;$2.6$ \\
+ Manhattan &amp;$1.6$ \\
+ Queens &amp;$2.3$ \\
+ Staten Island &amp;$0.5$
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="picture"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#quotation-_0026-quote" accesskey="n" rel="next">quotation &amp; quote</a>, Previous: <a href="#minipage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">minipage</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="picture-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.19 <code>picture</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-picture"></a>
+<a name="index-picture-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-creating-pictures"></a>
+<a name="index-pictures_002c-creating"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses:
+</p><div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{picture}(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)
+ <var>picture commands</var>
+\end{picture}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{picture}(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)(<var>xoffset</var>,<var>yoffset</var>)
+ <var>picture commands</var>
+\end{picture}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows,
+boxes, circles, and text. Note that while this environment is not
+obsolete, new documents typically use much more powerful graphics
+creation systems, such as <code>TikZ</code>, <code>PSTricks</code>, <code>MetaPost</code>,
+or <code>Asymptote</code>. These are not covered in this document; see CTAN.
+</p>
+<p>This shows the parallelogram law for adding vectors.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cunitlength"></a>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+\begin{picture}(6,6) % picture box will be 6cm wide by 6cm tall
+ \put(0,0){\vector(2,1){4}} % for every 2 over this vector goes 1 up
+ \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ first leg}}
+ \put(4,2){\vector(1,2){2}}
+ \put(5,4){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ second leg}}
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,1){6}}
+ \put(3,3){\makebox(0,0)[r]{sum\ }}
+\end{picture}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an
+exact location.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{color,graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{center}
+\setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth}
+\begin{picture}(1,1) % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
+ \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}}
+ \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}}
+\end{picture}
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The red&nbsp;X will be precisely a quarter of the <code>\linewidth</code> from
+the left margin, and <code>0.35\linewidth</code> up from the bottom. Another
+example of this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get
+repeat material on each of a document&rsquo;s pages.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>picture</code> environment has one required argument, a pair of
+numbers (<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>). Multiply these by the value
+<code>\unitlength</code> to get the nominal size of the output, the space that
+LaTeX reserves on the output page. This nominal size need not be how
+large the picture really is; LaTeX will draw things from the picture
+outside the picture&rsquo;s box.
+</p>
+<p>This environment also has an optional argument
+(<var>xoffset</var>,<var>yoffset</var>). It is used to shift the origin. Unlike
+most optional arguments, this one is not contained in square brackets.
+As with the required argument, it consists of two real numbers.
+Multiply these by <code>\unitlength</code> to get the point at the lower-left
+corner of the picture.
+</p>
+<p>For example, if <code>\unitlength</code> has been set to <code>1mm</code>, the
+command
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>produces a box of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters. The
+picture&rsquo;s origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner
+is there, and the upper-right corner is at (110mm,220mm). When you
+first draw a picture you typically omit the optional argument, leaving
+the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
+picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate
+optional argument.
+</p>
+<a name="index-position_002c-in-picture"></a>
+<p>Each <var>picture command</var> tells LaTeX where to put something by
+naming its position. A <em>position</em> is a pair such as <code>(2.4,-5)</code>
+giving the x- and y-coordinates. A <em>coordinate</em> is a not a length,
+it is a real number (it may have a decimal point or a minus sign). It
+specifies a length in multiples of the unit length <code>\unitlength</code>,
+so if <code>\unitlength</code> has been set to <code>1cm</code>, then the coordinate
+2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX&rsquo;s default for <code>\unitlength</code> is <code>1pt</code>. it is a rigid
+length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). Change it with the <code>\setlength</code> command
+(see <a href="#g_t_005csetlength">\setlength</a>). Make this change only outside of a <code>picture</code>
+environment.
+</p>
+<p>Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at
+the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears
+as an argument, as with <code>\put(1,2){...}</code>, it is not enclosed in
+braces since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also,
+unlike in some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are
+further up the page.
+</p>
+<p>There are four ways to put things in a picture: <code>\put</code>,
+<code>\multiput</code>, <code>\qbezier</code>, and <code>\graphpaper</code>. The most
+often used is <code>\put</code>. This
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\put(11.3,-0.3){...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>places the object with its reference point at coordinates
+<em>(11.3,-0.3)</em>. The reference points for various objects will be
+described below.
+<a name="index-LR-box"></a>
+The <code>\put</code> command creates an <em>LR box</em> (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
+Anything that can go in an <code>\mbox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a>) can
+go in the text argument of the <code>\put</code> command. The reference point
+will be the lower left corner of the box. In this picture
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+...\begin{picture}(1,1)
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,0){1}}
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,1){1}}
+\end{picture}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>the three dots are just slightly left of the point of the angle formed
+by the two lines. (Also, <code>\line(1,1){1}</code> does not call for a
+line of length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of
+1.)
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\multiput</code>, <code>qbezier</code>, and <code>graphpaper</code> commands are
+described below.
+</p>
+<p>This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using <code>\qbezier</code> for
+that curve.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{picture}(3,1.5)
+ \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}} % x axis
+ \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}} % y axis
+ \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}} % left side rectangle
+ \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}} % right side
+ \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
+ \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
+ \thicklines % below here, lines are twice as thick
+ \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}}
+ \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}}
+\end{picture}
+</pre></div>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cput" accesskey="1">\put</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Place an object at a specified place.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmultiput" accesskey="2">\multiput</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw multiple instances of an object.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cqbezier" accesskey="3">\qbezier</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a quadratic Bezier curve.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper" accesskey="4">\graphpaper</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw graph paper.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cline" accesskey="5">\line</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a straight line.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness" accesskey="6">\linethickness</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Set thickness of horizontal and vertical lines.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines" accesskey="7">\thinlines</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">The default line thickness.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines" accesskey="8">\thicklines</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">A heavier line thickness.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ccircle" accesskey="9">\circle</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a circle.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005coval">\oval</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw an oval.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Make a stack of objects.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cvector">\vector</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a line with an arrow.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a box of the specified size.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a box with a frame around it.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cframe">\frame</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a frame around an object.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a dashed box.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cput"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmultiput" accesskey="n" rel="next">\multiput</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cput-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.1 <code>\put</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cput"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\put(<var>xcoord</var>,<var>ycoord</var>){<var>content</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Place <var>content</var> at the coordinate (<var>xcoord</var>,<var>ycoord</var>). See
+the discussion of coordinates and <code>\unitlength</code> in <a href="#picture">picture</a>.
+The <var>content</var> is processed in LR mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>) so it cannot
+contain line breaks.
+</p>
+<p>This includes the text into the <code>picture</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\put(4.5,2.5){Apply the \textit{unpoke} move}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The reference point, the location (4.5,2.5), is the lower left of the
+text, at the bottom left of the &lsquo;<samp>A</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmultiput"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cqbezier" accesskey="n" rel="next">\qbezier</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cput" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\put</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmultiput-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.2 <code>\multiput</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cmultiput"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\multiput(<var>x</var>,<var>y</var>)(<var>delta_x</var>,<var>delta_y</var>){<var>num-copies</var>}{<var>obj</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Copy <var>obj</var> a total of <var>num-copies</var> times, with an increment of
+<var>delta_x,delta_y</var>. The <var>obj</var> first appears at position
+<em>(x,y)</em>, then at <em>(x+\delta_x,y+\delta_y)</em>, and so on.
+</p>
+<p>This draws a simple grid with every fifth line in bold (see also
+<a href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper">\graphpaper</a>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{picture}(10,10)
+ \linethickness{0.05mm}
+ \multiput(0,0)(1,0){10}{\line(0,1){10}}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,1){10}{\line(1,0){10}}
+ \linethickness{0.5mm}
+ \multiput(0,0)(5,0){3}{\line(0,1){10}}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,5){3}{\line(1,0){10}}
+\end{picture}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cqbezier"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper" accesskey="n" rel="next">\graphpaper</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmultiput" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\multiput</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cqbezier-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.3 <code>\qbezier</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cqbezier"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\qbezier(<var>x1</var>,<var>y1</var>)(<var>x2</var>,<var>y2</var>)(<var>x3</var>,<var>y3</var>)
+\qbezier[<var>num</var>](<var>x1</var>,<var>y1</var>)(<var>x2</var>,<var>y2</var>)(<var>x3</var>,<var>y3</var>)
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Draw a quadratic Bezier curve whose control points are given by the
+three required arguments <code>(<var>x1</var>,<var>y1</var>)</code>,
+<code>(<var>x2</var>,<var>y2</var>)</code>, and <code>(<var>x3</var>,<var>y3</var>)</code>. That is,
+the curve runs from <var>(x1,y1)</var> to <var>(x3,y3)</var>, is quadratic, and is
+such that the tangent line at <var>(x1,y1)</var> passes through
+<var>(x2,y2)</var>, as does the tangent line at <var>(x3,y3)</var>.
+</p>
+<p>This draws a curve from the coordinate (1,1) to (1,0).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\qbezier(1,1)(1.25,0.75)(1,0)
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The curve&rsquo;s tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the
+curve&rsquo;s tangent line at (1,0).
+</p>
+<p>The optional argument <var>num</var> gives the number of calculated
+intermediate points. The default is to draw a smooth curve whose
+maximum number of points is <code>\qbeziermax</code> (change this value with
+<code>\renewcommand</code>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cgraphpaper"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\line</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cqbezier" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\qbezier</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cgraphpaper-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.4 <code>\graphpaper</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cgraphpaper"></a>
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\graphpaper(<var>x_init</var>,<var>y_init</var>)(<var>x_dimen</var>,<var>y_dimen</var>)
+\graphpaper[<var>spacing</var>](<var>x_init</var>,<var>y_init</var>)(<var>x_dimen</var>,<var>y_dimen</var>)
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the <code>graphpap</code> package.
+The grid&rsquo;s origin is <code>(<var>x_init</var>,<var>y_init</var>)</code>.
+Grid lines come every <var>spacing</var> units (the default is 10).
+The grid extends <var>x_dimen</var> units to the right and <var>y_dimen</var> units up.
+All arguments must be positive integers.
+</p>
+<p>This make a grid with seven vertical lines and eleven horizontal lines.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{graphpap} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{picture}(6,20) % in document body
+ \graphpaper[2](0,0)(12,20)
+\end{picture}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The lines are numbered every ten units.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cline"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness" accesskey="n" rel="next">\linethickness</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\graphpaper</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cline-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.5 <code>\line</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cline"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\line(<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>){<var>travel</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Draw a line. It slopes such that it vertically rises <var>y_rise</var> for
+every horizontal <var>x_run</var>. The <var>travel</var> is the total horizontal
+change&nbsp;&mdash; it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in
+<em>x</em>. In the special case of vertical lines, where
+(<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>)=(0,1), the <var>travel</var> gives the change in
+<em>y</em>.
+</p>
+<p>This draws a line starting at coordinates (1,3).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\put(1,3){\line(2,5){4}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>For every over 2, this line will go up 5. Because <var>travel</var>
+specifies that this goes over 4, it must go up&nbsp;10. Thus its
+endpoint is <em>(1,3)+(4,10)=(5,13)</em>. In particular, note that
+<em><var>travel</var>=4</em> is not the length of the line, it is the change in
+<em>x</em>.
+</p>
+<p>The arguments <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> are integers that can be
+positive, negative, or zero. (If both are 0 then LaTeX treats the
+second as 1.) With
+<code>\put(<var>x_init</var>,<var>y_init</var>){\line(<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>){<var>travel</var>}}</code>,
+if <var>x_run</var> is negative then the line&rsquo;s ending point has a first
+coordinate that is less than <var>x_init</var>. If <var>y_rise</var> is negative
+then the line&rsquo;s ending point has a second coordinate that is less than
+<var>y_init</var>.
+</p>
+<p>If <var>travel</var> is negative then you get <code>LaTeX Error: Bad \line or
+\vector argument.</code>
+</p>
+<a name="index-pict2e-package"></a>
+<a name="index-graphics-packages"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-pict2e"></a>
+<a name="index-pict2e-package-1"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-TikZ"></a>
+<a name="index-TikZ-package"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-PSTricks"></a>
+<a name="index-PSTricks-package"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-MetaPost"></a>
+<a name="index-MetaPost-package"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-Asymptote"></a>
+<a name="index-Asymptote-package"></a>
+
+<p>Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with a limited range of slopes
+because these lines are made by putting together line segments from
+pre-made fonts. The two numbers <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> must have
+integer values from -6 through&nbsp;6. Also, they must be
+relatively prime, so that <var>(x_run,y_rise)</var> can be (2,1) but not
+(4,2) (if you choose the latter then instead of lines you get sequences
+of arrowheads; the solution is to switch to the former). To get lines
+of arbitrary slope and plenty of other shapes in a system like
+<code>picture</code>, see the package <samp>pict2e</samp> on CTAN. Another solution
+is to use a full-featured graphics system such as <samp>TikZ</samp>, or
+<samp>PSTricks</samp>, or <samp>MetaPost</samp>, or <samp>Asymptote</samp>
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005clinethickness"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines" accesskey="n" rel="next">\thinlines</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\line</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005clinethickness-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.6 <code>\linethickness</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005clinethickness"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\linethickness{<var>dim</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Declares the thickness of subsequent horizontal and vertical lines in a
+picture to be <var>dim</var>, which must be a positive length
+(see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). It differs from <code>\thinlines</code> and
+<code>\thicklines</code> in that it does not affect the thickness of slanted
+lines, circles, or ovals.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cthinlines"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines" accesskey="n" rel="next">\thicklines</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\linethickness</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cthinlines-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.7 <code>\thinlines</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cthinlines"></a>
+
+<p>Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.4pt. This is the default
+thickness, so this command is unnecessary unless the thickness has been
+changed with either <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a> or <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines">\thicklines</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cthicklines"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ccircle" accesskey="n" rel="next">\circle</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\thinlines</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cthicklines-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.8 <code>\thicklines</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cthicklines"></a>
+
+<p>Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.8pt. See also
+<a href="#g_t_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a> and <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines">\thinlines</a>. This command is illustrated
+in the Trapezoidal Rule example of <a href="#picture">picture</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ccircle"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005coval" accesskey="n" rel="next">\oval</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\thicklines</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ccircle-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.9 <code>\circle</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005ccircle"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\circle{<var>diameter</var>}
+\circle*{<var>diameter</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produces a circle with a diameter as close as possible to the specified
+one. The <code>*</code>&nbsp;form produces a filled-in circle.
+</p>
+<p>This draws a circle of radius 6, centered at <code>(5,7)</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\put(5,7){\circle{6}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The available radii for <code>circle</code> are, in points, the even
+numbers from 2 to 20, inclusive. For <code>circle*</code> they are all the
+integers from 1 to 15.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005coval"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cshortstack" accesskey="n" rel="next">\shortstack</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccircle" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\circle</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005coval-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.10 <code>\oval</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005coval"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\oval(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)
+\oval(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)[<var>portion</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument
+<var>portion</var> allows you to produce only half or a quarter of the oval.
+For half an oval take <var>portion</var> to be one of these.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dd><p>top half
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dd><p>bottom half
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dd><p>right half
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dd><p>left half
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Produce only one quarter of the oval by setting <var>portion</var> to
+<code>tr</code>, <code>br</code>, <code>bl</code>, or <code>tl</code>.
+</p>
+<p>This draws the top half of an oval that is 3 wide and 7 tall.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\put(5,7){\oval(3,7)[t]}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The (5,7) is the center of the entire oval, not just the center of the
+top half.
+</p>
+<p>These shapes are not ellipses. They are rectangles whose corners are
+made with quarter circles. These circles have a maximum radius of
+20pt (see <a href="#g_t_005ccircle">\circle</a> for the sizes). Thus large ovals are just
+boxes with a small amount of corner rounding.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cshortstack"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvector" accesskey="n" rel="next">\vector</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005coval" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\oval</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cshortstack-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.11 <code>\shortstack</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cshortstack"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\shortstack[<var>position</var>]{<var>line 1</var> \\ ... }
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a vertical stack of objects.
+</p>
+<p>This labels the <em>y</em> axis.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}} % x axis
+\put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}} % y
+\put(-0.25,2){\makebox[0][r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack.
+In the above example the <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a> puts the stack flush
+right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits slightly to
+the left of the <em>y</em>&nbsp;axis.
+</p>
+<p>The valid positions are:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Make objects flush right
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Make objects flush left
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Center objects (default)
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-_0028for-_005cshortstack-objects_0029"></a>
+<p>Separate objects into lines with <code>\\</code>. These stacks are short in
+that, unlike in a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment, here the
+rows are not spaced out to be of even heights. Thus, in
+<code>\shortstack{X\\o\\o\\X}</code> the first and last rows are taller than
+the middle two. You can adjust row heights either by putting in the
+usual interline spacing with <code>\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}</code>,
+or by hand, via an explicit zero-width box <code>\shortstack{X \\
+\rule{0pt}{12pt} o\\o\\X}</code> or by using <code>\\</code>&rsquo;s optional
+argument <code>\shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\shortstack</code> command is also available outside the
+<code>picture</code> environment.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cvector"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="n" rel="next">\makebox (picture)</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cshortstack" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\shortstack</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cvector-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.12 <code>\vector</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cvector"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\vector(<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>){<var>travel</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Draw a line ending in an arrow. The slope of that line is: it
+vertically rises <var>y_rise</var> for every horizontal <var>x_run</var>. The
+<var>travel</var> is the total horizontal change&nbsp;&mdash; it is not the
+length of the vector, it is the change in <em>x</em>. In the special case
+of vertical vectors, if (<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>)=(0,1), then
+<var>travel</var> gives the change in <em>y</em>.
+</p>
+<p>For an example see <a href="#picture">picture</a>.
+</p>
+<p>For elaboration on <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> see <a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a>. As
+there, the values of <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> are limited. For
+<code>\vector</code> you must chooses integers between -4 and 4,
+inclusive. Also, the two you choose must be relatively prime. Thus,
+<code>\vector(2,1){4}</code> is acceptable but <code>\vector(4,2){4}</code> is
+not (if you use the latter then you get a sequence of arrowheads).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="n" rel="next">\framebox (picture)</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cvector" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\vector</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.13 <code>\makebox</code> (picture)</h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cmakebox-_0028for-picture_0029"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\makebox(<var>rec-width</var>,<var>rec-height</var>){<var>text</var>}
+\makebox(<var>rec-width</var>,<var>rec-height</var>)[<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Make a box to hold <var>text</var>. This command fits with the
+<code>picture</code> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because <var>rec-width</var> and <var>rec-height</var> are numbers specifying
+distances in terms of the <code>\unitlength</code> (see <a href="#picture">picture</a>). This
+command is similar to the normal <code>\makebox</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a>) except here that you must specify the width and height. This
+command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This makes a box of length 3.5 times <code>\unitlength</code> and height 4
+times <code>\unitlength</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\put(1,2){\makebox(3.5,4){...}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The optional argument <code><var>position</var></code> specifies where in the box
+the <var>text</var> appears. The default is to center it, both horizontally
+and vertically. To place it somewhere else, use a string with one or
+two of these letters.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Puts <var>text</var> the top of the box.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Put <var>text</var> at the bottom.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Put <var>text</var> on the left.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Put <var>text</var> on the right.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cframe" accesskey="n" rel="next">\frame</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\makebox (picture)</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.14 <code>\framebox</code> (picture)</h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cframebox"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\framebox(<var>rec-width</var>,<var>rec-height</var>){<var>text</var>}
+\framebox(<var>rec-width</var>,<var>rec-height</var>)[<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This is the same as <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a> except that it puts a frame
+around the outside of the box that it creates. The reference point is
+the bottom left corner of the frame. This command fits with the
+<code>picture</code> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+<code>\unitlength</code> (see <a href="#picture">picture</a>). This command is fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This example creates a frame 2.5&nbsp;inches by 3&nbsp;inches and puts
+the text in the center.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setlength{\unitlength}{1in}
+\framebox(2.5,3){test text}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The required arguments are that the rectangle has overall width
+<var>rect-width</var> units and height <var>rect-height</var> units.
+</p>
+<p>The optional argument <var>position</var> specifies the position of
+<var>text</var>; see <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a> for the values that it can
+take.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cfboxrule-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cfboxsep-1"></a>
+<p>The rule has thickness <code>\fboxrule</code> and there is a blank space
+<code>\fboxsep</code> between the frame and the contents of the box.
+</p>
+<p>For this command, you must specify the <var>width</var> and <var>height</var>. If
+you want to just put a frame around some contents whose dimension is
+determined in some other way then either use <code>\fbox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a>) or <code>\frame</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cframe">\frame</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cframe"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cdashbox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\dashbox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\framebox (picture)</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cframe-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.15 <code>\frame</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cframe"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\frame{<var>contents</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Puts a rectangular frame around <var>contents</var>. The reference point is
+the bottom left corner of the frame. In contrast to <code>\framebox</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>), this command puts no extra space is put
+between the frame and the object. It is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cdashbox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cframe" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\frame</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cdashbox-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.19.16 <code>\dashbox</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cdashbox"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\dashbox{<var>dash-len</var>}(<var>rect-width</var>,<var>rect-height</var>){<var>text</var>}
+\dashbox{<var>dash-len</var>}(<var>rect-width</var>,<var>rect-height</var>)[<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Create a dashed rectangle around <var>text</var>. This command fits with the
+<code>picture</code> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+<code>\unitlength</code> (see <a href="#picture">picture</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The required arguments are: dashes are <var>dash-len</var> units long, with
+the same length gap, and the rectangle has overall width
+<var>rect-width</var> units and height <var>rect-height</var> units.
+</p>
+<p>The optional argument <var>position</var> specifies the position of
+<var>text</var>; see <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a> for the values that it can
+take.
+</p>
+<p>This shows that you can use non-integer value for <var>dash-len</var>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\put(0,0){\dashbox{0.1}(5,0.5){My hovercraft is full of eels.}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Each dash will be <code>0.1\unitlength</code> long, the box&rsquo;s width is
+<code>5\unitlength</code> and its height is <code>0.5\unitlength</code>.
+</p>
+<p>As in that example, a dashed box looks best when <var>rect-width</var> and
+<var>rect-height</var> are multiples of the <var>dash-len</var>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="quotation-_0026-quote"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#tabbing" accesskey="n" rel="next">tabbing</a>, Previous: <a href="#picture" accesskey="p" rel="prev">picture</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="quotation-_0026-quote-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.20 <code>quotation</code> &amp; <code>quote</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-quotation"></a>
+<a name="index-quotation-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying"></a>
+<a name="index-displaying-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation"></a>
+<a name="index-paragraph-indentations-in-quoted-text"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-quote"></a>
+<a name="index-quote-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-quoted-text-without-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying"></a>
+<a name="index-displaying-quoted-text-without-paragraph-indentation"></a>
+<a name="index-paragraph-indentations-in-quoted-text_002c-omitting"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{quotation}
+ <var>text</var>
+\end{quotation}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{quote}
+ <var>text</var>
+\end{quote}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Include a quotation. Both environments indent margins on both sides by
+<code>\leftmargin</code> and the text is right-justified.
+</p>
+<p>They differ in how they treat paragraphs. In the <code>quotation</code>
+environment, paragraphs are indented by 1.5em and the space
+between paragraphs is small, <code>0pt plus 1pt</code>. In the <code>quote</code>
+environment, paragraphs are not indented and there is vertical space
+between paragraphs (it is the rubber length <code>\parsep</code>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{quotation} \small\it
+ Four score and seven years ago
+ ... shall not perish from the earth.
+ \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
+\end{quotation}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="tabbing"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#table" accesskey="n" rel="next">table</a>, Previous: <a href="#quotation-_0026-quote" accesskey="p" rel="prev">quotation &amp; quote</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="tabbing-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.21 <code>tabbing</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-tabbing"></a>
+<a name="index-tabbing-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-tab-stops_002c-using"></a>
+<a name="index-lining-text-up-using-tab-stops"></a>
+<a name="index-alignment-via-tabbing"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabbing}
+<var>row1col1</var> \= <var>row1col2</var> ... \\
+<var>row2col1</var> \&gt; <var>row2col2</var> ... \\
+...
+\end{tabbing}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Align text in columns, by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as
+was done on a typewriter. This is less often used than the environments
+<code>tabular</code> (see <a href="#tabular">tabular</a>) or <code>array</code> (see <a href="#array">array</a>) because
+in those the width of each column need not be constant and need not be
+known in advance.
+</p>
+<p>This example has a first line where the tab stops are set to explicit
+widths, ended by a <code>\kill</code> command (which is described below):
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabbing}
+\hspace{0.75in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \kill
+Ship \&gt; Guns \&gt; Year \\
+\textit{Sophie} \&gt; 14 \&gt; 1800 \\
+\textit{Polychrest} \&gt; 24 \&gt; 1803 \\
+\textit{Lively} \&gt; 38 \&gt; 1804 \\
+\textit{Surprise} \&gt; 28 \&gt; 1805 \\
+\end{tabbing}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Both the <code>tabbing</code> environment and the more widely-used
+<code>tabular</code> environment put text in columns. The most important
+distinction is that in <code>tabular</code> the width of columns is
+determined automatically by LaTeX, while in <code>tabbing</code> the user
+sets the tab stops. Another distinction is that <code>tabular</code>
+generates a box, but <code>tabbing</code> can be broken across pages.
+Finally, while <code>tabular</code> can be used in any mode, <code>tabbing</code>
+can be used only in paragraph mode and it starts a new paragraph.
+</p>
+<p>A <code>tabbing</code> environment always starts a new paragraph, without
+indentation. Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need
+to use the starred form of the <code>\hspace</code> command at the beginning
+of a tabbed row. The right margin of the <code>tabbing</code> environment is
+the end of line, so that the width of the environment is
+<code>\linewidth</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-row_002c-tabbing"></a>
+<p>The <code>tabbing</code> environment contains a sequence of <em>tabbed
+rows</em>. The first tabbed row begins immediately after
+<code>\begin{tabbing}</code> and each row ends with <code>\\</code> or
+<code>\kill</code>. The last row may omit the <code>\\</code> and end with just
+<code>\end{tabbing}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>At any point the <code>tabbing</code> environment has a current tab stop
+pattern, a sequence of <em><var>n</var> &gt; 0</em> tab stops, numbered 0, 1,
+etc. These create <var>n</var> corresponding columns. Tab stop&nbsp;0 is
+always the left margin, defined by the enclosing environment. Tab
+stop number&nbsp;<var>i</var> is set if it is assigned a horizontal
+position on the page. Tab stop number&nbsp;<var>i</var> can only be set if
+all the stops 0, &hellip;, <em>i-1</em> have already been set; normally
+later stops are to the right of earlier ones.
+</p>
+<p>By default any text typeset in a <code>tabbing</code> environment is typeset
+ragged right and left-aligned on the current tab stop. Typesetting is
+done in LR mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The following commands can be used inside a <code>tabbing</code> environment.
+They are all fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\\ <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-_0028tabbing_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>End a tabbed line and typeset it.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\= <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005c_003d-_0028tabbing_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Sets a tab stop at the current position.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\&gt; <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005c_003e-_0028tabbing_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_003e"></a>
+<p>Advances to the next tab stop.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\&lt;</code>
+<a name="index-_005c_003c"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing
+the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\+</code>
+<a name="index-_005c_002b"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if
+necessary.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\-</code>
+<a name="index-_005c_002d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if
+necessary.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\' <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e.,
+everything from the most recent <code>\&gt;</code>, <code>\&lt;</code>, <code>\'</code>,
+<code>\\</code>, or <code>\kill</code> command, to the previous column and aligned
+to the right, flush against the current column&rsquo;s tab stop.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\` <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab
+stop&nbsp;0. However, it can&rsquo;t move text to the right of the last
+column because there&rsquo;s no tab stop there. The <code>\`</code> command moves
+all the text that follows it, up to the <code>\\</code> or
+<code>\end{tabbing}</code> command that ends the line, to the right margin
+of the <code>tabbing</code> environment. There must be no <code>\&gt;</code> or
+<code>\'</code> command between the <code>\`</code> and the <code>\\</code> or
+<code>\end{tabbing}</code> command that ends the line.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\a <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ca-_0028tabbing_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ca_0027-_0028acute-accent-in-tabbing_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ca_0060-_0028grave-accent-in-tabbing_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ca_003d-_0028macron-accent-in-tabbing_0029"></a>
+<p>In a <code>tabbing</code> environment, the commands <code>\=</code>, <code>\'</code> and
+<code>\`</code> do not produce accents as usual (see <a href="#Accents">Accents</a>). Instead,
+use the commands <code>\a=</code>, <code>\a'</code> and <code>\a`</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\kill</code>
+<a name="index-_005ckill"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like <code>\\</code> except
+that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it.
+Any <code>\=</code>, <code>\+</code> or <code>\-</code> commands in that line remain in
+effect.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\poptabs</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpoptabs"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cpoptabs-1"></a>
+<p>Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last <code>\pushtabs</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\pushtabs</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpushtabs"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing
+tab stop positions in the middle of a <code>tabbing</code> environment.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tabbingsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctabbingsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Distance of the text moved by <code>\'</code> to left of current tab stop.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>This example typesets a Pascal function:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabbing}
+function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \&gt; begin \= \+ \\
+ \&gt; if \= n &gt; 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+\end{tabbing}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The output looks like this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">function fact(n : integer) : integer;
+ begin
+ if n &gt; 1 then
+ fact := n * fact(n-1);
+ else
+ fact := 1;
+ end;
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-algorithm2e"></a>
+<a name="index-algorithm2e-package"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-listings"></a>
+<a name="index-listings-package"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-minted"></a>
+<a name="index-minted-package"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-fancyvrb"></a>
+<a name="index-fancyvrb-package"></a>
+
+<p>This example is just for illustration of the environment. To actually
+typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim environment
+(see <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>) would normally be best. For pretty-printed code,
+there are quite a few packages, including <code>algorithm2e</code>,
+<code>fancyvrb</code>, <code>listings</code>, and <code>minted</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="table"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="n" rel="next">tabular</a>, Previous: <a href="#tabbing" accesskey="p" rel="prev">tabbing</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="table-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.22 <code>table</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-table"></a>
+<a name="index-table-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-tables_002c-creating"></a>
+<a name="index-creating-tables"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{table}[<var>placement</var>]
+ <var>table body</var>
+ \caption[<var>loftitle</var>]{<var>title</var>} % optional
+ \label{<var>label}</var> % also optional
+\end{table}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>A class of floats (see <a href="#Floats">Floats</a>). They cannot be split across pages
+and so they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but instead
+are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a following page.
+</p>
+<p>This example <code>table</code> environment contains a <code>tabular</code>
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{table}
+ \centering\small
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Author}}
+ &amp;\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Piece}} \\ \hline
+ Bach &amp;Cello Suite Number 1 \\
+ Beethoven &amp;Cello Sonata Number 3 \\
+ Brahms &amp;Cello Sonata Number 1
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Top cello pieces}
+ \label{tab:cello}
+\end{table}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>but you can put many different kinds of content in a <code>table</code>,
+including text, LaTeX commands, etc.
+</p>
+<p>For the possible values of <var>placement</var> and their effect on the
+float placement algorithm, see <a href="#Floats">Floats</a>.
+</p>
+<p>The table body is typeset in a <code>parbox</code> of width <code>\textwidth</code>.
+It can contain text, commands, graphics, etc.
+</p>
+<p>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see <a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a>).
+<a name="index-_005ccaption-1"></a>
+The <code>\caption</code> command is also optional. It specifies caption text
+for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional
+<var>lottitle</var> is present then that text is used in the list of tables
+instead of <var>title</var> (see <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a>).
+</p>
+<p>In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a page,
+unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{table}[b]
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{r|p{2in}} \hline
+ One &amp;The loneliest number \\
+ Two &amp;Can be as sad as one.
+ It's the loneliest number since the number one.
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Cardinal virtues}
+ \label{tab:CardinalVirtues}
+\end{table}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="tabular"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="n" rel="next">thebibliography</a>, Previous: <a href="#table" accesskey="p" rel="prev">table</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="tabular-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.23 <code>tabular</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-tabular"></a>
+<a name="index-tabular-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-lines-in-tables"></a>
+<a name="index-lining-text-up-in-tables"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}[<var>pos</var>]{<var>cols</var>}
+ <var>column 1 entry</var> &amp;<var>column 2 entry</var> ... &amp;<var>column n entry</var> \\
+ ...
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular*}{<var>width</var>}[<var>pos</var>]{<var>cols</var>}
+ <var>column 1 entry</var> &amp;<var>column 2 entry</var> ... &amp;<var>column n entry</var> \\
+ ...
+\end{tabular*}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of horizontal rows.
+Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically in columns. This
+illustrates many of the features.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textit{Player name} &amp;\textit{Career home runs} \\
+ \hline
+ Hank Aaron &amp;755 \\
+ Babe Ruth &amp;714
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar
+between them. This is specified in <code>tabular</code>&rsquo;s argument
+<code>{l|l}</code>.
+<a name="index-_0026"></a>
+Put the entries into different columns by separating them with an
+ampersand, <code>&amp;</code>. The end of each row is marked with a double
+backslash, <code>\\</code>. Put a horizontal rule below a row, after a double
+backslash, with <code>\hline</code>.
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-for-tabular"></a>
+After the last row the <code>\\</code> is optional, unless an <code>\hline</code>
+command follows to put a rule below the table.
+</p>
+<p>The required and optional arguments to <code>tabular</code> consist of:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>pos</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Optional. Specifies the table&rsquo;s vertical position. The default is to
+align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of the
+surrounding text. There are two other possible alignments: <code>t</code>
+aligns the table so its top row matches the baseline of the surrounding
+text, and <code>b</code> aligns on the bottom row.
+</p>
+<p>This only has an effect if there is other text. In the common case of a
+<code>tabular</code> alone in a <code>center</code> environment this option makes
+no difference.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>cols</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Required. Specifies the formatting of columns. It consists of a
+sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the types of
+column and intercolumn material.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A column of left-aligned items.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A column of right-aligned items.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A column of centered items.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>|</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>@{<var>text or space</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Insert <var>text or space</var> at this location in every row. The <var>text
+or space</var> material is typeset in LR mode. This text is fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>If between two columns there is no @-expression then LaTeX&rsquo;s
+<code>book</code>, <code>article</code>, and <code>report</code> classes will put on
+either side of each column a space of length <code>\tabcolsep</code>, which by
+default is 6pt. That is, by default adjacent columns are
+separated by 12pt (so <code>\tabcolsep</code> is misleadingly named
+since it is only half of the separation between tabular columns). In
+addition, a space of 6pt also comes before the first column and
+after the final column, unless you put a <code>@{...}</code> or <code>|</code>
+there.
+</p>
+<p>If you override the default and use an @-expression then LaTeX does
+not insert <code>\tabcolsep</code> so you must insert any desired space
+yourself, as in <code>@{\hspace{1em}}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>An empty expression <code>@{}</code> will eliminate the space. In
+particular, sometimes you want to eliminate the space before the first
+column or after the last one, as in the example below where the
+tabular lines need to lie on the left margin.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{flushleft}
+ \begin{tabular}{@{}l}
+ ...
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{flushleft}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The next example shows text, a decimal point between the columns,
+arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on it.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{r@{$.$}l}
+ $3$ &amp;$14$ \\
+ $9$ &amp;$80665$
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005cextracolsep"></a>
+<p>An <code>\extracolsep{<var>wd</var>}</code> command in an @-expression causes an
+extra space of width <var>wd</var> to appear to the left of all subsequent
+columns, until countermanded by another <code>\extracolsep</code>. Unlike
+ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an
+@-expression. An <code>\extracolsep</code> command can be used only in an
+@-expression in the <code>cols</code> argument. Below, LaTeX inserts the
+right amount of intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches
+wide.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular*}{4in}{l@{\extracolsep{\fill}}l}
+ Seven times down, eight times up \ldots
+ &amp;such is life!
+\end{tabular*}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>To insert commands that are automatically executed before a given
+column, load the <code>array</code> package and use the <code>&gt;{...}</code>
+specifier.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>p{<var>wd</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width <var>wd</var>, as if
+it were the argument of a <code>\parbox[t]{wd}{...}</code> command.
+</p>
+<p>A line break double backslash <code>\\</code> may not appear in the item,
+except inside an environment like <code>minipage</code>, <code>array</code>, or
+<code>tabular</code>, or inside an explicit <code>\parbox</code>, or in the scope of
+a <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>, or <code>\raggedleft</code>
+declaration (when used in a <code>p</code>-column element these declarations
+must appear inside braces, as with <code>{\centering .. \\
+..}</code>). Otherwise LaTeX will misinterpret the double backslash as
+ending the row. Instead, to get a line break in there use
+<code>\newline</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewline">\newline</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>*{<var>num</var>}{<var>cols</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Equivalent to <var>num</var> copies of <var>cols</var>, where <var>num</var> is a
+positive integer and <var>cols</var> is a list of specifiers. Thus the
+specifier <code>\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}</code> is equivalent to
+the specifier <code>\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}</code>. Note that
+<var>cols</var> may contain another <code>*</code>-expression.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><var>width</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Required for <code>tabular*</code>, not allowed for <code>tabular</code>. Specifies
+the width of the <code>tabular*</code> environment. The space between columns
+should be rubber, as with <code>@{\extracolsep{\fill}}</code>, to allow
+the table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
+are likely to get the <code>Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
+...</code> warning.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Parameters that control formatting:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\arrayrulewidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005carrayrulewidth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="tabular-arrayrulewidth"></a><p>A length that is the thickness of the rule created by <code>|</code>,
+<code>\hline</code>, and <code>\vline</code> in the <code>tabular</code> and <code>array</code>
+environments. The default is &lsquo;<samp>.4pt</samp>&rsquo;. Change it as in
+<code>\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\arraystretch</code>
+<a name="index-_005carraystretch"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="tabular-arraystrech"></a><p>A factor by which the spacing between rows in the <code>tabular</code> and
+<code>array</code> environments is multiplied. The default is &lsquo;<samp>1</samp>&rsquo;, for
+no scaling. Change it as <code>\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\doublerulesep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdoublerulesep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="tabular-doublerulesep"></a><p>A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the
+<code>||</code> specifier. The default is &lsquo;<samp>2pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tabcolsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctabcolsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="tabular-tabcolsep"></a><p>A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
+&lsquo;<samp>6pt</samp>&rsquo;. Change it with <code>\setlength</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>The following commands can be used inside the body of a <code>tabular</code>
+environment, the first two inside an entry and the second two between
+lines:
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn" accesskey="1">\multicolumn</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Make an item spanning several columns.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cvline" accesskey="2">\vline</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a vertical line.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ccline" accesskey="3">\cline</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005chline" accesskey="4">\hline</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmulticolumn"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\vline</a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up">tabular</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmulticolumn-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.23.1 <code>\multicolumn</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cmulticolumn"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\multicolumn{<var>numcols</var>}{<var>cols</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Make an <code>array</code> or <code>tabular</code> entry that spans several columns.
+The first argument <var>numcols</var> gives the number of columns to span.
+The second argument <var>cols</var> specifies the formatting of the entry,
+with <code>c</code> for centered, <code>l</code> for flush left, or <code>r</code> for
+flush right. The third argument <var>text</var> gives the contents of that
+entry.
+</p>
+<p>In this example, in the first row, the second and third columns are
+spanned by the single heading &lsquo;<samp>Name</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{lccl}
+ \textit{ID} &amp;\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &amp;\textit{Age} \\
+ \hline
+ 978-0-393-03701-2 &amp;O'Brian &amp;Patrick &amp;55 \\
+ ...
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>What counts as a column is:&nbsp;the column format specifier for the
+<code>array</code> or <code>tabular</code> environment is broken into parts, where
+each part (except the first) begins with <code>l</code>, <code>c</code>, <code>r</code>,
+or&nbsp;<code>p</code>. So from <code>\begin{tabular}{|r|ccp{1.5in}|}</code>
+the parts are <code>|r|</code>, <code>c</code>, <code>c</code>,
+and&nbsp;<code>p{1.5in}|</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The <var>cols</var> argument overrides the <code>array</code> or <code>tabular</code>
+environment&rsquo;s intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn
+entry. To affect that area, this argument can contain vertical bars
+<code>|</code> indicating the placement of vertical rules, and <code>@{...}</code>
+expressions. Thus if <var>cols</var> is &lsquo;<samp>|c|</samp>&rsquo; then this multicolumn
+entry will be centered and a vertical rule will come in the intercolumn
+area before it and after it. This table details the exact behavior.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{|cc|c|c|}
+ \multicolumn{1}{r}{w} % entry one
+ &amp;\multicolumn{1}{|r|}{x} % entry two
+ &amp;\multicolumn{1}{|r}{y} % entry three
+ &amp;z % entry four
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule because
+the <code>\multicolumn</code> has the <var>cols</var> specifier &lsquo;<samp>r</samp>&rsquo; with no
+initial vertical bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a
+vertical rule; although the first <var>cols</var> does not have an ending
+vertical bar, the second <var>cols</var> does have a starting one. Between
+entry two and entry three there is a single vertical rule; despite that
+the <var>cols</var> in both of the surrounding <code>multicolumn</code>&rsquo;s call for
+a vertical rule, you only get one rule. Between entry three and entry
+four there is no vertical rule; the default calls for one but the
+<var>cols</var> in the entry three <code>\multicolumn</code> leaves it out, and
+that takes precedence. Finally, following entry four there is a
+vertical rule because of the default.
+</p>
+<p>The number of spanned columns <var>numcols</var> can be 1. Besides giving
+the ability to change the horizontal alignment, this also is useful to
+override for one row the <code>tabular</code> definition&rsquo;s default intercolumn
+area specification, including the placement of vertical rules.
+</p>
+<p>In the example below, in the <code>tabular</code> definition the first column
+is specified to default to left justified but in the first row the entry
+is centered with <code>\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}</code>.
+Also in the first row, the second and third columns are spanned by a
+single entry with <code>\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}}</code>,
+overriding the specification to center those two columns on the page
+range en-dash.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{l|r@{--}l}
+ \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}
+ &amp;multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}} \\ \hline
+ Baroque &amp;1600 &amp;1760 \\
+ Classical &amp;1730 &amp;1820 \\
+ Romantic &amp;1780 &amp;1910 \\
+ Impressionistic &amp;1875 &amp;1925
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Although the <code>tabular</code> specification by default puts a vertical
+rule between the first and second columns, no such vertical rule appears
+in the first row here. That&rsquo;s because there is no vertical bar in the
+<var>cols</var> part of the first row&rsquo;s first <code>\multicolumn</code> command.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cvline"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ccline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\cline</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\multicolumn</a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up">tabular</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cvline-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.23.2 <code>\vline</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cvline"></a>
+<p>Draw a vertical line in a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment
+extending the full height and depth of an entry&rsquo;s row. Can also be
+used in an @-expression, although its synonym vertical
+bar&nbsp;<code>|</code> is more common. This command is rarely used in the
+body of a table; typically a table&rsquo;s vertical lines are specified in
+<code>tabular</code>&rsquo;s <var>cols</var> argument and overridden as needed with
+<code>\multicolumn</code> (see <a href="#tabular">tabular</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The example below illustrates some pitfalls. In the first row&rsquo;s second
+entry the <code>\hfill</code> moves the <code>\vline</code> to the left edge of the
+cell. But that is different than putting it halfway between the two
+columns, so between the first and second columns there are two vertical
+rules, with the one from the <code>{c|cc}</code> specifier coming before the
+one produced by the <code>\vline\hfill</code>. In contrast, the first row&rsquo;s
+third entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two
+columns. In the second row, the <code>ghi</code> is the widest entry in its
+column so in the <code>\vline\hfill</code> the <code>\hfill</code> has no effect and
+the vertical line in that entry appears immediately next to the
+<code>g</code>, with no whitespace.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{c|cc}
+ x &amp;\vline\hfill y &amp;\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\ % row 1
+ abc &amp;def &amp;\vline\hfill ghi % row 2
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ccline"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005chline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\hline</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cvline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\vline</a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up">tabular</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ccline-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.23.3 <code>\cline</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005ccline"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\cline{<var>i</var>-<var>j</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In an <code>array</code> or <code>tabular</code> environment, draw a horizontal rule
+beginning in column&nbsp;<var>i</var> and ending in column&nbsp;<var>j</var>. The
+dash, <code>-</code>, must appear in the mandatory argument. To span a single
+column use the number twice, as with <code>\cline{2-2}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second
+rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the
+third and fourth columns. The two lines are side-by-side, at the same
+height.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{llrr}
+ a &amp;b &amp;c &amp;d \\ \cline{1-1} \cline{3-4}
+ e &amp;f &amp;g &amp;h
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005chline"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\cline</a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up">tabular</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005chline-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.23.4 <code>\hline</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005chline"></a>
+
+<p>Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing <code>tabular</code> or
+<code>array</code> environment. It&rsquo;s most commonly used to draw a line at the
+top, bottom, and between the rows of a table.
+</p>
+<p>In this example the top of the table has two horizontal rules, one above
+the other, that span both columns. The bottom of the table has a single
+rule spanning both columns. Because of the <code>\hline</code>, the
+<code>tabular</code> second row&rsquo;s line ending double backslash&nbsp;<code>\\</code>
+is required.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{ll} \hline\hline
+ Baseball &amp;Red Sox \\
+ Basketball &amp;Celtics \\ \hline
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="thebibliography"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#theorem" accesskey="n" rel="next">theorem</a>, Previous: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="p" rel="prev">tabular</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="thebibliography-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.24 <code>thebibliography</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-thebibliography"></a>
+<a name="index-thebibliography-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-bibliography_002c-creating-_0028manually_0029"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{thebibliography}{<var>widest-label</var>}
+ \bibitem[<var>label</var>]{<var>cite_key}</var>
+ ...
+\end{thebibliography}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a bibliography or reference list. There are two ways to produce
+bibliographic lists. This environment is suitable when you have only a
+few references and can maintain the list by hand. See <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a>
+for a more sophisticated approach.
+</p>
+<p>This shows the environment with two entries.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">This work is based on \cite{latexdps}.
+Together they are \cite{latexdps, texbook}.
+ ...
+\begin{thebibliography}{9}
+\bibitem{latexdps}
+ Leslie Lamport.
+ \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+\bibitem{texbook}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit{The \TeX book}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end{thebibliography}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This styles the first reference as &lsquo;<samp>[1] Leslie ...</samp>&rsquo;, and so that
+<code>\cite{latexdps}</code> produces the matching &lsquo;<samp>... based on [1]</samp>&rsquo;.
+The second <code>\cite</code> produces &lsquo;<samp>[1, 2]</samp>&rsquo;. You must compile the
+document twice to resolve these references.
+</p>
+<p>The mandatory argument <var>widest-label</var> is text that, when typeset, is
+as wide as the widest item label produced by the <code>\bibitem</code>
+commands. The tradition is to use <code>9</code> for bibliographies with less
+than 10 references, <code>99</code> for ones with less than 100, etc.
+</p>
+<p>The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as &lsquo;<samp>Bibliography</samp>&rsquo;.
+To change it there are two cases. In the <samp>book</samp> and <samp>report</samp>
+classes, where the top level sectioning is <code>\chapter</code> and the
+default title is &lsquo;<samp>Bibliography</samp>&rsquo;, that title is in the macro
+<code>\bibname</code>. For <samp>article</samp>, where the class&rsquo;s top level
+sectioning is <code>\section</code> and the default is &lsquo;<samp>References</samp>&rsquo;, the
+title is in macro <code>\refname</code>. Change it by redefining the command,
+as with <code>\renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}</code> after
+<code>\begin{document}</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-babel-1"></a>
+<a name="index-babel-package-1"></a>
+
+<p>Language support packages such as <samp>babel</samp> will automatically
+redefine <code>\refname</code> or <code>\bibname</code> to fit the selected
+language.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem" accesskey="1">\bibitem</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Specify a bibliography item.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ccite" accesskey="2">\cite</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Refer to a bibliography item.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnocite" accesskey="3">\nocite</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Include an item in the bibliography.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Using-BibTeX" accesskey="4">Using BibTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Automatic generation of bibliographies.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cbibitem"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ccite" accesskey="n" rel="next">\cite</a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up">thebibliography</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cbibitem-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.24.1 <code>\bibitem</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cbibitem"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\bibitem{<var>cite_key</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\bibitem[<var>label</var>]{<var>cite_key</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Generate an entry labeled by <var>label</var>. The default is for LaTeX to
+generates a number using the <code>enumi</code> counter. The <em>citation key</em>
+<a name="index-citation-key"></a>
+<var>cite_key</var> is a string of
+letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but not comma).
+</p>
+<p>See <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a> for an example.
+</p>
+<p>The optional <var>label</var> changes the default label from an integer to the
+given string. With this
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{thebibliography}
+\bibitem[Lamport 1993]{latexdps}
+ Leslie Lamport.
+ \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+\bibitem{texbook}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit{The \TeX book}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end{thebibliography}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>the first entry will be styled as &lsquo;<samp>[Lamport 1993] Leslie ...</samp>&rsquo; (The
+amount of horizontal space that LaTeX leaves for the label depends on
+the <var>widest-label</var> argument of the <code>thebibliography</code>
+environment; see <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>.) Similarly, <code>... based on
+\cite{latexdps}</code> will produce &lsquo;<samp>... based on [Lamport 1994]</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>If you mix <code>\bibitem</code> entries having a <var>label</var> with those that
+do not then LaTeX will number the unlabelled ones sequentially. In
+the example above the <code>texbook</code> entry will appear as &lsquo;<samp>[1]
+Donald ...</samp>&rsquo;, despite that it is the second entry.
+</p>
+<p>If you use the same <var>cite_key</var> twice then you get &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX
+Warning: There were multiply-defined labels</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>Under the hood, LaTeX remembers the <var>cite_key</var> and <var>label</var>
+information because <code>\bibitem</code> writes it to the auxiliary file
+<samp><var>filename</var>.aux</samp>. For instance, the above example causes
+<code>\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993}</code> and
+<code>\bibcite{texbook}{1}</code> to appear in that file. The <samp>.aux</samp>
+file is read by the <code>\begin{document}</code> command and then the
+information is available for <code>\cite</code> commands. This explains why
+you need to run LaTeX twice to resolve references: once to write it
+out and once to read it in.
+</p>
+<p>Because of this two-pass algorithm, when you add a <code>\bibitem</code> or
+change its <var>cite_key</var> you may get &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may
+have changed. Rerun to get cross-references right</samp>&rsquo;. Fix it by
+recompiling.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ccite"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnocite" accesskey="n" rel="next">\nocite</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\bibitem</a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up">thebibliography</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ccite-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.24.2 <code>\cite</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005ccite"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\cite{<var>keys</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\cite[<var>subcite</var>]{<var>keys</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Generate as output a citation to the references associated with
+<var>keys</var>. The mandatory <var>keys</var> is a citation key, or a
+comma-separated list of citation keys (see <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">The ultimate source is \cite{texbook}.
+ ...
+\begin{thebibliography}
+\bibitem{texbook}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit{The \TeX book}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end{thebibliography}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>produces output like &lsquo;<samp>... source is [1]</samp>&rsquo;. (You can change the
+appearance of the citation with bibliography styles. More is in
+<a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a>.)
+</p>
+<p>The optional argument <var>subcite</var> is appended to the citation. For
+example, <code>See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook}</code> might produce
+&lsquo;<samp>See 14.3 in [1, p.&nbsp;314]</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>In addition to what appears in the output, <code>\cite</code> writes
+information to the auxiliary file <samp><var>filename</var>.aux</samp>. For
+instance, <code>\cite{latexdps}</code> writes &lsquo;<samp>\citation{latexdps}</samp>&rsquo;
+to that file. This information is used by BibTeX to include in your
+reference list only those works that you have actually cited; see
+<a href="#g_t_005cnocite">\nocite</a> also.
+</p>
+<p>If <var>keys</var> is not in your bibliography information then you get
+&lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references</samp>&rsquo;, and in the output
+the citation shows as a boldface question mark between square brackets.
+There are two possible causes. If you have mistyped something, as in
+<code>\cite{texbok}</code> then you need to correct the spelling. On the
+other hand, if you have just added or modified the bibliographic
+information and so changed the <samp>.aux</samp> file (see <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>) then
+the fix may be to run LaTeX again.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnocite"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Using-BibTeX" accesskey="n" rel="next">Using BibTeX</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccite" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\cite</a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up">thebibliography</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnocite-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.24.3 <code>\nocite</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cnocite"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"><code>\nocite{<var>keys</var>}</code>
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produces no output but writes <var>keys</var> to the auxiliary file
+<samp><var>doc-filename</var>.aux</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>The mandatory argument <var>keys</var> is a comma-separated list of one or
+more citation keys (see <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>). This information is used by
+BibTeX to include these works in your reference list even though you
+have not cited them (see <a href="#g_t_005ccite">\cite</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Using-BibTeX"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnocite" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\nocite</a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up">thebibliography</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Using-BibTeX-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.24.4 Using BibTeX</h4>
+
+<a name="index-using-BibTeX"></a>
+<a name="index-bibTeX_002c-using"></a>
+<a name="index-bibliography_002c-creating-_0028automatically_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cbibliographystyle"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cbibliography"></a>
+
+<p>As described in <code>thebibliography</code> (see <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>), a
+sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the
+BibTeX program. This is only an introduction; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
+</p>
+<p>With BibTeX, you don&rsquo;t use <code>thebibliography</code>
+(see <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>). Instead, include these lines.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\bibliographystyle{<var>bibstyle</var>}
+\bibliography{<var>bibfile1</var>, <var>bibfile2</var>, ...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <var>bibstyle</var> refers to a file <samp><var>bibstyle</var>.bst</samp>, which
+defines how your citations will look. The standard <var>bibstyle</var>&rsquo;s
+distributed with BibTeX are:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>alpha</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication.
+The bibliographic items are sorted alphabetically.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>plain</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Labels are integers.
+Sort the bibliographic items alphabetically.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>unsrt</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Like <code>plain</code>, but entries are in order of citation.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>abbrv</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Like <code>plain</code>, but more compact labels.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Many, many other BibTeX style files exist,
+tailored to the demands of various publications. See CTAN&rsquo;s listing
+<a href="http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib">http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib</a>.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\bibliography</code> command is what actually produces the
+bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
+files named <samp><var>bibfile1</var>.bib</samp>, <samp><var>bibfile2</var>.bib</samp>,
+&hellip; These contain your database in BibTeX format. This shows a
+typical couple of entries in that format.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">@book{texbook,
+ title = {The {{\TeX}}book},
+ author = {D.E. Knuth},
+ isbn = {0201134489},
+ series = {Computers \&amp; typesetting},
+ year = {1983},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley}
+}
+@book{sexbook,
+ author = {W.H. Masters and V.E. Johnson},
+ title = {Human Sexual Response},
+ year = {1966},
+ publisher = {Bantam Books}
+}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Only the bibliographic entries referred to via <code>\cite</code> and
+<code>\nocite</code> will be listed in the document&rsquo;s bibliography. Thus you
+can keep all your sources together in one file, or a small number of
+files, and rely on BibTeX to include in this document only those that
+you used.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="theorem"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#titlepage" accesskey="n" rel="next">titlepage</a>, Previous: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="p" rel="prev">thebibliography</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="theorem-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.25 <code>theorem</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-theorem"></a>
+<a name="index-theorem-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-theorems_002c-typesetting"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{theorem}
+ <var>theorem body</var>
+\end{theorem}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produces &lsquo;<samp>Theorem <var>n</var></samp>&rsquo; in boldface followed by <var>theorem
+body</var> in italics. The numbering possibilities for <var>n</var> are described under
+<code>\newtheorem</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newtheorem{lem}{Lemma} % in preamble
+\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}
+ ...
+\begin{lem} % in document body
+ text of lemma
+\end{lem}
+
+The next result follows immediately.
+\begin{thm}[Gauss] % put `Gauss' in parens after theorem head
+ text of theorem
+\end{thm}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsmath-4"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package-4"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsthm"></a>
+<a name="index-amsthm-package"></a>
+
+<p>Most new documents use the packages <code>amsthm</code> and <code>amsmath</code>
+from the American Mathematical Society. Among other things these
+packages include a large number of options for theorem environments,
+such as styling options.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="titlepage"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#verbatim" accesskey="n" rel="next">verbatim</a>, Previous: <a href="#theorem" accesskey="p" rel="prev">theorem</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="titlepage-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.26 <code>titlepage</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-titlepage"></a>
+<a name="index-titlepage-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-making-a-title-page"></a>
+<a name="index-title-pages_002c-creating"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{titlepage}
+ ... text and spacing ...
+\end{titlepage}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading and
+with succeeding pages numbered starting with page one.
+</p>
+<p>In this example all formatting, including vertical spacing, is left to
+the author.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{titlepage}
+\vspace*{\stretch{1}}
+\begin{center}
+ {\huge\bfseries Thesis \\[1ex]
+ title} \\[6.5ex]
+ {\large\bfseries Author name} \\
+ \vspace{4ex}
+ Thesis submitted to \\[5pt]
+ \textit{University name} \\[2cm]
+ in partial fulfilment for the award of the degree of \\[2cm]
+ \textsc{\Large Doctor of Philosophy} \\[2ex]
+ \textsc{\large Mathematics} \\[12ex]
+ \vfill
+ Department of Mathematics \\
+ Address \\
+ \vfill
+ \today
+\end{center}
+\vspace{\stretch{2}}
+\end{titlepage}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>To instead produce a standard title page without a <code>titlepage</code>
+environment, use <code>\maketitle</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="verbatim"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#verse" accesskey="n" rel="next">verse</a>, Previous: <a href="#titlepage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">titlepage</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="verbatim-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.27 <code>verbatim</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-verbatim"></a>
+<a name="index-verbatim-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-verbatim-text"></a>
+<a name="index-simulating-typed-text"></a>
+<a name="index-typed-text_002c-simulating"></a>
+<a name="index-code_002c-typesetting"></a>
+<a name="index-computer-programs_002c-typesetting"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{verbatim}
+<var>literal-text</var>
+\end{verbatim}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>A paragraph-making environment in which LaTeX produces as output
+exactly what you type as input. For instance inside <var>literal-text</var>
+the backslash&nbsp;<code>\</code> character does not start commands, it
+produces a printed &lsquo;<samp>\</samp>&rsquo;, and carriage returns and blanks are taken
+literally. The output appears in a monospaced typewriter-like font
+(<code>\tt</code>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{verbatim}
+Symbol swearing: %&amp;$#?!.
+\end{verbatim}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The only restriction on <code>literal-text</code> is that it cannot include
+the string <code>\end{verbatim}</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-cprotect"></a>
+<a name="index-cprotect-package"></a>
+
+<p>You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros, for
+instance in the argument to a <code>\section</code>. This is not the same as
+commands being fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>), instead it just cannot appear
+there. (But the <code>cprotect</code> package can help with this.)
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-listings-1"></a>
+<a name="index-listings-package-1"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-minted-1"></a>
+<a name="index-minted-package-1"></a>
+
+<p>One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code. There are
+packages that are an improvement the <code>verbatim</code> environment. For
+instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external
+files, or parts of those files. Such packages include <code>listings</code>,
+and <code>minted</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-fancyvrb-1"></a>
+<a name="index-fancyvrb-package-1"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-verbatimbox"></a>
+<a name="index-verbatimbox-package"></a>
+
+<p>A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments is
+<code>fancyvrb</code>. Another is <code>verbatimbox</code>.
+</p>
+<p>For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cverb" accesskey="1">\verb</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">The macro form of the <code>verbatim</code> environment.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cverb"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#verbatim" accesskey="u" rel="up">verbatim</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cverb-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">8.27.1 <code>\verb</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cverb"></a>
+<a name="index-verbatim-text_002c-inline"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\verb <var>char</var> <var>literal-text</var> <var>char</var>
+\verb* <var>char</var> <var>literal-text</var> <var>char</var>
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Typeset <var>literal-text</var> as it is input, including special characters
+and spaces, using the typewriter (<code>\tt</code>) font.
+</p>
+<p>This example shows two different invocations of <code>\verb</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">This is \verb!literally! the biggest pumpkin ever.
+And this is the best squash, \verb+literally!+
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The first <code>\verb</code> has its <var>literal-text</var> surrounded with
+exclamation point, <code>!</code>. The second instead uses plus, <code>+</code>,
+because the exclamation point is part of <code>literal-text</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The single-character delimiter <var>char</var> surrounds
+<var>literal-text</var>&nbsp;&mdash; it must be the same character before and
+after. No spaces come between <code>\verb</code> or <code>\verb*</code> and
+<var>char</var>, or between <var>char</var> and <var>literal-text</var>, or between
+<var>literal-text</var> and the second occurrence of <var>char</var> (the synopsis
+shows a space only to distinguish one component from the other). The
+delimiter must not appear in <var>literal-text</var>. The <var>literal-text</var>
+cannot include a line break.
+</p>
+<a name="index-visible-space"></a>
+<p>The <code>*</code>-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible
+space character.
+</p>
+<p>The output from this will include a character showing the spaces.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-url"></a>
+<a name="index-url-package"></a>
+
+<p>For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package <code>url</code>
+provides an option that is better than the <code>\verb</code> command, since
+it allows line breaks.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-listings-2"></a>
+<a name="index-listings-package-2"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-minted-2"></a>
+<a name="index-minted-package-2"></a>
+
+<p>For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
+<code>\verb</code>. One is <samp>listings</samp>, another is <samp>minted</samp>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-cprotect-1"></a>
+<a name="index-cprotect-package-1"></a>
+
+<p>You cannot use <code>\verb</code> in the argument to a macro, for instance in
+the argument to a <code>\section</code>. It is not a question of <code>\verb</code>
+being fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>), instead it just cannot appear there.
+(But the <code>cprotect</code> package can help with this.)
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="verse"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#verbatim" accesskey="p" rel="prev">verbatim</a>, Up: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="u" rel="up">Environments</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="verse-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.28 <code>verse</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-verse"></a>
+<a name="index-verse-environment"></a>
+
+<a name="index-poetry_002c-an-environment-for"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{verse}
+ <var>line1</var> \\
+ <var>line2</var> \\
+ ...
+\end{verse}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>An environment for poetry.
+</p>
+<p>Here are two lines from Shakespeare&rsquo;s Romeo and Juliet.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Then plainly know my heart's dear love is set \\
+On the fair daughter of rich Capulet.
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-for-verse"></a>
+<p>Separate the lines of each stanza with <code>\\</code>, and use one or more
+blank lines to separate the stanzas.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{verse}
+\makebox[\linewidth][c]{\textit{Shut Not Your Doors} ---Walt Whitman}
+ \\[1\baselineskip]
+Shut not your doors to me proud libraries, \\
+For that which was lacking on all your well-fill'd shelves, \\
+\qquad yet needed most, I bring, \\
+Forth from the war emerging, a book I have made, \\
+The words of my book nothing, the drift of it every thing, \\
+A book separate, not link'd with the rest nor felt by the intellect, \\
+But you ye untold latencies will thrill to every page.
+\end{verse}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The output has margins indented on the left and the right, paragraphs
+are not indented, and the text is not right-justified.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Line-breaking"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="n" rel="next">Page breaking</a>, Previous: <a href="#Environments" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Environments</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Line-breaking-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">9 Line breaking</h2>
+
+<a name="index-line-breaking"></a>
+<a name="index-breaking-lines"></a>
+
+<p>The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to
+translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To
+produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines
+(and these lines must be broken into pages).
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking in the text body for
+you but in some environments you manually force line breaks.
+</p>
+<p>A common workflow is to get a final version of the document content
+before taking a final pass through and considering line breaks (and page
+breaks). This differs from word processing, where you are formatting
+text as you input it. Putting these off until the end prevents a lot of
+fiddling with breaks that will change anyway.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005c_005c" accesskey="1">\\</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a new line.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr" accesskey="2">\obeycr &amp; \restorecr</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Make each input line start a new output line.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="3">\newline</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Break the line
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="4">\- (hyphenation)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Insert explicit hyphenation.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary" accesskey="5">\discretionary</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Explicit control of the hyphen character.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" accesskey="6">\fussy &amp; \sloppy</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Be more or less particular with line breaking.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="7">\hyphenation</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak" accesskey="8">\linebreak &amp; \nolinebreak</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Forcing &amp; avoiding line breaks.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005c_005c"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr" accesskey="n" rel="next">\obeycr &amp; \restorecr</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005c_005c-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.1 <code>\\</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-force-line-break"></a>
+<a name="index-new-line_002c-starting"></a>
+<a name="index-line-break_002c-forcing"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\\
+\\[<var>morespace</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\\*
+\\*[<var>morespace</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>End the current line. The optional argument <var>morespace</var> specifies
+extra vertical space to be inserted before the next line. This is a
+rubber length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>) and can be negative. The text before
+the line break is set at its normal length, that is, it is not stretched
+to fill out the line width. This command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The starred form, <code>\\*</code>, tells LaTeX not to start a new page
+between the two lines, by issuing a <code>\nobreak</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\title{My story: \\[0.25in]
+ a tale of woe}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in LaTeX. In
+particular, don&rsquo;t start new paragraphs with <code>\\</code>. Instead leave a
+blank line between the two paragraphs. And don&rsquo;t put in a sequence of
+<code>\\</code>&rsquo;s to make vertical space. Instead use
+<code>\vspace{<var>length</var>}</code>, or
+<code>\leavevmode\vspace{<var>length</var>}</code>, or
+<code>\vspace*{<var>length</var>}</code> if you want the space to not be thrown
+out at the top of a new page (see <a href="#g_t_005cvspace">\vspace</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\\</code> command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text
+such as in a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment or in an
+equation environment.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\\</code> command is a synonym for <code>\newline</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cnewline">\newline</a>) under ordinary circumstances (an example of an
+exception is the <code>p{...}</code> column in a <code>tabular</code>
+environment; see <a href="#tabular">tabular</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\\</code> command is a macro, and its definition changes by context
+so that its definition in normal text, a <code>center</code> environment, a
+<code>flushleft</code> environment, and a <code>tabular</code> are all different.
+In normal text when it forces a linebreak it is essentially a shorthand
+for <code>\newline</code>. It does not end horizontal mode or end the
+paragraph, it just inserts some glue and penalties so that when the
+paragraph does end a linebreak will occur at that point, with the short
+line padded with white space.
+</p>
+<p>You get &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: There's no line here to end</samp>&rsquo; if you use
+<code>\\</code> to ask for a new line, rather than to end the current line.
+An example is if you have <code>\begin{document}\\</code> or, more likely,
+something like this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+ \\
+ In that vertical space put your mark.
+ \end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Fix it by replacing the double backslash with something like
+<code>\vspace{\baselineskip}</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newline</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_005c" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\\</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.2 <code>\obeycr</code> &amp; <code>\restorecr</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cobeycr"></a>
+<a name="index-_005crestorecr"></a>
+<a name="index-new-line_002c-output-as-input"></a>
+
+<p>The <code>\obeycr</code> command makes a return in the input file (&lsquo;<samp>^^M</samp>&rsquo;,
+internally) the same as <code>\\</code>, followed by <code>\relax</code>. So each
+new line in the input will also be a new line in the output. The
+<code>\restorecr</code> command restores normal line-breaking behavior.
+</p>
+<p>This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code.
+See <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a> instead.
+</p>
+<p>With LaTeX&rsquo;s usual defaults, this
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">aaa
+bbb
+
+\obeycr
+ccc
+ddd
+ eee
+
+\restorecr
+fff
+ggg
+
+hhh
+iii
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>produces output like this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"> aaa bbb
+ ccc
+ddd
+eee
+
+fff ggg
+ hhh iii
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The indents are paragraph indents.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewline"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="n" rel="next">\- (hyphenation)</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\obeycr &amp; \restorecr</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewline-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.3 <code>\newline</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cnewline"></a>
+<a name="index-new-line_002c-starting-_0028paragraph-mode_0029"></a>
+
+<p>In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify
+the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph mode
+(see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>), the <code>\newline</code> command is equivalent to
+double-backslash (see <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>). This command is fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>However, the two commands are different inside a <code>tabular</code> or
+<code>array</code> environment. In a column with a specifier producing a
+paragraph box such as typically <code>p{...}</code>, <code>\newline</code> will
+insert a line end inside of the column; that is, it does not break the
+entire tabular row. To break the entire row use <code>\\</code> or its
+equivalent <code>\tabularnewline</code>.
+</p>
+<p>This will print &lsquo;<samp>Name:</samp>&rsquo; and &lsquo;<samp>Address:</samp>&rsquo; as two lines in a
+single cell of the table.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{p{1in}{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
+ Name: \newline Address: &amp;Date: \\ \hline
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The &lsquo;<samp>Date:</samp>&rsquo; will be baseline-aligned with &lsquo;<samp>Name:</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary" accesskey="n" rel="next">\discretionary</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newline</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005c_002d-_0028discretionary-hyphen_0029"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.4 <code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen)</h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-hyphenation_002c-forcing"></a>
+
+<p>Tell LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that point. When you
+insert <code>\-</code> commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
+those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that LaTeX
+might otherwise have chosen. This command is robust (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct
+hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The
+<code>\-</code> command is for exceptional cases.
+</p>
+<p>For example, LaTeX does not ordinarily hyphenate words containing a
+hyphen. Below, the long and hyphenated word means LaTeX has to put
+in unacceptably large spaces to set the narrow column.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{rp{1.75in}}
+ Isaac Asimov &amp;The strain of
+ anti-intellectualism
+ % an\-ti-in\-tel\-lec\-tu\-al\-ism
+ has been a constant thread winding its way through our
+ political and cultural life, nurtured by
+ the false notion that democracy means that
+ `my ignorance is just as good as your knowledge'.
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Commenting out the third line and uncommenting the fourth makes a much
+better fit.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\-</code> command only allows LaTeX to break there, it does not
+require that it break there. You can insist on a split with something
+like <code>Hef-\linebreak feron</code>. Of course, if you later change the
+text then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
+care.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cdiscretionary"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" accesskey="n" rel="next">\fussy &amp; \sloppy</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\- (hyphenation)</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cdiscretionary-_0028generalized-hyphenation-point_0029"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.5 <code>\discretionary</code> (generalized hyphenation point)</h3>
+<a name="index-hyphenation_002c-discretionary"></a>
+<a name="index-discretionary-hyphenation"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\discretionary{<var>pre-break</var>}{<var>post-break</var>}{<var>no-break</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Handle word changes around hyphens. This command is not often used in
+LaTeX documents.
+</p>
+<p>If a line break occurs at the point where <code>\discretionary</code> appears
+then TeX puts <var>pre-break</var> at the end of the current line and puts
+<var>post-break</var> at the start of the next line. If there is no line
+break here then TeX puts <var>no-break</var>
+</p>
+<p>In &lsquo;<samp>difficult</samp>&rsquo; the three letters <code>ffi</code> form a ligature. But
+TeX can nonetheless break between the two f&rsquo;s with this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">di\discretionary{f-}{fi}{ffi}cult
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Note that users do not have to do this. It is typically handled
+automatically by TeX&rsquo;s hyphenation algorithm.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="n" rel="next">\hyphenation</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\discretionary</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.6 <code>\fussy</code> &amp; <code>\sloppy</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cfussy"></a>
+<a name="index-_005csloppy"></a>
+<a name="index-line-breaks_002c-changing"></a>
+
+<p>Declarations to make TeX more picky or less picky about line
+breaking. Declaring <code>\fussy</code> usually avoids too much space between
+words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. Conversely,
+<code>\sloppy</code> avoids overfull boxes while suffering loose interword
+spacing.
+</p>
+<p>The default is <code>\fussy</code>. Line breaking in a paragraph is
+controlled by whichever declaration is current at the blank line, or
+<code>\par</code>, or displayed equation ending that paragraph. So to affect
+the line breaks, include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of
+the command.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#sloppypar" accesskey="1">sloppypar</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Environment version of \sloppy command.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="sloppypar"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" accesskey="u" rel="up">\fussy &amp; \sloppy</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="sloppypar-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.6.1 <code>sloppypar</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-sloppypar"></a>
+<a name="index-sloppypar-environment"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{sloppypar}
+ ... paragraphs ...
+\end{sloppypar}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Typeset the paragraphs with <code>\sloppy</code> in effect (see <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">\fussy &amp; \sloppy</a>). Use this to locally adjust line breaking, to avoid
+&lsquo;<samp>Overfull box</samp>&rsquo; or &lsquo;<samp>Underfull box</samp>&rsquo; errors.
+</p>
+<p>The example is simple.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{sloppypar}
+ Her plan for the morning thus settled, she sat quietly down to her
+ book after breakfast, resolving to remain in the same place and the
+ same employment till the clock struck one; and from habitude very
+ little incommoded by the remarks and ejaculations of Mrs.\ Allen,
+ whose vacancy of mind and incapacity for thinking were such, that
+ as she never talked a great deal, so she could never be entirely
+ silent; and, therefore, while she sat at her work, if she lost her
+ needle or broke her thread, if she heard a carriage in the street,
+ or saw a speck upon her gown, she must observe it aloud, whether
+ there were anyone at leisure to answer her or not.
+\end{sloppypar}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005chyphenation"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak" accesskey="n" rel="next">\linebreak &amp; \nolinebreak</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\fussy &amp; \sloppy</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005chyphenation-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.7 <code>\hyphenation</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005chyphenation"></a>
+<a name="index-hyphenation_002c-defining"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\hyphenation{<var>word1</var> ...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Declares allowed hyphenation points within the words in the list. The
+words in that list are separated by spaces. Show permitted points for
+hyphenation with a dash character, <code>-</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Here is an example:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\hyphenation{hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Use lowercase letters. TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches
+exactly. Multiple <code>\hyphenation</code> commands accumulate.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hyphenation</a>, Up: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Line breaking</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.8 <code>\linebreak</code> &amp; <code>\nolinebreak</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005clinebreak"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnolinebreak"></a>
+<a name="index-line-breaks_002c-forcing"></a>
+<a name="index-line-breaks_002c-preventing"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\linebreak
+\linebreak[<var>zero-to-four</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or one of these.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\nolinebreak
+\nolinebreak[<var>zero-to-four</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Encourage or discourage a line break. The optional <var>zero-to-four</var>
+is an integer that allows you to soften the instruction. The default is
+4, so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force
+or prevent the break. But for instance, <code>\nolinebreak[1]</code> is a
+suggestion that another place may be better. The higher the number, the
+more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Here we tell LaTeX that a good place to put a linebreak is after the
+standard legal text.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\boilerplatelegal{} \linebreak[2]
+We especially encourage applications from members of traditionally
+underrepresented groups.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>When you issue <code>\linebreak</code>, the spaces in the line are stretched
+out so that it extends to the right margin. See <a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a>
+and&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005cnewline">\newline</a> to have the spaces not stretched out.
+</p>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Page-breaking"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Footnotes</a>, Previous: <a href="#Line-breaking" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Line breaking</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Page-breaking-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">10 Page breaking</h2>
+
+<a name="index-page-breaking"></a>
+<a name="index-breaking-pages"></a>
+
+<p>Ordinarily LaTeX automatically takes care of breaking output into
+pages with its usual aplomb. But if you are writing commands, or
+tweaking the final version of a document, then you may need to
+understand how to influence its actions.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX&rsquo;s algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
+than just waiting until there is enough material to fill a page and
+outputting the result. Instead, LaTeX typesets more material than
+would fit on the page and then chooses a break that is optimal in some
+way (it has the smallest badness). An example of the advantage of this
+approach is that if the page has some vertical space that can be
+stretched or shrunk, such as with rubber lengths between paragraphs,
+then LaTeX can use that to avoid widow lines (where a new page starts
+with the last line of a paragraph; LaTeX can squeeze the extra line
+onto the first page) and orphans (where the first line of paragraph is
+at the end of a page; LaTeX can stretch the material of the first
+page so the extra line falls on the second page). Another example is
+where LaTeX uses available vertical shrinkage to fit on a page not
+just the header for a new section but also the first two lines of that
+section.
+</p>
+<p>But LaTeX does not optimize over the entire document&rsquo;s set of page
+breaks. So it can happen that the first page break is great but the
+second one is lousy; to break the current page LaTeX doesn&rsquo;t look as
+far ahead as the next page break. So occasionally you may want to
+influence page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.
+</p>
+<p>See <a href="#Layout">Layout</a> for more material that is relevant to page breaking.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage" accesskey="1">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a new page; eject floats.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage" accesskey="2">\newpage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Start a new page.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage" accesskey="3">\enlargethispage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Enlarge the current page a bit.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak" accesskey="4">\pagebreak &amp; \nopagebreak</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Forcing &amp; avoiding page breaks.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newpage</a>, Up: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page breaking</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">10.1 <code>\clearpage</code> &amp; <code>\cleardoublepage</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cclearpage"></a>
+<a name="index-flushing-floats-and-starting-a-page"></a>
+<a name="index-starting-a-new-page-and-clearing-floats"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccleardoublepage"></a>
+<a name="index-starting-on-a-right_002dhand-page"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\clearpage
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\cleardoublepage
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>End the current page and output all of the pending floating figures and
+tables (see <a href="#Floats">Floats</a>). If there are too many floats to fit on the
+page then LaTeX will put in extra pages containing only floats. In
+two-sided printing, <code>\cleardoublepage</code> also makes the next page of
+content a right-hand page, an odd-numbered page, if necessary inserting
+a blank page. The <code>\clearpage</code> command is robust while
+<code>\cleardoublepage</code> is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX&rsquo;s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\cleardoublepage</code> command will put in a blank page, but it
+will have the running headers and footers. To get a really blank
+page, use this command.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage
+\newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{%
+ \clearpage
+ {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}%
+}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>If you want LaTeX&rsquo;s standard <code>\chapter</code> command to do this then
+add the line <code>\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The command <code>\newpage</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>) also ends the current
+page, but without clearing pending floats. And, if LaTeX is in
+two-column mode then <code>\newpage</code> ends the current column while
+<code>\clearpage</code> and <code>\cleardoublepage</code> end the current page.
+</p>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewpage"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage" accesskey="n" rel="next">\enlargethispage</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</a>, Up: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page breaking</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewpage-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">10.2 <code>\newpage</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cnewpage"></a>
+<a name="index-new-page_002c-starting"></a>
+<a name="index-starting-a-new-page"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newpage
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>End the current page. This command is robust (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX&rsquo;s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</p>
+<p>While the commands <code>\clearpage</code> and <code>\cleardoublepage</code> also
+end the current page, in addition they clear pending floats
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</a>). And, if LaTeX is in
+two-column mode then <code>\clearpage</code> and <code>\cleardoublepage</code> end
+the current page, possibly leaving an empty column, while
+<code>\newpage</code> only ends the current column.
+</p>
+<p>In contrast with <code>\pagebreak</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak &amp; \nopagebreak</a>),
+the <code>\newpage</code> command will cause the new page to start right where
+requested. This
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+continent,
+\newpage
+\noindent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the
+proposition that all men are created equal.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>makes a new page start after &lsquo;<samp>continent,</samp>&rsquo; and the cut-off line is
+not right justified. In addition, <code>\newpage</code> does not vertically
+stretch out the page, as <code>\pagebreak</code> does.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cenlargethispage"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak" accesskey="n" rel="next">\pagebreak &amp; \nopagebreak</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newpage</a>, Up: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page breaking</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cenlargethispage-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">10.3 <code>\enlargethispage</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cenlargethispage"></a>
+<a name="index-enlarge-current-page"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\enlargethispage{size}
+\enlargethispage*{size}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Enlarge the <code>\textheight</code> for the current page. The required
+argument <var>size</var> must be a rigid length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). It may be
+positive or negative. This command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>A common strategy is to wait until you have the final text of a
+document, and then pass through it tweaking line and page breaks. This
+command allows you some page size leeway.
+</p>
+<p>This will allow one extra line on the current page.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The starred form <code>\enlargesthispage*</code> tries to squeeze the material
+together on the page as much as possible, for the common use case of
+getting one more line on the page. This is often used together with an
+explicit <code>\pagebreak</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\enlargethispage</a>, Up: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page breaking</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">10.4 <code>\pagebreak</code> &amp; <code>\nopagebreak</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cpagebreak"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnopagebreak"></a>
+<a name="index-page-break_002c-forcing"></a>
+<a name="index-page-break_002c-preventing"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\pagebreak
+\pagebreak[<var>zero-to-four</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\nopagebreak
+\nopagebreak[<var>zero-to-four</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Encourage or discourage a page break. The optional <var>zero-to-four</var>
+is an integer that allows you to soften the request. The default is 4,
+so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
+prevent the break. But for instance <code>\nopagebreak[1]</code> suggests to
+LaTeX that another spot might be preferable. The higher the number,
+the more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX&rsquo;s page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</p>
+<p>If you use these inside a paragraph, they apply to the point following
+the line in which they appear. So this
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+continent,
+\pagebreak
+a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition
+that all men are created equal.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>does not give a page break at &lsquo;<samp>continent,</samp>&rsquo; but instead at
+&lsquo;<samp>nation,</samp>&rsquo; since that is where LaTeX breaks that line. In
+addition, with <code>\pagebreak</code> the vertical space on the page is
+stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom
+margin. This can look strange, and if <code>\flushbottom</code> is in effect
+this can cause you to get &lsquo;<samp>Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active</samp>&rsquo;. See <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage">\newpage</a> for a command that
+does not have these effects.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Footnotes"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="n" rel="next">Definitions</a>, Previous: <a href="#Page-breaking" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Page breaking</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Footnotes-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">11 Footnotes</h2>
+
+<a name="index-footnotes_002c-creating"></a>
+
+<p>Place a footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">No&euml;l Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
+to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making
+love.\footnote{%
+ I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>You can put multiple footnotes on a page. If the footnote text becomes
+too long then it will flow to the next page.
+</p>
+<p>You can also produce footnotes by combining the <code>\footnotemark</code> and
+the <code>\footnotetext</code> commands, which is useful in special
+circumstances.
+</p>
+<p>To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
+include a bibliographic style with that behavior (see <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a>).
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cfootnote" accesskey="1">\footnote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Insert a footnote.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark" accesskey="2">\footnotemark</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Insert footnote mark only.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext" accesskey="3">\footnotetext</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Insert footnote text only.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings" accesskey="4">Footnotes in section headings</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Chapter or section titles.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table" accesskey="5">Footnotes in a table</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Table footnotes.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Footnotes-of-footnotes" accesskey="6">Footnotes of footnotes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Multiple classes of footnotes.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cfootnote"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark" accesskey="n" rel="next">\footnotemark</a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cfootnote-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">11.1 <code>\footnote</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cfootnote"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\footnote{<var>text</var>}
+\footnote[<var>number</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Place a footnote <var>text</var> at the bottom of the current page.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's
+\textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{%
+ After reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained,
+ ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method
+ of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed
+ at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The optional argument <var>number</var> allows you to specify the number of
+the footnote. If you use this then LaTeX does not increment the
+<code>footnote</code> counter.
+</p>
+<a name="index-footnotes_002c-symbols-instead-of-numbers"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cfnsymbol_002c-and-footnotes"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_0040fnsymbol"></a>
+<p>By default, LaTeX uses arabic numbers as footnote markers. Change
+this with something like
+<code>\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}</code>, which
+uses a sequence of symbols (see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>). To make this change global put that in the preamble. If
+you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
+<code>\setcounter{footnote}{0}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX determines the spacing of footnotes with two parameters.
+</p>
+<a name="index-footnote-parameters"></a>
+<a name="index-parameters_002c-for-footnotes"></a>
+
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\footnoterule</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfootnoterule"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="footnote-footnoterule"></a><p>Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page&rsquo;s
+footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document classes (except
+<code>slides</code>, where it does not appear) is: vertical thickness of
+<code>0.4pt</code>, and horizontal size of <code>0.4\columnwidth</code> long.
+Change the rule with something like this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{% Kerns avoid vertical space
+ \kern -3pt % This -3 is negative
+ \hrule width \textwidth height 1pt % of the sum of this 1
+ \kern 2pt} % and this 2
+</pre></div>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\footnotesep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfootnotesep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="footnote-footnotesep"></a><p>The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cstrut">\strut</a>). By default, this is set to the normal strut for
+<code>\footnotesize</code> fonts (see <a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a>), therefore there is no
+extra space between footnotes. This is &lsquo;<samp>6.65pt</samp>&rsquo; for &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo;,
+&lsquo;<samp>7.7pt</samp>&rsquo; for &lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo;, and &lsquo;<samp>8.4pt</samp>&rsquo; for &lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo;. Change
+it as with <code>\setlength{\footnotesep}{11pt}</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>The <code>\footnote</code> command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX&rsquo;s default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
+<code>\footnote</code>; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
+sectioning command such as <code>\chapter</code> (it can only be used in outer
+paragraph mode; see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>). There are some workarounds; see
+following sections.
+</p>
+<a name="index-Footnotes_002c-in-a-minipage"></a>
+<a name="index-mpfootnote-counter"></a>
+<p>In a <code>minipage</code> environment the <code>\footnote</code> command uses the
+<code>mpfootnote</code> counter instead of the <code>footnote</code> counter, so
+they are numbered independently. They are shown at the bottom of the
+environment, not at the bottom of the page. And by default they are
+shown alphabetically. See <a href="#minipage">minipage</a> and <a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table">Footnotes in a table</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cfootnotemark"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext" accesskey="n" rel="next">\footnotetext</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnote" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\footnote</a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cfootnotemark-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">11.2 <code>\footnotemark</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cfootnotemark"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\footnotemark
+\footnotemark[<var>number</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Put the current footnote mark in the text. To specify associated text
+for the footnote see&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a>. The optional argument
+<var>number</var> causes the command to use that number to determine the
+footnote mark. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode
+(see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
+</p>
+<p>If you use <code>\footnotemark</code> without the optional argument then it
+increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional <var>number</var>
+then it does not. The next example produces several consecutive footnote
+markers referring to the same footnote.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.}
+and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value of the
+common mark. This example gives the same institutional affiliation to
+both the first and third authors (<code>\thanks</code> is a version of
+<code>footnote</code>), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
+\author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds}
+ \and A C Doyle\thanks{Durham University}
+ \and S Holmes\footnotemark[1]}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This uses a counter to remember the footnote number. The third sentence
+is followed by the same footnote marker as the first.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcounter{footnoteValueSaver}
+All babies are illogical.\footnote{%
+ Lewis Carroll.}\setcounter{footnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}}
+Nobody is despised who can manage a crocodile.\footnote{%
+ Captain Hook.}
+Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value{footnoteValueSaver}]
+Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby.
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-cleveref-2"></a>
+<a name="index-cleveref-package-2"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-hyperref"></a>
+<a name="index-hyperref-package"></a>
+
+<p>This example accomplishes the same by using the package <samp>cleveref</samp>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % in preamble
+\crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
+...
+The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker, Evers, 1994.}
+The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers, Chance, 1990.}
+But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-hyperref-1"></a>
+<a name="index-hyperref-package-1"></a>
+
+<p>It will work with the package <samp>hyperref</samp>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cfootnotetext"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings" accesskey="n" rel="next">Footnotes in section headings</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\footnotemark</a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cfootnotetext-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">11.3 <code>\footnotetext</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cfootnotetext"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\footnotetext{<var>text</var>}
+\footnotetext[<var>number</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Place <var>text</var> at the bottom of the page as a footnote. It pairs with
+<code>\footnotemark</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>) and can come anywhere after
+that command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
+The optional argument <var>number</var> changes the number of the footnote
+mark.
+</p>
+<p>See <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a> and&nbsp;<a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table">Footnotes in a table</a> for usage
+examples.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Footnotes-in-section-headings"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table" accesskey="n" rel="next">Footnotes in a table</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\footnotetext</a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Footnotes-in-section-headings-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">11.4 Footnotes in section headings</h3>
+
+<a name="index-footnote_002c-in-section-headings"></a>
+<a name="index-table-of-contents_002c-avoiding-footnotes"></a>
+
+<p>Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
+section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
+contents, where it is not likely to be desired. The simplest way
+to have it not appear on the table of contents is to use the optional
+argument to <code>\section</code>
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\section[Please]{Please\footnote{%
+ Don't footnote in chapter and section headers!}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>No <code>\protect</code> is needed in front of <code>\footnote</code> here because
+what gets moved to the table of contents is the optional argument.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Footnotes-in-a-table"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Footnotes-of-footnotes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Footnotes of footnotes</a>, Previous: <a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Footnotes in section headings</a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Footnotes-in-a-table-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">11.5 Footnotes in a table</h3>
+
+<a name="index-footnote_002c-in-a-table"></a>
+
+<p>Inside a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment the <code>\footnote</code>
+command does not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but
+the footnote text does not appear. The solution is to use a
+<code>minipage</code> environment as here (see <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Ship} &amp;\textsc{Book} \\ \hline
+ \textit{HMS Sophie} &amp;Master and Commander \\
+ \textit{HMS Polychrest} &amp;Post Captain \\
+ \textit{HMS Lively} &amp;Post Captain \\
+ \textit{HMS Surprise} &amp;A number of books\footnote{%
+ Starting with HMS Surprise.}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{minipage}
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Inside a <code>minipage</code>, footnote marks are lowercase letters. Change
+that with something like
+<code>\renewcommand{\thempfootnote}{\arabic{mpfootnote}}</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The footnotes in the prior example appear at the bottom of the
+<code>minipage</code>. To have them appear at the bottom of the main page, as
+part of the regular footnote sequence, use the <code>\footnotemark</code> and
+<code>\footnotetext</code> pair and make a new counter.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+ \setcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}} \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Woman} &amp;\textsc{Relationship} \\ \hline
+ Mona &amp;Attached\footnotemark \\
+ Diana Villiers &amp;Eventual wife \\
+ Christine Hatherleigh Wood &amp;Fiance\footnotemark
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{minipage}% percent sign keeps footnote text close to minipage
+ \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+ \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+ Little is known other than her death.}%
+ \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+ \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+ Relationship is unresolved in XXI.}
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>For a floating <code>table</code> environment (see <a href="#table">table</a>), use the
+<samp>tablefootnote</samp> package.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{tablefootnote} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{table}
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Date} &amp;\textsc{Campaign} \\ \hline
+ 1862 &amp;Fort Donelson \\
+ 1863 &amp;Vicksburg \\
+ 1865 &amp;Army of Northern Virginia\tablefootnote{%
+ Ending the war.}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Forces captured by US Grant}
+\end{table}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The footnote appears at the page bottom and is numbered in sequence with
+other footnotes.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Footnotes-of-footnotes"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Footnotes in a table</a>, Up: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Footnotes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Footnotes-of-footnotes-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">11.6 Footnotes of footnotes</h3>
+
+<a name="index-footnote_002c-of-a-footnote"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-bigfoot"></a>
+<a name="index-bigfoot-package"></a>
+
+<p>Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
+footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package
+<samp>bigfoot</samp> extends LaTeX&rsquo;s default footnote mechanism in many
+ways, including allow these two, as in this example.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{bigfoot} % in preamble
+\DeclareNewFootnote{Default}
+\DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph] % create class \footnotefrom{}
+ ...
+The third theorem is a partial converse of the
+second.\footnotefrom{%
+ First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Definitions"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="n" rel="next">Counters</a>, Previous: <a href="#Footnotes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Footnotes</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Definitions-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">12 Definitions</h2>
+
+<a name="index-definitions"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand" accesskey="1">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">(Re)define a new command.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand" accesskey="2">\providecommand</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new command, if name not used.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother" accesskey="3">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Change the status of the at-sign character.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar" accesskey="4">\@ifstar</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Define your own commands with *-variants.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter" accesskey="5">\newcounter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new counter.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewlength" accesskey="6">\newlength</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new length.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox" accesskey="7">\newsavebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new box.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment" accesskey="8">\newenvironment &amp; \renewenvironment</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new environment.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem" accesskey="9">\newtheorem</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new theorem-like environment.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewfont">\newfont</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Define a new font name.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Using tricky commands.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend">\ignorespaces &amp; \ignorespacesafterend</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Discard extra spaces.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand" accesskey="n" rel="next">\providecommand</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.1 <code>\newcommand</code> &amp; <code>\renewcommand</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cnewcommand"></a>
+<a name="index-commands_002c-defining-new-ones"></a>
+<a name="index-commands_002c-redefining"></a>
+<a name="index-defining-a-new-command"></a>
+<a name="index-new-commands_002c-defining"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\newcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\newcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\newcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\newcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\newcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or one of these.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\renewcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\renewcommand{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\renewcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\renewcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\renewcommand*{\<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Define or redefine a command. See also the discussion of
+<code>\DeclareRobustCommand</code> in <a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a>.
+<a name="index-starred-form_002c-defining-new-commands"></a>
+<a name="index-_002a_002dform_002c-defining-new-commands"></a>
+The starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain
+multiple paragraphs of text (in plain TeX terms that it not be
+<code>\long</code>).
+</p>
+<p>These are the parameters:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>cmd</var></dt>
+<dd>
+<p>Required; the command name. It must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>,
+and must not begin with the four letter string <code>\end</code>. For
+<code>\newcommand</code>, it must not be already defined. For
+<code>\renewcommand</code>, this name must already be defined.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>nargs</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of arguments
+that the command takes, including any optional argument. Omitting this
+argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that the command has no
+arguments. If you redefine a command, the new version can have a
+different number of arguments than the old version.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>optargdefault</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
+<code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is optional, with default value <var>optargdefault</var>
+(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then
+<code>\<var>cmd</var></code> does not take an optional argument.
+</p>
+<a name="index-positional-parameter"></a>
+<p>That is, if <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is used with square brackets, as in
+<code>\<var>cmd</var>[<var>optval</var>]{...}...</code>, then within <var>defn</var> the
+parameter&nbsp;<code>#1</code> is set to the value of <var>optval</var>. On the
+other hand, if <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is called without the square brackets
+then within <var>defn</var> the parameter <code>#1</code> is set to the value of
+<var>optargdefault</var>. In either case, the required arguments start with
+<code>#2</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Omitting <code>[<var>optargdefault</var>]</code> is different from having the
+square brackets with no contents, as in <code>[]</code>. The former sets
+<code>#1</code> to the value of <var>optargdefault</var>; the latter sets <code>#1</code>
+to the empty string.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>defn</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of
+<code>\<var>cmd</var></code>. The parameters <code>#1</code>, <code>#2</code>,
+... <code>#<var>nargs</var></code> are replaced by the values that you supply when
+you call the command (or by the default value if there is an optional
+argument and you don&rsquo;t exercise the option).
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>TeX ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
+sequence, as in &lsquo;<samp>\cmd </samp>&rsquo;. If you actually want a space there, one
+solution is to type <code>{}</code> after the command (&lsquo;<samp>\cmd{} </samp>&rsquo;, and
+another solution is to use an explicit control space (&lsquo;<samp>\cmd\ </samp>&rsquo;).
+</p>
+<p>A simple example of defining a new command:
+<code>\newcommand{\RS}{Robin Smith}</code> results in <code>\RS</code> being
+replaced by the longer text. Redefining an existing command is similar:
+<code>\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small QED}}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>If you try to define a command and the name has already been used then
+you get something like &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</samp>&rsquo;. If you try
+to redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
+something like &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: \hank undefined</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>Here the first command definition has no arguments, and the second has
+one required argument.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\student}{Ms~O'Leary}
+\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Use the first as in <code>I highly recommend \student{} to you</code>. The
+second has a variable, so that <code>\defref{def:basis}</code> expands to
+<code>Definition~\ref{def:basis}</code>, which ultimately expands to
+something like &lsquo;<samp>Definition~3.14</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>Similarly, but with two required arguments:
+<code>\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1 \times #2$}</code> is invoked as
+<code>\nbym{2}{k}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>This example has an optional argument.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Then <code>\salutation</code> gives &lsquo;<samp>Dear Sir or Madam:</samp>&rsquo; while
+<code>\salutation[John]</code> gives &lsquo;<samp>Dear John:</samp>&rsquo;. And
+<code>\salutation[]</code> gives &lsquo;<samp>Dear :</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>This example has an optional argument and two required arguments.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\lawyers}[3][company]{#2, #3, and~#1}
+I employ \lawyers[Howe]{Dewey}{Cheatem}.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The output is &lsquo;<samp>I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe</samp>&rsquo;. The optional
+argument, the <code>Howe</code>, is associated with <code>#1</code>, while
+<code>Dewey</code> and <code>Cheatem</code> are associated with <code>#2</code>
+and&nbsp;<code>#3</code>. Because of the optional argument,
+<code>\lawyers{Dewey}{Cheatem}</code> will give the output &lsquo;<samp>I employ
+Dewey, Cheatem, and company</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>The braces around <var>defn</var> do not define a group, that is, they do not
+delimit the scope of the result of expanding <var>defn</var>. For example,
+with <code>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}</code>, in this sentence,
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>the words &lsquo;<samp>met the</samp>&rsquo; would incorrectly be in italics. The solution
+is to put another pair of braces inside the definition:
+<code>\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cprovidecommand"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother" accesskey="n" rel="next">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cprovidecommand-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.2 <code>\providecommand</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cprovidecommand"></a>
+<a name="index-commands_002c-defining-new-ones-1"></a>
+<a name="index-defining-a-new-command-1"></a>
+<a name="index-new-commands_002c-defining-1"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\providecommand{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand*{<var>cmd</var>}{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+\providecommand*{<var>cmd</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>defn</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
+If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
+as <code>\newcommand</code>. If a command of this name already exists then
+this definition does nothing. This is particularly useful in a file
+that may be loaded more than once, such as a style file.
+See <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a> for the description of the arguments.
+</p>
+<p>This example
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+From \myaffiliation.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>outputs &lsquo;<samp>From Saint Michael's College</samp>&rsquo;. Unlike <code>\newcommand</code>,
+the repeated use of <code>\providecommand</code> does not give an error.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar" accesskey="n" rel="next">\@ifstar</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\providecommand</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.3 <code>\makeatletter</code> &amp; <code>\makeatother</code></h3>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\makeatletter
+ ... definition of commands with @ in their name ..
+\makeatother
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Use this pair when you redefine LaTeX commands that are named with an
+at-sign character&nbsp;&lsquo;<samp><code>@</code></samp>&rsquo;. The <code>\makeatletter</code>
+declaration makes the at-sign character have the category code of a
+letter, code&nbsp;11. The <code>\makeatother</code> declaration sets the
+category code of the at-sign to code&nbsp;12, its default value.
+</p>
+<p>As TeX reads characters, it assigns each one a category code, or
+<a name="index-catcode"></a>
+<a name="index-character-category-code"></a>
+<a name="index-category-code_002c-character"></a>
+<em>catcode</em>. For instance, it assigns the backslash
+character&nbsp;&lsquo;<samp><code>\</code></samp>&rsquo; the catcode&nbsp;0. Command names
+consist of a category&nbsp;0 character, ordinarily backslash, followed
+by letters, category&nbsp;11 characters (except that a command name can
+also consist of a category&nbsp;0 character followed by a single
+non-letter symbol).
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX&rsquo;s source code has the convention that some commands use
+<code>@</code> in their name. These commands are mainly intended for package
+or class writers. The convention prevents authors who are just using a
+package or class from accidentally replacing such a command with one of
+their own, because by default the at-sign has catcode&nbsp;12.
+</p>
+<p>The pair <code>\makeatletter</code> and <code>\makeatother</code> changes the
+default code and then changes it back. Use them inside a <samp>.tex</samp>
+file, in the preamble, when you are defining or redefining commands
+named with <code>@</code>, by having them surround your definition. Don&rsquo;t
+use these inside <samp>.sty</samp> or <samp>.cls</samp> files since the
+<code>\usepackage</code> and <code>\documentclass</code> commands already arrange
+that the at-sign has the character code of a letter, catcode&nbsp;11.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-macros2e"></a>
+<a name="index-macros2e-package"></a>
+
+<p>For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign in their names see
+<a href="http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e">http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e</a>.
+</p>
+<p>In this example the class file has a command
+<code>\thesis@universityname</code> that the user wants to change. These
+three lines should go in the preamble, before the
+<code>\begin{document}</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\thesis@universityname}{Saint Michael's College}
+\makeatother
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005c_0040ifstar"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newcounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005c_0040ifstar-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.4 <code>\@ifstar</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_0040ifstar"></a>
+<a name="index-commands_002c-star_002dvariants"></a>
+<a name="index-star_002dvariants_002c-commands"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\mycmd}{\@ifstar{\mycmd@star}{\mycmd@nostar}}
+\newcommand{\mycmd@nostar}[<var>nostar-num-args</var>]{<var>nostar-body</var>}
+\newcommand{\mycmd@star}[<var>star-num-args</var>]{<var>star-body</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Many standard LaTeX environments or commands have a variant with the
+same name but ending with a star character&nbsp;<code>*</code>, an asterisk.
+Examples are the <code>table</code> and <code>table*</code> environments and the
+<code>\section</code> and <code>\section*</code> commands.
+</p>
+<p>When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward
+because <code>\newenvironment</code> and <code>\renewenvironment</code> allow the
+environment name to contain a star. For commands the situation is more
+complex. As in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command,
+given above as <code>\mycmd</code>, which peeks ahead to see if it is followed
+by a star. For instance, LaTeX does not really have a
+<code>\section*</code> command; instead, the <code>\section</code> command peeks
+ahead. This command does not accept arguments but instead expands to
+one of two commands that do accept arguments. In the synopsis these two
+are <code>\mycmd@nostar</code> and <code>\mycmd@star</code>. They could take the
+same number of arguments or a different number, or no arguments at all.
+As always, in a LaTeX document a command using at-sign&nbsp;<code>@</code>
+must be enclosed inside a <code>\makeatletter ... \makeatother</code> block
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This example of <code>\@ifstar</code> defines the command <code>\ciel</code> and a
+variant <code>\ciel*</code>. Both have one required argument. A call to
+<code>\ciel{night}</code> will return &quot;starry night sky&quot; while
+<code>\ciel*{blue}</code> will return &quot;starry not blue sky&quot;.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand*{\ciel@unstarred}[1]{starry #1 sky}
+\newcommand*{\ciel@starred}[1]{starry not #1 sky}
+\newcommand*{\ciel}{\@ifstar{\ciel@starred}{\ciel@unstarred}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
+arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007&rsquo;s
+<code>``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond},
+\agentsecret{James}{Bond}.''</code> is equivalent to entering the commands
+<code>``My name is \textsc{Bond}, \textit{James} textsc{Bond}.''</code>
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand*{\agentsecret@unstarred}[2]{\textit{#1} \textsc{#2}}
+\newcommand*{\agentsecret@starred}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\agentsecret}{%
+ \@ifstar{\agentsecret@starred}{\agentsecret@unstarred}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work of
+<code>\@ifstar</code>. The <samp>suffix</samp> package allows the construct
+<code>\newcommand\mycommand{<var>unstarred version</var>}</code> followed by
+<code>\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{<var>starred version</var>}</code>. And
+LaTeX3 has the <samp>xparse</samp> package that allows this code.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\NewDocumentCommand\foo{s}{\IfBooleanTF#1
+ {<var>starred version</var>}%
+ {<var>unstarred version</var>}%
+ }
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewcounter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewlength" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newlength</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\@ifstar</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewcounter_003a-Allocating-a-counter"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.5 <code>\newcounter</code>: Allocating a counter</h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cnewcounter"></a>
+<a name="index-counters_002c-defining-new"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcounter{<var>countername</var>}
+\newcounter{<var>countername</var>}[<var>supercounter</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Globally defines a new counter named <var>countername</var> and initialize it
+to zero (see <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The name <var>countername</var> must consist of letters only. It does not
+begin with a backslash. This name must not already be in use by another
+counter.
+</p>
+<p>When you use the optional argument <code>[<var>supercounter</var>]</code> then the
+counter <var>countername</var> will be reset to zero whenever
+<var>supercounter</var> is incremented. For example, ordinarily
+<code>subsection</code> is numbered within <code>section</code> so that any time you
+increment <var>section</var>, either with <code>\stepcounter</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>) or <code>\refstepcounter</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>), then LaTeX will reset <var>subsection</var> to
+zero.
+</p>
+<p>This example
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcounter{asuper} \setcounter{asuper}{1}
+\newcounter{asub}[asuper] \setcounter{asub}{3} % Note `asuper'
+The value of asuper is \arabic{asuper} and of asub is \arabic{asub}.
+\stepcounter{asuper}
+Now asuper is \arabic{asuper} while asub is \arabic{asub}.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>produces &lsquo;<samp>The value of asuper is 1 and that of asub is 3</samp>&rsquo; and
+&lsquo;<samp>Now asuper is 2 while asub is 0</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>If the counter already exists, for instance by entering <code>asuper</code>
+twice, then you get something like &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: Command \c@asuper
+already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual.</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>If you use the optional argument then the super counter must already
+exist. Entering <code>\newcounter{jh}[lh]</code> when <code>lh</code> is not a
+defined counter will get you &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: No counter 'lh'
+defined.</samp>&rsquo;
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewlength"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newsavebox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newcounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewlength-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.6 <code>\newlength</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cnewlength"></a>
+<a name="index-lengths_002c-allocating-new"></a>
+<a name="index-rubber-lengths_002c-defining-new"></a>
+<a name="index-skip-register_002c-plain-TeX"></a>
+<a name="index-glue-register_002c-plain-TeX"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newlength{<var>arg</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Allocate a new length register (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). The required argument
+<var>arg</var> must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>. The new register holds
+rubber lengths such as <code>72.27pt</code> or <code>1in plus.2in minus.1in</code>
+(a LaTeX length register is what plain TeX calls a <code>skip</code>
+register). The initial value is zero. The control sequence
+<code>\<var>arg</var></code> must not be already defined.
+</p>
+<p>An example:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newlength{\graphichgt}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>If you forget the backslash then you get &lsquo;<samp>Missing control sequence
+inserted</samp>&rsquo;. If the command sequence already exists then you get
+something like &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined.
+Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewsavebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newenvironment &amp; \renewenvironment</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewlength" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newlength</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewsavebox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.7 <code>\newsavebox</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cnewsavebox"></a>
+<a name="index-box_002c-allocating-new"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newsavebox{\<var>cmd</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Define \<var>cmd</var>, the string consisting of a backslash followed by
+<var>cmd</var>, to refer to a new bin for storing material. These bins hold
+material that has been typeset, to use multiple times or to measure or
+manipulate (see <a href="#Boxes">Boxes</a>). The bin name \<var>cmd</var> is required, must
+start with a backslash, \, and must not already be a defined command.
+This command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This allocates a bin and then puts typeset material into it.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newsavebox{\logobox}
+\savebox{\logobox}{LoGo}
+Our logo is \usebox{\logobox}.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The output is &lsquo;<samp>Our logo is LoGo</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>If there is an already defined bin then you get something like
+&lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: Command \logobox already defined. Or name
+\end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>The allocation of a box is global.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newtheorem</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newsavebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.8 <code>\newenvironment</code> &amp; <code>\renewenvironment</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cnewenvironment"></a>
+<a name="index-_005crenewenvironment"></a>
+<a name="index-environments_002c-defining"></a>
+<a name="index-defining-new-environments"></a>
+<a name="index-redefining-environments"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newenvironment{<var>env</var>}{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\newenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\newenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\newenvironment*{<var>env</var>}{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\newenvironment*{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\newenvironment*{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or one of these.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewenvironment{<var>env</var>}{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\renewenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\renewenvironment{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\renewenvironment*{<var>env</var>}{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\renewenvironment*{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+\renewenvironment*{<var>env</var>}[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]{<var>begdef</var>}{<var>enddef</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Define or redefine the environment <var>env</var>, that is, create the
+construct <code>\begin{<var>env</var>} ... <var>body</var> ... \end{<var>env</var>}</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_002a_002dform-of-environment-commands"></a>
+<p>The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text. However, the body of these
+environments can contain multiple paragraphs.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>env</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Required; the environment name. It consists only of letters or the
+<code>*</code> character, and thus does not begin with backslash, <code>\</code>.
+It must not begin with the string <code>end</code>. For
+<code>\newenvironment</code>, the name <var>env</var> must not be the name of an
+already existing environment, and also the command <code>\<var>env</var></code>
+must be undefined. For <code>\renewenvironment</code>, <var>env</var> must be the
+name of an existing environment.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>nargs</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
+that the environment takes. When you use the environment these
+arguments appear after the <code>\begin</code>, as in
+<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}{<var>arg1</var>} ... {<var>argn</var>}</code>. Omitting
+this is equivalent to setting it to 0; the environment will have no
+arguments. When redefining an environment, the new version can have a
+different number of arguments than the old version.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>optargdefault</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Optional; if this is present then the first argument of the defined
+environment is optional, with default value <var>optargdefault</var> (which
+may be the empty string). If this is not in the definition then the
+environment does not take an optional argument.
+</p>
+<p>That is, when <var>optargdefault</var> is present in the definition of the
+environment then you can start the environment with square brackets, as
+in <code>\begin{<var>env</var>}[<var>optval</var>]{...} ... \end{<var>env</var>}</code>.
+In this case, within <var>begdefn</var> the parameter <code>#1</code> is set to the
+value of <var>optval</var>. If you call <code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code> without
+square brackets, then within <var>begdefn</var> the parameter <code>#1</code> is
+set to the value of the default <var>optargdefault</var>. In either case,
+any required arguments start with <code>#2</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Omitting <code>[<var>myval</var>]</code> in the call is different than having the
+square brackets with no contents, as in <code>[]</code>. The former results
+in <code>#1</code> expanding to <var>optargdefault</var>; the latter results in
+<code>#1</code> expanding to the empty string.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>begdef</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
+<code>\begin{<var>env</var>}</code>. Within <var>begdef</var>, the parameters
+<code>#1</code>, <code>#2</code>, ... <code>#<var>nargs</var></code>, are replaced by the
+values that you supply when you call the environment; see the examples
+below.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>enddef</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
+<code>\end{<var>env</var>}</code>. This may not contain any parameters, that is,
+you cannot use <code>#1</code>, <code>#2</code>, etc., here (but see the final
+example below).
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>All environments, that is to say the <var>begdef</var> code, the environment
+body, and the <var>enddef</var> code, are processed within a group. Thus, in
+the first example below, the effect of the <code>\small</code> is limited to
+the quote and does not extend to material following the environment.
+</p>
+<p>If you try to define an environment and the name has already been used
+then you get something like &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</samp>&rsquo;. If you try
+to redefine an environment and the name has not yet been used then you
+get something like &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: Environment hank undefined.</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>This example gives an environment like LaTeX&rsquo;s <code>quotation</code>
+except that it will be set in smaller type.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newenvironment{smallquote}{%
+ \small\begin{quotation}
+}{%
+ \end{quotation}
+}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This has an argument, which is set in boldface at the start of a
+paragraph.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newenvironment{point}[1]{%
+ \noindent\textbf{#1}
+}{%
+}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This one shows the use of a optional argument; it gives a quotation
+environment that cites the author.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
+ \begin{quotation}
+ \noindent\textit{#1}:
+}{%
+ \end{quotation}
+}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The author&rsquo;s name is optional, and defaults to &lsquo;<samp>Shakespeare</samp>&rsquo;. In
+the document, use the environment like this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
+ ...
+\end{citequote}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use in
+<var>enddef</var>, in this case in a box (see <a href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox &amp; \savebox</a>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
+\newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
+ \sbox\quoteauthor{#1}%
+ \begin{quotation}
+}{%
+ \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---\usebox{\quoteauthor}
+ \end{quotation}
+}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewtheorem"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewfont" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newfont</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newenvironment &amp; \renewenvironment</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewtheorem-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.9 <code>\newtheorem</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cnewtheorem"></a>
+<a name="index-theorems_002c-defining"></a>
+<a name="index-defining-new-theorems"></a>
+
+<a name="index-theorem_002dlike-environment"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-theorem_002dlike"></a>
+<p>Synopses:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}
+\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}[<var>numbered_within</var>]
+\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}[<var>numbered_like</var>]{<var>title</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Define a new theorem-like environment. You can specify one of
+<var>numbered_within</var> and <var>numbered_like</var>, or neither, but not both.
+</p>
+<p>The first form, <code>\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}</code>, creates
+an environment that will be labelled with <var>title</var>; see the first
+example below.
+</p>
+<p>The second form,
+<code>\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}{<var>title</var>}[<var>numbered_within</var>]</code>,
+creates an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing
+counter <var>numbered_within</var>, so this counter will be reset when
+<var>numbered_within</var> is reset. See the second example below.
+</p>
+<p>The third form
+<code>\newtheorem{<var>name</var>}[<var>numbered_like</var>]{<var>title</var>}</code>,
+with optional argument between the two required arguments, creates an
+environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
+<var>numbered_like</var>. See the third example.
+</p>
+<p>This command creates a counter named <var>name</var>. In addition, unless
+the optional argument <var>numbered_like</var> is used, inside of the
+theorem-like environment the current <code>\ref</code> value will be that of
+<code>\the<var>numbered_within</var></code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This declaration is global. It is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Arguments:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>name</var></dt>
+<dd><p>The name of the environment. It is a string of letters. It must not
+begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>. It must not be the name of an
+existing environment, and the command name <code>\<var>name</var></code> must not
+already be defined.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>title</var></dt>
+<dd><p>The text to be printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
+number. For example, &lsquo;<samp>Theorem</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>numbered_within</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Optional; the name of an already defined counter, usually a sectional
+unit such as <code>chapter</code> or <code>section</code>. When the
+<var>numbered_within</var> counter is reset then the <var>name</var> environment&rsquo;s
+counter will also be reset.
+</p>
+<p>If this optional argument is not used then the command
+<code>\the<var>name</var></code> is set to <code>\arabic{<var>name</var>}</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>numbered_like</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Optional; the name of an already defined theorem-like environment. The
+new environment will be numbered in sequence with <var>numbered_like</var>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
+sequentially. The example below has a declaration in the preamble that
+results in &lsquo;<samp>Definition&nbsp;1</samp>&rsquo; and &lsquo;<samp>Definition&nbsp;2</samp>&rsquo; in the
+output.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}
+\begin{document}
+\section{...}
+\begin{defn}
+ First def
+\end{defn}
+
+\section{...}
+\begin{defn}
+ Second def
+\end{defn}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This example has the same document body as the prior one. But here
+<code>\newtheorem</code>&rsquo;s optional argument <var>numbered_within</var> is given as
+<code>section</code>, so the output is like &lsquo;<samp>Definition&nbsp;1.1</samp>&rsquo; and
+&lsquo;<samp>Definition&nbsp;2.1</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+\begin{document}
+\section{...}
+\begin{defn}
+ First def
+\end{defn}
+
+\section{...}
+\begin{defn}
+ Second def
+\end{defn}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In the next example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
+second of which calls for the new <code>thm</code> environment to use the same
+counter as <code>defn</code>. It gives &lsquo;<samp>Definition&nbsp;1.1</samp>&rsquo;, followed
+by &lsquo;<samp>Theorem&nbsp;2.1</samp>&rsquo; and &lsquo;<samp>Definition&nbsp;2.2</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+\newtheorem{thm}[defn]{Theorem}
+\begin{document}
+\section{...}
+\begin{defn}
+ First def
+\end{defn}
+
+\section{...}
+\begin{thm}
+ First thm
+\end{thm}
+
+\begin{defn}
+ Second def
+\end{defn}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewfont"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cprotect" accesskey="n" rel="next">\protect</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newtheorem</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewfont-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.10 <code>\newfont</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cnewfont"></a>
+<a name="index-fonts_002c-new-commands-for"></a>
+<a name="index-defining-new-fonts"></a>
+
+<p>This command is obsolete. This description is here only to help with old
+documents. New documents should define fonts in families through the
+New Font Selection Scheme which allows you to, for example, associate a
+boldface with a roman (see <a href="#Fonts">Fonts</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newfont{\<var>cmd</var>}{<var>font description</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Define a command <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> that will change the current font.
+The control sequence must not already be defined. It must begin with a
+backslash, <code>\</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-at-clause_002c-in-font-definitions"></a>
+<a name="index-design-size_002c-in-font-definitions"></a>
+<p>The <var>font description</var> consists of a <var>fontname</var> and an optional
+<em>at clause</em>. LaTeX will look on your system for a file named
+<samp><var>fontname</var>.tfm</samp>. The at clause can have the form either
+<code>at <var>dimen</var></code> or <code>scaled <var>factor</var></code>, where a
+<var>factor</var> of &lsquo;<samp>1000</samp>&rsquo; means no scaling. For LaTeX&rsquo;s purposes,
+all this does is scale all the character and other font dimensions
+relative to the font&rsquo;s design size, which is a value defined in the
+<samp>.tfm</samp> file.
+</p>
+<p>This defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few characters in each.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt}
+\newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 1100}
+\testfontat abc
+\testfontscaled abc
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cprotect"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend" accesskey="n" rel="next">\ignorespaces &amp; \ignorespacesafterend</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewfont" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newfont</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cprotect-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.11 <code>\protect</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cprotect"></a>
+<a name="index-fragile-commands"></a>
+<a name="index-robust-commands"></a>
+
+<p>All LaTeX commands are either <em>fragile</em> or <em>robust</em>. A
+fragile command can break when it is used in the argument to certain
+other commands. Commands that contain data that LaTeX writes to an
+auxiliary file and re-reads later are fragile. This includes material
+that goes into a table of contents, list of figures, list of tables,
+etc. Fragile commands also include line breaks, any command that has an
+optional argument, and many more. To prevent such commands from
+breaking, one solution is to preceded them with the command
+<code>\protect</code>.
+</p>
+<p>For example, when LaTeX runs the <code>\section{<var>section
+name</var>}</code> command it writes the <var>section name</var> text to the
+<samp>.aux</samp> auxiliary file, moving it there for use elsewhere in the
+document such as in the table of contents. Any argument that is
+internally expanded by LaTeX without typesetting it directly is
+referred to as a
+<a name="index-moving-arguments"></a>
+<em>moving argument</em>. A command is fragile if it can
+expand during this process into invalid TeX code. Some examples of
+moving arguments are those that appear in the <code>\caption{...}</code>
+command (see <a href="#figure">figure</a>), in the <code>\thanks{...}</code> command
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>), and in @-expressions in the <code>tabular</code> and
+<code>array</code> environments (see <a href="#tabular">tabular</a>).
+</p>
+<p>If you get strange errors from commands used in moving arguments, try
+preceding it with <code>\protect</code>. Every fragile commands must be
+protected with their own <code>\protect</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Although usually a <code>\protect</code> command doesn&rsquo;t hurt, length
+commands are robust and should not be preceded by a <code>\protect</code>
+command. Nor can a <code>\protect</code> command be used in the argument to
+<code>\addtocounter</code> or <code>\setcounter</code> command.
+</p>
+<p>In this example the <code>\caption</code> command gives a mysterious error
+about an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each
+<code>\raisebox</code> command with <code>\protect</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{figure}
+ ...
+ \caption{Company headquarters of A\raisebox{1pt}{B}\raisebox{-1pt}{C}}
+\end{figure}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In the next example the <code>\tableofcontents</code> command gives an error
+because the <code>\(..\)</code> in the section title expands to illegal TeX
+in the <samp>.toc</samp> file. You can solve this by changing <code>\(..\)</code>
+to <code>\protect\(..\protect\)</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents
+...
+\section{Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)}
+...
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cprotect" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\protect</a>, Up: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definitions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.12 <code>\ignorespaces &amp; \ignorespacesafterend</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cignorespaces"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cignorespacesafterend"></a>
+<a name="index-spaces_002c-ignore-around-commands"></a>
+<a name="index-commands_002c-ignore-spaces"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\ignorespaces
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\ignorespacesafterend
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Both commands cause LaTeX to ignore spaces after the end of the
+command up until the first non-space character. The first is a command
+from Plain TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>ignorespaces</code> is often used when defining commands via
+<code>\newcommand</code>, or <code>\newenvironment</code>, or <code>\def</code>. The
+example below illustrates. It allows a user to show the points values
+for quiz questions in the margin but it is inconvenient because, as
+shown in the <code>enumerate</code> list, users must not put any space between
+the command and the question text.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item\points{10}no extra space output here
+ \item\points{15} extra space between the number and the `extra'
+\end{enumerate}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The solution is to change to this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\points}[1]{%
+ \makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text. The
+commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names. But,
+as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
+<code>\fullname</code> will reproduce that.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\makeatletter
+\newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\@honorific{#1}} % remember title
+\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1} % put title before name
+\makeatother
+\begin{tabular}{|l|}
+\honorific{Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones} \\ % no extra space here
+\honorific{ Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones} % extra space before title
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>To fix this, change to
+<code>\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\@honorific~#1}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\ignorespaces</code> is also often used in a <code>\newenvironment</code>
+at the end of the <var>begin</var> clause, that is, as part of the second
+argument, as in <code>\begin{newenvironment}{<var>env
+name</var>}{... \ignorespaces}{...}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>To strip spaces off the end of an environment use
+<code>\ignorespacesafterend</code>. An example is that this will show a much
+larger vertical space between the first and second environments than
+between the second and third.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}}
+\begin{eq}
+e=mc^2
+\end{eq}
+\begin{equation}
+F=ma
+\end{equation}
+\begin{equation}
+E=IR
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Putting a comment character&nbsp;<code>%</code> immediately after the
+<code>\end{eq}</code> will make the vertical space disappear, but that is
+inconvenient. The solution is to change to
+<code>\newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}\ignorespacesafterend}</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Counters"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="n" rel="next">Lengths</a>, Previous: <a href="#Definitions" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Definitions</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Counters-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">13 Counters</h2>
+
+<a name="index-counters_002c-a-list-of"></a>
+<a name="index-variables_002c-a-list-of"></a>
+
+<p>Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with
+it. The name of the counter is often the same as the name of the
+environment or command associated with the number, except that the
+counter&rsquo;s name has no backslash&nbsp;<code>\</code>. Thus, associated with
+the <code>\chapter</code> command is the <code>chapter</code> counter that keeps
+track of the chapter number.
+</p>
+<p>Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX&rsquo;s standard document
+classes to control numbering.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">part paragraph figure enumi
+chapter subparagraph table enumii
+section page footnote enumiii
+subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+subsubsection
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>mpfootnote</code> counter is used by the <code>\footnote</code> command
+inside of a minipage (see <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>). The counters <code>enumi</code>
+through <code>enumiv</code> are used in the <code>enumerate</code> environment, for
+up to four levels of nesting (see <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Counters can have any integer value but they are typically positive.
+</p>
+<p>New counters are created with <code>\newcounter</code>. See <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>.
+</p>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol" accesskey="1">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Print value of a counter.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter" accesskey="2">\usecounter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Use a specified counter in a list environment.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="3">\value</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Use the value of a counter in an expression.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter" accesskey="4">\setcounter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Set the value of a counter.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter" accesskey="5">\addtocounter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Add a quantity to a counter.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="6">\refstepcounter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Add to a counter.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="7">\stepcounter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Add to a counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear" accesskey="8">\day &amp; \month &amp; \year</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Numeric date values.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\usecounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol_003a-Printing-counters"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.1 <code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</h3>
+
+<a name="index-counters_002c-printing"></a>
+
+<p>Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if
+the counter <var>counter</var> has the value 1 then a
+<code>\alph{<var>counter</var>}</code> in your source will result in a lowercase
+letter&nbsp;a appearing in the output.
+</p>
+<p>All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
+instance, <code>\alph{enumi}</code>. Note that the counter name does not
+start with a backslash.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\alph{<var>counter</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005calph_007bcounter_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Print the value of <var>counter</var> in lowercase letters: &lsquo;a&rsquo;, &lsquo;b&rsquo;,
+<small class="enddots">...</small> If the counter&rsquo;s value is less than 1 or more than 26 then
+you get &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: Counter too large.</samp>&rsquo;
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Alph{<var>counter</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cAlph_007bcounter_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Print in uppercase letters: &lsquo;A&rsquo;, &lsquo;B&rsquo;, <small class="enddots">...</small> If the counter&rsquo;s value
+is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: Counter
+too large.</samp>&rsquo;
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\arabic{<var>counter</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005carabic_007bcounter_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Print in Arabic numbers such as &lsquo;<samp>5</samp>&rsquo; or &lsquo;<samp>-2</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\roman{<var>counter</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005croman_007bcounter_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Print in lowercase roman numerals: &lsquo;i&rsquo;, &lsquo;ii&rsquo;, <small class="enddots">...</small> If the
+counter&rsquo;s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
+LaTeX does not print anything in the output.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Roman{<var>counter</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cRoman_007bcounter_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Print in uppercase roman numerals: &lsquo;I&rsquo;, &lsquo;II&rsquo;, <small class="enddots">...</small> If the
+counter&rsquo;s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
+LaTeX does not print anything in the output.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\fnsymbol{<var>counter</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfnsymbol_007bcounter_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Prints the value of <var>counter</var> using a sequence of nine symbols that
+are traditionally used for labeling footnotes. The value of
+<var>counter</var> should be between&nbsp;1 and&nbsp;9, inclusive. If the
+counter&rsquo;s value is less than 0 or more than 9 then you get &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX
+Error: Counter too large</samp>&rsquo;, while if it is 0 then you get no error or
+warning but LaTeX does not output anything.
+</p>
+<p>Here are the symbols:
+</p>
+<table>
+<thead><tr><th width="10%">Number</th><th width="30%">Name</th><th width="30%">Command</th><th width="30%">Symbol</th></tr></thead>
+<tr><td width="10%">1</td><td width="30%">asterisk</td><td width="30%"><code>\ast</code></td><td width="30%">*</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="10%">2</td><td width="30%">dagger</td><td width="30%"><code>\dagger</code></td><td width="30%">&#x2020;</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="10%">3</td><td width="30%">ddagger</td><td width="30%"><code>\ddagger</code></td><td width="30%">&#x2021;</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="10%">4</td><td width="30%">section-sign</td><td width="30%"><code>\S</code></td><td width="30%">&#x00A7;</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="10%">5</td><td width="30%">paragraph-sign</td><td width="30%"><code>\P</code></td><td width="30%">&#x00B6;</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="10%">6</td><td width="30%">double-vert</td><td width="30%"><code>\parallel</code></td><td width="30%">&#x2016;</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="10%">7</td><td width="30%">double-asterisk</td><td width="30%"><code>\ast\ast</code></td><td width="30%">**</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="10%">8</td><td width="30%">double-dagger</td><td width="30%"><code>\dagger\dagger</code></td><td width="30%">&#x2020;&#x2020;</td></tr>
+<tr><td width="10%">9</td><td width="30%">double-ddagger</td><td width="30%"><code>\ddagger\ddagger</code></td><td width="30%">&#x2021;&#x2021;</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cusecounter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="n" rel="next">\value</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cusecounter-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.2 <code>\usecounter</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cusecounter"></a>
+<a name="index-list-items_002c-specifying-counter"></a>
+<a name="index-numbered-items_002c-specifying-counter"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usecounter{<var>counter</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Used in the second argument of the <code>list</code> environment
+(see <a href="#list">list</a>), this declares that list items will be numbered by
+<var>counter</var>. It initializes <var>counter</var> to zero, and arranges that
+when <code>\item</code> is called without its optional argument then
+<var>counter</var> is incremented by <code>\refstepcounter</code>, making its value
+be the current <code>ref</code> value (see <a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a>). This command is fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Put in the document preamble, this example makes a new list environment
+enumerated with <var>testcounter</var>:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcounter{testcounter}
+\newenvironment{test}{%
+ \begin{list}{}{%
+ \usecounter{testcounter}
+ }
+}{%
+ \end{list}
+}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cvalue"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\setcounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\usecounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cvalue-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.3 <code>\value</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cvalue"></a>
+<a name="index-counters_002c-getting-value-of"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\value{<var>counter</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Expands to the value of the counter <var>counter</var>. (Note that the name
+of a counter does not begin with a backslash.)
+</p>
+<p>This example outputs &lsquo;<samp>Test counter is&nbsp;6. Other counter
+is&nbsp;5.</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcounter{test} \setcounter{test}{5}
+\newcounter{other} \setcounter{other}{\value{test}}
+\addtocounter{test}{1}
+
+Test counter is \arabic{test}.
+Other counter is \arabic{other}.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\value</code> command is not used for typesetting the value of the
+counter. For that, see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>.
+</p>
+<p>It is often used in <code>\setcounter</code> or <code>\addtocounter</code> but
+<code>\value</code> can be used anywhere that LaTeX expects a number, such
+as in <code>\hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}</code>. It must not be
+preceded by <code>\protect</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This example inserts <code>\hspace{4\parindent}</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setcounter{myctr}{3} \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
+\hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csetcounter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\addtocounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\value</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csetcounter-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.4 <code>\setcounter</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005csetcounter"></a>
+<a name="index-counters_002c-setting"></a>
+<a name="index-setting-counters"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setcounter{<var>counter</var>}{<var>value</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Globally set the counter <var>counter</var> to have the value of the
+<var>value</var> argument, which must be an integer. Thus, you can set a
+counter&rsquo;s value as <code>\setcounter{section}{5}</code>. Note that the
+counter name does not start with a backslash.
+</p>
+<p>In this example if the counter <code>theorem</code> has value 12 then the
+second line will print &lsquo;<samp>XII</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setcounter{exercise}{\value{theorem}}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman{exercise}.
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005caddtocounter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\refstepcounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\setcounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005caddtocounter-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.5 <code>\addtocounter</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005caddtocounter"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\addtocounter{<var>counter</var>}{<var>value</var>&nbsp;</pre></div>
+
+<p>Globally increment <var>counter</var> by the amount specified by the
+<var>value</var> argument, which may be negative.
+</p>
+<p>In this example the section value appears as &lsquo;<samp>VII</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setcounter{section}{5}
+\addtocounter{section}{2}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005crefstepcounter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\stepcounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\addtocounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005crefstepcounter-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.6 <code>\refstepcounter</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005crefstepcounter"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\refstepcounter{<var>counter</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Globally increments the value of <var>counter</var> by one, as does
+<code>\stepcounter</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>). The difference is that this
+command resets the value of any counter numbered within it. (For the
+definition of &ldquo;counters numbered within&rdquo;, see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>.)
+</p>
+<p>In addition, this command also defines the current <code>\ref</code> value
+to be the result of <code>\thecounter</code>.
+</p>
+<p>While the counter value is set globally, the <code>\ref</code> value is set
+locally, i.e., inside the current group.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cstepcounter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear" accesskey="n" rel="next">\day &amp; \month &amp; \year</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\refstepcounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cstepcounter-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.7 <code>\stepcounter</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cstepcounter"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\stepcounter{<var>counter</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Globally adds one to <var>counter</var> and resets all counters numbered
+within it. (For the definition of &ldquo;counters numbered within&rdquo;,
+see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>.)
+</p>
+<p>This command differs from <code>\refstepcounter</code> in that this one does
+not influence references&nbsp;&mdash; it does not define the current
+<code>\ref</code> value to be the result of <code>\thecounter</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\stepcounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Counters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.8 <code>\day</code> &amp; <code>\month</code> &amp; <code>\year</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cday"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmonth"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cyear"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX defines the counter <code>\day</code> for the day of the month
+(nominally with value between 1 and 31), <code>\month</code> for the month of
+the year (nominally with value between 1 and 12), and year <code>\year</code>.
+When TeX starts up, they are set from the current values on the
+system. The related command <code>\today</code> produces a string
+representing the current day (see <a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a>).
+</p>
+<p>They counters are not updated as the job progresses so in principle they
+could be incorrect by the end. In addition, TeX does no sanity
+check:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\day=-2 \month=13 \year=-4 \today
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>gives no error or warning and results in the output &lsquo;<samp>-2, -4</samp>&rsquo; (the
+bogus month value produces no output).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Lengths"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="n" rel="next">Making paragraphs</a>, Previous: <a href="#Counters" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Counters</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Lengths-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">14 Lengths</h2>
+
+<a name="index-lengths_002c-defining-and-using"></a>
+
+<p>A <em>length</em> is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a
+length as an argument.
+</p>
+<p>Lengths come in two types. A <em>rigid length</em> such as <code>10pt</code>
+does not contain a <code>plus</code> or <code>minus</code> component. (Plain TeX
+calls this a <em>dimen</em>.) A <em>rubber length</em> (what Plain TeX
+calls a <em>skip</em>) such as as with <code>1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm</code>
+can contain either or both of those components. In that rubber length,
+the <code>1cm</code> is the <em>natural length</em> while the other two, the
+<code>plus</code> and <code>minus</code> components, allow TeX to stretch or
+shrink the length to optimize placement.
+</p>
+<p>The illustrations below use these two commands.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">% make a black bar 10pt tall and #1 wide
+\newcommand{\blackbar}[1]{\rule{#1}{10pt}}
+
+% Make a box around #2 that is #1 wide (excluding the border)
+\newcommand{\showhbox}[2]{%
+ \fboxsep=0pt\fbox{\hbox to #1{#2}}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This example uses those commands to show a black bar 100&nbsp;points
+long between &lsquo;<samp>XXX</samp>&rsquo; and &lsquo;<samp>YYY</samp>&rsquo;. This length is rigid.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">XXX\showhbox{100pt}{\blackbar{100pt}}YYY
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>As for rubber lengths, shrinking is simpler one: with <code>1cm minus
+0.05cm</code>, the natural length is 1cm but TeX can shrink it down
+as far as 0.95cm. Beyond that, TeX refuses to shrink any more.
+Thus, below the first one works fine, producing a space of
+98&nbsp;points between the two bars.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{101pt}\hspace{100pt minus 2pt}\blackbar{101pt}}YYY
+
+XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{105pt}\hspace{100pt minus 1pt}\blackbar{105pt}}YYY
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>But the second one gets a warning like &lsquo;<samp>Overfull \hbox (1.0pt too
+wide) detected at line 17</samp>&rsquo;. In the output the first &lsquo;<samp>Y</samp>&rsquo; is
+overwritten by the end of the black bar, because the box&rsquo;s material is
+wider than the 300pt allocated, as TeX has refused to shrink
+the total to less than 309&nbsp;points.
+</p>
+<p>Stretching is like shrinking except that if TeX is asked to stretch
+beyond the given amount, it will do it. Here the first line is fine,
+producing a space of 110&nbsp;points between the bars.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 10pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+
+XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 1pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In the second line TeX needs a stretch of 10&nbsp;points and only
+1&nbsp;point was specified. TeX stretches the space to the required
+length but it gives you a warning like &lsquo;<samp>Underfull \hbox (badness
+10000) detected at line 22</samp>&rsquo;. (We won&rsquo;t discuss badness.)
+</p>
+<p>You can put both stretch and shrink in the same length, as in
+<code>1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex</code>.
+</p>
+<p>If TeX is setting two or more rubber lengths then it allocates the
+stretch or shrink in proportion.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{100pt}% left
+ \hspace{0pt plus 50pt}\blackbar{80pt}\hspace{0pt plus 10pt}% middle
+ \blackbar{100pt}}YYY % right
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The left and right bars take up 100&nbsp;points, so the middle needs
+another 100. The middle bar is 80&nbsp;points so the two
+<code>\hspace</code>&rsquo;s must stretch 20&nbsp;points. Because the two are
+<code>plus 50pt</code> and <code>plus 10pt</code>, TeX gets 5/6 of the stretch
+from the first space and 1/6 from the second.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>plus</code> or <code>minus</code> component of a rubber length can contain
+a <em>fill</em> component, as in <code>1in plus2fill</code>. This gives the
+length infinite stretchability or shrinkability so that TeX could set
+it to any distance. Here the two figures will be equal-spaced across
+the page.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{godel.png}%
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{einstein.png}%
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>TeX actually has three levels of infinity for glue components:
+<code>fil</code>, <code>fill</code>, and <code>filll</code>. The later ones are more
+infinite than the earlier ones. Ordinarily document authors only use
+the middle one (see <a href="#g_t_005chfill">\hfill</a> and see <a href="#g_t_005cvfill">\vfill</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length, so
+that after <code>\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}</code> and
+<code>\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}</code> then the value of
+<code>\zlength</code> is <code>3in</code>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Units-of-length" accesskey="1">Units of length</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">The units that LaTeX knows.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csetlength" accesskey="2">\setlength</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Set the value of a length.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005caddtolength" accesskey="3">\addtolength</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Add a quantity to a length.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csettodepth" accesskey="4">\settodepth</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Set a length to the depth of something.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csettoheight" accesskey="5">\settoheight</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Set a length to the height of something.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csettowidth" accesskey="6">\settowidth</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Set a length to the width of something.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Units-of-length"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csetlength" accesskey="n" rel="next">\setlength</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Units-of-length-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.1 Units of length</h3>
+
+<a name="index-units_002c-of-length"></a>
+
+<p>TeX and LaTeX know about these units both inside and outside of
+math mode.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>pt</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-pt"></a>
+<a name="index-Point"></a>
+<a name="units-of-length-pt"></a><p>Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two decimal
+places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>pc</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-pica"></a>
+<a name="index-pc"></a>
+<a name="units-of-length-pc"></a><p>Pica, 12 pt
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>in</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-in"></a>
+<a name="index-inch"></a>
+<a name="units-of-length-in"></a><p>Inch, 72.27 pt
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>bp</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-bp"></a>
+<a name="index-Big-point"></a>
+<a name="units-of-length-bp"></a><p>Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in
+PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>cm</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-Centimeter"></a>
+<a name="index-cm"></a>
+<a name="units-of-length-cm"></a><p>Centimeter
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>mm</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-Millimeter"></a>
+<a name="index-mm"></a>
+<a name="units-of-length-mm"></a><p>Millimeter
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>dd</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-Didot-point"></a>
+<a name="index-dd"></a>
+<a name="units-of-length-dd"></a><p>Didot point, 1.07 pt
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>cc</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-Cicero"></a>
+<a name="index-cc"></a>
+<a name="units-of-length-cc"></a><p>Cicero, 12 dd
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>sp</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-Scaled-point"></a>
+<a name="index-sp"></a>
+<a name="units-of-length-sp"></a><p>Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-ex"></a>
+<a name="index-x_002dheight"></a>
+<a name="index-ex-1"></a>
+<a name="index-m_002dwidth"></a>
+<a name="index-em"></a>
+<a name="index-em-1"></a>
+<a name="Lengths_002fem"></a><a name="Lengths_002fen"></a><a name="Lengths_002fex"></a><a name="units-of-length-em"></a><a name="units-of-length-en"></a><a name="units-of-length-ex"></a><p>Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer of
+the font. The x-height of the current font <em>ex</em>, traditionally the
+height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical
+lengths. Similarly <em>em</em>, traditionally the width of the capital
+letter M, is often used for horizontal lengths (there is also
+<code>\enspace</code>, which is <code>0.5em</code>). Use of these can help make a
+definition work better across font changes. For example, a definition
+of the vertical space between list items given as
+<code>\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex}</code> is more
+likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a definition
+given in points.
+</p>
+<a name="index-mu_002c-math-unit"></a>
+<a name="index-mu"></a>
+<p>In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
+<em>mu</em> given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family. See <a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csetlength"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005caddtolength" accesskey="n" rel="next">\addtolength</a>, Previous: <a href="#Units-of-length" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Units of length</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csetlength-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.2 <code>\setlength</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005csetlength"></a>
+<a name="index-lengths_002c-setting"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setlength{<var>len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Set the length <var>len</var> to <var>amount</var>. The length name <var>len</var>
+must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>. The <code>amount</code> can be a
+rubber length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that LaTeX understands (see <a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Below, with LaTeX&rsquo;s defaults the first paragraph will be indented
+while the second will not.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">I told the doctor I broke my leg in two places.
+
+\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+He said stop going to those places.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>If you did not declare <var>len</var> with <code>\newlength</code>, for example if
+you mistype the above as
+<code>\newlength{\specparindent}\setlength{\sepcparindent}{...}</code>,
+then you get an error like &lsquo;<samp>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt;
+\sepcindent</samp>&rsquo;. If you omit the backslash at the start of the length name
+then you get an error like &lsquo;<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. &lt;to be
+read again&gt; \relax l.19 \setlength{specparindent}{0.6\parindent}</samp>&rsquo;
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005caddtolength"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csettodepth" accesskey="n" rel="next">\settodepth</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csetlength" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\setlength</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005caddtolength-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.3 <code>\addtolength</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005caddtolength"></a>
+<a name="index-lengths_002c-adding-to"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\addtolength{<var>len</var>}{<var>amount</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Increment the length <var>len</var> by <var>amount</var>. The length name
+<var>len</var> begins with a backslash, <code>\</code>. The <code>amount</code> is a
+rubber length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that LaTeX understands (see <a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Below, if <code>\parskip</code> starts with the value <code>0pt plus 1pt</code>
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Doctor: how is the boy who swallowed the silver dollar?
+\addtolength{\parskip}{1pt}
+
+Nurse: no change.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>then it has the value <code>1pt plus 1pt</code> for the second paragraph.
+</p>
+<p>If you did not declare the length <var>len</var> with <code>\newlength</code>, if
+for example you mistype the above as
+<code>\addtolength{\specparindent}{0.6\praindent}</code>, then you get
+something like &lsquo;<samp>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt; \praindent</samp>&rsquo;.
+If you leave off the backslash at the start of <var>len</var>, as in
+<code>\addtolength{parindent}{1pt}</code>, then you get something like
+&lsquo;<samp>You can't use `the letter p' after \advance</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csettodepth"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csettoheight" accesskey="n" rel="next">\settoheight</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddtolength" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\addtolength</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csettodepth-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.4 <code>\settodepth</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005csettodepth"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\settodepth{<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Set the length <var>len</var> to the depth of box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the <var>text</var> argument. The length name <var>len</var> must
+begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.
+</p>
+<p>This will show how low the character descenders go.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newlength{\alphabetdepth}
+\settodepth{\alphabetdepth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+\the\alphabetdepth
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>If you did not set aside the length <var>len</var>, if for example you
+mistype the above as <code>\settodepth{\aplhabetdepth}{abc...}</code>,
+then you get something like &lsquo;<samp>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt;
+\aplhabetdepth</samp>&rsquo;. If you leave the backslash out of <var>len</var>, as in
+<code>\settodepth{alphabetdepth}{...}</code> then you get something like
+&lsquo;<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. &lt;to be read again&gt; \setbox</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csettoheight"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csettowidth" accesskey="n" rel="next">\settowidth</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csettodepth" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\settodepth</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csettoheight-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.5 <code>\settoheight</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005csettoheight"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\settoheight{<var>len</var>}{text}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Sets the length <var>len</var> to the height of box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the <code>text</code> argument. The length name <var>len</var> must
+begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.
+</p>
+<p>This will show how high the characters go.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newlength{\alphabetheight}
+\settoheight{\alphabetheight}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+\the\alphabetheight
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>If no such length <var>len</var> has been declared with <code>\newlength</code>, if
+for example you mistype as
+<code>\settoheight{\aplhabetheight}{abc...}</code>, then you get something
+like &lsquo;<samp>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt; \alphabetheight</samp>&rsquo;. If
+you leave the backslash out of <var>len</var>, as in
+<code>\settoheight{alphabetheight}{...}</code> then you get something like
+&lsquo;<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. &lt;to be read again&gt; \setbox</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csettowidth"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csettoheight" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\settoheight</a>, Up: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="u" rel="up">Lengths</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csettowidth-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.6 <code>\settowidth</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005csettowidth"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\settowidth{<var>len</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Set the length <var>len</var> to the width of the box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the <var>text</var> argument. The length name <var>len</var> must
+begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.
+</p>
+<p>This measures the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newlength{\alphabetwidth}
+\settowidth{\alphabetwidth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+\the\alphabetwidth
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>If no such length <var>len</var> has been set aside, if for example you
+mistype the above as <code>\settowidth{\aplhabetwidth}{abc...}</code>,
+then you get something like &lsquo;<samp>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt;
+\aplhabetwidth</samp>&rsquo;. If you leave the backslash out of <var>len</var>, as in
+<code>\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...}</code> then you get something like
+&lsquo;<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. &lt;to be read again&gt; \setbox</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Making-paragraphs"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Math-formulas" accesskey="n" rel="next">Math formulas</a>, Previous: <a href="#Lengths" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Lengths</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Making-paragraphs-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">15 Making paragraphs</h2>
+
+<a name="index-making-paragraphs"></a>
+<a name="index-paragraphs"></a>
+
+<p>To start a paragraph, just type some text. To end the current
+paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, separated by
+two empty lines.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession
+of a good fortune, must be in want of a wife.
+
+However little known the feelings or views of such a man may be on his
+first entering a neighbourhood, this truth is so well fixed in the minds
+of the surrounding families, that he is considered the rightful property
+of some one or other of their daughters.
+
+``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day,
+``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The separator lines must be empty, including not containing a comment
+character, <code>%</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Once LaTeX has gathered all of a paragraph&rsquo;s contents it divides that
+content into lines in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph
+(see <a href="#Line-breaking">Line breaking</a>).
+</p>
+<p>There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don&rsquo;t put a
+blank line in math mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>); here the line before the
+<code>\end{equation}</code>
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{equation}
+ 2^{|S|} &gt; |S|
+
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>will get you the error &lsquo;<samp>Missing $ inserted</samp>&rsquo;. Similarly, the blank
+line in this <code>section</code> argument
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\section{aaa
+
+bbb}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>gets &lsquo;<samp>Runaway argument? {aaa ! Paragraph ended before \@sect was
+complete</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cpar" accesskey="1">\par</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">End the current paragraph.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent" accesskey="2">\indent &amp; \noindent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Go into horizontal mode, possibly with an indent.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip" accesskey="3">\parindent &amp; \parskip</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Space added before paragraphs.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Marginal-notes" accesskey="4">Marginal notes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Put remarks in the margin.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cpar"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent" accesskey="n" rel="next">\indent &amp; \noindent</a>, Up: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="u" rel="up">Making paragraphs</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cpar-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">15.1 <code>\par</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cpar"></a>
+<a name="index-paragraph_002c-ending"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis (note that while reading the input TeX converts two
+consecutive newlines to a <code>\par</code>):
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\par
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>End the current paragraph. The usual way to separate paragraphs is with
+a blank line but the <code>\par</code> command is entirely equivalent. This
+command is robust (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This example uses <code>\par</code> rather than a blank line simply for
+readability.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\syllabusLegalese}{%
+ \whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In LR mode or a vertical mode the <code>\par</code> command does nothing but
+it terminates paragraph mode, switching LaTeX to vertical mode
+(see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
+</p>
+<p>You cannot use the <code>\par</code> command in a math mode. You also cannot
+use it in the argument of many commands, such as the <code>\section</code>
+command (see <a href="#Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</a> and <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\par</code> command is not the same as the <code>\paragraph</code>
+command. The latter is, like <code>\section</code> or <code>\subsection</code>, a
+sectioning unit used by the standard LaTeX documents
+(see <a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\par</code> command is not the same as <code>\newline</code> or the line
+break double backslash, <code>\\</code>. The difference is that <code>\par</code>
+ends the paragraph, not just the line, and also triggers the addition of
+the between-paragraph vertical space <code>\parskip</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent &amp; \parskip</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The output from this example
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">xyz
+
+\setlength{\parindent}{3in}
+\setlength{\parskip}{5in}
+\noindent test\indent test1\par test2
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>is: after &lsquo;<samp>xyz</samp>&rsquo; there is a vertical skip of 5&nbsp;inches and then
+&lsquo;<samp>test</samp>&rsquo; appears, aligned with the left margin. On the same line,
+there is an empty horizontal space of 3&nbsp;inches and then
+&lsquo;<samp>test1</samp>&rsquo; appears. Finally. there is a vertical space of
+5&nbsp;inches, followed by a fresh paragraph with a paragraph indent of
+3&nbsp;inches, and then LaTeX puts the text &lsquo;<samp>test2</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip" accesskey="n" rel="next">\parindent &amp; \parskip</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpar" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\par</a>, Up: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="u" rel="up">Making paragraphs</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">15.2 <code>\indent</code> &amp; <code>\noindent</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cindent"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnoindent"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cparindent-1"></a>
+<a name="index-indent_002c-forcing"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\indent
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\noindent
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Go into horizontal mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>). The <code>\indent</code> command
+first outputs an empty box whose width is <code>\parindent</code>. These
+commands are robust (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line.
+See <a href="#g_t_005cpar">\par</a> for the difference between this command and <code>\par</code>. To
+start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted
+paragraph, use <code>\noindent</code>.
+</p>
+<p>In the middle of a paragraph the <code>\noindent</code> command has no effect,
+because LaTeX is already in horizontal mode there. The
+<code>\indent</code> command&rsquo;s only effect is to output a space.
+</p>
+<p>This example starts a fresh paragraph.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">... end of the prior paragraph.
+
+\noindent This paragraph is not indented.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>and this continues an interrupted paragraph.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">The data
+
+\begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{rl} ... \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\noindent shows this clearly.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>To omit indentation in the entire document put
+<code>\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}</code> in the preamble. If you do that,
+you may want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs,
+<code>\parskip</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent &amp; \parskip</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-indentfirst-5"></a>
+<a name="index-indentfirst-package-5"></a>
+
+<p>Default LaTeX styles have the first paragraph after a section that is
+not indented, as is traditional typesetting in English. To change that,
+look on CTAN for the package <code>indentfirst</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Marginal-notes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Marginal notes</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\indent &amp; \noindent</a>, Up: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="u" rel="up">Making paragraphs</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">15.3 <code>\parindent</code> &amp; <code>\parskip</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cparindent-2"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cparskip"></a>
+<a name="index-paragraph-indentation"></a>
+<a name="index-vertical-space-before-paragraphs"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setlength{\parskip}{<var>horizontal len</var>}
+\setlength{\parinden}{<var>vertical len</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Both are a rubber lengths (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). They give the indentation
+of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages
+(see <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>), and the vertical space between paragraphs.
+</p>
+<p>This, put in the preamble,
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+\setlength{\parskip}{1ex}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented,
+but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase
+&lsquo;<samp>x</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>In standard LaTeX documents, the default value for <code>\parindent</code>
+in one-column documents is <code>15pt</code> when the default text size is
+<code>10pt</code> , <code>17pt</code> for <code>11pt</code>, and <code>1.5em</code> for
+<code>12pt</code>. In two-column documents it is <code>1em</code>. The default
+value for <code>\parskip</code> in LaTeX&rsquo;s standard document styles is
+<code>0pt plus1pt</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Marginal-notes"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\parindent &amp; \parskip</a>, Up: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="u" rel="up">Making paragraphs</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Marginal-notes-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">15.4 Marginal notes</h3>
+
+<a name="index-marginal-notes"></a>
+<a name="index-notes-in-the-margin"></a>
+<a name="index-remarks-in-the-margin"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmarginpar"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\marginpar{<var>right</var>}
+\marginpar[<var>left</var>]{<var>right</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Create a note in the margin. The first line of the note will have the
+same baseline as the line in the text where the <code>\marginpar</code>
+occurs.
+</p>
+<p>The margin that LaTeX uses for the note depends on the current layout
+(see <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a>) and also on <code>\reversemarginpar</code>
+(see below). If you are using one-sided layout (document option
+<code>oneside</code>) then it goes in the right margin. If you are using
+two-sided layout (document option <code>twoside</code>) then it goes in the
+outside margin. If you are in two-column layout (document option
+<code>twocolumn</code>) then it goes in the nearest margin.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005creversemarginpar"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnormalmarginpar"></a>
+<p>If you declare <code>\reversemarginpar</code> then LaTeX will place
+subsequent marginal notes in the opposite margin to that given in the
+prior paragraph. Revert that to the default position with
+<code>\normalmarginpar</code>.
+</p>
+<p>When you specify the optional argument <var>left</var> then it is used for
+a note in the left margin, while the mandatory argument <var>right</var> is
+used for a note in the right margin.
+</p>
+<p>Normally, a note&rsquo;s first word will not be hyphenated. You can enable
+hyphenation there by beginning <var>left</var> or <var>right</var> with
+<code>\hspace{0pt}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\marginparpush</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmarginparpush-2"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="marginal-notes-marginparpush"></a><p>Minimum vertical space between notes; default &lsquo;<samp>7pt</samp>&rsquo; for
+&lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo; documents, &lsquo;<samp>5pt</samp>&rsquo; else.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\marginparsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmarginparsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="marginal-notes-marginparsep"></a><p>Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default
+&lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo; for &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo; documents, &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo; else.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\marginparwidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmarginparwidth-2"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="marginal-notes-marginparwidth"></a><p>Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo; document
+is &lsquo;<samp>90pt</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>83pt</samp>&rsquo; for &lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo;, and &lsquo;<samp>68pt</samp>&rsquo; for
+&lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo;; &lsquo;<samp>17pt</samp>&rsquo; more in each case for a two-sided document.
+In two column mode, the default is &lsquo;<samp>48pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>The standard LaTeX routine for marginal notes does not prevent
+notes from falling off the bottom of the page.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Math-formulas"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Modes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Modes</a>, Previous: <a href="#Making-paragraphs" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Making paragraphs</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Math-formulas-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">16 Math formulas</h2>
+
+<a name="index-math-formulas"></a>
+<a name="index-formulas_002c-math"></a>
+<a name="index-math-mode_002c-entering"></a>
+<a name="index-environment_002c-math-1"></a>
+<a name="index-math-environment-1"></a>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-displaymath-1"></a>
+<a name="index-displaymath-environment-1"></a>
+
+<a name="index-environment_002c-equation-1"></a>
+<a name="index-equation-environment-1"></a>
+
+
+<p>Produce mathematical text by putting LaTeX into math mode or display
+math mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>). This example shows both.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">The wave equation for \( u \) is
+\begin{displaymath}
+ \frac{\partial^2u}{\partial t^2} = c^2\nabla^2u
+\end{displaymath}
+where \( \nabla^2 \) is the spatial Laplacian and \( c \) is constant.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Math mode is for inline mathematics. In the above example it is invoked
+by the starting <code>\(</code> and finished by the matching ending <code>\)</code>.
+Display math mode is for displayed equations and here is invoked by the
+<code>displaymath</code> environment. Note that any mathematical text
+whatever, including mathematical text consisting of just one character,
+is handled in math mode.
+</p>
+<p>When in math mode or display math mode, LaTeX handles many aspects of
+your input text differently than in other text modes. For example,
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">contrast x+y with \( x+y \)
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>in math mode the letters are in italics and the spacing around the plus
+sign is different.
+</p>
+<p>There are three ways to make inline formulas, to put LaTeX in math
+mode.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\( <var>mathematical material</var> \)
+$ <var>mathematical material</var> $
+\begin{math} <var>mathematical material</var> \end{math}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The first form is preferred and the second is quite common, but the
+third form is rarely used. You can sometimes use one and sometimes
+another, as in <code>\(x\) and $y$</code>. You can use these in paragraph
+mode or in LR mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
+</p>
+<p>To make displayed formulas, put LaTeX into display math mode with
+either:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{displaymath}
+ <var>mathematical material</var>
+\end{displaymath}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{equation}
+ <var>mathematical material</var>
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>(see <a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a>, see <a href="#equation">equation</a>). The only difference is that
+with the <code>equation</code> environment, LaTeX puts a formula number
+alongside the formula. The construct <code>\[ <var>math</var> \]</code> is
+equivalent to <code>\begin{displaymath} <var>math</var>
+\end{displaymath}</code>. These environments can only be used in paragraph
+mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cdisplaystyle"></a>
+<p>The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some differences.
+One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts; in display
+math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they are closer
+together.
+</p>
+<p>Sometimes you want the display math typographical treatment to happen in
+the inline math mode. For this, the <code>\displaystyle</code> declaration
+forces the size and style of the formula to be that of
+<code>displaymath</code>. Thus <code>\(\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty
+x_n\)</code> will have the limits above and below the summation sign, not next
+to it. Another example is that
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{r|cc}
+ \textsc{Name} &amp;\textsc{Series} &amp;\textsc{Sum} \\ \hline
+ Arithmetic &amp;\( a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b) \)
+ &amp;\( na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac{b}{2}\) \\
+ Geometric &amp;\( a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^{n-1} \)
+ &amp;\(\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}\) \\
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>because it has no <code>\displaystyle</code>, the &lsquo;<samp>Arithmetic</samp>&rsquo; line&rsquo;s
+fraction will be scrunched. But, because of its <code>\displaystyle</code>,
+the &lsquo;<samp>Geometric</samp>&rsquo; line&rsquo;s fraction will be easy to read, with
+characters the same size as in the rest of the line.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsmath-5"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package-5"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsfonts"></a>
+<a name="index-amsfonts-package"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-mathtools"></a>
+<a name="index-mathtools-package"></a>
+
+<p>The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of
+packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics,
+<samp>amsmath</samp> and <samp>amssymb</samp> (also be aware of the <samp>mathtools</samp>
+package that is an extension to, and loads, <samp>amsmath</samp>). New
+documents that will have mathematical text should use these packages.
+Descriptions of these packages is outside the scope of this document;
+see their documentation on CTAN.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts" accesskey="1">Subscripts &amp; superscripts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Also known as exponent or index.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Math-symbols" accesskey="2">Math symbols</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Various mathematical squiggles.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Math-functions" accesskey="3">Math functions</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Math function names like sin and exp.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Math-accents" accesskey="4">Math accents</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Accents in math.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining" accesskey="5">Over- and Underlining</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Things over or under formulas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode" accesskey="6">Spacing in math mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Thick, medium, thin, and negative spaces.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Math-miscellany" accesskey="7">Math miscellany</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Stuff that doesn&rsquo;t fit anywhere else.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Subscripts-_0026-superscripts"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Math-symbols" accesskey="n" rel="next">Math symbols</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-formulas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math formulas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Subscripts-_0026-superscripts-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">16.1 Subscripts &amp; superscripts</h3>
+
+<a name="index-superscript"></a>
+<a name="index-subscript"></a>
+<a name="index-exponent"></a>
+<a name="index-_005f"></a>
+<a name="index-_005e"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis (in math mode or display math mode), one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"><var>base</var>^<var>exp</var>
+<var>base</var>^{<var>exp</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"><var>base</var>_<var>exp</var>
+<var>base</var>_{<var>exp</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Make <var>exp</var> appear as a superscript of <var>base</var> (with the caret
+character,&nbsp;<code>^</code>) or a subscript (with
+underscore,&nbsp;<code>_</code>).
+</p>
+<p>In this example the <code>0</code>&rsquo;s and <code>1</code>&rsquo;s are subscripts while the
+<code>2</code>&rsquo;s are superscripts.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\( (x_0+x_1)^2 \leq (x_0)^2+(x_1)^2 \)
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>To have the subscript or superscript contain more than one character,
+surround the expression with curly braces, as in <code>e^{-2x}</code>.
+This example&rsquo;s fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression
+for the exponent.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{displaymath}
+ (3^3)^3=27^3=19\,683
+ \qquad
+ 3^{(3^3)}=3^{27}=7\,625\,597\,484\,987
+\end{displaymath}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>LaTeX knows how to handle a superscript on a superscript, or a
+subscript on a subscript, or supers on subs, or subs on supers. So,
+expressions such as <code>e^{x^2}</code> and <code>x_{i_0}</code> give correct
+output. Note the use in those expressions of curly braces to give the
+<var>base</var> a determined <var>exp</var>. If you enter <code>\(3^3^3\)</code> then
+you get &lsquo;<samp>Double superscript</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a
+superscript. In this example the integral has both. They come out in
+the correct place without any author intervention.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{displaymath}
+ \int_{x=a}^b f'(x)\,dx = f(b)-f(a)
+\end{displaymath}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Note the parentheses around <code>x=a</code> to make the entire expression a
+subscript.
+</p>
+<p>To put a superscript or subscript before a symbol, use a construct like
+<code>{}_t K^2</code>. The empty curly braces <code>{}</code> give the
+subscript something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally
+attaching to a prior symbols.
+</p>
+<p>Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or
+display math mode, as in <code>the expression x^2</code>, will get you
+the error &lsquo;<samp>Missing $ inserted</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-mhchem"></a>
+<a name="index-mhchem-package"></a>
+
+<p>A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is to
+typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as
+<samp>mhchem</samp>; see CTAN.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Math-symbols"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Math-functions" accesskey="n" rel="next">Math functions</a>, Previous: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Subscripts &amp; superscripts</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-formulas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math formulas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Math-symbols-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">16.2 Math symbols</h3>
+
+<a name="index-math-symbols"></a>
+<a name="index-symbols_002c-math"></a>
+<a name="index-greek-letters"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-symbols"></a>
+<a name="index-symbols-package"></a>
+
+
+<p>LaTeX provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that
+anyone uses. For example, if you include <code>$\pi$</code> in your source,
+you will get the pi symbol &#x03C0;. See the <samp>Comprehensive
+LaTeX Symbol List</samp> at
+<a href="https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/">https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/</a>.
+</p>
+<p>Here is a list of commonly-used symbols. It is by no means exhaustive.
+Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its symbol class,
+which determines the spacing around it, is given in parenthesis. Unless
+said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can be used only in math
+mode. To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current
+mode, see <a href="#g_t_005censuremath">\ensuremath</a>.
+</p>
+
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\|</code>
+<a name="index-_005c_007c"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2225; Parallel (relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\parallel</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\aleph</code>
+<a name="index-_005caleph"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2135; Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\alpha</code>
+<a name="index-_005calpha"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03B1; Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\amalg</code>
+<a name="index-_005camalg"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2A3F; Disjoint union (binary)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\angle</code>
+<a name="index-_005cangle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2220; Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than
+sign&nbsp;<code>&lt;</code> and angle bracket&nbsp;<code>\langle</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\approx</code>
+<a name="index-_005capprox"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2248; Almost equal to (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ast</code>
+<a name="index-_005cast"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2217; Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed
+(binary). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>*</code>, which is often a superscript or
+subscript, as in the Kleene star. Similar:&nbsp;<code>\star</code>, which is
+five-pointed, and is sometimes used as a general binary operation, and
+sometimes reserved for cross-correlation.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\asymp</code>
+<a name="index-_005casymp"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x224D; Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\backslash</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbackslash"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>\ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus&nbsp;<code>\setminus</code>, and
+<code>\textbackslash</code> for backslash outside of math mode.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\beta</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbeta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03B2; Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigcap</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigcap"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22C2; Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
+binary intersection&nbsp;<code>\cap</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigcirc</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigcirc"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x26AA; Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function
+composition&nbsp;<code>\circ</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigcup</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigcup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22C3; Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary
+union&nbsp;<code>\cup</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigodot</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigodot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2A00; Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigoplus</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigoplus"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2A01; Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigotimes</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigotimes"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2A02; Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigtriangledown</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigtriangledown"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x25BD; Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down
+(operator).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigtriangleup</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigtriangleup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x25B3; Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up (operator).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigsqcup</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigsqcup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2A06; Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\biguplus</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbiguplus"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2A04; Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus
+(operator). (Note that the name has only one p.)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigvee</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigvee"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22C1; Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigwedge</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigwedge"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22C0; Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bot</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22A5; Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered
+set, or a contradiction (ordinary). See also&nbsp;<code>\top</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bowtie</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbowtie"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22C8; Natural join of two relations (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Box</code>
+<a name="index-_005cBox"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x25A1; Modal operator for necessity; square open box
+(ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bullet</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbullet"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-bullet-symbol"></a>
+<p>&#x2022; Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication
+dot&nbsp;<code>\cdot</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cap</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccap"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2229; Intersection of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigcap</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cdot</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccdot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22C5; Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet
+dot&nbsp;<code>\bullet</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\chi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cchi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03C7; Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\circ</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccirc"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2218; Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar:
+variable-sized operator&nbsp;<code>\bigcirc</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\clubsuit</code>
+<a name="index-_005cclubsuit"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2663; Club card suit (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\complement</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccomplement"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2201; Set complement, used as a superscript as in
+<code>$S^\complement$</code> (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. Also used:
+<code>$S^{\mathsf{c}}$</code> or&nbsp;<code>$\bar{S}$</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cong</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccong"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2245; Congruent (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\coprod</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccoprod"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2210; Coproduct (operator).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cup</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x222A; Union of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigcup</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dagger</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdagger"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2020; Dagger relation (binary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dashv</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdashv"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22A3; Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation). Similar:
+turnstile&nbsp;<code>\vdash</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ddagger</code>
+<a name="index-_005cddagger"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2021; Double dagger relation (binary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Delta</code>
+<a name="index-_005cDelta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x0394; Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\delta</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdelta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03B4; Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Diamond</code>
+<a name="index-_005cDiamond"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x25C7; Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\diamond</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdiamond"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22C4; Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large
+diamond&nbsp;<code>\Diamond</code>, circle bullet&nbsp;<code>\bullet</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\diamondsuit</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdiamondsuit"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2662; Diamond card suit (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\div</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdiv"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x00F7; Division sign (binary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\doteq</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdoteq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2250; Approaches the limit (relation). Similar: geometrically equal
+to&nbsp;<code>\Doteq</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\downarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdownarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2193; Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar:
+<code>\Downarrow</code> double line down arrow.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Downarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cDownarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21D3; Double line down arrow (relation). Similar:
+<code>\downarrow</code> single line down arrow.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ell</code>
+<a name="index-_005cell"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2113; Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\emptyset</code>
+<a name="index-_005cemptyset"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2205; Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is
+<code>\varnothing</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\epsilon</code>
+<a name="index-_005cepsilon"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03F5; Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to
+Greek text letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small
+letter epsilon <code>\varepsilon</code>&nbsp;&#x03B5;. Related:
+the set membership relation <code>\in</code>&nbsp;&#x2208;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\equiv</code>
+<a name="index-_005cequiv"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2261; Equivalence (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\eta</code>
+<a name="index-_005ceta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03B7; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\exists</code>
+<a name="index-_005cexists"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2203; Existential quantifier (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\flat</code>
+<a name="index-_005cflat"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x266D; Musical flat (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\forall</code>
+<a name="index-_005cforall"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2200; Universal quantifier (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\frown</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfrown"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2322; Downward curving arc (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Gamma</code>
+<a name="index-_005cGamma"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x0393; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\gamma</code>
+<a name="index-_005cgamma"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03B3; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ge</code>
+<a name="index-_005cge"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2265; Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for&nbsp;<code>\geq</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\geq</code>
+<a name="index-_005cgeq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2265; Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for&nbsp;<code>\ge</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\gets</code>
+<a name="index-_005cgets"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2190; Is assigned the value (relation).
+Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\leftarrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\gg</code>
+<a name="index-_005cgg"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x226B; Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less
+than&nbsp;<code>\ll</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\hbar</code>
+<a name="index-_005chbar"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x210F; Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\heartsuit</code>
+<a name="index-_005cheartsuit"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2661; Heart card suit (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\hookleftarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005chookleftarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21A9; Hooked left arrow (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\hookrightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005chookrightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21AA; Hooked right arrow (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\iff</code>
+<a name="index-_005ciff"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x27F7; If and only if (relation). It is <code>\Longleftrightarrow</code>
+with a <code>\thickmuskip</code> on either side.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Im</code>
+<a name="index-_005cIm"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2111; Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part&nbsp;<code>\Re</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\imath</code>
+<a name="index-_005cimath"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-dotless-i_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (see <a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\in</code>
+<a name="index-_005cin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2208; Set element (relation). See also: lowercase lunate
+epsilon&nbsp;<code>\epsilon</code>&#x03F5; and small letter script
+epsilon&nbsp;<code>\varepsilon</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\infty</code>
+<a name="index-_005cinfty"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x221E; Infinity (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\int</code>
+<a name="index-_005cint"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x222B; Integral (operator).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\iota</code>
+<a name="index-_005ciota"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03B9; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Join</code>
+<a name="index-_005cJoin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2A1D; Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain
+TeX.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\jmath</code>
+<a name="index-_005cjmath"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-dotless-j_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (see <a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\kappa</code>
+<a name="index-_005ckappa"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03BA; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Lambda</code>
+<a name="index-_005cLambda"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x039B; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lambda</code>
+<a name="index-_005clambda"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03BB; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\land</code>
+<a name="index-_005cland"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2227; Logical and (binary). This is a synonym for <code>\wedge</code>.
+See also logical or&nbsp;<code>\lor</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\langle</code>
+<a name="index-_005clangle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x27E8; Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar:
+less-than&nbsp;<code>&lt;</code>. Matches&nbsp;<code>\rangle</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lbrace</code>
+<a name="index-_005clbrace"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x007B; Left curly brace
+(opening). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\{</code>. Matches&nbsp;<code>\rbrace</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lbrack</code>
+<a name="index-_005clbrack"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x005B; Left square bracket (opening).
+Synonym:&nbsp;<code>[</code>. Matches&nbsp;<code>\rbrack</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lceil</code>
+<a name="index-_005clceil"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2308; Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the bottom
+shaved off (opening). Matches&nbsp;<code>\rceil</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\le</code>
+<a name="index-_005cle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2264; Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for&nbsp;<code>\leq</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\leadsto</code>
+<a name="index-_005cleadsto"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21DD; Squiggly right arrow (relation). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+To get this symbol outside of math mode you can put
+<code>\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}</code> in the
+preamble and then use <code>\Leadsto</code> instead.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Leftarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cLeftarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21D0; Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation). Similar:
+single-line left arrow&nbsp;<code>\leftarrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\leftarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cleftarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2190; Single-line left arrow (relation).
+Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\gets</code>. Similar: double-line left
+arrow&nbsp;<code>\Leftarrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\leftharpoondown</code>
+<a name="index-_005cleftharpoondown"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21BD; Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\leftharpoonup</code>
+<a name="index-_005cleftharpoonup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21BC; Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Leftrightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cLeftrightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21D4; Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation).
+Similar: single-line double headed arrow&nbsp;<code>\leftrightarrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\leftrightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cleftrightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2194; Single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
+double-line double headed arrow&nbsp;<code>\Leftrightarrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\leq</code>
+<a name="index-_005cleq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2264; Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for&nbsp;<code>\le</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lfloor</code>
+<a name="index-_005clfloor"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x230A; Left floor bracket (opening). Matches:&nbsp;<code>\floor</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lhd</code>
+<a name="index-_005clhd"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x25C1; Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary).
+Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
+<samp>amssymb</samp> and use&nbsp;<code>\vartriangleleft</code> (which is a relation
+and so gives better spacing).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ll</code>
+<a name="index-_005cll"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x226A; Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater
+than&nbsp;<code>\gg</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lnot</code>
+<a name="index-_005clnot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x00AC; Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\neg</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\longleftarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005clongleftarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x27F5; Long single-line left arrow (relation). Similar: long
+double-line left arrow&nbsp;<code>\Longleftarrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\longleftrightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005clongleftrightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x27F7; Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: long
+double-line double-headed arrow&nbsp;<code>\Longleftrightarrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\longmapsto</code>
+<a name="index-_005clongmapsto"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x27FC; Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
+(relation). Similar: shorter version&nbsp;<code>\mapsto</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\longrightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005clongrightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x27F6; Long single-line right arrow (relation). Similar: long
+double-line right arrow&nbsp;<code>\Longrightarrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lor</code>
+<a name="index-_005clor"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2228; Logical or (binary). Synonym: wedge&nbsp;<code>\wedge</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mapsto</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmapsto"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21A6; Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar (relation).
+Similar: longer version&nbsp;<code>\longmapsto</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mho</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmho"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2127; Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
+Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mid</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmid"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2223; Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of
+<code>\mid</code> is for a set <code>\{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Similar: <code>\vert</code> and&nbsp;<code>|</code> produce the same single-line
+vertical bar symbol but without any spacing (they fall in class
+ordinary) and you should not use them as relations but instead only as
+ordinals, i.e., footnote symbols. For absolute value, see the entry
+for&nbsp;<code>\vert</code> and for norm see the entry for&nbsp;<code>\Vert</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\models</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmodels"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22A8; Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash
+(relation). Similar: long double dash&nbsp;<code>\vDash</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mp</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmp"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2213; Minus or plus (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mu</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmu"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03BC; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\nabla</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnabla"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2207; Hamilton&rsquo;s del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\natural</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnatural"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x266E; Musical natural notation (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ne</code>
+<a name="index-_005cne"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2260; Not equal (relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\neq</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\nearrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnearrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2197; North-east arrow (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\neg</code>
+<a name="index-_005cneg"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x00AC; Logical negation (ordinary).
+Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\lnot</code>. Sometimes instead used for
+negation:&nbsp;<code>\sim</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\neq</code>
+<a name="index-_005cneq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2260; Not equal (relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\ne</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ni</code>
+<a name="index-_005cni"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x220B; Reflected membership epsilon; has the member
+(relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\owns</code>. Similar: is a member
+of&nbsp;<code>\in</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\not</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x0020;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a
+following operator (relation).
+</p>
+<p>Many negated operators are available that don&rsquo;t require <code>\not</code>,
+particularly with the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. For example, <code>\notin</code>
+is typographically preferable to <code>\not\in</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\notin</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnotin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2209; Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset
+of&nbsp;<code>\nsubseteq</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\nu</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnu"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03BD; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\nwarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnwarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2196; North-west arrow (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\odot</code>
+<a name="index-_005codot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2299; Dot inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigodot</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\oint</code>
+<a name="index-_005coint"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x222E; Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle
+(operator).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Omega</code>
+<a name="index-_005cOmega"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03A9; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\omega</code>
+<a name="index-_005comega"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03C9; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ominus</code>
+<a name="index-_005cominus"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2296; Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\oplus</code>
+<a name="index-_005coplus"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2295; Plus sign inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigoplus</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\oslash</code>
+<a name="index-_005coslash"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2298; Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\otimes</code>
+<a name="index-_005cotimes"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2297; Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary). Similar:
+variable-sized operator&nbsp;<code>\bigotimes</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\owns</code>
+<a name="index-_005cowns"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x220B; Reflected membership epsilon; has the member
+(relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\ni</code>. Similar: is a member
+of&nbsp;<code>\in</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\parallel</code>
+<a name="index-_005cparallel"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2225; Parallel (relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\|</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\partial</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpartial"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2202; Partial differential (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\perp</code>
+<a name="index-_005cperp"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x27C2; Perpendicular (relation). Similar:&nbsp;<code>\bot</code> uses the
+same glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class
+ordinary.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\phi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cphi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03D5; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<code>\varphi</code>&nbsp;&#x03C6;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Pi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cPi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03A0; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\pi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03C0; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<code>\varpi</code>&nbsp;&#x03D6;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\pm</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpm"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x00B1; Plus or minus (binary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\prec</code>
+<a name="index-_005cprec"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x227A; Precedes (relation). Similar: less than&nbsp;<code>&lt;</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\preceq</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpreceq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2AAF; Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
+equals&nbsp;<code>\leq</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\prime</code>
+<a name="index-_005cprime"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2032; Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary).
+Typically used as a superscript: <code>$f^\prime$</code>; <code>$f^\prime$</code>
+and <code>$f'$</code> produce the same result. An advantage of the second
+is that <code>$f'''$</code> produces the desired symbol, that is, the same
+result as <code>$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$</code>, but uses rather less
+typing. You can only use <code>\prime</code> in math mode. Using the right
+single quote&nbsp;<code>'</code> in text mode produces a different character
+(apostrophe).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\prod</code>
+<a name="index-_005cprod"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x220F; Product (operator).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\propto</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpropto"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x221D; Is proportional to (relation)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Psi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cPsi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03A8; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\psi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpsi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03C8; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rangle</code>
+<a name="index-_005crangle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x27E9; Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing).
+Similar: greater than&nbsp;<code>&gt;</code>. Matches:<code>\langle</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rbrace</code>
+<a name="index-_005crbrace"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x007D; Right curly brace
+(closing). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\}</code>. Matches&nbsp;<code>\lbrace</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rbrack</code>
+<a name="index-_005crbrack"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x005D; Right square bracket
+(closing). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>]</code>. Matches&nbsp;<code>\lbrack</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rceil</code>
+<a name="index-_005crceil"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2309; Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches&nbsp;<code>\lceil</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Re</code>
+<a name="index-_005cRe"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x211C; Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary). Related:
+double-line, or blackboard bold, R&nbsp;<code>\mathbb{R}</code>; to access
+this, load the <samp>amsfonts</samp> package.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\restriction</code>
+<a name="index-_005crestriction"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21BE; Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym:
+<code>\upharpoonright</code>. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\revemptyset</code>
+<a name="index-_005crevemptyset"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x29B0; Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related:
+<code>\varnothing</code>. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>stix</samp> package.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rfloor</code>
+<a name="index-_005crfloor"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x230B; Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
+off (closing). Matches&nbsp;<code>\lfloor</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rhd</code>
+<a name="index-_005crhd"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x25C1; Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary).
+Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead
+load <samp>amssymb</samp> and use&nbsp;<code>\vartriangleright</code> (which is a
+relation and so gives better spacing).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rho</code>
+<a name="index-_005crho"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03C1; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<code>\varrho</code>&nbsp;&#x03F1;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Rightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cRightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21D2; Implies, right-pointing double line arrow
+(relation). Similar: right single-line arrow&nbsp;<code>\rightarrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005crightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2192; Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\to</code>. Similar: right double line
+arrow&nbsp;<code>\Rightarrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rightharpoondown</code>
+<a name="index-_005crightharpoondown"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21C1; Right-pointing harpoon with barb below
+the line (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rightharpoonup</code>
+<a name="index-_005crightharpoonup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21C0; Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the
+line (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rightleftharpoons</code>
+<a name="index-_005crightleftharpoons"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21CC; Right harpoon up above left harpoon down
+(relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\searrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005csearrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2198; Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\setminus</code>
+<a name="index-_005csetminus"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x29F5; Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash,
+like \ (binary). Similar: backslash&nbsp;<code>\backslash</code> and also
+<code>\textbackslash</code> outside of math mode.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sharp</code>
+<a name="index-_005csharp"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x266F; Musical sharp (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Sigma</code>
+<a name="index-_005cSigma"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03A3; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sigma</code>
+<a name="index-_005csigma"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03C3; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<code>\varsigma</code>&nbsp;&#x03C2;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sim</code>
+<a name="index-_005csim"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x223C; Similar, in a relation (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\simeq</code>
+<a name="index-_005csimeq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2243; Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\smallint</code>
+<a name="index-_005csmallint"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x222B; Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a
+display (operator).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\smile</code>
+<a name="index-_005csmile"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2323; Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\spadesuit</code>
+<a name="index-_005cspadesuit"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2660; Spade card suit (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sqcap</code>
+<a name="index-_005csqcap"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2293; Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar:
+intersection&nbsp;<code>cap</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sqcup</code>
+<a name="index-_005csqcup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2294; Square union symbol (binary). Similar:
+union&nbsp;<code>cup</code>. Related: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigsqcup</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sqsubset</code>
+<a name="index-_005csqsubset"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x228F; Square subset symbol (relation). Similar:
+subset&nbsp;<code>\subset</code>. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sqsubseteq</code>
+<a name="index-_005csqsubseteq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2291; Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or
+equal to&nbsp;<code>\subseteq</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sqsupset</code>
+<a name="index-_005csqsupset"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2290; Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
+superset&nbsp;<code>\supset</code>. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sqsupseteq</code>
+<a name="index-_005csqsupseteq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2292; Square superset or equal symbol (binary).
+Similar: superset or equal&nbsp;<code>\supseteq</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\star</code>
+<a name="index-_005cstar"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22C6; Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary
+operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary).
+Similar: the synonyms asterisk&nbsp;<code>*</code> and <code>\ast</code>, which
+are six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript,
+as with the Kleene star.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\subset</code>
+<a name="index-_005csubset"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2282; Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\subseteq</code>
+<a name="index-_005csubseteq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2286; Subset or equal to (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\succ</code>
+<a name="index-_005csucc"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x227B; Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less
+than&nbsp;<code>&gt;</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\succeq</code>
+<a name="index-_005csucceq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2AB0; Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less
+than or equal to&nbsp;<code>\leq</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sum</code>
+<a name="index-_005csum"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2211; Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital
+sigma&nbsp;<code>\Sigma</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\supset</code>
+<a name="index-_005csupset"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2283; Superset (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\supseteq</code>
+<a name="index-_005csupseteq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2287; Superset or equal to (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\surd</code>
+<a name="index-_005csurd"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x221A; Radical symbol (ordinary). The LaTeX command
+<code>\sqrt{...}</code> typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar
+that extends to cover the argument.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\swarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cswarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2199; Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tau</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctau"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03C4; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\theta</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctheta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03B8; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<code>\vartheta</code>&nbsp;&#x03D1;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\times</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctimes"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x00D7; Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See
+also&nbsp;<code>\cdot</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\to</code>
+<a name="index-_005cto"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2192; Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\rightarrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\top</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctop"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22A4; Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set
+(ordinary). See also&nbsp;<code>\bot</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\triangle</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctriangle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x25B3; Triangle (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\triangleleft</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctriangleleft"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x25C1; Not-filled triangle pointing left
+(binary). Similar:&nbsp;<code>\lhd</code>. For the normal subgroup symbol you
+should load <samp>amssymb</samp> and use&nbsp;<code>\vartriangleleft</code> (which
+is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\triangleright</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctriangleright"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x25B7; Not-filled triangle pointing right
+(binary). For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
+<samp>amssymb</samp> and use&nbsp;<code>\vartriangleright</code> (which is a
+relation and so gives better spacing).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\unlhd</code>
+<a name="index-_005cunlhd"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22B4; Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. For the
+normal subgroup symbol load <samp>amssymb</samp> and
+use&nbsp;<code>\vartrianglelefteq</code> (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\unrhd</code>
+<a name="index-_005cunrhd"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22B5; Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package. For the
+normal subgroup symbol load <samp>amssymb</samp> and
+use&nbsp;<code>\vartrianglerighteq</code> (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Uparrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cUparrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21D1; Double-line upward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line up-pointing
+arrow&nbsp;<code>\uparrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\uparrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cuparrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2191; Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges
+(relation). Similar: double-line up-pointing
+arrow&nbsp;<code>\Uparrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Updownarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cUpdownarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21D5; Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+arrow&nbsp;<code>\updownarrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\updownarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cupdownarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2195; Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+arrow&nbsp;<code>\Updownarrow</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\upharpoonright</code>
+<a name="index-_005cupharpoonright"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x21BE; Up harpoon, with barb on right side
+(relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\restriction</code>.
+Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\uplus</code>
+<a name="index-_005cuplus"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x228E; Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in
+the middle (binary). Similar: union&nbsp;<code>\cup</code>. Related:
+variable-sized operator&nbsp;<code>\biguplus</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Upsilon</code>
+<a name="index-_005cUpsilon"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03A5; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\upsilon</code>
+<a name="index-_005cupsilon"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03C5; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\varepsilon</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvarepsilon"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03B5; Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is
+more widely used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
+<code>\epsilon</code>&nbsp;&#x03F5;. Related: set
+membership&nbsp;<code>\in</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\vanothing</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvanothing"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2205; Empty set symbol. Similar: <code>\emptyset</code>. Related:
+<code>\revemptyset</code>. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the <samp>amssymb</samp> package.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\varphi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvarphi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03C6; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <code>\phi</code>&nbsp;&#x03D5;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\varpi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvarpi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03D6; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <code>\pi</code>&nbsp;&#x03C0;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\varrho</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvarrho"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03F1; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <code>\rho</code>&nbsp;&#x03C1;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\varsigma</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvarsigma"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03C2; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+<code>\sigma</code>&nbsp;&#x03C3;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\vartheta</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvartheta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03D1; Variant on the lowercase Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+<code>\theta</code>&nbsp;&#x03B8;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\vdash</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvdash"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x22A2; Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash
+(relation). Similar: turnstile rotated a
+half-circle&nbsp;<code>\dashv</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\vee</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvee"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2228; Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related:
+logical and&nbsp;<code>\wedge</code>. Similar: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigvee</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Vert</code>
+<a name="index-_005cVert"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2016; Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
+bar&nbsp;<code>\vert</code>.
+</p>
+<p>For a norm symbol, you can use the <samp>mathtools</samp> package and put in
+your preamble
+<code>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}</code>. This gives you
+three command variants for double-line vertical bars that are correctly
+horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred
+version <code>$\norm*{M^\perp}$</code> then the height of the vertical bars
+will match the height of the argument, whereas with
+<code>\norm{M^\perp}</code> the bars do not grow with the height of the
+argument but instead are the default height, and <code>\norm[<var>size
+command</var>]{M^\perp}</code> also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
+the size given in the <var>size command</var>, e.g., <code>\Bigg</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\vert</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvert"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x007C; Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line
+vertical bar&nbsp;<code>\Vert</code>. For such that, as in the definition of a
+set, use&nbsp;<code>\mid</code> because it is a relation.
+</p>
+<p>For absolute value you can use the <samp>mathtools</samp> package and in your
+preamble put
+<code>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}</code>. This gives you
+three command variants for single-line vertical bars that are correctly
+horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred
+version <code>$\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$</code> then the height of the
+vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas with
+<code>\abs{\frac{22}{7}}</code> the bars do not grow with the height of
+the argument but instead are the default height, and
+<code>\abs[<var>size command</var>]{\frac{22}{7}}</code> also gives bars that
+do not grow but are set to the size given in the <var>size command</var>,
+e.g., <code>\Bigg</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\wedge</code>
+<a name="index-_005cwedge"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2227; Logical and (binary). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\land</code>. See also
+logical or <code>\vee</code>. Similar: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigwedge</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\wp</code>
+<a name="index-_005cwp"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2118; Weierstrass p (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\wr</code>
+<a name="index-_005cwr"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x2240; Wreath product (binary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Xi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cXi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x039E; uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\xi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cxi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03BE; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\zeta</code>
+<a name="index-_005czeta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>&#x03B6; Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>The following symbols are most often used in plain text but LaTeX
+provides versions to use in mathematical text.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\mathdollar</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmathdollar"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathparagraph</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmathparagraph"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, &#x00B6;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathsection</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmathsection"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Section sign in math mode &#x00A7;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathsterling</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmathsterling"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Sterling sign in math mode: &pound;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathunderscore</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmathunderscore"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Underscore in math mode: _.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Blackboard-bold" accesskey="1">Blackboard bold</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Doublestruck characters.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Calligraphic" accesskey="2">Calligraphic</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Cursive characters.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath" accesskey="3">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Symbols in boldface.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Dots" accesskey="4">Dots</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Ellipses, etc.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Blackboard-bold"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Calligraphic" accesskey="n" rel="next">Calligraphic</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-symbols" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math symbols</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Blackboard-bold-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">16.2.1 Blackboard bold</h4>
+
+<a name="index-blackboard-bold"></a>
+<a name="index-doublestruck"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{amssymb} % in preamble
+ ...
+\mathbb{<var>uppercase-letter</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Provide blackboard bold symbols, sometimes also known as doublestruck
+letters, used to denote number sets such as the natural numbers, the
+integers, etc.
+</p>
+<p>Here
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\( \forall n \in \mathbb{N}, n^2 \geq 0 \)
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>the <code>\mathbb{N}</code> gives blackboard bold symbol &#x2115;
+representing the natural numbers.
+</p>
+<p>If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an error
+but you get strange results, including unexpected characters.
+</p>
+<p>There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the
+capital letters; look on CTAN.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Calligraphic"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath" accesskey="n" rel="next">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</a>, Previous: <a href="#Blackboard-bold" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Blackboard bold</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-symbols" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math symbols</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Calligraphic-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">16.2.2 Calligraphic</h4>
+
+<a name="index-calligraphic-fonts"></a>
+<a name="index-script-fonts"></a>
+<a name="index-fonts_002c-script"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\mathcal{<var>uppercase-letters</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Use a script-like font.
+</p>
+<p>In this example the graph identifier is output in a cursive font.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Let the graph be \( \mathcal{G} \).
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not get
+an error. Instead you get unexpected output. For instance,
+<code>\mathcal{g}</code> outputs a close curly brace symbol, while
+<code>\mathcal{+}</code> outputs a plus sign.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Dots" accesskey="n" rel="next">Dots</a>, Previous: <a href="#Calligraphic" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Calligraphic</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-symbols" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math symbols</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">16.2.3 <code>\boldmath</code> &amp; <code>\unboldmath</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-boldface-mathematics"></a>
+<a name="index-symbols_002c-boldface"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cboldmath"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cunboldmath"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode):
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\boldmath \( <var>math</var> \)
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\unboldmath \( <var>math</var> \)
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005cboldmath-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cunboldmath-1"></a>
+<p>Declarations to change the letters and symbols in <var>math</var> to be in
+a bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular
+(non-bold) default. They must be used when not in math mode or display
+math mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>). Both commands are fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>In this example each <code>\boldmath</code> command takes place inside an
+<code>\mbox</code>,
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>which means <code>\boldmath</code> is only called in a text mode, here LR
+mode, and explains why LaTeX must switch to math mode to set <code>v</code>
+and <code>u</code>.
+</p>
+<p>If you use either command inside math mode, as with <code>Trouble: \(
+\boldmath x \)</code>, then you get something like &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Font Warning:
+Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11</samp>&rsquo; and &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX
+Font Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line
+11</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-bm"></a>
+<a name="index-bm-package"></a>
+
+<p>There are many issues with <code>\boldmath</code>. New documents should use
+the <samp>bm</samp> package provided by the LaTeX Project team. A complete
+description is outside the scope of this document (see the full
+documentation on CTAN) but even this small example
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{bm} % in preamble
+...
+we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>shows that it is an improvement over <code>\boldmath</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Dots"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-symbols" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math symbols</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Dots_002c-horizontal-or-vertical"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">16.2.4 Dots, horizontal or vertical</h4>
+
+<a name="index-ellipses"></a>
+<a name="index-dots"></a>
+
+<p>Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern
+continues.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{array}{cccc}
+ a_{0,0} &amp;a_{0,1} &amp;a_{0,2} &amp;\ldots \\
+ a_{1,0} &amp;\ddots \\
+ \vdots
+\end{array}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>LaTeX provides these.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dd><a name="ellipses-cdots"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\cdots</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccdots"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line, as
+in &#x22EF;. Used as: <code>\( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1}
+\)</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="ellipses-ddots"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\ddots</code>
+<a name="index-_005cddots"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Diagonal ellipsis, &#x22F1;. See the above array example for a
+usage.
+</p>
+<a name="ellipses-ldots"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\ldots</code>
+<a name="index-_005cldots"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Ellipsis on the baseline, &#x2026;. Used as: <code>\(
+x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \)</code>. Another example is the above array example. A
+synonym is <code>\mathellipsis</code>. A synonym from the <samp>amsmath</samp>
+package is <code>\hdots</code>.
+</p>
+<p>You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in
+<code>The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken</code>. (In a paragraph
+mode or LR mode a synonym for <code>\ldots</code> is <code>\dots</code>.)
+</p>
+<a name="ellipses-vdots"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\vdots</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvdots"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Vertical ellipsis, &#x22EE;. See the above array example for a
+usage.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsmath-6"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package-6"></a>
+
+<p>The <samp>amsmath</samp> package has the command <code>\dots</code> to semantically
+mark up ellipses. This example produces two different-looking outputs
+for the first two uses of the <code>\dots</code> command.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble
+ ...
+Suppose that \( p_0, p_1, \dots, p_{n-1} \) lists all of the primes.
+Observe that \( p_0\cdot p_1 \dots \cdot p_{n-1} +1 \) is not a
+ multiple of any \( p_i \).
+Conclusion: there are infinitely many primes \( p_0, p_1, \dotsc \).
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In the first line LaTeX looks to the comma following <code>\dots</code> to
+determine that it should output an ellipsis on the baseline. The second
+line has a <code>\cdot</code> following <code>\dots</code> so LaTeX outputs an
+ellipsis that is on the math axis, vertically centered. However, the
+third usage has no follow-on character so you have to tell LaTeX what
+to do. You can use one of the commands: <code>\dotsc</code> if you need the
+ellipsis appropriate for a comma following, <code>\dotsb</code> if you need
+the ellipses that fits when the dots are followed by a binary operator
+or relation symbol, <code>\dotsi</code> for dots with integrals, or
+<code>\dotso</code> for others.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Math-functions"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Math-accents" accesskey="n" rel="next">Math accents</a>, Previous: <a href="#Math-symbols" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Math symbols</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-formulas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math formulas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Math-functions-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">16.3 Math functions</h3>
+
+<a name="index-math-functions"></a>
+<a name="index-functions_002c-math"></a>
+
+<p>These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper
+spacing.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\arccos</code>
+<a name="index-_005carccos"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Inverse cosine
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\arcsin</code>
+<a name="index-_005carcsin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Inverse sine
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\arctan</code>
+<a name="index-_005carctan"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Inverse tangent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\arg</code>
+<a name="index-_005carg"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Angle between the real axis and a point in the complex plane
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bmod</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbmod"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Binary modulo operator, used as in <code>\( 5\bmod 3=2 \)</code>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cos</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccos"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Cosine
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cosh</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccosh"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Hyperbolic cosine
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cot</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Cotangent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\coth</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccoth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Hyperbolic cotangent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\csc</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccsc"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Cosecant
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\deg</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdeg"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Degrees
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\det</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdet"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Determinant
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dim</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdim"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Dimension
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\exp</code>
+<a name="index-_005cexp"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Exponential
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\gcd</code>
+<a name="index-_005cgcd"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Greatest common divisor
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\hom</code>
+<a name="index-_005chom"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Homomorphism
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\inf</code>
+<a name="index-_005cinf"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Infinum
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ker</code>
+<a name="index-_005cker"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Kernel
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lg</code>
+<a name="index-_005clg"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Base 2 logarithm
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lim</code>
+<a name="index-_005clim"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Limit
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\liminf</code>
+<a name="index-_005climinf"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Limit inferior
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\limsup</code>
+<a name="index-_005climsup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Limit superior
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ln</code>
+<a name="index-_005cln"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Natural logarithm
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\log</code>
+<a name="index-_005clog"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Logarithm
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\max</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmax"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Maximum
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\min</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Minimum
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\pmod</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpmod"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Parenthesized modulus, as used in <code>\( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \)</code>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Pr</code>
+<a name="index-_005cPr"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Probability
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sec</code>
+<a name="index-_005csec"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Secant
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sin</code>
+<a name="index-_005csin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Sine
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sinh</code>
+<a name="index-_005csinh"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Hyperbolic sine
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sup</code>
+<a name="index-_005csup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>sup
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tan</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctan"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Tangent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tanh</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctanh"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Hyperbolic tangent
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsmath-7"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package-7"></a>
+
+<p>The <samp>amsmath</samp> package adds improvements on some of these, and also
+allows you to define your own. The full documentation is on CTAN, but
+briefly, you can define an identity operator with
+<code>\DeclareMathOperator{\identity}{id}</code> that is like the ones
+above but prints as &lsquo;<samp>id</samp>&rsquo;. The starred form
+<code>\DeclareMathOperator*{\op}{op}</code> sets any limits above and
+below, as is traditional with <code>\lim</code>, <code>\sup</code>, or <code>\max</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Math-accents"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining" accesskey="n" rel="next">Over- and Underlining</a>, Previous: <a href="#Math-functions" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Math functions</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-formulas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math formulas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Math-accents-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">16.4 Math accents</h3>
+
+<a name="index-math-accents"></a>
+<a name="index-accents_002c-mathematical"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters
+in math. These are different from accents in normal text
+(see <a href="#Accents">Accents</a>).
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\acute</code>
+<a name="index-_005cacute"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-acute-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Math acute accent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bar</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbar"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-bar_002dover-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<a name="index-macron-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Math bar-over accent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\breve</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbreve"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-breve-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Math breve accent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\check</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccheck"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-check-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<a name="index-hacek-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Math h&aacute;&#269;ek (check) accent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ddot</code>
+<a name="index-_005cddot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-double-dot-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Math dieresis accent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dot</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-overdot-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<a name="index-dot-over-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Math dot accent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\grave</code>
+<a name="index-_005cgrave"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-grave-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Math grave accent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\hat</code>
+<a name="index-_005chat"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-hat-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<a name="index-circumflex-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Math hat (circumflex) accent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathring</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmathring"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-ring-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Math ring accent </p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tilde</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctilde"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-tilde-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Math tilde accent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\vec</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvec"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-vector-symbol_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Math vector symbol
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\widehat</code>
+<a name="index-_005cwidehat"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-wide-hat-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Math wide hat accent
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\widetilde</code>
+<a name="index-_005cwidetilde"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-wide-tilde-accent_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Math wide tilde accent
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>When you are putting an accent on an i or a j, the tradition is to use
+one without a dot, <code>\imath</code> or <code>jmath</code> (see <a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Over_002d-and-Underlining"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode" accesskey="n" rel="next">Spacing in math mode</a>, Previous: <a href="#Math-accents" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Math accents</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-formulas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math formulas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Over_002d-and-Underlining-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">16.5 Over- and Underlining</h3>
+
+<a name="index-overlining"></a>
+<a name="index-underlining"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or
+putting braces over or under some material.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\underline{<var>text</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cunderline_007btext_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Underline <var>text</var>. Works inside math mode, and outside.
+The line is always completely below the text, taking account of
+descenders, so in <code>\(\underline{y}\)</code> the line is lower than in
+<code>\(\underline{x}\)</code>. This command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-ulem"></a>
+<a name="index-ulem-package"></a>
+
+<p>Note that the package <samp>ulem</samp> does text mode underlining and allows
+line breaking as well as a number of other features. See the
+documentation on CTAN. See also&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill">\hrulefill &amp; \dotfill</a> for
+producing a line, for such things as a signature.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\overline{<var>text</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005coverline_007btext_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Put a horizontal line over <var>text</var>. Works inside math mode, and
+outside. For example, <code>\overline{x+y}</code>.
+Note that this differs from the command <code>\bar</code> (see <a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\underbrace{<var>math</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cunderbrace_007bmath_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Put a brace under <var>math</var>. For example, this
+<code>(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3)</code> emphasizes the telescoping part.
+Attach text to the brace by using subscript, <code>_</code>, or superscript,
+<code>^</code>, as here.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{displaymath}
+ 1+1/2+\underbrace{1/3+1/4}_{&gt;1/2}+
+ \underbrace{1/5+1/6+1/7+1/8}_{&gt;1/2}+\cdots
+\end{displaymath}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The superscript appears on top of the expression, and so can look
+unconnected to the underbrace.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\overbrace{<var>math</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005coverbrace_007bmath_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Put a brace over <var>math</var>, as with
+<code>\overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}</code>. See also
+<code>\underbrace</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-mathtools-1"></a>
+<a name="index-mathtools-package-1"></a>
+
+<p>The package <samp>mathtools</samp> adds an over- and underbrace, as well as
+some improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Spacing-in-math-mode"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Math-miscellany" accesskey="n" rel="next">Math miscellany</a>, Previous: <a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Over- and Underlining</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-formulas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math formulas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Spacing-in-math-mode-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">16.6 Spacing in math mode</h3>
+
+<a name="index-spacing-within-math-mode"></a>
+<a name="index-math-mode_002c-spacing"></a>
+
+<p>When typesetting mathematics, LaTeX puts in spacing according to the
+normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter <code>y=m x</code> then
+LaTeX ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x,
+as <em>y=mx</em>.
+</p>
+<p>But LaTeX&rsquo;s rules sometimes need tweaking. For example, in an
+integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the
+<code>f(x)</code> and the <code>dx</code>, here done with the <code>\,</code> command.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>LaTeX provides the commands that follow for use in math mode. Many
+of these spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
+<em>mu</em>. It is defined as 1/18em, where the em is taken from the
+current math symbols family (see <a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a>). Thus, a
+<code>\thickspace</code> is something like 5/18 times the width of
+a&nbsp;&lsquo;<samp>M</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\;</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_003b"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cthickspace"></a>
+<a name="spacing-in-math-mode-thickspace"></a><p>Synonym: <code>\thickspace</code>. Normally <code>5.0mu plus 5.0mu</code>. Math
+mode only.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\:</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\&gt;</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_003a"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_003e-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmedspace"></a>
+<a name="spacing-in-math-mode-medspace"></a><p>Synonym: <code>\medspace</code>. Normally <code>4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu</code>.
+Math mode only.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\,</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_002c"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cthinspace"></a>
+<a name="index-thin-space"></a>
+<a name="Spacing-in-math-mode_002f_005cthinspace"></a><a name="spacing-in-math-mode-thinspace"></a><p>Synonym: <code>\thinspace</code>. Normally <code>3mu</code>, which is 1/6em.
+Can be used in both math mode and text mode (see <a href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This space is widely used, for instance between the function and the
+infinitesimal in an integral <code>\int f(x)\,dx</code> and, if an author does
+this, before punctuation in a displayed equation.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">The antiderivative is
+\begin{equation}
+ 3x^{-1/2}+3^{1/2}\,.
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\!</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_0021"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnegthinspace"></a>
+<a name="index-thin-space_002c-negative"></a>
+<a name="spacing-in-math-mode-negthinspace"></a><p>A negative thin space. Normally <code>-3mu</code>. The <code>\!</code> command is
+math mode only but the <code>\negthinspace</code> command is available for
+text mode (see <a href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\quad</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-quad"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cquad"></a>
+<a name="spacing-in-math-mode-quad"></a><p>This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space
+surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space between
+two equations inside a <code>displaymath</code> environment. It is available
+in both text and math mode.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\qquad</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cqquad"></a>
+<a name="spacing-in-math-mode-qquad"></a><p>A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em. It is available in
+both text and math mode.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csmash" accesskey="1">\smash</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Eliminate height or depth of a subformula.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom" accesskey="2">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Make empty box with the same size as the argument.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csmash"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom" accesskey="n" rel="next">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</a>, Up: <a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spacing in math mode</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csmash-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">16.6.1 <code>\smash</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-vertical-spacing_002c-math-mode"></a>
+<a name="index-math-mode_002c-vertical-space"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\smash{<var>subformula</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Typeset <var>subformula</var> as if its height and depth were zero.
+</p>
+<p>In this example the exponential is so tall that without the
+<code>\smash</code> command LaTeX would separate its line from the line
+above it, and the uneven line spacing might be unsightly.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">To compute the tetration $\smash{2^{2^{2^2}}}$,
+evaluate from the top down, as $2^{2^4}=2^{16}=65536$.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>(Because of the <code>\smash</code> the printed expression could run into the
+line above so you may want to wait until the final version of the
+document to make such adjustments.)
+</p>
+<p>This pictures the effect of <code>\smash</code> by using <code>\fbox</code> to
+surround the box that LaTeX will put on the line. The
+<code>\blackbar</code> command makes a bar extending from 10&nbsp;points below
+the baseline to 20&nbsp;points above.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\blackbar}{\rule[-10pt]{5pt}{30pt}}
+\fbox{\blackbar}
+\fbox{\smash{\blackbar}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The first box that LaTeX places is 20&nbsp;points high and
+10&nbsp;points deep. But the second box is treated by LaTeX as
+having zero height and zero depth, despite that the ink printed on the
+page still extends well above and below the line.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\smash</code> command appears often in mathematics to adjust the
+size of an element that surrounds a subformula. Here the first radical
+extends below the baseline while the second lies just on the baseline.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{equation}
+\sqrt{\sum_{0\leq k&lt; n} f(k)}
+\sqrt{\vphantom{\sum}\smash{\sum_{0\leq k&lt; n}} f(k)}
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Note the use of <code>\vphantom</code> to give the <code>\sqrt</code> command an
+argument with the height of the <code>\sum</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</a>).
+</p>
+<p>While most often used in mathematics, the <code>\smash</code> command can
+appear in other contexts. However, it doesn&rsquo;t change into horizontal
+mode. So if it starts a paragraph then you should first put a
+<code>\leavevmode</code>, as in the bottom line below.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">xxx xxx xxx
+
+\smash{yyy} % no paragraph indent
+
+\leavevmode\smash{zzz} % usual paragraph indent
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-mathtools-2"></a>
+<a name="index-mathtools-package-2"></a>
+
+<p>The package <code>mathtools</code> has operators that provide even finer
+control over smashing a subformula box.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csmash" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\smash</a>, Up: <a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spacing in math mode</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">16.6.2 <code>\phantom</code> &amp; <code>\vphantom</code> &amp; <code>\hphantom</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-spacing_002c-math-mode"></a>
+<a name="index-horizontal-spacing"></a>
+<a name="index-vertical-spacing"></a>
+<a name="index-math-mode_002c-spacing-1"></a>
+<a name="index-invisible-character"></a>
+<a name="index-character_002c-invisible"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\phantom{<var>subformula</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\vphantom{<var>subformula</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\hphantom{<var>subformula</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\phantom</code> command creates a box with the same height, depth,
+and width as <var>subformula</var>, but empty. That is, this command causes
+LaTeX to typeset the box but not its ink. The <code>\vphantom</code>
+variant also produces an invisible box with the same height and depth as
+<var>subformula</var>, but it has width zero. And <code>\hphantom</code> makes a
+box with the same width as <var>subformula</var> but with height and depth
+zero.
+</p>
+<p>Without the <code>\vphantom</code> in this example, the top bars of the two
+square roots would be at different heights.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\( \sqrt{\vphantom{a^3}a}\cdot\sqrt{a^3} \)
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\vphantom{a^3}</code> causes the first <code>\sqrt</code> to have inside
+it a box of the same height as the second <code>\sqrt</code>, so LaTeX
+makes the bars align.
+</p>
+<p>These commands often are combined with <code>\smash</code>. See <a href="#g_t_005csmash">\smash</a>
+for another example of the use of <code>\vphantom</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-mathtools-3"></a>
+<a name="index-mathtools-package-3"></a>
+
+<p>The three phantom commands appear often but note that LaTeX provides
+a suite of other commands to work with box sizes that may be more
+convenient, including <code>\makebox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a>) as well
+as <code>\settodepth</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a>), <code>\settoheight</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a>), and <code>\settowidth</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a>).
+In addition, the <samp>mathtools</samp> package has many commands that offer
+fine-grained control over spacing.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsmath-8"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package-8"></a>
+
+<p>All three commands produce an ordinary box, without any special
+mathematics status. So to do something like attaching a superscript you
+should give it such a status, for example with the <code>\operatorname</code>
+command from the package <samp>amsmath</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>While most often used in mathematics, these three can appear in other
+contexts. However, they don&rsquo;t cause LaTeX to change into horizontal
+mode. So if one of these starts a paragraph then you should prefix it
+with <code>\leavevmode</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Math-miscellany"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Spacing in math mode</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-formulas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math formulas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Math-miscellany-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">16.7 Math miscellany</h3>
+
+<a name="index-math-miscellany"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities. Here are
+some that don&rsquo;t fit into other categories.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon" accesskey="1">Colon character &amp; \colon</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Colon.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005c_002a" accesskey="2">\*</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Discretionary multiplication.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cfrac" accesskey="3">\frac</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Fraction.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright" accesskey="4">\left &amp; \right</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Paired delimiters.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csqrt" accesskey="5">\sqrt</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Radicals.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cstackrel" accesskey="6">\stackrel</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Text over a relation.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_002a" accesskey="n" rel="next">\*</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-miscellany" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math miscellany</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Colon-character-_003a-_0026-_005ccolon"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">16.7.1 Colon character <code>:</code> &amp; <code>\colon</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_003a"></a>
+<a name="index-colon-character"></a>
+<a name="index-_003a-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccolon"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">:
+\colon
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In mathematics, the colon character, <code>:</code>, is a relation.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">With side ratios \( 3:4 \) and \( 4:5 \), the triangle is right.
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsmath-9"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package-9"></a>
+
+<p>Ordinary LaTeX defines <code>\colon</code> to produce the colon character
+with the spacing appropriate for punctuation, as in set-builder notation
+<code>\{x\colon 0\leq x&lt;1\}</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsmath-10"></a>
+<a name="index-amsmath-package-10"></a>
+
+<p>But the widely-used <samp>amsmath</samp> package defines <code>\colon</code> for use
+in the definition of functions <code>f\colon D\to C</code>. So if you want
+the colon character as a punctuation then use <code>\mathpunct{:}</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005c_002a"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfrac" accesskey="n" rel="next">\frac</a>, Previous: <a href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Colon character &amp; \colon</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-miscellany" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math miscellany</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005c_002a-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">16.7.2 <code>\*</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-multiplication_002c-discretionary"></a>
+<a name="index-breaks_002c-multiplication-discretionary"></a>
+<a name="index-line-breaks_002c-multiplication-discretionary"></a>
+<a name="index-discretionary-breaks_002c-multiplication"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_002a"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\*
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>A multiplication symbol that allows a line break. If there is a break
+then LaTeX puts a <code>\times</code> symbol, &#x00D7;, before
+that break.
+</p>
+<p>In <code>\( A_1\* A_2\* A_3\* A_4 \)</code>, if there is no line break then
+LaTeX outputs it as though it were <code>\( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \)</code>. If
+a line break does happen, for example between the two middle ones, then
+LaTeX sets it like <code>\( A_1 A_2 \times \)</code>, followed by the
+break, followed by <code>\( A_3 A_4 \)</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cfrac"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright" accesskey="n" rel="next">\left &amp; \right</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_002a" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\*</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-miscellany" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math miscellany</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cfrac-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">16.7.3 <code>\frac</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-fraction"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cfrac"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\frac{<var>numerator</var>}{<var>denominator</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produces the fraction. Used as: <code>\begin{displaymath}
+\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi\sigma}} \end{displaymath}</code>. In inline math
+mode it comes out small; see the discussion of <code>\displaystyle</code>
+(see <a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csqrt" accesskey="n" rel="next">\sqrt</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfrac" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\frac</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-miscellany" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math miscellany</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">16.7.4 <code>\left</code> &amp; <code>\right</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-delimiters_002c-paired"></a>
+<a name="index-paired-delimiters"></a>
+<a name="index-matching-parentheses"></a>
+<a name="index-matching-brackets"></a>
+<a name="index-null-delimiter"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cleft"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cright"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\left <var>delimiter1</var> ... \right <var>delimiter2</var>
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. The delimiters
+are sized according to the math they enclose. This makes a unit vector
+surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{equation}
+ \left(\begin{array}{c}
+ 1 \\
+ 0 \\
+ \end{array}\right)
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Every <code>\left</code> must have a matching <code>\right</code>. Leaving out the
+<code>\left(</code> in the above gets &lsquo;<samp>Extra \right</samp>&rsquo;. Leaving off the
+<code>\right)</code> gets &lsquo;<samp>You can't use `\eqno' in math mode</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>However, the two delimiters <var>delimiter1</var> and <var>delimiter2</var> need
+not match. A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as
+below. Use a period, &lsquo;<samp>.</samp>&rsquo;, as a null delimiter.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{equation}
+ f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
+ 1 &amp;\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\
+ f(n-1)+3n^2 &amp;\mbox{--else}
+ \end{array}\right.
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
+backslash, <code>\{</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csqrt"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cstackrel" accesskey="n" rel="next">\stackrel</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\left &amp; \right</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-miscellany" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math miscellany</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csqrt-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">16.7.5 <code>\sqrt</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-square-root"></a>
+<a name="index-roots"></a>
+<a name="index-radical"></a>
+<a name="index-_005csqrt"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\sqrt{<var>arg</var>}
+\sqrt[<var>root-number</var>]{<var>arg</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The square root, or optionally other roots, of <var>arg</var>. The optional
+argument <var>root-number</var> gives the root, i.e., enter the cube root of
+<code>x+y</code> as <code>\sqrt[3]{x+y}</code>.
+The radical grows with the size of <var>arg</var> (as the height of the
+radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets steeper, until for
+a large enough <code>arg</code>, it is vertical).
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX has a separate <code>\surd</code> character (see <a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cstackrel"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csqrt" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\sqrt</a>, Up: <a href="#Math-miscellany" accesskey="u" rel="up">Math miscellany</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cstackrel-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">16.7.6 <code>\stackrel</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-stack-math"></a>
+<a name="index-relation_002c-text-above"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cstackrel"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\stackrel{<var>text</var>}{<var>relation</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Put <var>text</var> above <var>relation</var>. To put a function name above an
+arrow enter <code>\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Modes"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Page-styles" accesskey="n" rel="next">Page styles</a>, Previous: <a href="#Math-formulas" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Math formulas</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Modes-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">17 Modes</h2>
+
+<a name="index-modes"></a>
+
+<p>As LaTeX processes your document, at any point it is in one of six
+modes. They fall into three categories of two each, the horizontal
+modes, the math modes, and the vertical modes. Some commands only work
+in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of
+the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.
+</p>
+<ul>
+<li> <a name="modes-paragraph-mode"></a><a name="index-paragraph-mode"></a>
+<em>Paragraph mode</em> is what LaTeX is in when processing ordinary
+text. It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into
+pages. This is the mode LaTeX is in most of the time.
+
+<a name="index-left_002dto_002dright-mode"></a>
+<a name="index-LR-mode"></a>
+<a name="modes-lr-mode"></a><p><em>LR mode</em> (for left-to-right mode; in plain TeX this is called
+<em>restricted horizontal mode</em>) is in effect when LaTeX starts
+making a box with an <code>\mbox</code> command. As in paragraph mode,
+LaTeX&rsquo;s output is a string of words with spaces between them. Unlike
+in paragraph mode, in LR mode LaTeX never starts a new line, it just
+keeps going from left to right. (Although LaTeX will not complain
+that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to put
+that box into a line, it could very well complain that the finished LR
+box won&rsquo;t fit there.)
+</p>
+</li><li> <a name="index-math-mode"></a>
+<a name="modes-math-mode"></a><em>Math mode</em> is when LaTeX is generating
+an inline mathematical formula.
+
+<a name="index-display-math-mode"></a>
+<p><em>Display math mode</em> is when LaTeX is generating a displayed
+mathematical formula. (Displayed formulas differ somewhat from inline
+ones. One example is that the placement of the subscript on <code>\int</code>
+differs in the two situations.)
+</p>
+</li><li> <a name="index-vertical-mode"></a>
+<a name="modes-vertical-mode"></a><em>Vertical mode</em> is when LaTeX is building the list of lines and
+other material making the output page. This is the mode LaTeX is in
+when it starts a document.
+
+<a name="index-internal-vertical-mode"></a>
+<a name="modes-internal-vertical-mode"></a><p><em>Internal vertical mode</em> is in effect when LaTeX starts making a
+<code>\vbox</code>. This is the vertical analogue of LR mode.
+</p>
+</li></ul>
+
+<p>For instance, if you begin a LaTeX article with &lsquo;<samp>Let \( x \) be
+...</samp>&rsquo; then these are the modes: first LaTeX starts every document in
+vertical mode, then it reads the &lsquo;<samp>L</samp>&rsquo; and switches to paragraph
+mode, then the next switch happens at the &lsquo;<samp>\(</samp>&rsquo; where LaTeX
+changes to math mode, and then when it leaves the formula it pops
+back to paragraph mode.
+</p>
+<a name="index-inner-paragraph-mode"></a>
+<a name="index-outer-paragraph-mode"></a>
+<a name="modes-inner-paragraph-mode"></a><a name="modes-outer-paragraph-mode"></a><p>Paragraph mode has two subcases. If you use a <code>\parbox</code> command
+or a <code>minipage</code> then LaTeX is put into paragraph mode. But it
+will not put a page break here. Inside one of these boxes, called a
+<em>parbox</em>, LaTeX is in <em>inner paragraph mode</em>. Its more usual
+situation, where it can put page breaks, is <em>outer paragraph mode</em>
+(see <a href="#Page-breaking">Page breaking</a>).
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005censuremath" accesskey="1">\ensuremath</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Ensure that math mode is active.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005censuremath"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#Modes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Modes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005censuremath-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">17.1 <code>\ensuremath</code></h3>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\ensuremath{<var>formula</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Ensure that <var>formula</var> is typeset in math mode.
+</p>
+<p>For instance, you can redefine commands that ordinarily can be used only
+in math mode, so that they can be used both in math and in plain text.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\dx}{\ensuremath{dx}}
+In $\int f(x)\, \dx$, the \dx{} is an infinitesimal.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Caution: the <code>\ensuremath</code> command is useful but not a panacea.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\alf}{\ensuremath{\alpha}}
+You get an alpha in text mode: \alf.
+But compare the correct spacing in $\alf+\alf$ with that in \alf+\alf.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Best is to typeset math things in a math mode.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Page-styles"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="n" rel="next">Spaces</a>, Previous: <a href="#Modes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Modes</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Page-styles-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">18 Page styles</h2>
+
+<a name="index-styles_002c-page"></a>
+<a name="index-page-styles"></a>
+
+<p>The style of a page determines where LaTeX places the components of
+that page, such as headers and footers, and the text body. This
+includes pages in the main part of the document but also includes
+special pages such as the title page of a book, a page from an index, or
+the first page of an article.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-fancyhdr"></a>
+<a name="index-fancyhdr-package"></a>
+
+<p>The package <samp>fancyhdr</samp> is very helpful for constructing page
+styles. See its documentation on CTAN.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle" accesskey="1">\maketitle</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Generate a title page.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering" accesskey="2">\pagenumbering</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Set the style used for page numbers.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle" accesskey="3">\pagestyle</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Change the headings/footings style.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cthispagestyle" accesskey="4">\thispagestyle</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Change the headings/footings style for this page.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmaketitle"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering" accesskey="n" rel="next">\pagenumbering</a>, Up: <a href="#Page-styles" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page styles</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmaketitle-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">18.1 <code>\maketitle</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-titles_002c-making"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmaketitle"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\maketitle
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Generate a title. In the standard classes the title appears on a
+separate page, except in the <code>article</code> class where it is at the top
+of the first page. (See <a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a> for information about
+the <code>titlepage</code> document class option.)
+</p>
+<p>This example shows <code>\maketitle</code> appearing in its usual place,
+immediately after <code>\begin{document}</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{article}
+\title{Constructing a Nuclear Reactor Using Only Coconuts}
+\author{Jonas Grumby\thanks{%
+ With the support of a Ginger Grant from the Roy Hinkley Society.} \\
+ Skipper, \textit{Minnow}
+ \and
+ Willy Gilligan\thanks{%
+ Thanks to the Mary Ann Summers foundation
+ and to Thurston and Lovey Howell.} \\
+ Mate, \textit{Minnow}
+ }
+\date{1964-Sep-26}
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+Just sit right back and you'll hear a tale, a tale of a fateful trip.
+That started from this tropic port, aboard this tiny ship. The mate was
+a mighty sailin' man, the Skipper brave and sure. Five passengers set
+sail that day for a three hour tour. A three hour tour.
+ ...
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>You tell LaTeX the information used to produce the title by making
+the following declarations. These must come before the
+<code>\maketitle</code>, either in the preamble or in the document body.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\author{<var>name1</var> \and <var>name2</var> \and ...}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cauthor_007bname1-_005cand-name2-_005cand-_002e_002e_002e_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-author_002c-for-titlepage"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-for-_005cauthor"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cand-for-_005cauthor"></a>
+<p>Required. Declare the document author or authors. The argument is a
+list of authors separated by <code>\and</code> commands. To separate lines
+within a single author&rsquo;s entry, for instance to give the author&rsquo;s
+institution or address, use a double backslash, <code>\\</code>. If you omit
+the <code>\author</code> declaration then you get &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Warning: No
+\author given</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\date{<var>text</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdate_007btext_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-date_002c-for-titlepage"></a>
+<p>Optional. Declare <var>text</var> to be the document&rsquo;s date. The <var>text</var>
+doesn&rsquo;t need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all. If you
+omit <code>\date</code> then LaTeX uses the current date (see <a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a>).
+To have no date, instead use <code>\date{}</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\thanks{<var>text</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cthanks_007btext_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-thanks_002c-for-titlepage"></a>
+<a name="index-credit-footnote"></a>
+<p>Optional. Produce a footnote. You can use it in the author information
+for acknowledgements as illustrated above, but you can also use it in
+the title, or any place a footnote makes sense. It can be any text at
+all so you can use it for any purpose, such as to print an email
+address.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\title{<var>text</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctitle_007btext_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-title_002c-for-titlepage"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-for-_005ctitle"></a>
+<p>Required. Declare <var>text</var> to be the title of the document. Get line
+breaks inside <var>text</var> with a double backslash, <code>\\</code>. If you
+omit the <code>\title</code> declaration then you get &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: No
+\title given</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>To make your own title page, see&nbsp;<a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>. You can either
+create this as a one-off or you can include it as part of a renewed
+<code>\maketitle</code> command. (Many publishers will provide a class to use
+in place of <code>article</code> that formats the title according to their
+house requirements.)
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cpagenumbering"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle" accesskey="n" rel="next">\pagestyle</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\maketitle</a>, Up: <a href="#Page-styles" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page styles</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cpagenumbering-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">18.2 <code>\pagenumbering</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cpagenumbering"></a>
+<a name="index-page-numbering-style"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\pagenumbering{<var>number-style</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Specifies the style of page numbers, and resets the page number. The
+numbering style is reflected on the page, and also in the table of
+contents and other page references. This declaration has global scope
+so its effect is not delimited by braces or environments.
+</p>
+<p>In this example, before the Main section the pages are numbered
+&lsquo;<samp>a</samp>&rsquo;, etc. Starting on the page containing that section, the pages
+are numbered &lsquo;<samp>1</samp>&rsquo;, etc.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{document}\pagenumbering{alph}
+ ...
+\section{Main}\pagenumbering{arabic}
+ ...
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The argument <var>number-style</var> is one of the following (see
+also&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>).
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>arabic</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Arabic numerals: 1, 2, &hellip;
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>roman</code></dt>
+<dd><p>lowercase Roman numerals: i, ii, &hellip;
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>Roman</code></dt>
+<dd><p>uppercase Roman numerals: I, II, &hellip;
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>alph</code></dt>
+<dd><p>lowercase letters: a, b, &hellip; If you have more than 26 pages then you
+get &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: Counter too large</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>Alph</code></dt>
+<dd><p>uppercase letters: A, B, &hellip; If you have more than 26 pages then you
+get &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: Counter too large</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>gobble</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-package_002c-hyperref-2"></a>
+<a name="index-hyperref-package-2"></a>
+<p>LaTeX does not output a page number, although it
+does get reset. References to that page also are blank. (This does not
+work with the popular package <samp>hyperref</samp> so to have the page number
+not appear you may want to instead use <code>\pagestyle{empty}</code> or
+<code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code>.)
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Traditionally, if a document has front matter&mdash;preface, table of
+contents, etc.&mdash;then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. The
+main matter of a document uses arabic. See <a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</a>.
+</p>
+<p>If you want to address where the page number appears on the page,
+see&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>. If you want to change the value of page
+number then you will manipulate the <code>page</code> counter
+(see <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cpagestyle"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthispagestyle" accesskey="n" rel="next">\thispagestyle</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\pagenumbering</a>, Up: <a href="#Page-styles" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page styles</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cpagestyle-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">18.3 <code>\pagestyle</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cpagestyle"></a>
+<a name="index-header-style"></a>
+<a name="index-footer-style"></a>
+<a name="index-running-header-and-footer-style"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\pagestyle{<var>style</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Declaration that specifies how the page headers and footers are typeset,
+from the current page onwards.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-fancyhdr-1"></a>
+<a name="index-fancyhdr-package-1"></a>
+
+<p>A discussion with an example is below. Note first that the package
+<samp>fancyhdr</samp> is now the standard way to manipulate headers and
+footers. New documents that need to do anything other than one of the
+standard options below should use this package. See its documentation
+on CTAN.
+</p>
+<p>Values for <var>style</var>:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>plain</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The header is empty. The footer contains only a page number, centered.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>empty</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The header and footer is empty.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>headings</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Put running headers and footers on each page. The document style
+specifies what goes in there; see the discussion below.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>myheadings</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Custom headers, specified via the <code>\markboth</code> or the
+<code>\markright</code> commands.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Some discussion of the motivation for LaTeX&rsquo;s mechanism will help you
+work with the options <code>headings</code> or <code>myheadings</code>. The
+document source below produces an article, two-sided, with the pagestyle
+<code>headings</code>. On this document&rsquo;s left hand pages, LaTeX wants (in
+addition to the page number) the title of the current section. On its
+right hand pages LaTeX wants the title of the current subsection.
+When it makes up a page, LaTeX gets this information from the
+commands <code>\leftmark</code> and <code>\rightmark</code>. So it is up to
+<code>\section</code> and <code>\subsection</code> to store that information there.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass[twoside]{article}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+\begin{document}
+ ... \section{Section 1} ... \subsection{Subsection 1.1} ...
+\section{Section 2}
+ ...
+\subsection{Subsection 2.1}
+ ...
+\subsection{Subsection 2.2}
+ ...
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Suppose that the second section falls on a left page. Although when the
+page starts it is in the first section, LaTeX will put
+&lsquo;<samp>Section&nbsp;2</samp>&rsquo; in the left page header. As to the right header,
+if no subsection starts before the end of the right page then LaTeX
+blanks the right hand header. If a subsection does appear before the
+right page finishes then there are two cases. If at least one
+subsection starts on the right hand page then LaTeX will put in the
+right header the title of the first subsection starting on that right
+page. If at least one of 2.1, 2.2, &hellip;, starts on the left page but
+none starts on the right then LaTeX puts in the right hand header the
+title of the last subsection to start, that is, the one in effect during
+the right hand page.
+</p>
+<p>To accomplish this, in a two-sided article, LaTeX has <code>\section</code>
+issue a command <code>\markboth</code>, setting <code>\leftmark</code>
+to &lsquo;<samp>Section&nbsp;2</samp>&rsquo; and setting <code>\rightmark</code> to blank.
+And, LaTeX has <code>\subsection</code> issue a command <code>\markright</code>,
+setting <code>\rightmark</code> to &lsquo;<samp>Subsection&nbsp;2.1</samp>&rsquo;, etc.
+</p>
+<p>Here are the descriptions of <code>\markboth</code> and <code>\markright</code>:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\markboth{<var>left-head</var>}{<var>right-head</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmarkboth_007bleft_002dhead_007d_007bright_002dhead_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Sets both the right hand and left hand heading information for either a
+page style of <code>headings</code> or <code>myheadings</code>. A left hand page
+heading <var>left-head</var> is generated by the last <code>\markboth</code>
+command before the end of the page. A right hand page heading
+<var>right-head</var> is generated by the first <code>\markboth</code> or
+<code>\markright</code> that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by
+the last one that came before that page.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\markright{<var>right</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmarkright_007bright_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cthispagestyle"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\pagestyle</a>, Up: <a href="#Page-styles" accesskey="u" rel="up">Page styles</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cthispagestyle-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">18.4 <code>\thispagestyle</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cthispagestyle"></a>
+<a name="index-page-style_002c-this-page"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\thispagestyle{<var>style</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Works in the same way as the <code>\pagestyle</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>),
+except that it changes to <var>style</var> for the current page only. This
+declaration has global scope, so its effect is not delimited by braces
+or environments.
+</p>
+<p>Often the first page of a chapter or section has a different style. For
+example, this LaTeX book document has the first page of the first
+chapter in <code>plain</code> style, as is the default (see <a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{book}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+\begin{document}
+\chapter{First chapter}
+ ...
+\chapter{Second chapter}\thispagestyle{empty}
+ ...
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>plain</code> style has a page number on it, centered in the footer.
+To make the page entirely empty, the command
+<code>\thispagestyle{empty}</code> immediately follows the second
+<code>\chapter</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Spaces"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Boxes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Boxes</a>, Previous: <a href="#Page-styles" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Page styles</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Spaces-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">19 Spaces</h2>
+
+<a name="index-spaces"></a>
+<a name="index-white-space"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. Some of
+these are best suited to mathematical text; see&nbsp;<a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a>. Some spacing commands are suitable for both regular text
+and mathematical text; versions of some of these commands are in this
+chapter.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><th colspan="3" align="left" valign="top"><pre class="menu-comment">Horizontal space
+</pre></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad" accesskey="1">\enspace &amp; \quad &amp; \qquad</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Traditional horizontal spaces.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005chspace" accesskey="2">\hspace</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Any horizontal space.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005chfill" accesskey="3">\hfill</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Stretchable horizontal space.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005chss" accesskey="4">\hss</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Infinitely stretchable/shrinkable horizontal space.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cspacefactor" accesskey="5">\spacefactor</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Stretchability of following space
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029" accesskey="6">\(SPACE)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Backslash-space; and explicit space.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_007e" accesskey="7">~</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Tie, an unbreakable space.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace" accesskey="8">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">One-sixth of an em, and negative one-sixth.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005c_002f" accesskey="9">\/</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Italic correction.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill">\hrulefill &amp; \dotfill</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Stretchable horizontal rule or dots.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><th colspan="3" align="left" valign="top"><pre class="menu-comment">
+
+Vertical space
+</pre></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inter-paragraph vertical spaces.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak">\bigbreak &amp; \medbreak &amp; \smallbreak</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inter-paragraph space and page breaks.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cstrut">\strut</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Ensure height of a line.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cvspace">\vspace</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Vertical space.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cvfill">\vfill</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Stretchable vertical space.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Add arbitrary vertical space if needed.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005chspace" accesskey="n" rel="next">\hspace</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.1 <code>\enspace</code> &amp; <code>\quad</code> &amp; <code>\qquad</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005censpace"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cquad-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cqquad-1"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\enspace
+\quad
+\qquad
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Insert a horizontal space of 1/2em, 1em, or 2em. The
+em is a length defined by a font designer, often thought of as being the
+width of a capital&nbsp;M. One advantage of describing space in ems is
+that it can be more portable across documents than an absolute
+measurement such as points (see <a href="#Lengths_002fem">Lengths/em</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This puts a suitable gap between two graphics.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{womensmile.png}%
+ \qquad\includegraphics{mensmile.png}
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>See <a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a> for <code>\quad</code> and <code>\qquad</code>. These
+are lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice
+in many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with
+<code>\hspace</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005chspace"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005chfill" accesskey="n" rel="next">\hfill</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\enspace &amp; \quad &amp; \qquad</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005chspace-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.2 <code>\hspace</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005chspace"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\hspace{<var>length</var>}
+\hspace*{<var>length</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Insert the horizontal space <var>length</var>. The <var>length</var> can be
+positive, negative, or zero; adding negative space is like backspacing.
+It is a rubber length, that is, it may contain a <code>plus</code> or
+<code>minus</code> component, or both (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). Because the space is
+stretchable and shrinkable, it is sometimes called <em>glue</em>.
+</p>
+<p>This makes a line with &lsquo;<samp>Name:</samp>&rsquo; an inch from the right margin.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]{Name:\hspace{1in}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>*</code>-version inserts horizontal space that non-discardable.
+More precisely, when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines any white
+space&mdash;glues and kerns&mdash;that come at a line break are discarded. The
+<code>*</code>-version avoids that (technically, it adds a non-discardable
+invisible item in front of the space).
+</p>
+<p>In this example
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\parbox{0.8\linewidth}{%
+ Fill in each blank: Four \hspace*{1in} and seven years ago our
+ fathers brought forth on this continent, a new \hspace*{1in},
+ conceived in \hspace*{1in}, and dedicated to the proposition
+ that all men are created \hspace*{1in}.}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>the 1&nbsp;inch blank following &lsquo;<samp>conceived in</samp>&rsquo; falls at the start
+of a line. If you erase the <code>*</code> then LaTeX discards the blank.
+</p>
+<p>Here, the <code>\hspace</code> separates the three graphics.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{lion.png}% comment keeps out extra space
+ \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{tiger.png}%
+ \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{bear.png}
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Because the argument to each <code>\hspace</code> has <code>minus 0.25cm</code>,
+each can shrink a little if the three figures are too wide. But each
+space won&rsquo;t shrink more than 0.25cm (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005chfill"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005chss" accesskey="n" rel="next">\hss</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chspace" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hspace</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005chfill-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.3 <code>\hfill</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005chfill"></a>
+
+<a name="index-stretch_002c-infinite-horizontal"></a>
+<a name="index-infinite-horizontal-stretch"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\hfill
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but that can stretch
+horizontally as far as needed (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This creates a one-line paragraph with &lsquo;<samp>Name:</samp>&rsquo; on the left side
+of the page and &lsquo;<samp>Quiz One</samp>&rsquo; on the right.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\noindent Name:\hfill Quiz One
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005cfill"></a>
+<p>The <code>\hfill</code> command is equivalent to <code>\hspace{\fill}</code> and
+so the space can be discarded at line breaks. To avoid that instead use
+<code>\hspace*{\fill}</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005chspace">\hspace</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Here the graphs are evenly spaced in the middle of the figure.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+ ...
+\begin{figure}
+ \hspace*{\fill}%
+ \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph0.png}}%
+ \hfill\vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph1.png}}%
+ \hspace*{\fill}%
+ \caption{Comparison of two graphs} \label{fig:twographs}
+\end{figure}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Note the <code>\hspace*</code>&rsquo;s where the space could otherwise be dropped.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005chss"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cspacefactor" accesskey="n" rel="next">\spacefactor</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chfill" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hfill</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005chss-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.4 <code>\hss</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005chss"></a>
+<a name="index-horizontal-space"></a>
+<a name="index-horizontal-space_002c-stretchable"></a>
+<a name="index-space_002c-inserting-horizontal"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\hss
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a horizontal space that is infinitely shrinkable as well as
+infinitely stretchable (this command is a TeX primitive). LaTeX
+authors should reach first for the <code>\makebox</code> command to get the
+effects of <code>\hss</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Here, the first line&rsquo;s <code>\hss</code> makes the Z stick out to the right,
+overwriting the Y. In the second line the Z sticks out to the left,
+overwriting the X.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">X\hbox to 0pt{Z\hss}Y
+X\hbox to 0pt{\hss Z}Y
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Without the <code>\hss</code> you get something like &lsquo;<samp>Overfull \hbox
+(6.11111pt too wide) detected at line 20</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cspacefactor"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029" accesskey="n" rel="next">\(SPACE)</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chss" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hss</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cspacefactor-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.5 <code>\spacefactor</code></h3>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\spacefactor=<var>integer</var>
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005cspacefactor"></a>
+<p>Influence LaTeX&rsquo;s glue stretch and shrink behavior. Most user-level
+documents do not use this command.
+</p>
+<p>While LaTeX is laying out the material, it may stretch or shrink the
+gaps between words. (This space is not a character; it is called the
+<em>interword glue</em>; see <a href="#g_t_005chspace">\hspace</a>). The <code>\spacefactor</code> command
+(from Plain&nbsp;TeX) allows you to, for instance, have the space
+after a period stretch more than the space after a word-ending letter.
+</p>
+<p>After LaTeX places each character, or rule or other box, it sets a
+parameter called the <em>space factor</em>. If the next thing in the input
+is a space then this parameter affects how much stretching or shrinking
+can happen. A space factor that is larger than the normal value means
+that the glue can stretch more and shrink less. Normally, the space
+factor is 1000. This value is in effect following most characters, and
+any non-character box or math formula. But it is 3000 after a period,
+exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000 after a colon, 1500 after
+a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or closing double quote or single quote. Finally, it is 999
+after a capital letter.
+</p>
+<p>If the space factor&nbsp;<var>f</var> is 1000 then the glue gap will be the
+font&rsquo;s normal space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is
+3.3333&nbsp;points). Otherwise, if the space factor <var>f</var> is greater
+than 2000 then TeX adds the font&rsquo;s extra space value (for Computer
+Modern Roman 10 point this is 1.11111&nbsp;points), and then the font&rsquo;s
+normal stretch value is multiplied by <em>f /1000</em> and the normal
+shrink value is multiplied by <em>1000/f</em> (for Computer Modern Roman
+10 point these are 1.66666 and 1.11111&nbsp;points).
+</p>
+<p>For example, consider the period ending <code>A man's best friend is his
+dog.</code> After it, TeX puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the
+glue to stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much, as the glue
+after <code>friend</code>, which does not end in a period.
+</p>
+<p>The rules for space factors are even more complex because they play
+additional roles. In practice, there are two consequences. First, if a
+period or other punctuation is followed by a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or right single or double quote then the spacing effect of that
+period carries through those characters (that is, the following glue
+will have increased stretch and shrink). Second, if
+punctuation comes after a capital letter then its effect is not in place
+so you get an ordinary space. This second case also affects abbreviations
+that do not end in a capital letter (see <a href="#g_t_005c_0040">\@</a>).
+</p>
+<p>You can only use <code>\spacefactor</code> in paragraph mode or LR mode
+(see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>). You can see the current value with
+<code>\the\spacefactor</code> or <code>\showthe\spacefactor</code>.
+</p>
+<p>(Comment, not really related to <code>\spacefactor</code>: if you get errors
+like &lsquo;<samp>You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode</samp>&rsquo;, or &lsquo;<samp>You
+can't use `\spacefactor' in math mode.</samp>&rsquo;, or &lsquo;<samp>Improper \spacefactor</samp>&rsquo;
+then you have probably tried to redefine an internal command.
+See <a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</a>.)
+</p>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005c_0040" accesskey="1">\@</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Distinguish sentence-ending periods from abbreviations.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing" accesskey="2">\frenchspacing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Equal interword and inter-sentence space.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnormalsfcodes" accesskey="3">\normalsfcodes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Restore space factor settings to the default.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005c_0040"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing" accesskey="n" rel="next">\frenchspacing</a>, Up: <a href="#g_t_005cspacefactor" accesskey="u" rel="up">\spacefactor</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005c_0040-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">19.5.1 <code>\@</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_0040"></a>
+<a name="index-at_002dsign"></a>
+<a name="index-period_002c-sentence_002dending"></a>
+<a name="index-period_002c-abbreviation_002dending"></a>
+<a name="index-period_002c-spacing-after"></a>
+<a name="g_t_005cAT"></a>
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"><var>capital-letter</var>\@.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Treat a period as sentence-ending, where LaTeX would otherwise think
+it is part of an abbreviation. LaTeX thinks that a period ends an
+abbreviation if the period comes after a capital letter, and otherwise
+thinks the period ends the sentence. By default, in justifying a line
+LaTeX adjusts the space after a sentence-ending period (or a question
+mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than it adjusts the space
+between words (see <a href="#g_t_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This example shows the two cases to remember.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">The songs \textit{Red Guitar}, etc.\ are by Loudon Wainwright~III\@.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The second period ends the sentence, despite that it is preceded by a
+capital. We tell LaTeX that it ends the sentence by putting
+<code>\@</code> before it. The first period ends the abbreviation
+&lsquo;<samp>etc.</samp>&rsquo; but not the sentence. The backslash-space, <code>\ </code>,
+produces a mid-sentence space.
+</p>
+<p>So: if you have a capital letter followed by a period that ends the
+sentence, then put <code>\@</code> before the period. This holds even if
+there is an intervening right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or
+double quote, because the spacing effect of that period carries through
+those characters. For example, this
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Use the \textit{Instructional Practices Guide},
+(a book by the MAA)\@.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>will have correct inter-sentence spacing after the period.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\@</code> command is only for a text mode. If you use it outside of
+a text mode then you get &lsquo;<samp>You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical
+mode</samp>&rsquo; (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Comment: the converse case is a period ending an abbreviation whose last
+letter is not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last
+word in the sentence. For that case follow the period with a
+backslash-space, (<code>\ </code>), or a tie, (<code>~</code>), or <code>\@</code>.
+Examples are <code>Nat.\ Acad.\ Science</code>, and <code>Mr.~Bean</code>, and
+<code>(manure, etc.\@) for sale</code> (note in the last one that the
+<code>\@</code> comes before the closing parenthesis).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cfrenchspacing"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnormalsfcodes" accesskey="n" rel="next">\normalsfcodes</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_0040" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\@</a>, Up: <a href="#g_t_005cspacefactor" accesskey="u" rel="up">\spacefactor</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cfrenchspacing-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">19.5.2 <code>\frenchspacing</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cfrenchspacing"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnonfrenchspacing"></a>
+<a name="index-spacing_002c-inter_002dsentence"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\frenchspacing
+\nonfrenchspacing
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The first declaration causes LaTeX to treat spacing between sentences
+in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a sentence.
+The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</a>); this is the default.
+</p>
+<p>Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the
+space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
+exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words
+that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring <code>\frenchspacing</code>
+(the command is from Plain TeX) switches to the tradition that all
+spaces are treated equally.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnormalsfcodes"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\frenchspacing</a>, Up: <a href="#g_t_005cspacefactor" accesskey="u" rel="up">\spacefactor</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnormalsfcodes-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">19.5.3 <code>\normalsfcodes</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cnormalsfcodes"></a>
+<a name="index-spacing_002c-inter_002dsentence-1"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\normalsfcodes
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Reset the LaTeX space factor values to the default
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_007e" accesskey="n" rel="next">~</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cspacefactor" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\spacefactor</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Backslash_002dspace_002c-_005c-"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.6 Backslash-space, <code>\ </code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cNEWLINE"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cSPACE"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cTAB"></a>
+
+<p>This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a
+backslash followed by a space. Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a space. By default it produces white space of length
+3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt.
+</p>
+<p>When you type one or more blanks between words, LaTeX produces white
+space. But that is different than an explicit space. This illustrates.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{l}
+One blank: makes some space \\
+Three blanks: in a row \\
+Three spaces:\ \ \ in a row \\
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>On the first line LaTeX puts some space after the colon. On the
+second line LaTeX collapses the three blanks to output one
+whitespace, so you end with the same space after the colon as in the
+first line. LaTeX would similarly collapse a blank followed by a
+tab, or a blank and a newline and a blank. However, the bottom line
+asks for three spaces so the white area is wider. That is, the
+backslash-space command creates a fixed amount of horizontal space.
+(Note that you can define a horizontal space of any width at all with
+<code>\hspace</code>; see&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005chspace">\hspace</a>.)
+</p>
+<p>The backslash-space command has two main uses. It is often used after
+control sequences to keep them from gobbling the space that follows, as
+in <code>\TeX\ is nice</code>. (But using curly parentheses, as in
+<code>\TeX{} is best</code>, has the advantage of still working if the next
+character is a period.) The other common use is that it marks a period
+as ending an abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in <code>So
+says Prof.\ Smith</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005c_0040">\@</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Under normal circumstances, <code>\</code><tt class="key">tab</tt> and <code>\</code><tt class="key">newline</tt>
+are equivalent to backslash-space, <code>\ </code>.
+</p>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_007e"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace" accesskey="n" rel="next">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\(SPACE)</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_007e-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.7 <code>~</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_007e"></a>
+<a name="index-tie"></a>
+<a name="index-space_002c-hard"></a>
+<a name="index-space_002c-unbreakable"></a>
+<a name="index-NBSP"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"><var>before</var>~<var>after</var>
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The tie character, <code>~</code>, produces a space between <var>before</var> and
+<var>after</var> at which the line will not be broken. By default the white
+space has length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus
+1.11111pt (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Here LaTeX will not break the line between the final two words.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Thanks to Prof.~Lerman.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In addition, despite the period, LaTeX does not use the
+end-of-sentence spacing (see <a href="#g_t_005c_0040">\@</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could cause
+confusion. But they also reduce LaTeX&rsquo;s options when it breaks lines
+into paragraphs, so you can use too many. They are also matters of
+taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers. Nevertheless,
+here are some usage models, many of them from the TeXbook.
+</p>
+<ul>
+<li> Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references:
+<code>Chapter~12</code>, or <code>Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}</code>, or
+<code>Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}</code>. When cases are enumerated inline:
+<code>(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded</code>.
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-siunitx"></a>
+<a name="index-siunitx-package"></a>
+
+</li><li> Between a number and its unit: <code>$745.7.8$~watts</code> (the
+<samp>siunitx</samp> package has a special facility for this) or
+<code>144~eggs</code>. This includes between a month and a date:
+<code>October~12</code> or <code>12~Oct</code>. In general, in any expressions where
+numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space:
+<code>AD~565</code>, or <code>2:50~pm</code>, or <code>Boeing~747</code>, or
+<code>268~Plains Road</code>, or <code>\$$1.4$~billion</code>.
+
+</li><li> When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: <code>equals~$n$</code>, or
+<code>less than~$\epsilon$</code>, or <code>given~$X$</code>, or <code>modulo~$p^e$
+for all large~$n$</code> (but compare <code>is~$15$</code> with <code>is $15$~times
+the height</code>). Between mathematical symbols in apposition with nouns:
+<code>dimension~$d$</code> or <code>function~$f(x)$</code> (but compare <code>with
+length $l$~or more</code>). When a symbol is a tightly bound object of a
+preposition: <code>of~$x$</code>, or <code>from $0$ to~$1$</code>, or <code>in
+common with~$m$</code>.
+
+</li><li> Between symbols in series: <code>$1$,~$2$, or~$3$</code> or <code>$1$,~$2$,
+\ldots,~$n$</code>.
+
+</li><li> Between a person&rsquo;s forenames and between multiple surnames:
+<code>Donald~E. Knuth</code>, or <code>Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo</code>, or
+<code>Charles~XII</code> (but you must give TeX places to break the line so
+you may do <code>Charles Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin</code>).
+
+</li><li> Before a dash: <code>pages 12~--14</code> or <code>it is~--- it must be
+said~--- plausible</code>.
+
+</li></ul>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_002f" accesskey="n" rel="next">\/</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_007e" accesskey="p" rel="prev">~</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.8 <code>\thinspace</code> &amp; <code>\negthinspace</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cthinspace-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnegthinspace-1"></a>
+<a name="index-thin-space-1"></a>
+<a name="index-space_002c-thin"></a>
+<a name="index-thin-space_002c-negative-1"></a>
+<a name="index-space_002c-negative-thin"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\thinspace
+\negthinspace
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6em and
+-1/6em. These are the text mode equivalents of <code>\,</code> and
+<code>\!</code> (see <a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode_002f_005cthinspace">Spacing in math mode/\thinspace</a>). You can use
+<code>\,</code> as a synonym for <code>\thinspace</code> in text mode.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\negthinspace</code> command is used in text mode mostly for
+fiddling with spaces. One common use of <code>\thinspace</code> is as the
+space between nested quotes.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace''
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Another use is that some style guides call for a <code>\thinspace</code>
+between an ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides,
+though, think the three dots are quite enough already). Still another
+use is between initials, as in <code>D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005c_002f"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill" accesskey="n" rel="next">\hrulefill &amp; \dotfill</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005c_002f-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.9 <code>\/</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_002f"></a>
+<a name="index-italic-correction"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"><var>before-character</var>\/<var>after-character</var>
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Insert an <em>italic correction</em>, a small space defined by the font
+designer for each character, to avoid the character colliding with
+whatever follows. When you use <code>\/</code>, LaTeX takes the correction
+from the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has been
+applied to the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space.
+</p>
+<p>Here, were it not for the <code>\/</code>, the <var>before-character</var>
+italic&nbsp;f would hit the <var>after-character</var> roman&nbsp;H
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\companylogo}{{\it f}\/H}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>because the italic letter leans far to the right.
+</p>
+<p>If <var>after-character</var> is a period or comma then don&rsquo;t insert an
+italic correction since those punctuation symbols have a very small
+height. However, with semicolons or colons as well as with normal
+letters, the italic correction can help.
+</p>
+<p>When you use commands such as <code>\textit</code> or <code>\itshape</code> to
+change fonts, LaTeX will automatically insert any needed italic
+correction (see <a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Roman characters can also have an italic correction. An example is in
+the name <code>pdf\/\TeX</code>.
+</p>
+<p>There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done
+in a different way.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip" accesskey="n" rel="next">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_002f" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\/</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.10 <code>\hrulefill</code> &amp; <code>\dotfill</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005chrulefill"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cdotfill"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\hrulefill
+\dotfill
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce an infinite horizontal rubber length (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>) that
+LaTeX fills with a rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of
+white space.
+</p>
+<p>This outputs a line 2 inches long.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Name:~\makebox[2in]{\hrulefill}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This example, when placed between blank lines, creates a paragraph that
+is left and right justified and where the middle is filled with evenly
+spaced dots.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\noindent John Aubrey, RN \dotfill{} Melbury Lodge
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>To make the rule or dots go to the line&rsquo;s end use <code>\null</code> at the
+start or end.
+</p>
+<p>To change the rule&rsquo;s thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
+here
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{%
+ \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern\z@}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>which changes the default thickness of 0.4pt to 1pt.
+Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\dotfill}{%
+ \leavevmode\cleaders\hb@xt@1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern\z@}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>which changes the default length of 0.33em to 1.00em.
+</p>
+<p>This example produces a line for a signature.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{minipage}{4cm}
+ \centering
+ \hrulefill\\
+ Signed
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The line is 4cm long.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak" accesskey="n" rel="next">\bigbreak &amp; \medbreak &amp; \smallbreak</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hrulefill &amp; \dotfill</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.11 <code>\bigskip</code> &amp; <code>\medskip</code> &amp; <code>\smallskip</code></h3>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\bigskip
+\medskip
+\smallskip
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce an amount of vertical space, large or medium-sized or
+small. These commands are fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Here the skip suggests the passage of time (from <i>The Golden Ocean</i> by
+O&rsquo;Brian).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Mr Saumarez would have something rude to say to him, no doubt: he
+was at home again, and it was delightful.
+
+\bigskip
+``A hundred and fifty-seven miles and one third, in twenty-four hours,''
+said Peter.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Each command is associated with a length defined in the document class
+file.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dd><a name="bigskip"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\bigskip</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigskip"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cbigskipamount"></a>
+<p>The same as <code>\vspace{\bigskipamount}</code>, ordinarily about one line
+space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the <code>book</code> and
+<code>article</code> classes is <code>12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="medskip"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\medskip</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmedskip"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmedskipamount"></a>
+<p>The same as <code>\vspace{\medskipamount}</code>, ordinarily about half of a
+line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the <code>book</code>
+and <code>article</code> classes is <code>6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="smallskip"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\smallskip</code>
+<a name="index-_005csmallskip"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005csmallskipamount"></a>
+<p>The same as <code>\vspace{\smallskipamount}</code>, ordinarily about a
+quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the
+<code>book</code> and <code>article</code> classes is <code>3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Because each command is a <code>\vspace</code>, if you use on in mid-paragraph
+then it will insert its vertical space between the line in which you use
+it and the next line, not necessarily at the place that you use it. So
+these are best between paragraphs.
+</p>
+<p>The commands <code>\bigbreak</code>, <code>\medbreak</code>, and <code>\smallbreak</code>
+are similar but also suggest to LaTeX that this is a good place to
+put a page break (see <a href="#g_t_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak">\bigbreak &amp; \medbreak &amp; \smallbreak</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cstrut" accesskey="n" rel="next">\strut</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.12 <code>\bigbreak</code> &amp; <code>\medbreak</code> &amp; <code>\smallbreak</code></h3>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\bigbreak
+\medbreak
+\smallbreak
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a vertical space that is big or medium-sized or small, and
+suggest to LaTeX that this is a good place to break the page. (The
+associated penalties are -200, -100, and -50.)
+</p>
+<p>See <a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</a>, for more. These commands
+produce the same vertical space but differ in that they also remove a
+preceding vertical space if it is less than what they would insert (as
+with <code>\addvspace</code>). In addition, they terminate a paragraph where
+they are used: this example
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">abc\bigbreak def ghi
+
+jkl mno pqr
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>will output three paragraphs, the first ending in &lsquo;<samp>abc</samp>&rsquo; and the
+second starting, after an extra vertical space and a paragraph indent,
+with &lsquo;<samp>def</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cstrut"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvspace" accesskey="n" rel="next">\vspace</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\bigbreak &amp; \medbreak &amp; \smallbreak</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cstrut-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.13 <code>\strut</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cstrut"></a>
+<a name="index-strut"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\strut
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Ensure that the current line has height at least <code>0.7\baselineskip</code>
+and depth at least <code>0.3\baselineskip</code>. Essentially, LaTeX
+inserts into the line a rectangle having zero width,
+<code>\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]{0pt}{\baselineskip}</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005crule">\rule</a>).
+The <code>\baselineskip</code> changes with the current font and fontsize.
+</p>
+<p>In this example the <code>\strut</code> keeps the box inside the frame from
+having zero height.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[2in]{\strut}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This example has four lists. In the first there is a much bigger gap
+between items 2 and&nbsp;3 than there is between items 1 and&nbsp;2.
+The second list fixes that with a <code>\strut</code> at the end of its first
+item&rsquo;s second line.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+\noindent\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}
+ \item test
+ \item test
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}
+ \item test
+ \item test
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{minipage}%
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The final two lists use <code>\fbox</code> to show what&rsquo;s happening. The
+third list&rsquo;s <code>\parbox</code> goes only to the bottom of its second
+&lsquo;<samp>test</samp>&rsquo;, which happens not have any characters that descend below
+the baseline. The fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed
+extra below-baseline space.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-TikZ-1"></a>
+<a name="index-TikZ-package-1"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-Asymptote-1"></a>
+<a name="index-Asymptote-package-1"></a>
+
+<p>The <code>\strut</code> command is often useful in graphics, such as in
+<samp>TikZ</samp> or <samp>Asymptote</samp>. For instance, you may have a command
+such as <code>\graphnode{<var>node-name</var>}</code> that fits a circle around
+<var>node-name</var>. However, unless you are careful the <var>node-name</var>&rsquo;s
+&lsquo;<samp>x</samp>&rsquo; and &lsquo;<samp>y</samp>&rsquo; will produce different-diameter circles because
+the characters are different sizes. A careful <code>\graphnode</code> might
+insert a <code>\strut</code>, then <var>node-name</var>, and then draw the circle.
+</p>
+<p>The general approach of using a zero width <code>\rule</code> is useful in
+many circumstances. In this table, the zero-width rule keeps the top of
+the first integral from hitting the <code>\hline</code>. Similarly, the
+second rule keeps the second integral from hitting the first.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{rl}
+ \textsc{Integral} &amp;\textsc{Value} \\
+ \hline
+ $\int_0^x t\, dt$ &amp;$x^2/2$ \rule{0em}{2.5ex} \\
+ $\int_0^x t^2\, dt$ &amp;$x^3/3$ \rule{0em}{2.5ex}
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available
+optional argument to put in more vertical room, that won&rsquo;t work here.
+Changing the first double backslash to something like <code>\\[2.5ex]</code>
+will put the room between the header line and the <code>\hline</code>, and the
+integral would still hit the line.)
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cvspace"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvfill" accesskey="n" rel="next">\vfill</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cstrut" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\strut</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cvspace-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.14 <code>\vspace</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cvspace"></a>
+<a name="index-vertical-space"></a>
+<a name="index-space_002c-vertical"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\vspace{<var>length</var>}
+\vspace*{<var>length</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Add the vertical space <var>length</var>. The <var>length</var> can be positive,
+negative, or zero. It is a rubber length&mdash;it may contain a <code>plus</code>
+or <code>minus</code> component (see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This puts space between the two paragraphs.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">And I slept.
+
+\vspace{1ex plus 0.5ex}
+The new day dawned cold.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>(See <a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</a> for common inter-paragraph
+spaces.)
+</p>
+<p>The <code>*</code>-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable. More
+precisely, LaTeX discards vertical space at a page break and the
+<code>*</code>-version causes the space to stay. This example leaves space
+between the two questions.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Question: Find the integral of \( 5x^4+5 \).
+
+\vspace*{2cm plus 0.5cm}
+Question: Find the derivative of \( x^5+5x+9 \).
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>That space will be present even if the page break happens to fall
+between the questions.
+</p>
+<p>If you use <code>\vspace</code> in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
+horizontal mode) then the space is inserted after the line containing
+the <code>\vspace</code> command; it does not start a new paragraph at the
+<code>\vspace</code> command.
+</p>
+<p>In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
+the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{document}
+1) Who put the bomp in the bomp bah bomp bah bomp?
+\vspace{1in plus 1fill}
+
+2) Who put the ram in the rama lama ding dong?
+\vspace{1in plus 1fill}
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cvfill"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005caddvspace" accesskey="n" rel="next">\addvspace</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cvspace" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\vspace</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cvfill-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.15 <code>\vfill</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cvfill"></a>
+
+<a name="index-stretch_002c-infinite-vertical"></a>
+<a name="index-infinite-vertical-stretch"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\vfill
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length that is
+infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as needed
+(see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>).
+</p>
+<p>It is often used in the same way as <code>\vspace{\fill}</code>, except that
+<code>\vfill</code> ends the current paragraph whereas <code>\vspace{\fill}</code>
+adds the infinite vertical space below its line, irrespective of the
+paragraph structure. In both cases that space will disappear at a page
+boundary; to circumvent this see the starred option
+in&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005cvspace">\vspace</a>.
+</p>
+<p>In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines contain
+the text &lsquo;<samp>Lost Dog!</samp>&rsquo; and the second &lsquo;<samp>Lost Dog!</samp>&rsquo; is exactly
+halfway between them.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{document}
+Lost Dog!
+\vfill
+Lost Dog! % perfectly in the middle
+\vfill
+Lost Dog!
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005caddvspace"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cvfill" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\vfill</a>, Up: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="u" rel="up">Spaces</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005caddvspace-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.16 <code>\addvspace</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005caddvspace"></a>
+<a name="index-vertical-space-1"></a>
+<a name="index-space_002c-inserting-vertical"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\addvspace{<var>vert-length</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Add a vertical space of <var>vert-length</var>. However, if there are two or
+more <code>\addvspace</code>&rsquo;s in a sequence then together they only add the
+space needed to make the natural length equal to the maximum of the
+<var>vert-length</var>&rsquo;s in that sequence. This command is fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>). The <var>vert-length</var> is a rubber length
+(see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This example illustrates. The <code>picture</code> draws a scale. In a
+standard LaTeX article the length <code>\baselineskip</code> is 12pt.
+The two rules here are 22pt apart: the sum of the
+<code>\baselineskip</code> and the 10pt from the first <code>addvspace</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{color}
+\begin{document}
+\setlength{\unitlength}{2pt}%
+\noindent\begin{picture}(0,0)%
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,-1){25}{{\color{blue}\line(1,0){1}}}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,-5){6}{{\color{red}\line(1,0){2}}}
+\end{picture}%
+\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}%
+\par\addvspace{10pt}% \addvspace{20pt}%
+\par\noindent\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}%
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Now uncomment the second <code>\addvspace</code>. It does not make the gap
+20pt longer; instead the gap is the sum of <code>\baselineskip</code>
+and 20pt. So <code>\addvspace</code> in a sense does the opposite of
+its name &mdash; it makes sure that multiple vertical spaces do not
+accumulate, but instead that only the largest one is used.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below
+an environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a
+<code>theorem</code> environment begins and ends with <code>\addvspace</code> so
+that two consecutive <code>theorem</code>&rsquo;s are separated by one vertical
+space, not two.
+</p>
+<p>A error &lsquo;<samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</samp>&rsquo; pointing to an
+<code>\addvspace</code> means that you were not in vertical mode when you hit
+this command. One way to change that is to precede <code>\addvspace</code>
+with a <code>\par</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005cpar">\par</a>), as in the above example.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Boxes"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Color" accesskey="n" rel="next">Color</a>, Previous: <a href="#Spaces" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Spaces</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Boxes-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">20 Boxes</h2>
+
+<a name="index-boxes"></a>
+
+<p>At its core, LaTeX puts things in boxes and then puts the boxes on a
+page. So these commands are central.
+</p>
+<p>There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating boxes.
+One useful adjunct to the commands here is <samp>adjustbox</samp>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox" accesskey="1">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Horizontal boxes.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox" accesskey="2">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Put a frame around a box.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cparbox" accesskey="3">\parbox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Box with text in paragraph mode.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005craisebox" accesskey="4">\raisebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Raise or lower text.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox" accesskey="5">\sbox &amp; \savebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Like <code>\makebox</code> but save the text for later.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#lrbox" accesskey="6">lrbox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Environment version of <code>\sbox</code>.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cusebox" accesskey="7">\usebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Print saved text.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Boxes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Boxes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.1 <code>\mbox</code> &amp; <code>\makebox</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cmbox"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmakebox"></a>
+<a name="index-box"></a>
+<a name="index-make-a-box"></a>
+<a name="index-hyphenation_002c-preventing"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\mbox{<var>text</var>}
+\makebox{<var>text</var>}
+\makebox[<var>width</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+\makebox[<var>width</var>][<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Create a box, a container for material. The <var>text</var> is typeset in
+LR mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>) so it is not broken into lines. The
+<code>\mbox</code> command is robust, while <code>\makebox</code> is fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Because <code>text</code> is not broken into lines, you can use <code>\mbox</code>
+to prevent hyphenation. In this example, LaTeX will not hyphenate
+the table name, &lsquo;<samp>T-4</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">See Table~\mbox{T-4}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The first two command versions, <code>\mbox</code> and <code>\makebox</code>, are
+roughly equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the
+<var>text</var>. (They are like plain TeX&rsquo;s <code>\hbox</code>.)
+</p>
+<p>In the third version the optional argument <var>width</var> specifies the
+width of the box. Note that the space occupied by the text need not
+equal the width of the box. For one thing, <var>text</var> can be too small;
+this creates a full-line box
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\makebox[\linewidth]{Chapter Exam}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>with &lsquo;<samp>Chapter Exam</samp>&rsquo; centered. But <var>text</var> can also be too wide
+for <var>width</var>. See the example below of zero-width boxes.
+</p>
+<a name="mbox-makebox-depth"></a><a name="mbox-makebox-height"></a><a name="mbox-makebox-width"></a><a name="mbox-makebox-totalheight"></a><p>In the <var>width</var> argument you can use the following lengths that refer
+to the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets on typesetting
+<var>text</var>: <code>\depth</code>, <code>\height</code>, <code>\width</code>,
+<code>\totalheight</code> (this is the box&rsquo;s height plus its depth). For
+example, to make a box with the text stretched to double the natural
+size you can say this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>For the fourth command version the optional argument <var>position</var>
+gives position of the text within the box. It may take the following
+values:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The <var>text</var> is centered (default).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The <var>text</var> is flush left.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Flush right.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>s</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Stretch the interword space in <var>text</var> across the entire <var>width</var>.
+The <var>text</var> must contain stretchable space for this to work. For
+instance, this could head a press release:
+<code>\noindent\makebox[\textwidth][s]{\large\hfil IMMEDIATE\hfil
+RELEASE\hfil}</code>
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>A common use of <code>\makebox</code> is to make zero-width text boxes. This
+puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\pts}[1]{\makebox[0em][r]{#1 points\hspace*{1em}}}
+\pts{10}What is the air-speed velocity of an unladen swallow?
+
+\pts{90}An African or European swallow?
+</pre></div>
+
+<p><a name="index-package_002c-TikZ-2"></a>
+<a name="index-TikZ-package-2"></a>
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-Asymptote-2"></a>
+<a name="index-Asymptote-package-2"></a>
+
+<p>The right edge of the output &lsquo;<samp>10 points </samp>&rsquo; (note the ending space)
+will be just before the &lsquo;<samp>What</samp>&rsquo; (note the space after
+&lsquo;<samp>points</samp>&rsquo;). You can use <code>\makebox</code> similarly when making
+graphics, such as in <samp>TikZ</samp> or <samp>Asymptote</samp>, where you put the
+edge of the text at a known location, regardless of the length of that
+text.
+</p>
+<p>For boxes with frames see&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a>. For colors
+see&nbsp;<a href="#Colored-boxes">Colored boxes</a>.
+</p>
+<p>There is a related version of <code>\makebox</code> that is used within the
+<code>picture</code> environment, where the length is given in terms of
+<code>\unitlength</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>).
+</p>
+<p>If you put a double-backslash into <var>text</var> then LaTeX will not
+give you a new line; for instance <code>\makebox{abc def \\ ghi}</code>
+outputs &lsquo;<samp>abc defghi</samp>&rsquo; while <code>\makebox{abc def \par ghi}</code>
+outputs &lsquo;<samp>abc def ghi</samp>&rsquo;, but neither go to a second line. To get
+multiple lines see&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005cparbox">\parbox</a> and&nbsp;<a href="#minipage">minipage</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cparbox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\parbox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Boxes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Boxes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.2 <code>\fbox</code> &amp; <code>\framebox</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cfbox"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cframebox-1"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\fbox{<var>text</var>}
+\framebox{<var>text</var>}
+\framebox[<var>width</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+\framebox[<var>width</var>][<var>position</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Create a box with an enclosing frame, four lines surrounding the space.
+These commands are the same as <code>\mbox</code> and <code>\makebox</code> except
+for the frame (see <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a>). The <code>\fbox</code> command is
+robust, the <code>\framebox</code> command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\fbox{Warning! No work shown, no credit given.}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>LaTeX puts the text into a box that cannot be split or hyphenated.
+Around that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four lines making
+a frame.
+</p>
+<p>The first two command invocations, <code>\fbox{...}</code> and
+<code>\framebox{...}</code>, are roughly the same. As to the third and
+fourth invocations, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box
+width as <var>width</var> and the position of the text inside that box as
+<var>position</var>. See <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a> for the full description but
+here is an example creating an empty box that is 1/4in wide.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[0.25in]{\strut}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\strut</code> inserts a vertical height of <code>\baselineskip</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cstrut">\strut</a>).
+</p>
+<p>These parameters determine the frame layout.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dd><a name="fbox-framebox-fboxrule"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\fboxrule</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfboxrule-2"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-frame_002c-line-width"></a>
+<a name="index-frame-rule-width"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cfboxrule"></a>
+<p>The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box. The default is
+0.2pt. Change it with a command such as
+<code>\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005csetlength">\setlength</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="fbox-framebox-fboxsep"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>\fboxsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfboxsep-2"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-frame_002c-separation-from-contents"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cfboxsep"></a>
+<p>The distance from the frame to the enclosed box. The default is 3pt.
+Change it with a command such as <code>\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005csetlength">\setlength</a>). Setting it to 0pt is useful sometimes:
+this will put a frame around the picture with no white border.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+ \framebox{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{prudence.jpg}}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The extra curly braces keep the effect of the <code>\setlength</code> local.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>As with <code>\mbox</code> and <code>\makebox</code>, LaTeX will not break lines
+in <var>text</var>. But this example has LaTeX break lines to make a
+paragraph, and then frame the result.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\framebox{%
+ \begin{minipage}{0.6\linewidth}
+ My dear, here we must run as fast as we can, just to stay in place.
+ And if you wish to go anywhere you must run twice as fast as that.
+ \end{minipage}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>See <a href="#Colored-boxes">Colored boxes</a> for colors other than black and white.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>picture</code> environment has a version of this command where the
+units depend on <code>picture</code>&rsquo;s <code>\unitlength</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cparbox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005craisebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\raisebox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Boxes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Boxes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cparbox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.3 <code>\parbox</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cparbox"></a>
+<a name="index-paragraph-mode-1"></a>
+<a name="index-paragraph_002c-in-a-box"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\parbox{<var>width</var>}{<var>contents</var>}
+\parbox[<var>position</var>]{<var>width</var>}{<var>contents</var>}
+\parbox[<var>position</var>][<var>height</var>]{<var>width</var>}{<var>contents</var>}
+\parbox[<var>position</var>][<var>height</var>][<var>inner-pos</var>]{<var>width</var>}{<var>contents</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a box of text that is <var>width</var> wide. Use this command to make
+a box of small pieces of text, of a single paragraph. This command is
+fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{picture}(0,0)
+ ...
+ \put(1,2){\parbox{1.75in}{\raggedright Because the graph is a line on
+ this semilog paper, the relationship is
+ exponential.}}
+\end{picture}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <var>contents</var> are processed in a text mode (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>) so
+LaTeX will break lines to make a paragraph. But it won&rsquo;t make
+multiple paragraphs; for that, use a <code>minipage</code> environment
+(see <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The options for <code>\parbox</code> (except for <var>contents</var>) are the same
+as those for <code>minipage</code>. For convenience a summary of the options
+is here but see&nbsp;<a href="#minipage">minipage</a> for a complete description.
+</p>
+<p>There are two required arguments. The <var>width</var> is a rigid length
+(see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). It sets the width of the box into which LaTeX
+typesets <var>contents</var>. The <var>contents</var> is the text that is placed
+in that box. It should not have any paragraph-making components.
+</p>
+<p>There are three optional arguments, <var>position</var>, <var>height</var>, and
+<var>inner-pos</var>. The <var>position</var> gives the vertical alignment of the
+<code>parbox</code> with respect to the surrounding material. The possible
+values are <code>c</code> or <code>m</code> to make the vertical center of the
+<code>parbox</code> lines up with the center of the adjacent line (this is the
+default), or <code>t</code> to match the top line of the <code>parbox</code> with
+the baseline of the surrounding material, or <code>b</code> to match the
+bottom line.
+</p>
+<p>The optional argument <var>height</var> overrides the natural height of the
+box.
+</p>
+<p>The optional argument <var>inner-pos</var> controls the placement of
+<var>content</var> inside the <code>parbox</code>. Its default is the value of
+<var>position</var>. Its possible values are: <code>t</code> to put the
+<var>content</var> at the top of the box, <code>c</code> to put it in the vertical
+center, <code>b</code> to put it at the bottom of the box, and <code>s</code> to
+stretch it out vertically (for this, the text must contain vertically
+stretchable space).
+</p>
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005craisebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\sbox &amp; \savebox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cparbox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\parbox</a>, Up: <a href="#Boxes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Boxes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005craisebox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.4 <code>\raisebox</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005craisebox"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\raisebox{<var>distance</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+\raisebox{<var>distance</var>}[<var>height</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+\raisebox{<var>distance</var>}[<var>height</var>][<var>depth</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Raise or lower <var>text</var>. This command is fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by
+lowering the vertical bar symbol.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}}
+$f\restricted{A}$
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The first mandatory argument <var>distance</var> specifies how far to raise
+the second mandatory argument <var>text</var>. This is a rigid length
+(see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). If it is negative then it lowers <var>text</var>. The
+<var>text</var> is processed in LR mode so it cannot contain line breaks
+(see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The optional arguments <var>height</var> and <var>depth</var> are dimensions. If
+they are specified, they override the natural height and depth of the
+box LaTeX gets by typesetting <var>text</var>.
+</p>
+<a name="raisebox-depth"></a><a name="raisebox-height"></a><a name="raisebox-width"></a><a name="raisebox-totalheight"></a><p>In the arguments <var>distance</var>, <var>height</var>, and <var>depth</var> you can
+use the following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that
+LaTeX gets on typesetting <var>text</var>: <code>\depth</code>, <code>\height</code>,
+<code>\width</code>, <code>\totalheight</code> (this is the box&rsquo;s height plus its
+depth).
+</p>
+<p>This will align two graphics on their top (see <a href="#Graphics">Graphics</a>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{calc} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{center}
+ \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{lion.png}}
+ \qquad
+ \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{meta.png}}
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The first <code>\height</code> is the height of <samp>lion.png</samp> while the
+second is the height of <samp>meta.png</samp>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#lrbox" accesskey="n" rel="next">lrbox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005craisebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\raisebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Boxes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Boxes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.5 <code>\sbox</code> &amp; <code>\savebox</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005csbox"></a>
+<a name="index-_005csavebox"></a>
+<a name="index-box_002c-save"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\sbox{<var>box-cmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+\savebox{<var>box-cmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+\savebox{<var>box-cmd</var>}[<var>width</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+\savebox{<var>box-cmd</var>}[<var>width</var>][<var>pos</var>]{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Typeset <var>text</var> just as with <code>\makebox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a>) except that LaTeX does not output it but instead saves it
+in a storage bin named <var>box-cmd</var>. The bin name <var>box-cmd</var> begins
+with a backslash, <code>\</code>. You must have previously allocated the bin
+<var>box-cmd</var> with <code>\newsavebox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>).The
+<code>\sbox</code> command is robust while <code>\savebox</code> is fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This creates and uses a bin.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newsavebox{\fullname}
+\sbox{\fullname}{John Jacob Jingleheimer Schmidt}
+ ...
+\usebox{\fullname}! His name is my name, too!
+Whenever we go out, the people always shout!
+There goes \\usebox{\fullname}! Ya da da da da da da.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a <code>\newcommand</code> is
+efficiency, that LaTeX need not repeatedly retypeset the contents.
+See the example below.
+</p>
+<p>The first two command invocations,
+<code>\sbox{<var>box-cmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code> and
+<code>\savebox{<var>box-cmd</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code>, are roughly equivalent.
+As to the third and fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify
+the box width as <var>width</var>, and the position of the text inside that
+box as <var>position</var>. See <a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a> for the full
+description.
+</p>
+<p>In the <code>\sbox</code> and <code>\savebox</code> commands the <var>text</var> is
+typeset in LR mode so it does not have line breaks (see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>). If
+you use these then LaTeX doesn&rsquo;t give you an error but it ignores
+what you want: if you enter <code>\sbox{\newbin}{test \\ test}</code> and
+<code>\usebox{\newbin}</code> then you get &lsquo;<samp>testtest</samp>&rsquo;, while if you
+enter <code>\sbox{\newbin}{test \par test}</code> and
+<code>\usebox{\newbin}</code> then you get &lsquo;<samp>test test</samp>&rsquo;, but no error or
+warning. To fix this use a <code>\parbox</code> or <code>minipage</code> as here.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\savebox{\abin}{%
+ \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{minipage}}
+ ...
+\usebox{\abin}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin&rsquo;s contents, this puts
+the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the
+header. LaTeX only typesets it once.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{graphicx} % all this in the preamble
+\newsavebox{\sealbin}
+\savebox{\sealbin}{%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}%
+ \begin{picture}(0,0)%
+ \put(1.5,-2.5){%
+ \begin{tabular}{c}
+ \includegraphics[height=2in]{companylogo.png} \\
+ Office of the President
+ \end{tabular}}
+ \end{picture}%
+}
+\markright{\usebox{\sealbin}}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>picture</code> environment is good for fine-tuning the placement.
+</p>
+<p>If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like
+&lsquo;<samp>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt; \nobin</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="lrbox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cusebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\usebox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\sbox &amp; \savebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Boxes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Boxes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="lrbox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.6 <code>lrbox</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-lrbox"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{lrbox}{<var>box-cmd</var>}
+ <var>text</var>
+\end{lrbox}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <var>text</var> inside the environment is saved in the bin
+<code><var>box-cmd</var></code>. The <var>box-cmd</var> must begin with a
+backslash. You must create this bin in advance with <code>\newsavebox</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>). This is the environment form of the <code>\sbox</code>
+and <code>\savebox</code> commands, and is equivalent to them. See <a href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox &amp; \savebox</a> for the full information.
+</p>
+<p>In this example the environment is convenient for entering the
+<code>tabular</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newsavebox{\jhbin}
+\begin{lrbox}{\jhbin}
+ \begin{tabular}{c}
+ \includegraphics[height=1in]{jh.png} \\
+ Jim Hef{}feron
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{lrbox}
+ ...
+\usebox{\jhbin}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cusebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#lrbox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">lrbox</a>, Up: <a href="#Boxes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Boxes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cusebox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.7 <code>\usebox</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cusebox"></a>
+<a name="index-box_002c-use-saved-box"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usebox{<var>box-cmd</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce the box most recently saved in the bin <var>box-cmd</var> by the
+commands <code>\sbox</code> or <code>\savebox</code>, or the <code>lrbox</code>
+environment. See <a href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox &amp; \savebox</a> for more information and examples.
+(Note that <var>box-cmd</var> starts with a backslash.) This command is
+robust (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Color"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Graphics" accesskey="n" rel="next">Graphics</a>, Previous: <a href="#Boxes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Boxes</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Color-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">21 Color</h2>
+
+<a name="index-color"></a>
+
+<p>You can add color to text, rules, etc. You can also have color in a box
+or on an entire page and write text on top of it.
+</p>
+<p>Color support comes as an additional package. So put
+<code>\usepackage{color}</code> in your document preamble to use the
+commands described here.
+</p>
+<p>Many other packages also supplement LaTeX&rsquo;s color abilities.
+Particularly worth mentioning is <samp>xcolor</samp>, which is widely used and
+significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding
+&lsquo;<samp>HTML</samp>&rsquo; and &lsquo;<samp>Hsb</samp>&rsquo; color models.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Color-package-options" accesskey="1">Color package options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Options when you load the standard package.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Color-models" accesskey="2">Color models</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">How colors are represented.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Commands-for-color" accesskey="3">Commands for color</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">The available commands.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Color-package-options"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Color-models" accesskey="n" rel="next">Color models</a>, Up: <a href="#Color" accesskey="u" rel="up">Color</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="color-package-options"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.1 <code>color</code> package options</h3>
+
+<a name="index-color-package-options"></a>
+<a name="index-options_002c-color-package"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage[<var>comma-separated option list</var>]{color}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>When you load the <samp>color</samp> package there are two kinds of available
+options.
+</p>
+<p>The first specifies the <em>printer driver</em>. LaTeX doesn&rsquo;t contain
+information about different output systems but instead depends on
+information stored in a file. Normally you should not specify the
+driver option in the document, and instead rely on your system&rsquo;s
+default. One advantage of this is that it makes the document portable
+across systems. For completeness we include a list of the drivers. The
+currently relevant ones are: <samp>dvipdfmx</samp>, <samp>dvips</samp>,
+<samp>dvisvgm</samp>, <samp>luatex</samp>, <samp>pdftex</samp>, <samp>xetex</samp>. The two
+<samp>xdvi</samp> and <samp>oztex</samp> are essentially aliases for <samp>dvips</samp>
+(and <samp>xdvi</samp> is monochrome). Ones that should not be used for new
+systems are: <samp>dvipdf</samp>, <samp>dvipdfm</samp>, <samp>dviwin</samp>,
+<samp>dvipsone</samp>, <samp>emtex</samp>, <samp>pctexps</samp>, <samp>pctexwin</samp>,
+<samp>pctexhp</samp>, <samp>pctex32</samp>, <samp>truetex</samp>, <samp>tcidvi</samp>,
+<samp>vtex</samp> (and <samp>dviwindo</samp> is an alias for <samp>dvipsone</samp>).
+</p>
+<p>The second kind of options, beyond the drivers, are below.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>monochrome</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Disable the color commands, so that they do not generate errors but do
+not generate color either.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>dvipsnames</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Make available a list of 68 color names that are often used,
+particularly in legacy documents. These color names were originally
+provided by the <samp>dvips</samp> driver, giving the option name.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>nodvipsnames</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Do not load that list of color names, saving LaTeX a tiny amount of
+memory space.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Color-models"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Commands-for-color" accesskey="n" rel="next">Commands for color</a>, Previous: <a href="#Color-package-options" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Color package options</a>, Up: <a href="#Color" accesskey="u" rel="up">Color</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Color-models-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.2 Color models</h3>
+
+<a name="index-color-models"></a>
+
+<p>A <em>color model</em> is a way of representing colors. LaTeX&rsquo;s
+capabilities depend on the printer driver. However, the <samp>pdftex</samp>,
+<samp>xetex</samp>, and <samp>luatex</samp> printer drivers are today by far the
+most commonly used. The models below work for those drivers. All but
+one of these is also supported by essentially all other printer drivers
+used today.
+</p>
+<p>Note that color combination can be additive or subtractive. Additive
+mixes colors of light, so that for instance combining full intensities
+of red, green, and blue produces white. Subtractive mixes pigments,
+such as with inks, so that combining full intensity of cyan, magenta,
+and yellow makes black.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dd><a name="color-models-cmyk"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>cmyk</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1,
+inclusive. The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second is
+magenta, and the others are yellow and black. A number value of 0 means
+minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity. This model is often
+used in color printing. It is a subtractive model.
+</p>
+<a name="color-models-gray"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>gray</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive. The colors are shades
+of grey. The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white.
+</p>
+<a name="color-models-rgb"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>rgb</code></dt>
+<dd><p>A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1,
+inclusive. The first number is the intensity of the red component, the
+second is green, and the third the blue. A number value of 0 means that
+none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full intensity.
+This is an additive model.
+</p>
+<a name="color-models-RGB"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>RGB</code></dt>
+<dd><p>(<samp>pdftex</samp>, <samp>xetex</samp>, <samp>luatex</samp> drivers) A comma-separated
+list with three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive. This model is a
+convenience for using <code>rgb</code> since outside of LaTeX colors are
+often described in a red-green-blue model using numbers in this range.
+The values entered here are converted to the <code>rgb</code> model by
+dividing by 255.
+</p>
+<a name="color-models-named"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>named</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Colors are accessed by name, such as &lsquo;<samp>PrussianBlue</samp>&rsquo;. The list of
+names depends on the driver, but all support the names &lsquo;<samp>black</samp>&rsquo;,
+&lsquo;<samp>blue</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>cyan</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>green</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>magenta</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>red</samp>&rsquo;,
+&lsquo;<samp>white</samp>&rsquo;, and &lsquo;<samp>yellow</samp>&rsquo; (See the <code>dvipsnames</code> option in
+<a href="#Color-package-options">Color package options</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Commands-for-color"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Color-models" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Color models</a>, Up: <a href="#Color" accesskey="u" rel="up">Color</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Commands-for-color-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.3 Commands for color</h3>
+
+<a name="index-color-package-commands"></a>
+
+<p>These are the commands available with the <samp>color</samp> package.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Define-colors" accesskey="1">Define colors</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Give a color a name.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Colored-text" accesskey="2">Colored text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Text or rules in color.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Colored-boxes" accesskey="3">Colored boxes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">A box of color, to write over.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Colored-pages" accesskey="4">Colored pages</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">A whole page colored.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Define-colors"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Colored-text" accesskey="n" rel="next">Colored text</a>, Up: <a href="#Commands-for-color" accesskey="u" rel="up">Commands for color</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Define-colors-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">21.3.1 Define colors</h4>
+
+<a name="index-color-1"></a>
+<a name="index-define-color"></a>
+<a name="index-color_002c-define"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\definecolor{<var>name</var>}{<var>model</var>}{<var>specification</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Give the name <var>name</var> to the color. For example, after this
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>you can use that color name with <code>Hi ho,
+\textcolor{silver}{Silver}!</code>.
+</p>
+<p>This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change and
+not be misleading.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\definecolor{logocolor}{RGB}{145,92,131} % RGB needs pdflatex
+\newcommand{\logo}{\textcolor{logocolor}{Bob's Big Bagels}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Often a document&rsquo;s colors are defined in the preamble, or in the class
+or style, rather than in the document body.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Colored-text"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Colored-boxes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Colored boxes</a>, Previous: <a href="#Define-colors" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Define colors</a>, Up: <a href="#Commands-for-color" accesskey="u" rel="up">Commands for color</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Colored-text-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">21.3.2 Colored text</h4>
+
+<a name="index-color-2"></a>
+<a name="index-colored-text"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\textcolor{<var>name</var>}{...}
+\textcolor[<var>color model</var>]{<var>color specification</var>}{...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\color{<var>name</var>}
+\color[<var>color model</var>]{<var>specification</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The affected text gets the color. This line
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:}
+Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black. You
+can use a color declared with <code>\definecolor</code> in exactly the same
+way that we just used the builtin color &lsquo;<samp>magenta</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\definecolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{rgb}{1.0,0.11,0.0}
+I'm thinking about getting a \textcolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{sports car}.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The two <code>\textcolor</code> and <code>\color</code> differ in that the first is
+a command form, enclosing the text to be colored as an argument. Often
+this form is more convenient, or at least more explicit. The second
+form is a declaration, as in <code>The moon is made of {\color{green}
+green} cheese</code>, so it is in effect until the end of the current group
+or environment. This is sometimes useful when writing macros or as
+below where it colors everything inside the <code>center</code> environment,
+including the vertical and horizontal lines.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center} \color{blue}
+ \begin{tabular}{l|r}
+ UL &amp;UR \\ \hline
+ LL &amp;LR
+ \end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>You can use color in equations. A document might have this definition
+in the preamble
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>and then contain this equation.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{equation}
+ \int_a^b \textcolor{highlightcolor}{f'(x)}\,dx=f(b)-f(a)
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Typically the colors used in a document are declared in a class or style
+but sometimes you want a one-off. Those are the second forms in the
+synopses.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and
+{\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The format of <var>color specification </var> depends on the color model
+(see <a href="#Color-models">Color models</a>). For instance, while <code>rgb</code> takes three
+numbers, <code>gray</code> takes only one.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">The selection was \textcolor[gray]{0.5}{grayed out}.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Colors inside colors do not combine. Thus
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\textcolor{green}{kind of \textcolor{blue}{blue}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>has a final word that is blue, not a combination of blue and green.
+</p>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Colored-boxes"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Colored-pages" accesskey="n" rel="next">Colored pages</a>, Previous: <a href="#Colored-text" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Colored text</a>, Up: <a href="#Commands-for-color" accesskey="u" rel="up">Commands for color</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Colored-boxes-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">21.3.3 Colored boxes</h4>
+
+<a name="index-color-3"></a>
+<a name="index-colored-boxes"></a>
+<a name="index-box_002c-colored"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\colorbox{<var>name</var>}{...}
+\colorbox[<var>model name</var>]{<var>box background color</var>}{...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\fcolorbox{<var>frame color</var>}{<var>box background color</var>}{...}
+\fcolorbox[<var>model name</var>]{<var>frame color</var>}{<var>box background color</var>}{...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Make a box with the stated background color. The <code>\fcolorbox</code>
+command puts a frame around the box. For instance this
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Name:~\colorbox{cyan}{\makebox[5cm][l]{\strut}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>makes a cyan-colored box that is five centimeters long and gets its
+depth and height from the <code>\strut</code> (so the depth is
+<code>-.3\baselineskip</code> and the height is <code>\baselineskip</code>). This
+puts white text on a blue background.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\colorbox{blue}{\textcolor{white}{Welcome to the machine.}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\fcolorbox</code> commands use the same parameters as <code>\fbox</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a>), <code>\fboxrule</code> and <code>\fboxsep</code>, to
+set the thickness of the rule and the boundary between the box interior
+and the surrounding rule. LaTeX&rsquo;s defaults are <code>0.4pt</code> and
+<code>3pt</code>, respectively.
+</p>
+<p>This example changes the thickness of the border to 0.8 points. Note
+that it is surrounded by curly braces so that the change ends at the end
+of the second line.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">{\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}
+\fcolorbox{black}{red}{Under no circumstances turn this knob.}}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Colored-pages"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Colored-boxes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Colored boxes</a>, Up: <a href="#Commands-for-color" accesskey="u" rel="up">Commands for color</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Colored-pages-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">21.3.4 Colored pages</h4>
+
+<a name="index-color-4"></a>
+<a name="index-colored-page"></a>
+<a name="index-page_002c-colored"></a>
+<a name="index-background_002c-colored"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\pagecolor{<var>name</var>}
+\pagecolor[<var>color model</var>]{<var>color specification</var>}
+\nopagecolor
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The first two set the background of the page, and all subsequent pages,
+to the color. For an explanation of the specification in the second
+form see <a href="#Colored-text">Colored text</a>. The third returns the background to normal,
+which is a transparent background. (If that is not supported use
+<code>\pagecolor{white}</code>, although that will make a white background
+rather than the default transparent background.)
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"> ...
+\pagecolor{cyan}
+ ...
+\nopagecolor
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Graphics"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="n" rel="next">Special insertions</a>, Previous: <a href="#Color" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Color</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Graphics-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">22 Graphics</h2>
+
+<a name="index-graphics"></a>
+<a name="index-graphics-package"></a>
+
+<p>You can use graphics such as PNG or PDF files in your LaTeX document.
+You need an additional package, which comes standard with LaTeX.
+This example is the short how-to.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\include{graphicx} % goes in the preamble
+ ...
+\includegraphics[width=0.5\linewidth]{plot.pdf}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>To use the commands described here your document preamble must contain
+either <code>\usepackage{graphicx}</code> or
+<code>\usepackage{graphics}</code>. Most of the time, <samp>graphicx</samp> is the
+better choice.
+</p>
+<p>Graphics come in two main types, raster and vector. LaTeX can use
+both. In raster graphics the file contains an entry for each location
+in an array, describing what color it is. An example is a photograph,
+in JPG format. In vector graphics, the file contains a list of
+instructions such as &lsquo;<samp>draw a circle with this radius and that
+center</samp>&rsquo;. An example is a line drawing produced by the Asymptote
+program, in PDF format. Generally vector graphics are more useful
+because you can rescale their size without pixelation or other problems,
+and because they often have a smaller size.
+</p>
+<p>There are systems particularly well-suited to make graphics for a
+LaTeX document. For example, these allow you to use the same fonts
+as in your document. LaTeX comes with a <code>picture</code> environment
+(see <a href="#picture">picture</a>) that has simple capabilities. Besides that, there are
+other ways to include the graphic-making commands in the document. Two
+such systems are the PSTricks and TikZ packages. There are also systems
+external to LaTeX, that generate a graphic that you include using the
+commands of this chapter. Two that use a programming language are
+Asymptote and MetaPost. One that uses a graphical interface is Xfig.
+Full description of these systems is outside the scope of this document;
+see their documentation on CTAN.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Graphics-package-options" accesskey="1">Graphics package options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Options when you load the package.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Graphics-package-configuration" accesskey="2">Graphics package configuration</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Where to look for files, which file types.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Commands-for-graphics" accesskey="3">Commands for graphics</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">The available commands.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Graphics-package-options"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Graphics-package-configuration" accesskey="n" rel="next">Graphics package configuration</a>, Up: <a href="#Graphics" accesskey="u" rel="up">Graphics</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="graphics-package-options"></a>
+<h3 class="section">22.1 <code>graphics</code> package options</h3>
+
+<a name="index-graphics-package-options"></a>
+<a name="index-options_002c-graphics-package"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage[<var>comma-separated option list</var>]{graphics}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage[<var>comma-separated option list</var>]{graphicx}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>graphicx</code> package has a format for optional arguments to the
+<code>\includegraphics</code> command that is convenient (it is the key-value
+format), so it is the better choice for new documents. When you load
+the <samp>graphics</samp> or <samp>graphicx</samp> package with <code>\usepackage</code>
+there are two kinds of available options.
+</p>
+<p>The first is that LaTeX does not contain information about different
+output systems but instead depends on information stored in a
+<em>printer driver</em> file. Normally you should not specify the driver
+option in the document, and instead rely on your system&rsquo;s default. One
+advantage of this is that it makes the document portable across systems.
+</p>
+<p>For completeness here is a list of the drivers. The currently relevant
+ones are: <samp>dvipdfmx</samp>, <samp>dvips</samp>, <samp>dvisvgm</samp>, <samp>luatex</samp>,
+<samp>pdftex</samp>, <samp>xetex</samp>. The two <samp>xdvi</samp> and <samp>oztex</samp> are
+essentially aliases for <samp>dvips</samp> (and <samp>xdvi</samp> is monochrome).
+Ones that should not be used for new systems are: <samp>dvipdf</samp>,
+<samp>dvipdfm</samp>, <samp>dviwin</samp>, <samp>dvipsone</samp>, <samp>emtex</samp>,
+<samp>pctexps</samp>, <samp>pctexwin</samp>, <samp>pctexhp</samp>, <samp>pctex32</samp>,
+<samp>truetex</samp>, <samp>tcidvi</samp>, <samp>vtex</samp> (and <samp>dviwindo</samp> is an
+alias for <samp>dvipsone</samp>). These are stored in files with a
+<samp>.def</samp> extension, such as <samp>pdftex.def</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>The second kind of options are below.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>demo</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Instead of an image file, LaTeX puts in a 150&nbsp;pt by 100&nbsp;pt
+rectangle (unless another size is specified in the
+<code>\includegraphics</code> command).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>draft</code></dt>
+<dd><p>For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead the file name is
+printed in a box of the correct size. In order to determine the size,
+the file must be present.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>final</code></dt>
+<dd><p>(Default) Override any previous <code>draft</code> option, so that the
+document shows the contents of the graphic files.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>hiderotate</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Do not show rotated text. (This allows for the possibility that a
+previewer does not have the capability to rotate text.)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>hidescale</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Do not show scaled text. (This allows for the possibility that a
+previewer does not have the capability to scale.)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>hiresbb</code></dt>
+<dd><p>In a PS or EPS file the graphic size may be specified in two ways. The
+<code>%%BoundingBox</code> lines describe the graphic size using integer
+multiples of a PostScript point, that is, integer multiples of 1/72
+inch. A later addition to the PostScript language allows decimal
+multiples, such as 1.23, in <code>%%HiResBoundingBox</code> lines. This
+option has LaTeX to read the size from the latter.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Graphics-package-configuration"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Commands-for-graphics" accesskey="n" rel="next">Commands for graphics</a>, Previous: <a href="#Graphics-package-options" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Graphics package options</a>, Up: <a href="#Graphics" accesskey="u" rel="up">Graphics</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="graphics-package-configuration"></a>
+<h3 class="section">22.2 <code>graphics</code> package configuration</h3>
+
+<a name="index-graphics-1"></a>
+<a name="index-graphics-package-1"></a>
+<a name="index-configuration_002c-graphics-package"></a>
+<a name="index-EPS-files"></a>
+<a name="index-JPEG-files"></a>
+<a name="index-JPG-files"></a>
+<a name="index-PDF-graphic-files"></a>
+<a name="index-PNG-files"></a>
+
+<p>These commands configure the way LaTeX searches the file system for
+the graphic.
+</p>
+<p>The behavior of file system search code is necessarily platform
+dependent. In this document we cover GNU/Linux, Macintosh, and Windows, as
+those systems are typically configured. For other situations consult
+the documentation in <samp>grfguide.pdf</samp>, or the LaTeX source, or your
+TeX distribution&rsquo;s documentation.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cgraphicspath" accesskey="1">\graphicspath</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Directories to search.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions" accesskey="2">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">File types, such as JPG or EPS.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsRule" accesskey="3">\DeclareGraphicsRule</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">How to handle file types.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cgraphicspath"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions" accesskey="n" rel="next">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</a>, Up: <a href="#Graphics-package-configuration" accesskey="u" rel="up">Graphics package configuration</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cgraphicspath-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">22.2.1 <code>\graphicspath</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cgraphicspath"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\graphicspath{<var>list of dir names inside curly brackets</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Declare a list of directories to search for graphics files. This allows
+you to later say something like <code>\includegraphics{lion.png}</code>
+instead of having to give its path.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX always looks for graphic files first in the current directory.
+The declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory
+<samp>pix</samp>, and then <samp>../pix</samp>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{graphicx} % or graphics; put in preamble
+ ...
+\graphicspath{ {pix/} {../pix/} }
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\graphicspath</code> declaration is optional. If you don&rsquo;t include
+it then LaTeX&rsquo;s default is to search all of the places that it
+usually looks for a file (it uses LaTeX&rsquo;s <code>\input@path</code>). In
+particular, in this case one of the places it looks is the current
+directory.
+</p>
+<p>Enclose each directory name in curly braces; for example, above it says
+&lsquo;<samp><code>{pix}</code></samp>&rsquo;. Do this even if there is only one directory.
+Each directory name must end in a forward slash, <samp>/</samp>. This is true
+even on Windows, where good practice is to use forward slashes for all
+the directory separators since it makes the document portable to other
+platforms. If you have spaces in your directory name then use double
+quotes, as with <code>{&quot;my docs/&quot;}</code>. Getting one of these rules wrong
+will cause LaTeX to report <code>Error: File `<var>filename</var>' not
+found</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Basically, the algorithm is that with this example, after looking in the
+current directory,
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\graphicspath{ {pix/} {../pix/} }
+...
+\usepackage{lion.png}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>for each of the listed directories, LaTeX concatenates it with the
+file name and searches for the result, checking for <samp>pix/lion.png</samp>
+and then <samp>../pix/lion.png</samp>. This algorithm means that the
+<code>\graphicspath</code> command does not recursively search subdirectories:
+if you issue <code>\graphicspath{{a/}}</code> and the graphic is in
+<samp>a/b/lion.png</samp> then LaTeX will not find it. It also means that
+you can use absolute paths such as
+<code>\graphicspath{{/home/jim/logos/}}</code> or
+<code>\graphicspath{{C:/Users/Albert/Pictures/}}</code>. However, using
+these means that the document is not portable. (You could preserve
+portability by adjusting your TeX system settings configuration file
+parameter <code>TEXINPUTS</code>; see the documentation of your system.)
+</p>
+<p>You can use <code>\graphicspath</code> anywhere in the document. You can use
+it more than once. Show its value with
+<code>\makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput@path}\makeatother</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The directories are taken with respect to the base file. That is,
+suppose that you are working on a document based on <samp>book/book.tex</samp>
+and it contains <code>\include{chapters/chap1}</code>. If in
+<samp>chap1.tex</samp> you put <code>\graphicspath{{plots/}}</code> then
+LaTeX will not search for graphics in <samp>book/chapters/plots</samp>, but
+instead in <samp>book/plots</samp>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsRule" accesskey="n" rel="next">\DeclareGraphicsRule</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cgraphicspath" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\graphicspath</a>, Up: <a href="#Graphics-package-configuration" accesskey="u" rel="up">Graphics package configuration</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">22.2.2 <code>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{<var>comma-separated list of file extensions</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Declare the filename extensions to try. This allows you to specify the
+order in which to choose graphic formats when you include graphic files
+by giving the filename without the extension, as in
+<code>\includegraphics{functionplot}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>In this example, LaTeX will find files in the PNG format before PDF
+files.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.png,PNG,.pdf,.PDF}
+ ...
+\includegraphics{lion} % will find <samp>lion.png</samp> before <samp>lion.pdf</samp>
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Because the file name <samp>lion</samp> does not have a period, LaTeX uses
+the extension list. For each directory in the graphics path
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cgraphicspath">\graphicspath</a>), LaTeX will try the extensions in the order
+given. If it does not find such a file after trying all the directories
+and extensions then it reports &lsquo;<samp>! LaTeX Error: File `<samp>lion</samp>'
+not found</samp>&rsquo;. Note that you must include the periods at the start of the
+extensions.
+</p>
+<p>Because GNU/Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the list of
+file extensions is case sensitive on those platforms. The Windows
+platform is not case sensitive.
+</p>
+<p>You are not required to include <code>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</code> in
+your document; the printer driver has a sensible default. For example,
+the most recent <samp>pdftex.def</samp> has this extension list.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>You can use this command anywhere in the document. You can use it more
+than once. Show its value with
+<code>\makeatletter\typeout{\Gin@extensions}\makeatother</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsRule"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</a>, Up: <a href="#Graphics-package-configuration" accesskey="u" rel="up">Graphics package configuration</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsRule-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">22.2.3 <code>\DeclareGraphicsRule</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cDeclareGraphicsRule"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\DeclareGraphicsRule{<var>extension</var>}{<var>type</var>}{<var>size-file extension</var>}{<var>command</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Declare how to handle graphic files whose names end in <var>extension</var>.
+</p>
+<p>This example declares that all files with names have the form
+<samp>filename-without-dot.mps</samp> will be treated as output from MetaPost,
+meaning that the printer driver will use its MetaPost-handling code to
+input the file.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\DeclareGraphicsRule{.mps}{mps}{.mps}{}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\DeclareGraphicsRule{*}{mps}{*}{}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>tells LaTeX that it should handle as MetaPost output any file with an
+extension not covered by another rule, so it covers <samp>filename.1</samp>,
+<samp>filename.2</samp>, etc.
+</p>
+<p>This describes the four arguments.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>extension</var></dt>
+<dd><p>The file extension to which this rule applies. The extension is anything
+after and including the first dot in the filename. Use the Kleene star,
+<code>*</code>, to denote the default behaviour for all undeclared extensions.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>type</var></dt>
+<dd><p>The type of file involved. This type is a string that must be defined
+in the printer driver. For instance, files with extensions <samp>.ps</samp>,
+<samp>.eps</samp>, or <samp>.ps.gz</samp> may all be classed as type <code>eps</code>.
+All files of the same type will be input with the same internal command
+by the printer driver. For example, the file types that <samp>pdftex</samp>
+recognizes are: <code>jpg</code>, <code>jbig2</code>, <code>mps</code>, <code>pdf</code>,
+<code>png</code>, <code>tif</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>size-file extension</var></dt>
+<dd><p>The extension of the file to be read to determine the size of the
+graphic, if there is such a file. It may be the same as <var>extension</var>
+but it may be different.
+</p>
+<p>As an example, consider a PostScript graphic. To make it smaller, it
+might be compressed into a <samp>.ps.gz</samp> file. Compressed files are not
+easily read by LaTeX so you can put the bounding box information in a
+separate file. If <var>size-file extension</var> is empty then you must
+specify size information in the arguments of <code>\includegraphics</code>.
+</p>
+<p>If the driver file has a procedure for reading size files for
+<code>type</code> then that will be used, otherwise it will use the procedure
+for reading <samp>.eps</samp> files. (Thus you may specify the size of bitmap
+files in a file with a PostScript style <code>%%BoundingBox</code> line if no
+other format is available.)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>command</var></dt>
+<dd><p>A command that will be applied to the
+file. This is very often left blank. This command must start with a
+single backward quote. Thus,
+<code>\DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{`gunzip -c
+#1}</code> specifies that any file with the extension <samp>.eps.gz</samp> should
+be treated as an <code>eps</code> file, with the BoundingBox information
+stored in the file with extension <samp>.eps.bb</samp>, and that the command
+<code>gunzip -c</code> will run on your platform to decompresses the file.
+</p>
+<p>Such a command is specific to your platform. In addition, your TeX
+system must allow you to run external commands; as a security measure
+modern systems restrict running commands unless you explicitly allow it.
+See the documentation for your TeX distribution.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Commands-for-graphics"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Graphics-package-configuration" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Graphics package configuration</a>, Up: <a href="#Graphics" accesskey="u" rel="up">Graphics</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Commands-for-graphics-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">22.3 Commands for graphics</h3>
+
+<a name="index-graphics-package-commands"></a>
+<a name="index-commands_002c-graphics-package"></a>
+
+<p>These are the commands available with the <samp>graphics</samp> and
+<samp>graphicx</samp> packages.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics" accesskey="1">\includegraphics</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Using a graphic in your document.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005crotatebox" accesskey="2">\rotatebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Rotating boxes, including graphics.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cscalebox" accesskey="3">\scalebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Scaling boxes, including graphics.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cresizebox" accesskey="4">\resizebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Scaling boxes, including graphics, to a set size.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cincludegraphics"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005crotatebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\rotatebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Commands-for-graphics" accesskey="u" rel="up">Commands for graphics</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cincludegraphics-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">22.3.1 <code>\includegraphics</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-graphics-2"></a>
+<a name="index-graphics-package-2"></a>
+<a name="index-including-graphics"></a>
+<a name="index-importing-graphics"></a>
+<a name="index-EPS-files-1"></a>
+<a name="index-JPEG-files-1"></a>
+<a name="index-JPG-files-1"></a>
+<a name="index-PDF-graphic-files-1"></a>
+<a name="index-PNG-files-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cincludegraphics"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses for <samp>graphics</samp> package:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\includegraphics{<var>filename</var>}
+\includegraphics[<var>urx</var>,<var>ury</var>]{<var>filename</var>}
+\includegraphics[<var>llx</var>,<var>lly</var>][<var>urx</var>,<var>ury</var>]{<var>filename</var>}
+\includegraphics*{<var>filename</var>}
+\includegraphics*[<var>urx</var>,<var>ury</var>]{<var>filename</var>}
+\includegraphics*[<var>llx</var>,<var>lly</var>][<var>urx</var>,<var>ury</var>]{<var>filename</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Synopses for <samp>graphicx</samp> package:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\includegraphics{<var>filename</var>}
+\includegraphics[<var>key-value list</var>]{<var>filename</var>}
+\includegraphics*{<var>filename</var>}
+\includegraphics*[<var>key-value list</var>]{<var>filename</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Include a graphics file. The starred form <code>\includegraphics*</code> will
+clip the graphic to the size specified, while for the unstarred form any
+part of the graphic that is outside the box of the specified size will
+over-print the surrounding area.
+</p>
+<p>This
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{plot.pdf}
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>will incorporate into the document the graphic in <samp>plot.pdf</samp>,
+centered and at its nominal size. You can also give a path to the file,
+as with <code>\includegraphics{graphics/plot.pdf}</code>. To specify a list
+of locations to search for the file, see <a href="#g_t_005cgraphicspath">\graphicspath</a>.
+</p>
+<p>If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes. An example
+is <code>\includegraphics{&quot;sister picture.jpg&quot;}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\includegraphics{<var>filename</var>}</code> command decides on the
+type of graphic by splitting <var>filename</var> on the first dot. You can
+use <var>filename</var> with no dot, as in <code>\includegraphics{turing}</code>
+and then LaTeX tries a sequence of extensions such as <code>.png</code> and
+<code>.pdf</code> until it finds a file with that extension
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</a>).
+</p>
+<p>If your file name contains dots before the extension then you can hide
+them with curly braces, as in
+<code>\includegraphics{{plot.2018.03.12.a}.pdf}</code>. Or, if you use
+the <samp>graphicx</samp> package then you can use the options <code>type</code> and
+<code>ext</code>; see below. This and other filename issues are also handled
+with the package <samp>grffile</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so LaTeX can
+move it to the next page if fitting it on the current page is awkward
+(see <a href="#figure">figure</a>).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{figure}
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=3cm]{lungxray.jpg}
+ \caption{The evidence is overwhelming: don't smoke.} \label{fig:xray}
+\end{figure}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This places a graphic that will not float, so it is sure to appear at
+this point in the document even if makes LaTeX stretch the text or
+resort to blank areas on the page. It will be centered and will have a
+caption.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{caption} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{pix/nix.png}
+ \captionof{figure}{The spirit of the night} \label{pix:nix} % optional
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This example puts a box with a graphic side by side with one having
+text, with the two vertically centered.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+ ...
+\begin{center}
+ \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.4\textwidth]{plot}}
+ \hspace{1em}
+ \vcenteredhbox{\begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ f(x)=x\cdot \sin (1/x)
+ \end{displaymath}
+ \end{minipage}}
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>If you use the <samp>graphics</samp> package then the only options involve the
+size of the graphic (but see <a href="#g_t_005crotatebox">\rotatebox</a> and <a href="#g_t_005cscalebox">\scalebox</a>).
+When one optional argument is present then it is
+<code>[<var>urx</var>,<var>ury</var>]</code> and it gives the coordinates of the top
+right corner of the image, as a pair of TeX dimensions (see <a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a>). If the units are omitted they default to <code>bp</code>. In
+this case, the lower left corner of the image is assumed to be at (0,0).
+If two optional arguments are present then the leading one is
+<code>[<var>llx</var>,<var>lly</var>]</code>, specifying the coordinates of the image&rsquo;s
+lower left. Thus, <code>\includegraphics[1in,0.618in]{...}</code> calls for
+the graphic to be placed so it is 1&nbsp;inch wide and 0.618&nbsp;inches
+tall and so its origin is at (0,0).
+</p>
+<p>The <samp>graphicx</samp> package gives you many more options. Specify them
+in a key-value form, as here.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center}
+ \includegraphics[width=1in,angle=90]{lion}
+ \hspace{2em}
+ \includegraphics[angle=90,width=1in]{lion}
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The options are read left-to-right. So the first graphic above is made
+one inch wide and then rotated, while the second is rotated and then
+made one inch wide. Thus, unless the graphic is perfectly square, the
+two will end with different widths and heights.
+</p>
+<p>There are many options. The primary ones are listed first.
+</p>
+<p>Note that a graphic is placed by LaTeX into a box, which is
+traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the
+PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic&rsquo;s printed area may
+go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when LaTeX makes up a
+page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the
+graphic.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dd><a name="includegraphics-width"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>width</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this width. An example
+is <code>\includegraphics[width=1in]{plot}</code>. You can use the standard
+TeX dimensions (see <a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a>) and also convenient is
+<code>\linewidth</code>, or in a two-column document, <code>\columnwidth</code>
+(see <a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a>). An example is that by using the
+<samp>calc</samp> package you can make the graphic be 1&nbsp;cm narrow than
+the width of the text with
+<code>\includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>height</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="includegraphics-height"></a><p>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height. You can
+use the standard TeX dimensions (see <a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a>), and also
+convenient are <code>\pageheight</code> and <code>\textheight</code> (see <a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a>). For instance, the command
+<code>\includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]{godel}</code> will make the
+graphic a quarter of the height of the text area.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>totalheight</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="includegraphics-totalheght"></a><p>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus
+depth. This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated. For
+instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero height
+but a large depth.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>keepaspectratio</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="includegraphics-keepaspectratio"></a><p>If set to <code>true</code>, or just specified as here
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"><code>\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...}</code>
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>and you give as options both <code>width</code> and <code>height</code> (or
+<code>totalheight</code>), then LaTeX will make the graphic is as large as
+possible without distortion. That is, LaTeX will ensure that neither
+is the graphic wider than <code>width</code> nor taller than <code>height</code> (or
+<code>totalheight</code>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>scale</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Factor by which to scale the graphic. To make a graphic twice its
+nominal size, enter <code>\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}</code>. This
+number may be any value; a number between 1 and&nbsp;0 will shrink the
+graphic and a negative number will reflect it.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>angle</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Rotate the graphic. The angle is taken in degrees and counterclockwise.
+The graphic is rotated about its <code>origin</code>; see that option. For a
+complete description of how rotated material is typeset,
+see <a href="#g_t_005crotatebox">\rotatebox</a>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>origin</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The point of the graphic about which the rotation happens. Possible
+values are any string containing one or two of: <code>l</code> for left,
+<code>r</code> for right, <code>b</code> for bottom, <code>c</code> for center, <code>t</code>
+for top, and <code>B</code> for baseline. Thus, entering the command
+<code>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}</code> will turn the
+picture upside down about that picture&rsquo;s center, while the command
+<code>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}</code> will turn its
+picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character <code>c</code>
+gives the horizontal center in <code>bc</code> or <code>tc</code>, but gives the
+vertical center in <code>lc</code> or <code>rc</code>.) The default is <code>lB</code>.
+</p>
+<p>To rotate about an arbitrary point, see <a href="#g_t_005crotatebox">\rotatebox</a>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>These are lesser-used options.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dd><a name="includegraphics-viewport"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>viewport</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show. Takes four arguments,
+separated by spaces and given in TeX dimensions, as with
+<code>\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}</code>. The
+dimensions default to big points,&nbsp;<code>bp</code>. They are taken
+relative to the origin specified by the bounding box. See also the
+<code>trim</code> option.
+</p>
+<a name="includegraphics-trim"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>trim</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Gives parts of the graphic to not show. Takes four arguments, separated
+by spaces, that are given in TeX dimensions, as with
+<code>\includegraphics[.., trim= 0in 0.1in 0.2in 0.3in, ...]{...}</code>.
+These give the amounts of the graphic not to show, that is, LaTeX
+will crop the picture by 0&nbsp;inches on the left, 0.1&nbsp;inches on
+the bottom, 0.2&nbsp;inches on the right, and 0.3&nbsp;inches on the
+top. See also the <code>viewport</code> option.
+</p>
+<a name="includegraphics-clip"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>clip</code></dt>
+<dd><p>If set to <code>true</code>, or just specified as here
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>then the graphic is cropped to the bounding box. This is the same as
+using the starred form of the command,
+<code>\includegraphics*[...]{...}</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="includegraphics-page"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>page</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Give the page number of a multi-page PDF file. The default is
+<code>page=1</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="includegraphics-pagebox"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>pagebox</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Specifies which bounding box to use for PDF files from among
+<code>mediabox</code>, <code>cropbox</code>, <code>bleedbox</code>, <code>trimbox</code>, or
+<code>artbox</code>. PDF files do not have the BoundingBox that PostScript
+files have, but may specify up to four predefined rectangles. The
+MediaBox gives the boundaries of the physical medium. The CropBox is the
+region to which the contents of the page are to be clipped when
+displayed. The BleedBox is the region to which the contents of the page
+should be clipped in production. The TrimBox is the intended dimensions
+of the finished page. The ArtBox is the extent of the page&rsquo;s meaningful
+content. The driver will set the image size based on CropBox if
+present, otherwise it will not use one of the others, with a
+driver-defined order of preference. MediaBox is always present.
+</p>
+<a name="includegraphics-interpolate"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>interpolate</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Enable or disable interpolation of raster images by the viewer. Can be
+set with <code>interpolate=true</code> or just specified as here.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="includegraphics-quiet"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>quiet</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Do not write information to the log. You can set it with
+<code>quiet=true</code> or just specified it with
+<code>\includegraphics[...,quite,...]{...}</code>,
+</p>
+<a name="includegraphics-draft"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>draft</code></dt>
+<dd><p>If you set it with <code>draft=true</code> or just specify it with
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>then the graphic will not appear in the document, possibly saving color
+printer ink. Instead, LaTeX will put an empty box of the correct
+size with the filename printed in it.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>These options address the bounding box for Encapsulated PostScript
+graphic files, which have a size specified with a line
+<code>%%BoundingBox</code> that appears in the file. It has four values,
+giving the lower <em>x</em> coordinate, lower <em>y</em> coordinate, upper
+<em>x</em> coordinate, and upper <em>y</em> coordinate. The units are
+PostScript points, equivalent to TeX&rsquo;s big points, 1/72&nbsp;inch.
+For example, if an <samp>.eps</samp> file has the line <code>%%BoundingBox 10
+20 40 80</code> then its natural size is 30/72&nbsp;inch wide by
+60/72&nbsp;inch tall.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dd><a name="includegraphics-bb"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>bb</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Specify the bounding box of the displayed region. The argument is four
+dimensions separated by spaces, as with <code>\includegraphics[.., bb=
+0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}</code>. Usually <code>\includegraphics</code> reads the
+BoundingBox numbers from the EPS file automatically, so this option is
+only useful if the bounding box is missing from that file or if you want
+to change it.
+</p>
+<a name="includegraphics-bbllx"></a><a name="includegraphics-bblly"></a><a name="includegraphics-bburx"></a><a name="includegraphics-bbury"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Set the bounding box. These four are obsolete, but are retained for
+compatibility with old packages.
+</p>
+<a name="includegraphics-natwidth"></a><a name="includegraphics-natheight"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>natwidth, natheight</code></dt>
+<dd><p>An alternative for <code>bb</code>. Setting
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>is the same as setting <code>bb=0 0 1in 0.618in</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="includegraphics-hiresbb"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>hiresbb</code></dt>
+<dd><p>If set to <code>true</code>, or just specified as with
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>then LaTeX will look for <code>%%HiResBoundingBox</code> lines instead of
+<code>%%BoundingBox</code> lines. (The <code>BoundingBox</code> lines use only
+natural numbers while the <code>HiResBoundingBox</code> lines use decimals;
+both use units equivalent to TeX&rsquo;s big points, 1/72&nbsp;inch.) To
+override a prior setting of <code>true</code>, you can set it to <code>false</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>These following options allow a user to override LaTeX&rsquo;s method of
+choosing the graphic type based on the filename extension. An example
+is that <code>\includegraphics[type=png,ext=.xxx,read=.xxx]{lion}</code>
+will read the file <samp>lion.xxx</samp> as though it were
+<samp>lion.png</samp>. For more on these, see <a href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsRule">\DeclareGraphicsRule</a>.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dd><a name="includegraphics-type"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>type</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Specify the graphics type.
+</p>
+<a name="includegraphics-ext"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>ext</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Specify the graphics extension.
+Only use this in conjunction with the option <code>type</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="includegraphics-read"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>read</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Specify the file extension of the read file.
+Only use this in conjunction with the option <code>type</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="includegraphics-command"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>command</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Specify a command to be applied to this file. Only use this in
+conjunction with the option <code>type</code>. See <a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a>
+for a discussion of enabling the <code>\write18</code> functionality to run
+external commands.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005crotatebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cscalebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\scalebox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\includegraphics</a>, Up: <a href="#Commands-for-graphics" accesskey="u" rel="up">Commands for graphics</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005crotatebox-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">22.3.2 <code>\rotatebox</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-rotation"></a>
+<a name="index-rotating-graphics"></a>
+<a name="index-rotating-text"></a>
+<a name="index-_005crotatebox"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis if you use the <samp>graphics</samp> package:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\rotatebox{<var>angle</var>}{<var>material</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Synopses if you use the <samp>graphicx</samp> package:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\rotatebox{<var>angle</var>}{<var>material</var>}
+\rotatebox[<var>key-value list</var>]{<var>angle</var>}{<var>material</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Put <var>material</var> in a box and rotate it <var>angle</var> degrees
+counterclockwise.
+</p>
+<p>This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \rotatebox{45}{Character} &amp;\rotatebox{45}{NATO phonetic} \\
+ A &amp;AL-FAH \\
+ B &amp;BRAH-VOH
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <var>material</var> can be anything that goes in a box, including a graphic.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"> \rotatebox[origin=c]{45}{\includegraphics[width=1in]{lion}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>To place the rotated material, the first step is that LaTeX sets
+<var>material</var> in a box, with a reference point on the left baseline.
+The second step is the rotation, by default about the reference point.
+The third step is that LaTeX computes a box to bound the rotated
+material. Fourth, LaTeX moves this box horizontally so that the left
+edge of this new bounding box coincides with the left edge of the box
+from the first step (they need not coincide vertically). This new
+bounding box, in its new position, is what LaTeX uses as the box when
+typesetting this material.
+</p>
+<p>If you use the <samp>graphics</samp> package then the rotation is about the
+reference point of the box. If you use the <samp>graphicx</samp> package
+then these are the options that can go in the <var>key-value list</var>,
+but note that you can get the same effect without needing this
+package, except for the <code>x</code> and <code>y</code> options
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</a>).
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>origin</code></dt>
+<dd><p>The point of the <var>material</var>&rsquo;s box about which the rotation happens.
+Possible value is any string containing one or two of: <code>l</code> for
+left, <code>r</code> for right, <code>b</code> for bottom, <code>c</code> for center,
+<code>t</code> for top, and <code>B</code> for baseline. Thus, the first line here
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\rotatebox[origin=c]{180}{moon}
+\rotatebox[origin=lB]{180}{LeBateau}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>will turn the picture upside down from the center while the second will
+turn its picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character
+<code>c</code> gives the horizontal center in <code>bc</code> or <code>tc</code> but gives
+the vertical center in <code>lc</code> or <code>rc</code>, and gives both in
+<code>c</code>.) The default is <code>lB</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>x, y</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with
+<code>\rotatebox[x=<var>TeX dimension</var>,y=<var>TeX
+dimension</var>]{...}</code> (see <a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a>). These give the offset
+from the box&rsquo;s reference point.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>units</code></dt>
+<dd><p>This key allows you to change the default of degrees counterclockwise.
+Setting <code>units=-360</code> changes the direction to degrees clockwise and
+setting <code>units=6.283185</code> changes to radians counterclockwise.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cscalebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cresizebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\resizebox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005crotatebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\rotatebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Commands-for-graphics" accesskey="u" rel="up">Commands for graphics</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cscalebox-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">22.3.3 <code>\scalebox</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-graphics_002c-scaling"></a>
+<a name="index-graphics_002c-resizing"></a>
+<a name="index-scaling"></a>
+<a name="index-resizing"></a>
+<a name="index-text_002c-scaling"></a>
+<a name="index-text_002c-resizing"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cscalebox"></a>
+<a name="index-_005creflectbox"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\scalebox{<var>horizontal factor</var>}{<var>material</var>}
+\scalebox{<var>horizontal factor</var>}[<var>vertical factor</var>]{<var>material</var>}
+\reflectbox{<var>material</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Scale the <var>material</var>.
+</p>
+<p>This example halves the size, both horizontally and vertically, of the
+first text and doubles the size of the second.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\scalebox{0.5}{DRINK ME} and \scalebox{2.0}{Eat Me}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>If you do not specify the optional <var>vertical factor</var> then it
+defaults to the same value as the <var>horizontal factor</var>.
+</p>
+<p>You can use this command to resize a graphic, as here.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>If you use the <samp>graphicx</samp> package then you can accomplish the same
+thing with optional arguments to <code>\includegraphics</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</a>).
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\reflectbox</code> command abbreviates
+<code>\scalebox{-1}[1]{<var>material</var>}</code>. Thus, <code>Able was
+I\reflectbox{Able was I}</code> will show the phrase &lsquo;<samp>Able was I</samp>&rsquo;
+immediately followed by its mirror reflection.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cresizebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cscalebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\scalebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Commands-for-graphics" accesskey="u" rel="up">Commands for graphics</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cresizebox-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">22.3.4 <code>\resizebox</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-graphics_002c-scaling-1"></a>
+<a name="index-graphics_002c-resizing-1"></a>
+<a name="index-scaling-1"></a>
+<a name="index-resizing-1"></a>
+<a name="index-text_002c-scaling-1"></a>
+<a name="index-text_002c-resizing-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cresizebox"></a>
+
+<p>Synopses:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\resizebox{<var>horizontal length</var>}{<var>vertical length</var>}{<var>material</var>}
+\resizebox*{<var>horizontal length</var>}{<var>vertical length</var>}{<var>material</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Given a size, such as <code>3cm</code>, transform <var>material</var> to make it
+that size. If either <var>horizontal length</var> or <var>vertical length</var>
+is an exclamation point&nbsp;<code>!</code> then the other argument is used
+to determine a scale factor for both directions.
+</p>
+<p>This example makes the graphic be a half inch wide and scales it
+vertically by the same factor to keep it from being distorted.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\resizebox{0.5in}{!}{\includegraphics{lion}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The unstarred form <code>\resizebox</code> takes <var>vertical length</var> to be
+the box&rsquo;s height while the starred form <code>\resizebox*</code> takes it to
+be height+depth. For instance, make the text have a height+depth of a
+quarter inch with <code>\resizebox*{!}{0.25in}{\parbox{1in}{This
+box has both height and depth.}}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>You can use <code>\depth</code>, <code>\height</code>, <code>\totalheight</code>, and
+<code>\width</code> to refer to the original size of the box. Thus, make the
+text two inches wide but keep the original height with
+<code>\resizebox{2in}{\height}{Two inches}</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Special-insertions"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Splitting-the-input" accesskey="n" rel="next">Splitting the input</a>, Previous: <a href="#Graphics" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Graphics</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Special-insertions-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">23 Special insertions</h2>
+
+<a name="index-special-insertions"></a>
+<a name="index-insertions-of-special-characters"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX provides commands for inserting characters that have a
+special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Reserved-characters" accesskey="1">Reserved characters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting &lsquo;<samp># $ % &amp; { } _ ~ ^ \</samp>&rsquo;
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Upper-and-lower-case" accesskey="2">Upper and lower case</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Make text upper or lower case.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Symbols-by-font-position" accesskey="3">Symbols by font position</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting font symbols by number.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Text-symbols" accesskey="4">Text symbols</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Accents" accesskey="5">Accents</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting accents.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Additional-Latin-letters" accesskey="6">Additional Latin letters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting other non-English characters.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005crule" accesskey="7">\rule</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting lines and rectangles.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ctoday" accesskey="8">\today</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserting today&rsquo;s date.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Reserved-characters"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Upper-and-lower-case" accesskey="n" rel="next">Upper and lower case</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Reserved-characters-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">23.1 Reserved characters</h3>
+
+<a name="index-reserved-characters"></a>
+<a name="index-characters_002c-reserved"></a>
+<a name="index-special-characters"></a>
+<a name="index-characters_002c-special"></a>
+<p>LaTeX sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For
+example, the percent sign&nbsp;<code>%</code> is for comments. They are
+called <em>reserved characters</em> or <em>special characters</em>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"># $ % &amp; { } _ ~ ^ \
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_0023"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_0024"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_0025"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_0026"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_005f"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_007b"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_007d"></a>
+<p>If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
+body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
+put a backslash&nbsp;<code>\</code> in front of the character. Thus,
+typing <code>\$1.23</code> will produce&nbsp;<code>$1.23</code> in your output.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005c_007e"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_005e"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbackslash"></a>
+<p>As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
+use <code>\~{}</code> (omitting the curly braces would result in the next
+character receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text
+body font circumflex use <code>\^{}</code>. To get a backslash in the font
+of the text body, enter <code>\textbackslash{}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use
+<code>\verb!!</code> as below (the double backslash&nbsp;<code>\\</code> is only
+there to split the lines).
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center}
+ \# \$ \% \&amp; \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
+ \verb!# $ % &amp; { } _ ~ ^ \!
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Upper-and-lower-case"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Symbols-by-font-position" accesskey="n" rel="next">Symbols by font position</a>, Previous: <a href="#Reserved-characters" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Reserved characters</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Upper-and-lower-case-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">23.2 Upper and lower case</h3>
+
+<a name="index-uppercase"></a>
+<a name="index-lowercase"></a>
+<a name="index-characters_002c-case-of"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\uppercase{<var>text</var>}
+\lowercase{<var>text</var>}
+\MakeUppercase{<var>text</var>}
+\MakeLowercase{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Change the case of characters. The TeX primitives commands
+<code>\uppercase</code> and <code>\lowercase</code> only work for American
+characters. The LaTeX commands <code>\MakeUppercase</code> and
+<code>\MakeLowercase</code> commands also change characters accessed by
+commands such as <code>\ae</code> or <code>\aa</code>. The commands
+<code>\MakeUppercase</code> and <code>\MakeLowercase</code> are robust but they have
+moving arguments (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of a
+command within <var>text</var>. But they do change the case of every other
+Latin letter inside the argument <var>text</var>. Thus,
+<code>\MakeUppercase{Let $y=f(x)$</code>} produces &lsquo;<samp>LET Y=F(X)</samp>&rsquo;. Another
+example is that the name of an environment will be changed, so that
+<code>\MakeUppercase{\begin{tabular} ... \end{tabular}}</code> will
+produce an error because the first half is changed to
+<code>\begin{TABULAR}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX uses the same fixed table for changing case throughout a
+document, The table used is designed for the font encoding T1; this
+works well with the standard TeX fonts for all Latin alphabets but
+will cause problems when using other alphabets.
+</p>
+<p>To change the case of text that results from a macro inside <var>text</var>
+you need to do expansion. Here the <code>\Schoolname</code> produces
+&lsquo;<samp>COLLEGE OF MATHEMATICS</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\schoolname}{College of Mathematics}
+\newcommand{\Schoolname}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase
+ <!-- /@w -->\expandafter{\schoolname}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-textcase"></a>
+<a name="index-textcase-package"></a>
+
+<p>The <samp>textcase</samp> package brings some of the missing feature of the
+standard LaTeX commands <code>\MakeUppercase</code> and
+<code>\MakeLowerCase</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-mfirstuc"></a>
+<a name="index-mfirstuc-package"></a>
+
+<p>To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package
+<samp>mfirstuc</samp>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Symbols-by-font-position"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Text-symbols" accesskey="n" rel="next">Text symbols</a>, Previous: <a href="#Upper-and-lower-case" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Upper and lower case</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Symbols-by-font-position-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">23.3 Symbols by font position</h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005csymbol"></a>
+<a name="index-accessing-any-character-of-a-font"></a>
+<a name="index-font-symbols_002c-by-number"></a>
+
+<p>You can access any character of the current font using its number with
+the <code>\symbol</code> command. For example, the visible space character
+used in the <code>\verb*</code> command has the code decimal 32, so it can be
+typed as <code>\symbol{32}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a <code>'</code>
+prefix, or hexadecimal (base 16) with a <code>&quot;</code> prefix, so the previous
+example could also be written as <code>\symbol{'40}</code> or
+<code>\symbol{&quot;20}</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Text-symbols"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Accents" accesskey="n" rel="next">Accents</a>, Previous: <a href="#Symbols-by-font-position" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Symbols by font position</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Text-symbols-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">23.4 Text symbols</h3>
+
+<a name="index-text-symbols"></a>
+<a name="index-symbols_002c-text"></a>
+
+<a name="index-textcomp-package-1"></a>
+<p>LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
+running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not
+available in OT1. Unless you are using XeLaTeX or LuaLaTeX then
+you may need to load the <code>textcomp</code> package.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\copyright</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccopyright"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textcopyright</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextcopyright"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-copyright-symbol"></a>
+<p>&copy; The copyright symbol.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dag</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdag"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-dagger_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>&#x2020; The dagger symbol (in text).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ddag</code>
+<a name="index-_005cddag"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-double-dagger_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>&#x2021; The double dagger symbol (in text).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\LaTeX</code>
+<a name="index-_005cLaTeX"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-LaTeX-logo"></a>
+<a name="index-logo_002c-LaTeX"></a>
+<p>The LaTeX logo.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\LaTeXe</code>
+<a name="index-_005cLaTeXe"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-LaTeX2e-logo"></a>
+<a name="index-logo_002c-LaTeX2e"></a>
+<p>The LaTeX2e logo.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\guillemotleft <span class="roman">(&laquo;)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005cguillemotleft-_0028_00ab_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\guillemotright <span class="roman">(&raquo;)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005cguillemotright-_0028_00bb_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\guilsinglleft <span class="roman">(&lsaquo;)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005cguilsinglleft-_0028_2039_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\guilsinglright <span class="roman">(&rsaquo;)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005cguilsinglright-_0028_203a_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-double-guillemets"></a>
+<a name="index-single-guillemets"></a>
+<a name="index-left-angle-quotation-marks"></a>
+<a name="index-right-angle-quotation-marks"></a>
+<a name="index-double-angle-quotation-marks"></a>
+<a name="index-single-angle-quotation-marks"></a>
+<a name="index-French-quotation-marks"></a>
+<a name="index-quotation-marks_002c-French"></a>
+<p>&laquo;, &raquo;, &lsaquo;, &rsaquo;
+Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ldots</code>
+<a name="index-_005cldots-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\dots</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdots"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textellipsis</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextellipsis"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-ellipsis"></a>
+<p>&hellip; An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): <code>\ldots</code>
+and <code>\dots</code> also work in math mode.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lq</code>
+<a name="index-_005clq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-left-quote"></a>
+<a name="index-opening-quote"></a>
+<p>&lsquo; Left (opening) quote.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\P</code>
+<a name="index-_005cP"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textparagraph</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextparagraph"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-paragraph-symbol"></a>
+<a name="index-pilcrow"></a>
+<p>&#x00B6; Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\pounds</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpounds"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textsterling</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextsterling"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-pounds-symbol"></a>
+<a name="index-sterling-symbol"></a>
+<p>&pound; English pounds sterling.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\quotedblbase <span class="roman">(&bdquo;)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005cquotedblbase-_0028_201e_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\quotesinglbase <span class="roman">(&sbquo;)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005cquotesinglbase-_0028_201a_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-double-low_002d9-quotation-mark"></a>
+<a name="index-single-low_002d9-quotation-mark"></a>
+<a name="index-low_002d9-quotation-marks_002c-single-and-double"></a>
+<p>&bdquo; and &sbquo;
+Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rq</code>
+<a name="index-_005crq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-right-quote"></a>
+<a name="index-closing-quote"></a>
+<p>&rsquo; Right (closing) quote.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\S</code>
+<a name="index-_005cS"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textsection</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextsection"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-section-symbol"></a>
+<p>&#x00A7; Section sign.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\TeX</code>
+<a name="index-_005cTeX"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-TeX-logo"></a>
+<a name="index-logo_002c-TeX"></a>
+<p>The TeX logo.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textasciicircum</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextasciicircum"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-circumflex_002c-ASCII_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-ASCII-circumflex_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>^ ASCII circumflex.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textasciitilde</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextasciitilde"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-tilde_002c-ASCII_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-ASCII-tilde_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>~ ASCII tilde.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textasteriskcentered</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextasteriskcentered"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-asterisk_002c-centered_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-centered-asterisk_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>* Centered asterisk.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbackslash</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbackslash-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-backslash_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>\ Backslash.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbar</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbar"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-vertical-bar_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-bar_002c-vertical_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>| Vertical bar.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbardbl</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbardbl"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-vertical-bar_002c-double_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-bar_002c-double-vertical_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-double-vertical-bar_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>&#x23F8; Double vertical bar.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbigcircle</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbigcircle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-big-circle-symbols_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-circle-symbol_002c-big_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>&#x25EF; Big circle symbol.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbraceleft</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbraceleft"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-left-brace_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-brace_002c-left_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>{ Left brace.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbraceright</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbraceright"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-right-brace_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-brace_002c-right_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>} Right brace.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbullet</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbullet"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-bullet_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>&bull; Bullet.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textcircled{<var>letter</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextcircled_007bletter_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-circled-letter_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>&#x24B6; Circle around <var>letter</var>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textcompwordmark</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextcompwordmark"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textcapitalcompwordmark</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextcapitalcompwordmark"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textascendercompwordmark</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextascendercompwordmark"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-composite-word-mark_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-cap-height"></a>
+<a name="index-ascender-height"></a>
+<p>Used to separate letters that would normally ligature. For example,
+<code>f\textcompwordmark i</code> produces &lsquo;<samp>fi</samp>&rsquo; without a ligature. This
+is most useful in non-English languages. The
+<code>\textcapitalcompwordmark</code> form has the cap height of the font
+while the <code>\textascendercompwordmark</code> form has the ascender height.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textdagger</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextdagger"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-dagger_002c-in-text-1"></a>
+<p>&#x2020; Dagger.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textdaggerdbl</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextdaggerdbl"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-dagger_002c-double_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-double-dagger_002c-in-text-1"></a>
+<p>&#x2021; Double dagger.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textdollar <span class="roman">(or <code>\$</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextdollar-_0028or-_005c_0024_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-dollar-sign"></a>
+<a name="index-currency_002c-dollar"></a>
+<p>$ Dollar sign.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textemdash <span class="roman">(or <code>---</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextemdash-_0028or-_002d_002d_002d_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-em_002ddash"></a>
+<p>&mdash; Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in
+<code>The playoffs --- if you are fortunate enough to make the playoffs ---
+is more like a sprint.</code>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textendash <span class="roman">(or <code>--</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextendash-_0028or-_002d_002d_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-e_002ddash"></a>
+<p>&ndash; En-dash (used for ranges, as in <code>See pages 12--14</code>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\texteuro</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctexteuro"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-euro-symbol"></a>
+<a name="index-currency_002c-euro"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-eurosym"></a>
+<a name="index-eurosym-package"></a>
+
+<p>The Euro symbol: &euro;. For an alternative glyph design, try the
+<samp>eurosym</samp> package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own
+Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textexclamdown <span class="roman">(or <code>!`</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextexclamdown-_0028or-_0021_0060_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-exclamation-point_002c-upside_002ddown"></a>
+<p>&iexcl; Upside down exclamation point.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textgreater</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextgreater"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-greater-than-symbol_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>&gt; Greater than symbol.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textless</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextless"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-less-than-symbol_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>&lt; Less than symbol.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textleftarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextleftarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-arrow_002c-left_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-left-arrow_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>&#x2190; Left arrow.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textordfeminine</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextordfeminine"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textordmasculine</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextordmasculine"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-feminine-ordinal-symbol"></a>
+<a name="index-masculine-ordinal-symbol"></a>
+<a name="index-ordinals_002c-feminine-and-masculine"></a>
+<a name="index-Spanish-ordinals_002c-feminine-and-masculine"></a>
+<p>&ordf;, &ordm; Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textperiodcentered</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextperiodcentered"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-period_002c-centered_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-centered-period_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>&#x00B7; Centered period.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquestiondown <span class="roman">(or <code>?`</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquestiondown-_0028or-_003f_0060_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-question-mark_002c-upside_002ddown"></a>
+<p>&iquest; Upside down question mark.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquotedblleft <span class="roman">(or <code>``</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquotedblleft-_0028or-_0060_0060_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-left-quote_002c-double"></a>
+<a name="index-double-left-quote"></a>
+<p>&ldquo; Double left quote.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquotedblright <span class="roman">(or <code>''</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquotedblright-_0028or-_0027_0027_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-right-quote_002c-double"></a>
+<a name="index-double-right-quote"></a>
+<p>&rdquo; Double right quote.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquoteleft <span class="roman">(or <code>`</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquoteleft-_0028or-_0060_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-left-quote_002c-single"></a>
+<a name="index-single-left-quote"></a>
+<p>&lsquo; Single left quote.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquoteright <span class="roman">(or <code>'</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquoteright-_0028or-_0027_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-right-quote_002c-single"></a>
+<a name="index-single-right-quote"></a>
+<p>&rsquo; Single right quote.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquotesingle</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquotesingle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-quote_002c-single-straight"></a>
+<a name="index-straight-single-quote"></a>
+<a name="index-single-quote_002c-straight"></a>
+<p>&#x0027; Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquotestraightbase</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquotestraightbase"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textquotestraightdblbase</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquotestraightdblbase"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-quote_002c-straight-base"></a>
+<a name="index-straight-quote_002c-base"></a>
+<a name="index-double-quote_002c-straight-base"></a>
+<a name="index-straight-double-quote_002c-base"></a>
+<p>Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textregistered</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextregistered"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-registered-symbol"></a>
+<p>&reg; Registered symbol.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textrightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextrightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-arrow_002c-right_002c-in-text"></a>
+<a name="index-right-arrow_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>&#x2192; Right arrow.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textthreequartersemdash</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextthreequartersemdash"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-three_002dquarters-em_002ddash"></a>
+<a name="index-em_002ddash_002c-three_002dquarters"></a>
+<p>&#xFE58; &ldquo;Three-quarters&rdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\texttrademark</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctexttrademark"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-trademark-symbol"></a>
+<p>&#x2122; Trademark symbol.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\texttwelveudash</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctexttwelveudash"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-two_002dthirds-em_002ddash"></a>
+<a name="index-em_002ddash_002c-two_002dthirds"></a>
+<p>&#xFE58; &ldquo;Two-thirds&rdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textunderscore</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextunderscore"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-underscore_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>_ Underscore.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textvisiblespace</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextvisiblespace"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-visible-space-symbol_002c-in-text"></a>
+<p>&#x2423; Visible space symbol.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Accents"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Additional-Latin-letters" accesskey="n" rel="next">Additional Latin letters</a>, Previous: <a href="#Text-symbols" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Text symbols</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Accents-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">23.5 Accents</h3>
+
+<a name="index-accents"></a>
+<a name="index-characters_002c-accented"></a>
+<a name="index-letters_002c-accented"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-babel-2"></a>
+<a name="index-babel-package-2"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-polyglossia"></a>
+<a name="index-polyglossia-package"></a>
+
+<a name="index-multilingual-support"></a>
+<p>LaTeX has wide support for many of the world&rsquo;s scripts and languages,
+through the <code>babel</code> package and related support if you are using
+pdfLaTeX, or <samp>polyglossia</samp> if you are using XeLaTeX or
+LuaLaTeX. This section does not cover that support. It only lists
+the core LaTeX commands for creating accented characters. The
+<code>\capital...</code> commands shown here produce alternative forms for use
+with capital letters. These are not available with OT1.
+</p>
+<p>Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated with
+lowercase &lsquo;<samp>o</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005ci-_0028dotless-i_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-dotless-i"></a>
+<p>Note that <code>\i</code> produces a dotless i,
+<a name="index-_005cj-_0028dotless-j_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-dotless-j"></a>
+and <code>\j</code> produces a dotless j.
+These are often used in place of their dotted counterparts when they are
+accented.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\&quot;</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitaldieresis</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_0022-_0028umlaut-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitaldieresis"></a>
+<a name="index-umlaut-accent"></a>
+<a name="index-dieresis-accent"></a>
+<p>&ouml; Umlaut (dieresis).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\'</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalacute</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_0027-_0028acute-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalacute"></a>
+<a name="index-acute-accent"></a>
+<p>&oacute; Acute accent.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\.</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_002e-_0028dot_002dover-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-dot-accent"></a>
+<a name="index-dot_002dover-accent"></a>
+<p>&#559; Dot accent.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\=</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalmacron</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_003d-_0028macron-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalmacron"></a>
+<a name="index-macron-accent"></a>
+<a name="index-overbar-accent"></a>
+<a name="index-bar_002dover-accent"></a>
+<p>&#333; Macron (overbar) accent.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\^</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalcircumflex</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_005e-_0028circumflex-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalcircumflex"></a>
+<a name="index-circumflex-accent"></a>
+<a name="index-hat-accent"></a>
+<p>&ocirc; Circumflex (hat) accent.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\`</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalgrave</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_0060-_0028grave-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalgrave"></a>
+<a name="index-grave-accent"></a>
+<p>&ograve; Grave accent.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\~</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitaltilde</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_007e-_0028tilde-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitaltilde"></a>
+<a name="index-tilde-accent"></a>
+<p>&ntilde; Tilde accent.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\b</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cb-_0028bar_002dunder-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-bar_002dunder-accent"></a>
+<p>o_ Bar accent underneath.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cunderbar"></a>
+<a name="index-underbar"></a>
+<p>Related to this, <code>\underbar{<var>text</var>}</code> produces a bar under
+<var>text</var>. The argument is always processed in LR mode
+(see <a href="#Modes">Modes</a>). The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline,
+thus crossing through descenders. See also <code>\underline</code> in
+<a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\c</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalcedilla</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cc-_0028cedilla-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalcedilla"></a>
+<a name="index-cedilla-accent"></a>
+<p>&ccedil; Cedilla accent underneath.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\d</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitaldotaccent</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cd-_0028dot_002dunder-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitaldotaccent"></a>
+<a name="index-dot_002dunder-accent"></a>
+<p>&#7885; Dot accent underneath.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\H</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalhungarumlaut</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cH-_0028Hungarian-umlaut-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalhungarumlaut"></a>
+<a name="index-hungarian-umlaut-accent"></a>
+<p>&#337; Long Hungarian umlaut accent.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\k</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalogonek</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ck-_0028ogonek_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalogonek"></a>
+<a name="index-ogonek"></a>
+<p>&#491; Ogonek. Not available in the OT1 encoding.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\r</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalring</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cr-_0028ring-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalring"></a>
+<a name="index-ring-accent"></a>
+<p>o* Ring accent.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\t</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitaltie</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\newtie</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalnewtie</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ct-_0028tie_002dafter-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitaltie"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnewtie"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalnewtie"></a>
+<a name="index-tie_002dafter-accent"></a>
+<p>oo[ Tie-after accent. The <code>\newtie</code> form is centered in
+its box.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\u</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalbreve</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cu-_0028breve-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalbreve"></a>
+<a name="index-breve-accent"></a>
+<p>&#335; Breve accent.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\v</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalcaron</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cv-_0028breve-accent_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalcaron"></a>
+<a name="index-hacek-accent"></a>
+<a name="index-check-accent"></a>
+<a name="index-caron-accent"></a>
+<p>&#466; H&aacute;&#269;ek (check, caron) accent.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Additional-Latin-letters"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005crule" accesskey="n" rel="next">\rule</a>, Previous: <a href="#Accents" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Accents</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Additional-Latin-letters-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">23.6 Additional Latin letters</h3>
+
+<a name="Non_002dEnglish-characters"></a><a name="index-Latin-letters_002c-additional"></a>
+<a name="index-letters_002c-additional-Latin"></a>
+<a name="index-extended-Latin"></a>
+<a name="index-special-characters-1"></a>
+<a name="index-non_002dEnglish-characters"></a>
+<a name="index-characters_002c-non_002dEnglish"></a>
+
+<p>Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting letters beyond
+A&ndash;Z that extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other
+than English.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\aa</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\AA</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005caa-_0028aa_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cAA-_0028AA_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-aring"></a>
+<p>&aring; and &Aring;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ae</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\AE</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cae-_0028ae_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cAE-_0028AE_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-ae-ligature"></a>
+<p>&aelig; and &AElig;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dh</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\DH</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cdh-_0028d_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cDH-_0028D_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-Icelandic-eth"></a>
+<a name="index-eth_002c-Icelandic-letter"></a>
+<p>Icelandic letter eth: &eth; and &ETH;. Not available with <small>OT1</small>
+encoding, you need the <samp>fontenc</samp> package to select an alternate
+font encoding, such as <small>T1</small>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dj</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\DJ</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cdj"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cDJ"></a>
+<p>Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke. Not
+available with <small>OT1</small> encoding, you need the <samp>fontenc</samp> package to
+select an alternate font encoding, such as <small>T1</small>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ij</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\IJ</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cij-_0028ij_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cIJ-_0028IJ_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-ij-letter_002c-Dutch"></a>
+<p>ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\l</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\L</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cl-_0028l_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cL-_0028L_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-polish-l"></a>
+<p>&#322; and &#321;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ng</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\NG</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cng"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cNG"></a>
+<p>Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\o</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\O</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005co-_0028o_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cO-_0028O_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-oslash"></a>
+<p>&oslash; and &Oslash;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\oe</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\OE</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005coe-_0028oe_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cOE-_0028OE_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-oe-ligature"></a>
+<p>&oelig; and &OElig;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ss</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\SS</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005css-_0028ss_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cSS-_0028SS_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-es_002dzet-German-letter"></a>
+<a name="index-sharp-S-letters"></a>
+<p>&szlig; and SS.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\th</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\TH</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cth-_0028th_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cTH-_0028TH_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-Icelandic-thorn"></a>
+<a name="index-thorn_002c-Icelandic-letter"></a>
+<p>Icelandic letter thorn: &thorn; and &THORN;. Not available with <small>OT1</small>
+encoding, you need the <samp>fontenc</samp> package to select an alternate
+font encoding, such as <small>T1</small>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005crule"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ctoday" accesskey="n" rel="next">\today</a>, Previous: <a href="#Additional-Latin-letters" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Additional Latin letters</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005crule-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">23.7 <code>\rule</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005crule"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\rule{<var>width</var>}{<var>thickness</var>}
+\rule[<var>raise</var>]{<var>width</var>}{<var>thickness</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a <em>rule</em>, a filled-in rectangle.
+</p>
+<a name="index-Halmos-symbol"></a>
+<a name="index-tombstone"></a>
+<p>This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol,
+often used to mark the end of a proof.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-amsthm-1"></a>
+<a name="index-amsthm-package-1"></a>
+
+<p>The <samp>amsthm</samp> package includes this command, with a somewhat
+different-looking symbol.
+</p>
+<p>The mandatory arguments give the horizontal <var>width</var> and vertical
+<var>thickness</var> of the rectangle. They are rigid lengths
+(see <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>). The optional argument <var>raise</var> is also a rigid
+length, and tells LaTeX how much to raise the rule above the
+baseline, or lower it if the length is negative.
+</p>
+<p>This produces a line, a rectangle that is wide but not tall.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\noindent\rule{\textwidth}{0.4pt}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The line is the width of the page and 0.4&nbsp;points tall. This line
+thickness is common in LaTeX.
+</p>
+<p>A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in the
+output, but can cause LaTeX to change the output around it.
+See <a href="#g_t_005cstrut">\strut</a> for examples.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ctoday"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005crule" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\rule</a>, Up: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="u" rel="up">Special insertions</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ctoday-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">23.8 <code>\today</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005ctoday"></a>
+<a name="index-date_002c-today_0027s"></a>
+<a name="index-today_0027s-date"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\today
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce today&rsquo;s date in the format &lsquo;<samp><var>month</var> <var>dd</var>,
+<var>yyyy</var></samp>&rsquo;. An example of a date in that format is &lsquo;<samp>July 4,
+1976</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-babel-3"></a>
+<a name="index-babel-package-3"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-polyglossia-1"></a>
+<a name="index-polyglossia-package-1"></a>
+
+<p>Multilingual packages such as <samp>babel</samp> or <samp>polyglossia</samp>, or
+classes such as <samp>lettre</samp>, will localize <code>\today</code>. For example,
+the following will output &lsquo;<samp>4 juillet 1976</samp>&rsquo;:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
+\documentclass{minimal}
+\usepackage[french]{babel}
+\begin{document}
+\today
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p><code>\today</code> uses the counters <code>\day</code>, <code>\month</code>, and
+<code>\year</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear">\day &amp; \month &amp; \year</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-datetime"></a>
+<a name="index-datetime-package"></a>
+
+<p>A number of package on CTAN work with dates. One is <samp>datetime</samp> package
+which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO standards.
+</p>
+<p>The date is not updated as the LaTeX process runs, so in principle the
+date could be incorrect by the time the program finishes.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Splitting-the-input"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Front_002fback-matter" accesskey="n" rel="next">Front/back matter</a>, Previous: <a href="#Special-insertions" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Special insertions</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Splitting-the-input-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">24 Splitting the input</h2>
+
+<a name="index-splitting-the-input-file"></a>
+<a name="index-input-file"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX lets you split a large document into several smaller ones.
+This can simplify editing or allow multiple authors to work on the
+document. It can also speed processing.
+</p>
+<p>Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is always one
+<a name="index-root-file"></a>
+<a name="index-file_002c-root"></a>
+<em>root file</em>, on which LaTeX compilation starts. This shows such
+a file with five included files.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{ % comment out lines below to omit compiling
+ pref,
+ chap1,
+ chap2,
+ append,
+ bib
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\include{pref}
+\mainmatter
+\include{chap1}
+\include{chap2}
+\appendix
+\include{append}
+\backmatter
+\include{bib}
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This will bring in material from <samp>pref.tex</samp>, <samp>chap1.tex</samp>,
+<samp>chap2.tex</samp>, <samp>append.tex</samp>, and <samp>bib.tex</samp>. If you compile
+this file, and then comment out all of the lines inside
+<code>\includeonly{...}</code> except for <code>chap1,</code> and compile again,
+then LaTeX will only process the material in the first chapter.
+Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to print.
+However, the advantage of the <code>\includeonly</code> command is that
+LaTeX will retain the page numbers and all of the cross reference
+information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in
+your output correctly.
+</p>
+<p>See <a href="#Larger-book-template">Larger book template</a> for another example of <code>\includeonly</code>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cendinput" accesskey="1">\endinput</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Stop including material from a file.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly" accesskey="2">\include &amp; \includeonly</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Conditionally include files.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cinput" accesskey="3">\input</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Unconditionally include a file.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cendinput"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly" accesskey="n" rel="next">\include &amp; \includeonly</a>, Up: <a href="#Splitting-the-input" accesskey="u" rel="up">Splitting the input</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cendinput-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">24.1 <code>\endinput</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cendinput"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\endinput
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>When you <code>\include{filename}</code>, inside <samp>filename.tex</samp> the
+material after <code>\endinput</code> will not be included. This command is
+optional; if <samp>filename.tex</samp> has no <code>\endinput</code> then LaTeX
+will read all of the file.
+</p>
+<p>For example, suppose that a document&rsquo;s root file has
+<code>\input{chap1}</code> and this is <samp>chap1.tex</samp>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\chapter{One}
+This material will appear in the document.
+\endinput
+This will not appear.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end of a
+file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during mailing.
+It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize errors is to
+put <code>\endinput</code> halfway through the included file and see if the
+error disappears. Now, knowing which half contains the error, moving
+<code>\endinput</code> to halfway through that area further narrows down the
+location. This process rapidly finds the offending line.
+</p>
+<p>After reading <code>\endinput</code>, LaTeX continues to read to the end of
+the line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless.
+This allows you, for instance, to close an <code>\if...</code> with a
+<code>\fi</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cinput" accesskey="n" rel="next">\input</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cendinput" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\endinput</a>, Up: <a href="#Splitting-the-input" accesskey="u" rel="up">Splitting the input</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">24.2 <code>\include</code> &amp; <code>\includeonly</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cinclude"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cincludeonly"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\includeonly{ % in document preamble
+ ...
+ <var>filename</var>,
+ ...
+ }
+ ...
+\include{<var>filename</var>} % in document body
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Bring material from the external file <samp><var>filename</var>.tex</samp> into a
+LaTeX document.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\include</code> command does three things: it executes
+<code>\clearpage</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</a>), then it
+inputs the material from <samp><var>filename</var>.tex</samp> into the document,
+and then it does another <code>\clearpage</code>. This command can only
+appear in the document body. The <code>\includeonly</code> command controls
+which files will be read by LaTeX under subsequent <code>\include</code>
+commands. Its list of filenames is comma-separated, and it can only
+appear in the preamble.
+</p>
+<p>This example root document, <samp>constitution.tex</samp>, brings in
+three files, <samp>preamble.tex</samp>, <samp>articles.tex</samp>, and
+<samp>amendments.tex</samp>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+ preamble,
+ articles,
+ amendments
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\include{preamble}
+\include{articles}
+\include{amendments}
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The file <samp>preamble.tex</samp> contains no special code; you have just
+excerpted the chapter from <samp>consitution.tex</samp> and put it in a
+separate file just for editing convenience.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\chapter{Preamble}
+We the People of the United States,
+in Order to form a more perfect Union, ...
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Running LaTeX on <samp>constitution.tex</samp> makes the material from the
+three files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary
+files <samp>preamble.aux</samp>, <samp>articles.aux</samp>, and
+<samp>amendments.tex</samp>. These contain information such as page numbers
+and cross-references (see <a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a>). If you now comment out
+<code>\includeonly</code>&rsquo;s lines with <code>preamble</code> and <code>amendments</code>
+and run LaTeX again then the resulting document shows only the
+material from <samp>articles.tex</samp>, not the material from
+<samp>preamble.tex</samp> or <samp>amendments.tex</samp>. Nonetheless, all of the
+auxiliary information from the omitted files is still there, including
+the starting page number of the chapter.
+</p>
+<p>If the document preamble does not have <code>\includeonly</code> then
+LaTeX will include all the files you call for with <code>\include</code>
+commands.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\include</code> command makes a new page. To avoid that, see
+<a href="#g_t_005cinput">\input</a> (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary
+information).
+</p>
+<p>See <a href="#Larger-book-template">Larger book template</a> for another example using <code>\include</code>
+and <code>\includeonly</code>. That example also uses <code>\input</code> for some
+material that will not necessarily start on a new page.
+</p>
+<p>File names can involve paths.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+ chapters/chap1,
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\include{chapters/chap1}
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name &lsquo;<samp>amo amas amat</samp>&rsquo;,
+this works under TeX Live on GNU/Linux:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+ &quot;amo\space amas\space amat&quot;
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\include{&quot;amo\space amas\space amat&quot;}
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>and this works under MiKTeX on Windows:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{book}
+\includeonly{
+ {&quot;amo amas amat&quot;}
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\include{{&quot;amo amas amat&quot;}}
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-nested-_005cinclude_002c-not-allowed"></a>
+<p>You cannot use <code>\include</code> inside a file that is being included or
+you get &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested.</samp>&rsquo; The
+<code>\include</code> command cannot appear in the document preamble; you will
+get &lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: Missing \begin{document}</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>If a file that you <code>\include</code> does not exist, for instance if you
+<code>\include{athiesm}</code> but you meant <code>\include{atheism}</code>,
+then LaTeX does not give you an error but will warn you &lsquo;<samp>No file
+athiesm.tex.</samp>&rsquo; (It will also create <samp>athiesm.aux</samp>.)
+</p>
+<p>If you <code>\include</code> the root file in itself then you first get
+&lsquo;<samp>LaTeX Error: Can be used only in preamble.</samp>&rsquo; Later runs get
+&lsquo;<samp>TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]</samp>&rsquo;. To fix
+this, you must remove the inclusion <code>\include{root}</code> but also
+delete the file <samp><var>root</var>.aux</samp> and rerun LaTeX.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cinput"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\include &amp; \includeonly</a>, Up: <a href="#Splitting-the-input" accesskey="u" rel="up">Splitting the input</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cinput-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">24.3 <code>\input</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cinput"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\input{<var>filename</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>LaTeX processes the file as if its contents were inserted in the
+current file. For a more sophisticated inclusion mechanism see
+<a href="#g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">\include &amp; \includeonly</a>.
+</p>
+<p>If <var>filename</var> does not end in &lsquo;<samp>.tex</samp>&rsquo; then LaTeX first tries
+the filename with that extension; this is the usual case. If
+<var>filename</var> ends with &lsquo;<samp>.tex</samp>&rsquo; then LaTeX looks for the
+filename as it is.
+</p>
+<p>For example, this
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\input{macros}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>will cause LaTeX to first look for <samp>macros.tex</samp>. If it finds
+that file then it processes its contents as thought they had been
+copy-pasted in. If there is no file of the name <samp>macros.tex</samp> then
+LaTeX tries the name <samp>macros</samp>, without an extension. (This may
+vary by distribution.)
+</p>
+<p>To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name &lsquo;<samp>amo amas amat</samp>&rsquo;,
+this works under TeX Live on GNU/Linux:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\input{&quot;amo\space amas\space amat&quot;}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>and this works under MiKTeX on Windows:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\input{{&quot;amo amas amat&quot;}}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Front_002fback-matter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Letters" accesskey="n" rel="next">Letters</a>, Previous: <a href="#Splitting-the-input" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Splitting the input</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Front_002fback-matter-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">25 Front/back matter</h2>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e" accesskey="1">Table of contents etc.</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Indexes" accesskey="2">Indexes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Generate an index.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Glossaries" accesskey="3">Glossaries</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Generate a glossary.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Indexes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Indexes</a>, Up: <a href="#Front_002fback-matter" accesskey="u" rel="up">Front/back matter</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Table-of-contents-etc_002e-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.1 Table of contents etc.</h3>
+
+<a name="index-table-of-contents_002c-creating"></a>
+
+<a name="index-_005ctableofcontents"></a>
+<a name="index-_002etoc-file-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clistoffigures"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clistoftables"></a>
+<a name="index-_002elof-file-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_002elot-file-1"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\tableofcontents
+\listoffigures
+\listoftables
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a table of contents, or list of figures, or list of tables. Put
+the command in the input file where you want the table or list to
+go. You do not type the entries; for example, typically the table of
+contents entries are automatically generated from the sectioning
+commands <code>\chapter</code>, etc.
+</p>
+<p>This example illustrates the first command, <code>\tableofcontents</code>.
+LaTeX will produce a table of contents on the book&rsquo;s first page.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{book}
+% \setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+ ...
+\chapter{...}
+ ...
+\section{...}
+ ...
+\subsection{...}
+ ...
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter
+and section listings but not subsection listings, because the
+<code>\section</code> command has level&nbsp;1. See <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a> for level
+numbers of the sectioning units. For more on the <code>tocdepth</code>
+see <a href="#Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</a>.
+</p>
+<p>Another example of the use of <code>\tableofcontents</code> is in <a href="#Larger-book-template">Larger book template</a>.
+</p>
+<p>If you want a page break after the table of contents, write a
+<code>\newpage</code> command after the <code>\tableofcontents</code> command, as
+above.
+</p>
+<p>To make the table of contents LaTeX stores the information in an
+auxiliary file named <samp><var>root-file</var>.toc</samp> (see <a href="#Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</a>). For example, this LaTeX file <samp>test.tex</samp>
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{article}
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+\section{First section}
+\subsection{First subsection}
+ ...
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>writes the following line to <samp>test.toc</samp>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}First section}{2}
+\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}First subsection}{2}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>section</code> or <code>subsection</code> is the sectioning unit. The
+hook <code>\numberline</code> lets you to change how the information appears
+in the table of contents. Of its two arguments, <code>1</code> or <code>1.1</code>
+is the sectioning unit number and <code>First section</code> or <code>First
+subsection</code> is the title. Finally, <code>2</code> is the page number on which
+the sectioning units start.
+</p>
+<p>One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to get the
+contents page correct you must run LaTeX twice, once to store the
+information and once to get it. In particular, the first time that you
+run LaTeX on a new document, the table of contents page will be empty
+except for its &lsquo;<samp>Contents</samp>&rsquo; header. Just run it again.
+</p>
+<p>The commands <code>\listoffigures</code> and <code>\listoftables</code> produce a
+list of figures and a list of tables. They work the same way as the
+contents commands; for instance, these work with information stored in
+<samp>.lof</samp> and <samp>.lot</samp> files.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-babel-4"></a>
+<a name="index-babel-package-4"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-polyglossia-2"></a>
+<a name="index-polyglossia-package-2"></a>
+
+<p>To change the header for the table of contents page do something like
+the first line here.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents}
+\renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots}
+\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Tables}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two.
+Internationalization packages such as <samp>babel</samp> or <samp>polyglossia</samp>
+will change the headers depending on the chosen base language.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-tocloft"></a>
+<a name="index-tocloft-package"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-tocbibbind"></a>
+<a name="index-tocbibbind-package"></a>
+
+<p>CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures
+and tables. One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the
+default, such as spacing, is <samp>tocloft</samp>. And, <samp>tocbibbind</samp>
+will automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to the table of
+contents.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline" accesskey="1">\addcontentsline</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Add an entry to table of contents, etc.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005caddtocontents" accesskey="2">\addtocontents</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Add text directly to table of contents file, etc.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnofiles" accesskey="3">\nofiles</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Prevent writing to auxiliary files.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005caddcontentsline"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005caddtocontents" accesskey="n" rel="next">\addtocontents</a>, Up: <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e" accesskey="u" rel="up">Table of contents etc.</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005caddcontentsline-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">25.1.1 <code>\addcontentsline</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005caddcontentsline"></a>
+<a name="index-table-of-contents-entry_002c-manually-adding"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\addcontentsline{<var>ext</var>}{<var>unit</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005ccontentsline"></a>
+<p>Add an entry to the file specified by <var>ext</var>. Usually <var>ext</var> is
+one of <code>toc</code> for the table of contents, <code>lof</code> for the list of
+figures, or <code>lot</code> for the list of tables.
+</p>
+<p>The following will result in an &lsquo;<samp>Appendices</samp>&rsquo; line in the table of
+contents.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>It will appear at the same indentation level as the sections, will be in
+boldface, and will be assigned the page number associated with the point
+where it appears in the input file.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\addcontentsline</code> command writes information to the file
+<samp><var>root-name</var>.<var>ext</var></samp>. It writes that information as the
+text of the command
+<code>\contentsline{<var>unit</var>}{<var>text</var>}{<var>num</var>}</code>, where
+<code><var>num</var></code> is the current value of counter <code><var>unit</var></code>. The
+most common case is the table of contents and there <var>num</var> is the
+page number of the first page of <var>unit</var>.
+</p>
+<p>This command is invoked by the sectioning commands <code>\chapter</code>,
+etc., and also by <code>\caption</code> inside a float environment. But it is
+also used by authors. For example, in a book to have the preface
+unnumbered, you may use the starred <code>\chapter*</code>. But that does not
+put in table of contents information, so you can enter it manually, as
+here.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\chapter*{Preface}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\protect\numberline{}Preface}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>In the <samp>.toc</samp> file LaTeX will put the line <code>\contentsline
+{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}</code>; note the page number
+&lsquo;<samp>3</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<p>All of the arguments for <code>\addcontentsline</code> are required.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>ext</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Typically one of the strings <code>toc</code> for the table of contents,
+<code>lof</code> for the list of figures, or <code>lot</code> for the list of
+tables. The filename extension of the information file.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>unit</var></dt>
+<dd><p>A string that depends on the value of the <var>ext</var> argument:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>toc</code></dt>
+<dd><p>For the table of contents, this is the name of a sectional unit:
+<code>part</code>, <code>chapter</code>, <code>section</code>, <code>subsection</code>, etc.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>lof</code></dt>
+<dd><p>For the list of figures: <code>figure</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>lot</code></dt>
+<dd><p>For the list of tables: <code>table</code>.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><var>text</var></dt>
+<dd><p>The text of the entry. You must <code>\protect</code> any commands that are
+fragile (see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>The <code>\addcontentsline</code> command has an interaction with
+<code>\include</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">\include &amp; \includeonly</a>). If you use them at
+the same level, as with
+<code>\addcontentsline{...}{...}{...}\include{...}</code> then lines
+in the table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution
+is to move <code>\addcontentsline</code> into the file being included.
+</p>
+<p>If you use a <var>unit</var> that LaTeX does not recognize, as here
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\addcontentsline{toc}{setcion}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>then you don&rsquo;t get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
+will not make sense.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005caddtocontents"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnofiles" accesskey="n" rel="next">\nofiles</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\addcontentsline</a>, Up: <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e" accesskey="u" rel="up">Table of contents etc.</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005caddtocontents-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">25.1.2 <code>\addtocontents</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005caddtocontents_007bext_007d_007btext_007d"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\addtocontents{<var>ext</var>}{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Add <var>text</var>, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to
+the auxiliary file with extension <var>ext</var>. This is most commonly used
+for the table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also
+applies to the list of figures and list of tables.
+</p>
+<p>This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the
+&lsquo;<samp>Contents</samp>&rsquo; header.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\tableofcontents\newpage
+\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace*{3ex}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\addtocontents</code> command has two arguments. Both are
+required.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>ext</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Typically one of: <samp>toc</samp> for the table of contents, <samp>lof</samp> for
+the list of figures, or <samp>lot</samp> for the list of tables. The
+extension of the file holding the information.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>text</var></dt>
+<dd><p>The text, and possibly commands, to be written.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>The sectioning commands such as <code>\chapter</code> use the
+<code>\addcontentsline</code> command to store information. This command
+creates lines in the <samp>.toc</samp> auxiliary file containing the
+<code>\contentsline</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a>). In contrast,
+the command <code>\addtocontents</code> puts material directly in that file.
+</p>
+<p>The <code>\addtocontents</code> command has an interaction with
+<code>\include</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">\include &amp; \includeonly</a>). If you use them at
+the same level, as with
+<code>\addtocontents{...}{...}\include{...}</code> then lines in the
+table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution is to
+move <code>\addtocontents</code> into the file being included.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnofiles"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddtocontents" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\addtocontents</a>, Up: <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e" accesskey="u" rel="up">Table of contents etc.</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnofiles-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">25.1.3 <code>\nofiles</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cnofiles"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\nofiles
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Prevent LaTeX from writing any auxiliary files. The only output will
+be the <samp>.log</samp> and <samp>.pdf</samp> (or <samp>.dvi</samp>) files. This command
+must go in the preamble.
+</p>
+<p>Because of the <code>\nofiles</code> command this example will not produce a
+<samp>.toc</samp> file.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{book}
+\nofiles
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+\chapter{...}
+ ...
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>LaTeX will not erase any existing auxiliary files, so if you insert
+the <code>\nofiles</code> command after you have run the file and gotten
+a <samp>.toc</samp> then the table of contents page will continue to show
+the old information.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Indexes"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Glossaries" accesskey="n" rel="next">Glossaries</a>, Previous: <a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Table of contents etc.</a>, Up: <a href="#Front_002fback-matter" accesskey="u" rel="up">Front/back matter</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Indexes-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.2 Indexes</h3>
+
+<a name="index-indexes"></a>
+
+<a name="index-_005cmakeindex"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cindex"></a>
+<a name="index-_002eidx-file"></a>
+
+<p>This document has an index.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{makeidx} \makeindex
+ ...
+\begin{document}
+ ...
+Recall Wilson's Theorem: \index{Wilson's Theorem}
+a number \( n&gt;1 \) is prime if and only if the factorial of \( n-1 \)
+is congruent to \( -1 \) modulo~\( n \).
+ ...
+\printindex
+ ...
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>\usepackage{makeidx}</code> and <code>\makeindex</code> in the preamble
+bring in the relevant commands.
+</p>
+<p>Producing an index is a three stage process. First, in the document
+body you declare index entries with the <code>\index</code> command
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a>). When you run LaTeX, the <code>\index</code> writes its
+information to an auxiliary file <samp><var>root-name</var>.idx</samp>. Next, to
+alphabetize and to do other manipulations you run an external command,
+typically <code>makeindex</code> or <code>xindy</code> (see <a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a>).
+These output a file <samp><var>root-name</var>.ind</samp>. Finally, you bring the
+information back into your document and typeset it with the
+<code>\printindex</code> command (see <a href="#g_t_005cprintindex">\printindex</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-showidx"></a>
+<a name="index-showidx-package"></a>
+
+<a name="index-package_002c-multind"></a>
+<a name="index-multind-package"></a>
+
+<p>There are many packages that apply to indexing commands. The
+<code>showidx</code> package causes each index entries to be shown in the
+margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing
+the index. The <code>multind</code> package supports multiple indexes. See
+also the TeX FAQ entry on this topic,
+<a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind</a>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cindex" accesskey="1">\index</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Declare an index entry.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#makeindex" accesskey="2">makeindex</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Alphabetize index entries.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cprintindex" accesskey="3">\printindex</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Put the index here.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cindex"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#makeindex" accesskey="n" rel="next">makeindex</a>, Up: <a href="#Indexes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Indexes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cindex-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">25.2.1 <code>\index</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-index-entry"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cindex-1"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\index{<var>index-entry-string</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Declare an entry in the index. This command is fragile
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a>).
+</p>
+<p>For example, as described in <a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a>, one way to get an index from
+what&rsquo;s below is to compile the document with <code>pdflatex test</code>, then
+process the index entries with <code>makeindex test</code>, and then compile
+again with <code>pdflatex test</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+ ...
+Ackermann function\index{Ackermann!function}
+ ...
+rate of growth\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>All three index entries will get a page number, such as &lsquo;<samp>Ackermann,
+22</samp>&rsquo;. LaTeX will format the second as a subitem of the first, on the
+line below it and indented, and the third as a subitem of the second.
+Three levels deep is as far as you can nest subentries. (If you add
+<code>\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison}</code> then
+<code>makeindex</code> says &lsquo;<samp>Scanning input file test.idx....done (4
+entries accepted, 1 rejected)</samp>&rsquo; and nothing appears in the index).
+</p>
+<p>If you enter a second <code>\index</code> with the same
+<var>index-entry-string</var> then you will get a single index entry with two
+page numbers (unless they happen to fall on the same page). Thus,
+adding <code>as for Ackermann.\index{Ackermann}</code> later in the same
+document as above will give an index entry like &lsquo;<samp>Ackermann, 22,
+151</samp>&rsquo;. Also, you can enter the index entries in any order, so for
+instance <code>\index{Ackermann!function}</code> could come before
+<code>\index{Ackermann}</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-index_002c-page-range"></a>
+<p>Get a page range in the output, like &lsquo;<samp>Hilbert, 23--27</samp>&rsquo;, as here.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+ ...
+D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\(}
+ ...
+disapproved of his marriage.\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\)}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>If the beginning and ending of the page range are equal then the system
+just gives a single page entry, not a range.
+</p>
+<p>If you index subentries but not a main entry, as with
+<code>\index{Jones!program}</code> and <code>\index{Jones!results}</code>, then
+the output is the item &lsquo;<samp>Jones</samp>&rsquo; with no comma or page number,
+followed by two subitems, like &lsquo;<samp>program, 50</samp>&rsquo; and &lsquo;<samp>results,
+51</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_0060see_0027-and-_0060see-also_0027-index-entries"></a>
+<a name="index-index-entries_002c-_0060see_0027-and-_0060see-also_0027"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cseename"></a>
+<a name="index-_005calsoname"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-babel-5"></a>
+<a name="index-babel-package-5"></a>
+<a name="index-package_002c-polyglossia-3"></a>
+<a name="index-polyglossia-package-3"></a>
+
+
+<p>Generate a index entry that says &lsquo;<samp>See</samp>&rsquo; by using a vertical bar
+character: <code>\index{Ackermann!function|see{P\'eter's
+function}}</code>. You can instead get &lsquo;<samp>See also</samp>&rsquo; with <code>seealso</code>.
+(The text &lsquo;<samp>See</samp>&rsquo; is defined by <code>\seename</code>, and &lsquo;<samp>See also</samp>&rsquo;
+by <code>\alsoname</code>. You can redefine these either by using an
+internationalization package such as <samp>babel</samp> or <samp>polyglossia</samp>,
+or directly as with <code>\renewcommand{\alsoname}[1]{Also see
+#1}</code>.)
+</p>
+<p>The &lsquo;<samp>See</samp>&rsquo; feature is part of a more general functionality. After
+the vertical bar you can put the name of a one-input command, as in
+<code>\index{group|textit}</code> (note the missing backslash on the
+<code>\textit</code> command) and the system will apply that command to the
+page number, here giving something like <code>\textit{7}</code>. You can
+define your own one-input commands, such as
+<code>\newcommand{\definedpage}[1]{{\color{blue}#1}}</code> and then
+<code>\index{Ackermann!function|definedpage}</code> will give a blue page
+number (see <a href="#Color">Color</a>). Another, less practical, example is this,
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand\indexownpage[1]{#1, \thepage}
+ ... Epimenides.\index{self-reference|indexownpage}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>which creates an entry citing the page number of its own index listing.
+</p>
+<p>The two functions just described combine, as here
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\index{Ackermann!function|(definedpage}
+ ...
+\index{Ackermann!function|)}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>which outputs an index entry like &lsquo;<samp>function, 23--27</samp>&rsquo; where the page
+number range is in blue.
+</p>
+<p>Consider an index entry such as &lsquo;<samp>&#x03B1;-ring</samp>&rsquo;. Entering
+it as <code>$\alpha$-ring</code> will cause it to be alphabetized according to
+the dollar sign. You can instead enter it using an at-sign, as
+<code>\index{alpha-ring@$\alpha$-ring}</code>. If you specify an entry
+with an at-sign separating two strings, <code><var>pos</var>@<var>text</var></code>,
+then <var>pos</var> gives the alphabetical position of the entry while
+<var>text</var> produces the text of the entry. Another example is that
+<code>\index{Saint Michael's College@SMC}</code> produces an index entry
+&lsquo;<samp>SMC</samp>&rsquo; alphabetized into a different location than its spelling
+would naturally give it.
+</p>
+<p>To put a <code>!</code>, or <code>@</code>, or <code>|</code> character in an index
+entry, preceding it with a double quote, <code>&quot;</code>. (The double quote
+gets deleted before alphabetization.)
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-index"></a>
+<a name="index-index-package"></a>
+
+<p>A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond that
+provided by <samp>makeidx</samp>. One is <samp>index</samp>, which allows for
+multiple indices and contains a command
+<code>\index*{<var>index-entry-string</var>}</code> that prints the
+<var>index-entry-string</var> as well as indexing it.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cindexentry"></a>
+<a name="index-idx-file"></a>
+<p>The <code>\index</code> command writes the indexing information to the file
+<samp><var>root-name</var>.idx</samp> file. Specifically, it writes text of the
+command
+<code>\indexentry{<var>index-entry-string</var>}{<var>page-num</var>}</code>,
+where <var>page-num</var> is the value of the <code>\thepage</code> counter. On
+occasion, when the <code>\printindex</code> command is confused, you have to
+delete this file to start with a fresh slate.
+</p>
+<p>If you omit the closing brace of an <code>\index</code> command then you get a
+message like this.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Runaway argument? {Ackermann!function
+! Paragraph ended before \@wrindex was complete.
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="makeindex"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cprintindex" accesskey="n" rel="next">\printindex</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cindex" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\index</a>, Up: <a href="#Indexes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Indexes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="makeindex-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">25.2.2 <code>makeindex</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-index_002c-processing"></a>
+<a name="index-makeindex"></a>
+<a name="index-makeindex-program"></a>
+<a name="index-_002eind-file"></a>
+<a name="index-_002eidx-file-1"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">makeindex <var>filename</var>
+makeindex -s <var>style-file</var> <var>filename</var>
+makeindex <var>options</var> <var>filename0</var> ...
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Sort, and otherwise process, the index information in the auxiliary file
+<var>filename</var>. This is a command line program. It takes one or more
+raw index files, <samp><var>filename</var>.idx</samp> files, and produces the
+actual index file, the <samp><var>filename</var>.ind</samp> file that is input by
+<code>\printindex</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cprintindex">\printindex</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-_002eisty-file"></a>
+<a name="index-index_002c-style-file"></a>
+<a name="index-makeindex_002c-style-file"></a>
+<p>The first form of the command suffices for many uses. The second allows
+you to format the index by using an <em>index style file</em>, a
+<samp>.isty</samp> file. The third form is the most general; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
+</p>
+<p>This is a simple <samp>.isty</samp> file.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">% book.isty
+% $ makeindex -s book.isty -p odd book.idx
+% creates the index as book.ind, starting on an odd page.
+preamble
+&quot;\\pagestyle{empty}
+\\small
+\\begin{theindex}
+\\thispagestyle{empty}&quot;
+
+postamble
+&quot;\n
+\\end{theindex}&quot;
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The description here covers only some of the index formatting
+possibilities in <var>style-file</var>. For a full list see the documentation
+on CTAN.
+</p>
+<p>A style file consists of a list of pairs: <var>specifier</var> and
+<var>attribute</var>. These can appear in the file in any order. All of the
+<var>attributes</var> are strings, except where noted. Strings are
+surrounded with double quotes, <code>&quot;</code>, and the maximum length of a
+string is 144 characters. The <code>\n</code> is for a newline and <code>\t</code>
+is for a tab. Backslashes are escaped with another backslash,
+<code>\\</code>. If a line begins with a percent sign, <code>%</code>, then it is a
+comment.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dd><a name="makeindex-preamble"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>preamble</code>
+<a name="index-preamble"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Preamble of the output file. Defines the context in which the index is
+formatted. Default: <code>&quot;\\begin{theindex}\n&quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-postamble"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>postamble</code>
+<a name="index-postamble"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Postamble of the output file. Default: <code>&quot;\n\n\\end{theindex}\n&quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-group-skip"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>group_skip</code>
+<a name="index-group_005fskip"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cindexspace"></a>
+<p>Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group for
+entries starting with &lsquo;<samp>a</samp>&rsquo;, etc. This specifier gives what is
+inserted when a new group begins. Default: <code>&quot;\n\n \\indexspace\n&quot;</code>
+(<code>\indexspace</code> is a rubber length with default value <code>10pt
+plus5pt minus3pt</code>).
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-letheadflag"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>lethead_flag</code>
+<a name="index-lethead_005fflag"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>An integer. It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter. If
+it is 0 (which is the default) then other than <code>group_skip</code> nothing
+will be inserted before the group. If it is positive then at a new
+letter the <code>lethead_prefix</code> and <code>lethead_suffix</code> will be
+inserted, with that letter in uppercase between them. If it is negative
+then what will be inserted is the letter in lowercase. The default
+is&nbsp;0.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-lethead-prefix"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>lethead_prefix</code>
+<a name="index-lethead_005fprefix"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>If a new group begins with a different letter then this is the prefix
+inserted before the new letter header. Default: <code>&quot;&quot;</code>
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-lethead-suffix"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>lethead_suffix</code>
+<a name="index-lethead_005fsuffix"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>If a group begins with a different letter then this is the suffix
+inserted after the new letter header. Default: <code>&quot;&quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-item-0"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>item_0</code>
+<a name="index-item_005f0"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>What is put between two level&nbsp;0 items. Default: <code>&quot;\n \\item
+&quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-item-1"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>item_1</code>
+<a name="index-item_005f1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Put between two level&nbsp;1 items. Default: <code>&quot;\n \\subitem &quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-item-2"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>item_2</code>
+<a name="index-item_005f2"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>put between two level&nbsp;2 items. Default: <code>&quot;\n \\subsubitem &quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-item-01"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>item_01</code>
+<a name="index-item_005f01"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>What is put between a level&nbsp;0 item and a level&nbsp;1 item.
+Default: <code>&quot;\n \\subitem &quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-item-x1"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>item_x1</code>
+<a name="index-item_005fx1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>What is put between a level&nbsp;0 item and a level&nbsp;1 item in the
+case that the level&nbsp;0 item doesn&rsquo;t have any page numbers (as in
+<code>\index{aaa|see{bbb}}</code>). Default: <code>&quot;\n \\subitem &quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-item-12"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>item_12</code>
+<a name="index-item_005f12"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>What is put between a level&nbsp;1 item and a level&nbsp;2 item.
+Default: <code>&quot;\n \\subsubitem &quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-item-x2"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>item_x2</code>
+<a name="index-item_005fx2"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>What is put between a level&nbsp;1 item and a level&nbsp;2 item, if the
+level&nbsp;1 item doesn&rsquo;t have page numbers. Default: <code>&quot;\n
+\\subsubitem &quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-delim-0"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>delim_0</code>
+<a name="index-delim_005f0"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Delimiter put between a level&nbsp;0 key and its first page
+number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, <code>&quot;, &quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-delim-1"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>delim_1</code>
+<a name="index-delim_005f1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Delimiter put between a level&nbsp;1 key and its first page
+number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, <code>&quot;, &quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-delim-2"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>delim_2</code>
+<a name="index-delim_005f2"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Delimiter between a level&nbsp;2 key and its first page number. Default:
+a comma followed by a blank, <code>&quot;, &quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-delim-n"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>delim_n</code>
+<a name="index-delim_005fn"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Delimiter between two page numbers for the same key (at any
+level). Default: a comma followed by a blank, <code>&quot;, &quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-delim-r"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>delim_r</code>
+<a name="index-delim_005fr"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>What is put between the starting and ending page numbers of a range.
+Default: <code>&quot;--&quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-line-max"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>line_max</code>
+<a name="index-line_005fmax"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>An integer. Maximum length of an index entry&rsquo;s line in the output,
+beyond which the line wraps. Default: <code>72</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-indent-space"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>indent_space</code>
+<a name="index-indent_005fspace"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>What is inserted at the start of a wrapped line. Default:
+<code>&quot;\t\t&quot;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-indent-length"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>indent_length</code>
+<a name="index-indent_005flength"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>A number. The length of the wrapped line indentation. The default
+<code>indent_space</code> is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the
+default here is <code>16</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="makeindex-page-precedence"></a></dd>
+<dt><code>page_precedence</code>
+<a name="index-page_005fprecedence"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>A document may have pages numbered in different ways. For example, a
+book may have front matter pages numbered in lowercase roman while main
+matter pages are in arabic. This string specifies the order in which
+they will appear in the index. The <code>makeindex</code> command supports
+five different types of numerals: lowercase roman <code>r</code>, and numeric
+or arabic <code>n</code>, and lowercase alphabetic <code>a</code>, and uppercase
+roman <code>R</code>, and uppercase alphabetic <code>A</code>. Default:
+<code>&quot;rnaRA&quot;</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-xindy"></a>
+<a name="index-xindy-program"></a>
+<p>There are a number of other programs that do the job
+<code>makeindex</code> does. One is <code>xindy</code>, which does
+internationalization and can process indexes for documents marked up
+using LaTeX and a number of other languages. It is highly
+configurable, both in markup terms and in terms of the collating order
+of the text, as described in its documentation.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cprintindex"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#makeindex" accesskey="p" rel="prev">makeindex</a>, Up: <a href="#Indexes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Indexes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cprintindex-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">25.2.3 <code>\printindex</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-index_002c-printing"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cprintindex"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\printindex
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005cprintindex-1"></a>
+<p>Place the index into the output.
+</p>
+<p>To get an index you must first include
+<code>\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex</code> in the document preamble and
+compile the document, then run the system command <code>makeindex</code>,
+and then compile the document again. See <a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a> for further
+discussion and an example of the use of <code>\printindex</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Glossaries"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Indexes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Indexes</a>, Up: <a href="#Front_002fback-matter" accesskey="u" rel="up">Front/back matter</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Glossaries-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.3 Glossaries</h3>
+
+<a name="index-glossary"></a>
+<a name="index-glossaries"></a>
+<a name="index-acronyms_002c-list-of"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmakeglossary"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cprintglossaries"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+ ...
+\newglossaryentry{<var>label</var>}{<var>settings</var>}
+ ...
+\gls{<var>label</var>}.
+ ...
+\printglossaries
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <samp>glossaries</samp> package allows you to make glossaries, including
+multiple glossaries, as well as lists of acronyms.
+</p>
+<p>To get the output from this example, compile the document (for instance
+with <code>pdflatex filename</code>), then run the command line command
+<code>makeglossaries filename</code>, and then compile the document again.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{...}
+\usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+\newglossaryentry{tm}{%
+ name={Turing machine},
+ description={A model of a machine that computes. The model is simple
+ but can compute anything any existing device can compute.
+ It is the standard model used in Computer Science.},
+ }
+\begin{document}
+Everything begins with the definition of a \gls{tm}.
+ ...
+\printglossaries
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>That gives two things. In the main text it outputs &lsquo;<samp>... definition
+of a Turing machine</samp>&rsquo;. In addition, in a separate sectional unit headed
+&lsquo;<samp>Glossary</samp>&rsquo; there appears a description list. In boldface it says
+&lsquo;<samp>Turing machine</samp>&rsquo; and the rest of the item says in normal type
+&lsquo;<samp>A model of a machine &hellip; Computer Science</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cmakeglossary-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cprintglossaries-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_002eglo-file"></a>
+<p>The command <code>\makeglossary</code> opens the file that will contain the
+entry information, <samp><var>root-file</var>.glo</samp>. Put the
+<code>\printglossaries</code> command where you want the glossaries to appear
+in your document.
+</p>
+<p>The <samp>glossaries</samp> package is very powerful. For instance, besides
+the commands <code>\newglossaryentry</code> and <code>\gls</code>, there are similar
+commands for a list of acronyms. See the package documentations on
+CTAN.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewglossaryentry" accesskey="1">\newglossaryentry</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Declare the content of a glossary entry.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cgls" accesskey="2">\gls</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Give a page reference for a glossary entry.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewglossaryentry"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cgls" accesskey="n" rel="next">\gls</a>, Up: <a href="#Glossaries" accesskey="u" rel="up">Glossaries</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewglossaryentry-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">25.3.1 <code>\newglossaryentry</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-glossary_002c-entries"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnewglossaryentry"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newglossaryentry{<var>label</var>}
+{
+ name={<var>name</var>},
+ description={<var>description</var>},
+ <var>other options</var>, ...
+}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>or
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\longnewglossaryentry{<var>label</var>}
+{
+ name={<var>name</var>},
+ <var>other options</var> ...,
+}
+{<var>description</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Declare a new entry for a glossary. The <var>label</var> must be unique for
+the document. The settings associated with the label are pairs:
+<code><var>key</var>=<var>value</var></code>.
+</p>
+<p>This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers &#x211D; in the
+glossary.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newglossaryentry{R}
+{
+ name={\ensuremath{\mathbb{R}}},
+ description={the real numbers},
+}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Use the second command form if the <var>description</var> spans more than one
+paragraph.
+</p>
+<p>For a full list of <var>key</var>s see the package documentation on CTAN but
+here are a few.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>name</code>
+<a name="index-name"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>(Required.) The word, phrase, or symbol that you are defining.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>description</code>
+<a name="index-description"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>(Required.) The description that will appear in the glossary.
+If this has more than one paragraph then you must use the second command
+form given in the synopsis.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>plural</code>
+<a name="index-plural"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>The plural form of <var>name</var>. Refer to the plural form using
+<code>\glspl</code> or <code>\Glspl</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cgls">\gls</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>sort</code>
+<a name="index-sort"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>How to place this entry in the list of entries that the glossary holds.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>symbol</code>
+<a name="index-symbol"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>A symbol, such as a mathematical symbol, besides the name.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cgls"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewglossaryentry" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newglossaryentry</a>, Up: <a href="#Glossaries" accesskey="u" rel="up">Glossaries</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cgls-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">25.3.2 <code>\gls</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-glossary_002c-entry-reference"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cgls"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\gls{<var>label</var>}
+\glspl{<var>label</var>}
+\Gls{<var>label</var>}
+\Glspl{<var>label</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Refer to a glossary entry. The entries are declared with
+<code>\newglossaryentry</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewglossaryentry">\newglossaryentry</a>).
+</p>
+<p>This
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newglossaryentry{N}{%
+ name={the natural numbers},
+ description={The numbers $0$, $1$, $2$, $\ldots$\@},
+ symbol={\ensuremath{\mathbb{N}}},
+ }
+ ...
+Consider \gls{N}.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>gives the output &lsquo;<samp>Consider the natural numbers</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>The second command form <code>\glspl{<var>label</var>}</code> produces the plural
+of <var>name</var> (by default it tries adding an &lsquo;<samp>s</samp>&rsquo;). The third form
+capitalizes the first letter of <var>name</var>, as does the fourth form,
+which also takes the plural.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Letters"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Terminal-input_002foutput" accesskey="n" rel="next">Terminal input/output</a>, Previous: <a href="#Front_002fback-matter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Front/back matter</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Letters-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">26 Letters</h2>
+
+<a name="index-letters_002c-writing"></a>
+<a name="index-writing-letters"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{letter}
+\address{<var>senders address</var>} % return address
+\signature{<var>sender name</var>}
+\begin{document}
+\begin{letter}{<var>recipient address</var>}
+\opening{<var>salutation</var>}
+ <var>letter body</var>
+\closing{<var>closing text</var>}
+\end{letter}
+ ...
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce one or more letters.
+</p>
+<p>Each letter is in a separate <code>letter</code> environment, whose argument
+<var>recipient address</var> often contains multiple lines separated with a
+double backslash,&nbsp;(<code>\\</code>). For example, you might have:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"> \begin{letter}{Ninon de l'Enclos \\
+ l'h\^otel Sagonne}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The start of the <code>letter</code> environment resets the page number to 1,
+and the footnote number to 1 also.
+</p>
+<p>The <var>sender address</var> and <var>sender name</var> are common to all of the
+letters, whether there is one or more, so these are best put in the
+preamble. As with the recipient address, often <var>sender address</var>
+contains multiple lines separated by a double
+backslash&nbsp;(<code>\\</code>). LaTeX will put the <var>sender name</var>
+under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
+hand-written signature.
+</p>
+<p>Each <code>letter</code> environment body begins with a required
+<code>\opening</code> command such as <code>\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}</code>.
+The <var>letter body</var> text is ordinary LaTeX so it can contain
+everything from enumerated lists to displayed math, except that commands
+such as <code>\chapter</code> that make no sense in a letter are turned off.
+Each <code>letter</code> environment body typically ends with a
+<code>\closing</code> command such as <code>\closing{Yours,}</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-for-letters"></a>
+<p>Additional material may come after the <code>\closing</code>. You can say who
+is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like <code>\cc{the
+Boss \\ the Boss's Boss}</code>. There&rsquo;s a similar <code>\encl</code> command for
+a list of enclosures. And, you can add a postscript with <code>\ps</code>.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX&rsquo;s default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it
+by a length of <code>\longindentation</code>. By default this is
+<code>0.5\textwidth</code>. To make them flush left, put
+<code>\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}</code> in your preamble.
+</p>
+<p>To set a fixed date use something like
+<code>\renewcommand{\today}{1958-Oct-12}</code>. If put in your preamble
+then it will apply to all the letters.
+</p>
+<p>This example shows only one <code>letter</code> environment. The three lines
+marked as optional are typically omitted.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{letter}
+\address{Sender's street \\ Sender's town}
+\signature{Sender's name \\ Sender's title}
+% optional: \location{Mailbox 13}
+% optional: \telephone{(102) 555-0101}
+\begin{document}
+\begin{letter}{Recipient's name \\ Recipient's address}
+\opening{Sir:}
+% optional: \thispagestyle{firstpage}
+I am not interested in entering a business arrangement with you.
+\closing{Your most humble, etc.,}
+\end{letter}
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>These commands are used with the <code>letter</code> class.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005caddress" accesskey="1">\address</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Sender&rsquo;s return address.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ccc" accesskey="2">\cc</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Carbon copy list.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cclosing" accesskey="3">\closing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Saying goodbye.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cencl" accesskey="4">\encl</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">List of enclosed material.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005clocation" accesskey="5">\location</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Sender&rsquo;s organizational location.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmakelabels" accesskey="6">\makelabels</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Make address labels.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cname" accesskey="7">\name</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Sender&rsquo;s name, for the return address.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005copening" accesskey="8">\opening</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Saying hello.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cps" accesskey="9">\ps</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Adding a postscript.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csignature">\signature</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Sender&rsquo;s signature.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ctelephone">\telephone</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Sender&rsquo;s phone number.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005caddress"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ccc" accesskey="n" rel="next">\cc</a>, Up: <a href="#Letters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Letters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005caddress-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">26.1 <code>\address</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005caddress"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\address{<var>senders address</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Specify the return address, as it appears on the letter and on the
+envelope. Separate multiple lines in <var>senders address</var> with a
+double backslash,&nbsp;<code>\\</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often put
+in the preamble. However, it can go anywhere, including inside an
+individual <code>letter</code> environment.
+</p>
+<p>This command is optional: if you do not use it then the letter is
+formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto pre-printed
+letterhead paper. If you do use the <code>\address</code> declaration then it
+is formatted as a personal letter.
+</p>
+<p>Here is an example.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\address{Stephen Maturin \\
+ The Grapes of the Savoy}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ccc"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cclosing" accesskey="n" rel="next">\closing</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddress" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\address</a>, Up: <a href="#Letters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Letters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ccc-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">26.2 <code>\cc</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005ccc"></a>
+<a name="index-cc-list_002c-in-letters"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\cc{<var>name0</var> \\
+ ... }
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent. This
+command is optional. If it appears then typically it comes after
+<code>\closing</code>. Put the names on different lines by separating them
+with a double backslash, <code>\\</code>, as in:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\cc{President \\
+ Vice President}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cclosing"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cencl" accesskey="n" rel="next">\encl</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccc" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\cc</a>, Up: <a href="#Letters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Letters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cclosing-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">26.3 <code>\closing</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cclosing"></a>
+<a name="index-letters_002c-ending"></a>
+<a name="index-closing-letters"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\closing{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce the letter&rsquo;s closing. This is optional, but usual. It appears
+at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature. For example:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\closing{Regards,}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cencl"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005clocation" accesskey="n" rel="next">\location</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cclosing" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\closing</a>, Up: <a href="#Letters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Letters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cencl-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">26.4 <code>\encl</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cencl"></a>
+<a name="index-enclosure-list"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\encl{<var>first enclosed object</var> \\
+ ... }
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
+optional; when it is used, it typically is put after <code>\closing</code>.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, <code>\\</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\encl{License \\
+ Passport}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005clocation"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmakelabels" accesskey="n" rel="next">\makelabels</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cencl" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\encl</a>, Up: <a href="#Letters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Letters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005clocation-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">26.5 <code>\location</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005clocation"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\location{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <var>text</var> appears centered at the bottom of the page. It only
+appears if the page style is <code>firstpage</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakelabels"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cname" accesskey="n" rel="next">\name</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005clocation" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\location</a>, Up: <a href="#Letters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Letters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakelabels-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">26.6 <code>\makelabels</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cmakelabels"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\makelabels % in preamble
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Optional, for a document that contains <code>letter</code> environments. If
+you just put <code>\makelabels</code> in the preamble then at the end of the
+document you will get a sheet with labels for all the recipients, one
+for each letter environment, that you can copy to a sheet of peel-off
+address labels.
+</p>
+<p>Customize the labels by redefining the commands <code>\startlabels</code>,
+<code>\mlabel</code>, and <code>\returnaddress</code> (and perhaps <code>\name</code>) in
+the preamble. The command <code>\startlabels</code> sets the width, height,
+number of columns, etc., of the page onto which the labels are printed.
+The command <code>\mlabel{<var>return address</var>}{<var>recipient
+address</var>}</code> produces the two labels (or one, if you choose to ignore the
+<var>return address</var>) for each letter environment. The first argument,
+<var>return address</var>, is the value returned by the macro
+<code>\returnaddress</code>. The second argument, <var>recipient address</var>, is
+the value passed in the argument to the <code>letter</code> environment. By
+default <code>\mlabel</code> ignores the first argument, the <var>return
+address</var>, causing the default behavior described in the prior paragraph.
+</p>
+<p>This illustrates customization. Its output includes a page with two
+columns having two labels each.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{letter}
+\renewcommand*{\returnaddress}{Fred McGuilicuddy \\
+ Oshkosh, Mineola 12305}
+\newcommand*\originalMlabel{}
+\let\originalMlabel\mlabel
+\def\mlabel#1#2{\originalMlabel{}{#1}\originalMlabel{}{#2}}
+\makelabels
+ ...
+\begin{document}
+\begin{letter}{A Einstein \\
+ 112 Mercer Street \\
+ Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+ ...
+\end{letter}
+\begin{letter}{K G\&quot;odel \\
+ 145 Linden Lane \\
+ Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+ ...
+\end{letter}
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The first column contains the return address twice. The second column
+contains the address for each recipient.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-envlab"></a>
+<a name="index-envlab-package"></a>
+
+<p>The package <code>envlab</code> makes formatting the labels easier, with
+standard sizes already provided. The preamble lines
+<code>\usepackage[personalenvelope]{envlab}</code> and <code>\makelabels</code>
+are all that you need to print envelopes.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cname"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005copening" accesskey="n" rel="next">\opening</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmakelabels" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\makelabels</a>, Up: <a href="#Letters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Letters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cname-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">26.7 <code>\name</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cname"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\name{<var>name</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Optional. Sender&rsquo;s name, used for printing on the envelope together
+with the return address.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005copening"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cps" accesskey="n" rel="next">\ps</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cname" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\name</a>, Up: <a href="#Letters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Letters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005copening-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">26.8 <code>\opening</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005copening"></a>
+<a name="index-letters_002c-starting"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\opening{<var>salutation</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Required. Follows the <code>\begin{letter}{...}</code>. The argument
+<var>salutation</var> is mandatory. For instance:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\opening{Dear John:}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cps"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csignature" accesskey="n" rel="next">\signature</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005copening" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\opening</a>, Up: <a href="#Letters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Letters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cps-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">26.9 <code>\ps</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cps"></a>
+<a name="index-postscript_002c-in-letters"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\ps{<var>text</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Add a postscript. This command is optional and usually is used after
+<code>\closing</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csignature"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ctelephone" accesskey="n" rel="next">\telephone</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cps" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\ps</a>, Up: <a href="#Letters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Letters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csignature-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">26.10 <code>\signature</code></h3>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\signature{<var>first line</var> \\
+ ... }
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005csignature"></a>
+
+<p>The sender&rsquo;s name. This command is optional, although its inclusion is
+usual.
+</p>
+<p>The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing.
+LaTeX leaves some vertical space for a handwritten
+signature. Separate multiple lines with a double
+backslash,&nbsp;<code>\\</code>. For example:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\signature{J Fred Muggs \\
+ White House}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>LaTeX&rsquo;s default for the vertical space from the <code>\closing</code> text
+down to the <code>\signature</code> text is <code>6\medskipamount</code>, which is
+six times <code>\medskipamount</code> (where <code>\medskipamount</code> is equal to
+a <code>\parskip</code>, which in turn is defined by default here to
+0.7em).
+</p>
+<p>This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters in
+the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a
+<code>letter</code> environment and before the <code>\closing</code>.
+</p>
+<p>You can include a graphic in the signature as here.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\
+ My name}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>For this you must put <code>\usepackage{graphicx}</code> in the preamble
+(see <a href="#Graphics">Graphics</a>).
+</p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ctelephone"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csignature" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\signature</a>, Up: <a href="#Letters" accesskey="u" rel="up">Letters</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ctelephone-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">26.11 <code>\telephone</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005ctelephone"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\telephone{<var>number</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The sender&rsquo;s telephone number. This is typically in the preamble, where
+it applies to all letters. This only appears if the <code>firstpage</code>
+pagestyle is selected. If so, it appears on the lower right of the
+page.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Terminal-input_002foutput"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Command-line" accesskey="n" rel="next">Command line</a>, Previous: <a href="#Letters" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Letters</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Terminal-input_002foutput-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">27 Terminal input/output</h2>
+
+<a name="index-input_002foutput_002c-to-terminal"></a>
+<a name="index-terminal-input_002foutput"></a>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ctypein" accesskey="1">\typein</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Read text from the terminal.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ctypeout" accesskey="2">\typeout</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Write text to the terminal.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ctypein"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ctypeout" accesskey="n" rel="next">\typeout</a>, Up: <a href="#Terminal-input_002foutput" accesskey="u" rel="up">Terminal input/output</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ctypein-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">27.1 <code>\typein</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005ctypein"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis, one of:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\typein{<var>prompt-msg</var>}
+\typein[<var>cmd</var>]{<var>prompt-msg</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Print <var>prompt-msg</var> on the terminal and cause LaTeX to stop and
+wait for you to type a line of input. This line of input ends when you
+hit the return key.
+</p>
+<p>For example, this
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">As long as I live I shall never forget \typein{Enter student name:}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>coupled with this command line interaction
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Enter student name:
+
+\@typein=Aphra Behn
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>gives the output &lsquo;<samp>... never forget Aphra Behn</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<p>The first command version, <code>\typein{<var>prompt-msg</var>}</code>, causes
+the input you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the
+input file in place of the <code>\typein</code> command.
+</p>
+<p>In the second command version the optional argument <code><var>cmd</var></code>
+argument must be a command name &mdash; it must begin with a backslash, \.
+This command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you
+typed. For example, this
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\typein[\student]{Enter student name:}
+\typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>gives this output on the command line,
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">Enter student name:
+
+\student=John Dee
+Recommendation for John Dee.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>where the user has entered &lsquo;<samp>John Dee.</samp>&rsquo;
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ctypeout"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ctypein" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\typein</a>, Up: <a href="#Terminal-input_002foutput" accesskey="u" rel="up">Terminal input/output</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ctypeout-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">27.2 <code>\typeout</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005ctypeout"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\typeout{<var>msg</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Print <code>msg</code> on the terminal and in the <code>log</code> file.
+</p>
+<p>This
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\student}{John Dee}
+\typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>outputs &lsquo;<samp>Recommendation for John Dee</samp>&rsquo;. Like what happens here with
+<code>\student</code>, commands that are defined with <code>\newcommand</code> or
+<code>\renewcommand</code> (among others) are replaced by their definitions
+before being printed.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX&rsquo;s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
+and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to <code>msg</code>. As above,
+use the command <code>\space</code> to get a single space, independent of
+surrounding spaces. Use <code>^^J</code> to get a newline. Get a percent
+character with <code>\csname @percentchar\endcsname</code>.
+</p>
+<p>This command can be useful for simple debugging, as here:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newlength{\jhlength}
+\setlength{\jhlength}{5pt}
+\typeout{The length is \the\jhlength.}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>produces on the command line &lsquo;<samp>The length is 5.0pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Command-line"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Document-templates" accesskey="n" rel="next">Document templates</a>, Previous: <a href="#Terminal-input_002foutput" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Terminal input/output</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Command-line-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">28 Command line</h2>
+
+<a name="index-command-line"></a>
+
+<p>Synopsis (from a terminal command line):
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">pdflatex <var>options</var> <var>argument</var>
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Run LaTeX on <var>argument</var>. In place of <code>pdflatex</code> you can
+also use <code>xelatex</code>, or <code>lualatex</code>, or <code>dviluatex</code>, or
+<code>latex</code>.
+</p>
+<p>For example, this will run LaTeX on the file <samp>thesis.tex</samp>,
+creating the output <samp>thesis.pdf</samp>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">pdflatex thesis
+</pre></div>
+
+<p><a name="index-_002etex_002c-default-extension"></a>
+Note that <samp>.tex</samp> is the default file extension.
+</p>
+<p>pdfTeX is a development of the original TeX program, as are
+XeTeX and LuaTeX (see <a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a>). They are completely
+backward compatible. But the original program had a custom output
+format, DVI, while the newer ones can output directly to PDF. This
+allows them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF such as
+hyperlinks, support for modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and
+ubiquitous viewing programs. In short, if you run <code>pdflatex</code> or
+<code>xelatex</code> or <code>lualatex</code> then you will by default get PDF
+and have access to all its modern features. If you run <code>latex</code>,
+or <code>dvilualatex</code>, then you will get DVI. The description here
+assumes pdfLaTeX.
+</p>
+<p>See <a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a>, for a selection of the most useful
+command line options. As to <var>argument</var>, the usual case is that it
+does not begin with a backslash, so the system takes it to be the name
+of a file and it compiles that file. If <var>argument</var> begins with a
+backslash then the system will interpret it as a line of LaTeX
+input, which can be used for special effects (see <a href="#Command-line-input">Command line input</a>).
+</p>
+<p>If you gave no arguments or options then <code>pdflatex</code> prompts for
+input from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering
+<code>&lt;control&gt;-D</code>.
+</p>
+<p>If LaTeX finds an error in your document then by default it stops and
+asks you about it. See <a href="#Recovering-from-errors">Recovering from errors</a> for an outline of what
+to do.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Command-line-options" accesskey="1">Command line options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Read text from the terminal.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Command-line-input" accesskey="2">Command line input</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Write text to the terminal.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Recovering-from-errors" accesskey="3">Recovering from errors</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">When something goes wrong.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Command-line-options"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Command-line-input" accesskey="n" rel="next">Command line input</a>, Up: <a href="#Command-line" accesskey="u" rel="up">Command line</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Command-line-options-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">28.1 Command line options</h3>
+
+<a name="index-options_002c-command-line"></a>
+
+<p>These are the command-line options relevant to ordinary document
+authoring. For a full list, try running &lsquo;<samp>latex --help</samp>&rsquo; from the
+command line.
+</p>
+<p>With many implementations you can specify command line options by
+prefixing them with &lsquo;<samp>-</samp>&rsquo; or &lsquo;<samp>--</samp>&rsquo;. This is the case for
+both TeX Live (and MacTeX) and MiKTeX. We will use both
+conventions interchangeably.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dd><a name="index-_002d_002dversion-command_002dline-option"></a>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>-version</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Show the current version, like &lsquo;<samp>pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX
+Live 2015/Debian)</samp>&rsquo; along with a small amount of additional information,
+and exit.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_002d_002dhelp-command_002dline-option"></a>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>-help</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_002d_002dinteraction-command_002dline-option"></a>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>-interaction=<var>mode</var></code></dt>
+<dd><p>TeX compiles a document in one of four interaction modes:
+<code>batchmode</code>, <code>nonstopmode</code>, <code>scrollmode</code>,
+<code>errorstopmode</code>. In <em>errorstop mode</em> (the default), TeX
+stops at each error and asks for user intervention. In <em>batch
+mode</em> it prints nothing on the terminal, errors are scrolled as if the
+user hit <code>&lt;return&gt;</code> at every error, and missing files cause the
+job to abort. In <em>nonstop mode</em>, diagnostic message appear on the
+terminal but as in batch mode there is no user interaction. In
+<em>scroll mode</em>, TeX only stops for missing files or keyboard
+input.
+</p>
+<p>For instance, starting LaTeX with this command line
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">pdflatex -interaction=batchmode <var>filename</var>
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>eliminates most terminal output.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_002d_002djobname-command_002dline-option"></a>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>-jobname=<var>string</var></code></dt>
+<dd><p>Set the value of TeX&rsquo;s <code>jobname</code> to the string. The log file
+and output file will then be named <samp><var>string</var>.log</samp> and
+<samp><var>string</var>.pdf</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>When you run <code><code>pdflatex</code> <var>options</var> <var>argument</var></code>, if
+<var>argument</var> does not start with a backslash then TeX considers it
+the name of a file to input. Otherwise it waits for the first
+<code>\input</code> instruction and the name of the input file will be the job
+name. This is used to name the log file the output file. The
+<code>jobname</code> option overrides that process and directly specifies the
+name. See <a href="#Command-line-input">Command line input</a> for an example of its use.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_002d_002doutput_002ddirectory-command_002dline-option"></a>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>-output-directory=<var>directory</var></code></dt>
+<dd><p>Write files in the directory <var>directory</var>. It must already exist.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_002d_002dshell_002descape-command_002dline-option"></a>
+<a name="index-_002d_002dno_002dshell_002descape-command_002dline-option"></a>
+<a name="index-_002d_002denable_002dwrite18-command_002dline-option"></a>
+<a name="index-_002d_002ddisable_002dwrite18-command_002dline-option"></a>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>--shell-escape</code></dt>
+<dt><code>--no-shell-escape</code></dt>
+<dt><code>--enable-write18</code></dt>
+<dt><code>--disable-write18</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Enable or disable <code>\write18{<var>shell command</var>}</code>. The first two
+options are for with TeX Live or MacTeX while the second two are
+for MiKTeX.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-sagetex"></a>
+<a name="index-sagetex-package"></a>
+
+<p>Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a
+LaTeX file. For instance the package <samp>sagetex</samp> allows you to
+have the mathematics software system <i>Sage</i> do calculations or draw
+graphs and then incorporate that output in your document. For this
+TeX provides the <code>\write18</code> command.
+</p>
+<p>But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen if you
+compiled a LaTeX file from the Internet. By default <code>\write18</code>
+is disabled. (More precisely, by default TeX Live, MacTeX, and
+MiKTeX only allow the execution of a limited number of TeX-related
+programs, which they distribute.)
+</p>
+<p>If you invoke LaTeX with the option <code>no-shell-escape</code>, and in
+your document you call <code>\write18{ls -l}</code>, then you do not get an
+error but the log file says &lsquo;<samp>runsystem(ls -l)...disabled</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_002d_002dhalt_002don_002derror-command_002dline-option"></a>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>-halt-on-error</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Stop processing at the first error.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_002d_002dfile_002dline_002derror-command_002dline-option"></a>
+<a name="index-_002d_002dno_002dfile_002dline_002derror-command_002dline-option"></a>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>-file-line-error</code></dt>
+<dt><code>-no-file-line-error</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Enable or disable <code><var>filename</var>:<var>lineno</var>:<var>error</var></code>-style
+error messages. These are only available with TeX Live or MacTeX.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Command-line-input"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Recovering-from-errors" accesskey="n" rel="next">Recovering from errors</a>, Previous: <a href="#Command-line-options" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Command line options</a>, Up: <a href="#Command-line" accesskey="u" rel="up">Command line</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Command-line-input-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">28.2 Command line input</h3>
+
+<a name="index-input_002c-on-command-line"></a>
+
+<p>As part of the command line invocation <code>pdflatex <var>options</var>
+<var>argument</var></code> you can specify arbitrary LaTeX input by starting
+<var>argument</var> with a backslash. This allows you to do some special
+effects.
+</p>
+<a name="index-package_002c-hyperref-3"></a>
+<a name="index-hyperref-package-3"></a>
+
+<p>For example, this file (which uses the <samp>hyperref</samp> package for
+hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a
+PDF.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\ifdefined\paperversion % in preamble
+\newcommand{\urlcolor}{black}
+\else
+\newcommand{\urlcolor}{blue}
+\fi
+\usepackage[colorlinks=true,urlcolor=\urlcolor]{hyperref}
+ ...
+\href{https://www.ctan.org}{CTAN} % in body
+ ...
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Compiling this document <samp>book.tex</samp> with the command line
+<code>pdflatex book</code> will give the &lsquo;<samp>CTAN</samp>&rsquo; link in blue. But
+compiling it with <code>pdflatex &quot;\def\paperversion{}\input book.tex&quot;</code>
+has the link in black. (Note the use of double quotes to prevent
+interpretation of the symbols by the command line shell; your system may
+do this differently.)
+</p>
+<p>In a similar way, from the single file <samp>main.tex</samp> you can compile
+two different versions.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">pdflatex -jobname=students &quot;\def\student{}\input{main}&quot;
+pdflatex -jobname=teachers &quot;\def\teachers{}\input{main}&quot;
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The <code>jobname</code> option is there because otherwise both files would be
+called <samp>main.pdf</samp> and the second would overwrite the first.
+</p>
+<p>A final example. This loads the package <samp>graphicx</samp> with the option
+<code>draft</code>
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">pdflatex -jobname=aa &quot;\RequirePackage[draft]{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}&quot;
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>so the graphic files are read for their size information but not
+incorporated into the PDF. (The <code>jobname</code> option is there because
+otherwise the output file would be <samp>graphicx.pdf</samp>, as
+<code>\RequirePackage</code> does an <code>\input</code> of its own.)
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Recovering-from-errors"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Command-line-input" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Command line input</a>, Up: <a href="#Command-line" accesskey="u" rel="up">Command line</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Recovering-from-errors-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">28.3 Recovering from errors</h3>
+
+<p>If LaTeX finds an error in your document then it gives you an error
+message and prompts you with a question mark, <code>?</code>. For instance,
+running LaTeX on this file
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcommand{\NP}{\ensuremath{\textbf{NP}}}
+The \PN{} problem is a million dollar one.
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>causes it show this, and wait for input.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">! Undefined control sequence.
+l.5 The \PN
+ {} problem is a million dollar one.
+?
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The simplest thing is to enter &lsquo;<samp>x</samp>&rsquo; and <code>&lt;return&gt;</code> and fix the
+typo. You could instead enter &lsquo;<samp>?</samp>&rsquo; and <code>&lt;return&gt;</code> to see other
+options.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_002a-prompt"></a>
+<a name="index-prompt_002c-_002a"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cstop"></a>
+<p>There are two other error scenarios. The first is that you forgot to
+include the <code>\end{document}</code> or misspelled it. In this case
+LaTeX gives you a &lsquo;<samp>*</samp>&rsquo; prompt. You can get back to the command
+line by typing <code>\stop</code> and <code>&lt;return&gt;</code>.
+</p>
+<p>The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name. For instance,
+instead of <code>pdflatex test</code> you might type <code>pdflatex tste</code>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">! I can't find file `tste'.
+&lt;*&gt; tste
+
+(Press Enter to retry, or Control-D to exit)
+Please type another input file name:
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>The simplest thing is to enter <code>&lt;Control&gt;</code> and &lsquo;<samp>d</samp>&rsquo; (holding
+them down at the same time), and then retype the correct command line.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Document-templates"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Index" accesskey="n" rel="next">Index</a>, Previous: <a href="#Command-line" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Command line</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Document-templates-1"></a>
+<h2 class="appendix">Appendix A Document templates</h2>
+
+<a name="index-document-templates"></a>
+<a name="index-templates_002c-document"></a>
+
+<p>Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will
+be useful. Additional template resources are listed at
+<a href="http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates">http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates</a>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#beamer-template" accesskey="1">beamer template</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#article-template" accesskey="2">article template</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#book-template" accesskey="3">book template</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Larger-book-template" accesskey="4">Larger book template</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#tugboat-template" accesskey="5">tugboat template</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="beamer-template"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#article-template" accesskey="n" rel="next">article template</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-templates" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document templates</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="beamer-template-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">A.1 <code>beamer</code> template</h3>
+
+<a name="index-beamer-template-and-class"></a>
+<a name="index-template_002c-beamer"></a>
+
+<p>The <code>beamer</code> class creates presentation slides. It has a vast
+array of features, but here is a basic template:
+</p>
+<pre class="verbatim">\documentclass{beamer}
+
+\title{Beamer Class template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+\date{July 31, 2007}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% without [fragile], any {verbatim} code gets mysterious errors.
+\begin{frame}[fragile]
+ \frametitle{First Slide}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ This is \verbatim!
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+<p>One web resource for this:
+<a href="http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/">http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="article-template"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#book-template" accesskey="n" rel="next">book template</a>, Previous: <a href="#beamer-template" accesskey="p" rel="prev">beamer template</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-templates" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document templates</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="article-template-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">A.2 <code>article</code> template</h3>
+
+<a name="index-template_002c-article"></a>
+
+<pre class="verbatim">\documentclass{article}
+\title{Article Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{First section}
+Some text.
+
+\subsection{First section, first subsection}
+Additional text.
+
+\section{Second section}
+Some more text.
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="book-template"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Larger-book-template" accesskey="n" rel="next">Larger book template</a>, Previous: <a href="#article-template" accesskey="p" rel="prev">article template</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-templates" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document templates</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="book-template-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">A.3 <code>book</code> template</h3>
+
+<a name="index-template_002c-book"></a>
+
+<p>This is a straightforward template for a book. See See <a href="#Larger-book-template">Larger book template</a> for a more elaborate one.
+</p>
+<pre class="verbatim">\documentclass{book}
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\chapter{First}
+Some text.
+
+\chapter{Second}
+Some other text.
+
+\section{A subtopic}
+The end.
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Larger-book-template"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#tugboat-template" accesskey="n" rel="next">tugboat template</a>, Previous: <a href="#book-template" accesskey="p" rel="prev">book template</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-templates" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document templates</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Larger-book-template-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">A.4 Larger <code>book</code> template</h3>
+
+<a name="index-template_002c-book-1"></a>
+
+<p>This is a more elaborate template for a book. It has
+<code>\frontmatter</code>, <code>\mainmatter</code>, and <code>\backmatter</code> to
+control the typography of the three main areas of a book
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</a>). The book has a
+bibliography and an index.
+</p>
+<p>Notable is that it uses <code>\include</code> and <code>\includeonly</code>
+(see <a href="#Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</a>). While you are working on a chapter you
+can comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to
+<code>\includeonly</code>. That will speed up compilation without losing any
+information such as cross-references. (Material that does not need to
+come on a new page is brought in with <code>\input</code> instead of
+<code>\include</code>. You don&rsquo;t get the cross-reference benefit this way.)
+</p>
+<pre class="verbatim">\documentclass[titlepage]{book}
+\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex
+
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\includeonly{%
+ frontcover,
+ preface,
+ chap1,
+ ...
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\include{frontcover}
+ % maybe comment out while drafting:
+\maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright}
+\tableofcontents
+\include{preface}
+\mainmatter
+\include{chap1}
+...
+\appendix
+\include{appena}
+...
+\backmatter
+\bibliographystyle{apalike}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}
+\bibliography
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index}
+\printindex
+\include{backcover}
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="tugboat-template"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Larger-book-template" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Larger book template</a>, Up: <a href="#Document-templates" accesskey="u" rel="up">Document templates</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="tugboat-template-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">A.5 <code>tugboat</code> template</h3>
+
+<a name="index-template_002c-TUGboat"></a>
+<a name="index-TUGboat-template"></a>
+<a name="index-ltugboat-class"></a>
+
+<p><cite>TUGboat</cite> is the journal of the TeX Users Group,
+<a href="http://tug.org/TUGboat">http://tug.org/TUGboat</a>.
+</p>
+<pre class="verbatim">\documentclass{ltugboat}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{ifpdf}
+\ifpdf
+\usepackage[breaklinks,hidelinks]{hyperref}
+\else
+\usepackage{url}
+\fi
+
+%%% Start of metadata %%%
+
+\title{Example \TUB\ article}
+
+% repeat info for each author.
+\author{First Last}
+\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
+\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
+\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
+
+%%% End of metadata %%%
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+This is an example article for \TUB{}.
+Please write an abstract.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is an example article for \TUB, linked from
+\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
+
+We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the
+\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF}
+output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
+
+The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more):
+% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
+\begin{verbatim}[\small]
+\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
+\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
+\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
+\mf \MFB
+\plain \POBox \PS
+\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP
+\TUB \TUG \tug
+\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+
+\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph
+
+\acro{FRED} -&gt; {\small[er] fred} % please use!
+\cs{fred} -&gt; \fred
+\meta{fred} -&gt; &lt;fred&gt;
+\nth{n} -&gt; 1st, 2nd, ...
+\sfrac{3/4} -&gt; 3/4
+\booktitle{Book of Fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format
+\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue.
+
+This file is just a template. The \TUB\ style documentation is the
+\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}. (For
+\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using
+\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location,
+\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.)
+
+Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
+\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty
+\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
+
+\makesignature
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Index"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Document-templates" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Document templates</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#Index" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Index-1"></a>
+<h2 class="unnumbered">Index</h2>
+
+<a name="Command-Index"></a>
+<table><tr><th valign="top">Jump to: &nbsp; </th><td><a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-1"><b>&amp;</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-2"><b>*</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-3"><b>-</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-4"><b>.</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-5"><b>1</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-6"><b>:</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-7"><b>[</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-8"><b>\</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-9"><b>^</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-10"><b>_</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-11"><b>`</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-12"><b>{</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-13"><b>~</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<br>
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-A"><b>A</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-B"><b>B</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-C"><b>C</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-D"><b>D</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-E"><b>E</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-F"><b>F</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-G"><b>G</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-H"><b>H</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-I"><b>I</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-J"><b>J</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-K"><b>K</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-L"><b>L</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-M"><b>M</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-N"><b>N</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-O"><b>O</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-P"><b>P</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-Q"><b>Q</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-R"><b>R</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-S"><b>S</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-T"><b>T</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-U"><b>U</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-V"><b>V</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-W"><b>W</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-X"><b>X</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+</td></tr></table>
+<table class="index-cp" border="0">
+<tr><td></td><th align="left">Index Entry</th><td>&nbsp;</td><th align="left"> Section</th></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_symbol-1">&amp;</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_0026"><code>&amp;</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_symbol-2">*</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002a-prompt">&lsquo;<samp>*</samp>&rsquo; prompt</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Recovering-from-errors">Recovering from errors</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002a_002dform-of-environment-commands"><code>*</code>-form of environment commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment &amp; \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002a_002dform-of-sectioning-commands"><code>*</code>-form of sectioning commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002a_002dform_002c-defining-new-commands">*-form, defining new commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_symbol-3">-</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002d_002ddisable_002dwrite18-command_002dline-option"><code>--disable-write18 <span class="roman">command-line option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002d_002denable_002dwrite18-command_002dline-option"><code>--enable-write18 <span class="roman">command-line option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002d_002dfile_002dline_002derror-command_002dline-option"><code>--file-line-error <span class="roman">command-line option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002d_002dhalt_002don_002derror-command_002dline-option"><code>--halt-on-error <span class="roman">command-line option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002d_002dhelp-command_002dline-option"><code>--help <span class="roman">command-line option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002d_002dinteraction-command_002dline-option"><code>--interaction <span class="roman">command-line option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002d_002djobname-command_002dline-option"><code>--jobname <span class="roman">command-line option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002d_002dno_002dfile_002dline_002derror-command_002dline-option"><code>--no-file-line-error <span class="roman">command-line option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002d_002dno_002dshell_002descape-command_002dline-option"><code>--no-shell-escape <span class="roman">command-line option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002d_002doutput_002ddirectory-command_002dline-option"><code>--output-directory <span class="roman">command-line option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002d_002dshell_002descape-command_002dline-option"><code>--shell-escape <span class="roman">command-line option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002d_002dversion-command_002dline-option"><code>--version <span class="roman">command-line option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_symbol-4">.</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002eaux-file"><code>.aux <span class="roman">file</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002edvi-file"><code>.dvi <span class="roman">file</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002eglo-file"><samp>.glo</samp> file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glossaries">Glossaries</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002eidx-file"><samp>.idx</samp> file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002eidx-file-1"><samp>.idx</samp> file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002eind-file"><samp>.ind</samp> file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002eisty-file"><samp>.isty</samp> file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002elof-file"><code>.lof <span class="roman">file</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002elof-file-1"><code>.lof <span class="roman">file</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002elog-file"><code>.log <span class="roman">file</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002elot-file"><code>.lot <span class="roman">file</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002elot-file-1"><code>.lot <span class="roman">file</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002epdf-file"><code>.pdf <span class="roman">file</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002etex_002c-default-extension"><code>.tex, <span class="roman">default extension</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line">Command line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002etoc-file"><code>.toc <span class="roman">file</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002etoc-file-1"><code>.toc <span class="roman">file</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002exdv-file"><code>.xdv <span class="roman">file</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_symbol-5">1</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-10pt-option"><code>10pt <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-11pt-option"><code>11pt <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-12pt-option"><code>12pt <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_symbol-6">:</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_003a">:</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">Colon character &amp; \colon</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_003a-1"><code>:</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">Colon character &amp; \colon</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_symbol-7">[</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005b_002e_002e_002e_005d-for-optional-arguments"><code>[...] <span class="roman">for optional arguments</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax">LaTeX command syntax</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_symbol-8">\</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c-character-starting-commands"><code>\ <span class="roman">character starting commands</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax">LaTeX command syntax</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0021"><code>\!</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0022-_0028umlaut-accent_0029"><code>\&quot; <span class="roman">(umlaut accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0023"><code>\#</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0024"><code>\$</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0025"><code>\%</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0026"><code>\&amp;</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0027-_0028acute-accent_0029"><code>\' <span class="roman">(acute accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029"><code>\' <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002a"><code>\*</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_002a">\*</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002b"><code>\+</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002c"><code>\,</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002d"><code>\-</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029"><code>\- <span class="roman">(hyphenation)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002e-_0028dot_002dover-accent_0029"><code>\. <span class="roman">(dot-over accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002f"><code>\/</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_002f">\/</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003a"><code>\:</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003b"><code>\;</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003c"><code>\&lt;</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003d-_0028macron-accent_0029"><code>\= <span class="roman">(macron accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003d-_0028tabbing_0029"><code>\= <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003e"><code>\&gt;</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003e-1"><code>\&gt;</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003e-_0028tabbing_0029"><code>\&gt; <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0040"><code>\@</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040">\@</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0040beginparpenalty"><code>\@beginparpenalty</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0040endparpenalty"><code>\@endparpenalty</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0040fnsymbol"><code>\@fnsymbol</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0040ifstar"><code>\@ifstar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar">\@ifstar</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0040itempenalty"><code>\@itempenalty</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0040startsection"><code>\@startsection</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ca-_0028tabbing_0029"><code>\a <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ca_0027-_0028acute-accent-in-tabbing_0029"><code>\a' <span class="roman">(acute accent in tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ca_003d-_0028macron-accent-in-tabbing_0029"><code>\a= <span class="roman">(macron accent in tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caa-_0028aa_0029"><code>\aa (&aring;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAA-_0028AA_0029"><code>\AA (&Aring;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cacute"><code>\acute</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddcontentsline"><code>\addcontentsline</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddress"><code>\address</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddress">\address</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddtocontents_007bext_007d_007btext_007d"><code>\addtocontents{<var>ext</var>}{<var>text</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddtocounter"><code>\addtocounter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddtolength"><code>\addtolength</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddvspace"><code>\addvspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cae-_0028ae_0029"><code>\ae (&aelig;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAE-_0028AE_0029"><code>\AE (&AElig;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caleph"><code>\aleph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAlph-example"><code>\Alph <span class="roman">example</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005calpha"><code>\alpha</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005calph_007bcounter_007d"><code>\alph{<var>counter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAlph_007bcounter_007d"><code>\Alph{<var>counter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005calsoname"><code>\alsoname</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005camalg"><code>\amalg</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cand-for-_005cauthor"><code>\and <span class="roman">for <code>\author</code></span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cangle"><code>\angle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cappendix"><code>\appendix</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cappendix">\appendix</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005capprox"><code>\approx</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carabic_007bcounter_007d"><code>\arabic{<var>counter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carccos"><code>\arccos</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carcsin"><code>\arcsin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carctan"><code>\arctan</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carg"><code>\arg</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carraycolsep"><code>\arraycolsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carrayrulewidth"><code>\arrayrulewidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carraystretch"><code>\arraystretch</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cast"><code>\ast</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005casymp"><code>\asymp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAtBeginDocument"><code>\AtBeginDocument</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument">\AtBeginDocument</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAtBeginDvi"><code>\AtBeginDvi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAtEndDocument"><code>\AtEndDocument</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cAtEndDocument">\AtEndDocument</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAtEndOfClass"><code>\AtEndOfClass</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAtEndOfPackage"><code>\AtEndOfPackage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cauthor_007bname1-_005cand-name2-_005cand-_002e_002e_002e_007d"><code>\author{<var>name1</var> \and <var>name2</var> \and ...}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ca_0060-_0028grave-accent-in-tabbing_0029"><code>\a` <span class="roman">(grave accent in tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cb-_0028bar_002dunder-accent_0029"><code>\b <span class="roman">(bar-under accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbackmatter"><code>\backmatter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbackslash"><code>\backslash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbar"><code>\bar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbaselineskip"><code>\baselineskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbaselinestretch"><code>\baselinestretch</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbegin"><code>\begin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Environments">Environments</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbeta"><code>\beta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbf"><code>\bf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbfseries"><code>\bfseries</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbibitem"><code>\bibitem</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbibliography"><code>\bibliography</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbibliographystyle"><code>\bibliographystyle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigcap"><code>\bigcap</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigcirc"><code>\bigcirc</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigcup"><code>\bigcup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigodot"><code>\bigodot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigoplus"><code>\bigoplus</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigotimes"><code>\bigotimes</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigskip"><code>\bigskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigskipamount"><code>\bigskipamount</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigsqcup"><code>\bigsqcup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigtriangledown"><code>\bigtriangledown</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigtriangleup"><code>\bigtriangleup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbiguplus"><code>\biguplus</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigvee"><code>\bigvee</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigwedge"><code>\bigwedge</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbmod"><code>\bmod</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cboldmath"><code>\boldmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cboldmath-1"><code>\boldmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbot"><code>\bot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbottomfraction"><code>\bottomfraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbottomfraction-1"><code>\bottomfraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbowtie"><code>\bowtie</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cBox"><code>\Box</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbreve"><code>\breve</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbullet"><code>\bullet</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cc-_0028cedilla-accent_0029"><code>\c <span class="roman">(cedilla accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccal"><code>\cal</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccap"><code>\cap</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalacute"><code>\capitalacute</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalbreve"><code>\capitalbreve</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalcaron"><code>\capitalcaron</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalcedilla"><code>\capitalcedilla</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalcircumflex"><code>\capitalcircumflex</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitaldieresis"><code>\capitaldieresis</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitaldotaccent"><code>\capitaldotaccent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalgrave"><code>\capitalgrave</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalhungarumlaut"><code>\capitalhungarumlaut</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalmacron"><code>\capitalmacron</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalnewtie"><code>\capitalnewtie</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalogonek"><code>\capitalogonek</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalring"><code>\capitalring</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitaltie"><code>\capitaltie</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitaltilde"><code>\capitaltilde</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccaption"><code>\caption</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccaption-1"><code>\caption</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#table">table</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccc"><code>\cc</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccc">\cc</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccdot"><code>\cdot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccdots"><code>\cdots</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Dots">Dots</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccentering"><code>\centering</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccentering">\centering</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cchapter"><code>\chapter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cchapter-1"><code>\chapter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cchapter">\chapter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccheck"><code>\check</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cCheckCommand"><code>\CheckCommand</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cCheckCommand_002a"><code>\CheckCommand*</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cchi"><code>\chi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccirc"><code>\circ</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccircle"><code>\circle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccircle">\circle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccite"><code>\cite</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccite">\cite</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cClassError"><code>\ClassError</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cClassInfo"><code>\ClassInfo</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cClassInfoNoLine"><code>\ClassInfoNoLine</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cClassWarning"><code>\ClassWarning</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cClassWarningNoLine"><code>\ClassWarningNoLine</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccleardoublepage"><code>\cleardoublepage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cclearpage"><code>\clearpage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccline"><code>\cline</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccline">\cline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cclosing"><code>\closing</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclosing">\closing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cclubsuit"><code>\clubsuit</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccolon"><code>\colon</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">Colon character &amp; \colon</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccolumnsep"><code>\columnsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccolumnsep-1"><code>\columnsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccolumnsep-2"><code>\columnsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccolumnseprule"><code>\columnseprule</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccolumnseprule-1"><code>\columnseprule</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccolumnseprule-2"><code>\columnseprule</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccolumnwidth"><code>\columnwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccolumnwidth-1"><code>\columnwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccolumnwidth-2"><code>\columnwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccomplement"><code>\complement</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccong"><code>\cong</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccontentsline"><code>\contentsline</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccoprod"><code>\coprod</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccopyright"><code>\copyright</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccos"><code>\cos</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccosh"><code>\cosh</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccot"><code>\cot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccoth"><code>\coth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccsc"><code>\csc</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccup"><code>\cup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cCurrentOption"><code>\CurrentOption</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cd-_0028dot_002dunder-accent_0029"><code>\d <span class="roman">(dot-under accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdag"><code>\dag</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdagger"><code>\dagger</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdashbox"><code>\dashbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdashv"><code>\dashv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdate_007btext_007d"><code>\date{<var>text</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cday"><code>\day</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear">\day &amp; \month &amp; \year</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdblfloatpagefraction"><code>\dblfloatpagefraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdblfloatsep"><code>\dblfloatsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdbltextfloatsep"><code>\dbltextfloatsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdbltopfraction"><code>\dbltopfraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdbltopnumber"><code>\dbltopnumber</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cddag"><code>\ddag</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cddagger"><code>\ddagger</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cddot"><code>\ddot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cddots"><code>\ddots</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Dots">Dots</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions"><code>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDeclareGraphicsRule"><code>\DeclareGraphicsRule</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cDeclareGraphicsRule">\DeclareGraphicsRule</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDeclareOption"><code>\DeclareOption</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDeclareOption_002a"><code>\DeclareOption*</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDeclareRobustCommand"><code>\DeclareRobustCommand</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDeclareRobustCommand_002a"><code>\DeclareRobustCommand*</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdeg"><code>\deg</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDelta"><code>\Delta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdelta"><code>\delta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdet"><code>\det</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdh-_0028d_0029"><code>\dh (&eth;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDH-_0028D_0029"><code>\DH (&ETH;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDiamond"><code>\Diamond</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdiamond"><code>\diamond</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdiamondsuit"><code>\diamondsuit</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdim"><code>\dim</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdisplaystyle"><code>\displaystyle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdiv"><code>\div</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdj"><code>\dj</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDJ"><code>\DJ</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdocumentclass"><code>\documentclass</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdot"><code>\dot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdoteq"><code>\doteq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdotfill"><code>\dotfill</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill">\hrulefill &amp; \dotfill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdots"><code>\dots</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdoublerulesep"><code>\doublerulesep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdownarrow"><code>\downarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDownarrow"><code>\Downarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cell"><code>\ell</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cemph"><code>\emph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cemptyset"><code>\emptyset</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cencl"><code>\encl</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cencl">\encl</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cend"><code>\end</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Environments">Environments</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cendinput"><code>\endinput</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cendinput">\endinput</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cenlargethispage"><code>\enlargethispage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005censpace"><code>\enspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad">\enspace &amp; \quad &amp; \qquad</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cenumi"><code>\enumi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cenumii"><code>\enumii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cenumiii"><code>\enumiii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cenumiv"><code>\enumiv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cepsilon"><code>\epsilon</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cequiv"><code>\equiv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ceta"><code>\eta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cevensidemargin"><code>\evensidemargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cevensidemargin-1"><code>\evensidemargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cevensidemargin-2"><code>\evensidemargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cExecuteOptions"><code>\ExecuteOptions</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cexists"><code>\exists</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cexp"><code>\exp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cextracolsep"><code>\extracolsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfbox"><code>\fbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfboxrule-1"><code>\fboxrule</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfboxrule">\fboxrule</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfboxrule-2"><code>\fboxrule</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfboxsep-1"><code>\fboxsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfboxsep">\fboxsep</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfboxsep-2"><code>\fboxsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfill"><code>\fill</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chfill">\hfill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cflat"><code>\flat</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfloatpagefraction"><code>\floatpagefraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfloatpagefraction-1"><code>\floatpagefraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfloatsep"><code>\floatsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfloatsep-1"><code>\floatsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cflushbottom"><code>\flushbottom</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfnsymbol_002c-and-footnotes"><code>\fnsymbol<span class="roman">, and footnotes</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfnsymbol_007bcounter_007d"><code>\fnsymbol{<var>counter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfontencoding"><code>\fontencoding</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfontfamily"><code>\fontfamily</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfontseries"><code>\fontseries</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfontshape"><code>\fontshape</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfontsize"><code>\fontsize</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootnote"><code>\footnote</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootnotemark"><code>\footnotemark</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootnoterule"><code>\footnoterule</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootnotesep"><code>\footnotesep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootnotesize"><code>\footnotesize</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootnotetext"><code>\footnotetext</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootskip"><code>\footskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootskip-1"><code>\footskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cforall"><code>\forall</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfrac"><code>\frac</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrac">\frac</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cframe"><code>\frame</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cframe">\frame</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cframebox"><code>\framebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cframebox-1"><code>\framebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfrenchspacing"><code>\frenchspacing</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing">\frenchspacing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfrontmatter"><code>\frontmatter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfrown"><code>\frown</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfussy"><code>\fussy</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">\fussy &amp; \sloppy</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cGamma"><code>\Gamma</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgamma"><code>\gamma</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgcd"><code>\gcd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cge"><code>\ge</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgeq"><code>\geq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgets"><code>\gets</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgg"><code>\gg</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgls"><code>\gls</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cgls">\gls</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgraphicspath"><code>\graphicspath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cgraphicspath">\graphicspath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgraphpaper"><code>\graphpaper</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cgraphpaper">\graphpaper</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgrave"><code>\grave</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cguillemotleft-_0028_00ab_0029"><code>\guillemotleft <span class="roman">(&laquo;)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cguillemotright-_0028_00bb_0029"><code>\guillemotright <span class="roman">(&raquo;)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cguilsinglleft-_0028_2039_0029"><code>\guilsinglleft <span class="roman">(&lsaquo;)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cguilsinglright-_0028_203a_0029"><code>\guilsinglright <span class="roman">(&rsaquo;)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cH-_0028Hungarian-umlaut-accent_0029"><code>\H <span class="roman">(Hungarian umlaut accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chat"><code>\hat</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chbar"><code>\hbar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cheadheight"><code>\headheight</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cheadheight-1"><code>\headheight</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cheadsep"><code>\headsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cheadsep-1"><code>\headsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cheartsuit"><code>\heartsuit</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chfill"><code>\hfill</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chfill">\hfill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chline"><code>\hline</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chline">\hline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chom"><code>\hom</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chookleftarrow"><code>\hookleftarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chookrightarrow"><code>\hookrightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chrulefill"><code>\hrulefill</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill">\hrulefill &amp; \dotfill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chsize"><code>\hsize</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chsize-1"><code>\hsize</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chspace"><code>\hspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chspace">\hspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chss"><code>\hss</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chss">\hss</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chuge"><code>\huge</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cHuge"><code>\Huge</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chyphenation"><code>\hyphenation</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ci-_0028dotless-i_0029"><code>\i <span class="roman">(dotless i)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ciff"><code>\iff</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cIfFileExists"><code>\IfFileExists</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cignorespaces"><code>\ignorespaces</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend">\ignorespaces &amp; \ignorespacesafterend</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cignorespacesafterend"><code>\ignorespacesafterend</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend">\ignorespaces &amp; \ignorespacesafterend</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cij-_0028ij_0029"><code>\ij (ij)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cIJ-_0028IJ_0029"><code>\IJ (IJ)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cIm"><code>\Im</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cimath"><code>\imath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cin"><code>\in</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cinclude"><code>\include</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">\include &amp; \includeonly</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cincludegraphics"><code>\includegraphics</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cincludeonly"><code>\includeonly</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">\include &amp; \includeonly</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cindent"><code>\indent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent">\indent &amp; \noindent</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cindex"><code>\index</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cindex-1"><code>\index</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cindexentry"><code>\indexentry</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cindexspace"><code>\indexspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cinf"><code>\inf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cinfty"><code>\infty</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cinput"><code>\input</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cinput">\input</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cInputIfFileExists"><code>\InputIfFileExists</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cint"><code>\int</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cintextsep"><code>\intextsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cintextsep-1"><code>\intextsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ciota"><code>\iota</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cit"><code>\it</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citem"><code>\item</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citem-1"><code>\item</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citem-2"><code>\item</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citem-3"><code>\item</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citemindent"><code>\itemindent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citemsep"><code>\itemsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citshape"><code>\itshape</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cj-_0028dotless-j_0029"><code>\j <span class="roman">(dotless j)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cjmath"><code>\jmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cJoin"><code>\Join</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ck-_0028ogonek_0029"><code>\k <span class="roman">(ogonek)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ckappa"><code>\kappa</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cker"><code>\ker</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ckill"><code>\kill</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cl-_0028l_0029"><code>\l (&#322;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cL-_0028L_0029"><code>\L (&#321;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabel"><code>\label</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clabel">\label</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelenumi"><code>\labelenumi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelenumii"><code>\labelenumii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelenumiii"><code>\labelenumiii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelenumiv"><code>\labelenumiv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelitemi"><code>\labelitemi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelitemii"><code>\labelitemii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelitemiii"><code>\labelitemiii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelitemiv"><code>\labelitemiv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelsep"><code>\labelsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelwidth"><code>\labelwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLambda"><code>\Lambda</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clambda"><code>\lambda</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cland"><code>\land</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clangle"><code>\langle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clarge"><code>\large</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLarge"><code>\Large</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLARGE"><code>\LARGE</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLaTeX"><code>\LaTeX</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLaTeXe"><code>\LaTeXe</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clbrace"><code>\lbrace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clbrack"><code>\lbrack</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clceil"><code>\lceil</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cldots"><code>\ldots</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Dots">Dots</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cldots-1"><code>\ldots</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cle"><code>\le</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleadsto"><code>\leadsto</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleft"><code>\left</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">\left &amp; \right</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLeftarrow"><code>\Leftarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftarrow"><code>\leftarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clefteqn"><code>\lefteqn</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftharpoondown"><code>\leftharpoondown</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftharpoonup"><code>\leftharpoonup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmargin"><code>\leftmargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmargin-1"><code>\leftmargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmargini"><code>\leftmargini</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmarginii"><code>\leftmarginii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmarginiii"><code>\leftmarginiii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmarginiv"><code>\leftmarginiv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmarginv"><code>\leftmarginv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmarginvi"><code>\leftmarginvi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLeftrightarrow"><code>\Leftrightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftrightarrow"><code>\leftrightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleq"><code>\leq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clfloor"><code>\lfloor</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clg"><code>\lg</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clhd"><code>\lhd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clim"><code>\lim</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005climinf"><code>\liminf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005climsup"><code>\limsup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cline"><code>\line</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clinebreak"><code>\linebreak</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">\linebreak &amp; \nolinebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clinespread"><code>\linespread</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clinethickness"><code>\linethickness</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clinewidth"><code>\linewidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clinewidth-1"><code>\linewidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clistoffigures"><code>\listoffigures</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clistoftables"><code>\listoftables</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clistparindent"><code>\listparindent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cll"><code>\ll</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cln"><code>\ln</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clnot"><code>\lnot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLoadClass"><code>\LoadClass</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLoadClassWithOptions"><code>\LoadClassWithOptions</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clocation"><code>\location</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clocation">\location</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clog"><code>\log</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clongleftarrow"><code>\longleftarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clongleftrightarrow"><code>\longleftrightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clongmapsto"><code>\longmapsto</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clongrightarrow"><code>\longrightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clor"><code>\lor</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clq"><code>\lq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmainmatter"><code>\mainmatter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmakebox"><code>\makebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmakebox-_0028for-picture_0029"><code>\makebox <span class="roman">(for <code>picture</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmakeglossary"><code>\makeglossary</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glossaries">Glossaries</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmakeglossary-1"><code>\makeglossary</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glossaries">Glossaries</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmakeindex"><code>\makeindex</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmakelabel"><code>\makelabel</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmakelabels"><code>\makelabels</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmaketitle"><code>\maketitle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmapsto"><code>\mapsto</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginpar"><code>\marginpar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Marginal-notes">Marginal notes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginparpush"><code>\marginparpush</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginparpush-1"><code>\marginparpush</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginparpush-2"><code>\marginparpush</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Marginal-notes">Marginal notes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginparsep"><code>\marginparsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Marginal-notes">Marginal notes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginparwidth"><code>\marginparwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginparwidth-1"><code>\marginparwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginparwidth-2"><code>\marginparwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Marginal-notes">Marginal notes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginsep"><code>\marginsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginsep-1"><code>\marginsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarkboth_007bleft_002dhead_007d_007bright_002dhead_007d"><code>\markboth{<var>left-head</var>}{<var>right-head</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarkright_007bright_007d"><code>\markright{<var>right</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathbf"><code>\mathbf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathcal"><code>\mathcal</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathdollar"><code>\mathdollar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathnormal"><code>\mathnormal</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathparagraph"><code>\mathparagraph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathring"><code>\mathring</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathrm"><code>\mathrm</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathsection"><code>\mathsection</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathsf"><code>\mathsf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathsterling"><code>\mathsterling</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathtt"><code>\mathtt</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathunderscore"><code>\mathunderscore</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathversion"><code>\mathversion</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmax"><code>\max</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmbox"><code>\mbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmdseries"><code>\mdseries</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmedskip"><code>\medskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmedskipamount"><code>\medskipamount</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmedspace"><code>\medspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmho"><code>\mho</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmid"><code>\mid</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmin"><code>\min</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmodels"><code>\models</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmonth"><code>\month</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear">\day &amp; \month &amp; \year</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmp"><code>\mp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmu"><code>\mu</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmulticolumn"><code>\multicolumn</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmultiput"><code>\multiput</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmultiput">\multiput</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnabla"><code>\nabla</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cname"><code>\name</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cname">\name</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnatural"><code>\natural</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cne"><code>\ne</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnearrow"><code>\nearrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cNeedsTeXFormat"><code>\NeedsTeXFormat</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cneg"><code>\neg</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnegthinspace"><code>\negthinspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnegthinspace-1"><code>\negthinspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cneq"><code>\neq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewcommand"><code>\newcommand</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewcounter"><code>\newcounter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewenvironment"><code>\newenvironment</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment &amp; \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewfont"><code>\newfont</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewglossaryentry"><code>\newglossaryentry</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewglossaryentry">\newglossaryentry</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewlength"><code>\newlength</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewline"><code>\newline</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewline">\newline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cNEWLINE">\NEWLINE</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029">\(SPACE)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewpage"><code>\newpage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewsavebox"><code>\newsavebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewtheorem"><code>\newtheorem</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewtie"><code>\newtie</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cng"><code>\ng</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cNG"><code>\NG</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cni"><code>\ni</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnocite"><code>\nocite</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnocite">\nocite</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnocorr"><code>\nocorr</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnocorrlist"><code>\nocorrlist</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnofiles"><code>\nofiles</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnofiles">\nofiles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnoindent"><code>\noindent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent">\indent &amp; \noindent</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnolinebreak"><code>\nolinebreak</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">\linebreak &amp; \nolinebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnonfrenchspacing"><code>\nonfrenchspacing</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing">\frenchspacing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnonumber"><code>\nonumber</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnopagebreak"><code>\nopagebreak</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak &amp; \nopagebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnormalfont"><code>\normalfont</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnormalmarginpar"><code>\normalmarginpar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Marginal-notes">Marginal notes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnormalsfcodes"><code>\normalsfcodes</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnormalsfcodes">\normalsfcodes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnormalsize"><code>\normalsize</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnot"><code>\not</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnotin"><code>\notin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnu"><code>\nu</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnwarrow"><code>\nwarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005co-_0028o_0029"><code>\o (&oslash;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cO-_0028O_0029"><code>\O (&Oslash;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cobeycr"><code>\obeycr</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">\obeycr &amp; \restorecr</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coddsidemargin"><code>\oddsidemargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coddsidemargin-1"><code>\oddsidemargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coddsidemargin-2"><code>\oddsidemargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005codot"><code>\odot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coe-_0028oe_0029"><code>\oe (&oelig;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cOE-_0028OE_0029"><code>\OE (&OElig;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coint"><code>\oint</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coldstylenums"><code>\oldstylenums</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cOmega"><code>\Omega</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005comega"><code>\omega</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cominus"><code>\ominus</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005conecolumn"><code>\onecolumn</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005copening"><code>\opening</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005copening">\opening</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coplus"><code>\oplus</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cOptionNotUsed"><code>\OptionNotUsed</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coslash"><code>\oslash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cotimes"><code>\otimes</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coval"><code>\oval</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005coval">\oval</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coverbrace_007bmath_007d"><code>\overbrace{<var>math</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining">Over- and Underlining</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coverline_007btext_007d"><code>\overline{<var>text</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining">Over- and Underlining</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cowns"><code>\owns</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cP"><code>\P</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPackageError"><code>\PackageError</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPackageInfo"><code>\PackageInfo</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPackageInfoNoLine"><code>\PackageInfoNoLine</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPackageWarning"><code>\PackageWarning</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPackageWarningNoLine"><code>\PackageWarningNoLine</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpagebreak"><code>\pagebreak</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak &amp; \nopagebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpagenumbering"><code>\pagenumbering</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpageref"><code>\pageref</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpageref">\pageref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpagestyle"><code>\pagestyle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpaperheight"><code>\paperheight</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpaperheight-1"><code>\paperheight</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpaperwidth"><code>\paperwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpaperwidth-1"><code>\paperwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpar"><code>\par</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpar">\par</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparagraph"><code>\paragraph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparagraph-1"><code>\paragraph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparallel"><code>\parallel</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparbox"><code>\parbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cparbox">\parbox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparindent"><code>\parindent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparindent-1"><code>\parindent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent">\indent &amp; \noindent</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparindent-2"><code>\parindent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent &amp; \parskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparsep"><code>\parsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparskip"><code>\parskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent &amp; \parskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparskip-example"><code>\parskip <span class="roman">example</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpart"><code>\part</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpart-1"><code>\part</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpart">\part</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpartial"><code>\partial</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpartopsep"><code>\partopsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPassOptionsToClass"><code>\PassOptionsToClass</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPassOptionsToPackage"><code>\PassOptionsToPackage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpdfpageheight"><code>\pdfpageheight</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpdfpagewidth"><code>\pdfpagewidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cperp"><code>\perp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cphi"><code>\phi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPi"><code>\Pi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpi"><code>\pi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpm"><code>\pm</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpmod"><code>\pmod</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpoptabs"><code>\poptabs</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpoptabs-1"><code>\poptabs</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpounds"><code>\pounds</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPr"><code>\Pr</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprec"><code>\prec</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpreceq"><code>\preceq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprime"><code>\prime</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprintglossaries"><code>\printglossaries</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glossaries">Glossaries</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprintglossaries-1"><code>\printglossaries</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glossaries">Glossaries</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprintindex"><code>\printindex</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprintindex">\printindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprintindex-1"><code>\printindex</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprintindex">\printindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cProcessOptions"><code>\ProcessOptions</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cProcessOptions_002a"><code>\ProcessOptions*</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprod"><code>\prod</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpropto"><code>\propto</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprovidecommand"><code>\providecommand</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand">\providecommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cProvidesClass"><code>\ProvidesClass</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cProvidesFile"><code>\ProvidesFile</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cProvidesPackage"><code>\ProvidesPackage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cps"><code>\ps</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cps">\ps</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPsi"><code>\Psi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpsi"><code>\psi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpushtabs"><code>\pushtabs</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cput"><code>\put</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cput">\put</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cqbezier"><code>\qbezier</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cqbezier">\qbezier</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cqquad"><code>\qquad</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cqquad-1"><code>\qquad</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad">\enspace &amp; \quad &amp; \qquad</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cquad"><code>\quad</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cquad-1"><code>\quad</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad">\enspace &amp; \quad &amp; \qquad</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cquotedblbase-_0028_201e_0029"><code>\quotedblbase <span class="roman">(&bdquo;)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cquotesinglbase-_0028_201a_0029"><code>\quotesinglbase <span class="roman">(&sbquo;)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cr-_0028ring-accent_0029"><code>\r <span class="roman">(ring accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005craggedbottom"><code>\raggedbottom</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005craggedleft"><code>\raggedleft</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005craggedright"><code>\raggedright</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005craisebox"><code>\raisebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craisebox">\raisebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crangle"><code>\rangle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crbrace"><code>\rbrace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crbrack"><code>\rbrack</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crceil"><code>\rceil</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cRe"><code>\Re</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cref"><code>\ref</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005creflectbox"><code>\reflectbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cscalebox">\scalebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crefstepcounter"><code>\refstepcounter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crenewenvironment"><code>\renewenvironment</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment &amp; \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cRequirePackage"><code>\RequirePackage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cRequirePackageWithOptions"><code>\RequirePackageWithOptions</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cresizebox"><code>\resizebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cresizebox">\resizebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crestorecr"><code>\restorecr</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">\obeycr &amp; \restorecr</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crestriction"><code>\restriction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crevemptyset"><code>\revemptyset</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005creversemarginpar"><code>\reversemarginpar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Marginal-notes">Marginal notes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crfloor"><code>\rfloor</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crhd"><code>\rhd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crho"><code>\rho</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cright"><code>\right</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">\left &amp; \right</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cRightarrow"><code>\Rightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crightarrow"><code>\rightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crightharpoondown"><code>\rightharpoondown</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crightharpoonup"><code>\rightharpoonup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crightleftharpoons"><code>\rightleftharpoons</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crightmargin"><code>\rightmargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crm"><code>\rm</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crmfamily"><code>\rmfamily</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005croman_007bcounter_007d"><code>\roman{<var>counter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cRoman_007bcounter_007d"><code>\Roman{<var>counter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crotatebox"><code>\rotatebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crotatebox">\rotatebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crq"><code>\rq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crule"><code>\rule</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crule">\rule</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cS"><code>\S</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csavebox"><code>\savebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox &amp; \savebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csbox"><code>\sbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox &amp; \savebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csc"><code>\sc</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cscalebox"><code>\scalebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cscalebox">\scalebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cscriptsize"><code>\scriptsize</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cscshape"><code>\scshape</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csearrow"><code>\searrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csec"><code>\sec</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csection"><code>\section</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csection-1"><code>\section</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csection">\section</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cseename"><code>\seename</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cselectfont"><code>\selectfont</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csetcounter"><code>\setcounter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csetlength"><code>\setlength</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csetlength">\setlength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csetminus"><code>\setminus</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csettodepth"><code>\settodepth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csettoheight"><code>\settoheight</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csettowidth"><code>\settowidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csf"><code>\sf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csffamily"><code>\sffamily</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csharp"><code>\sharp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cshortstack"><code>\shortstack</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cSigma"><code>\Sigma</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csigma"><code>\sigma</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csignature"><code>\signature</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csignature">\signature</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csim"><code>\sim</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csimeq"><code>\simeq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csin"><code>\sin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csinh"><code>\sinh</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csl"><code>\sl</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csloppy"><code>\sloppy</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">\fussy &amp; \sloppy</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cslshape"><code>\slshape</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csmall"><code>\small</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csmallint"><code>\smallint</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csmallskip"><code>\smallskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csmallskipamount"><code>\smallskipamount</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csmile"><code>\smile</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cSPACE">\SPACE</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029">\(SPACE)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cspacefactor"><code>\spacefactor</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cspacefactor">\spacefactor</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cspadesuit"><code>\spadesuit</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqcap"><code>\sqcap</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqcup"><code>\sqcup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqrt"><code>\sqrt</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csqrt">\sqrt</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqsubset"><code>\sqsubset</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqsubseteq"><code>\sqsubseteq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqsupset"><code>\sqsupset</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqsupseteq"><code>\sqsupseteq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005css-_0028ss_0029"><code>\ss (&szlig;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cSS-_0028SS_0029"><code>\SS (SS)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstackrel"><code>\stackrel</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstackrel">\stackrel</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstar"><code>\star</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstepcounter"><code>\stepcounter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstop"><code>\stop</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Recovering-from-errors">Recovering from errors</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstrut"><code>\strut</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstrut">\strut</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csubparagraph"><code>\subparagraph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csubparagraph-1"><code>\subparagraph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csubsection"><code>\subsection</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csubsection-1"><code>\subsection</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsection">\subsection</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csubset"><code>\subset</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csubseteq"><code>\subseteq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csubsubsection"><code>\subsubsection</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csucc"><code>\succ</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csucceq"><code>\succeq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csum"><code>\sum</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csup"><code>\sup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csuppressfloats"><code>\suppressfloats</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csupset"><code>\supset</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csupseteq"><code>\supseteq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csurd"><code>\surd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cswarrow"><code>\swarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csymbol"><code>\symbol</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Symbols-by-font-position">Symbols by font position</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ct-_0028tie_002dafter-accent_0029"><code>\t <span class="roman">(tie-after accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cTAB">\TAB</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0028SPACE_0029">\(SPACE)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctabbingsep"><code>\tabbingsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctabcolsep"><code>\tabcolsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctableofcontents"><code>\tableofcontents</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctan"><code>\tan</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctanh"><code>\tanh</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctau"><code>\tau</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctelephone"><code>\telephone</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctelephone">\telephone</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cTeX"><code>\TeX</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextascendercompwordmark"><code>\textascendercompwordmark</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextasciicircum"><code>\textasciicircum</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextasciitilde"><code>\textasciitilde</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextasteriskcentered"><code>\textasteriskcentered</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbackslash"><code>\textbackslash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbackslash-1"><code>\textbackslash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbar"><code>\textbar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbardbl"><code>\textbardbl</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbf"><code>\textbf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbigcircle"><code>\textbigcircle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbraceleft"><code>\textbraceleft</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbraceright"><code>\textbraceright</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbullet"><code>\textbullet</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextcapitalcompwordmark"><code>\textcapitalcompwordmark</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextcircled_007bletter_007d"><code>\textcircled{<var>letter</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextcompwordmark"><code>\textcompwordmark</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextcopyright"><code>\textcopyright</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextdagger"><code>\textdagger</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextdaggerdbl"><code>\textdaggerdbl</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextdollar-_0028or-_005c_0024_0029"><code>\textdollar <span class="roman">(or <code>\$</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextellipsis"><code>\textellipsis</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextemdash-_0028or-_002d_002d_002d_0029"><code>\textemdash <span class="roman">(or <code>---</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextendash-_0028or-_002d_002d_0029"><code>\textendash <span class="roman">(or <code>--</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctexteuro"><code>\texteuro</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextexclamdown-_0028or-_0021_0060_0029"><code>\textexclamdown <span class="roman">(or <code>!`</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextfloatsep"><code>\textfloatsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextfloatsep-1"><code>\textfloatsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextfraction"><code>\textfraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextfraction-1"><code>\textfraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextgreater"><code>\textgreater</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextheight"><code>\textheight</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextheight-1"><code>\textheight</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextit"><code>\textit</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextleftarrow"><code>\textleftarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextless"><code>\textless</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextmd"><code>\textmd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextnormal"><code>\textnormal</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextordfeminine"><code>\textordfeminine</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextordmasculine"><code>\textordmasculine</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextparagraph"><code>\textparagraph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextperiodcentered"><code>\textperiodcentered</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquestiondown-_0028or-_003f_0060_0029"><code>\textquestiondown <span class="roman">(or <code>?`</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotedblleft-_0028or-_0060_0060_0029"><code>\textquotedblleft <span class="roman">(or <code>``</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotedblright-_0028or-_0027_0027_0029"><code>\textquotedblright <span class="roman">(or <code>''</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquoteleft-_0028or-_0060_0029"><code>\textquoteleft <span class="roman">(or <code>`</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquoteright-_0028or-_0027_0029"><code>\textquoteright <span class="roman">(or <code>'</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotesingle"><code>\textquotesingle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotestraightbase"><code>\textquotestraightbase</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotestraightdblbase"><code>\textquotestraightdblbase</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextregistered"><code>\textregistered</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextrightarrow"><code>\textrightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextrm"><code>\textrm</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextsc"><code>\textsc</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextsection"><code>\textsection</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextsf"><code>\textsf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextsl"><code>\textsl</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextsterling"><code>\textsterling</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextthreequartersemdash"><code>\textthreequartersemdash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctexttrademark"><code>\texttrademark</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctexttt"><code>\texttt</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctexttwelveudash"><code>\texttwelveudash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextunderscore"><code>\textunderscore</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextup"><code>\textup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextvisiblespace"><code>\textvisiblespace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextwidth"><code>\textwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextwidth-1"><code>\textwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cth-_0028th_0029"><code>\th (&thorn;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cTH-_0028TH_0029"><code>\TH (&THORN;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthanks_007btext_007d"><code>\thanks{<var>text</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctheta"><code>\theta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthicklines"><code>\thicklines</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthicklines">\thicklines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthickspace"><code>\thickspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthinlines"><code>\thinlines</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthinlines">\thinlines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthinspace"><code>\thinspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthinspace-1"><code>\thinspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthispagestyle"><code>\thispagestyle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctilde"><code>\tilde</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctimes"><code>\times</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctiny"><code>\tiny</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctitle_007btext_007d"><code>\title{<var>text</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cto"><code>\to</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctoday"><code>\today</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctop"><code>\top</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctopfraction"><code>\topfraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctopfraction-1"><code>\topfraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctopmargin"><code>\topmargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctopsep"><code>\topsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctopskip"><code>\topskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctopskip-1"><code>\topskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctriangle"><code>\triangle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctriangleleft"><code>\triangleleft</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctriangleright"><code>\triangleright</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctt"><code>\tt</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cttfamily"><code>\ttfamily</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctwocolumn"><code>\twocolumn</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctypein"><code>\typein</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctypein">\typein</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctypeout"><code>\typeout</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctypeout">\typeout</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cu-_0028breve-accent_0029"><code>\u <span class="roman">(breve accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunboldmath"><code>\unboldmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunboldmath-1"><code>\unboldmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunderbar"><code>\underbar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunderbrace_007bmath_007d"><code>\underbrace{<var>math</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining">Over- and Underlining</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunderline_007btext_007d"><code>\underline{<var>text</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining">Over- and Underlining</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunitlength"><code>\unitlength</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunlhd"><code>\unlhd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunrhd"><code>\unrhd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cUparrow"><code>\Uparrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cuparrow"><code>\uparrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cUpdownarrow"><code>\Updownarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cupdownarrow"><code>\updownarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cupharpoonright"><code>\upharpoonright</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cuplus"><code>\uplus</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cupshape"><code>\upshape</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cUpsilon"><code>\Upsilon</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cupsilon"><code>\upsilon</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cusebox"><code>\usebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cusebox">\usebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cusecounter"><code>\usecounter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cusefont"><code>\usefont</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cusepackage"><code>\usepackage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cv-_0028breve-accent_0029"><code>\v <span class="roman">(breve accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvalue"><code>\value</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvalue">\value</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvanothing"><code>\vanothing</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvarepsilon"><code>\varepsilon</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvarphi"><code>\varphi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvarpi"><code>\varpi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvarrho"><code>\varrho</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvarsigma"><code>\varsigma</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvartheta"><code>\vartheta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvdash"><code>\vdash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvdots"><code>\vdots</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Dots">Dots</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvec"><code>\vec</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvector"><code>\vector</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvector">\vector</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvee"><code>\vee</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cverb"><code>\verb</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cVert"><code>\Vert</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvert"><code>\vert</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvfill"><code>\vfill</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvfill">\vfill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvline"><code>\vline</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvline">\vline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvspace"><code>\vspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvspace">\vspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cwedge"><code>\wedge</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cwidehat"><code>\widehat</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cwidetilde"><code>\widetilde</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cwp"><code>\wp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cwr"><code>\wr</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cXi"><code>\Xi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cxi"><code>\xi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cyear"><code>\year</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear">\day &amp; \month &amp; \year</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005czeta"><code>\zeta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-_0028for-center_0029"><code>\\ <span class="roman">(for <code>center</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#center">center</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-_0028for-eqnarray_0029"><code>\\ <span class="roman">(for <code>eqnarray</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-_0028for-flushright_0029"><code>\\ (for <code>flushright</code>)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-_0028for-_005cshortstack-objects_0029"><code>\\ <span class="roman">(for <code>\shortstack</code> objects)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-_0028tabbing_0029"><code>\\ <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-for-flushleft"><code>\\ <span class="roman">for <code>flushleft</code></span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-for-letters"><code>\\ <span class="roman">for letters</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Letters">Letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-for-tabular"><code>\\ <span class="roman">for <code>tabular</code></span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-for-verse"><code>\\ <span class="roman">for <code>verse</code></span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verse">verse</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-for-_005cauthor"><code>\\ <span class="roman">for <code>\author</code></span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-for-_005ctitle"><code>\\ <span class="roman">for <code>\title</code></span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-force-line-break"><code>\\ <span class="roman">force line break</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c_002a-_0028for-eqnarray_0029"><code>\\* <span class="roman">(for <code>eqnarray</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005e"><code>\^</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005e-_0028circumflex-accent_0029"><code>\^ <span class="roman">(circumflex accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005f"><code>\_</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0060-_0028grave-accent_0029"><code>\` <span class="roman">(grave accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029"><code>\` <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_007b"><code>\{</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_007c"><code>\|</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_007d"><code>\}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_007e"><code>\~</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_007e-_0028tilde-accent_0029"><code>\~ <span class="roman">(tilde accent)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_symbol-9">^</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005e"><code>^</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">Subscripts &amp; superscripts</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_symbol-10">_</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005f"><code>_</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">Subscripts &amp; superscripts</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_symbol-11">`</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_0060see_0027-and-_0060see-also_0027-index-entries">&lsquo;see&rsquo; and &lsquo;see also&rsquo; index entries</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_symbol-12">{</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_007b_002e_002e_002e_007d-for-required-arguments"><code>{...} <span class="roman">for required arguments</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax">LaTeX command syntax</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_symbol-13">~</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_007e"><code>~</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_007e">~</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-A">A</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-a4paper-option"><code>a4paper <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-a5paper-option"><code>a5paper <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-abstract-environment"><code><code>abstract</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#abstract">abstract</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-abstracts">abstracts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#abstract">abstract</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-accents">accents</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-accents_002c-mathematical">accents, mathematical</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-accessing-any-character-of-a-font">accessing any character of a font</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Symbols-by-font-position">Symbols by font position</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acronyms_002c-list-of">acronyms, list of</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glossaries">Glossaries</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acute-accent">acute accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acute-accent_002c-math">acute accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-additional-packages_002c-loading">additional packages, loading</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ae-ligature">ae ligature</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-algorithm2e-package"><code>algorithm2e</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-align-environment_002c-from-amsmath">align <span class="roman">environment, from <code>amsmath</code></span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-aligning-equations">aligning equations</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-alignment-via-tabbing">alignment via tabbing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsfonts-package"><code>amsfonts</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package"><code>amsmath</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package-1"><code>amsmath</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package-2"><code>amsmath</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package-3"><code>amsmath</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package-4"><code>amsmath</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package-5"><code>amsmath</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package-6"><code>amsmath</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Dots">Dots</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package-7"><code>amsmath</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package-8"><code>amsmath</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package-9"><code>amsmath</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">Colon character &amp; \colon</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package-10"><code>amsmath</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">Colon character &amp; \colon</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsmath-package_002c-replacing-eqnarray">amsmath <span class="roman">package, replacing <code>eqnarray</code></span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsthm-package"><code>amsthm</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-amsthm-package-1"><code>amsthm</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crule">\rule</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-appendices">appendices</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cappendix">\appendix</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-appendix">appendix</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cappendix">\appendix</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-appendix-package"><code>appendix</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cappendix">\appendix</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-aring">aring</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-array-_0028package_0029-package"><code>array (package)</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-array-environment"><code><code>array</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-arrays_002c-math">arrays, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-arrow_002c-left_002c-in-text">arrow, left, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-arrow_002c-right_002c-in-text">arrow, right, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-article-class"><code>article <span class="roman">class</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ascender-height">ascender height</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ASCII-circumflex_002c-in-text">ASCII circumflex, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ASCII-tilde_002c-in-text">ASCII tilde, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-asterisk_002c-centered_002c-in-text">asterisk, centered, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Asymptote-package"><code>Asymptote</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Asymptote-package-1"><code>Asymptote</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstrut">\strut</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Asymptote-package-2"><code>Asymptote</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-at-clause_002c-in-font-definitions">at clause, in font definitions</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-at_002dsign"><code>at-sign</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040">\@</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-author_002c-for-titlepage">author, for titlepage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-auxiliary-file">auxiliary file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-B">B</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-b5paper-option"><code>b5paper <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-babel-package"><code>babel</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cchapter">\chapter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-babel-package-1"><code>babel</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-babel-package-2"><code>babel</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-babel-package-3"><code>babel</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-babel-package-4"><code>babel</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-babel-package-5"><code>babel</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-background_002c-colored">background, colored</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colored-pages">Colored pages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-backslash_002c-in-text">backslash, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bar_002c-double-vertical_002c-in-text">bar, double vertical, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bar_002c-vertical_002c-in-text">bar, vertical, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bar_002dover-accent">bar-over accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bar_002dover-accent_002c-math">bar-over accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bar_002dunder-accent">bar-under accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-basics-of-LaTeX">basics of LaTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Overview">Overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-beamer-template-and-class"><code>beamer</code> template and class</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#beamer-template">beamer template</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-beginning-of-document-hook">beginning of document hook</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cAtBeginDocument">\AtBeginDocument</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bibliography-format_002c-open">bibliography format, open</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bibliography_002c-creating-_0028automatically_0029">bibliography, creating (automatically)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bibliography_002c-creating-_0028manually_0029">bibliography, creating (manually)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bibTeX_002c-using">bibTeX, using</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-big-circle-symbols_002c-in-text">big circle symbols, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Big-point">Big point</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bigfoot-package"><code>bigfoot</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes-of-footnotes">Footnotes of footnotes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-black-boxes_002c-omitting">black boxes, omitting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-blackboard-bold">blackboard bold</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Blackboard-bold">Blackboard bold</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bm-package"><code>bm</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bold-font">bold font</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bold-math">bold math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bold-typewriter_002c-avoiding">bold typewriter, avoiding</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-boldface-mathematics">boldface mathematics</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-book-class"><code>book <span class="roman">class</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-book_002c-back-matter">book, back matter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-book_002c-end-matter">book, end matter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-book_002c-front-matter">book, front matter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-book_002c-main-matter">book, main matter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bottomnumber"><code>bottomnumber</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bottomnumber-1"><code>bottomnumber</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-box">box</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-box_002c-allocating-new">box, allocating new</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-box_002c-colored">box, colored</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colored-boxes">Colored boxes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-box_002c-save">box, save</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox">\sbox &amp; \savebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-box_002c-use-saved-box">box, use saved box</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cusebox">\usebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-boxes">boxes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Boxes">Boxes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bp"><code>bp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-brace_002c-left_002c-in-text">brace, left, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-brace_002c-right_002c-in-text">brace, right, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-breaking-lines">breaking lines</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Line-breaking">Line breaking</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-breaking-pages">breaking pages</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-breaking">Page breaking</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-breaks_002c-multiplication-discretionary">breaks, multiplication discretionary</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_002a">\*</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-breve-accent">breve accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-breve-accent_002c-math">breve accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bug-reporting">bug reporting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bullet-lists">bullet lists</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bullet-symbol">bullet symbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bullet_002c-in-text">bullet, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bulleted-lists">bulleted lists</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-C">C</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-calligraphic-fonts">calligraphic fonts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Calligraphic">Calligraphic</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-calligraphic-letters-for-math">calligraphic letters for math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cap-height">cap height</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-caron-accent">caron accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-catcode">catcode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-category-code_002c-character">category code, character</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cc"><code>cc</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cc-list_002c-in-letters">cc list, in letters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccc">\cc</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cedilla-accent">cedilla accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-center-environment"><code><code>center</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#center">center</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-centered-asterisk_002c-in-text">centered asterisk, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-centered-equations">centered equations</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-centered-period_002c-in-text">centered period, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-centering-text_002c-declaration-for">centering text, declaration for</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccentering">\centering</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-centering-text_002c-environment-for">centering text, environment for</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#center">center</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Centimeter">Centimeter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-chapter">chapter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-chapter-1">chapter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cchapter">\chapter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-character-category-code">character category code</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-character_002c-invisible">character, invisible</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-characters_002c-accented">characters, accented</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-characters_002c-case-of">characters, case of</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Upper-and-lower-case">Upper and lower case</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-characters_002c-non_002dEnglish">characters, non-English</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-characters_002c-reserved">characters, reserved</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-characters_002c-special">characters, special</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-check-accent">check accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-check-accent_002c-math">check accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Cicero">Cicero</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-circle-symbol_002c-big_002c-in-text">circle symbol, big, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-circled-letter_002c-in-text">circled letter, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-circumflex-accent">circumflex accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-circumflex-accent_002c-math">circumflex accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-circumflex_002c-ASCII_002c-in-text">circumflex, ASCII, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-citation-key">citation key</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-and-package-commands">class and package commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-and-package-difference">class and package difference</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-construction">Class and package construction</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-and-package-structure">class and package structure</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-file-example">class file example</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-file-layout">class file layout</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-options">class options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-options-1">class options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-class-options-2">class options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-classes-of-documents">classes of documents</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cleveref-package"><code>cleveref</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cleveref-package-1"><code>cleveref</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cleveref-package-2"><code>cleveref</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-clock-option-to-slides-class"><code>clock <span class="roman">option to <code>slides</code> class</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-closing-letters">closing letters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclosing">\closing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-closing-quote">closing quote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cm"><code>cm</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-code_002c-typesetting">code, typesetting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-colon-character">colon character</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">Colon character &amp; \colon</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-color">color</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Color">Color</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-color-1">color</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Define-colors">Define colors</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-color-2">color</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colored-text">Colored text</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-color-3">color</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colored-boxes">Colored boxes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-color-4">color</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colored-pages">Colored pages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-color-models">color models</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Color-models">Color models</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-color-package-commands">color package commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Commands-for-color">Commands for color</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-color-package-options">color package options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Color-package-options">Color package options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-color_002c-define">color, define</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Define-colors">Define colors</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-colored-boxes">colored boxes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colored-boxes">Colored boxes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-colored-page">colored page</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colored-pages">Colored pages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-colored-text">colored text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colored-text">Colored text</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-command-line">command line</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line">Command line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-command-syntax">command syntax</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#LaTeX-command-syntax">LaTeX command syntax</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-class-and-package">commands, class and package</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-defining-new-ones">commands, defining new ones</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-defining-new-ones-1">commands, defining new ones</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand">\providecommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-document-class">commands, document class</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-construction">Class and package construction</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-graphics-package">commands, graphics package</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Commands-for-graphics">Commands for graphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-ignore-spaces">commands, ignore spaces</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend">\ignorespaces &amp; \ignorespacesafterend</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-redefining">commands, redefining</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-commands_002c-star_002dvariants">commands, star-variants</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar">\@ifstar</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-composite-word-mark_002c-in-text">composite word mark, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-computer-programs_002c-typesetting">computer programs, typesetting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-configuration_002c-graphics-package">configuration, graphics package</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Graphics-package-configuration">Graphics package configuration</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-contents-file">contents file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-copyright-symbol">copyright symbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-counters_002c-a-list-of">counters, a list of</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Counters">Counters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-counters_002c-defining-new">counters, defining new</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-counters_002c-getting-value-of">counters, getting value of</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvalue">\value</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-counters_002c-printing">counters, printing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-counters_002c-setting">counters, setting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cprotect-package"><code>cprotect</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cprotect-package-1"><code>cprotect</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-creating-pictures">creating pictures</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-creating-tables">creating tables</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#table">table</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-credit-footnote">credit footnote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cross-references">cross references</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cross-references_002c-resolving">cross references, resolving</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cross-referencing-with-page-number">cross referencing with page number</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpageref">\pageref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cross-referencing_002c-symbolic">cross referencing, symbolic</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-CTAN">CTAN</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#CTAN">CTAN</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-currency_002c-dollar">currency, dollar</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-currency_002c-euro">currency, euro</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-D">D</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dagger_002c-double_002c-in-text">dagger, double, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dagger_002c-in-text">dagger, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dagger_002c-in-text-1">dagger, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-DANTE-e_002eV_002e">DANTE e.V.</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#CTAN">CTAN</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-date_002c-for-titlepage">date, for titlepage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-date_002c-today_0027s">date, today&rsquo;s</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-datetime-package"><code>datetime</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dbltopnumber"><code>dbltopnumber</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dbltopnumber-1"><code>dbltopnumber</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dcolumn-package"><code>dcolumn</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dd"><code>dd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-define-color">define color</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Define-colors">Define colors</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-defining-a-new-command">defining a new command</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-defining-a-new-command-1">defining a new command</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand">\providecommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-defining-new-environments">defining new environments</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment &amp; \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-defining-new-fonts">defining new fonts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-defining-new-theorems">defining new theorems</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-definitions">definitions</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Definitions">Definitions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-delimiters_002c-paired">delimiters, paired</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">\left &amp; \right</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-delim_005f0"><code>delim_0</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-delim_005f1"><code>delim_1</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-delim_005f2"><code>delim_2</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-delim_005fn"><code>delim_n</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-delim_005fr"><code>delim_r</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-description"><code>description</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewglossaryentry">\newglossaryentry</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-description-environment"><code><code>description</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-description-lists_002c-creating">description lists, creating</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-design-size_002c-in-font-definitions">design size, in font definitions</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Didot-point">Didot point</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dieresis-accent">dieresis accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-difference-between-class-and-package">difference between class and package</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-construction">Class and package construction</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-discretionary-breaks_002c-multiplication">discretionary breaks, multiplication</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_002a">\*</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-discretionary-hyphenation">discretionary hyphenation</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary">\discretionary</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-display-math-mode">display math mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-displaying-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation">displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &amp; quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-displaying-quoted-text-without-paragraph-indentation">displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &amp; quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-displaymath-environment"><code><code>displaymath</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-displaymath-environment-1"><code><code>displaymath</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-document-class-commands">document class commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-construction">Class and package construction</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-document-class-options">document class options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-document-class_002c-defined">document class, defined</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Starting-and-ending">Starting and ending</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-document-classes">document classes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-document-environment"><code><code>document</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#document">document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-document-templates">document templates</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-templates">Document templates</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dollar-sign">dollar sign</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dot-accent">dot accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dot-over-accent_002c-math">dot over accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dot_002dover-accent">dot-over accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dot_002dunder-accent">dot-under accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dotless-i">dotless i</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dotless-i_002c-math">dotless i, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dotless-j">dotless j</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dotless-j_002c-math">dotless j, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dots">dots</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Dots">Dots</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-double-angle-quotation-marks">double angle quotation marks</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-double-dagger_002c-in-text">double dagger, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-double-dagger_002c-in-text-1">double dagger, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-double-dot-accent_002c-math">double dot accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-double-guillemets">double guillemets</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-double-left-quote">double left quote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-double-low_002d9-quotation-mark">double low-9 quotation mark</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-double-quote_002c-straight-base">double quote, straight base</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-double-right-quote">double right quote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-double-spacing">double spacing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-double-vertical-bar_002c-in-text">double vertical bar, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-doublestruck">doublestruck</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Blackboard-bold">Blackboard bold</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-draft-option"><code>draft <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dvipdfmx-command"><code>dvipdfmx <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dvips-command"><code>dvips <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dvitype-command"><code>dvitype <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-E">E</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-e_002ddash">e-dash</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-e_002dTeX">e-TeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ellipses">ellipses</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Dots">Dots</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ellipsis">ellipsis</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-em">em</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-em-1"><code>em</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-em_002ddash">em-dash</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-em_002ddash_002c-three_002dquarters">em-dash, three-quarters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-em_002ddash_002c-two_002dthirds">em-dash, two-thirds</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-emphasis">emphasis</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-enclosure-list">enclosure list</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cencl">\encl</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-end-of-document-hook">end of document hook</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cAtEndDocument">\AtEndDocument</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ending-and-starting">ending and starting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Starting-and-ending">Starting and ending</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-engines_002c-TeX">engines, TeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-enlarge-current-page">enlarge current page</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-enumerate-environment"><code><code>enumerate</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-enumitem-package"><code>enumitem</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment">environment</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Starting-and-ending">Starting and ending</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-abstract"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>abstract</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#abstract">abstract</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-array"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>array</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-center"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>center</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#center">center</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-description"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>description</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-displaymath"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>displaymath</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-displaymath-1"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>displaymath</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-document"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>document</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#document">document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-enumerate"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>enumerate</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-eqnarray"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>eqnarray</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-equation"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>equation</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-equation-1"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>equation</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-figure"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>figure</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-filecontents"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>filecontents</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-filecontents_002a"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>filecontents*</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-flushleft"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>flushleft</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-flushright"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>flushright</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-itemize"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>itemize</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-letter"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>letter</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#letter">letter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-list"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>list</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-math"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>math</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#math">math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-math-1"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>math</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-minipage"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>minipage</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-picture"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>picture</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-quotation"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>quotation</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &amp; quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-quote"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>quote</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &amp; quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-tabbing"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>tabbing</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-table"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>table</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#table">table</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-tabular"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>tabular</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-thebibliography"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>thebibliography</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-theorem"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>theorem</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-theorem_002dlike">environment, theorem-like</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-titlepage"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>titlepage</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-verbatim"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>verbatim</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environment_002c-verse"><code><span class="roman">environment</span>, <code>verse</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verse">verse</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environments">environments</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Environments">Environments</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-environments_002c-defining">environments, defining</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment &amp; \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-envlab-package"><code>envlab</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-EPS-files">EPS files</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Graphics-package-configuration">Graphics package configuration</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-EPS-files-1">EPS files</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-eqnarray-environment"><code><code>eqnarray</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equation-environment"><code><code>equation</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equation-environment-1"><code><code>equation</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equation-number_002c-cross-referencing">equation number, cross referencing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equation-numbers_002c-left-vs_002e-right">equation numbers, left vs. right</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equation-numbers_002c-omitting">equation numbers, omitting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equations_002c-aligning">equations, aligning</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equations_002c-environment-for">equations, environment for</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equations_002c-flush-left-vs_002e-centered">equations, flush left vs. centered</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-es_002dzet-German-letter">es-zet German letter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-etex-command"><code>etex <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-eth_002c-Icelandic-letter">eth, Icelandic letter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-etoolbox-package"><code>etoolbox</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-euro-symbol">euro symbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-eurosym-package"><code>eurosym</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ex">ex</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ex-1"><code>ex</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-exclamation-point_002c-upside_002ddown">exclamation point, upside-down</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-executivepaper-option"><code>executivepaper <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-exponent">exponent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">Subscripts &amp; superscripts</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-extended-Latin">extended Latin</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-external-files_002c-writing">external files, writing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-F">F</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-families_002c-of-fonts">families, of fonts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fancyhdr-package"><code>fancyhdr</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fancyhdr-package-1"><code>fancyhdr</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fancyvrb-package"><code>fancyvrb</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fancyvrb-package-1"><code>fancyvrb</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-feminine-ordinal-symbol">feminine ordinal symbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-figure-environment"><code><code>figure</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-figure-number_002c-cross-referencing">figure number, cross referencing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-figures_002c-footnotes-in">figures, footnotes in</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-figures_002c-inserting">figures, inserting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-file_002c-root">file, root</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-filecontents-environment"><code><code>filecontents</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-filecontents_002a-environment"><code><code>filecontents*</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-final-option"><code>final <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-first_002dlatex_002ddoc-document"><code>first-latex-doc <span class="roman">document</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fixed_002dwidth-font">fixed-width font</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flafter-package"><code>flafter</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fleqn-option"><code>fleqn <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-float-package"><code>float</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-float-page">float page</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flush-left-equations">flush left equations</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flushing-floats-and-starting-a-page">flushing floats and starting a page</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flushleft-environment"><code><code>flushleft</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flushright-environment"><code><code>flushright</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-font-catalogue">font catalogue</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-font-commands_002c-low_002dlevel">font commands, low-level</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-font-size">font size</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-font-sizes">font sizes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-font-styles">font styles</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-font-symbols_002c-by-number">font symbols, by number</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Symbols-by-font-position">Symbols by font position</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fonts">fonts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Fonts">Fonts</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fonts_002c-new-commands-for">fonts, new commands for</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fonts_002c-script">fonts, script</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Calligraphic">Calligraphic</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footer-style">footer style</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footer_002c-parameters-for">footer, parameters for</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnote-number_002c-cross-referencing">footnote number, cross referencing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnote-parameters">footnote parameters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnote_002c-in-a-table">footnote, in a table</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes-in-a-table">Footnotes in a table</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnote_002c-in-section-headings">footnote, in section headings</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings">Footnotes in section headings</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnote_002c-of-a-footnote">footnote, of a footnote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes-of-footnotes">Footnotes of footnotes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnotes-in-figures">footnotes in figures</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnotes_002c-creating">footnotes, creating</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Footnotes_002c-in-a-minipage">Footnotes, in a minipage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footnotes_002c-symbols-instead-of-numbers">footnotes, symbols instead of numbers</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-formulas_002c-environment-for">formulas, environment for</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-formulas_002c-math">formulas, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-forward-reference">forward reference</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-forward-references_002c-resolving">forward references, resolving</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fraction">fraction</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrac">\frac</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fragile-commands">fragile commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-frame-rule-width"><code>frame rule width</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-frame_002c-line-width"><code>frame, line width</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-frame_002c-separation-from-contents"><code>frame, separation from contents</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox">\fbox &amp; \framebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-French-quotation-marks">French quotation marks</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-functions_002c-math">functions, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-G">G</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-geometry-package"><code>geometry</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-geometry-package-1"><code>geometry</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-global-options">global options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-global-options-1">global options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-glossaries">glossaries</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glossaries">Glossaries</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-glossary">glossary</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glossaries">Glossaries</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-glossary_002c-entries">glossary, entries</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewglossaryentry">\newglossaryentry</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-glossary_002c-entry-reference">glossary, entry reference</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cgls">\gls</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-glue-register_002c-plain-TeX">glue register, plain TeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-graphics">graphics</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Graphics">Graphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-graphics-1">graphics</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Graphics-package-configuration">Graphics package configuration</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-graphics-2">graphics</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-graphics-package">graphics package</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Graphics">Graphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-graphics-package-1">graphics package</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Graphics-package-configuration">Graphics package configuration</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-graphics-package-2">graphics package</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-graphics-package-commands">graphics package commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Commands-for-graphics">Commands for graphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-graphics-package-options">graphics package options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Graphics-package-options">Graphics package options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-graphics-packages">graphics packages</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-graphics_002c-resizing">graphics, resizing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cscalebox">\scalebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-graphics_002c-resizing-1">graphics, resizing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cresizebox">\resizebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-graphics_002c-scaling">graphics, scaling</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cscalebox">\scalebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-graphics_002c-scaling-1">graphics, scaling</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cresizebox">\resizebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-grave-accent">grave accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-grave-accent_002c-math">grave accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-greater-than-symbol_002c-in-text">greater than symbol, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-greek-letters">greek letters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-group_002c-and-environments">group, and environments</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Environments">Environments</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-group_005fskip"><code>group_skip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-H">H</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hacek-accent_002c-math">h&aacute;&#269;ek accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hacek-accent">hacek accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Halmos-symbol">Halmos symbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crule">\rule</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hat-accent">hat accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hat-accent_002c-math">hat accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-header-style">header style</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-header_002c-parameters-for">header, parameters for</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hello_002c-world">hello, world</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Starting-and-ending">Starting and ending</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-here_002c-putting-floats">here, putting floats</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-home-page-for-manual">home page for manual</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-horizontal-space">horizontal space</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chss">\hss</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-horizontal-space_002c-stretchable">horizontal space, stretchable</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chss">\hss</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-horizontal-spacing">horizontal spacing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hungarian-umlaut-accent">hungarian umlaut accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hyperref-package"><code>hyperref</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hyperref-package-1"><code>hyperref</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hyperref-package-2"><code>hyperref</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hyperref-package-3"><code>hyperref</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-input">Command line input</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hyphenation_002c-defining">hyphenation, defining</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hyphenation_002c-discretionary">hyphenation, discretionary</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cdiscretionary">\discretionary</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hyphenation_002c-forcing">hyphenation, forcing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-hyphenation_002c-preventing">hyphenation, preventing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-I">I</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Icelandic-eth">Icelandic eth</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Icelandic-thorn">Icelandic thorn</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-idx-file">idx file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ij-letter_002c-Dutch">ij letter, Dutch</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-implementations-of-TeX">implementations of TeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-importing-graphics">importing graphics</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-in"><code>in</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-in_002dline-formulas">in-line formulas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#math">math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-inch"><code>inch</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-including-graphics">including graphics</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indent_002c-forcing">indent, forcing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent">\indent &amp; \noindent</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indentation-of-paragraphs_002c-in-minipage">indentation of paragraphs, in minipage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indentfirst-package"><code>indentfirst</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpart">\part</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indentfirst-package-1"><code>indentfirst</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cchapter">\chapter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indentfirst-package-2"><code>indentfirst</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csection">\section</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indentfirst-package-3"><code>indentfirst</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsection">\subsection</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indentfirst-package-4"><code>indentfirst</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indentfirst-package-5"><code>indentfirst</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent">\indent &amp; \noindent</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indent_005flength"><code>indent_length</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indent_005fspace"><code>indent_space</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-index-entries_002c-_0060see_0027-and-_0060see-also_0027">index entries, &lsquo;see&rsquo; and &lsquo;see also&rsquo;</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-index-entry">index entry</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-index-package"><code>index</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-index_002c-page-range">index, page range</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-index_002c-printing">index, printing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprintindex">\printindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-index_002c-processing">index, processing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-index_002c-style-file"><code>index, style file</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indexes">indexes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-infinite-horizontal-stretch">infinite horizontal stretch</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chfill">\hfill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-infinite-vertical-stretch">infinite vertical stretch</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvfill">\vfill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-inner-paragraph-mode">inner paragraph mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-input-file">input file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-input_002c-on-command-line">input, on command line</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-input">Command line input</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-input_002foutput_002c-to-terminal">input/output, to terminal</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Terminal-input_002foutput">Terminal input/output</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-inserting-figures">inserting figures</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-insertions-of-special-characters">insertions of special characters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Special-insertions">Special insertions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-internal-vertical-mode">internal vertical mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-invisible-character">invisible character</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-italic-correction">italic correction</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_002f">\/</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-italic-font">italic font</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-itemize-environment"><code><code>itemize</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-item_005f0"><code>item_0</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-item_005f01"><code>item_01</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-item_005f1"><code>item_1</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-item_005f12"><code>item_12</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-item_005f2"><code>item_2</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-item_005fx1"><code>item_x1</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-item_005fx2"><code>item_x2</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-J">J</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-JPEG-files">JPEG files</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Graphics-package-configuration">Graphics package configuration</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-JPEG-files-1">JPEG files</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-JPG-files">JPG files</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Graphics-package-configuration">Graphics package configuration</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-JPG-files-1">JPG files</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-justification_002c-ragged-left">justification, ragged left</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-justification_002c-ragged-right">justification, ragged right</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-K">K</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Knuth_002c-Donald-E_002e">Knuth, Donald E.</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Overview">Overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-L">L</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-label">label</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-labelled-lists_002c-creating">labelled lists, creating</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Lamport-TeX">Lamport TeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Overview">Overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Lamport_002c-Leslie">Lamport, Leslie</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Overview">Overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-landscape-option"><code>landscape <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-landscape-orientation">landscape orientation</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-latex-command"><code>latex <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LaTeX-logo">LaTeX logo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LaTeX-overview">LaTeX overview</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Overview">Overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LaTeX-Project-team">LaTeX Project team</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LaTeX-vs_002e-LaTeX2e">LaTeX vs. LaTeX2e</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-latex_002ddoc_002dptr-document"><code>latex-doc-ptr <span class="roman">document</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LaTeX2e-logo">LaTeX2e logo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-latexrefman_0040tug_002eorg-email-address"><code><a href="mailto:latexrefman@tug.org">latexrefman@tug.org</a> <span class="roman">email address</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Latin-letters_002c-additional">Latin letters, additional</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-layout-commands">layout commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Layout">Layout</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-layout_002c-page-parameters-for">layout, page parameters for</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left-angle-quotation-marks">left angle quotation marks</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left-arrow_002c-in-text">left arrow, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left-brace_002c-in-text">left brace, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left-quote">left quote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left-quote_002c-double">left quote, double</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left-quote_002c-single">left quote, single</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left_002dhand-equation-numbers">left-hand equation numbers</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left_002djustifying-text">left-justifying text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for">left-justifying text, environment for</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-left_002dto_002dright-mode">left-to-right mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-legalpaper-option"><code>legalpaper <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lengths_002c-adding-to">lengths, adding to</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lengths_002c-allocating-new">lengths, allocating new</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lengths_002c-defining-and-using">lengths, defining and using</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lengths_002c-setting">lengths, setting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csetlength">\setlength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-leqno-option"><code>leqno <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-less-than-symbol_002c-in-text">less than symbol, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lethead_005fflag"><code>lethead_flag</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lethead_005fprefix"><code>lethead_prefix</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lethead_005fsuffix"><code>lethead_suffix</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letter-class"><code>letter <span class="roman">class</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letter-environment"><code><code>letter</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#letter">letter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letterpaper-option"><code>letterpaper <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letters_002c-accented">letters, accented</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letters_002c-additional-Latin">letters, additional Latin</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letters_002c-ending">letters, ending</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclosing">\closing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letters_002c-starting">letters, starting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005copening">\opening</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letters_002c-writing">letters, writing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Letters">Letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-line-break_002c-forcing">line break, forcing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-line-breaking">line breaking</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Line-breaking">Line breaking</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-line-breaks_002c-changing">line breaks, changing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy">\fussy &amp; \sloppy</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-line-breaks_002c-forcing">line breaks, forcing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">\linebreak &amp; \nolinebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-line-breaks_002c-multiplication-discretionary">line breaks, multiplication discretionary</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_002a">\*</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-line-breaks_002c-preventing">line breaks, preventing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak">\linebreak &amp; \nolinebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lines-in-tables">lines in tables</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-line_005fmax"><code>line_max</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lining-numerals">lining numerals</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lining-text-up-in-tables">lining text up in tables</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lining-text-up-using-tab-stops">lining text up using tab stops</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-list-environment"><code><code>list</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-list-items_002c-specifying-counter">list items, specifying counter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-list-of-figures-file">list of figures file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-list-of-tables-file">list of tables file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-listings-package"><code>listings</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-listings-package-1"><code>listings</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-listings-package-2"><code>listings</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lists-of-items">lists of items</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lists-of-items_002c-generic">lists of items, generic</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lists-of-items_002c-numbered">lists of items, numbered</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-loading-additional-packages">loading additional packages</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-log-file">log file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-logo_002c-LaTeX">logo, LaTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-logo_002c-LaTeX2e">logo, LaTeX2e</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-logo_002c-TeX">logo, TeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-long-command">long command</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-low_002d9-quotation-marks_002c-single-and-double">low-9 quotation marks, single and double</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-low_002dlevel-font-commands">low-level font commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lowercase">lowercase</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Upper-and-lower-case">Upper and lower case</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LR-box"><code>LR box</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LR-mode">LR mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lrbox"><code>lrbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#lrbox">lrbox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lshort-document"><code>lshort <span class="roman">document</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ltugboat-class"><code>ltugboat</code> class</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tugboat-template">tugboat template</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lualatex-command"><code>lualatex <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LuaTeX">LuaTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-M">M</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-m_002dwidth">m-width</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-macro-package_002c-LaTeX-as">macro package, LaTeX as</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Overview">Overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-macron-accent">macron accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-macron-accent_002c-math">macron accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-macros2e-package"><code>macros2e</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Madsen_002c-Lars">Madsen, Lars</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-make-a-box">make a box</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-makeindex"><code>makeindex</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-makeindex-program"><code>makeindex</code> program</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-makeindex_002c-style-file"><code>makeindex, style file</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-making-a-title-page">making a title page</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-making-paragraphs">making paragraphs</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-marginal-notes">marginal notes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Marginal-notes">Marginal notes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-masculine-ordinal-symbol">masculine ordinal symbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-matching-brackets">matching brackets</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">\left &amp; \right</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-matching-parentheses">matching parentheses</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">\left &amp; \right</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-accents">math accents</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-environment"><code><code>math</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#math">math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-environment-1"><code><code>math</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-formulas">math formulas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-functions">math functions</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-miscellany">math miscellany</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-miscellany">Math miscellany</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-mode">math mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-mode_002c-entering">math mode, entering</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-mode_002c-spacing">math mode, spacing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-mode_002c-spacing-1">math mode, spacing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-mode_002c-vertical-space">math mode, vertical space</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csmash">\smash</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math-symbols">math symbols</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math_002c-bold">math, bold</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mathtools-package"><code>mathtools</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mathtools-package-1"><code>mathtools</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining">Over- and Underlining</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mathtools-package-2"><code>mathtools</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csmash">\smash</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mathtools-package-3"><code>mathtools</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-MetaPost-package"><code>MetaPost</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mfirstuc-package"><code>mfirstuc</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Upper-and-lower-case">Upper and lower case</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mhchem-package"><code>mhchem</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">Subscripts &amp; superscripts</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Millimeter">Millimeter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-minipage-environment"><code><code>minipage</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-minipage_002c-creating-a">minipage, creating a</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-minted-package"><code>minted</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-minted-package-1"><code>minted</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-minted-package-2"><code>minted</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mirrors-of-CTAN">mirrors of CTAN</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#CTAN">CTAN</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mm"><code>mm</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-modes">modes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-monospace-font">monospace font</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-moving-arguments">moving arguments</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mpfootnote-counter">mpfootnote counter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mu"><code>mu</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mu_002c-math-unit">mu, math unit</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-multicolumn-text">multicolumn text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-multilingual-support">multilingual support</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-multind-package"><code>multind</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-multiplication_002c-discretionary">multiplication, discretionary</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_002a">\*</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-N">N</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-name"><code>name</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewglossaryentry">\newglossaryentry</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-NBSP">NBSP</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_007e">~</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-nested-_005cinclude_002c-not-allowed">nested <code>\include</code>, not allowed</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly">\include &amp; \includeonly</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-class-commands">new class commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-construction">Class and package construction</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-command_002c-check">new command, check</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-command_002c-definition">new command, definition</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-commands_002c-defining">new commands, defining</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-commands_002c-defining-1">new commands, defining</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprovidecommand">\providecommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-line_002c-output-as-input">new line, output as input</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr">\obeycr &amp; \restorecr</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-line_002c-starting">new line, starting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-line_002c-starting-_0028paragraph-mode_0029">new line, starting (paragraph mode)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewline">\newline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-new-page_002c-starting">new page, starting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-non_002dEnglish-characters">non-English characters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-notes-in-the-margin">notes in the margin</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Marginal-notes">Marginal notes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-notitlepage-option"><code>notitlepage <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-null-delimiter">null delimiter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">\left &amp; \right</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-numbered-items_002c-specifying-counter">numbered items, specifying counter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-numerals_002c-old_002dstyle">numerals, old-style</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-O">O</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-oblique-font">oblique font</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-oe-ligature">oe ligature</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ogonek">ogonek</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-old_002dstyle-numerals">old-style numerals</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-one_002dcolumn-output">one-column output</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-onecolumn-option"><code>onecolumn <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-oneside-option"><code>oneside <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-openany-option"><code>openany <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-openbib-option"><code>openbib <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opening-quote">opening quote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-openright-option"><code>openright <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-OpenType-fonts">OpenType fonts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-class">options, class</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-color-package">options, color package</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Color-package-options">Color package options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-command-line">options, command line</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-document-class">options, document class</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-document-class-1">options, document class</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-global">options, global</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-graphics-package">options, graphics package</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Graphics-package-options">Graphics package options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-package">options, package</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-options_002c-package-1">options, package</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ordinals_002c-feminine-and-masculine">ordinals, feminine and masculine</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-oslash">oslash</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-outer-paragraph-mode">outer paragraph mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-overbar-accent">overbar accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-overdot-accent_002c-math">overdot accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-overlining">overlining</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining">Over- and Underlining</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-overview-of-LaTeX">overview of LaTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Overview">Overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-P">P</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package-file-layout">package file layout</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package-options">package options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-structure">Class and package structure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package-options-1">package options</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-algorithm2e"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>algorithm2e</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsfonts"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsfonts</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsmath"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsmath-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsmath-2"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsmath-3"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsmath-4"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsmath-5"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsmath-6"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Dots">Dots</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsmath-7"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-functions">Math functions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsmath-8"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsmath-9"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">Colon character &amp; \colon</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsmath-10"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon">Colon character &amp; \colon</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsthm"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsthm</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-amsthm-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>amsthm</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crule">\rule</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-appendix"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>appendix</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cappendix">\appendix</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-array-_0028package_0029"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>array (package)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-Asymptote"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>Asymptote</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-Asymptote-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>Asymptote</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstrut">\strut</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-Asymptote-2"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>Asymptote</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-babel"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>babel</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cchapter">\chapter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-babel-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>babel</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-babel-2"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>babel</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-babel-3"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>babel</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-babel-4"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>babel</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-babel-5"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>babel</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-bigfoot"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>bigfoot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes-of-footnotes">Footnotes of footnotes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-bm"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>bm</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-cleveref"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>cleveref</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-cleveref-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>cleveref</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-cleveref-2"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>cleveref</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-cprotect"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>cprotect</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-cprotect-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>cprotect</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-datetime"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>datetime</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-dcolumn"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>dcolumn</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-enumitem"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>enumitem</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-envlab"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>envlab</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-etoolbox"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>etoolbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Class-and-package-commands">Class and package commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-eurosym"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>eurosym</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-fancyhdr"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>fancyhdr</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-fancyhdr-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>fancyhdr</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-fancyvrb"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>fancyvrb</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-fancyvrb-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>fancyvrb</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-flafter"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>flafter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-float"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>float</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-geometry"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>geometry</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-geometry-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>geometry</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-hyperref"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>hyperref</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-hyperref-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>hyperref</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-hyperref-2"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>hyperref</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-hyperref-3"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>hyperref</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-input">Command line input</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-indentfirst"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>indentfirst</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpart">\part</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-indentfirst-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>indentfirst</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cchapter">\chapter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-indentfirst-2"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>indentfirst</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csection">\section</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-indentfirst-3"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>indentfirst</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsection">\subsection</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-indentfirst-4"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>indentfirst</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-indentfirst-5"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>indentfirst</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent">\indent &amp; \noindent</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-index"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>index</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-listings"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>listings</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-listings-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>listings</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-listings-2"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>listings</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-macros2e"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>macros2e</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-mathtools"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>mathtools</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-formulas">Math formulas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-mathtools-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>mathtools</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining">Over- and Underlining</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-mathtools-2"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>mathtools</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csmash">\smash</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-mathtools-3"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>mathtools</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-MetaPost"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>MetaPost</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-mfirstuc"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>mfirstuc</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Upper-and-lower-case">Upper and lower case</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-mhchem"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>mhchem</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">Subscripts &amp; superscripts</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-minted"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>minted</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-minted-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>minted</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-minted-2"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>minted</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-multind"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>multind</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-pict2e"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>pict2e</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-polyglossia"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>polyglossia</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-polyglossia-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>polyglossia</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-polyglossia-2"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>polyglossia</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-polyglossia-3"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>polyglossia</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-PSTricks"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>PSTricks</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-sagetex"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>sagetex</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-setspace"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>setspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-showidx"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>showidx</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-siunitx"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>siunitx</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_007e">~</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-symbols"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>symbols</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-textcase"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>textcase</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Upper-and-lower-case">Upper and lower case</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-textcomp"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>textcomp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-TikZ"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>TikZ</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-TikZ-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>TikZ</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstrut">\strut</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-TikZ-2"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>TikZ</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-titlesec"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>titlesec</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpart">\part</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-titlesec-1"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>titlesec</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cchapter">\chapter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-titlesec-2"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>titlesec</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csection">\section</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-titlesec-3"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>titlesec</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsection">\subsection</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-titlesec-4"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>titlesec</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-tocbibbind"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>tocbibbind</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-tocloft"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>tocloft</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-ulem"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>ulem</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining">Over- and Underlining</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-url"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>url</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-package_002c-verbatimbox"><span class="roman">package</span>, <code>verbatimbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-packages_002c-loading-additional">packages, loading additional</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-packages">Additional packages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-page-break_002c-forcing">page break, forcing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak &amp; \nopagebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-page-break_002c-preventing">page break, preventing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak &amp; \nopagebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-page-breaking">page breaking</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-breaking">Page breaking</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-page-layout-parameters">page layout parameters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-page-number_002c-cross-referencing">page number, cross referencing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpageref">\pageref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-page-numbering-style">page numbering style</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-page-style_002c-this-page">page style, this page</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-page-styles">page styles</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-page_002c-colored">page, colored</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Colored-pages">Colored pages</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-page_005fprecedence"><code>page_precedence</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paired-delimiters">paired delimiters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cleft-_0026-_005cright">\left &amp; \right</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph">paragraph</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph-1">paragraph</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph-indentation">paragraph indentation</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent &amp; \parskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph-indentation_002c-in-minipage">paragraph indentation, in minipage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph-indentations-in-quoted-text">paragraph indentations in quoted text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &amp; quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph-indentations-in-quoted-text_002c-omitting">paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &amp; quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph-mode">paragraph mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph-mode-1">paragraph mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cparbox">\parbox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph-symbol">paragraph symbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph_002c-ending">paragraph, ending</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpar">\par</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraph_002c-in-a-box">paragraph, in a box</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cparbox">\parbox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paragraphs">paragraphs</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Making-paragraphs">Making paragraphs</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-parameters_002c-for-footnotes">parameters, for footnotes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-parameters_002c-page-layout">parameters, page layout</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-part">part</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-part-1">part</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpart">\part</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pc"><code>pc</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-PDF-graphic-files">PDF graphic files</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Graphics-package-configuration">Graphics package configuration</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-PDF-graphic-files-1">PDF graphic files</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pdflatex-command"><code>pdflatex <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pdfTeX">pdfTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pdfTeX-engine">pdfTeX engine</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-period_002c-abbreviation_002dending">period, abbreviation-ending</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040">\@</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-period_002c-centered_002c-in-text">period, centered, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-period_002c-sentence_002dending">period, sentence-ending</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040">\@</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-period_002c-spacing-after">period, spacing after</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040">\@</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pica">pica</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pict2e-package"><code>pict2e</code> package</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pict2e-package-1"><code>pict2e</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-picture-environment"><code><code>picture</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pictures_002c-creating">pictures, creating</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pilcrow">pilcrow</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-placement-of-floats">placement of floats</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-plural"><code>plural</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewglossaryentry">\newglossaryentry</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-PNG-files">PNG files</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Graphics-package-configuration">Graphics package configuration</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-PNG-files-1">PNG files</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cincludegraphics">\includegraphics</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-poetry_002c-an-environment-for">poetry, an environment for</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verse">verse</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Point">Point</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-polish-l">polish l</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-polyglossia-package"><code>polyglossia</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-polyglossia-package-1"><code>polyglossia</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-polyglossia-package-2"><code>polyglossia</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-polyglossia-package-3"><code>polyglossia</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindex">\index</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-portrait-orientation">portrait orientation</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-position_002c-in-picture">position, in picture</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-positional-parameter">positional parameter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-postamble"><code>postamble</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-postscript_002c-in-letters">postscript, in letters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cps">\ps</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pounds-symbol">pounds symbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-preamble"><code>preamble</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-preamble_002c-defined">preamble, defined</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Starting-and-ending">Starting and ending</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-prompt_002c-_002a">prompt, &lsquo;<samp>*</samp>&rsquo;</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Recovering-from-errors">Recovering from errors</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pronunciation">pronunciation</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Overview">Overview</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-PSTricks-package"><code>PSTricks</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pt"><code>pt</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-Q">Q</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quad">quad</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-question-mark_002c-upside_002ddown">question mark, upside-down</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quotation-environment"><code><code>quotation</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &amp; quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quotation-marks_002c-French">quotation marks, French</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quote-environment"><code><code>quote</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &amp; quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quote_002c-single-straight">quote, single straight</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quote_002c-straight-base">quote, straight base</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying">quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &amp; quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quoted-text-without-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying">quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation-_0026-quote">quotation &amp; quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-R">R</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-radical">radical</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csqrt">\sqrt</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ragged-left-text">ragged left text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ragged-left-text_002c-environment-for">ragged left text, environment for</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ragged-right-text">ragged right text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ragged-right-text_002c-environment-for">ragged right text, environment for</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-redefining-environments">redefining environments</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment &amp; \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-reference_002c-forward">reference, forward</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Cross-references">Cross references</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-references_002c-resolving-forward">references, resolving forward</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-registered-symbol">registered symbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-relation_002c-text-above">relation, text above</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstackrel">\stackrel</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-remarks-in-the-margin">remarks in the margin</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Marginal-notes">Marginal notes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-report-class"><code>report <span class="roman">class</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-reporting-bugs">reporting bugs</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-reserved-characters">reserved characters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-resizing">resizing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cscalebox">\scalebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-resizing-1">resizing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cresizebox">\resizebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-right-angle-quotation-marks">right angle quotation marks</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-right-arrow_002c-in-text">right arrow, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-right-brace_002c-in-text">right brace, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-right-quote">right quote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-right-quote_002c-double">right quote, double</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-right-quote_002c-single">right quote, single</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-right_002dhand-equation-numbers">right-hand equation numbers</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-right_002djustifying-text">right-justifying text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-right_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for">right-justifying text, environment for</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ring-accent">ring accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ring-accent_002c-math">ring accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-robust-commands">robust commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-roman-font">roman font</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-root-file">root file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-roots">roots</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csqrt">\sqrt</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-rotating-graphics">rotating graphics</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crotatebox">\rotatebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-rotating-text">rotating text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crotatebox">\rotatebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-rotation">rotation</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crotatebox">\rotatebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-row_002c-tabbing">row, <span class="roman">tabbing</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-rubber-lengths_002c-defining-new">rubber lengths, defining new</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-running-header-and-footer">running header and footer</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-running-header-and-footer-style">running header and footer style</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-S">S</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sagetex-package"><code>sagetex</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Command-line-options">Command line options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sans-serif-font">sans serif font</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Scaled-point">Scaled point</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-scaling">scaling</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cscalebox">\scalebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-scaling-1">scaling</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cresizebox">\resizebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-script-fonts">script fonts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Calligraphic">Calligraphic</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-script-letters-for-math">script letters for math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-secnumdepth"><code>secnumdepth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-secnumdepth-counter"><code>secnumdepth <span class="roman">counter</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-section">section</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-section-1">section</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csection">\section</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-section-number_002c-cross-referencing">section number, cross referencing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-section-numbers_002c-printing">section numbers, printing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-section-symbol">section symbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-section_002c-redefining">section, redefining</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040startsection">\@startsection</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sectioning-commands">sectioning commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sectioning_002c-part">sectioning, part</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpart">\part</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-series_002c-of-fonts">series, of fonts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-setspace-package"><code>setspace</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-setting-counters">setting counters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-shapes_002c-of-fonts">shapes, of fonts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sharp-S-letters">sharp S letters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-showidx-package"><code>showidx</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Indexes">Indexes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simulating-typed-text">simulating typed text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-single-angle-quotation-marks">single angle quotation marks</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-single-guillemets">single guillemets</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-single-left-quote">single left quote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-single-low_002d9-quotation-mark">single low-9 quotation mark</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-single-quote_002c-straight">single quote, straight</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-single-right-quote">single right quote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-siunitx-package"><code>siunitx</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_007e">~</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sizes-of-text">sizes of text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-skip-register_002c-plain-TeX">skip register, plain TeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-slanted-font">slanted font</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-slides-class"><code>slides <span class="roman">class</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-classes">Document classes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sloppypar"><code>sloppypar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#sloppypar">sloppypar</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sloppypar-environment">sloppypar environment</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#sloppypar">sloppypar</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-small-caps-font">small caps font</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sort"><code>sort</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewglossaryentry">\newglossaryentry</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sp"><code>sp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-space_002c-hard">space, hard</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_007e">~</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-space_002c-inserting-horizontal">space, inserting horizontal</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chss">\hss</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-space_002c-inserting-vertical">space, inserting vertical</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-space_002c-negative-thin">space, negative thin</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-space_002c-thin">space, thin</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-space_002c-unbreakable">space, unbreakable</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_007e">~</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-space_002c-vertical">space, vertical</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvspace">\vspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-spaces">spaces</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spaces">Spaces</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-spaces_002c-ignore-around-commands">spaces, ignore around commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend">\ignorespaces &amp; \ignorespacesafterend</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-spacing-within-math-mode">spacing within math mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-spacing_002c-inter_002dsentence">spacing, inter-sentence</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfrenchspacing">\frenchspacing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-spacing_002c-inter_002dsentence-1">spacing, inter-sentence</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnormalsfcodes">\normalsfcodes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-spacing_002c-math-mode">spacing, math mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Spanish-ordinals_002c-feminine-and-masculine">Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-special-characters">special characters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Reserved-characters">Reserved characters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-special-characters-1">special characters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-special-insertions">special insertions</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Special-insertions">Special insertions</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-specifier_002c-float-placement">specifier, float placement</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-splitting-the-input-file">splitting the input file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Splitting-the-input">Splitting the input</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-square-root">square root</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csqrt">\sqrt</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-stack-math">stack math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstackrel">\stackrel</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-star_002dvariants_002c-commands">star-variants, commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_0040ifstar">\@ifstar</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-starred-form_002c-defining-new-commands">starred form, defining new commands</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-starting-a-new-page">starting a new page</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-starting-a-new-page-and-clearing-floats">starting a new page and clearing floats</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-starting-and-ending">starting and ending</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Starting-and-ending">Starting and ending</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-starting-on-a-right_002dhand-page">starting on a right-hand page</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sterling-symbol">sterling symbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-straight-double-quote_002c-base">straight double quote, base</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-straight-quote_002c-base">straight quote, base</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-straight-single-quote">straight single quote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-stretch_002c-infinite-horizontal">stretch, infinite horizontal</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chfill">\hfill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-stretch_002c-infinite-vertical">stretch, infinite vertical</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvfill">\vfill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-stretch_002c-omitting-vertical">stretch, omitting vertical</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-strut">strut</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstrut">\strut</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-styles-of-text">styles of text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-styles_002c-page">styles, page</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-styles">Page styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-subparagraph">subparagraph</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-subparagraph-1">subparagraph</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-subscript">subscript</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">Subscripts &amp; superscripts</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-subsection">subsection</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-subsection-1">subsection</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsection">\subsection</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-subsubsection">subsubsection</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-superscript">superscript</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Subscripts-_0026-superscripts">Subscripts &amp; superscripts</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-symbol"><code>symbol</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewglossaryentry">\newglossaryentry</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-symbols-package"><code>symbols</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-symbols_002c-boldface">symbols, boldface</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-symbols_002c-math">symbols, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-symbols">Math symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-symbols_002c-text">symbols, text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-T">T</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tab-stops_002c-using">tab stops, using</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tabbing-environment"><code><code>tabbing</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-table-environment"><code><code>table</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#table">table</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-table-of-contents-entry_002c-manually-adding">table of contents entry, manually adding</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-table-of-contents-file">table of contents file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-table-of-contents_002c-avoiding-footnotes">table of contents, avoiding footnotes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Footnotes-in-section-headings">Footnotes in section headings</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-table-of-contents_002c-creating">table of contents, creating</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-table-of-contents_002c-sectioning-numbers-printed">table of contents, sectioning numbers printed</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tables_002c-creating">tables, creating</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#table">table</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tabular-environment"><code><code>tabular</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-template_002c-article">template, <code>article</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#article-template">article template</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-template_002c-beamer">template, <code>beamer</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#beamer-template">beamer template</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-template_002c-book">template, <code>book</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#book-template">book template</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-template_002c-book-1">template, <code>book</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Larger-book-template">Larger book template</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-template_002c-TUGboat">template, TUGboat</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tugboat-template">tugboat template</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-templates_002c-document">templates, document</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-templates">Document templates</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-terminal-input_002foutput">terminal input/output</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Terminal-input_002foutput">Terminal input/output</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-TeX-logo">TeX logo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-text-symbols">text symbols</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-text_002c-resizing">text, resizing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cscalebox">\scalebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-text_002c-resizing-1">text, resizing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cresizebox">\resizebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-text_002c-scaling">text, scaling</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cscalebox">\scalebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-text_002c-scaling-1">text, scaling</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cresizebox">\resizebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-textcase-package"><code>textcase</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Upper-and-lower-case">Upper and lower case</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-textcomp-package"><code>textcomp</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-textcomp-package-1"><code>textcomp <span class="roman">package</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thanks_002c-for-titlepage">thanks, for titlepage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thebibliography-environment"><code><code>thebibliography</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-theorem-environment"><code><code>theorem</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-theorem_002dlike-environment">theorem-like environment</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-theorems_002c-defining">theorems, defining</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-theorems_002c-typesetting">theorems, typesetting</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thin-space">thin space</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thin-space-1">thin space</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thin-space_002c-negative">thin space, negative</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spacing-in-math-mode">Spacing in math mode</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thin-space_002c-negative-1">thin space, negative</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thorn_002c-Icelandic-letter">thorn, Icelandic letter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Additional-Latin-letters">Additional Latin letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-three_002dquarters-em_002ddash">three-quarters em-dash</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tie">tie</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_007e">~</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tie_002dafter-accent">tie-after accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-TikZ-package"><code>TikZ</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-TikZ-package-1"><code>TikZ</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstrut">\strut</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-TikZ-package-2"><code>TikZ</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox">\mbox &amp; \makebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tilde-accent">tilde accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tilde-accent_002c-math">tilde accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tilde_002c-ASCII_002c-in-text">tilde, ASCII, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-title-page_002c-separate-or-run_002din">title page, separate or run-in</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-title-pages_002c-creating">title pages, creating</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-title_002c-for-titlepage">title, for titlepage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-titlepage-environment"><code><code>titlepage</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-titlepage-option"><code>titlepage <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-titles_002c-making">titles, making</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-titlesec-package"><code>titlesec</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpart">\part</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-titlesec-package-1"><code>titlesec</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cchapter">\chapter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-titlesec-package-2"><code>titlesec</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csection">\section</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-titlesec-package-3"><code>titlesec</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsection">\subsection</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-titlesec-package-4"><code>titlesec</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tocbibbind-package"><code>tocbibbind</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tocdepth"><code>tocdepth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tocdepth-counter"><code>tocdepth <span class="roman">counter</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tocloft-package"><code>tocloft</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Table-of-contents-etc_002e">Table of contents etc.</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-today_0027s-date">today&rsquo;s date</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tombstone">tombstone</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crule">\rule</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-topmargin"><code>topmargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Page-layout-parameters">Page layout parameters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-topnumber"><code>topnumber</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-topnumber-1"><code>topnumber</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-totalnumber"><code>totalnumber</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-totalnumber-1"><code>totalnumber</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Floats">Floats</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-trademark-symbol">trademark symbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-transcript-file">transcript file</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-TrueType-fonts">TrueType fonts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-TUGboat-template">TUGboat template</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tugboat-template">tugboat template</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-two_002dcolumn-output">two-column output</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-two_002dthirds-em_002ddash">two-thirds em-dash</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-twocolumn-option"><code>twocolumn <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-twoside-option"><code>twoside <span class="roman">option</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Document-class-options">Document class options</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-type-styles">type styles</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-typed-text_002c-simulating">typed text, simulating</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-typeface-sizes">typeface sizes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-sizes">Font sizes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-typefaces">typefaces</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Fonts">Fonts</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-typewriter-font">typewriter font</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Font-styles">Font styles</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-typewriter-labels-in-lists">typewriter labels in lists</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-U">U</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ulem-package"><code>ulem</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining">Over- and Underlining</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-umlaut-accent">umlaut accent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-underbar">underbar</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Accents">Accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-underlining">underlining</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Over_002d-and-Underlining">Over- and Underlining</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-underscore_002c-in-text">underscore, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Unicode-input_002c-native">Unicode input, native</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-units_002c-of-length">units, of length</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-unofficial-nature-of-this-manual">unofficial nature of this manual</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-unordered-lists">unordered lists</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-uppercase">uppercase</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Upper-and-lower-case">Upper and lower case</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-url-package"><code>url</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-using-BibTeX">using BibTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-usrguide-official-documentation"><code>usrguide <span class="roman">official documentation</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#About-this-document">About this document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-UTF_002d8">UTF-8</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-V">V</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-variables_002c-a-list-of">variables, a list of</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Counters">Counters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-vector-symbol_002c-math">vector symbol, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-verbatim-environment"><code><code>verbatim</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-verbatim-text">verbatim text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-verbatim-text_002c-inline">verbatim text, inline</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-verbatimbox-package"><code>verbatimbox</code> <span class="roman">package</span></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-verse-environment"><code><code>verse</code> <span class="roman">environment</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verse">verse</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-vertical-bar_002c-double_002c-in-text">vertical bar, double, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-vertical-bar_002c-in-text">vertical bar, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-vertical-mode">vertical mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modes">Modes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-vertical-space">vertical space</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvspace">\vspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-vertical-space-1">vertical space</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-vertical-space-before-paragraphs">vertical space before paragraphs</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip">\parindent &amp; \parskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-vertical-spacing">vertical spacing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-vertical-spacing_002c-math-mode">vertical spacing, math mode</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csmash">\smash</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-visible-space">visible space</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-visible-space-symbol_002c-in-text">visible space symbol, in text</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Text-symbols">Text symbols</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-W">W</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-weights_002c-of-fonts">weights, of fonts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-white-space">white space</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Spaces">Spaces</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-wide-hat-accent_002c-math">wide hat accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-wide-tilde-accent_002c-math">wide tilde accent, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Math-accents">Math accents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-widths_002c-of-fonts">widths, of fonts</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-writing-external-files">writing external files</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-writing-letters">writing letters</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Letters">Letters</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="Index_cp_letter-X">X</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-x_002dheight">x-height</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Units-of-length">Units of length</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-xdvi-command"><code>xdvi <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Output-files">Output files</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-xdvipdfmx"><code>xdvipdfmx</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-xelatex-command"><code>xelatex <span class="roman">command</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-XeTeX">XeTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#TeX-engines">TeX engines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-xindy"><code>xindy</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-xindy-program"><code>xindy</code> program</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#makeindex">makeindex</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+</table>
+<table><tr><th valign="top">Jump to: &nbsp; </th><td><a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-1"><b>&amp;</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-2"><b>*</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-3"><b>-</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-4"><b>.</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-5"><b>1</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-6"><b>:</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-7"><b>[</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-8"><b>\</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-9"><b>^</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-10"><b>_</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-11"><b>`</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-12"><b>{</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_symbol-13"><b>~</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<br>
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-A"><b>A</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-B"><b>B</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-C"><b>C</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-D"><b>D</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-E"><b>E</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-F"><b>F</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-G"><b>G</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-H"><b>H</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-I"><b>I</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-J"><b>J</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-K"><b>K</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-L"><b>L</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-M"><b>M</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-N"><b>N</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-O"><b>O</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-P"><b>P</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-Q"><b>Q</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-R"><b>R</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-S"><b>S</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-T"><b>T</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-U"><b>U</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-V"><b>V</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-W"><b>W</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#Index_cp_letter-X"><b>X</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+</td></tr></table>
+
+<hr>
+
+
+<hr/><div class='referenceinfo'> <a href='https://latexref.xyz/'> <i>Unofficial LaTeX2e reference manual</i></a></div>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.info b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.info
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c2e873d558
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.info
@@ -0,0 +1,18241 @@
+This is latex2e.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.5 from
+latex2e.texi.
+
+This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a document
+preparation system, version of October 2018.
+
+ This manual was originally translated from 'LATEX.HLP' v1.0a in the
+VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by George D.
+Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The LaTeX 2.09 version was
+written by Stephen Gilmore. The LaTeX2e version was adapted from this
+by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions,
+and gratefully acknowledges using 'Hypertext Help with LaTeX', by
+Sheldon Green, and 'LaTeX Command Summary' (for LaTeX 2.09) by L. Botway
+and C. Biemesderfer (published by the TeX Users Group as 'TeXniques'
+number 10), as reference material. We also gratefully acknowledge
+additional material appearing in latex2e-reference by Martin Herbert
+Dietze. (From these references no text was directly copied.)
+
+ Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016,
+2017, 2018 Karl Berry.
+Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
+Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
+
+ Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+preserved on all copies.
+
+ Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of
+this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+ Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions.
+INFO-DIR-SECTION TeX
+START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+* LaTeX2e: (latex2e). Unofficial LaTeX reference manual.
+END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Top, Next: About this document, Up: (dir)
+
+LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
+***************************************
+
+This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of October
+2018) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* About this document:: Bug reporting, etc.
+* Overview:: What is LaTeX?
+* Document classes:: Some of the various classes available.
+* Fonts:: Italic, bold, typewriter, etc.
+* Layout:: Controlling the page layout.
+* Sectioning:: Parts, Chapters, Sections, etc.
+* Cross references:: Automatic referencing.
+* Environments:: Such as enumerate & itemize.
+* Line breaking:: Influencing line breaks.
+* Page breaking:: Influencing page breaks.
+* Footnotes:: How to produce footnotes.
+* Definitions:: Define your own commands, etc.
+* Counters:: Internal counters used by LaTeX.
+* Lengths:: The length commands.
+* Making paragraphs:: Paragraph commands.
+* Math formulas:: How to create mathematical formulas.
+* Modes:: Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
+* Page styles:: Various styles of page layout.
+* Spaces:: Horizontal and vertical space.
+* Boxes:: Making boxes.
+* Color:: Defining and using colors.
+* Graphics:: Importing graphics from outside LaTeX.
+* Special insertions:: Inserting reserved and special characters.
+* Splitting the input:: Dealing with big files by splitting.
+* Front/back matter:: Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes.
+* Letters:: The 'letter' class.
+* Terminal input/output:: User interaction.
+* Command line:: System-independent command-line behavior.
+* Document templates:: Starter templates for various document classes.
+* Index:: General index.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: About this document, Next: Overview, Prev: Top, Up: Top
+
+1 About this document
+*********************
+
+This is an unofficial reference manual for the LaTeX2e document
+preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX typesetting
+program (*note Overview::).
+
+ This document's home page is
+<https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman>. There you can get
+the sources, subscribe to the mailing list or read its archives, see
+other infrastructure, and get the current output in various formats. In
+particular, the output comes in two web formats. Probably the most
+convenient one, shown at <http://latexref.xyz/>, has pages for each
+topic and so is good for a quick lookup; see also the note there about
+easy-to-remember links. The other, shown at
+<http://svn.gnu.org.ua/viewvc/latexrefman/trunk/latex2e.html?view=co>,
+has all the information on single page.
+
+ In this document, we will mostly just use 'LaTeX' rather than
+'LaTeX2e', since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was frozen decades
+ago.
+
+ LaTeX is currently maintained by a group of volunteers
+(<http://latex-project.org>). The official documentation written by the
+LaTeX project is available from their web site. This document is
+completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the LaTeX
+maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything else about this
+document to them. Instead, please send all comments to
+<latexrefman@tug.org>.
+
+ This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources
+of information about LaTeX, at all levels. Here are a few
+introductions.
+
+<http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr>
+ Two pages of recommended references to LaTeX documentation.
+
+<http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc>
+ Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
+
+<http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide>
+ The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of LaTeX.
+ Many other guides by many other people are also available,
+ independent of LaTeX itself; one such is the next item:
+
+<http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort>
+ A short introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages.
+
+<http://tug.org/begin.html>
+ Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX, with further
+ references.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Overview, Next: Document classes, Prev: About this document, Up: Top
+
+2 Overview of LaTeX
+*******************
+
+LaTeX is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally created
+by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers
+(<http://latex-project.org>). It is widely used, particularly for
+complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics.
+
+ A LaTeX user writes an input file containing text along with
+interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text
+should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands
+that interface with Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program (the
+technical term is that LaTeX is a "macro package" for the TeX engine).
+The user produces the output document by giving that input file to the
+TeX engine.
+
+ The term LaTeX is also sometimes used to mean the language in which
+the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
+available to a LaTeX user.
+
+ The name LaTeX is short for "Lamport TeX". It is pronounced LAH-teck
+or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document, produce the
+logo with '\LaTeX'. Where use of the logo is not sensible, such as in
+plain text, write it as 'LaTeX'.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Starting and ending:: The standard beginning and end of a document.
+* Output files:: Files produced.
+* TeX engines:: Programs that can compile TeX and LaTeX.
+* LaTeX command syntax:: General syntax of LaTeX commands.
+* Environment:: Area of the source giving distinct behavior.
+* CTAN:: Our repository.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Starting and ending, Next: Output files, Up: Overview
+
+2.1 Starting and ending
+=======================
+
+LaTeX files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
+and ending. This is a small example.
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \begin{document}
+ Hello, \LaTeX\ world.
+ \end{document}
+
+Every LaTeX document has a '\begin{document}' line and an
+'\end{document}' line.
+
+Here, the 'article' is the "document class". It is implemented in a
+file 'article.cls'. You can use any document class on your system. A
+few document classes are defined by LaTeX itself, and vast array of
+others are widely available. *Note Document classes::.
+
+ You can include other LaTeX commands between the '\documentclass' and
+the '\begin{document}' commands. This area is called the "preamble".
+
+ The '\begin{document}', '\end{document}' pair defines an
+"environment"; the 'document' environment (and no others) is required in
+all LaTeX documents (*note document::). LaTeX make available to you
+many environments that are documented here (*note Environments::). Many
+more are available to you from external packages, most importantly those
+available at CTAN (*note CTAN::).
+
+ The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output
+from a LaTeX input file.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Output files, Next: TeX engines, Prev: Starting and ending, Up: Overview
+
+2.2 Output files
+================
+
+LaTeX produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files. The
+main output file's name ends in either '.dvi' or '.pdf'.
+
+'.dvi'
+ If LaTeX is invoked with the system command 'latex' then it
+ produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension '.dvi'. You can
+ view this file with a command such as 'xdvi', or convert it to a
+ PostScript '.ps' file with 'dvips' or to a Portable Document Format
+ '.pdf' file with 'dvipdfmx'. The contents of the file can be
+ dumped in human-readable form with 'dvitype'. A vast array of
+ other DVI utility programs are available
+ (<http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware>).
+
+'.pdf'
+ If LaTeX is invoked via the system command 'pdflatex', among other
+ commands (*note TeX engines::), then the main output is a Portable
+ Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a self-contained
+ file, with all fonts and images included.
+
+ LaTeX also produces at least two additional files.
+
+'.log'
+ This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
+ loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps
+ additional information for any errors.
+
+'.aux'
+ Auxiliary information is used by LaTeX for things such as cross
+ references. For example, the first time that LaTeX finds a forward
+ reference--a cross reference to something that has not yet appeared
+ in the source--it will appear in the output as a doubled question
+ mark '??'. When the referred-to spot does eventually appear in the
+ source then LaTeX writes its location information to this '.aux'
+ file. On the next invocation, LaTeX reads the location information
+ from this file and uses it to resolve the reference, replacing the
+ double question mark with the remembered location.
+
+ LaTeX may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename
+ending. These include a '.lof' file that is used to make a list of
+figures, a '.lot' file used to make a list of tables, and a '.toc' file
+used to make a table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::). A
+particular class may create others; the list is open-ended.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: TeX engines, Next: LaTeX command syntax, Prev: Output files, Up: Overview
+
+2.3 TeX engines
+===============
+
+LaTeX is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a TeX
+implementation (*note Overview::). This section gives a terse overview
+of the main programs (see also *note Command line::).
+
+'latex'
+'pdflatex'
+ In TeX Live (<http://tug.org/texlive>), if LaTeX is invoked via
+ either the system command 'latex' or 'pdflatex', then the pdfTeX
+ engine is run (<http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex>). When invoked as
+ 'latex', the main output is a '.dvi' file; as 'pdflatex', the main
+ output is a '.pdf' file.
+
+ pdfTeX incorporates the e-TeX extensions to Knuth's original
+ program (<http://ctan.org/pkg/etex>), including additional
+ programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty
+ of extensions of its own. e-TeX is available on its own as the
+ system command 'etex', but this is plain TeX (and produces '.dvi').
+
+ In other TeX distributions, 'latex' may invoke e-TeX rather than
+ pdfTeX. In any case, the e-TeX extensions can be assumed to be
+ available in LaTeX.
+
+'lualatex'
+ If LaTeX is invoked via the system command 'lualatex', the LuaTeX
+ engine is run (<http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex>). This program allows
+ code written in the scripting language Lua (<http://luatex.org>) to
+ interact with TeX's typesetting. LuaTeX handles UTF-8 Unicode
+ input natively, can handle OpenType and TrueType fonts, and
+ produces a '.pdf' file by default. There is also 'dvilualatex' to
+ produce a '.dvi' file, but this is rarely used.
+
+'xelatex'
+ If LaTeX is invoked with the system command 'xelatex', the XeTeX
+ engine is run (<http://tug.org/xetex>). Like LuaTeX, XeTeX
+ natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType fonts,
+ though the implementation is completely different, mainly using
+ external libraries instead of internal code. XeTeX produces a
+ '.pdf' file as output; it does not support DVI output.
+
+ Internally, XeTeX creates an '.xdv' file, a variant of DVI, and
+ translates that to PDF using the ('x')'dvipdfmx' program, but this
+ process is automatic. The '.xdv' file is only useful for
+ debugging.
+
+ Other variants of LaTeX and TeX exist, e.g., to provide additional
+support for Japanese and other languages ([u]pTeX,
+<http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex>, <http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex>).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: LaTeX command syntax, Next: Environment, Prev: TeX engines, Up: Overview
+
+2.4 LaTeX command syntax
+========================
+
+In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a backslash
+character, '\'. The name itself then consists of either (a) a string of
+letters or (b) a single non-letter.
+
+ LaTeX commands names are case sensitive so that '\pagebreak' differs
+from '\Pagebreak' (the latter is not a standard command). Most commands
+are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all commands in the same
+case as they are defined.
+
+ A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These
+arguments may be either required or optional. Required arguments are
+contained in curly braces, '{...}'. Optional arguments are contained in
+square brackets, '[...]'. Generally, but not universally, if the
+command accepts an optional argument, it comes first, before any
+required arguments.
+
+ Inside of an optional argument, to use the character close square
+bracket (']') hide it inside curly braces, as in '\item[closing bracket
+{]}]'. Similarly, if an optional argument comes last, with no required
+argument after it, then to make the first character of the following
+text be an open square bracket, hide it inside curly braces.
+
+ Some of LaTeX's commands are a "declaration". Such a command changes
+the value the meaning of some other command or parameter. For instance,
+the '\mainmatter' declaration changes the typesetting of page numbers
+from roman numerals to arabic (*note \frontmatter & \mainmatter &
+\backmatter::).
+
+ LaTeX has the convention that some commands have a '*' form that is
+related to the form without a '*', such as '\chapter' and '\chapter*'.
+The exact difference in behavior varies from command to command.
+
+ This manual describes all accepted options and '*'-forms for the
+commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Environment, Next: CTAN, Prev: LaTeX command syntax, Up: Overview
+
+2.5 Environment
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{ENVIRONMENT NAME}
+ ...
+ \end{ENVIRONMENT NAME}
+
+ An area of LaTeX source, inside of which there is a distinct
+behavior. For instance, for poetry in LaTeX put the lines between
+'\begin{verse}' and '\end{verse}'.
+
+ \begin{verse}
+ There once was a man from Nantucket \\
+ ...
+ \end{verse}
+
+ *Note Environments:: for a list of environments. Particularly
+notable is that every LaTeX document must have a 'document' environment,
+a '\begin{document} ... \end{document}' pair.
+
+ The ENVIRONMENT NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
+end. This includes the case where ENVIRONMENT NAME ends in a
+star ('*'); both the '\begin' and '\end' texts must include the star.
+
+ Environments may have arguments, including optional arguments. This
+example produces a table. The first argument is optional (and causes
+the table to be aligned on its top row) while the second argument is
+required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
+
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{r|l}
+ ... rows of table ...
+ \end{tabular}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: CTAN, Prev: Environment, Up: Overview
+
+2.6 CTAN: the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
+===============================================
+
+The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network, CTAN, is the TeX and LaTeX
+community's repository of free material. It is a set of Internet sites
+around the world that offer material related to LaTeX for download.
+Visit CTAN on the web at <https://ctan.org>.
+
+ This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
+typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
+person or a small number of people. For instance, many publishers have
+a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher's
+specifications.
+
+ In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features
+such as search by name or by functionality.
+
+ CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites. One of the
+sites is the core. This site actively manages the material, for
+instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages. It is hosted
+by the German TeX group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the world help out
+by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their collections with the
+core site and then in turn making their copies publicly available. This
+gives users close to their location better access and relieves the load
+on the core site. The list of mirrors is at <https://ctan.org/mirrors>.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Document classes, Next: Fonts, Prev: Overview, Up: Top
+
+3 Document classes
+******************
+
+The document's overall class is defined with this command, which is
+normally the first command in a LaTeX source file.
+
+ \documentclass[OPTIONS]{CLASS}
+
+ The following document CLASS names are built into LaTeX. (Many other
+document classes are available as separate packages; *note Overview::.)
+
+'article'
+ For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general
+ use.
+
+'book'
+ Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
+ matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
+ (*note Front/back matter::).
+
+'letter'
+ Mail, optionally including mailing labels (*note Letters::).
+
+'report'
+ For documents of length between an 'article' and a 'book', such as
+ technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
+
+'slides'
+ For slide presentations--rarely used today. In its place the
+ 'beamer' package is perhaps the most prevalent (*note beamer
+ template::).
+
+ Standard OPTIONS are described in the next section.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Document class options:: Global options.
+* Additional packages:: Bring in packages.
+* Class and package construction:: Create new classes and packages.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Document class options, Next: Additional packages, Up: Document classes
+
+3.1 Document class options
+==========================
+
+You can specify "global options" or "class options" to the
+'\documentclass' command by enclosing them in square brackets. To
+specify more than one OPTION, separate them with a comma.
+
+ \documentclass[OPTION1,OPTION2,...]{CLASS}
+
+ Here is the list of the standard class options.
+
+ All of the standard classes except 'slides' accept the following
+options for selecting the typeface size (default is '10pt'):
+
+ 10pt 11pt 12pt
+
+ All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the
+paper size (these show height by width):
+
+'a4paper'
+ 210 by 297mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
+
+'a5paper'
+ 148 by 210mm (about 5.8 by 8.3 inches)
+
+'b5paper'
+ 176 by 250mm (about 6.9 by 9.8 inches)
+
+'executivepaper'
+ 7.25 by 10.5 inches
+
+'legalpaper'
+ 8.5 by 14 inches
+
+'letterpaper'
+ 8.5 by 11 inches (the default)
+
+ When using one of the engines pdfLaTeX, LuaLaTeX, or XeLaTeX (*note
+TeX engines::), options other than 'letterpaper' set the print area but
+you must also set the physical paper size. One way to do that is to put
+'\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth' and '\pdfpageheight=\paperheight' in your
+document's preamble.
+
+ The 'geometry' package provides flexible ways of setting the print
+area and physical page size.
+
+ Miscellaneous other options:
+
+'draft'
+'final'
+ Mark ('draft') or do not mark ('final') overfull boxes with a black
+ box in the margin; default is 'final'.
+
+'fleqn'
+ Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
+
+'landscape'
+ Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
+
+'leqno'
+ Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the
+ right side.
+
+'openbib'
+ Use "open" bibliography format.
+
+'titlepage'
+'notitlepage'
+ Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title
+ information and for the abstract also, if there is one. The
+ default for the 'report' class is 'titlepage', for the other
+ classes it is 'notitlepage'.
+
+ The following options are not available with the 'slides' class.
+
+'onecolumn'
+'twocolumn'
+ Typeset in one or two columns; default is 'onecolumn'.
+
+'oneside'
+'twoside'
+ Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is 'oneside', except that
+ in the 'book' class the default is 'twoside'.
+
+ For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page. For
+ two-sided printing, the '\evensidemargin' ('\oddsidemargin')
+ parameter determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages
+ between the left side of the page and the text's left margin, with
+ '\oddsidemargin' being 40% of the difference between '\paperwidth'
+ and '\textwidth', and '\evensidemargin' is the remainder.
+
+'openright'
+'openany'
+ Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default
+ is 'openright' for 'book', and 'openany' for 'report'.
+
+ The 'slides' class offers the option 'clock' for printing the time at
+the bottom of each note.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Additional packages, Next: Class and package construction, Prev: Document class options, Up: Document classes
+
+3.2 Additional packages
+=======================
+
+Load a package PKG, with the package options given in the
+comma-separated list OPTIONS, as here.
+
+ \usepackage[OPTIONS]{PKG}.
+
+ To specify more than one package you can separate them with a comma,
+as in '\usepackage{PKG1,PKG2,...}', or use multiple '\usepackage'
+commands.
+
+ Any options given in the '\documentclass' command that are unknown to
+the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
+'\usepackage'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Class and package construction, Prev: Additional packages, Up: Document classes
+
+3.3 Class and package construction
+==================================
+
+You can create new document classes and new packages. For instance, if
+your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a standard
+header for each page, then you could create a new class 'smcmemo.cls'
+and begin your documents with '\documentclass{smcmemo}'.
+
+ What separates a package from a document class is that the commands
+in a package are useful across classes while those in a document class
+are specific to that class. Thus, a command to set page headers is for
+a package while a command to make the page headers say 'Memo from the
+SMC Math Department' is for a class.
+
+ Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign '@' as a
+character in command names without having to surround the code
+containing that command with '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother'. *Note
+\makeatletter & \makeatother::. This allow you to create commands that
+users will not accidentally redefine. Another technique is to preface
+class- or package-specific commands with some string to prevent your
+class or package from interfering with others. For instance, the class
+'smcmemo' might have commands '\smc@tolist', '\smc@fromlist', etc.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Class and package structure:: Layout of the file.
+* Class and package commands:: List of commands.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Class and package structure, Next: Class and package commands, Up: Class and package construction
+
+3.3.1 Class and package structure
+---------------------------------
+
+A class file or package file typically has four parts.
+ 1. In the "identification part", the file says that it is a LaTeX
+ package or class and describes itself, using the '\NeedsTeXFormat'
+ and '\ProvidesClass' or '\ProvidesPackage' commands.
+
+ 2. The "preliminary declarations part" declares some commands and can
+ also load other files. Usually these commands will be those needed
+ for the code used in the next part. For example, an 'smcmemo'
+ class might be called with an option to read in a file with a list
+ of people for the to-head, as '\documentclass[mathto]{smcmemo}',
+ and therefore needs to define a command
+ '\newcommand{\setto}[1]{\def\@tolist{#1}}' used in that file.
+
+ 3. In the "handle options part" the class or package declares and
+ processes its options. Class options allow a user to start their
+ document as '\documentclass[OPTION LIST]{CLASS NAME}', to modify
+ the behavior of the class. An example is when you declare
+ '\documentclass[11pt]{article}' to set the default document font
+ size.
+
+ 4. Finally, in the "more declarations part" the class or package
+ usually does most of its work: declaring new variables, commands
+ and fonts, and loading other files.
+
+ Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as 'stub.cls'
+where LaTeX can find it, for example in the same directory as the '.tex'
+file.
+
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+ \ProvidesClass{stub}[2017/07/06 stub to start building classes from]
+ \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+ \ProcessOptions\relax
+ \LoadClass{article}
+
+It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
+passing them all to the 'article' class, and then loads the 'article'
+class to provide the basis for this class's code.
+
+ For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
+Class Guide, at
+<http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf> (much of
+the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
+<https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf>.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Class and package commands, Prev: Class and package structure, Up: Class and package construction
+
+3.3.2 Class and package commands
+--------------------------------
+
+These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
+
+'\AtBeginDvi{specials}'
+ Save in a box register things that are written to the '.dvi' file
+ at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
+
+'\AtEndOfClass{CODE}'
+'\AtEndOfPackage{CODE}'
+ Hook to insert CODE to be executed when LaTeX finishes processing
+ the current class or package. You can use these hooks multiple
+ times; the 'code' will be executed in the order that you called it.
+ See also *note \AtBeginDocument::.
+
+'\CheckCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
+'\CheckCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
+ Like '\newcommand' (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::) but does
+ not define CMD; instead it checks that the current definition of
+ CMD is exactly as given by DEFINITION and is or is not "long" as
+ expected. A long command is a command that accepts '\par' within
+ an argument. The CMD command is expected to be long with the
+ unstarred version of '\CheckCommand'. Raises an error when the
+ check fails. This allows you to check before you start redefining
+ 'cmd' yourself that no other package has already redefined this
+ command.
+
+'\ClassError{CLASS NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}'
+'\PackageError{PACKAGE NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}'
+'\ClassWarning{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
+'\PackageWarning{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
+'\ClassWarningNoLine{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
+'\PackageWarningNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
+'\ClassInfo{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
+'\PackageInfo{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
+'\ClassInfoNoLine{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
+'\PackageInfoNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
+ Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.
+
+ For '\ClassError' and '\PackageError' the message is ERROR TEXT,
+ followed by TeX's '?' error prompt. If the user then asks for help
+ by typing 'h', they see the HELP TEXT.
+
+ The four warning commands are similar except that they write
+ WARNING TEXT on the screen with no error prompt. The four info
+ commands write INFO TEXT only in the transcript file. The 'NoLine'
+ versions do not show the number of the line generating the message,
+ while the other versions do show that number.
+
+ To format the messages, including the HELP TEXT: use '\protect' to
+ stop a command from expanding, get a line break with
+ '\MessageBreak', and get a space with '\space' when a space
+ character does not allow it, like after a command. Note that LaTeX
+ appends a period to the messages.
+
+'\CurrentOption'
+ Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can
+ only be used within the CODE argument of either '\DeclareOption' or
+ '\DeclareOption*'.
+
+'\DeclareOption{OPTION}{CODE}'
+'\DeclareOption*{CODE}'
+ Make an option available to a user to invoke in their
+ '\documentclass' command. For example, the 'smcmemo' class could
+ have an option '\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}' allowing users to
+ put the institutional logo on the first page. The class file must
+ contain '\DeclareOption{logo}{CODE}' (and later,
+ '\ProcessOptions').
+
+ If you request an option that has not been declared, by default
+ this will produce a warning like 'Unused global option(s):
+ [badoption].' Change this behaviour with the starred version
+ '\DeclareOption*{CODE}'. For example, many classes extend an
+ existing class, using a declaration such as '\LoadClass{article}',
+ and for passing extra options to the underlying class use code such
+ as this.
+
+ \DeclareOption*{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
+ }
+
+ Another example is that the class 'smcmemo' may allow users to keep
+ lists of memo recipients in external files. Then the user could
+ invoke '\documentclass[math]{smcmemo}' and it will read the file
+ 'math.memo'. This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
+ passes the option to the 'article' class.
+
+ \DeclareOption*{\InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.memo}{}{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}}
+
+'\DeclareRobustCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
+'\DeclareRobustCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
+ Like '\newcommand' and '\newcommand*' (*note \newcommand &
+ \renewcommand::) but these declare a robust command, even if some
+ code within the DEFINITION is fragile. (For a discussion of robust
+ and fragile commands *note \protect::.) Use this command to define
+ new robust commands or to redefine existing commands and make them
+ robust. Unlike '\newcommand' these do not give an error if macro
+ CMD already exists; instead, a log message is put into the
+ transcript file if a command is redefined.
+
+ Commands defined this way are a bit less efficient than those
+ defined using '\newcommand' so unless the command's data is fragile
+ and the command is used within a moving argument, use
+ '\newcommand'.
+
+ The 'etoolbox' package offers the commands '\newrobustcmd',
+ '\newrobustcmd*', as well as the commands '\renewrobustcmd',
+ '\renewrobustcmd*', and the commands '\providerobustcmd', and
+ '\providerobustcmd*'. These are similar to '\newcommand',
+ '\newcommand*', '\renewcommand', '\renewcommand*',
+ '\providecommand', and '\providecommand*', but define a robust CMD
+ with two advantages as compared to '\DeclareRobustCommand':
+ 1. They use the low-level e-TeX protection mechanism rather than
+ the higher level LaTeX '\protect' mechanism, so they do not
+ incur the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
+ 2. They make the same distinction between '\new...', '\renew...',
+ and '\provide...', as the standard commands, so they do not
+ just make a log message when you redefine CMD that already
+ exists, in that case you need to use either '\renew...' or
+ '\provide...' or you get an error.
+
+'\IfFileExists{FILE NAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
+'\InputIfFileExists{FILE NAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
+ Execute TRUE CODE if LaTeX finds the file 'FILE NAME' or FALSE CODE
+ otherwise. In the first case it executing TRUE CODE and then
+ inputs the file. Thus the command
+
+ \IfFileExists{img.pdf}{%
+ \includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{!! img.pdf not found}
+
+ will include the graphic 'img.pdf' if it is found and otherwise
+ give a warning.
+
+ This command looks for the file in all search paths that LaTeX
+ uses, not only in the current directory. To look only in the
+ current directory do something like '\IfFileExists{./filename}{TRUE
+ CODE}{FALSE CODE}'. If you ask for a filename without a '.tex'
+ extension then LaTeX will first look for the file by appending the
+ '.tex'; for more on how LaTeX handles file extensions see *note
+ \input::.
+
+'\LoadClass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+'\LoadClassWithOptions{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+ Load a class, as with '\documentclass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS
+ NAME}[RELEASE INFO]'. An example is
+ '\LoadClass[twoside]{article}'.
+
+ The OPTIONS LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+ RELEASE DATE is optional. If present it must have the form
+ YYYY/MM/DD.
+
+ If you request a RELEASE DATE and the date of the package installed
+ on your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the screen and
+ in the log like this.
+
+ You have requested, on input line 4, version `2038/01/19' of
+ document class article, but only version `2014/09/29 v1.4h
+ Standard LaTeX document class' is available.
+
+ The command version '\LoadClassWithOptions' uses the list of
+ options for the current class. This means it ignores any options
+ passed to it via '\PassOptionsToClass'. This is a convenience
+ command that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the
+ standard 'article' class, without having to track which options
+ were passed.
+
+'\ExecuteOptions{OPTIONS-LIST}'
+ For each option OPTION in the OPTIONS-LIST, in order, this command
+ executes the command '\ds@OPTION'. If this command is not defined
+ then that option is silently ignored.
+
+ It can be used to provide a default option list before
+ '\ProcessOptions'. For example, if in a class file you want the
+ default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
+ '\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax'.
+
+'\NeedsTeXFormat{FORMAT}[FORMAT DATE]'
+ Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often
+ issued as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
+ '\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}'. When a document using that class is
+ processed, the format name given here must match the format that is
+ actually being run (including that the FORMAT string is case
+ sensitive). If it does not match then execution stops with an
+ error like 'This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.'
+
+ To specify a version of the format that you know to have certain
+ features, include the optional FORMAT DATE on which those features
+ were implemented. If present it must be in the form 'YYYY/MM/DD'.
+ If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
+ FORMAT DATE then you get a warning like this.
+
+ You have requested release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only
+ release `2016/02/01' is available.
+
+'\OptionNotUsed'
+ Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be
+ used within the CODE argument of either '\DeclareOption' or
+ '\DeclareOption*'.
+
+'\PassOptionsToClass{OPTION LIST}{CLASS NAME}'
+'\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTION LIST}{PACKAGE NAME}'
+ Adds the options in the comma-separated list OPTION LIST to the
+ options used by any future '\RequirePackage' or '\usepackage'
+ command for package PACKAGE NAME or the class CLASS NAME.
+
+ The reason for these commands is: you may load a package any number
+ of times with no options but if you want options then you may only
+ supply them when you first load the package. Loading a package
+ with options more than once will get you an error like 'Option
+ clash for package foo.' (LaTeX throws an error even if there is no
+ conflict between the options.)
+
+ If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can
+ collapse that to once, for example replacing the two
+ '\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}' and
+ '\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}' with the single command
+ '\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}'.
+
+ However, imagine that you are loading 'firstpkg' and inside that
+ package it loads 'secondpkg', and you need the second package to be
+ loaded with option 'draft'. Then before doing the first package
+ you must queue up the options for the second package, like this.
+
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{secondpkg}
+ \RequirePackage{firstpkg}
+
+ (If 'firstpkg.sty' loads an option in conflict with what you want
+ then you may have to alter its source.)
+
+ These commands are useful for general users as well as class and
+ package writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the
+ 'graphicx' package with the option 'draft' and also wants to use a
+ class 'foo' that loads the 'graphicx' package, but without that
+ option. The user could start their LaTeX file with
+ '\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\documentclass{foo}'.
+
+'\ProcessOptions'
+'\ProcessOptions*\@OPTIONS'
+ Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked.
+ Include it in the class file as '\ProcessOptions\relax' (because of
+ the existence of the starred command).
+
+ Options come in two types. "Local options" have been specified for
+ this particular package in the OPTIONS argument of
+ '\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTIONS}', '\usepackage[OPTIONS]', or
+ '\RequirePackage[OPTIONS]'. "Global options" are those given by
+ the class user in '\documentclass[OPTIONS]' (If an option is
+ specified both locally and globally then it is local.)
+
+ When '\ProcessOptions' is called for a package 'pkg.sty', the
+ following happens:
+ 1. For each option OPTION so far declared with '\DeclareOption',
+ it looks to see if that option is either a global or a local
+ option for 'pkg'. If so then it executes the declared code.
+ This is done in the order in which these options were given in
+ 'pkg.sty'.
+ 2. For each remaining local option, it executes the command
+ '\ds@'OPTION if it has been defined somewhere (other than by a
+ '\DeclareOption'); otherwise, it executes the default option
+ code given in '\DeclareOption*'. If no default option code
+ has been declared then it gives an error message. This is
+ done in the order in which these options were specified.
+
+ When '\ProcessOptions' is called for a class it works in the same
+ way except that all options are local, and the default CODE for
+ '\DeclareOption*' is '\OptionNotUsed' rather than an error.
+
+ The starred version '\ProcessOptions*' executes the options in the
+ order specified in the calling commands, rather than in the order
+ of declaration in the class or package. For a package this means
+ that the global options are processed first.
+
+'\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
+'\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+'\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
+'\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+ Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen
+ and the log file.
+
+ When you load a class or package, for example with
+ '\documentclass{smcmemo}' or '\usepackage{test}', LaTeX inputs a
+ file. If the name of the file does not match the class or package
+ name declared in it then you get a warning. Thus, if you invoke
+ '\documentclass{smcmemo}', and the file 'smcmemo.cls' has the
+ statement '\ProvidesClass{xxx}' then you get a warning like 'You
+ have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document class
+ provides 'xxx'.' This warning does not prevent LaTeX from
+ processing the rest of the class file normally.
+
+ If you include the optional argument then you must include a date,
+ before any spaces, of the form 'YYYY/MM/DD'. The rest of the
+ optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally
+ identifies the class, and is written to the screen during
+ compilation and to the log file. Thus, if your file 'smcmemo.cls'
+ contains the line '\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo
+ class]' and your document's first line is '\documentclass{smcmemo}'
+ then you will see 'Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo
+ class'.
+
+ The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to
+ ask to be warned if the version of the class or package is earlier
+ than RELEASE DATE. For instance, a user could enter
+ '\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]' or
+ '\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]' to require a class or package with
+ certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier
+ than the given date. (Although, in practice package users only
+ rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)
+
+'\ProvidesFile{FILE NAME}[ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
+ Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
+ configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in
+ that file and you get in the log a string like 'File: test.config
+ 2017/10/12 config file for test.cls' for FILE NAME equal to
+ 'test.config' and ADDITIONAL INFORMATION equal to '2017/10/12
+ config file for test.cls'.
+
+'\RequirePackage[OPTION LIST]{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+'\RequirePackageWithOptions{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+ Load a package, like the command '\usepackage' (*note Additional
+ packages::). The LaTeX development team strongly recommends use of
+ these commands over Plain TeX's '\input'; see the Class Guide. An
+ example is '\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}'.
+
+ The OPTION LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+ RELEASE DATE, if present, must have the form YYYY/MM/DD. If the
+ release date of the package as installed on your system is earlier
+ than RELEASE DATE then you get a warning like 'You have requested,
+ on input line 9, version `2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but only
+ version `2000/01/01' is available'.
+
+ The '\RequirePackageWithOptions' version uses the list of options
+ for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to
+ it via '\PassOptionsToClass'. This is a convenience command to
+ allow easily building classes on existing ones without having to
+ track which options were passed.
+
+ The difference between '\usepackage' and '\RequirePackage' is
+ small. The '\usepackage' command is intended for the document file
+ while '\RequirePackage' is intended for package and class files.
+ Thus, using '\usepackage' before the '\documentclass' command
+ causes LaTeX to give error like '\usepackage before
+ \documentclass', but you can use '\RequirePackage' there.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Fonts, Next: Layout, Prev: Document classes, Up: Top
+
+4 Fonts
+*******
+
+Two important aspects of selecting a "font" are specifying a size and a
+style. The LaTeX commands for doing this are described here.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Font styles:: Select roman, italics, etc.
+* Font sizes:: Select point size.
+* Low-level font commands:: Select encoding, family, series, shape.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Font styles, Next: Font sizes, Up: Fonts
+
+4.1 Font styles
+===============
+
+The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
+
+ In the table below the listed commands, the '\text...' commands, is
+used with an argument, as in '\textit{TEXT}'. This is the preferred
+form. But shown after it, in parenthesis, is the corresponding
+declaration form, which is sometimes useful. This form takes no
+arguments, as in '{\itshape TEXT}'. The scope of the declaration form
+lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group.
+In addition, each has an environment form such as
+'\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}'.
+
+ These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form,
+are cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying
+either of '\sffamily\bfseries' or '\bfseries\sffamily'.
+
+ One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert
+italic corrections if needed (*note \/::). Specifically, they insert
+the italic correction unless the following character is in the list
+'\nocorrlist', which by default consists of a period and a comma. To
+suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use '\nocorr' at
+the start or end of the command argument, such as '\textit{\nocorr
+text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'.
+
+'\textrm (\rmfamily)'
+ Roman.
+
+'\textit (\itshape)'
+ Italics.
+
+'\textmd (\mdseries)'
+ Medium weight (default).
+
+'\textbf (\bfseries)'
+ Boldface.
+
+'\textup (\upshape)'
+ Upright (default).
+
+'\textsl (\slshape)'
+ Slanted.
+
+'\textsf (\sffamily)'
+ Sans serif.
+
+'\textsc (\scshape)'
+ Small caps.
+
+'\texttt (\ttfamily)'
+ Typewriter.
+
+'\textnormal (\normalfont)'
+ Main document font.
+
+ Although it also changes fonts, the '\emph{TEXT}' command is
+semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
+substitute for '\textit'. For example, '\emph{START TEXT \emph{MIDDLE
+TEXT} END TEXT}' will result in the START TEXT and END TEXT in italics,
+but MIDDLE TEXT will be in roman.
+
+ LaTeX also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
+switch to the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative. They are used
+as declarations: '{\CMD...}' instead of '\CMD{...}'.
+
+ (The unconditional commands below are an older version of font
+switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most
+circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
+what you want.)
+
+'\bf'
+ Switch to bold face.
+
+'\cal'
+ Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
+
+'\it'
+ Italics.
+
+'\rm'
+ Roman.
+
+'\sc'
+ Small caps.
+
+'\sf'
+ Sans serif.
+
+'\sl'
+ Slanted (oblique).
+
+'\tt'
+ Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
+
+ The '\em' command is the unconditional version of '\emph'.
+
+ The following commands are for use in math mode. They are not
+cumulative, so '\mathbf{\mathit{SYMBOL}}' does not create a boldface and
+italic SYMBOL; instead, it will just be in italics. This is because
+typically math symbols need consistent typographic treatment, regardless
+of the surrounding environment.
+
+'\mathrm'
+ Roman, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathbf'
+ Boldface, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathsf'
+ Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathtt'
+ Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathit'
+'(\mit)'
+ Italics, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathnormal'
+ For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration.
+
+'\mathcal'
+ Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.
+
+ In addition, the command '\mathversion{bold}' can be used for
+switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
+'\mathversion{normal}' restores the default.
+
+ Finally, the command '\oldstylenums{NUMERALS}' will typeset so-called
+"old-style" numerals, which have differing heights and depths (and
+sometimes widths) from the standard "lining" numerals, which all have
+the same height as uppercase letters. LaTeX's default fonts support
+this, and will respect '\textbf' (but not other styles; there are no
+italic old-style numerals in Computer Modern). Many other fonts have
+old-style numerals also; sometimes the 'textcomp' package must be
+loaded, and sometimes package options are provided to make them the
+default. FAQ entry:
+<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf>.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Font sizes, Next: Low-level font commands, Prev: Font styles, Up: Fonts
+
+4.2 Font sizes
+==============
+
+The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. The
+table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size used
+(in points) with the '10pt', '11pt', and '12pt' document size options,
+respectively (*note Document class options::).
+
+Command '10pt' '11pt' '12pt'
+--------------------------------------------------------
+'\tiny' 5 6 6
+'\scriptsize' 7 8 8
+'\footnotesize' 8 9 10
+'\small' 9 10 10.95
+'\normalsize' (default) 10 10.95 12
+'\large' 12 12 14.4
+'\Large' 14.4 14.4 17.28
+'\LARGE' 17.28 17.28 20.74
+'\huge' 20.74 20.74 24.88
+'\Huge' 24.88 24.88 24.88
+
+ The commands are listed here in declaration forms. You use them by
+declaring them, as with this example.
+
+ \begin{quotation} \small
+ The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao.
+ \end{quotation}
+
+The scope of the '\small' lasts until the end of the 'quotation'
+environment. It would also end at the next type style command or the
+end of the current group, so you could enclose it in extra curly braces
+'{\small We are here, we are here, we are here!}'. You can instead use
+the environment form of these commands; for instance,
+'\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Low-level font commands, Prev: Font sizes, Up: Fonts
+
+4.3 Low-level font commands
+===========================
+
+These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
+packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
+ones.
+
+'\fontencoding{ENCODING}'
+ Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There
+ are a large number of valid encodings. The most common are 'OT1',
+ Knuth's original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
+ 'T1', also known as the Cork encoding, which has support for the
+ accented characters used by the most widespread European languages
+ (German, French, Italian, Polish and others), which allows TeX to
+ hyphenate words containing accented letters. For more, see
+ <https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide>.
+
+'\fontfamily{FAMILY}'
+ Select the font family. The web page
+ <http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/> provides one way to browse
+ through many of the fonts easily used with LaTeX. Here are
+ examples of some common families.
+
+ 'pag' Avant Garde
+ 'fvs' Bitstream Vera Sans
+ 'pbk' Bookman
+ 'bch' Charter
+ 'ccr' Computer Concrete
+ 'cmr' Computer Modern
+ 'cmss' Computer Modern Sans Serif
+ 'cmtt' Computer Modern Typewriter
+ 'pcr' Courier
+ 'phv' Helvetica
+ 'fi4' Inconsolata
+ 'lmr' Latin Modern
+ 'lmss' Latin Modern Sans
+ 'lmtt' Latin Modern Typewriter
+ 'pnc' New Century Schoolbook
+ 'ppl' Palatino
+ 'ptm' Times
+ 'uncl' Uncial
+ 'put' Utopia
+ 'pzc' Zapf Chancery
+
+'\fontseries{SERIES}'
+ Select the font series. A "series" combines a "weight" and a
+ "width". Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible
+ combinations. Some common combined series values include:
+
+ 'm' Medium (normal)
+ 'b' Bold
+ 'c' Condensed
+ 'bc' Bold condensed
+ 'bx' Bold extended
+
+ The possible values for weight, individually, are:
+
+ 'ul' Ultra light
+ 'el' Extra light
+ 'l' Light
+ 'sl' Semi light
+ 'm' Medium (normal)
+ 'sb' Semi bold
+ 'b' Bold
+ 'eb' Extra bold
+ 'ub' Ultra bold
+
+ The possible values for width, individually, are (the meaning and
+ relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces):
+
+ 'uc' Ultra condensed
+ 'ec' Extra condensed
+ 'c' Condensed
+ 'sc' Semi condensed
+ 'm' Medium
+ 'sx' Semi expanded
+ 'x' Expanded
+ 'ex' Extra expanded
+ 'ux' Ultra expanded
+
+ When forming the SERIES string from the weight and width, drop the
+ 'm' that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both
+ weight and width are 'm', in which case use just one (''m'').
+
+'\fontshape{SHAPE}'
+ Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+
+ 'n' Upright (normal)
+ 'it' Italic
+ 'sl' Slanted (oblique)
+ 'sc' Small caps
+ 'ui' Upright italics
+ 'ol' Outline
+
+ The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and
+ small caps are often missing as well.
+
+'\fontsize{SIZE}{SKIP}'
+ Set the font size and the line spacing. The unit of both
+ parameters defaults to points ('pt'). The line spacing is the
+ nominal vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline. It is
+ stored in the parameter '\baselineskip'. The default
+ '\baselineskip' for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the
+ '\fontsize'. Changing '\baselineskip' directly is inadvisable
+ since its value is reset every time a size change happens; see
+ '\baselinestretch', next.
+
+'\baselinestretch'
+ LaTeX multiplies the line spacing by the value of the
+ '\baselinestretch' parameter; the default factor is 1. A change
+ takes effect when '\selectfont' (see below) is called. You can
+ make a line skip change happen for the entire document, for
+ instance doubling it, by doing
+ '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0}' in the preamble.
+
+ However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
+ 'setspace' package. In addition to offering a number of spacing
+ options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in
+ places where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and
+ figure captions. See the package documentation.
+
+'\linespread{FACTOR}'
+ Equivalent to '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}', and
+ therefore must be followed by '\selectfont' to have any effect.
+ Best specified in the preamble, or use the 'setspace' package, as
+ just described.
+
+'\selectfont'
+ The effects of the font commands described above do not happen
+ until '\selectfont' is called, as in
+ '\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont'. It is often useful to put
+ this in a macro:
+ '\newcommand*{\myfont}{\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont}'
+ (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).
+
+'\usefont{ENC}{FAMILY}{SERIES}{SHAPE}'
+ The same as invoking '\fontencoding', '\fontfamily', '\fontseries'
+ and '\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by
+ '\selectfont'. For example:
+
+ \usefont{ot1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Layout, Next: Sectioning, Prev: Fonts, Up: Top
+
+5 Layout
+********
+
+Commands for controlling the general page layout.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \onecolumn:: Use one-column layout.
+* \twocolumn:: Use two-column layout.
+* \flushbottom:: Make all text pages the same height.
+* \raggedbottom:: Allow text pages of differing height.
+* Page layout parameters:: '\headheight' '\footskip'.
+* Floats:: Figures, tables, etc.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \onecolumn, Next: \twocolumn, Up: Layout
+
+5.1 '\onecolumn'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \onecolumn
+
+ Start a new page and produce single-column output. If the document
+is given the class option 'onecolumn' then this is the default behavior
+(*note Document class options::). This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \twocolumn, Next: \flushbottom, Prev: \onecolumn, Up: Layout
+
+5.2 '\twocolumn'
+================
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \twocolumn
+ \twocolumn[PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT]
+
+ Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is
+given the class option 'twocolumn' then this is the default (*note
+Document class options::). This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ If the optional PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT argument is present, it is
+typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts.
+
+ These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
+
+'\columnsep'
+ The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with
+ a command such as '\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}' You must change it
+ before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good
+ place.
+
+'\columnseprule'
+ The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway
+ between the two columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that there is
+ no rule. Change it with a command such as
+ '\setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}', before the two-column
+ environment starts.
+
+'\columnwidth'
+ The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to
+ '\textwidth'. In two-column mode by default LaTeX sets the width
+ of each of the two columns to be half of '\textwidth' minus
+ '\columnsep'.
+
+ In a two-column document, the starred environments 'table*' and
+'figure*' are two columns wide, whereas the unstarred environments
+'table' and 'figure' take up only one column (*note figure:: and *note
+table::). LaTeX places starred floats at the top of a page. The
+following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
+
+'\dbltopfraction'
+ The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
+ occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning
+ that the height of a 'table*' or 'figure*' environment must not
+ exceed '0.7\textheight' . If the height of your starred float
+ environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following
+ actions to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the
+ document:
+
+ * Use the '[tp]' location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put
+ the bulky float on a page by itself, as well as at the top of
+ a page.
+
+ * Use the '[t!]' location specifier to override the effect of
+ '\dbltopfraction' for this particular float.
+
+ * Increase the value of '\dbltopfraction' to a suitably large
+ number, to avoid going to float pages so soon.
+
+ You can redefine it, as with '\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}'.
+
+'\dblfloatpagefraction'
+ For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum
+ fraction that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of
+ blank space. LaTeX's default is '0.5'. Change it with
+ '\renewcommand'.
+
+'\dblfloatsep'
+ On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the
+ distance between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page.
+ The default is '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for a document set at '10pt'
+ or '11pt', and '14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for a document set at
+ '12pt'.
+
+'\dbltextfloatsep'
+ This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top
+ or bottom of a page and the main text. The default is '20pt
+ plus2pt minus4pt'.
+
+'\dbltopnumber'
+ On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the
+ maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The LaTeX
+ default is '2'.
+
+ This example uses '\twocolumn''s optional argument of to create a
+title that spans the two-column article:
+
+ \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+ \newcommand{\authormark}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
+ \begin{document}
+ \twocolumn[{% inside this optional argument goes one-column text
+ \centering
+ \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
+ \large Author One\authormark{1},
+ Author Two\authormark{2},
+ Author Three\authormark{1} \\[1em]
+ \normalsize
+ \begin{tabular}{p{.2\textwidth}@{\hspace{2em}}p{.2\textwidth}}
+ \authormark{1}Department one &\authormark{2}Department two \\
+ School one &School two
+ \end{tabular}\\[3em] % space below title part
+ }]
+
+ Two column text here.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \flushbottom, Next: \raggedbottom, Prev: \twocolumn, Up: Layout
+
+5.3 '\flushbottom'
+==================
+
+Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
+height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
+page. This is most often used when making two-sided documents since the
+differences in facing pages can be glaring.
+
+ If TeX cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
+then you get a message like 'Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active'. If you get that, one option is to
+change to '\raggedbottom' (*note \raggedbottom::). Alternatively, you
+can adjust the 'textheight' to make compatible pages, or you can add
+some vertical stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs, as in
+'\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}'. Your last option is to, in a
+final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages (*note
+\enlargethispage::).
+
+ The '\flushbottom' state is the default only if you select the
+'twoside' document class option (*note Document class options::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedbottom, Next: Page layout parameters, Prev: \flushbottom, Up: Layout
+
+5.4 '\raggedbottom'
+===================
+
+Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
+rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
+document the facing pages may be different heights. This command can go
+at any point in the document body. See *note \flushbottom::.
+
+ This is the default unless you select the 'twoside' document class
+option (*note Document class options::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Page layout parameters, Next: Floats, Prev: \raggedbottom, Up: Layout
+
+5.5 Page layout parameters
+==========================
+
+'\columnsep'
+'\columnseprule'
+'\columnwidth'
+ The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between
+ the columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class
+ option 'twocolumn' is in effect (*note Document class options::).
+ *Note \twocolumn::.
+
+'\headheight'
+ Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in
+ the 'article', 'report', and 'book' classes is '12pt', at all type
+ sizes.
+
+'\headsep'
+ Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top
+ of the main text. The default in the 'article' and 'report'
+ classes is '25pt'. In the 'book' class the default is: if the
+ document is set at 10pt then it is '0.25in', and at 11pt and 12pt
+ it is '0.275in'.
+
+'\footskip'
+ Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline
+ of the page footer. The default in the 'article' and 'report'
+ classes is '30pt'. In the 'book' class the default is: when the
+ type size is 10pt the default is '0.35in', while at 11pt it is
+ '0.38in', and at 12pt it is '30pt'.
+
+'\linewidth'
+ Width of the current line, decreased for each nested 'list' (*note
+ list::). That is, the nominal value for '\linewidth' is to equal
+ '\textwidth' but for each nested list the '\linewidth' is decreased
+ by the sum of that list's '\leftmargin' and '\rightmargin' (*note
+ itemize::).
+
+'\marginparpush'
+'\marginsep'
+'\marginparwidth'
+ The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the
+ horizontal space between the text body and the marginal notes, and
+ the horizontal width of the notes.
+
+ Normally marginal notes appear on the outside of the page, but the
+ declaration '\reversemarginpar' changes that (and
+ '\normalmarginpar' changes it back).
+
+ The defaults for '\marginparpush' in both 'book' and 'article'
+ classes are: '7pt' if the document is set at 12pt, and '5pt' if the
+ document is set at 11pt or 10pt.
+
+ For '\marginsep', in 'article' class the default is '10pt' except
+ if the document is set at 10pt and in two-column mode where the
+ default is '11pt'.
+
+ For '\marginsep' in 'book' class the default is '10pt' in
+ two-column mode and '7pt' in one-column mode.
+
+ For '\marginparwidth' in both 'book' and 'article' classes, in
+ two-column mode the default is 60% of '\paperwidth - \textwidth',
+ while in one-column mode it is 50% of that distance.
+
+'\oddsidemargin'
+'\evensidemargin'
+ The '\oddsidemargin' is the extra distance between the left side of
+ the page and the text's left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the
+ document class option 'twoside' is chosen and on all pages when
+ 'oneside' is in effect. When 'twoside' is in effect, on
+ even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is
+ 'evensidemargin'.
+
+ LaTeX's default is that '\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference
+ between '\paperwidth' and '\textwidth', and '\evensidemargin' is
+ the remainder.
+
+'\paperheight'
+ The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print
+ area. Normally set with a document class option, as in
+ '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
+ options::).
+
+'\paperwidth'
+ The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print
+ area. Normally set with a document class option, as in
+ '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
+ options::).
+
+'\textheight'
+ The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is
+ set at a nominal type size of 10pt then for an 'article' or
+ 'report' the default is '43\baselineskip', while for a 'book' it is
+ '41\baselineskip'. At a type size of 11pt the default is
+ '38\baselineskip' for all document classes. At 12pt it is
+ '36\baselineskip' for all classes.
+
+'\textwidth'
+ The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an
+ 'article' or 'report' document, the default is '345pt' when the
+ chosen type size is 10pt, the default is '360pt' at 11pt, and it is
+ '390pt' at 12pt. For a 'book' document, the default is '4.5in' at
+ a type size of 10pt, and '5in' at 11pt or 12pt.
+
+ In multi-column output, '\textwidth' remains the width of the
+ entire page body, while '\columnwidth' is the width of one column
+ (*note \twocolumn::).
+
+ In lists (*note list::), '\textwidth' remains the width of the
+ entire page body (and '\columnwidth' the width of the entire
+ column), while '\linewidth' may decrease for nested lists.
+
+ Inside a minipage (*note minipage::) or '\parbox' (*note
+ \parbox::), all the width-related parameters are set to the
+ specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of
+ the 'minipage' or '\parbox'.
+
+'\hsize'
+ This entry is included for completeness: '\hsize' is the TeX
+ primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should
+ not be used in normal LaTeX documents.
+
+'\topmargin'
+ Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the
+ paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is
+ computed based on many other parameters: '\paperheight - 2in -
+ \headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip', and then divided
+ by two.
+
+'\topskip'
+ Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline
+ of the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default
+ is the same as the font size, e.g., '10pt' at a type size of 10pt.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Floats, Prev: Page layout parameters, Up: Layout
+
+5.6 Floats
+==========
+
+Some typographic elements, such as figures and tables, cannot be broken
+across pages. They must be typeset outside of the normal flow of text,
+for instance floating to the top of a later page.
+
+ LaTeX can have a number of different classes of floating material.
+The default is the two classes, 'figure' (*note figure::) and 'table'
+(*note table::), but you can create a new class with the package
+'float'.
+
+ Within any one float class LaTeX always respects the order, so that
+the first figure in a document source must be typeset before the second
+figure. However, LaTeX may mix the classes, so it can happen that while
+the first table appears in the source before the first figure, it
+appears in the output after it.
+
+ The placement of floats is subject to parameters, given below, that
+limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and the
+bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued that the limits prevent them
+all from fitting on a page then LaTeX places what it can and defers the
+rest to the next page. In this way, floats may end up being typeset far
+from their place in the source. In particular, a float that is big may
+migrate to the end of the document. In which event, because all floats
+in a class must appear in sequential order, every following float in
+that class also appears at the end.
+
+ In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak
+where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its
+PLACEMENT argument. The possible values are a sequence of the letters
+below. The default for both 'figure' and 'table', in both 'article' and
+'book' classes, is 'tbp'.
+
+'t'
+ (Top)--at the top of a text page.
+
+'b'
+ (Bottom)--at the bottom of a text page. (However, 'b' is not
+ allowed for full-width floats ('figure*') with double-column
+ output. To ameliorate this, use the 'stfloats' or 'dblfloatfix'
+ package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ:
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat>.
+
+'h'
+ (Here)--at the position in the text where the 'figure' environment
+ appears. However, 'h' is not allowed by itself; 't' is
+ automatically added.
+
+ To absolutely force a float to appear "here", you can
+ '\usepackage{float}' and use the 'H' specifier which it defines.
+ For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere>.
+
+'p'
+ (Page of floats)--on a separate "float page", which is a page
+ containing no text, only floats.
+
+'!'
+ Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX
+ ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can
+ appear and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the
+ page. The '!' specifier does _not_ mean "put the float here"; see
+ above.
+
+ Note: the order in which letters appear in the PLACEMENT argument
+does not change the order in which LaTeX tries to place the float; for
+instance, 'btp' has the same effect as 'tbp'. All that PLACEMENT does
+is that if a letter is not present then the algorithm does not try that
+location. Thus, LaTeX's default of 'tbp' is to try every location
+except placing the float where it occurs in the source.
+
+ To prevent LaTeX from moving floats to the end of the document or a
+chapter you can use a '\clearpage' command to start a new page and
+insert all pending floats. If a pagebreak is undesirable then you can
+use the 'afterpage' package and issue '\afterpage{\clearpage}'. This
+will wait until the current page is finished and then flush all
+outstanding floats.
+
+ LaTeX can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
+(although on the same output page) if there is a 't' specifier in the
+PLACEMENT parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting the 't' is
+not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed at the top of the
+next page, then you can prevent it by either using the 'flafter' package
+or using the command '\suppressfloats[t]', which causes floats for the
+top position on this page to moved to the next page.
+
+ Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
+non-float text (change them with '\renewcommand{PARAMETER}{DECIMAL
+BETWEEN 0 AND 1}'):
+
+'\bottomfraction'
+ The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats
+ at the bottom; default '.3'.
+
+'\floatpagefraction'
+ The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
+ floats; default '.5'.
+
+'\textfraction'
+ Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
+ much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
+ different page. The default is '.2'.
+
+'\topfraction'
+ Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
+ floats; default '.7'.
+
+ Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with
+a command of the form '\setlength{PARAMETER}{LENGTH EXPRESSION}'):
+
+'\floatsep'
+ Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default '12pt
+ plus2pt minus2pt'.
+
+'\intextsep'
+ Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text;
+ default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for 10 point and 11 point
+ documents, and '14pt plus4pt minus4pt' for 12 point documents.
+
+'\textfloatsep'
+ Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
+ default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
+
+ Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with
+a command of the form '\setcounter{CTRNAME}{NATURAL NUMBER}'):
+
+'bottomnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text
+ page; default 1.
+
+'dbltopnumber'
+ Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
+ two-column page; default 2.
+
+'topnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
+ default 2.
+
+'totalnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
+
+ The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats
+<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats> contains
+suggestions for relaxing LaTeX's default parameters to reduce the
+problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the
+float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach's article "How to
+influence the position of float environments like figure and table in
+LaTeX?" (<http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf>).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Sectioning, Next: Cross references, Prev: Layout, Up: Top
+
+6 Sectioning
+************
+
+Structure your text into divisions: parts, chapters, sections, etc. All
+sectioning commands have the same form, one of:
+
+ SECTIONING-COMMAND{TITLE}
+ SECTIONING-COMMAND*{TITLE}
+ SECTIONING-COMMAND[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+For instance, declare the start of a subsection as with
+'\subsection{Motivation}'.
+
+ The table has each SECTIONING-COMMAND in LaTeX. All are available in
+all of LaTeX's standard document classes 'book', 'report',
+and 'article', except that '\chapter' is not available in 'article'.
+
+Sectioning unit Command Level
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+Part '\part' -1 ('book', 'report'), 0
+ ('article')
+Chapter '\chapter' 0
+Section '\section' 1
+Subsection '\subsection' 2
+Subsubsection '\subsubsection' 3
+Paragraph '\paragraph' 4
+Subparagraph '\subparagraph' 5
+
+ All these commands have a '*'-form that prints TITLE as usual but is
+not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents. An
+example of using this is for an appendix in an 'article' . The input
+'\appendix\section{Appendix}' gives the output 'A Appendix' (*note
+\appendix::). You can lose the numbering 'A' by instead entering
+'\section*{Appendix}' (articles often omit a table of contents and have
+simple page headers so the other differences from the '\section' command
+may not matter).
+
+ The section title TITLE provides the heading in the main text, but it
+may also appear in the table of contents and in the running head or foot
+(*note Page styles::). You may not want the same text in these places
+as in the main text. All of these commands have an optional argument
+TOC-TITLE for these other places.
+
+ The level number in the table above determines which sectional units
+are numbered, and which appear in the table of contents. If the
+sectioning command's LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the
+counter 'secnumdepth' then the titles for this sectioning command will
+be numbered (*note Sectioning/secnumdepth::). And, if LEVEL is less
+than or equal to the value of the counter 'tocdepth' then the table of
+contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit (*note
+Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+ LaTeX expects that before you have a '\subsection' you will have a
+'\section' and, in a book, that before a '\section' you will have a
+'\chapter'. Otherwise you can get a something like a subsection
+numbered '3.0.1'.
+
+ Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands.
+
+'secnumdepth'
+ Controls which sectioning commands are numbered. Suppress
+ numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than LEVEL
+ '\setcounter{secnumdepth}{LEVEL}' (*note \setcounter::). See the
+ above table for the level numbers. For instance, if the
+ 'secnumdepth' is 1 in an 'article' then a '\section{Introduction}'
+ command will produce output like '1 Introduction' while
+ '\subsection{Discussion}' will produce output like 'Discussion',
+ without the number. LaTeX's default 'secnumdepth' is 3 in
+ 'article' class and 2 in the 'book' and 'report' classes.
+
+'tocdepth'
+ Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of
+ contents. The setting '\setcounter{tocdepth}{LEVEL}' makes the
+ sectioning units at LEVEL be the smallest ones listed (*note
+ \setcounter::). See the above table for the level numbers. For
+ instance, if 'tocdepth' is 1 then the table of contents will list
+ sections but not subsections. LaTeX's default 'secnumdepth' is 3
+ in 'article' class and 2 in the 'book' and 'report' classes.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \part:: Start a part.
+* \chapter:: Start a chapter.
+* \section:: Start a section.
+* \subsection:: Start a subsection.
+* \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph:: Lower divisions.
+* \appendix:: Start appendices.
+* \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter:: The three parts of a book.
+* \@startsection:: Layout of sectional units.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \part, Next: \chapter, Up: Sectioning
+
+6.1 '\part'
+===========
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \part{TITLE}
+ \part*{TITLE}
+ \part[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+ Start a document part. The standard LaTeX classes 'book', 'report',
+and 'article', all have this command.
+
+ This produces a document part, in a book.
+
+ \part{VOLUME I \\
+ PERSONAL MEMOIRS OF U.\ S.\ GRANT}
+ \chapter{ANCESTRY--BIRTH--BOYHOOD.}
+ My family is American, and has been for generations,
+ in all its branches, direct and collateral.
+
+ In each standard class the '\part' command outputs a part number such
+as 'Part I', alone on its line, in boldface, and in large type. Then
+LaTeX outputs TITLE, also alone on its line, in bold and in even larger
+type. In class 'book', the LaTeX default puts each part alone on its
+own page. If the book is two-sided then LaTeX will skip a page if
+needed to have the new part on an odd-numbered page. In 'report' it is
+again alone on a page, but LaTeX won't force it onto an odd-numbered
+page. In an 'article' LaTeX does not put it on a fresh page, but
+instead outputs the part number and part title onto the main document
+page.
+
+ The '*' form shows TITLE but it does not show the part number, does
+not increment the 'part' counter, and produces no table of contents
+entry.
+
+ The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the part title in the
+table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::) and in running
+headers (*note Page styles::). If it is not present then TITLE will be
+there. This example puts a line break in TITLE but leaves out the break
+in the table of contents.
+
+ \part[Up from the bottom; my life]{Up from the bottom\\ my life}
+
+ For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a part is -1 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+ In the class 'article', if a paragraph immediately follows the part
+title then it is not indented. To get an indent you can use the package
+'indentfirst'.
+
+ One package to change the behavior of '\part' is 'titlesec'. See its
+documentation on CTAN.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \chapter, Next: \section, Prev: \part, Up: Sectioning
+
+6.2 '\chapter'
+==============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \chapter{TITLE}
+ \chapter*{TITLE}
+ \chapter[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+ Start a chapter. The standard LaTeX classes 'book' and 'report' have
+this command but 'article' does not.
+
+ This produces a chapter.
+
+ \chapter{Loomings}
+ Call me Ishmael.
+ Some years ago---never mind how long precisely---having little or no
+ money in my purse, and nothing particular to interest me on shore, I
+ thought I would sail about a little and see the watery part of
+ the world.
+
+ The LaTeX default starts each chapter on a fresh page, an
+odd-numbered page if the document is two-sided. It produces a chapter
+number such as 'Chapter 1' in large boldface type (the size is '\huge').
+It then puts TITLE on a fresh line, in boldface type that is still
+larger (size '\Huge'). It also increments the 'chapter' counter, adds
+an entry to the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::), and
+sets the running header information (*note Page styles::).
+
+ The '*' form shows TITLE on a fresh line, in boldface. But it does
+not show the chapter number, does not increment the 'chapter' counter,
+produces no table of contents entry, and does not affect the running
+header. (If you use the page style 'headings' in a two-sided document
+then the header will be from the prior chapter.) This example
+illustrates.
+
+ \chapter*{Preamble}
+
+ The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the chapter title in
+the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::) and in running
+headers (*note Page styles::). If it is not present then TITLE will be
+there. This shows the full name in the chapter title,
+
+ \chapter[Weyl]{Hermann Klaus Hugo (Peter) Weyl (1885--1955)}
+
+but only 'Weyl' on the contents page. This puts a line break in the
+title but that doesn't work well with running headers so it omits the
+break in the contents
+
+ \chapter[Given it all\\ my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
+
+ For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is 0 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+ The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. To get an indent use the package
+'indentfirst'.
+
+ You can change what is shown for the chapter number. To change it to
+something like 'Lecture 1', put in the preamble either
+'\renewcommand{\chaptername}{Lecture}' or this (*note \makeatletter &
+\makeatother::).
+
+ \makeatletter
+ \renewcommand{\@chapapp}{Lecture}
+ \makeatother
+
+To make this change because of the primary language for the document,
+see the package 'babel'.
+
+ In a two-sided document LaTeX puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if
+necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any
+running headers. To make that page completely blank, see *note
+\clearpage & \cleardoublepage::.
+
+ To change the behavior of the '\chapter' command, you can copy its
+definition from the LaTeX format file and make adjustments. But there
+are also many packages on CTAN that address this. One is 'titlesec'.
+See its documentation, but the example below gives a sense of what it
+can do.
+
+ \usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
+ \titleformat{\chapter}
+ {\Huge\bfseries} % format of title
+ {} % label, such as 1.2 for a subsection
+ {0pt} % length of separation between label and title
+ {} % before-code hook
+
+This omits the chapter number 'Chapter 1' from the page but unlike
+'\chapter*' it keeps the chapter in the table of contents and the
+running headers.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \section, Next: \subsection, Prev: \chapter, Up: Sectioning
+
+6.3 '\section'
+==============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \section{TITLE}
+ \section*{TITLE}
+ \section[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+ Start a section. The standard LaTeX classes 'article', 'book', and
+'report' all have this command.
+
+ This produces a section.
+
+ In this Part we tend to be more interested in the function,
+ in the input-output behavior,
+ than in the details of implementing that behavior.
+
+ \section{Turing machines}
+ Despite this desire to downplay implementation,
+ we follow the approach of A~Turing that the
+ first step toward defining the set of computable functions
+ is to reflect on the details of what mechanisms can do.
+
+ For the standard LaTeX classes 'book' and 'report' the default output
+is like '1.2 TITLE' (for chapter 1, section 2), alone on its line and
+flush left, in boldface and a larger type (the type size is '\Large').
+The same holds in 'article' except that there are no chapters in that
+class so it looks like '2 TITLE'.
+
+ The '*' form shows TITLE. But it does not show the section number,
+does not increment the 'section' counter, produces no table of contents
+entry, and does not affect the running header. (If you use the page
+style 'headings' in a two-sided document then the header will be from
+the prior section.)
+
+ The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the section title in
+the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::) and in running
+headers (*note Page styles::). If it is not present then TITLE will be
+there. This shows the full name in the title of the section,
+
+ \section[Elizabeth~II]{Elizabeth the Second,
+ by the Grace of God of the United Kingdom,
+ Canada and Her other Realms and Territories Queen,
+ Head of the Commonwealth, Defender of the Faith.}
+
+but only 'Elizabeth II' on the contents page and in the headers. This
+has a line break in TITLE but that does not work with headers so it is
+omitted from the contents and headers.
+
+ \section[Truth is, I cheated; my life story]{Truth is,
+ I cheated\\my life story}
+
+ For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a section is 1 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+ The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package 'indentfirst'.
+
+ In general, to change the behavior of the '\section' command, there
+are a number of options. One is the '\@startsection' command (*note
+\@startsection::). There are also many packages on CTAN that address
+this, including 'titlesec'. See the documentation but the example below
+gives a sense of what they can do.
+
+ \usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
+ \titleformat{\section}
+ {\normalfont\Large\bfseries} % format of title
+ {\makebox[1pc][r]{\thesection\hspace{1pc}}} % label
+ {0pt} % length of separation between label and title
+ {} % before-code hook
+ \titlespacing*{\section}
+ {-1pc}{18pt}{10pt}[10pc]
+
+That puts the section number in the margin.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \subsection, Next: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph, Prev: \section, Up: Sectioning
+
+6.4 '\subsection'
+=================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \subsection{TITLE}
+ \subsection*{TITLE}
+ \subsection[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+ Start a subsection. The standard LaTeX classes 'article', 'book',
+and 'report' all have this command.
+
+ This produces a subsection.
+
+ We will show that there are more functions than Turing machines and that
+ therefore some functions have no associated machine.
+
+ \subsection{Cardinality} We will begin with two paradoxes that
+ dramatize the challenge to our intuition posed by comparing the sizes of
+ infinite sets.
+
+ For the standard LaTeX classes 'book' and 'report' the default output
+is like '1.2.3 TITLE' (for chapter 1, section 2, subsection 3), alone on
+its line and flush left, in boldface and a larger type (the type size is
+'\large'). The same holds in 'article' except that there are no
+chapters in that class so it looks like '2.3 TITLE'.
+
+ The '*' form shows TITLE. But it does not show the section number,
+does not increment the 'section' counter, and produces no table of
+contents entry.
+
+ The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the section title in
+the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::). If it is not
+present then TITLE will be there. This shows the full name in the title
+of the section,
+
+ \subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
+ Chemical Elements} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow}
+
+but only 'U+03B1,U+03B2,U+03B3 paper' on the contents page.
+
+ For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is 2 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+ The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as
+is a standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to
+use the package 'indentfirst'.
+
+ There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the
+'\subsection' command. One is the '\@startsection' command (*note
+\@startsection::). There are also many packages on CTAN that address
+this, including 'titlesec'. See the documentation but the example below
+gives a sense of what they can do.
+
+ \usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
+ \titleformat{\subsection}[runin]
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries} % format of the title
+ {\thesubsection} % label
+ {0.6em} % space between label and title
+ {} % before-code hook
+
+That puts the subsection number and TITLE in the first line of text.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph, Next: \appendix, Prev: \subsection, Up: Sectioning
+
+6.5 '\subsubsection', '\paragraph', '\subparagraph'
+===================================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \subsubsection{TITLE}
+ \subsubsection*{TITLE}
+ \subsubsection[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+or one of:
+
+ \paragraph{TITLE}
+ \paragraph*{TITLE}
+ \paragraph[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+or one of:
+
+ \subparagraph{TITLE}
+ \subparagraph*{TITLE}
+ \subparagraph[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+ Start a subsubsection, paragraph, or subparagraph. The standard
+LaTeX classes 'article', 'book', and 'report' all have these commands,
+although they are not commonly used.
+
+ This produces a subsubsection.
+
+ \subsubsection{Piston ring compressors: structural performance}
+ Provide exterior/interior wall cladding assemblies
+ capable of withstanding the effects of load and stresses from
+ consumer-grade gasoline engine piston rings.
+
+ The default output of each of the three does not change over the
+standard LaTeX classes 'article', 'book', and 'report'. For
+'\subsubsection' the TITLE is alone on its line, in boldface and normal
+size type. For '\paragraph' the TITLE is inline with the text, not
+indented, in boldface and normal size type. For '\subparagraph' the
+TITLE is inline with the text, with a paragraph indent, in boldface and
+normal size type (Because an 'article' has no chapters its
+subsubsections are numbered and so it looks like '1.2.3 TITLE', for
+section 1, subsection 2, and subsubsection 3. The other two divisions
+are not numbered.)
+
+ The '*' form shows TITLE. But it does not increment the associated
+counter and produces no table of contents entry (and does not show the
+number for '\subsubsection').
+
+ The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the division title in
+the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::). If it is not
+present then TITLE will be there.
+
+ For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a subsubsection is 3, of a
+paragraph is 4, and of a subparagraph is 5 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+ The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented,
+as is a standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to
+use the package 'indentfirst'.
+
+ There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these
+commands. One is the '\@startsection' command (*note \@startsection::).
+There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including
+'titlesec'. See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \appendix, Next: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter, Prev: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph, Up: Sectioning
+
+6.6 '\appendix'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \appendix
+
+ This does not directly produce any output. But in a book or report
+it declares that subsequent '\chapter' commands start an appendix. In
+an article it does the same, for '\section' commands. It also resets
+the 'chapter' and 'section' counters to 0 in a book or report, and in an
+article resets the 'section' and 'subsection' counters.
+
+ In this book
+
+ \chapter{One} ...
+ \chapter{Two} ...
+ ...
+ \appendix
+ \chapter{Three} ...
+ \chapter{Four} ...
+
+the first two will generate output numbered 'Chapter 1' and 'Chapter 2'.
+After the '\appendix' the numbering will be 'Appendix A' and 'Appendix
+B'. *Note Larger book template:: for another example.
+
+ The 'appendix' package adds the command '\appendixpage' to put a
+separate 'Appendices' in the document body before the first appendix,
+and the command '\addappheadtotoc' to do the same in the table of
+contents. You can reset the name 'Appendix' with a command like
+'\renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}', as well as a number of
+other features. See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter, Next: \@startsection, Prev: \appendix, Up: Sectioning
+
+6.7 '\frontmatter', '\mainmatter', '\backmatter'
+================================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \frontmatter
+ \mainmatter
+ \backmatter
+
+ Format a 'book' class document differently according to which part of
+the document is being produced. All three commands are optional.
+
+ Traditionally, a book's front matter contains such things as the
+title page, an abstract, a table of contents, a preface, a list of
+notations, a list of figures, and a list of tables. (Some of these
+front matter pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not
+numbered.) The back matter may contain such things as a glossary,
+notes, a bibliography, and an index.
+
+ The '\frontmatter' declaration makes the pages numbered in lowercase
+roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each chapter's title
+appears in the table of contents; if you use other sectioning commands
+here, use the '*'-version (*note Sectioning::). The '\mainmatter'
+changes the behavior back to the expected version, and resets the page
+number. The '\backmatter' leaves the page numbering alone but switches
+the chapters back to being not numbered. *Note Larger book template::
+for an example using the three.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \@startsection, Prev: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter, Up: Sectioning
+
+6.8 '\@startsection'
+====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \@startsection{NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}
+
+ Used to help redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning
+divisions such as '\section' or '\subsection'.
+
+ Note that the 'titlesec' package makes manipulation of sectioning
+easier. Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
+satisfied with '\@startsection', some cannot. For instance, in the
+standard LaTeX 'book' and 'report' classes the commands '\chapter' and
+'\report' are not constructed in this way. To make such a command you
+may want to use the '\secdef' command.
+
+ Technically, '\@startsection' has the form
+
+ \@startsection{NAME}
+ {LEVEL}
+ {INDENT}
+ {BEFORESKIP}
+ {AFTERSKIP}
+ {STYLE}*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}
+
+so that issuing
+
+ \renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection{NAME}
+ {LEVEL}
+ {INDENT}
+ {BEFORESKIP}
+ {AFTERSKIP}
+ {STYLE}}
+
+redefines '\section' to have the form '\section*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}' (here
+too, the star '*' is optional). *Note Sectioning::. This implies that
+when you write a command like '\renewcommand{section}{...}', the
+'\@startsection{...}' must come last in the definition. See the
+examples below.
+
+NAME
+ Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header. This
+ counter must be defined separately. Most commonly this is either
+ 'section', 'subsection', or 'paragraph'. Although in those cases
+ the counter name is the same as the sectioning command itself, you
+ don't have to use the same name.
+
+ Then '\the'NAME displays the title number and '\'NAME'mark' is for
+ the page headers. See the third example below.
+
+LEVEL
+ An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command. *Note
+ Sectioning:: for the list of standard level numbers.
+
+ If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+ 'secnumdepth' then titles for this sectioning command will be
+ numbered (*note Sectioning/secnumdepth::). For instance, if
+ 'secnumdepth' is 1 in an 'article' then the command
+ '\section{Introduction}' will produce output like "1 Introduction"
+ while '\subsection{Discussion}' will produce output like
+ "Discussion", without the number prefix.
+
+ If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the counter TOCDEPTH
+ then the table of contents will have an entry for this sectioning
+ unit (*note Sectioning/tocdepth::). For instance, in an 'article',
+ if TOCDEPTH is 1 then the table of contents will list sections but
+ not subsections.
+
+INDENT
+ A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with
+ respect to the left margin. To have the title flush with the
+ margin use '0pt'. A negative indentation such as '-\parindent'
+ will move the title into the left margin.
+
+BEFORESKIP
+ The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space
+ that is inserted before this sectioning unit's title. This space
+ will be discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the
+ top of a fresh page. If this number is negative then the first
+ paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is
+ non-negative then the first paragraph is indented. (Note that the
+ negative of '1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt' is '-1pt plus -2pt minus
+ -3pt'.)
+
+ For example, if BEFORESKIP is '-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex' then
+ to start the new sectioning unit, LaTeX will add about 3.5 times
+ the height of a letter x in vertical space, and the first paragraph
+ in the section will not be indented. Using a rubber length, with
+ 'plus' and 'minus', is good practice here since it gives LaTeX more
+ flexibility in making up the page (*note Lengths::).
+
+ The full accounting of the vertical space between the baseline of
+ the line prior to this sectioning unit's header and the baseline of
+ the header is that it is the sum of the '\parskip' of the text
+ font, the '\baselineskip' of the title font, and the absolute value
+ of the BEFORESKIP. This space is typically rubber so it may
+ stretch or shrink. (If the sectioning unit starts on a fresh page
+ so that the vertical space is discarded then the baseline of the
+ header text will be where LaTeX would put the baseline of the first
+ text line on that page.)
+
+AFTERSKIP
+ This is a length. If AFTERSKIP is non-negative then this is the
+ vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit's title header.
+ If it is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so
+ that it becomes part of the next paragraph. In this case the
+ absolute value of the length gives the horizontal space between the
+ end of the title and the beginning of the following paragraph.
+ (Note that the negative of '1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt' is '-1pt plus
+ -2pt minus -3pt'.)
+
+ As with BEFORESKIP, using a rubber length, with 'plus' and 'minus'
+ components, is good practice here since it gives LaTeX more
+ flexibility in putting together the page.
+
+ If 'afterskip' is non-negative then the full accounting of the
+ vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit's header
+ and the baseline of the first line of the following paragraph is
+ that it is the sum of the '\parskip' of the title font, the
+ '\baselineskip' of the text font, and the value of AFTER. That
+ space is typically rubber so it may stretch or shrink. (Note that
+ because the sign of 'afterskip' changes the sectioning unit
+ header's from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
+ 'afterskip' to cancel part of the '\parskip'.)
+
+STYLE
+ Controls the styling of the title. See the examples below.
+ Typical commands to use here are '\centering', '\raggedright',
+ '\normalfont', '\hrule', or '\newpage'. The last command in STYLE
+ may be one that takes one argument, such as '\MakeUppercase' or
+ '\fbox' that takes one argument. The section title will be
+ supplied as the argument to this command. For instance, setting
+ STYLE to '\bfseries\MakeUppercase' would produce titles that are
+ bold and uppercase.
+
+ These are LaTeX's defaults for the first three sectioning units that
+are defined with '\@startsection', for the 'article', 'book', and
+'report' classes. For section, the LEVEL is 1, the INDENT is 0pt, the
+BEFORESKIP is '-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', the AFTERSKIP is '2.3ex
+plus 0.2ex', and the STYLE is '\normalfont\Large\bfseries'. For
+subsection, the LEVEL is 2, the INDENT is 0pt, the BEFORESKIP is
+'-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', the AFTERSKIP is '1.5ex plus 0.2ex',
+and the STYLE is '\normalfont\large\bfseries'. For subsubsection, the
+LEVEL is 3, the INDENT is 0pt, the BEFORESKIP is '-3.25ex plus -1ex
+minus -0.2ex', the AFTERSKIP is '1.5ex plus 0.2ex', and the STYLE is
+'\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries'.
+
+ Here are examples. They go either in a package or class file or in
+the preamble of a LaTeX document. If you put them in the preamble they
+must go between a '\makeatletter' command and a '\makeatother'.
+(Probably the error message 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical
+mode.' means that you forgot this.) *Note \makeatletter &
+\makeatother::.
+
+ This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered. It
+says '\renewcommand' because LaTeX's standard classes have already
+defined a '\section'. For the same reason it does not define a
+'section' counter, or the commands '\thesection' and '\l@section'.
+
+ \renewcommand\section{%
+ \@startsection{section}% *note NAME: \@startsection/name.
+ {1}% *note LEVEL: \@startsection/level.
+ {0pt}% *note INDENT: \@startsection/indent.
+ {-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex}% *note BEFORESKIP: \@startsection/beforeskip.
+ {2.3ex plus.2ex}% *note AFTERSKIP: \@startsection/afterskip.
+ {\centering\normalfont\Large\bfseries}% *note STYLE: \@startsection/style.
+ }
+
+ This will put 'subsection' titles in small caps type, inline with the
+paragraph.
+
+ \renewcommand\subsection{%
+ \@startsection{subsection}% *note NAME: \@startsection/name.
+ {2}% *note LEVEL: \@startsection/level.
+ {0em}% *note INDENT: \@startsection/indent.
+ {-1ex plus 0.1ex minus -0.05ex}% *note BEFORESKIP: \@startsection/beforeskip.
+ {-1em plus 0.2em}% *note AFTERSKIP: \@startsection/afterskip.
+ {\scshape}% *note STYLE: \@startsection/style.
+ }
+
+ The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands.
+This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to
+display that counter.
+
+ \setcounter{secnumdepth}{6}% show counters this far down
+ \newcounter{subsubparagraph}[subparagraph]% counter for numbering
+ \renewcommand{\thesubsubparagraph}% how to display
+ {\thesubparagraph.\@arabic\c@subsubparagraph}% numbering
+ \newcommand{\subsubparagraph}{\@startsection
+ {subsubparagraph}%
+ {6}%
+ {0em}%
+ {\baselineskip}%
+ {0.5\baselineskip}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize}}
+ \newcommand*\l@subsubparagraph{\@dottedtocline{6}{10em}{5em}}% for toc
+ \newcommand{\subsubparagraphmark}[1]{}% for page headers
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Cross references, Next: Environments, Prev: Sectioning, Up: Top
+
+7 Cross references
+******************
+
+We often want something like 'See Theorem~31'. But by-hand typing the
+31 is poor practice. Instead you should write a "label" such as
+'\label{eq:GreensThm}' and then "reference" it, as with 'See
+equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}'. LaTeX will automatically work out the
+number, put it into the output, and will change that number later if
+needed.
+
+ We will see this with Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm}. % forward reference
+ ...
+ \begin{theorem} \label{th:GreensThm}
+ ...
+ \end{theorem}
+ ...
+ See Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm} on page~\pageref{th:GreensThm}.
+
+ LaTeX tracks cross reference information in a file having the
+extension '.aux' and with the same base name as the file containing the
+'\label'. So if '\label' is in 'calculus.tex' then the information is
+in 'calculus.aux'. LaTeX puts the information in that file every time
+it runs across a '\label'.
+
+ The behavior described in the prior paragraph results in a quirk that
+happens when your document has a "forward reference", a '\ref' that
+appears before the associated '\label'. If this is the first time that
+you are compiling the document then you will get 'LaTeX Warning:
+Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross references right' and in
+the output the forward reference will appear as two question marks '??',
+in boldface. A similar thing happens if you change some things so the
+references changes; you get the same warning and the output contains the
+old reference information. In both cases, resolve this by compiling the
+document a second time.
+
+ The 'cleveref' package enhances LaTeX's cross referencing features.
+You can arrange that if you enter
+'\begin{thm}\label{th:Nerode}...\end{thm}' then '\cref{th:Nerode}' will
+output 'Theorem 3.21', without you having to enter the "Theorem."
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \label:: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
+* \pageref:: Refer to a page number.
+* \ref:: Refer to a section, figure or similar.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \label, Next: \pageref, Up: Cross references
+
+7.1 '\label'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \label{KEY}
+
+ Assign a reference number to KEY. In ordinary text '\label{KEY}'
+assigns to KEY the number of the current sectional unit. Inside an
+environment with numbering, such as a 'table' or 'theorem' environment,
+'\label{KEY}' assigns to KEY the number of that environment. Retrieve
+the assigned number with the '\ref{KEY}' command (*note \ref::).
+
+ A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
+punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished,
+as usual.
+
+ A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a
+suffix separated by a colon or period. Thus, '\label{fig:Post}' is a
+label for a figure with a portrait of Emil Post. This helps to avoid
+accidentally creating two labels with the same name, and makes your
+source more readable. Some commonly-used prefixes:
+
+'ch'
+ for chapters
+
+'sec'
+'subsec'
+ for lower-level sectioning commands
+
+'fig'
+ for figures
+
+'tab'
+ for tables
+
+'eq'
+ for equations
+
+ In the auxiliary file the reference information is kept as the text
+of a command of the form '\newlabel{LABEL}{{CURRENTLABEL}{PAGENUMBER}}'.
+Here CURRENTLABEL is the current value of the macro '\@currentlabel'
+that is usually updated whenever you call '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'.
+
+ Below, the key 'sec:test' will get the number of the current section
+and the key 'fig:test' will get the number of the figure.
+(Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and tables.)
+
+ \section{section name}
+ \label{sec:test}
+ This is Section~\ref{sec:test}.
+ \begin{figure}
+ ...
+ \caption{caption text}
+ \label{fig:test}
+ \end{figure}
+ See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \pageref, Next: \ref, Prev: \label, Up: Cross references
+
+7.2 '\pageref'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \pageref{KEY}
+
+ Produce the page number of the place in the text where the
+corresponding '\label'{KEY} command appears.
+
+ If there is no '\label{KEY}' then you get something like 'LaTeX
+Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on input line 11.'
+
+ Below, the '\label{eq:main}' is used both for the formula number and
+for the page number. (Note that the two references are forward
+references so this document would need to be compiled twice to resolve
+those.)
+
+ The main result is formula~\ref{eq:main} on page~\pageref{eq:main}.
+ ...
+ \begin{equation} \label{eq:main}
+ \mathbf{P}=\mathbf{NP}
+ \end{equation}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \ref, Prev: \pageref, Up: Cross references
+
+7.3 '\ref'
+==========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ref{KEY}
+
+ Produces the number of the sectional unit, equation, footnote,
+figure, ..., of the corresponding '\label' command (*note \label::). It
+does not produce any text, such as the word 'Section' or 'Figure', just
+the bare number itself.
+
+ If there is no '\label{KEY}' then you get something like 'LaTeX
+Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on input line 11.'
+
+ In this example the '\ref{popular}' produces '2'. Note that it is a
+forward reference since it comes before '\label{popular}' so this
+document would have to be compiled twice.
+
+ The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Plain \TeX
+ \item \label{popular} \LaTeX
+ \item Con\TeX t
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ The 'cleveref' package includes text such as 'Theorem' in the
+reference. See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Environments, Next: Line breaking, Prev: Cross references, Up: Top
+
+8 Environments
+**************
+
+LaTeX provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior. An
+environment begins with '\begin' and ends with '\end', like this:
+
+ \begin{ENVIRONMENT-NAME}
+ ...
+ \end{ENVIRONMENT-NAME}
+
+ The ENVIRONMENT-NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
+end. For instance, the input '\begin{table*}...\end{table}' will cause
+an error like: '! LaTeX Error: \begin{table*} on input line 5 ended by
+\end{table}.'
+
+ Environments are executed within a group.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* abstract:: Produce an abstract.
+* array:: Math arrays.
+* center:: Centered lines.
+* description:: Labelled lists.
+* displaymath:: Formulas that appear on their own line.
+* document:: Enclose the whole document.
+* enumerate:: Numbered lists.
+* eqnarray:: Sequences of aligned equations.
+* equation:: Displayed equation.
+* figure:: Floating figures.
+* filecontents:: Writing multiple files from the source.
+* flushleft:: Flushed left lines.
+* flushright:: Flushed right lines.
+* itemize:: Bulleted lists.
+* letter:: Letters.
+* list:: Generic list environment.
+* math:: In-line math.
+* minipage:: Miniature page.
+* picture:: Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
+* quotation & quote:: Include a quotation.
+* tabbing:: Align text arbitrarily.
+* table:: Floating tables.
+* tabular:: Align text in columns.
+* thebibliography:: Bibliography or reference list.
+* theorem:: Theorems, lemmas, etc.
+* titlepage:: For hand crafted title pages.
+* verbatim:: Simulating typed input.
+* verse:: For poetry and other things.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: abstract, Next: array, Up: Environments
+
+8.1 'abstract'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{abstract}
+ ...
+ \end{abstract}
+
+ Produce an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. This
+environment is only defined in the 'article' and 'report' document
+classes (*note Document classes::).
+
+ Using the example below in the 'article' class produces a displayed
+paragraph. Document class option 'titlepage' causes the abstract to be
+on a separate page (*note Document class options::); this is the default
+only in the 'report' class.
+
+ \begin{abstract}
+ We compare all known accounts of the proposal made by Porter Alexander
+ to Robert E Lee at the Appomattox Court House that the army continue
+ in a guerrilla war, which Lee refused.
+ \end{abstract}
+
+ The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column
+document (for a more flexible solution, use the package 'abstract').
+
+ \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+ ...
+ \begin{document}
+ \title{Babe Ruth as Cultural Progenitor: a Atavistic Approach}
+ \author{Smith \\ Jones \\ Robinson\thanks{Railroad tracking grant.}}
+ \twocolumn[
+ \begin{@twocolumnfalse}
+ \maketitle
+ \begin{abstract}
+ Ruth was not just the Sultan of Swat, he was the entire swat
+ team.
+ \end{abstract}
+ \end{@twocolumnfalse}
+ ]
+ { % by-hand insert a footnote at page bottom
+ \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+ \footnotetext[1]{Thanks for all the fish.}
+ }
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: array, Next: center, Prev: abstract, Up: Environments
+
+8.2 'array'
+===========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{array}{COLS}
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
+ ...
+ \end{array}
+
+or:
+
+ \begin{array}[POS]{COLS}
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
+ ...
+ \end{array}
+
+ Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in
+math mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics
+environment such as 'equation' (*note equation::). Inside of each row
+the column entries are separated by an ampersand, ('&'). Rows are
+terminated with double-backslashes (*note \\::).
+
+ This example shows a three by three array.
+
+ \begin{equation*}
+ \chi(x) =
+ \left| % vertical bar fence
+ \begin{array}{ccc}
+ x-a &-b &-c \\
+ -d &x-e &-f \\
+ -g &-h &x-i
+ \end{array}
+ \right|
+ \end{equation*}
+
+ The required argument COLS describes the number of columns, their
+alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. For instance,
+'\begin{array}{rcl}...\end{array}' gives three columns: the first flush
+right, the second centered, and the third flush left. See *note
+tabular:: for the complete description of COLS and of the other common
+features of the two environments, including the optional POS argument.
+
+ There are two ways that 'array' diverges from 'tabular'. The first
+is that 'array' entries are typeset in math mode, in textstyle (*note
+Modes::) except if the COLS definition specifies the column with
+'p{...}', which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode. The second
+is that, instead of 'tabular''s parameter '\tabcolsep', LaTeX's
+intercolumn space in an 'array' is governed by '\arraycolsep', which
+gives half the width between columns. The default for this is '5pt' so
+that between two columns comes 10pt of space.
+
+ To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the 'amsmath'
+package. It comes with environments 'pmatrix' for an array surrounded
+by parentheses '(...)', 'bmatrix' for an array surrounded by square
+brackets '[...]', 'Bmatrix' for an array surrounded by curly
+braces '{...}', 'vmatrix' for an array surrounded by vertical
+bars '|...|', and 'Vmatrix' for an array surrounded by double vertical
+bars '||...||', along with a number of other array constructs.
+
+ The next example uses the 'amsmath' package.
+
+ \usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \begin{vmatrix}{cc} % array with vert lines
+ a &b \\
+ c &d
+ \end{vmatrix}=ad-bc
+ \end{equation}
+
+ There are many packages concerning arrays. The 'array' package has
+many useful extensions, including more column types. The 'dcolumn'
+package adds a column type to center on a decimal point. For both see
+the documentation on CTAN.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: center, Next: description, Prev: array, Up: Environments
+
+8.3 'center'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{center}
+ LINE1 \\
+ LINE2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{center}
+
+ Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
+centered within the left and right margins. Use double-backslash, '\\',
+to get a line break (*note \\::). If some text is too long to fit on a
+line then LaTeX will insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid
+stretching or shrinking any interword space.
+
+ This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
+*note \centering:: to avoid such space, for example inside a 'figure'
+environment.
+
+ This example produces three centered lines. There is extra vertical
+space between the last two lines.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ A Thesis Submitted in Partial Fufillment \\
+ of the Requirements of \\[0.5ex]
+ the School of Environmental Engineering
+ \end{center}
+
+ In this example, depending on the page's line width, LaTeX may choose
+a line break for the part before the double backslash. If so, it will
+center each of the two lines and if not it will center the single line.
+Then LaTeX will break at the double backslash, and will center the
+ending.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink
+ alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\
+ I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton
+ \end{center}
+
+ A double backslash after the final line is optional. If present it
+doesn't add any vertical space.
+
+ In a two-column document the text is centered in a column, not in the
+entire page.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \centering:: Declaration form of the 'center' environment.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \centering, Up: center
+
+8.3.1 '\centering'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ {\centering ... }
+
+or
+
+ \begin{group}
+ \centering ...
+ \end{group}
+
+ Center the material in its scope. It is most often used inside an
+environment such as 'figure', or in a 'parbox'.
+
+ This example's '\centering' declaration causes the graphic to be
+horizontally centered.
+
+ \begin{figure}
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png}
+ \caption{CTAN Lion} \label{fig:CTANLion}
+ \end{figure}
+
+The scope of this '\centering' ends with the '\end{figure}'.
+
+ Unlike the 'center' environment, the '\centering' command does not
+add vertical space above and below the text. That's its advantage in
+the above example; there is not an excess of space.
+
+ It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. If 'ww {\centering xx \\ yy} zz' is surrounded
+by blank lines then LaTeX will create a paragraph whose first line 'ww
+xx' is centered and whose second line, not centered, contains 'yy zz'.
+Usually what is desired is for the scope of the declaration to contain a
+blank line or the '\end' command of an environment such as 'figure' or
+'table' that ends the paragraph unit. Thus, if '{\centering xx \\
+yy\par} zz' is surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph
+with two centered lines 'xx' and 'yy', followed by a new paragraph with
+'zz' that is formatted as usual.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: description, Next: displaymath, Prev: center, Up: Environments
+
+8.4 'description'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] TEXT OF FIRST ITEM
+ \item[LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] TEXT OF SECOND ITEM
+ ...
+ \end{description}
+
+ Environment to make a list of labeled items. Each item's LABEL is
+typeset in bold and is flush left, so that long labels continue into the
+first line of the item text. There must be at least one item; having
+none causes the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing
+\item'.
+
+ This example shows the environment used for a sequence of
+definitions.
+
+ \begin{definition}
+ \item[lama] A priest.
+ \item[llama] A beast.
+ \end{definition}
+
+The labels 'lama' and 'llama' are output in boldface, with the left edge
+on the left margin.
+
+ Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::). Use the
+optional labels, as in '\item[Main point]', because there is no sensible
+default. Following the '\item' is optional text, which may contain
+multiple paragraphs.
+
+ Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a
+font change given in argument style (see *note Font styles::) then it
+will come out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for
+typewriter with '\item[\texttt{label text}]' then it will appear in bold
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way around this, in this
+example to get non-bold typewriter, is to use declarative style:
+'\item[{\tt label text}]'. Similarly, get the standard roman font with
+'\item[{\rm label text}]'.
+
+ For other major LaTeX labelled list environments, see *note itemize::
+and *note enumerate::. Unlike those environments, nesting 'description'
+environments does not change the default label; it is boldface and flush
+left at all levels.
+
+ For information about list layout parameters, including the default
+values, and for information about customizing list layout, see *note
+list::. The package 'enumitem' is useful for customizing lists.
+
+ This example changes the description labels to small caps.
+
+ \renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{%
+ {\hspace{\labelsep}\textsc{#1}}}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: displaymath, Next: document, Prev: description, Up: Environments
+
+8.5 'displaymath'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ MATHEMATICAL TEXT
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+ Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display
+style and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global
+option 'fleqn'; see *note Document class options::.
+
+ In the 'displaymath' environment no equation number is added to the
+math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the 'equation'
+environment (*note equation::).
+
+ LaTeX will not break the MATH TEXT across lines.
+
+ Note that the 'amsmath' package has significantly more extensive
+displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of ways
+in that package for having math text broken across lines.
+
+ The construct '\[MATH TEXT\]' is essentially a synonym for
+'\begin{displaymath}MATH TEXT\end{displaymath}' but the latter is easier
+to work with in the source file; for instance, searching for a square
+bracket may get false positives but the word 'displaymath' will likely
+be unique. (The construct '$$MATH TEXT$$' from Plain TeX is sometimes
+mistakenly used as a synonym for 'displaymath'. It is not a synonym,
+because the 'displaymath' environment checks that it isn't started in
+math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
+environment start, because the 'displaymath' environment has different
+vertical spacing, and because the 'displaymath' environment honors the
+'fleqn' option.)
+
+ The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version '\( \int_1^2
+x^2\,dx=7/3 \)' produces.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: document, Next: enumerate, Prev: displaymath, Up: Environments
+
+8.6 'document'
+==============
+
+The 'document' environment encloses the entire body of a document. It
+is required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting and ending::.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \AtBeginDocument:: Hook for commands at the start of the document.
+* \AtEndDocument:: Hook for commands at the end of the document.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \AtBeginDocument, Next: \AtEndDocument, Up: document
+
+8.6.1 '\AtBeginDocument'
+------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \AtBeginDocument{CODE}
+
+ Save CODE and execute it when '\begin{document}' is executed, at the
+very end of the preamble. The code is executed after the font selection
+tables have been set up, so the normal font for the document is the
+current font. However, the code is executed as part of the preamble so
+you cannot do any typesetting with it.
+
+ You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \AtEndDocument, Prev: \AtBeginDocument, Up: document
+
+8.6.2 '\AtEndDocument'
+----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \AtEndDocument{CODE}
+
+ Save CODE and execute it near the end of the document. Specifically,
+it is executed when '\end{document}' is executed, before the final page
+is finished and before any leftover floating environments are processed.
+If you want some of the code to be executed after these two processes
+then include a '\clearpage' at the appropriate point in CODE.
+
+ You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: enumerate, Next: eqnarray, Prev: document, Up: Environments
+
+8.7 'enumerate'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] TEXT OF FIRST ITEM
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] TEXT OF SECOND ITEM
+ ...
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ Environment to produce a numbered list of items. The format of the
+label numbering depends on the nesting level of this environment; see
+below. The default top-level numbering is '1.', '2.', etc. Each
+'enumerate' list environment must have at least one item; having none
+causes the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item'.
+
+ This example gives the first two finishers in the 1908 Olympic
+marathon. As a top-level list the labels would come out as '1.' and
+'2.'.
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Johnny Hayes (USA)
+ \item Charles Hefferon (RSA)
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::). If you
+give '\item' an optional argument by following it with square brackets,
+as in '\item[Interstitial label]', then the next item will continue the
+interrupted sequence (*note \item::). That is, you will get labels like
+'1.', then 'Interstitial label', then '2.'. Following the '\item' is
+optional text, which may contain multiple paragraphs.
+
+ Enumerations may be nested within other 'enumerate' environments, or
+within any paragraph-making environment such as 'itemize' (*note
+itemize::), up to four levels deep. This gives LaTeX's default for the
+format at each nesting level, where 1 is the top level, the outermost
+level.
+
+ 1. arabic number followed by a period: '1.', '2.', ...
+ 2. lowercase letter inside parentheses: '(a)', '(b)' ...
+ 3. lowercase roman numeral followed by a period: 'i.', 'ii.', ...
+ 4. uppercase letter followed by a period: 'A.', 'B.', ...
+
+ The 'enumerate' environment uses the counters '\enumi' through
+'\enumiv' (*note Counters::).
+
+ For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see *note
+description:: and *note itemize::. For information about list layout
+parameters, including the default values, and for information about
+customizing list layout, see *note list::. The package 'enumitem' is
+useful for customizing lists.
+
+ To change the format of the label use '\renewcommand' (*note
+\newcommand & \renewcommand::) on the commands '\labelenumi' through
+'\labelenumiv'. For instance, this first level list will be labelled
+with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing period.
+
+ \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\textbf{\Alph{enumi}}}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Shows as boldface A
+ \item Shows as boldface B
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ For a list of counter-labeling commands see *note \alph \Alph \arabic
+\roman \Roman \fnsymbol::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: eqnarray, Next: equation, Prev: enumerate, Up: Environments
+
+8.8 'eqnarray'
+==============
+
+The 'eqnarray' environment is obsolete. It has infelicities, including
+spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements. (See
+"Avoid eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen
+<http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf>). New documents should
+include the 'amsmath' package and use the displayed mathematics
+environments provided there, such as the 'align' environment. We
+include a description only for completeness and for working with old
+documents.
+
+ Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ FIRST FORMULA LEFT &FIRST FORMULA MIDDLE &FIRST FORMULA RIGHT \\
+ ...
+ \end{eqnarray}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{eqnarray*}
+ FIRST FORMULA LEFT &FIRST FORMULA MIDDLE &FIRST FORMULA RIGHT \\
+ ...
+ \end{eqnarray*}
+
+ Display a sequence of equations or inequalities. The left and right
+sides are typeset in display mode, while the middle is typeset in text
+mode.
+
+ It is similar to a three-column 'array' environment, with items
+within a row separated by an ampersand ('&'), and with rows separated by
+double backslash '\\'). The starred form of line break ('\\*') can
+also be used to separate equations, and will disallow a page break there
+(*note \\::).
+
+ The unstarred form 'eqnarray' places an equation number on every line
+(using the 'equation' counter), unless that line contains a '\nonumber'
+command. The starred form 'eqnarray*' omits equation numbering, while
+otherwise being the same.
+
+ The command '\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across
+lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
+zero width.
+
+ This example shows three lines. The first two lines make an
+inequality, while the third line has not entry on the left side.
+
+ \begin{eqnarray*}
+ \lefteqn{x_1+x_2+\cdots+x_n} \\
+ &\leq &y_1+y_2+\cdots+y_n \\
+ &= &z+y_3+\cdots+y_n
+ \end{eqnarray*}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: equation, Next: figure, Prev: eqnarray, Up: Environments
+
+8.9 'equation'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ MATHEMATICAL TEXT
+ \end{equation}
+
+ The same as a 'displaymath' environment (*note displaymath::) except
+that LaTeX puts an equation number flush to the right margin. The
+equation number is generated using the 'equation' counter.
+
+ You should have no blank lines between '\begin{equation}' and
+'\begin{equation}', or LaTeX will tell you that there is a missing
+dollar sign.
+
+ The package 'amsmath' package has extensive displayed equation
+facilities. New documents should include this package.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: figure, Next: filecontents, Prev: equation, Up: Environments
+
+8.10 'figure'
+=============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{figure}[PLACEMENT]
+ FIGURE BODY
+ \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE} % optional
+ \label{LABEL} % optional
+ \end{figure}
+
+or:
+
+ \begin{figure*}[PLACEMENT]
+ FIGURE BODY
+ \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE} % optional
+ \label{LABEL} % optional
+ \end{figure*}
+
+ Figures are for material that is not part of the normal text. An
+example is material that you cannot have split between two pages, such
+as a graphic. Because of this, LaTeX does not typeset figures in
+sequence with normal text but instead "floats" them to a convenient
+place, such as the top of a following page (*note Floats::).
+
+ The FIGURE BODY can consist of imported graphics (*note Graphics::),
+or text, LaTeX commands, etc. It is typeset in a 'parbox' of width
+'\textwidth'.
+
+ The possible values of PLACEMENT are 'h' for 'here', 't' for 'top',
+'b' for 'bottom', and 'p' for 'on a separate page of floats'. For the
+effect of these options on the float placement algorithm, see *note
+Floats::.
+
+ The starred form 'figure*' is used when a document is in
+double-column mode (*note \twocolumn::). It produces a figure that
+spans both columns, at the top of the page. To add the possibility of
+placing at a page bottom see the discussion of PLACEMENT 'b' in *note
+Floats::.
+
+ The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
+references::). The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
+for the figure. By default it is numbered. If LOFTITLE is present, it
+is used in the list of figures instead of TITLE (*note Table of contents
+etc.::).
+
+ This example makes a figure out of a graphic. LaTeX will place that
+graphic and its caption at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
+end of the document, on a page of floats.
+
+ \usepackage{graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{figure}[t]
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{CTANlion.png}
+ \caption{The CTAN lion, by Duane Bibby}
+ \end{figure}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: filecontents, Next: flushleft, Prev: figure, Up: Environments
+
+8.11 'filecontents': Write an external file
+===========================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{filecontents}{FILENAME}
+ TEXT
+ \end{filecontents}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{filecontents*}{FILENAME}
+ TEXT
+ \end{filecontents*}
+
+ Create a file named FILENAME and fill it with TEXT. The unstarred
+version of the environment 'filecontents' prefixes the content of the
+created file with a header; see the example below. The starred version
+'filecontents*' does not include the header.
+
+ This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it
+often appears before the '\documentclass' command. It is typically used
+when a source file requires a nonstandard style or class file. The
+environment will write that file to the directory containing the source
+and thus make the source file self-contained. Another use is to include
+'bib' references in the file, again to make it self-contained.
+
+ The environment checks whether a file of that name already exists and
+if so, does not do anything. There is a 'filecontents' package that
+redefines the 'filecontents' environment so that instead of doing
+nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file.
+
+ For example, this document
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \begin{filecontents}{JH.sty}
+ \newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+ \end{filecontents}
+ \usepackage{JH}
+ \begin{document}
+ Article by \myname.
+ \end{document}
+
+produces this file 'JH.sty'.
+
+ %% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
+ %% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+ %% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
+ %%
+ \newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: flushleft, Next: flushright, Prev: filecontents, Up: Environments
+
+8.12 'flushleft'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ LINE1 \\
+ LINE2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long
+then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and
+stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use a double
+backslash, '\\'. For the declaration form see *note \raggedright::.
+
+ This creates a box of text that is at most 3 inches wide, with the
+text flush left and ragged right.
+
+ \noindent\begin{minipage}{3in}
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ A long sentence that will be broken by \LaTeX{}
+ at a convenient spot. \\
+ And, a fresh line forced by the double backslash.
+ \end{flushleft}
+ \end{minipage}
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \raggedright:: Declaration form of the 'flushleft' environment.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedright, Up: flushleft
+
+8.12.1 '\raggedright'
+---------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ {\raggedright ... }
+
+or
+
+ \begin{ENVIRONMENT} \raggedright
+ ...
+ \end{ENVIRONMENT}
+
+ A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and
+ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as 'quote' or
+in a 'parbox'. For the environment form see *note flushleft::.
+
+ Unlike the 'flushleft' environment, the '\raggedright' command does
+not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
+units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
+declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+
+ Here '\raggedright' in each second column keeps LaTeX from doing very
+awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column. Note that
+'\raggedright' is inside the curly braces '{...}' to delimit its effect.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{rp{2in}}
+ Team alpha &{\raggedright This team does all the real work.} \\
+ Team beta &{\raggedright This team ensures that the water
+ cooler is never empty.} \\
+ \end{tabular}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: flushright, Next: itemize, Prev: flushleft, Up: Environments
+
+8.13 'flushright'
+=================
+
+ \begin{flushright}
+ LINE1 \\
+ LINE2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{flushright}
+
+ An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long
+to fit the margins then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that avoids
+hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use
+a double backslash, '\\'. For the declaration form see *note
+\raggedleft::.
+
+ For an example related to this environment, see *note flushleft::.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \raggedleft:: Declaration form of the 'flushright' environment.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedleft, Up: flushright
+
+8.13.1 '\raggedleft'
+--------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ {\raggedleft ... }
+
+or
+
+ \begin{ENVIRONMENT} \raggedleft
+ ...
+ \end{ENVIRONMENT}
+
+ A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and
+ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as 'quote' or in
+a 'parbox'. For the environment form see *note flushright::.
+
+ Unlike the 'flushright' environment, the '\raggedleft' command does
+not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
+units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
+declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+
+ For an example related to this environment, see *note \raggedright::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: itemize, Next: letter, Prev: flushright, Up: Environments
+
+8.14 'itemize'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] TEXT OF FIRST ITEM
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] TEXT OF SECOND ITEM
+ ...
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ Produce a list that is unordered, sometimes called a bullet list.
+The environment must have at least one '\item'; having none causes the
+LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item'.
+
+ This gives a two-item list.
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Pencil and watercolor sketch by Cassandra
+ \item Rice portrait
+ \end{itemize}
+
+As a top-level list each label would come out as a bullet, *. The
+format of the labeling depends on the nesting level; see below.
+
+ Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::). If you
+give '\item' an optional argument by following it with square brackets,
+as in '\item[Optional label]', then by default it will appear in bold
+and be flush right, so it could extend into the left margin. For labels
+that are flush left see the *note description:: environment. Following
+the '\item' is optional text, which may contain multiple paragraphs.
+
+ Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels
+deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making
+environments, such as 'enumerate' (*note enumerate::). The 'itemize'
+environment uses the commands '\labelitemi' through '\labelitemiv' to
+produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase
+roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting
+level). These are the default marks at each level.
+
+ 1. * (bullet, from '\textbullet')
+ 2. -- (bold en-dash, from '\normalfont\bfseries\textendash')
+ 3. * (asterisk, from '\textasteriskcentered')
+ 4. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period, from
+ '\textperiodcentered')
+
+ Change the labels with '\renewcommand'. For instance, this makes the
+first level use diamonds.
+
+ \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
+
+ The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
+the left margin of the 'itemize' list is determined by the parameters
+'\leftmargini' through '\leftmarginvi'. (Note the convention of using
+lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command name to denote the
+nesting level.) The defaults are: '2.5em' in level 1 ('2em' in
+two-column mode), '2.2em' in level 2, '1.87em' in level 3, and '1.7em'
+in level 4, with smaller values for more deeply nested levels.
+
+ For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see *note
+description:: and *note enumerate::. For information about list layout
+parameters, including the default values, and for information about
+customizing list layout, see *note list::. The package 'enumitem' is
+useful for customizing lists.
+
+ This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost itemized
+lists.
+
+ \setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
+
+ Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
+space between items. Here is an example defining an 'itemize*'
+environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
+within a single item ('\parskip' is not list-specific, *note \parindent
+& \parskip::):
+
+ \newenvironment{itemize*}%
+ {\begin{itemize}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+ \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
+ {\end{itemize}}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: letter, Next: list, Prev: itemize, Up: Environments
+
+8.15 'letter' environment: writing letters
+==========================================
+
+This environment is used for creating letters. *Note Letters::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: list, Next: math, Prev: letter, Up: Environments
+
+8.16 'list'
+===========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{list}{LABELING}{SPACING}
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] TEXT OF FIRST ITEM
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] TEXT OF SECOND ITEM
+ ...
+ \end{list}
+
+ An environment for constructing lists.
+
+ Note that this environment does not typically appear in the document
+body. Most lists created by LaTeX authors are the ones that come
+standard: the 'description', 'enumerate', and 'itemize' environments
+(*note description::, *note enumerate::, and *note itemize::).
+
+ Instead, the 'list' environment is most often used in macros. For
+example, many standard LaTeX environments that do not immediately appear
+to be lists are in fact constructed using 'list', including 'quotation',
+'quote', and 'center' (*note quotation & quote::, *note center::).
+
+ This uses the 'list' environment to define a new custom environment.
+
+ \newcounter{namedlistcounter} % number the items
+ \newenvironment{named}
+ {\begin{list}
+ {Item~\Roman{namedlistcounter}.} % labeling
+ {\usecounter{namedlistcounter} % set counter
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{3.5em}} % set spacing
+ }
+ {\end{list}}
+
+ \begin{named}
+ \item Shows as ``Item~I.''
+ \item[Special label.] Shows as ``Special label.''
+ \item Shows as ``Item~II.''
+ \end{named}
+
+ The mandatory first argument LABELING specifies the default labeling
+of list items. It can contain text and LaTeX commands, as above where
+it contains both 'Item' and '\Roman{...}'. LaTeX forms the label by
+putting the LABELING argument in a box of width '\labelwidth'. If the
+label is wider than that, the additional material extends to the right.
+When making an instance of a list you can override the default labeling
+by giving '\item' an optional argument by including square braces and
+the text, as in the above '\item[Special label.]'; *note \item::.
+
+ The mandatory second argument SPACING has a list of commands. This
+list can be empty. A command that can go in here is
+'\usecounter{COUNTERNAME}' (*note \usecounter::). Use this to tell
+LaTeX to number the items using the given counter. The counter will be
+reset to zero each time LaTeX enters the environment, and the counter is
+incremented by one each time LaTeX encounters an '\item' that does not
+have an optional argument.
+
+ Another command that can go in SPACING is '\makelabel', which
+constructs the label box. By default it puts the contents flush right.
+Its only argument is the label, which it typesets in LR mode (*note
+Modes::). One example of changing its definition is that to the above
+'named' example, before the definition of the environment add
+'\newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}', and between the
+'\setlength' command and the parenthesis that closes the SPACING
+argument also add '\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel'. Then the items will
+be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the second code line to
+'\let\makelabel\fbox' puts the labels inside a framed box. Another
+example of the '\makelabel' command is below, in the definition of the
+'redlabel' environment.
+
+ Also often in SPACING are commands to redefine the spacing for the
+list. Below are the spacing parameters with their default values.
+(Default values for derived environments such as 'itemize' can be
+different than the values shown here.) See also the figure that follows
+the list. Each is a length (*note Lengths::). The vertical spaces are
+normally rubber lengths, with 'plus' and 'minus' components, to give TeX
+flexibility in setting the page. Change each with a command such as
+'\setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}'. For some effects these
+lengths should be zero or negative.
+
+'\itemindent'
+ Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond 'leftmargin', of the
+ first line each item. Its default value is '0pt'.
+
+'\itemsep'
+ Vertical space between items, beyond the '\parsep'. The defaults
+ for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and
+ 'report' classes at 10 point size are: '4pt plus2pt minus1pt',
+ '\parsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'), and '\topsep' (that
+ is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'). The defaults at 11 point are: '4.5pt
+ plus2pt minus1pt', '\parsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'), and
+ 'topsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'). The defaults at 12
+ point are: '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', '\parsep' (that is, '2.5pt
+ plus1pt minus1pt'), and '\topsep' (that is, '2.5pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt').
+
+'\labelsep'
+ Horizontal space between the label and text of an item. The
+ default for LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report' classes is
+ '0.5em'.
+
+'\labelwidth'
+ Horizontal width. The box containing the label is nominally this
+ wide. If '\makelabel' returns text that is wider than this then
+ the first line of the item will be indented to make room for this
+ extra material. If '\makelabel' returns text of width less than or
+ equal to '\labelwidth' then LaTeX's default is that the label is
+ typeset flush right in a box of this width.
+
+ The left edge of the label box is
+ '\leftmargin'+'\itemindent'-'\labelsep'-'\labelwidth' from the left
+ margin of the enclosing environment.
+
+ The default for LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report' classes at
+ the top level is '\leftmargini'-'\labelsep', (which is '2em' in one
+ column mode and '1.5em' in two column mode). At the second level
+ it is '\leftmarginii'-'\labelsep', and at the third level it is
+ '\leftmarginiii'-'\labelsep'. These definitions make the label's
+ left edge coincide with the left margin of the enclosing
+ environment.
+
+'\leftmargin'
+ Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing
+ environment (or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level
+ list), and the left margin of this list. It must be non-negative.
+
+ In the standard LaTeX document classes, a top-level list has this
+ set to the value of '\leftmargini', while a list that is nested
+ inside a top-level list has this margin set to '\leftmarginii'.
+ More deeply nested lists get the values of '\leftmarginiii' through
+ '\leftmarginvi'. (Nesting greater than level five generates the
+ error message 'Too deeply nested'.)
+
+ The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article',
+ 'book', and 'report' classes are: '\leftmargini' is '2.5em' (in two
+ column mode, '2em'), '\leftmarginii' is '2.2em', and
+ '\leftmarginiii' is '1.87em'.
+
+'\listparindent'
+ Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
+ '\leftmargin', for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list
+ item. A negative value makes this an "outdent". Its default value
+ is '0pt'.
+
+'\parsep'
+ Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. In the 'book'
+ and 'article' classes The defaults for the first three levels in
+ LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report' classes at 10 point size
+ are: '4pt plus2pt minus1pt', '2pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'.
+ The defaults at 11 point size are: '4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt', '2pt
+ plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'. The defaults at 12 point size are:
+ '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', '2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'.
+
+'\partopsep'
+ Vertical space added, beyond '\topsep'+'\parskip', to the top and
+ bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded
+ by a blank line. (A blank line in the LaTeX source before the list
+ changes spacing at both the top and bottom of the list; whether the
+ line following the list is blank does not matter.)
+
+ The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article',
+ 'book', and 'report' classes at 10 point size are: '2pt plus1
+ minus1pt', '2pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '1pt plus0pt minus1pt'. The
+ defaults at 11 point are: '3pt plus1pt minus1pt', '3pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt', and '1pt plus0pt minus1pt'). The defaults at 12 point
+ are: '3pt plus2pt minus3pt', '3pt plus2pt minus2pt', and '1pt
+ plus0pt minus1pt'.
+
+'\rightmargin'
+ Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right
+ margin of the enclosing environment. Its default value is '0pt'.
+ It must be non-negative.
+
+'\topsep'
+ Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in
+ addition to '\parskip' (*note \parindent & \parskip::). The
+ defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article', 'book',
+ and 'report' classes at 10 point size are: '8pt plus2pt minus4pt',
+ '4pt plus2pt minus1pt', and '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'. The defaults
+ at 11 point are: '9pt plus3pt minus5pt', '4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt',
+ and '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'. The defaults at 12 point are: '10pt
+ plus4pt minus6pt', '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', and '2.5pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt'.
+
+ This shows the horizontal and vertical distances.
+
+
+..............Surrounding environment, preceding material.............. -
+ | v0
+ |---h0--|-h1-| |
+ ..Label.. .....First item..................................... -
+ ............................................................
+ ............................................................ -
+ | v1
+ ........First item, second paragraph .................. -
+ |-h2-| | v2
+ |
+ ..Label.. .....Second item.................................... -
+ ............................................................
+ ............................................................ -
+|-h3--|-h4-| |-h5-| |v3
+ |
+..............Surrounding environment, following material.............. -
+......................................................................."
+
+ The lengths shown are listed below. The key relationship is that the
+right edge of the bracket for H1 equals the right edge of the bracket
+for H4, so that the left edge of the label box is at H3+H4-(H0+H1).
+
+V0
+ '\topsep' + '\parskip' if the list environment does not start a new
+ paragraph, and '\topsep'+'\parskip'+'\partopsep' if it does
+
+V1
+ '\parsep'
+
+V2
+ '\itemsep'+'\parsep'
+
+V3
+ Same as V0. (This space is affected by whether a blank line
+ appears in the source above the environment; whether a blank line
+ appears in the source below the environment does not matter.)
+
+H0
+ '\labelwidth'
+
+H1
+ '\labelsep'
+
+H2
+ '\listparindent'
+
+H3
+ '\leftmargin'
+
+H4
+ '\itemindent'
+
+H5
+ '\rightmargin'
+
+ The list's left and right margins, shown above as H3 and H5, are with
+respect to the ones provided by the surrounding environment, or with
+respect to the page margins for a top-level list. The line width used
+for typesetting the list items is '\linewidth' (*note Page layout
+parameters::). For instance, set the list's left margin to be one
+quarter of the distance between the left and right margins of the
+enclosing environment with '\setlength{\leftmargin}{0.25\linewidth}'.
+
+ Page breaking in a list structure is controlled by the three
+parameters below. For each, the LaTeX default is '-\@lowpenalty', that
+is, '-51'. Because it is negative, it somewhat encourages a page break
+at each spot. Change it with, e.g., '\@beginparpenalty=9999'; a value
+of 10000 prohibits a page break.
+
+'\@beginparpenalty'
+ The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default
+ '-51').
+
+'\@itempenalty'
+ The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default
+ '-51').
+
+'\@endparpenalty'
+ The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default
+ '-51').
+
+ The package 'enumitem' is useful for customizing lists.
+
+ This example has the labels in red. They are numbered, and the left
+edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text. *Note
+\usecounter::.
+
+ \usepackage{color}
+ \newcounter{cnt}
+ \newcommand{\makeredlabel}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1.}}
+ \newenvironment{redlabel}
+ {\begin{list}
+ {\arabic{cnt}}
+ {\usecounter{cnt}
+ \setlength{\labelwidth}{0em}
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{0.5em}
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{1.5em}
+ \setlength{\itemindent}{0.5em} % equals \labelwidth+\labelsep
+ \let\makelabel=\makeredlabel
+ }
+ }
+ {\end{list} }
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \item:: An entry in a list.
+* trivlist:: A restricted form of 'list'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \item, Next: trivlist, Up: list
+
+8.16.1 '\item': An entry in a list
+----------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \item text of item
+
+or
+
+ \item[OPTIONAL-LABEL] text of item
+
+ An entry in a list. The entries are prefixed by a label, whose
+default depends on the list type.
+
+ Because the optional label is surrounded by square brackets '[...]',
+if you have an item whose text starts with '[', you have to hide the
+bracket inside curly braces, as in: '\item {[} is an open square
+bracket'; otherwise, LaTeX will think it marks the start of an optional
+label.
+
+ Similarly, if the item does have the optional label and you need a
+close square bracket inside that label, you must hide it in the same
+way: '\item[Close square bracket, {]}]'. *Note LaTeX command syntax::.
+
+ In this example the enumerate list has two items that use the default
+label and one that uses the optional label.
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Moe
+ \item[sometimes] Shemp
+ \item Larry
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ The first item is labelled '1.', the second item is labelled
+'sometimes', and the third item is labelled '2.'. Because of the
+optional label in the second item, the third item is not labelled '3.'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: trivlist, Prev: \item, Up: list
+
+8.16.2 'trivlist': A restricted form of 'list'
+----------------------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{trivlist}
+ ...
+ \end{trivlist}
+
+ A restricted version of the list environment, in which margins are
+not indented and an '\item' without an optional argument produces no
+text. It is most often used in macros, to define an environment where
+the '\item' command as part of the environment's definition. For
+instance, the 'center' environment is defined essentially like this:
+
+ \newenvironment{center}
+ {\begin{trivlist}\centering\item\relax}
+ {\end{trivlist}}
+
+ Using 'trivlist' in this way allows the macro to inherit some common
+code: combining vertical space of two adjacent environments; detecting
+whether the text following the environment should be considered a new
+paragraph or a continuation of the previous one; adjusting the left and
+right margins for possible nested list environments.
+
+ Specifically, 'trivlist' uses the current values of the list
+parameters (*note list::), except that '\parsep' is set to the value of
+'\parskip', and '\leftmargin', '\labelwidth', and '\itemindent' are set
+to zero.
+
+ This example outputs the items as two paragraphs, except that (by
+default) they have no paragraph indent and are vertically separated.
+
+ \begin{trivlist}
+ \item The \textit{Surprise} is not old; no one would call her old.
+ \item She has a bluff bow, lovely lines.
+ \end{trivlist}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: math, Next: minipage, Prev: list, Up: Environments
+
+8.17 'math'
+===========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{math}
+ MATH
+ \end{math}
+
+ The 'math' environment inserts given MATH material within the running
+text. '\(...\)' and '$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: minipage, Next: picture, Prev: math, Up: Environments
+
+8.18 'minipage'
+===============
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \begin{minipage}{WIDTH}
+ CONTENTS
+ \end{minipage}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{minipage}[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}
+ CONTENTS
+ \end{minipage}
+
+ Put CONTENTS into a box that is WIDTH wide. This is like a small
+version of a page; it can contain its own footnotes, itemized lists,
+etc. (There are some restrictions, including that it cannot have
+floats.) This box will not be broken across pages. So 'minipage' is
+similar to '\parbox' (*note \parbox::) but here you can have paragraphs.
+
+ This example will be 3 inches wide, and has two paragraphs.
+
+ \begin{minipage}{3in}
+ Stephen Kleene was a founder of the Theory of Computation.
+
+ He was a student of Church, wrote three influential texts,
+ was President of the Association for Symbolic Logic,
+ and won the National Medal of Science.
+ \end{minipage}
+
+See below for a discussion of the paragraph indent inside a 'minipage'.
+
+ The required argument WIDTH is a rigid length (*note Lengths::). It
+gives the width of the box into which CONTENTS are typeset.
+
+ There are three optional arguments, POSITION, HEIGHT, and INNER-POS.
+You need not include all three. For example, get the default POSITION
+and set the HEIGHT with '\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm] CONTENTS
+\end{minipage}'. (Get the natural height with an empty argument, '[]'.)
+
+ The optional argument POSITION governs how the 'minipage' vertically
+aligns with the surrounding material.
+
+'c'
+ (synonym 'm') Default. Positions the 'minipage' so its vertical
+ center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what
+ Plain TeX calls '\vcenter').
+
+'t'
+ Match the top line in the 'minipage' with the baseline of the
+ surrounding text (Plain TeX's '\vtop'.
+
+'b'
+ Match the bottom line in the 'minipage' with the baseline of the
+ surrounding text (Plain TeX's '\vbox'.
+
+ To see the effects of these, contrast running this
+
+ ---\begin{minipage}[c]{0.25in}
+ first\\ second\\ third
+ \end{minipage}
+
+with the results of changing 'c' to 'b' or 't'.
+
+ The optional argument HEIGHT is a rigid length (*note Lengths::). It
+sets the height of the 'minipage'. You can enter any value larger than,
+or equal to, or smaller than the 'minipage''s natural height and LaTeX
+will not give an error or warning. You can also set it to a height of
+zero or a negative value.
+
+ The final optional argument INNER-POS controls the placement of
+CONTENT inside the box. These are the possible values are (the default
+is the value of POSITION).
+
+'t'
+ Place CONTENT at the top of the box.
+
+'c'
+ Place it in the vertical center.
+
+'b'
+ Place it at the box bottom.
+
+'s'
+ Stretch CONTENTS out vertically; it must contain vertically
+ stretchable space.
+
+ The INNER-POS argument makes sense when the HEIGHT option is set to a
+value larger than the 'minipage''s natural height. To see the effect of
+the options, run this example with the various choices in place of 'b'.
+
+ Text before
+ \begin{center}
+ ---\begin{minipage}[c][3in][b]{0.25\textwidth}
+ first\\ second\\ third
+ \end{minipage}
+ \end{center}
+ Text after
+
+ By default paragraphs are not indented in a 'minipage'. Change that
+with a command such as '\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}' at the start of
+CONTENTS.
+
+ Footnotes in a 'minipage' environment are handled in a way that is
+particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
+'\footnote' or '\footnotetext' command puts the footnote at the bottom
+of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the
+'\mpfootnote' counter instead of the ordinary 'footnote' counter (*note
+Counters::).
+
+ This puts the footnote at the bottom of the table, not the bottom of
+the page.
+
+ \begin{center} % center the minipage on the line
+ \begin{minipage}{2.5in}
+ \begin{center} % center the table inside the minipage
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \textsc{Monarch} &\textsc{Reign} \\ \hline
+ Elizabeth II &63 years\footnote{to date} \\
+ Victoria &63 years \\
+ George III &59 years
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+ \end{minipage}
+ \end{center}
+
+ If you nest minipages then there is an oddness when using footnotes.
+Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next
+'\end{minipage}' which may not be their logical place.
+
+ This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic.
+They are vertically centered.
+
+ \newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+ ...
+ \begin{center}
+ \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]{nyc.png}}
+ \hspace{0.1\textwidth}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+ \begin{tabular}{r|l}
+ \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &Pop (million) \\ \hline
+ The Bronx &$1.5$ \\
+ Brooklyn &$2.6$ \\
+ Manhattan &$1.6$ \\
+ Queens &$2.3$ \\
+ Staten Island &$0.5$
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{minipage}
+ \end{center}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: picture, Next: quotation & quote, Prev: minipage, Up: Environments
+
+8.19 'picture'
+==============
+
+Synopses:
+ \begin{picture}(WIDTH,HEIGHT)
+ PICTURE COMMANDS
+ \end{picture}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{picture}(WIDTH,HEIGHT)(XOFFSET,YOFFSET)
+ PICTURE COMMANDS
+ \end{picture}
+
+ An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows,
+boxes, circles, and text. Note that while this environment is not
+obsolete, new documents typically use much more powerful graphics
+creation systems, such as 'TikZ', 'PSTricks', 'MetaPost', or
+'Asymptote'. These are not covered in this document; see CTAN.
+
+ This shows the parallelogram law for adding vectors.
+
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+ \begin{picture}(6,6) % picture box will be 6cm wide by 6cm tall
+ \put(0,0){\vector(2,1){4}} % for every 2 over this vector goes 1 up
+ \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ first leg}}
+ \put(4,2){\vector(1,2){2}}
+ \put(5,4){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ second leg}}
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,1){6}}
+ \put(3,3){\makebox(0,0)[r]{sum\ }}
+ \end{picture}
+
+ You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an
+exact location.
+
+ \usepackage{color,graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{center}
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth}
+ \begin{picture}(1,1) % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
+ \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}}
+ \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}}
+ \end{picture}
+ \end{center}
+
+The red X will be precisely a quarter of the '\linewidth' from the left
+margin, and '0.35\linewidth' up from the bottom. Another example of
+this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get repeat
+material on each of a document's pages.
+
+ The 'picture' environment has one required argument, a pair of
+numbers (WIDTH,HEIGHT). Multiply these by the value '\unitlength' to
+get the nominal size of the output, the space that LaTeX reserves on the
+output page. This nominal size need not be how large the picture really
+is; LaTeX will draw things from the picture outside the picture's box.
+
+ This environment also has an optional argument (XOFFSET,YOFFSET). It
+is used to shift the origin. Unlike most optional arguments, this one
+is not contained in square brackets. As with the required argument, it
+consists of two real numbers. Multiply these by '\unitlength' to get
+the point at the lower-left corner of the picture.
+
+ For example, if '\unitlength' has been set to '1mm', the command
+
+ \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+
+produces a box of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters. The
+picture's origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner
+is there, and the upper-right corner is at (110mm,220mm). When you
+first draw a picture you typically omit the optional argument, leaving
+the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
+picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate
+optional argument.
+
+ Each PICTURE COMMAND tells LaTeX where to put something by naming its
+position. A "position" is a pair such as '(2.4,-5)' giving the x- and
+y-coordinates. A "coordinate" is a not a length, it is a real number
+(it may have a decimal point or a minus sign). It specifies a length in
+multiples of the unit length '\unitlength', so if '\unitlength' has been
+set to '1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54
+centimeters.
+
+ LaTeX's default for '\unitlength' is '1pt'. it is a rigid length
+(*note Lengths::). Change it with the '\setlength' command (*note
+\setlength::). Make this change only outside of a 'picture'
+environment.
+
+ Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at
+the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears
+as an argument, as with '\put(1,2){...}', it is not enclosed in braces
+since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also, unlike in
+some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are further up the
+page.
+
+ There are four ways to put things in a picture: '\put', '\multiput',
+'\qbezier', and '\graphpaper'. The most often used is '\put'. This
+
+ \put(11.3,-0.3){...}
+
+places the object with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-0.3).
+The reference points for various objects will be described below. The
+'\put' command creates an "LR box" (*note Modes::). Anything that can
+go in an '\mbox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::) can go in the text argument
+of the '\put' command. The reference point will be the lower left
+corner of the box. In this picture
+
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+ ...\begin{picture}(1,1)
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,0){1}}
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,1){1}}
+ \end{picture}
+
+the three dots are just slightly left of the point of the angle formed
+by the two lines. (Also, '\line(1,1){1}' does not call for a line of
+length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of 1.)
+
+ The '\multiput', 'qbezier', and 'graphpaper' commands are described
+below.
+
+ This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using '\qbezier' for that
+curve.
+
+ \begin{picture}(3,1.5)
+ \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}} % x axis
+ \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}} % y axis
+ \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}} % left side rectangle
+ \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}} % right side
+ \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
+ \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
+ \thicklines % below here, lines are twice as thick
+ \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}}
+ \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}}
+ \end{picture}
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \put:: Place an object at a specified place.
+* \multiput:: Draw multiple instances of an object.
+* \qbezier:: Draw a quadratic Bezier curve.
+* \graphpaper:: Draw graph paper.
+* \line:: Draw a straight line.
+* \linethickness:: Set thickness of horizontal and vertical lines.
+* \thinlines:: The default line thickness.
+* \thicklines:: A heavier line thickness.
+* \circle:: Draw a circle.
+* \oval:: Draw an oval.
+* \shortstack:: Make a stack of objects.
+* \vector:: Draw a line with an arrow.
+* \makebox (picture):: Draw a box of the specified size.
+* \framebox (picture):: Draw a box with a frame around it.
+* \frame:: Draw a frame around an object.
+* \dashbox:: Draw a dashed box.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \put, Next: \multiput, Up: picture
+
+8.19.1 '\put'
+-------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \put(XCOORD,YCOORD){CONTENT}
+
+ Place CONTENT at the coordinate (XCOORD,YCOORD). See the discussion
+of coordinates and '\unitlength' in *note picture::. The CONTENT is
+processed in LR mode (*note Modes::) so it cannot contain line breaks.
+
+ This includes the text into the 'picture'.
+
+ \put(4.5,2.5){Apply the \textit{unpoke} move}
+
+ The reference point, the location (4.5,2.5), is the lower left of the
+text, at the bottom left of the 'A'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \multiput, Next: \qbezier, Prev: \put, Up: picture
+
+8.19.2 '\multiput'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \multiput(X,Y)(DELTA_X,DELTA_Y){NUM-COPIES}{OBJ}
+
+ Copy OBJ a total of NUM-COPIES times, with an increment of
+DELTA_X,DELTA_Y. The OBJ first appears at position (x,y), then at
+(x+\delta_x,y+\delta_y), and so on.
+
+ This draws a simple grid with every fifth line in bold (see also
+*note \graphpaper::).
+
+ \begin{picture}(10,10)
+ \linethickness{0.05mm}
+ \multiput(0,0)(1,0){10}{\line(0,1){10}}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,1){10}{\line(1,0){10}}
+ \linethickness{0.5mm}
+ \multiput(0,0)(5,0){3}{\line(0,1){10}}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,5){3}{\line(1,0){10}}
+ \end{picture}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \qbezier, Next: \graphpaper, Prev: \multiput, Up: picture
+
+8.19.3 '\qbezier'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \qbezier(X1,Y1)(X2,Y2)(X3,Y3)
+ \qbezier[NUM](X1,Y1)(X2,Y2)(X3,Y3)
+
+ Draw a quadratic Bezier curve whose control points are given by the
+three required arguments '(X1,Y1)', '(X2,Y2)', and '(X3,Y3)'. That is,
+the curve runs from (X1,Y1) to (X3,Y3), is quadratic, and is such that
+the tangent line at (X1,Y1) passes through (X2,Y2), as does the tangent
+line at (X3,Y3).
+
+ This draws a curve from the coordinate (1,1) to (1,0).
+
+ \qbezier(1,1)(1.25,0.75)(1,0)
+
+The curve's tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the
+curve's tangent line at (1,0).
+
+ The optional argument NUM gives the number of calculated intermediate
+points. The default is to draw a smooth curve whose maximum number of
+points is '\qbeziermax' (change this value with '\renewcommand').
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \graphpaper, Next: \line, Prev: \qbezier, Up: picture
+
+8.19.4 '\graphpaper'
+--------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \graphpaper(X_INIT,Y_INIT)(X_DIMEN,Y_DIMEN)
+ \graphpaper[SPACING](X_INIT,Y_INIT)(X_DIMEN,Y_DIMEN)
+
+ Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the 'graphpap' package. The grid's
+origin is '(X_INIT,Y_INIT)'. Grid lines come every SPACING units (the
+default is 10). The grid extends X_DIMEN units to the right and Y_DIMEN
+units up. All arguments must be positive integers.
+
+ This make a grid with seven vertical lines and eleven horizontal
+lines.
+
+ \usepackage{graphpap} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{picture}(6,20) % in document body
+ \graphpaper[2](0,0)(12,20)
+ \end{picture}
+
+The lines are numbered every ten units.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \line, Next: \linethickness, Prev: \graphpaper, Up: picture
+
+8.19.5 '\line'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \line(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}
+
+ Draw a line. It slopes such that it vertically rises Y_RISE for
+every horizontal X_RUN. The TRAVEL is the total horizontal change -- it
+is not the length of the vector, it is the change in x. In the special
+case of vertical lines, where (X_RUN,Y_RISE)=(0,1), the TRAVEL gives the
+change in y.
+
+ This draws a line starting at coordinates (1,3).
+
+ \put(1,3){\line(2,5){4}}
+
+For every over 2, this line will go up 5. Because TRAVEL specifies that
+this goes over 4, it must go up 10. Thus its endpoint is
+(1,3)+(4,10)=(5,13). In particular, note that TRAVEL=4 is not the
+length of the line, it is the change in x.
+
+ The arguments X_RUN and Y_RISE are integers that can be positive,
+negative, or zero. (If both are 0 then LaTeX treats the second as 1.)
+With '\put(X_INIT,Y_INIT){\line(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}}', if X_RUN is
+negative then the line's ending point has a first coordinate that is
+less than X_INIT. If Y_RISE is negative then the line's ending point
+has a second coordinate that is less than Y_INIT.
+
+ If TRAVEL is negative then you get 'LaTeX Error: Bad \line or \vector
+argument.'
+
+ Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with a limited range of slopes
+because these lines are made by putting together line segments from
+pre-made fonts. The two numbers X_RUN and Y_RISE must have integer
+values from -6 through 6. Also, they must be relatively prime, so that
+(X_RUN,Y_RISE) can be (2,1) but not (4,2) (if you choose the latter then
+instead of lines you get sequences of arrowheads; the solution is to
+switch to the former). To get lines of arbitrary slope and plenty of
+other shapes in a system like 'picture', see the package 'pict2e' on
+CTAN. Another solution is to use a full-featured graphics system such as
+'TikZ', or 'PSTricks', or 'MetaPost', or 'Asymptote'
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \linethickness, Next: \thinlines, Prev: \line, Up: picture
+
+8.19.6 '\linethickness'
+-----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \linethickness{DIM}
+
+ Declares the thickness of subsequent horizontal and vertical lines in
+a picture to be DIM, which must be a positive length (*note Lengths::).
+It differs from '\thinlines' and '\thicklines' in that it does not
+affect the thickness of slanted lines, circles, or ovals.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \thinlines, Next: \thicklines, Prev: \linethickness, Up: picture
+
+8.19.7 '\thinlines'
+-------------------
+
+Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.4pt. This is the default thickness, so
+this command is unnecessary unless the thickness has been changed with
+either *note \linethickness:: or *note \thicklines::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \thicklines, Next: \circle, Prev: \thinlines, Up: picture
+
+8.19.8 '\thicklines'
+--------------------
+
+Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.8pt. See also *note \linethickness::
+and *note \thinlines::. This command is illustrated in the Trapezoidal
+Rule example of *note picture::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \circle, Next: \oval, Prev: \thicklines, Up: picture
+
+8.19.9 '\circle'
+----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \circle{DIAMETER}
+ \circle*{DIAMETER}
+
+ Produces a circle with a diameter as close as possible to the
+specified one. The '*' form produces a filled-in circle.
+
+ This draws a circle of radius 6, centered at '(5,7)'.
+
+ \put(5,7){\circle{6}}
+
+ The available radii for 'circle' are, in points, the even numbers
+from 2 to 20, inclusive. For 'circle*' they are all the integers from 1
+to 15.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \oval, Next: \shortstack, Prev: \circle, Up: picture
+
+8.19.10 '\oval'
+---------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)
+ \oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[PORTION]
+
+ Produce a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument
+PORTION allows you to produce only half or a quarter of the oval. For
+half an oval take PORTION to be one of these.
+
+'t'
+ top half
+'b'
+ bottom half
+'r'
+ right half
+'l'
+ left half
+
+ Produce only one quarter of the oval by setting PORTION to 'tr',
+'br', 'bl', or 'tl'.
+
+ This draws the top half of an oval that is 3 wide and 7 tall.
+
+ \put(5,7){\oval(3,7)[t]}
+
+The (5,7) is the center of the entire oval, not just the center of the
+top half.
+
+ These shapes are not ellipses. They are rectangles whose corners are
+made with quarter circles. These circles have a maximum radius of 20pt
+(*note \circle:: for the sizes). Thus large ovals are just boxes with a
+small amount of corner rounding.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \shortstack, Next: \vector, Prev: \oval, Up: picture
+
+8.19.11 '\shortstack'
+---------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \shortstack[POSITION]{LINE 1 \\ ... }
+
+ Produce a vertical stack of objects.
+
+ This labels the y axis.
+
+ \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}} % x axis
+ \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}} % y
+ \put(-0.25,2){\makebox[0][r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}}
+
+For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack.
+In the above example the *note \mbox & \makebox:: puts the stack flush
+right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits slightly to
+the left of the y axis.
+
+ The valid positions are:
+
+'r'
+ Make objects flush right
+'l'
+ Make objects flush left
+'c'
+ Center objects (default)
+
+ Separate objects into lines with '\\'. These stacks are short in
+that, unlike in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment, here the rows are
+not spaced out to be of even heights. Thus, in
+'\shortstack{X\\o\\o\\X}' the first and last rows are taller than the
+middle two. You can adjust row heights either by putting in the usual
+interline spacing with '\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}', or by hand,
+via an explicit zero-width box '\shortstack{X \\ \rule{0pt}{12pt}
+o\\o\\X}' or by using '\\''s optional argument '\shortstack{X\\[2pt]
+o\\o\\X}'.
+
+ The '\shortstack' command is also available outside the 'picture'
+environment.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \vector, Next: \makebox (picture), Prev: \shortstack, Up: picture
+
+8.19.12 '\vector'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \vector(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}
+
+ Draw a line ending in an arrow. The slope of that line is: it
+vertically rises Y_RISE for every horizontal X_RUN. The TRAVEL is the
+total horizontal change -- it is not the length of the vector, it is the
+change in x. In the special case of vertical vectors, if
+(X_RUN,Y_RISE)=(0,1), then TRAVEL gives the change in y.
+
+ For an example see *note picture::.
+
+ For elaboration on X_RUN and Y_RISE see *note \line::. As there, the
+values of X_RUN and Y_RISE are limited. For '\vector' you must chooses
+integers between -4 and 4, inclusive. Also, the two you choose must be
+relatively prime. Thus, '\vector(2,1){4}' is acceptable but
+'\vector(4,2){4}' is not (if you use the latter then you get a sequence
+of arrowheads).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \makebox (picture), Next: \framebox (picture), Prev: \vector, Up: picture
+
+8.19.13 '\makebox' (picture)
+----------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \makebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT){TEXT}
+ \makebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+ Make a box to hold TEXT. This command fits with the 'picture'
+environment, although you can use it outside of there, because REC-WIDTH
+and REC-HEIGHT are numbers specifying distances in terms of the
+'\unitlength' (*note picture::). This command is similar to the normal
+'\makebox' command (*note \mbox & \makebox::) except here that you must
+specify the width and height. This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
+ This makes a box of length 3.5 times '\unitlength' and height 4 times
+'\unitlength'.
+
+ \put(1,2){\makebox(3.5,4){...}}
+
+ The optional argument 'POSITION' specifies where in the box the TEXT
+appears. The default is to center it, both horizontally and vertically.
+To place it somewhere else, use a string with one or two of these
+letters.
+
+'t'
+ Puts TEXT the top of the box.
+
+'b'
+ Put TEXT at the bottom.
+
+'l'
+ Put TEXT on the left.
+
+'r'
+ Put TEXT on the right.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \framebox (picture), Next: \frame, Prev: \makebox (picture), Up: picture
+
+8.19.14 '\framebox' (picture)
+-----------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \framebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT){TEXT}
+ \framebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+ This is the same as *note \makebox (picture):: except that it puts a
+frame around the outside of the box that it creates. The reference
+point is the bottom left corner of the frame. This command fits with
+the 'picture' environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+'\unitlength' (*note picture::). This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
+ This example creates a frame 2.5 inches by 3 inches and puts the text
+in the center.
+
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}
+ \framebox(2.5,3){test text}
+
+ The required arguments are that the rectangle has overall width
+RECT-WIDTH units and height RECT-HEIGHT units.
+
+ The optional argument POSITION specifies the position of TEXT; see
+*note \makebox (picture):: for the values that it can take.
+
+ The rule has thickness '\fboxrule' and there is a blank space
+'\fboxsep' between the frame and the contents of the box.
+
+ For this command, you must specify the WIDTH and HEIGHT. If you want
+to just put a frame around some contents whose dimension is determined
+in some other way then either use '\fbox' (*note \fbox & \framebox::) or
+'\frame' (*note \frame::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \frame, Next: \dashbox, Prev: \framebox (picture), Up: picture
+
+8.19.15 '\frame'
+----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \frame{CONTENTS}
+
+ Puts a rectangular frame around CONTENTS. The reference point is the
+bottom left corner of the frame. In contrast to '\framebox' (*note
+\framebox (picture)::), this command puts no extra space is put between
+the frame and the object. It is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \dashbox, Prev: \frame, Up: picture
+
+8.19.16 '\dashbox'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \dashbox{DASH-LEN}(RECT-WIDTH,RECT-HEIGHT){TEXT}
+ \dashbox{DASH-LEN}(RECT-WIDTH,RECT-HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+ Create a dashed rectangle around TEXT. This command fits with the
+'picture' environment, although you can use it outside of there, because
+lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+'\unitlength' (*note picture::).
+
+ The required arguments are: dashes are DASH-LEN units long, with the
+same length gap, and the rectangle has overall width RECT-WIDTH units
+and height RECT-HEIGHT units.
+
+ The optional argument POSITION specifies the position of TEXT; see
+*note \makebox (picture):: for the values that it can take.
+
+ This shows that you can use non-integer value for DASH-LEN.
+
+ \put(0,0){\dashbox{0.1}(5,0.5){My hovercraft is full of eels.}}
+
+Each dash will be '0.1\unitlength' long, the box's width is
+'5\unitlength' and its height is '0.5\unitlength'.
+
+ As in that example, a dashed box looks best when RECT-WIDTH and
+RECT-HEIGHT are multiples of the DASH-LEN.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: quotation & quote, Next: tabbing, Prev: picture, Up: Environments
+
+8.20 'quotation' & 'quote'
+==========================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{quotation}
+ TEXT
+ \end{quotation}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{quote}
+ TEXT
+ \end{quote}
+
+ Include a quotation. Both environments indent margins on both sides
+by '\leftmargin' and the text is right-justified.
+
+ They differ in how they treat paragraphs. In the 'quotation'
+environment, paragraphs are indented by 1.5em and the space between
+paragraphs is small, '0pt plus 1pt'. In the 'quote' environment,
+paragraphs are not indented and there is vertical space between
+paragraphs (it is the rubber length '\parsep').
+
+ \begin{quotation} \small\it
+ Four score and seven years ago
+ ... shall not perish from the earth.
+ \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
+ \end{quotation}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: tabbing, Next: table, Prev: quotation & quote, Up: Environments
+
+8.21 'tabbing'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ ROW1COL1 \= ROW1COL2 ... \\
+ ROW2COL1 \> ROW2COL2 ... \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+ Align text in columns, by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much
+as was done on a typewriter. This is less often used than the
+environments 'tabular' (*note tabular::) or 'array' (*note array::)
+because in those the width of each column need not be constant and need
+not be known in advance.
+
+ This example has a first line where the tab stops are set to explicit
+widths, ended by a '\kill' command (which is described below):
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ \hspace{0.75in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \kill
+ Ship \> Guns \> Year \\
+ \textit{Sophie} \> 14 \> 1800 \\
+ \textit{Polychrest} \> 24 \> 1803 \\
+ \textit{Lively} \> 38 \> 1804 \\
+ \textit{Surprise} \> 28 \> 1805 \\
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+ Both the 'tabbing' environment and the more widely-used 'tabular'
+environment put text in columns. The most important distinction is that
+in 'tabular' the width of columns is determined automatically by LaTeX,
+while in 'tabbing' the user sets the tab stops. Another distinction is
+that 'tabular' generates a box, but 'tabbing' can be broken across
+pages. Finally, while 'tabular' can be used in any mode, 'tabbing' can
+be used only in paragraph mode and it starts a new paragraph.
+
+ A 'tabbing' environment always starts a new paragraph, without
+indentation. Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need
+to use the starred form of the '\hspace' command at the beginning of a
+tabbed row. The right margin of the 'tabbing' environment is the end of
+line, so that the width of the environment is '\linewidth'.
+
+ The 'tabbing' environment contains a sequence of "tabbed rows". The
+first tabbed row begins immediately after '\begin{tabbing}' and each row
+ends with '\\' or '\kill'. The last row may omit the '\\' and end with
+just '\end{tabbing}'.
+
+ At any point the 'tabbing' environment has a current tab stop
+pattern, a sequence of N > 0 tab stops, numbered 0, 1, etc. These
+create N corresponding columns. Tab stop 0 is always the left margin,
+defined by the enclosing environment. Tab stop number I is set if it is
+assigned a horizontal position on the page. Tab stop number I can only
+be set if all the stops 0, ..., i-1 have already been set; normally
+later stops are to the right of earlier ones.
+
+ By default any text typeset in a 'tabbing' environment is typeset
+ragged right and left-aligned on the current tab stop. Typesetting is
+done in LR mode (*note Modes::).
+
+ The following commands can be used inside a 'tabbing' environment.
+They are all fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+'\\ (tabbing)'
+ End a tabbed line and typeset it.
+
+'\= (tabbing)'
+ Sets a tab stop at the current position.
+
+'\> (tabbing)'
+ Advances to the next tab stop.
+
+'\<'
+ Put following text to the left of the local margin (without
+ changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line.
+
+'\+'
+ Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
+ one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary.
+
+'\-'
+ Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
+ one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary.
+
+'\' (tabbing)'
+ Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column,
+ i.e., everything from the most recent '\>', '\<', '\'', '\\', or
+ '\kill' command, to the previous column and aligned to the right,
+ flush against the current column's tab stop.
+
+'\` (tabbing)'
+ Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including
+ tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last
+ column because there's no tab stop there. The '\`' command moves
+ all the text that follows it, up to the '\\' or '\end{tabbing}'
+ command that ends the line, to the right margin of the 'tabbing'
+ environment. There must be no '\>' or '\'' command between the
+ '\`' and the '\\' or '\end{tabbing}' command that ends the line.
+
+'\a (tabbing)'
+ In a 'tabbing' environment, the commands '\=', '\'' and '\`' do not
+ produce accents as usual (*note Accents::). Instead, use the
+ commands '\a=', '\a'' and '\a`'.
+
+'\kill'
+ Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like '\\' except
+ that it throws away the current line instead of producing output
+ for it. Any '\=', '\+' or '\-' commands in that line remain in
+ effect.
+
+'\poptabs'
+ Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last '\pushtabs'.
+
+'\pushtabs'
+ Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily
+ changing tab stop positions in the middle of a 'tabbing'
+ environment.
+
+'\tabbingsep'
+ Distance of the text moved by '\'' to left of current tab stop.
+
+ This example typesets a Pascal function:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \> begin \= \+ \\
+ \> if \= n > 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+The output looks like this.
+
+ function fact(n : integer) : integer;
+ begin
+ if n > 1 then
+ fact := n * fact(n-1);
+ else
+ fact := 1;
+ end;
+
+This example is just for illustration of the environment. To actually
+typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim environment
+(*note verbatim::) would normally be best. For pretty-printed code,
+there are quite a few packages, including 'algorithm2e', 'fancyvrb',
+'listings', and 'minted'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: table, Next: tabular, Prev: tabbing, Up: Environments
+
+8.22 'table'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{table}[PLACEMENT]
+ TABLE BODY
+ \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE} % optional
+ \label{LABEL} % also optional
+ \end{table}
+
+ A class of floats (*note Floats::). They cannot be split across
+pages and so they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but
+instead are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a
+following page.
+
+ This example 'table' environment contains a 'tabular'
+
+ \begin{table}
+ \centering\small
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Author}}
+ &\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Piece}} \\ \hline
+ Bach &Cello Suite Number 1 \\
+ Beethoven &Cello Sonata Number 3 \\
+ Brahms &Cello Sonata Number 1
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Top cello pieces}
+ \label{tab:cello}
+ \end{table}
+
+but you can put many different kinds of content in a 'table', including
+text, LaTeX commands, etc.
+
+ For the possible values of PLACEMENT and their effect on the float
+placement algorithm, see *note Floats::.
+
+ The table body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth'. It
+can contain text, commands, graphics, etc.
+
+ The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
+references::). The '\caption' command is also optional. It specifies
+caption text for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional
+LOTTITLE is present then that text is used in the list of tables instead
+of TITLE (*note Table of contents etc.::).
+
+ In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a
+page, unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
+
+ \begin{table}[b]
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{r|p{2in}} \hline
+ One &The loneliest number \\
+ Two &Can be as sad as one.
+ It's the loneliest number since the number one.
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Cardinal virtues}
+ \label{tab:CardinalVirtues}
+ \end{table}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: tabular, Next: thebibliography, Prev: table, Up: Environments
+
+8.23 'tabular'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{tabular}[POS]{COLS}
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabular}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{tabular*}{WIDTH}[POS]{COLS}
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabular*}
+
+ Produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of horizontal rows.
+Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically in columns. This
+illustrates many of the features.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textit{Player name} &\textit{Career home runs} \\
+ \hline
+ Hank Aaron &755 \\
+ Babe Ruth &714
+ \end{tabular}
+
+The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar
+between them. This is specified in 'tabular''s argument '{l|l}'. Put
+the entries into different columns by separating them with an ampersand,
+'&'. The end of each row is marked with a double backslash, '\\'. Put
+a horizontal rule below a row, after a double backslash, with '\hline'.
+After the last row the '\\' is optional, unless an '\hline' command
+follows to put a rule below the table.
+
+ The required and optional arguments to 'tabular' consist of:
+
+POS
+ Optional. Specifies the table's vertical position. The default is
+ to align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of
+ the surrounding text. There are two other possible alignments: 't'
+ aligns the table so its top row matches the baseline of the
+ surrounding text, and 'b' aligns on the bottom row.
+
+ This only has an effect if there is other text. In the common case
+ of a 'tabular' alone in a 'center' environment this option makes no
+ difference.
+
+COLS
+ Required. Specifies the formatting of columns. It consists of a
+ sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the types of
+ column and intercolumn material.
+
+ 'l'
+ A column of left-aligned items.
+
+ 'r'
+ A column of right-aligned items.
+
+ 'c'
+ A column of centered items.
+
+ '|'
+ A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
+
+ '@{TEXT OR SPACE}'
+ Insert TEXT OR SPACE at this location in every row. The TEXT
+ OR SPACE material is typeset in LR mode. This text is fragile
+ (*note \protect::).
+
+ If between two columns there is no @-expression then LaTeX's
+ 'book', 'article', and 'report' classes will put on either
+ side of each column a space of length '\tabcolsep', which by
+ default is 6pt. That is, by default adjacent columns are
+ separated by 12pt (so '\tabcolsep' is misleadingly named since
+ it is only half of the separation between tabular columns).
+ In addition, a space of 6pt also comes before the first column
+ and after the final column, unless you put a '@{...}' or '|'
+ there.
+
+ If you override the default and use an @-expression then LaTeX
+ does not insert '\tabcolsep' so you must insert any desired
+ space yourself, as in '@{\hspace{1em}}'.
+
+ An empty expression '@{}' will eliminate the space. In
+ particular, sometimes you want to eliminate the space before
+ the first column or after the last one, as in the example
+ below where the tabular lines need to lie on the left margin.
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ \begin{tabular}{@{}l}
+ ...
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ The next example shows text, a decimal point between the
+ columns, arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on
+ it.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{r@{$.$}l}
+ $3$ &$14$ \\
+ $9$ &$80665$
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ An '\extracolsep{WD}' command in an @-expression causes an
+ extra space of width WD to appear to the left of all
+ subsequent columns, until countermanded by another
+ '\extracolsep'. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra
+ space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An '\extracolsep'
+ command can be used only in an @-expression in the 'cols'
+ argument. Below, LaTeX inserts the right amount of
+ intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches wide.
+
+ \begin{tabular*}{4in}{l@{\extracolsep{\fill}}l}
+ Seven times down, eight times up \ldots
+ &such is life!
+ \end{tabular*}
+
+ To insert commands that are automatically executed before a
+ given column, load the 'array' package and use the '>{...}'
+ specifier.
+
+ 'p{WD}'
+ Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width WD, as
+ if it were the argument of a '\parbox[t]{wd}{...}' command.
+
+ A line break double backslash '\\' may not appear in the item,
+ except inside an environment like 'minipage', 'array', or
+ 'tabular', or inside an explicit '\parbox', or in the scope of
+ a '\centering', '\raggedright', or '\raggedleft' declaration
+ (when used in a 'p'-column element these declarations must
+ appear inside braces, as with '{\centering .. \\ ..}').
+ Otherwise LaTeX will misinterpret the double backslash as
+ ending the row. Instead, to get a line break in there use
+ '\newline' (*note \newline::).
+
+ '*{NUM}{COLS}'
+ Equivalent to NUM copies of COLS, where NUM is a positive
+ integer and COLS is a list of specifiers. Thus the specifier
+ '\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}' is equivalent to the specifier
+ '\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}'. Note that COLS may contain
+ another '*'-expression.
+
+WIDTH
+ Required for 'tabular*', not allowed for 'tabular'. Specifies the
+ width of the 'tabular*' environment. The space between columns
+ should be rubber, as with '@{\extracolsep{\fill}}', to allow the
+ table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
+ are likely to get the 'Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
+ ...' warning.
+
+ Parameters that control formatting:
+
+'\arrayrulewidth'
+ A length that is the thickness of the rule created by '|',
+ '\hline', and '\vline' in the 'tabular' and 'array' environments.
+ The default is '.4pt'. Change it as in
+ '\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}'.
+
+'\arraystretch'
+ A factor by which the spacing between rows in the 'tabular' and
+ 'array' environments is multiplied. The default is '1', for no
+ scaling. Change it as '\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}'.
+
+'\doublerulesep'
+ A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced
+ by the '||' specifier. The default is '2pt'.
+
+'\tabcolsep'
+ A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
+ '6pt'. Change it with '\setlength'.
+
+ The following commands can be used inside the body of a 'tabular'
+environment, the first two inside an entry and the second two between
+lines:
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \multicolumn:: Make an item spanning several columns.
+* \vline:: Draw a vertical line.
+* \cline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
+* \hline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \multicolumn, Next: \vline, Up: tabular
+
+8.23.1 '\multicolumn'
+---------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \multicolumn{NUMCOLS}{COLS}{TEXT}
+
+ Make an 'array' or 'tabular' entry that spans several columns. The
+first argument NUMCOLS gives the number of columns to span. The second
+argument COLS specifies the formatting of the entry, with 'c' for
+centered, 'l' for flush left, or 'r' for flush right. The third
+argument TEXT gives the contents of that entry.
+
+ In this example, in the first row, the second and third columns are
+spanned by the single heading 'Name'.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{lccl}
+ \textit{ID} &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\
+ \hline
+ 978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick &55 \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ What counts as a column is: the column format specifier for the
+'array' or 'tabular' environment is broken into parts, where each part
+(except the first) begins with 'l', 'c', 'r', or 'p'. So from
+'\begin{tabular}{|r|ccp{1.5in}|}' the parts are '|r|', 'c', 'c',
+and 'p{1.5in}|'.
+
+ The COLS argument overrides the 'array' or 'tabular' environment's
+intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn entry. To affect
+that area, this argument can contain vertical bars '|' indicating the
+placement of vertical rules, and '@{...}' expressions. Thus if COLS is
+'|c|' then this multicolumn entry will be centered and a vertical rule
+will come in the intercolumn area before it and after it. This table
+details the exact behavior.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{|cc|c|c|}
+ \multicolumn{1}{r}{w} % entry one
+ &\multicolumn{1}{|r|}{x} % entry two
+ &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{y} % entry three
+ &z % entry four
+ \end{tabular}
+
+Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule because
+the '\multicolumn' has the COLS specifier 'r' with no initial vertical
+bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a vertical rule;
+although the first COLS does not have an ending vertical bar, the second
+COLS does have a starting one. Between entry two and entry three there
+is a single vertical rule; despite that the COLS in both of the
+surrounding 'multicolumn''s call for a vertical rule, you only get one
+rule. Between entry three and entry four there is no vertical rule; the
+default calls for one but the COLS in the entry three '\multicolumn'
+leaves it out, and that takes precedence. Finally, following entry four
+there is a vertical rule because of the default.
+
+ The number of spanned columns NUMCOLS can be 1. Besides giving the
+ability to change the horizontal alignment, this also is useful to
+override for one row the 'tabular' definition's default intercolumn area
+specification, including the placement of vertical rules.
+
+ In the example below, in the 'tabular' definition the first column is
+specified to default to left justified but in the first row the entry is
+centered with '\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}'. Also in the first
+row, the second and third columns are spanned by a single entry with
+'\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}}', overriding the specification to
+center those two columns on the page range en-dash.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{l|r@{--}l}
+ \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}
+ &multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}} \\ \hline
+ Baroque &1600 &1760 \\
+ Classical &1730 &1820 \\
+ Romantic &1780 &1910 \\
+ Impressionistic &1875 &1925
+ \end{tabular}
+
+Although the 'tabular' specification by default puts a vertical rule
+between the first and second columns, no such vertical rule appears in
+the first row here. That's because there is no vertical bar in the COLS
+part of the first row's first '\multicolumn' command.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \vline, Next: \cline, Prev: \multicolumn, Up: tabular
+
+8.23.2 '\vline'
+---------------
+
+Draw a vertical line in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment extending the
+full height and depth of an entry's row. Can also be used in an
+@-expression, although its synonym vertical bar '|' is more common.
+This command is rarely used in the body of a table; typically a table's
+vertical lines are specified in 'tabular''s COLS argument and overridden
+as needed with '\multicolumn' (*note tabular::).
+
+ The example below illustrates some pitfalls. In the first row's
+second entry the '\hfill' moves the '\vline' to the left edge of the
+cell. But that is different than putting it halfway between the two
+columns, so between the first and second columns there are two vertical
+rules, with the one from the '{c|cc}' specifier coming before the one
+produced by the '\vline\hfill'. In contrast, the first row's third
+entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two columns. In
+the second row, the 'ghi' is the widest entry in its column so in the
+'\vline\hfill' the '\hfill' has no effect and the vertical line in that
+entry appears immediately next to the 'g', with no whitespace.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{c|cc}
+ x &\vline\hfill y &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\ % row 1
+ abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi % row 2
+ \end{tabular}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \cline, Next: \hline, Prev: \vline, Up: tabular
+
+8.23.3 '\cline'
+---------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \cline{I-J}
+
+ In an 'array' or 'tabular' environment, draw a horizontal rule
+beginning in column I and ending in column J. The dash, '-', must
+appear in the mandatory argument. To span a single column use the
+number twice, as with '\cline{2-2}'.
+
+ This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second
+rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the
+third and fourth columns. The two lines are side-by-side, at the same
+height.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{llrr}
+ a &b &c &d \\ \cline{1-1} \cline{3-4}
+ e &f &g &h
+ \end{tabular}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hline, Prev: \cline, Up: tabular
+
+8.23.4 '\hline'
+---------------
+
+Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing 'tabular' or 'array'
+environment. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom,
+and between the rows of a table.
+
+ In this example the top of the table has two horizontal rules, one
+above the other, that span both columns. The bottom of the table has a
+single rule spanning both columns. Because of the '\hline', the
+'tabular' second row's line ending double backslash '\\' is required.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{ll} \hline\hline
+ Baseball &Red Sox \\
+ Basketball &Celtics \\ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: thebibliography, Next: theorem, Prev: tabular, Up: Environments
+
+8.24 'thebibliography'
+======================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{thebibliography}{WIDEST-LABEL}
+ \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
+ ...
+ \end{thebibliography}
+
+ Produce a bibliography or reference list. There are two ways to
+produce bibliographic lists. This environment is suitable when you have
+only a few references and can maintain the list by hand. *Note Using
+BibTeX:: for a more sophisticated approach.
+
+ This shows the environment with two entries.
+
+ This work is based on \cite{latexdps}.
+ Together they are \cite{latexdps, texbook}.
+ ...
+ \begin{thebibliography}{9}
+ \bibitem{latexdps}
+ Leslie Lamport.
+ \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+ \bibitem{texbook}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit{The \TeX book}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+ \end{thebibliography}
+
+This styles the first reference as '[1] Leslie ...', and so that
+'\cite{latexdps}' produces the matching '... based on [1]'. The second
+'\cite' produces '[1, 2]'. You must compile the document twice to
+resolve these references.
+
+ The mandatory argument WIDEST-LABEL is text that, when typeset, is as
+wide as the widest item label produced by the '\bibitem' commands. The
+tradition is to use '9' for bibliographies with less than 10 references,
+'99' for ones with less than 100, etc.
+
+ The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as 'Bibliography'.
+To change it there are two cases. In the 'book' and 'report' classes,
+where the top level sectioning is '\chapter' and the default title is
+'Bibliography', that title is in the macro '\bibname'. For 'article',
+where the class's top level sectioning is '\section' and the default is
+'References', the title is in macro '\refname'. Change it by redefining
+the command, as with '\renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}' after
+'\begin{document}'.
+
+ Language support packages such as 'babel' will automatically redefine
+'\refname' or '\bibname' to fit the selected language.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \bibitem:: Specify a bibliography item.
+* \cite:: Refer to a bibliography item.
+* \nocite:: Include an item in the bibliography.
+* Using BibTeX:: Automatic generation of bibliographies.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \bibitem, Next: \cite, Up: thebibliography
+
+8.24.1 '\bibitem'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \bibitem{CITE_KEY}
+
+or
+
+ \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
+
+ Generate an entry labeled by LABEL. The default is for LaTeX to
+generates a number using the 'enumi' counter. The "citation key"
+CITE_KEY is a string of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but
+not comma).
+
+ *Note thebibliography:: for an example.
+
+ The optional LABEL changes the default label from an integer to the
+given string. With this
+
+ \begin{thebibliography}
+ \bibitem[Lamport 1993]{latexdps}
+ Leslie Lamport.
+ \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+ \bibitem{texbook}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit{The \TeX book}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+ \end{thebibliography}
+
+the first entry will be styled as '[Lamport 1993] Leslie ...' (The
+amount of horizontal space that LaTeX leaves for the label depends on
+the WIDEST-LABEL argument of the 'thebibliography' environment; see
+*note thebibliography::.) Similarly, '... based on \cite{latexdps}'
+will produce '... based on [Lamport 1994]'.
+
+ If you mix '\bibitem' entries having a LABEL with those that do not
+then LaTeX will number the unlabelled ones sequentially. In the example
+above the 'texbook' entry will appear as '[1] Donald ...', despite that
+it is the second entry.
+
+ If you use the same CITE_KEY twice then you get 'LaTeX Warning: There
+were multiply-defined labels'.
+
+ Under the hood, LaTeX remembers the CITE_KEY and LABEL information
+because '\bibitem' writes it to the auxiliary file 'FILENAME.aux'. For
+instance, the above example causes '\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993}'
+and '\bibcite{texbook}{1}' to appear in that file. The '.aux' file is
+read by the '\begin{document}' command and then the information is
+available for '\cite' commands. This explains why you need to run LaTeX
+twice to resolve references: once to write it out and once to read it
+in.
+
+ Because of this two-pass algorithm, when you add a '\bibitem' or
+change its CITE_KEY you may get 'LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have
+changed. Rerun to get cross-references right'. Fix it by recompiling.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \cite, Next: \nocite, Prev: \bibitem, Up: thebibliography
+
+8.24.2 '\cite'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \cite{KEYS}
+
+or
+
+ \cite[SUBCITE]{KEYS}
+
+ Generate as output a citation to the references associated with KEYS.
+The mandatory KEYS is a citation key, or a comma-separated list of
+citation keys (*note \bibitem::).
+
+ This
+
+ The ultimate source is \cite{texbook}.
+ ...
+ \begin{thebibliography}
+ \bibitem{texbook}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit{The \TeX book}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+ \end{thebibliography}
+
+produces output like '... source is [1]'. (You can change the
+appearance of the citation with bibliography styles. More is in *note
+Using BibTeX::.)
+
+ The optional argument SUBCITE is appended to the citation. For
+example, 'See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook}' might produce 'See 14.3 in
+[1, p. 314]'.
+
+ In addition to what appears in the output, '\cite' writes information
+to the auxiliary file 'FILENAME.aux'. For instance, '\cite{latexdps}'
+writes '\citation{latexdps}' to that file. This information is used by
+BibTeX to include in your reference list only those works that you have
+actually cited; see *note \nocite:: also.
+
+ If KEYS is not in your bibliography information then you get 'LaTeX
+Warning: There were undefined references', and in the output the
+citation shows as a boldface question mark between square brackets.
+There are two possible causes. If you have mistyped something, as in
+'\cite{texbok}' then you need to correct the spelling. On the other
+hand, if you have just added or modified the bibliographic information
+and so changed the '.aux' file (*note \bibitem::) then the fix may be to
+run LaTeX again.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \nocite, Next: Using BibTeX, Prev: \cite, Up: thebibliography
+
+8.24.3 '\nocite'
+----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \nocite{KEYS}
+
+ Produces no output but writes KEYS to the auxiliary file
+'DOC-FILENAME.aux'.
+
+ The mandatory argument KEYS is a comma-separated list of one or more
+citation keys (*note \bibitem::). This information is used by BibTeX to
+include these works in your reference list even though you have not
+cited them (*note \cite::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Using BibTeX, Prev: \nocite, Up: thebibliography
+
+8.24.4 Using BibTeX
+-------------------
+
+As described in 'thebibliography' (*note thebibliography::), a
+sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the
+BibTeX program. This is only an introduction; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
+
+ With BibTeX, you don't use 'thebibliography' (*note
+thebibliography::). Instead, include these lines.
+
+ \bibliographystyle{BIBSTYLE}
+ \bibliography{BIBFILE1, BIBFILE2, ...}
+
+The BIBSTYLE refers to a file 'BIBSTYLE.bst', which defines how your
+citations will look. The standard BIBSTYLE's distributed with BibTeX
+are:
+
+'alpha'
+ Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication. The
+ bibliographic items are sorted alphabetically.
+'plain'
+ Labels are integers. Sort the bibliographic items alphabetically.
+'unsrt'
+ Like 'plain', but entries are in order of citation.
+'abbrv'
+ Like 'plain', but more compact labels.
+
+Many, many other BibTeX style files exist, tailored to the demands of
+various publications. See CTAN's listing
+<http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib>.
+
+ The '\bibliography' command is what actually produces the
+bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
+files named 'BIBFILE1.bib', 'BIBFILE2.bib', ... These contain your
+database in BibTeX format. This shows a typical couple of entries in
+that format.
+
+ @book{texbook,
+ title = {The {{\TeX}}book},
+ author = {D.E. Knuth},
+ isbn = {0201134489},
+ series = {Computers \& typesetting},
+ year = {1983},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley}
+ }
+ @book{sexbook,
+ author = {W.H. Masters and V.E. Johnson},
+ title = {Human Sexual Response},
+ year = {1966},
+ publisher = {Bantam Books}
+ }
+
+ Only the bibliographic entries referred to via '\cite' and '\nocite'
+will be listed in the document's bibliography. Thus you can keep all
+your sources together in one file, or a small number of files, and rely
+on BibTeX to include in this document only those that you used.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: theorem, Next: titlepage, Prev: thebibliography, Up: Environments
+
+8.25 'theorem'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{theorem}
+ THEOREM BODY
+ \end{theorem}
+
+ Produces 'Theorem N' in boldface followed by THEOREM BODY in italics.
+The numbering possibilities for N are described under '\newtheorem'
+(*note \newtheorem::).
+
+ \newtheorem{lem}{Lemma} % in preamble
+ \newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}
+ ...
+ \begin{lem} % in document body
+ text of lemma
+ \end{lem}
+
+ The next result follows immediately.
+ \begin{thm}[Gauss] % put `Gauss' in parens after theorem head
+ text of theorem
+ \end{thm}
+
+ Most new documents use the packages 'amsthm' and 'amsmath' from the
+American Mathematical Society. Among other things these packages
+include a large number of options for theorem environments, such as
+styling options.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: titlepage, Next: verbatim, Prev: theorem, Up: Environments
+
+8.26 'titlepage'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{titlepage}
+ ... text and spacing ...
+ \end{titlepage}
+
+ Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading
+and with succeeding pages numbered starting with page one.
+
+ In this example all formatting, including vertical spacing, is left
+to the author.
+
+ \begin{titlepage}
+ \vspace*{\stretch{1}}
+ \begin{center}
+ {\huge\bfseries Thesis \\[1ex]
+ title} \\[6.5ex]
+ {\large\bfseries Author name} \\
+ \vspace{4ex}
+ Thesis submitted to \\[5pt]
+ \textit{University name} \\[2cm]
+ in partial fulfilment for the award of the degree of \\[2cm]
+ \textsc{\Large Doctor of Philosophy} \\[2ex]
+ \textsc{\large Mathematics} \\[12ex]
+ \vfill
+ Department of Mathematics \\
+ Address \\
+ \vfill
+ \today
+ \end{center}
+ \vspace{\stretch{2}}
+ \end{titlepage}
+
+ To instead produce a standard title page without a 'titlepage'
+environment, use '\maketitle' (*note \maketitle::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: verbatim, Next: verse, Prev: titlepage, Up: Environments
+
+8.27 'verbatim'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ LITERAL-TEXT
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+ A paragraph-making environment in which LaTeX produces as output
+exactly what you type as input. For instance inside LITERAL-TEXT the
+backslash '\' character does not start commands, it produces a printed
+'\', and carriage returns and blanks are taken literally. The output
+appears in a monospaced typewriter-like font ('\tt').
+
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ Symbol swearing: %&$#?!.
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+ The only restriction on 'literal-text' is that it cannot include the
+string '\end{verbatim}'.
+
+ You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros,
+for instance in the argument to a '\section'. This is not the same as
+commands being fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot appear
+there. (But the 'cprotect' package can help with this.)
+
+ One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code. There
+are packages that are an improvement the 'verbatim' environment. For
+instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external
+files, or parts of those files. Such packages include 'listings', and
+'minted'.
+
+ A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments
+is 'fancyvrb'. Another is 'verbatimbox'.
+
+ For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \verb:: The macro form of the 'verbatim' environment.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \verb, Up: verbatim
+
+8.27.1 '\verb'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \verb CHAR LITERAL-TEXT CHAR
+ \verb* CHAR LITERAL-TEXT CHAR
+
+ Typeset LITERAL-TEXT as it is input, including special characters and
+spaces, using the typewriter ('\tt') font.
+
+ This example shows two different invocations of '\verb'.
+
+ This is \verb!literally! the biggest pumpkin ever.
+ And this is the best squash, \verb+literally!+
+
+The first '\verb' has its LITERAL-TEXT surrounded with exclamation
+point, '!'. The second instead uses plus, '+', because the exclamation
+point is part of 'literal-text'.
+
+ The single-character delimiter CHAR surrounds LITERAL-TEXT -- it must
+be the same character before and after. No spaces come between '\verb'
+or '\verb*' and CHAR, or between CHAR and LITERAL-TEXT, or between
+LITERAL-TEXT and the second occurrence of CHAR (the synopsis shows a
+space only to distinguish one component from the other). The delimiter
+must not appear in LITERAL-TEXT. The LITERAL-TEXT cannot include a line
+break.
+
+ The '*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible
+space character.
+
+ The output from this will include a character showing the spaces.
+
+ The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
+
+ For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package 'url' provides
+an option that is better than the '\verb' command, since it allows line
+breaks.
+
+ For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
+'\verb'. One is 'listings', another is 'minted'.
+
+ You cannot use '\verb' in the argument to a macro, for instance in
+the argument to a '\section'. It is not a question of '\verb' being
+fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot appear there. (But
+the 'cprotect' package can help with this.)
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: verse, Prev: verbatim, Up: Environments
+
+8.28 'verse'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{verse}
+ LINE1 \\
+ LINE2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{verse}
+
+ An environment for poetry.
+
+ Here are two lines from Shakespeare's Romeo and Juliet.
+
+ Then plainly know my heart's dear love is set \\
+ On the fair daughter of rich Capulet.
+
+ Separate the lines of each stanza with '\\', and use one or more
+blank lines to separate the stanzas.
+
+ \begin{verse}
+ \makebox[\linewidth][c]{\textit{Shut Not Your Doors} ---Walt Whitman}
+ \\[1\baselineskip]
+ Shut not your doors to me proud libraries, \\
+ For that which was lacking on all your well-fill'd shelves, \\
+ \qquad yet needed most, I bring, \\
+ Forth from the war emerging, a book I have made, \\
+ The words of my book nothing, the drift of it every thing, \\
+ A book separate, not link'd with the rest nor felt by the intellect, \\
+ But you ye untold latencies will thrill to every page.
+ \end{verse}
+
+The output has margins indented on the left and the right, paragraphs
+are not indented, and the text is not right-justified.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Line breaking, Next: Page breaking, Prev: Environments, Up: Top
+
+9 Line breaking
+***************
+
+The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to translate
+your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To produce a
+printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines (and these
+lines must be broken into pages).
+
+ LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking in the text body for
+you but in some environments you manually force line breaks.
+
+ A common workflow is to get a final version of the document content
+before taking a final pass through and considering line breaks (and page
+breaks). This differs from word processing, where you are formatting
+text as you input it. Putting these off until the end prevents a lot of
+fiddling with breaks that will change anyway.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \\:: Start a new line.
+* \obeycr & \restorecr:: Make each input line start a new output line.
+* \newline:: Break the line
+* \- (hyphenation):: Insert explicit hyphenation.
+* \discretionary:: Explicit control of the hyphen character.
+* \fussy & \sloppy:: Be more or less particular with line breaking.
+* \hyphenation:: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
+* \linebreak & \nolinebreak:: Forcing & avoiding line breaks.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \\, Next: \obeycr & \restorecr, Up: Line breaking
+
+9.1 '\\'
+========
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \\
+ \\[MORESPACE]
+
+or one of:
+
+ \\*
+ \\*[MORESPACE]
+
+ End the current line. The optional argument MORESPACE specifies
+extra vertical space to be inserted before the next line. This is a
+rubber length (*note Lengths::) and can be negative. The text before
+the line break is set at its normal length, that is, it is not stretched
+to fill out the line width. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ The starred form, '\\*', tells LaTeX not to start a new page between
+the two lines, by issuing a '\nobreak'.
+
+ \title{My story: \\[0.25in]
+ a tale of woe}
+
+ Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in LaTeX. In
+particular, don't start new paragraphs with '\\'. Instead leave a blank
+line between the two paragraphs. And don't put in a sequence of '\\''s
+to make vertical space. Instead use '\vspace{LENGTH}', or
+'\leavevmode\vspace{LENGTH}', or '\vspace*{LENGTH}' if you want the
+space to not be thrown out at the top of a new page (*note \vspace::).
+
+ The '\\' command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such
+as in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment or in an equation environment.
+
+ The '\\' command is a synonym for '\newline' (*note \newline::) under
+ordinary circumstances (an example of an exception is the 'p{...}'
+column in a 'tabular' environment; *note tabular::).
+
+ The '\\' command is a macro, and its definition changes by context so
+that its definition in normal text, a 'center' environment, a
+'flushleft' environment, and a 'tabular' are all different. In normal
+text when it forces a linebreak it is essentially a shorthand for
+'\newline'. It does not end horizontal mode or end the paragraph, it
+just inserts some glue and penalties so that when the paragraph does end
+a linebreak will occur at that point, with the short line padded with
+white space.
+
+ You get 'LaTeX Error: There's no line here to end' if you use '\\' to
+ask for a new line, rather than to end the current line. An example is
+if you have '\begin{document}\\' or, more likely, something like this.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+ \\
+ In that vertical space put your mark.
+ \end{minipage}
+ \end{center}
+
+Fix it by replacing the double backslash with something like
+'\vspace{\baselineskip}'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \obeycr & \restorecr, Next: \newline, Prev: \\, Up: Line breaking
+
+9.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr'
+============================
+
+The '\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file ('^^M',
+internally) the same as '\\', followed by '\relax'. So each new line in
+the input will also be a new line in the output. The '\restorecr'
+command restores normal line-breaking behavior.
+
+ This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. *Note
+verbatim:: instead.
+
+ With LaTeX's usual defaults, this
+
+ aaa
+ bbb
+
+ \obeycr
+ ccc
+ ddd
+ eee
+
+ \restorecr
+ fff
+ ggg
+
+ hhh
+ iii
+
+produces output like this.
+
+ aaa bbb
+ ccc
+ ddd
+ eee
+
+ fff ggg
+ hhh iii
+
+The indents are paragraph indents.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newline, Next: \- (hyphenation), Prev: \obeycr & \restorecr, Up: Line breaking
+
+9.3 '\newline'
+==============
+
+In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify
+the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph
+mode (*note Modes::), the '\newline' command is equivalent to
+double-backslash (*note \\::). This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
+ However, the two commands are different inside a 'tabular' or 'array'
+environment. In a column with a specifier producing a paragraph box
+such as typically 'p{...}', '\newline' will insert a line end inside of
+the column; that is, it does not break the entire tabular row. To break
+the entire row use '\\' or its equivalent '\tabularnewline'.
+
+ This will print 'Name:' and 'Address:' as two lines in a single cell
+of the table.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{p{1in}{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
+ Name: \newline Address: &Date: \\ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+
+The 'Date:' will be baseline-aligned with 'Name:'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \- (hyphenation), Next: \discretionary, Prev: \newline, Up: Line breaking
+
+9.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen)
+===============================
+
+Tell LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that point. When you
+insert '\-' commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
+those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that LaTeX might
+otherwise have chosen. This command is robust (*note \protect::).
+
+ LaTeX is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct
+hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The '\-'
+command is for exceptional cases.
+
+ For example, LaTeX does not ordinarily hyphenate words containing a
+hyphen. Below, the long and hyphenated word means LaTeX has to put in
+unacceptably large spaces to set the narrow column.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{rp{1.75in}}
+ Isaac Asimov &The strain of
+ anti-intellectualism
+ % an\-ti-in\-tel\-lec\-tu\-al\-ism
+ has been a constant thread winding its way through our
+ political and cultural life, nurtured by
+ the false notion that democracy means that
+ `my ignorance is just as good as your knowledge'.
+ \end{tabular}
+
+Commenting out the third line and uncommenting the fourth makes a much
+better fit.
+
+ The '\-' command only allows LaTeX to break there, it does not
+require that it break there. You can insist on a split with something
+like 'Hef-\linebreak feron'. Of course, if you later change the text
+then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
+care.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \discretionary, Next: \fussy & \sloppy, Prev: \- (hyphenation), Up: Line breaking
+
+9.5 '\discretionary' (generalized hyphenation point)
+====================================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \discretionary{PRE-BREAK}{POST-BREAK}{NO-BREAK}
+
+ Handle word changes around hyphens. This command is not often used
+in LaTeX documents.
+
+ If a line break occurs at the point where '\discretionary' appears
+then TeX puts PRE-BREAK at the end of the current line and puts
+POST-BREAK at the start of the next line. If there is no line break
+here then TeX puts NO-BREAK
+
+ In 'difficult' the three letters 'ffi' form a ligature. But TeX can
+nonetheless break between the two f's with this.
+
+ di\discretionary{f-}{fi}{ffi}cult
+
+ Note that users do not have to do this. It is typically handled
+automatically by TeX's hyphenation algorithm.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \fussy & \sloppy, Next: \hyphenation, Prev: \discretionary, Up: Line breaking
+
+9.6 '\fussy' & '\sloppy'
+========================
+
+Declarations to make TeX more picky or less picky about line breaking.
+Declaring '\fussy' usually avoids too much space between words, at the
+cost of an occasional overfull box. Conversely, '\sloppy' avoids
+overfull boxes while suffering loose interword spacing.
+
+ The default is '\fussy'. Line breaking in a paragraph is controlled
+by whichever declaration is current at the blank line, or '\par', or
+displayed equation ending that paragraph. So to affect the line breaks,
+include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of the command.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* sloppypar:: Environment version of \sloppy command.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: sloppypar, Up: \fussy & \sloppy
+
+9.6.1 'sloppypar'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{sloppypar}
+ ... paragraphs ...
+ \end{sloppypar}
+
+ Typeset the paragraphs with '\sloppy' in effect (*note \fussy &
+\sloppy::). Use this to locally adjust line breaking, to avoid
+'Overfull box' or 'Underfull box' errors.
+
+ The example is simple.
+
+ \begin{sloppypar}
+ Her plan for the morning thus settled, she sat quietly down to her
+ book after breakfast, resolving to remain in the same place and the
+ same employment till the clock struck one; and from habitude very
+ little incommoded by the remarks and ejaculations of Mrs.\ Allen,
+ whose vacancy of mind and incapacity for thinking were such, that
+ as she never talked a great deal, so she could never be entirely
+ silent; and, therefore, while she sat at her work, if she lost her
+ needle or broke her thread, if she heard a carriage in the street,
+ or saw a speck upon her gown, she must observe it aloud, whether
+ there were anyone at leisure to answer her or not.
+ \end{sloppypar}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hyphenation, Next: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Prev: \fussy & \sloppy, Up: Line breaking
+
+9.7 '\hyphenation'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \hyphenation{WORD1 ...}
+
+ Declares allowed hyphenation points within the words in the list.
+The words in that list are separated by spaces. Show permitted points
+for hyphenation with a dash character, '-'.
+
+ Here is an example:
+
+ \hyphenation{hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness}
+
+ Use lowercase letters. TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches
+exactly. Multiple '\hyphenation' commands accumulate.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Prev: \hyphenation, Up: Line breaking
+
+9.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
+=================================
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+ \linebreak
+ \linebreak[ZERO-TO-FOUR]
+
+or one of these.
+
+ \nolinebreak
+ \nolinebreak[ZERO-TO-FOUR]
+
+ Encourage or discourage a line break. The optional ZERO-TO-FOUR is
+an integer that allows you to soften the instruction. The default is 4,
+so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
+prevent the break. But for instance, '\nolinebreak[1]' is a suggestion
+that another place may be better. The higher the number, the more
+insistent the request. Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Here we tell LaTeX that a good place to put a linebreak is after the
+standard legal text.
+
+ \boilerplatelegal{} \linebreak[2]
+ We especially encourage applications from members of traditionally
+ underrepresented groups.
+
+ When you issue '\linebreak', the spaces in the line are stretched out
+so that it extends to the right margin. *Note \\:: and *note \newline::
+to have the spaces not stretched out.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Page breaking, Next: Footnotes, Prev: Line breaking, Up: Top
+
+10 Page breaking
+****************
+
+Ordinarily LaTeX automatically takes care of breaking output into pages
+with its usual aplomb. But if you are writing commands, or tweaking the
+final version of a document, then you may need to understand how to
+influence its actions.
+
+ LaTeX's algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
+than just waiting until there is enough material to fill a page and
+outputting the result. Instead, LaTeX typesets more material than would
+fit on the page and then chooses a break that is optimal in some way (it
+has the smallest badness). An example of the advantage of this approach
+is that if the page has some vertical space that can be stretched or
+shrunk, such as with rubber lengths between paragraphs, then LaTeX can
+use that to avoid widow lines (where a new page starts with the last
+line of a paragraph; LaTeX can squeeze the extra line onto the first
+page) and orphans (where the first line of paragraph is at the end of a
+page; LaTeX can stretch the material of the first page so the extra line
+falls on the second page). Another example is where LaTeX uses
+available vertical shrinkage to fit on a page not just the header for a
+new section but also the first two lines of that section.
+
+ But LaTeX does not optimize over the entire document's set of page
+breaks. So it can happen that the first page break is great but the
+second one is lousy; to break the current page LaTeX doesn't look as far
+ahead as the next page break. So occasionally you may want to influence
+page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.
+
+ *Note Layout:: for more material that is relevant to page breaking.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \clearpage & \cleardoublepage:: Start a new page; eject floats.
+* \newpage:: Start a new page.
+* \enlargethispage:: Enlarge the current page a bit.
+* \pagebreak & \nopagebreak:: Forcing & avoiding page breaks.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage, Next: \newpage, Up: Page breaking
+
+10.1 '\clearpage' & '\cleardoublepage'
+======================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \clearpage
+
+or
+
+ \cleardoublepage
+
+ End the current page and output all of the pending floating figures
+and tables (*note Floats::). If there are too many floats to fit on the
+page then LaTeX will put in extra pages containing only floats. In
+two-sided printing, '\cleardoublepage' also makes the next page of
+content a right-hand page, an odd-numbered page, if necessary inserting
+a blank page. The '\clearpage' command is robust while
+'\cleardoublepage' is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ LaTeX's page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+
+ The '\cleardoublepage' command will put in a blank page, but it will
+have the running headers and footers. To get a really blank page, use
+this command.
+
+ \let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage
+ \newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{%
+ \clearpage
+ {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}%
+ }
+
+If you want LaTeX's standard '\chapter' command to do this then add the
+line '\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage'.
+
+ The command '\newpage' (*note \newpage::) also ends the current page,
+but without clearing pending floats. And, if LaTeX is in two-column
+mode then '\newpage' ends the current column while '\clearpage' and
+'\cleardoublepage' end the current page.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newpage, Next: \enlargethispage, Prev: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage, Up: Page breaking
+
+10.2 '\newpage'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \newpage
+
+ End the current page. This command is robust (*note \protect::).
+
+ LaTeX's page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+
+ While the commands '\clearpage' and '\cleardoublepage' also end the
+current page, in addition they clear pending floats (*note \clearpage &
+\cleardoublepage::). And, if LaTeX is in two-column mode then
+'\clearpage' and '\cleardoublepage' end the current page, possibly
+leaving an empty column, while '\newpage' only ends the current column.
+
+ In contrast with '\pagebreak' (*note \pagebreak & \nopagebreak::),
+the '\newpage' command will cause the new page to start right where
+requested. This
+
+ Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+ continent,
+ \newpage
+ \noindent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the
+ proposition that all men are created equal.
+
+makes a new page start after 'continent,' and the cut-off line is not
+right justified. In addition, '\newpage' does not vertically stretch
+out the page, as '\pagebreak' does.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \enlargethispage, Next: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, Prev: \newpage, Up: Page breaking
+
+10.3 '\enlargethispage'
+=======================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \enlargethispage{size}
+ \enlargethispage*{size}
+
+ Enlarge the '\textheight' for the current page. The required
+argument SIZE must be a rigid length (*note Lengths::). It may be
+positive or negative. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ A common strategy is to wait until you have the final text of a
+document, and then pass through it tweaking line and page breaks. This
+command allows you some page size leeway.
+
+ This will allow one extra line on the current page.
+
+ \enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
+
+ The starred form '\enlargesthispage*' tries to squeeze the material
+together on the page as much as possible, for the common use case of
+getting one more line on the page. This is often used together with an
+explicit '\pagebreak'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, Prev: \enlargethispage, Up: Page breaking
+
+10.4 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak'
+==================================
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \pagebreak
+ \pagebreak[ZERO-TO-FOUR]
+
+or
+
+ \nopagebreak
+ \nopagebreak[ZERO-TO-FOUR]
+
+ Encourage or discourage a page break. The optional ZERO-TO-FOUR is
+an integer that allows you to soften the request. The default is 4, so
+that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
+prevent the break. But for instance '\nopagebreak[1]' suggests to LaTeX
+that another spot might be preferable. The higher the number, the more
+insistent the request. Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ LaTeX's page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+
+ If you use these inside a paragraph, they apply to the point
+following the line in which they appear. So this
+
+ Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+ continent,
+ \pagebreak
+ a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition
+ that all men are created equal.
+
+does not give a page break at 'continent,' but instead at 'nation,'
+since that is where LaTeX breaks that line. In addition, with
+'\pagebreak' the vertical space on the page is stretched out where
+possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. This can look
+strange, and if '\flushbottom' is in effect this can cause you to get
+'Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active'.
+*Note \newpage:: for a command that does not have these effects.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnotes, Next: Definitions, Prev: Page breaking, Up: Top
+
+11 Footnotes
+************
+
+Place a footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
+
+ Noe"l Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
+ to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making
+ love.\footnote{%
+ I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}
+
+ You can put multiple footnotes on a page. If the footnote text
+becomes too long then it will flow to the next page.
+
+ You can also produce footnotes by combining the '\footnotemark' and
+the '\footnotetext' commands, which is useful in special circumstances.
+
+ To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
+include a bibliographic style with that behavior (*note Using BibTeX::).
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \footnote:: Insert a footnote.
+* \footnotemark:: Insert footnote mark only.
+* \footnotetext:: Insert footnote text only.
+* Footnotes in section headings:: Chapter or section titles.
+* Footnotes in a table:: Table footnotes.
+* Footnotes of footnotes:: Multiple classes of footnotes.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnote, Next: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes
+
+11.1 '\footnote'
+================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \footnote{TEXT}
+ \footnote[NUMBER]{TEXT}
+
+ Place a footnote TEXT at the bottom of the current page.
+
+ There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's
+ \textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{%
+ After reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained,
+ ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method
+ of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed
+ at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}
+
+ The optional argument NUMBER allows you to specify the number of the
+footnote. If you use this then LaTeX does not increment the 'footnote'
+counter.
+
+ By default, LaTeX uses arabic numbers as footnote markers. Change
+this with something like
+'\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}', which uses a
+sequence of symbols (*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
+\fnsymbol::). To make this change global put that in the preamble. If
+you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
+'\setcounter{footnote}{0}'.
+
+ LaTeX determines the spacing of footnotes with two parameters.
+
+'\footnoterule'
+ Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the
+ page's footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document
+ classes (except 'slides', where it does not appear) is: vertical
+ thickness of '0.4pt', and horizontal size of '0.4\columnwidth'
+ long. Change the rule with something like this.
+
+ \renewcommand{\footnoterule}{% Kerns avoid vertical space
+ \kern -3pt % This -3 is negative
+ \hrule width \textwidth height 1pt % of the sum of this 1
+ \kern 2pt} % and this 2
+
+'\footnotesep'
+ The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
+ (*note \strut::). By default, this is set to the normal strut for
+ '\footnotesize' fonts (*note Font sizes::), therefore there is no
+ extra space between footnotes. This is '6.65pt' for '10pt',
+ '7.7pt' for '11pt', and '8.4pt' for '12pt'. Change it as with
+ '\setlength{\footnotesep}{11pt}'.
+
+ The '\footnote' command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ LaTeX's default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
+'\footnote'; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
+sectioning command such as '\chapter' (it can only be used in outer
+paragraph mode; *note Modes::). There are some workarounds; see
+following sections.
+
+ In a 'minipage' environment the '\footnote' command uses the
+'mpfootnote' counter instead of the 'footnote' counter, so they are
+numbered independently. They are shown at the bottom of the
+environment, not at the bottom of the page. And by default they are
+shown alphabetically. *Note minipage:: and *note Footnotes in a
+table::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotemark, Next: \footnotetext, Prev: \footnote, Up: Footnotes
+
+11.2 '\footnotemark'
+====================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \footnotemark
+ \footnotemark[NUMBER]
+
+ Put the current footnote mark in the text. To specify associated
+text for the footnote see *note \footnotetext::. The optional argument
+NUMBER causes the command to use that number to determine the footnote
+mark. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode (*note Modes::).
+
+ If you use '\footnotemark' without the optional argument then it
+increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional NUMBER then
+it does not. The next example produces several consecutive footnote
+markers referring to the same footnote.
+
+ The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.}
+ and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+ and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+
+ If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value
+of the common mark. This example gives the same institutional
+affiliation to both the first and third authors ('\thanks' is a version
+of 'footnote'), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+
+ \title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
+ \author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds}
+ \and A C Doyle\thanks{Durham University}
+ \and S Holmes\footnotemark[1]}
+ \begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+
+ This uses a counter to remember the footnote number. The third
+sentence is followed by the same footnote marker as the first.
+
+ \newcounter{footnoteValueSaver}
+ All babies are illogical.\footnote{%
+ Lewis Carroll.}\setcounter{footnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}}
+ Nobody is despised who can manage a crocodile.\footnote{%
+ Captain Hook.}
+ Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value{footnoteValueSaver}]
+ Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby.
+
+ This example accomplishes the same by using the package 'cleveref'.
+
+ \usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % in preamble
+ \crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
+ ...
+ The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker, Evers, 1994.}
+ The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers, Chance, 1990.}
+ But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
+
+ It will work with the package 'hyperref'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotetext, Next: Footnotes in section headings, Prev: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes
+
+11.3 '\footnotetext'
+====================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \footnotetext{TEXT}
+ \footnotetext[NUMBER]{TEXT}
+
+ Place TEXT at the bottom of the page as a footnote. It pairs with
+'\footnotemark' (*note \footnotemark::) and can come anywhere after that
+command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (*note Modes::). The
+optional argument NUMBER changes the number of the footnote mark.
+
+ *Note \footnotemark:: and *note Footnotes in a table:: for usage
+examples.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnotes in section headings, Next: Footnotes in a table, Prev: \footnotetext, Up: Footnotes
+
+11.4 Footnotes in section headings
+==================================
+
+Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
+
+ \section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}
+
+causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
+section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
+contents, where it is not likely to be desired. The simplest way to
+have it not appear on the table of contents is to use the optional
+argument to '\section'
+
+ \section[Please]{Please\footnote{%
+ Don't footnote in chapter and section headers!}}
+
+No '\protect' is needed in front of '\footnote' here because what gets
+moved to the table of contents is the optional argument.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnotes in a table, Next: Footnotes of footnotes, Prev: Footnotes in section headings, Up: Footnotes
+
+11.5 Footnotes in a table
+=========================
+
+Inside a 'tabular' or 'array' environment the '\footnote' command does
+not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but the footnote
+text does not appear. The solution is to use a 'minipage' environment
+as here (*note minipage::).
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Ship} &\textsc{Book} \\ \hline
+ \textit{HMS Sophie} &Master and Commander \\
+ \textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain \\
+ \textit{HMS Lively} &Post Captain \\
+ \textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{%
+ Starting with HMS Surprise.}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{minipage}
+ \end{center}
+
+ Inside a 'minipage', footnote marks are lowercase letters. Change
+that with something like
+'\renewcommand{\thempfootnote}{\arabic{mpfootnote}}' (*note \alph \Alph
+\arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::).
+
+ The footnotes in the prior example appear at the bottom of the
+'minipage'. To have them appear at the bottom of the main page, as part
+of the regular footnote sequence, use the '\footnotemark' and
+'\footnotetext' pair and make a new counter.
+
+ \newcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+ \setcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}} \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Woman} &\textsc{Relationship} \\ \hline
+ Mona &Attached\footnotemark \\
+ Diana Villiers &Eventual wife \\
+ Christine Hatherleigh Wood &Fiance\footnotemark
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{minipage}% percent sign keeps footnote text close to minipage
+ \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+ \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+ Little is known other than her death.}%
+ \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+ \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+ Relationship is unresolved in XXI.}
+ \end{center}
+
+ For a floating 'table' environment (*note table::), use the
+'tablefootnote' package.
+
+ \usepackage{tablefootnote} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{table}
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Date} &\textsc{Campaign} \\ \hline
+ 1862 &Fort Donelson \\
+ 1863 &Vicksburg \\
+ 1865 &Army of Northern Virginia\tablefootnote{%
+ Ending the war.}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Forces captured by US Grant}
+ \end{table}
+
+The footnote appears at the page bottom and is numbered in sequence with
+other footnotes.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnotes of footnotes, Prev: Footnotes in a table, Up: Footnotes
+
+11.6 Footnotes of footnotes
+===========================
+
+Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
+footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package
+'bigfoot' extends LaTeX's default footnote mechanism in many ways,
+including allow these two, as in this example.
+
+ \usepackage{bigfoot} % in preamble
+ \DeclareNewFootnote{Default}
+ \DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph] % create class \footnotefrom{}
+ ...
+ The third theorem is a partial converse of the
+ second.\footnotefrom{%
+ First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Definitions, Next: Counters, Prev: Footnotes, Up: Top
+
+12 Definitions
+**************
+
+LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \newcommand & \renewcommand:: (Re)define a new command.
+* \providecommand:: Define a new command, if name not used.
+* \makeatletter & \makeatother:: Change the status of the at-sign character.
+* \@ifstar:: Define your own commands with *-variants.
+* \newcounter:: Define a new counter.
+* \newlength:: Define a new length.
+* \newsavebox:: Define a new box.
+* \newenvironment & \renewenvironment:: Define a new environment.
+* \newtheorem:: Define a new theorem-like environment.
+* \newfont:: Define a new font name.
+* \protect:: Using tricky commands.
+* \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend:: Discard extra spaces.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Next: \providecommand, Up: Definitions
+
+12.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand'
+====================================
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+ \newcommand{\CMD}{DEFN}
+ \newcommand{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \newcommand{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \newcommand*{\CMD}{DEFN}
+ \newcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \newcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+
+or one of these.
+
+ \renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand*{\CMD}{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+
+ Define or redefine a command. See also the discussion of
+'\DeclareRobustCommand' in *note Class and package commands::. The
+starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain
+multiple paragraphs of text (in plain TeX terms that it not be '\long').
+
+ These are the parameters:
+
+CMD
+
+ Required; the command name. It must begin with a backslash, '\',
+ and must not begin with the four letter string '\end'. For
+ '\newcommand', it must not be already defined. For
+ '\renewcommand', this name must already be defined.
+
+NARGS
+ Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of
+ arguments that the command takes, including any optional argument.
+ Omitting this argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that
+ the command has no arguments. If you redefine a command, the new
+ version can have a different number of arguments than the old
+ version.
+
+OPTARGDEFAULT
+ Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
+ '\CMD' is optional, with default value OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be
+ the empty string). If this argument is not present then '\CMD'
+ does not take an optional argument.
+
+ That is, if '\CMD' is used with square brackets, as in
+ '\CMD[OPTVAL]{...}...', then within DEFN the parameter '#1' is set
+ to the value of OPTVAL. On the other hand, if '\CMD' is called
+ without the square brackets then within DEFN the parameter '#1' is
+ set to the value of OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, the required
+ arguments start with '#2'.
+
+ Omitting '[OPTARGDEFAULT]' is different from having the square
+ brackets with no contents, as in '[]'. The former sets '#1' to the
+ value of OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter sets '#1' to the empty string.
+
+DEFN
+ Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of
+ '\CMD'. The parameters '#1', '#2', ... '#NARGS' are replaced by
+ the values that you supply when you call the command (or by the
+ default value if there is an optional argument and you don't
+ exercise the option).
+
+ TeX ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
+sequence, as in '\cmd '. If you actually want a space there, one
+solution is to type '{}' after the command ('\cmd{} ', and another
+solution is to use an explicit control space ('\cmd\ ').
+
+ A simple example of defining a new command: '\newcommand{\RS}{Robin
+Smith}' results in '\RS' being replaced by the longer text. Redefining
+an existing command is similar: '\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small
+QED}}'.
+
+ If you try to define a command and the name has already been used
+then you get something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \fred already defined.
+Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual'. If you try to
+redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
+something like 'LaTeX Error: \hank undefined'.
+
+ Here the first command definition has no arguments, and the second
+has one required argument.
+
+ \newcommand{\student}{Ms~O'Leary}
+ \newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
+
+Use the first as in 'I highly recommend \student{} to you'. The second
+has a variable, so that '\defref{def:basis}' expands to
+'Definition~\ref{def:basis}', which ultimately expands to something like
+'Definition~3.14'.
+
+ Similarly, but with two required arguments:
+'\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1 \times #2$}' is invoked as '\nbym{2}{k}'.
+
+ This example has an optional argument.
+
+ \newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}
+
+Then '\salutation' gives 'Dear Sir or Madam:' while '\salutation[John]'
+gives 'Dear John:'. And '\salutation[]' gives 'Dear :'.
+
+ This example has an optional argument and two required arguments.
+
+ \newcommand{\lawyers}[3][company]{#2, #3, and~#1}
+ I employ \lawyers[Howe]{Dewey}{Cheatem}.
+
+The output is 'I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe'. The optional
+argument, the 'Howe', is associated with '#1', while 'Dewey' and
+'Cheatem' are associated with '#2' and '#3'. Because of the optional
+argument, '\lawyers{Dewey}{Cheatem}' will give the output 'I employ
+Dewey, Cheatem, and company'.
+
+ The braces around DEFN do not define a group, that is, they do not
+delimit the scope of the result of expanding DEFN. For example, with
+'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}', in this sentence,
+
+ The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}.
+
+the words 'met the' would incorrectly be in italics. The solution is to
+put another pair of braces inside the definition:
+'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \providecommand, Next: \makeatletter & \makeatother, Prev: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Up: Definitions
+
+12.2 '\providecommand'
+======================
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+ \providecommand{CMD}{DEFN}
+ \providecommand{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \providecommand{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \providecommand*{CMD}{DEFN}
+ \providecommand*{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \providecommand*{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+
+ Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
+If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
+as '\newcommand'. If a command of this name already exists then this
+definition does nothing. This is particularly useful in a file that may
+be loaded more than once, such as a style file. *Note \newcommand &
+\renewcommand:: for the description of the arguments.
+
+ This example
+
+ \providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+ \providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+ From \myaffiliation.
+
+outputs 'From Saint Michael's College'. Unlike '\newcommand', the
+repeated use of '\providecommand' does not give an error.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \makeatletter & \makeatother, Next: \@ifstar, Prev: \providecommand, Up: Definitions
+
+12.3 '\makeatletter' & '\makeatother'
+=====================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \makeatletter
+ ... definition of commands with @ in their name ..
+ \makeatother
+
+ Use this pair when you redefine LaTeX commands that are named with an
+at-sign character ''@''. The '\makeatletter' declaration makes the
+at-sign character have the category code of a letter, code 11. The
+'\makeatother' declaration sets the category code of the at-sign to
+code 12, its default value.
+
+ As TeX reads characters, it assigns each one a category code, or
+"catcode". For instance, it assigns the backslash character ''\'' the
+catcode 0. Command names consist of a category 0 character, ordinarily
+backslash, followed by letters, category 11 characters (except that a
+command name can also consist of a category 0 character followed by a
+single non-letter symbol).
+
+ LaTeX's source code has the convention that some commands use '@' in
+their name. These commands are mainly intended for package or class
+writers. The convention prevents authors who are just using a package
+or class from accidentally replacing such a command with one of their
+own, because by default the at-sign has catcode 12.
+
+ The pair '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother' changes the default code
+and then changes it back. Use them inside a '.tex' file, in the
+preamble, when you are defining or redefining commands named with '@',
+by having them surround your definition. Don't use these inside '.sty'
+or '.cls' files since the '\usepackage' and '\documentclass' commands
+already arrange that the at-sign has the character code of a letter,
+catcode 11.
+
+ For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign in their names see
+<http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e>.
+
+ In this example the class file has a command '\thesis@universityname'
+that the user wants to change. These three lines should go in the
+preamble, before the '\begin{document}'.
+
+ \makeatletter
+ \renewcommand{\thesis@universityname}{Saint Michael's College}
+ \makeatother
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \@ifstar, Next: \newcounter, Prev: \makeatletter & \makeatother, Up: Definitions
+
+12.4 '\@ifstar'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \newcommand{\mycmd}{\@ifstar{\mycmd@star}{\mycmd@nostar}}
+ \newcommand{\mycmd@nostar}[NOSTAR-NUM-ARGS]{NOSTAR-BODY}
+ \newcommand{\mycmd@star}[STAR-NUM-ARGS]{STAR-BODY}
+
+ Many standard LaTeX environments or commands have a variant with the
+same name but ending with a star character '*', an asterisk. Examples
+are the 'table' and 'table*' environments and the '\section' and
+'\section*' commands.
+
+ When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward
+because '\newenvironment' and '\renewenvironment' allow the environment
+name to contain a star. For commands the situation is more complex. As
+in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command, given above
+as '\mycmd', which peeks ahead to see if it is followed by a star. For
+instance, LaTeX does not really have a '\section*' command; instead, the
+'\section' command peeks ahead. This command does not accept arguments
+but instead expands to one of two commands that do accept arguments. In
+the synopsis these two are '\mycmd@nostar' and '\mycmd@star'. They
+could take the same number of arguments or a different number, or no
+arguments at all. As always, in a LaTeX document a command using
+at-sign '@' must be enclosed inside a '\makeatletter ... \makeatother'
+block (*note \makeatletter & \makeatother::).
+
+ This example of '\@ifstar' defines the command '\ciel' and a variant
+'\ciel*'. Both have one required argument. A call to '\ciel{night}'
+will return "starry night sky" while '\ciel*{blue}' will return "starry
+not blue sky".
+
+ \newcommand*{\ciel@unstarred}[1]{starry #1 sky}
+ \newcommand*{\ciel@starred}[1]{starry not #1 sky}
+ \newcommand*{\ciel}{\@ifstar{\ciel@starred}{\ciel@unstarred}}
+
+ In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
+arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007's
+'``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond}, \agentsecret{James}{Bond}.''' is
+equivalent to entering the commands '``My name is \textsc{Bond},
+\textit{James} textsc{Bond}.'''
+
+ \newcommand*{\agentsecret@unstarred}[2]{\textit{#1} \textsc{#2}}
+ \newcommand*{\agentsecret@starred}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
+ \newcommand*{\agentsecret}{%
+ \@ifstar{\agentsecret@starred}{\agentsecret@unstarred}}
+
+ There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work
+of '\@ifstar'. The 'suffix' package allows the construct
+'\newcommand\mycommand{UNSTARRED VERSION}' followed by
+'\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{STARRED VERSION}'. And LaTeX3 has
+the 'xparse' package that allows this code.
+
+ \NewDocumentCommand\foo{s}{\IfBooleanTF#1
+ {STARRED VERSION}%
+ {UNSTARRED VERSION}%
+ }
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcounter, Next: \newlength, Prev: \@ifstar, Up: Definitions
+
+12.5 '\newcounter': Allocating a counter
+========================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \newcounter{COUNTERNAME}
+ \newcounter{COUNTERNAME}[SUPERCOUNTER]
+
+ Globally defines a new counter named COUNTERNAME and initialize it to
+zero (*note Counters::).
+
+ The name COUNTERNAME must consist of letters only. It does not begin
+with a backslash. This name must not already be in use by another
+counter.
+
+ When you use the optional argument '[SUPERCOUNTER]' then the counter
+COUNTERNAME will be reset to zero whenever SUPERCOUNTER is incremented.
+For example, ordinarily 'subsection' is numbered within 'section' so
+that any time you increment SECTION, either with '\stepcounter' (*note
+\stepcounter::) or '\refstepcounter' (*note \refstepcounter::), then
+LaTeX will reset SUBSECTION to zero.
+
+ This example
+
+ \newcounter{asuper} \setcounter{asuper}{1}
+ \newcounter{asub}[asuper] \setcounter{asub}{3} % Note `asuper'
+ The value of asuper is \arabic{asuper} and of asub is \arabic{asub}.
+ \stepcounter{asuper}
+ Now asuper is \arabic{asuper} while asub is \arabic{asub}.
+
+ produces 'The value of asuper is 1 and that of asub is 3' and 'Now
+asuper is 2 while asub is 0'.
+
+ If the counter already exists, for instance by entering 'asuper'
+twice, then you get something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \c@asuper
+already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual.'.
+
+ If you use the optional argument then the super counter must already
+exist. Entering '\newcounter{jh}[lh]' when 'lh' is not a defined
+counter will get you 'LaTeX Error: No counter 'lh' defined.'
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newlength, Next: \newsavebox, Prev: \newcounter, Up: Definitions
+
+12.6 '\newlength'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \newlength{ARG}
+
+ Allocate a new length register (*note Lengths::). The required
+argument ARG must begin with a backslash, '\'. The new register holds
+rubber lengths such as '72.27pt' or '1in plus.2in minus.1in' (a LaTeX
+length register is what plain TeX calls a 'skip' register). The initial
+value is zero. The control sequence '\ARG' must not be already defined.
+
+ An example:
+
+ \newlength{\graphichgt}
+
+ If you forget the backslash then you get 'Missing control sequence
+inserted'. If the command sequence already exists then you get
+something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined. Or
+name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newsavebox, Next: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Prev: \newlength, Up: Definitions
+
+12.7 '\newsavebox'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \newsavebox{\CMD}
+
+ Define \CMD, the string consisting of a backslash followed by CMD, to
+refer to a new bin for storing material. These bins hold material that
+has been typeset, to use multiple times or to measure or manipulate
+(*note Boxes::). The bin name \CMD is required, must start with a
+backslash, \, and must not already be a defined command. This command
+is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ This allocates a bin and then puts typeset material into it.
+
+ \newsavebox{\logobox}
+ \savebox{\logobox}{LoGo}
+ Our logo is \usebox{\logobox}.
+
+The output is 'Our logo is LoGo'.
+
+ If there is an already defined bin then you get something like 'LaTeX
+Error: Command \logobox already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see
+p.192 of the manual'.
+
+ The allocation of a box is global.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Next: \newtheorem, Prev: \newsavebox, Up: Definitions
+
+12.8 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
+============================================
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+ \newenvironment{ENV}{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \newenvironment*{ENV}{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \newenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \newenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+
+or one of these.
+
+ \renewenvironment{ENV}{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \renewenvironment*{ENV}{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \renewenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \renewenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+
+ Define or redefine the environment ENV, that is, create the construct
+'\begin{ENV} ... BODY ... \end{ENV}'.
+
+ The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text. However, the body of these
+environments can contain multiple paragraphs.
+
+ENV
+ Required; the environment name. It consists only of letters or the
+ '*' character, and thus does not begin with backslash, '\'. It
+ must not begin with the string 'end'. For '\newenvironment', the
+ name ENV must not be the name of an already existing environment,
+ and also the command '\ENV' must be undefined. For
+ '\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an existing
+ environment.
+
+NARGS
+ Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments
+ of that the environment takes. When you use the environment these
+ arguments appear after the '\begin', as in '\begin{ENV}{ARG1} ...
+ {ARGN}'. Omitting this is equivalent to setting it to 0; the
+ environment will have no arguments. When redefining an
+ environment, the new version can have a different number of
+ arguments than the old version.
+
+OPTARGDEFAULT
+ Optional; if this is present then the first argument of the defined
+ environment is optional, with default value OPTARGDEFAULT (which
+ may be the empty string). If this is not in the definition then
+ the environment does not take an optional argument.
+
+ That is, when OPTARGDEFAULT is present in the definition of the
+ environment then you can start the environment with square
+ brackets, as in '\begin{ENV}[OPTVAL]{...} ... \end{ENV}'. In this
+ case, within BEGDEFN the parameter '#1' is set to the value of
+ OPTVAL. If you call '\begin{ENV}' without square brackets, then
+ within BEGDEFN the parameter '#1' is set to the value of the
+ default OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, any required arguments
+ start with '#2'.
+
+ Omitting '[MYVAL]' in the call is different than having the square
+ brackets with no contents, as in '[]'. The former results in '#1'
+ expanding to OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter results in '#1' expanding to
+ the empty string.
+
+BEGDEF
+ Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\begin{ENV}'.
+ Within BEGDEF, the parameters '#1', '#2', ... '#NARGS', are
+ replaced by the values that you supply when you call the
+ environment; see the examples below.
+
+ENDDEF
+ Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\end{ENV}'.
+ This may not contain any parameters, that is, you cannot use '#1',
+ '#2', etc., here (but see the final example below).
+
+ All environments, that is to say the BEGDEF code, the environment
+body, and the ENDDEF code, are processed within a group. Thus, in the
+first example below, the effect of the '\small' is limited to the quote
+and does not extend to material following the environment.
+
+ If you try to define an environment and the name has already been
+used then you get something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual'. If you try
+to redefine an environment and the name has not yet been used then you
+get something like 'LaTeX Error: Environment hank undefined.'.
+
+ This example gives an environment like LaTeX's 'quotation' except
+that it will be set in smaller type.
+
+ \newenvironment{smallquote}{%
+ \small\begin{quotation}
+ }{%
+ \end{quotation}
+ }
+
+ This has an argument, which is set in boldface at the start of a
+paragraph.
+
+ \newenvironment{point}[1]{%
+ \noindent\textbf{#1}
+ }{%
+ }
+
+ This one shows the use of a optional argument; it gives a quotation
+environment that cites the author.
+
+ \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
+ \begin{quotation}
+ \noindent\textit{#1}:
+ }{%
+ \end{quotation}
+ }
+
+The author's name is optional, and defaults to 'Shakespeare'. In the
+document, use the environment like this.
+
+ \begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
+ ...
+ \end{citequote}
+
+ The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use
+in ENDDEF, in this case in a box (*note \sbox & \savebox::).
+
+ \newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
+ \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
+ \sbox\quoteauthor{#1}%
+ \begin{quotation}
+ }{%
+ \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---\usebox{\quoteauthor}
+ \end{quotation}
+ }
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newtheorem, Next: \newfont, Prev: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Up: Definitions
+
+12.9 '\newtheorem'
+==================
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}
+ \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]
+ \newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}
+
+ Define a new theorem-like environment. You can specify one of
+NUMBERED_WITHIN and NUMBERED_LIKE, or neither, but not both.
+
+ The first form, '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}', creates an environment
+that will be labelled with TITLE; see the first example below.
+
+ The second form, '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]', creates
+an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing counter
+NUMBERED_WITHIN, so this counter will be reset when NUMBERED_WITHIN is
+reset. See the second example below.
+
+ The third form '\newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}', with
+optional argument between the two required arguments, creates an
+environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
+NUMBERED_LIKE. See the third example.
+
+ This command creates a counter named NAME. In addition, unless the
+optional argument NUMBERED_LIKE is used, inside of the theorem-like
+environment the current '\ref' value will be that of
+'\theNUMBERED_WITHIN' (*note \ref::).
+
+ This declaration is global. It is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Arguments:
+
+NAME
+ The name of the environment. It is a string of letters. It must
+ not begin with a backslash, '\'. It must not be the name of an
+ existing environment, and the command name '\NAME' must not already
+ be defined.
+
+TITLE
+ The text to be printed at the beginning of the environment, before
+ the number. For example, 'Theorem'.
+
+NUMBERED_WITHIN
+ Optional; the name of an already defined counter, usually a
+ sectional unit such as 'chapter' or 'section'. When the
+ NUMBERED_WITHIN counter is reset then the NAME environment's
+ counter will also be reset.
+
+ If this optional argument is not used then the command '\theNAME'
+ is set to '\arabic{NAME}'.
+
+NUMBERED_LIKE
+ Optional; the name of an already defined theorem-like environment.
+ The new environment will be numbered in sequence with
+ NUMBERED_LIKE.
+
+ Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
+sequentially. The example below has a declaration in the preamble that
+results in 'Definition 1' and 'Definition 2' in the output.
+
+ \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ First def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ Second def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ This example has the same document body as the prior one. But here
+'\newtheorem''s optional argument NUMBERED_WITHIN is given as 'section',
+so the output is like 'Definition 1.1' and 'Definition 2.1'.
+
+ \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ First def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ Second def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ In the next example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
+second of which calls for the new 'thm' environment to use the same
+counter as 'defn'. It gives 'Definition 1.1', followed by 'Theorem 2.1'
+and 'Definition 2.2'.
+
+ \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+ \newtheorem{thm}[defn]{Theorem}
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ First def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{thm}
+ First thm
+ \end{thm}
+
+ \begin{defn}
+ Second def
+ \end{defn}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newfont, Next: \protect, Prev: \newtheorem, Up: Definitions
+
+12.10 '\newfont'
+================
+
+This command is obsolete. This description is here only to help with
+old documents. New documents should define fonts in families through
+the New Font Selection Scheme which allows you to, for example,
+associate a boldface with a roman (*note Fonts::).
+
+ Synopsis:
+
+ \newfont{\CMD}{FONT DESCRIPTION}
+
+ Define a command '\CMD' that will change the current font. The
+control sequence must not already be defined. It must begin with a
+backslash, '\'.
+
+ The FONT DESCRIPTION consists of a FONTNAME and an optional "at
+clause". LaTeX will look on your system for a file named
+'FONTNAME.tfm'. The at clause can have the form either 'at DIMEN' or
+'scaled FACTOR', where a FACTOR of '1000' means no scaling. For LaTeX's
+purposes, all this does is scale all the character and other font
+dimensions relative to the font's design size, which is a value defined
+in the '.tfm' file.
+
+ This defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few characters in
+each.
+
+ \newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt}
+ \newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 1100}
+ \testfontat abc
+ \testfontscaled abc
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \protect, Next: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend, Prev: \newfont, Up: Definitions
+
+12.11 '\protect'
+================
+
+All LaTeX commands are either "fragile" or "robust". A fragile command
+can break when it is used in the argument to certain other commands.
+Commands that contain data that LaTeX writes to an auxiliary file and
+re-reads later are fragile. This includes material that goes into a
+table of contents, list of figures, list of tables, etc. Fragile
+commands also include line breaks, any command that has an optional
+argument, and many more. To prevent such commands from breaking, one
+solution is to preceded them with the command '\protect'.
+
+ For example, when LaTeX runs the '\section{SECTION NAME}' command it
+writes the SECTION NAME text to the '.aux' auxiliary file, moving it
+there for use elsewhere in the document such as in the table of
+contents. Any argument that is internally expanded by LaTeX without
+typesetting it directly is referred to as a "moving argument". A
+command is fragile if it can expand during this process into invalid TeX
+code. Some examples of moving arguments are those that appear in the
+'\caption{...}' command (*note figure::), in the '\thanks{...}' command
+(*note \maketitle::), and in @-expressions in the 'tabular' and 'array'
+environments (*note tabular::).
+
+ If you get strange errors from commands used in moving arguments, try
+preceding it with '\protect'. Every fragile commands must be protected
+with their own '\protect'.
+
+ Although usually a '\protect' command doesn't hurt, length commands
+are robust and should not be preceded by a '\protect' command. Nor can
+a '\protect' command be used in the argument to '\addtocounter' or
+'\setcounter' command.
+
+ In this example the '\caption' command gives a mysterious error about
+an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each '\raisebox'
+command with '\protect'.
+
+ \begin{figure}
+ ...
+ \caption{Company headquarters of A\raisebox{1pt}{B}\raisebox{-1pt}{C}}
+ \end{figure}
+
+ In the next example the '\tableofcontents' command gives an error
+because the '\(..\)' in the section title expands to illegal TeX in the
+'.toc' file. You can solve this by changing '\(..\)' to
+'\protect\(..\protect\)'.
+
+ \begin{document}
+ \tableofcontents
+ ...
+ \section{Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)}
+ ...
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend, Prev: \protect, Up: Definitions
+
+12.12 '\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend'
+=============================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ignorespaces
+
+or
+
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+
+ Both commands cause LaTeX to ignore spaces after the end of the
+command up until the first non-space character. The first is a command
+from Plain TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific.
+
+ The 'ignorespaces' is often used when defining commands via
+'\newcommand', or '\newenvironment', or '\def'. The example below
+illustrates. It allows a user to show the points values for quiz
+questions in the margin but it is inconvenient because, as shown in the
+'enumerate' list, users must not put any space between the command and
+the question text.
+
+ \newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item\points{10}no extra space output here
+ \item\points{15} extra space between the number and the `extra'
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+The solution is to change to this.
+
+ \newcommand{\points}[1]{%
+ \makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}
+
+ A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text.
+The commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names.
+But, as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
+'\fullname' will reproduce that.
+
+ \makeatletter
+ \newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\@honorific{#1}} % remember title
+ \newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1} % put title before name
+ \makeatother
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|}
+ \honorific{Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones} \\ % no extra space here
+ \honorific{ Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones} % extra space before title
+ \end{tabular}
+
+To fix this, change to
+'\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\@honorific~#1}'.
+
+ The '\ignorespaces' is also often used in a '\newenvironment' at the
+end of the BEGIN clause, that is, as part of the second argument, as in
+'\begin{newenvironment}{ENV NAME}{... \ignorespaces}{...}'.
+
+ To strip spaces off the end of an environment use
+'\ignorespacesafterend'. An example is that this will show a much
+larger vertical space between the first and second environments than
+between the second and third.
+
+ \newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}}
+ \begin{eq}
+ e=mc^2
+ \end{eq}
+ \begin{equation}
+ F=ma
+ \end{equation}
+ \begin{equation}
+ E=IR
+ \end{equation}
+
+ Putting a comment character '%' immediately after the '\end{eq}' will
+make the vertical space disappear, but that is inconvenient. The
+solution is to change to
+'\newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}\ignorespacesafterend}'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Counters, Next: Lengths, Prev: Definitions, Up: Top
+
+13 Counters
+***********
+
+Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
+name of the counter is often the same as the name of the environment or
+command associated with the number, except that the counter's name has
+no backslash '\'. Thus, associated with the '\chapter' command is the
+'chapter' counter that keeps track of the chapter number.
+
+ Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document
+classes to control numbering.
+
+ part paragraph figure enumi
+ chapter subparagraph table enumii
+ section page footnote enumiii
+ subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+ subsubsection
+
+ The 'mpfootnote' counter is used by the '\footnote' command inside of
+a minipage (*note minipage::). The counters 'enumi' through 'enumiv'
+are used in the 'enumerate' environment, for up to four levels of
+nesting (*note enumerate::).
+
+ Counters can have any integer value but they are typically positive.
+
+ New counters are created with '\newcounter'. *Note \newcounter::.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol:: Print value of a counter.
+* \usecounter:: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
+* \value:: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
+* \setcounter:: Set the value of a counter.
+* \addtocounter:: Add a quantity to a counter.
+* \refstepcounter:: Add to a counter.
+* \stepcounter:: Add to a counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+* \day & \month & \year:: Numeric date values.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Next: \usecounter, Up: Counters
+
+13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
+=====================================================================
+
+Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if
+the counter COUNTER has the value 1 then a '\alph{COUNTER}' in your
+source will result in a lowercase letter a appearing in the output.
+
+ All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
+instance, '\alph{enumi}'. Note that the counter name does not start
+with a backslash.
+
+'\alph{COUNTER}'
+ Print the value of COUNTER in lowercase letters: 'a', 'b', ... If
+ the counter's value is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get
+ 'LaTeX Error: Counter too large.'
+
+'\Alph{COUNTER}'
+ Print in uppercase letters: 'A', 'B', ... If the counter's value
+ is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get 'LaTeX Error: Counter
+ too large.'
+
+'\arabic{COUNTER}'
+ Print in Arabic numbers such as '5' or '-2'.
+
+'\roman{COUNTER}'
+ Print in lowercase roman numerals: 'i', 'ii', ... If the counter's
+ value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but LaTeX
+ does not print anything in the output.
+
+'\Roman{COUNTER}'
+ Print in uppercase roman numerals: 'I', 'II', ... If the counter's
+ value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but LaTeX
+ does not print anything in the output.
+
+'\fnsymbol{COUNTER}'
+ Prints the value of COUNTER using a sequence of nine symbols that
+ are traditionally used for labeling footnotes. The value of
+ COUNTER should be between 1 and 9, inclusive. If the counter's
+ value is less than 0 or more than 9 then you get 'LaTeX Error:
+ Counter too large', while if it is 0 then you get no error or
+ warning but LaTeX does not output anything.
+
+ Here are the symbols:
+
+ Number Name Command Symbol
+ -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 1 asterisk '\ast' *
+ 2 dagger '\dagger' U+2020
+ 3 ddagger '\ddagger' U+2021
+ 4 section-sign '\S' U+00A7
+ 5 paragraph-sign '\P' U+00B6
+ 6 double-vert '\parallel' U+2016
+ 7 double-asterisk '\ast\ast' **
+ 8 double-dagger '\dagger\dagger' U+2020U+2020
+ 9 double-ddagger '\ddagger\ddagger' U+2021U+2021
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \usecounter, Next: \value, Prev: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Up: Counters
+
+13.2 '\usecounter'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usecounter{COUNTER}
+
+ Used in the second argument of the 'list' environment (*note list::),
+this declares that list items will be numbered by COUNTER. It
+initializes COUNTER to zero, and arranges that when '\item' is called
+without its optional argument then COUNTER is incremented by
+'\refstepcounter', making its value be the current 'ref' value (*note
+\ref::). This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Put in the document preamble, this example makes a new list
+environment enumerated with TESTCOUNTER:
+
+ \newcounter{testcounter}
+ \newenvironment{test}{%
+ \begin{list}{}{%
+ \usecounter{testcounter}
+ }
+ }{%
+ \end{list}
+ }
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \value, Next: \setcounter, Prev: \usecounter, Up: Counters
+
+13.3 '\value'
+=============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \value{COUNTER}
+
+ Expands to the value of the counter COUNTER. (Note that the name of
+a counter does not begin with a backslash.)
+
+ This example outputs 'Test counter is 6. Other counter is 5.'.
+
+ \newcounter{test} \setcounter{test}{5}
+ \newcounter{other} \setcounter{other}{\value{test}}
+ \addtocounter{test}{1}
+
+ Test counter is \arabic{test}.
+ Other counter is \arabic{other}.
+
+ The '\value' command is not used for typesetting the value of the
+counter. For that, see *note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
+\fnsymbol::.
+
+ It is often used in '\setcounter' or '\addtocounter' but '\value' can
+be used anywhere that LaTeX expects a number, such as in
+'\hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}'. It must not be preceded by '\protect'
+(*note \protect::).
+
+ This example inserts '\hspace{4\parindent}'.
+
+ \setcounter{myctr}{3} \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
+ \hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \setcounter, Next: \addtocounter, Prev: \value, Up: Counters
+
+13.4 '\setcounter'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}
+
+ Globally set the counter COUNTER to have the value of the VALUE
+argument, which must be an integer. Thus, you can set a counter's value
+as '\setcounter{section}{5}'. Note that the counter name does not start
+with a backslash.
+
+ In this example if the counter 'theorem' has value 12 then the second
+line will print 'XII'.
+
+ \setcounter{exercise}{\value{theorem}}
+ Here it is in Roman: \Roman{exercise}.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocounter, Next: \refstepcounter, Prev: \setcounter, Up: Counters
+
+13.5 '\addtocounter'
+====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE
+
+ Globally increment COUNTER by the amount specified by the VALUE
+argument, which may be negative.
+
+ In this example the section value appears as 'VII'.
+
+ \setcounter{section}{5}
+ \addtocounter{section}{2}
+ Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \refstepcounter, Next: \stepcounter, Prev: \addtocounter, Up: Counters
+
+13.6 '\refstepcounter'
+======================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \refstepcounter{COUNTER}
+
+ Globally increments the value of COUNTER by one, as does
+'\stepcounter' (*note \stepcounter::). The difference is that this
+command resets the value of any counter numbered within it. (For the
+definition of "counters numbered within", *note \newcounter::.)
+
+ In addition, this command also defines the current '\ref' value to be
+the result of '\thecounter'.
+
+ While the counter value is set globally, the '\ref' value is set
+locally, i.e., inside the current group.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \stepcounter, Next: \day & \month & \year, Prev: \refstepcounter, Up: Counters
+
+13.7 '\stepcounter'
+===================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \stepcounter{COUNTER}
+
+ Globally adds one to COUNTER and resets all counters numbered within
+it. (For the definition of "counters numbered within", *note
+\newcounter::.)
+
+ This command differs from '\refstepcounter' in that this one does not
+influence references -- it does not define the current '\ref' value to
+be the result of '\thecounter' (*note \refstepcounter::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \day & \month & \year, Prev: \stepcounter, Up: Counters
+
+13.8 '\day' & '\month' & '\year'
+================================
+
+LaTeX defines the counter '\day' for the day of the month (nominally
+with value between 1 and 31), '\month' for the month of the year
+(nominally with value between 1 and 12), and year '\year'. When TeX
+starts up, they are set from the current values on the system. The
+related command '\today' produces a string representing the current day
+(*note \today::).
+
+ They counters are not updated as the job progresses so in principle
+they could be incorrect by the end. In addition, TeX does no sanity
+check:
+
+ \day=-2 \month=13 \year=-4 \today
+
+gives no error or warning and results in the output '-2, -4' (the bogus
+month value produces no output).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Lengths, Next: Making paragraphs, Prev: Counters, Up: Top
+
+14 Lengths
+**********
+
+A "length" is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
+as an argument.
+
+ Lengths come in two types. A "rigid length" such as '10pt' does not
+contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component. (Plain TeX calls this a
+"dimen".) A "rubber length" (what Plain TeX calls a "skip") such as as
+with '1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm' can contain either or both of those
+components. In that rubber length, the '1cm' is the "natural length"
+while the other two, the 'plus' and 'minus' components, allow TeX to
+stretch or shrink the length to optimize placement.
+
+ The illustrations below use these two commands.
+
+ % make a black bar 10pt tall and #1 wide
+ \newcommand{\blackbar}[1]{\rule{#1}{10pt}}
+
+ % Make a box around #2 that is #1 wide (excluding the border)
+ \newcommand{\showhbox}[2]{%
+ \fboxsep=0pt\fbox{\hbox to #1{#2}}}
+
+This example uses those commands to show a black bar 100 points long
+between 'XXX' and 'YYY'. This length is rigid.
+
+ XXX\showhbox{100pt}{\blackbar{100pt}}YYY
+
+ As for rubber lengths, shrinking is simpler one: with '1cm minus
+0.05cm', the natural length is 1cm but TeX can shrink it down as far as
+0.95cm. Beyond that, TeX refuses to shrink any more. Thus, below the
+first one works fine, producing a space of 98 points between the two
+bars.
+
+ XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{101pt}\hspace{100pt minus 2pt}\blackbar{101pt}}YYY
+
+ XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{105pt}\hspace{100pt minus 1pt}\blackbar{105pt}}YYY
+
+But the second one gets a warning like 'Overfull \hbox (1.0pt too wide)
+detected at line 17'. In the output the first 'Y' is overwritten by the
+end of the black bar, because the box's material is wider than the 300pt
+allocated, as TeX has refused to shrink the total to less than
+309 points.
+
+ Stretching is like shrinking except that if TeX is asked to stretch
+beyond the given amount, it will do it. Here the first line is fine,
+producing a space of 110 points between the bars.
+
+ XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 10pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+
+ XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 1pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+
+In the second line TeX needs a stretch of 10 points and only 1 point was
+specified. TeX stretches the space to the required length but it gives
+you a warning like 'Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) detected at line
+22'. (We won't discuss badness.)
+
+ You can put both stretch and shrink in the same length, as in '1ex
+plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex'.
+
+ If TeX is setting two or more rubber lengths then it allocates the
+stretch or shrink in proportion.
+
+ XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{100pt}% left
+ \hspace{0pt plus 50pt}\blackbar{80pt}\hspace{0pt plus 10pt}% middle
+ \blackbar{100pt}}YYY % right
+
+The left and right bars take up 100 points, so the middle needs another
+100. The middle bar is 80 points so the two '\hspace''s must stretch
+20 points. Because the two are 'plus 50pt' and 'plus 10pt', TeX gets
+5/6 of the stretch from the first space and 1/6 from the second.
+
+ The 'plus' or 'minus' component of a rubber length can contain a
+"fill" component, as in '1in plus2fill'. This gives the length infinite
+stretchability or shrinkability so that TeX could set it to any
+distance. Here the two figures will be equal-spaced across the page.
+
+ \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{godel.png}%
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{einstein.png}%
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}
+ \end{minipage}
+
+ TeX actually has three levels of infinity for glue components: 'fil',
+'fill', and 'filll'. The later ones are more infinite than the earlier
+ones. Ordinarily document authors only use the middle one (*note
+\hfill:: and *note \vfill::).
+
+ Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length,
+so that after '\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}' and
+'\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}' then the value of '\zlength' is '3in'.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Units of length:: The units that LaTeX knows.
+* \setlength:: Set the value of a length.
+* \addtolength:: Add a quantity to a length.
+* \settodepth:: Set a length to the depth of something.
+* \settoheight:: Set a length to the height of something.
+* \settowidth:: Set a length to the width of something.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Units of length, Next: \setlength, Up: Lengths
+
+14.1 Units of length
+====================
+
+TeX and LaTeX know about these units both inside and outside of math
+mode.
+
+'pt'
+ Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two
+ decimal places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm.
+
+'pc'
+ Pica, 12 pt
+
+'in'
+ Inch, 72.27 pt
+
+'bp'
+ Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in
+ PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
+
+'cm'
+ Centimeter
+
+'mm'
+ Millimeter
+
+'dd'
+ Didot point, 1.07 pt
+
+'cc'
+ Cicero, 12 dd
+
+'sp'
+ Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
+
+ Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer
+of the font. The x-height of the current font "ex", traditionally the
+height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical lengths.
+Similarly "em", traditionally the width of the capital letter M, is
+often used for horizontal lengths (there is also '\enspace', which is
+'0.5em'). Use of these can help make a definition work better across
+font changes. For example, a definition of the vertical space between
+list items given as '\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex}'
+is more likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a
+definition given in points.
+
+ In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math
+unit "mu" given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family. *Note Spacing in math mode::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \setlength, Next: \addtolength, Prev: Units of length, Up: Lengths
+
+14.2 '\setlength'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \setlength{LEN}{AMOUNT}
+
+ Set the length LEN to AMOUNT. The length name LEN must begin with a
+backslash, '\'. The 'amount' can be a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
+It can be positive, negative or zero, and can be in any units that LaTeX
+understands (*note Units of length::).
+
+ Below, with LaTeX's defaults the first paragraph will be indented
+while the second will not.
+
+ I told the doctor I broke my leg in two places.
+
+ \setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+ He said stop going to those places.
+
+ If you did not declare LEN with '\newlength', for example if you
+mistype the above as
+'\newlength{\specparindent}\setlength{\sepcparindent}{...}', then you
+get an error like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \sepcindent'.
+If you omit the backslash at the start of the length name then you get
+an error like 'Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again>
+\relax l.19 \setlength{specparindent}{0.6\parindent}'
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtolength, Next: \settodepth, Prev: \setlength, Up: Lengths
+
+14.3 '\addtolength'
+===================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \addtolength{LEN}{AMOUNT}
+
+ Increment the length LEN by AMOUNT. The length name LEN begins with
+a backslash, '\'. The 'amount' is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
+It can be positive, negative or zero, and can be in any units that LaTeX
+understands (*note Units of length::).
+
+ Below, if '\parskip' starts with the value '0pt plus 1pt'
+
+ Doctor: how is the boy who swallowed the silver dollar?
+ \addtolength{\parskip}{1pt}
+
+ Nurse: no change.
+
+then it has the value '1pt plus 1pt' for the second paragraph.
+
+ If you did not declare the length LEN with '\newlength', if for
+example you mistype the above as
+'\addtolength{\specparindent}{0.6\praindent}', then you get something
+like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent'. If you leave
+off the backslash at the start of LEN, as in
+'\addtolength{parindent}{1pt}', then you get something like 'You can't
+use `the letter p' after \advance'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \settodepth, Next: \settoheight, Prev: \addtolength, Up: Lengths
+
+14.4 '\settodepth'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \settodepth{LEN}{TEXT}
+
+ Set the length LEN to the depth of box that LaTeX gets on typesetting
+the TEXT argument. The length name LEN must begin with a backslash,
+'\'.
+
+ This will show how low the character descenders go.
+
+ \newlength{\alphabetdepth}
+ \settodepth{\alphabetdepth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+ \the\alphabetdepth
+
+ If you did not set aside the length LEN, if for example you mistype
+the above as '\settodepth{\aplhabetdepth}{abc...}', then you get
+something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \aplhabetdepth'.
+If you leave the backslash out of LEN, as in
+'\settodepth{alphabetdepth}{...}' then you get something like 'Missing
+number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \settoheight, Next: \settowidth, Prev: \settodepth, Up: Lengths
+
+14.5 '\settoheight'
+===================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \settoheight{LEN}{text}
+
+ Sets the length LEN to the height of box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the 'text' argument. The length name LEN must begin with a
+backslash, '\'.
+
+ This will show how high the characters go.
+
+ \newlength{\alphabetheight}
+ \settoheight{\alphabetheight}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+ \the\alphabetheight
+
+ If no such length LEN has been declared with '\newlength', if for
+example you mistype as '\settoheight{\aplhabetheight}{abc...}', then you
+get something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument>
+\alphabetheight'. If you leave the backslash out of LEN, as in
+'\settoheight{alphabetheight}{...}' then you get something like 'Missing
+number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \settowidth, Prev: \settoheight, Up: Lengths
+
+14.6 '\settowidth'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \settowidth{LEN}{TEXT}
+
+ Set the length LEN to the width of the box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the TEXT argument. The length name LEN must begin with a
+backslash, '\'.
+
+ This measures the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
+
+ \newlength{\alphabetwidth}
+ \settowidth{\alphabetwidth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+ \the\alphabetwidth
+
+ If no such length LEN has been set aside, if for example you mistype
+the above as '\settowidth{\aplhabetwidth}{abc...}', then you get
+something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \aplhabetwidth'.
+If you leave the backslash out of LEN, as in
+'\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...}' then you get something like 'Missing
+number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Making paragraphs, Next: Math formulas, Prev: Lengths, Up: Top
+
+15 Making paragraphs
+********************
+
+To start a paragraph, just type some text. To end the current
+paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, separated by
+two empty lines.
+
+ It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession
+ of a good fortune, must be in want of a wife.
+
+ However little known the feelings or views of such a man may be on his
+ first entering a neighbourhood, this truth is so well fixed in the minds
+ of the surrounding families, that he is considered the rightful property
+ of some one or other of their daughters.
+
+ ``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day,
+ ``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
+
+ The separator lines must be empty, including not containing a comment
+character, '%'.
+
+ Once LaTeX has gathered all of a paragraph's contents it divides that
+content into lines in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph
+(*note Line breaking::).
+
+ There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don't put a
+blank line in math mode (*note Modes::); here the line before the
+'\end{equation}'
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ 2^{|S|} > |S|
+
+ \end{equation}
+
+will get you the error 'Missing $ inserted'. Similarly, the blank line
+in this 'section' argument
+
+ \section{aaa
+
+ bbb}
+
+gets 'Runaway argument? {aaa ! Paragraph ended before \@sect was
+complete'.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \par:: End the current paragraph.
+* \indent & \noindent:: Go into horizontal mode, possibly with an indent.
+* \parindent & \parskip:: Space added before paragraphs.
+* Marginal notes:: Put remarks in the margin.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \par, Next: \indent & \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs
+
+15.1 '\par'
+===========
+
+Synopsis (note that while reading the input TeX converts two consecutive
+newlines to a '\par'):
+
+ \par
+
+ End the current paragraph. The usual way to separate paragraphs is
+with a blank line but the '\par' command is entirely equivalent. This
+command is robust (*note \protect::).
+
+ This example uses '\par' rather than a blank line simply for
+readability.
+
+ \newcommand{\syllabusLegalese}{%
+ \whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou}
+
+ In LR mode or a vertical mode the '\par' command does nothing but it
+terminates paragraph mode, switching LaTeX to vertical mode (*note
+Modes::).
+
+ You cannot use the '\par' command in a math mode. You also cannot
+use it in the argument of many commands, such as the '\section' command
+(*note Making paragraphs:: and *note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).
+
+ The '\par' command is not the same as the '\paragraph' command. The
+latter is, like '\section' or '\subsection', a sectioning unit used by
+the standard LaTeX documents (*note \subsubsection & \paragraph &
+\subparagraph::).
+
+ The '\par' command is not the same as '\newline' or the line break
+double backslash, '\\'. The difference is that '\par' ends the
+paragraph, not just the line, and also triggers the addition of the
+between-paragraph vertical space '\parskip' (*note \parindent &
+\parskip::).
+
+ The output from this example
+
+ xyz
+
+ \setlength{\parindent}{3in}
+ \setlength{\parskip}{5in}
+ \noindent test\indent test1\par test2
+
+is: after 'xyz' there is a vertical skip of 5 inches and then 'test'
+appears, aligned with the left margin. On the same line, there is an
+empty horizontal space of 3 inches and then 'test1' appears. Finally.
+there is a vertical space of 5 inches, followed by a fresh paragraph
+with a paragraph indent of 3 inches, and then LaTeX puts the text
+'test2'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \indent & \noindent, Next: \parindent & \parskip, Prev: \par, Up: Making paragraphs
+
+15.2 '\indent' & '\noindent'
+============================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \indent
+
+or
+
+ \noindent
+
+ Go into horizontal mode (*note Modes::). The '\indent' command first
+outputs an empty box whose width is '\parindent'. These commands are
+robust (*note \protect::).
+
+ Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line.
+*Note \par:: for the difference between this command and '\par'. To
+start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted
+paragraph, use '\noindent'.
+
+ In the middle of a paragraph the '\noindent' command has no effect,
+because LaTeX is already in horizontal mode there. The '\indent'
+command's only effect is to output a space.
+
+ This example starts a fresh paragraph.
+
+ ... end of the prior paragraph.
+
+ \noindent This paragraph is not indented.
+
+and this continues an interrupted paragraph.
+
+ The data
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{rl} ... \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+ \noindent shows this clearly.
+
+ To omit indentation in the entire document put
+'\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}' in the preamble. If you do that, you may
+want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs, '\parskip'
+(*note \parindent & \parskip::).
+
+ Default LaTeX styles have the first paragraph after a section that is
+not indented, as is traditional typesetting in English. To change that,
+look on CTAN for the package 'indentfirst'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \parindent & \parskip, Next: Marginal notes, Prev: \indent & \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs
+
+15.3 '\parindent' & '\parskip'
+==============================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \setlength{\parskip}{HORIZONTAL LEN}
+ \setlength{\parinden}{VERTICAL LEN}
+
+ Both are a rubber lengths (*note Lengths::). They give the
+indentation of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages
+(*note minipage::), and the vertical space between paragraphs.
+
+ This, put in the preamble,
+
+ \setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+ \setlength{\parskip}{1ex}
+
+arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented,
+but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase
+'x'.
+
+ In standard LaTeX documents, the default value for '\parindent' in
+one-column documents is '15pt' when the default text size is '10pt' ,
+'17pt' for '11pt', and '1.5em' for '12pt'. In two-column documents it
+is '1em'. The default value for '\parskip' in LaTeX's standard document
+styles is '0pt plus1pt'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Marginal notes, Prev: \parindent & \parskip, Up: Making paragraphs
+
+15.4 Marginal notes
+===================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \marginpar{RIGHT}
+ \marginpar[LEFT]{RIGHT}
+
+ Create a note in the margin. The first line of the note will have
+the same baseline as the line in the text where the '\marginpar' occurs.
+
+ The margin that LaTeX uses for the note depends on the current layout
+(*note Document class options::) and also on '\reversemarginpar' (see
+below). If you are using one-sided layout (document option 'oneside')
+then it goes in the right margin. If you are using two-sided layout
+(document option 'twoside') then it goes in the outside margin. If you
+are in two-column layout (document option 'twocolumn') then it goes in
+the nearest margin.
+
+ If you declare '\reversemarginpar' then LaTeX will place subsequent
+marginal notes in the opposite margin to that given in the prior
+paragraph. Revert that to the default position with '\normalmarginpar'.
+
+ When you specify the optional argument LEFT then it is used for a
+note in the left margin, while the mandatory argument RIGHT is used for
+a note in the right margin.
+
+ Normally, a note's first word will not be hyphenated. You can enable
+hyphenation there by beginning LEFT or RIGHT with '\hspace{0pt}'.
+
+ These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
+
+'\marginparpush'
+ Minimum vertical space between notes; default '7pt' for '12pt'
+ documents, '5pt' else.
+
+'\marginparsep'
+ Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default '11pt'
+ for '10pt' documents, '10pt' else.
+
+'\marginparwidth'
+ Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided '10pt' document
+ is '90pt', '83pt' for '11pt', and '68pt' for '12pt'; '17pt' more in
+ each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the
+ default is '48pt'.
+
+ The standard LaTeX routine for marginal notes does not prevent notes
+from falling off the bottom of the page.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Math formulas, Next: Modes, Prev: Making paragraphs, Up: Top
+
+16 Math formulas
+****************
+
+Produce mathematical text by putting LaTeX into math mode or display
+math mode (*note Modes::). This example shows both.
+
+ The wave equation for \( u \) is
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \frac{\partial^2u}{\partial t^2} = c^2\nabla^2u
+ \end{displaymath}
+ where \( \nabla^2 \) is the spatial Laplacian and \( c \) is constant.
+
+Math mode is for inline mathematics. In the above example it is invoked
+by the starting '\(' and finished by the matching ending '\)'. Display
+math mode is for displayed equations and here is invoked by the
+'displaymath' environment. Note that any mathematical text whatever,
+including mathematical text consisting of just one character, is handled
+in math mode.
+
+ When in math mode or display math mode, LaTeX handles many aspects of
+your input text differently than in other text modes. For example,
+
+ contrast x+y with \( x+y \)
+
+in math mode the letters are in italics and the spacing around the plus
+sign is different.
+
+ There are three ways to make inline formulas, to put LaTeX in math
+mode.
+
+ \( MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL \)
+ $ MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL $
+ \begin{math} MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL \end{math}
+
+The first form is preferred and the second is quite common, but the
+third form is rarely used. You can sometimes use one and sometimes
+another, as in '\(x\) and $y$'. You can use these in paragraph mode or
+in LR mode (*note Modes::).
+
+ To make displayed formulas, put LaTeX into display math mode with
+either:
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL
+ \end{equation}
+
+(*note displaymath::, *note equation::). The only difference is that
+with the 'equation' environment, LaTeX puts a formula number alongside
+the formula. The construct '\[ MATH \]' is equivalent to
+'\begin{displaymath} MATH \end{displaymath}'. These environments can
+only be used in paragraph mode (*note Modes::).
+
+ The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some
+differences. One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts;
+in display math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they
+are closer together.
+
+ Sometimes you want the display math typographical treatment to happen
+in the inline math mode. For this, the '\displaystyle' declaration
+forces the size and style of the formula to be that of 'displaymath'.
+Thus '\(\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n\)' will have the limits
+above and below the summation sign, not next to it. Another example is
+that
+
+ \begin{tabular}{r|cc}
+ \textsc{Name} &\textsc{Series} &\textsc{Sum} \\ \hline
+ Arithmetic &\( a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b) \)
+ &\( na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac{b}{2}\) \\
+ Geometric &\( a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^{n-1} \)
+ &\(\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}\) \\
+ \end{tabular}
+
+because it has no '\displaystyle', the 'Arithmetic' line's fraction will
+be scrunched. But, because of its '\displaystyle', the 'Geometric'
+line's fraction will be easy to read, with characters the same size as
+in the rest of the line.
+
+ The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of
+packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics,
+'amsmath' and 'amssymb' (also be aware of the 'mathtools' package that
+is an extension to, and loads, 'amsmath'). New documents that will have
+mathematical text should use these packages. Descriptions of these
+packages is outside the scope of this document; see their documentation
+on CTAN.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Subscripts & superscripts:: Also known as exponent or index.
+* Math symbols:: Various mathematical squiggles.
+* Math functions:: Math function names like sin and exp.
+* Math accents:: Accents in math.
+* Over- and Underlining:: Things over or under formulas.
+* Spacing in math mode:: Thick, medium, thin, and negative spaces.
+* Math miscellany:: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Subscripts & superscripts, Next: Math symbols, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.1 Subscripts & superscripts
+==============================
+
+Synopsis (in math mode or display math mode), one of:
+
+ BASE^EXP
+ BASE^{EXP}
+
+or, one of:
+
+ BASE_EXP
+ BASE_{EXP}
+
+ Make EXP appear as a superscript of BASE (with the caret
+character, '^') or a subscript (with underscore, '_').
+
+ In this example the '0''s and '1''s are subscripts while the '2''s
+are superscripts.
+
+ \( (x_0+x_1)^2 \leq (x_0)^2+(x_1)^2 \)
+
+ To have the subscript or superscript contain more than one character,
+surround the expression with curly braces, as in 'e^{-2x}'. This
+example's fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression for
+the exponent.
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ (3^3)^3=27^3=19\,683
+ \qquad
+ 3^{(3^3)}=3^{27}=7\,625\,597\,484\,987
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+ LaTeX knows how to handle a superscript on a superscript, or a
+subscript on a subscript, or supers on subs, or subs on supers. So,
+expressions such as 'e^{x^2}' and 'x_{i_0}' give correct output. Note
+the use in those expressions of curly braces to give the BASE a
+determined EXP. If you enter '\(3^3^3\)' then you get 'Double
+superscript'.
+
+ LaTeX does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a
+superscript. In this example the integral has both. They come out in
+the correct place without any author intervention.
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \int_{x=a}^b f'(x)\,dx = f(b)-f(a)
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+Note the parentheses around 'x=a' to make the entire expression a
+subscript.
+
+ To put a superscript or subscript before a symbol, use a construct
+like '{}_t K^2'. The empty curly braces '{}' give the subscript
+something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally attaching to a
+prior symbols.
+
+ Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or
+display math mode, as in 'the expression x^2', will get you the error
+'Missing $ inserted'.
+
+ A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is
+to typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as
+'mhchem'; see CTAN.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Math symbols, Next: Math functions, Prev: Subscripts & superscripts, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.2 Math symbols
+=================
+
+LaTeX provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that anyone
+uses. For example, if you include '$\pi$' in your source, you will get
+the pi symbol U+03C0. See the 'Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List' at
+<https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/>.
+
+ Here is a list of commonly-used symbols. It is by no means
+exhaustive. Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its
+symbol class, which determines the spacing around it, is given in
+parenthesis. Unless said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can
+be used only in math mode. To redefine a command so that it can be used
+whatever the current mode, see *note \ensuremath::.
+
+'\|'
+ U+2225 Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\parallel'.
+
+'\aleph'
+ U+2135 Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
+
+'\alpha'
+ U+03B1 Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
+
+'\amalg'
+ U+2A3F Disjoint union (binary)
+
+'\angle'
+ U+2220 Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than sign '<' and
+ angle bracket '\langle'.
+
+'\approx'
+ U+2248 Almost equal to (relation).
+
+'\ast'
+ U+2217 Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed (binary).
+ Synonym: '*', which is often a superscript or subscript, as in the
+ Kleene star. Similar: '\star', which is five-pointed, and is
+ sometimes used as a general binary operation, and sometimes
+ reserved for cross-correlation.
+
+'\asymp'
+ U+224D Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
+
+'\backslash'
+ \ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus '\setminus', and
+ '\textbackslash' for backslash outside of math mode.
+
+'\beta'
+ U+03B2 Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).
+
+'\bigcap'
+ U+22C2 Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
+ binary intersection '\cap'.
+
+'\bigcirc'
+ U+26AA Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function
+ composition '\circ'.
+
+'\bigcup'
+ U+22C3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary
+ union '\cup'.
+
+'\bigodot'
+ U+2A00 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).
+
+'\bigoplus'
+ U+2A01 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).
+
+'\bigotimes'
+ U+2A02 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
+
+'\bigtriangledown'
+ U+25BD Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down
+ (operator).
+
+'\bigtriangleup'
+ U+25B3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up
+ (operator).
+
+'\bigsqcup'
+ U+2A06 Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).
+
+'\biguplus'
+ U+2A04 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus
+ (operator). (Note that the name has only one p.)
+
+'\bigvee'
+ U+22C1 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).
+
+'\bigwedge'
+ U+22C0 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
+
+'\bot'
+ U+22A5 Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered set,
+ or a contradiction (ordinary). See also '\top'.
+
+'\bowtie'
+ U+22C8 Natural join of two relations (relation).
+
+'\Box'
+ U+25A1 Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary).
+ Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
+ 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\bullet'
+ U+2022 Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication dot '\cdot'.
+
+'\cap'
+ U+2229 Intersection of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigcap'.
+
+'\cdot'
+ U+22C5 Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet dot '\bullet'.
+
+'\chi'
+ U+03C7 Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary).
+
+'\circ'
+ U+2218 Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar:
+ variable-sized operator '\bigcirc'.
+
+'\clubsuit'
+ U+2663 Club card suit (ordinary).
+
+'\complement'
+ U+2201 Set complement, used as a superscript as in
+ '$S^\complement$' (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In
+ LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. Also used:
+ '$S^{\mathsf{c}}$' or '$\bar{S}$'.
+
+'\cong'
+ U+2245 Congruent (relation).
+
+'\coprod'
+ U+2210 Coproduct (operator).
+
+'\cup'
+ U+222A Union of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigcup'.
+
+'\dagger'
+ U+2020 Dagger relation (binary).
+
+'\dashv'
+ U+22A3 Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation). Similar:
+ turnstile '\vdash'.
+
+'\ddagger'
+ U+2021 Double dagger relation (binary).
+
+'\Delta'
+ U+0394 Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary).
+
+'\delta'
+ U+03B4 Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).
+
+'\Diamond'
+ U+25C7 Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain
+ TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\diamond'
+ U+22C4 Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large
+ diamond '\Diamond', circle bullet '\bullet'.
+
+'\diamondsuit'
+ U+2662 Diamond card suit (ordinary).
+
+'\div'
+ U+00F7 Division sign (binary).
+
+'\doteq'
+ U+2250 Approaches the limit (relation). Similar: geometrically
+ equal to '\Doteq'.
+
+'\downarrow'
+ U+2193 Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar: '\Downarrow'
+ double line down arrow.
+
+'\Downarrow'
+ U+21D3 Double line down arrow (relation). Similar: '\downarrow'
+ single line down arrow.
+
+'\ell'
+ U+2113 Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).
+
+'\emptyset'
+ U+2205 Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varnothing'.
+
+'\epsilon'
+ U+03F5 Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to Greek text
+ letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small letter
+ epsilon '\varepsilon' U+03B5. Related: the set membership relation
+ '\in' U+2208.
+
+'\equiv'
+ U+2261 Equivalence (relation).
+
+'\eta'
+ U+03B7 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\exists'
+ U+2203 Existential quantifier (ordinary).
+
+'\flat'
+ U+266D Musical flat (ordinary).
+
+'\forall'
+ U+2200 Universal quantifier (ordinary).
+
+'\frown'
+ U+2322 Downward curving arc (ordinary).
+
+'\Gamma'
+ U+0393 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\gamma'
+ U+03B3 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\ge'
+ U+2265 Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\geq'.
+
+'\geq'
+ U+2265 Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\ge'.
+
+'\gets'
+ U+2190 Is assigned the value (relation). Synonym: '\leftarrow'.
+
+'\gg'
+ U+226B Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less
+ than '\ll'.
+
+'\hbar'
+ U+210F Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).
+
+'\heartsuit'
+ U+2661 Heart card suit (ordinary).
+
+'\hookleftarrow'
+ U+21A9 Hooked left arrow (relation).
+
+'\hookrightarrow'
+ U+21AA Hooked right arrow (relation).
+
+'\iff'
+ U+27F7 If and only if (relation). It is '\Longleftrightarrow' with
+ a '\thickmuskip' on either side.
+
+'\Im'
+ U+2111 Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part '\Re'.
+
+'\imath'
+ Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (*note Math
+ accents::).
+
+'\in'
+ U+2208 Set element (relation). See also: lowercase lunate
+ epsilon '\epsilon'U+03F5 and small letter script
+ epsilon '\varepsilon'.
+
+'\infty'
+ U+221E Infinity (ordinary).
+
+'\int'
+ U+222B Integral (operator).
+
+'\iota'
+ U+03B9 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\Join'
+ U+2A1D Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain
+ TeX.
+
+'\jmath'
+ Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (*note Math
+ accents::).
+
+'\kappa'
+ U+03BA Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\Lambda'
+ U+039B uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\lambda'
+ U+03BB Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\land'
+ U+2227 Logical and (binary). This is a synonym for '\wedge'. See
+ also logical or '\lor'.
+
+'\langle'
+ U+27E8 Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar:
+ less-than '<'. Matches '\rangle'.
+
+'\lbrace'
+ U+007B Left curly brace (opening). Synonym: '\{'.
+ Matches '\rbrace'.
+
+'\lbrack'
+ U+005B Left square bracket (opening). Synonym: '['.
+ Matches '\rbrack'.
+
+'\lceil'
+ U+2308 Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the
+ bottom shaved off (opening). Matches '\rceil'.
+
+'\le'
+ U+2264 Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\leq'.
+
+'\leadsto'
+ U+21DD Squiggly right arrow (relation). Not available in plain
+ TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. To get this
+ symbol outside of math mode you can put
+ '\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}' in the preamble and
+ then use '\Leadsto' instead.
+
+'\Leftarrow'
+ U+21D0 Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation). Similar:
+ single-line left arrow '\leftarrow'.
+
+'\leftarrow'
+ U+2190 Single-line left arrow (relation). Synonym: '\gets'.
+ Similar: double-line left arrow '\Leftarrow'.
+
+'\leftharpoondown'
+ U+21BD Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).
+
+'\leftharpoonup'
+ U+21BC Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).
+
+'\Leftrightarrow'
+ U+21D4 Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation).
+ Similar: single-line double headed arrow '\leftrightarrow'.
+
+'\leftrightarrow'
+ U+2194 Single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
+ double-line double headed arrow '\Leftrightarrow'.
+
+'\leq'
+ U+2264 Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\le'.
+
+'\lfloor'
+ U+230A Left floor bracket (opening). Matches: '\floor'.
+
+'\lhd'
+ U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). Not
+ available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb'
+ package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load 'amssymb'
+ and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so gives better
+ spacing).
+
+'\ll'
+ U+226A Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater
+ than '\gg'.
+
+'\lnot'
+ U+00AC Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\neg'.
+
+'\longleftarrow'
+ U+27F5 Long single-line left arrow (relation). Similar: long
+ double-line left arrow '\Longleftarrow'.
+
+'\longleftrightarrow'
+ U+27F7 Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
+ long double-line double-headed arrow '\Longleftrightarrow'.
+
+'\longmapsto'
+ U+27FC Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
+ (relation). Similar: shorter version '\mapsto'.
+
+'\longrightarrow'
+ U+27F6 Long single-line right arrow (relation). Similar: long
+ double-line right arrow '\Longrightarrow'.
+
+'\lor'
+ U+2228 Logical or (binary). Synonym: wedge '\wedge'.
+
+'\mapsto'
+ U+21A6 Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
+ (relation). Similar: longer version '\longmapsto'.
+
+'\mho'
+ U+2127 Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
+ Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
+ 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\mid'
+ U+2223 Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of
+ '\mid' is for a set '\{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}'.
+
+ Similar: '\vert' and '|' produce the same single-line vertical bar
+ symbol but without any spacing (they fall in class ordinary) and
+ you should not use them as relations but instead only as ordinals,
+ i.e., footnote symbols. For absolute value, see the entry
+ for '\vert' and for norm see the entry for '\Vert'.
+
+'\models'
+ U+22A8 Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash
+ (relation). Similar: long double dash '\vDash'.
+
+'\mp'
+ U+2213 Minus or plus (relation).
+
+'\mu'
+ U+03BC Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\nabla'
+ U+2207 Hamilton's del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
+
+'\natural'
+ U+266E Musical natural notation (ordinary).
+
+'\ne'
+ U+2260 Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\neq'.
+
+'\nearrow'
+ U+2197 North-east arrow (relation).
+
+'\neg'
+ U+00AC Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\lnot'. Sometimes
+ instead used for negation: '\sim'.
+
+'\neq'
+ U+2260 Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\ne'.
+
+'\ni'
+ U+220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
+ Synonym: '\owns'. Similar: is a member of '\in'.
+
+'\not'
+ U+0020 Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a following
+ operator (relation).
+
+ Many negated operators are available that don't require '\not',
+ particularly with the 'amssymb' package. For example, '\notin' is
+ typographically preferable to '\not\in'.
+
+'\notin'
+ U+2209 Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset
+ of '\nsubseteq'.
+
+'\nu'
+ U+03BD Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\nwarrow'
+ U+2196 North-west arrow (relation).
+
+'\odot'
+ U+2299 Dot inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigodot'.
+
+'\oint'
+ U+222E Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle
+ (operator).
+
+'\Omega'
+ U+03A9 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\omega'
+ U+03C9 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\ominus'
+ U+2296 Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
+
+'\oplus'
+ U+2295 Plus sign inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigoplus'.
+
+'\oslash'
+ U+2298 Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).
+
+'\otimes'
+ U+2297 Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary). Similar:
+ variable-sized operator '\bigotimes'.
+
+'\owns'
+ U+220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
+ Synonym: '\ni'. Similar: is a member of '\in'.
+
+'\parallel'
+ U+2225 Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\|'.
+
+'\partial'
+ U+2202 Partial differential (ordinary).
+
+'\perp'
+ U+27C2 Perpendicular (relation). Similar: '\bot' uses the same
+ glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class
+ ordinary.
+
+'\phi'
+ U+03D5 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varphi' U+03C6.
+
+'\Pi'
+ U+03A0 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\pi'
+ U+03C0 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varpi' U+03D6.
+
+'\pm'
+ U+00B1 Plus or minus (binary).
+
+'\prec'
+ U+227A Precedes (relation). Similar: less than '<'.
+
+'\preceq'
+ U+2AAF Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
+ equals '\leq'.
+
+'\prime'
+ U+2032 Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary). Typically
+ used as a superscript: '$f^\prime$'; '$f^\prime$' and '$f'$'
+ produce the same result. An advantage of the second is that
+ '$f'''$' produces the desired symbol, that is, the same result as
+ '$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$', but uses rather less typing. You can
+ only use '\prime' in math mode. Using the right single quote '''
+ in text mode produces a different character (apostrophe).
+
+'\prod'
+ U+220F Product (operator).
+
+'\propto'
+ U+221D Is proportional to (relation)
+
+'\Psi'
+ U+03A8 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\psi'
+ U+03C8 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\rangle'
+ U+27E9 Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar:
+ greater than '>'. Matches:'\langle'.
+
+'\rbrace'
+ U+007D Right curly brace (closing). Synonym: '\}'.
+ Matches '\lbrace'.
+
+'\rbrack'
+ U+005D Right square bracket (closing). Synonym: ']'.
+ Matches '\lbrack'.
+
+'\rceil'
+ U+2309 Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches '\lceil'.
+
+'\Re'
+ U+211C Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary).
+ Related: double-line, or blackboard bold, R '\mathbb{R}'; to access
+ this, load the 'amsfonts' package.
+
+'\restriction'
+ U+21BE Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym:
+ '\upharpoonright'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need
+ to load the 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\revemptyset'
+ U+29B0 Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related:
+ '\varnothing'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to
+ load the 'stix' package.
+
+'\rfloor'
+ U+230B Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
+ off (closing). Matches '\lfloor'.
+
+'\rhd'
+ U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). Not
+ available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb'
+ package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
+ 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so
+ gives better spacing).
+
+'\rho'
+ U+03C1 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varrho' U+03F1.
+
+'\Rightarrow'
+ U+21D2 Implies, right-pointing double line arrow (relation).
+ Similar: right single-line arrow '\rightarrow'.
+
+'\rightarrow'
+ U+2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+ Synonym: '\to'. Similar: right double line arrow '\Rightarrow'.
+
+'\rightharpoondown'
+ U+21C1 Right-pointing harpoon with barb below the line (relation).
+
+'\rightharpoonup'
+ U+21C0 Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the line (relation).
+
+'\rightleftharpoons'
+ U+21CC Right harpoon up above left harpoon down (relation).
+
+'\searrow'
+ U+2198 Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
+
+'\setminus'
+ U+29F5 Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash, like \
+ (binary). Similar: backslash '\backslash' and also
+ '\textbackslash' outside of math mode.
+
+'\sharp'
+ U+266F Musical sharp (ordinary).
+
+'\Sigma'
+ U+03A3 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\sigma'
+ U+03C3 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varsigma' U+03C2.
+
+'\sim'
+ U+223C Similar, in a relation (relation).
+
+'\simeq'
+ U+2243 Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).
+
+'\smallint'
+ U+222B Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a
+ display (operator).
+
+'\smile'
+ U+2323 Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
+
+'\spadesuit'
+ U+2660 Spade card suit (ordinary).
+
+'\sqcap'
+ U+2293 Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar:
+ intersection 'cap'.
+
+'\sqcup'
+ U+2294 Square union symbol (binary). Similar: union 'cup'.
+ Related: variable-sized operator '\bigsqcup'.
+
+'\sqsubset'
+ U+228F Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: subset '\subset'.
+ Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
+ 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\sqsubseteq'
+ U+2291 Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or
+ equal to '\subseteq'.
+
+'\sqsupset'
+ U+2290 Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
+ superset '\supset'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need
+ to load the 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\sqsupseteq'
+ U+2292 Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset
+ or equal '\supseteq'.
+
+'\star'
+ U+22C6 Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary
+ operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary).
+ Similar: the synonyms asterisk '*' and '\ast', which are
+ six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript,
+ as with the Kleene star.
+
+'\subset'
+ U+2282 Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).
+
+'\subseteq'
+ U+2286 Subset or equal to (relation).
+
+'\succ'
+ U+227B Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less
+ than '>'.
+
+'\succeq'
+ U+2AB0 Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less than or
+ equal to '\leq'.
+
+'\sum'
+ U+2211 Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital
+ sigma '\Sigma'.
+
+'\supset'
+ U+2283 Superset (relation).
+
+'\supseteq'
+ U+2287 Superset or equal to (relation).
+
+'\surd'
+ U+221A Radical symbol (ordinary). The LaTeX command '\sqrt{...}'
+ typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar that extends
+ to cover the argument.
+
+'\swarrow'
+ U+2199 Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).
+
+'\tau'
+ U+03C4 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\theta'
+ U+03B8 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\vartheta' U+03D1.
+
+'\times'
+ U+00D7 Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See
+ also '\cdot'.
+
+'\to'
+ U+2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+ Synonym: '\rightarrow'.
+
+'\top'
+ U+22A4 Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set (ordinary).
+ See also '\bot'.
+
+'\triangle'
+ U+25B3 Triangle (ordinary).
+
+'\triangleleft'
+ U+25C1 Not-filled triangle pointing left (binary).
+ Similar: '\lhd'. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
+ 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so
+ gives better spacing).
+
+'\triangleright'
+ U+25B7 Not-filled triangle pointing right (binary). For the normal
+ subgroup symbol you should instead load 'amssymb' and
+ use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so gives better
+ spacing).
+
+'\unlhd'
+ U+22B4 Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+ triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX.
+ In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
+ subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglelefteq' (which
+ is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+
+'\unrhd'
+ U+22B5 Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+ triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX.
+ In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
+ subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglerighteq' (which
+ is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+
+'\Uparrow'
+ U+21D1 Double-line upward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
+ single-line up-pointing arrow '\uparrow'.
+
+'\uparrow'
+ U+2191 Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges (relation).
+ Similar: double-line up-pointing arrow '\Uparrow'.
+
+'\Updownarrow'
+ U+21D5 Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
+ Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+ arrow '\updownarrow'.
+
+'\updownarrow'
+ U+2195 Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
+ Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+ arrow '\Updownarrow'.
+
+'\upharpoonright'
+ U+21BE Up harpoon, with barb on right side (relation).
+ Synonym: '\restriction'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you
+ need to load the 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\uplus'
+ U+228E Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the
+ middle (binary). Similar: union '\cup'. Related: variable-sized
+ operator '\biguplus'.
+
+'\Upsilon'
+ U+03A5 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\upsilon'
+ U+03C5 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\varepsilon'
+ U+03B5 Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely
+ used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
+ '\epsilon' U+03F5. Related: set membership '\in'.
+
+'\vanothing'
+ U+2205 Empty set symbol. Similar: '\emptyset'. Related:
+ '\revemptyset'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to
+ load the 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\varphi'
+ U+03C6 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\phi' U+03D5.
+
+'\varpi'
+ U+03D6 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\pi' U+03C0.
+
+'\varrho'
+ U+03F1 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\rho' U+03C1.
+
+'\varsigma'
+ U+03C2 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\sigma' U+03C3.
+
+'\vartheta'
+ U+03D1 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\theta' U+03B8.
+
+'\vdash'
+ U+22A2 Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash (relation).
+ Similar: turnstile rotated a half-circle '\dashv'.
+
+'\vee'
+ U+2228 Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related: logical
+ and '\wedge'. Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigvee'.
+
+'\Vert'
+ U+2016 Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
+ bar '\vert'.
+
+ For a norm symbol, you can use the 'mathtools' package and put in
+ your preamble '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}'. This
+ gives you three command variants for double-line vertical bars that
+ are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
+ write the starred version '$\norm*{M^\perp}$' then the height of
+ the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
+ with '\norm{M^\perp}' the bars do not grow with the height of the
+ argument but instead are the default height, and '\norm[SIZE
+ COMMAND]{M^\perp}' also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
+ the size given in the SIZE COMMAND, e.g., '\Bigg'.
+
+'\vert'
+ U+007C Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line
+ vertical bar '\Vert'. For such that, as in the definition of a
+ set, use '\mid' because it is a relation.
+
+ For absolute value you can use the 'mathtools' package and in your
+ preamble put '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}'. This
+ gives you three command variants for single-line vertical bars that
+ are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
+ write the starred version '$\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$' then the height
+ of the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
+ with '\abs{\frac{22}{7}}' the bars do not grow with the height of
+ the argument but instead are the default height, and '\abs[SIZE
+ COMMAND]{\frac{22}{7}}' also gives bars that do not grow but are
+ set to the size given in the SIZE COMMAND, e.g., '\Bigg'.
+
+'\wedge'
+ U+2227 Logical and (binary). Synonym: '\land'. See also logical
+ or '\vee'. Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigwedge'.
+
+'\wp'
+ U+2118 Weierstrass p (ordinary).
+
+'\wr'
+ U+2240 Wreath product (binary).
+
+'\Xi'
+ U+039E uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\xi'
+ U+03BE Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\zeta'
+ U+03B6 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+ The following symbols are most often used in plain text but LaTeX
+provides versions to use in mathematical text.
+
+'\mathdollar'
+ Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+
+'\mathparagraph'
+ Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, U+00B6.
+
+'\mathsection'
+ Section sign in math mode U+00A7.
+
+'\mathsterling'
+ Sterling sign in math mode: #.
+
+'\mathunderscore'
+ Underscore in math mode: _.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Blackboard bold:: Doublestruck characters.
+* Calligraphic:: Cursive characters.
+* \boldmath & \unboldmath:: Symbols in boldface.
+* Dots:: Ellipses, etc.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Blackboard bold, Next: Calligraphic, Up: Math symbols
+
+16.2.1 Blackboard bold
+----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usepackage{amssymb} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \mathbb{UPPERCASE-LETTER}
+
+ Provide blackboard bold symbols, sometimes also known as doublestruck
+letters, used to denote number sets such as the natural numbers, the
+integers, etc.
+
+ Here
+
+ \( \forall n \in \mathbb{N}, n^2 \geq 0 \)
+
+the '\mathbb{N}' gives blackboard bold symbol U+2115 representing the
+natural numbers.
+
+ If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an
+error but you get strange results, including unexpected characters.
+
+ There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the
+capital letters; look on CTAN.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Calligraphic, Next: \boldmath & \unboldmath, Prev: Blackboard bold, Up: Math symbols
+
+16.2.2 Calligraphic
+-------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \mathcal{UPPERCASE-LETTERS}
+
+ Use a script-like font.
+
+ In this example the graph identifier is output in a cursive font.
+
+ Let the graph be \( \mathcal{G} \).
+
+ If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not
+get an error. Instead you get unexpected output. For instance,
+'\mathcal{g}' outputs a close curly brace symbol, while '\mathcal{+}'
+outputs a plus sign.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \boldmath & \unboldmath, Next: Dots, Prev: Calligraphic, Up: Math symbols
+
+16.2.3 '\boldmath' & '\unboldmath'
+----------------------------------
+
+Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode):
+
+ \boldmath \( MATH \)
+
+or
+
+ \unboldmath \( MATH \)
+
+ Declarations to change the letters and symbols in MATH to be in a
+bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular (non-bold)
+default. They must be used when not in math mode or display math mode
+(*note Modes::). Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ In this example each '\boldmath' command takes place inside an
+'\mbox',
+
+ we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
+
+which means '\boldmath' is only called in a text mode, here LR mode, and
+explains why LaTeX must switch to math mode to set 'v' and 'u'.
+
+ If you use either command inside math mode, as with 'Trouble: \(
+\boldmath x \)', then you get something like 'LaTeX Font Warning:
+Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11' and 'LaTeX Font
+Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line 11'.
+
+ There are many issues with '\boldmath'. New documents should use the
+'bm' package provided by the LaTeX Project team. A complete description
+is outside the scope of this document (see the full documentation on
+CTAN) but even this small example
+
+ \usepackage{bm} % in preamble
+ ...
+ we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
+
+shows that it is an improvement over '\boldmath'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Dots, Prev: \boldmath & \unboldmath, Up: Math symbols
+
+16.2.4 Dots, horizontal or vertical
+-----------------------------------
+
+Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern
+continues.
+
+ \begin{array}{cccc}
+ a_{0,0} &a_{0,1} &a_{0,2} &\ldots \\
+ a_{1,0} &\ddots \\
+ \vdots
+ \end{array}
+
+ LaTeX provides these.
+
+'\cdots'
+ Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line,
+ as in U+22EF. Used as: '\( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1} \)'.
+
+'\ddots'
+ Diagonal ellipsis, U+22F1. See the above array example for a
+ usage.
+
+'\ldots'
+ Ellipsis on the baseline, U+2026. Used as: '\( x_0,\ldots x_{n-1}
+ \)'. Another example is the above array example. A synonym is
+ '\mathellipsis'. A synonym from the 'amsmath' package is '\hdots'.
+
+ You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in
+ 'The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken'. (In a paragraph mode
+ or LR mode a synonym for '\ldots' is '\dots'.)
+
+'\vdots'
+ Vertical ellipsis, U+22EE. See the above array example for a usage.
+
+ The 'amsmath' package has the command '\dots' to semantically mark up
+ellipses. This example produces two different-looking outputs for the
+first two uses of the '\dots' command.
+
+ \usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble
+ ...
+ Suppose that \( p_0, p_1, \dots, p_{n-1} \) lists all of the primes.
+ Observe that \( p_0\cdot p_1 \dots \cdot p_{n-1} +1 \) is not a
+ multiple of any \( p_i \).
+ Conclusion: there are infinitely many primes \( p_0, p_1, \dotsc \).
+
+In the first line LaTeX looks to the comma following '\dots' to
+determine that it should output an ellipsis on the baseline. The second
+line has a '\cdot' following '\dots' so LaTeX outputs an ellipsis that
+is on the math axis, vertically centered. However, the third usage has
+no follow-on character so you have to tell LaTeX what to do. You can
+use one of the commands: '\dotsc' if you need the ellipsis appropriate
+for a comma following, '\dotsb' if you need the ellipses that fits when
+the dots are followed by a binary operator or relation symbol, '\dotsi'
+for dots with integrals, or '\dotso' for others.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Math functions, Next: Math accents, Prev: Math symbols, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.3 Math functions
+===================
+
+These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper
+spacing.
+
+'\arccos'
+ Inverse cosine
+
+'\arcsin'
+ Inverse sine
+
+'\arctan'
+ Inverse tangent
+
+'\arg'
+ Angle between the real axis and a point in the complex plane
+
+'\bmod'
+ Binary modulo operator, used as in '\( 5\bmod 3=2 \)'
+
+'\cos'
+ Cosine
+
+'\cosh'
+ Hyperbolic cosine
+
+'\cot'
+ Cotangent
+
+'\coth'
+ Hyperbolic cotangent
+
+'\csc'
+ Cosecant
+
+'\deg'
+ Degrees
+
+'\det'
+ Determinant
+
+'\dim'
+ Dimension
+
+'\exp'
+ Exponential
+
+'\gcd'
+ Greatest common divisor
+
+'\hom'
+ Homomorphism
+
+'\inf'
+ Infinum
+
+'\ker'
+ Kernel
+
+'\lg'
+ Base 2 logarithm
+
+'\lim'
+ Limit
+
+'\liminf'
+ Limit inferior
+
+'\limsup'
+ Limit superior
+
+'\ln'
+ Natural logarithm
+
+'\log'
+ Logarithm
+
+'\max'
+ Maximum
+
+'\min'
+ Minimum
+
+'\pmod'
+ Parenthesized modulus, as used in '\( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \)'
+
+'\Pr'
+ Probability
+
+'\sec'
+ Secant
+
+'\sin'
+ Sine
+
+'\sinh'
+ Hyperbolic sine
+
+'\sup'
+ sup
+
+'\tan'
+ Tangent
+
+'\tanh'
+ Hyperbolic tangent
+
+ The 'amsmath' package adds improvements on some of these, and also
+allows you to define your own. The full documentation is on CTAN, but
+briefly, you can define an identity operator with
+'\DeclareMathOperator{\identity}{id}' that is like the ones above but
+prints as 'id'. The starred form '\DeclareMathOperator*{\op}{op}' sets
+any limits above and below, as is traditional with '\lim', '\sup', or
+'\max'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Math accents, Next: Over- and Underlining, Prev: Math functions, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.4 Math accents
+=================
+
+LaTeX provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in
+math. These are different from accents in normal text (*note
+Accents::).
+
+'\acute'
+ Math acute accent
+
+'\bar'
+ Math bar-over accent
+
+'\breve'
+ Math breve accent
+
+'\check'
+ Math ha'c<ek (check) accent
+
+'\ddot'
+ Math dieresis accent
+
+'\dot'
+ Math dot accent
+
+'\grave'
+ Math grave accent
+
+'\hat'
+ Math hat (circumflex) accent
+
+'\mathring'
+ Math ring accent
+
+'\tilde'
+ Math tilde accent
+
+'\vec'
+ Math vector symbol
+
+'\widehat'
+ Math wide hat accent
+
+'\widetilde'
+ Math wide tilde accent
+
+ When you are putting an accent on an i or a j, the tradition is to
+use one without a dot, '\imath' or 'jmath' (*note Math symbols::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Over- and Underlining, Next: Spacing in math mode, Prev: Math accents, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.5 Over- and Underlining
+==========================
+
+LaTeX provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or putting
+braces over or under some material.
+
+'\underline{TEXT}'
+ Underline TEXT. Works inside math mode, and outside. The line is
+ always completely below the text, taking account of descenders, so
+ in '\(\underline{y}\)' the line is lower than in
+ '\(\underline{x}\)'. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Note that the package 'ulem' does text mode underlining and allows
+ line breaking as well as a number of other features. See the
+ documentation on CTAN. See also *note \hrulefill & \dotfill:: for
+ producing a line, for such things as a signature.
+
+'\overline{TEXT}'
+ Put a horizontal line over TEXT. Works inside math mode, and
+ outside. For example, '\overline{x+y}'. Note that this differs
+ from the command '\bar' (*note Math accents::).
+
+'\underbrace{MATH}'
+ Put a brace under MATH. For example, this
+ '(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3)' emphasizes the telescoping part.
+ Attach text to the brace by using subscript, '_', or superscript,
+ '^', as here.
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ 1+1/2+\underbrace{1/3+1/4}_{>1/2}+
+ \underbrace{1/5+1/6+1/7+1/8}_{>1/2}+\cdots
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+ The superscript appears on top of the expression, and so can look
+ unconnected to the underbrace.
+
+'\overbrace{MATH}'
+ Put a brace over MATH, as with
+ '\overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}'. See also
+ '\underbrace'.
+
+ The package 'mathtools' adds an over- and underbrace, as well as some
+improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Spacing in math mode, Next: Math miscellany, Prev: Over- and Underlining, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.6 Spacing in math mode
+=========================
+
+When typesetting mathematics, LaTeX puts in spacing according to the
+normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter 'y=m x' then LaTeX
+ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x, as y=mx.
+
+ But LaTeX's rules sometimes need tweaking. For example, in an
+integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the 'f(x)'
+and the 'dx', here done with the '\,' command.
+
+ \int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
+
+ LaTeX provides the commands that follow for use in math mode. Many
+of these spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
+"mu". It is defined as 1/18em, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family (*note Units of length::). Thus, a '\thickspace' is
+something like 5/18 times the width of a 'M'.
+
+'\;'
+ Synonym: '\thickspace'. Normally '5.0mu plus 5.0mu'. Math mode
+ only.
+
+'\:'
+'\>'
+ Synonym: '\medspace'. Normally '4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'.
+ Math mode only.
+
+'\,'
+ Synonym: '\thinspace'. Normally '3mu', which is 1/6em. Can be
+ used in both math mode and text mode (*note \thinspace &
+ \negthinspace::).
+
+ This space is widely used, for instance between the function and
+ the infinitesimal in an integral '\int f(x)\,dx' and, if an author
+ does this, before punctuation in a displayed equation.
+
+ The antiderivative is
+ \begin{equation}
+ 3x^{-1/2}+3^{1/2}\,.
+ \end{equation}
+
+'\!'
+ A negative thin space. Normally '-3mu'. The '\!' command is math
+ mode only but the '\negthinspace' command is available for text
+ mode (*note \thinspace & \negthinspace::).
+
+'\quad'
+ This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space
+ surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space
+ between two equations inside a 'displaymath' environment. It is
+ available in both text and math mode.
+
+'\qquad'
+ A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em. It is available in both
+ text and math mode.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \smash:: Eliminate height or depth of a subformula.
+* \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom:: Make empty box with the same size as the argument.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \smash, Next: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom, Up: Spacing in math mode
+
+16.6.1 '\smash'
+---------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \smash{SUBFORMULA}
+
+ Typeset SUBFORMULA as if its height and depth were zero.
+
+ In this example the exponential is so tall that without the '\smash'
+command LaTeX would separate its line from the line above it, and the
+uneven line spacing might be unsightly.
+
+ To compute the tetration $\smash{2^{2^{2^2}}}$,
+ evaluate from the top down, as $2^{2^4}=2^{16}=65536$.
+
+ (Because of the '\smash' the printed expression could run into the
+line above so you may want to wait until the final version of the
+document to make such adjustments.)
+
+ This pictures the effect of '\smash' by using '\fbox' to surround the
+box that LaTeX will put on the line. The '\blackbar' command makes a
+bar extending from 10 points below the baseline to 20 points above.
+
+ \newcommand{\blackbar}{\rule[-10pt]{5pt}{30pt}}
+ \fbox{\blackbar}
+ \fbox{\smash{\blackbar}}
+
+ The first box that LaTeX places is 20 points high and 10 points deep.
+But the second box is treated by LaTeX as having zero height and zero
+depth, despite that the ink printed on the page still extends well above
+and below the line.
+
+ The '\smash' command appears often in mathematics to adjust the size
+of an element that surrounds a subformula. Here the first radical
+extends below the baseline while the second lies just on the baseline.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \sqrt{\sum_{0\leq k< n} f(k)}
+ \sqrt{\vphantom{\sum}\smash{\sum_{0\leq k< n}} f(k)}
+ \end{equation}
+
+ Note the use of '\vphantom' to give the '\sqrt' command an argument
+with the height of the '\sum' (*note \phantom & \vphantom &
+\hphantom::).
+
+ While most often used in mathematics, the '\smash' command can appear
+in other contexts. However, it doesn't change into horizontal mode. So
+if it starts a paragraph then you should first put a '\leavevmode', as
+in the bottom line below.
+
+ xxx xxx xxx
+
+ \smash{yyy} % no paragraph indent
+
+ \leavevmode\smash{zzz} % usual paragraph indent
+
+ The package 'mathtools' has operators that provide even finer control
+over smashing a subformula box.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom, Prev: \smash, Up: Spacing in math mode
+
+16.6.2 '\phantom' & '\vphantom' & '\hphantom'
+---------------------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \phantom{SUBFORMULA}
+
+ or
+
+ \vphantom{SUBFORMULA}
+
+ or
+
+ \hphantom{SUBFORMULA}
+
+ The '\phantom' command creates a box with the same height, depth, and
+width as SUBFORMULA, but empty. That is, this command causes LaTeX to
+typeset the box but not its ink. The '\vphantom' variant also produces
+an invisible box with the same height and depth as SUBFORMULA, but it
+has width zero. And '\hphantom' makes a box with the same width as
+SUBFORMULA but with height and depth zero.
+
+ Without the '\vphantom' in this example, the top bars of the two
+square roots would be at different heights.
+
+ \( \sqrt{\vphantom{a^3}a}\cdot\sqrt{a^3} \)
+
+ The '\vphantom{a^3}' causes the first '\sqrt' to have inside it a box
+of the same height as the second '\sqrt', so LaTeX makes the bars align.
+
+ These commands often are combined with '\smash'. *Note \smash:: for
+another example of the use of '\vphantom'.
+
+ The three phantom commands appear often but note that LaTeX provides
+a suite of other commands to work with box sizes that may be more
+convenient, including '\makebox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::) as well as
+'\settodepth' (*note \settodepth::), '\settoheight' (*note
+\settoheight::), and '\settowidth' (*note \settowidth::). In addition,
+the 'mathtools' package has many commands that offer fine-grained
+control over spacing.
+
+ All three commands produce an ordinary box, without any special
+mathematics status. So to do something like attaching a superscript you
+should give it such a status, for example with the '\operatorname'
+command from the package 'amsmath'.
+
+ While most often used in mathematics, these three can appear in other
+contexts. However, they don't cause LaTeX to change into horizontal
+mode. So if one of these starts a paragraph then you should prefix it
+with '\leavevmode'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Math miscellany, Prev: Spacing in math mode, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.7 Math miscellany
+====================
+
+LaTeX contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities. Here are some
+that don't fit into other categories.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Colon character & \colon:: Colon.
+* \*:: Discretionary multiplication.
+* \frac:: Fraction.
+* \left & \right:: Paired delimiters.
+* \sqrt:: Radicals.
+* \stackrel:: Text over a relation.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Colon character & \colon, Next: \*, Up: Math miscellany
+
+16.7.1 Colon character ':' & '\colon'
+-------------------------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ :
+ \colon
+
+ In mathematics, the colon character, ':', is a relation.
+
+ With side ratios \( 3:4 \) and \( 4:5 \), the triangle is right.
+
+Ordinary LaTeX defines '\colon' to produce the colon character with the
+spacing appropriate for punctuation, as in set-builder notation
+'\{x\colon 0\leq x<1\}'.
+
+ But the widely-used 'amsmath' package defines '\colon' for use in the
+definition of functions 'f\colon D\to C'. So if you want the colon
+character as a punctuation then use '\mathpunct{:}'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \*, Next: \frac, Prev: Colon character & \colon, Up: Math miscellany
+
+16.7.2 '\*'
+-----------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \*
+
+ A multiplication symbol that allows a line break. If there is a
+break then LaTeX puts a '\times' symbol, U+00D7, before that break.
+
+ In '\( A_1\* A_2\* A_3\* A_4 \)', if there is no line break then
+LaTeX outputs it as though it were '\( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \)'. If a line
+break does happen, for example between the two middle ones, then LaTeX
+sets it like '\( A_1 A_2 \times \)', followed by the break, followed by
+'\( A_3 A_4 \)'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \frac, Next: \left & \right, Prev: \*, Up: Math miscellany
+
+16.7.3 '\frac'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \frac{NUMERATOR}{DENOMINATOR}
+
+ Produces the fraction. Used as: '\begin{displaymath}
+\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi\sigma}} \end{displaymath}'. In inline math mode it
+comes out small; see the discussion of '\displaystyle' (*note Math
+formulas::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \left & \right, Next: \sqrt, Prev: \frac, Up: Math miscellany
+
+16.7.4 '\left' & '\right'
+-------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \left DELIMITER1 ... \right DELIMITER2
+
+ Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. The
+delimiters are sized according to the math they enclose. This makes a
+unit vector surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \left(\begin{array}{c}
+ 1 \\
+ 0 \\
+ \end{array}\right)
+
+ Every '\left' must have a matching '\right'. Leaving out the
+'\left(' in the above gets 'Extra \right'. Leaving off the '\right)'
+gets 'You can't use `\eqno' in math mode'.
+
+ However, the two delimiters DELIMITER1 and DELIMITER2 need not match.
+A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as below. Use a
+period, '.', as a null delimiter.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
+ 1 &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\
+ f(n-1)+3n^2 &\mbox{--else}
+ \end{array}\right.
+ \end{equation}
+
+Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
+backslash, '\{'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \sqrt, Next: \stackrel, Prev: \left & \right, Up: Math miscellany
+
+16.7.5 '\sqrt'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \sqrt{ARG}
+ \sqrt[ROOT-NUMBER]{ARG}
+
+ The square root, or optionally other roots, of ARG. The optional
+argument ROOT-NUMBER gives the root, i.e., enter the cube root of 'x+y'
+as '\sqrt[3]{x+y}'. The radical grows with the size of ARG (as the
+height of the radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets
+steeper, until for a large enough 'arg', it is vertical).
+
+ LaTeX has a separate '\surd' character (*note Math symbols::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \stackrel, Prev: \sqrt, Up: Math miscellany
+
+16.7.6 '\stackrel'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}
+
+ Put TEXT above RELATION. To put a function name above an arrow enter
+'\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Modes, Next: Page styles, Prev: Math formulas, Up: Top
+
+17 Modes
+********
+
+As LaTeX processes your document, at any point it is in one of six
+modes. They fall into three categories of two each, the horizontal
+modes, the math modes, and the vertical modes. Some commands only work
+in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of
+the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.
+
+ * "Paragraph mode" is what LaTeX is in when processing ordinary text.
+ It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into
+ pages. This is the mode LaTeX is in most of the time.
+
+ "LR mode" (for left-to-right mode; in plain TeX this is called
+ "restricted horizontal mode") is in effect when LaTeX starts making
+ a box with an '\mbox' command. As in paragraph mode, LaTeX's
+ output is a string of words with spaces between them. Unlike in
+ paragraph mode, in LR mode LaTeX never starts a new line, it just
+ keeps going from left to right. (Although LaTeX will not complain
+ that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to
+ put that box into a line, it could very well complain that the
+ finished LR box won't fit there.)
+
+ * "Math mode" is when LaTeX is generating an inline mathematical
+ formula.
+
+ "Display math mode" is when LaTeX is generating a displayed
+ mathematical formula. (Displayed formulas differ somewhat from
+ inline ones. One example is that the placement of the subscript on
+ '\int' differs in the two situations.)
+
+ * "Vertical mode" is when LaTeX is building the list of lines and
+ other material making the output page. This is the mode LaTeX is
+ in when it starts a document.
+
+ "Internal vertical mode" is in effect when LaTeX starts making a
+ '\vbox'. This is the vertical analogue of LR mode.
+
+For instance, if you begin a LaTeX article with 'Let \( x \) be ...'
+then these are the modes: first LaTeX starts every document in vertical
+mode, then it reads the 'L' and switches to paragraph mode, then the
+next switch happens at the '\(' where LaTeX changes to math mode, and
+then when it leaves the formula it pops back to paragraph mode.
+
+ Paragraph mode has two subcases. If you use a '\parbox' command or a
+'minipage' then LaTeX is put into paragraph mode. But it will not put a
+page break here. Inside one of these boxes, called a "parbox", LaTeX is
+in "inner paragraph mode". Its more usual situation, where it can put
+page breaks, is "outer paragraph mode" (*note Page breaking::).
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \ensuremath:: Ensure that math mode is active.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \ensuremath, Up: Modes
+
+17.1 '\ensuremath'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ensuremath{FORMULA}
+
+ Ensure that FORMULA is typeset in math mode.
+
+ For instance, you can redefine commands that ordinarily can be used
+only in math mode, so that they can be used both in math and in plain
+text.
+
+ \newcommand{\dx}{\ensuremath{dx}}
+ In $\int f(x)\, \dx$, the \dx{} is an infinitesimal.
+
+ Caution: the '\ensuremath' command is useful but not a panacea.
+
+ \newcommand{\alf}{\ensuremath{\alpha}}
+ You get an alpha in text mode: \alf.
+ But compare the correct spacing in $\alf+\alf$ with that in \alf+\alf.
+
+Best is to typeset math things in a math mode.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Page styles, Next: Spaces, Prev: Modes, Up: Top
+
+18 Page styles
+**************
+
+The style of a page determines where LaTeX places the components of that
+page, such as headers and footers, and the text body. This includes
+pages in the main part of the document but also includes special pages
+such as the title page of a book, a page from an index, or the first
+page of an article.
+
+ The package 'fancyhdr' is very helpful for constructing page styles.
+See its documentation on CTAN.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \maketitle:: Generate a title page.
+* \pagenumbering:: Set the style used for page numbers.
+* \pagestyle:: Change the headings/footings style.
+* \thispagestyle:: Change the headings/footings style for this page.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \maketitle, Next: \pagenumbering, Up: Page styles
+
+18.1 '\maketitle'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \maketitle
+
+ Generate a title. In the standard classes the title appears on a
+separate page, except in the 'article' class where it is at the top of
+the first page. (*Note Document class options:: for information about
+the 'titlepage' document class option.)
+
+ This example shows '\maketitle' appearing in its usual place,
+immediately after '\begin{document}'.
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \title{Constructing a Nuclear Reactor Using Only Coconuts}
+ \author{Jonas Grumby\thanks{%
+ With the support of a Ginger Grant from the Roy Hinkley Society.} \\
+ Skipper, \textit{Minnow}
+ \and
+ Willy Gilligan\thanks{%
+ Thanks to the Mary Ann Summers foundation
+ and to Thurston and Lovey Howell.} \\
+ Mate, \textit{Minnow}
+ }
+ \date{1964-Sep-26}
+ \begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+ Just sit right back and you'll hear a tale, a tale of a fateful trip.
+ That started from this tropic port, aboard this tiny ship. The mate was
+ a mighty sailin' man, the Skipper brave and sure. Five passengers set
+ sail that day for a three hour tour. A three hour tour.
+ ...
+
+ You tell LaTeX the information used to produce the title by making
+the following declarations. These must come before the '\maketitle',
+either in the preamble or in the document body.
+
+'\author{NAME1 \and NAME2 \and ...}'
+ Required. Declare the document author or authors. The argument is
+ a list of authors separated by '\and' commands. To separate lines
+ within a single author's entry, for instance to give the author's
+ institution or address, use a double backslash, '\\'. If you omit
+ the '\author' declaration then you get 'LaTeX Warning: No \author
+ given'.
+
+'\date{TEXT}'
+ Optional. Declare TEXT to be the document's date. The TEXT
+ doesn't need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all. If
+ you omit '\date' then LaTeX uses the current date (*note \today::).
+ To have no date, instead use '\date{}'.
+
+'\thanks{TEXT}'
+ Optional. Produce a footnote. You can use it in the author
+ information for acknowledgements as illustrated above, but you can
+ also use it in the title, or any place a footnote makes sense. It
+ can be any text at all so you can use it for any purpose, such as
+ to print an email address.
+
+'\title{TEXT}'
+ Required. Declare TEXT to be the title of the document. Get line
+ breaks inside TEXT with a double backslash, '\\'. If you omit the
+ '\title' declaration then you get 'LaTeX Error: No \title given'.
+
+ To make your own title page, see *note titlepage::. You can either
+create this as a one-off or you can include it as part of a renewed
+'\maketitle' command. (Many publishers will provide a class to use in
+place of 'article' that formats the title according to their house
+requirements.)
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagenumbering, Next: \pagestyle, Prev: \maketitle, Up: Page styles
+
+18.2 '\pagenumbering'
+=====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \pagenumbering{NUMBER-STYLE}
+
+ Specifies the style of page numbers, and resets the page number. The
+numbering style is reflected on the page, and also in the table of
+contents and other page references. This declaration has global scope
+so its effect is not delimited by braces or environments.
+
+ In this example, before the Main section the pages are numbered 'a',
+etc. Starting on the page containing that section, the pages are
+numbered '1', etc.
+
+ \begin{document}\pagenumbering{alph}
+ ...
+ \section{Main}\pagenumbering{arabic}
+ ...
+
+ The argument NUMBER-STYLE is one of the following (see also *note
+\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::).
+
+'arabic'
+ Arabic numerals: 1, 2, ...
+
+'roman'
+ lowercase Roman numerals: i, ii, ...
+
+'Roman'
+ uppercase Roman numerals: I, II, ...
+
+'alph'
+ lowercase letters: a, b, ... If you have more than 26 pages then
+ you get 'LaTeX Error: Counter too large'.
+
+'Alph'
+ uppercase letters: A, B, ... If you have more than 26 pages then
+ you get 'LaTeX Error: Counter too large'.
+
+'gobble'
+ LaTeX does not output a page number, although it does get reset.
+ References to that page also are blank. (This does not work with
+ the popular package 'hyperref' so to have the page number not
+ appear you may want to instead use '\pagestyle{empty}' or
+ '\thispagestyle{empty}'.)
+
+ Traditionally, if a document has front matter--preface, table of
+contents, etc.--then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. The
+main matter of a document uses arabic. *Note \frontmatter & \mainmatter
+& \backmatter::.
+
+ If you want to address where the page number appears on the page,
+see *note \pagestyle::. If you want to change the value of page number
+then you will manipulate the 'page' counter (*note Counters::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagestyle, Next: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagenumbering, Up: Page styles
+
+18.3 '\pagestyle'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \pagestyle{STYLE}
+
+ Declaration that specifies how the page headers and footers are
+typeset, from the current page onwards.
+
+ A discussion with an example is below. Note first that the package
+'fancyhdr' is now the standard way to manipulate headers and footers.
+New documents that need to do anything other than one of the standard
+options below should use this package. See its documentation on CTAN.
+
+ Values for STYLE:
+
+'plain'
+ The header is empty. The footer contains only a page number,
+ centered.
+
+'empty'
+ The header and footer is empty.
+
+'headings'
+ Put running headers and footers on each page. The document style
+ specifies what goes in there; see the discussion below.
+
+'myheadings'
+ Custom headers, specified via the '\markboth' or the '\markright'
+ commands.
+
+ Some discussion of the motivation for LaTeX's mechanism will help you
+work with the options 'headings' or 'myheadings'. The document source
+below produces an article, two-sided, with the pagestyle 'headings'. On
+this document's left hand pages, LaTeX wants (in addition to the page
+number) the title of the current section. On its right hand pages LaTeX
+wants the title of the current subsection. When it makes up a page,
+LaTeX gets this information from the commands '\leftmark' and
+'\rightmark'. So it is up to '\section' and '\subsection' to store that
+information there.
+
+ \documentclass[twoside]{article}
+ \pagestyle{headings}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... \section{Section 1} ... \subsection{Subsection 1.1} ...
+ \section{Section 2}
+ ...
+ \subsection{Subsection 2.1}
+ ...
+ \subsection{Subsection 2.2}
+ ...
+
+Suppose that the second section falls on a left page. Although when the
+page starts it is in the first section, LaTeX will put 'Section 2' in
+the left page header. As to the right header, if no subsection starts
+before the end of the right page then LaTeX blanks the right hand
+header. If a subsection does appear before the right page finishes then
+there are two cases. If at least one subsection starts on the right
+hand page then LaTeX will put in the right header the title of the first
+subsection starting on that right page. If at least one of 2.1, 2.2,
+..., starts on the left page but none starts on the right then LaTeX
+puts in the right hand header the title of the last subsection to start,
+that is, the one in effect during the right hand page.
+
+ To accomplish this, in a two-sided article, LaTeX has '\section'
+issue a command '\markboth', setting '\leftmark' to 'Section 2' and
+setting '\rightmark' to blank. And, LaTeX has '\subsection' issue a
+command '\markright', setting '\rightmark' to 'Subsection 2.1', etc.
+
+ Here are the descriptions of '\markboth' and '\markright':
+
+'\markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}'
+ Sets both the right hand and left hand heading information for
+ either a page style of 'headings' or 'myheadings'. A left hand
+ page heading LEFT-HEAD is generated by the last '\markboth' command
+ before the end of the page. A right hand page heading RIGHT-HEAD
+ is generated by the first '\markboth' or '\markright' that comes on
+ the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one that came
+ before that page.
+
+'\markright{RIGHT}'
+ Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagestyle, Up: Page styles
+
+18.4 '\thispagestyle'
+=====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \thispagestyle{STYLE}
+
+ Works in the same way as the '\pagestyle' (*note \pagestyle::),
+except that it changes to STYLE for the current page only. This
+declaration has global scope, so its effect is not delimited by braces
+or environments.
+
+ Often the first page of a chapter or section has a different style.
+For example, this LaTeX book document has the first page of the first
+chapter in 'plain' style, as is the default (*note Page styles::).
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \pagestyle{headings}
+ \begin{document}
+ \chapter{First chapter}
+ ...
+ \chapter{Second chapter}\thispagestyle{empty}
+ ...
+
+The 'plain' style has a page number on it, centered in the footer. To
+make the page entirely empty, the command '\thispagestyle{empty}'
+immediately follows the second '\chapter'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Spaces, Next: Boxes, Prev: Page styles, Up: Top
+
+19 Spaces
+*********
+
+LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. Some of these
+are best suited to mathematical text; see *note Spacing in math mode::.
+Some spacing commands are suitable for both regular text and
+mathematical text; versions of some of these commands are in this
+chapter.
+
+* Menu:
+
+Horizontal space
+* \enspace & \quad & \qquad:: Traditional horizontal spaces.
+* \hspace:: Any horizontal space.
+* \hfill:: Stretchable horizontal space.
+* \hss:: Infinitely stretchable/shrinkable horizontal space.
+* \spacefactor:: Stretchability of following space
+* \(SPACE):: Backslash-space; and explicit space.
+* ~:: Tie, an unbreakable space.
+* \thinspace & \negthinspace:: One-sixth of an em, and negative one-sixth.
+* \/:: Italic correction.
+* \hrulefill & \dotfill:: Stretchable horizontal rule or dots.
+
+Vertical space
+* \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip:: Inter-paragraph vertical spaces.
+* \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak:: Inter-paragraph space and page breaks.
+* \strut:: Ensure height of a line.
+* \vspace:: Vertical space.
+* \vfill:: Stretchable vertical space.
+* \addvspace:: Add arbitrary vertical space if needed.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \enspace & \quad & \qquad, Next: \hspace, Up: Spaces
+
+19.1 '\enspace' & '\quad' & '\qquad'
+====================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \enspace
+ \quad
+ \qquad
+
+ Insert a horizontal space of 1/2em, 1em, or 2em. The em is a length
+defined by a font designer, often thought of as being the width of a
+capital M. One advantage of describing space in ems is that it can be
+more portable across documents than an absolute measurement such as
+points (*note Lengths/em::).
+
+ This puts a suitable gap between two graphics.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{womensmile.png}%
+ \qquad\includegraphics{mensmile.png}
+ \end{center}
+
+*Note Spacing in math mode:: for '\quad' and '\qquad'. These are
+lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice in
+many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with
+'\hspace'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hspace, Next: \hfill, Prev: \enspace & \quad & \qquad, Up: Spaces
+
+19.2 '\hspace'
+==============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \hspace{LENGTH}
+ \hspace*{LENGTH}
+
+ Insert the horizontal space LENGTH. The LENGTH can be positive,
+negative, or zero; adding negative space is like backspacing. It is a
+rubber length, that is, it may contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component, or
+both (*note Lengths::). Because the space is stretchable and
+shrinkable, it is sometimes called "glue".
+
+ This makes a line with 'Name:' an inch from the right margin.
+
+ \noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]{Name:\hspace{1in}}
+
+ The '*'-version inserts horizontal space that non-discardable. More
+precisely, when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines any white space--glues
+and kerns--that come at a line break are discarded. The '*'-version
+avoids that (technically, it adds a non-discardable invisible item in
+front of the space).
+
+ In this example
+
+ \parbox{0.8\linewidth}{%
+ Fill in each blank: Four \hspace*{1in} and seven years ago our
+ fathers brought forth on this continent, a new \hspace*{1in},
+ conceived in \hspace*{1in}, and dedicated to the proposition
+ that all men are created \hspace*{1in}.}
+
+the 1 inch blank following 'conceived in' falls at the start of a line.
+If you erase the '*' then LaTeX discards the blank.
+
+ Here, the '\hspace' separates the three graphics.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{lion.png}% comment keeps out extra space
+ \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{tiger.png}%
+ \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{bear.png}
+ \end{center}
+
+Because the argument to each '\hspace' has 'minus 0.25cm', each can
+shrink a little if the three figures are too wide. But each space won't
+shrink more than 0.25cm (*note Lengths::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hfill, Next: \hss, Prev: \hspace, Up: Spaces
+
+19.3 '\hfill'
+=============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \hfill
+
+ Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but that can
+stretch horizontally as far as needed (*note Lengths::).
+
+ This creates a one-line paragraph with 'Name:' on the left side of
+the page and 'Quiz One' on the right.
+
+ \noindent Name:\hfill Quiz One
+
+ The '\hfill' command is equivalent to '\hspace{\fill}' and so the
+space can be discarded at line breaks. To avoid that instead use
+'\hspace*{\fill}' (*note \hspace::).
+
+ Here the graphs are evenly spaced in the middle of the figure.
+
+ \newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+ ...
+ \begin{figure}
+ \hspace*{\fill}%
+ \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph0.png}}%
+ \hfill\vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph1.png}}%
+ \hspace*{\fill}%
+ \caption{Comparison of two graphs} \label{fig:twographs}
+ \end{figure}
+
+Note the '\hspace*''s where the space could otherwise be dropped.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hss, Next: \spacefactor, Prev: \hfill, Up: Spaces
+
+19.4 '\hss'
+===========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \hss
+
+ Produce a horizontal space that is infinitely shrinkable as well as
+infinitely stretchable (this command is a TeX primitive). LaTeX authors
+should reach first for the '\makebox' command to get the effects of
+'\hss' (*note \mbox & \makebox::).
+
+ Here, the first line's '\hss' makes the Z stick out to the right,
+overwriting the Y. In the second line the Z sticks out to the left,
+overwriting the X.
+
+ X\hbox to 0pt{Z\hss}Y
+ X\hbox to 0pt{\hss Z}Y
+
+Without the '\hss' you get something like 'Overfull \hbox (6.11111pt too
+wide) detected at line 20'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \spacefactor, Next: \(SPACE), Prev: \hss, Up: Spaces
+
+19.5 '\spacefactor'
+===================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \spacefactor=INTEGER
+
+ Influence LaTeX's glue stretch and shrink behavior. Most user-level
+documents do not use this command.
+
+ While LaTeX is laying out the material, it may stretch or shrink the
+gaps between words. (This space is not a character; it is called the
+"interword glue"; *note \hspace::). The '\spacefactor' command (from
+Plain TeX) allows you to, for instance, have the space after a period
+stretch more than the space after a word-ending letter.
+
+ After LaTeX places each character, or rule or other box, it sets a
+parameter called the "space factor". If the next thing in the input is
+a space then this parameter affects how much stretching or shrinking can
+happen. A space factor that is larger than the normal value means that
+the glue can stretch more and shrink less. Normally, the space factor
+is 1000. This value is in effect following most characters, and any
+non-character box or math formula. But it is 3000 after a period,
+exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000 after a colon, 1500 after
+a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or closing double quote or single quote. Finally, it is 999
+after a capital letter.
+
+ If the space factor F is 1000 then the glue gap will be the font's
+normal space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is
+3.3333 points). Otherwise, if the space factor F is greater than 2000
+then TeX adds the font's extra space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10
+point this is 1.11111 points), and then the font's normal stretch value
+is multiplied by f /1000 and the normal shrink value is multiplied by
+1000/f (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point these are 1.66666 and
+1.11111 points).
+
+ For example, consider the period ending 'A man's best friend is his
+dog.' After it, TeX puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the
+glue to stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much, as the glue
+after 'friend', which does not end in a period.
+
+ The rules for space factors are even more complex because they play
+additional roles. In practice, there are two consequences. First, if a
+period or other punctuation is followed by a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or right single or double quote then the spacing effect of that
+period carries through those characters (that is, the following glue
+will have increased stretch and shrink). Second, if punctuation comes
+after a capital letter then its effect is not in place so you get an
+ordinary space. This second case also affects abbreviations that do not
+end in a capital letter (*note \@::).
+
+ You can only use '\spacefactor' in paragraph mode or LR mode (*note
+Modes::). You can see the current value with '\the\spacefactor' or
+'\showthe\spacefactor'.
+
+ (Comment, not really related to '\spacefactor': if you get errors
+like 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode', or 'You can't use
+`\spacefactor' in math mode.', or 'Improper \spacefactor' then you have
+probably tried to redefine an internal command. *Note \makeatletter &
+\makeatother::.)
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \@:: Distinguish sentence-ending periods from abbreviations.
+* \frenchspacing:: Equal interword and inter-sentence space.
+* \normalsfcodes:: Restore space factor settings to the default.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \@, Next: \frenchspacing, Up: \spacefactor
+
+19.5.1 '\@'
+-----------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ CAPITAL-LETTER\@.
+
+ Treat a period as sentence-ending, where LaTeX would otherwise think
+it is part of an abbreviation. LaTeX thinks that a period ends an
+abbreviation if the period comes after a capital letter, and otherwise
+thinks the period ends the sentence. By default, in justifying a line
+LaTeX adjusts the space after a sentence-ending period (or a question
+mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than it adjusts the space
+between words (*note \spacefactor::).
+
+ This example shows the two cases to remember.
+
+ The songs \textit{Red Guitar}, etc.\ are by Loudon Wainwright~III\@.
+
+The second period ends the sentence, despite that it is preceded by a
+capital. We tell LaTeX that it ends the sentence by putting '\@' before
+it. The first period ends the abbreviation 'etc.' but not the sentence.
+The backslash-space, '\ ', produces a mid-sentence space.
+
+ So: if you have a capital letter followed by a period that ends the
+sentence, then put '\@' before the period. This holds even if there is
+an intervening right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or double
+quote, because the spacing effect of that period carries through those
+characters. For example, this
+
+ Use the \textit{Instructional Practices Guide},
+ (a book by the MAA)\@.
+
+will have correct inter-sentence spacing after the period.
+
+ The '\@' command is only for a text mode. If you use it outside of a
+text mode then you get 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode'
+(*note Modes::).
+
+ Comment: the converse case is a period ending an abbreviation whose
+last letter is not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the
+last word in the sentence. For that case follow the period with a
+backslash-space, ('\ '), or a tie, ('~'), or '\@'. Examples are 'Nat.\
+Acad.\ Science', and 'Mr.~Bean', and '(manure, etc.\@) for sale' (note
+in the last one that the '\@' comes before the closing parenthesis).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \frenchspacing, Next: \normalsfcodes, Prev: \@, Up: \spacefactor
+
+19.5.2 '\frenchspacing'
+-----------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \frenchspacing
+ \nonfrenchspacing
+
+ The first declaration causes LaTeX to treat spacing between sentences
+in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a sentence.
+The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more
+(*note \spacefactor::); this is the default.
+
+ Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the
+space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
+exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words
+that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring '\frenchspacing' (the
+command is from Plain TeX) switches to the tradition that all spaces are
+treated equally.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \normalsfcodes, Prev: \frenchspacing, Up: \spacefactor
+
+19.5.3 '\normalsfcodes'
+-----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \normalsfcodes
+
+ Reset the LaTeX space factor values to the default (*note
+\spacefactor::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \(SPACE), Next: ~, Prev: \spacefactor, Up: Spaces
+
+19.6 Backslash-space, '\ '
+==========================
+
+This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a
+backslash followed by a space. Synopsis:
+
+ \
+
+ Produce a space. By default it produces white space of length
+3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt.
+
+ When you type one or more blanks between words, LaTeX produces white
+space. But that is different than an explicit space. This illustrates.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ One blank: makes some space \\
+ Three blanks: in a row \\
+ Three spaces:\ \ \ in a row \\
+ \end{tabular}
+
+On the first line LaTeX puts some space after the colon. On the second
+line LaTeX collapses the three blanks to output one whitespace, so you
+end with the same space after the colon as in the first line. LaTeX
+would similarly collapse a blank followed by a tab, or a blank and a
+newline and a blank. However, the bottom line asks for three spaces so
+the white area is wider. That is, the backslash-space command creates a
+fixed amount of horizontal space. (Note that you can define a
+horizontal space of any width at all with '\hspace'; see *note
+\hspace::.)
+
+ The backslash-space command has two main uses. It is often used
+after control sequences to keep them from gobbling the space that
+follows, as in '\TeX\ is nice'. (But using curly parentheses, as in
+'\TeX{} is best', has the advantage of still working if the next
+character is a period.) The other common use is that it marks a period
+as ending an abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in 'So says
+Prof.\ Smith' (*note \@::).
+
+ Under normal circumstances, '\'<tab> and '\'<newline> are equivalent
+to backslash-space, '\ '.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: ~, Next: \thinspace & \negthinspace, Prev: \(SPACE), Up: Spaces
+
+19.7 '~'
+========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ BEFORE~AFTER
+
+ The tie character, '~', produces a space between BEFORE and AFTER at
+which the line will not be broken. By default the white space has
+length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt (*note Lengths::).
+
+ Here LaTeX will not break the line between the final two words.
+
+ Thanks to Prof.~Lerman.
+
+In addition, despite the period, LaTeX does not use the end-of-sentence
+spacing (*note \@::).
+
+ Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could
+cause confusion. But they also reduce LaTeX's options when it breaks
+lines into paragraphs, so you can use too many. They are also matters
+of taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers.
+Nevertheless, here are some usage models, many of them from the TeXbook.
+
+ * Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references:
+ 'Chapter~12', or 'Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}', or
+ 'Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}'. When cases are enumerated inline:
+ '(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded'.
+
+ * Between a number and its unit: '$745.7.8$~watts' (the 'siunitx'
+ package has a special facility for this) or '144~eggs'. This
+ includes between a month and a date: 'October~12' or '12~Oct'. In
+ general, in any expressions where numbers and abbreviations or
+ symbols are separated by a space: 'AD~565', or '2:50~pm', or
+ 'Boeing~747', or '268~Plains Road', or '\$$1.4$~billion'.
+
+ * When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: 'equals~$n$', or
+ 'less than~$\epsilon$', or 'given~$X$', or 'modulo~$p^e$ for all
+ large~$n$' (but compare 'is~$15$' with 'is $15$~times the height').
+ Between mathematical symbols in apposition with nouns:
+ 'dimension~$d$' or 'function~$f(x)$' (but compare 'with length
+ $l$~or more'). When a symbol is a tightly bound object of a
+ preposition: 'of~$x$', or 'from $0$ to~$1$', or 'in common
+ with~$m$'.
+
+ * Between symbols in series: '$1$,~$2$, or~$3$' or '$1$,~$2$,
+ \ldots,~$n$'.
+
+ * Between a person's forenames and between multiple surnames:
+ 'Donald~E. Knuth', or 'Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo', or 'Charles~XII' (but
+ you must give TeX places to break the line so you may do 'Charles
+ Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin').
+
+ * Before a dash: 'pages 12~--14' or 'it is~--- it must be said~---
+ plausible'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \thinspace & \negthinspace, Next: \/, Prev: ~, Up: Spaces
+
+19.8 '\thinspace' & '\negthinspace'
+===================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \thinspace
+ \negthinspace
+
+ Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6em and -1/6em.
+These are the text mode equivalents of '\,' and '\!' (*note Spacing in
+math mode/\thinspace::). You can use '\,' as a synonym for '\thinspace'
+in text mode.
+
+ The '\negthinspace' command is used in text mode mostly for fiddling
+with spaces. One common use of '\thinspace' is as the space between
+nested quotes.
+
+ Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace''
+
+Another use is that some style guides call for a '\thinspace' between an
+ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides, though, think
+the three dots are quite enough already). Still another use is between
+initials, as in 'D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \/, Next: \hrulefill & \dotfill, Prev: \thinspace & \negthinspace, Up: Spaces
+
+19.9 '\/'
+=========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ BEFORE-CHARACTER\/AFTER-CHARACTER
+
+ Insert an "italic correction", a small space defined by the font
+designer for each character, to avoid the character colliding with
+whatever follows. When you use '\/', LaTeX takes the correction from
+the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has been applied to
+the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space.
+
+ Here, were it not for the '\/', the BEFORE-CHARACTER italic f would
+hit the AFTER-CHARACTER roman H
+
+ \newcommand{\companylogo}{{\it f}\/H}
+
+because the italic letter leans far to the right.
+
+ If AFTER-CHARACTER is a period or comma then don't insert an italic
+correction since those punctuation symbols have a very small height.
+However, with semicolons or colons as well as with normal letters, the
+italic correction can help.
+
+ When you use commands such as '\textit' or '\itshape' to change
+fonts, LaTeX will automatically insert any needed italic correction
+(*note Font styles::).
+
+ Roman characters can also have an italic correction. An example is
+in the name 'pdf\/\TeX'.
+
+ There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is
+done in a different way.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hrulefill & \dotfill, Next: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip, Prev: \/, Up: Spaces
+
+19.10 '\hrulefill' & '\dotfill'
+===============================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \hrulefill
+ \dotfill
+
+ Produce an infinite horizontal rubber length (*note Lengths::) that
+LaTeX fills with a rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of white
+space.
+
+ This outputs a line 2 inches long.
+
+ Name:~\makebox[2in]{\hrulefill}
+
+This example, when placed between blank lines, creates a paragraph that
+is left and right justified and where the middle is filled with evenly
+spaced dots.
+
+ \noindent John Aubrey, RN \dotfill{} Melbury Lodge
+
+ To make the rule or dots go to the line's end use '\null' at the
+start or end.
+
+ To change the rule's thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
+here
+
+ \renewcommand{\hrulefill}{%
+ \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern\z@}
+
+which changes the default thickness of 0.4pt to 1pt. Similarly, adjust
+the dot spacing as with
+
+ \renewcommand{\dotfill}{%
+ \leavevmode\cleaders\hb@xt@1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern\z@}
+
+which changes the default length of 0.33em to 1.00em.
+
+ This example produces a line for a signature.
+
+ \begin{minipage}{4cm}
+ \centering
+ \hrulefill\\
+ Signed
+ \end{minipage}
+
+The line is 4cm long.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip, Next: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak, Prev: \hrulefill & \dotfill, Up: Spaces
+
+19.11 '\bigskip' & '\medskip' & '\smallskip'
+============================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \bigskip
+ \medskip
+ \smallskip
+
+ Produce an amount of vertical space, large or medium-sized or small.
+These commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Here the skip suggests the passage of time (from The Golden Ocean by
+O'Brian).
+
+ Mr Saumarez would have something rude to say to him, no doubt: he
+ was at home again, and it was delightful.
+
+ \bigskip
+ ``A hundred and fifty-seven miles and one third, in twenty-four hours,''
+ said Peter.
+
+ Each command is associated with a length defined in the document
+class file.
+
+'\bigskip'
+ The same as '\vspace{\bigskipamount}', ordinarily about one line
+ space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the 'book' and
+ 'article' classes is '12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt'.
+
+'\medskip'
+ The same as '\vspace{\medskipamount}', ordinarily about half of a
+ line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the 'book'
+ and 'article' classes is '6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt'.
+
+'\smallskip'
+ The same as '\vspace{\smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter
+ of a line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the
+ 'book' and 'article' classes is '3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt'.
+
+ Because each command is a '\vspace', if you use on in mid-paragraph
+then it will insert its vertical space between the line in which you use
+it and the next line, not necessarily at the place that you use it. So
+these are best between paragraphs.
+
+ The commands '\bigbreak', '\medbreak', and '\smallbreak' are similar
+but also suggest to LaTeX that this is a good place to put a page break
+(*note \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak, Next: \strut, Prev: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip, Up: Spaces
+
+19.12 '\bigbreak' & '\medbreak' & '\smallbreak'
+===============================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \bigbreak
+ \medbreak
+ \smallbreak
+
+ Produce a vertical space that is big or medium-sized or small, and
+suggest to LaTeX that this is a good place to break the page. (The
+associated penalties are -200, -100, and -50.)
+
+ *Note \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip::, for more. These commands
+produce the same vertical space but differ in that they also remove a
+preceding vertical space if it is less than what they would insert (as
+with '\addvspace'). In addition, they terminate a paragraph where they
+are used: this example
+
+ abc\bigbreak def ghi
+
+ jkl mno pqr
+
+will output three paragraphs, the first ending in 'abc' and the second
+starting, after an extra vertical space and a paragraph indent, with
+'def'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \strut, Next: \vspace, Prev: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak, Up: Spaces
+
+19.13 '\strut'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \strut
+
+ Ensure that the current line has height at least '0.7\baselineskip'
+and depth at least '0.3\baselineskip'. Essentially, LaTeX inserts into
+the line a rectangle having zero width,
+'\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]{0pt}{\baselineskip}' (*note \rule::). The
+'\baselineskip' changes with the current font and fontsize.
+
+ In this example the '\strut' keeps the box inside the frame from
+having zero height.
+
+ \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[2in]{\strut}
+
+ This example has four lists. In the first there is a much bigger gap
+between items 2 and 3 than there is between items 1 and 2. The second
+list fixes that with a '\strut' at the end of its first item's second
+line.
+
+ \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+ \noindent\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}
+ \item test
+ \item test
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{minipage}%
+ \begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}
+ \item test
+ \item test
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{minipage}%
+ \begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{minipage}%
+ \begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{minipage}%
+
+The final two lists use '\fbox' to show what's happening. The third
+list's '\parbox' goes only to the bottom of its second 'test', which
+happens not have any characters that descend below the baseline. The
+fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed extra below-baseline
+space.
+
+ The '\strut' command is often useful in graphics, such as in 'TikZ'
+or 'Asymptote'. For instance, you may have a command such as
+'\graphnode{NODE-NAME}' that fits a circle around NODE-NAME. However,
+unless you are careful the NODE-NAME's 'x' and 'y' will produce
+different-diameter circles because the characters are different sizes.
+A careful '\graphnode' might insert a '\strut', then NODE-NAME, and then
+draw the circle.
+
+ The general approach of using a zero width '\rule' is useful in many
+circumstances. In this table, the zero-width rule keeps the top of the
+first integral from hitting the '\hline'. Similarly, the second rule
+keeps the second integral from hitting the first.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{rl}
+ \textsc{Integral} &\textsc{Value} \\
+ \hline
+ $\int_0^x t\, dt$ &$x^2/2$ \rule{0em}{2.5ex} \\
+ $\int_0^x t^2\, dt$ &$x^3/3$ \rule{0em}{2.5ex}
+ \end{tabular}
+
+(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available
+optional argument to put in more vertical room, that won't work here.
+Changing the first double backslash to something like '\\[2.5ex]' will
+put the room between the header line and the '\hline', and the integral
+would still hit the line.)
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \vspace, Next: \vfill, Prev: \strut, Up: Spaces
+
+19.14 '\vspace'
+===============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \vspace{LENGTH}
+ \vspace*{LENGTH}
+
+ Add the vertical space LENGTH. The LENGTH can be positive, negative,
+or zero. It is a rubber length--it may contain a 'plus' or 'minus'
+component (*note Lengths::).
+
+ This puts space between the two paragraphs.
+
+ And I slept.
+
+ \vspace{1ex plus 0.5ex}
+ The new day dawned cold.
+
+(*Note \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip:: for common inter-paragraph
+spaces.)
+
+ The '*'-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable. More
+precisely, LaTeX discards vertical space at a page break and the
+'*'-version causes the space to stay. This example leaves space between
+the two questions.
+
+ Question: Find the integral of \( 5x^4+5 \).
+
+ \vspace*{2cm plus 0.5cm}
+ Question: Find the derivative of \( x^5+5x+9 \).
+
+That space will be present even if the page break happens to fall
+between the questions.
+
+ If you use '\vspace' in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
+horizontal mode) then the space is inserted after the line containing
+the '\vspace' command; it does not start a new paragraph at the
+'\vspace' command.
+
+ In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
+the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
+
+ \begin{document}
+ 1) Who put the bomp in the bomp bah bomp bah bomp?
+ \vspace{1in plus 1fill}
+
+ 2) Who put the ram in the rama lama ding dong?
+ \vspace{1in plus 1fill}
+ \end{document}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \vfill, Next: \addvspace, Prev: \vspace, Up: Spaces
+
+19.15 '\vfill'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \vfill
+
+ End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length that is
+infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as needed (*note
+Lengths::).
+
+ It is often used in the same way as '\vspace{\fill}', except that
+'\vfill' ends the current paragraph whereas '\vspace{\fill}' adds the
+infinite vertical space below its line, irrespective of the paragraph
+structure. In both cases that space will disappear at a page boundary;
+to circumvent this see the starred option in *note \vspace::.
+
+ In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines
+contain the text 'Lost Dog!' and the second 'Lost Dog!' is exactly
+halfway between them.
+
+ \begin{document}
+ Lost Dog!
+ \vfill
+ Lost Dog! % perfectly in the middle
+ \vfill
+ Lost Dog!
+ \end{document}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \addvspace, Prev: \vfill, Up: Spaces
+
+19.16 '\addvspace'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \addvspace{VERT-LENGTH}
+
+ Add a vertical space of VERT-LENGTH. However, if there are two or
+more '\addvspace''s in a sequence then together they only add the space
+needed to make the natural length equal to the maximum of the
+VERT-LENGTH's in that sequence. This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::). The VERT-LENGTH is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
+
+ This example illustrates. The 'picture' draws a scale. In a
+standard LaTeX article the length '\baselineskip' is 12pt. The two
+rules here are 22pt apart: the sum of the '\baselineskip' and the 10pt
+from the first 'addvspace'.
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \usepackage{color}
+ \begin{document}
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{2pt}%
+ \noindent\begin{picture}(0,0)%
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,-1){25}{{\color{blue}\line(1,0){1}}}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,-5){6}{{\color{red}\line(1,0){2}}}
+ \end{picture}%
+ \rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}%
+ \par\addvspace{10pt}% \addvspace{20pt}%
+ \par\noindent\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}%
+ \end{document}
+
+Now uncomment the second '\addvspace'. It does not make the gap 20pt
+longer; instead the gap is the sum of '\baselineskip' and 20pt. So
+'\addvspace' in a sense does the opposite of its name -- it makes sure
+that multiple vertical spaces do not accumulate, but instead that only
+the largest one is used.
+
+ LaTeX uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below
+an environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a 'theorem'
+environment begins and ends with '\addvspace' so that two consecutive
+'theorem''s are separated by one vertical space, not two.
+
+ A error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item' pointing to an
+'\addvspace' means that you were not in vertical mode when you hit this
+command. One way to change that is to precede '\addvspace' with a
+'\par' command (*note \par::), as in the above example.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Boxes, Next: Color, Prev: Spaces, Up: Top
+
+20 Boxes
+********
+
+At its core, LaTeX puts things in boxes and then puts the boxes on a
+page. So these commands are central.
+
+ There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating
+boxes. One useful adjunct to the commands here is 'adjustbox'.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \mbox & \makebox:: Horizontal boxes.
+* \fbox & \framebox:: Put a frame around a box.
+* \parbox:: Box with text in paragraph mode.
+* \raisebox:: Raise or lower text.
+* \sbox & \savebox:: Like '\makebox' but save the text for later.
+* lrbox:: Environment version of '\sbox'.
+* \usebox:: Print saved text.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \mbox & \makebox, Next: \fbox & \framebox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.1 '\mbox' & '\makebox'
+=========================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \mbox{TEXT}
+ \makebox{TEXT}
+ \makebox[WIDTH]{TEXT}
+ \makebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+ Create a box, a container for material. The TEXT is typeset in LR
+mode (*note Modes::) so it is not broken into lines. The '\mbox'
+command is robust, while '\makebox' is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Because 'text' is not broken into lines, you can use '\mbox' to
+prevent hyphenation. In this example, LaTeX will not hyphenate the
+table name, 'T-4'.
+
+ See Table~\mbox{T-4}
+
+ The first two command versions, '\mbox' and '\makebox', are roughly
+equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the TEXT.
+(They are like plain TeX's '\hbox'.)
+
+ In the third version the optional argument WIDTH specifies the width
+of the box. Note that the space occupied by the text need not equal the
+width of the box. For one thing, TEXT can be too small; this creates a
+full-line box
+
+ \makebox[\linewidth]{Chapter Exam}
+
+with 'Chapter Exam' centered. But TEXT can also be too wide for WIDTH.
+See the example below of zero-width boxes.
+
+ In the WIDTH argument you can use the following lengths that refer to
+the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets on typesetting TEXT: '\depth',
+'\height', '\width', '\totalheight' (this is the box's height plus its
+depth). For example, to make a box with the text stretched to double
+the natural size you can say this.
+
+ \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+
+ For the fourth command version the optional argument POSITION gives
+position of the text within the box. It may take the following values:
+
+'c'
+ The TEXT is centered (default).
+
+'l'
+ The TEXT is flush left.
+
+'r'
+ Flush right.
+
+'s'
+ Stretch the interword space in TEXT across the entire WIDTH. The
+ TEXT must contain stretchable space for this to work. For
+ instance, this could head a press release:
+ '\noindent\makebox[\textwidth][s]{\large\hfil IMMEDIATE\hfil
+ RELEASE\hfil}'
+
+ A common use of '\makebox' is to make zero-width text boxes. This
+puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions.
+
+ \newcommand{\pts}[1]{\makebox[0em][r]{#1 points\hspace*{1em}}}
+ \pts{10}What is the air-speed velocity of an unladen swallow?
+
+ \pts{90}An African or European swallow?
+
+
+ The right edge of the output '10 points ' (note the ending space)
+will be just before the 'What' (note the space after 'points'). You can
+use '\makebox' similarly when making graphics, such as in 'TikZ' or
+'Asymptote', where you put the edge of the text at a known location,
+regardless of the length of that text.
+
+ For boxes with frames see *note \fbox & \framebox::. For colors
+see *note Colored boxes::.
+
+ There is a related version of '\makebox' that is used within the
+'picture' environment, where the length is given in terms of
+'\unitlength' (*note \makebox (picture)::).
+
+ If you put a double-backslash into TEXT then LaTeX will not give you
+a new line; for instance '\makebox{abc def \\ ghi}' outputs 'abc defghi'
+while '\makebox{abc def \par ghi}' outputs 'abc def ghi', but neither go
+to a second line. To get multiple lines see *note \parbox:: and *note
+minipage::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \fbox & \framebox, Next: \parbox, Prev: \mbox & \makebox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.2 '\fbox' & '\framebox'
+==========================
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+ \fbox{TEXT}
+ \framebox{TEXT}
+ \framebox[WIDTH]{TEXT}
+ \framebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+ Create a box with an enclosing frame, four lines surrounding the
+space. These commands are the same as '\mbox' and '\makebox' except for
+the frame (*note \mbox & \makebox::). The '\fbox' command is robust,
+the '\framebox' command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ \fbox{Warning! No work shown, no credit given.}
+
+LaTeX puts the text into a box that cannot be split or hyphenated.
+Around that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four lines making
+a frame.
+
+ The first two command invocations, '\fbox{...}' and '\framebox{...}',
+are roughly the same. As to the third and fourth invocations, the
+optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as WIDTH and the
+position of the text inside that box as POSITION. *Note \mbox &
+\makebox:: for the full description but here is an example creating an
+empty box that is 1/4in wide.
+
+ \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[0.25in]{\strut}}
+
+The '\strut' inserts a vertical height of '\baselineskip' (*note
+\strut::).
+
+ These parameters determine the frame layout.
+
+'\fboxrule'
+ The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box. The default is
+ 0.2pt. Change it with a command such as
+ '\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}' (*note \setlength::).
+
+'\fboxsep'
+ The distance from the frame to the enclosed box. The default is
+ 3pt. Change it with a command such as '\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}'
+ (*note \setlength::). Setting it to 0pt is useful sometimes: this
+ will put a frame around the picture with no white border.
+
+ {\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+ \framebox{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{prudence.jpg}}}
+
+ The extra curly braces keep the effect of the '\setlength' local.
+
+ As with '\mbox' and '\makebox', LaTeX will not break lines in TEXT.
+But this example has LaTeX break lines to make a paragraph, and then
+frame the result.
+
+ \framebox{%
+ \begin{minipage}{0.6\linewidth}
+ My dear, here we must run as fast as we can, just to stay in place.
+ And if you wish to go anywhere you must run twice as fast as that.
+ \end{minipage}}
+
+ *Note Colored boxes:: for colors other than black and white.
+
+ The 'picture' environment has a version of this command where the
+units depend on 'picture''s '\unitlength' (*note \framebox (picture)::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \parbox, Next: \raisebox, Prev: \fbox & \framebox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.3 '\parbox'
+==============
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+ \parbox{WIDTH}{CONTENTS}
+ \parbox[POSITION]{WIDTH}{CONTENTS}
+ \parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT]{WIDTH}{CONTENTS}
+ \parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}{CONTENTS}
+
+ Produce a box of text that is WIDTH wide. Use this command to make a
+box of small pieces of text, of a single paragraph. This command is
+fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ \begin{picture}(0,0)
+ ...
+ \put(1,2){\parbox{1.75in}{\raggedright Because the graph is a line on
+ this semilog paper, the relationship is
+ exponential.}}
+ \end{picture}
+
+ The CONTENTS are processed in a text mode (*note Modes::) so LaTeX
+will break lines to make a paragraph. But it won't make multiple
+paragraphs; for that, use a 'minipage' environment (*note minipage::).
+
+ The options for '\parbox' (except for CONTENTS) are the same as those
+for 'minipage'. For convenience a summary of the options is here but
+see *note minipage:: for a complete description.
+
+ There are two required arguments. The WIDTH is a rigid length (*note
+Lengths::). It sets the width of the box into which LaTeX typesets
+CONTENTS. The CONTENTS is the text that is placed in that box. It
+should not have any paragraph-making components.
+
+ There are three optional arguments, POSITION, HEIGHT, and INNER-POS.
+The POSITION gives the vertical alignment of the 'parbox' with respect
+to the surrounding material. The possible values are 'c' or 'm' to make
+the vertical center of the 'parbox' lines up with the center of the
+adjacent line (this is the default), or 't' to match the top line of the
+'parbox' with the baseline of the surrounding material, or 'b' to match
+the bottom line.
+
+ The optional argument HEIGHT overrides the natural height of the box.
+
+ The optional argument INNER-POS controls the placement of CONTENT
+inside the 'parbox'. Its default is the value of POSITION. Its
+possible values are: 't' to put the CONTENT at the top of the box, 'c'
+to put it in the vertical center, 'b' to put it at the bottom of the
+box, and 's' to stretch it out vertically (for this, the text must
+contain vertically stretchable space).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \raisebox, Next: \sbox & \savebox, Prev: \parbox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.4 '\raisebox'
+================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \raisebox{DISTANCE}{TEXT}
+ \raisebox{DISTANCE}[HEIGHT]{TEXT}
+ \raisebox{DISTANCE}[HEIGHT][DEPTH]{TEXT}
+
+ Raise or lower TEXT. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by
+lowering the vertical bar symbol.
+
+ \newcommand\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}}
+ $f\restricted{A}$
+
+ The first mandatory argument DISTANCE specifies how far to raise the
+second mandatory argument TEXT. This is a rigid length (*note
+Lengths::). If it is negative then it lowers TEXT. The TEXT is
+processed in LR mode so it cannot contain line breaks (*note Modes::).
+
+ The optional arguments HEIGHT and DEPTH are dimensions. If they are
+specified, they override the natural height and depth of the box LaTeX
+gets by typesetting TEXT.
+
+ In the arguments DISTANCE, HEIGHT, and DEPTH you can use the
+following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets
+on typesetting TEXT: '\depth', '\height', '\width', '\totalheight' (this
+is the box's height plus its depth).
+
+ This will align two graphics on their top (*note Graphics::).
+
+ \usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{calc} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{center}
+ \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{lion.png}}
+ \qquad
+ \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{meta.png}}
+ \end{center}
+
+The first '\height' is the height of 'lion.png' while the second is the
+height of 'meta.png'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \sbox & \savebox, Next: lrbox, Prev: \raisebox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.5 '\sbox' & '\savebox'
+=========================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \sbox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}
+ \savebox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}
+ \savebox{BOX-CMD}[WIDTH]{TEXT}
+ \savebox{BOX-CMD}[WIDTH][POS]{TEXT}
+
+ Typeset TEXT just as with '\makebox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::)
+except that LaTeX does not output it but instead saves it in a storage
+bin named BOX-CMD. The bin name BOX-CMD begins with a backslash, '\'.
+You must have previously allocated the bin BOX-CMD with '\newsavebox'
+(*note \newsavebox::).The '\sbox' command is robust while '\savebox' is
+fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ This creates and uses a bin.
+
+ \newsavebox{\fullname}
+ \sbox{\fullname}{John Jacob Jingleheimer Schmidt}
+ ...
+ \usebox{\fullname}! His name is my name, too!
+ Whenever we go out, the people always shout!
+ There goes \\usebox{\fullname}! Ya da da da da da da.
+
+One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a '\newcommand' is
+efficiency, that LaTeX need not repeatedly retypeset the contents. See
+the example below.
+
+ The first two command invocations, '\sbox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}' and
+'\savebox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}', are roughly equivalent. As to the third and
+fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as
+WIDTH, and the position of the text inside that box as POSITION. *Note
+\mbox & \makebox:: for the full description.
+
+ In the '\sbox' and '\savebox' commands the TEXT is typeset in LR mode
+so it does not have line breaks (*note Modes::). If you use these then
+LaTeX doesn't give you an error but it ignores what you want: if you
+enter '\sbox{\newbin}{test \\ test}' and '\usebox{\newbin}' then you get
+'testtest', while if you enter '\sbox{\newbin}{test \par test}' and
+'\usebox{\newbin}' then you get 'test test', but no error or warning.
+To fix this use a '\parbox' or 'minipage' as here.
+
+ \savebox{\abin}{%
+ \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{minipage}}
+ ...
+ \usebox{\abin}
+
+ As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin's contents, this
+puts the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the
+header. LaTeX only typesets it once.
+
+ \usepackage{graphicx} % all this in the preamble
+ \newsavebox{\sealbin}
+ \savebox{\sealbin}{%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}%
+ \begin{picture}(0,0)%
+ \put(1.5,-2.5){%
+ \begin{tabular}{c}
+ \includegraphics[height=2in]{companylogo.png} \\
+ Office of the President
+ \end{tabular}}
+ \end{picture}%
+ }
+ \markright{\usebox{\sealbin}}
+ \pagestyle{headings}
+
+The 'picture' environment is good for fine-tuning the placement.
+
+ If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like
+'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \nobin'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: lrbox, Next: \usebox, Prev: \sbox & \savebox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.6 'lrbox'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{lrbox}{BOX-CMD}
+ TEXT
+ \end{lrbox}
+
+ The TEXT inside the environment is saved in the bin 'BOX-CMD'. The
+BOX-CMD must begin with a backslash. You must create this bin in
+advance with '\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::). This is the
+environment form of the '\sbox' and '\savebox' commands, and is
+equivalent to them. *Note \sbox & \savebox:: for the full information.
+
+ In this example the environment is convenient for entering the
+'tabular'.
+
+ \newsavebox{\jhbin}
+ \begin{lrbox}{\jhbin}
+ \begin{tabular}{c}
+ \includegraphics[height=1in]{jh.png} \\
+ Jim Hef{}feron
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{lrbox}
+ ...
+ \usebox{\jhbin}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \usebox, Prev: lrbox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.7 '\usebox'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usebox{BOX-CMD}
+
+ Produce the box most recently saved in the bin BOX-CMD by the
+commands '\sbox' or '\savebox', or the 'lrbox' environment. *Note \sbox
+& \savebox:: for more information and examples. (Note that BOX-CMD
+starts with a backslash.) This command is robust (*note \protect::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Color, Next: Graphics, Prev: Boxes, Up: Top
+
+21 Color
+********
+
+You can add color to text, rules, etc. You can also have color in a box
+or on an entire page and write text on top of it.
+
+ Color support comes as an additional package. So put
+'\usepackage{color}' in your document preamble to use the commands
+described here.
+
+ Many other packages also supplement LaTeX's color abilities.
+Particularly worth mentioning is 'xcolor', which is widely used and
+significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding
+'HTML' and 'Hsb' color models.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Color package options:: Options when you load the standard package.
+* Color models:: How colors are represented.
+* Commands for color:: The available commands.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Color package options, Next: Color models, Up: Color
+
+21.1 'color' package options
+============================
+
+Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
+
+ \usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{color}
+
+ When you load the 'color' package there are two kinds of available
+options.
+
+ The first specifies the "printer driver". LaTeX doesn't contain
+information about different output systems but instead depends on
+information stored in a file. Normally you should not specify the
+driver option in the document, and instead rely on your system's
+default. One advantage of this is that it makes the document portable
+across systems. For completeness we include a list of the drivers. The
+currently relevant ones are: 'dvipdfmx', 'dvips', 'dvisvgm', 'luatex',
+'pdftex', 'xetex'. The two 'xdvi' and 'oztex' are essentially aliases
+for 'dvips' (and 'xdvi' is monochrome). Ones that should not be used
+for new systems are: 'dvipdf', 'dvipdfm', 'dviwin', 'dvipsone', 'emtex',
+'pctexps', 'pctexwin', 'pctexhp', 'pctex32', 'truetex', 'tcidvi', 'vtex'
+(and 'dviwindo' is an alias for 'dvipsone').
+
+ The second kind of options, beyond the drivers, are below.
+
+'monochrome'
+ Disable the color commands, so that they do not generate errors but
+ do not generate color either.
+
+'dvipsnames'
+ Make available a list of 68 color names that are often used,
+ particularly in legacy documents. These color names were
+ originally provided by the 'dvips' driver, giving the option name.
+
+'nodvipsnames'
+ Do not load that list of color names, saving LaTeX a tiny amount of
+ memory space.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Color models, Next: Commands for color, Prev: Color package options, Up: Color
+
+21.2 Color models
+=================
+
+A "color model" is a way of representing colors. LaTeX's capabilities
+depend on the printer driver. However, the 'pdftex', 'xetex', and
+'luatex' printer drivers are today by far the most commonly used. The
+models below work for those drivers. All but one of these is also
+supported by essentially all other printer drivers used today.
+
+ Note that color combination can be additive or subtractive. Additive
+mixes colors of light, so that for instance combining full intensities
+of red, green, and blue produces white. Subtractive mixes pigments,
+such as with inks, so that combining full intensity of cyan, magenta,
+and yellow makes black.
+
+'cmyk'
+ A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1,
+ inclusive. The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second
+ is magenta, and the others are yellow and black. A number value of
+ 0 means minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity. This
+ model is often used in color printing. It is a subtractive model.
+
+'gray'
+ A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive. The colors are
+ shades of grey. The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white.
+
+'rgb'
+ A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1,
+ inclusive. The first number is the intensity of the red component,
+ the second is green, and the third the blue. A number value of 0
+ means that none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full
+ intensity. This is an additive model.
+
+'RGB'
+ ('pdftex', 'xetex', 'luatex' drivers) A comma-separated list with
+ three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive. This model is a
+ convenience for using 'rgb' since outside of LaTeX colors are often
+ described in a red-green-blue model using numbers in this range.
+ The values entered here are converted to the 'rgb' model by
+ dividing by 255.
+
+'named'
+ Colors are accessed by name, such as 'PrussianBlue'. The list of
+ names depends on the driver, but all support the names 'black',
+ 'blue', 'cyan', 'green', 'magenta', 'red', 'white', and 'yellow'
+ (See the 'dvipsnames' option in *note Color package options::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Commands for color, Prev: Color models, Up: Color
+
+21.3 Commands for color
+=======================
+
+These are the commands available with the 'color' package.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Define colors:: Give a color a name.
+* Colored text:: Text or rules in color.
+* Colored boxes:: A box of color, to write over.
+* Colored pages:: A whole page colored.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Define colors, Next: Colored text, Up: Commands for color
+
+21.3.1 Define colors
+--------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \definecolor{NAME}{MODEL}{SPECIFICATION}
+
+ Give the name NAME to the color. For example, after this
+
+ \definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}
+
+you can use that color name with 'Hi ho, \textcolor{silver}{Silver}!'.
+
+ This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change
+and not be misleading.
+
+ \definecolor{logocolor}{RGB}{145,92,131} % RGB needs pdflatex
+ \newcommand{\logo}{\textcolor{logocolor}{Bob's Big Bagels}}
+
+ Often a document's colors are defined in the preamble, or in the
+class or style, rather than in the document body.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Colored text, Next: Colored boxes, Prev: Define colors, Up: Commands for color
+
+21.3.2 Colored text
+-------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \textcolor{NAME}{...}
+ \textcolor[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}{...}
+
+or
+
+ \color{NAME}
+ \color[COLOR MODEL]{SPECIFICATION}
+
+ The affected text gets the color. This line
+
+ \textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:}
+ Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
+
+causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black. You
+can use a color declared with '\definecolor' in exactly the same way
+that we just used the builtin color 'magenta'.
+
+ \definecolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{rgb}{1.0,0.11,0.0}
+ I'm thinking about getting a \textcolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{sports car}.
+
+ The two '\textcolor' and '\color' differ in that the first is a
+command form, enclosing the text to be colored as an argument. Often
+this form is more convenient, or at least more explicit. The second
+form is a declaration, as in 'The moon is made of {\color{green} green}
+cheese', so it is in effect until the end of the current group or
+environment. This is sometimes useful when writing macros or as below
+where it colors everything inside the 'center' environment, including
+the vertical and horizontal lines.
+
+ \begin{center} \color{blue}
+ \begin{tabular}{l|r}
+ UL &UR \\ \hline
+ LL &LR
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+ You can use color in equations. A document might have this
+definition in the preamble
+
+ \definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0}
+
+and then contain this equation.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \int_a^b \textcolor{highlightcolor}{f'(x)}\,dx=f(b)-f(a)
+ \end{equation}
+
+ Typically the colors used in a document are declared in a class or
+style but sometimes you want a one-off. Those are the second forms in
+the synopses.
+
+ Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and
+ {\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team.
+
+ The format of COLOR SPECIFICATION depends on the color model (*note
+Color models::). For instance, while 'rgb' takes three numbers, 'gray'
+takes only one.
+
+ The selection was \textcolor[gray]{0.5}{grayed out}.
+
+ Colors inside colors do not combine. Thus
+
+ \textcolor{green}{kind of \textcolor{blue}{blue}}
+
+has a final word that is blue, not a combination of blue and green.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Colored boxes, Next: Colored pages, Prev: Colored text, Up: Commands for color
+
+21.3.3 Colored boxes
+--------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \colorbox{NAME}{...}
+ \colorbox[MODEL NAME]{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
+
+or
+
+ \fcolorbox{FRAME COLOR}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
+ \fcolorbox[MODEL NAME]{FRAME COLOR}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
+
+ Make a box with the stated background color. The '\fcolorbox'
+command puts a frame around the box. For instance this
+
+ Name:~\colorbox{cyan}{\makebox[5cm][l]{\strut}}
+
+makes a cyan-colored box that is five centimeters long and gets its
+depth and height from the '\strut' (so the depth is '-.3\baselineskip'
+and the height is '\baselineskip'). This puts white text on a blue
+background.
+
+ \colorbox{blue}{\textcolor{white}{Welcome to the machine.}}
+
+ The '\fcolorbox' commands use the same parameters as '\fbox' (*note
+\fbox & \framebox::), '\fboxrule' and '\fboxsep', to set the thickness
+of the rule and the boundary between the box interior and the
+surrounding rule. LaTeX's defaults are '0.4pt' and '3pt', respectively.
+
+ This example changes the thickness of the border to 0.8 points. Note
+that it is surrounded by curly braces so that the change ends at the end
+of the second line.
+
+ {\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}
+ \fcolorbox{black}{red}{Under no circumstances turn this knob.}}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Colored pages, Prev: Colored boxes, Up: Commands for color
+
+21.3.4 Colored pages
+--------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \pagecolor{NAME}
+ \pagecolor[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}
+ \nopagecolor
+
+ The first two set the background of the page, and all subsequent
+pages, to the color. For an explanation of the specification in the
+second form *note Colored text::. The third returns the background to
+normal, which is a transparent background. (If that is not supported
+use '\pagecolor{white}', although that will make a white background
+rather than the default transparent background.)
+
+ ...
+ \pagecolor{cyan}
+ ...
+ \nopagecolor
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Graphics, Next: Special insertions, Prev: Color, Up: Top
+
+22 Graphics
+***********
+
+You can use graphics such as PNG or PDF files in your LaTeX document.
+You need an additional package, which comes standard with LaTeX. This
+example is the short how-to.
+
+ \include{graphicx} % goes in the preamble
+ ...
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\linewidth]{plot.pdf}
+
+ To use the commands described here your document preamble must
+contain either '\usepackage{graphicx}' or '\usepackage{graphics}'. Most
+of the time, 'graphicx' is the better choice.
+
+ Graphics come in two main types, raster and vector. LaTeX can use
+both. In raster graphics the file contains an entry for each location
+in an array, describing what color it is. An example is a photograph,
+in JPG format. In vector graphics, the file contains a list of
+instructions such as 'draw a circle with this radius and that center'.
+An example is a line drawing produced by the Asymptote program, in PDF
+format. Generally vector graphics are more useful because you can
+rescale their size without pixelation or other problems, and because
+they often have a smaller size.
+
+ There are systems particularly well-suited to make graphics for a
+LaTeX document. For example, these allow you to use the same fonts as
+in your document. LaTeX comes with a 'picture' environment (*note
+picture::) that has simple capabilities. Besides that, there are other
+ways to include the graphic-making commands in the document. Two such
+systems are the PSTricks and TikZ packages. There are also systems
+external to LaTeX, that generate a graphic that you include using the
+commands of this chapter. Two that use a programming language are
+Asymptote and MetaPost. One that uses a graphical interface is Xfig.
+Full description of these systems is outside the scope of this document;
+see their documentation on CTAN.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Graphics package options:: Options when you load the package.
+* Graphics package configuration:: Where to look for files, which file types.
+* Commands for graphics:: The available commands.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Graphics package options, Next: Graphics package configuration, Up: Graphics
+
+22.1 'graphics' package options
+===============================
+
+Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
+
+ \usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{graphics}
+
+or
+
+ \usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{graphicx}
+
+ The 'graphicx' package has a format for optional arguments to the
+'\includegraphics' command that is convenient (it is the key-value
+format), so it is the better choice for new documents. When you load
+the 'graphics' or 'graphicx' package with '\usepackage' there are two
+kinds of available options.
+
+ The first is that LaTeX does not contain information about different
+output systems but instead depends on information stored in a "printer
+driver" file. Normally you should not specify the driver option in the
+document, and instead rely on your system's default. One advantage of
+this is that it makes the document portable across systems.
+
+ For completeness here is a list of the drivers. The currently
+relevant ones are: 'dvipdfmx', 'dvips', 'dvisvgm', 'luatex', 'pdftex',
+'xetex'. The two 'xdvi' and 'oztex' are essentially aliases for 'dvips'
+(and 'xdvi' is monochrome). Ones that should not be used for new
+systems are: 'dvipdf', 'dvipdfm', 'dviwin', 'dvipsone', 'emtex',
+'pctexps', 'pctexwin', 'pctexhp', 'pctex32', 'truetex', 'tcidvi', 'vtex'
+(and 'dviwindo' is an alias for 'dvipsone'). These are stored in files
+with a '.def' extension, such as 'pdftex.def'.
+
+ The second kind of options are below.
+
+'demo'
+ Instead of an image file, LaTeX puts in a 150 pt by 100 pt
+ rectangle (unless another size is specified in the
+ '\includegraphics' command).
+
+'draft'
+ For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead the file name is
+ printed in a box of the correct size. In order to determine the
+ size, the file must be present.
+
+'final'
+ (Default) Override any previous 'draft' option, so that the
+ document shows the contents of the graphic files.
+
+'hiderotate'
+ Do not show rotated text. (This allows for the possibility that a
+ previewer does not have the capability to rotate text.)
+
+'hidescale'
+ Do not show scaled text. (This allows for the possibility that a
+ previewer does not have the capability to scale.)
+
+'hiresbb'
+ In a PS or EPS file the graphic size may be specified in two ways.
+ The '%%BoundingBox' lines describe the graphic size using integer
+ multiples of a PostScript point, that is, integer multiples of 1/72
+ inch. A later addition to the PostScript language allows decimal
+ multiples, such as 1.23, in '%%HiResBoundingBox' lines. This
+ option has LaTeX to read the size from the latter.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Graphics package configuration, Next: Commands for graphics, Prev: Graphics package options, Up: Graphics
+
+22.2 'graphics' package configuration
+=====================================
+
+These commands configure the way LaTeX searches the file system for the
+graphic.
+
+ The behavior of file system search code is necessarily platform
+dependent. In this document we cover GNU/Linux, Macintosh, and Windows,
+as those systems are typically configured. For other situations consult
+the documentation in 'grfguide.pdf', or the LaTeX source, or your TeX
+distribution's documentation.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \graphicspath:: Directories to search.
+* \DeclareGraphicsExtensions:: File types, such as JPG or EPS.
+* \DeclareGraphicsRule:: How to handle file types.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \graphicspath, Next: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions, Up: Graphics package configuration
+
+22.2.1 '\graphicspath'
+----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \graphicspath{LIST OF DIR NAMES INSIDE CURLY BRACKETS}
+
+ Declare a list of directories to search for graphics files. This
+allows you to later say something like '\includegraphics{lion.png}'
+instead of having to give its path.
+
+ LaTeX always looks for graphic files first in the current directory.
+The declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory
+'pix', and then '../pix'.
+
+ \usepackage{graphicx} % or graphics; put in preamble
+ ...
+ \graphicspath{ {pix/} {../pix/} }
+
+ The '\graphicspath' declaration is optional. If you don't include it
+then LaTeX's default is to search all of the places that it usually
+looks for a file (it uses LaTeX's '\input@path'). In particular, in
+this case one of the places it looks is the current directory.
+
+ Enclose each directory name in curly braces; for example, above it
+says ''{pix}''. Do this even if there is only one directory. Each
+directory name must end in a forward slash, '/'. This is true even on
+Windows, where good practice is to use forward slashes for all the
+directory separators since it makes the document portable to other
+platforms. If you have spaces in your directory name then use double
+quotes, as with '{"my docs/"}'. Getting one of these rules wrong will
+cause LaTeX to report 'Error: File `FILENAME' not found'.
+
+ Basically, the algorithm is that with this example, after looking in
+the current directory,
+
+ \graphicspath{ {pix/} {../pix/} }
+ ...
+ \usepackage{lion.png}
+
+for each of the listed directories, LaTeX concatenates it with the file
+name and searches for the result, checking for 'pix/lion.png' and then
+'../pix/lion.png'. This algorithm means that the '\graphicspath'
+command does not recursively search subdirectories: if you issue
+'\graphicspath{{a/}}' and the graphic is in 'a/b/lion.png' then LaTeX
+will not find it. It also means that you can use absolute paths such as
+'\graphicspath{{/home/jim/logos/}}' or
+'\graphicspath{{C:/Users/Albert/Pictures/}}'. However, using these
+means that the document is not portable. (You could preserve
+portability by adjusting your TeX system settings configuration file
+parameter 'TEXINPUTS'; see the documentation of your system.)
+
+ You can use '\graphicspath' anywhere in the document. You can use it
+more than once. Show its value with
+'\makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput@path}\makeatother'.
+
+ The directories are taken with respect to the base file. That is,
+suppose that you are working on a document based on 'book/book.tex' and
+it contains '\include{chapters/chap1}'. If in 'chap1.tex' you put
+'\graphicspath{{plots/}}' then LaTeX will not search for graphics in
+'book/chapters/plots', but instead in 'book/plots'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions, Next: \DeclareGraphicsRule, Prev: \graphicspath, Up: Graphics package configuration
+
+22.2.2 '\DeclareGraphicsExtensions'
+-----------------------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{COMMA-SEPARATED LIST OF FILE EXTENSIONS}
+
+ Declare the filename extensions to try. This allows you to specify
+the order in which to choose graphic formats when you include graphic
+files by giving the filename without the extension, as in
+'\includegraphics{functionplot}'.
+
+ In this example, LaTeX will find files in the PNG format before PDF
+files.
+
+ \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.png,PNG,.pdf,.PDF}
+ ...
+ \includegraphics{lion} % will find lion.png before lion.pdf
+
+Because the file name 'lion' does not have a period, LaTeX uses the
+extension list. For each directory in the graphics path (*note
+\graphicspath::), LaTeX will try the extensions in the order given. If
+it does not find such a file after trying all the directories and
+extensions then it reports '! LaTeX Error: File `'lion'' not found'.
+Note that you must include the periods at the start of the extensions.
+
+ Because GNU/Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the
+list of file extensions is case sensitive on those platforms. The
+Windows platform is not case sensitive.
+
+ You are not required to include '\DeclareGraphicsExtensions' in your
+document; the printer driver has a sensible default. For example, the
+most recent 'pdftex.def' has this extension list.
+
+ .png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
+
+ You can use this command anywhere in the document. You can use it
+more than once. Show its value with
+'\makeatletter\typeout{\Gin@extensions}\makeatother'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \DeclareGraphicsRule, Prev: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions, Up: Graphics package configuration
+
+22.2.3 '\DeclareGraphicsRule'
+-----------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \DeclareGraphicsRule{EXTENSION}{TYPE}{SIZE-FILE EXTENSION}{COMMAND}
+
+ Declare how to handle graphic files whose names end in EXTENSION.
+
+ This example declares that all files with names have the form
+'filename-without-dot.mps' will be treated as output from MetaPost,
+meaning that the printer driver will use its MetaPost-handling code to
+input the file.
+
+ \DeclareGraphicsRule{.mps}{mps}{.mps}{}
+
+ This
+
+ \DeclareGraphicsRule{*}{mps}{*}{}
+
+tells LaTeX that it should handle as MetaPost output any file with an
+extension not covered by another rule, so it covers 'filename.1',
+'filename.2', etc.
+
+ This describes the four arguments.
+
+EXTENSION
+ The file extension to which this rule applies. The extension is
+ anything after and including the first dot in the filename. Use
+ the Kleene star, '*', to denote the default behaviour for all
+ undeclared extensions.
+
+TYPE
+ The type of file involved. This type is a string that must be
+ defined in the printer driver. For instance, files with extensions
+ '.ps', '.eps', or '.ps.gz' may all be classed as type 'eps'. All
+ files of the same type will be input with the same internal command
+ by the printer driver. For example, the file types that 'pdftex'
+ recognizes are: 'jpg', 'jbig2', 'mps', 'pdf', 'png', 'tif'.
+
+SIZE-FILE EXTENSION
+ The extension of the file to be read to determine the size of the
+ graphic, if there is such a file. It may be the same as EXTENSION
+ but it may be different.
+
+ As an example, consider a PostScript graphic. To make it smaller,
+ it might be compressed into a '.ps.gz' file. Compressed files are
+ not easily read by LaTeX so you can put the bounding box
+ information in a separate file. If SIZE-FILE EXTENSION is empty
+ then you must specify size information in the arguments of
+ '\includegraphics'.
+
+ If the driver file has a procedure for reading size files for
+ 'type' then that will be used, otherwise it will use the procedure
+ for reading '.eps' files. (Thus you may specify the size of bitmap
+ files in a file with a PostScript style '%%BoundingBox' line if no
+ other format is available.)
+
+COMMAND
+ A command that will be applied to the file. This is very often
+ left blank. This command must start with a single backward quote.
+ Thus, '\DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{`gunzip -c #1}'
+ specifies that any file with the extension '.eps.gz' should be
+ treated as an 'eps' file, with the BoundingBox information stored
+ in the file with extension '.eps.bb', and that the command 'gunzip
+ -c' will run on your platform to decompresses the file.
+
+ Such a command is specific to your platform. In addition, your TeX
+ system must allow you to run external commands; as a security
+ measure modern systems restrict running commands unless you
+ explicitly allow it. See the documentation for your TeX
+ distribution.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Commands for graphics, Prev: Graphics package configuration, Up: Graphics
+
+22.3 Commands for graphics
+==========================
+
+These are the commands available with the 'graphics' and 'graphicx'
+packages.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \includegraphics:: Using a graphic in your document.
+* \rotatebox:: Rotating boxes, including graphics.
+* \scalebox:: Scaling boxes, including graphics.
+* \resizebox:: Scaling boxes, including graphics, to a set size.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \includegraphics, Next: \rotatebox, Up: Commands for graphics
+
+22.3.1 '\includegraphics'
+-------------------------
+
+Synopses for 'graphics' package:
+
+ \includegraphics{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics[URX,URY]{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics[LLX,LLY][URX,URY]{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics*{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics*[URX,URY]{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics*[LLX,LLY][URX,URY]{FILENAME}
+
+ Synopses for 'graphicx' package:
+
+ \includegraphics{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics[KEY-VALUE LIST]{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics*{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics*[KEY-VALUE LIST]{FILENAME}
+
+ Include a graphics file. The starred form '\includegraphics*' will
+clip the graphic to the size specified, while for the unstarred form any
+part of the graphic that is outside the box of the specified size will
+over-print the surrounding area.
+
+ This
+
+ \usepackage{graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{plot.pdf}
+ \end{center}
+
+will incorporate into the document the graphic in 'plot.pdf', centered
+and at its nominal size. You can also give a path to the file, as with
+'\includegraphics{graphics/plot.pdf}'. To specify a list of locations
+to search for the file, *note \graphicspath::.
+
+ If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes. An
+example is '\includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}'.
+
+ The '\includegraphics{FILENAME}' command decides on the type of
+graphic by splitting FILENAME on the first dot. You can use FILENAME
+with no dot, as in '\includegraphics{turing}' and then LaTeX tries a
+sequence of extensions such as '.png' and '.pdf' until it finds a file
+with that extension (*note \DeclareGraphicsExtensions::).
+
+ If your file name contains dots before the extension then you can
+hide them with curly braces, as in
+'\includegraphics{{plot.2018.03.12.a}.pdf}'. Or, if you use the
+'graphicx' package then you can use the options 'type' and 'ext'; see
+below. This and other filename issues are also handled with the package
+'grffile'.
+
+ This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so LaTeX can move
+it to the next page if fitting it on the current page is awkward (*note
+figure::).
+
+ \begin{figure}
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=3cm]{lungxray.jpg}
+ \caption{The evidence is overwhelming: don't smoke.} \label{fig:xray}
+ \end{figure}
+
+ This places a graphic that will not float, so it is sure to appear at
+this point in the document even if makes LaTeX stretch the text or
+resort to blank areas on the page. It will be centered and will have a
+caption.
+
+ \usepackage{caption} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{pix/nix.png}
+ \captionof{figure}{The spirit of the night} \label{pix:nix} % optional
+ \end{center}
+
+ This example puts a box with a graphic side by side with one having
+text, with the two vertically centered.
+
+ \newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+ ...
+ \begin{center}
+ \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.4\textwidth]{plot}}
+ \hspace{1em}
+ \vcenteredhbox{\begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ f(x)=x\cdot \sin (1/x)
+ \end{displaymath}
+ \end{minipage}}
+ \end{center}
+
+ If you use the 'graphics' package then the only options involve the
+size of the graphic (but see *note \rotatebox:: and *note \scalebox::).
+When one optional argument is present then it is '[URX,URY]' and it
+gives the coordinates of the top right corner of the image, as a pair of
+TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::). If the units are omitted they
+default to 'bp'. In this case, the lower left corner of the image is
+assumed to be at (0,0). If two optional arguments are present then the
+leading one is '[LLX,LLY]', specifying the coordinates of the image's
+lower left. Thus, '\includegraphics[1in,0.618in]{...}' calls for the
+graphic to be placed so it is 1 inch wide and 0.618 inches tall and so
+its origin is at (0,0).
+
+ The 'graphicx' package gives you many more options. Specify them in
+a key-value form, as here.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \includegraphics[width=1in,angle=90]{lion}
+ \hspace{2em}
+ \includegraphics[angle=90,width=1in]{lion}
+ \end{center}
+
+The options are read left-to-right. So the first graphic above is made
+one inch wide and then rotated, while the second is rotated and then
+made one inch wide. Thus, unless the graphic is perfectly square, the
+two will end with different widths and heights.
+
+ There are many options. The primary ones are listed first.
+
+ Note that a graphic is placed by LaTeX into a box, which is
+traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the
+PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic's printed area may
+go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when LaTeX makes up a
+page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the
+graphic.
+
+'width'
+ The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this width. An
+ example is '\includegraphics[width=1in]{plot}'. You can use the
+ standard TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::) and also
+ convenient is '\linewidth', or in a two-column document,
+ '\columnwidth' (*note Page layout parameters::). An example is
+ that by using the 'calc' package you can make the graphic be 1 cm
+ narrow than the width of the text with
+ '\includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}'.
+
+'height'
+ The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height. You
+ can use the standard TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::), and
+ also convenient are '\pageheight' and '\textheight' (*note Page
+ layout parameters::). For instance, the command
+ '\includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]{godel}' will make the
+ graphic a quarter of the height of the text area.
+
+'totalheight'
+ The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus
+ depth. This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated.
+ For instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero
+ height but a large depth.
+
+'keepaspectratio'
+ If set to 'true', or just specified as here
+
+ \includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...}
+
+ and you give as options both 'width' and 'height' (or
+ 'totalheight'), then LaTeX will make the graphic is as large as
+ possible without distortion. That is, LaTeX will ensure that
+ neither is the graphic wider than 'width' nor taller than 'height'
+ (or 'totalheight').
+
+'scale'
+ Factor by which to scale the graphic. To make a graphic twice its
+ nominal size, enter '\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}'. This
+ number may be any value; a number between 1 and 0 will shrink the
+ graphic and a negative number will reflect it.
+
+'angle'
+ Rotate the graphic. The angle is taken in degrees and
+ counterclockwise. The graphic is rotated about its 'origin'; see
+ that option. For a complete description of how rotated material is
+ typeset, *note \rotatebox::.
+
+'origin'
+ The point of the graphic about which the rotation happens.
+ Possible values are any string containing one or two of: 'l' for
+ left, 'r' for right, 'b' for bottom, 'c' for center, 't' for top,
+ and 'B' for baseline. Thus, entering the command
+ '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}' will turn the picture
+ upside down about that picture's center, while the command
+ '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}' will turn its
+ picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character 'c'
+ gives the horizontal center in 'bc' or 'tc', but gives the vertical
+ center in 'lc' or 'rc'.) The default is 'lB'.
+
+ To rotate about an arbitrary point, *note \rotatebox::.
+
+ These are lesser-used options.
+
+'viewport'
+ Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show. Takes four arguments,
+ separated by spaces and given in TeX dimensions, as with
+ '\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}'. The
+ dimensions default to big points, 'bp'. They are taken relative to
+ the origin specified by the bounding box. See also the 'trim'
+ option.
+
+'trim'
+ Gives parts of the graphic to not show. Takes four arguments,
+ separated by spaces, that are given in TeX dimensions, as with
+ '\includegraphics[.., trim= 0in 0.1in 0.2in 0.3in, ...]{...}'.
+ These give the amounts of the graphic not to show, that is, LaTeX
+ will crop the picture by 0 inches on the left, 0.1 inches on the
+ bottom, 0.2 inches on the right, and 0.3 inches on the top. See
+ also the 'viewport' option.
+
+'clip'
+ If set to 'true', or just specified as here
+
+ \includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...}
+
+ then the graphic is cropped to the bounding box. This is the same
+ as using the starred form of the command,
+ '\includegraphics*[...]{...}'.
+
+'page'
+ Give the page number of a multi-page PDF file. The default is
+ 'page=1'.
+
+'pagebox'
+ Specifies which bounding box to use for PDF files from among
+ 'mediabox', 'cropbox', 'bleedbox', 'trimbox', or 'artbox'. PDF
+ files do not have the BoundingBox that PostScript files have, but
+ may specify up to four predefined rectangles. The MediaBox gives
+ the boundaries of the physical medium. The CropBox is the region
+ to which the contents of the page are to be clipped when displayed.
+ The BleedBox is the region to which the contents of the page should
+ be clipped in production. The TrimBox is the intended dimensions
+ of the finished page. The ArtBox is the extent of the page's
+ meaningful content. The driver will set the image size based on
+ CropBox if present, otherwise it will not use one of the others,
+ with a driver-defined order of preference. MediaBox is always
+ present.
+
+'interpolate'
+ Enable or disable interpolation of raster images by the viewer.
+ Can be set with 'interpolate=true' or just specified as here.
+
+ \includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}
+
+'quiet'
+ Do not write information to the log. You can set it with
+ 'quiet=true' or just specified it with
+ '\includegraphics[...,quite,...]{...}',
+
+'draft'
+ If you set it with 'draft=true' or just specify it with
+
+ \includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...}
+
+ then the graphic will not appear in the document, possibly saving
+ color printer ink. Instead, LaTeX will put an empty box of the
+ correct size with the filename printed in it.
+
+ These options address the bounding box for Encapsulated PostScript
+graphic files, which have a size specified with a line '%%BoundingBox'
+that appears in the file. It has four values, giving the lower x
+coordinate, lower y coordinate, upper x coordinate, and upper y
+coordinate. The units are PostScript points, equivalent to TeX's big
+points, 1/72 inch. For example, if an '.eps' file has the line
+'%%BoundingBox 10 20 40 80' then its natural size is 30/72 inch wide by
+60/72 inch tall.
+
+'bb'
+ Specify the bounding box of the displayed region. The argument is
+ four dimensions separated by spaces, as with '\includegraphics[..,
+ bb= 0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}'. Usually '\includegraphics' reads
+ the BoundingBox numbers from the EPS file automatically, so this
+ option is only useful if the bounding box is missing from that file
+ or if you want to change it.
+
+'bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury'
+ Set the bounding box. These four are obsolete, but are retained
+ for compatibility with old packages.
+
+'natwidth, natheight'
+ An alternative for 'bb'. Setting
+
+ \includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...}
+
+ is the same as setting 'bb=0 0 1in 0.618in'.
+
+'hiresbb'
+ If set to 'true', or just specified as with
+
+ \includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...}
+
+ then LaTeX will look for '%%HiResBoundingBox' lines instead of
+ '%%BoundingBox' lines. (The 'BoundingBox' lines use only natural
+ numbers while the 'HiResBoundingBox' lines use decimals; both use
+ units equivalent to TeX's big points, 1/72 inch.) To override a
+ prior setting of 'true', you can set it to 'false'.
+
+ These following options allow a user to override LaTeX's method of
+choosing the graphic type based on the filename extension. An example
+is that '\includegraphics[type=png,ext=.xxx,read=.xxx]{lion}' will read
+the file 'lion.xxx' as though it were 'lion.png'. For more on these,
+*note \DeclareGraphicsRule::.
+
+'type'
+ Specify the graphics type.
+
+'ext'
+ Specify the graphics extension. Only use this in conjunction with
+ the option 'type'.
+
+'read'
+ Specify the file extension of the read file. Only use this in
+ conjunction with the option 'type'.
+
+'command'
+ Specify a command to be applied to this file. Only use this in
+ conjunction with the option 'type'. *Note Command line options::
+ for a discussion of enabling the '\write18' functionality to run
+ external commands.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \rotatebox, Next: \scalebox, Prev: \includegraphics, Up: Commands for graphics
+
+22.3.2 '\rotatebox'
+-------------------
+
+Synopsis if you use the 'graphics' package:
+
+ \rotatebox{ANGLE}{MATERIAL}
+
+ Synopses if you use the 'graphicx' package:
+
+ \rotatebox{ANGLE}{MATERIAL}
+ \rotatebox[KEY-VALUE LIST]{ANGLE}{MATERIAL}
+
+ Put MATERIAL in a box and rotate it ANGLE degrees counterclockwise.
+
+ This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \rotatebox{45}{Character} &\rotatebox{45}{NATO phonetic} \\
+ A &AL-FAH \\
+ B &BRAH-VOH
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ The MATERIAL can be anything that goes in a box, including a graphic.
+
+ \rotatebox[origin=c]{45}{\includegraphics[width=1in]{lion}}
+
+ To place the rotated material, the first step is that LaTeX sets
+MATERIAL in a box, with a reference point on the left baseline. The
+second step is the rotation, by default about the reference point. The
+third step is that LaTeX computes a box to bound the rotated material.
+Fourth, LaTeX moves this box horizontally so that the left edge of this
+new bounding box coincides with the left edge of the box from the first
+step (they need not coincide vertically). This new bounding box, in its
+new position, is what LaTeX uses as the box when typesetting this
+material.
+
+ If you use the 'graphics' package then the rotation is about the
+reference point of the box. If you use the 'graphicx' package then
+these are the options that can go in the KEY-VALUE LIST, but note that
+you can get the same effect without needing this package, except for the
+'x' and 'y' options (*note \includegraphics::).
+
+'origin'
+ The point of the MATERIAL's box about which the rotation happens.
+ Possible value is any string containing one or two of: 'l' for
+ left, 'r' for right, 'b' for bottom, 'c' for center, 't' for top,
+ and 'B' for baseline. Thus, the first line here
+
+ \rotatebox[origin=c]{180}{moon}
+ \rotatebox[origin=lB]{180}{LeBateau}
+
+ will turn the picture upside down from the center while the second
+ will turn its picture upside down about its left baseline. (The
+ character 'c' gives the horizontal center in 'bc' or 'tc' but gives
+ the vertical center in 'lc' or 'rc', and gives both in 'c'.) The
+ default is 'lB'.
+
+'x, y'
+ Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with '\rotatebox[x=TeX
+ DIMENSION,y=TeX DIMENSION]{...}' (*note Units of length::). These
+ give the offset from the box's reference point.
+
+'units'
+ This key allows you to change the default of degrees
+ counterclockwise. Setting 'units=-360' changes the direction to
+ degrees clockwise and setting 'units=6.283185' changes to radians
+ counterclockwise.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \scalebox, Next: \resizebox, Prev: \rotatebox, Up: Commands for graphics
+
+22.3.3 '\scalebox'
+------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \scalebox{HORIZONTAL FACTOR}{MATERIAL}
+ \scalebox{HORIZONTAL FACTOR}[VERTICAL FACTOR]{MATERIAL}
+ \reflectbox{MATERIAL}
+
+ Scale the MATERIAL.
+
+ This example halves the size, both horizontally and vertically, of
+the first text and doubles the size of the second.
+
+ \scalebox{0.5}{DRINK ME} and \scalebox{2.0}{Eat Me}
+
+ If you do not specify the optional VERTICAL FACTOR then it defaults
+to the same value as the HORIZONTAL FACTOR.
+
+ You can use this command to resize a graphic, as here.
+
+ \scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}
+
+If you use the 'graphicx' package then you can accomplish the same thing
+with optional arguments to '\includegraphics' (*note
+\includegraphics::).
+
+ The '\reflectbox' command abbreviates '\scalebox{-1}[1]{MATERIAL}'.
+Thus, 'Able was I\reflectbox{Able was I}' will show the phrase 'Able was
+I' immediately followed by its mirror reflection.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \resizebox, Prev: \scalebox, Up: Commands for graphics
+
+22.3.4 '\resizebox'
+-------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \resizebox{HORIZONTAL LENGTH}{VERTICAL LENGTH}{MATERIAL}
+ \resizebox*{HORIZONTAL LENGTH}{VERTICAL LENGTH}{MATERIAL}
+
+ Given a size, such as '3cm', transform MATERIAL to make it that size.
+If either HORIZONTAL LENGTH or VERTICAL LENGTH is an exclamation
+point '!' then the other argument is used to determine a scale factor
+for both directions.
+
+ This example makes the graphic be a half inch wide and scales it
+vertically by the same factor to keep it from being distorted.
+
+ \resizebox{0.5in}{!}{\includegraphics{lion}}
+
+ The unstarred form '\resizebox' takes VERTICAL LENGTH to be the box's
+height while the starred form '\resizebox*' takes it to be height+depth.
+For instance, make the text have a height+depth of a quarter inch with
+'\resizebox*{!}{0.25in}{\parbox{1in}{This box has both height and
+depth.}}'.
+
+ You can use '\depth', '\height', '\totalheight', and '\width' to
+refer to the original size of the box. Thus, make the text two inches
+wide but keep the original height with '\resizebox{2in}{\height}{Two
+inches}'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Special insertions, Next: Splitting the input, Prev: Graphics, Up: Top
+
+23 Special insertions
+*********************
+
+LaTeX provides commands for inserting characters that have a special
+meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Reserved characters:: Inserting '# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \'
+* Upper and lower case:: Make text upper or lower case.
+* Symbols by font position:: Inserting font symbols by number.
+* Text symbols:: Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
+* Accents:: Inserting accents.
+* Additional Latin letters:: Inserting other non-English characters.
+* \rule:: Inserting lines and rectangles.
+* \today:: Inserting today's date.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Reserved characters, Next: Upper and lower case, Up: Special insertions
+
+23.1 Reserved characters
+========================
+
+LaTeX sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For
+example, the percent sign '%' is for comments. They are called
+"reserved characters" or "special characters".
+
+ # $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \
+
+ If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
+body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
+put a backslash '\' in front of the character. Thus, typing '\$1.23'
+will produce '$1.23' in your output.
+
+ As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
+use '\~{}' (omitting the curly braces would result in the next character
+receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text body font
+circumflex use '\^{}'. To get a backslash in the font of the text body,
+enter '\textbackslash{}'.
+
+ To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use '\verb!!'
+as below (the double backslash '\\' is only there to split the lines).
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
+ \verb!# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \!
+ \end{center}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Upper and lower case, Next: Symbols by font position, Prev: Reserved characters, Up: Special insertions
+
+23.2 Upper and lower case
+=========================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \uppercase{TEXT}
+ \lowercase{TEXT}
+ \MakeUppercase{TEXT}
+ \MakeLowercase{TEXT}
+
+ Change the case of characters. The TeX primitives commands
+'\uppercase' and '\lowercase' only work for American characters. The
+LaTeX commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowercase' commands also
+change characters accessed by commands such as '\ae' or '\aa'. The
+commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowercase' are robust but they have
+moving arguments (*note \protect::).
+
+ These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of
+a command within TEXT. But they do change the case of every other Latin
+letter inside the argument TEXT. Thus, '\MakeUppercase{Let $y=f(x)$'}
+produces 'LET Y=F(X)'. Another example is that the name of an
+environment will be changed, so that '\MakeUppercase{\begin{tabular} ...
+\end{tabular}}' will produce an error because the first half is changed
+to '\begin{TABULAR}'.
+
+ LaTeX uses the same fixed table for changing case throughout a
+document, The table used is designed for the font encoding T1; this
+works well with the standard TeX fonts for all Latin alphabets but will
+cause problems when using other alphabets.
+
+ To change the case of text that results from a macro inside TEXT you
+need to do expansion. Here the '\Schoolname' produces 'COLLEGE OF
+MATHEMATICS'.
+
+ \newcommand{\schoolname}{College of Mathematics}
+ \newcommand{\Schoolname}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase
+ \expandafter{\schoolname}}
+
+ The 'textcase' package brings some of the missing feature of the
+standard LaTeX commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowerCase'.
+
+ To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package
+'mfirstuc'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Symbols by font position, Next: Text symbols, Prev: Upper and lower case, Up: Special insertions
+
+23.3 Symbols by font position
+=============================
+
+You can access any character of the current font using its number with
+the '\symbol' command. For example, the visible space character used in
+the '\verb*' command has the code decimal 32, so it can be typed as
+'\symbol{32}'.
+
+ You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a ''' prefix,
+or hexadecimal (base 16) with a '"' prefix, so the previous example
+could also be written as '\symbol{'40}' or '\symbol{"20}'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Text symbols, Next: Accents, Prev: Symbols by font position, Up: Special insertions
+
+23.4 Text symbols
+=================
+
+LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
+running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not
+available in OT1. Unless you are using XeLaTeX or LuaLaTeX then you may
+need to load the 'textcomp' package.
+
+'\copyright'
+'\textcopyright'
+ (C) The copyright symbol.
+
+'\dag'
+ U+2020 The dagger symbol (in text).
+
+'\ddag'
+ U+2021 The double dagger symbol (in text).
+
+'\LaTeX'
+ The LaTeX logo.
+
+'\LaTeXe'
+ The LaTeX2e logo.
+
+'\guillemotleft (<<)'
+'\guillemotright (>>)'
+'\guilsinglleft (<)'
+'\guilsinglright (>)'
+ <<, >>, <, > Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used
+ in French.
+
+'\ldots'
+'\dots'
+'\textellipsis'
+ ... An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): '\ldots' and '\dots'
+ also work in math mode.
+
+'\lq'
+ ' Left (opening) quote.
+
+'\P'
+'\textparagraph'
+ U+00B6 Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
+
+'\pounds'
+'\textsterling'
+ # English pounds sterling.
+
+'\quotedblbase (,,)'
+'\quotesinglbase (,)'
+ ,, and , Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.
+
+'\rq'
+ ' Right (closing) quote.
+
+'\S'
+'\textsection'
+ U+00A7 Section sign.
+
+'\TeX'
+ The TeX logo.
+
+'\textasciicircum'
+ ^ ASCII circumflex.
+
+'\textasciitilde'
+ ~ ASCII tilde.
+
+'\textasteriskcentered'
+ * Centered asterisk.
+
+'\textbackslash'
+ \ Backslash.
+
+'\textbar'
+ | Vertical bar.
+
+'\textbardbl'
+ U+23F8 Double vertical bar.
+
+'\textbigcircle'
+ U+25EF Big circle symbol.
+
+'\textbraceleft'
+ { Left brace.
+
+'\textbraceright'
+ } Right brace.
+
+'\textbullet'
+ * Bullet.
+
+'\textcircled{LETTER}'
+ U+24B6 Circle around LETTER.
+
+'\textcompwordmark'
+'\textcapitalcompwordmark'
+'\textascendercompwordmark'
+ Used to separate letters that would normally ligature. For
+ example, 'f\textcompwordmark i' produces 'fi' without a ligature.
+ This is most useful in non-English languages. The
+ '\textcapitalcompwordmark' form has the cap height of the font
+ while the '\textascendercompwordmark' form has the ascender height.
+
+'\textdagger'
+ U+2020 Dagger.
+
+'\textdaggerdbl'
+ U+2021 Double dagger.
+
+'\textdollar (or '\$')'
+ $ Dollar sign.
+
+'\textemdash (or '---')'
+ -- Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in 'The playoffs --- if you
+ are fortunate enough to make the playoffs --- is more like a
+ sprint.').
+
+'\textendash (or '--')'
+ - En-dash (used for ranges, as in 'See pages 12--14').
+
+'\texteuro'
+
+ The Euro symbol: Euro. For an alternative glyph design, try the
+ 'eurosym' package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own
+ Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC).
+
+'\textexclamdown (or '!`')'
+ ! Upside down exclamation point.
+
+'\textgreater'
+ > Greater than symbol.
+
+'\textless'
+ < Less than symbol.
+
+'\textleftarrow'
+ U+2190 Left arrow.
+
+'\textordfeminine'
+'\textordmasculine'
+ a, o Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols.
+
+'\textperiodcentered'
+ U+00B7 Centered period.
+
+'\textquestiondown (or '?`')'
+ ? Upside down question mark.
+
+'\textquotedblleft (or '``')'
+ " Double left quote.
+
+'\textquotedblright (or '''')'
+ " Double right quote.
+
+'\textquoteleft (or '`')'
+ ' Single left quote.
+
+'\textquoteright (or ''')'
+ ' Single right quote.
+
+'\textquotesingle'
+ U+0027 Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)
+
+'\textquotestraightbase'
+'\textquotestraightdblbase'
+ Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
+
+'\textregistered'
+ (R) Registered symbol.
+
+'\textrightarrow'
+ U+2192 Right arrow.
+
+'\textthreequartersemdash'
+ U+FE58 "Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+
+'\texttrademark'
+ U+2122 Trademark symbol.
+
+'\texttwelveudash'
+ U+FE58 "Two-thirds" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+
+'\textunderscore'
+ _ Underscore.
+
+'\textvisiblespace'
+ U+2423 Visible space symbol.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Accents, Next: Additional Latin letters, Prev: Text symbols, Up: Special insertions
+
+23.5 Accents
+============
+
+LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages,
+through the 'babel' package and related support if you are using
+pdfLaTeX, or 'polyglossia' if you are using XeLaTeX or LuaLaTeX. This
+section does not cover that support. It only lists the core LaTeX
+commands for creating accented characters. The '\capital...' commands
+shown here produce alternative forms for use with capital letters.
+These are not available with OT1.
+
+ Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated
+with lowercase 'o'.
+
+ Note that '\i' produces a dotless i, and '\j' produces a dotless j.
+These are often used in place of their dotted counterparts when they are
+accented.
+
+'\"'
+'\capitaldieresis'
+ o" Umlaut (dieresis).
+
+'\''
+'\capitalacute'
+ o' Acute accent.
+
+'\.'
+ o. Dot accent.
+
+'\='
+'\capitalmacron'
+ o= Macron (overbar) accent.
+
+'\^'
+'\capitalcircumflex'
+ o^ Circumflex (hat) accent.
+
+'\`'
+'\capitalgrave'
+ o` Grave accent.
+
+'\~'
+'\capitaltilde'
+ n~ Tilde accent.
+
+'\b'
+ o_ Bar accent underneath.
+
+ Related to this, '\underbar{TEXT}' produces a bar under TEXT. The
+ argument is always processed in LR mode (*note Modes::). The bar
+ is always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing
+ through descenders. See also '\underline' in *note Math
+ miscellany::.
+
+'\c'
+'\capitalcedilla'
+ c, Cedilla accent underneath.
+
+'\d'
+'\capitaldotaccent'
+ .o Dot accent underneath.
+
+'\H'
+'\capitalhungarumlaut'
+ o'' Long Hungarian umlaut accent.
+
+'\k'
+'\capitalogonek'
+ o; Ogonek. Not available in the OT1 encoding.
+
+'\r'
+'\capitalring'
+ o* Ring accent.
+
+'\t'
+'\capitaltie'
+'\newtie'
+'\capitalnewtie'
+ oo[ Tie-after accent. The '\newtie' form is centered in its box.
+
+'\u'
+'\capitalbreve'
+ o( Breve accent.
+
+'\v'
+'\capitalcaron'
+ o< Ha'c<ek (check, caron) accent.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Additional Latin letters, Next: \rule, Prev: Accents, Up: Special insertions
+
+23.6 Additional Latin letters
+=============================
+
+Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting letters beyond A-Z that
+extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other than
+English.
+
+'\aa'
+'\AA'
+ aa and AA.
+
+'\ae'
+'\AE'
+ ae and AE.
+
+'\dh'
+'\DH'
+ Icelandic letter eth: d and D. Not available with OT1 encoding, you
+ need the 'fontenc' package to select an alternate font encoding,
+ such as T1.
+
+'\dj'
+'\DJ'
+ Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke.
+ Not available with OT1 encoding, you need the 'fontenc' package to
+ select an alternate font encoding, such as T1.
+
+'\ij'
+'\IJ'
+ ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here).
+
+'\l'
+'\L'
+ /l and /L.
+
+'\ng'
+'\NG'
+ Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics.
+
+'\o'
+'\O'
+ /o and /O.
+
+'\oe'
+'\OE'
+ oe and OE.
+
+'\ss'
+'\SS'
+ ss and SS.
+
+'\th'
+'\TH'
+ Icelandic letter thorn: th and TH. Not available with OT1 encoding,
+ you need the 'fontenc' package to select an alternate font
+ encoding, such as T1.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \rule, Next: \today, Prev: Additional Latin letters, Up: Special insertions
+
+23.7 '\rule'
+============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \rule{WIDTH}{THICKNESS}
+ \rule[RAISE]{WIDTH}{THICKNESS}
+
+ Produce a "rule", a filled-in rectangle.
+
+ This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol,
+often used to mark the end of a proof.
+
+ \newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}}
+
+The 'amsthm' package includes this command, with a somewhat
+different-looking symbol.
+
+ The mandatory arguments give the horizontal WIDTH and vertical
+THICKNESS of the rectangle. They are rigid lengths (*note Lengths::).
+The optional argument RAISE is also a rigid length, and tells LaTeX how
+much to raise the rule above the baseline, or lower it if the length is
+negative.
+
+ This produces a line, a rectangle that is wide but not tall.
+
+ \noindent\rule{\textwidth}{0.4pt}
+
+The line is the width of the page and 0.4 points tall. This line
+thickness is common in LaTeX.
+
+ A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in
+the output, but can cause LaTeX to change the output around it. *Note
+\strut:: for examples.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \today, Prev: \rule, Up: Special insertions
+
+23.8 '\today'
+=============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \today
+
+ Produce today's date in the format 'MONTH DD, YYYY'. An example of a
+date in that format is 'July 4, 1976'.
+
+ Multilingual packages such as 'babel' or 'polyglossia', or classes
+such as 'lettre', will localize '\today'. For example, the following
+will output '4 juillet 1976':
+
+ \year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
+ \documentclass{minimal}
+ \usepackage[french]{babel}
+ \begin{document}
+ \today
+ \end{document}
+
+'\today' uses the counters '\day', '\month', and '\year' (*note \day &
+\month & \year::).
+
+ A number of package on CTAN work with dates. One is 'datetime'
+package which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO
+standards.
+
+ The date is not updated as the LaTeX process runs, so in principle
+the date could be incorrect by the time the program finishes.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Splitting the input, Next: Front/back matter, Prev: Special insertions, Up: Top
+
+24 Splitting the input
+**********************
+
+LaTeX lets you split a large document into several smaller ones. This
+can simplify editing or allow multiple authors to work on the document.
+It can also speed processing.
+
+ Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is always one
+"root file", on which LaTeX compilation starts. This shows such a file
+with five included files.
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \includeonly{ % comment out lines below to omit compiling
+ pref,
+ chap1,
+ chap2,
+ append,
+ bib
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ \frontmatter
+ \include{pref}
+ \mainmatter
+ \include{chap1}
+ \include{chap2}
+ \appendix
+ \include{append}
+ \backmatter
+ \include{bib}
+ \end{document}
+
+This will bring in material from 'pref.tex', 'chap1.tex', 'chap2.tex',
+'append.tex', and 'bib.tex'. If you compile this file, and then comment
+out all of the lines inside '\includeonly{...}' except for 'chap1,' and
+compile again, then LaTeX will only process the material in the first
+chapter. Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to
+print. However, the advantage of the '\includeonly' command is that
+LaTeX will retain the page numbers and all of the cross reference
+information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in
+your output correctly.
+
+ *Note Larger book template:: for another example of '\includeonly'.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \endinput:: Stop including material from a file.
+* \include & \includeonly:: Conditionally include files.
+* \input:: Unconditionally include a file.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \endinput, Next: \include & \includeonly, Up: Splitting the input
+
+24.1 '\endinput'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \endinput
+
+ When you '\include{filename}', inside 'filename.tex' the material
+after '\endinput' will not be included. This command is optional; if
+'filename.tex' has no '\endinput' then LaTeX will read all of the file.
+
+ For example, suppose that a document's root file has '\input{chap1}'
+and this is 'chap1.tex'.
+
+ \chapter{One}
+ This material will appear in the document.
+ \endinput
+ This will not appear.
+
+ This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end
+of a file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during
+mailing. It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize
+errors is to put '\endinput' halfway through the included file and see
+if the error disappears. Now, knowing which half contains the error,
+moving '\endinput' to halfway through that area further narrows down the
+location. This process rapidly finds the offending line.
+
+ After reading '\endinput', LaTeX continues to read to the end of the
+line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless.
+This allows you, for instance, to close an '\if...' with a '\fi'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \include & \includeonly, Next: \input, Prev: \endinput, Up: Splitting the input
+
+24.2 '\include' & '\includeonly'
+================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \includeonly{ % in document preamble
+ ...
+ FILENAME,
+ ...
+ }
+ ...
+ \include{FILENAME} % in document body
+
+ Bring material from the external file 'FILENAME.tex' into a LaTeX
+document.
+
+ The '\include' command does three things: it executes '\clearpage'
+(*note \clearpage & \cleardoublepage::), then it inputs the material
+from 'FILENAME.tex' into the document, and then it does another
+'\clearpage'. This command can only appear in the document body. The
+'\includeonly' command controls which files will be read by LaTeX under
+subsequent '\include' commands. Its list of filenames is
+comma-separated, and it can only appear in the preamble.
+
+ This example root document, 'constitution.tex', brings in three
+files, 'preamble.tex', 'articles.tex', and 'amendments.tex'.
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \includeonly{
+ preamble,
+ articles,
+ amendments
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ \include{preamble}
+ \include{articles}
+ \include{amendments}
+ \end{document}
+
+The file 'preamble.tex' contains no special code; you have just
+excerpted the chapter from 'consitution.tex' and put it in a separate
+file just for editing convenience.
+
+ \chapter{Preamble}
+ We the People of the United States,
+ in Order to form a more perfect Union, ...
+
+Running LaTeX on 'constitution.tex' makes the material from the three
+files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary files
+'preamble.aux', 'articles.aux', and 'amendments.tex'. These contain
+information such as page numbers and cross-references (*note Cross
+references::). If you now comment out '\includeonly''s lines with
+'preamble' and 'amendments' and run LaTeX again then the resulting
+document shows only the material from 'articles.tex', not the material
+from 'preamble.tex' or 'amendments.tex'. Nonetheless, all of the
+auxiliary information from the omitted files is still there, including
+the starting page number of the chapter.
+
+ If the document preamble does not have '\includeonly' then LaTeX will
+include all the files you call for with '\include' commands.
+
+ The '\include' command makes a new page. To avoid that, see *note
+\input:: (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary information).
+
+ *Note Larger book template:: for another example using '\include' and
+'\includeonly'. That example also uses '\input' for some material that
+will not necessarily start on a new page.
+
+ File names can involve paths.
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \includeonly{
+ chapters/chap1,
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ \include{chapters/chap1}
+ \end{document}
+
+ To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name 'amo amas amat', this
+works under TeX Live on GNU/Linux:
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \includeonly{
+ "amo\space amas\space amat"
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ \include{"amo\space amas\space amat"}
+ \end{document}
+
+ and this works under MiKTeX on Windows:
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \includeonly{
+ {"amo amas amat"}
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ \include{{"amo amas amat"}}
+ \end{document}
+
+ You cannot use '\include' inside a file that is being included or you
+get 'LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested.' The '\include' command
+cannot appear in the document preamble; you will get 'LaTeX Error:
+Missing \begin{document}'.
+
+ If a file that you '\include' does not exist, for instance if you
+'\include{athiesm}' but you meant '\include{atheism}', then LaTeX does
+not give you an error but will warn you 'No file athiesm.tex.' (It will
+also create 'athiesm.aux'.)
+
+ If you '\include' the root file in itself then you first get 'LaTeX
+Error: Can be used only in preamble.' Later runs get 'TeX capacity
+exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]'. To fix this, you must remove
+the inclusion '\include{root}' but also delete the file 'ROOT.aux' and
+rerun LaTeX.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \input, Prev: \include & \includeonly, Up: Splitting the input
+
+24.3 '\input'
+=============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \input{FILENAME}
+
+ LaTeX processes the file as if its contents were inserted in the
+current file. For a more sophisticated inclusion mechanism see *note
+\include & \includeonly::.
+
+ If FILENAME does not end in '.tex' then LaTeX first tries the
+filename with that extension; this is the usual case. If FILENAME ends
+with '.tex' then LaTeX looks for the filename as it is.
+
+ For example, this
+
+ \input{macros}
+
+will cause LaTeX to first look for 'macros.tex'. If it finds that file
+then it processes its contents as thought they had been copy-pasted in.
+If there is no file of the name 'macros.tex' then LaTeX tries the name
+'macros', without an extension. (This may vary by distribution.)
+
+ To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name 'amo amas amat', this
+works under TeX Live on GNU/Linux:
+
+ \input{"amo\space amas\space amat"}
+
+ and this works under MiKTeX on Windows:
+
+ \input{{"amo amas amat"}}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Front/back matter, Next: Letters, Prev: Splitting the input, Up: Top
+
+25 Front/back matter
+********************
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Table of contents etc.:: Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables.
+* Indexes:: Generate an index.
+* Glossaries:: Generate a glossary.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Table of contents etc., Next: Indexes, Up: Front/back matter
+
+25.1 Table of contents etc.
+===========================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \tableofcontents
+ \listoffigures
+ \listoftables
+
+ Produce a table of contents, or list of figures, or list of tables.
+Put the command in the input file where you want the table or list to
+go. You do not type the entries; for example, typically the table of
+contents entries are automatically generated from the sectioning
+commands '\chapter', etc.
+
+ This example illustrates the first command, '\tableofcontents'.
+LaTeX will produce a table of contents on the book's first page.
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ % \setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
+ \begin{document}
+ \tableofcontents\newpage
+ ...
+ \chapter{...}
+ ...
+ \section{...}
+ ...
+ \subsection{...}
+ ...
+ \end{document}
+
+Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter
+and section listings but not subsection listings, because the '\section'
+command has level 1. *Note Sectioning:: for level numbers of the
+sectioning units. For more on the 'tocdepth' *note
+Sectioning/tocdepth::.
+
+ Another example of the use of '\tableofcontents' is in *note Larger
+book template::.
+
+ If you want a page break after the table of contents, write a
+'\newpage' command after the '\tableofcontents' command, as above.
+
+ To make the table of contents LaTeX stores the information in an
+auxiliary file named 'ROOT-FILE.toc' (*note Splitting the input::). For
+example, this LaTeX file 'test.tex'
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \begin{document}
+ \tableofcontents\newpage
+ \section{First section}
+ \subsection{First subsection}
+ ...
+
+writes the following line to 'test.toc'.
+
+ \contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}First section}{2}
+ \contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}First subsection}{2}
+
+The 'section' or 'subsection' is the sectioning unit. The hook
+'\numberline' lets you to change how the information appears in the
+table of contents. Of its two arguments, '1' or '1.1' is the sectioning
+unit number and 'First section' or 'First subsection' is the title.
+Finally, '2' is the page number on which the sectioning units start.
+
+ One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to
+get the contents page correct you must run LaTeX twice, once to store
+the information and once to get it. In particular, the first time that
+you run LaTeX on a new document, the table of contents page will be
+empty except for its 'Contents' header. Just run it again.
+
+ The commands '\listoffigures' and '\listoftables' produce a list of
+figures and a list of tables. They work the same way as the contents
+commands; for instance, these work with information stored in '.lof' and
+'.lot' files.
+
+ To change the header for the table of contents page do something like
+the first line here.
+
+ \renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents}
+ \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots}
+ \renewcommand{\listtablename}{Tables}
+
+Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two.
+Internationalization packages such as 'babel' or 'polyglossia' will
+change the headers depending on the chosen base language.
+
+ CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures
+and tables. One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the
+default, such as spacing, is 'tocloft'. And, 'tocbibbind' will
+automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to the table of
+contents.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \addcontentsline:: Add an entry to table of contents, etc.
+* \addtocontents:: Add text directly to table of contents file, etc.
+* \nofiles:: Prevent writing to auxiliary files.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \addcontentsline, Next: \addtocontents, Up: Table of contents etc.
+
+25.1.1 '\addcontentsline'
+-------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}
+
+ Add an entry to the file specified by EXT. Usually EXT is one of
+'toc' for the table of contents, 'lof' for the list of figures, or 'lot'
+for the list of tables.
+
+ The following will result in an 'Appendices' line in the table of
+contents.
+
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+
+It will appear at the same indentation level as the sections, will be in
+boldface, and will be assigned the page number associated with the point
+where it appears in the input file.
+
+ The '\addcontentsline' command writes information to the file
+'ROOT-NAME.EXT'. It writes that information as the text of the command
+'\contentsline{UNIT}{TEXT}{NUM}', where 'NUM' is the current value of
+counter 'UNIT'. The most common case is the table of contents and there
+NUM is the page number of the first page of UNIT.
+
+ This command is invoked by the sectioning commands '\chapter', etc.,
+and also by '\caption' inside a float environment. But it is also used
+by authors. For example, in a book to have the preface unnumbered, you
+may use the starred '\chapter*'. But that does not put in table of
+contents information, so you can enter it manually, as here.
+
+ \chapter*{Preface}
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\protect\numberline{}Preface}
+
+In the '.toc' file LaTeX will put the line '\contentsline
+{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}'; note the page number '3'.
+
+ All of the arguments for '\addcontentsline' are required.
+
+EXT
+ Typically one of the strings 'toc' for the table of contents, 'lof'
+ for the list of figures, or 'lot' for the list of tables. The
+ filename extension of the information file.
+
+UNIT
+ A string that depends on the value of the EXT argument:
+
+ 'toc'
+ For the table of contents, this is the name of a sectional
+ unit: 'part', 'chapter', 'section', 'subsection', etc.
+
+ 'lof'
+ For the list of figures: 'figure'.
+
+ 'lot'
+ For the list of tables: 'table'.
+
+TEXT
+ The text of the entry. You must '\protect' any commands that are
+ fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ The '\addcontentsline' command has an interaction with '\include'
+(*note \include & \includeonly::). If you use them at the same level,
+as with '\addcontentsline{...}{...}{...}\include{...}' then lines in the
+table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution is to
+move '\addcontentsline' into the file being included.
+
+ If you use a UNIT that LaTeX does not recognize, as here
+
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{setcion}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+
+then you don't get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
+will not make sense.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocontents, Next: \nofiles, Prev: \addcontentsline, Up: Table of contents etc.
+
+25.1.2 '\addtocontents'
+-----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}
+
+ Add TEXT, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to the
+auxiliary file with extension EXT. This is most commonly used for the
+table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also applies
+to the list of figures and list of tables.
+
+ This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the
+'Contents' header.
+
+ \tableofcontents\newpage
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace*{3ex}}
+
+ The '\addtocontents' command has two arguments. Both are required.
+
+EXT
+ Typically one of: 'toc' for the table of contents, 'lof' for the
+ list of figures, or 'lot' for the list of tables. The extension of
+ the file holding the information.
+
+TEXT
+ The text, and possibly commands, to be written.
+
+ The sectioning commands such as '\chapter' use the '\addcontentsline'
+command to store information. This command creates lines in the '.toc'
+auxiliary file containing the '\contentsline' command (*note
+\addcontentsline::). In contrast, the command '\addtocontents' puts
+material directly in that file.
+
+ The '\addtocontents' command has an interaction with '\include'
+(*note \include & \includeonly::). If you use them at the same level,
+as with '\addtocontents{...}{...}\include{...}' then lines in the table
+of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution is to move
+'\addtocontents' into the file being included.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \nofiles, Prev: \addtocontents, Up: Table of contents etc.
+
+25.1.3 '\nofiles'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \nofiles
+
+ Prevent LaTeX from writing any auxiliary files. The only output will
+be the '.log' and '.pdf' (or '.dvi') files. This command must go in the
+preamble.
+
+ Because of the '\nofiles' command this example will not produce a
+'.toc' file.
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \nofiles
+ \begin{document}
+ \tableofcontents\newpage
+ \chapter{...}
+ ...
+
+LaTeX will not erase any existing auxiliary files, so if you insert the
+'\nofiles' command after you have run the file and gotten a '.toc' then
+the table of contents page will continue to show the old information.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Indexes, Next: Glossaries, Prev: Table of contents etc., Up: Front/back matter
+
+25.2 Indexes
+============
+
+This document has an index.
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \usepackage{makeidx} \makeindex
+ ...
+ \begin{document}
+ ...
+ Recall Wilson's Theorem: \index{Wilson's Theorem}
+ a number \( n>1 \) is prime if and only if the factorial of \( n-1 \)
+ is congruent to \( -1 \) modulo~\( n \).
+ ...
+ \printindex
+ ...
+
+The '\usepackage{makeidx}' and '\makeindex' in the preamble bring in the
+relevant commands.
+
+ Producing an index is a three stage process. First, in the document
+body you declare index entries with the '\index' command (*note
+\index::). When you run LaTeX, the '\index' writes its information to
+an auxiliary file 'ROOT-NAME.idx'. Next, to alphabetize and to do other
+manipulations you run an external command, typically 'makeindex' or
+'xindy' (*note makeindex::). These output a file 'ROOT-NAME.ind'.
+Finally, you bring the information back into your document and typeset
+it with the '\printindex' command (*note \printindex::).
+
+ There are many packages that apply to indexing commands. The
+'showidx' package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on
+the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index.
+The 'multind' package supports multiple indexes. See also the TeX FAQ
+entry on this topic,
+<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind>.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \index:: Declare an index entry.
+* makeindex:: Alphabetize index entries.
+* \printindex:: Put the index here.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \index, Next: makeindex, Up: Indexes
+
+25.2.1 '\index'
+---------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \index{INDEX-ENTRY-STRING}
+
+ Declare an entry in the index. This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
+ For example, as described in *note Indexes::, one way to get an index
+from what's below is to compile the document with 'pdflatex test', then
+process the index entries with 'makeindex test', and then compile again
+with 'pdflatex test'.
+
+ W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+ ...
+ Ackermann function\index{Ackermann!function}
+ ...
+ rate of growth\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate}
+
+All three index entries will get a page number, such as 'Ackermann, 22'.
+LaTeX will format the second as a subitem of the first, on the line
+below it and indented, and the third as a subitem of the second. Three
+levels deep is as far as you can nest subentries. (If you add
+'\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison}' then 'makeindex'
+says 'Scanning input file test.idx....done (4 entries accepted, 1
+rejected)' and nothing appears in the index).
+
+ If you enter a second '\index' with the same INDEX-ENTRY-STRING then
+you will get a single index entry with two page numbers (unless they
+happen to fall on the same page). Thus, adding 'as for
+Ackermann.\index{Ackermann}' later in the same document as above will
+give an index entry like 'Ackermann, 22, 151'. Also, you can enter the
+index entries in any order, so for instance '\index{Ackermann!function}'
+could come before '\index{Ackermann}'.
+
+ Get a page range in the output, like 'Hilbert, 23--27', as here.
+
+ W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+ ...
+ D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\(}
+ ...
+ disapproved of his marriage.\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\)}
+
+If the beginning and ending of the page range are equal then the system
+just gives a single page entry, not a range.
+
+ If you index subentries but not a main entry, as with
+'\index{Jones!program}' and '\index{Jones!results}', then the output is
+the item 'Jones' with no comma or page number, followed by two subitems,
+like 'program, 50' and 'results, 51'.
+
+ Generate a index entry that says 'See' by using a vertical bar
+character: '\index{Ackermann!function|see{P\'eter's function}}'. You
+can instead get 'See also' with 'seealso'. (The text 'See' is defined
+by '\seename', and 'See also' by '\alsoname'. You can redefine these
+either by using an internationalization package such as 'babel' or
+'polyglossia', or directly as with '\renewcommand{\alsoname}[1]{Also see
+#1}'.)
+
+ The 'See' feature is part of a more general functionality. After the
+vertical bar you can put the name of a one-input command, as in
+'\index{group|textit}' (note the missing backslash on the '\textit'
+command) and the system will apply that command to the page number, here
+giving something like '\textit{7}'. You can define your own one-input
+commands, such as '\newcommand{\definedpage}[1]{{\color{blue}#1}}' and
+then '\index{Ackermann!function|definedpage}' will give a blue page
+number (*note Color::). Another, less practical, example is this,
+
+ \newcommand\indexownpage[1]{#1, \thepage}
+ ... Epimenides.\index{self-reference|indexownpage}
+
+which creates an entry citing the page number of its own index listing.
+
+ The two functions just described combine, as here
+
+ \index{Ackermann!function|(definedpage}
+ ...
+ \index{Ackermann!function|)}
+
+which outputs an index entry like 'function, 23--27' where the page
+number range is in blue.
+
+ Consider an index entry such as 'U+03B1-ring'. Entering it as
+'$\alpha$-ring' will cause it to be alphabetized according to the dollar
+sign. You can instead enter it using an at-sign, as
+'\index{alpha-ring@$\alpha$-ring}'. If you specify an entry with an
+at-sign separating two strings, 'POS@TEXT', then POS gives the
+alphabetical position of the entry while TEXT produces the text of the
+entry. Another example is that '\index{Saint Michael's College@SMC}'
+produces an index entry 'SMC' alphabetized into a different location
+than its spelling would naturally give it.
+
+ To put a '!', or '@', or '|' character in an index entry, preceding
+it with a double quote, '"'. (The double quote gets deleted before
+alphabetization.)
+
+ A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond
+that provided by 'makeidx'. One is 'index', which allows for multiple
+indices and contains a command '\index*{INDEX-ENTRY-STRING}' that prints
+the INDEX-ENTRY-STRING as well as indexing it.
+
+ The '\index' command writes the indexing information to the file
+'ROOT-NAME.idx' file. Specifically, it writes text of the command
+'\indexentry{INDEX-ENTRY-STRING}{PAGE-NUM}', where PAGE-NUM is the value
+of the '\thepage' counter. On occasion, when the '\printindex' command
+is confused, you have to delete this file to start with a fresh slate.
+
+ If you omit the closing brace of an '\index' command then you get a
+message like this.
+
+ Runaway argument? {Ackermann!function
+ ! Paragraph ended before \@wrindex was complete.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: makeindex, Next: \printindex, Prev: \index, Up: Indexes
+
+25.2.2 'makeindex'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ makeindex FILENAME
+ makeindex -s STYLE-FILE FILENAME
+ makeindex OPTIONS FILENAME0 ...
+
+ Sort, and otherwise process, the index information in the auxiliary
+file FILENAME. This is a command line program. It takes one or more
+raw index files, 'FILENAME.idx' files, and produces the actual index
+file, the 'FILENAME.ind' file that is input by '\printindex' (*note
+\printindex::).
+
+ The first form of the command suffices for many uses. The second
+allows you to format the index by using an "index style file", a '.isty'
+file. The third form is the most general; see the full documentation on
+CTAN.
+
+ This is a simple '.isty' file.
+
+ % book.isty
+ % $ makeindex -s book.isty -p odd book.idx
+ % creates the index as book.ind, starting on an odd page.
+ preamble
+ "\\pagestyle{empty}
+ \\small
+ \\begin{theindex}
+ \\thispagestyle{empty}"
+
+ postamble
+ "\n
+ \\end{theindex}"
+
+ The description here covers only some of the index formatting
+possibilities in STYLE-FILE. For a full list see the documentation on
+CTAN.
+
+ A style file consists of a list of pairs: SPECIFIER and ATTRIBUTE.
+These can appear in the file in any order. All of the ATTRIBUTES are
+strings, except where noted. Strings are surrounded with double quotes,
+'"', and the maximum length of a string is 144 characters. The '\n' is
+for a newline and '\t' is for a tab. Backslashes are escaped with
+another backslash, '\\'. If a line begins with a percent sign, '%',
+then it is a comment.
+
+'preamble'
+ Preamble of the output file. Defines the context in which the
+ index is formatted. Default: '"\\begin{theindex}\n"'.
+
+'postamble'
+ Postamble of the output file. Default: '"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"'.
+
+'group_skip'
+ Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group
+ for entries starting with 'a', etc. This specifier gives what is
+ inserted when a new group begins. Default: '"\n\n \\indexspace\n"'
+ ('\indexspace' is a rubber length with default value '10pt plus5pt
+ minus3pt').
+
+'lethead_flag'
+ An integer. It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter.
+ If it is 0 (which is the default) then other than 'group_skip'
+ nothing will be inserted before the group. If it is positive then
+ at a new letter the 'lethead_prefix' and 'lethead_suffix' will be
+ inserted, with that letter in uppercase between them. If it is
+ negative then what will be inserted is the letter in lowercase.
+ The default is 0.
+
+'lethead_prefix'
+ If a new group begins with a different letter then this is the
+ prefix inserted before the new letter header. Default: '""'
+
+'lethead_suffix'
+ If a group begins with a different letter then this is the suffix
+ inserted after the new letter header. Default: '""'.
+
+'item_0'
+ What is put between two level 0 items. Default: '"\n \\item "'.
+
+'item_1'
+ Put between two level 1 items. Default: '"\n \\subitem "'.
+
+'item_2'
+ put between two level 2 items. Default: '"\n \\subsubitem "'.
+
+'item_01'
+ What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item. Default:
+ '"\n \\subitem "'.
+
+'item_x1'
+ What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item in the case
+ that the level 0 item doesn't have any page numbers (as in
+ '\index{aaa|see{bbb}}'). Default: '"\n \\subitem "'.
+
+'item_12'
+ What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item. Default:
+ '"\n \\subsubitem "'.
+
+'item_x2'
+ What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item, if the
+ level 1 item doesn't have page numbers. Default: '"\n \\subsubitem
+ "'.
+
+'delim_0'
+ Delimiter put between a level 0 key and its first page number.
+ Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+
+'delim_1'
+ Delimiter put between a level 1 key and its first page number.
+ Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+
+'delim_2'
+ Delimiter between a level 2 key and its first page number.
+ Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+
+'delim_n'
+ Delimiter between two page numbers for the same key (at any level).
+ Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+
+'delim_r'
+ What is put between the starting and ending page numbers of a
+ range. Default: '"--"'.
+
+'line_max'
+ An integer. Maximum length of an index entry's line in the output,
+ beyond which the line wraps. Default: '72'.
+
+'indent_space'
+ What is inserted at the start of a wrapped line. Default:
+ '"\t\t"'.
+
+'indent_length'
+ A number. The length of the wrapped line indentation. The default
+ 'indent_space' is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the
+ default here is '16'.
+
+'page_precedence'
+ A document may have pages numbered in different ways. For example,
+ a book may have front matter pages numbered in lowercase roman
+ while main matter pages are in arabic. This string specifies the
+ order in which they will appear in the index. The 'makeindex'
+ command supports five different types of numerals: lowercase roman
+ 'r', and numeric or arabic 'n', and lowercase alphabetic 'a', and
+ uppercase roman 'R', and uppercase alphabetic 'A'. Default:
+ '"rnaRA"'.
+
+ There are a number of other programs that do the job 'makeindex'
+does. One is 'xindy', which does internationalization and can process
+indexes for documents marked up using LaTeX and a number of other
+languages. It is highly configurable, both in markup terms and in terms
+of the collating order of the text, as described in its documentation.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \printindex, Prev: makeindex, Up: Indexes
+
+25.2.3 '\printindex'
+--------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \printindex
+
+ Place the index into the output.
+
+ To get an index you must first include
+'\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex' in the document preamble and compile
+the document, then run the system command 'makeindex', and then compile
+the document again. *Note Indexes:: for further discussion and an
+example of the use of '\printindex'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Glossaries, Prev: Indexes, Up: Front/back matter
+
+25.3 Glossaries
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+ ...
+ \newglossaryentry{LABEL}{SETTINGS}
+ ...
+ \gls{LABEL}.
+ ...
+ \printglossaries
+
+ The 'glossaries' package allows you to make glossaries, including
+multiple glossaries, as well as lists of acronyms.
+
+ To get the output from this example, compile the document (for
+instance with 'pdflatex filename'), then run the command line command
+'makeglossaries filename', and then compile the document again.
+
+ \documentclass{...}
+ \usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+ \newglossaryentry{tm}{%
+ name={Turing machine},
+ description={A model of a machine that computes. The model is simple
+ but can compute anything any existing device can compute.
+ It is the standard model used in Computer Science.},
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ Everything begins with the definition of a \gls{tm}.
+ ...
+ \printglossaries
+ \end{document}
+
+That gives two things. In the main text it outputs '... definition of a
+Turing machine'. In addition, in a separate sectional unit headed
+'Glossary' there appears a description list. In boldface it says
+'Turing machine' and the rest of the item says in normal type 'A model
+of a machine ... Computer Science'.
+
+ The command '\makeglossary' opens the file that will contain the
+entry information, 'ROOT-FILE.glo'. Put the '\printglossaries' command
+where you want the glossaries to appear in your document.
+
+ The 'glossaries' package is very powerful. For instance, besides the
+commands '\newglossaryentry' and '\gls', there are similar commands for
+a list of acronyms. See the package documentations on CTAN.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \newglossaryentry:: Declare the content of a glossary entry.
+* \gls:: Give a page reference for a glossary entry.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newglossaryentry, Next: \gls, Up: Glossaries
+
+25.3.1 '\newglossaryentry'
+--------------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \newglossaryentry{LABEL}
+ {
+ name={NAME},
+ description={DESCRIPTION},
+ OTHER OPTIONS, ...
+ }
+
+ or
+
+ \longnewglossaryentry{LABEL}
+ {
+ name={NAME},
+ OTHER OPTIONS ...,
+ }
+ {DESCRIPTION}
+
+ Declare a new entry for a glossary. The LABEL must be unique for the
+document. The settings associated with the label are pairs:
+'KEY=VALUE'.
+
+ This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers U+211D in
+the glossary.
+
+ \newglossaryentry{R}
+ {
+ name={\ensuremath{\mathbb{R}}},
+ description={the real numbers},
+ }
+
+ Use the second command form if the DESCRIPTION spans more than one
+paragraph.
+
+ For a full list of KEYs see the package documentation on CTAN but
+here are a few.
+
+'name'
+ (Required.) The word, phrase, or symbol that you are defining.
+
+'description'
+ (Required.) The description that will appear in the glossary. If
+ this has more than one paragraph then you must use the second
+ command form given in the synopsis.
+
+'plural'
+ The plural form of NAME. Refer to the plural form using '\glspl'
+ or '\Glspl' (*note \gls::).
+
+'sort'
+ How to place this entry in the list of entries that the glossary
+ holds.
+
+'symbol'
+ A symbol, such as a mathematical symbol, besides the name.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \gls, Prev: \newglossaryentry, Up: Glossaries
+
+25.3.2 '\gls'
+-------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \gls{LABEL}
+ \glspl{LABEL}
+ \Gls{LABEL}
+ \Glspl{LABEL}
+
+ Refer to a glossary entry. The entries are declared with
+'\newglossaryentry' (*note \newglossaryentry::).
+
+ This
+
+ \newglossaryentry{N}{%
+ name={the natural numbers},
+ description={The numbers $0$, $1$, $2$, $\ldots$\@},
+ symbol={\ensuremath{\mathbb{N}}},
+ }
+ ...
+ Consider \gls{N}.
+
+gives the output 'Consider the natural numbers'.
+
+ The second command form '\glspl{LABEL}' produces the plural of NAME
+(by default it tries adding an 's'). The third form capitalizes the
+first letter of NAME, as does the fourth form, which also takes the
+plural.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Letters, Next: Terminal input/output, Prev: Front/back matter, Up: Top
+
+26 Letters
+**********
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \address{SENDERS ADDRESS} % return address
+ \signature{SENDER NAME}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{letter}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}
+ \opening{SALUTATION}
+ LETTER BODY
+ \closing{CLOSING TEXT}
+ \end{letter}
+ ...
+ \end{document}
+
+ Produce one or more letters.
+
+ Each letter is in a separate 'letter' environment, whose argument
+RECIPIENT ADDRESS often contains multiple lines separated with a double
+backslash, ('\\'). For example, you might have:
+
+ \begin{letter}{Ninon de l'Enclos \\
+ l'h\^otel Sagonne}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+
+ The start of the 'letter' environment resets the page number to 1,
+and the footnote number to 1 also.
+
+ The SENDER ADDRESS and SENDER NAME are common to all of the letters,
+whether there is one or more, so these are best put in the preamble. As
+with the recipient address, often SENDER ADDRESS contains multiple lines
+separated by a double backslash ('\\'). LaTeX will put the SENDER NAME
+under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
+hand-written signature.
+
+ Each 'letter' environment body begins with a required '\opening'
+command such as '\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}'. The LETTER BODY text is
+ordinary LaTeX so it can contain everything from enumerated lists to
+displayed math, except that commands such as '\chapter' that make no
+sense in a letter are turned off. Each 'letter' environment body
+typically ends with a '\closing' command such as '\closing{Yours,}'.
+
+ Additional material may come after the '\closing'. You can say who
+is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like '\cc{the Boss \\
+the Boss's Boss}'. There's a similar '\encl' command for a list of
+enclosures. And, you can add a postscript with '\ps'.
+
+ LaTeX's default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it
+by a length of '\longindentation'. By default this is '0.5\textwidth'.
+To make them flush left, put '\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}' in your
+preamble.
+
+ To set a fixed date use something like
+'\renewcommand{\today}{1958-Oct-12}'. If put in your preamble then it
+will apply to all the letters.
+
+ This example shows only one 'letter' environment. The three lines
+marked as optional are typically omitted.
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \address{Sender's street \\ Sender's town}
+ \signature{Sender's name \\ Sender's title}
+ % optional: \location{Mailbox 13}
+ % optional: \telephone{(102) 555-0101}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{letter}{Recipient's name \\ Recipient's address}
+ \opening{Sir:}
+ % optional: \thispagestyle{firstpage}
+ I am not interested in entering a business arrangement with you.
+ \closing{Your most humble, etc.,}
+ \end{letter}
+ \end{document}
+
+ These commands are used with the 'letter' class.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \address:: Sender's return address.
+* \cc:: Carbon copy list.
+* \closing:: Saying goodbye.
+* \encl:: List of enclosed material.
+* \location:: Sender's organizational location.
+* \makelabels:: Make address labels.
+* \name:: Sender's name, for the return address.
+* \opening:: Saying hello.
+* \ps:: Adding a postscript.
+* \signature:: Sender's signature.
+* \telephone:: Sender's phone number.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \address, Next: \cc, Up: Letters
+
+26.1 '\address'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \address{SENDERS ADDRESS}
+
+ Specify the return address, as it appears on the letter and on the
+envelope. Separate multiple lines in SENDERS ADDRESS with a double
+backslash, '\\'.
+
+ Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often
+put in the preamble. However, it can go anywhere, including inside an
+individual 'letter' environment.
+
+ This command is optional: if you do not use it then the letter is
+formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto pre-printed
+letterhead paper. If you do use the '\address' declaration then it is
+formatted as a personal letter.
+
+ Here is an example.
+
+ \address{Stephen Maturin \\
+ The Grapes of the Savoy}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \cc, Next: \closing, Prev: \address, Up: Letters
+
+26.2 '\cc'
+==========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \cc{NAME0 \\
+ ... }
+
+ Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent.
+This command is optional. If it appears then typically it comes after
+'\closing'. Put the names on different lines by separating them with a
+double backslash, '\\', as in:
+
+ \cc{President \\
+ Vice President}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \closing, Next: \encl, Prev: \cc, Up: Letters
+
+26.3 '\closing'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \closing{TEXT}
+
+ Produce the letter's closing. This is optional, but usual. It
+appears at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature. For
+example:
+
+ \closing{Regards,}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \encl, Next: \location, Prev: \closing, Up: Letters
+
+26.4 '\encl'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \encl{FIRST ENCLOSED OBJECT \\
+ ... }
+
+ Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
+optional; when it is used, it typically is put after '\closing'.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, '\\'.
+
+ \encl{License \\
+ Passport}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \location, Next: \makelabels, Prev: \encl, Up: Letters
+
+26.5 '\location'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \location{TEXT}
+
+ The TEXT appears centered at the bottom of the page. It only appears
+if the page style is 'firstpage'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \makelabels, Next: \name, Prev: \location, Up: Letters
+
+26.6 '\makelabels'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \makelabels % in preamble
+
+ Optional, for a document that contains 'letter' environments. If you
+just put '\makelabels' in the preamble then at the end of the document
+you will get a sheet with labels for all the recipients, one for each
+letter environment, that you can copy to a sheet of peel-off address
+labels.
+
+ Customize the labels by redefining the commands '\startlabels',
+'\mlabel', and '\returnaddress' (and perhaps '\name') in the preamble.
+The command '\startlabels' sets the width, height, number of columns,
+etc., of the page onto which the labels are printed. The command
+'\mlabel{RETURN ADDRESS}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}' produces the two labels (or
+one, if you choose to ignore the RETURN ADDRESS) for each letter
+environment. The first argument, RETURN ADDRESS, is the value returned
+by the macro '\returnaddress'. The second argument, RECIPIENT ADDRESS,
+is the value passed in the argument to the 'letter' environment. By
+default '\mlabel' ignores the first argument, the RETURN ADDRESS,
+causing the default behavior described in the prior paragraph.
+
+ This illustrates customization. Its output includes a page with two
+columns having two labels each.
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \renewcommand*{\returnaddress}{Fred McGuilicuddy \\
+ Oshkosh, Mineola 12305}
+ \newcommand*\originalMlabel{}
+ \let\originalMlabel\mlabel
+ \def\mlabel#1#2{\originalMlabel{}{#1}\originalMlabel{}{#2}}
+ \makelabels
+ ...
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{letter}{A Einstein \\
+ 112 Mercer Street \\
+ Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+ \begin{letter}{K G\"odel \\
+ 145 Linden Lane \\
+ Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+ \end{document}
+
+The first column contains the return address twice. The second column
+contains the address for each recipient.
+
+ The package 'envlab' makes formatting the labels easier, with
+standard sizes already provided. The preamble lines
+'\usepackage[personalenvelope]{envlab}' and '\makelabels' are all that
+you need to print envelopes.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \name, Next: \opening, Prev: \makelabels, Up: Letters
+
+26.7 '\name'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \name{NAME}
+
+ Optional. Sender's name, used for printing on the envelope together
+with the return address.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \opening, Next: \ps, Prev: \name, Up: Letters
+
+26.8 '\opening'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \opening{SALUTATION}
+
+ Required. Follows the '\begin{letter}{...}'. The argument
+SALUTATION is mandatory. For instance:
+
+ \opening{Dear John:}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \ps, Next: \signature, Prev: \opening, Up: Letters
+
+26.9 '\ps'
+==========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ps{TEXT}
+
+ Add a postscript. This command is optional and usually is used after
+'\closing'.
+
+ \ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \signature, Next: \telephone, Prev: \ps, Up: Letters
+
+26.10 '\signature'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \signature{FIRST LINE \\
+ ... }
+
+ The sender's name. This command is optional, although its inclusion
+is usual.
+
+ The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the
+closing. LaTeX leaves some vertical space for a handwritten signature.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, '\\'. For example:
+
+ \signature{J Fred Muggs \\
+ White House}
+
+ LaTeX's default for the vertical space from the '\closing' text down
+to the '\signature' text is '6\medskipamount', which is six times
+'\medskipamount' (where '\medskipamount' is equal to a '\parskip', which
+in turn is defined by default here to 0.7em).
+
+ This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters
+in the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a
+'letter' environment and before the '\closing'.
+
+ You can include a graphic in the signature as here.
+
+ \signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\
+ My name}
+
+For this you must put '\usepackage{graphicx}' in the preamble (*note
+Graphics::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \telephone, Prev: \signature, Up: Letters
+
+26.11 '\telephone'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \telephone{NUMBER}
+
+ The sender's telephone number. This is typically in the preamble,
+where it applies to all letters. This only appears if the 'firstpage'
+pagestyle is selected. If so, it appears on the lower right of the
+page.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Terminal input/output, Next: Command line, Prev: Letters, Up: Top
+
+27 Terminal input/output
+************************
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \typein:: Read text from the terminal.
+* \typeout:: Write text to the terminal.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \typein, Next: \typeout, Up: Terminal input/output
+
+27.1 '\typein'
+==============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \typein{PROMPT-MSG}
+ \typein[CMD]{PROMPT-MSG}
+
+ Print PROMPT-MSG on the terminal and cause LaTeX to stop and wait for
+you to type a line of input. This line of input ends when you hit the
+return key.
+
+ For example, this
+
+ As long as I live I shall never forget \typein{Enter student name:}
+
+coupled with this command line interaction
+
+ Enter student name:
+
+ \@typein=Aphra Behn
+
+gives the output '... never forget Aphra Behn'.
+
+ The first command version, '\typein{PROMPT-MSG}', causes the input
+you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the input file
+in place of the '\typein' command.
+
+ In the second command version the optional argument 'CMD' argument
+must be a command name -- it must begin with a backslash, \. This
+command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you
+typed. For example, this
+
+ \typein[\student]{Enter student name:}
+ \typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+
+gives this output on the command line,
+
+ Enter student name:
+
+ \student=John Dee
+ Recommendation for John Dee.
+
+where the user has entered 'John Dee.'
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \typeout, Prev: \typein, Up: Terminal input/output
+
+27.2 '\typeout'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \typeout{MSG}
+
+ Print 'msg' on the terminal and in the 'log' file.
+
+ This
+
+ \newcommand{\student}{John Dee}
+ \typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+
+outputs 'Recommendation for John Dee'. Like what happens here with
+'\student', commands that are defined with '\newcommand' or
+'\renewcommand' (among others) are replaced by their definitions before
+being printed.
+
+ LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
+and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to 'msg'. As above, use
+the command '\space' to get a single space, independent of surrounding
+spaces. Use '^^J' to get a newline. Get a percent character with
+'\csname @percentchar\endcsname'.
+
+ This command can be useful for simple debugging, as here:
+
+ \newlength{\jhlength}
+ \setlength{\jhlength}{5pt}
+ \typeout{The length is \the\jhlength.}
+
+produces on the command line 'The length is 5.0pt'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Command line, Next: Document templates, Prev: Terminal input/output, Up: Top
+
+28 Command line
+***************
+
+Synopsis (from a terminal command line):
+
+ pdflatex OPTIONS ARGUMENT
+
+ Run LaTeX on ARGUMENT. In place of 'pdflatex' you can also use
+'xelatex', or 'lualatex', or 'dviluatex', or 'latex'.
+
+ For example, this will run LaTeX on the file 'thesis.tex', creating
+the output 'thesis.pdf'.
+
+ pdflatex thesis
+
+Note that '.tex' is the default file extension.
+
+ pdfTeX is a development of the original TeX program, as are XeTeX and
+LuaTeX (*note TeX engines::). They are completely backward compatible.
+But the original program had a custom output format, DVI, while the
+newer ones can output directly to PDF. This allows them to take
+advantage of the extra features in PDF such as hyperlinks, support for
+modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and ubiquitous viewing
+programs. In short, if you run 'pdflatex' or 'xelatex' or 'lualatex'
+then you will by default get PDF and have access to all its modern
+features. If you run 'latex', or 'dvilualatex', then you will get DVI.
+The description here assumes pdfLaTeX.
+
+ *Note Command line options::, for a selection of the most useful
+command line options. As to ARGUMENT, the usual case is that it does
+not begin with a backslash, so the system takes it to be the name of a
+file and it compiles that file. If ARGUMENT begins with a backslash
+then the system will interpret it as a line of LaTeX input, which can be
+used for special effects (*note Command line input::).
+
+ If you gave no arguments or options then 'pdflatex' prompts for input
+from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering '<control>-D'.
+
+ If LaTeX finds an error in your document then by default it stops and
+asks you about it. *Note Recovering from errors:: for an outline of
+what to do.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Command line options:: Read text from the terminal.
+* Command line input:: Write text to the terminal.
+* Recovering from errors:: When something goes wrong.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Command line options, Next: Command line input, Up: Command line
+
+28.1 Command line options
+=========================
+
+These are the command-line options relevant to ordinary document
+authoring. For a full list, try running 'latex --help' from the command
+line.
+
+ With many implementations you can specify command line options by
+prefixing them with '-' or '--'. This is the case for both TeX Live
+(and MacTeX) and MiKTeX. We will use both conventions interchangeably.
+
+'-version'
+ Show the current version, like 'pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX
+ Live 2015/Debian)' along with a small amount of additional
+ information, and exit.
+
+'-help'
+ Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit.
+
+'-interaction=MODE'
+ TeX compiles a document in one of four interaction modes:
+ 'batchmode', 'nonstopmode', 'scrollmode', 'errorstopmode'. In
+ "errorstop mode" (the default), TeX stops at each error and asks
+ for user intervention. In "batch mode" it prints nothing on the
+ terminal, errors are scrolled as if the user hit '<return>' at
+ every error, and missing files cause the job to abort. In "nonstop
+ mode", diagnostic message appear on the terminal but as in batch
+ mode there is no user interaction. In "scroll mode", TeX only
+ stops for missing files or keyboard input.
+
+ For instance, starting LaTeX with this command line
+
+ pdflatex -interaction=batchmode FILENAME
+
+ eliminates most terminal output.
+
+'-jobname=STRING'
+ Set the value of TeX's 'jobname' to the string. The log file and
+ output file will then be named 'STRING.log' and 'STRING.pdf'.
+
+ When you run 'pdflatex OPTIONS ARGUMENT', if ARGUMENT does not
+ start with a backslash then TeX considers it the name of a file to
+ input. Otherwise it waits for the first '\input' instruction and
+ the name of the input file will be the job name. This is used to
+ name the log file the output file. The 'jobname' option overrides
+ that process and directly specifies the name. *Note Command line
+ input:: for an example of its use.
+
+'-output-directory=DIRECTORY'
+ Write files in the directory DIRECTORY. It must already exist.
+
+'--shell-escape'
+'--no-shell-escape'
+'--enable-write18'
+'--disable-write18'
+ Enable or disable '\write18{SHELL COMMAND}'. The first two options
+ are for with TeX Live or MacTeX while the second two are for
+ MiKTeX.
+
+ Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a
+ LaTeX file. For instance the package 'sagetex' allows you to have
+ the mathematics software system Sage do calculations or draw graphs
+ and then incorporate that output in your document. For this TeX
+ provides the '\write18' command.
+
+ But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen
+ if you compiled a LaTeX file from the Internet. By default
+ '\write18' is disabled. (More precisely, by default TeX Live,
+ MacTeX, and MiKTeX only allow the execution of a limited number of
+ TeX-related programs, which they distribute.)
+
+ If you invoke LaTeX with the option 'no-shell-escape', and in your
+ document you call '\write18{ls -l}', then you do not get an error
+ but the log file says 'runsystem(ls -l)...disabled'.
+
+'-halt-on-error'
+ Stop processing at the first error.
+
+'-file-line-error'
+'-no-file-line-error'
+ Enable or disable 'FILENAME:LINENO:ERROR'-style error messages.
+ These are only available with TeX Live or MacTeX.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Command line input, Next: Recovering from errors, Prev: Command line options, Up: Command line
+
+28.2 Command line input
+=======================
+
+As part of the command line invocation 'pdflatex OPTIONS ARGUMENT' you
+can specify arbitrary LaTeX input by starting ARGUMENT with a backslash.
+This allows you to do some special effects.
+
+ For example, this file (which uses the 'hyperref' package for
+hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a
+PDF.
+
+ \ifdefined\paperversion % in preamble
+ \newcommand{\urlcolor}{black}
+ \else
+ \newcommand{\urlcolor}{blue}
+ \fi
+ \usepackage[colorlinks=true,urlcolor=\urlcolor]{hyperref}
+ ...
+ \href{https://www.ctan.org}{CTAN} % in body
+ ...
+
+Compiling this document 'book.tex' with the command line 'pdflatex book'
+will give the 'CTAN' link in blue. But compiling it with 'pdflatex
+"\def\paperversion{}\input book.tex"' has the link in black. (Note the
+use of double quotes to prevent interpretation of the symbols by the
+command line shell; your system may do this differently.)
+
+ In a similar way, from the single file 'main.tex' you can compile two
+different versions.
+
+ pdflatex -jobname=students "\def\student{}\input{main}"
+ pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main}"
+
+The 'jobname' option is there because otherwise both files would be
+called 'main.pdf' and the second would overwrite the first.
+
+ A final example. This loads the package 'graphicx' with the option
+'draft'
+
+ pdflatex -jobname=aa "\RequirePackage[draft]{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}"
+
+so the graphic files are read for their size information but not
+incorporated into the PDF. (The 'jobname' option is there because
+otherwise the output file would be 'graphicx.pdf', as '\RequirePackage'
+does an '\input' of its own.)
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Recovering from errors, Prev: Command line input, Up: Command line
+
+28.3 Recovering from errors
+===========================
+
+If LaTeX finds an error in your document then it gives you an error
+message and prompts you with a question mark, '?'. For instance,
+running LaTeX on this file
+
+ \newcommand{\NP}{\ensuremath{\textbf{NP}}}
+ The \PN{} problem is a million dollar one.
+
+causes it show this, and wait for input.
+
+ ! Undefined control sequence.
+ l.5 The \PN
+ {} problem is a million dollar one.
+ ?
+
+The simplest thing is to enter 'x' and '<return>' and fix the typo. You
+could instead enter '?' and '<return>' to see other options.
+
+ There are two other error scenarios. The first is that you forgot to
+include the '\end{document}' or misspelled it. In this case LaTeX gives
+you a '*' prompt. You can get back to the command line by typing
+'\stop' and '<return>'.
+
+ The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name. For instance,
+instead of 'pdflatex test' you might type 'pdflatex tste'.
+
+ ! I can't find file `tste'.
+ <*> tste
+
+ (Press Enter to retry, or Control-D to exit)
+ Please type another input file name:
+
+The simplest thing is to enter '<Control>' and 'd' (holding them down at
+the same time), and then retype the correct command line.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Document templates, Next: Index, Prev: Command line, Up: Top
+
+Appendix A Document templates
+*****************************
+
+Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will
+be useful. Additional template resources are listed at
+<http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates>.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* beamer template::
+* article template::
+* book template::
+* Larger book template::
+* tugboat template::
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: beamer template, Next: article template, Up: Document templates
+
+A.1 'beamer' template
+=====================
+
+The 'beamer' class creates presentation slides. It has a vast array of
+features, but here is a basic template:
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+\title{Beamer Class template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+\date{July 31, 2007}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% without [fragile], any {verbatim} code gets mysterious errors.
+\begin{frame}[fragile]
+ \frametitle{First Slide}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ This is \verbatim!
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+ One web resource for this:
+<http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/>.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: article template, Next: book template, Prev: beamer template, Up: Document templates
+
+A.2 'article' template
+======================
+
+\documentclass{article}
+\title{Article Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{First section}
+Some text.
+
+\subsection{First section, first subsection}
+Additional text.
+
+\section{Second section}
+Some more text.
+\end{document}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: book template, Next: Larger book template, Prev: article template, Up: Document templates
+
+A.3 'book' template
+===================
+
+This is a straightforward template for a book. See *Note Larger book
+template:: for a more elaborate one.
+
+\documentclass{book}
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\chapter{First}
+Some text.
+
+\chapter{Second}
+Some other text.
+
+\section{A subtopic}
+The end.
+\end{document}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Larger book template, Next: tugboat template, Prev: book template, Up: Document templates
+
+A.4 Larger 'book' template
+==========================
+
+This is a more elaborate template for a book. It has '\frontmatter',
+'\mainmatter', and '\backmatter' to control the typography of the three
+main areas of a book (*note \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter::).
+The book has a bibliography and an index.
+
+ Notable is that it uses '\include' and '\includeonly' (*note
+Splitting the input::). While you are working on a chapter you can
+comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to
+'\includeonly'. That will speed up compilation without losing any
+information such as cross-references. (Material that does not need to
+come on a new page is brought in with '\input' instead of '\include'.
+You don't get the cross-reference benefit this way.)
+
+\documentclass[titlepage]{book}
+\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex
+
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\includeonly{%
+ frontcover,
+ preface,
+ chap1,
+ ...
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\include{frontcover}
+ % maybe comment out while drafting:
+\maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright}
+\tableofcontents
+\include{preface}
+\mainmatter
+\include{chap1}
+...
+\appendix
+\include{appena}
+...
+\backmatter
+\bibliographystyle{apalike}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}
+\bibliography
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index}
+\printindex
+\include{backcover}
+\end{document}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: tugboat template, Prev: Larger book template, Up: Document templates
+
+A.5 'tugboat' template
+======================
+
+'TUGboat' is the journal of the TeX Users Group,
+<http://tug.org/TUGboat>.
+
+\documentclass{ltugboat}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{ifpdf}
+\ifpdf
+\usepackage[breaklinks,hidelinks]{hyperref}
+\else
+\usepackage{url}
+\fi
+
+%%% Start of metadata %%%
+
+\title{Example \TUB\ article}
+
+% repeat info for each author.
+\author{First Last}
+\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
+\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
+\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
+
+%%% End of metadata %%%
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+This is an example article for \TUB{}.
+Please write an abstract.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is an example article for \TUB, linked from
+\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
+
+We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the
+\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF}
+output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
+
+The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more):
+% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
+\begin{verbatim}[\small]
+\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
+\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
+\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
+\mf \MFB
+\plain \POBox \PS
+\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP
+\TUB \TUG \tug
+\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+
+\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph
+
+\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use!
+\cs{fred} -> \fred
+\meta{fred} -> <fred>
+\nth{n} -> 1st, 2nd, ...
+\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
+\booktitle{Book of Fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format
+\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue.
+
+This file is just a template. The \TUB\ style documentation is the
+\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}. (For
+\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using
+\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location,
+\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.)
+
+Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
+\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty
+\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
+
+\makesignature
+\end{document}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Index, Prev: Document templates, Up: Top
+
+Index
+*****
+
+
+* Menu:
+
+* &: tabular. (line 32)
+* * prompt: Recovering from errors.
+ (line 23)
+* *-form of environment commands: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 27)
+* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 31)
+* *-form, defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 25)
+* --disable-write18 command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 54)
+* --enable-write18 command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 54)
+* --file-line-error command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 81)
+* --halt-on-error command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 78)
+* --help command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 19)
+* --interaction command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 22)
+* --jobname command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 39)
+* --no-file-line-error command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 81)
+* --no-shell-escape command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 54)
+* --output-directory command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 51)
+* --shell-escape command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 54)
+* --version command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 14)
+* .aux file: Output files. (line 33)
+* .dvi file: Output files. (line 10)
+* .glo file: Glossaries. (line 43)
+* .idx file: Indexes. (line 6)
+* .idx file <1>: makeindex. (line 6)
+* .ind file: makeindex. (line 6)
+* .isty file: makeindex. (line 18)
+* .lof file: Output files. (line 43)
+* .lof file <1>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 6)
+* .log file: Output files. (line 28)
+* .lot file: Output files. (line 43)
+* .lot file <1>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 6)
+* .pdf file: Output files. (line 20)
+* .tex, default extension: Command line. (line 18)
+* .toc file: Output files. (line 43)
+* .toc file <1>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 6)
+* .xdv file: TeX engines. (line 39)
+* 10pt option: Document class options.
+ (line 14)
+* 11pt option: Document class options.
+ (line 14)
+* 12pt option: Document class options.
+ (line 14)
+* :: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 6)
+* : <1>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 6)
+* [...] for optional arguments: LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 6)
+* \ character starting commands: LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 6)
+* \!: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 46)
+* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 23)
+* \#: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \$: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \%: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \&: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 27)
+* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 87)
+* \*: \*. (line 6)
+* \+: tabbing. (line 79)
+* \,: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 32)
+* \-: tabbing. (line 83)
+* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 6)
+* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 30)
+* \/: \/. (line 6)
+* \:: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 28)
+* \;: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 23)
+* \<: tabbing. (line 75)
+* \= (macron accent): Accents. (line 34)
+* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 69)
+* \>: tabbing. (line 73)
+* \> <1>: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 28)
+* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 72)
+* \@: \@. (line 6)
+* \@beginparpenalty: list. (line 241)
+* \@endparpenalty: list. (line 249)
+* \@fnsymbol: \footnote. (line 24)
+* \@ifstar: \@ifstar. (line 6)
+* \@itempenalty: list. (line 245)
+* \@startsection: \@startsection. (line 6)
+* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 102)
+* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 103)
+* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 103)
+* \aa (aa): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12)
+* \AA (AA): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12)
+* \acute: Math accents. (line 10)
+* \addcontentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 6)
+* \address: \address. (line 6)
+* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 6)
+* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 6)
+* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 6)
+* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 6)
+* \ae (ae): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 16)
+* \AE (AE): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 16)
+* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 21)
+* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 61)
+* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 24)
+* \alph{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 14)
+* \Alph{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 19)
+* \alsoname: \index. (line 56)
+* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 27)
+* \and for \author: \maketitle. (line 43)
+* \angle: Math symbols. (line 30)
+* \appendix: \appendix. (line 6)
+* \approx: Math symbols. (line 35)
+* \arabic{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 24)
+* \arccos: Math functions. (line 9)
+* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 12)
+* \arctan: Math functions. (line 15)
+* \arg: Math functions. (line 18)
+* \arraycolsep: array. (line 51)
+* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 157)
+* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 163)
+* \ast: Math symbols. (line 38)
+* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 47)
+* \AtBeginDocument: \AtBeginDocument. (line 6)
+* \AtBeginDvi: Class and package commands.
+ (line 9)
+* \AtEndDocument: \AtEndDocument. (line 6)
+* \AtEndOfClass: Class and package commands.
+ (line 14)
+* \AtEndOfPackage: Class and package commands.
+ (line 14)
+* \author{NAME1 \and NAME2 \and ...}: \maketitle. (line 42)
+* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 103)
+* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 49)
+* \backmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 6)
+* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 50)
+* \bar: Math accents. (line 13)
+* \baselineskip: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 101)
+* \baselinestretch: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 111)
+* \begin: Environments. (line 6)
+* \beta: Math symbols. (line 54)
+* \bf: Font styles. (line 74)
+* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 39)
+* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 6)
+* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
+* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
+* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 57)
+* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 61)
+* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 65)
+* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 69)
+* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 72)
+* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 75)
+* \bigskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 28)
+* \bigskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 29)
+* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 86)
+* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 78)
+* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 82)
+* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 89)
+* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 93)
+* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 96)
+* \bmod: Math functions. (line 21)
+* \boldmath: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 6)
+* \boldmath <1>: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 14)
+* \bot: Math symbols. (line 99)
+* \bottomfraction: Floats. (line 94)
+* \bottomfraction <1>: Floats. (line 95)
+* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 104)
+* \Box: Math symbols. (line 107)
+* \breve: Math accents. (line 16)
+* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 112)
+* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 59)
+* \cal: Font styles. (line 77)
+* \cap: Math symbols. (line 115)
+* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 27)
+* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 85)
+* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 89)
+* \capitalcedilla: Accents. (line 59)
+* \capitalcircumflex: Accents. (line 38)
+* \capitaldieresis: Accents. (line 23)
+* \capitaldotaccent: Accents. (line 63)
+* \capitalgrave: Accents. (line 42)
+* \capitalhungarumlaut: Accents. (line 67)
+* \capitalmacron: Accents. (line 34)
+* \capitalnewtie: Accents. (line 81)
+* \capitalogonek: Accents. (line 71)
+* \capitalring: Accents. (line 75)
+* \capitaltie: Accents. (line 81)
+* \capitaltilde: Accents. (line 46)
+* \caption: figure. (line 44)
+* \caption <1>: table. (line 44)
+* \cc: \cc. (line 6)
+* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 120)
+* \cdots: Dots. (line 17)
+* \centering: \centering. (line 6)
+* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* \chapter <1>: \chapter. (line 6)
+* \check: Math accents. (line 19)
+* \CheckCommand: Class and package commands.
+ (line 21)
+* \CheckCommand*: Class and package commands.
+ (line 21)
+* \chi: Math symbols. (line 123)
+* \circ: Math symbols. (line 126)
+* \circle: \circle. (line 6)
+* \cite: \cite. (line 6)
+* \ClassError: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \ClassInfo: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \ClassInfoNoLine: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \ClassWarning: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \ClassWarningNoLine: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \cleardoublepage: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+ (line 6)
+* \clearpage: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+ (line 6)
+* \cline: \cline. (line 6)
+* \closing: \closing. (line 6)
+* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 131)
+* \colon: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 6)
+* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 20)
+* \columnsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* \columnsep <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 9)
+* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 26)
+* \columnseprule <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 7)
+* \columnseprule <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 9)
+* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 33)
+* \columnwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 8)
+* \columnwidth <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 9)
+* \complement: Math symbols. (line 134)
+* \cong: Math symbols. (line 140)
+* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 10)
+* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 143)
+* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 11)
+* \cos: Math functions. (line 24)
+* \cosh: Math functions. (line 27)
+* \cot: Math functions. (line 30)
+* \coth: Math functions. (line 33)
+* \csc: Math functions. (line 36)
+* \cup: Math symbols. (line 146)
+* \CurrentOption: Class and package commands.
+ (line 60)
+* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 63)
+* \dag: Text symbols. (line 15)
+* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 151)
+* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 6)
+* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 154)
+* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 50)
+* \day: \day & \month & \year.
+ (line 6)
+* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 66)
+* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 72)
+* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 79)
+* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 45)
+* \dbltopnumber: \twocolumn. (line 84)
+* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 18)
+* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 158)
+* \ddot: Math accents. (line 22)
+* \ddots: Dots. (line 21)
+* \DeclareGraphicsExtensions: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
+ (line 6)
+* \DeclareGraphicsRule: \DeclareGraphicsRule.
+ (line 6)
+* \DeclareOption: Class and package commands.
+ (line 66)
+* \DeclareOption*: Class and package commands.
+ (line 66)
+* \DeclareRobustCommand: Class and package commands.
+ (line 96)
+* \DeclareRobustCommand*: Class and package commands.
+ (line 96)
+* \deg: Math functions. (line 39)
+* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 161)
+* \delta: Math symbols. (line 164)
+* \det: Math functions. (line 42)
+* \dh (d): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 20)
+* \DH (D): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 20)
+* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 167)
+* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 171)
+* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 175)
+* \dim: Math functions. (line 45)
+* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 61)
+* \div: Math symbols. (line 178)
+* \dj: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 26)
+* \DJ: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 26)
+* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 6)
+* \dot: Math accents. (line 25)
+* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 181)
+* \dotfill: \hrulefill & \dotfill.
+ (line 6)
+* \dots: Text symbols. (line 35)
+* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 168)
+* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 185)
+* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 189)
+* \ell: Math symbols. (line 193)
+* \emph: Font styles. (line 59)
+* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 196)
+* \encl: \encl. (line 6)
+* \end: Environments. (line 6)
+* \endinput: \endinput. (line 6)
+* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6)
+* \enspace: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
+ (line 6)
+* \enumi: enumerate. (line 47)
+* \enumii: enumerate. (line 47)
+* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 47)
+* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 47)
+* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 200)
+* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 206)
+* \eta: Math symbols. (line 209)
+* \evensidemargin: Document class options.
+ (line 84)
+* \evensidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 67)
+* \evensidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 68)
+* \ExecuteOptions: Class and package commands.
+ (line 172)
+* \exists: Math symbols. (line 212)
+* \exp: Math functions. (line 48)
+* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 108)
+* \fbox: \fbox & \framebox. (line 6)
+* \fboxrule: \framebox (picture). (line 31)
+* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 39)
+* \fboxrule <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 38)
+* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture). (line 31)
+* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 44)
+* \fboxsep <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 43)
+* \fill: \hfill. (line 18)
+* \flat: Math symbols. (line 215)
+* \floatpagefraction: Floats. (line 98)
+* \floatpagefraction <1>: Floats. (line 99)
+* \floatsep: Floats. (line 114)
+* \floatsep <1>: Floats. (line 115)
+* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 6)
+* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: \footnote. (line 24)
+* \fnsymbol{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 37)
+* \fontencoding: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 11)
+* \fontfamily: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 21)
+* \fontseries: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 48)
+* \fontshape: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 88)
+* \fontsize: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 101)
+* \footnote: \footnote. (line 6)
+* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 6)
+* \footnoterule: \footnote. (line 34)
+* \footnotesep: \footnote. (line 46)
+* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 6)
+* \footskip: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 26)
+* \footskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 27)
+* \forall: Math symbols. (line 218)
+* \frac: \frac. (line 6)
+* \frame: \frame. (line 6)
+* \framebox: \framebox (picture). (line 6)
+* \framebox <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 6)
+* \frenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 6)
+* \frontmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 6)
+* \frown: Math symbols. (line 221)
+* \fussy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6)
+* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 224)
+* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 227)
+* \gcd: Math functions. (line 51)
+* \ge: Math symbols. (line 230)
+* \geq: Math symbols. (line 234)
+* \gets: Math symbols. (line 238)
+* \gg: Math symbols. (line 241)
+* \gls: \gls. (line 6)
+* \graphicspath: \graphicspath. (line 6)
+* \graphpaper: \graphpaper. (line 6)
+* \grave: Math accents. (line 28)
+* \guillemotleft (<<): Text symbols. (line 27)
+* \guillemotright (>>): Text symbols. (line 28)
+* \guilsinglleft (<): Text symbols. (line 29)
+* \guilsinglright (>): Text symbols. (line 30)
+* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 67)
+* \hat: Math accents. (line 31)
+* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 245)
+* \headheight: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 14)
+* \headheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 15)
+* \headsep: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 19)
+* \headsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 20)
+* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 248)
+* \hfill: \hfill. (line 6)
+* \hline: \hline. (line 6)
+* \hom: Math functions. (line 54)
+* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 251)
+* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 254)
+* \hrulefill: \hrulefill & \dotfill.
+ (line 6)
+* \hsize: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 119)
+* \hsize <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 119)
+* \hspace: \hspace. (line 6)
+* \hss: \hss. (line 6)
+* \huge: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6)
+* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 17)
+* \iff: Math symbols. (line 257)
+* \IfFileExists: Class and package commands.
+ (line 128)
+* \ignorespaces: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
+ (line 6)
+* \ignorespacesafterend: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
+ (line 6)
+* \ij (ij): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 32)
+* \IJ (IJ): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 32)
+* \Im: Math symbols. (line 261)
+* \imath: Math symbols. (line 264)
+* \in: Math symbols. (line 268)
+* \include: \include & \includeonly.
+ (line 6)
+* \includegraphics: \includegraphics. (line 6)
+* \includeonly: \include & \includeonly.
+ (line 6)
+* \indent: \indent & \noindent. (line 6)
+* \index: Indexes. (line 6)
+* \index <1>: \index. (line 6)
+* \indexentry: \index. (line 106)
+* \indexspace: makeindex. (line 58)
+* \inf: Math functions. (line 57)
+* \infty: Math symbols. (line 273)
+* \input: \input. (line 6)
+* \InputIfFileExists: Class and package commands.
+ (line 128)
+* \int: Math symbols. (line 276)
+* \intextsep: Floats. (line 118)
+* \intextsep <1>: Floats. (line 119)
+* \iota: Math symbols. (line 279)
+* \it: Font styles. (line 80)
+* \item: description. (line 31)
+* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 29)
+* \item <2>: itemize. (line 6)
+* \item <3>: itemize. (line 28)
+* \itemindent: list. (line 83)
+* \itemsep: list. (line 87)
+* \itshape: Font styles. (line 33)
+* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 17)
+* \jmath: Math symbols. (line 286)
+* \Join: Math symbols. (line 282)
+* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 71)
+* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 290)
+* \ker: Math functions. (line 60)
+* \kill: tabbing. (line 107)
+* \l (/l): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 36)
+* \L (/L): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 36)
+* \label: \label. (line 6)
+* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 56)
+* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 56)
+* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 56)
+* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 56)
+* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 35)
+* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 35)
+* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 35)
+* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 35)
+* \labelsep: list. (line 99)
+* \labelwidth: list. (line 104)
+* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 293)
+* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 296)
+* \land: Math symbols. (line 299)
+* \langle: Math symbols. (line 304)
+* \large: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \Large: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 21)
+* \LaTeXe: Text symbols. (line 24)
+* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 309)
+* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 313)
+* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 317)
+* \ldots: Dots. (line 25)
+* \ldots <1>: Text symbols. (line 34)
+* \le: Math symbols. (line 321)
+* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 325)
+* \left: \left & \right. (line 6)
+* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 332)
+* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 337)
+* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 46)
+* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 341)
+* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 344)
+* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 54)
+* \leftmargin <1>: list. (line 124)
+* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 54)
+* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 54)
+* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 54)
+* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 54)
+* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 54)
+* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 54)
+* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 347)
+* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 352)
+* \leq: Math symbols. (line 357)
+* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 361)
+* \lg: Math functions. (line 63)
+* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 364)
+* \lim: Math functions. (line 66)
+* \liminf: Math functions. (line 69)
+* \limsup: Math functions. (line 72)
+* \line: \line. (line 6)
+* \linebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* \linespread: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 125)
+* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 6)
+* \linewidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 33)
+* \linewidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 34)
+* \listoffigures: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 6)
+* \listoftables: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 6)
+* \listparindent: list. (line 141)
+* \ll: Math symbols. (line 372)
+* \ln: Math functions. (line 75)
+* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 376)
+* \LoadClass: Class and package commands.
+ (line 148)
+* \LoadClassWithOptions: Class and package commands.
+ (line 148)
+* \location: \location. (line 6)
+* \log: Math functions. (line 78)
+* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 379)
+* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 384)
+* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 388)
+* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 393)
+* \lor: Math symbols. (line 398)
+* \lq: Text symbols. (line 40)
+* \mainmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 6)
+* \makebox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 6)
+* \makebox (for picture): \makebox (picture). (line 6)
+* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 6)
+* \makeglossary <1>: Glossaries. (line 43)
+* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 6)
+* \makelabel: list. (line 60)
+* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 6)
+* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 6)
+* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 401)
+* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 6)
+* \marginparpush: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 40)
+* \marginparpush <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 43)
+* \marginparpush <2>: Marginal notes. (line 35)
+* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 39)
+* \marginparwidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 42)
+* \marginparwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 43)
+* \marginparwidth <2>: Marginal notes. (line 43)
+* \marginsep: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 41)
+* \marginsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 43)
+* \markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}: \pagestyle. (line 75)
+* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 84)
+* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 110)
+* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 126)
+* \mathdollar: Math symbols. (line 910)
+* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 123)
+* \mathparagraph: Math symbols. (line 913)
+* \mathring: Math accents. (line 34)
+* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 107)
+* \mathsection: Math symbols. (line 916)
+* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 113)
+* \mathsterling: Math symbols. (line 919)
+* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 116)
+* \mathunderscore: Math symbols. (line 922)
+* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 128)
+* \max: Math functions. (line 81)
+* \mbox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 6)
+* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 36)
+* \medskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 33)
+* \medskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 34)
+* \medspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 28)
+* \mho: Math symbols. (line 405)
+* \mid: Math symbols. (line 410)
+* \min: Math functions. (line 84)
+* \models: Math symbols. (line 420)
+* \month: \day & \month & \year.
+ (line 6)
+* \mp: Math symbols. (line 425)
+* \mu: Math symbols. (line 428)
+* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 6)
+* \multiput: \multiput. (line 6)
+* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 431)
+* \name: \name. (line 6)
+* \natural: Math symbols. (line 434)
+* \ne: Math symbols. (line 437)
+* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 440)
+* \NeedsTeXFormat: Class and package commands.
+ (line 182)
+* \neg: Math symbols. (line 443)
+* \negthinspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 46)
+* \negthinspace <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 6)
+* \neq: Math symbols. (line 447)
+* \newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
+* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 6)
+* \newenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* \newfont: \newfont. (line 6)
+* \newglossaryentry: \newglossaryentry. (line 6)
+* \newlength: \newlength. (line 6)
+* \newline: \newline. (line 6)
+* \NEWLINE: \(SPACE). (line 6)
+* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6)
+* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 6)
+* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 6)
+* \newtie: Accents. (line 81)
+* \ng: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 40)
+* \NG: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 40)
+* \ni: Math symbols. (line 450)
+* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6)
+* \nocorr: Font styles. (line 21)
+* \nocorrlist: Font styles. (line 21)
+* \nofiles: \nofiles. (line 6)
+* \noindent: \indent & \noindent. (line 6)
+* \nolinebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* \nonfrenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 6)
+* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 41)
+* \nopagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 57)
+* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 22)
+* \normalsfcodes: \normalsfcodes. (line 6)
+* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \not: Math symbols. (line 455)
+* \notin: Math symbols. (line 463)
+* \nu: Math symbols. (line 467)
+* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 470)
+* \o (/o): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 44)
+* \O (/O): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 44)
+* \obeycr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
+ (line 6)
+* \oddsidemargin: Document class options.
+ (line 84)
+* \oddsidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 66)
+* \oddsidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 68)
+* \odot: Math symbols. (line 473)
+* \oe (oe): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 48)
+* \OE (OE): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 48)
+* \oint: Math symbols. (line 478)
+* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 132)
+* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 482)
+* \omega: Math symbols. (line 485)
+* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 488)
+* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 6)
+* \opening: \opening. (line 6)
+* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 491)
+* \OptionNotUsed: Class and package commands.
+ (line 200)
+* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 495)
+* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 498)
+* \oval: \oval. (line 6)
+* \overbrace{MATH}: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 40)
+* \overline{TEXT}: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 21)
+* \owns: Math symbols. (line 503)
+* \P: Text symbols. (line 43)
+* \PackageError: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \PackageInfo: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \PackageInfoNoLine: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \PackageWarning: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \PackageWarningNoLine: Class and package commands.
+ (line 41)
+* \pagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 6)
+* \pageref: \pageref. (line 6)
+* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 6)
+* \paperheight: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 79)
+* \paperheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 80)
+* \paperwidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 85)
+* \paperwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 86)
+* \par: \par. (line 6)
+* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* \paragraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 6)
+* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 508)
+* \parbox: \parbox. (line 6)
+* \parindent: minipage. (line 103)
+* \parindent <1>: \indent & \noindent. (line 6)
+* \parindent <2>: \parindent & \parskip.
+ (line 6)
+* \parsep: list. (line 147)
+* \parskip: \parindent & \parskip.
+ (line 6)
+* \parskip example: itemize. (line 73)
+* \part: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* \part <1>: \part. (line 6)
+* \partial: Math symbols. (line 511)
+* \partopsep: list. (line 156)
+* \PassOptionsToClass: Class and package commands.
+ (line 206)
+* \PassOptionsToPackage: Class and package commands.
+ (line 206)
+* \pdfpageheight: Document class options.
+ (line 40)
+* \pdfpagewidth: Document class options.
+ (line 40)
+* \perp: Math symbols. (line 514)
+* \phi: Math symbols. (line 519)
+* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 523)
+* \pi: Math symbols. (line 526)
+* \pm: Math symbols. (line 530)
+* \pmod: Math functions. (line 87)
+* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 113)
+* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 114)
+* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 47)
+* \Pr: Math functions. (line 90)
+* \prec: Math symbols. (line 533)
+* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 536)
+* \prime: Math symbols. (line 541)
+* \printglossaries: Glossaries. (line 6)
+* \printglossaries <1>: Glossaries. (line 43)
+* \printindex: \printindex. (line 6)
+* \printindex <1>: \printindex. (line 10)
+* \ProcessOptions: Class and package commands.
+ (line 243)
+* \ProcessOptions*: Class and package commands.
+ (line 243)
+* \prod: Math symbols. (line 550)
+* \propto: Math symbols. (line 553)
+* \protect: \protect. (line 6)
+* \providecommand: \providecommand. (line 6)
+* \ProvidesClass: Class and package commands.
+ (line 281)
+* \ProvidesFile: Class and package commands.
+ (line 314)
+* \ProvidesPackage: Class and package commands.
+ (line 281)
+* \ps: \ps. (line 6)
+* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 556)
+* \psi: Math symbols. (line 559)
+* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 116)
+* \put: \put. (line 6)
+* \qbezier: \qbezier. (line 6)
+* \qquad: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 57)
+* \qquad <1>: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
+ (line 6)
+* \quad: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 51)
+* \quad <1>: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
+ (line 6)
+* \quotedblbase (,,): Text symbols. (line 51)
+* \quotesinglbase (,): Text symbols. (line 52)
+* \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 75)
+* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 6)
+* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 6)
+* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 6)
+* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 6)
+* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 562)
+* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 567)
+* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 571)
+* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 575)
+* \Re: Math symbols. (line 578)
+* \ref: \ref. (line 6)
+* \reflectbox: \scalebox. (line 6)
+* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 6)
+* \renewenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* \RequirePackage: Class and package commands.
+ (line 323)
+* \RequirePackageWithOptions: Class and package commands.
+ (line 323)
+* \resizebox: \resizebox. (line 6)
+* \restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
+ (line 6)
+* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 583)
+* \revemptyset: Math symbols. (line 588)
+* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 22)
+* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 593)
+* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 597)
+* \rho: Math symbols. (line 604)
+* \right: \left & \right. (line 6)
+* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 608)
+* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 613)
+* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 617)
+* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 620)
+* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 623)
+* \rightmargin: list. (line 171)
+* \rm: Font styles. (line 83)
+* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 30)
+* \roman{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 27)
+* \Roman{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 32)
+* \rotatebox: \rotatebox. (line 6)
+* \rq: Text symbols. (line 55)
+* \rule: \rule. (line 6)
+* \S: Text symbols. (line 58)
+* \savebox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 6)
+* \sbox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 6)
+* \sc: Font styles. (line 86)
+* \scalebox: \scalebox. (line 6)
+* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \scshape: Font styles. (line 51)
+* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 626)
+* \sec: Math functions. (line 93)
+* \section: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* \section <1>: \section. (line 6)
+* \seename: \index. (line 56)
+* \selectfont: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 131)
+* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 6)
+* \setlength: \setlength. (line 6)
+* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 629)
+* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 6)
+* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 6)
+* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 6)
+* \sf: Font styles. (line 89)
+* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 48)
+* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 635)
+* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 6)
+* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 638)
+* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 641)
+* \signature: \signature. (line 11)
+* \sim: Math symbols. (line 645)
+* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 648)
+* \sin: Math functions. (line 96)
+* \sinh: Math functions. (line 99)
+* \sl: Font styles. (line 92)
+* \sloppy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6)
+* \slshape: Font styles. (line 45)
+* \small: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 651)
+* \smallskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 38)
+* \smallskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 39)
+* \smile: Math symbols. (line 655)
+* \SPACE: \(SPACE). (line 6)
+* \spacefactor: \spacefactor. (line 10)
+* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 658)
+* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 661)
+* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 665)
+* \sqrt: \sqrt. (line 6)
+* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 669)
+* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 674)
+* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 679)
+* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 684)
+* \ss (ss): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 52)
+* \SS (SS): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 52)
+* \stackrel: \stackrel. (line 6)
+* \star: Math symbols. (line 689)
+* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 6)
+* \stop: Recovering from errors.
+ (line 23)
+* \strut: \strut. (line 6)
+* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* \subparagraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 6)
+* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* \subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 6)
+* \subset: Math symbols. (line 697)
+* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 700)
+* \subsubsection: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 6)
+* \succ: Math symbols. (line 703)
+* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 707)
+* \sum: Math symbols. (line 712)
+* \sup: Math functions. (line 102)
+* \suppressfloats: Floats. (line 87)
+* \supset: Math symbols. (line 716)
+* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 719)
+* \surd: Math symbols. (line 722)
+* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 727)
+* \symbol: Symbols by font position.
+ (line 6)
+* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 81)
+* \TAB: \(SPACE). (line 6)
+* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 121)
+* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 172)
+* \tableofcontents: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 6)
+* \tan: Math functions. (line 105)
+* \tanh: Math functions. (line 108)
+* \tau: Math symbols. (line 730)
+* \telephone: \telephone. (line 6)
+* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 62)
+* \textascendercompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 100)
+* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 65)
+* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 68)
+* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 71)
+* \textbackslash: Reserved characters. (line 20)
+* \textbackslash <1>: Text symbols. (line 74)
+* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 77)
+* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 80)
+* \textbf: Font styles. (line 39)
+* \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 83)
+* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 86)
+* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 89)
+* \textbullet: Text symbols. (line 92)
+* \textcapitalcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 99)
+* \textcircled{LETTER}: Text symbols. (line 95)
+* \textcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 98)
+* \textcopyright: Text symbols. (line 12)
+* \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 107)
+* \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 110)
+* \textdollar (or \$): Text symbols. (line 113)
+* \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 36)
+* \textemdash (or ---): Text symbols. (line 116)
+* \textendash (or --): Text symbols. (line 121)
+* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 124)
+* \textexclamdown (or !`): Text symbols. (line 130)
+* \textfloatsep: Floats. (line 123)
+* \textfloatsep <1>: Floats. (line 124)
+* \textfraction: Floats. (line 102)
+* \textfraction <1>: Floats. (line 103)
+* \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 133)
+* \textheight: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 91)
+* \textheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 92)
+* \textit: Font styles. (line 33)
+* \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 139)
+* \textless: Text symbols. (line 136)
+* \textmd: Font styles. (line 36)
+* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 57)
+* \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 142)
+* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 143)
+* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 44)
+* \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 146)
+* \textquestiondown (or ?`): Text symbols. (line 149)
+* \textquotedblleft (or ``): Text symbols. (line 152)
+* \textquotedblright (or ''): Text symbols. (line 155)
+* \textquoteleft (or `): Text symbols. (line 158)
+* \textquoteright (or '): Text symbols. (line 161)
+* \textquotesingle: Text symbols. (line 164)
+* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 167)
+* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 168)
+* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 171)
+* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 174)
+* \textrm: Font styles. (line 30)
+* \textsc: Font styles. (line 51)
+* \textsection: Text symbols. (line 59)
+* \textsf: Font styles. (line 48)
+* \textsl: Font styles. (line 45)
+* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 48)
+* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 177)
+* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 180)
+* \texttt: Font styles. (line 54)
+* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 183)
+* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 186)
+* \textup: Font styles. (line 42)
+* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 189)
+* \textwidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 99)
+* \textwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 100)
+* \th (th): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 56)
+* \TH (TH): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 56)
+* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 56)
+* \theta: Math symbols. (line 733)
+* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 6)
+* \thickspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 23)
+* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 6)
+* \thinspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 32)
+* \thinspace <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 6)
+* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 6)
+* \tilde: Math accents. (line 37)
+* \times: Math symbols. (line 737)
+* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 63)
+* \to: Math symbols. (line 741)
+* \today: \today. (line 6)
+* \top: Math symbols. (line 745)
+* \topfraction: Floats. (line 107)
+* \topfraction <1>: Floats. (line 108)
+* \topmargin: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 124)
+* \topsep: list. (line 176)
+* \topskip: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 131)
+* \topskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 132)
+* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 750)
+* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 753)
+* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 759)
+* \tt: Font styles. (line 95)
+* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 54)
+* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 6)
+* \typein: \typein. (line 6)
+* \typeout: \typeout. (line 6)
+* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 85)
+* \unboldmath: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 6)
+* \unboldmath <1>: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 14)
+* \underbar: Accents. (line 51)
+* \underbrace{MATH}: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 26)
+* \underline{TEXT}: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 9)
+* \unitlength: picture. (line 25)
+* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 765)
+* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 772)
+* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 779)
+* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 783)
+* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 787)
+* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 792)
+* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 797)
+* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 802)
+* \upshape: Font styles. (line 42)
+* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 809)
+* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 812)
+* \usebox: \usebox. (line 6)
+* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 6)
+* \usefont: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 139)
+* \usepackage: Additional packages. (line 6)
+* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 89)
+* \value: \value. (line 6)
+* \vanothing: Math symbols. (line 820)
+* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 815)
+* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 825)
+* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 829)
+* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 833)
+* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 837)
+* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 841)
+* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 845)
+* \vdots: Dots. (line 34)
+* \vec: Math accents. (line 40)
+* \vector: \vector. (line 6)
+* \vee: Math symbols. (line 849)
+* \verb: \verb. (line 6)
+* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 854)
+* \vert: Math symbols. (line 870)
+* \vfill: \vfill. (line 6)
+* \vline: \vline. (line 6)
+* \vspace: \vspace. (line 6)
+* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 888)
+* \widehat: Math accents. (line 43)
+* \widetilde: Math accents. (line 46)
+* \wp: Math symbols. (line 892)
+* \wr: Math symbols. (line 895)
+* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 898)
+* \xi: Math symbols. (line 901)
+* \year: \day & \month & \year.
+ (line 6)
+* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 904)
+* \\ (for center): center. (line 16)
+* \\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 29)
+* \\ (for flushright): flushright. (line 12)
+* \\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack. (line 32)
+* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 66)
+* \\ for flushleft: flushleft. (line 14)
+* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 49)
+* \\ for tabular: tabular. (line 35)
+* \\ for verse: verse. (line 21)
+* \\ for \author: \maketitle. (line 43)
+* \\ for \title: \maketitle. (line 64)
+* \\ force line break: \\. (line 6)
+* \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 37)
+* \^: Reserved characters. (line 20)
+* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 38)
+* \_: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 42)
+* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 93)
+* \{: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \|: Math symbols. (line 18)
+* \}: Reserved characters. (line 13)
+* \~: Reserved characters. (line 20)
+* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 46)
+* ^: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 6)
+* _: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 6)
+* 'see' and 'see also' index entries: \index. (line 56)
+* {...} for required arguments: LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 6)
+* ~: ~. (line 6)
+* a4paper option: Document class options.
+ (line 19)
+* a5paper option: Document class options.
+ (line 19)
+* abstract environment: abstract. (line 6)
+* abstracts: abstract. (line 6)
+* accents: Accents. (line 6)
+* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 6)
+* accessing any character of a font: Symbols by font position.
+ (line 6)
+* acronyms, list of: Glossaries. (line 6)
+* acute accent: Accents. (line 27)
+* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 11)
+* additional packages, loading: Additional packages. (line 6)
+* ae ligature: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 16)
+* algorithm2e package: tabbing. (line 146)
+* align environment, from amsmath: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* aligning equations: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 6)
+* amsfonts package: Math formulas. (line 86)
+* amsmath package: array. (line 55)
+* amsmath package <1>: array. (line 66)
+* amsmath package <2>: displaymath. (line 22)
+* amsmath package <3>: equation. (line 20)
+* amsmath package <4>: theorem. (line 28)
+* amsmath package <5>: Math formulas. (line 86)
+* amsmath package <6>: Dots. (line 37)
+* amsmath package <7>: Math functions. (line 111)
+* amsmath package <8>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 44)
+* amsmath package <9>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 15)
+* amsmath package <10>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 19)
+* amsmath package, replacing eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* amsthm package: theorem. (line 28)
+* amsthm package <1>: \rule. (line 18)
+* appendices: \appendix. (line 6)
+* appendix: \appendix. (line 6)
+* appendix package: \appendix. (line 29)
+* aring: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12)
+* array (package) package: array. (line 77)
+* array environment: array. (line 6)
+* arrays, math: array. (line 6)
+* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 140)
+* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 175)
+* article class: Document classes. (line 11)
+* ascender height: Text symbols. (line 101)
+* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 66)
+* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 69)
+* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 72)
+* Asymptote package: \line. (line 36)
+* Asymptote package <1>: \strut. (line 62)
+* Asymptote package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 73)
+* at clause, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 19)
+* at-sign: \@. (line 6)
+* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 43)
+* auxiliary file: Output files. (line 33)
+* b5paper option: Document class options.
+ (line 19)
+* babel package: \chapter. (line 71)
+* babel package <1>: thebibliography. (line 53)
+* babel package <2>: Accents. (line 6)
+* babel package <3>: \today. (line 13)
+* babel package <4>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 80)
+* babel package <5>: \index. (line 56)
+* background, colored: Colored pages. (line 6)
+* backslash, in text: Text symbols. (line 75)
+* bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 81)
+* bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 78)
+* bar-over accent: Accents. (line 34)
+* bar-over accent, math: Math accents. (line 14)
+* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 49)
+* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 6)
+* beamer template and class: beamer template. (line 6)
+* beginning of document hook: \AtBeginDocument. (line 6)
+* bibliography format, open: Document class options.
+ (line 67)
+* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 6)
+* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 6)
+* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
+* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 84)
+* Big point: Units of length. (line 20)
+* bigfoot package: Footnotes of footnotes.
+ (line 6)
+* black boxes, omitting: Document class options.
+ (line 53)
+* blackboard bold: Blackboard bold. (line 6)
+* bm package: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 32)
+* bold font: Font styles. (line 75)
+* bold math: Font styles. (line 128)
+* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 36)
+* boldface mathematics: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 6)
+* book class: Document classes. (line 11)
+* book, back matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 6)
+* book, end matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 6)
+* book, front matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 6)
+* book, main matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 6)
+* bottomnumber: Floats. (line 130)
+* bottomnumber <1>: Floats. (line 131)
+* box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 6)
+* box, allocating new: \newsavebox. (line 6)
+* box, colored: Colored boxes. (line 6)
+* box, save: \sbox & \savebox. (line 6)
+* box, use saved box: \usebox. (line 6)
+* boxes: Boxes. (line 6)
+* bp: Units of length. (line 20)
+* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 87)
+* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 90)
+* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 6)
+* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 6)
+* breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*. (line 6)
+* breve accent: Accents. (line 85)
+* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 17)
+* bug reporting: About this document. (line 29)
+* bullet lists: itemize. (line 6)
+* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 113)
+* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 93)
+* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 6)
+* calligraphic fonts: Calligraphic. (line 6)
+* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 78)
+* cap height: Text symbols. (line 101)
+* caron accent: Accents. (line 89)
+* catcode: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+ (line 19)
+* category code, character: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+ (line 19)
+* cc: Units of length. (line 33)
+* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 6)
+* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 59)
+* center environment: center. (line 6)
+* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 72)
+* centered equations: Document class options.
+ (line 57)
+* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 147)
+* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 6)
+* centering text, environment for: center. (line 6)
+* Centimeter: Units of length. (line 24)
+* chapter: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* chapter <1>: \chapter. (line 6)
+* character category code: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+ (line 19)
+* character, invisible: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 6)
+* characters, accented: Accents. (line 6)
+* characters, case of: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 6)
+* characters, non-English: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 6)
+* characters, reserved: Reserved characters. (line 6)
+* characters, special: Reserved characters. (line 6)
+* check accent: Accents. (line 89)
+* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 20)
+* Cicero: Units of length. (line 33)
+* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 84)
+* circled letter, in text: Text symbols. (line 96)
+* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 38)
+* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 32)
+* circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 66)
+* citation key: \bibitem. (line 15)
+* class and package commands: Class and package commands.
+ (line 6)
+* class and package difference: Class and package construction.
+ (line 15)
+* class and package structure: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
+* class file example: Class and package structure.
+ (line 39)
+* class file layout: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
+* class options: Document class options.
+ (line 6)
+* class options <1>: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
+* class options <2>: Class and package commands.
+ (line 66)
+* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 6)
+* cleveref package: Cross references. (line 38)
+* cleveref package <1>: \ref. (line 29)
+* cleveref package <2>: \footnotemark. (line 48)
+* clock option to slides class: Document class options.
+ (line 99)
+* closing letters: \closing. (line 6)
+* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 56)
+* cm: Units of length. (line 24)
+* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6)
+* colon character: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 6)
+* color: Color. (line 6)
+* color <1>: Define colors. (line 6)
+* color <2>: Colored text. (line 6)
+* color <3>: Colored boxes. (line 6)
+* color <4>: Colored pages. (line 6)
+* color models: Color models. (line 6)
+* color package commands: Commands for color. (line 6)
+* color package options: Color package options.
+ (line 6)
+* color, define: Define colors. (line 6)
+* colored boxes: Colored boxes. (line 6)
+* colored page: Colored pages. (line 6)
+* colored text: Colored text. (line 6)
+* command line: Command line. (line 6)
+* command syntax: LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 6)
+* commands, class and package: Class and package commands.
+ (line 6)
+* commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
+* commands, defining new ones <1>: \providecommand. (line 6)
+* commands, document class: Class and package construction.
+ (line 6)
+* commands, graphics package: Commands for graphics.
+ (line 6)
+* commands, ignore spaces: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
+ (line 6)
+* commands, redefining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
+* commands, star-variants: \@ifstar. (line 6)
+* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 101)
+* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6)
+* configuration, graphics package: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 6)
+* contents file: Output files. (line 43)
+* copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 13)
+* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 6)
+* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 6)
+* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 6)
+* counters, printing: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 6)
+* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 6)
+* cprotect package: verbatim. (line 26)
+* cprotect package <1>: \verb. (line 45)
+* creating pictures: picture. (line 6)
+* creating tables: table. (line 6)
+* credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 57)
+* cross references: Cross references. (line 6)
+* cross references, resolving: Output files. (line 33)
+* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 6)
+* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 6)
+* CTAN: CTAN. (line 6)
+* currency, dollar: Text symbols. (line 114)
+* currency, euro: Text symbols. (line 125)
+* dagger, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 111)
+* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 16)
+* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 108)
+* DANTE e.V.: CTAN. (line 20)
+* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 51)
+* date, today's: \today. (line 6)
+* datetime package: \today. (line 27)
+* dbltopnumber: Floats. (line 134)
+* dbltopnumber <1>: Floats. (line 135)
+* dcolumn package: array. (line 77)
+* dd: Units of length. (line 30)
+* define color: Define colors. (line 6)
+* defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
+* defining a new command <1>: \providecommand. (line 6)
+* defining new environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 6)
+* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 6)
+* definitions: Definitions. (line 6)
+* delimiters, paired: \left & \right. (line 6)
+* delim_0: makeindex. (line 110)
+* delim_1: makeindex. (line 114)
+* delim_2: makeindex. (line 118)
+* delim_n: makeindex. (line 122)
+* delim_r: makeindex. (line 126)
+* description: \newglossaryentry. (line 46)
+* description environment: description. (line 6)
+* description lists, creating: description. (line 6)
+* design size, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 19)
+* Didot point: Units of length. (line 30)
+* dieresis accent: Accents. (line 23)
+* difference between class and package: Class and package construction.
+ (line 15)
+* discretionary breaks, multiplication: \*. (line 6)
+* discretionary hyphenation: \discretionary. (line 6)
+* display math mode: Modes. (line 29)
+* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation & quote.
+ (line 6)
+* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quotation & quote.
+ (line 6)
+* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 6)
+* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* document class commands: Class and package construction.
+ (line 6)
+* document class options: Document class options.
+ (line 6)
+* document class, defined: Starting and ending. (line 17)
+* document classes: Document classes. (line 6)
+* document environment: document. (line 6)
+* document templates: Document templates. (line 6)
+* dollar sign: Text symbols. (line 114)
+* dot accent: Accents. (line 30)
+* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 26)
+* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 30)
+* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 63)
+* dotless i: Accents. (line 17)
+* dotless i, math: Math symbols. (line 265)
+* dotless j: Accents. (line 17)
+* dotless j, math: Math symbols. (line 287)
+* dots: Dots. (line 6)
+* double angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 31)
+* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 19)
+* double dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 111)
+* double dot accent, math: Math accents. (line 23)
+* double guillemets: Text symbols. (line 31)
+* double left quote: Text symbols. (line 153)
+* double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 53)
+* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 169)
+* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 156)
+* double spacing: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 118)
+* double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 81)
+* doublestruck: Blackboard bold. (line 6)
+* draft option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* dvipdfmx command: Output files. (line 10)
+* dvips command: Output files. (line 10)
+* dvitype command: Output files. (line 10)
+* e-dash: Text symbols. (line 122)
+* e-TeX: TeX engines. (line 13)
+* ellipses: Dots. (line 6)
+* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 37)
+* em: Units of length. (line 38)
+* em <1>: Units of length. (line 38)
+* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 117)
+* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 178)
+* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 184)
+* emphasis: Font styles. (line 59)
+* enclosure list: \encl. (line 6)
+* end of document hook: \AtEndDocument. (line 6)
+* ending and starting: Starting and ending. (line 6)
+* engines, TeX: TeX engines. (line 6)
+* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 6)
+* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 6)
+* enumitem package: list. (line 253)
+* environment: Starting and ending. (line 25)
+* environment, abstract: abstract. (line 6)
+* environment, array: array. (line 6)
+* environment, center: center. (line 6)
+* environment, description: description. (line 6)
+* environment, displaymath: displaymath. (line 6)
+* environment, displaymath <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* environment, document: document. (line 6)
+* environment, enumerate: enumerate. (line 6)
+* environment, eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* environment, equation: equation. (line 6)
+* environment, equation <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* environment, figure: figure. (line 6)
+* environment, filecontents: filecontents. (line 6)
+* environment, filecontents*: filecontents. (line 6)
+* environment, flushleft: flushleft. (line 6)
+* environment, flushright: flushright. (line 6)
+* environment, itemize: itemize. (line 6)
+* environment, letter: letter. (line 6)
+* environment, list: list. (line 6)
+* environment, math: math. (line 6)
+* environment, math <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* environment, minipage: minipage. (line 6)
+* environment, picture: picture. (line 6)
+* environment, quotation: quotation & quote. (line 6)
+* environment, quote: quotation & quote. (line 6)
+* environment, tabbing: tabbing. (line 6)
+* environment, table: table. (line 6)
+* environment, tabular: tabular. (line 6)
+* environment, thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 6)
+* environment, theorem: theorem. (line 6)
+* environment, theorem-like: \newtheorem. (line 6)
+* environment, titlepage: titlepage. (line 6)
+* environment, verbatim: verbatim. (line 6)
+* environment, verse: verse. (line 6)
+* environments: Environments. (line 6)
+* environments, defining: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* envlab package: \makelabels. (line 55)
+* EPS files: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 6)
+* EPS files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 6)
+* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* equation environment: equation. (line 6)
+* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
+* equation numbers, left vs. right: Document class options.
+ (line 63)
+* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 41)
+* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* equations, environment for: equation. (line 6)
+* equations, flush left vs. centered: Document class options.
+ (line 57)
+* es-zet German letter: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 52)
+* etex command: TeX engines. (line 13)
+* eth, Icelandic letter: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 20)
+* etoolbox package: Class and package commands.
+ (line 110)
+* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 125)
+* eurosym package: Text symbols. (line 125)
+* ex: Units of length. (line 38)
+* ex <1>: Units of length. (line 38)
+* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 131)
+* executivepaper option: Document class options.
+ (line 19)
+* exponent: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 6)
+* extended Latin: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 6)
+* external files, writing: filecontents. (line 6)
+* families, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 21)
+* fancyhdr package: Page styles. (line 12)
+* fancyhdr package <1>: \pagestyle. (line 13)
+* fancyvrb package: tabbing. (line 146)
+* fancyvrb package <1>: verbatim. (line 37)
+* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 144)
+* figure environment: figure. (line 6)
+* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
+* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 107)
+* figures, inserting: figure. (line 6)
+* file, root: Splitting the input. (line 10)
+* filecontents environment: filecontents. (line 6)
+* filecontents* environment: filecontents. (line 6)
+* final option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* first-latex-doc document: About this document. (line 41)
+* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 96)
+* flafter package: Floats. (line 82)
+* fleqn option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* float package: Floats. (line 52)
+* float page: Floats. (line 58)
+* flush left equations: Document class options.
+ (line 57)
+* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+ (line 6)
+* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 6)
+* flushright environment: flushright. (line 6)
+* font catalogue: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 21)
+* font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 6)
+* font size: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 101)
+* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 6)
+* font styles: Font styles. (line 6)
+* font symbols, by number: Symbols by font position.
+ (line 6)
+* fonts: Fonts. (line 6)
+* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 6)
+* fonts, script: Calligraphic. (line 6)
+* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 6)
+* footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
+* footnote parameters: \footnote. (line 34)
+* footnote, in a table: Footnotes in a table.
+ (line 6)
+* footnote, in section headings: Footnotes in section headings.
+ (line 6)
+* footnote, of a footnote: Footnotes of footnotes.
+ (line 6)
+* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 107)
+* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 6)
+* Footnotes, in a minipage: \footnote. (line 62)
+* footnotes, symbols instead of numbers: \footnote. (line 24)
+* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 6)
+* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* forward reference: Cross references. (line 27)
+* forward references, resolving: Output files. (line 33)
+* fraction: \frac. (line 6)
+* fragile commands: \protect. (line 6)
+* frame rule width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 39)
+* frame, line width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 39)
+* frame, separation from contents: \fbox & \framebox. (line 44)
+* French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 31)
+* functions, math: Math functions. (line 6)
+* geometry package: Document class options.
+ (line 40)
+* geometry package <1>: Document class options.
+ (line 44)
+* global options: Document class options.
+ (line 6)
+* global options <1>: Additional packages. (line 15)
+* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 6)
+* glossary: Glossaries. (line 6)
+* glossary, entries: \newglossaryentry. (line 6)
+* glossary, entry reference: \gls. (line 6)
+* glue register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 6)
+* graphics: Graphics. (line 6)
+* graphics <1>: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 6)
+* graphics <2>: \includegraphics. (line 6)
+* graphics package: Graphics. (line 6)
+* graphics package <1>: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 6)
+* graphics package <2>: \includegraphics. (line 6)
+* graphics package commands: Commands for graphics.
+ (line 6)
+* graphics package options: Graphics package options.
+ (line 6)
+* graphics packages: \line. (line 36)
+* graphics, resizing: \scalebox. (line 6)
+* graphics, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 6)
+* graphics, scaling: \scalebox. (line 6)
+* graphics, scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 6)
+* grave accent: Accents. (line 42)
+* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 29)
+* greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 134)
+* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 6)
+* group, and environments: Environments. (line 18)
+* group_skip: makeindex. (line 57)
+* ha'c<ek accent, math: Math accents. (line 20)
+* hacek accent: Accents. (line 89)
+* Halmos symbol: \rule. (line 13)
+* hat accent: Accents. (line 38)
+* hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 32)
+* header style: \pagestyle. (line 6)
+* header, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* hello, world: Starting and ending. (line 6)
+* here, putting floats: Floats. (line 52)
+* home page for manual: About this document. (line 6)
+* horizontal space: \hss. (line 6)
+* horizontal space, stretchable: \hss. (line 6)
+* horizontal spacing: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 6)
+* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 67)
+* hyperref package: \footnotemark. (line 48)
+* hyperref package <1>: \footnotemark. (line 57)
+* hyperref package <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 45)
+* hyperref package <3>: Command line input. (line 10)
+* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 6)
+* hyphenation, discretionary: \discretionary. (line 6)
+* hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 6)
+* hyphenation, preventing: \mbox & \makebox. (line 6)
+* Icelandic eth: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 20)
+* Icelandic thorn: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 56)
+* idx file: \index. (line 106)
+* ij letter, Dutch: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 32)
+* implementations of TeX: TeX engines. (line 6)
+* importing graphics: \includegraphics. (line 6)
+* in: Units of length. (line 17)
+* in-line formulas: math. (line 6)
+* inch: Units of length. (line 17)
+* including graphics: \includegraphics. (line 6)
+* indent, forcing: \indent & \noindent. (line 6)
+* indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage. (line 103)
+* indentfirst package: \part. (line 50)
+* indentfirst package <1>: \chapter. (line 58)
+* indentfirst package <2>: \section. (line 60)
+* indentfirst package <3>: \subsection. (line 48)
+* indentfirst package <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 61)
+* indentfirst package <5>: \indent & \noindent. (line 48)
+* indent_length: makeindex. (line 138)
+* indent_space: makeindex. (line 134)
+* index entries, 'see' and 'see also': \index. (line 56)
+* index entry: \index. (line 6)
+* index package: \index. (line 101)
+* index, page range: \index. (line 40)
+* index, printing: \printindex. (line 6)
+* index, processing: makeindex. (line 6)
+* index, style file: makeindex. (line 18)
+* indexes: Indexes. (line 6)
+* infinite horizontal stretch: \hfill. (line 6)
+* infinite vertical stretch: \vfill. (line 6)
+* inner paragraph mode: Modes. (line 47)
+* input file: Splitting the input. (line 6)
+* input, on command line: Command line input. (line 6)
+* input/output, to terminal: Terminal input/output.
+ (line 6)
+* inserting figures: figure. (line 6)
+* insertions of special characters: Special insertions. (line 6)
+* internal vertical mode: Modes. (line 38)
+* invisible character: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 6)
+* italic correction: \/. (line 6)
+* italic font: Font styles. (line 81)
+* itemize environment: itemize. (line 6)
+* item_0: makeindex. (line 81)
+* item_01: makeindex. (line 90)
+* item_1: makeindex. (line 84)
+* item_12: makeindex. (line 100)
+* item_2: makeindex. (line 87)
+* item_x1: makeindex. (line 94)
+* item_x2: makeindex. (line 104)
+* JPEG files: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 6)
+* JPEG files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 6)
+* JPG files: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 6)
+* JPG files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 6)
+* justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 6)
+* justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 6)
+* Knuth, Donald E.: Overview. (line 6)
+* label: Cross references. (line 6)
+* labelled lists, creating: description. (line 6)
+* Lamport TeX: Overview. (line 24)
+* Lamport, Leslie: Overview. (line 6)
+* landscape option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* landscape orientation: Document class options.
+ (line 60)
+* latex command: Output files. (line 10)
+* LaTeX logo: Text symbols. (line 22)
+* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 6)
+* LaTeX Project team: About this document. (line 25)
+* LaTeX vs. LaTeX2e: About this document. (line 21)
+* latex-doc-ptr document: About this document. (line 38)
+* LaTeX2e logo: Text symbols. (line 25)
+* <latexrefman@tug.org> email address: About this document. (line 25)
+* Latin letters, additional: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 6)
+* layout commands: Layout. (line 6)
+* layout, page parameters for: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* left angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 31)
+* left arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 140)
+* left brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 87)
+* left quote: Text symbols. (line 41)
+* left quote, double: Text symbols. (line 153)
+* left quote, single: Text symbols. (line 159)
+* left-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
+ (line 63)
+* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 6)
+* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6)
+* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 16)
+* legalpaper option: Document class options.
+ (line 19)
+* lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 6)
+* lengths, allocating new: \newlength. (line 6)
+* lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 6)
+* lengths, setting: \setlength. (line 6)
+* leqno option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* less than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 137)
+* lethead_flag: makeindex. (line 64)
+* lethead_prefix: makeindex. (line 73)
+* lethead_suffix: makeindex. (line 77)
+* letter class: Document classes. (line 11)
+* letter environment: letter. (line 6)
+* letterpaper option: Document class options.
+ (line 19)
+* letters, accented: Accents. (line 6)
+* letters, additional Latin: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 6)
+* letters, ending: \closing. (line 6)
+* letters, starting: \opening. (line 6)
+* letters, writing: Letters. (line 6)
+* line break, forcing: \\. (line 6)
+* line breaking: Line breaking. (line 6)
+* line breaks, changing: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6)
+* line breaks, forcing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* line breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*. (line 6)
+* line breaks, preventing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* lines in tables: tabular. (line 6)
+* line_max: makeindex. (line 130)
+* lining numerals: Font styles. (line 132)
+* lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 6)
+* lining text up using tab stops: tabbing. (line 6)
+* list environment: list. (line 6)
+* list items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 6)
+* list of figures file: Output files. (line 43)
+* list of tables file: Output files. (line 43)
+* listings package: tabbing. (line 146)
+* listings package <1>: verbatim. (line 31)
+* listings package <2>: \verb. (line 42)
+* lists of items: itemize. (line 6)
+* lists of items, generic: list. (line 6)
+* lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 6)
+* loading additional packages: Additional packages. (line 6)
+* log file: Output files. (line 28)
+* logo, LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 22)
+* logo, LaTeX2e: Text symbols. (line 25)
+* logo, TeX: Text symbols. (line 63)
+* long command: Class and package commands.
+ (line 23)
+* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols. (line 53)
+* low-level font commands: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 6)
+* lowercase: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 6)
+* LR box: picture. (line 103)
+* LR mode: Modes. (line 16)
+* lrbox: lrbox. (line 6)
+* lshort document: About this document. (line 49)
+* ltugboat class: tugboat template. (line 6)
+* lualatex command: TeX engines. (line 30)
+* LuaTeX: TeX engines. (line 30)
+* m-width: Units of length. (line 38)
+* macro package, LaTeX as: Overview. (line 11)
+* macron accent: Accents. (line 34)
+* macron accent, math: Math accents. (line 14)
+* macros2e package: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+ (line 43)
+* Madsen, Lars: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* make a box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 6)
+* makeindex: makeindex. (line 6)
+* makeindex program: makeindex. (line 6)
+* makeindex, style file: makeindex. (line 18)
+* making a title page: titlepage. (line 6)
+* making paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 6)
+* marginal notes: Marginal notes. (line 6)
+* masculine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 144)
+* matching brackets: \left & \right. (line 6)
+* matching parentheses: \left & \right. (line 6)
+* math accents: Math accents. (line 6)
+* math environment: math. (line 6)
+* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* math formulas: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* math functions: Math functions. (line 6)
+* math miscellany: Math miscellany. (line 6)
+* math mode: Modes. (line 26)
+* math mode, entering: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* math mode, spacing: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 6)
+* math mode, spacing <1>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 6)
+* math mode, vertical space: \smash. (line 6)
+* math symbols: Math symbols. (line 6)
+* math, bold: Font styles. (line 128)
+* mathtools package: Math formulas. (line 86)
+* mathtools package <1>: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 45)
+* mathtools package <2>: \smash. (line 61)
+* mathtools package <3>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 36)
+* MetaPost package: \line. (line 36)
+* mfirstuc package: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 45)
+* mhchem package: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 62)
+* Millimeter: Units of length. (line 27)
+* minipage environment: minipage. (line 6)
+* minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 6)
+* minted package: tabbing. (line 146)
+* minted package <1>: verbatim. (line 31)
+* minted package <2>: \verb. (line 42)
+* mirrors of CTAN: CTAN. (line 20)
+* mm: Units of length. (line 27)
+* modes: Modes. (line 6)
+* monospace font: Font styles. (line 96)
+* moving arguments: \protect. (line 19)
+* mpfootnote counter: \footnote. (line 62)
+* mu: Units of length. (line 49)
+* mu, math unit: Units of length. (line 49)
+* multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 6)
+* multilingual support: Accents. (line 6)
+* multind package: Indexes. (line 32)
+* multiplication, discretionary: \*. (line 6)
+* name: \newglossaryentry. (line 43)
+* NBSP: ~. (line 6)
+* nested \include, not allowed: \include & \includeonly.
+ (line 104)
+* new class commands: Class and package construction.
+ (line 6)
+* new command, check: Class and package commands.
+ (line 21)
+* new command, definition: Class and package commands.
+ (line 96)
+* new commands, defining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
+* new commands, defining <1>: \providecommand. (line 6)
+* new line, output as input: \obeycr & \restorecr.
+ (line 6)
+* new line, starting: \\. (line 6)
+* new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 6)
+* new page, starting: \newpage. (line 6)
+* non-English characters: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 6)
+* notes in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 6)
+* notitlepage option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* null delimiter: \left & \right. (line 6)
+* numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 6)
+* numerals, old-style: Font styles. (line 132)
+* oblique font: Font styles. (line 93)
+* oe ligature: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 48)
+* ogonek: Accents. (line 71)
+* old-style numerals: Font styles. (line 132)
+* one-column output: \onecolumn. (line 6)
+* onecolumn option: Document class options.
+ (line 78)
+* oneside option: Document class options.
+ (line 78)
+* openany option: Document class options.
+ (line 78)
+* openbib option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 41)
+* openright option: Document class options.
+ (line 78)
+* OpenType fonts: TeX engines. (line 6)
+* options, class: Class and package commands.
+ (line 66)
+* options, color package: Color package options.
+ (line 6)
+* options, command line: Command line options.
+ (line 6)
+* options, document class: Document class options.
+ (line 6)
+* options, document class <1>: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
+* options, global: Additional packages. (line 15)
+* options, graphics package: Graphics package options.
+ (line 6)
+* options, package: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
+* options, package <1>: Class and package commands.
+ (line 66)
+* ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 144)
+* oslash: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 44)
+* outer paragraph mode: Modes. (line 47)
+* overbar accent: Accents. (line 34)
+* overdot accent, math: Math accents. (line 26)
+* overlining: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 6)
+* overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 6)
+* package file layout: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
+* package options: Class and package structure.
+ (line 6)
+* package options <1>: Class and package commands.
+ (line 66)
+* package, algorithm2e: tabbing. (line 146)
+* package, amsfonts: Math formulas. (line 86)
+* package, amsmath: array. (line 55)
+* package, amsmath <1>: array. (line 66)
+* package, amsmath <2>: displaymath. (line 22)
+* package, amsmath <3>: equation. (line 20)
+* package, amsmath <4>: theorem. (line 28)
+* package, amsmath <5>: Math formulas. (line 86)
+* package, amsmath <6>: Dots. (line 37)
+* package, amsmath <7>: Math functions. (line 111)
+* package, amsmath <8>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 44)
+* package, amsmath <9>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 15)
+* package, amsmath <10>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 19)
+* package, amsthm: theorem. (line 28)
+* package, amsthm <1>: \rule. (line 18)
+* package, appendix: \appendix. (line 29)
+* package, array (package): array. (line 77)
+* package, Asymptote: \line. (line 36)
+* package, Asymptote <1>: \strut. (line 62)
+* package, Asymptote <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 73)
+* package, babel: \chapter. (line 71)
+* package, babel <1>: thebibliography. (line 53)
+* package, babel <2>: Accents. (line 6)
+* package, babel <3>: \today. (line 13)
+* package, babel <4>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 80)
+* package, babel <5>: \index. (line 56)
+* package, bigfoot: Footnotes of footnotes.
+ (line 6)
+* package, bm: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 32)
+* package, cleveref: Cross references. (line 38)
+* package, cleveref <1>: \ref. (line 29)
+* package, cleveref <2>: \footnotemark. (line 48)
+* package, cprotect: verbatim. (line 26)
+* package, cprotect <1>: \verb. (line 45)
+* package, datetime: \today. (line 27)
+* package, dcolumn: array. (line 77)
+* package, enumitem: list. (line 253)
+* package, envlab: \makelabels. (line 55)
+* package, etoolbox: Class and package commands.
+ (line 110)
+* package, eurosym: Text symbols. (line 125)
+* package, fancyhdr: Page styles. (line 12)
+* package, fancyhdr <1>: \pagestyle. (line 13)
+* package, fancyvrb: tabbing. (line 146)
+* package, fancyvrb <1>: verbatim. (line 37)
+* package, flafter: Floats. (line 82)
+* package, float: Floats. (line 52)
+* package, geometry: Document class options.
+ (line 40)
+* package, geometry <1>: Document class options.
+ (line 44)
+* package, hyperref: \footnotemark. (line 48)
+* package, hyperref <1>: \footnotemark. (line 57)
+* package, hyperref <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 45)
+* package, hyperref <3>: Command line input. (line 10)
+* package, indentfirst: \part. (line 50)
+* package, indentfirst <1>: \chapter. (line 58)
+* package, indentfirst <2>: \section. (line 60)
+* package, indentfirst <3>: \subsection. (line 48)
+* package, indentfirst <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 61)
+* package, indentfirst <5>: \indent & \noindent. (line 48)
+* package, index: \index. (line 101)
+* package, listings: tabbing. (line 146)
+* package, listings <1>: verbatim. (line 31)
+* package, listings <2>: \verb. (line 42)
+* package, macros2e: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+ (line 43)
+* package, mathtools: Math formulas. (line 86)
+* package, mathtools <1>: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 45)
+* package, mathtools <2>: \smash. (line 61)
+* package, mathtools <3>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 36)
+* package, MetaPost: \line. (line 36)
+* package, mfirstuc: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 45)
+* package, mhchem: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 62)
+* package, minted: tabbing. (line 146)
+* package, minted <1>: verbatim. (line 31)
+* package, minted <2>: \verb. (line 42)
+* package, multind: Indexes. (line 32)
+* package, pict2e: \line. (line 36)
+* package, polyglossia: Accents. (line 6)
+* package, polyglossia <1>: \today. (line 13)
+* package, polyglossia <2>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 80)
+* package, polyglossia <3>: \index. (line 56)
+* package, PSTricks: \line. (line 36)
+* package, sagetex: Command line options.
+ (line 62)
+* package, setspace: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 118)
+* package, showidx: Indexes. (line 32)
+* package, siunitx: ~. (line 32)
+* package, symbols: Math symbols. (line 6)
+* package, textcase: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 42)
+* package, textcomp: Font styles. (line 132)
+* package, TikZ: \line. (line 36)
+* package, TikZ <1>: \strut. (line 62)
+* package, TikZ <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 72)
+* package, titlesec: \part. (line 54)
+* package, titlesec <1>: \chapter. (line 79)
+* package, titlesec <2>: \section. (line 64)
+* package, titlesec <3>: \subsection. (line 52)
+* package, titlesec <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 65)
+* package, tocbibbind: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 91)
+* package, tocloft: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 91)
+* package, ulem: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 15)
+* package, url: \verb. (line 38)
+* package, verbatimbox: verbatim. (line 37)
+* packages, loading additional: Additional packages. (line 6)
+* page break, forcing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* page break, preventing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* page breaking: Page breaking. (line 6)
+* page layout parameters: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* page number, cross referencing: \pageref. (line 6)
+* page numbering style: \pagenumbering. (line 6)
+* page style, this page: \thispagestyle. (line 6)
+* page styles: Page styles. (line 6)
+* page, colored: Colored pages. (line 6)
+* page_precedence: makeindex. (line 143)
+* paired delimiters: \left & \right. (line 6)
+* paragraph: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* paragraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 6)
+* paragraph indentation: \parindent & \parskip.
+ (line 6)
+* paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage. (line 103)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation & quote. (line 6)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quotation & quote.
+ (line 6)
+* paragraph mode: Modes. (line 12)
+* paragraph mode <1>: \parbox. (line 6)
+* paragraph symbol: Text symbols. (line 45)
+* paragraph, ending: \par. (line 6)
+* paragraph, in a box: \parbox. (line 6)
+* paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 6)
+* parameters, for footnotes: \footnote. (line 34)
+* parameters, page layout: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* part: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* part <1>: \part. (line 6)
+* pc: Units of length. (line 14)
+* PDF graphic files: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 6)
+* PDF graphic files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 6)
+* pdflatex command: Output files. (line 20)
+* pdfTeX: Output files. (line 20)
+* pdfTeX engine: TeX engines. (line 13)
+* period, abbreviation-ending: \@. (line 6)
+* period, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 147)
+* period, sentence-ending: \@. (line 6)
+* period, spacing after: \@. (line 6)
+* pica: Units of length. (line 14)
+* pict2e package: \line. (line 36)
+* pict2e package <1>: \line. (line 36)
+* picture environment: picture. (line 6)
+* pictures, creating: picture. (line 6)
+* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 45)
+* placement of floats: Floats. (line 31)
+* plural: \newglossaryentry. (line 51)
+* PNG files: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 6)
+* PNG files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 6)
+* poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 6)
+* Point: Units of length. (line 10)
+* polish l: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 36)
+* polyglossia package: Accents. (line 6)
+* polyglossia package <1>: \today. (line 13)
+* polyglossia package <2>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 80)
+* polyglossia package <3>: \index. (line 56)
+* portrait orientation: Document class options.
+ (line 60)
+* position, in picture: picture. (line 77)
+* positional parameter: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 52)
+* postamble: makeindex. (line 54)
+* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 6)
+* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 49)
+* preamble: makeindex. (line 50)
+* preamble, defined: Starting and ending. (line 22)
+* prompt, *: Recovering from errors.
+ (line 23)
+* pronunciation: Overview. (line 24)
+* PSTricks package: \line. (line 36)
+* pt: Units of length. (line 10)
+* quad: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 51)
+* question mark, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 150)
+* quotation environment: quotation & quote. (line 6)
+* quotation marks, French: Text symbols. (line 31)
+* quote environment: quotation & quote. (line 6)
+* quote, single straight: Text symbols. (line 165)
+* quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 169)
+* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation & quote.
+ (line 6)
+* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation & quote.
+ (line 6)
+* radical: \sqrt. (line 6)
+* ragged left text: \raggedleft. (line 6)
+* ragged left text, environment for: flushright. (line 6)
+* ragged right text: \raggedright. (line 6)
+* ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6)
+* redefining environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* reference, forward: Cross references. (line 27)
+* references, resolving forward: Output files. (line 33)
+* registered symbol: Text symbols. (line 172)
+* relation, text above: \stackrel. (line 6)
+* remarks in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 6)
+* report class: Document classes. (line 11)
+* reporting bugs: About this document. (line 29)
+* reserved characters: Reserved characters. (line 6)
+* resizing: \scalebox. (line 6)
+* resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 6)
+* right angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 31)
+* right arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 175)
+* right brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 90)
+* right quote: Text symbols. (line 56)
+* right quote, double: Text symbols. (line 156)
+* right quote, single: Text symbols. (line 162)
+* right-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
+ (line 63)
+* right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 6)
+* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 6)
+* ring accent: Accents. (line 75)
+* ring accent, math: Math accents. (line 35)
+* robust commands: \protect. (line 6)
+* roman font: Font styles. (line 84)
+* root file: Splitting the input. (line 10)
+* roots: \sqrt. (line 6)
+* rotating graphics: \rotatebox. (line 6)
+* rotating text: \rotatebox. (line 6)
+* rotation: \rotatebox. (line 6)
+* row, tabbing: tabbing. (line 46)
+* rubber lengths, defining new: \newlength. (line 6)
+* running header and footer: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* running header and footer style: \pagestyle. (line 6)
+* sagetex package: Command line options.
+ (line 62)
+* sans serif font: Font styles. (line 90)
+* Scaled point: Units of length. (line 36)
+* scaling: \scalebox. (line 6)
+* scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 6)
+* script fonts: Calligraphic. (line 6)
+* script letters for math: Font styles. (line 78)
+* secnumdepth: Sectioning. (line 62)
+* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 63)
+* section: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* section <1>: \section. (line 6)
+* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
+* section numbers, printing: Sectioning. (line 63)
+* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 60)
+* section, redefining: \@startsection. (line 6)
+* sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* sectioning, part: \part. (line 6)
+* series, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 48)
+* setspace package: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 118)
+* setting counters: \setcounter. (line 6)
+* shapes, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 88)
+* sharp S letters: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 52)
+* showidx package: Indexes. (line 32)
+* simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 6)
+* single angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 31)
+* single guillemets: Text symbols. (line 31)
+* single left quote: Text symbols. (line 159)
+* single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 53)
+* single quote, straight: Text symbols. (line 165)
+* single right quote: Text symbols. (line 162)
+* siunitx package: ~. (line 32)
+* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 6)
+* skip register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 6)
+* slanted font: Font styles. (line 93)
+* slides class: Document classes. (line 11)
+* sloppypar: sloppypar. (line 6)
+* sloppypar environment: sloppypar. (line 6)
+* small caps font: Font styles. (line 87)
+* sort: \newglossaryentry. (line 55)
+* sp: Units of length. (line 36)
+* space, hard: ~. (line 6)
+* space, inserting horizontal: \hss. (line 6)
+* space, inserting vertical: \addvspace. (line 6)
+* space, negative thin: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 6)
+* space, thin: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 6)
+* space, unbreakable: ~. (line 6)
+* space, vertical: \vspace. (line 6)
+* spaces: Spaces. (line 6)
+* spaces, ignore around commands: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
+ (line 6)
+* spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 6)
+* spacing, inter-sentence: \frenchspacing. (line 6)
+* spacing, inter-sentence <1>: \normalsfcodes. (line 6)
+* spacing, math mode: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 6)
+* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 144)
+* special characters: Reserved characters. (line 6)
+* special characters <1>: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 6)
+* special insertions: Special insertions. (line 6)
+* specifier, float placement: Floats. (line 31)
+* splitting the input file: Splitting the input. (line 6)
+* square root: \sqrt. (line 6)
+* stack math: \stackrel. (line 6)
+* star-variants, commands: \@ifstar. (line 6)
+* starred form, defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 25)
+* starting a new page: \newpage. (line 6)
+* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+ (line 6)
+* starting and ending: Starting and ending. (line 6)
+* starting on a right-hand page: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+ (line 6)
+* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 49)
+* straight double quote, base: Text symbols. (line 169)
+* straight quote, base: Text symbols. (line 169)
+* straight single quote: Text symbols. (line 165)
+* stretch, infinite horizontal: \hfill. (line 6)
+* stretch, infinite vertical: \vfill. (line 6)
+* stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 6)
+* strut: \strut. (line 6)
+* styles of text: Font styles. (line 6)
+* styles, page: Page styles. (line 6)
+* subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* subparagraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 6)
+* subscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 6)
+* subsection: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 6)
+* subsubsection: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 6)
+* superscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 6)
+* symbol: \newglossaryentry. (line 59)
+* symbols package: Math symbols. (line 6)
+* symbols, boldface: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 6)
+* symbols, math: Math symbols. (line 6)
+* symbols, text: Text symbols. (line 6)
+* tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 6)
+* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 6)
+* table environment: table. (line 6)
+* table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline. (line 6)
+* table of contents file: Output files. (line 43)
+* table of contents, avoiding footnotes: Footnotes in section headings.
+ (line 6)
+* table of contents, creating: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 6)
+* table of contents, sectioning numbers printed: Sectioning. (line 74)
+* tables, creating: table. (line 6)
+* tabular environment: tabular. (line 6)
+* template, article: article template. (line 6)
+* template, beamer: beamer template. (line 6)
+* template, book: book template. (line 6)
+* template, book <1>: Larger book template.
+ (line 6)
+* template, TUGboat: tugboat template. (line 6)
+* templates, document: Document templates. (line 6)
+* terminal input/output: Terminal input/output.
+ (line 6)
+* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 63)
+* text symbols: Text symbols. (line 6)
+* text, resizing: \scalebox. (line 6)
+* text, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 6)
+* text, scaling: \scalebox. (line 6)
+* text, scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 6)
+* textcase package: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 42)
+* textcomp package: Font styles. (line 132)
+* textcomp package <1>: Text symbols. (line 6)
+* thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 57)
+* thebibliography environment: thebibliography. (line 6)
+* theorem environment: theorem. (line 6)
+* theorem-like environment: \newtheorem. (line 6)
+* theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 6)
+* theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 6)
+* thin space: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 32)
+* thin space <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 6)
+* thin space, negative: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 46)
+* thin space, negative <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 6)
+* thorn, Icelandic letter: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 56)
+* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 178)
+* tie: ~. (line 6)
+* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 81)
+* TikZ package: \line. (line 36)
+* TikZ package <1>: \strut. (line 62)
+* TikZ package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 72)
+* tilde accent: Accents. (line 46)
+* tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 38)
+* tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 69)
+* title page, separate or run-in: Document class options.
+ (line 71)
+* title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 6)
+* title, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 64)
+* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 6)
+* titlepage option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* titles, making: \maketitle. (line 6)
+* titlesec package: \part. (line 54)
+* titlesec package <1>: \chapter. (line 79)
+* titlesec package <2>: \section. (line 64)
+* titlesec package <3>: \subsection. (line 52)
+* titlesec package <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 65)
+* tocbibbind package: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 91)
+* tocdepth: Sectioning. (line 73)
+* tocdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 74)
+* tocloft package: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 91)
+* today's date: \today. (line 6)
+* tombstone: \rule. (line 13)
+* topmargin: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 125)
+* topnumber: Floats. (line 138)
+* topnumber <1>: Floats. (line 139)
+* totalnumber: Floats. (line 142)
+* totalnumber <1>: Floats. (line 143)
+* trademark symbol: Text symbols. (line 181)
+* transcript file: Output files. (line 28)
+* TrueType fonts: TeX engines. (line 6)
+* TUGboat template: tugboat template. (line 6)
+* two-column output: \twocolumn. (line 6)
+* two-thirds em-dash: Text symbols. (line 184)
+* twocolumn option: Document class options.
+ (line 78)
+* twoside option: Document class options.
+ (line 78)
+* type styles: Font styles. (line 6)
+* typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 6)
+* typeface sizes: Font sizes. (line 6)
+* typefaces: Fonts. (line 6)
+* typewriter font: Font styles. (line 96)
+* typewriter labels in lists: description. (line 36)
+* ulem package: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 15)
+* umlaut accent: Accents. (line 23)
+* underbar: Accents. (line 51)
+* underlining: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 6)
+* underscore, in text: Text symbols. (line 187)
+* Unicode input, native: TeX engines. (line 6)
+* units, of length: Units of length. (line 6)
+* unofficial nature of this manual: About this document. (line 25)
+* unordered lists: itemize. (line 6)
+* uppercase: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 6)
+* url package: \verb. (line 38)
+* using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
+* usrguide official documentation: About this document. (line 44)
+* UTF-8: TeX engines. (line 6)
+* variables, a list of: Counters. (line 6)
+* vector symbol, math: Math accents. (line 41)
+* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 6)
+* verbatim text: verbatim. (line 6)
+* verbatim text, inline: \verb. (line 6)
+* verbatimbox package: verbatim. (line 37)
+* verse environment: verse. (line 6)
+* vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 81)
+* vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 78)
+* vertical mode: Modes. (line 34)
+* vertical space: \vspace. (line 6)
+* vertical space <1>: \addvspace. (line 6)
+* vertical space before paragraphs: \parindent & \parskip.
+ (line 6)
+* vertical spacing: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 6)
+* vertical spacing, math mode: \smash. (line 6)
+* visible space: \verb. (line 31)
+* visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 190)
+* weights, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 58)
+* white space: Spaces. (line 6)
+* wide hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 44)
+* wide tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 47)
+* widths, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 70)
+* writing external files: filecontents. (line 6)
+* writing letters: Letters. (line 6)
+* x-height: Units of length. (line 38)
+* xdvi command: Output files. (line 10)
+* xdvipdfmx: TeX engines. (line 39)
+* xelatex command: TeX engines. (line 39)
+* XeTeX: TeX engines. (line 39)
+* xindy: makeindex. (line 153)
+* xindy program: makeindex. (line 153)
+
+
+
+Tag Table:
+Node: Top1837
+Node: About this document3658
+Node: Overview5906
+Node: Starting and ending7529
+Ref: Starting & ending7664
+Node: Output files8841
+Ref: output files dvi9120
+Ref: output files pdf9631
+Ref: output files log9954
+Ref: output files aux10151
+Node: TeX engines11120
+Ref: tex engines latex11469
+Ref: tex engines lualatex12301
+Ref: tex engines xelatex12786
+Node: LaTeX command syntax13590
+Node: Environment15516
+Node: CTAN16722
+Node: Document classes18123
+Ref: document classes article18563
+Ref: document classes book18651
+Ref: document classes letter18836
+Ref: document classes report18912
+Ref: document classes slides19064
+Node: Document class options19446
+Node: Additional packages22528
+Node: Class and package construction23159
+Node: Class and package structure24609
+Node: Class and package commands26903
+Node: Fonts44517
+Ref: Typefaces44620
+Node: Font styles44948
+Node: Font sizes49213
+Node: Low-level font commands50832
+Ref: low level font commands fontencoding51116
+Ref: low level font commands fontfamily51672
+Ref: low level font commands fontseries52437
+Ref: low level font commands fontshape53589
+Ref: low level font commands fontsize53886
+Ref: low level font commands baselinestretch54411
+Ref: low level font commands linespread55120
+Ref: low level font commands selectfont55370
+Ref: low level font commands usefont55696
+Node: Layout55939
+Node: \onecolumn56437
+Node: \twocolumn56796
+Ref: twocolumn columnsep57419
+Ref: twocolumn columnseprule57668
+Ref: twocolumn columnwidth57964
+Ref: twocolumn dbltopfraction58530
+Ref: twocolumn dblfloatpagefraction59473
+Ref: twocolumn dblfloatsep59720
+Ref: twocolumn dbltextfloatsep60025
+Ref: twocolumn dbltopnumber60208
+Node: \flushbottom61173
+Node: \raggedbottom62273
+Node: Page layout parameters62809
+Ref: page layout parameters columnsep63012
+Ref: page layout parameters columnseprule63012
+Ref: page layout parameters columnwidth63012
+Ref: page layout parameters headheight63266
+Ref: page layout parameters headsep63433
+Ref: page layout parameters footskip63746
+Ref: page layout parameters linewidth64080
+Ref: page layout parameters marginparpush64433
+Ref: page layout parameters marginsep64433
+Ref: page layout parameters marginparwidth64433
+Ref: page layout parameters oddsidemargin65473
+Ref: page layout parameters evensidemargin65473
+Ref: page layout parameters paperheight66010
+Ref: page layout parameters paperwidth66236
+Ref: page layout parameters textheight66460
+Ref: page layout parameters textwidth66849
+Ref: page layout parameters hsize67778
+Ref: page layout parameters topmargin67984
+Ref: page layout parameters topskip68288
+Node: Floats68504
+Ref: floats bottomfraction72872
+Ref: floats floatpagefraction72999
+Ref: floats textfraction73110
+Ref: floats topfraction73312
+Ref: floats floatsep73564
+Ref: floats intextsep73674
+Ref: floats textfloatsep73889
+Ref: floats bottomnumber74153
+Ref: floats dbltopnumber74261
+Ref: floats topnumber74380
+Ref: floats totalnumber74484
+Node: Sectioning75013
+Ref: sectioning secnumdepth77746
+Ref: Sectioning/secnumdepth77746
+Ref: sectioning tocdepth78347
+Ref: Sectioning/tocdepth78347
+Node: \part79392
+Node: \chapter81568
+Node: \section85342
+Node: \subsection88609
+Node: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph91323
+Node: \appendix93980
+Node: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter95270
+Node: \@startsection96611
+Ref: startsection name97988
+Ref: \@startsection/name97988
+Ref: startsection level98442
+Ref: \@startsection/level98442
+Ref: startsection indent99322
+Ref: \@startsection/indent99322
+Ref: startsection beforeskip99585
+Ref: \@startsection/beforeskip99585
+Ref: startsection afterskip101106
+Ref: \@startsection/afterskip101106
+Ref: startsection style102417
+Ref: \@startsection/style102417
+Node: Cross references106123
+Node: \label108216
+Node: \pageref110036
+Node: \ref110826
+Node: Environments111802
+Node: abstract113804
+Node: array115393
+Node: center118285
+Node: \centering120037
+Node: description121534
+Node: displaymath123749
+Node: document125536
+Node: \AtBeginDocument125966
+Node: \AtEndDocument126590
+Node: enumerate127234
+Ref: enumerate enumi129097
+Ref: enumerate enumii129097
+Ref: enumerate enumiii129097
+Ref: enumerate enumiv129097
+Ref: enumerate labelenumi129495
+Ref: enumerate labelenumii129495
+Ref: enumerate labelenumiii129495
+Ref: enumerate labelenumiv129495
+Node: eqnarray130034
+Node: equation132029
+Node: figure132697
+Node: filecontents134851
+Node: flushleft136598
+Node: \raggedright137615
+Node: flushright138813
+Node: \raggedleft139549
+Node: itemize140339
+Ref: itemize labelitemi141561
+Ref: itemize labelitemii141561
+Ref: itemize labelitemiii141561
+Ref: itemize labelitemiv141561
+Ref: itemize leftmargin142403
+Ref: itemize leftmargini142403
+Ref: itemize leftmarginii142403
+Ref: itemize leftmarginiii142403
+Ref: itemize leftmarginiv142403
+Ref: itemize leftmarginv142403
+Ref: itemize leftmarginvi142403
+Node: letter143807
+Node: list144045
+Ref: list makelabel146490
+Ref: list itemindent147874
+Ref: list itemsep148011
+Ref: list labelsep148663
+Ref: list labelwidth148826
+Ref: list leftmargin149837
+Ref: list listparindent150690
+Ref: list parsep150921
+Ref: list partopsep151424
+Ref: list rightmargin152222
+Ref: list topsep152407
+Ref: list beginparpenalty155982
+Ref: list itempenalty156081
+Ref: list endparpenalty156185
+Node: \item157057
+Node: trivlist158305
+Node: math159833
+Node: minipage160139
+Node: picture165416
+Node: \put171885
+Node: \multiput172450
+Node: \qbezier173189
+Node: \graphpaper174114
+Node: \line174908
+Node: \linethickness176872
+Node: \thinlines177321
+Node: \thicklines177732
+Node: \circle178116
+Node: \oval178656
+Node: \shortstack179632
+Node: \vector181029
+Node: \makebox (picture)181945
+Node: \framebox (picture)183127
+Node: \frame184600
+Node: \dashbox185040
+Node: quotation & quote186175
+Node: tabbing187071
+Node: table193064
+Node: tabular195157
+Ref: tabular arrayrulewidth201486
+Ref: tabular arraystrech201726
+Ref: tabular doublerulesep201947
+Ref: tabular tabcolsep202083
+Node: \multicolumn202604
+Node: \vline206480
+Node: \cline207871
+Node: \hline208581
+Node: thebibliography209263
+Node: \bibitem211673
+Node: \cite213948
+Node: \nocite215703
+Node: Using BibTeX216187
+Node: theorem218342
+Node: titlepage219264
+Node: verbatim220547
+Node: \verb222057
+Node: verse223877
+Node: Line breaking225104
+Node: \\226470
+Node: \obeycr & \restorecr228903
+Node: \newline229697
+Node: \- (hyphenation)230726
+Node: \discretionary232364
+Node: \fussy & \sloppy233252
+Node: sloppypar234035
+Node: \hyphenation235181
+Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak235775
+Node: Page breaking236922
+Node: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage238951
+Node: \newpage240471
+Node: \enlargethispage241769
+Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak242725
+Node: Footnotes244391
+Node: \footnote245537
+Ref: footnote footnoterule246805
+Ref: footnote footnotesep247416
+Node: \footnotemark248482
+Node: \footnotetext250821
+Node: Footnotes in section headings251422
+Node: Footnotes in a table252255
+Node: Footnotes of footnotes255177
+Node: Definitions255881
+Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand256857
+Node: \providecommand262087
+Node: \makeatletter & \makeatother263250
+Node: \@ifstar265398
+Node: \newcounter268217
+Node: \newlength269937
+Node: \newsavebox270759
+Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment271738
+Node: \newtheorem277062
+Node: \newfont280634
+Node: \protect281867
+Node: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend284255
+Node: Counters286993
+Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol288694
+Node: \usecounter291348
+Node: \value292207
+Node: \setcounter293260
+Node: \addtocounter293856
+Node: \refstepcounter294310
+Node: \stepcounter294979
+Node: \day & \month & \year295525
+Node: Lengths296336
+Node: Units of length300805
+Ref: units of length pt301008
+Ref: units of length pc301131
+Ref: units of length in301154
+Ref: units of length bp301180
+Ref: units of length cm301311
+Ref: units of length mm301333
+Ref: units of length dd301355
+Ref: units of length cc301387
+Ref: units of length sp301412
+Ref: Lengths/em301443
+Ref: Lengths/en301443
+Ref: Lengths/ex301443
+Ref: units of length em301443
+Ref: units of length en301443
+Ref: units of length ex301443
+Node: \setlength302299
+Node: \addtolength303384
+Node: \settodepth304459
+Node: \settoheight305337
+Node: \settowidth306230
+Node: Making paragraphs307098
+Node: \par308869
+Node: \indent & \noindent310816
+Node: \parindent & \parskip312350
+Node: Marginal notes313385
+Ref: marginal notes marginparpush314781
+Ref: marginal notes marginparsep314894
+Ref: marginal notes marginparwidth315026
+Node: Math formulas315375
+Node: Subscripts & superscripts319543
+Node: Math symbols321701
+Node: Blackboard bold347868
+Node: Calligraphic348640
+Node: \boldmath & \unboldmath349212
+Node: Dots350726
+Ref: ellipses cdots351148
+Ref: ellipses ddots351295
+Ref: ellipses ldots351384
+Ref: ellipses vdots351805
+Node: Math functions352991
+Node: Math accents354635
+Node: Over- and Underlining355534
+Node: Spacing in math mode357361
+Ref: spacing in math mode thickspace358293
+Ref: spacing in math mode medspace358385
+Ref: Spacing in math mode/\thinspace358481
+Ref: spacing in math mode thinspace358481
+Ref: spacing in math mode negthinspace358962
+Ref: spacing in math mode quad359160
+Ref: spacing in math mode qquad359416
+Node: \smash359694
+Node: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom361911
+Node: Math miscellany363948
+Node: Colon character & \colon364507
+Node: \*365200
+Node: \frac365784
+Node: \left & \right366164
+Node: \sqrt367338
+Node: \stackrel367933
+Node: Modes368206
+Ref: modes paragraph mode368656
+Ref: modes lr mode368852
+Ref: modes math mode369458
+Ref: modes vertical mode369793
+Ref: modes internal vertical mode369964
+Ref: modes inner paragraph mode370437
+Ref: modes outer paragraph mode370437
+Node: \ensuremath370851
+Node: Page styles371556
+Node: \maketitle372319
+Node: \pagenumbering375336
+Node: \pagestyle377324
+Node: \thispagestyle380826
+Node: Spaces381780
+Node: \enspace & \quad & \qquad383221
+Node: \hspace384135
+Node: \hfill385973
+Node: \hss387037
+Node: \spacefactor387731
+Node: \@391118
+Ref: \AT391218
+Node: \frenchspacing393158
+Node: \normalsfcodes393993
+Node: \(SPACE)394240
+Node: ~396004
+Node: \thinspace & \negthinspace398474
+Node: \/399417
+Node: \hrulefill & \dotfill400723
+Node: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip402079
+Ref: bigskip402897
+Ref: medskip403101
+Ref: smallskip403310
+Node: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak403971
+Node: \strut404957
+Node: \vspace408152
+Node: \vfill409715
+Node: \addvspace410643
+Node: Boxes412641
+Node: \mbox & \makebox413347
+Ref: mbox makebox depth414559
+Ref: mbox makebox height414559
+Ref: mbox makebox width414559
+Ref: mbox makebox totalheight414559
+Node: \fbox & \framebox416653
+Ref: fbox framebox fboxrule417966
+Ref: fbox framebox fboxsep418156
+Node: \parbox419245
+Node: \raisebox421549
+Ref: raisebox depth422512
+Ref: raisebox height422512
+Ref: raisebox width422512
+Ref: raisebox totalheight422512
+Node: \sbox & \savebox423226
+Node: lrbox426192
+Node: \usebox427014
+Node: Color427420
+Node: Color package options428219
+Node: Color models429865
+Ref: color models cmyk430662
+Ref: color models gray431025
+Ref: color models rgb431174
+Ref: color models RGB431511
+Ref: color models named431886
+Node: Commands for color432174
+Node: Define colors432589
+Node: Colored text433314
+Node: Colored boxes435712
+Node: Colored pages437101
+Node: Graphics437794
+Node: Graphics package options439921
+Node: Graphics package configuration442674
+Node: \graphicspath443476
+Node: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions446367
+Node: \DeclareGraphicsRule448135
+Node: Commands for graphics451317
+Node: \includegraphics451822
+Ref: includegraphics width456872
+Ref: includegraphics height457403
+Ref: includegraphics totalheght457809
+Ref: includegraphics keepaspectratio458073
+Ref: includegraphics viewport459759
+Ref: includegraphics trim460129
+Ref: includegraphics clip460585
+Ref: includegraphics page460845
+Ref: includegraphics pagebox460936
+Ref: includegraphics interpolate461801
+Ref: includegraphics quiet462006
+Ref: includegraphics draft462167
+Ref: includegraphics bb462972
+Ref: includegraphics bbllx463370
+Ref: includegraphics bblly463370
+Ref: includegraphics bburx463370
+Ref: includegraphics bbury463370
+Ref: includegraphics natwidth463512
+Ref: includegraphics natheight463512
+Ref: includegraphics hiresbb463698
+Ref: includegraphics type464460
+Ref: includegraphics ext464500
+Ref: includegraphics read464603
+Ref: includegraphics command464720
+Node: \rotatebox464965
+Node: \scalebox467819
+Node: \resizebox468875
+Node: Special insertions470067
+Node: Reserved characters470869
+Node: Upper and lower case472071
+Node: Symbols by font position473986
+Node: Text symbols474606
+Node: Accents478607
+Node: Additional Latin letters480622
+Ref: Non-English characters480793
+Node: \rule481810
+Node: \today482982
+Node: Splitting the input483918
+Node: \endinput485659
+Node: \include & \includeonly486926
+Node: \input491148
+Node: Front/back matter492363
+Node: Table of contents etc.492696
+Node: \addcontentsline496432
+Node: \addtocontents499274
+Node: \nofiles500865
+Node: Indexes501597
+Node: \index503225
+Node: makeindex508334
+Ref: makeindex preamble510002
+Ref: makeindex postamble510142
+Ref: makeindex group skip510227
+Ref: makeindex letheadflag510547
+Ref: makeindex lethead prefix511008
+Ref: makeindex lethead suffix511160
+Ref: makeindex item 0511308
+Ref: makeindex item 1511388
+Ref: makeindex item 2511463
+Ref: makeindex item 01511541
+Ref: makeindex item x1511646
+Ref: makeindex item 12511851
+Ref: makeindex item x2511959
+Ref: makeindex delim 0512119
+Ref: makeindex delim 1512249
+Ref: makeindex delim 2512379
+Ref: makeindex delim n512505
+Ref: makeindex delim r512640
+Ref: makeindex line max512748
+Ref: makeindex indent space512883
+Ref: makeindex indent length512978
+Ref: makeindex page precedence513163
+Node: \printindex514037
+Node: Glossaries514509
+Node: \newglossaryentry516476
+Node: \gls517945
+Node: Letters518739
+Node: \address522366
+Node: \cc523177
+Node: \closing523619
+Node: \encl523933
+Node: \location524347
+Node: \makelabels524611
+Node: \name526928
+Node: \opening527169
+Node: \ps527450
+Node: \signature527739
+Node: \telephone528967
+Node: Terminal input/output529332
+Node: \typein529597
+Node: \typeout530846
+Node: Command line531890
+Node: Command line options533948
+Node: Command line input537507
+Node: Recovering from errors539370
+Node: Document templates540716
+Node: beamer template541161
+Node: article template541815
+Node: book template542242
+Node: Larger book template542723
+Node: tugboat template544209
+Node: Index546580
+Ref: Command Index546666
+
+End Tag Table
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7437ab0247
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d4f0726deb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,19044 @@
+\input texinfo
+@c $Id: latex2e.texi 710 2018-10-14 14:32:52Z karl $
+@comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.)
+@setfilename latex2e.info
+@set UPDATED October 2018
+@include common.texi
+@settitle @LaTeX{}2e unofficial reference manual (@value{UPDATED})
+@comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.)
+
+@c latex 2.09 commands should all be present now,
+@c xx but latex2e stuff is missing.
+@c xx random list of a few of the missing items is at the end of this file
+@c
+@c xx ctan, distributions, components of TeX
+@c xx classes and packages -- required, additional, useful; oberdiek; fonts
+@c
+@c xx merge permuted-index
+@c xx merge latex-manual from savannah
+@c xx merge display style math
+@c xx JH explain nfss somewhere
+@c xx JH expand BiBTeX
+@c xx JH expand theorem, AMS math
+@c xx JH something on code listings
+@c xx JH ligatures
+@c xx JH \xspace
+@c xx JH \stretch
+@c xx JH \mathstrut
+@c xx JH \phantom https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/4519/how-do-i-create-an-invisible-character
+@c xx JH \baselineskip https://texfaq.org/FAQ-baselinepar
+@c xx JH \contentsline, \@@dottedtocline?
+@c xx JH more on \write18, beyond what's mentioned in Command line.
+@c xx JH \numexpr, \dimexpr, \glueexpr, \muexpr
+@c
+@c xx The typeset source2e has an index with all kernel
+@c xx commands, though some are internal and shouldn't be included.
+@c xx classes.dtx et al. define additional commands.
+@c xx See also http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e.
+
+@copying
+This document is an unofficial reference manual for @LaTeX{}, a
+document preparation system, version of @value{UPDATED}.
+
+This manual was originally translated from @file{LATEX.HLP} v1.0a in the
+VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
+George@tie{}D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The
+@LaTeX{}@tie{}2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The
+@LaTeX{}2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl
+Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges
+using @cite{Hypertext Help with @LaTeX{}}, by Sheldon Green, and
+@cite{@LaTeX{} Command Summary} (for @LaTeX{}@tie{}2.09) by
+L.@tie{}Botway and C.@tie{}Biemesderfer (published by the @TeX{} Users
+Group as @cite{@TeX{}niques} number 10), as reference material. We also
+gratefully acknowledge additional material appearing in
+latex2e-reference by Martin Herbert Dietze. (From these references no
+text was directly copied.)
+
+Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013,
+2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018 Karl Berry.@*
+Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.@*
+Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
+
+@comment start of License
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+@ignore
+Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
+results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
+notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
+@end ignore
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
+@comment end of License
+@end copying
+
+@c Merge into one index (arbitrarily chosen to be the concept index).
+@syncodeindex fn cp
+
+@dircategory TeX
+@direntry
+* LaTeX2e: (latex2e). Unofficial LaTeX reference manual.
+@end direntry
+
+@tex
+\global\hbadness=4444 % don't complain much
+@end tex
+
+@titlepage
+@title @LaTeX{}2e: An unofficial reference manual
+@subtitle @value{UPDATED}
+@author @url{@value{LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE}}
+@page
+@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
+@insertcopying
+@end titlepage
+
+@shortcontents
+@contents
+
+@c Best Effort Symbol
+@iftex
+@macro BES {utf8,math}
+@math{\math\}
+@end macro
+@macro BESU {utf8,math}
+@code{@backslashchar{}\math\}
+@end macro
+@end iftex
+@ifnottex
+@macro BES {utf8,math}
+@U{\utf8\}
+@end macro
+@macro BESU {utf8,math}
+@U{\utf8\}
+@end macro
+@end ifnottex
+@macro EnvIndex {env}
+@findex @r{environment}, @code{\env\}
+@findex @code{\env\} @r{environment}
+
+@end macro
+@macro PkgIndex {pkg}
+@cindex @r{package}, @code{\pkg\}
+@cindex @code{\pkg\} @r{package}
+
+@end macro
+
+@set NotInPlainTeX Not available in plain @TeX{}.
+@set NeedsAMSSymb @value{NotInPlainTeX} In @LaTeX{} you need to load the @file{amssymb} package.
+@set NeedsSTIX @value{NotInPlainTeX} In @LaTeX{} you need to load the @file{stix} package.
+
+@node Top
+@top @LaTeX{}2e: An unofficial reference manual
+
+This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of
+@value{UPDATED}) for @LaTeX{}2e, a document preparation system.
+
+@menu
+* About this document:: Bug reporting, etc.
+* Overview:: What is @LaTeX{}?
+* Document classes:: Some of the various classes available.
+* Fonts:: Italic, bold, typewriter, etc.
+* Layout:: Controlling the page layout.
+* Sectioning:: Parts, Chapters, Sections, etc.
+* Cross references:: Automatic referencing.
+* Environments:: Such as enumerate & itemize.
+* Line breaking:: Influencing line breaks.
+* Page breaking:: Influencing page breaks.
+* Footnotes:: How to produce footnotes.
+* Definitions:: Define your own commands, etc.
+* Counters:: Internal counters used by @LaTeX{}.
+* Lengths:: The length commands.
+* Making paragraphs:: Paragraph commands.
+* Math formulas:: How to create mathematical formulas.
+* Modes:: Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
+* Page styles:: Various styles of page layout.
+* Spaces:: Horizontal and vertical space.
+* Boxes:: Making boxes.
+* Color:: Defining and using colors.
+* Graphics:: Importing graphics from outside @LaTeX{}.
+* Special insertions:: Inserting reserved and special characters.
+* Splitting the input:: Dealing with big files by splitting.
+* Front/back matter:: Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes.
+* Letters:: The @code{letter} class.
+* Terminal input/output:: User interaction.
+* Command line:: System-independent command-line behavior.
+* Document templates:: Starter templates for various document classes.
+* Index:: General index.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node About this document
+@chapter About this document
+
+@cindex home page for manual
+This is an unofficial reference manual for the @LaTeX{}2e document
+preparation system, which is a macro package for the @TeX{}
+typesetting program (@pxref{Overview}).
+
+This document's home page is @url{@value{LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE}}. There
+you can get the sources, subscribe to the mailing list or read its
+archives, see other infrastructure, and get the current output in
+various formats. In particular, the output comes in two web formats.
+Probably the most convenient one, shown at @url{http://latexref.xyz/},
+has pages for each topic and so is good for a quick lookup; see also the
+note there about easy-to-remember links. The other, shown at
+@url{http://svn.gnu.org.ua/viewvc/latexrefman/trunk/latex2e.html?view=co},
+has all the information on single page.
+
+@cindex @LaTeX{} vs.@: @LaTeX{}2e
+In this document, we will mostly just use `@LaTeX{}' rather than
+`@LaTeX{}2e', since the previous version of @LaTeX{}@tie{}(2.09) was
+frozen decades ago.
+
+@cindex unofficial nature of this manual
+@cindex @LaTeX{} Project team
+@findex @email{@value{LTXREFMAN_BUGS}} @r{email address}
+@LaTeX{} is currently maintained by a group of volunteers
+(@url{http://latex-project.org}). The official documentation written by
+the @LaTeX{} project is available from their web site. This document is
+completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the @LaTeX{}
+maintainers.
+@cindex bug reporting
+@cindex reporting bugs
+Do not send bug reports or anything else about this document to them.
+Instead, please send all comments to @email{@value{LTXREFMAN_BUGS}}.
+
+This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources
+of information about @LaTeX{}, at all levels. Here are a few
+introductions.
+
+@table @url
+@item http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr
+@findex latex-doc-ptr @r{document}
+Two pages of recommended references to @LaTeX{} documentation.
+
+@item http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc
+@findex first-latex-doc @r{document}
+Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
+
+@item http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide
+@findex usrguide @r{official documentation}
+The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of @LaTeX{}.
+Many other guides by many other people are also available, independent
+of @LaTeX{} itself; one such is the next item:
+
+@item http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort
+@findex lshort @r{document}
+A short introduction to @LaTeX{}, translated to many languages.
+
+@item http://tug.org/begin.html
+Introduction to the @TeX{} system, including @LaTeX{}, with further
+references.
+
+@end table
+
+
+@node Overview
+@chapter Overview of @LaTeX{}
+
+@cindex overview of @LaTeX{}
+@cindex basics of @LaTeX{}
+@cindex Knuth, Donald E.
+@cindex Lamport, Leslie
+@cindex @LaTeX{} overview
+
+@LaTeX{} is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally
+created by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers
+(@url{http://latex-project.org}). It is widely used, particularly for
+complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics.
+
+@cindex macro package, @LaTeX{} as
+A @LaTeX{} user writes an input file containing text along with
+interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text
+should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands
+that interface with Donald@tie{}E. Knuth's @TeX{} typesetting program
+(the technical term is that @LaTeX{} is a @dfn{macro package} for the
+@TeX{} engine). The user produces the output document by giving that
+input file to the @TeX{} engine.
+
+The term @LaTeX{} is also sometimes used to mean the language in which
+the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
+available to a @LaTeX{} user.
+
+@cindex Lamport @TeX{}
+@cindex pronunciation
+The name @LaTeX{} is short for ``Lamport @TeX{}''. It is pronounced
+LAH-teck or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document,
+produce the logo with @code{\LaTeX}. Where use of the logo is not
+sensible, such as in plain text, write it as @samp{LaTeX}.
+
+@menu
+* Starting and ending:: The standard beginning and end of a document.
+* Output files:: Files produced.
+* @TeX{} engines:: Programs that can compile @TeX{} and @LaTeX{}.
+* @LaTeX{} command syntax:: General syntax of @LaTeX{} commands.
+* Environment:: Area of the source giving distinct behavior.
+* CTAN:: Our repository.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Starting and ending
+@section Starting and ending
+
+@anchor{Starting & ending}@c old name
+@cindex starting and ending
+@cindex ending and starting
+@cindex hello, world
+
+@LaTeX{} files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
+and ending. This is a small example.
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{article@}
+\begin@{document@}
+Hello, \LaTeX\ world.
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Every @LaTeX{} document has a @code{\begin@{document@}} line and an
+@code{\end@{document@}} line.
+
+@cindex document class, defined
+@noindent
+Here, the @samp{article} is the @dfn{document class}. It is implemented
+in a file @file{article.cls}. You can use any document class on your
+system. A few document classes are defined by @LaTeX{} itself, and vast
+array of others are widely available. @xref{Document classes}.
+
+@cindex preamble, defined
+You can include other @LaTeX{} commands between the
+@code{\documentclass} and the @code{\begin@{document@}} commands.
+This area is called the @dfn{preamble}.
+
+The @code{\begin@{document@}}, @code{\end@{document@}} pair defines an
+@cindex environment
+@dfn{environment}; the @samp{document} environment (and no others) is
+required in all @LaTeX{} documents (@pxref{document}). @LaTeX{} make
+available to you many environments that are documented here
+(@pxref{Environments}). Many more are available to you from external
+packages, most importantly those available at CTAN (@pxref{CTAN}).
+
+The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output from
+a @LaTeX{} input file.
+
+
+@node Output files
+@section Output files
+
+@LaTeX{} produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files.
+The main output file's name ends in either @file{.dvi} or @file{.pdf}.
+
+@table @code
+@item .dvi
+@findex .dvi @r{file}
+@findex latex @r{command}
+@findex xdvi @r{command}
+@findex dvips @r{command}
+@findex dvipdfmx @r{command}
+@findex dvitype @r{command}
+@anchor{output files dvi}
+If @LaTeX{} is invoked with the system command @command{latex} then it
+produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension @file{.dvi}. You
+can view this file with a command such as @command{xdvi}, or convert
+it to a PostScript @code{.ps} file with @command{dvips} or to a
+Portable Document Format @code{.pdf} file with @command{dvipdfmx}.
+The contents of the file can be dumped in human-readable form with
+@command{dvitype}. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are
+available (@url{http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware}).
+
+@item .pdf
+@findex .pdf @r{file}
+@cindex pdf@TeX{}
+@findex pdflatex @r{command}
+@anchor{output files pdf}
+If @LaTeX{} is invoked via the system command @command{pdflatex},
+among other commands (@pxref{@TeX{} engines}), then the main output is
+a Portable Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a
+self-contained file, with all fonts and images included.
+
+@end table
+
+@LaTeX{} also produces at least two additional files.
+
+@table @code
+@item .log
+@cindex transcript file
+@cindex log file
+@findex .log @r{file}
+@anchor{output files log}
+This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
+loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps
+additional information for any errors.
+
+@item .aux
+@cindex auxiliary file
+@findex .aux @r{file}
+@cindex cross references, resolving
+@cindex forward references, resolving
+@cindex references, resolving forward
+@anchor{output files aux}
+Auxiliary information is used by @LaTeX{} for things such as
+cross references. For example, the first time that @LaTeX{} finds a
+forward reference---a cross reference to something that has not yet
+appeared in the source---it will appear in the output as a doubled
+question mark @code{??}. When the referred-to spot does eventually
+appear in the source then @LaTeX{} writes its location information to
+this @code{.aux} file. On the next invocation, @LaTeX{} reads the
+location information from this file and uses it to resolve the
+reference, replacing the double question mark with the remembered
+location.
+
+@end table
+
+@findex .lof @r{file}
+@cindex list of figures file
+@findex .lot @r{file}
+@cindex list of tables file
+@findex .toc @r{file}
+@cindex table of contents file
+@cindex contents file
+@LaTeX{} may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename
+ending. These include a @code{.lof} file that is used to make a list of
+figures, a @code{.lot} file used to make a list of tables, and a
+@code{.toc} file used to make a table of contents (@pxref{Table of
+contents etc.}). A particular class may create others; the list is
+open-ended.
+
+
+@node @TeX{} engines
+@section @TeX{} engines
+
+@cindex engines, @TeX{}
+@cindex implementations of @TeX{}
+@cindex UTF-8
+@cindex Unicode input, native
+@cindex TrueType fonts
+@cindex OpenType fonts
+
+@LaTeX{} is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a @TeX{}
+implementation (@pxref{Overview}). This section gives a terse
+overview of the main programs (see also@tie{}@ref{Command line}).
+
+@table @code
+@item latex
+@itemx pdflatex
+@cindex pdf@TeX{} engine
+@findex etex @r{command}
+@cindex e-@TeX{}
+@anchor{tex engines latex}
+In @TeX{} Live (@url{http://tug.org/texlive}), if @LaTeX{} is invoked
+via either the system command @command{latex} or @command{pdflatex},
+then the pdf@TeX{} engine is run (@url{http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex}).
+When invoked as @command{latex}, the main output is a @file{.dvi}
+file; as @command{pdflatex}, the main output is a @file{.pdf} file.
+
+pdf@TeX{} incorporates the e-@TeX{} extensions to Knuth's original
+program (@url{http://ctan.org/pkg/etex}), including additional
+programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty of
+extensions of its own. e-@TeX{} is available on its own as the system
+command @command{etex}, but this is plain @TeX{} (and produces
+@file{.dvi}).
+
+In other @TeX{} distributions, @command{latex} may invoke e-@TeX{}
+rather than pdf@TeX{}. In any case, the e-@TeX{} extensions can be
+assumed to be available in @LaTeX{}.
+
+@item lualatex
+@findex lualatex @r{command}
+@cindex Lua@TeX{}
+@anchor{tex engines lualatex}
+If @LaTeX{} is invoked via the system command @command{lualatex}, the
+Lua@TeX{} engine is run (@url{http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex}). This
+program allows code written in the scripting language Lua
+(@url{http://luatex.org}) to interact with @TeX{}'s typesetting.
+Lua@TeX{} handles UTF-8 Unicode input natively, can handle OpenType
+and TrueType fonts, and produces a @file{.pdf} file by default.
+There is also @command{dvilualatex} to produce a @file{.dvi} file,
+but this is rarely used.
+
+@item xelatex
+@findex xelatex @r{command}
+@cindex Xe@TeX{}
+@findex .xdv @r{file}
+@findex xdvipdfmx
+@anchor{tex engines xelatex}
+If @LaTeX{} is invoked with the system command @command{xelatex}, the
+Xe@TeX{} engine is run (@url{http://tug.org/xetex}). Like Lua@TeX{},
+Xe@TeX{} natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType
+fonts, though the implementation is completely different, mainly using
+external libraries instead of internal code. Xe@TeX{} produces a
+@file{.pdf} file as output; it does not support DVI output.
+
+Internally, Xe@TeX{} creates an @code{.xdv} file, a variant of DVI,
+and translates that to PDF using the (@code{x})@code{dvipdfmx}
+program, but this process is automatic. The @code{.xdv} file is only
+useful for debugging.
+
+@end table
+
+Other variants of @LaTeX{} and @TeX{} exist, e.g., to provide
+additional support for Japanese and other languages ([u]p@TeX{},
+@url{http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex}, @url{http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex}).
+
+
+@node @LaTeX{} command syntax
+@section @LaTeX{} command syntax
+
+@cindex command syntax
+@findex \ @r{character starting commands}
+@findex [...] @r{for optional arguments}
+@findex @{...@} @r{for required arguments}
+In the @LaTeX{} input file, a command name starts with a backslash
+character, @code{\}. The name itself then consists of either
+(a)@tie{}a string of letters or (b)@tie{}a single non-letter.
+
+@LaTeX{} commands names are case sensitive so that @code{\pagebreak}
+differs from @code{\Pagebreak} (the latter is not a standard command).
+Most commands are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all
+commands in the same case as they are defined.
+
+A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These
+arguments may be either required or optional. Required arguments are
+contained in curly braces, @code{@{...@}}. Optional arguments are
+contained in square brackets, @code{[...]}. Generally, but not
+universally, if the command accepts an optional argument, it comes
+first, before any required arguments.
+
+Inside of an optional argument, to use the character close square
+bracket@tie{}(@code{]}) hide it inside curly braces, as
+in@tie{}@code{\item[closing bracket @{]@}]}. Similarly, if an optional
+argument comes last, with no required argument after it, then to make
+the first character of the following text be an open square bracket,
+hide it inside curly braces.
+
+Some of @LaTeX{}'s commands are a @dfn{declaration}. Such a command
+changes the value the meaning of some other command or parameter. For
+instance, the @code{\mainmatter} declaration changes the typesetting of
+page numbers from roman numerals to arabic (@pxref{\frontmatter &
+\mainmatter & \backmatter}).
+
+@LaTeX{} has the convention that some commands have a @code{*} form that
+is related to the form without a @code{*}, such as @code{\chapter} and
+@code{\chapter*}. The exact difference in behavior varies from command
+to command.
+
+This manual describes all accepted options and @code{*}-forms for the
+commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a.@: bugs).
+
+
+@node Environment
+@section Environment
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{@var{environment name}@}
+ ...
+\end@{@var{environment name}@}
+@end example
+
+An area of @LaTeX{} source, inside of which there is a distinct
+behavior. For instance, for poetry in @LaTeX{} put the lines between
+@code{\begin@{verse@}} and @code{\end@{verse@}}.
+
+@example
+\begin@{verse@}
+ There once was a man from Nantucket \\
+ ...
+\end@{verse@}
+@end example
+
+@xref{Environments} for a list of environments. Particularly notable is
+that every @LaTeX{} document must have a @code{document} environment,
+a @code{\begin@{document@} ... \end@{document@}} pair.
+
+The @var{environment name} at the beginning must exactly match that at
+the end. This includes the case where @var{environment name} ends in a
+star@tie{}(@code{*}); both the @code{\begin} and @code{\end} texts must
+include the star.
+
+Environments may have arguments, including optional arguments. This
+example produces a table. The first argument is optional (and causes
+the table to be aligned on its top row) while the second argument is
+required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}[t]@{r|l@}
+ ... rows of table ...
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node CTAN
+@section CTAN: the Comprehensive @TeX{} Archive Network
+
+@cindex CTAN
+
+The Comprehensive @TeX{} Archive Network, CTAN, is the @TeX{} and
+@LaTeX{} community's repository of free material. It is a set of
+Internet sites around the world that offer material related to @LaTeX{}
+for download. Visit CTAN on the web at @url{https://ctan.org}.
+
+This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
+typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
+person or a small number of people. For instance, many publishers have
+a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher's
+specifications.
+
+In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features such
+as search by name or by functionality.
+
+@cindex DANTE e.V.
+@cindex mirrors of CTAN
+CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites. One of the
+sites is the core. This site actively manages the material, for
+instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages. It is
+hosted by the German @TeX{} group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the
+world help out by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their
+collections with the core site and then in turn making their copies
+publicly available. This gives users close to their location better
+access and relieves the load on the core site. The list of mirrors is
+at @url{https://ctan.org/mirrors}.
+
+
+@node Document classes
+@chapter Document classes
+
+@cindex document classes
+@cindex classes of documents
+@findex \documentclass
+
+The document's overall class is defined with this command, which is
+normally the first command in a @LaTeX{} source file.
+
+@example
+\documentclass[@var{options}]@{@var{class}@}
+@end example
+
+@findex article @r{class}
+@findex report @r{class}
+@findex book @r{class}
+@findex letter @r{class}
+@findex slides @r{class}
+The following document @var{class} names are built into @LaTeX{}.
+(Many other document classes are available as separate packages;
+@pxref{Overview}.)
+
+@table @code
+@item article
+@anchor{document classes article}
+For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use.
+
+@item book
+@anchor{document classes book}
+Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
+matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
+(@pxref{Front/back matter}).
+
+@item letter
+@anchor{document classes letter}
+Mail, optionally including mailing labels
+(@pxref{Letters}).
+
+@item report
+@anchor{document classes report}
+For documents of length between an @code{article} and a @code{book},
+such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
+
+@item slides
+@anchor{document classes slides}
+For slide presentations---rarely used today. In its place the
+@code{beamer} package is perhaps the most prevalent (@pxref{beamer
+template}).
+
+@end table
+
+Standard @var{options} are described in the next section.
+
+@menu
+* Document class options:: Global options.
+* Additional packages:: Bring in packages.
+* Class and package construction:: Create new classes and packages.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Document class options
+@section Document class options
+
+@cindex document class options
+@cindex options, document class
+@cindex class options
+@cindex global options
+
+You can specify @dfn{global options} or @dfn{class options} to the
+@code{\documentclass} command by enclosing them in square brackets. To
+specify more than one @var{option}, separate them with a comma.
+
+@example
+\documentclass[@var{option1},@var{option2},...]@{@var{class}@}
+@end example
+
+Here is the list of the standard class options.
+
+@findex 10pt @r{option}
+@findex 11pt @r{option}
+@findex 12pt @r{option}
+All of the standard classes except @code{slides} accept the following
+options for selecting the typeface size (default is @code{10pt}):
+
+@example
+10pt 11pt 12pt
+@end example
+
+@findex a4paper @r{option}
+@findex a5paper @r{option}
+@findex b5paper @r{option}
+@findex executivepaper @r{option}
+@findex legalpaper @r{option}
+@findex letterpaper @r{option}
+All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper
+size (these show height by width):
+
+@table @code
+@item a4paper
+210 by 297@dmn{mm} (about 8.25 by 11.75@tie{}inches)
+
+@item a5paper
+148 by 210@dmn{mm} (about 5.8 by 8.3@tie{}inches)
+
+@item b5paper
+176 by 250@dmn{mm} (about 6.9 by 9.8@tie{}inches)
+
+@item executivepaper
+7.25 by 10.5@tie{}inches
+
+@item legalpaper
+8.5 by 14@tie{}inches
+
+@item letterpaper
+8.5 by 11@tie{}inches (the default)
+@end table
+
+@findex \pdfpagewidth
+@findex \pdfpageheight
+@PkgIndex{geometry}
+When using one of the engines pdf@LaTeX{}, Lua@LaTeX{}, or Xe@LaTeX{}
+(@pxref{@TeX{} engines}), options other than @code{letterpaper} set
+the print area but you must also set the physical paper size. One way
+to do that is to put @code{\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth} and
+@code{\pdfpageheight=\paperheight} in your document's preamble.
+@PkgIndex{geometry}
+The @code{geometry} package provides flexible ways of setting the print
+area and physical page size.
+
+@findex draft @r{option}
+@findex final @r{option}
+@findex fleqn @r{option}
+@findex landscape @r{option}
+@findex leqno @r{option}
+@findex openbib @r{option}
+@findex titlepage @r{option}
+@findex notitlepage @r{option}
+Miscellaneous other options:
+
+@table @code
+@item draft
+@itemx final
+@cindex black boxes, omitting
+Mark (@code{draft}) or do not mark (@code{final}) overfull boxes with a
+black box in the margin; default is @code{final}.
+
+@item fleqn
+@cindex flush left equations
+@cindex centered equations
+@cindex equations, flush left vs.@: centered
+Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
+
+@item landscape
+@cindex landscape orientation
+@cindex portrait orientation
+Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
+
+@item leqno
+@cindex left-hand equation numbers
+@cindex right-hand equation numbers
+@cindex equation numbers, left vs.@: right
+Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side.
+
+@item openbib
+@cindex bibliography format, open
+Use ``open'' bibliography format.
+
+@item titlepage
+@itemx notitlepage
+@cindex title page, separate or run-in
+Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title information and
+for the abstract also, if there is one. The default for the
+@code{report} class is @code{titlepage}, for the other classes it is
+@code{notitlepage}.
+@end table
+
+The following options are not available with the @code{slides} class.
+
+@findex onecolumn @r{option}
+@findex twocolumn @r{option}
+@findex oneside @r{option}
+@findex twoside @r{option}
+@findex openright @r{option}
+@findex openany @r{option}
+@table @code
+@item onecolumn
+@itemx twocolumn
+Typeset in one or two columns; default is @code{onecolumn}.
+
+@item oneside
+@itemx twoside
+@findex \evensidemargin
+@findex \oddsidemargin
+Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is @code{oneside}, except
+that in the @code{book} class the default is @code{twoside}.
+
+For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page. For two-sided
+printing, the @code{\evensidemargin} (@code{\oddsidemargin}) parameter
+determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left
+side of the page and the text's left margin, with @code{\oddsidemargin}
+being 40% of the difference between @code{\paperwidth} and
+@code{\textwidth}, and @code{\evensidemargin} is the remainder.
+
+@item openright
+@itemx openany
+Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default is
+@code{openright} for @code{book}, and @code{openany} for @code{report}.
+@end table
+
+@findex clock @r{option to @code{slides} class}
+The @code{slides} class offers the option @code{clock} for printing
+the time at the bottom of each note.
+
+
+@node Additional packages
+@section Additional packages
+
+@cindex loading additional packages
+@cindex packages, loading additional
+@cindex additional packages, loading
+@findex \usepackage
+Load a package @var{pkg}, with the package options given in the comma-separated
+list @var{options}, as here.
+
+@example
+\usepackage[@var{options}]@{@var{pkg}@}.
+@end example
+
+To specify more than one package you can separate them with a comma,
+as in @code{\usepackage@{@var{pkg1},@var{pkg2},...@}}, or use multiple
+@code{\usepackage} commands.
+
+@cindex global options
+@cindex options, global
+Any options given in the @code{\documentclass} command that are unknown
+to the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
+@code{\usepackage}.
+
+
+@node Class and package construction
+@section Class and package construction
+
+@cindex document class commands
+@cindex commands, document class
+@cindex new class commands
+
+You can create new document classes and new packages. For instance, if
+your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a
+standard header for each page, then you could create a new class
+@code{smcmemo.cls} and begin your documents with
+@code{\documentclass@{smcmemo@}}.
+
+What separates a package from a document class is that the commands in a
+package are useful across classes while those in a document class are
+specific to that class. Thus, a command to set page headers is for a
+package while a command to make the page headers say @code{Memo from the
+SMC Math Department} is for a class.
+@cindex class and package difference
+@cindex difference between class and package
+
+Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign @code{@@} as a
+character in command names without having to surround the code
+containing that command with @code{\makeatletter} and
+@code{\makeatother}. @xref{\makeatletter & \makeatother}. This allow
+you to create commands that users will not accidentally redefine.
+Another technique is to preface class- or package-specific commands with
+some string to prevent your class or package from interfering with
+others. For instance, the class @code{smcmemo} might have commands
+@code{\smc@@tolist}, @code{\smc@@fromlist}, etc.
+
+
+@menu
+* Class and package structure:: Layout of the file.
+* Class and package commands:: List of commands.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Class and package structure
+@subsection Class and package structure
+
+@cindex class and package structure
+@cindex class file layout
+@cindex package file layout
+@cindex options, document class
+@cindex options, package
+@cindex class options
+@cindex package options
+
+A class file or package file typically has four parts.
+@enumerate
+@item
+In the @dfn{identification part}, the file says that it is a @LaTeX{}
+package or class and describes itself, using the @code{\NeedsTeXFormat}
+and @code{\ProvidesClass} or @code{\ProvidesPackage} commands.
+
+@item
+The @dfn{preliminary declarations part} declares some commands and
+can also load other files. Usually these commands will be those needed
+for the code used in the next part. For example, an @code{smcmemo}
+class might be called with an option to read in a file with a list of
+people for the to-head, as @code{\documentclass[mathto]@{smcmemo@}}, and
+therefore needs to define a command
+@code{\newcommand@{\setto@}[1]@{\def\@@tolist@{#1@}@}} used in that
+file.
+
+@item
+In the @dfn{handle options part} the class or package declares
+and processes its options. Class options allow a user to start their
+document as @code{\documentclass[@var{option list}]@{@var{class
+name}@}}, to modify the behavior of the class. An example is when you
+declare @code{\documentclass[11pt]@{article@}} to set the default
+document font size.
+
+@item
+Finally, in the @dfn{more declarations part} the class or package usually does
+most of its work: declaring new variables, commands and fonts, and
+loading other files.
+@end enumerate
+
+Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as @file{stub.cls}
+where @LaTeX{} can find it, for example in the same directory as the
+@file{.tex} file.
+
+@example
+\NeedsTeXFormat@{LaTeX2e@}
+\ProvidesClass@{stub@}[2017/07/06 stub to start building classes from]
+\DeclareOption*@{\PassOptionsToClass@{\CurrentOption@}@{article@}@}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+\LoadClass@{article@}
+@end example
+@cindex class file example
+
+@noindent
+It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
+passing them all to the @code{article} class, and then loads the
+@code{article} class to provide the basis for this class's code.
+
+For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
+Class Guide, at
+@url{http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf} (much
+of the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
+@url{https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf}.
+
+
+@node Class and package commands
+@subsection Class and package commands
+@cindex class and package commands
+@cindex commands, class and package
+
+These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
+
+@table @code
+@item \AtBeginDvi@{specials@}
+@findex \AtBeginDvi
+Save in a box register things that are written to the @file{.dvi} file
+at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
+
+@item \AtEndOfClass@{@var{code}@}
+@item \AtEndOfPackage@{@var{code}@}
+@findex \AtEndOfClass
+@findex \AtEndOfPackage
+Hook to insert @var{code} to be executed when @LaTeX{} finishes
+processing the current class or package. You can use these hooks
+multiple times; the @code{code} will be executed in the order that you
+called it. See also @ref{\AtBeginDocument}.
+
+@item \CheckCommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{num}][@var{default}]@{@var{definition}@}
+@item \CheckCommand*@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{num}][@var{default}]@{@var{definition}@}
+@findex \CheckCommand
+@findex \CheckCommand*
+@cindex new command, check
+Like @code{\newcommand} (@pxref{\newcommand & \renewcommand}) but does
+not define @var{cmd}; instead it checks that the current definition of
+@var{cmd} is exactly as given by @var{definition} and is or is not
+@cindex long command
+@dfn{long} as expected. A long command is a command that accepts
+@code{\par} within an argument. The @var{cmd} command is expected to be
+long with the unstarred version of @code{\CheckCommand}. Raises an
+error when the check fails. This allows you to check before you start
+redefining @code{cmd} yourself that no other package has already
+redefined this command.
+
+@item \ClassError@{@var{class name}@}@{@var{error text}@}@{@var{help text}@}
+@item \PackageError@{@var{package name}@}@{@var{error text}@}@{@var{help text}@}
+@item \ClassWarning@{@var{class name}@}@{@var{warning text}@}
+@item \PackageWarning@{@var{package name}@}@{@var{warning text}@}
+@item \ClassWarningNoLine@{@var{class name}@}@{@var{warning text}@}
+@item \PackageWarningNoLine@{@var{package name}@}@{@var{warning text}@}
+@item \ClassInfo@{@var{class name}@}@{@var{info text}@}
+@item \PackageInfo@{@var{package name}@}@{@var{info text}@}
+@item \ClassInfoNoLine@{@var{class name}@}@{@var{info text}@}
+@item \PackageInfoNoLine@{@var{package name}@}@{@var{info text}@}
+@findex \ClassError
+@findex \PackageError
+@findex \ClassWarning
+@findex \PackageWarning
+@findex \ClassWarningNoLine
+@findex \PackageWarningNoLine
+@findex \ClassInfo
+@findex \PackageInfo
+@findex \ClassInfoNoLine
+@findex \PackageInfoNoLine
+Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.
+
+For @code{\ClassError} and @code{\PackageError} the message is
+@var{error text}, followed by @TeX{}'s @code{?} error prompt. If the
+user then asks for help by typing @code{h}, they see the @var{help
+text}.
+
+The four warning commands are similar except that they write
+@var{warning text} on the screen with no error prompt. The four info
+commands write @var{info text} only in the transcript file. The
+@code{NoLine} versions do not show the number of the line generating the
+message, while the other versions do show that number.
+
+To format the messages, including the @var{help text}: use
+@code{\protect} to stop a command from expanding, get a line break with
+@code{\MessageBreak}, and get a space with @code{\space} when a space
+character does not allow it, like after a command. Note that @LaTeX{}
+appends a period to the messages.
+
+@item \CurrentOption
+@findex \CurrentOption
+Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can only
+be used within the @var{code} argument of either @code{\DeclareOption}
+or @code{\DeclareOption*}.
+
+@item \DeclareOption@{@var{option}@}@{@var{code}@}
+@item \DeclareOption*@{@var{code}@}
+@findex \DeclareOption
+@findex \DeclareOption*
+@cindex class options
+@cindex package options
+@cindex options, class
+@cindex options, package
+Make an option available to a user to invoke in their
+@code{\documentclass} command. For example, the @code{smcmemo} class
+could have an option @code{\documentclass[logo]@{smcmemo@}} allowing
+users to put the institutional logo on the first page. The class file
+must contain @code{\DeclareOption@{logo@}@{@var{code}@}} (and later,
+@code{\ProcessOptions}).
+
+If you request an option that has not been declared, by default this
+will produce a warning like @code{Unused global option(s): [badoption].}
+Change this behaviour with the starred version
+@code{\DeclareOption*@{@var{code}@}}. For example, many classes extend
+an existing class, using a declaration such as
+@code{\LoadClass@{article@}}, and for passing extra options to the
+underlying class use code such as this.
+
+@example
+\DeclareOption*@{%
+\PassOptionsToClass@{\CurrentOption@}@{article@}%
+@}
+@end example
+
+Another example is that the class @code{smcmemo} may allow users to keep
+lists of memo recipients in external files. Then the user could invoke
+@code{\documentclass[math]@{smcmemo@}} and it will read the file
+@code{math.memo}. This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
+passes the option to the @code{article} class.
+
+@example
+\DeclareOption*@{\InputIfFileExists@{\CurrentOption.memo@}@{@}@{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass@{\CurrentOption@}@{article@}@}@}
+@end example
+
+@item \DeclareRobustCommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{num}][@var{default}]@{@var{definition}@}
+@item \DeclareRobustCommand*@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{num}][@var{default}]@{@var{definition}@}
+@findex \DeclareRobustCommand
+@findex \DeclareRobustCommand*
+@cindex new command, definition
+Like @code{\newcommand} and @code{\newcommand*} (@pxref{\newcommand &
+\renewcommand}) but these declare a robust command, even if some code
+within the @var{definition} is fragile. (For a discussion of robust and
+fragile commands @pxref{\protect}.) Use this command to define new
+robust commands or to redefine existing commands and make them
+robust. Unlike @code{\newcommand} these do not give an error if macro
+@var{cmd} already exists; instead, a log message is put into the
+transcript file if a command is redefined.
+
+Commands defined this way are a bit less efficient than those defined
+using @code{\newcommand} so unless the command's data is fragile and the
+command is used within a moving argument, use @code{\newcommand}.
+
+@PkgIndex{etoolbox} The @file{etoolbox} package offers the commands
+@code{\newrobustcmd}, @code{\newrobustcmd*}, as well as the commands
+@code{\renewrobustcmd}, @code{\renewrobustcmd*}, and the commands
+@code{\providerobustcmd}, and @code{\providerobustcmd*}. These are
+similar to @code{\newcommand}, @code{\newcommand*},
+@code{\renewcommand}, @code{\renewcommand*}, @code{\providecommand}, and
+@code{\providecommand*}, but define a robust @var{cmd} with two
+advantages as compared to @code{\DeclareRobustCommand}:
+@enumerate
+@item
+They use the low-level e-@TeX{} protection mechanism rather than the
+higher level @LaTeX{} @code{\protect} mechanism, so they do not incur
+the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
+@item
+They make the same distinction between @code{\new@dots{}},
+@code{\renew@dots{}}, and @code{\provide@dots{}}, as the standard
+commands, so they do not just make a log message when you redefine
+@var{cmd} that already exists, in that case you need to use either
+@code{\renew@dots{}} or @code{\provide@dots{}} or you get an error.
+@end enumerate
+
+
+@item \IfFileExists@{@var{file name}@}@{@var{true code}@}@{@var{false code}@}
+@item \InputIfFileExists@{@var{file name}@}@{@var{true code}@}@{@var{false code}@}
+@findex \IfFileExists
+@findex \InputIfFileExists
+Execute @var{true code} if @LaTeX{} finds the file @file{@var{file
+name}} or @var{false code} otherwise. In the first case it executing
+@var{true code} and then inputs the file. Thus the command
+
+@example
+\IfFileExists@{img.pdf@}@{%
+ \includegraphics@{img.pdf@}@}@{\typeout@{!! img.pdf not found@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+will include the graphic @file{img.pdf} if it is found and otherwise
+give a warning.
+
+This command looks for the file in all search paths that @LaTeX{} uses,
+not only in the current directory. To look only in the current
+directory do something like @code{\IfFileExists@{./filename@}@{@var{true
+code}@}@{@var{false code}@}}. If you ask for a filename without a
+@code{.tex} extension then @LaTeX{} will first look for the file by
+appending the @code{.tex}; for more on how @LaTeX{} handles file
+extensions see @ref{\input}.
+
+@item \LoadClass[@var{options list}]@{@var{class name}@}[@var{release date}]
+@item \LoadClassWithOptions@{@var{class name}@}[@var{release date}]
+@findex \LoadClass
+@findex \LoadClassWithOptions
+Load a class, as with @code{\documentclass[@var{options
+list}]@{@var{class name}@}[@var{release info}]}. An example is
+@code{\LoadClass[twoside]@{article@}}.
+
+The @var{options list}, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+@var{release date} is optional. If present it must have the form
+@var{YYYY/MM/DD}.
+@c BTW, there are at-macros documented in macros2e.pdf to check the version
+@c and do some actions conditionnally on version later or not to some
+@c date.
+
+If you request a @var{release date} and the date of the package
+installed on your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the
+screen and in the log like this.
+
+@example
+You have requested, on input line 4, version `2038/01/19' of
+document class article, but only version `2014/09/29 v1.4h
+Standard LaTeX document class' is available.
+@end example
+
+The command version @code{\LoadClassWithOptions} uses the list of
+options for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed
+to it via @code{\PassOptionsToClass}. This is a convenience command
+that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the standard
+@code{article} class, without having to track which options were passed.
+
+@item \ExecuteOptions@{@var{options-list}@}
+@findex \ExecuteOptions
+For each option @var{option} in the @var{options-list}, in order, this command
+executes the command @code{\ds@@@var{option}}. If this command is not
+defined then that option is silently ignored.
+
+It can be used to provide a default option list before
+@code{\ProcessOptions}. For example, if in a class file you want the
+default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
+@code{\ExecuteOptions@{11pt@}\ProcessOptions\relax}.
+
+@item \NeedsTeXFormat@{@var{format}@}[@var{format date}]
+@findex \NeedsTeXFormat
+Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often issued
+as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
+@code{\NeedsTeXFormat@{LaTeX2e@}}. When a document using that class is
+processed, the format name given here must match the format that is
+actually being run (including that the @var{format} string is case
+sensitive). If it does not match then execution stops with an error
+like @samp{This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.}
+
+To specify a version of the format that you know to have certain
+features, include the optional @var{format date} on which those features
+were implemented. If present it must be in the form @code{YYYY/MM/DD}.
+If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
+@var{format date} then you get a warning like this.
+
+@example
+You have requested release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only
+release `2016/02/01' is available.
+@end example
+
+@item \OptionNotUsed
+@findex \OptionNotUsed
+Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be used
+within the @var{code} argument of either @code{\DeclareOption} or
+@code{\DeclareOption*}.
+
+@c I cannot reproduce this behavior as it is documented in clsguide.
+@c In the absence of a @code{\DeclareOption*} declaration, @LaTeX{} issues
+@c on the console a warning like @code{LaTeX Warning: Unused global
+@c option(s): [unusedoption].} with the list of not-used options when it
+@c reaches @code{\begin@{document@}}.
+
+@item \PassOptionsToClass@{@var{option list}@}@{@var{class name}@}
+@item \PassOptionsToPackage@{@var{option list}@}@{@var{package name}@}
+@findex \PassOptionsToClass
+@findex \PassOptionsToPackage
+Adds the options in the comma-separated list @var{option list} to the
+options used by any future @code{\RequirePackage} or @code{\usepackage}
+command for package @var{package name} or the class @var{class name}.
+
+The reason for these commands is: you may load a package any number of
+times with no options but if you want options then you may only supply
+them when you first load the package. Loading a package with options
+more than once will get you an error like @code{Option clash for package
+foo.} (@LaTeX{} throws an error even if there is no conflict between the
+options.)
+
+If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can collapse
+that to once, for example replacing the two
+@code{\RequirePackage[landscape]@{geometry@}} and
+@code{\RequirePackage[margins=1in]@{geometry@}} with the single command
+@code{\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]@{geometry@}}.
+
+However, imagine that you are loading @file{firstpkg} and inside that
+package it loads @file{secondpkg}, and you need the second package to be
+loaded with option @code{draft}. Then before doing the first package
+you must queue up the options for the second package, like this.
+
+@example
+\PassOptionsToPackage@{draft@}@{secondpkg@}
+\RequirePackage@{firstpkg@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+(If @code{firstpkg.sty} loads an option in conflict with what you want
+then you may have to alter its source.)
+
+These commands are useful for general users as well as class and package
+writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the @code{graphicx}
+package with the option @code{draft} and also wants to use a class
+@code{foo} that loads the @code{graphicx} package, but without that
+option. The user could start their @LaTeX{} file with
+@code{\PassOptionsToPackage@{draft@}@{graphicx@}\documentclass@{foo@}}.
+
+@item \ProcessOptions
+@item \ProcessOptions*@var{\@@options}
+@findex \ProcessOptions
+@findex \ProcessOptions*
+Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked. Include it
+in the class file as @code{\ProcessOptions\relax} (because of the
+existence of the starred command).
+
+Options come in two types. @dfn{Local options} have been specified for this
+particular package in the @var{options} argument of
+@code{\PassOptionsToPackage@{@var{options}@}},
+@code{\usepackage[@var{options}]}, or
+@code{\RequirePackage[@var{options}]}. @dfn{Global options} are those given
+by the class user in @code{\documentclass[@var{options}]} (If an option
+is specified both locally and globally then it is local.)
+
+When @code{\ProcessOptions} is called for a package @file{pkg.sty}, the
+following happens:
+@enumerate
+@item
+For each option @var{option} so far declared
+with @code{\DeclareOption}, it looks to see if that option is either a
+global or a local option for @code{pkg}. If so then it executes the
+declared code. This is done in the order in which these options were
+given in @file{pkg.sty}.
+@item
+For each remaining local option, it executes the command
+@code{\ds@@}@var{option} if it has been defined somewhere (other than by
+a @code{\DeclareOption}); otherwise, it executes the default option code
+given in @code{\DeclareOption*}. If no default option code has been
+declared then it gives an error message. This is done in the order in
+which these options were specified.
+@end enumerate
+
+When @code{\ProcessOptions} is called for a class it works in the same
+way except that all options are local, and the default @var{code} for
+@code{\DeclareOption*} is @code{\OptionNotUsed} rather than an error.
+
+The starred version @code{\ProcessOptions*} executes the
+options in the order specified in the calling commands, rather than in
+the order of declaration in the class or package. For a package this
+means that the global options are processed first.
+
+@item \ProvidesClass@{@var{class name}@}[@var{release date} @var{brief additional information}]
+@item \ProvidesClass@{@var{class name}@}[@var{release date}]
+@item \ProvidesPackage@{@var{package name}@}[@var{release date} @var{brief additional information}]
+@item \ProvidesPackage@{@var{package name}@}[@var{release date}]
+@findex \ProvidesClass
+@findex \ProvidesPackage
+Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and
+the log file.
+
+When you load a class or package, for example with
+@code{\documentclass@{smcmemo@}} or @code{\usepackage@{test@}}, @LaTeX{}
+inputs a file. If the name of the file does not match the class or
+package name declared in it then you get a warning. Thus, if you invoke
+@code{\documentclass@{smcmemo@}}, and the file @file{smcmemo.cls} has
+the statement @code{\ProvidesClass@{xxx@}} then you get a warning like
+@code{You have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document
+class provides 'xxx'.} This warning does not prevent @LaTeX{} from
+processing the rest of the class file normally.
+
+If you include the optional argument then you must include a date,
+before any spaces, of the form @code{YYYY/MM/DD}. The rest of the
+optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally identifies the
+class, and is written to the screen during compilation and to the log
+file. Thus, if your file @file{smcmemo.cls} contains the line
+@code{\ProvidesClass@{smcmemo@}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]} and
+your document's first line is @code{\documentclass@{smcmemo@}} then you
+will see @code{Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class}.
+
+The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to ask
+to be warned if the version of the class or package is earlier than
+@var{release date}. For instance, a user could enter
+@code{\documentclass@{smcmemo@}[2018/10/12]} or
+@code{\usepackage@{foo@}[[2017/07/07]]} to require a class or package
+with certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier
+than the given date. (Although, in practice package users only rarely
+include a date, and class users almost never do.)
+
+@item \ProvidesFile@{@var{file name}@}[@var{additional information}]
+@findex \ProvidesFile
+Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
+configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in that
+file and you get in the log a string like @code{File: test.config
+2017/10/12 config file for test.cls} for @var{file name} equal to
+@samp{test.config} and @var{additional information} equal to
+@samp{2017/10/12 config file for test.cls}.
+
+@item \RequirePackage[@var{option list}]@{@var{package name}@}[@var{release date}]
+@item \RequirePackageWithOptions@{@var{package name}@}[@var{release date}]
+@findex \RequirePackage
+@findex \RequirePackageWithOptions
+Load a package, like the command @code{\usepackage} (@pxref{Additional
+packages}). The @LaTeX{} development team strongly recommends use of
+these commands over Plain@tie{}@TeX{}'s @code{\input}; see the Class
+Guide. An example is
+@code{\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]@{geometry@}}.
+
+The @var{option list}, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+@var{release date}, if present, must have the form @var{YYYY/MM/DD}. If
+the release date of the package as installed on your system is earlier
+than @var{release date} then you get a warning like @code{You have
+requested, on input line 9, version `2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but
+only version `2000/01/01' is available}.
+
+The @code{\RequirePackageWithOptions} version uses the list of options
+for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to it
+via @code{\PassOptionsToClass}. This is a convenience command to allow
+easily building classes on existing ones without having to track which
+options were passed.
+
+The difference between @code{\usepackage} and @code{\RequirePackage} is
+small. The @code{\usepackage} command is intended for the document file
+while @code{\RequirePackage} is intended for package and class files.
+Thus, using @code{\usepackage} before the @code{\documentclass} command
+causes @LaTeX{} to give error like @code{\usepackage before
+\documentclass}, but you can use @code{\RequirePackage} there.
+@end table
+
+
+@node Fonts
+@chapter Fonts
+@anchor{Typefaces}@c old name
+
+@cindex typefaces
+@cindex fonts
+
+Two important aspects of selecting a @dfn{font} are specifying a size
+and a style. The @LaTeX{} commands for doing this are described here.
+
+@menu
+* Font styles:: Select roman, italics, etc.
+* Font sizes:: Select point size.
+* Low-level font commands:: Select encoding, family, series, shape.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Font styles
+@section Font styles
+
+@cindex font styles
+@cindex type styles
+@cindex styles of text
+
+The following type style commands are supported by @LaTeX{}.
+
+In the table below the listed commands, the @code{\text...} commands,
+is used with an argument, as in @code{\textit@{@var{text}@}}. This is
+the preferred form. But shown after it, in parenthesis, is the
+corresponding declaration form, which is sometimes useful. This form
+takes no arguments, as in @code{@{\itshape @var{text}@}}. The scope of
+the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end
+of the current group. In addition, each has an environment form such as
+@code{\begin@{itshape@}...\end@{itshape@}}.
+
+These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, are
+cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying either of
+@code{\sffamily\bfseries} or @code{\bfseries\sffamily}.
+
+@findex \nocorrlist
+@findex \nocorr
+One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert italic
+corrections if needed (@pxref{\/}). Specifically, they insert the
+italic correction unless the following character is in the list
+@code{\nocorrlist}, which by default consists of a period and a comma.
+To suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use
+@code{\nocorr} at the start or end of the command argument, such as
+@code{\textit@{\nocorr text@}} or @code{\textsc@{text \nocorr@}}.
+
+@table @code
+@item \textrm (\rmfamily)
+@findex \textrm
+@findex \rmfamily
+Roman.
+
+@item \textit (\itshape)
+@findex \textit
+@findex \itshape
+Italics.
+
+@item \textmd (\mdseries)
+@findex \textmd
+@findex \mdseries
+Medium weight (default).
+
+@item \textbf (\bfseries)
+@findex \textbf
+@findex \bfseries
+Boldface.
+
+@item \textup (\upshape)
+@findex \textup
+@findex \upshape
+Upright (default).
+
+@item \textsl (\slshape)
+@findex \textsl
+@findex \slshape
+Slanted.
+
+@item \textsf (\sffamily)
+@findex \textsf
+@findex \sffamily
+Sans serif.
+
+@item \textsc (\scshape)
+@findex \textsc
+@findex \scshape
+Small caps.
+
+@item \texttt (\ttfamily)
+@findex \texttt
+@findex \ttfamily
+Typewriter.
+
+@item \textnormal (\normalfont)
+@findex \textnormal
+@findex \normalfont
+Main document font.
+
+@end table
+
+@cindex emphasis
+@findex \emph
+Although it also changes fonts, the @code{\emph@{@var{text}@}} command
+is semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
+substitute for @code{\textit}. For example, @code{\emph@{@var{start
+text} \emph@{@var{middle text}@} @var{end text}@}} will result in the
+@var{start text} and @var{end text} in italics, but @var{middle text}
+will be in roman.
+
+@LaTeX{} also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
+switch to the given style, that is, are @emph{not} cumulative. They are
+used as declarations: @code{@{\@var{cmd}...@}} instead of
+@code{\@var{cmd}@{...@}}.
+
+(The unconditional commands below are an older version of font
+switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most
+circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
+what you want.)
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \bf
+@cindex bold font
+Switch to bold face.
+
+@item \cal
+@cindex script letters for math
+@cindex calligraphic letters for math
+Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
+
+@item \it
+@cindex italic font
+Italics.
+
+@item \rm
+@cindex roman font
+Roman.
+
+@item \sc
+@cindex small caps font
+Small caps.
+
+@item \sf
+@cindex sans serif font
+Sans serif.
+
+@item \sl
+@cindex slanted font
+@cindex oblique font
+Slanted (oblique).
+
+@item \tt
+@cindex typewriter font
+@cindex monospace font
+@cindex fixed-width font
+Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
+
+@end ftable
+
+The @code{\em} command is the unconditional version of @code{\emph}.
+
+The following commands are for use in math mode. They are not
+cumulative, so @code{\mathbf@{\mathit@{@var{symbol}@}@}} does not
+create a boldface and italic @var{symbol}; instead, it will just be in
+italics. This is because typically math symbols need consistent
+typographic treatment, regardless of the surrounding environment.
+
+@table @code
+@item \mathrm
+@findex \mathrm
+Roman, for use in math mode.
+
+@item \mathbf
+@findex \mathbf
+Boldface, for use in math mode.
+
+@item \mathsf
+@findex \mathsf
+Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+
+@item \mathtt
+@findex \mathtt
+Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+
+@item \mathit
+@itemx (\mit)
+Italics, for use in math mode.
+
+@item \mathnormal
+@findex \mathnormal
+For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration.
+
+@item \mathcal
+@findex \mathcal
+Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.
+
+@end table
+
+@findex \mathversion
+@cindex math, bold
+@cindex bold math
+In addition, the command @code{\mathversion@{bold@}} can be used for
+switching to bold letters and symbols in
+formulas. @code{\mathversion@{normal@}} restores the default.
+
+@findex \oldstylenums
+@cindex numerals, old-style
+@cindex old-style numerals
+@cindex lining numerals
+@PkgIndex{textcomp}
+Finally, the command @code{\oldstylenums@{@var{numerals}@}} will typeset
+so-called ``old-style'' numerals, which have differing heights and
+depths (and sometimes widths) from the standard ``lining'' numerals,
+which all have the same height as uppercase letters. @LaTeX{}'s
+default fonts support this, and will respect @code{\textbf} (but not
+other styles; there are no italic old-style numerals in Computer
+Modern). Many other fonts have old-style numerals also; sometimes the
+@code{textcomp} package must be loaded, and sometimes package options
+are provided to make them the default. FAQ entry:
+@url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf}.
+
+
+@node Font sizes
+@section Font sizes
+
+@cindex font sizes
+@cindex typeface sizes
+@cindex sizes of text
+
+The following standard type size commands are supported by @LaTeX{}.
+The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font
+size used (in points) with the @samp{10pt}, @samp{11pt}, and
+@samp{12pt} document size options, respectively (@pxref{Document class
+options}).
+
+@findex \tiny
+@findex \scriptsize
+@findex \footnotesize
+@findex \small
+@findex \normalsize
+@findex \large
+@findex \Large
+@findex \LARGE
+@findex \huge
+@findex \Huge
+
+@multitable {@code{\normalsize} (default)@ @ } {24.88@ @ } {24.88@ @ } {24.88}
+@headitem Command @tab @code{10pt} @tab @code{11pt} @tab @code{12pt}
+@item @code{\tiny}
+@tab 5 @tab 6 @tab 6
+@item @code{\scriptsize}
+@tab 7 @tab 8 @tab 8
+@item @code{\footnotesize}
+@tab 8 @tab 9 @tab 10
+@item @code{\small}
+@tab 9 @tab 10 @tab 10.95
+@item @code{\normalsize} (default)
+@tab 10 @tab 10.95 @tab 12
+@item @code{\large}
+@tab 12 @tab 12 @tab 14.4
+@item @code{\Large}
+@tab 14.4 @tab 14.4 @tab 17.28
+@item @code{\LARGE}
+@tab 17.28 @tab 17.28 @tab 20.74
+@item @code{\huge}
+@tab 20.74 @tab 20.74 @tab 24.88
+@item @code{\Huge}
+@tab 24.88 @tab 24.88 @tab 24.88
+@end multitable
+
+The commands are listed here in declaration forms. You use them by
+declaring them, as with this example.
+
+@example
+\begin@{quotation@} \small
+ The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao.
+\end@{quotation@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The scope of the @code{\small} lasts until the end of the
+@code{quotation} environment. It would also end at the next type style
+command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it in
+extra curly braces @code{@{\small We are here, we are here, we are
+here!@}}. You can instead use the environment form of these commands;
+for instance, @code{\begin@{tiny@}...\end@{tiny@}}.
+
+
+@node Low-level font commands
+@section Low-level font commands
+
+@cindex low-level font commands
+@cindex font commands, low-level
+
+These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
+packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
+ones.
+@c xx but it should be complete
+@c xx something about ultimately reading ENCFAM.fd?
+
+@table @code
+@anchor{low level font commands fontencoding}
+@item \fontencoding@{@var{encoding}@}
+@findex \fontencoding
+Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There are a
+large number of valid encodings. The most common are @code{OT1},
+Knuth's original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
+@code{T1}, also known as the Cork encoding, which has support for the
+accented characters used by the most widespread European languages
+(German, French, Italian, Polish and others), which allows @TeX{} to
+hyphenate words containing accented letters. For more, see
+@url{https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide}.
+
+@anchor{low level font commands fontfamily}
+@item \fontfamily@{@var{family}@}
+@findex \fontfamily
+@cindex families, of fonts
+@cindex font catalogue
+Select the font family. The web page
+@url{http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/} provides one way to browse
+through many of the fonts easily used with @LaTeX{}. Here are
+examples of some common families.
+
+@multitable {font} {Computer Modern Typewriter more space}
+@item @code{pag}
+@tab Avant Garde
+@item @code{fvs}
+@tab Bitstream Vera Sans
+@item @code{pbk}
+@tab Bookman
+@item @code{bch}
+@tab Charter
+@item @code{ccr}
+@tab Computer Concrete
+@item @code{cmr}
+@tab Computer Modern
+@item @code{cmss}
+@tab Computer Modern Sans Serif
+@item @code{cmtt}
+@tab Computer Modern Typewriter
+@item @code{pcr}
+@tab Courier
+@item @code{phv}
+@tab Helvetica
+@item @code{fi4}
+@tab Inconsolata
+@item @code{lmr}
+@tab Latin Modern
+@item @code{lmss}
+@tab Latin Modern Sans
+@item @code{lmtt}
+@tab Latin Modern Typewriter
+@item @code{pnc}
+@tab New Century Schoolbook
+@item @code{ppl}
+@tab Palatino
+@item @code{ptm}
+@tab Times
+@item @code{uncl}
+@tab Uncial
+@item @code{put}
+@tab Utopia
+@item @code{pzc}
+@tab Zapf Chancery
+@end multitable
+
+
+@anchor{low level font commands fontseries}
+@item \fontseries@{@var{series}@}
+@findex \fontseries
+@cindex series, of fonts
+Select the font series. A @dfn{series} combines a @dfn{weight} and a
+@dfn{width}. Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible
+combinations. Some common combined series values include:
+
+@multitable {xx} {Medium (normal)xx}
+@item @code{m}
+@tab Medium (normal)
+@item @code{b}
+@tab Bold
+@item @code{c}
+@tab Condensed
+@item @code{bc}
+@tab Bold condensed
+@item @code{bx}
+@tab Bold extended
+@end multitable
+
+@cindex weights, of fonts
+The possible values for weight, individually, are:
+
+@multitable {xx} {Medium (normal) xx}
+@item @code{ul}
+@tab Ultra light
+@item @code{el}
+@tab Extra light
+@item @code{l}
+@tab Light
+@item @code{sl}
+@tab Semi light
+@item @code{m}
+@tab Medium (normal)
+@item @code{sb}
+@tab Semi bold
+@item @code{b}
+@tab Bold
+@item @code{eb}
+@tab Extra bold
+@item @code{ub}
+@tab Ultra bold
+@end multitable
+
+@cindex widths, of fonts
+The possible values for width, individually, are (the meaning and
+relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces):
+
+@multitable {xx} {Ultra condensed}
+@item @code{uc}
+@tab Ultra condensed
+@item @code{ec}
+@tab Extra condensed
+@item @code{c}
+@tab Condensed
+@item @code{sc}
+@tab Semi condensed
+@item @code{m}
+@tab Medium
+@item @code{sx}
+@tab Semi expanded
+@item @code{x}
+@tab Expanded
+@item @code{ex}
+@tab Extra expanded
+@item @code{ux}
+@tab Ultra expanded
+@end multitable
+
+When forming the @var{series} string from the weight and width, drop the
+@code{m} that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both
+weight and width are @code{m}, in which case use just one
+(@samp{@code{m}}).
+
+@item \fontshape@{@var{shape}@}
+@findex \fontshape
+@cindex shapes, of fonts
+@anchor{low level font commands fontshape}
+Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+
+@multitable {xx} {Slanted (oblique)xx}
+@item @code{n}
+@tab Upright (normal)
+@item @code{it}
+@tab Italic
+@item @code{sl}
+@tab Slanted (oblique)
+@item @code{sc}
+@tab Small caps
+@item @code{ui}
+@tab Upright italics
+@item @code{ol}
+@tab Outline
+@end multitable
+
+The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and
+small caps are often missing as well.
+
+@anchor{low level font commands fontsize}
+@item \fontsize@{@var{size}@}@{@var{skip}@}
+@findex \fontsize
+@cindex font size
+@findex \baselineskip
+Set the font size and the line spacing. The unit of both parameters
+defaults to points (@code{pt}). The line spacing is the nominal
+vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline. It is stored in the
+parameter @code{\baselineskip}. The default @code{\baselineskip} for
+the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the @code{\fontsize}.
+Changing @code{\baselineskip} directly is inadvisable since its value is
+reset every time a size change happens; see @code{\baselinestretch}, next.
+
+@anchor{low level font commands baselinestretch}
+@item \baselinestretch
+@findex \baselinestretch
+@LaTeX{} multiplies the line spacing by the value of the
+@code{\baselinestretch} parameter; the default factor is 1. A change
+takes effect when @code{\selectfont} (see below) is called. You can
+make a line skip change happen for the entire document, for instance
+doubling it, by doing @code{\renewcommand@{\baselinestretch@}@{2.0@}} in
+the preamble.
+
+@PkgIndex{setspace}
+@cindex double spacing
+However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
+@file{setspace} package. In addition to offering a number of spacing
+options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in places
+where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and figure
+captions. See the package documentation.
+
+@anchor{low level font commands linespread}
+@item \linespread@{@var{factor}@}
+@findex \linespread
+Equivalent to
+@code{\renewcommand@{\baselinestretch@}@{@var{factor}@}}, and
+therefore must be followed by @code{\selectfont} to have any effect.
+Best specified in the preamble, or use the @code{setspace} package, as
+just described.
+
+@anchor{low level font commands selectfont}
+@item \selectfont
+@findex \selectfont
+The effects of the font commands described above do not happen until
+@code{\selectfont} is called, as in
+@code{\fontfamily@{@var{familyname}@}\selectfont}. It is often useful
+to put this in a macro:@*
+@code{\newcommand*@{\myfont@}@{\fontfamily@{@var{familyname}@}\selectfont@}}@*
+(@pxref{\newcommand & \renewcommand}).
+
+@anchor{low level font commands usefont}
+@item \usefont@{@var{enc}@}@{@var{family}@}@{@var{series}@}@{@var{shape}@}
+@findex \usefont
+The same as invoking @code{\fontencoding}, @code{\fontfamily},
+@code{\fontseries} and @code{\fontshape} with the given parameters,
+followed by @code{\selectfont}. For example:
+
+@example
+\usefont@{ot1@}@{cmr@}@{m@}@{n@}
+@end example
+
+@end table
+
+
+@node Layout
+@chapter Layout
+
+@cindex layout commands
+
+Commands for controlling the general page layout.
+
+@menu
+* \onecolumn:: Use one-column layout.
+* \twocolumn:: Use two-column layout.
+* \flushbottom:: Make all text pages the same height.
+* \raggedbottom:: Allow text pages of differing height.
+* Page layout parameters:: @code{\headheight} @code{\footskip}.
+* Floats:: Figures, tables, etc.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \onecolumn
+@section @code{\onecolumn}
+
+@findex \onecolumn
+@cindex one-column output
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\onecolumn
+@end example
+
+Start a new page and produce single-column output. If the document is
+given the class option @code{onecolumn} then this is the default
+behavior (@pxref{Document class options}). This command is fragile
+(@pxref{\protect}).
+
+
+@node \twocolumn
+@section @code{\twocolumn}
+
+@findex \twocolumn
+@cindex multicolumn text
+@cindex two-column output
+
+Synopses:
+
+@example
+\twocolumn
+\twocolumn[@var{prelim one column text}]
+@end example
+
+Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is given
+the class option @code{twocolumn} then this is the default
+(@pxref{Document class options}). This command is fragile
+(@pxref{\protect}).
+
+If the optional @var{prelim one column text} argument
+is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column
+typesetting starts.
+
+These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \columnsep
+@anchor{twocolumn columnsep}
+The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with a
+command such as @code{\setlength@{\columnsep@}@{40pt@}} You must change
+it before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good
+place.
+
+@item \columnseprule
+@anchor{twocolumn columnseprule}
+The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway between
+the two columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that there is no rule.
+Change it with a command such as
+@code{\setlength@{\columnseprule@}@{0.4pt@}}, before the two-column
+environment starts.
+
+@item \columnwidth
+@anchor{twocolumn columnwidth}
+The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to
+@code{\textwidth}. In two-column mode by default @LaTeX{} sets the
+width of each of the two columns to be half of @code{\textwidth} minus
+@code{\columnsep}.
+
+@end ftable
+
+In a two-column document, the starred environments @code{table*} and
+@code{figure*} are two columns wide, whereas the unstarred environments
+@code{table} and @code{figure} take up only one column (@pxref{figure}
+and @pxref{table}). @LaTeX{} places starred floats at the top of a page.
+The following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
+
+@ftable @code
+@anchor{twocolumn dbltopfraction}
+@item \dbltopfraction
+The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
+occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning that
+the height of a @code{table*} or @code{figure*} environment must not
+exceed @code{0.7\textheight} . If the height of your starred float
+environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following actions
+to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the document:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+Use the @code{[tp]} location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put
+the bulky float on a page by itself, as well as at the top of a page.
+
+@item
+Use the @code{[t!]} location specifier to override the effect of
+@code{\dbltopfraction} for this particular float.
+
+@item
+Increase the value of @code{\dbltopfraction} to a suitably large number,
+to avoid going to float pages so soon.
+@end itemize
+
+You can redefine it, as with
+@code{\renewcommand@{\dbltopfraction@}@{0.9@}}.
+
+@anchor{twocolumn dblfloatpagefraction}
+@item \dblfloatpagefraction
+For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction
+that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of blank space.
+@LaTeX{}'s default is @code{0.5}. Change it with @code{\renewcommand}.
+
+@anchor{twocolumn dblfloatsep}
+@item \dblfloatsep
+On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance
+between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page. The default is
+@code{12pt plus2pt minus2pt} for a document set at @code{10pt} or
+@code{11pt}, and @code{14pt plus2pt minus4pt} for a document set at
+@code{12pt}.
+
+@anchor{twocolumn dbltextfloatsep}
+@item \dbltextfloatsep
+This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or
+bottom of a page and the main text. The default is @code{20pt plus2pt
+minus4pt}.
+
+@anchor{twocolumn dbltopnumber}
+@item \dbltopnumber
+On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the
+maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The @LaTeX{}
+default is @code{2}.
+
+@end ftable
+
+@c From egreg at http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/142232/339
+This example uses @code{\twocolumn}'s optional argument of to create a
+title that spans the two-column article:
+
+@example
+\documentclass[twocolumn]@{article@}
+\newcommand@{\authormark@}[1]@{\textsuperscript@{#1@}@}
+\begin@{document@}
+\twocolumn[@{% inside this optional argument goes one-column text
+ \centering
+ \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
+ \large Author One\authormark@{1@},
+ Author Two\authormark@{2@},
+ Author Three\authormark@{1@} \\[1em]
+ \normalsize
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{p@{.2\textwidth@}@@@{\hspace@{2em@}@}p@{.2\textwidth@}@}
+ \authormark@{1@}Department one &\authormark@{2@}Department two \\
+ School one &School two
+ \end@{tabular@}\\[3em] % space below title part
+ @}]
+
+Two column text here.
+@end example
+
+
+@node \flushbottom
+@section @code{\flushbottom}
+
+@findex \flushbottom
+
+Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
+height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
+page. This is most often used when making two-sided documents since the
+differences in facing pages can be glaring.
+
+If @TeX{} cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
+then you get a message like @samp{Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active}. If you get that, one option is to
+change to @code{\raggedbottom} (@pxref{\raggedbottom}). Alternatively,
+you can adjust the @code{textheight} to make compatible pages, or you
+can add some vertical stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs,
+as in @code{\setlength@{\parskip@}@{0ex plus0.1ex@}}. Your last option
+is to, in a final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages
+(@pxref{\enlargethispage}).
+
+The @code{\flushbottom} state is the default only if you select the
+@code{twoside} document class option (@pxref{Document class options}).
+
+
+@node \raggedbottom
+@section @code{\raggedbottom}
+
+@findex \raggedbottom
+@cindex stretch, omitting vertical
+
+Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
+rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
+document the facing pages may be different heights. This command can go
+at any point in the document body. See @ref{\flushbottom}.
+
+This is the default unless you select the @code{twoside} document class
+option (@pxref{Document class options}).
+
+
+@node Page layout parameters
+@section Page layout parameters
+
+@cindex page layout parameters
+@cindex parameters, page layout
+@cindex layout, page parameters for
+@cindex header, parameters for
+@cindex footer, parameters for
+@cindex running header and footer
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \columnsep
+@itemx \columnseprule
+@itemx \columnwidth
+@findex \columnsep
+@findex \columnseprule
+@findex \columnwidth
+@anchor{page layout parameters columnsep}
+@anchor{page layout parameters columnseprule}
+@anchor{page layout parameters columnwidth}
+The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between the
+columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class option
+@code{twocolumn} is in effect (@pxref{Document class options}).
+@xref{\twocolumn}.
+
+@item \headheight
+@findex \headheight
+@anchor{page layout parameters headheight}
+Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in the
+@code{article}, @code{report}, and @code{book} classes is @samp{12pt},
+at all type sizes.
+
+@item \headsep
+@findex \headsep
+@anchor{page layout parameters headsep}
+Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of
+the main text. The default in the @code{article} and @code{report}
+classes is @samp{25pt}. In the @code{book} class the default is: if the
+document is set at 10pt then it is @samp{0.25in}, and at 11pt and 12pt
+it is @samp{0.275in}.
+
+@item \footskip
+@findex \footskip
+@anchor{page layout parameters footskip}
+Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of
+the page footer. The default in the @code{article} and @code{report}
+classes is @samp{30pt}. In the @code{book} class the default is: when
+the type size is 10pt the default is @samp{0.35in}, while at 11pt it is
+@samp{0.38in}, and at 12pt it is @samp{30pt}.
+
+@item \linewidth
+@findex \linewidth
+@anchor{page layout parameters linewidth}
+Width of the current line, decreased for each nested @code{list}
+(@pxref{list}). That is, the nominal value for @code{\linewidth} is to
+equal @code{\textwidth} but for each nested list the @code{\linewidth}
+is decreased by the sum of that list's @code{\leftmargin} and
+@code{\rightmargin} (@pxref{itemize}).
+@c The default varies with the font size, paper width, two-column mode,
+@c etc. For an @code{article} document set in 10pt, the default is
+@c @samp{345pt}, while in two-column mode that becomes @samp{229.5pt}.
+
+@item \marginparpush
+@itemx \marginsep
+@itemx \marginparwidth
+@findex \marginparpush
+@findex \marginsep
+@findex \marginparwidth
+@anchor{page layout parameters marginparpush}
+@anchor{page layout parameters marginsep}
+@anchor{page layout parameters marginparwidth}
+The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the horizontal
+space between the text body and the marginal notes, and the horizontal
+width of the notes.
+
+Normally marginal notes appear on the outside of the page, but the
+declaration @code{\reversemarginpar} changes that (and
+@code{\normalmarginpar} changes it back).
+
+The defaults for @code{\marginparpush} in both @code{book} and
+@code{article} classes are: @samp{7pt} if the document is set at 12pt,
+and @samp{5pt} if the document is set at 11pt or 10pt.
+
+For @code{\marginsep}, in @code{article} class the default is
+@samp{10pt} except if the document is set at 10pt and in two-column mode
+where the default is @samp{11pt}.
+
+For @code{\marginsep} in @code{book} class the default is @samp{10pt} in
+two-column mode and @samp{7pt} in one-column mode.
+
+For @code{\marginparwidth} in both @code{book} and @code{article}
+classes, in two-column mode the default is 60% of @code{\paperwidth
+@minus{} \textwidth}, while in one-column mode it is 50% of that
+distance.
+
+@item \oddsidemargin
+@itemx \evensidemargin
+@findex \oddsidemargin
+@findex \evensidemargin
+@anchor{page layout parameters oddsidemargin}
+@anchor{page layout parameters evensidemargin}
+The @code{\oddsidemargin} is the extra distance between the left side of
+the page and the text's left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the
+document class option @code{twoside} is chosen and on all pages when
+@code{oneside} is in effect. When @code{twoside} is in effect, on
+even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is
+@code{evensidemargin}.
+
+@LaTeX{}'s default is that @code{\oddsidemargin} is 40% of the
+difference between @code{\paperwidth} and @code{\textwidth}, and
+@code{\evensidemargin} is the remainder.
+
+@item \paperheight
+@findex \paperheight
+@anchor{page layout parameters paperheight}
+The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print area.
+Normally set with a document class option, as in
+@code{\documentclass[a4paper]@{article@}} (@pxref{Document class
+options}).
+
+@item \paperwidth
+@findex \paperwidth
+@anchor{page layout parameters paperwidth}
+The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print area.
+Normally set with a document class option, as in
+@code{\documentclass[a4paper]@{article@}} (@pxref{Document class
+options}).
+
+@item \textheight
+@findex \textheight
+@anchor{page layout parameters textheight}
+The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is set at
+a nominal type size of 10pt then for an @code{article} or @code{report}
+the default is @samp{43\baselineskip}, while for a @code{book} it is
+@samp{41\baselineskip}. At a type size of 11pt the default is
+@samp{38\baselineskip} for all document classes. At 12pt it is
+@samp{36\baselineskip} for all classes.
+
+@item \textwidth
+@findex \textwidth
+@anchor{page layout parameters textwidth}
+The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an
+@code{article} or @code{report} document, the default is @samp{345pt}
+when the chosen type size is 10pt, the default is @samp{360pt} at 11pt,
+and it is @samp{390pt} at 12pt. For a @code{book} document, the default
+is @samp{4.5in} at a type size of 10pt, and @samp{5in} at 11pt or 12pt.
+
+In multi-column output, @code{\textwidth} remains the width of the
+entire page body, while @code{\columnwidth} is the width of one column
+(@pxref{\twocolumn}).
+
+In lists (@pxref{list}), @code{\textwidth} remains the width of the
+entire page body (and @code{\columnwidth} the width of the entire
+column), while @code{\linewidth} may decrease for nested lists.
+
+Inside a minipage (@pxref{minipage}) or @code{\parbox}
+(@pxref{\parbox}), all the width-related parameters are set to the
+specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the
+@code{minipage} or @code{\parbox}.
+
+@findex \hsize
+@anchor{page layout parameters hsize}
+@item \hsize
+This entry is included for completeness: @code{\hsize} is the @TeX{}
+primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should not
+be used in normal @LaTeX{} documents.
+
+@item \topmargin
+@findex topmargin
+@anchor{page layout parameters topmargin}
+Space between the top of the @TeX{} page (one inch from the top of the
+paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is computed
+based on many other parameters: @code{\paperheight @minus{} 2in @minus{}
+\headheight @minus{} \headsep @minus{} \textheight @minus{} \footskip},
+and then divided by two.
+
+@item \topskip
+@findex \topskip
+@anchor{page layout parameters topskip}
+Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of
+the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default is the
+same as the font size, e.g., @samp{10pt} at a type size of 10pt.
+
+@end ftable
+
+
+@node Floats
+@section Floats
+
+Some typographic elements, such as figures and tables, cannot be broken
+across pages. They must be typeset outside of the normal flow of text,
+for instance floating to the top of a later page.
+
+@LaTeX{} can have a number of different classes of floating material.
+The default is the two classes, @code{figure} (@pxref{figure}) and
+@code{table} (@pxref{table}), but you can create a new class with the
+package @file{float}.
+
+Within any one float class @LaTeX{} always respects the order, so that
+the first figure in a document source must be typeset before the second
+figure. However, @LaTeX{} may mix the classes, so it can happen that
+while the first table appears in the source before the first figure, it
+appears in the output after it.
+
+The placement of floats is subject to parameters, given below, that
+limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and
+the bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued that the limits prevent
+them all from fitting on a page then @LaTeX{} places what it can and
+defers the rest to the next page. In this way, floats may end up
+being typeset far from their place in the source. In particular, a
+float that is big may migrate to the end of the document. In which
+event, because all floats in a class must appear in sequential order,
+every following float in that class also appears at the end.
+
+@cindex placement of floats
+@cindex specifier, float placement
+In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak
+where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its
+@var{placement} argument. The possible values are a sequence of the
+letters below. The default for both @code{figure} and @code{table}, in
+both @code{article} and @code{book} classes, is @code{tbp}.
+
+@table @code
+@item t
+(Top)---at the top of a text page.
+
+@item b
+(Bottom)---at the bottom of a text page. (However, @code{b} is not
+allowed for full-width floats (@code{figure*}) with double-column
+output. To ameliorate this, use the @file{stfloats} or
+@file{dblfloatfix} package, but see the discussion at caveats in the
+FAQ: @url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat}.
+
+@item h
+(Here)---at the position in the text where the @code{figure} environment
+appears. However, @code{h} is not allowed by itself; @code{t} is
+automatically added.
+
+@cindex here, putting floats
+@PkgIndex{float}
+To absolutely force a float to appear ``here'', you can
+@code{\usepackage@{float@}} and use the @code{H} specifier which it
+defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
+@url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere}.
+
+@item p
+@cindex float page
+(Page of floats)---on a separate @dfn{float page}, which is a page
+containing no text, only floats.
+
+@item !
+Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, @LaTeX{}
+ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can appear
+and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the page.
+The @code{!} specifier does @emph{not} mean ``put the float here'';
+see above.
+
+@end table
+
+Note: the order in which letters appear in the @var{placement} argument
+does not change the order in which @LaTeX{} tries to place the float;
+for instance, @code{btp} has the same effect as @code{tbp}. All that
+@var{placement} does is that if a letter is not present then the
+algorithm does not try that location. Thus, @LaTeX{}'s default of
+@code{tbp} is to try every location except placing the float where it
+occurs in the source.
+
+To prevent @LaTeX{} from moving floats to the end of the document or a
+chapter you can use a @code{\clearpage} command to start a new page and
+insert all pending floats. If a pagebreak is undesirable then you can
+use the @file{afterpage} package and issue
+@code{\afterpage@{\clearpage@}}. This will wait until the current page
+is finished and then flush all outstanding floats.
+
+@PkgIndex{flafter}
+@LaTeX{} can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
+(although on the same output page) if there is a @code{t} specifier in
+the @var{placement} parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting
+the @code{t} is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed
+at the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using
+the @file{flafter} package or using the command
+@findex \suppressfloats
+@code{\suppressfloats[t]}, which causes floats for the top position on
+this page to moved to the next page.
+
+Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
+non-float text (change them with
+@code{\renewcommand@{@var{parameter}@}@{@var{decimal between 0 and 1}@}}):
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \bottomfraction
+@findex \bottomfraction
+@anchor{floats bottomfraction}
+The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at
+the bottom; default @samp{.3}.
+
+@item \floatpagefraction
+@findex \floatpagefraction
+@anchor{floats floatpagefraction}
+The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats;
+default @samp{.5}.
+
+@item \textfraction
+@findex \textfraction
+@anchor{floats textfraction}
+Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
+much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
+different page. The default is @samp{.2}.
+
+@item \topfraction
+@findex \topfraction
+@anchor{floats topfraction}
+Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
+floats; default @samp{.7}.
+@end ftable
+
+Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with a
+command of the form @code{\setlength@{@var{parameter}@}@{@var{length
+expression}@}}):
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \floatsep
+@findex \floatsep
+@anchor{floats floatsep}
+Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default
+@samp{12pt plus2pt minus2pt}.
+
+@item \intextsep
+@findex \intextsep
+@anchor{floats intextsep}
+Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default
+@samp{12pt plus2pt minus2pt} for 10 point and 11 point documents,
+and @samp{14pt plus4pt minus4pt} for 12 point documents.
+
+@item \textfloatsep
+@findex \textfloatsep
+@anchor{floats textfloatsep}
+Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
+default @samp{20pt plus2pt minus4pt}.
+@end ftable
+
+Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with a
+command of the form @code{\setcounter@{@var{ctrname}@}@{@var{natural
+number}@}}):
+
+@ftable @code
+@item bottomnumber
+@findex bottomnumber
+@anchor{floats bottomnumber}
+Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page;
+default 1.
+
+@item dbltopnumber
+@findex dbltopnumber
+@anchor{floats dbltopnumber}
+Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
+two-column page; default 2.
+
+@item topnumber
+@findex topnumber
+@anchor{floats topnumber}
+Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
+default 2.
+
+@item totalnumber
+@findex totalnumber
+@anchor{floats totalnumber}
+Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
+@end ftable
+
+The principal @TeX{}@tie{}FAQ entry relating to floats
+@url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats} contains
+suggestions for relaxing @LaTeX{}'s default parameters to reduce the
+problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the
+float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach's article ``How to
+influence the position of float environments like figure and table in
+@LaTeX{}?''
+(@url{http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf}).
+
+
+@node Sectioning
+@chapter Sectioning
+
+@cindex sectioning commands
+@cindex part
+@cindex chapter
+@cindex section
+@cindex subsection
+@cindex paragraph
+@cindex subparagraph
+@findex \part
+@findex \chapter
+@findex \section
+@findex \subsection
+@findex \paragraph
+@findex \subparagraph
+
+Structure your text into divisions: parts, chapters, sections, etc. All
+sectioning commands have the same form, one of:
+
+@example
+@var{sectioning-command}@{@var{title}@}
+@var{sectioning-command}*@{@var{title}@}
+@var{sectioning-command}[@var{toc-title}]@{@var{title}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+For instance, declare the start of a subsection as with
+@code{\subsection@{Motivation@}}.
+
+The table has each @var{sectioning-command} in @LaTeX{}. All are
+available in all of @LaTeX{}'s standard document classes @code{book},
+@code{report}, and@tie{}@code{article}, except that @code{\chapter} is
+not available in @code{article}.
+
+@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .40
+@headitem Sectioning unit @tab Command @tab Level
+@item Part
+@tab @code{\part} @tab -1 (@code{book}, @code{report}), 0 (@code{article})
+@item Chapter
+@tab @code{\chapter} @tab 0
+@item Section
+@tab @code{\section} @tab 1
+@item Subsection
+@tab @code{\subsection} @tab 2
+@item Subsubsection
+@tab @code{\subsubsection} @tab 3
+@item Paragraph
+@tab @code{\paragraph} @tab 4
+@item Subparagraph
+@tab @code{\subparagraph} @tab 5
+@end multitable
+
+@cindex @code{*}-form of sectioning commands
+All these commands have a @code{*}-form that prints @var{title} as usual
+but is not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents.
+An example of using this is for an appendix in an @code{article} . The
+input @code{\appendix\section@{Appendix@}} gives the output @samp{A
+Appendix} (@pxref{\appendix}). You can lose the numbering@tie{}@samp{A}
+by instead entering @code{\section*@{Appendix@}} (articles often omit a
+table of contents and have simple page headers so the other differences
+from the @code{\section} command may not matter).
+
+The section title @var{title} provides the heading in the main text, but
+it may also appear in the table of contents and in the running head or
+foot (@pxref{Page styles}). You may not want the same text in these
+places as in the main text. All of these commands have an optional
+argument @var{toc-title} for these other places.
+
+The level number in the table above determines which sectional units are
+numbered, and which appear in the table of contents. If the sectioning
+command's @var{level} is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+@code{secnumdepth} then the titles for this sectioning command will be
+numbered (@pxref{Sectioning/secnumdepth}). And, if @var{level} is less
+than or equal to the value of the counter @code{tocdepth} then the table
+of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit
+(@pxref{Sectioning/tocdepth}).
+
+@LaTeX{} expects that before you have a @code{\subsection} you will have
+a @code{\section} and, in a book, that before a @code{\section} you will
+have a @code{\chapter}. Otherwise you can get a something like a
+subsection numbered @samp{3.0.1}.
+
+Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands.
+
+@ftable @code
+@item secnumdepth
+@findex secnumdepth @r{counter}
+@cindex section numbers, printing
+@anchor{sectioning secnumdepth}
+@anchor{Sectioning/secnumdepth}
+Controls which sectioning commands are
+numbered. Suppress numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than
+@var{level} @code{\setcounter@{secnumdepth@}@{@var{level}@}}
+(@pxref{\setcounter}). See the above table for the level numbers. For
+instance, if the @code{secnumdepth} is 1 in an @code{article} then a
+@code{\section@{Introduction@}} command will produce output like @samp{1
+Introduction} while @code{\subsection@{Discussion@}} will produce output
+like @samp{Discussion}, without the number. @LaTeX{}'s default
+@code{secnumdepth} is@tie{}3 in @file{article} class and @tie{}2 in the
+@file{book} and @file{report} classes.
+
+@item tocdepth
+@findex tocdepth @r{counter}
+@cindex table of contents, sectioning numbers printed
+@anchor{sectioning tocdepth}
+@anchor{Sectioning/tocdepth}
+Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of contents.
+The setting @code{\setcounter@{tocdepth@}@{@var{level}@}} makes the
+sectioning units at @var{level} be the smallest ones listed
+(@pxref{\setcounter}). See the above table for the level numbers. For
+instance, if @code{tocdepth} is@tie{}1 then the table of contents will
+list sections but not subsections. @LaTeX{}'s default
+@code{secnumdepth} is@tie{}3 in @file{article} class and @tie{}2 in the
+@file{book} and @file{report} classes.
+
+@end ftable
+
+@menu
+* \part:: Start a part.
+* \chapter:: Start a chapter.
+* \section:: Start a section.
+* \subsection:: Start a subsection.
+* \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph:: Lower divisions.
+* \appendix:: Start appendices.
+* \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter:: The three parts of a book.
+* \@@startsection:: Layout of sectional units.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \part
+@section @code{\part}
+
+@findex \part
+@cindex part
+@cindex sectioning, part
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\part@{@var{title}@}
+\part*@{@var{title}@}
+\part[@var{toc-title}]@{@var{title}@}
+@end example
+
+Start a document part. The standard @LaTeX{} classes @code{book},
+@code{report}, and @code{article}, all have this command.
+
+This produces a document part, in a book.
+
+@example
+\part@{VOLUME I \\
+ PERSONAL MEMOIRS OF U.\ S.\ GRANT@}
+\chapter@{ANCESTRY--BIRTH--BOYHOOD.@}
+My family is American, and has been for generations,
+in all its branches, direct and collateral.
+@end example
+
+In each standard class the @code{\part} command outputs a part number
+such as @samp{Part I}, alone on its line, in boldface, and in large
+type. Then @LaTeX{} outputs @var{title}, also alone on its line, in
+bold and in even larger type. In class @code{book}, the @LaTeX{}
+default puts each part alone on its own page. If the book is two-sided
+then @LaTeX{} will skip a page if needed to have the new part on an
+odd-numbered page. In @code{report} it is again alone on a page, but
+@LaTeX{} won't force it onto an odd-numbered page. In an @code{article}
+@LaTeX{} does not put it on a fresh page, but instead outputs the part
+number and part title onto the main document page.
+
+The @code{*}@tie{}form shows @var{title}
+but it does not show the part number, does not increment the
+@code{part} counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
+
+The optional argument @var{toc-title} will appear as the part title in
+the table of contents (@pxref{Table of contents etc.}) and in running
+headers (@pxref{Page styles}). If it is not present then @var{title}
+will be there. This example puts a line break in @var{title} but leaves
+out the break in the table of contents.
+
+@example
+\part[Up from the bottom; my life]@{Up from the bottom\\ my life@}
+@end example
+
+For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a part is@tie{}-1
+(@pxref{Sectioning/secnumdepth} and @pxref{Sectioning/tocdepth}).
+
+@PkgIndex{indentfirst}
+In the class @code{article}, if a paragraph immediately follows the part
+title then it is not indented. To get an indent you can use the package
+@file{indentfirst}.
+
+@PkgIndex{titlesec}
+One package to change the behavior of @code{\part} is @file{titlesec}.
+See its documentation on CTAN.
+
+
+@node \chapter
+@section @code{\chapter}
+
+@findex \chapter
+@cindex chapter
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\chapter@{@var{title}@}
+\chapter*@{@var{title}@}
+\chapter[@var{toc-title}]@{@var{title}@}
+@end example
+
+Start a chapter. The standard @LaTeX{} classes @code{book} and
+@code{report} have this command but @code{article} does not.
+
+This produces a chapter.
+
+@example
+\chapter@{Loomings@}
+Call me Ishmael.
+Some years ago---never mind how long precisely---having little or no
+money in my purse, and nothing particular to interest me on shore, I
+thought I would sail about a little and see the watery part of
+the world.
+@end example
+
+The @LaTeX{} default starts each chapter on a fresh page, an
+odd-numbered page if the document is two-sided. It produces a chapter
+number such as @samp{Chapter 1} in large boldface type (the size is
+@code{\huge}). It then puts @var{title} on a fresh line, in boldface
+type that is still larger (size @code{\Huge}). It also increments the
+@code{chapter} counter, adds an entry to the table of contents
+(@pxref{Table of contents etc.}), and sets the running header
+information (@pxref{Page styles}).
+
+The @code{*}@tie{}form shows @var{title} on a fresh line, in boldface.
+But it does not show the chapter number, does not increment the
+@code{chapter} counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does
+not affect the running header. (If you use the page style
+@code{headings} in a two-sided document then the header will be from the
+prior chapter.) This example illustrates.
+
+@example
+\chapter*@{Preamble@}
+@end example
+
+The optional argument @var{toc-title} will appear as the chapter title
+in the table of contents (@pxref{Table of contents etc.}) and in
+running headers (@pxref{Page styles}). If it is not present then
+@var{title} will be there. This shows the full name in the chapter
+title,
+
+@example
+\chapter[Weyl]@{Hermann Klaus Hugo (Peter) Weyl (1885--1955)@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+but only @samp{Weyl} on the contents page. This puts a line break in
+the title but that doesn't work well with running headers so it omits
+the break in the contents
+
+@example
+\chapter[Given it all\\ my story]@{Given it all\\ my story@}
+@end example
+
+For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is@tie{}0
+(@pxref{Sectioning/secnumdepth} and @pxref{Sectioning/tocdepth}).
+
+@PkgIndex{indentfirst}
+The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. To get an indent use the package
+@file{indentfirst}.
+
+You can change what is shown for the chapter number. To change it to
+something like @samp{Lecture 1}, put in the preamble either
+@code{\renewcommand@{\chaptername@}@{Lecture@}} or this
+(@pxref{\makeatletter & \makeatother}).
+
+@example
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand@{\@@chapapp@}@{Lecture@}
+\makeatother
+@end example
+
+@PkgIndex{babel}
+@noindent To make this change because of the primary language for
+the document, see the package @file{babel}.
+
+In a two-sided document @LaTeX{} puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if
+necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any
+running headers. To make that page completely blank,
+see@tie{}@ref{\clearpage & \cleardoublepage}.
+
+@PkgIndex{titlesec}
+To change the behavior of the @code{\chapter} command, you can copy its
+definition from the @LaTeX{} format file and make adjustments. But
+there are also many packages on CTAN that address this. One is
+@file{titlesec}. See its documentation, but the example below gives a
+sense of what it can do.
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{titlesec@} % in preamble
+\titleformat@{\chapter@}
+ @{\Huge\bfseries@} % format of title
+ @{@} % label, such as 1.2 for a subsection
+ @{0pt@} % length of separation between label and title
+ @{@} % before-code hook
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This omits the chapter number @samp{Chapter 1} from the page but unlike
+@code{\chapter*} it keeps the chapter in the table of contents and the
+running headers.
+
+
+@node \section
+@section @code{\section}
+
+@findex \section
+@cindex section
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\section@{@var{title}@}
+\section*@{@var{title}@}
+\section[@var{toc-title}]@{@var{title}@}
+@end example
+
+Start a section. The standard @LaTeX{} classes @code{article},
+@code{book}, and @code{report} all have this command.
+
+This produces a section.
+
+@example
+In this Part we tend to be more interested in the function,
+in the input-output behavior,
+than in the details of implementing that behavior.
+
+\section@{Turing machines@}
+Despite this desire to downplay implementation,
+we follow the approach of A~Turing that the
+first step toward defining the set of computable functions
+is to reflect on the details of what mechanisms can do.
+@end example
+
+For the standard @LaTeX{} classes @code{book} and @code{report} the
+default output is like @samp{1.2 @var{title}} (for chapter@tie{}1,
+section@tie{}2), alone on its line and flush left, in boldface and a
+larger type (the type size is @code{\Large}). The same holds in
+@code{article} except that there are no chapters in that class so it
+looks like @samp{2 @var{title}}.
+
+The @code{*}@tie{}form shows @var{title}.
+But it does not show the section number, does not increment the
+@code{section} counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does
+not affect the running header. (If you use the page style
+@code{headings} in a two-sided document then the header will be from the
+prior section.)
+
+The optional argument @var{toc-title} will appear as the section title
+in the table of contents (@pxref{Table of contents etc.}) and in
+running headers (@pxref{Page styles}). If it is not present then
+@var{title} will be there. This shows the full name in the title of the
+section,
+
+@example
+\section[Elizabeth~II]@{Elizabeth the Second,
+ by the Grace of God of the United Kingdom,
+ Canada and Her other Realms and Territories Queen,
+ Head of the Commonwealth, Defender of the Faith.@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+but only @samp{Elizabeth II} on the contents page and in the headers.
+This has a line break in @var{title} but that does not work with headers
+so it is omitted from the contents and headers.
+
+@example
+\section[Truth is, I cheated; my life story]@{Truth is,
+ I cheated\\my life story@}
+@end example
+
+For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a section is@tie{}1
+(@pxref{Sectioning/secnumdepth} and @pxref{Sectioning/tocdepth}).
+
+@PkgIndex{indentfirst}
+The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package @file{indentfirst}.
+
+@PkgIndex{titlesec}
+In general, to change the behavior of the @code{\section} command, there
+are a number of options. One is the @code{\@@startsection} command
+(@pxref{\@@startsection}). There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including @file{titlesec}. See the documentation but the
+example below gives a sense of what they can do.
+
+@c credit: egreg https://groups.google.com/forum/#!topic/comp.text.tex/tvc8oM5P4y4
+@example
+\usepackage@{titlesec@} % in preamble
+\titleformat@{\section@}
+ @{\normalfont\Large\bfseries@} % format of title
+ @{\makebox[1pc][r]@{\thesection\hspace@{1pc@}@}@} % label
+ @{0pt@} % length of separation between label and title
+ @{@} % before-code hook
+\titlespacing*@{\section@}
+ @{-1pc@}@{18pt@}@{10pt@}[10pc]
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+That puts the section number in the margin.
+
+
+@node \subsection
+@section @code{\subsection}
+
+@findex \subsection
+@cindex subsection
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\subsection@{@var{title}@}
+\subsection*@{@var{title}@}
+\subsection[@var{toc-title}]@{@var{title}@}
+@end example
+
+Start a subsection. The standard @LaTeX{} classes @code{article},
+@code{book}, and @code{report} all have this command.
+
+This produces a subsection.
+
+@example
+We will show that there are more functions than Turing machines and that
+therefore some functions have no associated machine.
+
+\subsection@{Cardinality@} We will begin with two paradoxes that
+dramatize the challenge to our intuition posed by comparing the sizes of
+infinite sets.
+@end example
+
+For the standard @LaTeX{} classes @code{book} and @code{report} the
+default output is like @samp{1.2.3 @var{title}} (for chapter@tie{}1,
+section@tie{}2, subsection@tie{}3), alone on its line and flush left, in
+boldface and a larger type (the type size is @code{\large}). The same
+holds in @code{article} except that there are no chapters in that class
+so it looks like @samp{2.3 @var{title}}.
+
+The @code{*}@tie{}form shows @var{title}.
+But it does not show the section number, does not increment the
+@code{section} counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
+
+The optional argument @var{toc-title} will appear as the section title
+in the table of contents (@pxref{Table of contents etc.}). If it is
+not present then @var{title} will be there. This shows the full name in
+the title of the section,
+
+@example
+\subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]@{\textit@{The Origin of
+ Chemical Elements@} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+but only @samp{@BES{03B1,\alpha},@BES{03B2,\beta},@BES{03B3,\gamma}
+paper} on the contents page.
+
+For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is@tie{}2
+(@pxref{Sectioning/secnumdepth} and @pxref{Sectioning/tocdepth}).
+
+@PkgIndex{indentfirst}
+The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package @file{indentfirst}.
+
+@PkgIndex{titlesec}
+There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the
+@code{\subsection} command. One is the @code{\@@startsection} command
+(@pxref{\@@startsection}). There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including @file{titlesec}. See the documentation but the
+example below gives a sense of what they can do.
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{titlesec@} % in preamble
+\titleformat@{\subsection@}[runin]
+ @{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries@} % format of the title
+ @{\thesubsection@} % label
+ @{0.6em@} % space between label and title
+ @{@} % before-code hook
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+That puts the subsection number and @var{title} in the first line of
+text.
+
+
+@node \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph
+
+@section @code{\subsubsection}, @code{\paragraph}, @code{\subparagraph}
+
+@findex \subsubsection
+@cindex subsubsection
+@findex \paragraph
+@cindex paragraph
+@findex \subparagraph
+@cindex subparagraph
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\subsubsection@{@var{title}@}
+\subsubsection*@{@var{title}@}
+\subsubsection[@var{toc-title}]@{@var{title}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or one of:
+
+@example
+\paragraph@{@var{title}@}
+\paragraph*@{@var{title}@}
+\paragraph[@var{toc-title}]@{@var{title}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or one of:
+
+@example
+\subparagraph@{@var{title}@}
+\subparagraph*@{@var{title}@}
+\subparagraph[@var{toc-title}]@{@var{title}@}
+@end example
+
+Start a subsubsection, paragraph, or subparagraph. The standard
+@LaTeX{} classes @code{article}, @code{book}, and @code{report} all have
+these commands, although they are not commonly used.
+
+This produces a subsubsection.
+
+@example
+\subsubsection@{Piston ring compressors: structural performance@}
+Provide exterior/interior wall cladding assemblies
+capable of withstanding the effects of load and stresses from
+consumer-grade gasoline engine piston rings.
+@end example
+
+The default output of each of the three does not change over the
+standard @LaTeX{} classes @code{article}, @code{book}, and
+@code{report}. For @code{\subsubsection} the @var{title} is alone on
+its line, in boldface and normal size type. For @code{\paragraph} the
+@var{title} is inline with the text, not indented, in boldface and
+normal size type. For @code{\subparagraph} the @var{title} is inline
+with the text, with a paragraph indent, in boldface and normal size type
+(Because an @code{article} has no chapters its subsubsections are
+numbered and so it looks like @samp{1.2.3 @var{title}}, for
+section@tie{}1, subsection@tie{}2, and subsubsection@tie{}3. The other
+two divisions are not numbered.)
+
+The @code{*}@tie{}form shows @var{title}. But it does not increment the
+associated counter and produces no table of contents entry (and does not
+show the number for @code{\subsubsection}).
+
+The optional argument @var{toc-title} will appear as the division title
+in the table of contents (@pxref{Table of contents etc.}). If it is
+not present then @var{title} will be there.
+
+For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a subsubsection is@tie{}3, of
+a paragraph is@tie{}4, and of a subparagraph is@tie{}5
+(@pxref{Sectioning/secnumdepth} and @pxref{Sectioning/tocdepth}).
+
+@PkgIndex{indentfirst}
+The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package @file{indentfirst}.
+
+@PkgIndex{titlesec}
+There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these commands.
+One is the @code{\@@startsection} command (@pxref{\@@startsection}).
+There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including
+@file{titlesec}. See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+
+@node \appendix
+
+@section @code{\appendix}
+
+@findex \appendix
+@cindex appendix
+@cindex appendices
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\appendix
+@end example
+
+This does not directly produce any output. But in a book or report it
+declares that subsequent @code{\chapter} commands start an appendix. In
+an article it does the same, for @code{\section} commands. It also
+resets the @code{chapter} and @code{section} counters to@tie{}0 in a
+book or report, and in an article resets the @code{section} and
+@code{subsection} counters.
+
+In this book
+
+@example
+\chapter@{One@} ...
+\chapter@{Two@} ...
+ ...
+\appendix
+\chapter@{Three@} ...
+\chapter@{Four@} ...
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+the first two will generate output numbered @samp{Chapter 1} and
+@samp{Chapter 2}. After the @code{\appendix} the numbering will be
+@samp{Appendix A} and @samp{Appendix B}. @xref{Larger book template}
+for another example.
+
+@PkgIndex{appendix} The @file{appendix} package adds the command
+@code{\appendixpage} to put a separate @samp{Appendices} in the document
+body before the first appendix, and the command @code{\addappheadtotoc}
+to do the same in the table of contents. You can reset the name
+@samp{Appendix} with a command like
+@code{\renewcommand@{\appendixname@}@{Specification@}}, as well as a
+number of other features. See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+
+@node \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter
+
+@section @code{\frontmatter}, @code{\mainmatter}, @code{\backmatter}
+
+@findex \frontmatter
+@cindex book, front matter
+@findex \mainmatter
+@cindex book, main matter
+@findex \backmatter
+@cindex book, back matter
+@cindex book, end matter
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\frontmatter
+\mainmatter
+\backmatter
+@end example
+
+Format a @code{book} class document differently according to which part
+of the document is being produced. All three commands are optional.
+
+Traditionally, a book's front matter contains such things as the title
+page, an abstract, a table of contents, a preface, a list of notations,
+a list of figures, and a list of tables. (Some of these front matter
+pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not numbered.) The
+back matter may contain such things as a glossary, notes, a
+bibliography, and an index.
+
+The @code{\frontmatter} declaration makes the pages numbered in
+lowercase roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each
+chapter's title appears in the table of contents; if you use other
+sectioning commands here, use the @code{*}-version (@pxref{Sectioning}).
+The @code{\mainmatter} changes the behavior back to the expected
+version, and resets the page number. The @code{\backmatter} leaves the
+page numbering alone but switches the chapters back to being not
+numbered. @xref{Larger book template} for an example using the three.
+
+
+@node \@@startsection
+@section @code{\@@startsection}
+
+@findex \@@startsection
+@cindex section, redefining
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\@@startsection@{@var{name}@}@{@var{level}@}@{@var{indent}@}@{@var{beforeskip}@}@{@var{afterskip}@}@{@var{style}@}
+@end example
+
+Used to help redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning
+divisions such as @code{\section} or @code{\subsection}.
+
+Note that the @file{titlesec} package makes manipulation of sectioning
+easier. Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
+satisfied with @code{\@@startsection}, some cannot. For instance, in
+the standard @LaTeX{} @code{book} and @code{report} classes the commands
+@code{\chapter} and @code{\report} are not constructed in this way. To
+make such a command you may want to use the @code{\secdef} command.
+@c xx define, and make a cross reference to, secdef.
+
+Technically, @code{\@@startsection} has the form
+
+@example
+\@@startsection@{@var{name}@}
+ @{@var{level}@}
+ @{@var{indent}@}
+ @{@var{beforeskip}@}
+ @{@var{afterskip}@}
+ @{@var{style}@}*[@var{toctitle}]@{@var{title}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+so that issuing
+
+@example
+\renewcommand@{\section@}@{\@@startsection@{@var{name}@}
+ @{@var{level}@}
+ @{@var{indent}@}
+ @{@var{beforeskip}@}
+ @{@var{afterskip}@}
+ @{@var{style}@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+redefines @code{\section} to have the form
+@code{\section*[@var{toctitle}]@{@var{title}@}} (here too, the
+star@tie{}@code{*} is optional). @xref{Sectioning}. This implies that
+when you write a command like @code{\renewcommand@{section@}@{...@}},
+the @code{\@@startsection@{...@}} must come last in the definition. See
+the examples below.
+
+@table @var
+
+@item name
+@anchor{startsection name}
+@anchor{\@@startsection/name}
+Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header. This counter
+must be defined separately. Most commonly this is either
+@code{section}, @code{subsection}, or @code{paragraph}. Although in
+those cases the counter name is the same as the sectioning command
+itself, you don't have to use the same name.
+
+Then @code{\the}@var{name} displays the title number and
+@code{\}@var{name}@code{mark} is for the page headers. See the third
+example below.
+
+@item level
+@anchor{startsection level}
+@anchor{\@@startsection/level}
+An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command.
+@xref{Sectioning} for the list of standard level numbers.
+
+If @var{level} is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+@code{secnumdepth} then titles for this sectioning command will be
+numbered (@pxref{Sectioning/secnumdepth}). For instance, if
+@code{secnumdepth} is 1 in an @code{article} then the command
+@code{\section@{Introduction@}} will produce output like ``1
+Introduction'' while @code{\subsection@{Discussion@}} will produce
+output like ``Discussion'', without the number prefix.
+
+If @var{level} is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+@var{tocdepth} then the table of contents will have an entry for this
+sectioning unit (@pxref{Sectioning/tocdepth}). For instance, in an
+@code{article}, if @var{tocdepth} is 1 then the table of contents will
+list sections but not subsections.
+
+@item indent
+@anchor{startsection indent}
+@anchor{\@@startsection/indent}
+A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with respect
+to the left margin. To have the title flush with the margin use
+@code{0pt}. A negative indentation such as @code{-\parindent} will move
+the title into the left margin.
+
+@item beforeskip
+@anchor{startsection beforeskip}
+@anchor{\@@startsection/beforeskip}
+The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space that
+is inserted before this sectioning unit's title. This space will be
+discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the top of a fresh
+page. If this number is negative then the first paragraph following the
+header is not indented, if it is non-negative then the first paragraph
+is indented. (Note that the negative of @code{1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt}
+is @code{-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt}.)
+
+For example, if @var{beforeskip} is @code{-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex}
+then to start the new sectioning unit, @LaTeX{} will add about 3.5 times
+the height of a letter x in vertical space, and the first paragraph in
+the section will not be indented. Using a rubber length, with
+@code{plus} and @code{minus}, is good practice here since it gives
+@LaTeX{} more flexibility in making up the page (@pxref{Lengths}).
+
+The full accounting of the vertical space between the baseline of the
+line prior to this sectioning unit's header and the baseline of the
+header is that it is the sum of the @code{\parskip} of the text font,
+the @code{\baselineskip} of the title font, and the absolute value of
+the @var{beforeskip}. This space is typically rubber so it may stretch
+or shrink. (If the sectioning unit starts on a fresh page so that the
+vertical space is discarded then the baseline of the header text will be
+where @LaTeX{} would put the baseline of the first text line on that
+page.)
+
+@item afterskip
+@anchor{startsection afterskip}
+@anchor{\@@startsection/afterskip}
+This is a length. If @var{afterskip} is non-negative then this is the
+vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit's title header. If it
+is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so that it
+becomes part of the next paragraph. In this case the absolute value of
+the length gives the horizontal space between the end of the title and
+the beginning of the following paragraph. (Note that the negative of
+@code{1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt} is @code{-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt}.)
+
+As with @var{beforeskip}, using a rubber length, with @code{plus} and
+@code{minus} components, is good practice here since it gives @LaTeX{}
+more flexibility in putting together the page.
+
+If @code{afterskip} is non-negative then the full accounting of the
+vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit's header and
+the baseline of the first line of the following paragraph is that it is
+the sum of the @code{\parskip} of the title font, the
+@code{\baselineskip} of the text font, and the value of @var{after}.
+That space is typically rubber so it may stretch or shrink. (Note that
+because the sign of @code{afterskip} changes the sectioning unit
+header's from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
+@code{afterskip} to cancel part of the @code{\parskip}.)
+
+@item style
+@anchor{startsection style}
+@anchor{\@@startsection/style}
+Controls the styling of the title. See the examples below. Typical
+commands to use here are @code{\centering}, @code{\raggedright},
+@code{\normalfont}, @code{\hrule}, or @code{\newpage}. The last command
+in @var{style} may be one that takes one argument, such as
+@code{\MakeUppercase} or @code{\fbox} that takes one argument. The
+section title will be supplied as the argument to this command. For
+instance, setting @var{style} to @code{\bfseries\MakeUppercase} would
+produce titles that are bold and uppercase.
+@end table
+
+These are @LaTeX{}'s defaults for the first three sectioning units that
+are defined with @code{\@@startsection}, for the @file{article},
+@file{book}, and @file{report} classes. For section, the @var{level} is
+1, the @var{indent} is 0@dmn{pt}, the @var{beforeskip} is @code{-3.5ex
+plus -1ex minus -0.2ex}, the @var{afterskip} is @code{2.3ex plus 0.2ex},
+and the @var{style} is @code{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}. For
+subsection, the @var{level} is 2, the @var{indent} is 0@dmn{pt}, the
+@var{beforeskip} is @code{-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex}, the
+@var{afterskip} is @code{1.5ex plus 0.2ex}, and the @var{style} is
+@code{\normalfont\large\bfseries}. For subsubsection, the @var{level}
+is 3, the @var{indent} is 0@dmn{pt}, the @var{beforeskip} is
+@code{-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex}, the @var{afterskip} is
+@code{1.5ex plus 0.2ex}, and the @var{style} is
+@code{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}.
+
+Here are examples. They go either in a package or class file or in the
+preamble of a @LaTeX{} document. If you put them in the preamble they
+must go between a @code{\makeatletter} command and a
+@code{\makeatother}. (Probably the error message @code{You can't use
+`\spacefactor' in vertical mode.} means that you forgot this.)
+@xref{\makeatletter & \makeatother}.
+
+This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered. It says
+@code{\renewcommand} because @LaTeX{}'s standard classes have already
+defined a @code{\section}. For the same reason it does not define a
+@code{section} counter, or the commands @code{\thesection} and
+@code{\l@@section}.
+
+@example
+\renewcommand\section@{%
+ \@@startsection@{section@}% @ref{\@@startsection/name,@var{name},@var{name}}
+ @{1@}% @ref{\@@startsection/level,@var{level},@var{level}}
+ @{0pt@}% @ref{\@@startsection/indent,@var{indent},@var{indent}}
+ @{-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex@}% @ref{\@@startsection/beforeskip,@var{beforeskip},@var{beforeskip}}
+ @{2.3ex plus.2ex@}% @ref{\@@startsection/afterskip,@var{afterskip},@var{afterskip}}
+ @{\centering\normalfont\Large\bfseries@}% @ref{\@@startsection/style,@var{style},@var{style}}
+ @}
+@end example
+
+This will put @code{subsection} titles in small caps type, inline with the paragraph.
+
+@example
+\renewcommand\subsection@{%
+ \@@startsection@{subsection@}% @ref{\@@startsection/name,@var{name},@var{name}}
+ @{2@}% @ref{\@@startsection/level,@var{level},@var{level}}
+ @{0em@}% @ref{\@@startsection/indent,@var{indent},@var{indent}}
+ @{-1ex plus 0.1ex minus -0.05ex@}% @ref{\@@startsection/beforeskip,@var{beforeskip},@var{beforeskip}}
+ @{-1em plus 0.2em@}% @ref{\@@startsection/afterskip,@var{afterskip},@var{afterskip}}
+ @{\scshape@}% @ref{\@@startsection/style,@var{style},@var{style}}
+ @}
+@end example
+
+The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands.
+This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to
+display that counter.
+
+@c From https://groups.google.com/forum/#!searchin/comp.text.tex/startsection%7Csort:relevance/comp.text.tex/sB-nTS-oL08/ZZeKYdG0llMJ
+@example
+\setcounter@{secnumdepth@}@{6@}% show counters this far down
+\newcounter@{subsubparagraph@}[subparagraph]% counter for numbering
+\renewcommand@{\thesubsubparagraph@}% how to display
+ @{\thesubparagraph.\@@arabic\c@@subsubparagraph@}% numbering
+\newcommand@{\subsubparagraph@}@{\@@startsection
+ @{subsubparagraph@}%
+ @{6@}%
+ @{0em@}%
+ @{\baselineskip@}%
+ @{0.5\baselineskip@}%
+ @{\normalfont\normalsize@}@}
+\newcommand*\l@@subsubparagraph@{\@@dottedtocline@{6@}@{10em@}@{5em@}@}% for toc
+\newcommand@{\subsubparagraphmark@}[1]@{@}% for page headers
+@end example
+
+
+@node Cross references
+@chapter Cross references
+
+@cindex cross references
+
+@cindex label
+We often want something like @samp{See Theorem~31}. But by-hand typing
+the 31 is poor practice. Instead you should write a @dfn{label} such as
+@code{\label@{eq:GreensThm@}} and then @dfn{reference} it, as with
+@code{See equation~\ref@{eq:GreensThm@}}. @LaTeX{} will automatically
+work out the number, put it into the output, and will change that number
+later if needed.
+
+@example
+We will see this with Theorem~\ref@{th:GreensThm@}. % forward reference
+...
+\begin@{theorem@} \label@{th:GreensThm@}
+ ...
+\end@{theorem@}
+...
+See Theorem~\ref@{th:GreensThm@} on page~\pageref@{th:GreensThm@}.
+@end example
+
+@LaTeX{} tracks cross reference information in a file having the
+extension @file{.aux} and with the same base name as the file containing
+the @code{\label}. So if @code{\label} is in @file{calculus.tex} then
+the information is in @file{calculus.aux}. @LaTeX{} puts the
+information in that file every time it runs across a @code{\label}.
+
+@cindex forward reference
+@cindex reference, forward
+The behavior described in the prior paragraph results in a quirk that
+happens when your document has a @dfn{forward reference}, a @code{\ref}
+that appears before the associated @code{\label}. If this is the first
+time that you are compiling the document then you will get @samp{LaTeX
+Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross references right}
+and in the output the forward reference will appear as two question
+marks@tie{}@samp{??}, in boldface. A similar thing happens if you
+change some things so the references changes; you get the same warning
+and the output contains the old reference information. In both cases,
+resolve this by compiling the document a second time.
+
+@PkgIndex{cleveref} The @code{cleveref} package enhances @LaTeX{}'s
+cross referencing features. You can arrange that if you enter
+@code{\begin@{thm@}\label@{th:Nerode@}...\end@{thm@}} then
+@code{\cref@{th:Nerode@}} will output @samp{Theorem 3.21}, without you
+having to enter the ``Theorem.''
+
+@menu
+* \label:: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
+* \pageref:: Refer to a page number.
+* \ref:: Refer to a section, figure or similar.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \label
+@section @code{\label}
+
+@findex \label
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\label@{@var{key}@}
+@end example
+
+Assign a reference number to @var{key}. In ordinary text
+@code{\label@{@var{key}@}} assigns to @var{key} the number of the
+current sectional unit. Inside an environment with numbering, such as a
+@code{table} or @code{theorem} environment, @code{\label@{@var{key}@}}
+assigns to @var{key} the number of that environment. Retrieve the
+assigned number with the @code{\ref@{@var{key}@}} command
+(@pxref{\ref}).
+
+A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
+punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are
+distinguished, as usual.
+
+A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+separated by a colon or period. Thus, @code{\label@{fig:Post@}} is a
+label for a figure with a portrait of Emil Post. This helps to avoid
+accidentally creating two labels with the same name, and makes your
+source more readable. Some commonly-used prefixes:
+
+@table @code
+@item ch
+for chapters
+
+@item sec
+@itemx subsec
+for lower-level sectioning commands
+
+@item fig
+for figures
+
+@item tab
+for tables
+
+@item eq
+for equations
+@end table
+
+In the auxiliary file the reference information is kept as the text of
+a command of the form
+@code{\newlabel@{@var{label}@}@{@{@var{currentlabel}@}@{@var{pagenumber}@}@}}.
+Here @var{currentlabel} is the current value of the macro
+@code{\@@currentlabel} that is usually updated whenever you call
+@code{\refstepcounter@{@var{counter}@}}.
+
+Below, the key @code{sec:test} will get the number of the current
+section and the key @code{fig:test} will get the number of the figure.
+(Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and tables.)
+
+@example
+\section@{section name@}
+\label@{sec:test@}
+This is Section~\ref@{sec:test@}.
+\begin@{figure@}
+ ...
+ \caption@{caption text@}
+ \label@{fig:test@}
+\end@{figure@}
+See Figure~\ref@{fig:test@}.
+@end example
+
+
+@node \pageref
+@section @code{\pageref}
+
+@findex \pageref
+@cindex cross referencing with page number
+@cindex page number, cross referencing
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\pageref@{@var{key}@}
+@end example
+
+Produce the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding
+@code{\label}@{@var{key}@} command appears.
+
+If there is no @code{\label@{@var{key}@}} then you get something like
+@samp{LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on
+input line 11.}
+
+Below, the @code{\label@{eq:main@}} is used both for the formula number
+and for the page number. (Note that the two references are forward
+references so this document would need to be compiled twice to resolve
+those.)
+
+@example
+The main result is formula~\ref@{eq:main@} on page~\pageref@{eq:main@}.
+ ...
+\begin@{equation@} \label@{eq:main@}
+ \mathbf@{P@}=\mathbf@{NP@}
+\end@{equation@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \ref
+@section @code{\ref}
+
+@findex \ref
+@cindex cross referencing, symbolic
+@cindex section number, cross referencing
+@cindex equation number, cross referencing
+@cindex figure number, cross referencing
+@cindex footnote number, cross referencing
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\ref@{@var{key}@}
+@end example
+
+Produces the number of the sectional unit,
+equation, footnote, figure, @dots{}, of the corresponding
+@code{\label} command (@pxref{\label}). It does not produce any text,
+such as the word `Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself.
+
+If there is no @code{\label@{@var{key}@}} then you get something like
+@samp{LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on
+input line 11.}
+
+In this example the @code{\ref@{popular@}} produces @samp{2}. Note that
+it is a forward reference since it comes before @code{\label@{popular@}}
+so this document would have to be compiled twice.
+
+@example
+The most widely-used format is item number~\ref@{popular@}.
+\begin@{enumerate@}
+\item Plain \TeX
+\item \label@{popular@} \LaTeX
+\item Con\TeX t
+\end@{enumerate@}
+@end example
+
+@PkgIndex{cleveref}
+The @file{cleveref} package includes text such as @samp{Theorem} in the
+reference. See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+
+@node Environments
+@chapter Environments
+
+@cindex environments
+@findex \begin
+@findex \end
+
+@LaTeX{} provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior.
+An environment begins with @code{\begin} and ends with @code{\end},
+like this:
+
+@example
+\begin@{@var{environment-name}@}
+ ...
+\end@{@var{environment-name}@}
+@end example
+
+The @var{environment-name} at the beginning must exactly match that at
+the end. For instance, the input
+@code{\begin@{table*@}...\end@{table@}} will cause an error like:
+@samp{! LaTeX Error: \begin@{table*@} on input line 5 ended by
+\end@{table@}.}
+
+@cindex group, and environments
+Environments are executed within a group.
+
+@menu
+* abstract:: Produce an abstract.
+* array:: Math arrays.
+* center:: Centered lines.
+* description:: Labelled lists.
+* displaymath:: Formulas that appear on their own line.
+* document:: Enclose the whole document.
+* enumerate:: Numbered lists.
+* eqnarray:: Sequences of aligned equations.
+* equation:: Displayed equation.
+* figure:: Floating figures.
+* filecontents:: Writing multiple files from the source.
+* flushleft:: Flushed left lines.
+* flushright:: Flushed right lines.
+* itemize:: Bulleted lists.
+* letter:: Letters.
+* list:: Generic list environment.
+* math:: In-line math.
+* minipage:: Miniature page.
+* picture:: Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
+* quotation & quote:: Include a quotation.
+* tabbing:: Align text arbitrarily.
+* table:: Floating tables.
+* tabular:: Align text in columns.
+* thebibliography:: Bibliography or reference list.
+* theorem:: Theorems, lemmas, etc.
+* titlepage:: For hand crafted title pages.
+* verbatim:: Simulating typed input.
+* verse:: For poetry and other things.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node abstract
+@section @code{abstract}
+
+@EnvIndex{abstract}
+@cindex abstracts
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{abstract@}
+...
+\end@{abstract@}
+@end example
+
+Produce an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. This environment
+is only defined in the @code{article} and @code{report} document classes
+(@pxref{Document classes}).
+
+Using the example below in the @code{article} class produces a displayed
+paragraph. Document class option @code{titlepage} causes the abstract
+to be on a separate page (@pxref{Document class options}); this is the
+default only in the @code{report} class.
+
+@example
+\begin@{abstract@}
+ We compare all known accounts of the proposal made by Porter Alexander
+ to Robert E Lee at the Appomattox Court House that the army continue
+ in a guerrilla war, which Lee refused.
+\end@{abstract@}
+@end example
+
+The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column document (for
+a more flexible solution, use the package @file{abstract}).
+
+@c Adopted from http://www.tex.ac.uk/FAQ-onecolabs.html
+@example
+\documentclass[twocolumn]@{article@}
+ ...
+\begin@{document@}
+\title@{Babe Ruth as Cultural Progenitor: a Atavistic Approach@}
+\author@{Smith \\ Jones \\ Robinson\thanks@{Railroad tracking grant.@}@}
+\twocolumn[
+ \begin@{@@twocolumnfalse@}
+ \maketitle
+ \begin@{abstract@}
+ Ruth was not just the Sultan of Swat, he was the entire swat
+ team.
+ \end@{abstract@}
+ \end@{@@twocolumnfalse@}
+ ]
+@{ % by-hand insert a footnote at page bottom
+ \renewcommand@{\thefootnote@}@{\fnsymbol@{footnote@}@}
+ \footnotetext[1]@{Thanks for all the fish.@}
+@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node array
+@section @code{array}
+
+@EnvIndex{array}
+@cindex arrays, math
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{array@}@{@var{cols}@}
+ @var{column 1 entry} &@var{column 2 entry} ... &@var{column n entry} \\
+ ...
+\end@{array@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or:
+
+@example
+\begin@{array@}[@var{pos}]@{@var{cols}@}
+ @var{column 1 entry} &@var{column 2 entry} ... &@var{column n entry} \\
+ ...
+\end@{array@}
+@end example
+
+Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in math
+mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics environment
+such as @code{equation} (@pxref{equation}). Inside of each row the
+column entries are separated by an ampersand, (@code{&}). Rows are
+terminated with double-backslashes (@pxref{\\}).
+
+This example shows a three by three array.
+
+@example
+\begin@{equation*@}
+ \chi(x) =
+ \left| % vertical bar fence
+ \begin@{array@}@{ccc@}
+ x-a &-b &-c \\
+ -d &x-e &-f \\
+ -g &-h &x-i
+ \end@{array@}
+ \right|
+\end@{equation*@}
+@end example
+
+The required argument @var{cols} describes the number of columns, their
+alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. For instance,
+@code{\begin@{array@}@{rcl@}...\end@{array@}} gives three columns: the
+first flush right, the second centered, and the third flush left. See
+@ref{tabular} for the complete description of @var{cols} and of the
+other common features of the two environments, including the optional
+@var{pos} argument.
+
+There are two ways that @code{array} diverges from @code{tabular}. The
+first is that @code{array} entries are typeset in math mode, in
+textstyle (@pxref{Modes}) except if the @var{cols} definition specifies
+the column with @code{p@{...@}}, which causes the entry to be typeset in
+text mode. The second is that, instead of @code{tabular}'s parameter
+@code{\tabcolsep}, @LaTeX{}'s intercolumn space in an @code{array} is
+governed by
+@findex \arraycolsep
+@code{\arraycolsep}, which gives half the width between columns. The
+default for this is @samp{5pt} so that between two columns comes
+10@dmn{pt} of space.
+
+@PkgIndex{amsmath}
+To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the @file{amsmath}
+package. It comes with environments @code{pmatrix} for an array
+surrounded by parentheses@tie{}@code{(...)}, @code{bmatrix} for an array
+surrounded by square brackets@tie{}@code{[...]}, @code{Bmatrix} for an
+array surrounded by curly braces@tie{}@code{@{...@}}, @code{vmatrix} for
+an array surrounded by vertical bars@tie{}@code{|...|}, and
+@code{Vmatrix} for an array surrounded by double vertical
+bars@tie{}@code{||...||}, along with a number of other array constructs.
+
+@PkgIndex{amsmath}
+The next example uses the @file{amsmath} package.
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{amsmath@} % in preamble
+
+\begin@{equation@}
+ \begin@{vmatrix@}@{cc@} % array with vert lines
+ a &b \\
+ c &d
+ \end@{vmatrix@}=ad-bc
+\end@{equation@}
+@end example
+
+@PkgIndex{array (package)}
+@PkgIndex{dcolumn}
+There are many packages concerning arrays. The @file{array} package has
+many useful extensions, including more column types. The @file{dcolumn}
+package adds a column type to center on a decimal point. For both see
+the documentation on CTAN.
+
+
+@node center
+@section @code{center}
+
+@EnvIndex{center}
+@cindex centering text, environment for
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{center@}
+ @var{line1} \\
+ @var{line2} \\
+ ...
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
+centered within the left and right margins. Use
+double-backslash, @code{\\}, to get a line break (@pxref{\\}).
+@findex \\ @r{(for @code{center})}
+If some text is too long to fit on a line then @LaTeX{} will insert line
+breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any
+interword space.
+
+This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
+@ref{\centering} to avoid such space, for example inside a @code{figure}
+environment.
+
+This example produces three centered lines. There is extra vertical
+space between the last two lines.
+
+@example
+\begin@{center@}
+ A Thesis Submitted in Partial Fufillment \\
+ of the Requirements of \\[0.5ex]
+ the School of Environmental Engineering
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+In this example, depending on the page's line width, @LaTeX{} may choose
+a line break for the part before the double backslash. If so, it will
+center each of the two lines and if not it will center the single line.
+Then @LaTeX{} will break at the double backslash, and will center the
+ending.
+
+@example
+\begin@{center@}
+ My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink
+ alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\
+ I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+A double backslash after the final line is optional. If present it
+doesn't add any vertical space.
+
+In a two-column document the text is centered in a column, not in the
+entire page.
+
+@menu
+* \centering:: Declaration form of the @code{center} environment.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \centering
+@subsection @code{\centering}
+
+@findex \centering
+@cindex centering text, declaration for
+
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+@{\centering ... @}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\begin@{group@}
+ \centering ...
+\end@{group@}
+@end example
+
+Center the material in its scope. It is most often used inside an
+environment such as @code{figure}, or in a @code{parbox}.
+
+This example's @code{\centering} declaration causes the graphic to be
+horizontally centered.
+
+@example
+\begin@{figure@}
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]@{ctan_lion.png@}
+ \caption@{CTAN Lion@} \label@{fig:CTANLion@}
+\end@{figure@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The scope of this @code{\centering} ends with the @code{\end@{figure@}}.
+
+Unlike the @code{center} environment, the @code{\centering} command does
+not add vertical space above and below the text. That's its advantage
+in the above example; there is not an excess of space.
+
+It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how @LaTeX{}
+formats paragraph units. If @code{ww @{\centering xx \\ yy@} zz} is
+surrounded by blank lines then @LaTeX{} will create a paragraph whose
+first line @samp{ww xx} is centered and whose second line, not centered,
+contains @samp{yy zz}. Usually what is desired is for the scope of the
+declaration to contain a blank line or the @code{\end} command of an
+environment such as @code{figure} or @code{table} that ends the
+paragraph unit. Thus, if @code{@{\centering xx \\ yy\par@} zz} is
+surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph with two
+centered lines @samp{xx} and @samp{yy}, followed by a new paragraph with
+@samp{zz} that is formatted as usual.
+
+
+@node description
+@section @code{description}
+
+@EnvIndex{description}
+@cindex labelled lists, creating
+@cindex description lists, creating
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{description@}
+ \item[@var{label of first item}] @var{text of first item}
+ \item[@var{label of second item}] @var{text of second item}
+ ...
+\end@{description@}
+@end example
+
+Environment to make a list of labeled items. Each item's @var{label} is
+typeset in bold and is flush left, so that long labels continue into the
+first line of the item text. There must be at least one item; having
+none causes the @LaTeX{} error @samp{Something's wrong--perhaps a
+missing \item}.
+
+This example shows the environment used for a sequence of definitions.
+
+@example
+\begin@{definition@}
+ \item[lama] A priest.
+ \item[llama] A beast.
+\end@{definition@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The labels @samp{lama} and @samp{llama} are output in boldface, with the
+left edge on the left margin.
+
+@findex \item
+Start list items with the @code{\item} command (@pxref{\item}). Use the
+optional labels, as in @code{\item[Main point]}, because there is
+no sensible default. Following the @code{\item} is optional text, which
+may contain multiple paragraphs.
+
+@cindex bold typewriter, avoiding
+@cindex typewriter labels in lists
+Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a font
+change given in argument style (see @ref{Font styles}) then it will come
+out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter with
+@code{\item[\texttt@{label text@}]} then it will appear in bold
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way around this, in this
+example to get non-bold typewriter, is to use declarative style:
+@code{\item[@{\tt label text@}]}. Similarly, get the standard roman
+font with @code{\item[@{\rm label text@}]}.
+
+For other major @LaTeX{} labelled list environments, see @ref{itemize}
+and @ref{enumerate}. Unlike those environments, nesting
+@code{description} environments does not change the default label; it is
+boldface and flush left at all levels.
+
+For information about list layout parameters, including the default
+values, and for information about customizing list layout, see
+@ref{list}. The package @file{enumitem} is useful for customizing
+lists.
+
+This example changes the description labels to small caps.
+
+@example
+\renewcommand@{\descriptionlabel@}[1]@{%
+ @{\hspace@{\labelsep@}\textsc@{#1@}@}@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node displaymath
+@section @code{displaymath}
+@c http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/40492/what-are-the-differences-between-align-equation-and-displaymath
+
+@EnvIndex{displaymath}
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{displaymath@}
+ @var{mathematical text}
+\end@{displaymath@}
+@end example
+
+Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display style
+and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global option
+@code{fleqn}; see @ref{Document class options}.
+
+In the @code{displaymath} environment no equation number is added to the
+math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the
+@code{equation} environment (@pxref{equation}).
+
+@LaTeX{} will not break the @var{math text} across lines.
+
+@PkgIndex{amsmath}
+Note that the @file{amsmath} package has significantly more extensive
+displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of
+ways in that package for having math text broken across lines.
+
+The construct @code{\[@var{math text}\]} is essentially a synonym for
+@code{\begin@{displaymath@}@var{math text}\end@{displaymath@}} but the
+latter is easier to work with in the source file; for instance,
+searching for a square bracket may get false positives but the word
+@code{displaymath} will likely be unique. (The construct
+@code{$$@var{math text}$$} from Plain@tie{}@TeX{} is sometimes
+mistakenly used as a synonym for @code{displaymath}. It is not a
+synonym, because the @code{displaymath} environment checks that it isn't
+started in math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
+environment start, because the @code{displaymath} environment has
+different vertical spacing, and because the @code{displaymath}
+environment honors the @code{fleqn} option.)
+
+The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
+
+@example
+\begin@{displaymath@}
+ \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3
+\end@{displaymath@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version
+@code{\( \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3 \)} produces.
+
+
+@node document
+@section @code{document}
+
+@EnvIndex{document}
+
+The @code{document} environment encloses the entire body of a document.
+It is required in every @LaTeX{} document. @xref{Starting and ending}.
+
+@menu
+* \AtBeginDocument:: Hook for commands at the start of the document.
+* \AtEndDocument:: Hook for commands at the end of the document.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \AtBeginDocument
+@subsection @code{\AtBeginDocument}
+
+@findex \AtBeginDocument
+@cindex beginning of document hook
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\AtBeginDocument@{@var{code}@}
+@end example
+
+Save @var{code} and execute it when @code{\begin@{document@}} is
+executed, at the very end of the preamble. The code is executed after
+the font selection tables have been set up, so the normal font for the
+document is the current font. However, the code is executed as part of
+the preamble so you cannot do any typesetting with it.
+
+You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+
+
+@node \AtEndDocument
+@subsection @code{\AtEndDocument}
+
+@findex \AtEndDocument
+@cindex end of document hook
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\AtEndDocument@{@var{code}@}
+@end example
+
+Save @var{code} and execute it near the end of the document.
+Specifically, it is executed when @code{\end@{document@}} is executed,
+before the final page is finished and before any leftover floating
+environments are processed. If you want some of the code to be executed
+after these two processes then include a @code{\clearpage} at the
+appropriate point in @var{code}.
+
+You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+
+
+@node enumerate
+@section @code{enumerate}
+
+@EnvIndex{enumerate}
+@cindex lists of items, numbered
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{enumerate@}
+ \item[@var{optional label of first item}] @var{text of first item}
+ \item[@var{optional label of second item}] @var{text of second item}
+ ...
+\end@{enumerate@}
+@end example
+
+Environment to produce a numbered list of items. The format of the
+label numbering depends on the nesting level of this environment; see
+below. The default top-level numbering is @samp{1.}, @samp{2.},
+etc. Each @code{enumerate} list environment must have at least one item;
+having none causes the @LaTeX{} error @samp{Something's wrong--perhaps a
+missing \item}.
+
+This example gives the first two finishers in the 1908 Olympic marathon.
+As a top-level list the labels would come out as @samp{1.} and
+@samp{2.}.
+
+@example
+\begin@{enumerate@}
+ \item Johnny Hayes (USA)
+ \item Charles Hefferon (RSA)
+\end@{enumerate@}
+@end example
+
+@findex \item
+Start list items with the @code{\item} command (@pxref{\item}). If you
+give @code{\item} an optional argument by following it with square
+brackets, as in @code{\item[Interstitial label]}, then the next item
+will continue the interrupted sequence (@pxref{\item}). That is, you
+will get labels like @samp{1.}, then @samp{Interstitial label}, then
+@samp{2.}. Following the @code{\item} is optional text, which may
+contain multiple paragraphs.
+
+Enumerations may be nested within other @code{enumerate} environments,
+or within any paragraph-making environment such as @code{itemize}
+(@pxref{itemize}), up to four levels deep. This gives @LaTeX{}'s
+default for the format at each nesting level, where 1 is the top level,
+the outermost level.
+
+@enumerate
+@item arabic number followed by a period: @samp{1.}, @samp{2.},@tie{}@dots{}
+@item lowercase letter inside parentheses: @samp{(a)}, @samp{(b)}@tie{}@dots{}
+@item lowercase roman numeral followed by a period: @samp{i.}, @samp{ii.},@tie{}@dots{}
+@item uppercase letter followed by a period: @samp{A.}, @samp{B.},@tie{}@dots{}
+@end enumerate
+
+@findex \enumi
+@findex \enumii
+@findex \enumiii
+@findex \enumiv
+@anchor{enumerate enumi}
+@anchor{enumerate enumii}
+@anchor{enumerate enumiii}
+@anchor{enumerate enumiv}
+The @code{enumerate} environment uses the counters @code{\enumi} through
+@code{\enumiv} (@pxref{Counters}).
+
+For other major @LaTeX{} labeled list environments, see
+@ref{description} and @ref{itemize}. For information about list layout
+parameters, including the default values, and for information about
+customizing list layout, see @ref{list}. The package @file{enumitem} is
+useful for customizing lists.
+
+@findex \labelenumi
+@findex \labelenumii
+@findex \labelenumiii
+@findex \labelenumiv
+@anchor{enumerate labelenumi}
+@anchor{enumerate labelenumii}
+@anchor{enumerate labelenumiii}
+@anchor{enumerate labelenumiv}
+To change the format of the label use @code{\renewcommand}
+(@pxref{\newcommand & \renewcommand}) on the commands @code{\labelenumi}
+through @code{\labelenumiv}. For instance, this first level list will be
+labelled with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing
+period.
+
+@findex \Alph @r{example}
+@example
+\renewcommand@{\labelenumi@}@{\textbf@{\Alph@{enumi@}@}@}
+\begin@{enumerate@}
+ \item Shows as boldface A
+ \item Shows as boldface B
+\end@{enumerate@}
+@end example
+
+For a list of counter-labeling commands see @ref{\alph \Alph \arabic
+\roman \Roman \fnsymbol}.
+
+
+@node eqnarray
+@section @code{eqnarray}
+
+@EnvIndex{eqnarray}
+@cindex equations, aligning
+@cindex aligning equations
+
+@cindex align @r{environment, from @code{amsmath}}
+@cindex amsmath @r{package, replacing @code{eqnarray}}
+@cindex Madsen, Lars
+The @code{eqnarray} environment is obsolete. It has infelicities,
+including spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements.
+(See ``Avoid eqnarray!''@: by Lars Madsen
+@url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf}). New documents
+should include the @file{amsmath} package and use the displayed
+mathematics environments provided there, such as the @code{align}
+environment. We include a description only for completeness and for
+working with old documents.
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{eqnarray@}
+ @var{first formula left} &@var{first formula middle} &@var{first formula right} \\
+ ...
+\end@{eqnarray@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\begin@{eqnarray*@}
+ @var{first formula left} &@var{first formula middle} &@var{first formula right} \\
+ ...
+\end@{eqnarray*@}
+@end example
+
+@findex \\ @r{(for @code{eqnarray})}
+Display a sequence of equations or inequalities. The left and right
+sides are typeset in display mode, while the middle is typeset in text
+mode.
+
+It is similar to a three-column @code{array} environment, with items
+within a row separated by an ampersand@tie{}(@code{&}), and with rows
+separated by double backslash@tie{} @code{\\}).
+@findex \\* @r{(for @code{eqnarray})}
+The starred form of line break (@code{\\*}) can also be used to separate
+equations, and will disallow a page break there (@pxref{\\}).
+
+@findex \nonumber
+@cindex equation numbers, omitting
+The unstarred form @code{eqnarray} places an equation number on every
+line (using the @code{equation} counter), unless that line contains a
+@code{\nonumber} command. The starred form @code{eqnarray*} omits
+equation numbering, while otherwise being the same.
+
+@findex \lefteqn
+The command @code{\lefteqn} is used for splitting long formulas across
+lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
+zero width.
+
+This example shows three lines. The first two lines make an inequality,
+while the third line has not entry on the left side.
+
+@example
+\begin@{eqnarray*@}
+ \lefteqn@{x_1+x_2+\cdots+x_n@} \\
+ &\leq &y_1+y_2+\cdots+y_n \\
+ &= &z+y_3+\cdots+y_n
+\end@{eqnarray*@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node equation
+@section @code{equation}
+
+@EnvIndex{equation}
+@cindex equations, environment for
+@cindex formulas, environment for
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{equation@}
+ @var{mathematical text}
+\end@{equation@}
+@end example
+
+The same as a @code{displaymath} environment (@pxref{displaymath})
+except that @LaTeX{} puts an equation number flush to the right margin.
+The equation number is generated using the @code{equation} counter.
+
+You should have no blank lines between @code{\begin@{equation@}} and
+@code{\begin@{equation@}}, or @LaTeX{} will tell you that there is a
+missing dollar sign.
+
+@PkgIndex{amsmath}
+The package @file{amsmath} package has extensive displayed equation
+facilities. New documents should include this package.
+
+
+@node figure
+@section @code{figure}
+
+@EnvIndex{figure}
+@cindex inserting figures
+@cindex figures, inserting
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{figure@}[@var{placement}]
+ @var{figure body}
+ \caption[@var{loftitle}]@{@var{title}@} % optional
+ \label@{@var{label@}} % optional
+\end@{figure@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or:
+
+@example
+\begin@{figure*@}[@var{placement}]
+ @var{figure body}
+ \caption[@var{loftitle}]@{@var{title}@} % optional
+ \label@{@var{label@}} % optional
+\end@{figure*@}
+@end example
+
+Figures are for material that is not part of the normal text. An
+example is material that you cannot have split between two pages, such
+as a graphic. Because of this, @LaTeX{} does not typeset figures in
+sequence with normal text but instead ``floats'' them to a convenient
+place, such as the top of a following page (@pxref{Floats}).
+
+The @var{figure body} can consist of imported graphics
+(@pxref{Graphics}), or text, @LaTeX{} commands, etc. It is typeset in a
+@code{parbox} of width @code{\textwidth}.
+
+The possible values of @var{placement} are @code{h} for @samp{here},
+@code{t} for @samp{top}, @code{b} for @samp{bottom}, and @code{p} for
+@samp{on a separate page of floats}. For the effect of these options on
+the float placement algorithm, see @ref{Floats}.
+
+The starred form @code{figure*} is used when a document is in
+double-column mode (@pxref{\twocolumn}). It produces a figure that
+spans both columns, at the top of the page. To add the possibility of
+placing at a page bottom see the discussion of @var{placement} @code{b}
+in @ref{Floats}.
+
+The label is optional; it is used for cross references (@pxref{Cross
+references}).
+@findex \caption
+The optional @code{\caption} command specifies caption text for the
+figure. By default it is numbered. If @var{loftitle} is present, it is
+used in the list of figures instead of @var{title} (@pxref{Table of
+contents etc.}).
+
+This example makes a figure out of a graphic. @LaTeX{} will place that
+graphic and its caption at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
+end of the document, on a page of floats.
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{graphicx@} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin@{figure@}[t]
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]@{CTANlion.png@}
+ \caption@{The CTAN lion, by Duane Bibby@}
+\end@{figure@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node filecontents
+@section @code{filecontents}: Write an external file
+
+@EnvIndex{filecontents}
+@EnvIndex{filecontents*}
+@cindex external files, writing
+@cindex writing external files
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{filecontents@}@{@var{filename}@}
+ @var{text}
+\end@{filecontents@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\begin@{filecontents*@}@{@var{filename}@}
+ @var{text}
+\end@{filecontents*@}
+@end example
+
+Create a file named @var{filename} and fill it with @var{text}. The
+unstarred version of the environment @code{filecontents} prefixes the
+content of the created file with a header; see the example below. The
+starred version @code{filecontents*} does not include the header.
+
+This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it often
+appears before the @code{\documentclass} command. It is typically used
+when a source file requires a nonstandard style or class file. The
+environment will write that file to the directory containing the source
+and thus make the source file self-contained. Another use is to include
+@code{bib} references in the file, again to make it self-contained.
+
+The environment checks whether a file of that name already exists and if
+so, does not do anything. There is a @file{filecontents} package that
+redefines the @code{filecontents} environment so that instead of doing
+nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file.
+
+For example, this document
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{article@}
+\begin@{filecontents@}@{JH.sty@}
+\newcommand@{\myname@}@{Jim Hef@{@}feron@}
+\end@{filecontents@}
+\usepackage@{JH@}
+\begin@{document@}
+Article by \myname.
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+produces this file @file{JH.sty}.
+
+@example
+%% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
+%% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+%% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
+%%
+\newcommand@{\myname@}@{Jim Hef@{@}feron@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node flushleft
+@section @code{flushleft}
+
+@EnvIndex{flushleft}
+@cindex left-justifying text, environment for
+@cindex ragged right text, environment for
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{flushleft@}
+ @var{line1} \\
+ @var{line2} \\
+ ...
+\end@{flushleft@}
+@end example
+
+@findex \\ @r{for @code{flushleft}}
+An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long
+then @LaTeX{} will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and
+stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use a double
+backslash, @code{\\}. For the declaration form
+see@tie{}@ref{\raggedright}.
+
+This creates a box of text that is at most 3 inches wide, with the text
+flush left and ragged right.
+
+@example
+\noindent\begin@{minipage@}@{3in@}
+\begin@{flushleft@}
+ A long sentence that will be broken by \LaTeX@{@}
+ at a convenient spot. \\
+ And, a fresh line forced by the double backslash.
+\end@{flushleft@}
+\end@{minipage@}
+@end example
+
+
+@menu
+* \raggedright:: Declaration form of the @code{flushleft} environment.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \raggedright
+@subsection @code{\raggedright}
+
+@findex \raggedright
+@cindex ragged right text
+@cindex left-justifying text
+@cindex justification, ragged right
+
+Synopses:
+
+@example
+@{\raggedright ... @}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\begin@{@var{environment}@} \raggedright
+ ...
+\end@{@var{environment}@}
+@end example
+
+A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and
+ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as @code{quote}
+or in a @code{parbox}. For the environment form
+see@tie{}@ref{flushleft}.
+
+Unlike the @code{flushleft} environment, the @code{\raggedright}
+command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how @LaTeX{}
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the
+scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or @code{\end}
+command that ends the paragraph unit.
+
+Here @code{\raggedright} in each second column keeps @LaTeX{} from doing
+very awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column. Note
+that @code{\raggedright} is inside the curly braces @code{@{...@}} to
+delimit its effect.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{rp@{2in@}@}
+ Team alpha &@{\raggedright This team does all the real work.@} \\
+ Team beta &@{\raggedright This team ensures that the water
+ cooler is never empty.@} \\
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node flushright
+@section @code{flushright}
+
+@EnvIndex{flushright}
+@cindex ragged left text, environment for
+@cindex right-justifying text, environment for
+
+@example
+\begin@{flushright@}
+ @var{line1} \\
+ @var{line2} \\
+ ...
+\end@{flushright@}
+@end example
+
+@findex \\ (for @code{flushright})
+An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long
+to fit the margins then @LaTeX{} will linebreak them in a way that
+avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new
+line use a double backslash, @code{\\}. For the declaration form
+see@tie{}@ref{\raggedleft}.
+
+For an example related to this environment, see@tie{}@ref{flushleft}.
+
+@menu
+* \raggedleft:: Declaration form of the @code{flushright} environment.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \raggedleft
+@subsection @code{\raggedleft}
+
+@findex \raggedleft
+@cindex ragged left text
+@cindex justification, ragged left
+@cindex right-justifying text
+
+Synopses:
+
+@example
+@{\raggedleft ... @}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\begin@{@var{environment}@} \raggedleft
+ ...
+\end@{@var{environment}@}
+@end example
+
+A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and
+ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as @code{quote}
+or in a @code{parbox}. For the environment form
+see@tie{}@ref{flushright}.
+
+Unlike the @code{flushright} environment, the @code{\raggedleft}
+command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how @LaTeX{}
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the
+scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or @code{\end}
+command that ends the paragraph unit.
+
+For an example related to this environment, see@tie{}@ref{\raggedright}.
+
+
+@node itemize
+@section @code{itemize}
+
+@EnvIndex{itemize}
+@findex \item
+@cindex lists of items
+@cindex unordered lists
+@cindex bulleted lists
+@cindex bullet lists
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{itemize@}
+ \item[@var{optional label of first item}] @var{text of first item}
+ \item[@var{optional label of second item}] @var{text of second item}
+ ...
+\end@{itemize@}
+@end example
+
+Produce a list that is unordered, sometimes called a bullet list. The
+environment must have at least one @code{\item}; having none causes the
+@LaTeX{} error @samp{Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item}.
+
+This gives a two-item list.
+
+@example
+\begin@{itemize@}
+ \item Pencil and watercolor sketch by Cassandra
+ \item Rice portrait
+\end@{itemize@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+As a top-level list each label would come out as a bullet, @bullet{}.
+The format of the labeling depends on the nesting level; see below.
+
+@findex \item
+Start list items with the @code{\item} command (@pxref{\item}). If you
+give @code{\item} an optional argument by following it with square
+brackets, as in @code{\item[Optional label]}, then by default it will
+appear in bold and be flush right, so it could extend into the left
+margin. For labels that are flush left see the @ref{description}
+environment. Following the @code{\item} is optional text, which may
+contain multiple paragraphs.
+
+@findex \labelitemi
+@findex \labelitemii
+@findex \labelitemiii
+@findex \labelitemiv
+@anchor{itemize labelitemi}
+@anchor{itemize labelitemii}
+@anchor{itemize labelitemiii}
+@anchor{itemize labelitemiv}
+Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
+They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such
+as @code{enumerate} (@pxref{enumerate}). The @code{itemize} environment
+uses the commands @code{\labelitemi} through @code{\labelitemiv} to
+produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase
+roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting
+level). These are the default marks at each level.
+
+@enumerate
+@item @bullet{} (bullet, from @code{\textbullet})
+@item @b{-@w{-}} (bold en-dash, from @code{\normalfont\bfseries\textendash})
+@item * (asterisk, from @code{\textasteriskcentered})
+@iftex
+@item @math{\cdot} (centered dot, from @code{\textperiodcentered})
+@end iftex
+@ifnottex
+@item . (centered dot, rendered here as a period, from @code{\textperiodcentered})
+@end ifnottex
+@end enumerate
+
+Change the labels with @code{\renewcommand}. For instance, this makes
+the first level use diamonds.
+
+@example
+\renewcommand@{\labelitemi@}@{$\diamond$@}
+@end example
+
+@findex \leftmargin
+@findex \leftmargini
+@findex \leftmarginii
+@findex \leftmarginiii
+@findex \leftmarginiv
+@findex \leftmarginv
+@findex \leftmarginvi
+@anchor{itemize leftmargin}
+@anchor{itemize leftmargini}
+@anchor{itemize leftmarginii}
+@anchor{itemize leftmarginiii}
+@anchor{itemize leftmarginiv}
+@anchor{itemize leftmarginv}
+@anchor{itemize leftmarginvi}
+The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
+the left margin of the @code{itemize} list is determined by the
+parameters @code{\leftmargini} through @code{\leftmarginvi}. (Note the
+convention of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command
+name to denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: @code{2.5em} in
+level 1 (@code{2em} in two-column mode), @code{2.2em} in level 2,
+@code{1.87em} in level 3, and @code{1.7em} in level 4, with smaller
+values for more deeply nested levels.
+
+For other major @LaTeX{} labeled list environments, see
+@ref{description} and @ref{enumerate}. For information about list
+layout parameters, including the default values, and for information
+about customizing list layout, see @ref{list}. The package
+@file{enumitem} is useful for customizing lists.
+
+This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost itemized
+lists.
+
+@example
+\setlength@{\leftmargini@}@{1.25em@} % default 2.5em
+@end example
+
+@findex \parskip @r{example}
+Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
+space between items. Here is an example defining an @code{itemize*}
+environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
+within a single item (@code{\parskip} is not list-specific,
+@pxref{\parindent & \parskip}):
+
+@example
+\newenvironment@{itemize*@}%
+ @{\begin@{itemize@}%
+ \setlength@{\itemsep@}@{0pt@}%
+ \setlength@{\parsep@}@{0pt@}@}%
+ \setlength@{\parskip@}@{0pt@}@}%
+ @{\end@{itemize@}@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node letter
+@section @code{letter} environment: writing letters
+
+@EnvIndex{letter}
+
+This environment is used for creating letters. @xref{Letters}.
+
+
+@node list
+@section @code{list}
+
+@EnvIndex{list}
+@cindex lists of items, generic
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{list@}@{@var{labeling}@}@{@var{spacing}@}
+ \item[@var{optional label of first item}] @var{text of first item}
+ \item[@var{optional label of second item}] @var{text of second item}
+ ...
+\end@{list@}
+@end example
+
+An environment for constructing lists.
+
+Note that this environment does not typically appear in the document
+body. Most lists created by @LaTeX{} authors are the ones that come
+standard: the @code{description}, @code{enumerate}, and @code{itemize}
+environments (@pxref{description}, @ref{enumerate}, and @ref{itemize}).
+
+Instead, the @code{list} environment is most often used in macros. For
+example, many standard @LaTeX{} environments that do not immediately
+appear to be lists are in fact constructed using @code{list}, including
+@code{quotation}, @code{quote}, and @code{center} (@pxref{quotation &
+quote}, @pxref{center}).
+
+This uses the @code{list} environment to define a new custom
+environment.
+
+@example
+\newcounter@{namedlistcounter@} % number the items
+\newenvironment@{named@}
+ @{\begin@{list@}
+ @{Item~\Roman@{namedlistcounter@}.@} % labeling
+ @{\usecounter@{namedlistcounter@} % set counter
+ \setlength@{\leftmargin@}@{3.5em@}@} % set spacing
+ @}
+ @{\end@{list@}@}
+
+\begin@{named@}
+ \item Shows as ``Item~I.''
+ \item[Special label.] Shows as ``Special label.''
+ \item Shows as ``Item~II.''
+\end@{named@}
+@end example
+
+The mandatory first argument @var{labeling} specifies the default
+labeling of list items. It can contain text and @LaTeX{} commands, as
+above where it contains both @samp{Item} and @samp{\Roman@{...@}}.
+@LaTeX{} forms the label by putting the @var{labeling} argument in a box
+of width @code{\labelwidth}. If the label is wider than that, the
+additional material extends to the right. When making an instance of a
+list you can override the default labeling by giving @code{\item} an
+optional argument by including square braces and the text, as in the
+above @code{\item[Special label.]}; @pxref{\item}.
+
+The mandatory second argument @var{spacing} has a list of commands.
+This list can be empty. A command that can go in here is
+@code{\usecounter@{@var{countername}@}} (@pxref{\usecounter}). Use this
+to tell @LaTeX{} to number the items using the given counter. The
+counter will be reset to zero each time @LaTeX{} enters the environment,
+and the counter is incremented by one each time @LaTeX{} encounters an
+@code{\item} that does not have an optional argument.
+
+@findex \makelabel
+@anchor{list makelabel} Another command that can go in @var{spacing} is
+@code{\makelabel}, which constructs the label box. By default it puts
+the contents flush right. Its only argument is the label, which it
+typesets in LR mode (@pxref{Modes}). One example of changing its
+definition is that to the above @code{named} example, before the
+definition of the environment add
+@code{\newcommand@{\namedmakelabel@}[1]@{\textsc@{#1@}@}}, and between
+the @code{\setlength} command and the parenthesis that closes the
+@var{spacing} argument also add @code{\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel}.
+Then the items will be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the
+second code line to @code{\let\makelabel\fbox} puts the labels inside a
+framed box. Another example of the @code{\makelabel} command is below,
+in the definition of the @code{redlabel} environment.
+
+Also often in @var{spacing} are commands to redefine the spacing for the
+list. Below are the spacing parameters with their default values.
+(Default values for derived environments such as @code{itemize} can be
+different than the values shown here.) See also the figure that follows
+the list. Each is a length (@pxref{Lengths}). The vertical spaces are
+normally rubber lengths, with @code{plus} and @code{minus} components,
+to give @TeX{} flexibility in setting the page. Change each with a
+command such as @code{\setlength@{itemsep@}@{2pt plus1pt minus1pt@}}.
+For some effects these lengths should be zero or negative.
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \itemindent
+@anchor{list itemindent}
+Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond @code{leftmargin}, of the
+first line each item. Its default value is @code{0pt}.
+
+@item \itemsep
+@anchor{list itemsep}
+Vertical space between items, beyond the @code{\parsep}. The defaults
+for the first three levels in @LaTeX{}'s @samp{article}, @samp{book},
+and @samp{report} classes at 10 point size are: @code{4pt plus2pt
+minus1pt}, @code{\parsep} (that is, @code{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}), and
+@code{\topsep} (that is, @code{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}). The defaults at
+11 point are: @code{4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt}, @code{\parsep} (that is,
+@code{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}), and @code{topsep} (that is, @code{2pt
+plus1pt minus1pt}). The defaults at 12 point are: @code{5pt plus2.5pt
+minus1pt}, @code{\parsep} (that is, @code{2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt}), and
+@code{\topsep} (that is, @code{2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt}).
+
+@item \labelsep
+@anchor{list labelsep}
+Horizontal space between the label and text of an item.
+The default for @LaTeX{}'s @samp{article}, @samp{book},
+and @samp{report} classes is @code{0.5em}.
+
+@item \labelwidth
+@anchor{list labelwidth}
+Horizontal width. The box containing the label is nominally this wide.
+If @code{\makelabel} returns text that is wider than this then the first
+line of the item will be indented to make room for this extra material.
+If @code{\makelabel} returns text of width less than or equal to
+@code{\labelwidth} then @LaTeX{}'s default is that the label is typeset
+flush right in a box of this width.
+
+The left edge of the label box is
+@code{\leftmargin}+@code{\itemindent}-@code{\labelsep}-@code{\labelwidth}
+from the left margin of the enclosing environment.
+
+The default for @LaTeX{}'s @samp{article}, @samp{book}, and
+@samp{report} classes at the top level is
+@code{\leftmargini}-@code{\labelsep}, (which is @code{2em} in one column
+mode and @code{1.5em} in two column mode). At the second level it is
+@code{\leftmarginii}-@code{\labelsep}, and at the third level it is
+@code{\leftmarginiii}-@code{\labelsep}. These definitions make the
+label's left edge coincide with the left margin of the enclosing
+environment.
+
+@item \leftmargin
+@anchor{list leftmargin}
+Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment
+(or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level list), and the
+left margin of this list. It must be non-negative.
+
+In the standard @LaTeX{} document classes, a top-level list has this set
+to the value of @code{\leftmargini}, while a list that is nested inside
+a top-level list has this margin set to @code{\leftmarginii}. More
+deeply nested lists get the values of @code{\leftmarginiii} through
+@code{\leftmarginvi}. (Nesting greater than level five generates the
+error message @samp{Too deeply nested}.)
+
+The defaults for the first three levels in @LaTeX{}'s @samp{article},
+@samp{book}, and @samp{report} classes are: @code{\leftmargini} is
+@code{2.5em} (in two column mode, @code{2em}), @code{\leftmarginii} is
+@code{2.2em}, and @code{\leftmarginiii} is @code{1.87em}.
+
+@item \listparindent
+@anchor{list listparindent}
+Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
+@code{\leftmargin}, for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list
+item. A negative value makes this an ``outdent''. Its default value
+is @code{0pt}.
+
+@item \parsep
+@anchor{list parsep}
+Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. In the @samp{book}
+and @samp{article} classes The defaults for the first three levels in
+@LaTeX{}'s @samp{article}, @samp{book}, and @samp{report} classes at 10
+point size are: @code{4pt plus2pt minus1pt}, @code{2pt plus1pt
+minus1pt}, and @code{0pt}. The defaults at 11 point size are:
+@code{4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt}, @code{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}, and
+@code{0pt}. The defaults at 12 point size are: @code{5pt plus2.5pt
+minus1pt}, @code{2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt}, and @code{0pt}.
+
+@item \partopsep
+@anchor{list partopsep}
+Vertical space added, beyond @code{\topsep}+@code{\parskip}, to the top
+and bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded by
+a blank line. (A blank line in the @LaTeX{} source before the list
+changes spacing at both the top and bottom of the list; whether the line
+following the list is blank does not matter.)
+
+The defaults for the first three levels in @LaTeX{}'s @samp{article},
+@samp{book}, and @samp{report} classes at 10 point size are: @code{2pt
+plus1 minus1pt}, @code{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}, and @code{1pt plus0pt
+minus1pt}. The defaults at 11 point are: @code{3pt plus1pt minus1pt},
+@code{3pt plus1pt minus1pt}, and @code{1pt plus0pt minus1pt}). The
+defaults at 12 point are: @code{3pt plus2pt minus3pt}, @code{3pt plus2pt
+minus2pt}, and @code{1pt plus0pt minus1pt}.
+
+@item \rightmargin
+@anchor{list rightmargin}
+Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right
+margin of the enclosing environment. Its default value is @code{0pt}.
+It must be non-negative.
+
+@item \topsep
+@anchor{list topsep}
+Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition
+to @code{\parskip} (@pxref{\parindent & \parskip}). The defaults for
+the first three levels in @LaTeX{}'s @samp{article}, @samp{book}, and
+@samp{report} classes at 10 point size are: @code{8pt plus2pt minus4pt},
+@code{4pt plus2pt minus1pt}, and @code{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}. The
+defaults at 11 point are: @code{9pt plus3pt minus5pt}, @code{4.5pt
+plus2pt minus1pt}, and @code{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}. The defaults at 12
+point are: @code{10pt plus4pt minus6pt}, @code{5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt},
+and @code{2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt}.
+
+@end ftable
+
+This shows the horizontal and vertical distances.
+
+@float
+@image{latex2e-figures/list,3.21in,,,.png}
+@end float
+
+The lengths shown are listed below. The key relationship is that the
+right edge of the bracket for @var{h1} equals the right edge of the
+bracket for @var{h4}, so that the left edge of the label box is at
+@var{h3}+@var{h4}-(@var{h0}+@var{h1}).
+
+@table @var
+@item v0
+@math{@code{@\topsep} + @code{@\parskip}} if
+the list environment does not start a new paragraph, and
+@code{\topsep}+@code{\parskip}+@code{\partopsep} if it does
+
+@item v1
+@code{\parsep}
+
+@item v2
+@code{\itemsep}+@code{\parsep}
+
+@item v3
+Same as @var{v0}. (This space is affected by whether a blank line
+appears in the source above the environment; whether a blank line
+appears in the source below the environment does not matter.)
+
+@item h0
+@code{\labelwidth}
+
+@item h1
+@code{\labelsep}
+
+@item h2
+@code{\listparindent}
+
+@item h3
+@code{\leftmargin}
+
+@item h4
+@code{\itemindent}
+
+@item h5
+@code{\rightmargin}
+
+@end table
+
+The list's left and right margins, shown above as @var{h3} and @var{h5},
+are with respect to the ones provided by the surrounding environment, or
+with respect to the page margins for a top-level list. The line width
+used for typesetting the list items is @code{\linewidth} (@pxref{Page
+layout parameters}). For instance, set the list's left margin to be one
+quarter of the distance between the left and right margins of the
+enclosing environment with
+@code{\setlength@{\leftmargin@}@{0.25\linewidth@}}.
+
+Page breaking in a list structure is controlled by the three
+parameters below. For each, the @LaTeX{} default is
+@code{-\@@lowpenalty}, that is, @code{-51}. Because it is negative,
+it somewhat encourages a page break at each spot. Change it with,
+e.g., @code{\@@beginparpenalty=9999}; a value of 10000 prohibits a
+page break.
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \@@beginparpenalty
+@anchor{list beginparpenalty}
+The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default @code{-51}).
+
+@item \@@itempenalty
+@anchor{list itempenalty}
+The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default @code{-51}).
+
+@item \@@endparpenalty
+@anchor{list endparpenalty}
+The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default @code{-51}).
+
+@end ftable
+
+@PkgIndex{enumitem}
+The package @code{enumitem} is useful for customizing lists.
+
+This example has the labels in red. They are numbered, and the left
+edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text.
+@xref{\usecounter}.
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{color@}
+\newcounter@{cnt@}
+\newcommand@{\makeredlabel@}[1]@{\textcolor@{red@}@{#1.@}@}
+\newenvironment@{redlabel@}
+ @{\begin@{list@}
+ @{\arabic@{cnt@}@}
+ @{\usecounter@{cnt@}
+ \setlength@{\labelwidth@}@{0em@}
+ \setlength@{\labelsep@}@{0.5em@}
+ \setlength@{\leftmargin@}@{1.5em@}
+ \setlength@{\itemindent@}@{0.5em@} % equals \labelwidth+\labelsep
+ \let\makelabel=\makeredlabel
+ @}
+ @}
+@{\end@{list@} @}
+@end example
+
+@menu
+* \item:: An entry in a list.
+* trivlist:: A restricted form of @code{list}.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \item
+@subsection @code{\item}: An entry in a list
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\item text of item
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\item[@var{optional-label}] text of item
+@end example
+
+An entry in a list. The entries are prefixed by a label, whose default
+depends on the list type.
+
+Because the optional label is surrounded by square brackets
+@samp{[...]}, if you have an item whose text starts with @samp{[}, you
+have to hide the bracket inside curly braces, as in: @code{\item
+@{[@} is an open square bracket}; otherwise, @LaTeX{} will think it
+marks the start of an optional label.
+
+Similarly, if the item does have the optional label and you need a
+close square bracket inside that label, you must hide it in the same
+way: @code{\item[Close square bracket, @{]@}]}. @xref{@LaTeX{}
+command syntax}.
+
+In this example the enumerate list has two items that use the default
+label and one that uses the optional label.
+
+@example
+\begin@{enumerate@}
+ \item Moe
+ \item[sometimes] Shemp
+ \item Larry
+\end@{enumerate@}
+@end example
+
+The first item is labelled @samp{1.}, the second item is labelled
+@samp{sometimes}, and the third item is labelled @samp{2.}. Because
+of the optional label in the second item, the third item is not
+labelled@tie{}@samp{3.}.
+
+
+@node trivlist
+@subsection @code{trivlist}: A restricted form of @code{list}
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{trivlist@}
+ ...
+\end@{trivlist@}
+@end example
+
+A restricted version of the list environment, in which margins are not
+indented and an @code{\item} without an optional argument produces no
+text. It is most often used in macros, to define an environment where
+the @code{\item} command as part of the environment's definition. For
+instance, the @code{center} environment is defined essentially like
+this:
+
+@example
+\newenvironment@{center@}
+ @{\begin@{trivlist@}\centering\item\relax@}
+ @{\end@{trivlist@}@}
+@end example
+
+Using @code{trivlist} in this way allows the macro to inherit some
+common code: combining vertical space of two adjacent environments;
+detecting whether the text following the environment should be
+considered a new paragraph or a continuation of the previous one;
+adjusting the left and right margins for possible nested list
+environments.
+
+Specifically, @code{trivlist} uses the current values of the list
+parameters (@pxref{list}), except that @code{\parsep} is set to the
+value of @code{\parskip}, and @code{\leftmargin}, @code{\labelwidth},
+and @code{\itemindent} are set to zero.
+
+This example outputs the items as two paragraphs, except that (by
+default) they have no paragraph indent and are vertically separated.
+
+@example
+\begin@{trivlist@}
+\item The \textit@{Surprise@} is not old; no one would call her old.
+\item She has a bluff bow, lovely lines.
+\end@{trivlist@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node math
+@section @code{math}
+
+@EnvIndex{math}
+@cindex in-line formulas
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{math@}
+@var{math}
+\end@{math@}
+@end example
+
+The @code{math} environment inserts given @var{math} material within
+the running text. @code{\(...\)} and @code{$...$} are synonyms.
+@xref{Math formulas}.
+
+
+@node minipage
+@section @code{minipage}
+
+@EnvIndex{minipage}
+@cindex minipage, creating a
+
+Synopses:
+
+@example
+\begin@{minipage@}@{@var{width}@}
+ @var{contents}
+\end@{minipage@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\begin@{minipage@}[@var{position}][@var{height}][@var{inner-pos}]@{@var{width}@}
+ @var{contents}
+\end@{minipage@}
+@end example
+
+Put @var{contents} into a box that is @var{width} wide. This is like a
+small version of a page; it can contain its own footnotes, itemized
+lists, etc. (There are some restrictions, including that it cannot have
+floats.) This box will not be broken across pages. So @code{minipage}
+is similar to @code{\parbox} (@pxref{\parbox}) but here you can have
+paragraphs.
+
+This example will be 3@tie{}inches wide, and has two paragraphs.
+
+@example
+\begin@{minipage@}@{3in@}
+ Stephen Kleene was a founder of the Theory of Computation.
+
+ He was a student of Church, wrote three influential texts,
+ was President of the Association for Symbolic Logic,
+ and won the National Medal of Science.
+\end@{minipage@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+See below for a discussion of the paragraph indent inside a
+@code{minipage}.
+
+The required argument @var{width} is a rigid length (@pxref{Lengths}).
+It gives the width of the box into which @var{contents} are typeset.
+
+There are three optional arguments, @var{position}, @var{height}, and
+@var{inner-pos}. You need not include all three. For example, get the
+default @var{position} and set the @var{height} with
+@code{\begin@{minipage@}[c][2.54cm] @var{contents} \end@{minipage@}}.
+(Get the natural height with an empty argument, @code{[]}.)
+
+The optional argument @var{position} governs how the @code{minipage}
+vertically aligns with the surrounding material.
+
+@table @code
+@item c
+(synonym @code{m}) Default. Positions the @code{minipage} so its
+vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what
+Plain @TeX{} calls @code{\vcenter}).
+
+@item t
+Match the top line in the @code{minipage} with the baseline of the
+surrounding text (Plain @TeX{}'s @code{\vtop}.
+
+@item b
+Match the bottom line in the @code{minipage} with the baseline of the
+surrounding text (Plain @TeX{}'s @code{\vbox}.
+@end table
+
+To see the effects of these, contrast running this
+
+@example
+---\begin@{minipage@}[c]@{0.25in@}
+ first\\ second\\ third
+\end@{minipage@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+with the results of changing @code{c} to @code{b} or@tie{}@code{t}.
+
+The optional argument @var{height} is a rigid length (@pxref{Lengths}).
+It sets the height of the @code{minipage}. You can enter any value
+larger than, or equal to, or smaller than the @code{minipage}'s natural
+height and @LaTeX{} will not give an error or warning. You can also set
+it to a height of zero or a negative value.
+
+The final optional argument @var{inner-pos} controls the placement of
+@var{content} inside the box. These are the possible values are (the
+default is the value of @var{position}).
+
+@table @code
+@item t
+Place @var{content} at the top of the box.
+
+@item c
+Place it in the vertical center.
+
+@item b
+Place it at the box bottom.
+
+@item s
+Stretch @var{contents} out vertically; it must contain vertically
+stretchable space.
+
+@end table
+
+The @var{inner-pos} argument makes sense when the @var{height} option
+is set to a value larger than the @code{minipage}'s natural height. To
+see the effect of the options, run this example with the various choices
+in place of @code{b}.
+
+@example
+Text before
+\begin@{center@}
+ ---\begin@{minipage@}[c][3in][b]@{0.25\textwidth@}
+ first\\ second\\ third
+ \end@{minipage@}
+\end@{center@}
+Text after
+@end example
+
+@cindex indentation of paragraphs, in minipage
+@cindex paragraph indentation, in minipage
+@findex \parindent
+By default paragraphs are not indented in a @code{minipage}. Change
+that with a command such as @code{\setlength@{\parindent@}@{1pc@}} at
+the start of @var{contents}.
+
+@cindex footnotes in figures
+@cindex figures, footnotes in
+Footnotes in a @code{minipage} environment are handled in a way that is
+particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
+@code{\footnote} or @code{\footnotetext} command puts the footnote at
+the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it
+uses the @code{\mpfootnote} counter instead of the ordinary
+@code{footnote} counter (@pxref{Counters}).
+
+This puts the footnote at the bottom of the table, not the bottom of the
+page.
+
+@example
+\begin@{center@} % center the minipage on the line
+\begin@{minipage@}@{2.5in@}
+ \begin@{center@} % center the table inside the minipage
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{ll@}
+ \textsc@{Monarch@} &\textsc@{Reign@} \\ \hline
+ Elizabeth II &63 years\footnote@{to date@} \\
+ Victoria &63 years \\
+ George III &59 years
+ \end@{tabular@}
+ \end@{center@}
+\end@{minipage@}
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+If you nest minipages then there is an oddness when using footnotes.
+Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next
+@code{\end@{minipage@}} which may not be their logical place.
+
+This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic. They
+are vertically centered.
+
+@example
+\newcommand*@{\vcenteredhbox@}[1]@{\begin@{tabular@}@{@@@{@}c@@@{@}@}#1\end@{tabular@}@}
+ ...
+\begin@{center@}
+ \vcenteredhbox@{\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]@{nyc.png@}@}
+ \hspace@{0.1\textwidth@}
+ \begin@{minipage@}@{0.5\textwidth@}
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{r|l@}
+ \multicolumn@{1@}@{r@}@{Borough@} &Pop (million) \\ \hline
+ The Bronx &$1.5$ \\
+ Brooklyn &$2.6$ \\
+ Manhattan &$1.6$ \\
+ Queens &$2.3$ \\
+ Staten Island &$0.5$
+ \end@{tabular@}
+ \end@{minipage@}
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node picture
+@section @code{picture}
+
+@EnvIndex{picture}
+@cindex creating pictures
+@cindex pictures, creating
+
+Synopses:
+@example
+\begin@{picture@}(@var{width},@var{height})
+ @var{picture commands}
+\end@{picture@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\begin@{picture@}(@var{width},@var{height})(@var{xoffset},@var{yoffset})
+ @var{picture commands}
+\end@{picture@}
+@end example
+
+An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows,
+boxes, circles, and text. Note that while this environment is not
+obsolete, new documents typically use much more powerful graphics
+creation systems, such as @code{TikZ}, @code{PSTricks}, @code{MetaPost},
+or @code{Asymptote}. These are not covered in this document; see CTAN.
+
+This shows the parallelogram law for adding vectors.
+
+@findex \unitlength
+@example
+\setlength@{\unitlength@}@{1cm@}
+\begin@{picture@}(6,6) % picture box will be 6cm wide by 6cm tall
+ \put(0,0)@{\vector(2,1)@{4@}@} % for every 2 over this vector goes 1 up
+ \put(2,1)@{\makebox(0,0)[l]@{\ first leg@}@}
+ \put(4,2)@{\vector(1,2)@{2@}@}
+ \put(5,4)@{\makebox(0,0)[l]@{\ second leg@}@}
+ \put(0,0)@{\line(1,1)@{6@}@}
+ \put(3,3)@{\makebox(0,0)[r]@{sum\ @}@}
+\end@{picture@}
+@end example
+
+You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an
+exact location.
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{color,graphicx@} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin@{center@}
+\setlength@{\unitlength@}@{\textwidth@}
+\begin@{picture@}(1,1) % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
+ \put(0,0)@{\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]@{desertedisland.jpg@}@}
+ \put(0.25,0.35)@{\textcolor@{red@}@{X Treasure here@}@}
+\end@{picture@}
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The red@tie{}X will be precisely a quarter of the @code{\linewidth} from
+the left margin, and @code{0.35\linewidth} up from the bottom. Another
+example of this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get
+repeat material on each of a document's pages.
+
+The @code{picture} environment has one required argument, a pair of
+numbers (@var{width},@var{height}). Multiply these by the value
+@code{\unitlength} to get the nominal size of the output, the space that
+@LaTeX{} reserves on the output page. This nominal size need not be how
+large the picture really is; @LaTeX{} will draw things from the picture
+outside the picture's box.
+
+This environment also has an optional argument
+(@var{xoffset},@var{yoffset}). It is used to shift the origin. Unlike
+most optional arguments, this one is not contained in square brackets.
+As with the required argument, it consists of two real numbers.
+Multiply these by @code{\unitlength} to get the point at the lower-left
+corner of the picture.
+
+For example, if @code{\unitlength} has been set to @code{1mm}, the
+command
+
+@example
+\begin@{picture@}(100,200)(10,20)
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+produces a box of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters. The
+picture's origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner
+is there, and the upper-right corner is at (110mm,220mm). When you
+first draw a picture you typically omit the optional argument, leaving
+the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
+picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate
+optional argument.
+
+@cindex position, in picture
+Each @var{picture command} tells @LaTeX{} where to put something by
+naming its position. A @dfn{position} is a pair such as @code{(2.4,-5)}
+giving the x- and y-coordinates. A @dfn{coordinate} is a not a length,
+it is a real number (it may have a decimal point or a minus sign). It
+specifies a length in multiples of the unit length @code{\unitlength},
+so if @code{\unitlength} has been set to @code{1cm}, then the coordinate
+2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters.
+
+@LaTeX{}'s default for @code{\unitlength} is @code{1pt}. it is a rigid
+length (@pxref{Lengths}). Change it with the @code{\setlength} command
+(@pxref{\setlength}). Make this change only outside of a @code{picture}
+environment.
+
+Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at
+the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears
+as an argument, as with @code{\put(1,2)@{...@}}, it is not enclosed in
+braces since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also,
+unlike in some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are
+further up the page.
+
+There are four ways to put things in a picture: @code{\put},
+@code{\multiput}, @code{\qbezier}, and @code{\graphpaper}. The most
+often used is @code{\put}. This
+
+@example
+\put(11.3,-0.3)@{...@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+places the object with its reference point at coordinates
+@math{(11.3,-0.3)}. The reference points for various objects will be
+described below.
+@findex LR box
+The @code{\put} command creates an @dfn{LR box} (@pxref{Modes}).
+Anything that can go in an @code{\mbox} (@pxref{\mbox & \makebox}) can
+go in the text argument of the @code{\put} command. The reference point
+will be the lower left corner of the box. In this picture
+
+@example
+\setlength@{\unitlength@}@{1cm@}
+...\begin@{picture@}(1,1)
+ \put(0,0)@{\line(1,0)@{1@}@}
+ \put(0,0)@{\line(1,1)@{1@}@}
+\end@{picture@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+the three dots are just slightly left of the point of the angle formed
+by the two lines. (Also, @code{\line(1,1)@{1@}} does not call for a
+line of length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of
+1.)
+
+The @code{\multiput}, @code{qbezier}, and @code{graphpaper} commands are
+described below.
+
+This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using @code{\qbezier} for
+that curve.
+
+@example
+\begin@{picture@}(3,1.5)
+ \put(0,0)@{\vector(1,0)@{8@}@} % x axis
+ \put(0,0)@{\vector(0,1)@{4@}@} % y axis
+ \put(2,0)@{\line(0,1)@{3@}@} % left side rectangle
+ \put(4,0)@{\line(0,1)@{3.5@}@} % right side
+ \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
+ \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
+ \thicklines % below here, lines are twice as thick
+ \put(2,3)@{\line(4,1)@{2@}@}
+ \put(4.5,2.5)@{\framebox@{Trapezoidal Rule@}@}
+\end@{picture@}
+@end example
+
+@menu
+* \put:: Place an object at a specified place.
+* \multiput:: Draw multiple instances of an object.
+* \qbezier:: Draw a quadratic Bezier curve.
+* \graphpaper:: Draw graph paper.
+* \line:: Draw a straight line.
+* \linethickness:: Set thickness of horizontal and vertical lines.
+* \thinlines:: The default line thickness.
+* \thicklines:: A heavier line thickness.
+* \circle:: Draw a circle.
+* \oval:: Draw an oval.
+* \shortstack:: Make a stack of objects.
+* \vector:: Draw a line with an arrow.
+* \makebox (picture):: Draw a box of the specified size.
+* \framebox (picture):: Draw a box with a frame around it.
+* \frame:: Draw a frame around an object.
+* \dashbox:: Draw a dashed box.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \put
+@subsection @code{\put}
+
+@findex \put
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\put(@var{xcoord},@var{ycoord})@{@var{content}@}
+@end example
+
+Place @var{content} at the coordinate (@var{xcoord},@var{ycoord}). See
+the discussion of coordinates and @code{\unitlength} in @ref{picture}.
+The @var{content} is processed in LR mode (@pxref{Modes}) so it cannot
+contain line breaks.
+
+This includes the text into the @code{picture}.
+
+@example
+\put(4.5,2.5)@{Apply the \textit@{unpoke@} move@}
+@end example
+
+The reference point, the location (4.5,2.5), is the lower left of the
+text, at the bottom left of the @samp{A}.
+
+
+@node \multiput
+@subsection @code{\multiput}
+
+@findex \multiput
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\multiput(@var{x},@var{y})(@var{delta_x},@var{delta_y})@{@var{num-copies}@}@{@var{obj}@}
+@end example
+
+Copy @var{obj} a total of @var{num-copies} times, with an increment of
+@var{delta_x,delta_y}. The @var{obj} first appears at position
+@math{(x,y)}, then at @math{(x+\delta_x,y+\delta_y)}, and so on.
+
+This draws a simple grid with every fifth line in bold (see also
+@ref{\graphpaper}).
+
+@example
+\begin@{picture@}(10,10)
+ \linethickness@{0.05mm@}
+ \multiput(0,0)(1,0)@{10@}@{\line(0,1)@{10@}@}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,1)@{10@}@{\line(1,0)@{10@}@}
+ \linethickness@{0.5mm@}
+ \multiput(0,0)(5,0)@{3@}@{\line(0,1)@{10@}@}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,5)@{3@}@{\line(1,0)@{10@}@}
+\end@{picture@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \qbezier
+@subsection @code{\qbezier}
+
+@findex \qbezier
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\qbezier(@var{x1},@var{y1})(@var{x2},@var{y2})(@var{x3},@var{y3})
+\qbezier[@var{num}](@var{x1},@var{y1})(@var{x2},@var{y2})(@var{x3},@var{y3})
+@end example
+
+Draw a quadratic Bezier curve whose control points are given by the
+three required arguments @code{(@var{x1},@var{y1})},
+@code{(@var{x2},@var{y2})}, and @code{(@var{x3},@var{y3})}. That is,
+the curve runs from @var{(x1,y1)} to @var{(x3,y3)}, is quadratic, and is
+such that the tangent line at @var{(x1,y1)} passes through
+@var{(x2,y2)}, as does the tangent line at @var{(x3,y3)}.
+
+This draws a curve from the coordinate (1,1) to (1,0).
+
+@example
+\qbezier(1,1)(1.25,0.75)(1,0)
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The curve's tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the
+curve's tangent line at (1,0).
+
+The optional argument @var{num} gives the number of calculated
+intermediate points. The default is to draw a smooth curve whose
+maximum number of points is @code{\qbeziermax} (change this value with
+@code{\renewcommand}).
+
+
+@node \graphpaper
+@subsection @code{\graphpaper}
+
+@findex \graphpaper
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\graphpaper(@var{x_init},@var{y_init})(@var{x_dimen},@var{y_dimen})
+\graphpaper[@var{spacing}](@var{x_init},@var{y_init})(@var{x_dimen},@var{y_dimen})
+@end example
+
+Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the @code{graphpap} package.
+The grid's origin is @code{(@var{x_init},@var{y_init})}.
+Grid lines come every @var{spacing} units (the default is 10).
+The grid extends @var{x_dimen} units to the right and @var{y_dimen} units up.
+All arguments must be positive integers.
+
+This make a grid with seven vertical lines and eleven horizontal lines.
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{graphpap@} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin@{picture@}(6,20) % in document body
+ \graphpaper[2](0,0)(12,20)
+\end@{picture@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The lines are numbered every ten units.
+
+
+@node \line
+@subsection @code{\line}
+
+@findex \line
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\line(@var{x_run},@var{y_rise})@{@var{travel}@}
+@end example
+
+Draw a line. It slopes such that it vertically rises @var{y_rise} for
+every horizontal @var{x_run}. The @var{travel} is the total horizontal
+change@tie{}--- it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in
+@math{x}. In the special case of vertical lines, where
+(@var{x_run},@var{y_rise})=(0,1), the @var{travel} gives the change in
+@math{y}.
+
+This draws a line starting at coordinates (1,3).
+
+@example
+\put(1,3)@{\line(2,5)@{4@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+For every over 2, this line will go up 5. Because @var{travel}
+specifies that this goes over 4, it must go up@tie{}10. Thus its
+endpoint is @math{(1,3)+(4,10)=(5,13)}. In particular, note that
+@math{@var{travel}=4} is not the length of the line, it is the change in
+@math{x}.
+
+The arguments @var{x_run} and @var{y_rise} are integers that can be
+positive, negative, or zero. (If both are 0 then @LaTeX{} treats the
+second as 1.) With
+@code{\put(@var{x_init},@var{y_init})@{\line(@var{x_run},@var{y_rise})@{@var{travel}@}@}},
+if @var{x_run} is negative then the line's ending point has a first
+coordinate that is less than @var{x_init}. If @var{y_rise} is negative
+then the line's ending point has a second coordinate that is less than
+@var{y_init}.
+
+If @var{travel} is negative then you get @code{LaTeX Error: Bad \line or
+\vector argument.}
+
+@cindex @code{pict2e} package
+@cindex graphics packages
+@PkgIndex{pict2e}
+@PkgIndex{TikZ}
+@PkgIndex{PSTricks}
+@PkgIndex{MetaPost}
+@PkgIndex{Asymptote}
+Standard @LaTeX{} can only draw lines with a limited range of slopes
+because these lines are made by putting together line segments from
+pre-made fonts. The two numbers @var{x_run} and @var{y_rise} must have
+integer values from @minus{}6 through@tie{}6. Also, they must be
+relatively prime, so that @var{(x_run,y_rise)} can be (2,1) but not
+(4,2) (if you choose the latter then instead of lines you get sequences
+of arrowheads; the solution is to switch to the former). To get lines
+of arbitrary slope and plenty of other shapes in a system like
+@code{picture}, see the package @file{pict2e} on CTAN. Another solution
+is to use a full-featured graphics system such as @file{TikZ}, or
+@file{PSTricks}, or @file{MetaPost}, or @file{Asymptote}
+
+
+@node \linethickness
+@subsection @code{\linethickness}
+
+@findex \linethickness
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\linethickness@{@var{dim}@}
+@end example
+
+Declares the thickness of subsequent horizontal and vertical lines in a
+picture to be @var{dim}, which must be a positive length
+(@pxref{Lengths}). It differs from @code{\thinlines} and
+@code{\thicklines} in that it does not affect the thickness of slanted
+lines, circles, or ovals.
+
+
+@node \thinlines
+@subsection @code{\thinlines}
+
+@findex \thinlines
+
+Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.4@dmn{pt}. This is the default
+thickness, so this command is unnecessary unless the thickness has been
+changed with either @ref{\linethickness} or @ref{\thicklines}.
+
+
+@node \thicklines
+@subsection @code{\thicklines}
+
+@findex \thicklines
+
+Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.8@dmn{pt}. See also
+@ref{\linethickness} and @ref{\thinlines}. This command is illustrated
+in the Trapezoidal Rule example of @ref{picture}.
+
+
+@node \circle
+@subsection @code{\circle}
+
+@findex \circle
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\circle@{@var{diameter}@}
+\circle*@{@var{diameter}@}
+@end example
+
+Produces a circle with a diameter as close as possible to the specified
+one. The @code{*}@tie{}form produces a filled-in circle.
+
+This draws a circle of radius 6, centered at @code{(5,7)}.
+
+@example
+\put(5,7)@{\circle@{6@}@}
+@end example
+
+The available radii for @code{circle} are, in points, the even
+numbers from 2 to 20, inclusive. For @code{circle*} they are all the
+integers from 1 to 15.
+
+
+@node \oval
+@subsection @code{\oval}
+
+@findex \oval
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\oval(@var{width},@var{height})
+\oval(@var{width},@var{height})[@var{portion}]
+@end example
+
+Produce a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument
+@var{portion} allows you to produce only half or a quarter of the oval.
+For half an oval take @var{portion} to be one of these.
+
+@table @code
+@item t
+top half
+@item b
+bottom half
+@item r
+right half
+@item l
+left half
+@end table
+
+Produce only one quarter of the oval by setting @var{portion} to
+@code{tr}, @code{br}, @code{bl}, or @code{tl}.
+
+This draws the top half of an oval that is 3 wide and 7 tall.
+
+@example
+\put(5,7)@{\oval(3,7)[t]@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The (5,7) is the center of the entire oval, not just the center of the
+top half.
+
+These shapes are not ellipses. They are rectangles whose corners are
+made with quarter circles. These circles have a maximum radius of
+20@dmn{pt} (@pxref{\circle} for the sizes). Thus large ovals are just
+boxes with a small amount of corner rounding.
+
+
+@node \shortstack
+@subsection @code{\shortstack}
+
+@findex \shortstack
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\shortstack[@var{position}]@{@var{line 1} \\ ... @}
+@end example
+
+Produce a vertical stack of objects.
+
+This labels the @math{y} axis.
+
+@example
+\put(0,0)@{\vector(1,0)@{4@}@} % x axis
+\put(0,0)@{\vector(0,1)@{2@}@} % y
+\put(-0.25,2)@{\makebox[0][r]@{\shortstack[r]@{$y$\\ axis@}@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack.
+In the above example the @ref{\mbox & \makebox} puts the stack flush
+right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits slightly to
+the left of the @math{y}@tie{}axis.
+
+The valid positions are:
+
+@table @code
+@item r
+Make objects flush right
+@item l
+Make objects flush left
+@item c
+Center objects (default)
+@end table
+
+@findex \\ @r{(for @code{\shortstack} objects)}
+Separate objects into lines with @code{\\}. These stacks are short in
+that, unlike in a @code{tabular} or @code{array} environment, here the
+rows are not spaced out to be of even heights. Thus, in
+@code{\shortstack@{X\\o\\o\\X@}} the first and last rows are taller than
+the middle two. You can adjust row heights either by putting in the
+usual interline spacing with @code{\shortstack@{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X@}},
+or by hand, via an explicit zero-width box @code{\shortstack@{X \\
+\rule@{0pt@}@{12pt@} o\\o\\X@}} or by using @code{\\}'s optional
+argument @code{\shortstack@{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X@}}.
+
+The @code{\shortstack} command is also available outside the
+@code{picture} environment.
+
+
+@node \vector
+@subsection @code{\vector}
+
+@findex \vector
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\vector(@var{x_run},@var{y_rise})@{@var{travel}@}
+@end example
+
+Draw a line ending in an arrow. The slope of that line is: it
+vertically rises @var{y_rise} for every horizontal @var{x_run}. The
+@var{travel} is the total horizontal change@tie{}--- it is not the
+length of the vector, it is the change in @math{x}. In the special case
+of vertical vectors, if (@var{x_run},@var{y_rise})=(0,1), then
+@var{travel} gives the change in @math{y}.
+
+For an example see @ref{picture}.
+
+For elaboration on @var{x_run} and @var{y_rise} see @ref{\line}. As
+there, the values of @var{x_run} and @var{y_rise} are limited. For
+@code{\vector} you must chooses integers between @minus{}4 and 4,
+inclusive. Also, the two you choose must be relatively prime. Thus,
+@code{\vector(2,1)@{4@}} is acceptable but @code{\vector(4,2)@{4@}} is
+not (if you use the latter then you get a sequence of arrowheads).
+
+
+@node \makebox (picture)
+@subsection @code{\makebox} (picture)
+
+@findex \makebox @r{(for @code{picture})}
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\makebox(@var{rec-width},@var{rec-height})@{@var{text}@}
+\makebox(@var{rec-width},@var{rec-height})[@var{position}]@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Make a box to hold @var{text}. This command fits with the
+@code{picture} environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because @var{rec-width} and @var{rec-height} are numbers specifying
+distances in terms of the @code{\unitlength} (@pxref{picture}). This
+command is similar to the normal @code{\makebox} command (@pxref{\mbox &
+\makebox}) except here that you must specify the width and height. This
+command is fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+This makes a box of length 3.5 times @code{\unitlength} and height 4
+times @code{\unitlength}.
+
+@example
+\put(1,2)@{\makebox(3.5,4)@{...@}@}
+@end example
+
+The optional argument @code{@var{position}} specifies where in the box
+the @var{text} appears. The default is to center it, both horizontally
+and vertically. To place it somewhere else, use a string with one or
+two of these letters.
+
+@table @code
+@item t
+Puts @var{text} the top of the box.
+
+@item b
+Put @var{text} at the bottom.
+
+@item l
+Put @var{text} on the left.
+
+@item r
+Put @var{text} on the right.
+
+@end table
+
+
+@node \framebox (picture)
+@subsection @code{\framebox} (picture)
+
+@findex \framebox
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\framebox(@var{rec-width},@var{rec-height})@{@var{text}@}
+\framebox(@var{rec-width},@var{rec-height})[@var{position}]@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+This is the same as @ref{\makebox (picture)} except that it puts a frame
+around the outside of the box that it creates. The reference point is
+the bottom left corner of the frame. This command fits with the
+@code{picture} environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+@code{\unitlength} (@pxref{picture}). This command is fragile
+(@pxref{\protect}).
+
+This example creates a frame 2.5@tie{}inches by 3@tie{}inches and puts
+the text in the center.
+
+@example
+\setlength@{\unitlength@}@{1in@}
+\framebox(2.5,3)@{test text@}
+@end example
+
+The required arguments are that the rectangle has overall width
+@var{rect-width} units and height @var{rect-height} units.
+
+The optional argument @var{position} specifies the position of
+@var{text}; see @ref{\makebox (picture)} for the values that it can
+take.
+
+@findex \fboxrule
+@findex \fboxsep
+The rule has thickness @code{\fboxrule} and there is a blank space
+@code{\fboxsep} between the frame and the contents of the box.
+
+For this command, you must specify the @var{width} and @var{height}. If
+you want to just put a frame around some contents whose dimension is
+determined in some other way then either use @code{\fbox} (@pxref{\fbox
+& \framebox}) or @code{\frame} (@pxref{\frame}).
+
+
+@node \frame
+@subsection @code{\frame}
+
+@findex \frame
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\frame@{@var{contents}@}
+@end example
+
+Puts a rectangular frame around @var{contents}. The reference point is
+the bottom left corner of the frame. In contrast to @code{\framebox}
+(@pxref{\framebox (picture)}), this command puts no extra space is put
+between the frame and the object. It is fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+
+@node \dashbox
+@subsection @code{\dashbox}
+
+@findex \dashbox
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\dashbox@{@var{dash-len}@}(@var{rect-width},@var{rect-height})@{@var{text}@}
+\dashbox@{@var{dash-len}@}(@var{rect-width},@var{rect-height})[@var{position}]@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Create a dashed rectangle around @var{text}. This command fits with the
+@code{picture} environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+@code{\unitlength} (@pxref{picture}).
+
+The required arguments are: dashes are @var{dash-len} units long, with
+the same length gap, and the rectangle has overall width
+@var{rect-width} units and height @var{rect-height} units.
+
+The optional argument @var{position} specifies the position of
+@var{text}; see @ref{\makebox (picture)} for the values that it can
+take.
+
+This shows that you can use non-integer value for @var{dash-len}.
+
+@example
+\put(0,0)@{\dashbox@{0.1@}(5,0.5)@{My hovercraft is full of eels.@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Each dash will be @code{0.1\unitlength} long, the box's width is
+@code{5\unitlength} and its height is @code{0.5\unitlength}.
+
+As in that example, a dashed box looks best when @var{rect-width} and
+@var{rect-height} are multiples of the @var{dash-len}.
+
+
+@node quotation & quote
+@section @code{quotation} & @code{quote}
+
+@EnvIndex{quotation}
+@cindex quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying
+@cindex displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation
+@cindex paragraph indentations in quoted text
+@EnvIndex{quote}
+@cindex quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying
+@cindex displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation
+@cindex paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{quotation@}
+ @var{text}
+\end@{quotation@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\begin@{quote@}
+ @var{text}
+\end@{quote@}
+@end example
+
+Include a quotation. Both environments indent margins on both sides by
+@code{\leftmargin} and the text is right-justified.
+
+They differ in how they treat paragraphs. In the @code{quotation}
+environment, paragraphs are indented by 1.5@dmn{em} and the space
+between paragraphs is small, @code{0pt plus 1pt}. In the @code{quote}
+environment, paragraphs are not indented and there is vertical space
+between paragraphs (it is the rubber length @code{\parsep}).
+
+@example
+\begin@{quotation@} \small\it
+ Four score and seven years ago
+ ... shall not perish from the earth.
+ \hspace@{1em plus 1fill@}---Abraham Lincoln
+\end@{quotation@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node tabbing
+@section @code{tabbing}
+
+@EnvIndex{tabbing}
+@cindex tab stops, using
+@cindex lining text up using tab stops
+@cindex alignment via tabbing
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabbing@}
+@var{row1col1} \= @var{row1col2} ... \\
+@var{row2col1} \> @var{row2col2} ... \\
+...
+\end@{tabbing@}
+@end example
+
+Align text in columns, by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as
+was done on a typewriter. This is less often used than the environments
+@code{tabular} (@pxref{tabular}) or @code{array} (@pxref{array}) because
+in those the width of each column need not be constant and need not be
+known in advance.
+
+This example has a first line where the tab stops are set to explicit
+widths, ended by a @code{\kill} command (which is described below):
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabbing@}
+\hspace@{0.75in@} \= \hspace@{0.40in@} \= \hspace@{0.40in@} \kill
+Ship \> Guns \> Year \\
+\textit@{Sophie@} \> 14 \> 1800 \\
+\textit@{Polychrest@} \> 24 \> 1803 \\
+\textit@{Lively@} \> 38 \> 1804 \\
+\textit@{Surprise@} \> 28 \> 1805 \\
+\end@{tabbing@}
+@end example
+
+Both the @code{tabbing} environment and the more widely-used
+@code{tabular} environment put text in columns. The most important
+distinction is that in @code{tabular} the width of columns is
+determined automatically by @LaTeX{}, while in @code{tabbing} the user
+sets the tab stops. Another distinction is that @code{tabular}
+generates a box, but @code{tabbing} can be broken across pages.
+Finally, while @code{tabular} can be used in any mode, @code{tabbing}
+can be used only in paragraph mode and it starts a new paragraph.
+
+A @code{tabbing} environment always starts a new paragraph, without
+indentation. Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need
+to use the starred form of the @code{\hspace} command at the beginning
+of a tabbed row. The right margin of the @code{tabbing} environment is
+the end of line, so that the width of the environment is
+@code{\linewidth}.
+
+@cindex row, @r{tabbing}
+The @code{tabbing} environment contains a sequence of @dfn{tabbed
+rows}. The first tabbed row begins immediately after
+@code{\begin@{tabbing@}} and each row ends with @code{\\} or
+@code{\kill}. The last row may omit the @code{\\} and end with just
+@code{\end@{tabbing@}}.
+
+At any point the @code{tabbing} environment has a current tab stop
+pattern, a sequence of @math{@var{n} > 0} tab stops, numbered 0, 1,
+etc. These create @var{n} corresponding columns. Tab stop@tie{}0 is
+always the left margin, defined by the enclosing environment. Tab
+stop number@tie{}@var{i} is set if it is assigned a horizontal
+position on the page. Tab stop number@tie{}@var{i} can only be set if
+all the stops 0, @dots{}, @math{i-1} have already been set; normally
+later stops are to the right of earlier ones.
+
+By default any text typeset in a @code{tabbing} environment is typeset
+ragged right and left-aligned on the current tab stop. Typesetting is
+done in LR mode (@pxref{Modes}).
+
+The following commands can be used inside a @code{tabbing} environment.
+They are all fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \\ @r{(tabbing)}
+End a tabbed line and typeset it.
+
+@item \= @r{(tabbing)}
+Sets a tab stop at the current position.
+
+@item \> @r{(tabbing)}
+@findex \>
+Advances to the next tab stop.
+
+@item \<
+Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing
+the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line.
+
+@item \+
+Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if
+necessary.
+
+@item \-
+Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if
+necessary.
+
+@item \' @r{(tabbing)}
+Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e.,
+everything from the most recent @code{\>}, @code{\<}, @code{\'},
+@code{\\}, or @code{\kill} command, to the previous column and aligned
+to the right, flush against the current column's tab stop.
+
+@item \` @r{(tabbing)}
+Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab
+stop@tie{}0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last
+column because there's no tab stop there. The @code{\`} command moves
+all the text that follows it, up to the @code{\\} or
+@code{\end@{tabbing@}} command that ends the line, to the right margin
+of the @code{tabbing} environment. There must be no @code{\>} or
+@code{\'} command between the @code{\`} and the @code{\\} or
+@code{\end@{tabbing@}} command that ends the line.
+
+@item \a @r{(tabbing)}
+@findex \a' @r{(acute accent in tabbing)}
+@findex \a` @r{(grave accent in tabbing)}
+@findex \a= @r{(macron accent in tabbing)}
+In a @code{tabbing} environment, the commands @code{\=}, @code{\'} and
+@code{\`} do not produce accents as usual (@pxref{Accents}). Instead,
+use the commands @code{\a=}, @code{\a'} and @code{\a`}.
+
+@item \kill
+Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like @code{\\} except
+that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it.
+Any @code{\=}, @code{\+} or @code{\-} commands in that line remain in
+effect.
+
+@item \poptabs
+@findex \poptabs
+Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last @code{\pushtabs}.
+
+@item \pushtabs
+Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing
+tab stop positions in the middle of a @code{tabbing} environment.
+
+@item \tabbingsep
+Distance of the text moved by @code{\'} to left of current tab stop.
+
+@end ftable
+
+This example typesets a Pascal function:
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabbing@}
+function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \> begin \= \+ \\
+ \> if \= n > 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+\end@{tabbing@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The output looks like this.
+
+@example
+function fact(n : integer) : integer;
+ begin
+ if n > 1 then
+ fact := n * fact(n-1);
+ else
+ fact := 1;
+ end;
+@end example
+
+@PkgIndex{algorithm2e} @PkgIndex{listings} @PkgIndex{minted}
+@PkgIndex{fancyvrb}
+@noindent
+This example is just for illustration of the environment. To actually
+typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim environment
+(@pxref{verbatim}) would normally be best. For pretty-printed code,
+there are quite a few packages, including @code{algorithm2e},
+@code{fancyvrb}, @code{listings}, and @code{minted}.
+
+
+@node table
+@section @code{table}
+
+@EnvIndex{table}
+@cindex tables, creating
+@cindex creating tables
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{table@}[@var{placement}]
+ @var{table body}
+ \caption[@var{loftitle}]@{@var{title}@} % optional
+ \label@{@var{label@}} % also optional
+\end@{table@}
+@end example
+
+A class of floats (@pxref{Floats}). They cannot be split across pages
+and so they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but instead
+are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a following page.
+
+This example @code{table} environment contains a @code{tabular}
+
+@example
+\begin@{table@}
+ \centering\small
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{ll@}
+ \multicolumn@{1@}@{c@}@{\textit@{Author@}@}
+ &\multicolumn@{1@}@{c@}@{\textit@{Piece@}@} \\ \hline
+ Bach &Cello Suite Number 1 \\
+ Beethoven &Cello Sonata Number 3 \\
+ Brahms &Cello Sonata Number 1
+ \end@{tabular@}
+ \caption@{Top cello pieces@}
+ \label@{tab:cello@}
+\end@{table@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+but you can put many different kinds of content in a @code{table},
+including text, @LaTeX{} commands, etc.
+
+For the possible values of @var{placement} and their effect on the
+float placement algorithm, see @ref{Floats}.
+
+The table body is typeset in a @code{parbox} of width @code{\textwidth}.
+It can contain text, commands, graphics, etc.
+
+The label is optional; it is used for cross references (@pxref{Cross
+references}).
+@findex \caption
+The @code{\caption} command is also optional. It specifies caption text
+for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional
+@var{lottitle} is present then that text is used in the list of tables
+instead of @var{title} (@pxref{Table of contents etc.}).
+
+In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a page,
+unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
+
+@example
+\begin@{table@}[b]
+ \centering
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{r|p@{2in@}@} \hline
+ One &The loneliest number \\
+ Two &Can be as sad as one.
+ It's the loneliest number since the number one.
+ \end@{tabular@}
+ \caption@{Cardinal virtues@}
+ \label@{tab:CardinalVirtues@}
+\end@{table@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node tabular
+@section @code{tabular}
+
+@EnvIndex{tabular}
+@cindex lines in tables
+@cindex lining text up in tables
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}[@var{pos}]@{@var{cols}@}
+ @var{column 1 entry} &@var{column 2 entry} ... &@var{column n entry} \\
+ ...
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular*@}@{@var{width}@}[@var{pos}]@{@var{cols}@}
+ @var{column 1 entry} &@var{column 2 entry} ... &@var{column n entry} \\
+ ...
+\end@{tabular*@}
+@end example
+
+Produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of horizontal rows.
+Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically in columns. This
+illustrates many of the features.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{l|l@}
+ \textit@{Player name@} &\textit@{Career home runs@} \\
+ \hline
+ Hank Aaron &755 \\
+ Babe Ruth &714
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar
+between them. This is specified in @code{tabular}'s argument
+@code{@{l|l@}}.
+@findex &
+Put the entries into different columns by separating them with an
+ampersand, @code{&}. The end of each row is marked with a double
+backslash, @code{\\}. Put a horizontal rule below a row, after a double
+backslash, with @code{\hline}.
+@findex \\ @r{for @code{tabular}}
+After the last row the @code{\\} is optional, unless an @code{\hline}
+command follows to put a rule below the table.
+
+The required and optional arguments to @code{tabular} consist of:
+
+@table @var
+@item pos
+Optional. Specifies the table's vertical position. The default is to
+align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of the
+surrounding text. There are two other possible alignments: @code{t}
+aligns the table so its top row matches the baseline of the surrounding
+text, and @code{b} aligns on the bottom row.
+
+This only has an effect if there is other text. In the common case of a
+@code{tabular} alone in a @code{center} environment this option makes
+no difference.
+
+@item cols
+Required. Specifies the formatting of columns. It consists of a
+sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the types of
+column and intercolumn material.
+
+@table @code
+@item l
+A column of left-aligned items.
+
+@item r
+A column of right-aligned items.
+
+@item c
+A column of centered items.
+
+@item |
+A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
+
+@item @@@{@var{text or space}@}
+Insert @var{text or space} at this location in every row. The @var{text
+or space} material is typeset in LR mode. This text is fragile
+(@pxref{\protect}).
+
+If between two columns there is no @@-expression then @LaTeX{}'s
+@code{book}, @code{article}, and @code{report} classes will put on
+either side of each column a space of length @code{\tabcolsep}, which by
+default is 6@dmn{pt}. That is, by default adjacent columns are
+separated by 12@dmn{pt} (so @code{\tabcolsep} is misleadingly named
+since it is only half of the separation between tabular columns). In
+addition, a space of 6@dmn{pt} also comes before the first column and
+after the final column, unless you put a @code{@@@{...@}} or @code{|}
+there.
+
+If you override the default and use an @@-expression then @LaTeX{} does
+not insert @code{\tabcolsep} so you must insert any desired space
+yourself, as in @code{@@@{\hspace@{1em@}@}}.
+
+An empty expression @code{@@@{@}} will eliminate the space. In
+particular, sometimes you want to eliminate the space before the first
+column or after the last one, as in the example below where the
+tabular lines need to lie on the left margin.
+
+@example
+\begin@{flushleft@}
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{@@@{@}l@}
+ ...
+ \end@{tabular@}
+\end@{flushleft@}
+@end example
+
+The next example shows text, a decimal point between the columns,
+arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on it.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{r@@@{$.$@}l@}
+ $3$ &$14$ \\
+ $9$ &$80665$
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+@findex \extracolsep
+An @code{\extracolsep@{@var{wd}@}} command in an @@-expression causes an
+extra space of width @var{wd} to appear to the left of all subsequent
+columns, until countermanded by another @code{\extracolsep}. Unlike
+ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an
+@@-expression. An @code{\extracolsep} command can be used only in an
+@@-expression in the @code{cols} argument. Below, @LaTeX{} inserts the
+right amount of intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches
+wide.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular*@}@{4in@}@{l@@@{\extracolsep@{\fill@}@}l@}
+ Seven times down, eight times up \ldots
+ &such is life!
+\end@{tabular*@}
+@end example
+
+To insert commands that are automatically executed before a given
+column, load the @code{array} package and use the @code{>@{...@}}
+specifier.
+@c xx should fully explain array, tabularx, and all other base packages...
+
+@item p@{@var{wd}@}
+Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width @var{wd}, as if
+it were the argument of a @code{\parbox[t]@{wd@}@{...@}} command.
+
+A line break double backslash @code{\\} may not appear in the item,
+except inside an environment like @code{minipage}, @code{array}, or
+@code{tabular}, or inside an explicit @code{\parbox}, or in the scope of
+a @code{\centering}, @code{\raggedright}, or @code{\raggedleft}
+declaration (when used in a @code{p}-column element these declarations
+must appear inside braces, as with @code{@{\centering .. \\
+..@}}). Otherwise @LaTeX{} will misinterpret the double backslash as
+ending the row. Instead, to get a line break in there use
+@code{\newline} (@pxref{\newline}).
+
+@item *@{@var{num}@}@{@var{cols}@}
+Equivalent to @var{num} copies of @var{cols}, where @var{num} is a
+positive integer and @var{cols} is a list of specifiers. Thus the
+specifier @code{\begin@{tabular@}@{|*@{3@}@{l|r@}|@}} is equivalent to
+the specifier @code{\begin@{tabular@}@{|l|rl|rl|r|@}}. Note that
+@var{cols} may contain another @code{*}-expression.
+
+@end table
+
+@item width
+Required for @code{tabular*}, not allowed for @code{tabular}. Specifies
+the width of the @code{tabular*} environment. The space between columns
+should be rubber, as with @code{@@@{\extracolsep@{\fill@}@}}, to allow
+the table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
+are likely to get the @code{Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
+...} warning.
+
+@end table
+
+Parameters that control formatting:
+@c xx defaults, own node (xref from array)?
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \arrayrulewidth
+@anchor{tabular arrayrulewidth}
+A length that is the thickness of the rule created by @code{|},
+@code{\hline}, and @code{\vline} in the @code{tabular} and @code{array}
+environments. The default is @samp{.4pt}. Change it as in
+@code{\setlength@{\arrayrulewidth@}@{0.8pt@}}.
+
+@item \arraystretch
+@anchor{tabular arraystrech}
+A factor by which the spacing between rows in the @code{tabular} and
+@code{array} environments is multiplied. The default is @samp{1}, for
+no scaling. Change it as @code{\renewcommand@{\arraystretch@}@{1.2@}}.
+
+@item \doublerulesep
+@anchor{tabular doublerulesep}
+A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the
+@code{||} specifier. The default is @samp{2pt}.
+
+@item \tabcolsep
+@anchor{tabular tabcolsep}
+A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
+@samp{6pt}. Change it with @code{\setlength}.
+
+@end ftable
+
+The following commands can be used inside the body of a @code{tabular}
+environment, the first two inside an entry and the second two between
+lines:
+
+@menu
+* \multicolumn:: Make an item spanning several columns.
+* \vline:: Draw a vertical line.
+* \cline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
+* \hline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \multicolumn
+@subsection @code{\multicolumn}
+
+@findex \multicolumn
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\multicolumn@{@var{numcols}@}@{@var{cols}@}@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Make an @code{array} or @code{tabular} entry that spans several columns.
+The first argument @var{numcols} gives the number of columns to span.
+The second argument @var{cols} specifies the formatting of the entry,
+with @code{c} for centered, @code{l} for flush left, or @code{r} for
+flush right. The third argument @var{text} gives the contents of that
+entry.
+
+In this example, in the first row, the second and third columns are
+spanned by the single heading @samp{Name}.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{lccl@}
+ \textit@{ID@} &\multicolumn@{2@}@{c@}@{\textit@{Name@}@} &\textit@{Age@} \\
+ \hline
+ 978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick &55 \\
+ ...
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+What counts as a column is:@tie{}the column format specifier for the
+@code{array} or @code{tabular} environment is broken into parts, where
+each part (except the first) begins with @code{l}, @code{c}, @code{r},
+or@tie{}@code{p}. So from @code{\begin@{tabular@}@{|r|ccp@{1.5in@}|@}}
+the parts are @code{|r|}, @code{c}, @code{c},
+and@tie{}@code{p@{1.5in@}|}.
+
+The @var{cols} argument overrides the @code{array} or @code{tabular}
+environment's intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn
+entry. To affect that area, this argument can contain vertical bars
+@code{|} indicating the placement of vertical rules, and @code{@@@{...@}}
+expressions. Thus if @var{cols} is @samp{|c|} then this multicolumn
+entry will be centered and a vertical rule will come in the intercolumn
+area before it and after it. This table details the exact behavior.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{|cc|c|c|@}
+ \multicolumn@{1@}@{r@}@{w@} % entry one
+ &\multicolumn@{1@}@{|r|@}@{x@} % entry two
+ &\multicolumn@{1@}@{|r@}@{y@} % entry three
+ &z % entry four
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule because
+the @code{\multicolumn} has the @var{cols} specifier @samp{r} with no
+initial vertical bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a
+vertical rule; although the first @var{cols} does not have an ending
+vertical bar, the second @var{cols} does have a starting one. Between
+entry two and entry three there is a single vertical rule; despite that
+the @var{cols} in both of the surrounding @code{multicolumn}'s call for
+a vertical rule, you only get one rule. Between entry three and entry
+four there is no vertical rule; the default calls for one but the
+@var{cols} in the entry three @code{\multicolumn} leaves it out, and
+that takes precedence. Finally, following entry four there is a
+vertical rule because of the default.
+
+The number of spanned columns @var{numcols} can be 1. Besides giving
+the ability to change the horizontal alignment, this also is useful to
+override for one row the @code{tabular} definition's default intercolumn
+area specification, including the placement of vertical rules.
+
+In the example below, in the @code{tabular} definition the first column
+is specified to default to left justified but in the first row the entry
+is centered with @code{\multicolumn@{1@}@{c@}@{\textsc@{Period@}@}}.
+Also in the first row, the second and third columns are spanned by a
+single entry with @code{\multicolumn@{2@}@{c@}@{\textsc@{Span@}@}},
+overriding the specification to center those two columns on the page
+range en-dash.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{l|r@@@{--@}l@}
+ \multicolumn@{1@}@{c@}@{\textsc@{Period@}@}
+ &multicolumn@{2@}@{c@}@{\textsc@{Span@}@} \\ \hline
+ Baroque &1600 &1760 \\
+ Classical &1730 &1820 \\
+ Romantic &1780 &1910 \\
+ Impressionistic &1875 &1925
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Although the @code{tabular} specification by default puts a vertical
+rule between the first and second columns, no such vertical rule appears
+in the first row here. That's because there is no vertical bar in the
+@var{cols} part of the first row's first @code{\multicolumn} command.
+
+
+@node \vline
+@subsection @code{\vline}
+
+@findex \vline
+Draw a vertical line in a @code{tabular} or @code{array} environment
+extending the full height and depth of an entry's row. Can also be
+used in an @@-expression, although its synonym vertical
+bar@tie{}@code{|} is more common. This command is rarely used in the
+body of a table; typically a table's vertical lines are specified in
+@code{tabular}'s @var{cols} argument and overridden as needed with
+@code{\multicolumn} (@pxref{tabular}).
+
+The example below illustrates some pitfalls. In the first row's second
+entry the @code{\hfill} moves the @code{\vline} to the left edge of the
+cell. But that is different than putting it halfway between the two
+columns, so between the first and second columns there are two vertical
+rules, with the one from the @code{@{c|cc@}} specifier coming before the
+one produced by the @code{\vline\hfill}. In contrast, the first row's
+third entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two
+columns. In the second row, the @code{ghi} is the widest entry in its
+column so in the @code{\vline\hfill} the @code{\hfill} has no effect and
+the vertical line in that entry appears immediately next to the
+@code{g}, with no whitespace.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{c|cc@}
+ x &\vline\hfill y &\multicolumn@{1@}@{|r@}@{z@} \\ % row 1
+ abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi % row 2
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \cline
+@subsection @code{\cline}
+
+@findex \cline
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\cline@{@var{i}-@var{j}@}
+@end example
+
+In an @code{array} or @code{tabular} environment, draw a horizontal rule
+beginning in column@tie{}@var{i} and ending in column@tie{}@var{j}. The
+dash, @code{-}, must appear in the mandatory argument. To span a single
+column use the number twice, as with @code{\cline@{2-2@}}.
+
+This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second
+rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the
+third and fourth columns. The two lines are side-by-side, at the same
+height.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{llrr@}
+ a &b &c &d \\ \cline@{1-1@} \cline@{3-4@}
+ e &f &g &h
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \hline
+@subsection @code{\hline}
+
+@findex \hline
+
+Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing @code{tabular} or
+@code{array} environment. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the
+top, bottom, and between the rows of a table.
+
+In this example the top of the table has two horizontal rules, one above
+the other, that span both columns. The bottom of the table has a single
+rule spanning both columns. Because of the @code{\hline}, the
+@code{tabular} second row's line ending double backslash@tie{}@code{\\}
+is required.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{ll@} \hline\hline
+ Baseball &Red Sox \\
+ Basketball &Celtics \\ \hline
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node thebibliography
+@section @code{thebibliography}
+
+@EnvIndex{thebibliography}
+@cindex bibliography, creating (manually)
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{thebibliography@}@{@var{widest-label}@}
+ \bibitem[@var{label}]@{@var{cite_key@}}
+ ...
+\end@{thebibliography@}
+@end example
+
+Produce a bibliography or reference list. There are two ways to produce
+bibliographic lists. This environment is suitable when you have only a
+few references and can maintain the list by hand. @xref{Using BibTeX}
+for a more sophisticated approach.
+
+This shows the environment with two entries.
+
+@example
+This work is based on \cite@{latexdps@}.
+Together they are \cite@{latexdps, texbook@}.
+ ...
+\begin@{thebibliography@}@{9@}
+\bibitem@{latexdps@}
+ Leslie Lamport.
+ \textit@{\LaTeX@{@}: a document preparation system@}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+\bibitem@{texbook@}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit@{The \TeX book@}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end@{thebibliography@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This styles the first reference as @samp{[1] Leslie ...}, and so that
+@code{\cite@{latexdps@}} produces the matching @samp{... based on [1]}.
+The second @code{\cite} produces @samp{[1, 2]}. You must compile the
+document twice to resolve these references.
+
+The mandatory argument @var{widest-label} is text that, when typeset, is
+as wide as the widest item label produced by the @code{\bibitem}
+commands. The tradition is to use @code{9} for bibliographies with less
+than 10 references, @code{99} for ones with less than 100, etc.
+
+The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as @samp{Bibliography}.
+To change it there are two cases. In the @file{book} and @file{report}
+classes, where the top level sectioning is @code{\chapter} and the
+default title is @samp{Bibliography}, that title is in the macro
+@code{\bibname}. For @file{article}, where the class's top level
+sectioning is @code{\section} and the default is @samp{References}, the
+title is in macro @code{\refname}. Change it by redefining the command,
+as with @code{\renewcommand@{\refname@}@{Cited references@}} after
+@code{\begin@{document@}}.
+
+@PkgIndex{babel}
+Language support packages such as @file{babel} will automatically
+redefine @code{\refname} or @code{\bibname} to fit the selected
+language.
+
+@menu
+* \bibitem:: Specify a bibliography item.
+* \cite:: Refer to a bibliography item.
+* \nocite:: Include an item in the bibliography.
+* Using BibTeX:: Automatic generation of bibliographies.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \bibitem
+@subsection @code{\bibitem}
+
+@findex \bibitem
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\bibitem@{@var{cite_key}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\bibitem[@var{label}]@{@var{cite_key}@}
+@end example
+
+Generate an entry labeled by @var{label}. The default is for @LaTeX{} to
+generates a number using the @code{enumi} counter. The @dfn{citation key}
+@cindex citation key
+@var{cite_key} is a string of
+letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but not comma).
+
+@xref{thebibliography} for an example.
+
+The optional @var{label} changes the default label from an integer to the
+given string. With this
+
+@example
+\begin@{thebibliography@}
+\bibitem[Lamport 1993]@{latexdps@}
+ Leslie Lamport.
+ \textit@{\LaTeX@{@}: a document preparation system@}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+\bibitem@{texbook@}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit@{The \TeX book@}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end@{thebibliography@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+the first entry will be styled as @samp{[Lamport 1993] Leslie ...} (The
+amount of horizontal space that @LaTeX{} leaves for the label depends on
+the @var{widest-label} argument of the @code{thebibliography}
+environment; see @ref{thebibliography}.) Similarly, @code{... based on
+\cite@{latexdps@}} will produce @samp{... based on [Lamport 1994]}.
+
+If you mix @code{\bibitem} entries having a @var{label} with those that
+do not then @LaTeX{} will number the unlabelled ones sequentially. In
+the example above the @code{texbook} entry will appear as @samp{[1]
+Donald ...}, despite that it is the second entry.
+
+If you use the same @var{cite_key} twice then you get @samp{LaTeX
+Warning: There were multiply-defined labels}.
+
+Under the hood, @LaTeX{} remembers the @var{cite_key} and @var{label}
+information because @code{\bibitem} writes it to the auxiliary file
+@file{@var{filename}.aux}. For instance, the above example causes
+@code{\bibcite@{latexdps@}@{Lamport, 1993@}} and
+@code{\bibcite@{texbook@}@{1@}} to appear in that file. The @file{.aux}
+file is read by the @code{\begin@{document@}} command and then the
+information is available for @code{\cite} commands. This explains why
+you need to run @LaTeX{} twice to resolve references: once to write it
+out and once to read it in.
+
+Because of this two-pass algorithm, when you add a @code{\bibitem} or
+change its @var{cite_key} you may get @samp{LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may
+have changed. Rerun to get cross-references right}. Fix it by
+recompiling.
+
+
+@node \cite
+@subsection @code{\cite}
+
+@findex \cite
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\cite@{@var{keys}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\cite[@var{subcite}]@{@var{keys}@}
+@end example
+
+Generate as output a citation to the references associated with
+@var{keys}. The mandatory @var{keys} is a citation key, or a
+comma-separated list of citation keys (@pxref{\bibitem}).
+
+This
+
+@example
+The ultimate source is \cite@{texbook@}.
+ ...
+\begin@{thebibliography@}
+\bibitem@{texbook@}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit@{The \TeX book@}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end@{thebibliography@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+produces output like @samp{... source is [1]}. (You can change the
+appearance of the citation with bibliography styles. More is in
+@ref{Using BibTeX}.)
+
+The optional argument @var{subcite} is appended to the citation. For
+example, @code{See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]@{texbook@}} might produce
+@samp{See 14.3 in [1, p.@tie{}314]}.
+
+In addition to what appears in the output, @code{\cite} writes
+information to the auxiliary file @file{@var{filename}.aux}. For
+instance, @code{\cite@{latexdps@}} writes @samp{\citation@{latexdps@}}
+to that file. This information is used by Bib@TeX{} to include in your
+reference list only those works that you have actually cited; see
+@ref{\nocite} also.
+
+If @var{keys} is not in your bibliography information then you get
+@samp{LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references}, and in the output
+the citation shows as a boldface question mark between square brackets.
+There are two possible causes. If you have mistyped something, as in
+@code{\cite@{texbok@}} then you need to correct the spelling. On the
+other hand, if you have just added or modified the bibliographic
+information and so changed the @file{.aux} file (@pxref{\bibitem}) then
+the fix may be to run @LaTeX{} again.
+
+
+@node \nocite
+@subsection @code{\nocite}
+
+@findex \nocite
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+@code{\nocite@{@var{keys}@}}
+@end example
+
+Produces no output but writes @var{keys} to the auxiliary file
+@file{@var{doc-filename}.aux}.
+
+The mandatory argument @var{keys} is a comma-separated list of one or
+more citation keys (@pxref{\bibitem}). This information is used by
+Bib@TeX{} to include these works in your reference list even though you
+have not cited them (@pxref{\cite}).
+
+
+@node Using BibTeX
+@subsection Using Bib@TeX{}
+
+@cindex using Bib@TeX{}
+@cindex bib@TeX{}, using
+@cindex bibliography, creating (automatically)
+@findex \bibliographystyle
+@findex \bibliography
+
+As described in @code{thebibliography} (@pxref{thebibliography}), a
+sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the
+Bib@TeX{} program. This is only an introduction; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
+
+With Bib@TeX{}, you don't use @code{thebibliography}
+(@pxref{thebibliography}). Instead, include these lines.
+
+@example
+\bibliographystyle@{@var{bibstyle}@}
+\bibliography@{@var{bibfile1}, @var{bibfile2}, ...@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The @var{bibstyle} refers to a file @file{@var{bibstyle}.bst}, which
+defines how your citations will look. The standard @var{bibstyle}'s
+distributed with Bib@TeX{} are:
+
+@table @code
+@item alpha
+Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication.
+The bibliographic items are sorted alphabetically.
+@item plain
+Labels are integers.
+Sort the bibliographic items alphabetically.
+@item unsrt
+Like @code{plain}, but entries are in order of citation.
+@item abbrv
+Like @code{plain}, but more compact labels.
+@end table
+
+@noindent Many, many other Bib@TeX{} style files exist,
+tailored to the demands of various publications. See CTAN's listing
+@url{http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib}.
+
+The @code{\bibliography} command is what actually produces the
+bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
+files named @file{@var{bibfile1}.bib}, @file{@var{bibfile2}.bib},
+@dots{} These contain your database in Bib@TeX{} format. This shows a
+typical couple of entries in that format.
+
+@example
+@@book@{texbook,
+ title = @{The @{@{\TeX@}@}book@},
+ author = @{D.E. Knuth@},
+ isbn = @{0201134489@},
+ series = @{Computers \& typesetting@},
+ year = @{1983@},
+ publisher = @{Addison-Wesley@}
+@}
+@@book@{sexbook,
+ author = @{W.H. Masters and V.E. Johnson@},
+ title = @{Human Sexual Response@},
+ year = @{1966@},
+ publisher = @{Bantam Books@}
+@}
+@end example
+
+Only the bibliographic entries referred to via @code{\cite} and
+@code{\nocite} will be listed in the document's bibliography. Thus you
+can keep all your sources together in one file, or a small number of
+files, and rely on Bib@TeX{} to include in this document only those that
+you used.
+
+
+@node theorem
+@section @code{theorem}
+
+@EnvIndex{theorem}
+@cindex theorems, typesetting
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{theorem@}
+ @var{theorem body}
+\end@{theorem@}
+@end example
+
+Produces @samp{Theorem @var{n}} in boldface followed by @var{theorem
+body} in italics. The numbering possibilities for @var{n} are described under
+@code{\newtheorem} (@pxref{\newtheorem}).
+
+@example
+\newtheorem@{lem@}@{Lemma@} % in preamble
+\newtheorem@{thm@}@{Theorem@}
+ ...
+\begin@{lem@} % in document body
+ text of lemma
+\end@{lem@}
+
+The next result follows immediately.
+\begin@{thm@}[Gauss] % put `Gauss' in parens after theorem head
+ text of theorem
+\end@{thm@}
+@end example
+
+@PkgIndex{amsmath}
+@PkgIndex{amsthm}
+Most new documents use the packages @code{amsthm} and @code{amsmath}
+from the American Mathematical Society. Among other things these
+packages include a large number of options for theorem environments,
+such as styling options.
+
+
+@node titlepage
+@section @code{titlepage}
+
+@EnvIndex{titlepage}
+@cindex making a title page
+@cindex title pages, creating
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{titlepage@}
+ ... text and spacing ...
+\end@{titlepage@}
+@end example
+
+Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading and
+with succeeding pages numbered starting with page one.
+
+In this example all formatting, including vertical spacing, is left to
+the author.
+
+@example
+\begin@{titlepage@}
+\vspace*@{\stretch@{1@}@}
+\begin@{center@}
+ @{\huge\bfseries Thesis \\[1ex]
+ title@} \\[6.5ex]
+ @{\large\bfseries Author name@} \\
+ \vspace@{4ex@}
+ Thesis submitted to \\[5pt]
+ \textit@{University name@} \\[2cm]
+ in partial fulfilment for the award of the degree of \\[2cm]
+ \textsc@{\Large Doctor of Philosophy@} \\[2ex]
+ \textsc@{\large Mathematics@} \\[12ex]
+ \vfill
+ Department of Mathematics \\
+ Address \\
+ \vfill
+ \today
+\end@{center@}
+\vspace@{\stretch@{2@}@}
+\end@{titlepage@}
+@end example
+
+To instead produce a standard title page without a @code{titlepage}
+environment, use @code{\maketitle} (@pxref{\maketitle}).
+
+
+@node verbatim
+@section @code{verbatim}
+
+@EnvIndex{verbatim}
+@cindex verbatim text
+@cindex simulating typed text
+@cindex typed text, simulating
+@cindex code, typesetting
+@cindex computer programs, typesetting
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{verbatim@}
+@var{literal-text}
+\end@{verbatim@}
+@end example
+
+A paragraph-making environment in which @LaTeX{} produces as output
+exactly what you type as input. For instance inside @var{literal-text}
+the backslash@tie{}@code{\} character does not start commands, it
+produces a printed @samp{\}, and carriage returns and blanks are taken
+literally. The output appears in a monospaced typewriter-like font
+(@code{\tt}).
+
+@example
+\begin@{verbatim@}
+Symbol swearing: %&$#?@!.
+\end@{verbatim@}
+@end example
+
+The only restriction on @code{literal-text} is that it cannot include
+the string @code{\end@{verbatim@}}.
+
+@PkgIndex{cprotect}
+You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros, for
+instance in the argument to a @code{\section}. This is not the same as
+commands being fragile (@pxref{\protect}), instead it just cannot appear
+there. (But the @code{cprotect} package can help with this.)
+
+@PkgIndex{listings}
+@PkgIndex{minted}
+One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code. There are
+packages that are an improvement the @code{verbatim} environment. For
+instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external
+files, or parts of those files. Such packages include @code{listings},
+and @code{minted}.
+
+@PkgIndex{fancyvrb}
+@PkgIndex{verbatimbox}
+A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments is
+@code{fancyvrb}. Another is @code{verbatimbox}.
+
+For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN.
+
+@menu
+* \verb:: The macro form of the @code{verbatim} environment.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \verb
+@subsection @code{\verb}
+
+@findex \verb
+@cindex verbatim text, inline
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\verb @var{char} @var{literal-text} @var{char}
+\verb* @var{char} @var{literal-text} @var{char}
+@end example
+
+Typeset @var{literal-text} as it is input, including special characters
+and spaces, using the typewriter (@code{\tt}) font.
+
+This example shows two different invocations of @code{\verb}.
+
+@example
+This is \verb!literally! the biggest pumpkin ever.
+And this is the best squash, \verb+literally!+
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The first @code{\verb} has its @var{literal-text} surrounded with
+exclamation point, @code{!}. The second instead uses plus, @code{+},
+because the exclamation point is part of @code{literal-text}.
+
+The single-character delimiter @var{char} surrounds
+@var{literal-text}@tie{}--- it must be the same character before and
+after. No spaces come between @code{\verb} or @code{\verb*} and
+@var{char}, or between @var{char} and @var{literal-text}, or between
+@var{literal-text} and the second occurrence of @var{char} (the synopsis
+shows a space only to distinguish one component from the other). The
+delimiter must not appear in @var{literal-text}. The @var{literal-text}
+cannot include a line break.
+
+@cindex visible space
+The @code{*}-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible
+space character.
+@tex
+(Namely, {\tt\char`\ }.)
+@end tex
+
+The output from this will include a character showing the spaces.
+
+@example
+The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
+@end example
+
+@PkgIndex{url}
+For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package @code{url}
+provides an option that is better than the @code{\verb} command, since
+it allows line breaks.
+
+@PkgIndex{listings}
+@PkgIndex{minted}
+For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
+@code{\verb}. One is @file{listings}, another is @file{minted}.
+
+@PkgIndex{cprotect}
+You cannot use @code{\verb} in the argument to a macro, for instance in
+the argument to a @code{\section}. It is not a question of @code{\verb}
+being fragile (@pxref{\protect}), instead it just cannot appear there.
+(But the @code{cprotect} package can help with this.)
+
+
+@node verse
+@section @code{verse}
+
+@EnvIndex{verse}
+@cindex poetry, an environment for
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{verse@}
+ @var{line1} \\
+ @var{line2} \\
+ ...
+\end@{verse@}
+@end example
+
+An environment for poetry.
+
+Here are two lines from Shakespeare's Romeo and Juliet.
+
+@example
+Then plainly know my heart's dear love is set \\
+On the fair daughter of rich Capulet.
+@end example
+
+@findex \\ @r{for @code{verse}}
+Separate the lines of each stanza with @code{\\}, and use one or more
+blank lines to separate the stanzas.
+
+@example
+\begin@{verse@}
+\makebox[\linewidth][c]@{\textit@{Shut Not Your Doors@} ---Walt Whitman@}
+ \\[1\baselineskip]
+Shut not your doors to me proud libraries, \\
+For that which was lacking on all your well-fill'd shelves, \\
+\qquad yet needed most, I bring, \\
+Forth from the war emerging, a book I have made, \\
+The words of my book nothing, the drift of it every thing, \\
+A book separate, not link'd with the rest nor felt by the intellect, \\
+But you ye untold latencies will thrill to every page.
+\end@{verse@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The output has margins indented on the left and the right, paragraphs
+are not indented, and the text is not right-justified.
+
+
+@node Line breaking
+@chapter Line breaking
+
+@cindex line breaking
+@cindex breaking lines
+
+The first thing @LaTeX{} does when processing ordinary text is to
+translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To
+produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines
+(and these lines must be broken into pages).
+
+@LaTeX{} usually does the line (and page) breaking in the text body for
+you but in some environments you manually force line breaks.
+
+A common workflow is to get a final version of the document content
+before taking a final pass through and considering line breaks (and page
+breaks). This differs from word processing, where you are formatting
+text as you input it. Putting these off until the end prevents a lot of
+fiddling with breaks that will change anyway.
+
+@menu
+* \\:: Start a new line.
+* \obeycr & \restorecr:: Make each input line start a new output line.
+* \newline:: Break the line
+* \- (hyphenation):: Insert explicit hyphenation.
+* \discretionary:: Explicit control of the hyphen character.
+* \fussy & \sloppy:: Be more or less particular with line breaking.
+* \hyphenation:: Tell @LaTeX{} how to hyphenate a word.
+* \linebreak & \nolinebreak:: Forcing & avoiding line breaks.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \\
+@section @code{\\}
+
+@findex \\ @r{force line break}
+@cindex new line, starting
+@cindex line break, forcing
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\\
+\\[@var{morespace}]
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or one of:
+
+@example
+\\*
+\\*[@var{morespace}]
+@end example
+
+End the current line. The optional argument @var{morespace} specifies
+extra vertical space to be inserted before the next line. This is a
+rubber length (@pxref{Lengths}) and can be negative. The text before
+the line break is set at its normal length, that is, it is not stretched
+to fill out the line width. This command is fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+The starred form, @code{\\*}, tells @LaTeX{} not to start a new page
+between the two lines, by issuing a @code{\nobreak}.
+
+@example
+\title@{My story: \\[0.25in]
+ a tale of woe@}
+@end example
+
+Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in @LaTeX{}. In
+particular, don't start new paragraphs with @code{\\}. Instead leave a
+blank line between the two paragraphs. And don't put in a sequence of
+@code{\\}'s to make vertical space. Instead use
+@code{\vspace@{@var{length}@}}, or
+@code{\leavevmode\vspace@{@var{length}@}}, or
+@code{\vspace*@{@var{length}@}} if you want the space to not be thrown
+out at the top of a new page (@pxref{\vspace}).
+
+The @code{\\} command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text
+such as in a @code{tabular} or @code{array} environment or in an
+equation environment.
+
+The @code{\\} command is a synonym for @code{\newline}
+(@pxref{\newline}) under ordinary circumstances (an example of an
+exception is the @code{p@{...@}} column in a @code{tabular}
+environment; @pxref{tabular}).
+
+@c credit: David Carlisle https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/82666
+The @code{\\} command is a macro, and its definition changes by context
+so that its definition in normal text, a @code{center} environment, a
+@code{flushleft} environment, and a @code{tabular} are all different.
+In normal text when it forces a linebreak it is essentially a shorthand
+for @code{\newline}. It does not end horizontal mode or end the
+paragraph, it just inserts some glue and penalties so that when the
+paragraph does end a linebreak will occur at that point, with the short
+line padded with white space.
+
+You get @samp{LaTeX Error: There's no line here to end} if you use
+@code{\\} to ask for a new line, rather than to end the current line.
+An example is if you have @code{\begin@{document@}\\} or, more likely,
+something like this.
+
+@example
+\begin@{center@}
+ \begin@{minipage@}@{0.5\textwidth@}
+ \\
+ In that vertical space put your mark.
+ \end@{minipage@}
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Fix it by replacing the double backslash with something like
+@code{\vspace@{\baselineskip@}}.
+
+
+@node \obeycr & \restorecr
+@section @code{\obeycr} & @code{\restorecr}
+
+@findex \obeycr
+@findex \restorecr
+@cindex new line, output as input
+
+The @code{\obeycr} command makes a return in the input file (@samp{^^M},
+internally) the same as @code{\\}, followed by @code{\relax}. So each
+new line in the input will also be a new line in the output. The
+@code{\restorecr} command restores normal line-breaking behavior.
+
+This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code.
+@xref{verbatim} instead.
+
+With @LaTeX{}'s usual defaults, this
+
+@example
+aaa
+bbb
+
+\obeycr
+ccc
+ddd
+ eee
+
+\restorecr
+fff
+ggg
+
+hhh
+iii
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+produces output like this.
+
+@example
+ aaa bbb
+ ccc
+ddd
+eee
+
+fff ggg
+ hhh iii
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The indents are paragraph indents.
+
+
+@node \newline
+@section @code{\newline}
+
+@findex \newline
+@cindex new line, starting (paragraph mode)
+
+In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify
+the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph mode
+(@pxref{Modes}), the @code{\newline} command is equivalent to
+double-backslash (@pxref{\\}). This command is fragile
+(@pxref{\protect}).
+
+However, the two commands are different inside a @code{tabular} or
+@code{array} environment. In a column with a specifier producing a
+paragraph box such as typically @code{p@{...@}}, @code{\newline} will
+insert a line end inside of the column; that is, it does not break the
+entire tabular row. To break the entire row use @code{\\} or its
+equivalent @code{\tabularnewline}.
+
+This will print @samp{Name:} and @samp{Address:} as two lines in a
+single cell of the table.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{p@{1in@}@{\hspace@{2in@}@}p@{1in@}@}
+ Name: \newline Address: &Date: \\ \hline
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The @samp{Date:} will be baseline-aligned with @samp{Name:}.
+
+
+@node \- (hyphenation)
+@section @code{\-} (discretionary hyphen)
+
+@findex \- @r{(hyphenation)}
+@cindex hyphenation, forcing
+
+Tell @LaTeX{} that it may hyphenate the word at that point. When you
+insert @code{\-} commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
+those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that @LaTeX{}
+might otherwise have chosen. This command is robust (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+@LaTeX{} is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct
+hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The
+@code{\-} command is for exceptional cases.
+
+For example, @LaTeX{} does not ordinarily hyphenate words containing a
+hyphen. Below, the long and hyphenated word means @LaTeX{} has to put
+in unacceptably large spaces to set the narrow column.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{rp@{1.75in@}@}
+ Isaac Asimov &The strain of
+ anti-intellectualism
+ % an\-ti-in\-tel\-lec\-tu\-al\-ism
+ has been a constant thread winding its way through our
+ political and cultural life, nurtured by
+ the false notion that democracy means that
+ `my ignorance is just as good as your knowledge'.
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Commenting out the third line and uncommenting the fourth makes a much
+better fit.
+
+The @code{\-} command only allows @LaTeX{} to break there, it does not
+require that it break there. You can insist on a split with something
+like @code{Hef-\linebreak feron}. Of course, if you later change the
+text then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
+care.
+
+
+@node \discretionary
+@section @code{\discretionary} (generalized hyphenation point)
+@cindex hyphenation, discretionary
+@cindex discretionary hyphenation
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\discretionary@{@var{pre-break}@}@{@var{post-break}@}@{@var{no-break}@}
+@end example
+
+Handle word changes around hyphens. This command is not often used in
+@LaTeX{} documents.
+
+If a line break occurs at the point where @code{\discretionary} appears
+then @TeX{} puts @var{pre-break} at the end of the current line and puts
+@var{post-break} at the start of the next line. If there is no line
+break here then @TeX{} puts @var{no-break}
+
+In @samp{difficult} the three letters @code{ffi} form a ligature. But
+@TeX{} can nonetheless break between the two f's with this.
+
+@example
+di\discretionary@{f-@}@{fi@}@{ffi@}cult
+@end example
+
+Note that users do not have to do this. It is typically handled
+automatically by @TeX{}'s hyphenation algorithm.
+
+
+@node \fussy & \sloppy
+@section @code{\fussy} & @code{\sloppy}
+
+@findex \fussy
+@findex \sloppy
+@cindex line breaks, changing
+
+Declarations to make @TeX{} more picky or less picky about line
+breaking. Declaring @code{\fussy} usually avoids too much space between
+words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. Conversely,
+@code{\sloppy} avoids overfull boxes while suffering loose interword
+spacing.
+
+The default is @code{\fussy}. Line breaking in a paragraph is
+controlled by whichever declaration is current at the blank line, or
+@code{\par}, or displayed equation ending that paragraph. So to affect
+the line breaks, include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of
+the command.
+
+@menu
+* sloppypar:: Environment version of \sloppy command.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node sloppypar
+@subsection @code{sloppypar}
+
+@findex sloppypar
+@cindex sloppypar environment
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{sloppypar@}
+ ... paragraphs ...
+\end@{sloppypar@}
+@end example
+
+Typeset the paragraphs with @code{\sloppy} in effect (@pxref{\fussy &
+\sloppy}). Use this to locally adjust line breaking, to avoid
+@samp{Overfull box} or @samp{Underfull box} errors.
+
+The example is simple.
+
+@example
+\begin@{sloppypar@}
+ Her plan for the morning thus settled, she sat quietly down to her
+ book after breakfast, resolving to remain in the same place and the
+ same employment till the clock struck one; and from habitude very
+ little incommoded by the remarks and ejaculations of Mrs.\ Allen,
+ whose vacancy of mind and incapacity for thinking were such, that
+ as she never talked a great deal, so she could never be entirely
+ silent; and, therefore, while she sat at her work, if she lost her
+ needle or broke her thread, if she heard a carriage in the street,
+ or saw a speck upon her gown, she must observe it aloud, whether
+ there were anyone at leisure to answer her or not.
+\end@{sloppypar@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \hyphenation
+@section @code{\hyphenation}
+
+@findex \hyphenation
+@cindex hyphenation, defining
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\hyphenation@{@var{word1} ...@}
+@end example
+
+Declares allowed hyphenation points within the words in the list. The
+words in that list are separated by spaces. Show permitted points for
+hyphenation with a dash character, @code{-}.
+
+Here is an example:
+
+@example
+\hyphenation@{hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness@}
+@end example
+
+Use lowercase letters. @TeX{} will only hyphenate if the word matches
+exactly. Multiple @code{\hyphenation} commands accumulate.
+
+
+@node \linebreak & \nolinebreak
+@section @code{\linebreak} & @code{\nolinebreak}
+
+@findex \linebreak
+@findex \nolinebreak
+@cindex line breaks, forcing
+@cindex line breaks, preventing
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+@example
+\linebreak
+\linebreak[@var{zero-to-four}]
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or one of these.
+
+@example
+\nolinebreak
+\nolinebreak[@var{zero-to-four}]
+@end example
+
+Encourage or discourage a line break. The optional @var{zero-to-four}
+is an integer that allows you to soften the instruction. The default is
+4, so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force
+or prevent the break. But for instance, @code{\nolinebreak[1]} is a
+suggestion that another place may be better. The higher the number, the
+more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile
+(@pxref{\protect}).
+
+Here we tell @LaTeX{} that a good place to put a linebreak is after the
+standard legal text.
+
+@example
+\boilerplatelegal@{@} \linebreak[2]
+We especially encourage applications from members of traditionally
+underrepresented groups.
+@end example
+
+When you issue @code{\linebreak}, the spaces in the line are stretched
+out so that it extends to the right margin. @xref{\\}
+and@tie{}@ref{\newline} to have the spaces not stretched out.
+
+
+
+@node Page breaking
+@chapter Page breaking
+
+@cindex page breaking
+@cindex breaking pages
+
+Ordinarily @LaTeX{} automatically takes care of breaking output into
+pages with its usual aplomb. But if you are writing commands, or
+tweaking the final version of a document, then you may need to
+understand how to influence its actions.
+
+@c credit: H Vogt https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/115563
+@LaTeX{}'s algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
+than just waiting until there is enough material to fill a page and
+outputting the result. Instead, @LaTeX{} typesets more material than
+would fit on the page and then chooses a break that is optimal in some
+way (it has the smallest badness). An example of the advantage of this
+approach is that if the page has some vertical space that can be
+stretched or shrunk, such as with rubber lengths between paragraphs,
+then @LaTeX{} can use that to avoid widow lines (where a new page starts
+with the last line of a paragraph; @LaTeX{} can squeeze the extra line
+onto the first page) and orphans (where the first line of paragraph is
+at the end of a page; @LaTeX{} can stretch the material of the first
+page so the extra line falls on the second page). Another example is
+where @LaTeX{} uses available vertical shrinkage to fit on a page not
+just the header for a new section but also the first two lines of that
+section.
+
+But @LaTeX{} does not optimize over the entire document's set of page
+breaks. So it can happen that the first page break is great but the
+second one is lousy; to break the current page @LaTeX{} doesn't look as
+far ahead as the next page break. So occasionally you may want to
+influence page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.
+
+@xref{Layout} for more material that is relevant to page breaking.
+
+@menu
+* \clearpage & \cleardoublepage:: Start a new page; eject floats.
+* \newpage:: Start a new page.
+* \enlargethispage:: Enlarge the current page a bit.
+* \pagebreak & \nopagebreak:: Forcing & avoiding page breaks.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \clearpage & \cleardoublepage
+@section @code{\clearpage} & @code{\cleardoublepage}
+
+@findex \clearpage
+@cindex flushing floats and starting a page
+@cindex starting a new page and clearing floats
+@findex \cleardoublepage
+@cindex starting on a right-hand page
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\clearpage
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\cleardoublepage
+@end example
+
+End the current page and output all of the pending floating figures and
+tables (@pxref{Floats}). If there are too many floats to fit on the
+page then @LaTeX{} will put in extra pages containing only floats. In
+two-sided printing, @code{\cleardoublepage} also makes the next page of
+content a right-hand page, an odd-numbered page, if necessary inserting
+a blank page. The @code{\clearpage} command is robust while
+@code{\cleardoublepage} is fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+@LaTeX{}'s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+
+@c credit: https://www.tex.ac.uk/FAQ-reallyblank.html
+The @code{\cleardoublepage} command will put in a blank page, but it
+will have the running headers and footers. To get a really blank
+page, use this command.
+
+@example
+\let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage
+\newcommand@{\clearemptydoublepage@}@{%
+ \clearpage
+ @{\pagestyle@{empty@}\origdoublepage@}%
+@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+If you want @LaTeX{}'s standard @code{\chapter} command to do this then
+add the line @code{\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage}.
+
+The command @code{\newpage} (@pxref{\newpage}) also ends the current
+page, but without clearing pending floats. And, if @LaTeX{} is in
+two-column mode then @code{\newpage} ends the current column while
+@code{\clearpage} and @code{\cleardoublepage} end the current page.
+
+
+
+@node \newpage
+@section @code{\newpage}
+
+@findex \newpage
+@cindex new page, starting
+@cindex starting a new page
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\newpage
+@end example
+
+End the current page. This command is robust (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+@LaTeX{}'s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+
+While the commands @code{\clearpage} and @code{\cleardoublepage} also
+end the current page, in addition they clear pending floats
+(@pxref{\clearpage & \cleardoublepage}). And, if @LaTeX{} is in
+two-column mode then @code{\clearpage} and @code{\cleardoublepage} end
+the current page, possibly leaving an empty column, while
+@code{\newpage} only ends the current column.
+
+In contrast with @code{\pagebreak} (@pxref{\pagebreak & \nopagebreak}),
+the @code{\newpage} command will cause the new page to start right where
+requested. This
+
+@example
+Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+continent,
+\newpage
+\noindent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the
+proposition that all men are created equal.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+makes a new page start after @samp{continent,} and the cut-off line is
+not right justified. In addition, @code{\newpage} does not vertically
+stretch out the page, as @code{\pagebreak} does.
+
+
+@node \enlargethispage
+@section @code{\enlargethispage}
+
+@findex \enlargethispage
+@cindex enlarge current page
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\enlargethispage@{size@}
+\enlargethispage*@{size@}
+@end example
+
+Enlarge the @code{\textheight} for the current page. The required
+argument @var{size} must be a rigid length (@pxref{Lengths}). It may be
+positive or negative. This command is fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+A common strategy is to wait until you have the final text of a
+document, and then pass through it tweaking line and page breaks. This
+command allows you some page size leeway.
+
+This will allow one extra line on the current page.
+
+@example
+\enlargethispage@{\baselineskip@}
+@end example
+
+The starred form @code{\enlargesthispage*} tries to squeeze the material
+together on the page as much as possible, for the common use case of
+getting one more line on the page. This is often used together with an
+explicit @code{\pagebreak}.
+
+
+@node \pagebreak & \nopagebreak
+@section @code{\pagebreak} & @code{\nopagebreak}
+
+@findex \pagebreak
+@findex \nopagebreak
+@cindex page break, forcing
+@cindex page break, preventing
+
+Synopses:
+
+@example
+\pagebreak
+\pagebreak[@var{zero-to-four}]
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\nopagebreak
+\nopagebreak[@var{zero-to-four}]
+@end example
+
+Encourage or discourage a page break. The optional @var{zero-to-four}
+is an integer that allows you to soften the request. The default is 4,
+so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
+prevent the break. But for instance @code{\nopagebreak[1]} suggests to
+@LaTeX{} that another spot might be preferable. The higher the number,
+the more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile
+(@pxref{\protect}).
+
+@LaTeX{}'s page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+
+If you use these inside a paragraph, they apply to the point following
+the line in which they appear. So this
+
+@example
+Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+continent,
+\pagebreak
+a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition
+that all men are created equal.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+does not give a page break at @samp{continent,} but instead at
+@samp{nation,} since that is where @LaTeX{} breaks that line. In
+addition, with @code{\pagebreak} the vertical space on the page is
+stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom
+margin. This can look strange, and if @code{\flushbottom} is in effect
+this can cause you to get @samp{Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active}. @xref{\newpage} for a command that
+does not have these effects.
+
+
+@node Footnotes
+@chapter Footnotes
+
+@cindex footnotes, creating
+
+Place a footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
+
+@example
+No@"{e}l Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
+to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making
+love.\footnote@{%
+ I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.@}
+@end example
+
+You can put multiple footnotes on a page. If the footnote text becomes
+too long then it will flow to the next page.
+
+You can also produce footnotes by combining the @code{\footnotemark} and
+the @code{\footnotetext} commands, which is useful in special
+circumstances.
+
+To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
+include a bibliographic style with that behavior (@pxref{Using BibTeX}).
+
+@menu
+* \footnote:: Insert a footnote.
+* \footnotemark:: Insert footnote mark only.
+* \footnotetext:: Insert footnote text only.
+* Footnotes in section headings:: Chapter or section titles.
+* Footnotes in a table:: Table footnotes.
+* Footnotes of footnotes:: Multiple classes of footnotes.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \footnote
+@section @code{\footnote}
+
+@findex \footnote
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\footnote@{@var{text}@}
+\footnote[@var{number}]@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Place a footnote @var{text} at the bottom of the current page.
+
+@example
+There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's
+\textit@{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire@}.\footnote@{%
+ After reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained,
+ ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method
+ of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed
+ at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''@}
+@end example
+
+The optional argument @var{number} allows you to specify the number of
+the footnote. If you use this then @LaTeX{} does not increment the
+@code{footnote} counter.
+
+@cindex footnotes, symbols instead of numbers
+@findex \fnsymbol@r{, and footnotes}
+@findex \@@fnsymbol
+By default, @LaTeX{} uses arabic numbers as footnote markers. Change
+this with something like
+@code{\renewcommand@{\thefootnote@}@{\fnsymbol@{footnote@}@}}, which
+uses a sequence of symbols (@pxref{\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
+\fnsymbol}). To make this change global put that in the preamble. If
+you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
+@code{\setcounter@{footnote@}@{0@}}.
+
+@LaTeX{} determines the spacing of footnotes with two parameters.
+
+@cindex footnote parameters
+@cindex parameters, for footnotes
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \footnoterule
+@anchor{footnote footnoterule}
+Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's
+footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document classes (except
+@code{slides}, where it does not appear) is: vertical thickness of
+@code{0.4pt}, and horizontal size of @code{0.4\columnwidth} long.
+Change the rule with something like this.
+
+@c Credit egreg: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/21917
+@example
+\renewcommand@{\footnoterule@}@{% Kerns avoid vertical space
+ \kern -3pt % This -3 is negative
+ \hrule width \textwidth height 1pt % of the sum of this 1
+ \kern 2pt@} % and this 2
+@end example
+
+@item \footnotesep
+@anchor{footnote footnotesep}
+The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
+(@pxref{\strut}). By default, this is set to the normal strut for
+@code{\footnotesize} fonts (@pxref{Font sizes}), therefore there is no
+extra space between footnotes. This is @samp{6.65pt} for @samp{10pt},
+@samp{7.7pt} for @samp{11pt}, and @samp{8.4pt} for @samp{12pt}. Change
+it as with @code{\setlength@{\footnotesep@}@{11pt@}}.
+
+@end ftable
+
+The @code{\footnote} command is fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+@LaTeX{}'s default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
+@code{\footnote}; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
+sectioning command such as @code{\chapter} (it can only be used in outer
+paragraph mode; @pxref{Modes}). There are some workarounds; see
+following sections.
+
+@cindex Footnotes, in a minipage
+@cindex mpfootnote counter
+In a @code{minipage} environment the @code{\footnote} command uses the
+@code{mpfootnote} counter instead of the @code{footnote} counter, so
+they are numbered independently. They are shown at the bottom of the
+environment, not at the bottom of the page. And by default they are
+shown alphabetically. @xref{minipage} and @ref{Footnotes in a table}.
+
+
+@node \footnotemark
+@section @code{\footnotemark}
+
+@findex \footnotemark
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\footnotemark
+\footnotemark[@var{number}]
+@end example
+
+Put the current footnote mark in the text. To specify associated text
+for the footnote see@tie{}@ref{\footnotetext}. The optional argument
+@var{number} causes the command to use that number to determine the
+footnote mark. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode
+(@pxref{Modes}).
+
+If you use @code{\footnotemark} without the optional argument then it
+increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional @var{number}
+then it does not. The next example produces several consecutive footnote
+markers referring to the same footnote.
+
+@example
+The first theorem\footnote@{Due to Gauss.@}
+and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value@{footnote@}]
+and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value@{footnote@}]
+@end example
+
+If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value of the
+common mark. This example gives the same institutional affiliation to
+both the first and third authors (@code{\thanks} is a version of
+@code{footnote}), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+
+@example
+\title@{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem@}
+\author@{J Moriarty\thanks@{University of Leeds@}
+ \and A C Doyle\thanks@{Durham University@}
+ \and S Holmes\footnotemark[1]@}
+\begin@{document@}
+\maketitle
+@end example
+
+This uses a counter to remember the footnote number. The third sentence
+is followed by the same footnote marker as the first.
+
+@example
+\newcounter@{footnoteValueSaver@}
+All babies are illogical.\footnote@{%
+ Lewis Carroll.@}\setcounter@{footnoteValueSaver@}@{\value@{footnote@}@}
+Nobody is despised who can manage a crocodile.\footnote@{%
+ Captain Hook.@}
+Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value@{footnoteValueSaver@}]
+Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby.
+@end example
+
+@PkgIndex{cleveref}
+@PkgIndex{hyperref}
+This example accomplishes the same by using the package @file{cleveref}.
+
+@c from SE user Jake http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/10116/339
+@example
+\usepackage@{cleveref@}[2012/02/15] % in preamble
+\crefformat@{footnote@}@{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3@}
+...
+The theorem is from Evers.\footnote@{\label@{fn:TE@}Tinker, Evers, 1994.@}
+The corollary is from Chance.\footnote@{Evers, Chance, 1990.@}
+But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref@{fn:TE@}
+@end example
+
+@PkgIndex{hyperref}
+It will work with the package @file{hyperref}.
+
+
+@node \footnotetext
+@section @code{\footnotetext}
+
+@findex \footnotetext
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\footnotetext@{@var{text}@}
+\footnotetext[@var{number}]@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Place @var{text} at the bottom of the page as a footnote. It pairs with
+@code{\footnotemark} (@pxref{\footnotemark}) and can come anywhere after
+that command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (@pxref{Modes}).
+The optional argument @var{number} changes the number of the footnote
+mark.
+
+@xref{\footnotemark} and@tie{}@ref{Footnotes in a table} for usage
+examples.
+
+
+@node Footnotes in section headings
+@section Footnotes in section headings
+
+@cindex footnote, in section headings
+@cindex table of contents, avoiding footnotes
+
+Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
+
+@example
+\section@{Full sets\protect\footnote@{This material due to ...@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
+section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
+contents, where it is not likely to be desired. The simplest way
+to have it not appear on the table of contents is to use the optional
+argument to @code{\section}
+
+@example
+\section[Please]@{Please\footnote@{%
+ Don't footnote in chapter and section headers!@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+No @code{\protect} is needed in front of @code{\footnote} here because
+what gets moved to the table of contents is the optional argument.
+
+
+@node Footnotes in a table
+@section Footnotes in a table
+
+@cindex footnote, in a table
+
+Inside a @code{tabular} or @code{array} environment the @code{\footnote}
+command does not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but
+the footnote text does not appear. The solution is to use a
+@code{minipage} environment as here (@pxref{minipage}).
+
+@example
+\begin@{center@}
+ \begin@{minipage@}@{\textwidth@} \centering
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{l|l@}
+ \textsc@{Ship@} &\textsc@{Book@} \\ \hline
+ \textit@{HMS Sophie@} &Master and Commander \\
+ \textit@{HMS Polychrest@} &Post Captain \\
+ \textit@{HMS Lively@} &Post Captain \\
+ \textit@{HMS Surprise@} &A number of books\footnote@{%
+ Starting with HMS Surprise.@}
+ \end@{tabular@}
+ \end@{minipage@}
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+Inside a @code{minipage}, footnote marks are lowercase letters. Change
+that with something like
+@code{\renewcommand@{\thempfootnote@}@{\arabic@{mpfootnote@}@}}
+(@pxref{\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol}).
+
+The footnotes in the prior example appear at the bottom of the
+@code{minipage}. To have them appear at the bottom of the main page, as
+part of the regular footnote sequence, use the @code{\footnotemark} and
+@code{\footnotetext} pair and make a new counter.
+
+@example
+\newcounter@{mpFootnoteValueSaver@}
+\begin@{center@}
+ \begin@{minipage@}@{\textwidth@}
+ \setcounter@{mpFootnoteValueSaver@}@{\value@{footnote@}@} \centering
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{l|l@}
+ \textsc@{Woman@} &\textsc@{Relationship@} \\ \hline
+ Mona &Attached\footnotemark \\
+ Diana Villiers &Eventual wife \\
+ Christine Hatherleigh Wood &Fiance\footnotemark
+ \end@{tabular@}
+ \end@{minipage@}% percent sign keeps footnote text close to minipage
+ \stepcounter@{mpFootnoteValueSaver@}%
+ \footnotetext[\value@{mpFootnoteValueSaver@}]@{%
+ Little is known other than her death.@}%
+ \stepcounter@{mpFootnoteValueSaver@}%
+ \footnotetext[\value@{mpFootnoteValueSaver@}]@{%
+ Relationship is unresolved in XXI.@}
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+For a floating @code{table} environment (@pxref{table}), use the
+@file{tablefootnote} package.
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{tablefootnote@} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin@{table@}
+ \centering
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{l|l@}
+ \textsc@{Date@} &\textsc@{Campaign@} \\ \hline
+ 1862 &Fort Donelson \\
+ 1863 &Vicksburg \\
+ 1865 &Army of Northern Virginia\tablefootnote@{%
+ Ending the war.@}
+ \end@{tabular@}
+ \caption@{Forces captured by US Grant@}
+\end@{table@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The footnote appears at the page bottom and is numbered in sequence with
+other footnotes.
+
+
+@node Footnotes of footnotes
+@section Footnotes of footnotes
+
+@cindex footnote, of a footnote
+
+@PkgIndex{bigfoot}
+Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
+footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package
+@file{bigfoot} extends @LaTeX{}'s default footnote mechanism in many
+ways, including allow these two, as in this example.
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{bigfoot@} % in preamble
+\DeclareNewFootnote@{Default@}
+\DeclareNewFootnote@{from@}[alph] % create class \footnotefrom@{@}
+ ...
+The third theorem is a partial converse of the
+second.\footnotefrom@{%
+ First noted in Wilson.\footnote@{Second edition only.@}@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node Definitions
+@chapter Definitions
+
+@cindex definitions
+
+@LaTeX{} has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
+
+@menu
+* \newcommand & \renewcommand:: (Re)define a new command.
+* \providecommand:: Define a new command, if name not used.
+* \makeatletter & \makeatother:: Change the status of the at-sign character.
+* \@@ifstar:: Define your own commands with *-variants.
+* \newcounter:: Define a new counter.
+* \newlength:: Define a new length.
+* \newsavebox:: Define a new box.
+* \newenvironment & \renewenvironment:: Define a new environment.
+* \newtheorem:: Define a new theorem-like environment.
+* \newfont:: Define a new font name.
+* \protect:: Using tricky commands.
+* \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend:: Discard extra spaces.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \newcommand & \renewcommand
+@section @code{\newcommand} & @code{\renewcommand}
+
+@findex \newcommand
+@cindex commands, defining new ones
+@cindex commands, redefining
+@cindex defining a new command
+@cindex new commands, defining
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\@var{cmd}@}@{@var{defn}@}
+\newcommand@{\@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{defn}@}
+\newcommand@{\@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
+\newcommand*@{\@var{cmd}@}@{@var{defn}@}
+\newcommand*@{\@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{defn}@}
+\newcommand*@{\@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or one of these.
+
+@example
+\renewcommand@{\@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{defn}@}
+\renewcommand@{\@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{defn}@}
+\renewcommand@{\@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
+\renewcommand*@{\@var{cmd}@}@{@var{defn}@}
+\renewcommand*@{\@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{defn}@}
+\renewcommand*@{\@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
+@end example
+
+Define or redefine a command. See also the discussion of
+@code{\DeclareRobustCommand} in @ref{Class and package commands}.
+@cindex starred form, defining new commands
+@cindex *-form, defining new commands
+The starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain
+multiple paragraphs of text (in plain @TeX{} terms that it not be
+@code{\long}).
+
+These are the parameters:
+
+@table @var
+@item cmd
+
+Required; the command name. It must begin with a backslash, @code{\},
+and must not begin with the four letter string @code{\end}. For
+@code{\newcommand}, it must not be already defined. For
+@code{\renewcommand}, this name must already be defined.
+
+@item nargs
+Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of arguments
+that the command takes, including any optional argument. Omitting this
+argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that the command has no
+arguments. If you redefine a command, the new version can have a
+different number of arguments than the old version.
+
+@item optargdefault
+Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
+@code{\@var{cmd}} is optional, with default value @var{optargdefault}
+(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then
+@code{\@var{cmd}} does not take an optional argument.
+
+@cindex positional parameter
+That is, if @code{\@var{cmd}} is used with square brackets, as in
+@code{\@var{cmd}[@var{optval}]@{...@}...}, then within @var{defn} the
+parameter@tie{}@code{#1} is set to the value of @var{optval}. On the
+other hand, if @code{\@var{cmd}} is called without the square brackets
+then within @var{defn} the parameter @code{#1} is set to the value of
+@var{optargdefault}. In either case, the required arguments start with
+@code{#2}.
+
+Omitting @code{[@var{optargdefault}]} is different from having the
+square brackets with no contents, as in @code{[]}. The former sets
+@code{#1} to the value of @var{optargdefault}; the latter sets @code{#1}
+to the empty string.
+
+@item defn
+Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of
+@code{\@var{cmd}}. The parameters @code{#1}, @code{#2},
+... @code{#@var{nargs}} are replaced by the values that you supply when
+you call the command (or by the default value if there is an optional
+argument and you don't exercise the option).
+
+@end table
+
+@TeX{} ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
+sequence, as in @samp{\cmd }. If you actually want a space there, one
+solution is to type @code{@{@}} after the command (@samp{\cmd@{@} }, and
+another solution is to use an explicit control space (@samp{\cmd\ }).
+
+A simple example of defining a new command:
+@code{\newcommand@{\RS@}@{Robin Smith@}} results in @code{\RS} being
+replaced by the longer text. Redefining an existing command is similar:
+@code{\renewcommand@{\qedsymbol@}@{@{\small QED@}@}}.
+
+If you try to define a command and the name has already been used then
+you get something like @samp{LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual}. If you try
+to redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
+something like @samp{LaTeX Error: \hank undefined}.
+
+Here the first command definition has no arguments, and the second has
+one required argument.
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\student@}@{Ms~O'Leary@}
+\newcommand@{\defref@}[1]@{Definition~\ref@{#1@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Use the first as in @code{I highly recommend \student@{@} to you}. The
+second has a variable, so that @code{\defref@{def:basis@}} expands to
+@code{Definition~\ref@{def:basis@}}, which ultimately expands to
+something like @samp{Definition~3.14}.
+
+Similarly, but with two required arguments:
+@code{\newcommand@{\nbym@}[2]@{$#1 \times #2$@}} is invoked as
+@code{\nbym@{2@}@{k@}}.
+
+This example has an optional argument.
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\salutation@}[1][Sir or Madam]@{Dear #1:@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Then @code{\salutation} gives @samp{Dear Sir or Madam:} while
+@code{\salutation[John]} gives @samp{Dear John:}. And
+@code{\salutation[]} gives @samp{Dear :}.
+
+This example has an optional argument and two required arguments.
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\lawyers@}[3][company]@{#2, #3, and~#1@}
+I employ \lawyers[Howe]@{Dewey@}@{Cheatem@}.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The output is @samp{I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe}. The optional
+argument, the @code{Howe}, is associated with @code{#1}, while
+@code{Dewey} and @code{Cheatem} are associated with @code{#2}
+and@tie{}@code{#3}. Because of the optional argument,
+@code{\lawyers@{Dewey@}@{Cheatem@}} will give the output @samp{I employ
+Dewey, Cheatem, and company}.
+
+The braces around @var{defn} do not define a group, that is, they do not
+delimit the scope of the result of expanding @var{defn}. For example,
+with @code{\newcommand@{\shipname@}[1]@{\it #1@}}, in this sentence,
+
+@example
+The \shipname@{Monitor@} met the \shipname@{Merrimac@}.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+the words @samp{met the} would incorrectly be in italics. The solution
+is to put another pair of braces inside the definition:
+@code{\newcommand@{\shipname@}[1]@{@{\it #1@}@}}.
+
+
+@node \providecommand
+@section @code{\providecommand}
+
+@findex \providecommand
+@cindex commands, defining new ones
+@cindex defining a new command
+@cindex new commands, defining
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+@example
+\providecommand@{@var{cmd}@}@{@var{defn}@}
+\providecommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{defn}@}
+\providecommand@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
+\providecommand*@{@var{cmd}@}@{@var{defn}@}
+\providecommand*@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{defn}@}
+\providecommand*@{@var{cmd}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{defn}@}
+@end example
+
+Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
+If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
+as @code{\newcommand}. If a command of this name already exists then
+this definition does nothing. This is particularly useful in a file
+that may be loaded more than once, such as a style file.
+@xref{\newcommand & \renewcommand} for the description of the arguments.
+
+This example
+
+@example
+\providecommand@{\myaffiliation@}@{Saint Michael's College@}
+\providecommand@{\myaffiliation@}@{Saint Michael's College@}
+From \myaffiliation.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+outputs @samp{From Saint Michael's College}. Unlike @code{\newcommand},
+the repeated use of @code{\providecommand} does not give an error.
+
+
+@node \makeatletter & \makeatother
+@section @code{\makeatletter} & @code{\makeatother}
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\makeatletter
+ ... definition of commands with @@ in their name ..
+\makeatother
+@end example
+
+Use this pair when you redefine @LaTeX{} commands that are named with an
+at-sign character@tie{}@samp{@code{@@}}. The @code{\makeatletter}
+declaration makes the at-sign character have the category code of a
+letter, code@tie{}11. The @code{\makeatother} declaration sets the
+category code of the at-sign to code@tie{}12, its default value.
+
+As @TeX{} reads characters, it assigns each one a category code, or
+@cindex catcode
+@cindex character category code
+@cindex category code, character
+@dfn{catcode}. For instance, it assigns the backslash
+character@tie{}@samp{@code{\}} the catcode@tie{}0. Command names
+consist of a category@tie{}0 character, ordinarily backslash, followed
+by letters, category@tie{}11 characters (except that a command name can
+also consist of a category@tie{}0 character followed by a single
+non-letter symbol).
+
+@LaTeX{}'s source code has the convention that some commands use
+@code{@@} in their name. These commands are mainly intended for package
+or class writers. The convention prevents authors who are just using a
+package or class from accidentally replacing such a command with one of
+their own, because by default the at-sign has catcode@tie{}12.
+
+The pair @code{\makeatletter} and @code{\makeatother} changes the
+default code and then changes it back. Use them inside a @file{.tex}
+file, in the preamble, when you are defining or redefining commands
+named with @code{@@}, by having them surround your definition. Don't
+use these inside @file{.sty} or @file{.cls} files since the
+@code{\usepackage} and @code{\documentclass} commands already arrange
+that the at-sign has the character code of a letter, catcode@tie{}11.
+
+@PkgIndex{macros2e}
+For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign in their names see
+@url{http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e}.
+
+In this example the class file has a command
+@code{\thesis@@universityname} that the user wants to change. These
+three lines should go in the preamble, before the
+@code{\begin@{document@}}.
+
+@example
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand@{\thesis@@universityname@}@{Saint Michael's College@}
+\makeatother
+@end example
+
+
+@node \@@ifstar
+@section @code{\@@ifstar}
+
+@findex \@@ifstar
+@cindex commands, star-variants
+@cindex star-variants, commands
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\mycmd@}@{\@@ifstar@{\mycmd@@star@}@{\mycmd@@nostar@}@}
+\newcommand@{\mycmd@@nostar@}[@var{nostar-num-args}]@{@var{nostar-body}@}
+\newcommand@{\mycmd@@star@}[@var{star-num-args}]@{@var{star-body}@}
+@end example
+
+Many standard @LaTeX{} environments or commands have a variant with the
+same name but ending with a star character@tie{}@code{*}, an asterisk.
+Examples are the @code{table} and @code{table*} environments and the
+@code{\section} and @code{\section*} commands.
+
+When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward
+because @code{\newenvironment} and @code{\renewenvironment} allow the
+environment name to contain a star. For commands the situation is more
+complex. As in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command,
+given above as @code{\mycmd}, which peeks ahead to see if it is followed
+by a star. For instance, @LaTeX{} does not really have a
+@code{\section*} command; instead, the @code{\section} command peeks
+ahead. This command does not accept arguments but instead expands to
+one of two commands that do accept arguments. In the synopsis these two
+are @code{\mycmd@@nostar} and @code{\mycmd@@star}. They could take the
+same number of arguments or a different number, or no arguments at all.
+As always, in a @LaTeX{} document a command using at-sign@tie{}@code{@@}
+must be enclosed inside a @code{\makeatletter ... \makeatother} block
+(@pxref{\makeatletter & \makeatother}).
+
+This example of @code{\@@ifstar} defines the command @code{\ciel} and a
+variant @code{\ciel*}. Both have one required argument. A call to
+@code{\ciel@{night@}} will return "starry night sky" while
+@code{\ciel*@{blue@}} will return "starry not blue sky".
+
+@example
+\newcommand*@{\ciel@@unstarred@}[1]@{starry #1 sky@}
+\newcommand*@{\ciel@@starred@}[1]@{starry not #1 sky@}
+\newcommand*@{\ciel@}@{\@@ifstar@{\ciel@@starred@}@{\ciel@@unstarred@}@}
+@end example
+
+In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
+arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007's
+@code{``My name is \agentsecret*@{Bond@},
+\agentsecret@{James@}@{Bond@}.''} is equivalent to entering the commands
+@code{``My name is \textsc@{Bond@}, \textit@{James@} textsc@{Bond@}.''}
+
+@example
+\newcommand*@{\agentsecret@@unstarred@}[2]@{\textit@{#1@} \textsc@{#2@}@}
+\newcommand*@{\agentsecret@@starred@}[1]@{\textsc@{#1@}@}
+\newcommand*@{\agentsecret@}@{%
+ \@@ifstar@{\agentsecret@@starred@}@{\agentsecret@@unstarred@}@}
+@end example
+
+There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work of
+@code{\@@ifstar}. The @file{suffix} package allows the construct
+@code{\newcommand\mycommand@{@var{unstarred version}@}} followed by
+@code{\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*@{@var{starred version}@}}. And
+@LaTeX{}3 has the @file{xparse} package that allows this code.
+
+@example
+\NewDocumentCommand\foo@{s@}@{\IfBooleanTF#1
+ @{@var{starred version}@}%
+ @{@var{unstarred version}@}%
+ @}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \newcounter
+@section @code{\newcounter}: Allocating a counter
+
+@findex \newcounter
+@cindex counters, defining new
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\newcounter@{@var{countername}@}
+\newcounter@{@var{countername}@}[@var{supercounter}]
+@end example
+
+Globally defines a new counter named @var{countername} and initialize it
+to zero (@pxref{Counters}).
+
+The name @var{countername} must consist of letters only. It does not
+begin with a backslash. This name must not already be in use by another
+counter.
+
+When you use the optional argument @code{[@var{supercounter}]} then the
+counter @var{countername} will be reset to zero whenever
+@var{supercounter} is incremented. For example, ordinarily
+@code{subsection} is numbered within @code{section} so that any time you
+increment @var{section}, either with @code{\stepcounter}
+(@pxref{\stepcounter}) or @code{\refstepcounter}
+(@pxref{\refstepcounter}), then @LaTeX{} will reset @var{subsection} to
+zero.
+
+This example
+
+@example
+\newcounter@{asuper@} \setcounter@{asuper@}@{1@}
+\newcounter@{asub@}[asuper] \setcounter@{asub@}@{3@} % Note `asuper'
+The value of asuper is \arabic@{asuper@} and of asub is \arabic@{asub@}.
+\stepcounter@{asuper@}
+Now asuper is \arabic@{asuper@} while asub is \arabic@{asub@}.
+@end example
+
+produces @samp{The value of asuper is 1 and that of asub is 3} and
+@samp{Now asuper is 2 while asub is 0}.
+
+If the counter already exists, for instance by entering @code{asuper}
+twice, then you get something like @samp{LaTeX Error: Command \c@@asuper
+already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual.}.
+
+If you use the optional argument then the super counter must already
+exist. Entering @code{\newcounter@{jh@}[lh]} when @code{lh} is not a
+defined counter will get you @samp{LaTeX Error: No counter 'lh'
+defined.}
+
+
+@node \newlength
+@section @code{\newlength}
+
+@findex \newlength
+@cindex lengths, allocating new
+@cindex rubber lengths, defining new
+@cindex skip register, plain @TeX{}
+@cindex glue register, plain @TeX{}
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\newlength@{@var{arg}@}
+@end example
+
+Allocate a new length register (@pxref{Lengths}). The required argument
+@var{arg} must begin with a backslash, @code{\}. The new register holds
+rubber lengths such as @code{72.27pt} or @code{1in plus.2in minus.1in}
+(a @LaTeX{} length register is what plain @TeX{} calls a @code{skip}
+register). The initial value is zero. The control sequence
+@code{\@var{arg}} must not be already defined.
+
+An example:
+
+@example
+\newlength@{\graphichgt@}
+@end example
+
+If you forget the backslash then you get @samp{Missing control sequence
+inserted}. If the command sequence already exists then you get
+something like @samp{LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined.
+Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual}.
+
+
+@node \newsavebox
+@section @code{\newsavebox}
+
+@findex \newsavebox
+@cindex box, allocating new
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\newsavebox@{\@var{cmd}@}
+@end example
+
+Define \@var{cmd}, the string consisting of a backslash followed by
+@var{cmd}, to refer to a new bin for storing material. These bins hold
+material that has been typeset, to use multiple times or to measure or
+manipulate (@pxref{Boxes}). The bin name \@var{cmd} is required, must
+start with a backslash, \, and must not already be a defined command.
+This command is fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+This allocates a bin and then puts typeset material into it.
+
+@example
+\newsavebox@{\logobox@}
+\savebox@{\logobox@}@{LoGo@}
+Our logo is \usebox@{\logobox@}.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The output is @samp{Our logo is LoGo}.
+
+If there is an already defined bin then you get something like
+@samp{LaTeX Error: Command \logobox already defined. Or name
+\end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual}.
+
+The allocation of a box is global.
+
+
+@node \newenvironment & \renewenvironment
+@section @code{\newenvironment} & @code{\renewenvironment}
+
+@findex \newenvironment
+@findex \renewenvironment
+@cindex environments, defining
+@cindex defining new environments
+@cindex redefining environments
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+@example
+\newenvironment@{@var{env}@}@{@var{begdef}@}@{@var{enddef}@}
+\newenvironment@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{begdef}@}@{@var{enddef}@}
+\newenvironment@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{begdef}@}@{@var{enddef}@}
+\newenvironment*@{@var{env}@}@{@var{begdef}@}@{@var{enddef}@}
+\newenvironment*@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{begdef}@}@{@var{enddef}@}
+\newenvironment*@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{begdef}@}@{@var{enddef}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or one of these.
+
+@example
+\renewenvironment@{@var{env}@}@{@var{begdef}@}@{@var{enddef}@}
+\renewenvironment@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{begdef}@}@{@var{enddef}@}
+\renewenvironment@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{begdef}@}@{@var{enddef}@}
+\renewenvironment*@{@var{env}@}@{@var{begdef}@}@{@var{enddef}@}
+\renewenvironment*@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}]@{@var{begdef}@}@{@var{enddef}@}
+\renewenvironment*@{@var{env}@}[@var{nargs}][@var{optargdefault}]@{@var{begdef}@}@{@var{enddef}@}
+@end example
+
+Define or redefine the environment @var{env}, that is, create the
+construct @code{\begin@{@var{env}@} ... @var{body} ... \end@{@var{env}@}}.
+
+@cindex @code{*}-form of environment commands
+The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text. However, the body of these
+environments can contain multiple paragraphs.
+
+@table @var
+@item env
+Required; the environment name. It consists only of letters or the
+@code{*} character, and thus does not begin with backslash, @code{\}.
+It must not begin with the string @code{end}. For
+@code{\newenvironment}, the name @var{env} must not be the name of an
+already existing environment, and also the command @code{\@var{env}}
+must be undefined. For @code{\renewenvironment}, @var{env} must be the
+name of an existing environment.
+
+@item nargs
+Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
+that the environment takes. When you use the environment these
+arguments appear after the @code{\begin}, as in
+@code{\begin@{@var{env}@}@{@var{arg1}@} ... @{@var{argn}@}}. Omitting
+this is equivalent to setting it to 0; the environment will have no
+arguments. When redefining an environment, the new version can have a
+different number of arguments than the old version.
+
+@item optargdefault
+Optional; if this is present then the first argument of the defined
+environment is optional, with default value @var{optargdefault} (which
+may be the empty string). If this is not in the definition then the
+environment does not take an optional argument.
+
+That is, when @var{optargdefault} is present in the definition of the
+environment then you can start the environment with square brackets, as
+in @code{\begin@{@var{env}@}[@var{optval}]@{...@} ... \end@{@var{env}@}}.
+In this case, within @var{begdefn} the parameter @code{#1} is set to the
+value of @var{optval}. If you call @code{\begin@{@var{env}@}} without
+square brackets, then within @var{begdefn} the parameter @code{#1} is
+set to the value of the default @var{optargdefault}. In either case,
+any required arguments start with @code{#2}.
+
+Omitting @code{[@var{myval}]} in the call is different than having the
+square brackets with no contents, as in @code{[]}. The former results
+in @code{#1} expanding to @var{optargdefault}; the latter results in
+@code{#1} expanding to the empty string.
+
+@item begdef
+Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
+@code{\begin@{@var{env}@}}. Within @var{begdef}, the parameters
+@code{#1}, @code{#2}, ... @code{#@var{nargs}}, are replaced by the
+values that you supply when you call the environment; see the examples
+below.
+
+@item enddef
+Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
+@code{\end@{@var{env}@}}. This may not contain any parameters, that is,
+you cannot use @code{#1}, @code{#2}, etc., here (but see the final
+example below).
+
+@end table
+
+All environments, that is to say the @var{begdef} code, the environment
+body, and the @var{enddef} code, are processed within a group. Thus, in
+the first example below, the effect of the @code{\small} is limited to
+the quote and does not extend to material following the environment.
+
+If you try to define an environment and the name has already been used
+then you get something like @samp{LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual}. If you try
+to redefine an environment and the name has not yet been used then you
+get something like @samp{LaTeX Error: Environment hank undefined.}.
+
+This example gives an environment like @LaTeX{}'s @code{quotation}
+except that it will be set in smaller type.
+
+@example
+\newenvironment@{smallquote@}@{%
+ \small\begin@{quotation@}
+@}@{%
+ \end@{quotation@}
+@}
+@end example
+
+This has an argument, which is set in boldface at the start of a
+paragraph.
+
+@example
+\newenvironment@{point@}[1]@{%
+ \noindent\textbf@{#1@}
+@}@{%
+@}
+@end example
+
+This one shows the use of a optional argument; it gives a quotation
+environment that cites the author.
+
+@example
+\newenvironment@{citequote@}[1][Shakespeare]@{%
+ \begin@{quotation@}
+ \noindent\textit@{#1@}:
+@}@{%
+ \end@{quotation@}
+@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The author's name is optional, and defaults to @samp{Shakespeare}. In
+the document, use the environment like this.
+
+@example
+\begin@{citequote@}[Lincoln]
+ ...
+\end@{citequote@}
+@end example
+
+The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use in
+@var{enddef}, in this case in a box (@pxref{\sbox & \savebox}).
+
+@example
+\newsavebox@{\quoteauthor@}
+\newenvironment@{citequote@}[1][Shakespeare]@{%
+ \sbox\quoteauthor@{#1@}%
+ \begin@{quotation@}
+@}@{%
+ \hspace@{1em plus 1fill@}---\usebox@{\quoteauthor@}
+ \end@{quotation@}
+@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \newtheorem
+@section @code{\newtheorem}
+
+@findex \newtheorem
+@cindex theorems, defining
+@cindex defining new theorems
+
+@cindex theorem-like environment
+@cindex environment, theorem-like
+Synopses:
+
+@example
+\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}@{@var{title}@}
+\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}@{@var{title}@}[@var{numbered_within}]
+\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}[@var{numbered_like}]@{@var{title}@}
+@end example
+
+Define a new theorem-like environment. You can specify one of
+@var{numbered_within} and @var{numbered_like}, or neither, but not both.
+
+The first form, @code{\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}@{@var{title}@}}, creates
+an environment that will be labelled with @var{title}; see the first
+example below.
+
+The second form,
+@code{\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}@{@var{title}@}[@var{numbered_within}]},
+creates an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing
+counter @var{numbered_within}, so this counter will be reset when
+@var{numbered_within} is reset. See the second example below.
+
+The third form
+@code{\newtheorem@{@var{name}@}[@var{numbered_like}]@{@var{title}@}},
+with optional argument between the two required arguments, creates an
+environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
+@var{numbered_like}. See the third example.
+
+This command creates a counter named @var{name}. In addition, unless
+the optional argument @var{numbered_like} is used, inside of the
+theorem-like environment the current @code{\ref} value will be that of
+@code{\the@var{numbered_within}} (@pxref{\ref}).
+
+This declaration is global. It is fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+Arguments:
+
+@table @var
+@item name
+The name of the environment. It is a string of letters. It must not
+begin with a backslash, @code{\}. It must not be the name of an
+existing environment, and the command name @code{\@var{name}} must not
+already be defined.
+
+@item title
+The text to be printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
+number. For example, @samp{Theorem}.
+
+@item numbered_within
+Optional; the name of an already defined counter, usually a sectional
+unit such as @code{chapter} or @code{section}. When the
+@var{numbered_within} counter is reset then the @var{name} environment's
+counter will also be reset.
+
+If this optional argument is not used then the command
+@code{\the@var{name}} is set to @code{\arabic@{@var{name}@}}.
+
+@item numbered_like
+Optional; the name of an already defined theorem-like environment. The
+new environment will be numbered in sequence with @var{numbered_like}.
+
+@end table
+
+Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
+sequentially. The example below has a declaration in the preamble that
+results in @samp{Definition@tie{}1} and @samp{Definition@tie{}2} in the
+output.
+
+@example
+\newtheorem@{defn@}@{Definition@}
+\begin@{document@}
+\section@{...@}
+\begin@{defn@}
+ First def
+\end@{defn@}
+
+\section@{...@}
+\begin@{defn@}
+ Second def
+\end@{defn@}
+@end example
+
+This example has the same document body as the prior one. But here
+@code{\newtheorem}'s optional argument @var{numbered_within} is given as
+@code{section}, so the output is like @samp{Definition@tie{}1.1} and
+@samp{Definition@tie{}2.1}.
+
+@example
+\newtheorem@{defn@}@{Definition@}[section]
+\begin@{document@}
+\section@{...@}
+\begin@{defn@}
+ First def
+\end@{defn@}
+
+\section@{...@}
+\begin@{defn@}
+ Second def
+\end@{defn@}
+@end example
+
+In the next example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
+second of which calls for the new @code{thm} environment to use the same
+counter as @code{defn}. It gives @samp{Definition@tie{}1.1}, followed
+by @samp{Theorem@tie{}2.1} and @samp{Definition@tie{}2.2}.
+
+@example
+\newtheorem@{defn@}@{Definition@}[section]
+\newtheorem@{thm@}[defn]@{Theorem@}
+\begin@{document@}
+\section@{...@}
+\begin@{defn@}
+ First def
+\end@{defn@}
+
+\section@{...@}
+\begin@{thm@}
+ First thm
+\end@{thm@}
+
+\begin@{defn@}
+ Second def
+\end@{defn@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \newfont
+@section @code{\newfont}
+
+@findex \newfont
+@cindex fonts, new commands for
+@cindex defining new fonts
+
+@c @findex .fd @r{file}
+This command is obsolete. This description is here only to help with old
+documents. New documents should define fonts in families through the
+New Font Selection Scheme which allows you to, for example, associate a
+boldface with a roman (@pxref{Fonts}).
+@c This is done either by using
+@c @file{.fd} files or through the use of an engine that can access system
+@c fonts such as Xe@LaTeX{} (@pxref{@TeX{} engines}).
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\newfont@{\@var{cmd}@}@{@var{font description}@}
+@end example
+
+Define a command @code{\@var{cmd}} that will change the current font.
+The control sequence must not already be defined. It must begin with a
+backslash, @code{\}.
+
+@cindex at clause, in font definitions
+@cindex design size, in font definitions
+The @var{font description} consists of a @var{fontname} and an optional
+@dfn{at clause}. @LaTeX{} will look on your system for a file named
+@file{@var{fontname}.tfm}. The at clause can have the form either
+@code{at @var{dimen}} or @code{scaled @var{factor}}, where a
+@var{factor} of @samp{1000} means no scaling. For @LaTeX{}'s purposes,
+all this does is scale all the character and other font dimensions
+relative to the font's design size, which is a value defined in the
+@file{.tfm} file.
+
+This defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few characters in each.
+
+@example
+\newfont@{\testfontat@}@{cmb10 at 11pt@}
+\newfont@{\testfontscaled@}@{cmb10 scaled 1100@}
+\testfontat abc
+\testfontscaled abc
+@end example
+
+
+@node \protect
+@section @code{\protect}
+
+@findex \protect
+@cindex fragile commands
+@cindex robust commands
+
+All @LaTeX{} commands are either @dfn{fragile} or @dfn{robust}. A
+fragile command can break when it is used in the argument to certain
+other commands. Commands that contain data that @LaTeX{} writes to an
+auxiliary file and re-reads later are fragile. This includes material
+that goes into a table of contents, list of figures, list of tables,
+etc. Fragile commands also include line breaks, any command that has an
+optional argument, and many more. To prevent such commands from
+breaking, one solution is to preceded them with the command
+@code{\protect}.
+
+For example, when @LaTeX{} runs the @code{\section@{@var{section
+name}@}} command it writes the @var{section name} text to the
+@file{.aux} auxiliary file, moving it there for use elsewhere in the
+document such as in the table of contents. Any argument that is
+internally expanded by @LaTeX{} without typesetting it directly is
+referred to as a
+@cindex moving arguments
+@dfn{moving argument}. A command is fragile if it can
+expand during this process into invalid @TeX{} code. Some examples of
+moving arguments are those that appear in the @code{\caption@{...@}}
+command (@pxref{figure}), in the @code{\thanks@{...@}} command
+(@pxref{\maketitle}), and in @@-expressions in the @code{tabular} and
+@code{array} environments (@pxref{tabular}).
+
+If you get strange errors from commands used in moving arguments, try
+preceding it with @code{\protect}. Every fragile commands must be
+protected with their own @code{\protect}.
+
+Although usually a @code{\protect} command doesn't hurt, length
+commands are robust and should not be preceded by a @code{\protect}
+command. Nor can a @code{\protect} command be used in the argument to
+@code{\addtocounter} or @code{\setcounter} command.
+
+In this example the @code{\caption} command gives a mysterious error
+about an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each
+@code{\raisebox} command with @code{\protect}.
+
+@example
+\begin@{figure@}
+ ...
+ \caption@{Company headquarters of A\raisebox@{1pt@}@{B@}\raisebox@{-1pt@}@{C@}@}
+\end@{figure@}
+@end example
+
+In the next example the @code{\tableofcontents} command gives an error
+because the @code{\(..\)} in the section title expands to illegal @TeX{}
+in the @file{.toc} file. You can solve this by changing @code{\(..\)}
+to @code{\protect\(..\protect\)}.
+
+@example
+\begin@{document@}
+\tableofcontents
+...
+\section@{Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)@}
+...
+@end example
+
+
+@node \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend
+@section @code{\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend}
+
+@findex \ignorespaces
+@findex \ignorespacesafterend
+@cindex spaces, ignore around commands
+@cindex commands, ignore spaces
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\ignorespaces
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\ignorespacesafterend
+@end example
+
+Both commands cause @LaTeX{} to ignore spaces after the end of the
+command up until the first non-space character. The first is a command
+from Plain @TeX{}, and the second is @LaTeX{}-specific.
+
+The @code{ignorespaces} is often used when defining commands via
+@code{\newcommand}, or @code{\newenvironment}, or @code{\def}. The
+example below illustrates. It allows a user to show the points values
+for quiz questions in the margin but it is inconvenient because, as
+shown in the @code{enumerate} list, users must not put any space between
+the command and the question text.
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\points@}[1]@{\makebox[0pt]@{\makebox[10em][l]@{#1~pts@}@}
+\begin@{enumerate@}
+ \item\points@{10@}no extra space output here
+ \item\points@{15@} extra space between the number and the `extra'
+\end@{enumerate@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The solution is to change to this.
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\points@}[1]@{%
+ \makebox[0pt]@{\makebox[10em][l]@{#1~pts@}@}\ignorespaces@}
+@end example
+
+A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text. The
+commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names. But,
+as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
+@code{\fullname} will reproduce that.
+
+@example
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand@{\honorific@}[1]@{\def\@@honorific@{#1@}@} % remember title
+\newcommand@{\fullname@}[1]@{\@@honorific~#1@} % put title before name
+\makeatother
+\begin@{tabular@}@{|l|@}
+\honorific@{Mr/Ms@} \fullname@{Jones@} \\ % no extra space here
+\honorific@{ Mr/Ms@} \fullname@{Jones@} % extra space before title
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+To fix this, change to
+@code{\newcommand@{\fullname@}[1]@{\ignorespaces\@@honorific~#1@}}.
+
+The @code{\ignorespaces} is also often used in a @code{\newenvironment}
+at the end of the @var{begin} clause, that is, as part of the second
+argument, as in @code{\begin@{newenvironment@}@{@var{env
+name}@}@{... \ignorespaces@}@{...@}}.
+
+To strip spaces off the end of an environment use
+@code{\ignorespacesafterend}. An example is that this will show a much
+larger vertical space between the first and second environments than
+between the second and third.
+
+@example
+\newenvironment@{eq@}@{\begin@{equation@}@}@{\end@{equation@}@}
+\begin@{eq@}
+e=mc^2
+\end@{eq@}
+\begin@{equation@}
+F=ma
+\end@{equation@}
+\begin@{equation@}
+E=IR
+\end@{equation@}
+@end example
+
+Putting a comment character@tie{}@code{%} immediately after the
+@code{\end@{eq@}} will make the vertical space disappear, but that is
+inconvenient. The solution is to change to
+@code{\newenvironment@{eq@}@{\begin@{equation@}@}@{\end@{equation@}\ignorespacesafterend@}}.
+
+
+@node Counters
+@chapter Counters
+
+@cindex counters, a list of
+@cindex variables, a list of
+
+Everything @LaTeX{} numbers for you has a counter associated with
+it. The name of the counter is often the same as the name of the
+environment or command associated with the number, except that the
+counter's name has no backslash@tie{}@code{\}. Thus, associated with
+the @code{\chapter} command is the @code{chapter} counter that keeps
+track of the chapter number.
+
+Below is a list of the counters used in @LaTeX{}'s standard document
+classes to control numbering.
+
+@example
+part paragraph figure enumi
+chapter subparagraph table enumii
+section page footnote enumiii
+subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+subsubsection
+@end example
+
+The @code{mpfootnote} counter is used by the @code{\footnote} command
+inside of a minipage (@pxref{minipage}). The counters @code{enumi}
+through @code{enumiv} are used in the @code{enumerate} environment, for
+up to four levels of nesting (@pxref{enumerate}).
+
+Counters can have any integer value but they are typically positive.
+
+New counters are created with @code{\newcounter}. @xref{\newcounter}.
+
+
+@menu
+* \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol:: Print value of a counter.
+* \usecounter:: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
+* \value:: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
+* \setcounter:: Set the value of a counter.
+* \addtocounter:: Add a quantity to a counter.
+* \refstepcounter:: Add to a counter.
+* \stepcounter:: Add to a counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+* \day & \month & \year:: Numeric date values.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
+@section @code{\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol}: Printing counters
+
+@cindex counters, printing
+
+Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if
+the counter @var{counter} has the value 1 then a
+@code{\alph@{@var{counter}@}} in your source will result in a lowercase
+letter@tie{}a appearing in the output.
+
+All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
+instance, @code{\alph@{enumi@}}. Note that the counter name does not
+start with a backslash.
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \alph@{@var{counter}@}
+Print the value of @var{counter} in lowercase letters: `a', `b',
+@enddots{} If the counter's value is less than 1 or more than 26 then
+you get @samp{LaTeX Error: Counter too large.}
+
+@item \Alph@{@var{counter}@}
+Print in uppercase letters: `A', `B', @enddots{} If the counter's value
+is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get @samp{LaTeX Error: Counter
+too large.}
+
+@item \arabic@{@var{counter}@}
+Print in Arabic numbers such as @samp{5} or @samp{-2}.
+
+@item \roman@{@var{counter}@}
+Print in lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', @enddots{} If the
+counter's value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
+@LaTeX{} does not print anything in the output.
+
+@item \Roman@{@var{counter}@}
+Print in uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', @enddots{} If the
+counter's value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
+@LaTeX{} does not print anything in the output.
+
+@item \fnsymbol@{@var{counter}@}
+Prints the value of @var{counter} using a sequence of nine symbols that
+are traditionally used for labeling footnotes. The value of
+@var{counter} should be between@tie{}1 and@tie{}9, inclusive. If the
+counter's value is less than 0 or more than 9 then you get @samp{LaTeX
+Error: Counter too large}, while if it is 0 then you get no error or
+warning but @LaTeX{} does not output anything.
+
+Here are the symbols:
+
+@multitable @columnfractions .10 .30 .30 .30
+@headitem Number@tab Name@tab Command@tab Symbol
+@item
+1@tab asterisk@tab@code{\ast}@tab@iftexthenelse{@math{\ast},*}
+@item
+2@tab dagger@tab@code{\dagger}@tab@BES{2020,\dagger}
+@item
+3@tab ddagger@tab@code{\ddagger}@tab@BES{2021,\ddagger}
+@item
+4@tab section-sign@tab@code{\S}@tab@BES{00A7,\S}
+@item
+5@tab paragraph-sign@tab@code{\P}@tab@BES{00B6,\P}
+@item
+6@tab double-vert@tab@code{\parallel}@tab@BES{2016,\parallel}
+@item
+7@tab double-asterisk@tab@code{\ast\ast}@tab@iftexthenelse{@math{\ast\ast},**}
+@item
+8@tab
+ double-dagger@tab@code{\dagger\dagger}@tab@BES{2020,\dagger}@BES{2020,\dagger}
+@item
+9@tab
+ double-ddagger@tab@code{\ddagger\ddagger}@tab@BES{2021,\ddagger}@BES{2021,\ddagger}
+@end multitable
+
+@end ftable
+
+
+@node \usecounter
+@section @code{\usecounter}
+
+@findex \usecounter
+@cindex list items, specifying counter
+@cindex numbered items, specifying counter
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\usecounter@{@var{counter}@}
+@end example
+
+Used in the second argument of the @code{list} environment
+(@pxref{list}), this declares that list items will be numbered by
+@var{counter}. It initializes @var{counter} to zero, and arranges that
+when @code{\item} is called without its optional argument then
+@var{counter} is incremented by @code{\refstepcounter}, making its value
+be the current @code{ref} value (@pxref{\ref}). This command is fragile
+(@pxref{\protect}).
+
+Put in the document preamble, this example makes a new list environment
+enumerated with @var{testcounter}:
+
+@example
+\newcounter@{testcounter@}
+\newenvironment@{test@}@{%
+ \begin@{list@}@{@}@{%
+ \usecounter@{testcounter@}
+ @}
+@}@{%
+ \end@{list@}
+@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \value
+@section @code{\value}
+
+@findex \value
+@cindex counters, getting value of
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\value@{@var{counter}@}
+@end example
+
+Expands to the value of the counter @var{counter}. (Note that the name
+of a counter does not begin with a backslash.)
+
+This example outputs @samp{Test counter is@tie{}6. Other counter
+is@tie{}5.}.
+
+@example
+\newcounter@{test@} \setcounter@{test@}@{5@}
+\newcounter@{other@} \setcounter@{other@}@{\value@{test@}@}
+\addtocounter@{test@}@{1@}
+
+Test counter is \arabic@{test@}.
+Other counter is \arabic@{other@}.
+@end example
+
+The @code{\value} command is not used for typesetting the value of the
+counter. For that, see @ref{\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol}.
+
+It is often used in @code{\setcounter} or @code{\addtocounter} but
+@code{\value} can be used anywhere that @LaTeX{} expects a number, such
+as in @code{\hspace@{\value@{foo@}\parindent@}}. It must not be
+preceded by @code{\protect} (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+This example inserts @code{\hspace@{4\parindent@}}.
+
+@example
+\setcounter@{myctr@}@{3@} \addtocounter@{myctr@}@{1@}
+\hspace@{\value@{myctr@}\parindent@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \setcounter
+@section @code{\setcounter}
+
+@findex \setcounter
+@cindex counters, setting
+@cindex setting counters
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\setcounter@{@var{counter}@}@{@var{value}@}
+@end example
+
+Globally set the counter @var{counter} to have the value of the
+@var{value} argument, which must be an integer. Thus, you can set a
+counter's value as @code{\setcounter@{section@}@{5@}}. Note that the
+counter name does not start with a backslash.
+
+In this example if the counter @code{theorem} has value 12 then the
+second line will print @samp{XII}.
+
+@example
+\setcounter@{exercise@}@{\value@{theorem@}@}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman@{exercise@}.
+@end example
+
+
+@node \addtocounter
+@section @code{\addtocounter}
+
+@findex \addtocounter
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\addtocounter@{@var{counter}@}@{@var{value}@
+@end example
+
+Globally increment @var{counter} by the amount specified by the
+@var{value} argument, which may be negative.
+
+In this example the section value appears as @samp{VII}.
+
+@example
+\setcounter@{section@}@{5@}
+\addtocounter@{section@}@{2@}
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman@{section@}.
+@end example
+
+
+@node \refstepcounter
+@section @code{\refstepcounter}
+
+@findex \refstepcounter
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\refstepcounter@{@var{counter}@}
+@end example
+
+Globally increments the value of @var{counter} by one, as does
+@code{\stepcounter} (@pxref{\stepcounter}). The difference is that this
+command resets the value of any counter numbered within it. (For the
+definition of ``counters numbered within'', @pxref{\newcounter}.)
+
+In addition, this command also defines the current @code{\ref} value
+to be the result of @code{\thecounter}.
+
+While the counter value is set globally, the @code{\ref} value is set
+locally, i.e., inside the current group.
+
+
+@node \stepcounter
+@section @code{\stepcounter}
+
+@findex \stepcounter
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\stepcounter@{@var{counter}@}
+@end example
+
+Globally adds one to @var{counter} and resets all counters numbered
+within it. (For the definition of ``counters numbered within'',
+@pxref{\newcounter}.)
+
+This command differs from @code{\refstepcounter} in that this one does
+not influence references@tie{}--- it does not define the current
+@code{\ref} value to be the result of @code{\thecounter}
+(@pxref{\refstepcounter}).
+
+
+@node \day & \month & \year
+@section @code{\day} & @code{\month} & @code{\year}
+
+@findex \day
+@findex \month
+@findex \year
+
+@LaTeX{} defines the counter @code{\day} for the day of the month
+(nominally with value between 1 and 31), @code{\month} for the month of
+the year (nominally with value between 1 and 12), and year @code{\year}.
+When @TeX{} starts up, they are set from the current values on the
+system. The related command @code{\today} produces a string
+representing the current day (@pxref{\today}).
+
+They counters are not updated as the job progresses so in principle they
+could be incorrect by the end. In addition, @TeX{} does no sanity
+check:
+
+@example
+\day=-2 \month=13 \year=-4 \today
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+gives no error or warning and results in the output @samp{-2, -4} (the
+bogus month value produces no output).
+
+
+@node Lengths
+@chapter Lengths
+
+@cindex lengths, defining and using
+
+A @dfn{length} is a measure of distance. Many @LaTeX{} commands take a
+length as an argument.
+
+Lengths come in two types. A @dfn{rigid length} such as @code{10pt}
+does not contain a @code{plus} or @code{minus} component. (Plain @TeX{}
+calls this a @dfn{dimen}.) A @dfn{rubber length} (what Plain @TeX{}
+calls a @dfn{skip}) such as as with @code{1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm}
+can contain either or both of those components. In that rubber length,
+the @code{1cm} is the @dfn{natural length} while the other two, the
+@code{plus} and @code{minus} components, allow @TeX{} to stretch or
+shrink the length to optimize placement.
+
+The illustrations below use these two commands.
+
+@example
+% make a black bar 10pt tall and #1 wide
+\newcommand@{\blackbar@}[1]@{\rule@{#1@}@{10pt@}@}
+
+% Make a box around #2 that is #1 wide (excluding the border)
+\newcommand@{\showhbox@}[2]@{%
+ \fboxsep=0pt\fbox@{\hbox to #1@{#2@}@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This example uses those commands to show a black bar 100@tie{}points
+long between @samp{XXX} and @samp{YYY}. This length is rigid.
+
+@example
+XXX\showhbox@{100pt@}@{\blackbar@{100pt@}@}YYY
+@end example
+
+As for rubber lengths, shrinking is simpler one: with @code{1cm minus
+0.05cm}, the natural length is 1@dmn{cm} but @TeX{} can shrink it down
+as far as 0.95@dmn{cm}. Beyond that, @TeX{} refuses to shrink any more.
+Thus, below the first one works fine, producing a space of
+98@tie{}points between the two bars.
+
+@example
+XXX\showhbox@{300pt@}@{%
+ \blackbar@{101pt@}\hspace@{100pt minus 2pt@}\blackbar@{101pt@}@}YYY
+
+XXX\showhbox@{300pt@}@{%
+ \blackbar@{105pt@}\hspace@{100pt minus 1pt@}\blackbar@{105pt@}@}YYY
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+But the second one gets a warning like @samp{Overfull \hbox (1.0pt too
+wide) detected at line 17}. In the output the first @samp{Y} is
+overwritten by the end of the black bar, because the box's material is
+wider than the 300@dmn{pt} allocated, as @TeX{} has refused to shrink
+the total to less than 309@tie{}points.
+
+Stretching is like shrinking except that if @TeX{} is asked to stretch
+beyond the given amount, it will do it. Here the first line is fine,
+producing a space of 110@tie{}points between the bars.
+
+@example
+XXX\showhbox@{300pt@}@{%
+ \blackbar@{95pt@}\hspace@{100pt plus 10pt@}\blackbar@{95pt@}@}YYY
+
+XXX\showhbox@{300pt@}@{%
+ \blackbar@{95pt@}\hspace@{100pt plus 1pt@}\blackbar@{95pt@}@}YYY
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+In the second line @TeX{} needs a stretch of 10@tie{}points and only
+1@tie{}point was specified. @TeX{} stretches the space to the required
+length but it gives you a warning like @samp{Underfull \hbox (badness
+10000) detected at line 22}. (We won't discuss badness.)
+
+You can put both stretch and shrink in the same length, as in
+@code{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex}.
+
+If @TeX{} is setting two or more rubber lengths then it allocates the
+stretch or shrink in proportion.
+
+@example
+XXX\showhbox@{300pt@}@{%
+ \blackbar@{100pt@}% left
+ \hspace@{0pt plus 50pt@}\blackbar@{80pt@}\hspace@{0pt plus 10pt@}% middle
+ \blackbar@{100pt@}@}YYY % right
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The left and right bars take up 100@tie{}points, so the middle needs
+another 100. The middle bar is 80@tie{}points so the two
+@code{\hspace}'s must stretch 20@tie{}points. Because the two are
+@code{plus 50pt} and @code{plus 10pt}, @TeX{} gets 5/6 of the stretch
+from the first space and 1/6 from the second.
+
+The @code{plus} or @code{minus} component of a rubber length can contain
+a @dfn{fill} component, as in @code{1in plus2fill}. This gives the
+length infinite stretchability or shrinkability so that @TeX{} could set
+it to any distance. Here the two figures will be equal-spaced across
+the page.
+
+@example
+\begin@{minipage@}@{\linewidth@}
+ \hspace@{0pt plus 1fill@}\includegraphics@{godel.png@}%
+ \hspace@{0pt plus 1fill@}\includegraphics@{einstein.png@}%
+ \hspace@{0pt plus 1fill@}
+\end@{minipage@}
+@end example
+
+@TeX{} actually has three levels of infinity for glue components:
+@code{fil}, @code{fill}, and @code{filll}. The later ones are more
+infinite than the earlier ones. Ordinarily document authors only use
+the middle one (@pxref{\hfill} and @pxref{\vfill}).
+
+Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length, so
+that after @code{\setlength@{\ylength@}@{1in plus 0.2in@}} and
+@code{\setlength@{\zlength@}@{3\ylength@}} then the value of
+@code{\zlength} is @code{3in}.
+
+@menu
+* Units of length:: The units that @LaTeX{} knows.
+* \setlength:: Set the value of a length.
+* \addtolength:: Add a quantity to a length.
+* \settodepth:: Set a length to the depth of something.
+* \settoheight:: Set a length to the height of something.
+* \settowidth:: Set a length to the width of something.
+@c * Predefined lengths:: Lengths that are, like, predefined.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Units of length
+@section Units of length
+
+@cindex units, of length
+
+@TeX{} and @LaTeX{} know about these units both inside and outside of
+math mode.
+
+@table @code
+@item pt
+@findex pt
+@cindex Point
+@anchor{units of length pt}
+Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two decimal
+places, is 1@dmn{point} = 2.85@dmn{mm} = 28.45@dmn{cm}.
+
+@item pc
+@cindex pica
+@findex pc
+@anchor{units of length pc}
+Pica, 12 pt
+
+@item in
+@findex in
+@findex inch
+@anchor{units of length in}
+Inch, 72.27 pt
+
+@item bp
+@findex bp
+@cindex Big point
+@anchor{units of length bp}
+Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in
+PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
+
+@item cm
+@cindex Centimeter
+@findex cm
+@anchor{units of length cm}
+Centimeter
+
+@item mm
+@cindex Millimeter
+@findex mm
+@anchor{units of length mm}
+Millimeter
+
+@item dd
+@cindex Didot point
+@findex dd
+@anchor{units of length dd}
+Didot point, 1.07 pt
+
+@item cc
+@cindex Cicero
+@findex cc
+@anchor{units of length cc}
+Cicero, 12 dd
+
+@item sp
+@cindex Scaled point
+@findex sp
+@anchor{units of length sp}
+Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
+
+@end table
+
+@cindex ex
+@cindex x-height
+@findex ex
+@cindex m-width
+@cindex em
+@findex em
+@anchor{Lengths/em}
+@anchor{Lengths/en}
+@anchor{Lengths/ex}
+@anchor{units of length em}
+@anchor{units of length en}
+@anchor{units of length ex}
+Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer of
+the font. The x-height of the current font @dfn{ex}, traditionally the
+height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical
+lengths. Similarly @dfn{em}, traditionally the width of the capital
+letter M, is often used for horizontal lengths (there is also
+@code{\enspace}, which is @code{0.5em}). Use of these can help make a
+definition work better across font changes. For example, a definition
+of the vertical space between list items given as
+@code{\setlength@{\itemsep@}@{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex@}} is more
+likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a definition
+given in points.
+
+@cindex mu, math unit
+@findex mu
+In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
+@dfn{mu} given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family. @xref{Spacing in math mode}.
+
+
+@node \setlength
+@section @code{\setlength}
+
+@findex \setlength
+@cindex lengths, setting
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\setlength@{@var{len}@}@{@var{amount}@}
+@end example
+
+Set the length @var{len} to @var{amount}. The length name @var{len}
+must begin with a backslash, @code{\}. The @code{amount} can be a
+rubber length (@pxref{Lengths}). It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that @LaTeX{} understands (@pxref{Units of
+length}).
+
+Below, with @LaTeX{}'s defaults the first paragraph will be indented
+while the second will not.
+
+@example
+I told the doctor I broke my leg in two places.
+
+\setlength@{\parindent@}@{0em@}
+He said stop going to those places.
+@end example
+
+If you did not declare @var{len} with @code{\newlength}, for example if
+you mistype the above as
+@code{\newlength@{\specparindent@}\setlength@{\sepcparindent@}@{...@}},
+then you get an error like @samp{Undefined control sequence. <argument>
+\sepcindent}. If you omit the backslash at the start of the length name
+then you get an error like @samp{Missing number, treated as zero. <to be
+read again> \relax l.19 \setlength@{specparindent@}@{0.6\parindent@}}
+
+
+@node \addtolength
+@section @code{\addtolength}
+
+@findex \addtolength
+@cindex lengths, adding to
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\addtolength@{@var{len}@}@{@var{amount}@}
+@end example
+
+Increment the length @var{len} by @var{amount}. The length name
+@var{len} begins with a backslash, @code{\}. The @code{amount} is a
+rubber length (@pxref{Lengths}). It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that @LaTeX{} understands (@pxref{Units of
+length}).
+
+Below, if @code{\parskip} starts with the value @code{0pt plus 1pt}
+
+@example
+Doctor: how is the boy who swallowed the silver dollar?
+\addtolength@{\parskip@}@{1pt@}
+
+Nurse: no change.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+then it has the value @code{1pt plus 1pt} for the second paragraph.
+
+If you did not declare the length @var{len} with @code{\newlength}, if
+for example you mistype the above as
+@code{\addtolength@{\specparindent@}@{0.6\praindent@}}, then you get
+something like @samp{Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent}.
+If you leave off the backslash at the start of @var{len}, as in
+@code{\addtolength@{parindent@}@{1pt@}}, then you get something like
+@samp{You can't use `the letter p' after \advance}.
+
+
+@node \settodepth
+@section @code{\settodepth}
+
+@findex \settodepth
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\settodepth@{@var{len}@}@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Set the length @var{len} to the depth of box that @LaTeX{} gets on
+typesetting the @var{text} argument. The length name @var{len} must
+begin with a backslash, @code{\}.
+
+This will show how low the character descenders go.
+
+@example
+\newlength@{\alphabetdepth@}
+\settodepth@{\alphabetdepth@}@{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz@}
+\the\alphabetdepth
+@end example
+
+If you did not set aside the length @var{len}, if for example you
+mistype the above as @code{\settodepth@{\aplhabetdepth@}@{abc...@}},
+then you get something like @samp{Undefined control sequence. <argument>
+\aplhabetdepth}. If you leave the backslash out of @var{len}, as in
+@code{\settodepth@{alphabetdepth@}@{...@}} then you get something like
+@samp{Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox}.
+
+
+@node \settoheight
+@section @code{\settoheight}
+
+@findex \settoheight
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\settoheight@{@var{len}@}@{text@}
+@end example
+
+Sets the length @var{len} to the height of box that @LaTeX{} gets on
+typesetting the @code{text} argument. The length name @var{len} must
+begin with a backslash, @code{\}.
+
+This will show how high the characters go.
+
+@example
+\newlength@{\alphabetheight@}
+\settoheight@{\alphabetheight@}@{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz@}
+\the\alphabetheight
+@end example
+
+If no such length @var{len} has been declared with @code{\newlength}, if
+for example you mistype as
+@code{\settoheight@{\aplhabetheight@}@{abc...@}}, then you get something
+like @samp{Undefined control sequence. <argument> \alphabetheight}. If
+you leave the backslash out of @var{len}, as in
+@code{\settoheight@{alphabetheight@}@{...@}} then you get something like
+@samp{Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox}.
+
+
+@node \settowidth
+@section @code{\settowidth}
+
+@findex \settowidth
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\settowidth@{@var{len}@}@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Set the length @var{len} to the width of the box that @LaTeX{} gets on
+typesetting the @var{text} argument. The length name @var{len} must
+begin with a backslash, @code{\}.
+
+This measures the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
+
+@example
+\newlength@{\alphabetwidth@}
+\settowidth@{\alphabetwidth@}@{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz@}
+\the\alphabetwidth
+@end example
+
+If no such length @var{len} has been set aside, if for example you
+mistype the above as @code{\settowidth@{\aplhabetwidth@}@{abc...@}},
+then you get something like @samp{Undefined control sequence. <argument>
+\aplhabetwidth}. If you leave the backslash out of @var{len}, as in
+@code{\settoheight@{alphabetwidth@}@{...@}} then you get something like
+@samp{Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox}.
+
+
+@node Making paragraphs
+@chapter Making paragraphs
+
+@cindex making paragraphs
+@cindex paragraphs
+
+To start a paragraph, just type some text. To end the current
+paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, separated by
+two empty lines.
+
+@example
+It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession
+of a good fortune, must be in want of a wife.
+
+However little known the feelings or views of such a man may be on his
+first entering a neighbourhood, this truth is so well fixed in the minds
+of the surrounding families, that he is considered the rightful property
+of some one or other of their daughters.
+
+``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day,
+``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
+@end example
+
+The separator lines must be empty, including not containing a comment
+character, @code{%}.
+
+Once @LaTeX{} has gathered all of a paragraph's contents it divides that
+content into lines in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph
+(@pxref{Line breaking}).
+
+There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don't put a
+blank line in math mode (@pxref{Modes}); here the line before the
+@code{\end@{equation@}}
+
+@example
+\begin@{equation@}
+ 2^@{|S|@} > |S|
+
+\end@{equation@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+will get you the error @samp{Missing $ inserted}. Similarly, the blank
+line in this @code{section} argument
+
+@example
+\section@{aaa
+
+bbb@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+gets @samp{Runaway argument? @{aaa ! Paragraph ended before \@@sect was
+complete}.
+
+
+@menu
+* \par:: End the current paragraph.
+* \indent & \noindent:: Go into horizontal mode, possibly with an indent.
+* \parindent & \parskip:: Space added before paragraphs.
+* Marginal notes:: Put remarks in the margin.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \par
+@section @code{\par}
+
+@findex \par
+@cindex paragraph, ending
+
+Synopsis (note that while reading the input @TeX{} converts two
+consecutive newlines to a @code{\par}):
+
+@example
+\par
+@end example
+
+End the current paragraph. The usual way to separate paragraphs is with
+a blank line but the @code{\par} command is entirely equivalent. This
+command is robust (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+This example uses @code{\par} rather than a blank line simply for
+readability.
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\syllabusLegalese@}@{%
+ \whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou@}
+@end example
+
+In LR mode or a vertical mode the @code{\par} command does nothing but
+it terminates paragraph mode, switching @LaTeX{} to vertical mode
+(@pxref{Modes}).
+
+You cannot use the @code{\par} command in a math mode. You also cannot
+use it in the argument of many commands, such as the @code{\section}
+command (@pxref{Making paragraphs} and @ref{\newcommand &
+\renewcommand}).
+
+The @code{\par} command is not the same as the @code{\paragraph}
+command. The latter is, like @code{\section} or @code{\subsection}, a
+sectioning unit used by the standard @LaTeX{} documents
+(@pxref{\subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph}).
+
+The @code{\par} command is not the same as @code{\newline} or the line
+break double backslash, @code{\\}. The difference is that @code{\par}
+ends the paragraph, not just the line, and also triggers the addition of
+the between-paragraph vertical space @code{\parskip} (@pxref{\parindent
+& \parskip}).
+
+The output from this example
+
+@example
+xyz
+
+\setlength@{\parindent@}@{3in@}
+\setlength@{\parskip@}@{5in@}
+\noindent test\indent test1\par test2
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+is: after @samp{xyz} there is a vertical skip of 5@tie{}inches and then
+@samp{test} appears, aligned with the left margin. On the same line,
+there is an empty horizontal space of 3@tie{}inches and then
+@samp{test1} appears. Finally. there is a vertical space of
+5@tie{}inches, followed by a fresh paragraph with a paragraph indent of
+3@tie{}inches, and then @LaTeX{} puts the text @samp{test2}.
+
+
+@node \indent & \noindent
+@section @code{\indent} & @code{\noindent}
+
+@findex \indent
+@findex \noindent
+@findex \parindent
+@cindex indent, forcing
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\indent
+@end example
+
+@noindent or
+
+@example
+\noindent
+@end example
+
+Go into horizontal mode (@pxref{Modes}). The @code{\indent} command
+first outputs an empty box whose width is @code{\parindent}. These
+commands are robust (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line.
+@xref{\par} for the difference between this command and @code{\par}. To
+start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted
+paragraph, use @code{\noindent}.
+
+In the middle of a paragraph the @code{\noindent} command has no effect,
+because @LaTeX{} is already in horizontal mode there. The
+@code{\indent} command's only effect is to output a space.
+
+This example starts a fresh paragraph.
+
+@example
+... end of the prior paragraph.
+
+\noindent This paragraph is not indented.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+and this continues an interrupted paragraph.
+
+@example
+The data
+
+\begin@{center@}
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{rl@} ... \end@{tabular@}
+\end@{center@}
+
+\noindent shows this clearly.
+@end example
+
+To omit indentation in the entire document put
+@code{\setlength@{\parindent@}@{0pt@}} in the preamble. If you do that,
+you may want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs,
+@code{\parskip} (@pxref{\parindent & \parskip}).
+
+@PkgIndex{indentfirst}
+Default @LaTeX{} styles have the first paragraph after a section that is
+not indented, as is traditional typesetting in English. To change that,
+look on CTAN for the package @code{indentfirst}.
+
+
+@node \parindent & \parskip
+@section @code{\parindent} & @code{\parskip}
+
+@findex \parindent
+@findex \parskip
+@cindex paragraph indentation
+@cindex vertical space before paragraphs
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\setlength@{\parskip@}@{@var{horizontal len}@}
+\setlength@{\parinden@}@{@var{vertical len}@}
+@end example
+
+Both are a rubber lengths (@pxref{Lengths}). They give the indentation
+of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages
+(@pxref{minipage}), and the vertical space between paragraphs.
+
+This, put in the preamble,
+
+@example
+\setlength@{\parindent@}@{0em@}
+\setlength@{\parskip@}@{1ex@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented,
+but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase
+@samp{x}.
+
+In standard @LaTeX{} documents, the default value for @code{\parindent}
+in one-column documents is @code{15pt} when the default text size is
+@code{10pt} , @code{17pt} for @code{11pt}, and @code{1.5em} for
+@code{12pt}. In two-column documents it is @code{1em}. The default
+value for @code{\parskip} in @LaTeX{}'s standard document styles is
+@code{0pt plus1pt}.
+
+
+@node Marginal notes
+@section Marginal notes
+
+@cindex marginal notes
+@cindex notes in the margin
+@cindex remarks in the margin
+@findex \marginpar
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\marginpar@{@var{right}@}
+\marginpar[@var{left}]@{@var{right}@}
+@end example
+
+Create a note in the margin. The first line of the note will have the
+same baseline as the line in the text where the @code{\marginpar}
+occurs.
+
+The margin that @LaTeX{} uses for the note depends on the current layout
+(@pxref{Document class options}) and also on @code{\reversemarginpar}
+(see below). If you are using one-sided layout (document option
+@code{oneside}) then it goes in the right margin. If you are using
+two-sided layout (document option @code{twoside}) then it goes in the
+outside margin. If you are in two-column layout (document option
+@code{twocolumn}) then it goes in the nearest margin.
+
+@findex \reversemarginpar
+@findex \normalmarginpar
+If you declare @code{\reversemarginpar} then @LaTeX{} will place
+subsequent marginal notes in the opposite margin to that given in the
+prior paragraph. Revert that to the default position with
+@code{\normalmarginpar}.
+
+When you specify the optional argument @var{left} then it is used for
+a note in the left margin, while the mandatory argument @var{right} is
+used for a note in the right margin.
+
+Normally, a note's first word will not be hyphenated. You can enable
+hyphenation there by beginning @var{left} or @var{right} with
+@code{\hspace@{0pt@}}.
+
+These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \marginparpush
+@anchor{marginal notes marginparpush}
+Minimum vertical space between notes; default @samp{7pt} for
+@samp{12pt} documents, @samp{5pt} else.
+
+@item \marginparsep
+@anchor{marginal notes marginparsep}
+Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default
+@samp{11pt} for @samp{10pt} documents, @samp{10pt} else.
+
+@item \marginparwidth
+@anchor{marginal notes marginparwidth}
+Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided @samp{10pt} document
+is @samp{90pt}, @samp{83pt} for @samp{11pt}, and @samp{68pt} for
+@samp{12pt}; @samp{17pt} more in each case for a two-sided document.
+In two column mode, the default is @samp{48pt}.
+
+@end ftable
+
+The standard @LaTeX{} routine for marginal notes does not prevent
+notes from falling off the bottom of the page.
+@c @TeX{} FAQ entry on this topic (xx when there):
+@c @url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=marginparside}.
+@c (+marginfix)
+
+
+@node Math formulas
+@chapter Math formulas
+
+@cindex math formulas
+@cindex formulas, math
+@cindex math mode, entering
+@EnvIndex{math}
+@EnvIndex{displaymath}
+@EnvIndex{equation}
+
+Produce mathematical text by putting @LaTeX{} into math mode or display
+math mode (@pxref{Modes}). This example shows both.
+
+@example
+The wave equation for \( u \) is
+\begin@{displaymath@}
+ \frac@{\partial^2u@}@{\partial t^2@} = c^2\nabla^2u
+\end@{displaymath@}
+where \( \nabla^2 \) is the spatial Laplacian and \( c \) is constant.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Math mode is for inline mathematics. In the above example it is invoked
+by the starting @code{\(} and finished by the matching ending @code{\)}.
+Display math mode is for displayed equations and here is invoked by the
+@code{displaymath} environment. Note that any mathematical text
+whatever, including mathematical text consisting of just one character,
+is handled in math mode.
+
+When in math mode or display math mode, @LaTeX{} handles many aspects of
+your input text differently than in other text modes. For example,
+
+@example
+contrast x+y with \( x+y \)
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+in math mode the letters are in italics and the spacing around the plus
+sign is different.
+
+There are three ways to make inline formulas, to put @LaTeX{} in math
+mode.
+
+@example
+\( @var{mathematical material} \)
+$ @var{mathematical material} $
+\begin@{math@} @var{mathematical material} \end@{math@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The first form is preferred and the second is quite common, but the
+third form is rarely used. You can sometimes use one and sometimes
+another, as in @code{\(x\) and $y$}. You can use these in paragraph
+mode or in LR mode (@pxref{Modes}).
+
+To make displayed formulas, put @LaTeX{} into display math mode with
+either:
+
+@example
+\begin@{displaymath@}
+ @var{mathematical material}
+\end@{displaymath@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\begin@{equation@}
+ @var{mathematical material}
+\end@{equation@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+(@pxref{displaymath}, @pxref{equation}). The only difference is that
+with the @code{equation} environment, @LaTeX{} puts a formula number
+alongside the formula. The construct @code{\[ @var{math} \]} is
+equivalent to @code{\begin@{displaymath@} @var{math}
+\end@{displaymath@}}. These environments can only be used in paragraph
+mode (@pxref{Modes}).
+
+@findex \displaystyle
+The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some differences.
+One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts; in display
+math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they are closer
+together.
+
+Sometimes you want the display math typographical treatment to happen in
+the inline math mode. For this, the @code{\displaystyle} declaration
+forces the size and style of the formula to be that of
+@code{displaymath}. Thus @code{\(\displaystyle \sum_@{n=0@}^\infty
+x_n\)} will have the limits above and below the summation sign, not next
+to it. Another example is that
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{r|cc@}
+ \textsc@{Name@} &\textsc@{Series@} &\textsc@{Sum@} \\ \hline
+ Arithmetic &\( a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b) \)
+ &\( na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac@{b@}@{2@}\) \\
+ Geometric &\( a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^@{n-1@} \)
+ &\(\displaystyle a\cdot\frac@{1-b^n@}@{1-b@}\) \\
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+because it has no @code{\displaystyle}, the @samp{Arithmetic} line's
+fraction will be scrunched. But, because of its @code{\displaystyle},
+the @samp{Geometric} line's fraction will be easy to read, with
+characters the same size as in the rest of the line.
+
+@PkgIndex{amsmath}
+@PkgIndex{amsfonts}
+@PkgIndex{mathtools}
+The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of
+packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics,
+@file{amsmath} and @file{amssymb} (also be aware of the @file{mathtools}
+package that is an extension to, and loads, @file{amsmath}). New
+documents that will have mathematical text should use these packages.
+Descriptions of these packages is outside the scope of this document;
+see their documentation on CTAN.
+
+@menu
+* Subscripts & superscripts:: Also known as exponent or index.
+* Math symbols:: Various mathematical squiggles.
+* Math functions:: Math function names like sin and exp.
+* Math accents:: Accents in math.
+* Over- and Underlining:: Things over or under formulas.
+* Spacing in math mode:: Thick, medium, thin, and negative spaces.
+* Math miscellany:: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Subscripts & superscripts
+@section Subscripts & superscripts
+
+@cindex superscript
+@cindex subscript
+@cindex exponent
+@findex _
+@findex ^
+
+Synopsis (in math mode or display math mode), one of:
+
+@example
+@var{base}^@var{exp}
+@var{base}^@{@var{exp}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or, one of:
+
+@example
+@var{base}_@var{exp}
+@var{base}_@{@var{exp}@}
+@end example
+
+Make @var{exp} appear as a superscript of @var{base} (with the caret
+character,@tie{}@code{^}) or a subscript (with
+underscore,@tie{}@code{_}).
+
+In this example the @code{0}'s and @code{1}'s are subscripts while the
+@code{2}'s are superscripts.
+
+@example
+\( (x_0+x_1)^2 \leq (x_0)^2+(x_1)^2 \)
+@end example
+
+To have the subscript or superscript contain more than one character,
+surround the expression with curly braces, as in @code{e^@{-2x@}}.
+This example's fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression
+for the exponent.
+
+@example
+\begin@{displaymath@}
+ (3^3)^3=27^3=19\,683
+ \qquad
+ 3^@{(3^3)@}=3^@{27@}=7\,625\,597\,484\,987
+\end@{displaymath@}
+@end example
+
+@LaTeX{} knows how to handle a superscript on a superscript, or a
+subscript on a subscript, or supers on subs, or subs on supers. So,
+expressions such as @code{e^@{x^2@}} and @code{x_@{i_0@}} give correct
+output. Note the use in those expressions of curly braces to give the
+@var{base} a determined @var{exp}. If you enter @code{\(3^3^3\)} then
+you get @samp{Double superscript}.
+
+@LaTeX{} does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a
+superscript. In this example the integral has both. They come out in
+the correct place without any author intervention.
+
+@example
+\begin@{displaymath@}
+ \int_@{x=a@}^b f'(x)\,dx = f(b)-f(a)
+\end@{displaymath@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Note the parentheses around @code{x=a} to make the entire expression a
+subscript.
+
+To put a superscript or subscript before a symbol, use a construct like
+@code{@{@}_t K^2}. The empty curly braces @code{@{@}} give the
+subscript something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally
+attaching to a prior symbols.
+
+Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or
+display math mode, as in @code{the expression x^2}, will get you
+the error @samp{Missing $ inserted}.
+
+@PkgIndex{mhchem}
+A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is to
+typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as
+@file{mhchem}; see CTAN.
+
+
+@node Math symbols
+@section Math symbols
+
+@cindex math symbols
+@cindex symbols, math
+@cindex greek letters
+
+@PkgIndex{symbols}
+
+@LaTeX{} provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that
+anyone uses. For example, if you include @code{$\pi$} in your source,
+you will get the pi symbol @BES{03C0,\pi}. See the @file{Comprehensive
+@LaTeX{} Symbol List} at
+@url{https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/}.
+
+Here is a list of commonly-used symbols. It is by no means exhaustive.
+Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its symbol class,
+which determines the spacing around it, is given in parenthesis. Unless
+said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can be used only in math
+mode. To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current
+mode, see @ref{\ensuremath}.
+
+@c xx Add Negation: for negations of relevant symbols
+@c Useful: http://www.w3.org/TR/WD-math-970515/section6.html
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \|
+@BES{2225,\|} Parallel (relation). Synonym:@tie{}@code{\parallel}.
+
+@item \aleph
+@BES{2135,\aleph} Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
+
+@item \alpha
+@BES{03B1,\alpha} Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
+
+@item \amalg
+@BES{2A3F,\amalg} Disjoint union (binary)
+
+@item \angle
+@BES{2220,\angle} Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than
+sign@tie{}@code{<} and angle bracket@tie{}@code{\langle}.
+
+@item \approx
+@BES{2248,\approx} Almost equal to (relation).
+
+@item \ast
+@BES{2217,\ast} Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed
+(binary). Synonym:@tie{}@code{*}, which is often a superscript or
+subscript, as in the Kleene star. Similar:@tie{}@code{\star}, which is
+five-pointed, and is sometimes used as a general binary operation, and
+sometimes reserved for cross-correlation.
+
+@item \asymp
+@BES{224D,\asymp} Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
+
+@item \backslash
+\ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus@tie{}@code{\setminus}, and
+@code{\textbackslash} for backslash outside of math mode.
+
+@item \beta
+@BES{03B2,\beta} Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).
+
+@item \bigcap
+@BES{22C2,\bigcap} Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
+binary intersection@tie{}@code{\cap}.
+
+@item \bigcirc
+@BES{26AA,\bigcirc} Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function
+composition@tie{}@code{\circ}.
+@c bb Best unicode symbol for this?
+
+@item \bigcup
+@BES{22C3,\bigcup} Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary
+union@tie{}@code{\cup}.
+
+@item \bigodot
+@BES{2A00,\bigodot} Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).
+
+@item \bigoplus
+@BES{2A01,\bigoplus} Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).
+
+@item \bigotimes
+@BES{2A02,\bigotimes} Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
+
+@item \bigtriangledown
+@BES{25BD,\bigtriangledown} Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down
+(operator).
+
+@item \bigtriangleup
+@BES{25B3,\bigtriangleup} Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up (operator).
+
+@item \bigsqcup
+@BES{2A06,\bigsqcup} Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).
+
+@item \biguplus
+@BES{2A04,\biguplus} Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus
+(operator). (Note that the name has only one p.)
+
+@item \bigvee
+@BES{22C1,\bigvee} Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).
+
+@item \bigwedge
+@BES{22C0,\bigwedge} Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
+
+@item \bot
+@BES{22A5,} Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered
+set, or a contradiction (ordinary). See also@tie{}@code{\top}.
+
+@item \bowtie
+@BES{22C8,\bowtie} Natural join of two relations (relation).
+
+@item \Box
+@BES{25A1,} Modal operator for necessity; square open box
+(ordinary). @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
+@c bb Best Unicode equivalent?
+
+@item \bullet
+@cindex bullet symbol
+@BES{2022,\bullet} Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication
+dot@tie{}@code{\cdot}.
+
+@item \cap
+@BES{2229,\cap} Intersection of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator@tie{}@code{\bigcap}.
+
+@item \cdot
+@BES{22C5,\cdot} Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet
+dot@tie{}@code{\bullet}.
+
+@item \chi
+@BES{03C7,\chi} Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary).
+
+@item \circ
+@BES{2218,\circ} Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar:
+variable-sized operator@tie{}@code{\bigcirc}.
+
+@item \clubsuit
+@BES{2663,\clubsuit} Club card suit (ordinary).
+
+@item \complement
+@BES{2201,} Set complement, used as a superscript as in
+@code{$S^\complement$} (ordinary). @value{NeedsAMSSymb} Also used:
+@code{$S^@{\mathsf@{c@}@}$} or@tie{}@code{$\bar@{S@}$}.
+
+@item \cong
+@BES{2245,\cong} Congruent (relation).
+
+@item \coprod
+@BES{2210,\coprod} Coproduct (operator).
+
+@item \cup
+@BES{222A,\cup} Union of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator@tie{}@code{\bigcup}.
+
+@item \dagger
+@BES{2020,\dagger} Dagger relation (binary).
+
+@item \dashv
+@BES{22A3,\dashv} Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation). Similar:
+turnstile@tie{}@code{\vdash}.
+
+@item \ddagger
+@BES{2021,\ddagger} Double dagger relation (binary).
+
+@item \Delta
+@BES{0394,\Delta} Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary).
+
+@item \delta
+@BES{03B4,\delta} Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).
+
+@item \Diamond
+@BES{25C7,} Large diamond operator (ordinary). @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
+
+@item \diamond
+@BES{22C4,\diamond} Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large
+diamond@tie{}@code{\Diamond}, circle bullet@tie{}@code{\bullet}.
+
+@item \diamondsuit
+@BES{2662,\diamondsuit} Diamond card suit (ordinary).
+
+@item \div
+@BES{00F7,\div} Division sign (binary).
+
+@item \doteq
+@BES{2250,\doteq} Approaches the limit (relation). Similar: geometrically equal
+to@tie{}@code{\Doteq}.
+
+@item \downarrow
+@BES{2193,\downarrow} Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar:
+@code{\Downarrow} double line down arrow.
+
+@item \Downarrow
+@BES{21D3,\Downarrow} Double line down arrow (relation). Similar:
+@code{\downarrow} single line down arrow.
+
+@item \ell
+@BES{2113,\ell} Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).
+
+@item \emptyset
+@BES{2205,\emptyset} Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is
+@code{\varnothing}.
+@c bb Why Unicode has \revemptyset but no \emptyset?
+
+@item \epsilon
+@BES{03F5,\epsilon} Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to
+Greek text letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small
+letter epsilon @code{\varepsilon}@tie{}@BES{03B5,\varepsilon}. Related:
+the set membership relation @code{\in}@tie{}@BES{2208,\in}.
+@c src: David Carlisle http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/98018/339 and
+@c Unicode referenced there asserts varepsilon is much more widely used.
+
+@item \equiv
+@BES{2261,\equiv} Equivalence (relation).
+
+@item \eta
+@BES{03B7,\eta} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \exists
+@BES{2203,\exists} Existential quantifier (ordinary).
+
+@item \flat
+@BES{266D,\flat} Musical flat (ordinary).
+
+@item \forall
+@BES{2200,\forall} Universal quantifier (ordinary).
+
+@item \frown
+@BES{2322,\frown} Downward curving arc (ordinary).
+
+@item \Gamma
+@BES{0393,\Gamma} uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \gamma
+@BES{03B3,\gamma} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \ge
+@BES{2265,\ge} Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for@tie{}@code{\geq}.
+
+@item \geq
+@BES{2265,\geq} Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for@tie{}@code{\ge}.
+
+@item \gets
+@BES{2190,\gets} Is assigned the value (relation).
+Synonym:@tie{}@code{\leftarrow}.
+
+@item \gg
+@BES{226B,\gg} Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less
+than@tie{}@code{\ll}.
+
+@item \hbar
+@BES{210F,\hbar} Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).
+
+@item \heartsuit
+@BES{2661,\heartsuit} Heart card suit (ordinary).
+
+@item \hookleftarrow
+@BES{21A9,\hookleftarrow} Hooked left arrow (relation).
+
+@item \hookrightarrow
+@BES{21AA,\hookrightarrow} Hooked right arrow (relation).
+
+@item \iff
+@BES{27F7,\iff} If and only if (relation). It is @code{\Longleftrightarrow}
+with a @code{\thickmuskip} on either side.
+
+@item \Im
+@BES{2111,\Im} Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part@tie{}@code{\Re}.
+
+@item \imath
+@cindex dotless i, math
+Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (@pxref{Math
+accents}).
+
+@item \in
+@BES{2208,\in} Set element (relation). See also: lowercase lunate
+epsilon@tie{}@code{\epsilon}@BES{03F5,\epsilon} and small letter script
+epsilon@tie{}@code{\varepsilon}.
+
+@item \infty
+@BES{221E,\infty} Infinity (ordinary).
+
+@item \int
+@BES{222B,\int} Integral (operator).
+
+@item \iota
+@BES{03B9,\iota} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \Join
+@BES{2A1D,} Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain
+@TeX{}.
+
+@item \jmath
+@cindex dotless j, math
+Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (@pxref{Math
+accents}).
+
+@item \kappa
+@BES{03BA,\kappa} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \Lambda
+@BES{039B,\Lambda} uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \lambda
+@BES{03BB,\lambda} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \land
+@BES{2227,\land} Logical and (binary). This is a synonym for @code{\wedge}.
+See also logical or@tie{}@code{\lor}.
+
+@item \langle
+@BES{27E8,\langle} Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar:
+less-than@tie{}@code{<}. Matches@tie{}@code{\rangle}.
+
+@item \lbrace
+@BES{007B,\lbrace} Left curly brace
+(opening). Synonym:@tie{}@code{\@{}. Matches@tie{}@code{\rbrace}.
+
+@item \lbrack
+@BES{005B,\lbrack} Left square bracket (opening).
+Synonym:@tie{}@code{[}. Matches@tie{}@code{\rbrack}.
+
+@item \lceil
+@BES{2308,\lceil} Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the bottom
+shaved off (opening). Matches@tie{}@code{\rceil}.
+
+@item \le
+@BES{2264,\le} Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for@tie{}@code{\leq}.
+
+@item \leadsto
+@BES{21DD,} Squiggly right arrow (relation). @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
+To get this symbol outside of math mode you can put
+@code{\newcommand*@{\Leadsto@}@{\ensuremath@{\leadsto@}@}} in the
+preamble and then use @code{\Leadsto} instead.
+@c bb Best Unicode equivalent?
+
+@item \Leftarrow
+@BES{21D0,\Leftarrow} Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation). Similar:
+single-line left arrow@tie{}@code{\leftarrow}.
+
+@item \leftarrow
+@BES{2190,\leftarrow} Single-line left arrow (relation).
+Synonym:@tie{}@code{\gets}. Similar: double-line left
+arrow@tie{}@code{\Leftarrow}.
+
+@item \leftharpoondown
+@BES{21BD,\leftharpoondown} Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).
+
+@item \leftharpoonup
+@BES{21BC,\leftharpoonup} Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).
+
+@item \Leftrightarrow
+@BES{21D4,\Leftrightarrow} Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation).
+Similar: single-line double headed arrow@tie{}@code{\leftrightarrow}.
+
+@item \leftrightarrow
+@BES{2194,\leftrightarrow} Single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
+double-line double headed arrow@tie{}@code{\Leftrightarrow}.
+
+@item \leq
+@BES{2264,\leq} Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for@tie{}@code{\le}.
+
+@item \lfloor
+@BES{230A,\lfloor} Left floor bracket (opening). Matches:@tie{}@code{\floor}.
+
+@item \lhd
+@BES{25C1,} Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary).
+@value{NeedsAMSSymb} For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
+@file{amssymb} and use@tie{}@code{\vartriangleleft} (which is a relation
+and so gives better spacing).
+
+@item \ll
+@BES{226A,\ll} Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater
+than@tie{}@code{\gg}.
+
+@item \lnot
+@BES{00AC,\lnot} Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym:@tie{}@code{\neg}.
+
+@item \longleftarrow
+@BES{27F5,\longleftarrow} Long single-line left arrow (relation). Similar: long
+double-line left arrow@tie{}@code{\Longleftarrow}.
+
+@item \longleftrightarrow
+@BES{27F7,\longleftrightarrow} Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: long
+double-line double-headed arrow@tie{}@code{\Longleftrightarrow}.
+
+@item \longmapsto
+@BES{27FC,\longmapsto} Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
+(relation). Similar: shorter version@tie{}@code{\mapsto}.
+
+@item \longrightarrow
+@BES{27F6,\longrightarrow} Long single-line right arrow (relation). Similar: long
+double-line right arrow@tie{}@code{\Longrightarrow}.
+
+@item \lor
+@BES{2228,\lor} Logical or (binary). Synonym: wedge@tie{}@code{\wedge}.
+
+@item \mapsto
+@BES{21A6,\mapsto} Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar (relation).
+Similar: longer version@tie{}@code{\longmapsto}.
+
+@item \mho
+@BES{2127,} Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
+@value{NeedsAMSSymb}
+
+@item \mid
+@BES{2223,\mid} Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of
+@code{\mid} is for a set @code{\@{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\@}}.
+
+Similar: @code{\vert} and@tie{}@code{|} produce the same single-line
+vertical bar symbol but without any spacing (they fall in class
+ordinary) and you should not use them as relations but instead only as
+ordinals, i.e., footnote symbols. For absolute value, see the entry
+for@tie{}@code{\vert} and for norm see the entry for@tie{}@code{\Vert}.
+
+@item \models
+@BES{22A8,\models} Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash
+(relation). Similar: long double dash@tie{}@code{\vDash}.
+
+@item \mp
+@BES{2213,\mp} Minus or plus (relation).
+
+@item \mu
+@BES{03BC,\mu} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \nabla
+@BES{2207,\nabla} Hamilton's del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
+
+@item \natural
+@BES{266E,\natural} Musical natural notation (ordinary).
+
+@item \ne
+@BES{2260,\ne} Not equal (relation). Synonym:@tie{}@code{\neq}.
+
+@item \nearrow
+@BES{2197,\nearrow} North-east arrow (relation).
+
+@item \neg
+@BES{00AC,\neg} Logical negation (ordinary).
+Synonym:@tie{}@code{\lnot}. Sometimes instead used for
+negation:@tie{}@code{\sim}.
+
+@item \neq
+@BES{2260,\neq} Not equal (relation). Synonym:@tie{}@code{\ne}.
+
+@item \ni
+@BES{220B,\ni} Reflected membership epsilon; has the member
+(relation). Synonym:@tie{}@code{\owns}. Similar: is a member
+of@tie{}@code{\in}.
+
+@item \not
+@c the "@ "s put in spaces so the not slash doesn't hit the next char.
+@BES{0020,\not}@ @ @ @ Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a
+following operator (relation).
+
+Many negated operators are available that don't require @code{\not},
+particularly with the @file{amssymb} package. For example, @code{\notin}
+is typographically preferable to @code{\not\in}.
+
+@item \notin
+@BES{2209,\notin} Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset
+of@tie{}@code{\nsubseteq}.
+
+@item \nu
+@BES{03BD,\nu} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \nwarrow
+@BES{2196,\nwarrow} North-west arrow (relation).
+
+@item \odot
+@BES{2299,\odot} Dot inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator@tie{}@code{\bigodot}.
+
+@item \oint
+@BES{222E,\oint} Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle
+(operator).
+
+@item \Omega
+@BES{03A9,\Omega} uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \omega
+@BES{03C9,\omega} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \ominus
+@BES{2296,\ominus} Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
+
+@item \oplus
+@BES{2295,\oplus} Plus sign inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator@tie{}@code{\bigoplus}.
+
+@item \oslash
+@BES{2298,\oslash} Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).
+
+@item \otimes
+@BES{2297,\otimes} Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary). Similar:
+variable-sized operator@tie{}@code{\bigotimes}.
+
+@item \owns
+@BES{220B,\owns} Reflected membership epsilon; has the member
+(relation). Synonym:@tie{}@code{\ni}. Similar: is a member
+of@tie{}@code{\in}.
+
+@item \parallel
+@BES{2225,\parallel} Parallel (relation). Synonym:@tie{}@code{\|}.
+
+@item \partial
+@BES{2202,\partial} Partial differential (ordinary).
+
+@item \perp
+@BES{27C2,\perp} Perpendicular (relation). Similar:@tie{}@code{\bot} uses the
+same glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class
+ordinary.
+
+@item \phi
+@BES{03D5,\phi} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+@code{\varphi}@tie{}@BES{03C6,\varphi}.
+
+@item \Pi
+@BES{03A0,\Pi} uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \pi
+@BES{03C0,\pi} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+@code{\varpi}@tie{}@BES{03D6,\varpi}.
+
+@item \pm
+@BES{00B1,\pm} Plus or minus (binary).
+
+@item \prec
+@BES{227A,\prec} Precedes (relation). Similar: less than@tie{}@code{<}.
+
+@item \preceq
+@BES{2AAF,\preceq} Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
+equals@tie{}@code{\leq}.
+
+@item \prime
+@BES{2032,\prime} Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary).
+Typically used as a superscript: @code{$f^\prime$}; @code{$f^\prime$}
+and @code{$f'$} produce the same result. An advantage of the second
+is that @code{$f'''$} produces the desired symbol, that is, the same
+result as @code{$f^@{\prime\prime\prime@}$}, but uses rather less
+typing. You can only use @code{\prime} in math mode. Using the right
+single quote@tie{}@code{'} in text mode produces a different character
+(apostrophe).
+
+@item \prod
+@BES{220F,\prod} Product (operator).
+
+@item \propto
+@BES{221D,\propto} Is proportional to (relation)
+
+@item \Psi
+@BES{03A8,\Psi} uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \psi
+@BES{03C8,\psi} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \rangle
+@BES{27E9,\rangle} Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing).
+Similar: greater than@tie{}@code{>}. Matches:@code{\langle}.
+
+@item \rbrace
+@BES{007D,\rbrace} Right curly brace
+(closing). Synonym:@tie{}@code{\@}}. Matches@tie{}@code{\lbrace}.
+
+@item \rbrack
+@BES{005D,\rbrack} Right square bracket
+(closing). Synonym:@tie{}@code{]}. Matches@tie{}@code{\lbrack}.
+
+@item \rceil
+@BES{2309,\rceil} Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches@tie{}@code{\lceil}.
+
+@item \Re
+@BES{211C,\Re} Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary). Related:
+double-line, or blackboard bold, R@tie{}@code{\mathbb@{R@}}; to access
+this, load the @file{amsfonts} package.
+
+@item \restriction
+@BES{21BE,} Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym:
+@code{\upharpoonright}. @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
+
+@item \revemptyset
+@BES{29B0,} Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related:
+@code{\varnothing}. @value{NeedsSTIX}
+
+@item \rfloor
+@BES{230B,\rfloor} Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
+off (closing). Matches@tie{}@code{\lfloor}.
+
+@item \rhd
+@BES{25C1,} Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary).
+@value{NeedsAMSSymb} For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead
+load @file{amssymb} and use@tie{}@code{\vartriangleright} (which is a
+relation and so gives better spacing).
+
+@item \rho
+@BES{03C1,\rho} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+@code{\varrho}@tie{}@BES{03F1,\varrho}.
+
+@item \Rightarrow
+@BES{21D2,\Rightarrow} Implies, right-pointing double line arrow
+(relation). Similar: right single-line arrow@tie{}@code{\rightarrow}.
+
+@item \rightarrow
+@BES{2192,\rightarrow} Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+Synonym:@tie{}@code{\to}. Similar: right double line
+arrow@tie{}@code{\Rightarrow}.
+
+@item \rightharpoondown
+@BES{21C1,\rightharpoondown} Right-pointing harpoon with barb below
+the line (relation).
+
+@item \rightharpoonup
+@BES{21C0,\rightharpoonup} Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the
+line (relation).
+
+@item \rightleftharpoons
+@BES{21CC,\rightleftharpoons} Right harpoon up above left harpoon down
+(relation).
+
+@item \searrow
+@BES{2198,\searrow} Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
+
+@item \setminus
+@BES{29F5,\setminus} Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash,
+like \ (binary). Similar: backslash@tie{}@code{\backslash} and also
+@code{\textbackslash} outside of math mode.
+
+@item \sharp
+@BES{266F,\sharp} Musical sharp (ordinary).
+
+@item \Sigma
+@BES{03A3,\Sigma} uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \sigma
+@BES{03C3,\sigma} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+@code{\varsigma}@tie{}@BES{03C2,\varsigma}.
+
+@item \sim
+@BES{223C,\sim} Similar, in a relation (relation).
+
+@item \simeq
+@BES{2243,\simeq} Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).
+
+@item \smallint
+@BES{222B,\smallint} Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a
+display (operator).
+
+@item \smile
+@BES{2323,\smile} Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
+
+@item \spadesuit
+@BES{2660,\spadesuit} Spade card suit (ordinary).
+
+@item \sqcap
+@BES{2293,\sqcap} Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar:
+intersection@tie{}@code{cap}.
+
+@item \sqcup
+@BES{2294,\sqcup} Square union symbol (binary). Similar:
+union@tie{}@code{cup}. Related: variable-sized
+operator@tie{}@code{\bigsqcup}.
+
+@item \sqsubset
+@BES{228F,} Square subset symbol (relation). Similar:
+subset@tie{}@code{\subset}. @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
+
+@item \sqsubseteq
+@BES{2291,\sqsubseteq} Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or
+equal to@tie{}@code{\subseteq}.
+
+@item \sqsupset
+@BES{2290,} Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
+superset@tie{}@code{\supset}. @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
+
+@item \sqsupseteq
+@BES{2292,\sqsupseteq} Square superset or equal symbol (binary).
+Similar: superset or equal@tie{}@code{\supseteq}.
+
+@item \star
+@BES{22C6,\star} Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary
+operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary).
+Similar: the synonyms asterisk@tie{}@code{*} and @code{\ast}, which
+are six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript,
+as with the Kleene star.
+
+@item \subset
+@BES{2282,\subset} Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).
+
+@item \subseteq
+@BES{2286,\subseteq} Subset or equal to (relation).
+
+@item \succ
+@BES{227B,\succ} Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less
+than@tie{}@code{>}.
+
+@item \succeq
+@BES{2AB0,\succeq} Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less
+than or equal to@tie{}@code{\leq}.
+
+@item \sum
+@BES{2211,\sum} Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital
+sigma@tie{}@code{\Sigma}.
+
+@item \supset
+@BES{2283,\supset} Superset (relation).
+
+@item \supseteq
+@BES{2287,\supseteq} Superset or equal to (relation).
+
+@item \surd
+@BES{221A,\surd} Radical symbol (ordinary). The @LaTeX{} command
+@code{\sqrt@{...@}} typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar
+that extends to cover the argument.
+
+@item \swarrow
+@BES{2199,\swarrow} Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).
+
+@item \tau
+@BES{03C4,\tau} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \theta
+@BES{03B8,\theta} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+@code{\vartheta}@tie{}@BES{03D1,\vartheta}.
+
+@item \times
+@BES{00D7,\times} Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See
+also@tie{}@code{\cdot}.
+
+@item \to
+@BES{2192,\to} Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+Synonym:@tie{}@code{\rightarrow}.
+
+@item \top
+@BES{22A4,} Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set
+(ordinary). See also@tie{}@code{\bot}.
+
+@item \triangle
+@BES{25B3,\triangle} Triangle (ordinary).
+
+@item \triangleleft
+@BES{25C1,\triangleleft} Not-filled triangle pointing left
+(binary). Similar:@tie{}@code{\lhd}. For the normal subgroup symbol you
+should load @file{amssymb} and use@tie{}@code{\vartriangleleft} (which
+is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+
+@item \triangleright
+@BES{25B7,\triangleright} Not-filled triangle pointing right
+(binary). For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
+@file{amssymb} and use@tie{}@code{\vartriangleright} (which is a
+relation and so gives better spacing).
+
+@item \unlhd
+@BES{22B4,} Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+triangle, with a line under (binary). @value{NeedsAMSSymb} For the
+normal subgroup symbol load @file{amssymb} and
+use@tie{}@code{\vartrianglelefteq} (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
+
+@item \unrhd
+@BES{22B5,} Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+triangle, with a line under (binary). @value{NeedsAMSSymb} For the
+normal subgroup symbol load @file{amssymb} and
+use@tie{}@code{\vartrianglerighteq} (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
+
+@item \Uparrow
+@BES{21D1,\Uparrow} Double-line upward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line up-pointing
+arrow@tie{}@code{\uparrow}.
+
+@item \uparrow
+@BES{2191,\uparrow} Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges
+(relation). Similar: double-line up-pointing
+arrow@tie{}@code{\Uparrow}.
+
+@item \Updownarrow
+@BES{21D5,\Updownarrow} Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+arrow@tie{}@code{\updownarrow}.
+
+@item \updownarrow
+@BES{2195,\updownarrow} Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+arrow@tie{}@code{\Updownarrow}.
+
+@item \upharpoonright
+@BES{21BE,} Up harpoon, with barb on right side
+(relation). Synonym:@tie{}@code{@backslashchar{}restriction}.
+@value{NeedsAMSSymb}
+
+@item \uplus
+@BES{228E,\uplus} Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in
+the middle (binary). Similar: union@tie{}@code{\cup}. Related:
+variable-sized operator@tie{}@code{\biguplus}.
+
+@item \Upsilon
+@BES{03A5,\Upsilon} uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \upsilon
+@BES{03C5,\upsilon} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \varepsilon
+@BES{03B5,\varepsilon} Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is
+more widely used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
+@code{\epsilon}@tie{}@BES{03F5,\epsilon}. Related: set
+membership@tie{}@code{\in}.
+
+@item \vanothing
+@BES{2205,} Empty set symbol. Similar: @code{\emptyset}. Related:
+@code{\revemptyset}. @value{NeedsAMSSymb}
+
+@item \varphi
+@BES{03C6,\varphi} Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is @code{\phi}@tie{}@BES{03D5,\phi}.
+
+@item \varpi
+@BES{03D6,\varpi} Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is @code{\pi}@tie{}@BES{03C0,\pi}.
+
+@item \varrho
+@BES{03F1,\varrho} Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is @code{\rho}@tie{}@BES{03C1,\rho}.
+
+@item \varsigma
+@BES{03C2,\varsigma} Variant on the lowercase Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+@code{\sigma}@tie{}@BES{03C3,\sigma}.
+
+@item \vartheta
+@BES{03D1,\vartheta} Variant on the lowercase Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+@code{\theta}@tie{}@BES{03B8,\theta}.
+
+@item \vdash
+@BES{22A2,\vdash} Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash
+(relation). Similar: turnstile rotated a
+half-circle@tie{}@code{\dashv}.
+
+@item \vee
+@BES{2228,\vee} Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related:
+logical and@tie{}@code{\wedge}. Similar: variable-sized
+operator@tie{}@code{\bigvee}.
+
+@item \Vert
+@BES{2016,\Vert} Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
+bar@tie{}@code{\vert}.
+
+For a norm symbol, you can use the @file{mathtools} package and put in
+your preamble
+@code{\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm@{\lVert@}@{\rVert@}}. This gives you
+three command variants for double-line vertical bars that are correctly
+horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred
+version @code{$\norm*@{M^\perp@}$} then the height of the vertical bars
+will match the height of the argument, whereas with
+@code{\norm@{M^\perp@}} the bars do not grow with the height of the
+argument but instead are the default height, and @code{\norm[@var{size
+command}]@{M^\perp@}} also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
+the size given in the @var{size command}, e.g., @code{\Bigg}.
+
+@item \vert
+@BES{007C,\vert} Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line
+vertical bar@tie{}@code{\Vert}. For such that, as in the definition of a
+set, use@tie{}@code{\mid} because it is a relation.
+
+For absolute value you can use the @file{mathtools} package and in your
+preamble put
+@code{\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs@{\lvert@}@{\rvert@}}. This gives you
+three command variants for single-line vertical bars that are correctly
+horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred
+version @code{$\abs*@{\frac@{22@}@{7@}@}$} then the height of the
+vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas with
+@code{\abs@{\frac@{22@}@{7@}@}} the bars do not grow with the height of
+the argument but instead are the default height, and
+@code{\abs[@var{size command}]@{\frac@{22@}@{7@}@}} also gives bars that
+do not grow but are set to the size given in the @var{size command},
+e.g., @code{\Bigg}.
+
+@item \wedge
+@BES{2227,\wedge} Logical and (binary). Synonym:@tie{}@code{\land}. See also
+logical or @code{\vee}. Similar: variable-sized
+operator@tie{}@code{\bigwedge}.
+
+@item \wp
+@BES{2118,\wp} Weierstrass p (ordinary).
+
+@item \wr
+@BES{2240,\wr} Wreath product (binary).
+
+@item \Xi
+@BES{039E,\Xi} uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \xi
+@BES{03BE,\xi} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@item \zeta
+@BES{03B6,\zeta} Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+@end ftable
+
+The following symbols are most often used in plain text but @LaTeX{}
+provides versions to use in mathematical text.
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \mathdollar
+Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+
+@item \mathparagraph
+Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, @BES{00B6,\P}.
+
+@item \mathsection
+Section sign in math mode @BES{00A7,\S}.
+
+@item \mathsterling
+Sterling sign in math mode: @pounds{}.
+
+@item \mathunderscore
+Underscore in math mode: _.
+
+@end ftable
+
+@menu
+* Blackboard bold:: Doublestruck characters.
+* Calligraphic:: Cursive characters.
+* \boldmath & \unboldmath:: Symbols in boldface.
+* Dots:: Ellipses, etc.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Blackboard bold
+@subsection Blackboard bold
+
+@cindex blackboard bold
+@cindex doublestruck
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{amssymb@} % in preamble
+ ...
+\mathbb@{@var{uppercase-letter}@}
+@end example
+
+Provide blackboard bold symbols, sometimes also known as doublestruck
+letters, used to denote number sets such as the natural numbers, the
+integers, etc.
+
+Here
+
+@example
+\( \forall n \in \mathbb@{N@}, n^2 \geq 0 \)
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+the @code{\mathbb@{N@}} gives blackboard bold symbol @BES{2115,}
+representing the natural numbers.
+
+If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an error
+but you get strange results, including unexpected characters.
+
+There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the
+capital letters; look on CTAN.
+
+
+@node Calligraphic
+@subsection Calligraphic
+
+@cindex calligraphic fonts
+@cindex script fonts
+@cindex fonts, script
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\mathcal@{@var{uppercase-letters}@}
+@end example
+
+Use a script-like font.
+
+In this example the graph identifier is output in a cursive font.
+
+@example
+Let the graph be \( \mathcal@{G@} \).
+@end example
+
+If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not get
+an error. Instead you get unexpected output. For instance,
+@code{\mathcal@{g@}} outputs a close curly brace symbol, while
+@code{\mathcal@{+@}} outputs a plus sign.
+
+
+@node \boldmath & \unboldmath
+@subsection @code{\boldmath} & @code{\unboldmath}
+
+@cindex boldface mathematics
+@cindex symbols, boldface
+@findex \boldmath
+@findex \unboldmath
+
+Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode):
+
+@example
+\boldmath \( @var{math} \)
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\unboldmath \( @var{math} \)
+@end example
+
+@findex \boldmath
+@findex \unboldmath
+Declarations to change the letters and symbols in @var{math} to be in
+a bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular
+(non-bold) default. They must be used when not in math mode or display
+math mode (@pxref{Modes}). Both commands are fragile
+(@pxref{\protect}).
+
+In this example each @code{\boldmath} command takes place inside an
+@code{\mbox},
+
+@example
+we have $\mbox@{\boldmath \( v \)@} = 5\cdot\mbox@{\boldmath \( u \)$@}$
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+which means @code{\boldmath} is only called in a text mode, here LR
+mode, and explains why @LaTeX{} must switch to math mode to set @code{v}
+and @code{u}.
+
+If you use either command inside math mode, as with @code{Trouble: \(
+\boldmath x \)}, then you get something like @samp{LaTeX Font Warning:
+Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11} and @samp{LaTeX
+Font Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line
+11}.
+
+@PkgIndex{bm}
+There are many issues with @code{\boldmath}. New documents should use
+the @file{bm} package provided by the @LaTeX{} Project team. A complete
+description is outside the scope of this document (see the full
+documentation on CTAN) but even this small example
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{bm@} % in preamble
+...
+we have $\bm@{v@} = 5\cdot\bm@{u@}$
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+shows that it is an improvement over @code{\boldmath}.
+
+
+@node Dots
+@subsection Dots, horizontal or vertical
+
+@cindex ellipses
+@cindex dots
+
+Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern
+continues.
+
+@example
+\begin@{array@}@{cccc@}
+ a_@{0,0@} &a_@{0,1@} &a_@{0,2@} &\ldots \\
+ a_@{1,0@} &\ddots \\
+ \vdots
+\end@{array@}
+@end example
+
+@LaTeX{} provides these.
+
+@ftable @code
+@anchor{ellipses cdots}
+@item \cdots
+Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line, as
+in @BES{22EF,\cdots}. Used as: @code{\( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_@{n-1@}
+\)}.
+
+@anchor{ellipses ddots}
+@item \ddots
+Diagonal ellipsis, @BES{22F1,\ddots}. See the above array example for a
+usage.
+
+@anchor{ellipses ldots}
+@item \ldots
+Ellipsis on the baseline, @BES{2026,\ldots}. Used as: @code{\(
+x_0,\ldots x_@{n-1@} \)}. Another example is the above array example. A
+synonym is @code{\mathellipsis}. A synonym from the @file{amsmath}
+package is @code{\hdots}.
+
+You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in
+@code{The gears, brakes, \ldots@{@} are all broken}. (In a paragraph
+mode or LR mode a synonym for @code{\ldots} is @code{\dots}.)
+
+@anchor{ellipses vdots}
+@item \vdots
+Vertical ellipsis, @BES{22EE,\vdots}. See the above array example for a
+usage.
+
+@end ftable
+
+@PkgIndex{amsmath}
+The @file{amsmath} package has the command @code{\dots} to semantically
+mark up ellipses. This example produces two different-looking outputs
+for the first two uses of the @code{\dots} command.
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{amsmath@} % in preamble
+ ...
+Suppose that \( p_0, p_1, \dots, p_@{n-1@} \) lists all of the primes.
+Observe that \( p_0\cdot p_1 \dots \cdot p_@{n-1@} +1 \) is not a
+ multiple of any \( p_i \).
+Conclusion: there are infinitely many primes \( p_0, p_1, \dotsc \).
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+In the first line @LaTeX{} looks to the comma following @code{\dots} to
+determine that it should output an ellipsis on the baseline. The second
+line has a @code{\cdot} following @code{\dots} so @LaTeX{} outputs an
+ellipsis that is on the math axis, vertically centered. However, the
+third usage has no follow-on character so you have to tell @LaTeX{} what
+to do. You can use one of the commands: @code{\dotsc} if you need the
+ellipsis appropriate for a comma following, @code{\dotsb} if you need
+the ellipses that fits when the dots are followed by a binary operator
+or relation symbol, @code{\dotsi} for dots with integrals, or
+@code{\dotso} for others.
+
+
+@node Math functions
+@section Math functions
+
+@cindex math functions
+@cindex functions, math
+
+These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper
+spacing.
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \arccos
+Inverse cosine
+@iftex
+@math{\arccos}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \arcsin
+Inverse sine
+@iftex
+@math{\arcsin}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \arctan
+Inverse tangent
+@iftex
+@math{\arctan}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \arg
+Angle between the real axis and a point in the complex plane
+@iftex
+@math{\arg}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \bmod
+Binary modulo operator, used as in @code{\( 5\bmod 3=2 \)}
+@iftex
+@math{5 \bmod 3}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \cos
+Cosine
+@iftex
+@math{\cos}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \cosh
+Hyperbolic cosine
+@iftex
+@math{\cosh}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \cot
+Cotangent
+@iftex
+@math{\cot}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \coth
+Hyperbolic cotangent
+@iftex
+@math{\coth}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \csc
+Cosecant
+@iftex
+@math{\csc}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \deg
+Degrees
+@iftex
+@math{\deg}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \det
+Determinant
+@iftex
+@math{\det}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \dim
+Dimension
+@iftex
+@math{\dim}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \exp
+Exponential
+@iftex
+@math{\exp}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \gcd
+Greatest common divisor
+@iftex
+@math{\gcd}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \hom
+Homomorphism
+@iftex
+@math{\hom}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \inf
+Infinum
+@iftex
+@math{\inf}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \ker
+Kernel
+@iftex
+@math{\ker}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \lg
+Base 2 logarithm
+@iftex
+@math{\lg}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \lim
+Limit
+@iftex
+@math{\lim}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \liminf
+Limit inferior
+@iftex
+@math{\liminf}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \limsup
+Limit superior
+@iftex
+@math{\limsup}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \ln
+Natural logarithm
+@iftex
+@math{\ln}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \log
+Logarithm
+@iftex
+@math{\log}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \max
+Maximum
+@iftex
+@math{\max}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \min
+Minimum
+@iftex
+@math{\min}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \pmod
+Parenthesized modulus, as used in @code{\( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \)}
+@iftex
+@math{5\equiv 2\pmod 3}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \Pr
+Probability
+@iftex
+@math{\Pr}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \sec
+Secant
+@iftex
+@math{\sec}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \sin
+Sine
+@iftex
+@math{\sin}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \sinh
+Hyperbolic sine
+@iftex
+@math{\sinh}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \sup
+@iftex
+Supremum
+@iftex
+@math{\mathop {\rm sup}}
+@end iftex
+@ifnottex
+sup
+@end ifnottex
+@c don't try to use \sup with dvi/pdf output since that turned into a
+@c Texinfo command and it's not worth hassling with different versions
+@c when it's just three roman letters anyway.
+
+@item \tan
+Tangent
+@iftex
+@math{\tan}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \tanh
+Hyperbolic tangent
+@iftex
+@math{\tanh}
+@end iftex
+
+@end ftable
+
+@PkgIndex{amsmath}
+The @file{amsmath} package adds improvements on some of these, and also
+allows you to define your own. The full documentation is on CTAN, but
+briefly, you can define an identity operator with
+@code{\DeclareMathOperator@{\identity@}@{id@}} that is like the ones
+above but prints as @samp{id}. The starred form
+@code{\DeclareMathOperator*@{\op@}@{op@}} sets any limits above and
+below, as is traditional with @code{\lim}, @code{\sup}, or @code{\max}.
+
+
+@node Math accents
+@section Math accents
+
+@cindex math accents
+@cindex accents, mathematical
+
+@LaTeX{} provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters
+in math. These are different from accents in normal text
+(@pxref{Accents}).
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \acute
+@cindex acute accent, math
+Math acute accent
+@iftex
+@math{\acute{x}}.
+@end iftex
+
+@item \bar
+@cindex bar-over accent, math
+@cindex macron accent, math
+Math bar-over accent
+@iftex
+@math{\bar{x}}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \breve
+@cindex breve accent, math
+Math breve accent
+@iftex
+@math{\breve{x}}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \check
+@cindex check accent, math
+@cindex h@'a@v{c}ek accent, math
+Math h@'a@v{c}ek (check) accent
+@iftex
+@math{\check{x}}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \ddot
+@cindex double dot accent, math
+Math dieresis accent
+@iftex
+@math{\ddot{x}}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \dot
+@cindex overdot accent, math
+@cindex dot over accent, math
+Math dot accent
+@iftex
+@math{\dot{x}}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \grave
+@cindex grave accent, math
+Math grave accent
+@iftex
+@math{\grave{x}}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \hat
+@cindex hat accent, math
+@cindex circumflex accent, math
+Math hat (circumflex) accent
+@iftex
+@math{\hat{x}}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \mathring
+@cindex ring accent, math
+Math ring accent @c don't bother implementing in texinfo
+@iftex
+@ringaccent{x}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \tilde
+@cindex tilde accent, math
+Math tilde accent
+@iftex
+@math{\tilde{x}}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \vec
+@cindex vector symbol, math
+Math vector symbol
+@iftex
+@math{\vec{x}}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \widehat
+@cindex wide hat accent, math
+Math wide hat accent
+@iftex
+@math{\widehat{x+y}}
+@end iftex
+
+@item \widetilde
+@cindex wide tilde accent, math
+Math wide tilde accent
+@iftex
+@math{\widetilde{x+y}}
+@end iftex
+
+@end ftable
+
+When you are putting an accent on an i or a j, the tradition is to use
+one without a dot, @code{\imath} or @code{jmath} (@pxref{Math symbols}).
+
+
+@node Over- and Underlining
+@section Over- and Underlining
+
+@cindex overlining
+@cindex underlining
+
+@LaTeX{} provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or
+putting braces over or under some material.
+
+@ftable @code
+
+@item \underline@{@var{text}@}
+Underline @var{text}. Works inside math mode, and outside.
+@ifset HAS-MATH
+The result of @code{\underline@{xyz@}} is @math{\underline{xyz}}.
+@end ifset
+The line is always completely below the text, taking account of
+descenders, so in @code{\(\underline@{y@}\)} the line is lower than in
+@code{\(\underline@{x@}\)}. This command is fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+@PkgIndex{ulem}
+Note that the package @file{ulem} does text mode underlining and allows
+line breaking as well as a number of other features. See the
+documentation on CTAN. See also@tie{}@ref{\hrulefill & \dotfill} for
+producing a line, for such things as a signature.
+
+@item \overline@{@var{text}@}
+Put a horizontal line over @var{text}. Works inside math mode, and
+outside. For example, @code{\overline@{x+y@}}.
+@ifset HAS-MATH
+The result looks like: @math{\overline{x+y}}.
+@end ifset
+Note that this differs from the command @code{\bar} (@pxref{Math
+accents}).
+
+@item \underbrace@{@var{math}@}
+Put a brace under @var{math}. For example, this
+@code{(1-\underbrace@{1/2)+(1/2@}-1/3)} emphasizes the telescoping part.
+@ifset HAS-MATH
+The result looks like this: @math{(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3)}.
+@end ifset
+Attach text to the brace by using subscript, @code{_}, or superscript,
+@code{^}, as here.
+
+@example
+\begin@{displaymath@}
+ 1+1/2+\underbrace@{1/3+1/4@}_@{>1/2@}+
+ \underbrace@{1/5+1/6+1/7+1/8@}_@{>1/2@}+\cdots
+\end@{displaymath@}
+@end example
+
+The superscript appears on top of the expression, and so can look
+unconnected to the underbrace.
+
+@item \overbrace@{@var{math}@}
+Put a brace over @var{math}, as with
+@code{\overbrace@{x+x+\cdots+x@}^@{\mbox@{\(k\) times@}@}}. See also
+@code{\underbrace}.
+
+@end ftable
+
+@PkgIndex{mathtools}
+The package @file{mathtools} adds an over- and underbrace, as well as
+some improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+
+@node Spacing in math mode
+@section Spacing in math mode
+
+@cindex spacing within math mode
+@cindex math mode, spacing
+
+When typesetting mathematics, @LaTeX{} puts in spacing according to the
+normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter @code{y=m x} then
+@LaTeX{} ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x,
+as @math{y=mx}.
+
+But @LaTeX{}'s rules sometimes need tweaking. For example, in an
+integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the
+@code{f(x)} and the @code{dx}, here done with the @code{\,} command.
+
+@example
+\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
+@end example
+
+@LaTeX{} provides the commands that follow for use in math mode. Many
+of these spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
+@dfn{mu}. It is defined as 1/18@dmn{em}, where the em is taken from the
+current math symbols family (@pxref{Units of length}). Thus, a
+@code{\thickspace} is something like 5/18 times the width of
+a@tie{}@samp{M}.
+
+@table @code
+@item \;
+@findex \;
+@findex \thickspace
+@anchor{spacing in math mode thickspace}
+Synonym: @code{\thickspace}. Normally @code{5.0mu plus 5.0mu}. Math
+mode only.
+
+@item \:
+@itemx \>
+@findex \:
+@findex \>
+@findex \medspace
+@anchor{spacing in math mode medspace}
+Synonym: @code{\medspace}. Normally @code{4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu}.
+Math mode only.
+
+@item \,
+@findex \,
+@findex \thinspace
+@cindex thin space
+@anchor{Spacing in math mode/\thinspace}
+@anchor{spacing in math mode thinspace}
+Synonym: @code{\thinspace}. Normally @code{3mu}, which is 1/6@dmn{em}.
+Can be used in both math mode and text mode (@pxref{\thinspace &
+\negthinspace}).
+
+This space is widely used, for instance between the function and the
+infinitesimal in an integral @code{\int f(x)\,dx} and, if an author does
+this, before punctuation in a displayed equation.
+
+@example
+The antiderivative is
+\begin@{equation@}
+ 3x^@{-1/2@}+3^@{1/2@}\,.
+\end@{equation@}
+@end example
+
+@item \!
+@findex \!
+@findex \negthinspace
+@cindex thin space, negative
+@anchor{spacing in math mode negthinspace}
+A negative thin space. Normally @code{-3mu}. The @code{\!} command is
+math mode only but the @code{\negthinspace} command is available for
+text mode (@pxref{\thinspace & \negthinspace}).
+
+@item \quad
+@cindex quad
+@findex \quad
+@anchor{spacing in math mode quad}
+This is 18@dmn{mu}, that is, 1@dmn{em}. This is often used for space
+surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space between
+two equations inside a @code{displaymath} environment. It is available
+in both text and math mode.
+
+@item \qquad
+@findex \qquad
+@anchor{spacing in math mode qquad}
+A length of 2 quads, that is, 36@dmn{mu} = 2@dmn{em}. It is available in
+both text and math mode.
+@end table
+
+@menu
+* \smash:: Eliminate height or depth of a subformula.
+* \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom:: Make empty box with the same size as the argument.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \smash
+@subsection @code{\smash}
+
+@cindex vertical spacing, math mode
+@cindex math mode, vertical space
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\smash@{@var{subformula}@}
+@end example
+
+Typeset @var{subformula} as if its height and depth were zero.
+
+In this example the exponential is so tall that without the
+@code{\smash} command @LaTeX{} would separate its line from the line
+above it, and the uneven line spacing might be unsightly.
+
+@example
+To compute the tetration $\smash@{2^@{2^@{2^2@}@}@}$,
+evaluate from the top down, as $2^@{2^4@}=2^@{16@}=65536$.
+@end example
+
+(Because of the @code{\smash} the printed expression could run into the
+line above so you may want to wait until the final version of the
+document to make such adjustments.)
+
+This pictures the effect of @code{\smash} by using @code{\fbox} to
+surround the box that @LaTeX{} will put on the line. The
+@code{\blackbar} command makes a bar extending from 10@tie{}points below
+the baseline to 20@tie{}points above.
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\blackbar@}@{\rule[-10pt]@{5pt@}@{30pt@}@}
+\fbox@{\blackbar@}
+\fbox@{\smash@{\blackbar@}@}
+@end example
+
+The first box that @LaTeX{} places is 20@tie{}points high and
+10@tie{}points deep. But the second box is treated by @LaTeX{} as
+having zero height and zero depth, despite that the ink printed on the
+page still extends well above and below the line.
+
+The @code{\smash} command appears often in mathematics to adjust the
+size of an element that surrounds a subformula. Here the first radical
+extends below the baseline while the second lies just on the baseline.
+
+@example
+\begin@{equation@}
+\sqrt@{\sum_@{0\leq k< n@} f(k)@}
+\sqrt@{\vphantom@{\sum@}\smash@{\sum_@{0\leq k< n@}@} f(k)@}
+\end@{equation@}
+@end example
+
+Note the use of @code{\vphantom} to give the @code{\sqrt} command an
+argument with the height of the @code{\sum} (@pxref{\phantom & \vphantom
+& \hphantom}).
+
+While most often used in mathematics, the @code{\smash} command can
+appear in other contexts. However, it doesn't change into horizontal
+mode. So if it starts a paragraph then you should first put a
+@code{\leavevmode}, as in the bottom line below.
+
+@example
+xxx xxx xxx
+
+\smash@{yyy@} % no paragraph indent
+
+\leavevmode\smash@{zzz@} % usual paragraph indent
+@end example
+
+@PkgIndex{mathtools}
+The package @code{mathtools} has operators that provide even finer
+control over smashing a subformula box.
+
+
+@node \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom
+@subsection @code{\phantom} & @code{\vphantom} & @code{\hphantom}
+
+@cindex spacing, math mode
+@cindex horizontal spacing
+@cindex vertical spacing
+@cindex math mode, spacing
+@cindex invisible character
+@cindex character, invisible
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\phantom@{@var{subformula}@}
+@end example
+
+or
+
+@example
+\vphantom@{@var{subformula}@}
+@end example
+
+or
+
+@example
+\hphantom@{@var{subformula}@}
+@end example
+
+The @code{\phantom} command creates a box with the same height, depth,
+and width as @var{subformula}, but empty. That is, this command causes
+@LaTeX{} to typeset the box but not its ink. The @code{\vphantom}
+variant also produces an invisible box with the same height and depth as
+@var{subformula}, but it has width zero. And @code{\hphantom} makes a
+box with the same width as @var{subformula} but with height and depth
+zero.
+
+Without the @code{\vphantom} in this example, the top bars of the two
+square roots would be at different heights.
+
+@example
+\( \sqrt@{\vphantom@{a^3@}a@}\cdot\sqrt@{a^3@} \)
+@end example
+
+The @code{\vphantom@{a^3@}} causes the first @code{\sqrt} to have inside
+it a box of the same height as the second @code{\sqrt}, so @LaTeX{}
+makes the bars align.
+
+These commands often are combined with @code{\smash}. @xref{\smash}
+for another example of the use of @code{\vphantom}.
+
+@PkgIndex{mathtools}
+The three phantom commands appear often but note that @LaTeX{} provides
+a suite of other commands to work with box sizes that may be more
+convenient, including @code{\makebox} (@pxref{\mbox & \makebox}) as well
+as @code{\settodepth} (@pxref{\settodepth}), @code{\settoheight}
+(@pxref{\settoheight}), and @code{\settowidth} (@pxref{\settowidth}).
+In addition, the @file{mathtools} package has many commands that offer
+fine-grained control over spacing.
+
+@PkgIndex{amsmath}
+All three commands produce an ordinary box, without any special
+mathematics status. So to do something like attaching a superscript you
+should give it such a status, for example with the @code{\operatorname}
+command from the package @file{amsmath}.
+
+While most often used in mathematics, these three can appear in other
+contexts. However, they don't cause @LaTeX{} to change into horizontal
+mode. So if one of these starts a paragraph then you should prefix it
+with @code{\leavevmode}.
+
+
+@node Math miscellany
+@section Math miscellany
+
+@cindex math miscellany
+
+@LaTeX{} contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities. Here are
+some that don't fit into other categories.
+
+@menu
+* Colon character & \colon:: Colon.
+* \*:: Discretionary multiplication.
+* \frac:: Fraction.
+* \left & \right:: Paired delimiters.
+* \sqrt:: Radicals.
+* \stackrel:: Text over a relation.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Colon character & \colon
+@subsection Colon character @code{:} & @code{\colon}
+
+@cindex :
+@cindex colon character
+@findex :
+@findex \colon
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+:
+\colon
+@end example
+
+In mathematics, the colon character, @code{:}, is a relation.
+
+@example
+With side ratios \( 3:4 \) and \( 4:5 \), the triangle is right.
+@end example
+
+@PkgIndex{amsmath}
+@noindent
+Ordinary @LaTeX{} defines @code{\colon} to produce the colon character
+with the spacing appropriate for punctuation, as in set-builder notation
+@code{\@{x\colon 0\leq x<1\@}}.
+
+@PkgIndex{amsmath}
+But the widely-used @file{amsmath} package defines @code{\colon} for use
+in the definition of functions @code{f\colon D\to C}. So if you want
+the colon character as a punctuation then use @code{\mathpunct@{:@}}.
+
+
+@node \*
+@subsection @code{\*}
+
+@cindex multiplication, discretionary
+@cindex breaks, multiplication discretionary
+@cindex line breaks, multiplication discretionary
+@cindex discretionary breaks, multiplication
+@findex \*
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\*
+@end example
+
+A multiplication symbol that allows a line break. If there is a break
+then @LaTeX{} puts a @code{\times} symbol, @BES{00D7,\times}, before
+that break.
+
+In @code{\( A_1\* A_2\* A_3\* A_4 \)}, if there is no line break then
+@LaTeX{} outputs it as though it were @code{\( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \)}. If
+a line break does happen, for example between the two middle ones, then
+@LaTeX{} sets it like @code{\( A_1 A_2 \times \)}, followed by the
+break, followed by @code{\( A_3 A_4 \)}.
+
+
+@node \frac
+@subsection @code{\frac}
+
+@cindex fraction
+@findex \frac
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\frac@{@var{numerator}@}@{@var{denominator}@}
+@end example
+
+Produces the fraction. Used as: @code{\begin@{displaymath@}
+\frac@{1@}@{\sqrt@{2\pi\sigma@}@} \end@{displaymath@}}. In inline math
+mode it comes out small; see the discussion of @code{\displaystyle}
+(@pxref{Math formulas}).
+
+
+@node \left & \right
+@subsection @code{\left} & @code{\right}
+
+@cindex delimiters, paired
+@cindex paired delimiters
+@cindex matching parentheses
+@cindex matching brackets
+@cindex null delimiter
+@findex \left
+@findex \right
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\left @var{delimiter1} ... \right @var{delimiter2}
+@end example
+
+Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. The delimiters
+are sized according to the math they enclose. This makes a unit vector
+surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses.
+
+@example
+\begin@{equation@}
+ \left(\begin@{array@}@{c@}
+ 1 \\
+ 0 \\
+ \end@{array@}\right)
+@end example
+
+Every @code{\left} must have a matching @code{\right}. Leaving out the
+@code{\left(} in the above gets @samp{Extra \right}. Leaving off the
+@code{\right)} gets @samp{You can't use `\eqno' in math mode}.
+
+However, the two delimiters @var{delimiter1} and @var{delimiter2} need
+not match. A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as
+below. Use a period, @samp{.}, as a null delimiter.
+
+@example
+\begin@{equation@}
+ f(n)=\left\@{\begin@{array@}@{ll@}
+ 1 &\mbox@{--if \(n=0\)@} \\
+ f(n-1)+3n^2 &\mbox@{--else@}
+ \end@{array@}\right.
+\end@{equation@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
+backslash, @code{\@{}.
+
+
+@node \sqrt
+@subsection @code{\sqrt}
+
+@cindex square root
+@cindex roots
+@cindex radical
+@findex \sqrt
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\sqrt@{@var{arg}@}
+\sqrt[@var{root-number}]@{@var{arg}@}
+@end example
+
+The square root, or optionally other roots, of @var{arg}. The optional
+argument @var{root-number} gives the root, i.e., enter the cube root of
+@code{x+y} as @code{\sqrt[3]@{x+y@}}.
+@ifset HAS-MATH
+It comes out like this: @math{\root 3 \of {x+y}}.
+@end ifset
+The radical grows with the size of @var{arg} (as the height of the
+radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets steeper, until for
+a large enough @code{arg}, it is vertical).
+
+@LaTeX{} has a separate @code{\surd} character (@pxref{Math symbols}).
+
+
+@node \stackrel
+@subsection @code{\stackrel}
+
+@cindex stack math
+@cindex relation, text above
+@findex \stackrel
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\stackrel@{@var{text}@}@{@var{relation}@}
+@end example
+
+Put @var{text} above @var{relation}. To put a function name above an
+arrow enter @code{\stackrel@{f@}@{\longrightarrow@}}.
+@ifset HAS-MATH
+ The result looks like this: @math{\buildrel f \over \longrightarrow}.
+@end ifset
+
+
+@node Modes
+@chapter Modes
+
+@cindex modes
+
+As @LaTeX{} processes your document, at any point it is in one of six
+modes. They fall into three categories of two each, the horizontal
+modes, the math modes, and the vertical modes. Some commands only work
+in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of
+the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.
+
+@itemize
+@item
+@anchor{modes paragraph mode}
+@cindex paragraph mode
+@dfn{Paragraph mode} is what @LaTeX{} is in when processing ordinary
+text. It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into
+pages. This is the mode @LaTeX{} is in most of the time.
+
+@cindex left-to-right mode
+@cindex LR mode
+@anchor{modes lr mode}
+@dfn{LR mode} (for left-to-right mode; in plain @TeX{} this is called
+@dfn{restricted horizontal mode}) is in effect when @LaTeX{} starts
+making a box with an @code{\mbox} command. As in paragraph mode,
+@LaTeX{}'s output is a string of words with spaces between them. Unlike
+in paragraph mode, in LR mode @LaTeX{} never starts a new line, it just
+keeps going from left to right. (Although @LaTeX{} will not complain
+that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to put
+that box into a line, it could very well complain that the finished LR
+box won't fit there.)
+
+@item
+@cindex math mode
+@anchor{modes math mode} @dfn{Math mode} is when @LaTeX{} is generating
+an inline mathematical formula.
+
+@cindex display math mode
+@dfn{Display math mode} is when @LaTeX{} is generating a displayed
+mathematical formula. (Displayed formulas differ somewhat from inline
+ones. One example is that the placement of the subscript on @code{\int}
+differs in the two situations.)
+
+@item
+@cindex vertical mode
+@anchor{modes vertical mode}
+@dfn{Vertical mode} is when @LaTeX{} is building the list of lines and
+other material making the output page. This is the mode @LaTeX{} is in
+when it starts a document.
+
+@cindex internal vertical mode
+@anchor{modes internal vertical mode}
+@dfn{Internal vertical mode} is in effect when @LaTeX{} starts making a
+@code{\vbox}. This is the vertical analogue of LR mode.
+
+@end itemize
+
+@noindent
+For instance, if you begin a @LaTeX{} article with @samp{Let \( x \) be
+...} then these are the modes: first @LaTeX{} starts every document in
+vertical mode, then it reads the @samp{L} and switches to paragraph
+mode, then the next switch happens at the @samp{\(} where @LaTeX{}
+changes to math mode, and then when it leaves the formula it pops
+back to paragraph mode.
+
+@cindex inner paragraph mode
+@cindex outer paragraph mode
+@anchor{modes inner paragraph mode}
+@anchor{modes outer paragraph mode}
+Paragraph mode has two subcases. If you use a @code{\parbox} command
+or a @code{minipage} then @LaTeX{} is put into paragraph mode. But it
+will not put a page break here. Inside one of these boxes, called a
+@dfn{parbox}, @LaTeX{} is in @dfn{inner paragraph mode}. Its more usual
+situation, where it can put page breaks, is @dfn{outer paragraph mode}
+(@pxref{Page breaking}).
+
+@menu
+* \ensuremath:: Ensure that math mode is active.
+@end menu
+
+@node \ensuremath
+@section @code{\ensuremath}
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\ensuremath@{@var{formula}@}
+@end example
+
+Ensure that @var{formula} is typeset in math mode.
+
+For instance, you can redefine commands that ordinarily can be used only
+in math mode, so that they can be used both in math and in plain text.
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\dx@}@{\ensuremath@{dx@}@}
+In $\int f(x)\, \dx$, the \dx@{@} is an infinitesimal.
+@end example
+
+Caution: the @code{\ensuremath} command is useful but not a panacea.
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\alf@}@{\ensuremath@{\alpha@}@}
+You get an alpha in text mode: \alf.
+But compare the correct spacing in $\alf+\alf$ with that in \alf+\alf.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Best is to typeset math things in a math mode.
+
+
+@node Page styles
+@chapter Page styles
+
+@cindex styles, page
+@cindex page styles
+
+The style of a page determines where @LaTeX{} places the components of
+that page, such as headers and footers, and the text body. This
+includes pages in the main part of the document but also includes
+special pages such as the title page of a book, a page from an index, or
+the first page of an article.
+
+@PkgIndex{fancyhdr}
+The package @file{fancyhdr} is very helpful for constructing page
+styles. See its documentation on CTAN.
+
+@menu
+* \maketitle:: Generate a title page.
+* \pagenumbering:: Set the style used for page numbers.
+* \pagestyle:: Change the headings/footings style.
+* \thispagestyle:: Change the headings/footings style for this page.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \maketitle
+@section @code{\maketitle}
+
+@cindex titles, making
+@findex \maketitle
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\maketitle
+@end example
+
+Generate a title. In the standard classes the title appears on a
+separate page, except in the @code{article} class where it is at the top
+of the first page. (@xref{Document class options} for information about
+the @code{titlepage} document class option.)
+
+This example shows @code{\maketitle} appearing in its usual place,
+immediately after @code{\begin@{document@}}.
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{article@}
+\title@{Constructing a Nuclear Reactor Using Only Coconuts@}
+\author@{Jonas Grumby\thanks@{%
+ With the support of a Ginger Grant from the Roy Hinkley Society.@} \\
+ Skipper, \textit@{Minnow@}
+ \and
+ Willy Gilligan\thanks@{%
+ Thanks to the Mary Ann Summers foundation
+ and to Thurston and Lovey Howell.@} \\
+ Mate, \textit@{Minnow@}
+ @}
+\date@{1964-Sep-26@}
+\begin@{document@}
+\maketitle
+Just sit right back and you'll hear a tale, a tale of a fateful trip.
+That started from this tropic port, aboard this tiny ship. The mate was
+a mighty sailin' man, the Skipper brave and sure. Five passengers set
+sail that day for a three hour tour. A three hour tour.
+ ...
+@end example
+
+You tell @LaTeX{} the information used to produce the title by making
+the following declarations. These must come before the
+@code{\maketitle}, either in the preamble or in the document body.
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \author@{@var{name1} \and @var{name2} \and ...@}
+@cindex author, for titlepage
+@findex \\ @r{for @code{\author}}
+@findex \and @r{for @code{\author}}
+Required. Declare the document author or authors. The argument is a
+list of authors separated by @code{\and} commands. To separate lines
+within a single author's entry, for instance to give the author's
+institution or address, use a double backslash, @code{\\}. If you omit
+the @code{\author} declaration then you get @samp{LaTeX Warning: No
+\author given}.
+
+@item \date@{@var{text}@}
+@cindex date, for titlepage
+Optional. Declare @var{text} to be the document's date. The @var{text}
+doesn't need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all. If you
+omit @code{\date} then @LaTeX{} uses the current date (@pxref{\today}).
+To have no date, instead use @code{\date@{@}}.
+
+@item \thanks@{@var{text}@}
+@cindex thanks, for titlepage
+@cindex credit footnote
+Optional. Produce a footnote. You can use it in the author information
+for acknowledgements as illustrated above, but you can also use it in
+the title, or any place a footnote makes sense. It can be any text at
+all so you can use it for any purpose, such as to print an email
+address.
+
+@item \title@{@var{text}@}
+@cindex title, for titlepage
+@findex \\ @r{for @code{\title}}
+Required. Declare @var{text} to be the title of the document. Get line
+breaks inside @var{text} with a double backslash, @code{\\}. If you
+omit the @code{\title} declaration then you get @samp{LaTeX Error: No
+\title given}.
+
+@end ftable
+
+To make your own title page, see@tie{}@ref{titlepage}. You can either
+create this as a one-off or you can include it as part of a renewed
+@code{\maketitle} command. (Many publishers will provide a class to use
+in place of @code{article} that formats the title according to their
+house requirements.)
+
+
+@node \pagenumbering
+@section @code{\pagenumbering}
+
+@findex \pagenumbering
+@cindex page numbering style
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\pagenumbering@{@var{number-style}@}
+@end example
+
+Specifies the style of page numbers, and resets the page number. The
+numbering style is reflected on the page, and also in the table of
+contents and other page references. This declaration has global scope
+so its effect is not delimited by braces or environments.
+
+In this example, before the Main section the pages are numbered
+@samp{a}, etc. Starting on the page containing that section, the pages
+are numbered @samp{1}, etc.
+
+@example
+\begin@{document@}\pagenumbering@{alph@}
+ ...
+\section@{Main@}\pagenumbering@{arabic@}
+ ...
+@end example
+
+The argument @var{number-style} is one of the following (see
+also@tie{}@ref{\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol}).
+
+@table @code
+@item arabic
+Arabic numerals: 1, 2, @dots{}
+
+@item roman
+lowercase Roman numerals: i, ii, @dots{}
+
+@item Roman
+uppercase Roman numerals: I, II, @dots{}
+
+@item alph
+lowercase letters: a, b, @dots{} If you have more than 26 pages then you
+get @samp{LaTeX Error: Counter too large}.
+
+@item Alph
+uppercase letters: A, B, @dots{} If you have more than 26 pages then you
+get @samp{LaTeX Error: Counter too large}.
+
+@item gobble
+@PkgIndex{hyperref} @LaTeX{} does not output a page number, although it
+does get reset. References to that page also are blank. (This does not
+work with the popular package @file{hyperref} so to have the page number
+not appear you may want to instead use @code{\pagestyle@{empty@}} or
+@code{\thispagestyle@{empty@}}.)
+
+@end table
+
+Traditionally, if a document has front matter---preface, table of
+contents, etc.---then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. The
+main matter of a document uses arabic. @xref{\frontmatter & \mainmatter
+& \backmatter}.
+
+If you want to address where the page number appears on the page,
+see@tie{}@ref{\pagestyle}. If you want to change the value of page
+number then you will manipulate the @code{page} counter
+(@pxref{Counters}).
+
+
+@node \pagestyle
+@section @code{\pagestyle}
+
+@findex \pagestyle
+@cindex header style
+@cindex footer style
+@cindex running header and footer style
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\pagestyle@{@var{style}@}
+@end example
+
+Declaration that specifies how the page headers and footers are typeset,
+from the current page onwards.
+
+@PkgIndex{fancyhdr}
+A discussion with an example is below. Note first that the package
+@file{fancyhdr} is now the standard way to manipulate headers and
+footers. New documents that need to do anything other than one of the
+standard options below should use this package. See its documentation
+on CTAN.
+
+Values for @var{style}:
+
+@table @code
+@item plain
+The header is empty. The footer contains only a page number, centered.
+
+@item empty
+The header and footer is empty.
+
+@item headings
+Put running headers and footers on each page. The document style
+specifies what goes in there; see the discussion below.
+
+@item myheadings
+Custom headers, specified via the @code{\markboth} or the
+@code{\markright} commands.
+
+@end table
+
+Some discussion of the motivation for @LaTeX{}'s mechanism will help you
+work with the options @code{headings} or @code{myheadings}. The
+document source below produces an article, two-sided, with the pagestyle
+@code{headings}. On this document's left hand pages, @LaTeX{} wants (in
+addition to the page number) the title of the current section. On its
+right hand pages @LaTeX{} wants the title of the current subsection.
+When it makes up a page, @LaTeX{} gets this information from the
+commands @code{\leftmark} and @code{\rightmark}. So it is up to
+@code{\section} and @code{\subsection} to store that information there.
+
+@example
+\documentclass[twoside]@{article@}
+\pagestyle@{headings@}
+\begin@{document@}
+ ... \section@{Section 1@} ... \subsection@{Subsection 1.1@} ...
+\section@{Section 2@}
+ ...
+\subsection@{Subsection 2.1@}
+ ...
+\subsection@{Subsection 2.2@}
+ ...
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Suppose that the second section falls on a left page. Although when the
+page starts it is in the first section, @LaTeX{} will put
+@samp{Section@tie{}2} in the left page header. As to the right header,
+if no subsection starts before the end of the right page then @LaTeX{}
+blanks the right hand header. If a subsection does appear before the
+right page finishes then there are two cases. If at least one
+subsection starts on the right hand page then @LaTeX{} will put in the
+right header the title of the first subsection starting on that right
+page. If at least one of 2.1, 2.2, @dots{}, starts on the left page but
+none starts on the right then @LaTeX{} puts in the right hand header the
+title of the last subsection to start, that is, the one in effect during
+the right hand page.
+
+To accomplish this, in a two-sided article, @LaTeX{} has @code{\section}
+issue a command @code{\markboth}, setting @code{\leftmark}
+to @samp{Section@tie{}2} and setting @code{\rightmark} to blank.
+And, @LaTeX{} has @code{\subsection} issue a command @code{\markright},
+setting @code{\rightmark} to @samp{Subsection@tie{}2.1}, etc.
+
+Here are the descriptions of @code{\markboth} and @code{\markright}:
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \markboth@{@var{left-head}@}@{@var{right-head}@}
+Sets both the right hand and left hand heading information for either a
+page style of @code{headings} or @code{myheadings}. A left hand page
+heading @var{left-head} is generated by the last @code{\markboth}
+command before the end of the page. A right hand page heading
+@var{right-head} is generated by the first @code{\markboth} or
+@code{\markright} that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by
+the last one that came before that page.
+
+@item \markright@{@var{right}@}
+Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged.
+
+@end ftable
+
+
+@node \thispagestyle
+@section @code{\thispagestyle}
+
+@findex \thispagestyle
+@cindex page style, this page
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\thispagestyle@{@var{style}@}
+@end example
+
+Works in the same way as the @code{\pagestyle} (@pxref{\pagestyle}),
+except that it changes to @var{style} for the current page only. This
+declaration has global scope, so its effect is not delimited by braces
+or environments.
+
+Often the first page of a chapter or section has a different style. For
+example, this @LaTeX{} book document has the first page of the first
+chapter in @code{plain} style, as is the default (@pxref{Page
+styles}).
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{book@}
+\pagestyle@{headings@}
+\begin@{document@}
+\chapter@{First chapter@}
+ ...
+\chapter@{Second chapter@}\thispagestyle@{empty@}
+ ...
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The @code{plain} style has a page number on it, centered in the footer.
+To make the page entirely empty, the command
+@code{\thispagestyle@{empty@}} immediately follows the second
+@code{\chapter}.
+
+
+@node Spaces
+@chapter Spaces
+
+@cindex spaces
+@cindex white space
+
+@LaTeX{} has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. Some of
+these are best suited to mathematical text; see@tie{}@ref{Spacing in
+math mode}. Some spacing commands are suitable for both regular text
+and mathematical text; versions of some of these commands are in this
+chapter.
+
+@menu
+Horizontal space
+* \enspace & \quad & \qquad:: Traditional horizontal spaces.
+* \hspace:: Any horizontal space.
+* \hfill:: Stretchable horizontal space.
+* \hss:: Infinitely stretchable/shrinkable horizontal space.
+* \spacefactor:: Stretchability of following space
+* \(SPACE):: Backslash-space; and explicit space.
+* ~:: Tie, an unbreakable space.
+* \thinspace & \negthinspace:: One-sixth of an em, and negative one-sixth.
+* \/:: Italic correction.
+* \hrulefill & \dotfill:: Stretchable horizontal rule or dots.
+
+Vertical space
+* \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip:: Inter-paragraph vertical spaces.
+* \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak:: Inter-paragraph space and page breaks.
+* \strut:: Ensure height of a line.
+* \vspace:: Vertical space.
+* \vfill:: Stretchable vertical space.
+* \addvspace:: Add arbitrary vertical space if needed.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \enspace & \quad & \qquad
+@section @code{\enspace} & @code{\quad} & @code{\qquad}
+
+@findex \enspace
+@findex \quad
+@findex \qquad
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\enspace
+\quad
+\qquad
+@end example
+
+Insert a horizontal space of 1/2@dmn{em}, 1@dmn{em}, or 2@dmn{em}. The
+em is a length defined by a font designer, often thought of as being the
+width of a capital@tie{}M. One advantage of describing space in ems is
+that it can be more portable across documents than an absolute
+measurement such as points (@pxref{Lengths/em}).
+
+This puts a suitable gap between two graphics.
+
+@example
+\begin@{center@}
+ \includegraphics@{womensmile.png@}%
+ \qquad\includegraphics@{mensmile.png@}
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@xref{Spacing in math mode} for @code{\quad} and @code{\qquad}. These
+are lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice
+in many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with
+@code{\hspace}.
+
+
+@node \hspace
+@section @code{\hspace}
+
+@findex \hspace
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\hspace@{@var{length}@}
+\hspace*@{@var{length}@}
+@end example
+
+Insert the horizontal space @var{length}. The @var{length} can be
+positive, negative, or zero; adding negative space is like backspacing.
+It is a rubber length, that is, it may contain a @code{plus} or
+@code{minus} component, or both (@pxref{Lengths}). Because the space is
+stretchable and shrinkable, it is sometimes called @dfn{glue}.
+
+This makes a line with @samp{Name:} an inch from the right margin.
+
+@example
+\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]@{Name:\hspace@{1in@}@}
+@end example
+
+The @code{*}-version inserts horizontal space that non-discardable.
+More precisely, when @TeX{} breaks a paragraph into lines any white
+space---glues and kerns---that come at a line break are discarded. The
+@code{*}-version avoids that (technically, it adds a non-discardable
+invisible item in front of the space).
+
+In this example
+
+@example
+\parbox@{0.8\linewidth@}@{%
+ Fill in each blank: Four \hspace*@{1in@} and seven years ago our
+ fathers brought forth on this continent, a new \hspace*@{1in@},
+ conceived in \hspace*@{1in@}, and dedicated to the proposition
+ that all men are created \hspace*@{1in@}.@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+the 1@tie{}inch blank following @samp{conceived in} falls at the start
+of a line. If you erase the @code{*} then @LaTeX{} discards the blank.
+
+Here, the @code{\hspace} separates the three graphics.
+
+@example
+\begin@{center@}
+ \includegraphics@{lion.png@}% comment keeps out extra space
+ \hspace@{1cm minus 0.25cm@}\includegraphics@{tiger.png@}%
+ \hspace@{1cm minus 0.25cm@}\includegraphics@{bear.png@}
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Because the argument to each @code{\hspace} has @code{minus 0.25cm},
+each can shrink a little if the three figures are too wide. But each
+space won't shrink more than 0.25@dmn{cm} (@pxref{Lengths}).
+
+
+@node \hfill
+@section @code{\hfill}
+
+@findex \hfill
+
+@cindex stretch, infinite horizontal
+@cindex infinite horizontal stretch
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\hfill
+@end example
+
+Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but that can stretch
+horizontally as far as needed (@pxref{Lengths}).
+
+This creates a one-line paragraph with @samp{Name:} on the left side
+of the page and @samp{Quiz One} on the right.
+
+@example
+\noindent Name:\hfill Quiz One
+@end example
+
+@findex \fill
+The @code{\hfill} command is equivalent to @code{\hspace@{\fill@}} and
+so the space can be discarded at line breaks. To avoid that instead use
+@code{\hspace*@{\fill@}} (@pxref{\hspace}).
+
+Here the graphs are evenly spaced in the middle of the figure.
+
+@example
+\newcommand*@{\vcenteredhbox@}[1]@{\begin@{tabular@}@{@@@{@}c@@@{@}@}#1\end@{tabular@}@}
+ ...
+\begin@{figure@}
+ \hspace*@{\fill@}%
+ \vcenteredhbox@{\includegraphics@{graph0.png@}@}%
+ \hfill\vcenteredhbox@{\includegraphics@{graph1.png@}@}%
+ \hspace*@{\fill@}%
+ \caption@{Comparison of two graphs@} \label@{fig:twographs@}
+\end@{figure@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Note the @code{\hspace*}'s where the space could otherwise be dropped.
+
+
+@node \hss
+@section @code{\hss}
+
+@findex \hss
+@cindex horizontal space
+@cindex horizontal space, stretchable
+@cindex space, inserting horizontal
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\hss
+@end example
+
+Produce a horizontal space that is infinitely shrinkable as well as
+infinitely stretchable (this command is a @TeX{} primitive). @LaTeX{}
+authors should reach first for the @code{\makebox} command to get the
+effects of @code{\hss} (@pxref{\mbox & \makebox}).
+
+Here, the first line's @code{\hss} makes the Z stick out to the right,
+overwriting the Y. In the second line the Z sticks out to the left,
+overwriting the X.
+
+@example
+X\hbox to 0pt@{Z\hss@}Y
+X\hbox to 0pt@{\hss Z@}Y
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Without the @code{\hss} you get something like @samp{Overfull \hbox
+(6.11111pt too wide) detected at line 20}.
+
+
+@node \spacefactor
+@section @code{\spacefactor}
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\spacefactor=@var{integer}
+@end example
+
+@findex \spacefactor
+Influence @LaTeX{}'s glue stretch and shrink behavior. Most user-level
+documents do not use this command.
+
+While @LaTeX{} is laying out the material, it may stretch or shrink the
+gaps between words. (This space is not a character; it is called the
+@dfn{interword glue}; @pxref{\hspace}). The @code{\spacefactor} command
+(from Plain@tie{}@TeX{}) allows you to, for instance, have the space
+after a period stretch more than the space after a word-ending letter.
+
+After @LaTeX{} places each character, or rule or other box, it sets a
+parameter called the @dfn{space factor}. If the next thing in the input
+is a space then this parameter affects how much stretching or shrinking
+can happen. A space factor that is larger than the normal value means
+that the glue can stretch more and shrink less. Normally, the space
+factor is 1000. This value is in effect following most characters, and
+any non-character box or math formula. But it is 3000 after a period,
+exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000 after a colon, 1500 after
+a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or closing double quote or single quote. Finally, it is 999
+after a capital letter.
+
+If the space factor@tie{}@var{f} is 1000 then the glue gap will be the
+font's normal space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is
+3.3333@tie{}points). Otherwise, if the space factor @var{f} is greater
+than 2000 then @TeX{} adds the font's extra space value (for Computer
+Modern Roman 10 point this is 1.11111@tie{}points), and then the font's
+normal stretch value is multiplied by @math{f /1000} and the normal
+shrink value is multiplied by @math{1000/f} (for Computer Modern Roman
+10 point these are 1.66666 and 1.11111@tie{}points).
+
+For example, consider the period ending @code{A man's best friend is his
+dog.} After it, @TeX{} puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the
+glue to stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much, as the glue
+after @code{friend}, which does not end in a period.
+
+The rules for space factors are even more complex because they play
+additional roles. In practice, there are two consequences. First, if a
+period or other punctuation is followed by a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or right single or double quote then the spacing effect of that
+period carries through those characters (that is, the following glue
+will have increased stretch and shrink). Second, if
+punctuation comes after a capital letter then its effect is not in place
+so you get an ordinary space. This second case also affects abbreviations
+that do not end in a capital letter (@pxref{\@@}).
+
+You can only use @code{\spacefactor} in paragraph mode or LR mode
+(@pxref{Modes}). You can see the current value with
+@code{\the\spacefactor} or @code{\showthe\spacefactor}.
+
+(Comment, not really related to @code{\spacefactor}: if you get errors
+like @samp{You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode}, or @samp{You
+can't use `\spacefactor' in math mode.}, or @samp{Improper \spacefactor}
+then you have probably tried to redefine an internal command.
+@xref{\makeatletter & \makeatother}.)
+
+
+@menu
+* \@@:: Distinguish sentence-ending periods from abbreviations.
+* \frenchspacing:: Equal interword and inter-sentence space.
+* \normalsfcodes:: Restore space factor settings to the default.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \@@
+@subsection @code{\@@}
+
+@findex \@@
+@findex at-sign
+@cindex period, sentence-ending
+@cindex period, abbreviation-ending
+@cindex period, spacing after
+@anchor{\AT}@c old name
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+@var{capital-letter}\@@.
+@end example
+
+Treat a period as sentence-ending, where @LaTeX{} would otherwise think
+it is part of an abbreviation. @LaTeX{} thinks that a period ends an
+abbreviation if the period comes after a capital letter, and otherwise
+thinks the period ends the sentence. By default, in justifying a line
+@LaTeX{} adjusts the space after a sentence-ending period (or a question
+mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than it adjusts the space
+between words (@pxref{\spacefactor}).
+
+This example shows the two cases to remember.
+
+@example
+The songs \textit@{Red Guitar@}, etc.\ are by Loudon Wainwright~III\@@.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The second period ends the sentence, despite that it is preceded by a
+capital. We tell @LaTeX{} that it ends the sentence by putting
+@code{\@@} before it. The first period ends the abbreviation
+@samp{etc.} but not the sentence. The backslash-space, @code{\ },
+produces a mid-sentence space.
+
+So: if you have a capital letter followed by a period that ends the
+sentence, then put @code{\@@} before the period. This holds even if
+there is an intervening right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or
+double quote, because the spacing effect of that period carries through
+those characters. For example, this
+
+@example
+Use the \textit@{Instructional Practices Guide@},
+(a book by the MAA)\@@.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+will have correct inter-sentence spacing after the period.
+
+The @code{\@@} command is only for a text mode. If you use it outside of
+a text mode then you get @samp{You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical
+mode} (@pxref{Modes}).
+
+Comment: the converse case is a period ending an abbreviation whose last
+letter is not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last
+word in the sentence. For that case follow the period with a
+backslash-space, (@code{\ }), or a tie, (@code{~}), or @code{\@@}.
+Examples are @code{Nat.\ Acad.\ Science}, and @code{Mr.~Bean}, and
+@code{(manure, etc.\@@) for sale} (note in the last one that the
+@code{\@@} comes before the closing parenthesis).
+
+
+@node \frenchspacing
+@subsection @code{\frenchspacing}
+
+@findex \frenchspacing
+@findex \nonfrenchspacing
+@cindex spacing, inter-sentence
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\frenchspacing
+\nonfrenchspacing
+@end example
+
+The first declaration causes @LaTeX{} to treat spacing between sentences
+in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a sentence.
+The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more
+(@pxref{\spacefactor}); this is the default.
+
+Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the
+space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
+exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words
+that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring @code{\frenchspacing}
+(the command is from Plain @TeX{}) switches to the tradition that all
+spaces are treated equally.
+
+
+@node \normalsfcodes
+@subsection @code{\normalsfcodes}
+
+@findex \normalsfcodes
+@cindex spacing, inter-sentence
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\normalsfcodes
+@end example
+
+Reset the @LaTeX{} space factor values to the default
+(@pxref{\spacefactor}).
+
+
+@node \(SPACE)
+@section Backslash-space, @code{\ }
+
+@cindex \NEWLINE
+@cindex \SPACE
+@cindex \TAB
+
+This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a
+backslash followed by a space. Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\
+@end example
+
+Produce a space. By default it produces white space of length
+3.33333@dmn{pt} plus 1.66666@dmn{pt} minus 1.11111@dmn{pt}.
+
+When you type one or more blanks between words, @LaTeX{} produces white
+space. But that is different than an explicit space. This illustrates.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{l@}
+One blank: makes some space \\
+Three blanks: in a row \\
+Three spaces:\ \ \ in a row \\
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+On the first line @LaTeX{} puts some space after the colon. On the
+second line @LaTeX{} collapses the three blanks to output one
+whitespace, so you end with the same space after the colon as in the
+first line. @LaTeX{} would similarly collapse a blank followed by a
+tab, or a blank and a newline and a blank. However, the bottom line
+asks for three spaces so the white area is wider. That is, the
+backslash-space command creates a fixed amount of horizontal space.
+(Note that you can define a horizontal space of any width at all with
+@code{\hspace}; see@tie{}@ref{\hspace}.)
+
+The backslash-space command has two main uses. It is often used after
+control sequences to keep them from gobbling the space that follows, as
+in @code{\TeX\ is nice}. (But using curly parentheses, as in
+@code{\TeX@{@} is best}, has the advantage of still working if the next
+character is a period.) The other common use is that it marks a period
+as ending an abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in @code{So
+says Prof.\ Smith} (@pxref{\@@}).
+
+Under normal circumstances, @code{\}@key{tab} and @code{\}@key{newline}
+are equivalent to backslash-space, @code{\ }.
+
+@c @PkgIndex{xspace}
+@c Some individual commands, notably those defined with the @code{xspace},
+@c package do not follow the standard behavior.
+
+
+@node ~
+@section @code{~}
+
+@findex ~
+@cindex tie
+@cindex space, hard
+@cindex space, unbreakable
+@cindex NBSP
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+@var{before}~@var{after}
+@end example
+
+The tie character, @code{~}, produces a space between @var{before} and
+@var{after} at which the line will not be broken. By default the white
+space has length 3.33333@dmn{pt} plus 1.66666@dmn{pt} minus
+1.11111@dmn{pt} (@pxref{Lengths}).
+
+Here @LaTeX{} will not break the line between the final two words.
+
+@example
+Thanks to Prof.~Lerman.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+In addition, despite the period, @LaTeX{} does not use the
+end-of-sentence spacing (@pxref{\@@}).
+
+Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could cause
+confusion. But they also reduce @LaTeX{}'s options when it breaks lines
+into paragraphs, so you can use too many. They are also matters of
+taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers. Nevertheless,
+here are some usage models, many of them from the @TeX{}book.
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references:
+@code{Chapter~12}, or @code{Theorem~\ref@{th:Wilsons@}}, or
+@code{Figure~\ref@{fig:KGraph@}}. When cases are enumerated inline:
+@code{(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded}.
+
+@PkgIndex{siunitx}
+@item
+Between a number and its unit: @code{$745.7.8$~watts} (the
+@file{siunitx} package has a special facility for this) or
+@code{144~eggs}. This includes between a month and a date:
+@code{October~12} or @code{12~Oct}. In general, in any expressions where
+numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space:
+@code{AD~565}, or @code{2:50~pm}, or @code{Boeing~747}, or
+@code{268~Plains Road}, or @code{\$$1.4$~billion}.
+
+@item
+When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: @code{equals~$n$}, or
+@code{less than~$\epsilon$}, or @code{given~$X$}, or @code{modulo~$p^e$
+for all large~$n$} (but compare @code{is~$15$} with @code{is $15$~times
+the height}). Between mathematical symbols in apposition with nouns:
+@code{dimension~$d$} or @code{function~$f(x)$} (but compare @code{with
+length $l$~or more}). When a symbol is a tightly bound object of a
+preposition: @code{of~$x$}, or @code{from $0$ to~$1$}, or @code{in
+common with~$m$}.
+
+@item
+Between symbols in series: @code{$1$,~$2$, or~$3$} or @code{$1$,~$2$,
+\ldots,~$n$}.
+
+@item
+Between a person's forenames and between multiple surnames:
+@code{Donald~E. Knuth}, or @code{Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo}, or
+@code{Charles~XII} (but you must give TeX places to break the line so
+you may do @code{Charles Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin}).
+
+@item
+Before a dash: @code{pages 12~--14} or @code{it is~--- it must be
+said~--- plausible}.
+
+@end itemize
+
+
+@node \thinspace & \negthinspace
+@section @code{\thinspace} & @code{\negthinspace}
+
+@findex \thinspace
+@findex \negthinspace
+@cindex thin space
+@cindex space, thin
+@cindex thin space, negative
+@cindex space, negative thin
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\thinspace
+\negthinspace
+@end example
+
+Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6@dmn{em} and
+-1/6@dmn{em}. These are the text mode equivalents of @code{\,} and
+@code{\!} (@pxref{Spacing in math mode/\thinspace}). You can use
+@code{\,} as a synonym for @code{\thinspace} in text mode.
+
+The @code{\negthinspace} command is used in text mode mostly for
+fiddling with spaces. One common use of @code{\thinspace} is as the
+space between nested quotes.
+
+@example
+Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace''
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Another use is that some style guides call for a @code{\thinspace}
+between an ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides,
+though, think the three dots are quite enough already). Still another
+use is between initials, as in @code{D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth}.
+
+
+@node \/
+@section @code{\/}
+
+@findex \/
+@cindex italic correction
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+@var{before-character}\/@var{after-character}
+@end example
+
+Insert an @dfn{italic correction}, a small space defined by the font
+designer for each character, to avoid the character colliding with
+whatever follows. When you use @code{\/}, @LaTeX{} takes the correction
+from the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has been
+applied to the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space.
+
+Here, were it not for the @code{\/}, the @var{before-character}
+italic@tie{}f would hit the @var{after-character} roman@tie{}H
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\companylogo@}@{@{\it f@}\/H@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+because the italic letter leans far to the right.
+
+If @var{after-character} is a period or comma then don't insert an
+italic correction since those punctuation symbols have a very small
+height. However, with semicolons or colons as well as with normal
+letters, the italic correction can help.
+
+When you use commands such as @code{\textit} or @code{\itshape} to
+change fonts, @LaTeX{} will automatically insert any needed italic
+correction (@pxref{Font styles}).
+
+Roman characters can also have an italic correction. An example is in
+the name @code{pdf\/\TeX}.
+
+There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done
+in a different way.
+
+
+@node \hrulefill & \dotfill
+@section @code{\hrulefill} & @code{\dotfill}
+
+@findex \hrulefill
+@findex \dotfill
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\hrulefill
+\dotfill
+@end example
+
+Produce an infinite horizontal rubber length (@pxref{Lengths}) that
+@LaTeX{} fills with a rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of
+white space.
+
+This outputs a line 2 inches long.
+
+@example
+Name:~\makebox[2in]@{\hrulefill@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This example, when placed between blank lines, creates a paragraph that
+is left and right justified and where the middle is filled with evenly
+spaced dots.
+
+@example
+\noindent John Aubrey, RN \dotfill@{@} Melbury Lodge
+@end example
+
+To make the rule or dots go to the line's end use @code{\null} at the
+start or end.
+
+To change the rule's thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
+here
+
+@example
+\renewcommand@{\hrulefill@}@{%
+ \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern\z@@@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+which changes the default thickness of 0.4@dmn{pt} to 1@dmn{pt}.
+Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with
+
+@example
+\renewcommand@{\dotfill@}@{%
+ \leavevmode\cleaders\hb@@xt@@1.00em@{\hss .\hss @}\hfill\kern\z@@@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+which changes the default length of 0.33@dmn{em} to 1.00@dmn{em}.
+
+This example produces a line for a signature.
+
+@example
+\begin@{minipage@}@{4cm@}
+ \centering
+ \hrulefill\\
+ Signed
+\end@{minipage@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The line is 4@dmn{cm} long.
+
+
+@node \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip
+@section @code{\bigskip} & @code{\medskip} & @code{\smallskip}
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\bigskip
+\medskip
+\smallskip
+@end example
+
+Produce an amount of vertical space, large or medium-sized or
+small. These commands are fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+Here the skip suggests the passage of time (from @i{The Golden Ocean} by
+O'Brian).
+
+@example
+Mr Saumarez would have something rude to say to him, no doubt: he
+was at home again, and it was delightful.
+
+\bigskip
+``A hundred and fifty-seven miles and one third, in twenty-four hours,''
+said Peter.
+@end example
+
+Each command is associated with a length defined in the document class
+file.
+
+@ftable @code
+@anchor{bigskip}
+@item \bigskip
+@findex \bigskipamount
+The same as @code{\vspace@{\bigskipamount@}}, ordinarily about one line
+space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the @code{book} and
+@code{article} classes is @code{12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt}.
+
+@anchor{medskip}
+@item \medskip
+@findex \medskipamount
+The same as @code{\vspace@{\medskipamount@}}, ordinarily about half of a
+line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the @code{book}
+and @code{article} classes is @code{6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt}.
+
+@anchor{smallskip}
+@item \smallskip
+@findex \smallskipamount
+The same as @code{\vspace@{\smallskipamount@}}, ordinarily about a
+quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the
+@code{book} and @code{article} classes is @code{3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}.
+
+@end ftable
+
+Because each command is a @code{\vspace}, if you use on in mid-paragraph
+then it will insert its vertical space between the line in which you use
+it and the next line, not necessarily at the place that you use it. So
+these are best between paragraphs.
+
+The commands @code{\bigbreak}, @code{\medbreak}, and @code{\smallbreak}
+are similar but also suggest to @LaTeX{} that this is a good place to
+put a page break (@pxref{\bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak}.
+
+
+@node \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak
+@section @code{\bigbreak} & @code{\medbreak} & @code{\smallbreak}
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\bigbreak
+\medbreak
+\smallbreak
+@end example
+
+Produce a vertical space that is big or medium-sized or small, and
+suggest to @LaTeX{} that this is a good place to break the page. (The
+associated penalties are -200, -100, and -50.)
+
+@xref{\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip}, for more. These commands
+produce the same vertical space but differ in that they also remove a
+preceding vertical space if it is less than what they would insert (as
+with @code{\addvspace}). In addition, they terminate a paragraph where
+they are used: this example
+
+@example
+abc\bigbreak def ghi
+
+jkl mno pqr
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+will output three paragraphs, the first ending in @samp{abc} and the
+second starting, after an extra vertical space and a paragraph indent,
+with @samp{def}.
+
+
+@node \strut
+@section @code{\strut}
+
+@findex \strut
+@cindex strut
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\strut
+@end example
+
+Ensure that the current line has height at least @code{0.7\baselineskip}
+and depth at least @code{0.3\baselineskip}. Essentially, @LaTeX{}
+inserts into the line a rectangle having zero width,
+@code{\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]@{0pt@}@{\baselineskip@}} (@pxref{\rule}).
+The @code{\baselineskip} changes with the current font and fontsize.
+
+In this example the @code{\strut} keeps the box inside the frame from
+having zero height.
+
+@example
+\setlength@{\fboxsep@}@{0pt@}\framebox[2in]@{\strut@}
+@end example
+
+This example has four lists. In the first there is a much bigger gap
+between items 2 and@tie{}3 than there is between items 1 and@tie{}2.
+The second list fixes that with a @code{\strut} at the end of its first
+item's second line.
+
+@example
+\setlength@{\fboxsep@}@{0pt@}
+\noindent\begin@{minipage@}[t]@{0.2\linewidth@}
+\begin@{enumerate@}
+ \item \parbox[t]@{15pt@}@{test \\ test@}
+ \item test
+ \item test
+\end@{enumerate@}
+\end@{minipage@}%
+\begin@{minipage@}[t]@{0.2\linewidth@}
+\begin@{enumerate@}
+ \item \parbox[t]@{15pt@}@{test \\ test\strut@}
+ \item test
+ \item test
+\end@{enumerate@}
+\end@{minipage@}%
+\begin@{minipage@}[t]@{0.2\linewidth@}
+\begin@{enumerate@}
+ \item \fbox@{\parbox[t]@{15pt@}@{test \\ test@}@}
+ \item \fbox@{test@}
+ \item \fbox@{test@}
+\end@{enumerate@}
+\end@{minipage@}%
+\begin@{minipage@}[t]@{0.2\linewidth@}
+\begin@{enumerate@}
+ \item \fbox@{\parbox[t]@{15pt@}@{test \\ test\strut@}@}
+ \item \fbox@{test@}
+ \item \fbox@{test@}
+\end@{enumerate@}
+\end@{minipage@}%
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The final two lists use @code{\fbox} to show what's happening. The
+third list's @code{\parbox} goes only to the bottom of its second
+@samp{test}, which happens not have any characters that descend below
+the baseline. The fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed
+extra below-baseline space.
+
+@PkgIndex{TikZ} @PkgIndex{Asymptote}
+The @code{\strut} command is often useful in graphics, such as in
+@file{TikZ} or @file{Asymptote}. For instance, you may have a command
+such as @code{\graphnode@{@var{node-name}@}} that fits a circle around
+@var{node-name}. However, unless you are careful the @var{node-name}'s
+@samp{x} and @samp{y} will produce different-diameter circles because
+the characters are different sizes. A careful @code{\graphnode} might
+insert a @code{\strut}, then @var{node-name}, and then draw the circle.
+
+The general approach of using a zero width @code{\rule} is useful in
+many circumstances. In this table, the zero-width rule keeps the top of
+the first integral from hitting the @code{\hline}. Similarly, the
+second rule keeps the second integral from hitting the first.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{rl@}
+ \textsc@{Integral@} &\textsc@{Value@} \\
+ \hline
+ $\int_0^x t\, dt$ &$x^2/2$ \rule@{0em@}@{2.5ex@} \\
+ $\int_0^x t^2\, dt$ &$x^3/3$ \rule@{0em@}@{2.5ex@}
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available
+optional argument to put in more vertical room, that won't work here.
+Changing the first double backslash to something like @code{\\[2.5ex]}
+will put the room between the header line and the @code{\hline}, and the
+integral would still hit the line.)
+
+
+@node \vspace
+@section @code{\vspace}
+
+@findex \vspace
+@cindex vertical space
+@cindex space, vertical
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\vspace@{@var{length}@}
+\vspace*@{@var{length}@}
+@end example
+
+Add the vertical space @var{length}. The @var{length} can be positive,
+negative, or zero. It is a rubber length---it may contain a @code{plus}
+or @code{minus} component (@pxref{Lengths}).
+
+This puts space between the two paragraphs.
+
+@example
+And I slept.
+
+\vspace@{1ex plus 0.5ex@}
+The new day dawned cold.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+(@xref{\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip} for common inter-paragraph
+spaces.)
+
+The @code{*}-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable. More
+precisely, @LaTeX{} discards vertical space at a page break and the
+@code{*}-version causes the space to stay. This example leaves space
+between the two questions.
+
+@example
+Question: Find the integral of \( 5x^4+5 \).
+
+\vspace*@{2cm plus 0.5cm@}
+Question: Find the derivative of \( x^5+5x+9 \).
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+That space will be present even if the page break happens to fall
+between the questions.
+
+If you use @code{\vspace} in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
+horizontal mode) then the space is inserted after the line containing
+the @code{\vspace} command; it does not start a new paragraph at the
+@code{\vspace} command.
+
+In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
+the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
+
+@example
+\begin@{document@}
+1) Who put the bomp in the bomp bah bomp bah bomp?
+\vspace@{1in plus 1fill@}
+
+2) Who put the ram in the rama lama ding dong?
+\vspace@{1in plus 1fill@}
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \vfill
+@section @code{\vfill}
+
+@findex \vfill
+
+@cindex stretch, infinite vertical
+@cindex infinite vertical stretch
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\vfill
+@end example
+
+End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length that is
+infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as needed
+(@pxref{Lengths}).
+
+It is often used in the same way as @code{\vspace@{\fill@}}, except that
+@code{\vfill} ends the current paragraph whereas @code{\vspace@{\fill@}}
+adds the infinite vertical space below its line, irrespective of the
+paragraph structure. In both cases that space will disappear at a page
+boundary; to circumvent this see the starred option
+in@tie{}@ref{\vspace}.
+
+In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines contain
+the text @samp{Lost Dog!} and the second @samp{Lost Dog!} is exactly
+halfway between them.
+
+@example
+\begin@{document@}
+Lost Dog!
+\vfill
+Lost Dog! % perfectly in the middle
+\vfill
+Lost Dog!
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \addvspace
+@section @code{\addvspace}
+
+@findex \addvspace
+@cindex vertical space
+@cindex space, inserting vertical
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\addvspace@{@var{vert-length}@}
+@end example
+
+Add a vertical space of @var{vert-length}. However, if there are two or
+more @code{\addvspace}'s in a sequence then together they only add the
+space needed to make the natural length equal to the maximum of the
+@var{vert-length}'s in that sequence. This command is fragile
+(@pxref{\protect}). The @var{vert-length} is a rubber length
+(@pxref{Lengths}).
+
+This example illustrates. The @code{picture} draws a scale. In a
+standard @LaTeX{} article the length @code{\baselineskip} is 12@dmn{pt}.
+The two rules here are 22@dmn{pt} apart: the sum of the
+@code{\baselineskip} and the 10@dmn{pt} from the first @code{addvspace}.
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{article@}
+\usepackage@{color@}
+\begin@{document@}
+\setlength@{\unitlength@}@{2pt@}%
+\noindent\begin@{picture@}(0,0)%
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,-1)@{25@}@{@{\color@{blue@}\line(1,0)@{1@}@}@}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,-5)@{6@}@{@{\color@{red@}\line(1,0)@{2@}@}@}
+\end@{picture@}%
+\rule@{0.25\linewidth@}@{0.1pt@}%
+\par\addvspace@{10pt@}% \addvspace@{20pt@}%
+\par\noindent\rule@{0.25\linewidth@}@{0.1pt@}%
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Now uncomment the second @code{\addvspace}. It does not make the gap
+20@dmn{pt} longer; instead the gap is the sum of @code{\baselineskip}
+and 20@dmn{pt}. So @code{\addvspace} in a sense does the opposite of
+its name --- it makes sure that multiple vertical spaces do not
+accumulate, but instead that only the largest one is used.
+
+@LaTeX{} uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below
+an environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a
+@code{theorem} environment begins and ends with @code{\addvspace} so
+that two consecutive @code{theorem}'s are separated by one vertical
+space, not two.
+
+A error @samp{Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item} pointing to an
+@code{\addvspace} means that you were not in vertical mode when you hit
+this command. One way to change that is to precede @code{\addvspace}
+with a @code{\par} command (@pxref{\par}), as in the above example.
+
+
+@node Boxes
+@chapter Boxes
+
+@cindex boxes
+
+@c xx Expand on boxes and glue, for xref from elsewhere.
+At its core, @LaTeX{} puts things in boxes and then puts the boxes on a
+page. So these commands are central.
+
+There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating boxes.
+One useful adjunct to the commands here is @file{adjustbox}.
+
+@menu
+* \mbox & \makebox:: Horizontal boxes.
+* \fbox & \framebox:: Put a frame around a box.
+* \parbox:: Box with text in paragraph mode.
+* \raisebox:: Raise or lower text.
+* \sbox & \savebox:: Like @code{\makebox} but save the text for later.
+* lrbox:: Environment version of @code{\sbox}.
+* \usebox:: Print saved text.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \mbox & \makebox
+@section @code{\mbox} & @code{\makebox}
+
+@findex \mbox
+@findex \makebox
+@cindex box
+@cindex make a box
+@cindex hyphenation, preventing
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\mbox@{@var{text}@}
+\makebox@{@var{text}@}
+\makebox[@var{width}]@{@var{text}@}
+\makebox[@var{width}][@var{position}]@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Create a box, a container for material. The @var{text} is typeset in
+LR mode (@pxref{Modes}) so it is not broken into lines. The
+@code{\mbox} command is robust, while @code{\makebox} is fragile
+(@pxref{\protect}).
+
+Because @code{text} is not broken into lines, you can use @code{\mbox}
+to prevent hyphenation. In this example, @LaTeX{} will not hyphenate
+the table name, @samp{T-4}.
+
+@example
+See Table~\mbox@{T-4@}
+@end example
+
+The first two command versions, @code{\mbox} and @code{\makebox}, are
+roughly equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the
+@var{text}. (They are like plain @TeX{}'s @code{\hbox}.)
+
+In the third version the optional argument @var{width} specifies the
+width of the box. Note that the space occupied by the text need not
+equal the width of the box. For one thing, @var{text} can be too small;
+this creates a full-line box
+
+@example
+\makebox[\linewidth]@{Chapter Exam@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+with @samp{Chapter Exam} centered. But @var{text} can also be too wide
+for @var{width}. See the example below of zero-width boxes.
+
+@anchor{mbox makebox depth}
+@anchor{mbox makebox height}
+@anchor{mbox makebox width}
+@anchor{mbox makebox totalheight}
+In the @var{width} argument you can use the following lengths that refer
+to the dimension of the box that @LaTeX{} gets on typesetting
+@var{text}: @code{\depth}, @code{\height}, @code{\width},
+@code{\totalheight} (this is the box's height plus its depth). For
+example, to make a box with the text stretched to double the natural
+size you can say this.
+
+@example
+\makebox[2\width]@{Get a stretcher@}
+@end example
+
+For the fourth command version the optional argument @var{position}
+gives position of the text within the box. It may take the following
+values:
+
+@table @code
+@item c
+The @var{text} is centered (default).
+
+@item l
+The @var{text} is flush left.
+
+@item r
+Flush right.
+
+@item s
+Stretch the interword space in @var{text} across the entire @var{width}.
+The @var{text} must contain stretchable space for this to work. For
+instance, this could head a press release:
+@code{\noindent\makebox[\textwidth][s]@{\large\hfil IMMEDIATE\hfil
+RELEASE\hfil@}}
+@end table
+
+A common use of @code{\makebox} is to make zero-width text boxes. This
+puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions.
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\pts@}[1]@{\makebox[0em][r]@{#1 points\hspace*@{1em@}@}@}
+\pts@{10@}What is the air-speed velocity of an unladen swallow?
+
+\pts@{90@}An African or European swallow?
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@PkgIndex{TikZ}
+@PkgIndex{Asymptote}
+The right edge of the output @samp{10 points } (note the ending space)
+will be just before the @samp{What} (note the space after
+@samp{points}). You can use @code{\makebox} similarly when making
+graphics, such as in @file{TikZ} or @file{Asymptote}, where you put the
+edge of the text at a known location, regardless of the length of that
+text.
+
+For boxes with frames see@tie{}@ref{\fbox & \framebox}. For colors
+see@tie{}@ref{Colored boxes}.
+
+There is a related version of @code{\makebox} that is used within the
+@code{picture} environment, where the length is given in terms of
+@code{\unitlength} (@pxref{\makebox (picture)}).
+
+If you put a double-backslash into @var{text} then @LaTeX{} will not
+give you a new line; for instance @code{\makebox@{abc def \\ ghi@}}
+outputs @samp{abc defghi} while @code{\makebox@{abc def \par ghi@}}
+outputs @samp{abc def ghi}, but neither go to a second line. To get
+multiple lines see@tie{}@ref{\parbox} and@tie{}@ref{minipage}.
+
+
+@node \fbox & \framebox
+@section @code{\fbox} & @code{\framebox}
+
+@findex \fbox
+@findex \framebox
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+@example
+\fbox@{@var{text}@}
+\framebox@{@var{text}@}
+\framebox[@var{width}]@{@var{text}@}
+\framebox[@var{width}][@var{position}]@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Create a box with an enclosing frame, four lines surrounding the space.
+These commands are the same as @code{\mbox} and @code{\makebox} except
+for the frame (@pxref{\mbox & \makebox}). The @code{\fbox} command is
+robust, the @code{\framebox} command is fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+@example
+\fbox@{Warning! No work shown, no credit given.@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@LaTeX{} puts the text into a box that cannot be split or hyphenated.
+Around that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four lines making
+a frame.
+
+The first two command invocations, @code{\fbox@{...@}} and
+@code{\framebox@{...@}}, are roughly the same. As to the third and
+fourth invocations, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box
+width as @var{width} and the position of the text inside that box as
+@var{position}. @xref{\mbox & \makebox} for the full description but
+here is an example creating an empty box that is 1/4@dmn{in} wide.
+
+@example
+\setlength@{\fboxsep@}@{0pt@}\framebox[0.25in]@{\strut@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The @code{\strut} inserts a vertical height of @code{\baselineskip}
+(@pxref{\strut}).
+
+These parameters determine the frame layout.
+
+@ftable @code
+@anchor{fbox framebox fboxrule}
+@item \fboxrule
+@findex frame, line width
+@findex frame rule width
+@cindex \fboxrule
+The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box. The default is
+0.2@dmn{pt}. Change it with a command such as
+@code{\setlength@{\fboxrule@}@{0.8pt@}} (@pxref{\setlength}).
+
+@anchor{fbox framebox fboxsep}
+@item \fboxsep
+@findex frame, separation from contents
+@cindex \fboxsep
+The distance from the frame to the enclosed box. The default is 3@dmn{pt}.
+Change it with a command such as @code{\setlength@{\fboxsep@}@{0pt@}}
+(@pxref{\setlength}). Setting it to 0@dmn{pt} is useful sometimes:
+this will put a frame around the picture with no white border.
+
+@example
+@{\setlength@{\fboxsep@}@{0pt@}
+ \framebox@{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]@{prudence.jpg@}@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The extra curly braces keep the effect of the @code{\setlength} local.
+
+@end ftable
+
+As with @code{\mbox} and @code{\makebox}, @LaTeX{} will not break lines
+in @var{text}. But this example has @LaTeX{} break lines to make a
+paragraph, and then frame the result.
+
+@example
+\framebox@{%
+ \begin@{minipage@}@{0.6\linewidth@}
+ My dear, here we must run as fast as we can, just to stay in place.
+ And if you wish to go anywhere you must run twice as fast as that.
+ \end@{minipage@}@}
+@end example
+
+@xref{Colored boxes} for colors other than black and white.
+
+The @code{picture} environment has a version of this command where the
+units depend on @code{picture}'s @code{\unitlength} (@pxref{\framebox
+(picture)}).
+
+
+@node \parbox
+@section @code{\parbox}
+
+@findex \parbox
+@cindex paragraph mode
+@cindex paragraph, in a box
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+@example
+\parbox@{@var{width}@}@{@var{contents}@}
+\parbox[@var{position}]@{@var{width}@}@{@var{contents}@}
+\parbox[@var{position}][@var{height}]@{@var{width}@}@{@var{contents}@}
+\parbox[@var{position}][@var{height}][@var{inner-pos}]@{@var{width}@}@{@var{contents}@}
+@end example
+
+Produce a box of text that is @var{width} wide. Use this command to make
+a box of small pieces of text, of a single paragraph. This command is
+fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+@example
+\begin@{picture@}(0,0)
+ ...
+ \put(1,2)@{\parbox@{1.75in@}@{\raggedright Because the graph is a line on
+ this semilog paper, the relationship is
+ exponential.@}@}
+\end@{picture@}
+@end example
+
+The @var{contents} are processed in a text mode (@pxref{Modes}) so
+@LaTeX{} will break lines to make a paragraph. But it won't make
+multiple paragraphs; for that, use a @code{minipage} environment
+(@pxref{minipage}).
+
+The options for @code{\parbox} (except for @var{contents}) are the same
+as those for @code{minipage}. For convenience a summary of the options
+is here but see@tie{}@ref{minipage} for a complete description.
+
+There are two required arguments. The @var{width} is a rigid length
+(@pxref{Lengths}). It sets the width of the box into which @LaTeX{}
+typesets @var{contents}. The @var{contents} is the text that is placed
+in that box. It should not have any paragraph-making components.
+
+There are three optional arguments, @var{position}, @var{height}, and
+@var{inner-pos}. The @var{position} gives the vertical alignment of the
+@code{parbox} with respect to the surrounding material. The possible
+values are @code{c} or @code{m} to make the vertical center of the
+@code{parbox} lines up with the center of the adjacent line (this is the
+default), or @code{t} to match the top line of the @code{parbox} with
+the baseline of the surrounding material, or @code{b} to match the
+bottom line.
+
+The optional argument @var{height} overrides the natural height of the
+box.
+
+The optional argument @var{inner-pos} controls the placement of
+@var{content} inside the @code{parbox}. Its default is the value of
+@var{position}. Its possible values are: @code{t} to put the
+@var{content} at the top of the box, @code{c} to put it in the vertical
+center, @code{b} to put it at the bottom of the box, and @code{s} to
+stretch it out vertically (for this, the text must contain vertically
+stretchable space).
+
+@node \raisebox
+@section @code{\raisebox}
+
+@findex \raisebox
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\raisebox@{@var{distance}@}@{@var{text}@}
+\raisebox@{@var{distance}@}[@var{height}]@{@var{text}@}
+\raisebox@{@var{distance}@}[@var{height}][@var{depth}]@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Raise or lower @var{text}. This command is fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by
+lowering the vertical bar symbol.
+
+@c credit: egreg https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/278631/121234
+@example
+\newcommand\restricted[1]@{\raisebox@{-.5ex@}@{$|$@}_@{#1@}@}
+$f\restricted@{A@}$
+@end example
+
+The first mandatory argument @var{distance} specifies how far to raise
+the second mandatory argument @var{text}. This is a rigid length
+(@pxref{Lengths}). If it is negative then it lowers @var{text}. The
+@var{text} is processed in LR mode so it cannot contain line breaks
+(@pxref{Modes}).
+
+The optional arguments @var{height} and @var{depth} are dimensions. If
+they are specified, they override the natural height and depth of the
+box @LaTeX{} gets by typesetting @var{text}.
+
+@anchor{raisebox depth}
+@anchor{raisebox height}
+@anchor{raisebox width}
+@anchor{raisebox totalheight}
+In the arguments @var{distance}, @var{height}, and @var{depth} you can
+use the following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that
+@LaTeX{} gets on typesetting @var{text}: @code{\depth}, @code{\height},
+@code{\width}, @code{\totalheight} (this is the box's height plus its
+depth).
+
+This will align two graphics on their top (@pxref{Graphics}).
+
+@c credit: FAQ https://texfaq.org/FAQ-topgraph
+@example
+\usepackage@{graphicx@} \usepackage@{calc@} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin@{center@}
+ \raisebox@{1ex-\height@}@{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]@{lion.png@}@}
+ \qquad
+ \raisebox@{1ex-\height@}@{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]@{meta.png@}@}
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The first @code{\height} is the height of @file{lion.png} while the
+second is the height of @file{meta.png}.
+
+
+@node \sbox & \savebox
+@section @code{\sbox} & @code{\savebox}
+
+@findex \sbox
+@findex \savebox
+@cindex box, save
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\sbox@{@var{box-cmd}@}@{@var{text}@}
+\savebox@{@var{box-cmd}@}@{@var{text}@}
+\savebox@{@var{box-cmd}@}[@var{width}]@{@var{text}@}
+\savebox@{@var{box-cmd}@}[@var{width}][@var{pos}]@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Typeset @var{text} just as with @code{\makebox} (@pxref{\mbox &
+\makebox}) except that @LaTeX{} does not output it but instead saves it
+in a storage bin named @var{box-cmd}. The bin name @var{box-cmd} begins
+with a backslash, @code{\}. You must have previously allocated the bin
+@var{box-cmd} with @code{\newsavebox} (@pxref{\newsavebox}).The
+@code{\sbox} command is robust while @code{\savebox} is fragile
+(@pxref{\protect}).
+
+This creates and uses a bin.
+
+@example
+\newsavebox@{\fullname@}
+\sbox@{\fullname@}@{John Jacob Jingleheimer Schmidt@}
+ ...
+\usebox@{\fullname@}! His name is my name, too!
+Whenever we go out, the people always shout!
+There goes \\usebox@{\fullname@}! Ya da da da da da da.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a @code{\newcommand} is
+efficiency, that @LaTeX{} need not repeatedly retypeset the contents.
+See the example below.
+
+The first two command invocations,
+@code{\sbox@{@var{box-cmd}@}@{@var{text}@}} and
+@code{\savebox@{@var{box-cmd}@}@{@var{text}@}}, are roughly equivalent.
+As to the third and fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify
+the box width as @var{width}, and the position of the text inside that
+box as @var{position}. @xref{\mbox & \makebox} for the full
+description.
+
+In the @code{\sbox} and @code{\savebox} commands the @var{text} is
+typeset in LR mode so it does not have line breaks (@pxref{Modes}). If
+you use these then @LaTeX{} doesn't give you an error but it ignores
+what you want: if you enter @code{\sbox@{\newbin@}@{test \\ test@}} and
+@code{\usebox@{\newbin@}} then you get @samp{testtest}, while if you
+enter @code{\sbox@{\newbin@}@{test \par test@}} and
+@code{\usebox@{\newbin@}} then you get @samp{test test}, but no error or
+warning. To fix this use a @code{\parbox} or @code{minipage} as here.
+
+@c credit: egreg https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/41668/121234
+@example
+\savebox@{\abin@}@{%
+ \begin@{minipage@}@{\linewidth@}
+ \begin@{enumerate@}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ \end@{enumerate@}
+ \end@{minipage@}@}
+ ...
+\usebox@{\abin@}
+@end example
+
+As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin's contents, this puts
+the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the
+header. @LaTeX{} only typesets it once.
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{graphicx@} % all this in the preamble
+\newsavebox@{\sealbin@}
+\savebox@{\sealbin@}@{%
+ \setlength@{\unitlength@}@{1in@}%
+ \begin@{picture@}(0,0)%
+ \put(1.5,-2.5)@{%
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{c@}
+ \includegraphics[height=2in]@{companylogo.png@} \\
+ Office of the President
+ \end@{tabular@}@}
+ \end@{picture@}%
+@}
+\markright@{\usebox@{\sealbin@}@}
+\pagestyle@{headings@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The @code{picture} environment is good for fine-tuning the placement.
+
+If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like
+@samp{Undefined control sequence. <argument> \nobin}.
+
+
+@node lrbox
+@section @code{lrbox}
+
+@findex lrbox
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\begin@{lrbox@}@{@var{box-cmd}@}
+ @var{text}
+\end@{lrbox@}
+@end example
+
+The @var{text} inside the environment is saved in the bin
+@code{@var{box-cmd}}. The @var{box-cmd} must begin with a
+backslash. You must create this bin in advance with @code{\newsavebox}
+(@pxref{\newsavebox}). This is the environment form of the @code{\sbox}
+and @code{\savebox} commands, and is equivalent to them. @xref{\sbox &
+\savebox} for the full information.
+
+In this example the environment is convenient for entering the
+@code{tabular}.
+
+@example
+\newsavebox@{\jhbin@}
+\begin@{lrbox@}@{\jhbin@}
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{c@}
+ \includegraphics[height=1in]@{jh.png@} \\
+ Jim Hef@{@}feron
+ \end@{tabular@}
+\end@{lrbox@}
+ ...
+\usebox@{\jhbin@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \usebox
+@section @code{\usebox}
+
+@findex \usebox
+@cindex box, use saved box
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\usebox@{@var{box-cmd}@}
+@end example
+
+Produce the box most recently saved in the bin @var{box-cmd} by the
+commands @code{\sbox} or @code{\savebox}, or the @code{lrbox}
+environment. @xref{\sbox & \savebox} for more information and examples.
+(Note that @var{box-cmd} starts with a backslash.) This command is
+robust (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+
+@node Color
+@chapter Color
+
+@cindex color
+
+You can add color to text, rules, etc. You can also have color in a box
+or on an entire page and write text on top of it.
+
+Color support comes as an additional package. So put
+@code{\usepackage@{color@}} in your document preamble to use the
+commands described here.
+
+Many other packages also supplement @LaTeX{}'s color abilities.
+Particularly worth mentioning is @file{xcolor}, which is widely used and
+significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding
+@samp{HTML} and @samp{Hsb} color models.
+
+@menu
+* Color package options:: Options when you load the standard package.
+* Color models:: How colors are represented.
+* Commands for color:: The available commands.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Color package options
+@section @code{color} package options
+
+@cindex color package options
+@cindex options, color package
+
+Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
+
+@example
+\usepackage[@var{comma-separated option list}]@{color@}
+@end example
+
+When you load the @file{color} package there are two kinds of available
+options.
+
+The first specifies the @dfn{printer driver}. @LaTeX{} doesn't contain
+information about different output systems but instead depends on
+information stored in a file. Normally you should not specify the
+driver option in the document, and instead rely on your system's
+default. One advantage of this is that it makes the document portable
+across systems. For completeness we include a list of the drivers. The
+currently relevant ones are: @file{dvipdfmx}, @file{dvips},
+@file{dvisvgm}, @file{luatex}, @file{pdftex}, @file{xetex}. The two
+@file{xdvi} and @file{oztex} are essentially aliases for @file{dvips}
+(and @file{xdvi} is monochrome). Ones that should not be used for new
+systems are: @file{dvipdf}, @file{dvipdfm}, @file{dviwin},
+@file{dvipsone}, @file{emtex}, @file{pctexps}, @file{pctexwin},
+@file{pctexhp}, @file{pctex32}, @file{truetex}, @file{tcidvi},
+@file{vtex} (and @file{dviwindo} is an alias for @file{dvipsone}).
+
+The second kind of options, beyond the drivers, are below.
+
+@table @code
+
+@item monochrome
+Disable the color commands, so that they do not generate errors but do
+not generate color either.
+
+@item dvipsnames
+Make available a list of 68 color names that are often used,
+particularly in legacy documents. These color names were originally
+provided by the @file{dvips} driver, giving the option name.
+
+@item nodvipsnames
+Do not load that list of color names, saving @LaTeX{} a tiny amount of
+memory space.
+
+@end table
+
+
+@node Color models
+@section Color models
+
+@cindex color models
+
+A @dfn{color model} is a way of representing colors. @LaTeX{}'s
+capabilities depend on the printer driver. However, the @file{pdftex},
+@file{xetex}, and @file{luatex} printer drivers are today by far the
+most commonly used. The models below work for those drivers. All but
+one of these is also supported by essentially all other printer drivers
+used today.
+
+Note that color combination can be additive or subtractive. Additive
+mixes colors of light, so that for instance combining full intensities
+of red, green, and blue produces white. Subtractive mixes pigments,
+such as with inks, so that combining full intensity of cyan, magenta,
+and yellow makes black.
+
+@table @code
+@anchor{color models cmyk}
+@item cmyk
+A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1,
+inclusive. The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second is
+magenta, and the others are yellow and black. A number value of 0 means
+minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity. This model is often
+used in color printing. It is a subtractive model.
+
+@anchor{color models gray}
+@item gray
+A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive. The colors are shades
+of grey. The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white.
+
+@anchor{color models rgb}
+@item rgb
+A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1,
+inclusive. The first number is the intensity of the red component, the
+second is green, and the third the blue. A number value of 0 means that
+none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full intensity.
+This is an additive model.
+
+@anchor{color models RGB}
+@item RGB
+(@file{pdftex}, @file{xetex}, @file{luatex} drivers) A comma-separated
+list with three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive. This model is a
+convenience for using @code{rgb} since outside of @LaTeX{} colors are
+often described in a red-green-blue model using numbers in this range.
+The values entered here are converted to the @code{rgb} model by
+dividing by 255.
+
+@anchor{color models named}
+@item named
+Colors are accessed by name, such as @samp{PrussianBlue}. The list of
+names depends on the driver, but all support the names @samp{black},
+@samp{blue}, @samp{cyan}, @samp{green}, @samp{magenta}, @samp{red},
+@samp{white}, and @samp{yellow} (See the @code{dvipsnames} option in
+@ref{Color package options}).
+
+@end table
+
+
+@node Commands for color
+@section Commands for color
+
+@cindex color package commands
+
+These are the commands available with the @file{color} package.
+
+@menu
+* Define colors:: Give a color a name.
+* Colored text:: Text or rules in color.
+* Colored boxes:: A box of color, to write over.
+* Colored pages:: A whole page colored.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Define colors
+@subsection Define colors
+
+@cindex color
+@cindex define color
+@cindex color, define
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\definecolor@{@var{name}@}@{@var{model}@}@{@var{specification}@}
+@end example
+
+Give the name @var{name} to the color. For example, after this
+
+@example
+\definecolor@{silver@}@{rgb@}@{0.75,0.75,0.74@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+you can use that color name with @code{Hi ho,
+\textcolor@{silver@}@{Silver@}!}.
+
+This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change and
+not be misleading.
+
+@example
+\definecolor@{logocolor@}@{RGB@}@{145,92,131@} % RGB needs pdflatex
+\newcommand@{\logo@}@{\textcolor@{logocolor@}@{Bob's Big Bagels@}@}
+@end example
+
+Often a document's colors are defined in the preamble, or in the class
+or style, rather than in the document body.
+
+
+@node Colored text
+@subsection Colored text
+
+@cindex color
+@cindex colored text
+
+Synopses:
+
+@example
+\textcolor@{@var{name}@}@{...@}
+\textcolor[@var{color model}]@{@var{color specification}@}@{...@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\color@{@var{name}@}
+\color[@var{color model}]@{@var{specification}@}
+@end example
+
+The affected text gets the color. This line
+
+@example
+\textcolor@{magenta@}@{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:@}
+Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black. You
+can use a color declared with @code{\definecolor} in exactly the same
+way that we just used the builtin color @samp{magenta}.
+
+@example
+\definecolor@{MidlifeCrisisRed@}@{rgb@}@{1.0,0.11,0.0@}
+I'm thinking about getting a \textcolor@{MidlifeCrisisRed@}@{sports car@}.
+@end example
+
+The two @code{\textcolor} and @code{\color} differ in that the first is
+a command form, enclosing the text to be colored as an argument. Often
+this form is more convenient, or at least more explicit. The second
+form is a declaration, as in @code{The moon is made of @{\color@{green@}
+green@} cheese}, so it is in effect until the end of the current group
+or environment. This is sometimes useful when writing macros or as
+below where it colors everything inside the @code{center} environment,
+including the vertical and horizontal lines.
+
+@example
+\begin@{center@} \color@{blue@}
+ \begin@{tabular@}@{l|r@}
+ UL &UR \\ \hline
+ LL &LR
+ \end@{tabular@}
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+You can use color in equations. A document might have this definition
+in the preamble
+
+@example
+\definecolor@{highlightcolor@}@{RGB@}@{225,15,0@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+and then contain this equation.
+
+@example
+\begin@{equation@}
+ \int_a^b \textcolor@{highlightcolor@}@{f'(x)@}\,dx=f(b)-f(a)
+\end@{equation@}
+@end example
+
+Typically the colors used in a document are declared in a class or style
+but sometimes you want a one-off. Those are the second forms in the
+synopses.
+
+@example
+Colors of \textcolor[rgb]@{0.33,0.14,0.47@}@{Purple@} and
+@{\color[rgb]@{0.72,0.60,0.37@} Gold@} for the team.
+@end example
+
+The format of @var{color specification } depends on the color model
+(@pxref{Color models}). For instance, while @code{rgb} takes three
+numbers, @code{gray} takes only one.
+
+@example
+The selection was \textcolor[gray]@{0.5@}@{grayed out@}.
+@end example
+
+Colors inside colors do not combine. Thus
+
+@example
+\textcolor@{green@}@{kind of \textcolor@{blue@}@{blue@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+has a final word that is blue, not a combination of blue and green.
+
+@c xx address coloring a line of a table?
+
+
+@node Colored boxes
+@subsection Colored boxes
+
+@cindex color
+@cindex colored boxes
+@cindex box, colored
+
+Synopses:
+
+@example
+\colorbox@{@var{name}@}@{...@}
+\colorbox[@var{model name}]@{@var{box background color}@}@{...@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\fcolorbox@{@var{frame color}@}@{@var{box background color}@}@{...@}
+\fcolorbox[@var{model name}]@{@var{frame color}@}@{@var{box background color}@}@{...@}
+@end example
+
+Make a box with the stated background color. The @code{\fcolorbox}
+command puts a frame around the box. For instance this
+
+@example
+Name:~\colorbox@{cyan@}@{\makebox[5cm][l]@{\strut@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+makes a cyan-colored box that is five centimeters long and gets its
+depth and height from the @code{\strut} (so the depth is
+@code{-.3\baselineskip} and the height is @code{\baselineskip}). This
+puts white text on a blue background.
+
+@example
+\colorbox@{blue@}@{\textcolor@{white@}@{Welcome to the machine.@}@}
+@end example
+
+The @code{\fcolorbox} commands use the same parameters as @code{\fbox}
+(@pxref{\fbox & \framebox}), @code{\fboxrule} and @code{\fboxsep}, to
+set the thickness of the rule and the boundary between the box interior
+and the surrounding rule. @LaTeX{}'s defaults are @code{0.4pt} and
+@code{3pt}, respectively.
+
+This example changes the thickness of the border to 0.8 points. Note
+that it is surrounded by curly braces so that the change ends at the end
+of the second line.
+
+@example
+@{\setlength@{\fboxrule@}@{0.8pt@}
+\fcolorbox@{black@}@{red@}@{Under no circumstances turn this knob.@}@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node Colored pages
+@subsection Colored pages
+
+@cindex color
+@cindex colored page
+@cindex page, colored
+@cindex background, colored
+
+Synopses:
+
+@example
+\pagecolor@{@var{name}@}
+\pagecolor[@var{color model}]@{@var{color specification}@}
+\nopagecolor
+@end example
+
+The first two set the background of the page, and all subsequent pages,
+to the color. For an explanation of the specification in the second
+form @pxref{Colored text}. The third returns the background to normal,
+which is a transparent background. (If that is not supported use
+@code{\pagecolor@{white@}}, although that will make a white background
+rather than the default transparent background.)
+
+@example
+ ...
+\pagecolor@{cyan@}
+ ...
+\nopagecolor
+@end example
+
+
+@node Graphics
+@chapter Graphics
+
+@cindex graphics
+@cindex graphics package
+
+You can use graphics such as PNG or PDF files in your @LaTeX{} document.
+You need an additional package, which comes standard with @LaTeX{}.
+This example is the short how-to.
+
+@example
+\include@{graphicx@} % goes in the preamble
+ ...
+\includegraphics[width=0.5\linewidth]@{plot.pdf@}
+@end example
+
+To use the commands described here your document preamble must contain
+either @code{\usepackage@{graphicx@}} or
+@code{\usepackage@{graphics@}}. Most of the time, @file{graphicx} is the
+better choice.
+
+Graphics come in two main types, raster and vector. @LaTeX{} can use
+both. In raster graphics the file contains an entry for each location
+in an array, describing what color it is. An example is a photograph,
+in JPG format. In vector graphics, the file contains a list of
+instructions such as @samp{draw a circle with this radius and that
+center}. An example is a line drawing produced by the Asymptote
+program, in PDF format. Generally vector graphics are more useful
+because you can rescale their size without pixelation or other problems,
+and because they often have a smaller size.
+
+There are systems particularly well-suited to make graphics for a
+@LaTeX{} document. For example, these allow you to use the same fonts
+as in your document. @LaTeX{} comes with a @code{picture} environment
+(@pxref{picture}) that has simple capabilities. Besides that, there are
+other ways to include the graphic-making commands in the document. Two
+such systems are the PSTricks and TikZ packages. There are also systems
+external to @LaTeX{}, that generate a graphic that you include using the
+commands of this chapter. Two that use a programming language are
+Asymptote and MetaPost. One that uses a graphical interface is Xfig.
+Full description of these systems is outside the scope of this document;
+see their documentation on CTAN.
+
+@menu
+* Graphics package options:: Options when you load the package.
+* Graphics package configuration:: Where to look for files, which file types.
+* Commands for graphics:: The available commands.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Graphics package options
+@section @code{graphics} package options
+
+@cindex graphics package options
+@cindex options, graphics package
+
+Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
+
+@example
+\usepackage[@var{comma-separated option list}]@{graphics@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+or
+
+@example
+\usepackage[@var{comma-separated option list}]@{graphicx@}
+@end example
+
+The @code{graphicx} package has a format for optional arguments to the
+@code{\includegraphics} command that is convenient (it is the key-value
+format), so it is the better choice for new documents. When you load
+the @file{graphics} or @file{graphicx} package with @code{\usepackage}
+there are two kinds of available options.
+
+The first is that @LaTeX{} does not contain information about different
+output systems but instead depends on information stored in a
+@dfn{printer driver} file. Normally you should not specify the driver
+option in the document, and instead rely on your system's default. One
+advantage of this is that it makes the document portable across systems.
+
+For completeness here is a list of the drivers. The currently relevant
+ones are: @file{dvipdfmx}, @file{dvips}, @file{dvisvgm}, @file{luatex},
+@file{pdftex}, @file{xetex}. The two @file{xdvi} and @file{oztex} are
+essentially aliases for @file{dvips} (and @file{xdvi} is monochrome).
+Ones that should not be used for new systems are: @file{dvipdf},
+@file{dvipdfm}, @file{dviwin}, @file{dvipsone}, @file{emtex},
+@file{pctexps}, @file{pctexwin}, @file{pctexhp}, @file{pctex32},
+@file{truetex}, @file{tcidvi}, @file{vtex} (and @file{dviwindo} is an
+alias for @file{dvipsone}). These are stored in files with a
+@file{.def} extension, such as @file{pdftex.def}.
+
+The second kind of options are below.
+
+@table @code
+@item demo
+Instead of an image file, @LaTeX{} puts in a 150@tie{}pt by 100@tie{}pt
+rectangle (unless another size is specified in the
+@code{\includegraphics} command).
+
+@item draft
+For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead the file name is
+printed in a box of the correct size. In order to determine the size,
+the file must be present.
+
+@item final
+(Default) Override any previous @code{draft} option, so that the
+document shows the contents of the graphic files.
+
+@item hiderotate
+Do not show rotated text. (This allows for the possibility that a
+previewer does not have the capability to rotate text.)
+@c what does it show?
+
+@item hidescale
+Do not show scaled text. (This allows for the possibility that a
+previewer does not have the capability to scale.)
+@c what does it show?
+
+@item hiresbb
+In a PS or EPS file the graphic size may be specified in two ways. The
+@code{%%BoundingBox} lines describe the graphic size using integer
+multiples of a PostScript point, that is, integer multiples of 1/72
+inch. A later addition to the PostScript language allows decimal
+multiples, such as 1.23, in @code{%%HiResBoundingBox} lines. This
+option has @LaTeX{} to read the size from the latter.
+
+@end table
+
+
+@node Graphics package configuration
+@section @code{graphics} package configuration
+
+@cindex graphics
+@cindex graphics package
+@cindex configuration, graphics package
+@cindex EPS files
+@cindex JPEG files
+@cindex JPG files
+@cindex PDF graphic files
+@cindex PNG files
+
+These commands configure the way @LaTeX{} searches the file system for
+the graphic.
+
+The behavior of file system search code is necessarily platform
+dependent. In this document we cover GNU/Linux, Macintosh, and Windows, as
+those systems are typically configured. For other situations consult
+the documentation in @file{grfguide.pdf}, or the @LaTeX{} source, or your
+@TeX{} distribution's documentation.
+
+@menu
+* \graphicspath:: Directories to search.
+* \DeclareGraphicsExtensions:: File types, such as JPG or EPS.
+* \DeclareGraphicsRule:: How to handle file types.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \graphicspath
+@subsection @code{\graphicspath}
+
+@findex \graphicspath
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\graphicspath@{@var{list of dir names inside curly brackets}@}
+@end example
+
+Declare a list of directories to search for graphics files. This allows
+you to later say something like @code{\includegraphics@{lion.png@}}
+instead of having to give its path.
+
+@LaTeX{} always looks for graphic files first in the current directory.
+The declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory
+@file{pix}, and then @file{../pix}.
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{graphicx@} % or graphics; put in preamble
+ ...
+\graphicspath@{ @{pix/@} @{../pix/@} @}
+@end example
+
+The @code{\graphicspath} declaration is optional. If you don't include
+it then @LaTeX{}'s default is to search all of the places that it
+usually looks for a file (it uses @LaTeX{}'s @code{\input@@path}). In
+particular, in this case one of the places it looks is the current
+directory.
+
+Enclose each directory name in curly braces; for example, above it says
+@samp{@code{@{pix@}}}. Do this even if there is only one directory.
+Each directory name must end in a forward slash, @file{/}. This is true
+even on Windows, where good practice is to use forward slashes for all
+the directory separators since it makes the document portable to other
+platforms. If you have spaces in your directory name then use double
+quotes, as with @code{@{"my docs/"@}}. Getting one of these rules wrong
+will cause @LaTeX{} to report @code{Error: File `@var{filename}' not
+found}.
+
+Basically, the algorithm is that with this example, after looking in the
+current directory,
+
+@example
+\graphicspath@{ @{pix/@} @{../pix/@} @}
+...
+\usepackage@{lion.png@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+for each of the listed directories, @LaTeX{} concatenates it with the
+file name and searches for the result, checking for @file{pix/lion.png}
+and then @file{../pix/lion.png}. This algorithm means that the
+@code{\graphicspath} command does not recursively search subdirectories:
+if you issue @code{\graphicspath@{@{a/@}@}} and the graphic is in
+@file{a/b/lion.png} then @LaTeX{} will not find it. It also means that
+you can use absolute paths such as
+@code{\graphicspath@{@{/home/jim/logos/@}@}} or
+@code{\graphicspath@{@{C:/Users/Albert/Pictures/@}@}}. However, using
+these means that the document is not portable. (You could preserve
+portability by adjusting your @TeX{} system settings configuration file
+parameter @code{TEXINPUTS}; see the documentation of your system.)
+
+You can use @code{\graphicspath} anywhere in the document. You can use
+it more than once. Show its value with
+@code{\makeatletter\typeout@{\Ginput@@path@}\makeatother}.
+
+The directories are taken with respect to the base file. That is,
+suppose that you are working on a document based on @file{book/book.tex}
+and it contains @code{\include@{chapters/chap1@}}. If in
+@file{chap1.tex} you put @code{\graphicspath@{@{plots/@}@}} then
+@LaTeX{} will not search for graphics in @file{book/chapters/plots}, but
+instead in @file{book/plots}.
+
+
+@node \DeclareGraphicsExtensions
+@subsection @code{\DeclareGraphicsExtensions}
+
+@findex \DeclareGraphicsExtensions
+
+Synopses:
+
+@example
+\DeclareGraphicsExtensions@{@var{comma-separated list of file extensions}@}
+@end example
+
+Declare the filename extensions to try. This allows you to specify the
+order in which to choose graphic formats when you include graphic files
+by giving the filename without the extension, as in
+@code{\includegraphics@{functionplot@}}.
+
+In this example, @LaTeX{} will find files in the PNG format before PDF
+files.
+
+@example
+\DeclareGraphicsExtensions@{.png,PNG,.pdf,.PDF@}
+ ...
+\includegraphics@{lion@} % will find @file{lion.png} before @file{lion.pdf}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Because the file name @file{lion} does not have a period, @LaTeX{} uses
+the extension list. For each directory in the graphics path
+(@pxref{\graphicspath}), @LaTeX{} will try the extensions in the order
+given. If it does not find such a file after trying all the directories
+and extensions then it reports @samp{! LaTeX Error: File `@file{lion}'
+not found}. Note that you must include the periods at the start of the
+extensions.
+
+Because GNU/Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the list of
+file extensions is case sensitive on those platforms. The Windows
+platform is not case sensitive.
+
+You are not required to include @code{\DeclareGraphicsExtensions} in
+your document; the printer driver has a sensible default. For example,
+the most recent @file{pdftex.def} has this extension list.
+
+@example
+.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
+@end example
+
+You can use this command anywhere in the document. You can use it more
+than once. Show its value with
+@code{\makeatletter\typeout@{\Gin@@extensions@}\makeatother}.
+
+
+@node \DeclareGraphicsRule
+@subsection @code{\DeclareGraphicsRule}
+
+@findex \DeclareGraphicsRule
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\DeclareGraphicsRule@{@var{extension}@}@{@var{type}@}@{@var{size-file extension}@}@{@var{command}@}
+@end example
+
+Declare how to handle graphic files whose names end in @var{extension}.
+
+This example declares that all files with names have the form
+@file{filename-without-dot.mps} will be treated as output from MetaPost,
+meaning that the printer driver will use its MetaPost-handling code to
+input the file.
+
+@example
+\DeclareGraphicsRule@{.mps@}@{mps@}@{.mps@}@{@}
+@end example
+
+This
+
+@example
+\DeclareGraphicsRule@{*@}@{mps@}@{*@}@{@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+tells @LaTeX{} that it should handle as MetaPost output any file with an
+extension not covered by another rule, so it covers @file{filename.1},
+@file{filename.2}, etc.
+
+This describes the four arguments.
+
+@table @var
+@item extension
+The file extension to which this rule applies. The extension is anything
+after and including the first dot in the filename. Use the Kleene star,
+@code{*}, to denote the default behaviour for all undeclared extensions.
+
+@item type
+The type of file involved. This type is a string that must be defined
+in the printer driver. For instance, files with extensions @file{.ps},
+@file{.eps}, or @file{.ps.gz} may all be classed as type @code{eps}.
+All files of the same type will be input with the same internal command
+by the printer driver. For example, the file types that @file{pdftex}
+recognizes are: @code{jpg}, @code{jbig2}, @code{mps}, @code{pdf},
+@code{png}, @code{tif}.
+
+@item size-file extension
+The extension of the file to be read to determine the size of the
+graphic, if there is such a file. It may be the same as @var{extension}
+but it may be different.
+
+As an example, consider a PostScript graphic. To make it smaller, it
+might be compressed into a @file{.ps.gz} file. Compressed files are not
+easily read by @LaTeX{} so you can put the bounding box information in a
+separate file. If @var{size-file extension} is empty then you must
+specify size information in the arguments of @code{\includegraphics}.
+
+If the driver file has a procedure for reading size files for
+@code{type} then that will be used, otherwise it will use the procedure
+for reading @file{.eps} files. (Thus you may specify the size of bitmap
+files in a file with a PostScript style @code{%%BoundingBox} line if no
+other format is available.)
+
+@item command
+A command that will be applied to the
+file. This is very often left blank. This command must start with a
+single backward quote. Thus,
+@code{\DeclareGraphicsRule@{.eps.gz@}@{eps@}@{.eps.bb@}@{`gunzip -c
+#1@}} specifies that any file with the extension @file{.eps.gz} should
+be treated as an @code{eps} file, with the BoundingBox information
+stored in the file with extension @file{.eps.bb}, and that the command
+@code{gunzip -c} will run on your platform to decompresses the file.
+
+Such a command is specific to your platform. In addition, your @TeX{}
+system must allow you to run external commands; as a security measure
+modern systems restrict running commands unless you explicitly allow it.
+See the documentation for your @TeX{} distribution.
+
+@end table
+
+@node Commands for graphics
+@section Commands for graphics
+
+@cindex graphics package commands
+@cindex commands, graphics package
+
+These are the commands available with the @file{graphics} and
+@file{graphicx} packages.
+
+@menu
+* \includegraphics:: Using a graphic in your document.
+* \rotatebox:: Rotating boxes, including graphics.
+* \scalebox:: Scaling boxes, including graphics.
+* \resizebox:: Scaling boxes, including graphics, to a set size.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \includegraphics
+@subsection @code{\includegraphics}
+
+@cindex graphics
+@cindex graphics package
+@cindex including graphics
+@cindex importing graphics
+@cindex EPS files
+@cindex JPEG files
+@cindex JPG files
+@cindex PDF graphic files
+@cindex PNG files
+@findex \includegraphics
+
+Synopses for @file{graphics} package:
+
+@example
+\includegraphics@{@var{filename}@}
+\includegraphics[@var{urx},@var{ury}]@{@var{filename}@}
+\includegraphics[@var{llx},@var{lly}][@var{urx},@var{ury}]@{@var{filename}@}
+\includegraphics*@{@var{filename}@}
+\includegraphics*[@var{urx},@var{ury}]@{@var{filename}@}
+\includegraphics*[@var{llx},@var{lly}][@var{urx},@var{ury}]@{@var{filename}@}
+@end example
+
+Synopses for @file{graphicx} package:
+
+@example
+\includegraphics@{@var{filename}@}
+\includegraphics[@var{key-value list}]@{@var{filename}@}
+\includegraphics*@{@var{filename}@}
+\includegraphics*[@var{key-value list}]@{@var{filename}@}
+@end example
+
+Include a graphics file. The starred form @code{\includegraphics*} will
+clip the graphic to the size specified, while for the unstarred form any
+part of the graphic that is outside the box of the specified size will
+over-print the surrounding area.
+
+This
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{graphicx@} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin@{center@}
+ \includegraphics@{plot.pdf@}
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+will incorporate into the document the graphic in @file{plot.pdf},
+centered and at its nominal size. You can also give a path to the file,
+as with @code{\includegraphics@{graphics/plot.pdf@}}. To specify a list
+of locations to search for the file, @pxref{\graphicspath}.
+
+If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes. An example
+is @code{\includegraphics@{"sister picture.jpg"@}}.
+
+The @code{\includegraphics@{@var{filename}@}} command decides on the
+type of graphic by splitting @var{filename} on the first dot. You can
+use @var{filename} with no dot, as in @code{\includegraphics@{turing@}}
+and then @LaTeX{} tries a sequence of extensions such as @code{.png} and
+@code{.pdf} until it finds a file with that extension
+(@pxref{\DeclareGraphicsExtensions}).
+
+If your file name contains dots before the extension then you can hide
+them with curly braces, as in
+@code{\includegraphics@{@{plot.2018.03.12.a@}.pdf@}}. Or, if you use
+the @file{graphicx} package then you can use the options @code{type} and
+@code{ext}; see below. This and other filename issues are also handled
+with the package @file{grffile}.
+
+This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so @LaTeX{} can
+move it to the next page if fitting it on the current page is awkward
+(@pxref{figure}).
+
+@example
+\begin@{figure@}
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=3cm]@{lungxray.jpg@}
+ \caption@{The evidence is overwhelming: don't smoke.@} \label@{fig:xray@}
+\end@{figure@}
+@end example
+
+This places a graphic that will not float, so it is sure to appear at
+this point in the document even if makes @LaTeX{} stretch the text or
+resort to blank areas on the page. It will be centered and will have a
+caption.
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{caption@} % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin@{center@}
+ \includegraphics@{pix/nix.png@}
+ \captionof@{figure@}@{The spirit of the night@} \label@{pix:nix@} % optional
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+This example puts a box with a graphic side by side with one having
+text, with the two vertically centered.
+
+@example
+\newcommand*@{\vcenteredhbox@}[1]@{\begin@{tabular@}@{@@@{@}c@@@{@}@}#1\end@{tabular@}@}
+ ...
+\begin@{center@}
+ \vcenteredhbox@{\includegraphics[width=0.4\textwidth]@{plot@}@}
+ \hspace@{1em@}
+ \vcenteredhbox@{\begin@{minipage@}@{0.4\textwidth@}
+ \begin@{displaymath@}
+ f(x)=x\cdot \sin (1/x)
+ \end@{displaymath@}
+ \end@{minipage@}@}
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+If you use the @file{graphics} package then the only options involve the
+size of the graphic (but see @ref{\rotatebox} and @ref{\scalebox}).
+When one optional argument is present then it is
+@code{[@var{urx},@var{ury}]} and it gives the coordinates of the top
+right corner of the image, as a pair of @TeX{} dimensions (@pxref{Units
+of length}). If the units are omitted they default to @code{bp}. In
+this case, the lower left corner of the image is assumed to be at (0,0).
+If two optional arguments are present then the leading one is
+@code{[@var{llx},@var{lly}]}, specifying the coordinates of the image's
+lower left. Thus, @code{\includegraphics[1in,0.618in]@{...@}} calls for
+the graphic to be placed so it is 1@tie{}inch wide and 0.618@tie{}inches
+tall and so its origin is at (0,0).
+
+The @file{graphicx} package gives you many more options. Specify them
+in a key-value form, as here.
+
+@example
+\begin@{center@}
+ \includegraphics[width=1in,angle=90]@{lion@}
+ \hspace@{2em@}
+ \includegraphics[angle=90,width=1in]@{lion@}
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The options are read left-to-right. So the first graphic above is made
+one inch wide and then rotated, while the second is rotated and then
+made one inch wide. Thus, unless the graphic is perfectly square, the
+two will end with different widths and heights.
+
+There are many options. The primary ones are listed first.
+
+Note that a graphic is placed by @LaTeX{} into a box, which is
+traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the
+PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic's printed area may
+go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when @LaTeX{} makes up a
+page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the
+graphic.
+
+@table @code
+@anchor{includegraphics width}
+@item width
+The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this width. An example
+is @code{\includegraphics[width=1in]@{plot@}}. You can use the standard
+@TeX{} dimensions (@pxref{Units of length}) and also convenient is
+@code{\linewidth}, or in a two-column document, @code{\columnwidth}
+(@pxref{Page layout parameters}). An example is that by using the
+@file{calc} package you can make the graphic be 1@tie{}cm narrow than
+the width of the text with
+@code{\includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]@{hefferon.jpg@}}.
+
+@item height
+@anchor{includegraphics height}
+The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height. You can
+use the standard @TeX{} dimensions (@pxref{Units of length}), and also
+convenient are @code{\pageheight} and @code{\textheight} (@pxref{Page
+layout parameters}). For instance, the command
+@code{\includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]@{godel@}} will make the
+graphic a quarter of the height of the text area.
+
+@item totalheight
+@anchor{includegraphics totalheght}
+The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus
+depth. This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated. For
+instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero height
+but a large depth.
+
+@item keepaspectratio
+@anchor{includegraphics keepaspectratio}
+If set to @code{true}, or just specified as here
+
+@example
+@code{\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]@{...@}}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+and you give as options both @code{width} and @code{height} (or
+@code{totalheight}), then @LaTeX{} will make the graphic is as large as
+possible without distortion. That is, @LaTeX{} will ensure that neither
+is the graphic wider than @code{width} nor taller than @code{height} (or
+@code{totalheight}).
+
+@item scale
+Factor by which to scale the graphic. To make a graphic twice its
+nominal size, enter @code{\includegraphics[scale=2.0]@{...@}}. This
+number may be any value; a number between 1 and@tie{}0 will shrink the
+graphic and a negative number will reflect it.
+
+@item angle
+Rotate the graphic. The angle is taken in degrees and counterclockwise.
+The graphic is rotated about its @code{origin}; see that option. For a
+complete description of how rotated material is typeset,
+@pxref{\rotatebox}.
+
+@item origin
+The point of the graphic about which the rotation happens. Possible
+values are any string containing one or two of: @code{l} for left,
+@code{r} for right, @code{b} for bottom, @code{c} for center, @code{t}
+for top, and @code{B} for baseline. Thus, entering the command
+@code{\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]@{moon@}} will turn the
+picture upside down about that picture's center, while the command
+@code{\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]@{LeBateau@}} will turn its
+picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character @code{c}
+gives the horizontal center in @code{bc} or @code{tc}, but gives the
+vertical center in @code{lc} or @code{rc}.) The default is @code{lB}.
+
+To rotate about an arbitrary point, @pxref{\rotatebox}.
+
+@end table
+
+These are lesser-used options.
+
+@table @code
+@anchor{includegraphics viewport}
+@item viewport
+Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show. Takes four arguments,
+separated by spaces and given in @TeX{} dimensions, as with
+@code{\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]@{...@}}. The
+dimensions default to big points,@tie{}@code{bp}. They are taken
+relative to the origin specified by the bounding box. See also the
+@code{trim} option.
+
+@anchor{includegraphics trim}
+@item trim
+Gives parts of the graphic to not show. Takes four arguments, separated
+by spaces, that are given in @TeX{} dimensions, as with
+@code{\includegraphics[.., trim= 0in 0.1in 0.2in 0.3in, ...]@{...@}}.
+These give the amounts of the graphic not to show, that is, @LaTeX{}
+will crop the picture by 0@tie{}inches on the left, 0.1@tie{}inches on
+the bottom, 0.2@tie{}inches on the right, and 0.3@tie{}inches on the
+top. See also the @code{viewport} option.
+
+@anchor{includegraphics clip}
+@item clip
+If set to @code{true}, or just specified as here
+
+@example
+\includegraphics[...,clip,...]@{...@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+then the graphic is cropped to the bounding box. This is the same as
+using the starred form of the command,
+@code{\includegraphics*[...]@{...@}}.
+
+@anchor{includegraphics page}
+@item page
+Give the page number of a multi-page PDF file. The default is
+@code{page=1}.
+
+@anchor{includegraphics pagebox}
+@item pagebox
+Specifies which bounding box to use for PDF files from among
+@code{mediabox}, @code{cropbox}, @code{bleedbox}, @code{trimbox}, or
+@code{artbox}. PDF files do not have the BoundingBox that PostScript
+files have, but may specify up to four predefined rectangles. The
+MediaBox gives the boundaries of the physical medium. The CropBox is the
+region to which the contents of the page are to be clipped when
+displayed. The BleedBox is the region to which the contents of the page
+should be clipped in production. The TrimBox is the intended dimensions
+of the finished page. The ArtBox is the extent of the page's meaningful
+content. The driver will set the image size based on CropBox if
+present, otherwise it will not use one of the others, with a
+driver-defined order of preference. MediaBox is always present.
+
+@anchor{includegraphics interpolate}
+@item interpolate
+Enable or disable interpolation of raster images by the viewer. Can be
+set with @code{interpolate=true} or just specified as here.
+
+@example
+\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]@{...@}
+@end example
+
+@anchor{includegraphics quiet}
+@item quiet
+Do not write information to the log. You can set it with
+@code{quiet=true} or just specified it with
+@code{\includegraphics[...,quite,...]@{...@}},
+
+@anchor{includegraphics draft}
+@item draft
+If you set it with @code{draft=true} or just specify it with
+
+@example
+\includegraphics[...,draft,...]@{...@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+then the graphic will not appear in the document, possibly saving color
+printer ink. Instead, @LaTeX{} will put an empty box of the correct
+size with the filename printed in it.
+
+@end table
+
+These options address the bounding box for Encapsulated PostScript
+graphic files, which have a size specified with a line
+@code{%%BoundingBox} that appears in the file. It has four values,
+giving the lower @math{x} coordinate, lower @math{y} coordinate, upper
+@math{x} coordinate, and upper @math{y} coordinate. The units are
+PostScript points, equivalent to @TeX{}'s big points, 1/72@tie{}inch.
+For example, if an @file{.eps} file has the line @code{%%BoundingBox 10
+20 40 80} then its natural size is 30/72@tie{}inch wide by
+60/72@tie{}inch tall.
+
+@table @code
+@anchor{includegraphics bb}
+@item bb
+Specify the bounding box of the displayed region. The argument is four
+dimensions separated by spaces, as with @code{\includegraphics[.., bb=
+0in 0in 1in 0.618in]@{...@}}. Usually @code{\includegraphics} reads the
+BoundingBox numbers from the EPS file automatically, so this option is
+only useful if the bounding box is missing from that file or if you want
+to change it.
+
+@anchor{includegraphics bbllx}
+@anchor{includegraphics bblly}
+@anchor{includegraphics bburx}
+@anchor{includegraphics bbury}
+@item bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury
+Set the bounding box. These four are obsolete, but are retained for
+compatibility with old packages.
+
+@anchor{includegraphics natwidth}
+@anchor{includegraphics natheight}
+@item natwidth, natheight
+An alternative for @code{bb}. Setting
+
+@example
+\includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]@{...@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+is the same as setting @code{bb=0 0 1in 0.618in}.
+
+@anchor{includegraphics hiresbb}
+@item hiresbb
+If set to @code{true}, or just specified as with
+
+@example
+\includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]@{...@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+then @LaTeX{} will look for @code{%%HiResBoundingBox} lines instead of
+@code{%%BoundingBox} lines. (The @code{BoundingBox} lines use only
+natural numbers while the @code{HiResBoundingBox} lines use decimals;
+both use units equivalent to @TeX{}'s big points, 1/72@tie{}inch.) To
+override a prior setting of @code{true}, you can set it to @code{false}.
+
+@end table
+
+These following options allow a user to override @LaTeX{}'s method of
+choosing the graphic type based on the filename extension. An example
+is that @code{\includegraphics[type=png,ext=.xxx,read=.xxx]@{lion@}}
+will read the file @file{lion.xxx} as though it were
+@file{lion.png}. For more on these, @pxref{\DeclareGraphicsRule}.
+
+@table @code
+@anchor{includegraphics type}
+@item type
+Specify the graphics type.
+
+@anchor{includegraphics ext}
+@item ext
+Specify the graphics extension.
+Only use this in conjunction with the option @code{type}.
+
+@anchor{includegraphics read}
+@item read
+Specify the file extension of the read file.
+Only use this in conjunction with the option @code{type}.
+
+@anchor{includegraphics command}
+@item command
+Specify a command to be applied to this file. Only use this in
+conjunction with the option @code{type}. @xref{Command line options}
+for a discussion of enabling the @code{\write18} functionality to run
+external commands.
+
+@end table
+
+
+@node \rotatebox
+@subsection @code{\rotatebox}
+
+@cindex rotation
+@cindex rotating graphics
+@cindex rotating text
+@findex \rotatebox
+
+Synopsis if you use the @file{graphics} package:
+
+@example
+\rotatebox@{@var{angle}@}@{@var{material}@}
+@end example
+
+Synopses if you use the @file{graphicx} package:
+
+@example
+\rotatebox@{@var{angle}@}@{@var{material}@}
+\rotatebox[@var{key-value list}]@{@var{angle}@}@{@var{material}@}
+@end example
+
+Put @var{material} in a box and rotate it @var{angle} degrees
+counterclockwise.
+
+This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees.
+
+@example
+\begin@{tabular@}@{ll@}
+ \rotatebox@{45@}@{Character@} &\rotatebox@{45@}@{NATO phonetic@} \\
+ A &AL-FAH \\
+ B &BRAH-VOH
+\end@{tabular@}
+@end example
+
+The @var{material} can be anything that goes in a box, including a graphic.
+
+@example
+ \rotatebox[origin=c]@{45@}@{\includegraphics[width=1in]@{lion@}@}
+@end example
+
+To place the rotated material, the first step is that @LaTeX{} sets
+@var{material} in a box, with a reference point on the left baseline.
+The second step is the rotation, by default about the reference point.
+The third step is that @LaTeX{} computes a box to bound the rotated
+material. Fourth, @LaTeX{} moves this box horizontally so that the left
+edge of this new bounding box coincides with the left edge of the box
+from the first step (they need not coincide vertically). This new
+bounding box, in its new position, is what @LaTeX{} uses as the box when
+typesetting this material.
+
+If you use the @file{graphics} package then the rotation is about the
+reference point of the box. If you use the @file{graphicx} package
+then these are the options that can go in the @var{key-value list},
+but note that you can get the same effect without needing this
+package, except for the @code{x} and @code{y} options
+(@pxref{\includegraphics}).
+
+@table @code
+@item origin
+The point of the @var{material}'s box about which the rotation happens.
+Possible value is any string containing one or two of: @code{l} for
+left, @code{r} for right, @code{b} for bottom, @code{c} for center,
+@code{t} for top, and @code{B} for baseline. Thus, the first line here
+
+@example
+\rotatebox[origin=c]@{180@}@{moon@}
+\rotatebox[origin=lB]@{180@}@{LeBateau@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+will turn the picture upside down from the center while the second will
+turn its picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character
+@code{c} gives the horizontal center in @code{bc} or @code{tc} but gives
+the vertical center in @code{lc} or @code{rc}, and gives both in
+@code{c}.) The default is @code{lB}.
+
+@item x, y
+Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with
+@code{\rotatebox[x=@var{@TeX{} dimension},y=@var{@TeX{}
+dimension}]@{...@}} (@pxref{Units of length}). These give the offset
+from the box's reference point.
+
+@item units
+This key allows you to change the default of degrees counterclockwise.
+Setting @code{units=-360} changes the direction to degrees clockwise and
+setting @code{units=6.283185} changes to radians counterclockwise.
+
+@end table
+
+
+@node \scalebox
+@subsection @code{\scalebox}
+
+@cindex graphics, scaling
+@cindex graphics, resizing
+@cindex scaling
+@cindex resizing
+@cindex text, scaling
+@cindex text, resizing
+@findex \scalebox
+@findex \reflectbox
+
+Synopses:
+
+@example
+\scalebox@{@var{horizontal factor}@}@{@var{material}@}
+\scalebox@{@var{horizontal factor}@}[@var{vertical factor}]@{@var{material}@}
+\reflectbox@{@var{material}@}
+@end example
+
+Scale the @var{material}.
+
+This example halves the size, both horizontally and vertically, of the
+first text and doubles the size of the second.
+
+@example
+\scalebox@{0.5@}@{DRINK ME@} and \scalebox@{2.0@}@{Eat Me@}
+@end example
+
+If you do not specify the optional @var{vertical factor} then it
+defaults to the same value as the @var{horizontal factor}.
+
+You can use this command to resize a graphic, as here.
+
+@example
+\scalebox@{0.5@}@{\includegraphics@{lion@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+If you use the @file{graphicx} package then you can accomplish the same
+thing with optional arguments to @code{\includegraphics}
+(@pxref{\includegraphics}).
+
+The @code{\reflectbox} command abbreviates
+@code{\scalebox@{-1@}[1]@{@var{material}@}}. Thus, @code{Able was
+I\reflectbox@{Able was I@}} will show the phrase @samp{Able was I}
+immediately followed by its mirror reflection.
+
+
+@node \resizebox
+@subsection @code{\resizebox}
+
+@cindex graphics, scaling
+@cindex graphics, resizing
+@cindex scaling
+@cindex resizing
+@cindex text, scaling
+@cindex text, resizing
+@findex \resizebox
+
+Synopses:
+
+@example
+\resizebox@{@var{horizontal length}@}@{@var{vertical length}@}@{@var{material}@}
+\resizebox*@{@var{horizontal length}@}@{@var{vertical length}@}@{@var{material}@}
+@end example
+
+Given a size, such as @code{3cm}, transform @var{material} to make it
+that size. If either @var{horizontal length} or @var{vertical length}
+is an exclamation point@tie{}@code{!} then the other argument is used
+to determine a scale factor for both directions.
+
+This example makes the graphic be a half inch wide and scales it
+vertically by the same factor to keep it from being distorted.
+
+@example
+\resizebox@{0.5in@}@{!@}@{\includegraphics@{lion@}@}
+@end example
+
+The unstarred form @code{\resizebox} takes @var{vertical length} to be
+the box's height while the starred form @code{\resizebox*} takes it to
+be height+depth. For instance, make the text have a height+depth of a
+quarter inch with @code{\resizebox*@{!@}@{0.25in@}@{\parbox@{1in@}@{This
+box has both height and depth.@}@}}.
+
+You can use @code{\depth}, @code{\height}, @code{\totalheight}, and
+@code{\width} to refer to the original size of the box. Thus, make the
+text two inches wide but keep the original height with
+@code{\resizebox@{2in@}@{\height@}@{Two inches@}}.
+
+
+@node Special insertions
+@chapter Special insertions
+
+@cindex special insertions
+@cindex insertions of special characters
+
+@LaTeX{} provides commands for inserting characters that have a
+special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
+
+@menu
+* Reserved characters:: Inserting @samp{# $ % & @{ @} _ ~ ^ \}
+* Upper and lower case:: Make text upper or lower case.
+* Symbols by font position:: Inserting font symbols by number.
+* Text symbols:: Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
+* Accents:: Inserting accents.
+* Additional Latin letters:: Inserting other non-English characters.
+* \rule:: Inserting lines and rectangles.
+* \today:: Inserting today's date.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Reserved characters
+@section Reserved characters
+
+@cindex reserved characters
+@cindex characters, reserved
+@cindex special characters
+@cindex characters, special
+@LaTeX{} sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For
+example, the percent sign@tie{}@code{%} is for comments. They are
+called @dfn{reserved characters} or @dfn{special characters}.
+
+@example
+# $ % & @{ @} _ ~ ^ \
+@end example
+
+@findex \#
+@findex \$
+@findex \%
+@findex \&
+@findex \_
+@findex \@{
+@findex \@}
+If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
+body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
+put a backslash@tie{}@code{\} in front of the character. Thus,
+typing @code{\$1.23} will produce@tie{}@code{$1.23} in your output.
+
+@findex \~
+@findex \^
+@findex \textbackslash
+As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
+use @code{\~@{@}} (omitting the curly braces would result in the next
+character receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text
+body font circumflex use @code{\^@{@}}. To get a backslash in the font
+of the text body, enter @code{\textbackslash@{@}}.
+
+To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use
+@code{\verb!!} as below (the double backslash@tie{}@code{\\} is only
+there to split the lines).
+
+@example
+\begin@{center@}
+ \# \$ \% \& \@{ \@} \_ \~@{@} \^@{@} \textbackslash \\
+ \verb!# $ % & @{ @} _ ~ ^ \!
+\end@{center@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node Upper and lower case
+@section Upper and lower case
+
+@cindex uppercase
+@cindex lowercase
+@cindex characters, case of
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\uppercase@{@var{text}@}
+\lowercase@{@var{text}@}
+\MakeUppercase@{@var{text}@}
+\MakeLowercase@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Change the case of characters. The @TeX{} primitives commands
+@code{\uppercase} and @code{\lowercase} only work for American
+characters. The @LaTeX{} commands @code{\MakeUppercase} and
+@code{\MakeLowercase} commands also change characters accessed by
+commands such as @code{\ae} or @code{\aa}. The commands
+@code{\MakeUppercase} and @code{\MakeLowercase} are robust but they have
+moving arguments (@pxref{\protect}).
+
+These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of a
+command within @var{text}. But they do change the case of every other
+Latin letter inside the argument @var{text}. Thus,
+@code{\MakeUppercase@{Let $y=f(x)$}@} produces @samp{LET Y=F(X)}. Another
+example is that the name of an environment will be changed, so that
+@code{\MakeUppercase@{\begin@{tabular@} ... \end@{tabular@}@}} will
+produce an error because the first half is changed to
+@code{\begin@{TABULAR@}}.
+
+@LaTeX{} uses the same fixed table for changing case throughout a
+document, The table used is designed for the font encoding T1; this
+works well with the standard @TeX{} fonts for all Latin alphabets but
+will cause problems when using other alphabets.
+
+To change the case of text that results from a macro inside @var{text}
+you need to do expansion. Here the @code{\Schoolname} produces
+@samp{COLLEGE OF MATHEMATICS}.
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\schoolname@}@{College of Mathematics@}
+\newcommand@{\Schoolname@}@{\expandafter\MakeUppercase
+@w{ }\expandafter@{\schoolname@}@}
+@end example
+
+@PkgIndex{textcase}
+The @file{textcase} package brings some of the missing feature of the
+standard @LaTeX{} commands @code{\MakeUppercase} and
+@code{\MakeLowerCase}.
+
+@PkgIndex{mfirstuc}
+To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package
+@file{mfirstuc}.
+
+
+@node Symbols by font position
+@section Symbols by font position
+
+@findex \symbol
+@cindex accessing any character of a font
+@cindex font symbols, by number
+
+You can access any character of the current font using its number with
+the @code{\symbol} command. For example, the visible space character
+used in the @code{\verb*} command has the code decimal 32, so it can be
+typed as @code{\symbol@{32@}}.
+
+You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a @code{'}
+prefix, or hexadecimal (base 16) with a @code{"} prefix, so the previous
+example could also be written as @code{\symbol@{'40@}} or
+@code{\symbol@{"20@}}.
+
+
+@node Text symbols
+@section Text symbols
+
+@cindex text symbols
+@cindex symbols, text
+
+@findex textcomp @r{package}
+@LaTeX{} provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
+running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not
+available in OT1. Unless you are using Xe@LaTeX{} or Lua@LaTeX{} then
+you may need to load the @code{textcomp} package.
+
+@ftable @code
+@item \copyright
+@itemx \textcopyright
+@cindex copyright symbol
+@copyright{} The copyright symbol.
+
+@item \dag
+@cindex dagger, in text
+@BES{2020,@math{\dag}} The dagger symbol (in text).
+
+@item \ddag
+@cindex double dagger, in text
+@BES{2021,@math{\ddag}} The double dagger symbol (in text).
+
+@item \LaTeX
+@cindex @LaTeX{} logo
+@cindex logo, @LaTeX{}
+The @LaTeX{} logo.
+
+@item \LaTeXe
+@cindex @LaTeX{}2e logo
+@cindex logo, @LaTeX{}2e
+The @LaTeX{}2e logo.
+
+@item \guillemotleft @r{(@guillemotleft{})}
+@itemx \guillemotright @r{(@guillemotright{})}
+@itemx \guilsinglleft @r{(@guilsinglleft{})}
+@itemx \guilsinglright @r{(@guilsinglright{})}
+@cindex double guillemets
+@cindex single guillemets
+@cindex left angle quotation marks
+@cindex right angle quotation marks
+@cindex double angle quotation marks
+@cindex single angle quotation marks
+@cindex French quotation marks
+@cindex quotation marks, French
+@guillemotleft{}, @guillemotright{}, @guilsinglleft{}, @guilsinglright{}
+Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French.
+
+@item \ldots
+@itemx \dots
+@itemx \textellipsis
+@cindex ellipsis
+@dots{} An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): @code{\ldots}
+and @code{\dots} also work in math mode.
+
+@item \lq
+@cindex left quote
+@cindex opening quote
+` Left (opening) quote.
+
+@item \P
+@itemx \textparagraph
+@cindex paragraph symbol
+@cindex pilcrow
+@BES{00B6,\P} Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
+
+@item \pounds
+@itemx \textsterling
+@cindex pounds symbol
+@cindex sterling symbol
+@pounds{} English pounds sterling.
+
+@item \quotedblbase @r{(@quotedblbase{})}
+@itemx \quotesinglbase @r{(@quotesinglbase{})}
+@cindex double low-9 quotation mark
+@cindex single low-9 quotation mark
+@cindex low-9 quotation marks, single and double
+@quotedblbase{} and @quotesinglbase{}
+Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.
+
+@item \rq
+@cindex right quote
+@cindex closing quote
+' Right (closing) quote.
+
+@item \S
+@itemx \textsection
+@cindex section symbol
+@BES{00A7,\S} Section sign.
+
+@item \TeX
+@cindex @TeX{} logo
+@cindex logo, @TeX{}
+The @TeX{} logo.
+
+@item \textasciicircum
+@cindex circumflex, ASCII, in text
+@cindex ASCII circumflex, in text
+^ ASCII circumflex.
+
+@item \textasciitilde
+@cindex tilde, ASCII, in text
+@cindex ASCII tilde, in text
+~ ASCII tilde.
+
+@item \textasteriskcentered
+@cindex asterisk, centered, in text
+@cindex centered asterisk, in text
+* Centered asterisk.
+
+@item \textbackslash
+@cindex backslash, in text
+\ Backslash.
+
+@item \textbar
+@cindex vertical bar, in text
+@cindex bar, vertical, in text
+| Vertical bar.
+
+@item \textbardbl
+@cindex vertical bar, double, in text
+@cindex bar, double vertical, in text
+@cindex double vertical bar, in text
+@BES{23F8,||} Double vertical bar.
+
+@item \textbigcircle
+@cindex big circle symbols, in text
+@cindex circle symbol, big, in text
+@BES{25EF,} Big circle symbol.
+
+@item \textbraceleft
+@cindex left brace, in text
+@cindex brace, left, in text
+@{ Left brace.
+
+@item \textbraceright
+@cindex right brace, in text
+@cindex brace, right, in text
+@} Right brace.
+
+@item \textbullet
+@cindex bullet, in text
+@bullet{} Bullet.
+
+@item \textcircled@{@var{letter}@}
+@cindex circled letter, in text
+@BES{24B6,} Circle around @var{letter}.
+
+@item \textcompwordmark
+@itemx \textcapitalcompwordmark
+@itemx \textascendercompwordmark
+@cindex composite word mark, in text
+@cindex cap height
+@cindex ascender height
+Used to separate letters that would normally ligature. For example,
+@code{f\textcompwordmark i} produces @samp{fi} without a ligature. This
+is most useful in non-English languages. The
+@code{\textcapitalcompwordmark} form has the cap height of the font
+while the @code{\textascendercompwordmark} form has the ascender height.
+
+@item \textdagger
+@cindex dagger, in text
+@BES{2020,@math{\dag}} Dagger.
+
+@item \textdaggerdbl
+@cindex dagger, double, in text
+@cindex double dagger, in text
+@BES{2021,@math{\ddag}} Double dagger.
+
+@item \textdollar @r{(or @code{\$})}
+@cindex dollar sign
+@cindex currency, dollar
+$ Dollar sign.
+
+@item \textemdash @r{(or @code{---})}
+@cindex em-dash
+--- Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in
+@code{The playoffs --- if you are fortunate enough to make the playoffs ---
+is more like a sprint.}).
+
+@item \textendash @r{(or @code{--})}
+@cindex e-dash
+-- En-dash (used for ranges, as in @code{See pages 12--14}).
+
+@item \texteuro
+@cindex euro symbol
+@cindex currency, euro
+@PkgIndex{eurosym}
+The Euro symbol: @euro{}. For an alternative glyph design, try the
+@file{eurosym} package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own
+Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC).
+
+@item \textexclamdown @r{(or @code{!`})}
+@cindex exclamation point, upside-down
+@exclamdown{} Upside down exclamation point.
+
+@item \textgreater
+@cindex greater than symbol, in text
+> Greater than symbol.
+
+@item \textless
+@cindex less than symbol, in text
+< Less than symbol.
+
+@item \textleftarrow
+@cindex arrow, left, in text
+@cindex left arrow, in text
+@BES{2190,} Left arrow.
+
+@item \textordfeminine
+@itemx \textordmasculine
+@cindex feminine ordinal symbol
+@cindex masculine ordinal symbol
+@cindex ordinals, feminine and masculine
+@cindex Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine
+@ordf{}, @ordm{} Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols.
+
+@item \textperiodcentered
+@cindex period, centered, in text
+@cindex centered period, in text
+@BES{00B7,\cdot} Centered period.
+
+@item \textquestiondown @r{(or @code{?`})}
+@cindex question mark, upside-down
+@questiondown{} Upside down question mark.
+
+@item \textquotedblleft @r{(or @code{``})}
+@cindex left quote, double
+@cindex double left quote
+`` Double left quote.
+
+@item \textquotedblright @r{(or @code{''})}
+@cindex right quote, double
+@cindex double right quote
+'' Double right quote.
+
+@item \textquoteleft @r{(or @code{`})}
+@cindex left quote, single
+@cindex single left quote
+` Single left quote.
+
+@item \textquoteright @r{(or @code{'})}
+@cindex right quote, single
+@cindex single right quote
+' Single right quote.
+
+@item \textquotesingle
+@cindex quote, single straight
+@cindex straight single quote
+@cindex single quote, straight
+@BES{0027,} Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)
+
+@item \textquotestraightbase
+@itemx \textquotestraightdblbase
+@cindex quote, straight base
+@cindex straight quote, base
+@cindex double quote, straight base
+@cindex straight double quote, base
+@c Unicode doesn't have these https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quotation_mark
+Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
+
+@item \textregistered
+@cindex registered symbol
+@registeredsymbol{} Registered symbol.
+
+@item \textrightarrow
+@cindex arrow, right, in text
+@cindex right arrow, in text
+@BES{2192,} Right arrow.
+
+@item \textthreequartersemdash
+@cindex three-quarters em-dash
+@cindex em-dash, three-quarters
+@BES{FE58,} ``Three-quarters'' em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+
+@item \texttrademark
+@cindex trademark symbol
+@BES{2122,^{\hbox{TM}}} Trademark symbol.
+
+@c ?? Diff from \textthreequartersemdash? In Unicode?
+@item \texttwelveudash
+@cindex two-thirds em-dash
+@cindex em-dash, two-thirds
+@BES{FE58,} ``Two-thirds'' em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+
+@item \textunderscore
+@cindex underscore, in text
+_ Underscore.
+
+@item \textvisiblespace
+@cindex visible space symbol, in text
+@BES{2423,} Visible space symbol.
+
+@end ftable
+
+
+@node Accents
+@section Accents
+
+@cindex accents
+@cindex characters, accented
+@cindex letters, accented
+
+@PkgIndex{babel}
+@PkgIndex{polyglossia}
+@cindex multilingual support
+@LaTeX{} has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages,
+through the @code{babel} package and related support if you are using
+pdf@LaTeX{}, or @file{polyglossia} if you are using Xe@LaTeX{} or
+Lua@LaTeX{}. This section does not cover that support. It only lists
+the core @LaTeX{} commands for creating accented characters. The
+@code{\capital...} commands shown here produce alternative forms for use
+with capital letters. These are not available with OT1.
+
+Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated with
+lowercase @samp{o}.
+
+@findex \i @r{(dotless i)}
+@cindex dotless i
+Note that @code{\i} produces a dotless i,
+@c @dotless{i},
+@findex \j @r{(dotless j)}
+@cindex dotless j
+and @code{\j} produces a dotless j.
+@c @dotless{j}.
+These are often used in place of their dotted counterparts when they are
+accented.
+
+@table @code
+@item \"
+@itemx \capitaldieresis
+@findex \" @r{(umlaut accent)}
+@findex \capitaldieresis
+@cindex umlaut accent
+@cindex dieresis accent
+@"{o} Umlaut (dieresis).
+
+@item \'
+@itemx \capitalacute
+@findex \' @r{(acute accent)}
+@findex \capitalacute
+@cindex acute accent
+@'{o} Acute accent.
+
+@item \.
+@findex \. @r{(dot-over accent)}
+@cindex dot accent
+@cindex dot-over accent
+@dotaccent{o} Dot accent.
+
+@item \=
+@itemx \capitalmacron
+@findex \= @r{(macron accent)}
+@findex \capitalmacron
+@cindex macron accent
+@cindex overbar accent
+@cindex bar-over accent
+@={o} Macron (overbar) accent.
+
+@item \^
+@itemx \capitalcircumflex
+@findex \^ @r{(circumflex accent)}
+@findex \capitalcircumflex
+@cindex circumflex accent
+@cindex hat accent
+@^{o} Circumflex (hat) accent.
+
+@item \`
+@itemx \capitalgrave
+@findex \` @r{(grave accent)}
+@findex \capitalgrave
+@cindex grave accent
+@`{o} Grave accent.
+
+@item \~
+@itemx \capitaltilde
+@findex \~ @r{(tilde accent)}
+@findex \capitaltilde
+@cindex tilde accent
+@~{n} Tilde accent.
+
+@item \b
+@findex \b @r{(bar-under accent)}
+@cindex bar-under accent
+@ubaraccent{o} Bar accent underneath.
+
+@findex \underbar
+@cindex underbar
+Related to this, @code{\underbar@{@var{text}@}} produces a bar under
+@var{text}. The argument is always processed in LR mode
+(@pxref{Modes}). The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline,
+thus crossing through descenders. See also @code{\underline} in
+@ref{Math miscellany}.
+
+@item \c
+@itemx \capitalcedilla
+@findex \c @r{(cedilla accent)}
+@findex \capitalcedilla
+@cindex cedilla accent
+@,{c} Cedilla accent underneath.
+
+@item \d
+@itemx \capitaldotaccent
+@findex \d @r{(dot-under accent)}
+@findex \capitaldotaccent
+@cindex dot-under accent
+@udotaccent{o} Dot accent underneath.
+
+@item \H
+@itemx \capitalhungarumlaut
+@findex \H @r{(Hungarian umlaut accent)}
+@findex \capitalhungarumlaut
+@cindex hungarian umlaut accent
+@H{o} Long Hungarian umlaut accent.
+
+@item \k
+@itemx \capitalogonek
+@findex \k @r{(ogonek)}
+@findex \capitalogonek
+@cindex ogonek
+@ogonek{o} Ogonek. Not available in the OT1 encoding.
+
+@item \r
+@itemx \capitalring
+@findex \r @r{(ring accent)}
+@findex \capitalring
+@cindex ring accent
+@ringaccent{o} Ring accent.
+
+@item \t
+@itemx \capitaltie
+@itemx \newtie
+@itemx \capitalnewtie
+@findex \t @r{(tie-after accent)}
+@findex \capitaltie
+@findex \newtie
+@findex \capitalnewtie
+@cindex tie-after accent
+@tieaccent{oo} Tie-after accent. The @code{\newtie} form is centered in
+its box.
+
+@item \u
+@itemx \capitalbreve
+@findex \u @r{(breve accent)}
+@findex \capitalbreve
+@cindex breve accent
+@u{o} Breve accent.
+
+@item \v
+@itemx \capitalcaron
+@findex \v @r{(breve accent)}
+@findex \capitalcaron
+@cindex hacek accent
+@cindex check accent
+@cindex caron accent
+@v{o} H@'a@v{c}ek (check, caron) accent.
+
+@end table
+
+
+@node Additional Latin letters
+@section Additional Latin letters
+
+@anchor{Non-English characters}
+@cindex Latin letters, additional
+@cindex letters, additional Latin
+@cindex extended Latin
+@cindex special characters
+@cindex non-English characters
+@cindex characters, non-English
+
+Here are the basic @LaTeX{} commands for inserting letters beyond
+A--Z that extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other
+than English.
+
+@table @code
+@item \aa
+@itemx \AA
+@findex \aa (@aa{})
+@findex \AA (@AA{})
+@cindex aring
+@aa{} and @AA{}.
+
+@item \ae
+@itemx \AE
+@findex \ae (@ae{})
+@findex \AE (@AE{})
+@cindex ae ligature
+@ae{} and @AE{}.
+
+@item \dh
+@itemx \DH
+@findex \dh (@dh{})
+@findex \DH (@DH{})
+@cindex Icelandic eth
+@cindex eth, Icelandic letter
+Icelandic letter eth: @dh{} and @DH{}. Not available with @sc{OT1}
+encoding, you need the @file{fontenc} package to select an alternate
+font encoding, such as @sc{T1}.
+
+@item \dj
+@itemx \DJ
+@findex \dj
+@findex \DJ
+Crossed d and D, a.k.a.@: capital and small letter d with stroke. Not
+available with @sc{OT1} encoding, you need the @file{fontenc} package to
+select an alternate font encoding, such as @sc{T1}.
+
+@item \ij
+@itemx \IJ
+@findex \ij (ij)
+@findex \IJ (IJ)
+@cindex ij letter, Dutch
+ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here).
+
+@item \l
+@itemx \L
+@findex \l (@l{})
+@findex \L (@L{})
+@cindex polish l
+@l{} and @L{}.
+
+@item \ng
+@itemx \NG
+@findex \ng
+@findex \NG
+Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics.
+
+@item \o
+@itemx \O
+@findex \o (@o{})
+@findex \O (@O{})
+@cindex oslash
+@o{} and @O{}.
+
+@item \oe
+@itemx \OE
+@findex \oe (@oe{})
+@findex \OE (@OE{})
+@cindex oe ligature
+@oe{} and @OE{}.
+
+@item \ss
+@itemx \SS
+@findex \ss (@ss{})
+@findex \SS (SS)
+@cindex es-zet German letter
+@cindex sharp S letters
+@ss{} and SS.
+
+@item \th
+@itemx \TH
+@findex \th (@th{})
+@findex \TH (@TH{})
+@cindex Icelandic thorn
+@cindex thorn, Icelandic letter
+Icelandic letter thorn: @th{} and @TH{}. Not available with @sc{OT1}
+encoding, you need the @file{fontenc} package to select an alternate
+font encoding, such as @sc{T1}.
+
+@end table
+
+
+@node \rule
+@section @code{\rule}
+
+@findex \rule
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\rule@{@var{width}@}@{@var{thickness}@}
+\rule[@var{raise}]@{@var{width}@}@{@var{thickness}@}
+@end example
+
+Produce a @dfn{rule}, a filled-in rectangle.
+
+@cindex Halmos symbol
+@cindex tombstone
+This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol,
+often used to mark the end of a proof.
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\qedsymbol@}@{\rule@{0.4em@}@{2ex@}@}
+@end example
+
+@PkgIndex{amsthm}
+@noindent
+The @file{amsthm} package includes this command, with a somewhat
+different-looking symbol.
+
+The mandatory arguments give the horizontal @var{width} and vertical
+@var{thickness} of the rectangle. They are rigid lengths
+(@pxref{Lengths}). The optional argument @var{raise} is also a rigid
+length, and tells @LaTeX{} how much to raise the rule above the
+baseline, or lower it if the length is negative.
+
+This produces a line, a rectangle that is wide but not tall.
+
+@example
+\noindent\rule@{\textwidth@}@{0.4pt@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The line is the width of the page and 0.4@tie{}points tall. This line
+thickness is common in @LaTeX{}.
+
+A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in the
+output, but can cause @LaTeX{} to change the output around it.
+@xref{\strut} for examples.
+
+
+@node \today
+@section @code{\today}
+
+@findex \today
+@cindex date, today's
+@cindex today's date
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\today
+@end example
+
+Produce today's date in the format @samp{@var{month} @var{dd},
+@var{yyyy}}. An example of a date in that format is @samp{July 4,
+1976}.
+
+@PkgIndex{babel}
+@PkgIndex{polyglossia}
+Multilingual packages such as @file{babel} or @file{polyglossia}, or
+classes such as @file{lettre}, will localize @code{\today}. For example,
+the following will output @samp{4 juillet 1976}:
+
+@example
+\year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
+\documentclass@{minimal@}
+\usepackage[french]@{babel@}
+\begin@{document@}
+\today
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@code{\today} uses the counters @code{\day}, @code{\month}, and
+@code{\year} (@pxref{\day & \month & \year}).
+
+@PkgIndex{datetime}
+A number of package on CTAN work with dates. One is @file{datetime} package
+which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO standards.
+
+The date is not updated as the @LaTeX{} process runs, so in principle the
+date could be incorrect by the time the program finishes.
+
+
+@node Splitting the input
+@chapter Splitting the input
+
+@cindex splitting the input file
+@cindex input file
+
+@LaTeX{} lets you split a large document into several smaller ones.
+This can simplify editing or allow multiple authors to work on the
+document. It can also speed processing.
+
+Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is always one
+@cindex root file
+@cindex file, root
+@dfn{root file}, on which @LaTeX{} compilation starts. This shows such
+a file with five included files.
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{book@}
+\includeonly@{ % comment out lines below to omit compiling
+ pref,
+ chap1,
+ chap2,
+ append,
+ bib
+ @}
+\begin@{document@}
+\frontmatter
+\include@{pref@}
+\mainmatter
+\include@{chap1@}
+\include@{chap2@}
+\appendix
+\include@{append@}
+\backmatter
+\include@{bib@}
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This will bring in material from @file{pref.tex}, @file{chap1.tex},
+@file{chap2.tex}, @file{append.tex}, and @file{bib.tex}. If you compile
+this file, and then comment out all of the lines inside
+@code{\includeonly@{...@}} except for @code{chap1,} and compile again,
+then @LaTeX{} will only process the material in the first chapter.
+Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to print.
+However, the advantage of the @code{\includeonly} command is that
+@LaTeX{} will retain the page numbers and all of the cross reference
+information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in
+your output correctly.
+
+@xref{Larger book template} for another example of @code{\includeonly}.
+
+@menu
+* \endinput:: Stop including material from a file.
+* \include & \includeonly:: Conditionally include files.
+* \input:: Unconditionally include a file.
+@end menu
+
+
+
+@node \endinput
+@section @code{\endinput}
+
+@findex \endinput
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\endinput
+@end example
+
+When you @code{\include@{filename@}}, inside @file{filename.tex} the
+material after @code{\endinput} will not be included. This command is
+optional; if @file{filename.tex} has no @code{\endinput} then @LaTeX{}
+will read all of the file.
+
+For example, suppose that a document's root file has
+@code{\input@{chap1@}} and this is @file{chap1.tex}.
+
+@example
+\chapter@{One@}
+This material will appear in the document.
+\endinput
+This will not appear.
+@end example
+
+This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end of a
+file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during mailing.
+It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize errors is to
+put @code{\endinput} halfway through the included file and see if the
+error disappears. Now, knowing which half contains the error, moving
+@code{\endinput} to halfway through that area further narrows down the
+location. This process rapidly finds the offending line.
+
+After reading @code{\endinput}, @LaTeX{} continues to read to the end of
+the line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless.
+This allows you, for instance, to close an @code{\if...} with a
+@code{\fi}.
+
+
+@node \include & \includeonly
+@section @code{\include} & @code{\includeonly}
+
+@findex \include
+@findex \includeonly
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\includeonly@{ % in document preamble
+ ...
+ @var{filename},
+ ...
+ @}
+ ...
+\include@{@var{filename}@} % in document body
+@end example
+
+Bring material from the external file @file{@var{filename}.tex} into a
+@LaTeX{} document.
+
+The @code{\include} command does three things: it executes
+@code{\clearpage} (@pxref{\clearpage & \cleardoublepage}), then it
+inputs the material from @file{@var{filename}.tex} into the document,
+and then it does another @code{\clearpage}. This command can only
+appear in the document body. The @code{\includeonly} command controls
+which files will be read by @LaTeX{} under subsequent @code{\include}
+commands. Its list of filenames is comma-separated, and it can only
+appear in the preamble.
+
+This example root document, @file{constitution.tex}, brings in
+three files, @file{preamble.tex}, @file{articles.tex}, and
+@file{amendments.tex}.
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{book@}
+\includeonly@{
+ preamble,
+ articles,
+ amendments
+ @}
+\begin@{document@}
+\include@{preamble@}
+\include@{articles@}
+\include@{amendments@}
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The file @file{preamble.tex} contains no special code; you have just
+excerpted the chapter from @file{consitution.tex} and put it in a
+separate file just for editing convenience.
+
+@example
+\chapter@{Preamble@}
+We the People of the United States,
+in Order to form a more perfect Union, ...
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Running @LaTeX{} on @file{constitution.tex} makes the material from the
+three files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary
+files @file{preamble.aux}, @file{articles.aux}, and
+@file{amendments.tex}. These contain information such as page numbers
+and cross-references (@pxref{Cross references}). If you now comment out
+@code{\includeonly}'s lines with @code{preamble} and @code{amendments}
+and run @LaTeX{} again then the resulting document shows only the
+material from @file{articles.tex}, not the material from
+@file{preamble.tex} or @file{amendments.tex}. Nonetheless, all of the
+auxiliary information from the omitted files is still there, including
+the starting page number of the chapter.
+
+If the document preamble does not have @code{\includeonly} then
+@LaTeX{} will include all the files you call for with @code{\include}
+commands.
+
+The @code{\include} command makes a new page. To avoid that, see
+@ref{\input} (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary
+information).
+
+@xref{Larger book template} for another example using @code{\include}
+and @code{\includeonly}. That example also uses @code{\input} for some
+material that will not necessarily start on a new page.
+
+File names can involve paths.
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{book@}
+\includeonly@{
+ chapters/chap1,
+ @}
+\begin@{document@}
+\include@{chapters/chap1@}
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name @samp{amo amas amat},
+this works under @TeX{} Live on GNU/Linux:
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{book@}
+\includeonly@{
+ "amo\space amas\space amat"
+ @}
+\begin@{document@}
+\include@{"amo\space amas\space amat"@}
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+and this works under MiK@TeX{} on Windows:
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{book@}
+\includeonly@{
+ @{"amo amas amat"@}
+ @}
+\begin@{document@}
+\include@{@{"amo amas amat"@}@}
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+@cindex nested @code{\include}, not allowed
+You cannot use @code{\include} inside a file that is being included or
+you get @samp{LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested.} The
+@code{\include} command cannot appear in the document preamble; you will
+get @samp{LaTeX Error: Missing \begin@{document@}}.
+
+If a file that you @code{\include} does not exist, for instance if you
+@code{\include@{athiesm@}} but you meant @code{\include@{atheism@}},
+then @LaTeX{} does not give you an error but will warn you @samp{No file
+athiesm.tex.} (It will also create @file{athiesm.aux}.)
+
+If you @code{\include} the root file in itself then you first get
+@samp{LaTeX Error: Can be used only in preamble.} Later runs get
+@samp{TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]}. To fix
+this, you must remove the inclusion @code{\include@{root@}} but also
+delete the file @file{@var{root}.aux} and rerun @LaTeX{}.
+
+
+@node \input
+@section @code{\input}
+
+@findex \input
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\input@{@var{filename}@}
+@end example
+
+@LaTeX{} processes the file as if its contents were inserted in the
+current file. For a more sophisticated inclusion mechanism see
+@ref{\include & \includeonly}.
+
+If @var{filename} does not end in @samp{.tex} then @LaTeX{} first tries
+the filename with that extension; this is the usual case. If
+@var{filename} ends with @samp{.tex} then @LaTeX{} looks for the
+filename as it is.
+
+For example, this
+
+@example
+\input@{macros@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+will cause @LaTeX{} to first look for @file{macros.tex}. If it finds
+that file then it processes its contents as thought they had been
+copy-pasted in. If there is no file of the name @file{macros.tex} then
+@LaTeX{} tries the name @file{macros}, without an extension. (This may
+vary by distribution.)
+
+To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name @samp{amo amas amat},
+this works under @TeX{} Live on GNU/Linux:
+
+@example
+\input@{"amo\space amas\space amat"@}
+@end example
+
+and this works under MiK@TeX{} on Windows:
+
+@example
+\input@{@{"amo amas amat"@}@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node Front/back matter
+@chapter Front/back matter
+
+@menu
+* Table of contents etc.:: Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables.
+* Indexes:: Generate an index.
+* Glossaries:: Generate a glossary.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Table of contents etc.
+@section Table of contents etc.
+
+@cindex table of contents, creating
+
+@findex \tableofcontents
+@findex .toc @r{file}
+@findex \listoffigures
+@findex \listoftables
+@findex .lof @r{file}
+@findex .lot @r{file}
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\tableofcontents
+\listoffigures
+\listoftables
+@end example
+
+Produce a table of contents, or list of figures, or list of tables. Put
+the command in the input file where you want the table or list to
+go. You do not type the entries; for example, typically the table of
+contents entries are automatically generated from the sectioning
+commands @code{\chapter}, etc.
+
+This example illustrates the first command, @code{\tableofcontents}.
+@LaTeX{} will produce a table of contents on the book's first page.
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{book@}
+% \setcounter@{tocdepth@}@{1@}
+\begin@{document@}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+ ...
+\chapter@{...@}
+ ...
+\section@{...@}
+ ...
+\subsection@{...@}
+ ...
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter
+and section listings but not subsection listings, because the
+@code{\section} command has level@tie{}1. @xref{Sectioning} for level
+numbers of the sectioning units. For more on the @code{tocdepth}
+@pxref{Sectioning/tocdepth}.
+
+Another example of the use of @code{\tableofcontents} is in @ref{Larger
+book template}.
+
+If you want a page break after the table of contents, write a
+@code{\newpage} command after the @code{\tableofcontents} command, as
+above.
+
+To make the table of contents @LaTeX{} stores the information in an
+auxiliary file named @file{@var{root-file}.toc} (@pxref{Splitting the
+input}). For example, this @LaTeX{} file @file{test.tex}
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{article@}
+\begin@{document@}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+\section@{First section@}
+\subsection@{First subsection@}
+ ...
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+writes the following line to @file{test.toc}.
+
+@example
+\contentsline @{section@}@{\numberline @{1@}First section@}@{2@}
+\contentsline @{subsection@}@{\numberline @{1.1@}First subsection@}@{2@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The @code{section} or @code{subsection} is the sectioning unit. The
+hook @code{\numberline} lets you to change how the information appears
+in the table of contents. Of its two arguments, @code{1} or @code{1.1}
+is the sectioning unit number and @code{First section} or @code{First
+subsection} is the title. Finally, @code{2} is the page number on which
+the sectioning units start.
+
+One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to get the
+contents page correct you must run @LaTeX{} twice, once to store the
+information and once to get it. In particular, the first time that you
+run @LaTeX{} on a new document, the table of contents page will be empty
+except for its @samp{Contents} header. Just run it again.
+
+The commands @code{\listoffigures} and @code{\listoftables} produce a
+list of figures and a list of tables. They work the same way as the
+contents commands; for instance, these work with information stored in
+@file{.lof} and @file{.lot} files.
+
+@PkgIndex{babel}
+@PkgIndex{polyglossia}
+To change the header for the table of contents page do something like
+the first line here.
+
+@example
+\renewcommand@{\contentsname@}@{Table of contents@}
+\renewcommand@{\listfigurename@}@{Plots@}
+\renewcommand@{\listtablename@}@{Tables@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two.
+Internationalization packages such as @file{babel} or @file{polyglossia}
+will change the headers depending on the chosen base language.
+
+@PkgIndex{tocloft}
+@PkgIndex{tocbibbind}
+CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures
+and tables. One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the
+default, such as spacing, is @file{tocloft}. And, @file{tocbibbind}
+will automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to the table of
+contents.
+
+@menu
+* \addcontentsline:: Add an entry to table of contents, etc.
+* \addtocontents:: Add text directly to table of contents file, etc.
+* \nofiles:: Prevent writing to auxiliary files.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \addcontentsline
+@subsection @code{\addcontentsline}
+
+@findex \addcontentsline
+@cindex table of contents entry, manually adding
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\addcontentsline@{@var{ext}@}@{@var{unit}@}@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+@findex \contentsline
+Add an entry to the file specified by @var{ext}. Usually @var{ext} is
+one of @code{toc} for the table of contents, @code{lof} for the list of
+figures, or @code{lot} for the list of tables.
+
+The following will result in an @samp{Appendices} line in the table of
+contents.
+
+@example
+\addcontentsline@{toc@}@{section@}@{\protect\textbf@{Appendices@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+It will appear at the same indentation level as the sections, will be in
+boldface, and will be assigned the page number associated with the point
+where it appears in the input file.
+
+The @code{\addcontentsline} command writes information to the file
+@file{@var{root-name}.@var{ext}}. It writes that information as the
+text of the command
+@code{\contentsline@{@var{unit}@}@{@var{text}@}@{@var{num}@}}, where
+@code{@var{num}} is the current value of counter @code{@var{unit}}. The
+most common case is the table of contents and there @var{num} is the
+page number of the first page of @var{unit}.
+
+This command is invoked by the sectioning commands @code{\chapter},
+etc., and also by @code{\caption} inside a float environment. But it is
+also used by authors. For example, in a book to have the preface
+unnumbered, you may use the starred @code{\chapter*}. But that does not
+put in table of contents information, so you can enter it manually, as
+here.
+
+@example
+\chapter*@{Preface@}
+\addcontentsline@{toc@}@{chapter@}@{\protect\numberline@{@}Preface@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+In the @file{.toc} file @LaTeX{} will put the line @code{\contentsline
+@{chapter@}@{\numberline @{@}Preface@}@{3@}}; note the page number
+@samp{3}.
+
+@c xx how hardwired are these values? other unit names?
+
+All of the arguments for @code{\addcontentsline} are required.
+
+@table @var
+@item ext
+Typically one of the strings @code{toc} for the table of contents,
+@code{lof} for the list of figures, or @code{lot} for the list of
+tables. The filename extension of the information file.
+
+@item unit
+A string that depends on the value of the @var{ext} argument:
+
+@table @code
+@item toc
+For the table of contents, this is the name of a sectional unit:
+@code{part}, @code{chapter}, @code{section}, @code{subsection}, etc.
+
+@item lof
+For the list of figures: @code{figure}.
+
+@item lot
+For the list of tables: @code{table}.
+@end table
+
+@item text
+The text of the entry. You must @code{\protect} any commands that are
+fragile (@pxref{\protect}).
+@end table
+
+The @code{\addcontentsline} command has an interaction with
+@code{\include} (@pxref{\include & \includeonly}). If you use them at
+the same level, as with
+@code{\addcontentsline@{...@}@{...@}@{...@}\include@{...@}} then lines
+in the table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution
+is to move @code{\addcontentsline} into the file being included.
+
+If you use a @var{unit} that @LaTeX{} does not recognize, as here
+
+@example
+\addcontentsline@{toc@}@{setcion@}@{\protect\textbf@{Appendices@}@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+then you don't get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
+will not make sense.
+
+
+@node \addtocontents
+@subsection @code{\addtocontents}
+
+@findex \addtocontents@{@var{ext}@}@{@var{text}@}
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\addtocontents@{@var{ext}@}@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Add @var{text}, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to
+the auxiliary file with extension @var{ext}. This is most commonly used
+for the table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also
+applies to the list of figures and list of tables.
+
+This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the
+@samp{Contents} header.
+
+@example
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+\addtocontents@{toc@}@{\protect\vspace*@{3ex@}@}
+@end example
+
+The @code{\addtocontents} command has two arguments. Both are
+required.
+
+@table @var
+@item ext
+Typically one of: @file{toc} for the table of contents, @file{lof} for
+the list of figures, or @file{lot} for the list of tables. The
+extension of the file holding the information.
+
+@item text
+The text, and possibly commands, to be written.
+@end table
+
+The sectioning commands such as @code{\chapter} use the
+@code{\addcontentsline} command to store information. This command
+creates lines in the @file{.toc} auxiliary file containing the
+@code{\contentsline} command (@pxref{\addcontentsline}). In contrast,
+the command @code{\addtocontents} puts material directly in that file.
+
+The @code{\addtocontents} command has an interaction with
+@code{\include} (@pxref{\include & \includeonly}). If you use them at
+the same level, as with
+@code{\addtocontents@{...@}@{...@}\include@{...@}} then lines in the
+table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution is to
+move @code{\addtocontents} into the file being included.
+
+
+@node \nofiles
+@subsection @code{\nofiles}
+
+@findex \nofiles
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\nofiles
+@end example
+
+Prevent @LaTeX{} from writing any auxiliary files. The only output will
+be the @file{.log} and @file{.pdf} (or @file{.dvi}) files. This command
+must go in the preamble.
+
+Because of the @code{\nofiles} command this example will not produce a
+@file{.toc} file.
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{book@}
+\nofiles
+\begin@{document@}
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+\chapter@{...@}
+ ...
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@LaTeX{} will not erase any existing auxiliary files, so if you insert
+the @code{\nofiles} command after you have run the file and gotten
+a @file{.toc} then the table of contents page will continue to show
+the old information.
+
+
+@node Indexes
+@section Indexes
+
+@cindex indexes
+
+@findex \makeindex
+@findex \index
+@cindex @file{.idx} file
+
+This document has an index.
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{article@}
+\usepackage@{makeidx@} \makeindex
+ ...
+\begin@{document@}
+ ...
+Recall Wilson's Theorem: \index@{Wilson's Theorem@}
+a number \( n>1 \) is prime if and only if the factorial of \( n-1 \)
+is congruent to \( -1 \) modulo~\( n \).
+ ...
+\printindex
+ ...
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The @code{\usepackage@{makeidx@}} and @code{\makeindex} in the preamble
+bring in the relevant commands.
+
+Producing an index is a three stage process. First, in the document
+body you declare index entries with the @code{\index} command
+(@pxref{\index}). When you run @LaTeX{}, the @code{\index} writes its
+information to an auxiliary file @file{@var{root-name}.idx}. Next, to
+alphabetize and to do other manipulations you run an external command,
+typically @command{makeindex} or @command{xindy} (@pxref{makeindex}).
+These output a file @file{@var{root-name}.ind}. Finally, you bring the
+information back into your document and typeset it with the
+@code{\printindex} command (@pxref{\printindex}).
+
+@PkgIndex{showidx}
+@PkgIndex{multind}
+There are many packages that apply to indexing commands. The
+@code{showidx} package causes each index entries to be shown in the
+margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing
+the index. The @code{multind} package supports multiple indexes. See
+also the @TeX{} FAQ entry on this topic,
+@url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind}.
+
+@menu
+* \index:: Declare an index entry.
+* makeindex:: Alphabetize index entries.
+* \printindex:: Put the index here.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \index
+@subsection @code{\index}
+
+@cindex index entry
+@findex \index
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\index@{@var{index-entry-string}@}
+@end example
+
+Declare an entry in the index. This command is fragile
+(@pxref{\protect}).
+
+For example, as described in @ref{Indexes}, one way to get an index from
+what's below is to compile the document with @code{pdflatex test}, then
+process the index entries with @code{makeindex test}, and then compile
+again with @code{pdflatex test}.
+
+@example
+W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index@{Ackermann@}
+ ...
+Ackermann function\index@{Ackermann!function@}
+ ...
+rate of growth\index@{Ackermann!function!growth rate@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+All three index entries will get a page number, such as @samp{Ackermann,
+22}. @LaTeX{} will format the second as a subitem of the first, on the
+line below it and indented, and the third as a subitem of the second.
+Three levels deep is as far as you can nest subentries. (If you add
+@code{\index@{Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison@}} then
+@command{makeindex} says @samp{Scanning input file test.idx....done (4
+entries accepted, 1 rejected)} and nothing appears in the index).
+
+If you enter a second @code{\index} with the same
+@var{index-entry-string} then you will get a single index entry with two
+page numbers (unless they happen to fall on the same page). Thus,
+adding @code{as for Ackermann.\index@{Ackermann@}} later in the same
+document as above will give an index entry like @samp{Ackermann, 22,
+151}. Also, you can enter the index entries in any order, so for
+instance @code{\index@{Ackermann!function@}} could come before
+@code{\index@{Ackermann@}}.
+
+@cindex index, page range
+Get a page range in the output, like @samp{Hilbert, 23--27}, as here.
+
+@example
+W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index@{Ackermann@}
+ ...
+D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index@{Ackermann!Hilbert\(@}
+ ...
+disapproved of his marriage.\index@{Ackermann!Hilbert\)@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+If the beginning and ending of the page range are equal then the system
+just gives a single page entry, not a range.
+
+If you index subentries but not a main entry, as with
+@code{\index@{Jones!program@}} and @code{\index@{Jones!results@}}, then
+the output is the item @samp{Jones} with no comma or page number,
+followed by two subitems, like @samp{program, 50} and @samp{results,
+51}.
+
+@cindex `see' and `see also' index entries
+@cindex index entries, `see' and `see also'
+@findex \seename
+@findex \alsoname
+@PkgIndex{babel} @PkgIndex{polyglossia}
+
+Generate a index entry that says @samp{See} by using a vertical bar
+character: @code{\index@{Ackermann!function|see@{P\'eter's
+function@}@}}. You can instead get @samp{See also} with @code{seealso}.
+(The text @samp{See} is defined by @code{\seename}, and @samp{See also}
+by @code{\alsoname}. You can redefine these either by using an
+internationalization package such as @file{babel} or @file{polyglossia},
+or directly as with @code{\renewcommand@{\alsoname@}[1]@{Also see
+#1@}}.)
+
+The @samp{See} feature is part of a more general functionality. After
+the vertical bar you can put the name of a one-input command, as in
+@code{\index@{group|textit@}} (note the missing backslash on the
+@code{\textit} command) and the system will apply that command to the
+page number, here giving something like @code{\textit@{7@}}. You can
+define your own one-input commands, such as
+@code{\newcommand@{\definedpage@}[1]@{@{\color@{blue@}#1@}@}} and then
+@code{\index@{Ackermann!function|definedpage@}} will give a blue page
+number (@pxref{Color}). Another, less practical, example is this,
+
+@c credit Ian Thompson https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/272572/121234
+@example
+\newcommand\indexownpage[1]@{#1, \thepage@}
+ ... Epimenides.\index@{self-reference|indexownpage@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+which creates an entry citing the page number of its own index listing.
+
+The two functions just described combine, as here
+
+@example
+\index@{Ackermann!function|(definedpage@}
+ ...
+\index@{Ackermann!function|)@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+which outputs an index entry like @samp{function, 23--27} where the page
+number range is in blue.
+
+Consider an index entry such as @samp{@BES{03B1,\alpha}-ring}. Entering
+it as @code{$\alpha$-ring} will cause it to be alphabetized according to
+the dollar sign. You can instead enter it using an at-sign, as
+@code{\index@{alpha-ring@@$\alpha$-ring@}}. If you specify an entry
+with an at-sign separating two strings, @code{@var{pos}@@@var{text}},
+then @var{pos} gives the alphabetical position of the entry while
+@var{text} produces the text of the entry. Another example is that
+@code{\index@{Saint Michael's College@@SMC@}} produces an index entry
+@samp{SMC} alphabetized into a different location than its spelling
+would naturally give it.
+
+To put a @code{!}, or @code{@@}, or @code{|} character in an index
+entry, preceding it with a double quote, @code{"}. (The double quote
+gets deleted before alphabetization.)
+
+@PkgIndex{index}
+A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond that
+provided by @file{makeidx}. One is @file{index}, which allows for
+multiple indices and contains a command
+@code{\index*@{@var{index-entry-string}@}} that prints the
+@var{index-entry-string} as well as indexing it.
+
+@findex \indexentry
+@cindex idx file
+The @code{\index} command writes the indexing information to the file
+@file{@var{root-name}.idx} file. Specifically, it writes text of the
+command
+@code{\indexentry@{@var{index-entry-string}@}@{@var{page-num}@}},
+where @var{page-num} is the value of the @code{\thepage} counter. On
+occasion, when the @code{\printindex} command is confused, you have to
+delete this file to start with a fresh slate.
+
+If you omit the closing brace of an @code{\index} command then you get a
+message like this.
+
+@example
+Runaway argument? @{Ackermann!function
+! Paragraph ended before \@@wrindex was complete.
+@end example
+
+
+@node makeindex
+@subsection @command{makeindex}
+
+@cindex index, processing
+@findex makeindex
+@cindex @command{makeindex} program
+@cindex @file{.ind} file
+@cindex @file{.idx} file
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+makeindex @var{filename}
+makeindex -s @var{style-file} @var{filename}
+makeindex @var{options} @var{filename0} ...
+@end example
+
+Sort, and otherwise process, the index information in the auxiliary file
+@var{filename}. This is a command line program. It takes one or more
+raw index files, @file{@var{filename}.idx} files, and produces the
+actual index file, the @file{@var{filename}.ind} file that is input by
+@code{\printindex} (@pxref{\printindex}).
+
+@cindex @file{.isty} file
+@findex index, style file
+@findex makeindex, style file
+The first form of the command suffices for many uses. The second allows
+you to format the index by using an @dfn{index style file}, a
+@file{.isty} file. The third form is the most general; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
+
+This is a simple @file{.isty} file.
+
+@example
+% book.isty
+% $ makeindex -s book.isty -p odd book.idx
+% creates the index as book.ind, starting on an odd page.
+preamble
+"\\pagestyle@{empty@}
+\\small
+\\begin@{theindex@}
+\\thispagestyle@{empty@}"
+
+postamble
+"\n
+\\end@{theindex@}"
+@end example
+
+The description here covers only some of the index formatting
+possibilities in @var{style-file}. For a full list see the documentation
+on CTAN.
+
+A style file consists of a list of pairs: @var{specifier} and
+@var{attribute}. These can appear in the file in any order. All of the
+@var{attributes} are strings, except where noted. Strings are
+surrounded with double quotes, @code{"}, and the maximum length of a
+string is 144 characters. The @code{\n} is for a newline and @code{\t}
+is for a tab. Backslashes are escaped with another backslash,
+@code{\\}. If a line begins with a percent sign, @code{%}, then it is a
+comment.
+
+@ftable @code
+@anchor{makeindex preamble}
+@item preamble
+Preamble of the output file. Defines the context in which the index is
+formatted. Default: @code{"\\begin@{theindex@}\n"}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex postamble}
+@item postamble
+Postamble of the output file. Default: @code{"\n\n\\end@{theindex@}\n"}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex group skip}
+@item group_skip
+@findex \indexspace
+Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group for
+entries starting with @samp{a}, etc. This specifier gives what is
+inserted when a new group begins. Default: @code{"\n\n \\indexspace\n"}
+(@code{\indexspace} is a rubber length with default value @code{10pt
+plus5pt minus3pt}).
+
+@anchor{makeindex letheadflag}
+@item lethead_flag
+An integer. It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter. If
+it is 0 (which is the default) then other than @code{group_skip} nothing
+will be inserted before the group. If it is positive then at a new
+letter the @code{lethead_prefix} and @code{lethead_suffix} will be
+inserted, with that letter in uppercase between them. If it is negative
+then what will be inserted is the letter in lowercase. The default
+is@tie{}0.
+
+@anchor{makeindex lethead prefix}
+@item lethead_prefix
+If a new group begins with a different letter then this is the prefix
+inserted before the new letter header. Default: @code{""}
+
+@anchor{makeindex lethead suffix}
+@item lethead_suffix
+If a group begins with a different letter then this is the suffix
+inserted after the new letter header. Default: @code{""}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex item 0}
+@item item_0
+What is put between two level@tie{}0 items. Default: @code{"\n \\item
+"}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex item 1}
+@item item_1
+Put between two level@tie{}1 items. Default: @code{"\n \\subitem "}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex item 2}
+@item item_2
+put between two level@tie{}2 items. Default: @code{"\n \\subsubitem "}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex item 01}
+@item item_01
+What is put between a level@tie{}0 item and a level@tie{}1 item.
+Default: @code{"\n \\subitem "}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex item x1}
+@item item_x1
+What is put between a level@tie{}0 item and a level@tie{}1 item in the
+case that the level@tie{}0 item doesn't have any page numbers (as in
+@code{\index@{aaa|see@{bbb@}@}}). Default: @code{"\n \\subitem "}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex item 12}
+@item item_12
+What is put between a level@tie{}1 item and a level@tie{}2 item.
+Default: @code{"\n \\subsubitem "}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex item x2}
+@item item_x2
+What is put between a level@tie{}1 item and a level@tie{}2 item, if the
+level@tie{}1 item doesn't have page numbers. Default: @code{"\n
+\\subsubitem "}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex delim 0}
+@item delim_0
+Delimiter put between a level@tie{}0 key and its first page
+number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, @code{", "}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex delim 1}
+@item delim_1
+Delimiter put between a level@tie{}1 key and its first page
+number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, @code{", "}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex delim 2}
+@item delim_2
+Delimiter between a level@tie{}2 key and its first page number. Default:
+a comma followed by a blank, @code{", "}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex delim n}
+@item delim_n
+Delimiter between two page numbers for the same key (at any
+level). Default: a comma followed by a blank, @code{", "}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex delim r}
+@item delim_r
+What is put between the starting and ending page numbers of a range.
+Default: @code{"--"}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex line max}
+@item line_max
+An integer. Maximum length of an index entry's line in the output,
+beyond which the line wraps. Default: @code{72}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex indent space}
+@item indent_space
+What is inserted at the start of a wrapped line. Default:
+@code{"\t\t"}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex indent length}
+@item indent_length
+A number. The length of the wrapped line indentation. The default
+@code{indent_space} is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the
+default here is @code{16}.
+
+@anchor{makeindex page precedence}
+@item page_precedence
+A document may have pages numbered in different ways. For example, a
+book may have front matter pages numbered in lowercase roman while main
+matter pages are in arabic. This string specifies the order in which
+they will appear in the index. The @command{makeindex} command supports
+five different types of numerals: lowercase roman @code{r}, and numeric
+or arabic @code{n}, and lowercase alphabetic @code{a}, and uppercase
+roman @code{R}, and uppercase alphabetic @code{A}. Default:
+@code{"rnaRA"}.
+
+@end ftable
+
+@findex xindy
+@cindex @command{xindy} program
+There are a number of other programs that do the job
+@command{makeindex} does. One is @command{xindy}, which does
+internationalization and can process indexes for documents marked up
+using @LaTeX{} and a number of other languages. It is highly
+configurable, both in markup terms and in terms of the collating order
+of the text, as described in its documentation.
+
+
+@node \printindex
+@subsection @command{\printindex}
+
+@cindex index, printing
+@findex \printindex
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\printindex
+@end example
+
+@findex \printindex
+Place the index into the output.
+
+To get an index you must first include
+@code{\usepackage@{makeidx@}\makeindex} in the document preamble and
+compile the document, then run the system command @command{makeindex},
+and then compile the document again. @xref{Indexes} for further
+discussion and an example of the use of @code{\printindex}.
+
+
+@node Glossaries
+@section Glossaries
+
+@cindex glossary
+@cindex glossaries
+@cindex acronyms, list of
+@findex \makeglossary
+@findex \printglossaries
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\usepackage@{glossaries@} \makeglossaries
+ ...
+\newglossaryentry@{@var{label}@}@{@var{settings}@}
+ ...
+\gls@{@var{label}@}.
+ ...
+\printglossaries
+@end example
+
+The @file{glossaries} package allows you to make glossaries, including
+multiple glossaries, as well as lists of acronyms.
+
+To get the output from this example, compile the document (for instance
+with @code{pdflatex filename}), then run the command line command
+@code{makeglossaries filename}, and then compile the document again.
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{...@}
+\usepackage@{glossaries@} \makeglossaries
+\newglossaryentry@{tm@}@{%
+ name=@{Turing machine@},
+ description=@{A model of a machine that computes. The model is simple
+ but can compute anything any existing device can compute.
+ It is the standard model used in Computer Science.@},
+ @}
+\begin@{document@}
+Everything begins with the definition of a \gls@{tm@}.
+ ...
+\printglossaries
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+That gives two things. In the main text it outputs @samp{... definition
+of a Turing machine}. In addition, in a separate sectional unit headed
+@samp{Glossary} there appears a description list. In boldface it says
+@samp{Turing machine} and the rest of the item says in normal type
+@samp{A model of a machine @dots{} Computer Science}.
+
+@findex \makeglossary
+@findex \printglossaries
+@cindex @file{.glo} file
+The command @code{\makeglossary} opens the file that will contain the
+entry information, @file{@var{root-file}.glo}. Put the
+@code{\printglossaries} command where you want the glossaries to appear
+in your document.
+
+The @file{glossaries} package is very powerful. For instance, besides
+the commands @code{\newglossaryentry} and @code{\gls}, there are similar
+commands for a list of acronyms. See the package documentations on
+CTAN.
+
+@menu
+* \newglossaryentry:: Declare the content of a glossary entry.
+* \gls:: Give a page reference for a glossary entry.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \newglossaryentry
+@subsection @code{\newglossaryentry}
+
+@cindex glossary, entries
+@findex \newglossaryentry
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\newglossaryentry@{@var{label}@}
+@{
+ name=@{@var{name}@},
+ description=@{@var{description}@},
+ @var{other options}, ...
+@}
+@end example
+
+or
+
+@example
+\longnewglossaryentry@{@var{label}@}
+@{
+ name=@{@var{name}@},
+ @var{other options} ...,
+@}
+@{@var{description}@}
+@end example
+
+Declare a new entry for a glossary. The @var{label} must be unique for
+the document. The settings associated with the label are pairs:
+@code{@var{key}=@var{value}}.
+
+This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers @BES{211D,} in the
+glossary.
+
+@example
+\newglossaryentry@{R@}
+@{
+ name=@{\ensuremath@{\mathbb@{R@}@}@},
+ description=@{the real numbers@},
+@}
+@end example
+
+Use the second command form if the @var{description} spans more than one
+paragraph.
+
+For a full list of @var{key}s see the package documentation on CTAN but
+here are a few.
+
+@ftable @code
+@item name
+(Required.) The word, phrase, or symbol that you are defining.
+
+@item description
+(Required.) The description that will appear in the glossary.
+If this has more than one paragraph then you must use the second command
+form given in the synopsis.
+
+@item plural
+The plural form of @var{name}. Refer to the plural form using
+@code{\glspl} or @code{\Glspl} (@pxref{\gls}).
+
+@item sort
+How to place this entry in the list of entries that the glossary holds.
+
+@item symbol
+A symbol, such as a mathematical symbol, besides the name.
+
+@end ftable
+
+
+@node \gls
+@subsection @code{\gls}
+
+@cindex glossary, entry reference
+@findex \gls
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\gls@{@var{label}@}
+\glspl@{@var{label}@}
+\Gls@{@var{label}@}
+\Glspl@{@var{label}@}
+@end example
+
+Refer to a glossary entry. The entries are declared with
+@code{\newglossaryentry} (@pxref{\newglossaryentry}).
+
+This
+
+@example
+\newglossaryentry@{N@}@{%
+ name=@{the natural numbers@},
+ description=@{The numbers $0$, $1$, $2$, $\ldots$\@@@},
+ symbol=@{\ensuremath@{\mathbb@{N@}@}@},
+ @}
+ ...
+Consider \gls@{N@}.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+gives the output @samp{Consider the natural numbers}.
+
+The second command form @code{\glspl@{@var{label}@}} produces the plural
+of @var{name} (by default it tries adding an @samp{s}). The third form
+capitalizes the first letter of @var{name}, as does the fourth form,
+which also takes the plural.
+
+
+@node Letters
+@chapter Letters
+
+@cindex letters, writing
+@cindex writing letters
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{letter@}
+\address@{@var{senders address}@} % return address
+\signature@{@var{sender name}@}
+\begin@{document@}
+\begin@{letter@}@{@var{recipient address}@}
+\opening@{@var{salutation}@}
+ @var{letter body}
+\closing@{@var{closing text}@}
+\end@{letter@}
+ ...
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+Produce one or more letters.
+
+Each letter is in a separate @code{letter} environment, whose argument
+@var{recipient address} often contains multiple lines separated with a
+double backslash,@tie{}(@code{\\}). For example, you might have:
+
+@example
+ \begin@{letter@}@{Ninon de l'Enclos \\
+ l'h\^otel Sagonne@}
+ ...
+ \end@{letter@}
+@end example
+
+The start of the @code{letter} environment resets the page number to 1,
+and the footnote number to 1 also.
+
+The @var{sender address} and @var{sender name} are common to all of the
+letters, whether there is one or more, so these are best put in the
+preamble. As with the recipient address, often @var{sender address}
+contains multiple lines separated by a double
+backslash@tie{}(@code{\\}). @LaTeX{} will put the @var{sender name}
+under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
+hand-written signature.
+
+Each @code{letter} environment body begins with a required
+@code{\opening} command such as @code{\opening@{Dear Madam or Sir:@}}.
+The @var{letter body} text is ordinary @LaTeX{} so it can contain
+everything from enumerated lists to displayed math, except that commands
+such as @code{\chapter} that make no sense in a letter are turned off.
+Each @code{letter} environment body typically ends with a
+@code{\closing} command such as @code{\closing@{Yours,@}}.
+
+@findex \\ @r{for letters}
+Additional material may come after the @code{\closing}. You can say who
+is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like @code{\cc@{the
+Boss \\ the Boss's Boss@}}. There's a similar @code{\encl} command for
+a list of enclosures. And, you can add a postscript with @code{\ps}.
+
+@LaTeX{}'s default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it
+by a length of @code{\longindentation}. By default this is
+@code{0.5\textwidth}. To make them flush left, put
+@code{\setlength@{\longindentation@}@{0em@}} in your preamble.
+
+To set a fixed date use something like
+@code{\renewcommand@{\today@}@{1958-Oct-12@}}. If put in your preamble
+then it will apply to all the letters.
+
+This example shows only one @code{letter} environment. The three lines
+marked as optional are typically omitted.
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{letter@}
+\address@{Sender's street \\ Sender's town@}
+\signature@{Sender's name \\ Sender's title@}
+% optional: \location@{Mailbox 13@}
+% optional: \telephone@{(102) 555-0101@}
+\begin@{document@}
+\begin@{letter@}@{Recipient's name \\ Recipient's address@}
+\opening@{Sir:@}
+% optional: \thispagestyle@{firstpage@}
+I am not interested in entering a business arrangement with you.
+\closing@{Your most humble, etc.,@}
+\end@{letter@}
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+These commands are used with the @code{letter} class.
+
+@menu
+* \address:: Sender's return address.
+* \cc:: Carbon copy list.
+* \closing:: Saying goodbye.
+* \encl:: List of enclosed material.
+* \location:: Sender's organizational location.
+* \makelabels:: Make address labels.
+* \name:: Sender's name, for the return address.
+* \opening:: Saying hello.
+* \ps:: Adding a postscript.
+* \signature:: Sender's signature.
+* \telephone:: Sender's phone number.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \address
+@section @code{\address}
+
+@findex \address
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\address@{@var{senders address}@}
+@end example
+
+Specify the return address, as it appears on the letter and on the
+envelope. Separate multiple lines in @var{senders address} with a
+double backslash,@tie{}@code{\\}.
+
+Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often put
+in the preamble. However, it can go anywhere, including inside an
+individual @code{letter} environment.
+
+This command is optional: if you do not use it then the letter is
+formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto pre-printed
+letterhead paper. If you do use the @code{\address} declaration then it
+is formatted as a personal letter.
+
+Here is an example.
+
+@example
+\address@{Stephen Maturin \\
+ The Grapes of the Savoy@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \cc
+@section @code{\cc}
+
+@findex \cc
+@cindex cc list, in letters
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\cc@{@var{name0} \\
+ ... @}
+@end example
+
+Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent. This
+command is optional. If it appears then typically it comes after
+@code{\closing}. Put the names on different lines by separating them
+with a double backslash, @code{\\}, as in:
+
+@example
+\cc@{President \\
+ Vice President@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \closing
+@section @code{\closing}
+
+@findex \closing
+@cindex letters, ending
+@cindex closing letters
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\closing@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Produce the letter's closing. This is optional, but usual. It appears
+at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature. For example:
+
+@example
+\closing@{Regards,@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \encl
+@section @code{\encl}
+
+@findex \encl
+@cindex enclosure list
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\encl@{@var{first enclosed object} \\
+ ... @}
+@end example
+
+Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
+optional; when it is used, it typically is put after @code{\closing}.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, @code{\\}.
+
+@example
+\encl@{License \\
+ Passport@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \location
+@section @code{\location}
+
+@findex \location
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\location@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+The @var{text} appears centered at the bottom of the page. It only
+appears if the page style is @code{firstpage}.
+
+
+@node \makelabels
+@section @code{\makelabels}
+
+@findex \makelabels
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\makelabels % in preamble
+@end example
+
+Optional, for a document that contains @code{letter} environments. If
+you just put @code{\makelabels} in the preamble then at the end of the
+document you will get a sheet with labels for all the recipients, one
+for each letter environment, that you can copy to a sheet of peel-off
+address labels.
+
+Customize the labels by redefining the commands @code{\startlabels},
+@code{\mlabel}, and @code{\returnaddress} (and perhaps @code{\name}) in
+the preamble. The command @code{\startlabels} sets the width, height,
+number of columns, etc., of the page onto which the labels are printed.
+The command @code{\mlabel@{@var{return address}@}@{@var{recipient
+address}@}} produces the two labels (or one, if you choose to ignore the
+@var{return address}) for each letter environment. The first argument,
+@var{return address}, is the value returned by the macro
+@code{\returnaddress}. The second argument, @var{recipient address}, is
+the value passed in the argument to the @code{letter} environment. By
+default @code{\mlabel} ignores the first argument, the @var{return
+address}, causing the default behavior described in the prior paragraph.
+
+This illustrates customization. Its output includes a page with two
+columns having two labels each.
+
+@example
+\documentclass@{letter@}
+\renewcommand*@{\returnaddress@}@{Fred McGuilicuddy \\
+ Oshkosh, Mineola 12305@}
+\newcommand*\originalMlabel@{@}
+\let\originalMlabel\mlabel
+\def\mlabel#1#2@{\originalMlabel@{@}@{#1@}\originalMlabel@{@}@{#2@}@}
+\makelabels
+ ...
+\begin@{document@}
+\begin@{letter@}@{A Einstein \\
+ 112 Mercer Street \\
+ Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540@}
+ ...
+\end@{letter@}
+\begin@{letter@}@{K G\"odel \\
+ 145 Linden Lane \\
+ Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540@}
+ ...
+\end@{letter@}
+\end@{document@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The first column contains the return address twice. The second column
+contains the address for each recipient.
+
+@PkgIndex{envlab}
+The package @code{envlab} makes formatting the labels easier, with
+standard sizes already provided. The preamble lines
+@code{\usepackage[personalenvelope]@{envlab@}} and @code{\makelabels}
+are all that you need to print envelopes.
+
+
+@node \name
+@section @code{\name}
+
+@findex \name
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\name@{@var{name}@}
+@end example
+
+Optional. Sender's name, used for printing on the envelope together
+with the return address.
+
+
+@node \opening
+@section @code{\opening}
+
+@findex \opening
+@cindex letters, starting
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\opening@{@var{salutation}@}
+@end example
+
+Required. Follows the @code{\begin@{letter@}@{...@}}. The argument
+@var{salutation} is mandatory. For instance:
+
+@example
+\opening@{Dear John:@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \ps
+@section @code{\ps}
+@findex \ps
+@cindex postscript, in letters
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\ps@{@var{text}@}
+@end example
+
+Add a postscript. This command is optional and usually is used after
+@code{\closing}.
+
+@example
+\ps@{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.@}
+@end example
+
+
+@node \signature
+@section @code{\signature}
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\signature@{@var{first line} \\
+ ... @}
+@end example
+
+@findex \signature
+
+The sender's name. This command is optional, although its inclusion is
+usual.
+
+The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing.
+@LaTeX{} leaves some vertical space for a handwritten
+signature. Separate multiple lines with a double
+backslash,@tie{}@code{\\}. For example:
+
+@example
+\signature@{J Fred Muggs \\
+ White House@}
+@end example
+
+@LaTeX{}'s default for the vertical space from the @code{\closing} text
+down to the @code{\signature} text is @code{6\medskipamount}, which is
+six times @code{\medskipamount} (where @code{\medskipamount} is equal to
+a @code{\parskip}, which in turn is defined by default here to
+0.7@dmn{em}).
+
+This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters in
+the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a
+@code{letter} environment and before the @code{\closing}.
+
+You can include a graphic in the signature as here.
+
+@example
+\signature@{\vspace@{-6\medskipamount@}\includegraphics@{sig.png@}\\
+ My name@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+For this you must put @code{\usepackage@{graphicx@}} in the preamble
+(@pxref{Graphics}).
+
+
+@c I think this is not a user-level command; it is used to keep from breaking
+@c the page between the closing and the signature
+@c @node \stopbreaks and \startbreaks
+@c @section @code{\stopbreaks} and @code{\startbreaks}
+
+@c @findex \startbreak
+@c @findex \stopbreaks
+
+@c @example
+@c @code{\stopbreaks}
+@c text
+@c @code{\startbreaks}
+@c @end example
+
+@c The @code{\stopbreaks} inhibits page breaking. The @code{\startbreaks} resumes
+@c normal page breaking.
+@c
+@c
+@node \telephone
+@section @code{\telephone}
+
+@findex \telephone
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\telephone@{@var{number}@}
+@end example
+
+The sender's telephone number. This is typically in the preamble, where
+it applies to all letters. This only appears if the @code{firstpage}
+pagestyle is selected. If so, it appears on the lower right of the
+page.
+
+
+@node Terminal input/output
+@chapter Terminal input/output
+
+@cindex input/output, to terminal
+@cindex terminal input/output
+
+@menu
+* \typein:: Read text from the terminal.
+* \typeout:: Write text to the terminal.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node \typein
+@section @code{\typein}
+
+@findex \typein
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+@example
+\typein@{@var{prompt-msg}@}
+\typein[@var{cmd}]@{@var{prompt-msg}@}
+@end example
+
+Print @var{prompt-msg} on the terminal and cause @LaTeX{} to stop and
+wait for you to type a line of input. This line of input ends when you
+hit the return key.
+
+For example, this
+
+@example
+As long as I live I shall never forget \typein@{Enter student name:@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+coupled with this command line interaction
+
+@example
+Enter student name:
+
+\@@typein=Aphra Behn
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+gives the output @samp{... never forget Aphra Behn}.
+
+The first command version, @code{\typein@{@var{prompt-msg}@}}, causes
+the input you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the
+input file in place of the @code{\typein} command.
+
+In the second command version the optional argument @code{@var{cmd}}
+argument must be a command name --- it must begin with a backslash, \.
+This command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you
+typed. For example, this
+
+@example
+\typein[\student]@{Enter student name:@}
+\typeout@{Recommendation for \student .@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+gives this output on the command line,
+
+@example
+Enter student name:
+
+\student=John Dee
+Recommendation for John Dee.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+where the user has entered @samp{John Dee.}
+
+
+@node \typeout
+@section @code{\typeout}
+
+@findex \typeout
+
+Synopsis:
+
+@example
+\typeout@{@var{msg}@}
+@end example
+
+Print @code{msg} on the terminal and in the @code{log} file.
+
+This
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\student@}@{John Dee@}
+\typeout@{Recommendation for \student .@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+outputs @samp{Recommendation for John Dee}. Like what happens here with
+@code{\student}, commands that are defined with @code{\newcommand} or
+@code{\renewcommand} (among others) are replaced by their definitions
+before being printed.
+
+@LaTeX{}'s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
+and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to @code{msg}. As above,
+use the command @code{\space} to get a single space, independent of
+surrounding spaces. Use @code{^^J} to get a newline. Get a percent
+character with @code{\csname @@percentchar\endcsname}.
+
+This command can be useful for simple debugging, as here:
+
+@example
+\newlength@{\jhlength@}
+\setlength@{\jhlength@}@{5pt@}
+\typeout@{The length is \the\jhlength.@}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+produces on the command line @samp{The length is 5.0pt}.
+
+
+@node Command line
+@chapter Command line
+
+@cindex command line
+
+Synopsis (from a terminal command line):
+
+@example
+pdflatex @var{options} @var{argument}
+@end example
+
+Run @LaTeX{} on @var{argument}. In place of @command{pdflatex} you can
+also use @command{xelatex}, or @code{lualatex}, or @code{dviluatex}, or
+@code{latex}.
+
+For example, this will run @LaTeX{} on the file @file{thesis.tex},
+creating the output @file{thesis.pdf}.
+
+@example
+pdflatex thesis
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+@findex .tex, @r{default extension}
+Note that @file{.tex} is the default file extension.
+
+pdf@TeX{} is a development of the original @TeX{} program, as are
+Xe@TeX{} and Lua@TeX{} (@pxref{@TeX{} engines}). They are completely
+backward compatible. But the original program had a custom output
+format, DVI, while the newer ones can output directly to PDF. This
+allows them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF such as
+hyperlinks, support for modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and
+ubiquitous viewing programs. In short, if you run @command{pdflatex} or
+@command{xelatex} or @command{lualatex} then you will by default get PDF
+and have access to all its modern features. If you run @command{latex},
+or @code{dvilualatex}, then you will get DVI. The description here
+assumes pdf@LaTeX{}.
+
+@xref{Command line options}, for a selection of the most useful
+command line options. As to @var{argument}, the usual case is that it
+does not begin with a backslash, so the system takes it to be the name
+of a file and it compiles that file. If @var{argument} begins with a
+backslash then the system will interpret it as a line of @LaTeX{}
+input, which can be used for special effects (@pxref{Command line
+input}).
+
+If you gave no arguments or options then @command{pdflatex} prompts for
+input from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering
+@code{<control>-D}.
+
+If @LaTeX{} finds an error in your document then by default it stops and
+asks you about it. @xref{Recovering from errors} for an outline of what
+to do.
+
+@menu
+* Command line options:: Read text from the terminal.
+* Command line input:: Write text to the terminal.
+* Recovering from errors:: When something goes wrong.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Command line options
+@section Command line options
+
+@cindex options, command line
+
+These are the command-line options relevant to ordinary document
+authoring. For a full list, try running @samp{latex --help} from the
+command line.
+
+With many implementations you can specify command line options by
+prefixing them with @samp{-} or @samp{--}. This is the case for
+both @TeX{} Live (and Mac@TeX{}) and MiK@TeX{}. We will use both
+conventions interchangeably.
+
+@table @code
+@findex --version @r{command-line option}
+@item -version
+Show the current version, like @samp{pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX
+Live 2015/Debian)} along with a small amount of additional information,
+and exit.
+
+@findex --help @r{command-line option}
+@item -help
+Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit.
+
+@findex --interaction @r{command-line option}
+@item -interaction=@var{mode}
+@TeX{} compiles a document in one of four interaction modes:
+@code{batchmode}, @code{nonstopmode}, @code{scrollmode},
+@code{errorstopmode}. In @dfn{errorstop mode} (the default), @TeX{}
+stops at each error and asks for user intervention. In @dfn{batch
+mode} it prints nothing on the terminal, errors are scrolled as if the
+user hit @code{<return>} at every error, and missing files cause the
+job to abort. In @dfn{nonstop mode}, diagnostic message appear on the
+terminal but as in batch mode there is no user interaction. In
+@dfn{scroll mode}, @TeX{} only stops for missing files or keyboard
+input.
+
+For instance, starting @LaTeX{} with this command line
+
+@example
+pdflatex -interaction=batchmode @var{filename}
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+eliminates most terminal output.
+
+@findex --jobname @r{command-line option}
+@item -jobname=@var{string}
+Set the value of @TeX{}'s @code{jobname} to the string. The log file
+and output file will then be named @file{@var{string}.log} and
+@file{@var{string}.pdf}.
+
+When you run @code{@command{pdflatex} @var{options} @var{argument}}, if
+@var{argument} does not start with a backslash then @TeX{} considers it
+the name of a file to input. Otherwise it waits for the first
+@code{\input} instruction and the name of the input file will be the job
+name. This is used to name the log file the output file. The
+@code{jobname} option overrides that process and directly specifies the
+name. @xref{Command line input} for an example of its use.
+
+@findex --output-directory @r{command-line option}
+@item -output-directory=@var{directory}
+Write files in the directory @var{directory}. It must already exist.
+
+@findex --shell-escape @r{command-line option}
+@findex --no-shell-escape @r{command-line option}
+@findex --enable-write18 @r{command-line option}
+@findex --disable-write18 @r{command-line option}
+@item --shell-escape
+@itemx --no-shell-escape
+@itemx --enable-write18
+@itemx --disable-write18
+Enable or disable @code{\write18@{@var{shell command}@}}. The first two
+options are for with @TeX{} Live or Mac@TeX{} while the second two are
+for MiK@TeX{}.
+
+@PkgIndex{sagetex}
+Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a
+@LaTeX{} file. For instance the package @file{sagetex} allows you to
+have the mathematics software system @i{Sage} do calculations or draw
+graphs and then incorporate that output in your document. For this
+@TeX{} provides the @code{\write18} command.
+
+But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen if you
+compiled a @LaTeX{} file from the Internet. By default @code{\write18}
+is disabled. (More precisely, by default @TeX{} Live, Mac@TeX{}, and
+MiK@TeX{} only allow the execution of a limited number of @TeX{}-related
+programs, which they distribute.)
+
+If you invoke @LaTeX{} with the option @code{no-shell-escape}, and in
+your document you call @code{\write18@{ls -l@}}, then you do not get an
+error but the log file says @samp{runsystem(ls -l)...disabled}.
+
+@findex --halt-on-error @r{command-line option}
+@item -halt-on-error
+Stop processing at the first error.
+
+@findex --file-line-error @r{command-line option}
+@findex --no-file-line-error @r{command-line option}
+@item -file-line-error
+@item -no-file-line-error
+Enable or disable @code{@var{filename}:@var{lineno}:@var{error}}-style
+error messages. These are only available with @TeX{} Live or Mac@TeX{}.
+@end table
+
+
+@node Command line input
+@section Command line input
+
+@cindex input, on command line
+
+As part of the command line invocation @code{pdflatex @var{options}
+@var{argument}} you can specify arbitrary @LaTeX{} input by starting
+@var{argument} with a backslash. This allows you to do some special
+effects.
+
+@PkgIndex{hyperref}
+For example, this file (which uses the @file{hyperref} package for
+hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a
+PDF.
+
+@example
+\ifdefined\paperversion % in preamble
+\newcommand@{\urlcolor@}@{black@}
+\else
+\newcommand@{\urlcolor@}@{blue@}
+\fi
+\usepackage[colorlinks=true,urlcolor=\urlcolor]@{hyperref@}
+ ...
+\href@{https://www.ctan.org@}@{CTAN@} % in body
+ ...
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+Compiling this document @file{book.tex} with the command line
+@code{pdflatex book} will give the @samp{CTAN} link in blue. But
+compiling it with @code{pdflatex "\def\paperversion@{@}\input book.tex"}
+has the link in black. (Note the use of double quotes to prevent
+interpretation of the symbols by the command line shell; your system may
+do this differently.)
+
+In a similar way, from the single file @file{main.tex} you can compile
+two different versions.
+
+@c credit Paul Gaborit: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/220101/121234
+@example
+pdflatex -jobname=students "\def\student@{@}\input@{main@}"
+pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers@{@}\input@{main@}"
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The @code{jobname} option is there because otherwise both files would be
+called @file{main.pdf} and the second would overwrite the first.
+
+A final example. This loads the package @file{graphicx} with the option
+@code{draft}
+
+@c credit Herbert Voss: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/17236/121234
+@example
+pdflatex -jobname=aa "\RequirePackage[draft]@{graphicx@}\input@{aa.tex@}"
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+so the graphic files are read for their size information but not
+incorporated into the PDF. (The @code{jobname} option is there because
+otherwise the output file would be @file{graphicx.pdf}, as
+@code{\RequirePackage} does an @code{\input} of its own.)
+
+
+@node Recovering from errors
+@section Recovering from errors
+
+If @LaTeX{} finds an error in your document then it gives you an error
+message and prompts you with a question mark, @code{?}. For instance,
+running @LaTeX{} on this file
+
+@example
+\newcommand@{\NP@}@{\ensuremath@{\textbf@{NP@}@}@}
+The \PN@{@} problem is a million dollar one.
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+causes it show this, and wait for input.
+
+@example
+! Undefined control sequence.
+l.5 The \PN
+ @{@} problem is a million dollar one.
+?
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The simplest thing is to enter @samp{x} and @code{<return>} and fix the
+typo. You could instead enter @samp{?} and @code{<return>} to see other
+options.
+
+@cindex @samp{*} prompt
+@cindex prompt, @samp{*}
+@findex \stop
+There are two other error scenarios. The first is that you forgot to
+include the @code{\end@{document@}} or misspelled it. In this case
+@LaTeX{} gives you a @samp{*} prompt. You can get back to the command
+line by typing @code{\stop} and @code{<return>}.
+
+The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name. For instance,
+instead of @code{pdflatex test} you might type @code{pdflatex tste}.
+
+@example
+! I can't find file `tste'.
+<*> tste
+
+(Press Enter to retry, or Control-D to exit)
+Please type another input file name:
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+The simplest thing is to enter @code{<Control>} and @samp{d} (holding
+them down at the same time), and then retype the correct command line.
+
+
+@node Document templates
+@appendix Document templates
+
+@cindex document templates
+@cindex templates, document
+
+Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will
+be useful. Additional template resources are listed at
+@url{http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates}.
+
+@menu
+* beamer template::
+* article template::
+* book template::
+* Larger book template::
+* tugboat template::
+@end menu
+
+
+@node beamer template
+@section @code{beamer} template
+
+@cindex @code{beamer} template and class
+@cindex template, @code{beamer}
+
+The @code{beamer} class creates presentation slides. It has a vast
+array of features, but here is a basic template:
+
+@verbatim
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+\title{Beamer Class template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+\date{July 31, 2007}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% without [fragile], any {verbatim} code gets mysterious errors.
+\begin{frame}[fragile]
+ \frametitle{First Slide}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ This is \verbatim!
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+@end verbatim
+
+One web resource for this:
+@url{http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/}.
+
+
+@node article template
+@section @code{article} template
+
+@cindex template, @code{article}
+
+@verbatim
+\documentclass{article}
+\title{Article Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{First section}
+Some text.
+
+\subsection{First section, first subsection}
+Additional text.
+
+\section{Second section}
+Some more text.
+\end{document}
+@end verbatim
+
+
+@node book template
+@section @code{book} template
+
+@cindex template, @code{book}
+
+This is a straightforward template for a book. See @xref{Larger book
+template} for a more elaborate one.
+
+@verbatim
+\documentclass{book}
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\chapter{First}
+Some text.
+
+\chapter{Second}
+Some other text.
+
+\section{A subtopic}
+The end.
+\end{document}
+@end verbatim
+
+
+@node Larger book template
+@section Larger @code{book} template
+
+@cindex template, @code{book}
+
+This is a more elaborate template for a book. It has
+@code{\frontmatter}, @code{\mainmatter}, and @code{\backmatter} to
+control the typography of the three main areas of a book
+(@pxref{\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter}). The book has a
+bibliography and an index.
+
+Notable is that it uses @code{\include} and @code{\includeonly}
+(@pxref{Splitting the input}). While you are working on a chapter you
+can comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to
+@code{\includeonly}. That will speed up compilation without losing any
+information such as cross-references. (Material that does not need to
+come on a new page is brought in with @code{\input} instead of
+@code{\include}. You don't get the cross-reference benefit this way.)
+
+@verbatim
+\documentclass[titlepage]{book}
+\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex
+
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\includeonly{%
+ frontcover,
+ preface,
+ chap1,
+ ...
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\include{frontcover}
+ % maybe comment out while drafting:
+\maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright}
+\tableofcontents
+\include{preface}
+\mainmatter
+\include{chap1}
+...
+\appendix
+\include{appena}
+...
+\backmatter
+\bibliographystyle{apalike}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}
+\bibliography
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index}
+\printindex
+\include{backcover}
+\end{document}
+@end verbatim
+
+
+@node tugboat template
+@section @code{tugboat} template
+
+@cindex template, TUGboat
+@cindex TUGboat template
+@cindex @code{ltugboat} class
+
+@cite{TUGboat} is the journal of the @TeX{} Users Group,
+@url{http://tug.org/TUGboat}.
+
+@verbatim
+\documentclass{ltugboat}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{ifpdf}
+\ifpdf
+\usepackage[breaklinks,hidelinks]{hyperref}
+\else
+\usepackage{url}
+\fi
+
+%%% Start of metadata %%%
+
+\title{Example \TUB\ article}
+
+% repeat info for each author.
+\author{First Last}
+\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
+\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
+\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
+
+%%% End of metadata %%%
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+This is an example article for \TUB{}.
+Please write an abstract.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is an example article for \TUB, linked from
+\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
+
+We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the
+\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF}
+output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
+
+The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more):
+% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
+\begin{verbatim}[\small]
+\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
+\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
+\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
+\mf \MFB
+\plain \POBox \PS
+\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP
+\TUB \TUG \tug
+\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+
+\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph
+
+\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use!
+\cs{fred} -> \fred
+\meta{fred} -> <fred>
+\nth{n} -> 1st, 2nd, ...
+\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
+\booktitle{Book of Fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format
+\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue.
+
+This file is just a template. The \TUB\ style documentation is the
+\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}. (For
+\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using
+\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location,
+\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.)
+
+Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
+\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty
+\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
+
+\makesignature
+\end{document}
+@end verbatim
+
+
+@node Index
+@unnumbered Index
+
+@c Keep `Command Index' working for ltx-help.el.
+@anchor{Command Index}
+
+@printindex cp
+
+@bye
+
+\def\DeclareTextCommand{\foo}{T1}
+% then |\foo| is defined to be |\T1-cmd \foo \T1\foo|,
+% % where |\T1\foo| is \emph{one} control sequence, not two!
+\newcommand
+
+\def\ProvideTextCommand -- same with \providecommand
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextCommand
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextSymbol
+\gdef\TextSymbolUnavailable#1{%
+\@onlypreamble\def\DeclareTextCommandDefault#1{%
+\def\ProvideTextCommandDefault#1{%
+\def\DeclareTextAccent#1#2#3{%
+\def\DeclareTextCompositeCommand#1#2#3#4{%
+\@onlypreamble\def\DeclareTextComposite#1#2#3#4{%
+\def\UseTextAccent#1#2#3{%
+\def\UseTextSymbol#1#2{%
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextSymbolDefault@item
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareTextAccentDefault@item
+\def\UndeclareTextCommand#1#2{%
+
+@c Local Variables:
+@c ispell-dictionary: "english"
+@c coding: latin-1-unix
+@c End:
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d6bc68bdb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16791 @@
+LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
+1 About this document
+2 Overview of LaTeX
+3 Document classes
+4 Fonts
+5 Layout
+6 Sectioning
+7 Cross references
+8 Environments
+9 Line breaking
+10 Page breaking
+11 Footnotes
+12 Definitions
+13 Counters
+14 Lengths
+15 Making paragraphs
+16 Math formulas
+17 Modes
+18 Page styles
+19 Spaces
+20 Boxes
+21 Color
+22 Graphics
+23 Special insertions
+24 Splitting the input
+25 Front/back matter
+26 Letters
+27 Terminal input/output
+28 Command line
+Appendix A Document templates
+Index
+LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
+1 About this document
+2 Overview of LaTeX
+ 2.1 Starting and ending
+ 2.2 Output files
+ 2.3 TeX engines
+ 2.4 LaTeX command syntax
+ 2.5 Environment
+ 2.6 CTAN: the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
+3 Document classes
+ 3.1 Document class options
+ 3.2 Additional packages
+ 3.3 Class and package construction
+ 3.3.1 Class and package structure
+ 3.3.2 Class and package commands
+4 Fonts
+ 4.1 Font styles
+ 4.2 Font sizes
+ 4.3 Low-level font commands
+5 Layout
+ 5.1 '\onecolumn'
+ 5.2 '\twocolumn'
+ 5.3 '\flushbottom'
+ 5.4 '\raggedbottom'
+ 5.5 Page layout parameters
+ 5.6 Floats
+6 Sectioning
+ 6.1 '\part'
+ 6.2 '\chapter'
+ 6.3 '\section'
+ 6.4 '\subsection'
+ 6.5 '\subsubsection', '\paragraph', '\subparagraph'
+ 6.6 '\appendix'
+ 6.7 '\frontmatter', '\mainmatter', '\backmatter'
+ 6.8 '\@startsection'
+7 Cross references
+ 7.1 '\label'
+ 7.2 '\pageref'
+ 7.3 '\ref'
+8 Environments
+ 8.1 'abstract'
+ 8.2 'array'
+ 8.3 'center'
+ 8.3.1 '\centering'
+ 8.4 'description'
+ 8.5 'displaymath'
+ 8.6 'document'
+ 8.6.1 '\AtBeginDocument'
+ 8.6.2 '\AtEndDocument'
+ 8.7 'enumerate'
+ 8.8 'eqnarray'
+ 8.9 'equation'
+ 8.10 'figure'
+ 8.11 'filecontents': Write an external file
+ 8.12 'flushleft'
+ 8.12.1 '\raggedright'
+ 8.13 'flushright'
+ 8.13.1 '\raggedleft'
+ 8.14 'itemize'
+ 8.15 'letter' environment: writing letters
+ 8.16 'list'
+ 8.16.1 '\item': An entry in a list
+ 8.16.2 'trivlist': A restricted form of 'list'
+ 8.17 'math'
+ 8.18 'minipage'
+ 8.19 'picture'
+ 8.19.1 '\put'
+ 8.19.2 '\multiput'
+ 8.19.3 '\qbezier'
+ 8.19.4 '\graphpaper'
+ 8.19.5 '\line'
+ 8.19.6 '\linethickness'
+ 8.19.7 '\thinlines'
+ 8.19.8 '\thicklines'
+ 8.19.9 '\circle'
+ 8.19.10 '\oval'
+ 8.19.11 '\shortstack'
+ 8.19.12 '\vector'
+ 8.19.13 '\makebox' (picture)
+ 8.19.14 '\framebox' (picture)
+ 8.19.15 '\frame'
+ 8.19.16 '\dashbox'
+ 8.20 'quotation' & 'quote'
+ 8.21 'tabbing'
+ 8.22 'table'
+ 8.23 'tabular'
+ 8.23.1 '\multicolumn'
+ 8.23.2 '\vline'
+ 8.23.3 '\cline'
+ 8.23.4 '\hline'
+ 8.24 'thebibliography'
+ 8.24.1 '\bibitem'
+ 8.24.2 '\cite'
+ 8.24.3 '\nocite'
+ 8.24.4 Using BibTeX
+ 8.25 'theorem'
+ 8.26 'titlepage'
+ 8.27 'verbatim'
+ 8.27.1 '\verb'
+ 8.28 'verse'
+9 Line breaking
+ 9.1 '\\'
+ 9.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr'
+ 9.3 '\newline'
+ 9.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen)
+ 9.5 '\discretionary' (generalized hyphenation point)
+ 9.6 '\fussy' & '\sloppy'
+ 9.6.1 'sloppypar'
+ 9.7 '\hyphenation'
+ 9.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
+10 Page breaking
+ 10.1 '\clearpage' & '\cleardoublepage'
+ 10.2 '\newpage'
+ 10.3 '\enlargethispage'
+ 10.4 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak'
+11 Footnotes
+ 11.1 '\footnote'
+ 11.2 '\footnotemark'
+ 11.3 '\footnotetext'
+ 11.4 Footnotes in section headings
+ 11.5 Footnotes in a table
+ 11.6 Footnotes of footnotes
+12 Definitions
+ 12.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand'
+ 12.2 '\providecommand'
+ 12.3 '\makeatletter' & '\makeatother'
+ 12.4 '\@ifstar'
+ 12.5 '\newcounter': Allocating a counter
+ 12.6 '\newlength'
+ 12.7 '\newsavebox'
+ 12.8 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
+ 12.9 '\newtheorem'
+ 12.10 '\newfont'
+ 12.11 '\protect'
+ 12.12 '\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend'
+13 Counters
+ 13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
+ 13.2 '\usecounter'
+ 13.3 '\value'
+ 13.4 '\setcounter'
+ 13.5 '\addtocounter'
+ 13.6 '\refstepcounter'
+ 13.7 '\stepcounter'
+ 13.8 '\day' & '\month' & '\year'
+14 Lengths
+ 14.1 Units of length
+ 14.2 '\setlength'
+ 14.3 '\addtolength'
+ 14.4 '\settodepth'
+ 14.5 '\settoheight'
+ 14.6 '\settowidth'
+15 Making paragraphs
+ 15.1 '\par'
+ 15.2 '\indent' & '\noindent'
+ 15.3 '\parindent' & '\parskip'
+ 15.4 Marginal notes
+16 Math formulas
+ 16.1 Subscripts & superscripts
+ 16.2 Math symbols
+ 16.2.1 Blackboard bold
+ 16.2.2 Calligraphic
+ 16.2.3 '\boldmath' & '\unboldmath'
+ 16.2.4 Dots, horizontal or vertical
+ 16.3 Math functions
+ 16.4 Math accents
+ 16.5 Over- and Underlining
+ 16.6 Spacing in math mode
+ 16.6.1 '\smash'
+ 16.6.2 '\phantom' & '\vphantom' & '\hphantom'
+ 16.7 Math miscellany
+ 16.7.1 Colon character ':' & '\colon'
+ 16.7.2 '\*'
+ 16.7.3 '\frac'
+ 16.7.4 '\left' & '\right'
+ 16.7.5 '\sqrt'
+ 16.7.6 '\stackrel'
+17 Modes
+ 17.1 '\ensuremath'
+18 Page styles
+ 18.1 '\maketitle'
+ 18.2 '\pagenumbering'
+ 18.3 '\pagestyle'
+ 18.4 '\thispagestyle'
+19 Spaces
+ 19.1 '\enspace' & '\quad' & '\qquad'
+ 19.2 '\hspace'
+ 19.3 '\hfill'
+ 19.4 '\hss'
+ 19.5 '\spacefactor'
+ 19.5.1 '\@'
+ 19.5.2 '\frenchspacing'
+ 19.5.3 '\normalsfcodes'
+ 19.6 Backslash-space, '\ '
+ 19.7 '~'
+ 19.8 '\thinspace' & '\negthinspace'
+ 19.9 '\/'
+ 19.10 '\hrulefill' & '\dotfill'
+ 19.11 '\bigskip' & '\medskip' & '\smallskip'
+ 19.12 '\bigbreak' & '\medbreak' & '\smallbreak'
+ 19.13 '\strut'
+ 19.14 '\vspace'
+ 19.15 '\vfill'
+ 19.16 '\addvspace'
+20 Boxes
+ 20.1 '\mbox' & '\makebox'
+ 20.2 '\fbox' & '\framebox'
+ 20.3 '\parbox'
+ 20.4 '\raisebox'
+ 20.5 '\sbox' & '\savebox'
+ 20.6 'lrbox'
+ 20.7 '\usebox'
+21 Color
+ 21.1 'color' package options
+ 21.2 Color models
+ 21.3 Commands for color
+ 21.3.1 Define colors
+ 21.3.2 Colored text
+ 21.3.3 Colored boxes
+ 21.3.4 Colored pages
+22 Graphics
+ 22.1 'graphics' package options
+ 22.2 'graphics' package configuration
+ 22.2.1 '\graphicspath'
+ 22.2.2 '\DeclareGraphicsExtensions'
+ 22.2.3 '\DeclareGraphicsRule'
+ 22.3 Commands for graphics
+ 22.3.1 '\includegraphics'
+ 22.3.2 '\rotatebox'
+ 22.3.3 '\scalebox'
+ 22.3.4 '\resizebox'
+23 Special insertions
+ 23.1 Reserved characters
+ 23.2 Upper and lower case
+ 23.3 Symbols by font position
+ 23.4 Text symbols
+ 23.5 Accents
+ 23.6 Additional Latin letters
+ 23.7 '\rule'
+ 23.8 '\today'
+24 Splitting the input
+ 24.1 '\endinput'
+ 24.2 '\include' & '\includeonly'
+ 24.3 '\input'
+25 Front/back matter
+ 25.1 Table of contents etc.
+ 25.1.1 '\addcontentsline'
+ 25.1.2 '\addtocontents'
+ 25.1.3 '\nofiles'
+ 25.2 Indexes
+ 25.2.1 '\index'
+ 25.2.2 'makeindex'
+ 25.2.3 '\printindex'
+ 25.3 Glossaries
+ 25.3.1 '\newglossaryentry'
+ 25.3.2 '\gls'
+26 Letters
+ 26.1 '\address'
+ 26.2 '\cc'
+ 26.3 '\closing'
+ 26.4 '\encl'
+ 26.5 '\location'
+ 26.6 '\makelabels'
+ 26.7 '\name'
+ 26.8 '\opening'
+ 26.9 '\ps'
+ 26.10 '\signature'
+ 26.11 '\telephone'
+27 Terminal input/output
+ 27.1 '\typein'
+ 27.2 '\typeout'
+28 Command line
+ 28.1 Command line options
+ 28.2 Command line input
+ 28.3 Recovering from errors
+Appendix A Document templates
+ A.1 'beamer' template
+ A.2 'article' template
+ A.3 'book' template
+ A.4 Larger 'book' template
+ A.5 'tugboat' template
+Index
+LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
+***************************************
+
+This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of October
+2018) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
+
+1 About this document
+*********************
+
+This is an unofficial reference manual for the LaTeX2e document
+preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX typesetting
+program (*note Overview::).
+
+ This document's home page is
+<https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman>. There you can get
+the sources, subscribe to the mailing list or read its archives, see
+other infrastructure, and get the current output in various formats. In
+particular, the output comes in two web formats. Probably the most
+convenient one, shown at <http://latexref.xyz/>, has pages for each
+topic and so is good for a quick lookup; see also the note there about
+easy-to-remember links. The other, shown at
+<http://svn.gnu.org.ua/viewvc/latexrefman/trunk/latex2e.html?view=co>,
+has all the information on single page.
+
+ In this document, we will mostly just use 'LaTeX' rather than
+'LaTeX2e', since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was frozen decades
+ago.
+
+ LaTeX is currently maintained by a group of volunteers
+(<http://latex-project.org>). The official documentation written by the
+LaTeX project is available from their web site. This document is
+completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the LaTeX
+maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything else about this
+document to them. Instead, please send all comments to
+<latexrefman@tug.org>.
+
+ This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources
+of information about LaTeX, at all levels. Here are a few
+introductions.
+
+<http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr>
+ Two pages of recommended references to LaTeX documentation.
+
+<http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc>
+ Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
+
+<http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide>
+ The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of LaTeX.
+ Many other guides by many other people are also available,
+ independent of LaTeX itself; one such is the next item:
+
+<http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort>
+ A short introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages.
+
+<http://tug.org/begin.html>
+ Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX, with further
+ references.
+
+2 Overview of LaTeX
+*******************
+
+LaTeX is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally created
+by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers
+(<http://latex-project.org>). It is widely used, particularly for
+complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics.
+
+ A LaTeX user writes an input file containing text along with
+interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text
+should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands
+that interface with Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program (the
+technical term is that LaTeX is a "macro package" for the TeX engine).
+The user produces the output document by giving that input file to the
+TeX engine.
+
+ The term LaTeX is also sometimes used to mean the language in which
+the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
+available to a LaTeX user.
+
+ The name LaTeX is short for "Lamport TeX". It is pronounced LAH-teck
+or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document, produce the
+logo with '\LaTeX'. Where use of the logo is not sensible, such as in
+plain text, write it as 'LaTeX'.
+
+2.1 Starting and ending
+=======================
+
+LaTeX files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
+and ending. This is a small example.
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \begin{document}
+ Hello, \LaTeX\ world.
+ \end{document}
+
+Every LaTeX document has a '\begin{document}' line and an
+'\end{document}' line.
+
+Here, the 'article' is the "document class". It is implemented in a
+file 'article.cls'. You can use any document class on your system. A
+few document classes are defined by LaTeX itself, and vast array of
+others are widely available. *Note Document classes::.
+
+ You can include other LaTeX commands between the '\documentclass' and
+the '\begin{document}' commands. This area is called the "preamble".
+
+ The '\begin{document}', '\end{document}' pair defines an
+"environment"; the 'document' environment (and no others) is required in
+all LaTeX documents (*note document::). LaTeX make available to you
+many environments that are documented here (*note Environments::). Many
+more are available to you from external packages, most importantly those
+available at CTAN (*note CTAN::).
+
+ The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output
+from a LaTeX input file.
+
+2.2 Output files
+================
+
+LaTeX produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files. The
+main output file's name ends in either '.dvi' or '.pdf'.
+
+'.dvi'
+ If LaTeX is invoked with the system command 'latex' then it
+ produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension '.dvi'. You can
+ view this file with a command such as 'xdvi', or convert it to a
+ PostScript '.ps' file with 'dvips' or to a Portable Document Format
+ '.pdf' file with 'dvipdfmx'. The contents of the file can be
+ dumped in human-readable form with 'dvitype'. A vast array of
+ other DVI utility programs are available
+ (<http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware>).
+
+'.pdf'
+ If LaTeX is invoked via the system command 'pdflatex', among other
+ commands (*note TeX engines::), then the main output is a Portable
+ Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a self-contained
+ file, with all fonts and images included.
+
+ LaTeX also produces at least two additional files.
+
+'.log'
+ This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
+ loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps
+ additional information for any errors.
+
+'.aux'
+ Auxiliary information is used by LaTeX for things such as cross
+ references. For example, the first time that LaTeX finds a forward
+ reference--a cross reference to something that has not yet appeared
+ in the source--it will appear in the output as a doubled question
+ mark '??'. When the referred-to spot does eventually appear in the
+ source then LaTeX writes its location information to this '.aux'
+ file. On the next invocation, LaTeX reads the location information
+ from this file and uses it to resolve the reference, replacing the
+ double question mark with the remembered location.
+
+ LaTeX may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename
+ending. These include a '.lof' file that is used to make a list of
+figures, a '.lot' file used to make a list of tables, and a '.toc' file
+used to make a table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::). A
+particular class may create others; the list is open-ended.
+
+2.3 TeX engines
+===============
+
+LaTeX is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a TeX
+implementation (*note Overview::). This section gives a terse overview
+of the main programs (see also *note Command line::).
+
+'latex'
+'pdflatex'
+ In TeX Live (<http://tug.org/texlive>), if LaTeX is invoked via
+ either the system command 'latex' or 'pdflatex', then the pdfTeX
+ engine is run (<http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex>). When invoked as
+ 'latex', the main output is a '.dvi' file; as 'pdflatex', the main
+ output is a '.pdf' file.
+
+ pdfTeX incorporates the e-TeX extensions to Knuth's original
+ program (<http://ctan.org/pkg/etex>), including additional
+ programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty
+ of extensions of its own. e-TeX is available on its own as the
+ system command 'etex', but this is plain TeX (and produces '.dvi').
+
+ In other TeX distributions, 'latex' may invoke e-TeX rather than
+ pdfTeX. In any case, the e-TeX extensions can be assumed to be
+ available in LaTeX.
+
+'lualatex'
+ If LaTeX is invoked via the system command 'lualatex', the LuaTeX
+ engine is run (<http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex>). This program allows
+ code written in the scripting language Lua (<http://luatex.org>) to
+ interact with TeX's typesetting. LuaTeX handles UTF-8 Unicode
+ input natively, can handle OpenType and TrueType fonts, and
+ produces a '.pdf' file by default. There is also 'dvilualatex' to
+ produce a '.dvi' file, but this is rarely used.
+
+'xelatex'
+ If LaTeX is invoked with the system command 'xelatex', the XeTeX
+ engine is run (<http://tug.org/xetex>). Like LuaTeX, XeTeX
+ natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType fonts,
+ though the implementation is completely different, mainly using
+ external libraries instead of internal code. XeTeX produces a
+ '.pdf' file as output; it does not support DVI output.
+
+ Internally, XeTeX creates an '.xdv' file, a variant of DVI, and
+ translates that to PDF using the ('x')'dvipdfmx' program, but this
+ process is automatic. The '.xdv' file is only useful for
+ debugging.
+
+ Other variants of LaTeX and TeX exist, e.g., to provide additional
+support for Japanese and other languages ([u]pTeX,
+<http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex>, <http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex>).
+
+2.4 LaTeX command syntax
+========================
+
+In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a backslash
+character, '\'. The name itself then consists of either (a) a string of
+letters or (b) a single non-letter.
+
+ LaTeX commands names are case sensitive so that '\pagebreak' differs
+from '\Pagebreak' (the latter is not a standard command). Most commands
+are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all commands in the same
+case as they are defined.
+
+ A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These
+arguments may be either required or optional. Required arguments are
+contained in curly braces, '{...}'. Optional arguments are contained in
+square brackets, '[...]'. Generally, but not universally, if the
+command accepts an optional argument, it comes first, before any
+required arguments.
+
+ Inside of an optional argument, to use the character close square
+bracket (']') hide it inside curly braces, as in '\item[closing bracket
+{]}]'. Similarly, if an optional argument comes last, with no required
+argument after it, then to make the first character of the following
+text be an open square bracket, hide it inside curly braces.
+
+ Some of LaTeX's commands are a "declaration". Such a command changes
+the value the meaning of some other command or parameter. For instance,
+the '\mainmatter' declaration changes the typesetting of page numbers
+from roman numerals to arabic (*note \frontmatter & \mainmatter &
+\backmatter::).
+
+ LaTeX has the convention that some commands have a '*' form that is
+related to the form without a '*', such as '\chapter' and '\chapter*'.
+The exact difference in behavior varies from command to command.
+
+ This manual describes all accepted options and '*'-forms for the
+commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs).
+
+2.5 Environment
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{ENVIRONMENT NAME}
+ ...
+ \end{ENVIRONMENT NAME}
+
+ An area of LaTeX source, inside of which there is a distinct
+behavior. For instance, for poetry in LaTeX put the lines between
+'\begin{verse}' and '\end{verse}'.
+
+ \begin{verse}
+ There once was a man from Nantucket \\
+ ...
+ \end{verse}
+
+ *Note Environments:: for a list of environments. Particularly
+notable is that every LaTeX document must have a 'document' environment,
+a '\begin{document} ... \end{document}' pair.
+
+ The ENVIRONMENT NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
+end. This includes the case where ENVIRONMENT NAME ends in a
+star ('*'); both the '\begin' and '\end' texts must include the star.
+
+ Environments may have arguments, including optional arguments. This
+example produces a table. The first argument is optional (and causes
+the table to be aligned on its top row) while the second argument is
+required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
+
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{r|l}
+ ... rows of table ...
+ \end{tabular}
+
+2.6 CTAN: the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
+===============================================
+
+The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network, CTAN, is the TeX and LaTeX
+community's repository of free material. It is a set of Internet sites
+around the world that offer material related to LaTeX for download.
+Visit CTAN on the web at <https://ctan.org>.
+
+ This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
+typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
+person or a small number of people. For instance, many publishers have
+a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher's
+specifications.
+
+ In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features
+such as search by name or by functionality.
+
+ CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites. One of the
+sites is the core. This site actively manages the material, for
+instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages. It is hosted
+by the German TeX group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the world help out
+by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their collections with the
+core site and then in turn making their copies publicly available. This
+gives users close to their location better access and relieves the load
+on the core site. The list of mirrors is at <https://ctan.org/mirrors>.
+
+3 Document classes
+******************
+
+The document's overall class is defined with this command, which is
+normally the first command in a LaTeX source file.
+
+ \documentclass[OPTIONS]{CLASS}
+
+ The following document CLASS names are built into LaTeX. (Many other
+document classes are available as separate packages; *note Overview::.)
+
+'article'
+ For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general
+ use.
+
+'book'
+ Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
+ matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
+ (*note Front/back matter::).
+
+'letter'
+ Mail, optionally including mailing labels (*note Letters::).
+
+'report'
+ For documents of length between an 'article' and a 'book', such as
+ technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
+
+'slides'
+ For slide presentations--rarely used today. In its place the
+ 'beamer' package is perhaps the most prevalent (*note beamer
+ template::).
+
+ Standard OPTIONS are described in the next section.
+
+3.1 Document class options
+==========================
+
+You can specify "global options" or "class options" to the
+'\documentclass' command by enclosing them in square brackets. To
+specify more than one OPTION, separate them with a comma.
+
+ \documentclass[OPTION1,OPTION2,...]{CLASS}
+
+ Here is the list of the standard class options.
+
+ All of the standard classes except 'slides' accept the following
+options for selecting the typeface size (default is '10pt'):
+
+ 10pt 11pt 12pt
+
+ All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the
+paper size (these show height by width):
+
+'a4paper'
+ 210 by 297mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
+
+'a5paper'
+ 148 by 210mm (about 5.8 by 8.3 inches)
+
+'b5paper'
+ 176 by 250mm (about 6.9 by 9.8 inches)
+
+'executivepaper'
+ 7.25 by 10.5 inches
+
+'legalpaper'
+ 8.5 by 14 inches
+
+'letterpaper'
+ 8.5 by 11 inches (the default)
+
+ When using one of the engines pdfLaTeX, LuaLaTeX, or XeLaTeX (*note
+TeX engines::), options other than 'letterpaper' set the print area but
+you must also set the physical paper size. One way to do that is to put
+'\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth' and '\pdfpageheight=\paperheight' in your
+document's preamble.
+
+ The 'geometry' package provides flexible ways of setting the print
+area and physical page size.
+
+ Miscellaneous other options:
+
+'draft'
+'final'
+ Mark ('draft') or do not mark ('final') overfull boxes with a black
+ box in the margin; default is 'final'.
+
+'fleqn'
+ Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
+
+'landscape'
+ Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
+
+'leqno'
+ Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the
+ right side.
+
+'openbib'
+ Use "open" bibliography format.
+
+'titlepage'
+'notitlepage'
+ Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title
+ information and for the abstract also, if there is one. The
+ default for the 'report' class is 'titlepage', for the other
+ classes it is 'notitlepage'.
+
+ The following options are not available with the 'slides' class.
+
+'onecolumn'
+'twocolumn'
+ Typeset in one or two columns; default is 'onecolumn'.
+
+'oneside'
+'twoside'
+ Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is 'oneside', except that
+ in the 'book' class the default is 'twoside'.
+
+ For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page. For
+ two-sided printing, the '\evensidemargin' ('\oddsidemargin')
+ parameter determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages
+ between the left side of the page and the text's left margin, with
+ '\oddsidemargin' being 40% of the difference between '\paperwidth'
+ and '\textwidth', and '\evensidemargin' is the remainder.
+
+'openright'
+'openany'
+ Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default
+ is 'openright' for 'book', and 'openany' for 'report'.
+
+ The 'slides' class offers the option 'clock' for printing the time at
+the bottom of each note.
+
+3.2 Additional packages
+=======================
+
+Load a package PKG, with the package options given in the
+comma-separated list OPTIONS, as here.
+
+ \usepackage[OPTIONS]{PKG}.
+
+ To specify more than one package you can separate them with a comma,
+as in '\usepackage{PKG1,PKG2,...}', or use multiple '\usepackage'
+commands.
+
+ Any options given in the '\documentclass' command that are unknown to
+the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
+'\usepackage'.
+
+3.3 Class and package construction
+==================================
+
+You can create new document classes and new packages. For instance, if
+your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a standard
+header for each page, then you could create a new class 'smcmemo.cls'
+and begin your documents with '\documentclass{smcmemo}'.
+
+ What separates a package from a document class is that the commands
+in a package are useful across classes while those in a document class
+are specific to that class. Thus, a command to set page headers is for
+a package while a command to make the page headers say 'Memo from the
+SMC Math Department' is for a class.
+
+ Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign '@' as a
+character in command names without having to surround the code
+containing that command with '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother'. *Note
+\makeatletter & \makeatother::. This allow you to create commands that
+users will not accidentally redefine. Another technique is to preface
+class- or package-specific commands with some string to prevent your
+class or package from interfering with others. For instance, the class
+'smcmemo' might have commands '\smc@tolist', '\smc@fromlist', etc.
+
+3.3.1 Class and package structure
+---------------------------------
+
+A class file or package file typically has four parts.
+ 1. In the "identification part", the file says that it is a LaTeX
+ package or class and describes itself, using the '\NeedsTeXFormat'
+ and '\ProvidesClass' or '\ProvidesPackage' commands.
+
+ 2. The "preliminary declarations part" declares some commands and can
+ also load other files. Usually these commands will be those needed
+ for the code used in the next part. For example, an 'smcmemo'
+ class might be called with an option to read in a file with a list
+ of people for the to-head, as '\documentclass[mathto]{smcmemo}',
+ and therefore needs to define a command
+ '\newcommand{\setto}[1]{\def\@tolist{#1}}' used in that file.
+
+ 3. In the "handle options part" the class or package declares and
+ processes its options. Class options allow a user to start their
+ document as '\documentclass[OPTION LIST]{CLASS NAME}', to modify
+ the behavior of the class. An example is when you declare
+ '\documentclass[11pt]{article}' to set the default document font
+ size.
+
+ 4. Finally, in the "more declarations part" the class or package
+ usually does most of its work: declaring new variables, commands
+ and fonts, and loading other files.
+
+ Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as 'stub.cls'
+where LaTeX can find it, for example in the same directory as the '.tex'
+file.
+
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+ \ProvidesClass{stub}[2017/07/06 stub to start building classes from]
+ \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+ \ProcessOptions\relax
+ \LoadClass{article}
+
+It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
+passing them all to the 'article' class, and then loads the 'article'
+class to provide the basis for this class's code.
+
+ For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
+Class Guide, at
+<http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf> (much of
+the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
+<https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf>.
+
+3.3.2 Class and package commands
+--------------------------------
+
+These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
+
+'\AtBeginDvi{specials}'
+ Save in a box register things that are written to the '.dvi' file
+ at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
+
+'\AtEndOfClass{CODE}'
+'\AtEndOfPackage{CODE}'
+ Hook to insert CODE to be executed when LaTeX finishes processing
+ the current class or package. You can use these hooks multiple
+ times; the 'code' will be executed in the order that you called it.
+ See also *note \AtBeginDocument::.
+
+'\CheckCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
+'\CheckCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
+ Like '\newcommand' (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::) but does
+ not define CMD; instead it checks that the current definition of
+ CMD is exactly as given by DEFINITION and is or is not "long" as
+ expected. A long command is a command that accepts '\par' within
+ an argument. The CMD command is expected to be long with the
+ unstarred version of '\CheckCommand'. Raises an error when the
+ check fails. This allows you to check before you start redefining
+ 'cmd' yourself that no other package has already redefined this
+ command.
+
+'\ClassError{CLASS NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}'
+'\PackageError{PACKAGE NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}'
+'\ClassWarning{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
+'\PackageWarning{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
+'\ClassWarningNoLine{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
+'\PackageWarningNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}'
+'\ClassInfo{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
+'\PackageInfo{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
+'\ClassInfoNoLine{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
+'\PackageInfoNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}'
+ Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.
+
+ For '\ClassError' and '\PackageError' the message is ERROR TEXT,
+ followed by TeX's '?' error prompt. If the user then asks for help
+ by typing 'h', they see the HELP TEXT.
+
+ The four warning commands are similar except that they write
+ WARNING TEXT on the screen with no error prompt. The four info
+ commands write INFO TEXT only in the transcript file. The 'NoLine'
+ versions do not show the number of the line generating the message,
+ while the other versions do show that number.
+
+ To format the messages, including the HELP TEXT: use '\protect' to
+ stop a command from expanding, get a line break with
+ '\MessageBreak', and get a space with '\space' when a space
+ character does not allow it, like after a command. Note that LaTeX
+ appends a period to the messages.
+
+'\CurrentOption'
+ Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can
+ only be used within the CODE argument of either '\DeclareOption' or
+ '\DeclareOption*'.
+
+'\DeclareOption{OPTION}{CODE}'
+'\DeclareOption*{CODE}'
+ Make an option available to a user to invoke in their
+ '\documentclass' command. For example, the 'smcmemo' class could
+ have an option '\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}' allowing users to
+ put the institutional logo on the first page. The class file must
+ contain '\DeclareOption{logo}{CODE}' (and later,
+ '\ProcessOptions').
+
+ If you request an option that has not been declared, by default
+ this will produce a warning like 'Unused global option(s):
+ [badoption].' Change this behaviour with the starred version
+ '\DeclareOption*{CODE}'. For example, many classes extend an
+ existing class, using a declaration such as '\LoadClass{article}',
+ and for passing extra options to the underlying class use code such
+ as this.
+
+ \DeclareOption*{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
+ }
+
+ Another example is that the class 'smcmemo' may allow users to keep
+ lists of memo recipients in external files. Then the user could
+ invoke '\documentclass[math]{smcmemo}' and it will read the file
+ 'math.memo'. This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
+ passes the option to the 'article' class.
+
+ \DeclareOption*{\InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.memo}{}{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}}
+
+'\DeclareRobustCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
+'\DeclareRobustCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}'
+ Like '\newcommand' and '\newcommand*' (*note \newcommand &
+ \renewcommand::) but these declare a robust command, even if some
+ code within the DEFINITION is fragile. (For a discussion of robust
+ and fragile commands *note \protect::.) Use this command to define
+ new robust commands or to redefine existing commands and make them
+ robust. Unlike '\newcommand' these do not give an error if macro
+ CMD already exists; instead, a log message is put into the
+ transcript file if a command is redefined.
+
+ Commands defined this way are a bit less efficient than those
+ defined using '\newcommand' so unless the command's data is fragile
+ and the command is used within a moving argument, use
+ '\newcommand'.
+
+ The 'etoolbox' package offers the commands '\newrobustcmd',
+ '\newrobustcmd*', as well as the commands '\renewrobustcmd',
+ '\renewrobustcmd*', and the commands '\providerobustcmd', and
+ '\providerobustcmd*'. These are similar to '\newcommand',
+ '\newcommand*', '\renewcommand', '\renewcommand*',
+ '\providecommand', and '\providecommand*', but define a robust CMD
+ with two advantages as compared to '\DeclareRobustCommand':
+ 1. They use the low-level e-TeX protection mechanism rather than
+ the higher level LaTeX '\protect' mechanism, so they do not
+ incur the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
+ 2. They make the same distinction between '\new...', '\renew...',
+ and '\provide...', as the standard commands, so they do not
+ just make a log message when you redefine CMD that already
+ exists, in that case you need to use either '\renew...' or
+ '\provide...' or you get an error.
+
+'\IfFileExists{FILE NAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
+'\InputIfFileExists{FILE NAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
+ Execute TRUE CODE if LaTeX finds the file 'FILE NAME' or FALSE CODE
+ otherwise. In the first case it executing TRUE CODE and then
+ inputs the file. Thus the command
+
+ \IfFileExists{img.pdf}{%
+ \includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{!! img.pdf not found}
+
+ will include the graphic 'img.pdf' if it is found and otherwise
+ give a warning.
+
+ This command looks for the file in all search paths that LaTeX
+ uses, not only in the current directory. To look only in the
+ current directory do something like '\IfFileExists{./filename}{TRUE
+ CODE}{FALSE CODE}'. If you ask for a filename without a '.tex'
+ extension then LaTeX will first look for the file by appending the
+ '.tex'; for more on how LaTeX handles file extensions see *note
+ \input::.
+
+'\LoadClass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+'\LoadClassWithOptions{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+ Load a class, as with '\documentclass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS
+ NAME}[RELEASE INFO]'. An example is
+ '\LoadClass[twoside]{article}'.
+
+ The OPTIONS LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+ RELEASE DATE is optional. If present it must have the form
+ YYYY/MM/DD.
+
+ If you request a RELEASE DATE and the date of the package installed
+ on your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the screen and
+ in the log like this.
+
+ You have requested, on input line 4, version `2038/01/19' of
+ document class article, but only version `2014/09/29 v1.4h
+ Standard LaTeX document class' is available.
+
+ The command version '\LoadClassWithOptions' uses the list of
+ options for the current class. This means it ignores any options
+ passed to it via '\PassOptionsToClass'. This is a convenience
+ command that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the
+ standard 'article' class, without having to track which options
+ were passed.
+
+'\ExecuteOptions{OPTIONS-LIST}'
+ For each option OPTION in the OPTIONS-LIST, in order, this command
+ executes the command '\ds@OPTION'. If this command is not defined
+ then that option is silently ignored.
+
+ It can be used to provide a default option list before
+ '\ProcessOptions'. For example, if in a class file you want the
+ default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
+ '\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax'.
+
+'\NeedsTeXFormat{FORMAT}[FORMAT DATE]'
+ Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often
+ issued as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
+ '\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}'. When a document using that class is
+ processed, the format name given here must match the format that is
+ actually being run (including that the FORMAT string is case
+ sensitive). If it does not match then execution stops with an
+ error like 'This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.'
+
+ To specify a version of the format that you know to have certain
+ features, include the optional FORMAT DATE on which those features
+ were implemented. If present it must be in the form 'YYYY/MM/DD'.
+ If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
+ FORMAT DATE then you get a warning like this.
+
+ You have requested release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only
+ release `2016/02/01' is available.
+
+'\OptionNotUsed'
+ Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be
+ used within the CODE argument of either '\DeclareOption' or
+ '\DeclareOption*'.
+
+'\PassOptionsToClass{OPTION LIST}{CLASS NAME}'
+'\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTION LIST}{PACKAGE NAME}'
+ Adds the options in the comma-separated list OPTION LIST to the
+ options used by any future '\RequirePackage' or '\usepackage'
+ command for package PACKAGE NAME or the class CLASS NAME.
+
+ The reason for these commands is: you may load a package any number
+ of times with no options but if you want options then you may only
+ supply them when you first load the package. Loading a package
+ with options more than once will get you an error like 'Option
+ clash for package foo.' (LaTeX throws an error even if there is no
+ conflict between the options.)
+
+ If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can
+ collapse that to once, for example replacing the two
+ '\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}' and
+ '\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}' with the single command
+ '\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}'.
+
+ However, imagine that you are loading 'firstpkg' and inside that
+ package it loads 'secondpkg', and you need the second package to be
+ loaded with option 'draft'. Then before doing the first package
+ you must queue up the options for the second package, like this.
+
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{secondpkg}
+ \RequirePackage{firstpkg}
+
+ (If 'firstpkg.sty' loads an option in conflict with what you want
+ then you may have to alter its source.)
+
+ These commands are useful for general users as well as class and
+ package writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the
+ 'graphicx' package with the option 'draft' and also wants to use a
+ class 'foo' that loads the 'graphicx' package, but without that
+ option. The user could start their LaTeX file with
+ '\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\documentclass{foo}'.
+
+'\ProcessOptions'
+'\ProcessOptions*\@OPTIONS'
+ Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked.
+ Include it in the class file as '\ProcessOptions\relax' (because of
+ the existence of the starred command).
+
+ Options come in two types. "Local options" have been specified for
+ this particular package in the OPTIONS argument of
+ '\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTIONS}', '\usepackage[OPTIONS]', or
+ '\RequirePackage[OPTIONS]'. "Global options" are those given by
+ the class user in '\documentclass[OPTIONS]' (If an option is
+ specified both locally and globally then it is local.)
+
+ When '\ProcessOptions' is called for a package 'pkg.sty', the
+ following happens:
+ 1. For each option OPTION so far declared with '\DeclareOption',
+ it looks to see if that option is either a global or a local
+ option for 'pkg'. If so then it executes the declared code.
+ This is done in the order in which these options were given in
+ 'pkg.sty'.
+ 2. For each remaining local option, it executes the command
+ '\ds@'OPTION if it has been defined somewhere (other than by a
+ '\DeclareOption'); otherwise, it executes the default option
+ code given in '\DeclareOption*'. If no default option code
+ has been declared then it gives an error message. This is
+ done in the order in which these options were specified.
+
+ When '\ProcessOptions' is called for a class it works in the same
+ way except that all options are local, and the default CODE for
+ '\DeclareOption*' is '\OptionNotUsed' rather than an error.
+
+ The starred version '\ProcessOptions*' executes the options in the
+ order specified in the calling commands, rather than in the order
+ of declaration in the class or package. For a package this means
+ that the global options are processed first.
+
+'\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
+'\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+'\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
+'\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+ Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen
+ and the log file.
+
+ When you load a class or package, for example with
+ '\documentclass{smcmemo}' or '\usepackage{test}', LaTeX inputs a
+ file. If the name of the file does not match the class or package
+ name declared in it then you get a warning. Thus, if you invoke
+ '\documentclass{smcmemo}', and the file 'smcmemo.cls' has the
+ statement '\ProvidesClass{xxx}' then you get a warning like 'You
+ have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document class
+ provides 'xxx'.' This warning does not prevent LaTeX from
+ processing the rest of the class file normally.
+
+ If you include the optional argument then you must include a date,
+ before any spaces, of the form 'YYYY/MM/DD'. The rest of the
+ optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally
+ identifies the class, and is written to the screen during
+ compilation and to the log file. Thus, if your file 'smcmemo.cls'
+ contains the line '\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo
+ class]' and your document's first line is '\documentclass{smcmemo}'
+ then you will see 'Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo
+ class'.
+
+ The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to
+ ask to be warned if the version of the class or package is earlier
+ than RELEASE DATE. For instance, a user could enter
+ '\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]' or
+ '\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]' to require a class or package with
+ certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier
+ than the given date. (Although, in practice package users only
+ rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)
+
+'\ProvidesFile{FILE NAME}[ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
+ Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
+ configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in
+ that file and you get in the log a string like 'File: test.config
+ 2017/10/12 config file for test.cls' for FILE NAME equal to
+ 'test.config' and ADDITIONAL INFORMATION equal to '2017/10/12
+ config file for test.cls'.
+
+'\RequirePackage[OPTION LIST]{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+'\RequirePackageWithOptions{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]'
+ Load a package, like the command '\usepackage' (*note Additional
+ packages::). The LaTeX development team strongly recommends use of
+ these commands over Plain TeX's '\input'; see the Class Guide. An
+ example is '\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}'.
+
+ The OPTION LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+ RELEASE DATE, if present, must have the form YYYY/MM/DD. If the
+ release date of the package as installed on your system is earlier
+ than RELEASE DATE then you get a warning like 'You have requested,
+ on input line 9, version `2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but only
+ version `2000/01/01' is available'.
+
+ The '\RequirePackageWithOptions' version uses the list of options
+ for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to
+ it via '\PassOptionsToClass'. This is a convenience command to
+ allow easily building classes on existing ones without having to
+ track which options were passed.
+
+ The difference between '\usepackage' and '\RequirePackage' is
+ small. The '\usepackage' command is intended for the document file
+ while '\RequirePackage' is intended for package and class files.
+ Thus, using '\usepackage' before the '\documentclass' command
+ causes LaTeX to give error like '\usepackage before
+ \documentclass', but you can use '\RequirePackage' there.
+
+4 Fonts
+*******
+
+Two important aspects of selecting a "font" are specifying a size and a
+style. The LaTeX commands for doing this are described here.
+
+4.1 Font styles
+===============
+
+The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
+
+ In the table below the listed commands, the '\text...' commands, is
+used with an argument, as in '\textit{TEXT}'. This is the preferred
+form. But shown after it, in parenthesis, is the corresponding
+declaration form, which is sometimes useful. This form takes no
+arguments, as in '{\itshape TEXT}'. The scope of the declaration form
+lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group.
+In addition, each has an environment form such as
+'\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}'.
+
+ These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form,
+are cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying
+either of '\sffamily\bfseries' or '\bfseries\sffamily'.
+
+ One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert
+italic corrections if needed (*note \/::). Specifically, they insert
+the italic correction unless the following character is in the list
+'\nocorrlist', which by default consists of a period and a comma. To
+suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use '\nocorr' at
+the start or end of the command argument, such as '\textit{\nocorr
+text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'.
+
+'\textrm (\rmfamily)'
+ Roman.
+
+'\textit (\itshape)'
+ Italics.
+
+'\textmd (\mdseries)'
+ Medium weight (default).
+
+'\textbf (\bfseries)'
+ Boldface.
+
+'\textup (\upshape)'
+ Upright (default).
+
+'\textsl (\slshape)'
+ Slanted.
+
+'\textsf (\sffamily)'
+ Sans serif.
+
+'\textsc (\scshape)'
+ Small caps.
+
+'\texttt (\ttfamily)'
+ Typewriter.
+
+'\textnormal (\normalfont)'
+ Main document font.
+
+ Although it also changes fonts, the '\emph{TEXT}' command is
+semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
+substitute for '\textit'. For example, '\emph{START TEXT \emph{MIDDLE
+TEXT} END TEXT}' will result in the START TEXT and END TEXT in italics,
+but MIDDLE TEXT will be in roman.
+
+ LaTeX also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
+switch to the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative. They are used
+as declarations: '{\CMD...}' instead of '\CMD{...}'.
+
+ (The unconditional commands below are an older version of font
+switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most
+circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
+what you want.)
+
+'\bf'
+ Switch to bold face.
+
+'\cal'
+ Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
+
+'\it'
+ Italics.
+
+'\rm'
+ Roman.
+
+'\sc'
+ Small caps.
+
+'\sf'
+ Sans serif.
+
+'\sl'
+ Slanted (oblique).
+
+'\tt'
+ Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
+
+ The '\em' command is the unconditional version of '\emph'.
+
+ The following commands are for use in math mode. They are not
+cumulative, so '\mathbf{\mathit{SYMBOL}}' does not create a boldface and
+italic SYMBOL; instead, it will just be in italics. This is because
+typically math symbols need consistent typographic treatment, regardless
+of the surrounding environment.
+
+'\mathrm'
+ Roman, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathbf'
+ Boldface, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathsf'
+ Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathtt'
+ Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathit'
+'(\mit)'
+ Italics, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathnormal'
+ For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration.
+
+'\mathcal'
+ Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.
+
+ In addition, the command '\mathversion{bold}' can be used for
+switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
+'\mathversion{normal}' restores the default.
+
+ Finally, the command '\oldstylenums{NUMERALS}' will typeset so-called
+"old-style" numerals, which have differing heights and depths (and
+sometimes widths) from the standard "lining" numerals, which all have
+the same height as uppercase letters. LaTeX's default fonts support
+this, and will respect '\textbf' (but not other styles; there are no
+italic old-style numerals in Computer Modern). Many other fonts have
+old-style numerals also; sometimes the 'textcomp' package must be
+loaded, and sometimes package options are provided to make them the
+default. FAQ entry:
+<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf>.
+
+4.2 Font sizes
+==============
+
+The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. The
+table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size used
+(in points) with the '10pt', '11pt', and '12pt' document size options,
+respectively (*note Document class options::).
+
+Command '10pt' '11pt' '12pt'
+--------------------------------------------------------
+'\tiny' 5 6 6
+'\scriptsize' 7 8 8
+'\footnotesize' 8 9 10
+'\small' 9 10 10.95
+'\normalsize' (default) 10 10.95 12
+'\large' 12 12 14.4
+'\Large' 14.4 14.4 17.28
+'\LARGE' 17.28 17.28 20.74
+'\huge' 20.74 20.74 24.88
+'\Huge' 24.88 24.88 24.88
+
+ The commands are listed here in declaration forms. You use them by
+declaring them, as with this example.
+
+ \begin{quotation} \small
+ The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao.
+ \end{quotation}
+
+The scope of the '\small' lasts until the end of the 'quotation'
+environment. It would also end at the next type style command or the
+end of the current group, so you could enclose it in extra curly braces
+'{\small We are here, we are here, we are here!}'. You can instead use
+the environment form of these commands; for instance,
+'\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'.
+
+4.3 Low-level font commands
+===========================
+
+These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
+packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
+ones.
+
+'\fontencoding{ENCODING}'
+ Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There
+ are a large number of valid encodings. The most common are 'OT1',
+ Knuth's original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
+ 'T1', also known as the Cork encoding, which has support for the
+ accented characters used by the most widespread European languages
+ (German, French, Italian, Polish and others), which allows TeX to
+ hyphenate words containing accented letters. For more, see
+ <https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide>.
+
+'\fontfamily{FAMILY}'
+ Select the font family. The web page
+ <http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/> provides one way to browse
+ through many of the fonts easily used with LaTeX. Here are
+ examples of some common families.
+
+ 'pag' Avant Garde
+ 'fvs' Bitstream Vera Sans
+ 'pbk' Bookman
+ 'bch' Charter
+ 'ccr' Computer Concrete
+ 'cmr' Computer Modern
+ 'cmss' Computer Modern Sans Serif
+ 'cmtt' Computer Modern Typewriter
+ 'pcr' Courier
+ 'phv' Helvetica
+ 'fi4' Inconsolata
+ 'lmr' Latin Modern
+ 'lmss' Latin Modern Sans
+ 'lmtt' Latin Modern Typewriter
+ 'pnc' New Century Schoolbook
+ 'ppl' Palatino
+ 'ptm' Times
+ 'uncl' Uncial
+ 'put' Utopia
+ 'pzc' Zapf Chancery
+
+'\fontseries{SERIES}'
+ Select the font series. A "series" combines a "weight" and a
+ "width". Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible
+ combinations. Some common combined series values include:
+
+ 'm' Medium (normal)
+ 'b' Bold
+ 'c' Condensed
+ 'bc' Bold condensed
+ 'bx' Bold extended
+
+ The possible values for weight, individually, are:
+
+ 'ul' Ultra light
+ 'el' Extra light
+ 'l' Light
+ 'sl' Semi light
+ 'm' Medium (normal)
+ 'sb' Semi bold
+ 'b' Bold
+ 'eb' Extra bold
+ 'ub' Ultra bold
+
+ The possible values for width, individually, are (the meaning and
+ relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces):
+
+ 'uc' Ultra condensed
+ 'ec' Extra condensed
+ 'c' Condensed
+ 'sc' Semi condensed
+ 'm' Medium
+ 'sx' Semi expanded
+ 'x' Expanded
+ 'ex' Extra expanded
+ 'ux' Ultra expanded
+
+ When forming the SERIES string from the weight and width, drop the
+ 'm' that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both
+ weight and width are 'm', in which case use just one (''m'').
+
+'\fontshape{SHAPE}'
+ Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+
+ 'n' Upright (normal)
+ 'it' Italic
+ 'sl' Slanted (oblique)
+ 'sc' Small caps
+ 'ui' Upright italics
+ 'ol' Outline
+
+ The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and
+ small caps are often missing as well.
+
+'\fontsize{SIZE}{SKIP}'
+ Set the font size and the line spacing. The unit of both
+ parameters defaults to points ('pt'). The line spacing is the
+ nominal vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline. It is
+ stored in the parameter '\baselineskip'. The default
+ '\baselineskip' for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the
+ '\fontsize'. Changing '\baselineskip' directly is inadvisable
+ since its value is reset every time a size change happens; see
+ '\baselinestretch', next.
+
+'\baselinestretch'
+ LaTeX multiplies the line spacing by the value of the
+ '\baselinestretch' parameter; the default factor is 1. A change
+ takes effect when '\selectfont' (see below) is called. You can
+ make a line skip change happen for the entire document, for
+ instance doubling it, by doing
+ '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0}' in the preamble.
+
+ However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
+ 'setspace' package. In addition to offering a number of spacing
+ options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in
+ places where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and
+ figure captions. See the package documentation.
+
+'\linespread{FACTOR}'
+ Equivalent to '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}', and
+ therefore must be followed by '\selectfont' to have any effect.
+ Best specified in the preamble, or use the 'setspace' package, as
+ just described.
+
+'\selectfont'
+ The effects of the font commands described above do not happen
+ until '\selectfont' is called, as in
+ '\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont'. It is often useful to put
+ this in a macro:
+ '\newcommand*{\myfont}{\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont}'
+ (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).
+
+'\usefont{ENC}{FAMILY}{SERIES}{SHAPE}'
+ The same as invoking '\fontencoding', '\fontfamily', '\fontseries'
+ and '\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by
+ '\selectfont'. For example:
+
+ \usefont{ot1}{cmr}{m}{n}
+
+5 Layout
+********
+
+Commands for controlling the general page layout.
+
+5.1 '\onecolumn'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \onecolumn
+
+ Start a new page and produce single-column output. If the document
+is given the class option 'onecolumn' then this is the default behavior
+(*note Document class options::). This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
+5.2 '\twocolumn'
+================
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \twocolumn
+ \twocolumn[PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT]
+
+ Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is
+given the class option 'twocolumn' then this is the default (*note
+Document class options::). This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ If the optional PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT argument is present, it is
+typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts.
+
+ These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
+
+'\columnsep'
+ The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with
+ a command such as '\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}' You must change it
+ before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good
+ place.
+
+'\columnseprule'
+ The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway
+ between the two columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that there is
+ no rule. Change it with a command such as
+ '\setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}', before the two-column
+ environment starts.
+
+'\columnwidth'
+ The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to
+ '\textwidth'. In two-column mode by default LaTeX sets the width
+ of each of the two columns to be half of '\textwidth' minus
+ '\columnsep'.
+
+ In a two-column document, the starred environments 'table*' and
+'figure*' are two columns wide, whereas the unstarred environments
+'table' and 'figure' take up only one column (*note figure:: and *note
+table::). LaTeX places starred floats at the top of a page. The
+following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
+
+'\dbltopfraction'
+ The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
+ occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning
+ that the height of a 'table*' or 'figure*' environment must not
+ exceed '0.7\textheight' . If the height of your starred float
+ environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following
+ actions to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the
+ document:
+
+ * Use the '[tp]' location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put
+ the bulky float on a page by itself, as well as at the top of
+ a page.
+
+ * Use the '[t!]' location specifier to override the effect of
+ '\dbltopfraction' for this particular float.
+
+ * Increase the value of '\dbltopfraction' to a suitably large
+ number, to avoid going to float pages so soon.
+
+ You can redefine it, as with '\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}'.
+
+'\dblfloatpagefraction'
+ For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum
+ fraction that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of
+ blank space. LaTeX's default is '0.5'. Change it with
+ '\renewcommand'.
+
+'\dblfloatsep'
+ On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the
+ distance between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page.
+ The default is '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for a document set at '10pt'
+ or '11pt', and '14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for a document set at
+ '12pt'.
+
+'\dbltextfloatsep'
+ This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top
+ or bottom of a page and the main text. The default is '20pt
+ plus2pt minus4pt'.
+
+'\dbltopnumber'
+ On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the
+ maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The LaTeX
+ default is '2'.
+
+ This example uses '\twocolumn''s optional argument of to create a
+title that spans the two-column article:
+
+ \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+ \newcommand{\authormark}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
+ \begin{document}
+ \twocolumn[{% inside this optional argument goes one-column text
+ \centering
+ \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
+ \large Author One\authormark{1},
+ Author Two\authormark{2},
+ Author Three\authormark{1} \\[1em]
+ \normalsize
+ \begin{tabular}{p{.2\textwidth}@{\hspace{2em}}p{.2\textwidth}}
+ \authormark{1}Department one &\authormark{2}Department two \\
+ School one &School two
+ \end{tabular}\\[3em] % space below title part
+ }]
+
+ Two column text here.
+
+5.3 '\flushbottom'
+==================
+
+Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
+height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
+page. This is most often used when making two-sided documents since the
+differences in facing pages can be glaring.
+
+ If TeX cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
+then you get a message like 'Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active'. If you get that, one option is to
+change to '\raggedbottom' (*note \raggedbottom::). Alternatively, you
+can adjust the 'textheight' to make compatible pages, or you can add
+some vertical stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs, as in
+'\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}'. Your last option is to, in a
+final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages (*note
+\enlargethispage::).
+
+ The '\flushbottom' state is the default only if you select the
+'twoside' document class option (*note Document class options::).
+
+5.4 '\raggedbottom'
+===================
+
+Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
+rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
+document the facing pages may be different heights. This command can go
+at any point in the document body. See *note \flushbottom::.
+
+ This is the default unless you select the 'twoside' document class
+option (*note Document class options::).
+
+5.5 Page layout parameters
+==========================
+
+'\columnsep'
+'\columnseprule'
+'\columnwidth'
+ The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between
+ the columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class
+ option 'twocolumn' is in effect (*note Document class options::).
+ *Note \twocolumn::.
+
+'\headheight'
+ Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in
+ the 'article', 'report', and 'book' classes is '12pt', at all type
+ sizes.
+
+'\headsep'
+ Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top
+ of the main text. The default in the 'article' and 'report'
+ classes is '25pt'. In the 'book' class the default is: if the
+ document is set at 10pt then it is '0.25in', and at 11pt and 12pt
+ it is '0.275in'.
+
+'\footskip'
+ Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline
+ of the page footer. The default in the 'article' and 'report'
+ classes is '30pt'. In the 'book' class the default is: when the
+ type size is 10pt the default is '0.35in', while at 11pt it is
+ '0.38in', and at 12pt it is '30pt'.
+
+'\linewidth'
+ Width of the current line, decreased for each nested 'list' (*note
+ list::). That is, the nominal value for '\linewidth' is to equal
+ '\textwidth' but for each nested list the '\linewidth' is decreased
+ by the sum of that list's '\leftmargin' and '\rightmargin' (*note
+ itemize::).
+
+'\marginparpush'
+'\marginsep'
+'\marginparwidth'
+ The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the
+ horizontal space between the text body and the marginal notes, and
+ the horizontal width of the notes.
+
+ Normally marginal notes appear on the outside of the page, but the
+ declaration '\reversemarginpar' changes that (and
+ '\normalmarginpar' changes it back).
+
+ The defaults for '\marginparpush' in both 'book' and 'article'
+ classes are: '7pt' if the document is set at 12pt, and '5pt' if the
+ document is set at 11pt or 10pt.
+
+ For '\marginsep', in 'article' class the default is '10pt' except
+ if the document is set at 10pt and in two-column mode where the
+ default is '11pt'.
+
+ For '\marginsep' in 'book' class the default is '10pt' in
+ two-column mode and '7pt' in one-column mode.
+
+ For '\marginparwidth' in both 'book' and 'article' classes, in
+ two-column mode the default is 60% of '\paperwidth - \textwidth',
+ while in one-column mode it is 50% of that distance.
+
+'\oddsidemargin'
+'\evensidemargin'
+ The '\oddsidemargin' is the extra distance between the left side of
+ the page and the text's left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the
+ document class option 'twoside' is chosen and on all pages when
+ 'oneside' is in effect. When 'twoside' is in effect, on
+ even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is
+ 'evensidemargin'.
+
+ LaTeX's default is that '\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference
+ between '\paperwidth' and '\textwidth', and '\evensidemargin' is
+ the remainder.
+
+'\paperheight'
+ The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print
+ area. Normally set with a document class option, as in
+ '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
+ options::).
+
+'\paperwidth'
+ The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print
+ area. Normally set with a document class option, as in
+ '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
+ options::).
+
+'\textheight'
+ The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is
+ set at a nominal type size of 10pt then for an 'article' or
+ 'report' the default is '43\baselineskip', while for a 'book' it is
+ '41\baselineskip'. At a type size of 11pt the default is
+ '38\baselineskip' for all document classes. At 12pt it is
+ '36\baselineskip' for all classes.
+
+'\textwidth'
+ The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an
+ 'article' or 'report' document, the default is '345pt' when the
+ chosen type size is 10pt, the default is '360pt' at 11pt, and it is
+ '390pt' at 12pt. For a 'book' document, the default is '4.5in' at
+ a type size of 10pt, and '5in' at 11pt or 12pt.
+
+ In multi-column output, '\textwidth' remains the width of the
+ entire page body, while '\columnwidth' is the width of one column
+ (*note \twocolumn::).
+
+ In lists (*note list::), '\textwidth' remains the width of the
+ entire page body (and '\columnwidth' the width of the entire
+ column), while '\linewidth' may decrease for nested lists.
+
+ Inside a minipage (*note minipage::) or '\parbox' (*note
+ \parbox::), all the width-related parameters are set to the
+ specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of
+ the 'minipage' or '\parbox'.
+
+'\hsize'
+ This entry is included for completeness: '\hsize' is the TeX
+ primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should
+ not be used in normal LaTeX documents.
+
+'\topmargin'
+ Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the
+ paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is
+ computed based on many other parameters: '\paperheight - 2in -
+ \headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip', and then divided
+ by two.
+
+'\topskip'
+ Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline
+ of the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default
+ is the same as the font size, e.g., '10pt' at a type size of 10pt.
+
+5.6 Floats
+==========
+
+Some typographic elements, such as figures and tables, cannot be broken
+across pages. They must be typeset outside of the normal flow of text,
+for instance floating to the top of a later page.
+
+ LaTeX can have a number of different classes of floating material.
+The default is the two classes, 'figure' (*note figure::) and 'table'
+(*note table::), but you can create a new class with the package
+'float'.
+
+ Within any one float class LaTeX always respects the order, so that
+the first figure in a document source must be typeset before the second
+figure. However, LaTeX may mix the classes, so it can happen that while
+the first table appears in the source before the first figure, it
+appears in the output after it.
+
+ The placement of floats is subject to parameters, given below, that
+limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and the
+bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued that the limits prevent them
+all from fitting on a page then LaTeX places what it can and defers the
+rest to the next page. In this way, floats may end up being typeset far
+from their place in the source. In particular, a float that is big may
+migrate to the end of the document. In which event, because all floats
+in a class must appear in sequential order, every following float in
+that class also appears at the end.
+
+ In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak
+where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its
+PLACEMENT argument. The possible values are a sequence of the letters
+below. The default for both 'figure' and 'table', in both 'article' and
+'book' classes, is 'tbp'.
+
+'t'
+ (Top)--at the top of a text page.
+
+'b'
+ (Bottom)--at the bottom of a text page. (However, 'b' is not
+ allowed for full-width floats ('figure*') with double-column
+ output. To ameliorate this, use the 'stfloats' or 'dblfloatfix'
+ package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ:
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat>.
+
+'h'
+ (Here)--at the position in the text where the 'figure' environment
+ appears. However, 'h' is not allowed by itself; 't' is
+ automatically added.
+
+ To absolutely force a float to appear "here", you can
+ '\usepackage{float}' and use the 'H' specifier which it defines.
+ For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere>.
+
+'p'
+ (Page of floats)--on a separate "float page", which is a page
+ containing no text, only floats.
+
+'!'
+ Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX
+ ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can
+ appear and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the
+ page. The '!' specifier does _not_ mean "put the float here"; see
+ above.
+
+ Note: the order in which letters appear in the PLACEMENT argument
+does not change the order in which LaTeX tries to place the float; for
+instance, 'btp' has the same effect as 'tbp'. All that PLACEMENT does
+is that if a letter is not present then the algorithm does not try that
+location. Thus, LaTeX's default of 'tbp' is to try every location
+except placing the float where it occurs in the source.
+
+ To prevent LaTeX from moving floats to the end of the document or a
+chapter you can use a '\clearpage' command to start a new page and
+insert all pending floats. If a pagebreak is undesirable then you can
+use the 'afterpage' package and issue '\afterpage{\clearpage}'. This
+will wait until the current page is finished and then flush all
+outstanding floats.
+
+ LaTeX can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
+(although on the same output page) if there is a 't' specifier in the
+PLACEMENT parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting the 't' is
+not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed at the top of the
+next page, then you can prevent it by either using the 'flafter' package
+or using the command '\suppressfloats[t]', which causes floats for the
+top position on this page to moved to the next page.
+
+ Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
+non-float text (change them with '\renewcommand{PARAMETER}{DECIMAL
+BETWEEN 0 AND 1}'):
+
+'\bottomfraction'
+ The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats
+ at the bottom; default '.3'.
+
+'\floatpagefraction'
+ The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
+ floats; default '.5'.
+
+'\textfraction'
+ Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
+ much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
+ different page. The default is '.2'.
+
+'\topfraction'
+ Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
+ floats; default '.7'.
+
+ Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with
+a command of the form '\setlength{PARAMETER}{LENGTH EXPRESSION}'):
+
+'\floatsep'
+ Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default '12pt
+ plus2pt minus2pt'.
+
+'\intextsep'
+ Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text;
+ default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for 10 point and 11 point
+ documents, and '14pt plus4pt minus4pt' for 12 point documents.
+
+'\textfloatsep'
+ Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
+ default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
+
+ Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with
+a command of the form '\setcounter{CTRNAME}{NATURAL NUMBER}'):
+
+'bottomnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text
+ page; default 1.
+
+'dbltopnumber'
+ Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
+ two-column page; default 2.
+
+'topnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
+ default 2.
+
+'totalnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
+
+ The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats
+<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats> contains
+suggestions for relaxing LaTeX's default parameters to reduce the
+problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the
+float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach's article "How to
+influence the position of float environments like figure and table in
+LaTeX?" (<http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf>).
+
+6 Sectioning
+************
+
+Structure your text into divisions: parts, chapters, sections, etc. All
+sectioning commands have the same form, one of:
+
+ SECTIONING-COMMAND{TITLE}
+ SECTIONING-COMMAND*{TITLE}
+ SECTIONING-COMMAND[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+For instance, declare the start of a subsection as with
+'\subsection{Motivation}'.
+
+ The table has each SECTIONING-COMMAND in LaTeX. All are available in
+all of LaTeX's standard document classes 'book', 'report',
+and 'article', except that '\chapter' is not available in 'article'.
+
+Sectioning unit Command Level
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+Part '\part' -1 ('book', 'report'), 0
+ ('article')
+Chapter '\chapter' 0
+Section '\section' 1
+Subsection '\subsection' 2
+Subsubsection '\subsubsection' 3
+Paragraph '\paragraph' 4
+Subparagraph '\subparagraph' 5
+
+ All these commands have a '*'-form that prints TITLE as usual but is
+not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents. An
+example of using this is for an appendix in an 'article' . The input
+'\appendix\section{Appendix}' gives the output 'A Appendix' (*note
+\appendix::). You can lose the numbering 'A' by instead entering
+'\section*{Appendix}' (articles often omit a table of contents and have
+simple page headers so the other differences from the '\section' command
+may not matter).
+
+ The section title TITLE provides the heading in the main text, but it
+may also appear in the table of contents and in the running head or foot
+(*note Page styles::). You may not want the same text in these places
+as in the main text. All of these commands have an optional argument
+TOC-TITLE for these other places.
+
+ The level number in the table above determines which sectional units
+are numbered, and which appear in the table of contents. If the
+sectioning command's LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the
+counter 'secnumdepth' then the titles for this sectioning command will
+be numbered (*note Sectioning/secnumdepth::). And, if LEVEL is less
+than or equal to the value of the counter 'tocdepth' then the table of
+contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit (*note
+Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+ LaTeX expects that before you have a '\subsection' you will have a
+'\section' and, in a book, that before a '\section' you will have a
+'\chapter'. Otherwise you can get a something like a subsection
+numbered '3.0.1'.
+
+ Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands.
+
+'secnumdepth'
+ Controls which sectioning commands are numbered. Suppress
+ numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than LEVEL
+ '\setcounter{secnumdepth}{LEVEL}' (*note \setcounter::). See the
+ above table for the level numbers. For instance, if the
+ 'secnumdepth' is 1 in an 'article' then a '\section{Introduction}'
+ command will produce output like '1 Introduction' while
+ '\subsection{Discussion}' will produce output like 'Discussion',
+ without the number. LaTeX's default 'secnumdepth' is 3 in
+ 'article' class and 2 in the 'book' and 'report' classes.
+
+'tocdepth'
+ Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of
+ contents. The setting '\setcounter{tocdepth}{LEVEL}' makes the
+ sectioning units at LEVEL be the smallest ones listed (*note
+ \setcounter::). See the above table for the level numbers. For
+ instance, if 'tocdepth' is 1 then the table of contents will list
+ sections but not subsections. LaTeX's default 'secnumdepth' is 3
+ in 'article' class and 2 in the 'book' and 'report' classes.
+
+6.1 '\part'
+===========
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \part{TITLE}
+ \part*{TITLE}
+ \part[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+ Start a document part. The standard LaTeX classes 'book', 'report',
+and 'article', all have this command.
+
+ This produces a document part, in a book.
+
+ \part{VOLUME I \\
+ PERSONAL MEMOIRS OF U.\ S.\ GRANT}
+ \chapter{ANCESTRY--BIRTH--BOYHOOD.}
+ My family is American, and has been for generations,
+ in all its branches, direct and collateral.
+
+ In each standard class the '\part' command outputs a part number such
+as 'Part I', alone on its line, in boldface, and in large type. Then
+LaTeX outputs TITLE, also alone on its line, in bold and in even larger
+type. In class 'book', the LaTeX default puts each part alone on its
+own page. If the book is two-sided then LaTeX will skip a page if
+needed to have the new part on an odd-numbered page. In 'report' it is
+again alone on a page, but LaTeX won't force it onto an odd-numbered
+page. In an 'article' LaTeX does not put it on a fresh page, but
+instead outputs the part number and part title onto the main document
+page.
+
+ The '*' form shows TITLE but it does not show the part number, does
+not increment the 'part' counter, and produces no table of contents
+entry.
+
+ The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the part title in the
+table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::) and in running
+headers (*note Page styles::). If it is not present then TITLE will be
+there. This example puts a line break in TITLE but leaves out the break
+in the table of contents.
+
+ \part[Up from the bottom; my life]{Up from the bottom\\ my life}
+
+ For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a part is -1 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+ In the class 'article', if a paragraph immediately follows the part
+title then it is not indented. To get an indent you can use the package
+'indentfirst'.
+
+ One package to change the behavior of '\part' is 'titlesec'. See its
+documentation on CTAN.
+
+6.2 '\chapter'
+==============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \chapter{TITLE}
+ \chapter*{TITLE}
+ \chapter[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+ Start a chapter. The standard LaTeX classes 'book' and 'report' have
+this command but 'article' does not.
+
+ This produces a chapter.
+
+ \chapter{Loomings}
+ Call me Ishmael.
+ Some years ago---never mind how long precisely---having little or no
+ money in my purse, and nothing particular to interest me on shore, I
+ thought I would sail about a little and see the watery part of
+ the world.
+
+ The LaTeX default starts each chapter on a fresh page, an
+odd-numbered page if the document is two-sided. It produces a chapter
+number such as 'Chapter 1' in large boldface type (the size is '\huge').
+It then puts TITLE on a fresh line, in boldface type that is still
+larger (size '\Huge'). It also increments the 'chapter' counter, adds
+an entry to the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::), and
+sets the running header information (*note Page styles::).
+
+ The '*' form shows TITLE on a fresh line, in boldface. But it does
+not show the chapter number, does not increment the 'chapter' counter,
+produces no table of contents entry, and does not affect the running
+header. (If you use the page style 'headings' in a two-sided document
+then the header will be from the prior chapter.) This example
+illustrates.
+
+ \chapter*{Preamble}
+
+ The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the chapter title in
+the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::) and in running
+headers (*note Page styles::). If it is not present then TITLE will be
+there. This shows the full name in the chapter title,
+
+ \chapter[Weyl]{Hermann Klaus Hugo (Peter) Weyl (1885--1955)}
+
+but only 'Weyl' on the contents page. This puts a line break in the
+title but that doesn't work well with running headers so it omits the
+break in the contents
+
+ \chapter[Given it all\\ my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
+
+ For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is 0 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+ The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. To get an indent use the package
+'indentfirst'.
+
+ You can change what is shown for the chapter number. To change it to
+something like 'Lecture 1', put in the preamble either
+'\renewcommand{\chaptername}{Lecture}' or this (*note \makeatletter &
+\makeatother::).
+
+ \makeatletter
+ \renewcommand{\@chapapp}{Lecture}
+ \makeatother
+
+To make this change because of the primary language for the document,
+see the package 'babel'.
+
+ In a two-sided document LaTeX puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if
+necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any
+running headers. To make that page completely blank, see *note
+\clearpage & \cleardoublepage::.
+
+ To change the behavior of the '\chapter' command, you can copy its
+definition from the LaTeX format file and make adjustments. But there
+are also many packages on CTAN that address this. One is 'titlesec'.
+See its documentation, but the example below gives a sense of what it
+can do.
+
+ \usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
+ \titleformat{\chapter}
+ {\Huge\bfseries} % format of title
+ {} % label, such as 1.2 for a subsection
+ {0pt} % length of separation between label and title
+ {} % before-code hook
+
+This omits the chapter number 'Chapter 1' from the page but unlike
+'\chapter*' it keeps the chapter in the table of contents and the
+running headers.
+
+6.3 '\section'
+==============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \section{TITLE}
+ \section*{TITLE}
+ \section[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+ Start a section. The standard LaTeX classes 'article', 'book', and
+'report' all have this command.
+
+ This produces a section.
+
+ In this Part we tend to be more interested in the function,
+ in the input-output behavior,
+ than in the details of implementing that behavior.
+
+ \section{Turing machines}
+ Despite this desire to downplay implementation,
+ we follow the approach of A~Turing that the
+ first step toward defining the set of computable functions
+ is to reflect on the details of what mechanisms can do.
+
+ For the standard LaTeX classes 'book' and 'report' the default output
+is like '1.2 TITLE' (for chapter 1, section 2), alone on its line and
+flush left, in boldface and a larger type (the type size is '\Large').
+The same holds in 'article' except that there are no chapters in that
+class so it looks like '2 TITLE'.
+
+ The '*' form shows TITLE. But it does not show the section number,
+does not increment the 'section' counter, produces no table of contents
+entry, and does not affect the running header. (If you use the page
+style 'headings' in a two-sided document then the header will be from
+the prior section.)
+
+ The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the section title in
+the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::) and in running
+headers (*note Page styles::). If it is not present then TITLE will be
+there. This shows the full name in the title of the section,
+
+ \section[Elizabeth~II]{Elizabeth the Second,
+ by the Grace of God of the United Kingdom,
+ Canada and Her other Realms and Territories Queen,
+ Head of the Commonwealth, Defender of the Faith.}
+
+but only 'Elizabeth II' on the contents page and in the headers. This
+has a line break in TITLE but that does not work with headers so it is
+omitted from the contents and headers.
+
+ \section[Truth is, I cheated; my life story]{Truth is,
+ I cheated\\my life story}
+
+ For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a section is 1 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+ The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package 'indentfirst'.
+
+ In general, to change the behavior of the '\section' command, there
+are a number of options. One is the '\@startsection' command (*note
+\@startsection::). There are also many packages on CTAN that address
+this, including 'titlesec'. See the documentation but the example below
+gives a sense of what they can do.
+
+ \usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
+ \titleformat{\section}
+ {\normalfont\Large\bfseries} % format of title
+ {\makebox[1pc][r]{\thesection\hspace{1pc}}} % label
+ {0pt} % length of separation between label and title
+ {} % before-code hook
+ \titlespacing*{\section}
+ {-1pc}{18pt}{10pt}[10pc]
+
+That puts the section number in the margin.
+
+6.4 '\subsection'
+=================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \subsection{TITLE}
+ \subsection*{TITLE}
+ \subsection[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+ Start a subsection. The standard LaTeX classes 'article', 'book',
+and 'report' all have this command.
+
+ This produces a subsection.
+
+ We will show that there are more functions than Turing machines and that
+ therefore some functions have no associated machine.
+
+ \subsection{Cardinality} We will begin with two paradoxes that
+ dramatize the challenge to our intuition posed by comparing the sizes of
+ infinite sets.
+
+ For the standard LaTeX classes 'book' and 'report' the default output
+is like '1.2.3 TITLE' (for chapter 1, section 2, subsection 3), alone on
+its line and flush left, in boldface and a larger type (the type size is
+'\large'). The same holds in 'article' except that there are no
+chapters in that class so it looks like '2.3 TITLE'.
+
+ The '*' form shows TITLE. But it does not show the section number,
+does not increment the 'section' counter, and produces no table of
+contents entry.
+
+ The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the section title in
+the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::). If it is not
+present then TITLE will be there. This shows the full name in the title
+of the section,
+
+ \subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
+ Chemical Elements} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow}
+
+but only 'U+03B1,U+03B2,U+03B3 paper' on the contents page.
+
+ For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is 2 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+ The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as
+is a standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to
+use the package 'indentfirst'.
+
+ There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the
+'\subsection' command. One is the '\@startsection' command (*note
+\@startsection::). There are also many packages on CTAN that address
+this, including 'titlesec'. See the documentation but the example below
+gives a sense of what they can do.
+
+ \usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble
+ \titleformat{\subsection}[runin]
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries} % format of the title
+ {\thesubsection} % label
+ {0.6em} % space between label and title
+ {} % before-code hook
+
+That puts the subsection number and TITLE in the first line of text.
+
+6.5 '\subsubsection', '\paragraph', '\subparagraph'
+===================================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \subsubsection{TITLE}
+ \subsubsection*{TITLE}
+ \subsubsection[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+or one of:
+
+ \paragraph{TITLE}
+ \paragraph*{TITLE}
+ \paragraph[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+or one of:
+
+ \subparagraph{TITLE}
+ \subparagraph*{TITLE}
+ \subparagraph[TOC-TITLE]{TITLE}
+
+ Start a subsubsection, paragraph, or subparagraph. The standard
+LaTeX classes 'article', 'book', and 'report' all have these commands,
+although they are not commonly used.
+
+ This produces a subsubsection.
+
+ \subsubsection{Piston ring compressors: structural performance}
+ Provide exterior/interior wall cladding assemblies
+ capable of withstanding the effects of load and stresses from
+ consumer-grade gasoline engine piston rings.
+
+ The default output of each of the three does not change over the
+standard LaTeX classes 'article', 'book', and 'report'. For
+'\subsubsection' the TITLE is alone on its line, in boldface and normal
+size type. For '\paragraph' the TITLE is inline with the text, not
+indented, in boldface and normal size type. For '\subparagraph' the
+TITLE is inline with the text, with a paragraph indent, in boldface and
+normal size type (Because an 'article' has no chapters its
+subsubsections are numbered and so it looks like '1.2.3 TITLE', for
+section 1, subsection 2, and subsubsection 3. The other two divisions
+are not numbered.)
+
+ The '*' form shows TITLE. But it does not increment the associated
+counter and produces no table of contents entry (and does not show the
+number for '\subsubsection').
+
+ The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the division title in
+the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::). If it is not
+present then TITLE will be there.
+
+ For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
+in the table of contents, the level number of a subsubsection is 3, of a
+paragraph is 4, and of a subparagraph is 5 (*note
+Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+
+ The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented,
+as is a standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to
+use the package 'indentfirst'.
+
+ There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these
+commands. One is the '\@startsection' command (*note \@startsection::).
+There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including
+'titlesec'. See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+6.6 '\appendix'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \appendix
+
+ This does not directly produce any output. But in a book or report
+it declares that subsequent '\chapter' commands start an appendix. In
+an article it does the same, for '\section' commands. It also resets
+the 'chapter' and 'section' counters to 0 in a book or report, and in an
+article resets the 'section' and 'subsection' counters.
+
+ In this book
+
+ \chapter{One} ...
+ \chapter{Two} ...
+ ...
+ \appendix
+ \chapter{Three} ...
+ \chapter{Four} ...
+
+the first two will generate output numbered 'Chapter 1' and 'Chapter 2'.
+After the '\appendix' the numbering will be 'Appendix A' and 'Appendix
+B'. *Note Larger book template:: for another example.
+
+ The 'appendix' package adds the command '\appendixpage' to put a
+separate 'Appendices' in the document body before the first appendix,
+and the command '\addappheadtotoc' to do the same in the table of
+contents. You can reset the name 'Appendix' with a command like
+'\renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}', as well as a number of
+other features. See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+6.7 '\frontmatter', '\mainmatter', '\backmatter'
+================================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \frontmatter
+ \mainmatter
+ \backmatter
+
+ Format a 'book' class document differently according to which part of
+the document is being produced. All three commands are optional.
+
+ Traditionally, a book's front matter contains such things as the
+title page, an abstract, a table of contents, a preface, a list of
+notations, a list of figures, and a list of tables. (Some of these
+front matter pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not
+numbered.) The back matter may contain such things as a glossary,
+notes, a bibliography, and an index.
+
+ The '\frontmatter' declaration makes the pages numbered in lowercase
+roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each chapter's title
+appears in the table of contents; if you use other sectioning commands
+here, use the '*'-version (*note Sectioning::). The '\mainmatter'
+changes the behavior back to the expected version, and resets the page
+number. The '\backmatter' leaves the page numbering alone but switches
+the chapters back to being not numbered. *Note Larger book template::
+for an example using the three.
+
+6.8 '\@startsection'
+====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \@startsection{NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}
+
+ Used to help redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning
+divisions such as '\section' or '\subsection'.
+
+ Note that the 'titlesec' package makes manipulation of sectioning
+easier. Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
+satisfied with '\@startsection', some cannot. For instance, in the
+standard LaTeX 'book' and 'report' classes the commands '\chapter' and
+'\report' are not constructed in this way. To make such a command you
+may want to use the '\secdef' command.
+
+ Technically, '\@startsection' has the form
+
+ \@startsection{NAME}
+ {LEVEL}
+ {INDENT}
+ {BEFORESKIP}
+ {AFTERSKIP}
+ {STYLE}*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}
+
+so that issuing
+
+ \renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection{NAME}
+ {LEVEL}
+ {INDENT}
+ {BEFORESKIP}
+ {AFTERSKIP}
+ {STYLE}}
+
+redefines '\section' to have the form '\section*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}' (here
+too, the star '*' is optional). *Note Sectioning::. This implies that
+when you write a command like '\renewcommand{section}{...}', the
+'\@startsection{...}' must come last in the definition. See the
+examples below.
+
+NAME
+ Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header. This
+ counter must be defined separately. Most commonly this is either
+ 'section', 'subsection', or 'paragraph'. Although in those cases
+ the counter name is the same as the sectioning command itself, you
+ don't have to use the same name.
+
+ Then '\the'NAME displays the title number and '\'NAME'mark' is for
+ the page headers. See the third example below.
+
+LEVEL
+ An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command. *Note
+ Sectioning:: for the list of standard level numbers.
+
+ If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+ 'secnumdepth' then titles for this sectioning command will be
+ numbered (*note Sectioning/secnumdepth::). For instance, if
+ 'secnumdepth' is 1 in an 'article' then the command
+ '\section{Introduction}' will produce output like "1 Introduction"
+ while '\subsection{Discussion}' will produce output like
+ "Discussion", without the number prefix.
+
+ If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the counter TOCDEPTH
+ then the table of contents will have an entry for this sectioning
+ unit (*note Sectioning/tocdepth::). For instance, in an 'article',
+ if TOCDEPTH is 1 then the table of contents will list sections but
+ not subsections.
+
+INDENT
+ A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with
+ respect to the left margin. To have the title flush with the
+ margin use '0pt'. A negative indentation such as '-\parindent'
+ will move the title into the left margin.
+
+BEFORESKIP
+ The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space
+ that is inserted before this sectioning unit's title. This space
+ will be discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the
+ top of a fresh page. If this number is negative then the first
+ paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is
+ non-negative then the first paragraph is indented. (Note that the
+ negative of '1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt' is '-1pt plus -2pt minus
+ -3pt'.)
+
+ For example, if BEFORESKIP is '-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex' then
+ to start the new sectioning unit, LaTeX will add about 3.5 times
+ the height of a letter x in vertical space, and the first paragraph
+ in the section will not be indented. Using a rubber length, with
+ 'plus' and 'minus', is good practice here since it gives LaTeX more
+ flexibility in making up the page (*note Lengths::).
+
+ The full accounting of the vertical space between the baseline of
+ the line prior to this sectioning unit's header and the baseline of
+ the header is that it is the sum of the '\parskip' of the text
+ font, the '\baselineskip' of the title font, and the absolute value
+ of the BEFORESKIP. This space is typically rubber so it may
+ stretch or shrink. (If the sectioning unit starts on a fresh page
+ so that the vertical space is discarded then the baseline of the
+ header text will be where LaTeX would put the baseline of the first
+ text line on that page.)
+
+AFTERSKIP
+ This is a length. If AFTERSKIP is non-negative then this is the
+ vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit's title header.
+ If it is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so
+ that it becomes part of the next paragraph. In this case the
+ absolute value of the length gives the horizontal space between the
+ end of the title and the beginning of the following paragraph.
+ (Note that the negative of '1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt' is '-1pt plus
+ -2pt minus -3pt'.)
+
+ As with BEFORESKIP, using a rubber length, with 'plus' and 'minus'
+ components, is good practice here since it gives LaTeX more
+ flexibility in putting together the page.
+
+ If 'afterskip' is non-negative then the full accounting of the
+ vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit's header
+ and the baseline of the first line of the following paragraph is
+ that it is the sum of the '\parskip' of the title font, the
+ '\baselineskip' of the text font, and the value of AFTER. That
+ space is typically rubber so it may stretch or shrink. (Note that
+ because the sign of 'afterskip' changes the sectioning unit
+ header's from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
+ 'afterskip' to cancel part of the '\parskip'.)
+
+STYLE
+ Controls the styling of the title. See the examples below.
+ Typical commands to use here are '\centering', '\raggedright',
+ '\normalfont', '\hrule', or '\newpage'. The last command in STYLE
+ may be one that takes one argument, such as '\MakeUppercase' or
+ '\fbox' that takes one argument. The section title will be
+ supplied as the argument to this command. For instance, setting
+ STYLE to '\bfseries\MakeUppercase' would produce titles that are
+ bold and uppercase.
+
+ These are LaTeX's defaults for the first three sectioning units that
+are defined with '\@startsection', for the 'article', 'book', and
+'report' classes. For section, the LEVEL is 1, the INDENT is 0pt, the
+BEFORESKIP is '-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', the AFTERSKIP is '2.3ex
+plus 0.2ex', and the STYLE is '\normalfont\Large\bfseries'. For
+subsection, the LEVEL is 2, the INDENT is 0pt, the BEFORESKIP is
+'-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', the AFTERSKIP is '1.5ex plus 0.2ex',
+and the STYLE is '\normalfont\large\bfseries'. For subsubsection, the
+LEVEL is 3, the INDENT is 0pt, the BEFORESKIP is '-3.25ex plus -1ex
+minus -0.2ex', the AFTERSKIP is '1.5ex plus 0.2ex', and the STYLE is
+'\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries'.
+
+ Here are examples. They go either in a package or class file or in
+the preamble of a LaTeX document. If you put them in the preamble they
+must go between a '\makeatletter' command and a '\makeatother'.
+(Probably the error message 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical
+mode.' means that you forgot this.) *Note \makeatletter &
+\makeatother::.
+
+ This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered. It
+says '\renewcommand' because LaTeX's standard classes have already
+defined a '\section'. For the same reason it does not define a
+'section' counter, or the commands '\thesection' and '\l@section'.
+
+ \renewcommand\section{%
+ \@startsection{section}% *note NAME: \@startsection/name.
+ {1}% *note LEVEL: \@startsection/level.
+ {0pt}% *note INDENT: \@startsection/indent.
+ {-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex}% *note BEFORESKIP: \@startsection/beforeskip.
+ {2.3ex plus.2ex}% *note AFTERSKIP: \@startsection/afterskip.
+ {\centering\normalfont\Large\bfseries}% *note STYLE: \@startsection/style.
+ }
+
+ This will put 'subsection' titles in small caps type, inline with the
+paragraph.
+
+ \renewcommand\subsection{%
+ \@startsection{subsection}% *note NAME: \@startsection/name.
+ {2}% *note LEVEL: \@startsection/level.
+ {0em}% *note INDENT: \@startsection/indent.
+ {-1ex plus 0.1ex minus -0.05ex}% *note BEFORESKIP: \@startsection/beforeskip.
+ {-1em plus 0.2em}% *note AFTERSKIP: \@startsection/afterskip.
+ {\scshape}% *note STYLE: \@startsection/style.
+ }
+
+ The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands.
+This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to
+display that counter.
+
+ \setcounter{secnumdepth}{6}% show counters this far down
+ \newcounter{subsubparagraph}[subparagraph]% counter for numbering
+ \renewcommand{\thesubsubparagraph}% how to display
+ {\thesubparagraph.\@arabic\c@subsubparagraph}% numbering
+ \newcommand{\subsubparagraph}{\@startsection
+ {subsubparagraph}%
+ {6}%
+ {0em}%
+ {\baselineskip}%
+ {0.5\baselineskip}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize}}
+ \newcommand*\l@subsubparagraph{\@dottedtocline{6}{10em}{5em}}% for toc
+ \newcommand{\subsubparagraphmark}[1]{}% for page headers
+
+7 Cross references
+******************
+
+We often want something like 'See Theorem~31'. But by-hand typing the
+31 is poor practice. Instead you should write a "label" such as
+'\label{eq:GreensThm}' and then "reference" it, as with 'See
+equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}'. LaTeX will automatically work out the
+number, put it into the output, and will change that number later if
+needed.
+
+ We will see this with Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm}. % forward reference
+ ...
+ \begin{theorem} \label{th:GreensThm}
+ ...
+ \end{theorem}
+ ...
+ See Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm} on page~\pageref{th:GreensThm}.
+
+ LaTeX tracks cross reference information in a file having the
+extension '.aux' and with the same base name as the file containing the
+'\label'. So if '\label' is in 'calculus.tex' then the information is
+in 'calculus.aux'. LaTeX puts the information in that file every time
+it runs across a '\label'.
+
+ The behavior described in the prior paragraph results in a quirk that
+happens when your document has a "forward reference", a '\ref' that
+appears before the associated '\label'. If this is the first time that
+you are compiling the document then you will get 'LaTeX Warning:
+Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross references right' and in
+the output the forward reference will appear as two question marks '??',
+in boldface. A similar thing happens if you change some things so the
+references changes; you get the same warning and the output contains the
+old reference information. In both cases, resolve this by compiling the
+document a second time.
+
+ The 'cleveref' package enhances LaTeX's cross referencing features.
+You can arrange that if you enter
+'\begin{thm}\label{th:Nerode}...\end{thm}' then '\cref{th:Nerode}' will
+output 'Theorem 3.21', without you having to enter the "Theorem."
+
+7.1 '\label'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \label{KEY}
+
+ Assign a reference number to KEY. In ordinary text '\label{KEY}'
+assigns to KEY the number of the current sectional unit. Inside an
+environment with numbering, such as a 'table' or 'theorem' environment,
+'\label{KEY}' assigns to KEY the number of that environment. Retrieve
+the assigned number with the '\ref{KEY}' command (*note \ref::).
+
+ A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
+punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished,
+as usual.
+
+ A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a
+suffix separated by a colon or period. Thus, '\label{fig:Post}' is a
+label for a figure with a portrait of Emil Post. This helps to avoid
+accidentally creating two labels with the same name, and makes your
+source more readable. Some commonly-used prefixes:
+
+'ch'
+ for chapters
+
+'sec'
+'subsec'
+ for lower-level sectioning commands
+
+'fig'
+ for figures
+
+'tab'
+ for tables
+
+'eq'
+ for equations
+
+ In the auxiliary file the reference information is kept as the text
+of a command of the form '\newlabel{LABEL}{{CURRENTLABEL}{PAGENUMBER}}'.
+Here CURRENTLABEL is the current value of the macro '\@currentlabel'
+that is usually updated whenever you call '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'.
+
+ Below, the key 'sec:test' will get the number of the current section
+and the key 'fig:test' will get the number of the figure.
+(Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and tables.)
+
+ \section{section name}
+ \label{sec:test}
+ This is Section~\ref{sec:test}.
+ \begin{figure}
+ ...
+ \caption{caption text}
+ \label{fig:test}
+ \end{figure}
+ See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
+
+7.2 '\pageref'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \pageref{KEY}
+
+ Produce the page number of the place in the text where the
+corresponding '\label'{KEY} command appears.
+
+ If there is no '\label{KEY}' then you get something like 'LaTeX
+Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on input line 11.'
+
+ Below, the '\label{eq:main}' is used both for the formula number and
+for the page number. (Note that the two references are forward
+references so this document would need to be compiled twice to resolve
+those.)
+
+ The main result is formula~\ref{eq:main} on page~\pageref{eq:main}.
+ ...
+ \begin{equation} \label{eq:main}
+ \mathbf{P}=\mathbf{NP}
+ \end{equation}
+
+7.3 '\ref'
+==========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ref{KEY}
+
+ Produces the number of the sectional unit, equation, footnote,
+figure, ..., of the corresponding '\label' command (*note \label::). It
+does not produce any text, such as the word 'Section' or 'Figure', just
+the bare number itself.
+
+ If there is no '\label{KEY}' then you get something like 'LaTeX
+Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on input line 11.'
+
+ In this example the '\ref{popular}' produces '2'. Note that it is a
+forward reference since it comes before '\label{popular}' so this
+document would have to be compiled twice.
+
+ The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}.
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Plain \TeX
+ \item \label{popular} \LaTeX
+ \item Con\TeX t
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ The 'cleveref' package includes text such as 'Theorem' in the
+reference. See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+8 Environments
+**************
+
+LaTeX provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior. An
+environment begins with '\begin' and ends with '\end', like this:
+
+ \begin{ENVIRONMENT-NAME}
+ ...
+ \end{ENVIRONMENT-NAME}
+
+ The ENVIRONMENT-NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
+end. For instance, the input '\begin{table*}...\end{table}' will cause
+an error like: '! LaTeX Error: \begin{table*} on input line 5 ended by
+\end{table}.'
+
+ Environments are executed within a group.
+
+8.1 'abstract'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{abstract}
+ ...
+ \end{abstract}
+
+ Produce an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. This
+environment is only defined in the 'article' and 'report' document
+classes (*note Document classes::).
+
+ Using the example below in the 'article' class produces a displayed
+paragraph. Document class option 'titlepage' causes the abstract to be
+on a separate page (*note Document class options::); this is the default
+only in the 'report' class.
+
+ \begin{abstract}
+ We compare all known accounts of the proposal made by Porter Alexander
+ to Robert E Lee at the Appomattox Court House that the army continue
+ in a guerrilla war, which Lee refused.
+ \end{abstract}
+
+ The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column
+document (for a more flexible solution, use the package 'abstract').
+
+ \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+ ...
+ \begin{document}
+ \title{Babe Ruth as Cultural Progenitor: a Atavistic Approach}
+ \author{Smith \\ Jones \\ Robinson\thanks{Railroad tracking grant.}}
+ \twocolumn[
+ \begin{@twocolumnfalse}
+ \maketitle
+ \begin{abstract}
+ Ruth was not just the Sultan of Swat, he was the entire swat
+ team.
+ \end{abstract}
+ \end{@twocolumnfalse}
+ ]
+ { % by-hand insert a footnote at page bottom
+ \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+ \footnotetext[1]{Thanks for all the fish.}
+ }
+
+8.2 'array'
+===========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{array}{COLS}
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
+ ...
+ \end{array}
+
+or:
+
+ \begin{array}[POS]{COLS}
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
+ ...
+ \end{array}
+
+ Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in
+math mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics
+environment such as 'equation' (*note equation::). Inside of each row
+the column entries are separated by an ampersand, ('&'). Rows are
+terminated with double-backslashes (*note \\::).
+
+ This example shows a three by three array.
+
+ \begin{equation*}
+ \chi(x) =
+ \left| % vertical bar fence
+ \begin{array}{ccc}
+ x-a &-b &-c \\
+ -d &x-e &-f \\
+ -g &-h &x-i
+ \end{array}
+ \right|
+ \end{equation*}
+
+ The required argument COLS describes the number of columns, their
+alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. For instance,
+'\begin{array}{rcl}...\end{array}' gives three columns: the first flush
+right, the second centered, and the third flush left. See *note
+tabular:: for the complete description of COLS and of the other common
+features of the two environments, including the optional POS argument.
+
+ There are two ways that 'array' diverges from 'tabular'. The first
+is that 'array' entries are typeset in math mode, in textstyle (*note
+Modes::) except if the COLS definition specifies the column with
+'p{...}', which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode. The second
+is that, instead of 'tabular''s parameter '\tabcolsep', LaTeX's
+intercolumn space in an 'array' is governed by '\arraycolsep', which
+gives half the width between columns. The default for this is '5pt' so
+that between two columns comes 10pt of space.
+
+ To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the 'amsmath'
+package. It comes with environments 'pmatrix' for an array surrounded
+by parentheses '(...)', 'bmatrix' for an array surrounded by square
+brackets '[...]', 'Bmatrix' for an array surrounded by curly
+braces '{...}', 'vmatrix' for an array surrounded by vertical
+bars '|...|', and 'Vmatrix' for an array surrounded by double vertical
+bars '||...||', along with a number of other array constructs.
+
+ The next example uses the 'amsmath' package.
+
+ \usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \begin{vmatrix}{cc} % array with vert lines
+ a &b \\
+ c &d
+ \end{vmatrix}=ad-bc
+ \end{equation}
+
+ There are many packages concerning arrays. The 'array' package has
+many useful extensions, including more column types. The 'dcolumn'
+package adds a column type to center on a decimal point. For both see
+the documentation on CTAN.
+
+8.3 'center'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{center}
+ LINE1 \\
+ LINE2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{center}
+
+ Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
+centered within the left and right margins. Use double-backslash, '\\',
+to get a line break (*note \\::). If some text is too long to fit on a
+line then LaTeX will insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid
+stretching or shrinking any interword space.
+
+ This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
+*note \centering:: to avoid such space, for example inside a 'figure'
+environment.
+
+ This example produces three centered lines. There is extra vertical
+space between the last two lines.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ A Thesis Submitted in Partial Fufillment \\
+ of the Requirements of \\[0.5ex]
+ the School of Environmental Engineering
+ \end{center}
+
+ In this example, depending on the page's line width, LaTeX may choose
+a line break for the part before the double backslash. If so, it will
+center each of the two lines and if not it will center the single line.
+Then LaTeX will break at the double backslash, and will center the
+ending.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink
+ alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\
+ I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton
+ \end{center}
+
+ A double backslash after the final line is optional. If present it
+doesn't add any vertical space.
+
+ In a two-column document the text is centered in a column, not in the
+entire page.
+
+8.3.1 '\centering'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ {\centering ... }
+
+or
+
+ \begin{group}
+ \centering ...
+ \end{group}
+
+ Center the material in its scope. It is most often used inside an
+environment such as 'figure', or in a 'parbox'.
+
+ This example's '\centering' declaration causes the graphic to be
+horizontally centered.
+
+ \begin{figure}
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png}
+ \caption{CTAN Lion} \label{fig:CTANLion}
+ \end{figure}
+
+The scope of this '\centering' ends with the '\end{figure}'.
+
+ Unlike the 'center' environment, the '\centering' command does not
+add vertical space above and below the text. That's its advantage in
+the above example; there is not an excess of space.
+
+ It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. If 'ww {\centering xx \\ yy} zz' is surrounded
+by blank lines then LaTeX will create a paragraph whose first line 'ww
+xx' is centered and whose second line, not centered, contains 'yy zz'.
+Usually what is desired is for the scope of the declaration to contain a
+blank line or the '\end' command of an environment such as 'figure' or
+'table' that ends the paragraph unit. Thus, if '{\centering xx \\
+yy\par} zz' is surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph
+with two centered lines 'xx' and 'yy', followed by a new paragraph with
+'zz' that is formatted as usual.
+
+8.4 'description'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] TEXT OF FIRST ITEM
+ \item[LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] TEXT OF SECOND ITEM
+ ...
+ \end{description}
+
+ Environment to make a list of labeled items. Each item's LABEL is
+typeset in bold and is flush left, so that long labels continue into the
+first line of the item text. There must be at least one item; having
+none causes the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing
+\item'.
+
+ This example shows the environment used for a sequence of
+definitions.
+
+ \begin{definition}
+ \item[lama] A priest.
+ \item[llama] A beast.
+ \end{definition}
+
+The labels 'lama' and 'llama' are output in boldface, with the left edge
+on the left margin.
+
+ Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::). Use the
+optional labels, as in '\item[Main point]', because there is no sensible
+default. Following the '\item' is optional text, which may contain
+multiple paragraphs.
+
+ Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a
+font change given in argument style (see *note Font styles::) then it
+will come out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for
+typewriter with '\item[\texttt{label text}]' then it will appear in bold
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way around this, in this
+example to get non-bold typewriter, is to use declarative style:
+'\item[{\tt label text}]'. Similarly, get the standard roman font with
+'\item[{\rm label text}]'.
+
+ For other major LaTeX labelled list environments, see *note itemize::
+and *note enumerate::. Unlike those environments, nesting 'description'
+environments does not change the default label; it is boldface and flush
+left at all levels.
+
+ For information about list layout parameters, including the default
+values, and for information about customizing list layout, see *note
+list::. The package 'enumitem' is useful for customizing lists.
+
+ This example changes the description labels to small caps.
+
+ \renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{%
+ {\hspace{\labelsep}\textsc{#1}}}
+
+8.5 'displaymath'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ MATHEMATICAL TEXT
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+ Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display
+style and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global
+option 'fleqn'; see *note Document class options::.
+
+ In the 'displaymath' environment no equation number is added to the
+math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the 'equation'
+environment (*note equation::).
+
+ LaTeX will not break the MATH TEXT across lines.
+
+ Note that the 'amsmath' package has significantly more extensive
+displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of ways
+in that package for having math text broken across lines.
+
+ The construct '\[MATH TEXT\]' is essentially a synonym for
+'\begin{displaymath}MATH TEXT\end{displaymath}' but the latter is easier
+to work with in the source file; for instance, searching for a square
+bracket may get false positives but the word 'displaymath' will likely
+be unique. (The construct '$$MATH TEXT$$' from Plain TeX is sometimes
+mistakenly used as a synonym for 'displaymath'. It is not a synonym,
+because the 'displaymath' environment checks that it isn't started in
+math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
+environment start, because the 'displaymath' environment has different
+vertical spacing, and because the 'displaymath' environment honors the
+'fleqn' option.)
+
+ The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version '\( \int_1^2
+x^2\,dx=7/3 \)' produces.
+
+8.6 'document'
+==============
+
+The 'document' environment encloses the entire body of a document. It
+is required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting and ending::.
+
+8.6.1 '\AtBeginDocument'
+------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \AtBeginDocument{CODE}
+
+ Save CODE and execute it when '\begin{document}' is executed, at the
+very end of the preamble. The code is executed after the font selection
+tables have been set up, so the normal font for the document is the
+current font. However, the code is executed as part of the preamble so
+you cannot do any typesetting with it.
+
+ You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+
+8.6.2 '\AtEndDocument'
+----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \AtEndDocument{CODE}
+
+ Save CODE and execute it near the end of the document. Specifically,
+it is executed when '\end{document}' is executed, before the final page
+is finished and before any leftover floating environments are processed.
+If you want some of the code to be executed after these two processes
+then include a '\clearpage' at the appropriate point in CODE.
+
+ You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+
+8.7 'enumerate'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] TEXT OF FIRST ITEM
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] TEXT OF SECOND ITEM
+ ...
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ Environment to produce a numbered list of items. The format of the
+label numbering depends on the nesting level of this environment; see
+below. The default top-level numbering is '1.', '2.', etc. Each
+'enumerate' list environment must have at least one item; having none
+causes the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item'.
+
+ This example gives the first two finishers in the 1908 Olympic
+marathon. As a top-level list the labels would come out as '1.' and
+'2.'.
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Johnny Hayes (USA)
+ \item Charles Hefferon (RSA)
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::). If you
+give '\item' an optional argument by following it with square brackets,
+as in '\item[Interstitial label]', then the next item will continue the
+interrupted sequence (*note \item::). That is, you will get labels like
+'1.', then 'Interstitial label', then '2.'. Following the '\item' is
+optional text, which may contain multiple paragraphs.
+
+ Enumerations may be nested within other 'enumerate' environments, or
+within any paragraph-making environment such as 'itemize' (*note
+itemize::), up to four levels deep. This gives LaTeX's default for the
+format at each nesting level, where 1 is the top level, the outermost
+level.
+
+ 1. arabic number followed by a period: '1.', '2.', ...
+ 2. lowercase letter inside parentheses: '(a)', '(b)' ...
+ 3. lowercase roman numeral followed by a period: 'i.', 'ii.', ...
+ 4. uppercase letter followed by a period: 'A.', 'B.', ...
+
+ The 'enumerate' environment uses the counters '\enumi' through
+'\enumiv' (*note Counters::).
+
+ For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see *note
+description:: and *note itemize::. For information about list layout
+parameters, including the default values, and for information about
+customizing list layout, see *note list::. The package 'enumitem' is
+useful for customizing lists.
+
+ To change the format of the label use '\renewcommand' (*note
+\newcommand & \renewcommand::) on the commands '\labelenumi' through
+'\labelenumiv'. For instance, this first level list will be labelled
+with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing period.
+
+ \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\textbf{\Alph{enumi}}}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Shows as boldface A
+ \item Shows as boldface B
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ For a list of counter-labeling commands see *note \alph \Alph \arabic
+\roman \Roman \fnsymbol::.
+
+8.8 'eqnarray'
+==============
+
+The 'eqnarray' environment is obsolete. It has infelicities, including
+spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements. (See
+"Avoid eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen
+<http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf>). New documents should
+include the 'amsmath' package and use the displayed mathematics
+environments provided there, such as the 'align' environment. We
+include a description only for completeness and for working with old
+documents.
+
+ Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ FIRST FORMULA LEFT &FIRST FORMULA MIDDLE &FIRST FORMULA RIGHT \\
+ ...
+ \end{eqnarray}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{eqnarray*}
+ FIRST FORMULA LEFT &FIRST FORMULA MIDDLE &FIRST FORMULA RIGHT \\
+ ...
+ \end{eqnarray*}
+
+ Display a sequence of equations or inequalities. The left and right
+sides are typeset in display mode, while the middle is typeset in text
+mode.
+
+ It is similar to a three-column 'array' environment, with items
+within a row separated by an ampersand ('&'), and with rows separated by
+double backslash '\\'). The starred form of line break ('\\*') can
+also be used to separate equations, and will disallow a page break there
+(*note \\::).
+
+ The unstarred form 'eqnarray' places an equation number on every line
+(using the 'equation' counter), unless that line contains a '\nonumber'
+command. The starred form 'eqnarray*' omits equation numbering, while
+otherwise being the same.
+
+ The command '\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across
+lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
+zero width.
+
+ This example shows three lines. The first two lines make an
+inequality, while the third line has not entry on the left side.
+
+ \begin{eqnarray*}
+ \lefteqn{x_1+x_2+\cdots+x_n} \\
+ &\leq &y_1+y_2+\cdots+y_n \\
+ &= &z+y_3+\cdots+y_n
+ \end{eqnarray*}
+
+8.9 'equation'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ MATHEMATICAL TEXT
+ \end{equation}
+
+ The same as a 'displaymath' environment (*note displaymath::) except
+that LaTeX puts an equation number flush to the right margin. The
+equation number is generated using the 'equation' counter.
+
+ You should have no blank lines between '\begin{equation}' and
+'\begin{equation}', or LaTeX will tell you that there is a missing
+dollar sign.
+
+ The package 'amsmath' package has extensive displayed equation
+facilities. New documents should include this package.
+
+8.10 'figure'
+=============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{figure}[PLACEMENT]
+ FIGURE BODY
+ \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE} % optional
+ \label{LABEL} % optional
+ \end{figure}
+
+or:
+
+ \begin{figure*}[PLACEMENT]
+ FIGURE BODY
+ \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE} % optional
+ \label{LABEL} % optional
+ \end{figure*}
+
+ Figures are for material that is not part of the normal text. An
+example is material that you cannot have split between two pages, such
+as a graphic. Because of this, LaTeX does not typeset figures in
+sequence with normal text but instead "floats" them to a convenient
+place, such as the top of a following page (*note Floats::).
+
+ The FIGURE BODY can consist of imported graphics (*note Graphics::),
+or text, LaTeX commands, etc. It is typeset in a 'parbox' of width
+'\textwidth'.
+
+ The possible values of PLACEMENT are 'h' for 'here', 't' for 'top',
+'b' for 'bottom', and 'p' for 'on a separate page of floats'. For the
+effect of these options on the float placement algorithm, see *note
+Floats::.
+
+ The starred form 'figure*' is used when a document is in
+double-column mode (*note \twocolumn::). It produces a figure that
+spans both columns, at the top of the page. To add the possibility of
+placing at a page bottom see the discussion of PLACEMENT 'b' in *note
+Floats::.
+
+ The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
+references::). The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
+for the figure. By default it is numbered. If LOFTITLE is present, it
+is used in the list of figures instead of TITLE (*note Table of contents
+etc.::).
+
+ This example makes a figure out of a graphic. LaTeX will place that
+graphic and its caption at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
+end of the document, on a page of floats.
+
+ \usepackage{graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{figure}[t]
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{CTANlion.png}
+ \caption{The CTAN lion, by Duane Bibby}
+ \end{figure}
+
+8.11 'filecontents': Write an external file
+===========================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{filecontents}{FILENAME}
+ TEXT
+ \end{filecontents}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{filecontents*}{FILENAME}
+ TEXT
+ \end{filecontents*}
+
+ Create a file named FILENAME and fill it with TEXT. The unstarred
+version of the environment 'filecontents' prefixes the content of the
+created file with a header; see the example below. The starred version
+'filecontents*' does not include the header.
+
+ This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it
+often appears before the '\documentclass' command. It is typically used
+when a source file requires a nonstandard style or class file. The
+environment will write that file to the directory containing the source
+and thus make the source file self-contained. Another use is to include
+'bib' references in the file, again to make it self-contained.
+
+ The environment checks whether a file of that name already exists and
+if so, does not do anything. There is a 'filecontents' package that
+redefines the 'filecontents' environment so that instead of doing
+nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file.
+
+ For example, this document
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \begin{filecontents}{JH.sty}
+ \newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+ \end{filecontents}
+ \usepackage{JH}
+ \begin{document}
+ Article by \myname.
+ \end{document}
+
+produces this file 'JH.sty'.
+
+ %% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
+ %% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+ %% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
+ %%
+ \newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+
+8.12 'flushleft'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ LINE1 \\
+ LINE2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long
+then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and
+stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use a double
+backslash, '\\'. For the declaration form see *note \raggedright::.
+
+ This creates a box of text that is at most 3 inches wide, with the
+text flush left and ragged right.
+
+ \noindent\begin{minipage}{3in}
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ A long sentence that will be broken by \LaTeX{}
+ at a convenient spot. \\
+ And, a fresh line forced by the double backslash.
+ \end{flushleft}
+ \end{minipage}
+
+8.12.1 '\raggedright'
+---------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ {\raggedright ... }
+
+or
+
+ \begin{ENVIRONMENT} \raggedright
+ ...
+ \end{ENVIRONMENT}
+
+ A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and
+ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as 'quote' or
+in a 'parbox'. For the environment form see *note flushleft::.
+
+ Unlike the 'flushleft' environment, the '\raggedright' command does
+not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
+units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
+declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+
+ Here '\raggedright' in each second column keeps LaTeX from doing very
+awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column. Note that
+'\raggedright' is inside the curly braces '{...}' to delimit its effect.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{rp{2in}}
+ Team alpha &{\raggedright This team does all the real work.} \\
+ Team beta &{\raggedright This team ensures that the water
+ cooler is never empty.} \\
+ \end{tabular}
+
+8.13 'flushright'
+=================
+
+ \begin{flushright}
+ LINE1 \\
+ LINE2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{flushright}
+
+ An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long
+to fit the margins then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that avoids
+hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use
+a double backslash, '\\'. For the declaration form see *note
+\raggedleft::.
+
+ For an example related to this environment, see *note flushleft::.
+
+8.13.1 '\raggedleft'
+--------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ {\raggedleft ... }
+
+or
+
+ \begin{ENVIRONMENT} \raggedleft
+ ...
+ \end{ENVIRONMENT}
+
+ A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and
+ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as 'quote' or in
+a 'parbox'. For the environment form see *note flushright::.
+
+ Unlike the 'flushright' environment, the '\raggedleft' command does
+not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
+units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
+declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+
+ For an example related to this environment, see *note \raggedright::.
+
+8.14 'itemize'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] TEXT OF FIRST ITEM
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] TEXT OF SECOND ITEM
+ ...
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ Produce a list that is unordered, sometimes called a bullet list.
+The environment must have at least one '\item'; having none causes the
+LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item'.
+
+ This gives a two-item list.
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Pencil and watercolor sketch by Cassandra
+ \item Rice portrait
+ \end{itemize}
+
+As a top-level list each label would come out as a bullet, *. The
+format of the labeling depends on the nesting level; see below.
+
+ Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::). If you
+give '\item' an optional argument by following it with square brackets,
+as in '\item[Optional label]', then by default it will appear in bold
+and be flush right, so it could extend into the left margin. For labels
+that are flush left see the *note description:: environment. Following
+the '\item' is optional text, which may contain multiple paragraphs.
+
+ Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels
+deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making
+environments, such as 'enumerate' (*note enumerate::). The 'itemize'
+environment uses the commands '\labelitemi' through '\labelitemiv' to
+produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase
+roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting
+level). These are the default marks at each level.
+
+ 1. * (bullet, from '\textbullet')
+ 2. -- (bold en-dash, from '\normalfont\bfseries\textendash')
+ 3. * (asterisk, from '\textasteriskcentered')
+ 4. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period, from
+ '\textperiodcentered')
+
+ Change the labels with '\renewcommand'. For instance, this makes the
+first level use diamonds.
+
+ \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
+
+ The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
+the left margin of the 'itemize' list is determined by the parameters
+'\leftmargini' through '\leftmarginvi'. (Note the convention of using
+lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command name to denote the
+nesting level.) The defaults are: '2.5em' in level 1 ('2em' in
+two-column mode), '2.2em' in level 2, '1.87em' in level 3, and '1.7em'
+in level 4, with smaller values for more deeply nested levels.
+
+ For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see *note
+description:: and *note enumerate::. For information about list layout
+parameters, including the default values, and for information about
+customizing list layout, see *note list::. The package 'enumitem' is
+useful for customizing lists.
+
+ This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost itemized
+lists.
+
+ \setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
+
+ Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
+space between items. Here is an example defining an 'itemize*'
+environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
+within a single item ('\parskip' is not list-specific, *note \parindent
+& \parskip::):
+
+ \newenvironment{itemize*}%
+ {\begin{itemize}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+ \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
+ {\end{itemize}}
+
+8.15 'letter' environment: writing letters
+==========================================
+
+This environment is used for creating letters. *Note Letters::.
+
+8.16 'list'
+===========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{list}{LABELING}{SPACING}
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF FIRST ITEM] TEXT OF FIRST ITEM
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL OF SECOND ITEM] TEXT OF SECOND ITEM
+ ...
+ \end{list}
+
+ An environment for constructing lists.
+
+ Note that this environment does not typically appear in the document
+body. Most lists created by LaTeX authors are the ones that come
+standard: the 'description', 'enumerate', and 'itemize' environments
+(*note description::, *note enumerate::, and *note itemize::).
+
+ Instead, the 'list' environment is most often used in macros. For
+example, many standard LaTeX environments that do not immediately appear
+to be lists are in fact constructed using 'list', including 'quotation',
+'quote', and 'center' (*note quotation & quote::, *note center::).
+
+ This uses the 'list' environment to define a new custom environment.
+
+ \newcounter{namedlistcounter} % number the items
+ \newenvironment{named}
+ {\begin{list}
+ {Item~\Roman{namedlistcounter}.} % labeling
+ {\usecounter{namedlistcounter} % set counter
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{3.5em}} % set spacing
+ }
+ {\end{list}}
+
+ \begin{named}
+ \item Shows as ``Item~I.''
+ \item[Special label.] Shows as ``Special label.''
+ \item Shows as ``Item~II.''
+ \end{named}
+
+ The mandatory first argument LABELING specifies the default labeling
+of list items. It can contain text and LaTeX commands, as above where
+it contains both 'Item' and '\Roman{...}'. LaTeX forms the label by
+putting the LABELING argument in a box of width '\labelwidth'. If the
+label is wider than that, the additional material extends to the right.
+When making an instance of a list you can override the default labeling
+by giving '\item' an optional argument by including square braces and
+the text, as in the above '\item[Special label.]'; *note \item::.
+
+ The mandatory second argument SPACING has a list of commands. This
+list can be empty. A command that can go in here is
+'\usecounter{COUNTERNAME}' (*note \usecounter::). Use this to tell
+LaTeX to number the items using the given counter. The counter will be
+reset to zero each time LaTeX enters the environment, and the counter is
+incremented by one each time LaTeX encounters an '\item' that does not
+have an optional argument.
+
+ Another command that can go in SPACING is '\makelabel', which
+constructs the label box. By default it puts the contents flush right.
+Its only argument is the label, which it typesets in LR mode (*note
+Modes::). One example of changing its definition is that to the above
+'named' example, before the definition of the environment add
+'\newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}', and between the
+'\setlength' command and the parenthesis that closes the SPACING
+argument also add '\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel'. Then the items will
+be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the second code line to
+'\let\makelabel\fbox' puts the labels inside a framed box. Another
+example of the '\makelabel' command is below, in the definition of the
+'redlabel' environment.
+
+ Also often in SPACING are commands to redefine the spacing for the
+list. Below are the spacing parameters with their default values.
+(Default values for derived environments such as 'itemize' can be
+different than the values shown here.) See also the figure that follows
+the list. Each is a length (*note Lengths::). The vertical spaces are
+normally rubber lengths, with 'plus' and 'minus' components, to give TeX
+flexibility in setting the page. Change each with a command such as
+'\setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}'. For some effects these
+lengths should be zero or negative.
+
+'\itemindent'
+ Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond 'leftmargin', of the
+ first line each item. Its default value is '0pt'.
+
+'\itemsep'
+ Vertical space between items, beyond the '\parsep'. The defaults
+ for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and
+ 'report' classes at 10 point size are: '4pt plus2pt minus1pt',
+ '\parsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'), and '\topsep' (that
+ is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'). The defaults at 11 point are: '4.5pt
+ plus2pt minus1pt', '\parsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'), and
+ 'topsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'). The defaults at 12
+ point are: '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', '\parsep' (that is, '2.5pt
+ plus1pt minus1pt'), and '\topsep' (that is, '2.5pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt').
+
+'\labelsep'
+ Horizontal space between the label and text of an item. The
+ default for LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report' classes is
+ '0.5em'.
+
+'\labelwidth'
+ Horizontal width. The box containing the label is nominally this
+ wide. If '\makelabel' returns text that is wider than this then
+ the first line of the item will be indented to make room for this
+ extra material. If '\makelabel' returns text of width less than or
+ equal to '\labelwidth' then LaTeX's default is that the label is
+ typeset flush right in a box of this width.
+
+ The left edge of the label box is
+ '\leftmargin'+'\itemindent'-'\labelsep'-'\labelwidth' from the left
+ margin of the enclosing environment.
+
+ The default for LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report' classes at
+ the top level is '\leftmargini'-'\labelsep', (which is '2em' in one
+ column mode and '1.5em' in two column mode). At the second level
+ it is '\leftmarginii'-'\labelsep', and at the third level it is
+ '\leftmarginiii'-'\labelsep'. These definitions make the label's
+ left edge coincide with the left margin of the enclosing
+ environment.
+
+'\leftmargin'
+ Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing
+ environment (or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level
+ list), and the left margin of this list. It must be non-negative.
+
+ In the standard LaTeX document classes, a top-level list has this
+ set to the value of '\leftmargini', while a list that is nested
+ inside a top-level list has this margin set to '\leftmarginii'.
+ More deeply nested lists get the values of '\leftmarginiii' through
+ '\leftmarginvi'. (Nesting greater than level five generates the
+ error message 'Too deeply nested'.)
+
+ The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article',
+ 'book', and 'report' classes are: '\leftmargini' is '2.5em' (in two
+ column mode, '2em'), '\leftmarginii' is '2.2em', and
+ '\leftmarginiii' is '1.87em'.
+
+'\listparindent'
+ Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
+ '\leftmargin', for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list
+ item. A negative value makes this an "outdent". Its default value
+ is '0pt'.
+
+'\parsep'
+ Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. In the 'book'
+ and 'article' classes The defaults for the first three levels in
+ LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report' classes at 10 point size
+ are: '4pt plus2pt minus1pt', '2pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'.
+ The defaults at 11 point size are: '4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt', '2pt
+ plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'. The defaults at 12 point size are:
+ '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', '2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'.
+
+'\partopsep'
+ Vertical space added, beyond '\topsep'+'\parskip', to the top and
+ bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded
+ by a blank line. (A blank line in the LaTeX source before the list
+ changes spacing at both the top and bottom of the list; whether the
+ line following the list is blank does not matter.)
+
+ The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article',
+ 'book', and 'report' classes at 10 point size are: '2pt plus1
+ minus1pt', '2pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '1pt plus0pt minus1pt'. The
+ defaults at 11 point are: '3pt plus1pt minus1pt', '3pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt', and '1pt plus0pt minus1pt'). The defaults at 12 point
+ are: '3pt plus2pt minus3pt', '3pt plus2pt minus2pt', and '1pt
+ plus0pt minus1pt'.
+
+'\rightmargin'
+ Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right
+ margin of the enclosing environment. Its default value is '0pt'.
+ It must be non-negative.
+
+'\topsep'
+ Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in
+ addition to '\parskip' (*note \parindent & \parskip::). The
+ defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article', 'book',
+ and 'report' classes at 10 point size are: '8pt plus2pt minus4pt',
+ '4pt plus2pt minus1pt', and '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'. The defaults
+ at 11 point are: '9pt plus3pt minus5pt', '4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt',
+ and '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'. The defaults at 12 point are: '10pt
+ plus4pt minus6pt', '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', and '2.5pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt'.
+
+ This shows the horizontal and vertical distances.
+
+.......................................................................
+..............Surrounding environment, preceding material.............. -
+ | v0
+ |---h0--|-h1-| |
+ ..Label.. .....First item..................................... -
+ ............................................................
+ ............................................................ -
+ | v1
+ ........First item, second paragraph .................. -
+ |-h2-| | v2
+ |
+ ..Label.. .....Second item.................................... -
+ ............................................................
+ ............................................................ -
+|-h3--|-h4-| |-h5-| |v3
+ |
+..............Surrounding environment, following material.............. -
+.......................................................................
+ The lengths shown are listed below. The key relationship is that the
+right edge of the bracket for H1 equals the right edge of the bracket
+for H4, so that the left edge of the label box is at H3+H4-(H0+H1).
+
+V0
+ '\topsep' + '\parskip' if the list environment does not start a new
+ paragraph, and '\topsep'+'\parskip'+'\partopsep' if it does
+
+V1
+ '\parsep'
+
+V2
+ '\itemsep'+'\parsep'
+
+V3
+ Same as V0. (This space is affected by whether a blank line
+ appears in the source above the environment; whether a blank line
+ appears in the source below the environment does not matter.)
+
+H0
+ '\labelwidth'
+
+H1
+ '\labelsep'
+
+H2
+ '\listparindent'
+
+H3
+ '\leftmargin'
+
+H4
+ '\itemindent'
+
+H5
+ '\rightmargin'
+
+ The list's left and right margins, shown above as H3 and H5, are with
+respect to the ones provided by the surrounding environment, or with
+respect to the page margins for a top-level list. The line width used
+for typesetting the list items is '\linewidth' (*note Page layout
+parameters::). For instance, set the list's left margin to be one
+quarter of the distance between the left and right margins of the
+enclosing environment with '\setlength{\leftmargin}{0.25\linewidth}'.
+
+ Page breaking in a list structure is controlled by the three
+parameters below. For each, the LaTeX default is '-\@lowpenalty', that
+is, '-51'. Because it is negative, it somewhat encourages a page break
+at each spot. Change it with, e.g., '\@beginparpenalty=9999'; a value
+of 10000 prohibits a page break.
+
+'\@beginparpenalty'
+ The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default
+ '-51').
+
+'\@itempenalty'
+ The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default
+ '-51').
+
+'\@endparpenalty'
+ The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default
+ '-51').
+
+ The package 'enumitem' is useful for customizing lists.
+
+ This example has the labels in red. They are numbered, and the left
+edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text. *Note
+\usecounter::.
+
+ \usepackage{color}
+ \newcounter{cnt}
+ \newcommand{\makeredlabel}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1.}}
+ \newenvironment{redlabel}
+ {\begin{list}
+ {\arabic{cnt}}
+ {\usecounter{cnt}
+ \setlength{\labelwidth}{0em}
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{0.5em}
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{1.5em}
+ \setlength{\itemindent}{0.5em} % equals \labelwidth+\labelsep
+ \let\makelabel=\makeredlabel
+ }
+ }
+ {\end{list} }
+
+8.16.1 '\item': An entry in a list
+----------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \item text of item
+
+or
+
+ \item[OPTIONAL-LABEL] text of item
+
+ An entry in a list. The entries are prefixed by a label, whose
+default depends on the list type.
+
+ Because the optional label is surrounded by square brackets '[...]',
+if you have an item whose text starts with '[', you have to hide the
+bracket inside curly braces, as in: '\item {[} is an open square
+bracket'; otherwise, LaTeX will think it marks the start of an optional
+label.
+
+ Similarly, if the item does have the optional label and you need a
+close square bracket inside that label, you must hide it in the same
+way: '\item[Close square bracket, {]}]'. *Note LaTeX command syntax::.
+
+ In this example the enumerate list has two items that use the default
+label and one that uses the optional label.
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Moe
+ \item[sometimes] Shemp
+ \item Larry
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ The first item is labelled '1.', the second item is labelled
+'sometimes', and the third item is labelled '2.'. Because of the
+optional label in the second item, the third item is not labelled '3.'.
+
+8.16.2 'trivlist': A restricted form of 'list'
+----------------------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{trivlist}
+ ...
+ \end{trivlist}
+
+ A restricted version of the list environment, in which margins are
+not indented and an '\item' without an optional argument produces no
+text. It is most often used in macros, to define an environment where
+the '\item' command as part of the environment's definition. For
+instance, the 'center' environment is defined essentially like this:
+
+ \newenvironment{center}
+ {\begin{trivlist}\centering\item\relax}
+ {\end{trivlist}}
+
+ Using 'trivlist' in this way allows the macro to inherit some common
+code: combining vertical space of two adjacent environments; detecting
+whether the text following the environment should be considered a new
+paragraph or a continuation of the previous one; adjusting the left and
+right margins for possible nested list environments.
+
+ Specifically, 'trivlist' uses the current values of the list
+parameters (*note list::), except that '\parsep' is set to the value of
+'\parskip', and '\leftmargin', '\labelwidth', and '\itemindent' are set
+to zero.
+
+ This example outputs the items as two paragraphs, except that (by
+default) they have no paragraph indent and are vertically separated.
+
+ \begin{trivlist}
+ \item The \textit{Surprise} is not old; no one would call her old.
+ \item She has a bluff bow, lovely lines.
+ \end{trivlist}
+
+8.17 'math'
+===========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{math}
+ MATH
+ \end{math}
+
+ The 'math' environment inserts given MATH material within the running
+text. '\(...\)' and '$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::.
+
+8.18 'minipage'
+===============
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \begin{minipage}{WIDTH}
+ CONTENTS
+ \end{minipage}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{minipage}[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}
+ CONTENTS
+ \end{minipage}
+
+ Put CONTENTS into a box that is WIDTH wide. This is like a small
+version of a page; it can contain its own footnotes, itemized lists,
+etc. (There are some restrictions, including that it cannot have
+floats.) This box will not be broken across pages. So 'minipage' is
+similar to '\parbox' (*note \parbox::) but here you can have paragraphs.
+
+ This example will be 3 inches wide, and has two paragraphs.
+
+ \begin{minipage}{3in}
+ Stephen Kleene was a founder of the Theory of Computation.
+
+ He was a student of Church, wrote three influential texts,
+ was President of the Association for Symbolic Logic,
+ and won the National Medal of Science.
+ \end{minipage}
+
+See below for a discussion of the paragraph indent inside a 'minipage'.
+
+ The required argument WIDTH is a rigid length (*note Lengths::). It
+gives the width of the box into which CONTENTS are typeset.
+
+ There are three optional arguments, POSITION, HEIGHT, and INNER-POS.
+You need not include all three. For example, get the default POSITION
+and set the HEIGHT with '\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm] CONTENTS
+\end{minipage}'. (Get the natural height with an empty argument, '[]'.)
+
+ The optional argument POSITION governs how the 'minipage' vertically
+aligns with the surrounding material.
+
+'c'
+ (synonym 'm') Default. Positions the 'minipage' so its vertical
+ center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what
+ Plain TeX calls '\vcenter').
+
+'t'
+ Match the top line in the 'minipage' with the baseline of the
+ surrounding text (Plain TeX's '\vtop'.
+
+'b'
+ Match the bottom line in the 'minipage' with the baseline of the
+ surrounding text (Plain TeX's '\vbox'.
+
+ To see the effects of these, contrast running this
+
+ ---\begin{minipage}[c]{0.25in}
+ first\\ second\\ third
+ \end{minipage}
+
+with the results of changing 'c' to 'b' or 't'.
+
+ The optional argument HEIGHT is a rigid length (*note Lengths::). It
+sets the height of the 'minipage'. You can enter any value larger than,
+or equal to, or smaller than the 'minipage''s natural height and LaTeX
+will not give an error or warning. You can also set it to a height of
+zero or a negative value.
+
+ The final optional argument INNER-POS controls the placement of
+CONTENT inside the box. These are the possible values are (the default
+is the value of POSITION).
+
+'t'
+ Place CONTENT at the top of the box.
+
+'c'
+ Place it in the vertical center.
+
+'b'
+ Place it at the box bottom.
+
+'s'
+ Stretch CONTENTS out vertically; it must contain vertically
+ stretchable space.
+
+ The INNER-POS argument makes sense when the HEIGHT option is set to a
+value larger than the 'minipage''s natural height. To see the effect of
+the options, run this example with the various choices in place of 'b'.
+
+ Text before
+ \begin{center}
+ ---\begin{minipage}[c][3in][b]{0.25\textwidth}
+ first\\ second\\ third
+ \end{minipage}
+ \end{center}
+ Text after
+
+ By default paragraphs are not indented in a 'minipage'. Change that
+with a command such as '\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}' at the start of
+CONTENTS.
+
+ Footnotes in a 'minipage' environment are handled in a way that is
+particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
+'\footnote' or '\footnotetext' command puts the footnote at the bottom
+of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the
+'\mpfootnote' counter instead of the ordinary 'footnote' counter (*note
+Counters::).
+
+ This puts the footnote at the bottom of the table, not the bottom of
+the page.
+
+ \begin{center} % center the minipage on the line
+ \begin{minipage}{2.5in}
+ \begin{center} % center the table inside the minipage
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \textsc{Monarch} &\textsc{Reign} \\ \hline
+ Elizabeth II &63 years\footnote{to date} \\
+ Victoria &63 years \\
+ George III &59 years
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+ \end{minipage}
+ \end{center}
+
+ If you nest minipages then there is an oddness when using footnotes.
+Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next
+'\end{minipage}' which may not be their logical place.
+
+ This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic.
+They are vertically centered.
+
+ \newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+ ...
+ \begin{center}
+ \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]{nyc.png}}
+ \hspace{0.1\textwidth}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+ \begin{tabular}{r|l}
+ \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &Pop (million) \\ \hline
+ The Bronx &$1.5$ \\
+ Brooklyn &$2.6$ \\
+ Manhattan &$1.6$ \\
+ Queens &$2.3$ \\
+ Staten Island &$0.5$
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{minipage}
+ \end{center}
+
+8.19 'picture'
+==============
+
+Synopses:
+ \begin{picture}(WIDTH,HEIGHT)
+ PICTURE COMMANDS
+ \end{picture}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{picture}(WIDTH,HEIGHT)(XOFFSET,YOFFSET)
+ PICTURE COMMANDS
+ \end{picture}
+
+ An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows,
+boxes, circles, and text. Note that while this environment is not
+obsolete, new documents typically use much more powerful graphics
+creation systems, such as 'TikZ', 'PSTricks', 'MetaPost', or
+'Asymptote'. These are not covered in this document; see CTAN.
+
+ This shows the parallelogram law for adding vectors.
+
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+ \begin{picture}(6,6) % picture box will be 6cm wide by 6cm tall
+ \put(0,0){\vector(2,1){4}} % for every 2 over this vector goes 1 up
+ \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ first leg}}
+ \put(4,2){\vector(1,2){2}}
+ \put(5,4){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ second leg}}
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,1){6}}
+ \put(3,3){\makebox(0,0)[r]{sum\ }}
+ \end{picture}
+
+ You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an
+exact location.
+
+ \usepackage{color,graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{center}
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth}
+ \begin{picture}(1,1) % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
+ \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}}
+ \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}}
+ \end{picture}
+ \end{center}
+
+The red X will be precisely a quarter of the '\linewidth' from the left
+margin, and '0.35\linewidth' up from the bottom. Another example of
+this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get repeat
+material on each of a document's pages.
+
+ The 'picture' environment has one required argument, a pair of
+numbers (WIDTH,HEIGHT). Multiply these by the value '\unitlength' to
+get the nominal size of the output, the space that LaTeX reserves on the
+output page. This nominal size need not be how large the picture really
+is; LaTeX will draw things from the picture outside the picture's box.
+
+ This environment also has an optional argument (XOFFSET,YOFFSET). It
+is used to shift the origin. Unlike most optional arguments, this one
+is not contained in square brackets. As with the required argument, it
+consists of two real numbers. Multiply these by '\unitlength' to get
+the point at the lower-left corner of the picture.
+
+ For example, if '\unitlength' has been set to '1mm', the command
+
+ \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+
+produces a box of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters. The
+picture's origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner
+is there, and the upper-right corner is at (110mm,220mm). When you
+first draw a picture you typically omit the optional argument, leaving
+the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
+picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate
+optional argument.
+
+ Each PICTURE COMMAND tells LaTeX where to put something by naming its
+position. A "position" is a pair such as '(2.4,-5)' giving the x- and
+y-coordinates. A "coordinate" is a not a length, it is a real number
+(it may have a decimal point or a minus sign). It specifies a length in
+multiples of the unit length '\unitlength', so if '\unitlength' has been
+set to '1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54
+centimeters.
+
+ LaTeX's default for '\unitlength' is '1pt'. it is a rigid length
+(*note Lengths::). Change it with the '\setlength' command (*note
+\setlength::). Make this change only outside of a 'picture'
+environment.
+
+ Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at
+the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears
+as an argument, as with '\put(1,2){...}', it is not enclosed in braces
+since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also, unlike in
+some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are further up the
+page.
+
+ There are four ways to put things in a picture: '\put', '\multiput',
+'\qbezier', and '\graphpaper'. The most often used is '\put'. This
+
+ \put(11.3,-0.3){...}
+
+places the object with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-0.3).
+The reference points for various objects will be described below. The
+'\put' command creates an "LR box" (*note Modes::). Anything that can
+go in an '\mbox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::) can go in the text argument
+of the '\put' command. The reference point will be the lower left
+corner of the box. In this picture
+
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
+ ...\begin{picture}(1,1)
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,0){1}}
+ \put(0,0){\line(1,1){1}}
+ \end{picture}
+
+the three dots are just slightly left of the point of the angle formed
+by the two lines. (Also, '\line(1,1){1}' does not call for a line of
+length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of 1.)
+
+ The '\multiput', 'qbezier', and 'graphpaper' commands are described
+below.
+
+ This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using '\qbezier' for that
+curve.
+
+ \begin{picture}(3,1.5)
+ \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}} % x axis
+ \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}} % y axis
+ \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}} % left side rectangle
+ \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}} % right side
+ \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
+ \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
+ \thicklines % below here, lines are twice as thick
+ \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}}
+ \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}}
+ \end{picture}
+
+8.19.1 '\put'
+-------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \put(XCOORD,YCOORD){CONTENT}
+
+ Place CONTENT at the coordinate (XCOORD,YCOORD). See the discussion
+of coordinates and '\unitlength' in *note picture::. The CONTENT is
+processed in LR mode (*note Modes::) so it cannot contain line breaks.
+
+ This includes the text into the 'picture'.
+
+ \put(4.5,2.5){Apply the \textit{unpoke} move}
+
+ The reference point, the location (4.5,2.5), is the lower left of the
+text, at the bottom left of the 'A'.
+
+8.19.2 '\multiput'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \multiput(X,Y)(DELTA_X,DELTA_Y){NUM-COPIES}{OBJ}
+
+ Copy OBJ a total of NUM-COPIES times, with an increment of
+DELTA_X,DELTA_Y. The OBJ first appears at position (x,y), then at
+(x+\delta_x,y+\delta_y), and so on.
+
+ This draws a simple grid with every fifth line in bold (see also
+*note \graphpaper::).
+
+ \begin{picture}(10,10)
+ \linethickness{0.05mm}
+ \multiput(0,0)(1,0){10}{\line(0,1){10}}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,1){10}{\line(1,0){10}}
+ \linethickness{0.5mm}
+ \multiput(0,0)(5,0){3}{\line(0,1){10}}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,5){3}{\line(1,0){10}}
+ \end{picture}
+
+8.19.3 '\qbezier'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \qbezier(X1,Y1)(X2,Y2)(X3,Y3)
+ \qbezier[NUM](X1,Y1)(X2,Y2)(X3,Y3)
+
+ Draw a quadratic Bezier curve whose control points are given by the
+three required arguments '(X1,Y1)', '(X2,Y2)', and '(X3,Y3)'. That is,
+the curve runs from (X1,Y1) to (X3,Y3), is quadratic, and is such that
+the tangent line at (X1,Y1) passes through (X2,Y2), as does the tangent
+line at (X3,Y3).
+
+ This draws a curve from the coordinate (1,1) to (1,0).
+
+ \qbezier(1,1)(1.25,0.75)(1,0)
+
+The curve's tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the
+curve's tangent line at (1,0).
+
+ The optional argument NUM gives the number of calculated intermediate
+points. The default is to draw a smooth curve whose maximum number of
+points is '\qbeziermax' (change this value with '\renewcommand').
+
+8.19.4 '\graphpaper'
+--------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \graphpaper(X_INIT,Y_INIT)(X_DIMEN,Y_DIMEN)
+ \graphpaper[SPACING](X_INIT,Y_INIT)(X_DIMEN,Y_DIMEN)
+
+ Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the 'graphpap' package. The grid's
+origin is '(X_INIT,Y_INIT)'. Grid lines come every SPACING units (the
+default is 10). The grid extends X_DIMEN units to the right and Y_DIMEN
+units up. All arguments must be positive integers.
+
+ This make a grid with seven vertical lines and eleven horizontal
+lines.
+
+ \usepackage{graphpap} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{picture}(6,20) % in document body
+ \graphpaper[2](0,0)(12,20)
+ \end{picture}
+
+The lines are numbered every ten units.
+
+8.19.5 '\line'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \line(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}
+
+ Draw a line. It slopes such that it vertically rises Y_RISE for
+every horizontal X_RUN. The TRAVEL is the total horizontal change -- it
+is not the length of the vector, it is the change in x. In the special
+case of vertical lines, where (X_RUN,Y_RISE)=(0,1), the TRAVEL gives the
+change in y.
+
+ This draws a line starting at coordinates (1,3).
+
+ \put(1,3){\line(2,5){4}}
+
+For every over 2, this line will go up 5. Because TRAVEL specifies that
+this goes over 4, it must go up 10. Thus its endpoint is
+(1,3)+(4,10)=(5,13). In particular, note that TRAVEL=4 is not the
+length of the line, it is the change in x.
+
+ The arguments X_RUN and Y_RISE are integers that can be positive,
+negative, or zero. (If both are 0 then LaTeX treats the second as 1.)
+With '\put(X_INIT,Y_INIT){\line(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}}', if X_RUN is
+negative then the line's ending point has a first coordinate that is
+less than X_INIT. If Y_RISE is negative then the line's ending point
+has a second coordinate that is less than Y_INIT.
+
+ If TRAVEL is negative then you get 'LaTeX Error: Bad \line or \vector
+argument.'
+
+ Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with a limited range of slopes
+because these lines are made by putting together line segments from
+pre-made fonts. The two numbers X_RUN and Y_RISE must have integer
+values from -6 through 6. Also, they must be relatively prime, so that
+(X_RUN,Y_RISE) can be (2,1) but not (4,2) (if you choose the latter then
+instead of lines you get sequences of arrowheads; the solution is to
+switch to the former). To get lines of arbitrary slope and plenty of
+other shapes in a system like 'picture', see the package 'pict2e' on
+CTAN. Another solution is to use a full-featured graphics system such as
+'TikZ', or 'PSTricks', or 'MetaPost', or 'Asymptote'
+
+8.19.6 '\linethickness'
+-----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \linethickness{DIM}
+
+ Declares the thickness of subsequent horizontal and vertical lines in
+a picture to be DIM, which must be a positive length (*note Lengths::).
+It differs from '\thinlines' and '\thicklines' in that it does not
+affect the thickness of slanted lines, circles, or ovals.
+
+8.19.7 '\thinlines'
+-------------------
+
+Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.4pt. This is the default thickness, so
+this command is unnecessary unless the thickness has been changed with
+either *note \linethickness:: or *note \thicklines::.
+
+8.19.8 '\thicklines'
+--------------------
+
+Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.8pt. See also *note \linethickness::
+and *note \thinlines::. This command is illustrated in the Trapezoidal
+Rule example of *note picture::.
+
+8.19.9 '\circle'
+----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \circle{DIAMETER}
+ \circle*{DIAMETER}
+
+ Produces a circle with a diameter as close as possible to the
+specified one. The '*' form produces a filled-in circle.
+
+ This draws a circle of radius 6, centered at '(5,7)'.
+
+ \put(5,7){\circle{6}}
+
+ The available radii for 'circle' are, in points, the even numbers
+from 2 to 20, inclusive. For 'circle*' they are all the integers from 1
+to 15.
+
+8.19.10 '\oval'
+---------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)
+ \oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[PORTION]
+
+ Produce a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument
+PORTION allows you to produce only half or a quarter of the oval. For
+half an oval take PORTION to be one of these.
+
+'t'
+ top half
+'b'
+ bottom half
+'r'
+ right half
+'l'
+ left half
+
+ Produce only one quarter of the oval by setting PORTION to 'tr',
+'br', 'bl', or 'tl'.
+
+ This draws the top half of an oval that is 3 wide and 7 tall.
+
+ \put(5,7){\oval(3,7)[t]}
+
+The (5,7) is the center of the entire oval, not just the center of the
+top half.
+
+ These shapes are not ellipses. They are rectangles whose corners are
+made with quarter circles. These circles have a maximum radius of 20pt
+(*note \circle:: for the sizes). Thus large ovals are just boxes with a
+small amount of corner rounding.
+
+8.19.11 '\shortstack'
+---------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \shortstack[POSITION]{LINE 1 \\ ... }
+
+ Produce a vertical stack of objects.
+
+ This labels the y axis.
+
+ \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}} % x axis
+ \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}} % y
+ \put(-0.25,2){\makebox[0][r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}}
+
+For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack.
+In the above example the *note \mbox & \makebox:: puts the stack flush
+right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits slightly to
+the left of the y axis.
+
+ The valid positions are:
+
+'r'
+ Make objects flush right
+'l'
+ Make objects flush left
+'c'
+ Center objects (default)
+
+ Separate objects into lines with '\\'. These stacks are short in
+that, unlike in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment, here the rows are
+not spaced out to be of even heights. Thus, in
+'\shortstack{X\\o\\o\\X}' the first and last rows are taller than the
+middle two. You can adjust row heights either by putting in the usual
+interline spacing with '\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}', or by hand,
+via an explicit zero-width box '\shortstack{X \\ \rule{0pt}{12pt}
+o\\o\\X}' or by using '\\''s optional argument '\shortstack{X\\[2pt]
+o\\o\\X}'.
+
+ The '\shortstack' command is also available outside the 'picture'
+environment.
+
+8.19.12 '\vector'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \vector(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}
+
+ Draw a line ending in an arrow. The slope of that line is: it
+vertically rises Y_RISE for every horizontal X_RUN. The TRAVEL is the
+total horizontal change -- it is not the length of the vector, it is the
+change in x. In the special case of vertical vectors, if
+(X_RUN,Y_RISE)=(0,1), then TRAVEL gives the change in y.
+
+ For an example see *note picture::.
+
+ For elaboration on X_RUN and Y_RISE see *note \line::. As there, the
+values of X_RUN and Y_RISE are limited. For '\vector' you must chooses
+integers between -4 and 4, inclusive. Also, the two you choose must be
+relatively prime. Thus, '\vector(2,1){4}' is acceptable but
+'\vector(4,2){4}' is not (if you use the latter then you get a sequence
+of arrowheads).
+
+8.19.13 '\makebox' (picture)
+----------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \makebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT){TEXT}
+ \makebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+ Make a box to hold TEXT. This command fits with the 'picture'
+environment, although you can use it outside of there, because REC-WIDTH
+and REC-HEIGHT are numbers specifying distances in terms of the
+'\unitlength' (*note picture::). This command is similar to the normal
+'\makebox' command (*note \mbox & \makebox::) except here that you must
+specify the width and height. This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
+ This makes a box of length 3.5 times '\unitlength' and height 4 times
+'\unitlength'.
+
+ \put(1,2){\makebox(3.5,4){...}}
+
+ The optional argument 'POSITION' specifies where in the box the TEXT
+appears. The default is to center it, both horizontally and vertically.
+To place it somewhere else, use a string with one or two of these
+letters.
+
+'t'
+ Puts TEXT the top of the box.
+
+'b'
+ Put TEXT at the bottom.
+
+'l'
+ Put TEXT on the left.
+
+'r'
+ Put TEXT on the right.
+
+8.19.14 '\framebox' (picture)
+-----------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \framebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT){TEXT}
+ \framebox(REC-WIDTH,REC-HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+ This is the same as *note \makebox (picture):: except that it puts a
+frame around the outside of the box that it creates. The reference
+point is the bottom left corner of the frame. This command fits with
+the 'picture' environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+'\unitlength' (*note picture::). This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
+ This example creates a frame 2.5 inches by 3 inches and puts the text
+in the center.
+
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}
+ \framebox(2.5,3){test text}
+
+ The required arguments are that the rectangle has overall width
+RECT-WIDTH units and height RECT-HEIGHT units.
+
+ The optional argument POSITION specifies the position of TEXT; see
+*note \makebox (picture):: for the values that it can take.
+
+ The rule has thickness '\fboxrule' and there is a blank space
+'\fboxsep' between the frame and the contents of the box.
+
+ For this command, you must specify the WIDTH and HEIGHT. If you want
+to just put a frame around some contents whose dimension is determined
+in some other way then either use '\fbox' (*note \fbox & \framebox::) or
+'\frame' (*note \frame::).
+
+8.19.15 '\frame'
+----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \frame{CONTENTS}
+
+ Puts a rectangular frame around CONTENTS. The reference point is the
+bottom left corner of the frame. In contrast to '\framebox' (*note
+\framebox (picture)::), this command puts no extra space is put between
+the frame and the object. It is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+8.19.16 '\dashbox'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \dashbox{DASH-LEN}(RECT-WIDTH,RECT-HEIGHT){TEXT}
+ \dashbox{DASH-LEN}(RECT-WIDTH,RECT-HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+ Create a dashed rectangle around TEXT. This command fits with the
+'picture' environment, although you can use it outside of there, because
+lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+'\unitlength' (*note picture::).
+
+ The required arguments are: dashes are DASH-LEN units long, with the
+same length gap, and the rectangle has overall width RECT-WIDTH units
+and height RECT-HEIGHT units.
+
+ The optional argument POSITION specifies the position of TEXT; see
+*note \makebox (picture):: for the values that it can take.
+
+ This shows that you can use non-integer value for DASH-LEN.
+
+ \put(0,0){\dashbox{0.1}(5,0.5){My hovercraft is full of eels.}}
+
+Each dash will be '0.1\unitlength' long, the box's width is
+'5\unitlength' and its height is '0.5\unitlength'.
+
+ As in that example, a dashed box looks best when RECT-WIDTH and
+RECT-HEIGHT are multiples of the DASH-LEN.
+
+8.20 'quotation' & 'quote'
+==========================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{quotation}
+ TEXT
+ \end{quotation}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{quote}
+ TEXT
+ \end{quote}
+
+ Include a quotation. Both environments indent margins on both sides
+by '\leftmargin' and the text is right-justified.
+
+ They differ in how they treat paragraphs. In the 'quotation'
+environment, paragraphs are indented by 1.5em and the space between
+paragraphs is small, '0pt plus 1pt'. In the 'quote' environment,
+paragraphs are not indented and there is vertical space between
+paragraphs (it is the rubber length '\parsep').
+
+ \begin{quotation} \small\it
+ Four score and seven years ago
+ ... shall not perish from the earth.
+ \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
+ \end{quotation}
+
+8.21 'tabbing'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ ROW1COL1 \= ROW1COL2 ... \\
+ ROW2COL1 \> ROW2COL2 ... \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+ Align text in columns, by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much
+as was done on a typewriter. This is less often used than the
+environments 'tabular' (*note tabular::) or 'array' (*note array::)
+because in those the width of each column need not be constant and need
+not be known in advance.
+
+ This example has a first line where the tab stops are set to explicit
+widths, ended by a '\kill' command (which is described below):
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ \hspace{0.75in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \kill
+ Ship \> Guns \> Year \\
+ \textit{Sophie} \> 14 \> 1800 \\
+ \textit{Polychrest} \> 24 \> 1803 \\
+ \textit{Lively} \> 38 \> 1804 \\
+ \textit{Surprise} \> 28 \> 1805 \\
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+ Both the 'tabbing' environment and the more widely-used 'tabular'
+environment put text in columns. The most important distinction is that
+in 'tabular' the width of columns is determined automatically by LaTeX,
+while in 'tabbing' the user sets the tab stops. Another distinction is
+that 'tabular' generates a box, but 'tabbing' can be broken across
+pages. Finally, while 'tabular' can be used in any mode, 'tabbing' can
+be used only in paragraph mode and it starts a new paragraph.
+
+ A 'tabbing' environment always starts a new paragraph, without
+indentation. Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need
+to use the starred form of the '\hspace' command at the beginning of a
+tabbed row. The right margin of the 'tabbing' environment is the end of
+line, so that the width of the environment is '\linewidth'.
+
+ The 'tabbing' environment contains a sequence of "tabbed rows". The
+first tabbed row begins immediately after '\begin{tabbing}' and each row
+ends with '\\' or '\kill'. The last row may omit the '\\' and end with
+just '\end{tabbing}'.
+
+ At any point the 'tabbing' environment has a current tab stop
+pattern, a sequence of N > 0 tab stops, numbered 0, 1, etc. These
+create N corresponding columns. Tab stop 0 is always the left margin,
+defined by the enclosing environment. Tab stop number I is set if it is
+assigned a horizontal position on the page. Tab stop number I can only
+be set if all the stops 0, ..., i-1 have already been set; normally
+later stops are to the right of earlier ones.
+
+ By default any text typeset in a 'tabbing' environment is typeset
+ragged right and left-aligned on the current tab stop. Typesetting is
+done in LR mode (*note Modes::).
+
+ The following commands can be used inside a 'tabbing' environment.
+They are all fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+'\\ (tabbing)'
+ End a tabbed line and typeset it.
+
+'\= (tabbing)'
+ Sets a tab stop at the current position.
+
+'\> (tabbing)'
+ Advances to the next tab stop.
+
+'\<'
+ Put following text to the left of the local margin (without
+ changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line.
+
+'\+'
+ Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
+ one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary.
+
+'\-'
+ Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
+ one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary.
+
+'\' (tabbing)'
+ Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column,
+ i.e., everything from the most recent '\>', '\<', '\'', '\\', or
+ '\kill' command, to the previous column and aligned to the right,
+ flush against the current column's tab stop.
+
+'\` (tabbing)'
+ Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including
+ tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last
+ column because there's no tab stop there. The '\`' command moves
+ all the text that follows it, up to the '\\' or '\end{tabbing}'
+ command that ends the line, to the right margin of the 'tabbing'
+ environment. There must be no '\>' or '\'' command between the
+ '\`' and the '\\' or '\end{tabbing}' command that ends the line.
+
+'\a (tabbing)'
+ In a 'tabbing' environment, the commands '\=', '\'' and '\`' do not
+ produce accents as usual (*note Accents::). Instead, use the
+ commands '\a=', '\a'' and '\a`'.
+
+'\kill'
+ Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like '\\' except
+ that it throws away the current line instead of producing output
+ for it. Any '\=', '\+' or '\-' commands in that line remain in
+ effect.
+
+'\poptabs'
+ Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last '\pushtabs'.
+
+'\pushtabs'
+ Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily
+ changing tab stop positions in the middle of a 'tabbing'
+ environment.
+
+'\tabbingsep'
+ Distance of the text moved by '\'' to left of current tab stop.
+
+ This example typesets a Pascal function:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \> begin \= \+ \\
+ \> if \= n > 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+The output looks like this.
+
+ function fact(n : integer) : integer;
+ begin
+ if n > 1 then
+ fact := n * fact(n-1);
+ else
+ fact := 1;
+ end;
+
+This example is just for illustration of the environment. To actually
+typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim environment
+(*note verbatim::) would normally be best. For pretty-printed code,
+there are quite a few packages, including 'algorithm2e', 'fancyvrb',
+'listings', and 'minted'.
+
+8.22 'table'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{table}[PLACEMENT]
+ TABLE BODY
+ \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE} % optional
+ \label{LABEL} % also optional
+ \end{table}
+
+ A class of floats (*note Floats::). They cannot be split across
+pages and so they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but
+instead are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a
+following page.
+
+ This example 'table' environment contains a 'tabular'
+
+ \begin{table}
+ \centering\small
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Author}}
+ &\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Piece}} \\ \hline
+ Bach &Cello Suite Number 1 \\
+ Beethoven &Cello Sonata Number 3 \\
+ Brahms &Cello Sonata Number 1
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Top cello pieces}
+ \label{tab:cello}
+ \end{table}
+
+but you can put many different kinds of content in a 'table', including
+text, LaTeX commands, etc.
+
+ For the possible values of PLACEMENT and their effect on the float
+placement algorithm, see *note Floats::.
+
+ The table body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth'. It
+can contain text, commands, graphics, etc.
+
+ The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
+references::). The '\caption' command is also optional. It specifies
+caption text for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional
+LOTTITLE is present then that text is used in the list of tables instead
+of TITLE (*note Table of contents etc.::).
+
+ In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a
+page, unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
+
+ \begin{table}[b]
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{r|p{2in}} \hline
+ One &The loneliest number \\
+ Two &Can be as sad as one.
+ It's the loneliest number since the number one.
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Cardinal virtues}
+ \label{tab:CardinalVirtues}
+ \end{table}
+
+8.23 'tabular'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{tabular}[POS]{COLS}
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabular}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{tabular*}{WIDTH}[POS]{COLS}
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabular*}
+
+ Produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of horizontal rows.
+Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically in columns. This
+illustrates many of the features.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textit{Player name} &\textit{Career home runs} \\
+ \hline
+ Hank Aaron &755 \\
+ Babe Ruth &714
+ \end{tabular}
+
+The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar
+between them. This is specified in 'tabular''s argument '{l|l}'. Put
+the entries into different columns by separating them with an ampersand,
+'&'. The end of each row is marked with a double backslash, '\\'. Put
+a horizontal rule below a row, after a double backslash, with '\hline'.
+After the last row the '\\' is optional, unless an '\hline' command
+follows to put a rule below the table.
+
+ The required and optional arguments to 'tabular' consist of:
+
+POS
+ Optional. Specifies the table's vertical position. The default is
+ to align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of
+ the surrounding text. There are two other possible alignments: 't'
+ aligns the table so its top row matches the baseline of the
+ surrounding text, and 'b' aligns on the bottom row.
+
+ This only has an effect if there is other text. In the common case
+ of a 'tabular' alone in a 'center' environment this option makes no
+ difference.
+
+COLS
+ Required. Specifies the formatting of columns. It consists of a
+ sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the types of
+ column and intercolumn material.
+
+ 'l'
+ A column of left-aligned items.
+
+ 'r'
+ A column of right-aligned items.
+
+ 'c'
+ A column of centered items.
+
+ '|'
+ A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
+
+ '@{TEXT OR SPACE}'
+ Insert TEXT OR SPACE at this location in every row. The TEXT
+ OR SPACE material is typeset in LR mode. This text is fragile
+ (*note \protect::).
+
+ If between two columns there is no @-expression then LaTeX's
+ 'book', 'article', and 'report' classes will put on either
+ side of each column a space of length '\tabcolsep', which by
+ default is 6pt. That is, by default adjacent columns are
+ separated by 12pt (so '\tabcolsep' is misleadingly named since
+ it is only half of the separation between tabular columns).
+ In addition, a space of 6pt also comes before the first column
+ and after the final column, unless you put a '@{...}' or '|'
+ there.
+
+ If you override the default and use an @-expression then LaTeX
+ does not insert '\tabcolsep' so you must insert any desired
+ space yourself, as in '@{\hspace{1em}}'.
+
+ An empty expression '@{}' will eliminate the space. In
+ particular, sometimes you want to eliminate the space before
+ the first column or after the last one, as in the example
+ below where the tabular lines need to lie on the left margin.
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ \begin{tabular}{@{}l}
+ ...
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ The next example shows text, a decimal point between the
+ columns, arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on
+ it.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{r@{$.$}l}
+ $3$ &$14$ \\
+ $9$ &$80665$
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ An '\extracolsep{WD}' command in an @-expression causes an
+ extra space of width WD to appear to the left of all
+ subsequent columns, until countermanded by another
+ '\extracolsep'. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra
+ space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An '\extracolsep'
+ command can be used only in an @-expression in the 'cols'
+ argument. Below, LaTeX inserts the right amount of
+ intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches wide.
+
+ \begin{tabular*}{4in}{l@{\extracolsep{\fill}}l}
+ Seven times down, eight times up \ldots
+ &such is life!
+ \end{tabular*}
+
+ To insert commands that are automatically executed before a
+ given column, load the 'array' package and use the '>{...}'
+ specifier.
+
+ 'p{WD}'
+ Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width WD, as
+ if it were the argument of a '\parbox[t]{wd}{...}' command.
+
+ A line break double backslash '\\' may not appear in the item,
+ except inside an environment like 'minipage', 'array', or
+ 'tabular', or inside an explicit '\parbox', or in the scope of
+ a '\centering', '\raggedright', or '\raggedleft' declaration
+ (when used in a 'p'-column element these declarations must
+ appear inside braces, as with '{\centering .. \\ ..}').
+ Otherwise LaTeX will misinterpret the double backslash as
+ ending the row. Instead, to get a line break in there use
+ '\newline' (*note \newline::).
+
+ '*{NUM}{COLS}'
+ Equivalent to NUM copies of COLS, where NUM is a positive
+ integer and COLS is a list of specifiers. Thus the specifier
+ '\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}' is equivalent to the specifier
+ '\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}'. Note that COLS may contain
+ another '*'-expression.
+
+WIDTH
+ Required for 'tabular*', not allowed for 'tabular'. Specifies the
+ width of the 'tabular*' environment. The space between columns
+ should be rubber, as with '@{\extracolsep{\fill}}', to allow the
+ table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
+ are likely to get the 'Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
+ ...' warning.
+
+ Parameters that control formatting:
+
+'\arrayrulewidth'
+ A length that is the thickness of the rule created by '|',
+ '\hline', and '\vline' in the 'tabular' and 'array' environments.
+ The default is '.4pt'. Change it as in
+ '\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}'.
+
+'\arraystretch'
+ A factor by which the spacing between rows in the 'tabular' and
+ 'array' environments is multiplied. The default is '1', for no
+ scaling. Change it as '\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}'.
+
+'\doublerulesep'
+ A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced
+ by the '||' specifier. The default is '2pt'.
+
+'\tabcolsep'
+ A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
+ '6pt'. Change it with '\setlength'.
+
+ The following commands can be used inside the body of a 'tabular'
+environment, the first two inside an entry and the second two between
+lines:
+
+8.23.1 '\multicolumn'
+---------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \multicolumn{NUMCOLS}{COLS}{TEXT}
+
+ Make an 'array' or 'tabular' entry that spans several columns. The
+first argument NUMCOLS gives the number of columns to span. The second
+argument COLS specifies the formatting of the entry, with 'c' for
+centered, 'l' for flush left, or 'r' for flush right. The third
+argument TEXT gives the contents of that entry.
+
+ In this example, in the first row, the second and third columns are
+spanned by the single heading 'Name'.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{lccl}
+ \textit{ID} &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\
+ \hline
+ 978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick &55 \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ What counts as a column is: the column format specifier for the
+'array' or 'tabular' environment is broken into parts, where each part
+(except the first) begins with 'l', 'c', 'r', or 'p'. So from
+'\begin{tabular}{|r|ccp{1.5in}|}' the parts are '|r|', 'c', 'c',
+and 'p{1.5in}|'.
+
+ The COLS argument overrides the 'array' or 'tabular' environment's
+intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn entry. To affect
+that area, this argument can contain vertical bars '|' indicating the
+placement of vertical rules, and '@{...}' expressions. Thus if COLS is
+'|c|' then this multicolumn entry will be centered and a vertical rule
+will come in the intercolumn area before it and after it. This table
+details the exact behavior.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{|cc|c|c|}
+ \multicolumn{1}{r}{w} % entry one
+ &\multicolumn{1}{|r|}{x} % entry two
+ &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{y} % entry three
+ &z % entry four
+ \end{tabular}
+
+Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule because
+the '\multicolumn' has the COLS specifier 'r' with no initial vertical
+bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a vertical rule;
+although the first COLS does not have an ending vertical bar, the second
+COLS does have a starting one. Between entry two and entry three there
+is a single vertical rule; despite that the COLS in both of the
+surrounding 'multicolumn''s call for a vertical rule, you only get one
+rule. Between entry three and entry four there is no vertical rule; the
+default calls for one but the COLS in the entry three '\multicolumn'
+leaves it out, and that takes precedence. Finally, following entry four
+there is a vertical rule because of the default.
+
+ The number of spanned columns NUMCOLS can be 1. Besides giving the
+ability to change the horizontal alignment, this also is useful to
+override for one row the 'tabular' definition's default intercolumn area
+specification, including the placement of vertical rules.
+
+ In the example below, in the 'tabular' definition the first column is
+specified to default to left justified but in the first row the entry is
+centered with '\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}'. Also in the first
+row, the second and third columns are spanned by a single entry with
+'\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}}', overriding the specification to
+center those two columns on the page range en-dash.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{l|r@{--}l}
+ \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}
+ &multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}} \\ \hline
+ Baroque &1600 &1760 \\
+ Classical &1730 &1820 \\
+ Romantic &1780 &1910 \\
+ Impressionistic &1875 &1925
+ \end{tabular}
+
+Although the 'tabular' specification by default puts a vertical rule
+between the first and second columns, no such vertical rule appears in
+the first row here. That's because there is no vertical bar in the COLS
+part of the first row's first '\multicolumn' command.
+
+8.23.2 '\vline'
+---------------
+
+Draw a vertical line in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment extending the
+full height and depth of an entry's row. Can also be used in an
+@-expression, although its synonym vertical bar '|' is more common.
+This command is rarely used in the body of a table; typically a table's
+vertical lines are specified in 'tabular''s COLS argument and overridden
+as needed with '\multicolumn' (*note tabular::).
+
+ The example below illustrates some pitfalls. In the first row's
+second entry the '\hfill' moves the '\vline' to the left edge of the
+cell. But that is different than putting it halfway between the two
+columns, so between the first and second columns there are two vertical
+rules, with the one from the '{c|cc}' specifier coming before the one
+produced by the '\vline\hfill'. In contrast, the first row's third
+entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two columns. In
+the second row, the 'ghi' is the widest entry in its column so in the
+'\vline\hfill' the '\hfill' has no effect and the vertical line in that
+entry appears immediately next to the 'g', with no whitespace.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{c|cc}
+ x &\vline\hfill y &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\ % row 1
+ abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi % row 2
+ \end{tabular}
+
+8.23.3 '\cline'
+---------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \cline{I-J}
+
+ In an 'array' or 'tabular' environment, draw a horizontal rule
+beginning in column I and ending in column J. The dash, '-', must
+appear in the mandatory argument. To span a single column use the
+number twice, as with '\cline{2-2}'.
+
+ This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second
+rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the
+third and fourth columns. The two lines are side-by-side, at the same
+height.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{llrr}
+ a &b &c &d \\ \cline{1-1} \cline{3-4}
+ e &f &g &h
+ \end{tabular}
+
+8.23.4 '\hline'
+---------------
+
+Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing 'tabular' or 'array'
+environment. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom,
+and between the rows of a table.
+
+ In this example the top of the table has two horizontal rules, one
+above the other, that span both columns. The bottom of the table has a
+single rule spanning both columns. Because of the '\hline', the
+'tabular' second row's line ending double backslash '\\' is required.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{ll} \hline\hline
+ Baseball &Red Sox \\
+ Basketball &Celtics \\ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+
+8.24 'thebibliography'
+======================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{thebibliography}{WIDEST-LABEL}
+ \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
+ ...
+ \end{thebibliography}
+
+ Produce a bibliography or reference list. There are two ways to
+produce bibliographic lists. This environment is suitable when you have
+only a few references and can maintain the list by hand. *Note Using
+BibTeX:: for a more sophisticated approach.
+
+ This shows the environment with two entries.
+
+ This work is based on \cite{latexdps}.
+ Together they are \cite{latexdps, texbook}.
+ ...
+ \begin{thebibliography}{9}
+ \bibitem{latexdps}
+ Leslie Lamport.
+ \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+ \bibitem{texbook}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit{The \TeX book}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+ \end{thebibliography}
+
+This styles the first reference as '[1] Leslie ...', and so that
+'\cite{latexdps}' produces the matching '... based on [1]'. The second
+'\cite' produces '[1, 2]'. You must compile the document twice to
+resolve these references.
+
+ The mandatory argument WIDEST-LABEL is text that, when typeset, is as
+wide as the widest item label produced by the '\bibitem' commands. The
+tradition is to use '9' for bibliographies with less than 10 references,
+'99' for ones with less than 100, etc.
+
+ The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as 'Bibliography'.
+To change it there are two cases. In the 'book' and 'report' classes,
+where the top level sectioning is '\chapter' and the default title is
+'Bibliography', that title is in the macro '\bibname'. For 'article',
+where the class's top level sectioning is '\section' and the default is
+'References', the title is in macro '\refname'. Change it by redefining
+the command, as with '\renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}' after
+'\begin{document}'.
+
+ Language support packages such as 'babel' will automatically redefine
+'\refname' or '\bibname' to fit the selected language.
+
+8.24.1 '\bibitem'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \bibitem{CITE_KEY}
+
+or
+
+ \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
+
+ Generate an entry labeled by LABEL. The default is for LaTeX to
+generates a number using the 'enumi' counter. The "citation key"
+CITE_KEY is a string of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but
+not comma).
+
+ *Note thebibliography:: for an example.
+
+ The optional LABEL changes the default label from an integer to the
+given string. With this
+
+ \begin{thebibliography}
+ \bibitem[Lamport 1993]{latexdps}
+ Leslie Lamport.
+ \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+ \bibitem{texbook}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit{The \TeX book}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+ \end{thebibliography}
+
+the first entry will be styled as '[Lamport 1993] Leslie ...' (The
+amount of horizontal space that LaTeX leaves for the label depends on
+the WIDEST-LABEL argument of the 'thebibliography' environment; see
+*note thebibliography::.) Similarly, '... based on \cite{latexdps}'
+will produce '... based on [Lamport 1994]'.
+
+ If you mix '\bibitem' entries having a LABEL with those that do not
+then LaTeX will number the unlabelled ones sequentially. In the example
+above the 'texbook' entry will appear as '[1] Donald ...', despite that
+it is the second entry.
+
+ If you use the same CITE_KEY twice then you get 'LaTeX Warning: There
+were multiply-defined labels'.
+
+ Under the hood, LaTeX remembers the CITE_KEY and LABEL information
+because '\bibitem' writes it to the auxiliary file 'FILENAME.aux'. For
+instance, the above example causes '\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993}'
+and '\bibcite{texbook}{1}' to appear in that file. The '.aux' file is
+read by the '\begin{document}' command and then the information is
+available for '\cite' commands. This explains why you need to run LaTeX
+twice to resolve references: once to write it out and once to read it
+in.
+
+ Because of this two-pass algorithm, when you add a '\bibitem' or
+change its CITE_KEY you may get 'LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have
+changed. Rerun to get cross-references right'. Fix it by recompiling.
+
+8.24.2 '\cite'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \cite{KEYS}
+
+or
+
+ \cite[SUBCITE]{KEYS}
+
+ Generate as output a citation to the references associated with KEYS.
+The mandatory KEYS is a citation key, or a comma-separated list of
+citation keys (*note \bibitem::).
+
+ This
+
+ The ultimate source is \cite{texbook}.
+ ...
+ \begin{thebibliography}
+ \bibitem{texbook}
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit{The \TeX book}.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+ \end{thebibliography}
+
+produces output like '... source is [1]'. (You can change the
+appearance of the citation with bibliography styles. More is in *note
+Using BibTeX::.)
+
+ The optional argument SUBCITE is appended to the citation. For
+example, 'See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook}' might produce 'See 14.3 in
+[1, p. 314]'.
+
+ In addition to what appears in the output, '\cite' writes information
+to the auxiliary file 'FILENAME.aux'. For instance, '\cite{latexdps}'
+writes '\citation{latexdps}' to that file. This information is used by
+BibTeX to include in your reference list only those works that you have
+actually cited; see *note \nocite:: also.
+
+ If KEYS is not in your bibliography information then you get 'LaTeX
+Warning: There were undefined references', and in the output the
+citation shows as a boldface question mark between square brackets.
+There are two possible causes. If you have mistyped something, as in
+'\cite{texbok}' then you need to correct the spelling. On the other
+hand, if you have just added or modified the bibliographic information
+and so changed the '.aux' file (*note \bibitem::) then the fix may be to
+run LaTeX again.
+
+8.24.3 '\nocite'
+----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \nocite{KEYS}
+
+ Produces no output but writes KEYS to the auxiliary file
+'DOC-FILENAME.aux'.
+
+ The mandatory argument KEYS is a comma-separated list of one or more
+citation keys (*note \bibitem::). This information is used by BibTeX to
+include these works in your reference list even though you have not
+cited them (*note \cite::).
+
+8.24.4 Using BibTeX
+-------------------
+
+As described in 'thebibliography' (*note thebibliography::), a
+sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the
+BibTeX program. This is only an introduction; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
+
+ With BibTeX, you don't use 'thebibliography' (*note
+thebibliography::). Instead, include these lines.
+
+ \bibliographystyle{BIBSTYLE}
+ \bibliography{BIBFILE1, BIBFILE2, ...}
+
+The BIBSTYLE refers to a file 'BIBSTYLE.bst', which defines how your
+citations will look. The standard BIBSTYLE's distributed with BibTeX
+are:
+
+'alpha'
+ Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication. The
+ bibliographic items are sorted alphabetically.
+'plain'
+ Labels are integers. Sort the bibliographic items alphabetically.
+'unsrt'
+ Like 'plain', but entries are in order of citation.
+'abbrv'
+ Like 'plain', but more compact labels.
+
+Many, many other BibTeX style files exist, tailored to the demands of
+various publications. See CTAN's listing
+<http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib>.
+
+ The '\bibliography' command is what actually produces the
+bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
+files named 'BIBFILE1.bib', 'BIBFILE2.bib', ... These contain your
+database in BibTeX format. This shows a typical couple of entries in
+that format.
+
+ @book{texbook,
+ title = {The {{\TeX}}book},
+ author = {D.E. Knuth},
+ isbn = {0201134489},
+ series = {Computers \& typesetting},
+ year = {1983},
+ publisher = {Addison-Wesley}
+ }
+ @book{sexbook,
+ author = {W.H. Masters and V.E. Johnson},
+ title = {Human Sexual Response},
+ year = {1966},
+ publisher = {Bantam Books}
+ }
+
+ Only the bibliographic entries referred to via '\cite' and '\nocite'
+will be listed in the document's bibliography. Thus you can keep all
+your sources together in one file, or a small number of files, and rely
+on BibTeX to include in this document only those that you used.
+
+8.25 'theorem'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{theorem}
+ THEOREM BODY
+ \end{theorem}
+
+ Produces 'Theorem N' in boldface followed by THEOREM BODY in italics.
+The numbering possibilities for N are described under '\newtheorem'
+(*note \newtheorem::).
+
+ \newtheorem{lem}{Lemma} % in preamble
+ \newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}
+ ...
+ \begin{lem} % in document body
+ text of lemma
+ \end{lem}
+
+ The next result follows immediately.
+ \begin{thm}[Gauss] % put `Gauss' in parens after theorem head
+ text of theorem
+ \end{thm}
+
+ Most new documents use the packages 'amsthm' and 'amsmath' from the
+American Mathematical Society. Among other things these packages
+include a large number of options for theorem environments, such as
+styling options.
+
+8.26 'titlepage'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{titlepage}
+ ... text and spacing ...
+ \end{titlepage}
+
+ Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading
+and with succeeding pages numbered starting with page one.
+
+ In this example all formatting, including vertical spacing, is left
+to the author.
+
+ \begin{titlepage}
+ \vspace*{\stretch{1}}
+ \begin{center}
+ {\huge\bfseries Thesis \\[1ex]
+ title} \\[6.5ex]
+ {\large\bfseries Author name} \\
+ \vspace{4ex}
+ Thesis submitted to \\[5pt]
+ \textit{University name} \\[2cm]
+ in partial fulfilment for the award of the degree of \\[2cm]
+ \textsc{\Large Doctor of Philosophy} \\[2ex]
+ \textsc{\large Mathematics} \\[12ex]
+ \vfill
+ Department of Mathematics \\
+ Address \\
+ \vfill
+ \today
+ \end{center}
+ \vspace{\stretch{2}}
+ \end{titlepage}
+
+ To instead produce a standard title page without a 'titlepage'
+environment, use '\maketitle' (*note \maketitle::).
+
+8.27 'verbatim'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ LITERAL-TEXT
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+ A paragraph-making environment in which LaTeX produces as output
+exactly what you type as input. For instance inside LITERAL-TEXT the
+backslash '\' character does not start commands, it produces a printed
+'\', and carriage returns and blanks are taken literally. The output
+appears in a monospaced typewriter-like font ('\tt').
+
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ Symbol swearing: %&$#?!.
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+ The only restriction on 'literal-text' is that it cannot include the
+string '\end{verbatim}'.
+
+ You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros,
+for instance in the argument to a '\section'. This is not the same as
+commands being fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot appear
+there. (But the 'cprotect' package can help with this.)
+
+ One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code. There
+are packages that are an improvement the 'verbatim' environment. For
+instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external
+files, or parts of those files. Such packages include 'listings', and
+'minted'.
+
+ A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments
+is 'fancyvrb'. Another is 'verbatimbox'.
+
+ For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN.
+
+8.27.1 '\verb'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \verb CHAR LITERAL-TEXT CHAR
+ \verb* CHAR LITERAL-TEXT CHAR
+
+ Typeset LITERAL-TEXT as it is input, including special characters and
+spaces, using the typewriter ('\tt') font.
+
+ This example shows two different invocations of '\verb'.
+
+ This is \verb!literally! the biggest pumpkin ever.
+ And this is the best squash, \verb+literally!+
+
+The first '\verb' has its LITERAL-TEXT surrounded with exclamation
+point, '!'. The second instead uses plus, '+', because the exclamation
+point is part of 'literal-text'.
+
+ The single-character delimiter CHAR surrounds LITERAL-TEXT -- it must
+be the same character before and after. No spaces come between '\verb'
+or '\verb*' and CHAR, or between CHAR and LITERAL-TEXT, or between
+LITERAL-TEXT and the second occurrence of CHAR (the synopsis shows a
+space only to distinguish one component from the other). The delimiter
+must not appear in LITERAL-TEXT. The LITERAL-TEXT cannot include a line
+break.
+
+ The '*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible
+space character.
+
+ The output from this will include a character showing the spaces.
+
+ The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
+
+ For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package 'url' provides
+an option that is better than the '\verb' command, since it allows line
+breaks.
+
+ For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
+'\verb'. One is 'listings', another is 'minted'.
+
+ You cannot use '\verb' in the argument to a macro, for instance in
+the argument to a '\section'. It is not a question of '\verb' being
+fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot appear there. (But
+the 'cprotect' package can help with this.)
+
+8.28 'verse'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{verse}
+ LINE1 \\
+ LINE2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{verse}
+
+ An environment for poetry.
+
+ Here are two lines from Shakespeare's Romeo and Juliet.
+
+ Then plainly know my heart's dear love is set \\
+ On the fair daughter of rich Capulet.
+
+ Separate the lines of each stanza with '\\', and use one or more
+blank lines to separate the stanzas.
+
+ \begin{verse}
+ \makebox[\linewidth][c]{\textit{Shut Not Your Doors} ---Walt Whitman}
+ \\[1\baselineskip]
+ Shut not your doors to me proud libraries, \\
+ For that which was lacking on all your well-fill'd shelves, \\
+ \qquad yet needed most, I bring, \\
+ Forth from the war emerging, a book I have made, \\
+ The words of my book nothing, the drift of it every thing, \\
+ A book separate, not link'd with the rest nor felt by the intellect, \\
+ But you ye untold latencies will thrill to every page.
+ \end{verse}
+
+The output has margins indented on the left and the right, paragraphs
+are not indented, and the text is not right-justified.
+
+9 Line breaking
+***************
+
+The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to translate
+your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To produce a
+printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines (and these
+lines must be broken into pages).
+
+ LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking in the text body for
+you but in some environments you manually force line breaks.
+
+ A common workflow is to get a final version of the document content
+before taking a final pass through and considering line breaks (and page
+breaks). This differs from word processing, where you are formatting
+text as you input it. Putting these off until the end prevents a lot of
+fiddling with breaks that will change anyway.
+
+9.1 '\\'
+========
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \\
+ \\[MORESPACE]
+
+or one of:
+
+ \\*
+ \\*[MORESPACE]
+
+ End the current line. The optional argument MORESPACE specifies
+extra vertical space to be inserted before the next line. This is a
+rubber length (*note Lengths::) and can be negative. The text before
+the line break is set at its normal length, that is, it is not stretched
+to fill out the line width. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ The starred form, '\\*', tells LaTeX not to start a new page between
+the two lines, by issuing a '\nobreak'.
+
+ \title{My story: \\[0.25in]
+ a tale of woe}
+
+ Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in LaTeX. In
+particular, don't start new paragraphs with '\\'. Instead leave a blank
+line between the two paragraphs. And don't put in a sequence of '\\''s
+to make vertical space. Instead use '\vspace{LENGTH}', or
+'\leavevmode\vspace{LENGTH}', or '\vspace*{LENGTH}' if you want the
+space to not be thrown out at the top of a new page (*note \vspace::).
+
+ The '\\' command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such
+as in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment or in an equation environment.
+
+ The '\\' command is a synonym for '\newline' (*note \newline::) under
+ordinary circumstances (an example of an exception is the 'p{...}'
+column in a 'tabular' environment; *note tabular::).
+
+ The '\\' command is a macro, and its definition changes by context so
+that its definition in normal text, a 'center' environment, a
+'flushleft' environment, and a 'tabular' are all different. In normal
+text when it forces a linebreak it is essentially a shorthand for
+'\newline'. It does not end horizontal mode or end the paragraph, it
+just inserts some glue and penalties so that when the paragraph does end
+a linebreak will occur at that point, with the short line padded with
+white space.
+
+ You get 'LaTeX Error: There's no line here to end' if you use '\\' to
+ask for a new line, rather than to end the current line. An example is
+if you have '\begin{document}\\' or, more likely, something like this.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
+ \\
+ In that vertical space put your mark.
+ \end{minipage}
+ \end{center}
+
+Fix it by replacing the double backslash with something like
+'\vspace{\baselineskip}'.
+
+9.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr'
+============================
+
+The '\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file ('^^M',
+internally) the same as '\\', followed by '\relax'. So each new line in
+the input will also be a new line in the output. The '\restorecr'
+command restores normal line-breaking behavior.
+
+ This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. *Note
+verbatim:: instead.
+
+ With LaTeX's usual defaults, this
+
+ aaa
+ bbb
+
+ \obeycr
+ ccc
+ ddd
+ eee
+
+ \restorecr
+ fff
+ ggg
+
+ hhh
+ iii
+
+produces output like this.
+
+ aaa bbb
+ ccc
+ ddd
+ eee
+
+ fff ggg
+ hhh iii
+
+The indents are paragraph indents.
+
+9.3 '\newline'
+==============
+
+In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify
+the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph
+mode (*note Modes::), the '\newline' command is equivalent to
+double-backslash (*note \\::). This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
+ However, the two commands are different inside a 'tabular' or 'array'
+environment. In a column with a specifier producing a paragraph box
+such as typically 'p{...}', '\newline' will insert a line end inside of
+the column; that is, it does not break the entire tabular row. To break
+the entire row use '\\' or its equivalent '\tabularnewline'.
+
+ This will print 'Name:' and 'Address:' as two lines in a single cell
+of the table.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{p{1in}{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
+ Name: \newline Address: &Date: \\ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+
+The 'Date:' will be baseline-aligned with 'Name:'.
+
+9.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen)
+===============================
+
+Tell LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that point. When you
+insert '\-' commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
+those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that LaTeX might
+otherwise have chosen. This command is robust (*note \protect::).
+
+ LaTeX is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct
+hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The '\-'
+command is for exceptional cases.
+
+ For example, LaTeX does not ordinarily hyphenate words containing a
+hyphen. Below, the long and hyphenated word means LaTeX has to put in
+unacceptably large spaces to set the narrow column.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{rp{1.75in}}
+ Isaac Asimov &The strain of
+ anti-intellectualism
+ % an\-ti-in\-tel\-lec\-tu\-al\-ism
+ has been a constant thread winding its way through our
+ political and cultural life, nurtured by
+ the false notion that democracy means that
+ `my ignorance is just as good as your knowledge'.
+ \end{tabular}
+
+Commenting out the third line and uncommenting the fourth makes a much
+better fit.
+
+ The '\-' command only allows LaTeX to break there, it does not
+require that it break there. You can insist on a split with something
+like 'Hef-\linebreak feron'. Of course, if you later change the text
+then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
+care.
+
+9.5 '\discretionary' (generalized hyphenation point)
+====================================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \discretionary{PRE-BREAK}{POST-BREAK}{NO-BREAK}
+
+ Handle word changes around hyphens. This command is not often used
+in LaTeX documents.
+
+ If a line break occurs at the point where '\discretionary' appears
+then TeX puts PRE-BREAK at the end of the current line and puts
+POST-BREAK at the start of the next line. If there is no line break
+here then TeX puts NO-BREAK
+
+ In 'difficult' the three letters 'ffi' form a ligature. But TeX can
+nonetheless break between the two f's with this.
+
+ di\discretionary{f-}{fi}{ffi}cult
+
+ Note that users do not have to do this. It is typically handled
+automatically by TeX's hyphenation algorithm.
+
+9.6 '\fussy' & '\sloppy'
+========================
+
+Declarations to make TeX more picky or less picky about line breaking.
+Declaring '\fussy' usually avoids too much space between words, at the
+cost of an occasional overfull box. Conversely, '\sloppy' avoids
+overfull boxes while suffering loose interword spacing.
+
+ The default is '\fussy'. Line breaking in a paragraph is controlled
+by whichever declaration is current at the blank line, or '\par', or
+displayed equation ending that paragraph. So to affect the line breaks,
+include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of the command.
+
+9.6.1 'sloppypar'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{sloppypar}
+ ... paragraphs ...
+ \end{sloppypar}
+
+ Typeset the paragraphs with '\sloppy' in effect (*note \fussy &
+\sloppy::). Use this to locally adjust line breaking, to avoid
+'Overfull box' or 'Underfull box' errors.
+
+ The example is simple.
+
+ \begin{sloppypar}
+ Her plan for the morning thus settled, she sat quietly down to her
+ book after breakfast, resolving to remain in the same place and the
+ same employment till the clock struck one; and from habitude very
+ little incommoded by the remarks and ejaculations of Mrs.\ Allen,
+ whose vacancy of mind and incapacity for thinking were such, that
+ as she never talked a great deal, so she could never be entirely
+ silent; and, therefore, while she sat at her work, if she lost her
+ needle or broke her thread, if she heard a carriage in the street,
+ or saw a speck upon her gown, she must observe it aloud, whether
+ there were anyone at leisure to answer her or not.
+ \end{sloppypar}
+
+9.7 '\hyphenation'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \hyphenation{WORD1 ...}
+
+ Declares allowed hyphenation points within the words in the list.
+The words in that list are separated by spaces. Show permitted points
+for hyphenation with a dash character, '-'.
+
+ Here is an example:
+
+ \hyphenation{hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness}
+
+ Use lowercase letters. TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches
+exactly. Multiple '\hyphenation' commands accumulate.
+
+9.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
+=================================
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+ \linebreak
+ \linebreak[ZERO-TO-FOUR]
+
+or one of these.
+
+ \nolinebreak
+ \nolinebreak[ZERO-TO-FOUR]
+
+ Encourage or discourage a line break. The optional ZERO-TO-FOUR is
+an integer that allows you to soften the instruction. The default is 4,
+so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
+prevent the break. But for instance, '\nolinebreak[1]' is a suggestion
+that another place may be better. The higher the number, the more
+insistent the request. Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Here we tell LaTeX that a good place to put a linebreak is after the
+standard legal text.
+
+ \boilerplatelegal{} \linebreak[2]
+ We especially encourage applications from members of traditionally
+ underrepresented groups.
+
+ When you issue '\linebreak', the spaces in the line are stretched out
+so that it extends to the right margin. *Note \\:: and *note \newline::
+to have the spaces not stretched out.
+
+10 Page breaking
+****************
+
+Ordinarily LaTeX automatically takes care of breaking output into pages
+with its usual aplomb. But if you are writing commands, or tweaking the
+final version of a document, then you may need to understand how to
+influence its actions.
+
+ LaTeX's algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
+than just waiting until there is enough material to fill a page and
+outputting the result. Instead, LaTeX typesets more material than would
+fit on the page and then chooses a break that is optimal in some way (it
+has the smallest badness). An example of the advantage of this approach
+is that if the page has some vertical space that can be stretched or
+shrunk, such as with rubber lengths between paragraphs, then LaTeX can
+use that to avoid widow lines (where a new page starts with the last
+line of a paragraph; LaTeX can squeeze the extra line onto the first
+page) and orphans (where the first line of paragraph is at the end of a
+page; LaTeX can stretch the material of the first page so the extra line
+falls on the second page). Another example is where LaTeX uses
+available vertical shrinkage to fit on a page not just the header for a
+new section but also the first two lines of that section.
+
+ But LaTeX does not optimize over the entire document's set of page
+breaks. So it can happen that the first page break is great but the
+second one is lousy; to break the current page LaTeX doesn't look as far
+ahead as the next page break. So occasionally you may want to influence
+page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.
+
+ *Note Layout:: for more material that is relevant to page breaking.
+
+10.1 '\clearpage' & '\cleardoublepage'
+======================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \clearpage
+
+or
+
+ \cleardoublepage
+
+ End the current page and output all of the pending floating figures
+and tables (*note Floats::). If there are too many floats to fit on the
+page then LaTeX will put in extra pages containing only floats. In
+two-sided printing, '\cleardoublepage' also makes the next page of
+content a right-hand page, an odd-numbered page, if necessary inserting
+a blank page. The '\clearpage' command is robust while
+'\cleardoublepage' is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ LaTeX's page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+
+ The '\cleardoublepage' command will put in a blank page, but it will
+have the running headers and footers. To get a really blank page, use
+this command.
+
+ \let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage
+ \newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{%
+ \clearpage
+ {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}%
+ }
+
+If you want LaTeX's standard '\chapter' command to do this then add the
+line '\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage'.
+
+ The command '\newpage' (*note \newpage::) also ends the current page,
+but without clearing pending floats. And, if LaTeX is in two-column
+mode then '\newpage' ends the current column while '\clearpage' and
+'\cleardoublepage' end the current page.
+
+10.2 '\newpage'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \newpage
+
+ End the current page. This command is robust (*note \protect::).
+
+ LaTeX's page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+
+ While the commands '\clearpage' and '\cleardoublepage' also end the
+current page, in addition they clear pending floats (*note \clearpage &
+\cleardoublepage::). And, if LaTeX is in two-column mode then
+'\clearpage' and '\cleardoublepage' end the current page, possibly
+leaving an empty column, while '\newpage' only ends the current column.
+
+ In contrast with '\pagebreak' (*note \pagebreak & \nopagebreak::),
+the '\newpage' command will cause the new page to start right where
+requested. This
+
+ Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+ continent,
+ \newpage
+ \noindent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the
+ proposition that all men are created equal.
+
+makes a new page start after 'continent,' and the cut-off line is not
+right justified. In addition, '\newpage' does not vertically stretch
+out the page, as '\pagebreak' does.
+
+10.3 '\enlargethispage'
+=======================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \enlargethispage{size}
+ \enlargethispage*{size}
+
+ Enlarge the '\textheight' for the current page. The required
+argument SIZE must be a rigid length (*note Lengths::). It may be
+positive or negative. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ A common strategy is to wait until you have the final text of a
+document, and then pass through it tweaking line and page breaks. This
+command allows you some page size leeway.
+
+ This will allow one extra line on the current page.
+
+ \enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
+
+ The starred form '\enlargesthispage*' tries to squeeze the material
+together on the page as much as possible, for the common use case of
+getting one more line on the page. This is often used together with an
+explicit '\pagebreak'.
+
+10.4 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak'
+==================================
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \pagebreak
+ \pagebreak[ZERO-TO-FOUR]
+
+or
+
+ \nopagebreak
+ \nopagebreak[ZERO-TO-FOUR]
+
+ Encourage or discourage a page break. The optional ZERO-TO-FOUR is
+an integer that allows you to soften the request. The default is 4, so
+that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
+prevent the break. But for instance '\nopagebreak[1]' suggests to LaTeX
+that another spot might be preferable. The higher the number, the more
+insistent the request. Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ LaTeX's page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+
+ If you use these inside a paragraph, they apply to the point
+following the line in which they appear. So this
+
+ Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+ continent,
+ \pagebreak
+ a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition
+ that all men are created equal.
+
+does not give a page break at 'continent,' but instead at 'nation,'
+since that is where LaTeX breaks that line. In addition, with
+'\pagebreak' the vertical space on the page is stretched out where
+possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. This can look
+strange, and if '\flushbottom' is in effect this can cause you to get
+'Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active'.
+*Note \newpage:: for a command that does not have these effects.
+
+11 Footnotes
+************
+
+Place a footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
+
+ Noe"l Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
+ to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making
+ love.\footnote{%
+ I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}
+
+ You can put multiple footnotes on a page. If the footnote text
+becomes too long then it will flow to the next page.
+
+ You can also produce footnotes by combining the '\footnotemark' and
+the '\footnotetext' commands, which is useful in special circumstances.
+
+ To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
+include a bibliographic style with that behavior (*note Using BibTeX::).
+
+11.1 '\footnote'
+================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \footnote{TEXT}
+ \footnote[NUMBER]{TEXT}
+
+ Place a footnote TEXT at the bottom of the current page.
+
+ There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's
+ \textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{%
+ After reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained,
+ ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method
+ of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed
+ at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}
+
+ The optional argument NUMBER allows you to specify the number of the
+footnote. If you use this then LaTeX does not increment the 'footnote'
+counter.
+
+ By default, LaTeX uses arabic numbers as footnote markers. Change
+this with something like
+'\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}', which uses a
+sequence of symbols (*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
+\fnsymbol::). To make this change global put that in the preamble. If
+you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
+'\setcounter{footnote}{0}'.
+
+ LaTeX determines the spacing of footnotes with two parameters.
+
+'\footnoterule'
+ Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the
+ page's footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document
+ classes (except 'slides', where it does not appear) is: vertical
+ thickness of '0.4pt', and horizontal size of '0.4\columnwidth'
+ long. Change the rule with something like this.
+
+ \renewcommand{\footnoterule}{% Kerns avoid vertical space
+ \kern -3pt % This -3 is negative
+ \hrule width \textwidth height 1pt % of the sum of this 1
+ \kern 2pt} % and this 2
+
+'\footnotesep'
+ The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
+ (*note \strut::). By default, this is set to the normal strut for
+ '\footnotesize' fonts (*note Font sizes::), therefore there is no
+ extra space between footnotes. This is '6.65pt' for '10pt',
+ '7.7pt' for '11pt', and '8.4pt' for '12pt'. Change it as with
+ '\setlength{\footnotesep}{11pt}'.
+
+ The '\footnote' command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ LaTeX's default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
+'\footnote'; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
+sectioning command such as '\chapter' (it can only be used in outer
+paragraph mode; *note Modes::). There are some workarounds; see
+following sections.
+
+ In a 'minipage' environment the '\footnote' command uses the
+'mpfootnote' counter instead of the 'footnote' counter, so they are
+numbered independently. They are shown at the bottom of the
+environment, not at the bottom of the page. And by default they are
+shown alphabetically. *Note minipage:: and *note Footnotes in a
+table::.
+
+11.2 '\footnotemark'
+====================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \footnotemark
+ \footnotemark[NUMBER]
+
+ Put the current footnote mark in the text. To specify associated
+text for the footnote see *note \footnotetext::. The optional argument
+NUMBER causes the command to use that number to determine the footnote
+mark. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode (*note Modes::).
+
+ If you use '\footnotemark' without the optional argument then it
+increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional NUMBER then
+it does not. The next example produces several consecutive footnote
+markers referring to the same footnote.
+
+ The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.}
+ and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+ and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+
+ If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value
+of the common mark. This example gives the same institutional
+affiliation to both the first and third authors ('\thanks' is a version
+of 'footnote'), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+
+ \title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
+ \author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds}
+ \and A C Doyle\thanks{Durham University}
+ \and S Holmes\footnotemark[1]}
+ \begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+
+ This uses a counter to remember the footnote number. The third
+sentence is followed by the same footnote marker as the first.
+
+ \newcounter{footnoteValueSaver}
+ All babies are illogical.\footnote{%
+ Lewis Carroll.}\setcounter{footnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}}
+ Nobody is despised who can manage a crocodile.\footnote{%
+ Captain Hook.}
+ Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value{footnoteValueSaver}]
+ Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby.
+
+ This example accomplishes the same by using the package 'cleveref'.
+
+ \usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % in preamble
+ \crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
+ ...
+ The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker, Evers, 1994.}
+ The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers, Chance, 1990.}
+ But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
+
+ It will work with the package 'hyperref'.
+
+11.3 '\footnotetext'
+====================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \footnotetext{TEXT}
+ \footnotetext[NUMBER]{TEXT}
+
+ Place TEXT at the bottom of the page as a footnote. It pairs with
+'\footnotemark' (*note \footnotemark::) and can come anywhere after that
+command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (*note Modes::). The
+optional argument NUMBER changes the number of the footnote mark.
+
+ *Note \footnotemark:: and *note Footnotes in a table:: for usage
+examples.
+
+11.4 Footnotes in section headings
+==================================
+
+Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
+
+ \section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}}
+
+causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
+section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
+contents, where it is not likely to be desired. The simplest way to
+have it not appear on the table of contents is to use the optional
+argument to '\section'
+
+ \section[Please]{Please\footnote{%
+ Don't footnote in chapter and section headers!}}
+
+No '\protect' is needed in front of '\footnote' here because what gets
+moved to the table of contents is the optional argument.
+
+11.5 Footnotes in a table
+=========================
+
+Inside a 'tabular' or 'array' environment the '\footnote' command does
+not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but the footnote
+text does not appear. The solution is to use a 'minipage' environment
+as here (*note minipage::).
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Ship} &\textsc{Book} \\ \hline
+ \textit{HMS Sophie} &Master and Commander \\
+ \textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain \\
+ \textit{HMS Lively} &Post Captain \\
+ \textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{%
+ Starting with HMS Surprise.}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{minipage}
+ \end{center}
+
+ Inside a 'minipage', footnote marks are lowercase letters. Change
+that with something like
+'\renewcommand{\thempfootnote}{\arabic{mpfootnote}}' (*note \alph \Alph
+\arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::).
+
+ The footnotes in the prior example appear at the bottom of the
+'minipage'. To have them appear at the bottom of the main page, as part
+of the regular footnote sequence, use the '\footnotemark' and
+'\footnotetext' pair and make a new counter.
+
+ \newcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+ \setcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}} \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Woman} &\textsc{Relationship} \\ \hline
+ Mona &Attached\footnotemark \\
+ Diana Villiers &Eventual wife \\
+ Christine Hatherleigh Wood &Fiance\footnotemark
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{minipage}% percent sign keeps footnote text close to minipage
+ \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+ \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+ Little is known other than her death.}%
+ \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
+ \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
+ Relationship is unresolved in XXI.}
+ \end{center}
+
+ For a floating 'table' environment (*note table::), use the
+'tablefootnote' package.
+
+ \usepackage{tablefootnote} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{table}
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Date} &\textsc{Campaign} \\ \hline
+ 1862 &Fort Donelson \\
+ 1863 &Vicksburg \\
+ 1865 &Army of Northern Virginia\tablefootnote{%
+ Ending the war.}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Forces captured by US Grant}
+ \end{table}
+
+The footnote appears at the page bottom and is numbered in sequence with
+other footnotes.
+
+11.6 Footnotes of footnotes
+===========================
+
+Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
+footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package
+'bigfoot' extends LaTeX's default footnote mechanism in many ways,
+including allow these two, as in this example.
+
+ \usepackage{bigfoot} % in preamble
+ \DeclareNewFootnote{Default}
+ \DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph] % create class \footnotefrom{}
+ ...
+ The third theorem is a partial converse of the
+ second.\footnotefrom{%
+ First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
+
+12 Definitions
+**************
+
+LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
+
+12.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand'
+====================================
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+ \newcommand{\CMD}{DEFN}
+ \newcommand{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \newcommand{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \newcommand*{\CMD}{DEFN}
+ \newcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \newcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+
+or one of these.
+
+ \renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand*{\CMD}{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+
+ Define or redefine a command. See also the discussion of
+'\DeclareRobustCommand' in *note Class and package commands::. The
+starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain
+multiple paragraphs of text (in plain TeX terms that it not be '\long').
+
+ These are the parameters:
+
+CMD
+
+ Required; the command name. It must begin with a backslash, '\',
+ and must not begin with the four letter string '\end'. For
+ '\newcommand', it must not be already defined. For
+ '\renewcommand', this name must already be defined.
+
+NARGS
+ Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of
+ arguments that the command takes, including any optional argument.
+ Omitting this argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that
+ the command has no arguments. If you redefine a command, the new
+ version can have a different number of arguments than the old
+ version.
+
+OPTARGDEFAULT
+ Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
+ '\CMD' is optional, with default value OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be
+ the empty string). If this argument is not present then '\CMD'
+ does not take an optional argument.
+
+ That is, if '\CMD' is used with square brackets, as in
+ '\CMD[OPTVAL]{...}...', then within DEFN the parameter '#1' is set
+ to the value of OPTVAL. On the other hand, if '\CMD' is called
+ without the square brackets then within DEFN the parameter '#1' is
+ set to the value of OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, the required
+ arguments start with '#2'.
+
+ Omitting '[OPTARGDEFAULT]' is different from having the square
+ brackets with no contents, as in '[]'. The former sets '#1' to the
+ value of OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter sets '#1' to the empty string.
+
+DEFN
+ Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of
+ '\CMD'. The parameters '#1', '#2', ... '#NARGS' are replaced by
+ the values that you supply when you call the command (or by the
+ default value if there is an optional argument and you don't
+ exercise the option).
+
+ TeX ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
+sequence, as in '\cmd '. If you actually want a space there, one
+solution is to type '{}' after the command ('\cmd{} ', and another
+solution is to use an explicit control space ('\cmd\ ').
+
+ A simple example of defining a new command: '\newcommand{\RS}{Robin
+Smith}' results in '\RS' being replaced by the longer text. Redefining
+an existing command is similar: '\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small
+QED}}'.
+
+ If you try to define a command and the name has already been used
+then you get something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \fred already defined.
+Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual'. If you try to
+redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
+something like 'LaTeX Error: \hank undefined'.
+
+ Here the first command definition has no arguments, and the second
+has one required argument.
+
+ \newcommand{\student}{Ms~O'Leary}
+ \newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
+
+Use the first as in 'I highly recommend \student{} to you'. The second
+has a variable, so that '\defref{def:basis}' expands to
+'Definition~\ref{def:basis}', which ultimately expands to something like
+'Definition~3.14'.
+
+ Similarly, but with two required arguments:
+'\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1 \times #2$}' is invoked as '\nbym{2}{k}'.
+
+ This example has an optional argument.
+
+ \newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}
+
+Then '\salutation' gives 'Dear Sir or Madam:' while '\salutation[John]'
+gives 'Dear John:'. And '\salutation[]' gives 'Dear :'.
+
+ This example has an optional argument and two required arguments.
+
+ \newcommand{\lawyers}[3][company]{#2, #3, and~#1}
+ I employ \lawyers[Howe]{Dewey}{Cheatem}.
+
+The output is 'I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe'. The optional
+argument, the 'Howe', is associated with '#1', while 'Dewey' and
+'Cheatem' are associated with '#2' and '#3'. Because of the optional
+argument, '\lawyers{Dewey}{Cheatem}' will give the output 'I employ
+Dewey, Cheatem, and company'.
+
+ The braces around DEFN do not define a group, that is, they do not
+delimit the scope of the result of expanding DEFN. For example, with
+'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}', in this sentence,
+
+ The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}.
+
+the words 'met the' would incorrectly be in italics. The solution is to
+put another pair of braces inside the definition:
+'\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}'.
+
+12.2 '\providecommand'
+======================
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+ \providecommand{CMD}{DEFN}
+ \providecommand{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \providecommand{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \providecommand*{CMD}{DEFN}
+ \providecommand*{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \providecommand*{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+
+ Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
+If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
+as '\newcommand'. If a command of this name already exists then this
+definition does nothing. This is particularly useful in a file that may
+be loaded more than once, such as a style file. *Note \newcommand &
+\renewcommand:: for the description of the arguments.
+
+ This example
+
+ \providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+ \providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
+ From \myaffiliation.
+
+outputs 'From Saint Michael's College'. Unlike '\newcommand', the
+repeated use of '\providecommand' does not give an error.
+
+12.3 '\makeatletter' & '\makeatother'
+=====================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \makeatletter
+ ... definition of commands with @ in their name ..
+ \makeatother
+
+ Use this pair when you redefine LaTeX commands that are named with an
+at-sign character ''@''. The '\makeatletter' declaration makes the
+at-sign character have the category code of a letter, code 11. The
+'\makeatother' declaration sets the category code of the at-sign to
+code 12, its default value.
+
+ As TeX reads characters, it assigns each one a category code, or
+"catcode". For instance, it assigns the backslash character ''\'' the
+catcode 0. Command names consist of a category 0 character, ordinarily
+backslash, followed by letters, category 11 characters (except that a
+command name can also consist of a category 0 character followed by a
+single non-letter symbol).
+
+ LaTeX's source code has the convention that some commands use '@' in
+their name. These commands are mainly intended for package or class
+writers. The convention prevents authors who are just using a package
+or class from accidentally replacing such a command with one of their
+own, because by default the at-sign has catcode 12.
+
+ The pair '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother' changes the default code
+and then changes it back. Use them inside a '.tex' file, in the
+preamble, when you are defining or redefining commands named with '@',
+by having them surround your definition. Don't use these inside '.sty'
+or '.cls' files since the '\usepackage' and '\documentclass' commands
+already arrange that the at-sign has the character code of a letter,
+catcode 11.
+
+ For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign in their names see
+<http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e>.
+
+ In this example the class file has a command '\thesis@universityname'
+that the user wants to change. These three lines should go in the
+preamble, before the '\begin{document}'.
+
+ \makeatletter
+ \renewcommand{\thesis@universityname}{Saint Michael's College}
+ \makeatother
+
+12.4 '\@ifstar'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \newcommand{\mycmd}{\@ifstar{\mycmd@star}{\mycmd@nostar}}
+ \newcommand{\mycmd@nostar}[NOSTAR-NUM-ARGS]{NOSTAR-BODY}
+ \newcommand{\mycmd@star}[STAR-NUM-ARGS]{STAR-BODY}
+
+ Many standard LaTeX environments or commands have a variant with the
+same name but ending with a star character '*', an asterisk. Examples
+are the 'table' and 'table*' environments and the '\section' and
+'\section*' commands.
+
+ When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward
+because '\newenvironment' and '\renewenvironment' allow the environment
+name to contain a star. For commands the situation is more complex. As
+in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command, given above
+as '\mycmd', which peeks ahead to see if it is followed by a star. For
+instance, LaTeX does not really have a '\section*' command; instead, the
+'\section' command peeks ahead. This command does not accept arguments
+but instead expands to one of two commands that do accept arguments. In
+the synopsis these two are '\mycmd@nostar' and '\mycmd@star'. They
+could take the same number of arguments or a different number, or no
+arguments at all. As always, in a LaTeX document a command using
+at-sign '@' must be enclosed inside a '\makeatletter ... \makeatother'
+block (*note \makeatletter & \makeatother::).
+
+ This example of '\@ifstar' defines the command '\ciel' and a variant
+'\ciel*'. Both have one required argument. A call to '\ciel{night}'
+will return "starry night sky" while '\ciel*{blue}' will return "starry
+not blue sky".
+
+ \newcommand*{\ciel@unstarred}[1]{starry #1 sky}
+ \newcommand*{\ciel@starred}[1]{starry not #1 sky}
+ \newcommand*{\ciel}{\@ifstar{\ciel@starred}{\ciel@unstarred}}
+
+ In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
+arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007's
+'``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond}, \agentsecret{James}{Bond}.''' is
+equivalent to entering the commands '``My name is \textsc{Bond},
+\textit{James} textsc{Bond}.'''
+
+ \newcommand*{\agentsecret@unstarred}[2]{\textit{#1} \textsc{#2}}
+ \newcommand*{\agentsecret@starred}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
+ \newcommand*{\agentsecret}{%
+ \@ifstar{\agentsecret@starred}{\agentsecret@unstarred}}
+
+ There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work
+of '\@ifstar'. The 'suffix' package allows the construct
+'\newcommand\mycommand{UNSTARRED VERSION}' followed by
+'\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{STARRED VERSION}'. And LaTeX3 has
+the 'xparse' package that allows this code.
+
+ \NewDocumentCommand\foo{s}{\IfBooleanTF#1
+ {STARRED VERSION}%
+ {UNSTARRED VERSION}%
+ }
+
+12.5 '\newcounter': Allocating a counter
+========================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \newcounter{COUNTERNAME}
+ \newcounter{COUNTERNAME}[SUPERCOUNTER]
+
+ Globally defines a new counter named COUNTERNAME and initialize it to
+zero (*note Counters::).
+
+ The name COUNTERNAME must consist of letters only. It does not begin
+with a backslash. This name must not already be in use by another
+counter.
+
+ When you use the optional argument '[SUPERCOUNTER]' then the counter
+COUNTERNAME will be reset to zero whenever SUPERCOUNTER is incremented.
+For example, ordinarily 'subsection' is numbered within 'section' so
+that any time you increment SECTION, either with '\stepcounter' (*note
+\stepcounter::) or '\refstepcounter' (*note \refstepcounter::), then
+LaTeX will reset SUBSECTION to zero.
+
+ This example
+
+ \newcounter{asuper} \setcounter{asuper}{1}
+ \newcounter{asub}[asuper] \setcounter{asub}{3} % Note `asuper'
+ The value of asuper is \arabic{asuper} and of asub is \arabic{asub}.
+ \stepcounter{asuper}
+ Now asuper is \arabic{asuper} while asub is \arabic{asub}.
+
+ produces 'The value of asuper is 1 and that of asub is 3' and 'Now
+asuper is 2 while asub is 0'.
+
+ If the counter already exists, for instance by entering 'asuper'
+twice, then you get something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \c@asuper
+already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual.'.
+
+ If you use the optional argument then the super counter must already
+exist. Entering '\newcounter{jh}[lh]' when 'lh' is not a defined
+counter will get you 'LaTeX Error: No counter 'lh' defined.'
+
+12.6 '\newlength'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \newlength{ARG}
+
+ Allocate a new length register (*note Lengths::). The required
+argument ARG must begin with a backslash, '\'. The new register holds
+rubber lengths such as '72.27pt' or '1in plus.2in minus.1in' (a LaTeX
+length register is what plain TeX calls a 'skip' register). The initial
+value is zero. The control sequence '\ARG' must not be already defined.
+
+ An example:
+
+ \newlength{\graphichgt}
+
+ If you forget the backslash then you get 'Missing control sequence
+inserted'. If the command sequence already exists then you get
+something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined. Or
+name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual'.
+
+12.7 '\newsavebox'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \newsavebox{\CMD}
+
+ Define \CMD, the string consisting of a backslash followed by CMD, to
+refer to a new bin for storing material. These bins hold material that
+has been typeset, to use multiple times or to measure or manipulate
+(*note Boxes::). The bin name \CMD is required, must start with a
+backslash, \, and must not already be a defined command. This command
+is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ This allocates a bin and then puts typeset material into it.
+
+ \newsavebox{\logobox}
+ \savebox{\logobox}{LoGo}
+ Our logo is \usebox{\logobox}.
+
+The output is 'Our logo is LoGo'.
+
+ If there is an already defined bin then you get something like 'LaTeX
+Error: Command \logobox already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see
+p.192 of the manual'.
+
+ The allocation of a box is global.
+
+12.8 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
+============================================
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+ \newenvironment{ENV}{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \newenvironment*{ENV}{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \newenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \newenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+
+or one of these.
+
+ \renewenvironment{ENV}{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \renewenvironment*{ENV}{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \renewenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \renewenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+
+ Define or redefine the environment ENV, that is, create the construct
+'\begin{ENV} ... BODY ... \end{ENV}'.
+
+ The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text. However, the body of these
+environments can contain multiple paragraphs.
+
+ENV
+ Required; the environment name. It consists only of letters or the
+ '*' character, and thus does not begin with backslash, '\'. It
+ must not begin with the string 'end'. For '\newenvironment', the
+ name ENV must not be the name of an already existing environment,
+ and also the command '\ENV' must be undefined. For
+ '\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an existing
+ environment.
+
+NARGS
+ Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments
+ of that the environment takes. When you use the environment these
+ arguments appear after the '\begin', as in '\begin{ENV}{ARG1} ...
+ {ARGN}'. Omitting this is equivalent to setting it to 0; the
+ environment will have no arguments. When redefining an
+ environment, the new version can have a different number of
+ arguments than the old version.
+
+OPTARGDEFAULT
+ Optional; if this is present then the first argument of the defined
+ environment is optional, with default value OPTARGDEFAULT (which
+ may be the empty string). If this is not in the definition then
+ the environment does not take an optional argument.
+
+ That is, when OPTARGDEFAULT is present in the definition of the
+ environment then you can start the environment with square
+ brackets, as in '\begin{ENV}[OPTVAL]{...} ... \end{ENV}'. In this
+ case, within BEGDEFN the parameter '#1' is set to the value of
+ OPTVAL. If you call '\begin{ENV}' without square brackets, then
+ within BEGDEFN the parameter '#1' is set to the value of the
+ default OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, any required arguments
+ start with '#2'.
+
+ Omitting '[MYVAL]' in the call is different than having the square
+ brackets with no contents, as in '[]'. The former results in '#1'
+ expanding to OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter results in '#1' expanding to
+ the empty string.
+
+BEGDEF
+ Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\begin{ENV}'.
+ Within BEGDEF, the parameters '#1', '#2', ... '#NARGS', are
+ replaced by the values that you supply when you call the
+ environment; see the examples below.
+
+ENDDEF
+ Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\end{ENV}'.
+ This may not contain any parameters, that is, you cannot use '#1',
+ '#2', etc., here (but see the final example below).
+
+ All environments, that is to say the BEGDEF code, the environment
+body, and the ENDDEF code, are processed within a group. Thus, in the
+first example below, the effect of the '\small' is limited to the quote
+and does not extend to material following the environment.
+
+ If you try to define an environment and the name has already been
+used then you get something like 'LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual'. If you try
+to redefine an environment and the name has not yet been used then you
+get something like 'LaTeX Error: Environment hank undefined.'.
+
+ This example gives an environment like LaTeX's 'quotation' except
+that it will be set in smaller type.
+
+ \newenvironment{smallquote}{%
+ \small\begin{quotation}
+ }{%
+ \end{quotation}
+ }
+
+ This has an argument, which is set in boldface at the start of a
+paragraph.
+
+ \newenvironment{point}[1]{%
+ \noindent\textbf{#1}
+ }{%
+ }
+
+ This one shows the use of a optional argument; it gives a quotation
+environment that cites the author.
+
+ \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
+ \begin{quotation}
+ \noindent\textit{#1}:
+ }{%
+ \end{quotation}
+ }
+
+The author's name is optional, and defaults to 'Shakespeare'. In the
+document, use the environment like this.
+
+ \begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
+ ...
+ \end{citequote}
+
+ The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use
+in ENDDEF, in this case in a box (*note \sbox & \savebox::).
+
+ \newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
+ \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
+ \sbox\quoteauthor{#1}%
+ \begin{quotation}
+ }{%
+ \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---\usebox{\quoteauthor}
+ \end{quotation}
+ }
+
+12.9 '\newtheorem'
+==================
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}
+ \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]
+ \newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}
+
+ Define a new theorem-like environment. You can specify one of
+NUMBERED_WITHIN and NUMBERED_LIKE, or neither, but not both.
+
+ The first form, '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}', creates an environment
+that will be labelled with TITLE; see the first example below.
+
+ The second form, '\newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]', creates
+an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing counter
+NUMBERED_WITHIN, so this counter will be reset when NUMBERED_WITHIN is
+reset. See the second example below.
+
+ The third form '\newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}', with
+optional argument between the two required arguments, creates an
+environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
+NUMBERED_LIKE. See the third example.
+
+ This command creates a counter named NAME. In addition, unless the
+optional argument NUMBERED_LIKE is used, inside of the theorem-like
+environment the current '\ref' value will be that of
+'\theNUMBERED_WITHIN' (*note \ref::).
+
+ This declaration is global. It is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Arguments:
+
+NAME
+ The name of the environment. It is a string of letters. It must
+ not begin with a backslash, '\'. It must not be the name of an
+ existing environment, and the command name '\NAME' must not already
+ be defined.
+
+TITLE
+ The text to be printed at the beginning of the environment, before
+ the number. For example, 'Theorem'.
+
+NUMBERED_WITHIN
+ Optional; the name of an already defined counter, usually a
+ sectional unit such as 'chapter' or 'section'. When the
+ NUMBERED_WITHIN counter is reset then the NAME environment's
+ counter will also be reset.
+
+ If this optional argument is not used then the command '\theNAME'
+ is set to '\arabic{NAME}'.
+
+NUMBERED_LIKE
+ Optional; the name of an already defined theorem-like environment.
+ The new environment will be numbered in sequence with
+ NUMBERED_LIKE.
+
+ Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
+sequentially. The example below has a declaration in the preamble that
+results in 'Definition 1' and 'Definition 2' in the output.
+
+ \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ First def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ Second def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ This example has the same document body as the prior one. But here
+'\newtheorem''s optional argument NUMBERED_WITHIN is given as 'section',
+so the output is like 'Definition 1.1' and 'Definition 2.1'.
+
+ \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ First def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ Second def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ In the next example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
+second of which calls for the new 'thm' environment to use the same
+counter as 'defn'. It gives 'Definition 1.1', followed by 'Theorem 2.1'
+and 'Definition 2.2'.
+
+ \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+ \newtheorem{thm}[defn]{Theorem}
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ First def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{thm}
+ First thm
+ \end{thm}
+
+ \begin{defn}
+ Second def
+ \end{defn}
+
+12.10 '\newfont'
+================
+
+This command is obsolete. This description is here only to help with
+old documents. New documents should define fonts in families through
+the New Font Selection Scheme which allows you to, for example,
+associate a boldface with a roman (*note Fonts::).
+
+ Synopsis:
+
+ \newfont{\CMD}{FONT DESCRIPTION}
+
+ Define a command '\CMD' that will change the current font. The
+control sequence must not already be defined. It must begin with a
+backslash, '\'.
+
+ The FONT DESCRIPTION consists of a FONTNAME and an optional "at
+clause". LaTeX will look on your system for a file named
+'FONTNAME.tfm'. The at clause can have the form either 'at DIMEN' or
+'scaled FACTOR', where a FACTOR of '1000' means no scaling. For LaTeX's
+purposes, all this does is scale all the character and other font
+dimensions relative to the font's design size, which is a value defined
+in the '.tfm' file.
+
+ This defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few characters in
+each.
+
+ \newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt}
+ \newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 1100}
+ \testfontat abc
+ \testfontscaled abc
+
+12.11 '\protect'
+================
+
+All LaTeX commands are either "fragile" or "robust". A fragile command
+can break when it is used in the argument to certain other commands.
+Commands that contain data that LaTeX writes to an auxiliary file and
+re-reads later are fragile. This includes material that goes into a
+table of contents, list of figures, list of tables, etc. Fragile
+commands also include line breaks, any command that has an optional
+argument, and many more. To prevent such commands from breaking, one
+solution is to preceded them with the command '\protect'.
+
+ For example, when LaTeX runs the '\section{SECTION NAME}' command it
+writes the SECTION NAME text to the '.aux' auxiliary file, moving it
+there for use elsewhere in the document such as in the table of
+contents. Any argument that is internally expanded by LaTeX without
+typesetting it directly is referred to as a "moving argument". A
+command is fragile if it can expand during this process into invalid TeX
+code. Some examples of moving arguments are those that appear in the
+'\caption{...}' command (*note figure::), in the '\thanks{...}' command
+(*note \maketitle::), and in @-expressions in the 'tabular' and 'array'
+environments (*note tabular::).
+
+ If you get strange errors from commands used in moving arguments, try
+preceding it with '\protect'. Every fragile commands must be protected
+with their own '\protect'.
+
+ Although usually a '\protect' command doesn't hurt, length commands
+are robust and should not be preceded by a '\protect' command. Nor can
+a '\protect' command be used in the argument to '\addtocounter' or
+'\setcounter' command.
+
+ In this example the '\caption' command gives a mysterious error about
+an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each '\raisebox'
+command with '\protect'.
+
+ \begin{figure}
+ ...
+ \caption{Company headquarters of A\raisebox{1pt}{B}\raisebox{-1pt}{C}}
+ \end{figure}
+
+ In the next example the '\tableofcontents' command gives an error
+because the '\(..\)' in the section title expands to illegal TeX in the
+'.toc' file. You can solve this by changing '\(..\)' to
+'\protect\(..\protect\)'.
+
+ \begin{document}
+ \tableofcontents
+ ...
+ \section{Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)}
+ ...
+
+12.12 '\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend'
+=============================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ignorespaces
+
+or
+
+ \ignorespacesafterend
+
+ Both commands cause LaTeX to ignore spaces after the end of the
+command up until the first non-space character. The first is a command
+from Plain TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific.
+
+ The 'ignorespaces' is often used when defining commands via
+'\newcommand', or '\newenvironment', or '\def'. The example below
+illustrates. It allows a user to show the points values for quiz
+questions in the margin but it is inconvenient because, as shown in the
+'enumerate' list, users must not put any space between the command and
+the question text.
+
+ \newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item\points{10}no extra space output here
+ \item\points{15} extra space between the number and the `extra'
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+The solution is to change to this.
+
+ \newcommand{\points}[1]{%
+ \makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}
+
+ A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text.
+The commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names.
+But, as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
+'\fullname' will reproduce that.
+
+ \makeatletter
+ \newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\@honorific{#1}} % remember title
+ \newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1} % put title before name
+ \makeatother
+ \begin{tabular}{|l|}
+ \honorific{Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones} \\ % no extra space here
+ \honorific{ Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones} % extra space before title
+ \end{tabular}
+
+To fix this, change to
+'\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\@honorific~#1}'.
+
+ The '\ignorespaces' is also often used in a '\newenvironment' at the
+end of the BEGIN clause, that is, as part of the second argument, as in
+'\begin{newenvironment}{ENV NAME}{... \ignorespaces}{...}'.
+
+ To strip spaces off the end of an environment use
+'\ignorespacesafterend'. An example is that this will show a much
+larger vertical space between the first and second environments than
+between the second and third.
+
+ \newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}}
+ \begin{eq}
+ e=mc^2
+ \end{eq}
+ \begin{equation}
+ F=ma
+ \end{equation}
+ \begin{equation}
+ E=IR
+ \end{equation}
+
+ Putting a comment character '%' immediately after the '\end{eq}' will
+make the vertical space disappear, but that is inconvenient. The
+solution is to change to
+'\newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}\ignorespacesafterend}'.
+
+13 Counters
+***********
+
+Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
+name of the counter is often the same as the name of the environment or
+command associated with the number, except that the counter's name has
+no backslash '\'. Thus, associated with the '\chapter' command is the
+'chapter' counter that keeps track of the chapter number.
+
+ Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document
+classes to control numbering.
+
+ part paragraph figure enumi
+ chapter subparagraph table enumii
+ section page footnote enumiii
+ subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+ subsubsection
+
+ The 'mpfootnote' counter is used by the '\footnote' command inside of
+a minipage (*note minipage::). The counters 'enumi' through 'enumiv'
+are used in the 'enumerate' environment, for up to four levels of
+nesting (*note enumerate::).
+
+ Counters can have any integer value but they are typically positive.
+
+ New counters are created with '\newcounter'. *Note \newcounter::.
+
+13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
+=====================================================================
+
+Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if
+the counter COUNTER has the value 1 then a '\alph{COUNTER}' in your
+source will result in a lowercase letter a appearing in the output.
+
+ All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
+instance, '\alph{enumi}'. Note that the counter name does not start
+with a backslash.
+
+'\alph{COUNTER}'
+ Print the value of COUNTER in lowercase letters: 'a', 'b', ... If
+ the counter's value is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get
+ 'LaTeX Error: Counter too large.'
+
+'\Alph{COUNTER}'
+ Print in uppercase letters: 'A', 'B', ... If the counter's value
+ is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get 'LaTeX Error: Counter
+ too large.'
+
+'\arabic{COUNTER}'
+ Print in Arabic numbers such as '5' or '-2'.
+
+'\roman{COUNTER}'
+ Print in lowercase roman numerals: 'i', 'ii', ... If the counter's
+ value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but LaTeX
+ does not print anything in the output.
+
+'\Roman{COUNTER}'
+ Print in uppercase roman numerals: 'I', 'II', ... If the counter's
+ value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but LaTeX
+ does not print anything in the output.
+
+'\fnsymbol{COUNTER}'
+ Prints the value of COUNTER using a sequence of nine symbols that
+ are traditionally used for labeling footnotes. The value of
+ COUNTER should be between 1 and 9, inclusive. If the counter's
+ value is less than 0 or more than 9 then you get 'LaTeX Error:
+ Counter too large', while if it is 0 then you get no error or
+ warning but LaTeX does not output anything.
+
+ Here are the symbols:
+
+ Number Name Command Symbol
+ -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ 1 asterisk '\ast' *
+ 2 dagger '\dagger' U+2020
+ 3 ddagger '\ddagger' U+2021
+ 4 section-sign '\S' U+00A7
+ 5 paragraph-sign '\P' U+00B6
+ 6 double-vert '\parallel' U+2016
+ 7 double-asterisk '\ast\ast' **
+ 8 double-dagger '\dagger\dagger' U+2020U+2020
+ 9 double-ddagger '\ddagger\ddagger' U+2021U+2021
+
+13.2 '\usecounter'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usecounter{COUNTER}
+
+ Used in the second argument of the 'list' environment (*note list::),
+this declares that list items will be numbered by COUNTER. It
+initializes COUNTER to zero, and arranges that when '\item' is called
+without its optional argument then COUNTER is incremented by
+'\refstepcounter', making its value be the current 'ref' value (*note
+\ref::). This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Put in the document preamble, this example makes a new list
+environment enumerated with TESTCOUNTER:
+
+ \newcounter{testcounter}
+ \newenvironment{test}{%
+ \begin{list}{}{%
+ \usecounter{testcounter}
+ }
+ }{%
+ \end{list}
+ }
+
+13.3 '\value'
+=============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \value{COUNTER}
+
+ Expands to the value of the counter COUNTER. (Note that the name of
+a counter does not begin with a backslash.)
+
+ This example outputs 'Test counter is 6. Other counter is 5.'.
+
+ \newcounter{test} \setcounter{test}{5}
+ \newcounter{other} \setcounter{other}{\value{test}}
+ \addtocounter{test}{1}
+
+ Test counter is \arabic{test}.
+ Other counter is \arabic{other}.
+
+ The '\value' command is not used for typesetting the value of the
+counter. For that, see *note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
+\fnsymbol::.
+
+ It is often used in '\setcounter' or '\addtocounter' but '\value' can
+be used anywhere that LaTeX expects a number, such as in
+'\hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}'. It must not be preceded by '\protect'
+(*note \protect::).
+
+ This example inserts '\hspace{4\parindent}'.
+
+ \setcounter{myctr}{3} \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
+ \hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
+
+13.4 '\setcounter'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}
+
+ Globally set the counter COUNTER to have the value of the VALUE
+argument, which must be an integer. Thus, you can set a counter's value
+as '\setcounter{section}{5}'. Note that the counter name does not start
+with a backslash.
+
+ In this example if the counter 'theorem' has value 12 then the second
+line will print 'XII'.
+
+ \setcounter{exercise}{\value{theorem}}
+ Here it is in Roman: \Roman{exercise}.
+
+13.5 '\addtocounter'
+====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE
+
+ Globally increment COUNTER by the amount specified by the VALUE
+argument, which may be negative.
+
+ In this example the section value appears as 'VII'.
+
+ \setcounter{section}{5}
+ \addtocounter{section}{2}
+ Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}.
+
+13.6 '\refstepcounter'
+======================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \refstepcounter{COUNTER}
+
+ Globally increments the value of COUNTER by one, as does
+'\stepcounter' (*note \stepcounter::). The difference is that this
+command resets the value of any counter numbered within it. (For the
+definition of "counters numbered within", *note \newcounter::.)
+
+ In addition, this command also defines the current '\ref' value to be
+the result of '\thecounter'.
+
+ While the counter value is set globally, the '\ref' value is set
+locally, i.e., inside the current group.
+
+13.7 '\stepcounter'
+===================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \stepcounter{COUNTER}
+
+ Globally adds one to COUNTER and resets all counters numbered within
+it. (For the definition of "counters numbered within", *note
+\newcounter::.)
+
+ This command differs from '\refstepcounter' in that this one does not
+influence references -- it does not define the current '\ref' value to
+be the result of '\thecounter' (*note \refstepcounter::).
+
+13.8 '\day' & '\month' & '\year'
+================================
+
+LaTeX defines the counter '\day' for the day of the month (nominally
+with value between 1 and 31), '\month' for the month of the year
+(nominally with value between 1 and 12), and year '\year'. When TeX
+starts up, they are set from the current values on the system. The
+related command '\today' produces a string representing the current day
+(*note \today::).
+
+ They counters are not updated as the job progresses so in principle
+they could be incorrect by the end. In addition, TeX does no sanity
+check:
+
+ \day=-2 \month=13 \year=-4 \today
+
+gives no error or warning and results in the output '-2, -4' (the bogus
+month value produces no output).
+
+14 Lengths
+**********
+
+A "length" is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
+as an argument.
+
+ Lengths come in two types. A "rigid length" such as '10pt' does not
+contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component. (Plain TeX calls this a
+"dimen".) A "rubber length" (what Plain TeX calls a "skip") such as as
+with '1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm' can contain either or both of those
+components. In that rubber length, the '1cm' is the "natural length"
+while the other two, the 'plus' and 'minus' components, allow TeX to
+stretch or shrink the length to optimize placement.
+
+ The illustrations below use these two commands.
+
+ % make a black bar 10pt tall and #1 wide
+ \newcommand{\blackbar}[1]{\rule{#1}{10pt}}
+
+ % Make a box around #2 that is #1 wide (excluding the border)
+ \newcommand{\showhbox}[2]{%
+ \fboxsep=0pt\fbox{\hbox to #1{#2}}}
+
+This example uses those commands to show a black bar 100 points long
+between 'XXX' and 'YYY'. This length is rigid.
+
+ XXX\showhbox{100pt}{\blackbar{100pt}}YYY
+
+ As for rubber lengths, shrinking is simpler one: with '1cm minus
+0.05cm', the natural length is 1cm but TeX can shrink it down as far as
+0.95cm. Beyond that, TeX refuses to shrink any more. Thus, below the
+first one works fine, producing a space of 98 points between the two
+bars.
+
+ XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{101pt}\hspace{100pt minus 2pt}\blackbar{101pt}}YYY
+
+ XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{105pt}\hspace{100pt minus 1pt}\blackbar{105pt}}YYY
+
+But the second one gets a warning like 'Overfull \hbox (1.0pt too wide)
+detected at line 17'. In the output the first 'Y' is overwritten by the
+end of the black bar, because the box's material is wider than the 300pt
+allocated, as TeX has refused to shrink the total to less than
+309 points.
+
+ Stretching is like shrinking except that if TeX is asked to stretch
+beyond the given amount, it will do it. Here the first line is fine,
+producing a space of 110 points between the bars.
+
+ XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 10pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+
+ XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 1pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
+
+In the second line TeX needs a stretch of 10 points and only 1 point was
+specified. TeX stretches the space to the required length but it gives
+you a warning like 'Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) detected at line
+22'. (We won't discuss badness.)
+
+ You can put both stretch and shrink in the same length, as in '1ex
+plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex'.
+
+ If TeX is setting two or more rubber lengths then it allocates the
+stretch or shrink in proportion.
+
+ XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ \blackbar{100pt}% left
+ \hspace{0pt plus 50pt}\blackbar{80pt}\hspace{0pt plus 10pt}% middle
+ \blackbar{100pt}}YYY % right
+
+The left and right bars take up 100 points, so the middle needs another
+100. The middle bar is 80 points so the two '\hspace''s must stretch
+20 points. Because the two are 'plus 50pt' and 'plus 10pt', TeX gets
+5/6 of the stretch from the first space and 1/6 from the second.
+
+ The 'plus' or 'minus' component of a rubber length can contain a
+"fill" component, as in '1in plus2fill'. This gives the length infinite
+stretchability or shrinkability so that TeX could set it to any
+distance. Here the two figures will be equal-spaced across the page.
+
+ \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{godel.png}%
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{einstein.png}%
+ \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}
+ \end{minipage}
+
+ TeX actually has three levels of infinity for glue components: 'fil',
+'fill', and 'filll'. The later ones are more infinite than the earlier
+ones. Ordinarily document authors only use the middle one (*note
+\hfill:: and *note \vfill::).
+
+ Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length,
+so that after '\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}' and
+'\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}' then the value of '\zlength' is '3in'.
+
+14.1 Units of length
+====================
+
+TeX and LaTeX know about these units both inside and outside of math
+mode.
+
+'pt'
+ Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two
+ decimal places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm.
+
+'pc'
+ Pica, 12 pt
+
+'in'
+ Inch, 72.27 pt
+
+'bp'
+ Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in
+ PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
+
+'cm'
+ Centimeter
+
+'mm'
+ Millimeter
+
+'dd'
+ Didot point, 1.07 pt
+
+'cc'
+ Cicero, 12 dd
+
+'sp'
+ Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
+
+ Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer
+of the font. The x-height of the current font "ex", traditionally the
+height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical lengths.
+Similarly "em", traditionally the width of the capital letter M, is
+often used for horizontal lengths (there is also '\enspace', which is
+'0.5em'). Use of these can help make a definition work better across
+font changes. For example, a definition of the vertical space between
+list items given as '\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex}'
+is more likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a
+definition given in points.
+
+ In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math
+unit "mu" given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family. *Note Spacing in math mode::.
+
+14.2 '\setlength'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \setlength{LEN}{AMOUNT}
+
+ Set the length LEN to AMOUNT. The length name LEN must begin with a
+backslash, '\'. The 'amount' can be a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
+It can be positive, negative or zero, and can be in any units that LaTeX
+understands (*note Units of length::).
+
+ Below, with LaTeX's defaults the first paragraph will be indented
+while the second will not.
+
+ I told the doctor I broke my leg in two places.
+
+ \setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+ He said stop going to those places.
+
+ If you did not declare LEN with '\newlength', for example if you
+mistype the above as
+'\newlength{\specparindent}\setlength{\sepcparindent}{...}', then you
+get an error like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \sepcindent'.
+If you omit the backslash at the start of the length name then you get
+an error like 'Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again>
+\relax l.19 \setlength{specparindent}{0.6\parindent}'
+
+14.3 '\addtolength'
+===================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \addtolength{LEN}{AMOUNT}
+
+ Increment the length LEN by AMOUNT. The length name LEN begins with
+a backslash, '\'. The 'amount' is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
+It can be positive, negative or zero, and can be in any units that LaTeX
+understands (*note Units of length::).
+
+ Below, if '\parskip' starts with the value '0pt plus 1pt'
+
+ Doctor: how is the boy who swallowed the silver dollar?
+ \addtolength{\parskip}{1pt}
+
+ Nurse: no change.
+
+then it has the value '1pt plus 1pt' for the second paragraph.
+
+ If you did not declare the length LEN with '\newlength', if for
+example you mistype the above as
+'\addtolength{\specparindent}{0.6\praindent}', then you get something
+like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent'. If you leave
+off the backslash at the start of LEN, as in
+'\addtolength{parindent}{1pt}', then you get something like 'You can't
+use `the letter p' after \advance'.
+
+14.4 '\settodepth'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \settodepth{LEN}{TEXT}
+
+ Set the length LEN to the depth of box that LaTeX gets on typesetting
+the TEXT argument. The length name LEN must begin with a backslash,
+'\'.
+
+ This will show how low the character descenders go.
+
+ \newlength{\alphabetdepth}
+ \settodepth{\alphabetdepth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+ \the\alphabetdepth
+
+ If you did not set aside the length LEN, if for example you mistype
+the above as '\settodepth{\aplhabetdepth}{abc...}', then you get
+something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \aplhabetdepth'.
+If you leave the backslash out of LEN, as in
+'\settodepth{alphabetdepth}{...}' then you get something like 'Missing
+number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox'.
+
+14.5 '\settoheight'
+===================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \settoheight{LEN}{text}
+
+ Sets the length LEN to the height of box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the 'text' argument. The length name LEN must begin with a
+backslash, '\'.
+
+ This will show how high the characters go.
+
+ \newlength{\alphabetheight}
+ \settoheight{\alphabetheight}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+ \the\alphabetheight
+
+ If no such length LEN has been declared with '\newlength', if for
+example you mistype as '\settoheight{\aplhabetheight}{abc...}', then you
+get something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument>
+\alphabetheight'. If you leave the backslash out of LEN, as in
+'\settoheight{alphabetheight}{...}' then you get something like 'Missing
+number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox'.
+
+14.6 '\settowidth'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \settowidth{LEN}{TEXT}
+
+ Set the length LEN to the width of the box that LaTeX gets on
+typesetting the TEXT argument. The length name LEN must begin with a
+backslash, '\'.
+
+ This measures the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
+
+ \newlength{\alphabetwidth}
+ \settowidth{\alphabetwidth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
+ \the\alphabetwidth
+
+ If no such length LEN has been set aside, if for example you mistype
+the above as '\settowidth{\aplhabetwidth}{abc...}', then you get
+something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \aplhabetwidth'.
+If you leave the backslash out of LEN, as in
+'\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...}' then you get something like 'Missing
+number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox'.
+
+15 Making paragraphs
+********************
+
+To start a paragraph, just type some text. To end the current
+paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, separated by
+two empty lines.
+
+ It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession
+ of a good fortune, must be in want of a wife.
+
+ However little known the feelings or views of such a man may be on his
+ first entering a neighbourhood, this truth is so well fixed in the minds
+ of the surrounding families, that he is considered the rightful property
+ of some one or other of their daughters.
+
+ ``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day,
+ ``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
+
+ The separator lines must be empty, including not containing a comment
+character, '%'.
+
+ Once LaTeX has gathered all of a paragraph's contents it divides that
+content into lines in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph
+(*note Line breaking::).
+
+ There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don't put a
+blank line in math mode (*note Modes::); here the line before the
+'\end{equation}'
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ 2^{|S|} > |S|
+
+ \end{equation}
+
+will get you the error 'Missing $ inserted'. Similarly, the blank line
+in this 'section' argument
+
+ \section{aaa
+
+ bbb}
+
+gets 'Runaway argument? {aaa ! Paragraph ended before \@sect was
+complete'.
+
+15.1 '\par'
+===========
+
+Synopsis (note that while reading the input TeX converts two consecutive
+newlines to a '\par'):
+
+ \par
+
+ End the current paragraph. The usual way to separate paragraphs is
+with a blank line but the '\par' command is entirely equivalent. This
+command is robust (*note \protect::).
+
+ This example uses '\par' rather than a blank line simply for
+readability.
+
+ \newcommand{\syllabusLegalese}{%
+ \whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou}
+
+ In LR mode or a vertical mode the '\par' command does nothing but it
+terminates paragraph mode, switching LaTeX to vertical mode (*note
+Modes::).
+
+ You cannot use the '\par' command in a math mode. You also cannot
+use it in the argument of many commands, such as the '\section' command
+(*note Making paragraphs:: and *note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).
+
+ The '\par' command is not the same as the '\paragraph' command. The
+latter is, like '\section' or '\subsection', a sectioning unit used by
+the standard LaTeX documents (*note \subsubsection & \paragraph &
+\subparagraph::).
+
+ The '\par' command is not the same as '\newline' or the line break
+double backslash, '\\'. The difference is that '\par' ends the
+paragraph, not just the line, and also triggers the addition of the
+between-paragraph vertical space '\parskip' (*note \parindent &
+\parskip::).
+
+ The output from this example
+
+ xyz
+
+ \setlength{\parindent}{3in}
+ \setlength{\parskip}{5in}
+ \noindent test\indent test1\par test2
+
+is: after 'xyz' there is a vertical skip of 5 inches and then 'test'
+appears, aligned with the left margin. On the same line, there is an
+empty horizontal space of 3 inches and then 'test1' appears. Finally.
+there is a vertical space of 5 inches, followed by a fresh paragraph
+with a paragraph indent of 3 inches, and then LaTeX puts the text
+'test2'.
+
+15.2 '\indent' & '\noindent'
+============================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \indent
+
+or
+
+ \noindent
+
+ Go into horizontal mode (*note Modes::). The '\indent' command first
+outputs an empty box whose width is '\parindent'. These commands are
+robust (*note \protect::).
+
+ Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line.
+*Note \par:: for the difference between this command and '\par'. To
+start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted
+paragraph, use '\noindent'.
+
+ In the middle of a paragraph the '\noindent' command has no effect,
+because LaTeX is already in horizontal mode there. The '\indent'
+command's only effect is to output a space.
+
+ This example starts a fresh paragraph.
+
+ ... end of the prior paragraph.
+
+ \noindent This paragraph is not indented.
+
+and this continues an interrupted paragraph.
+
+ The data
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{rl} ... \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+ \noindent shows this clearly.
+
+ To omit indentation in the entire document put
+'\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}' in the preamble. If you do that, you may
+want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs, '\parskip'
+(*note \parindent & \parskip::).
+
+ Default LaTeX styles have the first paragraph after a section that is
+not indented, as is traditional typesetting in English. To change that,
+look on CTAN for the package 'indentfirst'.
+
+15.3 '\parindent' & '\parskip'
+==============================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \setlength{\parskip}{HORIZONTAL LEN}
+ \setlength{\parinden}{VERTICAL LEN}
+
+ Both are a rubber lengths (*note Lengths::). They give the
+indentation of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages
+(*note minipage::), and the vertical space between paragraphs.
+
+ This, put in the preamble,
+
+ \setlength{\parindent}{0em}
+ \setlength{\parskip}{1ex}
+
+arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented,
+but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase
+'x'.
+
+ In standard LaTeX documents, the default value for '\parindent' in
+one-column documents is '15pt' when the default text size is '10pt' ,
+'17pt' for '11pt', and '1.5em' for '12pt'. In two-column documents it
+is '1em'. The default value for '\parskip' in LaTeX's standard document
+styles is '0pt plus1pt'.
+
+15.4 Marginal notes
+===================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \marginpar{RIGHT}
+ \marginpar[LEFT]{RIGHT}
+
+ Create a note in the margin. The first line of the note will have
+the same baseline as the line in the text where the '\marginpar' occurs.
+
+ The margin that LaTeX uses for the note depends on the current layout
+(*note Document class options::) and also on '\reversemarginpar' (see
+below). If you are using one-sided layout (document option 'oneside')
+then it goes in the right margin. If you are using two-sided layout
+(document option 'twoside') then it goes in the outside margin. If you
+are in two-column layout (document option 'twocolumn') then it goes in
+the nearest margin.
+
+ If you declare '\reversemarginpar' then LaTeX will place subsequent
+marginal notes in the opposite margin to that given in the prior
+paragraph. Revert that to the default position with '\normalmarginpar'.
+
+ When you specify the optional argument LEFT then it is used for a
+note in the left margin, while the mandatory argument RIGHT is used for
+a note in the right margin.
+
+ Normally, a note's first word will not be hyphenated. You can enable
+hyphenation there by beginning LEFT or RIGHT with '\hspace{0pt}'.
+
+ These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
+
+'\marginparpush'
+ Minimum vertical space between notes; default '7pt' for '12pt'
+ documents, '5pt' else.
+
+'\marginparsep'
+ Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default '11pt'
+ for '10pt' documents, '10pt' else.
+
+'\marginparwidth'
+ Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided '10pt' document
+ is '90pt', '83pt' for '11pt', and '68pt' for '12pt'; '17pt' more in
+ each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the
+ default is '48pt'.
+
+ The standard LaTeX routine for marginal notes does not prevent notes
+from falling off the bottom of the page.
+
+16 Math formulas
+****************
+
+Produce mathematical text by putting LaTeX into math mode or display
+math mode (*note Modes::). This example shows both.
+
+ The wave equation for \( u \) is
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \frac{\partial^2u}{\partial t^2} = c^2\nabla^2u
+ \end{displaymath}
+ where \( \nabla^2 \) is the spatial Laplacian and \( c \) is constant.
+
+Math mode is for inline mathematics. In the above example it is invoked
+by the starting '\(' and finished by the matching ending '\)'. Display
+math mode is for displayed equations and here is invoked by the
+'displaymath' environment. Note that any mathematical text whatever,
+including mathematical text consisting of just one character, is handled
+in math mode.
+
+ When in math mode or display math mode, LaTeX handles many aspects of
+your input text differently than in other text modes. For example,
+
+ contrast x+y with \( x+y \)
+
+in math mode the letters are in italics and the spacing around the plus
+sign is different.
+
+ There are three ways to make inline formulas, to put LaTeX in math
+mode.
+
+ \( MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL \)
+ $ MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL $
+ \begin{math} MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL \end{math}
+
+The first form is preferred and the second is quite common, but the
+third form is rarely used. You can sometimes use one and sometimes
+another, as in '\(x\) and $y$'. You can use these in paragraph mode or
+in LR mode (*note Modes::).
+
+ To make displayed formulas, put LaTeX into display math mode with
+either:
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+or
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ MATHEMATICAL MATERIAL
+ \end{equation}
+
+(*note displaymath::, *note equation::). The only difference is that
+with the 'equation' environment, LaTeX puts a formula number alongside
+the formula. The construct '\[ MATH \]' is equivalent to
+'\begin{displaymath} MATH \end{displaymath}'. These environments can
+only be used in paragraph mode (*note Modes::).
+
+ The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some
+differences. One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts;
+in display math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they
+are closer together.
+
+ Sometimes you want the display math typographical treatment to happen
+in the inline math mode. For this, the '\displaystyle' declaration
+forces the size and style of the formula to be that of 'displaymath'.
+Thus '\(\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n\)' will have the limits
+above and below the summation sign, not next to it. Another example is
+that
+
+ \begin{tabular}{r|cc}
+ \textsc{Name} &\textsc{Series} &\textsc{Sum} \\ \hline
+ Arithmetic &\( a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b) \)
+ &\( na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac{b}{2}\) \\
+ Geometric &\( a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^{n-1} \)
+ &\(\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}\) \\
+ \end{tabular}
+
+because it has no '\displaystyle', the 'Arithmetic' line's fraction will
+be scrunched. But, because of its '\displaystyle', the 'Geometric'
+line's fraction will be easy to read, with characters the same size as
+in the rest of the line.
+
+ The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of
+packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics,
+'amsmath' and 'amssymb' (also be aware of the 'mathtools' package that
+is an extension to, and loads, 'amsmath'). New documents that will have
+mathematical text should use these packages. Descriptions of these
+packages is outside the scope of this document; see their documentation
+on CTAN.
+
+16.1 Subscripts & superscripts
+==============================
+
+Synopsis (in math mode or display math mode), one of:
+
+ BASE^EXP
+ BASE^{EXP}
+
+or, one of:
+
+ BASE_EXP
+ BASE_{EXP}
+
+ Make EXP appear as a superscript of BASE (with the caret
+character, '^') or a subscript (with underscore, '_').
+
+ In this example the '0''s and '1''s are subscripts while the '2''s
+are superscripts.
+
+ \( (x_0+x_1)^2 \leq (x_0)^2+(x_1)^2 \)
+
+ To have the subscript or superscript contain more than one character,
+surround the expression with curly braces, as in 'e^{-2x}'. This
+example's fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression for
+the exponent.
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ (3^3)^3=27^3=19\,683
+ \qquad
+ 3^{(3^3)}=3^{27}=7\,625\,597\,484\,987
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+ LaTeX knows how to handle a superscript on a superscript, or a
+subscript on a subscript, or supers on subs, or subs on supers. So,
+expressions such as 'e^{x^2}' and 'x_{i_0}' give correct output. Note
+the use in those expressions of curly braces to give the BASE a
+determined EXP. If you enter '\(3^3^3\)' then you get 'Double
+superscript'.
+
+ LaTeX does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a
+superscript. In this example the integral has both. They come out in
+the correct place without any author intervention.
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \int_{x=a}^b f'(x)\,dx = f(b)-f(a)
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+Note the parentheses around 'x=a' to make the entire expression a
+subscript.
+
+ To put a superscript or subscript before a symbol, use a construct
+like '{}_t K^2'. The empty curly braces '{}' give the subscript
+something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally attaching to a
+prior symbols.
+
+ Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or
+display math mode, as in 'the expression x^2', will get you the error
+'Missing $ inserted'.
+
+ A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is
+to typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as
+'mhchem'; see CTAN.
+
+16.2 Math symbols
+=================
+
+LaTeX provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that anyone
+uses. For example, if you include '$\pi$' in your source, you will get
+the pi symbol U+03C0. See the 'Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List' at
+<https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/>.
+
+ Here is a list of commonly-used symbols. It is by no means
+exhaustive. Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its
+symbol class, which determines the spacing around it, is given in
+parenthesis. Unless said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can
+be used only in math mode. To redefine a command so that it can be used
+whatever the current mode, see *note \ensuremath::.
+
+'\|'
+ U+2225 Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\parallel'.
+
+'\aleph'
+ U+2135 Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
+
+'\alpha'
+ U+03B1 Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
+
+'\amalg'
+ U+2A3F Disjoint union (binary)
+
+'\angle'
+ U+2220 Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than sign '<' and
+ angle bracket '\langle'.
+
+'\approx'
+ U+2248 Almost equal to (relation).
+
+'\ast'
+ U+2217 Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed (binary).
+ Synonym: '*', which is often a superscript or subscript, as in the
+ Kleene star. Similar: '\star', which is five-pointed, and is
+ sometimes used as a general binary operation, and sometimes
+ reserved for cross-correlation.
+
+'\asymp'
+ U+224D Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
+
+'\backslash'
+ \ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus '\setminus', and
+ '\textbackslash' for backslash outside of math mode.
+
+'\beta'
+ U+03B2 Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).
+
+'\bigcap'
+ U+22C2 Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
+ binary intersection '\cap'.
+
+'\bigcirc'
+ U+26AA Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function
+ composition '\circ'.
+
+'\bigcup'
+ U+22C3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary
+ union '\cup'.
+
+'\bigodot'
+ U+2A00 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).
+
+'\bigoplus'
+ U+2A01 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).
+
+'\bigotimes'
+ U+2A02 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
+
+'\bigtriangledown'
+ U+25BD Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down
+ (operator).
+
+'\bigtriangleup'
+ U+25B3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up
+ (operator).
+
+'\bigsqcup'
+ U+2A06 Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).
+
+'\biguplus'
+ U+2A04 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus
+ (operator). (Note that the name has only one p.)
+
+'\bigvee'
+ U+22C1 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).
+
+'\bigwedge'
+ U+22C0 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
+
+'\bot'
+ U+22A5 Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered set,
+ or a contradiction (ordinary). See also '\top'.
+
+'\bowtie'
+ U+22C8 Natural join of two relations (relation).
+
+'\Box'
+ U+25A1 Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary).
+ Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
+ 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\bullet'
+ U+2022 Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication dot '\cdot'.
+
+'\cap'
+ U+2229 Intersection of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigcap'.
+
+'\cdot'
+ U+22C5 Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet dot '\bullet'.
+
+'\chi'
+ U+03C7 Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary).
+
+'\circ'
+ U+2218 Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar:
+ variable-sized operator '\bigcirc'.
+
+'\clubsuit'
+ U+2663 Club card suit (ordinary).
+
+'\complement'
+ U+2201 Set complement, used as a superscript as in
+ '$S^\complement$' (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In
+ LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. Also used:
+ '$S^{\mathsf{c}}$' or '$\bar{S}$'.
+
+'\cong'
+ U+2245 Congruent (relation).
+
+'\coprod'
+ U+2210 Coproduct (operator).
+
+'\cup'
+ U+222A Union of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigcup'.
+
+'\dagger'
+ U+2020 Dagger relation (binary).
+
+'\dashv'
+ U+22A3 Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation). Similar:
+ turnstile '\vdash'.
+
+'\ddagger'
+ U+2021 Double dagger relation (binary).
+
+'\Delta'
+ U+0394 Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary).
+
+'\delta'
+ U+03B4 Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).
+
+'\Diamond'
+ U+25C7 Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain
+ TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\diamond'
+ U+22C4 Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large
+ diamond '\Diamond', circle bullet '\bullet'.
+
+'\diamondsuit'
+ U+2662 Diamond card suit (ordinary).
+
+'\div'
+ U+00F7 Division sign (binary).
+
+'\doteq'
+ U+2250 Approaches the limit (relation). Similar: geometrically
+ equal to '\Doteq'.
+
+'\downarrow'
+ U+2193 Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar: '\Downarrow'
+ double line down arrow.
+
+'\Downarrow'
+ U+21D3 Double line down arrow (relation). Similar: '\downarrow'
+ single line down arrow.
+
+'\ell'
+ U+2113 Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).
+
+'\emptyset'
+ U+2205 Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varnothing'.
+
+'\epsilon'
+ U+03F5 Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to Greek text
+ letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small letter
+ epsilon '\varepsilon' U+03B5. Related: the set membership relation
+ '\in' U+2208.
+
+'\equiv'
+ U+2261 Equivalence (relation).
+
+'\eta'
+ U+03B7 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\exists'
+ U+2203 Existential quantifier (ordinary).
+
+'\flat'
+ U+266D Musical flat (ordinary).
+
+'\forall'
+ U+2200 Universal quantifier (ordinary).
+
+'\frown'
+ U+2322 Downward curving arc (ordinary).
+
+'\Gamma'
+ U+0393 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\gamma'
+ U+03B3 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\ge'
+ U+2265 Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\geq'.
+
+'\geq'
+ U+2265 Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\ge'.
+
+'\gets'
+ U+2190 Is assigned the value (relation). Synonym: '\leftarrow'.
+
+'\gg'
+ U+226B Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less
+ than '\ll'.
+
+'\hbar'
+ U+210F Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).
+
+'\heartsuit'
+ U+2661 Heart card suit (ordinary).
+
+'\hookleftarrow'
+ U+21A9 Hooked left arrow (relation).
+
+'\hookrightarrow'
+ U+21AA Hooked right arrow (relation).
+
+'\iff'
+ U+27F7 If and only if (relation). It is '\Longleftrightarrow' with
+ a '\thickmuskip' on either side.
+
+'\Im'
+ U+2111 Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part '\Re'.
+
+'\imath'
+ Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (*note Math
+ accents::).
+
+'\in'
+ U+2208 Set element (relation). See also: lowercase lunate
+ epsilon '\epsilon'U+03F5 and small letter script
+ epsilon '\varepsilon'.
+
+'\infty'
+ U+221E Infinity (ordinary).
+
+'\int'
+ U+222B Integral (operator).
+
+'\iota'
+ U+03B9 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\Join'
+ U+2A1D Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain
+ TeX.
+
+'\jmath'
+ Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (*note Math
+ accents::).
+
+'\kappa'
+ U+03BA Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\Lambda'
+ U+039B uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\lambda'
+ U+03BB Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\land'
+ U+2227 Logical and (binary). This is a synonym for '\wedge'. See
+ also logical or '\lor'.
+
+'\langle'
+ U+27E8 Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar:
+ less-than '<'. Matches '\rangle'.
+
+'\lbrace'
+ U+007B Left curly brace (opening). Synonym: '\{'.
+ Matches '\rbrace'.
+
+'\lbrack'
+ U+005B Left square bracket (opening). Synonym: '['.
+ Matches '\rbrack'.
+
+'\lceil'
+ U+2308 Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the
+ bottom shaved off (opening). Matches '\rceil'.
+
+'\le'
+ U+2264 Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\leq'.
+
+'\leadsto'
+ U+21DD Squiggly right arrow (relation). Not available in plain
+ TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. To get this
+ symbol outside of math mode you can put
+ '\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}' in the preamble and
+ then use '\Leadsto' instead.
+
+'\Leftarrow'
+ U+21D0 Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation). Similar:
+ single-line left arrow '\leftarrow'.
+
+'\leftarrow'
+ U+2190 Single-line left arrow (relation). Synonym: '\gets'.
+ Similar: double-line left arrow '\Leftarrow'.
+
+'\leftharpoondown'
+ U+21BD Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).
+
+'\leftharpoonup'
+ U+21BC Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).
+
+'\Leftrightarrow'
+ U+21D4 Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation).
+ Similar: single-line double headed arrow '\leftrightarrow'.
+
+'\leftrightarrow'
+ U+2194 Single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
+ double-line double headed arrow '\Leftrightarrow'.
+
+'\leq'
+ U+2264 Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\le'.
+
+'\lfloor'
+ U+230A Left floor bracket (opening). Matches: '\floor'.
+
+'\lhd'
+ U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). Not
+ available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb'
+ package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load 'amssymb'
+ and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so gives better
+ spacing).
+
+'\ll'
+ U+226A Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater
+ than '\gg'.
+
+'\lnot'
+ U+00AC Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\neg'.
+
+'\longleftarrow'
+ U+27F5 Long single-line left arrow (relation). Similar: long
+ double-line left arrow '\Longleftarrow'.
+
+'\longleftrightarrow'
+ U+27F7 Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
+ long double-line double-headed arrow '\Longleftrightarrow'.
+
+'\longmapsto'
+ U+27FC Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
+ (relation). Similar: shorter version '\mapsto'.
+
+'\longrightarrow'
+ U+27F6 Long single-line right arrow (relation). Similar: long
+ double-line right arrow '\Longrightarrow'.
+
+'\lor'
+ U+2228 Logical or (binary). Synonym: wedge '\wedge'.
+
+'\mapsto'
+ U+21A6 Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
+ (relation). Similar: longer version '\longmapsto'.
+
+'\mho'
+ U+2127 Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
+ Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
+ 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\mid'
+ U+2223 Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of
+ '\mid' is for a set '\{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}'.
+
+ Similar: '\vert' and '|' produce the same single-line vertical bar
+ symbol but without any spacing (they fall in class ordinary) and
+ you should not use them as relations but instead only as ordinals,
+ i.e., footnote symbols. For absolute value, see the entry
+ for '\vert' and for norm see the entry for '\Vert'.
+
+'\models'
+ U+22A8 Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash
+ (relation). Similar: long double dash '\vDash'.
+
+'\mp'
+ U+2213 Minus or plus (relation).
+
+'\mu'
+ U+03BC Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\nabla'
+ U+2207 Hamilton's del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
+
+'\natural'
+ U+266E Musical natural notation (ordinary).
+
+'\ne'
+ U+2260 Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\neq'.
+
+'\nearrow'
+ U+2197 North-east arrow (relation).
+
+'\neg'
+ U+00AC Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\lnot'. Sometimes
+ instead used for negation: '\sim'.
+
+'\neq'
+ U+2260 Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\ne'.
+
+'\ni'
+ U+220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
+ Synonym: '\owns'. Similar: is a member of '\in'.
+
+'\not'
+ U+0020 Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a following
+ operator (relation).
+
+ Many negated operators are available that don't require '\not',
+ particularly with the 'amssymb' package. For example, '\notin' is
+ typographically preferable to '\not\in'.
+
+'\notin'
+ U+2209 Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset
+ of '\nsubseteq'.
+
+'\nu'
+ U+03BD Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\nwarrow'
+ U+2196 North-west arrow (relation).
+
+'\odot'
+ U+2299 Dot inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigodot'.
+
+'\oint'
+ U+222E Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle
+ (operator).
+
+'\Omega'
+ U+03A9 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\omega'
+ U+03C9 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\ominus'
+ U+2296 Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
+
+'\oplus'
+ U+2295 Plus sign inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigoplus'.
+
+'\oslash'
+ U+2298 Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).
+
+'\otimes'
+ U+2297 Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary). Similar:
+ variable-sized operator '\bigotimes'.
+
+'\owns'
+ U+220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
+ Synonym: '\ni'. Similar: is a member of '\in'.
+
+'\parallel'
+ U+2225 Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\|'.
+
+'\partial'
+ U+2202 Partial differential (ordinary).
+
+'\perp'
+ U+27C2 Perpendicular (relation). Similar: '\bot' uses the same
+ glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class
+ ordinary.
+
+'\phi'
+ U+03D5 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varphi' U+03C6.
+
+'\Pi'
+ U+03A0 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\pi'
+ U+03C0 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varpi' U+03D6.
+
+'\pm'
+ U+00B1 Plus or minus (binary).
+
+'\prec'
+ U+227A Precedes (relation). Similar: less than '<'.
+
+'\preceq'
+ U+2AAF Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
+ equals '\leq'.
+
+'\prime'
+ U+2032 Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary). Typically
+ used as a superscript: '$f^\prime$'; '$f^\prime$' and '$f'$'
+ produce the same result. An advantage of the second is that
+ '$f'''$' produces the desired symbol, that is, the same result as
+ '$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$', but uses rather less typing. You can
+ only use '\prime' in math mode. Using the right single quote '''
+ in text mode produces a different character (apostrophe).
+
+'\prod'
+ U+220F Product (operator).
+
+'\propto'
+ U+221D Is proportional to (relation)
+
+'\Psi'
+ U+03A8 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\psi'
+ U+03C8 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\rangle'
+ U+27E9 Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar:
+ greater than '>'. Matches:'\langle'.
+
+'\rbrace'
+ U+007D Right curly brace (closing). Synonym: '\}'.
+ Matches '\lbrace'.
+
+'\rbrack'
+ U+005D Right square bracket (closing). Synonym: ']'.
+ Matches '\lbrack'.
+
+'\rceil'
+ U+2309 Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches '\lceil'.
+
+'\Re'
+ U+211C Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary).
+ Related: double-line, or blackboard bold, R '\mathbb{R}'; to access
+ this, load the 'amsfonts' package.
+
+'\restriction'
+ U+21BE Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym:
+ '\upharpoonright'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need
+ to load the 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\revemptyset'
+ U+29B0 Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related:
+ '\varnothing'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to
+ load the 'stix' package.
+
+'\rfloor'
+ U+230B Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
+ off (closing). Matches '\lfloor'.
+
+'\rhd'
+ U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). Not
+ available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb'
+ package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
+ 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so
+ gives better spacing).
+
+'\rho'
+ U+03C1 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varrho' U+03F1.
+
+'\Rightarrow'
+ U+21D2 Implies, right-pointing double line arrow (relation).
+ Similar: right single-line arrow '\rightarrow'.
+
+'\rightarrow'
+ U+2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+ Synonym: '\to'. Similar: right double line arrow '\Rightarrow'.
+
+'\rightharpoondown'
+ U+21C1 Right-pointing harpoon with barb below the line (relation).
+
+'\rightharpoonup'
+ U+21C0 Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the line (relation).
+
+'\rightleftharpoons'
+ U+21CC Right harpoon up above left harpoon down (relation).
+
+'\searrow'
+ U+2198 Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
+
+'\setminus'
+ U+29F5 Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash, like \
+ (binary). Similar: backslash '\backslash' and also
+ '\textbackslash' outside of math mode.
+
+'\sharp'
+ U+266F Musical sharp (ordinary).
+
+'\Sigma'
+ U+03A3 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\sigma'
+ U+03C3 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varsigma' U+03C2.
+
+'\sim'
+ U+223C Similar, in a relation (relation).
+
+'\simeq'
+ U+2243 Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).
+
+'\smallint'
+ U+222B Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a
+ display (operator).
+
+'\smile'
+ U+2323 Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
+
+'\spadesuit'
+ U+2660 Spade card suit (ordinary).
+
+'\sqcap'
+ U+2293 Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar:
+ intersection 'cap'.
+
+'\sqcup'
+ U+2294 Square union symbol (binary). Similar: union 'cup'.
+ Related: variable-sized operator '\bigsqcup'.
+
+'\sqsubset'
+ U+228F Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: subset '\subset'.
+ Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
+ 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\sqsubseteq'
+ U+2291 Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or
+ equal to '\subseteq'.
+
+'\sqsupset'
+ U+2290 Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
+ superset '\supset'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need
+ to load the 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\sqsupseteq'
+ U+2292 Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset
+ or equal '\supseteq'.
+
+'\star'
+ U+22C6 Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary
+ operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary).
+ Similar: the synonyms asterisk '*' and '\ast', which are
+ six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript,
+ as with the Kleene star.
+
+'\subset'
+ U+2282 Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).
+
+'\subseteq'
+ U+2286 Subset or equal to (relation).
+
+'\succ'
+ U+227B Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less
+ than '>'.
+
+'\succeq'
+ U+2AB0 Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less than or
+ equal to '\leq'.
+
+'\sum'
+ U+2211 Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital
+ sigma '\Sigma'.
+
+'\supset'
+ U+2283 Superset (relation).
+
+'\supseteq'
+ U+2287 Superset or equal to (relation).
+
+'\surd'
+ U+221A Radical symbol (ordinary). The LaTeX command '\sqrt{...}'
+ typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar that extends
+ to cover the argument.
+
+'\swarrow'
+ U+2199 Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).
+
+'\tau'
+ U+03C4 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\theta'
+ U+03B8 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\vartheta' U+03D1.
+
+'\times'
+ U+00D7 Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See
+ also '\cdot'.
+
+'\to'
+ U+2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+ Synonym: '\rightarrow'.
+
+'\top'
+ U+22A4 Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set (ordinary).
+ See also '\bot'.
+
+'\triangle'
+ U+25B3 Triangle (ordinary).
+
+'\triangleleft'
+ U+25C1 Not-filled triangle pointing left (binary).
+ Similar: '\lhd'. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
+ 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so
+ gives better spacing).
+
+'\triangleright'
+ U+25B7 Not-filled triangle pointing right (binary). For the normal
+ subgroup symbol you should instead load 'amssymb' and
+ use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so gives better
+ spacing).
+
+'\unlhd'
+ U+22B4 Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+ triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX.
+ In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
+ subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglelefteq' (which
+ is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+
+'\unrhd'
+ U+22B5 Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+ triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX.
+ In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
+ subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglerighteq' (which
+ is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+
+'\Uparrow'
+ U+21D1 Double-line upward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
+ single-line up-pointing arrow '\uparrow'.
+
+'\uparrow'
+ U+2191 Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges (relation).
+ Similar: double-line up-pointing arrow '\Uparrow'.
+
+'\Updownarrow'
+ U+21D5 Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
+ Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+ arrow '\updownarrow'.
+
+'\updownarrow'
+ U+2195 Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
+ Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+ arrow '\Updownarrow'.
+
+'\upharpoonright'
+ U+21BE Up harpoon, with barb on right side (relation).
+ Synonym: '\restriction'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you
+ need to load the 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\uplus'
+ U+228E Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the
+ middle (binary). Similar: union '\cup'. Related: variable-sized
+ operator '\biguplus'.
+
+'\Upsilon'
+ U+03A5 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\upsilon'
+ U+03C5 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\varepsilon'
+ U+03B5 Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely
+ used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
+ '\epsilon' U+03F5. Related: set membership '\in'.
+
+'\vanothing'
+ U+2205 Empty set symbol. Similar: '\emptyset'. Related:
+ '\revemptyset'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to
+ load the 'amssymb' package.
+
+'\varphi'
+ U+03C6 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\phi' U+03D5.
+
+'\varpi'
+ U+03D6 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\pi' U+03C0.
+
+'\varrho'
+ U+03F1 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\rho' U+03C1.
+
+'\varsigma'
+ U+03C2 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\sigma' U+03C3.
+
+'\vartheta'
+ U+03D1 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\theta' U+03B8.
+
+'\vdash'
+ U+22A2 Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash (relation).
+ Similar: turnstile rotated a half-circle '\dashv'.
+
+'\vee'
+ U+2228 Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related: logical
+ and '\wedge'. Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigvee'.
+
+'\Vert'
+ U+2016 Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
+ bar '\vert'.
+
+ For a norm symbol, you can use the 'mathtools' package and put in
+ your preamble '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}'. This
+ gives you three command variants for double-line vertical bars that
+ are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
+ write the starred version '$\norm*{M^\perp}$' then the height of
+ the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
+ with '\norm{M^\perp}' the bars do not grow with the height of the
+ argument but instead are the default height, and '\norm[SIZE
+ COMMAND]{M^\perp}' also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
+ the size given in the SIZE COMMAND, e.g., '\Bigg'.
+
+'\vert'
+ U+007C Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line
+ vertical bar '\Vert'. For such that, as in the definition of a
+ set, use '\mid' because it is a relation.
+
+ For absolute value you can use the 'mathtools' package and in your
+ preamble put '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}'. This
+ gives you three command variants for single-line vertical bars that
+ are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
+ write the starred version '$\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$' then the height
+ of the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
+ with '\abs{\frac{22}{7}}' the bars do not grow with the height of
+ the argument but instead are the default height, and '\abs[SIZE
+ COMMAND]{\frac{22}{7}}' also gives bars that do not grow but are
+ set to the size given in the SIZE COMMAND, e.g., '\Bigg'.
+
+'\wedge'
+ U+2227 Logical and (binary). Synonym: '\land'. See also logical
+ or '\vee'. Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigwedge'.
+
+'\wp'
+ U+2118 Weierstrass p (ordinary).
+
+'\wr'
+ U+2240 Wreath product (binary).
+
+'\Xi'
+ U+039E uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\xi'
+ U+03BE Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+'\zeta'
+ U+03B6 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+
+ The following symbols are most often used in plain text but LaTeX
+provides versions to use in mathematical text.
+
+'\mathdollar'
+ Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+
+'\mathparagraph'
+ Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, U+00B6.
+
+'\mathsection'
+ Section sign in math mode U+00A7.
+
+'\mathsterling'
+ Sterling sign in math mode: #.
+
+'\mathunderscore'
+ Underscore in math mode: _.
+
+16.2.1 Blackboard bold
+----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usepackage{amssymb} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \mathbb{UPPERCASE-LETTER}
+
+ Provide blackboard bold symbols, sometimes also known as doublestruck
+letters, used to denote number sets such as the natural numbers, the
+integers, etc.
+
+ Here
+
+ \( \forall n \in \mathbb{N}, n^2 \geq 0 \)
+
+the '\mathbb{N}' gives blackboard bold symbol U+2115 representing the
+natural numbers.
+
+ If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an
+error but you get strange results, including unexpected characters.
+
+ There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the
+capital letters; look on CTAN.
+
+16.2.2 Calligraphic
+-------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \mathcal{UPPERCASE-LETTERS}
+
+ Use a script-like font.
+
+ In this example the graph identifier is output in a cursive font.
+
+ Let the graph be \( \mathcal{G} \).
+
+ If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not
+get an error. Instead you get unexpected output. For instance,
+'\mathcal{g}' outputs a close curly brace symbol, while '\mathcal{+}'
+outputs a plus sign.
+
+16.2.3 '\boldmath' & '\unboldmath'
+----------------------------------
+
+Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode):
+
+ \boldmath \( MATH \)
+
+or
+
+ \unboldmath \( MATH \)
+
+ Declarations to change the letters and symbols in MATH to be in a
+bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular (non-bold)
+default. They must be used when not in math mode or display math mode
+(*note Modes::). Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ In this example each '\boldmath' command takes place inside an
+'\mbox',
+
+ we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
+
+which means '\boldmath' is only called in a text mode, here LR mode, and
+explains why LaTeX must switch to math mode to set 'v' and 'u'.
+
+ If you use either command inside math mode, as with 'Trouble: \(
+\boldmath x \)', then you get something like 'LaTeX Font Warning:
+Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11' and 'LaTeX Font
+Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line 11'.
+
+ There are many issues with '\boldmath'. New documents should use the
+'bm' package provided by the LaTeX Project team. A complete description
+is outside the scope of this document (see the full documentation on
+CTAN) but even this small example
+
+ \usepackage{bm} % in preamble
+ ...
+ we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
+
+shows that it is an improvement over '\boldmath'.
+
+16.2.4 Dots, horizontal or vertical
+-----------------------------------
+
+Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern
+continues.
+
+ \begin{array}{cccc}
+ a_{0,0} &a_{0,1} &a_{0,2} &\ldots \\
+ a_{1,0} &\ddots \\
+ \vdots
+ \end{array}
+
+ LaTeX provides these.
+
+'\cdots'
+ Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line,
+ as in U+22EF. Used as: '\( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1} \)'.
+
+'\ddots'
+ Diagonal ellipsis, U+22F1. See the above array example for a
+ usage.
+
+'\ldots'
+ Ellipsis on the baseline, U+2026. Used as: '\( x_0,\ldots x_{n-1}
+ \)'. Another example is the above array example. A synonym is
+ '\mathellipsis'. A synonym from the 'amsmath' package is '\hdots'.
+
+ You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in
+ 'The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken'. (In a paragraph mode
+ or LR mode a synonym for '\ldots' is '\dots'.)
+
+'\vdots'
+ Vertical ellipsis, U+22EE. See the above array example for a usage.
+
+ The 'amsmath' package has the command '\dots' to semantically mark up
+ellipses. This example produces two different-looking outputs for the
+first two uses of the '\dots' command.
+
+ \usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble
+ ...
+ Suppose that \( p_0, p_1, \dots, p_{n-1} \) lists all of the primes.
+ Observe that \( p_0\cdot p_1 \dots \cdot p_{n-1} +1 \) is not a
+ multiple of any \( p_i \).
+ Conclusion: there are infinitely many primes \( p_0, p_1, \dotsc \).
+
+In the first line LaTeX looks to the comma following '\dots' to
+determine that it should output an ellipsis on the baseline. The second
+line has a '\cdot' following '\dots' so LaTeX outputs an ellipsis that
+is on the math axis, vertically centered. However, the third usage has
+no follow-on character so you have to tell LaTeX what to do. You can
+use one of the commands: '\dotsc' if you need the ellipsis appropriate
+for a comma following, '\dotsb' if you need the ellipses that fits when
+the dots are followed by a binary operator or relation symbol, '\dotsi'
+for dots with integrals, or '\dotso' for others.
+
+16.3 Math functions
+===================
+
+These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper
+spacing.
+
+'\arccos'
+ Inverse cosine
+
+'\arcsin'
+ Inverse sine
+
+'\arctan'
+ Inverse tangent
+
+'\arg'
+ Angle between the real axis and a point in the complex plane
+
+'\bmod'
+ Binary modulo operator, used as in '\( 5\bmod 3=2 \)'
+
+'\cos'
+ Cosine
+
+'\cosh'
+ Hyperbolic cosine
+
+'\cot'
+ Cotangent
+
+'\coth'
+ Hyperbolic cotangent
+
+'\csc'
+ Cosecant
+
+'\deg'
+ Degrees
+
+'\det'
+ Determinant
+
+'\dim'
+ Dimension
+
+'\exp'
+ Exponential
+
+'\gcd'
+ Greatest common divisor
+
+'\hom'
+ Homomorphism
+
+'\inf'
+ Infinum
+
+'\ker'
+ Kernel
+
+'\lg'
+ Base 2 logarithm
+
+'\lim'
+ Limit
+
+'\liminf'
+ Limit inferior
+
+'\limsup'
+ Limit superior
+
+'\ln'
+ Natural logarithm
+
+'\log'
+ Logarithm
+
+'\max'
+ Maximum
+
+'\min'
+ Minimum
+
+'\pmod'
+ Parenthesized modulus, as used in '\( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \)'
+
+'\Pr'
+ Probability
+
+'\sec'
+ Secant
+
+'\sin'
+ Sine
+
+'\sinh'
+ Hyperbolic sine
+
+'\sup'
+ sup
+
+'\tan'
+ Tangent
+
+'\tanh'
+ Hyperbolic tangent
+
+ The 'amsmath' package adds improvements on some of these, and also
+allows you to define your own. The full documentation is on CTAN, but
+briefly, you can define an identity operator with
+'\DeclareMathOperator{\identity}{id}' that is like the ones above but
+prints as 'id'. The starred form '\DeclareMathOperator*{\op}{op}' sets
+any limits above and below, as is traditional with '\lim', '\sup', or
+'\max'.
+
+16.4 Math accents
+=================
+
+LaTeX provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in
+math. These are different from accents in normal text (*note
+Accents::).
+
+'\acute'
+ Math acute accent
+
+'\bar'
+ Math bar-over accent
+
+'\breve'
+ Math breve accent
+
+'\check'
+ Math ha'c<ek (check) accent
+
+'\ddot'
+ Math dieresis accent
+
+'\dot'
+ Math dot accent
+
+'\grave'
+ Math grave accent
+
+'\hat'
+ Math hat (circumflex) accent
+
+'\mathring'
+ Math ring accent
+
+'\tilde'
+ Math tilde accent
+
+'\vec'
+ Math vector symbol
+
+'\widehat'
+ Math wide hat accent
+
+'\widetilde'
+ Math wide tilde accent
+
+ When you are putting an accent on an i or a j, the tradition is to
+use one without a dot, '\imath' or 'jmath' (*note Math symbols::).
+
+16.5 Over- and Underlining
+==========================
+
+LaTeX provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or putting
+braces over or under some material.
+
+'\underline{TEXT}'
+ Underline TEXT. Works inside math mode, and outside. The line is
+ always completely below the text, taking account of descenders, so
+ in '\(\underline{y}\)' the line is lower than in
+ '\(\underline{x}\)'. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Note that the package 'ulem' does text mode underlining and allows
+ line breaking as well as a number of other features. See the
+ documentation on CTAN. See also *note \hrulefill & \dotfill:: for
+ producing a line, for such things as a signature.
+
+'\overline{TEXT}'
+ Put a horizontal line over TEXT. Works inside math mode, and
+ outside. For example, '\overline{x+y}'. Note that this differs
+ from the command '\bar' (*note Math accents::).
+
+'\underbrace{MATH}'
+ Put a brace under MATH. For example, this
+ '(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3)' emphasizes the telescoping part.
+ Attach text to the brace by using subscript, '_', or superscript,
+ '^', as here.
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ 1+1/2+\underbrace{1/3+1/4}_{>1/2}+
+ \underbrace{1/5+1/6+1/7+1/8}_{>1/2}+\cdots
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+ The superscript appears on top of the expression, and so can look
+ unconnected to the underbrace.
+
+'\overbrace{MATH}'
+ Put a brace over MATH, as with
+ '\overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}'. See also
+ '\underbrace'.
+
+ The package 'mathtools' adds an over- and underbrace, as well as some
+improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN.
+
+16.6 Spacing in math mode
+=========================
+
+When typesetting mathematics, LaTeX puts in spacing according to the
+normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter 'y=m x' then LaTeX
+ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x, as y=mx.
+
+ But LaTeX's rules sometimes need tweaking. For example, in an
+integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the 'f(x)'
+and the 'dx', here done with the '\,' command.
+
+ \int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
+
+ LaTeX provides the commands that follow for use in math mode. Many
+of these spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
+"mu". It is defined as 1/18em, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family (*note Units of length::). Thus, a '\thickspace' is
+something like 5/18 times the width of a 'M'.
+
+'\;'
+ Synonym: '\thickspace'. Normally '5.0mu plus 5.0mu'. Math mode
+ only.
+
+'\:'
+'\>'
+ Synonym: '\medspace'. Normally '4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'.
+ Math mode only.
+
+'\,'
+ Synonym: '\thinspace'. Normally '3mu', which is 1/6em. Can be
+ used in both math mode and text mode (*note \thinspace &
+ \negthinspace::).
+
+ This space is widely used, for instance between the function and
+ the infinitesimal in an integral '\int f(x)\,dx' and, if an author
+ does this, before punctuation in a displayed equation.
+
+ The antiderivative is
+ \begin{equation}
+ 3x^{-1/2}+3^{1/2}\,.
+ \end{equation}
+
+'\!'
+ A negative thin space. Normally '-3mu'. The '\!' command is math
+ mode only but the '\negthinspace' command is available for text
+ mode (*note \thinspace & \negthinspace::).
+
+'\quad'
+ This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space
+ surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space
+ between two equations inside a 'displaymath' environment. It is
+ available in both text and math mode.
+
+'\qquad'
+ A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em. It is available in both
+ text and math mode.
+
+16.6.1 '\smash'
+---------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \smash{SUBFORMULA}
+
+ Typeset SUBFORMULA as if its height and depth were zero.
+
+ In this example the exponential is so tall that without the '\smash'
+command LaTeX would separate its line from the line above it, and the
+uneven line spacing might be unsightly.
+
+ To compute the tetration $\smash{2^{2^{2^2}}}$,
+ evaluate from the top down, as $2^{2^4}=2^{16}=65536$.
+
+ (Because of the '\smash' the printed expression could run into the
+line above so you may want to wait until the final version of the
+document to make such adjustments.)
+
+ This pictures the effect of '\smash' by using '\fbox' to surround the
+box that LaTeX will put on the line. The '\blackbar' command makes a
+bar extending from 10 points below the baseline to 20 points above.
+
+ \newcommand{\blackbar}{\rule[-10pt]{5pt}{30pt}}
+ \fbox{\blackbar}
+ \fbox{\smash{\blackbar}}
+
+ The first box that LaTeX places is 20 points high and 10 points deep.
+But the second box is treated by LaTeX as having zero height and zero
+depth, despite that the ink printed on the page still extends well above
+and below the line.
+
+ The '\smash' command appears often in mathematics to adjust the size
+of an element that surrounds a subformula. Here the first radical
+extends below the baseline while the second lies just on the baseline.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \sqrt{\sum_{0\leq k< n} f(k)}
+ \sqrt{\vphantom{\sum}\smash{\sum_{0\leq k< n}} f(k)}
+ \end{equation}
+
+ Note the use of '\vphantom' to give the '\sqrt' command an argument
+with the height of the '\sum' (*note \phantom & \vphantom &
+\hphantom::).
+
+ While most often used in mathematics, the '\smash' command can appear
+in other contexts. However, it doesn't change into horizontal mode. So
+if it starts a paragraph then you should first put a '\leavevmode', as
+in the bottom line below.
+
+ xxx xxx xxx
+
+ \smash{yyy} % no paragraph indent
+
+ \leavevmode\smash{zzz} % usual paragraph indent
+
+ The package 'mathtools' has operators that provide even finer control
+over smashing a subformula box.
+
+16.6.2 '\phantom' & '\vphantom' & '\hphantom'
+---------------------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \phantom{SUBFORMULA}
+
+ or
+
+ \vphantom{SUBFORMULA}
+
+ or
+
+ \hphantom{SUBFORMULA}
+
+ The '\phantom' command creates a box with the same height, depth, and
+width as SUBFORMULA, but empty. That is, this command causes LaTeX to
+typeset the box but not its ink. The '\vphantom' variant also produces
+an invisible box with the same height and depth as SUBFORMULA, but it
+has width zero. And '\hphantom' makes a box with the same width as
+SUBFORMULA but with height and depth zero.
+
+ Without the '\vphantom' in this example, the top bars of the two
+square roots would be at different heights.
+
+ \( \sqrt{\vphantom{a^3}a}\cdot\sqrt{a^3} \)
+
+ The '\vphantom{a^3}' causes the first '\sqrt' to have inside it a box
+of the same height as the second '\sqrt', so LaTeX makes the bars align.
+
+ These commands often are combined with '\smash'. *Note \smash:: for
+another example of the use of '\vphantom'.
+
+ The three phantom commands appear often but note that LaTeX provides
+a suite of other commands to work with box sizes that may be more
+convenient, including '\makebox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::) as well as
+'\settodepth' (*note \settodepth::), '\settoheight' (*note
+\settoheight::), and '\settowidth' (*note \settowidth::). In addition,
+the 'mathtools' package has many commands that offer fine-grained
+control over spacing.
+
+ All three commands produce an ordinary box, without any special
+mathematics status. So to do something like attaching a superscript you
+should give it such a status, for example with the '\operatorname'
+command from the package 'amsmath'.
+
+ While most often used in mathematics, these three can appear in other
+contexts. However, they don't cause LaTeX to change into horizontal
+mode. So if one of these starts a paragraph then you should prefix it
+with '\leavevmode'.
+
+16.7 Math miscellany
+====================
+
+LaTeX contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities. Here are some
+that don't fit into other categories.
+
+16.7.1 Colon character ':' & '\colon'
+-------------------------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ :
+ \colon
+
+ In mathematics, the colon character, ':', is a relation.
+
+ With side ratios \( 3:4 \) and \( 4:5 \), the triangle is right.
+
+Ordinary LaTeX defines '\colon' to produce the colon character with the
+spacing appropriate for punctuation, as in set-builder notation
+'\{x\colon 0\leq x<1\}'.
+
+ But the widely-used 'amsmath' package defines '\colon' for use in the
+definition of functions 'f\colon D\to C'. So if you want the colon
+character as a punctuation then use '\mathpunct{:}'.
+
+16.7.2 '\*'
+-----------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \*
+
+ A multiplication symbol that allows a line break. If there is a
+break then LaTeX puts a '\times' symbol, U+00D7, before that break.
+
+ In '\( A_1\* A_2\* A_3\* A_4 \)', if there is no line break then
+LaTeX outputs it as though it were '\( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \)'. If a line
+break does happen, for example between the two middle ones, then LaTeX
+sets it like '\( A_1 A_2 \times \)', followed by the break, followed by
+'\( A_3 A_4 \)'.
+
+16.7.3 '\frac'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \frac{NUMERATOR}{DENOMINATOR}
+
+ Produces the fraction. Used as: '\begin{displaymath}
+\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi\sigma}} \end{displaymath}'. In inline math mode it
+comes out small; see the discussion of '\displaystyle' (*note Math
+formulas::).
+
+16.7.4 '\left' & '\right'
+-------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \left DELIMITER1 ... \right DELIMITER2
+
+ Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. The
+delimiters are sized according to the math they enclose. This makes a
+unit vector surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \left(\begin{array}{c}
+ 1 \\
+ 0 \\
+ \end{array}\right)
+
+ Every '\left' must have a matching '\right'. Leaving out the
+'\left(' in the above gets 'Extra \right'. Leaving off the '\right)'
+gets 'You can't use `\eqno' in math mode'.
+
+ However, the two delimiters DELIMITER1 and DELIMITER2 need not match.
+A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as below. Use a
+period, '.', as a null delimiter.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
+ 1 &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\
+ f(n-1)+3n^2 &\mbox{--else}
+ \end{array}\right.
+ \end{equation}
+
+Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
+backslash, '\{'.
+
+16.7.5 '\sqrt'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \sqrt{ARG}
+ \sqrt[ROOT-NUMBER]{ARG}
+
+ The square root, or optionally other roots, of ARG. The optional
+argument ROOT-NUMBER gives the root, i.e., enter the cube root of 'x+y'
+as '\sqrt[3]{x+y}'. The radical grows with the size of ARG (as the
+height of the radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets
+steeper, until for a large enough 'arg', it is vertical).
+
+ LaTeX has a separate '\surd' character (*note Math symbols::).
+
+16.7.6 '\stackrel'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}
+
+ Put TEXT above RELATION. To put a function name above an arrow enter
+'\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}'.
+
+17 Modes
+********
+
+As LaTeX processes your document, at any point it is in one of six
+modes. They fall into three categories of two each, the horizontal
+modes, the math modes, and the vertical modes. Some commands only work
+in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of
+the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.
+
+ * "Paragraph mode" is what LaTeX is in when processing ordinary text.
+ It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into
+ pages. This is the mode LaTeX is in most of the time.
+
+ "LR mode" (for left-to-right mode; in plain TeX this is called
+ "restricted horizontal mode") is in effect when LaTeX starts making
+ a box with an '\mbox' command. As in paragraph mode, LaTeX's
+ output is a string of words with spaces between them. Unlike in
+ paragraph mode, in LR mode LaTeX never starts a new line, it just
+ keeps going from left to right. (Although LaTeX will not complain
+ that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to
+ put that box into a line, it could very well complain that the
+ finished LR box won't fit there.)
+
+ * "Math mode" is when LaTeX is generating an inline mathematical
+ formula.
+
+ "Display math mode" is when LaTeX is generating a displayed
+ mathematical formula. (Displayed formulas differ somewhat from
+ inline ones. One example is that the placement of the subscript on
+ '\int' differs in the two situations.)
+
+ * "Vertical mode" is when LaTeX is building the list of lines and
+ other material making the output page. This is the mode LaTeX is
+ in when it starts a document.
+
+ "Internal vertical mode" is in effect when LaTeX starts making a
+ '\vbox'. This is the vertical analogue of LR mode.
+
+For instance, if you begin a LaTeX article with 'Let \( x \) be ...'
+then these are the modes: first LaTeX starts every document in vertical
+mode, then it reads the 'L' and switches to paragraph mode, then the
+next switch happens at the '\(' where LaTeX changes to math mode, and
+then when it leaves the formula it pops back to paragraph mode.
+
+ Paragraph mode has two subcases. If you use a '\parbox' command or a
+'minipage' then LaTeX is put into paragraph mode. But it will not put a
+page break here. Inside one of these boxes, called a "parbox", LaTeX is
+in "inner paragraph mode". Its more usual situation, where it can put
+page breaks, is "outer paragraph mode" (*note Page breaking::).
+
+17.1 '\ensuremath'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ensuremath{FORMULA}
+
+ Ensure that FORMULA is typeset in math mode.
+
+ For instance, you can redefine commands that ordinarily can be used
+only in math mode, so that they can be used both in math and in plain
+text.
+
+ \newcommand{\dx}{\ensuremath{dx}}
+ In $\int f(x)\, \dx$, the \dx{} is an infinitesimal.
+
+ Caution: the '\ensuremath' command is useful but not a panacea.
+
+ \newcommand{\alf}{\ensuremath{\alpha}}
+ You get an alpha in text mode: \alf.
+ But compare the correct spacing in $\alf+\alf$ with that in \alf+\alf.
+
+Best is to typeset math things in a math mode.
+
+18 Page styles
+**************
+
+The style of a page determines where LaTeX places the components of that
+page, such as headers and footers, and the text body. This includes
+pages in the main part of the document but also includes special pages
+such as the title page of a book, a page from an index, or the first
+page of an article.
+
+ The package 'fancyhdr' is very helpful for constructing page styles.
+See its documentation on CTAN.
+
+18.1 '\maketitle'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \maketitle
+
+ Generate a title. In the standard classes the title appears on a
+separate page, except in the 'article' class where it is at the top of
+the first page. (*Note Document class options:: for information about
+the 'titlepage' document class option.)
+
+ This example shows '\maketitle' appearing in its usual place,
+immediately after '\begin{document}'.
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \title{Constructing a Nuclear Reactor Using Only Coconuts}
+ \author{Jonas Grumby\thanks{%
+ With the support of a Ginger Grant from the Roy Hinkley Society.} \\
+ Skipper, \textit{Minnow}
+ \and
+ Willy Gilligan\thanks{%
+ Thanks to the Mary Ann Summers foundation
+ and to Thurston and Lovey Howell.} \\
+ Mate, \textit{Minnow}
+ }
+ \date{1964-Sep-26}
+ \begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+ Just sit right back and you'll hear a tale, a tale of a fateful trip.
+ That started from this tropic port, aboard this tiny ship. The mate was
+ a mighty sailin' man, the Skipper brave and sure. Five passengers set
+ sail that day for a three hour tour. A three hour tour.
+ ...
+
+ You tell LaTeX the information used to produce the title by making
+the following declarations. These must come before the '\maketitle',
+either in the preamble or in the document body.
+
+'\author{NAME1 \and NAME2 \and ...}'
+ Required. Declare the document author or authors. The argument is
+ a list of authors separated by '\and' commands. To separate lines
+ within a single author's entry, for instance to give the author's
+ institution or address, use a double backslash, '\\'. If you omit
+ the '\author' declaration then you get 'LaTeX Warning: No \author
+ given'.
+
+'\date{TEXT}'
+ Optional. Declare TEXT to be the document's date. The TEXT
+ doesn't need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all. If
+ you omit '\date' then LaTeX uses the current date (*note \today::).
+ To have no date, instead use '\date{}'.
+
+'\thanks{TEXT}'
+ Optional. Produce a footnote. You can use it in the author
+ information for acknowledgements as illustrated above, but you can
+ also use it in the title, or any place a footnote makes sense. It
+ can be any text at all so you can use it for any purpose, such as
+ to print an email address.
+
+'\title{TEXT}'
+ Required. Declare TEXT to be the title of the document. Get line
+ breaks inside TEXT with a double backslash, '\\'. If you omit the
+ '\title' declaration then you get 'LaTeX Error: No \title given'.
+
+ To make your own title page, see *note titlepage::. You can either
+create this as a one-off or you can include it as part of a renewed
+'\maketitle' command. (Many publishers will provide a class to use in
+place of 'article' that formats the title according to their house
+requirements.)
+
+18.2 '\pagenumbering'
+=====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \pagenumbering{NUMBER-STYLE}
+
+ Specifies the style of page numbers, and resets the page number. The
+numbering style is reflected on the page, and also in the table of
+contents and other page references. This declaration has global scope
+so its effect is not delimited by braces or environments.
+
+ In this example, before the Main section the pages are numbered 'a',
+etc. Starting on the page containing that section, the pages are
+numbered '1', etc.
+
+ \begin{document}\pagenumbering{alph}
+ ...
+ \section{Main}\pagenumbering{arabic}
+ ...
+
+ The argument NUMBER-STYLE is one of the following (see also *note
+\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::).
+
+'arabic'
+ Arabic numerals: 1, 2, ...
+
+'roman'
+ lowercase Roman numerals: i, ii, ...
+
+'Roman'
+ uppercase Roman numerals: I, II, ...
+
+'alph'
+ lowercase letters: a, b, ... If you have more than 26 pages then
+ you get 'LaTeX Error: Counter too large'.
+
+'Alph'
+ uppercase letters: A, B, ... If you have more than 26 pages then
+ you get 'LaTeX Error: Counter too large'.
+
+'gobble'
+ LaTeX does not output a page number, although it does get reset.
+ References to that page also are blank. (This does not work with
+ the popular package 'hyperref' so to have the page number not
+ appear you may want to instead use '\pagestyle{empty}' or
+ '\thispagestyle{empty}'.)
+
+ Traditionally, if a document has front matter--preface, table of
+contents, etc.--then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. The
+main matter of a document uses arabic. *Note \frontmatter & \mainmatter
+& \backmatter::.
+
+ If you want to address where the page number appears on the page,
+see *note \pagestyle::. If you want to change the value of page number
+then you will manipulate the 'page' counter (*note Counters::).
+
+18.3 '\pagestyle'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \pagestyle{STYLE}
+
+ Declaration that specifies how the page headers and footers are
+typeset, from the current page onwards.
+
+ A discussion with an example is below. Note first that the package
+'fancyhdr' is now the standard way to manipulate headers and footers.
+New documents that need to do anything other than one of the standard
+options below should use this package. See its documentation on CTAN.
+
+ Values for STYLE:
+
+'plain'
+ The header is empty. The footer contains only a page number,
+ centered.
+
+'empty'
+ The header and footer is empty.
+
+'headings'
+ Put running headers and footers on each page. The document style
+ specifies what goes in there; see the discussion below.
+
+'myheadings'
+ Custom headers, specified via the '\markboth' or the '\markright'
+ commands.
+
+ Some discussion of the motivation for LaTeX's mechanism will help you
+work with the options 'headings' or 'myheadings'. The document source
+below produces an article, two-sided, with the pagestyle 'headings'. On
+this document's left hand pages, LaTeX wants (in addition to the page
+number) the title of the current section. On its right hand pages LaTeX
+wants the title of the current subsection. When it makes up a page,
+LaTeX gets this information from the commands '\leftmark' and
+'\rightmark'. So it is up to '\section' and '\subsection' to store that
+information there.
+
+ \documentclass[twoside]{article}
+ \pagestyle{headings}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... \section{Section 1} ... \subsection{Subsection 1.1} ...
+ \section{Section 2}
+ ...
+ \subsection{Subsection 2.1}
+ ...
+ \subsection{Subsection 2.2}
+ ...
+
+Suppose that the second section falls on a left page. Although when the
+page starts it is in the first section, LaTeX will put 'Section 2' in
+the left page header. As to the right header, if no subsection starts
+before the end of the right page then LaTeX blanks the right hand
+header. If a subsection does appear before the right page finishes then
+there are two cases. If at least one subsection starts on the right
+hand page then LaTeX will put in the right header the title of the first
+subsection starting on that right page. If at least one of 2.1, 2.2,
+..., starts on the left page but none starts on the right then LaTeX
+puts in the right hand header the title of the last subsection to start,
+that is, the one in effect during the right hand page.
+
+ To accomplish this, in a two-sided article, LaTeX has '\section'
+issue a command '\markboth', setting '\leftmark' to 'Section 2' and
+setting '\rightmark' to blank. And, LaTeX has '\subsection' issue a
+command '\markright', setting '\rightmark' to 'Subsection 2.1', etc.
+
+ Here are the descriptions of '\markboth' and '\markright':
+
+'\markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}'
+ Sets both the right hand and left hand heading information for
+ either a page style of 'headings' or 'myheadings'. A left hand
+ page heading LEFT-HEAD is generated by the last '\markboth' command
+ before the end of the page. A right hand page heading RIGHT-HEAD
+ is generated by the first '\markboth' or '\markright' that comes on
+ the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one that came
+ before that page.
+
+'\markright{RIGHT}'
+ Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged.
+
+18.4 '\thispagestyle'
+=====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \thispagestyle{STYLE}
+
+ Works in the same way as the '\pagestyle' (*note \pagestyle::),
+except that it changes to STYLE for the current page only. This
+declaration has global scope, so its effect is not delimited by braces
+or environments.
+
+ Often the first page of a chapter or section has a different style.
+For example, this LaTeX book document has the first page of the first
+chapter in 'plain' style, as is the default (*note Page styles::).
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \pagestyle{headings}
+ \begin{document}
+ \chapter{First chapter}
+ ...
+ \chapter{Second chapter}\thispagestyle{empty}
+ ...
+
+The 'plain' style has a page number on it, centered in the footer. To
+make the page entirely empty, the command '\thispagestyle{empty}'
+immediately follows the second '\chapter'.
+
+19 Spaces
+*********
+
+LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. Some of these
+are best suited to mathematical text; see *note Spacing in math mode::.
+Some spacing commands are suitable for both regular text and
+mathematical text; versions of some of these commands are in this
+chapter.
+
+19.1 '\enspace' & '\quad' & '\qquad'
+====================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \enspace
+ \quad
+ \qquad
+
+ Insert a horizontal space of 1/2em, 1em, or 2em. The em is a length
+defined by a font designer, often thought of as being the width of a
+capital M. One advantage of describing space in ems is that it can be
+more portable across documents than an absolute measurement such as
+points (*note Lengths/em::).
+
+ This puts a suitable gap between two graphics.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{womensmile.png}%
+ \qquad\includegraphics{mensmile.png}
+ \end{center}
+
+*Note Spacing in math mode:: for '\quad' and '\qquad'. These are
+lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice in
+many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with
+'\hspace'.
+
+19.2 '\hspace'
+==============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \hspace{LENGTH}
+ \hspace*{LENGTH}
+
+ Insert the horizontal space LENGTH. The LENGTH can be positive,
+negative, or zero; adding negative space is like backspacing. It is a
+rubber length, that is, it may contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component, or
+both (*note Lengths::). Because the space is stretchable and
+shrinkable, it is sometimes called "glue".
+
+ This makes a line with 'Name:' an inch from the right margin.
+
+ \noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]{Name:\hspace{1in}}
+
+ The '*'-version inserts horizontal space that non-discardable. More
+precisely, when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines any white space--glues
+and kerns--that come at a line break are discarded. The '*'-version
+avoids that (technically, it adds a non-discardable invisible item in
+front of the space).
+
+ In this example
+
+ \parbox{0.8\linewidth}{%
+ Fill in each blank: Four \hspace*{1in} and seven years ago our
+ fathers brought forth on this continent, a new \hspace*{1in},
+ conceived in \hspace*{1in}, and dedicated to the proposition
+ that all men are created \hspace*{1in}.}
+
+the 1 inch blank following 'conceived in' falls at the start of a line.
+If you erase the '*' then LaTeX discards the blank.
+
+ Here, the '\hspace' separates the three graphics.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{lion.png}% comment keeps out extra space
+ \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{tiger.png}%
+ \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{bear.png}
+ \end{center}
+
+Because the argument to each '\hspace' has 'minus 0.25cm', each can
+shrink a little if the three figures are too wide. But each space won't
+shrink more than 0.25cm (*note Lengths::).
+
+19.3 '\hfill'
+=============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \hfill
+
+ Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but that can
+stretch horizontally as far as needed (*note Lengths::).
+
+ This creates a one-line paragraph with 'Name:' on the left side of
+the page and 'Quiz One' on the right.
+
+ \noindent Name:\hfill Quiz One
+
+ The '\hfill' command is equivalent to '\hspace{\fill}' and so the
+space can be discarded at line breaks. To avoid that instead use
+'\hspace*{\fill}' (*note \hspace::).
+
+ Here the graphs are evenly spaced in the middle of the figure.
+
+ \newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+ ...
+ \begin{figure}
+ \hspace*{\fill}%
+ \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph0.png}}%
+ \hfill\vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph1.png}}%
+ \hspace*{\fill}%
+ \caption{Comparison of two graphs} \label{fig:twographs}
+ \end{figure}
+
+Note the '\hspace*''s where the space could otherwise be dropped.
+
+19.4 '\hss'
+===========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \hss
+
+ Produce a horizontal space that is infinitely shrinkable as well as
+infinitely stretchable (this command is a TeX primitive). LaTeX authors
+should reach first for the '\makebox' command to get the effects of
+'\hss' (*note \mbox & \makebox::).
+
+ Here, the first line's '\hss' makes the Z stick out to the right,
+overwriting the Y. In the second line the Z sticks out to the left,
+overwriting the X.
+
+ X\hbox to 0pt{Z\hss}Y
+ X\hbox to 0pt{\hss Z}Y
+
+Without the '\hss' you get something like 'Overfull \hbox (6.11111pt too
+wide) detected at line 20'.
+
+19.5 '\spacefactor'
+===================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \spacefactor=INTEGER
+
+ Influence LaTeX's glue stretch and shrink behavior. Most user-level
+documents do not use this command.
+
+ While LaTeX is laying out the material, it may stretch or shrink the
+gaps between words. (This space is not a character; it is called the
+"interword glue"; *note \hspace::). The '\spacefactor' command (from
+Plain TeX) allows you to, for instance, have the space after a period
+stretch more than the space after a word-ending letter.
+
+ After LaTeX places each character, or rule or other box, it sets a
+parameter called the "space factor". If the next thing in the input is
+a space then this parameter affects how much stretching or shrinking can
+happen. A space factor that is larger than the normal value means that
+the glue can stretch more and shrink less. Normally, the space factor
+is 1000. This value is in effect following most characters, and any
+non-character box or math formula. But it is 3000 after a period,
+exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000 after a colon, 1500 after
+a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or closing double quote or single quote. Finally, it is 999
+after a capital letter.
+
+ If the space factor F is 1000 then the glue gap will be the font's
+normal space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is
+3.3333 points). Otherwise, if the space factor F is greater than 2000
+then TeX adds the font's extra space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10
+point this is 1.11111 points), and then the font's normal stretch value
+is multiplied by f /1000 and the normal shrink value is multiplied by
+1000/f (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point these are 1.66666 and
+1.11111 points).
+
+ For example, consider the period ending 'A man's best friend is his
+dog.' After it, TeX puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the
+glue to stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much, as the glue
+after 'friend', which does not end in a period.
+
+ The rules for space factors are even more complex because they play
+additional roles. In practice, there are two consequences. First, if a
+period or other punctuation is followed by a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or right single or double quote then the spacing effect of that
+period carries through those characters (that is, the following glue
+will have increased stretch and shrink). Second, if punctuation comes
+after a capital letter then its effect is not in place so you get an
+ordinary space. This second case also affects abbreviations that do not
+end in a capital letter (*note \@::).
+
+ You can only use '\spacefactor' in paragraph mode or LR mode (*note
+Modes::). You can see the current value with '\the\spacefactor' or
+'\showthe\spacefactor'.
+
+ (Comment, not really related to '\spacefactor': if you get errors
+like 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode', or 'You can't use
+`\spacefactor' in math mode.', or 'Improper \spacefactor' then you have
+probably tried to redefine an internal command. *Note \makeatletter &
+\makeatother::.)
+
+19.5.1 '\@'
+-----------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ CAPITAL-LETTER\@.
+
+ Treat a period as sentence-ending, where LaTeX would otherwise think
+it is part of an abbreviation. LaTeX thinks that a period ends an
+abbreviation if the period comes after a capital letter, and otherwise
+thinks the period ends the sentence. By default, in justifying a line
+LaTeX adjusts the space after a sentence-ending period (or a question
+mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than it adjusts the space
+between words (*note \spacefactor::).
+
+ This example shows the two cases to remember.
+
+ The songs \textit{Red Guitar}, etc.\ are by Loudon Wainwright~III\@.
+
+The second period ends the sentence, despite that it is preceded by a
+capital. We tell LaTeX that it ends the sentence by putting '\@' before
+it. The first period ends the abbreviation 'etc.' but not the sentence.
+The backslash-space, '\ ', produces a mid-sentence space.
+
+ So: if you have a capital letter followed by a period that ends the
+sentence, then put '\@' before the period. This holds even if there is
+an intervening right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or double
+quote, because the spacing effect of that period carries through those
+characters. For example, this
+
+ Use the \textit{Instructional Practices Guide},
+ (a book by the MAA)\@.
+
+will have correct inter-sentence spacing after the period.
+
+ The '\@' command is only for a text mode. If you use it outside of a
+text mode then you get 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode'
+(*note Modes::).
+
+ Comment: the converse case is a period ending an abbreviation whose
+last letter is not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the
+last word in the sentence. For that case follow the period with a
+backslash-space, ('\ '), or a tie, ('~'), or '\@'. Examples are 'Nat.\
+Acad.\ Science', and 'Mr.~Bean', and '(manure, etc.\@) for sale' (note
+in the last one that the '\@' comes before the closing parenthesis).
+
+19.5.2 '\frenchspacing'
+-----------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \frenchspacing
+ \nonfrenchspacing
+
+ The first declaration causes LaTeX to treat spacing between sentences
+in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a sentence.
+The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more
+(*note \spacefactor::); this is the default.
+
+ Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the
+space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
+exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words
+that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring '\frenchspacing' (the
+command is from Plain TeX) switches to the tradition that all spaces are
+treated equally.
+
+19.5.3 '\normalsfcodes'
+-----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \normalsfcodes
+
+ Reset the LaTeX space factor values to the default (*note
+\spacefactor::).
+
+19.6 Backslash-space, '\ '
+==========================
+
+This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a
+backslash followed by a space. Synopsis:
+
+ \
+
+ Produce a space. By default it produces white space of length
+3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt.
+
+ When you type one or more blanks between words, LaTeX produces white
+space. But that is different than an explicit space. This illustrates.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ One blank: makes some space \\
+ Three blanks: in a row \\
+ Three spaces:\ \ \ in a row \\
+ \end{tabular}
+
+On the first line LaTeX puts some space after the colon. On the second
+line LaTeX collapses the three blanks to output one whitespace, so you
+end with the same space after the colon as in the first line. LaTeX
+would similarly collapse a blank followed by a tab, or a blank and a
+newline and a blank. However, the bottom line asks for three spaces so
+the white area is wider. That is, the backslash-space command creates a
+fixed amount of horizontal space. (Note that you can define a
+horizontal space of any width at all with '\hspace'; see *note
+\hspace::.)
+
+ The backslash-space command has two main uses. It is often used
+after control sequences to keep them from gobbling the space that
+follows, as in '\TeX\ is nice'. (But using curly parentheses, as in
+'\TeX{} is best', has the advantage of still working if the next
+character is a period.) The other common use is that it marks a period
+as ending an abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in 'So says
+Prof.\ Smith' (*note \@::).
+
+ Under normal circumstances, '\'<tab> and '\'<newline> are equivalent
+to backslash-space, '\ '.
+
+19.7 '~'
+========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ BEFORE~AFTER
+
+ The tie character, '~', produces a space between BEFORE and AFTER at
+which the line will not be broken. By default the white space has
+length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt (*note Lengths::).
+
+ Here LaTeX will not break the line between the final two words.
+
+ Thanks to Prof.~Lerman.
+
+In addition, despite the period, LaTeX does not use the end-of-sentence
+spacing (*note \@::).
+
+ Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could
+cause confusion. But they also reduce LaTeX's options when it breaks
+lines into paragraphs, so you can use too many. They are also matters
+of taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers.
+Nevertheless, here are some usage models, many of them from the TeXbook.
+
+ * Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references:
+ 'Chapter~12', or 'Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}', or
+ 'Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}'. When cases are enumerated inline:
+ '(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded'.
+
+ * Between a number and its unit: '$745.7.8$~watts' (the 'siunitx'
+ package has a special facility for this) or '144~eggs'. This
+ includes between a month and a date: 'October~12' or '12~Oct'. In
+ general, in any expressions where numbers and abbreviations or
+ symbols are separated by a space: 'AD~565', or '2:50~pm', or
+ 'Boeing~747', or '268~Plains Road', or '\$$1.4$~billion'.
+
+ * When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: 'equals~$n$', or
+ 'less than~$\epsilon$', or 'given~$X$', or 'modulo~$p^e$ for all
+ large~$n$' (but compare 'is~$15$' with 'is $15$~times the height').
+ Between mathematical symbols in apposition with nouns:
+ 'dimension~$d$' or 'function~$f(x)$' (but compare 'with length
+ $l$~or more'). When a symbol is a tightly bound object of a
+ preposition: 'of~$x$', or 'from $0$ to~$1$', or 'in common
+ with~$m$'.
+
+ * Between symbols in series: '$1$,~$2$, or~$3$' or '$1$,~$2$,
+ \ldots,~$n$'.
+
+ * Between a person's forenames and between multiple surnames:
+ 'Donald~E. Knuth', or 'Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo', or 'Charles~XII' (but
+ you must give TeX places to break the line so you may do 'Charles
+ Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin').
+
+ * Before a dash: 'pages 12~--14' or 'it is~--- it must be said~---
+ plausible'.
+
+19.8 '\thinspace' & '\negthinspace'
+===================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \thinspace
+ \negthinspace
+
+ Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6em and -1/6em.
+These are the text mode equivalents of '\,' and '\!' (*note Spacing in
+math mode/\thinspace::). You can use '\,' as a synonym for '\thinspace'
+in text mode.
+
+ The '\negthinspace' command is used in text mode mostly for fiddling
+with spaces. One common use of '\thinspace' is as the space between
+nested quotes.
+
+ Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace''
+
+Another use is that some style guides call for a '\thinspace' between an
+ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides, though, think
+the three dots are quite enough already). Still another use is between
+initials, as in 'D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth'.
+
+19.9 '\/'
+=========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ BEFORE-CHARACTER\/AFTER-CHARACTER
+
+ Insert an "italic correction", a small space defined by the font
+designer for each character, to avoid the character colliding with
+whatever follows. When you use '\/', LaTeX takes the correction from
+the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has been applied to
+the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space.
+
+ Here, were it not for the '\/', the BEFORE-CHARACTER italic f would
+hit the AFTER-CHARACTER roman H
+
+ \newcommand{\companylogo}{{\it f}\/H}
+
+because the italic letter leans far to the right.
+
+ If AFTER-CHARACTER is a period or comma then don't insert an italic
+correction since those punctuation symbols have a very small height.
+However, with semicolons or colons as well as with normal letters, the
+italic correction can help.
+
+ When you use commands such as '\textit' or '\itshape' to change
+fonts, LaTeX will automatically insert any needed italic correction
+(*note Font styles::).
+
+ Roman characters can also have an italic correction. An example is
+in the name 'pdf\/\TeX'.
+
+ There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is
+done in a different way.
+
+19.10 '\hrulefill' & '\dotfill'
+===============================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \hrulefill
+ \dotfill
+
+ Produce an infinite horizontal rubber length (*note Lengths::) that
+LaTeX fills with a rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of white
+space.
+
+ This outputs a line 2 inches long.
+
+ Name:~\makebox[2in]{\hrulefill}
+
+This example, when placed between blank lines, creates a paragraph that
+is left and right justified and where the middle is filled with evenly
+spaced dots.
+
+ \noindent John Aubrey, RN \dotfill{} Melbury Lodge
+
+ To make the rule or dots go to the line's end use '\null' at the
+start or end.
+
+ To change the rule's thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
+here
+
+ \renewcommand{\hrulefill}{%
+ \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern\z@}
+
+which changes the default thickness of 0.4pt to 1pt. Similarly, adjust
+the dot spacing as with
+
+ \renewcommand{\dotfill}{%
+ \leavevmode\cleaders\hb@xt@1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern\z@}
+
+which changes the default length of 0.33em to 1.00em.
+
+ This example produces a line for a signature.
+
+ \begin{minipage}{4cm}
+ \centering
+ \hrulefill\\
+ Signed
+ \end{minipage}
+
+The line is 4cm long.
+
+19.11 '\bigskip' & '\medskip' & '\smallskip'
+============================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \bigskip
+ \medskip
+ \smallskip
+
+ Produce an amount of vertical space, large or medium-sized or small.
+These commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Here the skip suggests the passage of time (from The Golden Ocean by
+O'Brian).
+
+ Mr Saumarez would have something rude to say to him, no doubt: he
+ was at home again, and it was delightful.
+
+ \bigskip
+ ``A hundred and fifty-seven miles and one third, in twenty-four hours,''
+ said Peter.
+
+ Each command is associated with a length defined in the document
+class file.
+
+'\bigskip'
+ The same as '\vspace{\bigskipamount}', ordinarily about one line
+ space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the 'book' and
+ 'article' classes is '12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt'.
+
+'\medskip'
+ The same as '\vspace{\medskipamount}', ordinarily about half of a
+ line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the 'book'
+ and 'article' classes is '6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt'.
+
+'\smallskip'
+ The same as '\vspace{\smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter
+ of a line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the
+ 'book' and 'article' classes is '3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt'.
+
+ Because each command is a '\vspace', if you use on in mid-paragraph
+then it will insert its vertical space between the line in which you use
+it and the next line, not necessarily at the place that you use it. So
+these are best between paragraphs.
+
+ The commands '\bigbreak', '\medbreak', and '\smallbreak' are similar
+but also suggest to LaTeX that this is a good place to put a page break
+(*note \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak::.
+
+19.12 '\bigbreak' & '\medbreak' & '\smallbreak'
+===============================================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \bigbreak
+ \medbreak
+ \smallbreak
+
+ Produce a vertical space that is big or medium-sized or small, and
+suggest to LaTeX that this is a good place to break the page. (The
+associated penalties are -200, -100, and -50.)
+
+ *Note \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip::, for more. These commands
+produce the same vertical space but differ in that they also remove a
+preceding vertical space if it is less than what they would insert (as
+with '\addvspace'). In addition, they terminate a paragraph where they
+are used: this example
+
+ abc\bigbreak def ghi
+
+ jkl mno pqr
+
+will output three paragraphs, the first ending in 'abc' and the second
+starting, after an extra vertical space and a paragraph indent, with
+'def'.
+
+19.13 '\strut'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \strut
+
+ Ensure that the current line has height at least '0.7\baselineskip'
+and depth at least '0.3\baselineskip'. Essentially, LaTeX inserts into
+the line a rectangle having zero width,
+'\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]{0pt}{\baselineskip}' (*note \rule::). The
+'\baselineskip' changes with the current font and fontsize.
+
+ In this example the '\strut' keeps the box inside the frame from
+having zero height.
+
+ \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[2in]{\strut}
+
+ This example has four lists. In the first there is a much bigger gap
+between items 2 and 3 than there is between items 1 and 2. The second
+list fixes that with a '\strut' at the end of its first item's second
+line.
+
+ \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+ \noindent\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}
+ \item test
+ \item test
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{minipage}%
+ \begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}
+ \item test
+ \item test
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{minipage}%
+ \begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{minipage}%
+ \begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+ \item \fbox{test}
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{minipage}%
+
+The final two lists use '\fbox' to show what's happening. The third
+list's '\parbox' goes only to the bottom of its second 'test', which
+happens not have any characters that descend below the baseline. The
+fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed extra below-baseline
+space.
+
+ The '\strut' command is often useful in graphics, such as in 'TikZ'
+or 'Asymptote'. For instance, you may have a command such as
+'\graphnode{NODE-NAME}' that fits a circle around NODE-NAME. However,
+unless you are careful the NODE-NAME's 'x' and 'y' will produce
+different-diameter circles because the characters are different sizes.
+A careful '\graphnode' might insert a '\strut', then NODE-NAME, and then
+draw the circle.
+
+ The general approach of using a zero width '\rule' is useful in many
+circumstances. In this table, the zero-width rule keeps the top of the
+first integral from hitting the '\hline'. Similarly, the second rule
+keeps the second integral from hitting the first.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{rl}
+ \textsc{Integral} &\textsc{Value} \\
+ \hline
+ $\int_0^x t\, dt$ &$x^2/2$ \rule{0em}{2.5ex} \\
+ $\int_0^x t^2\, dt$ &$x^3/3$ \rule{0em}{2.5ex}
+ \end{tabular}
+
+(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available
+optional argument to put in more vertical room, that won't work here.
+Changing the first double backslash to something like '\\[2.5ex]' will
+put the room between the header line and the '\hline', and the integral
+would still hit the line.)
+
+19.14 '\vspace'
+===============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \vspace{LENGTH}
+ \vspace*{LENGTH}
+
+ Add the vertical space LENGTH. The LENGTH can be positive, negative,
+or zero. It is a rubber length--it may contain a 'plus' or 'minus'
+component (*note Lengths::).
+
+ This puts space between the two paragraphs.
+
+ And I slept.
+
+ \vspace{1ex plus 0.5ex}
+ The new day dawned cold.
+
+(*Note \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip:: for common inter-paragraph
+spaces.)
+
+ The '*'-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable. More
+precisely, LaTeX discards vertical space at a page break and the
+'*'-version causes the space to stay. This example leaves space between
+the two questions.
+
+ Question: Find the integral of \( 5x^4+5 \).
+
+ \vspace*{2cm plus 0.5cm}
+ Question: Find the derivative of \( x^5+5x+9 \).
+
+That space will be present even if the page break happens to fall
+between the questions.
+
+ If you use '\vspace' in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
+horizontal mode) then the space is inserted after the line containing
+the '\vspace' command; it does not start a new paragraph at the
+'\vspace' command.
+
+ In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
+the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
+
+ \begin{document}
+ 1) Who put the bomp in the bomp bah bomp bah bomp?
+ \vspace{1in plus 1fill}
+
+ 2) Who put the ram in the rama lama ding dong?
+ \vspace{1in plus 1fill}
+ \end{document}
+
+19.15 '\vfill'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \vfill
+
+ End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length that is
+infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as needed (*note
+Lengths::).
+
+ It is often used in the same way as '\vspace{\fill}', except that
+'\vfill' ends the current paragraph whereas '\vspace{\fill}' adds the
+infinite vertical space below its line, irrespective of the paragraph
+structure. In both cases that space will disappear at a page boundary;
+to circumvent this see the starred option in *note \vspace::.
+
+ In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines
+contain the text 'Lost Dog!' and the second 'Lost Dog!' is exactly
+halfway between them.
+
+ \begin{document}
+ Lost Dog!
+ \vfill
+ Lost Dog! % perfectly in the middle
+ \vfill
+ Lost Dog!
+ \end{document}
+
+19.16 '\addvspace'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \addvspace{VERT-LENGTH}
+
+ Add a vertical space of VERT-LENGTH. However, if there are two or
+more '\addvspace''s in a sequence then together they only add the space
+needed to make the natural length equal to the maximum of the
+VERT-LENGTH's in that sequence. This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::). The VERT-LENGTH is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
+
+ This example illustrates. The 'picture' draws a scale. In a
+standard LaTeX article the length '\baselineskip' is 12pt. The two
+rules here are 22pt apart: the sum of the '\baselineskip' and the 10pt
+from the first 'addvspace'.
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \usepackage{color}
+ \begin{document}
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{2pt}%
+ \noindent\begin{picture}(0,0)%
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,-1){25}{{\color{blue}\line(1,0){1}}}
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,-5){6}{{\color{red}\line(1,0){2}}}
+ \end{picture}%
+ \rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}%
+ \par\addvspace{10pt}% \addvspace{20pt}%
+ \par\noindent\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}%
+ \end{document}
+
+Now uncomment the second '\addvspace'. It does not make the gap 20pt
+longer; instead the gap is the sum of '\baselineskip' and 20pt. So
+'\addvspace' in a sense does the opposite of its name -- it makes sure
+that multiple vertical spaces do not accumulate, but instead that only
+the largest one is used.
+
+ LaTeX uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below
+an environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a 'theorem'
+environment begins and ends with '\addvspace' so that two consecutive
+'theorem''s are separated by one vertical space, not two.
+
+ A error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item' pointing to an
+'\addvspace' means that you were not in vertical mode when you hit this
+command. One way to change that is to precede '\addvspace' with a
+'\par' command (*note \par::), as in the above example.
+
+20 Boxes
+********
+
+At its core, LaTeX puts things in boxes and then puts the boxes on a
+page. So these commands are central.
+
+ There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating
+boxes. One useful adjunct to the commands here is 'adjustbox'.
+
+20.1 '\mbox' & '\makebox'
+=========================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \mbox{TEXT}
+ \makebox{TEXT}
+ \makebox[WIDTH]{TEXT}
+ \makebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+ Create a box, a container for material. The TEXT is typeset in LR
+mode (*note Modes::) so it is not broken into lines. The '\mbox'
+command is robust, while '\makebox' is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Because 'text' is not broken into lines, you can use '\mbox' to
+prevent hyphenation. In this example, LaTeX will not hyphenate the
+table name, 'T-4'.
+
+ See Table~\mbox{T-4}
+
+ The first two command versions, '\mbox' and '\makebox', are roughly
+equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the TEXT.
+(They are like plain TeX's '\hbox'.)
+
+ In the third version the optional argument WIDTH specifies the width
+of the box. Note that the space occupied by the text need not equal the
+width of the box. For one thing, TEXT can be too small; this creates a
+full-line box
+
+ \makebox[\linewidth]{Chapter Exam}
+
+with 'Chapter Exam' centered. But TEXT can also be too wide for WIDTH.
+See the example below of zero-width boxes.
+
+ In the WIDTH argument you can use the following lengths that refer to
+the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets on typesetting TEXT: '\depth',
+'\height', '\width', '\totalheight' (this is the box's height plus its
+depth). For example, to make a box with the text stretched to double
+the natural size you can say this.
+
+ \makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+
+ For the fourth command version the optional argument POSITION gives
+position of the text within the box. It may take the following values:
+
+'c'
+ The TEXT is centered (default).
+
+'l'
+ The TEXT is flush left.
+
+'r'
+ Flush right.
+
+'s'
+ Stretch the interword space in TEXT across the entire WIDTH. The
+ TEXT must contain stretchable space for this to work. For
+ instance, this could head a press release:
+ '\noindent\makebox[\textwidth][s]{\large\hfil IMMEDIATE\hfil
+ RELEASE\hfil}'
+
+ A common use of '\makebox' is to make zero-width text boxes. This
+puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions.
+
+ \newcommand{\pts}[1]{\makebox[0em][r]{#1 points\hspace*{1em}}}
+ \pts{10}What is the air-speed velocity of an unladen swallow?
+
+ \pts{90}An African or European swallow?
+
+
+ The right edge of the output '10 points ' (note the ending space)
+will be just before the 'What' (note the space after 'points'). You can
+use '\makebox' similarly when making graphics, such as in 'TikZ' or
+'Asymptote', where you put the edge of the text at a known location,
+regardless of the length of that text.
+
+ For boxes with frames see *note \fbox & \framebox::. For colors
+see *note Colored boxes::.
+
+ There is a related version of '\makebox' that is used within the
+'picture' environment, where the length is given in terms of
+'\unitlength' (*note \makebox (picture)::).
+
+ If you put a double-backslash into TEXT then LaTeX will not give you
+a new line; for instance '\makebox{abc def \\ ghi}' outputs 'abc defghi'
+while '\makebox{abc def \par ghi}' outputs 'abc def ghi', but neither go
+to a second line. To get multiple lines see *note \parbox:: and *note
+minipage::.
+
+20.2 '\fbox' & '\framebox'
+==========================
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+ \fbox{TEXT}
+ \framebox{TEXT}
+ \framebox[WIDTH]{TEXT}
+ \framebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+ Create a box with an enclosing frame, four lines surrounding the
+space. These commands are the same as '\mbox' and '\makebox' except for
+the frame (*note \mbox & \makebox::). The '\fbox' command is robust,
+the '\framebox' command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ \fbox{Warning! No work shown, no credit given.}
+
+LaTeX puts the text into a box that cannot be split or hyphenated.
+Around that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four lines making
+a frame.
+
+ The first two command invocations, '\fbox{...}' and '\framebox{...}',
+are roughly the same. As to the third and fourth invocations, the
+optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as WIDTH and the
+position of the text inside that box as POSITION. *Note \mbox &
+\makebox:: for the full description but here is an example creating an
+empty box that is 1/4in wide.
+
+ \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[0.25in]{\strut}}
+
+The '\strut' inserts a vertical height of '\baselineskip' (*note
+\strut::).
+
+ These parameters determine the frame layout.
+
+'\fboxrule'
+ The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box. The default is
+ 0.2pt. Change it with a command such as
+ '\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}' (*note \setlength::).
+
+'\fboxsep'
+ The distance from the frame to the enclosed box. The default is
+ 3pt. Change it with a command such as '\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}'
+ (*note \setlength::). Setting it to 0pt is useful sometimes: this
+ will put a frame around the picture with no white border.
+
+ {\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
+ \framebox{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{prudence.jpg}}}
+
+ The extra curly braces keep the effect of the '\setlength' local.
+
+ As with '\mbox' and '\makebox', LaTeX will not break lines in TEXT.
+But this example has LaTeX break lines to make a paragraph, and then
+frame the result.
+
+ \framebox{%
+ \begin{minipage}{0.6\linewidth}
+ My dear, here we must run as fast as we can, just to stay in place.
+ And if you wish to go anywhere you must run twice as fast as that.
+ \end{minipage}}
+
+ *Note Colored boxes:: for colors other than black and white.
+
+ The 'picture' environment has a version of this command where the
+units depend on 'picture''s '\unitlength' (*note \framebox (picture)::).
+
+20.3 '\parbox'
+==============
+
+Synopses, one of:
+
+ \parbox{WIDTH}{CONTENTS}
+ \parbox[POSITION]{WIDTH}{CONTENTS}
+ \parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT]{WIDTH}{CONTENTS}
+ \parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}{CONTENTS}
+
+ Produce a box of text that is WIDTH wide. Use this command to make a
+box of small pieces of text, of a single paragraph. This command is
+fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ \begin{picture}(0,0)
+ ...
+ \put(1,2){\parbox{1.75in}{\raggedright Because the graph is a line on
+ this semilog paper, the relationship is
+ exponential.}}
+ \end{picture}
+
+ The CONTENTS are processed in a text mode (*note Modes::) so LaTeX
+will break lines to make a paragraph. But it won't make multiple
+paragraphs; for that, use a 'minipage' environment (*note minipage::).
+
+ The options for '\parbox' (except for CONTENTS) are the same as those
+for 'minipage'. For convenience a summary of the options is here but
+see *note minipage:: for a complete description.
+
+ There are two required arguments. The WIDTH is a rigid length (*note
+Lengths::). It sets the width of the box into which LaTeX typesets
+CONTENTS. The CONTENTS is the text that is placed in that box. It
+should not have any paragraph-making components.
+
+ There are three optional arguments, POSITION, HEIGHT, and INNER-POS.
+The POSITION gives the vertical alignment of the 'parbox' with respect
+to the surrounding material. The possible values are 'c' or 'm' to make
+the vertical center of the 'parbox' lines up with the center of the
+adjacent line (this is the default), or 't' to match the top line of the
+'parbox' with the baseline of the surrounding material, or 'b' to match
+the bottom line.
+
+ The optional argument HEIGHT overrides the natural height of the box.
+
+ The optional argument INNER-POS controls the placement of CONTENT
+inside the 'parbox'. Its default is the value of POSITION. Its
+possible values are: 't' to put the CONTENT at the top of the box, 'c'
+to put it in the vertical center, 'b' to put it at the bottom of the
+box, and 's' to stretch it out vertically (for this, the text must
+contain vertically stretchable space).
+
+20.4 '\raisebox'
+================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \raisebox{DISTANCE}{TEXT}
+ \raisebox{DISTANCE}[HEIGHT]{TEXT}
+ \raisebox{DISTANCE}[HEIGHT][DEPTH]{TEXT}
+
+ Raise or lower TEXT. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by
+lowering the vertical bar symbol.
+
+ \newcommand\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}}
+ $f\restricted{A}$
+
+ The first mandatory argument DISTANCE specifies how far to raise the
+second mandatory argument TEXT. This is a rigid length (*note
+Lengths::). If it is negative then it lowers TEXT. The TEXT is
+processed in LR mode so it cannot contain line breaks (*note Modes::).
+
+ The optional arguments HEIGHT and DEPTH are dimensions. If they are
+specified, they override the natural height and depth of the box LaTeX
+gets by typesetting TEXT.
+
+ In the arguments DISTANCE, HEIGHT, and DEPTH you can use the
+following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets
+on typesetting TEXT: '\depth', '\height', '\width', '\totalheight' (this
+is the box's height plus its depth).
+
+ This will align two graphics on their top (*note Graphics::).
+
+ \usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{calc} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{center}
+ \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{lion.png}}
+ \qquad
+ \raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{meta.png}}
+ \end{center}
+
+The first '\height' is the height of 'lion.png' while the second is the
+height of 'meta.png'.
+
+20.5 '\sbox' & '\savebox'
+=========================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \sbox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}
+ \savebox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}
+ \savebox{BOX-CMD}[WIDTH]{TEXT}
+ \savebox{BOX-CMD}[WIDTH][POS]{TEXT}
+
+ Typeset TEXT just as with '\makebox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::)
+except that LaTeX does not output it but instead saves it in a storage
+bin named BOX-CMD. The bin name BOX-CMD begins with a backslash, '\'.
+You must have previously allocated the bin BOX-CMD with '\newsavebox'
+(*note \newsavebox::).The '\sbox' command is robust while '\savebox' is
+fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ This creates and uses a bin.
+
+ \newsavebox{\fullname}
+ \sbox{\fullname}{John Jacob Jingleheimer Schmidt}
+ ...
+ \usebox{\fullname}! His name is my name, too!
+ Whenever we go out, the people always shout!
+ There goes \\usebox{\fullname}! Ya da da da da da da.
+
+One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a '\newcommand' is
+efficiency, that LaTeX need not repeatedly retypeset the contents. See
+the example below.
+
+ The first two command invocations, '\sbox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}' and
+'\savebox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}', are roughly equivalent. As to the third and
+fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as
+WIDTH, and the position of the text inside that box as POSITION. *Note
+\mbox & \makebox:: for the full description.
+
+ In the '\sbox' and '\savebox' commands the TEXT is typeset in LR mode
+so it does not have line breaks (*note Modes::). If you use these then
+LaTeX doesn't give you an error but it ignores what you want: if you
+enter '\sbox{\newbin}{test \\ test}' and '\usebox{\newbin}' then you get
+'testtest', while if you enter '\sbox{\newbin}{test \par test}' and
+'\usebox{\newbin}' then you get 'test test', but no error or warning.
+To fix this use a '\parbox' or 'minipage' as here.
+
+ \savebox{\abin}{%
+ \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{minipage}}
+ ...
+ \usebox{\abin}
+
+ As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin's contents, this
+puts the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the
+header. LaTeX only typesets it once.
+
+ \usepackage{graphicx} % all this in the preamble
+ \newsavebox{\sealbin}
+ \savebox{\sealbin}{%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}%
+ \begin{picture}(0,0)%
+ \put(1.5,-2.5){%
+ \begin{tabular}{c}
+ \includegraphics[height=2in]{companylogo.png} \\
+ Office of the President
+ \end{tabular}}
+ \end{picture}%
+ }
+ \markright{\usebox{\sealbin}}
+ \pagestyle{headings}
+
+The 'picture' environment is good for fine-tuning the placement.
+
+ If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like
+'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \nobin'.
+
+20.6 'lrbox'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{lrbox}{BOX-CMD}
+ TEXT
+ \end{lrbox}
+
+ The TEXT inside the environment is saved in the bin 'BOX-CMD'. The
+BOX-CMD must begin with a backslash. You must create this bin in
+advance with '\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::). This is the
+environment form of the '\sbox' and '\savebox' commands, and is
+equivalent to them. *Note \sbox & \savebox:: for the full information.
+
+ In this example the environment is convenient for entering the
+'tabular'.
+
+ \newsavebox{\jhbin}
+ \begin{lrbox}{\jhbin}
+ \begin{tabular}{c}
+ \includegraphics[height=1in]{jh.png} \\
+ Jim Hef{}feron
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{lrbox}
+ ...
+ \usebox{\jhbin}
+
+20.7 '\usebox'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usebox{BOX-CMD}
+
+ Produce the box most recently saved in the bin BOX-CMD by the
+commands '\sbox' or '\savebox', or the 'lrbox' environment. *Note \sbox
+& \savebox:: for more information and examples. (Note that BOX-CMD
+starts with a backslash.) This command is robust (*note \protect::).
+
+21 Color
+********
+
+You can add color to text, rules, etc. You can also have color in a box
+or on an entire page and write text on top of it.
+
+ Color support comes as an additional package. So put
+'\usepackage{color}' in your document preamble to use the commands
+described here.
+
+ Many other packages also supplement LaTeX's color abilities.
+Particularly worth mentioning is 'xcolor', which is widely used and
+significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding
+'HTML' and 'Hsb' color models.
+
+21.1 'color' package options
+============================
+
+Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
+
+ \usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{color}
+
+ When you load the 'color' package there are two kinds of available
+options.
+
+ The first specifies the "printer driver". LaTeX doesn't contain
+information about different output systems but instead depends on
+information stored in a file. Normally you should not specify the
+driver option in the document, and instead rely on your system's
+default. One advantage of this is that it makes the document portable
+across systems. For completeness we include a list of the drivers. The
+currently relevant ones are: 'dvipdfmx', 'dvips', 'dvisvgm', 'luatex',
+'pdftex', 'xetex'. The two 'xdvi' and 'oztex' are essentially aliases
+for 'dvips' (and 'xdvi' is monochrome). Ones that should not be used
+for new systems are: 'dvipdf', 'dvipdfm', 'dviwin', 'dvipsone', 'emtex',
+'pctexps', 'pctexwin', 'pctexhp', 'pctex32', 'truetex', 'tcidvi', 'vtex'
+(and 'dviwindo' is an alias for 'dvipsone').
+
+ The second kind of options, beyond the drivers, are below.
+
+'monochrome'
+ Disable the color commands, so that they do not generate errors but
+ do not generate color either.
+
+'dvipsnames'
+ Make available a list of 68 color names that are often used,
+ particularly in legacy documents. These color names were
+ originally provided by the 'dvips' driver, giving the option name.
+
+'nodvipsnames'
+ Do not load that list of color names, saving LaTeX a tiny amount of
+ memory space.
+
+21.2 Color models
+=================
+
+A "color model" is a way of representing colors. LaTeX's capabilities
+depend on the printer driver. However, the 'pdftex', 'xetex', and
+'luatex' printer drivers are today by far the most commonly used. The
+models below work for those drivers. All but one of these is also
+supported by essentially all other printer drivers used today.
+
+ Note that color combination can be additive or subtractive. Additive
+mixes colors of light, so that for instance combining full intensities
+of red, green, and blue produces white. Subtractive mixes pigments,
+such as with inks, so that combining full intensity of cyan, magenta,
+and yellow makes black.
+
+'cmyk'
+ A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1,
+ inclusive. The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second
+ is magenta, and the others are yellow and black. A number value of
+ 0 means minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity. This
+ model is often used in color printing. It is a subtractive model.
+
+'gray'
+ A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive. The colors are
+ shades of grey. The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white.
+
+'rgb'
+ A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1,
+ inclusive. The first number is the intensity of the red component,
+ the second is green, and the third the blue. A number value of 0
+ means that none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full
+ intensity. This is an additive model.
+
+'RGB'
+ ('pdftex', 'xetex', 'luatex' drivers) A comma-separated list with
+ three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive. This model is a
+ convenience for using 'rgb' since outside of LaTeX colors are often
+ described in a red-green-blue model using numbers in this range.
+ The values entered here are converted to the 'rgb' model by
+ dividing by 255.
+
+'named'
+ Colors are accessed by name, such as 'PrussianBlue'. The list of
+ names depends on the driver, but all support the names 'black',
+ 'blue', 'cyan', 'green', 'magenta', 'red', 'white', and 'yellow'
+ (See the 'dvipsnames' option in *note Color package options::).
+
+21.3 Commands for color
+=======================
+
+These are the commands available with the 'color' package.
+
+21.3.1 Define colors
+--------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \definecolor{NAME}{MODEL}{SPECIFICATION}
+
+ Give the name NAME to the color. For example, after this
+
+ \definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}
+
+you can use that color name with 'Hi ho, \textcolor{silver}{Silver}!'.
+
+ This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change
+and not be misleading.
+
+ \definecolor{logocolor}{RGB}{145,92,131} % RGB needs pdflatex
+ \newcommand{\logo}{\textcolor{logocolor}{Bob's Big Bagels}}
+
+ Often a document's colors are defined in the preamble, or in the
+class or style, rather than in the document body.
+
+21.3.2 Colored text
+-------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \textcolor{NAME}{...}
+ \textcolor[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}{...}
+
+or
+
+ \color{NAME}
+ \color[COLOR MODEL]{SPECIFICATION}
+
+ The affected text gets the color. This line
+
+ \textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:}
+ Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
+
+causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black. You
+can use a color declared with '\definecolor' in exactly the same way
+that we just used the builtin color 'magenta'.
+
+ \definecolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{rgb}{1.0,0.11,0.0}
+ I'm thinking about getting a \textcolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{sports car}.
+
+ The two '\textcolor' and '\color' differ in that the first is a
+command form, enclosing the text to be colored as an argument. Often
+this form is more convenient, or at least more explicit. The second
+form is a declaration, as in 'The moon is made of {\color{green} green}
+cheese', so it is in effect until the end of the current group or
+environment. This is sometimes useful when writing macros or as below
+where it colors everything inside the 'center' environment, including
+the vertical and horizontal lines.
+
+ \begin{center} \color{blue}
+ \begin{tabular}{l|r}
+ UL &UR \\ \hline
+ LL &LR
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+ You can use color in equations. A document might have this
+definition in the preamble
+
+ \definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0}
+
+and then contain this equation.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \int_a^b \textcolor{highlightcolor}{f'(x)}\,dx=f(b)-f(a)
+ \end{equation}
+
+ Typically the colors used in a document are declared in a class or
+style but sometimes you want a one-off. Those are the second forms in
+the synopses.
+
+ Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and
+ {\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team.
+
+ The format of COLOR SPECIFICATION depends on the color model (*note
+Color models::). For instance, while 'rgb' takes three numbers, 'gray'
+takes only one.
+
+ The selection was \textcolor[gray]{0.5}{grayed out}.
+
+ Colors inside colors do not combine. Thus
+
+ \textcolor{green}{kind of \textcolor{blue}{blue}}
+
+has a final word that is blue, not a combination of blue and green.
+
+21.3.3 Colored boxes
+--------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \colorbox{NAME}{...}
+ \colorbox[MODEL NAME]{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
+
+or
+
+ \fcolorbox{FRAME COLOR}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
+ \fcolorbox[MODEL NAME]{FRAME COLOR}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
+
+ Make a box with the stated background color. The '\fcolorbox'
+command puts a frame around the box. For instance this
+
+ Name:~\colorbox{cyan}{\makebox[5cm][l]{\strut}}
+
+makes a cyan-colored box that is five centimeters long and gets its
+depth and height from the '\strut' (so the depth is '-.3\baselineskip'
+and the height is '\baselineskip'). This puts white text on a blue
+background.
+
+ \colorbox{blue}{\textcolor{white}{Welcome to the machine.}}
+
+ The '\fcolorbox' commands use the same parameters as '\fbox' (*note
+\fbox & \framebox::), '\fboxrule' and '\fboxsep', to set the thickness
+of the rule and the boundary between the box interior and the
+surrounding rule. LaTeX's defaults are '0.4pt' and '3pt', respectively.
+
+ This example changes the thickness of the border to 0.8 points. Note
+that it is surrounded by curly braces so that the change ends at the end
+of the second line.
+
+ {\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}
+ \fcolorbox{black}{red}{Under no circumstances turn this knob.}}
+
+21.3.4 Colored pages
+--------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \pagecolor{NAME}
+ \pagecolor[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}
+ \nopagecolor
+
+ The first two set the background of the page, and all subsequent
+pages, to the color. For an explanation of the specification in the
+second form *note Colored text::. The third returns the background to
+normal, which is a transparent background. (If that is not supported
+use '\pagecolor{white}', although that will make a white background
+rather than the default transparent background.)
+
+ ...
+ \pagecolor{cyan}
+ ...
+ \nopagecolor
+
+22 Graphics
+***********
+
+You can use graphics such as PNG or PDF files in your LaTeX document.
+You need an additional package, which comes standard with LaTeX. This
+example is the short how-to.
+
+ \include{graphicx} % goes in the preamble
+ ...
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\linewidth]{plot.pdf}
+
+ To use the commands described here your document preamble must
+contain either '\usepackage{graphicx}' or '\usepackage{graphics}'. Most
+of the time, 'graphicx' is the better choice.
+
+ Graphics come in two main types, raster and vector. LaTeX can use
+both. In raster graphics the file contains an entry for each location
+in an array, describing what color it is. An example is a photograph,
+in JPG format. In vector graphics, the file contains a list of
+instructions such as 'draw a circle with this radius and that center'.
+An example is a line drawing produced by the Asymptote program, in PDF
+format. Generally vector graphics are more useful because you can
+rescale their size without pixelation or other problems, and because
+they often have a smaller size.
+
+ There are systems particularly well-suited to make graphics for a
+LaTeX document. For example, these allow you to use the same fonts as
+in your document. LaTeX comes with a 'picture' environment (*note
+picture::) that has simple capabilities. Besides that, there are other
+ways to include the graphic-making commands in the document. Two such
+systems are the PSTricks and TikZ packages. There are also systems
+external to LaTeX, that generate a graphic that you include using the
+commands of this chapter. Two that use a programming language are
+Asymptote and MetaPost. One that uses a graphical interface is Xfig.
+Full description of these systems is outside the scope of this document;
+see their documentation on CTAN.
+
+22.1 'graphics' package options
+===============================
+
+Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
+
+ \usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{graphics}
+
+or
+
+ \usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{graphicx}
+
+ The 'graphicx' package has a format for optional arguments to the
+'\includegraphics' command that is convenient (it is the key-value
+format), so it is the better choice for new documents. When you load
+the 'graphics' or 'graphicx' package with '\usepackage' there are two
+kinds of available options.
+
+ The first is that LaTeX does not contain information about different
+output systems but instead depends on information stored in a "printer
+driver" file. Normally you should not specify the driver option in the
+document, and instead rely on your system's default. One advantage of
+this is that it makes the document portable across systems.
+
+ For completeness here is a list of the drivers. The currently
+relevant ones are: 'dvipdfmx', 'dvips', 'dvisvgm', 'luatex', 'pdftex',
+'xetex'. The two 'xdvi' and 'oztex' are essentially aliases for 'dvips'
+(and 'xdvi' is monochrome). Ones that should not be used for new
+systems are: 'dvipdf', 'dvipdfm', 'dviwin', 'dvipsone', 'emtex',
+'pctexps', 'pctexwin', 'pctexhp', 'pctex32', 'truetex', 'tcidvi', 'vtex'
+(and 'dviwindo' is an alias for 'dvipsone'). These are stored in files
+with a '.def' extension, such as 'pdftex.def'.
+
+ The second kind of options are below.
+
+'demo'
+ Instead of an image file, LaTeX puts in a 150 pt by 100 pt
+ rectangle (unless another size is specified in the
+ '\includegraphics' command).
+
+'draft'
+ For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead the file name is
+ printed in a box of the correct size. In order to determine the
+ size, the file must be present.
+
+'final'
+ (Default) Override any previous 'draft' option, so that the
+ document shows the contents of the graphic files.
+
+'hiderotate'
+ Do not show rotated text. (This allows for the possibility that a
+ previewer does not have the capability to rotate text.)
+
+'hidescale'
+ Do not show scaled text. (This allows for the possibility that a
+ previewer does not have the capability to scale.)
+
+'hiresbb'
+ In a PS or EPS file the graphic size may be specified in two ways.
+ The '%%BoundingBox' lines describe the graphic size using integer
+ multiples of a PostScript point, that is, integer multiples of 1/72
+ inch. A later addition to the PostScript language allows decimal
+ multiples, such as 1.23, in '%%HiResBoundingBox' lines. This
+ option has LaTeX to read the size from the latter.
+
+22.2 'graphics' package configuration
+=====================================
+
+These commands configure the way LaTeX searches the file system for the
+graphic.
+
+ The behavior of file system search code is necessarily platform
+dependent. In this document we cover GNU/Linux, Macintosh, and Windows,
+as those systems are typically configured. For other situations consult
+the documentation in 'grfguide.pdf', or the LaTeX source, or your TeX
+distribution's documentation.
+
+22.2.1 '\graphicspath'
+----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \graphicspath{LIST OF DIR NAMES INSIDE CURLY BRACKETS}
+
+ Declare a list of directories to search for graphics files. This
+allows you to later say something like '\includegraphics{lion.png}'
+instead of having to give its path.
+
+ LaTeX always looks for graphic files first in the current directory.
+The declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory
+'pix', and then '../pix'.
+
+ \usepackage{graphicx} % or graphics; put in preamble
+ ...
+ \graphicspath{ {pix/} {../pix/} }
+
+ The '\graphicspath' declaration is optional. If you don't include it
+then LaTeX's default is to search all of the places that it usually
+looks for a file (it uses LaTeX's '\input@path'). In particular, in
+this case one of the places it looks is the current directory.
+
+ Enclose each directory name in curly braces; for example, above it
+says ''{pix}''. Do this even if there is only one directory. Each
+directory name must end in a forward slash, '/'. This is true even on
+Windows, where good practice is to use forward slashes for all the
+directory separators since it makes the document portable to other
+platforms. If you have spaces in your directory name then use double
+quotes, as with '{"my docs/"}'. Getting one of these rules wrong will
+cause LaTeX to report 'Error: File `FILENAME' not found'.
+
+ Basically, the algorithm is that with this example, after looking in
+the current directory,
+
+ \graphicspath{ {pix/} {../pix/} }
+ ...
+ \usepackage{lion.png}
+
+for each of the listed directories, LaTeX concatenates it with the file
+name and searches for the result, checking for 'pix/lion.png' and then
+'../pix/lion.png'. This algorithm means that the '\graphicspath'
+command does not recursively search subdirectories: if you issue
+'\graphicspath{{a/}}' and the graphic is in 'a/b/lion.png' then LaTeX
+will not find it. It also means that you can use absolute paths such as
+'\graphicspath{{/home/jim/logos/}}' or
+'\graphicspath{{C:/Users/Albert/Pictures/}}'. However, using these
+means that the document is not portable. (You could preserve
+portability by adjusting your TeX system settings configuration file
+parameter 'TEXINPUTS'; see the documentation of your system.)
+
+ You can use '\graphicspath' anywhere in the document. You can use it
+more than once. Show its value with
+'\makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput@path}\makeatother'.
+
+ The directories are taken with respect to the base file. That is,
+suppose that you are working on a document based on 'book/book.tex' and
+it contains '\include{chapters/chap1}'. If in 'chap1.tex' you put
+'\graphicspath{{plots/}}' then LaTeX will not search for graphics in
+'book/chapters/plots', but instead in 'book/plots'.
+
+22.2.2 '\DeclareGraphicsExtensions'
+-----------------------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{COMMA-SEPARATED LIST OF FILE EXTENSIONS}
+
+ Declare the filename extensions to try. This allows you to specify
+the order in which to choose graphic formats when you include graphic
+files by giving the filename without the extension, as in
+'\includegraphics{functionplot}'.
+
+ In this example, LaTeX will find files in the PNG format before PDF
+files.
+
+ \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.png,PNG,.pdf,.PDF}
+ ...
+ \includegraphics{lion} % will find lion.png before lion.pdf
+
+Because the file name 'lion' does not have a period, LaTeX uses the
+extension list. For each directory in the graphics path (*note
+\graphicspath::), LaTeX will try the extensions in the order given. If
+it does not find such a file after trying all the directories and
+extensions then it reports '! LaTeX Error: File `'lion'' not found'.
+Note that you must include the periods at the start of the extensions.
+
+ Because GNU/Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the
+list of file extensions is case sensitive on those platforms. The
+Windows platform is not case sensitive.
+
+ You are not required to include '\DeclareGraphicsExtensions' in your
+document; the printer driver has a sensible default. For example, the
+most recent 'pdftex.def' has this extension list.
+
+ .png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
+
+ You can use this command anywhere in the document. You can use it
+more than once. Show its value with
+'\makeatletter\typeout{\Gin@extensions}\makeatother'.
+
+22.2.3 '\DeclareGraphicsRule'
+-----------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \DeclareGraphicsRule{EXTENSION}{TYPE}{SIZE-FILE EXTENSION}{COMMAND}
+
+ Declare how to handle graphic files whose names end in EXTENSION.
+
+ This example declares that all files with names have the form
+'filename-without-dot.mps' will be treated as output from MetaPost,
+meaning that the printer driver will use its MetaPost-handling code to
+input the file.
+
+ \DeclareGraphicsRule{.mps}{mps}{.mps}{}
+
+ This
+
+ \DeclareGraphicsRule{*}{mps}{*}{}
+
+tells LaTeX that it should handle as MetaPost output any file with an
+extension not covered by another rule, so it covers 'filename.1',
+'filename.2', etc.
+
+ This describes the four arguments.
+
+EXTENSION
+ The file extension to which this rule applies. The extension is
+ anything after and including the first dot in the filename. Use
+ the Kleene star, '*', to denote the default behaviour for all
+ undeclared extensions.
+
+TYPE
+ The type of file involved. This type is a string that must be
+ defined in the printer driver. For instance, files with extensions
+ '.ps', '.eps', or '.ps.gz' may all be classed as type 'eps'. All
+ files of the same type will be input with the same internal command
+ by the printer driver. For example, the file types that 'pdftex'
+ recognizes are: 'jpg', 'jbig2', 'mps', 'pdf', 'png', 'tif'.
+
+SIZE-FILE EXTENSION
+ The extension of the file to be read to determine the size of the
+ graphic, if there is such a file. It may be the same as EXTENSION
+ but it may be different.
+
+ As an example, consider a PostScript graphic. To make it smaller,
+ it might be compressed into a '.ps.gz' file. Compressed files are
+ not easily read by LaTeX so you can put the bounding box
+ information in a separate file. If SIZE-FILE EXTENSION is empty
+ then you must specify size information in the arguments of
+ '\includegraphics'.
+
+ If the driver file has a procedure for reading size files for
+ 'type' then that will be used, otherwise it will use the procedure
+ for reading '.eps' files. (Thus you may specify the size of bitmap
+ files in a file with a PostScript style '%%BoundingBox' line if no
+ other format is available.)
+
+COMMAND
+ A command that will be applied to the file. This is very often
+ left blank. This command must start with a single backward quote.
+ Thus, '\DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{`gunzip -c #1}'
+ specifies that any file with the extension '.eps.gz' should be
+ treated as an 'eps' file, with the BoundingBox information stored
+ in the file with extension '.eps.bb', and that the command 'gunzip
+ -c' will run on your platform to decompresses the file.
+
+ Such a command is specific to your platform. In addition, your TeX
+ system must allow you to run external commands; as a security
+ measure modern systems restrict running commands unless you
+ explicitly allow it. See the documentation for your TeX
+ distribution.
+
+22.3 Commands for graphics
+==========================
+
+These are the commands available with the 'graphics' and 'graphicx'
+packages.
+
+22.3.1 '\includegraphics'
+-------------------------
+
+Synopses for 'graphics' package:
+
+ \includegraphics{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics[URX,URY]{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics[LLX,LLY][URX,URY]{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics*{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics*[URX,URY]{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics*[LLX,LLY][URX,URY]{FILENAME}
+
+ Synopses for 'graphicx' package:
+
+ \includegraphics{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics[KEY-VALUE LIST]{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics*{FILENAME}
+ \includegraphics*[KEY-VALUE LIST]{FILENAME}
+
+ Include a graphics file. The starred form '\includegraphics*' will
+clip the graphic to the size specified, while for the unstarred form any
+part of the graphic that is outside the box of the specified size will
+over-print the surrounding area.
+
+ This
+
+ \usepackage{graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{plot.pdf}
+ \end{center}
+
+will incorporate into the document the graphic in 'plot.pdf', centered
+and at its nominal size. You can also give a path to the file, as with
+'\includegraphics{graphics/plot.pdf}'. To specify a list of locations
+to search for the file, *note \graphicspath::.
+
+ If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes. An
+example is '\includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}'.
+
+ The '\includegraphics{FILENAME}' command decides on the type of
+graphic by splitting FILENAME on the first dot. You can use FILENAME
+with no dot, as in '\includegraphics{turing}' and then LaTeX tries a
+sequence of extensions such as '.png' and '.pdf' until it finds a file
+with that extension (*note \DeclareGraphicsExtensions::).
+
+ If your file name contains dots before the extension then you can
+hide them with curly braces, as in
+'\includegraphics{{plot.2018.03.12.a}.pdf}'. Or, if you use the
+'graphicx' package then you can use the options 'type' and 'ext'; see
+below. This and other filename issues are also handled with the package
+'grffile'.
+
+ This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so LaTeX can move
+it to the next page if fitting it on the current page is awkward (*note
+figure::).
+
+ \begin{figure}
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=3cm]{lungxray.jpg}
+ \caption{The evidence is overwhelming: don't smoke.} \label{fig:xray}
+ \end{figure}
+
+ This places a graphic that will not float, so it is sure to appear at
+this point in the document even if makes LaTeX stretch the text or
+resort to blank areas on the page. It will be centered and will have a
+caption.
+
+ \usepackage{caption} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{center}
+ \includegraphics{pix/nix.png}
+ \captionof{figure}{The spirit of the night} \label{pix:nix} % optional
+ \end{center}
+
+ This example puts a box with a graphic side by side with one having
+text, with the two vertically centered.
+
+ \newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
+ ...
+ \begin{center}
+ \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.4\textwidth]{plot}}
+ \hspace{1em}
+ \vcenteredhbox{\begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ f(x)=x\cdot \sin (1/x)
+ \end{displaymath}
+ \end{minipage}}
+ \end{center}
+
+ If you use the 'graphics' package then the only options involve the
+size of the graphic (but see *note \rotatebox:: and *note \scalebox::).
+When one optional argument is present then it is '[URX,URY]' and it
+gives the coordinates of the top right corner of the image, as a pair of
+TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::). If the units are omitted they
+default to 'bp'. In this case, the lower left corner of the image is
+assumed to be at (0,0). If two optional arguments are present then the
+leading one is '[LLX,LLY]', specifying the coordinates of the image's
+lower left. Thus, '\includegraphics[1in,0.618in]{...}' calls for the
+graphic to be placed so it is 1 inch wide and 0.618 inches tall and so
+its origin is at (0,0).
+
+ The 'graphicx' package gives you many more options. Specify them in
+a key-value form, as here.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \includegraphics[width=1in,angle=90]{lion}
+ \hspace{2em}
+ \includegraphics[angle=90,width=1in]{lion}
+ \end{center}
+
+The options are read left-to-right. So the first graphic above is made
+one inch wide and then rotated, while the second is rotated and then
+made one inch wide. Thus, unless the graphic is perfectly square, the
+two will end with different widths and heights.
+
+ There are many options. The primary ones are listed first.
+
+ Note that a graphic is placed by LaTeX into a box, which is
+traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the
+PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic's printed area may
+go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when LaTeX makes up a
+page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the
+graphic.
+
+'width'
+ The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this width. An
+ example is '\includegraphics[width=1in]{plot}'. You can use the
+ standard TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::) and also
+ convenient is '\linewidth', or in a two-column document,
+ '\columnwidth' (*note Page layout parameters::). An example is
+ that by using the 'calc' package you can make the graphic be 1 cm
+ narrow than the width of the text with
+ '\includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}'.
+
+'height'
+ The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height. You
+ can use the standard TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::), and
+ also convenient are '\pageheight' and '\textheight' (*note Page
+ layout parameters::). For instance, the command
+ '\includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]{godel}' will make the
+ graphic a quarter of the height of the text area.
+
+'totalheight'
+ The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus
+ depth. This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated.
+ For instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero
+ height but a large depth.
+
+'keepaspectratio'
+ If set to 'true', or just specified as here
+
+ \includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...}
+
+ and you give as options both 'width' and 'height' (or
+ 'totalheight'), then LaTeX will make the graphic is as large as
+ possible without distortion. That is, LaTeX will ensure that
+ neither is the graphic wider than 'width' nor taller than 'height'
+ (or 'totalheight').
+
+'scale'
+ Factor by which to scale the graphic. To make a graphic twice its
+ nominal size, enter '\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}'. This
+ number may be any value; a number between 1 and 0 will shrink the
+ graphic and a negative number will reflect it.
+
+'angle'
+ Rotate the graphic. The angle is taken in degrees and
+ counterclockwise. The graphic is rotated about its 'origin'; see
+ that option. For a complete description of how rotated material is
+ typeset, *note \rotatebox::.
+
+'origin'
+ The point of the graphic about which the rotation happens.
+ Possible values are any string containing one or two of: 'l' for
+ left, 'r' for right, 'b' for bottom, 'c' for center, 't' for top,
+ and 'B' for baseline. Thus, entering the command
+ '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}' will turn the picture
+ upside down about that picture's center, while the command
+ '\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}' will turn its
+ picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character 'c'
+ gives the horizontal center in 'bc' or 'tc', but gives the vertical
+ center in 'lc' or 'rc'.) The default is 'lB'.
+
+ To rotate about an arbitrary point, *note \rotatebox::.
+
+ These are lesser-used options.
+
+'viewport'
+ Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show. Takes four arguments,
+ separated by spaces and given in TeX dimensions, as with
+ '\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}'. The
+ dimensions default to big points, 'bp'. They are taken relative to
+ the origin specified by the bounding box. See also the 'trim'
+ option.
+
+'trim'
+ Gives parts of the graphic to not show. Takes four arguments,
+ separated by spaces, that are given in TeX dimensions, as with
+ '\includegraphics[.., trim= 0in 0.1in 0.2in 0.3in, ...]{...}'.
+ These give the amounts of the graphic not to show, that is, LaTeX
+ will crop the picture by 0 inches on the left, 0.1 inches on the
+ bottom, 0.2 inches on the right, and 0.3 inches on the top. See
+ also the 'viewport' option.
+
+'clip'
+ If set to 'true', or just specified as here
+
+ \includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...}
+
+ then the graphic is cropped to the bounding box. This is the same
+ as using the starred form of the command,
+ '\includegraphics*[...]{...}'.
+
+'page'
+ Give the page number of a multi-page PDF file. The default is
+ 'page=1'.
+
+'pagebox'
+ Specifies which bounding box to use for PDF files from among
+ 'mediabox', 'cropbox', 'bleedbox', 'trimbox', or 'artbox'. PDF
+ files do not have the BoundingBox that PostScript files have, but
+ may specify up to four predefined rectangles. The MediaBox gives
+ the boundaries of the physical medium. The CropBox is the region
+ to which the contents of the page are to be clipped when displayed.
+ The BleedBox is the region to which the contents of the page should
+ be clipped in production. The TrimBox is the intended dimensions
+ of the finished page. The ArtBox is the extent of the page's
+ meaningful content. The driver will set the image size based on
+ CropBox if present, otherwise it will not use one of the others,
+ with a driver-defined order of preference. MediaBox is always
+ present.
+
+'interpolate'
+ Enable or disable interpolation of raster images by the viewer.
+ Can be set with 'interpolate=true' or just specified as here.
+
+ \includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}
+
+'quiet'
+ Do not write information to the log. You can set it with
+ 'quiet=true' or just specified it with
+ '\includegraphics[...,quite,...]{...}',
+
+'draft'
+ If you set it with 'draft=true' or just specify it with
+
+ \includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...}
+
+ then the graphic will not appear in the document, possibly saving
+ color printer ink. Instead, LaTeX will put an empty box of the
+ correct size with the filename printed in it.
+
+ These options address the bounding box for Encapsulated PostScript
+graphic files, which have a size specified with a line '%%BoundingBox'
+that appears in the file. It has four values, giving the lower x
+coordinate, lower y coordinate, upper x coordinate, and upper y
+coordinate. The units are PostScript points, equivalent to TeX's big
+points, 1/72 inch. For example, if an '.eps' file has the line
+'%%BoundingBox 10 20 40 80' then its natural size is 30/72 inch wide by
+60/72 inch tall.
+
+'bb'
+ Specify the bounding box of the displayed region. The argument is
+ four dimensions separated by spaces, as with '\includegraphics[..,
+ bb= 0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}'. Usually '\includegraphics' reads
+ the BoundingBox numbers from the EPS file automatically, so this
+ option is only useful if the bounding box is missing from that file
+ or if you want to change it.
+
+'bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury'
+ Set the bounding box. These four are obsolete, but are retained
+ for compatibility with old packages.
+
+'natwidth, natheight'
+ An alternative for 'bb'. Setting
+
+ \includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...}
+
+ is the same as setting 'bb=0 0 1in 0.618in'.
+
+'hiresbb'
+ If set to 'true', or just specified as with
+
+ \includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...}
+
+ then LaTeX will look for '%%HiResBoundingBox' lines instead of
+ '%%BoundingBox' lines. (The 'BoundingBox' lines use only natural
+ numbers while the 'HiResBoundingBox' lines use decimals; both use
+ units equivalent to TeX's big points, 1/72 inch.) To override a
+ prior setting of 'true', you can set it to 'false'.
+
+ These following options allow a user to override LaTeX's method of
+choosing the graphic type based on the filename extension. An example
+is that '\includegraphics[type=png,ext=.xxx,read=.xxx]{lion}' will read
+the file 'lion.xxx' as though it were 'lion.png'. For more on these,
+*note \DeclareGraphicsRule::.
+
+'type'
+ Specify the graphics type.
+
+'ext'
+ Specify the graphics extension. Only use this in conjunction with
+ the option 'type'.
+
+'read'
+ Specify the file extension of the read file. Only use this in
+ conjunction with the option 'type'.
+
+'command'
+ Specify a command to be applied to this file. Only use this in
+ conjunction with the option 'type'. *Note Command line options::
+ for a discussion of enabling the '\write18' functionality to run
+ external commands.
+
+22.3.2 '\rotatebox'
+-------------------
+
+Synopsis if you use the 'graphics' package:
+
+ \rotatebox{ANGLE}{MATERIAL}
+
+ Synopses if you use the 'graphicx' package:
+
+ \rotatebox{ANGLE}{MATERIAL}
+ \rotatebox[KEY-VALUE LIST]{ANGLE}{MATERIAL}
+
+ Put MATERIAL in a box and rotate it ANGLE degrees counterclockwise.
+
+ This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \rotatebox{45}{Character} &\rotatebox{45}{NATO phonetic} \\
+ A &AL-FAH \\
+ B &BRAH-VOH
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ The MATERIAL can be anything that goes in a box, including a graphic.
+
+ \rotatebox[origin=c]{45}{\includegraphics[width=1in]{lion}}
+
+ To place the rotated material, the first step is that LaTeX sets
+MATERIAL in a box, with a reference point on the left baseline. The
+second step is the rotation, by default about the reference point. The
+third step is that LaTeX computes a box to bound the rotated material.
+Fourth, LaTeX moves this box horizontally so that the left edge of this
+new bounding box coincides with the left edge of the box from the first
+step (they need not coincide vertically). This new bounding box, in its
+new position, is what LaTeX uses as the box when typesetting this
+material.
+
+ If you use the 'graphics' package then the rotation is about the
+reference point of the box. If you use the 'graphicx' package then
+these are the options that can go in the KEY-VALUE LIST, but note that
+you can get the same effect without needing this package, except for the
+'x' and 'y' options (*note \includegraphics::).
+
+'origin'
+ The point of the MATERIAL's box about which the rotation happens.
+ Possible value is any string containing one or two of: 'l' for
+ left, 'r' for right, 'b' for bottom, 'c' for center, 't' for top,
+ and 'B' for baseline. Thus, the first line here
+
+ \rotatebox[origin=c]{180}{moon}
+ \rotatebox[origin=lB]{180}{LeBateau}
+
+ will turn the picture upside down from the center while the second
+ will turn its picture upside down about its left baseline. (The
+ character 'c' gives the horizontal center in 'bc' or 'tc' but gives
+ the vertical center in 'lc' or 'rc', and gives both in 'c'.) The
+ default is 'lB'.
+
+'x, y'
+ Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with '\rotatebox[x=TeX
+ DIMENSION,y=TeX DIMENSION]{...}' (*note Units of length::). These
+ give the offset from the box's reference point.
+
+'units'
+ This key allows you to change the default of degrees
+ counterclockwise. Setting 'units=-360' changes the direction to
+ degrees clockwise and setting 'units=6.283185' changes to radians
+ counterclockwise.
+
+22.3.3 '\scalebox'
+------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \scalebox{HORIZONTAL FACTOR}{MATERIAL}
+ \scalebox{HORIZONTAL FACTOR}[VERTICAL FACTOR]{MATERIAL}
+ \reflectbox{MATERIAL}
+
+ Scale the MATERIAL.
+
+ This example halves the size, both horizontally and vertically, of
+the first text and doubles the size of the second.
+
+ \scalebox{0.5}{DRINK ME} and \scalebox{2.0}{Eat Me}
+
+ If you do not specify the optional VERTICAL FACTOR then it defaults
+to the same value as the HORIZONTAL FACTOR.
+
+ You can use this command to resize a graphic, as here.
+
+ \scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}
+
+If you use the 'graphicx' package then you can accomplish the same thing
+with optional arguments to '\includegraphics' (*note
+\includegraphics::).
+
+ The '\reflectbox' command abbreviates '\scalebox{-1}[1]{MATERIAL}'.
+Thus, 'Able was I\reflectbox{Able was I}' will show the phrase 'Able was
+I' immediately followed by its mirror reflection.
+
+22.3.4 '\resizebox'
+-------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \resizebox{HORIZONTAL LENGTH}{VERTICAL LENGTH}{MATERIAL}
+ \resizebox*{HORIZONTAL LENGTH}{VERTICAL LENGTH}{MATERIAL}
+
+ Given a size, such as '3cm', transform MATERIAL to make it that size.
+If either HORIZONTAL LENGTH or VERTICAL LENGTH is an exclamation
+point '!' then the other argument is used to determine a scale factor
+for both directions.
+
+ This example makes the graphic be a half inch wide and scales it
+vertically by the same factor to keep it from being distorted.
+
+ \resizebox{0.5in}{!}{\includegraphics{lion}}
+
+ The unstarred form '\resizebox' takes VERTICAL LENGTH to be the box's
+height while the starred form '\resizebox*' takes it to be height+depth.
+For instance, make the text have a height+depth of a quarter inch with
+'\resizebox*{!}{0.25in}{\parbox{1in}{This box has both height and
+depth.}}'.
+
+ You can use '\depth', '\height', '\totalheight', and '\width' to
+refer to the original size of the box. Thus, make the text two inches
+wide but keep the original height with '\resizebox{2in}{\height}{Two
+inches}'.
+
+23 Special insertions
+*********************
+
+LaTeX provides commands for inserting characters that have a special
+meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
+
+23.1 Reserved characters
+========================
+
+LaTeX sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For
+example, the percent sign '%' is for comments. They are called
+"reserved characters" or "special characters".
+
+ # $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \
+
+ If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
+body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
+put a backslash '\' in front of the character. Thus, typing '\$1.23'
+will produce '$1.23' in your output.
+
+ As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
+use '\~{}' (omitting the curly braces would result in the next character
+receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text body font
+circumflex use '\^{}'. To get a backslash in the font of the text body,
+enter '\textbackslash{}'.
+
+ To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use '\verb!!'
+as below (the double backslash '\\' is only there to split the lines).
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
+ \verb!# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \!
+ \end{center}
+
+23.2 Upper and lower case
+=========================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \uppercase{TEXT}
+ \lowercase{TEXT}
+ \MakeUppercase{TEXT}
+ \MakeLowercase{TEXT}
+
+ Change the case of characters. The TeX primitives commands
+'\uppercase' and '\lowercase' only work for American characters. The
+LaTeX commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowercase' commands also
+change characters accessed by commands such as '\ae' or '\aa'. The
+commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowercase' are robust but they have
+moving arguments (*note \protect::).
+
+ These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of
+a command within TEXT. But they do change the case of every other Latin
+letter inside the argument TEXT. Thus, '\MakeUppercase{Let $y=f(x)$'}
+produces 'LET Y=F(X)'. Another example is that the name of an
+environment will be changed, so that '\MakeUppercase{\begin{tabular} ...
+\end{tabular}}' will produce an error because the first half is changed
+to '\begin{TABULAR}'.
+
+ LaTeX uses the same fixed table for changing case throughout a
+document, The table used is designed for the font encoding T1; this
+works well with the standard TeX fonts for all Latin alphabets but will
+cause problems when using other alphabets.
+
+ To change the case of text that results from a macro inside TEXT you
+need to do expansion. Here the '\Schoolname' produces 'COLLEGE OF
+MATHEMATICS'.
+
+ \newcommand{\schoolname}{College of Mathematics}
+ \newcommand{\Schoolname}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase
+ \expandafter{\schoolname}}
+
+ The 'textcase' package brings some of the missing feature of the
+standard LaTeX commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowerCase'.
+
+ To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package
+'mfirstuc'.
+
+23.3 Symbols by font position
+=============================
+
+You can access any character of the current font using its number with
+the '\symbol' command. For example, the visible space character used in
+the '\verb*' command has the code decimal 32, so it can be typed as
+'\symbol{32}'.
+
+ You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a ''' prefix,
+or hexadecimal (base 16) with a '"' prefix, so the previous example
+could also be written as '\symbol{'40}' or '\symbol{"20}'.
+
+23.4 Text symbols
+=================
+
+LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
+running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not
+available in OT1. Unless you are using XeLaTeX or LuaLaTeX then you may
+need to load the 'textcomp' package.
+
+'\copyright'
+'\textcopyright'
+ (C) The copyright symbol.
+
+'\dag'
+ U+2020 The dagger symbol (in text).
+
+'\ddag'
+ U+2021 The double dagger symbol (in text).
+
+'\LaTeX'
+ The LaTeX logo.
+
+'\LaTeXe'
+ The LaTeX2e logo.
+
+'\guillemotleft (<<)'
+'\guillemotright (>>)'
+'\guilsinglleft (<)'
+'\guilsinglright (>)'
+ <<, >>, <, > Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used
+ in French.
+
+'\ldots'
+'\dots'
+'\textellipsis'
+ ... An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): '\ldots' and '\dots'
+ also work in math mode.
+
+'\lq'
+ ' Left (opening) quote.
+
+'\P'
+'\textparagraph'
+ U+00B6 Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
+
+'\pounds'
+'\textsterling'
+ # English pounds sterling.
+
+'\quotedblbase (,,)'
+'\quotesinglbase (,)'
+ ,, and , Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.
+
+'\rq'
+ ' Right (closing) quote.
+
+'\S'
+'\textsection'
+ U+00A7 Section sign.
+
+'\TeX'
+ The TeX logo.
+
+'\textasciicircum'
+ ^ ASCII circumflex.
+
+'\textasciitilde'
+ ~ ASCII tilde.
+
+'\textasteriskcentered'
+ * Centered asterisk.
+
+'\textbackslash'
+ \ Backslash.
+
+'\textbar'
+ | Vertical bar.
+
+'\textbardbl'
+ U+23F8 Double vertical bar.
+
+'\textbigcircle'
+ U+25EF Big circle symbol.
+
+'\textbraceleft'
+ { Left brace.
+
+'\textbraceright'
+ } Right brace.
+
+'\textbullet'
+ * Bullet.
+
+'\textcircled{LETTER}'
+ U+24B6 Circle around LETTER.
+
+'\textcompwordmark'
+'\textcapitalcompwordmark'
+'\textascendercompwordmark'
+ Used to separate letters that would normally ligature. For
+ example, 'f\textcompwordmark i' produces 'fi' without a ligature.
+ This is most useful in non-English languages. The
+ '\textcapitalcompwordmark' form has the cap height of the font
+ while the '\textascendercompwordmark' form has the ascender height.
+
+'\textdagger'
+ U+2020 Dagger.
+
+'\textdaggerdbl'
+ U+2021 Double dagger.
+
+'\textdollar (or '\$')'
+ $ Dollar sign.
+
+'\textemdash (or '---')'
+ -- Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in 'The playoffs --- if you
+ are fortunate enough to make the playoffs --- is more like a
+ sprint.').
+
+'\textendash (or '--')'
+ - En-dash (used for ranges, as in 'See pages 12--14').
+
+'\texteuro'
+
+ The Euro symbol: Euro. For an alternative glyph design, try the
+ 'eurosym' package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own
+ Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC).
+
+'\textexclamdown (or '!`')'
+ ! Upside down exclamation point.
+
+'\textgreater'
+ > Greater than symbol.
+
+'\textless'
+ < Less than symbol.
+
+'\textleftarrow'
+ U+2190 Left arrow.
+
+'\textordfeminine'
+'\textordmasculine'
+ a, o Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols.
+
+'\textperiodcentered'
+ U+00B7 Centered period.
+
+'\textquestiondown (or '?`')'
+ ? Upside down question mark.
+
+'\textquotedblleft (or '``')'
+ " Double left quote.
+
+'\textquotedblright (or '''')'
+ " Double right quote.
+
+'\textquoteleft (or '`')'
+ ' Single left quote.
+
+'\textquoteright (or ''')'
+ ' Single right quote.
+
+'\textquotesingle'
+ U+0027 Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)
+
+'\textquotestraightbase'
+'\textquotestraightdblbase'
+ Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
+
+'\textregistered'
+ (R) Registered symbol.
+
+'\textrightarrow'
+ U+2192 Right arrow.
+
+'\textthreequartersemdash'
+ U+FE58 "Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+
+'\texttrademark'
+ U+2122 Trademark symbol.
+
+'\texttwelveudash'
+ U+FE58 "Two-thirds" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+
+'\textunderscore'
+ _ Underscore.
+
+'\textvisiblespace'
+ U+2423 Visible space symbol.
+
+23.5 Accents
+============
+
+LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages,
+through the 'babel' package and related support if you are using
+pdfLaTeX, or 'polyglossia' if you are using XeLaTeX or LuaLaTeX. This
+section does not cover that support. It only lists the core LaTeX
+commands for creating accented characters. The '\capital...' commands
+shown here produce alternative forms for use with capital letters.
+These are not available with OT1.
+
+ Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated
+with lowercase 'o'.
+
+ Note that '\i' produces a dotless i, and '\j' produces a dotless j.
+These are often used in place of their dotted counterparts when they are
+accented.
+
+'\"'
+'\capitaldieresis'
+ o" Umlaut (dieresis).
+
+'\''
+'\capitalacute'
+ o' Acute accent.
+
+'\.'
+ o. Dot accent.
+
+'\='
+'\capitalmacron'
+ o= Macron (overbar) accent.
+
+'\^'
+'\capitalcircumflex'
+ o^ Circumflex (hat) accent.
+
+'\`'
+'\capitalgrave'
+ o` Grave accent.
+
+'\~'
+'\capitaltilde'
+ n~ Tilde accent.
+
+'\b'
+ o_ Bar accent underneath.
+
+ Related to this, '\underbar{TEXT}' produces a bar under TEXT. The
+ argument is always processed in LR mode (*note Modes::). The bar
+ is always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing
+ through descenders. See also '\underline' in *note Math
+ miscellany::.
+
+'\c'
+'\capitalcedilla'
+ c, Cedilla accent underneath.
+
+'\d'
+'\capitaldotaccent'
+ .o Dot accent underneath.
+
+'\H'
+'\capitalhungarumlaut'
+ o'' Long Hungarian umlaut accent.
+
+'\k'
+'\capitalogonek'
+ o; Ogonek. Not available in the OT1 encoding.
+
+'\r'
+'\capitalring'
+ o* Ring accent.
+
+'\t'
+'\capitaltie'
+'\newtie'
+'\capitalnewtie'
+ oo[ Tie-after accent. The '\newtie' form is centered in its box.
+
+'\u'
+'\capitalbreve'
+ o( Breve accent.
+
+'\v'
+'\capitalcaron'
+ o< Ha'c<ek (check, caron) accent.
+
+23.6 Additional Latin letters
+=============================
+
+Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting letters beyond A-Z that
+extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other than
+English.
+
+'\aa'
+'\AA'
+ aa and AA.
+
+'\ae'
+'\AE'
+ ae and AE.
+
+'\dh'
+'\DH'
+ Icelandic letter eth: d and D. Not available with OT1 encoding, you
+ need the 'fontenc' package to select an alternate font encoding,
+ such as T1.
+
+'\dj'
+'\DJ'
+ Crossed d and D, a.k.a. capital and small letter d with stroke.
+ Not available with OT1 encoding, you need the 'fontenc' package to
+ select an alternate font encoding, such as T1.
+
+'\ij'
+'\IJ'
+ ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here).
+
+'\l'
+'\L'
+ /l and /L.
+
+'\ng'
+'\NG'
+ Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics.
+
+'\o'
+'\O'
+ /o and /O.
+
+'\oe'
+'\OE'
+ oe and OE.
+
+'\ss'
+'\SS'
+ ss and SS.
+
+'\th'
+'\TH'
+ Icelandic letter thorn: th and TH. Not available with OT1 encoding,
+ you need the 'fontenc' package to select an alternate font
+ encoding, such as T1.
+
+23.7 '\rule'
+============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \rule{WIDTH}{THICKNESS}
+ \rule[RAISE]{WIDTH}{THICKNESS}
+
+ Produce a "rule", a filled-in rectangle.
+
+ This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol,
+often used to mark the end of a proof.
+
+ \newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}}
+
+The 'amsthm' package includes this command, with a somewhat
+different-looking symbol.
+
+ The mandatory arguments give the horizontal WIDTH and vertical
+THICKNESS of the rectangle. They are rigid lengths (*note Lengths::).
+The optional argument RAISE is also a rigid length, and tells LaTeX how
+much to raise the rule above the baseline, or lower it if the length is
+negative.
+
+ This produces a line, a rectangle that is wide but not tall.
+
+ \noindent\rule{\textwidth}{0.4pt}
+
+The line is the width of the page and 0.4 points tall. This line
+thickness is common in LaTeX.
+
+ A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in
+the output, but can cause LaTeX to change the output around it. *Note
+\strut:: for examples.
+
+23.8 '\today'
+=============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \today
+
+ Produce today's date in the format 'MONTH DD, YYYY'. An example of a
+date in that format is 'July 4, 1976'.
+
+ Multilingual packages such as 'babel' or 'polyglossia', or classes
+such as 'lettre', will localize '\today'. For example, the following
+will output '4 juillet 1976':
+
+ \year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
+ \documentclass{minimal}
+ \usepackage[french]{babel}
+ \begin{document}
+ \today
+ \end{document}
+
+'\today' uses the counters '\day', '\month', and '\year' (*note \day &
+\month & \year::).
+
+ A number of package on CTAN work with dates. One is 'datetime'
+package which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO
+standards.
+
+ The date is not updated as the LaTeX process runs, so in principle
+the date could be incorrect by the time the program finishes.
+
+24 Splitting the input
+**********************
+
+LaTeX lets you split a large document into several smaller ones. This
+can simplify editing or allow multiple authors to work on the document.
+It can also speed processing.
+
+ Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is always one
+"root file", on which LaTeX compilation starts. This shows such a file
+with five included files.
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \includeonly{ % comment out lines below to omit compiling
+ pref,
+ chap1,
+ chap2,
+ append,
+ bib
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ \frontmatter
+ \include{pref}
+ \mainmatter
+ \include{chap1}
+ \include{chap2}
+ \appendix
+ \include{append}
+ \backmatter
+ \include{bib}
+ \end{document}
+
+This will bring in material from 'pref.tex', 'chap1.tex', 'chap2.tex',
+'append.tex', and 'bib.tex'. If you compile this file, and then comment
+out all of the lines inside '\includeonly{...}' except for 'chap1,' and
+compile again, then LaTeX will only process the material in the first
+chapter. Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to
+print. However, the advantage of the '\includeonly' command is that
+LaTeX will retain the page numbers and all of the cross reference
+information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in
+your output correctly.
+
+ *Note Larger book template:: for another example of '\includeonly'.
+
+24.1 '\endinput'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \endinput
+
+ When you '\include{filename}', inside 'filename.tex' the material
+after '\endinput' will not be included. This command is optional; if
+'filename.tex' has no '\endinput' then LaTeX will read all of the file.
+
+ For example, suppose that a document's root file has '\input{chap1}'
+and this is 'chap1.tex'.
+
+ \chapter{One}
+ This material will appear in the document.
+ \endinput
+ This will not appear.
+
+ This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end
+of a file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during
+mailing. It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize
+errors is to put '\endinput' halfway through the included file and see
+if the error disappears. Now, knowing which half contains the error,
+moving '\endinput' to halfway through that area further narrows down the
+location. This process rapidly finds the offending line.
+
+ After reading '\endinput', LaTeX continues to read to the end of the
+line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless.
+This allows you, for instance, to close an '\if...' with a '\fi'.
+
+24.2 '\include' & '\includeonly'
+================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \includeonly{ % in document preamble
+ ...
+ FILENAME,
+ ...
+ }
+ ...
+ \include{FILENAME} % in document body
+
+ Bring material from the external file 'FILENAME.tex' into a LaTeX
+document.
+
+ The '\include' command does three things: it executes '\clearpage'
+(*note \clearpage & \cleardoublepage::), then it inputs the material
+from 'FILENAME.tex' into the document, and then it does another
+'\clearpage'. This command can only appear in the document body. The
+'\includeonly' command controls which files will be read by LaTeX under
+subsequent '\include' commands. Its list of filenames is
+comma-separated, and it can only appear in the preamble.
+
+ This example root document, 'constitution.tex', brings in three
+files, 'preamble.tex', 'articles.tex', and 'amendments.tex'.
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \includeonly{
+ preamble,
+ articles,
+ amendments
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ \include{preamble}
+ \include{articles}
+ \include{amendments}
+ \end{document}
+
+The file 'preamble.tex' contains no special code; you have just
+excerpted the chapter from 'consitution.tex' and put it in a separate
+file just for editing convenience.
+
+ \chapter{Preamble}
+ We the People of the United States,
+ in Order to form a more perfect Union, ...
+
+Running LaTeX on 'constitution.tex' makes the material from the three
+files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary files
+'preamble.aux', 'articles.aux', and 'amendments.tex'. These contain
+information such as page numbers and cross-references (*note Cross
+references::). If you now comment out '\includeonly''s lines with
+'preamble' and 'amendments' and run LaTeX again then the resulting
+document shows only the material from 'articles.tex', not the material
+from 'preamble.tex' or 'amendments.tex'. Nonetheless, all of the
+auxiliary information from the omitted files is still there, including
+the starting page number of the chapter.
+
+ If the document preamble does not have '\includeonly' then LaTeX will
+include all the files you call for with '\include' commands.
+
+ The '\include' command makes a new page. To avoid that, see *note
+\input:: (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary information).
+
+ *Note Larger book template:: for another example using '\include' and
+'\includeonly'. That example also uses '\input' for some material that
+will not necessarily start on a new page.
+
+ File names can involve paths.
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \includeonly{
+ chapters/chap1,
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ \include{chapters/chap1}
+ \end{document}
+
+ To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name 'amo amas amat', this
+works under TeX Live on GNU/Linux:
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \includeonly{
+ "amo\space amas\space amat"
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ \include{"amo\space amas\space amat"}
+ \end{document}
+
+ and this works under MiKTeX on Windows:
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \includeonly{
+ {"amo amas amat"}
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ \include{{"amo amas amat"}}
+ \end{document}
+
+ You cannot use '\include' inside a file that is being included or you
+get 'LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested.' The '\include' command
+cannot appear in the document preamble; you will get 'LaTeX Error:
+Missing \begin{document}'.
+
+ If a file that you '\include' does not exist, for instance if you
+'\include{athiesm}' but you meant '\include{atheism}', then LaTeX does
+not give you an error but will warn you 'No file athiesm.tex.' (It will
+also create 'athiesm.aux'.)
+
+ If you '\include' the root file in itself then you first get 'LaTeX
+Error: Can be used only in preamble.' Later runs get 'TeX capacity
+exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]'. To fix this, you must remove
+the inclusion '\include{root}' but also delete the file 'ROOT.aux' and
+rerun LaTeX.
+
+24.3 '\input'
+=============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \input{FILENAME}
+
+ LaTeX processes the file as if its contents were inserted in the
+current file. For a more sophisticated inclusion mechanism see *note
+\include & \includeonly::.
+
+ If FILENAME does not end in '.tex' then LaTeX first tries the
+filename with that extension; this is the usual case. If FILENAME ends
+with '.tex' then LaTeX looks for the filename as it is.
+
+ For example, this
+
+ \input{macros}
+
+will cause LaTeX to first look for 'macros.tex'. If it finds that file
+then it processes its contents as thought they had been copy-pasted in.
+If there is no file of the name 'macros.tex' then LaTeX tries the name
+'macros', without an extension. (This may vary by distribution.)
+
+ To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name 'amo amas amat', this
+works under TeX Live on GNU/Linux:
+
+ \input{"amo\space amas\space amat"}
+
+ and this works under MiKTeX on Windows:
+
+ \input{{"amo amas amat"}}
+
+25 Front/back matter
+********************
+
+25.1 Table of contents etc.
+===========================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \tableofcontents
+ \listoffigures
+ \listoftables
+
+ Produce a table of contents, or list of figures, or list of tables.
+Put the command in the input file where you want the table or list to
+go. You do not type the entries; for example, typically the table of
+contents entries are automatically generated from the sectioning
+commands '\chapter', etc.
+
+ This example illustrates the first command, '\tableofcontents'.
+LaTeX will produce a table of contents on the book's first page.
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ % \setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
+ \begin{document}
+ \tableofcontents\newpage
+ ...
+ \chapter{...}
+ ...
+ \section{...}
+ ...
+ \subsection{...}
+ ...
+ \end{document}
+
+Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter
+and section listings but not subsection listings, because the '\section'
+command has level 1. *Note Sectioning:: for level numbers of the
+sectioning units. For more on the 'tocdepth' *note
+Sectioning/tocdepth::.
+
+ Another example of the use of '\tableofcontents' is in *note Larger
+book template::.
+
+ If you want a page break after the table of contents, write a
+'\newpage' command after the '\tableofcontents' command, as above.
+
+ To make the table of contents LaTeX stores the information in an
+auxiliary file named 'ROOT-FILE.toc' (*note Splitting the input::). For
+example, this LaTeX file 'test.tex'
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \begin{document}
+ \tableofcontents\newpage
+ \section{First section}
+ \subsection{First subsection}
+ ...
+
+writes the following line to 'test.toc'.
+
+ \contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}First section}{2}
+ \contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}First subsection}{2}
+
+The 'section' or 'subsection' is the sectioning unit. The hook
+'\numberline' lets you to change how the information appears in the
+table of contents. Of its two arguments, '1' or '1.1' is the sectioning
+unit number and 'First section' or 'First subsection' is the title.
+Finally, '2' is the page number on which the sectioning units start.
+
+ One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to
+get the contents page correct you must run LaTeX twice, once to store
+the information and once to get it. In particular, the first time that
+you run LaTeX on a new document, the table of contents page will be
+empty except for its 'Contents' header. Just run it again.
+
+ The commands '\listoffigures' and '\listoftables' produce a list of
+figures and a list of tables. They work the same way as the contents
+commands; for instance, these work with information stored in '.lof' and
+'.lot' files.
+
+ To change the header for the table of contents page do something like
+the first line here.
+
+ \renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents}
+ \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots}
+ \renewcommand{\listtablename}{Tables}
+
+Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two.
+Internationalization packages such as 'babel' or 'polyglossia' will
+change the headers depending on the chosen base language.
+
+ CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures
+and tables. One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the
+default, such as spacing, is 'tocloft'. And, 'tocbibbind' will
+automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to the table of
+contents.
+
+25.1.1 '\addcontentsline'
+-------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}
+
+ Add an entry to the file specified by EXT. Usually EXT is one of
+'toc' for the table of contents, 'lof' for the list of figures, or 'lot'
+for the list of tables.
+
+ The following will result in an 'Appendices' line in the table of
+contents.
+
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+
+It will appear at the same indentation level as the sections, will be in
+boldface, and will be assigned the page number associated with the point
+where it appears in the input file.
+
+ The '\addcontentsline' command writes information to the file
+'ROOT-NAME.EXT'. It writes that information as the text of the command
+'\contentsline{UNIT}{TEXT}{NUM}', where 'NUM' is the current value of
+counter 'UNIT'. The most common case is the table of contents and there
+NUM is the page number of the first page of UNIT.
+
+ This command is invoked by the sectioning commands '\chapter', etc.,
+and also by '\caption' inside a float environment. But it is also used
+by authors. For example, in a book to have the preface unnumbered, you
+may use the starred '\chapter*'. But that does not put in table of
+contents information, so you can enter it manually, as here.
+
+ \chapter*{Preface}
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\protect\numberline{}Preface}
+
+In the '.toc' file LaTeX will put the line '\contentsline
+{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}'; note the page number '3'.
+
+ All of the arguments for '\addcontentsline' are required.
+
+EXT
+ Typically one of the strings 'toc' for the table of contents, 'lof'
+ for the list of figures, or 'lot' for the list of tables. The
+ filename extension of the information file.
+
+UNIT
+ A string that depends on the value of the EXT argument:
+
+ 'toc'
+ For the table of contents, this is the name of a sectional
+ unit: 'part', 'chapter', 'section', 'subsection', etc.
+
+ 'lof'
+ For the list of figures: 'figure'.
+
+ 'lot'
+ For the list of tables: 'table'.
+
+TEXT
+ The text of the entry. You must '\protect' any commands that are
+ fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ The '\addcontentsline' command has an interaction with '\include'
+(*note \include & \includeonly::). If you use them at the same level,
+as with '\addcontentsline{...}{...}{...}\include{...}' then lines in the
+table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution is to
+move '\addcontentsline' into the file being included.
+
+ If you use a UNIT that LaTeX does not recognize, as here
+
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{setcion}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
+
+then you don't get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
+will not make sense.
+
+25.1.2 '\addtocontents'
+-----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}
+
+ Add TEXT, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to the
+auxiliary file with extension EXT. This is most commonly used for the
+table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also applies
+to the list of figures and list of tables.
+
+ This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the
+'Contents' header.
+
+ \tableofcontents\newpage
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace*{3ex}}
+
+ The '\addtocontents' command has two arguments. Both are required.
+
+EXT
+ Typically one of: 'toc' for the table of contents, 'lof' for the
+ list of figures, or 'lot' for the list of tables. The extension of
+ the file holding the information.
+
+TEXT
+ The text, and possibly commands, to be written.
+
+ The sectioning commands such as '\chapter' use the '\addcontentsline'
+command to store information. This command creates lines in the '.toc'
+auxiliary file containing the '\contentsline' command (*note
+\addcontentsline::). In contrast, the command '\addtocontents' puts
+material directly in that file.
+
+ The '\addtocontents' command has an interaction with '\include'
+(*note \include & \includeonly::). If you use them at the same level,
+as with '\addtocontents{...}{...}\include{...}' then lines in the table
+of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution is to move
+'\addtocontents' into the file being included.
+
+25.1.3 '\nofiles'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \nofiles
+
+ Prevent LaTeX from writing any auxiliary files. The only output will
+be the '.log' and '.pdf' (or '.dvi') files. This command must go in the
+preamble.
+
+ Because of the '\nofiles' command this example will not produce a
+'.toc' file.
+
+ \documentclass{book}
+ \nofiles
+ \begin{document}
+ \tableofcontents\newpage
+ \chapter{...}
+ ...
+
+LaTeX will not erase any existing auxiliary files, so if you insert the
+'\nofiles' command after you have run the file and gotten a '.toc' then
+the table of contents page will continue to show the old information.
+
+25.2 Indexes
+============
+
+This document has an index.
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \usepackage{makeidx} \makeindex
+ ...
+ \begin{document}
+ ...
+ Recall Wilson's Theorem: \index{Wilson's Theorem}
+ a number \( n>1 \) is prime if and only if the factorial of \( n-1 \)
+ is congruent to \( -1 \) modulo~\( n \).
+ ...
+ \printindex
+ ...
+
+The '\usepackage{makeidx}' and '\makeindex' in the preamble bring in the
+relevant commands.
+
+ Producing an index is a three stage process. First, in the document
+body you declare index entries with the '\index' command (*note
+\index::). When you run LaTeX, the '\index' writes its information to
+an auxiliary file 'ROOT-NAME.idx'. Next, to alphabetize and to do other
+manipulations you run an external command, typically 'makeindex' or
+'xindy' (*note makeindex::). These output a file 'ROOT-NAME.ind'.
+Finally, you bring the information back into your document and typeset
+it with the '\printindex' command (*note \printindex::).
+
+ There are many packages that apply to indexing commands. The
+'showidx' package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on
+the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index.
+The 'multind' package supports multiple indexes. See also the TeX FAQ
+entry on this topic,
+<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind>.
+
+25.2.1 '\index'
+---------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \index{INDEX-ENTRY-STRING}
+
+ Declare an entry in the index. This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).
+
+ For example, as described in *note Indexes::, one way to get an index
+from what's below is to compile the document with 'pdflatex test', then
+process the index entries with 'makeindex test', and then compile again
+with 'pdflatex test'.
+
+ W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+ ...
+ Ackermann function\index{Ackermann!function}
+ ...
+ rate of growth\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate}
+
+All three index entries will get a page number, such as 'Ackermann, 22'.
+LaTeX will format the second as a subitem of the first, on the line
+below it and indented, and the third as a subitem of the second. Three
+levels deep is as far as you can nest subentries. (If you add
+'\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison}' then 'makeindex'
+says 'Scanning input file test.idx....done (4 entries accepted, 1
+rejected)' and nothing appears in the index).
+
+ If you enter a second '\index' with the same INDEX-ENTRY-STRING then
+you will get a single index entry with two page numbers (unless they
+happen to fall on the same page). Thus, adding 'as for
+Ackermann.\index{Ackermann}' later in the same document as above will
+give an index entry like 'Ackermann, 22, 151'. Also, you can enter the
+index entries in any order, so for instance '\index{Ackermann!function}'
+could come before '\index{Ackermann}'.
+
+ Get a page range in the output, like 'Hilbert, 23--27', as here.
+
+ W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann}
+ ...
+ D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\(}
+ ...
+ disapproved of his marriage.\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\)}
+
+If the beginning and ending of the page range are equal then the system
+just gives a single page entry, not a range.
+
+ If you index subentries but not a main entry, as with
+'\index{Jones!program}' and '\index{Jones!results}', then the output is
+the item 'Jones' with no comma or page number, followed by two subitems,
+like 'program, 50' and 'results, 51'.
+
+ Generate a index entry that says 'See' by using a vertical bar
+character: '\index{Ackermann!function|see{P\'eter's function}}'. You
+can instead get 'See also' with 'seealso'. (The text 'See' is defined
+by '\seename', and 'See also' by '\alsoname'. You can redefine these
+either by using an internationalization package such as 'babel' or
+'polyglossia', or directly as with '\renewcommand{\alsoname}[1]{Also see
+#1}'.)
+
+ The 'See' feature is part of a more general functionality. After the
+vertical bar you can put the name of a one-input command, as in
+'\index{group|textit}' (note the missing backslash on the '\textit'
+command) and the system will apply that command to the page number, here
+giving something like '\textit{7}'. You can define your own one-input
+commands, such as '\newcommand{\definedpage}[1]{{\color{blue}#1}}' and
+then '\index{Ackermann!function|definedpage}' will give a blue page
+number (*note Color::). Another, less practical, example is this,
+
+ \newcommand\indexownpage[1]{#1, \thepage}
+ ... Epimenides.\index{self-reference|indexownpage}
+
+which creates an entry citing the page number of its own index listing.
+
+ The two functions just described combine, as here
+
+ \index{Ackermann!function|(definedpage}
+ ...
+ \index{Ackermann!function|)}
+
+which outputs an index entry like 'function, 23--27' where the page
+number range is in blue.
+
+ Consider an index entry such as 'U+03B1-ring'. Entering it as
+'$\alpha$-ring' will cause it to be alphabetized according to the dollar
+sign. You can instead enter it using an at-sign, as
+'\index{alpha-ring@$\alpha$-ring}'. If you specify an entry with an
+at-sign separating two strings, 'POS@TEXT', then POS gives the
+alphabetical position of the entry while TEXT produces the text of the
+entry. Another example is that '\index{Saint Michael's College@SMC}'
+produces an index entry 'SMC' alphabetized into a different location
+than its spelling would naturally give it.
+
+ To put a '!', or '@', or '|' character in an index entry, preceding
+it with a double quote, '"'. (The double quote gets deleted before
+alphabetization.)
+
+ A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond
+that provided by 'makeidx'. One is 'index', which allows for multiple
+indices and contains a command '\index*{INDEX-ENTRY-STRING}' that prints
+the INDEX-ENTRY-STRING as well as indexing it.
+
+ The '\index' command writes the indexing information to the file
+'ROOT-NAME.idx' file. Specifically, it writes text of the command
+'\indexentry{INDEX-ENTRY-STRING}{PAGE-NUM}', where PAGE-NUM is the value
+of the '\thepage' counter. On occasion, when the '\printindex' command
+is confused, you have to delete this file to start with a fresh slate.
+
+ If you omit the closing brace of an '\index' command then you get a
+message like this.
+
+ Runaway argument? {Ackermann!function
+ ! Paragraph ended before \@wrindex was complete.
+
+25.2.2 'makeindex'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ makeindex FILENAME
+ makeindex -s STYLE-FILE FILENAME
+ makeindex OPTIONS FILENAME0 ...
+
+ Sort, and otherwise process, the index information in the auxiliary
+file FILENAME. This is a command line program. It takes one or more
+raw index files, 'FILENAME.idx' files, and produces the actual index
+file, the 'FILENAME.ind' file that is input by '\printindex' (*note
+\printindex::).
+
+ The first form of the command suffices for many uses. The second
+allows you to format the index by using an "index style file", a '.isty'
+file. The third form is the most general; see the full documentation on
+CTAN.
+
+ This is a simple '.isty' file.
+
+ % book.isty
+ % $ makeindex -s book.isty -p odd book.idx
+ % creates the index as book.ind, starting on an odd page.
+ preamble
+ "\\pagestyle{empty}
+ \\small
+ \\begin{theindex}
+ \\thispagestyle{empty}"
+
+ postamble
+ "\n
+ \\end{theindex}"
+
+ The description here covers only some of the index formatting
+possibilities in STYLE-FILE. For a full list see the documentation on
+CTAN.
+
+ A style file consists of a list of pairs: SPECIFIER and ATTRIBUTE.
+These can appear in the file in any order. All of the ATTRIBUTES are
+strings, except where noted. Strings are surrounded with double quotes,
+'"', and the maximum length of a string is 144 characters. The '\n' is
+for a newline and '\t' is for a tab. Backslashes are escaped with
+another backslash, '\\'. If a line begins with a percent sign, '%',
+then it is a comment.
+
+'preamble'
+ Preamble of the output file. Defines the context in which the
+ index is formatted. Default: '"\\begin{theindex}\n"'.
+
+'postamble'
+ Postamble of the output file. Default: '"\n\n\\end{theindex}\n"'.
+
+'group_skip'
+ Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group
+ for entries starting with 'a', etc. This specifier gives what is
+ inserted when a new group begins. Default: '"\n\n \\indexspace\n"'
+ ('\indexspace' is a rubber length with default value '10pt plus5pt
+ minus3pt').
+
+'lethead_flag'
+ An integer. It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter.
+ If it is 0 (which is the default) then other than 'group_skip'
+ nothing will be inserted before the group. If it is positive then
+ at a new letter the 'lethead_prefix' and 'lethead_suffix' will be
+ inserted, with that letter in uppercase between them. If it is
+ negative then what will be inserted is the letter in lowercase.
+ The default is 0.
+
+'lethead_prefix'
+ If a new group begins with a different letter then this is the
+ prefix inserted before the new letter header. Default: '""'
+
+'lethead_suffix'
+ If a group begins with a different letter then this is the suffix
+ inserted after the new letter header. Default: '""'.
+
+'item_0'
+ What is put between two level 0 items. Default: '"\n \\item "'.
+
+'item_1'
+ Put between two level 1 items. Default: '"\n \\subitem "'.
+
+'item_2'
+ put between two level 2 items. Default: '"\n \\subsubitem "'.
+
+'item_01'
+ What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item. Default:
+ '"\n \\subitem "'.
+
+'item_x1'
+ What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item in the case
+ that the level 0 item doesn't have any page numbers (as in
+ '\index{aaa|see{bbb}}'). Default: '"\n \\subitem "'.
+
+'item_12'
+ What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item. Default:
+ '"\n \\subsubitem "'.
+
+'item_x2'
+ What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item, if the
+ level 1 item doesn't have page numbers. Default: '"\n \\subsubitem
+ "'.
+
+'delim_0'
+ Delimiter put between a level 0 key and its first page number.
+ Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+
+'delim_1'
+ Delimiter put between a level 1 key and its first page number.
+ Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+
+'delim_2'
+ Delimiter between a level 2 key and its first page number.
+ Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+
+'delim_n'
+ Delimiter between two page numbers for the same key (at any level).
+ Default: a comma followed by a blank, '", "'.
+
+'delim_r'
+ What is put between the starting and ending page numbers of a
+ range. Default: '"--"'.
+
+'line_max'
+ An integer. Maximum length of an index entry's line in the output,
+ beyond which the line wraps. Default: '72'.
+
+'indent_space'
+ What is inserted at the start of a wrapped line. Default:
+ '"\t\t"'.
+
+'indent_length'
+ A number. The length of the wrapped line indentation. The default
+ 'indent_space' is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the
+ default here is '16'.
+
+'page_precedence'
+ A document may have pages numbered in different ways. For example,
+ a book may have front matter pages numbered in lowercase roman
+ while main matter pages are in arabic. This string specifies the
+ order in which they will appear in the index. The 'makeindex'
+ command supports five different types of numerals: lowercase roman
+ 'r', and numeric or arabic 'n', and lowercase alphabetic 'a', and
+ uppercase roman 'R', and uppercase alphabetic 'A'. Default:
+ '"rnaRA"'.
+
+ There are a number of other programs that do the job 'makeindex'
+does. One is 'xindy', which does internationalization and can process
+indexes for documents marked up using LaTeX and a number of other
+languages. It is highly configurable, both in markup terms and in terms
+of the collating order of the text, as described in its documentation.
+
+25.2.3 '\printindex'
+--------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \printindex
+
+ Place the index into the output.
+
+ To get an index you must first include
+'\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex' in the document preamble and compile
+the document, then run the system command 'makeindex', and then compile
+the document again. *Note Indexes:: for further discussion and an
+example of the use of '\printindex'.
+
+25.3 Glossaries
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+ ...
+ \newglossaryentry{LABEL}{SETTINGS}
+ ...
+ \gls{LABEL}.
+ ...
+ \printglossaries
+
+ The 'glossaries' package allows you to make glossaries, including
+multiple glossaries, as well as lists of acronyms.
+
+ To get the output from this example, compile the document (for
+instance with 'pdflatex filename'), then run the command line command
+'makeglossaries filename', and then compile the document again.
+
+ \documentclass{...}
+ \usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries
+ \newglossaryentry{tm}{%
+ name={Turing machine},
+ description={A model of a machine that computes. The model is simple
+ but can compute anything any existing device can compute.
+ It is the standard model used in Computer Science.},
+ }
+ \begin{document}
+ Everything begins with the definition of a \gls{tm}.
+ ...
+ \printglossaries
+ \end{document}
+
+That gives two things. In the main text it outputs '... definition of a
+Turing machine'. In addition, in a separate sectional unit headed
+'Glossary' there appears a description list. In boldface it says
+'Turing machine' and the rest of the item says in normal type 'A model
+of a machine ... Computer Science'.
+
+ The command '\makeglossary' opens the file that will contain the
+entry information, 'ROOT-FILE.glo'. Put the '\printglossaries' command
+where you want the glossaries to appear in your document.
+
+ The 'glossaries' package is very powerful. For instance, besides the
+commands '\newglossaryentry' and '\gls', there are similar commands for
+a list of acronyms. See the package documentations on CTAN.
+
+25.3.1 '\newglossaryentry'
+--------------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \newglossaryentry{LABEL}
+ {
+ name={NAME},
+ description={DESCRIPTION},
+ OTHER OPTIONS, ...
+ }
+
+ or
+
+ \longnewglossaryentry{LABEL}
+ {
+ name={NAME},
+ OTHER OPTIONS ...,
+ }
+ {DESCRIPTION}
+
+ Declare a new entry for a glossary. The LABEL must be unique for the
+document. The settings associated with the label are pairs:
+'KEY=VALUE'.
+
+ This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers U+211D in
+the glossary.
+
+ \newglossaryentry{R}
+ {
+ name={\ensuremath{\mathbb{R}}},
+ description={the real numbers},
+ }
+
+ Use the second command form if the DESCRIPTION spans more than one
+paragraph.
+
+ For a full list of KEYs see the package documentation on CTAN but
+here are a few.
+
+'name'
+ (Required.) The word, phrase, or symbol that you are defining.
+
+'description'
+ (Required.) The description that will appear in the glossary. If
+ this has more than one paragraph then you must use the second
+ command form given in the synopsis.
+
+'plural'
+ The plural form of NAME. Refer to the plural form using '\glspl'
+ or '\Glspl' (*note \gls::).
+
+'sort'
+ How to place this entry in the list of entries that the glossary
+ holds.
+
+'symbol'
+ A symbol, such as a mathematical symbol, besides the name.
+
+25.3.2 '\gls'
+-------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \gls{LABEL}
+ \glspl{LABEL}
+ \Gls{LABEL}
+ \Glspl{LABEL}
+
+ Refer to a glossary entry. The entries are declared with
+'\newglossaryentry' (*note \newglossaryentry::).
+
+ This
+
+ \newglossaryentry{N}{%
+ name={the natural numbers},
+ description={The numbers $0$, $1$, $2$, $\ldots$\@},
+ symbol={\ensuremath{\mathbb{N}}},
+ }
+ ...
+ Consider \gls{N}.
+
+gives the output 'Consider the natural numbers'.
+
+ The second command form '\glspl{LABEL}' produces the plural of NAME
+(by default it tries adding an 's'). The third form capitalizes the
+first letter of NAME, as does the fourth form, which also takes the
+plural.
+
+26 Letters
+**********
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \address{SENDERS ADDRESS} % return address
+ \signature{SENDER NAME}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{letter}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}
+ \opening{SALUTATION}
+ LETTER BODY
+ \closing{CLOSING TEXT}
+ \end{letter}
+ ...
+ \end{document}
+
+ Produce one or more letters.
+
+ Each letter is in a separate 'letter' environment, whose argument
+RECIPIENT ADDRESS often contains multiple lines separated with a double
+backslash, ('\\'). For example, you might have:
+
+ \begin{letter}{Ninon de l'Enclos \\
+ l'h\^otel Sagonne}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+
+ The start of the 'letter' environment resets the page number to 1,
+and the footnote number to 1 also.
+
+ The SENDER ADDRESS and SENDER NAME are common to all of the letters,
+whether there is one or more, so these are best put in the preamble. As
+with the recipient address, often SENDER ADDRESS contains multiple lines
+separated by a double backslash ('\\'). LaTeX will put the SENDER NAME
+under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
+hand-written signature.
+
+ Each 'letter' environment body begins with a required '\opening'
+command such as '\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}'. The LETTER BODY text is
+ordinary LaTeX so it can contain everything from enumerated lists to
+displayed math, except that commands such as '\chapter' that make no
+sense in a letter are turned off. Each 'letter' environment body
+typically ends with a '\closing' command such as '\closing{Yours,}'.
+
+ Additional material may come after the '\closing'. You can say who
+is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like '\cc{the Boss \\
+the Boss's Boss}'. There's a similar '\encl' command for a list of
+enclosures. And, you can add a postscript with '\ps'.
+
+ LaTeX's default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it
+by a length of '\longindentation'. By default this is '0.5\textwidth'.
+To make them flush left, put '\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}' in your
+preamble.
+
+ To set a fixed date use something like
+'\renewcommand{\today}{1958-Oct-12}'. If put in your preamble then it
+will apply to all the letters.
+
+ This example shows only one 'letter' environment. The three lines
+marked as optional are typically omitted.
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \address{Sender's street \\ Sender's town}
+ \signature{Sender's name \\ Sender's title}
+ % optional: \location{Mailbox 13}
+ % optional: \telephone{(102) 555-0101}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{letter}{Recipient's name \\ Recipient's address}
+ \opening{Sir:}
+ % optional: \thispagestyle{firstpage}
+ I am not interested in entering a business arrangement with you.
+ \closing{Your most humble, etc.,}
+ \end{letter}
+ \end{document}
+
+ These commands are used with the 'letter' class.
+
+26.1 '\address'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \address{SENDERS ADDRESS}
+
+ Specify the return address, as it appears on the letter and on the
+envelope. Separate multiple lines in SENDERS ADDRESS with a double
+backslash, '\\'.
+
+ Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often
+put in the preamble. However, it can go anywhere, including inside an
+individual 'letter' environment.
+
+ This command is optional: if you do not use it then the letter is
+formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto pre-printed
+letterhead paper. If you do use the '\address' declaration then it is
+formatted as a personal letter.
+
+ Here is an example.
+
+ \address{Stephen Maturin \\
+ The Grapes of the Savoy}
+
+26.2 '\cc'
+==========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \cc{NAME0 \\
+ ... }
+
+ Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent.
+This command is optional. If it appears then typically it comes after
+'\closing'. Put the names on different lines by separating them with a
+double backslash, '\\', as in:
+
+ \cc{President \\
+ Vice President}
+
+26.3 '\closing'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \closing{TEXT}
+
+ Produce the letter's closing. This is optional, but usual. It
+appears at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature. For
+example:
+
+ \closing{Regards,}
+
+26.4 '\encl'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \encl{FIRST ENCLOSED OBJECT \\
+ ... }
+
+ Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
+optional; when it is used, it typically is put after '\closing'.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, '\\'.
+
+ \encl{License \\
+ Passport}
+
+26.5 '\location'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \location{TEXT}
+
+ The TEXT appears centered at the bottom of the page. It only appears
+if the page style is 'firstpage'.
+
+26.6 '\makelabels'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \makelabels % in preamble
+
+ Optional, for a document that contains 'letter' environments. If you
+just put '\makelabels' in the preamble then at the end of the document
+you will get a sheet with labels for all the recipients, one for each
+letter environment, that you can copy to a sheet of peel-off address
+labels.
+
+ Customize the labels by redefining the commands '\startlabels',
+'\mlabel', and '\returnaddress' (and perhaps '\name') in the preamble.
+The command '\startlabels' sets the width, height, number of columns,
+etc., of the page onto which the labels are printed. The command
+'\mlabel{RETURN ADDRESS}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}' produces the two labels (or
+one, if you choose to ignore the RETURN ADDRESS) for each letter
+environment. The first argument, RETURN ADDRESS, is the value returned
+by the macro '\returnaddress'. The second argument, RECIPIENT ADDRESS,
+is the value passed in the argument to the 'letter' environment. By
+default '\mlabel' ignores the first argument, the RETURN ADDRESS,
+causing the default behavior described in the prior paragraph.
+
+ This illustrates customization. Its output includes a page with two
+columns having two labels each.
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \renewcommand*{\returnaddress}{Fred McGuilicuddy \\
+ Oshkosh, Mineola 12305}
+ \newcommand*\originalMlabel{}
+ \let\originalMlabel\mlabel
+ \def\mlabel#1#2{\originalMlabel{}{#1}\originalMlabel{}{#2}}
+ \makelabels
+ ...
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{letter}{A Einstein \\
+ 112 Mercer Street \\
+ Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+ \begin{letter}{K G\"odel \\
+ 145 Linden Lane \\
+ Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+ \end{document}
+
+The first column contains the return address twice. The second column
+contains the address for each recipient.
+
+ The package 'envlab' makes formatting the labels easier, with
+standard sizes already provided. The preamble lines
+'\usepackage[personalenvelope]{envlab}' and '\makelabels' are all that
+you need to print envelopes.
+
+26.7 '\name'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \name{NAME}
+
+ Optional. Sender's name, used for printing on the envelope together
+with the return address.
+
+26.8 '\opening'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \opening{SALUTATION}
+
+ Required. Follows the '\begin{letter}{...}'. The argument
+SALUTATION is mandatory. For instance:
+
+ \opening{Dear John:}
+
+26.9 '\ps'
+==========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ps{TEXT}
+
+ Add a postscript. This command is optional and usually is used after
+'\closing'.
+
+ \ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}
+
+26.10 '\signature'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \signature{FIRST LINE \\
+ ... }
+
+ The sender's name. This command is optional, although its inclusion
+is usual.
+
+ The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the
+closing. LaTeX leaves some vertical space for a handwritten signature.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, '\\'. For example:
+
+ \signature{J Fred Muggs \\
+ White House}
+
+ LaTeX's default for the vertical space from the '\closing' text down
+to the '\signature' text is '6\medskipamount', which is six times
+'\medskipamount' (where '\medskipamount' is equal to a '\parskip', which
+in turn is defined by default here to 0.7em).
+
+ This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters
+in the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a
+'letter' environment and before the '\closing'.
+
+ You can include a graphic in the signature as here.
+
+ \signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\
+ My name}
+
+For this you must put '\usepackage{graphicx}' in the preamble (*note
+Graphics::).
+
+26.11 '\telephone'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \telephone{NUMBER}
+
+ The sender's telephone number. This is typically in the preamble,
+where it applies to all letters. This only appears if the 'firstpage'
+pagestyle is selected. If so, it appears on the lower right of the
+page.
+
+27 Terminal input/output
+************************
+
+27.1 '\typein'
+==============
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \typein{PROMPT-MSG}
+ \typein[CMD]{PROMPT-MSG}
+
+ Print PROMPT-MSG on the terminal and cause LaTeX to stop and wait for
+you to type a line of input. This line of input ends when you hit the
+return key.
+
+ For example, this
+
+ As long as I live I shall never forget \typein{Enter student name:}
+
+coupled with this command line interaction
+
+ Enter student name:
+
+ \@typein=Aphra Behn
+
+gives the output '... never forget Aphra Behn'.
+
+ The first command version, '\typein{PROMPT-MSG}', causes the input
+you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the input file
+in place of the '\typein' command.
+
+ In the second command version the optional argument 'CMD' argument
+must be a command name -- it must begin with a backslash, \. This
+command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you
+typed. For example, this
+
+ \typein[\student]{Enter student name:}
+ \typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+
+gives this output on the command line,
+
+ Enter student name:
+
+ \student=John Dee
+ Recommendation for John Dee.
+
+where the user has entered 'John Dee.'
+
+27.2 '\typeout'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \typeout{MSG}
+
+ Print 'msg' on the terminal and in the 'log' file.
+
+ This
+
+ \newcommand{\student}{John Dee}
+ \typeout{Recommendation for \student .}
+
+outputs 'Recommendation for John Dee'. Like what happens here with
+'\student', commands that are defined with '\newcommand' or
+'\renewcommand' (among others) are replaced by their definitions before
+being printed.
+
+ LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
+and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to 'msg'. As above, use
+the command '\space' to get a single space, independent of surrounding
+spaces. Use '^^J' to get a newline. Get a percent character with
+'\csname @percentchar\endcsname'.
+
+ This command can be useful for simple debugging, as here:
+
+ \newlength{\jhlength}
+ \setlength{\jhlength}{5pt}
+ \typeout{The length is \the\jhlength.}
+
+produces on the command line 'The length is 5.0pt'.
+
+28 Command line
+***************
+
+Synopsis (from a terminal command line):
+
+ pdflatex OPTIONS ARGUMENT
+
+ Run LaTeX on ARGUMENT. In place of 'pdflatex' you can also use
+'xelatex', or 'lualatex', or 'dviluatex', or 'latex'.
+
+ For example, this will run LaTeX on the file 'thesis.tex', creating
+the output 'thesis.pdf'.
+
+ pdflatex thesis
+
+Note that '.tex' is the default file extension.
+
+ pdfTeX is a development of the original TeX program, as are XeTeX and
+LuaTeX (*note TeX engines::). They are completely backward compatible.
+But the original program had a custom output format, DVI, while the
+newer ones can output directly to PDF. This allows them to take
+advantage of the extra features in PDF such as hyperlinks, support for
+modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and ubiquitous viewing
+programs. In short, if you run 'pdflatex' or 'xelatex' or 'lualatex'
+then you will by default get PDF and have access to all its modern
+features. If you run 'latex', or 'dvilualatex', then you will get DVI.
+The description here assumes pdfLaTeX.
+
+ *Note Command line options::, for a selection of the most useful
+command line options. As to ARGUMENT, the usual case is that it does
+not begin with a backslash, so the system takes it to be the name of a
+file and it compiles that file. If ARGUMENT begins with a backslash
+then the system will interpret it as a line of LaTeX input, which can be
+used for special effects (*note Command line input::).
+
+ If you gave no arguments or options then 'pdflatex' prompts for input
+from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering '<control>-D'.
+
+ If LaTeX finds an error in your document then by default it stops and
+asks you about it. *Note Recovering from errors:: for an outline of
+what to do.
+
+28.1 Command line options
+=========================
+
+These are the command-line options relevant to ordinary document
+authoring. For a full list, try running 'latex --help' from the command
+line.
+
+ With many implementations you can specify command line options by
+prefixing them with '-' or '--'. This is the case for both TeX Live
+(and MacTeX) and MiKTeX. We will use both conventions interchangeably.
+
+'-version'
+ Show the current version, like 'pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX
+ Live 2015/Debian)' along with a small amount of additional
+ information, and exit.
+
+'-help'
+ Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit.
+
+'-interaction=MODE'
+ TeX compiles a document in one of four interaction modes:
+ 'batchmode', 'nonstopmode', 'scrollmode', 'errorstopmode'. In
+ "errorstop mode" (the default), TeX stops at each error and asks
+ for user intervention. In "batch mode" it prints nothing on the
+ terminal, errors are scrolled as if the user hit '<return>' at
+ every error, and missing files cause the job to abort. In "nonstop
+ mode", diagnostic message appear on the terminal but as in batch
+ mode there is no user interaction. In "scroll mode", TeX only
+ stops for missing files or keyboard input.
+
+ For instance, starting LaTeX with this command line
+
+ pdflatex -interaction=batchmode FILENAME
+
+ eliminates most terminal output.
+
+'-jobname=STRING'
+ Set the value of TeX's 'jobname' to the string. The log file and
+ output file will then be named 'STRING.log' and 'STRING.pdf'.
+
+ When you run 'pdflatex OPTIONS ARGUMENT', if ARGUMENT does not
+ start with a backslash then TeX considers it the name of a file to
+ input. Otherwise it waits for the first '\input' instruction and
+ the name of the input file will be the job name. This is used to
+ name the log file the output file. The 'jobname' option overrides
+ that process and directly specifies the name. *Note Command line
+ input:: for an example of its use.
+
+'-output-directory=DIRECTORY'
+ Write files in the directory DIRECTORY. It must already exist.
+
+'--shell-escape'
+'--no-shell-escape'
+'--enable-write18'
+'--disable-write18'
+ Enable or disable '\write18{SHELL COMMAND}'. The first two options
+ are for with TeX Live or MacTeX while the second two are for
+ MiKTeX.
+
+ Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a
+ LaTeX file. For instance the package 'sagetex' allows you to have
+ the mathematics software system Sage do calculations or draw graphs
+ and then incorporate that output in your document. For this TeX
+ provides the '\write18' command.
+
+ But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen
+ if you compiled a LaTeX file from the Internet. By default
+ '\write18' is disabled. (More precisely, by default TeX Live,
+ MacTeX, and MiKTeX only allow the execution of a limited number of
+ TeX-related programs, which they distribute.)
+
+ If you invoke LaTeX with the option 'no-shell-escape', and in your
+ document you call '\write18{ls -l}', then you do not get an error
+ but the log file says 'runsystem(ls -l)...disabled'.
+
+'-halt-on-error'
+ Stop processing at the first error.
+
+'-file-line-error'
+'-no-file-line-error'
+ Enable or disable 'FILENAME:LINENO:ERROR'-style error messages.
+ These are only available with TeX Live or MacTeX.
+
+28.2 Command line input
+=======================
+
+As part of the command line invocation 'pdflatex OPTIONS ARGUMENT' you
+can specify arbitrary LaTeX input by starting ARGUMENT with a backslash.
+This allows you to do some special effects.
+
+ For example, this file (which uses the 'hyperref' package for
+hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a
+PDF.
+
+ \ifdefined\paperversion % in preamble
+ \newcommand{\urlcolor}{black}
+ \else
+ \newcommand{\urlcolor}{blue}
+ \fi
+ \usepackage[colorlinks=true,urlcolor=\urlcolor]{hyperref}
+ ...
+ \href{https://www.ctan.org}{CTAN} % in body
+ ...
+
+Compiling this document 'book.tex' with the command line 'pdflatex book'
+will give the 'CTAN' link in blue. But compiling it with 'pdflatex
+"\def\paperversion{}\input book.tex"' has the link in black. (Note the
+use of double quotes to prevent interpretation of the symbols by the
+command line shell; your system may do this differently.)
+
+ In a similar way, from the single file 'main.tex' you can compile two
+different versions.
+
+ pdflatex -jobname=students "\def\student{}\input{main}"
+ pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main}"
+
+The 'jobname' option is there because otherwise both files would be
+called 'main.pdf' and the second would overwrite the first.
+
+ A final example. This loads the package 'graphicx' with the option
+'draft'
+
+ pdflatex -jobname=aa "\RequirePackage[draft]{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}"
+
+so the graphic files are read for their size information but not
+incorporated into the PDF. (The 'jobname' option is there because
+otherwise the output file would be 'graphicx.pdf', as '\RequirePackage'
+does an '\input' of its own.)
+
+28.3 Recovering from errors
+===========================
+
+If LaTeX finds an error in your document then it gives you an error
+message and prompts you with a question mark, '?'. For instance,
+running LaTeX on this file
+
+ \newcommand{\NP}{\ensuremath{\textbf{NP}}}
+ The \PN{} problem is a million dollar one.
+
+causes it show this, and wait for input.
+
+ ! Undefined control sequence.
+ l.5 The \PN
+ {} problem is a million dollar one.
+ ?
+
+The simplest thing is to enter 'x' and '<return>' and fix the typo. You
+could instead enter '?' and '<return>' to see other options.
+
+ There are two other error scenarios. The first is that you forgot to
+include the '\end{document}' or misspelled it. In this case LaTeX gives
+you a '*' prompt. You can get back to the command line by typing
+'\stop' and '<return>'.
+
+ The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name. For instance,
+instead of 'pdflatex test' you might type 'pdflatex tste'.
+
+ ! I can't find file `tste'.
+ <*> tste
+
+ (Press Enter to retry, or Control-D to exit)
+ Please type another input file name:
+
+The simplest thing is to enter '<Control>' and 'd' (holding them down at
+the same time), and then retype the correct command line.
+
+Appendix A Document templates
+*****************************
+
+Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will
+be useful. Additional template resources are listed at
+<http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates>.
+
+A.1 'beamer' template
+=====================
+
+The 'beamer' class creates presentation slides. It has a vast array of
+features, but here is a basic template:
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+\title{Beamer Class template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+\date{July 31, 2007}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% without [fragile], any {verbatim} code gets mysterious errors.
+\begin{frame}[fragile]
+ \frametitle{First Slide}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ This is \verbatim!
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+ One web resource for this:
+<http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/>.
+
+A.2 'article' template
+======================
+
+\documentclass{article}
+\title{Article Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{First section}
+Some text.
+
+\subsection{First section, first subsection}
+Additional text.
+
+\section{Second section}
+Some more text.
+\end{document}
+
+A.3 'book' template
+===================
+
+This is a straightforward template for a book. See *Note Larger book
+template:: for a more elaborate one.
+
+\documentclass{book}
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\chapter{First}
+Some text.
+
+\chapter{Second}
+Some other text.
+
+\section{A subtopic}
+The end.
+\end{document}
+
+A.4 Larger 'book' template
+==========================
+
+This is a more elaborate template for a book. It has '\frontmatter',
+'\mainmatter', and '\backmatter' to control the typography of the three
+main areas of a book (*note \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter::).
+The book has a bibliography and an index.
+
+ Notable is that it uses '\include' and '\includeonly' (*note
+Splitting the input::). While you are working on a chapter you can
+comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to
+'\includeonly'. That will speed up compilation without losing any
+information such as cross-references. (Material that does not need to
+come on a new page is brought in with '\input' instead of '\include'.
+You don't get the cross-reference benefit this way.)
+
+\documentclass[titlepage]{book}
+\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex
+
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\includeonly{%
+ frontcover,
+ preface,
+ chap1,
+ ...
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\include{frontcover}
+ % maybe comment out while drafting:
+\maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright}
+\tableofcontents
+\include{preface}
+\mainmatter
+\include{chap1}
+...
+\appendix
+\include{appena}
+...
+\backmatter
+\bibliographystyle{apalike}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}
+\bibliography
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index}
+\printindex
+\include{backcover}
+\end{document}
+
+A.5 'tugboat' template
+======================
+
+'TUGboat' is the journal of the TeX Users Group,
+<http://tug.org/TUGboat>.
+
+\documentclass{ltugboat}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{ifpdf}
+\ifpdf
+\usepackage[breaklinks,hidelinks]{hyperref}
+\else
+\usepackage{url}
+\fi
+
+%%% Start of metadata %%%
+
+\title{Example \TUB\ article}
+
+% repeat info for each author.
+\author{First Last}
+\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
+\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
+\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
+
+%%% End of metadata %%%
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+This is an example article for \TUB{}.
+Please write an abstract.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is an example article for \TUB, linked from
+\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
+
+We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the
+\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF}
+output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
+
+The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more):
+% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
+\begin{verbatim}[\small]
+\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
+\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
+\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
+\mf \MFB
+\plain \POBox \PS
+\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP
+\TUB \TUG \tug
+\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+
+\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph
+
+\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use!
+\cs{fred} -> \fred
+\meta{fred} -> <fred>
+\nth{n} -> 1st, 2nd, ...
+\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
+\booktitle{Book of Fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format
+\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue.
+
+This file is just a template. The \TUB\ style documentation is the
+\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}. (For
+\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using
+\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location,
+\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.)
+
+Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
+\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty
+\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
+
+\makesignature
+\end{document}
+
+Index
+*****
+
+* Menu:
+
+* &: tabular. (line 4940)
+* * prompt: Recovering from errors.
+ (line 14060)
+* *-form of environment commands: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6771)
+* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 1981)
+* *-form, defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6413)
+* --disable-write18 command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 13962)
+* --enable-write18 command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 13962)
+* --file-line-error command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 13989)
+* --halt-on-error command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 13986)
+* --help command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 13927)
+* --interaction command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 13930)
+* --jobname command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 13947)
+* --no-file-line-error command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 13989)
+* --no-shell-escape command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 13962)
+* --output-directory command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 13959)
+* --shell-escape command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 13962)
+* --version command-line option: Command line options.
+ (line 13922)
+* .aux file: Output files. (line 458)
+* .dvi file: Output files. (line 435)
+* .glo file: Glossaries. (line 13394)
+* .idx file: Indexes. (line 13035)
+* .idx file <1>: makeindex. (line 13186)
+* .ind file: makeindex. (line 13186)
+* .isty file: makeindex. (line 13198)
+* .lof file: Output files. (line 468)
+* .lof file <1>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12801)
+* .log file: Output files. (line 453)
+* .lot file: Output files. (line 468)
+* .lot file <1>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12801)
+* .pdf file: Output files. (line 445)
+* .tex, default extension: Command line. (line 13884)
+* .toc file: Output files. (line 468)
+* .toc file <1>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12801)
+* .xdv file: TeX engines. (line 510)
+* 10pt option: Document class options.
+ (line 672)
+* 11pt option: Document class options.
+ (line 672)
+* 12pt option: Document class options.
+ (line 672)
+* :: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 9486)
+* : <1>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 9486)
+* [...] for optional arguments: LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 529)
+* \ character starting commands: LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 529)
+* \!: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9351)
+* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 12378)
+* \#: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12090)
+* \$: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12090)
+* \%: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12090)
+* \&: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12090)
+* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 12382)
+* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 4786)
+* \*: \*. (line 9506)
+* \+: tabbing. (line 4778)
+* \,: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9337)
+* \-: tabbing. (line 4782)
+* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 5808)
+* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 12385)
+* \/: \/. (line 10324)
+* \:: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9333)
+* \;: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9328)
+* \<: tabbing. (line 4774)
+* \= (macron accent): Accents. (line 12389)
+* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 4768)
+* \>: tabbing. (line 4772)
+* \> <1>: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9333)
+* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 4771)
+* \@: \@. (line 10127)
+* \@beginparpenalty: list. (line 3868)
+* \@endparpenalty: list. (line 3876)
+* \@fnsymbol: \footnote. (line 6164)
+* \@ifstar: \@ifstar. (line 6598)
+* \@itempenalty: list. (line 3872)
+* \@startsection: \@startsection. (line 2452)
+* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 4801)
+* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 4802)
+* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 4802)
+* \aa (aa): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12455)
+* \AA (AA): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12455)
+* \acute: Math accents. (line 9221)
+* \addcontentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 12895)
+* \address: \address. (line 13573)
+* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 12970)
+* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 7316)
+* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 7563)
+* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 10649)
+* \ae (ae): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12459)
+* \AE (AE): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12459)
+* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 8055)
+* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 3227)
+* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 8058)
+* \alph{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 7191)
+* \Alph{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 7196)
+* \alsoname: \index. (line 13121)
+* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 8061)
+* \and for \author: \maketitle. (line 9718)
+* \angle: Math symbols. (line 8064)
+* \appendix: \appendix. (line 2391)
+* \approx: Math symbols. (line 8069)
+* \arabic{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 7201)
+* \arccos: Math functions. (line 9104)
+* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 9107)
+* \arctan: Math functions. (line 9110)
+* \arg: Math functions. (line 9113)
+* \arraycolsep: array. (line 2910)
+* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 5065)
+* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 5071)
+* \ast: Math symbols. (line 8072)
+* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 8081)
+* \AtBeginDocument: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3140)
+* \AtBeginDvi: Class and package commands.
+ (line 852)
+* \AtEndDocument: \AtEndDocument. (line 3156)
+* \AtEndOfClass: Class and package commands.
+ (line 857)
+* \AtEndOfPackage: Class and package commands.
+ (line 857)
+* \author{NAME1 \and NAME2 \and ...}: \maketitle. (line 9717)
+* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 4802)
+* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 12404)
+* \backmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 2424)
+* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 8084)
+* \bar: Math accents. (line 9224)
+* \baselineskip: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1470)
+* \baselinestretch: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1480)
+* \begin: Environments. (line 2802)
+* \beta: Math symbols. (line 8088)
+* \bf: Font styles. (line 1268)
+* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 1233)
+* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 5292)
+* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 5416)
+* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 5416)
+* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 8091)
+* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 8095)
+* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 8099)
+* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 8103)
+* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 8106)
+* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 8109)
+* \bigskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 10430)
+* \bigskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 10431)
+* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 8120)
+* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 8112)
+* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 8116)
+* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 8123)
+* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 8127)
+* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 8130)
+* \bmod: Math functions. (line 9116)
+* \boldmath: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 9006)
+* \boldmath <1>: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 9014)
+* \bot: Math symbols. (line 8133)
+* \bottomfraction: Floats. (line 1894)
+* \bottomfraction <1>: Floats. (line 1895)
+* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 8138)
+* \Box: Math symbols. (line 8141)
+* \breve: Math accents. (line 9227)
+* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 8146)
+* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 12414)
+* \cal: Font styles. (line 1271)
+* \cap: Math symbols. (line 8149)
+* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 12382)
+* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 12440)
+* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 12444)
+* \capitalcedilla: Accents. (line 12414)
+* \capitalcircumflex: Accents. (line 12393)
+* \capitaldieresis: Accents. (line 12378)
+* \capitaldotaccent: Accents. (line 12418)
+* \capitalgrave: Accents. (line 12397)
+* \capitalhungarumlaut: Accents. (line 12422)
+* \capitalmacron: Accents. (line 12389)
+* \capitalnewtie: Accents. (line 12436)
+* \capitalogonek: Accents. (line 12426)
+* \capitalring: Accents. (line 12430)
+* \capitaltie: Accents. (line 12436)
+* \capitaltilde: Accents. (line 12401)
+* \caption: figure. (line 3353)
+* \caption <1>: table. (line 4892)
+* \cc: \cc. (line 13599)
+* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 8154)
+* \cdots: Dots. (line 9057)
+* \centering: \centering. (line 2992)
+* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+* \chapter <1>: \chapter. (line 2089)
+* \check: Math accents. (line 9230)
+* \CheckCommand: Class and package commands.
+ (line 864)
+* \CheckCommand*: Class and package commands.
+ (line 864)
+* \chi: Math symbols. (line 8157)
+* \circ: Math symbols. (line 8160)
+* \circle: \circle. (line 4439)
+* \cite: \cite. (line 5351)
+* \ClassError: Class and package commands.
+ (line 884)
+* \ClassInfo: Class and package commands.
+ (line 884)
+* \ClassInfoNoLine: Class and package commands.
+ (line 884)
+* \ClassWarning: Class and package commands.
+ (line 884)
+* \ClassWarningNoLine: Class and package commands.
+ (line 884)
+* \cleardoublepage: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+ (line 5987)
+* \clearpage: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+ (line 5987)
+* \cline: \cline. (line 5199)
+* \closing: \closing. (line 13615)
+* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 8165)
+* \colon: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 9486)
+* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 1548)
+* \columnsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1673)
+* \columnsep <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1676)
+* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 1554)
+* \columnseprule <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1674)
+* \columnseprule <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1676)
+* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 1561)
+* \columnwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1675)
+* \columnwidth <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1676)
+* \complement: Math symbols. (line 8168)
+* \cong: Math symbols. (line 8174)
+* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 12899)
+* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 8177)
+* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 12177)
+* \cos: Math functions. (line 9119)
+* \cosh: Math functions. (line 9122)
+* \cot: Math functions. (line 9125)
+* \coth: Math functions. (line 9128)
+* \csc: Math functions. (line 9131)
+* \cup: Math symbols. (line 8180)
+* \CurrentOption: Class and package commands.
+ (line 903)
+* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 12418)
+* \dag: Text symbols. (line 12181)
+* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 8185)
+* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 4645)
+* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 8188)
+* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 9725)
+* \day: \day & \month & \year.
+ (line 7366)
+* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 1594)
+* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 1600)
+* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 1607)
+* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 1573)
+* \dbltopnumber: \twocolumn. (line 1612)
+* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 12184)
+* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 8192)
+* \ddot: Math accents. (line 9233)
+* \ddots: Dots. (line 9061)
+* \DeclareGraphicsExtensions: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
+ (line 11508)
+* \DeclareGraphicsRule: \DeclareGraphicsRule.
+ (line 11548)
+* \DeclareOption: Class and package commands.
+ (line 909)
+* \DeclareOption*: Class and package commands.
+ (line 909)
+* \DeclareRobustCommand: Class and package commands.
+ (line 939)
+* \DeclareRobustCommand*: Class and package commands.
+ (line 939)
+* \deg: Math functions. (line 9134)
+* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 8195)
+* \delta: Math symbols. (line 8198)
+* \det: Math functions. (line 9137)
+* \dh (d): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12463)
+* \DH (D): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12463)
+* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 8201)
+* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 8205)
+* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 8209)
+* \dim: Math functions. (line 9140)
+* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 7941)
+* \div: Math symbols. (line 8212)
+* \dj: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12469)
+* \DJ: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12469)
+* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 630)
+* \dot: Math accents. (line 9236)
+* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 8215)
+* \dotfill: \hrulefill & \dotfill.
+ (line 10359)
+* \dots: Text symbols. (line 12201)
+* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 5076)
+* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 8219)
+* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 8223)
+* \ell: Math symbols. (line 8227)
+* \emph: Font styles. (line 1253)
+* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 8230)
+* \encl: \encl. (line 13628)
+* \end: Environments. (line 2802)
+* \endinput: \endinput. (line 12615)
+* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6061)
+* \enspace: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
+ (line 9932)
+* \enumi: enumerate. (line 3213)
+* \enumii: enumerate. (line 3213)
+* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 3213)
+* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 3213)
+* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 8234)
+* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 8240)
+* \eta: Math symbols. (line 8243)
+* \evensidemargin: Document class options.
+ (line 742)
+* \evensidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1734)
+* \evensidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1735)
+* \ExecuteOptions: Class and package commands.
+ (line 1015)
+* \exists: Math symbols. (line 8246)
+* \exp: Math functions. (line 9143)
+* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 5016)
+* \fbox: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10794)
+* \fboxrule: \framebox (picture).
+ (line 4622)
+* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10827)
+* \fboxrule <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10826)
+* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture).
+ (line 4622)
+* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10832)
+* \fboxsep <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10831)
+* \fill: \hfill. (line 10019)
+* \flat: Math symbols. (line 8249)
+* \floatpagefraction: Floats. (line 1898)
+* \floatpagefraction <1>: Floats. (line 1899)
+* \floatsep: Floats. (line 1914)
+* \floatsep <1>: Floats. (line 1915)
+* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 1641)
+* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: \footnote. (line 6164)
+* \fnsymbol{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 7214)
+* \fontencoding: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1380)
+* \fontfamily: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1390)
+* \fontseries: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1417)
+* \fontshape: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1457)
+* \fontsize: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1470)
+* \footnote: \footnote. (line 6146)
+* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 6212)
+* \footnoterule: \footnote. (line 6174)
+* \footnotesep: \footnote. (line 6186)
+* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 1345)
+* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 6268)
+* \footskip: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1693)
+* \footskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1694)
+* \forall: Math symbols. (line 8252)
+* \frac: \frac. (line 9522)
+* \frame: \frame. (line 4633)
+* \framebox: \framebox (picture).
+ (line 4597)
+* \framebox <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10794)
+* \frenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 10173)
+* \frontmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 2424)
+* \frown: Math symbols. (line 8255)
+* \fussy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 5866)
+* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 8258)
+* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 8261)
+* \gcd: Math functions. (line 9146)
+* \ge: Math symbols. (line 8264)
+* \geq: Math symbols. (line 8268)
+* \gets: Math symbols. (line 8272)
+* \gg: Math symbols. (line 8275)
+* \gls: \gls. (line 13464)
+* \graphicspath: \graphicspath. (line 11446)
+* \graphpaper: \graphpaper. (line 4343)
+* \grave: Math accents. (line 9239)
+* \guillemotleft (<<): Text symbols. (line 12193)
+* \guillemotright (>>): Text symbols. (line 12194)
+* \guilsinglleft (<): Text symbols. (line 12195)
+* \guilsinglright (>): Text symbols. (line 12196)
+* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 12422)
+* \hat: Math accents. (line 9242)
+* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 8279)
+* \headheight: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1681)
+* \headheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1682)
+* \headsep: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1686)
+* \headsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1687)
+* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 8282)
+* \hfill: \hfill. (line 10007)
+* \hline: \hline. (line 5222)
+* \hom: Math functions. (line 9149)
+* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 8285)
+* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8288)
+* \hrulefill: \hrulefill & \dotfill.
+ (line 10359)
+* \hsize: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1786)
+* \hsize <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1786)
+* \hspace: \hspace. (line 9960)
+* \hss: \hss. (line 10040)
+* \huge: Font sizes. (line 1345)
+* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 1345)
+* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 5907)
+* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 12372)
+* \iff: Math symbols. (line 8291)
+* \IfFileExists: Class and package commands.
+ (line 971)
+* \ignorespaces: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
+ (line 7080)
+* \ignorespacesafterend: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
+ (line 7080)
+* \ij (ij): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12475)
+* \IJ (IJ): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12475)
+* \Im: Math symbols. (line 8295)
+* \imath: Math symbols. (line 8298)
+* \in: Math symbols. (line 8302)
+* \include: \include & \includeonly.
+ (line 12646)
+* \includegraphics: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
+* \includeonly: \include & \includeonly.
+ (line 12646)
+* \indent: \indent & \noindent.
+ (line 7761)
+* \index: Indexes. (line 13035)
+* \index <1>: \index. (line 13071)
+* \indexentry: \index. (line 13171)
+* \indexspace: makeindex. (line 13238)
+* \inf: Math functions. (line 9152)
+* \infty: Math symbols. (line 8307)
+* \input: \input. (line 12763)
+* \InputIfFileExists: Class and package commands.
+ (line 971)
+* \int: Math symbols. (line 8310)
+* \intextsep: Floats. (line 1918)
+* \intextsep <1>: Floats. (line 1919)
+* \iota: Math symbols. (line 8313)
+* \it: Font styles. (line 1274)
+* \item: description. (line 3059)
+* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 3195)
+* \item <2>: itemize. (line 3528)
+* \item <3>: itemize. (line 3550)
+* \itemindent: list. (line 3693)
+* \itemsep: list. (line 3697)
+* \itshape: Font styles. (line 1227)
+* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 12372)
+* \jmath: Math symbols. (line 8320)
+* \Join: Math symbols. (line 8316)
+* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 12426)
+* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 8324)
+* \ker: Math functions. (line 9155)
+* \kill: tabbing. (line 4806)
+* \l (/l): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12479)
+* \L (/L): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12479)
+* \label: \label. (line 2691)
+* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 3222)
+* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 3222)
+* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 3222)
+* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 3222)
+* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 3557)
+* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 3557)
+* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 3557)
+* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 3557)
+* \labelsep: list. (line 3709)
+* \labelwidth: list. (line 3714)
+* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 8327)
+* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 8330)
+* \land: Math symbols. (line 8333)
+* \langle: Math symbols. (line 8338)
+* \large: Font sizes. (line 1345)
+* \Large: Font sizes. (line 1345)
+* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 1345)
+* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 12187)
+* \LaTeXe: Text symbols. (line 12190)
+* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 8343)
+* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 8347)
+* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 8351)
+* \ldots: Dots. (line 9065)
+* \ldots <1>: Text symbols. (line 12200)
+* \le: Math symbols. (line 8355)
+* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 8359)
+* \left: \left & \right. (line 9534)
+* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 8366)
+* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 8371)
+* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 3279)
+* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 8375)
+* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 8378)
+* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 3576)
+* \leftmargin <1>: list. (line 3734)
+* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 3576)
+* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 3576)
+* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 3576)
+* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 3576)
+* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 3576)
+* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 3576)
+* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8381)
+* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8386)
+* \leq: Math symbols. (line 8391)
+* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 8395)
+* \lg: Math functions. (line 9158)
+* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 8398)
+* \lim: Math functions. (line 9161)
+* \liminf: Math functions. (line 9164)
+* \limsup: Math functions. (line 9167)
+* \line: \line. (line 4367)
+* \linebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+ (line 5925)
+* \linespread: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1494)
+* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 4411)
+* \linewidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1700)
+* \linewidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1701)
+* \listoffigures: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12801)
+* \listoftables: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12801)
+* \listparindent: list. (line 3751)
+* \ll: Math symbols. (line 8406)
+* \ln: Math functions. (line 9170)
+* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 8410)
+* \LoadClass: Class and package commands.
+ (line 991)
+* \LoadClassWithOptions: Class and package commands.
+ (line 991)
+* \location: \location. (line 13643)
+* \log: Math functions. (line 9173)
+* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 8413)
+* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8418)
+* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 8422)
+* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8427)
+* \lor: Math symbols. (line 8432)
+* \lq: Text symbols. (line 12206)
+* \mainmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 2424)
+* \makebox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10705)
+* \makebox (for picture): \makebox (picture).
+ (line 4559)
+* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 13357)
+* \makeglossary <1>: Glossaries. (line 13394)
+* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 13035)
+* \makelabel: list. (line 3670)
+* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 13653)
+* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 9681)
+* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 8435)
+* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 7837)
+* \marginparpush: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1707)
+* \marginparpush <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1710)
+* \marginparpush <2>: Marginal notes. (line 7866)
+* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 7870)
+* \marginparwidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1709)
+* \marginparwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1710)
+* \marginparwidth <2>: Marginal notes. (line 7874)
+* \marginsep: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1708)
+* \marginsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1710)
+* \markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}: \pagestyle. (line 9879)
+* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 9888)
+* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 1304)
+* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 1320)
+* \mathdollar: Math symbols. (line 8944)
+* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 1317)
+* \mathparagraph: Math symbols. (line 8947)
+* \mathring: Math accents. (line 9245)
+* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 1301)
+* \mathsection: Math symbols. (line 8950)
+* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 1307)
+* \mathsterling: Math symbols. (line 8953)
+* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 1310)
+* \mathunderscore: Math symbols. (line 8956)
+* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 1322)
+* \max: Math functions. (line 9176)
+* \mbox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10705)
+* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 1230)
+* \medskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 10435)
+* \medskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 10436)
+* \medspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9333)
+* \mho: Math symbols. (line 8439)
+* \mid: Math symbols. (line 8444)
+* \min: Math functions. (line 9179)
+* \models: Math symbols. (line 8454)
+* \month: \day & \month & \year.
+ (line 7366)
+* \mp: Math symbols. (line 8459)
+* \mu: Math symbols. (line 8462)
+* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 5091)
+* \multiput: \multiput. (line 4295)
+* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 8465)
+* \name: \name. (line 13710)
+* \natural: Math symbols. (line 8468)
+* \ne: Math symbols. (line 8471)
+* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 8474)
+* \NeedsTeXFormat: Class and package commands.
+ (line 1025)
+* \neg: Math symbols. (line 8477)
+* \negthinspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9351)
+* \negthinspace <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 10300)
+* \neq: Math symbols. (line 8481)
+* \newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6394)
+* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 6659)
+* \newenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6750)
+* \newfont: \newfont. (line 6996)
+* \newglossaryentry: \newglossaryentry. (line 13405)
+* \newlength: \newlength. (line 6700)
+* \newline: \newline. (line 5784)
+* \NEWLINE: \(SPACE). (line 10203)
+* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6028)
+* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 6722)
+* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 6884)
+* \newtie: Accents. (line 12436)
+* \ng: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12483)
+* \NG: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12483)
+* \ni: Math symbols. (line 8484)
+* \nocite: \nocite. (line 5401)
+* \nocorr: Font styles. (line 1215)
+* \nocorrlist: Font styles. (line 1215)
+* \nofiles: \nofiles. (line 13010)
+* \noindent: \indent & \noindent.
+ (line 7761)
+* \nolinebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+ (line 5925)
+* \nonfrenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 10173)
+* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 3274)
+* \nopagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6086)
+* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 1251)
+* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 7853)
+* \normalsfcodes: \normalsfcodes. (line 10193)
+* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 1345)
+* \not: Math symbols. (line 8489)
+* \notin: Math symbols. (line 8497)
+* \nu: Math symbols. (line 8501)
+* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 8504)
+* \o (/o): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12487)
+* \O (/O): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12487)
+* \obeycr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
+ (line 5744)
+* \oddsidemargin: Document class options.
+ (line 742)
+* \oddsidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1733)
+* \oddsidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1735)
+* \odot: Math symbols. (line 8507)
+* \oe (oe): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12491)
+* \OE (OE): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12491)
+* \oint: Math symbols. (line 8512)
+* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 1326)
+* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 8516)
+* \omega: Math symbols. (line 8519)
+* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 8522)
+* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 1522)
+* \opening: \opening. (line 13720)
+* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 8525)
+* \OptionNotUsed: Class and package commands.
+ (line 1043)
+* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 8529)
+* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 8532)
+* \oval: \oval. (line 4458)
+* \overbrace{MATH}: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 9300)
+* \overline{TEXT}: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 9281)
+* \owns: Math symbols. (line 8537)
+* \P: Text symbols. (line 12209)
+* \PackageError: Class and package commands.
+ (line 884)
+* \PackageInfo: Class and package commands.
+ (line 884)
+* \PackageInfoNoLine: Class and package commands.
+ (line 884)
+* \PackageWarning: Class and package commands.
+ (line 884)
+* \PackageWarningNoLine: Class and package commands.
+ (line 884)
+* \pagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6086)
+* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 9752)
+* \pageref: \pageref. (line 2749)
+* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 9810)
+* \paperheight: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1746)
+* \paperheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1747)
+* \paperwidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1752)
+* \paperwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1753)
+* \par: \par. (line 7708)
+* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+* \paragraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2324)
+* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 8542)
+* \parbox: \parbox. (line 10861)
+* \parindent: minipage. (line 4089)
+* \parindent <1>: \indent & \noindent.
+ (line 7761)
+* \parindent <2>: \parindent & \parskip.
+ (line 7810)
+* \parsep: list. (line 3757)
+* \parskip: \parindent & \parskip.
+ (line 7810)
+* \parskip example: itemize. (line 3595)
+* \part: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+* \part <1>: \part. (line 2035)
+* \partial: Math symbols. (line 8545)
+* \partopsep: list. (line 3766)
+* \PassOptionsToClass: Class and package commands.
+ (line 1049)
+* \PassOptionsToPackage: Class and package commands.
+ (line 1049)
+* \pdfpageheight: Document class options.
+ (line 698)
+* \pdfpagewidth: Document class options.
+ (line 698)
+* \perp: Math symbols. (line 8548)
+* \phi: Math symbols. (line 8553)
+* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 8557)
+* \pi: Math symbols. (line 8560)
+* \pm: Math symbols. (line 8564)
+* \pmod: Math functions. (line 9182)
+* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 4812)
+* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 4813)
+* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 12213)
+* \Pr: Math functions. (line 9185)
+* \prec: Math symbols. (line 8567)
+* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 8570)
+* \prime: Math symbols. (line 8575)
+* \printglossaries: Glossaries. (line 13357)
+* \printglossaries <1>: Glossaries. (line 13394)
+* \printindex: \printindex. (line 13342)
+* \printindex <1>: \printindex. (line 13346)
+* \ProcessOptions: Class and package commands.
+ (line 1086)
+* \ProcessOptions*: Class and package commands.
+ (line 1086)
+* \prod: Math symbols. (line 8584)
+* \propto: Math symbols. (line 8587)
+* \protect: \protect. (line 7028)
+* \providecommand: \providecommand. (line 6519)
+* \ProvidesClass: Class and package commands.
+ (line 1124)
+* \ProvidesFile: Class and package commands.
+ (line 1157)
+* \ProvidesPackage: Class and package commands.
+ (line 1124)
+* \ps: \ps. (line 13732)
+* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 8590)
+* \psi: Math symbols. (line 8593)
+* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 4815)
+* \put: \put. (line 4277)
+* \qbezier: \qbezier. (line 4318)
+* \qquad: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9362)
+* \qquad <1>: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
+ (line 9932)
+* \quad: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9356)
+* \quad <1>: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
+ (line 9932)
+* \quotedblbase (,,): Text symbols. (line 12217)
+* \quotesinglbase (,): Text symbols. (line 12218)
+* \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 12430)
+* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 1662)
+* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 3503)
+* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 3452)
+* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 10913)
+* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 8596)
+* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 8601)
+* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 8605)
+* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 8609)
+* \Re: Math symbols. (line 8612)
+* \ref: \ref. (line 2773)
+* \reflectbox: \scalebox. (line 12017)
+* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 7332)
+* \renewenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6750)
+* \RequirePackage: Class and package commands.
+ (line 1166)
+* \RequirePackageWithOptions: Class and package commands.
+ (line 1166)
+* \resizebox: \resizebox. (line 12048)
+* \restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
+ (line 5744)
+* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 8617)
+* \revemptyset: Math symbols. (line 8622)
+* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 7853)
+* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 8627)
+* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 8631)
+* \rho: Math symbols. (line 8638)
+* \right: \left & \right. (line 9534)
+* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8642)
+* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8647)
+* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 8651)
+* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 8654)
+* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 8657)
+* \rightmargin: list. (line 3781)
+* \rm: Font styles. (line 1277)
+* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 1224)
+* \roman{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 7204)
+* \Roman{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 7209)
+* \rotatebox: \rotatebox. (line 11949)
+* \rq: Text symbols. (line 12221)
+* \rule: \rule. (line 12506)
+* \S: Text symbols. (line 12224)
+* \savebox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 10959)
+* \sbox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 10959)
+* \sc: Font styles. (line 1280)
+* \scalebox: \scalebox. (line 12017)
+* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 1345)
+* \scshape: Font styles. (line 1245)
+* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 8660)
+* \sec: Math functions. (line 9188)
+* \section: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+* \section <1>: \section. (line 2182)
+* \seename: \index. (line 13121)
+* \selectfont: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1500)
+* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 7298)
+* \setlength: \setlength. (line 7535)
+* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 8663)
+* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 7592)
+* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 7616)
+* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 7640)
+* \sf: Font styles. (line 1283)
+* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 1242)
+* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 8669)
+* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 4494)
+* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 8672)
+* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 8675)
+* \signature: \signature. (line 13749)
+* \sim: Math symbols. (line 8679)
+* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 8682)
+* \sin: Math functions. (line 9191)
+* \sinh: Math functions. (line 9194)
+* \sl: Font styles. (line 1286)
+* \sloppy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 5866)
+* \slshape: Font styles. (line 1239)
+* \small: Font sizes. (line 1345)
+* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 8685)
+* \smallskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 10440)
+* \smallskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
+ (line 10441)
+* \smile: Math symbols. (line 8689)
+* \SPACE: \(SPACE). (line 10203)
+* \spacefactor: \spacefactor. (line 10066)
+* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 8692)
+* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 8695)
+* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 8699)
+* \sqrt: \sqrt. (line 9569)
+* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 8703)
+* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 8708)
+* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 8713)
+* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 8718)
+* \ss (ss): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12495)
+* \SS (SS): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12495)
+* \stackrel: \stackrel. (line 9585)
+* \star: Math symbols. (line 8723)
+* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 7350)
+* \stop: Recovering from errors.
+ (line 14060)
+* \strut: \strut. (line 10484)
+* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+* \subparagraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2324)
+* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+* \subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 2260)
+* \subset: Math symbols. (line 8731)
+* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 8734)
+* \subsubsection: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2324)
+* \succ: Math symbols. (line 8737)
+* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 8741)
+* \sum: Math symbols. (line 8746)
+* \sup: Math functions. (line 9197)
+* \suppressfloats: Floats. (line 1887)
+* \supset: Math symbols. (line 8750)
+* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 8753)
+* \surd: Math symbols. (line 8756)
+* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 8761)
+* \symbol: Symbols by font position.
+ (line 12160)
+* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 12436)
+* \TAB: \(SPACE). (line 10203)
+* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 4820)
+* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 5080)
+* \tableofcontents: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12801)
+* \tan: Math functions. (line 9200)
+* \tanh: Math functions. (line 9203)
+* \tau: Math symbols. (line 8764)
+* \telephone: \telephone. (line 13779)
+* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 12228)
+* \textascendercompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 12266)
+* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 12231)
+* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 12234)
+* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 12237)
+* \textbackslash: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12097)
+* \textbackslash <1>: Text symbols. (line 12240)
+* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 12243)
+* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 12246)
+* \textbf: Font styles. (line 1233)
+* \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 12249)
+* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 12252)
+* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 12255)
+* \textbullet: Text symbols. (line 12258)
+* \textcapitalcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 12265)
+* \textcircled{LETTER}: Text symbols. (line 12261)
+* \textcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 12264)
+* \textcopyright: Text symbols. (line 12178)
+* \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 12273)
+* \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 12276)
+* \textdollar (or \$): Text symbols. (line 12279)
+* \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 12202)
+* \textemdash (or ---): Text symbols. (line 12282)
+* \textendash (or --): Text symbols. (line 12287)
+* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 12290)
+* \textexclamdown (or !`): Text symbols. (line 12296)
+* \textfloatsep: Floats. (line 1923)
+* \textfloatsep <1>: Floats. (line 1924)
+* \textfraction: Floats. (line 1902)
+* \textfraction <1>: Floats. (line 1903)
+* \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 12299)
+* \textheight: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1758)
+* \textheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1759)
+* \textit: Font styles. (line 1227)
+* \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 12305)
+* \textless: Text symbols. (line 12302)
+* \textmd: Font styles. (line 1230)
+* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 1251)
+* \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 12308)
+* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 12309)
+* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 12210)
+* \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 12312)
+* \textquestiondown (or ?`): Text symbols. (line 12315)
+* \textquotedblleft (or ``): Text symbols. (line 12318)
+* \textquotedblright (or ''): Text symbols. (line 12321)
+* \textquoteleft (or `): Text symbols. (line 12324)
+* \textquoteright (or '): Text symbols. (line 12327)
+* \textquotesingle: Text symbols. (line 12330)
+* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 12333)
+* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 12334)
+* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 12337)
+* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 12340)
+* \textrm: Font styles. (line 1224)
+* \textsc: Font styles. (line 1245)
+* \textsection: Text symbols. (line 12225)
+* \textsf: Font styles. (line 1242)
+* \textsl: Font styles. (line 1239)
+* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 12214)
+* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 12343)
+* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 12346)
+* \texttt: Font styles. (line 1248)
+* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 12349)
+* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 12352)
+* \textup: Font styles. (line 1236)
+* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 12355)
+* \textwidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1766)
+* \textwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1767)
+* \th (th): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12499)
+* \TH (TH): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12499)
+* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 9731)
+* \theta: Math symbols. (line 8767)
+* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 4431)
+* \thickspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9328)
+* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 4423)
+* \thinspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9337)
+* \thinspace <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 10300)
+* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 9894)
+* \tilde: Math accents. (line 9248)
+* \times: Math symbols. (line 8771)
+* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 1345)
+* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 9738)
+* \to: Math symbols. (line 8775)
+* \today: \today. (line 12541)
+* \top: Math symbols. (line 8779)
+* \topfraction: Floats. (line 1907)
+* \topfraction <1>: Floats. (line 1908)
+* \topmargin: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1791)
+* \topsep: list. (line 3786)
+* \topskip: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1798)
+* \topskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1799)
+* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 8784)
+* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 8787)
+* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 8793)
+* \tt: Font styles. (line 1289)
+* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 1248)
+* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 1534)
+* \typein: \typein. (line 13794)
+* \typeout: \typeout. (line 13839)
+* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 12440)
+* \unboldmath: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 9006)
+* \unboldmath <1>: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 9014)
+* \underbar: Accents. (line 12406)
+* \underbrace{MATH}: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 9286)
+* \underline{TEXT}: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 9269)
+* \unitlength: picture. (line 4162)
+* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 8799)
+* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 8806)
+* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 8813)
+* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 8817)
+* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 8821)
+* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 8826)
+* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 8831)
+* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 8836)
+* \upshape: Font styles. (line 1236)
+* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 8843)
+* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 8846)
+* \usebox: \usebox. (line 11065)
+* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 7239)
+* \usefont: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1508)
+* \usepackage: Additional packages.
+ (line 763)
+* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 12444)
+* \value: \value. (line 7265)
+* \vanothing: Math symbols. (line 8854)
+* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 8849)
+* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 8859)
+* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 8863)
+* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 8867)
+* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 8871)
+* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 8875)
+* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 8879)
+* \vdots: Dots. (line 9074)
+* \vec: Math accents. (line 9251)
+* \vector: \vector. (line 4536)
+* \vee: Math symbols. (line 8883)
+* \verb: \verb. (line 5582)
+* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 8888)
+* \vert: Math symbols. (line 8904)
+* \vfill: \vfill. (line 10620)
+* \vline: \vline. (line 5173)
+* \vspace: \vspace. (line 10569)
+* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 8922)
+* \widehat: Math accents. (line 9254)
+* \widetilde: Math accents. (line 9257)
+* \wp: Math symbols. (line 8926)
+* \wr: Math symbols. (line 8929)
+* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 8932)
+* \xi: Math symbols. (line 8935)
+* \year: \day & \month & \year.
+ (line 7366)
+* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 8938)
+* \\ (for center): center. (line 2954)
+* \\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 3262)
+* \\ (for flushright): flushright. (line 3491)
+* \\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack. (line 4520)
+* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 4765)
+* \\ for flushleft: flushleft. (line 3432)
+* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 13537)
+* \\ for tabular: tabular. (line 4943)
+* \\ for verse: verse. (line 5644)
+* \\ for \author: \maketitle. (line 9718)
+* \\ for \title: \maketitle. (line 9739)
+* \\ force line break: \\. (line 5682)
+* \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 3270)
+* \^: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12097)
+* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 12393)
+* \_: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12090)
+* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 12397)
+* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 4792)
+* \{: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12090)
+* \|: Math symbols. (line 8052)
+* \}: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12090)
+* \~: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12097)
+* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 12401)
+* ^: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 7977)
+* _: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 7977)
+* 'see' and 'see also' index entries: \index. (line 13121)
+* {...} for required arguments: LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 529)
+* ~: ~. (line 10244)
+* a4paper option: Document class options.
+ (line 677)
+* a5paper option: Document class options.
+ (line 677)
+* abstract environment: abstract. (line 2819)
+* abstracts: abstract. (line 2819)
+* accents: Accents. (line 12361)
+* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 9217)
+* accessing any character of a font: Symbols by font position.
+ (line 12160)
+* acronyms, list of: Glossaries. (line 13357)
+* acute accent: Accents. (line 12382)
+* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 9222)
+* additional packages, loading: Additional packages.
+ (line 763)
+* ae ligature: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12459)
+* algorithm2e package: tabbing. (line 4845)
+* align environment, from amsmath: eqnarray. (line 3239)
+* aligning equations: eqnarray. (line 3239)
+* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 4705)
+* amsfonts package: Math formulas. (line 7966)
+* amsmath package: array. (line 2914)
+* amsmath package <1>: array. (line 2925)
+* amsmath package <2>: displaymath. (line 3106)
+* amsmath package <3>: equation. (line 3309)
+* amsmath package <4>: theorem. (line 5496)
+* amsmath package <5>: Math formulas. (line 7966)
+* amsmath package <6>: Dots. (line 9077)
+* amsmath package <7>: Math functions. (line 9206)
+* amsmath package <8>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 9467)
+* amsmath package <9>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 9495)
+* amsmath package <10>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 9499)
+* amsmath package, replacing eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 3239)
+* amsthm package: theorem. (line 5496)
+* amsthm package <1>: \rule. (line 12518)
+* appendices: \appendix. (line 2391)
+* appendix: \appendix. (line 2391)
+* appendix package: \appendix. (line 2414)
+* aring: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12455)
+* array (package) package: array. (line 2936)
+* array environment: array. (line 2865)
+* arrays, math: array. (line 2865)
+* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 12306)
+* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 12341)
+* article class: Document classes. (line 635)
+* ascender height: Text symbols. (line 12267)
+* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 12232)
+* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 12235)
+* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 12238)
+* Asymptote package: \line. (line 4397)
+* Asymptote package <1>: \strut. (line 10540)
+* Asymptote package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10772)
+* at clause, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 7009)
+* at-sign: \@. (line 10127)
+* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 9718)
+* auxiliary file: Output files. (line 458)
+* b5paper option: Document class options.
+ (line 677)
+* babel package: \chapter. (line 2154)
+* babel package <1>: thebibliography. (line 5286)
+* babel package <2>: Accents. (line 12361)
+* babel package <3>: \today. (line 12548)
+* babel package <4>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12875)
+* babel package <5>: \index. (line 13121)
+* background, colored: Colored pages. (line 11312)
+* backslash, in text: Text symbols. (line 12241)
+* bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 12247)
+* bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 12244)
+* bar-over accent: Accents. (line 12389)
+* bar-over accent, math: Math accents. (line 9225)
+* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 12404)
+* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 373)
+* beamer template and class: beamer template. (line 14087)
+* beginning of document hook: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3140)
+* bibliography format, open: Document class options.
+ (line 725)
+* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 5416)
+* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 5239)
+* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 5416)
+* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 12250)
+* Big point: Units of length. (line 7499)
+* bigfoot package: Footnotes of footnotes.
+ (line 6373)
+* black boxes, omitting: Document class options.
+ (line 711)
+* blackboard bold: Blackboard bold. (line 8962)
+* bm package: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 9032)
+* bold font: Font styles. (line 1269)
+* bold math: Font styles. (line 1322)
+* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 3064)
+* boldface mathematics: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 9006)
+* book class: Document classes. (line 635)
+* book, back matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 2424)
+* book, end matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 2424)
+* book, front matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 2424)
+* book, main matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 2424)
+* bottomnumber: Floats. (line 1930)
+* bottomnumber <1>: Floats. (line 1931)
+* box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10705)
+* box, allocating new: \newsavebox. (line 6722)
+* box, colored: Colored boxes. (line 11275)
+* box, save: \sbox & \savebox. (line 10959)
+* box, use saved box: \usebox. (line 11065)
+* boxes: Boxes. (line 10696)
+* bp: Units of length. (line 7499)
+* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 12253)
+* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 12256)
+* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 5665)
+* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 5956)
+* breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*. (line 9506)
+* breve accent: Accents. (line 12440)
+* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 9228)
+* bug reporting: About this document.
+ (line 344)
+* bullet lists: itemize. (line 3528)
+* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 8147)
+* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 12259)
+* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 3528)
+* calligraphic fonts: Calligraphic. (line 8988)
+* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 1272)
+* cap height: Text symbols. (line 12267)
+* caron accent: Accents. (line 12444)
+* catcode: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+ (line 6560)
+* category code, character: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+ (line 6560)
+* cc: Units of length. (line 7512)
+* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 13599)
+* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 12414)
+* center environment: center. (line 2944)
+* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 12238)
+* centered equations: Document class options.
+ (line 715)
+* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 12313)
+* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 2992)
+* centering text, environment for: center. (line 2944)
+* Centimeter: Units of length. (line 7503)
+* chapter: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+* chapter <1>: \chapter. (line 2089)
+* character category code: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+ (line 6560)
+* character, invisible: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 9429)
+* characters, accented: Accents. (line 12361)
+* characters, case of: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 12115)
+* characters, non-English: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12449)
+* characters, reserved: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12083)
+* characters, special: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12083)
+* check accent: Accents. (line 12444)
+* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 9231)
+* Cicero: Units of length. (line 7512)
+* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 12250)
+* circled letter, in text: Text symbols. (line 12262)
+* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 12393)
+* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 9243)
+* circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 12232)
+* citation key: \bibitem. (line 5301)
+* class and package commands: Class and package commands.
+ (line 849)
+* class and package difference: Class and package construction.
+ (line 788)
+* class and package structure: Class and package structure.
+ (line 802)
+* class file example: Class and package structure.
+ (line 835)
+* class file layout: Class and package structure.
+ (line 802)
+* class options: Document class options.
+ (line 664)
+* class options <1>: Class and package structure.
+ (line 802)
+* class options <2>: Class and package commands.
+ (line 909)
+* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 630)
+* cleveref package: Cross references. (line 2683)
+* cleveref package <1>: \ref. (line 2796)
+* cleveref package <2>: \footnotemark. (line 6254)
+* clock option to slides class: Document class options.
+ (line 757)
+* closing letters: \closing. (line 13615)
+* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 12222)
+* cm: Units of length. (line 7503)
+* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 5543)
+* colon character: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 9486)
+* color: Color. (line 11077)
+* color <1>: Define colors. (line 11182)
+* color <2>: Colored text. (line 11204)
+* color <3>: Colored boxes. (line 11275)
+* color <4>: Colored pages. (line 11312)
+* color models: Color models. (line 11130)
+* color package commands: Commands for color.
+ (line 11177)
+* color package options: Color package options.
+ (line 11092)
+* color, define: Define colors. (line 11182)
+* colored boxes: Colored boxes. (line 11275)
+* colored page: Colored pages. (line 11312)
+* colored text: Colored text. (line 11204)
+* command line: Command line. (line 13872)
+* command syntax: LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 529)
+* commands, class and package: Class and package commands.
+ (line 849)
+* commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6394)
+* commands, defining new ones <1>: \providecommand. (line 6519)
+* commands, document class: Class and package construction.
+ (line 779)
+* commands, graphics package: Commands for graphics.
+ (line 11621)
+* commands, ignore spaces: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
+ (line 7080)
+* commands, redefining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6394)
+* commands, star-variants: \@ifstar. (line 6598)
+* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 12267)
+* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 5543)
+* configuration, graphics package: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 11434)
+* contents file: Output files. (line 468)
+* copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 12179)
+* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 7155)
+* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 6659)
+* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 7265)
+* counters, printing: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 7183)
+* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 7298)
+* cprotect package: verbatim. (line 5563)
+* cprotect package <1>: \verb. (line 5621)
+* creating pictures: picture. (line 4143)
+* creating tables: table. (line 4854)
+* credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 9732)
+* cross references: Cross references. (line 2651)
+* cross references, resolving: Output files. (line 458)
+* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 2749)
+* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 2773)
+* CTAN: CTAN. (line 604)
+* currency, dollar: Text symbols. (line 12280)
+* currency, euro: Text symbols. (line 12291)
+* dagger, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 12277)
+* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 12182)
+* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 12274)
+* DANTE e.V.: CTAN. (line 618)
+* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 9726)
+* date, today's: \today. (line 12541)
+* datetime package: \today. (line 12562)
+* dbltopnumber: Floats. (line 1934)
+* dbltopnumber <1>: Floats. (line 1935)
+* dcolumn package: array. (line 2936)
+* dd: Units of length. (line 7509)
+* define color: Define colors. (line 11182)
+* defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6394)
+* defining a new command <1>: \providecommand. (line 6519)
+* defining new environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6750)
+* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 6996)
+* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 6884)
+* definitions: Definitions. (line 6389)
+* delimiters, paired: \left & \right. (line 9534)
+* delim_0: makeindex. (line 13290)
+* delim_1: makeindex. (line 13294)
+* delim_2: makeindex. (line 13298)
+* delim_n: makeindex. (line 13302)
+* delim_r: makeindex. (line 13306)
+* description: \newglossaryentry. (line 13445)
+* description environment: description. (line 3034)
+* description lists, creating: description. (line 3034)
+* design size, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 7009)
+* Didot point: Units of length. (line 7509)
+* dieresis accent: Accents. (line 12378)
+* difference between class and package: Class and package construction.
+ (line 788)
+* discretionary breaks, multiplication: \*. (line 9506)
+* discretionary hyphenation: \discretionary. (line 5843)
+* display math mode: Modes. (line 9618)
+* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation & quote.
+ (line 4675)
+* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quotation & quote.
+ (line 4675)
+* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 3090)
+* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 7886)
+* document class commands: Class and package construction.
+ (line 779)
+* document class options: Document class options.
+ (line 664)
+* document class, defined: Starting and ending.
+ (line 410)
+* document classes: Document classes. (line 630)
+* document environment: document. (line 3134)
+* document templates: Document templates.
+ (line 14080)
+* dollar sign: Text symbols. (line 12280)
+* dot accent: Accents. (line 12385)
+* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 9237)
+* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 12385)
+* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 12418)
+* dotless i: Accents. (line 12372)
+* dotless i, math: Math symbols. (line 8299)
+* dotless j: Accents. (line 12372)
+* dotless j, math: Math symbols. (line 8321)
+* dots: Dots. (line 9046)
+* double angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 12197)
+* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 12185)
+* double dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 12277)
+* double dot accent, math: Math accents. (line 9234)
+* double guillemets: Text symbols. (line 12197)
+* double left quote: Text symbols. (line 12319)
+* double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 12219)
+* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 12335)
+* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 12322)
+* double spacing: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1487)
+* double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 12247)
+* doublestruck: Blackboard bold. (line 8962)
+* draft option: Document class options.
+ (line 707)
+* dvipdfmx command: Output files. (line 435)
+* dvips command: Output files. (line 435)
+* dvitype command: Output files. (line 435)
+* e-dash: Text symbols. (line 12288)
+* e-TeX: TeX engines. (line 484)
+* ellipses: Dots. (line 9046)
+* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 12203)
+* em: Units of length. (line 7517)
+* em <1>: Units of length. (line 7517)
+* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 12283)
+* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 12344)
+* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 12350)
+* emphasis: Font styles. (line 1253)
+* enclosure list: \encl. (line 13628)
+* end of document hook: \AtEndDocument. (line 3156)
+* ending and starting: Starting and ending.
+ (line 399)
+* engines, TeX: TeX engines. (line 477)
+* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 6061)
+* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 3172)
+* enumitem package: list. (line 3880)
+* environment: Starting and ending.
+ (line 418)
+* environment, abstract: abstract. (line 2819)
+* environment, array: array. (line 2865)
+* environment, center: center. (line 2944)
+* environment, description: description. (line 3034)
+* environment, displaymath: displaymath. (line 3090)
+* environment, displaymath <1>: Math formulas. (line 7886)
+* environment, document: document. (line 3134)
+* environment, enumerate: enumerate. (line 3172)
+* environment, eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 3239)
+* environment, equation: equation. (line 3295)
+* environment, equation <1>: Math formulas. (line 7886)
+* environment, figure: figure. (line 3315)
+* environment, filecontents: filecontents. (line 3373)
+* environment, filecontents*: filecontents. (line 3373)
+* environment, flushleft: flushleft. (line 3424)
+* environment, flushright: flushright. (line 3485)
+* environment, itemize: itemize. (line 3528)
+* environment, letter: letter. (line 3611)
+* environment, list: list. (line 3616)
+* environment, math: math. (line 3980)
+* environment, math <1>: Math formulas. (line 7886)
+* environment, minipage: minipage. (line 3992)
+* environment, picture: picture. (line 4143)
+* environment, quotation: quotation & quote. (line 4675)
+* environment, quote: quotation & quote. (line 4675)
+* environment, tabbing: tabbing. (line 4705)
+* environment, table: table. (line 4854)
+* environment, tabular: tabular. (line 4914)
+* environment, thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 5239)
+* environment, theorem: theorem. (line 5474)
+* environment, theorem-like: \newtheorem. (line 6884)
+* environment, titlepage: titlepage. (line 5504)
+* environment, verbatim: verbatim. (line 5543)
+* environment, verse: verse. (line 5629)
+* environments: Environments. (line 2802)
+* environments, defining: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6750)
+* envlab package: \makelabels. (line 13702)
+* EPS files: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 11434)
+* EPS files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
+* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 3239)
+* equation environment: equation. (line 3295)
+* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 7886)
+* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 2773)
+* equation numbers, left vs. right: Document class options.
+ (line 721)
+* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 3274)
+* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 3239)
+* equations, environment for: equation. (line 3295)
+* equations, flush left vs. centered: Document class options.
+ (line 715)
+* es-zet German letter: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12495)
+* etex command: TeX engines. (line 484)
+* eth, Icelandic letter: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12463)
+* etoolbox package: Class and package commands.
+ (line 953)
+* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 12291)
+* eurosym package: Text symbols. (line 12291)
+* ex: Units of length. (line 7517)
+* ex <1>: Units of length. (line 7517)
+* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 12297)
+* executivepaper option: Document class options.
+ (line 677)
+* exponent: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 7977)
+* extended Latin: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12449)
+* external files, writing: filecontents. (line 3373)
+* families, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1390)
+* fancyhdr package: Page styles. (line 9675)
+* fancyhdr package <1>: \pagestyle. (line 9817)
+* fancyvrb package: tabbing. (line 4845)
+* fancyvrb package <1>: verbatim. (line 5574)
+* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 12310)
+* figure environment: figure. (line 3315)
+* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 2773)
+* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 4093)
+* figures, inserting: figure. (line 3315)
+* file, root: Splitting the input.
+ (line 12576)
+* filecontents environment: filecontents. (line 3373)
+* filecontents* environment: filecontents. (line 3373)
+* final option: Document class options.
+ (line 707)
+* first-latex-doc document: About this document.
+ (line 356)
+* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 1290)
+* flafter package: Floats. (line 1882)
+* fleqn option: Document class options.
+ (line 707)
+* float package: Floats. (line 1852)
+* float page: Floats. (line 1858)
+* flush left equations: Document class options.
+ (line 715)
+* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+ (line 5987)
+* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 3424)
+* flushright environment: flushright. (line 3485)
+* font catalogue: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1390)
+* font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1375)
+* font size: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1470)
+* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 1340)
+* font styles: Font styles. (line 1200)
+* font symbols, by number: Symbols by font position.
+ (line 12160)
+* fonts: Fonts. (line 1194)
+* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 6996)
+* fonts, script: Calligraphic. (line 8988)
+* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 9810)
+* footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1673)
+* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 2773)
+* footnote parameters: \footnote. (line 6174)
+* footnote, in a table: Footnotes in a table.
+ (line 6303)
+* footnote, in section headings: Footnotes in section headings.
+ (line 6284)
+* footnote, of a footnote: Footnotes of footnotes.
+ (line 6373)
+* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 4093)
+* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 6127)
+* Footnotes, in a minipage: \footnote. (line 6202)
+* footnotes, symbols instead of numbers: \footnote. (line 6164)
+* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 3295)
+* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 7886)
+* forward reference: Cross references. (line 2672)
+* forward references, resolving: Output files. (line 458)
+* fraction: \frac. (line 9522)
+* fragile commands: \protect. (line 7028)
+* frame rule width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10827)
+* frame, line width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10827)
+* frame, separation from contents: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10832)
+* French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 12197)
+* functions, math: Math functions. (line 9101)
+* geometry package: Document class options.
+ (line 698)
+* geometry package <1>: Document class options.
+ (line 702)
+* global options: Document class options.
+ (line 664)
+* global options <1>: Additional packages.
+ (line 772)
+* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 13357)
+* glossary: Glossaries. (line 13357)
+* glossary, entries: \newglossaryentry. (line 13405)
+* glossary, entry reference: \gls. (line 13464)
+* glue register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 6700)
+* graphics: Graphics. (line 11333)
+* graphics <1>: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 11434)
+* graphics <2>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
+* graphics package: Graphics. (line 11333)
+* graphics package <1>: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 11434)
+* graphics package <2>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
+* graphics package commands: Commands for graphics.
+ (line 11621)
+* graphics package options: Graphics package options.
+ (line 11370)
+* graphics packages: \line. (line 4397)
+* graphics, resizing: \scalebox. (line 12017)
+* graphics, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 12048)
+* graphics, scaling: \scalebox. (line 12017)
+* graphics, scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 12048)
+* grave accent: Accents. (line 12397)
+* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 9240)
+* greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 12300)
+* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 8040)
+* group, and environments: Environments. (line 2814)
+* group_skip: makeindex. (line 13237)
+* ha'c<ek accent, math: Math accents. (line 9231)
+* hacek accent: Accents. (line 12444)
+* Halmos symbol: \rule. (line 12513)
+* hat accent: Accents. (line 12393)
+* hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 9243)
+* header style: \pagestyle. (line 9810)
+* header, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1673)
+* hello, world: Starting and ending.
+ (line 399)
+* here, putting floats: Floats. (line 1852)
+* home page for manual: About this document.
+ (line 321)
+* horizontal space: \hss. (line 10040)
+* horizontal space, stretchable: \hss. (line 10040)
+* horizontal spacing: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 9429)
+* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 12422)
+* hyperref package: \footnotemark. (line 6254)
+* hyperref package <1>: \footnotemark. (line 6263)
+* hyperref package <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 9791)
+* hyperref package <3>: Command line input.
+ (line 14001)
+* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 5907)
+* hyphenation, discretionary: \discretionary. (line 5843)
+* hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 5808)
+* hyphenation, preventing: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10705)
+* Icelandic eth: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12463)
+* Icelandic thorn: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12499)
+* idx file: \index. (line 13171)
+* ij letter, Dutch: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12475)
+* implementations of TeX: TeX engines. (line 477)
+* importing graphics: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
+* in: Units of length. (line 7496)
+* in-line formulas: math. (line 3980)
+* inch: Units of length. (line 7496)
+* including graphics: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
+* indent, forcing: \indent & \noindent.
+ (line 7761)
+* indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage. (line 4089)
+* indentfirst package: \part. (line 2079)
+* indentfirst package <1>: \chapter. (line 2141)
+* indentfirst package <2>: \section. (line 2236)
+* indentfirst package <3>: \subsection. (line 2302)
+* indentfirst package <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2379)
+* indentfirst package <5>: \indent & \noindent.
+ (line 7803)
+* indent_length: makeindex. (line 13318)
+* indent_space: makeindex. (line 13314)
+* index entries, 'see' and 'see also': \index. (line 13121)
+* index entry: \index. (line 13071)
+* index package: \index. (line 13166)
+* index, page range: \index. (line 13105)
+* index, printing: \printindex. (line 13342)
+* index, processing: makeindex. (line 13186)
+* index, style file: makeindex. (line 13198)
+* indexes: Indexes. (line 13035)
+* infinite horizontal stretch: \hfill. (line 10007)
+* infinite vertical stretch: \vfill. (line 10620)
+* inner paragraph mode: Modes. (line 9636)
+* input file: Splitting the input.
+ (line 12572)
+* input, on command line: Command line input.
+ (line 13997)
+* input/output, to terminal: Terminal input/output.
+ (line 13791)
+* inserting figures: figure. (line 3315)
+* insertions of special characters: Special insertions.
+ (line 12077)
+* internal vertical mode: Modes. (line 9627)
+* invisible character: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 9429)
+* italic correction: \/. (line 10324)
+* italic font: Font styles. (line 1275)
+* itemize environment: itemize. (line 3528)
+* item_0: makeindex. (line 13261)
+* item_01: makeindex. (line 13270)
+* item_1: makeindex. (line 13264)
+* item_12: makeindex. (line 13280)
+* item_2: makeindex. (line 13267)
+* item_x1: makeindex. (line 13274)
+* item_x2: makeindex. (line 13284)
+* JPEG files: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 11434)
+* JPEG files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
+* JPG files: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 11434)
+* JPG files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
+* justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 3503)
+* justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 3452)
+* Knuth, Donald E.: Overview. (line 373)
+* label: Cross references. (line 2651)
+* labelled lists, creating: description. (line 3034)
+* Lamport TeX: Overview. (line 391)
+* Lamport, Leslie: Overview. (line 373)
+* landscape option: Document class options.
+ (line 707)
+* landscape orientation: Document class options.
+ (line 718)
+* latex command: Output files. (line 435)
+* LaTeX logo: Text symbols. (line 12188)
+* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 373)
+* LaTeX Project team: About this document.
+ (line 340)
+* LaTeX vs. LaTeX2e: About this document.
+ (line 336)
+* latex-doc-ptr document: About this document.
+ (line 353)
+* LaTeX2e logo: Text symbols. (line 12191)
+* <latexrefman@tug.org> email address: About this document.
+ (line 340)
+* Latin letters, additional: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12449)
+* layout commands: Layout. (line 1517)
+* layout, page parameters for: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1673)
+* left angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 12197)
+* left arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 12306)
+* left brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 12253)
+* left quote: Text symbols. (line 12207)
+* left quote, double: Text symbols. (line 12319)
+* left quote, single: Text symbols. (line 12325)
+* left-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
+ (line 721)
+* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 3452)
+* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 3424)
+* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 9605)
+* legalpaper option: Document class options.
+ (line 677)
+* lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 7563)
+* lengths, allocating new: \newlength. (line 6700)
+* lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 7385)
+* lengths, setting: \setlength. (line 7535)
+* leqno option: Document class options.
+ (line 707)
+* less than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 12303)
+* lethead_flag: makeindex. (line 13244)
+* lethead_prefix: makeindex. (line 13253)
+* lethead_suffix: makeindex. (line 13257)
+* letter class: Document classes. (line 635)
+* letter environment: letter. (line 3611)
+* letterpaper option: Document class options.
+ (line 677)
+* letters, accented: Accents. (line 12361)
+* letters, additional Latin: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12449)
+* letters, ending: \closing. (line 13615)
+* letters, starting: \opening. (line 13720)
+* letters, writing: Letters. (line 13494)
+* line break, forcing: \\. (line 5682)
+* line breaking: Line breaking. (line 5665)
+* line breaks, changing: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 5866)
+* line breaks, forcing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+ (line 5925)
+* line breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*. (line 9506)
+* line breaks, preventing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+ (line 5925)
+* lines in tables: tabular. (line 4914)
+* line_max: makeindex. (line 13310)
+* lining numerals: Font styles. (line 1326)
+* lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 4914)
+* lining text up using tab stops: tabbing. (line 4705)
+* list environment: list. (line 3616)
+* list items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 7239)
+* list of figures file: Output files. (line 468)
+* list of tables file: Output files. (line 468)
+* listings package: tabbing. (line 4845)
+* listings package <1>: verbatim. (line 5568)
+* listings package <2>: \verb. (line 5618)
+* lists of items: itemize. (line 3528)
+* lists of items, generic: list. (line 3616)
+* lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 3172)
+* loading additional packages: Additional packages.
+ (line 763)
+* log file: Output files. (line 453)
+* logo, LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 12188)
+* logo, LaTeX2e: Text symbols. (line 12191)
+* logo, TeX: Text symbols. (line 12229)
+* long command: Class and package commands.
+ (line 866)
+* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols. (line 12219)
+* low-level font commands: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1375)
+* lowercase: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 12115)
+* LR box: picture. (line 4240)
+* LR mode: Modes. (line 9605)
+* lrbox: lrbox. (line 11037)
+* lshort document: About this document.
+ (line 364)
+* ltugboat class: tugboat template. (line 14211)
+* lualatex command: TeX engines. (line 501)
+* LuaTeX: TeX engines. (line 501)
+* m-width: Units of length. (line 7517)
+* macro package, LaTeX as: Overview. (line 378)
+* macron accent: Accents. (line 12389)
+* macron accent, math: Math accents. (line 9225)
+* macros2e package: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+ (line 6584)
+* Madsen, Lars: eqnarray. (line 3239)
+* make a box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10705)
+* makeindex: makeindex. (line 13186)
+* makeindex program: makeindex. (line 13186)
+* makeindex, style file: makeindex. (line 13198)
+* making a title page: titlepage. (line 5504)
+* making paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 7664)
+* marginal notes: Marginal notes. (line 7837)
+* masculine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 12310)
+* matching brackets: \left & \right. (line 9534)
+* matching parentheses: \left & \right. (line 9534)
+* math accents: Math accents. (line 9217)
+* math environment: math. (line 3980)
+* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 7886)
+* math formulas: Math formulas. (line 7886)
+* math functions: Math functions. (line 9101)
+* math miscellany: Math miscellany. (line 9480)
+* math mode: Modes. (line 9615)
+* math mode, entering: Math formulas. (line 7886)
+* math mode, spacing: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9311)
+* math mode, spacing <1>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 9429)
+* math mode, vertical space: \smash. (line 9368)
+* math symbols: Math symbols. (line 8040)
+* math, bold: Font styles. (line 1322)
+* mathtools package: Math formulas. (line 7966)
+* mathtools package <1>: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 9305)
+* mathtools package <2>: \smash. (line 9423)
+* mathtools package <3>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 9459)
+* MetaPost package: \line. (line 4397)
+* mfirstuc package: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 12154)
+* mhchem package: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 8033)
+* Millimeter: Units of length. (line 7506)
+* minipage environment: minipage. (line 3992)
+* minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 3992)
+* minted package: tabbing. (line 4845)
+* minted package <1>: verbatim. (line 5568)
+* minted package <2>: \verb. (line 5618)
+* mirrors of CTAN: CTAN. (line 618)
+* mm: Units of length. (line 7506)
+* modes: Modes. (line 9595)
+* monospace font: Font styles. (line 1290)
+* moving arguments: \protect. (line 7041)
+* mpfootnote counter: \footnote. (line 6202)
+* mu: Units of length. (line 7528)
+* mu, math unit: Units of length. (line 7528)
+* multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 1534)
+* multilingual support: Accents. (line 12361)
+* multind package: Indexes. (line 13061)
+* multiplication, discretionary: \*. (line 9506)
+* name: \newglossaryentry. (line 13442)
+* NBSP: ~. (line 10244)
+* nested \include, not allowed: \include & \includeonly.
+ (line 12744)
+* new class commands: Class and package construction.
+ (line 779)
+* new command, check: Class and package commands.
+ (line 864)
+* new command, definition: Class and package commands.
+ (line 939)
+* new commands, defining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6394)
+* new commands, defining <1>: \providecommand. (line 6519)
+* new line, output as input: \obeycr & \restorecr.
+ (line 5744)
+* new line, starting: \\. (line 5682)
+* new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 5784)
+* new page, starting: \newpage. (line 6028)
+* non-English characters: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12449)
+* notes in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 7837)
+* notitlepage option: Document class options.
+ (line 707)
+* null delimiter: \left & \right. (line 9534)
+* numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 7239)
+* numerals, old-style: Font styles. (line 1326)
+* oblique font: Font styles. (line 1287)
+* oe ligature: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12491)
+* ogonek: Accents. (line 12426)
+* old-style numerals: Font styles. (line 1326)
+* one-column output: \onecolumn. (line 1522)
+* onecolumn option: Document class options.
+ (line 736)
+* oneside option: Document class options.
+ (line 736)
+* openany option: Document class options.
+ (line 736)
+* openbib option: Document class options.
+ (line 707)
+* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 12207)
+* openright option: Document class options.
+ (line 736)
+* OpenType fonts: TeX engines. (line 477)
+* options, class: Class and package commands.
+ (line 909)
+* options, color package: Color package options.
+ (line 11092)
+* options, command line: Command line options.
+ (line 13914)
+* options, document class: Document class options.
+ (line 664)
+* options, document class <1>: Class and package structure.
+ (line 802)
+* options, global: Additional packages.
+ (line 772)
+* options, graphics package: Graphics package options.
+ (line 11370)
+* options, package: Class and package structure.
+ (line 802)
+* options, package <1>: Class and package commands.
+ (line 909)
+* ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 12310)
+* oslash: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12487)
+* outer paragraph mode: Modes. (line 9636)
+* overbar accent: Accents. (line 12389)
+* overdot accent, math: Math accents. (line 9237)
+* overlining: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 9266)
+* overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 373)
+* package file layout: Class and package structure.
+ (line 802)
+* package options: Class and package structure.
+ (line 802)
+* package options <1>: Class and package commands.
+ (line 909)
+* package, algorithm2e: tabbing. (line 4845)
+* package, amsfonts: Math formulas. (line 7966)
+* package, amsmath: array. (line 2914)
+* package, amsmath <1>: array. (line 2925)
+* package, amsmath <2>: displaymath. (line 3106)
+* package, amsmath <3>: equation. (line 3309)
+* package, amsmath <4>: theorem. (line 5496)
+* package, amsmath <5>: Math formulas. (line 7966)
+* package, amsmath <6>: Dots. (line 9077)
+* package, amsmath <7>: Math functions. (line 9206)
+* package, amsmath <8>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 9467)
+* package, amsmath <9>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 9495)
+* package, amsmath <10>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 9499)
+* package, amsthm: theorem. (line 5496)
+* package, amsthm <1>: \rule. (line 12518)
+* package, appendix: \appendix. (line 2414)
+* package, array (package): array. (line 2936)
+* package, Asymptote: \line. (line 4397)
+* package, Asymptote <1>: \strut. (line 10540)
+* package, Asymptote <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10772)
+* package, babel: \chapter. (line 2154)
+* package, babel <1>: thebibliography. (line 5286)
+* package, babel <2>: Accents. (line 12361)
+* package, babel <3>: \today. (line 12548)
+* package, babel <4>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12875)
+* package, babel <5>: \index. (line 13121)
+* package, bigfoot: Footnotes of footnotes.
+ (line 6373)
+* package, bm: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 9032)
+* package, cleveref: Cross references. (line 2683)
+* package, cleveref <1>: \ref. (line 2796)
+* package, cleveref <2>: \footnotemark. (line 6254)
+* package, cprotect: verbatim. (line 5563)
+* package, cprotect <1>: \verb. (line 5621)
+* package, datetime: \today. (line 12562)
+* package, dcolumn: array. (line 2936)
+* package, enumitem: list. (line 3880)
+* package, envlab: \makelabels. (line 13702)
+* package, etoolbox: Class and package commands.
+ (line 953)
+* package, eurosym: Text symbols. (line 12291)
+* package, fancyhdr: Page styles. (line 9675)
+* package, fancyhdr <1>: \pagestyle. (line 9817)
+* package, fancyvrb: tabbing. (line 4845)
+* package, fancyvrb <1>: verbatim. (line 5574)
+* package, flafter: Floats. (line 1882)
+* package, float: Floats. (line 1852)
+* package, geometry: Document class options.
+ (line 698)
+* package, geometry <1>: Document class options.
+ (line 702)
+* package, hyperref: \footnotemark. (line 6254)
+* package, hyperref <1>: \footnotemark. (line 6263)
+* package, hyperref <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 9791)
+* package, hyperref <3>: Command line input.
+ (line 14001)
+* package, indentfirst: \part. (line 2079)
+* package, indentfirst <1>: \chapter. (line 2141)
+* package, indentfirst <2>: \section. (line 2236)
+* package, indentfirst <3>: \subsection. (line 2302)
+* package, indentfirst <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2379)
+* package, indentfirst <5>: \indent & \noindent.
+ (line 7803)
+* package, index: \index. (line 13166)
+* package, listings: tabbing. (line 4845)
+* package, listings <1>: verbatim. (line 5568)
+* package, listings <2>: \verb. (line 5618)
+* package, macros2e: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
+ (line 6584)
+* package, mathtools: Math formulas. (line 7966)
+* package, mathtools <1>: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 9305)
+* package, mathtools <2>: \smash. (line 9423)
+* package, mathtools <3>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 9459)
+* package, MetaPost: \line. (line 4397)
+* package, mfirstuc: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 12154)
+* package, mhchem: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 8033)
+* package, minted: tabbing. (line 4845)
+* package, minted <1>: verbatim. (line 5568)
+* package, minted <2>: \verb. (line 5618)
+* package, multind: Indexes. (line 13061)
+* package, pict2e: \line. (line 4397)
+* package, polyglossia: Accents. (line 12361)
+* package, polyglossia <1>: \today. (line 12548)
+* package, polyglossia <2>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12875)
+* package, polyglossia <3>: \index. (line 13121)
+* package, PSTricks: \line. (line 4397)
+* package, sagetex: Command line options.
+ (line 13970)
+* package, setspace: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1487)
+* package, showidx: Indexes. (line 13061)
+* package, siunitx: ~. (line 10270)
+* package, symbols: Math symbols. (line 8040)
+* package, textcase: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 12151)
+* package, textcomp: Font styles. (line 1326)
+* package, TikZ: \line. (line 4397)
+* package, TikZ <1>: \strut. (line 10540)
+* package, TikZ <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10771)
+* package, titlesec: \part. (line 2083)
+* package, titlesec <1>: \chapter. (line 2162)
+* package, titlesec <2>: \section. (line 2240)
+* package, titlesec <3>: \subsection. (line 2306)
+* package, titlesec <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2383)
+* package, tocbibbind: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12886)
+* package, tocloft: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12886)
+* package, ulem: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 9275)
+* package, url: \verb. (line 5614)
+* package, verbatimbox: verbatim. (line 5574)
+* packages, loading additional: Additional packages.
+ (line 763)
+* page break, forcing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6086)
+* page break, preventing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6086)
+* page breaking: Page breaking. (line 5956)
+* page layout parameters: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1673)
+* page number, cross referencing: \pageref. (line 2749)
+* page numbering style: \pagenumbering. (line 9752)
+* page style, this page: \thispagestyle. (line 9894)
+* page styles: Page styles. (line 9669)
+* page, colored: Colored pages. (line 11312)
+* page_precedence: makeindex. (line 13323)
+* paired delimiters: \left & \right. (line 9534)
+* paragraph: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+* paragraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2324)
+* paragraph indentation: \parindent & \parskip.
+ (line 7810)
+* paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage. (line 4089)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation & quote. (line 4675)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quotation & quote.
+ (line 4675)
+* paragraph mode: Modes. (line 9601)
+* paragraph mode <1>: \parbox. (line 10861)
+* paragraph symbol: Text symbols. (line 12211)
+* paragraph, ending: \par. (line 7708)
+* paragraph, in a box: \parbox. (line 10861)
+* paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 7664)
+* parameters, for footnotes: \footnote. (line 6174)
+* parameters, page layout: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1673)
+* part: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+* part <1>: \part. (line 2035)
+* pc: Units of length. (line 7493)
+* PDF graphic files: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 11434)
+* PDF graphic files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
+* pdflatex command: Output files. (line 445)
+* pdfTeX: Output files. (line 445)
+* pdfTeX engine: TeX engines. (line 484)
+* period, abbreviation-ending: \@. (line 10127)
+* period, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 12313)
+* period, sentence-ending: \@. (line 10127)
+* period, spacing after: \@. (line 10127)
+* pica: Units of length. (line 7493)
+* pict2e package: \line. (line 4397)
+* pict2e package <1>: \line. (line 4397)
+* picture environment: picture. (line 4143)
+* pictures, creating: picture. (line 4143)
+* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 12211)
+* placement of floats: Floats. (line 1831)
+* plural: \newglossaryentry. (line 13450)
+* PNG files: Graphics package configuration.
+ (line 11434)
+* PNG files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
+* poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 5629)
+* Point: Units of length. (line 7489)
+* polish l: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12479)
+* polyglossia package: Accents. (line 12361)
+* polyglossia package <1>: \today. (line 12548)
+* polyglossia package <2>: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12875)
+* polyglossia package <3>: \index. (line 13121)
+* portrait orientation: Document class options.
+ (line 718)
+* position, in picture: picture. (line 4214)
+* positional parameter: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6440)
+* postamble: makeindex. (line 13234)
+* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 13732)
+* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 12215)
+* preamble: makeindex. (line 13230)
+* preamble, defined: Starting and ending.
+ (line 415)
+* prompt, *: Recovering from errors.
+ (line 14060)
+* pronunciation: Overview. (line 391)
+* PSTricks package: \line. (line 4397)
+* pt: Units of length. (line 7489)
+* quad: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9356)
+* question mark, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 12316)
+* quotation environment: quotation & quote. (line 4675)
+* quotation marks, French: Text symbols. (line 12197)
+* quote environment: quotation & quote. (line 4675)
+* quote, single straight: Text symbols. (line 12331)
+* quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 12335)
+* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation & quote.
+ (line 4675)
+* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation & quote.
+ (line 4675)
+* radical: \sqrt. (line 9569)
+* ragged left text: \raggedleft. (line 3503)
+* ragged left text, environment for: flushright. (line 3485)
+* ragged right text: \raggedright. (line 3452)
+* ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 3424)
+* redefining environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6750)
+* reference, forward: Cross references. (line 2672)
+* references, resolving forward: Output files. (line 458)
+* registered symbol: Text symbols. (line 12338)
+* relation, text above: \stackrel. (line 9585)
+* remarks in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 7837)
+* report class: Document classes. (line 635)
+* reporting bugs: About this document.
+ (line 344)
+* reserved characters: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12083)
+* resizing: \scalebox. (line 12017)
+* resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 12048)
+* right angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 12197)
+* right arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 12341)
+* right brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 12256)
+* right quote: Text symbols. (line 12222)
+* right quote, double: Text symbols. (line 12322)
+* right quote, single: Text symbols. (line 12328)
+* right-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
+ (line 721)
+* right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 3503)
+* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 3485)
+* ring accent: Accents. (line 12430)
+* ring accent, math: Math accents. (line 9246)
+* robust commands: \protect. (line 7028)
+* roman font: Font styles. (line 1278)
+* root file: Splitting the input.
+ (line 12576)
+* roots: \sqrt. (line 9569)
+* rotating graphics: \rotatebox. (line 11949)
+* rotating text: \rotatebox. (line 11949)
+* rotation: \rotatebox. (line 11949)
+* row, tabbing: tabbing. (line 4745)
+* rubber lengths, defining new: \newlength. (line 6700)
+* running header and footer: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1673)
+* running header and footer style: \pagestyle. (line 9810)
+* sagetex package: Command line options.
+ (line 13970)
+* sans serif font: Font styles. (line 1284)
+* Scaled point: Units of length. (line 7515)
+* scaling: \scalebox. (line 12017)
+* scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 12048)
+* script fonts: Calligraphic. (line 8988)
+* script letters for math: Font styles. (line 1272)
+* secnumdepth: Sectioning. (line 2012)
+* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 2013)
+* section: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+* section <1>: \section. (line 2182)
+* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 2773)
+* section numbers, printing: Sectioning. (line 2013)
+* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 12226)
+* section, redefining: \@startsection. (line 2452)
+* sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+* sectioning, part: \part. (line 2035)
+* series, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1417)
+* setspace package: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1487)
+* setting counters: \setcounter. (line 7298)
+* shapes, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1457)
+* sharp S letters: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12495)
+* showidx package: Indexes. (line 13061)
+* simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 5543)
+* single angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 12197)
+* single guillemets: Text symbols. (line 12197)
+* single left quote: Text symbols. (line 12325)
+* single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 12219)
+* single quote, straight: Text symbols. (line 12331)
+* single right quote: Text symbols. (line 12328)
+* siunitx package: ~. (line 10270)
+* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 1340)
+* skip register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 6700)
+* slanted font: Font styles. (line 1287)
+* slides class: Document classes. (line 635)
+* sloppypar: sloppypar. (line 5879)
+* sloppypar environment: sloppypar. (line 5879)
+* small caps font: Font styles. (line 1281)
+* sort: \newglossaryentry. (line 13454)
+* sp: Units of length. (line 7515)
+* space, hard: ~. (line 10244)
+* space, inserting horizontal: \hss. (line 10040)
+* space, inserting vertical: \addvspace. (line 10649)
+* space, negative thin: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 10300)
+* space, thin: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 10300)
+* space, unbreakable: ~. (line 10244)
+* space, vertical: \vspace. (line 10569)
+* spaces: Spaces. (line 9922)
+* spaces, ignore around commands: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
+ (line 7080)
+* spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9311)
+* spacing, inter-sentence: \frenchspacing. (line 10173)
+* spacing, inter-sentence <1>: \normalsfcodes. (line 10193)
+* spacing, math mode: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 9429)
+* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 12310)
+* special characters: Reserved characters.
+ (line 12083)
+* special characters <1>: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12449)
+* special insertions: Special insertions.
+ (line 12077)
+* specifier, float placement: Floats. (line 1831)
+* splitting the input file: Splitting the input.
+ (line 12572)
+* square root: \sqrt. (line 9569)
+* stack math: \stackrel. (line 9585)
+* star-variants, commands: \@ifstar. (line 6598)
+* starred form, defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6413)
+* starting a new page: \newpage. (line 6028)
+* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+ (line 5987)
+* starting and ending: Starting and ending.
+ (line 399)
+* starting on a right-hand page: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
+ (line 5987)
+* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 12215)
+* straight double quote, base: Text symbols. (line 12335)
+* straight quote, base: Text symbols. (line 12335)
+* straight single quote: Text symbols. (line 12331)
+* stretch, infinite horizontal: \hfill. (line 10007)
+* stretch, infinite vertical: \vfill. (line 10620)
+* stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 1662)
+* strut: \strut. (line 10484)
+* styles of text: Font styles. (line 1200)
+* styles, page: Page styles. (line 9669)
+* subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+* subparagraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2324)
+* subscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 7977)
+* subsection: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+* subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 2260)
+* subsubsection: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2324)
+* superscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 7977)
+* symbol: \newglossaryentry. (line 13458)
+* symbols package: Math symbols. (line 8040)
+* symbols, boldface: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
+ (line 9006)
+* symbols, math: Math symbols. (line 8040)
+* symbols, text: Text symbols. (line 12172)
+* tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 4705)
+* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 4705)
+* table environment: table. (line 4854)
+* table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline.
+ (line 12895)
+* table of contents file: Output files. (line 468)
+* table of contents, avoiding footnotes: Footnotes in section headings.
+ (line 6284)
+* table of contents, creating: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12801)
+* table of contents, sectioning numbers printed: Sectioning.
+ (line 2024)
+* tables, creating: table. (line 4854)
+* tabular environment: tabular. (line 4914)
+* template, article: article template. (line 14118)
+* template, beamer: beamer template. (line 14087)
+* template, book: book template. (line 14138)
+* template, book <1>: Larger book template.
+ (line 14161)
+* template, TUGboat: tugboat template. (line 14211)
+* templates, document: Document templates.
+ (line 14080)
+* terminal input/output: Terminal input/output.
+ (line 13791)
+* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 12229)
+* text symbols: Text symbols. (line 12172)
+* text, resizing: \scalebox. (line 12017)
+* text, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 12048)
+* text, scaling: \scalebox. (line 12017)
+* text, scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 12048)
+* textcase package: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 12151)
+* textcomp package: Font styles. (line 1326)
+* textcomp package <1>: Text symbols. (line 12172)
+* thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 9732)
+* thebibliography environment: thebibliography. (line 5239)
+* theorem environment: theorem. (line 5474)
+* theorem-like environment: \newtheorem. (line 6884)
+* theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 6884)
+* theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 5474)
+* thin space: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9337)
+* thin space <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 10300)
+* thin space, negative: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 9351)
+* thin space, negative <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
+ (line 10300)
+* thorn, Icelandic letter: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 12499)
+* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 12344)
+* tie: ~. (line 10244)
+* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 12436)
+* TikZ package: \line. (line 4397)
+* TikZ package <1>: \strut. (line 10540)
+* TikZ package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10771)
+* tilde accent: Accents. (line 12401)
+* tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 9249)
+* tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 12235)
+* title page, separate or run-in: Document class options.
+ (line 729)
+* title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 5504)
+* title, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 9739)
+* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 5504)
+* titlepage option: Document class options.
+ (line 707)
+* titles, making: \maketitle. (line 9681)
+* titlesec package: \part. (line 2083)
+* titlesec package <1>: \chapter. (line 2162)
+* titlesec package <2>: \section. (line 2240)
+* titlesec package <3>: \subsection. (line 2306)
+* titlesec package <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2383)
+* tocbibbind package: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12886)
+* tocdepth: Sectioning. (line 2023)
+* tocdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 2024)
+* tocloft package: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 12886)
+* today's date: \today. (line 12541)
+* tombstone: \rule. (line 12513)
+* topmargin: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 1792)
+* topnumber: Floats. (line 1938)
+* topnumber <1>: Floats. (line 1939)
+* totalnumber: Floats. (line 1942)
+* totalnumber <1>: Floats. (line 1943)
+* trademark symbol: Text symbols. (line 12347)
+* transcript file: Output files. (line 453)
+* TrueType fonts: TeX engines. (line 477)
+* TUGboat template: tugboat template. (line 14211)
+* two-column output: \twocolumn. (line 1534)
+* two-thirds em-dash: Text symbols. (line 12350)
+* twocolumn option: Document class options.
+ (line 736)
+* twoside option: Document class options.
+ (line 736)
+* type styles: Font styles. (line 1200)
+* typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 5543)
+* typeface sizes: Font sizes. (line 1340)
+* typefaces: Fonts. (line 1194)
+* typewriter font: Font styles. (line 1290)
+* typewriter labels in lists: description. (line 3064)
+* ulem package: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 9275)
+* umlaut accent: Accents. (line 12378)
+* underbar: Accents. (line 12406)
+* underlining: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 9266)
+* underscore, in text: Text symbols. (line 12353)
+* Unicode input, native: TeX engines. (line 477)
+* units, of length: Units of length. (line 7485)
+* unofficial nature of this manual: About this document.
+ (line 340)
+* unordered lists: itemize. (line 3528)
+* uppercase: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 12115)
+* url package: \verb. (line 5614)
+* using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 5416)
+* usrguide official documentation: About this document.
+ (line 359)
+* UTF-8: TeX engines. (line 477)
+* variables, a list of: Counters. (line 7155)
+* vector symbol, math: Math accents. (line 9252)
+* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 5543)
+* verbatim text: verbatim. (line 5543)
+* verbatim text, inline: \verb. (line 5582)
+* verbatimbox package: verbatim. (line 5574)
+* verse environment: verse. (line 5629)
+* vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 12247)
+* vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 12244)
+* vertical mode: Modes. (line 9623)
+* vertical space: \vspace. (line 10569)
+* vertical space <1>: \addvspace. (line 10649)
+* vertical space before paragraphs: \parindent & \parskip.
+ (line 7810)
+* vertical spacing: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 9429)
+* vertical spacing, math mode: \smash. (line 9368)
+* visible space: \verb. (line 5607)
+* visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 12356)
+* weights, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1427)
+* white space: Spaces. (line 9922)
+* wide hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 9255)
+* wide tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 9258)
+* widths, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 1439)
+* writing external files: filecontents. (line 3373)
+* writing letters: Letters. (line 13494)
+* x-height: Units of length. (line 7517)
+* xdvi command: Output files. (line 435)
+* xdvipdfmx: TeX engines. (line 510)
+* xelatex command: TeX engines. (line 510)
+* XeTeX: TeX engines. (line 510)
+* xindy: makeindex. (line 13333)
+* xindy program: makeindex. (line 13333)
+
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9ba4e402d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,19395 @@
+<?xml version="1.0"?>
+<!DOCTYPE texinfo PUBLIC "-//GNU//DTD TexinfoML V6.4//EN" "http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/dtd/6.4/texinfo.dtd">
+<texinfo xml:lang="en">
+<filename file="latex2e.xml"></filename>
+<preamble>\input texinfo
+</preamble><!-- c $Id: latex2e.texi 710 2018-10-14 14:32:52Z karl $ -->
+<!-- comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) -->
+<setfilename file="latex2e.info" spaces=" ">latex2e.info</setfilename>
+<set name="UPDATED" line=" UPDATED October 2018">October 2018</set>
+<!-- c $Id: common.texi 701 2018-10-08 14:32:37Z jimhefferon $ -->
+<!-- c Public domain. -->
+<set name="LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE" line=" LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman">https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman</set>
+<set name="LTXREFMAN_BUGS" line=" LTXREFMAN_BUGS latexrefman@@tug.org">latexrefman@@tug.org</set>
+<clear name="HAS-MATH" line=" HAS-MATH "></clear>
+<macro name="iftexthenelse" line=" iftexthenelse {then,else}"><formalarg>then</formalarg><formalarg>else</formalarg>\else\@c
+</macro>
+
+
+<settitle spaces=" ">&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (October 2018)</settitle>
+<!-- comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.) -->
+
+<!-- c latex 2.09 commands should all be present now, -->
+<!-- c xx but latex2e stuff is missing. -->
+<!-- c xx random list of a few of the missing items is at the end of this file -->
+<!-- c -->
+<!-- c xx ctan, distributions, components of TeX -->
+<!-- c xx classes and packages - required, additional, useful; oberdiek; fonts -->
+<!-- c -->
+<!-- c xx merge permuted-index -->
+<!-- c xx merge latex-manual from savannah -->
+<!-- c xx merge display style math -->
+<!-- c xx JH explain nfss somewhere -->
+<!-- c xx JH expand BiBTeX -->
+<!-- c xx JH expand theorem, AMS math -->
+<!-- c xx JH something on code listings -->
+<!-- c xx JH ligatures -->
+<!-- c xx JH \xspace -->
+<!-- c xx JH \stretch -->
+<!-- c xx JH \mathstrut -->
+<!-- c xx JH \phantom https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/4519/how-do-i-create-an-invisible-character -->
+<!-- c xx JH \baselineskip https://texfaq.org/FAQ-baselinepar -->
+<!-- c xx JH \contentsline, \@@dottedtocline? -->
+<!-- c xx JH more on \write18, beyond what's mentioned in Command line. -->
+<!-- c xx JH \numexpr, \dimexpr, \glueexpr, \muexpr -->
+<!-- c -->
+<!-- c xx The typeset source2e has an index with all kernel -->
+<!-- c xx commands, though some are internal and shouldn't be included. -->
+<!-- c xx classes.dtx et al. define additional commands. -->
+<!-- c xx See also http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e. -->
+
+<copying endspaces=" ">
+<para>This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
+document preparation system, version of October 2018.
+</para>
+<para>This manual was originally translated from <file>LATEX.HLP</file> v1.0a in the
+VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
+George&nbsp;D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The
+&latex;&nbsp;2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The
+&latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl
+Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges
+using <cite>Hypertext Help with &latex;</cite>, by Sheldon Green, and
+<cite>&latex; Command Summary</cite> (for &latex;&nbsp;2.09) by
+L.&nbsp;Botway and C.&nbsp;Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users
+Group as <cite>&tex;niques</cite> number 10), as reference material. We also
+gratefully acknowledge additional material appearing in
+latex2e-reference by Martin Herbert Dietze. (From these references no
+text was directly copied.)
+</para>
+<para>Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013,
+2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018 Karl Berry.&linebreak;
+Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.&linebreak;
+Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
+</para>
+<!-- comment start of License -->
+<para>Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+</para>
+<ignore>
+Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
+results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
+notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
+</ignore>
+
+<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+</para>
+<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
+<!-- comment end of License -->
+</para></copying>
+
+<!-- c Merge into one index (arbitrarily chosen to be the concept index). -->
+<syncodeindex from="fn" to="cp" line=" fn cp"></syncodeindex>
+
+<dircategory spaces=" ">TeX</dircategory>
+<direntry endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menutitle separator=": ">LaTeX2e</menutitle><menunode separator=". ">(latex2e)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Unofficial LaTeX reference manual.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></direntry>
+
+<tex endspaces=" ">
+</tex>
+
+<titlepage endspaces=" ">
+<title spaces=" ">&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual</title>
+<subtitle spaces=" ">October 2018</subtitle>
+<author spaces=" "><url><urefurl>https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman</urefurl></url></author>
+<page></page>
+<vskip> 0pt plus 1filll</vskip>
+<insertcopying></insertcopying>
+</titlepage>
+
+<shortcontents></shortcontents>
+<contents></contents>
+
+<!-- c Best Effort Symbol -->
+<macro name="BES" line=" BES {utf8,math}"><formalarg>utf8</formalarg><formalarg>math</formalarg>@U{\utf8\}
+</macro>
+<macro name="BESU" line=" BESU {utf8,math}"><formalarg>utf8</formalarg><formalarg>math</formalarg>@U{\utf8\}
+</macro>
+<macro name="EnvIndex" line=" EnvIndex {env}"><formalarg>env</formalarg>@findex @r{environment}, @code{\env\}
+@findex @code{\env\} @r{environment}
+
+</macro>
+<macro name="PkgIndex" line=" PkgIndex {pkg}"><formalarg>pkg</formalarg>@cindex @r{package}, @code{\pkg\}
+@cindex @code{\pkg\} @r{package}
+
+</macro>
+
+<set name="NotInPlainTeX" line=" NotInPlainTeX Not available in plain @TeX{}.">Not available in plain @TeX{}.</set>
+<set name="NeedsAMSSymb" line=" NeedsAMSSymb @value{NotInPlainTeX} In @LaTeX{} you need to load the @file{amssymb} package.">@value{NotInPlainTeX} In @LaTeX{} you need to load the @file{amssymb} package.</set>
+<set name="NeedsSTIX" line=" NeedsSTIX @value{NotInPlainTeX} In @LaTeX{} you need to load the @file{stix} package.">@value{NotInPlainTeX} In @LaTeX{} you need to load the @file{stix} package.</set>
+
+<node name="Top" spaces=" "><nodename>Top</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">About this document</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">(dir)</nodeup></node>
+<top spaces=" "><sectiontitle>&latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual</sectiontitle>
+
+<para>This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of
+October 2018) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">About this document</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Bug reporting, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Overview</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">What is &latex;?
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Document classes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Some of the various classes available.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Fonts</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Italic, bold, typewriter, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Layout</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Controlling the page layout.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Sectioning</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Parts, Chapters, Sections, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Cross references</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Automatic referencing.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Environments</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Such as enumerate &amp; itemize.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Line breaking</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Influencing line breaks.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Page breaking</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Influencing page breaks.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Footnotes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">How to produce footnotes.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Definitions</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define your own commands, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Counters</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Internal counters used by &latex;.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Lengths</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The length commands.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Making paragraphs</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Paragraph commands.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Math formulas</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">How to create mathematical formulas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Modes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Page styles</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Various styles of page layout.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Spaces</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Horizontal and vertical space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Boxes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Making boxes.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Color</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Defining and using colors.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Graphics</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Importing graphics from outside &latex;.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Special insertions</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting reserved and special characters.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Splitting the input</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Dealing with big files by splitting.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Front/back matter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Letters</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The <code>letter</code> class.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Terminal input/output</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">User interaction.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Command line</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">System-independent command-line behavior.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Document templates</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Starter templates for various document classes.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Index</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">General index.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+</top>
+<node name="About-this-document" spaces=" "><nodename>About this document</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Overview</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Top</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>About this document</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="1">home page for manual</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>This is an unofficial reference manual for the &latex;2e document
+preparation system, which is a macro package for the &tex;
+typesetting program (<pxref label="Overview"><xrefnodename>Overview</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This document&textrsquo;s home page is <url><urefurl>https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman</urefurl></url>. There
+you can get the sources, subscribe to the mailing list or read its
+archives, see other infrastructure, and get the current output in
+various formats. In particular, the output comes in two web formats.
+Probably the most convenient one, shown at <url><urefurl>http://latexref.xyz/</urefurl></url>,
+has pages for each topic and so is good for a quick lookup; see also the
+note there about easy-to-remember links. The other, shown at
+<url><urefurl>http://svn.gnu.org.ua/viewvc/latexrefman/trunk/latex2e.html?view=co</urefurl></url>,
+has all the information on single page.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="2">&latex; vs.&noeos; &latex;2e</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>In this document, we will mostly just use &textlsquo;&latex;&textrsquo; rather than
+&textlsquo;&latex;2e&textrsquo;, since the previous version of &latex;&nbsp;(2.09) was
+frozen decades ago.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="3">unofficial nature of this manual</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="4">&latex; Project team</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1" mergedindex="cp"><email><emailaddress>latexrefman&arobase;tug.org</emailaddress></email> <r>email address</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>&latex; is currently maintained by a group of volunteers
+(<url><urefurl>http://latex-project.org</urefurl></url>). The official documentation written by
+the &latex; project is available from their web site. This document is
+completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the &latex;
+maintainers.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="5">bug reporting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="6">reporting bugs</indexterm></cindex>
+Do not send bug reports or anything else about this document to them.
+Instead, please send all comments to <email><emailaddress>latexrefman&arobase;tug.org</emailaddress></email>.
+</para>
+<para>This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources
+of information about &latex;, at all levels. Here are a few
+introductions.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="url" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="2" mergedindex="cp">latex-doc-ptr <r>document</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Two pages of recommended references to &latex; documentation.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="3" mergedindex="cp">first-latex-doc <r>document</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="4" mergedindex="cp">usrguide <r>official documentation</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of &latex;.
+Many other guides by many other people are also available, independent
+of &latex; itself; one such is the next item:
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="5" mergedindex="cp">lshort <r>document</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>A short introduction to &latex;, translated to many languages.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://tug.org/begin.html</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Introduction to the &tex; system, including &latex;, with further
+references.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</chapter>
+<node name="Overview" spaces=" "><nodename>Overview</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Document classes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">About this document</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Overview of &latex;</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="7">overview of &latex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="8">basics of &latex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="9">Knuth, Donald E.</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="10">Lamport, Leslie</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="11">&latex; overview</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally
+created by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers
+(<url><urefurl>http://latex-project.org</urefurl></url>). It is widely used, particularly for
+complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="12">macro package, &latex; as</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>A &latex; user writes an input file containing text along with
+interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text
+should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands
+that interface with Donald&nbsp;E. Knuth&textrsquo;s &tex; typesetting program
+(the technical term is that &latex; is a <dfn>macro package</dfn> for the
+&tex; engine). The user produces the output document by giving that
+input file to the &tex; engine.
+</para>
+<para>The term &latex; is also sometimes used to mean the language in which
+the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
+available to a &latex; user.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="13">Lamport &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="14">pronunciation</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The name &latex; is short for &textldquo;Lamport &tex;&textrdquo;. It is pronounced
+LAH-teck or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document,
+produce the logo with <code>\LaTeX</code>. Where use of the logo is not
+sensible, such as in plain text, write it as <samp>LaTeX</samp>.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Starting and ending</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The standard beginning and end of a document.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Output files</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Files produced.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">&tex; engines</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Programs that can compile &tex; and &latex;.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">&latex; command syntax</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">General syntax of &latex; commands.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Environment</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Area of the source giving distinct behavior.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">CTAN</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Our repository.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Starting-and-ending" spaces=" "><nodename>Starting and ending</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Output files</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Overview</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Starting and ending</sectiontitle>
+
+<anchor name="Starting-_0026-ending">Starting &amp; ending</anchor><!-- c old name -->
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="15">starting and ending</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="16">ending and starting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="17">hello, world</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
+and ending. This is a small example.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;article&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+Hello, \LaTeX\ world.
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Every &latex; document has a <code>\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code> line and an
+<code>\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code> line.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="18">document class, defined</indexterm></cindex>
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Here, the <samp>article</samp> is the <dfn>document class</dfn>. It is implemented
+in a file <file>article.cls</file>. You can use any document class on your
+system. A few document classes are defined by &latex; itself, and vast
+array of others are widely available. <xref label="Document-classes"><xrefnodename>Document classes</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="19">preamble, defined</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>You can include other &latex; commands between the
+<code>\documentclass</code> and the <code>\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code> commands.
+This area is called the <dfn>preamble</dfn>.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code>, <code>\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code> pair defines an
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="20">environment</indexterm></cindex>
+<dfn>environment</dfn>; the <samp>document</samp> environment (and no others) is
+required in all &latex; documents (<pxref label="document"><xrefnodename>document</xrefnodename></pxref>). &latex; make
+available to you many environments that are documented here
+(<pxref label="Environments"><xrefnodename>Environments</xrefnodename></pxref>). Many more are available to you from external
+packages, most importantly those available at CTAN (<pxref label="CTAN"><xrefnodename>CTAN</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output from
+a &latex; input file.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Output-files" spaces=" "><nodename>Output files</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">&tex; engines</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Starting and ending</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Overview</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Output files</sectiontitle>
+
+<para>&latex; produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files.
+The main output file&textrsquo;s name ends in either <file>.dvi</file> or <file>.pdf</file>.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">.dvi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="6" mergedindex="cp">.dvi <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="7" mergedindex="cp">latex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="8" mergedindex="cp">xdvi <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="9" mergedindex="cp">dvips <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="10" mergedindex="cp">dvipdfmx <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="11" mergedindex="cp">dvitype <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="output-files-dvi">output files dvi</anchor>
+<para>If &latex; is invoked with the system command <command>latex</command> then it
+produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension <file>.dvi</file>. You
+can view this file with a command such as <command>xdvi</command>, or convert
+it to a PostScript <code>.ps</code> file with <command>dvips</command> or to a
+Portable Document Format <code>.pdf</code> file with <command>dvipdfmx</command>.
+The contents of the file can be dumped in human-readable form with
+<command>dvitype</command>. A vast array of other DVI utility programs are
+available (<url><urefurl>http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware</urefurl></url>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">.pdf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="12" mergedindex="cp">.pdf <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="21">pdf&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="13" mergedindex="cp">pdflatex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="output-files-pdf">output files pdf</anchor>
+<para>If &latex; is invoked via the system command <command>pdflatex</command>,
+among other commands (<pxref label="TeX-engines"><xrefnodename>&tex; engines</xrefnodename></pxref>), then the main output is
+a Portable Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a
+self-contained file, with all fonts and images included.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>&latex; also produces at least two additional files.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">.log</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="22">transcript file</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="23">log file</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="14" mergedindex="cp">.log <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="output-files-log">output files log</anchor>
+<para>This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
+loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps
+additional information for any errors.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">.aux</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="24">auxiliary file</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="15" mergedindex="cp">.aux <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="25">cross references, resolving</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="26">forward references, resolving</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="27">references, resolving forward</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="output-files-aux">output files aux</anchor>
+<para>Auxiliary information is used by &latex; for things such as
+cross references. For example, the first time that &latex; finds a
+forward reference&textmdash;a cross reference to something that has not yet
+appeared in the source&textmdash;it will appear in the output as a doubled
+question mark <code>??</code>. When the referred-to spot does eventually
+appear in the source then &latex; writes its location information to
+this <code>.aux</code> file. On the next invocation, &latex; reads the
+location information from this file and uses it to resolve the
+reference, replacing the double question mark with the remembered
+location.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="16" mergedindex="cp">.lof <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="28">list of figures file</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="17" mergedindex="cp">.lot <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="29">list of tables file</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="18" mergedindex="cp">.toc <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="30">table of contents file</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="31">contents file</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&latex; may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename
+ending. These include a <code>.lof</code> file that is used to make a list of
+figures, a <code>.lot</code> file used to make a list of tables, and a
+<code>.toc</code> file used to make a table of contents (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of
+contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>). A particular class may create others; the list is
+open-ended.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="TeX-engines" spaces=" "><nodename>&tex; engines</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">&latex; command syntax</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Output files</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Overview</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>&tex; engines</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="32">engines, &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="33">implementations of &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="34">UTF-8</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="35">Unicode input, native</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="36">TrueType fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="37">OpenType fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a &tex;
+implementation (<pxref label="Overview"><xrefnodename>Overview</xrefnodename></pxref>). This section gives a terse
+overview of the main programs (see also&nbsp;<ref label="Command-line"><xrefnodename>Command line</xrefnodename></ref>).
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">latex</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">pdflatex</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="38">pdf&tex; engine</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="19" mergedindex="cp">etex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="39">e-&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="tex-engines-latex">tex engines latex</anchor>
+<para>In &tex; Live (<url><urefurl>http://tug.org/texlive</urefurl></url>), if &latex; is invoked
+via either the system command <command>latex</command> or <command>pdflatex</command>,
+then the pdf&tex; engine is run (<url><urefurl>http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex</urefurl></url>).
+When invoked as <command>latex</command>, the main output is a <file>.dvi</file>
+file; as <command>pdflatex</command>, the main output is a <file>.pdf</file> file.
+</para>
+<para>pdf&tex; incorporates the e-&tex; extensions to Knuth&textrsquo;s original
+program (<url><urefurl>http://ctan.org/pkg/etex</urefurl></url>), including additional
+programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty of
+extensions of its own. e-&tex; is available on its own as the system
+command <command>etex</command>, but this is plain &tex; (and produces
+<file>.dvi</file>).
+</para>
+<para>In other &tex; distributions, <command>latex</command> may invoke e-&tex;
+rather than pdf&tex;. In any case, the e-&tex; extensions can be
+assumed to be available in &latex;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">lualatex</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="20" mergedindex="cp">lualatex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="40">Lua&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="tex-engines-lualatex">tex engines lualatex</anchor>
+<para>If &latex; is invoked via the system command <command>lualatex</command>, the
+Lua&tex; engine is run (<url><urefurl>http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex</urefurl></url>). This
+program allows code written in the scripting language Lua
+(<url><urefurl>http://luatex.org</urefurl></url>) to interact with &tex;&textrsquo;s typesetting.
+Lua&tex; handles UTF-8 Unicode input natively, can handle OpenType
+and TrueType fonts, and produces a <file>.pdf</file> file by default.
+There is also <command>dvilualatex</command> to produce a <file>.dvi</file> file,
+but this is rarely used.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">xelatex</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="21" mergedindex="cp">xelatex <r>command</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="41">Xe&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="22" mergedindex="cp">.xdv <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="23" mergedindex="cp">xdvipdfmx</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="tex-engines-xelatex">tex engines xelatex</anchor>
+<para>If &latex; is invoked with the system command <command>xelatex</command>, the
+Xe&tex; engine is run (<url><urefurl>http://tug.org/xetex</urefurl></url>). Like Lua&tex;,
+Xe&tex; natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType
+fonts, though the implementation is completely different, mainly using
+external libraries instead of internal code. Xe&tex; produces a
+<file>.pdf</file> file as output; it does not support DVI output.
+</para>
+<para>Internally, Xe&tex; creates an <code>.xdv</code> file, a variant of DVI,
+and translates that to PDF using the (<code>x</code>)<code>dvipdfmx</code>
+program, but this process is automatic. The <code>.xdv</code> file is only
+useful for debugging.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Other variants of &latex; and &tex; exist, e.g., to provide
+additional support for Japanese and other languages ([u]p&tex;,
+<url><urefurl>http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex</urefurl></url>, <url><urefurl>http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex</urefurl></url>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="LaTeX-command-syntax" spaces=" "><nodename>&latex; command syntax</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Environment</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">&tex; engines</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Overview</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>&latex; command syntax</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="42">command syntax</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="24" mergedindex="cp">\ <r>character starting commands</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="25" mergedindex="cp">[...] <r>for optional arguments</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="26" mergedindex="cp">&lbrace;...&rbrace; <r>for required arguments</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>In the &latex; input file, a command name starts with a backslash
+character, <code>\</code>. The name itself then consists of either
+(a)&nbsp;a string of letters or (b)&nbsp;a single non-letter.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; commands names are case sensitive so that <code>\pagebreak</code>
+differs from <code>\Pagebreak</code> (the latter is not a standard command).
+Most commands are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all
+commands in the same case as they are defined.
+</para>
+<para>A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These
+arguments may be either required or optional. Required arguments are
+contained in curly braces, <code>&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>. Optional arguments are
+contained in square brackets, <code>[...]</code>. Generally, but not
+universally, if the command accepts an optional argument, it comes
+first, before any required arguments.
+</para>
+<para>Inside of an optional argument, to use the character close square
+bracket&nbsp;(<code>]</code>) hide it inside curly braces, as
+in&nbsp;<code>\item[closing bracket &lbrace;]&rbrace;]</code>. Similarly, if an optional
+argument comes last, with no required argument after it, then to make
+the first character of the following text be an open square bracket,
+hide it inside curly braces.
+</para>
+<para>Some of &latex;&textrsquo;s commands are a <dfn>declaration</dfn>. Such a command
+changes the value the meaning of some other command or parameter. For
+instance, the <code>\mainmatter</code> declaration changes the typesetting of
+page numbers from roman numerals to arabic (<pxref label="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter"><xrefnodename>\frontmatter &amp;
+\mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; has the convention that some commands have a <code>*</code> form that
+is related to the form without a <code>*</code>, such as <code>\chapter</code> and
+<code>\chapter*</code>. The exact difference in behavior varies from command
+to command.
+</para>
+<para>This manual describes all accepted options and <code>*</code>-forms for the
+commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a.&noeos; bugs).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Environment" spaces=" "><nodename>Environment</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">CTAN</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">&latex; command syntax</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Overview</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Environment</sectiontitle>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;<var>environment name</var>&rbrace;
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;<var>environment name</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>An area of &latex; source, inside of which there is a distinct
+behavior. For instance, for poetry in &latex; put the lines between
+<code>\begin&lbrace;verse&rbrace;</code> and <code>\end&lbrace;verse&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;verse&rbrace;
+ There once was a man from Nantucket \\
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;verse&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para><xref label="Environments"><xrefnodename>Environments</xrefnodename></xref> for a list of environments. Particularly notable is
+that every &latex; document must have a <code>document</code> environment,
+a <code>\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace; ... \end&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code> pair.
+</para>
+<para>The <var>environment name</var> at the beginning must exactly match that at
+the end. This includes the case where <var>environment name</var> ends in a
+star&nbsp;(<code>*</code>); both the <code>\begin</code> and <code>\end</code> texts must
+include the star.
+</para>
+<para>Environments may have arguments, including optional arguments. This
+example produces a table. The first argument is optional (and causes
+the table to be aligned on its top row) while the second argument is
+required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;[t]&lbrace;r|l&rbrace;
+ ... rows of table ...
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="CTAN" spaces=" "><nodename>CTAN</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Environment</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Overview</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>CTAN: the Comprehensive &tex; Archive Network</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="43">CTAN</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The Comprehensive &tex; Archive Network, CTAN, is the &tex; and
+&latex; community&textrsquo;s repository of free material. It is a set of
+Internet sites around the world that offer material related to &latex;
+for download. Visit CTAN on the web at <url><urefurl>https://ctan.org</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+<para>This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
+typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
+person or a small number of people. For instance, many publishers have
+a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher&textrsquo;s
+specifications.
+</para>
+<para>In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features such
+as search by name or by functionality.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="44">DANTE e.V.</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="45">mirrors of CTAN</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites. One of the
+sites is the core. This site actively manages the material, for
+instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages. It is
+hosted by the German &tex; group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the
+world help out by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their
+collections with the core site and then in turn making their copies
+publicly available. This gives users close to their location better
+access and relieves the load on the core site. The list of mirrors is
+at <url><urefurl>https://ctan.org/mirrors</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Document-classes" spaces=" "><nodename>Document classes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Fonts</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Overview</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Document classes</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="46">document classes</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="47">classes of documents</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="27" mergedindex="cp">\documentclass</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>The document&textrsquo;s overall class is defined with this command, which is
+normally the first command in a &latex; source file.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass[<var>options</var>]&lbrace;<var>class</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="28" mergedindex="cp">article <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="29" mergedindex="cp">report <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="30" mergedindex="cp">book <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="31" mergedindex="cp">letter <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="32" mergedindex="cp">slides <r>class</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>The following document <var>class</var> names are built into &latex;.
+(Many other document classes are available as separate packages;
+<pxref label="Overview"><xrefnodename>Overview</xrefnodename></pxref>.)
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">article</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="document-classes-article">document classes article</anchor>
+<para>For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">book</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="document-classes-book">document classes book</anchor>
+<para>Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front
+matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
+(<pxref label="Front_002fback-matter"><xrefnodename>Front/back matter</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">letter</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="document-classes-letter">document classes letter</anchor>
+<para>Mail, optionally including mailing labels
+(<pxref label="Letters"><xrefnodename>Letters</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">report</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="document-classes-report">document classes report</anchor>
+<para>For documents of length between an <code>article</code> and a <code>book</code>,
+such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">slides</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="document-classes-slides">document classes slides</anchor>
+<para>For slide presentations&textmdash;rarely used today. In its place the
+<code>beamer</code> package is perhaps the most prevalent (<pxref label="beamer-template"><xrefnodename>beamer
+template</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Standard <var>options</var> are described in the next section.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Document class options</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Global options.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Additional packages</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Bring in packages.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Class and package construction</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Create new classes and packages.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Document-class-options" spaces=" "><nodename>Document class options</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Additional packages</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Document classes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Document class options</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="48">document class options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="49">options, document class</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="50">class options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="51">global options</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>You can specify <dfn>global options</dfn> or <dfn>class options</dfn> to the
+<code>\documentclass</code> command by enclosing them in square brackets. To
+specify more than one <var>option</var>, separate them with a comma.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass[<var>option1</var>,<var>option2</var>,...]&lbrace;<var>class</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Here is the list of the standard class options.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="33" mergedindex="cp">10pt <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="34" mergedindex="cp">11pt <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="35" mergedindex="cp">12pt <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>All of the standard classes except <code>slides</code> accept the following
+options for selecting the typeface size (default is <code>10pt</code>):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">10pt 11pt 12pt
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="36" mergedindex="cp">a4paper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="37" mergedindex="cp">a5paper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="38" mergedindex="cp">b5paper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="39" mergedindex="cp">executivepaper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="40" mergedindex="cp">legalpaper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="41" mergedindex="cp">letterpaper <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper
+size (these show height by width):
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">a4paper </itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>210 by 297<dmn>mm</dmn> (about 8.25 by 11.75&nbsp;inches)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">a5paper </itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>148 by 210<dmn>mm</dmn> (about 5.8 by 8.3&nbsp;inches)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b5paper</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>176 by 250<dmn>mm</dmn> (about 6.9 by 9.8&nbsp;inches)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">executivepaper</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>7.25 by 10.5&nbsp;inches
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">legalpaper</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>8.5 by 14&nbsp;inches
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">letterpaper</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>8.5 by 11&nbsp;inches (the default)
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="42" mergedindex="cp">\pdfpagewidth</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="43" mergedindex="cp">\pdfpageheight</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="52"><r>package</r>, <code>geometry</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="53"><code>geometry</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>When using one of the engines pdf&latex;, Lua&latex;, or Xe&latex;
+(<pxref label="TeX-engines"><xrefnodename>&tex; engines</xrefnodename></pxref>), options other than <code>letterpaper</code> set
+the print area but you must also set the physical paper size. One way
+to do that is to put <code>\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth</code> and
+<code>\pdfpageheight=\paperheight</code> in your document&textrsquo;s preamble.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="54"><r>package</r>, <code>geometry</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="55"><code>geometry</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+</para>
+<para>The <code>geometry</code> package provides flexible ways of setting the print
+area and physical page size.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="44" mergedindex="cp">draft <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="45" mergedindex="cp">final <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="46" mergedindex="cp">fleqn <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="47" mergedindex="cp">landscape <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="48" mergedindex="cp">leqno <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="49" mergedindex="cp">openbib <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="50" mergedindex="cp">titlepage <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="51" mergedindex="cp">notitlepage <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Miscellaneous other options:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">draft</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">final</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="56">black boxes, omitting</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Mark (<code>draft</code>) or do not mark (<code>final</code>) overfull boxes with a
+black box in the margin; default is <code>final</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">fleqn</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="57">flush left equations</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="58">centered equations</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="59">equations, flush left vs.&noeos; centered</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">landscape</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="60">landscape orientation</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="61">portrait orientation</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">leqno</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="62">left-hand equation numbers</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="63">right-hand equation numbers</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="64">equation numbers, left vs.&noeos; right</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">openbib</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="65">bibliography format, open</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Use &textldquo;open&textrdquo; bibliography format.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">titlepage</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">notitlepage</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="66">title page, separate or run-in</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Specifies whether there is a separate page for the title information and
+for the abstract also, if there is one. The default for the
+<code>report</code> class is <code>titlepage</code>, for the other classes it is
+<code>notitlepage</code>.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>The following options are not available with the <code>slides</code> class.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="52" mergedindex="cp">onecolumn <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="53" mergedindex="cp">twocolumn <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="54" mergedindex="cp">oneside <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="55" mergedindex="cp">twoside <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="56" mergedindex="cp">openright <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="57" mergedindex="cp">openany <r>option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">onecolumn</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">twocolumn</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Typeset in one or two columns; default is <code>onecolumn</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">oneside</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">twoside</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="58" mergedindex="cp">\evensidemargin</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="59" mergedindex="cp">\oddsidemargin</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is <code>oneside</code>, except
+that in the <code>book</code> class the default is <code>twoside</code>.
+</para>
+<para>For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page. For two-sided
+printing, the <code>\evensidemargin</code> (<code>\oddsidemargin</code>) parameter
+determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left
+side of the page and the text&textrsquo;s left margin, with <code>\oddsidemargin</code>
+being 40% of the difference between <code>\paperwidth</code> and
+<code>\textwidth</code>, and <code>\evensidemargin</code> is the remainder.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">openright</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">openany</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default is
+<code>openright</code> for <code>book</code>, and <code>openany</code> for <code>report</code>.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="60" mergedindex="cp">clock <r>option to <code>slides</code> class</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>The <code>slides</code> class offers the option <code>clock</code> for printing
+the time at the bottom of each note.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Additional-packages" spaces=" "><nodename>Additional packages</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Class and package construction</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Document class options</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document classes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Additional packages</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="67">loading additional packages</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="68">packages, loading additional</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="69">additional packages, loading</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="61" mergedindex="cp">\usepackage</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Load a package <var>pkg</var>, with the package options given in the comma-separated
+list <var>options</var>, as here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage[<var>options</var>]&lbrace;<var>pkg</var>&rbrace;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>To specify more than one package you can separate them with a comma,
+as in <code>\usepackage&lbrace;<var>pkg1</var>,<var>pkg2</var>,...&rbrace;</code>, or use multiple
+<code>\usepackage</code> commands.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="70">global options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="71">options, global</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Any options given in the <code>\documentclass</code> command that are unknown
+to the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
+<code>\usepackage</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Class-and-package-construction" spaces=" "><nodename>Class and package construction</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Additional packages</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document classes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Class and package construction</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="72">document class commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="73">commands, document class</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="74">new class commands</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>You can create new document classes and new packages. For instance, if
+your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a
+standard header for each page, then you could create a new class
+<code>smcmemo.cls</code> and begin your documents with
+<code>\documentclass&lbrace;smcmemo&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>What separates a package from a document class is that the commands in a
+package are useful across classes while those in a document class are
+specific to that class. Thus, a command to set page headers is for a
+package while a command to make the page headers say <code>Memo from the
+SMC Math Department</code> is for a class.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="75">class and package difference</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="76">difference between class and package</indexterm></cindex>
+</para>
+<para>Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign <code>&arobase;</code> as a
+character in command names without having to surround the code
+containing that command with <code>\makeatletter</code> and
+<code>\makeatother</code>. <xref label="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><xrefnodename>\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</xrefnodename></xref>. This allow
+you to create commands that users will not accidentally redefine.
+Another technique is to preface class- or package-specific commands with
+some string to prevent your class or package from interfering with
+others. For instance, the class <code>smcmemo</code> might have commands
+<code>\smc&arobase;tolist</code>, <code>\smc&arobase;fromlist</code>, etc.
+</para>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Class and package structure</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Layout of the file.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Class and package commands</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">List of commands.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Class-and-package-structure" spaces=" "><nodename>Class and package structure</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Class and package commands</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Class and package construction</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Class and package structure</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="77">class and package structure</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="78">class file layout</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="79">package file layout</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="80">options, document class</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="81">options, package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="82">class options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="83">package options</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>A class file or package file typically has four parts.
+</para><enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
+<listitem>
+<para>In the <dfn>identification part</dfn>, the file says that it is a &latex;
+package or class and describes itself, using the <code>\NeedsTeXFormat</code>
+and <code>\ProvidesClass</code> or <code>\ProvidesPackage</code> commands.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem>
+<para>The <dfn>preliminary declarations part</dfn> declares some commands and
+can also load other files. Usually these commands will be those needed
+for the code used in the next part. For example, an <code>smcmemo</code>
+class might be called with an option to read in a file with a list of
+people for the to-head, as <code>\documentclass[mathto]&lbrace;smcmemo&rbrace;</code>, and
+therefore needs to define a command
+<code>\newcommand&lbrace;\setto&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\def\&arobase;tolist&lbrace;#1&rbrace;&rbrace;</code> used in that
+file.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem>
+<para>In the <dfn>handle options part</dfn> the class or package declares
+and processes its options. Class options allow a user to start their
+document as <code>\documentclass[<var>option list</var>]&lbrace;<var>class
+name</var>&rbrace;</code>, to modify the behavior of the class. An example is when you
+declare <code>\documentclass[11pt]&lbrace;article&rbrace;</code> to set the default
+document font size.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem>
+<para>Finally, in the <dfn>more declarations part</dfn> the class or package usually does
+most of its work: declaring new variables, commands and fonts, and
+loading other files.
+</para></listitem></enumerate>
+
+<para>Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as <file>stub.cls</file>
+where &latex; can find it, for example in the same directory as the
+<file>.tex</file> file.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\NeedsTeXFormat&lbrace;LaTeX2e&rbrace;
+\ProvidesClass&lbrace;stub&rbrace;[2017/07/06 stub to start building classes from]
+\DeclareOption*&lbrace;\PassOptionsToClass&lbrace;\CurrentOption&rbrace;&lbrace;article&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+\LoadClass&lbrace;article&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="84">class file example</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
+passing them all to the <code>article</code> class, and then loads the
+<code>article</code> class to provide the basis for this class&textrsquo;s code.
+</para>
+<para>For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
+Class Guide, at
+<url><urefurl>http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf</urefurl></url> (much
+of the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
+<url><urefurl>https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="Class-and-package-commands" spaces=" "><nodename>Class and package commands</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Class and package structure</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Class and package construction</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Class and package commands</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="85">class and package commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="86">commands, class and package</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\AtBeginDvi&lbrace;specials&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="62" mergedindex="cp">\AtBeginDvi</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Save in a box register things that are written to the <file>.dvi</file> file
+at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\AtEndOfClass&lbrace;<var>code</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\AtEndOfPackage&lbrace;<var>code</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="63" mergedindex="cp">\AtEndOfClass</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="64" mergedindex="cp">\AtEndOfPackage</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Hook to insert <var>code</var> to be executed when &latex; finishes
+processing the current class or package. You can use these hooks
+multiple times; the <code>code</code> will be executed in the order that you
+called it. See also <ref label="_005cAtBeginDocument"><xrefnodename>\AtBeginDocument</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\CheckCommand&lbrace;<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]&lbrace;<var>definition</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\CheckCommand*&lbrace;<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]&lbrace;<var>definition</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="65" mergedindex="cp">\CheckCommand</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="66" mergedindex="cp">\CheckCommand*</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="87">new command, check</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Like <code>\newcommand</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</xrefnodename></pxref>) but does
+not define <var>cmd</var>; instead it checks that the current definition of
+<var>cmd</var> is exactly as given by <var>definition</var> and is or is not
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="88">long command</indexterm></cindex>
+<dfn>long</dfn> as expected. A long command is a command that accepts
+<code>\par</code> within an argument. The <var>cmd</var> command is expected to be
+long with the unstarred version of <code>\CheckCommand</code>. Raises an
+error when the check fails. This allows you to check before you start
+redefining <code>cmd</code> yourself that no other package has already
+redefined this command.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ClassError&lbrace;<var>class name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>error text</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>help text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\PackageError&lbrace;<var>package name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>error text</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>help text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ClassWarning&lbrace;<var>class name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>warning text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\PackageWarning&lbrace;<var>package name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>warning text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ClassWarningNoLine&lbrace;<var>class name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>warning text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\PackageWarningNoLine&lbrace;<var>package name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>warning text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ClassInfo&lbrace;<var>class name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>info text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\PackageInfo&lbrace;<var>package name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>info text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ClassInfoNoLine&lbrace;<var>class name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>info text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\PackageInfoNoLine&lbrace;<var>package name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>info text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="67" mergedindex="cp">\ClassError</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="68" mergedindex="cp">\PackageError</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="69" mergedindex="cp">\ClassWarning</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="70" mergedindex="cp">\PackageWarning</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="71" mergedindex="cp">\ClassWarningNoLine</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="72" mergedindex="cp">\PackageWarningNoLine</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="73" mergedindex="cp">\ClassInfo</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="74" mergedindex="cp">\PackageInfo</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="75" mergedindex="cp">\ClassInfoNoLine</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="76" mergedindex="cp">\PackageInfoNoLine</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.
+</para>
+<para>For <code>\ClassError</code> and <code>\PackageError</code> the message is
+<var>error text</var>, followed by &tex;&textrsquo;s <code>?</code> error prompt. If the
+user then asks for help by typing <code>h</code>, they see the <var>help
+text</var>.
+</para>
+<para>The four warning commands are similar except that they write
+<var>warning text</var> on the screen with no error prompt. The four info
+commands write <var>info text</var> only in the transcript file. The
+<code>NoLine</code> versions do not show the number of the line generating the
+message, while the other versions do show that number.
+</para>
+<para>To format the messages, including the <var>help text</var>: use
+<code>\protect</code> to stop a command from expanding, get a line break with
+<code>\MessageBreak</code>, and get a space with <code>\space</code> when a space
+character does not allow it, like after a command. Note that &latex;
+appends a period to the messages.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\CurrentOption</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="77" mergedindex="cp">\CurrentOption</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can only
+be used within the <var>code</var> argument of either <code>\DeclareOption</code>
+or <code>\DeclareOption*</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DeclareOption&lbrace;<var>option</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>code</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DeclareOption*&lbrace;<var>code</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="78" mergedindex="cp">\DeclareOption</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="79" mergedindex="cp">\DeclareOption*</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="89">class options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="90">package options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="91">options, class</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="92">options, package</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Make an option available to a user to invoke in their
+<code>\documentclass</code> command. For example, the <code>smcmemo</code> class
+could have an option <code>\documentclass[logo]&lbrace;smcmemo&rbrace;</code> allowing
+users to put the institutional logo on the first page. The class file
+must contain <code>\DeclareOption&lbrace;logo&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>code</var>&rbrace;</code> (and later,
+<code>\ProcessOptions</code>).
+</para>
+<para>If you request an option that has not been declared, by default this
+will produce a warning like <code>Unused global option(s): [badoption].</code>
+Change this behaviour with the starred version
+<code>\DeclareOption*&lbrace;<var>code</var>&rbrace;</code>. For example, many classes extend
+an existing class, using a declaration such as
+<code>\LoadClass&lbrace;article&rbrace;</code>, and for passing extra options to the
+underlying class use code such as this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\DeclareOption*&lbrace;%
+\PassOptionsToClass&lbrace;\CurrentOption&rbrace;&lbrace;article&rbrace;%
+&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Another example is that the class <code>smcmemo</code> may allow users to keep
+lists of memo recipients in external files. Then the user could invoke
+<code>\documentclass[math]&lbrace;smcmemo&rbrace;</code> and it will read the file
+<code>math.memo</code>. This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
+passes the option to the <code>article</code> class.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\DeclareOption*&lbrace;\InputIfFileExists&lbrace;\CurrentOption.memo&rbrace;&lbrace;&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \PassOptionsToClass&lbrace;\CurrentOption&rbrace;&lbrace;article&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DeclareRobustCommand&lbrace;<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]&lbrace;<var>definition</var>&rbrace; </itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DeclareRobustCommand*&lbrace;<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>num</var>][<var>default</var>]&lbrace;<var>definition</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="80" mergedindex="cp">\DeclareRobustCommand</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="81" mergedindex="cp">\DeclareRobustCommand*</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="93">new command, definition</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Like <code>\newcommand</code> and <code>\newcommand*</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand &amp;
+\renewcommand</xrefnodename></pxref>) but these declare a robust command, even if some code
+within the <var>definition</var> is fragile. (For a discussion of robust and
+fragile commands <pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>.) Use this command to define new
+robust commands or to redefine existing commands and make them
+robust. Unlike <code>\newcommand</code> these do not give an error if macro
+<var>cmd</var> already exists; instead, a log message is put into the
+transcript file if a command is redefined.
+</para>
+<para>Commands defined this way are a bit less efficient than those defined
+using <code>\newcommand</code> so unless the command&textrsquo;s data is fragile and the
+command is used within a moving argument, use <code>\newcommand</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="94"><r>package</r>, <code>etoolbox</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="95"><code>etoolbox</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <para>The <file>etoolbox</file> package offers the commands
+<code>\newrobustcmd</code>, <code>\newrobustcmd*</code>, as well as the commands
+<code>\renewrobustcmd</code>, <code>\renewrobustcmd*</code>, and the commands
+<code>\providerobustcmd</code>, and <code>\providerobustcmd*</code>. These are
+similar to <code>\newcommand</code>, <code>\newcommand*</code>,
+<code>\renewcommand</code>, <code>\renewcommand*</code>, <code>\providecommand</code>, and
+<code>\providecommand*</code>, but define a robust <var>cmd</var> with two
+advantages as compared to <code>\DeclareRobustCommand</code>:
+</para><enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
+<listitem>
+<para>They use the low-level e-&tex; protection mechanism rather than the
+higher level &latex; <code>\protect</code> mechanism, so they do not incur
+the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
+</para></listitem><listitem>
+<para>They make the same distinction between <code>\new&dots;</code>,
+<code>\renew&dots;</code>, and <code>\provide&dots;</code>, as the standard
+commands, so they do not just make a log message when you redefine
+<var>cmd</var> that already exists, in that case you need to use either
+<code>\renew&dots;</code> or <code>\provide&dots;</code> or you get an error.
+</para></listitem></enumerate>
+
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\IfFileExists&lbrace;<var>file name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>true code</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>false code</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\InputIfFileExists&lbrace;<var>file name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>true code</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>false code</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="82" mergedindex="cp">\IfFileExists</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="83" mergedindex="cp">\InputIfFileExists</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Execute <var>true code</var> if &latex; finds the file <file><var>file
+name</var></file> or <var>false code</var> otherwise. In the first case it executing
+<var>true code</var> and then inputs the file. Thus the command
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\IfFileExists&lbrace;img.pdf&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \includegraphics&lbrace;img.pdf&rbrace;&rbrace;&lbrace;\typeout&lbrace;!! img.pdf not found&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>will include the graphic <file>img.pdf</file> if it is found and otherwise
+give a warning.
+</para>
+<para>This command looks for the file in all search paths that &latex; uses,
+not only in the current directory. To look only in the current
+directory do something like <code>\IfFileExists&lbrace;./filename&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>true
+code</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>false code</var>&rbrace;</code>. If you ask for a filename without a
+<code>.tex</code> extension then &latex; will first look for the file by
+appending the <code>.tex</code>; for more on how &latex; handles file
+extensions see <ref label="_005cinput"><xrefnodename>\input</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\LoadClass[<var>options list</var>]&lbrace;<var>class name</var>&rbrace;[<var>release date</var>]</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\LoadClassWithOptions&lbrace;<var>class name</var>&rbrace;[<var>release date</var>]</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="84" mergedindex="cp">\LoadClass</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="85" mergedindex="cp">\LoadClassWithOptions</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Load a class, as with <code>\documentclass[<var>options
+list</var>]&lbrace;<var>class name</var>&rbrace;[<var>release info</var>]</code>. An example is
+<code>\LoadClass[twoside]&lbrace;article&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The <var>options list</var>, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+<var>release date</var> is optional. If present it must have the form
+<var>YYYY/MM/DD</var>.
+<!-- c BTW, there are at-macros documented in macros2e.pdf to check the version -->
+<!-- c and do some actions conditionnally on version later or not to some -->
+<!-- c date. -->
+</para>
+<para>If you request a <var>release date</var> and the date of the package
+installed on your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the
+screen and in the log like this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">You have requested, on input line 4, version `2038/01/19' of
+document class article, but only version `2014/09/29 v1.4h
+Standard LaTeX document class' is available.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The command version <code>\LoadClassWithOptions</code> uses the list of
+options for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed
+to it via <code>\PassOptionsToClass</code>. This is a convenience command
+that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the standard
+<code>article</code> class, without having to track which options were passed.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ExecuteOptions&lbrace;<var>options-list</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="86" mergedindex="cp">\ExecuteOptions</indexterm></findex>
+<para>For each option <var>option</var> in the <var>options-list</var>, in order, this command
+executes the command <code>\ds&arobase;<var>option</var></code>. If this command is not
+defined then that option is silently ignored.
+</para>
+<para>It can be used to provide a default option list before
+<code>\ProcessOptions</code>. For example, if in a class file you want the
+default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
+<code>\ExecuteOptions&lbrace;11pt&rbrace;\ProcessOptions\relax</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\NeedsTeXFormat&lbrace;<var>format</var>&rbrace;[<var>format date</var>]</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="87" mergedindex="cp">\NeedsTeXFormat</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often issued
+as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
+<code>\NeedsTeXFormat&lbrace;LaTeX2e&rbrace;</code>. When a document using that class is
+processed, the format name given here must match the format that is
+actually being run (including that the <var>format</var> string is case
+sensitive). If it does not match then execution stops with an error
+like <samp>This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.</samp>
+</para>
+<para>To specify a version of the format that you know to have certain
+features, include the optional <var>format date</var> on which those features
+were implemented. If present it must be in the form <code>YYYY/MM/DD</code>.
+If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
+<var>format date</var> then you get a warning like this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">You have requested release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only
+release `2016/02/01' is available.
+</pre></example>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\OptionNotUsed</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="88" mergedindex="cp">\OptionNotUsed</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be used
+within the <var>code</var> argument of either <code>\DeclareOption</code> or
+<code>\DeclareOption*</code>.
+</para>
+<!-- c I cannot reproduce this behavior as it is documented in clsguide. -->
+<!-- c In the absence of a @code{\DeclareOption*} declaration, @LaTeX{} issues -->
+<!-- c on the console a warning like @code{LaTeX Warning: Unused global -->
+<!-- c option(s): [unusedoption].} with the list of not-used options when it -->
+<!-- c reaches @code{\begin@{document@}}. -->
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\PassOptionsToClass&lbrace;<var>option list</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>class name</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\PassOptionsToPackage&lbrace;<var>option list</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>package name</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="89" mergedindex="cp">\PassOptionsToClass</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="90" mergedindex="cp">\PassOptionsToPackage</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Adds the options in the comma-separated list <var>option list</var> to the
+options used by any future <code>\RequirePackage</code> or <code>\usepackage</code>
+command for package <var>package name</var> or the class <var>class name</var>.
+</para>
+<para>The reason for these commands is: you may load a package any number of
+times with no options but if you want options then you may only supply
+them when you first load the package. Loading a package with options
+more than once will get you an error like <code>Option clash for package
+foo.</code> (&latex; throws an error even if there is no conflict between the
+options.)
+</para>
+<para>If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can collapse
+that to once, for example replacing the two
+<code>\RequirePackage[landscape]&lbrace;geometry&rbrace;</code> and
+<code>\RequirePackage[margins=1in]&lbrace;geometry&rbrace;</code> with the single command
+<code>\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]&lbrace;geometry&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>However, imagine that you are loading <file>firstpkg</file> and inside that
+package it loads <file>secondpkg</file>, and you need the second package to be
+loaded with option <code>draft</code>. Then before doing the first package
+you must queue up the options for the second package, like this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\PassOptionsToPackage&lbrace;draft&rbrace;&lbrace;secondpkg&rbrace;
+\RequirePackage&lbrace;firstpkg&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>(If <code>firstpkg.sty</code> loads an option in conflict with what you want
+then you may have to alter its source.)
+</para>
+<para>These commands are useful for general users as well as class and package
+writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the <code>graphicx</code>
+package with the option <code>draft</code> and also wants to use a class
+<code>foo</code> that loads the <code>graphicx</code> package, but without that
+option. The user could start their &latex; file with
+<code>\PassOptionsToPackage&lbrace;draft&rbrace;&lbrace;graphicx&rbrace;\documentclass&lbrace;foo&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProcessOptions</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProcessOptions*<var>\&arobase;options</var></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="91" mergedindex="cp">\ProcessOptions</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="92" mergedindex="cp">\ProcessOptions*</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked. Include it
+in the class file as <code>\ProcessOptions\relax</code> (because of the
+existence of the starred command).
+</para>
+<para>Options come in two types. <dfn>Local options</dfn> have been specified for this
+particular package in the <var>options</var> argument of
+<code>\PassOptionsToPackage&lbrace;<var>options</var>&rbrace;</code>,
+<code>\usepackage[<var>options</var>]</code>, or
+<code>\RequirePackage[<var>options</var>]</code>. <dfn>Global options</dfn> are those given
+by the class user in <code>\documentclass[<var>options</var>]</code> (If an option
+is specified both locally and globally then it is local.)
+</para>
+<para>When <code>\ProcessOptions</code> is called for a package <file>pkg.sty</file>, the
+following happens:
+</para><enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
+<listitem>
+<para>For each option <var>option</var> so far declared
+with <code>\DeclareOption</code>, it looks to see if that option is either a
+global or a local option for <code>pkg</code>. If so then it executes the
+declared code. This is done in the order in which these options were
+given in <file>pkg.sty</file>.
+</para></listitem><listitem>
+<para>For each remaining local option, it executes the command
+<code>\ds&arobase;</code><var>option</var> if it has been defined somewhere (other than by
+a <code>\DeclareOption</code>); otherwise, it executes the default option code
+given in <code>\DeclareOption*</code>. If no default option code has been
+declared then it gives an error message. This is done in the order in
+which these options were specified.
+</para></listitem></enumerate>
+
+<para>When <code>\ProcessOptions</code> is called for a class it works in the same
+way except that all options are local, and the default <var>code</var> for
+<code>\DeclareOption*</code> is <code>\OptionNotUsed</code> rather than an error.
+</para>
+<para>The starred version <code>\ProcessOptions*</code> executes the
+options in the order specified in the calling commands, rather than in
+the order of declaration in the class or package. For a package this
+means that the global options are processed first.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProvidesClass&lbrace;<var>class name</var>&rbrace;[<var>release date</var> <var>brief additional information</var>]</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProvidesClass&lbrace;<var>class name</var>&rbrace;[<var>release date</var>]</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProvidesPackage&lbrace;<var>package name</var>&rbrace;[<var>release date</var> <var>brief additional information</var>]</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProvidesPackage&lbrace;<var>package name</var>&rbrace;[<var>release date</var>]</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="93" mergedindex="cp">\ProvidesClass</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="94" mergedindex="cp">\ProvidesPackage</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and
+the log file.
+</para>
+<para>When you load a class or package, for example with
+<code>\documentclass&lbrace;smcmemo&rbrace;</code> or <code>\usepackage&lbrace;test&rbrace;</code>, &latex;
+inputs a file. If the name of the file does not match the class or
+package name declared in it then you get a warning. Thus, if you invoke
+<code>\documentclass&lbrace;smcmemo&rbrace;</code>, and the file <file>smcmemo.cls</file> has
+the statement <code>\ProvidesClass&lbrace;xxx&rbrace;</code> then you get a warning like
+<code>You have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document
+class provides 'xxx'.</code> This warning does not prevent &latex; from
+processing the rest of the class file normally.
+</para>
+<para>If you include the optional argument then you must include a date,
+before any spaces, of the form <code>YYYY/MM/DD</code>. The rest of the
+optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally identifies the
+class, and is written to the screen during compilation and to the log
+file. Thus, if your file <file>smcmemo.cls</file> contains the line
+<code>\ProvidesClass&lbrace;smcmemo&rbrace;[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]</code> and
+your document&textrsquo;s first line is <code>\documentclass&lbrace;smcmemo&rbrace;</code> then you
+will see <code>Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to ask
+to be warned if the version of the class or package is earlier than
+<var>release date</var>. For instance, a user could enter
+<code>\documentclass&lbrace;smcmemo&rbrace;[2018/10/12]</code> or
+<code>\usepackage&lbrace;foo&rbrace;[[2017/07/07]]</code> to require a class or package
+with certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier
+than the given date. (Although, in practice package users only rarely
+include a date, and class users almost never do.)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ProvidesFile&lbrace;<var>file name</var>&rbrace;[<var>additional information</var>]</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="95" mergedindex="cp">\ProvidesFile</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
+configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in that
+file and you get in the log a string like <code>File: test.config
+2017/10/12 config file for test.cls</code> for <var>file name</var> equal to
+<samp>test.config</samp> and <var>additional information</var> equal to
+<samp>2017/10/12 config file for test.cls</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\RequirePackage[<var>option list</var>]&lbrace;<var>package name</var>&rbrace;[<var>release date</var>]</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\RequirePackageWithOptions&lbrace;<var>package name</var>&rbrace;[<var>release date</var>]</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="96" mergedindex="cp">\RequirePackage</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="97" mergedindex="cp">\RequirePackageWithOptions</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Load a package, like the command <code>\usepackage</code> (<pxref label="Additional-packages"><xrefnodename>Additional
+packages</xrefnodename></pxref>). The &latex; development team strongly recommends use of
+these commands over Plain&nbsp;&tex;&textrsquo;s <code>\input</code>; see the Class
+Guide. An example is
+<code>\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]&lbrace;geometry&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The <var>option list</var>, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+<var>release date</var>, if present, must have the form <var>YYYY/MM/DD</var>. If
+the release date of the package as installed on your system is earlier
+than <var>release date</var> then you get a warning like <code>You have
+requested, on input line 9, version `2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but
+only version `2000/01/01' is available</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\RequirePackageWithOptions</code> version uses the list of options
+for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to it
+via <code>\PassOptionsToClass</code>. This is a convenience command to allow
+easily building classes on existing ones without having to track which
+options were passed.
+</para>
+<para>The difference between <code>\usepackage</code> and <code>\RequirePackage</code> is
+small. The <code>\usepackage</code> command is intended for the document file
+while <code>\RequirePackage</code> is intended for package and class files.
+Thus, using <code>\usepackage</code> before the <code>\documentclass</code> command
+causes &latex; to give error like <code>\usepackage before
+\documentclass</code>, but you can use <code>\RequirePackage</code> there.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Fonts" spaces=" "><nodename>Fonts</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Layout</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Document classes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Fonts</sectiontitle>
+<anchor name="Typefaces">Typefaces</anchor><!-- c old name -->
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="96">typefaces</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="97">fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Two important aspects of selecting a <dfn>font</dfn> are specifying a size
+and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Font styles</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Select roman, italics, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Font sizes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Select point size.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Low-level font commands</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Select encoding, family, series, shape.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Font-styles" spaces=" "><nodename>Font styles</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Font sizes</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Fonts</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Font styles</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="98">font styles</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="99">type styles</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="100">styles of text</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The following type style commands are supported by &latex;.
+</para>
+<para>In the table below the listed commands, the <code>\text...</code> commands,
+is used with an argument, as in <code>\textit&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</code>. This is
+the preferred form. But shown after it, in parenthesis, is the
+corresponding declaration form, which is sometimes useful. This form
+takes no arguments, as in <code>&lbrace;\itshape <var>text</var>&rbrace;</code>. The scope of
+the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end
+of the current group. In addition, each has an environment form such as
+<code>\begin&lbrace;itshape&rbrace;...\end&lbrace;itshape&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, are
+cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying either of
+<code>\sffamily\bfseries</code> or <code>\bfseries\sffamily</code>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="98" mergedindex="cp">\nocorrlist</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="99" mergedindex="cp">\nocorr</indexterm></findex>
+<para>One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert italic
+corrections if needed (<pxref label="_005c_002f"><xrefnodename>\/</xrefnodename></pxref>). Specifically, they insert the
+italic correction unless the following character is in the list
+<code>\nocorrlist</code>, which by default consists of a period and a comma.
+To suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use
+<code>\nocorr</code> at the start or end of the command argument, such as
+<code>\textit&lbrace;\nocorr text&rbrace;</code> or <code>\textsc&lbrace;text \nocorr&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textrm (\rmfamily)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="100" mergedindex="cp">\textrm</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="101" mergedindex="cp">\rmfamily</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Roman.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textit (\itshape)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="102" mergedindex="cp">\textit</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="103" mergedindex="cp">\itshape</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Italics.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textmd (\mdseries)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="104" mergedindex="cp">\textmd</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="105" mergedindex="cp">\mdseries</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Medium weight (default).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textbf (\bfseries)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="106" mergedindex="cp">\textbf</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="107" mergedindex="cp">\bfseries</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Boldface.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textup (\upshape)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="108" mergedindex="cp">\textup</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="109" mergedindex="cp">\upshape</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Upright (default).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textsl (\slshape)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="110" mergedindex="cp">\textsl</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="111" mergedindex="cp">\slshape</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Slanted.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textsf (\sffamily)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="112" mergedindex="cp">\textsf</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="113" mergedindex="cp">\sffamily</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Sans serif.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textsc (\scshape)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="114" mergedindex="cp">\textsc</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="115" mergedindex="cp">\scshape</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Small caps.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\texttt (\ttfamily)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="116" mergedindex="cp">\texttt</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="117" mergedindex="cp">\ttfamily</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Typewriter.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textnormal (\normalfont)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="118" mergedindex="cp">\textnormal</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="119" mergedindex="cp">\normalfont</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Main document font.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="101">emphasis</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="120" mergedindex="cp">\emph</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Although it also changes fonts, the <code>\emph&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</code> command
+is semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
+substitute for <code>\textit</code>. For example, <code>\emph&lbrace;<var>start
+text</var> \emph&lbrace;<var>middle text</var>&rbrace; <var>end text</var>&rbrace;</code> will result in the
+<var>start text</var> and <var>end text</var> in italics, but <var>middle text</var>
+will be in roman.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
+switch to the given style, that is, are <emph>not</emph> cumulative. They are
+used as declarations: <code>&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>...&rbrace;</code> instead of
+<code>\<var>cmd</var>&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>(The unconditional commands below are an older version of font
+switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most
+circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
+what you want.)
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="121" mergedindex="cp">\bf</indexterm>\bf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="102">bold font</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Switch to bold face.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="122" mergedindex="cp">\cal</indexterm>\cal</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="103">script letters for math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="104">calligraphic letters for math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="123" mergedindex="cp">\it</indexterm>\it</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="105">italic font</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Italics.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="124" mergedindex="cp">\rm</indexterm>\rm</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="106">roman font</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Roman.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="125" mergedindex="cp">\sc</indexterm>\sc</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="107">small caps font</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Small caps.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="126" mergedindex="cp">\sf</indexterm>\sf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="108">sans serif font</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Sans serif.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="127" mergedindex="cp">\sl</indexterm>\sl</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="109">slanted font</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="110">oblique font</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Slanted (oblique).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="128" mergedindex="cp">\tt</indexterm>\tt</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="111">typewriter font</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="112">monospace font</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="113">fixed-width font</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>The <code>\em</code> command is the unconditional version of <code>\emph</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The following commands are for use in math mode. They are not
+cumulative, so <code>\mathbf&lbrace;\mathit&lbrace;<var>symbol</var>&rbrace;&rbrace;</code> does not
+create a boldface and italic <var>symbol</var>; instead, it will just be in
+italics. This is because typically math symbols need consistent
+typographic treatment, regardless of the surrounding environment.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathrm</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="129" mergedindex="cp">\mathrm</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Roman, for use in math mode.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathbf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="130" mergedindex="cp">\mathbf</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Boldface, for use in math mode.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathsf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="131" mergedindex="cp">\mathsf</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathtt</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="132" mergedindex="cp">\mathtt</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathit</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">(\mit)</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Italics, for use in math mode.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathnormal</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="133" mergedindex="cp">\mathnormal</indexterm></findex>
+<para>For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathcal</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="134" mergedindex="cp">\mathcal</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="135" mergedindex="cp">\mathversion</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="114">math, bold</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="115">bold math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>In addition, the command <code>\mathversion&lbrace;bold&rbrace;</code> can be used for
+switching to bold letters and symbols in
+formulas. <code>\mathversion&lbrace;normal&rbrace;</code> restores the default.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="136" mergedindex="cp">\oldstylenums</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="116">numerals, old-style</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="117">old-style numerals</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="118">lining numerals</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="119"><r>package</r>, <code>textcomp</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="120"><code>textcomp</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Finally, the command <code>\oldstylenums&lbrace;<var>numerals</var>&rbrace;</code> will typeset
+so-called &textldquo;old-style&textrdquo; numerals, which have differing heights and
+depths (and sometimes widths) from the standard &textldquo;lining&textrdquo; numerals,
+which all have the same height as uppercase letters. &latex;&textrsquo;s
+default fonts support this, and will respect <code>\textbf</code> (but not
+other styles; there are no italic old-style numerals in Computer
+Modern). Many other fonts have old-style numerals also; sometimes the
+<code>textcomp</code> package must be loaded, and sometimes package options
+are provided to make them the default. FAQ entry:
+<url><urefurl>http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Font-sizes" spaces=" "><nodename>Font sizes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Low-level font commands</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Font styles</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Fonts</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Font sizes</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="121">font sizes</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="122">typeface sizes</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="123">sizes of text</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The following standard type size commands are supported by &latex;.
+The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font
+size used (in points) with the <samp>10pt</samp>, <samp>11pt</samp>, and
+<samp>12pt</samp> document size options, respectively (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class
+options</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="137" mergedindex="cp">\tiny</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="138" mergedindex="cp">\scriptsize</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="139" mergedindex="cp">\footnotesize</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="140" mergedindex="cp">\small</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="141" mergedindex="cp">\normalsize</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="142" mergedindex="cp">\large</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="143" mergedindex="cp">\Large</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="144" mergedindex="cp">\LARGE</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="145" mergedindex="cp">\huge</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="146" mergedindex="cp">\Huge</indexterm></findex>
+
+<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on"><code>\normalsize</code> (default)<spacecmd type="spc"/><spacecmd type="spc"/></columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">24.88<spacecmd type="spc"/><spacecmd type="spc"/></columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">24.88<spacecmd type="spc"/><spacecmd type="spc"/></columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">24.88</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
+<thead><row><entry command="headitem" spaces=" "><para>Command </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>10pt</code> </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>11pt</code> </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>12pt</code>
+</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\tiny</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>5 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>6 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>6
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\scriptsize</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>7 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>8 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>8
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\footnotesize</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>8 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>9 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>10
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\small</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>9 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>10 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>10.95
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\normalsize</code> (default)
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>10 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>10.95 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>12
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\large</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>12 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>12 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>14.4
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\Large</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>14.4 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>14.4 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>17.28
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\LARGE</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>17.28 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>17.28 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>20.74
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\huge</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>20.74 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>20.74 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>24.88
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\Huge</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>24.88 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>24.88 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>24.88
+</para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
+
+<para>The commands are listed here in declaration forms. You use them by
+declaring them, as with this example.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;quotation&rbrace; \small
+ The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao.
+\end&lbrace;quotation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The scope of the <code>\small</code> lasts until the end of the
+<code>quotation</code> environment. It would also end at the next type style
+command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it in
+extra curly braces <code>&lbrace;\small We are here, we are here, we are
+here!&rbrace;</code>. You can instead use the environment form of these commands;
+for instance, <code>\begin&lbrace;tiny&rbrace;...\end&lbrace;tiny&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Low_002dlevel-font-commands" spaces=" "><nodename>Low-level font commands</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Font sizes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Fonts</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Low-level font commands</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="124">low-level font commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="125">font commands, low-level</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
+packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
+ones.
+<!-- c xx but it should be complete -->
+<!-- c xx something about ultimately reading ENCFAM.fd? -->
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="low-level-font-commands-fontencoding">low level font commands fontencoding</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontencoding&lbrace;<var>encoding</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="147" mergedindex="cp">\fontencoding</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There are a
+large number of valid encodings. The most common are <code>OT1</code>,
+Knuth&textrsquo;s original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
+<code>T1</code>, also known as the Cork encoding, which has support for the
+accented characters used by the most widespread European languages
+(German, French, Italian, Polish and others), which allows &tex; to
+hyphenate words containing accented letters. For more, see
+<url><urefurl>https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-fontfamily">low level font commands fontfamily</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontfamily&lbrace;<var>family</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="148" mergedindex="cp">\fontfamily</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="126">families, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="127">font catalogue</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Select the font family. The web page
+<url><urefurl>http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/</urefurl></url> provides one way to browse
+through many of the fonts easily used with &latex;. Here are
+examples of some common families.
+</para>
+<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on">font</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">Computer Modern Typewriter more space</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
+<tbody><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>pag</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Avant Garde
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>fvs</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Bitstream Vera Sans
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>pbk</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Bookman
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>bch</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Charter
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>ccr</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Computer Concrete
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>cmr</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Computer Modern
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>cmss</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Computer Modern Sans Serif
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>cmtt</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Computer Modern Typewriter
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>pcr</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Courier
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>phv</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Helvetica
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>fi4</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Inconsolata
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>lmr</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Latin Modern
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>lmss</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Latin Modern Sans
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>lmtt</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Latin Modern Typewriter
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>pnc</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>New Century Schoolbook
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>ppl</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Palatino
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>ptm</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Times
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>uncl</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Uncial
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>put</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Utopia
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>pzc</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Zapf Chancery
+</para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
+
+
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-fontseries">low level font commands fontseries</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontseries&lbrace;<var>series</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="149" mergedindex="cp">\fontseries</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="128">series, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Select the font series. A <dfn>series</dfn> combines a <dfn>weight</dfn> and a
+<dfn>width</dfn>. Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible
+combinations. Some common combined series values include:
+</para>
+<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on">xx</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">Medium (normal)xx</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
+<tbody><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>m</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Medium (normal)
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>b</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Bold
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>c</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Condensed
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>bc</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Bold condensed
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>bx</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Bold extended
+</para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="129">weights, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The possible values for weight, individually, are:
+</para>
+<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on">xx</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">Medium (normal) xx</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
+<tbody><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>ul</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Ultra light
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>el</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Extra light
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>l</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Light
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>sl</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Semi light
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>m</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Medium (normal)
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>sb</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Semi bold
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>b</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Bold
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>eb</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Extra bold
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>ub</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Ultra bold
+</para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="130">widths, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The possible values for width, individually, are (the meaning and
+relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces):
+</para>
+<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on">xx</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">Ultra condensed</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
+<tbody><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>uc</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Ultra condensed
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>ec</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Extra condensed
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>c</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Condensed
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>sc</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Semi condensed
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>m</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Medium
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>sx</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Semi expanded
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>x</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Expanded
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>ex</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Extra expanded
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>ux</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Ultra expanded
+</para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
+
+<para>When forming the <var>series</var> string from the weight and width, drop the
+<code>m</code> that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both
+weight and width are <code>m</code>, in which case use just one
+(<samp><code>m</code></samp>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontshape&lbrace;<var>shape</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="150" mergedindex="cp">\fontshape</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="131">shapes, of fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-fontshape">low level font commands fontshape</anchor>
+<para>Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+</para>
+<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on">xx</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">Slanted (oblique)xx</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
+<tbody><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>n</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Upright (normal)
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>it</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Italic
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>sl</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Slanted (oblique)
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>sc</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Small caps
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>ui</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Upright italics
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>ol</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Outline
+</para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
+
+<para>The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and
+small caps are often missing as well.
+</para>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-fontsize">low level font commands fontsize</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontsize&lbrace;<var>size</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>skip</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="151" mergedindex="cp">\fontsize</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="132">font size</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="152" mergedindex="cp">\baselineskip</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Set the font size and the line spacing. The unit of both parameters
+defaults to points (<code>pt</code>). The line spacing is the nominal
+vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline. It is stored in the
+parameter <code>\baselineskip</code>. The default <code>\baselineskip</code> for
+the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the <code>\fontsize</code>.
+Changing <code>\baselineskip</code> directly is inadvisable since its value is
+reset every time a size change happens; see <code>\baselinestretch</code>, next.
+</para>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-baselinestretch">low level font commands baselinestretch</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\baselinestretch</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="153" mergedindex="cp">\baselinestretch</indexterm></findex>
+<para>&latex; multiplies the line spacing by the value of the
+<code>\baselinestretch</code> parameter; the default factor is 1. A change
+takes effect when <code>\selectfont</code> (see below) is called. You can
+make a line skip change happen for the entire document, for instance
+doubling it, by doing <code>\renewcommand&lbrace;\baselinestretch&rbrace;&lbrace;2.0&rbrace;</code> in
+the preamble.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="133"><r>package</r>, <code>setspace</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="134"><code>setspace</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="135">double spacing</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
+<file>setspace</file> package. In addition to offering a number of spacing
+options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in places
+where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and figure
+captions. See the package documentation.
+</para>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-linespread">low level font commands linespread</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\linespread&lbrace;<var>factor</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="154" mergedindex="cp">\linespread</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Equivalent to
+<code>\renewcommand&lbrace;\baselinestretch&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>factor</var>&rbrace;</code>, and
+therefore must be followed by <code>\selectfont</code> to have any effect.
+Best specified in the preamble, or use the <code>setspace</code> package, as
+just described.
+</para>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-selectfont">low level font commands selectfont</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\selectfont</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="155" mergedindex="cp">\selectfont</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The effects of the font commands described above do not happen until
+<code>\selectfont</code> is called, as in
+<code>\fontfamily&lbrace;<var>familyname</var>&rbrace;\selectfont</code>. It is often useful
+to put this in a macro:&linebreak;
+<code>\newcommand*&lbrace;\myfont&rbrace;&lbrace;\fontfamily&lbrace;<var>familyname</var>&rbrace;\selectfont&rbrace;</code>&linebreak;
+(<pxref label="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<anchor name="low-level-font-commands-usefont">low level font commands usefont</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\usefont&lbrace;<var>enc</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>family</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>series</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>shape</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="156" mergedindex="cp">\usefont</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The same as invoking <code>\fontencoding</code>, <code>\fontfamily</code>,
+<code>\fontseries</code> and <code>\fontshape</code> with the given parameters,
+followed by <code>\selectfont</code>. For example:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usefont&lbrace;ot1&rbrace;&lbrace;cmr&rbrace;&lbrace;m&rbrace;&lbrace;n&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Layout" spaces=" "><nodename>Layout</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Sectioning</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Fonts</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Layout</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="136">layout commands</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Commands for controlling the general page layout.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\onecolumn</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Use one-column layout.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\twocolumn</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Use two-column layout.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\flushbottom</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Make all text pages the same height.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\raggedbottom</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Allow text pages of differing height.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Page layout parameters</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve"><code>\headheight</code> <code>\footskip</code>.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Floats</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Figures, tables, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005conecolumn" spaces=" "><nodename>\onecolumn</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\twocolumn</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Layout</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\onecolumn</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="157" mergedindex="cp">\onecolumn</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="137">one-column output</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\onecolumn
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Start a new page and produce single-column output. If the document is
+given the class option <code>onecolumn</code> then this is the default
+behavior (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></pxref>). This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005ctwocolumn" spaces=" "><nodename>\twocolumn</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\flushbottom</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\onecolumn</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Layout</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\twocolumn</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="158" mergedindex="cp">\twocolumn</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="138">multicolumn text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="139">two-column output</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\twocolumn
+\twocolumn[<var>prelim one column text</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is given
+the class option <code>twocolumn</code> then this is the default
+(<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></pxref>). This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>If the optional <var>prelim one column text</var> argument
+is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column
+typesetting starts.
+</para>
+<para>These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="159" mergedindex="cp">\columnsep</indexterm>\columnsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="twocolumn-columnsep">twocolumn columnsep</anchor>
+<para>The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with a
+command such as <code>\setlength&lbrace;\columnsep&rbrace;&lbrace;40pt&rbrace;</code> You must change
+it before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good
+place.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="160" mergedindex="cp">\columnseprule</indexterm>\columnseprule</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="twocolumn-columnseprule">twocolumn columnseprule</anchor>
+<para>The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway between
+the two columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that there is no rule.
+Change it with a command such as
+<code>\setlength&lbrace;\columnseprule&rbrace;&lbrace;0.4pt&rbrace;</code>, before the two-column
+environment starts.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="161" mergedindex="cp">\columnwidth</indexterm>\columnwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="twocolumn-columnwidth">twocolumn columnwidth</anchor>
+<para>The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to
+<code>\textwidth</code>. In two-column mode by default &latex; sets the
+width of each of the two columns to be half of <code>\textwidth</code> minus
+<code>\columnsep</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>In a two-column document, the starred environments <code>table*</code> and
+<code>figure*</code> are two columns wide, whereas the unstarred environments
+<code>table</code> and <code>figure</code> take up only one column (<pxref label="figure"><xrefnodename>figure</xrefnodename></pxref>
+and <pxref label="table"><xrefnodename>table</xrefnodename></pxref>). &latex; places starred floats at the top of a page.
+The following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="twocolumn-dbltopfraction">twocolumn dbltopfraction</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="162" mergedindex="cp">\dbltopfraction</indexterm>\dbltopfraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
+occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning that
+the height of a <code>table*</code> or <code>figure*</code> environment must not
+exceed <code>0.7\textheight</code> . If the height of your starred float
+environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following actions
+to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the document:
+</para>
+<itemize commandarg="bullet" spaces=" " endspaces=" "><itemprepend><formattingcommand command="bullet"/></itemprepend>
+<listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>Use the <code>[tp]</code> location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put
+the bulky float on a page by itself, as well as at the top of a page.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>Use the <code>[t!]</code> location specifier to override the effect of
+<code>\dbltopfraction</code> for this particular float.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>Increase the value of <code>\dbltopfraction</code> to a suitably large number,
+to avoid going to float pages so soon.
+</para></listitem></itemize>
+
+<para>You can redefine it, as with
+<code>\renewcommand&lbrace;\dbltopfraction&rbrace;&lbrace;0.9&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="twocolumn-dblfloatpagefraction">twocolumn dblfloatpagefraction</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="163" mergedindex="cp">\dblfloatpagefraction</indexterm>\dblfloatpagefraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction
+that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of blank space.
+&latex;&textrsquo;s default is <code>0.5</code>. Change it with <code>\renewcommand</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="twocolumn-dblfloatsep">twocolumn dblfloatsep</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="164" mergedindex="cp">\dblfloatsep</indexterm>\dblfloatsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance
+between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page. The default is
+<code>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</code> for a document set at <code>10pt</code> or
+<code>11pt</code>, and <code>14pt plus2pt minus4pt</code> for a document set at
+<code>12pt</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="twocolumn-dbltextfloatsep">twocolumn dbltextfloatsep</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="165" mergedindex="cp">\dbltextfloatsep</indexterm>\dbltextfloatsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or
+bottom of a page and the main text. The default is <code>20pt plus2pt
+minus4pt</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="twocolumn-dbltopnumber">twocolumn dbltopnumber</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="166" mergedindex="cp">\dbltopnumber</indexterm>\dbltopnumber</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the
+maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The &latex;
+default is <code>2</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<!-- c From egreg at http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/142232/339 -->
+<para>This example uses <code>\twocolumn</code>&textrsquo;s optional argument of to create a
+title that spans the two-column article:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass[twocolumn]&lbrace;article&rbrace;
+\newcommand&lbrace;\authormark&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\textsuperscript&lbrace;#1&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\twocolumn[&lbrace;% inside this optional argument goes one-column text
+ \centering
+ \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
+ \large Author One\authormark&lbrace;1&rbrace;,
+ Author Two\authormark&lbrace;2&rbrace;,
+ Author Three\authormark&lbrace;1&rbrace; \\[1em]
+ \normalsize
+ \begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;p&lbrace;.2\textwidth&rbrace;&arobase;&lbrace;\hspace&lbrace;2em&rbrace;&rbrace;p&lbrace;.2\textwidth&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \authormark&lbrace;1&rbrace;Department one &amp;\authormark&lbrace;2&rbrace;Department two \\
+ School one &amp;School two
+ \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;\\[3em] % space below title part
+ &rbrace;]
+
+Two column text here.
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cflushbottom" spaces=" "><nodename>\flushbottom</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\raggedbottom</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\twocolumn</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Layout</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\flushbottom</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="167" mergedindex="cp">\flushbottom</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Make all pages in the documents after this declaration have the same
+height, by stretching the vertical space where necessary to fill out the
+page. This is most often used when making two-sided documents since the
+differences in facing pages can be glaring.
+</para>
+<para>If &tex; cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
+then you get a message like <samp>Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active</samp>. If you get that, one option is to
+change to <code>\raggedbottom</code> (<pxref label="_005craggedbottom"><xrefnodename>\raggedbottom</xrefnodename></pxref>). Alternatively,
+you can adjust the <code>textheight</code> to make compatible pages, or you
+can add some vertical stretch glue between lines or between paragraphs,
+as in <code>\setlength&lbrace;\parskip&rbrace;&lbrace;0ex plus0.1ex&rbrace;</code>. Your last option
+is to, in a final editing stage, adjust the height of individual pages
+(<pxref label="_005cenlargethispage"><xrefnodename>\enlargethispage</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\flushbottom</code> state is the default only if you select the
+<code>twoside</code> document class option (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005craggedbottom" spaces=" "><nodename>\raggedbottom</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Page layout parameters</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\flushbottom</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Layout</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\raggedbottom</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="168" mergedindex="cp">\raggedbottom</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="140">stretch, omitting vertical</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Make all later pages the natural height of the material on that page; no
+rubber vertical lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
+document the facing pages may be different heights. This command can go
+at any point in the document body. See <ref label="_005cflushbottom"><xrefnodename>\flushbottom</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>This is the default unless you select the <code>twoside</code> document class
+option (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Page-layout-parameters" spaces=" "><nodename>Page layout parameters</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Floats</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\raggedbottom</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Layout</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Page layout parameters</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="141">page layout parameters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="142">parameters, page layout</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="143">layout, page parameters for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="144">header, parameters for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="145">footer, parameters for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="146">running header and footer</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="169" mergedindex="cp">\columnsep</indexterm>\columnsep</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="170" mergedindex="cp">\columnseprule</indexterm>\columnseprule</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="171" mergedindex="cp">\columnwidth</indexterm>\columnwidth</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="172" mergedindex="cp">\columnsep</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="173" mergedindex="cp">\columnseprule</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="174" mergedindex="cp">\columnwidth</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-columnsep">page layout parameters columnsep</anchor>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-columnseprule">page layout parameters columnseprule</anchor>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-columnwidth">page layout parameters columnwidth</anchor>
+<para>The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between the
+columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class option
+<code>twocolumn</code> is in effect (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<xref label="_005ctwocolumn"><xrefnodename>\twocolumn</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="175" mergedindex="cp">\headheight</indexterm>\headheight</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="176" mergedindex="cp">\headheight</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-headheight">page layout parameters headheight</anchor>
+<para>Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in the
+<code>article</code>, <code>report</code>, and <code>book</code> classes is <samp>12pt</samp>,
+at all type sizes.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="177" mergedindex="cp">\headsep</indexterm>\headsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="178" mergedindex="cp">\headsep</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-headsep">page layout parameters headsep</anchor>
+<para>Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of
+the main text. The default in the <code>article</code> and <code>report</code>
+classes is <samp>25pt</samp>. In the <code>book</code> class the default is: if the
+document is set at 10pt then it is <samp>0.25in</samp>, and at 11pt and 12pt
+it is <samp>0.275in</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="179" mergedindex="cp">\footskip</indexterm>\footskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="180" mergedindex="cp">\footskip</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-footskip">page layout parameters footskip</anchor>
+<para>Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of
+the page footer. The default in the <code>article</code> and <code>report</code>
+classes is <samp>30pt</samp>. In the <code>book</code> class the default is: when
+the type size is 10pt the default is <samp>0.35in</samp>, while at 11pt it is
+<samp>0.38in</samp>, and at 12pt it is <samp>30pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="181" mergedindex="cp">\linewidth</indexterm>\linewidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="182" mergedindex="cp">\linewidth</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-linewidth">page layout parameters linewidth</anchor>
+<para>Width of the current line, decreased for each nested <code>list</code>
+(<pxref label="list"><xrefnodename>list</xrefnodename></pxref>). That is, the nominal value for <code>\linewidth</code> is to
+equal <code>\textwidth</code> but for each nested list the <code>\linewidth</code>
+is decreased by the sum of that list&textrsquo;s <code>\leftmargin</code> and
+<code>\rightmargin</code> (<pxref label="itemize"><xrefnodename>itemize</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<!-- c The default varies with the font size, paper width, two-column mode, -->
+<!-- c etc. For an @code{article} document set in 10pt, the default is -->
+<!-- c @samp{345pt}, while in two-column mode that becomes @samp{229.5pt}. -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="183" mergedindex="cp">\marginparpush</indexterm>\marginparpush</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="184" mergedindex="cp">\marginsep</indexterm>\marginsep</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="185" mergedindex="cp">\marginparwidth</indexterm>\marginparwidth</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="186" mergedindex="cp">\marginparpush</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="187" mergedindex="cp">\marginsep</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="188" mergedindex="cp">\marginparwidth</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-marginparpush">page layout parameters marginparpush</anchor>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-marginsep">page layout parameters marginsep</anchor>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-marginparwidth">page layout parameters marginparwidth</anchor>
+<para>The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the horizontal
+space between the text body and the marginal notes, and the horizontal
+width of the notes.
+</para>
+<para>Normally marginal notes appear on the outside of the page, but the
+declaration <code>\reversemarginpar</code> changes that (and
+<code>\normalmarginpar</code> changes it back).
+</para>
+<para>The defaults for <code>\marginparpush</code> in both <code>book</code> and
+<code>article</code> classes are: <samp>7pt</samp> if the document is set at 12pt,
+and <samp>5pt</samp> if the document is set at 11pt or 10pt.
+</para>
+<para>For <code>\marginsep</code>, in <code>article</code> class the default is
+<samp>10pt</samp> except if the document is set at 10pt and in two-column mode
+where the default is <samp>11pt</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>For <code>\marginsep</code> in <code>book</code> class the default is <samp>10pt</samp> in
+two-column mode and <samp>7pt</samp> in one-column mode.
+</para>
+<para>For <code>\marginparwidth</code> in both <code>book</code> and <code>article</code>
+classes, in two-column mode the default is 60% of <code>\paperwidth
+&minus; \textwidth</code>, while in one-column mode it is 50% of that
+distance.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="189" mergedindex="cp">\oddsidemargin</indexterm>\oddsidemargin</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="190" mergedindex="cp">\evensidemargin</indexterm>\evensidemargin</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="191" mergedindex="cp">\oddsidemargin</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="192" mergedindex="cp">\evensidemargin</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-oddsidemargin">page layout parameters oddsidemargin</anchor>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-evensidemargin">page layout parameters evensidemargin</anchor>
+<para>The <code>\oddsidemargin</code> is the extra distance between the left side of
+the page and the text&textrsquo;s left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the
+document class option <code>twoside</code> is chosen and on all pages when
+<code>oneside</code> is in effect. When <code>twoside</code> is in effect, on
+even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is
+<code>evensidemargin</code>.
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s default is that <code>\oddsidemargin</code> is 40% of the
+difference between <code>\paperwidth</code> and <code>\textwidth</code>, and
+<code>\evensidemargin</code> is the remainder.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="193" mergedindex="cp">\paperheight</indexterm>\paperheight</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="194" mergedindex="cp">\paperheight</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-paperheight">page layout parameters paperheight</anchor>
+<para>The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print area.
+Normally set with a document class option, as in
+<code>\documentclass[a4paper]&lbrace;article&rbrace;</code> (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class
+options</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="195" mergedindex="cp">\paperwidth</indexterm>\paperwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="196" mergedindex="cp">\paperwidth</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-paperwidth">page layout parameters paperwidth</anchor>
+<para>The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print area.
+Normally set with a document class option, as in
+<code>\documentclass[a4paper]&lbrace;article&rbrace;</code> (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class
+options</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="197" mergedindex="cp">\textheight</indexterm>\textheight</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="198" mergedindex="cp">\textheight</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-textheight">page layout parameters textheight</anchor>
+<para>The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is set at
+a nominal type size of 10pt then for an <code>article</code> or <code>report</code>
+the default is <samp>43\baselineskip</samp>, while for a <code>book</code> it is
+<samp>41\baselineskip</samp>. At a type size of 11pt the default is
+<samp>38\baselineskip</samp> for all document classes. At 12pt it is
+<samp>36\baselineskip</samp> for all classes.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="199" mergedindex="cp">\textwidth</indexterm>\textwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="200" mergedindex="cp">\textwidth</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-textwidth">page layout parameters textwidth</anchor>
+<para>The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an
+<code>article</code> or <code>report</code> document, the default is <samp>345pt</samp>
+when the chosen type size is 10pt, the default is <samp>360pt</samp> at 11pt,
+and it is <samp>390pt</samp> at 12pt. For a <code>book</code> document, the default
+is <samp>4.5in</samp> at a type size of 10pt, and <samp>5in</samp> at 11pt or 12pt.
+</para>
+<para>In multi-column output, <code>\textwidth</code> remains the width of the
+entire page body, while <code>\columnwidth</code> is the width of one column
+(<pxref label="_005ctwocolumn"><xrefnodename>\twocolumn</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>In lists (<pxref label="list"><xrefnodename>list</xrefnodename></pxref>), <code>\textwidth</code> remains the width of the
+entire page body (and <code>\columnwidth</code> the width of the entire
+column), while <code>\linewidth</code> may decrease for nested lists.
+</para>
+<para>Inside a minipage (<pxref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></pxref>) or <code>\parbox</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cparbox"><xrefnodename>\parbox</xrefnodename></pxref>), all the width-related parameters are set to the
+specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the
+<code>minipage</code> or <code>\parbox</code>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="201" mergedindex="cp">\hsize</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-hsize">page layout parameters hsize</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="202" mergedindex="cp">\hsize</indexterm>\hsize</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>This entry is included for completeness: <code>\hsize</code> is the &tex;
+primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should not
+be used in normal &latex; documents.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="203" mergedindex="cp">\topmargin</indexterm>\topmargin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="204" mergedindex="cp">topmargin</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-topmargin">page layout parameters topmargin</anchor>
+<para>Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the
+paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is computed
+based on many other parameters: <code>\paperheight &minus; 2in &minus;
+\headheight &minus; \headsep &minus; \textheight &minus; \footskip</code>,
+and then divided by two.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="205" mergedindex="cp">\topskip</indexterm>\topskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="206" mergedindex="cp">\topskip</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="page-layout-parameters-topskip">page layout parameters topskip</anchor>
+<para>Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of
+the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default is the
+same as the font size, e.g., <samp>10pt</samp> at a type size of 10pt.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Floats" spaces=" "><nodename>Floats</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Page layout parameters</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Layout</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Floats</sectiontitle>
+
+<para>Some typographic elements, such as figures and tables, cannot be broken
+across pages. They must be typeset outside of the normal flow of text,
+for instance floating to the top of a later page.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; can have a number of different classes of floating material.
+The default is the two classes, <code>figure</code> (<pxref label="figure"><xrefnodename>figure</xrefnodename></pxref>) and
+<code>table</code> (<pxref label="table"><xrefnodename>table</xrefnodename></pxref>), but you can create a new class with the
+package <file>float</file>.
+</para>
+<para>Within any one float class &latex; always respects the order, so that
+the first figure in a document source must be typeset before the second
+figure. However, &latex; may mix the classes, so it can happen that
+while the first table appears in the source before the first figure, it
+appears in the output after it.
+</para>
+<para>The placement of floats is subject to parameters, given below, that
+limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and
+the bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued that the limits prevent
+them all from fitting on a page then &latex; places what it can and
+defers the rest to the next page. In this way, floats may end up
+being typeset far from their place in the source. In particular, a
+float that is big may migrate to the end of the document. In which
+event, because all floats in a class must appear in sequential order,
+every following float in that class also appears at the end.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="147">placement of floats</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="148">specifier, float placement</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak
+where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its
+<var>placement</var> argument. The possible values are a sequence of the
+letters below. The default for both <code>figure</code> and <code>table</code>, in
+both <code>article</code> and <code>book</code> classes, is <code>tbp</code>.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(Top)&textmdash;at the top of a text page.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(Bottom)&textmdash;at the bottom of a text page. (However, <code>b</code> is not
+allowed for full-width floats (<code>figure*</code>) with double-column
+output. To ameliorate this, use the <file>stfloats</file> or
+<file>dblfloatfix</file> package, but see the discussion at caveats in the
+FAQ: <url><urefurl>http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">h</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(Here)&textmdash;at the position in the text where the <code>figure</code> environment
+appears. However, <code>h</code> is not allowed by itself; <code>t</code> is
+automatically added.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="149">here, putting floats</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="150"><r>package</r>, <code>float</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="151"><code>float</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>To absolutely force a float to appear &textldquo;here&textrdquo;, you can
+<code>\usepackage&lbrace;float&rbrace;</code> and use the <code>H</code> specifier which it
+defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
+<url><urefurl>http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">p</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="152">float page</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>(Page of floats)&textmdash;on a separate <dfn>float page</dfn>, which is a page
+containing no text, only floats.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">!</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, &latex;
+ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can appear
+and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the page.
+The <code>!</code> specifier does <emph>not</emph> mean &textldquo;put the float here&textrdquo;;
+see above.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Note: the order in which letters appear in the <var>placement</var> argument
+does not change the order in which &latex; tries to place the float;
+for instance, <code>btp</code> has the same effect as <code>tbp</code>. All that
+<var>placement</var> does is that if a letter is not present then the
+algorithm does not try that location. Thus, &latex;&textrsquo;s default of
+<code>tbp</code> is to try every location except placing the float where it
+occurs in the source.
+</para>
+<para>To prevent &latex; from moving floats to the end of the document or a
+chapter you can use a <code>\clearpage</code> command to start a new page and
+insert all pending floats. If a pagebreak is undesirable then you can
+use the <file>afterpage</file> package and issue
+<code>\afterpage&lbrace;\clearpage&rbrace;</code>. This will wait until the current page
+is finished and then flush all outstanding floats.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="153"><r>package</r>, <code>flafter</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="154"><code>flafter</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
+(although on the same output page) if there is a <code>t</code> specifier in
+the <var>placement</var> parameter. If this is not desired, and deleting
+the <code>t</code> is not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed
+at the top of the next page, then you can prevent it by either using
+the <file>flafter</file> package or using the command
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="207" mergedindex="cp">\suppressfloats</indexterm></findex>
+<code>\suppressfloats[t]</code>, which causes floats for the top position on
+this page to moved to the next page.
+</para>
+<para>Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
+non-float text (change them with
+<code>\renewcommand&lbrace;<var>parameter</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>decimal between 0 and 1</var>&rbrace;</code>):
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="208" mergedindex="cp">\bottomfraction</indexterm>\bottomfraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="209" mergedindex="cp">\bottomfraction</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-bottomfraction">floats bottomfraction</anchor>
+<para>The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at
+the bottom; default <samp>.3</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="210" mergedindex="cp">\floatpagefraction</indexterm>\floatpagefraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="211" mergedindex="cp">\floatpagefraction</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-floatpagefraction">floats floatpagefraction</anchor>
+<para>The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats;
+default <samp>.5</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="212" mergedindex="cp">\textfraction</indexterm>\textfraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="213" mergedindex="cp">\textfraction</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-textfraction">floats textfraction</anchor>
+<para>Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
+much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
+different page. The default is <samp>.2</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="214" mergedindex="cp">\topfraction</indexterm>\topfraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="215" mergedindex="cp">\topfraction</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-topfraction">floats topfraction</anchor>
+<para>Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
+floats; default <samp>.7</samp>.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with a
+command of the form <code>\setlength&lbrace;<var>parameter</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>length
+expression</var>&rbrace;</code>):
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="216" mergedindex="cp">\floatsep</indexterm>\floatsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="217" mergedindex="cp">\floatsep</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-floatsep">floats floatsep</anchor>
+<para>Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default
+<samp>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="218" mergedindex="cp">\intextsep</indexterm>\intextsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="219" mergedindex="cp">\intextsep</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-intextsep">floats intextsep</anchor>
+<para>Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default
+<samp>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</samp> for 10 point and 11 point documents,
+and <samp>14pt plus4pt minus4pt</samp> for 12 point documents.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="220" mergedindex="cp">\textfloatsep</indexterm>\textfloatsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="221" mergedindex="cp">\textfloatsep</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-textfloatsep">floats textfloatsep</anchor>
+<para>Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
+default <samp>20pt plus2pt minus4pt</samp>.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with a
+command of the form <code>\setcounter&lbrace;<var>ctrname</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>natural
+number</var>&rbrace;</code>):
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="222" mergedindex="cp">bottomnumber</indexterm>bottomnumber</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="223" mergedindex="cp">bottomnumber</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-bottomnumber">floats bottomnumber</anchor>
+<para>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page;
+default 1.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="224" mergedindex="cp">dbltopnumber</indexterm>dbltopnumber</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="225" mergedindex="cp">dbltopnumber</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-dbltopnumber">floats dbltopnumber</anchor>
+<para>Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
+two-column page; default 2.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="226" mergedindex="cp">topnumber</indexterm>topnumber</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="227" mergedindex="cp">topnumber</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-topnumber">floats topnumber</anchor>
+<para>Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
+default 2.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="228" mergedindex="cp">totalnumber</indexterm>totalnumber</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="229" mergedindex="cp">totalnumber</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="floats-totalnumber">floats totalnumber</anchor>
+<para>Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>The principal &tex;&nbsp;FAQ entry relating to floats
+<url><urefurl>http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats</urefurl></url> contains
+suggestions for relaxing &latex;&textrsquo;s default parameters to reduce the
+problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the
+float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach&textrsquo;s article &textldquo;How to
+influence the position of float environments like figure and table in
+&latex;?&textrdquo;
+(<url><urefurl>http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf</urefurl></url>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Sectioning" spaces=" "><nodename>Sectioning</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Cross references</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Layout</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Sectioning</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="155">sectioning commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="156">part</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="157">chapter</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="158">section</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="159">subsection</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="160">paragraph</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="161">subparagraph</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="230" mergedindex="cp">\part</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="231" mergedindex="cp">\chapter</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="232" mergedindex="cp">\section</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="233" mergedindex="cp">\subsection</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="234" mergedindex="cp">\paragraph</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="235" mergedindex="cp">\subparagraph</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Structure your text into divisions: parts, chapters, sections, etc. All
+sectioning commands have the same form, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><var>sectioning-command</var>&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+<var>sectioning-command</var>*&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+<var>sectioning-command</var>[<var>toc-title</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>For instance, declare the start of a subsection as with
+<code>\subsection&lbrace;Motivation&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The table has each <var>sectioning-command</var> in &latex;. All are
+available in all of &latex;&textrsquo;s standard document classes <code>book</code>,
+<code>report</code>, and&nbsp;<code>article</code>, except that <code>\chapter</code> is
+not available in <code>article</code>.
+</para>
+<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnfractions line=" .25 .25 .40 "><columnfraction value=".25"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".25"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".40"></columnfraction></columnfractions>
+<thead><row><entry command="headitem" spaces=" "><para>Sectioning unit </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Command </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Level
+</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Part
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\part</code> </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>-1 (<code>book</code>, <code>report</code>), 0 (<code>article</code>)
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Chapter
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\chapter</code> </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>0
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Section
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\section</code> </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>1
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Subsection
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\subsection</code> </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>2
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Subsubsection
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\subsubsection</code> </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>3
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Paragraph
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\paragraph</code> </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>4
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para>Subparagraph
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>\subparagraph</code> </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>5
+</para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="162"><code>*</code>-form of sectioning commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>All these commands have a <code>*</code>-form that prints <var>title</var> as usual
+but is not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents.
+An example of using this is for an appendix in an <code>article</code> . The
+input <code>\appendix\section&lbrace;Appendix&rbrace;</code> gives the output <samp>A
+Appendix</samp> (<pxref label="_005cappendix"><xrefnodename>\appendix</xrefnodename></pxref>). You can lose the numbering&nbsp;<samp>A</samp>
+by instead entering <code>\section*&lbrace;Appendix&rbrace;</code> (articles often omit a
+table of contents and have simple page headers so the other differences
+from the <code>\section</code> command may not matter).
+</para>
+<para>The section title <var>title</var> provides the heading in the main text, but
+it may also appear in the table of contents and in the running head or
+foot (<pxref label="Page-styles"><xrefnodename>Page styles</xrefnodename></pxref>). You may not want the same text in these
+places as in the main text. All of these commands have an optional
+argument <var>toc-title</var> for these other places.
+</para>
+<para>The level number in the table above determines which sectional units are
+numbered, and which appear in the table of contents. If the sectioning
+command&textrsquo;s <var>level</var> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<code>secnumdepth</code> then the titles for this sectioning command will be
+numbered (<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>). And, if <var>level</var> is less
+than or equal to the value of the counter <code>tocdepth</code> then the table
+of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit
+(<pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; expects that before you have a <code>\subsection</code> you will have
+a <code>\section</code> and, in a book, that before a <code>\section</code> you will
+have a <code>\chapter</code>. Otherwise you can get a something like a
+subsection numbered <samp>3.0.1</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="236" mergedindex="cp">secnumdepth</indexterm>secnumdepth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="237" mergedindex="cp">secnumdepth <r>counter</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="163">section numbers, printing</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="sectioning-secnumdepth">sectioning secnumdepth</anchor>
+<anchor name="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth">Sectioning/secnumdepth</anchor>
+<para>Controls which sectioning commands are
+numbered. Suppress numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than
+<var>level</var> <code>\setcounter&lbrace;secnumdepth&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>level</var>&rbrace;</code>
+(<pxref label="_005csetcounter"><xrefnodename>\setcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>). See the above table for the level numbers. For
+instance, if the <code>secnumdepth</code> is 1 in an <code>article</code> then a
+<code>\section&lbrace;Introduction&rbrace;</code> command will produce output like <samp>1
+Introduction</samp> while <code>\subsection&lbrace;Discussion&rbrace;</code> will produce output
+like <samp>Discussion</samp>, without the number. &latex;&textrsquo;s default
+<code>secnumdepth</code> is&nbsp;3 in <file>article</file> class and &nbsp;2 in the
+<file>book</file> and <file>report</file> classes.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="238" mergedindex="cp">tocdepth</indexterm>tocdepth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="239" mergedindex="cp">tocdepth <r>counter</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="164">table of contents, sectioning numbers printed</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="sectioning-tocdepth">sectioning tocdepth</anchor>
+<anchor name="Sectioning_002ftocdepth">Sectioning/tocdepth</anchor>
+<para>Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of contents.
+The setting <code>\setcounter&lbrace;tocdepth&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>level</var>&rbrace;</code> makes the
+sectioning units at <var>level</var> be the smallest ones listed
+(<pxref label="_005csetcounter"><xrefnodename>\setcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>). See the above table for the level numbers. For
+instance, if <code>tocdepth</code> is&nbsp;1 then the table of contents will
+list sections but not subsections. &latex;&textrsquo;s default
+<code>secnumdepth</code> is&nbsp;3 in <file>article</file> class and &nbsp;2 in the
+<file>book</file> and <file>report</file> classes.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\part</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a part.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\chapter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a chapter.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\section</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a section.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\subsection</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a subsection.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Lower divisions.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\appendix</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start appendices.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The three parts of a book.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\&arobase;startsection</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Layout of sectional units.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cpart" spaces=" "><nodename>\part</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\chapter</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\part</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="240" mergedindex="cp">\part</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="165">part</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="166">sectioning, part</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\part&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\part*&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\part[<var>toc-title</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Start a document part. The standard &latex; classes <code>book</code>,
+<code>report</code>, and <code>article</code>, all have this command.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a document part, in a book.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\part&lbrace;VOLUME I \\
+ PERSONAL MEMOIRS OF U.\ S.\ GRANT&rbrace;
+\chapter&lbrace;ANCESTRY--BIRTH--BOYHOOD.&rbrace;
+My family is American, and has been for generations,
+in all its branches, direct and collateral.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>In each standard class the <code>\part</code> command outputs a part number
+such as <samp>Part I</samp>, alone on its line, in boldface, and in large
+type. Then &latex; outputs <var>title</var>, also alone on its line, in
+bold and in even larger type. In class <code>book</code>, the &latex;
+default puts each part alone on its own page. If the book is two-sided
+then &latex; will skip a page if needed to have the new part on an
+odd-numbered page. In <code>report</code> it is again alone on a page, but
+&latex; won&textrsquo;t force it onto an odd-numbered page. In an <code>article</code>
+&latex; does not put it on a fresh page, but instead outputs the part
+number and part title onto the main document page.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>*</code>&nbsp;form shows <var>title</var>
+but it does not show the part number, does not increment the
+<code>part</code> counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the part title in
+the table of contents (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>) and in running
+headers (<pxref label="Page-styles"><xrefnodename>Page styles</xrefnodename></pxref>). If it is not present then <var>title</var>
+will be there. This example puts a line break in <var>title</var> but leaves
+out the break in the table of contents.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\part[Up from the bottom; my life]&lbrace;Up from the bottom\\ my life&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a part is&nbsp;-1
+(<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref> and <pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="167"><r>package</r>, <code>indentfirst</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="168"><code>indentfirst</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>In the class <code>article</code>, if a paragraph immediately follows the part
+title then it is not indented. To get an indent you can use the package
+<file>indentfirst</file>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="169"><r>package</r>, <code>titlesec</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="170"><code>titlesec</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>One package to change the behavior of <code>\part</code> is <file>titlesec</file>.
+See its documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cchapter" spaces=" "><nodename>\chapter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\section</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\part</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\chapter</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="241" mergedindex="cp">\chapter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="171">chapter</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\chapter*&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\chapter[<var>toc-title</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Start a chapter. The standard &latex; classes <code>book</code> and
+<code>report</code> have this command but <code>article</code> does not.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a chapter.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter&lbrace;Loomings&rbrace;
+Call me Ishmael.
+Some years ago---never mind how long precisely---having little or no
+money in my purse, and nothing particular to interest me on shore, I
+thought I would sail about a little and see the watery part of
+the world.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The &latex; default starts each chapter on a fresh page, an
+odd-numbered page if the document is two-sided. It produces a chapter
+number such as <samp>Chapter 1</samp> in large boldface type (the size is
+<code>\huge</code>). It then puts <var>title</var> on a fresh line, in boldface
+type that is still larger (size <code>\Huge</code>). It also increments the
+<code>chapter</code> counter, adds an entry to the table of contents
+(<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>), and sets the running header
+information (<pxref label="Page-styles"><xrefnodename>Page styles</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The <code>*</code>&nbsp;form shows <var>title</var> on a fresh line, in boldface.
+But it does not show the chapter number, does not increment the
+<code>chapter</code> counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does
+not affect the running header. (If you use the page style
+<code>headings</code> in a two-sided document then the header will be from the
+prior chapter.) This example illustrates.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter*&lbrace;Preamble&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the chapter title
+in the table of contents (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>) and in
+running headers (<pxref label="Page-styles"><xrefnodename>Page styles</xrefnodename></pxref>). If it is not present then
+<var>title</var> will be there. This shows the full name in the chapter
+title,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter[Weyl]&lbrace;Hermann Klaus Hugo (Peter) Weyl (1885--1955)&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>but only <samp>Weyl</samp> on the contents page. This puts a line break in
+the title but that doesn&textrsquo;t work well with running headers so it omits
+the break in the contents
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter[Given it all\\ my story]&lbrace;Given it all\\ my story&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is&nbsp;0
+(<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref> and <pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="172"><r>package</r>, <code>indentfirst</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="173"><code>indentfirst</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. To get an indent use the package
+<file>indentfirst</file>.
+</para>
+<para>You can change what is shown for the chapter number. To change it to
+something like <samp>Lecture 1</samp>, put in the preamble either
+<code>\renewcommand&lbrace;\chaptername&rbrace;&lbrace;Lecture&rbrace;</code> or this
+(<pxref label="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><xrefnodename>\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makeatletter
+\renewcommand&lbrace;\&arobase;chapapp&rbrace;&lbrace;Lecture&rbrace;
+\makeatother
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="174"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="175"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<noindent></noindent> <para>To make this change because of the primary language for
+the document, see the package <file>babel</file>.
+</para>
+<para>In a two-sided document &latex; puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if
+necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any
+running headers. To make that page completely blank,
+see&nbsp;<ref label="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage"><xrefnodename>\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="176"><r>package</r>, <code>titlesec</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="177"><code>titlesec</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>To change the behavior of the <code>\chapter</code> command, you can copy its
+definition from the &latex; format file and make adjustments. But
+there are also many packages on CTAN that address this. One is
+<file>titlesec</file>. See its documentation, but the example below gives a
+sense of what it can do.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;titlesec&rbrace; % in preamble
+\titleformat&lbrace;\chapter&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;\Huge\bfseries&rbrace; % format of title
+ &lbrace;&rbrace; % label, such as 1.2 for a subsection
+ &lbrace;0pt&rbrace; % length of separation between label and title
+ &lbrace;&rbrace; % before-code hook
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>This omits the chapter number <samp>Chapter 1</samp> from the page but unlike
+<code>\chapter*</code> it keeps the chapter in the table of contents and the
+running headers.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csection" spaces=" "><nodename>\section</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\subsection</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\chapter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\section</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="242" mergedindex="cp">\section</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="178">section</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\section*&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\section[<var>toc-title</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Start a section. The standard &latex; classes <code>article</code>,
+<code>book</code>, and <code>report</code> all have this command.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a section.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">In this Part we tend to be more interested in the function,
+in the input-output behavior,
+than in the details of implementing that behavior.
+
+\section&lbrace;Turing machines&rbrace;
+Despite this desire to downplay implementation,
+we follow the approach of A~Turing that the
+first step toward defining the set of computable functions
+is to reflect on the details of what mechanisms can do.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>For the standard &latex; classes <code>book</code> and <code>report</code> the
+default output is like <samp>1.2 <var>title</var></samp> (for chapter&nbsp;1,
+section&nbsp;2), alone on its line and flush left, in boldface and a
+larger type (the type size is <code>\Large</code>). The same holds in
+<code>article</code> except that there are no chapters in that class so it
+looks like <samp>2 <var>title</var></samp>.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>*</code>&nbsp;form shows <var>title</var>.
+But it does not show the section number, does not increment the
+<code>section</code> counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does
+not affect the running header. (If you use the page style
+<code>headings</code> in a two-sided document then the header will be from the
+prior section.)
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the section title
+in the table of contents (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>) and in
+running headers (<pxref label="Page-styles"><xrefnodename>Page styles</xrefnodename></pxref>). If it is not present then
+<var>title</var> will be there. This shows the full name in the title of the
+section,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section[Elizabeth~II]&lbrace;Elizabeth the Second,
+ by the Grace of God of the United Kingdom,
+ Canada and Her other Realms and Territories Queen,
+ Head of the Commonwealth, Defender of the Faith.&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>but only <samp>Elizabeth II</samp> on the contents page and in the headers.
+This has a line break in <var>title</var> but that does not work with headers
+so it is omitted from the contents and headers.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section[Truth is, I cheated; my life story]&lbrace;Truth is,
+ I cheated\\my life story&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a section is&nbsp;1
+(<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref> and <pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="179"><r>package</r>, <code>indentfirst</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="180"><code>indentfirst</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <file>indentfirst</file>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="181"><r>package</r>, <code>titlesec</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="182"><code>titlesec</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>In general, to change the behavior of the <code>\section</code> command, there
+are a number of options. One is the <code>\&arobase;startsection</code> command
+(<pxref label="_005c_0040startsection"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection</xrefnodename></pxref>). There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including <file>titlesec</file>. See the documentation but the
+example below gives a sense of what they can do.
+</para>
+<!-- c credit: egreg https://groups.google.com/forum/#!topic/comp.text.tex/tvc8oM5P4y4 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;titlesec&rbrace; % in preamble
+\titleformat&lbrace;\section&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;\normalfont\Large\bfseries&rbrace; % format of title
+ &lbrace;\makebox[1pc][r]&lbrace;\thesection\hspace&lbrace;1pc&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace; % label
+ &lbrace;0pt&rbrace; % length of separation between label and title
+ &lbrace;&rbrace; % before-code hook
+\titlespacing*&lbrace;\section&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;-1pc&rbrace;&lbrace;18pt&rbrace;&lbrace;10pt&rbrace;[10pc]
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>That puts the section number in the margin.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csubsection" spaces=" "><nodename>\subsection</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\section</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\subsection</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="243" mergedindex="cp">\subsection</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="183">subsection</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\subsection&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\subsection*&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\subsection[<var>toc-title</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Start a subsection. The standard &latex; classes <code>article</code>,
+<code>book</code>, and <code>report</code> all have this command.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a subsection.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">We will show that there are more functions than Turing machines and that
+therefore some functions have no associated machine.
+
+\subsection&lbrace;Cardinality&rbrace; We will begin with two paradoxes that
+dramatize the challenge to our intuition posed by comparing the sizes of
+infinite sets.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>For the standard &latex; classes <code>book</code> and <code>report</code> the
+default output is like <samp>1.2.3 <var>title</var></samp> (for chapter&nbsp;1,
+section&nbsp;2, subsection&nbsp;3), alone on its line and flush left, in
+boldface and a larger type (the type size is <code>\large</code>). The same
+holds in <code>article</code> except that there are no chapters in that class
+so it looks like <samp>2.3 <var>title</var></samp>.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>*</code>&nbsp;form shows <var>title</var>.
+But it does not show the section number, does not increment the
+<code>section</code> counter, and produces no table of contents entry.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the section title
+in the table of contents (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>). If it is
+not present then <var>title</var> will be there. This shows the full name in
+the title of the section,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]&lbrace;\textit&lbrace;The Origin of
+ Chemical Elements&rbrace; by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>but only <samp><U>03B1</U>,<U>03B2</U>,<U>03B3</U>
+paper</samp> on the contents page.
+</para>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is&nbsp;2
+(<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref> and <pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="184"><r>package</r>, <code>indentfirst</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="185"><code>indentfirst</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <file>indentfirst</file>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="186"><r>package</r>, <code>titlesec</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="187"><code>titlesec</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the
+<code>\subsection</code> command. One is the <code>\&arobase;startsection</code> command
+(<pxref label="_005c_0040startsection"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection</xrefnodename></pxref>). There are also many packages on CTAN that
+address this, including <file>titlesec</file>. See the documentation but the
+example below gives a sense of what they can do.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;titlesec&rbrace; % in preamble
+\titleformat&lbrace;\subsection&rbrace;[runin]
+ &lbrace;\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries&rbrace; % format of the title
+ &lbrace;\thesubsection&rbrace; % label
+ &lbrace;0.6em&rbrace; % space between label and title
+ &lbrace;&rbrace; % before-code hook
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>That puts the subsection number and <var>title</var> in the first line of
+text.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph" spaces=" "><nodename>\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\appendix</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\subsection</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\subsubsection</code>, <code>\paragraph</code>, <code>\subparagraph</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="244" mergedindex="cp">\subsubsection</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="188">subsubsection</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="245" mergedindex="cp">\paragraph</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="189">paragraph</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="246" mergedindex="cp">\subparagraph</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="190">subparagraph</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\subsubsection&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\subsubsection*&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\subsubsection[<var>toc-title</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\paragraph&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\paragraph*&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\paragraph[<var>toc-title</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\subparagraph&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\subparagraph*&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\subparagraph[<var>toc-title</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Start a subsubsection, paragraph, or subparagraph. The standard
+&latex; classes <code>article</code>, <code>book</code>, and <code>report</code> all have
+these commands, although they are not commonly used.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a subsubsection.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\subsubsection&lbrace;Piston ring compressors: structural performance&rbrace;
+Provide exterior/interior wall cladding assemblies
+capable of withstanding the effects of load and stresses from
+consumer-grade gasoline engine piston rings.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The default output of each of the three does not change over the
+standard &latex; classes <code>article</code>, <code>book</code>, and
+<code>report</code>. For <code>\subsubsection</code> the <var>title</var> is alone on
+its line, in boldface and normal size type. For <code>\paragraph</code> the
+<var>title</var> is inline with the text, not indented, in boldface and
+normal size type. For <code>\subparagraph</code> the <var>title</var> is inline
+with the text, with a paragraph indent, in boldface and normal size type
+(Because an <code>article</code> has no chapters its subsubsections are
+numbered and so it looks like <samp>1.2.3 <var>title</var></samp>, for
+section&nbsp;1, subsection&nbsp;2, and subsubsection&nbsp;3. The other
+two divisions are not numbered.)
+</para>
+<para>The <code>*</code>&nbsp;form shows <var>title</var>. But it does not increment the
+associated counter and produces no table of contents entry (and does not
+show the number for <code>\subsubsection</code>).
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>toc-title</var> will appear as the division title
+in the table of contents (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>). If it is
+not present then <var>title</var> will be there.
+</para>
+<para>For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in
+the table of contents, the level number of a subsubsection is&nbsp;3, of
+a paragraph is&nbsp;4, and of a subparagraph is&nbsp;5
+(<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref> and <pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="191"><r>package</r>, <code>indentfirst</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="192"><code>indentfirst</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented, as is a
+standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the
+package <file>indentfirst</file>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="193"><r>package</r>, <code>titlesec</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="194"><code>titlesec</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these commands.
+One is the <code>\&arobase;startsection</code> command (<pxref label="_005c_0040startsection"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including
+<file>titlesec</file>. See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cappendix" spaces=" "><nodename>\appendix</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\appendix</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="247" mergedindex="cp">\appendix</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="195">appendix</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="196">appendices</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\appendix
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This does not directly produce any output. But in a book or report it
+declares that subsequent <code>\chapter</code> commands start an appendix. In
+an article it does the same, for <code>\section</code> commands. It also
+resets the <code>chapter</code> and <code>section</code> counters to&nbsp;0 in a
+book or report, and in an article resets the <code>section</code> and
+<code>subsection</code> counters.
+</para>
+<para>In this book
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter&lbrace;One&rbrace; ...
+\chapter&lbrace;Two&rbrace; ...
+ ...
+\appendix
+\chapter&lbrace;Three&rbrace; ...
+\chapter&lbrace;Four&rbrace; ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>the first two will generate output numbered <samp>Chapter 1</samp> and
+<samp>Chapter 2</samp>. After the <code>\appendix</code> the numbering will be
+<samp>Appendix A</samp> and <samp>Appendix B</samp>. <xref label="Larger-book-template"><xrefnodename>Larger book template</xrefnodename></xref>
+for another example.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="197"><r>package</r>, <code>appendix</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="198"><code>appendix</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <para>The <file>appendix</file> package adds the command
+<code>\appendixpage</code> to put a separate <samp>Appendices</samp> in the document
+body before the first appendix, and the command <code>\addappheadtotoc</code>
+to do the same in the table of contents. You can reset the name
+<samp>Appendix</samp> with a command like
+<code>\renewcommand&lbrace;\appendixname&rbrace;&lbrace;Specification&rbrace;</code>, as well as a
+number of other features. See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter" spaces=" "><nodename>\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\&arobase;startsection</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\appendix</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\frontmatter</code>, <code>\mainmatter</code>, <code>\backmatter</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="248" mergedindex="cp">\frontmatter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="199">book, front matter</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="249" mergedindex="cp">\mainmatter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="200">book, main matter</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="250" mergedindex="cp">\backmatter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="201">book, back matter</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="202">book, end matter</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\frontmatter
+\mainmatter
+\backmatter
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Format a <code>book</code> class document differently according to which part
+of the document is being produced. All three commands are optional.
+</para>
+<para>Traditionally, a book&textrsquo;s front matter contains such things as the title
+page, an abstract, a table of contents, a preface, a list of notations,
+a list of figures, and a list of tables. (Some of these front matter
+pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not numbered.) The
+back matter may contain such things as a glossary, notes, a
+bibliography, and an index.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\frontmatter</code> declaration makes the pages numbered in
+lowercase roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each
+chapter&textrsquo;s title appears in the table of contents; if you use other
+sectioning commands here, use the <code>*</code>-version (<pxref label="Sectioning"><xrefnodename>Sectioning</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+The <code>\mainmatter</code> changes the behavior back to the expected
+version, and resets the page number. The <code>\backmatter</code> leaves the
+page numbering alone but switches the chapters back to being not
+numbered. <xref label="Larger-book-template"><xrefnodename>Larger book template</xrefnodename></xref> for an example using the three.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005c_0040startsection" spaces=" "><nodename>\&arobase;startsection</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\&arobase;startsection</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="251" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;startsection</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="203">section, redefining</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\&arobase;startsection&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>level</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>indent</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>beforeskip</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>afterskip</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>style</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Used to help redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning
+divisions such as <code>\section</code> or <code>\subsection</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Note that the <file>titlesec</file> package makes manipulation of sectioning
+easier. Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
+satisfied with <code>\&arobase;startsection</code>, some cannot. For instance, in
+the standard &latex; <code>book</code> and <code>report</code> classes the commands
+<code>\chapter</code> and <code>\report</code> are not constructed in this way. To
+make such a command you may want to use the <code>\secdef</code> command.
+<!-- c xx define, and make a cross reference to, secdef. -->
+</para>
+<para>Technically, <code>\&arobase;startsection</code> has the form
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\&arobase;startsection&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;<var>level</var>&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;<var>indent</var>&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;<var>beforeskip</var>&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;<var>afterskip</var>&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;<var>style</var>&rbrace;*[<var>toctitle</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>so that issuing
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand&lbrace;\section&rbrace;&lbrace;\&arobase;startsection&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;<var>level</var>&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;<var>indent</var>&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;<var>beforeskip</var>&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;<var>afterskip</var>&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;<var>style</var>&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>redefines <code>\section</code> to have the form
+<code>\section*[<var>toctitle</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;</code> (here too, the
+star&nbsp;<code>*</code> is optional). <xref label="Sectioning"><xrefnodename>Sectioning</xrefnodename></xref>. This implies that
+when you write a command like <code>\renewcommand&lbrace;section&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>,
+the <code>\&arobase;startsection&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> must come last in the definition. See
+the examples below.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">name</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="startsection-name">startsection name</anchor>
+<anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002fname">\&arobase;startsection/name</anchor>
+<para>Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header. This counter
+must be defined separately. Most commonly this is either
+<code>section</code>, <code>subsection</code>, or <code>paragraph</code>. Although in
+those cases the counter name is the same as the sectioning command
+itself, you don&textrsquo;t have to use the same name.
+</para>
+<para>Then <code>\the</code><var>name</var> displays the title number and
+<code>\</code><var>name</var><code>mark</code> is for the page headers. See the third
+example below.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">level</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="startsection-level">startsection level</anchor>
+<anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002flevel">\&arobase;startsection/level</anchor>
+<para>An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command.
+<xref label="Sectioning"><xrefnodename>Sectioning</xrefnodename></xref> for the list of standard level numbers.
+</para>
+<para>If <var>level</var> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<code>secnumdepth</code> then titles for this sectioning command will be
+numbered (<pxref label="Sectioning_002fsecnumdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/secnumdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>). For instance, if
+<code>secnumdepth</code> is 1 in an <code>article</code> then the command
+<code>\section&lbrace;Introduction&rbrace;</code> will produce output like &textldquo;1
+Introduction&textrdquo; while <code>\subsection&lbrace;Discussion&rbrace;</code> will produce
+output like &textldquo;Discussion&textrdquo;, without the number prefix.
+</para>
+<para>If <var>level</var> is less than or equal to the value of the counter
+<var>tocdepth</var> then the table of contents will have an entry for this
+sectioning unit (<pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>). For instance, in an
+<code>article</code>, if <var>tocdepth</var> is 1 then the table of contents will
+list sections but not subsections.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">indent</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="startsection-indent">startsection indent</anchor>
+<anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002findent">\&arobase;startsection/indent</anchor>
+<para>A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with respect
+to the left margin. To have the title flush with the margin use
+<code>0pt</code>. A negative indentation such as <code>-\parindent</code> will move
+the title into the left margin.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">beforeskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="startsection-beforeskip">startsection beforeskip</anchor>
+<anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip">\&arobase;startsection/beforeskip</anchor>
+<para>The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space that
+is inserted before this sectioning unit&textrsquo;s title. This space will be
+discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the top of a fresh
+page. If this number is negative then the first paragraph following the
+header is not indented, if it is non-negative then the first paragraph
+is indented. (Note that the negative of <code>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</code>
+is <code>-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt</code>.)
+</para>
+<para>For example, if <var>beforeskip</var> is <code>-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>
+then to start the new sectioning unit, &latex; will add about 3.5 times
+the height of a letter x in vertical space, and the first paragraph in
+the section will not be indented. Using a rubber length, with
+<code>plus</code> and <code>minus</code>, is good practice here since it gives
+&latex; more flexibility in making up the page (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The full accounting of the vertical space between the baseline of the
+line prior to this sectioning unit&textrsquo;s header and the baseline of the
+header is that it is the sum of the <code>\parskip</code> of the text font,
+the <code>\baselineskip</code> of the title font, and the absolute value of
+the <var>beforeskip</var>. This space is typically rubber so it may stretch
+or shrink. (If the sectioning unit starts on a fresh page so that the
+vertical space is discarded then the baseline of the header text will be
+where &latex; would put the baseline of the first text line on that
+page.)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">afterskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="startsection-afterskip">startsection afterskip</anchor>
+<anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip">\&arobase;startsection/afterskip</anchor>
+<para>This is a length. If <var>afterskip</var> is non-negative then this is the
+vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit&textrsquo;s title header. If it
+is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so that it
+becomes part of the next paragraph. In this case the absolute value of
+the length gives the horizontal space between the end of the title and
+the beginning of the following paragraph. (Note that the negative of
+<code>1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt</code> is <code>-1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt</code>.)
+</para>
+<para>As with <var>beforeskip</var>, using a rubber length, with <code>plus</code> and
+<code>minus</code> components, is good practice here since it gives &latex;
+more flexibility in putting together the page.
+</para>
+<para>If <code>afterskip</code> is non-negative then the full accounting of the
+vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit&textrsquo;s header and
+the baseline of the first line of the following paragraph is that it is
+the sum of the <code>\parskip</code> of the title font, the
+<code>\baselineskip</code> of the text font, and the value of <var>after</var>.
+That space is typically rubber so it may stretch or shrink. (Note that
+because the sign of <code>afterskip</code> changes the sectioning unit
+header&textrsquo;s from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
+<code>afterskip</code> to cancel part of the <code>\parskip</code>.)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">style</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="startsection-style">startsection style</anchor>
+<anchor name="_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle">\&arobase;startsection/style</anchor>
+<para>Controls the styling of the title. See the examples below. Typical
+commands to use here are <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>,
+<code>\normalfont</code>, <code>\hrule</code>, or <code>\newpage</code>. The last command
+in <var>style</var> may be one that takes one argument, such as
+<code>\MakeUppercase</code> or <code>\fbox</code> that takes one argument. The
+section title will be supplied as the argument to this command. For
+instance, setting <var>style</var> to <code>\bfseries\MakeUppercase</code> would
+produce titles that are bold and uppercase.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>These are &latex;&textrsquo;s defaults for the first three sectioning units that
+are defined with <code>\&arobase;startsection</code>, for the <file>article</file>,
+<file>book</file>, and <file>report</file> classes. For section, the <var>level</var> is
+1, the <var>indent</var> is 0<dmn>pt</dmn>, the <var>beforeskip</var> is <code>-3.5ex
+plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>, the <var>afterskip</var> is <code>2.3ex plus 0.2ex</code>,
+and the <var>style</var> is <code>\normalfont\Large\bfseries</code>. For
+subsection, the <var>level</var> is 2, the <var>indent</var> is 0<dmn>pt</dmn>, the
+<var>beforeskip</var> is <code>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>, the
+<var>afterskip</var> is <code>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</code>, and the <var>style</var> is
+<code>\normalfont\large\bfseries</code>. For subsubsection, the <var>level</var>
+is 3, the <var>indent</var> is 0<dmn>pt</dmn>, the <var>beforeskip</var> is
+<code>-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex</code>, the <var>afterskip</var> is
+<code>1.5ex plus 0.2ex</code>, and the <var>style</var> is
+<code>\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Here are examples. They go either in a package or class file or in the
+preamble of a &latex; document. If you put them in the preamble they
+must go between a <code>\makeatletter</code> command and a
+<code>\makeatother</code>. (Probably the error message <code>You can't use
+`\spacefactor' in vertical mode.</code> means that you forgot this.)
+<xref label="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><xrefnodename>\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+<para>This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered. It says
+<code>\renewcommand</code> because &latex;&textrsquo;s standard classes have already
+defined a <code>\section</code>. For the same reason it does not define a
+<code>section</code> counter, or the commands <code>\thesection</code> and
+<code>\l&arobase;section</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand\section&lbrace;%
+ \&arobase;startsection&lbrace;section&rbrace;% <ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002fname"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/name</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>name</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>name</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
+ &lbrace;1&rbrace;% <ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/level</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>level</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>level</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
+ &lbrace;0pt&rbrace;% <ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002findent"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/indent</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>indent</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>indent</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
+ &lbrace;-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex&rbrace;% <ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/beforeskip</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>beforeskip</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>beforeskip</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
+ &lbrace;2.3ex plus.2ex&rbrace;% <ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/afterskip</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>afterskip</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>afterskip</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
+ &lbrace;\centering\normalfont\Large\bfseries&rbrace;% <ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/style</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>style</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>style</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
+ &rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This will put <code>subsection</code> titles in small caps type, inline with the paragraph.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand\subsection&lbrace;%
+ \&arobase;startsection&lbrace;subsection&rbrace;% <ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002fname"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/name</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>name</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>name</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
+ &lbrace;2&rbrace;% <ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002flevel"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/level</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>level</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>level</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
+ &lbrace;0em&rbrace;% <ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002findent"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/indent</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>indent</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>indent</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
+ &lbrace;-1ex plus 0.1ex minus -0.05ex&rbrace;% <ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002fbeforeskip"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/beforeskip</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>beforeskip</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>beforeskip</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
+ &lbrace;-1em plus 0.2em&rbrace;% <ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002fafterskip"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/afterskip</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>afterskip</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>afterskip</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
+ &lbrace;\scshape&rbrace;% <ref label="_005c_0040startsection_002fstyle"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;startsection/style</xrefnodename><xrefinfoname><var>style</var></xrefinfoname><xrefprinteddesc><var>style</var></xrefprinteddesc></ref>
+ &rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands.
+This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to
+display that counter.
+</para>
+<!-- c From https://groups.google.com/forum/#!searchin/comp.text.tex/startsection%7Csort:relevance/comp.text.tex/sB-nTS-oL08/ZZeKYdG0llMJ -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setcounter&lbrace;secnumdepth&rbrace;&lbrace;6&rbrace;% show counters this far down
+\newcounter&lbrace;subsubparagraph&rbrace;[subparagraph]% counter for numbering
+\renewcommand&lbrace;\thesubsubparagraph&rbrace;% how to display
+ &lbrace;\thesubparagraph.\&arobase;arabic\c&arobase;subsubparagraph&rbrace;% numbering
+\newcommand&lbrace;\subsubparagraph&rbrace;&lbrace;\&arobase;startsection
+ &lbrace;subsubparagraph&rbrace;%
+ &lbrace;6&rbrace;%
+ &lbrace;0em&rbrace;%
+ &lbrace;\baselineskip&rbrace;%
+ &lbrace;0.5\baselineskip&rbrace;%
+ &lbrace;\normalfont\normalsize&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\newcommand*\l&arobase;subsubparagraph&lbrace;\&arobase;dottedtocline&lbrace;6&rbrace;&lbrace;10em&rbrace;&lbrace;5em&rbrace;&rbrace;% for toc
+\newcommand&lbrace;\subsubparagraphmark&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;&rbrace;% for page headers
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Cross-references" spaces=" "><nodename>Cross references</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Environments</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Sectioning</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Cross references</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="204">cross references</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="205">label</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>We often want something like <samp>See Theorem~31</samp>. But by-hand typing
+the 31 is poor practice. Instead you should write a <dfn>label</dfn> such as
+<code>\label&lbrace;eq:GreensThm&rbrace;</code> and then <dfn>reference</dfn> it, as with
+<code>See equation~\ref&lbrace;eq:GreensThm&rbrace;</code>. &latex; will automatically
+work out the number, put it into the output, and will change that number
+later if needed.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">We will see this with Theorem~\ref&lbrace;th:GreensThm&rbrace;. % forward reference
+...
+\begin&lbrace;theorem&rbrace; \label&lbrace;th:GreensThm&rbrace;
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;theorem&rbrace;
+...
+See Theorem~\ref&lbrace;th:GreensThm&rbrace; on page~\pageref&lbrace;th:GreensThm&rbrace;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>&latex; tracks cross reference information in a file having the
+extension <file>.aux</file> and with the same base name as the file containing
+the <code>\label</code>. So if <code>\label</code> is in <file>calculus.tex</file> then
+the information is in <file>calculus.aux</file>. &latex; puts the
+information in that file every time it runs across a <code>\label</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="206">forward reference</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="207">reference, forward</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The behavior described in the prior paragraph results in a quirk that
+happens when your document has a <dfn>forward reference</dfn>, a <code>\ref</code>
+that appears before the associated <code>\label</code>. If this is the first
+time that you are compiling the document then you will get <samp>LaTeX
+Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross references right</samp>
+and in the output the forward reference will appear as two question
+marks&nbsp;<samp>??</samp>, in boldface. A similar thing happens if you
+change some things so the references changes; you get the same warning
+and the output contains the old reference information. In both cases,
+resolve this by compiling the document a second time.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="208"><r>package</r>, <code>cleveref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="209"><code>cleveref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <para>The <code>cleveref</code> package enhances &latex;&textrsquo;s
+cross referencing features. You can arrange that if you enter
+<code>\begin&lbrace;thm&rbrace;\label&lbrace;th:Nerode&rbrace;...\end&lbrace;thm&rbrace;</code> then
+<code>\cref&lbrace;th:Nerode&rbrace;</code> will output <samp>Theorem 3.21</samp>, without you
+having to enter the &textldquo;Theorem.&textrdquo;
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\label</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\pageref</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Refer to a page number.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\ref</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Refer to a section, figure or similar.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005clabel" spaces=" "><nodename>\label</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\pageref</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Cross references</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\label</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="252" mergedindex="cp">\label</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\label&lbrace;<var>key</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Assign a reference number to <var>key</var>. In ordinary text
+<code>\label&lbrace;<var>key</var>&rbrace;</code> assigns to <var>key</var> the number of the
+current sectional unit. Inside an environment with numbering, such as a
+<code>table</code> or <code>theorem</code> environment, <code>\label&lbrace;<var>key</var>&rbrace;</code>
+assigns to <var>key</var> the number of that environment. Retrieve the
+assigned number with the <code>\ref&lbrace;<var>key</var>&rbrace;</code> command
+(<pxref label="_005cref"><xrefnodename>\ref</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
+punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are
+distinguished, as usual.
+</para>
+<para>A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix
+separated by a colon or period. Thus, <code>\label&lbrace;fig:Post&rbrace;</code> is a
+label for a figure with a portrait of Emil Post. This helps to avoid
+accidentally creating two labels with the same name, and makes your
+source more readable. Some commonly-used prefixes:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">ch</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>for chapters
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">sec</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">subsec</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>for lower-level sectioning commands
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">fig</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>for figures
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">tab</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>for tables
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">eq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>for equations
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>In the auxiliary file the reference information is kept as the text of
+a command of the form
+<code>\newlabel&lbrace;<var>label</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;&lbrace;<var>currentlabel</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>pagenumber</var>&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>.
+Here <var>currentlabel</var> is the current value of the macro
+<code>\&arobase;currentlabel</code> that is usually updated whenever you call
+<code>\refstepcounter&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Below, the key <code>sec:test</code> will get the number of the current
+section and the key <code>fig:test</code> will get the number of the figure.
+(Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and tables.)
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section&lbrace;section name&rbrace;
+\label&lbrace;sec:test&rbrace;
+This is Section~\ref&lbrace;sec:test&rbrace;.
+\begin&lbrace;figure&rbrace;
+ ...
+ \caption&lbrace;caption text&rbrace;
+ \label&lbrace;fig:test&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;figure&rbrace;
+See Figure~\ref&lbrace;fig:test&rbrace;.
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cpageref" spaces=" "><nodename>\pageref</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\ref</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\label</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cross references</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\pageref</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="253" mergedindex="cp">\pageref</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="210">cross referencing with page number</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="211">page number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\pageref&lbrace;<var>key</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding
+<code>\label</code>&lbrace;<var>key</var>&rbrace; command appears.
+</para>
+<para>If there is no <code>\label&lbrace;<var>key</var>&rbrace;</code> then you get something like
+<samp>LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on
+input line 11.</samp>
+</para>
+<para>Below, the <code>\label&lbrace;eq:main&rbrace;</code> is used both for the formula number
+and for the page number. (Note that the two references are forward
+references so this document would need to be compiled twice to resolve
+those.)
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The main result is formula~\ref&lbrace;eq:main&rbrace; on page~\pageref&lbrace;eq:main&rbrace;.
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace; \label&lbrace;eq:main&rbrace;
+ \mathbf&lbrace;P&rbrace;=\mathbf&lbrace;NP&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cref" spaces=" "><nodename>\ref</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\pageref</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cross references</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\ref</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="254" mergedindex="cp">\ref</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="212">cross referencing, symbolic</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="213">section number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="214">equation number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="215">figure number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="216">footnote number, cross referencing</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\ref&lbrace;<var>key</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produces the number of the sectional unit,
+equation, footnote, figure, &dots;, of the corresponding
+<code>\label</code> command (<pxref label="_005clabel"><xrefnodename>\label</xrefnodename></pxref>). It does not produce any text,
+such as the word &textlsquo;Section&textrsquo; or &textlsquo;Figure&textrsquo;, just the bare number itself.
+</para>
+<para>If there is no <code>\label&lbrace;<var>key</var>&rbrace;</code> then you get something like
+<samp>LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on
+input line 11.</samp>
+</para>
+<para>In this example the <code>\ref&lbrace;popular&rbrace;</code> produces <samp>2</samp>. Note that
+it is a forward reference since it comes before <code>\label&lbrace;popular&rbrace;</code>
+so this document would have to be compiled twice.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The most widely-used format is item number~\ref&lbrace;popular&rbrace;.
+\begin&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+\item Plain \TeX
+\item \label&lbrace;popular&rbrace; \LaTeX
+\item Con\TeX t
+\end&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="217"><r>package</r>, <code>cleveref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="218"><code>cleveref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The <file>cleveref</file> package includes text such as <samp>Theorem</samp> in the
+reference. See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Environments" spaces=" "><nodename>Environments</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Line breaking</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Cross references</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Environments</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="219">environments</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="255" mergedindex="cp">\begin</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="256" mergedindex="cp">\end</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>&latex; provides many environments for delimiting certain behavior.
+An environment begins with <code>\begin</code> and ends with <code>\end</code>,
+like this:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;<var>environment-name</var>&rbrace;
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;<var>environment-name</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <var>environment-name</var> at the beginning must exactly match that at
+the end. For instance, the input
+<code>\begin&lbrace;table*&rbrace;...\end&lbrace;table&rbrace;</code> will cause an error like:
+<samp>! LaTeX Error: \begin&lbrace;table*&rbrace; on input line 5 ended by
+\end&lbrace;table&rbrace;.</samp>
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="220">group, and environments</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Environments are executed within a group.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">abstract</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Produce an abstract.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">array</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Math arrays.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">center</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Centered lines.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">description</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Labelled lists.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">displaymath</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Formulas that appear on their own line.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">document</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Enclose the whole document.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">enumerate</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Numbered lists.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">eqnarray</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Sequences of aligned equations.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">equation</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Displayed equation.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">figure</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Floating figures.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">filecontents</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Writing multiple files from the source.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">flushleft</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Flushed left lines.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">flushright</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Flushed right lines.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">itemize</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Bulleted lists.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">letter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Letters.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">list</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Generic list environment.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">math</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">In-line math.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">minipage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Miniature page.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">picture</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">quotation &amp; quote</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Include a quotation.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">tabbing</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Align text arbitrarily.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">table</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Floating tables.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">tabular</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Align text in columns.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">thebibliography</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Bibliography or reference list.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">theorem</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Theorems, lemmas, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">titlepage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">For hand crafted title pages.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">verbatim</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Simulating typed input.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">verse</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">For poetry and other things.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="abstract" spaces=" "><nodename>abstract</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">array</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>abstract</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="257" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>abstract</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="258" mergedindex="cp"><code>abstract</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="221">abstracts</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;abstract&rbrace;
+...
+\end&lbrace;abstract&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs. This environment
+is only defined in the <code>article</code> and <code>report</code> document classes
+(<pxref label="Document-classes"><xrefnodename>Document classes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Using the example below in the <code>article</code> class produces a displayed
+paragraph. Document class option <code>titlepage</code> causes the abstract
+to be on a separate page (<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></pxref>); this is the
+default only in the <code>report</code> class.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;abstract&rbrace;
+ We compare all known accounts of the proposal made by Porter Alexander
+ to Robert E Lee at the Appomattox Court House that the army continue
+ in a guerrilla war, which Lee refused.
+\end&lbrace;abstract&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The next example produces a one column abstract in a two column document (for
+a more flexible solution, use the package <file>abstract</file>).
+</para>
+<!-- c Adopted from http://www.tex.ac.uk/FAQ-onecolabs.html -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass[twocolumn]&lbrace;article&rbrace;
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\title&lbrace;Babe Ruth as Cultural Progenitor: a Atavistic Approach&rbrace;
+\author&lbrace;Smith \\ Jones \\ Robinson\thanks&lbrace;Railroad tracking grant.&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\twocolumn[
+ \begin&lbrace;&arobase;twocolumnfalse&rbrace;
+ \maketitle
+ \begin&lbrace;abstract&rbrace;
+ Ruth was not just the Sultan of Swat, he was the entire swat
+ team.
+ \end&lbrace;abstract&rbrace;
+ \end&lbrace;&arobase;twocolumnfalse&rbrace;
+ ]
+&lbrace; % by-hand insert a footnote at page bottom
+ \renewcommand&lbrace;\thefootnote&rbrace;&lbrace;\fnsymbol&lbrace;footnote&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \footnotetext[1]&lbrace;Thanks for all the fish.&rbrace;
+&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="array" spaces=" "><nodename>array</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">center</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">abstract</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>array</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="259" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>array</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="260" mergedindex="cp"><code>array</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="222">arrays, math</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;array&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>cols</var>&rbrace;
+ <var>column 1 entry</var> &amp;<var>column 2 entry</var> ... &amp;<var>column n entry</var> \\
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;array&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;array&rbrace;[<var>pos</var>]&lbrace;<var>cols</var>&rbrace;
+ <var>column 1 entry</var> &amp;<var>column 2 entry</var> ... &amp;<var>column n entry</var> \\
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;array&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in math
+mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics environment
+such as <code>equation</code> (<pxref label="equation"><xrefnodename>equation</xrefnodename></pxref>). Inside of each row the
+column entries are separated by an ampersand, (<code>&amp;</code>). Rows are
+terminated with double-backslashes (<pxref label="_005c_005c"><xrefnodename>\\</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This example shows a three by three array.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;equation*&rbrace;
+ \chi(x) =
+ \left| % vertical bar fence
+ \begin&lbrace;array&rbrace;&lbrace;ccc&rbrace;
+ x-a &amp;-b &amp;-c \\
+ -d &amp;x-e &amp;-f \\
+ -g &amp;-h &amp;x-i
+ \end&lbrace;array&rbrace;
+ \right|
+\end&lbrace;equation*&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The required argument <var>cols</var> describes the number of columns, their
+alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. For instance,
+<code>\begin&lbrace;array&rbrace;&lbrace;rcl&rbrace;...\end&lbrace;array&rbrace;</code> gives three columns: the
+first flush right, the second centered, and the third flush left. See
+<ref label="tabular"><xrefnodename>tabular</xrefnodename></ref> for the complete description of <var>cols</var> and of the
+other common features of the two environments, including the optional
+<var>pos</var> argument.
+</para>
+<para>There are two ways that <code>array</code> diverges from <code>tabular</code>. The
+first is that <code>array</code> entries are typeset in math mode, in
+textstyle (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>) except if the <var>cols</var> definition specifies
+the column with <code>p&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>, which causes the entry to be typeset in
+text mode. The second is that, instead of <code>tabular</code>&textrsquo;s parameter
+<code>\tabcolsep</code>, &latex;&textrsquo;s intercolumn space in an <code>array</code> is
+governed by
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="261" mergedindex="cp">\arraycolsep</indexterm></findex>
+<code>\arraycolsep</code>, which gives half the width between columns. The
+default for this is <samp>5pt</samp> so that between two columns comes
+10<dmn>pt</dmn> of space.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="223"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="224"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the <file>amsmath</file>
+package. It comes with environments <code>pmatrix</code> for an array
+surrounded by parentheses&nbsp;<code>(...)</code>, <code>bmatrix</code> for an array
+surrounded by square brackets&nbsp;<code>[...]</code>, <code>Bmatrix</code> for an
+array surrounded by curly braces&nbsp;<code>&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>, <code>vmatrix</code> for
+an array surrounded by vertical bars&nbsp;<code>|...|</code>, and
+<code>Vmatrix</code> for an array surrounded by double vertical
+bars&nbsp;<code>||...||</code>, along with a number of other array constructs.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="225"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="226"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The next example uses the <file>amsmath</file> package.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;amsmath&rbrace; % in preamble
+
+\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;vmatrix&rbrace;&lbrace;cc&rbrace; % array with vert lines
+ a &amp;b \\
+ c &amp;d
+ \end&lbrace;vmatrix&rbrace;=ad-bc
+\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="227"><r>package</r>, <code>array (package)</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="228"><code>array (package)</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="229"><r>package</r>, <code>dcolumn</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="230"><code>dcolumn</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>There are many packages concerning arrays. The <file>array</file> package has
+many useful extensions, including more column types. The <file>dcolumn</file>
+package adds a column type to center on a decimal point. For both see
+the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="center" spaces=" "><nodename>center</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">description</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">array</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>center</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="262" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>center</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="263" mergedindex="cp"><code>center</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="231">centering text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ <var>line1</var> \\
+ <var>line2</var> \\
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are
+centered within the left and right margins. Use
+double-backslash, <code>\\</code>, to get a line break (<pxref label="_005c_005c"><xrefnodename>\\</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="264" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>(for <code>center</code>)</r></indexterm></findex>
+If some text is too long to fit on a line then &latex; will insert line
+breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any
+interword space.
+</para>
+<para>This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
+<ref label="_005ccentering"><xrefnodename>\centering</xrefnodename></ref> to avoid such space, for example inside a <code>figure</code>
+environment.
+</para>
+<para>This example produces three centered lines. There is extra vertical
+space between the last two lines.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ A Thesis Submitted in Partial Fufillment \\
+ of the Requirements of \\[0.5ex]
+ the School of Environmental Engineering
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>In this example, depending on the page&textrsquo;s line width, &latex; may choose
+a line break for the part before the double backslash. If so, it will
+center each of the two lines and if not it will center the single line.
+Then &latex; will break at the double backslash, and will center the
+ending.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink
+ alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\
+ I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>A double backslash after the final line is optional. If present it
+doesn&textrsquo;t add any vertical space.
+</para>
+<para>In a two-column document the text is centered in a column, not in the
+entire page.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\centering</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Declaration form of the <code>center</code> environment.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005ccentering" spaces=" "><nodename>\centering</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">center</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\centering</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="265" mergedindex="cp">\centering</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="232">centering text, declaration for</indexterm></cindex>
+
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">&lbrace;\centering ... &rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;group&rbrace;
+ \centering ...
+\end&lbrace;group&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Center the material in its scope. It is most often used inside an
+environment such as <code>figure</code>, or in a <code>parbox</code>.
+</para>
+<para>This example&textrsquo;s <code>\centering</code> declaration causes the graphic to be
+horizontally centered.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;figure&rbrace;
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]&lbrace;ctan_lion.png&rbrace;
+ \caption&lbrace;CTAN Lion&rbrace; \label&lbrace;fig:CTANLion&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;figure&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The scope of this <code>\centering</code> ends with the <code>\end&lbrace;figure&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Unlike the <code>center</code> environment, the <code>\centering</code> command does
+not add vertical space above and below the text. That&textrsquo;s its advantage
+in the above example; there is not an excess of space.
+</para>
+<para>It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how &latex;
+formats paragraph units. If <code>ww &lbrace;\centering xx \\ yy&rbrace; zz</code> is
+surrounded by blank lines then &latex; will create a paragraph whose
+first line <samp>ww xx</samp> is centered and whose second line, not centered,
+contains <samp>yy zz</samp>. Usually what is desired is for the scope of the
+declaration to contain a blank line or the <code>\end</code> command of an
+environment such as <code>figure</code> or <code>table</code> that ends the
+paragraph unit. Thus, if <code>&lbrace;\centering xx \\ yy\par&rbrace; zz</code> is
+surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph with two
+centered lines <samp>xx</samp> and <samp>yy</samp>, followed by a new paragraph with
+<samp>zz</samp> that is formatted as usual.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="description" spaces=" "><nodename>description</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">displaymath</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">center</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>description</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="266" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>description</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="267" mergedindex="cp"><code>description</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="233">labelled lists, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="234">description lists, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;description&rbrace;
+ \item[<var>label of first item</var>] <var>text of first item</var>
+ \item[<var>label of second item</var>] <var>text of second item</var>
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;description&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Environment to make a list of labeled items. Each item&textrsquo;s <var>label</var> is
+typeset in bold and is flush left, so that long labels continue into the
+first line of the item text. There must be at least one item; having
+none causes the &latex; error <samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a
+missing \item</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>This example shows the environment used for a sequence of definitions.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;definition&rbrace;
+ \item[lama] A priest.
+ \item[llama] A beast.
+\end&lbrace;definition&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The labels <samp>lama</samp> and <samp>llama</samp> are output in boldface, with the
+left edge on the left margin.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="268" mergedindex="cp">\item</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (<pxref label="_005citem"><xrefnodename>\item</xrefnodename></pxref>). Use the
+optional labels, as in <code>\item[Main point]</code>, because there is
+no sensible default. Following the <code>\item</code> is optional text, which
+may contain multiple paragraphs.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="235">bold typewriter, avoiding</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="236">typewriter labels in lists</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a font
+change given in argument style (see <ref label="Font-styles"><xrefnodename>Font styles</xrefnodename></ref>) then it will come
+out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter with
+<code>\item[\texttt&lbrace;label text&rbrace;]</code> then it will appear in bold
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way around this, in this
+example to get non-bold typewriter, is to use declarative style:
+<code>\item[&lbrace;\tt label text&rbrace;]</code>. Similarly, get the standard roman
+font with <code>\item[&lbrace;\rm label text&rbrace;]</code>.
+</para>
+<para>For other major &latex; labelled list environments, see <ref label="itemize"><xrefnodename>itemize</xrefnodename></ref>
+and <ref label="enumerate"><xrefnodename>enumerate</xrefnodename></ref>. Unlike those environments, nesting
+<code>description</code> environments does not change the default label; it is
+boldface and flush left at all levels.
+</para>
+<para>For information about list layout parameters, including the default
+values, and for information about customizing list layout, see
+<ref label="list"><xrefnodename>list</xrefnodename></ref>. The package <file>enumitem</file> is useful for customizing
+lists.
+</para>
+<para>This example changes the description labels to small caps.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand&lbrace;\descriptionlabel&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;%
+ &lbrace;\hspace&lbrace;\labelsep&rbrace;\textsc&lbrace;#1&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="displaymath" spaces=" "><nodename>displaymath</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">document</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">description</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>displaymath</code></sectiontitle>
+<!-- c http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/40492/what-are-the-differences-between-align-equation-and-displaymath -->
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="269" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>displaymath</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="270" mergedindex="cp"><code>displaymath</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+ <var>mathematical text</var>
+\end&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display style
+and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global option
+<code>fleqn</code>; see <ref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>In the <code>displaymath</code> environment no equation number is added to the
+math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the
+<code>equation</code> environment (<pxref label="equation"><xrefnodename>equation</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; will not break the <var>math text</var> across lines.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="237"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="238"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Note that the <file>amsmath</file> package has significantly more extensive
+displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of
+ways in that package for having math text broken across lines.
+</para>
+<para>The construct <code>\[<var>math text</var>\]</code> is essentially a synonym for
+<code>\begin&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;<var>math text</var>\end&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;</code> but the
+latter is easier to work with in the source file; for instance,
+searching for a square bracket may get false positives but the word
+<code>displaymath</code> will likely be unique. (The construct
+<code>$$<var>math text</var>$$</code> from Plain&nbsp;&tex; is sometimes
+mistakenly used as a synonym for <code>displaymath</code>. It is not a
+synonym, because the <code>displaymath</code> environment checks that it isn&textrsquo;t
+started in math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
+environment start, because the <code>displaymath</code> environment has
+different vertical spacing, and because the <code>displaymath</code>
+environment honors the <code>fleqn</code> option.)
+</para>
+<para>The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+ \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3
+\end&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version
+<code>\( \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3 \)</code> produces.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="document" spaces=" "><nodename>document</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">enumerate</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">displaymath</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>document</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="271" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>document</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="272" mergedindex="cp"><code>document</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+
+<para>The <code>document</code> environment encloses the entire body of a document.
+It is required in every &latex; document. <xref label="Starting-and-ending"><xrefnodename>Starting and ending</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\AtBeginDocument</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Hook for commands at the start of the document.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\AtEndDocument</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Hook for commands at the end of the document.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cAtBeginDocument" spaces=" "><nodename>\AtBeginDocument</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\AtEndDocument</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">document</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\AtBeginDocument</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="273" mergedindex="cp">\AtBeginDocument</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="239">beginning of document hook</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\AtBeginDocument&lbrace;<var>code</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Save <var>code</var> and execute it when <code>\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code> is
+executed, at the very end of the preamble. The code is executed after
+the font selection tables have been set up, so the normal font for the
+document is the current font. However, the code is executed as part of
+the preamble so you cannot do any typesetting with it.
+</para>
+<para>You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cAtEndDocument" spaces=" "><nodename>\AtEndDocument</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\AtBeginDocument</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">document</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\AtEndDocument</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="274" mergedindex="cp">\AtEndDocument</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="240">end of document hook</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\AtEndDocument&lbrace;<var>code</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Save <var>code</var> and execute it near the end of the document.
+Specifically, it is executed when <code>\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code> is executed,
+before the final page is finished and before any leftover floating
+environments are processed. If you want some of the code to be executed
+after these two processes then include a <code>\clearpage</code> at the
+appropriate point in <var>code</var>.
+</para>
+<para>You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="enumerate" spaces=" "><nodename>enumerate</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">eqnarray</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">document</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>enumerate</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="275" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>enumerate</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="276" mergedindex="cp"><code>enumerate</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="241">lists of items, numbered</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+ \item[<var>optional label of first item</var>] <var>text of first item</var>
+ \item[<var>optional label of second item</var>] <var>text of second item</var>
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Environment to produce a numbered list of items. The format of the
+label numbering depends on the nesting level of this environment; see
+below. The default top-level numbering is <samp>1.</samp>, <samp>2.</samp>,
+etc. Each <code>enumerate</code> list environment must have at least one item;
+having none causes the &latex; error <samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a
+missing \item</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>This example gives the first two finishers in the 1908 Olympic marathon.
+As a top-level list the labels would come out as <samp>1.</samp> and
+<samp>2.</samp>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+ \item Johnny Hayes (USA)
+ \item Charles Hefferon (RSA)
+\end&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="277" mergedindex="cp">\item</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (<pxref label="_005citem"><xrefnodename>\item</xrefnodename></pxref>). If you
+give <code>\item</code> an optional argument by following it with square
+brackets, as in <code>\item[Interstitial label]</code>, then the next item
+will continue the interrupted sequence (<pxref label="_005citem"><xrefnodename>\item</xrefnodename></pxref>). That is, you
+will get labels like <samp>1.</samp>, then <samp>Interstitial label</samp>, then
+<samp>2.</samp>. Following the <code>\item</code> is optional text, which may
+contain multiple paragraphs.
+</para>
+<para>Enumerations may be nested within other <code>enumerate</code> environments,
+or within any paragraph-making environment such as <code>itemize</code>
+(<pxref label="itemize"><xrefnodename>itemize</xrefnodename></pxref>), up to four levels deep. This gives &latex;&textrsquo;s
+default for the format at each nesting level, where 1 is the top level,
+the outermost level.
+</para>
+<enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
+<listitem spaces=" "><para>arabic number followed by a period: <samp>1.</samp>, <samp>2.</samp>,&nbsp;&dots;
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>lowercase letter inside parentheses: <samp>(a)</samp>, <samp>(b)</samp>&nbsp;&dots;
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>lowercase roman numeral followed by a period: <samp>i.</samp>, <samp>ii.</samp>,&nbsp;&dots;
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>uppercase letter followed by a period: <samp>A.</samp>, <samp>B.</samp>,&nbsp;&dots;
+</para></listitem></enumerate>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="278" mergedindex="cp">\enumi</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="279" mergedindex="cp">\enumii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="280" mergedindex="cp">\enumiii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="281" mergedindex="cp">\enumiv</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="enumerate-enumi">enumerate enumi</anchor>
+<anchor name="enumerate-enumii">enumerate enumii</anchor>
+<anchor name="enumerate-enumiii">enumerate enumiii</anchor>
+<anchor name="enumerate-enumiv">enumerate enumiv</anchor>
+<para>The <code>enumerate</code> environment uses the counters <code>\enumi</code> through
+<code>\enumiv</code> (<pxref label="Counters"><xrefnodename>Counters</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>For other major &latex; labeled list environments, see
+<ref label="description"><xrefnodename>description</xrefnodename></ref> and <ref label="itemize"><xrefnodename>itemize</xrefnodename></ref>. For information about list layout
+parameters, including the default values, and for information about
+customizing list layout, see <ref label="list"><xrefnodename>list</xrefnodename></ref>. The package <file>enumitem</file> is
+useful for customizing lists.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="282" mergedindex="cp">\labelenumi</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="283" mergedindex="cp">\labelenumii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="284" mergedindex="cp">\labelenumiii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="285" mergedindex="cp">\labelenumiv</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="enumerate-labelenumi">enumerate labelenumi</anchor>
+<anchor name="enumerate-labelenumii">enumerate labelenumii</anchor>
+<anchor name="enumerate-labelenumiii">enumerate labelenumiii</anchor>
+<anchor name="enumerate-labelenumiv">enumerate labelenumiv</anchor>
+<para>To change the format of the label use <code>\renewcommand</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</xrefnodename></pxref>) on the commands <code>\labelenumi</code>
+through <code>\labelenumiv</code>. For instance, this first level list will be
+labelled with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing
+period.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="286" mergedindex="cp">\Alph <r>example</r></indexterm></findex>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand&lbrace;\labelenumi&rbrace;&lbrace;\textbf&lbrace;\Alph&lbrace;enumi&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+ \item Shows as boldface A
+ \item Shows as boldface B
+\end&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>For a list of counter-labeling commands see <ref label="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><xrefnodename>\alph \Alph \arabic
+\roman \Roman \fnsymbol</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="eqnarray" spaces=" "><nodename>eqnarray</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">equation</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">enumerate</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>eqnarray</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="287" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>eqnarray</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="288" mergedindex="cp"><code>eqnarray</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="242">equations, aligning</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="243">aligning equations</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="244">align <r>environment, from <code>amsmath</code></r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="245">amsmath <r>package, replacing <code>eqnarray</code></r></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="246">Madsen, Lars</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The <code>eqnarray</code> environment is obsolete. It has infelicities,
+including spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements.
+(See &textldquo;Avoid eqnarray!&textrdquo;&noeos; by Lars Madsen
+<url><urefurl>http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf</urefurl></url>). New documents
+should include the <file>amsmath</file> package and use the displayed
+mathematics environments provided there, such as the <code>align</code>
+environment. We include a description only for completeness and for
+working with old documents.
+</para>
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;eqnarray&rbrace;
+ <var>first formula left</var> &amp;<var>first formula middle</var> &amp;<var>first formula right</var> \\
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;eqnarray&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;eqnarray*&rbrace;
+ <var>first formula left</var> &amp;<var>first formula middle</var> &amp;<var>first formula right</var> \\
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;eqnarray*&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="289" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>(for <code>eqnarray</code>)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Display a sequence of equations or inequalities. The left and right
+sides are typeset in display mode, while the middle is typeset in text
+mode.
+</para>
+<para>It is similar to a three-column <code>array</code> environment, with items
+within a row separated by an ampersand&nbsp;(<code>&amp;</code>), and with rows
+separated by double backslash&nbsp; <code>\\</code>).
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="290" mergedindex="cp">\\* <r>(for <code>eqnarray</code>)</r></indexterm></findex>
+The starred form of line break (<code>\\*</code>) can also be used to separate
+equations, and will disallow a page break there (<pxref label="_005c_005c"><xrefnodename>\\</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="291" mergedindex="cp">\nonumber</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="247">equation numbers, omitting</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The unstarred form <code>eqnarray</code> places an equation number on every
+line (using the <code>equation</code> counter), unless that line contains a
+<code>\nonumber</code> command. The starred form <code>eqnarray*</code> omits
+equation numbering, while otherwise being the same.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="292" mergedindex="cp">\lefteqn</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The command <code>\lefteqn</code> is used for splitting long formulas across
+lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
+zero width.
+</para>
+<para>This example shows three lines. The first two lines make an inequality,
+while the third line has not entry on the left side.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;eqnarray*&rbrace;
+ \lefteqn&lbrace;x_1+x_2+\cdots+x_n&rbrace; \\
+ &amp;\leq &amp;y_1+y_2+\cdots+y_n \\
+ &amp;= &amp;z+y_3+\cdots+y_n
+\end&lbrace;eqnarray*&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="equation" spaces=" "><nodename>equation</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">figure</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">eqnarray</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>equation</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="293" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>equation</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="294" mergedindex="cp"><code>equation</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="248">equations, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="249">formulas, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+ <var>mathematical text</var>
+\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The same as a <code>displaymath</code> environment (<pxref label="displaymath"><xrefnodename>displaymath</xrefnodename></pxref>)
+except that &latex; puts an equation number flush to the right margin.
+The equation number is generated using the <code>equation</code> counter.
+</para>
+<para>You should have no blank lines between <code>\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;</code> and
+<code>\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;</code>, or &latex; will tell you that there is a
+missing dollar sign.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="250"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="251"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The package <file>amsmath</file> package has extensive displayed equation
+facilities. New documents should include this package.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="figure" spaces=" "><nodename>figure</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">filecontents</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">equation</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>figure</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="295" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>figure</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="296" mergedindex="cp"><code>figure</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="252">inserting figures</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="253">figures, inserting</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;figure&rbrace;[<var>placement</var>]
+ <var>figure body</var>
+ \caption[<var>loftitle</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace; % optional
+ \label&lbrace;<var>label&rbrace;</var> % optional
+\end&lbrace;figure&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;figure*&rbrace;[<var>placement</var>]
+ <var>figure body</var>
+ \caption[<var>loftitle</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace; % optional
+ \label&lbrace;<var>label&rbrace;</var> % optional
+\end&lbrace;figure*&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Figures are for material that is not part of the normal text. An
+example is material that you cannot have split between two pages, such
+as a graphic. Because of this, &latex; does not typeset figures in
+sequence with normal text but instead &textldquo;floats&textrdquo; them to a convenient
+place, such as the top of a following page (<pxref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The <var>figure body</var> can consist of imported graphics
+(<pxref label="Graphics"><xrefnodename>Graphics</xrefnodename></pxref>), or text, &latex; commands, etc. It is typeset in a
+<code>parbox</code> of width <code>\textwidth</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The possible values of <var>placement</var> are <code>h</code> for <samp>here</samp>,
+<code>t</code> for <samp>top</samp>, <code>b</code> for <samp>bottom</samp>, and <code>p</code> for
+<samp>on a separate page of floats</samp>. For the effect of these options on
+the float placement algorithm, see <ref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>The starred form <code>figure*</code> is used when a document is in
+double-column mode (<pxref label="_005ctwocolumn"><xrefnodename>\twocolumn</xrefnodename></pxref>). It produces a figure that
+spans both columns, at the top of the page. To add the possibility of
+placing at a page bottom see the discussion of <var>placement</var> <code>b</code>
+in <ref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (<pxref label="Cross-references"><xrefnodename>Cross
+references</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="297" mergedindex="cp">\caption</indexterm></findex>
+The optional <code>\caption</code> command specifies caption text for the
+figure. By default it is numbered. If <var>loftitle</var> is present, it is
+used in the list of figures instead of <var>title</var> (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of
+contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This example makes a figure out of a graphic. &latex; will place that
+graphic and its caption at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the
+end of the document, on a page of floats.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;graphicx&rbrace; % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;figure&rbrace;[t]
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]&lbrace;CTANlion.png&rbrace;
+ \caption&lbrace;The CTAN lion, by Duane Bibby&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;figure&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="filecontents" spaces=" "><nodename>filecontents</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">flushleft</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">figure</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>filecontents</code>: Write an external file</sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="298" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>filecontents</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="299" mergedindex="cp"><code>filecontents</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="300" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>filecontents*</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="301" mergedindex="cp"><code>filecontents*</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="254">external files, writing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="255">writing external files</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;filecontents&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;
+ <var>text</var>
+\end&lbrace;filecontents&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;filecontents*&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;
+ <var>text</var>
+\end&lbrace;filecontents*&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Create a file named <var>filename</var> and fill it with <var>text</var>. The
+unstarred version of the environment <code>filecontents</code> prefixes the
+content of the created file with a header; see the example below. The
+starred version <code>filecontents*</code> does not include the header.
+</para>
+<para>This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it often
+appears before the <code>\documentclass</code> command. It is typically used
+when a source file requires a nonstandard style or class file. The
+environment will write that file to the directory containing the source
+and thus make the source file self-contained. Another use is to include
+<code>bib</code> references in the file, again to make it self-contained.
+</para>
+<para>The environment checks whether a file of that name already exists and if
+so, does not do anything. There is a <file>filecontents</file> package that
+redefines the <code>filecontents</code> environment so that instead of doing
+nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file.
+</para>
+<para>For example, this document
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;article&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;filecontents&rbrace;&lbrace;JH.sty&rbrace;
+\newcommand&lbrace;\myname&rbrace;&lbrace;Jim Hef&lbrace;&rbrace;feron&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;filecontents&rbrace;
+\usepackage&lbrace;JH&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+Article by \myname.
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>produces this file <file>JH.sty</file>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">%% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
+%% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+%% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
+%%
+\newcommand&lbrace;\myname&rbrace;&lbrace;Jim Hef&lbrace;&rbrace;feron&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="flushleft" spaces=" "><nodename>flushleft</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">flushright</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">filecontents</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>flushleft</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="302" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>flushleft</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="303" mergedindex="cp"><code>flushleft</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="256">left-justifying text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="257">ragged right text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;flushleft&rbrace;
+ <var>line1</var> \\
+ <var>line2</var> \\
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;flushleft&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="304" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>for <code>flushleft</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long
+then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and
+stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use a double
+backslash, <code>\\</code>. For the declaration form
+see&nbsp;<ref label="_005craggedright"><xrefnodename>\raggedright</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>This creates a box of text that is at most 3 inches wide, with the text
+flush left and ragged right.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&lbrace;3in&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;flushleft&rbrace;
+ A long sentence that will be broken by \LaTeX&lbrace;&rbrace;
+ at a convenient spot. \\
+ And, a fresh line forced by the double backslash.
+\end&lbrace;flushleft&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\raggedright</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Declaration form of the <code>flushleft</code> environment.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005craggedright" spaces=" "><nodename>\raggedright</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">flushleft</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\raggedright</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="305" mergedindex="cp">\raggedright</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="258">ragged right text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="259">left-justifying text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="260">justification, ragged right</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">&lbrace;\raggedright ... &rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;<var>environment</var>&rbrace; \raggedright
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;<var>environment</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and
+ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code>
+or in a <code>parbox</code>. For the environment form
+see&nbsp;<ref label="flushleft"><xrefnodename>flushleft</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>Unlike the <code>flushleft</code> environment, the <code>\raggedright</code>
+command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex;
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit&textrsquo;s format, the
+scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code>
+command that ends the paragraph unit.
+</para>
+<para>Here <code>\raggedright</code> in each second column keeps &latex; from doing
+very awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column. Note
+that <code>\raggedright</code> is inside the curly braces <code>&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> to
+delimit its effect.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;rp&lbrace;2in&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ Team alpha &amp;&lbrace;\raggedright This team does all the real work.&rbrace; \\
+ Team beta &amp;&lbrace;\raggedright This team ensures that the water
+ cooler is never empty.&rbrace; \\
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="flushright" spaces=" "><nodename>flushright</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">itemize</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">flushleft</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>flushright</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="306" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>flushright</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="307" mergedindex="cp"><code>flushright</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="261">ragged left text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="262">right-justifying text, environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;flushright&rbrace;
+ <var>line1</var> \\
+ <var>line2</var> \\
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;flushright&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="308" mergedindex="cp">\\ (for <code>flushright</code>)</indexterm></findex>
+<para>An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
+right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long
+to fit the margins then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that
+avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new
+line use a double backslash, <code>\\</code>. For the declaration form
+see&nbsp;<ref label="_005craggedleft"><xrefnodename>\raggedleft</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>For an example related to this environment, see&nbsp;<ref label="flushleft"><xrefnodename>flushleft</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\raggedleft</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Declaration form of the <code>flushright</code> environment.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005craggedleft" spaces=" "><nodename>\raggedleft</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">flushright</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\raggedleft</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="309" mergedindex="cp">\raggedleft</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="263">ragged left text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="264">justification, ragged left</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="265">right-justifying text</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">&lbrace;\raggedleft ... &rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;<var>environment</var>&rbrace; \raggedleft
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;<var>environment</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and
+ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code>
+or in a <code>parbox</code>. For the environment form
+see&nbsp;<ref label="flushright"><xrefnodename>flushright</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>Unlike the <code>flushright</code> environment, the <code>\raggedleft</code>
+command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex;
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit&textrsquo;s format, the
+scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code>
+command that ends the paragraph unit.
+</para>
+<para>For an example related to this environment, see&nbsp;<ref label="_005craggedright"><xrefnodename>\raggedright</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="itemize" spaces=" "><nodename>itemize</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">letter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">flushright</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>itemize</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="310" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>itemize</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="311" mergedindex="cp"><code>itemize</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="312" mergedindex="cp">\item</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="266">lists of items</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="267">unordered lists</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="268">bulleted lists</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="269">bullet lists</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;itemize&rbrace;
+ \item[<var>optional label of first item</var>] <var>text of first item</var>
+ \item[<var>optional label of second item</var>] <var>text of second item</var>
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;itemize&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a list that is unordered, sometimes called a bullet list. The
+environment must have at least one <code>\item</code>; having none causes the
+&latex; error <samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>This gives a two-item list.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;itemize&rbrace;
+ \item Pencil and watercolor sketch by Cassandra
+ \item Rice portrait
+\end&lbrace;itemize&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>As a top-level list each label would come out as a bullet, &bullet;.
+The format of the labeling depends on the nesting level; see below.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="313" mergedindex="cp">\item</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Start list items with the <code>\item</code> command (<pxref label="_005citem"><xrefnodename>\item</xrefnodename></pxref>). If you
+give <code>\item</code> an optional argument by following it with square
+brackets, as in <code>\item[Optional label]</code>, then by default it will
+appear in bold and be flush right, so it could extend into the left
+margin. For labels that are flush left see the <ref label="description"><xrefnodename>description</xrefnodename></ref>
+environment. Following the <code>\item</code> is optional text, which may
+contain multiple paragraphs.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="314" mergedindex="cp">\labelitemi</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="315" mergedindex="cp">\labelitemii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="316" mergedindex="cp">\labelitemiii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="317" mergedindex="cp">\labelitemiv</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="itemize-labelitemi">itemize labelitemi</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-labelitemii">itemize labelitemii</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-labelitemiii">itemize labelitemiii</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-labelitemiv">itemize labelitemiv</anchor>
+<para>Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
+They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such
+as <code>enumerate</code> (<pxref label="enumerate"><xrefnodename>enumerate</xrefnodename></pxref>). The <code>itemize</code> environment
+uses the commands <code>\labelitemi</code> through <code>\labelitemiv</code> to
+produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase
+roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting
+level). These are the default marks at each level.
+</para>
+<enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
+<listitem spaces=" "><para>&bullet; (bullet, from <code>\textbullet</code>)
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para><b>-<w>-</w></b> (bold en-dash, from <code>\normalfont\bfseries\textendash</code>)
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>* (asterisk, from <code>\textasteriskcentered</code>)
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>. (centered dot, rendered here as a period, from <code>\textperiodcentered</code>)
+</para></listitem></enumerate>
+
+<para>Change the labels with <code>\renewcommand</code>. For instance, this makes
+the first level use diamonds.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand&lbrace;\labelitemi&rbrace;&lbrace;$\diamond$&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="318" mergedindex="cp">\leftmargin</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="319" mergedindex="cp">\leftmargini</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="320" mergedindex="cp">\leftmarginii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="321" mergedindex="cp">\leftmarginiii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="322" mergedindex="cp">\leftmarginiv</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="323" mergedindex="cp">\leftmarginv</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="324" mergedindex="cp">\leftmarginvi</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmargin">itemize leftmargin</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmargini">itemize leftmargini</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmarginii">itemize leftmarginii</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmarginiii">itemize leftmarginiii</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmarginiv">itemize leftmarginiv</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmarginv">itemize leftmarginv</anchor>
+<anchor name="itemize-leftmarginvi">itemize leftmarginvi</anchor>
+<para>The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
+the left margin of the <code>itemize</code> list is determined by the
+parameters <code>\leftmargini</code> through <code>\leftmarginvi</code>. (Note the
+convention of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command
+name to denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: <code>2.5em</code> in
+level 1 (<code>2em</code> in two-column mode), <code>2.2em</code> in level 2,
+<code>1.87em</code> in level 3, and <code>1.7em</code> in level 4, with smaller
+values for more deeply nested levels.
+</para>
+<para>For other major &latex; labeled list environments, see
+<ref label="description"><xrefnodename>description</xrefnodename></ref> and <ref label="enumerate"><xrefnodename>enumerate</xrefnodename></ref>. For information about list
+layout parameters, including the default values, and for information
+about customizing list layout, see <ref label="list"><xrefnodename>list</xrefnodename></ref>. The package
+<file>enumitem</file> is useful for customizing lists.
+</para>
+<para>This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost itemized
+lists.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength&lbrace;\leftmargini&rbrace;&lbrace;1.25em&rbrace; % default 2.5em
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="325" mergedindex="cp">\parskip <r>example</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
+space between items. Here is an example defining an <code>itemize*</code>
+environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
+within a single item (<code>\parskip</code> is not list-specific,
+<pxref label="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"><xrefnodename>\parindent &amp; \parskip</xrefnodename></pxref>):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newenvironment&lbrace;itemize*&rbrace;%
+ &lbrace;\begin&lbrace;itemize&rbrace;%
+ \setlength&lbrace;\itemsep&rbrace;&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;%
+ \setlength&lbrace;\parsep&rbrace;&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;&rbrace;%
+ \setlength&lbrace;\parskip&rbrace;&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;&rbrace;%
+ &lbrace;\end&lbrace;itemize&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="letter" spaces=" "><nodename>letter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">list</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">itemize</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>letter</code> environment: writing letters</sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="326" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>letter</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="327" mergedindex="cp"><code>letter</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+
+<para>This environment is used for creating letters. <xref label="Letters"><xrefnodename>Letters</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="list" spaces=" "><nodename>list</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">math</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">letter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>list</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="328" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>list</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="329" mergedindex="cp"><code>list</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="270">lists of items, generic</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;list&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>labeling</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>spacing</var>&rbrace;
+ \item[<var>optional label of first item</var>] <var>text of first item</var>
+ \item[<var>optional label of second item</var>] <var>text of second item</var>
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;list&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>An environment for constructing lists.
+</para>
+<para>Note that this environment does not typically appear in the document
+body. Most lists created by &latex; authors are the ones that come
+standard: the <code>description</code>, <code>enumerate</code>, and <code>itemize</code>
+environments (<pxref label="description"><xrefnodename>description</xrefnodename></pxref>, <ref label="enumerate"><xrefnodename>enumerate</xrefnodename></ref>, and <ref label="itemize"><xrefnodename>itemize</xrefnodename></ref>).
+</para>
+<para>Instead, the <code>list</code> environment is most often used in macros. For
+example, many standard &latex; environments that do not immediately
+appear to be lists are in fact constructed using <code>list</code>, including
+<code>quotation</code>, <code>quote</code>, and <code>center</code> (<pxref label="quotation-_0026-quote"><xrefnodename>quotation &amp;
+quote</xrefnodename></pxref>, <pxref label="center"><xrefnodename>center</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This uses the <code>list</code> environment to define a new custom
+environment.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcounter&lbrace;namedlistcounter&rbrace; % number the items
+\newenvironment&lbrace;named&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;\begin&lbrace;list&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;Item~\Roman&lbrace;namedlistcounter&rbrace;.&rbrace; % labeling
+ &lbrace;\usecounter&lbrace;namedlistcounter&rbrace; % set counter
+ \setlength&lbrace;\leftmargin&rbrace;&lbrace;3.5em&rbrace;&rbrace; % set spacing
+ &rbrace;
+ &lbrace;\end&lbrace;list&rbrace;&rbrace;
+
+\begin&lbrace;named&rbrace;
+ \item Shows as ``Item~I.''
+ \item[Special label.] Shows as ``Special label.''
+ \item Shows as ``Item~II.''
+\end&lbrace;named&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The mandatory first argument <var>labeling</var> specifies the default
+labeling of list items. It can contain text and &latex; commands, as
+above where it contains both <samp>Item</samp> and <samp>\Roman&lbrace;...&rbrace;</samp>.
+&latex; forms the label by putting the <var>labeling</var> argument in a box
+of width <code>\labelwidth</code>. If the label is wider than that, the
+additional material extends to the right. When making an instance of a
+list you can override the default labeling by giving <code>\item</code> an
+optional argument by including square braces and the text, as in the
+above <code>\item[Special label.]</code>; <pxref label="_005citem"><xrefnodename>\item</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+</para>
+<para>The mandatory second argument <var>spacing</var> has a list of commands.
+This list can be empty. A command that can go in here is
+<code>\usecounter&lbrace;<var>countername</var>&rbrace;</code> (<pxref label="_005cusecounter"><xrefnodename>\usecounter</xrefnodename></pxref>). Use this
+to tell &latex; to number the items using the given counter. The
+counter will be reset to zero each time &latex; enters the environment,
+and the counter is incremented by one each time &latex; encounters an
+<code>\item</code> that does not have an optional argument.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="330" mergedindex="cp">\makelabel</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="list-makelabel">list makelabel</anchor> <para>Another command that can go in <var>spacing</var> is
+<code>\makelabel</code>, which constructs the label box. By default it puts
+the contents flush right. Its only argument is the label, which it
+typesets in LR mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>). One example of changing its
+definition is that to the above <code>named</code> example, before the
+definition of the environment add
+<code>\newcommand&lbrace;\namedmakelabel&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\textsc&lbrace;#1&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>, and between
+the <code>\setlength</code> command and the parenthesis that closes the
+<var>spacing</var> argument also add <code>\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel</code>.
+Then the items will be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the
+second code line to <code>\let\makelabel\fbox</code> puts the labels inside a
+framed box. Another example of the <code>\makelabel</code> command is below,
+in the definition of the <code>redlabel</code> environment.
+</para>
+<para>Also often in <var>spacing</var> are commands to redefine the spacing for the
+list. Below are the spacing parameters with their default values.
+(Default values for derived environments such as <code>itemize</code> can be
+different than the values shown here.) See also the figure that follows
+the list. Each is a length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>). The vertical spaces are
+normally rubber lengths, with <code>plus</code> and <code>minus</code> components,
+to give &tex; flexibility in setting the page. Change each with a
+command such as <code>\setlength&lbrace;itemsep&rbrace;&lbrace;2pt plus1pt minus1pt&rbrace;</code>.
+For some effects these lengths should be zero or negative.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="331" mergedindex="cp">\itemindent</indexterm>\itemindent</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-itemindent">list itemindent</anchor>
+<para>Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond <code>leftmargin</code>, of the
+first line each item. Its default value is <code>0pt</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="332" mergedindex="cp">\itemsep</indexterm>\itemsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-itemsep">list itemsep</anchor>
+<para>Vertical space between items, beyond the <code>\parsep</code>. The defaults
+for the first three levels in &latex;&textrsquo;s <samp>article</samp>, <samp>book</samp>,
+and <samp>report</samp> classes at 10 point size are: <code>4pt plus2pt
+minus1pt</code>, <code>\parsep</code> (that is, <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>), and
+<code>\topsep</code> (that is, <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>). The defaults at
+11 point are: <code>4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt</code>, <code>\parsep</code> (that is,
+<code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>), and <code>topsep</code> (that is, <code>2pt
+plus1pt minus1pt</code>). The defaults at 12 point are: <code>5pt plus2.5pt
+minus1pt</code>, <code>\parsep</code> (that is, <code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>), and
+<code>\topsep</code> (that is, <code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="333" mergedindex="cp">\labelsep</indexterm>\labelsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-labelsep">list labelsep</anchor>
+<para>Horizontal space between the label and text of an item.
+The default for &latex;&textrsquo;s <samp>article</samp>, <samp>book</samp>,
+and <samp>report</samp> classes is <code>0.5em</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="334" mergedindex="cp">\labelwidth</indexterm>\labelwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-labelwidth">list labelwidth</anchor>
+<para>Horizontal width. The box containing the label is nominally this wide.
+If <code>\makelabel</code> returns text that is wider than this then the first
+line of the item will be indented to make room for this extra material.
+If <code>\makelabel</code> returns text of width less than or equal to
+<code>\labelwidth</code> then &latex;&textrsquo;s default is that the label is typeset
+flush right in a box of this width.
+</para>
+<para>The left edge of the label box is
+<code>\leftmargin</code>+<code>\itemindent</code>-<code>\labelsep</code>-<code>\labelwidth</code>
+from the left margin of the enclosing environment.
+</para>
+<para>The default for &latex;&textrsquo;s <samp>article</samp>, <samp>book</samp>, and
+<samp>report</samp> classes at the top level is
+<code>\leftmargini</code>-<code>\labelsep</code>, (which is <code>2em</code> in one column
+mode and <code>1.5em</code> in two column mode). At the second level it is
+<code>\leftmarginii</code>-<code>\labelsep</code>, and at the third level it is
+<code>\leftmarginiii</code>-<code>\labelsep</code>. These definitions make the
+label&textrsquo;s left edge coincide with the left margin of the enclosing
+environment.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="335" mergedindex="cp">\leftmargin</indexterm>\leftmargin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-leftmargin">list leftmargin</anchor>
+<para>Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment
+(or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level list), and the
+left margin of this list. It must be non-negative.
+</para>
+<para>In the standard &latex; document classes, a top-level list has this set
+to the value of <code>\leftmargini</code>, while a list that is nested inside
+a top-level list has this margin set to <code>\leftmarginii</code>. More
+deeply nested lists get the values of <code>\leftmarginiii</code> through
+<code>\leftmarginvi</code>. (Nesting greater than level five generates the
+error message <samp>Too deeply nested</samp>.)
+</para>
+<para>The defaults for the first three levels in &latex;&textrsquo;s <samp>article</samp>,
+<samp>book</samp>, and <samp>report</samp> classes are: <code>\leftmargini</code> is
+<code>2.5em</code> (in two column mode, <code>2em</code>), <code>\leftmarginii</code> is
+<code>2.2em</code>, and <code>\leftmarginiii</code> is <code>1.87em</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="336" mergedindex="cp">\listparindent</indexterm>\listparindent</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-listparindent">list listparindent</anchor>
+<para>Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
+<code>\leftmargin</code>, for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list
+item. A negative value makes this an &textldquo;outdent&textrdquo;. Its default value
+is <code>0pt</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="337" mergedindex="cp">\parsep</indexterm>\parsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-parsep">list parsep</anchor>
+<para>Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. In the <samp>book</samp>
+and <samp>article</samp> classes The defaults for the first three levels in
+&latex;&textrsquo;s <samp>article</samp>, <samp>book</samp>, and <samp>report</samp> classes at 10
+point size are: <code>4pt plus2pt minus1pt</code>, <code>2pt plus1pt
+minus1pt</code>, and <code>0pt</code>. The defaults at 11 point size are:
+<code>4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt</code>, <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>, and
+<code>0pt</code>. The defaults at 12 point size are: <code>5pt plus2.5pt
+minus1pt</code>, <code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>0pt</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="338" mergedindex="cp">\partopsep</indexterm>\partopsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-partopsep">list partopsep</anchor>
+<para>Vertical space added, beyond <code>\topsep</code>+<code>\parskip</code>, to the top
+and bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded by
+a blank line. (A blank line in the &latex; source before the list
+changes spacing at both the top and bottom of the list; whether the line
+following the list is blank does not matter.)
+</para>
+<para>The defaults for the first three levels in &latex;&textrsquo;s <samp>article</samp>,
+<samp>book</samp>, and <samp>report</samp> classes at 10 point size are: <code>2pt
+plus1 minus1pt</code>, <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>1pt plus0pt
+minus1pt</code>. The defaults at 11 point are: <code>3pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>,
+<code>3pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>1pt plus0pt minus1pt</code>). The
+defaults at 12 point are: <code>3pt plus2pt minus3pt</code>, <code>3pt plus2pt
+minus2pt</code>, and <code>1pt plus0pt minus1pt</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="339" mergedindex="cp">\rightmargin</indexterm>\rightmargin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-rightmargin">list rightmargin</anchor>
+<para>Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right
+margin of the enclosing environment. Its default value is <code>0pt</code>.
+It must be non-negative.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="340" mergedindex="cp">\topsep</indexterm>\topsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-topsep">list topsep</anchor>
+<para>Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition
+to <code>\parskip</code> (<pxref label="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"><xrefnodename>\parindent &amp; \parskip</xrefnodename></pxref>). The defaults for
+the first three levels in &latex;&textrsquo;s <samp>article</samp>, <samp>book</samp>, and
+<samp>report</samp> classes at 10 point size are: <code>8pt plus2pt minus4pt</code>,
+<code>4pt plus2pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>. The
+defaults at 11 point are: <code>9pt plus3pt minus5pt</code>, <code>4.5pt
+plus2pt minus1pt</code>, and <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>. The defaults at 12
+point are: <code>10pt plus4pt minus6pt</code>, <code>5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt</code>,
+and <code>2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>This shows the horizontal and vertical distances.
+</para>
+<float type="" endspaces=" ">
+<image><imagefile>latex2e-figures/list</imagefile><imagewidth>3.21in</imagewidth><imageextension>.png</imageextension></image>
+</float>
+
+<para>The lengths shown are listed below. The key relationship is that the
+right edge of the bracket for <var>h1</var> equals the right edge of the
+bracket for <var>h4</var>, so that the left edge of the label box is at
+<var>h3</var>+<var>h4</var>-(<var>h0</var>+<var>h1</var>).
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">v0</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math><code>&backslash;topsep</code> + <code>&backslash;parskip</code></math> if
+the list environment does not start a new paragraph, and
+<code>\topsep</code>+<code>\parskip</code>+<code>\partopsep</code> if it does
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">v1</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><code>\parsep</code>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">v2</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><code>\itemsep</code>+<code>\parsep</code>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">v3</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Same as <var>v0</var>. (This space is affected by whether a blank line
+appears in the source above the environment; whether a blank line
+appears in the source below the environment does not matter.)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">h0</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><code>\labelwidth</code>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">h1</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><code>\labelsep</code>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">h2</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><code>\listparindent</code>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">h3</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><code>\leftmargin</code>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">h4</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><code>\itemindent</code>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">h5</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><code>\rightmargin</code>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>The list&textrsquo;s left and right margins, shown above as <var>h3</var> and <var>h5</var>,
+are with respect to the ones provided by the surrounding environment, or
+with respect to the page margins for a top-level list. The line width
+used for typesetting the list items is <code>\linewidth</code> (<pxref label="Page-layout-parameters"><xrefnodename>Page
+layout parameters</xrefnodename></pxref>). For instance, set the list&textrsquo;s left margin to be one
+quarter of the distance between the left and right margins of the
+enclosing environment with
+<code>\setlength&lbrace;\leftmargin&rbrace;&lbrace;0.25\linewidth&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Page breaking in a list structure is controlled by the three
+parameters below. For each, the &latex; default is
+<code>-\&arobase;lowpenalty</code>, that is, <code>-51</code>. Because it is negative,
+it somewhat encourages a page break at each spot. Change it with,
+e.g., <code>\&arobase;beginparpenalty=9999</code>; a value of 10000 prohibits a
+page break.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="341" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;beginparpenalty</indexterm>\&arobase;beginparpenalty</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-beginparpenalty">list beginparpenalty</anchor>
+<para>The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default <code>-51</code>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="342" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;itempenalty</indexterm>\&arobase;itempenalty</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-itempenalty">list itempenalty</anchor>
+<para>The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default <code>-51</code>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="343" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;endparpenalty</indexterm>\&arobase;endparpenalty</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="list-endparpenalty">list endparpenalty</anchor>
+<para>The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default <code>-51</code>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="271"><r>package</r>, <code>enumitem</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="272"><code>enumitem</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The package <code>enumitem</code> is useful for customizing lists.
+</para>
+<para>This example has the labels in red. They are numbered, and the left
+edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text.
+<xref label="_005cusecounter"><xrefnodename>\usecounter</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;color&rbrace;
+\newcounter&lbrace;cnt&rbrace;
+\newcommand&lbrace;\makeredlabel&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\textcolor&lbrace;red&rbrace;&lbrace;#1.&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\newenvironment&lbrace;redlabel&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;\begin&lbrace;list&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;\arabic&lbrace;cnt&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;\usecounter&lbrace;cnt&rbrace;
+ \setlength&lbrace;\labelwidth&rbrace;&lbrace;0em&rbrace;
+ \setlength&lbrace;\labelsep&rbrace;&lbrace;0.5em&rbrace;
+ \setlength&lbrace;\leftmargin&rbrace;&lbrace;1.5em&rbrace;
+ \setlength&lbrace;\itemindent&rbrace;&lbrace;0.5em&rbrace; % equals \labelwidth+\labelsep
+ \let\makelabel=\makeredlabel
+ &rbrace;
+ &rbrace;
+&lbrace;\end&lbrace;list&rbrace; &rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\item</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">An entry in a list.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">trivlist</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">A restricted form of <code>list</code>.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005citem" spaces=" "><nodename>\item</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">trivlist</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">list</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\item</code>: An entry in a list</sectiontitle>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\item text of item
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\item[<var>optional-label</var>] text of item
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>An entry in a list. The entries are prefixed by a label, whose default
+depends on the list type.
+</para>
+<para>Because the optional label is surrounded by square brackets
+<samp>[...]</samp>, if you have an item whose text starts with <samp>[</samp>, you
+have to hide the bracket inside curly braces, as in: <code>\item
+&lbrace;[&rbrace; is an open square bracket</code>; otherwise, &latex; will think it
+marks the start of an optional label.
+</para>
+<para>Similarly, if the item does have the optional label and you need a
+close square bracket inside that label, you must hide it in the same
+way: <code>\item[Close square bracket, &lbrace;]&rbrace;]</code>. <xref label="LaTeX-command-syntax"><xrefnodename>&latex;
+command syntax</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the enumerate list has two items that use the default
+label and one that uses the optional label.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+ \item Moe
+ \item[sometimes] Shemp
+ \item Larry
+\end&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The first item is labelled <samp>1.</samp>, the second item is labelled
+<samp>sometimes</samp>, and the third item is labelled <samp>2.</samp>. Because
+of the optional label in the second item, the third item is not
+labelled&nbsp;<samp>3.</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="trivlist" spaces=" "><nodename>trivlist</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\item</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">list</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>trivlist</code>: A restricted form of <code>list</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;trivlist&rbrace;
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;trivlist&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>A restricted version of the list environment, in which margins are not
+indented and an <code>\item</code> without an optional argument produces no
+text. It is most often used in macros, to define an environment where
+the <code>\item</code> command as part of the environment&textrsquo;s definition. For
+instance, the <code>center</code> environment is defined essentially like
+this:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newenvironment&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;\begin&lbrace;trivlist&rbrace;\centering\item\relax&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;\end&lbrace;trivlist&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Using <code>trivlist</code> in this way allows the macro to inherit some
+common code: combining vertical space of two adjacent environments;
+detecting whether the text following the environment should be
+considered a new paragraph or a continuation of the previous one;
+adjusting the left and right margins for possible nested list
+environments.
+</para>
+<para>Specifically, <code>trivlist</code> uses the current values of the list
+parameters (<pxref label="list"><xrefnodename>list</xrefnodename></pxref>), except that <code>\parsep</code> is set to the
+value of <code>\parskip</code>, and <code>\leftmargin</code>, <code>\labelwidth</code>,
+and <code>\itemindent</code> are set to zero.
+</para>
+<para>This example outputs the items as two paragraphs, except that (by
+default) they have no paragraph indent and are vertically separated.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;trivlist&rbrace;
+\item The \textit&lbrace;Surprise&rbrace; is not old; no one would call her old.
+\item She has a bluff bow, lovely lines.
+\end&lbrace;trivlist&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="math" spaces=" "><nodename>math</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">minipage</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">list</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>math</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="344" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>math</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="345" mergedindex="cp"><code>math</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="273">in-line formulas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;math&rbrace;
+<var>math</var>
+\end&lbrace;math&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <code>math</code> environment inserts given <var>math</var> material within
+the running text. <code>\(...\)</code> and <code>$...$</code> are synonyms.
+<xref label="Math-formulas"><xrefnodename>Math formulas</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="minipage" spaces=" "><nodename>minipage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">picture</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">math</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>minipage</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="346" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>minipage</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="347" mergedindex="cp"><code>minipage</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="274">minipage, creating a</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>width</var>&rbrace;
+ <var>contents</var>
+\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;[<var>position</var>][<var>height</var>][<var>inner-pos</var>]&lbrace;<var>width</var>&rbrace;
+ <var>contents</var>
+\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Put <var>contents</var> into a box that is <var>width</var> wide. This is like a
+small version of a page; it can contain its own footnotes, itemized
+lists, etc. (There are some restrictions, including that it cannot have
+floats.) This box will not be broken across pages. So <code>minipage</code>
+is similar to <code>\parbox</code> (<pxref label="_005cparbox"><xrefnodename>\parbox</xrefnodename></pxref>) but here you can have
+paragraphs.
+</para>
+<para>This example will be 3&nbsp;inches wide, and has two paragraphs.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&lbrace;3in&rbrace;
+ Stephen Kleene was a founder of the Theory of Computation.
+
+ He was a student of Church, wrote three influential texts,
+ was President of the Association for Symbolic Logic,
+ and won the National Medal of Science.
+\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>See below for a discussion of the paragraph indent inside a
+<code>minipage</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The required argument <var>width</var> is a rigid length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+It gives the width of the box into which <var>contents</var> are typeset.
+</para>
+<para>There are three optional arguments, <var>position</var>, <var>height</var>, and
+<var>inner-pos</var>. You need not include all three. For example, get the
+default <var>position</var> and set the <var>height</var> with
+<code>\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;[c][2.54cm] <var>contents</var> \end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;</code>.
+(Get the natural height with an empty argument, <code>[]</code>.)
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>position</var> governs how the <code>minipage</code>
+vertically aligns with the surrounding material.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(synonym <code>m</code>) Default. Positions the <code>minipage</code> so its
+vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what
+Plain &tex; calls <code>\vcenter</code>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Match the top line in the <code>minipage</code> with the baseline of the
+surrounding text (Plain &tex;&textrsquo;s <code>\vtop</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Match the bottom line in the <code>minipage</code> with the baseline of the
+surrounding text (Plain &tex;&textrsquo;s <code>\vbox</code>.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>To see the effects of these, contrast running this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">---\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;[c]&lbrace;0.25in&rbrace;
+ first\\ second\\ third
+\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>with the results of changing <code>c</code> to <code>b</code> or&nbsp;<code>t</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>height</var> is a rigid length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+It sets the height of the <code>minipage</code>. You can enter any value
+larger than, or equal to, or smaller than the <code>minipage</code>&textrsquo;s natural
+height and &latex; will not give an error or warning. You can also set
+it to a height of zero or a negative value.
+</para>
+<para>The final optional argument <var>inner-pos</var> controls the placement of
+<var>content</var> inside the box. These are the possible values are (the
+default is the value of <var>position</var>).
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Place <var>content</var> at the top of the box.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Place it in the vertical center.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Place it at the box bottom.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">s</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Stretch <var>contents</var> out vertically; it must contain vertically
+stretchable space.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>The <var>inner-pos</var> argument makes sense when the <var>height</var> option
+is set to a value larger than the <code>minipage</code>&textrsquo;s natural height. To
+see the effect of the options, run this example with the various choices
+in place of <code>b</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Text before
+\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ ---\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;[c][3in][b]&lbrace;0.25\textwidth&rbrace;
+ first\\ second\\ third
+ \end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+Text after
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="275">indentation of paragraphs, in minipage</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="276">paragraph indentation, in minipage</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="348" mergedindex="cp">\parindent</indexterm></findex>
+<para>By default paragraphs are not indented in a <code>minipage</code>. Change
+that with a command such as <code>\setlength&lbrace;\parindent&rbrace;&lbrace;1pc&rbrace;</code> at
+the start of <var>contents</var>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="277">footnotes in figures</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="278">figures, footnotes in</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Footnotes in a <code>minipage</code> environment are handled in a way that is
+particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
+<code>\footnote</code> or <code>\footnotetext</code> command puts the footnote at
+the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it
+uses the <code>\mpfootnote</code> counter instead of the ordinary
+<code>footnote</code> counter (<pxref label="Counters"><xrefnodename>Counters</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This puts the footnote at the bottom of the table, not the bottom of the
+page.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace; % center the minipage on the line
+\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&lbrace;2.5in&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;center&rbrace; % center the table inside the minipage
+ \begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;ll&rbrace;
+ \textsc&lbrace;Monarch&rbrace; &amp;\textsc&lbrace;Reign&rbrace; \\ \hline
+ Elizabeth II &amp;63 years\footnote&lbrace;to date&rbrace; \\
+ Victoria &amp;63 years \\
+ George III &amp;59 years
+ \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+ \end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>If you nest minipages then there is an oddness when using footnotes.
+Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next
+<code>\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;</code> which may not be their logical place.
+</para>
+<para>This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic. They
+are vertically centered.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand*&lbrace;\vcenteredhbox&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;&arobase;&lbrace;&rbrace;c&arobase;&lbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;#1\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ \vcenteredhbox&lbrace;\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]&lbrace;nyc.png&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \hspace&lbrace;0.1\textwidth&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&lbrace;0.5\textwidth&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;r|l&rbrace;
+ \multicolumn&lbrace;1&rbrace;&lbrace;r&rbrace;&lbrace;Borough&rbrace; &amp;Pop (million) \\ \hline
+ The Bronx &amp;$1.5$ \\
+ Brooklyn &amp;$2.6$ \\
+ Manhattan &amp;$1.6$ \\
+ Queens &amp;$2.3$ \\
+ Staten Island &amp;$0.5$
+ \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+ \end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="picture" spaces=" "><nodename>picture</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">quotation &amp; quote</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">minipage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>picture</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="349" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>picture</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="350" mergedindex="cp"><code>picture</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="279">creating pictures</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="280">pictures, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para><example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)
+ <var>picture commands</var>
+\end&lbrace;picture&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)(<var>xoffset</var>,<var>yoffset</var>)
+ <var>picture commands</var>
+\end&lbrace;picture&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows,
+boxes, circles, and text. Note that while this environment is not
+obsolete, new documents typically use much more powerful graphics
+creation systems, such as <code>TikZ</code>, <code>PSTricks</code>, <code>MetaPost</code>,
+or <code>Asymptote</code>. These are not covered in this document; see CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>This shows the parallelogram law for adding vectors.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="351" mergedindex="cp">\unitlength</indexterm></findex>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength&lbrace;\unitlength&rbrace;&lbrace;1cm&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(6,6) % picture box will be 6cm wide by 6cm tall
+ \put(0,0)&lbrace;\vector(2,1)&lbrace;4&rbrace;&rbrace; % for every 2 over this vector goes 1 up
+ \put(2,1)&lbrace;\makebox(0,0)[l]&lbrace;\ first leg&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \put(4,2)&lbrace;\vector(1,2)&lbrace;2&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \put(5,4)&lbrace;\makebox(0,0)[l]&lbrace;\ second leg&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \put(0,0)&lbrace;\line(1,1)&lbrace;6&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \put(3,3)&lbrace;\makebox(0,0)[r]&lbrace;sum\ &rbrace;&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;picture&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an
+exact location.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;color,graphicx&rbrace; % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+\setlength&lbrace;\unitlength&rbrace;&lbrace;\textwidth&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(1,1) % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
+ \put(0,0)&lbrace;\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]&lbrace;desertedisland.jpg&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \put(0.25,0.35)&lbrace;\textcolor&lbrace;red&rbrace;&lbrace;X Treasure here&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;picture&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The red&nbsp;X will be precisely a quarter of the <code>\linewidth</code> from
+the left margin, and <code>0.35\linewidth</code> up from the bottom. Another
+example of this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get
+repeat material on each of a document&textrsquo;s pages.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>picture</code> environment has one required argument, a pair of
+numbers (<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>). Multiply these by the value
+<code>\unitlength</code> to get the nominal size of the output, the space that
+&latex; reserves on the output page. This nominal size need not be how
+large the picture really is; &latex; will draw things from the picture
+outside the picture&textrsquo;s box.
+</para>
+<para>This environment also has an optional argument
+(<var>xoffset</var>,<var>yoffset</var>). It is used to shift the origin. Unlike
+most optional arguments, this one is not contained in square brackets.
+As with the required argument, it consists of two real numbers.
+Multiply these by <code>\unitlength</code> to get the point at the lower-left
+corner of the picture.
+</para>
+<para>For example, if <code>\unitlength</code> has been set to <code>1mm</code>, the
+command
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(100,200)(10,20)
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>produces a box of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters. The
+picture&textrsquo;s origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner
+is there, and the upper-right corner is at (110mm,220mm). When you
+first draw a picture you typically omit the optional argument, leaving
+the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
+picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate
+optional argument.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="281">position, in picture</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Each <var>picture command</var> tells &latex; where to put something by
+naming its position. A <dfn>position</dfn> is a pair such as <code>(2.4,-5)</code>
+giving the x- and y-coordinates. A <dfn>coordinate</dfn> is a not a length,
+it is a real number (it may have a decimal point or a minus sign). It
+specifies a length in multiples of the unit length <code>\unitlength</code>,
+so if <code>\unitlength</code> has been set to <code>1cm</code>, then the coordinate
+2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters.
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s default for <code>\unitlength</code> is <code>1pt</code>. it is a rigid
+length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>). Change it with the <code>\setlength</code> command
+(<pxref label="_005csetlength"><xrefnodename>\setlength</xrefnodename></pxref>). Make this change only outside of a <code>picture</code>
+environment.
+</para>
+<para>Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at
+the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears
+as an argument, as with <code>\put(1,2)&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>, it is not enclosed in
+braces since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also,
+unlike in some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are
+further up the page.
+</para>
+<para>There are four ways to put things in a picture: <code>\put</code>,
+<code>\multiput</code>, <code>\qbezier</code>, and <code>\graphpaper</code>. The most
+often used is <code>\put</code>. This
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(11.3,-0.3)&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>places the object with its reference point at coordinates
+<math>(11.3,-0.3)</math>. The reference points for various objects will be
+described below.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="352" mergedindex="cp">LR box</indexterm></findex>
+The <code>\put</code> command creates an <dfn>LR box</dfn> (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+Anything that can go in an <code>\mbox</code> (<pxref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox &amp; \makebox</xrefnodename></pxref>) can
+go in the text argument of the <code>\put</code> command. The reference point
+will be the lower left corner of the box. In this picture
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength&lbrace;\unitlength&rbrace;&lbrace;1cm&rbrace;
+...\begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(1,1)
+ \put(0,0)&lbrace;\line(1,0)&lbrace;1&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \put(0,0)&lbrace;\line(1,1)&lbrace;1&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;picture&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>the three dots are just slightly left of the point of the angle formed
+by the two lines. (Also, <code>\line(1,1)&lbrace;1&rbrace;</code> does not call for a
+line of length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of
+1.)
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\multiput</code>, <code>qbezier</code>, and <code>graphpaper</code> commands are
+described below.
+</para>
+<para>This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using <code>\qbezier</code> for
+that curve.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(3,1.5)
+ \put(0,0)&lbrace;\vector(1,0)&lbrace;8&rbrace;&rbrace; % x axis
+ \put(0,0)&lbrace;\vector(0,1)&lbrace;4&rbrace;&rbrace; % y axis
+ \put(2,0)&lbrace;\line(0,1)&lbrace;3&rbrace;&rbrace; % left side rectangle
+ \put(4,0)&lbrace;\line(0,1)&lbrace;3.5&rbrace;&rbrace; % right side
+ \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
+ \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
+ \thicklines % below here, lines are twice as thick
+ \put(2,3)&lbrace;\line(4,1)&lbrace;2&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \put(4.5,2.5)&lbrace;\framebox&lbrace;Trapezoidal Rule&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;picture&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\put</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Place an object at a specified place.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\multiput</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw multiple instances of an object.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\qbezier</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a quadratic Bezier curve.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\graphpaper</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw graph paper.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\line</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a straight line.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\linethickness</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set thickness of horizontal and vertical lines.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\thinlines</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The default line thickness.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\thicklines</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">A heavier line thickness.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\circle</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a circle.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\oval</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw an oval.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\shortstack</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Make a stack of objects.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\vector</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a line with an arrow.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\makebox (picture)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a box of the specified size.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\framebox (picture)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a box with a frame around it.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\frame</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a frame around an object.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\dashbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a dashed box.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cput" spaces=" "><nodename>\put</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\multiput</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\put</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="353" mergedindex="cp">\put</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(<var>xcoord</var>,<var>ycoord</var>)&lbrace;<var>content</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Place <var>content</var> at the coordinate (<var>xcoord</var>,<var>ycoord</var>). See
+the discussion of coordinates and <code>\unitlength</code> in <ref label="picture"><xrefnodename>picture</xrefnodename></ref>.
+The <var>content</var> is processed in LR mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>) so it cannot
+contain line breaks.
+</para>
+<para>This includes the text into the <code>picture</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(4.5,2.5)&lbrace;Apply the \textit&lbrace;unpoke&rbrace; move&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The reference point, the location (4.5,2.5), is the lower left of the
+text, at the bottom left of the <samp>A</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cmultiput" spaces=" "><nodename>\multiput</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\qbezier</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\put</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\multiput</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="354" mergedindex="cp">\multiput</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\multiput(<var>x</var>,<var>y</var>)(<var>delta_x</var>,<var>delta_y</var>)&lbrace;<var>num-copies</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>obj</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Copy <var>obj</var> a total of <var>num-copies</var> times, with an increment of
+<var>delta_x,delta_y</var>. The <var>obj</var> first appears at position
+<math>(x,y)</math>, then at <math>(x+\delta_x,y+\delta_y)</math>, and so on.
+</para>
+<para>This draws a simple grid with every fifth line in bold (see also
+<ref label="_005cgraphpaper"><xrefnodename>\graphpaper</xrefnodename></ref>).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(10,10)
+ \linethickness&lbrace;0.05mm&rbrace;
+ \multiput(0,0)(1,0)&lbrace;10&rbrace;&lbrace;\line(0,1)&lbrace;10&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,1)&lbrace;10&rbrace;&lbrace;\line(1,0)&lbrace;10&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \linethickness&lbrace;0.5mm&rbrace;
+ \multiput(0,0)(5,0)&lbrace;3&rbrace;&lbrace;\line(0,1)&lbrace;10&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,5)&lbrace;3&rbrace;&lbrace;\line(1,0)&lbrace;10&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;picture&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cqbezier" spaces=" "><nodename>\qbezier</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\graphpaper</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\multiput</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\qbezier</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="355" mergedindex="cp">\qbezier</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\qbezier(<var>x1</var>,<var>y1</var>)(<var>x2</var>,<var>y2</var>)(<var>x3</var>,<var>y3</var>)
+\qbezier[<var>num</var>](<var>x1</var>,<var>y1</var>)(<var>x2</var>,<var>y2</var>)(<var>x3</var>,<var>y3</var>)
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Draw a quadratic Bezier curve whose control points are given by the
+three required arguments <code>(<var>x1</var>,<var>y1</var>)</code>,
+<code>(<var>x2</var>,<var>y2</var>)</code>, and <code>(<var>x3</var>,<var>y3</var>)</code>. That is,
+the curve runs from <var>(x1,y1)</var> to <var>(x3,y3)</var>, is quadratic, and is
+such that the tangent line at <var>(x1,y1)</var> passes through
+<var>(x2,y2)</var>, as does the tangent line at <var>(x3,y3)</var>.
+</para>
+<para>This draws a curve from the coordinate (1,1) to (1,0).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\qbezier(1,1)(1.25,0.75)(1,0)
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The curve&textrsquo;s tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the
+curve&textrsquo;s tangent line at (1,0).
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>num</var> gives the number of calculated
+intermediate points. The default is to draw a smooth curve whose
+maximum number of points is <code>\qbeziermax</code> (change this value with
+<code>\renewcommand</code>).
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cgraphpaper" spaces=" "><nodename>\graphpaper</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\line</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\qbezier</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\graphpaper</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="356" mergedindex="cp">\graphpaper</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\graphpaper(<var>x_init</var>,<var>y_init</var>)(<var>x_dimen</var>,<var>y_dimen</var>)
+\graphpaper[<var>spacing</var>](<var>x_init</var>,<var>y_init</var>)(<var>x_dimen</var>,<var>y_dimen</var>)
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the <code>graphpap</code> package.
+The grid&textrsquo;s origin is <code>(<var>x_init</var>,<var>y_init</var>)</code>.
+Grid lines come every <var>spacing</var> units (the default is 10).
+The grid extends <var>x_dimen</var> units to the right and <var>y_dimen</var> units up.
+All arguments must be positive integers.
+</para>
+<para>This make a grid with seven vertical lines and eleven horizontal lines.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;graphpap&rbrace; % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(6,20) % in document body
+ \graphpaper[2](0,0)(12,20)
+\end&lbrace;picture&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The lines are numbered every ten units.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cline" spaces=" "><nodename>\line</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\linethickness</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\graphpaper</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\line</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="357" mergedindex="cp">\line</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\line(<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>)&lbrace;<var>travel</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Draw a line. It slopes such that it vertically rises <var>y_rise</var> for
+every horizontal <var>x_run</var>. The <var>travel</var> is the total horizontal
+change&nbsp;&textmdash; it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in
+<math>x</math>. In the special case of vertical lines, where
+(<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>)=(0,1), the <var>travel</var> gives the change in
+<math>y</math>.
+</para>
+<para>This draws a line starting at coordinates (1,3).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(1,3)&lbrace;\line(2,5)&lbrace;4&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>For every over 2, this line will go up 5. Because <var>travel</var>
+specifies that this goes over 4, it must go up&nbsp;10. Thus its
+endpoint is <math>(1,3)+(4,10)=(5,13)</math>. In particular, note that
+<math><var>travel</var>=4</math> is not the length of the line, it is the change in
+<math>x</math>.
+</para>
+<para>The arguments <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> are integers that can be
+positive, negative, or zero. (If both are 0 then &latex; treats the
+second as 1.) With
+<code>\put(<var>x_init</var>,<var>y_init</var>)&lbrace;\line(<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>)&lbrace;<var>travel</var>&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>,
+if <var>x_run</var> is negative then the line&textrsquo;s ending point has a first
+coordinate that is less than <var>x_init</var>. If <var>y_rise</var> is negative
+then the line&textrsquo;s ending point has a second coordinate that is less than
+<var>y_init</var>.
+</para>
+<para>If <var>travel</var> is negative then you get <code>LaTeX Error: Bad \line or
+\vector argument.</code>
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="282"><code>pict2e</code> package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="283">graphics packages</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="284"><r>package</r>, <code>pict2e</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="285"><code>pict2e</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="286"><r>package</r>, <code>TikZ</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="287"><code>TikZ</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="288"><r>package</r>, <code>PSTricks</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="289"><code>PSTricks</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="290"><r>package</r>, <code>MetaPost</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="291"><code>MetaPost</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="292"><r>package</r>, <code>Asymptote</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="293"><code>Asymptote</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Standard &latex; can only draw lines with a limited range of slopes
+because these lines are made by putting together line segments from
+pre-made fonts. The two numbers <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> must have
+integer values from &minus;6 through&nbsp;6. Also, they must be
+relatively prime, so that <var>(x_run,y_rise)</var> can be (2,1) but not
+(4,2) (if you choose the latter then instead of lines you get sequences
+of arrowheads; the solution is to switch to the former). To get lines
+of arbitrary slope and plenty of other shapes in a system like
+<code>picture</code>, see the package <file>pict2e</file> on CTAN. Another solution
+is to use a full-featured graphics system such as <file>TikZ</file>, or
+<file>PSTricks</file>, or <file>MetaPost</file>, or <file>Asymptote</file>
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005clinethickness" spaces=" "><nodename>\linethickness</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thinlines</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\line</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\linethickness</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="358" mergedindex="cp">\linethickness</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\linethickness&lbrace;<var>dim</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Declares the thickness of subsequent horizontal and vertical lines in a
+picture to be <var>dim</var>, which must be a positive length
+(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>). It differs from <code>\thinlines</code> and
+<code>\thicklines</code> in that it does not affect the thickness of slanted
+lines, circles, or ovals.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cthinlines" spaces=" "><nodename>\thinlines</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thicklines</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\linethickness</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thinlines</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="359" mergedindex="cp">\thinlines</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.4<dmn>pt</dmn>. This is the default
+thickness, so this command is unnecessary unless the thickness has been
+changed with either <ref label="_005clinethickness"><xrefnodename>\linethickness</xrefnodename></ref> or <ref label="_005cthicklines"><xrefnodename>\thicklines</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cthicklines" spaces=" "><nodename>\thicklines</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\circle</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\thinlines</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thicklines</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="360" mergedindex="cp">\thicklines</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals
+in a picture environment to be 0.8<dmn>pt</dmn>. See also
+<ref label="_005clinethickness"><xrefnodename>\linethickness</xrefnodename></ref> and <ref label="_005cthinlines"><xrefnodename>\thinlines</xrefnodename></ref>. This command is illustrated
+in the Trapezoidal Rule example of <ref label="picture"><xrefnodename>picture</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005ccircle" spaces=" "><nodename>\circle</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\oval</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\thicklines</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\circle</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="361" mergedindex="cp">\circle</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\circle&lbrace;<var>diameter</var>&rbrace;
+\circle*&lbrace;<var>diameter</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produces a circle with a diameter as close as possible to the specified
+one. The <code>*</code>&nbsp;form produces a filled-in circle.
+</para>
+<para>This draws a circle of radius 6, centered at <code>(5,7)</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(5,7)&lbrace;\circle&lbrace;6&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The available radii for <code>circle</code> are, in points, the even
+numbers from 2 to 20, inclusive. For <code>circle*</code> they are all the
+integers from 1 to 15.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005coval" spaces=" "><nodename>\oval</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\shortstack</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\circle</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\oval</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="362" mergedindex="cp">\oval</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\oval(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)
+\oval(<var>width</var>,<var>height</var>)[<var>portion</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument
+<var>portion</var> allows you to produce only half or a quarter of the oval.
+For half an oval take <var>portion</var> to be one of these.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>top half
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>bottom half
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>right half
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>left half
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Produce only one quarter of the oval by setting <var>portion</var> to
+<code>tr</code>, <code>br</code>, <code>bl</code>, or <code>tl</code>.
+</para>
+<para>This draws the top half of an oval that is 3 wide and 7 tall.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(5,7)&lbrace;\oval(3,7)[t]&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The (5,7) is the center of the entire oval, not just the center of the
+top half.
+</para>
+<para>These shapes are not ellipses. They are rectangles whose corners are
+made with quarter circles. These circles have a maximum radius of
+20<dmn>pt</dmn> (<pxref label="_005ccircle"><xrefnodename>\circle</xrefnodename></pxref> for the sizes). Thus large ovals are just
+boxes with a small amount of corner rounding.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cshortstack" spaces=" "><nodename>\shortstack</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vector</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\oval</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\shortstack</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="363" mergedindex="cp">\shortstack</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\shortstack[<var>position</var>]&lbrace;<var>line 1</var> \\ ... &rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a vertical stack of objects.
+</para>
+<para>This labels the <math>y</math> axis.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(0,0)&lbrace;\vector(1,0)&lbrace;4&rbrace;&rbrace; % x axis
+\put(0,0)&lbrace;\vector(0,1)&lbrace;2&rbrace;&rbrace; % y
+\put(-0.25,2)&lbrace;\makebox[0][r]&lbrace;\shortstack[r]&lbrace;$y$\\ axis&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack.
+In the above example the <ref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox &amp; \makebox</xrefnodename></ref> puts the stack flush
+right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits slightly to
+the left of the <math>y</math>&nbsp;axis.
+</para>
+<para>The valid positions are:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Make objects flush right
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Make objects flush left
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Center objects (default)
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="364" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>(for <code>\shortstack</code> objects)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Separate objects into lines with <code>\\</code>. These stacks are short in
+that, unlike in a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment, here the
+rows are not spaced out to be of even heights. Thus, in
+<code>\shortstack&lbrace;X\\o\\o\\X&rbrace;</code> the first and last rows are taller than
+the middle two. You can adjust row heights either by putting in the
+usual interline spacing with <code>\shortstack&lbrace;X\\ \strut o\\o\\X&rbrace;</code>,
+or by hand, via an explicit zero-width box <code>\shortstack&lbrace;X \\
+\rule&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;&lbrace;12pt&rbrace; o\\o\\X&rbrace;</code> or by using <code>\\</code>&textrsquo;s optional
+argument <code>\shortstack&lbrace;X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\shortstack</code> command is also available outside the
+<code>picture</code> environment.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cvector" spaces=" "><nodename>\vector</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\makebox (picture)</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\shortstack</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vector</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="365" mergedindex="cp">\vector</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\vector(<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>)&lbrace;<var>travel</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Draw a line ending in an arrow. The slope of that line is: it
+vertically rises <var>y_rise</var> for every horizontal <var>x_run</var>. The
+<var>travel</var> is the total horizontal change&nbsp;&textmdash; it is not the
+length of the vector, it is the change in <math>x</math>. In the special case
+of vertical vectors, if (<var>x_run</var>,<var>y_rise</var>)=(0,1), then
+<var>travel</var> gives the change in <math>y</math>.
+</para>
+<para>For an example see <ref label="picture"><xrefnodename>picture</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>For elaboration on <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> see <ref label="_005cline"><xrefnodename>\line</xrefnodename></ref>. As
+there, the values of <var>x_run</var> and <var>y_rise</var> are limited. For
+<code>\vector</code> you must chooses integers between &minus;4 and 4,
+inclusive. Also, the two you choose must be relatively prime. Thus,
+<code>\vector(2,1)&lbrace;4&rbrace;</code> is acceptable but <code>\vector(4,2)&lbrace;4&rbrace;</code> is
+not (if you use the latter then you get a sequence of arrowheads).
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029" spaces=" "><nodename>\makebox (picture)</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\framebox (picture)</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\vector</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\makebox</code> (picture)</sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="366" mergedindex="cp">\makebox <r>(for <code>picture</code>)</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makebox(<var>rec-width</var>,<var>rec-height</var>)&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\makebox(<var>rec-width</var>,<var>rec-height</var>)[<var>position</var>]&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Make a box to hold <var>text</var>. This command fits with the
+<code>picture</code> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because <var>rec-width</var> and <var>rec-height</var> are numbers specifying
+distances in terms of the <code>\unitlength</code> (<pxref label="picture"><xrefnodename>picture</xrefnodename></pxref>). This
+command is similar to the normal <code>\makebox</code> command (<pxref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox &amp;
+\makebox</xrefnodename></pxref>) except here that you must specify the width and height. This
+command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This makes a box of length 3.5 times <code>\unitlength</code> and height 4
+times <code>\unitlength</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(1,2)&lbrace;\makebox(3.5,4)&lbrace;...&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The optional argument <code><var>position</var></code> specifies where in the box
+the <var>text</var> appears. The default is to center it, both horizontally
+and vertically. To place it somewhere else, use a string with one or
+two of these letters.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Puts <var>text</var> the top of the box.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put <var>text</var> at the bottom.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put <var>text</var> on the left.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put <var>text</var> on the right.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029" spaces=" "><nodename>\framebox (picture)</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\frame</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\makebox (picture)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\framebox</code> (picture)</sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="367" mergedindex="cp">\framebox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\framebox(<var>rec-width</var>,<var>rec-height</var>)&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\framebox(<var>rec-width</var>,<var>rec-height</var>)[<var>position</var>]&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This is the same as <ref label="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\makebox (picture)</xrefnodename></ref> except that it puts a frame
+around the outside of the box that it creates. The reference point is
+the bottom left corner of the frame. This command fits with the
+<code>picture</code> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+<code>\unitlength</code> (<pxref label="picture"><xrefnodename>picture</xrefnodename></pxref>). This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This example creates a frame 2.5&nbsp;inches by 3&nbsp;inches and puts
+the text in the center.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength&lbrace;\unitlength&rbrace;&lbrace;1in&rbrace;
+\framebox(2.5,3)&lbrace;test text&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The required arguments are that the rectangle has overall width
+<var>rect-width</var> units and height <var>rect-height</var> units.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>position</var> specifies the position of
+<var>text</var>; see <ref label="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\makebox (picture)</xrefnodename></ref> for the values that it can
+take.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="368" mergedindex="cp">\fboxrule</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="369" mergedindex="cp">\fboxsep</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The rule has thickness <code>\fboxrule</code> and there is a blank space
+<code>\fboxsep</code> between the frame and the contents of the box.
+</para>
+<para>For this command, you must specify the <var>width</var> and <var>height</var>. If
+you want to just put a frame around some contents whose dimension is
+determined in some other way then either use <code>\fbox</code> (<pxref label="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox"><xrefnodename>\fbox
+&amp; \framebox</xrefnodename></pxref>) or <code>\frame</code> (<pxref label="_005cframe"><xrefnodename>\frame</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cframe" spaces=" "><nodename>\frame</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\dashbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\framebox (picture)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\frame</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="370" mergedindex="cp">\frame</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\frame&lbrace;<var>contents</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Puts a rectangular frame around <var>contents</var>. The reference point is
+the bottom left corner of the frame. In contrast to <code>\framebox</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\framebox (picture)</xrefnodename></pxref>), this command puts no extra space is put
+between the frame and the object. It is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cdashbox" spaces=" "><nodename>\dashbox</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\frame</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\dashbox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="371" mergedindex="cp">\dashbox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\dashbox&lbrace;<var>dash-len</var>&rbrace;(<var>rect-width</var>,<var>rect-height</var>)&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\dashbox&lbrace;<var>dash-len</var>&rbrace;(<var>rect-width</var>,<var>rect-height</var>)[<var>position</var>]&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Create a dashed rectangle around <var>text</var>. This command fits with the
+<code>picture</code> environment, although you can use it outside of there,
+because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the
+<code>\unitlength</code> (<pxref label="picture"><xrefnodename>picture</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The required arguments are: dashes are <var>dash-len</var> units long, with
+the same length gap, and the rectangle has overall width
+<var>rect-width</var> units and height <var>rect-height</var> units.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>position</var> specifies the position of
+<var>text</var>; see <ref label="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\makebox (picture)</xrefnodename></ref> for the values that it can
+take.
+</para>
+<para>This shows that you can use non-integer value for <var>dash-len</var>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put(0,0)&lbrace;\dashbox&lbrace;0.1&rbrace;(5,0.5)&lbrace;My hovercraft is full of eels.&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Each dash will be <code>0.1\unitlength</code> long, the box&textrsquo;s width is
+<code>5\unitlength</code> and its height is <code>0.5\unitlength</code>.
+</para>
+<para>As in that example, a dashed box looks best when <var>rect-width</var> and
+<var>rect-height</var> are multiples of the <var>dash-len</var>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="quotation-_0026-quote" spaces=" "><nodename>quotation &amp; quote</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">tabbing</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">picture</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>quotation</code> &amp; <code>quote</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="372" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>quotation</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="373" mergedindex="cp"><code>quotation</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="294">quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="295">displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="296">paragraph indentations in quoted text</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="374" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>quote</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="375" mergedindex="cp"><code>quote</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="297">quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="298">displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="299">paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;quotation&rbrace;
+ <var>text</var>
+\end&lbrace;quotation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;quote&rbrace;
+ <var>text</var>
+\end&lbrace;quote&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Include a quotation. Both environments indent margins on both sides by
+<code>\leftmargin</code> and the text is right-justified.
+</para>
+<para>They differ in how they treat paragraphs. In the <code>quotation</code>
+environment, paragraphs are indented by 1.5<dmn>em</dmn> and the space
+between paragraphs is small, <code>0pt plus 1pt</code>. In the <code>quote</code>
+environment, paragraphs are not indented and there is vertical space
+between paragraphs (it is the rubber length <code>\parsep</code>).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;quotation&rbrace; \small\it
+ Four score and seven years ago
+ ... shall not perish from the earth.
+ \hspace&lbrace;1em plus 1fill&rbrace;---Abraham Lincoln
+\end&lbrace;quotation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="tabbing" spaces=" "><nodename>tabbing</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">table</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">quotation &amp; quote</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>tabbing</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="376" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>tabbing</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="377" mergedindex="cp"><code>tabbing</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="300">tab stops, using</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="301">lining text up using tab stops</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="302">alignment via tabbing</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;
+<var>row1col1</var> \= <var>row1col2</var> ... \\
+<var>row2col1</var> \&gt; <var>row2col2</var> ... \\
+...
+\end&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Align text in columns, by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as
+was done on a typewriter. This is less often used than the environments
+<code>tabular</code> (<pxref label="tabular"><xrefnodename>tabular</xrefnodename></pxref>) or <code>array</code> (<pxref label="array"><xrefnodename>array</xrefnodename></pxref>) because
+in those the width of each column need not be constant and need not be
+known in advance.
+</para>
+<para>This example has a first line where the tab stops are set to explicit
+widths, ended by a <code>\kill</code> command (which is described below):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;
+\hspace&lbrace;0.75in&rbrace; \= \hspace&lbrace;0.40in&rbrace; \= \hspace&lbrace;0.40in&rbrace; \kill
+Ship \&gt; Guns \&gt; Year \\
+\textit&lbrace;Sophie&rbrace; \&gt; 14 \&gt; 1800 \\
+\textit&lbrace;Polychrest&rbrace; \&gt; 24 \&gt; 1803 \\
+\textit&lbrace;Lively&rbrace; \&gt; 38 \&gt; 1804 \\
+\textit&lbrace;Surprise&rbrace; \&gt; 28 \&gt; 1805 \\
+\end&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Both the <code>tabbing</code> environment and the more widely-used
+<code>tabular</code> environment put text in columns. The most important
+distinction is that in <code>tabular</code> the width of columns is
+determined automatically by &latex;, while in <code>tabbing</code> the user
+sets the tab stops. Another distinction is that <code>tabular</code>
+generates a box, but <code>tabbing</code> can be broken across pages.
+Finally, while <code>tabular</code> can be used in any mode, <code>tabbing</code>
+can be used only in paragraph mode and it starts a new paragraph.
+</para>
+<para>A <code>tabbing</code> environment always starts a new paragraph, without
+indentation. Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need
+to use the starred form of the <code>\hspace</code> command at the beginning
+of a tabbed row. The right margin of the <code>tabbing</code> environment is
+the end of line, so that the width of the environment is
+<code>\linewidth</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="303">row, <r>tabbing</r></indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The <code>tabbing</code> environment contains a sequence of <dfn>tabbed
+rows</dfn>. The first tabbed row begins immediately after
+<code>\begin&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;</code> and each row ends with <code>\\</code> or
+<code>\kill</code>. The last row may omit the <code>\\</code> and end with just
+<code>\end&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>At any point the <code>tabbing</code> environment has a current tab stop
+pattern, a sequence of <math><var>n</var> &gt; 0</math> tab stops, numbered 0, 1,
+etc. These create <var>n</var> corresponding columns. Tab stop&nbsp;0 is
+always the left margin, defined by the enclosing environment. Tab
+stop number&nbsp;<var>i</var> is set if it is assigned a horizontal
+position on the page. Tab stop number&nbsp;<var>i</var> can only be set if
+all the stops 0, &dots;, <math>i-1</math> have already been set; normally
+later stops are to the right of earlier ones.
+</para>
+<para>By default any text typeset in a <code>tabbing</code> environment is typeset
+ragged right and left-aligned on the current tab stop. Typesetting is
+done in LR mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The following commands can be used inside a <code>tabbing</code> environment.
+They are all fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="378" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\\ <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>End a tabbed line and typeset it.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="379" mergedindex="cp">\= <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\= <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sets a tab stop at the current position.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="380" mergedindex="cp">\&gt; <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\&gt; <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="381" mergedindex="cp">\&gt;</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Advances to the next tab stop.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="382" mergedindex="cp">\&lt;</indexterm>\&lt;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing
+the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="383" mergedindex="cp">\+</indexterm>\+</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if
+necessary.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="384" mergedindex="cp">\-</indexterm>\-</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if
+necessary.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="385" mergedindex="cp">\' <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\' <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column, i.e.,
+everything from the most recent <code>\&gt;</code>, <code>\&lt;</code>, <code>\'</code>,
+<code>\\</code>, or <code>\kill</code> command, to the previous column and aligned
+to the right, flush against the current column&textrsquo;s tab stop.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="386" mergedindex="cp">\` <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\` <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab
+stop&nbsp;0. However, it can&textrsquo;t move text to the right of the last
+column because there&textrsquo;s no tab stop there. The <code>\`</code> command moves
+all the text that follows it, up to the <code>\\</code> or
+<code>\end&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;</code> command that ends the line, to the right margin
+of the <code>tabbing</code> environment. There must be no <code>\&gt;</code> or
+<code>\'</code> command between the <code>\`</code> and the <code>\\</code> or
+<code>\end&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;</code> command that ends the line.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="387" mergedindex="cp">\a <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\a <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="388" mergedindex="cp">\a' <r>(acute accent in tabbing)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="389" mergedindex="cp">\a` <r>(grave accent in tabbing)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="390" mergedindex="cp">\a= <r>(macron accent in tabbing)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>In a <code>tabbing</code> environment, the commands <code>\=</code>, <code>\'</code> and
+<code>\`</code> do not produce accents as usual (<pxref label="Accents"><xrefnodename>Accents</xrefnodename></pxref>). Instead,
+use the commands <code>\a=</code>, <code>\a'</code> and <code>\a`</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="391" mergedindex="cp">\kill</indexterm>\kill</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like <code>\\</code> except
+that it throws away the current line instead of producing output for it.
+Any <code>\=</code>, <code>\+</code> or <code>\-</code> commands in that line remain in
+effect.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="392" mergedindex="cp">\poptabs</indexterm>\poptabs</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="393" mergedindex="cp">\poptabs</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last <code>\pushtabs</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="394" mergedindex="cp">\pushtabs</indexterm>\pushtabs</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing
+tab stop positions in the middle of a <code>tabbing</code> environment.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="395" mergedindex="cp">\tabbingsep</indexterm>\tabbingsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Distance of the text moved by <code>\'</code> to left of current tab stop.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>This example typesets a Pascal function:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;
+function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \&gt; begin \= \+ \\
+ \&gt; if \= n &gt; 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+\end&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The output looks like this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">function fact(n : integer) : integer;
+ begin
+ if n &gt; 1 then
+ fact := n * fact(n-1);
+ else
+ fact := 1;
+ end;
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="304"><r>package</r>, <code>algorithm2e</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="305"><code>algorithm2e</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="306"><r>package</r>, <code>listings</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="307"><code>listings</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="308"><r>package</r>, <code>minted</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="309"><code>minted</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="310"><r>package</r>, <code>fancyvrb</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="311"><code>fancyvrb</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>This example is just for illustration of the environment. To actually
+typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim environment
+(<pxref label="verbatim"><xrefnodename>verbatim</xrefnodename></pxref>) would normally be best. For pretty-printed code,
+there are quite a few packages, including <code>algorithm2e</code>,
+<code>fancyvrb</code>, <code>listings</code>, and <code>minted</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="table" spaces=" "><nodename>table</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">tabular</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">tabbing</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>table</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="396" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>table</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="397" mergedindex="cp"><code>table</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="312">tables, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="313">creating tables</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;table&rbrace;[<var>placement</var>]
+ <var>table body</var>
+ \caption[<var>loftitle</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace; % optional
+ \label&lbrace;<var>label&rbrace;</var> % also optional
+\end&lbrace;table&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>A class of floats (<pxref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></pxref>). They cannot be split across pages
+and so they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but instead
+are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a following page.
+</para>
+<para>This example <code>table</code> environment contains a <code>tabular</code>
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;table&rbrace;
+ \centering\small
+ \begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;ll&rbrace;
+ \multicolumn&lbrace;1&rbrace;&lbrace;c&rbrace;&lbrace;\textit&lbrace;Author&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ &amp;\multicolumn&lbrace;1&rbrace;&lbrace;c&rbrace;&lbrace;\textit&lbrace;Piece&rbrace;&rbrace; \\ \hline
+ Bach &amp;Cello Suite Number 1 \\
+ Beethoven &amp;Cello Sonata Number 3 \\
+ Brahms &amp;Cello Sonata Number 1
+ \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+ \caption&lbrace;Top cello pieces&rbrace;
+ \label&lbrace;tab:cello&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;table&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>but you can put many different kinds of content in a <code>table</code>,
+including text, &latex; commands, etc.
+</para>
+<para>For the possible values of <var>placement</var> and their effect on the
+float placement algorithm, see <ref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>The table body is typeset in a <code>parbox</code> of width <code>\textwidth</code>.
+It can contain text, commands, graphics, etc.
+</para>
+<para>The label is optional; it is used for cross references (<pxref label="Cross-references"><xrefnodename>Cross
+references</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="398" mergedindex="cp">\caption</indexterm></findex>
+The <code>\caption</code> command is also optional. It specifies caption text
+for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional
+<var>lottitle</var> is present then that text is used in the list of tables
+instead of <var>title</var> (<pxref label="Table-of-contents-etc_002e"><xrefnodename>Table of contents etc.</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a page,
+unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;table&rbrace;[b]
+ \centering
+ \begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;r|p&lbrace;2in&rbrace;&rbrace; \hline
+ One &amp;The loneliest number \\
+ Two &amp;Can be as sad as one.
+ It's the loneliest number since the number one.
+ \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+ \caption&lbrace;Cardinal virtues&rbrace;
+ \label&lbrace;tab:CardinalVirtues&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;table&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="tabular" spaces=" "><nodename>tabular</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">thebibliography</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">table</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>tabular</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="399" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>tabular</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="400" mergedindex="cp"><code>tabular</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="314">lines in tables</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="315">lining text up in tables</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;[<var>pos</var>]&lbrace;<var>cols</var>&rbrace;
+ <var>column 1 entry</var> &amp;<var>column 2 entry</var> ... &amp;<var>column n entry</var> \\
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular*&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>width</var>&rbrace;[<var>pos</var>]&lbrace;<var>cols</var>&rbrace;
+ <var>column 1 entry</var> &amp;<var>column 2 entry</var> ... &amp;<var>column n entry</var> \\
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;tabular*&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of horizontal rows.
+Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically in columns. This
+illustrates many of the features.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;l|l&rbrace;
+ \textit&lbrace;Player name&rbrace; &amp;\textit&lbrace;Career home runs&rbrace; \\
+ \hline
+ Hank Aaron &amp;755 \\
+ Babe Ruth &amp;714
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar
+between them. This is specified in <code>tabular</code>&textrsquo;s argument
+<code>&lbrace;l|l&rbrace;</code>.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="401" mergedindex="cp">&amp;</indexterm></findex>
+Put the entries into different columns by separating them with an
+ampersand, <code>&amp;</code>. The end of each row is marked with a double
+backslash, <code>\\</code>. Put a horizontal rule below a row, after a double
+backslash, with <code>\hline</code>.
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="402" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>for <code>tabular</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+After the last row the <code>\\</code> is optional, unless an <code>\hline</code>
+command follows to put a rule below the table.
+</para>
+<para>The required and optional arguments to <code>tabular</code> consist of:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">pos</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional. Specifies the table&textrsquo;s vertical position. The default is to
+align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of the
+surrounding text. There are two other possible alignments: <code>t</code>
+aligns the table so its top row matches the baseline of the surrounding
+text, and <code>b</code> aligns on the bottom row.
+</para>
+<para>This only has an effect if there is other text. In the common case of a
+<code>tabular</code> alone in a <code>center</code> environment this option makes
+no difference.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">cols</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Required. Specifies the formatting of columns. It consists of a
+sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the types of
+column and intercolumn material.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A column of left-aligned items.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A column of right-aligned items.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A column of centered items.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">|</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">&arobase;&lbrace;<var>text or space</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Insert <var>text or space</var> at this location in every row. The <var>text
+or space</var> material is typeset in LR mode. This text is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>If between two columns there is no &arobase;-expression then &latex;&textrsquo;s
+<code>book</code>, <code>article</code>, and <code>report</code> classes will put on
+either side of each column a space of length <code>\tabcolsep</code>, which by
+default is 6<dmn>pt</dmn>. That is, by default adjacent columns are
+separated by 12<dmn>pt</dmn> (so <code>\tabcolsep</code> is misleadingly named
+since it is only half of the separation between tabular columns). In
+addition, a space of 6<dmn>pt</dmn> also comes before the first column and
+after the final column, unless you put a <code>&arobase;&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> or <code>|</code>
+there.
+</para>
+<para>If you override the default and use an &arobase;-expression then &latex; does
+not insert <code>\tabcolsep</code> so you must insert any desired space
+yourself, as in <code>&arobase;&lbrace;\hspace&lbrace;1em&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>An empty expression <code>&arobase;&lbrace;&rbrace;</code> will eliminate the space. In
+particular, sometimes you want to eliminate the space before the first
+column or after the last one, as in the example below where the
+tabular lines need to lie on the left margin.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;flushleft&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;&arobase;&lbrace;&rbrace;l&rbrace;
+ ...
+ \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;flushleft&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The next example shows text, a decimal point between the columns,
+arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on it.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;r&arobase;&lbrace;$.$&rbrace;l&rbrace;
+ $3$ &amp;$14$ \\
+ $9$ &amp;$80665$
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="403" mergedindex="cp">\extracolsep</indexterm></findex>
+<para>An <code>\extracolsep&lbrace;<var>wd</var>&rbrace;</code> command in an &arobase;-expression causes an
+extra space of width <var>wd</var> to appear to the left of all subsequent
+columns, until countermanded by another <code>\extracolsep</code>. Unlike
+ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an
+&arobase;-expression. An <code>\extracolsep</code> command can be used only in an
+&arobase;-expression in the <code>cols</code> argument. Below, &latex; inserts the
+right amount of intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches
+wide.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular*&rbrace;&lbrace;4in&rbrace;&lbrace;l&arobase;&lbrace;\extracolsep&lbrace;\fill&rbrace;&rbrace;l&rbrace;
+ Seven times down, eight times up \ldots
+ &amp;such is life!
+\end&lbrace;tabular*&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>To insert commands that are automatically executed before a given
+column, load the <code>array</code> package and use the <code>&gt;&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>
+specifier.
+<!-- c xx should fully explain array, tabularx, and all other base packages... -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">p&lbrace;<var>wd</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width <var>wd</var>, as if
+it were the argument of a <code>\parbox[t]&lbrace;wd&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> command.
+</para>
+<para>A line break double backslash <code>\\</code> may not appear in the item,
+except inside an environment like <code>minipage</code>, <code>array</code>, or
+<code>tabular</code>, or inside an explicit <code>\parbox</code>, or in the scope of
+a <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>, or <code>\raggedleft</code>
+declaration (when used in a <code>p</code>-column element these declarations
+must appear inside braces, as with <code>&lbrace;\centering .. \\
+..&rbrace;</code>). Otherwise &latex; will misinterpret the double backslash as
+ending the row. Instead, to get a line break in there use
+<code>\newline</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewline"><xrefnodename>\newline</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">*&lbrace;<var>num</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>cols</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Equivalent to <var>num</var> copies of <var>cols</var>, where <var>num</var> is a
+positive integer and <var>cols</var> is a list of specifiers. Thus the
+specifier <code>\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;|*&lbrace;3&rbrace;&lbrace;l|r&rbrace;|&rbrace;</code> is equivalent to
+the specifier <code>\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;|l|rl|rl|r|&rbrace;</code>. Note that
+<var>cols</var> may contain another <code>*</code>-expression.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">width</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Required for <code>tabular*</code>, not allowed for <code>tabular</code>. Specifies
+the width of the <code>tabular*</code> environment. The space between columns
+should be rubber, as with <code>&arobase;&lbrace;\extracolsep&lbrace;\fill&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>, to allow
+the table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
+are likely to get the <code>Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
+...</code> warning.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Parameters that control formatting:
+<!-- c xx defaults, own node (xref from array)? -->
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="404" mergedindex="cp">\arrayrulewidth</indexterm>\arrayrulewidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="tabular-arrayrulewidth">tabular arrayrulewidth</anchor>
+<para>A length that is the thickness of the rule created by <code>|</code>,
+<code>\hline</code>, and <code>\vline</code> in the <code>tabular</code> and <code>array</code>
+environments. The default is <samp>.4pt</samp>. Change it as in
+<code>\setlength&lbrace;\arrayrulewidth&rbrace;&lbrace;0.8pt&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="405" mergedindex="cp">\arraystretch</indexterm>\arraystretch</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="tabular-arraystrech">tabular arraystrech</anchor>
+<para>A factor by which the spacing between rows in the <code>tabular</code> and
+<code>array</code> environments is multiplied. The default is <samp>1</samp>, for
+no scaling. Change it as <code>\renewcommand&lbrace;\arraystretch&rbrace;&lbrace;1.2&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="406" mergedindex="cp">\doublerulesep</indexterm>\doublerulesep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="tabular-doublerulesep">tabular doublerulesep</anchor>
+<para>A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the
+<code>||</code> specifier. The default is <samp>2pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="407" mergedindex="cp">\tabcolsep</indexterm>\tabcolsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="tabular-tabcolsep">tabular tabcolsep</anchor>
+<para>A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
+<samp>6pt</samp>. Change it with <code>\setlength</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>The following commands can be used inside the body of a <code>tabular</code>
+environment, the first two inside an entry and the second two between
+lines:
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\multicolumn</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Make an item spanning several columns.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\vline</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a vertical line.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\cline</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\hline</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cmulticolumn" spaces=" "><nodename>\multicolumn</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vline</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">tabular</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\multicolumn</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="408" mergedindex="cp">\multicolumn</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\multicolumn&lbrace;<var>numcols</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>cols</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Make an <code>array</code> or <code>tabular</code> entry that spans several columns.
+The first argument <var>numcols</var> gives the number of columns to span.
+The second argument <var>cols</var> specifies the formatting of the entry,
+with <code>c</code> for centered, <code>l</code> for flush left, or <code>r</code> for
+flush right. The third argument <var>text</var> gives the contents of that
+entry.
+</para>
+<para>In this example, in the first row, the second and third columns are
+spanned by the single heading <samp>Name</samp>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;lccl&rbrace;
+ \textit&lbrace;ID&rbrace; &amp;\multicolumn&lbrace;2&rbrace;&lbrace;c&rbrace;&lbrace;\textit&lbrace;Name&rbrace;&rbrace; &amp;\textit&lbrace;Age&rbrace; \\
+ \hline
+ 978-0-393-03701-2 &amp;O'Brian &amp;Patrick &amp;55 \\
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>What counts as a column is:&nbsp;the column format specifier for the
+<code>array</code> or <code>tabular</code> environment is broken into parts, where
+each part (except the first) begins with <code>l</code>, <code>c</code>, <code>r</code>,
+or&nbsp;<code>p</code>. So from <code>\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;|r|ccp&lbrace;1.5in&rbrace;|&rbrace;</code>
+the parts are <code>|r|</code>, <code>c</code>, <code>c</code>,
+and&nbsp;<code>p&lbrace;1.5in&rbrace;|</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The <var>cols</var> argument overrides the <code>array</code> or <code>tabular</code>
+environment&textrsquo;s intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn
+entry. To affect that area, this argument can contain vertical bars
+<code>|</code> indicating the placement of vertical rules, and <code>&arobase;&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>
+expressions. Thus if <var>cols</var> is <samp>|c|</samp> then this multicolumn
+entry will be centered and a vertical rule will come in the intercolumn
+area before it and after it. This table details the exact behavior.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;|cc|c|c|&rbrace;
+ \multicolumn&lbrace;1&rbrace;&lbrace;r&rbrace;&lbrace;w&rbrace; % entry one
+ &amp;\multicolumn&lbrace;1&rbrace;&lbrace;|r|&rbrace;&lbrace;x&rbrace; % entry two
+ &amp;\multicolumn&lbrace;1&rbrace;&lbrace;|r&rbrace;&lbrace;y&rbrace; % entry three
+ &amp;z % entry four
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule because
+the <code>\multicolumn</code> has the <var>cols</var> specifier <samp>r</samp> with no
+initial vertical bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a
+vertical rule; although the first <var>cols</var> does not have an ending
+vertical bar, the second <var>cols</var> does have a starting one. Between
+entry two and entry three there is a single vertical rule; despite that
+the <var>cols</var> in both of the surrounding <code>multicolumn</code>&textrsquo;s call for
+a vertical rule, you only get one rule. Between entry three and entry
+four there is no vertical rule; the default calls for one but the
+<var>cols</var> in the entry three <code>\multicolumn</code> leaves it out, and
+that takes precedence. Finally, following entry four there is a
+vertical rule because of the default.
+</para>
+<para>The number of spanned columns <var>numcols</var> can be 1. Besides giving
+the ability to change the horizontal alignment, this also is useful to
+override for one row the <code>tabular</code> definition&textrsquo;s default intercolumn
+area specification, including the placement of vertical rules.
+</para>
+<para>In the example below, in the <code>tabular</code> definition the first column
+is specified to default to left justified but in the first row the entry
+is centered with <code>\multicolumn&lbrace;1&rbrace;&lbrace;c&rbrace;&lbrace;\textsc&lbrace;Period&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>.
+Also in the first row, the second and third columns are spanned by a
+single entry with <code>\multicolumn&lbrace;2&rbrace;&lbrace;c&rbrace;&lbrace;\textsc&lbrace;Span&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>,
+overriding the specification to center those two columns on the page
+range en-dash.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;l|r&arobase;&lbrace;--&rbrace;l&rbrace;
+ \multicolumn&lbrace;1&rbrace;&lbrace;c&rbrace;&lbrace;\textsc&lbrace;Period&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ &amp;multicolumn&lbrace;2&rbrace;&lbrace;c&rbrace;&lbrace;\textsc&lbrace;Span&rbrace;&rbrace; \\ \hline
+ Baroque &amp;1600 &amp;1760 \\
+ Classical &amp;1730 &amp;1820 \\
+ Romantic &amp;1780 &amp;1910 \\
+ Impressionistic &amp;1875 &amp;1925
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Although the <code>tabular</code> specification by default puts a vertical
+rule between the first and second columns, no such vertical rule appears
+in the first row here. That&textrsquo;s because there is no vertical bar in the
+<var>cols</var> part of the first row&textrsquo;s first <code>\multicolumn</code> command.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cvline" spaces=" "><nodename>\vline</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\cline</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\multicolumn</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">tabular</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vline</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="409" mergedindex="cp">\vline</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Draw a vertical line in a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment
+extending the full height and depth of an entry&textrsquo;s row. Can also be
+used in an &arobase;-expression, although its synonym vertical
+bar&nbsp;<code>|</code> is more common. This command is rarely used in the
+body of a table; typically a table&textrsquo;s vertical lines are specified in
+<code>tabular</code>&textrsquo;s <var>cols</var> argument and overridden as needed with
+<code>\multicolumn</code> (<pxref label="tabular"><xrefnodename>tabular</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The example below illustrates some pitfalls. In the first row&textrsquo;s second
+entry the <code>\hfill</code> moves the <code>\vline</code> to the left edge of the
+cell. But that is different than putting it halfway between the two
+columns, so between the first and second columns there are two vertical
+rules, with the one from the <code>&lbrace;c|cc&rbrace;</code> specifier coming before the
+one produced by the <code>\vline\hfill</code>. In contrast, the first row&textrsquo;s
+third entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two
+columns. In the second row, the <code>ghi</code> is the widest entry in its
+column so in the <code>\vline\hfill</code> the <code>\hfill</code> has no effect and
+the vertical line in that entry appears immediately next to the
+<code>g</code>, with no whitespace.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;c|cc&rbrace;
+ x &amp;\vline\hfill y &amp;\multicolumn&lbrace;1&rbrace;&lbrace;|r&rbrace;&lbrace;z&rbrace; \\ % row 1
+ abc &amp;def &amp;\vline\hfill ghi % row 2
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005ccline" spaces=" "><nodename>\cline</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hline</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\vline</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">tabular</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\cline</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="410" mergedindex="cp">\cline</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\cline&lbrace;<var>i</var>-<var>j</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>In an <code>array</code> or <code>tabular</code> environment, draw a horizontal rule
+beginning in column&nbsp;<var>i</var> and ending in column&nbsp;<var>j</var>. The
+dash, <code>-</code>, must appear in the mandatory argument. To span a single
+column use the number twice, as with <code>\cline&lbrace;2-2&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second
+rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the
+third and fourth columns. The two lines are side-by-side, at the same
+height.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;llrr&rbrace;
+ a &amp;b &amp;c &amp;d \\ \cline&lbrace;1-1&rbrace; \cline&lbrace;3-4&rbrace;
+ e &amp;f &amp;g &amp;h
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005chline" spaces=" "><nodename>\hline</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\cline</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">tabular</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hline</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="411" mergedindex="cp">\hline</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing <code>tabular</code> or
+<code>array</code> environment. It&textrsquo;s most commonly used to draw a line at the
+top, bottom, and between the rows of a table.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the top of the table has two horizontal rules, one above
+the other, that span both columns. The bottom of the table has a single
+rule spanning both columns. Because of the <code>\hline</code>, the
+<code>tabular</code> second row&textrsquo;s line ending double backslash&nbsp;<code>\\</code>
+is required.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;ll&rbrace; \hline\hline
+ Baseball &amp;Red Sox \\
+ Basketball &amp;Celtics \\ \hline
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="thebibliography" spaces=" "><nodename>thebibliography</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">theorem</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">tabular</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>thebibliography</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="412" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>thebibliography</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="413" mergedindex="cp"><code>thebibliography</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="316">bibliography, creating (manually)</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;thebibliography&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>widest-label</var>&rbrace;
+ \bibitem[<var>label</var>]&lbrace;<var>cite_key&rbrace;</var>
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;thebibliography&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a bibliography or reference list. There are two ways to produce
+bibliographic lists. This environment is suitable when you have only a
+few references and can maintain the list by hand. <xref label="Using-BibTeX"><xrefnodename>Using BibTeX</xrefnodename></xref>
+for a more sophisticated approach.
+</para>
+<para>This shows the environment with two entries.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">This work is based on \cite&lbrace;latexdps&rbrace;.
+Together they are \cite&lbrace;latexdps, texbook&rbrace;.
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;thebibliography&rbrace;&lbrace;9&rbrace;
+\bibitem&lbrace;latexdps&rbrace;
+ Leslie Lamport.
+ \textit&lbrace;\LaTeX&lbrace;&rbrace;: a document preparation system&rbrace;.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+\bibitem&lbrace;texbook&rbrace;
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit&lbrace;The \TeX book&rbrace;.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end&lbrace;thebibliography&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>This styles the first reference as <samp>[1] Leslie ...</samp>, and so that
+<code>\cite&lbrace;latexdps&rbrace;</code> produces the matching <samp>... based on [1]</samp>.
+The second <code>\cite</code> produces <samp>[1, 2]</samp>. You must compile the
+document twice to resolve these references.
+</para>
+<para>The mandatory argument <var>widest-label</var> is text that, when typeset, is
+as wide as the widest item label produced by the <code>\bibitem</code>
+commands. The tradition is to use <code>9</code> for bibliographies with less
+than 10 references, <code>99</code> for ones with less than 100, etc.
+</para>
+<para>The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as <samp>Bibliography</samp>.
+To change it there are two cases. In the <file>book</file> and <file>report</file>
+classes, where the top level sectioning is <code>\chapter</code> and the
+default title is <samp>Bibliography</samp>, that title is in the macro
+<code>\bibname</code>. For <file>article</file>, where the class&textrsquo;s top level
+sectioning is <code>\section</code> and the default is <samp>References</samp>, the
+title is in macro <code>\refname</code>. Change it by redefining the command,
+as with <code>\renewcommand&lbrace;\refname&rbrace;&lbrace;Cited references&rbrace;</code> after
+<code>\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="317"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="318"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Language support packages such as <file>babel</file> will automatically
+redefine <code>\refname</code> or <code>\bibname</code> to fit the selected
+language.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\bibitem</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Specify a bibliography item.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\cite</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Refer to a bibliography item.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\nocite</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Include an item in the bibliography.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Using BibTeX</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Automatic generation of bibliographies.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cbibitem" spaces=" "><nodename>\bibitem</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\cite</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\bibitem</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="414" mergedindex="cp">\bibitem</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\bibitem&lbrace;<var>cite_key</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\bibitem[<var>label</var>]&lbrace;<var>cite_key</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Generate an entry labeled by <var>label</var>. The default is for &latex; to
+generates a number using the <code>enumi</code> counter. The <dfn>citation key</dfn>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="319">citation key</indexterm></cindex>
+<var>cite_key</var> is a string of
+letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but not comma).
+</para>
+<para><xref label="thebibliography"><xrefnodename>thebibliography</xrefnodename></xref> for an example.
+</para>
+<para>The optional <var>label</var> changes the default label from an integer to the
+given string. With this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;thebibliography&rbrace;
+\bibitem[Lamport 1993]&lbrace;latexdps&rbrace;
+ Leslie Lamport.
+ \textit&lbrace;\LaTeX&lbrace;&rbrace;: a document preparation system&rbrace;.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993.
+\bibitem&lbrace;texbook&rbrace;
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit&lbrace;The \TeX book&rbrace;.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end&lbrace;thebibliography&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>the first entry will be styled as <samp>[Lamport 1993] Leslie ...</samp> (The
+amount of horizontal space that &latex; leaves for the label depends on
+the <var>widest-label</var> argument of the <code>thebibliography</code>
+environment; see <ref label="thebibliography"><xrefnodename>thebibliography</xrefnodename></ref>.) Similarly, <code>... based on
+\cite&lbrace;latexdps&rbrace;</code> will produce <samp>... based on [Lamport 1994]</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>If you mix <code>\bibitem</code> entries having a <var>label</var> with those that
+do not then &latex; will number the unlabelled ones sequentially. In
+the example above the <code>texbook</code> entry will appear as <samp>[1]
+Donald ...</samp>, despite that it is the second entry.
+</para>
+<para>If you use the same <var>cite_key</var> twice then you get <samp>LaTeX
+Warning: There were multiply-defined labels</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>Under the hood, &latex; remembers the <var>cite_key</var> and <var>label</var>
+information because <code>\bibitem</code> writes it to the auxiliary file
+<file><var>filename</var>.aux</file>. For instance, the above example causes
+<code>\bibcite&lbrace;latexdps&rbrace;&lbrace;Lamport, 1993&rbrace;</code> and
+<code>\bibcite&lbrace;texbook&rbrace;&lbrace;1&rbrace;</code> to appear in that file. The <file>.aux</file>
+file is read by the <code>\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code> command and then the
+information is available for <code>\cite</code> commands. This explains why
+you need to run &latex; twice to resolve references: once to write it
+out and once to read it in.
+</para>
+<para>Because of this two-pass algorithm, when you add a <code>\bibitem</code> or
+change its <var>cite_key</var> you may get <samp>LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may
+have changed. Rerun to get cross-references right</samp>. Fix it by
+recompiling.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005ccite" spaces=" "><nodename>\cite</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\nocite</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\bibitem</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\cite</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="415" mergedindex="cp">\cite</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\cite&lbrace;<var>keys</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\cite[<var>subcite</var>]&lbrace;<var>keys</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Generate as output a citation to the references associated with
+<var>keys</var>. The mandatory <var>keys</var> is a citation key, or a
+comma-separated list of citation keys (<pxref label="_005cbibitem"><xrefnodename>\bibitem</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The ultimate source is \cite&lbrace;texbook&rbrace;.
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;thebibliography&rbrace;
+\bibitem&lbrace;texbook&rbrace;
+ Donald Ervin Knuth.
+ \textit&lbrace;The \TeX book&rbrace;.
+ Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
+\end&lbrace;thebibliography&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>produces output like <samp>... source is [1]</samp>. (You can change the
+appearance of the citation with bibliography styles. More is in
+<ref label="Using-BibTeX"><xrefnodename>Using BibTeX</xrefnodename></ref>.)
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>subcite</var> is appended to the citation. For
+example, <code>See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]&lbrace;texbook&rbrace;</code> might produce
+<samp>See 14.3 in [1, p.&nbsp;314]</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>In addition to what appears in the output, <code>\cite</code> writes
+information to the auxiliary file <file><var>filename</var>.aux</file>. For
+instance, <code>\cite&lbrace;latexdps&rbrace;</code> writes <samp>\citation&lbrace;latexdps&rbrace;</samp>
+to that file. This information is used by Bib&tex; to include in your
+reference list only those works that you have actually cited; see
+<ref label="_005cnocite"><xrefnodename>\nocite</xrefnodename></ref> also.
+</para>
+<para>If <var>keys</var> is not in your bibliography information then you get
+<samp>LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references</samp>, and in the output
+the citation shows as a boldface question mark between square brackets.
+There are two possible causes. If you have mistyped something, as in
+<code>\cite&lbrace;texbok&rbrace;</code> then you need to correct the spelling. On the
+other hand, if you have just added or modified the bibliographic
+information and so changed the <file>.aux</file> file (<pxref label="_005cbibitem"><xrefnodename>\bibitem</xrefnodename></pxref>) then
+the fix may be to run &latex; again.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cnocite" spaces=" "><nodename>\nocite</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Using BibTeX</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\cite</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\nocite</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="416" mergedindex="cp">\nocite</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><code>\nocite&lbrace;<var>keys</var>&rbrace;</code>
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produces no output but writes <var>keys</var> to the auxiliary file
+<file><var>doc-filename</var>.aux</file>.
+</para>
+<para>The mandatory argument <var>keys</var> is a comma-separated list of one or
+more citation keys (<pxref label="_005cbibitem"><xrefnodename>\bibitem</xrefnodename></pxref>). This information is used by
+Bib&tex; to include these works in your reference list even though you
+have not cited them (<pxref label="_005ccite"><xrefnodename>\cite</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="Using-BibTeX" spaces=" "><nodename>Using BibTeX</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\nocite</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Using Bib&tex;</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="320">using Bib&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="321">bib&tex;, using</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="322">bibliography, creating (automatically)</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="417" mergedindex="cp">\bibliographystyle</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="418" mergedindex="cp">\bibliography</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>As described in <code>thebibliography</code> (<pxref label="thebibliography"><xrefnodename>thebibliography</xrefnodename></pxref>), a
+sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the
+Bib&tex; program. This is only an introduction; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>With Bib&tex;, you don&textrsquo;t use <code>thebibliography</code>
+(<pxref label="thebibliography"><xrefnodename>thebibliography</xrefnodename></pxref>). Instead, include these lines.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\bibliographystyle&lbrace;<var>bibstyle</var>&rbrace;
+\bibliography&lbrace;<var>bibfile1</var>, <var>bibfile2</var>, ...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <var>bibstyle</var> refers to a file <file><var>bibstyle</var>.bst</file>, which
+defines how your citations will look. The standard <var>bibstyle</var>&textrsquo;s
+distributed with Bib&tex; are:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">alpha</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication.
+The bibliographic items are sorted alphabetically.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">plain</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Labels are integers.
+Sort the bibliographic items alphabetically.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">unsrt</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Like <code>plain</code>, but entries are in order of citation.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">abbrv</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Like <code>plain</code>, but more compact labels.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<noindent></noindent> <para>Many, many other Bib&tex; style files exist,
+tailored to the demands of various publications. See CTAN&textrsquo;s listing
+<url><urefurl>http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\bibliography</code> command is what actually produces the
+bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
+files named <file><var>bibfile1</var>.bib</file>, <file><var>bibfile2</var>.bib</file>,
+&dots; These contain your database in Bib&tex; format. This shows a
+typical couple of entries in that format.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">&arobase;book&lbrace;texbook,
+ title = &lbrace;The &lbrace;&lbrace;\TeX&rbrace;&rbrace;book&rbrace;,
+ author = &lbrace;D.E. Knuth&rbrace;,
+ isbn = &lbrace;0201134489&rbrace;,
+ series = &lbrace;Computers \&amp; typesetting&rbrace;,
+ year = &lbrace;1983&rbrace;,
+ publisher = &lbrace;Addison-Wesley&rbrace;
+&rbrace;
+&arobase;book&lbrace;sexbook,
+ author = &lbrace;W.H. Masters and V.E. Johnson&rbrace;,
+ title = &lbrace;Human Sexual Response&rbrace;,
+ year = &lbrace;1966&rbrace;,
+ publisher = &lbrace;Bantam Books&rbrace;
+&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Only the bibliographic entries referred to via <code>\cite</code> and
+<code>\nocite</code> will be listed in the document&textrsquo;s bibliography. Thus you
+can keep all your sources together in one file, or a small number of
+files, and rely on Bib&tex; to include in this document only those that
+you used.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="theorem" spaces=" "><nodename>theorem</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">titlepage</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>theorem</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="419" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>theorem</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="420" mergedindex="cp"><code>theorem</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="323">theorems, typesetting</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;theorem&rbrace;
+ <var>theorem body</var>
+\end&lbrace;theorem&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produces <samp>Theorem <var>n</var></samp> in boldface followed by <var>theorem
+body</var> in italics. The numbering possibilities for <var>n</var> are described under
+<code>\newtheorem</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewtheorem"><xrefnodename>\newtheorem</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newtheorem&lbrace;lem&rbrace;&lbrace;Lemma&rbrace; % in preamble
+\newtheorem&lbrace;thm&rbrace;&lbrace;Theorem&rbrace;
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;lem&rbrace; % in document body
+ text of lemma
+\end&lbrace;lem&rbrace;
+
+The next result follows immediately.
+\begin&lbrace;thm&rbrace;[Gauss] % put `Gauss' in parens after theorem head
+ text of theorem
+\end&lbrace;thm&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="324"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="325"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="326"><r>package</r>, <code>amsthm</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="327"><code>amsthm</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Most new documents use the packages <code>amsthm</code> and <code>amsmath</code>
+from the American Mathematical Society. Among other things these
+packages include a large number of options for theorem environments,
+such as styling options.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="titlepage" spaces=" "><nodename>titlepage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">verbatim</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">theorem</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>titlepage</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="421" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>titlepage</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="422" mergedindex="cp"><code>titlepage</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="328">making a title page</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="329">title pages, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;titlepage&rbrace;
+ ... text and spacing ...
+\end&lbrace;titlepage&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading and
+with succeeding pages numbered starting with page one.
+</para>
+<para>In this example all formatting, including vertical spacing, is left to
+the author.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;titlepage&rbrace;
+\vspace*&lbrace;\stretch&lbrace;1&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;\huge\bfseries Thesis \\[1ex]
+ title&rbrace; \\[6.5ex]
+ &lbrace;\large\bfseries Author name&rbrace; \\
+ \vspace&lbrace;4ex&rbrace;
+ Thesis submitted to \\[5pt]
+ \textit&lbrace;University name&rbrace; \\[2cm]
+ in partial fulfilment for the award of the degree of \\[2cm]
+ \textsc&lbrace;\Large Doctor of Philosophy&rbrace; \\[2ex]
+ \textsc&lbrace;\large Mathematics&rbrace; \\[12ex]
+ \vfill
+ Department of Mathematics \\
+ Address \\
+ \vfill
+ \today
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+\vspace&lbrace;\stretch&lbrace;2&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;titlepage&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>To instead produce a standard title page without a <code>titlepage</code>
+environment, use <code>\maketitle</code> (<pxref label="_005cmaketitle"><xrefnodename>\maketitle</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="verbatim" spaces=" "><nodename>verbatim</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">verse</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">titlepage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>verbatim</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="423" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>verbatim</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="424" mergedindex="cp"><code>verbatim</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="330">verbatim text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="331">simulating typed text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="332">typed text, simulating</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="333">code, typesetting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="334">computer programs, typesetting</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;verbatim&rbrace;
+<var>literal-text</var>
+\end&lbrace;verbatim&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>A paragraph-making environment in which &latex; produces as output
+exactly what you type as input. For instance inside <var>literal-text</var>
+the backslash&nbsp;<code>\</code> character does not start commands, it
+produces a printed <samp>\</samp>, and carriage returns and blanks are taken
+literally. The output appears in a monospaced typewriter-like font
+(<code>\tt</code>).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;verbatim&rbrace;
+Symbol swearing: %&amp;$#?&eosexcl;.
+\end&lbrace;verbatim&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The only restriction on <code>literal-text</code> is that it cannot include
+the string <code>\end&lbrace;verbatim&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="335"><r>package</r>, <code>cprotect</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="336"><code>cprotect</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros, for
+instance in the argument to a <code>\section</code>. This is not the same as
+commands being fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>), instead it just cannot appear
+there. (But the <code>cprotect</code> package can help with this.)
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="337"><r>package</r>, <code>listings</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="338"><code>listings</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="339"><r>package</r>, <code>minted</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="340"><code>minted</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code. There are
+packages that are an improvement the <code>verbatim</code> environment. For
+instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external
+files, or parts of those files. Such packages include <code>listings</code>,
+and <code>minted</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="341"><r>package</r>, <code>fancyvrb</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="342"><code>fancyvrb</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="343"><r>package</r>, <code>verbatimbox</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="344"><code>verbatimbox</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments is
+<code>fancyvrb</code>. Another is <code>verbatimbox</code>.
+</para>
+<para>For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\verb</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The macro form of the <code>verbatim</code> environment.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cverb" spaces=" "><nodename>\verb</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">verbatim</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\verb</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="425" mergedindex="cp">\verb</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="345">verbatim text, inline</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\verb <var>char</var> <var>literal-text</var> <var>char</var>
+\verb* <var>char</var> <var>literal-text</var> <var>char</var>
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Typeset <var>literal-text</var> as it is input, including special characters
+and spaces, using the typewriter (<code>\tt</code>) font.
+</para>
+<para>This example shows two different invocations of <code>\verb</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">This is \verb!literally! the biggest pumpkin ever.
+And this is the best squash, \verb+literally!+
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The first <code>\verb</code> has its <var>literal-text</var> surrounded with
+exclamation point, <code>!</code>. The second instead uses plus, <code>+</code>,
+because the exclamation point is part of <code>literal-text</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The single-character delimiter <var>char</var> surrounds
+<var>literal-text</var>&nbsp;&textmdash; it must be the same character before and
+after. No spaces come between <code>\verb</code> or <code>\verb*</code> and
+<var>char</var>, or between <var>char</var> and <var>literal-text</var>, or between
+<var>literal-text</var> and the second occurrence of <var>char</var> (the synopsis
+shows a space only to distinguish one component from the other). The
+delimiter must not appear in <var>literal-text</var>. The <var>literal-text</var>
+cannot include a line break.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="346">visible space</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The <code>*</code>-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible
+space character.
+<tex endspaces=" ">
+</tex>
+</para>
+<para>The output from this will include a character showing the spaces.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="347"><r>package</r>, <code>url</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="348"><code>url</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package <code>url</code>
+provides an option that is better than the <code>\verb</code> command, since
+it allows line breaks.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="349"><r>package</r>, <code>listings</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="350"><code>listings</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="351"><r>package</r>, <code>minted</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="352"><code>minted</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
+<code>\verb</code>. One is <file>listings</file>, another is <file>minted</file>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="353"><r>package</r>, <code>cprotect</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="354"><code>cprotect</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>You cannot use <code>\verb</code> in the argument to a macro, for instance in
+the argument to a <code>\section</code>. It is not a question of <code>\verb</code>
+being fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>), instead it just cannot appear there.
+(But the <code>cprotect</code> package can help with this.)
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="verse" spaces=" "><nodename>verse</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">verbatim</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Environments</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>verse</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="426" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>verse</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="427" mergedindex="cp"><code>verse</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="355">poetry, an environment for</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;verse&rbrace;
+ <var>line1</var> \\
+ <var>line2</var> \\
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;verse&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>An environment for poetry.
+</para>
+<para>Here are two lines from Shakespeare&textrsquo;s Romeo and Juliet.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Then plainly know my heart's dear love is set \\
+On the fair daughter of rich Capulet.
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="428" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>for <code>verse</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Separate the lines of each stanza with <code>\\</code>, and use one or more
+blank lines to separate the stanzas.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;verse&rbrace;
+\makebox[\linewidth][c]&lbrace;\textit&lbrace;Shut Not Your Doors&rbrace; ---Walt Whitman&rbrace;
+ \\[1\baselineskip]
+Shut not your doors to me proud libraries, \\
+For that which was lacking on all your well-fill'd shelves, \\
+\qquad yet needed most, I bring, \\
+Forth from the war emerging, a book I have made, \\
+The words of my book nothing, the drift of it every thing, \\
+A book separate, not link'd with the rest nor felt by the intellect, \\
+But you ye untold latencies will thrill to every page.
+\end&lbrace;verse&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The output has margins indented on the left and the right, paragraphs
+are not indented, and the text is not right-justified.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Line-breaking" spaces=" "><nodename>Line breaking</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Page breaking</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Environments</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Line breaking</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="356">line breaking</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="357">breaking lines</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to
+translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To
+produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines
+(and these lines must be broken into pages).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; usually does the line (and page) breaking in the text body for
+you but in some environments you manually force line breaks.
+</para>
+<para>A common workflow is to get a final version of the document content
+before taking a final pass through and considering line breaks (and page
+breaks). This differs from word processing, where you are formatting
+text as you input it. Putting these off until the end prevents a lot of
+fiddling with breaks that will change anyway.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\\</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a new line.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\obeycr &amp; \restorecr</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Make each input line start a new output line.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newline</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Break the line
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\- (hyphenation)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insert explicit hyphenation.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\discretionary</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Explicit control of the hyphen character.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\fussy &amp; \sloppy</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Be more or less particular with line breaking.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\hyphenation</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Tell &latex; how to hyphenate a word.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\linebreak &amp; \nolinebreak</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Forcing &amp; avoiding line breaks.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005c_005c" spaces=" "><nodename>\\</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\obeycr &amp; \restorecr</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\\</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="429" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>force line break</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="358">new line, starting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="359">line break, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\\
+\\[<var>morespace</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\\*
+\\*[<var>morespace</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>End the current line. The optional argument <var>morespace</var> specifies
+extra vertical space to be inserted before the next line. This is a
+rubber length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>) and can be negative. The text before
+the line break is set at its normal length, that is, it is not stretched
+to fill out the line width. This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The starred form, <code>\\*</code>, tells &latex; not to start a new page
+between the two lines, by issuing a <code>\nobreak</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\title&lbrace;My story: \\[0.25in]
+ a tale of woe&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in &latex;. In
+particular, don&textrsquo;t start new paragraphs with <code>\\</code>. Instead leave a
+blank line between the two paragraphs. And don&textrsquo;t put in a sequence of
+<code>\\</code>&textrsquo;s to make vertical space. Instead use
+<code>\vspace&lbrace;<var>length</var>&rbrace;</code>, or
+<code>\leavevmode\vspace&lbrace;<var>length</var>&rbrace;</code>, or
+<code>\vspace*&lbrace;<var>length</var>&rbrace;</code> if you want the space to not be thrown
+out at the top of a new page (<pxref label="_005cvspace"><xrefnodename>\vspace</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\\</code> command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text
+such as in a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment or in an
+equation environment.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\\</code> command is a synonym for <code>\newline</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cnewline"><xrefnodename>\newline</xrefnodename></pxref>) under ordinary circumstances (an example of an
+exception is the <code>p&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> column in a <code>tabular</code>
+environment; <pxref label="tabular"><xrefnodename>tabular</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<!-- c credit: David Carlisle https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/82666 -->
+<para>The <code>\\</code> command is a macro, and its definition changes by context
+so that its definition in normal text, a <code>center</code> environment, a
+<code>flushleft</code> environment, and a <code>tabular</code> are all different.
+In normal text when it forces a linebreak it is essentially a shorthand
+for <code>\newline</code>. It does not end horizontal mode or end the
+paragraph, it just inserts some glue and penalties so that when the
+paragraph does end a linebreak will occur at that point, with the short
+line padded with white space.
+</para>
+<para>You get <samp>LaTeX Error: There's no line here to end</samp> if you use
+<code>\\</code> to ask for a new line, rather than to end the current line.
+An example is if you have <code>\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;\\</code> or, more likely,
+something like this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&lbrace;0.5\textwidth&rbrace;
+ \\
+ In that vertical space put your mark.
+ \end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Fix it by replacing the double backslash with something like
+<code>\vspace&lbrace;\baselineskip&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cobeycr-_0026-_005crestorecr" spaces=" "><nodename>\obeycr &amp; \restorecr</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newline</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\\</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\obeycr</code> &amp; <code>\restorecr</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="430" mergedindex="cp">\obeycr</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="431" mergedindex="cp">\restorecr</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="360">new line, output as input</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The <code>\obeycr</code> command makes a return in the input file (<samp>^^M</samp>,
+internally) the same as <code>\\</code>, followed by <code>\relax</code>. So each
+new line in the input will also be a new line in the output. The
+<code>\restorecr</code> command restores normal line-breaking behavior.
+</para>
+<para>This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code.
+<xref label="verbatim"><xrefnodename>verbatim</xrefnodename></xref> instead.
+</para>
+<para>With &latex;&textrsquo;s usual defaults, this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">aaa
+bbb
+
+\obeycr
+ccc
+ddd
+ eee
+
+\restorecr
+fff
+ggg
+
+hhh
+iii
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>produces output like this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"> aaa bbb
+ ccc
+ddd
+eee
+
+fff ggg
+ hhh iii
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The indents are paragraph indents.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewline" spaces=" "><nodename>\newline</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\- (hyphenation)</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\obeycr &amp; \restorecr</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newline</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="432" mergedindex="cp">\newline</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="361">new line, starting (paragraph mode)</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify
+the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph mode
+(<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>), the <code>\newline</code> command is equivalent to
+double-backslash (<pxref label="_005c_005c"><xrefnodename>\\</xrefnodename></pxref>). This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>However, the two commands are different inside a <code>tabular</code> or
+<code>array</code> environment. In a column with a specifier producing a
+paragraph box such as typically <code>p&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>, <code>\newline</code> will
+insert a line end inside of the column; that is, it does not break the
+entire tabular row. To break the entire row use <code>\\</code> or its
+equivalent <code>\tabularnewline</code>.
+</para>
+<para>This will print <samp>Name:</samp> and <samp>Address:</samp> as two lines in a
+single cell of the table.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;p&lbrace;1in&rbrace;&lbrace;\hspace&lbrace;2in&rbrace;&rbrace;p&lbrace;1in&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ Name: \newline Address: &amp;Date: \\ \hline
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <samp>Date:</samp> will be baseline-aligned with <samp>Name:</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" spaces=" "><nodename>\- (hyphenation)</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\discretionary</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newline</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\-</code> (discretionary hyphen)</sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="433" mergedindex="cp">\- <r>(hyphenation)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="362">hyphenation, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Tell &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at that point. When you
+insert <code>\-</code> commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at
+those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that &latex;
+might otherwise have chosen. This command is robust (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct
+hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The
+<code>\-</code> command is for exceptional cases.
+</para>
+<para>For example, &latex; does not ordinarily hyphenate words containing a
+hyphen. Below, the long and hyphenated word means &latex; has to put
+in unacceptably large spaces to set the narrow column.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;rp&lbrace;1.75in&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ Isaac Asimov &amp;The strain of
+ anti-intellectualism
+ % an\-ti-in\-tel\-lec\-tu\-al\-ism
+ has been a constant thread winding its way through our
+ political and cultural life, nurtured by
+ the false notion that democracy means that
+ `my ignorance is just as good as your knowledge'.
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Commenting out the third line and uncommenting the fourth makes a much
+better fit.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\-</code> command only allows &latex; to break there, it does not
+require that it break there. You can insist on a split with something
+like <code>Hef-\linebreak feron</code>. Of course, if you later change the
+text then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires
+care.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cdiscretionary" spaces=" "><nodename>\discretionary</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\fussy &amp; \sloppy</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\- (hyphenation)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\discretionary</code> (generalized hyphenation point)</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="363">hyphenation, discretionary</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="364">discretionary hyphenation</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\discretionary&lbrace;<var>pre-break</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>post-break</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>no-break</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Handle word changes around hyphens. This command is not often used in
+&latex; documents.
+</para>
+<para>If a line break occurs at the point where <code>\discretionary</code> appears
+then &tex; puts <var>pre-break</var> at the end of the current line and puts
+<var>post-break</var> at the start of the next line. If there is no line
+break here then &tex; puts <var>no-break</var>
+</para>
+<para>In <samp>difficult</samp> the three letters <code>ffi</code> form a ligature. But
+&tex; can nonetheless break between the two f&textrsquo;s with this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">di\discretionary&lbrace;f-&rbrace;&lbrace;fi&rbrace;&lbrace;ffi&rbrace;cult
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Note that users do not have to do this. It is typically handled
+automatically by &tex;&textrsquo;s hyphenation algorithm.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy" spaces=" "><nodename>\fussy &amp; \sloppy</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hyphenation</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\discretionary</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\fussy</code> &amp; <code>\sloppy</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="434" mergedindex="cp">\fussy</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="435" mergedindex="cp">\sloppy</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="365">line breaks, changing</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Declarations to make &tex; more picky or less picky about line
+breaking. Declaring <code>\fussy</code> usually avoids too much space between
+words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. Conversely,
+<code>\sloppy</code> avoids overfull boxes while suffering loose interword
+spacing.
+</para>
+<para>The default is <code>\fussy</code>. Line breaking in a paragraph is
+controlled by whichever declaration is current at the blank line, or
+<code>\par</code>, or displayed equation ending that paragraph. So to affect
+the line breaks, include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of
+the command.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">sloppypar</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Environment version of \sloppy command.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="sloppypar" spaces=" "><nodename>sloppypar</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">\fussy &amp; \sloppy</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>sloppypar</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="436" mergedindex="cp">sloppypar</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="366">sloppypar environment</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;sloppypar&rbrace;
+ ... paragraphs ...
+\end&lbrace;sloppypar&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Typeset the paragraphs with <code>\sloppy</code> in effect (<pxref label="_005cfussy-_0026-_005csloppy"><xrefnodename>\fussy &amp;
+\sloppy</xrefnodename></pxref>). Use this to locally adjust line breaking, to avoid
+<samp>Overfull box</samp> or <samp>Underfull box</samp> errors.
+</para>
+<para>The example is simple.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;sloppypar&rbrace;
+ Her plan for the morning thus settled, she sat quietly down to her
+ book after breakfast, resolving to remain in the same place and the
+ same employment till the clock struck one; and from habitude very
+ little incommoded by the remarks and ejaculations of Mrs.\ Allen,
+ whose vacancy of mind and incapacity for thinking were such, that
+ as she never talked a great deal, so she could never be entirely
+ silent; and, therefore, while she sat at her work, if she lost her
+ needle or broke her thread, if she heard a carriage in the street,
+ or saw a speck upon her gown, she must observe it aloud, whether
+ there were anyone at leisure to answer her or not.
+\end&lbrace;sloppypar&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="_005chyphenation" spaces=" "><nodename>\hyphenation</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\linebreak &amp; \nolinebreak</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\fussy &amp; \sloppy</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hyphenation</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="437" mergedindex="cp">\hyphenation</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="367">hyphenation, defining</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hyphenation&lbrace;<var>word1</var> ...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Declares allowed hyphenation points within the words in the list. The
+words in that list are separated by spaces. Show permitted points for
+hyphenation with a dash character, <code>-</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Here is an example:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hyphenation&lbrace;hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Use lowercase letters. &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches
+exactly. Multiple <code>\hyphenation</code> commands accumulate.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005clinebreak-_0026-_005cnolinebreak" spaces=" "><nodename>\linebreak &amp; \nolinebreak</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\hyphenation</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\linebreak</code> &amp; <code>\nolinebreak</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="438" mergedindex="cp">\linebreak</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="439" mergedindex="cp">\nolinebreak</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="368">line breaks, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="369">line breaks, preventing</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\linebreak
+\linebreak[<var>zero-to-four</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or one of these.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\nolinebreak
+\nolinebreak[<var>zero-to-four</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Encourage or discourage a line break. The optional <var>zero-to-four</var>
+is an integer that allows you to soften the instruction. The default is
+4, so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force
+or prevent the break. But for instance, <code>\nolinebreak[1]</code> is a
+suggestion that another place may be better. The higher the number, the
+more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Here we tell &latex; that a good place to put a linebreak is after the
+standard legal text.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\boilerplatelegal&lbrace;&rbrace; \linebreak[2]
+We especially encourage applications from members of traditionally
+underrepresented groups.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>When you issue <code>\linebreak</code>, the spaces in the line are stretched
+out so that it extends to the right margin. <xref label="_005c_005c"><xrefnodename>\\</xrefnodename></xref>
+and&nbsp;<ref label="_005cnewline"><xrefnodename>\newline</xrefnodename></ref> to have the spaces not stretched out.
+</para>
+
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Page-breaking" spaces=" "><nodename>Page breaking</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Footnotes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Line breaking</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Page breaking</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="370">page breaking</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="371">breaking pages</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Ordinarily &latex; automatically takes care of breaking output into
+pages with its usual aplomb. But if you are writing commands, or
+tweaking the final version of a document, then you may need to
+understand how to influence its actions.
+</para>
+<!-- c credit: H Vogt https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/115563 -->
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
+than just waiting until there is enough material to fill a page and
+outputting the result. Instead, &latex; typesets more material than
+would fit on the page and then chooses a break that is optimal in some
+way (it has the smallest badness). An example of the advantage of this
+approach is that if the page has some vertical space that can be
+stretched or shrunk, such as with rubber lengths between paragraphs,
+then &latex; can use that to avoid widow lines (where a new page starts
+with the last line of a paragraph; &latex; can squeeze the extra line
+onto the first page) and orphans (where the first line of paragraph is
+at the end of a page; &latex; can stretch the material of the first
+page so the extra line falls on the second page). Another example is
+where &latex; uses available vertical shrinkage to fit on a page not
+just the header for a new section but also the first two lines of that
+section.
+</para>
+<para>But &latex; does not optimize over the entire document&textrsquo;s set of page
+breaks. So it can happen that the first page break is great but the
+second one is lousy; to break the current page &latex; doesn&textrsquo;t look as
+far ahead as the next page break. So occasionally you may want to
+influence page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.
+</para>
+<para><xref label="Layout"><xrefnodename>Layout</xrefnodename></xref> for more material that is relevant to page breaking.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a new page; eject floats.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newpage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Start a new page.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\enlargethispage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Enlarge the current page a bit.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\pagebreak &amp; \nopagebreak</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Forcing &amp; avoiding page breaks.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage" spaces=" "><nodename>\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newpage</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Page breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\clearpage</code> &amp; <code>\cleardoublepage</code> </sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="440" mergedindex="cp">\clearpage</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="372">flushing floats and starting a page</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="373">starting a new page and clearing floats</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="441" mergedindex="cp">\cleardoublepage</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="374">starting on a right-hand page</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\clearpage
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\cleardoublepage
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>End the current page and output all of the pending floating figures and
+tables (<pxref label="Floats"><xrefnodename>Floats</xrefnodename></pxref>). If there are too many floats to fit on the
+page then &latex; will put in extra pages containing only floats. In
+two-sided printing, <code>\cleardoublepage</code> also makes the next page of
+content a right-hand page, an odd-numbered page, if necessary inserting
+a blank page. The <code>\clearpage</code> command is robust while
+<code>\cleardoublepage</code> is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</para>
+<!-- c credit: https://www.tex.ac.uk/FAQ-reallyblank.html -->
+<para>The <code>\cleardoublepage</code> command will put in a blank page, but it
+will have the running headers and footers. To get a really blank
+page, use this command.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage
+\newcommand&lbrace;\clearemptydoublepage&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \clearpage
+ &lbrace;\pagestyle&lbrace;empty&rbrace;\origdoublepage&rbrace;%
+&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>If you want &latex;&textrsquo;s standard <code>\chapter</code> command to do this then
+add the line <code>\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The command <code>\newpage</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewpage"><xrefnodename>\newpage</xrefnodename></pxref>) also ends the current
+page, but without clearing pending floats. And, if &latex; is in
+two-column mode then <code>\newpage</code> ends the current column while
+<code>\clearpage</code> and <code>\cleardoublepage</code> end the current page.
+</para>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewpage" spaces=" "><nodename>\newpage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\enlargethispage</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newpage</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="442" mergedindex="cp">\newpage</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="375">new page, starting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="376">starting a new page</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newpage
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>End the current page. This command is robust (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</para>
+<para>While the commands <code>\clearpage</code> and <code>\cleardoublepage</code> also
+end the current page, in addition they clear pending floats
+(<pxref label="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage"><xrefnodename>\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</xrefnodename></pxref>). And, if &latex; is in
+two-column mode then <code>\clearpage</code> and <code>\cleardoublepage</code> end
+the current page, possibly leaving an empty column, while
+<code>\newpage</code> only ends the current column.
+</para>
+<para>In contrast with <code>\pagebreak</code> (<pxref label="_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak"><xrefnodename>\pagebreak &amp; \nopagebreak</xrefnodename></pxref>),
+the <code>\newpage</code> command will cause the new page to start right where
+requested. This
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+continent,
+\newpage
+\noindent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the
+proposition that all men are created equal.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>makes a new page start after <samp>continent,</samp> and the cut-off line is
+not right justified. In addition, <code>\newpage</code> does not vertically
+stretch out the page, as <code>\pagebreak</code> does.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cenlargethispage" spaces=" "><nodename>\enlargethispage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\pagebreak &amp; \nopagebreak</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newpage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\enlargethispage</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="443" mergedindex="cp">\enlargethispage</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="377">enlarge current page</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\enlargethispage&lbrace;size&rbrace;
+\enlargethispage*&lbrace;size&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Enlarge the <code>\textheight</code> for the current page. The required
+argument <var>size</var> must be a rigid length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>). It may be
+positive or negative. This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>A common strategy is to wait until you have the final text of a
+document, and then pass through it tweaking line and page breaks. This
+command allows you some page size leeway.
+</para>
+<para>This will allow one extra line on the current page.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\enlargethispage&lbrace;\baselineskip&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The starred form <code>\enlargesthispage*</code> tries to squeeze the material
+together on the page as much as possible, for the common use case of
+getting one more line on the page. This is often used together with an
+explicit <code>\pagebreak</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cpagebreak-_0026-_005cnopagebreak" spaces=" "><nodename>\pagebreak &amp; \nopagebreak</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\enlargethispage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page breaking</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\pagebreak</code> &amp; <code>\nopagebreak</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="444" mergedindex="cp">\pagebreak</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="445" mergedindex="cp">\nopagebreak</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="378">page break, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="379">page break, preventing</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\pagebreak
+\pagebreak[<var>zero-to-four</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\nopagebreak
+\nopagebreak[<var>zero-to-four</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Encourage or discourage a page break. The optional <var>zero-to-four</var>
+is an integer that allows you to soften the request. The default is 4,
+so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or
+prevent the break. But for instance <code>\nopagebreak[1]</code> suggests to
+&latex; that another spot might be preferable. The higher the number,
+the more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
+commands.
+</para>
+<para>If you use these inside a paragraph, they apply to the point following
+the line in which they appear. So this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this
+continent,
+\pagebreak
+a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition
+that all men are created equal.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>does not give a page break at <samp>continent,</samp> but instead at
+<samp>nation,</samp> since that is where &latex; breaks that line. In
+addition, with <code>\pagebreak</code> the vertical space on the page is
+stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom
+margin. This can look strange, and if <code>\flushbottom</code> is in effect
+this can cause you to get <samp>Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active</samp>. <xref label="_005cnewpage"><xrefnodename>\newpage</xrefnodename></xref> for a command that
+does not have these effects.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Footnotes" spaces=" "><nodename>Footnotes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Definitions</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Page breaking</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Footnotes</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="380">footnotes, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Place a footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">No<accent type="uml">e</accent>l Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
+to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making
+love.\footnote&lbrace;%
+ I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>You can put multiple footnotes on a page. If the footnote text becomes
+too long then it will flow to the next page.
+</para>
+<para>You can also produce footnotes by combining the <code>\footnotemark</code> and
+the <code>\footnotetext</code> commands, which is useful in special
+circumstances.
+</para>
+<para>To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
+include a bibliographic style with that behavior (<pxref label="Using-BibTeX"><xrefnodename>Using BibTeX</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\footnote</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insert a footnote.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\footnotemark</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insert footnote mark only.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\footnotetext</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insert footnote text only.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Footnotes in section headings</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Chapter or section titles.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Footnotes in a table</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Table footnotes.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Footnotes of footnotes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Multiple classes of footnotes.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cfootnote" spaces=" "><nodename>\footnote</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\footnotemark</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\footnote</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="446" mergedindex="cp">\footnote</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\footnote&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\footnote[<var>number</var>]&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Place a footnote <var>text</var> at the bottom of the current page.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's
+\textit&lbrace;Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire&rbrace;.\footnote&lbrace;%
+ After reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained,
+ ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method
+ of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed
+ at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The optional argument <var>number</var> allows you to specify the number of
+the footnote. If you use this then &latex; does not increment the
+<code>footnote</code> counter.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="381">footnotes, symbols instead of numbers</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="447" mergedindex="cp">\fnsymbol<r>, and footnotes</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="448" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;fnsymbol</indexterm></findex>
+<para>By default, &latex; uses arabic numbers as footnote markers. Change
+this with something like
+<code>\renewcommand&lbrace;\thefootnote&rbrace;&lbrace;\fnsymbol&lbrace;footnote&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>, which
+uses a sequence of symbols (<pxref label="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><xrefnodename>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
+\fnsymbol</xrefnodename></pxref>). To make this change global put that in the preamble. If
+you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
+<code>\setcounter&lbrace;footnote&rbrace;&lbrace;0&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; determines the spacing of footnotes with two parameters.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="382">footnote parameters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="383">parameters, for footnotes</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="449" mergedindex="cp">\footnoterule</indexterm>\footnoterule</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="footnote-footnoterule">footnote footnoterule</anchor>
+<para>Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page&textrsquo;s
+footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document classes (except
+<code>slides</code>, where it does not appear) is: vertical thickness of
+<code>0.4pt</code>, and horizontal size of <code>0.4\columnwidth</code> long.
+Change the rule with something like this.
+</para>
+<!-- c Credit egreg: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/21917 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand&lbrace;\footnoterule&rbrace;&lbrace;% Kerns avoid vertical space
+ \kern -3pt % This -3 is negative
+ \hrule width \textwidth height 1pt % of the sum of this 1
+ \kern 2pt&rbrace; % and this 2
+</pre></example>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="450" mergedindex="cp">\footnotesep</indexterm>\footnotesep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="footnote-footnotesep">footnote footnotesep</anchor>
+<para>The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote
+(<pxref label="_005cstrut"><xrefnodename>\strut</xrefnodename></pxref>). By default, this is set to the normal strut for
+<code>\footnotesize</code> fonts (<pxref label="Font-sizes"><xrefnodename>Font sizes</xrefnodename></pxref>), therefore there is no
+extra space between footnotes. This is <samp>6.65pt</samp> for <samp>10pt</samp>,
+<samp>7.7pt</samp> for <samp>11pt</samp>, and <samp>8.4pt</samp> for <samp>12pt</samp>. Change
+it as with <code>\setlength&lbrace;\footnotesep&rbrace;&lbrace;11pt&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>The <code>\footnote</code> command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
+<code>\footnote</code>; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
+sectioning command such as <code>\chapter</code> (it can only be used in outer
+paragraph mode; <pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>). There are some workarounds; see
+following sections.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="384">Footnotes, in a minipage</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="385">mpfootnote counter</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>In a <code>minipage</code> environment the <code>\footnote</code> command uses the
+<code>mpfootnote</code> counter instead of the <code>footnote</code> counter, so
+they are numbered independently. They are shown at the bottom of the
+environment, not at the bottom of the page. And by default they are
+shown alphabetically. <xref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></xref> and <ref label="Footnotes-in-a-table"><xrefnodename>Footnotes in a table</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cfootnotemark" spaces=" "><nodename>\footnotemark</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\footnotetext</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\footnote</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\footnotemark</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="451" mergedindex="cp">\footnotemark</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\footnotemark
+\footnotemark[<var>number</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Put the current footnote mark in the text. To specify associated text
+for the footnote see&nbsp;<ref label="_005cfootnotetext"><xrefnodename>\footnotetext</xrefnodename></ref>. The optional argument
+<var>number</var> causes the command to use that number to determine the
+footnote mark. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode
+(<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>If you use <code>\footnotemark</code> without the optional argument then it
+increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional <var>number</var>
+then it does not. The next example produces several consecutive footnote
+markers referring to the same footnote.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The first theorem\footnote&lbrace;Due to Gauss.&rbrace;
+and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value&lbrace;footnote&rbrace;]
+and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value&lbrace;footnote&rbrace;]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value of the
+common mark. This example gives the same institutional affiliation to
+both the first and third authors (<code>\thanks</code> is a version of
+<code>footnote</code>), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\title&lbrace;A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem&rbrace;
+\author&lbrace;J Moriarty\thanks&lbrace;University of Leeds&rbrace;
+ \and A C Doyle\thanks&lbrace;Durham University&rbrace;
+ \and S Holmes\footnotemark[1]&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\maketitle
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This uses a counter to remember the footnote number. The third sentence
+is followed by the same footnote marker as the first.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcounter&lbrace;footnoteValueSaver&rbrace;
+All babies are illogical.\footnote&lbrace;%
+ Lewis Carroll.&rbrace;\setcounter&lbrace;footnoteValueSaver&rbrace;&lbrace;\value&lbrace;footnote&rbrace;&rbrace;
+Nobody is despised who can manage a crocodile.\footnote&lbrace;%
+ Captain Hook.&rbrace;
+Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value&lbrace;footnoteValueSaver&rbrace;]
+Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby.
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="386"><r>package</r>, <code>cleveref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="387"><code>cleveref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="388"><r>package</r>, <code>hyperref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="389"><code>hyperref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>This example accomplishes the same by using the package <file>cleveref</file>.
+</para>
+<!-- c from SE user Jake http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/10116/339 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;cleveref&rbrace;[2012/02/15] % in preamble
+\crefformat&lbrace;footnote&rbrace;&lbrace;#2\footnotemark[#1]#3&rbrace;
+...
+The theorem is from Evers.\footnote&lbrace;\label&lbrace;fn:TE&rbrace;Tinker, Evers, 1994.&rbrace;
+The corollary is from Chance.\footnote&lbrace;Evers, Chance, 1990.&rbrace;
+But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref&lbrace;fn:TE&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="390"><r>package</r>, <code>hyperref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="391"><code>hyperref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>It will work with the package <file>hyperref</file>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cfootnotetext" spaces=" "><nodename>\footnotetext</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Footnotes in section headings</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\footnotemark</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\footnotetext</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="452" mergedindex="cp">\footnotetext</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\footnotetext&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\footnotetext[<var>number</var>]&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Place <var>text</var> at the bottom of the page as a footnote. It pairs with
+<code>\footnotemark</code> (<pxref label="_005cfootnotemark"><xrefnodename>\footnotemark</xrefnodename></pxref>) and can come anywhere after
+that command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+The optional argument <var>number</var> changes the number of the footnote
+mark.
+</para>
+<para><xref label="_005cfootnotemark"><xrefnodename>\footnotemark</xrefnodename></xref> and&nbsp;<ref label="Footnotes-in-a-table"><xrefnodename>Footnotes in a table</xrefnodename></ref> for usage
+examples.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Footnotes-in-section-headings" spaces=" "><nodename>Footnotes in section headings</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Footnotes in a table</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\footnotetext</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Footnotes in section headings</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="392">footnote, in section headings</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="393">table of contents, avoiding footnotes</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section&lbrace;Full sets\protect\footnote&lbrace;This material due to ...&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
+section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
+contents, where it is not likely to be desired. The simplest way
+to have it not appear on the table of contents is to use the optional
+argument to <code>\section</code>
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section[Please]&lbrace;Please\footnote&lbrace;%
+ Don't footnote in chapter and section headers!&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>No <code>\protect</code> is needed in front of <code>\footnote</code> here because
+what gets moved to the table of contents is the optional argument.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Footnotes-in-a-table" spaces=" "><nodename>Footnotes in a table</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Footnotes of footnotes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Footnotes in section headings</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Footnotes in a table</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="394">footnote, in a table</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Inside a <code>tabular</code> or <code>array</code> environment the <code>\footnote</code>
+command does not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but
+the footnote text does not appear. The solution is to use a
+<code>minipage</code> environment as here (<pxref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&lbrace;\textwidth&rbrace; \centering
+ \begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;l|l&rbrace;
+ \textsc&lbrace;Ship&rbrace; &amp;\textsc&lbrace;Book&rbrace; \\ \hline
+ \textit&lbrace;HMS Sophie&rbrace; &amp;Master and Commander \\
+ \textit&lbrace;HMS Polychrest&rbrace; &amp;Post Captain \\
+ \textit&lbrace;HMS Lively&rbrace; &amp;Post Captain \\
+ \textit&lbrace;HMS Surprise&rbrace; &amp;A number of books\footnote&lbrace;%
+ Starting with HMS Surprise.&rbrace;
+ \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+ \end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Inside a <code>minipage</code>, footnote marks are lowercase letters. Change
+that with something like
+<code>\renewcommand&lbrace;\thempfootnote&rbrace;&lbrace;\arabic&lbrace;mpfootnote&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>
+(<pxref label="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><xrefnodename>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The footnotes in the prior example appear at the bottom of the
+<code>minipage</code>. To have them appear at the bottom of the main page, as
+part of the regular footnote sequence, use the <code>\footnotemark</code> and
+<code>\footnotetext</code> pair and make a new counter.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcounter&lbrace;mpFootnoteValueSaver&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&lbrace;\textwidth&rbrace;
+ \setcounter&lbrace;mpFootnoteValueSaver&rbrace;&lbrace;\value&lbrace;footnote&rbrace;&rbrace; \centering
+ \begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;l|l&rbrace;
+ \textsc&lbrace;Woman&rbrace; &amp;\textsc&lbrace;Relationship&rbrace; \\ \hline
+ Mona &amp;Attached\footnotemark \\
+ Diana Villiers &amp;Eventual wife \\
+ Christine Hatherleigh Wood &amp;Fiance\footnotemark
+ \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+ \end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;% percent sign keeps footnote text close to minipage
+ \stepcounter&lbrace;mpFootnoteValueSaver&rbrace;%
+ \footnotetext[\value&lbrace;mpFootnoteValueSaver&rbrace;]&lbrace;%
+ Little is known other than her death.&rbrace;%
+ \stepcounter&lbrace;mpFootnoteValueSaver&rbrace;%
+ \footnotetext[\value&lbrace;mpFootnoteValueSaver&rbrace;]&lbrace;%
+ Relationship is unresolved in XXI.&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>For a floating <code>table</code> environment (<pxref label="table"><xrefnodename>table</xrefnodename></pxref>), use the
+<file>tablefootnote</file> package.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;tablefootnote&rbrace; % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;table&rbrace;
+ \centering
+ \begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;l|l&rbrace;
+ \textsc&lbrace;Date&rbrace; &amp;\textsc&lbrace;Campaign&rbrace; \\ \hline
+ 1862 &amp;Fort Donelson \\
+ 1863 &amp;Vicksburg \\
+ 1865 &amp;Army of Northern Virginia\tablefootnote&lbrace;%
+ Ending the war.&rbrace;
+ \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+ \caption&lbrace;Forces captured by US Grant&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;table&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The footnote appears at the page bottom and is numbered in sequence with
+other footnotes.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Footnotes-of-footnotes" spaces=" "><nodename>Footnotes of footnotes</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Footnotes in a table</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Footnotes of footnotes</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="395">footnote, of a footnote</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="396"><r>package</r>, <code>bigfoot</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="397"><code>bigfoot</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
+footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package
+<file>bigfoot</file> extends &latex;&textrsquo;s default footnote mechanism in many
+ways, including allow these two, as in this example.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;bigfoot&rbrace; % in preamble
+\DeclareNewFootnote&lbrace;Default&rbrace;
+\DeclareNewFootnote&lbrace;from&rbrace;[alph] % create class \footnotefrom&lbrace;&rbrace;
+ ...
+The third theorem is a partial converse of the
+second.\footnotefrom&lbrace;%
+ First noted in Wilson.\footnote&lbrace;Second edition only.&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Definitions" spaces=" "><nodename>Definitions</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Counters</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Footnotes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Definitions</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="398">definitions</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">(Re)define a new command.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\providecommand</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define a new command, if name not used.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Change the status of the at-sign character.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\&arobase;ifstar</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define your own commands with *-variants.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define a new counter.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newlength</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define a new length.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newsavebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define a new box.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newenvironment &amp; \renewenvironment</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define a new environment.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newtheorem</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define a new theorem-like environment.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newfont</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define a new font name.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\protect</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Using tricky commands.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\ignorespaces &amp; \ignorespacesafterend</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Discard extra spaces.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand" spaces=" "><nodename>\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\providecommand</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newcommand</code> &amp; <code>\renewcommand</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="453" mergedindex="cp">\newcommand</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="399">commands, defining new ones</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="400">commands, redefining</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="401">defining a new command</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="402">new commands, defining</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\newcommand&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>]&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\newcommand&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\newcommand*&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\newcommand*&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>]&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\newcommand*&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or one of these.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>]&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\renewcommand&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>]&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\renewcommand&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\renewcommand*&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\renewcommand*&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>]&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\renewcommand*&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Define or redefine a command. See also the discussion of
+<code>\DeclareRobustCommand</code> in <ref label="Class-and-package-commands"><xrefnodename>Class and package commands</xrefnodename></ref>.
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="403">starred form, defining new commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="404">*-form, defining new commands</indexterm></cindex>
+The starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain
+multiple paragraphs of text (in plain &tex; terms that it not be
+<code>\long</code>).
+</para>
+<para>These are the parameters:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">cmd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem>
+<para>Required; the command name. It must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>,
+and must not begin with the four letter string <code>\end</code>. For
+<code>\newcommand</code>, it must not be already defined. For
+<code>\renewcommand</code>, this name must already be defined.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">nargs</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of arguments
+that the command takes, including any optional argument. Omitting this
+argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that the command has no
+arguments. If you redefine a command, the new version can have a
+different number of arguments than the old version.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">optargdefault</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
+<code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is optional, with default value <var>optargdefault</var>
+(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then
+<code>\<var>cmd</var></code> does not take an optional argument.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="405">positional parameter</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>That is, if <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is used with square brackets, as in
+<code>\<var>cmd</var>[<var>optval</var>]&lbrace;...&rbrace;...</code>, then within <var>defn</var> the
+parameter&nbsp;<code>#1</code> is set to the value of <var>optval</var>. On the
+other hand, if <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> is called without the square brackets
+then within <var>defn</var> the parameter <code>#1</code> is set to the value of
+<var>optargdefault</var>. In either case, the required arguments start with
+<code>#2</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Omitting <code>[<var>optargdefault</var>]</code> is different from having the
+square brackets with no contents, as in <code>[]</code>. The former sets
+<code>#1</code> to the value of <var>optargdefault</var>; the latter sets <code>#1</code>
+to the empty string.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">defn</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of
+<code>\<var>cmd</var></code>. The parameters <code>#1</code>, <code>#2</code>,
+... <code>#<var>nargs</var></code> are replaced by the values that you supply when
+you call the command (or by the default value if there is an optional
+argument and you don&textrsquo;t exercise the option).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>&tex; ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control
+sequence, as in <samp>\cmd </samp>. If you actually want a space there, one
+solution is to type <code>&lbrace;&rbrace;</code> after the command (<samp>\cmd&lbrace;&rbrace; </samp>, and
+another solution is to use an explicit control space (<samp>\cmd\ </samp>).
+</para>
+<para>A simple example of defining a new command:
+<code>\newcommand&lbrace;\RS&rbrace;&lbrace;Robin Smith&rbrace;</code> results in <code>\RS</code> being
+replaced by the longer text. Redefining an existing command is similar:
+<code>\renewcommand&lbrace;\qedsymbol&rbrace;&lbrace;&lbrace;\small QED&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>If you try to define a command and the name has already been used then
+you get something like <samp>LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</samp>. If you try
+to redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get
+something like <samp>LaTeX Error: \hank undefined</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>Here the first command definition has no arguments, and the second has
+one required argument.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\student&rbrace;&lbrace;Ms~O'Leary&rbrace;
+\newcommand&lbrace;\defref&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;Definition~\ref&lbrace;#1&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Use the first as in <code>I highly recommend \student&lbrace;&rbrace; to you</code>. The
+second has a variable, so that <code>\defref&lbrace;def:basis&rbrace;</code> expands to
+<code>Definition~\ref&lbrace;def:basis&rbrace;</code>, which ultimately expands to
+something like <samp>Definition~3.14</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>Similarly, but with two required arguments:
+<code>\newcommand&lbrace;\nbym&rbrace;[2]&lbrace;$#1 \times #2$&rbrace;</code> is invoked as
+<code>\nbym&lbrace;2&rbrace;&lbrace;k&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>This example has an optional argument.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\salutation&rbrace;[1][Sir or Madam]&lbrace;Dear #1:&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Then <code>\salutation</code> gives <samp>Dear Sir or Madam:</samp> while
+<code>\salutation[John]</code> gives <samp>Dear John:</samp>. And
+<code>\salutation[]</code> gives <samp>Dear :</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>This example has an optional argument and two required arguments.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\lawyers&rbrace;[3][company]&lbrace;#2, #3, and~#1&rbrace;
+I employ \lawyers[Howe]&lbrace;Dewey&rbrace;&lbrace;Cheatem&rbrace;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The output is <samp>I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe</samp>. The optional
+argument, the <code>Howe</code>, is associated with <code>#1</code>, while
+<code>Dewey</code> and <code>Cheatem</code> are associated with <code>#2</code>
+and&nbsp;<code>#3</code>. Because of the optional argument,
+<code>\lawyers&lbrace;Dewey&rbrace;&lbrace;Cheatem&rbrace;</code> will give the output <samp>I employ
+Dewey, Cheatem, and company</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>The braces around <var>defn</var> do not define a group, that is, they do not
+delimit the scope of the result of expanding <var>defn</var>. For example,
+with <code>\newcommand&lbrace;\shipname&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\it #1&rbrace;</code>, in this sentence,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The \shipname&lbrace;Monitor&rbrace; met the \shipname&lbrace;Merrimac&rbrace;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>the words <samp>met the</samp> would incorrectly be in italics. The solution
+is to put another pair of braces inside the definition:
+<code>\newcommand&lbrace;\shipname&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;&lbrace;\it #1&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cprovidecommand" spaces=" "><nodename trailingspaces=" ">\providecommand</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\providecommand</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="454" mergedindex="cp">\providecommand</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="406">commands, defining new ones</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="407">defining a new command</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="408">new commands, defining</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\providecommand&lbrace;<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\providecommand&lbrace;<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>]&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\providecommand&lbrace;<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\providecommand*&lbrace;<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\providecommand*&lbrace;<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>]&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+\providecommand*&lbrace;<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]&lbrace;<var>defn</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
+If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
+as <code>\newcommand</code>. If a command of this name already exists then
+this definition does nothing. This is particularly useful in a file
+that may be loaded more than once, such as a style file.
+<xref label="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand &amp; \renewcommand</xrefnodename></xref> for the description of the arguments.
+</para>
+<para>This example
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\providecommand&lbrace;\myaffiliation&rbrace;&lbrace;Saint Michael's College&rbrace;
+\providecommand&lbrace;\myaffiliation&rbrace;&lbrace;Saint Michael's College&rbrace;
+From \myaffiliation.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>outputs <samp>From Saint Michael's College</samp>. Unlike <code>\newcommand</code>,
+the repeated use of <code>\providecommand</code> does not give an error.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother" spaces=" "><nodename>\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\&arobase;ifstar</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\providecommand</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\makeatletter</code> &amp; <code>\makeatother</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makeatletter
+ ... definition of commands with &arobase; in their name ..
+\makeatother
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Use this pair when you redefine &latex; commands that are named with an
+at-sign character&nbsp;<samp><code>&arobase;</code></samp>. The <code>\makeatletter</code>
+declaration makes the at-sign character have the category code of a
+letter, code&nbsp;11. The <code>\makeatother</code> declaration sets the
+category code of the at-sign to code&nbsp;12, its default value.
+</para>
+<para>As &tex; reads characters, it assigns each one a category code, or
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="409">catcode</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="410">character category code</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="411">category code, character</indexterm></cindex>
+<dfn>catcode</dfn>. For instance, it assigns the backslash
+character&nbsp;<samp><code>\</code></samp> the catcode&nbsp;0. Command names
+consist of a category&nbsp;0 character, ordinarily backslash, followed
+by letters, category&nbsp;11 characters (except that a command name can
+also consist of a category&nbsp;0 character followed by a single
+non-letter symbol).
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s source code has the convention that some commands use
+<code>&arobase;</code> in their name. These commands are mainly intended for package
+or class writers. The convention prevents authors who are just using a
+package or class from accidentally replacing such a command with one of
+their own, because by default the at-sign has catcode&nbsp;12.
+</para>
+<para>The pair <code>\makeatletter</code> and <code>\makeatother</code> changes the
+default code and then changes it back. Use them inside a <file>.tex</file>
+file, in the preamble, when you are defining or redefining commands
+named with <code>&arobase;</code>, by having them surround your definition. Don&textrsquo;t
+use these inside <file>.sty</file> or <file>.cls</file> files since the
+<code>\usepackage</code> and <code>\documentclass</code> commands already arrange
+that the at-sign has the character code of a letter, catcode&nbsp;11.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="412"><r>package</r>, <code>macros2e</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="413"><code>macros2e</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign in their names see
+<url><urefurl>http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the class file has a command
+<code>\thesis&arobase;universityname</code> that the user wants to change. These
+three lines should go in the preamble, before the
+<code>\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makeatletter
+\renewcommand&lbrace;\thesis&arobase;universityname&rbrace;&lbrace;Saint Michael's College&rbrace;
+\makeatother
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005c_0040ifstar" spaces=" "><nodename>\&arobase;ifstar</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newcounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\&arobase;ifstar</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="455" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;ifstar</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="414">commands, star-variants</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="415">star-variants, commands</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\mycmd&rbrace;&lbrace;\&arobase;ifstar&lbrace;\mycmd&arobase;star&rbrace;&lbrace;\mycmd&arobase;nostar&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\newcommand&lbrace;\mycmd&arobase;nostar&rbrace;[<var>nostar-num-args</var>]&lbrace;<var>nostar-body</var>&rbrace;
+\newcommand&lbrace;\mycmd&arobase;star&rbrace;[<var>star-num-args</var>]&lbrace;<var>star-body</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Many standard &latex; environments or commands have a variant with the
+same name but ending with a star character&nbsp;<code>*</code>, an asterisk.
+Examples are the <code>table</code> and <code>table*</code> environments and the
+<code>\section</code> and <code>\section*</code> commands.
+</para>
+<para>When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward
+because <code>\newenvironment</code> and <code>\renewenvironment</code> allow the
+environment name to contain a star. For commands the situation is more
+complex. As in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command,
+given above as <code>\mycmd</code>, which peeks ahead to see if it is followed
+by a star. For instance, &latex; does not really have a
+<code>\section*</code> command; instead, the <code>\section</code> command peeks
+ahead. This command does not accept arguments but instead expands to
+one of two commands that do accept arguments. In the synopsis these two
+are <code>\mycmd&arobase;nostar</code> and <code>\mycmd&arobase;star</code>. They could take the
+same number of arguments or a different number, or no arguments at all.
+As always, in a &latex; document a command using at-sign&nbsp;<code>&arobase;</code>
+must be enclosed inside a <code>\makeatletter ... \makeatother</code> block
+(<pxref label="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><xrefnodename>\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This example of <code>\&arobase;ifstar</code> defines the command <code>\ciel</code> and a
+variant <code>\ciel*</code>. Both have one required argument. A call to
+<code>\ciel&lbrace;night&rbrace;</code> will return &quot;starry night sky&quot; while
+<code>\ciel*&lbrace;blue&rbrace;</code> will return &quot;starry not blue sky&quot;.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand*&lbrace;\ciel&arobase;unstarred&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;starry #1 sky&rbrace;
+\newcommand*&lbrace;\ciel&arobase;starred&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;starry not #1 sky&rbrace;
+\newcommand*&lbrace;\ciel&rbrace;&lbrace;\&arobase;ifstar&lbrace;\ciel&arobase;starred&rbrace;&lbrace;\ciel&arobase;unstarred&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
+arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007&textrsquo;s
+<code>``My name is \agentsecret*&lbrace;Bond&rbrace;,
+\agentsecret&lbrace;James&rbrace;&lbrace;Bond&rbrace;.''</code> is equivalent to entering the commands
+<code>``My name is \textsc&lbrace;Bond&rbrace;, \textit&lbrace;James&rbrace; textsc&lbrace;Bond&rbrace;.''</code>
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand*&lbrace;\agentsecret&arobase;unstarred&rbrace;[2]&lbrace;\textit&lbrace;#1&rbrace; \textsc&lbrace;#2&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\newcommand*&lbrace;\agentsecret&arobase;starred&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\textsc&lbrace;#1&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\newcommand*&lbrace;\agentsecret&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \&arobase;ifstar&lbrace;\agentsecret&arobase;starred&rbrace;&lbrace;\agentsecret&arobase;unstarred&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work of
+<code>\&arobase;ifstar</code>. The <file>suffix</file> package allows the construct
+<code>\newcommand\mycommand&lbrace;<var>unstarred version</var>&rbrace;</code> followed by
+<code>\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*&lbrace;<var>starred version</var>&rbrace;</code>. And
+&latex;3 has the <file>xparse</file> package that allows this code.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\NewDocumentCommand\foo&lbrace;s&rbrace;&lbrace;\IfBooleanTF#1
+ &lbrace;<var>starred version</var>&rbrace;%
+ &lbrace;<var>unstarred version</var>&rbrace;%
+ &rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewcounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\newcounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newlength</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\&arobase;ifstar</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newcounter</code>: Allocating a counter</sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="456" mergedindex="cp">\newcounter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="416">counters, defining new</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcounter&lbrace;<var>countername</var>&rbrace;
+\newcounter&lbrace;<var>countername</var>&rbrace;[<var>supercounter</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Globally defines a new counter named <var>countername</var> and initialize it
+to zero (<pxref label="Counters"><xrefnodename>Counters</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The name <var>countername</var> must consist of letters only. It does not
+begin with a backslash. This name must not already be in use by another
+counter.
+</para>
+<para>When you use the optional argument <code>[<var>supercounter</var>]</code> then the
+counter <var>countername</var> will be reset to zero whenever
+<var>supercounter</var> is incremented. For example, ordinarily
+<code>subsection</code> is numbered within <code>section</code> so that any time you
+increment <var>section</var>, either with <code>\stepcounter</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cstepcounter"><xrefnodename>\stepcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>) or <code>\refstepcounter</code>
+(<pxref label="_005crefstepcounter"><xrefnodename>\refstepcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>), then &latex; will reset <var>subsection</var> to
+zero.
+</para>
+<para>This example
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcounter&lbrace;asuper&rbrace; \setcounter&lbrace;asuper&rbrace;&lbrace;1&rbrace;
+\newcounter&lbrace;asub&rbrace;[asuper] \setcounter&lbrace;asub&rbrace;&lbrace;3&rbrace; % Note `asuper'
+The value of asuper is \arabic&lbrace;asuper&rbrace; and of asub is \arabic&lbrace;asub&rbrace;.
+\stepcounter&lbrace;asuper&rbrace;
+Now asuper is \arabic&lbrace;asuper&rbrace; while asub is \arabic&lbrace;asub&rbrace;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>produces <samp>The value of asuper is 1 and that of asub is 3</samp> and
+<samp>Now asuper is 2 while asub is 0</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>If the counter already exists, for instance by entering <code>asuper</code>
+twice, then you get something like <samp>LaTeX Error: Command \c&arobase;asuper
+already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual.</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>If you use the optional argument then the super counter must already
+exist. Entering <code>\newcounter&lbrace;jh&rbrace;[lh]</code> when <code>lh</code> is not a
+defined counter will get you <samp>LaTeX Error: No counter 'lh'
+defined.</samp>
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewlength" spaces=" "><nodename>\newlength</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newsavebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newlength</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="457" mergedindex="cp">\newlength</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="417">lengths, allocating new</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="418">rubber lengths, defining new</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="419">skip register, plain &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="420">glue register, plain &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength&lbrace;<var>arg</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Allocate a new length register (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>). The required argument
+<var>arg</var> must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>. The new register holds
+rubber lengths such as <code>72.27pt</code> or <code>1in plus.2in minus.1in</code>
+(a &latex; length register is what plain &tex; calls a <code>skip</code>
+register). The initial value is zero. The control sequence
+<code>\<var>arg</var></code> must not be already defined.
+</para>
+<para>An example:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength&lbrace;\graphichgt&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>If you forget the backslash then you get <samp>Missing control sequence
+inserted</samp>. If the command sequence already exists then you get
+something like <samp>LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined.
+Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewsavebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\newsavebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newenvironment &amp; \renewenvironment</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newlength</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newsavebox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="458" mergedindex="cp">\newsavebox</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="421">box, allocating new</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newsavebox&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Define \<var>cmd</var>, the string consisting of a backslash followed by
+<var>cmd</var>, to refer to a new bin for storing material. These bins hold
+material that has been typeset, to use multiple times or to measure or
+manipulate (<pxref label="Boxes"><xrefnodename>Boxes</xrefnodename></pxref>). The bin name \<var>cmd</var> is required, must
+start with a backslash, \, and must not already be a defined command.
+This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This allocates a bin and then puts typeset material into it.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newsavebox&lbrace;\logobox&rbrace;
+\savebox&lbrace;\logobox&rbrace;&lbrace;LoGo&rbrace;
+Our logo is \usebox&lbrace;\logobox&rbrace;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The output is <samp>Our logo is LoGo</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>If there is an already defined bin then you get something like
+<samp>LaTeX Error: Command \logobox already defined. Or name
+\end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>The allocation of a box is global.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewenvironment-_0026-_005crenewenvironment" spaces=" "><nodename>\newenvironment &amp; \renewenvironment</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newtheorem</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newsavebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newenvironment</code> &amp; <code>\renewenvironment</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="459" mergedindex="cp">\newenvironment</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="460" mergedindex="cp">\renewenvironment</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="422">environments, defining</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="423">defining new environments</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="424">redefining environments</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newenvironment&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>begdef</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>enddef</var>&rbrace;
+\newenvironment&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>]&lbrace;<var>begdef</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>enddef</var>&rbrace;
+\newenvironment&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]&lbrace;<var>begdef</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>enddef</var>&rbrace;
+\newenvironment*&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>begdef</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>enddef</var>&rbrace;
+\newenvironment*&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>]&lbrace;<var>begdef</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>enddef</var>&rbrace;
+\newenvironment*&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]&lbrace;<var>begdef</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>enddef</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or one of these.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewenvironment&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>begdef</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>enddef</var>&rbrace;
+\renewenvironment&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>]&lbrace;<var>begdef</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>enddef</var>&rbrace;
+\renewenvironment&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]&lbrace;<var>begdef</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>enddef</var>&rbrace;
+\renewenvironment*&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>begdef</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>enddef</var>&rbrace;
+\renewenvironment*&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>]&lbrace;<var>begdef</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>enddef</var>&rbrace;
+\renewenvironment*&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;[<var>nargs</var>][<var>optargdefault</var>]&lbrace;<var>begdef</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>enddef</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Define or redefine the environment <var>env</var>, that is, create the
+construct <code>\begin&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace; ... <var>body</var> ... \end&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="425"><code>*</code>-form of environment commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text. However, the body of these
+environments can contain multiple paragraphs.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">env</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Required; the environment name. It consists only of letters or the
+<code>*</code> character, and thus does not begin with backslash, <code>\</code>.
+It must not begin with the string <code>end</code>. For
+<code>\newenvironment</code>, the name <var>env</var> must not be the name of an
+already existing environment, and also the command <code>\<var>env</var></code>
+must be undefined. For <code>\renewenvironment</code>, <var>env</var> must be the
+name of an existing environment.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">nargs</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
+that the environment takes. When you use the environment these
+arguments appear after the <code>\begin</code>, as in
+<code>\begin&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>arg1</var>&rbrace; ... &lbrace;<var>argn</var>&rbrace;</code>. Omitting
+this is equivalent to setting it to 0; the environment will have no
+arguments. When redefining an environment, the new version can have a
+different number of arguments than the old version.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">optargdefault</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional; if this is present then the first argument of the defined
+environment is optional, with default value <var>optargdefault</var> (which
+may be the empty string). If this is not in the definition then the
+environment does not take an optional argument.
+</para>
+<para>That is, when <var>optargdefault</var> is present in the definition of the
+environment then you can start the environment with square brackets, as
+in <code>\begin&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;[<var>optval</var>]&lbrace;...&rbrace; ... \end&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;</code>.
+In this case, within <var>begdefn</var> the parameter <code>#1</code> is set to the
+value of <var>optval</var>. If you call <code>\begin&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;</code> without
+square brackets, then within <var>begdefn</var> the parameter <code>#1</code> is
+set to the value of the default <var>optargdefault</var>. In either case,
+any required arguments start with <code>#2</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Omitting <code>[<var>myval</var>]</code> in the call is different than having the
+square brackets with no contents, as in <code>[]</code>. The former results
+in <code>#1</code> expanding to <var>optargdefault</var>; the latter results in
+<code>#1</code> expanding to the empty string.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">begdef</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
+<code>\begin&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;</code>. Within <var>begdef</var>, the parameters
+<code>#1</code>, <code>#2</code>, ... <code>#<var>nargs</var></code>, are replaced by the
+values that you supply when you call the environment; see the examples
+below.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">enddef</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of
+<code>\end&lbrace;<var>env</var>&rbrace;</code>. This may not contain any parameters, that is,
+you cannot use <code>#1</code>, <code>#2</code>, etc., here (but see the final
+example below).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>All environments, that is to say the <var>begdef</var> code, the environment
+body, and the <var>enddef</var> code, are processed within a group. Thus, in
+the first example below, the effect of the <code>\small</code> is limited to
+the quote and does not extend to material following the environment.
+</para>
+<para>If you try to define an environment and the name has already been used
+then you get something like <samp>LaTeX Error: Command \fred already
+defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual</samp>. If you try
+to redefine an environment and the name has not yet been used then you
+get something like <samp>LaTeX Error: Environment hank undefined.</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>This example gives an environment like &latex;&textrsquo;s <code>quotation</code>
+except that it will be set in smaller type.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newenvironment&lbrace;smallquote&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \small\begin&lbrace;quotation&rbrace;
+&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \end&lbrace;quotation&rbrace;
+&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This has an argument, which is set in boldface at the start of a
+paragraph.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newenvironment&lbrace;point&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;%
+ \noindent\textbf&lbrace;#1&rbrace;
+&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This one shows the use of a optional argument; it gives a quotation
+environment that cites the author.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newenvironment&lbrace;citequote&rbrace;[1][Shakespeare]&lbrace;%
+ \begin&lbrace;quotation&rbrace;
+ \noindent\textit&lbrace;#1&rbrace;:
+&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \end&lbrace;quotation&rbrace;
+&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The author&textrsquo;s name is optional, and defaults to <samp>Shakespeare</samp>. In
+the document, use the environment like this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;citequote&rbrace;[Lincoln]
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;citequote&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use in
+<var>enddef</var>, in this case in a box (<pxref label="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox"><xrefnodename>\sbox &amp; \savebox</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newsavebox&lbrace;\quoteauthor&rbrace;
+\newenvironment&lbrace;citequote&rbrace;[1][Shakespeare]&lbrace;%
+ \sbox\quoteauthor&lbrace;#1&rbrace;%
+ \begin&lbrace;quotation&rbrace;
+&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \hspace&lbrace;1em plus 1fill&rbrace;---\usebox&lbrace;\quoteauthor&rbrace;
+ \end&lbrace;quotation&rbrace;
+&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewtheorem" spaces=" "><nodename>\newtheorem</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newfont</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newenvironment &amp; \renewenvironment</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newtheorem</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="461" mergedindex="cp">\newtheorem</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="426">theorems, defining</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="427">defining new theorems</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="428">theorem-like environment</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="429">environment, theorem-like</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newtheorem&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+\newtheorem&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;[<var>numbered_within</var>]
+\newtheorem&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;[<var>numbered_like</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Define a new theorem-like environment. You can specify one of
+<var>numbered_within</var> and <var>numbered_like</var>, or neither, but not both.
+</para>
+<para>The first form, <code>\newtheorem&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;</code>, creates
+an environment that will be labelled with <var>title</var>; see the first
+example below.
+</para>
+<para>The second form,
+<code>\newtheorem&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;[<var>numbered_within</var>]</code>,
+creates an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing
+counter <var>numbered_within</var>, so this counter will be reset when
+<var>numbered_within</var> is reset. See the second example below.
+</para>
+<para>The third form
+<code>\newtheorem&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;[<var>numbered_like</var>]&lbrace;<var>title</var>&rbrace;</code>,
+with optional argument between the two required arguments, creates an
+environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter
+<var>numbered_like</var>. See the third example.
+</para>
+<para>This command creates a counter named <var>name</var>. In addition, unless
+the optional argument <var>numbered_like</var> is used, inside of the
+theorem-like environment the current <code>\ref</code> value will be that of
+<code>\the<var>numbered_within</var></code> (<pxref label="_005cref"><xrefnodename>\ref</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This declaration is global. It is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Arguments:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">name</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The name of the environment. It is a string of letters. It must not
+begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>. It must not be the name of an
+existing environment, and the command name <code>\<var>name</var></code> must not
+already be defined.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">title</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The text to be printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
+number. For example, <samp>Theorem</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">numbered_within</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional; the name of an already defined counter, usually a sectional
+unit such as <code>chapter</code> or <code>section</code>. When the
+<var>numbered_within</var> counter is reset then the <var>name</var> environment&textrsquo;s
+counter will also be reset.
+</para>
+<para>If this optional argument is not used then the command
+<code>\the<var>name</var></code> is set to <code>\arabic&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">numbered_like</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Optional; the name of an already defined theorem-like environment. The
+new environment will be numbered in sequence with <var>numbered_like</var>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
+sequentially. The example below has a declaration in the preamble that
+results in <samp>Definition&nbsp;1</samp> and <samp>Definition&nbsp;2</samp> in the
+output.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newtheorem&lbrace;defn&rbrace;&lbrace;Definition&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\section&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;defn&rbrace;
+ First def
+\end&lbrace;defn&rbrace;
+
+\section&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;defn&rbrace;
+ Second def
+\end&lbrace;defn&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This example has the same document body as the prior one. But here
+<code>\newtheorem</code>&textrsquo;s optional argument <var>numbered_within</var> is given as
+<code>section</code>, so the output is like <samp>Definition&nbsp;1.1</samp> and
+<samp>Definition&nbsp;2.1</samp>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newtheorem&lbrace;defn&rbrace;&lbrace;Definition&rbrace;[section]
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\section&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;defn&rbrace;
+ First def
+\end&lbrace;defn&rbrace;
+
+\section&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;defn&rbrace;
+ Second def
+\end&lbrace;defn&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>In the next example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
+second of which calls for the new <code>thm</code> environment to use the same
+counter as <code>defn</code>. It gives <samp>Definition&nbsp;1.1</samp>, followed
+by <samp>Theorem&nbsp;2.1</samp> and <samp>Definition&nbsp;2.2</samp>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newtheorem&lbrace;defn&rbrace;&lbrace;Definition&rbrace;[section]
+\newtheorem&lbrace;thm&rbrace;[defn]&lbrace;Theorem&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\section&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;defn&rbrace;
+ First def
+\end&lbrace;defn&rbrace;
+
+\section&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;thm&rbrace;
+ First thm
+\end&lbrace;thm&rbrace;
+
+\begin&lbrace;defn&rbrace;
+ Second def
+\end&lbrace;defn&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewfont" spaces=" "><nodename>\newfont</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\protect</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newtheorem</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newfont</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="462" mergedindex="cp">\newfont</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="430">fonts, new commands for</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="431">defining new fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<!-- c @findex .fd @r{file} -->
+<para>This command is obsolete. This description is here only to help with old
+documents. New documents should define fonts in families through the
+New Font Selection Scheme which allows you to, for example, associate a
+boldface with a roman (<pxref label="Fonts"><xrefnodename>Fonts</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+<!-- c This is done either by using -->
+<!-- c @file{.fd} files or through the use of an engine that can access system -->
+<!-- c fonts such as Xe@LaTeX{} (@pxref{@TeX{} engines}). -->
+</para>
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newfont&lbrace;\<var>cmd</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>font description</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Define a command <code>\<var>cmd</var></code> that will change the current font.
+The control sequence must not already be defined. It must begin with a
+backslash, <code>\</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="432">at clause, in font definitions</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="433">design size, in font definitions</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The <var>font description</var> consists of a <var>fontname</var> and an optional
+<dfn>at clause</dfn>. &latex; will look on your system for a file named
+<file><var>fontname</var>.tfm</file>. The at clause can have the form either
+<code>at <var>dimen</var></code> or <code>scaled <var>factor</var></code>, where a
+<var>factor</var> of <samp>1000</samp> means no scaling. For &latex;&textrsquo;s purposes,
+all this does is scale all the character and other font dimensions
+relative to the font&textrsquo;s design size, which is a value defined in the
+<file>.tfm</file> file.
+</para>
+<para>This defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few characters in each.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newfont&lbrace;\testfontat&rbrace;&lbrace;cmb10 at 11pt&rbrace;
+\newfont&lbrace;\testfontscaled&rbrace;&lbrace;cmb10 scaled 1100&rbrace;
+\testfontat abc
+\testfontscaled abc
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cprotect" spaces=" "><nodename>\protect</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\ignorespaces &amp; \ignorespacesafterend</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newfont</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\protect</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="463" mergedindex="cp">\protect</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="434">fragile commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="435">robust commands</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>All &latex; commands are either <dfn>fragile</dfn> or <dfn>robust</dfn>. A
+fragile command can break when it is used in the argument to certain
+other commands. Commands that contain data that &latex; writes to an
+auxiliary file and re-reads later are fragile. This includes material
+that goes into a table of contents, list of figures, list of tables,
+etc. Fragile commands also include line breaks, any command that has an
+optional argument, and many more. To prevent such commands from
+breaking, one solution is to preceded them with the command
+<code>\protect</code>.
+</para>
+<para>For example, when &latex; runs the <code>\section&lbrace;<var>section
+name</var>&rbrace;</code> command it writes the <var>section name</var> text to the
+<file>.aux</file> auxiliary file, moving it there for use elsewhere in the
+document such as in the table of contents. Any argument that is
+internally expanded by &latex; without typesetting it directly is
+referred to as a
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="436">moving arguments</indexterm></cindex>
+<dfn>moving argument</dfn>. A command is fragile if it can
+expand during this process into invalid &tex; code. Some examples of
+moving arguments are those that appear in the <code>\caption&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>
+command (<pxref label="figure"><xrefnodename>figure</xrefnodename></pxref>), in the <code>\thanks&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> command
+(<pxref label="_005cmaketitle"><xrefnodename>\maketitle</xrefnodename></pxref>), and in &arobase;-expressions in the <code>tabular</code> and
+<code>array</code> environments (<pxref label="tabular"><xrefnodename>tabular</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>If you get strange errors from commands used in moving arguments, try
+preceding it with <code>\protect</code>. Every fragile commands must be
+protected with their own <code>\protect</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Although usually a <code>\protect</code> command doesn&textrsquo;t hurt, length
+commands are robust and should not be preceded by a <code>\protect</code>
+command. Nor can a <code>\protect</code> command be used in the argument to
+<code>\addtocounter</code> or <code>\setcounter</code> command.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the <code>\caption</code> command gives a mysterious error
+about an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each
+<code>\raisebox</code> command with <code>\protect</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;figure&rbrace;
+ ...
+ \caption&lbrace;Company headquarters of A\raisebox&lbrace;1pt&rbrace;&lbrace;B&rbrace;\raisebox&lbrace;-1pt&rbrace;&lbrace;C&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;figure&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>In the next example the <code>\tableofcontents</code> command gives an error
+because the <code>\(..\)</code> in the section title expands to illegal &tex;
+in the <file>.toc</file> file. You can solve this by changing <code>\(..\)</code>
+to <code>\protect\(..\protect\)</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\tableofcontents
+...
+\section&lbrace;Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)&rbrace;
+...
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cignorespaces-_0026-_005cignorespacesafterend" spaces=" "><nodename>\ignorespaces &amp; \ignorespacesafterend</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\protect</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definitions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\ignorespaces &amp; \ignorespacesafterend</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="464" mergedindex="cp">\ignorespaces</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="465" mergedindex="cp">\ignorespacesafterend</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="437">spaces, ignore around commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="438">commands, ignore spaces</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\ignorespaces
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\ignorespacesafterend
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Both commands cause &latex; to ignore spaces after the end of the
+command up until the first non-space character. The first is a command
+from Plain &tex;, and the second is &latex;-specific.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>ignorespaces</code> is often used when defining commands via
+<code>\newcommand</code>, or <code>\newenvironment</code>, or <code>\def</code>. The
+example below illustrates. It allows a user to show the points values
+for quiz questions in the margin but it is inconvenient because, as
+shown in the <code>enumerate</code> list, users must not put any space between
+the command and the question text.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\points&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\makebox[0pt]&lbrace;\makebox[10em][l]&lbrace;#1~pts&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+ \item\points&lbrace;10&rbrace;no extra space output here
+ \item\points&lbrace;15&rbrace; extra space between the number and the `extra'
+\end&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The solution is to change to this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\points&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;%
+ \makebox[0pt]&lbrace;\makebox[10em][l]&lbrace;#1~pts&rbrace;&rbrace;\ignorespaces&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text. The
+commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names. But,
+as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
+<code>\fullname</code> will reproduce that.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makeatletter
+\newcommand&lbrace;\honorific&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\def\&arobase;honorific&lbrace;#1&rbrace;&rbrace; % remember title
+\newcommand&lbrace;\fullname&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\&arobase;honorific~#1&rbrace; % put title before name
+\makeatother
+\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;|l|&rbrace;
+\honorific&lbrace;Mr/Ms&rbrace; \fullname&lbrace;Jones&rbrace; \\ % no extra space here
+\honorific&lbrace; Mr/Ms&rbrace; \fullname&lbrace;Jones&rbrace; % extra space before title
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>To fix this, change to
+<code>\newcommand&lbrace;\fullname&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\ignorespaces\&arobase;honorific~#1&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\ignorespaces</code> is also often used in a <code>\newenvironment</code>
+at the end of the <var>begin</var> clause, that is, as part of the second
+argument, as in <code>\begin&lbrace;newenvironment&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>env
+name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;... \ignorespaces&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>To strip spaces off the end of an environment use
+<code>\ignorespacesafterend</code>. An example is that this will show a much
+larger vertical space between the first and second environments than
+between the second and third.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newenvironment&lbrace;eq&rbrace;&lbrace;\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;&rbrace;&lbrace;\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;eq&rbrace;
+e=mc^2
+\end&lbrace;eq&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+F=ma
+\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+E=IR
+\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Putting a comment character&nbsp;<code>%</code> immediately after the
+<code>\end&lbrace;eq&rbrace;</code> will make the vertical space disappear, but that is
+inconvenient. The solution is to change to
+<code>\newenvironment&lbrace;eq&rbrace;&lbrace;\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;&rbrace;&lbrace;\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;\ignorespacesafterend&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Counters" spaces=" "><nodename>Counters</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Lengths</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Definitions</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Counters</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="439">counters, a list of</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="440">variables, a list of</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Everything &latex; numbers for you has a counter associated with
+it. The name of the counter is often the same as the name of the
+environment or command associated with the number, except that the
+counter&textrsquo;s name has no backslash&nbsp;<code>\</code>. Thus, associated with
+the <code>\chapter</code> command is the <code>chapter</code> counter that keeps
+track of the chapter number.
+</para>
+<para>Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;&textrsquo;s standard document
+classes to control numbering.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">part paragraph figure enumi
+chapter subparagraph table enumii
+section page footnote enumiii
+subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+subsubsection
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <code>mpfootnote</code> counter is used by the <code>\footnote</code> command
+inside of a minipage (<pxref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></pxref>). The counters <code>enumi</code>
+through <code>enumiv</code> are used in the <code>enumerate</code> environment, for
+up to four levels of nesting (<pxref label="enumerate"><xrefnodename>enumerate</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Counters can have any integer value but they are typically positive.
+</para>
+<para>New counters are created with <code>\newcounter</code>. <xref label="_005cnewcounter"><xrefnodename>\newcounter</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Print value of a counter.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\usecounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Use a specified counter in a list environment.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\value</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Use the value of a counter in an expression.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\setcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set the value of a counter.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\addtocounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add a quantity to a counter.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\refstepcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add to a counter.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\stepcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add to a counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\day &amp; \month &amp; \year</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Numeric date values.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol" spaces=" "><nodename>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\usecounter</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Printing counters</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="441">counters, printing</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if
+the counter <var>counter</var> has the value 1 then a
+<code>\alph&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</code> in your source will result in a lowercase
+letter&nbsp;a appearing in the output.
+</para>
+<para>All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
+instance, <code>\alph&lbrace;enumi&rbrace;</code>. Note that the counter name does not
+start with a backslash.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="466" mergedindex="cp">\alph&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\alph&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print the value of <var>counter</var> in lowercase letters: &textlsquo;a&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;b&textrsquo;,
+&enddots; If the counter&textrsquo;s value is less than 1 or more than 26 then
+you get <samp>LaTeX Error: Counter too large.</samp>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="467" mergedindex="cp">\Alph&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\Alph&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print in uppercase letters: &textlsquo;A&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;B&textrsquo;, &enddots; If the counter&textrsquo;s value
+is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get <samp>LaTeX Error: Counter
+too large.</samp>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="468" mergedindex="cp">\arabic&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\arabic&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print in Arabic numbers such as <samp>5</samp> or <samp>-2</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="469" mergedindex="cp">\roman&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\roman&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print in lowercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;i&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;ii&textrsquo;, &enddots; If the
+counter&textrsquo;s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
+&latex; does not print anything in the output.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="470" mergedindex="cp">\Roman&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\Roman&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Print in uppercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;I&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;II&textrsquo;, &enddots; If the
+counter&textrsquo;s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but
+&latex; does not print anything in the output.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="471" mergedindex="cp">\fnsymbol&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\fnsymbol&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Prints the value of <var>counter</var> using a sequence of nine symbols that
+are traditionally used for labeling footnotes. The value of
+<var>counter</var> should be between&nbsp;1 and&nbsp;9, inclusive. If the
+counter&textrsquo;s value is less than 0 or more than 9 then you get <samp>LaTeX
+Error: Counter too large</samp>, while if it is 0 then you get no error or
+warning but &latex; does not output anything.
+</para>
+<para>Here are the symbols:
+</para>
+<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnfractions line=" .10 .30 .30 .30"><columnfraction value=".10"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".30"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".30"></columnfraction><columnfraction value=".30"></columnfraction></columnfractions>
+<thead><row><entry command="headitem" spaces=" "><para>Number</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Name</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Command</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>Symbol
+</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry command="item">
+<para>1</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>asterisk</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\ast</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para>*<!-- c -->
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
+<para>2</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>dagger</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\dagger</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2020</U>
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
+<para>3</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>ddagger</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\ddagger</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2021</U>
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
+<para>4</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>section-sign</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\S</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>00A7</U>
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
+<para>5</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>paragraph-sign</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\P</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>00B6</U>
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
+<para>6</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>double-vert</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\parallel</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2016</U>
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
+<para>7</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>double-asterisk</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\ast\ast</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para>**<!-- c -->
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
+<para>8</para></entry><entry command="tab">
+ <para>double-dagger</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\dagger\dagger</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2020</U><U>2020</U>
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item">
+<para>9</para></entry><entry command="tab">
+ <para>double-ddagger</para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><code>\ddagger\ddagger</code></para></entry><entry command="tab"><para><U>2021</U><U>2021</U>
+</para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cusecounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\usecounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\value</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\usecounter</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="472" mergedindex="cp">\usecounter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="442">list items, specifying counter</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="443">numbered items, specifying counter</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usecounter&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Used in the second argument of the <code>list</code> environment
+(<pxref label="list"><xrefnodename>list</xrefnodename></pxref>), this declares that list items will be numbered by
+<var>counter</var>. It initializes <var>counter</var> to zero, and arranges that
+when <code>\item</code> is called without its optional argument then
+<var>counter</var> is incremented by <code>\refstepcounter</code>, making its value
+be the current <code>ref</code> value (<pxref label="_005cref"><xrefnodename>\ref</xrefnodename></pxref>). This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Put in the document preamble, this example makes a new list environment
+enumerated with <var>testcounter</var>:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcounter&lbrace;testcounter&rbrace;
+\newenvironment&lbrace;test&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \begin&lbrace;list&rbrace;&lbrace;&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \usecounter&lbrace;testcounter&rbrace;
+ &rbrace;
+&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \end&lbrace;list&rbrace;
+&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cvalue" spaces=" "><nodename>\value</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\setcounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\usecounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\value</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="473" mergedindex="cp">\value</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="444">counters, getting value of</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\value&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Expands to the value of the counter <var>counter</var>. (Note that the name
+of a counter does not begin with a backslash.)
+</para>
+<para>This example outputs <samp>Test counter is&nbsp;6. Other counter
+is&nbsp;5.</samp>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcounter&lbrace;test&rbrace; \setcounter&lbrace;test&rbrace;&lbrace;5&rbrace;
+\newcounter&lbrace;other&rbrace; \setcounter&lbrace;other&rbrace;&lbrace;\value&lbrace;test&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\addtocounter&lbrace;test&rbrace;&lbrace;1&rbrace;
+
+Test counter is \arabic&lbrace;test&rbrace;.
+Other counter is \arabic&lbrace;other&rbrace;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <code>\value</code> command is not used for typesetting the value of the
+counter. For that, see <ref label="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><xrefnodename>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>It is often used in <code>\setcounter</code> or <code>\addtocounter</code> but
+<code>\value</code> can be used anywhere that &latex; expects a number, such
+as in <code>\hspace&lbrace;\value&lbrace;foo&rbrace;\parindent&rbrace;</code>. It must not be
+preceded by <code>\protect</code> (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This example inserts <code>\hspace&lbrace;4\parindent&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setcounter&lbrace;myctr&rbrace;&lbrace;3&rbrace; \addtocounter&lbrace;myctr&rbrace;&lbrace;1&rbrace;
+\hspace&lbrace;\value&lbrace;myctr&rbrace;\parindent&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csetcounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\setcounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addtocounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\value</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\setcounter</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="474" mergedindex="cp">\setcounter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="445">counters, setting</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="446">setting counters</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setcounter&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>value</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Globally set the counter <var>counter</var> to have the value of the
+<var>value</var> argument, which must be an integer. Thus, you can set a
+counter&textrsquo;s value as <code>\setcounter&lbrace;section&rbrace;&lbrace;5&rbrace;</code>. Note that the
+counter name does not start with a backslash.
+</para>
+<para>In this example if the counter <code>theorem</code> has value 12 then the
+second line will print <samp>XII</samp>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setcounter&lbrace;exercise&rbrace;&lbrace;\value&lbrace;theorem&rbrace;&rbrace;
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman&lbrace;exercise&rbrace;.
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005caddtocounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\addtocounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\refstepcounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\setcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addtocounter</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="475" mergedindex="cp">\addtocounter</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addtocounter&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>value</var><spacecmd type="nl"/></pre></example>
+
+<para>Globally increment <var>counter</var> by the amount specified by the
+<var>value</var> argument, which may be negative.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the section value appears as <samp>VII</samp>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setcounter&lbrace;section&rbrace;&lbrace;5&rbrace;
+\addtocounter&lbrace;section&rbrace;&lbrace;2&rbrace;
+Here it is in Roman: \Roman&lbrace;section&rbrace;.
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005crefstepcounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\refstepcounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\stepcounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\addtocounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\refstepcounter</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="476" mergedindex="cp">\refstepcounter</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\refstepcounter&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Globally increments the value of <var>counter</var> by one, as does
+<code>\stepcounter</code> (<pxref label="_005cstepcounter"><xrefnodename>\stepcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>). The difference is that this
+command resets the value of any counter numbered within it. (For the
+definition of &textldquo;counters numbered within&textrdquo;, <pxref label="_005cnewcounter"><xrefnodename>\newcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>.)
+</para>
+<para>In addition, this command also defines the current <code>\ref</code> value
+to be the result of <code>\thecounter</code>.
+</para>
+<para>While the counter value is set globally, the <code>\ref</code> value is set
+locally, i.e., inside the current group.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cstepcounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\stepcounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\day &amp; \month &amp; \year</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\refstepcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\stepcounter</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="477" mergedindex="cp">\stepcounter</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\stepcounter&lbrace;<var>counter</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Globally adds one to <var>counter</var> and resets all counters numbered
+within it. (For the definition of &textldquo;counters numbered within&textrdquo;,
+<pxref label="_005cnewcounter"><xrefnodename>\newcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>.)
+</para>
+<para>This command differs from <code>\refstepcounter</code> in that this one does
+not influence references&nbsp;&textmdash; it does not define the current
+<code>\ref</code> value to be the result of <code>\thecounter</code>
+(<pxref label="_005crefstepcounter"><xrefnodename>\refstepcounter</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear" spaces=" "><nodename>\day &amp; \month &amp; \year</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\stepcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Counters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\day</code> &amp; <code>\month</code> &amp; <code>\year</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="478" mergedindex="cp">\day</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="479" mergedindex="cp">\month</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="480" mergedindex="cp">\year</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>&latex; defines the counter <code>\day</code> for the day of the month
+(nominally with value between 1 and 31), <code>\month</code> for the month of
+the year (nominally with value between 1 and 12), and year <code>\year</code>.
+When &tex; starts up, they are set from the current values on the
+system. The related command <code>\today</code> produces a string
+representing the current day (<pxref label="_005ctoday"><xrefnodename>\today</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>They counters are not updated as the job progresses so in principle they
+could be incorrect by the end. In addition, &tex; does no sanity
+check:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\day=-2 \month=13 \year=-4 \today
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>gives no error or warning and results in the output <samp>-2, -4</samp> (the
+bogus month value produces no output).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Lengths" spaces=" "><nodename>Lengths</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Counters</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Lengths</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="447">lengths, defining and using</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>A <dfn>length</dfn> is a measure of distance. Many &latex; commands take a
+length as an argument.
+</para>
+<para>Lengths come in two types. A <dfn>rigid length</dfn> such as <code>10pt</code>
+does not contain a <code>plus</code> or <code>minus</code> component. (Plain &tex;
+calls this a <dfn>dimen</dfn>.) A <dfn>rubber length</dfn> (what Plain &tex;
+calls a <dfn>skip</dfn>) such as as with <code>1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm</code>
+can contain either or both of those components. In that rubber length,
+the <code>1cm</code> is the <dfn>natural length</dfn> while the other two, the
+<code>plus</code> and <code>minus</code> components, allow &tex; to stretch or
+shrink the length to optimize placement.
+</para>
+<para>The illustrations below use these two commands.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">% make a black bar 10pt tall and #1 wide
+\newcommand&lbrace;\blackbar&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\rule&lbrace;#1&rbrace;&lbrace;10pt&rbrace;&rbrace;
+
+% Make a box around #2 that is #1 wide (excluding the border)
+\newcommand&lbrace;\showhbox&rbrace;[2]&lbrace;%
+ \fboxsep=0pt\fbox&lbrace;\hbox to #1&lbrace;#2&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>This example uses those commands to show a black bar 100&nbsp;points
+long between <samp>XXX</samp> and <samp>YYY</samp>. This length is rigid.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">XXX\showhbox&lbrace;100pt&rbrace;&lbrace;\blackbar&lbrace;100pt&rbrace;&rbrace;YYY
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>As for rubber lengths, shrinking is simpler one: with <code>1cm minus
+0.05cm</code>, the natural length is 1<dmn>cm</dmn> but &tex; can shrink it down
+as far as 0.95<dmn>cm</dmn>. Beyond that, &tex; refuses to shrink any more.
+Thus, below the first one works fine, producing a space of
+98&nbsp;points between the two bars.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">XXX\showhbox&lbrace;300pt&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \blackbar&lbrace;101pt&rbrace;\hspace&lbrace;100pt minus 2pt&rbrace;\blackbar&lbrace;101pt&rbrace;&rbrace;YYY
+
+XXX\showhbox&lbrace;300pt&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \blackbar&lbrace;105pt&rbrace;\hspace&lbrace;100pt minus 1pt&rbrace;\blackbar&lbrace;105pt&rbrace;&rbrace;YYY
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>But the second one gets a warning like <samp>Overfull \hbox (1.0pt too
+wide) detected at line 17</samp>. In the output the first <samp>Y</samp> is
+overwritten by the end of the black bar, because the box&textrsquo;s material is
+wider than the 300<dmn>pt</dmn> allocated, as &tex; has refused to shrink
+the total to less than 309&nbsp;points.
+</para>
+<para>Stretching is like shrinking except that if &tex; is asked to stretch
+beyond the given amount, it will do it. Here the first line is fine,
+producing a space of 110&nbsp;points between the bars.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">XXX\showhbox&lbrace;300pt&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \blackbar&lbrace;95pt&rbrace;\hspace&lbrace;100pt plus 10pt&rbrace;\blackbar&lbrace;95pt&rbrace;&rbrace;YYY
+
+XXX\showhbox&lbrace;300pt&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \blackbar&lbrace;95pt&rbrace;\hspace&lbrace;100pt plus 1pt&rbrace;\blackbar&lbrace;95pt&rbrace;&rbrace;YYY
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>In the second line &tex; needs a stretch of 10&nbsp;points and only
+1&nbsp;point was specified. &tex; stretches the space to the required
+length but it gives you a warning like <samp>Underfull \hbox (badness
+10000) detected at line 22</samp>. (We won&textrsquo;t discuss badness.)
+</para>
+<para>You can put both stretch and shrink in the same length, as in
+<code>1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex</code>.
+</para>
+<para>If &tex; is setting two or more rubber lengths then it allocates the
+stretch or shrink in proportion.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">XXX\showhbox&lbrace;300pt&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \blackbar&lbrace;100pt&rbrace;% left
+ \hspace&lbrace;0pt plus 50pt&rbrace;\blackbar&lbrace;80pt&rbrace;\hspace&lbrace;0pt plus 10pt&rbrace;% middle
+ \blackbar&lbrace;100pt&rbrace;&rbrace;YYY % right
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The left and right bars take up 100&nbsp;points, so the middle needs
+another 100. The middle bar is 80&nbsp;points so the two
+<code>\hspace</code>&textrsquo;s must stretch 20&nbsp;points. Because the two are
+<code>plus 50pt</code> and <code>plus 10pt</code>, &tex; gets 5/6 of the stretch
+from the first space and 1/6 from the second.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>plus</code> or <code>minus</code> component of a rubber length can contain
+a <dfn>fill</dfn> component, as in <code>1in plus2fill</code>. This gives the
+length infinite stretchability or shrinkability so that &tex; could set
+it to any distance. Here the two figures will be equal-spaced across
+the page.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&lbrace;\linewidth&rbrace;
+ \hspace&lbrace;0pt plus 1fill&rbrace;\includegraphics&lbrace;godel.png&rbrace;%
+ \hspace&lbrace;0pt plus 1fill&rbrace;\includegraphics&lbrace;einstein.png&rbrace;%
+ \hspace&lbrace;0pt plus 1fill&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>&tex; actually has three levels of infinity for glue components:
+<code>fil</code>, <code>fill</code>, and <code>filll</code>. The later ones are more
+infinite than the earlier ones. Ordinarily document authors only use
+the middle one (<pxref label="_005chfill"><xrefnodename>\hfill</xrefnodename></pxref> and <pxref label="_005cvfill"><xrefnodename>\vfill</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length, so
+that after <code>\setlength&lbrace;\ylength&rbrace;&lbrace;1in plus 0.2in&rbrace;</code> and
+<code>\setlength&lbrace;\zlength&rbrace;&lbrace;3\ylength&rbrace;</code> then the value of
+<code>\zlength</code> is <code>3in</code>.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Units of length</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The units that &latex; knows.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\setlength</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set the value of a length.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\addtolength</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add a quantity to a length.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\settodepth</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set a length to the depth of something.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\settoheight</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set a length to the height of something.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\settowidth</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set a length to the width of something.
+<!-- c * Predefined lengths:: Lengths that are, like, predefined. -->
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Units-of-length" spaces=" "><nodename>Units of length</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\setlength</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Units of length</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="448">units, of length</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&tex; and &latex; know about these units both inside and outside of
+math mode.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">pt </itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="481" mergedindex="cp">pt</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="449">Point</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-pt">units of length pt</anchor>
+<para>Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two decimal
+places, is 1<dmn>point</dmn> = 2.85<dmn>mm</dmn> = 28.45<dmn>cm</dmn>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">pc</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="450">pica</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="482" mergedindex="cp">pc</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-pc">units of length pc</anchor>
+<para>Pica, 12 pt
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">in </itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="483" mergedindex="cp">in</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="484" mergedindex="cp">inch</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-in">units of length in</anchor>
+<para>Inch, 72.27 pt
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">bp </itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="485" mergedindex="cp">bp</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="451">Big point</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-bp">units of length bp</anchor>
+<para>Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in
+PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">cm </itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="452">Centimeter</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="486" mergedindex="cp">cm</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-cm">units of length cm</anchor>
+<para>Centimeter
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">mm </itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="453">Millimeter</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="487" mergedindex="cp">mm</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-mm">units of length mm</anchor>
+<para>Millimeter
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">dd </itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="454">Didot point</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="488" mergedindex="cp">dd</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-dd">units of length dd</anchor>
+<para>Didot point, 1.07 pt
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">cc </itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="455">Cicero</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="489" mergedindex="cp">cc</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-cc">units of length cc</anchor>
+<para>Cicero, 12 dd
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">sp </itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="456">Scaled point</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="490" mergedindex="cp">sp</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-sp">units of length sp</anchor>
+<para>Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="457">ex</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="458">x-height</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="491" mergedindex="cp">ex</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="459">m-width</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="460">em</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="492" mergedindex="cp">em</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="Lengths_002fem">Lengths/em</anchor>
+<anchor name="Lengths_002fen">Lengths/en</anchor>
+<anchor name="Lengths_002fex">Lengths/ex</anchor>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-em">units of length em</anchor>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-en">units of length en</anchor>
+<anchor name="units-of-length-ex">units of length ex</anchor>
+<para>Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer of
+the font. The x-height of the current font <dfn>ex</dfn>, traditionally the
+height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical
+lengths. Similarly <dfn>em</dfn>, traditionally the width of the capital
+letter M, is often used for horizontal lengths (there is also
+<code>\enspace</code>, which is <code>0.5em</code>). Use of these can help make a
+definition work better across font changes. For example, a definition
+of the vertical space between list items given as
+<code>\setlength&lbrace;\itemsep&rbrace;&lbrace;1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex&rbrace;</code> is more
+likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a definition
+given in points.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="461">mu, math unit</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="493" mergedindex="cp">mu</indexterm></findex>
+<para>In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
+<dfn>mu</dfn> given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family. <xref label="Spacing-in-math-mode"><xrefnodename>Spacing in math mode</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csetlength" spaces=" "><nodename>\setlength</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addtolength</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Units of length</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\setlength</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="494" mergedindex="cp">\setlength</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="462">lengths, setting</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength&lbrace;<var>len</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>amount</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Set the length <var>len</var> to <var>amount</var>. The length name <var>len</var>
+must begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>. The <code>amount</code> can be a
+rubber length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>). It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that &latex; understands (<pxref label="Units-of-length"><xrefnodename>Units of
+length</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Below, with &latex;&textrsquo;s defaults the first paragraph will be indented
+while the second will not.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">I told the doctor I broke my leg in two places.
+
+\setlength&lbrace;\parindent&rbrace;&lbrace;0em&rbrace;
+He said stop going to those places.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>If you did not declare <var>len</var> with <code>\newlength</code>, for example if
+you mistype the above as
+<code>\newlength&lbrace;\specparindent&rbrace;\setlength&lbrace;\sepcparindent&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>,
+then you get an error like <samp>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt;
+\sepcindent</samp>. If you omit the backslash at the start of the length name
+then you get an error like <samp>Missing number, treated as zero. &lt;to be
+read again&gt; \relax l.19 \setlength&lbrace;specparindent&rbrace;&lbrace;0.6\parindent&rbrace;</samp>
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005caddtolength" spaces=" "><nodename>\addtolength</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\settodepth</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\setlength</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addtolength</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="495" mergedindex="cp">\addtolength</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="463">lengths, adding to</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addtolength&lbrace;<var>len</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>amount</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Increment the length <var>len</var> by <var>amount</var>. The length name
+<var>len</var> begins with a backslash, <code>\</code>. The <code>amount</code> is a
+rubber length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>). It can be positive, negative or zero,
+and can be in any units that &latex; understands (<pxref label="Units-of-length"><xrefnodename>Units of
+length</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Below, if <code>\parskip</code> starts with the value <code>0pt plus 1pt</code>
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Doctor: how is the boy who swallowed the silver dollar?
+\addtolength&lbrace;\parskip&rbrace;&lbrace;1pt&rbrace;
+
+Nurse: no change.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>then it has the value <code>1pt plus 1pt</code> for the second paragraph.
+</para>
+<para>If you did not declare the length <var>len</var> with <code>\newlength</code>, if
+for example you mistype the above as
+<code>\addtolength&lbrace;\specparindent&rbrace;&lbrace;0.6\praindent&rbrace;</code>, then you get
+something like <samp>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt; \praindent</samp>.
+If you leave off the backslash at the start of <var>len</var>, as in
+<code>\addtolength&lbrace;parindent&rbrace;&lbrace;1pt&rbrace;</code>, then you get something like
+<samp>You can't use `the letter p' after \advance</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csettodepth" spaces=" "><nodename>\settodepth</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\settoheight</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\addtolength</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\settodepth</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="496" mergedindex="cp">\settodepth</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\settodepth&lbrace;<var>len</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Set the length <var>len</var> to the depth of box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <var>text</var> argument. The length name <var>len</var> must
+begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.
+</para>
+<para>This will show how low the character descenders go.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength&lbrace;\alphabetdepth&rbrace;
+\settodepth&lbrace;\alphabetdepth&rbrace;&lbrace;abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz&rbrace;
+\the\alphabetdepth
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>If you did not set aside the length <var>len</var>, if for example you
+mistype the above as <code>\settodepth&lbrace;\aplhabetdepth&rbrace;&lbrace;abc...&rbrace;</code>,
+then you get something like <samp>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt;
+\aplhabetdepth</samp>. If you leave the backslash out of <var>len</var>, as in
+<code>\settodepth&lbrace;alphabetdepth&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> then you get something like
+<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. &lt;to be read again&gt; \setbox</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csettoheight" spaces=" "><nodename>\settoheight</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\settowidth</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\settodepth</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\settoheight</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="497" mergedindex="cp">\settoheight</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\settoheight&lbrace;<var>len</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;text&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Sets the length <var>len</var> to the height of box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <code>text</code> argument. The length name <var>len</var> must
+begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.
+</para>
+<para>This will show how high the characters go.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength&lbrace;\alphabetheight&rbrace;
+\settoheight&lbrace;\alphabetheight&rbrace;&lbrace;abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz&rbrace;
+\the\alphabetheight
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>If no such length <var>len</var> has been declared with <code>\newlength</code>, if
+for example you mistype as
+<code>\settoheight&lbrace;\aplhabetheight&rbrace;&lbrace;abc...&rbrace;</code>, then you get something
+like <samp>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt; \alphabetheight</samp>. If
+you leave the backslash out of <var>len</var>, as in
+<code>\settoheight&lbrace;alphabetheight&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> then you get something like
+<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. &lt;to be read again&gt; \setbox</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csettowidth" spaces=" "><nodename>\settowidth</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\settoheight</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Lengths</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\settowidth</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="498" mergedindex="cp">\settowidth</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\settowidth&lbrace;<var>len</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Set the length <var>len</var> to the width of the box that &latex; gets on
+typesetting the <var>text</var> argument. The length name <var>len</var> must
+begin with a backslash, <code>\</code>.
+</para>
+<para>This measures the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength&lbrace;\alphabetwidth&rbrace;
+\settowidth&lbrace;\alphabetwidth&rbrace;&lbrace;abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz&rbrace;
+\the\alphabetwidth
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>If no such length <var>len</var> has been set aside, if for example you
+mistype the above as <code>\settowidth&lbrace;\aplhabetwidth&rbrace;&lbrace;abc...&rbrace;</code>,
+then you get something like <samp>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt;
+\aplhabetwidth</samp>. If you leave the backslash out of <var>len</var>, as in
+<code>\settoheight&lbrace;alphabetwidth&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> then you get something like
+<samp>Missing number, treated as zero. &lt;to be read again&gt; \setbox</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Making-paragraphs" spaces=" "><nodename>Making paragraphs</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Math formulas</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Lengths</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Making paragraphs</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="464">making paragraphs</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="465">paragraphs</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>To start a paragraph, just type some text. To end the current
+paragraph, put an empty line. This is three paragraphs, separated by
+two empty lines.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession
+of a good fortune, must be in want of a wife.
+
+However little known the feelings or views of such a man may be on his
+first entering a neighbourhood, this truth is so well fixed in the minds
+of the surrounding families, that he is considered the rightful property
+of some one or other of their daughters.
+
+``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day,
+``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?''
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The separator lines must be empty, including not containing a comment
+character, <code>%</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Once &latex; has gathered all of a paragraph&textrsquo;s contents it divides that
+content into lines in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph
+(<pxref label="Line-breaking"><xrefnodename>Line breaking</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don&textrsquo;t put a
+blank line in math mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>); here the line before the
+<code>\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+ 2^&lbrace;|S|&rbrace; &gt; |S|
+
+\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>will get you the error <samp>Missing $ inserted</samp>. Similarly, the blank
+line in this <code>section</code> argument
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section&lbrace;aaa
+
+bbb&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>gets <samp>Runaway argument? &lbrace;aaa ! Paragraph ended before \&arobase;sect was
+complete</samp>.
+</para>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\par</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">End the current paragraph.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\indent &amp; \noindent</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Go into horizontal mode, possibly with an indent.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\parindent &amp; \parskip</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Space added before paragraphs.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Marginal notes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Put remarks in the margin.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cpar" spaces=" "><nodename>\par</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\indent &amp; \noindent</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\par</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="499" mergedindex="cp">\par</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="466">paragraph, ending</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis (note that while reading the input &tex; converts two
+consecutive newlines to a <code>\par</code>):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\par
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>End the current paragraph. The usual way to separate paragraphs is with
+a blank line but the <code>\par</code> command is entirely equivalent. This
+command is robust (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This example uses <code>\par</code> rather than a blank line simply for
+readability.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\syllabusLegalese&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>In LR mode or a vertical mode the <code>\par</code> command does nothing but
+it terminates paragraph mode, switching &latex; to vertical mode
+(<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>You cannot use the <code>\par</code> command in a math mode. You also cannot
+use it in the argument of many commands, such as the <code>\section</code>
+command (<pxref label="Making-paragraphs"><xrefnodename>Making paragraphs</xrefnodename></pxref> and <ref label="_005cnewcommand-_0026-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand &amp;
+\renewcommand</xrefnodename></ref>).
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\par</code> command is not the same as the <code>\paragraph</code>
+command. The latter is, like <code>\section</code> or <code>\subsection</code>, a
+sectioning unit used by the standard &latex; documents
+(<pxref label="_005csubsubsection-_0026-_005cparagraph-_0026-_005csubparagraph"><xrefnodename>\subsubsection &amp; \paragraph &amp; \subparagraph</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\par</code> command is not the same as <code>\newline</code> or the line
+break double backslash, <code>\\</code>. The difference is that <code>\par</code>
+ends the paragraph, not just the line, and also triggers the addition of
+the between-paragraph vertical space <code>\parskip</code> (<pxref label="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"><xrefnodename>\parindent
+&amp; \parskip</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The output from this example
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">xyz
+
+\setlength&lbrace;\parindent&rbrace;&lbrace;3in&rbrace;
+\setlength&lbrace;\parskip&rbrace;&lbrace;5in&rbrace;
+\noindent test\indent test1\par test2
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>is: after <samp>xyz</samp> there is a vertical skip of 5&nbsp;inches and then
+<samp>test</samp> appears, aligned with the left margin. On the same line,
+there is an empty horizontal space of 3&nbsp;inches and then
+<samp>test1</samp> appears. Finally. there is a vertical space of
+5&nbsp;inches, followed by a fresh paragraph with a paragraph indent of
+3&nbsp;inches, and then &latex; puts the text <samp>test2</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cindent-_0026-_005cnoindent" spaces=" "><nodename>\indent &amp; \noindent</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\parindent &amp; \parskip</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\par</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\indent</code> &amp; <code>\noindent</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="500" mergedindex="cp">\indent</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="501" mergedindex="cp">\noindent</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="502" mergedindex="cp">\parindent</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="467">indent, forcing</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\indent
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent> <para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Go into horizontal mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>). The <code>\indent</code> command
+first outputs an empty box whose width is <code>\parindent</code>. These
+commands are robust (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line.
+<xref label="_005cpar"><xrefnodename>\par</xrefnodename></xref> for the difference between this command and <code>\par</code>. To
+start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted
+paragraph, use <code>\noindent</code>.
+</para>
+<para>In the middle of a paragraph the <code>\noindent</code> command has no effect,
+because &latex; is already in horizontal mode there. The
+<code>\indent</code> command&textrsquo;s only effect is to output a space.
+</para>
+<para>This example starts a fresh paragraph.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">... end of the prior paragraph.
+
+\noindent This paragraph is not indented.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>and this continues an interrupted paragraph.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The data
+
+\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;rl&rbrace; ... \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+
+\noindent shows this clearly.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>To omit indentation in the entire document put
+<code>\setlength&lbrace;\parindent&rbrace;&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;</code> in the preamble. If you do that,
+you may want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs,
+<code>\parskip</code> (<pxref label="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip"><xrefnodename>\parindent &amp; \parskip</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="468"><r>package</r>, <code>indentfirst</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="469"><code>indentfirst</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Default &latex; styles have the first paragraph after a section that is
+not indented, as is traditional typesetting in English. To change that,
+look on CTAN for the package <code>indentfirst</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cparindent-_0026-_005cparskip" spaces=" "><nodename>\parindent &amp; \parskip</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Marginal notes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\indent &amp; \noindent</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\parindent</code> &amp; <code>\parskip</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="503" mergedindex="cp">\parindent</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="504" mergedindex="cp">\parskip</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="470">paragraph indentation</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="471">vertical space before paragraphs</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength&lbrace;\parskip&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>horizontal len</var>&rbrace;
+\setlength&lbrace;\parinden&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>vertical len</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Both are a rubber lengths (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>). They give the indentation
+of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages
+(<pxref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></pxref>), and the vertical space between paragraphs.
+</para>
+<para>This, put in the preamble,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength&lbrace;\parindent&rbrace;&lbrace;0em&rbrace;
+\setlength&lbrace;\parskip&rbrace;&lbrace;1ex&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented,
+but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase
+<samp>x</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>In standard &latex; documents, the default value for <code>\parindent</code>
+in one-column documents is <code>15pt</code> when the default text size is
+<code>10pt</code> , <code>17pt</code> for <code>11pt</code>, and <code>1.5em</code> for
+<code>12pt</code>. In two-column documents it is <code>1em</code>. The default
+value for <code>\parskip</code> in &latex;&textrsquo;s standard document styles is
+<code>0pt plus1pt</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Marginal-notes" spaces=" "><nodename>Marginal notes</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\parindent &amp; \parskip</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Marginal notes</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="472">marginal notes</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="473">notes in the margin</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="474">remarks in the margin</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="505" mergedindex="cp">\marginpar</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\marginpar&lbrace;<var>right</var>&rbrace;
+\marginpar[<var>left</var>]&lbrace;<var>right</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Create a note in the margin. The first line of the note will have the
+same baseline as the line in the text where the <code>\marginpar</code>
+occurs.
+</para>
+<para>The margin that &latex; uses for the note depends on the current layout
+(<pxref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></pxref>) and also on <code>\reversemarginpar</code>
+(see below). If you are using one-sided layout (document option
+<code>oneside</code>) then it goes in the right margin. If you are using
+two-sided layout (document option <code>twoside</code>) then it goes in the
+outside margin. If you are in two-column layout (document option
+<code>twocolumn</code>) then it goes in the nearest margin.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="506" mergedindex="cp">\reversemarginpar</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="507" mergedindex="cp">\normalmarginpar</indexterm></findex>
+<para>If you declare <code>\reversemarginpar</code> then &latex; will place
+subsequent marginal notes in the opposite margin to that given in the
+prior paragraph. Revert that to the default position with
+<code>\normalmarginpar</code>.
+</para>
+<para>When you specify the optional argument <var>left</var> then it is used for
+a note in the left margin, while the mandatory argument <var>right</var> is
+used for a note in the right margin.
+</para>
+<para>Normally, a note&textrsquo;s first word will not be hyphenated. You can enable
+hyphenation there by beginning <var>left</var> or <var>right</var> with
+<code>\hspace&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="508" mergedindex="cp">\marginparpush</indexterm>\marginparpush</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="marginal-notes-marginparpush">marginal notes marginparpush</anchor>
+<para>Minimum vertical space between notes; default <samp>7pt</samp> for
+<samp>12pt</samp> documents, <samp>5pt</samp> else.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="509" mergedindex="cp">\marginparsep</indexterm>\marginparsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="marginal-notes-marginparsep">marginal notes marginparsep</anchor>
+<para>Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default
+<samp>11pt</samp> for <samp>10pt</samp> documents, <samp>10pt</samp> else.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="510" mergedindex="cp">\marginparwidth</indexterm>\marginparwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="marginal-notes-marginparwidth">marginal notes marginparwidth</anchor>
+<para>Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided <samp>10pt</samp> document
+is <samp>90pt</samp>, <samp>83pt</samp> for <samp>11pt</samp>, and <samp>68pt</samp> for
+<samp>12pt</samp>; <samp>17pt</samp> more in each case for a two-sided document.
+In two column mode, the default is <samp>48pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>The standard &latex; routine for marginal notes does not prevent
+notes from falling off the bottom of the page.
+<!-- c @TeX{} FAQ entry on this topic (xx when there): -->
+<!-- c @url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=marginparside}. -->
+<!-- c (+marginfix) -->
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Math-formulas" spaces=" "><nodename>Math formulas</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Modes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Making paragraphs</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Math formulas</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="475">math formulas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="476">formulas, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="477">math mode, entering</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="511" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>math</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="512" mergedindex="cp"><code>math</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="513" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>displaymath</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="514" mergedindex="cp"><code>displaymath</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="515" mergedindex="cp"><r>environment</r>, <code>equation</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="516" mergedindex="cp"><code>equation</code> <r>environment</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+
+<para>Produce mathematical text by putting &latex; into math mode or display
+math mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>). This example shows both.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The wave equation for \( u \) is
+\begin&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+ \frac&lbrace;\partial^2u&rbrace;&lbrace;\partial t^2&rbrace; = c^2\nabla^2u
+\end&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+where \( \nabla^2 \) is the spatial Laplacian and \( c \) is constant.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Math mode is for inline mathematics. In the above example it is invoked
+by the starting <code>\(</code> and finished by the matching ending <code>\)</code>.
+Display math mode is for displayed equations and here is invoked by the
+<code>displaymath</code> environment. Note that any mathematical text
+whatever, including mathematical text consisting of just one character,
+is handled in math mode.
+</para>
+<para>When in math mode or display math mode, &latex; handles many aspects of
+your input text differently than in other text modes. For example,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">contrast x+y with \( x+y \)
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>in math mode the letters are in italics and the spacing around the plus
+sign is different.
+</para>
+<para>There are three ways to make inline formulas, to put &latex; in math
+mode.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\( <var>mathematical material</var> \)
+$ <var>mathematical material</var> $
+\begin&lbrace;math&rbrace; <var>mathematical material</var> \end&lbrace;math&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The first form is preferred and the second is quite common, but the
+third form is rarely used. You can sometimes use one and sometimes
+another, as in <code>\(x\) and $y$</code>. You can use these in paragraph
+mode or in LR mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>To make displayed formulas, put &latex; into display math mode with
+either:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+ <var>mathematical material</var>
+\end&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+ <var>mathematical material</var>
+\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>(<pxref label="displaymath"><xrefnodename>displaymath</xrefnodename></pxref>, <pxref label="equation"><xrefnodename>equation</xrefnodename></pxref>). The only difference is that
+with the <code>equation</code> environment, &latex; puts a formula number
+alongside the formula. The construct <code>\[ <var>math</var> \]</code> is
+equivalent to <code>\begin&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace; <var>math</var>
+\end&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;</code>. These environments can only be used in paragraph
+mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="517" mergedindex="cp">\displaystyle</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some differences.
+One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts; in display
+math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they are closer
+together.
+</para>
+<para>Sometimes you want the display math typographical treatment to happen in
+the inline math mode. For this, the <code>\displaystyle</code> declaration
+forces the size and style of the formula to be that of
+<code>displaymath</code>. Thus <code>\(\displaystyle \sum_&lbrace;n=0&rbrace;^\infty
+x_n\)</code> will have the limits above and below the summation sign, not next
+to it. Another example is that
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;r|cc&rbrace;
+ \textsc&lbrace;Name&rbrace; &amp;\textsc&lbrace;Series&rbrace; &amp;\textsc&lbrace;Sum&rbrace; \\ \hline
+ Arithmetic &amp;\( a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b) \)
+ &amp;\( na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac&lbrace;b&rbrace;&lbrace;2&rbrace;\) \\
+ Geometric &amp;\( a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^&lbrace;n-1&rbrace; \)
+ &amp;\(\displaystyle a\cdot\frac&lbrace;1-b^n&rbrace;&lbrace;1-b&rbrace;\) \\
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>because it has no <code>\displaystyle</code>, the <samp>Arithmetic</samp> line&textrsquo;s
+fraction will be scrunched. But, because of its <code>\displaystyle</code>,
+the <samp>Geometric</samp> line&textrsquo;s fraction will be easy to read, with
+characters the same size as in the rest of the line.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="478"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="479"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="480"><r>package</r>, <code>amsfonts</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="481"><code>amsfonts</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="482"><r>package</r>, <code>mathtools</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="483"><code>mathtools</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of
+packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics,
+<file>amsmath</file> and <file>amssymb</file> (also be aware of the <file>mathtools</file>
+package that is an extension to, and loads, <file>amsmath</file>). New
+documents that will have mathematical text should use these packages.
+Descriptions of these packages is outside the scope of this document;
+see their documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Subscripts &amp; superscripts</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Also known as exponent or index.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Math symbols</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Various mathematical squiggles.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Math functions</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Math function names like sin and exp.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Math accents</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Accents in math.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Over- and Underlining</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Things over or under formulas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Spacing in math mode</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Thick, medium, thin, and negative spaces.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Math miscellany</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stuff that doesn&textrsquo;t fit anywhere else.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Subscripts-_0026-superscripts" spaces=" "><nodename>Subscripts &amp; superscripts</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Math symbols</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Subscripts &amp; superscripts</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="484">superscript</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="485">subscript</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="486">exponent</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="518" mergedindex="cp">_</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="519" mergedindex="cp">^</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis (in math mode or display math mode), one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><var>base</var>^<var>exp</var>
+<var>base</var>^&lbrace;<var>exp</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><var>base</var>_<var>exp</var>
+<var>base</var>_&lbrace;<var>exp</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Make <var>exp</var> appear as a superscript of <var>base</var> (with the caret
+character,&nbsp;<code>^</code>) or a subscript (with
+underscore,&nbsp;<code>_</code>).
+</para>
+<para>In this example the <code>0</code>&textrsquo;s and <code>1</code>&textrsquo;s are subscripts while the
+<code>2</code>&textrsquo;s are superscripts.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\( (x_0+x_1)^2 \leq (x_0)^2+(x_1)^2 \)
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>To have the subscript or superscript contain more than one character,
+surround the expression with curly braces, as in <code>e^&lbrace;-2x&rbrace;</code>.
+This example&textrsquo;s fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression
+for the exponent.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+ (3^3)^3=27^3=19\,683
+ \qquad
+ 3^&lbrace;(3^3)&rbrace;=3^&lbrace;27&rbrace;=7\,625\,597\,484\,987
+\end&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>&latex; knows how to handle a superscript on a superscript, or a
+subscript on a subscript, or supers on subs, or subs on supers. So,
+expressions such as <code>e^&lbrace;x^2&rbrace;</code> and <code>x_&lbrace;i_0&rbrace;</code> give correct
+output. Note the use in those expressions of curly braces to give the
+<var>base</var> a determined <var>exp</var>. If you enter <code>\(3^3^3\)</code> then
+you get <samp>Double superscript</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a
+superscript. In this example the integral has both. They come out in
+the correct place without any author intervention.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+ \int_&lbrace;x=a&rbrace;^b f'(x)\,dx = f(b)-f(a)
+\end&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Note the parentheses around <code>x=a</code> to make the entire expression a
+subscript.
+</para>
+<para>To put a superscript or subscript before a symbol, use a construct like
+<code>&lbrace;&rbrace;_t K^2</code>. The empty curly braces <code>&lbrace;&rbrace;</code> give the
+subscript something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally
+attaching to a prior symbols.
+</para>
+<para>Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or
+display math mode, as in <code>the expression x^2</code>, will get you
+the error <samp>Missing $ inserted</samp>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="487"><r>package</r>, <code>mhchem</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="488"><code>mhchem</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is to
+typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as
+<file>mhchem</file>; see CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Math-symbols" spaces=" "><nodename>Math symbols</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Math functions</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Subscripts &amp; superscripts</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Math symbols</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="489">math symbols</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="490">symbols, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="491">greek letters</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="492"><r>package</r>, <code>symbols</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="493"><code>symbols</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+
+<para>&latex; provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that
+anyone uses. For example, if you include <code>$\pi$</code> in your source,
+you will get the pi symbol <U>03C0</U>. See the <file>Comprehensive
+&latex; Symbol List</file> at
+<url><urefurl>https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+<para>Here is a list of commonly-used symbols. It is by no means exhaustive.
+Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its symbol class,
+which determines the spacing around it, is given in parenthesis. Unless
+said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can be used only in math
+mode. To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current
+mode, see <ref label="_005censuremath"><xrefnodename>\ensuremath</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<!-- c xx Add Negation: for negations of relevant symbols -->
+<!-- c Useful: http://www.w3.org/TR/WD-math-970515/section6.html -->
+
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="520" mergedindex="cp">\|</indexterm>\|</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2225</U> Parallel (relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\parallel</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="521" mergedindex="cp">\aleph</indexterm>\aleph</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2135</U> Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="522" mergedindex="cp">\alpha</indexterm>\alpha</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B1</U> Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="523" mergedindex="cp">\amalg</indexterm>\amalg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A3F</U> Disjoint union (binary)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="524" mergedindex="cp">\angle</indexterm>\angle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2220</U> Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than
+sign&nbsp;<code>&lt;</code> and angle bracket&nbsp;<code>\langle</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="525" mergedindex="cp">\approx</indexterm>\approx</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2248</U> Almost equal to (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="526" mergedindex="cp">\ast</indexterm>\ast</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2217</U> Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed
+(binary). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>*</code>, which is often a superscript or
+subscript, as in the Kleene star. Similar:&nbsp;<code>\star</code>, which is
+five-pointed, and is sometimes used as a general binary operation, and
+sometimes reserved for cross-correlation.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="527" mergedindex="cp">\asymp</indexterm>\asymp</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>224D</U> Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="528" mergedindex="cp">\backslash</indexterm>\backslash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>\ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus&nbsp;<code>\setminus</code>, and
+<code>\textbackslash</code> for backslash outside of math mode.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="529" mergedindex="cp">\beta</indexterm>\beta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B2</U> Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="530" mergedindex="cp">\bigcap</indexterm>\bigcap</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C2</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
+binary intersection&nbsp;<code>\cap</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="531" mergedindex="cp">\bigcirc</indexterm>\bigcirc</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>26AA</U> Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function
+composition&nbsp;<code>\circ</code>.
+<!-- c bb Best unicode symbol for this? -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="532" mergedindex="cp">\bigcup</indexterm>\bigcup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C3</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary
+union&nbsp;<code>\cup</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="533" mergedindex="cp">\bigodot</indexterm>\bigodot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A00</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="534" mergedindex="cp">\bigoplus</indexterm>\bigoplus</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A01</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="535" mergedindex="cp">\bigotimes</indexterm>\bigotimes</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A02</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="536" mergedindex="cp">\bigtriangledown</indexterm>\bigtriangledown</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25BD</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down
+(operator).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="537" mergedindex="cp">\bigtriangleup</indexterm>\bigtriangleup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25B3</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up (operator).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="538" mergedindex="cp">\bigsqcup</indexterm>\bigsqcup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A06</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="539" mergedindex="cp">\biguplus</indexterm>\biguplus</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A04</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus
+(operator). (Note that the name has only one p.)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="540" mergedindex="cp">\bigvee</indexterm>\bigvee</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C1</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="541" mergedindex="cp">\bigwedge</indexterm>\bigwedge</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C0</U> Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="542" mergedindex="cp">\bot</indexterm>\bot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22A5</U> Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered
+set, or a contradiction (ordinary). See also&nbsp;<code>\top</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="543" mergedindex="cp">\bowtie</indexterm>\bowtie</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C8</U> Natural join of two relations (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="544" mergedindex="cp">\Box</indexterm>\Box</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25A1</U> Modal operator for necessity; square open box
+(ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
+<!-- c bb Best Unicode equivalent? -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="545" mergedindex="cp">\bullet</indexterm>\bullet</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="494">bullet symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2022</U> Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication
+dot&nbsp;<code>\cdot</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="546" mergedindex="cp">\cap</indexterm>\cap</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2229</U> Intersection of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigcap</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="547" mergedindex="cp">\cdot</indexterm>\cdot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C5</U> Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet
+dot&nbsp;<code>\bullet</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="548" mergedindex="cp">\chi</indexterm>\chi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C7</U> Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="549" mergedindex="cp">\circ</indexterm>\circ</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2218</U> Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar:
+variable-sized operator&nbsp;<code>\bigcirc</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="550" mergedindex="cp">\clubsuit</indexterm>\clubsuit</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2663</U> Club card suit (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="551" mergedindex="cp">\complement</indexterm>\complement</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2201</U> Set complement, used as a superscript as in
+<code>$S^\complement$</code> (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package. Also used:
+<code>$S^&lbrace;\mathsf&lbrace;c&rbrace;&rbrace;$</code> or&nbsp;<code>$\bar&lbrace;S&rbrace;$</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="552" mergedindex="cp">\cong</indexterm>\cong</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2245</U> Congruent (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="553" mergedindex="cp">\coprod</indexterm>\coprod</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2210</U> Coproduct (operator).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="554" mergedindex="cp">\cup</indexterm>\cup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>222A</U> Union of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigcup</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="555" mergedindex="cp">\dagger</indexterm>\dagger</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2020</U> Dagger relation (binary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="556" mergedindex="cp">\dashv</indexterm>\dashv</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22A3</U> Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation). Similar:
+turnstile&nbsp;<code>\vdash</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="557" mergedindex="cp">\ddagger</indexterm>\ddagger</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2021</U> Double dagger relation (binary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="558" mergedindex="cp">\Delta</indexterm>\Delta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>0394</U> Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="559" mergedindex="cp">\delta</indexterm>\delta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B4</U> Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="560" mergedindex="cp">\Diamond</indexterm>\Diamond</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25C7</U> Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="561" mergedindex="cp">\diamond</indexterm>\diamond</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C4</U> Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large
+diamond&nbsp;<code>\Diamond</code>, circle bullet&nbsp;<code>\bullet</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="562" mergedindex="cp">\diamondsuit</indexterm>\diamondsuit</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2662</U> Diamond card suit (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="563" mergedindex="cp">\div</indexterm>\div</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>00F7</U> Division sign (binary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="564" mergedindex="cp">\doteq</indexterm>\doteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2250</U> Approaches the limit (relation). Similar: geometrically equal
+to&nbsp;<code>\Doteq</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="565" mergedindex="cp">\downarrow</indexterm>\downarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2193</U> Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar:
+<code>\Downarrow</code> double line down arrow.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="566" mergedindex="cp">\Downarrow</indexterm>\Downarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D3</U> Double line down arrow (relation). Similar:
+<code>\downarrow</code> single line down arrow.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="567" mergedindex="cp">\ell</indexterm>\ell</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2113</U> Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="568" mergedindex="cp">\emptyset</indexterm>\emptyset</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2205</U> Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is
+<code>\varnothing</code>.
+<!-- c bb Why Unicode has \revemptyset but no \emptyset? -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="569" mergedindex="cp">\epsilon</indexterm>\epsilon</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03F5</U> Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to
+Greek text letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small
+letter epsilon <code>\varepsilon</code>&nbsp;<U>03B5</U>. Related:
+the set membership relation <code>\in</code>&nbsp;<U>2208</U>.
+<!-- c src: David Carlisle http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/98018/339 and -->
+<!-- c Unicode referenced there asserts varepsilon is much more widely used. -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="570" mergedindex="cp">\equiv</indexterm>\equiv</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2261</U> Equivalence (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="571" mergedindex="cp">\eta</indexterm>\eta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B7</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="572" mergedindex="cp">\exists</indexterm>\exists</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2203</U> Existential quantifier (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="573" mergedindex="cp">\flat</indexterm>\flat</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>266D</U> Musical flat (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="574" mergedindex="cp">\forall</indexterm>\forall</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2200</U> Universal quantifier (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="575" mergedindex="cp">\frown</indexterm>\frown</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2322</U> Downward curving arc (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="576" mergedindex="cp">\Gamma</indexterm>\Gamma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>0393</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="577" mergedindex="cp">\gamma</indexterm>\gamma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B3</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="578" mergedindex="cp">\ge</indexterm>\ge</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2265</U> Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for&nbsp;<code>\geq</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="579" mergedindex="cp">\geq</indexterm>\geq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2265</U> Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for&nbsp;<code>\ge</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="580" mergedindex="cp">\gets</indexterm>\gets</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2190</U> Is assigned the value (relation).
+Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\leftarrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="581" mergedindex="cp">\gg</indexterm>\gg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>226B</U> Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less
+than&nbsp;<code>\ll</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="582" mergedindex="cp">\hbar</indexterm>\hbar</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>210F</U> Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="583" mergedindex="cp">\heartsuit</indexterm>\heartsuit</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2661</U> Heart card suit (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="584" mergedindex="cp">\hookleftarrow</indexterm>\hookleftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21A9</U> Hooked left arrow (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="585" mergedindex="cp">\hookrightarrow</indexterm>\hookrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21AA</U> Hooked right arrow (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="586" mergedindex="cp">\iff</indexterm>\iff</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27F7</U> If and only if (relation). It is <code>\Longleftrightarrow</code>
+with a <code>\thickmuskip</code> on either side.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="587" mergedindex="cp">\Im</indexterm>\Im</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2111</U> Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part&nbsp;<code>\Re</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="588" mergedindex="cp">\imath</indexterm>\imath</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="495">dotless i, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (<pxref label="Math-accents"><xrefnodename>Math
+accents</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="589" mergedindex="cp">\in</indexterm>\in</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2208</U> Set element (relation). See also: lowercase lunate
+epsilon&nbsp;<code>\epsilon</code><U>03F5</U> and small letter script
+epsilon&nbsp;<code>\varepsilon</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="590" mergedindex="cp">\infty</indexterm>\infty</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>221E</U> Infinity (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="591" mergedindex="cp">\int</indexterm>\int</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>222B</U> Integral (operator).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="592" mergedindex="cp">\iota</indexterm>\iota</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B9</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="593" mergedindex="cp">\Join</indexterm>\Join</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2A1D</U> Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain
+&tex;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="594" mergedindex="cp">\jmath</indexterm>\jmath</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="496">dotless j, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (<pxref label="Math-accents"><xrefnodename>Math
+accents</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="595" mergedindex="cp">\kappa</indexterm>\kappa</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BA</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="596" mergedindex="cp">\Lambda</indexterm>\Lambda</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>039B</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="597" mergedindex="cp">\lambda</indexterm>\lambda</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BB</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="598" mergedindex="cp">\land</indexterm>\land</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2227</U> Logical and (binary). This is a synonym for <code>\wedge</code>.
+See also logical or&nbsp;<code>\lor</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="599" mergedindex="cp">\langle</indexterm>\langle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27E8</U> Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar:
+less-than&nbsp;<code>&lt;</code>. Matches&nbsp;<code>\rangle</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="600" mergedindex="cp">\lbrace</indexterm>\lbrace</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>007B</U> Left curly brace
+(opening). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\&lbrace;</code>. Matches&nbsp;<code>\rbrace</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="601" mergedindex="cp">\lbrack</indexterm>\lbrack</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>005B</U> Left square bracket (opening).
+Synonym:&nbsp;<code>[</code>. Matches&nbsp;<code>\rbrack</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="602" mergedindex="cp">\lceil</indexterm>\lceil</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2308</U> Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the bottom
+shaved off (opening). Matches&nbsp;<code>\rceil</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="603" mergedindex="cp">\le</indexterm>\le</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2264</U> Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for&nbsp;<code>\leq</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="604" mergedindex="cp">\leadsto</indexterm>\leadsto</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21DD</U> Squiggly right arrow (relation). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
+To get this symbol outside of math mode you can put
+<code>\newcommand*&lbrace;\Leadsto&rbrace;&lbrace;\ensuremath&lbrace;\leadsto&rbrace;&rbrace;</code> in the
+preamble and then use <code>\Leadsto</code> instead.
+<!-- c bb Best Unicode equivalent? -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="605" mergedindex="cp">\Leftarrow</indexterm>\Leftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D0</U> Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation). Similar:
+single-line left arrow&nbsp;<code>\leftarrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="606" mergedindex="cp">\leftarrow</indexterm>\leftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2190</U> Single-line left arrow (relation).
+Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\gets</code>. Similar: double-line left
+arrow&nbsp;<code>\Leftarrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="607" mergedindex="cp">\leftharpoondown</indexterm>\leftharpoondown</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21BD</U> Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="608" mergedindex="cp">\leftharpoonup</indexterm>\leftharpoonup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21BC</U> Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="609" mergedindex="cp">\Leftrightarrow</indexterm>\Leftrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D4</U> Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation).
+Similar: single-line double headed arrow&nbsp;<code>\leftrightarrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="610" mergedindex="cp">\leftrightarrow</indexterm>\leftrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2194</U> Single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
+double-line double headed arrow&nbsp;<code>\Leftrightarrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="611" mergedindex="cp">\leq</indexterm>\leq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2264</U> Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+for&nbsp;<code>\le</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="612" mergedindex="cp">\lfloor</indexterm>\lfloor</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>230A</U> Left floor bracket (opening). Matches:&nbsp;<code>\floor</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="613" mergedindex="cp">\lhd</indexterm>\lhd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25C1</U> Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary).
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
+<file>amssymb</file> and use&nbsp;<code>\vartriangleleft</code> (which is a relation
+and so gives better spacing).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="614" mergedindex="cp">\ll</indexterm>\ll</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>226A</U> Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater
+than&nbsp;<code>\gg</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="615" mergedindex="cp">\lnot</indexterm>\lnot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>00AC</U> Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\neg</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="616" mergedindex="cp">\longleftarrow</indexterm>\longleftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27F5</U> Long single-line left arrow (relation). Similar: long
+double-line left arrow&nbsp;<code>\Longleftarrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="617" mergedindex="cp">\longleftrightarrow</indexterm>\longleftrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27F7</U> Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: long
+double-line double-headed arrow&nbsp;<code>\Longleftrightarrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="618" mergedindex="cp">\longmapsto</indexterm>\longmapsto</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27FC</U> Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
+(relation). Similar: shorter version&nbsp;<code>\mapsto</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="619" mergedindex="cp">\longrightarrow</indexterm>\longrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27F6</U> Long single-line right arrow (relation). Similar: long
+double-line right arrow&nbsp;<code>\Longrightarrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="620" mergedindex="cp">\lor</indexterm>\lor</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2228</U> Logical or (binary). Synonym: wedge&nbsp;<code>\wedge</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="621" mergedindex="cp">\mapsto</indexterm>\mapsto</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21A6</U> Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar (relation).
+Similar: longer version&nbsp;<code>\longmapsto</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="622" mergedindex="cp">\mho</indexterm>\mho</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2127</U> Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="623" mergedindex="cp">\mid</indexterm>\mid</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2223</U> Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of
+<code>\mid</code> is for a set <code>\&lbrace;\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Similar: <code>\vert</code> and&nbsp;<code>|</code> produce the same single-line
+vertical bar symbol but without any spacing (they fall in class
+ordinary) and you should not use them as relations but instead only as
+ordinals, i.e., footnote symbols. For absolute value, see the entry
+for&nbsp;<code>\vert</code> and for norm see the entry for&nbsp;<code>\Vert</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="624" mergedindex="cp">\models</indexterm>\models</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22A8</U> Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash
+(relation). Similar: long double dash&nbsp;<code>\vDash</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="625" mergedindex="cp">\mp</indexterm>\mp</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2213</U> Minus or plus (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="626" mergedindex="cp">\mu</indexterm>\mu</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BC</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="627" mergedindex="cp">\nabla</indexterm>\nabla</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2207</U> Hamilton&textrsquo;s del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="628" mergedindex="cp">\natural</indexterm>\natural</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>266E</U> Musical natural notation (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="629" mergedindex="cp">\ne</indexterm>\ne</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2260</U> Not equal (relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\neq</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="630" mergedindex="cp">\nearrow</indexterm>\nearrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2197</U> North-east arrow (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="631" mergedindex="cp">\neg</indexterm>\neg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>00AC</U> Logical negation (ordinary).
+Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\lnot</code>. Sometimes instead used for
+negation:&nbsp;<code>\sim</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="632" mergedindex="cp">\neq</indexterm>\neq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2260</U> Not equal (relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\ne</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="633" mergedindex="cp">\ni</indexterm>\ni</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>220B</U> Reflected membership epsilon; has the member
+(relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\owns</code>. Similar: is a member
+of&nbsp;<code>\in</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="634" mergedindex="cp">\not</indexterm>\not</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><!-- c the "@ "s put in spaces so the not slash doesn't hit the next char. -->
+<para><U>0020</U><spacecmd type="spc"/><spacecmd type="spc"/><spacecmd type="spc"/><spacecmd type="spc"/>Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a
+following operator (relation).
+</para>
+<para>Many negated operators are available that don&textrsquo;t require <code>\not</code>,
+particularly with the <file>amssymb</file> package. For example, <code>\notin</code>
+is typographically preferable to <code>\not\in</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="635" mergedindex="cp">\notin</indexterm>\notin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2209</U> Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset
+of&nbsp;<code>\nsubseteq</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="636" mergedindex="cp">\nu</indexterm>\nu</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BD</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="637" mergedindex="cp">\nwarrow</indexterm>\nwarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2196</U> North-west arrow (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="638" mergedindex="cp">\odot</indexterm>\odot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2299</U> Dot inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigodot</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="639" mergedindex="cp">\oint</indexterm>\oint</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>222E</U> Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle
+(operator).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="640" mergedindex="cp">\Omega</indexterm>\Omega</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A9</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="641" mergedindex="cp">\omega</indexterm>\omega</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C9</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="642" mergedindex="cp">\ominus</indexterm>\ominus</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2296</U> Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="643" mergedindex="cp">\oplus</indexterm>\oplus</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2295</U> Plus sign inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigoplus</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="644" mergedindex="cp">\oslash</indexterm>\oslash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2298</U> Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="645" mergedindex="cp">\otimes</indexterm>\otimes</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2297</U> Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary). Similar:
+variable-sized operator&nbsp;<code>\bigotimes</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="646" mergedindex="cp">\owns</indexterm>\owns</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>220B</U> Reflected membership epsilon; has the member
+(relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\ni</code>. Similar: is a member
+of&nbsp;<code>\in</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="647" mergedindex="cp">\parallel</indexterm>\parallel</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2225</U> Parallel (relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\|</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="648" mergedindex="cp">\partial</indexterm>\partial</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2202</U> Partial differential (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="649" mergedindex="cp">\perp</indexterm>\perp</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27C2</U> Perpendicular (relation). Similar:&nbsp;<code>\bot</code> uses the
+same glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class
+ordinary.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="650" mergedindex="cp">\phi</indexterm>\phi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03D5</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<code>\varphi</code>&nbsp;<U>03C6</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="651" mergedindex="cp">\Pi</indexterm>\Pi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A0</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="652" mergedindex="cp">\pi</indexterm>\pi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C0</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<code>\varpi</code>&nbsp;<U>03D6</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="653" mergedindex="cp">\pm</indexterm>\pm</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>00B1</U> Plus or minus (binary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="654" mergedindex="cp">\prec</indexterm>\prec</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>227A</U> Precedes (relation). Similar: less than&nbsp;<code>&lt;</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="655" mergedindex="cp">\preceq</indexterm>\preceq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2AAF</U> Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
+equals&nbsp;<code>\leq</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="656" mergedindex="cp">\prime</indexterm>\prime</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2032</U> Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary).
+Typically used as a superscript: <code>$f^\prime$</code>; <code>$f^\prime$</code>
+and <code>$f'$</code> produce the same result. An advantage of the second
+is that <code>$f'''$</code> produces the desired symbol, that is, the same
+result as <code>$f^&lbrace;\prime\prime\prime&rbrace;$</code>, but uses rather less
+typing. You can only use <code>\prime</code> in math mode. Using the right
+single quote&nbsp;<code>'</code> in text mode produces a different character
+(apostrophe).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="657" mergedindex="cp">\prod</indexterm>\prod</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>220F</U> Product (operator).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="658" mergedindex="cp">\propto</indexterm>\propto</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>221D</U> Is proportional to (relation)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="659" mergedindex="cp">\Psi</indexterm>\Psi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A8</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="660" mergedindex="cp">\psi</indexterm>\psi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C8</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="661" mergedindex="cp">\rangle</indexterm>\rangle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>27E9</U> Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing).
+Similar: greater than&nbsp;<code>&gt;</code>. Matches:<code>\langle</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="662" mergedindex="cp">\rbrace</indexterm>\rbrace</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>007D</U> Right curly brace
+(closing). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\&rbrace;</code>. Matches&nbsp;<code>\lbrace</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="663" mergedindex="cp">\rbrack</indexterm>\rbrack</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>005D</U> Right square bracket
+(closing). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>]</code>. Matches&nbsp;<code>\lbrack</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="664" mergedindex="cp">\rceil</indexterm>\rceil</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2309</U> Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches&nbsp;<code>\lceil</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="665" mergedindex="cp">\Re</indexterm>\Re</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>211C</U> Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary). Related:
+double-line, or blackboard bold, R&nbsp;<code>\mathbb&lbrace;R&rbrace;</code>; to access
+this, load the <file>amsfonts</file> package.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="666" mergedindex="cp">\restriction</indexterm>\restriction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21BE</U> Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym:
+<code>\upharpoonright</code>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="667" mergedindex="cp">\revemptyset</indexterm>\revemptyset</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>29B0</U> Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related:
+<code>\varnothing</code>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>stix</file> package.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="668" mergedindex="cp">\rfloor</indexterm>\rfloor</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>230B</U> Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
+off (closing). Matches&nbsp;<code>\lfloor</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="669" mergedindex="cp">\rhd</indexterm>\rhd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25C1</U> Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary).
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead
+load <file>amssymb</file> and use&nbsp;<code>\vartriangleright</code> (which is a
+relation and so gives better spacing).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="670" mergedindex="cp">\rho</indexterm>\rho</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C1</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<code>\varrho</code>&nbsp;<U>03F1</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="671" mergedindex="cp">\Rightarrow</indexterm>\Rightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D2</U> Implies, right-pointing double line arrow
+(relation). Similar: right single-line arrow&nbsp;<code>\rightarrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="672" mergedindex="cp">\rightarrow</indexterm>\rightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2192</U> Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\to</code>. Similar: right double line
+arrow&nbsp;<code>\Rightarrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="673" mergedindex="cp">\rightharpoondown</indexterm>\rightharpoondown</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21C1</U> Right-pointing harpoon with barb below
+the line (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="674" mergedindex="cp">\rightharpoonup</indexterm>\rightharpoonup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21C0</U> Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the
+line (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="675" mergedindex="cp">\rightleftharpoons</indexterm>\rightleftharpoons</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21CC</U> Right harpoon up above left harpoon down
+(relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="676" mergedindex="cp">\searrow</indexterm>\searrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2198</U> Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="677" mergedindex="cp">\setminus</indexterm>\setminus</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>29F5</U> Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash,
+like \ (binary). Similar: backslash&nbsp;<code>\backslash</code> and also
+<code>\textbackslash</code> outside of math mode.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="678" mergedindex="cp">\sharp</indexterm>\sharp</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>266F</U> Musical sharp (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="679" mergedindex="cp">\Sigma</indexterm>\Sigma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A3</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="680" mergedindex="cp">\sigma</indexterm>\sigma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C3</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<code>\varsigma</code>&nbsp;<U>03C2</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="681" mergedindex="cp">\sim</indexterm>\sim</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>223C</U> Similar, in a relation (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="682" mergedindex="cp">\simeq</indexterm>\simeq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2243</U> Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="683" mergedindex="cp">\smallint</indexterm>\smallint</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>222B</U> Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a
+display (operator).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="684" mergedindex="cp">\smile</indexterm>\smile</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2323</U> Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="685" mergedindex="cp">\spadesuit</indexterm>\spadesuit</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2660</U> Spade card suit (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="686" mergedindex="cp">\sqcap</indexterm>\sqcap</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2293</U> Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar:
+intersection&nbsp;<code>cap</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="687" mergedindex="cp">\sqcup</indexterm>\sqcup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2294</U> Square union symbol (binary). Similar:
+union&nbsp;<code>cup</code>. Related: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigsqcup</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="688" mergedindex="cp">\sqsubset</indexterm>\sqsubset</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>228F</U> Square subset symbol (relation). Similar:
+subset&nbsp;<code>\subset</code>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="689" mergedindex="cp">\sqsubseteq</indexterm>\sqsubseteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2291</U> Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or
+equal to&nbsp;<code>\subseteq</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="690" mergedindex="cp">\sqsupset</indexterm>\sqsupset</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2290</U> Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
+superset&nbsp;<code>\supset</code>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="691" mergedindex="cp">\sqsupseteq</indexterm>\sqsupseteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2292</U> Square superset or equal symbol (binary).
+Similar: superset or equal&nbsp;<code>\supseteq</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="692" mergedindex="cp">\star</indexterm>\star</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22C6</U> Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary
+operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary).
+Similar: the synonyms asterisk&nbsp;<code>*</code> and <code>\ast</code>, which
+are six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript,
+as with the Kleene star.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="693" mergedindex="cp">\subset</indexterm>\subset</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2282</U> Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="694" mergedindex="cp">\subseteq</indexterm>\subseteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2286</U> Subset or equal to (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="695" mergedindex="cp">\succ</indexterm>\succ</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>227B</U> Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less
+than&nbsp;<code>&gt;</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="696" mergedindex="cp">\succeq</indexterm>\succeq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2AB0</U> Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less
+than or equal to&nbsp;<code>\leq</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="697" mergedindex="cp">\sum</indexterm>\sum</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2211</U> Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital
+sigma&nbsp;<code>\Sigma</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="698" mergedindex="cp">\supset</indexterm>\supset</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2283</U> Superset (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="699" mergedindex="cp">\supseteq</indexterm>\supseteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2287</U> Superset or equal to (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="700" mergedindex="cp">\surd</indexterm>\surd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>221A</U> Radical symbol (ordinary). The &latex; command
+<code>\sqrt&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar
+that extends to cover the argument.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="701" mergedindex="cp">\swarrow</indexterm>\swarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2199</U> Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="702" mergedindex="cp">\tau</indexterm>\tau</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C4</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="703" mergedindex="cp">\theta</indexterm>\theta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B8</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+<code>\vartheta</code>&nbsp;<U>03D1</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="704" mergedindex="cp">\times</indexterm>\times</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>00D7</U> Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See
+also&nbsp;<code>\cdot</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="705" mergedindex="cp">\to</indexterm>\to</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2192</U> Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\rightarrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="706" mergedindex="cp">\top</indexterm>\top</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22A4</U> Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set
+(ordinary). See also&nbsp;<code>\bot</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="707" mergedindex="cp">\triangle</indexterm>\triangle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25B3</U> Triangle (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="708" mergedindex="cp">\triangleleft</indexterm>\triangleleft</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25C1</U> Not-filled triangle pointing left
+(binary). Similar:&nbsp;<code>\lhd</code>. For the normal subgroup symbol you
+should load <file>amssymb</file> and use&nbsp;<code>\vartriangleleft</code> (which
+is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="709" mergedindex="cp">\triangleright</indexterm>\triangleright</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>25B7</U> Not-filled triangle pointing right
+(binary). For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
+<file>amssymb</file> and use&nbsp;<code>\vartriangleright</code> (which is a
+relation and so gives better spacing).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="710" mergedindex="cp">\unlhd</indexterm>\unlhd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22B4</U> Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package. For the
+normal subgroup symbol load <file>amssymb</file> and
+use&nbsp;<code>\vartrianglelefteq</code> (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="711" mergedindex="cp">\unrhd</indexterm>\unrhd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22B5</U> Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package. For the
+normal subgroup symbol load <file>amssymb</file> and
+use&nbsp;<code>\vartrianglerighteq</code> (which is a relation and so gives
+better spacing).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="712" mergedindex="cp">\Uparrow</indexterm>\Uparrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D1</U> Double-line upward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line up-pointing
+arrow&nbsp;<code>\uparrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="713" mergedindex="cp">\uparrow</indexterm>\uparrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2191</U> Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges
+(relation). Similar: double-line up-pointing
+arrow&nbsp;<code>\Uparrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="714" mergedindex="cp">\Updownarrow</indexterm>\Updownarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21D5</U> Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+arrow&nbsp;<code>\updownarrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="715" mergedindex="cp">\updownarrow</indexterm>\updownarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2195</U> Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow
+(relation). Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+arrow&nbsp;<code>\Updownarrow</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="716" mergedindex="cp">\upharpoonright</indexterm>\upharpoonright</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>21BE</U> Up harpoon, with barb on right side
+(relation). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>&backslashchar;restriction</code>.
+Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="717" mergedindex="cp">\uplus</indexterm>\uplus</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>228E</U> Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in
+the middle (binary). Similar: union&nbsp;<code>\cup</code>. Related:
+variable-sized operator&nbsp;<code>\biguplus</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="718" mergedindex="cp">\Upsilon</indexterm>\Upsilon</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03A5</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="719" mergedindex="cp">\upsilon</indexterm>\upsilon</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C5</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="720" mergedindex="cp">\varepsilon</indexterm>\varepsilon</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B5</U> Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is
+more widely used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
+<code>\epsilon</code>&nbsp;<U>03F5</U>. Related: set
+membership&nbsp;<code>\in</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="721" mergedindex="cp">\vanothing</indexterm>\vanothing</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2205</U> Empty set symbol. Similar: <code>\emptyset</code>. Related:
+<code>\revemptyset</code>. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the <file>amssymb</file> package.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="722" mergedindex="cp">\varphi</indexterm>\varphi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C6</U> Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <code>\phi</code>&nbsp;<U>03D5</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="723" mergedindex="cp">\varpi</indexterm>\varpi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03D6</U> Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <code>\pi</code>&nbsp;<U>03C0</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="724" mergedindex="cp">\varrho</indexterm>\varrho</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03F1</U> Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+The non-variant form is <code>\rho</code>&nbsp;<U>03C1</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="725" mergedindex="cp">\varsigma</indexterm>\varsigma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03C2</U> Variant on the lowercase Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+<code>\sigma</code>&nbsp;<U>03C3</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="726" mergedindex="cp">\vartheta</indexterm>\vartheta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03D1</U> Variant on the lowercase Greek letter
+(ordinary). The non-variant form is
+<code>\theta</code>&nbsp;<U>03B8</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="727" mergedindex="cp">\vdash</indexterm>\vdash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>22A2</U> Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash
+(relation). Similar: turnstile rotated a
+half-circle&nbsp;<code>\dashv</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="728" mergedindex="cp">\vee</indexterm>\vee</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2228</U> Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related:
+logical and&nbsp;<code>\wedge</code>. Similar: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigvee</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="729" mergedindex="cp">\Vert</indexterm>\Vert</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2016</U> Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
+bar&nbsp;<code>\vert</code>.
+</para>
+<para>For a norm symbol, you can use the <file>mathtools</file> package and put in
+your preamble
+<code>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm&lbrace;\lVert&rbrace;&lbrace;\rVert&rbrace;</code>. This gives you
+three command variants for double-line vertical bars that are correctly
+horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred
+version <code>$\norm*&lbrace;M^\perp&rbrace;$</code> then the height of the vertical bars
+will match the height of the argument, whereas with
+<code>\norm&lbrace;M^\perp&rbrace;</code> the bars do not grow with the height of the
+argument but instead are the default height, and <code>\norm[<var>size
+command</var>]&lbrace;M^\perp&rbrace;</code> also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
+the size given in the <var>size command</var>, e.g., <code>\Bigg</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="730" mergedindex="cp">\vert</indexterm>\vert</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>007C</U> Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line
+vertical bar&nbsp;<code>\Vert</code>. For such that, as in the definition of a
+set, use&nbsp;<code>\mid</code> because it is a relation.
+</para>
+<para>For absolute value you can use the <file>mathtools</file> package and in your
+preamble put
+<code>\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs&lbrace;\lvert&rbrace;&lbrace;\rvert&rbrace;</code>. This gives you
+three command variants for single-line vertical bars that are correctly
+horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred
+version <code>$\abs*&lbrace;\frac&lbrace;22&rbrace;&lbrace;7&rbrace;&rbrace;$</code> then the height of the
+vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas with
+<code>\abs&lbrace;\frac&lbrace;22&rbrace;&lbrace;7&rbrace;&rbrace;</code> the bars do not grow with the height of
+the argument but instead are the default height, and
+<code>\abs[<var>size command</var>]&lbrace;\frac&lbrace;22&rbrace;&lbrace;7&rbrace;&rbrace;</code> also gives bars that
+do not grow but are set to the size given in the <var>size command</var>,
+e.g., <code>\Bigg</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="731" mergedindex="cp">\wedge</indexterm>\wedge</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2227</U> Logical and (binary). Synonym:&nbsp;<code>\land</code>. See also
+logical or <code>\vee</code>. Similar: variable-sized
+operator&nbsp;<code>\bigwedge</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="732" mergedindex="cp">\wp</indexterm>\wp</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2118</U> Weierstrass p (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="733" mergedindex="cp">\wr</indexterm>\wr</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>2240</U> Wreath product (binary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="734" mergedindex="cp">\Xi</indexterm>\Xi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>039E</U> uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="735" mergedindex="cp">\xi</indexterm>\xi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03BE</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="736" mergedindex="cp">\zeta</indexterm>\zeta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><U>03B6</U> Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>The following symbols are most often used in plain text but &latex;
+provides versions to use in mathematical text.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="737" mergedindex="cp">\mathdollar</indexterm>\mathdollar</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Dollar sign in math mode: $.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="738" mergedindex="cp">\mathparagraph</indexterm>\mathparagraph</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, <U>00B6</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="739" mergedindex="cp">\mathsection</indexterm>\mathsection</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Section sign in math mode <U>00A7</U>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="740" mergedindex="cp">\mathsterling</indexterm>\mathsterling</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sterling sign in math mode: &pound;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="741" mergedindex="cp">\mathunderscore</indexterm>\mathunderscore</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Underscore in math mode: _.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Blackboard bold</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Doublestruck characters.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Calligraphic</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Cursive characters.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Symbols in boldface.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Dots</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Ellipses, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Blackboard-bold" spaces=" "><nodename>Blackboard bold</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Calligraphic</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Math symbols</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Blackboard bold</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="497">blackboard bold</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="498">doublestruck</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;amssymb&rbrace; % in preamble
+ ...
+\mathbb&lbrace;<var>uppercase-letter</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Provide blackboard bold symbols, sometimes also known as doublestruck
+letters, used to denote number sets such as the natural numbers, the
+integers, etc.
+</para>
+<para>Here
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\( \forall n \in \mathbb&lbrace;N&rbrace;, n^2 \geq 0 \)
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>the <code>\mathbb&lbrace;N&rbrace;</code> gives blackboard bold symbol <U>2115</U>
+representing the natural numbers.
+</para>
+<para>If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an error
+but you get strange results, including unexpected characters.
+</para>
+<para>There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the
+capital letters; look on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="Calligraphic" spaces=" "><nodename>Calligraphic</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Blackboard bold</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math symbols</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Calligraphic</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="499">calligraphic fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="500">script fonts</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="501">fonts, script</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\mathcal&lbrace;<var>uppercase-letters</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Use a script-like font.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the graph identifier is output in a cursive font.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Let the graph be \( \mathcal&lbrace;G&rbrace; \).
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not get
+an error. Instead you get unexpected output. For instance,
+<code>\mathcal&lbrace;g&rbrace;</code> outputs a close curly brace symbol, while
+<code>\mathcal&lbrace;+&rbrace;</code> outputs a plus sign.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cboldmath-_0026-_005cunboldmath" spaces=" "><nodename>\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Dots</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Calligraphic</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math symbols</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\boldmath</code> &amp; <code>\unboldmath</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="502">boldface mathematics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="503">symbols, boldface</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="742" mergedindex="cp">\boldmath</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="743" mergedindex="cp">\unboldmath</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\boldmath \( <var>math</var> \)
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\unboldmath \( <var>math</var> \)
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="744" mergedindex="cp">\boldmath</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="745" mergedindex="cp">\unboldmath</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Declarations to change the letters and symbols in <var>math</var> to be in
+a bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular
+(non-bold) default. They must be used when not in math mode or display
+math mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>). Both commands are fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>In this example each <code>\boldmath</code> command takes place inside an
+<code>\mbox</code>,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">we have $\mbox&lbrace;\boldmath \( v \)&rbrace; = 5\cdot\mbox&lbrace;\boldmath \( u \)$&rbrace;$
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>which means <code>\boldmath</code> is only called in a text mode, here LR
+mode, and explains why &latex; must switch to math mode to set <code>v</code>
+and <code>u</code>.
+</para>
+<para>If you use either command inside math mode, as with <code>Trouble: \(
+\boldmath x \)</code>, then you get something like <samp>LaTeX Font Warning:
+Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11</samp> and <samp>LaTeX
+Font Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line
+11</samp>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="504"><r>package</r>, <code>bm</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="505"><code>bm</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>There are many issues with <code>\boldmath</code>. New documents should use
+the <file>bm</file> package provided by the &latex; Project team. A complete
+description is outside the scope of this document (see the full
+documentation on CTAN) but even this small example
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;bm&rbrace; % in preamble
+...
+we have $\bm&lbrace;v&rbrace; = 5\cdot\bm&lbrace;u&rbrace;$
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>shows that it is an improvement over <code>\boldmath</code>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="Dots" spaces=" "><nodename>Dots</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\boldmath &amp; \unboldmath</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math symbols</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Dots, horizontal or vertical</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="506">ellipses</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="507">dots</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern
+continues.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;array&rbrace;&lbrace;cccc&rbrace;
+ a_&lbrace;0,0&rbrace; &amp;a_&lbrace;0,1&rbrace; &amp;a_&lbrace;0,2&rbrace; &amp;\ldots \\
+ a_&lbrace;1,0&rbrace; &amp;\ddots \\
+ \vdots
+\end&lbrace;array&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>&latex; provides these.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="ellipses-cdots">ellipses cdots</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="746" mergedindex="cp">\cdots</indexterm>\cdots</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line, as
+in <U>22EF</U>. Used as: <code>\( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_&lbrace;n-1&rbrace;
+\)</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="ellipses-ddots">ellipses ddots</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="747" mergedindex="cp">\ddots</indexterm>\ddots</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Diagonal ellipsis, <U>22F1</U>. See the above array example for a
+usage.
+</para>
+<anchor name="ellipses-ldots">ellipses ldots</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="748" mergedindex="cp">\ldots</indexterm>\ldots</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Ellipsis on the baseline, <U>2026</U>. Used as: <code>\(
+x_0,\ldots x_&lbrace;n-1&rbrace; \)</code>. Another example is the above array example. A
+synonym is <code>\mathellipsis</code>. A synonym from the <file>amsmath</file>
+package is <code>\hdots</code>.
+</para>
+<para>You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in
+<code>The gears, brakes, \ldots&lbrace;&rbrace; are all broken</code>. (In a paragraph
+mode or LR mode a synonym for <code>\ldots</code> is <code>\dots</code>.)
+</para>
+<anchor name="ellipses-vdots">ellipses vdots</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="749" mergedindex="cp">\vdots</indexterm>\vdots</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Vertical ellipsis, <U>22EE</U>. See the above array example for a
+usage.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="508"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="509"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The <file>amsmath</file> package has the command <code>\dots</code> to semantically
+mark up ellipses. This example produces two different-looking outputs
+for the first two uses of the <code>\dots</code> command.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;amsmath&rbrace; % in preamble
+ ...
+Suppose that \( p_0, p_1, \dots, p_&lbrace;n-1&rbrace; \) lists all of the primes.
+Observe that \( p_0\cdot p_1 \dots \cdot p_&lbrace;n-1&rbrace; +1 \) is not a
+ multiple of any \( p_i \).
+Conclusion: there are infinitely many primes \( p_0, p_1, \dotsc \).
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>In the first line &latex; looks to the comma following <code>\dots</code> to
+determine that it should output an ellipsis on the baseline. The second
+line has a <code>\cdot</code> following <code>\dots</code> so &latex; outputs an
+ellipsis that is on the math axis, vertically centered. However, the
+third usage has no follow-on character so you have to tell &latex; what
+to do. You can use one of the commands: <code>\dotsc</code> if you need the
+ellipsis appropriate for a comma following, <code>\dotsb</code> if you need
+the ellipses that fits when the dots are followed by a binary operator
+or relation symbol, <code>\dotsi</code> for dots with integrals, or
+<code>\dotso</code> for others.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="Math-functions" spaces=" "><nodename>Math functions</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Math accents</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Math symbols</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Math functions</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="510">math functions</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="511">functions, math</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper
+spacing.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="750" mergedindex="cp">\arccos</indexterm>\arccos</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Inverse cosine
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="751" mergedindex="cp">\arcsin</indexterm>\arcsin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Inverse sine
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="752" mergedindex="cp">\arctan</indexterm>\arctan</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Inverse tangent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="753" mergedindex="cp">\arg</indexterm>\arg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Angle between the real axis and a point in the complex plane
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="754" mergedindex="cp">\bmod</indexterm>\bmod</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Binary modulo operator, used as in <code>\( 5\bmod 3=2 \)</code>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="755" mergedindex="cp">\cos</indexterm>\cos</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Cosine
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="756" mergedindex="cp">\cosh</indexterm>\cosh</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Hyperbolic cosine
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="757" mergedindex="cp">\cot</indexterm>\cot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Cotangent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="758" mergedindex="cp">\coth</indexterm>\coth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Hyperbolic cotangent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="759" mergedindex="cp">\csc</indexterm>\csc</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Cosecant
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="760" mergedindex="cp">\deg</indexterm>\deg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Degrees
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="761" mergedindex="cp">\det</indexterm>\det</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Determinant
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="762" mergedindex="cp">\dim</indexterm>\dim</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Dimension
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="763" mergedindex="cp">\exp</indexterm>\exp</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Exponential
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="764" mergedindex="cp">\gcd</indexterm>\gcd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Greatest common divisor
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="765" mergedindex="cp">\hom</indexterm>\hom</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Homomorphism
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="766" mergedindex="cp">\inf</indexterm>\inf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Infinum
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="767" mergedindex="cp">\ker</indexterm>\ker</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Kernel
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="768" mergedindex="cp">\lg</indexterm>\lg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Base 2 logarithm
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="769" mergedindex="cp">\lim</indexterm>\lim</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Limit
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="770" mergedindex="cp">\liminf</indexterm>\liminf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Limit inferior
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="771" mergedindex="cp">\limsup</indexterm>\limsup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Limit superior
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="772" mergedindex="cp">\ln</indexterm>\ln</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Natural logarithm
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="773" mergedindex="cp">\log</indexterm>\log</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Logarithm
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="774" mergedindex="cp">\max</indexterm>\max</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Maximum
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="775" mergedindex="cp">\min</indexterm>\min</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Minimum
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="776" mergedindex="cp">\pmod</indexterm>\pmod</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Parenthesized modulus, as used in <code>\( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \)</code>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="777" mergedindex="cp">\Pr</indexterm>\Pr</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Probability
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="778" mergedindex="cp">\sec</indexterm>\sec</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Secant
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="779" mergedindex="cp">\sin</indexterm>\sin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sine
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="780" mergedindex="cp">\sinh</indexterm>\sinh</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Hyperbolic sine
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="781" mergedindex="cp">\sup</indexterm>\sup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>sup
+<!-- c don't try to use \sup with dvi/pdf output since that turned into a -->
+<!-- c Texinfo command and it's not worth hassling with different versions -->
+<!-- c when it's just three roman letters anyway. -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="782" mergedindex="cp">\tan</indexterm>\tan</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Tangent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="783" mergedindex="cp">\tanh</indexterm>\tanh</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Hyperbolic tangent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="512"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="513"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The <file>amsmath</file> package adds improvements on some of these, and also
+allows you to define your own. The full documentation is on CTAN, but
+briefly, you can define an identity operator with
+<code>\DeclareMathOperator&lbrace;\identity&rbrace;&lbrace;id&rbrace;</code> that is like the ones
+above but prints as <samp>id</samp>. The starred form
+<code>\DeclareMathOperator*&lbrace;\op&rbrace;&lbrace;op&rbrace;</code> sets any limits above and
+below, as is traditional with <code>\lim</code>, <code>\sup</code>, or <code>\max</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Math-accents" spaces=" "><nodename>Math accents</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Over- and Underlining</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Math functions</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Math accents</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="514">math accents</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="515">accents, mathematical</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters
+in math. These are different from accents in normal text
+(<pxref label="Accents"><xrefnodename>Accents</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="784" mergedindex="cp">\acute</indexterm>\acute</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="516">acute accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math acute accent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="785" mergedindex="cp">\bar</indexterm>\bar</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="517">bar-over accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="518">macron accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math bar-over accent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="786" mergedindex="cp">\breve</indexterm>\breve</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="519">breve accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math breve accent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="787" mergedindex="cp">\check</indexterm>\check</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="520">check accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="521">h<accent type="acute" bracketed="off">a</accent><accent type="caron">c</accent>ek accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math h<accent type="acute" bracketed="off">a</accent><accent type="caron">c</accent>ek (check) accent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="788" mergedindex="cp">\ddot</indexterm>\ddot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="522">double dot accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math dieresis accent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="789" mergedindex="cp">\dot</indexterm>\dot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="523">overdot accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="524">dot over accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math dot accent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="790" mergedindex="cp">\grave</indexterm>\grave</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="525">grave accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math grave accent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="791" mergedindex="cp">\hat</indexterm>\hat</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="526">hat accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="527">circumflex accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math hat (circumflex) accent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="792" mergedindex="cp">\mathring</indexterm>\mathring</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="528">ring accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math ring accent <!-- c don't bother implementing in texinfo -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="793" mergedindex="cp">\tilde</indexterm>\tilde</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="529">tilde accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math tilde accent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="794" mergedindex="cp">\vec</indexterm>\vec</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="530">vector symbol, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math vector symbol
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="795" mergedindex="cp">\widehat</indexterm>\widehat</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="531">wide hat accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math wide hat accent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="796" mergedindex="cp">\widetilde</indexterm>\widetilde</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="532">wide tilde accent, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Math wide tilde accent
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>When you are putting an accent on an i or a j, the tradition is to use
+one without a dot, <code>\imath</code> or <code>jmath</code> (<pxref label="Math-symbols"><xrefnodename>Math symbols</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Over_002d-and-Underlining" spaces=" "><nodename>Over- and Underlining</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Spacing in math mode</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Math accents</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Over- and Underlining</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="533">overlining</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="534">underlining</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or
+putting braces over or under some material.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="797" mergedindex="cp">\underline&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\underline&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Underline <var>text</var>. Works inside math mode, and outside.
+The line is always completely below the text, taking account of
+descenders, so in <code>\(\underline&lbrace;y&rbrace;\)</code> the line is lower than in
+<code>\(\underline&lbrace;x&rbrace;\)</code>. This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="535"><r>package</r>, <code>ulem</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="536"><code>ulem</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Note that the package <file>ulem</file> does text mode underlining and allows
+line breaking as well as a number of other features. See the
+documentation on CTAN. See also&nbsp;<ref label="_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill"><xrefnodename>\hrulefill &amp; \dotfill</xrefnodename></ref> for
+producing a line, for such things as a signature.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="798" mergedindex="cp">\overline&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\overline&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put a horizontal line over <var>text</var>. Works inside math mode, and
+outside. For example, <code>\overline&lbrace;x+y&rbrace;</code>.
+Note that this differs from the command <code>\bar</code> (<pxref label="Math-accents"><xrefnodename>Math
+accents</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="799" mergedindex="cp">\underbrace&lbrace;<var>math</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\underbrace&lbrace;<var>math</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put a brace under <var>math</var>. For example, this
+<code>(1-\underbrace&lbrace;1/2)+(1/2&rbrace;-1/3)</code> emphasizes the telescoping part.
+Attach text to the brace by using subscript, <code>_</code>, or superscript,
+<code>^</code>, as here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+ 1+1/2+\underbrace&lbrace;1/3+1/4&rbrace;_&lbrace;&gt;1/2&rbrace;+
+ \underbrace&lbrace;1/5+1/6+1/7+1/8&rbrace;_&lbrace;&gt;1/2&rbrace;+\cdots
+\end&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The superscript appears on top of the expression, and so can look
+unconnected to the underbrace.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="800" mergedindex="cp">\overbrace&lbrace;<var>math</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\overbrace&lbrace;<var>math</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put a brace over <var>math</var>, as with
+<code>\overbrace&lbrace;x+x+\cdots+x&rbrace;^&lbrace;\mbox&lbrace;\(k\) times&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>. See also
+<code>\underbrace</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="537"><r>package</r>, <code>mathtools</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="538"><code>mathtools</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The package <file>mathtools</file> adds an over- and underbrace, as well as
+some improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Spacing-in-math-mode" spaces=" "><nodename>Spacing in math mode</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Over- and Underlining</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Spacing in math mode</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="539">spacing within math mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="540">math mode, spacing</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>When typesetting mathematics, &latex; puts in spacing according to the
+normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter <code>y=m x</code> then
+&latex; ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x,
+as <math>y=mx</math>.
+</para>
+<para>But &latex;&textrsquo;s rules sometimes need tweaking. For example, in an
+integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the
+<code>f(x)</code> and the <code>dx</code>, here done with the <code>\,</code> command.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>&latex; provides the commands that follow for use in math mode. Many
+of these spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit
+<dfn>mu</dfn>. It is defined as 1/18<dmn>em</dmn>, where the em is taken from the
+current math symbols family (<pxref label="Units-of-length"><xrefnodename>Units of length</xrefnodename></pxref>). Thus, a
+<code>\thickspace</code> is something like 5/18 times the width of
+a&nbsp;<samp>M</samp>.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="801" mergedindex="cp">\;</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="802" mergedindex="cp">\thickspace</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="spacing-in-math-mode-thickspace">spacing in math mode thickspace</anchor>
+<para>Synonym: <code>\thickspace</code>. Normally <code>5.0mu plus 5.0mu</code>. Math
+mode only.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\:</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\&gt;</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="803" mergedindex="cp">\:</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="804" mergedindex="cp">\&gt;</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="805" mergedindex="cp">\medspace</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="spacing-in-math-mode-medspace">spacing in math mode medspace</anchor>
+<para>Synonym: <code>\medspace</code>. Normally <code>4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu</code>.
+Math mode only.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\,</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="806" mergedindex="cp">\,</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="807" mergedindex="cp">\thinspace</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="541">thin space</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="Spacing-in-math-mode_002f_005cthinspace">Spacing in math mode/\thinspace</anchor>
+<anchor name="spacing-in-math-mode-thinspace">spacing in math mode thinspace</anchor>
+<para>Synonym: <code>\thinspace</code>. Normally <code>3mu</code>, which is 1/6<dmn>em</dmn>.
+Can be used in both math mode and text mode (<pxref label="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace"><xrefnodename>\thinspace &amp;
+\negthinspace</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This space is widely used, for instance between the function and the
+infinitesimal in an integral <code>\int f(x)\,dx</code> and, if an author does
+this, before punctuation in a displayed equation.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The antiderivative is
+\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+ 3x^&lbrace;-1/2&rbrace;+3^&lbrace;1/2&rbrace;\,.
+\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\!</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="808" mergedindex="cp">\!</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="809" mergedindex="cp">\negthinspace</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="542">thin space, negative</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="spacing-in-math-mode-negthinspace">spacing in math mode negthinspace</anchor>
+<para>A negative thin space. Normally <code>-3mu</code>. The <code>\!</code> command is
+math mode only but the <code>\negthinspace</code> command is available for
+text mode (<pxref label="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace"><xrefnodename>\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\quad</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="543">quad</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="810" mergedindex="cp">\quad</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="spacing-in-math-mode-quad">spacing in math mode quad</anchor>
+<para>This is 18<dmn>mu</dmn>, that is, 1<dmn>em</dmn>. This is often used for space
+surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space between
+two equations inside a <code>displaymath</code> environment. It is available
+in both text and math mode.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\qquad</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="811" mergedindex="cp">\qquad</indexterm></findex>
+<anchor name="spacing-in-math-mode-qquad">spacing in math mode qquad</anchor>
+<para>A length of 2 quads, that is, 36<dmn>mu</dmn> = 2<dmn>em</dmn>. It is available in
+both text and math mode.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\smash</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Eliminate height or depth of a subformula.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Make empty box with the same size as the argument.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005csmash" spaces=" "><nodename>\smash</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Spacing in math mode</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\smash</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="544">vertical spacing, math mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="545">math mode, vertical space</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\smash&lbrace;<var>subformula</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Typeset <var>subformula</var> as if its height and depth were zero.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the exponential is so tall that without the
+<code>\smash</code> command &latex; would separate its line from the line
+above it, and the uneven line spacing might be unsightly.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">To compute the tetration $\smash&lbrace;2^&lbrace;2^&lbrace;2^2&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;$,
+evaluate from the top down, as $2^&lbrace;2^4&rbrace;=2^&lbrace;16&rbrace;=65536$.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>(Because of the <code>\smash</code> the printed expression could run into the
+line above so you may want to wait until the final version of the
+document to make such adjustments.)
+</para>
+<para>This pictures the effect of <code>\smash</code> by using <code>\fbox</code> to
+surround the box that &latex; will put on the line. The
+<code>\blackbar</code> command makes a bar extending from 10&nbsp;points below
+the baseline to 20&nbsp;points above.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\blackbar&rbrace;&lbrace;\rule[-10pt]&lbrace;5pt&rbrace;&lbrace;30pt&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\fbox&lbrace;\blackbar&rbrace;
+\fbox&lbrace;\smash&lbrace;\blackbar&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The first box that &latex; places is 20&nbsp;points high and
+10&nbsp;points deep. But the second box is treated by &latex; as
+having zero height and zero depth, despite that the ink printed on the
+page still extends well above and below the line.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\smash</code> command appears often in mathematics to adjust the
+size of an element that surrounds a subformula. Here the first radical
+extends below the baseline while the second lies just on the baseline.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+\sqrt&lbrace;\sum_&lbrace;0\leq k&lt; n&rbrace; f(k)&rbrace;
+\sqrt&lbrace;\vphantom&lbrace;\sum&rbrace;\smash&lbrace;\sum_&lbrace;0\leq k&lt; n&rbrace;&rbrace; f(k)&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Note the use of <code>\vphantom</code> to give the <code>\sqrt</code> command an
+argument with the height of the <code>\sum</code> (<pxref label="_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom"><xrefnodename>\phantom &amp; \vphantom
+&amp; \hphantom</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>While most often used in mathematics, the <code>\smash</code> command can
+appear in other contexts. However, it doesn&textrsquo;t change into horizontal
+mode. So if it starts a paragraph then you should first put a
+<code>\leavevmode</code>, as in the bottom line below.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">xxx xxx xxx
+
+\smash&lbrace;yyy&rbrace; % no paragraph indent
+
+\leavevmode\smash&lbrace;zzz&rbrace; % usual paragraph indent
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="546"><r>package</r>, <code>mathtools</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="547"><code>mathtools</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The package <code>mathtools</code> has operators that provide even finer
+control over smashing a subformula box.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cphantom-_0026-_005cvphantom-_0026-_005chphantom" spaces=" "><nodename>\phantom &amp; \vphantom &amp; \hphantom</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\smash</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spacing in math mode</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\phantom</code> &amp; <code>\vphantom</code> &amp; <code>\hphantom</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="548">spacing, math mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="549">horizontal spacing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="550">vertical spacing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="551">math mode, spacing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="552">invisible character</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="553">character, invisible</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\phantom&lbrace;<var>subformula</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\vphantom&lbrace;<var>subformula</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hphantom&lbrace;<var>subformula</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <code>\phantom</code> command creates a box with the same height, depth,
+and width as <var>subformula</var>, but empty. That is, this command causes
+&latex; to typeset the box but not its ink. The <code>\vphantom</code>
+variant also produces an invisible box with the same height and depth as
+<var>subformula</var>, but it has width zero. And <code>\hphantom</code> makes a
+box with the same width as <var>subformula</var> but with height and depth
+zero.
+</para>
+<para>Without the <code>\vphantom</code> in this example, the top bars of the two
+square roots would be at different heights.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\( \sqrt&lbrace;\vphantom&lbrace;a^3&rbrace;a&rbrace;\cdot\sqrt&lbrace;a^3&rbrace; \)
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <code>\vphantom&lbrace;a^3&rbrace;</code> causes the first <code>\sqrt</code> to have inside
+it a box of the same height as the second <code>\sqrt</code>, so &latex;
+makes the bars align.
+</para>
+<para>These commands often are combined with <code>\smash</code>. <xref label="_005csmash"><xrefnodename>\smash</xrefnodename></xref>
+for another example of the use of <code>\vphantom</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="554"><r>package</r>, <code>mathtools</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="555"><code>mathtools</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The three phantom commands appear often but note that &latex; provides
+a suite of other commands to work with box sizes that may be more
+convenient, including <code>\makebox</code> (<pxref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox &amp; \makebox</xrefnodename></pxref>) as well
+as <code>\settodepth</code> (<pxref label="_005csettodepth"><xrefnodename>\settodepth</xrefnodename></pxref>), <code>\settoheight</code>
+(<pxref label="_005csettoheight"><xrefnodename>\settoheight</xrefnodename></pxref>), and <code>\settowidth</code> (<pxref label="_005csettowidth"><xrefnodename>\settowidth</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+In addition, the <file>mathtools</file> package has many commands that offer
+fine-grained control over spacing.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="556"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="557"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>All three commands produce an ordinary box, without any special
+mathematics status. So to do something like attaching a superscript you
+should give it such a status, for example with the <code>\operatorname</code>
+command from the package <file>amsmath</file>.
+</para>
+<para>While most often used in mathematics, these three can appear in other
+contexts. However, they don&textrsquo;t cause &latex; to change into horizontal
+mode. So if one of these starts a paragraph then you should prefix it
+with <code>\leavevmode</code>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="Math-miscellany" spaces=" "><nodename>Math miscellany</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Spacing in math mode</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Math miscellany</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="558">math miscellany</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities. Here are
+some that don&textrsquo;t fit into other categories.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Colon character &amp; \colon</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Colon.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\*</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Discretionary multiplication.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\frac</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Fraction.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\left &amp; \right</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Paired delimiters.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\sqrt</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Radicals.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\stackrel</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Text over a relation.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Colon-character-_0026-_005ccolon" spaces=" "><nodename trailingspaces=" ">Colon character &amp; \colon</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\*</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Colon character <code>:</code> &amp; <code>\colon</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="559">:</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="560">colon character</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="812" mergedindex="cp">:</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="813" mergedindex="cp">\colon</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">:
+\colon
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>In mathematics, the colon character, <code>:</code>, is a relation.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">With side ratios \( 3:4 \) and \( 4:5 \), the triangle is right.
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="561"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="562"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Ordinary &latex; defines <code>\colon</code> to produce the colon character
+with the spacing appropriate for punctuation, as in set-builder notation
+<code>\&lbrace;x\colon 0\leq x&lt;1\&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="563"><r>package</r>, <code>amsmath</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="564"><code>amsmath</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>But the widely-used <file>amsmath</file> package defines <code>\colon</code> for use
+in the definition of functions <code>f\colon D\to C</code>. So if you want
+the colon character as a punctuation then use <code>\mathpunct&lbrace;:&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005c_002a" spaces=" "><nodename trailingspaces=" ">\*</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\frac</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Colon character &amp; \colon</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\*</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="565">multiplication, discretionary</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="566">breaks, multiplication discretionary</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="567">line breaks, multiplication discretionary</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="568">discretionary breaks, multiplication</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="814" mergedindex="cp">\*</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\*
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>A multiplication symbol that allows a line break. If there is a break
+then &latex; puts a <code>\times</code> symbol, <U>00D7</U>, before
+that break.
+</para>
+<para>In <code>\( A_1\* A_2\* A_3\* A_4 \)</code>, if there is no line break then
+&latex; outputs it as though it were <code>\( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \)</code>. If
+a line break does happen, for example between the two middle ones, then
+&latex; sets it like <code>\( A_1 A_2 \times \)</code>, followed by the
+break, followed by <code>\( A_3 A_4 \)</code>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cfrac" spaces=" "><nodename>\frac</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\left &amp; \right</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\*</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\frac</code> </sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="569">fraction</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="815" mergedindex="cp">\frac</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\frac&lbrace;<var>numerator</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>denominator</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produces the fraction. Used as: <code>\begin&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+\frac&lbrace;1&rbrace;&lbrace;\sqrt&lbrace;2\pi\sigma&rbrace;&rbrace; \end&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;</code>. In inline math
+mode it comes out small; see the discussion of <code>\displaystyle</code>
+(<pxref label="Math-formulas"><xrefnodename>Math formulas</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cleft-_0026-_005cright" spaces=" "><nodename>\left &amp; \right</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\sqrt</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\frac</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\left</code> &amp; <code>\right</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="570">delimiters, paired</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="571">paired delimiters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="572">matching parentheses</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="573">matching brackets</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="574">null delimiter</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="816" mergedindex="cp">\left</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="817" mergedindex="cp">\right</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\left <var>delimiter1</var> ... \right <var>delimiter2</var>
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. The delimiters
+are sized according to the math they enclose. This makes a unit vector
+surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+ \left(\begin&lbrace;array&rbrace;&lbrace;c&rbrace;
+ 1 \\
+ 0 \\
+ \end&lbrace;array&rbrace;\right)
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Every <code>\left</code> must have a matching <code>\right</code>. Leaving out the
+<code>\left(</code> in the above gets <samp>Extra \right</samp>. Leaving off the
+<code>\right)</code> gets <samp>You can't use `\eqno' in math mode</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>However, the two delimiters <var>delimiter1</var> and <var>delimiter2</var> need
+not match. A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as
+below. Use a period, <samp>.</samp>, as a null delimiter.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+ f(n)=\left\&lbrace;\begin&lbrace;array&rbrace;&lbrace;ll&rbrace;
+ 1 &amp;\mbox&lbrace;--if \(n=0\)&rbrace; \\
+ f(n-1)+3n^2 &amp;\mbox&lbrace;--else&rbrace;
+ \end&lbrace;array&rbrace;\right.
+\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
+backslash, <code>\&lbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005csqrt" spaces=" "><nodename>\sqrt</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\stackrel</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\left &amp; \right</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\sqrt</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="575">square root</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="576">roots</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="577">radical</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="818" mergedindex="cp">\sqrt</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\sqrt&lbrace;<var>arg</var>&rbrace;
+\sqrt[<var>root-number</var>]&lbrace;<var>arg</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The square root, or optionally other roots, of <var>arg</var>. The optional
+argument <var>root-number</var> gives the root, i.e., enter the cube root of
+<code>x+y</code> as <code>\sqrt[3]&lbrace;x+y&rbrace;</code>.
+The radical grows with the size of <var>arg</var> (as the height of the
+radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets steeper, until for
+a large enough <code>arg</code>, it is vertical).
+</para>
+<para>&latex; has a separate <code>\surd</code> character (<pxref label="Math-symbols"><xrefnodename>Math symbols</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cstackrel" spaces=" "><nodename>\stackrel</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\sqrt</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Math miscellany</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\stackrel</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="578">stack math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="579">relation, text above</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="819" mergedindex="cp">\stackrel</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\stackrel&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>relation</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Put <var>text</var> above <var>relation</var>. To put a function name above an
+arrow enter <code>\stackrel&lbrace;f&rbrace;&lbrace;\longrightarrow&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Modes" spaces=" "><nodename>Modes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Page styles</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Math formulas</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Modes</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="580">modes</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>As &latex; processes your document, at any point it is in one of six
+modes. They fall into three categories of two each, the horizontal
+modes, the math modes, and the vertical modes. Some commands only work
+in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of
+the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.
+</para>
+<itemize commandarg="bullet" endspaces=" ">
+<listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<anchor name="modes-paragraph-mode">modes paragraph mode</anchor>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="581">paragraph mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><dfn>Paragraph mode</dfn> is what &latex; is in when processing ordinary
+text. It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into
+pages. This is the mode &latex; is in most of the time.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="582">left-to-right mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="583">LR mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="modes-lr-mode">modes lr mode</anchor>
+<para><dfn>LR mode</dfn> (for left-to-right mode; in plain &tex; this is called
+<dfn>restricted horizontal mode</dfn>) is in effect when &latex; starts
+making a box with an <code>\mbox</code> command. As in paragraph mode,
+&latex;&textrsquo;s output is a string of words with spaces between them. Unlike
+in paragraph mode, in LR mode &latex; never starts a new line, it just
+keeps going from left to right. (Although &latex; will not complain
+that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to put
+that box into a line, it could very well complain that the finished LR
+box won&textrsquo;t fit there.)
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="584">math mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="modes-math-mode">modes math mode</anchor> <para><dfn>Math mode</dfn> is when &latex; is generating
+an inline mathematical formula.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="585">display math mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><dfn>Display math mode</dfn> is when &latex; is generating a displayed
+mathematical formula. (Displayed formulas differ somewhat from inline
+ones. One example is that the placement of the subscript on <code>\int</code>
+differs in the two situations.)
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="586">vertical mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="modes-vertical-mode">modes vertical mode</anchor>
+<para><dfn>Vertical mode</dfn> is when &latex; is building the list of lines and
+other material making the output page. This is the mode &latex; is in
+when it starts a document.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="587">internal vertical mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="modes-internal-vertical-mode">modes internal vertical mode</anchor>
+<para><dfn>Internal vertical mode</dfn> is in effect when &latex; starts making a
+<code>\vbox</code>. This is the vertical analogue of LR mode.
+</para>
+</listitem></itemize>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>For instance, if you begin a &latex; article with <samp>Let \( x \) be
+...</samp> then these are the modes: first &latex; starts every document in
+vertical mode, then it reads the <samp>L</samp> and switches to paragraph
+mode, then the next switch happens at the <samp>\(</samp> where &latex;
+changes to math mode, and then when it leaves the formula it pops
+back to paragraph mode.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="588">inner paragraph mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="589">outer paragraph mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="modes-inner-paragraph-mode">modes inner paragraph mode</anchor>
+<anchor name="modes-outer-paragraph-mode">modes outer paragraph mode</anchor>
+<para>Paragraph mode has two subcases. If you use a <code>\parbox</code> command
+or a <code>minipage</code> then &latex; is put into paragraph mode. But it
+will not put a page break here. Inside one of these boxes, called a
+<dfn>parbox</dfn>, &latex; is in <dfn>inner paragraph mode</dfn>. Its more usual
+situation, where it can put page breaks, is <dfn>outer paragraph mode</dfn>
+(<pxref label="Page-breaking"><xrefnodename>Page breaking</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\ensuremath</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Ensure that math mode is active.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+<node name="_005censuremath" spaces=" "><nodename>\ensuremath</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">Modes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\ensuremath</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\ensuremath&lbrace;<var>formula</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Ensure that <var>formula</var> is typeset in math mode.
+</para>
+<para>For instance, you can redefine commands that ordinarily can be used only
+in math mode, so that they can be used both in math and in plain text.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\dx&rbrace;&lbrace;\ensuremath&lbrace;dx&rbrace;&rbrace;
+In $\int f(x)\, \dx$, the \dx&lbrace;&rbrace; is an infinitesimal.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Caution: the <code>\ensuremath</code> command is useful but not a panacea.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\alf&rbrace;&lbrace;\ensuremath&lbrace;\alpha&rbrace;&rbrace;
+You get an alpha in text mode: \alf.
+But compare the correct spacing in $\alf+\alf$ with that in \alf+\alf.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Best is to typeset math things in a math mode.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Page-styles" spaces=" "><nodename>Page styles</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Spaces</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Modes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Page styles</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="590">styles, page</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="591">page styles</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The style of a page determines where &latex; places the components of
+that page, such as headers and footers, and the text body. This
+includes pages in the main part of the document but also includes
+special pages such as the title page of a book, a page from an index, or
+the first page of an article.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="592"><r>package</r>, <code>fancyhdr</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="593"><code>fancyhdr</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The package <file>fancyhdr</file> is very helpful for constructing page
+styles. See its documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\maketitle</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Generate a title page.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\pagenumbering</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Set the style used for page numbers.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\pagestyle</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Change the headings/footings style.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\thispagestyle</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Change the headings/footings style for this page.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cmaketitle" spaces=" "><nodename>\maketitle</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\pagenumbering</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Page styles</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\maketitle</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="594">titles, making</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="820" mergedindex="cp">\maketitle</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\maketitle
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Generate a title. In the standard classes the title appears on a
+separate page, except in the <code>article</code> class where it is at the top
+of the first page. (<xref label="Document-class-options"><xrefnodename>Document class options</xrefnodename></xref> for information about
+the <code>titlepage</code> document class option.)
+</para>
+<para>This example shows <code>\maketitle</code> appearing in its usual place,
+immediately after <code>\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;article&rbrace;
+\title&lbrace;Constructing a Nuclear Reactor Using Only Coconuts&rbrace;
+\author&lbrace;Jonas Grumby\thanks&lbrace;%
+ With the support of a Ginger Grant from the Roy Hinkley Society.&rbrace; \\
+ Skipper, \textit&lbrace;Minnow&rbrace;
+ \and
+ Willy Gilligan\thanks&lbrace;%
+ Thanks to the Mary Ann Summers foundation
+ and to Thurston and Lovey Howell.&rbrace; \\
+ Mate, \textit&lbrace;Minnow&rbrace;
+ &rbrace;
+\date&lbrace;1964-Sep-26&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\maketitle
+Just sit right back and you'll hear a tale, a tale of a fateful trip.
+That started from this tropic port, aboard this tiny ship. The mate was
+a mighty sailin' man, the Skipper brave and sure. Five passengers set
+sail that day for a three hour tour. A three hour tour.
+ ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>You tell &latex; the information used to produce the title by making
+the following declarations. These must come before the
+<code>\maketitle</code>, either in the preamble or in the document body.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="821" mergedindex="cp">\author&lbrace;<var>name1</var> \and <var>name2</var> \and ...&rbrace;</indexterm>\author&lbrace;<var>name1</var> \and <var>name2</var> \and ...&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="595">author, for titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="822" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>for <code>\author</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="823" mergedindex="cp">\and <r>for <code>\author</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Required. Declare the document author or authors. The argument is a
+list of authors separated by <code>\and</code> commands. To separate lines
+within a single author&textrsquo;s entry, for instance to give the author&textrsquo;s
+institution or address, use a double backslash, <code>\\</code>. If you omit
+the <code>\author</code> declaration then you get <samp>LaTeX Warning: No
+\author given</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="824" mergedindex="cp">\date&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\date&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="596">date, for titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Optional. Declare <var>text</var> to be the document&textrsquo;s date. The <var>text</var>
+doesn&textrsquo;t need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all. If you
+omit <code>\date</code> then &latex; uses the current date (<pxref label="_005ctoday"><xrefnodename>\today</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+To have no date, instead use <code>\date&lbrace;&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="825" mergedindex="cp">\thanks&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\thanks&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="597">thanks, for titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="598">credit footnote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Optional. Produce a footnote. You can use it in the author information
+for acknowledgements as illustrated above, but you can also use it in
+the title, or any place a footnote makes sense. It can be any text at
+all so you can use it for any purpose, such as to print an email
+address.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="826" mergedindex="cp">\title&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\title&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="599">title, for titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="827" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>for <code>\title</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Required. Declare <var>text</var> to be the title of the document. Get line
+breaks inside <var>text</var> with a double backslash, <code>\\</code>. If you
+omit the <code>\title</code> declaration then you get <samp>LaTeX Error: No
+\title given</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>To make your own title page, see&nbsp;<ref label="titlepage"><xrefnodename>titlepage</xrefnodename></ref>. You can either
+create this as a one-off or you can include it as part of a renewed
+<code>\maketitle</code> command. (Many publishers will provide a class to use
+in place of <code>article</code> that formats the title according to their
+house requirements.)
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cpagenumbering" spaces=" "><nodename>\pagenumbering</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\pagestyle</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\maketitle</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page styles</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\pagenumbering</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="828" mergedindex="cp">\pagenumbering</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="600">page numbering style</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\pagenumbering&lbrace;<var>number-style</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Specifies the style of page numbers, and resets the page number. The
+numbering style is reflected on the page, and also in the table of
+contents and other page references. This declaration has global scope
+so its effect is not delimited by braces or environments.
+</para>
+<para>In this example, before the Main section the pages are numbered
+<samp>a</samp>, etc. Starting on the page containing that section, the pages
+are numbered <samp>1</samp>, etc.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;\pagenumbering&lbrace;alph&rbrace;
+ ...
+\section&lbrace;Main&rbrace;\pagenumbering&lbrace;arabic&rbrace;
+ ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The argument <var>number-style</var> is one of the following (see
+also&nbsp;<ref label="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><xrefnodename>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</xrefnodename></ref>).
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">arabic</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Arabic numerals: 1, 2, &dots;
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">roman</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>lowercase Roman numerals: i, ii, &dots;
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">Roman</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>uppercase Roman numerals: I, II, &dots;
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">alph</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>lowercase letters: a, b, &dots; If you have more than 26 pages then you
+get <samp>LaTeX Error: Counter too large</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">Alph</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>uppercase letters: A, B, &dots; If you have more than 26 pages then you
+get <samp>LaTeX Error: Counter too large</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">gobble</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="601"><r>package</r>, <code>hyperref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="602"><code>hyperref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <para>&latex; does not output a page number, although it
+does get reset. References to that page also are blank. (This does not
+work with the popular package <file>hyperref</file> so to have the page number
+not appear you may want to instead use <code>\pagestyle&lbrace;empty&rbrace;</code> or
+<code>\thispagestyle&lbrace;empty&rbrace;</code>.)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Traditionally, if a document has front matter&textmdash;preface, table of
+contents, etc.&textmdash;then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. The
+main matter of a document uses arabic. <xref label="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter"><xrefnodename>\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter
+&amp; \backmatter</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+<para>If you want to address where the page number appears on the page,
+see&nbsp;<ref label="_005cpagestyle"><xrefnodename>\pagestyle</xrefnodename></ref>. If you want to change the value of page
+number then you will manipulate the <code>page</code> counter
+(<pxref label="Counters"><xrefnodename>Counters</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cpagestyle" spaces=" "><nodename>\pagestyle</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thispagestyle</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\pagenumbering</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page styles</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\pagestyle</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="829" mergedindex="cp">\pagestyle</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="603">header style</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="604">footer style</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="605">running header and footer style</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\pagestyle&lbrace;<var>style</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Declaration that specifies how the page headers and footers are typeset,
+from the current page onwards.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="606"><r>package</r>, <code>fancyhdr</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="607"><code>fancyhdr</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>A discussion with an example is below. Note first that the package
+<file>fancyhdr</file> is now the standard way to manipulate headers and
+footers. New documents that need to do anything other than one of the
+standard options below should use this package. See its documentation
+on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>Values for <var>style</var>:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">plain</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The header is empty. The footer contains only a page number, centered.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">empty</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The header and footer is empty.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">headings</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put running headers and footers on each page. The document style
+specifies what goes in there; see the discussion below.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">myheadings</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Custom headers, specified via the <code>\markboth</code> or the
+<code>\markright</code> commands.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Some discussion of the motivation for &latex;&textrsquo;s mechanism will help you
+work with the options <code>headings</code> or <code>myheadings</code>. The
+document source below produces an article, two-sided, with the pagestyle
+<code>headings</code>. On this document&textrsquo;s left hand pages, &latex; wants (in
+addition to the page number) the title of the current section. On its
+right hand pages &latex; wants the title of the current subsection.
+When it makes up a page, &latex; gets this information from the
+commands <code>\leftmark</code> and <code>\rightmark</code>. So it is up to
+<code>\section</code> and <code>\subsection</code> to store that information there.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass[twoside]&lbrace;article&rbrace;
+\pagestyle&lbrace;headings&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+ ... \section&lbrace;Section 1&rbrace; ... \subsection&lbrace;Subsection 1.1&rbrace; ...
+\section&lbrace;Section 2&rbrace;
+ ...
+\subsection&lbrace;Subsection 2.1&rbrace;
+ ...
+\subsection&lbrace;Subsection 2.2&rbrace;
+ ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Suppose that the second section falls on a left page. Although when the
+page starts it is in the first section, &latex; will put
+<samp>Section&nbsp;2</samp> in the left page header. As to the right header,
+if no subsection starts before the end of the right page then &latex;
+blanks the right hand header. If a subsection does appear before the
+right page finishes then there are two cases. If at least one
+subsection starts on the right hand page then &latex; will put in the
+right header the title of the first subsection starting on that right
+page. If at least one of 2.1, 2.2, &dots;, starts on the left page but
+none starts on the right then &latex; puts in the right hand header the
+title of the last subsection to start, that is, the one in effect during
+the right hand page.
+</para>
+<para>To accomplish this, in a two-sided article, &latex; has <code>\section</code>
+issue a command <code>\markboth</code>, setting <code>\leftmark</code>
+to <samp>Section&nbsp;2</samp> and setting <code>\rightmark</code> to blank.
+And, &latex; has <code>\subsection</code> issue a command <code>\markright</code>,
+setting <code>\rightmark</code> to <samp>Subsection&nbsp;2.1</samp>, etc.
+</para>
+<para>Here are the descriptions of <code>\markboth</code> and <code>\markright</code>:
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="830" mergedindex="cp">\markboth&lbrace;<var>left-head</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>right-head</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\markboth&lbrace;<var>left-head</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>right-head</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sets both the right hand and left hand heading information for either a
+page style of <code>headings</code> or <code>myheadings</code>. A left hand page
+heading <var>left-head</var> is generated by the last <code>\markboth</code>
+command before the end of the page. A right hand page heading
+<var>right-head</var> is generated by the first <code>\markboth</code> or
+<code>\markright</code> that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by
+the last one that came before that page.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="831" mergedindex="cp">\markright&lbrace;<var>right</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\markright&lbrace;<var>right</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cthispagestyle" spaces=" "><nodename>\thispagestyle</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\pagestyle</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Page styles</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thispagestyle</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="832" mergedindex="cp">\thispagestyle</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="608">page style, this page</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\thispagestyle&lbrace;<var>style</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Works in the same way as the <code>\pagestyle</code> (<pxref label="_005cpagestyle"><xrefnodename>\pagestyle</xrefnodename></pxref>),
+except that it changes to <var>style</var> for the current page only. This
+declaration has global scope, so its effect is not delimited by braces
+or environments.
+</para>
+<para>Often the first page of a chapter or section has a different style. For
+example, this &latex; book document has the first page of the first
+chapter in <code>plain</code> style, as is the default (<pxref label="Page-styles"><xrefnodename>Page
+styles</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;book&rbrace;
+\pagestyle&lbrace;headings&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\chapter&lbrace;First chapter&rbrace;
+ ...
+\chapter&lbrace;Second chapter&rbrace;\thispagestyle&lbrace;empty&rbrace;
+ ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <code>plain</code> style has a page number on it, centered in the footer.
+To make the page entirely empty, the command
+<code>\thispagestyle&lbrace;empty&rbrace;</code> immediately follows the second
+<code>\chapter</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Spaces" spaces=" "><nodename>Spaces</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Boxes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Page styles</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Spaces</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="609">spaces</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="610">white space</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. Some of
+these are best suited to mathematical text; see&nbsp;<ref label="Spacing-in-math-mode"><xrefnodename>Spacing in
+math mode</xrefnodename></ref>. Some spacing commands are suitable for both regular text
+and mathematical text; versions of some of these commands are in this
+chapter.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menucomment><pre xml:space="preserve">Horizontal space
+</pre></menucomment><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\enspace &amp; \quad &amp; \qquad</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Traditional horizontal spaces.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\hspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Any horizontal space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\hfill</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stretchable horizontal space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\hss</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Infinitely stretchable/shrinkable horizontal space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\spacefactor</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stretchability of following space
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\(SPACE)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Backslash-space; and explicit space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">~</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Tie, an unbreakable space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">One-sixth of an em, and negative one-sixth.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\/</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Italic correction.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\hrulefill &amp; \dotfill</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stretchable horizontal rule or dots.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menucomment><pre xml:space="preserve">
+Vertical space
+</pre></menucomment><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inter-paragraph vertical spaces.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\bigbreak &amp; \medbreak &amp; \smallbreak</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inter-paragraph space and page breaks.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\strut</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Ensure height of a line.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\vspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Vertical space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\vfill</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stretchable vertical space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\addvspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add arbitrary vertical space if needed.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005censpace-_0026-_005cquad-_0026-_005cqquad" spaces=" "><nodename>\enspace &amp; \quad &amp; \qquad</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hspace</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\enspace</code> &amp; <code>\quad</code> &amp; <code>\qquad</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="833" mergedindex="cp">\enspace</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="834" mergedindex="cp">\quad</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="835" mergedindex="cp">\qquad</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\enspace
+\quad
+\qquad
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Insert a horizontal space of 1/2<dmn>em</dmn>, 1<dmn>em</dmn>, or 2<dmn>em</dmn>. The
+em is a length defined by a font designer, often thought of as being the
+width of a capital&nbsp;M. One advantage of describing space in ems is
+that it can be more portable across documents than an absolute
+measurement such as points (<pxref label="Lengths_002fem"><xrefnodename>Lengths/em</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This puts a suitable gap between two graphics.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ \includegraphics&lbrace;womensmile.png&rbrace;%
+ \qquad\includegraphics&lbrace;mensmile.png&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para><xref label="Spacing-in-math-mode"><xrefnodename>Spacing in math mode</xrefnodename></xref> for <code>\quad</code> and <code>\qquad</code>. These
+are lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice
+in many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with
+<code>\hspace</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005chspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\hspace</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hfill</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\enspace &amp; \quad &amp; \qquad</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hspace</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="836" mergedindex="cp">\hspace</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hspace&lbrace;<var>length</var>&rbrace;
+\hspace*&lbrace;<var>length</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Insert the horizontal space <var>length</var>. The <var>length</var> can be
+positive, negative, or zero; adding negative space is like backspacing.
+It is a rubber length, that is, it may contain a <code>plus</code> or
+<code>minus</code> component, or both (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>). Because the space is
+stretchable and shrinkable, it is sometimes called <dfn>glue</dfn>.
+</para>
+<para>This makes a line with <samp>Name:</samp> an inch from the right margin.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]&lbrace;Name:\hspace&lbrace;1in&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <code>*</code>-version inserts horizontal space that non-discardable.
+More precisely, when &tex; breaks a paragraph into lines any white
+space&textmdash;glues and kerns&textmdash;that come at a line break are discarded. The
+<code>*</code>-version avoids that (technically, it adds a non-discardable
+invisible item in front of the space).
+</para>
+<para>In this example
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\parbox&lbrace;0.8\linewidth&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ Fill in each blank: Four \hspace*&lbrace;1in&rbrace; and seven years ago our
+ fathers brought forth on this continent, a new \hspace*&lbrace;1in&rbrace;,
+ conceived in \hspace*&lbrace;1in&rbrace;, and dedicated to the proposition
+ that all men are created \hspace*&lbrace;1in&rbrace;.&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>the 1&nbsp;inch blank following <samp>conceived in</samp> falls at the start
+of a line. If you erase the <code>*</code> then &latex; discards the blank.
+</para>
+<para>Here, the <code>\hspace</code> separates the three graphics.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ \includegraphics&lbrace;lion.png&rbrace;% comment keeps out extra space
+ \hspace&lbrace;1cm minus 0.25cm&rbrace;\includegraphics&lbrace;tiger.png&rbrace;%
+ \hspace&lbrace;1cm minus 0.25cm&rbrace;\includegraphics&lbrace;bear.png&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Because the argument to each <code>\hspace</code> has <code>minus 0.25cm</code>,
+each can shrink a little if the three figures are too wide. But each
+space won&textrsquo;t shrink more than 0.25<dmn>cm</dmn> (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005chfill" spaces=" "><nodename>\hfill</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hss</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hspace</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hfill</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="837" mergedindex="cp">\hfill</indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="611">stretch, infinite horizontal</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="612">infinite horizontal stretch</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hfill
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but that can stretch
+horizontally as far as needed (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This creates a one-line paragraph with <samp>Name:</samp> on the left side
+of the page and <samp>Quiz One</samp> on the right.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent Name:\hfill Quiz One
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="838" mergedindex="cp">\fill</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The <code>\hfill</code> command is equivalent to <code>\hspace&lbrace;\fill&rbrace;</code> and
+so the space can be discarded at line breaks. To avoid that instead use
+<code>\hspace*&lbrace;\fill&rbrace;</code> (<pxref label="_005chspace"><xrefnodename>\hspace</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Here the graphs are evenly spaced in the middle of the figure.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand*&lbrace;\vcenteredhbox&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;&arobase;&lbrace;&rbrace;c&arobase;&lbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;#1\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;figure&rbrace;
+ \hspace*&lbrace;\fill&rbrace;%
+ \vcenteredhbox&lbrace;\includegraphics&lbrace;graph0.png&rbrace;&rbrace;%
+ \hfill\vcenteredhbox&lbrace;\includegraphics&lbrace;graph1.png&rbrace;&rbrace;%
+ \hspace*&lbrace;\fill&rbrace;%
+ \caption&lbrace;Comparison of two graphs&rbrace; \label&lbrace;fig:twographs&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;figure&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Note the <code>\hspace*</code>&textrsquo;s where the space could otherwise be dropped.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005chss" spaces=" "><nodename>\hss</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hfill</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hss</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="839" mergedindex="cp">\hss</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="613">horizontal space</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="614">horizontal space, stretchable</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="615">space, inserting horizontal</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hss
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a horizontal space that is infinitely shrinkable as well as
+infinitely stretchable (this command is a &tex; primitive). &latex;
+authors should reach first for the <code>\makebox</code> command to get the
+effects of <code>\hss</code> (<pxref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox &amp; \makebox</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Here, the first line&textrsquo;s <code>\hss</code> makes the Z stick out to the right,
+overwriting the Y. In the second line the Z sticks out to the left,
+overwriting the X.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">X\hbox to 0pt&lbrace;Z\hss&rbrace;Y
+X\hbox to 0pt&lbrace;\hss Z&rbrace;Y
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Without the <code>\hss</code> you get something like <samp>Overfull \hbox
+(6.11111pt too wide) detected at line 20</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cspacefactor" spaces=" "><nodename>\spacefactor</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\(SPACE)</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hss</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\spacefactor</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\spacefactor=<var>integer</var>
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="840" mergedindex="cp">\spacefactor</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Influence &latex;&textrsquo;s glue stretch and shrink behavior. Most user-level
+documents do not use this command.
+</para>
+<para>While &latex; is laying out the material, it may stretch or shrink the
+gaps between words. (This space is not a character; it is called the
+<dfn>interword glue</dfn>; <pxref label="_005chspace"><xrefnodename>\hspace</xrefnodename></pxref>). The <code>\spacefactor</code> command
+(from Plain&nbsp;&tex;) allows you to, for instance, have the space
+after a period stretch more than the space after a word-ending letter.
+</para>
+<para>After &latex; places each character, or rule or other box, it sets a
+parameter called the <dfn>space factor</dfn>. If the next thing in the input
+is a space then this parameter affects how much stretching or shrinking
+can happen. A space factor that is larger than the normal value means
+that the glue can stretch more and shrink less. Normally, the space
+factor is 1000. This value is in effect following most characters, and
+any non-character box or math formula. But it is 3000 after a period,
+exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000 after a colon, 1500 after
+a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or closing double quote or single quote. Finally, it is 999
+after a capital letter.
+</para>
+<para>If the space factor&nbsp;<var>f</var> is 1000 then the glue gap will be the
+font&textrsquo;s normal space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is
+3.3333&nbsp;points). Otherwise, if the space factor <var>f</var> is greater
+than 2000 then &tex; adds the font&textrsquo;s extra space value (for Computer
+Modern Roman 10 point this is 1.11111&nbsp;points), and then the font&textrsquo;s
+normal stretch value is multiplied by <math>f /1000</math> and the normal
+shrink value is multiplied by <math>1000/f</math> (for Computer Modern Roman
+10 point these are 1.66666 and 1.11111&nbsp;points).
+</para>
+<para>For example, consider the period ending <code>A man's best friend is his
+dog.</code> After it, &tex; puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the
+glue to stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much, as the glue
+after <code>friend</code>, which does not end in a period.
+</para>
+<para>The rules for space factors are even more complex because they play
+additional roles. In practice, there are two consequences. First, if a
+period or other punctuation is followed by a right parenthesis or
+bracket, or right single or double quote then the spacing effect of that
+period carries through those characters (that is, the following glue
+will have increased stretch and shrink). Second, if
+punctuation comes after a capital letter then its effect is not in place
+so you get an ordinary space. This second case also affects abbreviations
+that do not end in a capital letter (<pxref label="_005c_0040"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>You can only use <code>\spacefactor</code> in paragraph mode or LR mode
+(<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>). You can see the current value with
+<code>\the\spacefactor</code> or <code>\showthe\spacefactor</code>.
+</para>
+<para>(Comment, not really related to <code>\spacefactor</code>: if you get errors
+like <samp>You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode</samp>, or <samp>You
+can't use `\spacefactor' in math mode.</samp>, or <samp>Improper \spacefactor</samp>
+then you have probably tried to redefine an internal command.
+<xref label="_005cmakeatletter-_0026-_005cmakeatother"><xrefnodename>\makeatletter &amp; \makeatother</xrefnodename></xref>.)
+</para>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\&arobase;</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Distinguish sentence-ending periods from abbreviations.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\frenchspacing</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Equal interword and inter-sentence space.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\normalsfcodes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Restore space factor settings to the default.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005c_0040" spaces=" "><nodename trailingspaces=" ">\&arobase;</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\frenchspacing</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\&arobase;</code> </sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="841" mergedindex="cp">\&arobase;</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="842" mergedindex="cp">at-sign</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="616">period, sentence-ending</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="617">period, abbreviation-ending</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="618">period, spacing after</indexterm></cindex>
+<anchor name="_005cAT">\AT</anchor><!-- c old name -->
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><var>capital-letter</var>\&arobase;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Treat a period as sentence-ending, where &latex; would otherwise think
+it is part of an abbreviation. &latex; thinks that a period ends an
+abbreviation if the period comes after a capital letter, and otherwise
+thinks the period ends the sentence. By default, in justifying a line
+&latex; adjusts the space after a sentence-ending period (or a question
+mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than it adjusts the space
+between words (<pxref label="_005cspacefactor"><xrefnodename>\spacefactor</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This example shows the two cases to remember.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The songs \textit&lbrace;Red Guitar&rbrace;, etc.\ are by Loudon Wainwright~III\&arobase;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The second period ends the sentence, despite that it is preceded by a
+capital. We tell &latex; that it ends the sentence by putting
+<code>\&arobase;</code> before it. The first period ends the abbreviation
+<samp>etc.</samp> but not the sentence. The backslash-space, <code>\ </code>,
+produces a mid-sentence space.
+</para>
+<para>So: if you have a capital letter followed by a period that ends the
+sentence, then put <code>\&arobase;</code> before the period. This holds even if
+there is an intervening right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or
+double quote, because the spacing effect of that period carries through
+those characters. For example, this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Use the \textit&lbrace;Instructional Practices Guide&rbrace;,
+(a book by the MAA)\&arobase;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>will have correct inter-sentence spacing after the period.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\&arobase;</code> command is only for a text mode. If you use it outside of
+a text mode then you get <samp>You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical
+mode</samp> (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Comment: the converse case is a period ending an abbreviation whose last
+letter is not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last
+word in the sentence. For that case follow the period with a
+backslash-space, (<code>\ </code>), or a tie, (<code>~</code>), or <code>\&arobase;</code>.
+Examples are <code>Nat.\ Acad.\ Science</code>, and <code>Mr.~Bean</code>, and
+<code>(manure, etc.\&arobase;) for sale</code> (note in the last one that the
+<code>\&arobase;</code> comes before the closing parenthesis).
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cfrenchspacing" spaces=" "><nodename>\frenchspacing</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\normalsfcodes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\&arobase;</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\frenchspacing</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="843" mergedindex="cp">\frenchspacing</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="844" mergedindex="cp">\nonfrenchspacing</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="619">spacing, inter-sentence</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\frenchspacing
+\nonfrenchspacing
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The first declaration causes &latex; to treat spacing between sentences
+in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a sentence.
+The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more
+(<pxref label="_005cspacefactor"><xrefnodename>\spacefactor</xrefnodename></pxref>); this is the default.
+</para>
+<para>Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the
+space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
+exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words
+that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring <code>\frenchspacing</code>
+(the command is from Plain &tex;) switches to the tradition that all
+spaces are treated equally.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cnormalsfcodes" spaces=" "><nodename>\normalsfcodes</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\frenchspacing</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\normalsfcodes</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="845" mergedindex="cp">\normalsfcodes</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="620">spacing, inter-sentence</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\normalsfcodes
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Reset the &latex; space factor values to the default
+(<pxref label="_005cspacefactor"><xrefnodename>\spacefactor</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="_005c_0028SPACE_0029" spaces=" "><nodename trailingspaces=" ">\(SPACE)</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">~</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\spacefactor</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Backslash-space, <code>\ </code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="621">\NEWLINE</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="622">\SPACE</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="623">\TAB</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a
+backslash followed by a space. Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a space. By default it produces white space of length
+3.33333<dmn>pt</dmn> plus 1.66666<dmn>pt</dmn> minus 1.11111<dmn>pt</dmn>.
+</para>
+<para>When you type one or more blanks between words, &latex; produces white
+space. But that is different than an explicit space. This illustrates.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;l&rbrace;
+One blank: makes some space \\
+Three blanks: in a row \\
+Three spaces:\ \ \ in a row \\
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>On the first line &latex; puts some space after the colon. On the
+second line &latex; collapses the three blanks to output one
+whitespace, so you end with the same space after the colon as in the
+first line. &latex; would similarly collapse a blank followed by a
+tab, or a blank and a newline and a blank. However, the bottom line
+asks for three spaces so the white area is wider. That is, the
+backslash-space command creates a fixed amount of horizontal space.
+(Note that you can define a horizontal space of any width at all with
+<code>\hspace</code>; see&nbsp;<ref label="_005chspace"><xrefnodename>\hspace</xrefnodename></ref>.)
+</para>
+<para>The backslash-space command has two main uses. It is often used after
+control sequences to keep them from gobbling the space that follows, as
+in <code>\TeX\ is nice</code>. (But using curly parentheses, as in
+<code>\TeX&lbrace;&rbrace; is best</code>, has the advantage of still working if the next
+character is a period.) The other common use is that it marks a period
+as ending an abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in <code>So
+says Prof.\ Smith</code> (<pxref label="_005c_0040"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Under normal circumstances, <code>\</code><key>tab</key> and <code>\</code><key>newline</key>
+are equivalent to backslash-space, <code>\ </code>.
+</para>
+<!-- c @PkgIndex{xspace} -->
+<!-- c Some individual commands, notably those defined with the @code{xspace}, -->
+<!-- c package do not follow the standard behavior. -->
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_007e" spaces=" "><nodename>~</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\(SPACE)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>~</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="846" mergedindex="cp">~</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="624">tie</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="625">space, hard</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="626">space, unbreakable</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="627">NBSP</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><var>before</var>~<var>after</var>
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The tie character, <code>~</code>, produces a space between <var>before</var> and
+<var>after</var> at which the line will not be broken. By default the white
+space has length 3.33333<dmn>pt</dmn> plus 1.66666<dmn>pt</dmn> minus
+1.11111<dmn>pt</dmn> (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Here &latex; will not break the line between the final two words.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Thanks to Prof.~Lerman.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>In addition, despite the period, &latex; does not use the
+end-of-sentence spacing (<pxref label="_005c_0040"><xrefnodename>\&arobase;</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could cause
+confusion. But they also reduce &latex;&textrsquo;s options when it breaks lines
+into paragraphs, so you can use too many. They are also matters of
+taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers. Nevertheless,
+here are some usage models, many of them from the &tex;book.
+</para>
+<itemize commandarg="bullet" spaces=" " endspaces=" "><itemprepend><formattingcommand command="bullet"/></itemprepend>
+<listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references:
+<code>Chapter~12</code>, or <code>Theorem~\ref&lbrace;th:Wilsons&rbrace;</code>, or
+<code>Figure~\ref&lbrace;fig:KGraph&rbrace;</code>. When cases are enumerated inline:
+<code>(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="628"><r>package</r>, <code>siunitx</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="629"><code>siunitx</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>Between a number and its unit: <code>$745.7.8$~watts</code> (the
+<file>siunitx</file> package has a special facility for this) or
+<code>144~eggs</code>. This includes between a month and a date:
+<code>October~12</code> or <code>12~Oct</code>. In general, in any expressions where
+numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space:
+<code>AD~565</code>, or <code>2:50~pm</code>, or <code>Boeing~747</code>, or
+<code>268~Plains Road</code>, or <code>\$$1.4$~billion</code>.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: <code>equals~$n$</code>, or
+<code>less than~$\epsilon$</code>, or <code>given~$X$</code>, or <code>modulo~$p^e$
+for all large~$n$</code> (but compare <code>is~$15$</code> with <code>is $15$~times
+the height</code>). Between mathematical symbols in apposition with nouns:
+<code>dimension~$d$</code> or <code>function~$f(x)$</code> (but compare <code>with
+length $l$~or more</code>). When a symbol is a tightly bound object of a
+preposition: <code>of~$x$</code>, or <code>from $0$ to~$1$</code>, or <code>in
+common with~$m$</code>.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>Between symbols in series: <code>$1$,~$2$, or~$3$</code> or <code>$1$,~$2$,
+\ldots,~$n$</code>.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>Between a person&textrsquo;s forenames and between multiple surnames:
+<code>Donald~E. Knuth</code>, or <code>Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo</code>, or
+<code>Charles~XII</code> (but you must give TeX places to break the line so
+you may do <code>Charles Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin</code>).
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>Before a dash: <code>pages 12~--14</code> or <code>it is~--- it must be
+said~--- plausible</code>.
+</para>
+</listitem></itemize>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cthinspace-_0026-_005cnegthinspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\/</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">~</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thinspace</code> &amp; <code>\negthinspace</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="847" mergedindex="cp">\thinspace</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="848" mergedindex="cp">\negthinspace</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="630">thin space</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="631">space, thin</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="632">thin space, negative</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="633">space, negative thin</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\thinspace
+\negthinspace
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6<dmn>em</dmn> and
+-1/6<dmn>em</dmn>. These are the text mode equivalents of <code>\,</code> and
+<code>\!</code> (<pxref label="Spacing-in-math-mode_002f_005cthinspace"><xrefnodename>Spacing in math mode/\thinspace</xrefnodename></pxref>). You can use
+<code>\,</code> as a synonym for <code>\thinspace</code> in text mode.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\negthinspace</code> command is used in text mode mostly for
+fiddling with spaces. One common use of <code>\thinspace</code> is as the
+space between nested quotes.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace''
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Another use is that some style guides call for a <code>\thinspace</code>
+between an ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides,
+though, think the three dots are quite enough already). Still another
+use is between initials, as in <code>D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005c_002f" spaces=" "><nodename>\/</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hrulefill &amp; \dotfill</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\thinspace &amp; \negthinspace</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\/</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="849" mergedindex="cp">\/</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="634">italic correction</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><var>before-character</var>\/<var>after-character</var>
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Insert an <dfn>italic correction</dfn>, a small space defined by the font
+designer for each character, to avoid the character colliding with
+whatever follows. When you use <code>\/</code>, &latex; takes the correction
+from the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has been
+applied to the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space.
+</para>
+<para>Here, were it not for the <code>\/</code>, the <var>before-character</var>
+italic&nbsp;f would hit the <var>after-character</var> roman&nbsp;H
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\companylogo&rbrace;&lbrace;&lbrace;\it f&rbrace;\/H&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>because the italic letter leans far to the right.
+</para>
+<para>If <var>after-character</var> is a period or comma then don&textrsquo;t insert an
+italic correction since those punctuation symbols have a very small
+height. However, with semicolons or colons as well as with normal
+letters, the italic correction can help.
+</para>
+<para>When you use commands such as <code>\textit</code> or <code>\itshape</code> to
+change fonts, &latex; will automatically insert any needed italic
+correction (<pxref label="Font-styles"><xrefnodename>Font styles</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Roman characters can also have an italic correction. An example is in
+the name <code>pdf\/\TeX</code>.
+</para>
+<para>There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done
+in a different way.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005chrulefill-_0026-_005cdotfill" spaces=" "><nodename>\hrulefill &amp; \dotfill</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\/</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hrulefill</code> &amp; <code>\dotfill</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="850" mergedindex="cp">\hrulefill</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="851" mergedindex="cp">\dotfill</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hrulefill
+\dotfill
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce an infinite horizontal rubber length (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>) that
+&latex; fills with a rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of
+white space.
+</para>
+<para>This outputs a line 2 inches long.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Name:~\makebox[2in]&lbrace;\hrulefill&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>This example, when placed between blank lines, creates a paragraph that
+is left and right justified and where the middle is filled with evenly
+spaced dots.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent John Aubrey, RN \dotfill&lbrace;&rbrace; Melbury Lodge
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>To make the rule or dots go to the line&textrsquo;s end use <code>\null</code> at the
+start or end.
+</para>
+<para>To change the rule&textrsquo;s thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
+here
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand&lbrace;\hrulefill&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern\z&arobase;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>which changes the default thickness of 0.4<dmn>pt</dmn> to 1<dmn>pt</dmn>.
+Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand&lbrace;\dotfill&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \leavevmode\cleaders\hb&arobase;xt&arobase;1.00em&lbrace;\hss .\hss &rbrace;\hfill\kern\z&arobase;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>which changes the default length of 0.33<dmn>em</dmn> to 1.00<dmn>em</dmn>.
+</para>
+<para>This example produces a line for a signature.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&lbrace;4cm&rbrace;
+ \centering
+ \hrulefill\\
+ Signed
+\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The line is 4<dmn>cm</dmn> long.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip" spaces=" "><nodename>\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\bigbreak &amp; \medbreak &amp; \smallbreak</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hrulefill &amp; \dotfill</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\bigskip</code> &amp; <code>\medskip</code> &amp; <code>\smallskip</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\bigskip
+\medskip
+\smallskip
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce an amount of vertical space, large or medium-sized or
+small. These commands are fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Here the skip suggests the passage of time (from <i>The Golden Ocean</i> by
+O&textrsquo;Brian).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Mr Saumarez would have something rude to say to him, no doubt: he
+was at home again, and it was delightful.
+
+\bigskip
+``A hundred and fifty-seven miles and one third, in twenty-four hours,''
+said Peter.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Each command is associated with a length defined in the document class
+file.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="bigskip">bigskip</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="852" mergedindex="cp">\bigskip</indexterm>\bigskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="853" mergedindex="cp">\bigskipamount</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The same as <code>\vspace&lbrace;\bigskipamount&rbrace;</code>, ordinarily about one line
+space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the <code>book</code> and
+<code>article</code> classes is <code>12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="medskip">medskip</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="854" mergedindex="cp">\medskip</indexterm>\medskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="855" mergedindex="cp">\medskipamount</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The same as <code>\vspace&lbrace;\medskipamount&rbrace;</code>, ordinarily about half of a
+line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the <code>book</code>
+and <code>article</code> classes is <code>6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="smallskip">smallskip</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="856" mergedindex="cp">\smallskip</indexterm>\smallskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="857" mergedindex="cp">\smallskipamount</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The same as <code>\vspace&lbrace;\smallskipamount&rbrace;</code>, ordinarily about a
+quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the
+<code>book</code> and <code>article</code> classes is <code>3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>Because each command is a <code>\vspace</code>, if you use on in mid-paragraph
+then it will insert its vertical space between the line in which you use
+it and the next line, not necessarily at the place that you use it. So
+these are best between paragraphs.
+</para>
+<para>The commands <code>\bigbreak</code>, <code>\medbreak</code>, and <code>\smallbreak</code>
+are similar but also suggest to &latex; that this is a good place to
+put a page break (<pxref label="_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak"><xrefnodename>\bigbreak &amp; \medbreak &amp; \smallbreak</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cbigbreak-_0026-_005cmedbreak-_0026-_005csmallbreak" spaces=" "><nodename>\bigbreak &amp; \medbreak &amp; \smallbreak</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\strut</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\bigbreak</code> &amp; <code>\medbreak</code> &amp; <code>\smallbreak</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\bigbreak
+\medbreak
+\smallbreak
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a vertical space that is big or medium-sized or small, and
+suggest to &latex; that this is a good place to break the page. (The
+associated penalties are -200, -100, and -50.)
+</para>
+<para><xref label="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip"><xrefnodename>\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</xrefnodename></xref>, for more. These commands
+produce the same vertical space but differ in that they also remove a
+preceding vertical space if it is less than what they would insert (as
+with <code>\addvspace</code>). In addition, they terminate a paragraph where
+they are used: this example
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">abc\bigbreak def ghi
+
+jkl mno pqr
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>will output three paragraphs, the first ending in <samp>abc</samp> and the
+second starting, after an extra vertical space and a paragraph indent,
+with <samp>def</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cstrut" spaces=" "><nodename>\strut</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vspace</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\bigbreak &amp; \medbreak &amp; \smallbreak</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\strut</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="858" mergedindex="cp">\strut</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="635">strut</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\strut
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Ensure that the current line has height at least <code>0.7\baselineskip</code>
+and depth at least <code>0.3\baselineskip</code>. Essentially, &latex;
+inserts into the line a rectangle having zero width,
+<code>\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;&lbrace;\baselineskip&rbrace;</code> (<pxref label="_005crule"><xrefnodename>\rule</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+The <code>\baselineskip</code> changes with the current font and fontsize.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the <code>\strut</code> keeps the box inside the frame from
+having zero height.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength&lbrace;\fboxsep&rbrace;&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;\framebox[2in]&lbrace;\strut&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This example has four lists. In the first there is a much bigger gap
+between items 2 and&nbsp;3 than there is between items 1 and&nbsp;2.
+The second list fixes that with a <code>\strut</code> at the end of its first
+item&textrsquo;s second line.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength&lbrace;\fboxsep&rbrace;&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;
+\noindent\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;[t]&lbrace;0.2\linewidth&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+ \item \parbox[t]&lbrace;15pt&rbrace;&lbrace;test \\ test&rbrace;
+ \item test
+ \item test
+\end&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;%
+\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;[t]&lbrace;0.2\linewidth&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+ \item \parbox[t]&lbrace;15pt&rbrace;&lbrace;test \\ test\strut&rbrace;
+ \item test
+ \item test
+\end&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;%
+\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;[t]&lbrace;0.2\linewidth&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+ \item \fbox&lbrace;\parbox[t]&lbrace;15pt&rbrace;&lbrace;test \\ test&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \item \fbox&lbrace;test&rbrace;
+ \item \fbox&lbrace;test&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;%
+\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;[t]&lbrace;0.2\linewidth&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+ \item \fbox&lbrace;\parbox[t]&lbrace;15pt&rbrace;&lbrace;test \\ test\strut&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \item \fbox&lbrace;test&rbrace;
+ \item \fbox&lbrace;test&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;%
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The final two lists use <code>\fbox</code> to show what&textrsquo;s happening. The
+third list&textrsquo;s <code>\parbox</code> goes only to the bottom of its second
+<samp>test</samp>, which happens not have any characters that descend below
+the baseline. The fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed
+extra below-baseline space.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="636"><r>package</r>, <code>TikZ</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="637"><code>TikZ</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="638"><r>package</r>, <code>Asymptote</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="639"><code>Asymptote</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The <code>\strut</code> command is often useful in graphics, such as in
+<file>TikZ</file> or <file>Asymptote</file>. For instance, you may have a command
+such as <code>\graphnode&lbrace;<var>node-name</var>&rbrace;</code> that fits a circle around
+<var>node-name</var>. However, unless you are careful the <var>node-name</var>&textrsquo;s
+<samp>x</samp> and <samp>y</samp> will produce different-diameter circles because
+the characters are different sizes. A careful <code>\graphnode</code> might
+insert a <code>\strut</code>, then <var>node-name</var>, and then draw the circle.
+</para>
+<para>The general approach of using a zero width <code>\rule</code> is useful in
+many circumstances. In this table, the zero-width rule keeps the top of
+the first integral from hitting the <code>\hline</code>. Similarly, the
+second rule keeps the second integral from hitting the first.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;rl&rbrace;
+ \textsc&lbrace;Integral&rbrace; &amp;\textsc&lbrace;Value&rbrace; \\
+ \hline
+ $\int_0^x t\, dt$ &amp;$x^2/2$ \rule&lbrace;0em&rbrace;&lbrace;2.5ex&rbrace; \\
+ $\int_0^x t^2\, dt$ &amp;$x^3/3$ \rule&lbrace;0em&rbrace;&lbrace;2.5ex&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available
+optional argument to put in more vertical room, that won&textrsquo;t work here.
+Changing the first double backslash to something like <code>\\[2.5ex]</code>
+will put the room between the header line and the <code>\hline</code>, and the
+integral would still hit the line.)
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cvspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\vspace</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vfill</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\strut</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vspace</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="859" mergedindex="cp">\vspace</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="640">vertical space</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="641">space, vertical</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\vspace&lbrace;<var>length</var>&rbrace;
+\vspace*&lbrace;<var>length</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Add the vertical space <var>length</var>. The <var>length</var> can be positive,
+negative, or zero. It is a rubber length&textmdash;it may contain a <code>plus</code>
+or <code>minus</code> component (<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This puts space between the two paragraphs.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">And I slept.
+
+\vspace&lbrace;1ex plus 0.5ex&rbrace;
+The new day dawned cold.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>(<xref label="_005cbigskip-_0026-_005cmedskip-_0026-_005csmallskip"><xrefnodename>\bigskip &amp; \medskip &amp; \smallskip</xrefnodename></xref> for common inter-paragraph
+spaces.)
+</para>
+<para>The <code>*</code>-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable. More
+precisely, &latex; discards vertical space at a page break and the
+<code>*</code>-version causes the space to stay. This example leaves space
+between the two questions.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Question: Find the integral of \( 5x^4+5 \).
+
+\vspace*&lbrace;2cm plus 0.5cm&rbrace;
+Question: Find the derivative of \( x^5+5x+9 \).
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>That space will be present even if the page break happens to fall
+between the questions.
+</para>
+<para>If you use <code>\vspace</code> in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in
+horizontal mode) then the space is inserted after the line containing
+the <code>\vspace</code> command; it does not start a new paragraph at the
+<code>\vspace</code> command.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
+the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+1) Who put the bomp in the bomp bah bomp bah bomp?
+\vspace&lbrace;1in plus 1fill&rbrace;
+
+2) Who put the ram in the rama lama ding dong?
+\vspace&lbrace;1in plus 1fill&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cvfill" spaces=" "><nodename>\vfill</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addvspace</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\vspace</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vfill</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="860" mergedindex="cp">\vfill</indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="642">stretch, infinite vertical</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="643">infinite vertical stretch</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\vfill
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length that is
+infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as needed
+(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>It is often used in the same way as <code>\vspace&lbrace;\fill&rbrace;</code>, except that
+<code>\vfill</code> ends the current paragraph whereas <code>\vspace&lbrace;\fill&rbrace;</code>
+adds the infinite vertical space below its line, irrespective of the
+paragraph structure. In both cases that space will disappear at a page
+boundary; to circumvent this see the starred option
+in&nbsp;<ref label="_005cvspace"><xrefnodename>\vspace</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines contain
+the text <samp>Lost Dog!</samp> and the second <samp>Lost Dog!</samp> is exactly
+halfway between them.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+Lost Dog!
+\vfill
+Lost Dog! % perfectly in the middle
+\vfill
+Lost Dog!
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005caddvspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\addvspace</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\vfill</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Spaces</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addvspace</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="861" mergedindex="cp">\addvspace</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="644">vertical space</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="645">space, inserting vertical</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addvspace&lbrace;<var>vert-length</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Add a vertical space of <var>vert-length</var>. However, if there are two or
+more <code>\addvspace</code>&textrsquo;s in a sequence then together they only add the
+space needed to make the natural length equal to the maximum of the
+<var>vert-length</var>&textrsquo;s in that sequence. This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>). The <var>vert-length</var> is a rubber length
+(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This example illustrates. The <code>picture</code> draws a scale. In a
+standard &latex; article the length <code>\baselineskip</code> is 12<dmn>pt</dmn>.
+The two rules here are 22<dmn>pt</dmn> apart: the sum of the
+<code>\baselineskip</code> and the 10<dmn>pt</dmn> from the first <code>addvspace</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;article&rbrace;
+\usepackage&lbrace;color&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\setlength&lbrace;\unitlength&rbrace;&lbrace;2pt&rbrace;%
+\noindent\begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(0,0)%
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,-1)&lbrace;25&rbrace;&lbrace;&lbrace;\color&lbrace;blue&rbrace;\line(1,0)&lbrace;1&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \multiput(0,0)(0,-5)&lbrace;6&rbrace;&lbrace;&lbrace;\color&lbrace;red&rbrace;\line(1,0)&lbrace;2&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;picture&rbrace;%
+\rule&lbrace;0.25\linewidth&rbrace;&lbrace;0.1pt&rbrace;%
+\par\addvspace&lbrace;10pt&rbrace;% \addvspace&lbrace;20pt&rbrace;%
+\par\noindent\rule&lbrace;0.25\linewidth&rbrace;&lbrace;0.1pt&rbrace;%
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Now uncomment the second <code>\addvspace</code>. It does not make the gap
+20<dmn>pt</dmn> longer; instead the gap is the sum of <code>\baselineskip</code>
+and 20<dmn>pt</dmn>. So <code>\addvspace</code> in a sense does the opposite of
+its name &textmdash; it makes sure that multiple vertical spaces do not
+accumulate, but instead that only the largest one is used.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below
+an environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a
+<code>theorem</code> environment begins and ends with <code>\addvspace</code> so
+that two consecutive <code>theorem</code>&textrsquo;s are separated by one vertical
+space, not two.
+</para>
+<para>A error <samp>Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item</samp> pointing to an
+<code>\addvspace</code> means that you were not in vertical mode when you hit
+this command. One way to change that is to precede <code>\addvspace</code>
+with a <code>\par</code> command (<pxref label="_005cpar"><xrefnodename>\par</xrefnodename></pxref>), as in the above example.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Boxes" spaces=" "><nodename>Boxes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Color</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Spaces</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Boxes</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="646">boxes</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<!-- c xx Expand on boxes and glue, for xref from elsewhere. -->
+<para>At its core, &latex; puts things in boxes and then puts the boxes on a
+page. So these commands are central.
+</para>
+<para>There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating boxes.
+One useful adjunct to the commands here is <file>adjustbox</file>.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\mbox &amp; \makebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Horizontal boxes.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\fbox &amp; \framebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Put a frame around a box.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\parbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Box with text in paragraph mode.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\raisebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Raise or lower text.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\sbox &amp; \savebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Like <code>\makebox</code> but save the text for later.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">lrbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Environment version of <code>\sbox</code>.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\usebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Print saved text.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\mbox &amp; \makebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\fbox &amp; \framebox</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\mbox</code> &amp; <code>\makebox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="862" mergedindex="cp">\mbox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="863" mergedindex="cp">\makebox</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="647">box</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="648">make a box</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="649">hyphenation, preventing</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\mbox&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\makebox&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\makebox[<var>width</var>]&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\makebox[<var>width</var>][<var>position</var>]&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Create a box, a container for material. The <var>text</var> is typeset in
+LR mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>) so it is not broken into lines. The
+<code>\mbox</code> command is robust, while <code>\makebox</code> is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Because <code>text</code> is not broken into lines, you can use <code>\mbox</code>
+to prevent hyphenation. In this example, &latex; will not hyphenate
+the table name, <samp>T-4</samp>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">See Table~\mbox&lbrace;T-4&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The first two command versions, <code>\mbox</code> and <code>\makebox</code>, are
+roughly equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the
+<var>text</var>. (They are like plain &tex;&textrsquo;s <code>\hbox</code>.)
+</para>
+<para>In the third version the optional argument <var>width</var> specifies the
+width of the box. Note that the space occupied by the text need not
+equal the width of the box. For one thing, <var>text</var> can be too small;
+this creates a full-line box
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makebox[\linewidth]&lbrace;Chapter Exam&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>with <samp>Chapter Exam</samp> centered. But <var>text</var> can also be too wide
+for <var>width</var>. See the example below of zero-width boxes.
+</para>
+<anchor name="mbox-makebox-depth">mbox makebox depth</anchor>
+<anchor name="mbox-makebox-height">mbox makebox height</anchor>
+<anchor name="mbox-makebox-width">mbox makebox width</anchor>
+<anchor name="mbox-makebox-totalheight">mbox makebox totalheight</anchor>
+<para>In the <var>width</var> argument you can use the following lengths that refer
+to the dimension of the box that &latex; gets on typesetting
+<var>text</var>: <code>\depth</code>, <code>\height</code>, <code>\width</code>,
+<code>\totalheight</code> (this is the box&textrsquo;s height plus its depth). For
+example, to make a box with the text stretched to double the natural
+size you can say this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makebox[2\width]&lbrace;Get a stretcher&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>For the fourth command version the optional argument <var>position</var>
+gives position of the text within the box. It may take the following
+values:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The <var>text</var> is centered (default).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The <var>text</var> is flush left.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Flush right.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">s</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Stretch the interword space in <var>text</var> across the entire <var>width</var>.
+The <var>text</var> must contain stretchable space for this to work. For
+instance, this could head a press release:
+<code>\noindent\makebox[\textwidth][s]&lbrace;\large\hfil IMMEDIATE\hfil
+RELEASE\hfil&rbrace;</code>
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>A common use of <code>\makebox</code> is to make zero-width text boxes. This
+puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\pts&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\makebox[0em][r]&lbrace;#1 points\hspace*&lbrace;1em&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\pts&lbrace;10&rbrace;What is the air-speed velocity of an unladen swallow?
+
+\pts&lbrace;90&rbrace;An African or European swallow?
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="650"><r>package</r>, <code>TikZ</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="651"><code>TikZ</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="652"><r>package</r>, <code>Asymptote</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="653"><code>Asymptote</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The right edge of the output <samp>10 points </samp> (note the ending space)
+will be just before the <samp>What</samp> (note the space after
+<samp>points</samp>). You can use <code>\makebox</code> similarly when making
+graphics, such as in <file>TikZ</file> or <file>Asymptote</file>, where you put the
+edge of the text at a known location, regardless of the length of that
+text.
+</para>
+<para>For boxes with frames see&nbsp;<ref label="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox"><xrefnodename>\fbox &amp; \framebox</xrefnodename></ref>. For colors
+see&nbsp;<ref label="Colored-boxes"><xrefnodename>Colored boxes</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>There is a related version of <code>\makebox</code> that is used within the
+<code>picture</code> environment, where the length is given in terms of
+<code>\unitlength</code> (<pxref label="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\makebox (picture)</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>If you put a double-backslash into <var>text</var> then &latex; will not
+give you a new line; for instance <code>\makebox&lbrace;abc def \\ ghi&rbrace;</code>
+outputs <samp>abc defghi</samp> while <code>\makebox&lbrace;abc def \par ghi&rbrace;</code>
+outputs <samp>abc def ghi</samp>, but neither go to a second line. To get
+multiple lines see&nbsp;<ref label="_005cparbox"><xrefnodename>\parbox</xrefnodename></ref> and&nbsp;<ref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\fbox &amp; \framebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\parbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\mbox &amp; \makebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\fbox</code> &amp; <code>\framebox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="864" mergedindex="cp">\fbox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="865" mergedindex="cp">\framebox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopses, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\fbox&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\framebox&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\framebox[<var>width</var>]&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\framebox[<var>width</var>][<var>position</var>]&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Create a box with an enclosing frame, four lines surrounding the space.
+These commands are the same as <code>\mbox</code> and <code>\makebox</code> except
+for the frame (<pxref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox &amp; \makebox</xrefnodename></pxref>). The <code>\fbox</code> command is
+robust, the <code>\framebox</code> command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\fbox&lbrace;Warning! No work shown, no credit given.&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>&latex; puts the text into a box that cannot be split or hyphenated.
+Around that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four lines making
+a frame.
+</para>
+<para>The first two command invocations, <code>\fbox&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> and
+<code>\framebox&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>, are roughly the same. As to the third and
+fourth invocations, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box
+width as <var>width</var> and the position of the text inside that box as
+<var>position</var>. <xref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox &amp; \makebox</xrefnodename></xref> for the full description but
+here is an example creating an empty box that is 1/4<dmn>in</dmn> wide.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength&lbrace;\fboxsep&rbrace;&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;\framebox[0.25in]&lbrace;\strut&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <code>\strut</code> inserts a vertical height of <code>\baselineskip</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cstrut"><xrefnodename>\strut</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>These parameters determine the frame layout.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="fbox-framebox-fboxrule">fbox framebox fboxrule</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="866" mergedindex="cp">\fboxrule</indexterm>\fboxrule</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="867" mergedindex="cp">frame, line width</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="868" mergedindex="cp">frame rule width</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="654">\fboxrule</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box. The default is
+0.2<dmn>pt</dmn>. Change it with a command such as
+<code>\setlength&lbrace;\fboxrule&rbrace;&lbrace;0.8pt&rbrace;</code> (<pxref label="_005csetlength"><xrefnodename>\setlength</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<anchor name="fbox-framebox-fboxsep">fbox framebox fboxsep</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="869" mergedindex="cp">\fboxsep</indexterm>\fboxsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="870" mergedindex="cp">frame, separation from contents</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="655">\fboxsep</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The distance from the frame to the enclosed box. The default is 3<dmn>pt</dmn>.
+Change it with a command such as <code>\setlength&lbrace;\fboxsep&rbrace;&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;</code>
+(<pxref label="_005csetlength"><xrefnodename>\setlength</xrefnodename></pxref>). Setting it to 0<dmn>pt</dmn> is useful sometimes:
+this will put a frame around the picture with no white border.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">&lbrace;\setlength&lbrace;\fboxsep&rbrace;&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;
+ \framebox&lbrace;%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]&lbrace;prudence.jpg&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The extra curly braces keep the effect of the <code>\setlength</code> local.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>As with <code>\mbox</code> and <code>\makebox</code>, &latex; will not break lines
+in <var>text</var>. But this example has &latex; break lines to make a
+paragraph, and then frame the result.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\framebox&lbrace;%
+ \begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&lbrace;0.6\linewidth&rbrace;
+ My dear, here we must run as fast as we can, just to stay in place.
+ And if you wish to go anywhere you must run twice as fast as that.
+ \end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para><xref label="Colored-boxes"><xrefnodename>Colored boxes</xrefnodename></xref> for colors other than black and white.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>picture</code> environment has a version of this command where the
+units depend on <code>picture</code>&textrsquo;s <code>\unitlength</code> (<pxref label="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\framebox
+(picture)</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cparbox" spaces=" "><nodename>\parbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\raisebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\fbox &amp; \framebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\parbox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="871" mergedindex="cp">\parbox</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="656">paragraph mode</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="657">paragraph, in a box</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\parbox&lbrace;<var>width</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>contents</var>&rbrace;
+\parbox[<var>position</var>]&lbrace;<var>width</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>contents</var>&rbrace;
+\parbox[<var>position</var>][<var>height</var>]&lbrace;<var>width</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>contents</var>&rbrace;
+\parbox[<var>position</var>][<var>height</var>][<var>inner-pos</var>]&lbrace;<var>width</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>contents</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a box of text that is <var>width</var> wide. Use this command to make
+a box of small pieces of text, of a single paragraph. This command is
+fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(0,0)
+ ...
+ \put(1,2)&lbrace;\parbox&lbrace;1.75in&rbrace;&lbrace;\raggedright Because the graph is a line on
+ this semilog paper, the relationship is
+ exponential.&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;picture&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <var>contents</var> are processed in a text mode (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>) so
+&latex; will break lines to make a paragraph. But it won&textrsquo;t make
+multiple paragraphs; for that, use a <code>minipage</code> environment
+(<pxref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The options for <code>\parbox</code> (except for <var>contents</var>) are the same
+as those for <code>minipage</code>. For convenience a summary of the options
+is here but see&nbsp;<ref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></ref> for a complete description.
+</para>
+<para>There are two required arguments. The <var>width</var> is a rigid length
+(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>). It sets the width of the box into which &latex;
+typesets <var>contents</var>. The <var>contents</var> is the text that is placed
+in that box. It should not have any paragraph-making components.
+</para>
+<para>There are three optional arguments, <var>position</var>, <var>height</var>, and
+<var>inner-pos</var>. The <var>position</var> gives the vertical alignment of the
+<code>parbox</code> with respect to the surrounding material. The possible
+values are <code>c</code> or <code>m</code> to make the vertical center of the
+<code>parbox</code> lines up with the center of the adjacent line (this is the
+default), or <code>t</code> to match the top line of the <code>parbox</code> with
+the baseline of the surrounding material, or <code>b</code> to match the
+bottom line.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>height</var> overrides the natural height of the
+box.
+</para>
+<para>The optional argument <var>inner-pos</var> controls the placement of
+<var>content</var> inside the <code>parbox</code>. Its default is the value of
+<var>position</var>. Its possible values are: <code>t</code> to put the
+<var>content</var> at the top of the box, <code>c</code> to put it in the vertical
+center, <code>b</code> to put it at the bottom of the box, and <code>s</code> to
+stretch it out vertically (for this, the text must contain vertically
+stretchable space).
+</para>
+</section>
+<node name="_005craisebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\raisebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\sbox &amp; \savebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\parbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\raisebox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="872" mergedindex="cp">\raisebox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\raisebox&lbrace;<var>distance</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\raisebox&lbrace;<var>distance</var>&rbrace;[<var>height</var>]&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\raisebox&lbrace;<var>distance</var>&rbrace;[<var>height</var>][<var>depth</var>]&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Raise or lower <var>text</var>. This command is fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by
+lowering the vertical bar symbol.
+</para>
+<!-- c credit: egreg https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/278631/121234 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand\restricted[1]&lbrace;\raisebox&lbrace;-.5ex&rbrace;&lbrace;$|$&rbrace;_&lbrace;#1&rbrace;&rbrace;
+$f\restricted&lbrace;A&rbrace;$
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The first mandatory argument <var>distance</var> specifies how far to raise
+the second mandatory argument <var>text</var>. This is a rigid length
+(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>). If it is negative then it lowers <var>text</var>. The
+<var>text</var> is processed in LR mode so it cannot contain line breaks
+(<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The optional arguments <var>height</var> and <var>depth</var> are dimensions. If
+they are specified, they override the natural height and depth of the
+box &latex; gets by typesetting <var>text</var>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="raisebox-depth">raisebox depth</anchor>
+<anchor name="raisebox-height">raisebox height</anchor>
+<anchor name="raisebox-width">raisebox width</anchor>
+<anchor name="raisebox-totalheight">raisebox totalheight</anchor>
+<para>In the arguments <var>distance</var>, <var>height</var>, and <var>depth</var> you can
+use the following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that
+&latex; gets on typesetting <var>text</var>: <code>\depth</code>, <code>\height</code>,
+<code>\width</code>, <code>\totalheight</code> (this is the box&textrsquo;s height plus its
+depth).
+</para>
+<para>This will align two graphics on their top (<pxref label="Graphics"><xrefnodename>Graphics</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<!-- c credit: FAQ https://texfaq.org/FAQ-topgraph -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;graphicx&rbrace; \usepackage&lbrace;calc&rbrace; % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ \raisebox&lbrace;1ex-\height&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]&lbrace;lion.png&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \qquad
+ \raisebox&lbrace;1ex-\height&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]&lbrace;meta.png&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The first <code>\height</code> is the height of <file>lion.png</file> while the
+second is the height of <file>meta.png</file>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\sbox &amp; \savebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">lrbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\raisebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\sbox</code> &amp; <code>\savebox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="873" mergedindex="cp">\sbox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="874" mergedindex="cp">\savebox</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="658">box, save</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\sbox&lbrace;<var>box-cmd</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\savebox&lbrace;<var>box-cmd</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\savebox&lbrace;<var>box-cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>width</var>]&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\savebox&lbrace;<var>box-cmd</var>&rbrace;[<var>width</var>][<var>pos</var>]&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Typeset <var>text</var> just as with <code>\makebox</code> (<pxref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox &amp;
+\makebox</xrefnodename></pxref>) except that &latex; does not output it but instead saves it
+in a storage bin named <var>box-cmd</var>. The bin name <var>box-cmd</var> begins
+with a backslash, <code>\</code>. You must have previously allocated the bin
+<var>box-cmd</var> with <code>\newsavebox</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewsavebox"><xrefnodename>\newsavebox</xrefnodename></pxref>).The
+<code>\sbox</code> command is robust while <code>\savebox</code> is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This creates and uses a bin.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newsavebox&lbrace;\fullname&rbrace;
+\sbox&lbrace;\fullname&rbrace;&lbrace;John Jacob Jingleheimer Schmidt&rbrace;
+ ...
+\usebox&lbrace;\fullname&rbrace;! His name is my name, too!
+Whenever we go out, the people always shout!
+There goes \\usebox&lbrace;\fullname&rbrace;! Ya da da da da da da.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a <code>\newcommand</code> is
+efficiency, that &latex; need not repeatedly retypeset the contents.
+See the example below.
+</para>
+<para>The first two command invocations,
+<code>\sbox&lbrace;<var>box-cmd</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</code> and
+<code>\savebox&lbrace;<var>box-cmd</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</code>, are roughly equivalent.
+As to the third and fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify
+the box width as <var>width</var>, and the position of the text inside that
+box as <var>position</var>. <xref label="_005cmbox-_0026-_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\mbox &amp; \makebox</xrefnodename></xref> for the full
+description.
+</para>
+<para>In the <code>\sbox</code> and <code>\savebox</code> commands the <var>text</var> is
+typeset in LR mode so it does not have line breaks (<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>). If
+you use these then &latex; doesn&textrsquo;t give you an error but it ignores
+what you want: if you enter <code>\sbox&lbrace;\newbin&rbrace;&lbrace;test \\ test&rbrace;</code> and
+<code>\usebox&lbrace;\newbin&rbrace;</code> then you get <samp>testtest</samp>, while if you
+enter <code>\sbox&lbrace;\newbin&rbrace;&lbrace;test \par test&rbrace;</code> and
+<code>\usebox&lbrace;\newbin&rbrace;</code> then you get <samp>test test</samp>, but no error or
+warning. To fix this use a <code>\parbox</code> or <code>minipage</code> as here.
+</para>
+<!-- c credit: egreg https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/41668/121234 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\savebox&lbrace;\abin&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&lbrace;\linewidth&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ \end&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+ \end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ ...
+\usebox&lbrace;\abin&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin&textrsquo;s contents, this puts
+the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the
+header. &latex; only typesets it once.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;graphicx&rbrace; % all this in the preamble
+\newsavebox&lbrace;\sealbin&rbrace;
+\savebox&lbrace;\sealbin&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ \setlength&lbrace;\unitlength&rbrace;&lbrace;1in&rbrace;%
+ \begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(0,0)%
+ \put(1.5,-2.5)&lbrace;%
+ \begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;c&rbrace;
+ \includegraphics[height=2in]&lbrace;companylogo.png&rbrace; \\
+ Office of the President
+ \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \end&lbrace;picture&rbrace;%
+&rbrace;
+\markright&lbrace;\usebox&lbrace;\sealbin&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\pagestyle&lbrace;headings&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <code>picture</code> environment is good for fine-tuning the placement.
+</para>
+<para>If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like
+<samp>Undefined control sequence. &lt;argument&gt; \nobin</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="lrbox" spaces=" "><nodename>lrbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\usebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\sbox &amp; \savebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>lrbox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="875" mergedindex="cp">lrbox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;lrbox&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>box-cmd</var>&rbrace;
+ <var>text</var>
+\end&lbrace;lrbox&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <var>text</var> inside the environment is saved in the bin
+<code><var>box-cmd</var></code>. The <var>box-cmd</var> must begin with a
+backslash. You must create this bin in advance with <code>\newsavebox</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cnewsavebox"><xrefnodename>\newsavebox</xrefnodename></pxref>). This is the environment form of the <code>\sbox</code>
+and <code>\savebox</code> commands, and is equivalent to them. <xref label="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox"><xrefnodename>\sbox &amp;
+\savebox</xrefnodename></xref> for the full information.
+</para>
+<para>In this example the environment is convenient for entering the
+<code>tabular</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newsavebox&lbrace;\jhbin&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;lrbox&rbrace;&lbrace;\jhbin&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;c&rbrace;
+ \includegraphics[height=1in]&lbrace;jh.png&rbrace; \\
+ Jim Hef&lbrace;&rbrace;feron
+ \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;lrbox&rbrace;
+ ...
+\usebox&lbrace;\jhbin&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cusebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\usebox</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">lrbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Boxes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\usebox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="876" mergedindex="cp">\usebox</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="659">box, use saved box</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usebox&lbrace;<var>box-cmd</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce the box most recently saved in the bin <var>box-cmd</var> by the
+commands <code>\sbox</code> or <code>\savebox</code>, or the <code>lrbox</code>
+environment. <xref label="_005csbox-_0026-_005csavebox"><xrefnodename>\sbox &amp; \savebox</xrefnodename></xref> for more information and examples.
+(Note that <var>box-cmd</var> starts with a backslash.) This command is
+robust (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Color" spaces=" "><nodename>Color</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Graphics</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Boxes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Color</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="660">color</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>You can add color to text, rules, etc. You can also have color in a box
+or on an entire page and write text on top of it.
+</para>
+<para>Color support comes as an additional package. So put
+<code>\usepackage&lbrace;color&rbrace;</code> in your document preamble to use the
+commands described here.
+</para>
+<para>Many other packages also supplement &latex;&textrsquo;s color abilities.
+Particularly worth mentioning is <file>xcolor</file>, which is widely used and
+significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding
+<samp>HTML</samp> and <samp>Hsb</samp> color models.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Color package options</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Options when you load the standard package.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Color models</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">How colors are represented.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Commands for color</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The available commands.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Color-package-options" spaces=" "><nodename>Color package options</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Color models</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Color</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>color</code> package options</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="661">color package options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="662">options, color package</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage[<var>comma-separated option list</var>]&lbrace;color&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>When you load the <file>color</file> package there are two kinds of available
+options.
+</para>
+<para>The first specifies the <dfn>printer driver</dfn>. &latex; doesn&textrsquo;t contain
+information about different output systems but instead depends on
+information stored in a file. Normally you should not specify the
+driver option in the document, and instead rely on your system&textrsquo;s
+default. One advantage of this is that it makes the document portable
+across systems. For completeness we include a list of the drivers. The
+currently relevant ones are: <file>dvipdfmx</file>, <file>dvips</file>,
+<file>dvisvgm</file>, <file>luatex</file>, <file>pdftex</file>, <file>xetex</file>. The two
+<file>xdvi</file> and <file>oztex</file> are essentially aliases for <file>dvips</file>
+(and <file>xdvi</file> is monochrome). Ones that should not be used for new
+systems are: <file>dvipdf</file>, <file>dvipdfm</file>, <file>dviwin</file>,
+<file>dvipsone</file>, <file>emtex</file>, <file>pctexps</file>, <file>pctexwin</file>,
+<file>pctexhp</file>, <file>pctex32</file>, <file>truetex</file>, <file>tcidvi</file>,
+<file>vtex</file> (and <file>dviwindo</file> is an alias for <file>dvipsone</file>).
+</para>
+<para>The second kind of options, beyond the drivers, are below.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">monochrome</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Disable the color commands, so that they do not generate errors but do
+not generate color either.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">dvipsnames</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Make available a list of 68 color names that are often used,
+particularly in legacy documents. These color names were originally
+provided by the <file>dvips</file> driver, giving the option name.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">nodvipsnames</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Do not load that list of color names, saving &latex; a tiny amount of
+memory space.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Color-models" spaces=" "><nodename>Color models</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Commands for color</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Color package options</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Color</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Color models</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="663">color models</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>A <dfn>color model</dfn> is a way of representing colors. &latex;&textrsquo;s
+capabilities depend on the printer driver. However, the <file>pdftex</file>,
+<file>xetex</file>, and <file>luatex</file> printer drivers are today by far the
+most commonly used. The models below work for those drivers. All but
+one of these is also supported by essentially all other printer drivers
+used today.
+</para>
+<para>Note that color combination can be additive or subtractive. Additive
+mixes colors of light, so that for instance combining full intensities
+of red, green, and blue produces white. Subtractive mixes pigments,
+such as with inks, so that combining full intensity of cyan, magenta,
+and yellow makes black.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="color-models-cmyk">color models cmyk</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">cmyk</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1,
+inclusive. The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second is
+magenta, and the others are yellow and black. A number value of 0 means
+minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity. This model is often
+used in color printing. It is a subtractive model.
+</para>
+<anchor name="color-models-gray">color models gray</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">gray</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive. The colors are shades
+of grey. The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white.
+</para>
+<anchor name="color-models-rgb">color models rgb</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">rgb</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1,
+inclusive. The first number is the intensity of the red component, the
+second is green, and the third the blue. A number value of 0 means that
+none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full intensity.
+This is an additive model.
+</para>
+<anchor name="color-models-RGB">color models RGB</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">RGB</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(<file>pdftex</file>, <file>xetex</file>, <file>luatex</file> drivers) A comma-separated
+list with three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive. This model is a
+convenience for using <code>rgb</code> since outside of &latex; colors are
+often described in a red-green-blue model using numbers in this range.
+The values entered here are converted to the <code>rgb</code> model by
+dividing by 255.
+</para>
+<anchor name="color-models-named">color models named</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">named</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Colors are accessed by name, such as <samp>PrussianBlue</samp>. The list of
+names depends on the driver, but all support the names <samp>black</samp>,
+<samp>blue</samp>, <samp>cyan</samp>, <samp>green</samp>, <samp>magenta</samp>, <samp>red</samp>,
+<samp>white</samp>, and <samp>yellow</samp> (See the <code>dvipsnames</code> option in
+<ref label="Color-package-options"><xrefnodename>Color package options</xrefnodename></ref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Commands-for-color" spaces=" "><nodename>Commands for color</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Color models</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Color</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Commands for color</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="664">color package commands</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>These are the commands available with the <file>color</file> package.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Define colors</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Give a color a name.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Colored text</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Text or rules in color.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Colored boxes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">A box of color, to write over.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Colored pages</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">A whole page colored.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Define-colors" spaces=" "><nodename>Define colors</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Colored text</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for color</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Define colors</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="665">color</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="666">define color</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="667">color, define</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\definecolor&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>model</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>specification</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Give the name <var>name</var> to the color. For example, after this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\definecolor&lbrace;silver&rbrace;&lbrace;rgb&rbrace;&lbrace;0.75,0.75,0.74&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>you can use that color name with <code>Hi ho,
+\textcolor&lbrace;silver&rbrace;&lbrace;Silver&rbrace;!</code>.
+</para>
+<para>This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change and
+not be misleading.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\definecolor&lbrace;logocolor&rbrace;&lbrace;RGB&rbrace;&lbrace;145,92,131&rbrace; % RGB needs pdflatex
+\newcommand&lbrace;\logo&rbrace;&lbrace;\textcolor&lbrace;logocolor&rbrace;&lbrace;Bob's Big Bagels&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Often a document&textrsquo;s colors are defined in the preamble, or in the class
+or style, rather than in the document body.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="Colored-text" spaces=" "><nodename>Colored text</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Colored boxes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Define colors</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for color</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Colored text</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="668">color</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="669">colored text</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\textcolor&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+\textcolor[<var>color model</var>]&lbrace;<var>color specification</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\color&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;
+\color[<var>color model</var>]&lbrace;<var>specification</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The affected text gets the color. This line
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\textcolor&lbrace;magenta&rbrace;&lbrace;My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:&rbrace;
+Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black. You
+can use a color declared with <code>\definecolor</code> in exactly the same
+way that we just used the builtin color <samp>magenta</samp>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\definecolor&lbrace;MidlifeCrisisRed&rbrace;&lbrace;rgb&rbrace;&lbrace;1.0,0.11,0.0&rbrace;
+I'm thinking about getting a \textcolor&lbrace;MidlifeCrisisRed&rbrace;&lbrace;sports car&rbrace;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The two <code>\textcolor</code> and <code>\color</code> differ in that the first is
+a command form, enclosing the text to be colored as an argument. Often
+this form is more convenient, or at least more explicit. The second
+form is a declaration, as in <code>The moon is made of &lbrace;\color&lbrace;green&rbrace;
+green&rbrace; cheese</code>, so it is in effect until the end of the current group
+or environment. This is sometimes useful when writing macros or as
+below where it colors everything inside the <code>center</code> environment,
+including the vertical and horizontal lines.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace; \color&lbrace;blue&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;l|r&rbrace;
+ UL &amp;UR \\ \hline
+ LL &amp;LR
+ \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>You can use color in equations. A document might have this definition
+in the preamble
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\definecolor&lbrace;highlightcolor&rbrace;&lbrace;RGB&rbrace;&lbrace;225,15,0&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>and then contain this equation.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+ \int_a^b \textcolor&lbrace;highlightcolor&rbrace;&lbrace;f'(x)&rbrace;\,dx=f(b)-f(a)
+\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Typically the colors used in a document are declared in a class or style
+but sometimes you want a one-off. Those are the second forms in the
+synopses.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Colors of \textcolor[rgb]&lbrace;0.33,0.14,0.47&rbrace;&lbrace;Purple&rbrace; and
+&lbrace;\color[rgb]&lbrace;0.72,0.60,0.37&rbrace; Gold&rbrace; for the team.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The format of <var>color specification </var> depends on the color model
+(<pxref label="Color-models"><xrefnodename>Color models</xrefnodename></pxref>). For instance, while <code>rgb</code> takes three
+numbers, <code>gray</code> takes only one.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">The selection was \textcolor[gray]&lbrace;0.5&rbrace;&lbrace;grayed out&rbrace;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Colors inside colors do not combine. Thus
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\textcolor&lbrace;green&rbrace;&lbrace;kind of \textcolor&lbrace;blue&rbrace;&lbrace;blue&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>has a final word that is blue, not a combination of blue and green.
+</para>
+<!-- c xx address coloring a line of a table? -->
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="Colored-boxes" spaces=" "><nodename>Colored boxes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Colored pages</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Colored text</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for color</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Colored boxes</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="670">color</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="671">colored boxes</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="672">box, colored</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\colorbox&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+\colorbox[<var>model name</var>]&lbrace;<var>box background color</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\fcolorbox&lbrace;<var>frame color</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>box background color</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+\fcolorbox[<var>model name</var>]&lbrace;<var>frame color</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>box background color</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Make a box with the stated background color. The <code>\fcolorbox</code>
+command puts a frame around the box. For instance this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Name:~\colorbox&lbrace;cyan&rbrace;&lbrace;\makebox[5cm][l]&lbrace;\strut&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>makes a cyan-colored box that is five centimeters long and gets its
+depth and height from the <code>\strut</code> (so the depth is
+<code>-.3\baselineskip</code> and the height is <code>\baselineskip</code>). This
+puts white text on a blue background.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\colorbox&lbrace;blue&rbrace;&lbrace;\textcolor&lbrace;white&rbrace;&lbrace;Welcome to the machine.&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <code>\fcolorbox</code> commands use the same parameters as <code>\fbox</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cfbox-_0026-_005cframebox"><xrefnodename>\fbox &amp; \framebox</xrefnodename></pxref>), <code>\fboxrule</code> and <code>\fboxsep</code>, to
+set the thickness of the rule and the boundary between the box interior
+and the surrounding rule. &latex;&textrsquo;s defaults are <code>0.4pt</code> and
+<code>3pt</code>, respectively.
+</para>
+<para>This example changes the thickness of the border to 0.8 points. Note
+that it is surrounded by curly braces so that the change ends at the end
+of the second line.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">&lbrace;\setlength&lbrace;\fboxrule&rbrace;&lbrace;0.8pt&rbrace;
+\fcolorbox&lbrace;black&rbrace;&lbrace;red&rbrace;&lbrace;Under no circumstances turn this knob.&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="Colored-pages" spaces=" "><nodename>Colored pages</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Colored boxes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for color</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Colored pages</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="673">color</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="674">colored page</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="675">page, colored</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="676">background, colored</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\pagecolor&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;
+\pagecolor[<var>color model</var>]&lbrace;<var>color specification</var>&rbrace;
+\nopagecolor
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The first two set the background of the page, and all subsequent pages,
+to the color. For an explanation of the specification in the second
+form <pxref label="Colored-text"><xrefnodename>Colored text</xrefnodename></pxref>. The third returns the background to normal,
+which is a transparent background. (If that is not supported use
+<code>\pagecolor&lbrace;white&rbrace;</code>, although that will make a white background
+rather than the default transparent background.)
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"> ...
+\pagecolor&lbrace;cyan&rbrace;
+ ...
+\nopagecolor
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Graphics" spaces=" "><nodename>Graphics</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Special insertions</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Color</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Graphics</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="677">graphics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="678">graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>You can use graphics such as PNG or PDF files in your &latex; document.
+You need an additional package, which comes standard with &latex;.
+This example is the short how-to.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\include&lbrace;graphicx&rbrace; % goes in the preamble
+ ...
+\includegraphics[width=0.5\linewidth]&lbrace;plot.pdf&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>To use the commands described here your document preamble must contain
+either <code>\usepackage&lbrace;graphicx&rbrace;</code> or
+<code>\usepackage&lbrace;graphics&rbrace;</code>. Most of the time, <file>graphicx</file> is the
+better choice.
+</para>
+<para>Graphics come in two main types, raster and vector. &latex; can use
+both. In raster graphics the file contains an entry for each location
+in an array, describing what color it is. An example is a photograph,
+in JPG format. In vector graphics, the file contains a list of
+instructions such as <samp>draw a circle with this radius and that
+center</samp>. An example is a line drawing produced by the Asymptote
+program, in PDF format. Generally vector graphics are more useful
+because you can rescale their size without pixelation or other problems,
+and because they often have a smaller size.
+</para>
+<para>There are systems particularly well-suited to make graphics for a
+&latex; document. For example, these allow you to use the same fonts
+as in your document. &latex; comes with a <code>picture</code> environment
+(<pxref label="picture"><xrefnodename>picture</xrefnodename></pxref>) that has simple capabilities. Besides that, there are
+other ways to include the graphic-making commands in the document. Two
+such systems are the PSTricks and TikZ packages. There are also systems
+external to &latex;, that generate a graphic that you include using the
+commands of this chapter. Two that use a programming language are
+Asymptote and MetaPost. One that uses a graphical interface is Xfig.
+Full description of these systems is outside the scope of this document;
+see their documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Graphics package options</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Options when you load the package.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Graphics package configuration</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Where to look for files, which file types.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Commands for graphics</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">The available commands.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Graphics-package-options" spaces=" "><nodename>Graphics package options</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Graphics package configuration</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Graphics</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>graphics</code> package options</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="679">graphics package options</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="680">options, graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage[<var>comma-separated option list</var>]&lbrace;graphics&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage[<var>comma-separated option list</var>]&lbrace;graphicx&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <code>graphicx</code> package has a format for optional arguments to the
+<code>\includegraphics</code> command that is convenient (it is the key-value
+format), so it is the better choice for new documents. When you load
+the <file>graphics</file> or <file>graphicx</file> package with <code>\usepackage</code>
+there are two kinds of available options.
+</para>
+<para>The first is that &latex; does not contain information about different
+output systems but instead depends on information stored in a
+<dfn>printer driver</dfn> file. Normally you should not specify the driver
+option in the document, and instead rely on your system&textrsquo;s default. One
+advantage of this is that it makes the document portable across systems.
+</para>
+<para>For completeness here is a list of the drivers. The currently relevant
+ones are: <file>dvipdfmx</file>, <file>dvips</file>, <file>dvisvgm</file>, <file>luatex</file>,
+<file>pdftex</file>, <file>xetex</file>. The two <file>xdvi</file> and <file>oztex</file> are
+essentially aliases for <file>dvips</file> (and <file>xdvi</file> is monochrome).
+Ones that should not be used for new systems are: <file>dvipdf</file>,
+<file>dvipdfm</file>, <file>dviwin</file>, <file>dvipsone</file>, <file>emtex</file>,
+<file>pctexps</file>, <file>pctexwin</file>, <file>pctexhp</file>, <file>pctex32</file>,
+<file>truetex</file>, <file>tcidvi</file>, <file>vtex</file> (and <file>dviwindo</file> is an
+alias for <file>dvipsone</file>). These are stored in files with a
+<file>.def</file> extension, such as <file>pdftex.def</file>.
+</para>
+<para>The second kind of options are below.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">demo</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Instead of an image file, &latex; puts in a 150&nbsp;pt by 100&nbsp;pt
+rectangle (unless another size is specified in the
+<code>\includegraphics</code> command).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">draft</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead the file name is
+printed in a box of the correct size. In order to determine the size,
+the file must be present.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">final</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(Default) Override any previous <code>draft</code> option, so that the
+document shows the contents of the graphic files.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">hiderotate</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Do not show rotated text. (This allows for the possibility that a
+previewer does not have the capability to rotate text.)
+<!-- c what does it show? -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">hidescale</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Do not show scaled text. (This allows for the possibility that a
+previewer does not have the capability to scale.)
+<!-- c what does it show? -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">hiresbb</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>In a PS or EPS file the graphic size may be specified in two ways. The
+<code>%%BoundingBox</code> lines describe the graphic size using integer
+multiples of a PostScript point, that is, integer multiples of 1/72
+inch. A later addition to the PostScript language allows decimal
+multiples, such as 1.23, in <code>%%HiResBoundingBox</code> lines. This
+option has &latex; to read the size from the latter.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Graphics-package-configuration" spaces=" "><nodename>Graphics package configuration</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Commands for graphics</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Graphics package options</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Graphics</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>graphics</code> package configuration</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="681">graphics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="682">graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="683">configuration, graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="684">EPS files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="685">JPEG files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="686">JPG files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="687">PDF graphic files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="688">PNG files</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>These commands configure the way &latex; searches the file system for
+the graphic.
+</para>
+<para>The behavior of file system search code is necessarily platform
+dependent. In this document we cover GNU/Linux, Macintosh, and Windows, as
+those systems are typically configured. For other situations consult
+the documentation in <file>grfguide.pdf</file>, or the &latex; source, or your
+&tex; distribution&textrsquo;s documentation.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\graphicspath</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Directories to search.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">File types, such as JPG or EPS.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\DeclareGraphicsRule</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">How to handle file types.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cgraphicspath" spaces=" "><nodename>\graphicspath</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Graphics package configuration</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\graphicspath</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="877" mergedindex="cp">\graphicspath</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\graphicspath&lbrace;<var>list of dir names inside curly brackets</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Declare a list of directories to search for graphics files. This allows
+you to later say something like <code>\includegraphics&lbrace;lion.png&rbrace;</code>
+instead of having to give its path.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; always looks for graphic files first in the current directory.
+The declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory
+<file>pix</file>, and then <file>../pix</file>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;graphicx&rbrace; % or graphics; put in preamble
+ ...
+\graphicspath&lbrace; &lbrace;pix/&rbrace; &lbrace;../pix/&rbrace; &rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <code>\graphicspath</code> declaration is optional. If you don&textrsquo;t include
+it then &latex;&textrsquo;s default is to search all of the places that it
+usually looks for a file (it uses &latex;&textrsquo;s <code>\input&arobase;path</code>). In
+particular, in this case one of the places it looks is the current
+directory.
+</para>
+<para>Enclose each directory name in curly braces; for example, above it says
+<samp><code>&lbrace;pix&rbrace;</code></samp>. Do this even if there is only one directory.
+Each directory name must end in a forward slash, <file>/</file>. This is true
+even on Windows, where good practice is to use forward slashes for all
+the directory separators since it makes the document portable to other
+platforms. If you have spaces in your directory name then use double
+quotes, as with <code>&lbrace;&quot;my docs/&quot;&rbrace;</code>. Getting one of these rules wrong
+will cause &latex; to report <code>Error: File `<var>filename</var>' not
+found</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Basically, the algorithm is that with this example, after looking in the
+current directory,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\graphicspath&lbrace; &lbrace;pix/&rbrace; &lbrace;../pix/&rbrace; &rbrace;
+...
+\usepackage&lbrace;lion.png&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>for each of the listed directories, &latex; concatenates it with the
+file name and searches for the result, checking for <file>pix/lion.png</file>
+and then <file>../pix/lion.png</file>. This algorithm means that the
+<code>\graphicspath</code> command does not recursively search subdirectories:
+if you issue <code>\graphicspath&lbrace;&lbrace;a/&rbrace;&rbrace;</code> and the graphic is in
+<file>a/b/lion.png</file> then &latex; will not find it. It also means that
+you can use absolute paths such as
+<code>\graphicspath&lbrace;&lbrace;/home/jim/logos/&rbrace;&rbrace;</code> or
+<code>\graphicspath&lbrace;&lbrace;C:/Users/Albert/Pictures/&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>. However, using
+these means that the document is not portable. (You could preserve
+portability by adjusting your &tex; system settings configuration file
+parameter <code>TEXINPUTS</code>; see the documentation of your system.)
+</para>
+<para>You can use <code>\graphicspath</code> anywhere in the document. You can use
+it more than once. Show its value with
+<code>\makeatletter\typeout&lbrace;\Ginput&arobase;path&rbrace;\makeatother</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The directories are taken with respect to the base file. That is,
+suppose that you are working on a document based on <file>book/book.tex</file>
+and it contains <code>\include&lbrace;chapters/chap1&rbrace;</code>. If in
+<file>chap1.tex</file> you put <code>\graphicspath&lbrace;&lbrace;plots/&rbrace;&rbrace;</code> then
+&latex; will not search for graphics in <file>book/chapters/plots</file>, but
+instead in <file>book/plots</file>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions" spaces=" "><nodename>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\DeclareGraphicsRule</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\graphicspath</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Graphics package configuration</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="878" mergedindex="cp">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions&lbrace;<var>comma-separated list of file extensions</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Declare the filename extensions to try. This allows you to specify the
+order in which to choose graphic formats when you include graphic files
+by giving the filename without the extension, as in
+<code>\includegraphics&lbrace;functionplot&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>In this example, &latex; will find files in the PNG format before PDF
+files.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions&lbrace;.png,PNG,.pdf,.PDF&rbrace;
+ ...
+\includegraphics&lbrace;lion&rbrace; % will find <file>lion.png</file> before <file>lion.pdf</file>
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Because the file name <file>lion</file> does not have a period, &latex; uses
+the extension list. For each directory in the graphics path
+(<pxref label="_005cgraphicspath"><xrefnodename>\graphicspath</xrefnodename></pxref>), &latex; will try the extensions in the order
+given. If it does not find such a file after trying all the directories
+and extensions then it reports <samp>! LaTeX Error: File `<file>lion</file>'
+not found</samp>. Note that you must include the periods at the start of the
+extensions.
+</para>
+<para>Because GNU/Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the list of
+file extensions is case sensitive on those platforms. The Windows
+platform is not case sensitive.
+</para>
+<para>You are not required to include <code>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</code> in
+your document; the printer driver has a sensible default. For example,
+the most recent <file>pdftex.def</file> has this extension list.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>You can use this command anywhere in the document. You can use it more
+than once. Show its value with
+<code>\makeatletter\typeout&lbrace;\Gin&arobase;extensions&rbrace;\makeatother</code>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cDeclareGraphicsRule" spaces=" "><nodename>\DeclareGraphicsRule</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Graphics package configuration</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\DeclareGraphicsRule</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="879" mergedindex="cp">\DeclareGraphicsRule</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\DeclareGraphicsRule&lbrace;<var>extension</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>type</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>size-file extension</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>command</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Declare how to handle graphic files whose names end in <var>extension</var>.
+</para>
+<para>This example declares that all files with names have the form
+<file>filename-without-dot.mps</file> will be treated as output from MetaPost,
+meaning that the printer driver will use its MetaPost-handling code to
+input the file.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\DeclareGraphicsRule&lbrace;.mps&rbrace;&lbrace;mps&rbrace;&lbrace;.mps&rbrace;&lbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\DeclareGraphicsRule&lbrace;*&rbrace;&lbrace;mps&rbrace;&lbrace;*&rbrace;&lbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>tells &latex; that it should handle as MetaPost output any file with an
+extension not covered by another rule, so it covers <file>filename.1</file>,
+<file>filename.2</file>, etc.
+</para>
+<para>This describes the four arguments.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">extension</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The file extension to which this rule applies. The extension is anything
+after and including the first dot in the filename. Use the Kleene star,
+<code>*</code>, to denote the default behaviour for all undeclared extensions.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">type</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The type of file involved. This type is a string that must be defined
+in the printer driver. For instance, files with extensions <file>.ps</file>,
+<file>.eps</file>, or <file>.ps.gz</file> may all be classed as type <code>eps</code>.
+All files of the same type will be input with the same internal command
+by the printer driver. For example, the file types that <file>pdftex</file>
+recognizes are: <code>jpg</code>, <code>jbig2</code>, <code>mps</code>, <code>pdf</code>,
+<code>png</code>, <code>tif</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">size-file extension</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The extension of the file to be read to determine the size of the
+graphic, if there is such a file. It may be the same as <var>extension</var>
+but it may be different.
+</para>
+<para>As an example, consider a PostScript graphic. To make it smaller, it
+might be compressed into a <file>.ps.gz</file> file. Compressed files are not
+easily read by &latex; so you can put the bounding box information in a
+separate file. If <var>size-file extension</var> is empty then you must
+specify size information in the arguments of <code>\includegraphics</code>.
+</para>
+<para>If the driver file has a procedure for reading size files for
+<code>type</code> then that will be used, otherwise it will use the procedure
+for reading <file>.eps</file> files. (Thus you may specify the size of bitmap
+files in a file with a PostScript style <code>%%BoundingBox</code> line if no
+other format is available.)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">command</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A command that will be applied to the
+file. This is very often left blank. This command must start with a
+single backward quote. Thus,
+<code>\DeclareGraphicsRule&lbrace;.eps.gz&rbrace;&lbrace;eps&rbrace;&lbrace;.eps.bb&rbrace;&lbrace;`gunzip -c
+#1&rbrace;</code> specifies that any file with the extension <file>.eps.gz</file> should
+be treated as an <code>eps</code> file, with the BoundingBox information
+stored in the file with extension <file>.eps.bb</file>, and that the command
+<code>gunzip -c</code> will run on your platform to decompresses the file.
+</para>
+<para>Such a command is specific to your platform. In addition, your &tex;
+system must allow you to run external commands; as a security measure
+modern systems restrict running commands unless you explicitly allow it.
+See the documentation for your &tex; distribution.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="Commands-for-graphics" spaces=" "><nodename>Commands for graphics</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Graphics package configuration</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Graphics</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Commands for graphics</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="689">graphics package commands</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="690">commands, graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>These are the commands available with the <file>graphics</file> and
+<file>graphicx</file> packages.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\includegraphics</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Using a graphic in your document.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\rotatebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Rotating boxes, including graphics.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\scalebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Scaling boxes, including graphics.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\resizebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Scaling boxes, including graphics, to a set size.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cincludegraphics" spaces=" "><nodename>\includegraphics</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\rotatebox</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for graphics</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\includegraphics</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="691">graphics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="692">graphics package</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="693">including graphics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="694">importing graphics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="695">EPS files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="696">JPEG files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="697">JPG files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="698">PDF graphic files</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="699">PNG files</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="880" mergedindex="cp">\includegraphics</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopses for <file>graphics</file> package:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includegraphics&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;
+\includegraphics[<var>urx</var>,<var>ury</var>]&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;
+\includegraphics[<var>llx</var>,<var>lly</var>][<var>urx</var>,<var>ury</var>]&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;
+\includegraphics*&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;
+\includegraphics*[<var>urx</var>,<var>ury</var>]&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;
+\includegraphics*[<var>llx</var>,<var>lly</var>][<var>urx</var>,<var>ury</var>]&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Synopses for <file>graphicx</file> package:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includegraphics&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;
+\includegraphics[<var>key-value list</var>]&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;
+\includegraphics*&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;
+\includegraphics*[<var>key-value list</var>]&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Include a graphics file. The starred form <code>\includegraphics*</code> will
+clip the graphic to the size specified, while for the unstarred form any
+part of the graphic that is outside the box of the specified size will
+over-print the surrounding area.
+</para>
+<para>This
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;graphicx&rbrace; % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ \includegraphics&lbrace;plot.pdf&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>will incorporate into the document the graphic in <file>plot.pdf</file>,
+centered and at its nominal size. You can also give a path to the file,
+as with <code>\includegraphics&lbrace;graphics/plot.pdf&rbrace;</code>. To specify a list
+of locations to search for the file, <pxref label="_005cgraphicspath"><xrefnodename>\graphicspath</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+</para>
+<para>If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes. An example
+is <code>\includegraphics&lbrace;&quot;sister picture.jpg&quot;&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\includegraphics&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;</code> command decides on the
+type of graphic by splitting <var>filename</var> on the first dot. You can
+use <var>filename</var> with no dot, as in <code>\includegraphics&lbrace;turing&rbrace;</code>
+and then &latex; tries a sequence of extensions such as <code>.png</code> and
+<code>.pdf</code> until it finds a file with that extension
+(<pxref label="_005cDeclareGraphicsExtensions"><xrefnodename>\DeclareGraphicsExtensions</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>If your file name contains dots before the extension then you can hide
+them with curly braces, as in
+<code>\includegraphics&lbrace;&lbrace;plot.2018.03.12.a&rbrace;.pdf&rbrace;</code>. Or, if you use
+the <file>graphicx</file> package then you can use the options <code>type</code> and
+<code>ext</code>; see below. This and other filename issues are also handled
+with the package <file>grffile</file>.
+</para>
+<para>This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so &latex; can
+move it to the next page if fitting it on the current page is awkward
+(<pxref label="figure"><xrefnodename>figure</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;figure&rbrace;
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=3cm]&lbrace;lungxray.jpg&rbrace;
+ \caption&lbrace;The evidence is overwhelming: don't smoke.&rbrace; \label&lbrace;fig:xray&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;figure&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This places a graphic that will not float, so it is sure to appear at
+this point in the document even if makes &latex; stretch the text or
+resort to blank areas on the page. It will be centered and will have a
+caption.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;caption&rbrace; % in preamble
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ \includegraphics&lbrace;pix/nix.png&rbrace;
+ \captionof&lbrace;figure&rbrace;&lbrace;The spirit of the night&rbrace; \label&lbrace;pix:nix&rbrace; % optional
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This example puts a box with a graphic side by side with one having
+text, with the two vertically centered.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand*&lbrace;\vcenteredhbox&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;&arobase;&lbrace;&rbrace;c&arobase;&lbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;#1\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ \vcenteredhbox&lbrace;\includegraphics[width=0.4\textwidth]&lbrace;plot&rbrace;&rbrace;
+ \hspace&lbrace;1em&rbrace;
+ \vcenteredhbox&lbrace;\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&lbrace;0.4\textwidth&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+ f(x)=x\cdot \sin (1/x)
+ \end&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+ \end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>If you use the <file>graphics</file> package then the only options involve the
+size of the graphic (but see <ref label="_005crotatebox"><xrefnodename>\rotatebox</xrefnodename></ref> and <ref label="_005cscalebox"><xrefnodename>\scalebox</xrefnodename></ref>).
+When one optional argument is present then it is
+<code>[<var>urx</var>,<var>ury</var>]</code> and it gives the coordinates of the top
+right corner of the image, as a pair of &tex; dimensions (<pxref label="Units-of-length"><xrefnodename>Units
+of length</xrefnodename></pxref>). If the units are omitted they default to <code>bp</code>. In
+this case, the lower left corner of the image is assumed to be at (0,0).
+If two optional arguments are present then the leading one is
+<code>[<var>llx</var>,<var>lly</var>]</code>, specifying the coordinates of the image&textrsquo;s
+lower left. Thus, <code>\includegraphics[1in,0.618in]&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> calls for
+the graphic to be placed so it is 1&nbsp;inch wide and 0.618&nbsp;inches
+tall and so its origin is at (0,0).
+</para>
+<para>The <file>graphicx</file> package gives you many more options. Specify them
+in a key-value form, as here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ \includegraphics[width=1in,angle=90]&lbrace;lion&rbrace;
+ \hspace&lbrace;2em&rbrace;
+ \includegraphics[angle=90,width=1in]&lbrace;lion&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The options are read left-to-right. So the first graphic above is made
+one inch wide and then rotated, while the second is rotated and then
+made one inch wide. Thus, unless the graphic is perfectly square, the
+two will end with different widths and heights.
+</para>
+<para>There are many options. The primary ones are listed first.
+</para>
+<para>Note that a graphic is placed by &latex; into a box, which is
+traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the
+PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic&textrsquo;s printed area may
+go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when &latex; makes up a
+page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the
+graphic.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="includegraphics-width">includegraphics width</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">width</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this width. An example
+is <code>\includegraphics[width=1in]&lbrace;plot&rbrace;</code>. You can use the standard
+&tex; dimensions (<pxref label="Units-of-length"><xrefnodename>Units of length</xrefnodename></pxref>) and also convenient is
+<code>\linewidth</code>, or in a two-column document, <code>\columnwidth</code>
+(<pxref label="Page-layout-parameters"><xrefnodename>Page layout parameters</xrefnodename></pxref>). An example is that by using the
+<file>calc</file> package you can make the graphic be 1&nbsp;cm narrow than
+the width of the text with
+<code>\includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]&lbrace;hefferon.jpg&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">height</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="includegraphics-height">includegraphics height</anchor>
+<para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height. You can
+use the standard &tex; dimensions (<pxref label="Units-of-length"><xrefnodename>Units of length</xrefnodename></pxref>), and also
+convenient are <code>\pageheight</code> and <code>\textheight</code> (<pxref label="Page-layout-parameters"><xrefnodename>Page
+layout parameters</xrefnodename></pxref>). For instance, the command
+<code>\includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]&lbrace;godel&rbrace;</code> will make the
+graphic a quarter of the height of the text area.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">totalheight</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="includegraphics-totalheght">includegraphics totalheght</anchor>
+<para>The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus
+depth. This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated. For
+instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero height
+but a large depth.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">keepaspectratio</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><anchor name="includegraphics-keepaspectratio">includegraphics keepaspectratio</anchor>
+<para>If set to <code>true</code>, or just specified as here
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"><code>\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>and you give as options both <code>width</code> and <code>height</code> (or
+<code>totalheight</code>), then &latex; will make the graphic is as large as
+possible without distortion. That is, &latex; will ensure that neither
+is the graphic wider than <code>width</code> nor taller than <code>height</code> (or
+<code>totalheight</code>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">scale</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Factor by which to scale the graphic. To make a graphic twice its
+nominal size, enter <code>\includegraphics[scale=2.0]&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>. This
+number may be any value; a number between 1 and&nbsp;0 will shrink the
+graphic and a negative number will reflect it.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">angle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Rotate the graphic. The angle is taken in degrees and counterclockwise.
+The graphic is rotated about its <code>origin</code>; see that option. For a
+complete description of how rotated material is typeset,
+<pxref label="_005crotatebox"><xrefnodename>\rotatebox</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">origin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The point of the graphic about which the rotation happens. Possible
+values are any string containing one or two of: <code>l</code> for left,
+<code>r</code> for right, <code>b</code> for bottom, <code>c</code> for center, <code>t</code>
+for top, and <code>B</code> for baseline. Thus, entering the command
+<code>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]&lbrace;moon&rbrace;</code> will turn the
+picture upside down about that picture&textrsquo;s center, while the command
+<code>\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]&lbrace;LeBateau&rbrace;</code> will turn its
+picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character <code>c</code>
+gives the horizontal center in <code>bc</code> or <code>tc</code>, but gives the
+vertical center in <code>lc</code> or <code>rc</code>.) The default is <code>lB</code>.
+</para>
+<para>To rotate about an arbitrary point, <pxref label="_005crotatebox"><xrefnodename>\rotatebox</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>These are lesser-used options.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="includegraphics-viewport">includegraphics viewport</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">viewport</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show. Takes four arguments,
+separated by spaces and given in &tex; dimensions, as with
+<code>\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>. The
+dimensions default to big points,&nbsp;<code>bp</code>. They are taken
+relative to the origin specified by the bounding box. See also the
+<code>trim</code> option.
+</para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-trim">includegraphics trim</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">trim</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Gives parts of the graphic to not show. Takes four arguments, separated
+by spaces, that are given in &tex; dimensions, as with
+<code>\includegraphics[.., trim= 0in 0.1in 0.2in 0.3in, ...]&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>.
+These give the amounts of the graphic not to show, that is, &latex;
+will crop the picture by 0&nbsp;inches on the left, 0.1&nbsp;inches on
+the bottom, 0.2&nbsp;inches on the right, and 0.3&nbsp;inches on the
+top. See also the <code>viewport</code> option.
+</para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-clip">includegraphics clip</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">clip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>If set to <code>true</code>, or just specified as here
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includegraphics[...,clip,...]&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>then the graphic is cropped to the bounding box. This is the same as
+using the starred form of the command,
+<code>\includegraphics*[...]&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-page">includegraphics page</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">page</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Give the page number of a multi-page PDF file. The default is
+<code>page=1</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-pagebox">includegraphics pagebox</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">pagebox</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Specifies which bounding box to use for PDF files from among
+<code>mediabox</code>, <code>cropbox</code>, <code>bleedbox</code>, <code>trimbox</code>, or
+<code>artbox</code>. PDF files do not have the BoundingBox that PostScript
+files have, but may specify up to four predefined rectangles. The
+MediaBox gives the boundaries of the physical medium. The CropBox is the
+region to which the contents of the page are to be clipped when
+displayed. The BleedBox is the region to which the contents of the page
+should be clipped in production. The TrimBox is the intended dimensions
+of the finished page. The ArtBox is the extent of the page&textrsquo;s meaningful
+content. The driver will set the image size based on CropBox if
+present, otherwise it will not use one of the others, with a
+driver-defined order of preference. MediaBox is always present.
+</para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-interpolate">includegraphics interpolate</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">interpolate</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Enable or disable interpolation of raster images by the viewer. Can be
+set with <code>interpolate=true</code> or just specified as here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<anchor name="includegraphics-quiet">includegraphics quiet</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">quiet</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Do not write information to the log. You can set it with
+<code>quiet=true</code> or just specified it with
+<code>\includegraphics[...,quite,...]&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>,
+</para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-draft">includegraphics draft</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">draft</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>If you set it with <code>draft=true</code> or just specify it with
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includegraphics[...,draft,...]&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>then the graphic will not appear in the document, possibly saving color
+printer ink. Instead, &latex; will put an empty box of the correct
+size with the filename printed in it.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>These options address the bounding box for Encapsulated PostScript
+graphic files, which have a size specified with a line
+<code>%%BoundingBox</code> that appears in the file. It has four values,
+giving the lower <math>x</math> coordinate, lower <math>y</math> coordinate, upper
+<math>x</math> coordinate, and upper <math>y</math> coordinate. The units are
+PostScript points, equivalent to &tex;&textrsquo;s big points, 1/72&nbsp;inch.
+For example, if an <file>.eps</file> file has the line <code>%%BoundingBox 10
+20 40 80</code> then its natural size is 30/72&nbsp;inch wide by
+60/72&nbsp;inch tall.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="includegraphics-bb">includegraphics bb</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">bb</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Specify the bounding box of the displayed region. The argument is four
+dimensions separated by spaces, as with <code>\includegraphics[.., bb=
+0in 0in 1in 0.618in]&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>. Usually <code>\includegraphics</code> reads the
+BoundingBox numbers from the EPS file automatically, so this option is
+only useful if the bounding box is missing from that file or if you want
+to change it.
+</para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-bbllx">includegraphics bbllx</anchor>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-bblly">includegraphics bblly</anchor>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-bburx">includegraphics bburx</anchor>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-bbury">includegraphics bbury</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Set the bounding box. These four are obsolete, but are retained for
+compatibility with old packages.
+</para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-natwidth">includegraphics natwidth</anchor>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-natheight">includegraphics natheight</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">natwidth, natheight</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>An alternative for <code>bb</code>. Setting
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>is the same as setting <code>bb=0 0 1in 0.618in</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-hiresbb">includegraphics hiresbb</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">hiresbb</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>If set to <code>true</code>, or just specified as with
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>then &latex; will look for <code>%%HiResBoundingBox</code> lines instead of
+<code>%%BoundingBox</code> lines. (The <code>BoundingBox</code> lines use only
+natural numbers while the <code>HiResBoundingBox</code> lines use decimals;
+both use units equivalent to &tex;&textrsquo;s big points, 1/72&nbsp;inch.) To
+override a prior setting of <code>true</code>, you can set it to <code>false</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>These following options allow a user to override &latex;&textrsquo;s method of
+choosing the graphic type based on the filename extension. An example
+is that <code>\includegraphics[type=png,ext=.xxx,read=.xxx]&lbrace;lion&rbrace;</code>
+will read the file <file>lion.xxx</file> as though it were
+<file>lion.png</file>. For more on these, <pxref label="_005cDeclareGraphicsRule"><xrefnodename>\DeclareGraphicsRule</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="includegraphics-type">includegraphics type</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">type</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Specify the graphics type.
+</para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-ext">includegraphics ext</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">ext</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Specify the graphics extension.
+Only use this in conjunction with the option <code>type</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-read">includegraphics read</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">read</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Specify the file extension of the read file.
+Only use this in conjunction with the option <code>type</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="includegraphics-command">includegraphics command</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">command</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Specify a command to be applied to this file. Only use this in
+conjunction with the option <code>type</code>. <xref label="Command-line-options"><xrefnodename>Command line options</xrefnodename></xref>
+for a discussion of enabling the <code>\write18</code> functionality to run
+external commands.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005crotatebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\rotatebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\scalebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\includegraphics</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for graphics</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\rotatebox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="700">rotation</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="701">rotating graphics</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="702">rotating text</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="881" mergedindex="cp">\rotatebox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis if you use the <file>graphics</file> package:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\rotatebox&lbrace;<var>angle</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>material</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Synopses if you use the <file>graphicx</file> package:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\rotatebox&lbrace;<var>angle</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>material</var>&rbrace;
+\rotatebox[<var>key-value list</var>]&lbrace;<var>angle</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>material</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Put <var>material</var> in a box and rotate it <var>angle</var> degrees
+counterclockwise.
+</para>
+<para>This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;ll&rbrace;
+ \rotatebox&lbrace;45&rbrace;&lbrace;Character&rbrace; &amp;\rotatebox&lbrace;45&rbrace;&lbrace;NATO phonetic&rbrace; \\
+ A &amp;AL-FAH \\
+ B &amp;BRAH-VOH
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <var>material</var> can be anything that goes in a box, including a graphic.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"> \rotatebox[origin=c]&lbrace;45&rbrace;&lbrace;\includegraphics[width=1in]&lbrace;lion&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>To place the rotated material, the first step is that &latex; sets
+<var>material</var> in a box, with a reference point on the left baseline.
+The second step is the rotation, by default about the reference point.
+The third step is that &latex; computes a box to bound the rotated
+material. Fourth, &latex; moves this box horizontally so that the left
+edge of this new bounding box coincides with the left edge of the box
+from the first step (they need not coincide vertically). This new
+bounding box, in its new position, is what &latex; uses as the box when
+typesetting this material.
+</para>
+<para>If you use the <file>graphics</file> package then the rotation is about the
+reference point of the box. If you use the <file>graphicx</file> package
+then these are the options that can go in the <var>key-value list</var>,
+but note that you can get the same effect without needing this
+package, except for the <code>x</code> and <code>y</code> options
+(<pxref label="_005cincludegraphics"><xrefnodename>\includegraphics</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">origin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The point of the <var>material</var>&textrsquo;s box about which the rotation happens.
+Possible value is any string containing one or two of: <code>l</code> for
+left, <code>r</code> for right, <code>b</code> for bottom, <code>c</code> for center,
+<code>t</code> for top, and <code>B</code> for baseline. Thus, the first line here
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\rotatebox[origin=c]&lbrace;180&rbrace;&lbrace;moon&rbrace;
+\rotatebox[origin=lB]&lbrace;180&rbrace;&lbrace;LeBateau&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>will turn the picture upside down from the center while the second will
+turn its picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character
+<code>c</code> gives the horizontal center in <code>bc</code> or <code>tc</code> but gives
+the vertical center in <code>lc</code> or <code>rc</code>, and gives both in
+<code>c</code>.) The default is <code>lB</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">x, y</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with
+<code>\rotatebox[x=<var>&tex; dimension</var>,y=<var>&tex;
+dimension</var>]&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> (<pxref label="Units-of-length"><xrefnodename>Units of length</xrefnodename></pxref>). These give the offset
+from the box&textrsquo;s reference point.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">units</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>This key allows you to change the default of degrees counterclockwise.
+Setting <code>units=-360</code> changes the direction to degrees clockwise and
+setting <code>units=6.283185</code> changes to radians counterclockwise.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cscalebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\scalebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\resizebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\rotatebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for graphics</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\scalebox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="703">graphics, scaling</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="704">graphics, resizing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="705">scaling</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="706">resizing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="707">text, scaling</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="708">text, resizing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="882" mergedindex="cp">\scalebox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="883" mergedindex="cp">\reflectbox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\scalebox&lbrace;<var>horizontal factor</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>material</var>&rbrace;
+\scalebox&lbrace;<var>horizontal factor</var>&rbrace;[<var>vertical factor</var>]&lbrace;<var>material</var>&rbrace;
+\reflectbox&lbrace;<var>material</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Scale the <var>material</var>.
+</para>
+<para>This example halves the size, both horizontally and vertically, of the
+first text and doubles the size of the second.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\scalebox&lbrace;0.5&rbrace;&lbrace;DRINK ME&rbrace; and \scalebox&lbrace;2.0&rbrace;&lbrace;Eat Me&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>If you do not specify the optional <var>vertical factor</var> then it
+defaults to the same value as the <var>horizontal factor</var>.
+</para>
+<para>You can use this command to resize a graphic, as here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\scalebox&lbrace;0.5&rbrace;&lbrace;\includegraphics&lbrace;lion&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>If you use the <file>graphicx</file> package then you can accomplish the same
+thing with optional arguments to <code>\includegraphics</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cincludegraphics"><xrefnodename>\includegraphics</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\reflectbox</code> command abbreviates
+<code>\scalebox&lbrace;-1&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;<var>material</var>&rbrace;</code>. Thus, <code>Able was
+I\reflectbox&lbrace;Able was I&rbrace;</code> will show the phrase <samp>Able was I</samp>
+immediately followed by its mirror reflection.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cresizebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\resizebox</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\scalebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Commands for graphics</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\resizebox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="709">graphics, scaling</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="710">graphics, resizing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="711">scaling</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="712">resizing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="713">text, scaling</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="714">text, resizing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="884" mergedindex="cp">\resizebox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopses:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\resizebox&lbrace;<var>horizontal length</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>vertical length</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>material</var>&rbrace;
+\resizebox*&lbrace;<var>horizontal length</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>vertical length</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>material</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Given a size, such as <code>3cm</code>, transform <var>material</var> to make it
+that size. If either <var>horizontal length</var> or <var>vertical length</var>
+is an exclamation point&nbsp;<code>!</code> then the other argument is used
+to determine a scale factor for both directions.
+</para>
+<para>This example makes the graphic be a half inch wide and scales it
+vertically by the same factor to keep it from being distorted.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\resizebox&lbrace;0.5in&rbrace;&lbrace;!&rbrace;&lbrace;\includegraphics&lbrace;lion&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The unstarred form <code>\resizebox</code> takes <var>vertical length</var> to be
+the box&textrsquo;s height while the starred form <code>\resizebox*</code> takes it to
+be height+depth. For instance, make the text have a height+depth of a
+quarter inch with <code>\resizebox*&lbrace;!&rbrace;&lbrace;0.25in&rbrace;&lbrace;\parbox&lbrace;1in&rbrace;&lbrace;This
+box has both height and depth.&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>You can use <code>\depth</code>, <code>\height</code>, <code>\totalheight</code>, and
+<code>\width</code> to refer to the original size of the box. Thus, make the
+text two inches wide but keep the original height with
+<code>\resizebox&lbrace;2in&rbrace;&lbrace;\height&rbrace;&lbrace;Two inches&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Special-insertions" spaces=" "><nodename>Special insertions</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Splitting the input</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Graphics</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Special insertions</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="715">special insertions</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="716">insertions of special characters</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; provides commands for inserting characters that have a
+special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Reserved characters</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting <samp># $ % &amp; &lbrace; &rbrace; _ ~ ^ \</samp>
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Upper and lower case</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Make text upper or lower case.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Symbols by font position</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting font symbols by number.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Text symbols</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Accents</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting accents.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Additional Latin letters</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting other non-English characters.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\rule</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting lines and rectangles.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\today</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserting today&textrsquo;s date.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Reserved-characters" spaces=" "><nodename>Reserved characters</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Upper and lower case</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Reserved characters</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="717">reserved characters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="718">characters, reserved</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="719">special characters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="720">characters, special</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&latex; sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For
+example, the percent sign&nbsp;<code>%</code> is for comments. They are
+called <dfn>reserved characters</dfn> or <dfn>special characters</dfn>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"># $ % &amp; &lbrace; &rbrace; _ ~ ^ \
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="885" mergedindex="cp">\#</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="886" mergedindex="cp">\$</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="887" mergedindex="cp">\%</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="888" mergedindex="cp">\&amp;</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="889" mergedindex="cp">\_</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="890" mergedindex="cp">\&lbrace;</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="891" mergedindex="cp">\&rbrace;</indexterm></findex>
+<para>If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
+body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
+put a backslash&nbsp;<code>\</code> in front of the character. Thus,
+typing <code>\$1.23</code> will produce&nbsp;<code>$1.23</code> in your output.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="892" mergedindex="cp">\~</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="893" mergedindex="cp">\^</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="894" mergedindex="cp">\textbackslash</indexterm></findex>
+<para>As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
+use <code>\~&lbrace;&rbrace;</code> (omitting the curly braces would result in the next
+character receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text
+body font circumflex use <code>\^&lbrace;&rbrace;</code>. To get a backslash in the font
+of the text body, enter <code>\textbackslash&lbrace;&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use
+<code>\verb!!</code> as below (the double backslash&nbsp;<code>\\</code> is only
+there to split the lines).
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+ \# \$ \% \&amp; \&lbrace; \&rbrace; \_ \~&lbrace;&rbrace; \^&lbrace;&rbrace; \textbackslash \\
+ \verb!# $ % &amp; &lbrace; &rbrace; _ ~ ^ \!
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Upper-and-lower-case" spaces=" "><nodename>Upper and lower case</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Symbols by font position</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Reserved characters</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Upper and lower case</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="721">uppercase</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="722">lowercase</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="723">characters, case of</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\uppercase&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\lowercase&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\MakeUppercase&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+\MakeLowercase&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Change the case of characters. The &tex; primitives commands
+<code>\uppercase</code> and <code>\lowercase</code> only work for American
+characters. The &latex; commands <code>\MakeUppercase</code> and
+<code>\MakeLowercase</code> commands also change characters accessed by
+commands such as <code>\ae</code> or <code>\aa</code>. The commands
+<code>\MakeUppercase</code> and <code>\MakeLowercase</code> are robust but they have
+moving arguments (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of a
+command within <var>text</var>. But they do change the case of every other
+Latin letter inside the argument <var>text</var>. Thus,
+<code>\MakeUppercase&lbrace;Let $y=f(x)$</code>&rbrace; produces <samp>LET Y=F(X)</samp>. Another
+example is that the name of an environment will be changed, so that
+<code>\MakeUppercase&lbrace;\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace; ... \end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&rbrace;</code> will
+produce an error because the first half is changed to
+<code>\begin&lbrace;TABULAR&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; uses the same fixed table for changing case throughout a
+document, The table used is designed for the font encoding T1; this
+works well with the standard &tex; fonts for all Latin alphabets but
+will cause problems when using other alphabets.
+</para>
+<para>To change the case of text that results from a macro inside <var>text</var>
+you need to do expansion. Here the <code>\Schoolname</code> produces
+<samp>COLLEGE OF MATHEMATICS</samp>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\schoolname&rbrace;&lbrace;College of Mathematics&rbrace;
+\newcommand&lbrace;\Schoolname&rbrace;&lbrace;\expandafter\MakeUppercase
+<w> </w>\expandafter&lbrace;\schoolname&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="724"><r>package</r>, <code>textcase</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="725"><code>textcase</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The <file>textcase</file> package brings some of the missing feature of the
+standard &latex; commands <code>\MakeUppercase</code> and
+<code>\MakeLowerCase</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="726"><r>package</r>, <code>mfirstuc</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="727"><code>mfirstuc</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package
+<file>mfirstuc</file>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Symbols-by-font-position" spaces=" "><nodename>Symbols by font position</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Text symbols</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Upper and lower case</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Symbols by font position</sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="895" mergedindex="cp">\symbol</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="728">accessing any character of a font</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="729">font symbols, by number</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>You can access any character of the current font using its number with
+the <code>\symbol</code> command. For example, the visible space character
+used in the <code>\verb*</code> command has the code decimal 32, so it can be
+typed as <code>\symbol&lbrace;32&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a <code>'</code>
+prefix, or hexadecimal (base 16) with a <code>&quot;</code> prefix, so the previous
+example could also be written as <code>\symbol&lbrace;'40&rbrace;</code> or
+<code>\symbol&lbrace;&quot;20&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Text-symbols" spaces=" "><nodename>Text symbols</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Accents</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Symbols by font position</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Text symbols</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="730">text symbols</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="731">symbols, text</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="896" mergedindex="cp">textcomp <r>package</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
+running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not
+available in OT1. Unless you are using Xe&latex; or Lua&latex; then
+you may need to load the <code>textcomp</code> package.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="897" mergedindex="cp">\copyright</indexterm>\copyright</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="898" mergedindex="cp">\textcopyright</indexterm>\textcopyright</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="732">copyright symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&copyright; The copyright symbol.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="899" mergedindex="cp">\dag</indexterm>\dag</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="733">dagger, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2020</U> The dagger symbol (in text).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="900" mergedindex="cp">\ddag</indexterm>\ddag</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="734">double dagger, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2021</U> The double dagger symbol (in text).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="901" mergedindex="cp">\LaTeX</indexterm>\LaTeX</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="735">&latex; logo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="736">logo, &latex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The &latex; logo.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="902" mergedindex="cp">\LaTeXe</indexterm>\LaTeXe</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="737">&latex;2e logo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="738">logo, &latex;2e</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The &latex;2e logo.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="903" mergedindex="cp">\guillemotleft <r>(&laquo;)</r></indexterm>\guillemotleft <r>(&laquo;)</r></itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="904" mergedindex="cp">\guillemotright <r>(&raquo;)</r></indexterm>\guillemotright <r>(&raquo;)</r></itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="905" mergedindex="cp">\guilsinglleft <r>(&lsaquo;)</r></indexterm>\guilsinglleft <r>(&lsaquo;)</r></itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="906" mergedindex="cp">\guilsinglright <r>(&rsaquo;)</r></indexterm>\guilsinglright <r>(&rsaquo;)</r></itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="739">double guillemets</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="740">single guillemets</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="741">left angle quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="742">right angle quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="743">double angle quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="744">single angle quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="745">French quotation marks</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="746">quotation marks, French</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&laquo;, &raquo;, &lsaquo;, &rsaquo;
+Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="907" mergedindex="cp">\ldots</indexterm>\ldots</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="908" mergedindex="cp">\dots</indexterm>\dots</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="909" mergedindex="cp">\textellipsis</indexterm>\textellipsis</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="747">ellipsis</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&dots; An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): <code>\ldots</code>
+and <code>\dots</code> also work in math mode.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="910" mergedindex="cp">\lq</indexterm>\lq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="748">left quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="749">opening quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textlsquo; Left (opening) quote.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="911" mergedindex="cp">\P</indexterm>\P</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="912" mergedindex="cp">\textparagraph</indexterm>\textparagraph</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="750">paragraph symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="751">pilcrow</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>00B6</U> Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="913" mergedindex="cp">\pounds</indexterm>\pounds</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="914" mergedindex="cp">\textsterling</indexterm>\textsterling</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="752">pounds symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="753">sterling symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&pound; English pounds sterling.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="915" mergedindex="cp">\quotedblbase <r>(&bdquo;)</r></indexterm>\quotedblbase <r>(&bdquo;)</r></itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="916" mergedindex="cp">\quotesinglbase <r>(&sbquo;)</r></indexterm>\quotesinglbase <r>(&sbquo;)</r></itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="754">double low-9 quotation mark</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="755">single low-9 quotation mark</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="756">low-9 quotation marks, single and double</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&bdquo; and &sbquo;
+Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="917" mergedindex="cp">\rq</indexterm>\rq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="757">right quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="758">closing quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textrsquo; Right (closing) quote.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="918" mergedindex="cp">\S</indexterm>\S</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="919" mergedindex="cp">\textsection</indexterm>\textsection</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="759">section symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>00A7</U> Section sign.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="920" mergedindex="cp">\TeX</indexterm>\TeX</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="760">&tex; logo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="761">logo, &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The &tex; logo.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="921" mergedindex="cp">\textasciicircum</indexterm>\textasciicircum</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="762">circumflex, ASCII, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="763">ASCII circumflex, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>^ ASCII circumflex.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="922" mergedindex="cp">\textasciitilde</indexterm>\textasciitilde</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="764">tilde, ASCII, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="765">ASCII tilde, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>~ ASCII tilde.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="923" mergedindex="cp">\textasteriskcentered</indexterm>\textasteriskcentered</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="766">asterisk, centered, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="767">centered asterisk, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>* Centered asterisk.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="924" mergedindex="cp">\textbackslash</indexterm>\textbackslash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="768">backslash, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>\ Backslash.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="925" mergedindex="cp">\textbar</indexterm>\textbar</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="769">vertical bar, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="770">bar, vertical, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>| Vertical bar.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="926" mergedindex="cp">\textbardbl</indexterm>\textbardbl</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="771">vertical bar, double, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="772">bar, double vertical, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="773">double vertical bar, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>23F8</U> Double vertical bar.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="927" mergedindex="cp">\textbigcircle</indexterm>\textbigcircle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="774">big circle symbols, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="775">circle symbol, big, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>25EF</U> Big circle symbol.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="928" mergedindex="cp">\textbraceleft</indexterm>\textbraceleft</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="776">left brace, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="777">brace, left, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&lbrace; Left brace.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="929" mergedindex="cp">\textbraceright</indexterm>\textbraceright</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="778">right brace, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="779">brace, right, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&rbrace; Right brace.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="930" mergedindex="cp">\textbullet</indexterm>\textbullet</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="780">bullet, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&bullet; Bullet.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="931" mergedindex="cp">\textcircled&lbrace;<var>letter</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\textcircled&lbrace;<var>letter</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="781">circled letter, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>24B6</U> Circle around <var>letter</var>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="932" mergedindex="cp">\textcompwordmark</indexterm>\textcompwordmark</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="933" mergedindex="cp">\textcapitalcompwordmark</indexterm>\textcapitalcompwordmark</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="934" mergedindex="cp">\textascendercompwordmark</indexterm>\textascendercompwordmark</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="782">composite word mark, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="783">cap height</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="784">ascender height</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Used to separate letters that would normally ligature. For example,
+<code>f\textcompwordmark i</code> produces <samp>fi</samp> without a ligature. This
+is most useful in non-English languages. The
+<code>\textcapitalcompwordmark</code> form has the cap height of the font
+while the <code>\textascendercompwordmark</code> form has the ascender height.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="935" mergedindex="cp">\textdagger</indexterm>\textdagger</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="785">dagger, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2020</U> Dagger.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="936" mergedindex="cp">\textdaggerdbl</indexterm>\textdaggerdbl</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="786">dagger, double, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="787">double dagger, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2021</U> Double dagger.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="937" mergedindex="cp">\textdollar <r>(or <code>\$</code>)</r></indexterm>\textdollar <r>(or <code>\$</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="788">dollar sign</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="789">currency, dollar</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>$ Dollar sign.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="938" mergedindex="cp">\textemdash <r>(or <code>---</code>)</r></indexterm>\textemdash <r>(or <code>---</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="790">em-dash</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textmdash; Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in
+<code>The playoffs --- if you are fortunate enough to make the playoffs ---
+is more like a sprint.</code>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="939" mergedindex="cp">\textendash <r>(or <code>--</code>)</r></indexterm>\textendash <r>(or <code>--</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="791">e-dash</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textndash; En-dash (used for ranges, as in <code>See pages 12--14</code>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="940" mergedindex="cp">\texteuro</indexterm>\texteuro</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="792">euro symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="793">currency, euro</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="794"><r>package</r>, <code>eurosym</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="795"><code>eurosym</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The Euro symbol: &euro;. For an alternative glyph design, try the
+<file>eurosym</file> package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own
+Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="941" mergedindex="cp">\textexclamdown <r>(or <code>!`</code>)</r></indexterm>\textexclamdown <r>(or <code>!`</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="796">exclamation point, upside-down</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&iexcl; Upside down exclamation point.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="942" mergedindex="cp">\textgreater</indexterm>\textgreater</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="797">greater than symbol, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&gt; Greater than symbol.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="943" mergedindex="cp">\textless</indexterm>\textless</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="798">less than symbol, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&lt; Less than symbol.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="944" mergedindex="cp">\textleftarrow</indexterm>\textleftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="799">arrow, left, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="800">left arrow, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2190</U> Left arrow.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="945" mergedindex="cp">\textordfeminine</indexterm>\textordfeminine</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="946" mergedindex="cp">\textordmasculine</indexterm>\textordmasculine</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="801">feminine ordinal symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="802">masculine ordinal symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="803">ordinals, feminine and masculine</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="804">Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&ordf;, &ordm; Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="947" mergedindex="cp">\textperiodcentered</indexterm>\textperiodcentered</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="805">period, centered, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="806">centered period, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>00B7</U> Centered period.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="948" mergedindex="cp">\textquestiondown <r>(or <code>?`</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquestiondown <r>(or <code>?`</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="807">question mark, upside-down</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&iquest; Upside down question mark.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="949" mergedindex="cp">\textquotedblleft <r>(or <code>``</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquotedblleft <r>(or <code>``</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="808">left quote, double</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="809">double left quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textldquo; Double left quote.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="950" mergedindex="cp">\textquotedblright <r>(or <code>''</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquotedblright <r>(or <code>''</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="810">right quote, double</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="811">double right quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textrdquo; Double right quote.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="951" mergedindex="cp">\textquoteleft <r>(or <code>`</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquoteleft <r>(or <code>`</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="812">left quote, single</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="813">single left quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textlsquo; Single left quote.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="952" mergedindex="cp">\textquoteright <r>(or <code>'</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquoteright <r>(or <code>'</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="814">right quote, single</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="815">single right quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&textrsquo; Single right quote.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="953" mergedindex="cp">\textquotesingle</indexterm>\textquotesingle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="816">quote, single straight</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="817">straight single quote</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="818">single quote, straight</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>0027</U> Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="954" mergedindex="cp">\textquotestraightbase</indexterm>\textquotestraightbase</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="955" mergedindex="cp">\textquotestraightdblbase</indexterm>\textquotestraightdblbase</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="819">quote, straight base</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="820">straight quote, base</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="821">double quote, straight base</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="822">straight double quote, base</indexterm></cindex>
+<!-- c Unicode doesn't have these https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quotation_mark -->
+<para>Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="956" mergedindex="cp">\textregistered</indexterm>\textregistered</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="823">registered symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&registered; Registered symbol.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="957" mergedindex="cp">\textrightarrow</indexterm>\textrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="824">arrow, right, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="825">right arrow, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2192</U> Right arrow.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="958" mergedindex="cp">\textthreequartersemdash</indexterm>\textthreequartersemdash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="826">three-quarters em-dash</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="827">em-dash, three-quarters</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>FE58</U> &textldquo;Three-quarters&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="959" mergedindex="cp">\texttrademark</indexterm>\texttrademark</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="828">trademark symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2122</U> Trademark symbol.
+</para>
+<!-- c ?? Diff from \textthreequartersemdash? In Unicode? -->
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="960" mergedindex="cp">\texttwelveudash</indexterm>\texttwelveudash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="829">two-thirds em-dash</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="830">em-dash, two-thirds</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>FE58</U> &textldquo;Two-thirds&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="961" mergedindex="cp">\textunderscore</indexterm>\textunderscore</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="831">underscore, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>_ Underscore.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="962" mergedindex="cp">\textvisiblespace</indexterm>\textvisiblespace</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="832">visible space symbol, in text</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><U>2423</U> Visible space symbol.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Accents" spaces=" "><nodename>Accents</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Additional Latin letters</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Text symbols</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Accents</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="833">accents</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="834">characters, accented</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="835">letters, accented</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="836"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="837"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="838"><r>package</r>, <code>polyglossia</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="839"><code>polyglossia</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="840">multilingual support</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&latex; has wide support for many of the world&textrsquo;s scripts and languages,
+through the <code>babel</code> package and related support if you are using
+pdf&latex;, or <file>polyglossia</file> if you are using Xe&latex; or
+Lua&latex;. This section does not cover that support. It only lists
+the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. The
+<code>\capital...</code> commands shown here produce alternative forms for use
+with capital letters. These are not available with OT1.
+</para>
+<para>Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated with
+lowercase <samp>o</samp>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="963" mergedindex="cp">\i <r>(dotless i)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="841">dotless i</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Note that <code>\i</code> produces a dotless i,
+<!-- c @dotless{i}, -->
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="964" mergedindex="cp">\j <r>(dotless j)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="842">dotless j</indexterm></cindex>
+and <code>\j</code> produces a dotless j.
+<!-- c @dotless{j}. -->
+These are often used in place of their dotted counterparts when they are
+accented.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\&quot;</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitaldieresis</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="965" mergedindex="cp">\&quot; <r>(umlaut accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="966" mergedindex="cp">\capitaldieresis</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="843">umlaut accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="844">dieresis accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="uml">o</accent> Umlaut (dieresis).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\'</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalacute</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="967" mergedindex="cp">\' <r>(acute accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="968" mergedindex="cp">\capitalacute</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="845">acute accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="acute">o</accent> Acute accent.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\.</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="969" mergedindex="cp">\. <r>(dot-over accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="846">dot accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="847">dot-over accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="dotaccent">o</accent> Dot accent.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\=</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalmacron</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="970" mergedindex="cp">\= <r>(macron accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="971" mergedindex="cp">\capitalmacron</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="848">macron accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="849">overbar accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="850">bar-over accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="macr">o</accent> Macron (overbar) accent.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\^</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalcircumflex</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="972" mergedindex="cp">\^ <r>(circumflex accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="973" mergedindex="cp">\capitalcircumflex</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="851">circumflex accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="852">hat accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="circ">o</accent> Circumflex (hat) accent.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\`</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalgrave</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="974" mergedindex="cp">\` <r>(grave accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="975" mergedindex="cp">\capitalgrave</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="853">grave accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="grave">o</accent> Grave accent.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\~</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitaltilde</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="976" mergedindex="cp">\~ <r>(tilde accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="977" mergedindex="cp">\capitaltilde</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="854">tilde accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="tilde">n</accent> Tilde accent.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="978" mergedindex="cp">\b <r>(bar-under accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="855">bar-under accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="ubaraccent">o</accent> Bar accent underneath.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="979" mergedindex="cp">\underbar</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="856">underbar</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Related to this, <code>\underbar&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</code> produces a bar under
+<var>text</var>. The argument is always processed in LR mode
+(<pxref label="Modes"><xrefnodename>Modes</xrefnodename></pxref>). The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline,
+thus crossing through descenders. See also <code>\underline</code> in
+<ref label="Math-miscellany"><xrefnodename>Math miscellany</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\c</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalcedilla</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="980" mergedindex="cp">\c <r>(cedilla accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="981" mergedindex="cp">\capitalcedilla</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="857">cedilla accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="cedil">c</accent> Cedilla accent underneath.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\d</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitaldotaccent</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="982" mergedindex="cp">\d <r>(dot-under accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="983" mergedindex="cp">\capitaldotaccent</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="858">dot-under accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="udotaccent">o</accent> Dot accent underneath.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\H</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalhungarumlaut</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="984" mergedindex="cp">\H <r>(Hungarian umlaut accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="985" mergedindex="cp">\capitalhungarumlaut</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="859">hungarian umlaut accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="doubleacute">o</accent> Long Hungarian umlaut accent.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\k</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalogonek</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="986" mergedindex="cp">\k <r>(ogonek)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="987" mergedindex="cp">\capitalogonek</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="860">ogonek</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="ogon">o</accent> Ogonek. Not available in the OT1 encoding.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\r</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalring</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="988" mergedindex="cp">\r <r>(ring accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="989" mergedindex="cp">\capitalring</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="861">ring accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="ring">o</accent> Ring accent.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\t</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitaltie</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\newtie</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalnewtie</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="990" mergedindex="cp">\t <r>(tie-after accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="991" mergedindex="cp">\capitaltie</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="992" mergedindex="cp">\newtie</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="993" mergedindex="cp">\capitalnewtie</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="862">tie-after accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="tieaccent">oo</accent> Tie-after accent. The <code>\newtie</code> form is centered in
+its box.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\u</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalbreve</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="994" mergedindex="cp">\u <r>(breve accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="995" mergedindex="cp">\capitalbreve</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="863">breve accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="breve">o</accent> Breve accent.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\v</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalcaron</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="996" mergedindex="cp">\v <r>(breve accent)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="997" mergedindex="cp">\capitalcaron</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="864">hacek accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="865">check accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="866">caron accent</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><accent type="caron">o</accent> H<accent type="acute" bracketed="off">a</accent><accent type="caron">c</accent>ek (check, caron) accent.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Additional-Latin-letters" spaces=" "><nodename>Additional Latin letters</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\rule</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Accents</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Additional Latin letters</sectiontitle>
+
+<anchor name="Non_002dEnglish-characters">Non-English characters</anchor>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="867">Latin letters, additional</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="868">letters, additional Latin</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="869">extended Latin</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="870">special characters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="871">non-English characters</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="872">characters, non-English</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting letters beyond
+A&textndash;Z that extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other
+than English.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\aa</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\AA</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="998" mergedindex="cp">\aa (&aring;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="999" mergedindex="cp">\AA (&Aring;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="873">aring</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&aring; and &Aring;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ae</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\AE</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1000" mergedindex="cp">\ae (&aelig;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1001" mergedindex="cp">\AE (&AElig;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="874">ae ligature</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&aelig; and &AElig;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\dh</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DH</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1002" mergedindex="cp">\dh (&eth;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1003" mergedindex="cp">\DH (&ETH;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="875">Icelandic eth</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="876">eth, Icelandic letter</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Icelandic letter eth: &eth; and &ETH;. Not available with <sc>OT1</sc>
+encoding, you need the <file>fontenc</file> package to select an alternate
+font encoding, such as <sc>T1</sc>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\dj</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DJ</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1004" mergedindex="cp">\dj</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1005" mergedindex="cp">\DJ</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Crossed d and D, a.k.a.&noeos; capital and small letter d with stroke. Not
+available with <sc>OT1</sc> encoding, you need the <file>fontenc</file> package to
+select an alternate font encoding, such as <sc>T1</sc>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ij</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\IJ</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1006" mergedindex="cp">\ij (ij)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1007" mergedindex="cp">\IJ (IJ)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="877">ij letter, Dutch</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\l</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\L</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1008" mergedindex="cp">\l (&lslash;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1009" mergedindex="cp">\L (&Lslash;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="878">polish l</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&lslash; and &Lslash;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ng</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\NG</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1010" mergedindex="cp">\ng</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1011" mergedindex="cp">\NG</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Lappish letter eng, also used in phonetics.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\o</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\O</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1012" mergedindex="cp">\o (&oslash;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1013" mergedindex="cp">\O (&Oslash;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="879">oslash</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&oslash; and &Oslash;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\oe</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\OE</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1014" mergedindex="cp">\oe (&oelig;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1015" mergedindex="cp">\OE (&OElig;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="880">oe ligature</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&oelig; and &OElig;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ss</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\SS</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1016" mergedindex="cp">\ss (&szlig;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1017" mergedindex="cp">\SS (SS)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="881">es-zet German letter</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="882">sharp S letters</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&szlig; and SS.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\th</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\TH</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1018" mergedindex="cp">\th (&thorn;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1019" mergedindex="cp">\TH (&THORN;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="883">Icelandic thorn</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="884">thorn, Icelandic letter</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Icelandic letter thorn: &thorn; and &THORN;. Not available with <sc>OT1</sc>
+encoding, you need the <file>fontenc</file> package to select an alternate
+font encoding, such as <sc>T1</sc>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005crule" spaces=" "><nodename>\rule</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\today</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Additional Latin letters</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\rule</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1020" mergedindex="cp">\rule</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\rule&lbrace;<var>width</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>thickness</var>&rbrace;
+\rule[<var>raise</var>]&lbrace;<var>width</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>thickness</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a <dfn>rule</dfn>, a filled-in rectangle.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="885">Halmos symbol</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="886">tombstone</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol,
+often used to mark the end of a proof.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\qedsymbol&rbrace;&lbrace;\rule&lbrace;0.4em&rbrace;&lbrace;2ex&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="887"><r>package</r>, <code>amsthm</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="888"><code>amsthm</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <file>amsthm</file> package includes this command, with a somewhat
+different-looking symbol.
+</para>
+<para>The mandatory arguments give the horizontal <var>width</var> and vertical
+<var>thickness</var> of the rectangle. They are rigid lengths
+(<pxref label="Lengths"><xrefnodename>Lengths</xrefnodename></pxref>). The optional argument <var>raise</var> is also a rigid
+length, and tells &latex; how much to raise the rule above the
+baseline, or lower it if the length is negative.
+</para>
+<para>This produces a line, a rectangle that is wide but not tall.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\noindent\rule&lbrace;\textwidth&rbrace;&lbrace;0.4pt&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The line is the width of the page and 0.4&nbsp;points tall. This line
+thickness is common in &latex;.
+</para>
+<para>A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in the
+output, but can cause &latex; to change the output around it.
+<xref label="_005cstrut"><xrefnodename>\strut</xrefnodename></xref> for examples.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005ctoday" spaces=" "><nodename>\today</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\rule</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\today</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1021" mergedindex="cp">\today</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="889">date, today&textrsquo;s</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="890">today&textrsquo;s date</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\today
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce today&textrsquo;s date in the format <samp><var>month</var> <var>dd</var>,
+<var>yyyy</var></samp>. An example of a date in that format is <samp>July 4,
+1976</samp>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="891"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="892"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="893"><r>package</r>, <code>polyglossia</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="894"><code>polyglossia</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Multilingual packages such as <file>babel</file> or <file>polyglossia</file>, or
+classes such as <file>lettre</file>, will localize <code>\today</code>. For example,
+the following will output <samp>4 juillet 1976</samp>:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\year=1976 \month=7 \day=4
+\documentclass&lbrace;minimal&rbrace;
+\usepackage[french]&lbrace;babel&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\today
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para><code>\today</code> uses the counters <code>\day</code>, <code>\month</code>, and
+<code>\year</code> (<pxref label="_005cday-_0026-_005cmonth-_0026-_005cyear"><xrefnodename>\day &amp; \month &amp; \year</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="895"><r>package</r>, <code>datetime</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="896"><code>datetime</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>A number of package on CTAN work with dates. One is <file>datetime</file> package
+which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO standards.
+</para>
+<para>The date is not updated as the &latex; process runs, so in principle the
+date could be incorrect by the time the program finishes.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Splitting-the-input" spaces=" "><nodename>Splitting the input</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Front/back matter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Special insertions</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Splitting the input</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="897">splitting the input file</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="898">input file</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; lets you split a large document into several smaller ones.
+This can simplify editing or allow multiple authors to work on the
+document. It can also speed processing.
+</para>
+<para>Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is always one
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="899">root file</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="900">file, root</indexterm></cindex>
+<dfn>root file</dfn>, on which &latex; compilation starts. This shows such
+a file with five included files.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;book&rbrace;
+\includeonly&lbrace; % comment out lines below to omit compiling
+ pref,
+ chap1,
+ chap2,
+ append,
+ bib
+ &rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\frontmatter
+\include&lbrace;pref&rbrace;
+\mainmatter
+\include&lbrace;chap1&rbrace;
+\include&lbrace;chap2&rbrace;
+\appendix
+\include&lbrace;append&rbrace;
+\backmatter
+\include&lbrace;bib&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>This will bring in material from <file>pref.tex</file>, <file>chap1.tex</file>,
+<file>chap2.tex</file>, <file>append.tex</file>, and <file>bib.tex</file>. If you compile
+this file, and then comment out all of the lines inside
+<code>\includeonly&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> except for <code>chap1,</code> and compile again,
+then &latex; will only process the material in the first chapter.
+Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to print.
+However, the advantage of the <code>\includeonly</code> command is that
+&latex; will retain the page numbers and all of the cross reference
+information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in
+your output correctly.
+</para>
+<para><xref label="Larger-book-template"><xrefnodename>Larger book template</xrefnodename></xref> for another example of <code>\includeonly</code>.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\endinput</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Stop including material from a file.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\include &amp; \includeonly</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Conditionally include files.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\input</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Unconditionally include a file.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+
+<node name="_005cendinput" spaces=" "><nodename>\endinput</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\include &amp; \includeonly</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Splitting the input</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\endinput</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1022" mergedindex="cp">\endinput</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\endinput
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>When you <code>\include&lbrace;filename&rbrace;</code>, inside <file>filename.tex</file> the
+material after <code>\endinput</code> will not be included. This command is
+optional; if <file>filename.tex</file> has no <code>\endinput</code> then &latex;
+will read all of the file.
+</para>
+<para>For example, suppose that a document&textrsquo;s root file has
+<code>\input&lbrace;chap1&rbrace;</code> and this is <file>chap1.tex</file>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter&lbrace;One&rbrace;
+This material will appear in the document.
+\endinput
+This will not appear.
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end of a
+file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during mailing.
+It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize errors is to
+put <code>\endinput</code> halfway through the included file and see if the
+error disappears. Now, knowing which half contains the error, moving
+<code>\endinput</code> to halfway through that area further narrows down the
+location. This process rapidly finds the offending line.
+</para>
+<para>After reading <code>\endinput</code>, &latex; continues to read to the end of
+the line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless.
+This allows you, for instance, to close an <code>\if...</code> with a
+<code>\fi</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly" spaces=" "><nodename>\include &amp; \includeonly</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\input</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\endinput</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Splitting the input</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\include</code> &amp; <code>\includeonly</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1023" mergedindex="cp">\include</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1024" mergedindex="cp">\includeonly</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includeonly&lbrace; % in document preamble
+ ...
+ <var>filename</var>,
+ ...
+ &rbrace;
+ ...
+\include&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace; % in document body
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Bring material from the external file <file><var>filename</var>.tex</file> into a
+&latex; document.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\include</code> command does three things: it executes
+<code>\clearpage</code> (<pxref label="_005cclearpage-_0026-_005ccleardoublepage"><xrefnodename>\clearpage &amp; \cleardoublepage</xrefnodename></pxref>), then it
+inputs the material from <file><var>filename</var>.tex</file> into the document,
+and then it does another <code>\clearpage</code>. This command can only
+appear in the document body. The <code>\includeonly</code> command controls
+which files will be read by &latex; under subsequent <code>\include</code>
+commands. Its list of filenames is comma-separated, and it can only
+appear in the preamble.
+</para>
+<para>This example root document, <file>constitution.tex</file>, brings in
+three files, <file>preamble.tex</file>, <file>articles.tex</file>, and
+<file>amendments.tex</file>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;book&rbrace;
+\includeonly&lbrace;
+ preamble,
+ articles,
+ amendments
+ &rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\include&lbrace;preamble&rbrace;
+\include&lbrace;articles&rbrace;
+\include&lbrace;amendments&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The file <file>preamble.tex</file> contains no special code; you have just
+excerpted the chapter from <file>consitution.tex</file> and put it in a
+separate file just for editing convenience.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter&lbrace;Preamble&rbrace;
+We the People of the United States,
+in Order to form a more perfect Union, ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Running &latex; on <file>constitution.tex</file> makes the material from the
+three files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary
+files <file>preamble.aux</file>, <file>articles.aux</file>, and
+<file>amendments.tex</file>. These contain information such as page numbers
+and cross-references (<pxref label="Cross-references"><xrefnodename>Cross references</xrefnodename></pxref>). If you now comment out
+<code>\includeonly</code>&textrsquo;s lines with <code>preamble</code> and <code>amendments</code>
+and run &latex; again then the resulting document shows only the
+material from <file>articles.tex</file>, not the material from
+<file>preamble.tex</file> or <file>amendments.tex</file>. Nonetheless, all of the
+auxiliary information from the omitted files is still there, including
+the starting page number of the chapter.
+</para>
+<para>If the document preamble does not have <code>\includeonly</code> then
+&latex; will include all the files you call for with <code>\include</code>
+commands.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\include</code> command makes a new page. To avoid that, see
+<ref label="_005cinput"><xrefnodename>\input</xrefnodename></ref> (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary
+information).
+</para>
+<para><xref label="Larger-book-template"><xrefnodename>Larger book template</xrefnodename></xref> for another example using <code>\include</code>
+and <code>\includeonly</code>. That example also uses <code>\input</code> for some
+material that will not necessarily start on a new page.
+</para>
+<para>File names can involve paths.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;book&rbrace;
+\includeonly&lbrace;
+ chapters/chap1,
+ &rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\include&lbrace;chapters/chap1&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name <samp>amo amas amat</samp>,
+this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;book&rbrace;
+\includeonly&lbrace;
+ &quot;amo\space amas\space amat&quot;
+ &rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\include&lbrace;&quot;amo\space amas\space amat&quot;&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>and this works under MiK&tex; on Windows:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;book&rbrace;
+\includeonly&lbrace;
+ &lbrace;&quot;amo amas amat&quot;&rbrace;
+ &rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\include&lbrace;&lbrace;&quot;amo amas amat&quot;&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="901">nested <code>\include</code>, not allowed</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>You cannot use <code>\include</code> inside a file that is being included or
+you get <samp>LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested.</samp> The
+<code>\include</code> command cannot appear in the document preamble; you will
+get <samp>LaTeX Error: Missing \begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>If a file that you <code>\include</code> does not exist, for instance if you
+<code>\include&lbrace;athiesm&rbrace;</code> but you meant <code>\include&lbrace;atheism&rbrace;</code>,
+then &latex; does not give you an error but will warn you <samp>No file
+athiesm.tex.</samp> (It will also create <file>athiesm.aux</file>.)
+</para>
+<para>If you <code>\include</code> the root file in itself then you first get
+<samp>LaTeX Error: Can be used only in preamble.</samp> Later runs get
+<samp>TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]</samp>. To fix
+this, you must remove the inclusion <code>\include&lbrace;root&rbrace;</code> but also
+delete the file <file><var>root</var>.aux</file> and rerun &latex;.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cinput" spaces=" "><nodename>\input</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\include &amp; \includeonly</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Splitting the input</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\input</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1025" mergedindex="cp">\input</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\input&lbrace;<var>filename</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>&latex; processes the file as if its contents were inserted in the
+current file. For a more sophisticated inclusion mechanism see
+<ref label="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly"><xrefnodename>\include &amp; \includeonly</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>If <var>filename</var> does not end in <samp>.tex</samp> then &latex; first tries
+the filename with that extension; this is the usual case. If
+<var>filename</var> ends with <samp>.tex</samp> then &latex; looks for the
+filename as it is.
+</para>
+<para>For example, this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\input&lbrace;macros&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>will cause &latex; to first look for <file>macros.tex</file>. If it finds
+that file then it processes its contents as thought they had been
+copy-pasted in. If there is no file of the name <file>macros.tex</file> then
+&latex; tries the name <file>macros</file>, without an extension. (This may
+vary by distribution.)
+</para>
+<para>To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you
+should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use
+dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name <samp>amo amas amat</samp>,
+this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\input&lbrace;&quot;amo\space amas\space amat&quot;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>and this works under MiK&tex; on Windows:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\input&lbrace;&lbrace;&quot;amo amas amat&quot;&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Front_002fback-matter" spaces=" "><nodename>Front/back matter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Letters</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Splitting the input</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Front/back matter</sectiontitle>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Table of contents etc.</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Table of contents, list of figures, list of tables.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Indexes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Generate an index.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Glossaries</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Generate a glossary.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Table-of-contents-etc_002e" spaces=" "><nodename>Table of contents etc.</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Indexes</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Front/back matter</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Table of contents etc.</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="902">table of contents, creating</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1026" mergedindex="cp">\tableofcontents</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1027" mergedindex="cp">.toc <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1028" mergedindex="cp">\listoffigures</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1029" mergedindex="cp">\listoftables</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1030" mergedindex="cp">.lof <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1031" mergedindex="cp">.lot <r>file</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\tableofcontents
+\listoffigures
+\listoftables
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a table of contents, or list of figures, or list of tables. Put
+the command in the input file where you want the table or list to
+go. You do not type the entries; for example, typically the table of
+contents entries are automatically generated from the sectioning
+commands <code>\chapter</code>, etc.
+</para>
+<para>This example illustrates the first command, <code>\tableofcontents</code>.
+&latex; will produce a table of contents on the book&textrsquo;s first page.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;book&rbrace;
+% \setcounter&lbrace;tocdepth&rbrace;&lbrace;1&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+ ...
+\chapter&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+ ...
+\section&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+ ...
+\subsection&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter
+and section listings but not subsection listings, because the
+<code>\section</code> command has level&nbsp;1. <xref label="Sectioning"><xrefnodename>Sectioning</xrefnodename></xref> for level
+numbers of the sectioning units. For more on the <code>tocdepth</code>
+<pxref label="Sectioning_002ftocdepth"><xrefnodename>Sectioning/tocdepth</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+</para>
+<para>Another example of the use of <code>\tableofcontents</code> is in <ref label="Larger-book-template"><xrefnodename>Larger
+book template</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>If you want a page break after the table of contents, write a
+<code>\newpage</code> command after the <code>\tableofcontents</code> command, as
+above.
+</para>
+<para>To make the table of contents &latex; stores the information in an
+auxiliary file named <file><var>root-file</var>.toc</file> (<pxref label="Splitting-the-input"><xrefnodename>Splitting the
+input</xrefnodename></pxref>). For example, this &latex; file <file>test.tex</file>
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;article&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+\section&lbrace;First section&rbrace;
+\subsection&lbrace;First subsection&rbrace;
+ ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>writes the following line to <file>test.toc</file>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\contentsline &lbrace;section&rbrace;&lbrace;\numberline &lbrace;1&rbrace;First section&rbrace;&lbrace;2&rbrace;
+\contentsline &lbrace;subsection&rbrace;&lbrace;\numberline &lbrace;1.1&rbrace;First subsection&rbrace;&lbrace;2&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <code>section</code> or <code>subsection</code> is the sectioning unit. The
+hook <code>\numberline</code> lets you to change how the information appears
+in the table of contents. Of its two arguments, <code>1</code> or <code>1.1</code>
+is the sectioning unit number and <code>First section</code> or <code>First
+subsection</code> is the title. Finally, <code>2</code> is the page number on which
+the sectioning units start.
+</para>
+<para>One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to get the
+contents page correct you must run &latex; twice, once to store the
+information and once to get it. In particular, the first time that you
+run &latex; on a new document, the table of contents page will be empty
+except for its <samp>Contents</samp> header. Just run it again.
+</para>
+<para>The commands <code>\listoffigures</code> and <code>\listoftables</code> produce a
+list of figures and a list of tables. They work the same way as the
+contents commands; for instance, these work with information stored in
+<file>.lof</file> and <file>.lot</file> files.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="903"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="904"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="905"><r>package</r>, <code>polyglossia</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="906"><code>polyglossia</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>To change the header for the table of contents page do something like
+the first line here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand&lbrace;\contentsname&rbrace;&lbrace;Table of contents&rbrace;
+\renewcommand&lbrace;\listfigurename&rbrace;&lbrace;Plots&rbrace;
+\renewcommand&lbrace;\listtablename&rbrace;&lbrace;Tables&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two.
+Internationalization packages such as <file>babel</file> or <file>polyglossia</file>
+will change the headers depending on the chosen base language.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="907"><r>package</r>, <code>tocloft</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="908"><code>tocloft</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="909"><r>package</r>, <code>tocbibbind</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="910"><code>tocbibbind</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures
+and tables. One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the
+default, such as spacing, is <file>tocloft</file>. And, <file>tocbibbind</file>
+will automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to the table of
+contents.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\addcontentsline</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add an entry to table of contents, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\addtocontents</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Add text directly to table of contents file, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\nofiles</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Prevent writing to auxiliary files.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005caddcontentsline" spaces=" "><nodename>\addcontentsline</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addtocontents</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Table of contents etc.</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addcontentsline</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1032" mergedindex="cp">\addcontentsline</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="911">table of contents entry, manually adding</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addcontentsline&lbrace;<var>ext</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>unit</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1033" mergedindex="cp">\contentsline</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Add an entry to the file specified by <var>ext</var>. Usually <var>ext</var> is
+one of <code>toc</code> for the table of contents, <code>lof</code> for the list of
+figures, or <code>lot</code> for the list of tables.
+</para>
+<para>The following will result in an <samp>Appendices</samp> line in the table of
+contents.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addcontentsline&lbrace;toc&rbrace;&lbrace;section&rbrace;&lbrace;\protect\textbf&lbrace;Appendices&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>It will appear at the same indentation level as the sections, will be in
+boldface, and will be assigned the page number associated with the point
+where it appears in the input file.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\addcontentsline</code> command writes information to the file
+<file><var>root-name</var>.<var>ext</var></file>. It writes that information as the
+text of the command
+<code>\contentsline&lbrace;<var>unit</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>num</var>&rbrace;</code>, where
+<code><var>num</var></code> is the current value of counter <code><var>unit</var></code>. The
+most common case is the table of contents and there <var>num</var> is the
+page number of the first page of <var>unit</var>.
+</para>
+<para>This command is invoked by the sectioning commands <code>\chapter</code>,
+etc., and also by <code>\caption</code> inside a float environment. But it is
+also used by authors. For example, in a book to have the preface
+unnumbered, you may use the starred <code>\chapter*</code>. But that does not
+put in table of contents information, so you can enter it manually, as
+here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter*&lbrace;Preface&rbrace;
+\addcontentsline&lbrace;toc&rbrace;&lbrace;chapter&rbrace;&lbrace;\protect\numberline&lbrace;&rbrace;Preface&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>In the <file>.toc</file> file &latex; will put the line <code>\contentsline
+&lbrace;chapter&rbrace;&lbrace;\numberline &lbrace;&rbrace;Preface&rbrace;&lbrace;3&rbrace;</code>; note the page number
+<samp>3</samp>.
+</para>
+<!-- c xx how hardwired are these values? other unit names? -->
+
+<para>All of the arguments for <code>\addcontentsline</code> are required.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">ext</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Typically one of the strings <code>toc</code> for the table of contents,
+<code>lof</code> for the list of figures, or <code>lot</code> for the list of
+tables. The filename extension of the information file.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">unit</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A string that depends on the value of the <var>ext</var> argument:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">toc</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>For the table of contents, this is the name of a sectional unit:
+<code>part</code>, <code>chapter</code>, <code>section</code>, <code>subsection</code>, etc.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">lof</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>For the list of figures: <code>figure</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">lot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>For the list of tables: <code>table</code>.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">text</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The text of the entry. You must <code>\protect</code> any commands that are
+fragile (<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>The <code>\addcontentsline</code> command has an interaction with
+<code>\include</code> (<pxref label="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly"><xrefnodename>\include &amp; \includeonly</xrefnodename></pxref>). If you use them at
+the same level, as with
+<code>\addcontentsline&lbrace;...&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;\include&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> then lines
+in the table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution
+is to move <code>\addcontentsline</code> into the file being included.
+</para>
+<para>If you use a <var>unit</var> that &latex; does not recognize, as here
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addcontentsline&lbrace;toc&rbrace;&lbrace;setcion&rbrace;&lbrace;\protect\textbf&lbrace;Appendices&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>then you don&textrsquo;t get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
+will not make sense.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005caddtocontents" spaces=" "><nodename>\addtocontents</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\nofiles</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\addcontentsline</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Table of contents etc.</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addtocontents</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1034" mergedindex="cp">\addtocontents&lbrace;<var>ext</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\addtocontents&lbrace;<var>ext</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Add <var>text</var>, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to
+the auxiliary file with extension <var>ext</var>. This is most commonly used
+for the table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also
+applies to the list of figures and list of tables.
+</para>
+<para>This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the
+<samp>Contents</samp> header.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\tableofcontents\newpage
+\addtocontents&lbrace;toc&rbrace;&lbrace;\protect\vspace*&lbrace;3ex&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <code>\addtocontents</code> command has two arguments. Both are
+required.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">ext</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Typically one of: <file>toc</file> for the table of contents, <file>lof</file> for
+the list of figures, or <file>lot</file> for the list of tables. The
+extension of the file holding the information.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">text</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The text, and possibly commands, to be written.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>The sectioning commands such as <code>\chapter</code> use the
+<code>\addcontentsline</code> command to store information. This command
+creates lines in the <file>.toc</file> auxiliary file containing the
+<code>\contentsline</code> command (<pxref label="_005caddcontentsline"><xrefnodename>\addcontentsline</xrefnodename></pxref>). In contrast,
+the command <code>\addtocontents</code> puts material directly in that file.
+</para>
+<para>The <code>\addtocontents</code> command has an interaction with
+<code>\include</code> (<pxref label="_005cinclude-_0026-_005cincludeonly"><xrefnodename>\include &amp; \includeonly</xrefnodename></pxref>). If you use them at
+the same level, as with
+<code>\addtocontents&lbrace;...&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;\include&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code> then lines in the
+table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution is to
+move <code>\addtocontents</code> into the file being included.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cnofiles" spaces=" "><nodename>\nofiles</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\addtocontents</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Table of contents etc.</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\nofiles</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1035" mergedindex="cp">\nofiles</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\nofiles
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Prevent &latex; from writing any auxiliary files. The only output will
+be the <file>.log</file> and <file>.pdf</file> (or <file>.dvi</file>) files. This command
+must go in the preamble.
+</para>
+<para>Because of the <code>\nofiles</code> command this example will not produce a
+<file>.toc</file> file.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;book&rbrace;
+\nofiles
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\tableofcontents\newpage
+\chapter&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+ ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>&latex; will not erase any existing auxiliary files, so if you insert
+the <code>\nofiles</code> command after you have run the file and gotten
+a <file>.toc</file> then the table of contents page will continue to show
+the old information.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="Indexes" spaces=" "><nodename>Indexes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Glossaries</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Table of contents etc.</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Front/back matter</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Indexes</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="912">indexes</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1036" mergedindex="cp">\makeindex</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1037" mergedindex="cp">\index</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="913"><file>.idx</file> file</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>This document has an index.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;article&rbrace;
+\usepackage&lbrace;makeidx&rbrace; \makeindex
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+ ...
+Recall Wilson's Theorem: \index&lbrace;Wilson's Theorem&rbrace;
+a number \( n&gt;1 \) is prime if and only if the factorial of \( n-1 \)
+is congruent to \( -1 \) modulo~\( n \).
+ ...
+\printindex
+ ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <code>\usepackage&lbrace;makeidx&rbrace;</code> and <code>\makeindex</code> in the preamble
+bring in the relevant commands.
+</para>
+<para>Producing an index is a three stage process. First, in the document
+body you declare index entries with the <code>\index</code> command
+(<pxref label="_005cindex"><xrefnodename>\index</xrefnodename></pxref>). When you run &latex;, the <code>\index</code> writes its
+information to an auxiliary file <file><var>root-name</var>.idx</file>. Next, to
+alphabetize and to do other manipulations you run an external command,
+typically <command>makeindex</command> or <command>xindy</command> (<pxref label="makeindex"><xrefnodename>makeindex</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+These output a file <file><var>root-name</var>.ind</file>. Finally, you bring the
+information back into your document and typeset it with the
+<code>\printindex</code> command (<pxref label="_005cprintindex"><xrefnodename>\printindex</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="914"><r>package</r>, <code>showidx</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="915"><code>showidx</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="916"><r>package</r>, <code>multind</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="917"><code>multind</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>There are many packages that apply to indexing commands. The
+<code>showidx</code> package causes each index entries to be shown in the
+margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing
+the index. The <code>multind</code> package supports multiple indexes. See
+also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic,
+<url><urefurl>http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\index</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Declare an index entry.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">makeindex</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Alphabetize index entries.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\printindex</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Put the index here.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cindex" spaces=" "><nodename>\index</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">makeindex</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Indexes</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\index</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="918">index entry</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1038" mergedindex="cp">\index</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\index&lbrace;<var>index-entry-string</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Declare an entry in the index. This command is fragile
+(<pxref label="_005cprotect"><xrefnodename>\protect</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>For example, as described in <ref label="Indexes"><xrefnodename>Indexes</xrefnodename></ref>, one way to get an index from
+what&textrsquo;s below is to compile the document with <code>pdflatex test</code>, then
+process the index entries with <code>makeindex test</code>, and then compile
+again with <code>pdflatex test</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index&lbrace;Ackermann&rbrace;
+ ...
+Ackermann function\index&lbrace;Ackermann!function&rbrace;
+ ...
+rate of growth\index&lbrace;Ackermann!function!growth rate&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>All three index entries will get a page number, such as <samp>Ackermann,
+22</samp>. &latex; will format the second as a subitem of the first, on the
+line below it and indented, and the third as a subitem of the second.
+Three levels deep is as far as you can nest subentries. (If you add
+<code>\index&lbrace;Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison&rbrace;</code> then
+<command>makeindex</command> says <samp>Scanning input file test.idx....done (4
+entries accepted, 1 rejected)</samp> and nothing appears in the index).
+</para>
+<para>If you enter a second <code>\index</code> with the same
+<var>index-entry-string</var> then you will get a single index entry with two
+page numbers (unless they happen to fall on the same page). Thus,
+adding <code>as for Ackermann.\index&lbrace;Ackermann&rbrace;</code> later in the same
+document as above will give an index entry like <samp>Ackermann, 22,
+151</samp>. Also, you can enter the index entries in any order, so for
+instance <code>\index&lbrace;Ackermann!function&rbrace;</code> could come before
+<code>\index&lbrace;Ackermann&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="919">index, page range</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Get a page range in the output, like <samp>Hilbert, 23--27</samp>, as here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index&lbrace;Ackermann&rbrace;
+ ...
+D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index&lbrace;Ackermann!Hilbert\(&rbrace;
+ ...
+disapproved of his marriage.\index&lbrace;Ackermann!Hilbert\)&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>If the beginning and ending of the page range are equal then the system
+just gives a single page entry, not a range.
+</para>
+<para>If you index subentries but not a main entry, as with
+<code>\index&lbrace;Jones!program&rbrace;</code> and <code>\index&lbrace;Jones!results&rbrace;</code>, then
+the output is the item <samp>Jones</samp> with no comma or page number,
+followed by two subitems, like <samp>program, 50</samp> and <samp>results,
+51</samp>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="920">&textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo; index entries</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="921">index entries, &textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo;</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1039" mergedindex="cp">\seename</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1040" mergedindex="cp">\alsoname</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="922"><r>package</r>, <code>babel</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="923"><code>babel</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+ <cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="924"><r>package</r>, <code>polyglossia</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="925"><code>polyglossia</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+
+<para>Generate a index entry that says <samp>See</samp> by using a vertical bar
+character: <code>\index&lbrace;Ackermann!function|see&lbrace;P\'eter's
+function&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>. You can instead get <samp>See also</samp> with <code>seealso</code>.
+(The text <samp>See</samp> is defined by <code>\seename</code>, and <samp>See also</samp>
+by <code>\alsoname</code>. You can redefine these either by using an
+internationalization package such as <file>babel</file> or <file>polyglossia</file>,
+or directly as with <code>\renewcommand&lbrace;\alsoname&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;Also see
+#1&rbrace;</code>.)
+</para>
+<para>The <samp>See</samp> feature is part of a more general functionality. After
+the vertical bar you can put the name of a one-input command, as in
+<code>\index&lbrace;group|textit&rbrace;</code> (note the missing backslash on the
+<code>\textit</code> command) and the system will apply that command to the
+page number, here giving something like <code>\textit&lbrace;7&rbrace;</code>. You can
+define your own one-input commands, such as
+<code>\newcommand&lbrace;\definedpage&rbrace;[1]&lbrace;&lbrace;\color&lbrace;blue&rbrace;#1&rbrace;&rbrace;</code> and then
+<code>\index&lbrace;Ackermann!function|definedpage&rbrace;</code> will give a blue page
+number (<pxref label="Color"><xrefnodename>Color</xrefnodename></pxref>). Another, less practical, example is this,
+</para>
+<!-- c credit Ian Thompson https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/272572/121234 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand\indexownpage[1]&lbrace;#1, \thepage&rbrace;
+ ... Epimenides.\index&lbrace;self-reference|indexownpage&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>which creates an entry citing the page number of its own index listing.
+</para>
+<para>The two functions just described combine, as here
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\index&lbrace;Ackermann!function|(definedpage&rbrace;
+ ...
+\index&lbrace;Ackermann!function|)&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>which outputs an index entry like <samp>function, 23--27</samp> where the page
+number range is in blue.
+</para>
+<para>Consider an index entry such as <samp><U>03B1</U>-ring</samp>. Entering
+it as <code>$\alpha$-ring</code> will cause it to be alphabetized according to
+the dollar sign. You can instead enter it using an at-sign, as
+<code>\index&lbrace;alpha-ring&arobase;$\alpha$-ring&rbrace;</code>. If you specify an entry
+with an at-sign separating two strings, <code><var>pos</var>&arobase;<var>text</var></code>,
+then <var>pos</var> gives the alphabetical position of the entry while
+<var>text</var> produces the text of the entry. Another example is that
+<code>\index&lbrace;Saint Michael's College&arobase;SMC&rbrace;</code> produces an index entry
+<samp>SMC</samp> alphabetized into a different location than its spelling
+would naturally give it.
+</para>
+<para>To put a <code>!</code>, or <code>&arobase;</code>, or <code>|</code> character in an index
+entry, preceding it with a double quote, <code>&quot;</code>. (The double quote
+gets deleted before alphabetization.)
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="926"><r>package</r>, <code>index</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="927"><code>index</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond that
+provided by <file>makeidx</file>. One is <file>index</file>, which allows for
+multiple indices and contains a command
+<code>\index*&lbrace;<var>index-entry-string</var>&rbrace;</code> that prints the
+<var>index-entry-string</var> as well as indexing it.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1041" mergedindex="cp">\indexentry</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="928">idx file</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The <code>\index</code> command writes the indexing information to the file
+<file><var>root-name</var>.idx</file> file. Specifically, it writes text of the
+command
+<code>\indexentry&lbrace;<var>index-entry-string</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>page-num</var>&rbrace;</code>,
+where <var>page-num</var> is the value of the <code>\thepage</code> counter. On
+occasion, when the <code>\printindex</code> command is confused, you have to
+delete this file to start with a fresh slate.
+</para>
+<para>If you omit the closing brace of an <code>\index</code> command then you get a
+message like this.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Runaway argument? &lbrace;Ackermann!function
+! Paragraph ended before \&arobase;wrindex was complete.
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="makeindex" spaces=" "><nodename>makeindex</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\printindex</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\index</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Indexes</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><command>makeindex</command></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="929">index, processing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1042" mergedindex="cp">makeindex</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="930"><command>makeindex</command> program</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="931"><file>.ind</file> file</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="932"><file>.idx</file> file</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">makeindex <var>filename</var>
+makeindex -s <var>style-file</var> <var>filename</var>
+makeindex <var>options</var> <var>filename0</var> ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Sort, and otherwise process, the index information in the auxiliary file
+<var>filename</var>. This is a command line program. It takes one or more
+raw index files, <file><var>filename</var>.idx</file> files, and produces the
+actual index file, the <file><var>filename</var>.ind</file> file that is input by
+<code>\printindex</code> (<pxref label="_005cprintindex"><xrefnodename>\printindex</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="933"><file>.isty</file> file</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1043" mergedindex="cp">index, style file</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1044" mergedindex="cp">makeindex, style file</indexterm></findex>
+<para>The first form of the command suffices for many uses. The second allows
+you to format the index by using an <dfn>index style file</dfn>, a
+<file>.isty</file> file. The third form is the most general; see the full
+documentation on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>This is a simple <file>.isty</file> file.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">% book.isty
+% $ makeindex -s book.isty -p odd book.idx
+% creates the index as book.ind, starting on an odd page.
+preamble
+&quot;\\pagestyle&lbrace;empty&rbrace;
+\\small
+\\begin&lbrace;theindex&rbrace;
+\\thispagestyle&lbrace;empty&rbrace;&quot;
+
+postamble
+&quot;\n
+\\end&lbrace;theindex&rbrace;&quot;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The description here covers only some of the index formatting
+possibilities in <var>style-file</var>. For a full list see the documentation
+on CTAN.
+</para>
+<para>A style file consists of a list of pairs: <var>specifier</var> and
+<var>attribute</var>. These can appear in the file in any order. All of the
+<var>attributes</var> are strings, except where noted. Strings are
+surrounded with double quotes, <code>&quot;</code>, and the maximum length of a
+string is 144 characters. The <code>\n</code> is for a newline and <code>\t</code>
+is for a tab. Backslashes are escaped with another backslash,
+<code>\\</code>. If a line begins with a percent sign, <code>%</code>, then it is a
+comment.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><anchor name="makeindex-preamble">makeindex preamble</anchor>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1045" mergedindex="cp">preamble</indexterm>preamble</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Preamble of the output file. Defines the context in which the index is
+formatted. Default: <code>&quot;\\begin&lbrace;theindex&rbrace;\n&quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-postamble">makeindex postamble</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1046" mergedindex="cp">postamble</indexterm>postamble</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Postamble of the output file. Default: <code>&quot;\n\n\\end&lbrace;theindex&rbrace;\n&quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-group-skip">makeindex group skip</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1047" mergedindex="cp">group_skip</indexterm>group_skip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1048" mergedindex="cp">\indexspace</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group for
+entries starting with <samp>a</samp>, etc. This specifier gives what is
+inserted when a new group begins. Default: <code>&quot;\n\n \\indexspace\n&quot;</code>
+(<code>\indexspace</code> is a rubber length with default value <code>10pt
+plus5pt minus3pt</code>).
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-letheadflag">makeindex letheadflag</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1049" mergedindex="cp">lethead_flag</indexterm>lethead_flag</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>An integer. It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter. If
+it is 0 (which is the default) then other than <code>group_skip</code> nothing
+will be inserted before the group. If it is positive then at a new
+letter the <code>lethead_prefix</code> and <code>lethead_suffix</code> will be
+inserted, with that letter in uppercase between them. If it is negative
+then what will be inserted is the letter in lowercase. The default
+is&nbsp;0.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-lethead-prefix">makeindex lethead prefix</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1050" mergedindex="cp">lethead_prefix</indexterm>lethead_prefix</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>If a new group begins with a different letter then this is the prefix
+inserted before the new letter header. Default: <code>&quot;&quot;</code>
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-lethead-suffix">makeindex lethead suffix</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1051" mergedindex="cp">lethead_suffix</indexterm>lethead_suffix</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>If a group begins with a different letter then this is the suffix
+inserted after the new letter header. Default: <code>&quot;&quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-0">makeindex item 0</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1052" mergedindex="cp">item_0</indexterm>item_0 </itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is put between two level&nbsp;0 items. Default: <code>&quot;\n \\item
+&quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-1">makeindex item 1</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1053" mergedindex="cp">item_1</indexterm>item_1</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Put between two level&nbsp;1 items. Default: <code>&quot;\n \\subitem &quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-2">makeindex item 2</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1054" mergedindex="cp">item_2</indexterm>item_2</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>put between two level&nbsp;2 items. Default: <code>&quot;\n \\subsubitem &quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-01">makeindex item 01</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1055" mergedindex="cp">item_01</indexterm>item_01</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is put between a level&nbsp;0 item and a level&nbsp;1 item.
+Default: <code>&quot;\n \\subitem &quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-x1">makeindex item x1</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1056" mergedindex="cp">item_x1</indexterm>item_x1</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is put between a level&nbsp;0 item and a level&nbsp;1 item in the
+case that the level&nbsp;0 item doesn&textrsquo;t have any page numbers (as in
+<code>\index&lbrace;aaa|see&lbrace;bbb&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>). Default: <code>&quot;\n \\subitem &quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-12">makeindex item 12</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1057" mergedindex="cp">item_12</indexterm>item_12</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is put between a level&nbsp;1 item and a level&nbsp;2 item.
+Default: <code>&quot;\n \\subsubitem &quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-item-x2">makeindex item x2</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1058" mergedindex="cp">item_x2</indexterm>item_x2</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is put between a level&nbsp;1 item and a level&nbsp;2 item, if the
+level&nbsp;1 item doesn&textrsquo;t have page numbers. Default: <code>&quot;\n
+\\subsubitem &quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-delim-0">makeindex delim 0</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1059" mergedindex="cp">delim_0</indexterm>delim_0</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Delimiter put between a level&nbsp;0 key and its first page
+number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, <code>&quot;, &quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-delim-1">makeindex delim 1</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1060" mergedindex="cp">delim_1</indexterm>delim_1</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Delimiter put between a level&nbsp;1 key and its first page
+number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, <code>&quot;, &quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-delim-2">makeindex delim 2</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1061" mergedindex="cp">delim_2</indexterm>delim_2</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Delimiter between a level&nbsp;2 key and its first page number. Default:
+a comma followed by a blank, <code>&quot;, &quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-delim-n">makeindex delim n</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1062" mergedindex="cp">delim_n</indexterm>delim_n</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Delimiter between two page numbers for the same key (at any
+level). Default: a comma followed by a blank, <code>&quot;, &quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-delim-r">makeindex delim r</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1063" mergedindex="cp">delim_r</indexterm>delim_r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is put between the starting and ending page numbers of a range.
+Default: <code>&quot;--&quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-line-max">makeindex line max</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1064" mergedindex="cp">line_max</indexterm>line_max</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>An integer. Maximum length of an index entry&textrsquo;s line in the output,
+beyond which the line wraps. Default: <code>72</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-indent-space">makeindex indent space</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1065" mergedindex="cp">indent_space</indexterm>indent_space</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>What is inserted at the start of a wrapped line. Default:
+<code>&quot;\t\t&quot;</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-indent-length">makeindex indent length</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1066" mergedindex="cp">indent_length</indexterm>indent_length</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A number. The length of the wrapped line indentation. The default
+<code>indent_space</code> is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the
+default here is <code>16</code>.
+</para>
+<anchor name="makeindex-page-precedence">makeindex page precedence</anchor>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1067" mergedindex="cp">page_precedence</indexterm>page_precedence</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A document may have pages numbered in different ways. For example, a
+book may have front matter pages numbered in lowercase roman while main
+matter pages are in arabic. This string specifies the order in which
+they will appear in the index. The <command>makeindex</command> command supports
+five different types of numerals: lowercase roman <code>r</code>, and numeric
+or arabic <code>n</code>, and lowercase alphabetic <code>a</code>, and uppercase
+roman <code>R</code>, and uppercase alphabetic <code>A</code>. Default:
+<code>&quot;rnaRA&quot;</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1068" mergedindex="cp">xindy</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="934"><command>xindy</command> program</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>There are a number of other programs that do the job
+<command>makeindex</command> does. One is <command>xindy</command>, which does
+internationalization and can process indexes for documents marked up
+using &latex; and a number of other languages. It is highly
+configurable, both in markup terms and in terms of the collating order
+of the text, as described in its documentation.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cprintindex" spaces=" "><nodename>\printindex</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">makeindex</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Indexes</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><command>\printindex</command></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="935">index, printing</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1069" mergedindex="cp">\printindex</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\printindex
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1070" mergedindex="cp">\printindex</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Place the index into the output.
+</para>
+<para>To get an index you must first include
+<code>\usepackage&lbrace;makeidx&rbrace;\makeindex</code> in the document preamble and
+compile the document, then run the system command <command>makeindex</command>,
+and then compile the document again. <xref label="Indexes"><xrefnodename>Indexes</xrefnodename></xref> for further
+discussion and an example of the use of <code>\printindex</code>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="Glossaries" spaces=" "><nodename>Glossaries</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Indexes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Front/back matter</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Glossaries</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="936">glossary</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="937">glossaries</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="938">acronyms, list of</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1071" mergedindex="cp">\makeglossary</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1072" mergedindex="cp">\printglossaries</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage&lbrace;glossaries&rbrace; \makeglossaries
+ ...
+\newglossaryentry&lbrace;<var>label</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>settings</var>&rbrace;
+ ...
+\gls&lbrace;<var>label</var>&rbrace;.
+ ...
+\printglossaries
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <file>glossaries</file> package allows you to make glossaries, including
+multiple glossaries, as well as lists of acronyms.
+</para>
+<para>To get the output from this example, compile the document (for instance
+with <code>pdflatex filename</code>), then run the command line command
+<code>makeglossaries filename</code>, and then compile the document again.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+\usepackage&lbrace;glossaries&rbrace; \makeglossaries
+\newglossaryentry&lbrace;tm&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ name=&lbrace;Turing machine&rbrace;,
+ description=&lbrace;A model of a machine that computes. The model is simple
+ but can compute anything any existing device can compute.
+ It is the standard model used in Computer Science.&rbrace;,
+ &rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+Everything begins with the definition of a \gls&lbrace;tm&rbrace;.
+ ...
+\printglossaries
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>That gives two things. In the main text it outputs <samp>... definition
+of a Turing machine</samp>. In addition, in a separate sectional unit headed
+<samp>Glossary</samp> there appears a description list. In boldface it says
+<samp>Turing machine</samp> and the rest of the item says in normal type
+<samp>A model of a machine &dots; Computer Science</samp>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1073" mergedindex="cp">\makeglossary</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1074" mergedindex="cp">\printglossaries</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="939"><file>.glo</file> file</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>The command <code>\makeglossary</code> opens the file that will contain the
+entry information, <file><var>root-file</var>.glo</file>. Put the
+<code>\printglossaries</code> command where you want the glossaries to appear
+in your document.
+</para>
+<para>The <file>glossaries</file> package is very powerful. For instance, besides
+the commands <code>\newglossaryentry</code> and <code>\gls</code>, there are similar
+commands for a list of acronyms. See the package documentations on
+CTAN.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newglossaryentry</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Declare the content of a glossary entry.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\gls</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Give a page reference for a glossary entry.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cnewglossaryentry" spaces=" "><nodename>\newglossaryentry</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\gls</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Glossaries</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newglossaryentry</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="940">glossary, entries</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1075" mergedindex="cp">\newglossaryentry</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newglossaryentry&lbrace;<var>label</var>&rbrace;
+&lbrace;
+ name=&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;,
+ description=&lbrace;<var>description</var>&rbrace;,
+ <var>other options</var>, ...
+&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>or
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\longnewglossaryentry&lbrace;<var>label</var>&rbrace;
+&lbrace;
+ name=&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;,
+ <var>other options</var> ...,
+&rbrace;
+&lbrace;<var>description</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Declare a new entry for a glossary. The <var>label</var> must be unique for
+the document. The settings associated with the label are pairs:
+<code><var>key</var>=<var>value</var></code>.
+</para>
+<para>This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers <U>211D</U> in the
+glossary.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newglossaryentry&lbrace;R&rbrace;
+&lbrace;
+ name=&lbrace;\ensuremath&lbrace;\mathbb&lbrace;R&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;,
+ description=&lbrace;the real numbers&rbrace;,
+&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Use the second command form if the <var>description</var> spans more than one
+paragraph.
+</para>
+<para>For a full list of <var>key</var>s see the package documentation on CTAN but
+here are a few.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1076" mergedindex="cp">name</indexterm>name</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(Required.) The word, phrase, or symbol that you are defining.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1077" mergedindex="cp">description</indexterm>description</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(Required.) The description that will appear in the glossary.
+If this has more than one paragraph then you must use the second command
+form given in the synopsis.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1078" mergedindex="cp">plural</indexterm>plural</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>The plural form of <var>name</var>. Refer to the plural form using
+<code>\glspl</code> or <code>\Glspl</code> (<pxref label="_005cgls"><xrefnodename>\gls</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1079" mergedindex="cp">sort</indexterm>sort</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>How to place this entry in the list of entries that the glossary holds.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="1080" mergedindex="cp">symbol</indexterm>symbol</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>A symbol, such as a mathematical symbol, besides the name.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cgls" spaces=" "><nodename>\gls</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\newglossaryentry</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Glossaries</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\gls</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="941">glossary, entry reference</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1081" mergedindex="cp">\gls</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\gls&lbrace;<var>label</var>&rbrace;
+\glspl&lbrace;<var>label</var>&rbrace;
+\Gls&lbrace;<var>label</var>&rbrace;
+\Glspl&lbrace;<var>label</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Refer to a glossary entry. The entries are declared with
+<code>\newglossaryentry</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewglossaryentry"><xrefnodename>\newglossaryentry</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>This
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newglossaryentry&lbrace;N&rbrace;&lbrace;%
+ name=&lbrace;the natural numbers&rbrace;,
+ description=&lbrace;The numbers $0$, $1$, $2$, $\ldots$\&arobase;&rbrace;,
+ symbol=&lbrace;\ensuremath&lbrace;\mathbb&lbrace;N&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;,
+ &rbrace;
+ ...
+Consider \gls&lbrace;N&rbrace;.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>gives the output <samp>Consider the natural numbers</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>The second command form <code>\glspl&lbrace;<var>label</var>&rbrace;</code> produces the plural
+of <var>name</var> (by default it tries adding an <samp>s</samp>). The third form
+capitalizes the first letter of <var>name</var>, as does the fourth form,
+which also takes the plural.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Letters" spaces=" "><nodename>Letters</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Terminal input/output</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Front/back matter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Letters</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="942">letters, writing</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="943">writing letters</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;letter&rbrace;
+\address&lbrace;<var>senders address</var>&rbrace; % return address
+\signature&lbrace;<var>sender name</var>&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;letter&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>recipient address</var>&rbrace;
+\opening&lbrace;<var>salutation</var>&rbrace;
+ <var>letter body</var>
+\closing&lbrace;<var>closing text</var>&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;letter&rbrace;
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce one or more letters.
+</para>
+<para>Each letter is in a separate <code>letter</code> environment, whose argument
+<var>recipient address</var> often contains multiple lines separated with a
+double backslash,&nbsp;(<code>\\</code>). For example, you might have:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"> \begin&lbrace;letter&rbrace;&lbrace;Ninon de l'Enclos \\
+ l'h\^otel Sagonne&rbrace;
+ ...
+ \end&lbrace;letter&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The start of the <code>letter</code> environment resets the page number to 1,
+and the footnote number to 1 also.
+</para>
+<para>The <var>sender address</var> and <var>sender name</var> are common to all of the
+letters, whether there is one or more, so these are best put in the
+preamble. As with the recipient address, often <var>sender address</var>
+contains multiple lines separated by a double
+backslash&nbsp;(<code>\\</code>). &latex; will put the <var>sender name</var>
+under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
+hand-written signature.
+</para>
+<para>Each <code>letter</code> environment body begins with a required
+<code>\opening</code> command such as <code>\opening&lbrace;Dear Madam or Sir:&rbrace;</code>.
+The <var>letter body</var> text is ordinary &latex; so it can contain
+everything from enumerated lists to displayed math, except that commands
+such as <code>\chapter</code> that make no sense in a letter are turned off.
+Each <code>letter</code> environment body typically ends with a
+<code>\closing</code> command such as <code>\closing&lbrace;Yours,&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1082" mergedindex="cp">\\ <r>for letters</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Additional material may come after the <code>\closing</code>. You can say who
+is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like <code>\cc&lbrace;the
+Boss \\ the Boss's Boss&rbrace;</code>. There&textrsquo;s a similar <code>\encl</code> command for
+a list of enclosures. And, you can add a postscript with <code>\ps</code>.
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it
+by a length of <code>\longindentation</code>. By default this is
+<code>0.5\textwidth</code>. To make them flush left, put
+<code>\setlength&lbrace;\longindentation&rbrace;&lbrace;0em&rbrace;</code> in your preamble.
+</para>
+<para>To set a fixed date use something like
+<code>\renewcommand&lbrace;\today&rbrace;&lbrace;1958-Oct-12&rbrace;</code>. If put in your preamble
+then it will apply to all the letters.
+</para>
+<para>This example shows only one <code>letter</code> environment. The three lines
+marked as optional are typically omitted.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;letter&rbrace;
+\address&lbrace;Sender's street \\ Sender's town&rbrace;
+\signature&lbrace;Sender's name \\ Sender's title&rbrace;
+% optional: \location&lbrace;Mailbox 13&rbrace;
+% optional: \telephone&lbrace;(102) 555-0101&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;letter&rbrace;&lbrace;Recipient's name \\ Recipient's address&rbrace;
+\opening&lbrace;Sir:&rbrace;
+% optional: \thispagestyle&lbrace;firstpage&rbrace;
+I am not interested in entering a business arrangement with you.
+\closing&lbrace;Your most humble, etc.,&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;letter&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>These commands are used with the <code>letter</code> class.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\address</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Sender&textrsquo;s return address.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\cc</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Carbon copy list.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\closing</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Saying goodbye.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\encl</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">List of enclosed material.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\location</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Sender&textrsquo;s organizational location.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\makelabels</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Make address labels.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\name</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Sender&textrsquo;s name, for the return address.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\opening</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Saying hello.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\ps</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Adding a postscript.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\signature</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Sender&textrsquo;s signature.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\telephone</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Sender&textrsquo;s phone number.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005caddress" spaces=" "><nodename>\address</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\cc</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\address</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1083" mergedindex="cp">\address</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\address&lbrace;<var>senders address</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Specify the return address, as it appears on the letter and on the
+envelope. Separate multiple lines in <var>senders address</var> with a
+double backslash,&nbsp;<code>\\</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often put
+in the preamble. However, it can go anywhere, including inside an
+individual <code>letter</code> environment.
+</para>
+<para>This command is optional: if you do not use it then the letter is
+formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto pre-printed
+letterhead paper. If you do use the <code>\address</code> declaration then it
+is formatted as a personal letter.
+</para>
+<para>Here is an example.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\address&lbrace;Stephen Maturin \\
+ The Grapes of the Savoy&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005ccc" spaces=" "><nodename>\cc</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\closing</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\address</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\cc</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1084" mergedindex="cp">\cc</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="944">cc list, in letters</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\cc&lbrace;<var>name0</var> \\
+ ... &rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent. This
+command is optional. If it appears then typically it comes after
+<code>\closing</code>. Put the names on different lines by separating them
+with a double backslash, <code>\\</code>, as in:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\cc&lbrace;President \\
+ Vice President&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cclosing" spaces=" "><nodename>\closing</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\encl</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\cc</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\closing</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1085" mergedindex="cp">\closing</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="945">letters, ending</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="946">closing letters</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\closing&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce the letter&textrsquo;s closing. This is optional, but usual. It appears
+at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature. For example:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\closing&lbrace;Regards,&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cencl" spaces=" "><nodename>\encl</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\location</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\closing</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\encl</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1086" mergedindex="cp">\encl</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="947">enclosure list</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\encl&lbrace;<var>first enclosed object</var> \\
+ ... &rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
+optional; when it is used, it typically is put after <code>\closing</code>.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, <code>\\</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\encl&lbrace;License \\
+ Passport&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005clocation" spaces=" "><nodename>\location</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\makelabels</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\encl</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\location</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1087" mergedindex="cp">\location</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\location&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The <var>text</var> appears centered at the bottom of the page. It only
+appears if the page style is <code>firstpage</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cmakelabels" spaces=" "><nodename>\makelabels</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\name</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\location</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\makelabels</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1088" mergedindex="cp">\makelabels</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makelabels % in preamble
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Optional, for a document that contains <code>letter</code> environments. If
+you just put <code>\makelabels</code> in the preamble then at the end of the
+document you will get a sheet with labels for all the recipients, one
+for each letter environment, that you can copy to a sheet of peel-off
+address labels.
+</para>
+<para>Customize the labels by redefining the commands <code>\startlabels</code>,
+<code>\mlabel</code>, and <code>\returnaddress</code> (and perhaps <code>\name</code>) in
+the preamble. The command <code>\startlabels</code> sets the width, height,
+number of columns, etc., of the page onto which the labels are printed.
+The command <code>\mlabel&lbrace;<var>return address</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>recipient
+address</var>&rbrace;</code> produces the two labels (or one, if you choose to ignore the
+<var>return address</var>) for each letter environment. The first argument,
+<var>return address</var>, is the value returned by the macro
+<code>\returnaddress</code>. The second argument, <var>recipient address</var>, is
+the value passed in the argument to the <code>letter</code> environment. By
+default <code>\mlabel</code> ignores the first argument, the <var>return
+address</var>, causing the default behavior described in the prior paragraph.
+</para>
+<para>This illustrates customization. Its output includes a page with two
+columns having two labels each.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;letter&rbrace;
+\renewcommand*&lbrace;\returnaddress&rbrace;&lbrace;Fred McGuilicuddy \\
+ Oshkosh, Mineola 12305&rbrace;
+\newcommand*\originalMlabel&lbrace;&rbrace;
+\let\originalMlabel\mlabel
+\def\mlabel#1#2&lbrace;\originalMlabel&lbrace;&rbrace;&lbrace;#1&rbrace;\originalMlabel&lbrace;&rbrace;&lbrace;#2&rbrace;&rbrace;
+\makelabels
+ ...
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;letter&rbrace;&lbrace;A Einstein \\
+ 112 Mercer Street \\
+ Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540&rbrace;
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;letter&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;letter&rbrace;&lbrace;K G\&quot;odel \\
+ 145 Linden Lane \\
+ Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540&rbrace;
+ ...
+\end&lbrace;letter&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The first column contains the return address twice. The second column
+contains the address for each recipient.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="948"><r>package</r>, <code>envlab</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="949"><code>envlab</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The package <code>envlab</code> makes formatting the labels easier, with
+standard sizes already provided. The preamble lines
+<code>\usepackage[personalenvelope]&lbrace;envlab&rbrace;</code> and <code>\makelabels</code>
+are all that you need to print envelopes.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cname" spaces=" "><nodename>\name</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\opening</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\makelabels</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\name</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1089" mergedindex="cp">\name</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\name&lbrace;<var>name</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Optional. Sender&textrsquo;s name, used for printing on the envelope together
+with the return address.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005copening" spaces=" "><nodename>\opening</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\ps</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\name</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\opening</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1090" mergedindex="cp">\opening</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="950">letters, starting</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\opening&lbrace;<var>salutation</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Required. Follows the <code>\begin&lbrace;letter&rbrace;&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>. The argument
+<var>salutation</var> is mandatory. For instance:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\opening&lbrace;Dear John:&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cps" spaces=" "><nodename>\ps</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\signature</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\opening</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\ps</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1091" mergedindex="cp">\ps</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="951">postscript, in letters</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\ps&lbrace;<var>text</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Add a postscript. This command is optional and usually is used after
+<code>\closing</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\ps&lbrace;P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csignature" spaces=" "><nodename>\signature</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\telephone</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\ps</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\signature</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\signature&lbrace;<var>first line</var> \\
+ ... &rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1092" mergedindex="cp">\signature</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>The sender&textrsquo;s name. This command is optional, although its inclusion is
+usual.
+</para>
+<para>The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing.
+&latex; leaves some vertical space for a handwritten
+signature. Separate multiple lines with a double
+backslash,&nbsp;<code>\\</code>. For example:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\signature&lbrace;J Fred Muggs \\
+ White House&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s default for the vertical space from the <code>\closing</code> text
+down to the <code>\signature</code> text is <code>6\medskipamount</code>, which is
+six times <code>\medskipamount</code> (where <code>\medskipamount</code> is equal to
+a <code>\parskip</code>, which in turn is defined by default here to
+0.7<dmn>em</dmn>).
+</para>
+<para>This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters in
+the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a
+<code>letter</code> environment and before the <code>\closing</code>.
+</para>
+<para>You can include a graphic in the signature as here.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\signature&lbrace;\vspace&lbrace;-6\medskipamount&rbrace;\includegraphics&lbrace;sig.png&rbrace;\\
+ My name&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>For this you must put <code>\usepackage&lbrace;graphicx&rbrace;</code> in the preamble
+(<pxref label="Graphics"><xrefnodename>Graphics</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+<!-- c I think this is not a user-level command; it is used to keep from breaking -->
+<!-- c the page between the closing and the signature -->
+<!-- c @node \stopbreaks and \startbreaks -->
+<!-- c @section @code{\stopbreaks} and @code{\startbreaks} -->
+
+<!-- c @findex \startbreak -->
+<!-- c @findex \stopbreaks -->
+
+<!-- c @example -->
+<!-- c @code{\stopbreaks} -->
+<!-- c text -->
+<!-- c @code{\startbreaks} -->
+<!-- c @end example -->
+
+<!-- c The @code{\stopbreaks} inhibits page breaking. The @code{\startbreaks} resumes -->
+<!-- c normal page breaking. -->
+<!-- c -->
+<!-- c -->
+</section>
+<node name="_005ctelephone" spaces=" "><nodename>\telephone</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\signature</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Letters</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\telephone</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1093" mergedindex="cp">\telephone</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\telephone&lbrace;<var>number</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>The sender&textrsquo;s telephone number. This is typically in the preamble, where
+it applies to all letters. This only appears if the <code>firstpage</code>
+pagestyle is selected. If so, it appears on the lower right of the
+page.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Terminal-input_002foutput" spaces=" "><nodename>Terminal input/output</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Command line</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Letters</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Terminal input/output</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="952">input/output, to terminal</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="953">terminal input/output</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\typein</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Read text from the terminal.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\typeout</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Write text to the terminal.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005ctypein" spaces=" "><nodename>\typein</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\typeout</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Terminal input/output</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\typein</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1094" mergedindex="cp">\typein</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis, one of:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\typein&lbrace;<var>prompt-msg</var>&rbrace;
+\typein[<var>cmd</var>]&lbrace;<var>prompt-msg</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Print <var>prompt-msg</var> on the terminal and cause &latex; to stop and
+wait for you to type a line of input. This line of input ends when you
+hit the return key.
+</para>
+<para>For example, this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">As long as I live I shall never forget \typein&lbrace;Enter student name:&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>coupled with this command line interaction
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Enter student name:
+
+\&arobase;typein=Aphra Behn
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>gives the output <samp>... never forget Aphra Behn</samp>.
+</para>
+<para>The first command version, <code>\typein&lbrace;<var>prompt-msg</var>&rbrace;</code>, causes
+the input you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the
+input file in place of the <code>\typein</code> command.
+</para>
+<para>In the second command version the optional argument <code><var>cmd</var></code>
+argument must be a command name &textmdash; it must begin with a backslash, \.
+This command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you
+typed. For example, this
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\typein[\student]&lbrace;Enter student name:&rbrace;
+\typeout&lbrace;Recommendation for \student .&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>gives this output on the command line,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">Enter student name:
+
+\student=John Dee
+Recommendation for John Dee.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>where the user has entered <samp>John Dee.</samp>
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005ctypeout" spaces=" "><nodename>\typeout</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\typein</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Terminal input/output</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\typeout</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1095" mergedindex="cp">\typeout</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Synopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\typeout&lbrace;<var>msg</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Print <code>msg</code> on the terminal and in the <code>log</code> file.
+</para>
+<para>This
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\student&rbrace;&lbrace;John Dee&rbrace;
+\typeout&lbrace;Recommendation for \student .&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>outputs <samp>Recommendation for John Dee</samp>. Like what happens here with
+<code>\student</code>, commands that are defined with <code>\newcommand</code> or
+<code>\renewcommand</code> (among others) are replaced by their definitions
+before being printed.
+</para>
+<para>&latex;&textrsquo;s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
+and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to <code>msg</code>. As above,
+use the command <code>\space</code> to get a single space, independent of
+surrounding spaces. Use <code>^^J</code> to get a newline. Get a percent
+character with <code>\csname &arobase;percentchar\endcsname</code>.
+</para>
+<para>This command can be useful for simple debugging, as here:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength&lbrace;\jhlength&rbrace;
+\setlength&lbrace;\jhlength&rbrace;&lbrace;5pt&rbrace;
+\typeout&lbrace;The length is \the\jhlength.&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>produces on the command line <samp>The length is 5.0pt</samp>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Command-line" spaces=" "><nodename>Command line</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Document templates</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Terminal input/output</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Command line</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="954">command line</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Synopsis (from a terminal command line):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">pdflatex <var>options</var> <var>argument</var>
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Run &latex; on <var>argument</var>. In place of <command>pdflatex</command> you can
+also use <command>xelatex</command>, or <code>lualatex</code>, or <code>dviluatex</code>, or
+<code>latex</code>.
+</para>
+<para>For example, this will run &latex; on the file <file>thesis.tex</file>,
+creating the output <file>thesis.pdf</file>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">pdflatex thesis
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1096" mergedindex="cp">.tex, <r>default extension</r></indexterm></findex>
+Note that <file>.tex</file> is the default file extension.
+</para>
+<para>pdf&tex; is a development of the original &tex; program, as are
+Xe&tex; and Lua&tex; (<pxref label="TeX-engines"><xrefnodename>&tex; engines</xrefnodename></pxref>). They are completely
+backward compatible. But the original program had a custom output
+format, DVI, while the newer ones can output directly to PDF. This
+allows them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF such as
+hyperlinks, support for modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and
+ubiquitous viewing programs. In short, if you run <command>pdflatex</command> or
+<command>xelatex</command> or <command>lualatex</command> then you will by default get PDF
+and have access to all its modern features. If you run <command>latex</command>,
+or <code>dvilualatex</code>, then you will get DVI. The description here
+assumes pdf&latex;.
+</para>
+<para><xref label="Command-line-options"><xrefnodename>Command line options</xrefnodename></xref>, for a selection of the most useful
+command line options. As to <var>argument</var>, the usual case is that it
+does not begin with a backslash, so the system takes it to be the name
+of a file and it compiles that file. If <var>argument</var> begins with a
+backslash then the system will interpret it as a line of &latex;
+input, which can be used for special effects (<pxref label="Command-line-input"><xrefnodename>Command line
+input</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>If you gave no arguments or options then <command>pdflatex</command> prompts for
+input from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering
+<code>&lt;control&gt;-D</code>.
+</para>
+<para>If &latex; finds an error in your document then by default it stops and
+asks you about it. <xref label="Recovering-from-errors"><xrefnodename>Recovering from errors</xrefnodename></xref> for an outline of what
+to do.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Command line options</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Read text from the terminal.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Command line input</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Write text to the terminal.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Recovering from errors</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">When something goes wrong.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Command-line-options" spaces=" "><nodename>Command line options</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Command line input</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Command line</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Command line options</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="955">options, command line</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>These are the command-line options relevant to ordinary document
+authoring. For a full list, try running <samp>latex --help</samp> from the
+command line.
+</para>
+<para>With many implementations you can specify command line options by
+prefixing them with <samp>-</samp> or <samp>--</samp>. This is the case for
+both &tex; Live (and Mac&tex;) and MiK&tex;. We will use both
+conventions interchangeably.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1097" mergedindex="cp">--version <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-version</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Show the current version, like <samp>pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX
+Live 2015/Debian)</samp> along with a small amount of additional information,
+and exit.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1098" mergedindex="cp">--help <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-help</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1099" mergedindex="cp">--interaction <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-interaction=<var>mode</var></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>&tex; compiles a document in one of four interaction modes:
+<code>batchmode</code>, <code>nonstopmode</code>, <code>scrollmode</code>,
+<code>errorstopmode</code>. In <dfn>errorstop mode</dfn> (the default), &tex;
+stops at each error and asks for user intervention. In <dfn>batch
+mode</dfn> it prints nothing on the terminal, errors are scrolled as if the
+user hit <code>&lt;return&gt;</code> at every error, and missing files cause the
+job to abort. In <dfn>nonstop mode</dfn>, diagnostic message appear on the
+terminal but as in batch mode there is no user interaction. In
+<dfn>scroll mode</dfn>, &tex; only stops for missing files or keyboard
+input.
+</para>
+<para>For instance, starting &latex; with this command line
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">pdflatex -interaction=batchmode <var>filename</var>
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>eliminates most terminal output.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1100" mergedindex="cp">--jobname <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-jobname=<var>string</var></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Set the value of &tex;&textrsquo;s <code>jobname</code> to the string. The log file
+and output file will then be named <file><var>string</var>.log</file> and
+<file><var>string</var>.pdf</file>.
+</para>
+<para>When you run <code><command>pdflatex</command> <var>options</var> <var>argument</var></code>, if
+<var>argument</var> does not start with a backslash then &tex; considers it
+the name of a file to input. Otherwise it waits for the first
+<code>\input</code> instruction and the name of the input file will be the job
+name. This is used to name the log file the output file. The
+<code>jobname</code> option overrides that process and directly specifies the
+name. <xref label="Command-line-input"><xrefnodename>Command line input</xrefnodename></xref> for an example of its use.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1101" mergedindex="cp">--output-directory <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-output-directory=<var>directory</var></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Write files in the directory <var>directory</var>. It must already exist.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1102" mergedindex="cp">--shell-escape <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1103" mergedindex="cp">--no-shell-escape <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1104" mergedindex="cp">--enable-write18 <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1105" mergedindex="cp">--disable-write18 <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">--shell-escape</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">--no-shell-escape</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">--enable-write18</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">--disable-write18</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Enable or disable <code>\write18&lbrace;<var>shell command</var>&rbrace;</code>. The first two
+options are for with &tex; Live or Mac&tex; while the second two are
+for MiK&tex;.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="956"><r>package</r>, <code>sagetex</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="957"><code>sagetex</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a
+&latex; file. For instance the package <file>sagetex</file> allows you to
+have the mathematics software system <i>Sage</i> do calculations or draw
+graphs and then incorporate that output in your document. For this
+&tex; provides the <code>\write18</code> command.
+</para>
+<para>But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen if you
+compiled a &latex; file from the Internet. By default <code>\write18</code>
+is disabled. (More precisely, by default &tex; Live, Mac&tex;, and
+MiK&tex; only allow the execution of a limited number of &tex;-related
+programs, which they distribute.)
+</para>
+<para>If you invoke &latex; with the option <code>no-shell-escape</code>, and in
+your document you call <code>\write18&lbrace;ls -l&rbrace;</code>, then you do not get an
+error but the log file says <samp>runsystem(ls -l)...disabled</samp>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1106" mergedindex="cp">--halt-on-error <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-halt-on-error</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Stop processing at the first error.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1107" mergedindex="cp">--file-line-error <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1108" mergedindex="cp">--no-file-line-error <r>command-line option</r></indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-file-line-error</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">-no-file-line-error</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Enable or disable <code><var>filename</var>:<var>lineno</var>:<var>error</var></code>-style
+error messages. These are only available with &tex; Live or Mac&tex;.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Command-line-input" spaces=" "><nodename>Command line input</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Recovering from errors</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Command line options</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Command line</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Command line input</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="958">input, on command line</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>As part of the command line invocation <code>pdflatex <var>options</var>
+<var>argument</var></code> you can specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting
+<var>argument</var> with a backslash. This allows you to do some special
+effects.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="959"><r>package</r>, <code>hyperref</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="960"><code>hyperref</code> <r>package</r></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>For example, this file (which uses the <file>hyperref</file> package for
+hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a
+PDF.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\ifdefined\paperversion % in preamble
+\newcommand&lbrace;\urlcolor&rbrace;&lbrace;black&rbrace;
+\else
+\newcommand&lbrace;\urlcolor&rbrace;&lbrace;blue&rbrace;
+\fi
+\usepackage[colorlinks=true,urlcolor=\urlcolor]&lbrace;hyperref&rbrace;
+ ...
+\href&lbrace;https://www.ctan.org&rbrace;&lbrace;CTAN&rbrace; % in body
+ ...
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>Compiling this document <file>book.tex</file> with the command line
+<code>pdflatex book</code> will give the <samp>CTAN</samp> link in blue. But
+compiling it with <code>pdflatex &quot;\def\paperversion&lbrace;&rbrace;\input book.tex&quot;</code>
+has the link in black. (Note the use of double quotes to prevent
+interpretation of the symbols by the command line shell; your system may
+do this differently.)
+</para>
+<para>In a similar way, from the single file <file>main.tex</file> you can compile
+two different versions.
+</para>
+<!-- c credit Paul Gaborit: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/220101/121234 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">pdflatex -jobname=students &quot;\def\student&lbrace;&rbrace;\input&lbrace;main&rbrace;&quot;
+pdflatex -jobname=teachers &quot;\def\teachers&lbrace;&rbrace;\input&lbrace;main&rbrace;&quot;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The <code>jobname</code> option is there because otherwise both files would be
+called <file>main.pdf</file> and the second would overwrite the first.
+</para>
+<para>A final example. This loads the package <file>graphicx</file> with the option
+<code>draft</code>
+</para>
+<!-- c credit Herbert Voss: https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/17236/121234 -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">pdflatex -jobname=aa &quot;\RequirePackage[draft]&lbrace;graphicx&rbrace;\input&lbrace;aa.tex&rbrace;&quot;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>so the graphic files are read for their size information but not
+incorporated into the PDF. (The <code>jobname</code> option is there because
+otherwise the output file would be <file>graphicx.pdf</file>, as
+<code>\RequirePackage</code> does an <code>\input</code> of its own.)
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Recovering-from-errors" spaces=" "><nodename>Recovering from errors</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Command line input</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Command line</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Recovering from errors</sectiontitle>
+
+<para>If &latex; finds an error in your document then it gives you an error
+message and prompts you with a question mark, <code>?</code>. For instance,
+running &latex; on this file
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcommand&lbrace;\NP&rbrace;&lbrace;\ensuremath&lbrace;\textbf&lbrace;NP&rbrace;&rbrace;&rbrace;
+The \PN&lbrace;&rbrace; problem is a million dollar one.
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>causes it show this, and wait for input.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">! Undefined control sequence.
+l.5 The \PN
+ &lbrace;&rbrace; problem is a million dollar one.
+?
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The simplest thing is to enter <samp>x</samp> and <code>&lt;return&gt;</code> and fix the
+typo. You could instead enter <samp>?</samp> and <code>&lt;return&gt;</code> to see other
+options.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="961"><samp>*</samp> prompt</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="962">prompt, <samp>*</samp></indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1109" mergedindex="cp">\stop</indexterm></findex>
+<para>There are two other error scenarios. The first is that you forgot to
+include the <code>\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code> or misspelled it. In this case
+&latex; gives you a <samp>*</samp> prompt. You can get back to the command
+line by typing <code>\stop</code> and <code>&lt;return&gt;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name. For instance,
+instead of <code>pdflatex test</code> you might type <code>pdflatex tste</code>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">! I can't find file `tste'.
+&lt;*&gt; tste
+
+(Press Enter to retry, or Control-D to exit)
+Please type another input file name:
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>The simplest thing is to enter <code>&lt;Control&gt;</code> and <samp>d</samp> (holding
+them down at the same time), and then retype the correct command line.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Document-templates" spaces=" "><nodename>Document templates</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Index</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Command line</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<appendix spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Document templates</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="963">document templates</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="964">templates, document</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will
+be useful. Additional template resources are listed at
+<url><urefurl>http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">beamer template</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">article template</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">book template</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">Larger book template</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">tugboat template</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="beamer-template" spaces=" "><nodename>beamer template</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">article template</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Document templates</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>beamer</code> template</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="965"><code>beamer</code> template and class</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="966">template, <code>beamer</code></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>The <code>beamer</code> class creates presentation slides. It has a vast
+array of features, but here is a basic template:
+</para>
+<verbatim xml:space="preserve">
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+\title{Beamer Class template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+\date{July 31, 2007}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% without [fragile], any {verbatim} code gets mysterious errors.
+\begin{frame}[fragile]
+ \frametitle{First Slide}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ This is \verbatim!
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+</verbatim>
+
+<para>One web resource for this:
+<url><urefurl>http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="article-template" spaces=" "><nodename>article template</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">book template</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">beamer template</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document templates</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>article</code> template</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="967">template, <code>article</code></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<verbatim xml:space="preserve">
+\documentclass{article}
+\title{Article Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{First section}
+Some text.
+
+\subsection{First section, first subsection}
+Additional text.
+
+\section{Second section}
+Some more text.
+\end{document}
+</verbatim>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="book-template" spaces=" "><nodename>book template</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Larger book template</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">article template</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document templates</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>book</code> template</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="968">template, <code>book</code></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>This is a straightforward template for a book. See <xref label="Larger-book-template"><xrefnodename>Larger book
+template</xrefnodename></xref> for a more elaborate one.
+</para>
+<verbatim xml:space="preserve">
+\documentclass{book}
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\chapter{First}
+Some text.
+
+\chapter{Second}
+Some other text.
+
+\section{A subtopic}
+The end.
+\end{document}
+</verbatim>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Larger-book-template" spaces=" "><nodename>Larger book template</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">tugboat template</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">book template</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document templates</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Larger <code>book</code> template</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="969">template, <code>book</code></indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>This is a more elaborate template for a book. It has
+<code>\frontmatter</code>, <code>\mainmatter</code>, and <code>\backmatter</code> to
+control the typography of the three main areas of a book
+(<pxref label="_005cfrontmatter-_0026-_005cmainmatter-_0026-_005cbackmatter"><xrefnodename>\frontmatter &amp; \mainmatter &amp; \backmatter</xrefnodename></pxref>). The book has a
+bibliography and an index.
+</para>
+<para>Notable is that it uses <code>\include</code> and <code>\includeonly</code>
+(<pxref label="Splitting-the-input"><xrefnodename>Splitting the input</xrefnodename></pxref>). While you are working on a chapter you
+can comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to
+<code>\includeonly</code>. That will speed up compilation without losing any
+information such as cross-references. (Material that does not need to
+come on a new page is brought in with <code>\input</code> instead of
+<code>\include</code>. You don&textrsquo;t get the cross-reference benefit this way.)
+</para>
+<verbatim xml:space="preserve">
+\documentclass[titlepage]{book}
+\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex
+
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\includeonly{%
+ frontcover,
+ preface,
+ chap1,
+ ...
+ }
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\include{frontcover}
+ % maybe comment out while drafting:
+\maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright}
+\tableofcontents
+\include{preface}
+\mainmatter
+\include{chap1}
+...
+\appendix
+\include{appena}
+...
+\backmatter
+\bibliographystyle{apalike}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}
+\bibliography
+\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index}
+\printindex
+\include{backcover}
+\end{document}
+</verbatim>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="tugboat-template" spaces=" "><nodename>tugboat template</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Larger book template</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Document templates</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>tugboat</code> template</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="970">template, TUGboat</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="971">TUGboat template</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="972"><code>ltugboat</code> class</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para><cite>TUGboat</cite> is the journal of the &tex; Users Group,
+<url><urefurl>http://tug.org/TUGboat</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+<verbatim xml:space="preserve">
+\documentclass{ltugboat}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{ifpdf}
+\ifpdf
+\usepackage[breaklinks,hidelinks]{hyperref}
+\else
+\usepackage{url}
+\fi
+
+%%% Start of metadata %%%
+
+\title{Example \TUB\ article}
+
+% repeat info for each author.
+\author{First Last}
+\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
+\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
+\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
+
+%%% End of metadata %%%
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+This is an example article for \TUB{}.
+Please write an abstract.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is an example article for \TUB, linked from
+\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
+
+We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the
+\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF}
+output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
+
+The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more):
+% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
+\begin{verbatim}[\small]
+\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
+\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
+\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
+\mf \MFB
+\plain \POBox \PS
+\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP
+\TUB \TUG \tug
+\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+
+\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph
+
+\acro{FRED} -&gt; {\small[er] fred} % please use!
+\cs{fred} -&gt; \fred
+\meta{fred} -&gt; &lt;fred&gt;
+\nth{n} -&gt; 1st, 2nd, ...
+\sfrac{3/4} -&gt; 3/4
+\booktitle{Book of Fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format
+\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue.
+
+This file is just a template. The \TUB\ style documentation is the
+\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}. (For
+\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using
+\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location,
+\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.)
+
+Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
+\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty
+\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
+
+\makesignature
+\end{document}
+</verbatim>
+
+
+</section>
+</appendix>
+<node name="Index" spaces=" "><nodename>Index</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Document templates</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<unnumbered spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Index</sectiontitle>
+
+<!-- c Keep `Command Index' working for ltx-help.el. -->
+<anchor name="Command-Index">Command Index</anchor>
+
+<printindex value="cp" line=" cp"></printindex>
+
+</unnumbered>
+<bye></bye>
+</texinfo>
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ltx-help.el b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ltx-help.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0b48d680e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/ltx-help.el
@@ -0,0 +1,291 @@
+;;; ltx-help.el --- Lookup latex commands in info pages.
+
+;; Authors: Peter Galbraith <rhogee@bathybius.meteo.mcgill.ca> or <galbrth@ac.dal.ca>
+;; Christian Lynbech <lynbech@daimi.aau.dk>
+;; Martin Sjolin <marsj@ida.liu.se>
+;; Boris Goldowsky <boris@cs.rochester.edu>
+;; Maintainer: as part of latexrefman, http://home.gna.org/latexrefman/
+;; Updated: 25 April 2013
+;; Keywords: help, latex, info
+
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; Use the function latex-help to look up a latex command or
+;; environment in the latex online manual. If point is at such a
+;; command, this will be the default.
+
+;; The Texinfo document that this code works with is at
+;; http://ctan.org/pkg/latex2e-help-texinfo.
+
+;; Installation:
+;;
+;; Add the following piece of code to your .emacs
+;; (define-key help-map "\C-l" 'latex-help)
+;;
+;; to bind latex-help to C-h C-l. To load latex-help when loading AUC-TeX or
+;; some other LaTeX/TeX mode and bind the it to C-C i key, add the the following
+;; to you .emacs:
+;;
+;; (add-hook 'Latex-mode-hook
+;; (function (lambda ()
+;; (define-key LaTeX-mode-map "\C-ci" 'latex-help))))
+;;
+;; or if you do not have add-hook (a very nice package):
+;;
+;; (setq Latex-mode-hook
+;; (function (lambda ()
+;; (define-key LaTeX-mode-map "\C-ci" 'latex-help))))
+;;
+;;
+
+;;; Change Log:
+
+;;Mar 4, 1994 <lynbech@daimi.aau.dk>:
+;; Changed to my personal preferences. I have changed the function
+;; names. I have changed it to take a parameter, rather than just
+;; taking the current word. I am also basing it on the index rather
+;; than the node names.
+;;
+;;Mar 10, 1994 <marsj@ida.liu.se>:
+;; Added definition of current-word if not present.
+;; Made default value pick up a leading \ if apropriate
+;;
+;;Mar 11, 1994 <lynbech@daimi.aau.dk>:
+;; Changed the name of current-word into latex-help-guess. This
+;; eliminates the need for the embedded defun.
+;; Also made describe-latex work more like describe-function in its
+;; way of using default values. Now you must press return at an
+;; empty prompt to get the listed default (if any).
+;;
+;;Mar 10, 1994 <marsj@ida.liu.se>:
+;; Rewrote part of the describe-latex command to use the prefix
+;; argument, changed latex-help-get-cmd-obarray to return the
+;; the new array and test if it is empty or not. Add information
+;; concerning where to find the latex.texi file and emacs 18 info.el
+;;
+;;Mar 28, 1994 <boris@cs.rochester.edu>:
+;; * rewrote describe-latex's command-reading code; it did not
+;; default correctly on my system.
+;; * Added latex-help-hist, for completion history.
+;; * Modified it to use show-temp-buffer, if defined, so that it will
+;; display the help buffer in accord with user preferences.
+;; * Renamed describe-latex to latex-help, for consistency with other names.
+;; * Removed unneeded (interactive) specs for latex-help-guess and
+;; latex-help-get-cmd-obarray.
+;; * Added autoload cookies.
+;; * Doc fix.
+;;
+;;Mar 29, 1994 <marsj@ida.liu.se>:
+;; * made it working under epoch/emacs-18 by calling
+;; completion-read without the last argument.
+;; * made prompting similar to emacs help
+;; * moved add-hook and define keys to installation section, since
+;; the settings conflict with my own keybindings. Also, the key
+;; binding should be chosen by the end user.
+;;
+;; Wed Mar 30 08:45:50 1994 LYNBECH
+;; * Changed file layout to conform to FSF's standards
+;; * Tweaked latex-help-guess to include any leading backslashes
+;; * Inversed the meaning of the prefix argument. Now default is
+;; to switch buffers. Also added new variable `latex-help-split-window'
+;; to allow window splitting always.
+;; * Minor doc fixes
+;;
+;; Wed Apr 6 08:34:08 1994 LYNBECH
+;; * fixed latex-help-guess to be more faithful to the lexical rules
+;; of TeX. The result is not especially elegant.
+;;
+;;Apr 16, 1994 <abraham@iesd.auc.dk>:
+;; Changed the name to `ltx-help.el'.
+;;
+;; Sat Apr 1 1995 Torsten Martinsen (torsten@kom.auc.dk)
+;; Changed obarray to an alist where the car of each cons cell is the
+;; command name, and the cdr is the Info node describing that
+;; command. This implementation has the following advantages:
+;; - we don't need to have a lot of small redundant Info nodes; instead,
+;; we can use the Texinfo function index mechanism.
+;; - the alist is dynamically sized, so this version will work regardless
+;; of how many LaTeX commands the Info file contains.
+;; Added info on LaTeX2e Info file.
+;;
+;; Mon Apr 15 1996 Torsten Martinsen (bullestock@dk-online.dk)
+;; Changed node 'List of Commands' to 'Command Index' as suggested by
+;; Ralf Fassel <ralf@natlab.research.philips.com>.
+;;
+;; Mon Apr 22 1996 Torsten Martinsen (bullestock@dk-online.dk)
+;; When running under FSF Emacs, use (buffer-substring-no-properties)
+;; instead of (buffer-substring) as suggested by Kurt Hornik
+;; <hornik@ci.tuwien.ac.at>. Also removed Emacs 18 support.
+;;
+;; Thu Jun 12 2008 Karl Berry (karl@freefriends.org)
+;; Change latex-help-file to "(latex2e)", so our names are consistent.
+;; Doc updates.
+;;
+;; Thu Apr 25 2013 Karl Berry (karl@freefriends.org)
+;; Doc updates, and install these changes:
+;;
+;; Thu Apr 25 2013 Mandar Mitra (mandar.mitra@gmail.com)
+;; Using with (for example) "array" goes to the top node
+;; of latex2e.info instead of the intended node.
+;;
+;; Thu Dec 3 2015 Kevin Ryde (user42_kevin@yahoo.com.au)
+;; * latex-help-get-cmd-alist don't take \:: as double-colon style index,
+;; and allow "(line 123)" at the end of recent makeinfo output.
+;; * Use buffer-substring-no-properties when exists (does in XEmacs 21.4).
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'info)
+
+(defalias 'ltxh-buffer-substring
+ (if (fboundp 'buffer-substring-no-properties) ;; when available
+ 'buffer-substring-no-properties
+ 'buffer-substring))
+
+(defcustom latex-help-file "(latex2e)"
+ "Select the LaTeX2e non official reference manual translation."
+ :type '(choice
+ (string :tag "English" "(latex2e)")
+ (string :tag "French" "(latex2e-fr)")
+ (string :tag "Spanish" "(latex2e-es)") ))
+
+(defvar latex-help-split-window nil
+ "*When this is non-nil, `latex-help' will always pop up the info
+buffer, rather than just switch to it.")
+
+(defvar latex-help-hist nil
+ "History for latex command help")
+
+(defconst latex-help-cmd-alist nil
+ "Alist of the commands in the index of the latex info manual,
+used for validation and completion.")
+
+;;;###autoload
+(defun latex-help (cmd split)
+ "Try to find info entry about LaTeX entity CMD.
+CMD may be either a command or an environment.
+If CMD is not a string, this function will prompt for it, eventually
+with completion. If SPLIT (prefix arg.) is non-nil, latex-help will
+pop up the Info buffer, rather than just switch to it. See also
+variable `latex-help-split-window'."
+ (interactive
+ (list
+ (let* ((cw (latex-help-guess))
+ (cww (concat "\\" cw))
+ (cmd-alist (latex-help-get-cmd-alist))
+ (node (try-completion cw cmd-alist))
+ ; try-completion returns actual string in case of partial match
+ ; but returns t in case of exact match
+ (nodename1 (if (equal node t) cw node))
+ (nodename2 (if (equal nodename1 nil)
+ (try-completion cww cmd-alist) nodename1))
+ (guess (cond ((equal nodename2 t) cww)
+ ((equal nodename2 nil) nil)
+ (t nodename2)))
+ (val (completing-read (if guess
+ (format "Describe LaTeX command (default %s): " guess)
+ "Describe LaTeX command: ")
+ cmd-alist nil t nil
+ 'latex-help-hist)))
+ (cdr (assoc (if (equal val "")
+ guess
+ val) cmd-alist)))
+ current-prefix-arg))
+ (if (not (or split latex-help-split-window))
+ (Info-goto-node (concat latex-help-file cmd))
+ (save-excursion
+ (let ((pop-up-windows t)
+ (buffer (current-buffer)))
+ (pop-to-buffer nil)
+ (Info-goto-node (concat latex-help-file cmd))
+ (if (fboundp 'show-temp-buffer)
+ (show-temp-buffer (current-buffer) t)
+ (pop-to-buffer buffer))))))
+
+(defun latex-help-guess ()
+ "Return the word point is on as a string, if it's between two
+word-constituent characters. If not, but it immediately follows one,
+move back first. Otherwise, if point precedes a word constituent,
+move forward first. Otherwise, move backwards until a word constituent
+is found and get that word; if you reach a newline first, move forward
+instead.
+
+This function has been tweaked to deal better with latex commands.
+
+Return the LaTeX command point is on as a string.
+"
+ ;; cl: I am not claiming this to be neither elegant nor fast.
+ (save-excursion
+ (let ((oldpoint (point)) (start (point)) (end (point))
+ (wc "A-Za-z") (nwc "^A-Za-z"))
+
+ (cond
+ ((looking-at "\\\\[^A-Za-z]")
+ (setq start (point)
+ end (+ 2 (point))))
+
+ ((looking-at "\\\\[A-Za-z]+")
+ (setq start (match-beginning 0)
+ end (match-end 0)))
+
+ (t
+ (skip-chars-backward wc)
+ (skip-chars-backward "\\\\" (1- (point)))
+ (setq start (point))
+
+ (goto-char oldpoint)
+
+ (skip-chars-forward "\\\\" (1+ (point)))
+ (skip-chars-forward wc)
+ (setq end (point))
+
+ (if (and (eq start oldpoint) (eq end oldpoint))
+ (progn
+ (skip-chars-backward nwc
+ (save-excursion (beginning-of-line) (point)))
+ (if (eq (preceding-char) ?\n)
+ (progn
+ (skip-chars-forward nwc)
+ (setq start (point))
+ (skip-chars-forward "\\\\" (1+ (point)))
+ (skip-chars-forward wc)
+ (setq end (point)))
+ (setq end (point))
+ (skip-chars-backward wc)
+ (skip-chars-backward "\\\\" (1- (point)))
+ (setq start (point)))))
+ )
+ )
+ (ltxh-buffer-substring start end)))
+ )
+
+(defun latex-help-get-cmd-alist ()
+ "Scoop up the commands in the index of the latex info manual.
+The values are saved in `latex-help-cmd-alist' for speed."
+ ;; mm, does it contain any cached entries
+ (if (not (assoc "\\begin" latex-help-cmd-alist))
+ (save-window-excursion
+ (setq latex-help-cmd-alist nil)
+ (Info-goto-node (concat latex-help-file "Command Index"))
+ (if (re-search-forward "::$" nil t)
+ (progn
+ (end-of-buffer)
+ (while (re-search-backward "^\\* \\(.+\\)::$" nil t)
+ (setq key (ltxh-buffer-substring (match-beginning 1) (match-end 1)))
+ (setq latex-help-cmd-alist
+ (cons (cons key key) latex-help-cmd-alist))))
+ (end-of-buffer)
+ (while (re-search-backward "^\\* \\(.+\\): *\\(.+\\)\\." nil t)
+ (setq key (ltxh-buffer-substring (match-beginning 1) (match-end 1)))
+ (setq value (ltxh-buffer-substring (match-beginning 2) (match-end 2)))
+ (setq latex-help-cmd-alist
+ (cons (cons key value) latex-help-cmd-alist))))
+ ))
+ ;; and return the alist.
+ latex-help-cmd-alist
+ )
+
+(provide 'ltx-help)
+
+;;; ltx-help.el ends here
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.dbk b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.dbk
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..927b437d27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.dbk
@@ -0,0 +1,6789 @@
+<?xml version="1.0"?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.2//EN" "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.2/docbookx.dtd" [
+ <!ENTITY tex "TeX">
+ <!ENTITY latex "LaTeX">
+]>
+<book id="latex2e-es.dbk" lang="es">
+
+
+<title>&latex;2e Manual de Referencia (Julio 2010)</title>
+<!-- %**end of header (Esto es para ejecutar Texinfo en una región.) -->
+
+<!-- xx las instrucciones para latex 2.09 ahora deberían estar presentes, -->
+<!-- xx pero aún faltan algunas de latex2e. -->
+<!-- -->
+<!-- xx mencionar \mathring -->
+<!-- xx mencionar usrguide -->
+<!-- xx mencionar ! combinar la colocación de flotantes, p.15 de la guía -->
+<!-- xx de usuario en http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-info (paquete CTAN latex-info) -->
+<!-- -->
+<!-- xx La composición tipográfica de source2e debería tener un índice con -->
+<!-- xx todas las instrucciones del kernel, lo cual debería se un buen -->
+<!-- xx principio. en classes.dtx. define instrucciones adicionales, y -->
+<!-- xx algunas de las instrucciones son internas del kernel y por tanto no -->
+<!-- xx deben incluirse aquí. -->
+<!-- -->
+<!-- xx paquetes - requeridos, adicionales, útiles; oberdiek ... -->
+<!-- xx tipos de letra - latexsys -->
+
+
+<bookinfo><legalnotice><para>Este documento es un manual de referencia extraoficial para &latex;, un
+sistema de preparación de documentos, para la
+versión de Julio 2010.
+</para>
+<para>Esto se tradujo originalmente del archivo <filename>LATEX.HLP</filename> v1.0a de la
+Biblioteca de Ayuda VMS. La versión pretraducción fue escrita por
+George&#160;D. Greenwade de Sam Houston State University. La versión de
+&latex;&#160;2.09 fue escrita por Stephen Gilmore. La versión de
+&latex;2e fue adaptada por Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry hizo la
+actualización y posteriores adiciones, y reconoce su agradecimiento a la
+utilización de <citetitle>Hypertext Help con &latex;</citetitle>, por Sheldon Green, y
+del <citetitle>&latex; Command Summary</citetitle> (para
+&latex; 2.09) por L.&#160;Botway y C.&#160;Biemesderfer (publicada por
+el Grupo de Usuarios &tex; como <citetitle>&tex;niques</citetitle> número 10), como
+material de referencia (no se copió texto directamente).
+</para>
+<para>Copyright 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 Nacho Pacheco &#8212;Traducción.
+
+Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 Karl Berry.
+
+Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
+
+Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
+</para>
+<para>A continuación se encuentra la licencia bajo la cual es
+distribuido este manual&#44; una traducción lo es dada en
+anexo&#44; ver <link linkend="License-translation">License translation</link>.
+</para>
+<!-- start of License -->
+<para>Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+</para>
+
+<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+</para>
+<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
+<!-- end of License -->
+</para></legalnotice></bookinfo>
+
+
+<para>Este documento es un manual de referencia extraoficial para &latex;, un
+sistema de preparación de documentos, para la
+versión de Julio 2010.
+</para>
+<para>Esto se tradujo originalmente del archivo <filename>LATEX.HLP</filename> v1.0a de la
+Biblioteca de Ayuda VMS. La versión pretraducción fue escrita por
+George&#160;D. Greenwade de Sam Houston State University. La versión de
+&latex;&#160;2.09 fue escrita por Stephen Gilmore. La versión de
+&latex;2e fue adaptada por Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry hizo la
+actualización y posteriores adiciones, y reconoce su agradecimiento a la
+utilización de <citetitle>Hypertext Help con &latex;</citetitle>, por Sheldon Green, y
+del <citetitle>&latex; Command Summary</citetitle> (para
+&latex; 2.09) por L.&#160;Botway y C.&#160;Biemesderfer (publicada por
+el Grupo de Usuarios &tex; como <citetitle>&tex;niques</citetitle> número 10), como
+material de referencia (no se copió texto directamente).
+</para>
+<para>Copyright 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 Nacho Pacheco &#8212;Traducción.
+
+Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 Karl Berry.
+
+Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
+
+Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
+</para>
+<para>A continuación se encuentra la licencia bajo la cual es
+distribuido este manual&#44; una traducción lo es dada en
+anexo&#44; ver <link linkend="License-translation">License translation</link>.
+</para>
+<!-- start of License -->
+<para>Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+</para>
+
+<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+</para>
+<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
+<!-- end of License -->
+</para>
+
+
+<!-- Best Effort Symbol -->
+
+<chapter label="" id="Top">
+<title>&latex;2e</title>
+
+<para>Este documento es un manual de referencia extraoficial para &latex;, un
+sistema de preparación de documentos, versión Julio 2010. Este se
+pretende que cubra &latex;2e, que ha sido la versión estándar de
+&latex; por muchos años.
+</para>
+
+
+<!-- begin vincentb1 -->
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="1" id="Acerca-de-este-documento">
+<title>Acerca de este documento</title>
+<!-- end vincentb1 -->
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Knuth, Donald E.</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Lamport, Leslie</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Equipo del Proyecto &latex;</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&latex; está implementado como un paquete de macros por
+Donald&#160;E.&#160;Knuth&#8217;s para el programa de composición tipográfica
+&tex;. &latex; originalmente fue creado por Leslie Lamport; este
+ahora es mantenido por un grupo de voluntarios en
+(<ulink url="http://latex-project.org">http://latex-project.org</ulink>). La documentación oficial escrita por
+el proyecto &latex; está disponible allí.
+</para>
+<!-- begin vincentb1 -->
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>informes de errores</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><email>latexrefman@tug.org</email> dirección de correo electrónico</primary></indexterm>
+<!-- end vincentb1 -->
+<para>Una vez más, el presente documento no es oficial y no ha sido revisado
+por los responsables del proyecto &latex;.
+<!-- begin vincentb1 -->
+No enviar informes de error o cualquier otra cosa sobre este documento a
+ellos. En su lugar, por favor, envíe todos comentarios a
+<email>latexrefman@tug.org</email>.
+</para>
+<para>La página principal de este documento es
+<ulink url="http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/">http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/</ulink>. Esa página tiene enlaces al
+resultado actual de la compilación de este documento en varios formatos,
+a fuentes, a listas de correo, y a otros infraestructura.
+</para>
+<para>Por supuesto, hay muchas otras muchas fuentes de información sobre,
+&latex;. Éstos son algunos de ellos:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><ulink url="http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr">http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr</ulink>
+</term><listitem><para>Dos páginas de referencias recomendadas a &latex; documentación.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><ulink url="http://www.ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc">http://www.ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc</ulink>
+</term><listitem><para>Escribir su primer documento, con un poco de texto y matemáticas.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><ulink url="http://www.ctan.org/pkg/usrguide">http://www.ctan.org/pkg/usrguide</ulink>
+</term><listitem><para>La guía para los autores de documentos mantenidos como parte de &latex;; hay
+varios otros.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><ulink url="http://tug.org/begin.html">http://tug.org/begin.html</ulink>
+</term><listitem><para>Introducción al &tex; sistema, incluyendo &latex;.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist><!-- end vincentb1 -->
+
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="2" id="Descripci_00f3n">
+<title>Descripción de &latex;</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>descripción de &latex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>&latex;, descripción</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Las instrucciones &latex; componen tipográficamente un archivo de texto
+usando el programa &tex; y el &#8220;paquete de macros&#8221; &latex; para
+&tex;. Para ser más específicos, este procesa un archivo de entrada que
+contiene el texto de un documento con instrucciones intercaladas que
+describen cómo se debe dar formato al texto.
+Este produce al menos tres archivos de salida:
+</para>
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>Un archivo de salida principal, que es uno de:
+</para>
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>Si se invoca como <command>latex</command>, un archivo &#8220;independiente del
+dispositivo&#8221; (<filename>.dvi</filename>). Este contiene las instrucciones que se
+pueden traducir en órdenes para una variedad de dispositivos de salida.
+Usted puede ver estos archivos <filename>.dvi</filename> producidos por &latex;
+utilizando un programa como <command>xdvi</command> (visualización directa) o
+<command>dvips</command> (los convierte a PostScript).
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>Si es invocado como <command>pdflatex</command>, produce un archivo de
+&#8220;Documento de Formato Portátil&#8221; (<filename>.pdf</filename>). Normalmente, este es
+un archivo autocontenido, con todos los tipos de letra e imágenes
+incrustadas. Este puede ser muy útil, pero hace que produzca un archivo
+mucho más grande que el <filename>.dvi</filename> producido a partir del mismo
+documento.
+</para></listitem></orderedlist>
+<para>Existen otras variantes menos comunes de &latex; (y &tex;), de modo
+que puede producir HTML, XML y otras cosas.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>Un archivo de&#8220;transcripción&#8221; o <filename>.log</filename> que contiene información
+resumida y mensajes de diagnóstico para cualquier error descubierto en el
+archivo de entrada.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem><para>Un archivo &#8220;auxiliar&#8221; o <filename>.aux</filename>. Este es usado por &latex; mismo,
+para diversas cosas como el seccionado.
+</para></listitem></orderedlist>
+<para>Una instrucción &latex; comienza con el nombre de la instrucción, la
+cual consiste de una <literal>\</literal> seguida por o bien (a)&#160;una cadena de
+letras o (b)&#160;un único carácter no letra. Los argumentos que
+figuran entre corchetes, <literal>[]</literal>, son opcionales, mientras que los
+argumentos contenidos entre llaves, <literal>{}</literal>, son obligatorios.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; es sensible a mayúsculas y minúsculas. Cuando ingresa
+instrucciones&#44; use la caja de letras propia a cada
+instrucción &#8212; tradicionalmente es minúsculas.
+</para>
+
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="3" id="Iniciando-y-Finalizando">
+<title>Iniciando y Finalizando</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>iniciando y finalizando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>finalizando e iniciando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Un archivo de entrada mínimo tiene el siguiente aspecto:
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{<replaceable>clase</replaceable>}
+\begin{document}
+<replaceable>su texto</replaceable>
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>donde <replaceable>clase</replaceable> es una clase de documento válida para &latex;.
+Véase <link linkend="Clases-de-Documento">Clases de Documento</link>, para detalles de varias clases de documento
+disponibles localmente.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>preámbulo, definido</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Usted puede incluir otras instrucciones &latex; entre las instrucciones
+<literal>\documentclass</literal> y <literal>\begin{document}</literal> (esta área se llama el
+<firstterm>preámbulo</firstterm>).
+</para>
+
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="4" id="Clases-de-Documento">
+<title>Clases de Documento</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>clases de documento</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>clases de documentos</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\documentclass</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La clase de un determinado documento se define con la instrucción:
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass[<replaceable>opciones</replaceable>]{<replaceable>clase</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\documentclass</literal> debe ser la primer instrucción en un
+archivo fuente &latex;.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>clase article</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>clase report</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>clase book</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>clase letter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>clase slides</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Los nombres integrados de <replaceable>clases</replaceable> de documento &latex; (muchas
+otras clases de documento están disponibles como complementos;
+véase <link linkend="Descripci_00f3n">Descripción</link>):
+</para>
+<screen>article report book letter slides
+</screen>
+<!-- xx describir brevemente cada una -->
+
+<para>Las <replaceable>opciones</replaceable> estándar están descritas más adelante.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="4.1" id="Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">
+<title>Opciones de Clase de Documento</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>opciones de clase de documento</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>opciones, clase de documento</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>opciones de clase</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>opciones globales</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Usted puede especificar las así llamadas <firstterm>opciones globales</firstterm> u
+<firstterm>opciones de clase</firstterm> en la instrucción <literal>\documentclass</literal>
+encerrándolas entre corchetes de la manera usual. Para especificar más
+de una <replaceable>opción</replaceable>, deberá separarlas con una coma:
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass[<replaceable>opción1</replaceable>,<replaceable>opción2</replaceable>,...]{<replaceable>clase</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Esta es la lista de las opciones de clase estándar.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción 10pt</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción 11pt</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción 12pt</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Todas las clases estándar salvo <literal>slides</literal> aceptan las siguientes
+opciones para seleccionar el tamaño del tipo de letra (el predeterminado
+es <literal>10pt</literal>):
+</para>
+<screen>10pt 11pt 12pt
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción a4paper</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción a5paper</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción b5paper</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción executivepaper</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción legalpaper</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción letterpaper</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Todas las clases estándar aceptan estas opciones para seleccionar el
+tamaño del papel (el predeterminado es <literal>letterpaper</literal>):
+</para>
+<screen>a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción draft</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción final</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción fleqn</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción landscape</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción leqno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción openbib</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción titlepage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción notitlepage</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Otras opciones diversas:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>draft, final</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>omitiendo, cajas negras</primary></indexterm>
+<para>marca/no marca el desbordamiento de cajas con una gran caja negra; el
+predeterminado es <literal>final</literal>.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>fleqn</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Coloca las fórmulas mostradas alineadas a la izquierda; el
+predeterminado es centrado.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>landscape</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Selecciona el formato apaisado; el predeterminado es vertical.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>leqno</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Coloca los números de ecuación en el lado izquierdo de las ecuaciones;
+el predeterminado es el lado derecho.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>openbib</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Usa el formato de bibliografía &#8220;abierto&#8221;.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>titlepage, notitlepage</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Especifica si la página de título es independiente; de manera
+predeterminada depende de la clase.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Estas opciones no están disponibles con la clase <literal>slides</literal>:
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción onecolumn</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción twocolumn</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción oneside</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción twoside</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción openright</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>opción openany</primary></indexterm>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>onecolumn</literal>
+</term><term><literal>twocolumn</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Composición tipográfica en una o dos columnas; el predeterminado es
+<literal>onecolumn</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>oneside</literal>
+</term><term><literal>twoside</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\evensidemargin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oddsidemargin</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Selecciona el diseño de una o dos caras; el predeterminado es
+<literal>oneside</literal>, excepto para la clase <literal>book</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>El parámetro <literal>\evensidemargin</literal> (<literal>\oddsidemargin</literal>) determina la
+distancia en páginas par (impar) numeradas entre el lado izquierdo de la
+página y el margen excedente del texto. Los valores predeterminados
+varían con el tamaño del papel y si el diseño seleccionado es de uno o
+dos lados. Para imprimir texto en un lado es centrado, para dos lados,
+<literal>\oddsidemargin</literal> es 40% de la diferencia entre <literal>\paperwidth</literal> y
+<literal>\textwidth</literal> con el resto de <literal>\evensidemargin</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>openright</literal>
+</term><term><literal>openany</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Determina si un capítulo debe iniciar en una página del lado derecho;
+para <literal>book</literal>, el predeterminado es <literal>openright</literal>.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>La clase <literal>slides</literal> ofrece la opción <literal>clock</literal> para imprimir la
+hora en la parte inferior de cada nota.
+</para>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paquetes, cargando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cargando paquetes adicionales</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\usepackage</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Los paquetes adicionales se cargan de la siguiente manera:
+</para>
+<screen>\usepackage[<replaceable>opciones</replaceable>]{<replaceable>paquete</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Para especificar más de un <replaceable>paquete</replaceable>, usted puede separarlos con una
+coma, o utilizar múltiples instrucciones<literal>\usepackage</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>opciones globales</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>opciones, globales</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Cualquiera de las opciones que figuran en la instrucción
+<literal>\documentclass</literal> que no son conocidas por la clase de documento
+seleccionada son transmitidas a los paquetes cargados con
+<literal>\usepackage</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="5" id="Tipos-de-Letra">
+<title>Tipos de Letra</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Tipos de Letra</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tipos de letra</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Dos aspectos importantes de la selección de un <firstterm>tipo de letra</firstterm> son
+la especificación del tamaño y del estilo. Las
+instrucciones &latex; para hacer esto se describen a continuación.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="5.1" id="Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">
+<title>Estilos del Tipo de Letra</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>estilos del tipo de letra</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>estilos de tipografía</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>estilos de texto</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Las siguientes instrucciones para el estilo del tipo de letra son
+compatibles con &latex;.
+</para>
+<para>Este primer grupo de instrucciones se utiliza normalmente con un
+argumento&#44; como en <literal>\textit{texto en cursiva}</literal>. En la
+siguiente tabla&#44; las instrucciones correspondientes
+entre paréntesis son la &#8220;forma declarativa&#8221;, la cual no toma
+argumentos. El ámbito de aplicación de la forma declarativa dura hasta la siguiente instucción para el
+estilo del tipo de letra o hasta el final del grupo actual.
+</para>
+<para>Estos commandos&#44; tanto en las formas con argumento o en
+las formas declarativas&#44; son
+acumulativas; es decir, usted puede decir ya sea
+<literal>\sffamily\bfseries</literal> o <literal>\bfseries\sffamily</literal> para obtener sans
+serif en negrita.
+</para>
+<para>También puede utilizar la forma de entorno de las formas declarativas;
+por ejemplo, <literal>\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Estas instrucciones proporcionan automáticamente una corrección en
+cursiva si es necesario.
+</para><variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\textrm (\rmfamily)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textrm</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rmfamily</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Romana.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textit (\itshape)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textit</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\itshape</primary></indexterm>
+<para>cursivas.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\emph</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\emph</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Énfasis</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Énfasis (cambia entre <literal>\textit</literal> y <literal>\textrm</literal>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textmd (\mdseries)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textmd</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mdseries</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Peso medio (predeterminado).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textbf (\bfseries)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbf</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bfseries</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Negrita.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textup (\upshape)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textup</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\upshape</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Vertical (predeterminado). Lo opuesto a inclinada.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textsl (\slshape)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textsl</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\slshape</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Oblicua.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textsf (\sffamily)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textsf</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sffamily</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Sans serif.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textsc (\scshape)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textsc</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\scshape</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Versales.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\texttt (\ttfamily)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\texttt</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ttfamily</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Máquina de escribir.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\textnormal (\normalfont)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textnormal</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\normalfont</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Tipo de letra principal del documento.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathrm</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathrm</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Romana, para usar en modo math.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathbf</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathbf</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Negrita, para usarse en modo math.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathsf</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathsf</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Sans serif, para usarse en modo math.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathtt</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathtt</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Máquina de escribir, para usarse en modo math.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathit</literal>
+</term><term><literal>(\mit)</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>cursivas, para utilizarse en modo math.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathnormal</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathnormal</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Para usarse en modo math, por ejemplo dentro de otra declaración de
+estilo de letra.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\mathcal</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathcal</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Letras &#8216;caligráficas&#8217;, para usarse en modo math.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Además, la instrucción <literal>\mathversion{bold}</literal>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mathversion</primary></indexterm>
+<!-- begin vincentb1 20140226 -->
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>matemáticas, negrita</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>negrita matemáticas</primary></indexterm>
+<!-- end vincentb1 20140226 -->
+se pude utilizar para cambiar a letras y símbolos en negrita dentro de
+fórmulas. <literal>\mathversion{normal}</literal> restablece el valor
+predeterminado.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; también proporciona las siguientes
+instrucciones, que incondicionalmente cambian a determinado estilo, es
+decir, <emphasis>no</emphasis> son acumulativas. Estas se utilizan de forma diferente
+que las instrucciones anteriores, también: <literal>{\<replaceable>instrucción</replaceable>
+...}</literal> en lugar de <literal>\<replaceable>instrucción</replaceable>{...}</literal>. Son dos cosas muy
+distintas.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bf</primary></indexterm><literal>\bf</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>tipo de letra negrita</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Cambia a <emphasis role="bold">tipo de letra negrita</emphasis>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cal</primary></indexterm><literal>\cal</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>letras script para math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letras caligráficas para math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Cambia a letras caligráficas para math.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\em</primary></indexterm><literal>\em</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>énfasis</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Énfasis (cursivas con romana, romana con cursivas).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\it</primary></indexterm><literal>\it</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>tipo de letra cursiva</primary></indexterm>
+<para>cursivas.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rm</primary></indexterm><literal>\rm</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>tipo de letra romana</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Romana.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sc</primary></indexterm><literal>\sc</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>tipo de letra versales</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Versales.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sf</primary></indexterm><literal>\sf</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>tipo de letra sans serif</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Sans serif.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sl</primary></indexterm><literal>\sl</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>tipo de letra oblicua</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tipo de letra oblicua</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Oblicua (oblicua).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tt</primary></indexterm><literal>\tt</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>tipo de letra de máquina de escribir</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tipo de letra monoespacio</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tipo de letra de ancho fijo</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Máquina de escribir (monoespacio, de ancho fijo).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="5.2" id="Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">
+<title>Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tamaños del tipo de letra</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tamaños del tipo de letra</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tamaño del texto</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Las siguientes instrucciones para el tamaño del tipo de letra estándar
+son compatibles con &latex;.
+La tabla muestra el nombre de la
+instrucción y el tamaño real (en puntos) del tipo de letra
+correspondiente utilizado con las opciones de tamaño del documento
+&#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217; y &#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217;, respectivamente (véase <link linkend="Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones
+de Clase de Documento</link> ).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tiny</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\scriptsize</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnotesize</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\small</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\normalsize</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\large</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Large</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\LARGE</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\huge</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Huge</primary></indexterm>
+
+<informaltable><tgroup cols="4"><colspec colwidth="28*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="5*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="5*"></colspec><colspec colwidth="5*"></colspec><thead><row><entry><para>Instrucción </para></entry><entry><para><literal>10pt</literal> </para></entry><entry><para><literal>11pt</literal> </para></entry><entry><para><literal>12pt</literal>
+</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry><para><literal>\tiny</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>5 </para></entry><entry><para>6 </para></entry><entry><para>6
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\scriptsize</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>7 </para></entry><entry><para>8 </para></entry><entry><para>8
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\footnotesize</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>8 </para></entry><entry><para>9 </para></entry><entry><para>10
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\small</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>9 </para></entry><entry><para>10 </para></entry><entry><para>10.95
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\normalsize</literal> (predeterminado)
+</para></entry><entry><para>10 </para></entry><entry><para>10.95 </para></entry><entry><para>12
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\large</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>12 </para></entry><entry><para>12 </para></entry><entry><para>14.4
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\Large</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>14.4 </para></entry><entry><para>14.4 </para></entry><entry><para>17.28
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\LARGE</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>14.4 </para></entry><entry><para>14.4 </para></entry><entry><para>17.28
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\huge</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>20.74 </para></entry><entry><para>20.74 </para></entry><entry><para>24.88
+</para></entry></row><row><entry><para><literal>\Huge</literal>
+</para></entry><entry><para>24.88 </para></entry><entry><para>24.88 </para></entry><entry><para>24.88
+</para></entry></row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable>
+<para>Las instrucciones tal como están listadas aquí son &#8220;formas
+declarativas&#8221;. El ámbito de aplicación de la forma declarativa dura
+hasta la instrucción &#8220;end&#8221; del estilo del tipo de letra o hasta el
+final del grupo actual. También puede utilizar la forma de entorno en
+estas instrucciones; por ejemplo, <literal>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="5.3" id="Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">
+<title>Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>instrucciones de tipo de letra, de bajo nivel</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Estas instrucciones están destinadas principalmente para los escritores
+de macros y paquetes. Las instrucciones listadas anteriormente son sólo
+un subconjunto de las disponibles.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontencoding{codificación}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontencoding</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Selecciona la codificación del tipo de letra. Las codificaciones válidas
+incluyen a <literal>OT1</literal> y <literal>T1</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontfamily{familia}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontfamily</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Selecciona la familia del tipo de letra. Las familias válidas incluyen:
+</para>
+<itemizedlist><listitem><para><literal>cmr</literal> para Romana de Computadora Moderna
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><literal>cmss</literal> para Sans Serif de Computadora Moderna
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><literal>cmtt</literal> para Máquina de Escribir de Computadora Moderna
+</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
+<para>y muchas otras.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontseries{series}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontseries</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Selecciona las series del tipo de letra. Las series válidas incluyen:
+</para>
+<itemizedlist><listitem><para><literal>m</literal> Mediana (normal)
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><literal>b</literal> Negrita
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><literal>c</literal> Condensada
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><literal>bc</literal> Negrita condensada
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><literal>bx</literal> Negrita extendida
+</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
+<para>y otras combinaciones diferentes.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontshape{forma}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontshape</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Selecciona la forma del tipo de letra. Las formas válidas son:
+</para>
+<itemizedlist><listitem><para><literal>n</literal> Vertical (normal)
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><literal>it</literal> Cursiva
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><literal>sl</literal> Oblicua (oblicua)
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><literal>sc</literal> Versales
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><literal>ui</literal> Cursiva vertical
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><literal>ol</literal> Esquema
+</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
+<para>Las dos últimas formas no están disponibles para la mayoría de las familias de tipos de letra.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\fontsize{tamaño}{espaciado}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fontsize</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\baselineskip</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Establece el tamaño de letra. El primer parámetro es el tamaño a cambiar
+el tipo de letra y el segundo es el espaciado de línea a usar; este se
+almacena en un parámetro denominado <literal>\baselineskip</literal>. La unidad de
+ambos parámetros de manera predeterminada es pt. El valor
+predeterminado de <literal>\baselineskip</literal> para el tipo de letra Computadora
+Moderna es 1.2 veces <literal>\fontsize</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\baselinestretch</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paquete <literal>setspace</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>interlineado doble</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El interlineado de espacio doble también es multiplicado por el valor
+del parámetro <literal>\baselinestretch</literal> cuando cambia el tamaño del tipo
+de letra; el predeterminado es 1. Sin embargo, la mejor manera de hacer
+un documento con &#8220;doble espacio&#8221;, si tiene la suficiente mala suerte
+de tener que producirlo, es usar el paquete <literal>setspace</literal>; vea
+<ulink url="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace</ulink>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linespread</primary></indexterm>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\linespread{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Equivalente a <literal>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<replaceable>factor</replaceable>}</literal>,
+y por lo tanto debe estar seguido por <literal>\selectfont</literal> para que tenga
+algún efecto. Es mejor especificarlo en el preámbulo, o utilizar el
+paquete <literal>setspace</literal>, justo como se acaba de describir anteriormente.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\selectfont</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Las modificaciones introducidas por llamar a la fuente de las
+instrucciones descritas anteriormente no entrará en vigor sino hasta que
+se invoque a <literal>\selectfont</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\usefont{codificación}{familia}{series}{forma}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\usefont</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Lo mismo que invocar a <literal>\fontencoding</literal>, <literal>\fontfamily</literal>,
+<literal>\fontseries</literal> y <literal>\fontshape</literal> con los parámetros dados, seguida
+por <literal>\selectfont</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="6" id="Dise_00f1o">
+<title>Diseño</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>instrucciones de diseño</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Varias instrucciones para controlar el diseño general de la página.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="6.1" id="_005conecolumn">
+<title><literal>\onecolumn</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\onecolumn</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>produce una columna</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La declaración <literal>\onecolumn</literal> comienza una nueva página y la produce
+con una sola columna. Este es el valor predeterminado.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="6.2" id="_005ctwocolumn">
+<title><literal>\twocolumn</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\twocolumn</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>texto multicolumna</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>produce dos columnas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\twocolumn[<replaceable>textocolumna1</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>La declaración <literal>\twocolumn</literal> comienza una nueva página y la produce
+con dos columnas. Si el argumento opcional <replaceable>textocolumna1</replaceable> está
+presente, esta es compuesta en modo de una columna antes de comenzar la
+composición de las dos columnas.
+</para>
+<para>Estos parámetros controlan la tipografía en la producción de dos
+columnas:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\columnsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>La distancia entre las columnas (de manera predeterminada a 35pt).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnseprule</primary></indexterm><literal>\columnseprule</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>El ancho de la regla entre columnas; el predeterminado es 0pt, por lo
+tanto no hay regla.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\columnwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\columnwidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>El ancho de la columna actual; este es igual a <literal>\textwidth</literal>
+en texto de una sola columna.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Estos parámetros controlan el comportamiento de la flotación de las dos
+columnas producidas:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dbltopfraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\dbltopfraction</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Máxima fracción en la parte superior de una página de dos columna que
+pueden ocupar los flotantes. El predeterminado es &#8216;<literal>.7</literal>&#8217;, puede ser
+útil redefinirlo a (digamos) &#8216;<literal>.9</literal>&#8217; para evitar llegar tan pronto a
+páginas flotantes.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dblfloatpagefraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\dblfloatpagefraction</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>La mínima fracción de una página con flotantes que deben ocupar los
+flotantes, para una página de dos columnas con flotantes. El
+predeterminado es &#8216;<literal>.5</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dblfloatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\dblfloatsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Distancia entre flotantes en la parte superior o inferior de una página
+de dos columnas con flotantes. Predeterminado a &#8216;<literal>12pt plus2pt
+minus2pt</literal>&#8217; para &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217; y &#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217; para documentos, &#8216;<literal>14pt
+plus2pt minus4pt</literal>&#8217; para &#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dbltextfloatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\dbltextfloatsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Distancia entre un flotante multicolumna en la parte superior o inferior
+de una página y el texto principal. De manera predeterminada es
+&#8216;<literal>20pt plus2pt minus4pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="6.3" id="_005cflushbottom">
+<title><literal>\flushbottom</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\flushbottom</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La declaración <literal>\flushbottom</literal> hace que todas las páginas tengan la
+misma altura, añadiendo espacio vertical extra donde sea necesario para
+llenar la página.
+</para>
+<para>Este es el predeterminado si se selecciona el modo <literal>twocolumn</literal>
+(véase <link linkend="Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="6.4" id="_005craggedbottom">
+<title><literal>\raggedbottom</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\raggedbottom</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>reducción, omitiendo vertical</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La declaración <literal>\raggedbottom</literal> hace que todas las páginas tengan la
+altura natural del material en esa página. Sin longitudes flexibles que
+se deban ajustar.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="6.5" id="Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">
+<title>Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>parámetros para el diseño de página</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>parámetros, diseño de página</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>diseño, parámetros de página para</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>header, parámetros para</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>footer, parámetros para</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ejecutando header y footer</primary></indexterm>
+
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\headheight</primary></indexterm><literal>\headheight</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Altura de la caja que contiene el encabezado. El predeterminado es
+&#8216;<literal>30pt</literal>&#8217;, salvo en la clase <literal>book</literal>, donde este varía con el
+tamaño de letra.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\headsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\headsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Distancia vertical entre la línea inferior de la cabecera y la parte
+superior del texto principal. El predeterminado es &#8216;<literal>25pt</literal>&#8217;, salvo
+en la clase <literal>book</literal>, donde este varía con el tamaño de letra.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\footskip</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Distancia desde la línea base de la última línea de texto a la línea
+base del pié de página. El predeterminado es &#8216;<literal>30pt</literal>&#8217;, salvo en la
+clase <literal>book</literal>, donde este varía con el tamaño de letra.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linewidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\linewidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Ancho de la línea actual; el predeterminado varía con el tamaño de
+fuente, el ancho del papel, el modo two-column, etc. Para un documento
+<literal>article</literal> en &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217;, este se establece a &#8216;<literal>345pt</literal>&#8217;; en modo
+two-column, este cambia a &#8216;<literal>229.5pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textheight</primary></indexterm><literal>\textheight</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>La altura vertical normal del cuerpo de la página; el predeterminado
+varía con el tamaño de letra, clase de documento, etc. Para un
+documento <literal>article</literal> o <literal>report</literal> en &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217;, este se fija a
+&#8216;<literal>43\baselineskip</literal>&#8217;; para <literal>book</literal>, es &#8216;<literal>41\baselineskip</literal>&#8217;.
+Para &#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217;, es &#8216;<literal>38\baselineskip</literal>&#8217; y para &#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217;,
+&#8216;<literal>36\baselineskip</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\textwidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>El ancho horizontal normal del cuerpo de la página; el predeterminado
+varía de la manera usual. Para un documento <literal>article</literal> o
+<literal>report</literal>, es &#8216;<literal>345pt</literal>&#8217; en &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>360pt</literal>&#8217; en
+&#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217; y &#8216;<literal>390pt</literal>&#8217; en &#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217;. Para un documento
+<literal>book</literal>, es &#8216;<literal>4.5in</literal>&#8217; en &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217; y &#8216;<literal>5in</literal>&#8217; en &#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217;
+o &#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topmargin</primary></indexterm><literal>\topmargin</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Espacio entre la parte superior de la página &tex; (de manera
+predeterminada, una pulgada en la parte superior del papel) y en la
+parte superior del encabezado. El predeterminado se calcula basándose
+en muchos otros parámetros: <literal>\paperheight &#8722; 2in &#8722;
+\headheight &#8722; \headsep &#8722; \textheight &#8722; \footskip</literal>,
+y luego se divide entre dos.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topskip</primary></indexterm><literal>\topskip</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>La distancia mínima entre la parte superior del cuerpo de la página y la
+línea base de la primer línea de texto. Para clases estándar, el
+predeterminado es el mismo que el tamaño de letra, por ejemplo,
+&#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217; en &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="7" id="Seccionado">
+<title>Seccionado</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>seccionado</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Las instrucciones de seccionado proporcionan los medios para estructurar
+su texto en unidades:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\part</primary></indexterm><literal>\part</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\chapter</primary></indexterm><literal>\chapter</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(únicamente las clases <literal>report</literal> y <literal>book</literal>)
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\section</primary></indexterm><literal>\section</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subsection</primary></indexterm><literal>\subsection</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subsubsection</primary></indexterm><literal>\subsubsection</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\paragraph</primary></indexterm><literal>\paragraph</literal>
+</term></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subparagraph</primary></indexterm><literal>\subparagraph</literal>
+</term></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Todas las instrucciones de seccionado tienen la misma forma general, por
+ejemplo,
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter[<replaceable>títulobreve</replaceable>]{<replaceable>título</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Además de proporcionar el encabezado <replaceable>título</replaceable> en el texto principal,
+el título de la sección puede aparecer en otros dos lugares:
+</para>
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>La tabla de contenido.
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>El título breve en la parte superior de la página.
+</para></listitem></orderedlist>
+<para>Tal vez no quiera el mismo texto en estos lugares como en el texto
+principal. Para controlar esto, las instrucciones de seccionado tienen
+un argumento opcional, <replaceable>toctitle</replaceable> que, cuando se proporciona,
+especifica el texto de esos otros lugares.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>forma con * de instrucciones de seccionado</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Además, todas las instrucciones de seccionado tienen formas con <literal>*</literal>
+que imprimen el <replaceable>título</replaceable> de la manera usual, pero no incluyen un
+número y no producen una entrada en la tabla de contenido. Por ejemplo:
+</para>
+<screen>\section*{Preámbulo}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\appendix</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>apéndices, creando</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\appendix</literal> cambia la manera en que se numeran las
+siguientes unidades de sección. La instrucción <literal>\appendix</literal> en sí
+misma no genera texto y no afecta la númeración de las partes. El uso
+normal de esta instrucción es algo así como:
+</para>
+<screen>\chapter{Un Capítulo}
+&#8230;
+\appendix
+\chapter{El Primer Apéndice}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>contador secnumdepth</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>números de sección, imprimiendo</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El contador <literal>secnumdepth</literal> controla la impresión de los números de
+sección. La configuración
+</para>
+<screen>\setcounter{secnumdepth}{<replaceable>nivel</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>suprime los números en encabezados y cualquier profundidad <inlineequation><mathphrase>&gt;
+<replaceable>nivel</replaceable></mathphrase></inlineequation>, donde <literal>chapter</literal> es el nivel cero.
+(Véase <link linkend="_005csetcounter">\setcounter</link>.)
+</para>
+
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="8" id="Referencias-Cruzadas">
+<title>Referencias Cruzadas</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>referencias cruzadas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Una razón para numerar cosas como figuras y ecuaciones es para referir
+al lector a ellas, como en &#8220;Vea la Figura 3 para más detalles&#8221;.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="8.1" id="_005clabel">
+<title><literal>\label</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\label</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\label{<replaceable>clave</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Una instrucción <literal>\label</literal> que aparece en un texto normal asigna a
+<replaceable>clave</replaceable> el número de la unidad de sección actual; que aparece dentro
+de un entorno numerado asignando ese número a <replaceable>clave</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>Un nombre de <replaceable>clave</replaceable> puede consistir de cualquier secuencia de
+letras, dígitos, o caracteres de puntuación. Distingue entre letras
+mayúsculas y minúsculas.
+</para>
+<para>Para evitar la creación accidental de dos etiquetas con el mismo nombre,
+es común el uso de etiquetas que consisten de un prefijo y un sufijo,
+separados por una coma o un punto. Algunos prefijos utilizados
+convencionalmente:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>ch</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>para capítulos
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>sec</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>para instrucciones de seccionado de bajo nivel
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>fig</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>para figuras
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>tab</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>para tablas
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>eq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>para ecuaciones
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Por lo tanto, una etiqueta para una figura parecería como
+<literal>fig:snark</literal> o <literal>fig.snark</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.2" id="_005cpageref">
+<title><literal>\pageref{<replaceable>clave</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pageref</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>referencias cruzadas con número de página</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>número de página, referencias cruzadas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\pageref{<replaceable>clave</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\pageref</literal>{<replaceable>clave</replaceable>} produce el número de
+página del lugar en el texto en donde aparece la instrucción
+<literal>\label</literal>{<replaceable>clave</replaceable>}.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="8.3" id="_005cref">
+<title><literal>\ref{<replaceable>clave</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ref</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>referencias cruzadas, simbólicas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>número de sección, referencias cruzadas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>número de ecuación, referencias cruzadas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>número de figura, referencias cruzadas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>número de pie de página, referencias cruzadas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\ref{<replaceable>clave</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\ref</literal> produce el número de la unidad de sección de
+la ecuación, pie de página, figura, &#8230;, de la instrucción
+<literal>\label</literal> correspondiente (véase <link linkend="_005clabel">\label</link>). Esta no produce ningún
+texto, como por ejemplo la palabra &#8216;Sección&#8217; o &#8216;figura&#8217;, únicamente el
+número.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="9" id="Entornos">
+<title>Entornos</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>entornos</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\begin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\end</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; proporciona muchos entornos para marcar cierto texto. Cada
+entorno comienza y termina de la misma manera:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{<replaceable>nombreentorno</replaceable>}
+...
+\end{<replaceable>nombreentorno</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+
+
+<sect1 label="9.1" id="abstract">
+<title><literal>abstract</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>abstract</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>abstract</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>resúmenes</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para><screen>\begin{abstract}
+...
+\end{abstract}
+</screen>
+<para>Entorno para producir un resumen, posiblemente de varios párrafos.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.2" id="array">
+<title><literal>array</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>array</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>array</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>matrices, matemáticas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{array}{<replaceable>plantilla</replaceable>}
+<replaceable>texto col1</replaceable>&amp;<replaceable>texto col1</replaceable>&amp;<replaceable>coln</replaceable>}\\
+...
+\end{array}
+</screen>
+<para>Las matrices matemáticas se producen con el entorno <literal>array</literal>,
+normalmente dentro de un entorno <literal>equation</literal> (véase <link linkend="equation">equation</link>).
+Tiene un único argumento <replaceable>plantilla</replaceable> obligatorio que describe el
+número de columnas y la alineación dentro de ellas. Cada columna
+<replaceable>col</replaceable> se especifica por una sola letra que indica cual
+formato debe tener cada linea en esta columna de la siguiente manera:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>centrada
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>alineada a la izquierda
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>alineada a la derecha
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (para <literal>array</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La entradas de columna son separadas con <literal>&amp;</literal>. Las entradas de
+columna pueden incluir otras instrucciones &latex;. Cada fila de la
+matriz se termina con <literal>\\</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>@{...}</primary></indexterm>
+<para>En la plantilla, la construcción <literal>@{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</literal> coloca
+<replaceable>texto</replaceable> entre columnas en cada fila.
+</para>
+<para>He aquí un ejemplo:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+ \begin{array}{lrc}
+ izquierda1 &amp; derecha1 &amp; centrado1 \\
+ izquierda2 &amp; derecha2 &amp; centrado2 \\
+ \end{array}
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arraycolsep</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El parámetro <literal>\arraycolsep</literal> define la mitad del ancho del espacio
+de separación entre columnas; el predeterminado es &#8216;<literal>5pt</literal>&#8217;.
+Véase <link linkend="tabular">tabular</link>, para otros parámetros que afectan el formato en entornos
+<literal>array</literal>, a saber <literal>\arrayrulewidth</literal> y <literal>\arraystretch</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>El entorno <literal>array</literal> únicamente se puede utilizar en modo math.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.3" id="center">
+<title><literal>center</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>center</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>center</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>centrar texto, entorno para</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{center}
+<replaceable>línea1</replaceable> \\
+<replaceable>línea2</replaceable> \\
+\end{center}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (para <literal>centrar</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El entorno <literal>center</literal> le permite crear un párrafo consistente de
+líneas que están centradas respecto al margen izquierdo y derecho de la
+página actual. Cada línea es terminada con dobles barras inversas
+<literal>\\</literal>.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="9.3.1" id="_005ccentering">
+<title><literal>\centering</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\centering</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>centrar texto, declaración para</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La declaración <literal>\centering</literal> corresponde al entorno <literal>center</literal>.
+Esta declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un entorno tal como
+<literal>quote</literal> o en un <literal>parbox</literal>. Por lo tanto, el texto de una
+figura o una tabla se puede centrar en la página poniendo una
+instrucción <literal>\centering</literal> al principio de la figura o en el entorno
+table.
+</para>
+<para>A diferencia del entorno <literal>center</literal>, la instrucción <literal>\centering</literal>
+no comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta simplemente cambia el formato que
+&latex; aplica a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar el formato de
+la unidad de párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe contener una
+línea en blanco o la instrucción <literal>\end</literal> (de un entorno tal como
+quote), que finaliza la unidad de párrafo.
+</para>
+<para>He aquí un ejemplo:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{quote}
+\centering
+primer línea \\
+segunda línea \\
+\end{quote}
+</screen>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.4" id="description">
+<title><literal>description</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>description</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>description</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>listas etiquetadas, creando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>listas de descripción, creando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{description}
+\item [<replaceable>etiqueta1</replaceable>] <replaceable>elemento1</replaceable>
+\item [<replaceable>etiqueta2</replaceable>] <replaceable>elemento2</replaceable>
+...
+\end{description}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\item</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El entorno <literal>description</literal> se utiliza para hacer listas etiquetadas.
+Cada <replaceable>etiqueta</replaceable> es compuesta tipográficamente en negrita, alineada a
+la derecha. El texto del <replaceable>elemento</replaceable> puede contener múltiples
+párrafos.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>máquina de escribir en negrita, evitando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>etiquetas en máquina de escribir en listas</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Otra variación: debido a que el estilo negrita se aplica a las
+etiquetas, si usted compone una etiqueta en máquina de escribir usando
+<literal>\texttt</literal>, obtendrá una máquina de escribir en negrita:
+<literal>\item[\texttt{máquina de escribir y negrita}]</literal>. Esta también
+puede estar en negrita, entre otras cuestiones. Para obtener sólo en
+máquina de escribir, use <literal>\tt</literal>, que restablece todas las
+variaciones de otros estilos: <literal>\item[{\tt máquina de escribir
+simple}]</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Para detalles acerca del espaciado en listas, vea <link linkend="itemize">itemize</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.5" id="displaymath">
+<title><literal>displaymath</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>displaymath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>displaymath</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{displaymath}
+<replaceable>fórmula matemática</replaceable>
+\end{displaymath}
+</screen>
+<para>o
+</para>
+<screen>\[<replaceable>math</replaceable>\]
+</screen>
+<para>El entorno <literal>displaymath</literal> (<literal>\[...\]</literal> es un sinónimo) de
+composición tipográfica de texto <replaceable>math</replaceable> en una línea independiente,
+centrada de manera predeterminada. La opción global <literal>fleqn</literal>
+produce ecuaciones alineadas a la izquierda; vea <link linkend="Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase
+de Documento</link>.
+</para>
+<para>No se añade un número de ecuación al texto de <literal>displaymath</literal>; Para
+obtener un número de ecuación, utilice el entorno <literal>equation</literal>
+(véase <link linkend="equation">equation</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.6" id="document">
+<title><literal>document</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>document</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>document</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>El entorno <literal>document</literal> encierra el cuerpo de un documento. este es
+obligatorio en cada documento &latex;. Véase <link linkend="Iniciando-y-Finalizando">Iniciando y Finalizando</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.7" id="enumerate">
+<title><literal>enumerate</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>enumerate</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>enumerate</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lista de elementos, numerados</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{enumerate}
+\item <replaceable>elemento1</replaceable>
+\item <replaceable>elemento2</replaceable>
+...
+\end{enumerate}
+</screen>
+<para>El entorno <literal>enumerate</literal> produce una lista numerada. Las
+enumeraciones se pueden anidar unas dentro de otras, hasta cuatro
+niveles de profundidad. Estas también se pueden anidar en otros
+entornos de párrafo, tal como <literal>itemize</literal> (véase <link linkend="itemize">itemize</link>) y
+<literal>description</literal> (véase <link linkend="description">description</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\item</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Cada elemento de una lista enumerada comienza con una instrucción
+<literal>\item</literal>. En el entorno por lo menos debe haber una instrucción
+<literal>\item</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>De manera predeterminada, la numeración de cada nivel se hace de la
+siguiente manera:
+</para>
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>1., 2., &#8230;
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>(a), (b), &#8230;
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>i., ii., &#8230;
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>A., B., &#8230;
+</para></listitem></orderedlist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enumi</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enumii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enumiii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enumiv</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El entorno <literal>enumerate</literal> usa los contadores <literal>\enumi</literal> hasta
+<literal>\enumiv</literal> (véase <link linkend="Contadores">Contadores</link>). Si se proporciona el argumento
+opcional a <literal>\item</literal>, el contador no se incrementa por cada elemento.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelenumi</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelenumii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelenumiii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelenumiv</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El entorno <literal>enumerate</literal> utiliza las instrucciones desde
+<literal>\labelenumi</literal> hasta <literal>\labelenumiv</literal> para producir la etiqueta
+predeterminada. Por lo tanto, usted puede usar <literal>\renewcommand</literal>
+para cambiar las etiquetas (véase <link linkend="_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand y \renewcommand</link>). Por
+ejemplo, para hacer que el primer nivel use letras mayúsculas:
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>ejemplo \Alph</primary></indexterm>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
+</screen>
+
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.8" id="eqnarray">
+<title><literal>eqnarray</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>eqnarray</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>eqnarray</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ecuaciones, alineando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>alineando Ecuaciones</primary></indexterm>
+
+<screen>\begin{eqnarray} (o <literal>eqnarray*</literal>)
+<replaceable>fórmula1</replaceable> \\
+<replaceable>fórmula2</replaceable> \\
+...
+\end{eqnarray}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (para <literal>eqnarray</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El entorno <literal>eqnarray</literal> se utiliza para mostrar una secuencia de
+ecuaciones o desigualdades. Es muy parecido a un entorno <literal>array</literal>
+de tres columnas, con filas consecutivas separadas por <literal>\\</literal> y
+elementos consecutivos en una fila, separados por un <literal>&amp;</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\* (para <literal>eqnarray</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+<para>también puede utilizar <literal>\\*</literal> para separar ecuaciones
+independientes, con su propósito normal de no permitir saltos de página
+en esa línea.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nonumber</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>números de ecuación, omitiendo</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Se coloca un número de ecuación en cada línea a menos que la línea tenga
+una instrucción <literal>\nonumber</literal>. Alternativamente, la forma del
+entorno con <literal>*</literal> (<literal>\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}</literal>)
+debe omitir por completo la numeración de la ecuación, al tiempo que el
+mismo comienza con <literal>eqnarray</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lefteqn</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\lefteqn</literal> se utiliza para dividir grandes fórmulas
+a través de varias líneas. Su argumento de composición tipográfica en el
+estilo de visualización alinea a la izquierda en una caja de ancho cero.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.9" id="equation">
+<title><literal>equation</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>equation</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>equation</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ecuaciones, entornos para</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fórmulas, entornos para</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{equation}
+<replaceable>fórmula-matemática</replaceable>
+\end{equation}
+</screen>
+<para>El entorno <literal>equation</literal> comienza un entorno <literal>displaymath</literal>
+(véase <link linkend="displaymath">displaymath</link>), por ejemplo, centrando en la página el texto
+<replaceable>math</replaceable>, y además colocando el número de ecuación en el margen
+derecho.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.10" id="figure">
+<title><literal>figure</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>figure</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>figure</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>insertando figuras</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>figuras, insertando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<screen>\begin{figure[*]}[<replaceable>úbicación</replaceable>]
+<replaceable>figbody</replaceable>
+\label{<replaceable>etiqueta}</replaceable>
+\caption[<replaceable>títulobreve</replaceable>]{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+\end{figure}
+</screen>
+<para>Las figuras son objetos que no forman parte del texto normal, y en su
+lugar son &#8220;flotados&#8221; a un lugar conveniente, como en la parte superior
+de una página. Las figuras no se dividen entre dos páginas.
+</para>
+<para>Cuando se compone tipográficamente en columnas dobles, la forma favorita
+produce un ancho completo (a través de las dos columnas).
+</para>
+<para>El argumento opcional <literal>[ubicación]</literal> determina donde debe tratar de
+colocar &latex; su figura. Hay cuatro lugares donde &latex;,
+posiblemente, pueda colocar un flotante:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(Top)&#8212;en lo alto de una página de texto.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(Bottom)&#8212;en la parte inferior de una página de texto. No obstante,
+<literal>b</literal> no se permite para flotantes de ancho completo (<literal>figure*</literal>)
+en entornos con columnas dobles. Para mejorar esto, utilice el paquete
+<literal>stfloats</literal> o <literal>dblfloatfix</literal>, pero vea el debate de advertencias
+en el FAQ:
+<ulink url="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat</ulink>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>h</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>paquete <literal>float</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>(Here)&#8212;aquí, en la posición donde aparece el entorno <literal>figure</literal> en el
+texto. Sin embargo, este no está permitido por sí mismo,
+automáticamente se añade <literal>t</literal>. Para forzar que una figura
+absolutamente aparezca &#8220;aquí&#8221;, utilice el paquete <literal>float</literal> y use
+la letra de ubicación <literal>H</literal>. (Este paquete también ofrece otras
+opciones).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>p</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(Página de flotantes)&#8212;en una página de flotantes separada, misma que
+es una página que no contiene texto, únicamente flotantes.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Las clases estándar <literal>report</literal> y <literal>article</literal> utilizan la ubicación
+predeterminada <literal>tbp</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>El cuerpo de la figura se compone de cualquier texto, instrucciones
+&latex;, etc., que desee.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\caption</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\caption</literal> especifica el <replaceable>texto</replaceable> del título de
+la figura. El título de manera predeterminada lleva el número. Si
+<replaceable>loftitle</replaceable> está presente, esta se utiliza en la lista de figuras en
+lugar del <replaceable>texto</replaceable> (véase <link linkend="Tablas-de-Contenido">Tablas de Contenido</link>).
+</para>
+<!-- xx ¿secciones float-placement, float-caption? -->
+<variablelist><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bottomfraction</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La fracción máxima de la página que se permite sea ocupada por flotantes
+en la parte inferior; el predeterminado es &#8216;<literal>.3</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\floatpagefraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\floatpagefraction</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>La fracción mínima de una página flotante que deben ocupar los
+flotantes; predeterminado a &#8216;<literal>.5</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\floatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\floatsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Espacio entre flotantes en la parte superior o inferior de una página;
+predeterminado a &#8216;<literal>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\intextsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\intextsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Espacio por encima y por debajo de un flotante en medio del texto
+principal; predeterminado a &#8216;<literal>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</literal>&#8217; para estilos de
+&#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217; y &#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>14pt plus4pt minus4pt</literal>&#8217; para
+&#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textfloatsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\textfloatsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Espacio entre el último/primero flotante en la parte superior/inferior
+de una página; de manera predeterminada a &#8216;<literal>20pt plus2pt minus4pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textfraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\textfraction</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Mínima fracción de una página que debe ser texto; si los flotantes
+ocupan mucho espacio preserva tanto texto como sea posible, para que los
+flotantes sean trasladados a una página diferente. El predeterminado es
+&#8216;<literal>.2</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topfraction</primary></indexterm><literal>\topfraction</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Máxima fracción en la parte superior de una página que se puede ocupar
+antes de los flotantes; el predeterminado es &#8216;<literal>.7</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<!-- begin vincentb1 20160403 -->
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.11" id="filecontents">
+<title><literal>filecontents</literal>: Crear un archivo externo</title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>filecontents</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>filecontents</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>filecontents*</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>filecontents*</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{filecontents}{<replaceable>nombre-del-archivo</replaceable>}
+<replaceable>texto</replaceable>
+\end{filecontents}
+</screen>
+<para>o
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{filecontents*}{<replaceable>nombre-del-archivo</replaceable>}
+<replaceable>texto</replaceable>
+\end{filecontents*}
+</screen>
+<para>&latex; crea un archivo llamado <replaceable>nombre-del-archivo</replaceable> cuyo contenido
+es <replaceable>texto</replaceable>. El entorno sin <literal>*</literal> pone comentario de cabecera ;
+ver el ejemplo más abajo. Con <literal>*</literal> <literal>filecontents*</literal> no incluye
+el comentario de cabecera.
+</para>
+<para>Este entorno puede ser utilizado en cualquier lugar en el preámbulo,
+aunque aparezca en general antes de la instrucción
+<literal>\documentclass</literal>. Es típicamente utilizado cuando el archivo fuente
+necesita un archivo no estándar de estilo o de clase. El entorno permite
+escribir este archivo en el repertorio que contiene este archivo y así
+de devolver el código fuente autónoma. Otra utilización es incluir
+referencia al formato <literal>bib</literal> en el archivo fuente, lo mismo para
+hacerlo autónomo.
+</para>
+<para>El entorno verifica si un archivo con lo mismo nombre ya existe, y si
+sí, no hace nada. Hay un paquete <filename>filecontents</filename> quién vuelve a
+definir el entorno <literal>filecontents</literal> de modo que en lugar de no hacer
+nada en este caso, sobrescribe en el archivo existente.
+</para>
+<para>Por ejemplo, este documento
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{article}
+\begin{filecontents}{JH.sty}
+\newcommand{\minombre}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+\end{filecontents}
+\usepackage{JH}
+\begin{document}
+Un artículo de \minombre.
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>produce este archivo <filename>JH.sty</filename>.
+</para>
+<screen>%% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
+%% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+%% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
+%%
+\newcommand{\minombre}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+</screen>
+
+<!-- end vincentb1 20160403 -->
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.12" id="flushleft">
+<title><literal>flushleft</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>flushleft</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>flushleft</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>justificar texto a la izquierda, entornos para</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>texto irregular a la derecha, entorno para</primary></indexterm>
+
+<screen>\begin{flushleft}
+<replaceable>línea1</replaceable> \\
+<replaceable>línea2</replaceable> \\
+...
+\end{flushleft}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ para <literal>flushleft</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>El entorno <literal>flushleft</literal> le permite crear un párrafo consistente de
+líneas que están alineadas en el margen de la mano izquierda y no están
+justificadas a la derecha. Cada línea se debe terminar con <literal>\\</literal>.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="9.12.1" id="_005craggedright">
+<title><literal>\raggedright</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\raggedright</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>texto irregular a la derecha</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>justificando texto a la izquierda</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>justificación, alineando a la derecha</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La declaración <literal>\raggedright</literal> corresponde al entorno
+<literal>flushleft</literal>. Esta declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un
+entorno tal como <literal>quote</literal> o en un <literal>parbox</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>A diferencia del entorno <literal>flushleft</literal>, la instrucción
+<literal>\raggedright</literal> no comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta únicamente cambia
+como aplica &latex; el formato a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar
+el formato de la unidad párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe
+contener una línea en blanco o la instrucción <literal>\end</literal> que termina la
+unidad de párrafo.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.13" id="flushright">
+<title><literal>flushright</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>flushright</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>flushright</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>texto irregular a la izquierda, entorno para</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>justificar texto a la derecha, entorno para</primary></indexterm>
+
+<screen>\begin{flushright}
+<replaceable>línea1</replaceable> \\
+<replaceable>línea2</replaceable> \\
+...
+\end{flushright}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (para <literal>flushright</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El entorno <literal>flushright</literal> le permite crear un párrafo consistente de
+líneas que están alineadas en el margen a mano derecha e irregulares a
+la izquierda. Cada línea se debe terminar con <literal>\\</literal>.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="9.13.1" id="_005craggedleft">
+<title><literal>\raggedleft</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\raggedleft</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>texto irregular a la izquierda</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>justificación, irregular a la izquierda</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>texto justificado a la derecha</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La declaración <literal>\raggedleft</literal> corresponde al entorno
+<literal>flushright</literal>. Esta declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un
+entorno tal como <literal>quote</literal> o en un <literal>parbox</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>A diferencia del entorno <literal>flushright</literal>, la instrucción
+<literal>\raggedleft</literal> no comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta únicamente cambia
+como aplica &latex; el formato a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar
+el formato de la unidad párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe
+contener una línea en blanco o la instrucción <literal>\end</literal> que termina la
+unidad de párrafo.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.14" id="itemize">
+<title><literal>itemize</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>itemize</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>itemize</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\item</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>listas de elementos</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>listas no ordenadas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>listas con viñetas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{itemize}
+\item <replaceable>elemento1</replaceable>
+\item <replaceable>elemento2</replaceable>
+...
+\end{itemize}
+</screen>
+<para>El entorno <literal>itemize</literal> produce una lista &#8220;no ordenada&#8221;, &#8220;con
+viñetas&#8221;. Se pueden anidar entorno itemize dentro de otros, hasta
+cuatro niveles de profundidad. También se pueden anidar en otros
+entornos que marcan párrafos, tal como <literal>enumerate</literal>
+(véase <link linkend="enumerate">enumerate</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Cada elemento de una lista <literal>itemize</literal> comienza con una instrucción
+<literal>\item</literal>. En el entorno por lo menos debe haber una instrucción
+<literal>\item</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>De forma predeterminada, las marcas en cada nivel tienen esta
+apariencia:
+</para>
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>&#8226; (bala)
+</para></listitem><listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">--<!-- /@w --></emphasis> (guión en negrita)
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>* (asterisco)
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>. (punto centrado, aquí representado como un punto)
+</para></listitem></orderedlist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelitemi</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelitemii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelitemiii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelitemiv</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El entorno <literal>itemize</literal> utiliza las instrucciones desde
+<literal>\labelitemi</literal> hasta <literal>\labelitemiv</literal> para producir la etiqueta
+predeterminada. De modo que, usted puede usar <literal>\renewcommand</literal> para
+cambiar las etiquetas. Por ejemplo, para que en primer nivel utilice
+diamantes:
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmargin</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmargini</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmarginii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmarginiii</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmarginiv</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmarginv</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftmarginvi</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Los parámetros desde <literal>\leftmargini</literal> hasta <literal>\leftmarginvi</literal>
+definen la distancia entre el margen izquierdo del entorno envolvente y
+el margen izquierdo de la lista. Por convención, <literal>\leftmargin</literal> se
+fija al <literal>\leftmargin<replaceable>N</replaceable></literal> adecuado cuando ingresa a un nuevo
+nivel de anidamiento.
+</para>
+
+<para>El predeterminado varía desde &#8216;<literal>.5em</literal>&#8217; (el nivel de anidamiento
+superior) a &#8216;<literal>2.5em</literal>&#8217; (el primer nivel), y se reduce un poco en modo
+two-column. En este ejemplo se reduce mucho el espacio del margen para
+las listas anidadas:
+</para>
+<screen>\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % predeterminado 2.5em
+</screen>
+<!-- xx debe estar en su propia sección genérica -->
+<para>Algunos parámetros que afectan el formato de la lista:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\itemindent</primary></indexterm><literal>\itemindent</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Sangrado extra antes de cada elemento de una lista; predeterminado a
+cero.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\labelsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Espacio entre la etiqueta y el texto de un elemento; predeterminado a
+&#8216;<literal>.5em</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\labelwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\labelwidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Ancho de la etiqueta; predeterminado a &#8216;<literal>2em</literal>&#8217;, o &#8216;<literal>1.5em</literal>&#8217; en
+modo two-column.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\listparindent</primary></indexterm><literal>\listparindent</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Sangría extra añadida al segundo y subsecuentes párrafos, dentro de un
+elemento de la lista; predeterminado a &#8216;<literal>0pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightmargin</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightmargin</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Distancia horizontal entre el margen derecho de la lista y el entorno
+envolvente; de manera predeterminada &#8216;<literal>0pt</literal>&#8217;, salbo en los entornos
+<literal>quote</literal>, <literal>quotation</literal> y <literal>verse</literal>, donde se hace igual a
+<literal>\leftmargin</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Parámetros que afectan el espaciamiento vertical entre elementos de la
+lista (más bien libre, de manera predeterminada).
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\itemsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\itemsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Espacio vertical entre elementos. El predeterminado es <literal>2pt
+plus1pt minus1pt</literal> para <literal>10pt</literal> documentos, <literal>3pt plus2pt
+minus1pt</literal> para <literal>11pt</literal> y <literal>4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt</literal> para
+<literal>12pt</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\parsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Espacio vertical extra entre párrafos dentro de un elemento de la lista.
+Los predeterminados son los mismos que para <literal>\itemsep</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\topsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\topsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Espacio vertical entre el primer elemento y el párrafo anterior.
+</para>
+<para>Para listas de nivel superior, el predeterminado es
+<literal>8pt plus2pt minus4pt</literal> para <literal>10pt</literal> documentos,
+<literal>9pt plus3pt minus5pt</literal> para <literal>11pt</literal> y
+<literal>10pt plus4pt minus6pt</literal> para <literal>12pt</literal>. Estos se reducen
+en listas anidadas.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\partopsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\partopsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Espacio extra añadido a <literal>\topsep</literal> cuando el entorno lista comienza
+un párrafo. El valor predeterminado es <literal>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal> para
+<literal>10pt</literal> documentos, <literal>3pt plus1pt minus1pt</literal> para <literal>11pt</literal> y
+<literal>3pt plus2pt minus2pt</literal> para <literal>12pt</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>ejemplo \parskip</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Sobre todo para listas con elementos cortos, puede ser conveniente
+eludir los espacios entre ellos. He aquí un ejemplo de una definición
+del entorno <literal>itemize*</literal> sin espacio extra entre elementos o entre
+párrafos dentro de un solo elemento (<literal>\parskip</literal> no es específico de
+la lista, véase <link linkend="_005cparskip">\parskip</link>):
+</para>
+<screen>\newenvironment{itemize*}%
+ {\begin{itemize}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+ \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
+ {\end{itemize}}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.15" id="letter">
+<title>Entorno <literal>letter</literal>: Escribiendo Cartas</title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>letter</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>letter</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Este entorno se utiliza para crear cartas. Véase <link linkend="Cartas">Cartas</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.16" id="list">
+<title><literal>list</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>list</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>list</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>listas de elementos, genéricas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>El entorno <literal>list</literal> es un entorno genérico que se utiliza para
+definir mucho de los entornos más específicos. Este rara vez se utiliza
+en documentos, pero a muy menudo en las macros.
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{list}{<replaceable>etiquetado</replaceable>}{<replaceable>espaciado</replaceable>}
+\item <replaceable>elemento1</replaceable>
+\item <replaceable>elemento2</replaceable>
+...
+\end{list}
+</screen>
+<para>El argumento obligatorio <replaceable>etiquetado</replaceable> especifica como se deben
+etiquetar los elementos (a menos que se especifique el argumento
+opcional <literal>\item</literal>). Este argumento es una pieza de texto que se
+inserta en una caja para formar la etiqueta. Este se puede y suele
+contener otras instrucciones &latex;.
+</para>
+<para>El argumento obligatorio <replaceable>spacing</replaceable> contiene instrucciones para
+cambiar los parámetros de espaciado para la lista. Este argumento por
+lo regular está vacío, es decir, <literal>{}</literal>, lo cual deja el espaciado
+predeterminado.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.17" id="math">
+<title><literal>math</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>math</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>math</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fórmulas en línea</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{math}
+<replaceable>fórmula-matemática</replaceable>
+\end{math}
+</screen>
+<para>El entorno <literal>math</literal> inserta la fórmula <replaceable>math</replaceable> dada dentro del
+texto actual. <literal>\(...\))</literal> y <literal>$...$</literal> son sinónimos.
+Véase <link linkend="F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.18" id="minipage">
+<title><literal>minipage</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>minipage</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>minipage</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>minipage, creando una</primary></indexterm>
+
+<screen>\begin{minipage}[<replaceable>posición</replaceable>][<replaceable>alto</replaceable>][<replaceable>pos-interna</replaceable>]{<replaceable>ancho</replaceable>}
+<replaceable>texto</replaceable>
+\end{minipage}
+</screen>
+<para>El entorno <literal>minipage</literal> compone tipográficamente su cuerpo de
+<replaceable>texto</replaceable> en un bloque que no debe abarcar varias páginas. Este es
+similar a la instrucción <literal>\parbox</literal> (véase <link linkend="_005cparbox">\parbox</link>), pero a
+diferencia de <literal>\parbox</literal>, se pueden utilizar otros entornos de
+marcado de párrafos dentro de una minipágina.
+</para>
+<!-- (xxref posiciones) -->
+<para>Los argumentos son los mismos que para <literal>\parbox</literal>
+(véase <link linkend="_005cparbox">\parbox</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sangría de párrafos, en minipage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sangría de párrafos, en minipage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parindent</primary></indexterm>
+<para>De forma predeterminada, en el entorno <literal>minipage</literal> los párrafos no
+tienen sangría. Usted puede restablecer la sangría con una instrucción
+tal como <literal>\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>notas al pie en figuras</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>figuras, en notas al pie</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La notas al pie en un entorno <literal>minipage</literal> son manipuladas de una
+manera que es especialmente útil para poner notas en figuras o tablas.
+Una instrucción <literal>\footnote</literal> o <literal>\footnotetext</literal> coloca la nota
+al pie en la parte inferior de la minipágina en lugar de en la parte
+inferior de la página, y esta utiliza el contador <literal>\mpfootnote</literal> en
+lugar del contador normal <literal>footnote</literal> (véase <link linkend="Contadores">Contadores</link>).
+</para>
+<para>No obstante, no ponga una minipágina dentro de otra si usted está usando
+notas al pie; estas pueden terminar mal en la parte inferior de la
+minipágina.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.19" id="picture">
+<title><literal>picture</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>picture</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>picture</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>creando imágenes</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>imágenes, creando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<screen>\begin{picture}(ancho,alto)(desplazamiento x,desplazamiento y)
+&#8230; <replaceable>instrucciones de imagen</replaceable> &#8230;
+\end{picture}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unitlength</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El entorno <literal>picture</literal> le permite crear casi cualquier clase de
+imagen que desee que contenga su texto, lineas, flechas y círculos.
+Usted le dice a &latex; dónde colocar las cosas en la imagen
+especificando sus coordenadas. Una coordenada es un número que puede
+tener un punto decimal y un signo menos &#8212; un número como <literal>5</literal>,
+<literal>0.3</literal> o <literal>-3.1416</literal>. Una coordenada especifica una longitud en
+múltiplos de la unidad de longitud <literal>\unitlength</literal>, por lo que si
+<literal>\unitlength</literal> se ha establecido en <literal>1cm</literal>, entonces la
+coordenada 2.54 especifica una longitud de 2.54 centímetros. Sólo debe
+cambiar el valor de <literal>\unitlength</literal>, utilizando la instrucción
+<literal>\setlength</literal>, fuera del entorno <literal>picture</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Una posición es un par de coordenadas, por ejemplo, <literal>(2.4, -5)</literal>,
+que especifican el punto con coordenada x <literal>2.4</literal> y coordenada y
+<literal>-5</literal>. Las coordenadas se especifican en la forma habitual con
+respecto a un origen, que normalmente está en la esquina inferior
+izquierda de la imagen. Tenga en cuenta que cuando una posición se
+presenta como un argumento, no se encierra entre llaves; los paréntesis
+sirven para delimitar el argumento.
+</para>
+<para>El entorno <literal>picture</literal> tiene un argumento obligatorio, el cual es una
+<literal>posición</literal>. este especifica el tamaño de la imagen. El entorno
+produce una caja rectangular con la anchura y altura determinada por los
+argumentos de las coordenadas x e y.
+</para>
+<para>El entorno <literal>picture</literal> también tiene un argumento opcional
+<literal>posición</literal>, seguido del argumento <literal>tamaño</literal>, que puede cambiar
+el origen. (A diferencia de los argumentos opcionales, este argumento
+no está contenido entre corchetes). El argumento opcional proporciona
+las coordenadas del punto en la esquina inferior izquierda de la imagen
+(con el cual se determina el origen). Por ejemplo, si
+<literal>\unitlength</literal> se ha fijado a <literal>1mm</literal>, la instrucción
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+</screen>
+<para>produce una imagen de 100 milímetros de ancho y 200 milímetros de
+altura, cuya esquina inferior izquierda está en el punto (10,20) y cuya
+esquina superior derecha está en el punto (110,220). La primera vez que
+haga un dibujo, normalmente se omite el argumento opcional, dejando el
+origen en el ángulo inferior izquierdo. Si a continuación desea
+modificar su imagen, trasladando todo, basta con añadir el argumento
+opcional apropiado.
+</para>
+<para>El argumento obligatorio del entorno determina el tamaño nominal de la
+imagen. Esta no necesita tener ninguna relación con el tamaño de la
+imagen real; Felizmente &latex; le permitirá poner cosas fuera de la
+imagen, o incluso fuera de la página. El tamaño nominal de la imagen lo
+utiliza &latex; para determinar cuánto espacio dejar para ello.
+</para>
+<para>Todo lo que aparece en una imagen es dibujado por la instrucción
+<literal>\put</literal>. La instrucción
+</para>
+<screen>\put (11.3,-.3){...}
+</screen>
+<para>coloca el objeto especificado por <literal>...</literal> en la imagen, con su punto
+de referencia en las coordenadas <inlineequation><mathphrase>(11.3, -.3)</mathphrase></inlineequation>. Los puntos de
+referencia para distintos objetos se describen a continuación.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>caja lR</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\put</literal> crea una <firstterm>caja LR</firstterm>. Puede poner
+cualquier cosa que vaya en una <literal>\mbox</literal> (véase <link linkend="_005cmbox">\mbox</link>) en el
+argumento texto de la instrucción <literal>\put</literal>. Al hacer esto, el punto
+de referencia será la esquina inferior izquierda de la caja.
+</para>
+<para>Las instrucciones para <literal>picture</literal> están descritas en las siguientes
+secciones.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="9.19.1" id="_005ccircle">
+<title><literal>\circle</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\circle</primary></indexterm>
+
+<screen>\circle[*]{<replaceable>diámetro</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\circle</literal> produce un círculo con un diámetro lo más
+cercano posible al especificado. La forma con <literal>*</literal> de la
+instrucción dibuja un círculo sólido.
+</para>
+<para>Se pueden dibujar círculos de hasta 40 pt.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.19.2" id="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">
+<title><literal>\makebox</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makebox (<literal>picture</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+
+<screen>\makebox(<replaceable>ancho</replaceable>,<replaceable>alto</replaceable>)[<replaceable>posición</replaceable>]{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\makebox</literal> para el entorno <literal>picture</literal> es similar a la
+instrucción normal <literal>\makebox</literal> excepto que usted debe especificar el
+<replaceable>ancho</replaceable> y <replaceable>alto</replaceable> en múltiplos de <literal>\unitlength</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>El argumento opcional, <literal>[<replaceable>posición</replaceable>]</literal>, especifica el cuadrante en el
+que debe aparecer el <replaceable>texto</replaceable>. Usted puede seleccionar hasta dos de los
+siguientes:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Mueve el elemento a la parte superior del rectángulo.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Mueve el elemento a la parte inferior.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Mueve el elemento a la izquierda.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Mueve el elemento hacia la derecha.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Véase <link linkend="_005cmakebox">\makebox</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.19.3" id="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">
+<title><literal>\framebox</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\framebox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\framebox(<replaceable>ancho</replaceable>,<replaceable>alto</replaceable>)[<replaceable>posición</replaceable>]{...}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\framebox</literal> es como <literal>\makebox</literal> (vea la sección
+anterior), excepto que esta coloca un marco en el exterior alrededor de
+la caja que crea.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxrule</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxsep</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\framebox</literal> produce una regla de espesor
+<literal>\fboxrule</literal>, y deja un espacio <literal>\fboxsep</literal> entre la regla y el
+contenido de la caja.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.19.4" id="_005cdashbox">
+<title><literal>\dashbox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dashbox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Dibuja un cuadro con una línea discontinua. Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\dashbox{<replaceable>glargo</replaceable>}(<replaceable>rancho</replaceable>,<replaceable>ralto</replaceable>)[<replaceable>posición</replaceable>]{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para><literal>\dashbox</literal> crea un rectángulo discontinuo alrededor del <replaceable>texto</replaceable>
+en un entorno <literal>picture</literal>. Los guiones son de <replaceable>glargo</replaceable> unidades
+de largo, y el rectángulo tiene una anchura total de <replaceable>rancho</replaceable> y una
+altura de <replaceable>ralto</replaceable>. El <replaceable>texto</replaceable> es posicionado en la
+<replaceable>posición</replaceable> opcional. <!-- xx ref a posiciones. -->
+</para>
+<para>Un cuadro de líneas discontinuas se ve mejor cuando <replaceable>rancho</replaceable> y
+<replaceable>ralto</replaceable> son múltiplos de <replaceable>glargo</replaceable>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.19.5" id="_005cframe">
+<title><literal>\frame</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frame</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\frame{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\frame</literal> coloca un marco rectangular alrededor de
+<replaceable>texto</replaceable>. El punto de referencia es la esquina inferior izquierda
+del marco. No añade espacio extra entre el marco y el objeto.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.19.6" id="_005cline">
+<title><literal>\line</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\line</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\line(<replaceable>declivex</replaceable>,<replaceable>declivey</replaceable>){<replaceable>longitud</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\line</literal> dibuja una línea con la <replaceable>longitud</replaceable> dada
+y declive <replaceable>declivex</replaceable>/<replaceable>declivey</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; estándar únicamente puede dibujar líneas con
+<inlineequation><mathphrase><replaceable>declive</replaceable> = x/y</mathphrase></inlineequation>, donde <inlineequation><mathphrase>x</mathphrase></inlineequation> y <inlineequation><mathphrase>y</mathphrase></inlineequation> tienen valores
+enteros desde &#8722;6 hasta&#160;6. Para líneas de cualquier declive,
+por no hablar de otras formas, vea el paquete <literal>curve2e</literal> y muchos,
+muchos otros paquetes en CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.19.7" id="_005clinethickness">
+<title><literal>\linethickness</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linethickness</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\linethickness{<replaceable>espesor</replaceable>}</literal> declara el grosor
+de las líneas horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture para que
+sean de <replaceable>espesor</replaceable>, el cual debe ser una longitud positiva.
+</para>
+<para><literal>\linethickness</literal> no afecta el espesor de las líneas inclinadas,
+círculos o los cuartos de círculo dibujados por <literal>\oval</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.19.8" id="_005cthicklines">
+<title><literal>\thicklines</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thicklines</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\thicklines</literal> es un espesor de línea alternativo
+para líneas horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture;
+compárese&#160;<link linkend="_005clinethickness">\linethickness</link> y <link linkend="_005cthinlines">\thinlines</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.19.9" id="_005cthinlines">
+<title><literal>\thinlines</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thinlines</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\thinlines</literal> es el espesor de línea predeterminado
+para líneas horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture;
+compárese&#160;<link linkend="_005clinethickness">\linethickness</link> y <link linkend="_005cthicklines">\thicklines</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.19.10" id="_005cmultiput">
+<title><literal>\multiput</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\multiput</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para><screen>\multiput(<replaceable>x</replaceable>,<replaceable>y</replaceable>)(<replaceable>delta_x</replaceable>,<replaceable>delta_y</replaceable>){<replaceable>n</replaceable>}{<replaceable>obj</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\multiput</literal> copia el objeto <replaceable>obj</replaceable> en un patrón
+regular entre imágenes. primero se coloca <replaceable>obj</replaceable> en la posición
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>(x,y)</mathphrase></inlineequation>, luego en la posición <inlineequation><mathphrase>(x+\delta x,y+\delta y)</mathphrase></inlineequation> y así
+sucesivamente, <replaceable>n</replaceable> veces.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.19.11" id="_005coval">
+<title><literal>\oval</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oval</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\oval(<replaceable>ancho</replaceable>,<replaceable>alto</replaceable>)[<replaceable>porción</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\oval</literal> produce un rectángulo con esquinas
+redondeadas. El argumento opcional <replaceable>porción</replaceable> le permite seleccionar
+la parte del óvalo vía las siguientes letras:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>selecciona la parte superior;
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>selecciona la parte inferior;
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>selecciona la parte derecha;
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>selecciona la parte izquierda.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Las &#8220;esquinas&#8221; del óvalo se hacen con cuartos de círculo con un radio
+máximo de 20pt, por lo tanto los &#8220;óvalos&#8221; grandes se parecen más
+a cajas con esquinas redondeadas.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.19.12" id="_005cput">
+<title><literal>\put</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\put</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\put(<replaceable>xcoord</replaceable>,<replaceable>ycoord</replaceable>){ ... }</literal>
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\put</literal> coloca el elemento especificado por el
+argumento obligatorio en las coordenadas <replaceable>xcoord</replaceable> e
+<replaceable>ycoord</replaceable> proporcionadas.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.19.13" id="_005cshortstack">
+<title><literal>\shortstack</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\shortstack</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\shortstack[<replaceable>posición</replaceable>]{...\\...\\...}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\shortstack</literal> produce un montón de objetos. Las
+posiciones válidas son:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Mueve los objetos a la derecha de la pila.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Mueve los objetos a la izquierda de la pila
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Mueve los objetos hacia el centro de la pila (predeterminado)
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ (para objetos <literal>\shortstack</literal>)</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Los objetos son separados con <literal>\\</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.19.14" id="_005cvector">
+<title><literal>\vector</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vector</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<!-- vincentb1 20140824 please replace @comma{} by , when accepting @vincentb macro -->
+<!-- vincentb1, also @backslashchar{} can be replaced by \ -->
+<screen>&#92;vector(<replaceable>declivex</replaceable>&#44;<replaceable>declivey</replaceable>){<replaceable>longitud</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\vector</literal> dibuja una línea con una flecha de la
+longitud y declive especificados. Los valores
+<inlineequation><mathphrase><replaceable>declivex</replaceable></mathphrase></inlineequation> i <inlineequation><mathphrase><replaceable>declivey</replaceable></mathphrase></inlineequation> deben
+estar entre &#8722;4 y +4 incluido.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.20" id="quotation">
+<title><literal>quotation</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>quotation</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>quotation</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>texto citado con sangría de párrafo, mostrando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>mostrando texto citado con sangría de párrafo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sangrías de párrafo en texto citado</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{quotation}
+<replaceable>texto</replaceable>
+\end{quotation}
+</screen>
+<para>A los márgenes del entorno <literal>quotation</literal> se les aplica una sangría en
+ambos lados izquierdo y derecho. El texto está justificado en ambos
+márgenes. Dejar una línea en blanco entre el texto produce un nuevo
+párrafo.
+</para>
+<para>A diferencia del entorno <literal>quote</literal>, cada párrafo normalmente tiene
+sangría.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.21" id="quote">
+<title><literal>quote</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>quote</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>quote</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>texto citado sin sangría de párrafo, mostrando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>mostrando texto citado sin sangría de párrafo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sangrías de párrafo en texto citado, omitiendo</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{quote}
+<replaceable>texto</replaceable>
+\end{quote}
+</screen>
+<para>A los márgenes del entorno <literal>quote</literal> se les aplica una sangría en
+ambos lados izquierdo y derecho. El texto está justificado en ambos
+márgenes. Dejar una línea en blanco entre el texto produce un nuevo
+párrafo.
+</para>
+<para>A diferencia del entorno <literal>quotation</literal>, a los párrafos no se les
+aplica una sangría.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.22" id="tabbing">
+<title><literal>tabbing</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>tabbing</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>tabbing</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tabulaciones, utilizando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>alineando texto en columnas con tabulaciones</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>alineando a través de tabulación</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabbing}
+<replaceable>fila1col1</replaceable> \= <replaceable>fila1col2</replaceable> \= <replaceable>fila1col3</replaceable> \= <replaceable>fila1col4</replaceable> \\
+<replaceable>fila2col1</replaceable> \&gt; \&gt; <replaceable>fila2col3</replaceable> \\
+...
+\end{tabbing}
+</screen>
+<para>El entorno <literal>tabbing</literal> proporciona una manera de alinear el texto en
+columnas. Funciona mediante el establecimiento de tabuladores y
+tabulación tanto como si se hubiera hecho en una máquina de escribir
+común. Es el más adecuado para los casos en que el ancho de cada
+columna es constante y conocido de antemano.
+</para>
+<para>Este entorno se puede dividir en varias páginas, a diferencia del
+entorno <literal>tabular</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Las siguientes instrucciones se pueden utilizar dentro de un entorno
+<literal>tabbing</literal>:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ tabbing</primary></indexterm><literal>\\ tabbing</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Final de línea.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\= (tabbing)</primary></indexterm><literal>\= (tabbing)</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Establece una tabulación en la posición actual.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\&gt; (tabbing)</primary></indexterm><literal>\&gt; (tabbing)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\&gt;</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Avanza a la siguiente tabulación.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\&lt;</primary></indexterm><literal>\&lt;</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Coloca el siguiente texto a la izquierda del margen local (sin necesidad
+de cambiar el margen). Sólo se puede usar al comienzo de la línea.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\+</primary></indexterm><literal>\+</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Mueve hacia la derecha el margen izquierdo del siguiente y todas las
+subsecuentes instrucciones de tabulación, empezando la línea de
+tabulación, de ser necesario.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\-</primary></indexterm><literal>\-</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Mueve el margen izquierdo hacia la izquierda de la siguiente y todas las
+subsecuentes instrucciones de tabulación, comenzando con la línea de
+tabulación si es necesario.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\' (tabbing)</primary></indexterm><literal>\' (tabbing)</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Mueve todo lo que ha escrito hasta ahora en la columna actual, es decir,
+cualquier cosa desde la instrucción <literal>\&gt;</literal>, <literal>\&lt;</literal>, <literal>\'</literal>,
+<literal>\\</literal> o <literal>\kill</literal> más reciente, a la derecha de la columna
+anterior, a ras de la tabulación de la columna actual.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\` (tabbing)</primary></indexterm><literal>\` (tabbing)</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Permite poner texto alineado a la derecha contra cualquier tabulación,
+incluyendo la tabulación&#160;0. Sin embargo, no puede mover el texto a
+la derecha de la última columna porque allí no hay tabulación. La
+instrucción <literal>\`</literal> mueve todo el texto que le sigue, hasta la
+instrucción <literal>\\</literal> o <literal>\end{tabbing}</literal> que termina la línea, al
+margen derecho del entorno tabbing. No debe haber instrucción <literal>\&gt;</literal>
+o <literal>\'</literal> entre el <literal>\`</literal> y la instrucción que termina la línea.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\a (tabbing)</primary></indexterm><literal>\a (tabbing)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\a' (acento agudo en tabulación)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\a` (acento grave en tabulación)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\a= (acento macrón en tabbing)</primary></indexterm>
+<para>En un entorno <literal>tabbing</literal>, las instrucciones <literal>\=</literal>, <literal>\'</literal> y
+<literal>\`</literal> no producen acentos en la manera usual (véase <link linkend="Acentos">Acentos</link>). En
+su lugar, se utilizan estas instrucciones <literal>\a=</literal>, <literal>\a'</literal> y
+<literal>\a`</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\kill</primary></indexterm><literal>\kill</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Fija una tabulación sin producir texto. Trabaja igual que <literal>\\</literal>
+salvo que esta desecha la línea actual en lugar de producir algo útil.
+El efecto de cualquier instrucción <literal>\=</literal>, <literal>\+</literal> o <literal>\-</literal> en
+esa línea seguirá en vigor.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\poptabs</primary></indexterm><literal>\poptabs</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\poptabs</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Restaura las posiciones de tabulación salvadas por la última
+<literal>\pushtabs</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pushtabs</primary></indexterm><literal>\pushtabs</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Guarda todas las posiciones de tabulación actuales. Útil para cambiar
+temporalmente las posiciones de tabulación en medio de un entorno
+<literal>tabbing</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tabbingsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\tabbingsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Distancia a la izquierda de la tabulación movida por <literal>\'</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>En este ejemplo se compone tipográficamente una función de Pascal en el
+formato tradicional:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabbing}
+function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \&gt; begin \= \+ \\
+ \&gt; if \= n $&gt;$ 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+\end{tabbing}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.23" id="table">
+<title><literal>table</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>table</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>table</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tablas, creando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>creando tablas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen> \begin{table}[ubicación]
+
+ cuerpo de la tabla
+
+ \caption{título de la tabla}
+ \end{table}
+</screen>
+<para>Las tablas son objetos que no forman parte del texto normal, y por lo
+general &#8220;flotan&#8221; a un lugar conveniente, como la parte superior de una
+página. Las tablas no se dividen en dos páginas.
+</para>
+<para>El argumento opcional <literal>[ubicación]</literal> determina dónde &latex; trata
+de colocar su tabla. Hay cuatro lugares donde &latex;, posiblemente,
+pueda colocar un flotante:; estos son los mismo que los utilizados con
+el entorno <literal>figure</literal>, y se describen allí (véase <link linkend="figure">figure</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Las clases <literal>report</literal> y <literal>article</literal> estándar utilizan la ubicación
+<literal>[tbp]</literal> predeterminada.
+</para>
+<para>El cuerpo de la tabla se compone de cualquier texto, instrucciones
+&latex;, etc., que usted desee. La instrucción <literal>\caption</literal> le
+permite colocar un título a su tabla.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.24" id="tabular">
+<title><literal>tabular</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>tabular</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>tabular</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>líneas en tablas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>alineando texto en tablas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}[ubicación]{columnas}
+columna 1 entrada &amp; columna 2 entrada ... &amp; columna n entrada n \\
+...
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+<para>o
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular*}{ancho}[posición]{columnas}
+columna 1 entrada &amp; columna 2 entrada ... &amp; columna n entrada n \\
+...
+\end{tabular*}
+</screen>
+<para>Estos entornos producen una caja consiste de una secuencia de filas de
+elementos, alineadas verticalmente en columnas.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ para <literal>tabular</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>Se debe utilizar <literal>\\</literal> para especificar el final de cada fila de la
+tabla, salvo por la última, en que esta es opcional &#8212;a menos que le
+siga una instrucción <literal>\hline</literal> (para colocar una raya bajo la
+tabla).
+</para>
+<para>Los argumentos obligatorios y opcionales consisten de:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>ancho</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Especifica la anchura del entorno <literal>tabular*</literal>. Este debe tener
+espacio entre las columnas que se puede estirar para llenar el ancho
+especificado.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>posición</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Especifica la posición vertical; de manera predeterminada
+alinea al centro el entorno.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>alineado en la fila superior
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>alineado en la fila inferior
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>columnas</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Especifica el formato de columna. Este consiste en una secuencia de los
+siguientes especificadores, correspondientes a la secuencia de columnas
+y el material intercolumna.
+</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Una columna de elementos alineados a la izquierda.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Una columna de elementos alineados a la derecha.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Una columna de elementos centrados.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>|</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Una línea vertical que llena la altura y profundidad total del entorno.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>@{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Esta inserta <replaceable>texto</replaceable> en cada fila. Una @-expresión suprime el
+espacio intercolumnas insertado normalmente entre columnas; cualquier
+espacio deseado entre el texto insertado y los elementos adyacentes se
+deberá incluir en <replaceable>texto</replaceable>. Una instrucción
+<literal>\extracolsep{ancho}</literal> en una @-expresión provoca que aparezca un
+espacio extra de ancho <literal>ancho</literal> a la izquierda de todas las columnas
+subsecuentes, hasta que se anule por otra instrucción
+<literal>\extracolsep</literal>. A diferencia del espacio intercolumna ordinario,
+este espacio adicional no se suprime por una @-expresión. Una
+instrucción <literal>\extracolsep</literal> únicamente se pude utilizar en una
+@-expresión en el argumento <literal>columnas</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>p{<replaceable>ancho</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Produce una columna con cada elemento compuesto tipográficamente en una
+parbox de ancho <replaceable>ancho</replaceable>, como si fuera el argumento de una
+instrucción <literal>\parbox[t]{<replaceable>ancho</replaceable>}</literal>. Sin embargo, una
+<literal>\\</literal> en el elemento no puede, salvo en las siguientes situaciones:
+</para>
+<orderedlist numeration="arabic"><listitem><para>Dentro de un entorno como <literal>minipage</literal>, <literal>array</literal> o
+<literal>tabular</literal>.
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>Dentro de una <literal>\parbox</literal> explícita.
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>En el alcance de una declaración <literal>\centering</literal>, <literal>\raggedright</literal>
+o <literal>\raggedleft</literal>. La última declaración debe aparecer dentro de
+llaves o un entorno cuando se utiliza en un elemento <literal>p</literal>-columna.
+</para></listitem></orderedlist>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>*{<replaceable>número</replaceable>}{<replaceable>columnas</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Equivalente a <replaceable>número</replaceable> de copias de <replaceable>columnas</replaceable>, donde
+<replaceable>número</replaceable> es un entero positivo y <replaceable>columnas</replaceable> es cualquier lista
+de especificadores de columna, la cual puede contener otra
+<literal>*-expresión</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Parámetros que controlan el formato:
+<!-- xx predeterminado, ¿en su propio nodo (xref desde array)? -->
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arrayrulewidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\arrayrulewidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>El espesor de la línea creada por <literal>|</literal>, <literal>\hline</literal> y
+<literal>\vline</literal> en los entornos <literal>tabular</literal> y <literal>array</literal>; el
+predeterminado es &#8216;<literal>.4pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arraystretch</primary></indexterm><literal>\arraystretch</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>El factor para escalar el espaciado entre hileras en los entornos
+<literal>tabular</literal> y <literal>array</literal>; el predeterminado es &#8216;<literal>1</literal>&#8217;, para no
+escalar.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\doublerulesep</primary></indexterm><literal>\doublerulesep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Distancia horizontal entre las líneas verticles producidas por <literal>||</literal>
+en los entornos <literal>tabular</literal> y <literal>array</literal>; el predeterminado es
+&#8216;<literal>2pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tabcolsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\tabcolsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>La mitad de la anchura del espacio entre las columnas; el predeterminado
+es &#8216;<literal>6pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Estas instrucciones se pueden utilizar en el interior de un entorno
+<literal>tabular</literal>:
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="9.24.1" id="_005cmulticolumn">
+<title><literal>\multicolumn</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\multicolumn</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para><screen>\multicolumn{<replaceable>columnas</replaceable>}{<replaceable>posición</replaceable>}{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\multicolumn</literal> provoca que una entrada se extienda
+por varias columnas. El primer argumento obligatorio, <replaceable>columnas</replaceable>,
+especifica es el número de columnas por abarcar. El segundo argumento
+obligatorio, <replaceable>posición</replaceable>, especifica el formato de la entrada;
+<literal>c</literal> para centrado, <literal>l</literal> para alineado a la izquierda, <literal>r</literal>
+para alineado a la derecha. El tercer argumento obligatorio,
+<replaceable>texto</replaceable>, especifica el texto a colocar en la entrada.
+</para>
+<para>He aquí un ejemplo que muestra dos columnas separadas por un doble
+guión; <literal>\multicolumn</literal> se utiliza para el encabezado:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{tabular}{r@{--}l}
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr
+ 0x80&amp;0x7FF \cr
+ 0x800&amp;0xFFFF \cr
+0x10000&amp;0x1FFFF \cr
+\end{tabular}
+</screen>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.24.2" id="_005ccline">
+<title><literal>\cline</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cline</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\cline{<replaceable>i</replaceable>-<replaceable>j</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\cline</literal> dibuja un línea horizontal a través de las
+columnas especificadas, comenzando en la colúmna <replaceable>i</replaceable> y terminando en
+la columna <replaceable>j</replaceable>, que son especificadas en el argumento obligatorio.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.24.3" id="_005chline">
+<title><literal>\hline</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hline</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\hline</literal> dibuja una línea horizontal del ancho del
+entorno <literal>tabular</literal> o <literal>array</literal> especificado. Se utiliza
+comúnmente para para dibujar una línea en la parte superior, inferior y
+entre filas de la tabla.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.24.4" id="_005cvline">
+<title><literal>\vline</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vline</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\vline</literal> dibuja una línea vertical extendida a la
+altura y profundidad total de su fila. Una instrucción <literal>\hfill</literal> se
+puede utilizar para mover la línea hasta el borde de la columna.
+También se puede utilizar en una @-expresión.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.25" id="thebibliography">
+<title><literal>thebibliography</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>thebibliography</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>thebibliography</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bibliografía, creando (manualmente)</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{thebibliography}{<replaceable>etiqueta-más-amplia</replaceable>}
+\bibitem[<replaceable>etiqueta</replaceable>]{<replaceable>clave-de-cita}</replaceable>
+...
+\end{thebibliography}
+</screen>
+<para>El entorno <literal>thebibliography</literal> produce una bibliografía o lista de
+referencia.
+</para>
+<para>En las clase <literal>article</literal>, esta lista de referencia es etiquetada como
+&#8220;Referencias&#8221;; en la clase <literal>report</literal>, esta es etiquetada como
+&#8220;Bibliografía&#8221;. Usted puede cambiar la etiqueta (en las clases
+estándar) redefiniendo la instrucción <literal>\refname</literal>. Por ejemplo, la
+siguiente instrucción la elimina por completo:
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\refname}{}
+</screen>
+<para>El argumento obligatorio <replaceable>etiqueta-más-amplia</replaceable> es texto que, al
+momento de componerla tipográficamente, es tan ancho como la etiqueta
+producida por la instrucción <literal>\bibitem</literal>. Se suele dar como
+<literal>9</literal> para bibliografías de menos de 10 referencias, <literal>99</literal> para
+las que tienen menos de 100, etc.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="9.25.1" id="_005cbibitem">
+<title><literal>\bibitem</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bibitem</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para><screen>\bibitem[<replaceable>etiqueta</replaceable>]{<replaceable>clave-de-cita</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\bibitem</literal> genera una entrada etiquetada por
+<replaceable>etiqueta</replaceable>. Si se omite el argumento <replaceable>etiqueta</replaceable>,
+automáticamente se genera un número utilizando el contador <literal>enumi</literal>.
+La <replaceable>clave-de-cita</replaceable> es cualquier secuencia de letras, números y
+signos de puntuación que no contenga una coma.
+</para>
+<para>Esta instrucción escribe una entrada al archivo <filename>.aux</filename> que contiene
+los elementos <replaceable>clave-de-cita</replaceable> y etiqueta. Cuando la instrucción
+<literal>\begin{document}</literal> lee el archivo <filename>.aux</filename>, los elementos
+<literal>etiqueta</literal> son asociados con <literal>clave-de-cita</literal>, produciendo
+referencias a <replaceable>clave-de-cita</replaceable> con una instrucción <literal>\cite</literal> (vea
+la siguiente sección) para producir la etiqueta asociada.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.25.2" id="_005ccite">
+<title><literal>\cite</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cite</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\cite[<replaceable>subcita</replaceable>]{<replaceable>claves</replaceable>
+</screen>
+<para>El argumento <replaceable>claves</replaceable> es una lista de una o más claves de cita,
+separadas por comas. Esta instrucción genera una cita en el texto para
+referencias asociadas con <replaceable>claves</replaceable> por medio de entradas en el
+archivo <filename>.aux</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>El argumento de texti opcional <replaceable>subcita</replaceable> aparece después de la cita.
+Por ejemplo, <literal>\cite[p.~314]{knuth}</literal> podría producir &#8216;[Knuth,
+p.&#160;314]&#8217;.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.25.3" id="_005cnocite">
+<title><literal>\nocite</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nocite</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\nocite{lista-de-claves}</literal>
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\nocite</literal> no produce texto, pero escribe en el archivo
+<filename>.aux</filename> la <literal>lista-de-claves</literal>, que es una lista de una o más
+etiquetas de cita.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="9.25.4" id="Usando-BibTeX">
+<title>Usando Bib&tex;</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>usando Bib&tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bib&tex;, usando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bibliografía, creando (automáticamente)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bibliographystyle</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bibliography</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+<para>Si usted utiliza el programa Bib&tex; escrito por Oren Patashnik
+(altamente recomendable si necesita una bibliografía de más de un par de
+títulos) para mantener su bibliografía, no utilice el entorno
+<literal>thebibliography</literal> (véase <link linkend="thebibliography">thebibliography</link>). En su lugar, incluya
+las líneas
+</para>
+<screen>\bibliographystyle{<replaceable>estilo-de-bibliografía</replaceable>}
+\bibliography{<replaceable>archivo-de-bibliografía-1,</replaceable><replaceable>archivo-de-bibliografía-2</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\bibliographystyle</literal> por sí misma no produce salida
+alguna. Por el contrario, define el estilo en que se producirá la
+bibliografía: <replaceable>estilo-de-bibliografía</replaceable> se refiere a un archivo
+<filename><replaceable>estilo-de-bibliografía</replaceable>.bst</filename>, en el que se define qué
+apariencia tendrán las citas. Los nombres de <replaceable>estilo</replaceable> estándar
+distribuidos con Bib&tex; son:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>alpha</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Ordenadas alfabéticamente. Las etiquetas están formadas por el nombre
+del autor y año de publicación.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>plain</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Ordenadas alfabéticamente. Las etiquetas son numéricas.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>unsrt</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Al igual que <literal>plain</literal>, pero las entradas están en el orden citado.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>abbrv</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Igual que <literal>plain</literal>, pero con etiquetas más compactas.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Además, existen muchos otros archivos de estilo Bib&tex; adaptados a
+las demandas de diversas publicaciones. Vea
+<ulink url="http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib">http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib</ulink>.
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\bibliography</literal> es la que realmente produce la
+bibliografía. El argumento <literal>\bibliography</literal> se refiere a archivos
+con el nombre <filename><replaceable>archivo-de-bibliografía</replaceable>.bib</filename>, el cual debe
+contener la base de datos en formato Bib&tex;. Sólo las entradas
+referidas a través de <literal>\cite</literal> y <literal>\nocite</literal> serán incluidas en
+la bibliografía.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.26" id="theorem">
+<title><literal>theorem</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>theorem</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>theorem</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>teoremas, composición tipográfica de</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{theorem}
+<replaceable>texto-del-teorema</replaceable>
+\end{theorem}
+</screen>
+<para>El entorno <literal>theorem</literal> produce &#8220;Teorema <replaceable>n</replaceable>&#8221; en negrita seguido
+por el <replaceable>texto-del-teorema</replaceable>, donde las posibilidades de numeración
+para <replaceable>n</replaceable> se describen bajo <literal>\newtheorem</literal> (véase <link linkend="_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.27" id="titlepage">
+<title><literal>titlepage</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>titlepage</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>titlepage</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>haciendo una página de título</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>página de título, creando la</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{titlepage}
+<replaceable>texto</replaceable>
+\end{titlepage}
+</screen>
+<para>El entorno <literal>titlepage</literal> crea una página de título, es decir, una
+página en la cual no se imprime el número de página ni el encabezado.
+También provoca que la página siguiente sea numerada como la página uno.
+El formato de la página del título se deja bajo su responsabilidad. La
+instrucción <literal>\today</literal> puede ser útil en las páginas de título
+(véase <link linkend="_005ctoday">\today</link>).
+</para>
+<para>Usted puede utilizar la instrucción <literal>\maketitle</literal>
+(véase <link linkend="_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</link>) para producir una página de título estándar sin un
+entorno <literal>titlepage</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.28" id="verbatim">
+<title><literal>verbatim</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>verbatim</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>verbatim</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>texto literal</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>simulando texto escrito</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>texto escrito, simulando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>código, composición tipográfica de</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>programas de ordenador, composición tipográfica</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{verbatim}
+<replaceable>texto-literal</replaceable>
+\end{verbatim}
+</screen>
+<para>El entorno <literal>verbatim</literal> es un entorno para crear párrafos en el cual
+&latex; produce exactamente lo que usted escriba en él; Por ejemplo el
+carácter <literal>\</literal> produce una &#8216;<literal>\</literal>&#8217; impresa. Este cambia el modo en
+que &latex; imprime los que usted escriba con retornos de carro y
+espacios en blanco con el mismo efecto que tendría en una máquina de
+escribir.
+</para>
+<para>El entorno <literal>verbatim</literal> utiliza una composición tipográfica con tipo
+de letra monoespacio (<literal>\tt</literal>).
+</para>
+
+<sect2 label="9.28.1" id="_005cverb">
+<title><literal>\verb</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\verb</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>texto literal, en línea</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\verb<replaceable>carácter</replaceable><replaceable>texto-literal</replaceable><replaceable>carácter</replaceable>
+\verb*<replaceable>carácter</replaceable><replaceable>texto-literal</replaceable><replaceable>carácter</replaceable>
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\verb</literal> compone tipográficamente el
+<replaceable>texto-literal</replaceable> como este se ha ingresado incluyendo caracteres
+especiales y espacios, utilizando el tipo de letra de máquina de
+escribir (<literal>\tt</literal>). No se permiten espacios entre <literal>\verb</literal> o
+<literal>\verb*</literal> y el <replaceable>carácter</replaceable> delimitador, el cual comienza y
+termina el texto literal. El delimitador no debe aparecer en el
+<replaceable>texto-literal</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>espacio visible</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La forma con <literal>*</literal> difiere únicamente en que los espacios son
+impresos con un carácter de &#8220;espacio visible&#8221;.
+</para>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="9.29" id="verse">
+<title><literal>verse</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>verse</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>verse</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>poesía, un entorno para</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\begin{verse}
+<replaceable>línea1</replaceable> \\
+<replaceable>línea2</replaceable> \\
+...
+\end{verse}
+</screen>
+<para>El entorno <literal>verse</literal> está diseñado para poesía, aunque es posible que
+usted le encuentre alguna otra utilidad.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ para <literal>verse</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>Los márgenes tienen sangría a la izquierda y derecha, a los párrafos no
+se les aplica sangría y el texto no está justificado. Separe las líneas
+de cada estrofa con <literal>\\</literal> y use una o más líneas en blanco para
+separar las estrofas.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="10" id="Saltos-de-L_00ednea">
+<title>Saltos de Línea</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>saltos de línea</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>línea, saltos de</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Lo primero que hace &latex; cuando procesa texto normal es traducir el
+archivo de entrada en una secuencia de unidades gráficas y espacios.
+Para producir un documento impreso, esta secuencia se debe partir en
+líneas (y esas línea se deben dividir en páginas).
+</para>
+<para>Normalmente &latex; se encarga de los saltos de línea (y página), pero
+en algunos entornos, usted mismo determina los saltos de líneas con la
+instrucción <literal>\\</literal>, y siempre puede forzar los saltos de línea
+manualmente.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="10.1" id="_005c_005c">
+<title><literal>\\</literal>[*][<replaceable>más-espacio</replaceable>]</title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ forzar la separación de línea</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>nueva línea, comenzando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>separación de línea, forzando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\\</literal> le dice a &latex; que comience una nueva
+línea. Esta tiene un argumento opcional, <replaceable>más-espacio</replaceable>, que
+especifica la cantidad de espacio vertical extra que se debe insertar
+antes de la siguiente línea. Este puede ser una cantidad negativa.
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\\*</literal> es la misma que la instrucción ordinaria
+<literal>\\</literal> salvo que esta le dice a &latex; que no comience una nueva
+página después de la línea.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="10.2" id="_005cobeycr-y-_005crestorecr">
+<title><literal>\obeycr</literal> y <literal>\restorecr</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\obeycr</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\restorecr</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>nueva línea, salida como entrada</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\obeycr</literal> genera un retorno de carro en el archivo
+de entrada (&#8216;<literal>^^M</literal>&#8217;, internamente) lo mismo que <literal>\\</literal> (seguido
+por <literal>\relax</literal>). Por lo tanto, cada nueva línea en la entrada
+también será una nueva línea en la salida.
+</para>
+<para><literal>\restorecr</literal> restaura el comportamiento de saltos de línea normal.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="10.3" id="_005cnewline">
+<title><literal>\newline</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newline</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>nueva línea, comenzando (modo de párrafo)</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\newline</literal> rompe la línea en el punto actual, sin
+justificar el texto anterior. Sólo se puede utilizar en modo párrafo.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="10.4" id="_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">
+<title><literal>\-</literal> (división silábica discrecional)</title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\- (hyphenation)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>división silábica, forzando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\-</literal> le dice a &latex; que puede dividir la palabra
+con un guión en ese punto. &latex; cuenta con una muy buena separación
+silábica con guión, y por lo general en la mayoría de los casos
+encuentra los puntos correctos en la división de palabras, y casi nunca
+utiliza uno incorrecto. La instrucción <literal>\-</literal> se utiliza para casos
+excepcionales.
+</para>
+<para>Cuando usted inserta la instrucción <literal>\-</literal> en una palabra, la palabra
+únicamente se debe dividir con guión en esos puntos y en ninguno de los
+puntos que &latex; pudiera haber elegido de otro modo.
+</para>
+
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="10.5" id="_005cfussy">
+<title><literal>\fussy</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fussy</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La declaración <literal>\fussy</literal> (que es la predeterminada) provoca que
+&tex; sea quisquilloso con los saltos de línea. Esto por lo general
+también evita el espacio entre palabras, a costa de un ocasional
+desbordamiento de caja.
+</para>
+<para>Esta instrucción cancela el efecto de una instrucción <literal>\sloppy</literal>
+previa (véase <link linkend="_005csloppy">\sloppy</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="10.6" id="_005csloppy">
+<title><literal>\sloppy</literal></title>
+
+<para>La declaración <literal>\sloppy</literal> provoca que &tex; sea menos cuidadoso con
+los saltos de línea. Esto evitará el desbordamiento de cajas, a costa de
+un mayor espaciamiento entre palabras.
+</para>
+<para>Dura hasta que se utilice una instrucción <literal>\fussy</literal>
+(véase <link linkend="_005cfussy">\fussy</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="10.7" id="_005chyphenation">
+<title><literal>\hyphenation</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hyphenation</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>división de sílabas con guión, definiendo</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\hyphenation{<replaceable>palabra-uno</replaceable> <replaceable>palabra-dos</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\hyphenation</literal> declara los puntos dónde se permite
+la división de palabras por medio de un carácter <literal>-</literal> en las
+palabras proporcionadas. Las palabras están separadas por espacios.
+&tex; únicamente debe separar las palabras si la palabra coincide
+exactamente, sin juzgar las inflexiones. Múltiples instrucciones
+<literal>\hyphenation</literal> son acumulativas. Algunos ejemplos (los patrones de
+separación silábica de &tex; no se aplican a esas palabras):
+</para>
+<screen>\hyphenation{ap-én-dice col-umnas hiper-fragilís-tico-espiali-doso}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="10.8" id="_005clinebreak-y-_005cnolinebreak">
+<title><literal>\linebreak</literal> y <literal>\nolinebreak</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\linebreak</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nolinebreak</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>saltos de línea, forzando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>saltos de línea, evitando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\linebreak[<replaceable>prioridad</replaceable>]
+\nolinebreak[<replaceable>prioridad</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>De manera predeterminada, la instrucción <literal>\linebreak</literal>
+(<literal>\nolinebreak</literal>) fuerza (previene) un salto de línea en la posición
+actual. Para <literal>\linebreak</literal>, los espacios en la línea se expanden
+hasta el margen derecho de la manera normal.
+</para>
+<para>Con el argumento opcional <replaceable>prioridad</replaceable>, usted puede convertir la
+instrucción de una petición a una demanda. La <replaceable>prioridad</replaceable> debe ser
+un número desde 0 hasta&#160;4. Cuanto mayor sea el número, es más
+insistente la petición.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="11" id="Saltos-de-P_00e1gina">
+<title>Saltos de Página</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>salto de página</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dividiendo páginas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; inicia nuevas páginas asincronicamente, cuando ha acumulado
+suficiente material para llenar una página. Por lo general, esto ocurre
+automáticamente, pero a veces, posiblemente, usted quiera influir en los
+saltos de página.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="11.1" id="_005ccleardoublepage">
+<title><literal>\cleardoublepage</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cleardoublepage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>iniciando una página a mano derecha</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> termina la página actual y
+provoca que se impriman todas las imágenes y tablas que han aparecido
+hasta el momento en el texto. En un estilo de Impresión a doble cara,
+este también hace que la siguiente página sea a mano derecha, página
+(impares), produciendo una página en blanco si es necesario.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="11.2" id="_005cclearpage">
+<title><literal>\clearpage</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\clearpage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>descargando flotantes e iniciando una página</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>iniciando una nueva página y limpiando flotantes</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\clearpage</literal> termina la página actual y provoca que
+todas la imágenes y tablas que han aparecido hasta ahora en la entrada
+sean impresas.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="11.3" id="_005cnewpage">
+<title><literal>\newpage</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newpage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>nueva página, iniciando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>iniciando una nueva página</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\newpage</literal> termina la página actual, pero no
+descarga flotantes (vea <literal>\clearpage</literal> arriba).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="11.4" id="_005cenlargethispage">
+<title><literal>\enlargethispage</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\enlargethispage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ampliando la página actual</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\enlargethispage{tamaño}</literal>
+</para>
+<para><literal>\enlargethispage*{tamaño}</literal>
+</para>
+<para>Amplía el <literal>\textheight</literal> para la página actual por la cantidad
+especificada; por ejemplo <literal>\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}</literal>
+permitirá una línea adicional.
+</para>
+<para>La forma favorita trata de apretar el material en la página tanto como
+sea posible. Esta normalmente se utiliza junto con un <literal>\pagebreak</literal>
+explícito.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="11.5" id="_005cpagebreak-y-_005cnopagebreak">
+<title><literal>\pagebreak</literal> y <literal>\nopagebreak</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pagebreak</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nopagebreak</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>saltos de página, forzando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>saltos de página, evitando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\pagebreak[<replaceable>prioridad</replaceable>]
+\nopagebreak[<replaceable>prioridad</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>De forma predeterminada, la instrucción <literal>\pagebreak</literal>
+(<literal>\nopagebreak</literal>) fuerza (impide) un salto de página en la posición
+actual. Para <literal>\linebreak</literal>, el espacio vertical en la página se
+estira cuanto sea posible de modo que se extienda hasta el margen
+inferior normal.
+</para>
+<para>Con el argumento opcional <replaceable>prioridad</replaceable>, puede convertir la
+instrucción <literal>\pagebreak</literal> desde una petición a una demanda. El
+número debe ser un número desde 0 hasta&#160;4. Cuanto mayor sea el
+número, más insistente es la petición.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="12" id="Notas-al-Pie">
+<title>Notas al Pie</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>notas al pie, creando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Las notas al pie se pueden producir en una de dos maneras. Se pueden
+producir con una sola instrucción, la instrucción <literal>\footnote</literal>.
+También se pueden producir con dos instrucciones, las instrucciones
+<literal>\footnotemark</literal> y <literal>\footnotetext</literal>.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="12.1" id="_005cfootnote">
+<title><literal>\footnote</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnote</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\footnote[<replaceable>número</replaceable>]{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\footnote</literal> coloca una nota numerada con el
+<replaceable>texto</replaceable> al pie de la página actual. El argumento opcional
+<replaceable>número</replaceable> cambia el número predeterminado de la nota.
+</para>
+<para>Esta instrucción sólo puede utilizarse fuera del modo párrafo; es decir,
+no se puede utilizar en el instrucciones de seccionado tal como
+<literal>\chapter</literal>, en figuras, tablas o en un entorno <literal>tabular</literal>.
+(Vea las siguientes secciones).
+<!-- xx mencione paquetes que corrijan esto -->
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.2" id="_005cfootnotemark">
+<title><literal>\footnotemark</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnotemark</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sin argumento opcional, la instrucción <literal>\footnotemark</literal> coloca el
+número de nota actual en el texto. Esta instrucción se puede utilizar
+en modo párrafo. Usted proporciona el texto de la nota por separado,
+con la instrucción <literal>\footnotetext</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Esta instrucción se puede utilizar para producir varios marcadores de
+nota consecutivos refiriéndose a la misma nota
+</para>
+<screen>\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+</screen>
+<para>después de la primer instrucción <literal>\footnote</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.3" id="_005cfootnotetext">
+<title><literal>\footnotetext</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnotetext</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\footnotetext[<replaceable>número</replaceable>]{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\footnotetext</literal> coloca el <replaceable>texto</replaceable> en la parte
+inferior de la página como una nota al pie. Esta instrucción puede
+venir en cualquier lugar después de la instrucción <literal>\footnotemark</literal>.
+La instrucción <literal>\footnotetext</literal> debe aparecer en el exterior del
+modo párrafo.
+</para>
+<para>El argumento opcional <replaceable>número</replaceable> cambia el número predeterminado de la
+nota.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.4" id="Notas-al-Pie-Simb_00f3licas">
+<title>Notas al Pie Simbólicas</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>notas al pie, símbolos en lugar de números en</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Si desea utilizar símbolos para las notas al pie, en lugar de un número
+creciente, redefina <literal>\thefootnote</literal> así:
+</para>
+<screen>\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fnsymbol, y notas al pie</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fnsymbol</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\fnsymbol</literal> produce a serie predefinida de símbolos
+(véase <link linkend="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</link>). Si desea
+utilizar un símbolo diferente como su marca de nota al pie, necesitará
+redefinir <literal>\@fnsymbol</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="12.5" id="Par_00e1metros-para-Footnote">
+<title>Parámetros para Footnote</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>parámetros de footnote</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>parámetros, para footnote</primary></indexterm>
+
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnoterule</primary></indexterm><literal>\footnoterule</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Produce la línea que separa el texto principal en una página de las
+notas al pie de la página. Dimensiones predeterminadas: <literal>0.4pt</literal>
+espesor (o ancho), y longitud de <literal>0.4\columnwidth</literal> en las clases de
+documento estándar (salvo en <literal>slides</literal>, donde esta no aparece).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\footnotesep</primary></indexterm><literal>\footnotesep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>La altura donde se coloca el puntal al comienzo de la nota al pie. De
+forma predeterminada, se establece en el puntal del tipo de letra normal
+<literal>\footnotesize</literal> (véase <link linkend="Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</link>, por lo tanto no
+hay espacio extra entre las notas. Este es &#8216;<literal>6.65pt</literal>&#8217; para
+&#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>7.7pt</literal>&#8217; para &#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217; y &#8216;<literal>8.4pt</literal>&#8217; para
+&#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="13" id="Definiciones">
+<title>Definiciones</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>definiciones</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; tiene la capacidad para crear nuevas instrucciones de muchos
+tipos diferentes.
+</para>
+<!-- xx todo en este capítulo necesita ejemplos. -->
+
+
+
+<sect1 label="13.1" id="_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand">
+<title><literal>\newcommand</literal> y <literal>\renewcommand</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newcommand</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>instrucciones, definiendo nuevas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>definiendo una nueva instrucción</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>nuevas instrucciones, definiendo</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\newcommand</literal> y <literal>\renewcommand</literal> define y redefine una
+instrucción, respectivamente.
+</para>
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen> \newcommand{<replaceable>instrucción</replaceable>}[<replaceable>n-argumentos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definición</replaceable>}
+\renewcommand{<replaceable>instrucción</replaceable>}[<replaceable>n-argumentos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definición</replaceable>}
+ \newcommand{<replaceable>instrucción</replaceable>}[<replaceable>n-argumentos</replaceable>][<replaceable>predeterminado</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definición</replaceable>}
+\renewcommand{<replaceable>instrucción</replaceable>}[<replaceable>n-argumentos</replaceable>][<replaceable>predeterminado</replaceable>]{<replaceable>definición</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>instrucción</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>El nombre de la instrucción comenzando con <literal>\</literal>. Para
+<literal>\newcommand</literal>, este no se debe haber definido y no debe comenzar
+con <literal>\end</literal>; para <literal>\renewcommand</literal>, este ya tiene que estar
+definido.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>n-argumentos</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Un entero opcional entre 1 y 9 especificando el número de argumentos que
+debe tomar la instrucción. El valor predeterminado es para que la
+instrucción no tome argumentos.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>predeterminado</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Si este parámetro opcional está presente, significa que el primer
+argumento del comando es opcional. Cuando se invoca a la nueva
+instrucción, el valor predeterminado del argumento opcional (es decir,
+si no se especifica en la llamada) es la cadena &#8216;<literal>definición</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>definición</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>El texto con el que se sustituirá cada aparición de <literal>instrucción</literal>;
+una construcción de la forma <literal>#<replaceable>n</replaceable></literal> en <replaceable>definición</replaceable> es
+reemplazada por el texto del e<replaceable>n</replaceable>ésimo argumento.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.2" id="_005cnewcounter">
+<title><literal>\newcounter</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newcounter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>contadores, definiendo nuevos</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\newcounter{<replaceable>nombre-contador</replaceable>}[<replaceable>super</replaceable>]
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\newcounter</literal> define un nuevo contador llamado
+<replaceable>nombre-contador</replaceable>. El nuevo contador se inicializa a cero.
+</para>
+<para>Dado el argumento opcional <literal>[<replaceable>super</replaceable>]</literal>, (<replaceable>nombre-contador</replaceable>
+se restablecerá cuando el contador cuyo nomber es
+<replaceable>super</replaceable> se incremente.
+</para>
+<para>Véase <link linkend="Contadores">Contadores</link>, para mayor información.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.3" id="_005cnewlength">
+<title><literal>\newlength</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newlength</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>longitudes, definiendo nuevas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\newlength{\<replaceable>argumento</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\newlength</literal> define el argumento obligatorio como
+una instrucción de
+<firstterm>longitud</firstterm> con un valor de <literal>0in</literal>. El
+argumento debe ser una secuencia de control, como en
+<literal>\newlength{\foo}</literal>. Ocurre un error si <literal>\foo</literal> ya está
+definido.
+</para>
+<para>Véase <link linkend="Longitudes">Longitudes</link>, para saber cómo fijar la nueva longitud a un valor
+distinto de cero, y para más información acerca de las longitudes en
+general.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.4" id="_005cnewsavebox">
+<title><literal>\newsavebox</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newsavebox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\newsavebox{<replaceable>instrucción</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Define <literal>\<replaceable>instrucción</replaceable></literal>, el cual debe ser un nombre de
+instrucción que no se haya definido, para referirse a una nueva bandeja
+para almacenar cajas.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.5" id="_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment">
+<title><literal>\newenvironment</literal> y <literal>\renewenvironment</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newenvironment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\renewenvironment</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>entornos, definiendo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>definiendo nuevos entornos</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>redefiniendo entornos</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>
+\newenvironment{<replaceable>entorno</replaceable>}[<replaceable>n-argumentos</replaceable>]{<replaceable>antes-definición</replaceable>}
+ {<replaceable>después-definición</replaceable>}
+ \newenvironment{<replaceable>entorno</replaceable>}[<replaceable>n-argumentos</replaceable>][<replaceable>predeterminado</replaceable>]
+ {<replaceable>antes-definición</replaceable>}{<replaceable>después-definición</replaceable>}
+\renewenvironment{<replaceable>entorno</replaceable>}[<replaceable>n-argumentos</replaceable>]
+ {<replaceable>antes-definición</replaceable>}{<replaceable>después-definición</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Estas instrucciones definen o redefinen un entorno <replaceable>entorno</replaceable>, es
+decir, <literal>\begin{<replaceable>entorno</replaceable>} &#8230; \end{<replaceable>entorno</replaceable>}</literal>.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>entorno</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>El nombre del entorno. Para <literal>\newenvironment</literal>, <replaceable>entorno</replaceable>
+no debe ser un entorno existente, y la instrucción <literal>\<replaceable>entorno</replaceable></literal>
+debe ser una que no se haya definido previamente.
+Para <literal>\renewenvironment</literal>,
+<replaceable>entorno</replaceable> debe ser el nombre de un entorno existente.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>n-argumentos</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Un entero desde 1 a 9 denotando el número de argumentos del nuevo
+entorno definido. El valor predeterminado es ningún argumento.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>predeterminado</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Si se especifica, el primer argumento es opcional, y
+<replaceable>predeterminado</replaceable> proporciona el valor predeterminado para ese
+argumento.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>antes-definición</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>El texto ampliado en cada aparición de <literal>\begin{<replaceable>entorno</replaceable>}</literal>;
+una construcción en forma <literal>#<replaceable>n</replaceable></literal> en <replaceable>antes-definición</replaceable> es
+sustituido por el texto del e<replaceable>n</replaceable>ésimo argumento.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>después-definición</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>El texto ampliado de cada aparición de <literal>\end{<replaceable>entorno</replaceable>}</literal>.
+este no debe contener ningún argumento para parámetros.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.6" id="_005cnewtheorem">
+<title><literal>\newtheorem</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newtheorem</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>teoremas, definiendo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>definiendo nuevos teoremas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<screen>\newtheorem{<replaceable>nuevo-entorno</replaceable>}{<replaceable>etiqueta</replaceable>}[<replaceable>con</replaceable>]
+\newtheorem{<replaceable>nuevo-entorno</replaceable>}[<replaceable>numerado-como</replaceable>]{<replaceable>etiqueta</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Esta instrucción define un entorno parecido a teorema. Argumentos:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>nuevoentorno</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>El nombre del nuevo entorno a definir; no debe ser el nombre de un
+entorno existente o de lo contrario será redefinido.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>etiqueta</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>El texto a imprimir al inicio del entorno, antes del número. Por
+ejemplo, &#8216;<literal>Teorema</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>numerado_como</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>(Opcional). El nombre de un entorno ya definido tal como teorema;
+</para>
+<para>(Opcional). El nombre de un entorno ya definido tal como teorema el
+nuevo entorno será numerado exactamente como <replaceable>numerado_como</replaceable>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>con</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>(Opcional). El nombre de un contador definido previamente, una unidad de
+seccionado. El nuevo contador de teorema será restablecido al mismo
+tiempo que el contador <replaceable>con</replaceable>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Cuando menos uno de <replaceable>numerado_como</replaceable> y <replaceable>con</replaceable> se debe especificar,
+no ambos.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.7" id="_005cnewfont">
+<title><literal>\newfont</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newfont</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tipos de letra, nuevas instrucciones para</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>definición de nuevos tipos de letra</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\newfont{<replaceable>instrucción</replaceable>}{<replaceable>nombredetipo</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Define una secuencia de control <literal>\<replaceable>instrucción</replaceable></literal>, misma que no
+se debe haber definido, para hacer que <replaceable>nombredetipo</replaceable> sea el tipo de
+letra actual. El archivo bloqueado en el sistema es llamado
+<filename><replaceable>nombredetipo</replaceable>.tfm</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>Esta es una instrucción de bajo nivel para configurar el uso de un tipo
+de letra individual. Comúnmente, los tipos de letra se definen a través
+de familias de archivos <filename>.fd</filename>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="13.8" id="_005cprotect">
+<title><literal>\protect</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\protect</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>instrucciones frágiles</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>argumentos móviles</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Pies de página, saltos de línea, cualquier instrucción que tenga un
+argumento opcional, y muchas más de las así llamadas instrucciones
+<firstterm>frágiles</firstterm>. Cuando una instrucción frágil se utiliza en ciertos
+contextos, llamados <firstterm>argumentos móviles</firstterm>, estas se deben preceder
+con <literal>\protect</literal>. Además, algunas instrucciones con argumentos
+frágiles deben tener su propia <literal>\protect</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Algunos ejemplos de argumentos móviles son <literal>\caption</literal>
+(véase <link linkend="figure">figure</link>), <literal>\thanks</literal> (véase <link linkend="_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</link>) y @-expresiones
+en entornos <literal>tabular</literal> y <literal>array</literal> (véase <link linkend="tabular">tabular</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>instrucciones robustas</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Las instrucciones que no son frágiles se llaman <firstterm>robustas</firstterm>. Estas
+no se deben preceder con <literal>\protect</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Vea también:
+</para>
+<simpara><ulink url="http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html">http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html</ulink></simpara>
+<simpara><ulink url="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect</ulink></simpara>
+
+<!-- xx realmente necesita ejemplos. -->
+
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="14" id="Contadores">
+<title>Contadores</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>contadores, una lista de</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>variables, una lista de</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Cualquier cosa numerada por &latex; tiene un contador asociado a ella.
+El nombre del contador es el mismo nombre que el nombre del entorno o
+instrucción que produce el número, salvo las que no comienzan con
+<literal>\</literal>. (<literal>enumi</literal>&#8211;<literal>enumiv</literal> se utilizan para entornos
+enumerados anidados). A continuación hay una lista de los contadores
+utilizados en las clases de documentos estándar de &latex; para
+controlar la numeración.
+</para>
+<screen>part paragraph figure enumi
+chapter subparagraph table enumii
+section page footnote enumiii
+subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+subsubsection
+</screen>
+
+
+<sect1 label="14.1" id="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">
+<title><literal>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</literal>: Imprimiendo Contadores</title>
+
+
+<para>Todas estas instrucciones toman como argumento un solo contador, por
+ejemplo, <literal>\alph{enumi}</literal>.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\alph</primary></indexterm><literal>\alph</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>imprime <replaceable>contador</replaceable> usando letras minúsculas: &#8216;a&#8217;, &#8216;b&#8217;, ...
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Alph</primary></indexterm><literal>\Alph</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>utiliza letras mayúsculas: &#8216;A&#8217;, &#8216;B&#8217;, ...
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arabic</primary></indexterm><literal>\arabic</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>utiliza números Arábigos: &#8216;1&#8217;, &#8216;2&#8217;, ...
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\roman</primary></indexterm><literal>\roman</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>utiliza números romanos en minúsculas: &#8216;i&#8217;, &#8216;ii&#8217;, ...
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\roman</primary></indexterm><literal>\roman</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>utiliza números romanos en mayúsculas: &#8216;I&#8217;, &#8216;II&#8217;, ...
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fnsymbol</primary></indexterm><literal>\fnsymbol</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>imprime el valor de <replaceable>contador</replaceable> en una secuencia específica de nueve
+símbolos (convencionalmente usada para etiquetar notas al pie de
+página). El valor de <replaceable>contador</replaceable> debe estar entre&#160;1 y&#160;9
+incluido.
+</para>
+<para>Los símbolos no son compatibles en info principalmente, pero aquí están
+los nombres:
+</para><literallayout>asterix(*) dagger(†) ddagger(‡) section-sign(§) paragraph-sign(¶) parallel(‖)
+double-asterix(**) double-dagger(††) double-ddagger(‡‡)
+</literallayout>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="14.2" id="_005cusecounter">
+<title><literal>\usecounter{<replaceable>contador</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\usecounter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lista de elementos, especificando el contador</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>elementos numerados, especificando contador</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\usecounter{<replaceable>contador</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\usecounter</literal> se utiliza en el segundo argumento del
+entorno <literal>list</literal> para especificar el <replaceable>contador</replaceable> a utilizar para
+numerar los elementos de la lista.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="14.3" id="_005cvalue">
+<title><literal>\value{<replaceable>contador</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\value</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>contadores, consiguiendo el valor de</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\value{<replaceable>contador</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\value</literal> produce el valor de <replaceable>contador</replaceable>. Esta
+se puede utilizar en cualquier lugar en que &latex; espera un número,
+por ejemplo:
+</para>
+<screen>\setcounter{micontador}{3}
+\addtocounter{micontador}{1}
+\hspace{\value{micontador}\parindent}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="14.4" id="_005csetcounter">
+<title><literal>\setcounter{<replaceable>\contador</replaceable>}{<replaceable>valor</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\setcounter</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>contadores, configurando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fijando contadores</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\setcounter{<replaceable>contador</replaceable>}{<replaceable>valor</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\setcounter</literal> fija el valor de <replaceable>contador</replaceable> al
+argumento <replaceable>valor</replaceable>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="14.5" id="_005caddtocounter">
+<title><literal>\addtocounter{<replaceable>contador</replaceable>}{<replaceable>valor</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addtocounter</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\addtocounter</literal> incrementa <replaceable>contador</replaceable> por la
+cantidad especificada por el argumento <replaceable>valor</replaceable>, que puede ser un
+número negativo.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="14.6" id="_005crefstepcounter">
+<title><literal>\refstepcounter{<replaceable>contador</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\refstepcounter</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\refstepcounter</literal> trabaja de la misma manera que
+<literal>\stepcounter</literal> Véase <link linkend="_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</link>, excepto que esta además define
+el valor actual de <literal>\ref</literal> para que sea el resultado de
+<literal>\thecounter</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="14.7" id="_005cstepcounter">
+<title><literal>\stepcounter{<replaceable>contador</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\stepcounter</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\stepcounter</literal> añade uno al <replaceable>contador</replaceable> y
+restablece todos los contadores subsidiarios.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="14.8" id="_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear">
+<title><literal>\day \month \year</literal>: Contadores Predefinidos</title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\day</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\month</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\year</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; define contadores para el día del mes (<literal>\day</literal>, 1&#8211;31), mes
+del año (<literal>\month</literal>, 1&#8211;12), y año (<literal>\year</literal>, Era Común). Al
+iniciar &tex;, estas son establecidas a los valores actuales en el
+sistema donde se está ejecutando &tex;. Estas no se actualizan
+conforme al progreso del trabajo.
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción relacionada <literal>\today</literal> produce una cadena de texto que
+representa el día actual (véase <link linkend="_005ctoday">\today</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="15" id="Longitudes">
+<title>Longitudes</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>longitudes, definiendo y usando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Una <literal>longitud</literal> es una medida de distancia. Muchas instrucciones
+&latex; toman una longitud como argumento.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="15.1" id="_005csetlength">
+<title><literal>\setlength{\<replaceable>largo</replaceable>}{<replaceable>valor</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\setlength</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>longitudes, configurando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\setlength</literal> fija el valor de <replaceable>\largo</replaceable> al
+argumento <replaceable>valor</replaceable>, el cual se puede expresar en cualquier unidad que
+&latex; entienda, es decir, pulgadas (<literal>in</literal>), milímetros
+(<literal>mm</literal>), puntos (<literal>pt</literal>), puntos grandes (<literal>bp</literal>, etc.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="15.2" id="_005caddtolength">
+<title>\addtolength{<replaceable>\largo</replaceable>}{<replaceable>cantidad</replaceable>}</title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addtolength</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>longitudes, añadiendo a</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\addtolength</literal> incrementa la &#8220;instrucción de
+longitud&#8221; <replaceable>\largo</replaceable> por la cantidad especificada en el argumento
+<replaceable>cantidad</replaceable>, misma que puede ser un valor negativo.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="15.3" id="_005csettodepth">
+<title><literal>\settodepth</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\settodepth</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\settodepth{\gnat}{texto}</literal>
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\settodepth</literal> fija el valor de una instrucción de
+<literal>longitud</literal> igual a la profundidad del argumento <literal>texto</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="15.4" id="_005csettoheight">
+<title><literal>\settoheight</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\settoheight</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\settoheight{\gnat}{texto}</literal>
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\settoheight</literal> fija el valor de la instrucción de
+<literal>longitud</literal> igual a la altura del argumento <literal>texto</literal>.
+</para>
+
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="15.5" id="_005csettowidth">
+<title><literal>\settowidth{\<replaceable>largo</replaceable>}{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\settowidth</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\settowidth</literal> establece el valor del la instrucción
+<replaceable>\largo</replaceable> al valor del argumento <replaceable>texto</replaceable>.
+</para>
+
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="15.6" id="Longitudes-Predeterminadas">
+<title>Longitudes Predeterminadas</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>longitudes, predefinidas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>longitudes predeterminadas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\width</literal>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\width</primary></indexterm>
+</para>
+<para><literal>\height</literal>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\height</primary></indexterm>
+</para>
+<para><literal>\depth</literal>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\depth</primary></indexterm>
+</para>
+<para><literal>\totalheight</literal>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\totalheight</primary></indexterm>
+</para>
+<para>Estos parámetros de longitud se pueden utilizar en los argumentos de las
+instrucciones que dibujan cajas (véase <link linkend="Cajas">Cajas</link>). Especifican el ancho
+natural, etc., del texto en la caja. <literal>\totalheight</literal> es igual a
+<literal>\height</literal> + <literal>\depth</literal>. Para hacer una caja con el texto
+extendido hasta el doble del tamaño natural, por ejemplo, digamos
+</para>
+<para><literal>\makebox[ancho\2]{Consiga una camilla}</literal>
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="16" id="Haciendo-P_00e1rrafos">
+<title>Haciendo Párrafos</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>haciendo párrafos</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>párrafos</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Un párrafo se termina por medio de una o más líneas completamente en
+blanco &#8212;líneas que no contienen incluso un <literal>%</literal>. Una línea en
+blanco no debe aparecer donde no se puede iniciar un nuevo párrafo, tal
+como en modo math o en el argumento de una instrucción de seccionado.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="16.1" id="_005cindent">
+<title><literal>\indent</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parindent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sangría, forzando la</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\indent</literal> produce un espacio horizontal donde el ancho es igual la longitud de <literal>\parindent</literal>, la sangría de un párrafo
+normal. Esta se utiliza para añadir la sangría de párrafos donde esta
+debería suprimirse en otro caso.
+</para>
+<para>El valor predeterminado para <literal>\parindent</literal> es <literal>1em</literal> en modo de
+dos columnas, de lo contrario <literal>15pt</literal> para documentos de
+<literal>10pt</literal>, <literal>17pt</literal> para <literal>11pt</literal> y <literal>1.5em</literal> para
+<literal>12pt</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="16.2" id="_005cnoindent">
+<title><literal>\noindent</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\noindent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>sangría, suprimiendo la</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Cuando se utiliza al principio de un párrafo, <literal>\noindent</literal> suprime
+cualquier sangría. Esta no tiene efecto cuando se utiliza en medio de
+un párrafo.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="16.3" id="_005cparskip">
+<title><literal>\parskip</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parskip</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>espacio vertical antes de párrafos</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\parskip</literal> es una instrucción que preserva la longitud definiendo
+espacio vertical extra añadido antes de cada párrafo. El predeterminado
+es <literal>0pt más 1pt</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="16.4" id="Notas-al-Margen">
+<title>Notas al Margen</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>notas al margen</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>notas en el margen</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>observaciones en el margen</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginpar</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\marginpar[<replaceable>izquierda</replaceable>]{<replaceable>derecha</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\marginpar</literal> crea una nota en el margen. La primera
+línea de una nota tiene que ser la misma línea base que la línea en el
+texto donde ocurre el <literal>\marginpar</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Cuando únicamente se especifica el argumento obligatorio <replaceable>right</replaceable>, el
+texto se deberá colocar
+</para>
+<itemizedlist><listitem><para>en el margen derecho para diseños de un solo lado;
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>en el margen externo para diseños de dos caras;
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>en el margen más cercano en diseños de dos columnas.
+</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\reversemarginpar</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\normalmarginpar</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\reversemarginpar</literal> coloca las subsecuentes notas al
+margen en el margen (dentro) opuesto. <literal>\normalmarginpar</literal> las
+coloca en la posición predeterminada.
+</para>
+<para>Cuando se especifican ambos argumentos, se utiliza <replaceable>left</replaceable> para el
+margen izquierdo y se utiliza <replaceable>right</replaceable> para el margen derecho.
+</para>
+<para>La primer palabra normalmente no se debe separar con guiones; usted
+puede habilitar la separación silábica con guiones comenzando la nota
+con <literal>\hspace{0pt}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Los parámetros que afectan el formato de la nota son:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparpush</primary></indexterm><literal>\marginparpush</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>El espacio mínimo vertical entre notas; el predeterminado es &#8216;<literal>7pt</literal>&#8217;
+para documentos de &#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217;, de lo contrario &#8216;<literal>5pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparsep</primary></indexterm><literal>\marginparsep</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Espacio horizontal entre el texto vertical y la nota; predeterminado
+&#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217; para &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217; documentos, en otro caso &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\marginparwidth</primary></indexterm><literal>\marginparwidth</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>El ancho de la nota en sí misma; el predeterminado para documentos de un
+solo lado de &#8216;<literal>10pt</literal>&#8217; es &#8216;<literal>90pt</literal>&#8217;, &#8216;<literal>83pt</literal>&#8217; para &#8216;<literal>11pt</literal>&#8217; y
+&#8216;<literal>68pt</literal>&#8217; para &#8216;<literal>12pt</literal>&#8217;; &#8216;<literal>17pt</literal>&#8217; más en cada caso para
+documentos de dos caras. En el modo de dos columnas, el predeterminado
+es &#8216;<literal>48pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="17" id="F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">
+<title>Fórmulas Matemáticas</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fórmulas matemáticas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>fórmulas, matemáticas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>modo math, ingresando al</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>math</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>math</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>displaymath</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>displaymath</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>entorno <literal>equation</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary><literal>equation</literal>, entorno</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Existen tres entornos que ponen a &latex; en modo math:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>math</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Para fórmulas que aparecerán directamente en el texto.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>displaymath</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Para fórmulas que aparecerán en su propia línea.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>equation</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>El mismo que el del entorno displaymath salvo que este añade un número
+de ecuación en el margen derecho.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\(</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\[</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\]</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El entorno <literal>math</literal> se pude utilizar tanto en párrafos como en modo
+LR, pero los entornos <literal>displaymath</literal> y <literal>equation</literal> se pueden
+utilizar únicamente en modo párrafo. Los entornos <literal>math</literal> y
+<literal>displaymath</literal> se utilizan tan a menudo que tienen las siguientes
+formas abreviadas:
+</para>
+<screen>\(...\) en lugar de \begin{math}...\end{math}
+\[...\] en lugar de \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>$</primary></indexterm>
+<para>De hecho, el entorno <literal>math</literal> es como una instrucción que tiene
+incluso una forma abreviada:
+</para>
+<screen>$ ... $ en lugar de \(...\)
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\boldmath</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unboldmath</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\boldmath</literal> cambia letras y símbolos matemáticos en
+tipo de letra en negrita. Este se utiliza <emphasis>fuera</emphasis> del modo math.
+Por el contrario, la instrucción <literal>\unboldmath</literal> cambia los glifos
+matemáticos para estar en un tipo de letra normal; este también se
+utiliza <emphasis>fuera</emphasis> del modo math.
+</para>
+<!-- xx ¿propia sección? ¿tipos de letra en Math? -->
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\displaystyle</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La declaración <literal>\displaystyle</literal> presiona para que el tamaño y estilo
+de la fórmula sea el de <literal>displaymath</literal>, por ejemplo, con limites por
+encima y debajo de sumatorias. Por ejemplo
+</para><screen>$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
+</screen>
+<!-- xx vea además \cal, \mathcal -->
+
+
+
+<sect1 label="17.1" id="Sub_00edndices-y-Super_00edndices">
+<title>Subíndices y Superíndices</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>superíndice</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subíndice</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>exponente</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>_</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>^</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Para hacer que una expresión <emphasis>exp</emphasis> aparezca como un subíndice, escriba
+<literal>_{</literal><emphasis>exp</emphasis><literal>}</literal>. Para hacer que <emphasis>exp</emphasis> aparezca como un
+exponente, escriba <literal>^{</literal><emphasis>exp</emphasis><literal>}</literal>. &latex; maneja
+superíndices, subíndices y todas esas cosas de manera natural. Incluso
+hace lo correcto cuando algo tiene tanto un subíndice como un
+superíndice.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="17.2" id="S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">
+<title>Símbolos Matemáticos</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolos matemáticos</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolos, matemáticos</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letras griegas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; proporciona casi cualquier símbolo matemático que muy
+probablemente necesite. Las instrucciones para generarlas se pueden
+utilizar únicamente en modo math. Por ejemplo, si incluye <literal>$\pi$</literal>
+en su archivo fuente, aparecerá el símbolo de pi (<inlineequation><mathphrase>\pi</mathphrase></inlineequation>) en su
+salida.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\|</primary></indexterm><literal>\|</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\|</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\aleph</primary></indexterm><literal>\aleph</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\aleph</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\alpha</primary></indexterm><literal>\alpha</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\alpha</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\amalg</primary></indexterm><literal>\amalg</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\amalg</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\angle</primary></indexterm><literal>\angle</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\angle</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\approx</primary></indexterm><literal>\approx</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\approx</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ast</primary></indexterm><literal>\ast</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\ast</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\asymp</primary></indexterm><literal>\asymp</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\asymp</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\backslash</primary></indexterm><literal>\backslash</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>\ (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\beta</primary></indexterm><literal>\beta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\beta</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigcap</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigcap</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bigcap</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigcirc</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigcirc</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bigcirc</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigcup</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigcup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bigcup</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigodot</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigodot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bigodot</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigoplus</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigoplus</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bigoplus</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigotimes</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigotimes</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bigotimes</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigtriangledown</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigtriangledown</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bigtriangledown</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigtriangleup</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigtriangleup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bigtriangleup</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigsqcup</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigsqcup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bigsqcup</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\biguplus</primary></indexterm><literal>\biguplus</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\biguplus</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigcap</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigcap</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bigvee</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigwedge</primary></indexterm><literal>\bigwedge</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bigwedge</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bot</primary></indexterm><literal>\bot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bot</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bowtie</primary></indexterm><literal>\bowtie</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bowtie</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Box</primary></indexterm><literal>\Box</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(símbolo de caja cuadrada abierta) <!-- xx no en el simple -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bullet</primary></indexterm><literal>\bullet</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo bala</primary></indexterm>
+<para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\bullet</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cap</primary></indexterm><literal>\cap</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\cap</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cdot</primary></indexterm><literal>\cdot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\cdot</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\chi</primary></indexterm><literal>\chi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\chi</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\circ</primary></indexterm><literal>\circ</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\circ</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\clubsuit</primary></indexterm><literal>\clubsuit</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\clubsuit</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cong</primary></indexterm><literal>\cong</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\cong</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\coprod</primary></indexterm><literal>\coprod</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\coprod</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cup</primary></indexterm><literal>\cup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\cup</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dagger</primary></indexterm><literal>\dagger</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\dagger</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dashv</primary></indexterm><literal>\dashv</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\dashv</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ddagger</primary></indexterm><literal>\ddagger</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\dagger</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Delta</primary></indexterm><literal>\Delta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Delta</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\delta</primary></indexterm><literal>\delta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\delta</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Diamond</primary></indexterm><literal>\Diamond</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\diamond</mathphrase></inlineequation> más grande <!-- xx no en el simple -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\diamond</primary></indexterm><literal>\diamond</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\diamond</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\diamondsuit</primary></indexterm><literal>\diamondsuit</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\diamondsuit</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\div</primary></indexterm><literal>\div</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\div</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\doteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\doteq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\doteq</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\downarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\downarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\downarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Downarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Downarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Downarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ell</primary></indexterm><literal>\ell</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\ell</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\emptyset</primary></indexterm><literal>\emptyset</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\emptyset</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\epsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\epsilon</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\epsilon</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\equiv</primary></indexterm><literal>\equiv</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\equiv</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\eta</primary></indexterm><literal>\eta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\eta</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\exists</primary></indexterm><literal>\exists</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\exists</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\flat</primary></indexterm><literal>\flat</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\flat</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\forall</primary></indexterm><literal>\forall</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\forall</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frown</primary></indexterm><literal>\frown</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\frown</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relacion)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Gamma</primary></indexterm><literal>\Gamma</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Gamma</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\gamma</primary></indexterm><literal>\gamma</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\gamma</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ge</primary></indexterm><literal>\ge</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\ge</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\geq</primary></indexterm><literal>\geq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\geq</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\gets</primary></indexterm><literal>\gets</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\gets</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\gg</primary></indexterm><literal>\gg</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\gg</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hbar</primary></indexterm><literal>\hbar</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\hbar</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\heartsuit</primary></indexterm><literal>\heartsuit</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\heartsuit</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hookleftarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\hookleftarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\hookleftarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hookrightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\hookrightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\hookrightarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\iff</primary></indexterm><literal>\iff</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\iff</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Im</primary></indexterm><literal>\Im</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Im</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\in</primary></indexterm><literal>\in</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\in</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\infty</primary></indexterm><literal>\infty</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\infty</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\int</primary></indexterm><literal>\int</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\int</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\iota</primary></indexterm><literal>\iota</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\iota</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Join</primary></indexterm><literal>\Join</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>símbolo de corbata de moño condensado (relación) <!-- xx no en el simple -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\kappa</primary></indexterm><literal>\kappa</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\kappa</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Lambda</primary></indexterm><literal>\Lambda</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Lambda</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lambda</primary></indexterm><literal>\lambda</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\lambda</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\land</primary></indexterm><literal>\land</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\land</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\langle</primary></indexterm><literal>\langle</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\langle</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lbrace</primary></indexterm><literal>\lbrace</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\lbrace</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lbrack</primary></indexterm><literal>\lbrack</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\lbrack</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lceil</primary></indexterm><literal>\lceil</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\lceil</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\le</primary></indexterm><literal>\le</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\le</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leadsto</primary></indexterm><literal>\leadsto</literal>
+</term><listitem><!-- xx falta de simple -->
+
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Leftarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Leftarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Leftarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\leftarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\leftarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftharpoondown</primary></indexterm><literal>\leftharpoondown</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\leftharpoondown</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leftharpoonup</primary></indexterm><literal>\leftharpoonup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\leftharpoonup</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Leftrightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Leftrightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Leftrightarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Leftrightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Leftrightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Leftrightarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\leq</primary></indexterm><literal>\leq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\leq</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lfloor</primary></indexterm><literal>\lfloor</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\lfloor</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\lhd</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(flecha apuntando hacia arriba a la izquierda) <!-- xx no en el simple -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ll</primary></indexterm><literal>\ll</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\ll</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lnot</primary></indexterm><literal>\lnot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\lnot</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\longleftarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\longleftarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\longleftarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\longleftrightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\longleftrightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\longleftrightarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\longmapsto</primary></indexterm><literal>\longmapsto</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\longmapsto</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\longrightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\longrightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\longrightarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lor</primary></indexterm><literal>\lor</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\lor</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mapsto</primary></indexterm><literal>\mapsto</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\mapsto</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mho</primary></indexterm><literal>\mho</literal>
+</term><listitem><!-- xx no en el simple -->
+
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mid</primary></indexterm><literal>\mid</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\mid</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\models</primary></indexterm><literal>\models</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\models</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mp</primary></indexterm><literal>\mp</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\mp</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mu</primary></indexterm><literal>\mu</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\mu</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nabla</primary></indexterm><literal>\nabla</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\nabla</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\natural</primary></indexterm><literal>\natural</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\natural</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ne</primary></indexterm><literal>\ne</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\ne</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nearrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\nearrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\nearrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\neg</primary></indexterm><literal>\neg</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\neg</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\neq</primary></indexterm><literal>\neq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\neq</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ni</primary></indexterm><literal>\ni</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\ni</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\not</primary></indexterm><literal>\not</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Superpone una / al siguiente operador, tal como <inlineequation><mathphrase>\not=</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\notin</primary></indexterm><literal>\notin</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\ni</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nu</primary></indexterm><literal>\nu</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\nu</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nwarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\nwarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\nwarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\odot</primary></indexterm><literal>\odot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\odot</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oint</primary></indexterm><literal>\oint</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\oint</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Omega</primary></indexterm><literal>\Omega</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Omega</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\omega</primary></indexterm><literal>\omega</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\omega</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ominus</primary></indexterm><literal>\ominus</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\ominus</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oplus</primary></indexterm><literal>\oplus</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\oplus</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oslash</primary></indexterm><literal>\oslash</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\oslash</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\otimes</primary></indexterm><literal>\otimes</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\otimes</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\owns</primary></indexterm><literal>\owns</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\owns</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parallel</primary></indexterm><literal>\parallel</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\parallel</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\partial</primary></indexterm><literal>\partial</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\partial</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\perp</primary></indexterm><literal>\perp</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\perp</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\phi</primary></indexterm><literal>\phi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\phi</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Pi</primary></indexterm><literal>\Pi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Pi</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pi</primary></indexterm><literal>\pi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\pi</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pm</primary></indexterm><literal>\pm</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\pm</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\prec</primary></indexterm><literal>\prec</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\prec</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\preceq</primary></indexterm><literal>\preceq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\preceq</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\prime</primary></indexterm><literal>\prime</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\prime</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\prod</primary></indexterm><literal>\prod</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\prod</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\propto</primary></indexterm><literal>\propto</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\propto</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Psi</primary></indexterm><literal>\Psi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Psi</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\psi</primary></indexterm><literal>\psi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\psi</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rangle</primary></indexterm><literal>\rangle</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\rangle</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rbrace</primary></indexterm><literal>\rbrace</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\rbrace</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rbrack</primary></indexterm><literal>\rbrack</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\rbrack</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rceil</primary></indexterm><literal>\rceil</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\rceil</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Re</primary></indexterm><literal>\Re</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Re</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rfloor</primary></indexterm><literal>\rfloor</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\rfloor</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\rhd</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(operación binaria) <!-- xx no en sencillo @math{\rhd} -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rho</primary></indexterm><literal>\rho</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\rho</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Rightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Rightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Rightarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\rightarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightharpoondown</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightharpoondown</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\rightharpoondown</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightharpoonup</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightharpoonup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\rightharpoonup</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rightleftharpoons</primary></indexterm><literal>\rightleftharpoons</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\rightleftharpoons</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\searrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\searrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\searrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\setminus</primary></indexterm><literal>\setminus</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\setminus</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sharp</primary></indexterm><literal>\sharp</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sharp</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Sigma</primary></indexterm><literal>\Sigma</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Sigma</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sigma</primary></indexterm><literal>\sigma</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sigma</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sim</primary></indexterm><literal>\sim</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sim</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\simeq</primary></indexterm><literal>\simeq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\simeq</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallint</primary></indexterm><literal>\smallint</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\smallint</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smile</primary></indexterm><literal>\smile</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\smile</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\spadesuit</primary></indexterm><literal>\spadesuit</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\spadesuit</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqcap</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqcap</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sqcap</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqcup</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqcup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sqcup</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsubset</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsubset</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(relación) <!-- no en (@math{\sqsubset}) simple -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsubseteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsubseteq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sqsubseteq</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsupset</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsupset</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>(relación) <!-- no en (@math{\sqsupset}) simple -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqsupseteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqsupseteq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sqsupseteq</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\star</primary></indexterm><literal>\star</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\star</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subset</primary></indexterm><literal>\subset</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\subset</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\subseteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\subseteq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\subseteq</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\succ</primary></indexterm><literal>\succ</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\succ</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\succeq</primary></indexterm><literal>\succeq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\succeq</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sum</primary></indexterm><literal>\sum</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sum</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\supset</primary></indexterm><literal>\supset</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\supset</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\supseteq</primary></indexterm><literal>\supseteq</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\supseteq</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relación)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\surd</primary></indexterm><literal>\surd</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\surd</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\swarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\swarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\swarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tau</primary></indexterm><literal>\tau</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\tau</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\theta</primary></indexterm><literal>\theta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\theta</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\times</primary></indexterm><literal>\times</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\times</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\to</primary></indexterm><literal>\to</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\to</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\top</primary></indexterm><literal>\top</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\top</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\triangle</primary></indexterm><literal>\triangle</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\triangle</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\triangleleft</primary></indexterm><literal>\triangleleft</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\triangleleft</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\triangleright</primary></indexterm><literal>\triangleright</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\triangleright</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unlhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\unlhd</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>punta de flecha apuntando hacia la izquierda con una línea debajo
+(operación binaria) <!-- no en sencillo -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\unrhd</primary></indexterm><literal>\unrhd</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>punta de flecha apuntando hacia la derecha con línea debajo
+(operación binaria) <!-- no en sencillo -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Uparrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Uparrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Uparrow</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\uparrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\uparrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\uparrow</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Updownarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\Updownarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Updownarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\updownarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\updownarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\updownarrow</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\uplus</primary></indexterm><literal>\uplus</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\uplus</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Upsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\Upsilon</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Upsilon</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\upsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\upsilon</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\upsilon</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varepsilon</primary></indexterm><literal>\varepsilon</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\varepsilon</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varphi</primary></indexterm><literal>\varphi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\varphi</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varpi</primary></indexterm><literal>\varpi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\varpi</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varrho</primary></indexterm><literal>\varrho</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\varrho</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\varsigma</primary></indexterm><literal>\varsigma</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\varsigma</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vartheta</primary></indexterm><literal>\vartheta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\vartheta</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vdash</primary></indexterm><literal>\vdash</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\vdash</mathphrase></inlineequation> (relation)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vee</primary></indexterm><literal>\vee</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\vee</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Vert</primary></indexterm><literal>\Vert</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Vert</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vert</primary></indexterm><literal>\vert</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\vert</mathphrase></inlineequation> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\wedge</primary></indexterm><literal>\wedge</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\wedge</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\wp</primary></indexterm><literal>\wp</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\wp</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\wr</primary></indexterm><literal>\wr</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\wr</mathphrase></inlineequation> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Xi</primary></indexterm><literal>\Xi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Xi</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\xi</primary></indexterm><literal>\xi</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\xi</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\zeta</primary></indexterm><literal>\zeta</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\zeta</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="17.3" id="Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">
+<title>Funciones Matemáticas</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>funciones matemáticas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>funciones, matemáticas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Estas instrucciones producen nombres de función romanos en modo math con
+el espaciado adecuado.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arccos</primary></indexterm><literal>\arccos</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\arccos</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arcsin</primary></indexterm><literal>\arcsin</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\arcsin</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arctan</primary></indexterm><literal>\arctan</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\arctan</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\arg</primary></indexterm><literal>\arg</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\arg</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bmod</primary></indexterm><literal>\bmod</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Operador residuo binario (<inlineequation><mathphrase>x \bmod y</mathphrase></inlineequation>)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cos</primary></indexterm><literal>\cos</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\cos</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cosh</primary></indexterm><literal>\cosh</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\cosh</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cot</primary></indexterm><literal>\cot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\cos</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\coth</primary></indexterm><literal>\coth</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\cosh</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\csc</primary></indexterm><literal>\csc</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\csc</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\deg</primary></indexterm><literal>\deg</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\deg</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\det</primary></indexterm><literal>\det</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\deg</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dim</primary></indexterm><literal>\dim</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\dim</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\exp</primary></indexterm><literal>\exp</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\exp</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\gcd</primary></indexterm><literal>\gcd</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\gcd</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hom</primary></indexterm><literal>\hom</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\hom</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\inf</primary></indexterm><literal>\inf</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\inf</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ker</primary></indexterm><literal>\ker</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\ker</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lg</primary></indexterm><literal>\lg</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\lg</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lim</primary></indexterm><literal>\lim</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\lim</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\liminf</primary></indexterm><literal>\liminf</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\liminf</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\limsup</primary></indexterm><literal>\limsup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\limsup</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ln</primary></indexterm><literal>\ln</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\ln</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\log</primary></indexterm><literal>\log</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\log</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\max</primary></indexterm><literal>\max</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\max</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\min</primary></indexterm><literal>\min</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\min</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pmod</primary></indexterm><literal>\pmod</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>residuo entre paréntesis, como en (<inlineequation><mathphrase>\pmod 2^n - 1</mathphrase></inlineequation>)
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\Pr</primary></indexterm><literal>\Pr</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\Pr</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sec</primary></indexterm><literal>\sec</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sec</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sin</primary></indexterm><literal>\sin</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sin</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sinh</primary></indexterm><literal>\sinh</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\sinh</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sup</primary></indexterm><literal>\sup</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>sup
+<!-- see comments in latex2e.texi. -->
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tan</primary></indexterm><literal>\tan</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\tan</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tanh</primary></indexterm><literal>\tanh</literal>
+</term><listitem><para><inlineequation><mathphrase>\tanh</mathphrase></inlineequation>
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="17.4" id="Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">
+<title>Acentos Matemáticos</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acentos matemáticos</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acentos, matemáticas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; proporciona una variedad de instrucciones para producir letras
+acentuadas en matemáticas. Son distintas de los acentos en un texto normal
+(véase <link linkend="Acentos">Acentos</link>).
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\acute</primary></indexterm><literal>\acute</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento agudo, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Acento agudo en modo Math: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\acute{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bar</primary></indexterm><literal>\bar</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento barra horizontal, math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento macrón, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Acento barra horizontal (macrón) en modo Math: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\bar{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\breve</primary></indexterm><literal>\breve</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento breve, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Acento breve en modo Math: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\breve{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\check</primary></indexterm><literal>\check</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento de verificación, math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento h&#225;&#269;ek, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Acento de verificación h&#225;&#269;ek en modo Math: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\check{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ddot</primary></indexterm><literal>\ddot</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento diéresis, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Acento diéresis en modo Math: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\ddot{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dot</primary></indexterm><literal>\dot</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento punto superior, math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>punto superior acento, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Acento punto superior en modo Math: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\dot{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\grave</primary></indexterm><literal>\grave</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento grave, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Acento grave en modo Math: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\grave{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hat</primary></indexterm><literal>\hat</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento circunflejo, math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento circunflejo, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Acento circunflejo en modo Math: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\hat{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\imath</primary></indexterm><literal>\imath</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>i sin punto, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>i sin punto en modo Math.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\jmath</primary></indexterm><literal>\jmath</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>j sin punto, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>j sin punto en modo Math.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tilde</primary></indexterm><literal>\tilde</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento tilde, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Acento tilde en modo Math: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\tilde{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vec</primary></indexterm><literal>\vec</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo de vector, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Símbolo de vector en modo Math: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\vec{x}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\widehat</primary></indexterm><literal>\widehat</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento circunflejo amplio, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Acento circunflejo amplio en modo Math: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\widehat{x+y}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\widetilde</primary></indexterm><literal>\widetilde</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento tilde amplia, math</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Acento tilde amplia en modo Math: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\widetilde{x+y}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="17.5" id="Espacios-en-Modo-Math">
+<title>Espacios en Modo Math</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>espacio dentro del modo math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>modo math mode, espaciado</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>En un entorno <literal>math</literal>, &latex; ignora los espacios que usted
+escriba y coloca espacios de acuerdo a las reglas normales para texto
+matemático. Si desea un espaciado diferente, &latex; proporciona las
+siguientes instrucciones para su uso en modo matemático:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\;</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\;</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Un espacio de grosor (<inlineequation><mathphrase>5\over18\,</mathphrase></inlineequation>cuádruple).
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\:</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\&gt;</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\:</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\&gt;</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Ambos producen un espacio medio (<inlineequation><mathphrase>2\over9\,</mathphrase></inlineequation>cuádruple).
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\,</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\,</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Un espacio fino (<inlineequation><mathphrase>1\over6\,</mathphrase></inlineequation>cuádruple); no se limita a modo matemático.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\!</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Un espacio fino negativo (<inlineequation><mathphrase>-{1\over6}\,</mathphrase></inlineequation>cuádruple).
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="17.6" id="Miscel_00e1nea-Math">
+<title>Miscelánea Math</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>miscelánea math</primary></indexterm>
+
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\*</primary></indexterm><literal>\*</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>multiplicación discrecional</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo de multiplicación, con salto de línea discrecional</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Un símbolo de multiplicación &#8220;discrecional&#8221;, en el que se permiten
+saltos de línea.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cdots</primary></indexterm><literal>\cdots</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Puntos suspensivos horizontales con los puntos elevados al centro de la
+línea.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ddots</primary></indexterm><literal>\ddots</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Puntos suspensivos en diagonal: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\ddots</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frac{num}{den}</primary></indexterm><literal>\frac{num}{den}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\frac</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce la fracción <literal>num</literal> dividida entre <literal>den</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\left <replaceable>delimitador1</replaceable> ... \right <replaceable>delimitador2</replaceable></primary></indexterm><literal>\left <replaceable>delimitador1</replaceable> ... \right <replaceable>delimitador2</replaceable></literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\right</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>delimitador nulo</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Los dos delimitadores no necesitan coincidir; &#8216;<literal>.</literal>&#8217; actúa como un
+delimitador nulo, sin producir salida. Los delimitadores son del tamaño
+de acuerdo a las matemáticas en el medio. Ejemplo: <literal>\left(
+\sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\overbrace{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\overbrace{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Genera un par de <replaceable>texto</replaceable> más. Por ejemplo,
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;veces}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\overline{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\overline{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Genera una línea horizontal sobre <replaceable>texo</replaceable>. Por ejemplo,
+<inlineequation><mathphrase>\overline{x+y}</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sqrt[<replaceable>raíz</replaceable>]{argumento}</primary></indexterm><literal>\sqrt[<replaceable>raíz</replaceable>]{argumento}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Produce la representación de la raíz cuadrada de <replaceable>argumento</replaceable>. El
+argumento opcional <replaceable>raíz</replaceable> determina qué raíz producir. Por ejemplo,
+la raíz cúbica de <literal>x+y</literal> se escribe como <literal>$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\stackrel{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}{<replaceable>relación</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\stackrel{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}{<replaceable>relación</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Coloca el <replaceable>texto</replaceable> sobre la <replaceable>relación</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<para>Por ejemplo, <literal>\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underbrace{matemáticas}</primary></indexterm><literal>\underbrace{matemáticas}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Genera <replaceable>matemáticas</replaceable> con una llave por debajo.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underline{text}</primary></indexterm><literal>\underline{text}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Provoca que se subraye el <replaceable>texto</replaceable>, el cual bien puede estar en modo
+math o no. La línea siempre está por debajo del texto, teniendo en
+cuenta los descendientes.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vdots</primary></indexterm><literal>\vdots</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vdots</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce puntos suspensivos verticales.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="18" id="Modos">
+<title>Modos</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>modos</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>modo párrafo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>modo math</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>modo izquierda-a-derecha</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>modo lR</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+<para>Cuando &latex; está procesando el texto fuente, este siempre está en
+uno de tres modos:
+</para>
+<itemizedlist><listitem><para>Modo Párrafo
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>Modo Math
+</para></listitem><listitem><para>Modo de Izquierda a derecha (Left-to-Right), llamado modo LR para
+abreviar
+</para></listitem></itemizedlist>
+<para>&latex; cambia el modo sólo cuando sube o baja una escala a un
+diferente nivel, aunque no todos los cambios de nivel producen cambios
+de modo. Los cambios de modo sólo se producen al entrar o salir de un
+entorno, o cuando &latex; está procesando el argumento de determinadas
+instrucciones que producen texto.
+</para>
+<para>El &#8220;modo Párrafo&#8221; es el más común; es en el que &latex; está cuando
+procesa texto ordinario. En ese modo, &latex; rompe el texto en líneas
+y separa líneas en páginas. &latex; está en &#8220;modo math&#8221; cuando está
+generando fórmulas matemáticas. En &#8220;modo LR&#8221;, como en modo párrafo,
+&latex; considera que la salida que produce es una cadena de palabras
+con espacios entre ellas. Sin embargo, a diferencia del modo párrafo,
+&latex; sigue yendo de izquierda a derecha; nunca inicia una nueva
+línea en modo LR. Incluso si usted pone un centenar de palabras en una
+<literal>\mbox</literal>, &latex; mantendrá la composición de izquierda a derecha
+dentro de una caja única, y luego se quejará porque la caja resultante
+fue demasiado grande para caber en la línea.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; está en modo LR cuando comienza a hacer una caja con una
+instrucción <literal>\mbox</literal>. Usted puede conseguir introducirse en un modo
+diferente dentro de la caja &#8212;por ejemplo, usted puede hacerlo entrar
+en el modo matemático para poner una fórmula en la caja. También hay
+varias instrucciones productoras de texto y entornos para hacer una caja
+que ponga a &latex; en el modo de párrafo. La caja hecha por medio de
+una de estas instrucciones o entornos se llama <literal>parbox</literal>. Cuando
+&latex; está en el modo de párrafo mientras que hace una caja, se dice
+que está en &#8220;modo interno de párrafo&#8221;. Su modo de párrafo normal, que
+se inicia fuera de él, se llama el &#8220;modo de párrafo externo&#8221;.
+</para>
+
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="19" id="Estilos-de-P_00e1gina">
+<title>Estilos de Página</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>estilos, página</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>estilos de página</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\documentclass</literal> determina el tamaño y posición de
+las cabeceras y pies de página. El estilo de página determina lo que
+sucede en ellos.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="19.1" id="_005cmaketitle">
+<title><literal>\maketitle</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>títulos, haciendo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\maketitle</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\maketitle</literal> genera un título en una página
+independiente &#8212; excepto en la clase <literal>article</literal>, donde se coloca el
+título en la parte superior de la primera página. La información
+utilizada para producir el título se obtiene de las siguientes
+declaraciones:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\author{<replaceable>nombre</replaceable> \and <replaceable>nombre2</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\author{<replaceable>nombre</replaceable> \and <replaceable>nombre2</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>autor, para titlepage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ para <literal>\author</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\and para <literal>\author</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\author</literal> declara los autor(es) del documento, donde
+el argumento es una lista de autores separados por instrucciones
+<literal>\and</literal>. Use <literal>\\</literal> para separar líneas con una única entrada de
+autor &#8212;por ejemplo, para proporcionar las entidades de autor o
+dirección.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\date{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\date{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>fecha, para la página de título</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\date</literal> declara el <replaceable>texto</replaceable> para ser la fecha del
+documento. Sin la instrucción <literal>\date</literal>, se utiliza la fecha actual
+(véase <link linkend="_005ctoday">\today</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thanks{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\thanks{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>thanks, para titlepage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>créditos al pie de página</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\thanks</literal> produce un pie de página
+(<literal>\footnote</literal>) para el título, normalmente utilizada para
+reconocimiento de créditos.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\title{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\title{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>title, para titlepage</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ para <literal>\title</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\title</literal> declara <replaceable>texto</replaceable> para ser el título del
+documento. Use <literal>\\</literal> para forzar un salto de línea, de la manera
+usual.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.2" id="_005cpagenumbering">
+<title><literal>\pagenumbering</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pagenumbering</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>estilo de numeración de página</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\pagenumbering{<replaceable>estilo</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Especifica el estilo de los números de página, de acuerdo a
+<replaceable>estilo</replaceable>. <literal>&#92;pagenumbering</literal> tambien
+reinicializa le numero de pagína a <inlineequation><mathphrase>1</mathphrase></inlineequation>. Los valores de <replaceable>estilo</replaceable>
+que se pueden utilizar son por ejemplo::
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>arabic</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>números arábigos
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>roman</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>números romanos en minúscula
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>Roman</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>numeros romanos en mayúscula
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>alph</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>letras en minúscula
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>Alph</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>letras en mayúscula
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.3" id="_005cpagestyle">
+<title><literal>\pagestyle</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pagestyle</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>estilo de encabezado</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>estilo del pie de página</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>siguiendo el estilo de encabezado y pie de página</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\pagestyle{<replaceable>estilo</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\pagestyle</literal> especifica como se componen
+tipográficamente las cabeceras y pies de página a partir de la página
+actual. Valores para <replaceable>estilo</replaceable>:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>plain</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Únicamente un número de página sencillo.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>empty</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Cabeceras y pies de página vacíos, por ejemplo, sin números de página.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>headings</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Coloca encabezados en cada página. El estilo de documento especifica lo
+que sucede en las cabeceras.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>myheadings</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Cabeceras personalizadas, especificadas via las instrucciones
+<literal>\markboth</literal> o <literal>\markright</literal>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Aquí están las descripciones de <literal>\markboth</literal> y <literal>\markright</literal>:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\markboth{<replaceable>izquierda</replaceable>}{<replaceable>derecha</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\markboth{<replaceable>izquierda</replaceable>}{<replaceable>derecha</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Establece ambas cabeceras izquierda y derecha. Una &#8220;cabecera a mano
+izquierda&#8221; (<replaceable>izquierda</replaceable>) es generada por la última instrucción
+<literal>\markboth</literal> antes del final de la página, mientras que una
+&#8220;cabecera a mano derecha&#8221; (<replaceable>derecha</replaceable>) es generada por la primera
+<literal>\markboth</literal> o <literal>\markright</literal> que venga en la página si la hay,
+de otra manera por la última antes de la página.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\markright{<replaceable>derecha</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\markright{<replaceable>derecha</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Establece la cabecera de la derecha, dejando la cabecera de la izquierda
+sin cambios.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="19.4" id="_005cthispagestyle">
+<title><literal>\thispagestyle{<replaceable>estilo</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thispagestyle</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\thispagestyle</literal> trabaja de la misma manera que la
+instrucción <literal>\pagestyle</literal> (vea la sección previa) excepto que esta
+únicamente cambia el <replaceable>estilo</replaceable> de la página actual.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="20" id="Espacios">
+<title>Espacios</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>espacios</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; tiene muchas formas de producir espacios en blanco (o llenos).
+</para>
+<para>Otra instrucción que produce espacios es <literal>\</literal> para producir un
+espacio &#8220;fino&#8221; (por lo general 1/6cuadrático).
+<!-- vincentb1: I don't think that quad should be translated in that context. -->
+Se puede
+utilizar en modo texto, pero más a menudo es útil en modo matemático
+(véase <link linkend="Espacios-en-Modo-Math">Espacios en Modo Math</link>).
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="20.1" id="_005chspace">
+<title><literal>\hspace</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hspace</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\hspace[*]{<replaceable>longitud</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\hspace</literal> añade espacio horizontal. El argumento
+<replaceable>length</replaceable> se puede expresar en cualquier término que &latex;
+entienda: puntos, pulgadas, etc. Esta es la longitud a preservar.
+Usted puede agregar tanto espacios negativos como positivos con una
+instrucción <literal>\hspace</literal>; agregar espacio negativo es como espacio
+hacia atrás.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; normalmente elimina el espacio horizontal que viene al
+principio o al final de una línea. Para preservar este espacio, use la
+forma opcional con <literal>*</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.2" id="_005chfill">
+<title><literal>\hfill</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hfill</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\hfill</literal> produce un &#8220;relleno de longitud&#8221; que no
+tiene espacio natural sino que se puede extender o reducir en sentido
+horizontal en la medida necesaria.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fill</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El parámetro <literal>\fill</literal> es la misma longitud a rellenar (técnicamente,
+el valor a agregar &#8216;<literal>0pt plus1fill</literal>&#8217;); es decir, <literal>\hspace\fill</literal>
+es equivalente a <literal>\hfill</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.3" id="_005cSPACE">
+<title><literal>\SPACE</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\SPACE</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\TAB</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\NEWLINE</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\ </literal> (space) produce un espacio entre palabras
+normal. Es útil después de signos de puntuación que no deben terminar
+una oración. Por ejemplo, <literal>Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\
+Math\. Soc.\ es fundamental</literal>. Esta también se suele utilizar después de
+secuencias de control, como en <literal>\TeX\ es un sistema agradable</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>En circunstancias normales, <literal>\</literal><keycap>tab</keycap> y <literal>\</literal><keycap>newline</keycap>
+son equivalentes a <literal>\ </literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.4" id="_005cAT">
+<title><literal>\@</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\@</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\@</literal> hace que el siguiente carácter de puntuación
+final una declaración incluso si normalmente no es así. Esto se suele
+utilizar después de una letra mayúscula. Aquí están lado a lado
+ejemplos con y sin <literal>\@</literal>:
+</para>
+<screen>&#8230; en C\@. Pascal, aunque &#8230;
+&#8230; en C. Pascal, aunque &#8230;
+</screen>
+<para>produce
+</para>
+<!-- Texinfo lo hace de manera diferente, pero el resultado es el mismo. -->
+<blockquote><para>&#8230; en C. Pascal, aunque &#8230;
+&#8230; en C. Pascal, aunque &#8230;
+</para></blockquote>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.5" id="_005cthinspace">
+<title><literal>\thinspace</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\thinspace</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\thinspace</literal> produce un espacio inviolable e inextensible que es de
+un 1/6 de em. Este es el espacio adecuado para su uso en citas
+anidadas, como en &#8217;&#8221;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.6" id="_005c_002f">
+<title><literal>\/</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\/</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\/</literal> produce una <firstterm>corrección en cursiva</firstterm>. Este
+es un pequeño espacio definido por el diseñador de tipografías para un
+carácter determinado, para evitar chocar con el carácter que lo sigue.
+El carácter en cursiva <emphasis>f</emphasis> típicamente tiene un valor de corrección en
+cursiva grande.
+</para>
+<para>Si el siguiente carácter es un punto o una coma, no es necesario
+insertar una corrección en cursiva, dado que estos símbolos tienen una
+puntuación de muy poca altura. Sin embargo, con punto y coma o dos
+puntos, así como letras normales, puede ayudar. Compare
+<emphasis>f: f;</emphasis> (en la salida &tex;, las &#8216;f&#8217;s están separadas correctamente)
+con <emphasis>f: f;</emphasis>.
+</para>
+<para>A pesar del nombre, los caracteres latinos también pueden tener una
+corrección en cursiva. Compare
+pdf&tex; (en la &tex; salida, hay un pequeño espacio después de la
+&#8216;f&#8217;)
+con pdf&tex;.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.7" id="_005chrulefill">
+<title><literal>\hrulefill</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\hrulefill</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\hrulefill</literal> produce un &#8220;relleno de longitud&#8221; el
+cual se puede estrechar o estirar horizontalmente. Este se llenará con
+una regla horizontal.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.8" id="_005cdotfill">
+<title><literal>\dotfill</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dotfill</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\dotfill</literal> produce un &#8220;relleno de longitud&#8221; la
+cual se rellena con puntos en lugar de sólo espacios en blanco.
+</para>
+
+<!-- xx deshacer -->
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.9" id="_005caddvspace">
+<title><literal>\addvspace</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addvspace</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>espacio vertical</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>espacio vertical, insertando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\addvspace{longitud}</literal>
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\addvspace</literal> normalmente añade un espacio vertical
+de altura longitud. Sin embargo, si el espacio vertical ya se ha
+añadido al mismo punto en la salida por medio de una instrucción
+<literal>\addvspace</literal> anterior, esta instrucción no añade más espacio que el
+necesario para hacer que la longitud natural del espacio vertical total
+equivalente a <literal>longitud</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.10" id="_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip">
+<title><literal>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</literal></title>
+
+<para>Estas instrucciones producen una determinada cantidad de espacio.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\bigskip</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigskip</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\bigskipamount</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Al igual que <literal>\vspace{bigskipamount}</literal>, normalmente alrededor de
+un espacio de línea (con estirar y encoger).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\medskip</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medskip</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\medskipamount</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Al igual que <literal>\vspace{medskipamount}</literal>, normalmente cerca de la
+mitad del espacio de una línea (con estirar y encoger).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\smallskip</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallskip</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\smallskipamount</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Al igual que <literal>\vspace{smallskipamount}</literal>, normalmente alrededor de
+un cuarto del espacio de una línea (con estirar y encoger).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>Los parámetros <literal>\...cantidad</literal> están determinados por la clase de
+documento.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.11" id="_005cvfill">
+<title><literal>\vfill</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vfill</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\vfill</literal> produce un relleno de longitud (pegado) el
+cual se puede reducir y estirar verticalmente tanto como sea necesario.
+Este es equivalente a <literal>\vspace{\fill}</literal> (véase <link linkend="_005chfill">\hfill</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="20.12" id="_005cvspace">
+<title><literal>\vspace[*]{<replaceable>longitud</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\vspace</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\vspace[*]{<replaceable>longitud</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\vspace</literal> añade el espacio vertical <replaceable>length</replaceable>, es
+decir, un relleno de longitud. <replaceable>longitud</replaceable> puede ser positivo o
+negativo.
+</para>
+<para>Normalmente, &latex; remueve el espacio vertical añadido por
+<literal>\vspace</literal> en la parte superior o inferior de una página. Con el
+argumento opcional <literal>*</literal>, no se elimina el espacio.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="21" id="Cajas">
+<title>Cajas</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cajas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Todos los parámetros de longitud predeterminados (véase <link linkend="Longitudes-Predeterminadas">Longitudes
+Predeterminadas</link>) se pueden utilizar en los argumentos de las
+instrucciones que generan cajas.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="21.1" id="_005cmbox">
+<title><literal>\mbox{<replaceable>texto}</replaceable></literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\mbox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>división silábica, impidiendo</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\mbox</literal> crea una caja lo suficientemente ancha para
+contener el texto creado por sus argumentos. El <replaceable>texto</replaceable> no se
+separa en líneas, por lo tanto este se puede utilizar para prevenir la
+separación silábica.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="21.2" id="_005cfbox-y-_005cframebox">
+<title><literal>\fbox</literal> y <literal>\framebox</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fbox</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\framebox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\fbox{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+\framebox[<replaceable>ancho</replaceable>][<replaceable>posición</replaceable>]{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Las instrucciones <literal>\fbox</literal> y <literal>\framebox</literal> son como <literal>\mbox</literal>,
+excepto que estas ponen un marco al rededor del exterior de la caja que
+se está creando.
+</para>
+<para>Además, la instrucción <literal>\framebox</literal> permite especificar
+explícitamente la anchura de la caja con el argumento opcional
+<replaceable>width</replaceable> (una dimensión), y la posiciona con el argumento opcional
+<replaceable>posición</replaceable>. <!-- xx ref -->
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxrule</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\fboxsep</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Ambas instrucciones producen una regla de espesor <literal>\fboxrule</literal>
+(predeterminado a &#8216;<literal>.4pt</literal>&#8217;), y dejan un espacio de <literal>\fboxsep</literal>
+(predeterminado a &#8216;<literal>3pt</literal>&#8217;) entre la regla y el contenido de la caja.
+</para>
+<para>Véase <link linkend="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</link>, para la instrucción <literal>\framebox</literal> en el
+entorno <literal>picture</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="21.3" id="lrbox">
+<title><literal>lrbox</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>lrbox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\begin{lrbox}{instrucción} texto \end{lrbox}</literal>
+</para>
+<para>Esta es la forma de entorno de <literal>\sbox</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>El texto dentro del entorno se guarda en la caja <literal>instrucción</literal>,
+misma que se debe haber declarado con <literal>\newsavebox</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="21.4" id="_005cmakebox">
+<title><literal>\makebox</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makebox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\makebox[<replaceable>ancho</replaceable>][<replaceable>posición</replaceable>]{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\makebox</literal> crea una caja lo suficientemente ancha
+para contener el <replaceable>texto</replaceable> especificado. La anchura de la caja es
+especificada por el argumento opcional <replaceable>ancho</replaceable>. La posición del
+texto dentro de la caja está determinada por el argumento opcional
+<replaceable>posición</replaceable>, el cual puede tomar los siguientes valores:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Centrado (predeterminado).
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>l</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Alineado a la izquierda
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>r</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Alineado a la derecha
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>s</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Alineado (justificado) a través de <replaceable>ancho</replaceable>; <replaceable>texto</replaceable> debe
+contener espacio elástico para que esto funcione.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para><literal>\makebox</literal> también se utiliza en el entorno picture véase <link linkend="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox
+(picture)</link>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="21.5" id="_005cparbox">
+<title><literal>\parbox</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\parbox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\parbox[<replaceable>posición</replaceable>][<replaceable>alto</replaceable>][<replaceable>pos-interna</replaceable>]{<replaceable>ancho</replaceable>}{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\parbox</literal> produce una caja cuyo contenido es creado
+en modo <literal>paragraph</literal>. Se debe utilizar para hacer una caja de
+pequeñas piezas de texto, sin nada lujoso en el interior. En
+particular, no debe utilizar ningún entorno que genere párrafos dentro
+de un argumento <literal>\parbox</literal>. Para grandes piezas de texto,
+incluyendo aquellas que contienen un entorno que genera párrafos, debe
+usar un entorno <literal>minipágina</literal> (véase <link linkend="minipage">minipage</link>).
+</para>
+<para><literal>\parbox</literal> tiene dos argumentos obligatorios:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>ancho</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>la anchura de parbox;
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>texto</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>El texto que va dentro de la parbox.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<para>El argumento opcional <replaceable>posición</replaceable> le permite alinear la línea en la
+parte superior o inferior de parbox con la línea base del texto que lo
+rodea (de manera predeterminada es superior).
+</para>
+<para>El argumento opcional <replaceable>alto</replaceable> reemplaza la altura natural de la caja.
+</para>
+<para>Al argumento <replaceable>pos-interior</replaceable> controla la ubicación del texto dentro
+de la caja de la siguiente manera; Si no se especifica, se utiliza
+<replaceable>posición</replaceable>.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>t</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>El texto es colocado en la parte superior de la caja.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>c</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>El texto se coloca al centro de la caja.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>b</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>El texto se coloca en la parte inferior de la caja.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>s</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Se extiende verticalmente; el texto debe contener espacio vertical
+extensible para que esto funcione.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="21.6" id="_005craisebox">
+<title><literal>\raisebox</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\raisebox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\raisebox{distancia}[<replaceable>alto</replaceable>][<replaceable>profundidad</replaceable>]{texto}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\raisebox</literal> aumenta o disminuye el <replaceable>texto</replaceable>. El
+primer argumento obligatorio especifica a qué altura se va a levantar (o
+bajar si la cantidad es negativa) el <replaceable>texto</replaceable>. El <replaceable>texto</replaceable> mismo
+es procesado en modo LR.
+</para>
+<para>Los argumentos opcionales <replaceable>alto</replaceable> y <replaceable>profundidad</replaceable> son
+dimensiones. Si se especifican, &latex; trata a <replaceable>texto</replaceable> como una
+ampliación de una distancia determinada sobre la línea base (alto) o
+bajo (profundidad), omitiendo su altura y profundidad natural.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="21.7" id="_005csavebox">
+<title><literal>\savebox</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\savebox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\savebox{<replaceable>\instrucción-caja</replaceable>}[<replaceable>ancho</replaceable>][<replaceable>posición</replaceable>]{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Esta instrucción fija la tipografía de <replaceable>texto</replaceable> en una caja al igual
+que <literal>\makebox</literal> (véase <link linkend="_005cmakebox">\makebox</link>), excepto que el lugar de imprimir
+la caja resultante, esta la guarda en la caja etiquetada
+<replaceable>\instrucción-caja</replaceable>, que se debe haber declarado con
+<literal>\newsavebox</literal> (véase <link linkend="_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="21.8" id="_005csbox">
+<title><literal>\sbox{<replaceable>\instrucción-caja</replaceable>}{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\sbox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\sbox{<replaceable>\instrucción-caja</replaceable>}{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para><literal>\sbox</literal> escribe el <replaceable>texto</replaceable> en una caja tal como <literal>\mbox</literal>
+(véase <link linkend="_005cmbox">\mbox</link>) excepto que en lugar de incluir la caja resultante en la
+salida normal, esta la guarda en la caja etiquetada
+<replaceable>\instrucción-caja</replaceable>. <replaceable>\instrucción-caja</replaceable> se debió declarar
+previamente con <literal>\newsavebox</literal> (véase <link linkend="_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="21.9" id="_005cusebox">
+<title><literal>\usebox{<replaceable>\instrucción-caja</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\usebox</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\usebox{<replaceable>\instrucción-caja</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para><literal>\usebox</literal> produce la caja guardada más recientemente en el depósito
+<replaceable>\instrucción-caja</replaceable> por una instrucción <literal>\savebox</literal>
+(véase <link linkend="_005csavebox">\savebox</link>).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="22" id="Inserciones-Especiales">
+<title>Inserciones Especiales</title>
+
+<para>&latex; proporciona instrucciones para insertar caracteres que tienen
+un significado especial que no corresponde a caracteres simples que
+usted puede escribir.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="22.1" id="Caracteres-Reservados">
+<title>Caracteres Reservados</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>caracteres reservados</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>caracteres, reservados</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Los siguientes caracteres desempeñan un papel especial en &latex; y se
+llaman &#8220;caracteres reservados&#8221; o &#8220;caracteres especiales&#8221;.
+</para>
+<screen># $ % &amp; ~ _ ^ \ { }
+</screen>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\#</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\$</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\%</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\&amp;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\_</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\{</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\}</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Siempre que escriba en su archivo uno de estos caracteres, &latex; debe
+hacer algo especial. Si simplemente desea imprimir el carácter en sí
+mismo, incluya un carácter <literal>\</literal> anteponiéndolo a este. Por ejemplo,
+<literal>\$</literal> debe producir <literal>$</literal> en su salida.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\backslash</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Una excepción a esta regla es la <literal>\</literal> misma, debido a que <literal>\</literal>
+tiene su propio significado especial (dependiente del contexto). Una \
+romana es producida al escribir <literal>$\backslash$</literal> en su archivo, y una
+<literal>\</literal> de máquina de escribir es producida usando &#8216;<literal>\</literal>&#8217; en una
+instrucción verbatim (véase <link linkend="verbatim">verbatim</link>).
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\~</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\^</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Además, <literal>\~</literal> y <literal>\^</literal> colocan acentos tilde y circunflejo sobre
+la siguiente letra, como en &#245; y &#244; (véase <link linkend="Acentos">Acentos</link>); Para
+obtener una <literal>~</literal> o <literal>^</literal> independiente, usted puede utilizar una
+instrucción verbatim.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\symbol</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>accediendo a cualquier carácter del tipo de letra</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Por último, puede acceder a cualquier carácter del tipo de letra actual
+una vez que sepa su número utilizando la instrucción <literal>\symbol</literal>. Por
+ejemplo, el carácter de espacio visibles utilizada en la instrucción
+<literal>\verb*</literal> tiene el código decimal 32, por lo tanto se puede escribir
+como <literal>\symbol{32}</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>También puede especificar números octales con <literal>'</literal> o números
+hexadecimales con <literal>&quot;</literal>, por lo que el ejemplo anterior también se
+podría escribir como <literal>\symbol{'40}</literal> o <literal>\symbol{&quot;20}</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="22.2" id="S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">
+<title>Símbolos de Texto</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolos de texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>paquete textcomp</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&latex; proporciona instrucciones para generar una serie símbolos
+distintos de letras, en el texto. Algunos de estos, especialmente los
+más oscuros, no están disponibles en OT1; posiblemente tenga que cargar
+el paquete <literal>textcomp</literal>.
+</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\copyright</primary></indexterm><literal>\copyright</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcopyright</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcopyright</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo de copyright</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El símbolo de copyright, &#169;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dag</primary></indexterm><literal>\dag</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>daga, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El símbolo daga (en texto).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ddag</primary></indexterm><literal>\ddag</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>doble daga, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El símbolo doble daga (en texto).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\LaTeX</primary></indexterm><literal>\LaTeX</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Logotipo de &latex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>logotipo, &latex;</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El logotipo de &latex;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\LaTeXe</primary></indexterm><literal>\LaTeXe</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Logotipo de &latex;2e</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>logotipo, &latex;2e</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El logotypo de &latex;2e.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\guillemotleft (&#171;)</primary></indexterm><literal>\guillemotleft (&#171;)</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\guillemotright (&#187;)</primary></indexterm><literal>\guillemotright (&#187;)</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\guilsinglleft (&#8249;)</primary></indexterm><literal>\guilsinglleft (&#8249;)</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\guilsinglright (&#8250;)</primary></indexterm><literal>\guilsinglright (&#8250;)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>comillas tipográficas, latinas o angulares</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comillas tipográficas simples</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comilla angular de apertura</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comilla angular de cierre</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comillas tipográficas angulares</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comillas tipográficas angulares simples</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comillas tipográficas Francesas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comillas tipográficas, Francesas</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Comillas tipográficas angulares dobles y simples, utilizadas comúnmente
+en Francés: &#171;, &#187;, &#8249;,
+&#8250;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ldots</primary></indexterm><literal>\ldots</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dots</primary></indexterm><literal>\dots</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textellipsis</primary></indexterm><literal>\textellipsis</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>puntos suspensivos</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Puntos suspensivos (tres puntos en la línea base): &#8216;&#8230;&#8217;.
+<literal>\ldots</literal> y <literal>\dots</literal> también trabajan en modo math.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\lq</primary></indexterm><literal>\lq</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>comilla izquierda</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comilla de apertura</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Comilla izquierda (de apertura): &#8216;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\P</primary></indexterm><literal>\P</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textparagraph</primary></indexterm><literal>\textparagraph</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo de párrafo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>antígrafo o simplemente signo de párrafo</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Signo de párrafo (antígrafo).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\pounds</primary></indexterm><literal>\pounds</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textsterling</primary></indexterm><literal>\textsterling</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo de libra esterlina</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo de libra esterlina</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Libras esterlinas en Inglés: &#163;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\quotedblbase (&#8222;)</primary></indexterm><literal>\quotedblbase (&#8222;)</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\quotesinglbase (&#8218;)</primary></indexterm><literal>\quotesinglbase (&#8218;)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>comillas dobles en línea base</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comilla simple en línea base</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comilla en línea base, simple y doble</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Simple y dobles comillas en la línea base:
+&#8222; y &#8218;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rq</primary></indexterm><literal>\rq</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>comilla derecha</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comilla de cierre</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Comilla derecha (de cierre): &#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\S</primary></indexterm><literal>\S</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo de sección</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Símbolo de sección.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\TeX</primary></indexterm><literal>\TeX</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>logotipo de &tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>logotipo, &tex;</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El logotipo de &tex;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textasciicircum</primary></indexterm><literal>\textasciicircum</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>circunflejo, ASCII, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ASCII circunflejo, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Circunflejo ASCII: ^.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textasciitilde</primary></indexterm><literal>\textasciitilde</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>tilde, ASCII, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tilde ASCII, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Tilde ASCII: ~.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textasteriskcentered</primary></indexterm><literal>\textasteriskcentered</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>asterisco, centrado, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>asterisco centrado, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Asterisco centrado: *.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbackslash</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbackslash</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>barra inversa, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Barra inversa: \.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbar</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbar</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>barra vertical, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>bar, vertical, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Barra Vertical: |.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbardbl</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbardbl</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>barra vertical, doble, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>barra, vertical doble, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>doble barra vertical, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Doble barra vertical.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbigcircle</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbigcircle</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo círculo grande, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo de círculo, grande, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Símbolo círculo grande.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbraceleft</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbraceleft</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>llave de apertura, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>llave, izquierda, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Llave izquierda: {.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbraceright</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbraceright</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>llave derecha, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>llave, derecha, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Llave derecha: }.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textbullet</primary></indexterm><literal>\textbullet</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>bala, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Bala: &#8226;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcircled{<replaceable>letra</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcircled{<replaceable>letra</replaceable>}</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>letra en círculo, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para><replaceable>letra</replaceable> en un círculo, como en &#174;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcompwordmark</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcompwordmark</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textcapitalwordmark</primary></indexterm><literal>\textcapitalwordmark</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textascenderwordmark</primary></indexterm><literal>\textascenderwordmark</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>marca palabra compuesta, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tapa superior</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ascender superior</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Marca de palabra compuesta (invisible). La forma <literal>\textcapital...</literal>
+tiene la tapa del tipo de letra, mientras que la forma
+<literal>\textascender...</literal> tiene el ascender superior.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textdagger</primary></indexterm><literal>\textdagger</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>daga, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Daga: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\dag</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textdaggerdbl</primary></indexterm><literal>\textdaggerdbl</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>daga, doble, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>daga doble, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Daga doble: <inlineequation><mathphrase>\ddag</mathphrase></inlineequation>.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textdollar (o <literal>\$</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textdollar (o <literal>\$</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>signo de dólar</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>moneda, dólar</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Signo de Dólar: $.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textemdash (o <literal>---</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textemdash (o <literal>---</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>em-dash</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Em-dash: &#8212; (para puntuación).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textendash (o <literal>--</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textendash (o <literal>--</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>e-dash</primary></indexterm>
+<para>En-dash: &#8212; (para rangos).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\texteuro</primary></indexterm><literal>\texteuro</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo del euro</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>divisas, euro</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El Símbolo del Euro: &#8364;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textexclamdown (o <literal>!`</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textexclamdown (o <literal>!`</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>exclamación, inicial</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Signo de exclamación inicial: &#161;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textgreater</primary></indexterm><literal>\textgreater</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo mayor que, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Mayor que: &gt;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textless</primary></indexterm><literal>\textless</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo menor que, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Menor que: &lt;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textleftarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\textleftarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>flecha, izquierda, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>flecha hacia la izquierda, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Flecha izquierda.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textordfeminine</primary></indexterm><literal>\textordfeminine</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textordmasculine</primary></indexterm><literal>\textordmasculine</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>Símbolo ordinal femenino</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo ordinal masculino</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ordinales, femenino y masculino</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ordinales en español, femenino y masculino</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Símbolos ordinales femenino y masculino: &#170;, &#186;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textordfeminine</primary></indexterm><literal>\textordfeminine</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo femenino ordinal</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Símbolo ordinal femenino: &#170;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textperiodcentered</primary></indexterm><literal>\textperiodcentered</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>punto, centrado, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>punto centrado, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Punto centrado: ·.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquestiondown (o <literal>?`</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquestiondown (o <literal>?`</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>interrogación, inicial</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Signo de interrogación inicial: &#191;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotedblleft (o <literal>``</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotedblleft (o <literal>``</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>marca izquierda, doble</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comillas dobles de apertura</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Comillas dobles de apertura: &#8220;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotedblright (o <literal>'</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotedblright (o <literal>'</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>comillas de cierre, dobles</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comillas de cierre dobles</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Dobles comillas de cierre: &#8221;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquoteleft (o <literal>`</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquoteleft (o <literal>`</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>comilla izquierda, sola</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comilla de apertura simple</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Comilla de apertura simple: &#8216;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquoteright (o <literal>'</literal>)</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquoteright (o <literal>'</literal>)</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>comilla de cierre, simple</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comilla de cierre simple</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Comilla de cierre simple: &#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotestraightbase</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotestraightbase</literal>
+</term><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textquotestraightdblbase</primary></indexterm><literal>\textquotestraightdblbase</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>comilla, en la línea base (coma)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>comillastraight quote, base</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>guión doble, línea recta</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>línea recta de guión doble, base</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Líneas rectas simples y dobles en la línea base.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textregistered</primary></indexterm><literal>\textregistered</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo de marca registrada</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Símbolo de marca registrada: &#174;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textrightarrow</primary></indexterm><literal>\textrightarrow</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>flecha derecha, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>flecha hacia la derecha, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Flecha hacia la derecha.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textthreequartersemdash</primary></indexterm><literal>\textthreequartersemdash</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>em-dash de tres cuartos</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>em-dash, tres cuartos</primary></indexterm>
+<para>em-dash de &#8220;Tres cuartos&#8221;, entre en-dash y em-dash.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\texttrademark</primary></indexterm><literal>\texttrademark</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo de marca comercial</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Símbolo de marca comercial: ™.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\texttwelveudash</primary></indexterm><literal>\texttwelveudash</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Xx 12u-.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textunderscore</primary></indexterm><literal>\textunderscore</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>subrayado, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Subrayado: _.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\textvisiblespace</primary></indexterm><literal>\textvisiblespace</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="cp"><primary>símbolo de espacio visible, en texto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Símbolo de espacio visible.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="22.3" id="Acentos">
+<title>Acentos</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acentos</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>caracteres, acentuados</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letras, acentuadas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>&latex; tiene un amplio apoyo para muchos de los guiones de idiomas del
+mundo, a través del paquete <literal>babel</literal> y de apoyo relacionados. Esta
+sección no pretende abarcar todas con las que es compatible. Este
+simplemente se limita a enumerar las principales instrucciones &latex;
+para crear caracteres acentuados.
+</para>
+<para>Las instrucciones <literal>\capital...</literal> producen formas alternativas para
+su uso con letras mayúsculas. Estas no están disponibles con OT1.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>\&quot;</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitaldieresis</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\&quot; (acento diéresis)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitaldieresis</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento diéresis</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento diéresis</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce una diéresis, como en &#246;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\'</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalacute</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\' (acento agudo)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalacute</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento agudo</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce un acento agudo, como en &#243;. En el entorno <literal>tabbing</literal>,
+empuja la columna actual a la derecha de la columna anterior
+(véase <link linkend="tabbing">tabbing</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\.</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\. (acento punto encima)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento punto</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento punto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce un punto como acento sobre la siguiente, como en &#559;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\=</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalmacron</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\= (acento macrón)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalmacron</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento macrón</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento barra encima</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento barra sobre</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce un acento macrón (una barra) sobre el siguiente, como en &#333;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\^</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalcircumflex</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\^ (acento circunflejo)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalcircumflex</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento circunflejo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento circunflejo</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce un acento circunflejo (sombrero) sobre la siguiente, como en
+&#244;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\`</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalgrave</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\` (acento grave)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalgrave</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento grave</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce un acento grave sobre la siguiente, como en &#242;. En el
+entorno <literal>tabbing</literal>, mueve el siguiente texto hacia el margen derecho
+(véase <link linkend="tabbing">tabbing</link>).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\~</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitaltilde</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\~ (acento tilde)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitaltilde</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento tilde</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce una tilde como acento sobre la siguiente, como en &#241;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\b</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\b (acento barra)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento barra</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce una barra como acento debajo de la siguiente, como en
+o_. Vea también <literal>\underbar</literal> a continuación
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\c</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalcedilla</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\c (acento cedilla)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalcedilla</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento cedilla</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce una cedilla como acento sobre la siguiente, como en &#231;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\d</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitaldotaccent</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\d (acento círculo)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitaldotaccent</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento círculo</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce un círculo como acento sobre la siguiente, como en
+&#7885;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\H</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalhungarumlaut</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\H (acento diéresis Húngara)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalhungarumlaut</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento diéresis húngara</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce un acento diéresis húngaro sobre la siguiente, como en &#337;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\i</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\i (i sin punto)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>i sin punto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce una i sin punto, como en &#8216;i&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\j</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\j (j sin punto)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>j sin punto</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce una j sin punto, como en &#8216;j&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\k</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalogonek</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\k (colita &#8212;ogonek en polaco)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalogonek</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>colita</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce una letra con colita, como en &#8216;&#491;&#8217;. No disponible en la
+codificación OT1.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\r</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalring</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\r (acento anillo)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalring</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>anillo acento</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce un anillo como acento, como en &#8216;o*&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\t</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitaltie</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\newtie</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalnewtie</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\t (acento atadura con siguiente)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitaltie</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\newtie</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalnewtie</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>atadura con siguiente acento</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce una atadura con el siguiente como acento, como en
+&#8216;oo[&#8217;. La forma <literal>\newtie</literal> está centrada en su caja.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\u</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalbreve</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\u (breve acento)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalbreve</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>breve acento</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce un acento breve, como en &#8216;&#335;&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\underbar</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\underbar</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>subrayado</primary></indexterm>
+<para>No es exactamente un acento, este produce una barra en el argumento
+texto. El argumento siempre se procesa en modo horizontal. La barra
+siempre está en una posición fija en la línea base, por lo que cruza a
+través de los trazos descendentes. Vea también <literal>\underline</literal> en
+<link linkend="Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</link>. Vea también <literal>\b</literal> aquí antes
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\v</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\capitalcaron</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\v (breve acento)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\capitalcaron</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>acento anticircunflejo</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>anticircunflejo acento</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>carón acento</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Produce un acento h&#225;&#269;ek (anticircunflejo, carón), como en &#8216;&#466;&#8217;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="22.4" id="Caracteres-no-Ingleses">
+<title>Caracteres no Ingleses</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>caracteres especiales</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>caracteres no Ingleses</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>caracteres, no Ingleses</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letras, no Inglesas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Estas son las instrucciones &latex; básicas para insertar los
+caracteres más usados en idiomas distintos del Inglés.
+</para>
+<variablelist>
+<varlistentry><term><literal>\aa</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\AA</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\aa (&#229;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AA (&#197;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ash</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#229; y &#197;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ae</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\AE</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ae (&#230;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\AE (&#198;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>ligadura ae</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#230; y &#198;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\dh</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\DH</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dh (&#230;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DH (&#198;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>islandés eth</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>eth, letra islandesa</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Letra eth islandesa: &#240; y &#208;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\dj</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\DJ</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\dj</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\DJ</primary></indexterm>
+<para>xxxx
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ij</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\IJ</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ij (ij)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\IJ (IJ)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letra ij, Neerlandés</primary></indexterm>
+<para>ij y IJ (salvo que un poco más juntas que como aparecen aquí).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\l</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\L</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\l (&#322;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\L (&#321;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>l Polaca</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#322; y &#321;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ng</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\NG</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ng</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\NG</primary></indexterm>
+<para>xxxx
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\o</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\O</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\o (&#248;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\O (&#216;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>oslash</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#248; y &#216;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\oe</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\OE</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\oe (&#339;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\OE (&#338;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>oe ligadura</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#339; y &#338;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\ss</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\SS</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ss (&#223;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\SS (SS)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>es-zet letra Alemana</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>letras S afiladas</primary></indexterm>
+<para>&#223; y SS.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>\th</literal>
+</term><term><literal>\TH</literal>
+</term><listitem><indexterm role="fn"><primary>\th (&#254;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\TH (&#222;)</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>espina Islandesa</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>espina, letra Islandesa</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Letra espina Islandesa: &#254; y &#222;.
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="22.5" id="_005crule">
+<title><literal>\rule</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\rule</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\rule[<replaceable>aumentar</replaceable>]{<replaceable>ancho</replaceable>}{<replaceable>espesor</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\rule</literal> produce <firstterm>reglas</firstterm>, que son, líneas o
+rectángulos. Los argumentos son:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>aumentar</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>Qué tanto aumentar la regla (opcional).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>ancho</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>La longitud de la regla (obligatorio).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>espesor</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>El espesor de la regla (obligatorio).
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="22.6" id="_005ctoday">
+<title><literal>\today</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\today</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\today</literal> produce la fecha de hoy, en formato
+&#8216;<literal><replaceable>mes</replaceable> <replaceable>dd</replaceable>, <replaceable>aaaa</replaceable></literal>&#8217;; por ejemplo, &#8216;Julio 04 1976&#8217;.
+Utiliza los contadores predefinidos <literal>\day</literal>, <literal>\month</literal>, y
+<literal>\year</literal> (véase <link linkend="_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear">\day \month \year</link>) para hacerlo. No se actualiza
+cuando se ejecuta el programa.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paquete <literal>datetime</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>El paquete <literal>datetime</literal>, entre otros, puede producir una amplia
+variedad de formatos de fecha.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="23" id="Dividiendo-la-Entrada">
+<title>Dividiendo la Entrada</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>dividiendo el archivo de entrada</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>archivo de entrada</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Un documento de gran tamaño requiere una gran cantidad de insumos. En
+lugar de poner toda la entrada en un único archivo de gran tamaño, es
+más eficiente dividirlo en varios más pequeños. Independientemente del
+número de archivos separados que utilice, hay uno que es el archivo
+raíz; este es cuyo nombre se escribe cuando se ejecuta &latex;.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="23.1" id="_005cinclude">
+<title><literal>\include</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\include</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\include{<replaceable>archivo</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>No hay presente una instrucción <literal>\includeonly</literal>, la instrucción
+<literal>\include</literal> executa <literal>\clearpage</literal> para iniciar una nueva página
+(véase <link linkend="_005cclearpage">\clearpage</link>), entonces lee el <replaceable>archivo</replaceable>, y luego hace otro
+<literal>\clearpage</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Dada una instrucción <literal>\includeonly</literal>, las acciones <literal>\include</literal>
+únicamente se ejecutan si <replaceable>archivo</replaceable> está listado como un argumento
+para <literal>\includeonly</literal>. Consulte la siguiente sección.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><literal>\include</literal> anidada, no se permite</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\include</literal> no puede aparecer en el preámbulo o en un
+archivo leído por otra instrucción <literal>\include</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="23.2" id="_005cincludeonly">
+<title><literal>\includeonly</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\includeonly</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\includeonly{<replaceable>archivo1</replaceable>,<replaceable>archivo2</replaceable>,...}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\includeonly</literal> controla cuales archivos se deben
+leer en subsecuentes instrucciones <literal>\include</literal>. La lista de nombres
+de archivo se separa con comas. Cada <replaceable>archivo</replaceable> debe coincidir
+exactamente con un nombre de archivo especificado en una instrucción
+<literal>\include</literal> para una selección eficaz.
+</para>
+<para>Esta instrucción únicamente puede aparecer en el preámbulo.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="23.3" id="_005cinput">
+<title><literal>\input</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\input</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\input{<replaceable>archivo</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\input</literal> provoca que el <replaceable>archivo</replaceable> especificado
+sea leído y procesado, tal como si su contendido se hubiera insertado en
+ese punto en el archivo actual.
+</para>
+<para>Si <replaceable>archivo</replaceable> no termina en &#8216;<literal>.tex </literal>&#8217; (por ejemplo, &#8216;<literal>foo</literal>&#8217; o
+&#8216;<literal>foo.bar</literal>&#8217;), primero se intenta con esa extensión (&#8216;<literal>foo.tex</literal>&#8217; o
+&#8216;<literal>foo.bar.tex</literal>&#8217;). Si no se encuentra, el <replaceable>archivo</replaceable> original se
+intenta con (&#8216;<literal>foo</literal>&#8217; o &#8216;<literal>foo.bar</literal>&#8217;).
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="24" id="Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada">
+<title>Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</title>
+
+
+
+<sect1 label="24.1" id="Tablas-de-Contenido">
+<title>Tablas de Contenido</title>
+
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tabla de contenido, creando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\tableofcontents</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Se produce una tabla de contenido con la instrucción
+<literal>\tableofcontents</literal>. Usted pone la instrucción adecuada donde desea
+que aparezca la tabla de contenido; &latex; hace el resto para usted.
+Una ejecución previa habrá generado un archivo <filename>.toc</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\tableofcontents</literal> produce una sección, pero no
+inicia una nueva página automáticamente. Si desea una nueva página
+después de la tabla de contenido, escriba una instrucción código
+<literal>\newpage</literal> después de la instrucción <literal>\tableofcontents</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\listoffigures</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\listoftables</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Las instrucciones análogas <literal>\listoffigures</literal> y <literal>\listoftables</literal>
+producen una lists de figuras y una lista de tablas, respectivamente.
+Cada una funciona exactamente igual que la tabla de contenido.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\nofiles</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\nofiles</literal> reemplaza estas instrucciones, e
+<emphasis>impide</emphasis> que se genere cualquiera de estas listas.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect2 label="24.1.1" id="_005caddcontentsline">
+<title>\addcontentsline</title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addcontentsline{<replaceable>exto</replaceable>}{<replaceable>unidad</replaceable>}{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>tabla de contenido, agregando manualmente</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción
+<literal>\addcontentsline</literal>{<replaceable>extensión</replaceable>}{<replaceable>undad</replaceable>}{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+añade una entrada a la lista o tabla donde:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>extensión</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>La extensión del archivo en el que se va a escribir la información, por
+lo general una de: <literal>toc</literal> (tabla de contenido), <literal>lof</literal> (lista de
+figuras) o <literal>lot</literal> (lista de tablas).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>unidad</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>El nombre de la unidad de sección a añadir, normalmente una de las
+siguientes, coincidiendo con el valor del argumento <replaceable>extensión</replaceable>:
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><literal>toc</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>El nombre de la unidad de sección: <literal>part</literal>, <literal>chapter</literal>,
+<literal>section</literal>, <literal>subsection</literal>, <literal>subsubsection</literal>.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>lof</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Para la lista de figuras.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><literal>lot</literal>
+</term><listitem><para>Para la lista de tablas.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>texto</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>El texto real de la entrada.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\contentsline</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción que realmente escribe al archivo <filename>.<replaceable>extensión</replaceable></filename>
+es la instrucción <literal>\contentsline{<replaceable>undad</replaceable>}{<replaceable>nombre</replaceable>}</literal>.
+</para>
+<!-- ?? ¿cómo están cableados estos valores? ¿otros nombres de unidad? -->
+
+
+</sect2>
+<sect2 label="24.1.2" id="_005caddtocontents">
+<title>\addtocontents</title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\addtocontents{<replaceable>extra</replaceable>}{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\addtocontents</literal>{<replaceable>extensión</replaceable>}{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+añade texto (o instrucciones de formato) directamente al archivo
+<filename>.<replaceable>extensión</replaceable></filename> que genera la tabla de contenido o listas de
+figuras o tablas.
+</para>
+<variablelist><varlistentry><term><replaceable>extensión</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>La extensión del archivo en el cual escribir la información: <filename>toc</filename>
+(tabla de contenido), <filename>lof</filename> (lista de figuras) o <filename>lot</filename> (lista
+de tablas).
+</para>
+</listitem></varlistentry><varlistentry><term><replaceable>texto</replaceable>
+</term><listitem><para>El texto a escribir.
+</para></listitem></varlistentry></variablelist>
+
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="24.2" id="Glosarios">
+<title>Glosarios</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>glosarios</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makeglossary</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\makeglossary</literal> habilita la creación de glosarios.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\glossary</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>archivo <filename>.glo</filename></primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\glossary{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</literal> escribe una entrada en el
+glosario para <replaceable>texto</replaceable> a un archivo auxiliar con la extensión
+<filename>.glo</filename>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\glossaryentry</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Específicamente, la instrucción que escribe es
+<literal>\glossaryentry{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}{<replaceable>no-de-página</replaceable>}</literal>, donde
+<replaceable>no-de-página</replaceable> es el valor de <literal>\thepage</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>El paquete <literal>glossary</literal> en CTAN proporciona compatibilidad para
+glosarios más sofisticados.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="24.3" id="_00cdndices">
+<title>Índices</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>índices</primary></indexterm>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makeindex</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\makeindex</literal> permite la creación de índices.
+Coloquela en el preámbulo.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\index</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>archivo <filename>.idx</filename></primary></indexterm>
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\index{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</literal> escribe una entrada en el
+índice para <replaceable>texto</replaceable> en un archivo auxiliar con la extensión
+<filename>.idx</filename>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\indexentry</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Específicamente, la instrucción que escribe la entrada es
+<literal>\indexentry{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}{<replaceable>no-de-página</replaceable>}</literal>, donde
+<replaceable>no-de-página</replaceable> es el valor actual de <literal>\thepage</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>&#8216;vea&#8217; y &#8216;vea también&#8217; entradas de índice</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Para generar una entrada de índice para &#8216;bar&#8217; que diga &#8216;Vea foo&#8217;,
+utilice una barra vertical: <literal>\index{bar|see{foo}}</literal>. Use
+<literal>seealso</literal> en lugar de <literal>see</literal> para producir una entrada &#8216;Vea
+también&#8217;.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\seename</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\alsoname</primary></indexterm>
+<para>El texto &#8216;Vea&#8217; está definido por la macro <literal>\seename</literal>, y &#8216;Vea
+también&#8217; por la macro <literal>\alsoname</literal>. Estas se pueden redefinir para
+otros idiomas.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><command>makeindex</command> programa</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary><command>xindy</command> programa</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>archivo <filename>.ind</filename></primary></indexterm>
+<para>El archivo <filename>.idx</filename> generado luego es ordenado con una instrucción
+externa, por lo general alguna instrucción <command>makeindex</command>
+(<ulink url="http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex">http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex</ulink>) o (la de múltiples
+idiomas) <command>xindy</command> (<ulink url="http://xindy.sourceforge.net">http://xindy.sourceforge.net</ulink>). Esto
+resulta en un archivo <filename>.ind</filename>, que se puede leer para componer
+tipográficamente el índice.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>printindex</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paquete <literal>makeidx</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>El índice normalmente se genera con la instrucción <literal>\printindex</literal>.
+Esta instrucción está definida en el paquete <literal>makeidx</literal>, por lo
+tanto necesita colocar en el preámbulo la instrucción
+<literal>\usepackage{makeidx}</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>indexspace</primary></indexterm>
+<para>La longitud de relleno <literal>\indexspace</literal> se inserta antes de cada nueva
+letra en el índice impreso; letra en el índice impreso su valor
+predeterminado es &#8216;<literal>10pt plus5pt minus3pt</literal>&#8217;.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paquete <literal>showidx</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>El paquete <literal>showidx</literal> hace que cada entrada en el índice se muestre
+en el margen de la página donde aparece la entrada. Esto puede ayudar
+en la preparación del índice.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>paquete <literal>multind</literal></primary></indexterm>
+<para>El paquete <literal>multind</literal> es compatible con múltiples índices. Vea
+también la entrada de este tema en las preguntas frecuentes de &tex;,
+en
+</para>
+<para><ulink url="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind</ulink>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="25" id="Cartas">
+<title>Cartas</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cartas</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>creando cartas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Usted puede utilizar &latex; para componer tipográficamente cartas,
+para ambas personales y de negocios. La clase de documento
+<literal>letter</literal> está diseñada para hacer una serie de cartas a la vez,
+aunque se puede hacer sólo una si así lo desea.
+</para>
+<para>Su archivo fuente <filename>.tex</filename> tiene las mismas instrucciones mínimas de
+clase que en cualquier otro documento, es decir, debe tener las
+siguientes instrucciones como mínimo:
+</para>
+<screen> \documentclass{letter}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... cartas ...
+ \end{document}
+</screen>
+<para>Cada carta es un entorno <literal>letter</literal>, cuyo argumento es el nombre y
+dirección del destinatario. Por ejemplo, usted podría tener:
+</para>
+<screen> \begin{letter}{Sr. José Pérez\\ Calle Princesa N°2345.
+ \\ Edinburgo, EH1 1AA}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+</screen>
+
+<para>La carta en sí comienza con la instrucción <literal>\opening</literal>. Siguiéndole
+el texto de la carta. Este se escribe como una entrada de &latex;
+ordinaria. Las instrucciones que no tienen sentido en una carta, como
+<literal>\chapter</literal>, no funcionan. La carta se cierra con una instrucción
+<literal>\closing</literal>.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\\ para cartas</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Después de <literal>closing</literal>, usted puede colocar material adicional. La
+instrucción <literal>\cc</literal> produce el usual &#8220;cc: &#8230;&#8221;. También hay
+una instrucción <literal>\encl</literal> similar para una lista de
+destinatarios. Con ambas instrucciones, use <literal>\\</literal> para separar los
+elementos.
+</para>
+<para>Estas instrucciones se utilizan con la clase <literal>letter</literal>.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="25.1" id="_005caddress">
+<title>\address{<replaceable>dirección-del-remitente}</replaceable></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\address</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La instrucción <literal>\address</literal> especifica la dirección del remitente de
+la carta, como debería aparecer en la carta y el sobre. Separa las
+líneas de la dirección que deben estar separadas por instrucciones
+<literal>\\</literal>.
+</para>
+<para>Si usted no proporciona una declaración <literal>\address</literal>, entonces, se
+aplicará a la carta el formato de copia en papel con el membrete
+estándar de su organización. (Véase <link linkend="Descripci_00f3n">Descripción</link>, para obtener detalles
+sobre la implementación local). Si usted proporciona una declaración
+<literal>\address</literal>, entonces, la carta será formateada como una carta
+personal.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.2" id="_005ccc">
+<title><literal>\cc</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\cc</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>listas cc, en cartas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\cc{<replaceable>nombre</replaceable>\\<replaceable>nombre2</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Produce una lista de <replaceable>nombre</replaceable>s a quienes enviar copias de la carta.
+Cada nombre se imprime en una línea separada.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.3" id="_005cclosing">
+<title><literal>\closing</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\closing</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cartas, terminando</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cerrando cartas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\closing{texto}
+</screen>
+<para>Una carta se cierra con la instrucción <literal>\closing</literal>, por ejemplo,
+</para><screen>\closing{Muy Atentamente,}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.4" id="_005cencl">
+<title><literal>\encl</literal></title>
+
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\encl</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>lista de documentos adjuntos</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\encl{<replaceable>línea1</replaceable>\\<replaceable>línea2</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Declara una lista de más de un documento adjunto.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.5" id="_005clocation">
+<title><literal>\location</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\location</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\location{dirección}</literal>
+</para>
+<para>Esta modifica la dirección estándar de su organización. Esto sólo
+aparece si el estilo de página <literal>firstpage</literal> está seleccionado.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.6" id="_005cmakelabels">
+<title><literal>\makelabels</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\makelabels</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\makelabels{número}</literal>
+</para>
+<para>Si ejecuta esta instrucción en el preámbulo, &latex; creará una hoja de
+etiquetas con las direcciones. Esta hoja se emitirá antes que las
+cartas.
+</para>
+
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.7" id="_005cname">
+<title><literal>\name</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\name</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\name{June Davenport}</literal>
+</para>
+<para>Su nombre, utilizado en la impresión del sobre junto con la dirección
+del remitente.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.8" id="_005copening">
+<title><literal>\opening{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\opening</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>cartas, iniciando</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\opening{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Una carta comienza con la instrucción <literal>\opening</literal>. El argumento
+obligatorio, <replaceable>texto</replaceable>, es el texto con el que desea iniciar su carta.
+Por ejemplo:
+</para>
+<screen>\opening{Estimado José,}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.9" id="_005cps">
+<title><literal>\ps</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\ps</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>posdata, en cartas</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Use la instrucción <literal>\ps</literal> para iniciar una posdata en una carta,
+después de <literal>\closing</literal>.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.10" id="_005csignature">
+<title><literal>\signature{<replaceable>texto</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\signature</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Su nombre, como debe aparecer al final de la carta debajo del espacio
+para su firma. <literal>\\</literal> inicia una nueva línea dentro de <replaceable>texto</replaceable>
+como de costumbre.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.11" id="_005cstartbreaks">
+<title><literal>\startbreaks</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\startbreaks</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\startbreaks</literal>
+</para>
+<para>Se usa después de una instrucción <literal>\stopbreaks</literal> para permitir de
+nuevo los saltos de página.
+</para>
+
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.12" id="_005cstopbreaks">
+<title><literal>\stopbreaks</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\stopbreaks</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\stopbreaks</literal>
+</para>
+<para>Inhibe saltos de página hasta que aparezca una instrucción
+<literal>\startbreaks</literal>.
+</para>
+
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="25.13" id="_005ctelephone">
+<title><literal>\telephone</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\telephone</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para><literal>\telephone{número}</literal>
+</para>
+<para>Este es su número de teléfono. Este sólo aparece si el estilo de página
+<literal>firstpage</literal> está seleccionado.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="26" id="Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal">
+<title>Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>entrada/salida</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>entrada/salida desde la terminal</primary></indexterm>
+
+
+
+<sect1 label="26.1" id="_005ctypein">
+<title><literal>\typein[<replaceable>instrucción</replaceable>]{<replaceable>mensaje</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\typein</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\typein[<replaceable>\instrucción</replaceable>]{<replaceable>mensaje</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para><literal>\typein</literal> imprime el <replaceable>mensaje</replaceable> en la terminal y provoca que
+&latex; se detenga y espere para que usted escriba una línea de
+entrada, terminando con &#8220;Intro&#8221;. Si se omite el argumento opcional
+<replaceable>\instrucción</replaceable>, la entrada escrita se procesa como si se hubiera
+incluido en el archivo de entrada en lugar de la instrucción
+<literal>\typein</literal>. Si está presente el argumento <replaceable>\instrucción</replaceable>, debe
+ser el nombre de una instrucción. Este nombre de instrucción entonces
+define o redefine la entrada escrita.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="26.2" id="_005ctypeout">
+<title><literal>\typeout{<replaceable>mensaje</replaceable>}</literal></title>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\typeout</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<screen>\typeout{<replaceable>mensaje</replaceable>}
+</screen>
+<para>Imprime el <literal>mensaje</literal> en la terminal y en el archivo <literal>log</literal>.
+Las instrucciones en el <literal>mensaje</literal> que están definidas con
+<literal>\newcommand</literal> o <literal>\renewcommand</literal> (entre otras) se sustituyen
+por su definición antes de ser impresas.
+</para>
+<para>Las reglas habituales de &latex; para el tratamiento de varios espacios
+como un espacio único e ignorando espacios después de un nombre de
+instrucción también se aplican al <literal>mensaje</literal>. Una instrucción
+<literal>\space</literal> en <literal>mensaje</literal> provoca la impresión de un espació
+sencillo, independientemente de los espacios circundantes. Una
+<literal>^^J</literal> en <literal>mensaje</literal> imprime una nueva línea.
+</para>
+
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="27" id="L_00ednea-de-_00d3rdenes">
+<title>Línea de Órdenes</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>línea de órdenes</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>La especificación de archivo de entrada indica el archivo al cual
+aplicar formato; &tex; usa <filename>.tex</filename> como extensión predeterminada.
+Si se omite el archivo de entrada completamente, &tex; acepta entrada
+desde la terminal. Usted especifica opciones de instrucción mediante el
+suministro de una cadena como un parámetro para la instrucción; por
+ejemplo,
+</para>
+<screen>latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
+</screen>
+<para>debe procesar <filename>foo.tex</filename> sin hacer una pausa después de cada error.
+</para>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>&#8216;<literal>*</literal>&#8217; apuntador</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>apuntador, &#8216;<literal>*</literal>&#8217;</primary></indexterm>
+<indexterm role="fn"><primary>\stop</primary></indexterm>
+<para>Si &latex; se detiene en medio del documento y le muestra un indicador
+&#8216;<literal>*</literal>&#8217;, está esperando por una entrada. Usted puede escribir
+<literal>\stop</literal> (e Intro) y este terminará el documento prematuramente.
+</para>
+
+
+</chapter>
+<appendix label="A" id="Plantillas-de-Documento">
+<title>Plantillas de Documento</title>
+<indexterm role="cp"><primary>plantillas de documentos</primary></indexterm>
+
+<para>Aunque no es material de referencia, tal vez estas plantillas de
+documento serán de utilidad.
+</para>
+
+
+<sect1 label="A.1" id="Plantilla-book">
+<title>Plantilla <literal>book</literal></title>
+
+<screen>\documentclass{book}
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+\title{Plantilla de Clase Book}
+\author{Autor Alex}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\chapter{Primero}
+Algún texto.
+
+\chapter{Segundo}
+Algún otro texto.
+
+\section{Un subtema}
+El final.
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="A.2" id="Plantilla-beamer">
+<title>Plantilla <literal>beamer</literal></title>
+
+<para>La clase <literal>beamer</literal> crea diapositivas de presentaciones.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{beamer}
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+
+\title{Plantilla de Clase Beamer}
+\author{Autor Alex}
+\date{Julio 31, 2010}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% sin [fragile], cualquier código {verbatim} provoca errores misteriosos.
+\begin{frame}[fragile]
+ \frametitle{Primer Diapositiva}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ ¡Esto está en \verbatim!
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+</screen>
+
+</sect1>
+<sect1 label="A.3" id="Plantilla-tugboat">
+<title>Plantilla <literal>tugboat</literal></title>
+
+<para><citetitle>TUGboat</citetitle> es el diario del Grupo de Usuarios de &tex;,
+<ulink url="http://tug.org/TUGboat">http://tug.org/TUGboat</ulink>.
+</para>
+<screen>\documentclass{ltugboat} % para procedimientos ltugproc
+
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{ifpdf}
+\ifpdf
+ \usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,
+ urlcolor=black]{hyperref}
+\else
+ \usepackage{url}
+\fi
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Ejemplo de Articulo Regular \TUB\}
+
+% repetir información para cada autor.
+\author{First Last}
+\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
+\netaddress{user (at) ejemplo dot org}
+\personalURL{http://ejemplo.org/~user/}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% El resumen en ltugboat viene después de \maketitle.
+\begin{abstract}
+Este es un ejemplo del tema de un artículo \TUB{} ordinario.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introducción}
+
+Este es un artículo de ejemplo para \TUB, de
+\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
+
+Recomendamos el paquete graphicx para inclusión de imágenes y el
+paquete hyperref para urls activas (en la salida \acro{PDF}). \TUB\ se
+produce utilizando archivos \acro{PDF} exclusivamente, en la actualidad.
+
+Las clases \texttt{ltug*} proporcionan estas abreviaturas, entre muchas
+otras:
+
+{\small
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
+\BibTeX \CandT \CTAN \DTD \DVItoVDU \HTML
+\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \JoT \LAMSTeX \LaTeXe
+\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \pcMF \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas
+\PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS
+\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG
+\tug \UG \UNIX \VAX \VorTeX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+
+\Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag
+\careof \thinskip
+
+\acro{FRED} -&gt; {\sc fred} % ¡Por favor úselas!
+\cs{fred} -&gt; \fred
+\env{fred} -&gt; \begin{fred}
+\meta{fred} -&gt; &lt;fred&gt;
+\nth{n} -&gt; 1st, 2nd, ...
+\sfrac{3/4} -&gt; 3/4
+\booktitle{Libro de Fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+}
+
+Para mayor información, consulte el documento en ltubguid:
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat}
+
+Correo electrónico \verb|tugboat@tug.org| si incurre en problemas o tiene
+dudas.
+
+
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain} % recomendamos el estilo de bibliografía plain
+\nocite{book-minimal} % solo hace que la bibliografía no esté vacía
+\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib viene con BibTeX
+
+
+\makesignature % no en ltugproc
+\end{document}
+</screen>
+<!-- begin vincentb1 -->
+</sect1>
+</appendix>
+<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
+<appendix label="B" id="License-translation">
+<title>Traducción de la licencia</title>
+
+<para>La traducción que sigue es dada únicamente como informaciòn, y no
+reemplaza el texto en inglés dado al principio de este documento.
+<!-- end vincentb1 -->
+</para>
+<para>Se concede permiso para hacer y distribuir copias literales de este
+manual siempre que el aviso de copyright y esta nota de permiso se
+conserven en todas las copias.
+</para>
+
+<para>Se concede permiso para copiar y distribuir versiones modificadas de
+este manual bajo las condiciones para una copia literal, a condición de
+que todo el trabajo derivado resultante se distribuya bajo los términos
+de una nota de permiso idéntica a ésta.
+</para>
+<para>Se concede permiso para copiar y distribuir traducciones de este manual
+a otro idioma, con las condiciones anteriores para versiones
+modificadas.
+</para>
+</appendix>
+<chapter label="" id="_00cdndice-de-Conceptos">
+<title>Índice de Conceptos</title>
+
+<index role="cp"></index>
+
+<!-- El nombre del nodo `Índice de Instrucciones' NO se debe alterar para -->
+<!-- ltx-help.el. -->
+</chapter>
+<chapter label="" id="_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones">
+<title>Índice de Instrucciones</title>
+
+<index role="fn"></index>
+
+</chapter>
+</book>
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.html b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..57e0499845
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.html
@@ -0,0 +1,11882 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
+<html>
+<!-- Este documento es un manual de referencia extraoficial para LaTeX, un
+sistema de preparación de documentos, para la
+versión de Julio 2010.
+
+Esto se tradujo originalmente del archivo LATEX.HLP v1.0a de la
+Biblioteca de Ayuda VMS. La versión pretraducción fue escrita por
+George D. Greenwade de Sam Houston State University. La versión de
+LaTeX 2.09 fue escrita por Stephen Gilmore. La versión de
+LaTeX2e fue adaptada por Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry hizo la
+actualización y posteriores adiciones, y reconoce su agradecimiento a la
+utilización de Hypertext Help con LaTeX, por Sheldon Green, y
+del LaTeX Command Summary (para
+LaTeX 2.09) por L. Botway y C. Biemesderfer (publicada por
+el Grupo de Usuarios TeX como TeXniques número 10), como
+material de referencia (no se copió texto directamente).
+
+Copyright 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 Nacho Pacheco -Traducción.
+
+Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 Karl Berry.
+
+Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
+
+Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
+
+A continuación se encuentra la licencia bajo la cual es
+distribuido este manual, una traducción lo es dada en
+anexo, ver License translation.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. -->
+<!-- Created by GNU Texinfo 6.1, http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ -->
+<head>
+<title>LaTeX2e Manual de Referencia (Julio 2010)</title>
+
+<meta name="description" content="LaTeX2e Manual de Referencia (Julio 2010)">
+<meta name="keywords" content="LaTeX2e Manual de Referencia (Julio 2010)">
+<meta name="resource-type" content="document">
+<meta name="distribution" content="global">
+<meta name="Generator" content="makeinfo">
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8">
+<link href="#Top" rel="start" title="Top">
+<link href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" rel="index" title="Índice de Conceptos">
+<link href="#SEC_Contents" rel="contents" title="Table of Contents">
+<link href="http://tug.org/texinfohtml/" rel="up" title="(dir)">
+<style type="text/css">
+<!--
+a.summary-letter {text-decoration: none}
+blockquote.indentedblock {margin-right: 0em}
+blockquote.smallindentedblock {margin-right: 0em; font-size: smaller}
+blockquote.smallquotation {font-size: smaller}
+div.display {margin-left: 3.2em}
+div.example {margin-left: 3.2em}
+div.lisp {margin-left: 3.2em}
+div.smalldisplay {margin-left: 3.2em}
+div.smallexample {margin-left: 3.2em}
+div.smalllisp {margin-left: 3.2em}
+kbd {font-style: oblique}
+pre.display {font-family: inherit}
+pre.format {font-family: inherit}
+pre.menu-comment {font-family: serif}
+pre.menu-preformatted {font-family: serif}
+pre.smalldisplay {font-family: inherit; font-size: smaller}
+pre.smallexample {font-size: smaller}
+pre.smallformat {font-family: inherit; font-size: smaller}
+pre.smalllisp {font-size: smaller}
+span.nolinebreak {white-space: nowrap}
+span.roman {font-family: initial; font-weight: normal}
+span.sansserif {font-family: sans-serif; font-weight: normal}
+ul.no-bullet {list-style: none}
+-->
+</style>
+
+
+</head>
+
+<body lang="es">
+<h1 class="settitle" align="center">LaTeX2e Manual de Referencia (Julio 2010)</h1>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<a name="SEC_Overview"></a>
+<h2 class="shortcontents-heading">Short Table of Contents</h2>
+
+<div class="shortcontents">
+<ul class="no-bullet">
+<li><a name="stoc-Acerca-de-este-documento-1" href="#toc-Acerca-de-este-documento-1">1 Acerca de este documento</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Descripcion-de-LaTeX" href="#toc-Descripcion-de-LaTeX">2 Descripción de LaTeX</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Iniciando-y-Finalizando-1" href="#toc-Iniciando-y-Finalizando-1">3 Iniciando y Finalizando</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Clases-de-Documento-1" href="#toc-Clases-de-Documento-1">4 Clases de Documento</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Tipos-de-Letra-1" href="#toc-Tipos-de-Letra-1">5 Tipos de Letra</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Diseno" href="#toc-Diseno">6 Diseño</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Seccionado-1" href="#toc-Seccionado-1">7 Seccionado</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Referencias-Cruzadas-1" href="#toc-Referencias-Cruzadas-1">8 Referencias Cruzadas</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Entornos-1" href="#toc-Entornos-1">9 Entornos</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Saltos-de-Linea" href="#toc-Saltos-de-Linea">10 Saltos de Línea</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Saltos-de-Pagina" href="#toc-Saltos-de-Pagina">11 Saltos de Página</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Notas-al-Pie-1" href="#toc-Notas-al-Pie-1">12 Notas al Pie</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Definiciones-1" href="#toc-Definiciones-1">13 Definiciones</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Contadores-1" href="#toc-Contadores-1">14 Contadores</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Longitudes-1" href="#toc-Longitudes-1">15 Longitudes</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Haciendo-Parrafos" href="#toc-Haciendo-Parrafos">16 Haciendo Párrafos</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Formulas-Matematicas" href="#toc-Formulas-Matematicas">17 Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Modos-1" href="#toc-Modos-1">18 Modos</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Estilos-de-Pagina" href="#toc-Estilos-de-Pagina">19 Estilos de Página</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Espacios-1" href="#toc-Espacios-1">20 Espacios</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Cajas-1" href="#toc-Cajas-1">21 Cajas</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Inserciones-Especiales-1" href="#toc-Inserciones-Especiales-1">22 Inserciones Especiales</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Dividiendo-la-Entrada-1" href="#toc-Dividiendo-la-Entrada-1">23 Dividiendo la Entrada</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada-1" href="#toc-Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada-1">24 Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Cartas-1" href="#toc-Cartas-1">25 Cartas</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal-1" href="#toc-Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal-1">26 Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Linea-de-Ordenes" href="#toc-Linea-de-Ordenes">27 Línea de Órdenes</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Plantillas-de-Documento-1" href="#toc-Plantillas-de-Documento-1">Appendix A Plantillas de Documento</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Traduccion-de-la-licencia" href="#toc-Traduccion-de-la-licencia">Appendix B Traducción de la licencia</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Indice-de-Conceptos" href="#toc-Indice-de-Conceptos">Índice de Conceptos</a></li>
+<li><a name="stoc-Indice-de-Instrucciones" href="#toc-Indice-de-Instrucciones">Índice de Instrucciones</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+
+<a name="SEC_Contents"></a>
+<h2 class="contents-heading">Table of Contents</h2>
+
+<div class="contents">
+
+<ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Acerca-de-este-documento-1" href="#Acerca-de-este-documento">1 Acerca de este documento</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Descripcion-de-LaTeX" href="#Descripci_00f3n">2 Descripción de LaTeX</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Iniciando-y-Finalizando-1" href="#Iniciando-y-Finalizando">3 Iniciando y Finalizando</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Clases-de-Documento-1" href="#Clases-de-Documento">4 Clases de Documento</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento-1" href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">4.1 Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Tipos-de-Letra-1" href="#Tipos-de-Letra">5 Tipos de Letra</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra-1" href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">5.1 Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Tamanos-del-Tipo-de-Letra" href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">5.2 Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra-1" href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">5.3 Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Diseno" href="#Dise_00f1o">6 Diseño</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005conecolumn-1" href="#g_t_005conecolumn">6.1 <code>\onecolumn</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ctwocolumn-1" href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">6.2 <code>\twocolumn</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cflushbottom-1" href="#g_t_005cflushbottom">6.3 <code>\flushbottom</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005craggedbottom-1" href="#g_t_005craggedbottom">6.4 <code>\raggedbottom</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Parametros-para-el-Diseno-de-Pagina" href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">6.5 Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Seccionado-1" href="#Seccionado">7 Seccionado</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Referencias-Cruzadas-1" href="#Referencias-Cruzadas">8 Referencias Cruzadas</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005clabel-1" href="#g_t_005clabel">8.1 <code>\label</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cpageref_007bclave_007d" href="#g_t_005cpageref">8.2 <code>\pageref{<var>clave</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cref_007bclave_007d" href="#g_t_005cref">8.3 <code>\ref{<var>clave</var>}</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Entornos-1" href="#Entornos">9 Entornos</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-abstract-1" href="#abstract">9.1 <code>abstract</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-array-1" href="#array">9.2 <code>array</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-center-1" href="#center">9.3 <code>center</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ccentering-1" href="#g_t_005ccentering">9.3.1 <code>\centering</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-description-1" href="#description">9.4 <code>description</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-displaymath-1" href="#displaymath">9.5 <code>displaymath</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-document-1" href="#document">9.6 <code>document</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-enumerate-1" href="#enumerate">9.7 <code>enumerate</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-eqnarray-1" href="#eqnarray">9.8 <code>eqnarray</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-equation-1" href="#equation">9.9 <code>equation</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-figure-1" href="#figure">9.10 <code>figure</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-filecontents_003a-Crear-un-archivo-externo" href="#filecontents">9.11 <code>filecontents</code>: Crear un archivo externo</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-flushleft-1" href="#flushleft">9.12 <code>flushleft</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005craggedright-1" href="#g_t_005craggedright">9.12.1 <code>\raggedright</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-flushright-1" href="#flushright">9.13 <code>flushright</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005craggedleft-1" href="#g_t_005craggedleft">9.13.1 <code>\raggedleft</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-itemize-1" href="#itemize">9.14 <code>itemize</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Entorno-letter_003a-Escribiendo-Cartas" href="#letter">9.15 Entorno <code>letter</code>: Escribiendo Cartas</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-list-1" href="#list">9.16 <code>list</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-math-1" href="#math">9.17 <code>math</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-minipage-1" href="#minipage">9.18 <code>minipage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-picture-1" href="#picture">9.19 <code>picture</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ccircle-1" href="#g_t_005ccircle">9.19.1 <code>\circle</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmakebox-1" href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">9.19.2 <code>\makebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cframebox" href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">9.19.3 <code>\framebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cdashbox-1" href="#g_t_005cdashbox">9.19.4 <code>\dashbox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cframe-1" href="#g_t_005cframe">9.19.5 <code>\frame</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cline-1" href="#g_t_005cline">9.19.6 <code>\line</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005clinethickness-1" href="#g_t_005clinethickness">9.19.7 <code>\linethickness</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cthicklines-1" href="#g_t_005cthicklines">9.19.8 <code>\thicklines</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cthinlines-1" href="#g_t_005cthinlines">9.19.9 <code>\thinlines</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmultiput-1" href="#g_t_005cmultiput">9.19.10 <code>\multiput</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005coval-1" href="#g_t_005coval">9.19.11 <code>\oval</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cput-1" href="#g_t_005cput">9.19.12 <code>\put</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cshortstack-1" href="#g_t_005cshortstack">9.19.13 <code>\shortstack</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cvector-1" href="#g_t_005cvector">9.19.14 <code>\vector</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-quotation-1" href="#quotation">9.20 <code>quotation</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-quote-1" href="#quote">9.21 <code>quote</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-tabbing-1" href="#tabbing">9.22 <code>tabbing</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-table-1" href="#table">9.23 <code>table</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-tabular-1" href="#tabular">9.24 <code>tabular</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmulticolumn-1" href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn">9.24.1 <code>\multicolumn</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ccline-1" href="#g_t_005ccline">9.24.2 <code>\cline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005chline-1" href="#g_t_005chline">9.24.3 <code>\hline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cvline-1" href="#g_t_005cvline">9.24.4 <code>\vline</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-thebibliography-1" href="#thebibliography">9.25 <code>thebibliography</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cbibitem-1" href="#g_t_005cbibitem">9.25.1 <code>\bibitem</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ccite-1" href="#g_t_005ccite">9.25.2 <code>\cite</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnocite-1" href="#g_t_005cnocite">9.25.3 <code>\nocite</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Usando-BibTeX-1" href="#Usando-BibTeX">9.25.4 Usando BibTeX</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-theorem-1" href="#theorem">9.26 <code>theorem</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-titlepage-1" href="#titlepage">9.27 <code>titlepage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-verbatim-1" href="#verbatim">9.28 <code>verbatim</code></a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cverb-1" href="#g_t_005cverb">9.28.1 <code>\verb</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-verse-1" href="#verse">9.29 <code>verse</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Saltos-de-Linea" href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea">10 Saltos de Línea</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c_005c_005b_002a_005d_005bmas_002despacio_005d" href="#g_t_005c_005c">10.1 <code>\\</code>[*][<var>más-espacio</var>]</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cobeycr-y-_005crestorecr-1" href="#g_t_005cobeycr-y-_005crestorecr">10.2 <code>\obeycr</code> y <code>\restorecr</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewline-1" href="#g_t_005cnewline">10.3 <code>\newline</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c_002d-_0028division-silabica-discrecional_0029" href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">10.4 <code>\-</code> (división silábica discrecional)</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfussy-1" href="#g_t_005cfussy">10.5 <code>\fussy</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csloppy-1" href="#g_t_005csloppy">10.6 <code>\sloppy</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005chyphenation-1" href="#g_t_005chyphenation">10.7 <code>\hyphenation</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005clinebreak-y-_005cnolinebreak-1" href="#g_t_005clinebreak-y-_005cnolinebreak">10.8 <code>\linebreak</code> y <code>\nolinebreak</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Saltos-de-Pagina" href="#Saltos-de-P_00e1gina">11 Saltos de Página</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ccleardoublepage-1" href="#g_t_005ccleardoublepage">11.1 <code>\cleardoublepage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cclearpage-1" href="#g_t_005cclearpage">11.2 <code>\clearpage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewpage-1" href="#g_t_005cnewpage">11.3 <code>\newpage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cenlargethispage-1" href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage">11.4 <code>\enlargethispage</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cpagebreak-y-_005cnopagebreak-1" href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-y-_005cnopagebreak">11.5 <code>\pagebreak</code> y <code>\nopagebreak</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Notas-al-Pie-1" href="#Notas-al-Pie">12 Notas al Pie</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfootnote-1" href="#g_t_005cfootnote">12.1 <code>\footnote</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfootnotemark-1" href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">12.2 <code>\footnotemark</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfootnotetext-1" href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext">12.3 <code>\footnotetext</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Notas-al-Pie-Simbolicas" href="#Notas-al-Pie-Simb_00f3licas">12.4 Notas al Pie Simbólicas</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Parametros-para-Footnote" href="#Par_00e1metros-para-Footnote">12.5 Parámetros para Footnote</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Definiciones-1" href="#Definiciones">13 Definiciones</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand-1" href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand">13.1 <code>\newcommand</code> y <code>\renewcommand</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewcounter-1" href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">13.2 <code>\newcounter</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewlength-1" href="#g_t_005cnewlength">13.3 <code>\newlength</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewsavebox-1" href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox">13.4 <code>\newsavebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment-1" href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment">13.5 <code>\newenvironment</code> y <code>\renewenvironment</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewtheorem-1" href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">13.6 <code>\newtheorem</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnewfont-1" href="#g_t_005cnewfont">13.7 <code>\newfont</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cprotect-1" href="#g_t_005cprotect">13.8 <code>\protect</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Contadores-1" href="#Contadores">14 Contadores</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol_003a-Imprimiendo-Contadores" href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">14.1 <code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Imprimiendo Contadores</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cusecounter_007bcontador_007d" href="#g_t_005cusecounter">14.2 <code>\usecounter{<var>contador</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cvalue_007bcontador_007d" href="#g_t_005cvalue">14.3 <code>\value{<var>contador</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csetcounter_007b_005ccontador_007d_007bvalor_007d" href="#g_t_005csetcounter">14.4 <code>\setcounter{<var>\contador</var>}{<var>valor</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005caddtocounter_007bcontador_007d_007bvalor_007d" href="#g_t_005caddtocounter">14.5 <code>\addtocounter{<var>contador</var>}{<var>valor</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005crefstepcounter_007bcontador_007d" href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter">14.6 <code>\refstepcounter{<var>contador</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cstepcounter_007bcontador_007d" href="#g_t_005cstepcounter">14.7 <code>\stepcounter{<var>contador</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear_003a-Contadores-Predefinidos" href="#g_t_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear">14.8 <code>\day \month \year</code>: Contadores Predefinidos</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Longitudes-1" href="#Longitudes">15 Longitudes</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csetlength_007b_005clargo_007d_007bvalor_007d" href="#g_t_005csetlength">15.1 <code>\setlength{\<var>largo</var>}{<var>valor</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005caddtolength_007b_005clargo_007d_007bcantidad_007d" href="#g_t_005caddtolength">15.2 \addtolength{<var>\largo</var>}{<var>cantidad</var>}</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csettodepth-1" href="#g_t_005csettodepth">15.3 <code>\settodepth</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csettoheight-1" href="#g_t_005csettoheight">15.4 <code>\settoheight</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csettowidth_007b_005clargo_007d_007btexto_007d" href="#g_t_005csettowidth">15.5 <code>\settowidth{\<var>largo</var>}{<var>texto</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Longitudes-Predeterminadas-1" href="#Longitudes-Predeterminadas">15.6 Longitudes Predeterminadas</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Haciendo-Parrafos" href="#Haciendo-P_00e1rrafos">16 Haciendo Párrafos</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cindent-1" href="#g_t_005cindent">16.1 <code>\indent</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cnoindent-1" href="#g_t_005cnoindent">16.2 <code>\noindent</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cparskip-1" href="#g_t_005cparskip">16.3 <code>\parskip</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Notas-al-Margen-1" href="#Notas-al-Margen">16.4 Notas al Margen</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Formulas-Matematicas" href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">17 Fórmulas Matemáticas</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Subindices-y-Superindices" href="#Sub_00edndices-y-Super_00edndices">17.1 Subíndices y Superíndices</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Simbolos-Matematicos" href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">17.2 Símbolos Matemáticos</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Funciones-Matematicas" href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">17.3 Funciones Matemáticas</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Acentos-Matematicos" href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">17.4 Acentos Matemáticos</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Espacios-en-Modo-Math-1" href="#Espacios-en-Modo-Math">17.5 Espacios en Modo Math</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Miscelanea-Math" href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">17.6 Miscelánea Math</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Modos-1" href="#Modos">18 Modos</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Estilos-de-Pagina" href="#Estilos-de-P_00e1gina">19 Estilos de Página</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmaketitle-1" href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">19.1 <code>\maketitle</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cpagenumbering-1" href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering">19.2 <code>\pagenumbering</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cpagestyle-1" href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">19.3 <code>\pagestyle</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cthispagestyle_007bestilo_007d" href="#g_t_005cthispagestyle">19.4 <code>\thispagestyle{<var>estilo</var>}</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Espacios-1" href="#Espacios">20 Espacios</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005chspace-1" href="#g_t_005chspace">20.1 <code>\hspace</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005chfill-1" href="#g_t_005chfill">20.2 <code>\hfill</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cSPACE-1" href="#g_t_005cSPACE">20.3 <code>\SPACE</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c_0040" href="#g_t_005cAT">20.4 <code>\@</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cthinspace-1" href="#g_t_005cthinspace">20.5 <code>\thinspace</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005c_002f-1" href="#g_t_005c_002f">20.6 <code>\/</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005chrulefill-1" href="#g_t_005chrulefill">20.7 <code>\hrulefill</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cdotfill-1" href="#g_t_005cdotfill">20.8 <code>\dotfill</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005caddvspace-1" href="#g_t_005caddvspace">20.9 <code>\addvspace</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip-1" href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip">20.10 <code>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cvfill-1" href="#g_t_005cvfill">20.11 <code>\vfill</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cvspace_005b_002a_005d_007blongitud_007d" href="#g_t_005cvspace">20.12 <code>\vspace[*]{<var>longitud</var>}</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Cajas-1" href="#Cajas">21 Cajas</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmbox_007btexto_007d" href="#g_t_005cmbox">21.1 <code>\mbox{<var>texto}</var></code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cfbox-y-_005cframebox-1" href="#g_t_005cfbox-y-_005cframebox">21.2 <code>\fbox</code> y <code>\framebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-lrbox-1" href="#lrbox">21.3 <code>lrbox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmakebox-2" href="#g_t_005cmakebox">21.4 <code>\makebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cparbox-1" href="#g_t_005cparbox">21.5 <code>\parbox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005craisebox-1" href="#g_t_005craisebox">21.6 <code>\raisebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csavebox-1" href="#g_t_005csavebox">21.7 <code>\savebox</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csbox_007b_005cinstruccion_002dcaja_007d_007btexto_007d" href="#g_t_005csbox">21.8 <code>\sbox{<var>\instrucción-caja</var>}{<var>texto</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cusebox_007b_005cinstruccion_002dcaja_007d" href="#g_t_005cusebox">21.9 <code>\usebox{<var>\instrucción-caja</var>}</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Inserciones-Especiales-1" href="#Inserciones-Especiales">22 Inserciones Especiales</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Caracteres-Reservados-1" href="#Caracteres-Reservados">22.1 Caracteres Reservados</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Simbolos-de-Texto" href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">22.2 Símbolos de Texto</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Acentos-1" href="#Acentos">22.3 Acentos</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Caracteres-no-Ingleses-1" href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">22.4 Caracteres no Ingleses</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005crule-1" href="#g_t_005crule">22.5 <code>\rule</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ctoday-1" href="#g_t_005ctoday">22.6 <code>\today</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Dividiendo-la-Entrada-1" href="#Dividiendo-la-Entrada">23 Dividiendo la Entrada</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cinclude-1" href="#g_t_005cinclude">23.1 <code>\include</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cincludeonly-1" href="#g_t_005cincludeonly">23.2 <code>\includeonly</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cinput-1" href="#g_t_005cinput">23.3 <code>\input</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada-1" href="#Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada">24 Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Tablas-de-Contenido-1" href="#Tablas-de-Contenido">24.1 Tablas de Contenido</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005caddcontentsline-1" href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">24.1.1 \addcontentsline</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005caddtocontents-1" href="#g_t_005caddtocontents">24.1.2 \addtocontents</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Glosarios-1" href="#Glosarios">24.2 Glosarios</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Indices" href="#g_t_00cdndices">24.3 Índices</a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Cartas-1" href="#Cartas">25 Cartas</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005caddress_007bdireccion_002ddel_002dremitente_007d" href="#g_t_005caddress">25.1 \address{<var>dirección-del-remitente}</var></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ccc-1" href="#g_t_005ccc">25.2 <code>\cc</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cclosing-1" href="#g_t_005cclosing">25.3 <code>\closing</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cencl-1" href="#g_t_005cencl">25.4 <code>\encl</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005clocation-1" href="#g_t_005clocation">25.5 <code>\location</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cmakelabels-1" href="#g_t_005cmakelabels">25.6 <code>\makelabels</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cname-1" href="#g_t_005cname">25.7 <code>\name</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005copening_007btexto_007d" href="#g_t_005copening">25.8 <code>\opening{<var>texto</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cps-1" href="#g_t_005cps">25.9 <code>\ps</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005csignature_007btexto_007d" href="#g_t_005csignature">25.10 <code>\signature{<var>texto</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cstartbreaks-1" href="#g_t_005cstartbreaks">25.11 <code>\startbreaks</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005cstopbreaks-1" href="#g_t_005cstopbreaks">25.12 <code>\stopbreaks</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ctelephone-1" href="#g_t_005ctelephone">25.13 <code>\telephone</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal-1" href="#Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal">26 Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ctypein_005binstruccion_005d_007bmensaje_007d" href="#g_t_005ctypein">26.1 <code>\typein[<var>instrucción</var>]{<var>mensaje</var>}</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-_005ctypeout_007bmensaje_007d" href="#g_t_005ctypeout">26.2 <code>\typeout{<var>mensaje</var>}</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Linea-de-Ordenes" href="#L_00ednea-de-_00d3rdenes">27 Línea de Órdenes</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Plantillas-de-Documento-1" href="#Plantillas-de-Documento">Appendix A Plantillas de Documento</a>
+ <ul class="no-bullet">
+ <li><a name="toc-Plantilla-book-1" href="#Plantilla-book">A.1 Plantilla <code>book</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Plantilla-beamer-1" href="#Plantilla-beamer">A.2 Plantilla <code>beamer</code></a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Plantilla-tugboat-1" href="#Plantilla-tugboat">A.3 Plantilla <code>tugboat</code></a></li>
+ </ul></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Traduccion-de-la-licencia" href="#License-translation">Appendix B Traducción de la licencia</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Indice-de-Conceptos" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos">Índice de Conceptos</a></li>
+ <li><a name="toc-Indice-de-Instrucciones" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones">Índice de Instrucciones</a></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+
+
+
+<a name="Top"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Acerca-de-este-documento" accesskey="n" rel="next">Acerca de este documento</a>, Up: <a href="http://tug.org/texinfohtml/" accesskey="u" rel="up">(dir)</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="LaTeX2e"></a>
+<h1 class="top">LaTeX2e</h1>
+
+<p>Este documento es un manual de referencia extraoficial para LaTeX, un
+sistema de preparación de documentos, versión Julio 2010. Este se
+pretende que cubra LaTeX2e, que ha sido la versión estándar de
+LaTeX por muchos años.
+</p>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Acerca-de-este-documento" accesskey="1">Acerca de este documento</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Acerca de este documento
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Descripci_00f3n" accesskey="2">Descripción</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">¿Qués es LaTeX?
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Iniciando-y-Finalizando" accesskey="3">Iniciando y Finalizando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">El principio y final estándar de un documento.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Clases-de-Documento" accesskey="4">Clases de Documento</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Algunas de las diferentes clases disponibles.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Tipos-de-Letra" accesskey="5">Tipos de Letra</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Y tipos de letra, como negrita, cursiva, etc.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Dise_00f1o" accesskey="6">Diseño</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Controlando el diseño de la página.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Seccionado" accesskey="7">Seccionado</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Cómo seccionar adecuadamente.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Referencias-Cruzadas" accesskey="8">Referencias Cruzadas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Referencias automáticas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="9">Entornos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Tal como enumerate e itemize.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea">Saltos de Línea</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Influyendo en los saltos de línea.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Saltos-de-P_00e1gina">Saltos de Página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Influyendo en los saltos de página.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Notas-al-Pie">Notas al Pie</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Cómo producir notas al pie.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Definiciones">Definiciones</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Definiendo sus propias instrucciones, etc.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Contadores">Contadores</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Contadores internos utilizados por LaTeX.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Longitudes">Longitudes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Las instrucciones de longitud.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Haciendo-P_00e1rrafos">Haciendo Párrafos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Instrucciones de Párrafo.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Cómo crear fórmulas matemáticas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Modos">Modos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Modos Párrafo, Matemáticas o de Escritura de Izquierda a Derecha.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Estilos-de-P_00e1gina">Estilos de Página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Varios estilos de diseño de página.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Espacios">Espacios</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Espacio horizontal y vertical.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Cajas">Cajas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Haciendo cajas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Inserciones-Especiales">Inserciones Especiales</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Insertando caracteres reservados y especiales.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Dividiendo-la-Entrada">Dividiendo la Entrada</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Manejo de archivos de gran tamaño mediante su fraccionamiento.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada">Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Tablas de contenido, glosarios, índices.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Cartas">Cartas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">La clase <code>letter</code>.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal">Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Interacción del usuario.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#L_00ednea-de-_00d3rdenes">Línea de Órdenes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Comportamiento independiente del sistema de la línea de órdenes.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Plantillas-de-Documento">Plantillas de Documento</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Principales plantillas para diversas clases de documento.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#License-translation">Traducción de la licencia</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Una traducciòn como informaciòn de la licencia.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos">Índice de Conceptos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Índice general.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones">Índice de Instrucciones</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Lista alfabética de instrucciones LaTeX.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Acerca-de-este-documento"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Descripci_00f3n" accesskey="n" rel="next">Descripción</a>, Previous: <a href="#Top" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Top</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Acerca-de-este-documento-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">1 Acerca de este documento</h2>
+
+<a name="index-Knuth_002c-Donald-E_002e"></a>
+<a name="index-Lamport_002c-Leslie"></a>
+<a name="index-Equipo-del-Proyecto-LaTeX"></a>
+<p>LaTeX está implementado como un paquete de macros por
+Donald&nbsp;E.&nbsp;Knuth&rsquo;s para el programa de composición tipográfica
+TeX. LaTeX originalmente fue creado por Leslie Lamport; este
+ahora es mantenido por un grupo de voluntarios en
+(<a href="http://latex-project.org">http://latex-project.org</a>). La documentación oficial escrita por
+el proyecto LaTeX está disponible allí.
+</p>
+<a name="index-informes-de-errores"></a>
+<a name="index-latexrefman_002ddiscuss_0040gna_002eorg-direccion-de-correo-electronico"></a>
+<p>Una vez más, el presente documento no es oficial y no ha sido revisado
+por los responsables del proyecto LaTeX.
+No enviar informes de error o cualquier otra cosa sobre este documento a
+ellos. En su lugar, por favor, envíe todos comentarios a
+<a href="mailto:latexrefman-discuss@gna.org">latexrefman-discuss@gna.org</a>.
+</p>
+<p>La página principal de este documento es
+<a href="http://home.gna.org/latexrefman">http://home.gna.org/latexrefman</a>. Esa página tiene enlaces al
+resultado actual de la compilación de este documento en varios formatos,
+a fuentes, a listas de correo, y a otros infraestructura.
+</p>
+<p>Por supuesto, hay muchas otras muchas fuentes de información sobre,
+LaTeX. Éstos son algunos de ellos:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><a href="http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr">http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr</a></dt>
+<dd><p>Dos páginas de referencias recomendadas a LaTeX documentación.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><a href="http://www.ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc">http://www.ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc</a></dt>
+<dd><p>Escribir su primer documento, con un poco de texto y matemáticas.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><a href="http://www.ctan.org/pkg/usrguide">http://www.ctan.org/pkg/usrguide</a></dt>
+<dd><p>La guía para los autores de documentos mantenidos como parte de LaTeX; hay
+varios otros.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><a href="http://tug.org/begin.html">http://tug.org/begin.html</a></dt>
+<dd><p>Introducción al TeX sistema, incluyendo LaTeX.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Descripci_00f3n"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Iniciando-y-Finalizando" accesskey="n" rel="next">Iniciando y Finalizando</a>, Previous: <a href="#Acerca-de-este-documento" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Acerca de este documento</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Descripcion-de-LaTeX"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">2 Descripción de LaTeX</h2>
+
+<a name="index-descripcion-de-LaTeX"></a>
+<a name="index-LaTeX_002c-descripcion"></a>
+
+<p>Las instrucciones LaTeX componen tipográficamente un archivo de texto
+usando el programa TeX y el &ldquo;paquete de macros&rdquo; LaTeX para
+TeX. Para ser más específicos, este procesa un archivo de entrada que
+contiene el texto de un documento con instrucciones intercaladas que
+describen cómo se debe dar formato al texto.
+Este produce al menos tres archivos de salida:
+</p>
+<ol>
+<li> Un archivo de salida principal, que es uno de:
+
+<ol>
+<li> Si se invoca como <code>latex</code>, un archivo &ldquo;independiente del
+dispositivo&rdquo; (<samp>.dvi</samp>). Este contiene las instrucciones que se
+pueden traducir en órdenes para una variedad de dispositivos de salida.
+Usted puede ver estos archivos <samp>.dvi</samp> producidos por LaTeX
+utilizando un programa como <code>xdvi</code> (visualización directa) o
+<code>dvips</code> (los convierte a PostScript).
+
+</li><li> Si es invocado como <code>pdflatex</code>, produce un archivo de
+&ldquo;Documento de Formato Portátil&rdquo; (<samp>.pdf</samp>). Normalmente, este es
+un archivo autocontenido, con todos los tipos de letra e imágenes
+incrustadas. Este puede ser muy útil, pero hace que produzca un archivo
+mucho más grande que el <samp>.dvi</samp> producido a partir del mismo
+documento.
+</li></ol>
+
+<p>Existen otras variantes menos comunes de LaTeX (y TeX), de modo
+que puede producir HTML, XML y otras cosas.
+</p>
+</li><li> Un archivo de&ldquo;transcripción&rdquo; o <samp>.log</samp> que contiene información
+resumida y mensajes de diagnóstico para cualquier error descubierto en el
+archivo de entrada.
+
+</li><li> Un archivo &ldquo;auxiliar&rdquo; o <samp>.aux</samp>. Este es usado por LaTeX mismo,
+para diversas cosas como el seccionado.
+</li></ol>
+
+<p>Una instrucción LaTeX comienza con el nombre de la instrucción, la
+cual consiste de una <code>\</code> seguida por o bien (a)&nbsp;una cadena de
+letras o (b)&nbsp;un único carácter no letra. Los argumentos que
+figuran entre corchetes, <code>[]</code>, son opcionales, mientras que los
+argumentos contenidos entre llaves, <code>{}</code>, son obligatorios.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX es sensible a mayúsculas y minúsculas. Cuando ingresa
+instrucciones, use la caja de letras propia a cada
+instrucción &mdash; tradicionalmente es minúsculas.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Iniciando-y-Finalizando"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Clases-de-Documento" accesskey="n" rel="next">Clases de Documento</a>, Previous: <a href="#Descripci_00f3n" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Descripción</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Iniciando-y-Finalizando-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">3 Iniciando y Finalizando</h2>
+
+<a name="index-iniciando-y-finalizando"></a>
+<a name="index-finalizando-e-iniciando"></a>
+
+<p>Un archivo de entrada mínimo tiene el siguiente aspecto:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{<var>clase</var>}
+\begin{document}
+<var>su texto</var>
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>donde <var>clase</var> es una clase de documento válida para LaTeX.
+See <a href="#Clases-de-Documento">Clases de Documento</a>, para detalles de varias clases de documento
+disponibles localmente.
+</p>
+<a name="index-preambulo_002c-definido"></a>
+<p>Usted puede incluir otras instrucciones LaTeX entre las instrucciones
+<code>\documentclass</code> y <code>\begin{document}</code> (esta área se llama el
+<em>preámbulo</em>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Clases-de-Documento"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Tipos-de-Letra" accesskey="n" rel="next">Tipos de Letra</a>, Previous: <a href="#Iniciando-y-Finalizando" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Iniciando y Finalizando</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Clases-de-Documento-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">4 Clases de Documento</h2>
+
+<a name="index-clases-de-documento"></a>
+<a name="index-clases-de-documentos"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cdocumentclass"></a>
+
+<p>La clase de un determinado documento se define con la instrucción:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass[<var>opciones</var>]{<var>clase</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\documentclass</code> debe ser la primer instrucción en un
+archivo fuente LaTeX.
+</p>
+<a name="index-clase-article"></a>
+<a name="index-clase-report"></a>
+<a name="index-clase-book"></a>
+<a name="index-clase-letter"></a>
+<a name="index-clase-slides"></a>
+<p>Los nombres integrados de <var>clases</var> de documento LaTeX (muchas
+otras clases de documento están disponibles como complementos;
+see <a href="#Descripci_00f3n">Descripción</a>):
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">article report book letter slides
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<p>Las <var>opciones</var> estándar están descritas más adelante.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento" accesskey="1">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Opciones globales.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#Clases-de-Documento" accesskey="u" rel="up">Clases de Documento</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">4.1 Opciones de Clase de Documento</h3>
+
+<a name="index-opciones-de-clase-de-documento"></a>
+<a name="index-opciones_002c-clase-de-documento"></a>
+<a name="index-opciones-de-clase"></a>
+<a name="index-opciones-globales"></a>
+
+<p>Usted puede especificar las así llamadas <em>opciones globales</em> u
+<em>opciones de clase</em> en la instrucción <code>\documentclass</code>
+encerrándolas entre corchetes de la manera usual. Para especificar más
+de una <var>opción</var>, deberá separarlas con una coma:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass[<var>opción1</var>,<var>opción2</var>,...]{<var>clase</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Esta es la lista de las opciones de clase estándar.
+</p>
+<a name="index-opcion-10pt"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-11pt"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-12pt"></a>
+<p>Todas las clases estándar salvo <code>slides</code> aceptan las siguientes
+opciones para seleccionar el tamaño del tipo de letra (el predeterminado
+es <code>10pt</code>):
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">10pt 11pt 12pt
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-opcion-a4paper"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-a5paper"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-b5paper"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-executivepaper"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-legalpaper"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-letterpaper"></a>
+<p>Todas las clases estándar aceptan estas opciones para seleccionar el
+tamaño del papel (el predeterminado es <code>letterpaper</code>):
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-opcion-draft"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-final"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-fleqn"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-landscape"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-leqno"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-openbib"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-titlepage"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-notitlepage"></a>
+<p>Otras opciones diversas:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>draft, final</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-omitiendo_002c-cajas-negras"></a>
+<p>marca/no marca el desbordamiento de cajas con una gran caja negra; el
+predeterminado es <code>final</code>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>fleqn</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Coloca las fórmulas mostradas alineadas a la izquierda; el
+predeterminado es centrado.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>landscape</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Selecciona el formato apaisado; el predeterminado es vertical.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>leqno</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Coloca los números de ecuación en el lado izquierdo de las ecuaciones;
+el predeterminado es el lado derecho.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>openbib</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Usa el formato de bibliografía &ldquo;abierto&rdquo;.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>titlepage, notitlepage</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Especifica si la página de título es independiente; de manera
+predeterminada depende de la clase.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Estas opciones no están disponibles con la clase <code>slides</code>:
+</p>
+<a name="index-opcion-onecolumn"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-twocolumn"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-oneside"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-twoside"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-openright"></a>
+<a name="index-opcion-openany"></a>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>onecolumn</code></dt>
+<dt><code>twocolumn</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Composición tipográfica en una o dos columnas; el predeterminado es
+<code>onecolumn</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>oneside</code></dt>
+<dt><code>twoside</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cevensidemargin"></a>
+<a name="index-_005coddsidemargin"></a>
+<p>Selecciona el diseño de una o dos caras; el predeterminado es
+<code>oneside</code>, excepto para la clase <code>book</code>.
+</p>
+<p>El parámetro <code>\evensidemargin</code> (<code>\oddsidemargin</code>) determina la
+distancia en páginas par (impar) numeradas entre el lado izquierdo de la
+página y el margen excedente del texto. Los valores predeterminados
+varían con el tamaño del papel y si el diseño seleccionado es de uno o
+dos lados. Para imprimir texto en un lado es centrado, para dos lados,
+<code>\oddsidemargin</code> es 40% de la diferencia entre <code>\paperwidth</code> y
+<code>\textwidth</code> con el resto de <code>\evensidemargin</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>openright</code></dt>
+<dt><code>openany</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Determina si un capítulo debe iniciar en una página del lado derecho;
+para <code>book</code>, el predeterminado es <code>openright</code>.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>La clase <code>slides</code> ofrece la opción <code>clock</code> para imprimir la
+hora en la parte inferior de cada nota.
+</p>
+
+<a name="index-paquetes_002c-cargando"></a>
+<a name="index-cargando-paquetes-adicionales"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cusepackage"></a>
+<p>Los paquetes adicionales se cargan de la siguiente manera:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usepackage[<var>opciones</var>]{<var>paquete</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Para especificar más de un <var>paquete</var>, usted puede separarlos con una
+coma, o utilizar múltiples instrucciones<code>\usepackage</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-opciones-globales-1"></a>
+<a name="index-opciones_002c-globales"></a>
+<p>Cualquiera de las opciones que figuran en la instrucción
+<code>\documentclass</code> que no son conocidas por la clase de documento
+seleccionada son transmitidas a los paquetes cargados con
+<code>\usepackage</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Tipos-de-Letra"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Dise_00f1o" accesskey="n" rel="next">Diseño</a>, Previous: <a href="#Clases-de-Documento" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Clases de Documento</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Tipos-de-Letra-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">5 Tipos de Letra</h2>
+
+<a name="index-Tipos-de-Letra"></a>
+<a name="index-tipos-de-letra"></a>
+
+<p>Dos aspectos importantes de la selección de un <em>tipo de letra</em> son
+la especificación del tamaño y del estilo. Las
+instrucciones LaTeX para hacer esto se describen a continuación.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra" accesskey="1">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Seleccionar romana, cursiva, etc.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra" accesskey="2">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Seleccionando el tamaño del punto.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra" accesskey="3">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Seleccionando codificación, familia, series, apariencia.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra" accesskey="n" rel="next">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a>, Up: <a href="#Tipos-de-Letra" accesskey="u" rel="up">Tipos de Letra</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">5.1 Estilos del Tipo de Letra</h3>
+
+<a name="index-estilos-del-tipo-de-letra"></a>
+<a name="index-estilos-de-tipografia"></a>
+<a name="index-estilos-de-texto"></a>
+
+<p>Las siguientes instrucciones para el estilo del tipo de letra son
+compatibles con LaTeX.
+</p>
+<p>Este primer grupo de instrucciones se utiliza normalmente con un
+argumento, como en <code>\textit{texto en cursiva}</code>. En la
+siguiente tabla, las instrucciones correspondientes
+entre paréntesis son la &ldquo;forma declarativa&rdquo;, la cual no toma
+argumentos. El ámbito de aplicación de la forma declarativa dura hasta la siguiente instucción para el
+estilo del tipo de letra o hasta el final del grupo actual.
+</p>
+<p>Estos commandos, tanto en las formas con argumento o en
+las formas declarativas, son
+acumulativas; es decir, usted puede decir ya sea
+<code>\sffamily\bfseries</code> o <code>\bfseries\sffamily</code> para obtener sans
+serif en negrita.
+</p>
+<p>También puede utilizar la forma de entorno de las formas declarativas;
+por ejemplo, <code>\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Estas instrucciones proporcionan automáticamente una corrección en
+cursiva si es necesario.
+</p><dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\textrm (\rmfamily)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextrm"></a>
+<a name="index-_005crmfamily"></a>
+<p>Romana.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textit (\itshape)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextit"></a>
+<a name="index-_005citshape"></a>
+<p>cursivas.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\emph</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cemph"></a>
+<a name="index-Enfasis"></a>
+<p>Énfasis (cambia entre <code>\textit</code> y <code>\textrm</code>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textmd (\mdseries)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextmd"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmdseries"></a>
+<p>Peso medio (predeterminado).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbf (\bfseries)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextbf"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cbfseries"></a>
+<p>Negrita.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\textup (\upshape)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextup"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cupshape"></a>
+<p>Vertical (predeterminado). Lo opuesto a inclinada.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\textsl (\slshape)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextsl"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cslshape"></a>
+<p>Oblicua.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\textsf (\sffamily)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextsf"></a>
+<a name="index-_005csffamily"></a>
+<p>Sans serif.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\textsc (\scshape)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextsc"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cscshape"></a>
+<p>Versales.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\texttt (\ttfamily)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctexttt"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cttfamily"></a>
+<p>Máquina de escribir.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\textnormal (\normalfont)</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ctextnormal"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnormalfont"></a>
+<p>Tipo de letra principal del documento.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\mathrm</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmathrm"></a>
+<p>Romana, para usar en modo math.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\mathbf</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmathbf"></a>
+<p>Negrita, para usarse en modo math.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\mathsf</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmathsf"></a>
+<p>Sans serif, para usarse en modo math.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\mathtt</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmathtt"></a>
+<p>Máquina de escribir, para usarse en modo math.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathit</code></dt>
+<dt><code>(\mit)</code></dt>
+<dd><p>cursivas, para utilizarse en modo math.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mathnormal</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmathnormal"></a>
+<p>Para usarse en modo math, por ejemplo dentro de otra declaración de
+estilo de letra.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\mathcal</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmathcal"></a>
+<p>Letras &lsquo;caligráficas&rsquo;, para usarse en modo math.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Además, la instrucción <code>\mathversion{bold}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmathversion"></a>
+<a name="index-matematicas_002c-negrita"></a>
+<a name="index-negrita-matematicas"></a>
+se pude utilizar para cambiar a letras y símbolos en negrita dentro de
+fórmulas. <code>\mathversion{normal}</code> restablece el valor
+predeterminado.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX también proporciona las siguientes
+instrucciones, que incondicionalmente cambian a determinado estilo, es
+decir, <em>no</em> son acumulativas. Estas se utilizan de forma diferente
+que las instrucciones anteriores, también: <code>{\<var>instrucción</var>
+...}</code> en lugar de <code>\<var>instrucción</var>{...}</code>. Son dos cosas muy
+distintas.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\bf</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbf"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-tipo-de-letra-negrita"></a>
+<p>Cambia a <b>tipo de letra negrita</b>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cal</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccal"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-letras-script-para-math"></a>
+<a name="index-letras-caligraficas-para-math"></a>
+<p>Cambia a letras caligráficas para math.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\em</code>
+<a name="index-_005cem"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-enfasis"></a>
+<p>Énfasis (cursivas con romana, romana con cursivas).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\it</code>
+<a name="index-_005cit"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-tipo-de-letra-cursiva"></a>
+<p>cursivas.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rm</code>
+<a name="index-_005crm"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-tipo-de-letra-romana"></a>
+<p>Romana.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sc</code>
+<a name="index-_005csc"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-tipo-de-letra-versales"></a>
+<p>Versales.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sf</code>
+<a name="index-_005csf"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-tipo-de-letra-sans-serif"></a>
+<p>Sans serif.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sl</code>
+<a name="index-_005csl"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-tipo-de-letra-oblicua"></a>
+<a name="index-tipo-de-letra-oblicua-1"></a>
+<p>Oblicua (oblicua).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tt</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctt"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-tipo-de-letra-de-maquina-de-escribir"></a>
+<a name="index-tipo-de-letra-monoespacio"></a>
+<a name="index-tipo-de-letra-de-ancho-fijo"></a>
+<p>Máquina de escribir (monoespacio, de ancho fijo).
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra" accesskey="n" rel="next">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a>, Previous: <a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a>, Up: <a href="#Tipos-de-Letra" accesskey="u" rel="up">Tipos de Letra</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Tamanos-del-Tipo-de-Letra"></a>
+<h3 class="section">5.2 Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</h3>
+<a name="index-tamanos-del-tipo-de-letra"></a>
+<a name="index-tamanos-del-tipo-de-letra-1"></a>
+<a name="index-tamano-del-texto"></a>
+
+<p>Las siguientes instrucciones para el tamaño del tipo de letra estándar
+son compatibles con LaTeX.
+La tabla muestra el nombre de la
+instrucción y el tamaño real (en puntos) del tipo de letra
+correspondiente utilizado con las opciones de tamaño del documento
+&lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo; y &lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo;, respectivamente (see <a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a> ).
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005ctiny"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cscriptsize"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cfootnotesize"></a>
+<a name="index-_005csmall"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnormalsize"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clarge"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cLarge"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cLARGE"></a>
+<a name="index-_005chuge"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cHuge"></a>
+
+<table>
+<thead><tr><th>Instrucción</th><th><code>10pt</code></th><th><code>11pt</code></th><th><code>12pt</code></th></tr></thead>
+<tr><td><code>\tiny</code></td><td>5</td><td>6</td><td>6</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\scriptsize</code></td><td>7</td><td>8</td><td>8</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\footnotesize</code></td><td>8</td><td>9</td><td>10</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\small</code></td><td>9</td><td>10</td><td>10.95</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\normalsize</code> (predeterminado)</td><td>10</td><td>10.95</td><td>12</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\large</code></td><td>12</td><td>12</td><td>14.4</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\Large</code></td><td>14.4</td><td>14.4</td><td>17.28</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\LARGE</code></td><td>14.4</td><td>14.4</td><td>17.28</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\huge</code></td><td>20.74</td><td>20.74</td><td>24.88</td></tr>
+<tr><td><code>\Huge</code></td><td>24.88</td><td>24.88</td><td>24.88</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<p>Las instrucciones tal como están listadas aquí son &ldquo;formas
+declarativas&rdquo;. El ámbito de aplicación de la forma declarativa dura
+hasta la instrucción &ldquo;end&rdquo; del estilo del tipo de letra o hasta el
+final del grupo actual. También puede utilizar la forma de entorno en
+estas instrucciones; por ejemplo, <code>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a>, Up: <a href="#Tipos-de-Letra" accesskey="u" rel="up">Tipos de Letra</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">5.3 Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</h3>
+<a name="index-Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra"></a>
+<a name="index-instrucciones-de-tipo-de-letra_002c-de-bajo-nivel"></a>
+
+<p>Estas instrucciones están destinadas principalmente para los escritores
+de macros y paquetes. Las instrucciones listadas anteriormente son sólo
+un subconjunto de las disponibles.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\fontencoding{codificación}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfontencoding"></a>
+<p>Selecciona la codificación del tipo de letra. Las codificaciones válidas
+incluyen a <code>OT1</code> y <code>T1</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\fontfamily{familia}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfontfamily"></a>
+<p>Selecciona la familia del tipo de letra. Las familias válidas incluyen:
+</p>
+<ul>
+<li> <code>cmr</code> para Romana de Computadora Moderna
+</li><li> <code>cmss</code> para Sans Serif de Computadora Moderna
+</li><li> <code>cmtt</code> para Máquina de Escribir de Computadora Moderna
+</li></ul>
+
+<p>y muchas otras.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\fontseries{series}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfontseries"></a>
+<p>Selecciona las series del tipo de letra. Las series válidas incluyen:
+</p>
+<ul>
+<li> <code>m</code> Mediana (normal)
+</li><li> <code>b</code> Negrita
+</li><li> <code>c</code> Condensada
+</li><li> <code>bc</code> Negrita condensada
+</li><li> <code>bx</code> Negrita extendida
+</li></ul>
+
+<p>y otras combinaciones diferentes.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\fontshape{forma}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfontshape"></a>
+<p>Selecciona la forma del tipo de letra. Las formas válidas son:
+</p>
+<ul>
+<li> <code>n</code> Vertical (normal)
+</li><li> <code>it</code> Cursiva
+</li><li> <code>sl</code> Oblicua (oblicua)
+</li><li> <code>sc</code> Versales
+</li><li> <code>ui</code> Cursiva vertical
+</li><li> <code>ol</code> Esquema
+</li></ul>
+
+<p>Las dos últimas formas no están disponibles para la mayoría de las familias de tipos de letra.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\fontsize{tamaño}{espaciado}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfontsize"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cbaselineskip"></a>
+<p>Establece el tamaño de letra. El primer parámetro es el tamaño a cambiar
+el tipo de letra y el segundo es el espaciado de línea a usar; este se
+almacena en un parámetro denominado <code>\baselineskip</code>. La unidad de
+ambos parámetros de manera predeterminada es pt. El valor
+predeterminado de <code>\baselineskip</code> para el tipo de letra Computadora
+Moderna es 1.2 veces <code>\fontsize</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cbaselinestretch"></a>
+<a name="index-paquete-setspace"></a>
+<a name="index-interlineado-doble"></a>
+<p>El interlineado de espacio doble también es multiplicado por el valor
+del parámetro <code>\baselinestretch</code> cuando cambia el tamaño del tipo
+de letra; el predeterminado es 1. Sin embargo, la mejor manera de hacer
+un documento con &ldquo;doble espacio&rdquo;, si tiene la suficiente mala suerte
+de tener que producirlo, es usar el paquete <code>setspace</code>; vea
+<a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace</a>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005clinespread"></a>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\linespread{<var>factor</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Equivalente a <code>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{<var>factor</var>}</code>,
+y por lo tanto debe estar seguido por <code>\selectfont</code> para que tenga
+algún efecto. Es mejor especificarlo en el preámbulo, o utilizar el
+paquete <code>setspace</code>, justo como se acaba de describir anteriormente.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cselectfont"></a>
+<p>Las modificaciones introducidas por llamar a la fuente de las
+instrucciones descritas anteriormente no entrará en vigor sino hasta que
+se invoque a <code>\selectfont</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\usefont{codificación}{familia}{series}{forma}</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cusefont"></a>
+<p>Lo mismo que invocar a <code>\fontencoding</code>, <code>\fontfamily</code>,
+<code>\fontseries</code> y <code>\fontshape</code> con los parámetros dados, seguida
+por <code>\selectfont</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Dise_00f1o"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Seccionado" accesskey="n" rel="next">Seccionado</a>, Previous: <a href="#Tipos-de-Letra" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Tipos de Letra</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Diseno"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">6 Diseño</h2>
+<a name="index-instrucciones-de-diseno"></a>
+
+<p>Varias instrucciones para controlar el diseño general de la página.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005conecolumn" accesskey="1">\onecolumn</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Utiliza un diseño de una columna.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn" accesskey="2">\twocolumn</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Utiliza un diseño de dos columanas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom" accesskey="3">\flushbottom</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Hace que todas las páginas del texto tengan la misma altura.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom" accesskey="4">\raggedbottom</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Permite que las páginas de texto tengan diferente altura.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="5">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top"><code>\headheight</code> <code>\footskip</code>.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005conecolumn"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn" accesskey="n" rel="next">\twocolumn</a>, Up: <a href="#Dise_00f1o" accesskey="u" rel="up">Diseño</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005conecolumn-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.1 <code>\onecolumn</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005conecolumn"></a>
+<a name="index-produce-una-columna"></a>
+
+<p>La declaración <code>\onecolumn</code> comienza una nueva página y la produce
+con una sola columna. Este es el valor predeterminado.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ctwocolumn"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom" accesskey="n" rel="next">\flushbottom</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005conecolumn" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\onecolumn</a>, Up: <a href="#Dise_00f1o" accesskey="u" rel="up">Diseño</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ctwocolumn-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.2 <code>\twocolumn</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005ctwocolumn"></a>
+<a name="index-texto-multicolumna"></a>
+<a name="index-produce-dos-columnas"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\twocolumn[<var>textocolumna1</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La declaración <code>\twocolumn</code> comienza una nueva página y la produce
+con dos columnas. Si el argumento opcional <var>textocolumna1</var> está
+presente, esta es compuesta en modo de una columna antes de comenzar la
+composición de las dos columnas.
+</p>
+<p>Estos parámetros controlan la tipografía en la producción de dos
+columnas:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\columnsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccolumnsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>La distancia entre las columnas (de manera predeterminada a 35pt).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\columnseprule</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccolumnseprule"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>El ancho de la regla entre columnas; el predeterminado es 0pt, por lo
+tanto no hay regla.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\columnwidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccolumnwidth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>El ancho de la columna actual; este es igual a <code>\textwidth</code>
+en texto de una sola columna.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Estos parámetros controlan el comportamiento de la flotación de las dos
+columnas producidas:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\dbltopfraction</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdbltopfraction"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Máxima fracción en la parte superior de una página de dos columna que
+pueden ocupar los flotantes. El predeterminado es &lsquo;<samp>.7</samp>&rsquo;, puede ser
+útil redefinirlo a (digamos) &lsquo;<samp>.9</samp>&rsquo; para evitar llegar tan pronto a
+páginas flotantes.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dblfloatpagefraction</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdblfloatpagefraction"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>La mínima fracción de una página con flotantes que deben ocupar los
+flotantes, para una página de dos columnas con flotantes. El
+predeterminado es &lsquo;<samp>.5</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dblfloatsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdblfloatsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Distancia entre flotantes en la parte superior o inferior de una página
+de dos columnas con flotantes. Predeterminado a &lsquo;<samp>12pt plus2pt
+minus2pt</samp>&rsquo; para &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo; y &lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo; para documentos, &lsquo;<samp>14pt
+plus2pt minus4pt</samp>&rsquo; para &lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dbltextfloatsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdbltextfloatsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Distancia entre un flotante multicolumna en la parte superior o inferior
+de una página y el texto principal. De manera predeterminada es
+&lsquo;<samp>20pt plus2pt minus4pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cflushbottom"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom" accesskey="n" rel="next">\raggedbottom</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\twocolumn</a>, Up: <a href="#Dise_00f1o" accesskey="u" rel="up">Diseño</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cflushbottom-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.3 <code>\flushbottom</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cflushbottom"></a>
+
+<p>La declaración <code>\flushbottom</code> hace que todas las páginas tengan la
+misma altura, añadiendo espacio vertical extra donde sea necesario para
+llenar la página.
+</p>
+<p>Este es el predeterminado si se selecciona el modo <code>twocolumn</code>
+(see <a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005craggedbottom"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="n" rel="next">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\flushbottom</a>, Up: <a href="#Dise_00f1o" accesskey="u" rel="up">Diseño</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005craggedbottom-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.4 <code>\raggedbottom</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005craggedbottom"></a>
+<a name="index-reduccion_002c-omitiendo-vertical"></a>
+
+<p>La declaración <code>\raggedbottom</code> hace que todas las páginas tengan la
+altura natural del material en esa página. Sin longitudes flexibles que
+se deban ajustar.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\raggedbottom</a>, Up: <a href="#Dise_00f1o" accesskey="u" rel="up">Diseño</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Parametros-para-el-Diseno-de-Pagina"></a>
+<h3 class="section">6.5 Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</h3>
+
+<a name="index-parametros-para-el-diseno-de-pagina"></a>
+<a name="index-parametros_002c-diseno-de-pagina"></a>
+<a name="index-diseno_002c-parametros-de-pagina-para"></a>
+<a name="index-header_002c-parametros-para"></a>
+<a name="index-footer_002c-parametros-para"></a>
+<a name="index-ejecutando-header-y-footer"></a>
+
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\headheight</code>
+<a name="index-_005cheadheight"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Altura de la caja que contiene el encabezado. El predeterminado es
+&lsquo;<samp>30pt</samp>&rsquo;, salvo en la clase <code>book</code>, donde este varía con el
+tamaño de letra.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\headsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cheadsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Distancia vertical entre la línea inferior de la cabecera y la parte
+superior del texto principal. El predeterminado es &lsquo;<samp>25pt</samp>&rsquo;, salvo
+en la clase <code>book</code>, donde este varía con el tamaño de letra.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\footskip</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfootskip"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Distancia desde la línea base de la última línea de texto a la línea
+base del pié de página. El predeterminado es &lsquo;<samp>30pt</samp>&rsquo;, salvo en la
+clase <code>book</code>, donde este varía con el tamaño de letra.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\linewidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005clinewidth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Ancho de la línea actual; el predeterminado varía con el tamaño de
+fuente, el ancho del papel, el modo two-column, etc. Para un documento
+<code>article</code> en &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo;, este se establece a &lsquo;<samp>345pt</samp>&rsquo;; en modo
+two-column, este cambia a &lsquo;<samp>229.5pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textheight</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextheight"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>La altura vertical normal del cuerpo de la página; el predeterminado
+varía con el tamaño de letra, clase de documento, etc. Para un
+documento <code>article</code> o <code>report</code> en &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo;, este se fija a
+&lsquo;<samp>43\baselineskip</samp>&rsquo;; para <code>book</code>, es &lsquo;<samp>41\baselineskip</samp>&rsquo;.
+Para &lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo;, es &lsquo;<samp>38\baselineskip</samp>&rsquo; y para &lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo;,
+&lsquo;<samp>36\baselineskip</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textwidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextwidth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>El ancho horizontal normal del cuerpo de la página; el predeterminado
+varía de la manera usual. Para un documento <code>article</code> o
+<code>report</code>, es &lsquo;<samp>345pt</samp>&rsquo; en &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>360pt</samp>&rsquo; en
+&lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo; y &lsquo;<samp>390pt</samp>&rsquo; en &lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo;. Para un documento
+<code>book</code>, es &lsquo;<samp>4.5in</samp>&rsquo; en &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo; y &lsquo;<samp>5in</samp>&rsquo; en &lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo;
+o &lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\topmargin</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctopmargin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Espacio entre la parte superior de la página TeX (de manera
+predeterminada, una pulgada en la parte superior del papel) y en la
+parte superior del encabezado. El predeterminado se calcula basándose
+en muchos otros parámetros: <code>\paperheight - 2in -
+\headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip</code>,
+y luego se divide entre dos.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\topskip</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctopskip"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>La distancia mínima entre la parte superior del cuerpo de la página y la
+línea base de la primer línea de texto. Para clases estándar, el
+predeterminado es el mismo que el tamaño de letra, por ejemplo,
+&lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo; en &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Seccionado"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Referencias-Cruzadas" accesskey="n" rel="next">Referencias Cruzadas</a>, Previous: <a href="#Dise_00f1o" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Diseño</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Seccionado-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">7 Seccionado</h2>
+<a name="index-seccionado"></a>
+
+<p>Las instrucciones de seccionado proporcionan los medios para estructurar
+su texto en unidades:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\part</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpart"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\chapter</code>
+<a name="index-_005cchapter"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>(únicamente las clases <code>report</code> y <code>book</code>)
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\section</code>
+<a name="index-_005csection"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\subsection</code>
+<a name="index-_005csubsection"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\subsubsection</code>
+<a name="index-_005csubsubsection"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\paragraph</code>
+<a name="index-_005cparagraph"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\subparagraph</code>
+<a name="index-_005csubparagraph"></a>
+</dt>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Todas las instrucciones de seccionado tienen la misma forma general, por
+ejemplo,
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\chapter[<var>títulobreve</var>]{<var>título</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Además de proporcionar el encabezado <var>título</var> en el texto principal,
+el título de la sección puede aparecer en otros dos lugares:
+</p>
+<ol>
+<li> La tabla de contenido.
+</li><li> El título breve en la parte superior de la página.
+</li></ol>
+
+<p>Tal vez no quiera el mismo texto en estos lugares como en el texto
+principal. Para controlar esto, las instrucciones de seccionado tienen
+un argumento opcional, <var>toctitle</var> que, cuando se proporciona,
+especifica el texto de esos otros lugares.
+</p>
+<a name="index-forma-con-_002a-de-instrucciones-de-seccionado"></a>
+<p>Además, todas las instrucciones de seccionado tienen formas con <code>*</code>
+que imprimen el <var>título</var> de la manera usual, pero no incluyen un
+número y no producen una entrada en la tabla de contenido. Por ejemplo:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\section*{Preámbulo}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005cappendix"></a>
+<a name="index-apendices_002c-creando"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\appendix</code> cambia la manera en que se numeran las
+siguientes unidades de sección. La instrucción <code>\appendix</code> en sí
+misma no genera texto y no afecta la númeración de las partes. El uso
+normal de esta instrucción es algo así como:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\chapter{Un Capítulo}
+&hellip;
+\appendix
+\chapter{El Primer Apéndice}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-contador-secnumdepth"></a>
+<a name="index-numeros-de-seccion_002c-imprimiendo"></a>
+<p>El contador <code>secnumdepth</code> controla la impresión de los números de
+sección. La configuración
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setcounter{secnumdepth}{<var>nivel</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>suprime los números en encabezados y cualquier profundidad <em>&gt;
+<var>nivel</var></em>, donde <code>chapter</code> es el nivel cero.
+(See <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>.)
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Referencias-Cruzadas"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="n" rel="next">Entornos</a>, Previous: <a href="#Seccionado" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Seccionado</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Referencias-Cruzadas-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">8 Referencias Cruzadas</h2>
+<a name="index-referencias-cruzadas"></a>
+
+<p>Una razón para numerar cosas como figuras y ecuaciones es para referir
+al lector a ellas, como en &ldquo;Vea la Figura 3 para más detalles&rdquo;.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005clabel" accesskey="1">\label</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Asigna un nombre simbólico a una parte del texto.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cpageref" accesskey="2">\pageref</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Referencia a un número de página.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cref" accesskey="3">\ref</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Referencia a una sección, figura o similar.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005clabel"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cpageref" accesskey="n" rel="next">\pageref</a>, Up: <a href="#Referencias-Cruzadas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Referencias Cruzadas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005clabel-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.1 <code>\label</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005clabel"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\label{<var>clave</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Una instrucción <code>\label</code> que aparece en un texto normal asigna a
+<var>clave</var> el número de la unidad de sección actual; que aparece dentro
+de un entorno numerado asignando ese número a <var>clave</var>.
+</p>
+<p>Un nombre de <var>clave</var> puede consistir de cualquier secuencia de
+letras, dígitos, o caracteres de puntuación. Distingue entre letras
+mayúsculas y minúsculas.
+</p>
+<p>Para evitar la creación accidental de dos etiquetas con el mismo nombre,
+es común el uso de etiquetas que consisten de un prefijo y un sufijo,
+separados por una coma o un punto. Algunos prefijos utilizados
+convencionalmente:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>ch</code></dt>
+<dd><p>para capítulos
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>sec</code></dt>
+<dd><p>para instrucciones de seccionado de bajo nivel
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>fig</code></dt>
+<dd><p>para figuras
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>tab</code></dt>
+<dd><p>para tablas
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>eq</code></dt>
+<dd><p>para ecuaciones
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Por lo tanto, una etiqueta para una figura parecería como
+<code>fig:snark</code> o <code>fig.snark</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cpageref"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cref" accesskey="n" rel="next">\ref</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005clabel" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\label</a>, Up: <a href="#Referencias-Cruzadas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Referencias Cruzadas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cpageref_007bclave_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.2 <code>\pageref{<var>clave</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cpageref"></a>
+<a name="index-referencias-cruzadas-con-numero-de-pagina"></a>
+<a name="index-numero-de-pagina_002c-referencias-cruzadas"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\pageref{<var>clave</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\pageref</code>{<var>clave</var>} produce el número de
+página del lugar en el texto en donde aparece la instrucción
+<code>\label</code>{<var>clave</var>}.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cref"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpageref" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\pageref</a>, Up: <a href="#Referencias-Cruzadas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Referencias Cruzadas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cref_007bclave_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">8.3 <code>\ref{<var>clave</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cref"></a>
+<a name="index-referencias-cruzadas_002c-simbolicas"></a>
+<a name="index-numero-de-seccion_002c-referencias-cruzadas"></a>
+<a name="index-numero-de-ecuacion_002c-referencias-cruzadas"></a>
+<a name="index-numero-de-figura_002c-referencias-cruzadas"></a>
+<a name="index-numero-de-pie-de-pagina_002c-referencias-cruzadas"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\ref{<var>clave</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\ref</code> produce el número de la unidad de sección de
+la ecuación, pie de página, figura, &hellip;, de la instrucción
+<code>\label</code> correspondiente (see <a href="#g_t_005clabel">\label</a>). Esta no produce ningún
+texto, como por ejemplo la palabra &lsquo;Sección&rsquo; o &lsquo;figura&rsquo;, únicamente el
+número.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Entornos"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea" accesskey="n" rel="next">Saltos de Línea</a>, Previous: <a href="#Referencias-Cruzadas" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Referencias Cruzadas</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Entornos-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">9 Entornos</h2>
+<a name="index-entornos"></a>
+
+<a name="index-_005cbegin"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cend"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX proporciona muchos entornos para marcar cierto texto. Cada
+entorno comienza y termina de la misma manera:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{<var>nombreentorno</var>}
+...
+\end{<var>nombreentorno</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#abstract" accesskey="1">abstract</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Produce un resumen.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#array" accesskey="2">array</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Matrices Matemáticas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#center" accesskey="3">center</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Líneas centradas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#description" accesskey="4">description</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Listas etiquetadas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#displaymath" accesskey="5">displaymath</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Fórmulas que aparecen en su propia línea.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#document" accesskey="6">document</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Encierra todo el documento.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#enumerate" accesskey="7">enumerate</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Listas numeradas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#eqnarray" accesskey="8">eqnarray</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Secuencias de ecuaciones alineadas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#equation" accesskey="9">equation</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Ecuación mostrada.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#figure">figure</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Figuras flotantes.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Crear un archivo &mdash; instrucción inicial.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Líneas alineada a la izquierda.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#flushright">flushright</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Líneas alineadas a la derecha.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Listas con viñetas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#letter">letter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Cartas
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#list">list</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Entorno lista genérica.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#math">math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Matemáticas en línea.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Página miniatura.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#picture">picture</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Imagen con texto, flechas, líneas y círculos.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#quotation">quotation</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Entorno con sangría y párrafo con sangría.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#quote">quote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Entorno con sangría sin sangría de párrafo.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Alineación de texto de manera arbitraria.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#table">table</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Tablas flotantes.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#tabular">tabular</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Alinea texto en columnas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Bibliografía o lista de referencia.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#theorem">theorem</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Teoremas, lemas, etc.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Para elaborar portadas a mano.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Simulación de entrada con máquina de escribir.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#verse">verse</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Para poesía y otras cosas.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="abstract"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#array" accesskey="n" rel="next">array</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="abstract-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.1 <code>abstract</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-abstract"></a>
+<a name="index-abstract_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-resumenes"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p><div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{abstract}
+...
+\end{abstract}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Entorno para producir un resumen, posiblemente de varios párrafos.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="array"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#center" accesskey="n" rel="next">center</a>, Previous: <a href="#abstract" accesskey="p" rel="prev">abstract</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="array-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.2 <code>array</code></h3>
+<a name="index-entorno-array"></a>
+<a name="index-array_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-matrices_002c-matematicas"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{array}{<var>plantilla</var>}
+<var>texto col1</var>&amp;<var>texto col1</var>&amp;<var>coln</var>}\\
+...
+\end{array}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Las matrices matemáticas se producen con el entorno <code>array</code>,
+normalmente dentro de un entorno <code>equation</code> (see <a href="#equation">equation</a>).
+Tiene un único argumento <var>plantilla</var> obligatorio que describe el
+número de columnas y la alineación dentro de ellas. Cada columna
+<var>col</var> se especifica por una sola letra que indica cual
+formato debe tener cada linea en esta columna de la siguiente manera:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dd><p>centrada
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dd><p>alineada a la izquierda
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dd><p>alineada a la derecha
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-_0028para-array_0029"></a>
+<p>La entradas de columna son separadas con <code>&amp;</code>. Las entradas de
+columna pueden incluir otras instrucciones LaTeX. Cada fila de la
+matriz se termina con <code>\\</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_0040_007b_002e_002e_002e_007d"></a>
+<p>En la plantilla, la construcción <code>@{<var>texto</var>}</code> coloca
+<var>texto</var> entre columnas en cada fila.
+</p>
+<p>He aquí un ejemplo:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{equation}
+ \begin{array}{lrc}
+ izquierda1 &amp; derecha1 &amp; centrado1 \\
+ izquierda2 &amp; derecha2 &amp; centrado2 \\
+ \end{array}
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005carraycolsep"></a>
+<p>El parámetro <code>\arraycolsep</code> define la mitad del ancho del espacio
+de separación entre columnas; el predeterminado es &lsquo;<samp>5pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+See <a href="#tabular">tabular</a>, para otros parámetros que afectan el formato en entornos
+<code>array</code>, a saber <code>\arrayrulewidth</code> y <code>\arraystretch</code>.
+</p>
+<p>El entorno <code>array</code> únicamente se puede utilizar en modo math.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="center"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#description" accesskey="n" rel="next">description</a>, Previous: <a href="#array" accesskey="p" rel="prev">array</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="center-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.3 <code>center</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-center"></a>
+<a name="index-center_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-centrar-texto_002c-entorno-para"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{center}
+<var>línea1</var> \\
+<var>línea2</var> \\
+\end{center}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-_0028para-centrar_0029"></a>
+<p>El entorno <code>center</code> le permite crear un párrafo consistente de
+líneas que están centradas respecto al margen izquierdo y derecho de la
+página actual. Cada línea es terminada con dobles barras inversas
+<code>\\</code>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ccentering" accesskey="1">\centering</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Forma declarativa para el entorno <code>center</code>.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ccentering"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#center" accesskey="u" rel="up">center</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ccentering-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.3.1 <code>\centering</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005ccentering"></a>
+<a name="index-centrar-texto_002c-declaracion-para"></a>
+
+<p>La declaración <code>\centering</code> corresponde al entorno <code>center</code>.
+Esta declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un entorno tal como
+<code>quote</code> o en un <code>parbox</code>. Por lo tanto, el texto de una
+figura o una tabla se puede centrar en la página poniendo una
+instrucción <code>\centering</code> al principio de la figura o en el entorno
+table.
+</p>
+<p>A diferencia del entorno <code>center</code>, la instrucción <code>\centering</code>
+no comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta simplemente cambia el formato que
+LaTeX aplica a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar el formato de
+la unidad de párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe contener una
+línea en blanco o la instrucción <code>\end</code> (de un entorno tal como
+quote), que finaliza la unidad de párrafo.
+</p>
+<p>He aquí un ejemplo:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{quote}
+\centering
+primer línea \\
+segunda línea \\
+\end{quote}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="description"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#displaymath" accesskey="n" rel="next">displaymath</a>, Previous: <a href="#center" accesskey="p" rel="prev">center</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="description-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.4 <code>description</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-description"></a>
+<a name="index-description_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-listas-etiquetadas_002c-creando"></a>
+<a name="index-listas-de-descripcion_002c-creando"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{description}
+\item [<var>etiqueta1</var>] <var>elemento1</var>
+\item [<var>etiqueta2</var>] <var>elemento2</var>
+...
+\end{description}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005citem"></a>
+<p>El entorno <code>description</code> se utiliza para hacer listas etiquetadas.
+Cada <var>etiqueta</var> es compuesta tipográficamente en negrita, alineada a
+la derecha. El texto del <var>elemento</var> puede contener múltiples
+párrafos.
+</p>
+<a name="index-maquina-de-escribir-en-negrita_002c-evitando"></a>
+<a name="index-etiquetas-en-maquina-de-escribir-en-listas"></a>
+<p>Otra variación: debido a que el estilo negrita se aplica a las
+etiquetas, si usted compone una etiqueta en máquina de escribir usando
+<code>\texttt</code>, obtendrá una máquina de escribir en negrita:
+<code>\item[\texttt{máquina de escribir y negrita}]</code>. Esta también
+puede estar en negrita, entre otras cuestiones. Para obtener sólo en
+máquina de escribir, use <code>\tt</code>, que restablece todas las
+variaciones de otros estilos: <code>\item[{\tt máquina de escribir
+simple}]</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Para detalles acerca del espaciado en listas, vea <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="displaymath"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#document" accesskey="n" rel="next">document</a>, Previous: <a href="#description" accesskey="p" rel="prev">description</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="displaymath-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.5 <code>displaymath</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-displaymath"></a>
+<a name="index-displaymath_002c-entorno"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{displaymath}
+<var>fórmula matemática</var>
+\end{displaymath}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>o
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\[<var>math</var>\]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>displaymath</code> (<code>\[...\]</code> es un sinónimo) de
+composición tipográfica de texto <var>math</var> en una línea independiente,
+centrada de manera predeterminada. La opción global <code>fleqn</code>
+produce ecuaciones alineadas a la izquierda; vea <a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a>.
+</p>
+<p>No se añade un número de ecuación al texto de <code>displaymath</code>; Para
+obtener un número de ecuación, utilice el entorno <code>equation</code>
+(see <a href="#equation">equation</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="document"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#enumerate" accesskey="n" rel="next">enumerate</a>, Previous: <a href="#displaymath" accesskey="p" rel="prev">displaymath</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="document-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.6 <code>document</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-document"></a>
+<a name="index-document_002c-entorno"></a>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>document</code> encierra el cuerpo de un documento. este es
+obligatorio en cada documento LaTeX. See <a href="#Iniciando-y-Finalizando">Iniciando y Finalizando</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="enumerate"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#eqnarray" accesskey="n" rel="next">eqnarray</a>, Previous: <a href="#document" accesskey="p" rel="prev">document</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="enumerate-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.7 <code>enumerate</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-enumerate"></a>
+<a name="index-enumerate_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-lista-de-elementos_002c-numerados"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{enumerate}
+\item <var>elemento1</var>
+\item <var>elemento2</var>
+...
+\end{enumerate}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>enumerate</code> produce una lista numerada. Las
+enumeraciones se pueden anidar unas dentro de otras, hasta cuatro
+niveles de profundidad. Estas también se pueden anidar en otros
+entornos de párrafo, tal como <code>itemize</code> (see <a href="#itemize">itemize</a>) y
+<code>description</code> (see <a href="#description">description</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005citem-1"></a>
+<p>Cada elemento de una lista enumerada comienza con una instrucción
+<code>\item</code>. En el entorno por lo menos debe haber una instrucción
+<code>\item</code>.
+</p>
+<p>De manera predeterminada, la numeración de cada nivel se hace de la
+siguiente manera:
+</p>
+<ol>
+<li> 1., 2., &hellip;
+</li><li> (a), (b), &hellip;
+</li><li> i., ii., &hellip;
+</li><li> A., B., &hellip;
+</li></ol>
+
+<a name="index-_005cenumi"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cenumii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cenumiii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cenumiv"></a>
+<p>El entorno <code>enumerate</code> usa los contadores <code>\enumi</code> hasta
+<code>\enumiv</code> (see <a href="#Contadores">Contadores</a>). Si se proporciona el argumento
+opcional a <code>\item</code>, el contador no se incrementa por cada elemento.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005clabelenumi"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clabelenumii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clabelenumiii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clabelenumiv"></a>
+<p>El entorno <code>enumerate</code> utiliza las instrucciones desde
+<code>\labelenumi</code> hasta <code>\labelenumiv</code> para producir la etiqueta
+predeterminada. Por lo tanto, usted puede usar <code>\renewcommand</code>
+para cambiar las etiquetas (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand y \renewcommand</a>). Por
+ejemplo, para hacer que el primer nivel use letras mayúsculas:
+</p>
+<a name="index-ejemplo-_005cAlph"></a>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="eqnarray"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#equation" accesskey="n" rel="next">equation</a>, Previous: <a href="#enumerate" accesskey="p" rel="prev">enumerate</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="eqnarray-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.8 <code>eqnarray</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-eqnarray"></a>
+<a name="index-eqnarray_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-ecuaciones_002c-alineando"></a>
+<a name="index-alineando-Ecuaciones"></a>
+
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{eqnarray} <span class="roman">(o <code>eqnarray*</code>)</span>
+<var>fórmula1</var> \\
+<var>fórmula2</var> \\
+...
+\end{eqnarray}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-_0028para-eqnarray_0029"></a>
+<p>El entorno <code>eqnarray</code> se utiliza para mostrar una secuencia de
+ecuaciones o desigualdades. Es muy parecido a un entorno <code>array</code>
+de tres columnas, con filas consecutivas separadas por <code>\\</code> y
+elementos consecutivos en una fila, separados por un <code>&amp;</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005c_005c_002a-_0028para-eqnarray_0029"></a>
+<p>también puede utilizar <code>\\*</code> para separar ecuaciones
+independientes, con su propósito normal de no permitir saltos de página
+en esa línea.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cnonumber"></a>
+<a name="index-numeros-de-ecuacion_002c-omitiendo"></a>
+<p>Se coloca un número de ecuación en cada línea a menos que la línea tenga
+una instrucción <code>\nonumber</code>. Alternativamente, la forma del
+entorno con <code>*</code> (<code>\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}</code>)
+debe omitir por completo la numeración de la ecuación, al tiempo que el
+mismo comienza con <code>eqnarray</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005clefteqn"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\lefteqn</code> se utiliza para dividir grandes fórmulas
+a través de varias líneas. Su argumento de composición tipográfica en el
+estilo de visualización alinea a la izquierda en una caja de ancho cero.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="equation"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#figure" accesskey="n" rel="next">figure</a>, Previous: <a href="#eqnarray" accesskey="p" rel="prev">eqnarray</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="equation-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.9 <code>equation</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-equation"></a>
+<a name="index-equation_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-ecuaciones_002c-entornos-para"></a>
+<a name="index-formulas_002c-entornos-para"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{equation}
+<var>fórmula-matemática</var>
+\end{equation}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>equation</code> comienza un entorno <code>displaymath</code>
+(see <a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a>), por ejemplo, centrando en la página el texto
+<var>math</var>, y además colocando el número de ecuación en el margen
+derecho.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="figure"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#filecontents" accesskey="n" rel="next">filecontents</a>, Previous: <a href="#equation" accesskey="p" rel="prev">equation</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="figure-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.10 <code>figure</code></h3>
+<a name="index-entorno-figure"></a>
+<a name="index-figure_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-insertando-figuras"></a>
+<a name="index-figuras_002c-insertando"></a>
+
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{figure[*]}[<var>úbicación</var>]
+<var>figbody</var>
+\label{<var>etiqueta}</var>
+\caption[<var>títulobreve</var>]{<var>texto</var>}
+\end{figure}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Las figuras son objetos que no forman parte del texto normal, y en su
+lugar son &ldquo;flotados&rdquo; a un lugar conveniente, como en la parte superior
+de una página. Las figuras no se dividen entre dos páginas.
+</p>
+<p>Cuando se compone tipográficamente en columnas dobles, la forma favorita
+produce un ancho completo (a través de las dos columnas).
+</p>
+<p>El argumento opcional <code>[ubicación]</code> determina donde debe tratar de
+colocar LaTeX su figura. Hay cuatro lugares donde LaTeX,
+posiblemente, pueda colocar un flotante:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dd><p>(Top)&mdash;en lo alto de una página de texto.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dd><p>(Bottom)&mdash;en la parte inferior de una página de texto. No obstante,
+<code>b</code> no se permite para flotantes de ancho completo (<code>figure*</code>)
+en entornos con columnas dobles. Para mejorar esto, utilice el paquete
+<code>stfloats</code> o <code>dblfloatfix</code>, pero vea el debate de advertencias
+en el FAQ:
+<a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat</a>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>h</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-paquete-float"></a>
+<p>(Here)&mdash;aquí, en la posición donde aparece el entorno <code>figure</code> en el
+texto. Sin embargo, este no está permitido por sí mismo,
+automáticamente se añade <code>t</code>. Para forzar que una figura
+absolutamente aparezca &ldquo;aquí&rdquo;, utilice el paquete <code>float</code> y use
+la letra de ubicación <code>H</code>. (Este paquete también ofrece otras
+opciones).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>p</code></dt>
+<dd><p>(Página de flotantes)&mdash;en una página de flotantes separada, misma que
+es una página que no contiene texto, únicamente flotantes.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Las clases estándar <code>report</code> y <code>article</code> utilizan la ubicación
+predeterminada <code>tbp</code>.
+</p>
+<p>El cuerpo de la figura se compone de cualquier texto, instrucciones
+LaTeX, etc., que desee.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005ccaption"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\caption</code> especifica el <var>texto</var> del título de
+la figura. El título de manera predeterminada lleva el número. Si
+<var>loftitle</var> está presente, esta se utiliza en la lista de figuras en
+lugar del <var>texto</var> (see <a href="#Tablas-de-Contenido">Tablas de Contenido</a>).
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dd><a name="index-_005cbottomfraction"></a>
+<p>La fracción máxima de la página que se permite sea ocupada por flotantes
+en la parte inferior; el predeterminado es &lsquo;<samp>.3</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\floatpagefraction</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfloatpagefraction"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>La fracción mínima de una página flotante que deben ocupar los
+flotantes; predeterminado a &lsquo;<samp>.5</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\floatsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfloatsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Espacio entre flotantes en la parte superior o inferior de una página;
+predeterminado a &lsquo;<samp>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\intextsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cintextsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Espacio por encima y por debajo de un flotante en medio del texto
+principal; predeterminado a &lsquo;<samp>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</samp>&rsquo; para estilos de
+&lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo; y &lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>14pt plus4pt minus4pt</samp>&rsquo; para
+&lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textfloatsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextfloatsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Espacio entre el último/primero flotante en la parte superior/inferior
+de una página; de manera predeterminada a &lsquo;<samp>20pt plus2pt minus4pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textfraction</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextfraction"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Mínima fracción de una página que debe ser texto; si los flotantes
+ocupan mucho espacio preserva tanto texto como sea posible, para que los
+flotantes sean trasladados a una página diferente. El predeterminado es
+&lsquo;<samp>.2</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\topfraction</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctopfraction"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Máxima fracción en la parte superior de una página que se puede ocupar
+antes de los flotantes; el predeterminado es &lsquo;<samp>.7</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="filecontents"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#flushleft" accesskey="n" rel="next">flushleft</a>, Previous: <a href="#figure" accesskey="p" rel="prev">figure</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="filecontents_003a-Crear-un-archivo-externo"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.11 <code>filecontents</code>: Crear un archivo externo</h3>
+<a name="index-entorno-filecontents"></a>
+<a name="index-filecontents_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-entorno-filecontents_002a"></a>
+<a name="index-filecontents_002a_002c-entorno"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{filecontents}{<var>nombre-del-archivo</var>}
+<var>texto</var>
+\end{filecontents}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>o
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{filecontents*}{<var>nombre-del-archivo</var>}
+<var>texto</var>
+\end{filecontents*}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>LaTeX crea un archivo llamado <var>nombre-del-archivo</var> cuyo contenido
+es <var>texto</var>. El entorno sin <code>*</code> pone comentario de cabecera ;
+ver el ejemplo más abajo. Con <code>*</code> <code>filecontents*</code> no incluye
+el comentario de cabecera.
+</p>
+<p>Este entorno puede ser utilizado en cualquier lugar en el preámbulo,
+aunque aparezca en general antes de la instrucción
+<code>\documentclass</code>. Es típicamente utilizado cuando el archivo fuente
+necesita un archivo no estándar de estilo o de clase. El entorno permite
+escribir este archivo en el repertorio que contiene este archivo y así
+de devolver el código fuente autónoma. Otra utilización es incluir
+referencia al formato <code>bib</code> en el archivo fuente, lo mismo para
+hacerlo autónomo.
+</p>
+<p>El entorno verifica si un archivo con lo mismo nombre ya existe, y si
+sí, no hace nada. Hay un paquete <samp>filecontents</samp> quién vuelve a
+definir el entorno <code>filecontents</code> de modo que en lugar de no hacer
+nada en este caso, sobrescribe en el archivo existente.
+</p>
+<p>Por ejemplo, este documento
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\documentclass{article}
+\begin{filecontents}{JH.sty}
+\newcommand{\minombre}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+\end{filecontents}
+\usepackage{JH}
+\begin{document}
+Un artículo de \minombre.
+\end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>produce este archivo <samp>JH.sty</samp>.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">%% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
+%% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+%% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
+%%
+\newcommand{\minombre}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="flushleft"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#flushright" accesskey="n" rel="next">flushright</a>, Previous: <a href="#filecontents" accesskey="p" rel="prev">filecontents</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="flushleft-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.12 <code>flushleft</code></h3>
+<a name="index-entorno-flushleft"></a>
+<a name="index-flushleft_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-justificar-texto-a-la-izquierda_002c-entornos-para"></a>
+<a name="index-texto-irregular-a-la-derecha_002c-entorno-para"></a>
+
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{flushleft}
+<var>línea1</var> \\
+<var>línea2</var> \\
+...
+\end{flushleft}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-para-flushleft"></a>
+<p>El entorno <code>flushleft</code> le permite crear un párrafo consistente de
+líneas que están alineadas en el margen de la mano izquierda y no están
+justificadas a la derecha. Cada línea se debe terminar con <code>\\</code>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005craggedright" accesskey="1">\raggedright</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Forma declarativa del entorno <code>flushleft</code>.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005craggedright"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#flushleft" accesskey="u" rel="up">flushleft</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005craggedright-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.12.1 <code>\raggedright</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005craggedright"></a>
+<a name="index-texto-irregular-a-la-derecha"></a>
+<a name="index-justificando-texto-a-la-izquierda"></a>
+<a name="index-justificacion_002c-alineando-a-la-derecha"></a>
+
+<p>La declaración <code>\raggedright</code> corresponde al entorno
+<code>flushleft</code>. Esta declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un
+entorno tal como <code>quote</code> o en un <code>parbox</code>.
+</p>
+<p>A diferencia del entorno <code>flushleft</code>, la instrucción
+<code>\raggedright</code> no comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta únicamente cambia
+como aplica LaTeX el formato a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar
+el formato de la unidad párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe
+contener una línea en blanco o la instrucción <code>\end</code> que termina la
+unidad de párrafo.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="flushright"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#itemize" accesskey="n" rel="next">itemize</a>, Previous: <a href="#flushleft" accesskey="p" rel="prev">flushleft</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="flushright-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.13 <code>flushright</code></h3>
+<a name="index-entorno-flushright"></a>
+<a name="index-flushright_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-texto-irregular-a-la-izquierda_002c-entorno-para"></a>
+<a name="index-justificar-texto-a-la-derecha_002c-entorno-para"></a>
+
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{flushright}
+<var>línea1</var> \\
+<var>línea2</var> \\
+...
+\end{flushright}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-_0028para-flushright_0029"></a>
+<p>El entorno <code>flushright</code> le permite crear un párrafo consistente de
+líneas que están alineadas en el margen a mano derecha e irregulares a
+la izquierda. Cada línea se debe terminar con <code>\\</code>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005craggedleft" accesskey="1">\raggedleft</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Forma declarativa del entorno <code>flushright</code>.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005craggedleft"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#flushright" accesskey="u" rel="up">flushright</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005craggedleft-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.13.1 <code>\raggedleft</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005craggedleft"></a>
+<a name="index-texto-irregular-a-la-izquierda"></a>
+<a name="index-justificacion_002c-irregular-a-la-izquierda"></a>
+<a name="index-texto-justificado-a-la-derecha"></a>
+
+<p>La declaración <code>\raggedleft</code> corresponde al entorno
+<code>flushright</code>. Esta declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un
+entorno tal como <code>quote</code> o en un <code>parbox</code>.
+</p>
+<p>A diferencia del entorno <code>flushright</code>, la instrucción
+<code>\raggedleft</code> no comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta únicamente cambia
+como aplica LaTeX el formato a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar
+el formato de la unidad párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe
+contener una línea en blanco o la instrucción <code>\end</code> que termina la
+unidad de párrafo.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="itemize"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#letter" accesskey="n" rel="next">letter</a>, Previous: <a href="#flushright" accesskey="p" rel="prev">flushright</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="itemize-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.14 <code>itemize</code></h3>
+<a name="index-entorno-itemize"></a>
+<a name="index-itemize_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-_005citem-2"></a>
+<a name="index-listas-de-elementos"></a>
+<a name="index-listas-no-ordenadas"></a>
+<a name="index-listas-con-vinetas"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{itemize}
+\item <var>elemento1</var>
+\item <var>elemento2</var>
+...
+\end{itemize}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>itemize</code> produce una lista &ldquo;no ordenada&rdquo;, &ldquo;con
+viñetas&rdquo;. Se pueden anidar entorno itemize dentro de otros, hasta
+cuatro niveles de profundidad. También se pueden anidar en otros
+entornos que marcan párrafos, tal como <code>enumerate</code>
+(see <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Cada elemento de una lista <code>itemize</code> comienza con una instrucción
+<code>\item</code>. En el entorno por lo menos debe haber una instrucción
+<code>\item</code>.
+</p>
+<p>De forma predeterminada, las marcas en cada nivel tienen esta
+apariencia:
+</p>
+<ol>
+<li> &bull; (bala)
+</li><li> <b>-<span class="nolinebreak">-</span><!-- /@w --></b> (guión en negrita)
+</li><li> * (asterisco)
+</li><li> . (punto centrado, aquí representado como un punto)
+</li></ol>
+
+<a name="index-_005clabelitemi"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clabelitemii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clabelitemiii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clabelitemiv"></a>
+<p>El entorno <code>itemize</code> utiliza las instrucciones desde
+<code>\labelitemi</code> hasta <code>\labelitemiv</code> para producir la etiqueta
+predeterminada. De modo que, usted puede usar <code>\renewcommand</code> para
+cambiar las etiquetas. Por ejemplo, para que en primer nivel utilice
+diamantes:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005cleftmargin"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cleftmargini"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cleftmarginii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cleftmarginiii"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cleftmarginiv"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cleftmarginv"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cleftmarginvi"></a>
+<p>Los parámetros desde <code>\leftmargini</code> hasta <code>\leftmarginvi</code>
+definen la distancia entre el margen izquierdo del entorno envolvente y
+el margen izquierdo de la lista. Por convención, <code>\leftmargin</code> se
+fija al <code>\leftmargin<var>N</var></code> adecuado cuando ingresa a un nuevo
+nivel de anidamiento.
+</p>
+
+<p>El predeterminado varía desde &lsquo;<samp>.5em</samp>&rsquo; (el nivel de anidamiento
+superior) a &lsquo;<samp>2.5em</samp>&rsquo; (el primer nivel), y se reduce un poco en modo
+two-column. En este ejemplo se reduce mucho el espacio del margen para
+las listas anidadas:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % predeterminado 2.5em
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Algunos parámetros que afectan el formato de la lista:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\itemindent</code>
+<a name="index-_005citemindent"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Sangrado extra antes de cada elemento de una lista; predeterminado a
+cero.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\labelsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005clabelsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Espacio entre la etiqueta y el texto de un elemento; predeterminado a
+&lsquo;<samp>.5em</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\labelwidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005clabelwidth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Ancho de la etiqueta; predeterminado a &lsquo;<samp>2em</samp>&rsquo;, o &lsquo;<samp>1.5em</samp>&rsquo; en
+modo two-column.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\listparindent</code>
+<a name="index-_005clistparindent"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Sangría extra añadida al segundo y subsecuentes párrafos, dentro de un
+elemento de la lista; predeterminado a &lsquo;<samp>0pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rightmargin</code>
+<a name="index-_005crightmargin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Distancia horizontal entre el margen derecho de la lista y el entorno
+envolvente; de manera predeterminada &lsquo;<samp>0pt</samp>&rsquo;, salbo en los entornos
+<code>quote</code>, <code>quotation</code> y <code>verse</code>, donde se hace igual a
+<code>\leftmargin</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Parámetros que afectan el espaciamiento vertical entre elementos de la
+lista (más bien libre, de manera predeterminada).
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\itemsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005citemsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Espacio vertical entre elementos. El predeterminado es <code>2pt
+plus1pt minus1pt</code> para <code>10pt</code> documentos, <code>3pt plus2pt
+minus1pt</code> para <code>11pt</code> y <code>4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt</code> para
+<code>12pt</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\parsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cparsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Espacio vertical extra entre párrafos dentro de un elemento de la lista.
+Los predeterminados son los mismos que para <code>\itemsep</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\topsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctopsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Espacio vertical entre el primer elemento y el párrafo anterior.
+</p>
+<p>Para listas de nivel superior, el predeterminado es
+<code>8pt plus2pt minus4pt</code> para <code>10pt</code> documentos,
+<code>9pt plus3pt minus5pt</code> para <code>11pt</code> y
+<code>10pt plus4pt minus6pt</code> para <code>12pt</code>. Estos se reducen
+en listas anidadas.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\partopsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpartopsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Espacio extra añadido a <code>\topsep</code> cuando el entorno lista comienza
+un párrafo. El valor predeterminado es <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code> para
+<code>10pt</code> documentos, <code>3pt plus1pt minus1pt</code> para <code>11pt</code> y
+<code>3pt plus2pt minus2pt</code> para <code>12pt</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-ejemplo-_005cparskip"></a>
+<p>Sobre todo para listas con elementos cortos, puede ser conveniente
+eludir los espacios entre ellos. He aquí un ejemplo de una definición
+del entorno <code>itemize*</code> sin espacio extra entre elementos o entre
+párrafos dentro de un solo elemento (<code>\parskip</code> no es específico de
+la lista, see <a href="#g_t_005cparskip">\parskip</a>):
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newenvironment{itemize*}%
+ {\begin{itemize}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+ \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
+ {\end{itemize}}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="letter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#list" accesskey="n" rel="next">list</a>, Previous: <a href="#itemize" accesskey="p" rel="prev">itemize</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Entorno-letter_003a-Escribiendo-Cartas"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.15 Entorno <code>letter</code>: Escribiendo Cartas</h3>
+<a name="index-entorno-letter"></a>
+<a name="index-letter_002c-entorno"></a>
+
+<p>Este entorno se utiliza para crear cartas. See <a href="#Cartas">Cartas</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="list"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#math" accesskey="n" rel="next">math</a>, Previous: <a href="#letter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">letter</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="list-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.16 <code>list</code></h3>
+<a name="index-entorno-list"></a>
+<a name="index-list_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-listas-de-elementos_002c-genericas"></a>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>list</code> es un entorno genérico que se utiliza para
+definir mucho de los entornos más específicos. Este rara vez se utiliza
+en documentos, pero a muy menudo en las macros.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{list}{<var>etiquetado</var>}{<var>espaciado</var>}
+\item <var>elemento1</var>
+\item <var>elemento2</var>
+...
+\end{list}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El argumento obligatorio <var>etiquetado</var> especifica como se deben
+etiquetar los elementos (a menos que se especifique el argumento
+opcional <code>\item</code>). Este argumento es una pieza de texto que se
+inserta en una caja para formar la etiqueta. Este se puede y suele
+contener otras instrucciones LaTeX.
+</p>
+<p>El argumento obligatorio <var>spacing</var> contiene instrucciones para
+cambiar los parámetros de espaciado para la lista. Este argumento por
+lo regular está vacío, es decir, <code>{}</code>, lo cual deja el espaciado
+predeterminado.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="math"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#minipage" accesskey="n" rel="next">minipage</a>, Previous: <a href="#list" accesskey="p" rel="prev">list</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="math-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.17 <code>math</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-math"></a>
+<a name="index-math_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-formulas-en-linea"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{math}
+<var>fórmula-matemática</var>
+\end{math}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>math</code> inserta la fórmula <var>math</var> dada dentro del
+texto actual. <code>\(...\))</code> y <code>$...$</code> son sinónimos.
+See <a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="minipage"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#picture" accesskey="n" rel="next">picture</a>, Previous: <a href="#math" accesskey="p" rel="prev">math</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="minipage-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.18 <code>minipage</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-minipage"></a>
+<a name="index-minipage_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-minipage_002c-creando-una"></a>
+
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{minipage}[<var>posición</var>][<var>alto</var>][<var>pos-interna</var>]{<var>ancho</var>}
+<var>texto</var>
+\end{minipage}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>minipage</code> compone tipográficamente su cuerpo de
+<var>texto</var> en un bloque que no debe abarcar varias páginas. Este es
+similar a la instrucción <code>\parbox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cparbox">\parbox</a>), pero a
+diferencia de <code>\parbox</code>, se pueden utilizar otros entornos de
+marcado de párrafos dentro de una minipágina.
+</p>
+<p>Los argumentos son los mismos que para <code>\parbox</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cparbox">\parbox</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-sangria-de-parrafos_002c-en-minipage"></a>
+<a name="index-sangria-de-parrafos_002c-en-minipage-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cparindent"></a>
+<p>De forma predeterminada, en el entorno <code>minipage</code> los párrafos no
+tienen sangría. Usted puede restablecer la sangría con una instrucción
+tal como <code>\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-notas-al-pie-en-figuras"></a>
+<a name="index-figuras_002c-en-notas-al-pie"></a>
+<p>La notas al pie en un entorno <code>minipage</code> son manipuladas de una
+manera que es especialmente útil para poner notas en figuras o tablas.
+Una instrucción <code>\footnote</code> o <code>\footnotetext</code> coloca la nota
+al pie en la parte inferior de la minipágina en lugar de en la parte
+inferior de la página, y esta utiliza el contador <code>\mpfootnote</code> en
+lugar del contador normal <code>footnote</code> (see <a href="#Contadores">Contadores</a>).
+</p>
+<p>No obstante, no ponga una minipágina dentro de otra si usted está usando
+notas al pie; estas pueden terminar mal en la parte inferior de la
+minipágina.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="picture"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#quotation" accesskey="n" rel="next">quotation</a>, Previous: <a href="#minipage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">minipage</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="picture-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.19 <code>picture</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-picture"></a>
+<a name="index-picture_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-creando-imagenes"></a>
+<a name="index-imagenes_002c-creando"></a>
+
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{picture}(ancho,alto)(desplazamiento x,desplazamiento y)
+&hellip; <var>instrucciones de imagen</var> &hellip;
+\end{picture}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005cunitlength"></a>
+<p>El entorno <code>picture</code> le permite crear casi cualquier clase de
+imagen que desee que contenga su texto, lineas, flechas y círculos.
+Usted le dice a LaTeX dónde colocar las cosas en la imagen
+especificando sus coordenadas. Una coordenada es un número que puede
+tener un punto decimal y un signo menos &mdash; un número como <code>5</code>,
+<code>0.3</code> o <code>-3.1416</code>. Una coordenada especifica una longitud en
+múltiplos de la unidad de longitud <code>\unitlength</code>, por lo que si
+<code>\unitlength</code> se ha establecido en <code>1cm</code>, entonces la
+coordenada 2.54 especifica una longitud de 2.54 centímetros. Sólo debe
+cambiar el valor de <code>\unitlength</code>, utilizando la instrucción
+<code>\setlength</code>, fuera del entorno <code>picture</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Una posición es un par de coordenadas, por ejemplo, <code>(2.4, -5)</code>,
+que especifican el punto con coordenada x <code>2.4</code> y coordenada y
+<code>-5</code>. Las coordenadas se especifican en la forma habitual con
+respecto a un origen, que normalmente está en la esquina inferior
+izquierda de la imagen. Tenga en cuenta que cuando una posición se
+presenta como un argumento, no se encierra entre llaves; los paréntesis
+sirven para delimitar el argumento.
+</p>
+<p>El entorno <code>picture</code> tiene un argumento obligatorio, el cual es una
+<code>posición</code>. este especifica el tamaño de la imagen. El entorno
+produce una caja rectangular con la anchura y altura determinada por los
+argumentos de las coordenadas x e y.
+</p>
+<p>El entorno <code>picture</code> también tiene un argumento opcional
+<code>posición</code>, seguido del argumento <code>tamaño</code>, que puede cambiar
+el origen. (A diferencia de los argumentos opcionales, este argumento
+no está contenido entre corchetes). El argumento opcional proporciona
+las coordenadas del punto en la esquina inferior izquierda de la imagen
+(con el cual se determina el origen). Por ejemplo, si
+<code>\unitlength</code> se ha fijado a <code>1mm</code>, la instrucción
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>produce una imagen de 100 milímetros de ancho y 200 milímetros de
+altura, cuya esquina inferior izquierda está en el punto (10,20) y cuya
+esquina superior derecha está en el punto (110,220). La primera vez que
+haga un dibujo, normalmente se omite el argumento opcional, dejando el
+origen en el ángulo inferior izquierdo. Si a continuación desea
+modificar su imagen, trasladando todo, basta con añadir el argumento
+opcional apropiado.
+</p>
+<p>El argumento obligatorio del entorno determina el tamaño nominal de la
+imagen. Esta no necesita tener ninguna relación con el tamaño de la
+imagen real; Felizmente LaTeX le permitirá poner cosas fuera de la
+imagen, o incluso fuera de la página. El tamaño nominal de la imagen lo
+utiliza LaTeX para determinar cuánto espacio dejar para ello.
+</p>
+<p>Todo lo que aparece en una imagen es dibujado por la instrucción
+<code>\put</code>. La instrucción
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\put (11.3,-.3){...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>coloca el objeto especificado por <code>...</code> en la imagen, con su punto
+de referencia en las coordenadas <em>(11.3, -.3)</em>. Los puntos de
+referencia para distintos objetos se describen a continuación.
+</p>
+<a name="index-caja-lR"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\put</code> crea una <em>caja LR</em>. Puede poner
+cualquier cosa que vaya en una <code>\mbox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmbox">\mbox</a>) en el
+argumento texto de la instrucción <code>\put</code>. Al hacer esto, el punto
+de referencia será la esquina inferior izquierda de la caja.
+</p>
+<p>Las instrucciones para <code>picture</code> están descritas en las siguientes
+secciones.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ccircle" accesskey="1">\circle</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Dibuja un círculo.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="2">\makebox (picture)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Dibuja un cuadro del tamaño especificado.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="3">\framebox (picture)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Dibuja una caja rodeada con un marco.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cdashbox" accesskey="4">\dashbox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Dibuja un cuadro de líneas discontinuas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cframe" accesskey="5">\frame</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Dibuja un marco alrededor de un objeto.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cline" accesskey="6">\line</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Dibuja una línea recta.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness" accesskey="7">\linethickness</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Ajusta el grosor de la línea.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines" accesskey="8">\thicklines</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Una línea de espesor más grueso.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines" accesskey="9">\thinlines</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">El grosor de la línea predeterminado.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmultiput">\multiput</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Dibuja varias instancias de un objeto.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005coval">\oval</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Dibuja una elipse.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cput">\put</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Coloca un objeto en un determinado lugar.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Hace un montón de objetos.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cvector">\vector</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Dibuja una línea con una flecha.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ccircle"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="n" rel="next">\makebox (picture)</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ccircle-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.1 <code>\circle</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005ccircle"></a>
+
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\circle[*]{<var>diámetro</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\circle</code> produce un círculo con un diámetro lo más
+cercano posible al especificado. La forma con <code>*</code> de la
+instrucción dibuja un círculo sólido.
+</p>
+<p>Se pueden dibujar círculos de hasta 40 pt.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="n" rel="next">\framebox (picture)</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccircle" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\circle</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakebox-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.2 <code>\makebox</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"></a>
+
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\makebox(<var>ancho</var>,<var>alto</var>)[<var>posición</var>]{<var>texto</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\makebox</code> para el entorno <code>picture</code> es similar a la
+instrucción normal <code>\makebox</code> excepto que usted debe especificar el
+<var>ancho</var> y <var>alto</var> en múltiplos de <code>\unitlength</code>.
+</p>
+<p>El argumento opcional, <code>[<var>posición</var>]</code>, especifica el cuadrante en el
+que debe aparecer el <var>texto</var>. Usted puede seleccionar hasta dos de los
+siguientes:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Mueve el elemento a la parte superior del rectángulo.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Mueve el elemento a la parte inferior.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Mueve el elemento a la izquierda.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Mueve el elemento hacia la derecha.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>See <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cdashbox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\dashbox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\makebox (picture)</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cframebox"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.3 <code>\framebox</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005cframebox"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\framebox(<var>ancho</var>,<var>alto</var>)[<var>posición</var>]{...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\framebox</code> es como <code>\makebox</code> (vea la sección
+anterior), excepto que esta coloca un marco en el exterior alrededor de
+la caja que crea.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cfboxrule"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cfboxsep"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\framebox</code> produce una regla de espesor
+<code>\fboxrule</code>, y deja un espacio <code>\fboxsep</code> entre la regla y el
+contenido de la caja.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cdashbox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cframe" accesskey="n" rel="next">\frame</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\framebox (picture)</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cdashbox-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.4 <code>\dashbox</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cdashbox"></a>
+
+<p>Dibuja un cuadro con una línea discontinua. Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\dashbox{<var>glargo</var>}(<var>rancho</var>,<var>ralto</var>)[<var>posición</var>]{<var>texto</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p><code>\dashbox</code> crea un rectángulo discontinuo alrededor del <var>texto</var>
+en un entorno <code>picture</code>. Los guiones son de <var>glargo</var> unidades
+de largo, y el rectángulo tiene una anchura total de <var>rancho</var> y una
+altura de <var>ralto</var>. El <var>texto</var> es posicionado en la
+<var>posición</var> opcional. </p>
+<p>Un cuadro de líneas discontinuas se ve mejor cuando <var>rancho</var> y
+<var>ralto</var> son múltiplos de <var>glargo</var>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cframe"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\line</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cdashbox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\dashbox</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cframe-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.5 <code>\frame</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005cframe"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\frame{<var>texto</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\frame</code> coloca un marco rectangular alrededor de
+<var>texto</var>. El punto de referencia es la esquina inferior izquierda
+del marco. No añade espacio extra entre el marco y el objeto.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cline"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness" accesskey="n" rel="next">\linethickness</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cframe" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\frame</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cline-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.6 <code>\line</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005cline"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\line(<var>declivex</var>,<var>declivey</var>){<var>longitud</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\line</code> dibuja una línea con la <var>longitud</var> dada
+y declive <var>declivex</var>/<var>declivey</var>.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX estándar únicamente puede dibujar líneas con
+<em><var>declive</var> = x/y</em>, donde <em>x</em> y <em>y</em> tienen valores
+enteros desde -6 hasta&nbsp;6. Para líneas de cualquier declive,
+por no hablar de otras formas, vea el paquete <code>curve2e</code> y muchos,
+muchos otros paquetes en CTAN.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005clinethickness"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines" accesskey="n" rel="next">\thicklines</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\line</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005clinethickness-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.7 <code>\linethickness</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005clinethickness"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\linethickness{<var>espesor</var>}</code> declara el grosor
+de las líneas horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture para que
+sean de <var>espesor</var>, el cual debe ser una longitud positiva.
+</p>
+<p><code>\linethickness</code> no afecta el espesor de las líneas inclinadas,
+círculos o los cuartos de círculo dibujados por <code>\oval</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cthicklines"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines" accesskey="n" rel="next">\thinlines</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005clinethickness" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\linethickness</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cthicklines-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.8 <code>\thicklines</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005cthicklines"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\thicklines</code> es un espesor de línea alternativo
+para líneas horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture;
+compárese&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a> y <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines">\thinlines</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cthinlines"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmultiput" accesskey="n" rel="next">\multiput</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\thicklines</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cthinlines-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.9 <code>\thinlines</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005cthinlines"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\thinlines</code> es el espesor de línea predeterminado
+para líneas horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture;
+compárese&nbsp;<a href="#g_t_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a> y <a href="#g_t_005cthicklines">\thicklines</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmultiput"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005coval" accesskey="n" rel="next">\oval</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cthinlines" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\thinlines</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmultiput-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.10 <code>\multiput</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005cmultiput"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p><div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\multiput(<var>x</var>,<var>y</var>)(<var>delta_x</var>,<var>delta_y</var>){<var>n</var>}{<var>obj</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\multiput</code> copia el objeto <var>obj</var> en un patrón
+regular entre imágenes. primero se coloca <var>obj</var> en la posición
+<em>(x,y)</em>, luego en la posición <em>(x+\delta x,y+\delta y)</em> y así
+sucesivamente, <var>n</var> veces.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005coval"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cput" accesskey="n" rel="next">\put</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmultiput" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\multiput</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005coval-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.11 <code>\oval</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005coval"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\oval(<var>ancho</var>,<var>alto</var>)[<var>porción</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\oval</code> produce un rectángulo con esquinas
+redondeadas. El argumento opcional <var>porción</var> le permite seleccionar
+la parte del óvalo vía las siguientes letras:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dd><p>selecciona la parte superior;
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dd><p>selecciona la parte inferior;
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dd><p>selecciona la parte derecha;
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dd><p>selecciona la parte izquierda.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Las &ldquo;esquinas&rdquo; del óvalo se hacen con cuartos de círculo con un radio
+máximo de 20pt, por lo tanto los &ldquo;óvalos&rdquo; grandes se parecen más
+a cajas con esquinas redondeadas.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cput"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cshortstack" accesskey="n" rel="next">\shortstack</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005coval" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\oval</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cput-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.12 <code>\put</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cput"></a>
+
+<p><code>\put(<var>xcoord</var>,<var>ycoord</var>){ ... }</code>
+</p>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\put</code> coloca el elemento especificado por el
+argumento obligatorio en las coordenadas <var>xcoord</var> e
+<var>ycoord</var> proporcionadas.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cshortstack"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvector" accesskey="n" rel="next">\vector</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cput" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\put</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cshortstack-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.13 <code>\shortstack</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005cshortstack"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\shortstack[<var>posición</var>]{...\\...\\...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\shortstack</code> produce un montón de objetos. Las
+posiciones válidas son:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Mueve los objetos a la derecha de la pila.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Mueve los objetos a la izquierda de la pila
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Mueve los objetos hacia el centro de la pila (predeterminado)
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-_0028para-objetos-_005cshortstack_0029"></a>
+<p>Los objetos son separados con <code>\\</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cvector"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cshortstack" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\shortstack</a>, Up: <a href="#picture" accesskey="u" rel="up">picture</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cvector-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.19.14 <code>\vector</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005cvector"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\vector(<var>declivex</var>,<var>declivey</var>){<var>longitud</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\vector</code> dibuja una línea con una flecha de la
+longitud y declive especificados. Los valores
+<em><var>declivex</var></em> i <em><var>declivey</var></em> deben
+estar entre -4 y +4 incluido.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="quotation"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#quote" accesskey="n" rel="next">quote</a>, Previous: <a href="#picture" accesskey="p" rel="prev">picture</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="quotation-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.20 <code>quotation</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-quotation"></a>
+<a name="index-quotation_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-texto-citado-con-sangria-de-parrafo_002c-mostrando"></a>
+<a name="index-mostrando-texto-citado-con-sangria-de-parrafo"></a>
+<a name="index-sangrias-de-parrafo-en-texto-citado"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{quotation}
+<var>texto</var>
+\end{quotation}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>A los márgenes del entorno <code>quotation</code> se les aplica una sangría en
+ambos lados izquierdo y derecho. El texto está justificado en ambos
+márgenes. Dejar una línea en blanco entre el texto produce un nuevo
+párrafo.
+</p>
+<p>A diferencia del entorno <code>quote</code>, cada párrafo normalmente tiene
+sangría.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="quote"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#tabbing" accesskey="n" rel="next">tabbing</a>, Previous: <a href="#quotation" accesskey="p" rel="prev">quotation</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="quote-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.21 <code>quote</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-quote"></a>
+<a name="index-quote_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-texto-citado-sin-sangria-de-parrafo_002c-mostrando"></a>
+<a name="index-mostrando-texto-citado-sin-sangria-de-parrafo"></a>
+<a name="index-sangrias-de-parrafo-en-texto-citado_002c-omitiendo"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{quote}
+<var>texto</var>
+\end{quote}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>A los márgenes del entorno <code>quote</code> se les aplica una sangría en
+ambos lados izquierdo y derecho. El texto está justificado en ambos
+márgenes. Dejar una línea en blanco entre el texto produce un nuevo
+párrafo.
+</p>
+<p>A diferencia del entorno <code>quotation</code>, a los párrafos no se les
+aplica una sangría.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="tabbing"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#table" accesskey="n" rel="next">table</a>, Previous: <a href="#quote" accesskey="p" rel="prev">quote</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="tabbing-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.22 <code>tabbing</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-tabbing"></a>
+<a name="index-tabbing_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-tabulaciones_002c-utilizando"></a>
+<a name="index-alineando-texto-en-columnas-con-tabulaciones"></a>
+<a name="index-alineando-a-traves-de-tabulacion"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabbing}
+<var>fila1col1</var> \= <var>fila1col2</var> \= <var>fila1col3</var> \= <var>fila1col4</var> \\
+<var>fila2col1</var> \&gt; \&gt; <var>fila2col3</var> \\
+...
+\end{tabbing}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>tabbing</code> proporciona una manera de alinear el texto en
+columnas. Funciona mediante el establecimiento de tabuladores y
+tabulación tanto como si se hubiera hecho en una máquina de escribir
+común. Es el más adecuado para los casos en que el ancho de cada
+columna es constante y conocido de antemano.
+</p>
+<p>Este entorno se puede dividir en varias páginas, a diferencia del
+entorno <code>tabular</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Las siguientes instrucciones se pueden utilizar dentro de un entorno
+<code>tabbing</code>:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\\ <span class="roman">tabbing</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-tabbing"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Final de línea.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\= <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005c_003d-_0028tabbing_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Establece una tabulación en la posición actual.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\&gt; <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005c_003e-_0028tabbing_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_003e"></a>
+<p>Avanza a la siguiente tabulación.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\&lt;</code>
+<a name="index-_005c_003c"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Coloca el siguiente texto a la izquierda del margen local (sin necesidad
+de cambiar el margen). Sólo se puede usar al comienzo de la línea.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\+</code>
+<a name="index-_005c_002b"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Mueve hacia la derecha el margen izquierdo del siguiente y todas las
+subsecuentes instrucciones de tabulación, empezando la línea de
+tabulación, de ser necesario.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\-</code>
+<a name="index-_005c_002d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Mueve el margen izquierdo hacia la izquierda de la siguiente y todas las
+subsecuentes instrucciones de tabulación, comenzando con la línea de
+tabulación si es necesario.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\' <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Mueve todo lo que ha escrito hasta ahora en la columna actual, es decir,
+cualquier cosa desde la instrucción <code>\&gt;</code>, <code>\&lt;</code>, <code>\'</code>,
+<code>\\</code> o <code>\kill</code> más reciente, a la derecha de la columna
+anterior, a ras de la tabulación de la columna actual.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\` <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Permite poner texto alineado a la derecha contra cualquier tabulación,
+incluyendo la tabulación&nbsp;0. Sin embargo, no puede mover el texto a
+la derecha de la última columna porque allí no hay tabulación. La
+instrucción <code>\`</code> mueve todo el texto que le sigue, hasta la
+instrucción <code>\\</code> o <code>\end{tabbing}</code> que termina la línea, al
+margen derecho del entorno tabbing. No debe haber instrucción <code>\&gt;</code>
+o <code>\'</code> entre el <code>\`</code> y la instrucción que termina la línea.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\a <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ca-_0028tabbing_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ca_0027-_0028acento-agudo-en-tabulacion_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ca_0060-_0028acento-grave-en-tabulacion_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ca_003d-_0028acento-macron-en-tabbing_0029"></a>
+<p>En un entorno <code>tabbing</code>, las instrucciones <code>\=</code>, <code>\'</code> y
+<code>\`</code> no producen acentos en la manera usual (see <a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a>). En
+su lugar, se utilizan estas instrucciones <code>\a=</code>, <code>\a'</code> y
+<code>\a`</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\kill</code>
+<a name="index-_005ckill"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Fija una tabulación sin producir texto. Trabaja igual que <code>\\</code>
+salvo que esta desecha la línea actual en lugar de producir algo útil.
+El efecto de cualquier instrucción <code>\=</code>, <code>\+</code> o <code>\-</code> en
+esa línea seguirá en vigor.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\poptabs</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpoptabs"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cpoptabs-1"></a>
+<p>Restaura las posiciones de tabulación salvadas por la última
+<code>\pushtabs</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\pushtabs</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpushtabs"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Guarda todas las posiciones de tabulación actuales. Útil para cambiar
+temporalmente las posiciones de tabulación en medio de un entorno
+<code>tabbing</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tabbingsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctabbingsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Distancia a la izquierda de la tabulación movida por <code>\'</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>En este ejemplo se compone tipográficamente una función de Pascal en el
+formato tradicional:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabbing}
+function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \&gt; begin \= \+ \\
+ \&gt; if \= n $&gt;$ 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+\end{tabbing}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="table"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="n" rel="next">tabular</a>, Previous: <a href="#tabbing" accesskey="p" rel="prev">tabbing</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="table-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.23 <code>table</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-table"></a>
+<a name="index-table_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-tablas_002c-creando"></a>
+<a name="index-creando-tablas"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"> \begin{table}[ubicación]
+
+ cuerpo de la tabla
+
+ \caption{título de la tabla}
+ \end{table}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Las tablas son objetos que no forman parte del texto normal, y por lo
+general &ldquo;flotan&rdquo; a un lugar conveniente, como la parte superior de una
+página. Las tablas no se dividen en dos páginas.
+</p>
+<p>El argumento opcional <code>[ubicación]</code> determina dónde LaTeX trata
+de colocar su tabla. Hay cuatro lugares donde LaTeX, posiblemente,
+pueda colocar un flotante:; estos son los mismo que los utilizados con
+el entorno <code>figure</code>, y se describen allí (see <a href="#figure">figure</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Las clases <code>report</code> y <code>article</code> estándar utilizan la ubicación
+<code>[tbp]</code> predeterminada.
+</p>
+<p>El cuerpo de la tabla se compone de cualquier texto, instrucciones
+LaTeX, etc., que usted desee. La instrucción <code>\caption</code> le
+permite colocar un título a su tabla.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="tabular"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="n" rel="next">thebibliography</a>, Previous: <a href="#table" accesskey="p" rel="prev">table</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="tabular-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.24 <code>tabular</code></h3>
+<a name="index-entorno-tabular"></a>
+<a name="index-tabular_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-lineas-en-tablas"></a>
+<a name="index-alineando-texto-en-tablas"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}[ubicación]{columnas}
+columna 1 entrada &amp; columna 2 entrada ... &amp; columna n entrada n \\
+...
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>o
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular*}{ancho}[posición]{columnas}
+columna 1 entrada &amp; columna 2 entrada ... &amp; columna n entrada n \\
+...
+\end{tabular*}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Estos entornos producen una caja consiste de una secuencia de filas de
+elementos, alineadas verticalmente en columnas.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-para-tabular"></a>
+<p>Se debe utilizar <code>\\</code> para especificar el final de cada fila de la
+tabla, salvo por la última, en que esta es opcional &mdash;a menos que le
+siga una instrucción <code>\hline</code> (para colocar una raya bajo la
+tabla).
+</p>
+<p>Los argumentos obligatorios y opcionales consisten de:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>ancho</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Especifica la anchura del entorno <code>tabular*</code>. Este debe tener
+espacio entre las columnas que se puede estirar para llenar el ancho
+especificado.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>posición</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Especifica la posición vertical; de manera predeterminada
+alinea al centro el entorno.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dd><p>alineado en la fila superior
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dd><p>alineado en la fila inferior
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><code>columnas</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Especifica el formato de columna. Este consiste en una secuencia de los
+siguientes especificadores, correspondientes a la secuencia de columnas
+y el material intercolumna.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Una columna de elementos alineados a la izquierda.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Una columna de elementos alineados a la derecha.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Una columna de elementos centrados.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>|</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Una línea vertical que llena la altura y profundidad total del entorno.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>@{<var>texto</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Esta inserta <var>texto</var> en cada fila. Una @-expresión suprime el
+espacio intercolumnas insertado normalmente entre columnas; cualquier
+espacio deseado entre el texto insertado y los elementos adyacentes se
+deberá incluir en <var>texto</var>. Una instrucción
+<code>\extracolsep{ancho}</code> en una @-expresión provoca que aparezca un
+espacio extra de ancho <code>ancho</code> a la izquierda de todas las columnas
+subsecuentes, hasta que se anule por otra instrucción
+<code>\extracolsep</code>. A diferencia del espacio intercolumna ordinario,
+este espacio adicional no se suprime por una @-expresión. Una
+instrucción <code>\extracolsep</code> únicamente se pude utilizar en una
+@-expresión en el argumento <code>columnas</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>p{<var>ancho</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Produce una columna con cada elemento compuesto tipográficamente en una
+parbox de ancho <var>ancho</var>, como si fuera el argumento de una
+instrucción <code>\parbox[t]{<var>ancho</var>}</code>. Sin embargo, una
+<code>\\</code> en el elemento no puede, salvo en las siguientes situaciones:
+</p>
+<ol>
+<li> Dentro de un entorno como <code>minipage</code>, <code>array</code> o
+<code>tabular</code>.
+</li><li> Dentro de una <code>\parbox</code> explícita.
+</li><li> En el alcance de una declaración <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>
+o <code>\raggedleft</code>. La última declaración debe aparecer dentro de
+llaves o un entorno cuando se utiliza en un elemento <code>p</code>-columna.
+</li></ol>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><code>*{<var>número</var>}{<var>columnas</var>}</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Equivalente a <var>número</var> de copias de <var>columnas</var>, donde
+<var>número</var> es un entero positivo y <var>columnas</var> es cualquier lista
+de especificadores de columna, la cual puede contener otra
+<code>*-expresión</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Parámetros que controlan el formato:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\arrayrulewidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005carrayrulewidth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>El espesor de la línea creada por <code>|</code>, <code>\hline</code> y
+<code>\vline</code> en los entornos <code>tabular</code> y <code>array</code>; el
+predeterminado es &lsquo;<samp>.4pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\arraystretch</code>
+<a name="index-_005carraystretch"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>El factor para escalar el espaciado entre hileras en los entornos
+<code>tabular</code> y <code>array</code>; el predeterminado es &lsquo;<samp>1</samp>&rsquo;, para no
+escalar.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\doublerulesep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdoublerulesep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Distancia horizontal entre las líneas verticles producidas por <code>||</code>
+en los entornos <code>tabular</code> y <code>array</code>; el predeterminado es
+&lsquo;<samp>2pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tabcolsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctabcolsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>La mitad de la anchura del espacio entre las columnas; el predeterminado
+es &lsquo;<samp>6pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Estas instrucciones se pueden utilizar en el interior de un entorno
+<code>tabular</code>:
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn" accesskey="1">\multicolumn</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Hace que un elemento abarque varias columnas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ccline" accesskey="2">\cline</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Dibuja una línea horizontal que abarca algunas columnas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005chline" accesskey="3">\hline</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Dibuja una línea horizontal que abarca todas las columnas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cvline" accesskey="4">\vline</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Dibuja una línea vertical.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmulticolumn"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ccline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\cline</a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up">tabular</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmulticolumn-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.24.1 <code>\multicolumn</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005cmulticolumn"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p><div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\multicolumn{<var>columnas</var>}{<var>posición</var>}{<var>texto</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\multicolumn</code> provoca que una entrada se extienda
+por varias columnas. El primer argumento obligatorio, <var>columnas</var>,
+especifica es el número de columnas por abarcar. El segundo argumento
+obligatorio, <var>posición</var>, especifica el formato de la entrada;
+<code>c</code> para centrado, <code>l</code> para alineado a la izquierda, <code>r</code>
+para alineado a la derecha. El tercer argumento obligatorio,
+<var>texto</var>, especifica el texto a colocar en la entrada.
+</p>
+<p>He aquí un ejemplo que muestra dos columnas separadas por un doble
+guión; <code>\multicolumn</code> se utiliza para el encabezado:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{tabular}{r@{--}l}
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr
+ 0x80&amp;0x7FF \cr
+ 0x800&amp;0xFFFF \cr
+0x10000&amp;0x1FFFF \cr
+\end{tabular}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ccline"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005chline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\hline</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\multicolumn</a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up">tabular</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ccline-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.24.2 <code>\cline</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005ccline"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\cline{<var>i</var>-<var>j</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\cline</code> dibuja un línea horizontal a través de las
+columnas especificadas, comenzando en la colúmna <var>i</var> y terminando en
+la columna <var>j</var>, que son especificadas en el argumento obligatorio.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005chline"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\vline</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\cline</a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up">tabular</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005chline-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.24.3 <code>\hline</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005chline"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\hline</code> dibuja una línea horizontal del ancho del
+entorno <code>tabular</code> o <code>array</code> especificado. Se utiliza
+comúnmente para para dibujar una línea en la parte superior, inferior y
+entre filas de la tabla.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cvline"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hline</a>, Up: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="u" rel="up">tabular</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cvline-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.24.4 <code>\vline</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005cvline"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\vline</code> dibuja una línea vertical extendida a la
+altura y profundidad total de su fila. Una instrucción <code>\hfill</code> se
+puede utilizar para mover la línea hasta el borde de la columna.
+También se puede utilizar en una @-expresión.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="thebibliography"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#theorem" accesskey="n" rel="next">theorem</a>, Previous: <a href="#tabular" accesskey="p" rel="prev">tabular</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="thebibliography-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.25 <code>thebibliography</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-thebibliography"></a>
+<a name="index-thebibliography_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-bibliografia_002c-creando-_0028manualmente_0029"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{thebibliography}{<var>etiqueta-más-amplia</var>}
+\bibitem[<var>etiqueta</var>]{<var>clave-de-cita}</var>
+...
+\end{thebibliography}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>thebibliography</code> produce una bibliografía o lista de
+referencia.
+</p>
+<p>En las clase <code>article</code>, esta lista de referencia es etiquetada como
+&ldquo;Referencias&rdquo;; en la clase <code>report</code>, esta es etiquetada como
+&ldquo;Bibliografía&rdquo;. Usted puede cambiar la etiqueta (en las clases
+estándar) redefiniendo la instrucción <code>\refname</code>. Por ejemplo, la
+siguiente instrucción la elimina por completo:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\refname}{}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El argumento obligatorio <var>etiqueta-más-amplia</var> es texto que, al
+momento de componerla tipográficamente, es tan ancho como la etiqueta
+producida por la instrucción <code>\bibitem</code>. Se suele dar como
+<code>9</code> para bibliografías de menos de 10 referencias, <code>99</code> para
+las que tienen menos de 100, etc.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem" accesskey="1">\bibitem</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Especifica un elemento de la bibliografía.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ccite" accesskey="2">\cite</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Hace referencia a un elemento bibliográfico.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnocite" accesskey="3">\nocite</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Incluye un elemento en la bibliografía.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Usando-BibTeX" accesskey="4">Usando BibTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Generando bibliografías automáticamente.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cbibitem"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ccite" accesskey="n" rel="next">\cite</a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up">thebibliography</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cbibitem-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.25.1 <code>\bibitem</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cbibitem"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p><div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\bibitem[<var>etiqueta</var>]{<var>clave-de-cita</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\bibitem</code> genera una entrada etiquetada por
+<var>etiqueta</var>. Si se omite el argumento <var>etiqueta</var>,
+automáticamente se genera un número utilizando el contador <code>enumi</code>.
+La <var>clave-de-cita</var> es cualquier secuencia de letras, números y
+signos de puntuación que no contenga una coma.
+</p>
+<p>Esta instrucción escribe una entrada al archivo <samp>.aux</samp> que contiene
+los elementos <var>clave-de-cita</var> y etiqueta. Cuando la instrucción
+<code>\begin{document}</code> lee el archivo <samp>.aux</samp>, los elementos
+<code>etiqueta</code> son asociados con <code>clave-de-cita</code>, produciendo
+referencias a <var>clave-de-cita</var> con una instrucción <code>\cite</code> (vea
+la siguiente sección) para producir la etiqueta asociada.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ccite"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnocite" accesskey="n" rel="next">\nocite</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cbibitem" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\bibitem</a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up">thebibliography</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ccite-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.25.2 <code>\cite</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005ccite"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\cite[<var>subcita</var>]{<var>claves</var>
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El argumento <var>claves</var> es una lista de una o más claves de cita,
+separadas por comas. Esta instrucción genera una cita en el texto para
+referencias asociadas con <var>claves</var> por medio de entradas en el
+archivo <samp>.aux</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>El argumento de texti opcional <var>subcita</var> aparece después de la cita.
+Por ejemplo, <code>\cite[p.~314]{knuth}</code> podría producir &lsquo;[Knuth,
+p.&nbsp;314]&rsquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnocite"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Usando-BibTeX" accesskey="n" rel="next">Usando BibTeX</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccite" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\cite</a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up">thebibliography</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnocite-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.25.3 <code>\nocite</code></h4>
+<a name="index-_005cnocite"></a>
+
+<p><code>\nocite{lista-de-claves}</code>
+</p>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\nocite</code> no produce texto, pero escribe en el archivo
+<samp>.aux</samp> la <code>lista-de-claves</code>, que es una lista de una o más
+etiquetas de cita.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Usando-BibTeX"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnocite" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\nocite</a>, Up: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="u" rel="up">thebibliography</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Usando-BibTeX-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.25.4 Usando BibTeX</h4>
+
+<a name="index-usando-BibTeX"></a>
+<a name="index-bibTeX_002c-usando"></a>
+<a name="index-bibliografia_002c-creando-_0028automaticamente_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cbibliographystyle"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cbibliography"></a>
+
+
+<p>Si usted utiliza el programa BibTeX escrito por Oren Patashnik
+(altamente recomendable si necesita una bibliografía de más de un par de
+títulos) para mantener su bibliografía, no utilice el entorno
+<code>thebibliography</code> (see <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>). En su lugar, incluya
+las líneas
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\bibliographystyle{<var>estilo-de-bibliografía</var>}
+\bibliography{<var>archivo-de-bibliografía-1,</var><var>archivo-de-bibliografía-2</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\bibliographystyle</code> por sí misma no produce salida
+alguna. Por el contrario, define el estilo en que se producirá la
+bibliografía: <var>estilo-de-bibliografía</var> se refiere a un archivo
+<samp><var>estilo-de-bibliografía</var>.bst</samp>, en el que se define qué
+apariencia tendrán las citas. Los nombres de <var>estilo</var> estándar
+distribuidos con BibTeX son:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>alpha</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Ordenadas alfabéticamente. Las etiquetas están formadas por el nombre
+del autor y año de publicación.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>plain</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Ordenadas alfabéticamente. Las etiquetas son numéricas.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>unsrt</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Al igual que <code>plain</code>, pero las entradas están en el orden citado.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>abbrv</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Igual que <code>plain</code>, pero con etiquetas más compactas.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Además, existen muchos otros archivos de estilo BibTeX adaptados a
+las demandas de diversas publicaciones. Vea
+<a href="http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib">http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib</a>.
+</p>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\bibliography</code> es la que realmente produce la
+bibliografía. El argumento <code>\bibliography</code> se refiere a archivos
+con el nombre <samp><var>archivo-de-bibliografía</var>.bib</samp>, el cual debe
+contener la base de datos en formato BibTeX. Sólo las entradas
+referidas a través de <code>\cite</code> y <code>\nocite</code> serán incluidas en
+la bibliografía.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="theorem"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#titlepage" accesskey="n" rel="next">titlepage</a>, Previous: <a href="#thebibliography" accesskey="p" rel="prev">thebibliography</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="theorem-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.26 <code>theorem</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-theorem"></a>
+<a name="index-theorem_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-teoremas_002c-composicion-tipografica-de"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{theorem}
+<var>texto-del-teorema</var>
+\end{theorem}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>theorem</code> produce &ldquo;Teorema <var>n</var>&rdquo; en negrita seguido
+por el <var>texto-del-teorema</var>, donde las posibilidades de numeración
+para <var>n</var> se describen bajo <code>\newtheorem</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="titlepage"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#verbatim" accesskey="n" rel="next">verbatim</a>, Previous: <a href="#theorem" accesskey="p" rel="prev">theorem</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="titlepage-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.27 <code>titlepage</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-titlepage"></a>
+<a name="index-titlepage_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-haciendo-una-pagina-de-titulo"></a>
+<a name="index-pagina-de-titulo_002c-creando-la"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{titlepage}
+<var>texto</var>
+\end{titlepage}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>titlepage</code> crea una página de título, es decir, una
+página en la cual no se imprime el número de página ni el encabezado.
+También provoca que la página siguiente sea numerada como la página uno.
+El formato de la página del título se deja bajo su responsabilidad. La
+instrucción <code>\today</code> puede ser útil en las páginas de título
+(see <a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a>).
+</p>
+<p>Usted puede utilizar la instrucción <code>\maketitle</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>) para producir una página de título estándar sin un
+entorno <code>titlepage</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="verbatim"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#verse" accesskey="n" rel="next">verse</a>, Previous: <a href="#titlepage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">titlepage</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="verbatim-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.28 <code>verbatim</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-verbatim"></a>
+<a name="index-verbatim_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-texto-literal"></a>
+<a name="index-simulando-texto-escrito"></a>
+<a name="index-texto-escrito_002c-simulando"></a>
+<a name="index-codigo_002c-composicion-tipografica-de"></a>
+<a name="index-programas-de-ordenador_002c-composicion-tipografica"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{verbatim}
+<var>texto-literal</var>
+\end{verbatim}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>verbatim</code> es un entorno para crear párrafos en el cual
+LaTeX produce exactamente lo que usted escriba en él; Por ejemplo el
+carácter <code>\</code> produce una &lsquo;<samp>\</samp>&rsquo; impresa. Este cambia el modo en
+que LaTeX imprime los que usted escriba con retornos de carro y
+espacios en blanco con el mismo efecto que tendría en una máquina de
+escribir.
+</p>
+<p>El entorno <code>verbatim</code> utiliza una composición tipográfica con tipo
+de letra monoespacio (<code>\tt</code>).
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cverb" accesskey="1">\verb</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">La forma macro del entorno <code>verbatim</code>.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cverb"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Up: <a href="#verbatim" accesskey="u" rel="up">verbatim</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cverb-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">9.28.1 <code>\verb</code></h4>
+
+<a name="index-_005cverb"></a>
+<a name="index-texto-literal_002c-en-linea"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\verb<var>carácter</var><var>texto-literal</var><var>carácter</var>
+\verb*<var>carácter</var><var>texto-literal</var><var>carácter</var>
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\verb</code> compone tipográficamente el
+<var>texto-literal</var> como este se ha ingresado incluyendo caracteres
+especiales y espacios, utilizando el tipo de letra de máquina de
+escribir (<code>\tt</code>). No se permiten espacios entre <code>\verb</code> o
+<code>\verb*</code> y el <var>carácter</var> delimitador, el cual comienza y
+termina el texto literal. El delimitador no debe aparecer en el
+<var>texto-literal</var>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-espacio-visible"></a>
+<p>La forma con <code>*</code> difiere únicamente en que los espacios son
+impresos con un carácter de &ldquo;espacio visible&rdquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="verse"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#verbatim" accesskey="p" rel="prev">verbatim</a>, Up: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entornos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="verse-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">9.29 <code>verse</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-verse"></a>
+<a name="index-verse_002c-entorno"></a>
+<a name="index-poesia_002c-un-entorno-para"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\begin{verse}
+<var>línea1</var> \\
+<var>línea2</var> \\
+...
+\end{verse}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>El entorno <code>verse</code> está diseñado para poesía, aunque es posible que
+usted le encuentre alguna otra utilidad.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-para-verse"></a>
+<p>Los márgenes tienen sangría a la izquierda y derecha, a los párrafos no
+se les aplica sangría y el texto no está justificado. Separe las líneas
+de cada estrofa con <code>\\</code> y use una o más líneas en blanco para
+separar las estrofas.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Saltos-de-L_00ednea"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Saltos-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="n" rel="next">Saltos de Página</a>, Previous: <a href="#Entornos" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Entornos</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Saltos-de-Linea"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">10 Saltos de Línea</h2>
+<a name="index-saltos-de-linea"></a>
+<a name="index-linea_002c-saltos-de"></a>
+
+<p>Lo primero que hace LaTeX cuando procesa texto normal es traducir el
+archivo de entrada en una secuencia de unidades gráficas y espacios.
+Para producir un documento impreso, esta secuencia se debe partir en
+líneas (y esas línea se deben dividir en páginas).
+</p>
+<p>Normalmente LaTeX se encarga de los saltos de línea (y página), pero
+en algunos entornos, usted mismo determina los saltos de líneas con la
+instrucción <code>\\</code>, y siempre puede forzar los saltos de línea
+manualmente.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005c_005c" accesskey="1">\\</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inicia una nueva línea.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-y-_005crestorecr" accesskey="2">\obeycr y \restorecr</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Provoca que cada línea ingresada comience una nueva línea.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="3">\newline</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Divide la línea \- (hyphenation):: Inserta un guión en la sílaba explicita.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="4">\- (hyphenation)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cfussy" accesskey="5">\fussy</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Es quisquilloso con la separación de línea.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csloppy" accesskey="6">\sloppy</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Es descuidado en la separación de la líneas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="7">\hyphenation</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Le dice a LaTeX cómo insertar un guión para separar una palabra.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-y-_005cnolinebreak" accesskey="8">\linebreak y \nolinebreak</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Forzando y evitando saltos de línea.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005c_005c"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-y-_005crestorecr" accesskey="n" rel="next">\obeycr y \restorecr</a>, Up: <a href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea" accesskey="u" rel="up">Saltos de Línea</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005c_005c_005b_002a_005d_005bmas_002despacio_005d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">10.1 <code>\\</code>[*][<var>más-espacio</var>]</h3>
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-forzar-la-separacion-de-linea"></a>
+<a name="index-nueva-linea_002c-comenzando"></a>
+<a name="index-separacion-de-linea_002c-forzando"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\\</code> le dice a LaTeX que comience una nueva
+línea. Esta tiene un argumento opcional, <var>más-espacio</var>, que
+especifica la cantidad de espacio vertical extra que se debe insertar
+antes de la siguiente línea. Este puede ser una cantidad negativa.
+</p>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\\*</code> es la misma que la instrucción ordinaria
+<code>\\</code> salvo que esta le dice a LaTeX que no comience una nueva
+página después de la línea.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cobeycr-y-_005crestorecr"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newline</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_005c" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\\</a>, Up: <a href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea" accesskey="u" rel="up">Saltos de Línea</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cobeycr-y-_005crestorecr-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">10.2 <code>\obeycr</code> y <code>\restorecr</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cobeycr"></a>
+<a name="index-_005crestorecr"></a>
+<a name="index-nueva-linea_002c-salida-como-entrada"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\obeycr</code> genera un retorno de carro en el archivo
+de entrada (&lsquo;<samp>^^M</samp>&rsquo;, internamente) lo mismo que <code>\\</code> (seguido
+por <code>\relax</code>). Por lo tanto, cada nueva línea en la entrada
+también será una nueva línea en la salida.
+</p>
+<p><code>\restorecr</code> restaura el comportamiento de saltos de línea normal.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewline"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="n" rel="next">\- (hyphenation)</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-y-_005crestorecr" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\obeycr y \restorecr</a>, Up: <a href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea" accesskey="u" rel="up">Saltos de Línea</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewline-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">10.3 <code>\newline</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cnewline"></a>
+<a name="index-nueva-linea_002c-comenzando-_0028modo-de-parrafo_0029"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\newline</code> rompe la línea en el punto actual, sin
+justificar el texto anterior. Sólo se puede utilizar en modo párrafo.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy" accesskey="n" rel="next">\fussy</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newline</a>, Up: <a href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea" accesskey="u" rel="up">Saltos de Línea</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005c_002d-_0028division-silabica-discrecional_0029"></a>
+<h3 class="section">10.4 <code>\-</code> (división silábica discrecional)</h3>
+<a name="index-_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-division-silabica_002c-forzando"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\-</code> le dice a LaTeX que puede dividir la palabra
+con un guión en ese punto. LaTeX cuenta con una muy buena separación
+silábica con guión, y por lo general en la mayoría de los casos
+encuentra los puntos correctos en la división de palabras, y casi nunca
+utiliza uno incorrecto. La instrucción <code>\-</code> se utiliza para casos
+excepcionales.
+</p>
+<p>Cuando usted inserta la instrucción <code>\-</code> en una palabra, la palabra
+únicamente se debe dividir con guión en esos puntos y en ninguno de los
+puntos que LaTeX pudiera haber elegido de otro modo.
+</p>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cfussy"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csloppy" accesskey="n" rel="next">\sloppy</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\- (hyphenation)</a>, Up: <a href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea" accesskey="u" rel="up">Saltos de Línea</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cfussy-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">10.5 <code>\fussy</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cfussy"></a>
+
+<p>La declaración <code>\fussy</code> (que es la predeterminada) provoca que
+TeX sea quisquilloso con los saltos de línea. Esto por lo general
+también evita el espacio entre palabras, a costa de un ocasional
+desbordamiento de caja.
+</p>
+<p>Esta instrucción cancela el efecto de una instrucción <code>\sloppy</code>
+previa (see <a href="#g_t_005csloppy">\sloppy</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csloppy"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="n" rel="next">\hyphenation</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfussy" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\fussy</a>, Up: <a href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea" accesskey="u" rel="up">Saltos de Línea</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csloppy-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">10.6 <code>\sloppy</code></h3>
+
+<p>La declaración <code>\sloppy</code> provoca que TeX sea menos cuidadoso con
+los saltos de línea. Esto evitará el desbordamiento de cajas, a costa de
+un mayor espaciamiento entre palabras.
+</p>
+<p>Dura hasta que se utilice una instrucción <code>\fussy</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cfussy">\fussy</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005chyphenation"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-y-_005cnolinebreak" accesskey="n" rel="next">\linebreak y \nolinebreak</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csloppy" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\sloppy</a>, Up: <a href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea" accesskey="u" rel="up">Saltos de Línea</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005chyphenation-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">10.7 <code>\hyphenation</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005chyphenation"></a>
+<a name="index-division-de-silabas-con-guion_002c-definiendo"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\hyphenation{<var>palabra-uno</var> <var>palabra-dos</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\hyphenation</code> declara los puntos dónde se permite
+la división de palabras por medio de un carácter <code>-</code> en las
+palabras proporcionadas. Las palabras están separadas por espacios.
+TeX únicamente debe separar las palabras si la palabra coincide
+exactamente, sin juzgar las inflexiones. Múltiples instrucciones
+<code>\hyphenation</code> son acumulativas. Algunos ejemplos (los patrones de
+separación silábica de TeX no se aplican a esas palabras):
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\hyphenation{ap-én-dice col-umnas hiper-fragilís-tico-espiali-doso}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005clinebreak-y-_005cnolinebreak"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chyphenation" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hyphenation</a>, Up: <a href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea" accesskey="u" rel="up">Saltos de Línea</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005clinebreak-y-_005cnolinebreak-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">10.8 <code>\linebreak</code> y <code>\nolinebreak</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005clinebreak"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnolinebreak"></a>
+<a name="index-saltos-de-linea_002c-forzando"></a>
+<a name="index-saltos-de-linea_002c-evitando"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\linebreak[<var>prioridad</var>]
+\nolinebreak[<var>prioridad</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>De manera predeterminada, la instrucción <code>\linebreak</code>
+(<code>\nolinebreak</code>) fuerza (previene) un salto de línea en la posición
+actual. Para <code>\linebreak</code>, los espacios en la línea se expanden
+hasta el margen derecho de la manera normal.
+</p>
+<p>Con el argumento opcional <var>prioridad</var>, usted puede convertir la
+instrucción de una petición a una demanda. La <var>prioridad</var> debe ser
+un número desde 0 hasta&nbsp;4. Cuanto mayor sea el número, es más
+insistente la petición.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Saltos-de-P_00e1gina"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Notas-al-Pie" accesskey="n" rel="next">Notas al Pie</a>, Previous: <a href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Saltos de Línea</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Saltos-de-Pagina"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">11 Saltos de Página</h2>
+<a name="index-salto-de-pagina"></a>
+<a name="index-dividiendo-paginas"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX inicia nuevas páginas asincronicamente, cuando ha acumulado
+suficiente material para llenar una página. Por lo general, esto ocurre
+automáticamente, pero a veces, posiblemente, usted quiera influir en los
+saltos de página.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ccleardoublepage" accesskey="1">\cleardoublepage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inicia una nueva página a mano derecha.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage" accesskey="2">\clearpage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inicia una nueva página.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage" accesskey="3">\newpage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inicia una nueva página.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage" accesskey="4">\enlargethispage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Amplía un poco la página actual.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-y-_005cnopagebreak" accesskey="5">\pagebreak y \nopagebreak</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Forzando y evitando saltos de página.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ccleardoublepage"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage" accesskey="n" rel="next">\clearpage</a>, Up: <a href="#Saltos-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="u" rel="up">Saltos de Página</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ccleardoublepage-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">11.1 <code>\cleardoublepage</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005ccleardoublepage"></a>
+<a name="index-iniciando-una-pagina-a-mano-derecha"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\cleardoublepage</code> termina la página actual y
+provoca que se impriman todas las imágenes y tablas que han aparecido
+hasta el momento en el texto. En un estilo de Impresión a doble cara,
+este también hace que la siguiente página sea a mano derecha, página
+(impares), produciendo una página en blanco si es necesario.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cclearpage"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newpage</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccleardoublepage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\cleardoublepage</a>, Up: <a href="#Saltos-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="u" rel="up">Saltos de Página</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cclearpage-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">11.2 <code>\clearpage</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cclearpage"></a>
+<a name="index-descargando-flotantes-e-iniciando-una-pagina"></a>
+<a name="index-iniciando-una-nueva-pagina-y-limpiando-flotantes"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\clearpage</code> termina la página actual y provoca que
+todas la imágenes y tablas que han aparecido hasta ahora en la entrada
+sean impresas.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewpage"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage" accesskey="n" rel="next">\enlargethispage</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\clearpage</a>, Up: <a href="#Saltos-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="u" rel="up">Saltos de Página</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewpage-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">11.3 <code>\newpage</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cnewpage"></a>
+<a name="index-nueva-pagina_002c-iniciando"></a>
+<a name="index-iniciando-una-nueva-pagina"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\newpage</code> termina la página actual, pero no
+descarga flotantes (vea <code>\clearpage</code> arriba).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cenlargethispage"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-y-_005cnopagebreak" accesskey="n" rel="next">\pagebreak y \nopagebreak</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewpage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newpage</a>, Up: <a href="#Saltos-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="u" rel="up">Saltos de Página</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cenlargethispage-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">11.4 <code>\enlargethispage</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cenlargethispage"></a>
+<a name="index-ampliando-la-pagina-actual"></a>
+
+<p><code>\enlargethispage{tamaño}</code>
+</p>
+<p><code>\enlargethispage*{tamaño}</code>
+</p>
+<p>Amplía el <code>\textheight</code> para la página actual por la cantidad
+especificada; por ejemplo <code>\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}</code>
+permitirá una línea adicional.
+</p>
+<p>La forma favorita trata de apretar el material en la página tanto como
+sea posible. Esta normalmente se utiliza junto con un <code>\pagebreak</code>
+explícito.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cpagebreak-y-_005cnopagebreak"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\enlargethispage</a>, Up: <a href="#Saltos-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="u" rel="up">Saltos de Página</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cpagebreak-y-_005cnopagebreak-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">11.5 <code>\pagebreak</code> y <code>\nopagebreak</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cpagebreak"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnopagebreak"></a>
+<a name="index-saltos-de-pagina_002c-forzando"></a>
+<a name="index-saltos-de-pagina_002c-evitando"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\pagebreak[<var>prioridad</var>]
+\nopagebreak[<var>prioridad</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>De forma predeterminada, la instrucción <code>\pagebreak</code>
+(<code>\nopagebreak</code>) fuerza (impide) un salto de página en la posición
+actual. Para <code>\linebreak</code>, el espacio vertical en la página se
+estira cuanto sea posible de modo que se extienda hasta el margen
+inferior normal.
+</p>
+<p>Con el argumento opcional <var>prioridad</var>, puede convertir la
+instrucción <code>\pagebreak</code> desde una petición a una demanda. El
+número debe ser un número desde 0 hasta&nbsp;4. Cuanto mayor sea el
+número, más insistente es la petición.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Notas-al-Pie"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Definiciones" accesskey="n" rel="next">Definiciones</a>, Previous: <a href="#Saltos-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Saltos de Página</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Notas-al-Pie-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">12 Notas al Pie</h2>
+<a name="index-notas-al-pie_002c-creando"></a>
+
+<p>Las notas al pie se pueden producir en una de dos maneras. Se pueden
+producir con una sola instrucción, la instrucción <code>\footnote</code>.
+También se pueden producir con dos instrucciones, las instrucciones
+<code>\footnotemark</code> y <code>\footnotetext</code>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cfootnote" accesskey="1">\footnote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Inserta una nota al pie.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark" accesskey="2">\footnotemark</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Solamente Inserta la marca de nota.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext" accesskey="3">\footnotetext</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Solamente Inserta el texto la nota.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Notas-al-Pie-Simb_00f3licas" accesskey="4">Notas al Pie Simbólicas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Usando símbolos en lugar de números para las notas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-Footnote" accesskey="5">Parámetros para Footnote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Parámetros para el formato de la nota al pie.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cfootnote"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark" accesskey="n" rel="next">\footnotemark</a>, Up: <a href="#Notas-al-Pie" accesskey="u" rel="up">Notas al Pie</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cfootnote-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.1 <code>\footnote</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cfootnote"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\footnote[<var>número</var>]{<var>texto</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\footnote</code> coloca una nota numerada con el
+<var>texto</var> al pie de la página actual. El argumento opcional
+<var>número</var> cambia el número predeterminado de la nota.
+</p>
+<p>Esta instrucción sólo puede utilizarse fuera del modo párrafo; es decir,
+no se puede utilizar en el instrucciones de seccionado tal como
+<code>\chapter</code>, en figuras, tablas o en un entorno <code>tabular</code>.
+(Vea las siguientes secciones).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cfootnotemark"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext" accesskey="n" rel="next">\footnotetext</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnote" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\footnote</a>, Up: <a href="#Notas-al-Pie" accesskey="u" rel="up">Notas al Pie</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cfootnotemark-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.2 <code>\footnotemark</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cfootnotemark"></a>
+
+<p>Sin argumento opcional, la instrucción <code>\footnotemark</code> coloca el
+número de nota actual en el texto. Esta instrucción se puede utilizar
+en modo párrafo. Usted proporciona el texto de la nota por separado,
+con la instrucción <code>\footnotetext</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Esta instrucción se puede utilizar para producir varios marcadores de
+nota consecutivos refiriéndose a la misma nota
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>después de la primer instrucción <code>\footnote</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cfootnotetext"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Notas-al-Pie-Simb_00f3licas" accesskey="n" rel="next">Notas al Pie Simbólicas</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\footnotemark</a>, Up: <a href="#Notas-al-Pie" accesskey="u" rel="up">Notas al Pie</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cfootnotetext-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.3 <code>\footnotetext</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cfootnotetext"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\footnotetext[<var>número</var>]{<var>texto</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\footnotetext</code> coloca el <var>texto</var> en la parte
+inferior de la página como una nota al pie. Esta instrucción puede
+venir en cualquier lugar después de la instrucción <code>\footnotemark</code>.
+La instrucción <code>\footnotetext</code> debe aparecer en el exterior del
+modo párrafo.
+</p>
+<p>El argumento opcional <var>número</var> cambia el número predeterminado de la
+nota.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Notas-al-Pie-Simb_00f3licas"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-Footnote" accesskey="n" rel="next">Parámetros para Footnote</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\footnotetext</a>, Up: <a href="#Notas-al-Pie" accesskey="u" rel="up">Notas al Pie</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Notas-al-Pie-Simbolicas"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.4 Notas al Pie Simbólicas</h3>
+
+<a name="index-notas-al-pie_002c-simbolos-en-lugar-de-numeros-en"></a>
+<p>Si desea utilizar símbolos para las notas al pie, en lugar de un número
+creciente, redefina <code>\thefootnote</code> así:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005cfnsymbol_002c-y-notas-al-pie"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cfnsymbol"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\fnsymbol</code> produce a serie predefinida de símbolos
+(see <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>). Si desea
+utilizar un símbolo diferente como su marca de nota al pie, necesitará
+redefinir <code>\@fnsymbol</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Par_00e1metros-para-Footnote"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Notas-al-Pie-Simb_00f3licas" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Notas al Pie Simbólicas</a>, Up: <a href="#Notas-al-Pie" accesskey="u" rel="up">Notas al Pie</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Parametros-para-Footnote"></a>
+<h3 class="section">12.5 Parámetros para Footnote</h3>
+
+<a name="index-parametros-de-footnote"></a>
+<a name="index-parametros_002c-para-footnote"></a>
+
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\footnoterule</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfootnoterule"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Produce la línea que separa el texto principal en una página de las
+notas al pie de la página. Dimensiones predeterminadas: <code>0.4pt</code>
+espesor (o ancho), y longitud de <code>0.4\columnwidth</code> en las clases de
+documento estándar (salvo en <code>slides</code>, donde esta no aparece).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\footnotesep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfootnotesep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>La altura donde se coloca el puntal al comienzo de la nota al pie. De
+forma predeterminada, se establece en el puntal del tipo de letra normal
+<code>\footnotesize</code> (see <a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a>, por lo tanto no
+hay espacio extra entre las notas. Este es &lsquo;<samp>6.65pt</samp>&rsquo; para
+&lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>7.7pt</samp>&rsquo; para &lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo; y &lsquo;<samp>8.4pt</samp>&rsquo; para
+&lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Definiciones"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Contadores" accesskey="n" rel="next">Contadores</a>, Previous: <a href="#Notas-al-Pie" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Notas al Pie</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Definiciones-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">13 Definiciones</h2>
+<a name="index-definiciones"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX tiene la capacidad para crear nuevas instrucciones de muchos
+tipos diferentes.
+</p>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand" accesskey="1">\newcommand y \renewcommand</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">(Re)define una nueva instrucción.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter" accesskey="2">\newcounter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Define un nuevo contador.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewlength" accesskey="3">\newlength</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Define una nueva longitud.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox" accesskey="4">\newsavebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Define una nueva caja.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment" accesskey="5">\newenvironment y \renewenvironment</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Definen un nuevo entorno.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem" accesskey="6">\newtheorem</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Definen un nuevo entorno -como <code>theorem</code>.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnewfont" accesskey="7">\newfont</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Define un nuevo nombre de tipo de letra.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cprotect" accesskey="8">\protect</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Usando instrucciones astutas.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newcounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Definiciones" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definiciones</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.1 <code>\newcommand</code> y <code>\renewcommand</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cnewcommand"></a>
+<a name="index-instrucciones_002c-definiendo-nuevas"></a>
+<a name="index-definiendo-una-nueva-instruccion"></a>
+<a name="index-nuevas-instrucciones_002c-definiendo"></a>
+
+<p><code>\newcommand</code> y <code>\renewcommand</code> define y redefine una
+instrucción, respectivamente.
+</p>
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"> \newcommand{<var>instrucción</var>}[<var>n-argumentos</var>]{<var>definición</var>}
+\renewcommand{<var>instrucción</var>}[<var>n-argumentos</var>]{<var>definición</var>}
+ \newcommand{<var>instrucción</var>}[<var>n-argumentos</var>][<var>predeterminado</var>]{<var>definición</var>}
+\renewcommand{<var>instrucción</var>}[<var>n-argumentos</var>][<var>predeterminado</var>]{<var>definición</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>instrucción</var></dt>
+<dd><p>El nombre de la instrucción comenzando con <code>\</code>. Para
+<code>\newcommand</code>, este no se debe haber definido y no debe comenzar
+con <code>\end</code>; para <code>\renewcommand</code>, este ya tiene que estar
+definido.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>n-argumentos</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Un entero opcional entre 1 y 9 especificando el número de argumentos que
+debe tomar la instrucción. El valor predeterminado es para que la
+instrucción no tome argumentos.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>predeterminado</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Si este parámetro opcional está presente, significa que el primer
+argumento del comando es opcional. Cuando se invoca a la nueva
+instrucción, el valor predeterminado del argumento opcional (es decir,
+si no se especifica en la llamada) es la cadena &lsquo;<samp>definición</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>definición</var></dt>
+<dd><p>El texto con el que se sustituirá cada aparición de <code>instrucción</code>;
+una construcción de la forma <code>#<var>n</var></code> en <var>definición</var> es
+reemplazada por el texto del e<var>n</var>ésimo argumento.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewcounter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewlength" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newlength</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newcommand y \renewcommand</a>, Up: <a href="#Definiciones" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definiciones</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewcounter-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.2 <code>\newcounter</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cnewcounter"></a>
+<a name="index-contadores_002c-definiendo-nuevos"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newcounter{<var>nombre-contador</var>}[<var>super</var>]
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\newcounter</code> define un nuevo contador llamado
+<var>nombre-contador</var>. El nuevo contador se inicializa a cero.
+</p>
+<p>Dado el argumento opcional <code>[<var>super</var>]</code>, (<var>nombre-contador</var>
+se restablecerá cuando el contador cuyo nomber es
+<var>super</var> se incremente.
+</p>
+<p>See <a href="#Contadores">Contadores</a>, para mayor información.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewlength"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newsavebox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newcounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Definiciones" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definiciones</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewlength-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.3 <code>\newlength</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cnewlength"></a>
+<a name="index-longitudes_002c-definiendo-nuevas"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newlength{\<var>argumento</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\newlength</code> define el argumento obligatorio como
+una instrucción de
+<em>longitud</em> con un valor de <code>0in</code>. El
+argumento debe ser una secuencia de control, como en
+<code>\newlength{\foo}</code>. Ocurre un error si <code>\foo</code> ya está
+definido.
+</p>
+<p>See <a href="#Longitudes">Longitudes</a>, para saber cómo fijar la nueva longitud a un valor
+distinto de cero, y para más información acerca de las longitudes en
+general.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewsavebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newenvironment y \renewenvironment</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewlength" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newlength</a>, Up: <a href="#Definiciones" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definiciones</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewsavebox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.4 <code>\newsavebox</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cnewsavebox"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newsavebox{<var>instrucción</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Define <code>\<var>instrucción</var></code>, el cual debe ser un nombre de
+instrucción que no se haya definido, para referirse a una nueva bandeja
+para almacenar cajas.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newtheorem</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newsavebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Definiciones" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definiciones</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.5 <code>\newenvironment</code> y <code>\renewenvironment</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cnewenvironment"></a>
+<a name="index-_005crenewenvironment"></a>
+<a name="index-entornos_002c-definiendo"></a>
+<a name="index-definiendo-nuevos-entornos"></a>
+<a name="index-redefiniendo-entornos"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">
+\newenvironment{<var>entorno</var>}[<var>n-argumentos</var>]{<var>antes-definición</var>}
+ {<var>después-definición</var>}
+ \newenvironment{<var>entorno</var>}[<var>n-argumentos</var>][<var>predeterminado</var>]
+ {<var>antes-definición</var>}{<var>después-definición</var>}
+\renewenvironment{<var>entorno</var>}[<var>n-argumentos</var>]
+ {<var>antes-definición</var>}{<var>después-definición</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Estas instrucciones definen o redefinen un entorno <var>entorno</var>, es
+decir, <code>\begin{<var>entorno</var>} &hellip; \end{<var>entorno</var>}</code>.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>entorno</var></dt>
+<dd><p>El nombre del entorno. Para <code>\newenvironment</code>, <var>entorno</var>
+no debe ser un entorno existente, y la instrucción <code>\<var>entorno</var></code>
+debe ser una que no se haya definido previamente.
+Para <code>\renewenvironment</code>,
+<var>entorno</var> debe ser el nombre de un entorno existente.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>n-argumentos</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Un entero desde 1 a 9 denotando el número de argumentos del nuevo
+entorno definido. El valor predeterminado es ningún argumento.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>predeterminado</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Si se especifica, el primer argumento es opcional, y
+<var>predeterminado</var> proporciona el valor predeterminado para ese
+argumento.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>antes-definición</var></dt>
+<dd><p>El texto ampliado en cada aparición de <code>\begin{<var>entorno</var>}</code>;
+una construcción en forma <code>#<var>n</var></code> en <var>antes-definición</var> es
+sustituido por el texto del e<var>n</var>ésimo argumento.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>después-definición</var></dt>
+<dd><p>El texto ampliado de cada aparición de <code>\end{<var>entorno</var>}</code>.
+este no debe contener ningún argumento para parámetros.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewtheorem"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnewfont" accesskey="n" rel="next">\newfont</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newenvironment y \renewenvironment</a>, Up: <a href="#Definiciones" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definiciones</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewtheorem-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.6 <code>\newtheorem</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cnewtheorem"></a>
+<a name="index-teoremas_002c-definiendo"></a>
+<a name="index-definiendo-nuevos-teoremas"></a>
+
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newtheorem{<var>nuevo-entorno</var>}{<var>etiqueta</var>}[<var>con</var>]
+\newtheorem{<var>nuevo-entorno</var>}[<var>numerado-como</var>]{<var>etiqueta</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Esta instrucción define un entorno parecido a teorema. Argumentos:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>nuevoentorno</var></dt>
+<dd><p>El nombre del nuevo entorno a definir; no debe ser el nombre de un
+entorno existente o de lo contrario será redefinido.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>etiqueta</var></dt>
+<dd><p>El texto a imprimir al inicio del entorno, antes del número. Por
+ejemplo, &lsquo;<samp>Teorema</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>numerado_como</var></dt>
+<dd><p>(Opcional). El nombre de un entorno ya definido tal como teorema;
+</p>
+<p>(Opcional). El nombre de un entorno ya definido tal como teorema el
+nuevo entorno será numerado exactamente como <var>numerado_como</var>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>con</var></dt>
+<dd><p>(Opcional). El nombre de un contador definido previamente, una unidad de
+seccionado. El nuevo contador de teorema será restablecido al mismo
+tiempo que el contador <var>con</var>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Cuando menos uno de <var>numerado_como</var> y <var>con</var> se debe especificar,
+no ambos.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewfont"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cprotect" accesskey="n" rel="next">\protect</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newtheorem</a>, Up: <a href="#Definiciones" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definiciones</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnewfont-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.7 <code>\newfont</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cnewfont"></a>
+<a name="index-tipos-de-letra_002c-nuevas-instrucciones-para"></a>
+<a name="index-definicion-de-nuevos-tipos-de-letra"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\newfont{<var>instrucción</var>}{<var>nombredetipo</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Define una secuencia de control <code>\<var>instrucción</var></code>, misma que no
+se debe haber definido, para hacer que <var>nombredetipo</var> sea el tipo de
+letra actual. El archivo bloqueado en el sistema es llamado
+<samp><var>nombredetipo</var>.tfm</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>Esta es una instrucción de bajo nivel para configurar el uso de un tipo
+de letra individual. Comúnmente, los tipos de letra se definen a través
+de familias de archivos <samp>.fd</samp>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cprotect"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnewfont" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\newfont</a>, Up: <a href="#Definiciones" accesskey="u" rel="up">Definiciones</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cprotect-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">13.8 <code>\protect</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cprotect"></a>
+
+<a name="index-instrucciones-fragiles"></a>
+<a name="index-argumentos-moviles"></a>
+<p>Pies de página, saltos de línea, cualquier instrucción que tenga un
+argumento opcional, y muchas más de las así llamadas instrucciones
+<em>frágiles</em>. Cuando una instrucción frágil se utiliza en ciertos
+contextos, llamados <em>argumentos móviles</em>, estas se deben preceder
+con <code>\protect</code>. Además, algunas instrucciones con argumentos
+frágiles deben tener su propia <code>\protect</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Algunos ejemplos de argumentos móviles son <code>\caption</code>
+(see <a href="#figure">figure</a>), <code>\thanks</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>) y @-expresiones
+en entornos <code>tabular</code> y <code>array</code> (see <a href="#tabular">tabular</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-instrucciones-robustas"></a>
+<p>Las instrucciones que no son frágiles se llaman <em>robustas</em>. Estas
+no se deben preceder con <code>\protect</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Vea también:
+</p>
+<div class="smallexample">
+<pre class="smallexample"><a href="http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html">http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html</a>
+</pre><pre class="smallexample"><a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect</a>
+</pre></div>
+
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Contadores"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Longitudes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Longitudes</a>, Previous: <a href="#Definiciones" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Definiciones</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Contadores-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">14 Contadores</h2>
+<a name="index-contadores_002c-una-lista-de"></a>
+<a name="index-variables_002c-una-lista-de"></a>
+
+<p>Cualquier cosa numerada por LaTeX tiene un contador asociado a ella.
+El nombre del contador es el mismo nombre que el nombre del entorno o
+instrucción que produce el número, salvo las que no comienzan con
+<code>\</code>. (<code>enumi</code>&ndash;<code>enumiv</code> se utilizan para entornos
+enumerados anidados). A continuación hay una lista de los contadores
+utilizados en las clases de documentos estándar de LaTeX para
+controlar la numeración.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">part paragraph figure enumi
+chapter subparagraph table enumii
+section page footnote enumiii
+subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+subsubsection
+</pre></div>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol" accesskey="1">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Imprimiendo el valor de un contador.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter" accesskey="2">\usecounter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Utiliza un contador especificado en un entorno de lista.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="3">\value</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Utiliza el valor de un contador en una expresión.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter" accesskey="4">\setcounter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Establece el valor de un contador.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter" accesskey="5">\addtocounter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Añade un calificador a un contador.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="6">\refstepcounter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Añade un contador, restableciendo los contadores subsidiarios.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="7">\stepcounter</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Añade un contador, restableciendo los contadores subsidiarios.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear" accesskey="8">\day \month \year</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Valores numéricos de fecha.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\usecounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Contadores" accesskey="u" rel="up">Contadores</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol_003a-Imprimiendo-Contadores"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.1 <code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Imprimiendo Contadores</h3>
+
+
+<p>Todas estas instrucciones toman como argumento un solo contador, por
+ejemplo, <code>\alph{enumi}</code>.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\alph</code>
+<a name="index-_005calph"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>imprime <var>contador</var> usando letras minúsculas: &lsquo;a&rsquo;, &lsquo;b&rsquo;, <small class="enddots">...</small>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Alph</code>
+<a name="index-_005cAlph"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>utiliza letras mayúsculas: &lsquo;A&rsquo;, &lsquo;B&rsquo;, <small class="enddots">...</small>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\arabic</code>
+<a name="index-_005carabic"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>utiliza números Arábigos: &lsquo;1&rsquo;, &lsquo;2&rsquo;, <small class="enddots">...</small>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\roman</code>
+<a name="index-_005croman"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>utiliza números romanos en minúsculas: &lsquo;i&rsquo;, &lsquo;ii&rsquo;, <small class="enddots">...</small>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\roman</code>
+<a name="index-_005croman-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>utiliza números romanos en mayúsculas: &lsquo;I&rsquo;, &lsquo;II&rsquo;, <small class="enddots">...</small>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\fnsymbol</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfnsymbol-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>imprime el valor de <var>contador</var> en una secuencia específica de nueve
+símbolos (convencionalmente usada para etiquetar notas al pie de
+página). El valor de <var>contador</var> debe estar entre&nbsp;1 y&nbsp;9
+incluido.
+</p>
+<p>Los símbolos no son compatibles en info principalmente, pero aquí están
+los nombres:
+</p><div class="display">
+<pre class="display">asterix(*) dagger(†) ddagger(‡) section-sign(§) paragraph-sign(¶) parallel(‖)
+double-asterix(**) double-dagger(††) double-ddagger(‡‡)
+</pre></div>
+
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cusecounter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="n" rel="next">\value</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a>, Up: <a href="#Contadores" accesskey="u" rel="up">Contadores</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cusecounter_007bcontador_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.2 <code>\usecounter{<var>contador</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cusecounter"></a>
+<a name="index-lista-de-elementos_002c-especificando-el-contador"></a>
+<a name="index-elementos-numerados_002c-especificando-contador"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usecounter{<var>contador</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\usecounter</code> se utiliza en el segundo argumento del
+entorno <code>list</code> para especificar el <var>contador</var> a utilizar para
+numerar los elementos de la lista.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cvalue"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\setcounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cusecounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\usecounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Contadores" accesskey="u" rel="up">Contadores</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cvalue_007bcontador_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.3 <code>\value{<var>contador</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cvalue"></a>
+<a name="index-contadores_002c-consiguiendo-el-valor-de"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\value{<var>contador</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\value</code> produce el valor de <var>contador</var>. Esta
+se puede utilizar en cualquier lugar en que LaTeX espera un número,
+por ejemplo:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setcounter{micontador}{3}
+\addtocounter{micontador}{1}
+\hspace{\value{micontador}\parindent}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csetcounter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\addtocounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cvalue" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\value</a>, Up: <a href="#Contadores" accesskey="u" rel="up">Contadores</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csetcounter_007b_005ccontador_007d_007bvalor_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.4 <code>\setcounter{<var>\contador</var>}{<var>valor</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005csetcounter"></a>
+<a name="index-contadores_002c-configurando"></a>
+<a name="index-fijando-contadores"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\setcounter{<var>contador</var>}{<var>valor</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\setcounter</code> fija el valor de <var>contador</var> al
+argumento <var>valor</var>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005caddtocounter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\refstepcounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csetcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\setcounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Contadores" accesskey="u" rel="up">Contadores</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005caddtocounter_007bcontador_007d_007bvalor_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.5 <code>\addtocounter{<var>contador</var>}{<var>valor</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005caddtocounter"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\addtocounter</code> incrementa <var>contador</var> por la
+cantidad especificada por el argumento <var>valor</var>, que puede ser un
+número negativo.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005crefstepcounter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="n" rel="next">\stepcounter</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\addtocounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Contadores" accesskey="u" rel="up">Contadores</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005crefstepcounter_007bcontador_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.6 <code>\refstepcounter{<var>contador</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005crefstepcounter"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\refstepcounter</code> trabaja de la misma manera que
+<code>\stepcounter</code> See <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>, excepto que esta además define
+el valor actual de <code>\ref</code> para que sea el resultado de
+<code>\thecounter</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cstepcounter"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear" accesskey="n" rel="next">\day \month \year</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\refstepcounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Contadores" accesskey="u" rel="up">Contadores</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cstepcounter_007bcontador_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.7 <code>\stepcounter{<var>contador</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cstepcounter"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\stepcounter</code> añade uno al <var>contador</var> y
+restablece todos los contadores subsidiarios.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\stepcounter</a>, Up: <a href="#Contadores" accesskey="u" rel="up">Contadores</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear_003a-Contadores-Predefinidos"></a>
+<h3 class="section">14.8 <code>\day \month \year</code>: Contadores Predefinidos</h3>
+<a name="index-_005cday"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmonth"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cyear"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX define contadores para el día del mes (<code>\day</code>, 1&ndash;31), mes
+del año (<code>\month</code>, 1&ndash;12), y año (<code>\year</code>, Era Común). Al
+iniciar TeX, estas son establecidas a los valores actuales en el
+sistema donde se está ejecutando TeX. Estas no se actualizan
+conforme al progreso del trabajo.
+</p>
+<p>La instrucción relacionada <code>\today</code> produce una cadena de texto que
+representa el día actual (see <a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Longitudes"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Haciendo-P_00e1rrafos" accesskey="n" rel="next">Haciendo Párrafos</a>, Previous: <a href="#Contadores" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Contadores</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Longitudes-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">15 Longitudes</h2>
+<a name="index-longitudes_002c-definiendo-y-usando"></a>
+
+<p>Una <code>longitud</code> es una medida de distancia. Muchas instrucciones
+LaTeX toman una longitud como argumento.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csetlength" accesskey="1">\setlength</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Establece el valor de longitud.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005caddtolength" accesskey="2">\addtolength</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Añade una cantidad a longitud.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csettodepth" accesskey="3">\settodepth</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Establece una longitud a la profundidad de algo más.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csettoheight" accesskey="4">\settoheight</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Establece la longitud a la altura de algo más.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csettowidth" accesskey="5">\settowidth</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Establece la longitud a la anchura de alguna otra cosa.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Longitudes-Predeterminadas" accesskey="6">Longitudes Predeterminadas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Longitudes que son, algo sí como, predefinidas.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csetlength"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005caddtolength" accesskey="n" rel="next">\addtolength</a>, Up: <a href="#Longitudes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Longitudes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csetlength_007b_005clargo_007d_007bvalor_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">15.1 <code>\setlength{\<var>largo</var>}{<var>valor</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005csetlength"></a>
+<a name="index-longitudes_002c-configurando"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\setlength</code> fija el valor de <var>\largo</var> al
+argumento <var>valor</var>, el cual se puede expresar en cualquier unidad que
+LaTeX entienda, es decir, pulgadas (<code>in</code>), milímetros
+(<code>mm</code>), puntos (<code>pt</code>), puntos grandes (<code>bp</code>, etc.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005caddtolength"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csettodepth" accesskey="n" rel="next">\settodepth</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csetlength" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\setlength</a>, Up: <a href="#Longitudes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Longitudes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005caddtolength_007b_005clargo_007d_007bcantidad_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">15.2 \addtolength{<var>\largo</var>}{<var>cantidad</var>}</h3>
+<a name="index-_005caddtolength"></a>
+<a name="index-longitudes_002c-anadiendo-a"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\addtolength</code> incrementa la &ldquo;instrucción de
+longitud&rdquo; <var>\largo</var> por la cantidad especificada en el argumento
+<var>cantidad</var>, misma que puede ser un valor negativo.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csettodepth"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csettoheight" accesskey="n" rel="next">\settoheight</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddtolength" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\addtolength</a>, Up: <a href="#Longitudes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Longitudes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csettodepth-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">15.3 <code>\settodepth</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005csettodepth"></a>
+
+<p><code>\settodepth{\gnat}{texto}</code>
+</p>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\settodepth</code> fija el valor de una instrucción de
+<code>longitud</code> igual a la profundidad del argumento <code>texto</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csettoheight"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csettowidth" accesskey="n" rel="next">\settowidth</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csettodepth" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\settodepth</a>, Up: <a href="#Longitudes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Longitudes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csettoheight-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">15.4 <code>\settoheight</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005csettoheight"></a>
+
+<p><code>\settoheight{\gnat}{texto}</code>
+</p>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\settoheight</code> fija el valor de la instrucción de
+<code>longitud</code> igual a la altura del argumento <code>texto</code>.
+</p>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csettowidth"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Longitudes-Predeterminadas" accesskey="n" rel="next">Longitudes Predeterminadas</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csettoheight" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\settoheight</a>, Up: <a href="#Longitudes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Longitudes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csettowidth_007b_005clargo_007d_007btexto_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">15.5 <code>\settowidth{\<var>largo</var>}{<var>texto</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005csettowidth"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\settowidth</code> establece el valor del la instrucción
+<var>\largo</var> al valor del argumento <var>texto</var>.
+</p>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Longitudes-Predeterminadas"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csettowidth" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\settowidth</a>, Up: <a href="#Longitudes" accesskey="u" rel="up">Longitudes</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Longitudes-Predeterminadas-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">15.6 Longitudes Predeterminadas</h3>
+<a name="index-longitudes_002c-predefinidas"></a>
+<a name="index-longitudes-predeterminadas"></a>
+
+<p><code>\width</code>
+<a name="index-_005cwidth"></a>
+</p>
+<p><code>\height</code>
+<a name="index-_005cheight"></a>
+</p>
+<p><code>\depth</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdepth"></a>
+</p>
+<p><code>\totalheight</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctotalheight"></a>
+</p>
+<p>Estos parámetros de longitud se pueden utilizar en los argumentos de las
+instrucciones que dibujan cajas (see <a href="#Cajas">Cajas</a>). Especifican el ancho
+natural, etc., del texto en la caja. <code>\totalheight</code> es igual a
+<code>\height</code> + <code>\depth</code>. Para hacer una caja con el texto
+extendido hasta el doble del tamaño natural, por ejemplo, digamos
+</p>
+<p><code>\makebox[ancho\2]{Consiga una camilla}</code>
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Haciendo-P_00e1rrafos"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas" accesskey="n" rel="next">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a>, Previous: <a href="#Longitudes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Longitudes</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Haciendo-Parrafos"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">16 Haciendo Párrafos</h2>
+<a name="index-haciendo-parrafos"></a>
+<a name="index-parrafos"></a>
+
+<p>Un párrafo se termina por medio de una o más líneas completamente en
+blanco &mdash;líneas que no contienen incluso un <code>%</code>. Una línea en
+blanco no debe aparecer donde no se puede iniciar un nuevo párrafo, tal
+como en modo math o en el argumento de una instrucción de seccionado.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cindent" accesskey="1">\indent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Sangrando este párrafo.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cnoindent" accesskey="2">\noindent</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">No sangra el siguiente párrafo.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cparskip" accesskey="3">\parskip</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Añade un espacio antes de párrafos.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Notas-al-Margen" accesskey="4">Notas al Margen</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Coloca palabras en el margen.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cindent"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cnoindent" accesskey="n" rel="next">\noindent</a>, Up: <a href="#Haciendo-P_00e1rrafos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Haciendo Párrafos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cindent-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">16.1 <code>\indent</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cindent"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cparindent-1"></a>
+<a name="index-sangria_002c-forzando-la"></a>
+
+<p><code>\indent</code> produce un espacio horizontal donde el ancho es igual la longitud de <code>\parindent</code>, la sangría de un párrafo
+normal. Esta se utiliza para añadir la sangría de párrafos donde esta
+debería suprimirse en otro caso.
+</p>
+<p>El valor predeterminado para <code>\parindent</code> es <code>1em</code> en modo de
+dos columnas, de lo contrario <code>15pt</code> para documentos de
+<code>10pt</code>, <code>17pt</code> para <code>11pt</code> y <code>1.5em</code> para
+<code>12pt</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cnoindent"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cparskip" accesskey="n" rel="next">\parskip</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cindent" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\indent</a>, Up: <a href="#Haciendo-P_00e1rrafos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Haciendo Párrafos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cnoindent-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">16.2 <code>\noindent</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cnoindent"></a>
+<a name="index-sangria_002c-suprimiendo-la"></a>
+
+<p>Cuando se utiliza al principio de un párrafo, <code>\noindent</code> suprime
+cualquier sangría. Esta no tiene efecto cuando se utiliza en medio de
+un párrafo.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cparskip"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Notas-al-Margen" accesskey="n" rel="next">Notas al Margen</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cnoindent" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\noindent</a>, Up: <a href="#Haciendo-P_00e1rrafos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Haciendo Párrafos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cparskip-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">16.3 <code>\parskip</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cparskip"></a>
+<a name="index-espacio-vertical-antes-de-parrafos"></a>
+
+<p><code>\parskip</code> es una instrucción que preserva la longitud definiendo
+espacio vertical extra añadido antes de cada párrafo. El predeterminado
+es <code>0pt más 1pt</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Notas-al-Margen"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cparskip" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\parskip</a>, Up: <a href="#Haciendo-P_00e1rrafos" accesskey="u" rel="up">Haciendo Párrafos</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Notas-al-Margen-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">16.4 Notas al Margen</h3>
+<a name="index-notas-al-margen"></a>
+<a name="index-notas-en-el-margen"></a>
+<a name="index-observaciones-en-el-margen"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmarginpar"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\marginpar[<var>izquierda</var>]{<var>derecha</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\marginpar</code> crea una nota en el margen. La primera
+línea de una nota tiene que ser la misma línea base que la línea en el
+texto donde ocurre el <code>\marginpar</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Cuando únicamente se especifica el argumento obligatorio <var>right</var>, el
+texto se deberá colocar
+</p>
+<ul>
+<li> en el margen derecho para diseños de un solo lado;
+</li><li> en el margen externo para diseños de dos caras;
+</li><li> en el margen más cercano en diseños de dos columnas.
+</li></ul>
+
+<a name="index-_005creversemarginpar"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnormalmarginpar"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\reversemarginpar</code> coloca las subsecuentes notas al
+margen en el margen (dentro) opuesto. <code>\normalmarginpar</code> las
+coloca en la posición predeterminada.
+</p>
+<p>Cuando se especifican ambos argumentos, se utiliza <var>left</var> para el
+margen izquierdo y se utiliza <var>right</var> para el margen derecho.
+</p>
+<p>La primer palabra normalmente no se debe separar con guiones; usted
+puede habilitar la separación silábica con guiones comenzando la nota
+con <code>\hspace{0pt}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Los parámetros que afectan el formato de la nota son:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\marginparpush</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmarginparpush"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>El espacio mínimo vertical entre notas; el predeterminado es &lsquo;<samp>7pt</samp>&rsquo;
+para documentos de &lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo;, de lo contrario &lsquo;<samp>5pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\marginparsep</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmarginparsep"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Espacio horizontal entre el texto vertical y la nota; predeterminado
+&lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo; para &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo; documentos, en otro caso &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\marginparwidth</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmarginparwidth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>El ancho de la nota en sí misma; el predeterminado para documentos de un
+solo lado de &lsquo;<samp>10pt</samp>&rsquo; es &lsquo;<samp>90pt</samp>&rsquo;, &lsquo;<samp>83pt</samp>&rsquo; para &lsquo;<samp>11pt</samp>&rsquo; y
+&lsquo;<samp>68pt</samp>&rsquo; para &lsquo;<samp>12pt</samp>&rsquo;; &lsquo;<samp>17pt</samp>&rsquo; más en cada caso para
+documentos de dos caras. En el modo de dos columnas, el predeterminado
+es &lsquo;<samp>48pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Modos" accesskey="n" rel="next">Modos</a>, Previous: <a href="#Haciendo-P_00e1rrafos" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Haciendo Párrafos</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Formulas-Matematicas"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">17 Fórmulas Matemáticas</h2>
+<a name="index-formulas-matematicas"></a>
+<a name="index-formulas_002c-matematicas"></a>
+<a name="index-modo-math_002c-ingresando-al"></a>
+
+<a name="index-entorno-math-1"></a>
+<a name="index-math_002c-entorno-1"></a>
+<a name="index-entorno-displaymath-1"></a>
+<a name="index-displaymath_002c-entorno-1"></a>
+<a name="index-entorno-equation-1"></a>
+<a name="index-equation_002c-entorno-1"></a>
+<p>Existen tres entornos que ponen a LaTeX en modo math:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>math</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Para fórmulas que aparecerán directamente en el texto.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>displaymath</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Para fórmulas que aparecerán en su propia línea.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>equation</code></dt>
+<dd><p>El mismo que el del entorno displaymath salvo que este añade un número
+de ecuación en el margen derecho.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_0028"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_005b"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_005d"></a>
+<p>El entorno <code>math</code> se pude utilizar tanto en párrafos como en modo
+LR, pero los entornos <code>displaymath</code> y <code>equation</code> se pueden
+utilizar únicamente en modo párrafo. Los entornos <code>math</code> y
+<code>displaymath</code> se utilizan tan a menudo que tienen las siguientes
+formas abreviadas:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\(...\) <span class="roman">en lugar de</span> \begin{math}...\end{math}
+\[...\] <span class="roman">en lugar de</span> \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_0024"></a>
+<p>De hecho, el entorno <code>math</code> es como una instrucción que tiene
+incluso una forma abreviada:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">$ ... $ <span class="roman">en lugar de</span> \(...\)
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005cboldmath"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cunboldmath"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\boldmath</code> cambia letras y símbolos matemáticos en
+tipo de letra en negrita. Este se utiliza <em>fuera</em> del modo math.
+Por el contrario, la instrucción <code>\unboldmath</code> cambia los glifos
+matemáticos para estar en un tipo de letra normal; este también se
+utiliza <em>fuera</em> del modo math.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cdisplaystyle"></a>
+<p>La declaración <code>\displaystyle</code> presiona para que el tamaño y estilo
+de la fórmula sea el de <code>displaymath</code>, por ejemplo, con limites por
+encima y debajo de sumatorias. Por ejemplo
+</p><div class="example">
+<pre class="example">$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Sub_00edndices-y-Super_00edndices" accesskey="1">Subíndices y Superíndices</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">También conocido como exponente o índice.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos" accesskey="2">Símbolos Matemáticos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Varios garabatos matemáticos.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas" accesskey="3">Funciones Matemáticas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Nombres de funciones Matemáticas como sin y exp.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos" accesskey="4">Acentos Matemáticos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Acentos en Matemáticas.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Espacios-en-Modo-Math" accesskey="5">Espacios en Modo Math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Espacios gruesos, medianos, delgados y negativos.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math" accesskey="6">Miscelánea Math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Cosas que no encajan en ninguna otra categoría.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Sub_00edndices-y-Super_00edndices"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos" accesskey="n" rel="next">Símbolos Matemáticos</a>, Up: <a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Subindices-y-Superindices"></a>
+<h3 class="section">17.1 Subíndices y Superíndices</h3>
+<a name="index-superindice"></a>
+<a name="index-subindice"></a>
+<a name="index-exponente"></a>
+<a name="index-_005f"></a>
+<a name="index-_005e"></a>
+
+<p>Para hacer que una expresión <i>exp</i> aparezca como un subíndice, escriba
+<code>_{</code><i>exp</i><code>}</code>. Para hacer que <i>exp</i> aparezca como un
+exponente, escriba <code>^{</code><i>exp</i><code>}</code>. LaTeX maneja
+superíndices, subíndices y todas esas cosas de manera natural. Incluso
+hace lo correcto cuando algo tiene tanto un subíndice como un
+superíndice.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas" accesskey="n" rel="next">Funciones Matemáticas</a>, Previous: <a href="#Sub_00edndices-y-Super_00edndices" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Subíndices y Superíndices</a>, Up: <a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Simbolos-Matematicos"></a>
+<h3 class="section">17.2 Símbolos Matemáticos</h3>
+<a name="index-simbolos-matematicos"></a>
+<a name="index-simbolos_002c-matematicos"></a>
+<a name="index-letras-griegas"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX proporciona casi cualquier símbolo matemático que muy
+probablemente necesite. Las instrucciones para generarlas se pueden
+utilizar únicamente en modo math. Por ejemplo, si incluye <code>$\pi$</code>
+en su archivo fuente, aparecerá el símbolo de pi (<em>\pi</em>) en su
+salida.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\|</code>
+<a name="index-_005c_007c"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\|</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\aleph</code>
+<a name="index-_005caleph"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\aleph</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\alpha</code>
+<a name="index-_005calpha"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\alpha</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\amalg</code>
+<a name="index-_005camalg"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\amalg</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\angle</code>
+<a name="index-_005cangle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\angle</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\approx</code>
+<a name="index-_005capprox"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\approx</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ast</code>
+<a name="index-_005cast"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\ast</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\asymp</code>
+<a name="index-_005casymp"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\asymp</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\backslash</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbackslash"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>\ (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\beta</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbeta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\beta</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigcap</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigcap"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\bigcap</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigcirc</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigcirc"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\bigcirc</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigcup</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigcup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\bigcup</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigodot</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigodot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\bigodot</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigoplus</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigoplus"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\bigoplus</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigotimes</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigotimes"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\bigotimes</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigtriangledown</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigtriangledown"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\bigtriangledown</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigtriangleup</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigtriangleup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\bigtriangleup</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigsqcup</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigsqcup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\bigsqcup</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\biguplus</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbiguplus"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\biguplus</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigcap</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigcap-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\bigvee</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bigwedge</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbigwedge"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\bigwedge</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bot</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\bot</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bowtie</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbowtie"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\bowtie</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Box</code>
+<a name="index-_005cBox"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>(símbolo de caja cuadrada abierta) </p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bullet</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbullet"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-bala"></a>
+<p><em>\bullet</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cap</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccap"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\cap</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cdot</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccdot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\cdot</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\chi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cchi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\chi</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\circ</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccirc"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\circ</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\clubsuit</code>
+<a name="index-_005cclubsuit"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\clubsuit</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cong</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccong"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\cong</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\coprod</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccoprod"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\coprod</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cup</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\cup</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dagger</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdagger"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\dagger</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dashv</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdashv"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\dashv</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ddagger</code>
+<a name="index-_005cddagger"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\dagger</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Delta</code>
+<a name="index-_005cDelta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Delta</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\delta</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdelta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\delta</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Diamond</code>
+<a name="index-_005cDiamond"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\diamond</em> más grande </p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\diamond</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdiamond"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\diamond</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\diamondsuit</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdiamondsuit"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\diamondsuit</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\div</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdiv"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\div</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\doteq</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdoteq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\doteq</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\downarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdownarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\downarrow</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Downarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cDownarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Downarrow</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ell</code>
+<a name="index-_005cell"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\ell</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\emptyset</code>
+<a name="index-_005cemptyset"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\emptyset</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\epsilon</code>
+<a name="index-_005cepsilon"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\epsilon</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\equiv</code>
+<a name="index-_005cequiv"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\equiv</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\eta</code>
+<a name="index-_005ceta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\eta</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\exists</code>
+<a name="index-_005cexists"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\exists</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\flat</code>
+<a name="index-_005cflat"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\flat</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\forall</code>
+<a name="index-_005cforall"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\forall</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\frown</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfrown"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\frown</em> (relacion)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Gamma</code>
+<a name="index-_005cGamma"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Gamma</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\gamma</code>
+<a name="index-_005cgamma"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\gamma</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ge</code>
+<a name="index-_005cge"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\ge</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\geq</code>
+<a name="index-_005cgeq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\geq</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\gets</code>
+<a name="index-_005cgets"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\gets</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\gg</code>
+<a name="index-_005cgg"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\gg</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\hbar</code>
+<a name="index-_005chbar"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\hbar</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\heartsuit</code>
+<a name="index-_005cheartsuit"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\heartsuit</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\hookleftarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005chookleftarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\hookleftarrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\hookrightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005chookrightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\hookrightarrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\iff</code>
+<a name="index-_005ciff"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\iff</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Im</code>
+<a name="index-_005cIm"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Im</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\in</code>
+<a name="index-_005cin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\in</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\infty</code>
+<a name="index-_005cinfty"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\infty</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\int</code>
+<a name="index-_005cint"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\int</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\iota</code>
+<a name="index-_005ciota"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\iota</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Join</code>
+<a name="index-_005cJoin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>símbolo de corbata de moño condensado (relación) </p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\kappa</code>
+<a name="index-_005ckappa"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\kappa</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Lambda</code>
+<a name="index-_005cLambda"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Lambda</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lambda</code>
+<a name="index-_005clambda"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\lambda</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\land</code>
+<a name="index-_005cland"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\land</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\langle</code>
+<a name="index-_005clangle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\langle</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lbrace</code>
+<a name="index-_005clbrace"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\lbrace</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lbrack</code>
+<a name="index-_005clbrack"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\lbrack</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lceil</code>
+<a name="index-_005clceil"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\lceil</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\le</code>
+<a name="index-_005cle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\le</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\leadsto</code>
+<a name="index-_005cleadsto"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\Leftarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cLeftarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Leftarrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\leftarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cleftarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\leftarrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\leftharpoondown</code>
+<a name="index-_005cleftharpoondown"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\leftharpoondown</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\leftharpoonup</code>
+<a name="index-_005cleftharpoonup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\leftharpoonup</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Leftrightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cLeftrightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Leftrightarrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Leftrightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cLeftrightarrow-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Leftrightarrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\leq</code>
+<a name="index-_005cleq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\leq</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lfloor</code>
+<a name="index-_005clfloor"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\lfloor</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lhd</code>
+<a name="index-_005clhd"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>(flecha apuntando hacia arriba a la izquierda) </p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ll</code>
+<a name="index-_005cll"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\ll</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lnot</code>
+<a name="index-_005clnot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\lnot</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\longleftarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005clongleftarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\longleftarrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\longleftrightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005clongleftrightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\longleftrightarrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\longmapsto</code>
+<a name="index-_005clongmapsto"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\longmapsto</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\longrightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005clongrightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\longrightarrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lor</code>
+<a name="index-_005clor"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\lor</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mapsto</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmapsto"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\mapsto</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mho</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmho"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\mid</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmid"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\mid</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\models</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmodels"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\models</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mp</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmp"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\mp</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\mu</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmu"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\mu</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\nabla</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnabla"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\nabla</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\natural</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnatural"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\natural</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ne</code>
+<a name="index-_005cne"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\ne</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\nearrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnearrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\nearrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\neg</code>
+<a name="index-_005cneg"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\neg</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\neq</code>
+<a name="index-_005cneq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\neq</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ni</code>
+<a name="index-_005cni"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\ni</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\not</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Superpone una / al siguiente operador, tal como <em>\not=</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\notin</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnotin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\ni</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\nu</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnu"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\nu</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\nwarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cnwarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\nwarrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\odot</code>
+<a name="index-_005codot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\odot</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\oint</code>
+<a name="index-_005coint"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\oint</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Omega</code>
+<a name="index-_005cOmega"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Omega</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\omega</code>
+<a name="index-_005comega"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\omega</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ominus</code>
+<a name="index-_005cominus"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\ominus</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\oplus</code>
+<a name="index-_005coplus"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\oplus</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\oslash</code>
+<a name="index-_005coslash"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\oslash</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\otimes</code>
+<a name="index-_005cotimes"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\otimes</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\owns</code>
+<a name="index-_005cowns"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\owns</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\parallel</code>
+<a name="index-_005cparallel"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\parallel</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\partial</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpartial"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\partial</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\perp</code>
+<a name="index-_005cperp"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\perp</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\phi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cphi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\phi</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Pi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cPi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Pi</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\pi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\pi</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\pm</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpm"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\pm</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\prec</code>
+<a name="index-_005cprec"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\prec</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\preceq</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpreceq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\preceq</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\prime</code>
+<a name="index-_005cprime"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\prime</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\prod</code>
+<a name="index-_005cprod"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\prod</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\propto</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpropto"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\propto</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Psi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cPsi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Psi</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\psi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpsi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\psi</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rangle</code>
+<a name="index-_005crangle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\rangle</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rbrace</code>
+<a name="index-_005crbrace"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\rbrace</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rbrack</code>
+<a name="index-_005crbrack"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\rbrack</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rceil</code>
+<a name="index-_005crceil"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\rceil</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Re</code>
+<a name="index-_005cRe"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Re</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rfloor</code>
+<a name="index-_005crfloor"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\rfloor</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rhd</code>
+<a name="index-_005crhd"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>(operación binaria) </p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rho</code>
+<a name="index-_005crho"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\rho</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Rightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cRightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Rightarrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005crightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\rightarrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rightharpoondown</code>
+<a name="index-_005crightharpoondown"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\rightharpoondown</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rightharpoonup</code>
+<a name="index-_005crightharpoonup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\rightharpoonup</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rightleftharpoons</code>
+<a name="index-_005crightleftharpoons"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\rightleftharpoons</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\searrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005csearrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\searrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\setminus</code>
+<a name="index-_005csetminus"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\setminus</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sharp</code>
+<a name="index-_005csharp"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\sharp</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Sigma</code>
+<a name="index-_005cSigma"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Sigma</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sigma</code>
+<a name="index-_005csigma"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\sigma</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sim</code>
+<a name="index-_005csim"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\sim</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\simeq</code>
+<a name="index-_005csimeq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\simeq</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\smallint</code>
+<a name="index-_005csmallint"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\smallint</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\smile</code>
+<a name="index-_005csmile"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\smile</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\spadesuit</code>
+<a name="index-_005cspadesuit"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\spadesuit</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sqcap</code>
+<a name="index-_005csqcap"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\sqcap</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sqcup</code>
+<a name="index-_005csqcup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\sqcup</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sqsubset</code>
+<a name="index-_005csqsubset"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>(relación) </p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sqsubseteq</code>
+<a name="index-_005csqsubseteq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\sqsubseteq</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sqsupset</code>
+<a name="index-_005csqsupset"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>(relación) </p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sqsupseteq</code>
+<a name="index-_005csqsupseteq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\sqsupseteq</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\star</code>
+<a name="index-_005cstar"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\star</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\subset</code>
+<a name="index-_005csubset"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\subset</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\subseteq</code>
+<a name="index-_005csubseteq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\subseteq</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\succ</code>
+<a name="index-_005csucc"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\succ</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\succeq</code>
+<a name="index-_005csucceq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\succeq</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sum</code>
+<a name="index-_005csum"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\sum</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\supset</code>
+<a name="index-_005csupset"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\supset</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\supseteq</code>
+<a name="index-_005csupseteq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\supseteq</em> (relación)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\surd</code>
+<a name="index-_005csurd"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\surd</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\swarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cswarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\swarrow</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tau</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctau"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\tau</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\theta</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctheta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\theta</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\times</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctimes"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\times</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\to</code>
+<a name="index-_005cto"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\to</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\top</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctop"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\top</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\triangle</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctriangle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\triangle</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\triangleleft</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctriangleleft"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\triangleleft</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\triangleright</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctriangleright"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\triangleright</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\unlhd</code>
+<a name="index-_005cunlhd"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>punta de flecha apuntando hacia la izquierda con una línea debajo
+(operación binaria) </p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\unrhd</code>
+<a name="index-_005cunrhd"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>punta de flecha apuntando hacia la derecha con línea debajo
+(operación binaria) </p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Uparrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cUparrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Uparrow</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\uparrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cuparrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\uparrow</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Updownarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cUpdownarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Updownarrow</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\updownarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005cupdownarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\updownarrow</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\uplus</code>
+<a name="index-_005cuplus"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\uplus</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Upsilon</code>
+<a name="index-_005cUpsilon"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Upsilon</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\upsilon</code>
+<a name="index-_005cupsilon"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\upsilon</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\varepsilon</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvarepsilon"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\varepsilon</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\varphi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvarphi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\varphi</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\varpi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvarpi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\varpi</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\varrho</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvarrho"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\varrho</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\varsigma</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvarsigma"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\varsigma</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\vartheta</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvartheta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\vartheta</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\vdash</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvdash"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\vdash</em> (relation)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\vee</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvee"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\vee</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Vert</code>
+<a name="index-_005cVert"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Vert</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\vert</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvert"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\vert</em> (delimitador)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\wedge</code>
+<a name="index-_005cwedge"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\wedge</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\wp</code>
+<a name="index-_005cwp"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\wp</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\wr</code>
+<a name="index-_005cwr"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\wr</em> (operación binaria)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Xi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cXi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Xi</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\xi</code>
+<a name="index-_005cxi"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\xi</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\zeta</code>
+<a name="index-_005czeta"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\zeta</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos" accesskey="n" rel="next">Acentos Matemáticos</a>, Previous: <a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Símbolos Matemáticos</a>, Up: <a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Funciones-Matematicas"></a>
+<h3 class="section">17.3 Funciones Matemáticas</h3>
+<a name="index-funciones-matematicas"></a>
+<a name="index-funciones_002c-matematicas"></a>
+
+<p>Estas instrucciones producen nombres de función romanos en modo math con
+el espaciado adecuado.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\arccos</code>
+<a name="index-_005carccos"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\arccos</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\arcsin</code>
+<a name="index-_005carcsin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\arcsin</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\arctan</code>
+<a name="index-_005carctan"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\arctan</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\arg</code>
+<a name="index-_005carg"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\arg</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bmod</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbmod"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Operador residuo binario (<em>x \bmod y</em>)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cos</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccos"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\cos</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cosh</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccosh"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\cosh</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cot</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\cos</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\coth</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccoth"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\cosh</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\csc</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccsc"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\csc</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\deg</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdeg"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\deg</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\det</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdet"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\deg</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dim</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdim"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\dim</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\exp</code>
+<a name="index-_005cexp"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\exp</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\gcd</code>
+<a name="index-_005cgcd"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\gcd</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\hom</code>
+<a name="index-_005chom"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\hom</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\inf</code>
+<a name="index-_005cinf"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\inf</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ker</code>
+<a name="index-_005cker"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\ker</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lg</code>
+<a name="index-_005clg"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\lg</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lim</code>
+<a name="index-_005clim"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\lim</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\liminf</code>
+<a name="index-_005climinf"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\liminf</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\limsup</code>
+<a name="index-_005climsup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\limsup</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ln</code>
+<a name="index-_005cln"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\ln</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\log</code>
+<a name="index-_005clog"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\log</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\max</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmax"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\max</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\min</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\min</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\pmod</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpmod"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>residuo entre paréntesis, como en (<em>\pmod 2^n - 1</em>)
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\Pr</code>
+<a name="index-_005cPr"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\Pr</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sec</code>
+<a name="index-_005csec"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\sec</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sin</code>
+<a name="index-_005csin"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\sin</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sinh</code>
+<a name="index-_005csinh"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\sinh</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sup</code>
+<a name="index-_005csup"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>sup
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tan</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctan"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\tan</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tanh</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctanh"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p><em>\tanh</em>
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Espacios-en-Modo-Math" accesskey="n" rel="next">Espacios en Modo Math</a>, Previous: <a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Funciones Matemáticas</a>, Up: <a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Acentos-Matematicos"></a>
+<h3 class="section">17.4 Acentos Matemáticos</h3>
+<a name="index-acentos-matematicos"></a>
+<a name="index-acentos_002c-matematicas"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX proporciona una variedad de instrucciones para producir letras
+acentuadas en matemáticas. Son distintas de los acentos en un texto normal
+(see <a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a>).
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\acute</code>
+<a name="index-_005cacute"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-acento-agudo_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Acento agudo en modo Math: <em>\acute{x}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\bar</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbar"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-acento-barra-horizontal_002c-math"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-macron_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Acento barra horizontal (macrón) en modo Math: <em>\bar{x}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\breve</code>
+<a name="index-_005cbreve"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-acento-breve_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Acento breve en modo Math: <em>\breve{x}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\check</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccheck"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-acento-de-verificacion_002c-math"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-hacek_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Acento de verificación h&aacute;&#269;ek en modo Math: <em>\check{x}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ddot</code>
+<a name="index-_005cddot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-acento-dieresis_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Acento diéresis en modo Math: <em>\ddot{x}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dot</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdot"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-acento-punto-superior_002c-math"></a>
+<a name="index-punto-superior-acento_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Acento punto superior en modo Math: <em>\dot{x}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\grave</code>
+<a name="index-_005cgrave"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-acento-grave_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Acento grave en modo Math: <em>\grave{x}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\hat</code>
+<a name="index-_005chat"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-acento-circunflejo_002c-math"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-circunflejo_002c-math-1"></a>
+<p>Acento circunflejo en modo Math: <em>\hat{x}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\imath</code>
+<a name="index-_005cimath"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-i-sin-punto_002c-math"></a>
+<p>i sin punto en modo Math.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\jmath</code>
+<a name="index-_005cjmath"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-j-sin-punto_002c-math"></a>
+<p>j sin punto en modo Math.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\tilde</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctilde"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-acento-tilde_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Acento tilde en modo Math: <em>\tilde{x}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\vec</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvec"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-de-vector_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Símbolo de vector en modo Math: <em>\vec{x}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\widehat</code>
+<a name="index-_005cwidehat"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-acento-circunflejo-amplio_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Acento circunflejo amplio en modo Math: <em>\widehat{x+y}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\widetilde</code>
+<a name="index-_005cwidetilde"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-acento-tilde-amplia_002c-math"></a>
+<p>Acento tilde amplia en modo Math: <em>\widetilde{x+y}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Espacios-en-Modo-Math"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math" accesskey="n" rel="next">Miscelánea Math</a>, Previous: <a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Acentos Matemáticos</a>, Up: <a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Espacios-en-Modo-Math-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">17.5 Espacios en Modo Math</h3>
+<a name="index-espacio-dentro-del-modo-math"></a>
+<a name="index-modo-math-mode_002c-espaciado"></a>
+
+<p>En un entorno <code>math</code>, LaTeX ignora los espacios que usted
+escriba y coloca espacios de acuerdo a las reglas normales para texto
+matemático. Si desea un espaciado diferente, LaTeX proporciona las
+siguientes instrucciones para su uso en modo matemático:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\;</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_003b"></a>
+<p>Un espacio de grosor (<em>5\over18\,</em>cuádruple).
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\:</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\&gt;</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_003a"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_003e-1"></a>
+<p>Ambos producen un espacio medio (<em>2\over9\,</em>cuádruple).
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\,</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_002c"></a>
+<p>Un espacio fino (<em>1\over6\,</em>cuádruple); no se limita a modo matemático.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>\!</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Un espacio fino negativo (<em>-{1\over6}\,</em>cuádruple).
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Miscel_00e1nea-Math"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Espacios-en-Modo-Math" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Espacios en Modo Math</a>, Up: <a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Miscelanea-Math"></a>
+<h3 class="section">17.6 Miscelánea Math</h3>
+<a name="index-miscelanea-math"></a>
+
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\*</code>
+<a name="index-_005c_002a"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-multiplicacion-discrecional"></a>
+<a name="index-simbolo-de-multiplicacion_002c-con-salto-de-linea-discrecional"></a>
+<p>Un símbolo de multiplicación &ldquo;discrecional&rdquo;, en el que se permiten
+saltos de línea.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\cdots</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccdots"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Puntos suspensivos horizontales con los puntos elevados al centro de la
+línea.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ddots</code>
+<a name="index-_005cddots"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Puntos suspensivos en diagonal: <em>\ddots</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\frac{num}{den}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cfrac_007bnum_007d_007bden_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cfrac"></a>
+<p>Produce la fracción <code>num</code> dividida entre <code>den</code>.
+</p>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\left <var>delimitador1</var> ... \right <var>delimitador2</var></code>
+<a name="index-_005cleft-delimitador1-_002e_002e_002e-_005cright-delimitador2"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cright"></a>
+<a name="index-delimitador-nulo"></a>
+<p>Los dos delimitadores no necesitan coincidir; &lsquo;<samp>.</samp>&rsquo; actúa como un
+delimitador nulo, sin producir salida. Los delimitadores son del tamaño
+de acuerdo a las matemáticas en el medio. Ejemplo: <code>\left(
+\sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\overbrace{<var>texto</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005coverbrace_007btexto_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Genera un par de <var>texto</var> más. Por ejemplo,
+<em>\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;veces}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\overline{<var>texto</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005coverline_007btexto_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Genera una línea horizontal sobre <var>texo</var>. Por ejemplo,
+<em>\overline{x+y}</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\sqrt[<var>raíz</var>]{argumento}</code>
+<a name="index-_005csqrt_005braiz_005d_007bargumento_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Produce la representación de la raíz cuadrada de <var>argumento</var>. El
+argumento opcional <var>raíz</var> determina qué raíz producir. Por ejemplo,
+la raíz cúbica de <code>x+y</code> se escribe como <code>$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\stackrel{<var>texto</var>}{<var>relación</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cstackrel_007btexto_007d_007brelacion_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Coloca el <var>texto</var> sobre la <var>relación</var>.
+</p>
+<p>Por ejemplo, <code>\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\underbrace{matemáticas}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cunderbrace_007bmatematicas_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Genera <var>matemáticas</var> con una llave por debajo.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\underline{text}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cunderline_007btext_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Provoca que se subraye el <var>texto</var>, el cual bien puede estar en modo
+math o no. La línea siempre está por debajo del texto, teniendo en
+cuenta los descendientes.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\vdots</code>
+<a name="index-_005cvdots"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cvdots-1"></a>
+<p>Produce puntos suspensivos verticales.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Modos"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Estilos-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="n" rel="next">Estilos de Página</a>, Previous: <a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Modos-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">18 Modos</h2>
+<a name="index-modos"></a>
+<a name="index-modo-parrafo"></a>
+<a name="index-modo-math"></a>
+<a name="index-modo-izquierda_002da_002dderecha"></a>
+<a name="index-modo-lR"></a>
+
+
+<p>Cuando LaTeX está procesando el texto fuente, este siempre está en
+uno de tres modos:
+</p>
+<ul>
+<li> Modo Párrafo
+</li><li> Modo Math
+</li><li> Modo de Izquierda a derecha (Left-to-Right), llamado modo LR para
+abreviar
+</li></ul>
+
+<p>LaTeX cambia el modo sólo cuando sube o baja una escala a un
+diferente nivel, aunque no todos los cambios de nivel producen cambios
+de modo. Los cambios de modo sólo se producen al entrar o salir de un
+entorno, o cuando LaTeX está procesando el argumento de determinadas
+instrucciones que producen texto.
+</p>
+<p>El &ldquo;modo Párrafo&rdquo; es el más común; es en el que LaTeX está cuando
+procesa texto ordinario. En ese modo, LaTeX rompe el texto en líneas
+y separa líneas en páginas. LaTeX está en &ldquo;modo math&rdquo; cuando está
+generando fórmulas matemáticas. En &ldquo;modo LR&rdquo;, como en modo párrafo,
+LaTeX considera que la salida que produce es una cadena de palabras
+con espacios entre ellas. Sin embargo, a diferencia del modo párrafo,
+LaTeX sigue yendo de izquierda a derecha; nunca inicia una nueva
+línea en modo LR. Incluso si usted pone un centenar de palabras en una
+<code>\mbox</code>, LaTeX mantendrá la composición de izquierda a derecha
+dentro de una caja única, y luego se quejará porque la caja resultante
+fue demasiado grande para caber en la línea.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX está en modo LR cuando comienza a hacer una caja con una
+instrucción <code>\mbox</code>. Usted puede conseguir introducirse en un modo
+diferente dentro de la caja &mdash;por ejemplo, usted puede hacerlo entrar
+en el modo matemático para poner una fórmula en la caja. También hay
+varias instrucciones productoras de texto y entornos para hacer una caja
+que ponga a LaTeX en el modo de párrafo. La caja hecha por medio de
+una de estas instrucciones o entornos se llama <code>parbox</code>. Cuando
+LaTeX está en el modo de párrafo mientras que hace una caja, se dice
+que está en &ldquo;modo interno de párrafo&rdquo;. Su modo de párrafo normal, que
+se inicia fuera de él, se llama el &ldquo;modo de párrafo externo&rdquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Estilos-de-P_00e1gina"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="n" rel="next">Espacios</a>, Previous: <a href="#Modos" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Modos</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Estilos-de-Pagina"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">19 Estilos de Página</h2>
+<a name="index-estilos_002c-pagina"></a>
+<a name="index-estilos-de-pagina"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\documentclass</code> determina el tamaño y posición de
+las cabeceras y pies de página. El estilo de página determina lo que
+sucede en ellos.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle" accesskey="1">\maketitle</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Genera una página de título.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering" accesskey="2">\pagenumbering</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Fija el estilo utilizado para los números de página.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle" accesskey="3">\pagestyle</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Cambia el estilo de las cabeceras/pies de página.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cthispagestyle" accesskey="4">\thispagestyle</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Cambiar el estilo de las cabeceras/pies de página para esa página.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmaketitle"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering" accesskey="n" rel="next">\pagenumbering</a>, Up: <a href="#Estilos-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="u" rel="up">Estilos de Página</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmaketitle-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.1 <code>\maketitle</code></h3>
+<a name="index-titulos_002c-haciendo"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmaketitle"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\maketitle</code> genera un título en una página
+independiente &mdash; excepto en la clase <code>article</code>, donde se coloca el
+título en la parte superior de la primera página. La información
+utilizada para producir el título se obtiene de las siguientes
+declaraciones:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\author{<var>nombre</var> \and <var>nombre2</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cauthor_007bnombre-_005cand-nombre2_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-autor_002c-para-titlepage"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-para-_005cauthor"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cand-para-_005cauthor"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\author</code> declara los autor(es) del documento, donde
+el argumento es una lista de autores separados por instrucciones
+<code>\and</code>. Use <code>\\</code> para separar líneas con una única entrada de
+autor &mdash;por ejemplo, para proporcionar las entidades de autor o
+dirección.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\date{<var>texto</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdate_007btexto_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-fecha_002c-para-la-pagina-de-titulo"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\date</code> declara el <var>texto</var> para ser la fecha del
+documento. Sin la instrucción <code>\date</code>, se utiliza la fecha actual
+(see <a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\thanks{<var>texto</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cthanks_007btexto_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-thanks_002c-para-titlepage"></a>
+<a name="index-creditos-al-pie-de-pagina"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\thanks</code> produce un pie de página
+(<code>\footnote</code>) para el título, normalmente utilizada para
+reconocimiento de créditos.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\title{<var>texto</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctitle_007btexto_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-title_002c-para-titlepage"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-para-_005ctitle"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\title</code> declara <var>texto</var> para ser el título del
+documento. Use <code>\\</code> para forzar un salto de línea, de la manera
+usual.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cpagenumbering"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle" accesskey="n" rel="next">\pagestyle</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\maketitle</a>, Up: <a href="#Estilos-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="u" rel="up">Estilos de Página</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cpagenumbering-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.2 <code>\pagenumbering</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cpagenumbering"></a>
+<a name="index-estilo-de-numeracion-de-pagina"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\pagenumbering{<var>estilo</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Especifica el estilo de los números de página, de acuerdo a
+<var>estilo</var>. <code>\pagenumbering</code> tambien
+reinicializa le numero de pagína a <em>1</em>. Los valores de <var>estilo</var>
+que se pueden utilizar son por ejemplo::
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>arabic</code></dt>
+<dd><p>números arábigos
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>roman</code></dt>
+<dd><p>números romanos en minúscula
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>Roman</code></dt>
+<dd><p>numeros romanos en mayúscula
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>alph</code></dt>
+<dd><p>letras en minúscula
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>Alph</code></dt>
+<dd><p>letras en mayúscula
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cpagestyle"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthispagestyle" accesskey="n" rel="next">\thispagestyle</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\pagenumbering</a>, Up: <a href="#Estilos-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="u" rel="up">Estilos de Página</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cpagestyle-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.3 <code>\pagestyle</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cpagestyle"></a>
+<a name="index-estilo-de-encabezado"></a>
+<a name="index-estilo-del-pie-de-pagina"></a>
+<a name="index-siguiendo-el-estilo-de-encabezado-y-pie-de-pagina"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\pagestyle{<var>estilo</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\pagestyle</code> especifica como se componen
+tipográficamente las cabeceras y pies de página a partir de la página
+actual. Valores para <var>estilo</var>:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>plain</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Únicamente un número de página sencillo.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>empty</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Cabeceras y pies de página vacíos, por ejemplo, sin números de página.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>headings</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Coloca encabezados en cada página. El estilo de documento especifica lo
+que sucede en las cabeceras.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>myheadings</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Cabeceras personalizadas, especificadas via las instrucciones
+<code>\markboth</code> o <code>\markright</code>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Aquí están las descripciones de <code>\markboth</code> y <code>\markright</code>:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\markboth{<var>izquierda</var>}{<var>derecha</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmarkboth_007bizquierda_007d_007bderecha_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Establece ambas cabeceras izquierda y derecha. Una &ldquo;cabecera a mano
+izquierda&rdquo; (<var>izquierda</var>) es generada por la última instrucción
+<code>\markboth</code> antes del final de la página, mientras que una
+&ldquo;cabecera a mano derecha&rdquo; (<var>derecha</var>) es generada por la primera
+<code>\markboth</code> o <code>\markright</code> que venga en la página si la hay,
+de otra manera por la última antes de la página.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\markright{<var>derecha</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005cmarkright_007bderecha_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Establece la cabecera de la derecha, dejando la cabecera de la izquierda
+sin cambios.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cthispagestyle"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\pagestyle</a>, Up: <a href="#Estilos-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="u" rel="up">Estilos de Página</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cthispagestyle_007bestilo_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">19.4 <code>\thispagestyle{<var>estilo</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cthispagestyle"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\thispagestyle</code> trabaja de la misma manera que la
+instrucción <code>\pagestyle</code> (vea la sección previa) excepto que esta
+únicamente cambia el <var>estilo</var> de la página actual.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Espacios"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Cajas" accesskey="n" rel="next">Cajas</a>, Previous: <a href="#Estilos-de-P_00e1gina" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Estilos de Página</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Espacios-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">20 Espacios</h2>
+<a name="index-espacios"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX tiene muchas formas de producir espacios en blanco (o llenos).
+</p>
+<p>Otra instrucción que produce espacios es <code>\</code> para producir un
+espacio &ldquo;fino&rdquo; (por lo general 1/6cuadrático).
+Se puede
+utilizar en modo texto, pero más a menudo es útil en modo matemático
+(see <a href="#Espacios-en-Modo-Math">Espacios en Modo Math</a>).
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><th colspan="3" align="left" valign="top"><pre class="menu-comment">Espacio horizontal
+</pre></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005chspace" accesskey="1">\hspace</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Espacio horizontal fijo.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005chfill" accesskey="2">\hfill</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Espacio horizontal extensible.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cSPACE" accesskey="3">\SPACE</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Espacio normal entre palabras.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cAT" accesskey="4">\AT</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Finalizando una frase.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cthinspace" accesskey="5">\thinspace</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Una sexta parte de una em.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005c_002f" accesskey="6">\/</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Corrección cursiva por caracteres.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005chrulefill" accesskey="7">\hrulefill</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Regla horizontal extensible.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cdotfill" accesskey="8">\dotfill</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Puntos horizontales extensibles.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><th colspan="3" align="left" valign="top"><pre class="menu-comment">
+
+Espacio Vertical
+</pre></th></tr><tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005caddvspace" accesskey="9">\addvspace</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Añadiendo espacio vertical arbitrario si es necesario.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Espacio vertical fijo.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cvfill">\vfill</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Espacio vertical infinitamente extensible.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cvspace">\vspace</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Añadiendo espacio vertical arbitrario.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005chspace"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005chfill" accesskey="n" rel="next">\hfill</a>, Up: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="u" rel="up">Espacios</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005chspace-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.1 <code>\hspace</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005chspace"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\hspace[*]{<var>longitud</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\hspace</code> añade espacio horizontal. El argumento
+<var>length</var> se puede expresar en cualquier término que LaTeX
+entienda: puntos, pulgadas, etc. Esta es la longitud a preservar.
+Usted puede agregar tanto espacios negativos como positivos con una
+instrucción <code>\hspace</code>; agregar espacio negativo es como espacio
+hacia atrás.
+</p>
+<p>LaTeX normalmente elimina el espacio horizontal que viene al
+principio o al final de una línea. Para preservar este espacio, use la
+forma opcional con <code>*</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005chfill"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cSPACE" accesskey="n" rel="next">\SPACE</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chspace" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hspace</a>, Up: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="u" rel="up">Espacios</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005chfill-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.2 <code>\hfill</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005chfill"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\hfill</code> produce un &ldquo;relleno de longitud&rdquo; que no
+tiene espacio natural sino que se puede extender o reducir en sentido
+horizontal en la medida necesaria.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cfill"></a>
+<p>El parámetro <code>\fill</code> es la misma longitud a rellenar (técnicamente,
+el valor a agregar &lsquo;<samp>0pt plus1fill</samp>&rsquo;); es decir, <code>\hspace\fill</code>
+es equivalente a <code>\hfill</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cSPACE"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cAT" accesskey="n" rel="next">\AT</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chfill" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hfill</a>, Up: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="u" rel="up">Espacios</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cSPACE-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.3 <code>\SPACE</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cSPACE"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cTAB"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cNEWLINE"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\ </code> (space) produce un espacio entre palabras
+normal. Es útil después de signos de puntuación que no deben terminar
+una oración. Por ejemplo, <code>Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\
+Math\. Soc.\ es fundamental</code>. Esta también se suele utilizar después de
+secuencias de control, como en <code>\TeX\ es un sistema agradable</code>.
+</p>
+<p>En circunstancias normales, <code>\</code><tt class="key">tab</tt> y <code>\</code><tt class="key">newline</tt>
+son equivalentes a <code>\ </code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cAT"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cthinspace" accesskey="n" rel="next">\thinspace</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cSPACE" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\SPACE</a>, Up: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="u" rel="up">Espacios</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005c_0040"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.4 <code>\@</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005c_0040"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\@</code> hace que el siguiente carácter de puntuación
+final una declaración incluso si normalmente no es así. Esto se suele
+utilizar después de una letra mayúscula. Aquí están lado a lado
+ejemplos con y sin <code>\@</code>:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">&hellip; en C\@. Pascal, aunque &hellip;
+&hellip; en C. Pascal, aunque &hellip;
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>produce
+</p>
+<blockquote>
+<p>&hellip; en C. Pascal, aunque &hellip;
+&hellip; en C. Pascal, aunque &hellip;
+</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cthinspace"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005c_002f" accesskey="n" rel="next">\/</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cAT" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\AT</a>, Up: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="u" rel="up">Espacios</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cthinspace-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.5 <code>\thinspace</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cthinspace"></a>
+
+<p><code>\thinspace</code> produce un espacio inviolable e inextensible que es de
+un 1/6 de em. Este es el espacio adecuado para su uso en citas
+anidadas, como en &rsquo;&rdquo;.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005c_002f"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005chrulefill" accesskey="n" rel="next">\hrulefill</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cthinspace" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\thinspace</a>, Up: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="u" rel="up">Espacios</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005c_002f-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.6 <code>\/</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005c_002f"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\/</code> produce una <em>corrección en cursiva</em>. Este
+es un pequeño espacio definido por el diseñador de tipografías para un
+carácter determinado, para evitar chocar con el carácter que lo sigue.
+El carácter en cursiva <i>f</i> típicamente tiene un valor de corrección en
+cursiva grande.
+</p>
+<p>Si el siguiente carácter es un punto o una coma, no es necesario
+insertar una corrección en cursiva, dado que estos símbolos tienen una
+puntuación de muy poca altura. Sin embargo, con punto y coma o dos
+puntos, así como letras normales, puede ayudar. Compare
+<i>f: f;</i> (en la salida TeX, las &lsquo;f&rsquo;s están separadas correctamente)
+con <i>f: f;</i>.
+</p>
+<p>A pesar del nombre, los caracteres latinos también pueden tener una
+corrección en cursiva. Compare
+pdfTeX (en la TeX salida, hay un pequeño espacio después de la
+&lsquo;f&rsquo;)
+con pdfTeX.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005chrulefill"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cdotfill" accesskey="n" rel="next">\dotfill</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005c_002f" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\/</a>, Up: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="u" rel="up">Espacios</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005chrulefill-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.7 <code>\hrulefill</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005chrulefill"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\hrulefill</code> produce un &ldquo;relleno de longitud&rdquo; el
+cual se puede estrechar o estirar horizontalmente. Este se llenará con
+una regla horizontal.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cdotfill"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005caddvspace" accesskey="n" rel="next">\addvspace</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005chrulefill" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\hrulefill</a>, Up: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="u" rel="up">Espacios</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cdotfill-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.8 <code>\dotfill</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cdotfill"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\dotfill</code> produce un &ldquo;relleno de longitud&rdquo; la
+cual se rellena con puntos en lugar de sólo espacios en blanco.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005caddvspace"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip" accesskey="n" rel="next">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cdotfill" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\dotfill</a>, Up: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="u" rel="up">Espacios</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005caddvspace-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.9 <code>\addvspace</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005caddvspace"></a>
+<a name="index-espacio-vertical"></a>
+<a name="index-espacio-vertical_002c-insertando"></a>
+
+<p><code>\addvspace{longitud}</code>
+</p>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\addvspace</code> normalmente añade un espacio vertical
+de altura longitud. Sin embargo, si el espacio vertical ya se ha
+añadido al mismo punto en la salida por medio de una instrucción
+<code>\addvspace</code> anterior, esta instrucción no añade más espacio que el
+necesario para hacer que la longitud natural del espacio vertical total
+equivalente a <code>longitud</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvfill" accesskey="n" rel="next">\vfill</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddvspace" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\addvspace</a>, Up: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="u" rel="up">Espacios</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.10 <code>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</code></h3>
+
+<p>Estas instrucciones producen una determinada cantidad de espacio.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\bigskip</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cbigskip"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cbigskipamount"></a>
+<p>Al igual que <code>\vspace{bigskipamount}</code>, normalmente alrededor de
+un espacio de línea (con estirar y encoger).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\medskip</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cmedskip"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cmedskipamount"></a>
+<p>Al igual que <code>\vspace{medskipamount}</code>, normalmente cerca de la
+mitad del espacio de una línea (con estirar y encoger).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\smallskip</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005csmallskip"></a>
+<a name="index-_005csmallskipamount"></a>
+<p>Al igual que <code>\vspace{smallskipamount}</code>, normalmente alrededor de
+un cuarto del espacio de una línea (con estirar y encoger).
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>Los parámetros <code>\...cantidad</code> están determinados por la clase de
+documento.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cvfill"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cvspace" accesskey="n" rel="next">\vspace</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</a>, Up: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="u" rel="up">Espacios</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cvfill-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.11 <code>\vfill</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cvfill"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\vfill</code> produce un relleno de longitud (pegado) el
+cual se puede reducir y estirar verticalmente tanto como sea necesario.
+Este es equivalente a <code>\vspace{\fill}</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005chfill">\hfill</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cvspace"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cvfill" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\vfill</a>, Up: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="u" rel="up">Espacios</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cvspace_005b_002a_005d_007blongitud_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">20.12 <code>\vspace[*]{<var>longitud</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cvspace"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\vspace[*]{<var>longitud</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\vspace</code> añade el espacio vertical <var>length</var>, es
+decir, un relleno de longitud. <var>longitud</var> puede ser positivo o
+negativo.
+</p>
+<p>Normalmente, LaTeX remueve el espacio vertical añadido por
+<code>\vspace</code> en la parte superior o inferior de una página. Con el
+argumento opcional <code>*</code>, no se elimina el espacio.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Cajas"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Inserciones-Especiales" accesskey="n" rel="next">Inserciones Especiales</a>, Previous: <a href="#Espacios" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Espacios</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Cajas-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">21 Cajas</h2>
+
+<a name="index-cajas"></a>
+
+<p>Todos los parámetros de longitud predeterminados (see <a href="#Longitudes-Predeterminadas">Longitudes Predeterminadas</a>) se pueden utilizar en los argumentos de las
+instrucciones que generan cajas.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmbox" accesskey="1">\mbox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Cajas horizontales.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cfbox-y-_005cframebox" accesskey="2">\fbox y \framebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Coloca un marco alrededor de una caja.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#lrbox" accesskey="3">lrbox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Un entorno como <code>\sbox</code>.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox" accesskey="4">\makebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Caja, de posición ajustable.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cparbox" accesskey="5">\parbox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Caja con texto en modo párrafo.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005craisebox" accesskey="6">\raisebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Sube o baja el texto.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csavebox" accesskey="7">\savebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Al igual que <code>\makebox</code>, pero guarda el texto para utilizarlo posteriormente.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csbox" accesskey="8">\sbox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Igual que <code>\mbox</code>, pero guarda el texto para utilizarlo posteriormente.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cusebox" accesskey="9">\usebox</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Imprime texto guardado.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmbox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cfbox-y-_005cframebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\fbox y \framebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Cajas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cajas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmbox_007btexto_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.1 <code>\mbox{<var>texto}</var></code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cmbox"></a>
+
+<a name="index-division-silabica_002c-impidiendo"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\mbox</code> crea una caja lo suficientemente ancha para
+contener el texto creado por sus argumentos. El <var>texto</var> no se
+separa en líneas, por lo tanto este se puede utilizar para prevenir la
+separación silábica.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cfbox-y-_005cframebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#lrbox" accesskey="n" rel="next">lrbox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmbox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\mbox</a>, Up: <a href="#Cajas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cajas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cfbox-y-_005cframebox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.2 <code>\fbox</code> y <code>\framebox</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cfbox"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cframebox-1"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\fbox{<var>texto</var>}
+\framebox[<var>ancho</var>][<var>posición</var>]{<var>texto</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Las instrucciones <code>\fbox</code> y <code>\framebox</code> son como <code>\mbox</code>,
+excepto que estas ponen un marco al rededor del exterior de la caja que
+se está creando.
+</p>
+<p>Además, la instrucción <code>\framebox</code> permite especificar
+explícitamente la anchura de la caja con el argumento opcional
+<var>width</var> (una dimensión), y la posiciona con el argumento opcional
+<var>posición</var>. </p>
+<a name="index-_005cfboxrule-1"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cfboxsep-1"></a>
+<p>Ambas instrucciones producen una regla de espesor <code>\fboxrule</code>
+(predeterminado a &lsquo;<samp>.4pt</samp>&rsquo;), y dejan un espacio de <code>\fboxsep</code>
+(predeterminado a &lsquo;<samp>3pt</samp>&rsquo;) entre la regla y el contenido de la caja.
+</p>
+<p>See <a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>, para la instrucción <code>\framebox</code> en el
+entorno <code>picture</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="lrbox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\makebox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cfbox-y-_005cframebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\fbox y \framebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Cajas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cajas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="lrbox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.3 <code>lrbox</code></h3>
+<a name="index-lrbox"></a>
+
+<p><code>\begin{lrbox}{instrucción} texto \end{lrbox}</code>
+</p>
+<p>Esta es la forma de entorno de <code>\sbox</code>.
+</p>
+<p>El texto dentro del entorno se guarda en la caja <code>instrucción</code>,
+misma que se debe haber declarado con <code>\newsavebox</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cparbox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\parbox</a>, Previous: <a href="#lrbox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">lrbox</a>, Up: <a href="#Cajas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cajas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakebox-2"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.4 <code>\makebox</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cmakebox"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\makebox[<var>ancho</var>][<var>posición</var>]{<var>texto</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\makebox</code> crea una caja lo suficientemente ancha
+para contener el <var>texto</var> especificado. La anchura de la caja es
+especificada por el argumento opcional <var>ancho</var>. La posición del
+texto dentro de la caja está determinada por el argumento opcional
+<var>posición</var>, el cual puede tomar los siguientes valores:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Centrado (predeterminado).
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>l</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Alineado a la izquierda
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>r</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Alineado a la derecha
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>s</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Alineado (justificado) a través de <var>ancho</var>; <var>texto</var> debe
+contener espacio elástico para que esto funcione.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p><code>\makebox</code> también se utiliza en el entorno picture see <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cparbox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005craisebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\raisebox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\makebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Cajas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cajas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cparbox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.5 <code>\parbox</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cparbox"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\parbox[<var>posición</var>][<var>alto</var>][<var>pos-interna</var>]{<var>ancho</var>}{<var>texto</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\parbox</code> produce una caja cuyo contenido es creado
+en modo <code>paragraph</code>. Se debe utilizar para hacer una caja de
+pequeñas piezas de texto, sin nada lujoso en el interior. En
+particular, no debe utilizar ningún entorno que genere párrafos dentro
+de un argumento <code>\parbox</code>. Para grandes piezas de texto,
+incluyendo aquellas que contienen un entorno que genera párrafos, debe
+usar un entorno <code>minipágina</code> (see <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>).
+</p>
+<p><code>\parbox</code> tiene dos argumentos obligatorios:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>ancho</var></dt>
+<dd><p>la anchura de parbox;
+</p></dd>
+<dt><var>texto</var></dt>
+<dd><p>El texto que va dentro de la parbox.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<p>El argumento opcional <var>posición</var> le permite alinear la línea en la
+parte superior o inferior de parbox con la línea base del texto que lo
+rodea (de manera predeterminada es superior).
+</p>
+<p>El argumento opcional <var>alto</var> reemplaza la altura natural de la caja.
+</p>
+<p>Al argumento <var>pos-interior</var> controla la ubicación del texto dentro
+de la caja de la siguiente manera; Si no se especifica, se utiliza
+<var>posición</var>.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>t</code></dt>
+<dd><p>El texto es colocado en la parte superior de la caja.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>c</code></dt>
+<dd><p>El texto se coloca al centro de la caja.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>b</code></dt>
+<dd><p>El texto se coloca en la parte inferior de la caja.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>s</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Se extiende verticalmente; el texto debe contener espacio vertical
+extensible para que esto funcione.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005craisebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csavebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\savebox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cparbox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\parbox</a>, Up: <a href="#Cajas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cajas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005craisebox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.6 <code>\raisebox</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005craisebox"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\raisebox{distancia}[<var>alto</var>][<var>profundidad</var>]{texto}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\raisebox</code> aumenta o disminuye el <var>texto</var>. El
+primer argumento obligatorio especifica a qué altura se va a levantar (o
+bajar si la cantidad es negativa) el <var>texto</var>. El <var>texto</var> mismo
+es procesado en modo LR.
+</p>
+<p>Los argumentos opcionales <var>alto</var> y <var>profundidad</var> son
+dimensiones. Si se especifican, LaTeX trata a <var>texto</var> como una
+ampliación de una distancia determinada sobre la línea base (alto) o
+bajo (profundidad), omitiendo su altura y profundidad natural.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csavebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csbox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\sbox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005craisebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\raisebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Cajas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cajas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csavebox-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.7 <code>\savebox</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005csavebox"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\savebox{<var>\instrucción-caja</var>}[<var>ancho</var>][<var>posición</var>]{<var>texto</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Esta instrucción fija la tipografía de <var>texto</var> en una caja al igual
+que <code>\makebox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>), excepto que el lugar de imprimir
+la caja resultante, esta la guarda en la caja etiquetada
+<var>\instrucción-caja</var>, que se debe haber declarado con
+<code>\newsavebox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csbox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cusebox" accesskey="n" rel="next">\usebox</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csavebox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\savebox</a>, Up: <a href="#Cajas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cajas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csbox_007b_005cinstruccion_002dcaja_007d_007btexto_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.8 <code>\sbox{<var>\instrucción-caja</var>}{<var>texto</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005csbox"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\sbox{<var>\instrucción-caja</var>}{<var>texto</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p><code>\sbox</code> escribe el <var>texto</var> en una caja tal como <code>\mbox</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cmbox">\mbox</a>) excepto que en lugar de incluir la caja resultante en la
+salida normal, esta la guarda en la caja etiquetada
+<var>\instrucción-caja</var>. <var>\instrucción-caja</var> se debió declarar
+previamente con <code>\newsavebox</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cusebox"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csbox" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\sbox</a>, Up: <a href="#Cajas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cajas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cusebox_007b_005cinstruccion_002dcaja_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">21.9 <code>\usebox{<var>\instrucción-caja</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cusebox"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\usebox{<var>\instrucción-caja</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p><code>\usebox</code> produce la caja guardada más recientemente en el depósito
+<var>\instrucción-caja</var> por una instrucción <code>\savebox</code>
+(see <a href="#g_t_005csavebox">\savebox</a>).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Inserciones-Especiales"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Dividiendo-la-Entrada" accesskey="n" rel="next">Dividiendo la Entrada</a>, Previous: <a href="#Cajas" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Cajas</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Inserciones-Especiales-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">22 Inserciones Especiales</h2>
+
+<p>LaTeX proporciona instrucciones para insertar caracteres que tienen
+un significado especial que no corresponde a caracteres simples que
+usted puede escribir.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Caracteres-Reservados" accesskey="1">Caracteres Reservados</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Insertando # $ % &amp; ~ _ ^ \ { }
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto" accesskey="2">Símbolos de Texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Insertando en el texto otros símbolos distintos a letras.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Acentos" accesskey="3">Acentos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Insertando acentos.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses" accesskey="4">Caracteres no Ingleses</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Insertando otros caracteres no Ingleses.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005crule" accesskey="5">\rule</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Insertando líneas y rectángulos.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ctoday" accesskey="6">\today</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Insertando la fecha de hoy.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Caracteres-Reservados"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto" accesskey="n" rel="next">Símbolos de Texto</a>, Up: <a href="#Inserciones-Especiales" accesskey="u" rel="up">Inserciones Especiales</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Caracteres-Reservados-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">22.1 Caracteres Reservados</h3>
+<a name="index-caracteres-reservados"></a>
+<a name="index-caracteres_002c-reservados"></a>
+
+<p>Los siguientes caracteres desempeñan un papel especial en LaTeX y se
+llaman &ldquo;caracteres reservados&rdquo; o &ldquo;caracteres especiales&rdquo;.
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"># $ % &amp; ~ _ ^ \ { }
+</pre></div>
+
+<a name="index-_005c_0023"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_0024"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_0025"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_0026"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_005f"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_007b"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_007d"></a>
+<p>Siempre que escriba en su archivo uno de estos caracteres, LaTeX debe
+hacer algo especial. Si simplemente desea imprimir el carácter en sí
+mismo, incluya un carácter <code>\</code> anteponiéndolo a este. Por ejemplo,
+<code>\$</code> debe producir <code>$</code> en su salida.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cbackslash-1"></a>
+<p>Una excepción a esta regla es la <code>\</code> misma, debido a que <code>\</code>
+tiene su propio significado especial (dependiente del contexto). Una \
+romana es producida al escribir <code>$\backslash$</code> en su archivo, y una
+<code>\</code> de máquina de escribir es producida usando &lsquo;<samp>\</samp>&rsquo; en una
+instrucción verbatim (see <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>).
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005c_007e"></a>
+<a name="index-_005c_005e"></a>
+<p>Además, <code>\~</code> y <code>\^</code> colocan acentos tilde y circunflejo sobre
+la siguiente letra, como en &otilde; y &ocirc; (see <a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a>); Para
+obtener una <code>~</code> o <code>^</code> independiente, usted puede utilizar una
+instrucción verbatim.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005csymbol"></a>
+<a name="index-accediendo-a-cualquier-caracter-del-tipo-de-letra"></a>
+
+<p>Por último, puede acceder a cualquier carácter del tipo de letra actual
+una vez que sepa su número utilizando la instrucción <code>\symbol</code>. Por
+ejemplo, el carácter de espacio visibles utilizada en la instrucción
+<code>\verb*</code> tiene el código decimal 32, por lo tanto se puede escribir
+como <code>\symbol{32}</code>.
+</p>
+<p>También puede especificar números octales con <code>'</code> o números
+hexadecimales con <code>&quot;</code>, por lo que el ejemplo anterior también se
+podría escribir como <code>\symbol{'40}</code> o <code>\symbol{&quot;20}</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="S_00edmbolos-de-Texto"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Acentos" accesskey="n" rel="next">Acentos</a>, Previous: <a href="#Caracteres-Reservados" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Caracteres Reservados</a>, Up: <a href="#Inserciones-Especiales" accesskey="u" rel="up">Inserciones Especiales</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Simbolos-de-Texto"></a>
+<h3 class="section">22.2 Símbolos de Texto</h3>
+
+<a name="index-simbolos-de-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-paquete-textcomp"></a>
+<p>LaTeX proporciona instrucciones para generar una serie símbolos
+distintos de letras, en el texto. Algunos de estos, especialmente los
+más oscuros, no están disponibles en OT1; posiblemente tenga que cargar
+el paquete <code>textcomp</code>.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\copyright</code>
+<a name="index-_005ccopyright"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textcopyright</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextcopyright"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-de-copyright"></a>
+<p>El símbolo de copyright, &copy;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dag</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdag"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-daga_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>El símbolo daga (en texto).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ddag</code>
+<a name="index-_005cddag"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-doble-daga_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>El símbolo doble daga (en texto).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\LaTeX</code>
+<a name="index-_005cLaTeX"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-Logotipo-de-LaTeX"></a>
+<a name="index-logotipo_002c-LaTeX"></a>
+<p>El logotipo de LaTeX.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\LaTeXe</code>
+<a name="index-_005cLaTeXe"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-Logotipo-de-LaTeX2e"></a>
+<a name="index-logotipo_002c-LaTeX2e"></a>
+<p>El logotypo de LaTeX2e.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\guillemotleft <span class="roman">(&laquo;)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005cguillemotleft-_0028_00ab_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\guillemotright <span class="roman">(&raquo;)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005cguillemotright-_0028_00bb_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\guilsinglleft <span class="roman">(&lsaquo;)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005cguilsinglleft-_0028_2039_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\guilsinglright <span class="roman">(&rsaquo;)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005cguilsinglright-_0028_203a_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-comillas-tipograficas_002c-latinas-o-angulares"></a>
+<a name="index-comillas-tipograficas-simples"></a>
+<a name="index-comilla-angular-de-apertura"></a>
+<a name="index-comilla-angular-de-cierre"></a>
+<a name="index-comillas-tipograficas-angulares"></a>
+<a name="index-comillas-tipograficas-angulares-simples"></a>
+<a name="index-comillas-tipograficas-Francesas"></a>
+<a name="index-comillas-tipograficas_002c-Francesas"></a>
+<p>Comillas tipográficas angulares dobles y simples, utilizadas comúnmente
+en Francés: &laquo;, &raquo;, &lsaquo;,
+&rsaquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ldots</code>
+<a name="index-_005cldots"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\dots</code>
+<a name="index-_005cdots"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textellipsis</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextellipsis"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-puntos-suspensivos"></a>
+<p>Puntos suspensivos (tres puntos en la línea base): &lsquo;&hellip;&rsquo;.
+<code>\ldots</code> y <code>\dots</code> también trabajan en modo math.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\lq</code>
+<a name="index-_005clq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-comilla-izquierda"></a>
+<a name="index-comilla-de-apertura"></a>
+<p>Comilla izquierda (de apertura): &lsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\P</code>
+<a name="index-_005cP"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textparagraph</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextparagraph"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-de-parrafo"></a>
+<a name="index-antigrafo-o-simplemente-signo-de-parrafo"></a>
+<p>Signo de párrafo (antígrafo).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\pounds</code>
+<a name="index-_005cpounds"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textsterling</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextsterling"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-de-libra-esterlina"></a>
+<a name="index-simbolo-de-libra-esterlina-1"></a>
+<p>Libras esterlinas en Inglés: &pound;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\quotedblbase <span class="roman">(&bdquo;)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005cquotedblbase-_0028_201e_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\quotesinglbase <span class="roman">(&sbquo;)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005cquotesinglbase-_0028_201a_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-comillas-dobles-en-linea-base"></a>
+<a name="index-comilla-simple-en-linea-base"></a>
+<a name="index-comilla-en-linea-base_002c-simple-y-doble"></a>
+<p>Simple y dobles comillas en la línea base:
+&bdquo; y &sbquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\rq</code>
+<a name="index-_005crq"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-comilla-derecha"></a>
+<a name="index-comilla-de-cierre"></a>
+<p>Comilla derecha (de cierre): &rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\S</code>
+<a name="index-_005cS"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-de-seccion"></a>
+<p>Símbolo de sección.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\TeX</code>
+<a name="index-_005cTeX"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-logotipo-de-TeX"></a>
+<a name="index-logotipo_002c-TeX"></a>
+<p>El logotipo de TeX.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textasciicircum</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextasciicircum"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-circunflejo_002c-ASCII_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-ASCII-circunflejo_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Circunflejo ASCII: ^.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textasciitilde</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextasciitilde"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-tilde_002c-ASCII_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-tilde-ASCII_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Tilde ASCII: ~.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textasteriskcentered</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextasteriskcentered"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-asterisco_002c-centrado_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-asterisco-centrado_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Asterisco centrado: *.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbackslash</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbackslash"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-barra-inversa_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Barra inversa: \.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbar</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbar"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-barra-vertical_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-bar_002c-vertical_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Barra Vertical: |.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbardbl</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbardbl"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-barra-vertical_002c-doble_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-barra_002c-vertical-doble_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-doble-barra-vertical_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Doble barra vertical.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbigcircle</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbigcircle"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-circulo-grande_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-simbolo-de-circulo_002c-grande_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Símbolo círculo grande.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbraceleft</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbraceleft"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-llave-de-apertura_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-llave_002c-izquierda_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Llave izquierda: {.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbraceright</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbraceright"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-llave-derecha_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-llave_002c-derecha_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Llave derecha: }.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textbullet</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextbullet"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-bala_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Bala: &bull;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textcircled{<var>letra</var>}</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextcircled_007bletra_007d"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-letra-en-circulo_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p><var>letra</var> en un círculo, como en &reg;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textcompwordmark</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextcompwordmark"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textcapitalwordmark</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextcapitalwordmark"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textascenderwordmark</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextascenderwordmark"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-marca-palabra-compuesta_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-tapa-superior"></a>
+<a name="index-ascender-superior"></a>
+<p>Marca de palabra compuesta (invisible). La forma <code>\textcapital...</code>
+tiene la tapa del tipo de letra, mientras que la forma
+<code>\textascender...</code> tiene el ascender superior.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textdagger</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextdagger"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-daga_002c-en-texto-1"></a>
+<p>Daga: <em>\dag</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textdaggerdbl</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextdaggerdbl"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-daga_002c-doble_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-daga-doble_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Daga doble: <em>\ddag</em>.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textdollar <span class="roman">(o <code>\$</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextdollar-_0028o-_005c_0024_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-signo-de-dolar"></a>
+<a name="index-moneda_002c-dolar"></a>
+<p>Signo de Dólar: $.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textemdash <span class="roman">(o <code>---</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextemdash-_0028o-_002d_002d_002d_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-em_002ddash"></a>
+<p>Em-dash: &mdash; (para puntuación).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textendash <span class="roman">(o <code>--</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextendash-_0028o-_002d_002d_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-e_002ddash"></a>
+<p>En-dash: &mdash; (para rangos).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\texteuro</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctexteuro"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-del-euro"></a>
+<a name="index-divisas_002c-euro"></a>
+<p>El Símbolo del Euro: &euro;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textexclamdown <span class="roman">(o <code>!`</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextexclamdown-_0028o-_0021_0060_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-exclamacion_002c-inicial"></a>
+<p>Signo de exclamación inicial: &iexcl;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textgreater</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextgreater"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-mayor-que_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Mayor que: &gt;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textless</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextless"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-menor-que_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Menor que: &lt;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textleftarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextleftarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-flecha_002c-izquierda_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-flecha-hacia-la-izquierda_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Flecha izquierda.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textordfeminine</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextordfeminine"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textordmasculine</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextordmasculine"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-Simbolo-ordinal-femenino"></a>
+<a name="index-simbolo-ordinal-masculino"></a>
+<a name="index-ordinales_002c-femenino-y-masculino"></a>
+<a name="index-ordinales-en-espanol_002c-femenino-y-masculino"></a>
+<p>Símbolos ordinales femenino y masculino: &ordf;, &ordm;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textordfeminine</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextordfeminine-1"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-femenino-ordinal"></a>
+<p>Símbolo ordinal femenino: &ordf;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textperiodcentered</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextperiodcentered"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-punto_002c-centrado_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-punto-centrado_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Punto centrado: ·.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquestiondown <span class="roman">(o <code>?`</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquestiondown-_0028o-_003f_0060_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-interrogacion_002c-inicial"></a>
+<p>Signo de interrogación inicial: &iquest;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquotedblleft <span class="roman">(o <code>``</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquotedblleft-_0028o-_0060_0060_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-marca-izquierda_002c-doble"></a>
+<a name="index-comillas-dobles-de-apertura"></a>
+<p>Comillas dobles de apertura: &ldquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquotedblright <span class="roman">(o <code>'</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquotedblright-_0028o-_0027_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-comillas-de-cierre_002c-dobles"></a>
+<a name="index-comillas-de-cierre-dobles"></a>
+<p>Dobles comillas de cierre: &rdquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquoteleft <span class="roman">(o <code>`</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquoteleft-_0028o-_0060_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-comilla-izquierda_002c-sola"></a>
+<a name="index-comilla-de-apertura-simple"></a>
+<p>Comilla de apertura simple: &lsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquoteright <span class="roman">(o <code>'</code>)</span></code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquoteright-_0028o-_0027_0029"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-comilla-de-cierre_002c-simple"></a>
+<a name="index-comilla-de-cierre-simple"></a>
+<p>Comilla de cierre simple: &rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textquotestraightbase</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquotestraightbase"></a>
+</dt>
+<dt><code>\textquotestraightdblbase</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextquotestraightdblbase"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-comilla_002c-en-la-linea-base-_0028coma_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-comillastraight-quote_002c-base"></a>
+<a name="index-guion-doble_002c-linea-recta"></a>
+<a name="index-linea-recta-de-guion-doble_002c-base"></a>
+<p>Líneas rectas simples y dobles en la línea base.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textregistered</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextregistered"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-de-marca-registrada"></a>
+<p>Símbolo de marca registrada: &reg;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textrightarrow</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextrightarrow"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-flecha-derecha_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<a name="index-flecha-hacia-la-derecha_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Flecha hacia la derecha.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textthreequartersemdash</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextthreequartersemdash"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-em_002ddash-de-tres-cuartos"></a>
+<a name="index-em_002ddash_002c-tres-cuartos"></a>
+<p>em-dash de &ldquo;Tres cuartos&rdquo;, entre en-dash y em-dash.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\texttrademark</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctexttrademark"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-de-marca-comercial"></a>
+<p>Símbolo de marca comercial: ™.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\texttwelveudash</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctexttwelveudash"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><p>Xx 12u-.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textunderscore</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextunderscore"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-subrayado_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Subrayado: _.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\textvisiblespace</code>
+<a name="index-_005ctextvisiblespace"></a>
+</dt>
+<dd><a name="index-simbolo-de-espacio-visible_002c-en-texto"></a>
+<p>Símbolo de espacio visible.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Acentos"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses" accesskey="n" rel="next">Caracteres no Ingleses</a>, Previous: <a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Símbolos de Texto</a>, Up: <a href="#Inserciones-Especiales" accesskey="u" rel="up">Inserciones Especiales</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Acentos-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">22.3 Acentos</h3>
+
+<a name="index-acentos"></a>
+<a name="index-caracteres_002c-acentuados"></a>
+<a name="index-letras_002c-acentuadas"></a>
+
+<p>LaTeX tiene un amplio apoyo para muchos de los guiones de idiomas del
+mundo, a través del paquete <code>babel</code> y de apoyo relacionados. Esta
+sección no pretende abarcar todas con las que es compatible. Este
+simplemente se limita a enumerar las principales instrucciones LaTeX
+para crear caracteres acentuados.
+</p>
+<p>Las instrucciones <code>\capital...</code> producen formas alternativas para
+su uso con letras mayúsculas. Estas no están disponibles con OT1.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\&quot;</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitaldieresis</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_0022-_0028acento-dieresis_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitaldieresis"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-dieresis"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-dieresis-1"></a>
+<p>Produce una diéresis, como en &ouml;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\'</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalacute</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_0027-_0028acento-agudo_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalacute"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-agudo"></a>
+<p>Produce un acento agudo, como en &oacute;. En el entorno <code>tabbing</code>,
+empuja la columna actual a la derecha de la columna anterior
+(see <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\.</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_002e-_0028acento-punto-encima_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-punto"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-punto-1"></a>
+<p>Produce un punto como acento sobre la siguiente, como en &#559;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\=</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalmacron</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_003d-_0028acento-macron_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalmacron"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-macron"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-barra-encima"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-barra-sobre"></a>
+<p>Produce un acento macrón (una barra) sobre el siguiente, como en &#333;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\^</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalcircumflex</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_005e-_0028acento-circunflejo_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalcircumflex"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-circunflejo"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-circunflejo-1"></a>
+<p>Produce un acento circunflejo (sombrero) sobre la siguiente, como en
+&ocirc;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\`</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalgrave</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_0060-_0028acento-grave_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalgrave"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-grave"></a>
+<p>Produce un acento grave sobre la siguiente, como en &ograve;. En el
+entorno <code>tabbing</code>, mueve el siguiente texto hacia el margen derecho
+(see <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\~</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitaltilde</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005c_007e-_0028acento-tilde_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitaltilde"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-tilde"></a>
+<p>Produce una tilde como acento sobre la siguiente, como en &ntilde;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\b</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cb-_0028acento-barra_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-barra"></a>
+<p>Produce una barra como acento debajo de la siguiente, como en
+o_. Vea también <code>\underbar</code> a continuación
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\c</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalcedilla</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cc-_0028acento-cedilla_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalcedilla"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-cedilla"></a>
+<p>Produce una cedilla como acento sobre la siguiente, como en &ccedil;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\d</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitaldotaccent</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cd-_0028acento-circulo_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitaldotaccent"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-circulo"></a>
+<p>Produce un círculo como acento sobre la siguiente, como en
+&#7885;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\H</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalhungarumlaut</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cH-_0028acento-dieresis-Hungara_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalhungarumlaut"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-dieresis-hungara"></a>
+<p>Produce un acento diéresis húngaro sobre la siguiente, como en &#337;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\i</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ci-_0028i-sin-punto_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-i-sin-punto"></a>
+<p>Produce una i sin punto, como en &lsquo;i&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\j</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cj-_0028j-sin-punto_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-j-sin-punto"></a>
+<p>Produce una j sin punto, como en &lsquo;j&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\k</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalogonek</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ck-_0028colita-_002d_002d_002dogonek-en-polaco_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalogonek"></a>
+<a name="index-colita"></a>
+<p>Produce una letra con colita, como en &lsquo;&#491;&rsquo;. No disponible en la
+codificación OT1.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\r</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalring</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cr-_0028acento-anillo_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalring"></a>
+<a name="index-anillo-acento"></a>
+<p>Produce un anillo como acento, como en &lsquo;o*&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\t</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitaltie</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\newtie</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalnewtie</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005ct-_0028acento-atadura-con-siguiente_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitaltie"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cnewtie"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalnewtie"></a>
+<a name="index-atadura-con-siguiente-acento"></a>
+<p>Produce una atadura con el siguiente como acento, como en
+&lsquo;oo[&rsquo;. La forma <code>\newtie</code> está centrada en su caja.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\u</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalbreve</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cu-_0028breve-acento_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalbreve"></a>
+<a name="index-breve-acento"></a>
+<p>Produce un acento breve, como en &lsquo;&#335;&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\underbar</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cunderbar"></a>
+<a name="index-subrayado"></a>
+<p>No es exactamente un acento, este produce una barra en el argumento
+texto. El argumento siempre se procesa en modo horizontal. La barra
+siempre está en una posición fija en la línea base, por lo que cruza a
+través de los trazos descendentes. Vea también <code>\underline</code> en
+<a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a>. Vea también <code>\b</code> aquí antes
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\v</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\capitalcaron</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cv-_0028breve-acento_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005ccapitalcaron"></a>
+<a name="index-acento-anticircunflejo"></a>
+<a name="index-anticircunflejo-acento"></a>
+<a name="index-caron-acento"></a>
+<p>Produce un acento h&aacute;&#269;ek (anticircunflejo, carón), como en &lsquo;&#466;&rsquo;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Caracteres-no-Ingleses"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005crule" accesskey="n" rel="next">\rule</a>, Previous: <a href="#Acentos" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Acentos</a>, Up: <a href="#Inserciones-Especiales" accesskey="u" rel="up">Inserciones Especiales</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Caracteres-no-Ingleses-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">22.4 Caracteres no Ingleses</h3>
+
+<a name="index-caracteres-especiales"></a>
+<a name="index-caracteres-no-Ingleses"></a>
+<a name="index-caracteres_002c-no-Ingleses"></a>
+<a name="index-letras_002c-no-Inglesas"></a>
+
+<p>Estas son las instrucciones LaTeX básicas para insertar los
+caracteres más usados en idiomas distintos del Inglés.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>\aa</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\AA</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005caa-_0028aa_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cAA-_0028AA_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-ash"></a>
+<p>&aring; y &Aring;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ae</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\AE</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cae-_0028ae_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cAE-_0028AE_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-ligadura-ae"></a>
+<p>&aelig; y &AElig;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dh</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\DH</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cdh-_0028ae_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cDH-_0028AE_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-islandes-eth"></a>
+<a name="index-eth_002c-letra-islandesa"></a>
+<p>Letra eth islandesa: &eth; y &ETH;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\dj</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\DJ</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cdj"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cDJ"></a>
+<p>xxxx
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ij</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\IJ</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cij-_0028ij_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cIJ-_0028IJ_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-letra-ij_002c-Neerlandes"></a>
+<p>ij y IJ (salvo que un poco más juntas que como aparecen aquí).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\l</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\L</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cl-_0028l_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cL-_0028L_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-l-Polaca"></a>
+<p>&#322; y &#321;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ng</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\NG</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cng"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cNG"></a>
+<p>xxxx
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\o</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\O</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005co-_0028o_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cO-_0028O_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-oslash"></a>
+<p>&oslash; y &Oslash;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\oe</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\OE</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005coe-_0028oe_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cOE-_0028OE_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-oe-ligadura"></a>
+<p>&oelig; y &OElig;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\ss</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\SS</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005css-_0028ss_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cSS-_0028SS_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-es_002dzet-letra-Alemana"></a>
+<a name="index-letras-S-afiladas"></a>
+<p>&szlig; y SS.
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><code>\th</code></dt>
+<dt><code>\TH</code></dt>
+<dd><a name="index-_005cth-_0028th_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cTH-_0028TH_0029"></a>
+<a name="index-espina-Islandesa"></a>
+<a name="index-espina_002c-letra-Islandesa"></a>
+<p>Letra espina Islandesa: &thorn; y &THORN;.
+</p>
+</dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005crule"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ctoday" accesskey="n" rel="next">\today</a>, Previous: <a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Caracteres no Ingleses</a>, Up: <a href="#Inserciones-Especiales" accesskey="u" rel="up">Inserciones Especiales</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005crule-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">22.5 <code>\rule</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005crule"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\rule[<var>aumentar</var>]{<var>ancho</var>}{<var>espesor</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\rule</code> produce <em>reglas</em>, que son, líneas o
+rectángulos. Los argumentos son:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>aumentar</var></dt>
+<dd><p>Qué tanto aumentar la regla (opcional).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>ancho</var></dt>
+<dd><p>La longitud de la regla (obligatorio).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>espesor</var></dt>
+<dd><p>El espesor de la regla (obligatorio).
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ctoday"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005crule" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\rule</a>, Up: <a href="#Inserciones-Especiales" accesskey="u" rel="up">Inserciones Especiales</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ctoday-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">22.6 <code>\today</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005ctoday"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\today</code> produce la fecha de hoy, en formato
+&lsquo;<samp><var>mes</var> <var>dd</var>, <var>aaaa</var></samp>&rsquo;; por ejemplo, &lsquo;Julio 04 1976&rsquo;.
+Utiliza los contadores predefinidos <code>\day</code>, <code>\month</code>, y
+<code>\year</code> (see <a href="#g_t_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear">\day \month \year</a>) para hacerlo. No se actualiza
+cuando se ejecuta el programa.
+</p>
+<a name="index-paquete-datetime"></a>
+<p>El paquete <code>datetime</code>, entre otros, puede producir una amplia
+variedad de formatos de fecha.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Dividiendo-la-Entrada"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada" accesskey="n" rel="next">Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</a>, Previous: <a href="#Inserciones-Especiales" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Inserciones Especiales</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Dividiendo-la-Entrada-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">23 Dividiendo la Entrada</h2>
+<a name="index-dividiendo-el-archivo-de-entrada"></a>
+<a name="index-archivo-de-entrada"></a>
+
+<p>Un documento de gran tamaño requiere una gran cantidad de insumos. En
+lugar de poner toda la entrada en un único archivo de gran tamaño, es
+más eficiente dividirlo en varios más pequeños. Independientemente del
+número de archivos separados que utilice, hay uno que es el archivo
+raíz; este es cuyo nombre se escribe cuando se ejecuta LaTeX.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cinclude" accesskey="1">\include</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Condicionalmente incluye un archivo.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cincludeonly" accesskey="2">\includeonly</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Determina qué archivos serán incluidos.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cinput" accesskey="3">\input</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Incluiye incondicionalmente un archivo.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cinclude"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cincludeonly" accesskey="n" rel="next">\includeonly</a>, Up: <a href="#Dividiendo-la-Entrada" accesskey="u" rel="up">Dividiendo la Entrada</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cinclude-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">23.1 <code>\include</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cinclude"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\include{<var>archivo</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>No hay presente una instrucción <code>\includeonly</code>, la instrucción
+<code>\include</code> executa <code>\clearpage</code> para iniciar una nueva página
+(see <a href="#g_t_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a>), entonces lee el <var>archivo</var>, y luego hace otro
+<code>\clearpage</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Dada una instrucción <code>\includeonly</code>, las acciones <code>\include</code>
+únicamente se ejecutan si <var>archivo</var> está listado como un argumento
+para <code>\includeonly</code>. Consulte la siguiente sección.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cinclude-anidada_002c-no-se-permite"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\include</code> no puede aparecer en el preámbulo o en un
+archivo leído por otra instrucción <code>\include</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cincludeonly"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cinput" accesskey="n" rel="next">\input</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cinclude" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\include</a>, Up: <a href="#Dividiendo-la-Entrada" accesskey="u" rel="up">Dividiendo la Entrada</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cincludeonly-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">23.2 <code>\includeonly</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cincludeonly"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\includeonly{<var>archivo1</var>,<var>archivo2</var>,...}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\includeonly</code> controla cuales archivos se deben
+leer en subsecuentes instrucciones <code>\include</code>. La lista de nombres
+de archivo se separa con comas. Cada <var>archivo</var> debe coincidir
+exactamente con un nombre de archivo especificado en una instrucción
+<code>\include</code> para una selección eficaz.
+</p>
+<p>Esta instrucción únicamente puede aparecer en el preámbulo.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cinput"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cincludeonly" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\includeonly</a>, Up: <a href="#Dividiendo-la-Entrada" accesskey="u" rel="up">Dividiendo la Entrada</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cinput-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">23.3 <code>\input</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cinput"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\input{<var>archivo</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\input</code> provoca que el <var>archivo</var> especificado
+sea leído y procesado, tal como si su contendido se hubiera insertado en
+ese punto en el archivo actual.
+</p>
+<p>Si <var>archivo</var> no termina en &lsquo;<samp>.tex </samp>&rsquo; (por ejemplo, &lsquo;<samp>foo</samp>&rsquo; o
+&lsquo;<samp>foo.bar</samp>&rsquo;), primero se intenta con esa extensión (&lsquo;<samp>foo.tex</samp>&rsquo; o
+&lsquo;<samp>foo.bar.tex</samp>&rsquo;). Si no se encuentra, el <var>archivo</var> original se
+intenta con (&lsquo;<samp>foo</samp>&rsquo; o &lsquo;<samp>foo.bar</samp>&rsquo;).
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="n" rel="next">Cartas</a>, Previous: <a href="#Dividiendo-la-Entrada" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Dividiendo la Entrada</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">24 Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</h2>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Tablas-de-Contenido" accesskey="1">Tablas de Contenido</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Glosarios" accesskey="2">Glosarios</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_00cdndices" accesskey="3">Índices</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Tablas-de-Contenido"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Glosarios" accesskey="n" rel="next">Glosarios</a>, Up: <a href="#Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada" accesskey="u" rel="up">Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Tablas-de-Contenido-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">24.1 Tablas de Contenido</h3>
+
+<a name="index-tabla-de-contenido_002c-creando"></a>
+
+<a name="index-_005ctableofcontents"></a>
+<p>Se produce una tabla de contenido con la instrucción
+<code>\tableofcontents</code>. Usted pone la instrucción adecuada donde desea
+que aparezca la tabla de contenido; LaTeX hace el resto para usted.
+Una ejecución previa habrá generado un archivo <samp>.toc</samp>.
+</p>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\tableofcontents</code> produce una sección, pero no
+inicia una nueva página automáticamente. Si desea una nueva página
+después de la tabla de contenido, escriba una instrucción código
+<code>\newpage</code> después de la instrucción <code>\tableofcontents</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005clistoffigures"></a>
+<a name="index-_005clistoftables"></a>
+<p>Las instrucciones análogas <code>\listoffigures</code> y <code>\listoftables</code>
+producen una lists de figuras y una lista de tablas, respectivamente.
+Cada una funciona exactamente igual que la tabla de contenido.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cnofiles"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\nofiles</code> reemplaza estas instrucciones, e
+<em>impide</em> que se genere cualquiera de estas listas.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline" accesskey="1">\addcontentsline</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Agrega una entrada a la tabla de contenido, etc.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005caddtocontents" accesskey="2">\addtocontents</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Añade texto directamente al archivo de la tabla de contenido, etc.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005caddcontentsline"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005caddtocontents" accesskey="n" rel="next">\addtocontents</a>, Up: <a href="#Tablas-de-Contenido" accesskey="u" rel="up">Tablas de Contenido</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005caddcontentsline-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">24.1.1 \addcontentsline</h4>
+<a name="index-_005caddcontentsline_007bexto_007d_007bunidad_007d_007btexto_007d"></a>
+<a name="index-tabla-de-contenido_002c-agregando-manualmente"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción
+<code>\addcontentsline</code>{<var>extensión</var>}{<var>undad</var>}{<var>texto</var>}
+añade una entrada a la lista o tabla donde:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>extensión</var></dt>
+<dd><p>La extensión del archivo en el que se va a escribir la información, por
+lo general una de: <code>toc</code> (tabla de contenido), <code>lof</code> (lista de
+figuras) o <code>lot</code> (lista de tablas).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>unidad</var></dt>
+<dd><p>El nombre de la unidad de sección a añadir, normalmente una de las
+siguientes, coincidiendo con el valor del argumento <var>extensión</var>:
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><code>toc</code></dt>
+<dd><p>El nombre de la unidad de sección: <code>part</code>, <code>chapter</code>,
+<code>section</code>, <code>subsection</code>, <code>subsubsection</code>.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>lof</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Para la lista de figuras.
+</p></dd>
+<dt><code>lot</code></dt>
+<dd><p>Para la lista de tablas.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+</dd>
+<dt><var>texto</var></dt>
+<dd><p>El texto real de la entrada.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+<a name="index-_005ccontentsline"></a>
+<p>La instrucción que realmente escribe al archivo <samp>.<var>extensión</var></samp>
+es la instrucción <code>\contentsline{<var>undad</var>}{<var>nombre</var>}</code>.
+</p>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005caddtocontents"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\addcontentsline</a>, Up: <a href="#Tablas-de-Contenido" accesskey="u" rel="up">Tablas de Contenido</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005caddtocontents-1"></a>
+<h4 class="subsection">24.1.2 \addtocontents</h4>
+<a name="index-_005caddtocontents_007bextra_007d_007btexto_007d"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\addtocontents</code>{<var>extensión</var>}{<var>texto</var>}
+añade texto (o instrucciones de formato) directamente al archivo
+<samp>.<var>extensión</var></samp> que genera la tabla de contenido o listas de
+figuras o tablas.
+</p>
+<dl compact="compact">
+<dt><var>extensión</var></dt>
+<dd><p>La extensión del archivo en el cual escribir la información: <samp>toc</samp>
+(tabla de contenido), <samp>lof</samp> (lista de figuras) o <samp>lot</samp> (lista
+de tablas).
+</p>
+</dd>
+<dt><var>texto</var></dt>
+<dd><p>El texto a escribir.
+</p></dd>
+</dl>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Glosarios"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_00cdndices" accesskey="n" rel="next">Índices</a>, Previous: <a href="#Tablas-de-Contenido" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Tablas de Contenido</a>, Up: <a href="#Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada" accesskey="u" rel="up">Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Glosarios-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">24.2 Glosarios</h3>
+<a name="index-glosarios"></a>
+
+<a name="index-_005cmakeglossary"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\makeglossary</code> habilita la creación de glosarios.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cglossary"></a>
+<a name="index-archivo-_002eglo"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\glossary{<var>texto</var>}</code> escribe una entrada en el
+glosario para <var>texto</var> a un archivo auxiliar con la extensión
+<samp>.glo</samp>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cglossaryentry"></a>
+<p>Específicamente, la instrucción que escribe es
+<code>\glossaryentry{<var>texto</var>}{<var>no-de-página</var>}</code>, donde
+<var>no-de-página</var> es el valor de <code>\thepage</code>.
+</p>
+<p>El paquete <code>glossary</code> en CTAN proporciona compatibilidad para
+glosarios más sofisticados.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_00cdndices"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Glosarios" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Glosarios</a>, Up: <a href="#Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada" accesskey="u" rel="up">Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Indices"></a>
+<h3 class="section">24.3 Índices</h3>
+<a name="index-indices"></a>
+
+<a name="index-_005cmakeindex"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\makeindex</code> permite la creación de índices.
+Coloquela en el preámbulo.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cindex"></a>
+<a name="index-archivo-_002eidx"></a>
+<p>La instrucción <code>\index{<var>texto</var>}</code> escribe una entrada en el
+índice para <var>texto</var> en un archivo auxiliar con la extensión
+<samp>.idx</samp>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cindexentry"></a>
+<p>Específicamente, la instrucción que escribe la entrada es
+<code>\indexentry{<var>texto</var>}{<var>no-de-página</var>}</code>, donde
+<var>no-de-página</var> es el valor actual de <code>\thepage</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_0060vea_0027-y-_0060vea-tambien_0027-entradas-de-indice"></a>
+<p>Para generar una entrada de índice para &lsquo;bar&rsquo; que diga &lsquo;Vea foo&rsquo;,
+utilice una barra vertical: <code>\index{bar|see{foo}}</code>. Use
+<code>seealso</code> en lugar de <code>see</code> para producir una entrada &lsquo;Vea
+también&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005cseename"></a>
+<a name="index-_005calsoname"></a>
+<p>El texto &lsquo;Vea&rsquo; está definido por la macro <code>\seename</code>, y &lsquo;Vea
+también&rsquo; por la macro <code>\alsoname</code>. Estas se pueden redefinir para
+otros idiomas.
+</p>
+<a name="index-makeindex-programa"></a>
+<a name="index-xindy-programa"></a>
+<a name="index-archivo-_002eind"></a>
+<p>El archivo <samp>.idx</samp> generado luego es ordenado con una instrucción
+externa, por lo general alguna instrucción <code>makeindex</code>
+(<a href="http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex">http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex</a>) o (la de múltiples
+idiomas) <code>xindy</code> (<a href="http://xindy.sourceforge.net">http://xindy.sourceforge.net</a>). Esto
+resulta en un archivo <samp>.ind</samp>, que se puede leer para componer
+tipográficamente el índice.
+</p>
+<a name="index-printindex"></a>
+<a name="index-paquete-makeidx"></a>
+<p>El índice normalmente se genera con la instrucción <code>\printindex</code>.
+Esta instrucción está definida en el paquete <code>makeidx</code>, por lo
+tanto necesita colocar en el preámbulo la instrucción
+<code>\usepackage{makeidx}</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-indexspace"></a>
+<p>La longitud de relleno <code>\indexspace</code> se inserta antes de cada nueva
+letra en el índice impreso; letra en el índice impreso su valor
+predeterminado es &lsquo;<samp>10pt plus5pt minus3pt</samp>&rsquo;.
+</p>
+<a name="index-paquete-showidx"></a>
+<p>El paquete <code>showidx</code> hace que cada entrada en el índice se muestre
+en el margen de la página donde aparece la entrada. Esto puede ayudar
+en la preparación del índice.
+</p>
+<a name="index-paquete-multind"></a>
+<p>El paquete <code>multind</code> es compatible con múltiples índices. Vea
+también la entrada de este tema en las preguntas frecuentes de TeX,
+en
+</p>
+<p><a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind</a>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Cartas"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal" accesskey="n" rel="next">Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</a>, Previous: <a href="#Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Cartas-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">25 Cartas</h2>
+<a name="index-cartas"></a>
+<a name="index-creando-cartas"></a>
+
+<p>Usted puede utilizar LaTeX para componer tipográficamente cartas,
+para ambas personales y de negocios. La clase de documento
+<code>letter</code> está diseñada para hacer una serie de cartas a la vez,
+aunque se puede hacer sólo una si así lo desea.
+</p>
+<p>Su archivo fuente <samp>.tex</samp> tiene las mismas instrucciones mínimas de
+clase que en cualquier otro documento, es decir, debe tener las
+siguientes instrucciones como mínimo:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"> \documentclass{letter}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... cartas ...
+ \end{document}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Cada carta es un entorno <code>letter</code>, cuyo argumento es el nombre y
+dirección del destinatario. Por ejemplo, usted podría tener:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example"> \begin{letter}{Sr. José Pérez\\ Calle Princesa N°2345.
+ \\ Edinburgo, EH1 1AA}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<p>La carta en sí comienza con la instrucción <code>\opening</code>. Siguiéndole
+el texto de la carta. Este se escribe como una entrada de LaTeX
+ordinaria. Las instrucciones que no tienen sentido en una carta, como
+<code>\chapter</code>, no funcionan. La carta se cierra con una instrucción
+<code>\closing</code>.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_005c_005c-para-cartas"></a>
+<p>Después de <code>closing</code>, usted puede colocar material adicional. La
+instrucción <code>\cc</code> produce el usual &ldquo;cc: &hellip;&rdquo;. También hay
+una instrucción <code>\encl</code> similar para una lista de
+destinatarios. Con ambas instrucciones, use <code>\\</code> para separar los
+elementos.
+</p>
+<p>Estas instrucciones se utilizan con la clase <code>letter</code>.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005caddress" accesskey="1">\address</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">La dirección del remitente.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ccc" accesskey="2">\cc</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">La lista Cc (Con copia para).
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cclosing" accesskey="3">\closing</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Un mensaje de despedida.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cencl" accesskey="4">\encl</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Lista de material adjunto.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005clocation" accesskey="5">\location</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">La dirección de su organización.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cmakelabels" accesskey="6">\makelabels</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Produce etiquetas de dirección.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cname" accesskey="7">\name</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Su nombre, para la dirección de retorno.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005copening" accesskey="8">\opening</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Saludando.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cps" accesskey="9">\ps</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Agrega una posdata.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005csignature">\signature</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Su firma.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Permite saltos de página.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">No permite saltos de página.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ctelephone">\telephone</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Su número de teléfono.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005caddress"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ccc" accesskey="n" rel="next">\cc</a>, Up: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cartas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005caddress_007bdireccion_002ddel_002dremitente_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.1 \address{<var>dirección-del-remitente}</var></h3>
+<a name="index-_005caddress"></a>
+
+<p>La instrucción <code>\address</code> especifica la dirección del remitente de
+la carta, como debería aparecer en la carta y el sobre. Separa las
+líneas de la dirección que deben estar separadas por instrucciones
+<code>\\</code>.
+</p>
+<p>Si usted no proporciona una declaración <code>\address</code>, entonces, se
+aplicará a la carta el formato de copia en papel con el membrete
+estándar de su organización. (See <a href="#Descripci_00f3n">Descripción</a>, para obtener detalles
+sobre la implementación local). Si usted proporciona una declaración
+<code>\address</code>, entonces, la carta será formateada como una carta
+personal.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ccc"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cclosing" accesskey="n" rel="next">\closing</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005caddress" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\address</a>, Up: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cartas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ccc-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.2 <code>\cc</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005ccc"></a>
+<a name="index-listas-cc_002c-en-cartas"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\cc{<var>nombre</var>\\<var>nombre2</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Produce una lista de <var>nombre</var>s a quienes enviar copias de la carta.
+Cada nombre se imprime en una línea separada.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cclosing"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cencl" accesskey="n" rel="next">\encl</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ccc" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\cc</a>, Up: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cartas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cclosing-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.3 <code>\closing</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cclosing"></a>
+<a name="index-cartas_002c-terminando"></a>
+<a name="index-cerrando-cartas"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\closing{texto}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Una carta se cierra con la instrucción <code>\closing</code>, por ejemplo,
+</p><div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\closing{Muy Atentamente,}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cencl"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005clocation" accesskey="n" rel="next">\location</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cclosing" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\closing</a>, Up: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cartas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cencl-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.4 <code>\encl</code></h3>
+
+<a name="index-_005cencl"></a>
+<a name="index-lista-de-documentos-adjuntos"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\encl{<var>línea1</var>\\<var>línea2</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Declara una lista de más de un documento adjunto.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005clocation"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cmakelabels" accesskey="n" rel="next">\makelabels</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cencl" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\encl</a>, Up: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cartas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005clocation-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.5 <code>\location</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005clocation"></a>
+
+<p><code>\location{dirección}</code>
+</p>
+<p>Esta modifica la dirección estándar de su organización. Esto sólo
+aparece si el estilo de página <code>firstpage</code> está seleccionado.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakelabels"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cname" accesskey="n" rel="next">\name</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005clocation" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\location</a>, Up: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cartas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cmakelabels-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.6 <code>\makelabels</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cmakelabels"></a>
+
+<p><code>\makelabels{número}</code>
+</p>
+<p>Si ejecuta esta instrucción en el preámbulo, LaTeX creará una hoja de
+etiquetas con las direcciones. Esta hoja se emitirá antes que las
+cartas.
+</p>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cname"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005copening" accesskey="n" rel="next">\opening</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cmakelabels" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\makelabels</a>, Up: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cartas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cname-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.7 <code>\name</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cname"></a>
+
+<p><code>\name{June Davenport}</code>
+</p>
+<p>Su nombre, utilizado en la impresión del sobre junto con la dirección
+del remitente.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005copening"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cps" accesskey="n" rel="next">\ps</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cname" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\name</a>, Up: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cartas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005copening_007btexto_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.8 <code>\opening{<var>texto</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005copening"></a>
+<a name="index-cartas_002c-iniciando"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\opening{<var>texto</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Una carta comienza con la instrucción <code>\opening</code>. El argumento
+obligatorio, <var>texto</var>, es el texto con el que desea iniciar su carta.
+Por ejemplo:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\opening{Estimado José,}
+</pre></div>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cps"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005csignature" accesskey="n" rel="next">\signature</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005copening" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\opening</a>, Up: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cartas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cps-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.9 <code>\ps</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cps"></a>
+<a name="index-posdata_002c-en-cartas"></a>
+
+<p>Use la instrucción <code>\ps</code> para iniciar una posdata en una carta,
+después de <code>\closing</code>.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005csignature"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cstartbreaks" accesskey="n" rel="next">\startbreaks</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cps" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\ps</a>, Up: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cartas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005csignature_007btexto_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.10 <code>\signature{<var>texto</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005csignature"></a>
+
+<p>Su nombre, como debe aparecer al final de la carta debajo del espacio
+para su firma. <code>\\</code> inicia una nueva línea dentro de <var>texto</var>
+como de costumbre.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cstartbreaks"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005cstopbreaks" accesskey="n" rel="next">\stopbreaks</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005csignature" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\signature</a>, Up: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cartas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cstartbreaks-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.11 <code>\startbreaks</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cstartbreaks"></a>
+
+<p><code>\startbreaks</code>
+</p>
+<p>Se usa después de una instrucción <code>\stopbreaks</code> para permitir de
+nuevo los saltos de página.
+</p>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005cstopbreaks"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ctelephone" accesskey="n" rel="next">\telephone</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cstartbreaks" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\startbreaks</a>, Up: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cartas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005cstopbreaks-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.12 <code>\stopbreaks</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005cstopbreaks"></a>
+
+<p><code>\stopbreaks</code>
+</p>
+<p>Inhibe saltos de página hasta que aparezca una instrucción
+<code>\startbreaks</code>.
+</p>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ctelephone"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005cstopbreaks" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\stopbreaks</a>, Up: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="u" rel="up">Cartas</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ctelephone-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">25.13 <code>\telephone</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005ctelephone"></a>
+
+<p><code>\telephone{número}</code>
+</p>
+<p>Este es su número de teléfono. Este sólo aparece si el estilo de página
+<code>firstpage</code> está seleccionado.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#L_00ednea-de-_00d3rdenes" accesskey="n" rel="next">Línea de Órdenes</a>, Previous: <a href="#Cartas" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Cartas</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal-1"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">26 Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</h2>
+<a name="index-entrada_002fsalida"></a>
+<a name="index-entrada_002fsalida-desde-la-terminal"></a>
+
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ctypein" accesskey="1">\typein</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Lee texto desde la terminal.
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#g_t_005ctypeout" accesskey="2">\typeout</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">Escribe texto en la terminal.
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ctypein"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_005ctypeout" accesskey="n" rel="next">\typeout</a>, Up: <a href="#Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ctypein_005binstruccion_005d_007bmensaje_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">26.1 <code>\typein[<var>instrucción</var>]{<var>mensaje</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005ctypein"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\typein[<var>\instrucción</var>]{<var>mensaje</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p><code>\typein</code> imprime el <var>mensaje</var> en la terminal y provoca que
+LaTeX se detenga y espere para que usted escriba una línea de
+entrada, terminando con &ldquo;Intro&rdquo;. Si se omite el argumento opcional
+<var>\instrucción</var>, la entrada escrita se procesa como si se hubiera
+incluido en el archivo de entrada en lugar de la instrucción
+<code>\typein</code>. Si está presente el argumento <var>\instrucción</var>, debe
+ser el nombre de una instrucción. Este nombre de instrucción entonces
+define o redefine la entrada escrita.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_005ctypeout"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_005ctypein" accesskey="p" rel="prev">\typein</a>, Up: <a href="#Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal" accesskey="u" rel="up">Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="g_t_005ctypeout_007bmensaje_007d"></a>
+<h3 class="section">26.2 <code>\typeout{<var>mensaje</var>}</code></h3>
+<a name="index-_005ctypeout"></a>
+
+<p>Sinopsis:
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">\typeout{<var>mensaje</var>}
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>Imprime el <code>mensaje</code> en la terminal y en el archivo <code>log</code>.
+Las instrucciones en el <code>mensaje</code> que están definidas con
+<code>\newcommand</code> o <code>\renewcommand</code> (entre otras) se sustituyen
+por su definición antes de ser impresas.
+</p>
+<p>Las reglas habituales de LaTeX para el tratamiento de varios espacios
+como un espacio único e ignorando espacios después de un nombre de
+instrucción también se aplican al <code>mensaje</code>. Una instrucción
+<code>\space</code> en <code>mensaje</code> provoca la impresión de un espació
+sencillo, independientemente de los espacios circundantes. Una
+<code>^^J</code> en <code>mensaje</code> imprime una nueva línea.
+</p>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="L_00ednea-de-_00d3rdenes"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Plantillas-de-Documento" accesskey="n" rel="next">Plantillas de Documento</a>, Previous: <a href="#Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Linea-de-Ordenes"></a>
+<h2 class="chapter">27 Línea de Órdenes</h2>
+<a name="index-linea-de-ordenes"></a>
+
+<p>La especificación de archivo de entrada indica el archivo al cual
+aplicar formato; TeX usa <samp>.tex</samp> como extensión predeterminada.
+Si se omite el archivo de entrada completamente, TeX acepta entrada
+desde la terminal. Usted especifica opciones de instrucción mediante el
+suministro de una cadena como un parámetro para la instrucción; por
+ejemplo,
+</p>
+<div class="example">
+<pre class="example">latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
+</pre></div>
+
+<p>debe procesar <samp>foo.tex</samp> sin hacer una pausa después de cada error.
+</p>
+<a name="index-_002a-apuntador"></a>
+<a name="index-apuntador_002c-_002a"></a>
+<a name="index-_005cstop"></a>
+<p>Si LaTeX se detiene en medio del documento y le muestra un indicador
+&lsquo;<samp>*</samp>&rsquo;, está esperando por una entrada. Usted puede escribir
+<code>\stop</code> (e Intro) y este terminará el documento prematuramente.
+</p>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Plantillas-de-Documento"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#License-translation" accesskey="n" rel="next">License translation</a>, Previous: <a href="#L_00ednea-de-_00d3rdenes" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Línea de Órdenes</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Plantillas-de-Documento-1"></a>
+<h2 class="appendix">Appendix A Plantillas de Documento</h2>
+<a name="index-plantillas-de-documentos"></a>
+
+<p>Aunque no es material de referencia, tal vez estas plantillas de
+documento serán de utilidad.
+</p>
+<table class="menu" border="0" cellspacing="0">
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Plantilla-book" accesskey="1">Plantilla book</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Plantilla-beamer" accesskey="2">Plantilla beamer</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left" valign="top">&bull; <a href="#Plantilla-tugboat" accesskey="3">Plantilla tugboat</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;&nbsp;</td><td align="left" valign="top">
+</td></tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Plantilla-book"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Plantilla-beamer" accesskey="n" rel="next">Plantilla beamer</a>, Up: <a href="#Plantillas-de-Documento" accesskey="u" rel="up">Plantillas de Documento</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Plantilla-book-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">A.1 Plantilla <code>book</code></h3>
+
+<pre class="verbatim">\documentclass{book}
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+\title{Plantilla de Clase Book}
+\author{Autor Alex}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\chapter{Primero}
+Algún texto.
+
+\chapter{Segundo}
+Algún otro texto.
+
+\section{Un subtema}
+El final.
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Plantilla-beamer"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Plantilla-tugboat" accesskey="n" rel="next">Plantilla tugboat</a>, Previous: <a href="#Plantilla-book" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Plantilla book</a>, Up: <a href="#Plantillas-de-Documento" accesskey="u" rel="up">Plantillas de Documento</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Plantilla-beamer-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">A.2 Plantilla <code>beamer</code></h3>
+
+<p>La clase <code>beamer</code> crea diapositivas de presentaciones.
+</p>
+<pre class="verbatim">\documentclass{beamer}
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+
+\title{Plantilla de Clase Beamer}
+\author{Autor Alex}
+\date{Julio 31, 2010}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% sin [fragile], cualquier código {verbatim} provoca errores misteriosos.
+\begin{frame}[fragile]
+ \frametitle{Primer Diapositiva}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ ¡Esto está en \verbatim!
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+</pre>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="Plantilla-tugboat"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#Plantilla-beamer" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Plantilla beamer</a>, Up: <a href="#Plantillas-de-Documento" accesskey="u" rel="up">Plantillas de Documento</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Plantilla-tugboat-1"></a>
+<h3 class="section">A.3 Plantilla <code>tugboat</code></h3>
+
+<p><cite>TUGboat</cite> es el diario del Grupo de Usuarios de TeX,
+<a href="http://tug.org/TUGboat">http://tug.org/TUGboat</a>.
+</p>
+<pre class="verbatim">\documentclass{ltugboat} % para procedimientos ltugproc
+
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{ifpdf}
+\ifpdf
+ \usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,
+ urlcolor=black]{hyperref}
+\else
+ \usepackage{url}
+\fi
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Ejemplo de Articulo Regular \TUB\}
+
+% repetir información para cada autor.
+\author{First Last}
+\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
+\netaddress{user (at) ejemplo dot org}
+\personalURL{http://ejemplo.org/~user/}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% El resumen en ltugboat viene después de \maketitle.
+\begin{abstract}
+Este es un ejemplo del tema de un artículo \TUB{} ordinario.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introducción}
+
+Este es un artículo de ejemplo para \TUB, de
+\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
+
+Recomendamos el paquete graphicx para inclusión de imágenes y el
+paquete hyperref para urls activas (en la salida \acro{PDF}). \TUB\ se
+produce utilizando archivos \acro{PDF} exclusivamente, en la actualidad.
+
+Las clases \texttt{ltug*} proporcionan estas abreviaturas, entre muchas
+otras:
+
+{\small
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
+\BibTeX \CandT \CTAN \DTD \DVItoVDU \HTML
+\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \JoT \LAMSTeX \LaTeXe
+\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \pcMF \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas
+\PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS
+\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG
+\tug \UG \UNIX \VAX \VorTeX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+
+\Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag
+\careof \thinskip
+
+\acro{FRED} -&gt; {\sc fred} % ¡Por favor úselas!
+\cs{fred} -&gt; \fred
+\env{fred} -&gt; \begin{fred}
+\meta{fred} -&gt; &lt;fred&gt;
+\nth{n} -&gt; 1st, 2nd, ...
+\sfrac{3/4} -&gt; 3/4
+\booktitle{Libro de Fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+}
+
+Para mayor información, consulte el documento en ltubguid:
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat}
+
+Correo electrónico \verb|tugboat@tug.org| si incurre en problemas o tiene
+dudas.
+
+
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain} % recomendamos el estilo de bibliografía plain
+\nocite{book-minimal} % solo hace que la bibliografía no esté vacía
+\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib viene con BibTeX
+
+
+\makesignature % no en ltugproc
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+<hr>
+<a name="License-translation"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#Plantillas-de-Documento" accesskey="n" rel="next">Plantillas de Documento</a>, Previous: <a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Índice de Conceptos</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Traduccion-de-la-licencia"></a>
+<h2 class="appendix">Appendix B Traducción de la licencia</h2>
+
+<p>La traducción que sigue es dada únicamente como informaciòn, y no
+reemplaza el texto en inglés dado al principio de este documento.
+</p>
+<p>Se concede permiso para hacer y distribuir copias literales de este
+manual siempre que el aviso de copyright y esta nota de permiso se
+conserven en todas las copias.
+</p>
+
+<p>Se concede permiso para copiar y distribuir versiones modificadas de
+este manual bajo las condiciones para una copia literal, a condición de
+que todo el trabajo derivado resultante se distribuya bajo los términos
+de una nota de permiso idéntica a ésta.
+</p>
+<p>Se concede permiso para copiar y distribuir traducciones de este manual
+a otro idioma, con las condiciones anteriores para versiones
+modificadas.
+</p>
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Next: <a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones" accesskey="n" rel="next">Índice de Instrucciones</a>, Previous: <a href="#License-translation" accesskey="p" rel="prev">License translation</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Indice-de-Conceptos"></a>
+<h2 class="unnumbered">Índice de Conceptos</h2>
+
+<table><tr><th valign="top">Jump to: &nbsp; </th><td><a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_symbol-1"><b>*</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_symbol-2"><b>\</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_symbol-3"><b>`</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<br>
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-A"><b>A</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-B"><b>B</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-C"><b>C</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-D"><b>D</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-E"><b>E</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-F"><b>F</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-G"><b>G</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-H"><b>H</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-I"><b>I</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-J"><b>J</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-K"><b>K</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-L"><b>L</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-M"><b>M</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-N"><b>N</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-O"><b>O</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-P"><b>P</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-R"><b>R</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-S"><b>S</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-T"><b>T</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-U"><b>U</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-V"><b>V</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-X"><b>X</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-É"><b>É</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-Í"><b>Í</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+</td></tr></table>
+<table class="index-cp" border="0">
+<tr><td></td><th align="left">Index Entry</th><td>&nbsp;</td><th align="left"> Section</th></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_symbol-1">*</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_002a-apuntador">&lsquo;<samp>*</samp>&rsquo; apuntador</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#L_00ednea-de-_00d3rdenes">Línea de Órdenes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_symbol-2">\</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cinclude-anidada_002c-no-se-permite"><code>\include</code> anidada, no se permite</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cinclude">\include</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_symbol-3">`</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_0060vea_0027-y-_0060vea-tambien_0027-entradas-de-indice">&lsquo;vea&rsquo; y &lsquo;vea también&rsquo; entradas de índice</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-A">A</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-accediendo-a-cualquier-caracter-del-tipo-de-letra">accediendo a cualquier carácter del tipo de letra</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-agudo">acento agudo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-agudo_002c-math">acento agudo, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-anticircunflejo">acento anticircunflejo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-barra">acento barra</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-barra-encima">acento barra encima</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-barra-horizontal_002c-math">acento barra horizontal, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-barra-sobre">acento barra sobre</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-breve_002c-math">acento breve, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-cedilla">acento cedilla</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-circunflejo">acento circunflejo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-circunflejo-1">acento circunflejo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-circunflejo-amplio_002c-math">acento circunflejo amplio, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-circunflejo_002c-math">acento circunflejo, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-circunflejo_002c-math-1">acento circunflejo, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-circulo">acento círculo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-de-verificacion_002c-math">acento de verificación, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-dieresis">acento diéresis</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-dieresis-1">acento diéresis</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-dieresis-hungara">acento diéresis húngara</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-dieresis_002c-math">acento diéresis, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-grave">acento grave</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-grave_002c-math">acento grave, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-hacek_002c-math">acento h&aacute;&#269;ek, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-macron">acento macrón</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-macron_002c-math">acento macrón, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-punto">acento punto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-punto-1">acento punto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-punto-superior_002c-math">acento punto superior, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-tilde">acento tilde</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-tilde-amplia_002c-math">acento tilde amplia, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acento-tilde_002c-math">acento tilde, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acentos">acentos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acentos-matematicos">acentos matemáticos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-acentos_002c-matematicas">acentos, matemáticas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-alineando-a-traves-de-tabulacion">alineando a través de tabulación</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-alineando-Ecuaciones">alineando Ecuaciones</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-alineando-texto-en-columnas-con-tabulaciones">alineando texto en columnas con tabulaciones</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-alineando-texto-en-tablas">alineando texto en tablas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ampliando-la-pagina-actual">ampliando la página actual</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-anillo-acento">anillo acento</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-anticircunflejo-acento">anticircunflejo acento</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-antigrafo-o-simplemente-signo-de-parrafo">antígrafo o simplemente signo de párrafo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-apuntador_002c-_002a">apuntador, &lsquo;<samp>*</samp>&rsquo;</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#L_00ednea-de-_00d3rdenes">Línea de Órdenes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-apendices_002c-creando">apéndices, creando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Seccionado">Seccionado</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-archivo-_002eglo">archivo <samp>.glo</samp></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glosarios">Glosarios</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-archivo-_002eidx">archivo <samp>.idx</samp></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-archivo-_002eind">archivo <samp>.ind</samp></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-archivo-de-entrada">archivo de entrada</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Dividiendo-la-Entrada">Dividiendo la Entrada</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-argumentos-moviles">argumentos móviles</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ascender-superior">ascender superior</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ASCII-circunflejo_002c-en-texto">ASCII circunflejo, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ash">ash</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-asterisco-centrado_002c-en-texto">asterisco centrado, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-asterisco_002c-centrado_002c-en-texto">asterisco, centrado, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-atadura-con-siguiente-acento">atadura con siguiente acento</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-autor_002c-para-titlepage">autor, para titlepage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-B">B</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bala_002c-en-texto">bala, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bar_002c-vertical_002c-en-texto">bar, vertical, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-barra-inversa_002c-en-texto">barra inversa, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-barra-vertical_002c-doble_002c-en-texto">barra vertical, doble, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-barra-vertical_002c-en-texto">barra vertical, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-barra_002c-vertical-doble_002c-en-texto">barra, vertical doble, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bibliografia_002c-creando-_0028automaticamente_0029">bibliografía, creando (automáticamente)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Usando-BibTeX">Usando BibTeX</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bibliografia_002c-creando-_0028manualmente_0029">bibliografía, creando (manualmente)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-bibTeX_002c-usando">bibTeX, usando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Usando-BibTeX">Usando BibTeX</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-breve-acento">breve acento</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-C">C</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cajas">cajas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Cajas">Cajas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-caracteres-especiales">caracteres especiales</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-caracteres-no-Ingleses">caracteres no Ingleses</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-caracteres-reservados">caracteres reservados</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-caracteres_002c-acentuados">caracteres, acentuados</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-caracteres_002c-no-Ingleses">caracteres, no Ingleses</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-caracteres_002c-reservados">caracteres, reservados</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cargando-paquetes-adicionales">cargando paquetes adicionales</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cartas">cartas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Cartas">Cartas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cartas_002c-iniciando">cartas, iniciando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005copening">\opening</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cartas_002c-terminando">cartas, terminando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclosing">\closing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-caron-acento">carón acento</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-centrar-texto_002c-declaracion-para">centrar texto, declaración para</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccentering">\centering</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-centrar-texto_002c-entorno-para">centrar texto, entorno para</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#center">center</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-cerrando-cartas">cerrando cartas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclosing">\closing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-circunflejo_002c-ASCII_002c-en-texto">circunflejo, ASCII, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-clases-de-documento">clases de documento</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Clases-de-Documento">Clases de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-clases-de-documentos">clases de documentos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Clases-de-Documento">Clases de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-colita">colita</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comilla-angular-de-apertura">comilla angular de apertura</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comilla-angular-de-cierre">comilla angular de cierre</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comilla-de-apertura">comilla de apertura</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comilla-de-apertura-simple">comilla de apertura simple</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comilla-de-cierre">comilla de cierre</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comilla-de-cierre-simple">comilla de cierre simple</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comilla-de-cierre_002c-simple">comilla de cierre, simple</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comilla-derecha">comilla derecha</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comilla-en-linea-base_002c-simple-y-doble">comilla en línea base, simple y doble</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comilla-izquierda">comilla izquierda</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comilla-izquierda_002c-sola">comilla izquierda, sola</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comilla-simple-en-linea-base">comilla simple en línea base</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comilla_002c-en-la-linea-base-_0028coma_0029">comilla, en la línea base (coma)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comillas-de-cierre-dobles">comillas de cierre dobles</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comillas-de-cierre_002c-dobles">comillas de cierre, dobles</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comillas-dobles-de-apertura">comillas dobles de apertura</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comillas-dobles-en-linea-base">comillas dobles en línea base</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comillas-tipograficas-angulares">comillas tipográficas angulares</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comillas-tipograficas-angulares-simples">comillas tipográficas angulares simples</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comillas-tipograficas-Francesas">comillas tipográficas Francesas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comillas-tipograficas-simples">comillas tipográficas simples</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comillas-tipograficas_002c-Francesas">comillas tipográficas, Francesas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comillas-tipograficas_002c-latinas-o-angulares">comillas tipográficas, latinas o angulares</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-comillastraight-quote_002c-base">comillastraight quote, base</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-contadores_002c-configurando">contadores, configurando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-contadores_002c-consiguiendo-el-valor-de">contadores, consiguiendo el valor de</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvalue">\value</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-contadores_002c-definiendo-nuevos">contadores, definiendo nuevos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-contadores_002c-una-lista-de">contadores, una lista de</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Contadores">Contadores</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-creando-cartas">creando cartas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Cartas">Cartas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-creando-imagenes">creando imágenes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-creando-tablas">creando tablas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#table">table</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-creditos-al-pie-de-pagina">créditos al pie de página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-codigo_002c-composicion-tipografica-de">código, composición tipográfica de</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-D">D</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-daga-doble_002c-en-texto">daga doble, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-daga_002c-doble_002c-en-texto">daga, doble, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-daga_002c-en-texto">daga, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-daga_002c-en-texto-1">daga, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-definiciones">definiciones</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Definiciones">Definiciones</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-definicion-de-nuevos-tipos-de-letra">definición de nuevos tipos de letra</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-definiendo-nuevos-entornos">definiendo nuevos entornos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment y \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-definiendo-nuevos-teoremas">definiendo nuevos teoremas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-definiendo-una-nueva-instruccion">definiendo una nueva instrucción</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand y \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-delimitador-nulo">delimitador nulo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-descargando-flotantes-e-iniciando-una-pagina">descargando flotantes e iniciando una página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-descripcion-de-LaTeX">descripción de LaTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Descripci_00f3n">Descripción</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-diseno_002c-parametros-de-pagina-para">diseño, parámetros de página para</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dividiendo-el-archivo-de-entrada">dividiendo el archivo de entrada</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Dividiendo-la-Entrada">Dividiendo la Entrada</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-dividiendo-paginas">dividiendo páginas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Saltos-de-P_00e1gina">Saltos de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-divisas_002c-euro">divisas, euro</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-division-de-silabas-con-guion_002c-definiendo">división de sílabas con guión, definiendo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-division-silabica_002c-forzando">división silábica, forzando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-division-silabica_002c-impidiendo">división silábica, impidiendo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmbox">\mbox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-doble-barra-vertical_002c-en-texto">doble barra vertical, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-doble-daga_002c-en-texto">doble daga, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-E">E</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-e_002ddash">e-dash</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ecuaciones_002c-alineando">ecuaciones, alineando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ecuaciones_002c-entornos-para">ecuaciones, entornos para</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ejecutando-header-y-footer">ejecutando header y footer</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-elementos-numerados_002c-especificando-contador">elementos numerados, especificando contador</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-em_002ddash">em-dash</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-em_002ddash-de-tres-cuartos">em-dash de tres cuartos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-em_002ddash_002c-tres-cuartos">em-dash, tres cuartos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entornos">entornos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Entornos">Entornos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entornos_002c-definiendo">entornos, definiendo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment y \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entrada_002fsalida">entrada/salida</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal">Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entrada_002fsalida-desde-la-terminal">entrada/salida desde la terminal</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal">Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Equipo-del-Proyecto-LaTeX">Equipo del Proyecto LaTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acerca-de-este-documento">Acerca de este documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-es_002dzet-letra-Alemana">es-zet letra Alemana</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-espacio-dentro-del-modo-math">espacio dentro del modo math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Espacios-en-Modo-Math">Espacios en Modo Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-espacio-vertical">espacio vertical</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-espacio-vertical-antes-de-parrafos">espacio vertical antes de párrafos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cparskip">\parskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-espacio-vertical_002c-insertando">espacio vertical, insertando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-espacio-visible">espacio visible</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-espacios">espacios</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Espacios">Espacios</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-espina-Islandesa">espina Islandesa</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-espina_002c-letra-Islandesa">espina, letra Islandesa</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-estilo-de-encabezado">estilo de encabezado</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-estilo-de-numeracion-de-pagina">estilo de numeración de página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-estilo-del-pie-de-pagina">estilo del pie de página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-estilos-de-pagina">estilos de página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-de-P_00e1gina">Estilos de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-estilos-de-texto">estilos de texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-estilos-de-tipografia">estilos de tipografía</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-estilos-del-tipo-de-letra">estilos del tipo de letra</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-estilos_002c-pagina">estilos, página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-de-P_00e1gina">Estilos de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-eth_002c-letra-islandesa">eth, letra islandesa</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-etiquetas-en-maquina-de-escribir-en-listas">etiquetas en máquina de escribir en listas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-exclamacion_002c-inicial">exclamación, inicial</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-exponente">exponente</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sub_00edndices-y-Super_00edndices">Subíndices y Superíndices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-F">F</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fecha_002c-para-la-pagina-de-titulo">fecha, para la página de título</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-figuras_002c-en-notas-al-pie">figuras, en notas al pie</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-figuras_002c-insertando">figuras, insertando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-fijando-contadores">fijando contadores</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-finalizando-e-iniciando">finalizando e iniciando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Iniciando-y-Finalizando">Iniciando y Finalizando</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flecha-derecha_002c-en-texto">flecha derecha, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flecha-hacia-la-derecha_002c-en-texto">flecha hacia la derecha, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flecha-hacia-la-izquierda_002c-en-texto">flecha hacia la izquierda, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flecha_002c-izquierda_002c-en-texto">flecha, izquierda, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-footer_002c-parametros-para">footer, parámetros para</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-forma-con-_002a-de-instrucciones-de-seccionado">forma con * de instrucciones de seccionado</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Seccionado">Seccionado</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-funciones-matematicas">funciones matemáticas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-funciones_002c-matematicas">funciones, matemáticas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-formulas-en-linea">fórmulas en línea</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#math">math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-formulas-matematicas">fórmulas matemáticas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-formulas_002c-entornos-para">fórmulas, entornos para</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-formulas_002c-matematicas">fórmulas, matemáticas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-G">G</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-glosarios">glosarios</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glosarios">Glosarios</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-guion-doble_002c-linea-recta">guión doble, línea recta</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-H">H</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-haciendo-parrafos">haciendo párrafos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Haciendo-P_00e1rrafos">Haciendo Párrafos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-haciendo-una-pagina-de-titulo">haciendo una página de título</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-header_002c-parametros-para">header, parámetros para</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-I">I</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-i-sin-punto">i sin punto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-i-sin-punto_002c-math">i sin punto, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-imagenes_002c-creando">imágenes, creando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-informes-de-errores">informes de errores</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acerca-de-este-documento">Acerca de este documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-iniciando-una-nueva-pagina">iniciando una nueva página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-iniciando-una-nueva-pagina-y-limpiando-flotantes">iniciando una nueva página y limpiando flotantes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-iniciando-una-pagina-a-mano-derecha">iniciando una página a mano derecha</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-iniciando-y-finalizando">iniciando y finalizando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Iniciando-y-Finalizando">Iniciando y Finalizando</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-insertando-figuras">insertando figuras</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-instrucciones-de-diseno">instrucciones de diseño</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Dise_00f1o">Diseño</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-instrucciones-de-tipo-de-letra_002c-de-bajo-nivel">instrucciones de tipo de letra, de bajo nivel</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-instrucciones-fragiles">instrucciones frágiles</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-instrucciones-robustas">instrucciones robustas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-instrucciones_002c-definiendo-nuevas">instrucciones, definiendo nuevas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand y \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-interlineado-doble">interlineado doble</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-interrogacion_002c-inicial">interrogación, inicial</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-islandes-eth">islandés eth</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-J">J</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-j-sin-punto">j sin punto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-j-sin-punto_002c-math">j sin punto, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-justificacion_002c-alineando-a-la-derecha">justificación, alineando a la derecha</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-justificacion_002c-irregular-a-la-izquierda">justificación, irregular a la izquierda</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-justificando-texto-a-la-izquierda">justificando texto a la izquierda</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-justificar-texto-a-la-derecha_002c-entorno-para">justificar texto a la derecha, entorno para</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-justificar-texto-a-la-izquierda_002c-entornos-para">justificar texto a la izquierda, entornos para</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-K">K</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Knuth_002c-Donald-E_002e">Knuth, Donald E.</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acerca-de-este-documento">Acerca de este documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-L">L</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-l-Polaca">l Polaca</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Lamport_002c-Leslie">Lamport, Leslie</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acerca-de-este-documento">Acerca de este documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-LaTeX_002c-descripcion">LaTeX, descripción</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Descripci_00f3n">Descripción</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letra-en-circulo_002c-en-texto">letra en círculo, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letra-ij_002c-Neerlandes">letra ij, Neerlandés</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letras-caligraficas-para-math">letras caligráficas para math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letras-griegas">letras griegas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letras-S-afiladas">letras S afiladas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letras-script-para-math">letras script para math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letras_002c-acentuadas">letras, acentuadas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letras_002c-no-Inglesas">letras, no Inglesas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ligadura-ae">ligadura ae</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lista-de-documentos-adjuntos">lista de documentos adjuntos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cencl">\encl</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lista-de-elementos_002c-especificando-el-contador">lista de elementos, especificando el contador</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lista-de-elementos_002c-numerados">lista de elementos, numerados</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-listas-cc_002c-en-cartas">listas cc, en cartas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccc">\cc</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-listas-con-vinetas">listas con viñetas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-listas-de-descripcion_002c-creando">listas de descripción, creando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-listas-de-elementos">listas de elementos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-listas-de-elementos_002c-genericas">listas de elementos, genéricas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-listas-etiquetadas_002c-creando">listas etiquetadas, creando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-listas-no-ordenadas">listas no ordenadas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-llave-de-apertura_002c-en-texto">llave de apertura, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-llave-derecha_002c-en-texto">llave derecha, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-llave_002c-derecha_002c-en-texto">llave, derecha, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-llave_002c-izquierda_002c-en-texto">llave, izquierda, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Logotipo-de-LaTeX">Logotipo de LaTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Logotipo-de-LaTeX2e">Logotipo de LaTeX2e</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-logotipo-de-TeX">logotipo de TeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-logotipo_002c-LaTeX">logotipo, LaTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-logotipo_002c-LaTeX2e">logotipo, LaTeX2e</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-logotipo_002c-TeX">logotipo, TeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-longitudes-predeterminadas">longitudes predeterminadas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Longitudes-Predeterminadas">Longitudes Predeterminadas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-longitudes_002c-anadiendo-a">longitudes, añadiendo a</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-longitudes_002c-configurando">longitudes, configurando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csetlength">\setlength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-longitudes_002c-definiendo-nuevas">longitudes, definiendo nuevas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-longitudes_002c-definiendo-y-usando">longitudes, definiendo y usando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Longitudes">Longitudes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-longitudes_002c-predefinidas">longitudes, predefinidas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Longitudes-Predeterminadas">Longitudes Predeterminadas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-linea-de-ordenes">línea de órdenes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#L_00ednea-de-_00d3rdenes">Línea de Órdenes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-linea-recta-de-guion-doble_002c-base">línea recta de guión doble, base</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-linea_002c-saltos-de">línea, saltos de</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea">Saltos de Línea</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lineas-en-tablas">líneas en tablas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-M">M</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-makeindex-programa"><code>makeindex</code> programa</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-marca-izquierda_002c-doble">marca izquierda, doble</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-marca-palabra-compuesta_002c-en-texto">marca palabra compuesta, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-matematicas_002c-negrita">matemáticas, negrita</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-matrices_002c-matematicas">matrices, matemáticas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-minipage_002c-creando-una">minipage, creando una</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-miscelanea-math">miscelánea math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-modo-izquierda_002da_002dderecha">modo izquierda-a-derecha</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modos">Modos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-modo-lR">modo lR</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modos">Modos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-modo-math">modo math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modos">Modos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-modo-math-mode_002c-espaciado">modo math mode, espaciado</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Espacios-en-Modo-Math">Espacios en Modo Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-modo-math_002c-ingresando-al">modo math, ingresando al</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-modo-parrafo">modo párrafo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modos">Modos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-modos">modos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Modos">Modos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-moneda_002c-dolar">moneda, dólar</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mostrando-texto-citado-con-sangria-de-parrafo">mostrando texto citado con sangría de párrafo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation">quotation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-mostrando-texto-citado-sin-sangria-de-parrafo">mostrando texto citado sin sangría de párrafo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quote">quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-multiplicacion-discrecional">multiplicación discrecional</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-maquina-de-escribir-en-negrita_002c-evitando">máquina de escribir en negrita, evitando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-N">N</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-negrita-matematicas">negrita matemáticas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-notas-al-margen">notas al margen</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Notas-al-Margen">Notas al Margen</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-notas-al-pie-en-figuras">notas al pie en figuras</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-notas-al-pie_002c-creando">notas al pie, creando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Notas-al-Pie">Notas al Pie</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-notas-al-pie_002c-simbolos-en-lugar-de-numeros-en">notas al pie, símbolos en lugar de números en</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Notas-al-Pie-Simb_00f3licas">Notas al Pie Simbólicas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-notas-en-el-margen">notas en el margen</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Notas-al-Margen">Notas al Margen</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-nueva-linea_002c-comenzando">nueva línea, comenzando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-nueva-linea_002c-comenzando-_0028modo-de-parrafo_0029">nueva línea, comenzando (modo de párrafo)</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewline">\newline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-nueva-linea_002c-salida-como-entrada">nueva línea, salida como entrada</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-y-_005crestorecr">\obeycr y \restorecr</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-nueva-pagina_002c-iniciando">nueva página, iniciando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-nuevas-instrucciones_002c-definiendo">nuevas instrucciones, definiendo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand y \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-numero-de-ecuacion_002c-referencias-cruzadas">número de ecuación, referencias cruzadas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-numero-de-figura_002c-referencias-cruzadas">número de figura, referencias cruzadas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-numero-de-pie-de-pagina_002c-referencias-cruzadas">número de pie de página, referencias cruzadas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-numero-de-pagina_002c-referencias-cruzadas">número de página, referencias cruzadas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpageref">\pageref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-numero-de-seccion_002c-referencias-cruzadas">número de sección, referencias cruzadas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-numeros-de-ecuacion_002c-omitiendo">números de ecuación, omitiendo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-numeros-de-seccion_002c-imprimiendo">números de sección, imprimiendo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Seccionado">Seccionado</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-O">O</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-observaciones-en-el-margen">observaciones en el margen</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Notas-al-Margen">Notas al Margen</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-oe-ligadura">oe ligadura</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-omitiendo_002c-cajas-negras">omitiendo, cajas negras</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opciones-de-clase">opciones de clase</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opciones-de-clase-de-documento">opciones de clase de documento</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opciones-globales">opciones globales</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opciones-globales-1">opciones globales</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opciones_002c-clase-de-documento">opciones, clase de documento</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opciones_002c-globales">opciones, globales</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ordinales-en-espanol_002c-femenino-y-masculino">ordinales en español, femenino y masculino</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ordinales_002c-femenino-y-masculino">ordinales, femenino y masculino</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-oslash">oslash</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-P">P</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paquete-datetime">paquete <code>datetime</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paquete-float">paquete <code>float</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paquete-makeidx">paquete <code>makeidx</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paquete-multind">paquete <code>multind</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paquete-setspace">paquete <code>setspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paquete-showidx">paquete <code>showidx</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paquetes_002c-cargando">paquetes, cargando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-parametros-de-footnote">parámetros de footnote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-Footnote">Parámetros para Footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-parametros-para-el-diseno-de-pagina">parámetros para el diseño de página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-parametros_002c-diseno-de-pagina">parámetros, diseño de página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-parametros_002c-para-footnote">parámetros, para footnote</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-Footnote">Parámetros para Footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-plantillas-de-documentos">plantillas de documentos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Plantillas-de-Documento">Plantillas de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-poesia_002c-un-entorno-para">poesía, un entorno para</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verse">verse</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-posdata_002c-en-cartas">posdata, en cartas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cps">\ps</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-preambulo_002c-definido">preámbulo, definido</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Iniciando-y-Finalizando">Iniciando y Finalizando</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-produce-dos-columnas">produce dos columnas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-produce-una-columna">produce una columna</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-programas-de-ordenador_002c-composicion-tipografica">programas de ordenador, composición tipográfica</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-punto-centrado_002c-en-texto">punto centrado, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-punto-superior-acento_002c-math">punto superior acento, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-punto_002c-centrado_002c-en-texto">punto, centrado, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-puntos-suspensivos">puntos suspensivos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-pagina-de-titulo_002c-creando-la">página de título, creando la</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-parrafos">párrafos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Haciendo-P_00e1rrafos">Haciendo Párrafos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-R">R</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-redefiniendo-entornos">redefiniendo entornos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment y \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-reduccion_002c-omitiendo-vertical">reducción, omitiendo vertical</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-referencias-cruzadas">referencias cruzadas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Referencias-Cruzadas">Referencias Cruzadas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-referencias-cruzadas-con-numero-de-pagina">referencias cruzadas con número de página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpageref">\pageref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-referencias-cruzadas_002c-simbolicas">referencias cruzadas, simbólicas</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-resumenes">resúmenes</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#abstract">abstract</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-S">S</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-salto-de-pagina">salto de página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Saltos-de-P_00e1gina">Saltos de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-saltos-de-linea">saltos de línea</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Saltos-de-L_00ednea">Saltos de Línea</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-saltos-de-linea_002c-evitando">saltos de línea, evitando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-y-_005cnolinebreak">\linebreak y \nolinebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-saltos-de-linea_002c-forzando">saltos de línea, forzando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-y-_005cnolinebreak">\linebreak y \nolinebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-saltos-de-pagina_002c-evitando">saltos de página, evitando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-y-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak y \nopagebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-saltos-de-pagina_002c-forzando">saltos de página, forzando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-y-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak y \nopagebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sangria-de-parrafos_002c-en-minipage">sangría de párrafos, en minipage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sangria-de-parrafos_002c-en-minipage-1">sangría de párrafos, en minipage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sangria_002c-forzando-la">sangría, forzando la</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindent">\indent</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sangria_002c-suprimiendo-la">sangría, suprimiendo la</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnoindent">\noindent</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sangrias-de-parrafo-en-texto-citado">sangrías de párrafo en texto citado</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation">quotation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-sangrias-de-parrafo-en-texto-citado_002c-omitiendo">sangrías de párrafo en texto citado, omitiendo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quote">quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-seccionado">seccionado</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Seccionado">Seccionado</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-separacion-de-linea_002c-forzando">separación de línea, forzando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-signo-de-dolar">signo de dólar</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-siguiendo-el-estilo-de-encabezado-y-pie-de-pagina">siguiendo el estilo de encabezado y pie de página</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simulando-texto-escrito">simulando texto escrito</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-subrayado">subrayado</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-subrayado_002c-en-texto">subrayado, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-subindice">subíndice</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sub_00edndices-y-Super_00edndices">Subíndices y Superíndices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-superindice">superíndice</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sub_00edndices-y-Super_00edndices">Subíndices y Superíndices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-bala">símbolo bala</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-circulo-grande_002c-en-texto">símbolo círculo grande, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-de-copyright">símbolo de copyright</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-de-circulo_002c-grande_002c-en-texto">símbolo de círculo, grande, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-de-espacio-visible_002c-en-texto">símbolo de espacio visible, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-de-libra-esterlina">símbolo de libra esterlina</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-de-libra-esterlina-1">símbolo de libra esterlina</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-de-marca-comercial">símbolo de marca comercial</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-de-marca-registrada">símbolo de marca registrada</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-de-multiplicacion_002c-con-salto-de-linea-discrecional">símbolo de multiplicación, con salto de línea discrecional</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-de-parrafo">símbolo de párrafo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-de-seccion">símbolo de sección</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-de-vector_002c-math">símbolo de vector, math</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-del-euro">símbolo del euro</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-femenino-ordinal">símbolo femenino ordinal</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-mayor-que_002c-en-texto">símbolo mayor que, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-menor-que_002c-en-texto">símbolo menor que, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Simbolo-ordinal-femenino">Símbolo ordinal femenino</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolo-ordinal-masculino">símbolo ordinal masculino</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolos-de-texto">símbolos de texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolos-matematicos">símbolos matemáticos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-simbolos_002c-matematicos">símbolos, matemáticos</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-T">T</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tabla-de-contenido_002c-agregando-manualmente">tabla de contenido, agregando manualmente</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tabla-de-contenido_002c-creando">tabla de contenido, creando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tablas-de-Contenido">Tablas de Contenido</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tablas_002c-creando">tablas, creando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#table">table</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tabulaciones_002c-utilizando">tabulaciones, utilizando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tamano-del-texto">tamaño del texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tamanos-del-tipo-de-letra">tamaños del tipo de letra</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tamanos-del-tipo-de-letra-1">tamaños del tipo de letra</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tapa-superior">tapa superior</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-teoremas_002c-composicion-tipografica-de">teoremas, composición tipográfica de</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-teoremas_002c-definiendo">teoremas, definiendo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-texto-citado-con-sangria-de-parrafo_002c-mostrando">texto citado con sangría de párrafo, mostrando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation">quotation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-texto-citado-sin-sangria-de-parrafo_002c-mostrando">texto citado sin sangría de párrafo, mostrando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quote">quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-texto-escrito_002c-simulando">texto escrito, simulando</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-texto-irregular-a-la-derecha">texto irregular a la derecha</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-texto-irregular-a-la-derecha_002c-entorno-para">texto irregular a la derecha, entorno para</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-texto-irregular-a-la-izquierda">texto irregular a la izquierda</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-texto-irregular-a-la-izquierda_002c-entorno-para">texto irregular a la izquierda, entorno para</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-texto-justificado-a-la-derecha">texto justificado a la derecha</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-texto-literal">texto literal</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-texto-literal_002c-en-linea">texto literal, en línea</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-texto-multicolumna">texto multicolumna</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thanks_002c-para-titlepage">thanks, para titlepage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tilde-ASCII_002c-en-texto">tilde ASCII, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tilde_002c-ASCII_002c-en-texto">tilde, ASCII, en texto</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tipo-de-letra-cursiva">tipo de letra cursiva</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tipo-de-letra-de-ancho-fijo">tipo de letra de ancho fijo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tipo-de-letra-de-maquina-de-escribir">tipo de letra de máquina de escribir</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tipo-de-letra-monoespacio">tipo de letra monoespacio</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tipo-de-letra-negrita">tipo de letra negrita</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tipo-de-letra-oblicua">tipo de letra oblicua</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tipo-de-letra-oblicua-1">tipo de letra oblicua</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tipo-de-letra-romana">tipo de letra romana</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tipo-de-letra-sans-serif">tipo de letra sans serif</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tipo-de-letra-versales">tipo de letra versales</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Tipos-de-Letra">Tipos de Letra</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tipos-de-Letra">Tipos de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tipos-de-letra">tipos de letra</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tipos-de-Letra">Tipos de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tipos-de-letra_002c-nuevas-instrucciones-para">tipos de letra, nuevas instrucciones para</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-title_002c-para-titlepage">title, para titlepage</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-titulos_002c-haciendo">títulos, haciendo</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-U">U</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-usando-BibTeX">usando BibTeX</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Usando-BibTeX">Usando BibTeX</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-V">V</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-variables_002c-una-lista-de">variables, una lista de</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Contadores">Contadores</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-X">X</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-xindy-programa"><code>xindy</code> programa</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-É">É</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-Enfasis">Énfasis</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-enfasis">énfasis</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-Í">Í</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indices">índices</a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+</table>
+<table><tr><th valign="top">Jump to: &nbsp; </th><td><a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_symbol-1"><b>*</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_symbol-2"><b>\</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_symbol-3"><b>`</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<br>
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-A"><b>A</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-B"><b>B</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-C"><b>C</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-D"><b>D</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-E"><b>E</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-F"><b>F</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-G"><b>G</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-H"><b>H</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-I"><b>I</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-J"><b>J</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-K"><b>K</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-L"><b>L</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-M"><b>M</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-N"><b>N</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-O"><b>O</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-P"><b>P</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-R"><b>R</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-S"><b>S</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-T"><b>T</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-U"><b>U</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-V"><b>V</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-X"><b>X</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-É"><b>É</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos_cp_letter-Í"><b>Í</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+</td></tr></table>
+
+<hr>
+<a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones"></a>
+<div class="header">
+<p>
+Previous: <a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" accesskey="p" rel="prev">Índice de Conceptos</a>, Up: <a href="#Top" accesskey="u" rel="up">Top</a> &nbsp; [<a href="#SEC_Contents" title="Table of contents" rel="contents">Contents</a>][<a href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" title="Index" rel="index">Index</a>]</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Indice-de-Instrucciones"></a>
+<h2 class="unnumbered">Índice de Instrucciones</h2>
+
+<table><tr><th valign="top">Jump to: &nbsp; </th><td><a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-1"><b>$</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-2"><b>@</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-3"><b>\</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-4"><b>^</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-5"><b>_</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<br>
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-A"><b>A</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-C"><b>C</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-D"><b>D</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-E"><b>E</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-F"><b>F</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-I"><b>I</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-L"><b>L</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-M"><b>M</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-O"><b>O</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-P"><b>P</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-Q"><b>Q</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-T"><b>T</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-V"><b>V</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+</td></tr></table>
+<table class="index-fn" border="0">
+<tr><td></td><th align="left">Index Entry</th><td>&nbsp;</td><th align="left"> Section</th></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-1">$</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_0024"><code>$</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-2">@</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_0040_007b_002e_002e_002e_007d"><code>@{...}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-3">\</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0022-_0028acento-dieresis_0029"><code>\&quot; <span class="roman">(acento diéresis)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0023"><code>\#</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0024"><code>\$</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0025"><code>\%</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0026"><code>\&amp;</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0027-_0028acento-agudo_0029"><code>\' <span class="roman">(acento agudo)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029"><code>\' <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0028"><code>\(</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0029"><code>\)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002a"><code>\*</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002b"><code>\+</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002c"><code>\,</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Espacios-en-Modo-Math">Espacios en Modo Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002d"><code>\-</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029"><code>\- <span class="roman">(hyphenation)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002e-_0028acento-punto-encima_0029"><code>\. <span class="roman">(acento punto encima)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_002f"><code>\/</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_002f">\/</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003a"><code>\:</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Espacios-en-Modo-Math">Espacios en Modo Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003b"><code>\;</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Espacios-en-Modo-Math">Espacios en Modo Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003c"><code>\&lt;</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003d-_0028acento-macron_0029"><code>\= <span class="roman">(acento macrón)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003d-_0028tabbing_0029"><code>\= <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003e"><code>\&gt;</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003e-1"><code>\&gt;</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Espacios-en-Modo-Math">Espacios en Modo Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_003e-_0028tabbing_0029"><code>\&gt; <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0040"><code>\@</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cAT">\AT</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ca-_0028tabbing_0029"><code>\a <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ca_0027-_0028acento-agudo-en-tabulacion_0029"><code>\a' <span class="roman">(acento agudo en tabulación)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ca_003d-_0028acento-macron-en-tabbing_0029"><code>\a= <span class="roman">(acento macrón en tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caa-_0028aa_0029"><code>\aa (&aring;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAA-_0028AA_0029"><code>\AA (&Aring;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cacute"><code>\acute</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddcontentsline_007bexto_007d_007bunidad_007d_007btexto_007d"><code>\addcontentsline{<var>exto</var>}{<var>unidad</var>}{<var>texto</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddress"><code>\address</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddress">\address</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddtocontents_007bextra_007d_007btexto_007d"><code>\addtocontents{<var>extra</var>}{<var>texto</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddtocounter"><code>\addtocounter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddtolength"><code>\addtolength</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caddvspace"><code>\addvspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cae-_0028ae_0029"><code>\ae (&aelig;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAE-_0028AE_0029"><code>\AE (&AElig;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005caleph"><code>\aleph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005calph"><code>\alph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cAlph"><code>\Alph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005calpha"><code>\alpha</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005calsoname"><code>\alsoname</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005camalg"><code>\amalg</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cand-para-_005cauthor"><code>\and <span class="roman">para <code>\author</code></span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cangle"><code>\angle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cappendix"><code>\appendix</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Seccionado">Seccionado</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005capprox"><code>\approx</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carabic"><code>\arabic</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carccos"><code>\arccos</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carcsin"><code>\arcsin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carctan"><code>\arctan</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carg"><code>\arg</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carraycolsep"><code>\arraycolsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carrayrulewidth"><code>\arrayrulewidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005carraystretch"><code>\arraystretch</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cast"><code>\ast</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005casymp"><code>\asymp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cauthor_007bnombre-_005cand-nombre2_007d"><code>\author{<var>nombre</var> \and <var>nombre2</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ca_0060-_0028acento-grave-en-tabulacion_0029"><code>\a` <span class="roman">(acento grave en tabulación)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cb-_0028acento-barra_0029"><code>\b <span class="roman">(acento barra)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbackslash"><code>\backslash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbackslash-1"><code>\backslash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbar"><code>\bar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbaselineskip"><code>\baselineskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbaselinestretch"><code>\baselinestretch</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbegin"><code>\begin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Entornos">Entornos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbeta"><code>\beta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbf"><code>\bf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbfseries"><code>\bfseries</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbibitem"><code>\bibitem</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbibliography"><code>\bibliography</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Usando-BibTeX">Usando BibTeX</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbibliographystyle"><code>\bibliographystyle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Usando-BibTeX">Usando BibTeX</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigcap"><code>\bigcap</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigcap-1"><code>\bigcap</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigcirc"><code>\bigcirc</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigcup"><code>\bigcup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigodot"><code>\bigodot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigoplus"><code>\bigoplus</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigotimes"><code>\bigotimes</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigskip"><code>\bigskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigskipamount"><code>\bigskipamount</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigsqcup"><code>\bigsqcup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigtriangledown"><code>\bigtriangledown</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigtriangleup"><code>\bigtriangleup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbiguplus"><code>\biguplus</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbigwedge"><code>\bigwedge</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbmod"><code>\bmod</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cboldmath"><code>\boldmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbot"><code>\bot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbottomfraction"><code>\bottomfraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbowtie"><code>\bowtie</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cBox"><code>\Box</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbreve"><code>\breve</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cbullet"><code>\bullet</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cc-_0028acento-cedilla_0029"><code>\c <span class="roman">(acento cedilla)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccal"><code>\cal</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccap"><code>\cap</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalacute"><code>\capitalacute</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalbreve"><code>\capitalbreve</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalcaron"><code>\capitalcaron</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalcedilla"><code>\capitalcedilla</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalcircumflex"><code>\capitalcircumflex</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitaldieresis"><code>\capitaldieresis</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitaldotaccent"><code>\capitaldotaccent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalgrave"><code>\capitalgrave</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalhungarumlaut"><code>\capitalhungarumlaut</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalmacron"><code>\capitalmacron</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalnewtie"><code>\capitalnewtie</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalogonek"><code>\capitalogonek</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitalring"><code>\capitalring</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitaltie"><code>\capitaltie</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccapitaltilde"><code>\capitaltilde</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccaption"><code>\caption</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccc"><code>\cc</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccc">\cc</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccdot"><code>\cdot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccdots"><code>\cdots</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccentering"><code>\centering</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccentering">\centering</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cchapter"><code>\chapter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Seccionado">Seccionado</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccheck"><code>\check</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cchi"><code>\chi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccirc"><code>\circ</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccircle"><code>\circle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccircle">\circle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccite"><code>\cite</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccite">\cite</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccleardoublepage"><code>\cleardoublepage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cclearpage"><code>\clearpage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccline"><code>\cline</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ccline">\cline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cclosing"><code>\closing</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cclosing">\closing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cclubsuit"><code>\clubsuit</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccolumnsep"><code>\columnsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccolumnseprule"><code>\columnseprule</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccolumnwidth"><code>\columnwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccong"><code>\cong</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccontentsline"><code>\contentsline</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccoprod"><code>\coprod</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccopyright"><code>\copyright</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccos"><code>\cos</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccosh"><code>\cosh</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccot"><code>\cot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccoth"><code>\coth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccsc"><code>\csc</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ccup"><code>\cup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cd-_0028acento-circulo_0029"><code>\d <span class="roman">(acento círculo)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdag"><code>\dag</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdagger"><code>\dagger</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdashbox"><code>\dashbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdashv"><code>\dashv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdate_007btexto_007d"><code>\date{<var>texto</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cday"><code>\day</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear">\day \month \year</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdblfloatpagefraction"><code>\dblfloatpagefraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdblfloatsep"><code>\dblfloatsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdbltextfloatsep"><code>\dbltextfloatsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdbltopfraction"><code>\dbltopfraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cddag"><code>\ddag</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cddagger"><code>\ddagger</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cddot"><code>\ddot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cddots"><code>\ddots</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdeg"><code>\deg</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDelta"><code>\Delta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdelta"><code>\delta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdepth"><code>\depth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Longitudes-Predeterminadas">Longitudes Predeterminadas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdet"><code>\det</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdh-_0028ae_0029"><code>\dh (&aelig;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDH-_0028AE_0029"><code>\DH (&AElig;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDiamond"><code>\Diamond</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdiamond"><code>\diamond</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdiamondsuit"><code>\diamondsuit</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdim"><code>\dim</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdisplaystyle"><code>\displaystyle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdiv"><code>\div</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdj"><code>\dj</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDJ"><code>\DJ</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdocumentclass"><code>\documentclass</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Clases-de-Documento">Clases de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdot"><code>\dot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdoteq"><code>\doteq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdotfill"><code>\dotfill</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cdotfill">\dotfill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdots"><code>\dots</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdoublerulesep"><code>\doublerulesep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cdownarrow"><code>\downarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cDownarrow"><code>\Downarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cell"><code>\ell</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cem"><code>\em</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cemph"><code>\emph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cemptyset"><code>\emptyset</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cencl"><code>\encl</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cencl">\encl</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cend"><code>\end</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Entornos">Entornos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cenlargethispage"><code>\enlargethispage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cenumi"><code>\enumi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cenumii"><code>\enumii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cenumiii"><code>\enumiii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cenumiv"><code>\enumiv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cepsilon"><code>\epsilon</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cequiv"><code>\equiv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ceta"><code>\eta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cevensidemargin"><code>\evensidemargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cexists"><code>\exists</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cexp"><code>\exp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfbox"><code>\fbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-y-_005cframebox">\fbox y \framebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfboxrule"><code>\fboxrule</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfboxrule-1"><code>\fboxrule</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-y-_005cframebox">\fbox y \framebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfboxsep"><code>\fboxsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfboxsep-1"><code>\fboxsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-y-_005cframebox">\fbox y \framebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfill"><code>\fill</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chfill">\hfill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cflat"><code>\flat</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfloatpagefraction"><code>\floatpagefraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfloatsep"><code>\floatsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cflushbottom"><code>\flushbottom</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfnsymbol"><code>\fnsymbol</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Notas-al-Pie-Simb_00f3licas">Notas al Pie Simbólicas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfnsymbol-1"><code>\fnsymbol</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfnsymbol_002c-y-notas-al-pie"><code>\fnsymbol<span class="roman">, y notas al pie</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Notas-al-Pie-Simb_00f3licas">Notas al Pie Simbólicas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfontencoding"><code>\fontencoding</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfontfamily"><code>\fontfamily</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfontseries"><code>\fontseries</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfontshape"><code>\fontshape</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfontsize"><code>\fontsize</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootnote"><code>\footnote</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootnotemark"><code>\footnotemark</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootnoterule"><code>\footnoterule</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-Footnote">Parámetros para Footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootnotesep"><code>\footnotesep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-Footnote">Parámetros para Footnote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootnotesize"><code>\footnotesize</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootnotetext"><code>\footnotetext</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfootskip"><code>\footskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cforall"><code>\forall</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfrac"><code>\frac</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfrac_007bnum_007d_007bden_007d"><code>\frac{num}{den}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cframe"><code>\frame</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cframe">\frame</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cframebox"><code>\framebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cframebox-1"><code>\framebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfbox-y-_005cframebox">\fbox y \framebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfrown"><code>\frown</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cfussy"><code>\fussy</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cfussy">\fussy</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cGamma"><code>\Gamma</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgamma"><code>\gamma</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgcd"><code>\gcd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cge"><code>\ge</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgeq"><code>\geq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgets"><code>\gets</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgg"><code>\gg</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cglossary"><code>\glossary</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glosarios">Glosarios</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cglossaryentry"><code>\glossaryentry</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glosarios">Glosarios</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cgrave"><code>\grave</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cguillemotleft-_0028_00ab_0029"><code>\guillemotleft <span class="roman">(&laquo;)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cguillemotright-_0028_00bb_0029"><code>\guillemotright <span class="roman">(&raquo;)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cguilsinglleft-_0028_2039_0029"><code>\guilsinglleft <span class="roman">(&lsaquo;)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cguilsinglright-_0028_203a_0029"><code>\guilsinglright <span class="roman">(&rsaquo;)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cH-_0028acento-dieresis-Hungara_0029"><code>\H <span class="roman">(acento diéresis Húngara)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chat"><code>\hat</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chbar"><code>\hbar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cheadheight"><code>\headheight</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cheadsep"><code>\headsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cheartsuit"><code>\heartsuit</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cheight"><code>\height</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Longitudes-Predeterminadas">Longitudes Predeterminadas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chfill"><code>\hfill</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chfill">\hfill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chline"><code>\hline</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chline">\hline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chom"><code>\hom</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chookleftarrow"><code>\hookleftarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chookrightarrow"><code>\hookrightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chrulefill"><code>\hrulefill</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chspace"><code>\hspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chspace">\hspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chuge"><code>\huge</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cHuge"><code>\Huge</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005chyphenation"><code>\hyphenation</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ci-_0028i-sin-punto_0029"><code>\i <span class="roman">(i sin punto)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ciff"><code>\iff</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cij-_0028ij_0029"><code>\ij (ij)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cIJ-_0028IJ_0029"><code>\IJ (IJ)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cIm"><code>\Im</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cimath"><code>\imath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cin"><code>\in</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cinclude"><code>\include</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cinclude">\include</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cincludeonly"><code>\includeonly</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cindent"><code>\indent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindent">\indent</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cindex"><code>\index</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cindexentry"><code>\indexentry</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cinf"><code>\inf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cinfty"><code>\infty</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cinput"><code>\input</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cinput">\input</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cint"><code>\int</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cintextsep"><code>\intextsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ciota"><code>\iota</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cit"><code>\it</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citem"><code>\item</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citem-1"><code>\item</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citem-2"><code>\item</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citemindent"><code>\itemindent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citemsep"><code>\itemsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005citshape"><code>\itshape</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cj-_0028j-sin-punto_0029"><code>\j <span class="roman">(j sin punto)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cjmath"><code>\jmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cJoin"><code>\Join</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ck-_0028colita-_002d_002d_002dogonek-en-polaco_0029"><code>\k <span class="roman">(colita &mdash;ogonek en polaco)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ckappa"><code>\kappa</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cker"><code>\ker</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ckill"><code>\kill</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cl-_0028l_0029"><code>\l (&#322;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cL-_0028L_0029"><code>\L (&#321;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabel"><code>\label</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clabel">\label</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelenumi"><code>\labelenumi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelenumii"><code>\labelenumii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelenumiii"><code>\labelenumiii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelenumiv"><code>\labelenumiv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelitemi"><code>\labelitemi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelitemii"><code>\labelitemii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelitemiii"><code>\labelitemiii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelitemiv"><code>\labelitemiv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelsep"><code>\labelsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clabelwidth"><code>\labelwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLambda"><code>\Lambda</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clambda"><code>\lambda</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cland"><code>\land</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clangle"><code>\langle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clarge"><code>\large</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLarge"><code>\Large</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLARGE"><code>\LARGE</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLaTeX"><code>\LaTeX</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLaTeXe"><code>\LaTeXe</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clbrace"><code>\lbrace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clbrack"><code>\lbrack</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clceil"><code>\lceil</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cldots"><code>\ldots</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cle"><code>\le</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleadsto"><code>\leadsto</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleft-delimitador1-_002e_002e_002e-_005cright-delimitador2"><code>\left <var>delimitador1</var> ... \right <var>delimitador2</var></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLeftarrow"><code>\Leftarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftarrow"><code>\leftarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clefteqn"><code>\lefteqn</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftharpoondown"><code>\leftharpoondown</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftharpoonup"><code>\leftharpoonup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmargin"><code>\leftmargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmargini"><code>\leftmargini</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmarginii"><code>\leftmarginii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmarginiii"><code>\leftmarginiii</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmarginiv"><code>\leftmarginiv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmarginv"><code>\leftmarginv</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleftmarginvi"><code>\leftmarginvi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLeftrightarrow"><code>\Leftrightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cLeftrightarrow-1"><code>\Leftrightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cleq"><code>\leq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clfloor"><code>\lfloor</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clg"><code>\lg</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clhd"><code>\lhd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clim"><code>\lim</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005climinf"><code>\liminf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005climsup"><code>\limsup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cline"><code>\line</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cline">\line</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clinebreak"><code>\linebreak</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-y-_005cnolinebreak">\linebreak y \nolinebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clinespread"><code>\linespread</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clinethickness"><code>\linethickness</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clinewidth"><code>\linewidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clistoffigures"><code>\listoffigures</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tablas-de-Contenido">Tablas de Contenido</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clistoftables"><code>\listoftables</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tablas-de-Contenido">Tablas de Contenido</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clistparindent"><code>\listparindent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cll"><code>\ll</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cln"><code>\ln</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clnot"><code>\lnot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clocation"><code>\location</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clocation">\location</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clog"><code>\log</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clongleftarrow"><code>\longleftarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clongleftrightarrow"><code>\longleftrightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clongmapsto"><code>\longmapsto</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clongrightarrow"><code>\longrightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clor"><code>\lor</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005clq"><code>\lq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmakebox"><code>\makebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakebox">\makebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><code>\makebox (<code>picture</code>)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmakeglossary"><code>\makeglossary</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Glosarios">Glosarios</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmakeindex"><code>\makeindex</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmakelabels"><code>\makelabels</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmaketitle"><code>\maketitle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmapsto"><code>\mapsto</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginpar"><code>\marginpar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Notas-al-Margen">Notas al Margen</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginparpush"><code>\marginparpush</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Notas-al-Margen">Notas al Margen</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginparsep"><code>\marginparsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Notas-al-Margen">Notas al Margen</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarginparwidth"><code>\marginparwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Notas-al-Margen">Notas al Margen</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarkboth_007bizquierda_007d_007bderecha_007d"><code>\markboth{<var>izquierda</var>}{<var>derecha</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmarkright_007bderecha_007d"><code>\markright{<var>derecha</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathbf"><code>\mathbf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathcal"><code>\mathcal</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathnormal"><code>\mathnormal</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathrm"><code>\mathrm</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathsf"><code>\mathsf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathtt"><code>\mathtt</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmathversion"><code>\mathversion</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmax"><code>\max</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmbox"><code>\mbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmbox">\mbox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmdseries"><code>\mdseries</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmedskip"><code>\medskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmedskipamount"><code>\medskipamount</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmho"><code>\mho</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmid"><code>\mid</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmin"><code>\min</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmodels"><code>\models</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmonth"><code>\month</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear">\day \month \year</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmp"><code>\mp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmu"><code>\mu</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmulticolumn"><code>\multicolumn</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cmultiput"><code>\multiput</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmultiput">\multiput</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnabla"><code>\nabla</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cname"><code>\name</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cname">\name</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnatural"><code>\natural</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cne"><code>\ne</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnearrow"><code>\nearrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cneg"><code>\neg</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cneq"><code>\neq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewcommand"><code>\newcommand</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand">\newcommand y \renewcommand</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewcounter"><code>\newcounter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewenvironment"><code>\newenvironment</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment y \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewfont"><code>\newfont</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewlength"><code>\newlength</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewline"><code>\newline</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewline">\newline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cNEWLINE"><code>\NEWLINE</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cSPACE">\SPACE</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewpage"><code>\newpage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewsavebox"><code>\newsavebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewtheorem"><code>\newtheorem</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnewtie"><code>\newtie</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cng"><code>\ng</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cNG"><code>\NG</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cni"><code>\ni</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnocite"><code>\nocite</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnocite">\nocite</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnofiles"><code>\nofiles</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tablas-de-Contenido">Tablas de Contenido</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnoindent"><code>\noindent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnoindent">\noindent</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnolinebreak"><code>\nolinebreak</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005clinebreak-y-_005cnolinebreak">\linebreak y \nolinebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnonumber"><code>\nonumber</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnopagebreak"><code>\nopagebreak</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-y-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak y \nopagebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnormalfont"><code>\normalfont</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnormalmarginpar"><code>\normalmarginpar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Notas-al-Margen">Notas al Margen</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnormalsize"><code>\normalsize</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnot"><code>\not</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnotin"><code>\notin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnu"><code>\nu</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cnwarrow"><code>\nwarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005co-_0028o_0029"><code>\o (&oslash;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cO-_0028O_0029"><code>\O (&Oslash;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cobeycr"><code>\obeycr</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-y-_005crestorecr">\obeycr y \restorecr</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coddsidemargin"><code>\oddsidemargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005codot"><code>\odot</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coe-_0028oe_0029"><code>\oe (&oelig;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cOE-_0028OE_0029"><code>\OE (&OElig;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coint"><code>\oint</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cOmega"><code>\Omega</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005comega"><code>\omega</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cominus"><code>\ominus</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005conecolumn"><code>\onecolumn</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005copening"><code>\opening</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005copening">\opening</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coplus"><code>\oplus</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coslash"><code>\oslash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cotimes"><code>\otimes</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coval"><code>\oval</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005coval">\oval</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coverbrace_007btexto_007d"><code>\overbrace{<var>texto</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005coverline_007btexto_007d"><code>\overline{<var>texto</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cowns"><code>\owns</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cP"><code>\P</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpagebreak"><code>\pagebreak</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagebreak-y-_005cnopagebreak">\pagebreak y \nopagebreak</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpagenumbering"><code>\pagenumbering</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpageref"><code>\pageref</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpageref">\pageref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpagestyle"><code>\pagestyle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparagraph"><code>\paragraph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Seccionado">Seccionado</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparallel"><code>\parallel</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparbox"><code>\parbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cparbox">\parbox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparindent"><code>\parindent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparindent-1"><code>\parindent</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cindent">\indent</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparsep"><code>\parsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cparskip"><code>\parskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cparskip">\parskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpart"><code>\part</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Seccionado">Seccionado</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpartial"><code>\partial</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpartopsep"><code>\partopsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cperp"><code>\perp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cphi"><code>\phi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPi"><code>\Pi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpi"><code>\pi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpm"><code>\pm</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpmod"><code>\pmod</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpoptabs"><code>\poptabs</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpoptabs-1"><code>\poptabs</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpounds"><code>\pounds</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPr"><code>\Pr</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprec"><code>\prec</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpreceq"><code>\preceq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprime"><code>\prime</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprod"><code>\prod</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpropto"><code>\propto</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cprotect"><code>\protect</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cprotect">\protect</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cps"><code>\ps</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cps">\ps</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cPsi"><code>\Psi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpsi"><code>\psi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cpushtabs"><code>\pushtabs</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cput"><code>\put</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cput">\put</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cquotedblbase-_0028_201e_0029"><code>\quotedblbase <span class="roman">(&bdquo;)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cquotesinglbase-_0028_201a_0029"><code>\quotesinglbase <span class="roman">(&sbquo;)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cr-_0028acento-anillo_0029"><code>\r <span class="roman">(acento anillo)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005craggedbottom"><code>\raggedbottom</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005craggedleft"><code>\raggedleft</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005craggedright"><code>\raggedright</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005craisebox"><code>\raisebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005craisebox">\raisebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crangle"><code>\rangle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crbrace"><code>\rbrace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crbrack"><code>\rbrack</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crceil"><code>\rceil</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cRe"><code>\Re</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cref"><code>\ref</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cref">\ref</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crefstepcounter"><code>\refstepcounter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crenewenvironment"><code>\renewenvironment</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment">\newenvironment y \renewenvironment</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crestorecr"><code>\restorecr</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cobeycr-y-_005crestorecr">\obeycr y \restorecr</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005creversemarginpar"><code>\reversemarginpar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Notas-al-Margen">Notas al Margen</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crfloor"><code>\rfloor</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crhd"><code>\rhd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crho"><code>\rho</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cright"><code>\right</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cRightarrow"><code>\Rightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crightarrow"><code>\rightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crightharpoondown"><code>\rightharpoondown</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crightharpoonup"><code>\rightharpoonup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crightleftharpoons"><code>\rightleftharpoons</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crightmargin"><code>\rightmargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crm"><code>\rm</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crmfamily"><code>\rmfamily</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005croman"><code>\roman</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005croman-1"><code>\roman</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crq"><code>\rq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005crule"><code>\rule</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005crule">\rule</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cS"><code>\S</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csavebox"><code>\savebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csavebox">\savebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csbox"><code>\sbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csbox">\sbox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csc"><code>\sc</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cscriptsize"><code>\scriptsize</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cscshape"><code>\scshape</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csearrow"><code>\searrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csec"><code>\sec</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csection"><code>\section</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Seccionado">Seccionado</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cseename"><code>\seename</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cselectfont"><code>\selectfont</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csetcounter"><code>\setcounter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csetlength"><code>\setlength</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csetlength">\setlength</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csetminus"><code>\setminus</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csettodepth"><code>\settodepth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csettoheight"><code>\settoheight</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csettowidth"><code>\settowidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csf"><code>\sf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csffamily"><code>\sffamily</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csharp"><code>\sharp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cshortstack"><code>\shortstack</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cSigma"><code>\Sigma</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csigma"><code>\sigma</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csignature"><code>\signature</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005csignature">\signature</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csim"><code>\sim</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csimeq"><code>\simeq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csin"><code>\sin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csinh"><code>\sinh</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csl"><code>\sl</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cslshape"><code>\slshape</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csmall"><code>\small</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csmallint"><code>\smallint</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csmallskip"><code>\smallskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csmallskipamount"><code>\smallskipamount</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csmile"><code>\smile</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cSPACE"><code>\SPACE</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cSPACE">\SPACE</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cspadesuit"><code>\spadesuit</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqcap"><code>\sqcap</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqcup"><code>\sqcup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqrt_005braiz_005d_007bargumento_007d"><code>\sqrt[<var>raíz</var>]{argumento}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqsubset"><code>\sqsubset</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqsubseteq"><code>\sqsubseteq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqsupset"><code>\sqsupset</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csqsupseteq"><code>\sqsupseteq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005css-_0028ss_0029"><code>\ss (&szlig;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cSS-_0028SS_0029"><code>\SS (SS)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstackrel_007btexto_007d_007brelacion_007d"><code>\stackrel{<var>texto</var>}{<var>relación</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstar"><code>\star</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstartbreaks"><code>\startbreaks</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstepcounter"><code>\stepcounter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstop"><code>\stop</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#L_00ednea-de-_00d3rdenes">Línea de Órdenes</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cstopbreaks"><code>\stopbreaks</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csubparagraph"><code>\subparagraph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Seccionado">Seccionado</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csubsection"><code>\subsection</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Seccionado">Seccionado</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csubset"><code>\subset</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csubseteq"><code>\subseteq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csubsubsection"><code>\subsubsection</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Seccionado">Seccionado</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csucc"><code>\succ</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csucceq"><code>\succeq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csum"><code>\sum</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csup"><code>\sup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csupset"><code>\supset</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csupseteq"><code>\supseteq</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csurd"><code>\surd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cswarrow"><code>\swarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005csymbol"><code>\symbol</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ct-_0028acento-atadura-con-siguiente_0029"><code>\t <span class="roman">(acento atadura con siguiente)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cTAB"><code>\TAB</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cSPACE">\SPACE</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctabbingsep"><code>\tabbingsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctabcolsep"><code>\tabcolsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctableofcontents"><code>\tableofcontents</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tablas-de-Contenido">Tablas de Contenido</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctan"><code>\tan</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctanh"><code>\tanh</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas">Funciones Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctau"><code>\tau</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctelephone"><code>\telephone</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctelephone">\telephone</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cTeX"><code>\TeX</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextascenderwordmark"><code>\textascenderwordmark</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextasciicircum"><code>\textasciicircum</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextasciitilde"><code>\textasciitilde</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextasteriskcentered"><code>\textasteriskcentered</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbackslash"><code>\textbackslash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbar"><code>\textbar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbardbl"><code>\textbardbl</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbf"><code>\textbf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbigcircle"><code>\textbigcircle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbraceleft"><code>\textbraceleft</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbraceright"><code>\textbraceright</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextbullet"><code>\textbullet</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextcapitalwordmark"><code>\textcapitalwordmark</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextcircled_007bletra_007d"><code>\textcircled{<var>letra</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextcompwordmark"><code>\textcompwordmark</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextcopyright"><code>\textcopyright</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextdagger"><code>\textdagger</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextdaggerdbl"><code>\textdaggerdbl</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextdollar-_0028o-_005c_0024_0029"><code>\textdollar <span class="roman">(o <code>\$</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextellipsis"><code>\textellipsis</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextemdash-_0028o-_002d_002d_002d_0029"><code>\textemdash <span class="roman">(o <code>---</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextendash-_0028o-_002d_002d_0029"><code>\textendash <span class="roman">(o <code>--</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctexteuro"><code>\texteuro</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextexclamdown-_0028o-_0021_0060_0029"><code>\textexclamdown <span class="roman">(o <code>!`</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextfloatsep"><code>\textfloatsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextfraction"><code>\textfraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextgreater"><code>\textgreater</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextheight"><code>\textheight</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextit"><code>\textit</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextleftarrow"><code>\textleftarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextless"><code>\textless</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextmd"><code>\textmd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextnormal"><code>\textnormal</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextordfeminine"><code>\textordfeminine</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextordfeminine-1"><code>\textordfeminine</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextordmasculine"><code>\textordmasculine</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextparagraph"><code>\textparagraph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextperiodcentered"><code>\textperiodcentered</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquestiondown-_0028o-_003f_0060_0029"><code>\textquestiondown <span class="roman">(o <code>?`</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotedblleft-_0028o-_0060_0060_0029"><code>\textquotedblleft <span class="roman">(o <code>``</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotedblright-_0028o-_0027_0029"><code>\textquotedblright <span class="roman">(o <code>'</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquoteleft-_0028o-_0060_0029"><code>\textquoteleft <span class="roman">(o <code>`</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquoteright-_0028o-_0027_0029"><code>\textquoteright <span class="roman">(o <code>'</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotestraightbase"><code>\textquotestraightbase</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextquotestraightdblbase"><code>\textquotestraightdblbase</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextregistered"><code>\textregistered</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextrightarrow"><code>\textrightarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextrm"><code>\textrm</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextsc"><code>\textsc</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextsf"><code>\textsf</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextsl"><code>\textsl</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextsterling"><code>\textsterling</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextthreequartersemdash"><code>\textthreequartersemdash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctexttrademark"><code>\texttrademark</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctexttt"><code>\texttt</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctexttwelveudash"><code>\texttwelveudash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextunderscore"><code>\textunderscore</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextup"><code>\textup</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextvisiblespace"><code>\textvisiblespace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctextwidth"><code>\textwidth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cth-_0028th_0029"><code>\th (&thorn;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cTH-_0028TH_0029"><code>\TH (&THORN;)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-no-Ingleses">Caracteres no Ingleses</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthanks_007btexto_007d"><code>\thanks{<var>texto</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctheta"><code>\theta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthicklines"><code>\thicklines</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthicklines">\thicklines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthinlines"><code>\thinlines</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthinlines">\thinlines</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthinspace"><code>\thinspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthinspace">\thinspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cthispagestyle"><code>\thispagestyle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctilde"><code>\tilde</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctimes"><code>\times</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctiny"><code>\tiny</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctitle_007btexto_007d"><code>\title{<var>texto</var>}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cto"><code>\to</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctoday"><code>\today</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctoday">\today</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctop"><code>\top</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctopfraction"><code>\topfraction</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctopmargin"><code>\topmargin</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctopsep"><code>\topsep</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctopskip"><code>\topskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctotalheight"><code>\totalheight</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Longitudes-Predeterminadas">Longitudes Predeterminadas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctriangle"><code>\triangle</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctriangleleft"><code>\triangleleft</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctriangleright"><code>\triangleright</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctt"><code>\tt</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cttfamily"><code>\ttfamily</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctwocolumn"><code>\twocolumn</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctypein"><code>\typein</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctypein">\typein</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005ctypeout"><code>\typeout</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005ctypeout">\typeout</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cu-_0028breve-acento_0029"><code>\u <span class="roman">(breve acento)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunboldmath"><code>\unboldmath</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunderbar"><code>\underbar</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunderbrace_007bmatematicas_007d"><code>\underbrace{matemáticas}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunderline_007btext_007d"><code>\underline{text}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunitlength"><code>\unitlength</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunlhd"><code>\unlhd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cunrhd"><code>\unrhd</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cUparrow"><code>\Uparrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cuparrow"><code>\uparrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cUpdownarrow"><code>\Updownarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cupdownarrow"><code>\updownarrow</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cuplus"><code>\uplus</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cupshape"><code>\upshape</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cUpsilon"><code>\Upsilon</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cupsilon"><code>\upsilon</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cusebox"><code>\usebox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cusebox">\usebox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cusecounter"><code>\usecounter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cusefont"><code>\usefont</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cusepackage"><code>\usepackage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cv-_0028breve-acento_0029"><code>\v <span class="roman">(breve acento)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvalue"><code>\value</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvalue">\value</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvarepsilon"><code>\varepsilon</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvarphi"><code>\varphi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvarpi"><code>\varpi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvarrho"><code>\varrho</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvarsigma"><code>\varsigma</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvartheta"><code>\vartheta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvdash"><code>\vdash</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvdots"><code>\vdots</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvdots-1"><code>\vdots</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Miscel_00e1nea-Math">Miscelánea Math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvec"><code>\vec</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvector"><code>\vector</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvector">\vector</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvee"><code>\vee</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cverb"><code>\verb</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cverb">\verb</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cVert"><code>\Vert</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvert"><code>\vert</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvfill"><code>\vfill</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvfill">\vfill</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvline"><code>\vline</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvline">\vline</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cvspace"><code>\vspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cvspace">\vspace</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cwedge"><code>\wedge</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cwidehat"><code>\widehat</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cwidetilde"><code>\widetilde</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos">Acentos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cwidth"><code>\width</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Longitudes-Predeterminadas">Longitudes Predeterminadas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cwp"><code>\wp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cwr"><code>\wr</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cXi"><code>\Xi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cxi"><code>\xi</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005cyear"><code>\year</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear">\day \month \year</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005czeta"><code>\zeta</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005b"><code>\[</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-_0028para-array_0029"><code>\\ (para <code>array</code>)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-_0028para-centrar_0029"><code>\\ (para <code>centrar</code>)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#center">center</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-_0028para-eqnarray_0029"><code>\\ (para <code>eqnarray</code>)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-_0028para-flushright_0029"><code>\\ (para <code>flushright</code>)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-_0028para-objetos-_005cshortstack_0029"><code>\\ <span class="roman">(para objetos <code>\shortstack</code>)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-forzar-la-separacion-de-linea"><code>\\ <span class="roman">forzar la separación de línea</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005c_005c">\\</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-para-cartas"><code>\\ <span class="roman">para cartas</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Cartas">Cartas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-para-flushleft"><code>\\ <span class="roman">para <code>flushleft</code></span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-para-tabular"><code>\\ <span class="roman">para <code>tabular</code></span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-para-verse"><code>\\ <span class="roman">para <code>verse</code></span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verse">verse</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-para-_005cauthor"><code>\\ <span class="roman">para <code>\author</code></span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-para-_005ctitle"><code>\\ <span class="roman">para <code>\title</code></span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c-tabbing"><code>\\ <span class="roman">tabbing</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005c_002a-_0028para-eqnarray_0029"><code>\\* (para <code>eqnarray</code>)</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005d"><code>\]</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005e"><code>\^</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005e-_0028acento-circunflejo_0029"><code>\^ <span class="roman">(acento circunflejo)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_005f"><code>\_</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0060-_0028acento-grave_0029"><code>\` <span class="roman">(acento grave)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029"><code>\` <span class="roman">(tabbing)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_007b"><code>\{</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_007c"><code>\|</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos">Símbolos Matemáticos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_007d"><code>\}</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_007e"><code>\~</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Caracteres-Reservados">Caracteres Reservados</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005c_007e-_0028acento-tilde_0029"><code>\~ <span class="roman">(acento tilde)</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acentos">Acentos</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-4">^</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005e"><code>^</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sub_00edndices-y-Super_00edndices">Subíndices y Superíndices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-5">_</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-_005f"><code>_</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Sub_00edndices-y-Super_00edndices">Subíndices y Superíndices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-A">A</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-abstract_002c-entorno"><code><code>abstract</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#abstract">abstract</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-array_002c-entorno"><code><code>array</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-C">C</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-caja-lR"><code>caja lR</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-center_002c-entorno"><code><code>center</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#center">center</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-clase-article"><code><span class="roman">clase</span> article</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Clases-de-Documento">Clases de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-clase-book"><code><span class="roman">clase</span> book</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Clases-de-Documento">Clases de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-clase-letter"><code><span class="roman">clase</span> letter</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Clases-de-Documento">Clases de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-clase-report"><code><span class="roman">clase</span> report</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Clases-de-Documento">Clases de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-clase-slides"><code><span class="roman">clase</span> slides</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Clases-de-Documento">Clases de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-contador-secnumdepth"><code><span class="roman">contador</span> secnumdepth</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Seccionado">Seccionado</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-D">D</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-description_002c-entorno"><code><code>description</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-displaymath_002c-entorno"><code><code>displaymath</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-displaymath_002c-entorno-1"><code><code>displaymath</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-document_002c-entorno"><code><code>document</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#document">document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-E">E</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ejemplo-_005cAlph"><code><span class="roman">ejemplo</span> \Alph</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-ejemplo-_005cparskip"><code><span class="roman">ejemplo</span> \parskip</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-abstract"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>abstract</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#abstract">abstract</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-array"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>array</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#array">array</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-center"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>center</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#center">center</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-description"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>description</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#description">description</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-displaymath"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>displaymath</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#displaymath">displaymath</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-displaymath-1"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>displaymath</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-document"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>document</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#document">document</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-enumerate"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>enumerate</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-eqnarray"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>eqnarray</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-equation"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>equation</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-equation-1"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>equation</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-figure"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>figure</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-filecontents"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>filecontents</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-filecontents_002a"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>filecontents*</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-flushleft"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>flushleft</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-flushright"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>flushright</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-itemize"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>itemize</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-letter"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>letter</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#letter">letter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-list"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>list</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-math"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>math</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#math">math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-math-1"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>math</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-minipage"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>minipage</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-picture"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>picture</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-quotation"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>quotation</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation">quotation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-quote"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>quote</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quote">quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-tabbing"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>tabbing</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-table"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>table</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#table">table</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-tabular"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>tabular</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-thebibliography"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>thebibliography</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-theorem"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>theorem</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-titlepage"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>titlepage</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-verbatim"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>verbatim</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-entorno-verse"><code><span class="roman">entorno</span> <code>verse</code></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verse">verse</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-enumerate_002c-entorno"><code><code>enumerate</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-eqnarray_002c-entorno"><code><code>eqnarray</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equation_002c-entorno"><code><code>equation</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#equation">equation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-equation_002c-entorno-1"><code><code>equation</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-F">F</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-figure_002c-entorno"><code><code>figure</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#figure">figure</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-filecontents_002a_002c-entorno"><code><code>filecontents*</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-filecontents_002c-entorno"><code><code>filecontents</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#filecontents">filecontents</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flushleft_002c-entorno"><code><code>flushleft</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-flushright_002c-entorno"><code><code>flushright</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#flushright">flushright</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-I">I</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-indexspace"><code>indexspace</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-itemize_002c-entorno"><code><code>itemize</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#itemize">itemize</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-L">L</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-latexrefman_002ddiscuss_0040gna_002eorg-direccion-de-correo-electronico"><code><a href="mailto:latexrefman-discuss@gna.org">latexrefman-discuss@gna.org</a> <span class="roman">dirección de correo electrónico</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Acerca-de-este-documento">Acerca de este documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-letter_002c-entorno"><code><code>letter</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#letter">letter</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-list_002c-entorno"><code><code>list</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#list">list</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-lrbox"><code>lrbox</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#lrbox">lrbox</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-M">M</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math_002c-entorno"><code><code>math</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#math">math</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-math_002c-entorno-1"><code><code>math</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas">Fórmulas Matemáticas</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-minipage_002c-entorno"><code><code>minipage</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#minipage">minipage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-O">O</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-10pt"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> 10pt</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-11pt"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> 11pt</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-12pt"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> 12pt</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-a4paper"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> a4paper</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-a5paper"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> a5paper</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-b5paper"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> b5paper</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-draft"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> draft</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-executivepaper"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> executivepaper</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-final"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> final</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-fleqn"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> fleqn</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-landscape"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> landscape</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-legalpaper"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> legalpaper</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-leqno"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> leqno</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-letterpaper"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> letterpaper</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-notitlepage"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> notitlepage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-onecolumn"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> onecolumn</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-oneside"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> oneside</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-openany"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> openany</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-openbib"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> openbib</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-openright"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> openright</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-titlepage"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> titlepage</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-twocolumn"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> twocolumn</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-opcion-twoside"><code><span class="roman">opción</span> twoside</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento">Opciones de Clase de Documento</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-P">P</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-paquete-textcomp"><code><span class="roman">paquete</span> textcomp</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#S_00edmbolos-de-Texto">Símbolos de Texto</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-picture_002c-entorno"><code><code>picture</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#picture">picture</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-printindex"><code>printindex</code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#g_t_00cdndices">Índices</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-Q">Q</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quotation_002c-entorno"><code><code>quotation</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quotation">quotation</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-quote_002c-entorno"><code><code>quote</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#quote">quote</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-T">T</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tabbing_002c-entorno"><code><code>tabbing</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-table_002c-entorno"><code><code>table</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#table">table</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-tabular_002c-entorno"><code><code>tabular</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#tabular">tabular</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-thebibliography_002c-entorno"><code><code>thebibliography</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-theorem_002c-entorno"><code><code>theorem</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#theorem">theorem</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-titlepage_002c-entorno"><code><code>titlepage</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+<tr><th><a name="g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-V">V</a></th><td></td><td></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-verbatim_002c-entorno"><code><code>verbatim</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td></td><td valign="top"><a href="#index-verse_002c-entorno"><code><code>verse</code>, <span class="roman">entorno</span></code></a>:</td><td>&nbsp;</td><td valign="top"><a href="#verse">verse</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td colspan="4"> <hr></td></tr>
+</table>
+<table><tr><th valign="top">Jump to: &nbsp; </th><td><a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-1"><b>$</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-2"><b>@</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-3"><b>\</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-4"><b>^</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_symbol-5"><b>_</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<br>
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-A"><b>A</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-C"><b>C</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-D"><b>D</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-E"><b>E</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-F"><b>F</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-I"><b>I</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-L"><b>L</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-M"><b>M</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-O"><b>O</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-P"><b>P</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-Q"><b>Q</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-T"><b>T</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+<a class="summary-letter" href="#g_t_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones_fn_letter-V"><b>V</b></a>
+ &nbsp;
+</td></tr></table>
+
+<hr>
+
+
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.info b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.info
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d3a25270eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.info
@@ -0,0 +1,8122 @@
+This is latex2e-es.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.5 from
+latex2e-es.texi.
+
+Este documento es un manual de referencia extraoficial para LaTeX, un
+sistema de preparación de documentos, para la versión de Julio 2010.
+
+ Esto se tradujo originalmente del archivo ‘LATEX.HLP’ v1.0a de la
+Biblioteca de Ayuda VMS. La versión pretraducción fue escrita por
+George D. Greenwade de Sam Houston State University. La versión de
+LaTeX 2.09 fue escrita por Stephen Gilmore. La versión de LaTeX2e fue
+adaptada por Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry hizo la actualización y
+posteriores adiciones, y reconoce su agradecimiento a la utilización de
+‘Hypertext Help con LaTeX’, por Sheldon Green, y del ‘LaTeX Command
+Summary’ (para LaTeX 2.09) por L. Botway y C. Biemesderfer (publicada
+por el Grupo de Usuarios TeX como ‘TeXniques’ número 10), como material
+de referencia (no se copió texto directamente).
+
+ Copyright 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 Nacho Pacheco
+—Traducción.
+Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016
+Karl Berry.
+Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
+Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
+
+ A continuación se encuentra la licencia bajo la cual es distribuido
+este manual, una traducción lo es dada en anexo, ver *note License
+translation::.
+
+ Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+preserved on all copies.
+
+ Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of
+this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
+entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+ Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions.
+INFO-DIR-SECTION TeX
+START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+* LaTeX2e-es: (latex2e-es). Manual de extraoficial de LaTeX.
+END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Top, Next: Acerca de este documento, Up: (dir)
+
+LaTeX2e
+*******
+
+Este documento es un manual de referencia extraoficial para LaTeX, un
+sistema de preparación de documentos, versión Julio 2010. Este se
+pretende que cubra LaTeX2e, que ha sido la versión estándar de LaTeX por
+muchos años.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Acerca de este documento:: Acerca de este documento
+* Descripción:: ¿Qués es LaTeX?
+* Iniciando y Finalizando:: El principio y final estándar de un documento.
+* Clases de Documento:: Algunas de las diferentes clases disponibles.
+* Tipos de Letra:: Y tipos de letra, como negrita, cursiva, etc.
+* Diseño:: Controlando el diseño de la página.
+* Seccionado:: Cómo seccionar adecuadamente.
+* Referencias Cruzadas:: Referencias automáticas.
+* Entornos:: Tal como enumerate e itemize.
+* Saltos de Línea:: Influyendo en los saltos de línea.
+* Saltos de Página:: Influyendo en los saltos de página.
+* Notas al Pie:: Cómo producir notas al pie.
+* Definiciones:: Definiendo sus propias instrucciones, etc.
+* Contadores:: Contadores internos utilizados por LaTeX.
+* Longitudes:: Las instrucciones de longitud.
+* Haciendo Párrafos:: Instrucciones de Párrafo.
+* Fórmulas Matemáticas:: Cómo crear fórmulas matemáticas.
+* Modos:: Modos Párrafo, Matemáticas o de Escritura de Izquierda a Derecha.
+* Estilos de Página:: Varios estilos de diseño de página.
+* Espacios:: Espacio horizontal y vertical.
+* Cajas:: Haciendo cajas.
+* Inserciones Especiales:: Insertando caracteres reservados y especiales.
+* Dividiendo la Entrada:: Manejo de archivos de gran tamaño mediante su fraccionamiento.
+* Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada:: Tablas de contenido, glosarios, índices.
+* Cartas:: La clase ‘letter’.
+* Entrada/Salida a la Terminal:: Interacción del usuario.
+* Línea de Órdenes:: Comportamiento independiente del sistema de la línea de órdenes.
+* Plantillas de Documento:: Principales plantillas para diversas clases de documento.
+* Traducción de la licencia: License translation. Una traducciòn como informaciòn de la licencia.
+* Índice de Conceptos:: Índice general.
+* Índice de Instrucciones:: Lista alfabética de instrucciones LaTeX.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Acerca de este documento, Next: Descripción, Prev: Top, Up: Top
+
+1 Acerca de este documento
+**************************
+
+LaTeX está implementado como un paquete de macros por Donald E. Knuth’s
+para el programa de composición tipográfica TeX. LaTeX originalmente
+fue creado por Leslie Lamport; este ahora es mantenido por un grupo de
+voluntarios en (<http://latex-project.org>). La documentación oficial
+escrita por el proyecto LaTeX está disponible allí.
+
+ Una vez más, el presente documento no es oficial y no ha sido
+revisado por los responsables del proyecto LaTeX. No enviar informes de
+error o cualquier otra cosa sobre este documento a ellos. En su lugar,
+por favor, envíe todos comentarios a <latexrefman@tug.org>.
+
+ La página principal de este documento es
+<http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/>. Esa página tiene
+enlaces al resultado actual de la compilación de este documento en
+varios formatos, a fuentes, a listas de correo, y a otros
+infraestructura.
+
+ Por supuesto, hay muchas otras muchas fuentes de información sobre,
+LaTeX. Éstos son algunos de ellos:
+
+<http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr>
+ Dos páginas de referencias recomendadas a LaTeX documentación.
+
+<http://www.ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc>
+ Escribir su primer documento, con un poco de texto y matemáticas.
+
+<http://www.ctan.org/pkg/usrguide>
+ La guía para los autores de documentos mantenidos como parte de
+ LaTeX; hay varios otros.
+
+<http://tug.org/begin.html>
+ Introducción al TeX sistema, incluyendo LaTeX.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Descripción, Next: Iniciando y Finalizando, Prev: Acerca de este documento, Up: Top
+
+2 Descripción de LaTeX
+**********************
+
+Las instrucciones LaTeX componen tipográficamente un archivo de texto
+usando el programa TeX y el “paquete de macros” LaTeX para TeX. Para
+ser más específicos, este procesa un archivo de entrada que contiene el
+texto de un documento con instrucciones intercaladas que describen cómo
+se debe dar formato al texto. Este produce al menos tres archivos de
+salida:
+
+ 1. Un archivo de salida principal, que es uno de:
+
+ 1. Si se invoca como ‘latex’, un archivo “independiente del
+ dispositivo” (‘.dvi’). Este contiene las instrucciones que se
+ pueden traducir en órdenes para una variedad de dispositivos
+ de salida. Usted puede ver estos archivos ‘.dvi’ producidos
+ por LaTeX utilizando un programa como ‘xdvi’ (visualización
+ directa) o ‘dvips’ (los convierte a PostScript).
+
+ 2. Si es invocado como ‘pdflatex’, produce un archivo de
+ “Documento de Formato Portátil” (‘.pdf’). Normalmente, este
+ es un archivo autocontenido, con todos los tipos de letra e
+ imágenes incrustadas. Este puede ser muy útil, pero hace que
+ produzca un archivo mucho más grande que el ‘.dvi’ producido a
+ partir del mismo documento.
+
+ Existen otras variantes menos comunes de LaTeX (y TeX), de modo que
+ puede producir HTML, XML y otras cosas.
+
+ 2. Un archivo de“transcripción” o ‘.log’ que contiene información
+ resumida y mensajes de diagnóstico para cualquier error descubierto
+ en el archivo de entrada.
+
+ 3. Un archivo “auxiliar” o ‘.aux’. Este es usado por LaTeX mismo,
+ para diversas cosas como el seccionado.
+
+ Una instrucción LaTeX comienza con el nombre de la instrucción, la
+cual consiste de una ‘\’ seguida por o bien (a) una cadena de letras o
+(b) un único carácter no letra. Los argumentos que figuran entre
+corchetes, ‘[]’, son opcionales, mientras que los argumentos contenidos
+entre llaves, ‘{}’, son obligatorios.
+
+ LaTeX es sensible a mayúsculas y minúsculas. Cuando ingresa
+instrucciones, use la caja de letras propia a cada instrucción —
+tradicionalmente es minúsculas.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Iniciando y Finalizando, Next: Clases de Documento, Prev: Descripción, Up: Top
+
+3 Iniciando y Finalizando
+*************************
+
+Un archivo de entrada mínimo tiene el siguiente aspecto:
+
+ \documentclass{CLASE}
+ \begin{document}
+ SU TEXTO
+ \end{document}
+
+donde CLASE es una clase de documento válida para LaTeX. *Note Clases
+de Documento::, para detalles de varias clases de documento disponibles
+localmente.
+
+ Usted puede incluir otras instrucciones LaTeX entre las instrucciones
+‘\documentclass’ y ‘\begin{document}’ (esta área se llama el
+“preámbulo”).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Clases de Documento, Next: Tipos de Letra, Prev: Iniciando y Finalizando, Up: Top
+
+4 Clases de Documento
+*********************
+
+La clase de un determinado documento se define con la instrucción:
+
+ \documentclass[OPCIONES]{CLASE}
+
+La instrucción ‘\documentclass’ debe ser la primer instrucción en un
+archivo fuente LaTeX.
+
+ Los nombres integrados de CLASES de documento LaTeX (muchas otras
+clases de documento están disponibles como complementos; *note
+Descripción::):
+
+ article report book letter slides
+
+ Las OPCIONES estándar están descritas más adelante.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Opciones de Clase de Documento:: Opciones globales.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Opciones de Clase de Documento, Up: Clases de Documento
+
+4.1 Opciones de Clase de Documento
+==================================
+
+Usted puede especificar las así llamadas “opciones globales” u “opciones
+de clase” en la instrucción ‘\documentclass’ encerrándolas entre
+corchetes de la manera usual. Para especificar más de una OPCIÓN,
+deberá separarlas con una coma:
+
+ \documentclass[OPCIÓN1,OPCIÓN2,...]{CLASE}
+
+ Esta es la lista de las opciones de clase estándar.
+
+ Todas las clases estándar salvo ‘slides’ aceptan las siguientes
+opciones para seleccionar el tamaño del tipo de letra (el predeterminado
+es ‘10pt’):
+
+ 10pt 11pt 12pt
+
+ Todas las clases estándar aceptan estas opciones para seleccionar el
+tamaño del papel (el predeterminado es ‘letterpaper’):
+
+ a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
+
+ Otras opciones diversas:
+
+‘draft, final’
+ marca/no marca el desbordamiento de cajas con una gran caja negra;
+ el predeterminado es ‘final’.
+‘fleqn’
+ Coloca las fórmulas mostradas alineadas a la izquierda; el
+ predeterminado es centrado.
+‘landscape’
+ Selecciona el formato apaisado; el predeterminado es vertical.
+‘leqno’
+ Coloca los números de ecuación en el lado izquierdo de las
+ ecuaciones; el predeterminado es el lado derecho.
+‘openbib’
+ Usa el formato de bibliografía “abierto”.
+‘titlepage, notitlepage’
+ Especifica si la página de título es independiente; de manera
+ predeterminada depende de la clase.
+
+ Estas opciones no están disponibles con la clase ‘slides’:
+
+‘onecolumn’
+‘twocolumn’
+ Composición tipográfica en una o dos columnas; el predeterminado es
+ ‘onecolumn’.
+
+‘oneside’
+‘twoside’
+ Selecciona el diseño de una o dos caras; el predeterminado es
+ ‘oneside’, excepto para la clase ‘book’.
+
+ El parámetro ‘\evensidemargin’ (‘\oddsidemargin’) determina la
+ distancia en páginas par (impar) numeradas entre el lado izquierdo
+ de la página y el margen excedente del texto. Los valores
+ predeterminados varían con el tamaño del papel y si el diseño
+ seleccionado es de uno o dos lados. Para imprimir texto en un lado
+ es centrado, para dos lados, ‘\oddsidemargin’ es 40% de la
+ diferencia entre ‘\paperwidth’ y ‘\textwidth’ con el resto de
+ ‘\evensidemargin’.
+
+‘openright’
+‘openany’
+ Determina si un capítulo debe iniciar en una página del lado
+ derecho; para ‘book’, el predeterminado es ‘openright’.
+
+ La clase ‘slides’ ofrece la opción ‘clock’ para imprimir la hora en
+la parte inferior de cada nota.
+
+ Los paquetes adicionales se cargan de la siguiente manera:
+
+ \usepackage[OPCIONES]{PAQUETE}
+
+ Para especificar más de un PAQUETE, usted puede separarlos con una
+coma, o utilizar múltiples instrucciones‘\usepackage’.
+
+ Cualquiera de las opciones que figuran en la instrucción
+‘\documentclass’ que no son conocidas por la clase de documento
+seleccionada son transmitidas a los paquetes cargados con ‘\usepackage’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Tipos de Letra, Next: Diseño, Prev: Clases de Documento, Up: Top
+
+5 Tipos de Letra
+****************
+
+Dos aspectos importantes de la selección de un “tipo de letra” son la
+especificación del tamaño y del estilo. Las instrucciones LaTeX para
+hacer esto se describen a continuación.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Estilos del Tipo de Letra:: Seleccionar romana, cursiva, etc.
+* Tamaños del Tipo de Letra:: Seleccionando el tamaño del punto.
+* Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra:: Seleccionando codificación, familia, series, apariencia.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Estilos del Tipo de Letra, Next: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra, Up: Tipos de Letra
+
+5.1 Estilos del Tipo de Letra
+=============================
+
+Las siguientes instrucciones para el estilo del tipo de letra son
+compatibles con LaTeX.
+
+ Este primer grupo de instrucciones se utiliza normalmente con un
+argumento, como en ‘\textit{texto en cursiva}’. En la siguiente tabla,
+las instrucciones correspondientes entre paréntesis son la “forma
+declarativa”, la cual no toma argumentos. El ámbito de aplicación de la
+forma declarativa dura hasta la siguiente instucción para el estilo del
+tipo de letra o hasta el final del grupo actual.
+
+ Estos commandos, tanto en las formas con argumento o en las formas
+declarativas, son acumulativas; es decir, usted puede decir ya sea
+‘\sffamily\bfseries’ o ‘\bfseries\sffamily’ para obtener sans serif en
+negrita.
+
+ También puede utilizar la forma de entorno de las formas
+declarativas; por ejemplo, ‘\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}’.
+
+ Estas instrucciones proporcionan automáticamente una corrección en
+cursiva si es necesario.
+‘\textrm (\rmfamily)’
+ Romana.
+
+‘\textit (\itshape)’
+ cursivas.
+
+‘\emph’
+ Énfasis (cambia entre ‘\textit’ y ‘\textrm’).
+
+‘\textmd (\mdseries)’
+ Peso medio (predeterminado).
+
+‘\textbf (\bfseries)’
+ Negrita.
+‘\textup (\upshape)’
+ Vertical (predeterminado). Lo opuesto a inclinada.
+‘\textsl (\slshape)’
+ Oblicua.
+‘\textsf (\sffamily)’
+ Sans serif.
+‘\textsc (\scshape)’
+ Versales.
+‘\texttt (\ttfamily)’
+ Máquina de escribir.
+‘\textnormal (\normalfont)’
+ Tipo de letra principal del documento.
+‘\mathrm’
+ Romana, para usar en modo math.
+‘\mathbf’
+ Negrita, para usarse en modo math.
+‘\mathsf’
+ Sans serif, para usarse en modo math.
+‘\mathtt’
+ Máquina de escribir, para usarse en modo math.
+
+‘\mathit’
+‘(\mit)’
+ cursivas, para utilizarse en modo math.
+
+‘\mathnormal’
+ Para usarse en modo math, por ejemplo dentro de otra declaración de
+ estilo de letra.
+‘\mathcal’
+ Letras ‘caligráficas’, para usarse en modo math.
+
+ Además, la instrucción ‘\mathversion{bold}’ se pude utilizar para
+cambiar a letras y símbolos en negrita dentro de fórmulas.
+‘\mathversion{normal}’ restablece el valor predeterminado.
+
+ LaTeX también proporciona las siguientes instrucciones, que
+incondicionalmente cambian a determinado estilo, es decir, _no_ son
+acumulativas. Estas se utilizan de forma diferente que las
+instrucciones anteriores, también: ‘{\INSTRUCCIÓN ...}’ en lugar de
+‘\INSTRUCCIÓN{...}’. Son dos cosas muy distintas.
+
+‘\bf’
+ Cambia a tipo de letra negrita.
+
+‘\cal’
+ Cambia a letras caligráficas para math.
+
+‘\em’
+ Énfasis (cursivas con romana, romana con cursivas).
+
+‘\it’
+ cursivas.
+
+‘\rm’
+ Romana.
+
+‘\sc’
+ Versales.
+
+‘\sf’
+ Sans serif.
+
+‘\sl’
+ Oblicua (oblicua).
+
+‘\tt’
+ Máquina de escribir (monoespacio, de ancho fijo).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra, Next: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra, Prev: Estilos del Tipo de Letra, Up: Tipos de Letra
+
+5.2 Tamaños del Tipo de Letra
+=============================
+
+Las siguientes instrucciones para el tamaño del tipo de letra estándar
+son compatibles con LaTeX. La tabla muestra el nombre de la instrucción
+y el tamaño real (en puntos) del tipo de letra correspondiente utilizado
+con las opciones de tamaño del documento ‘10pt’, ‘11pt’ y ‘12pt’,
+respectivamente (*note Opciones de Clase de Documento:: ).
+
+Instrucción ‘10pt’ ‘11pt’ ‘12pt’
+---------------------------------------------------------
+‘\tiny’ 5 6 6
+‘\scriptsize’ 7 8 8
+‘\footnotesize’ 8 9 10
+‘\small’ 9 10 10.95
+‘\normalsize’ (predeterminado) 10 10.95 12
+‘\large’ 12 12 14.4
+‘\Large’ 14.4 14.4 17.28
+‘\LARGE’ 14.4 14.4 17.28
+‘\huge’ 20.74 20.74 24.88
+‘\Huge’ 24.88 24.88 24.88
+
+ Las instrucciones tal como están listadas aquí son “formas
+declarativas”. El ámbito de aplicación de la forma declarativa dura
+hasta la instrucción “end” del estilo del tipo de letra o hasta el final
+del grupo actual. También puede utilizar la forma de entorno en estas
+instrucciones; por ejemplo, ‘\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra, Prev: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra, Up: Tipos de Letra
+
+5.3 Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra
+=====================================================
+
+Estas instrucciones están destinadas principalmente para los escritores
+de macros y paquetes. Las instrucciones listadas anteriormente son sólo
+un subconjunto de las disponibles.
+
+‘\fontencoding{codificación}’
+ Selecciona la codificación del tipo de letra. Las codificaciones
+ válidas incluyen a ‘OT1’ y ‘T1’.
+
+‘\fontfamily{familia}’
+ Selecciona la familia del tipo de letra. Las familias válidas
+ incluyen:
+
+ • ‘cmr’ para Romana de Computadora Moderna
+ • ‘cmss’ para Sans Serif de Computadora Moderna
+ • ‘cmtt’ para Máquina de Escribir de Computadora Moderna
+
+ y muchas otras.
+
+‘\fontseries{series}’
+ Selecciona las series del tipo de letra. Las series válidas
+ incluyen:
+
+ • ‘m’ Mediana (normal)
+ • ‘b’ Negrita
+ • ‘c’ Condensada
+ • ‘bc’ Negrita condensada
+ • ‘bx’ Negrita extendida
+
+ y otras combinaciones diferentes.
+
+‘\fontshape{forma}’
+ Selecciona la forma del tipo de letra. Las formas válidas son:
+
+ • ‘n’ Vertical (normal)
+ • ‘it’ Cursiva
+ • ‘sl’ Oblicua (oblicua)
+ • ‘sc’ Versales
+ • ‘ui’ Cursiva vertical
+ • ‘ol’ Esquema
+
+ Las dos últimas formas no están disponibles para la mayoría de las
+ familias de tipos de letra.
+
+‘\fontsize{tamaño}{espaciado}’
+ Establece el tamaño de letra. El primer parámetro es el tamaño a
+ cambiar el tipo de letra y el segundo es el espaciado de línea a
+ usar; este se almacena en un parámetro denominado ‘\baselineskip’.
+ La unidad de ambos parámetros de manera predeterminada es pt. El
+ valor predeterminado de ‘\baselineskip’ para el tipo de letra
+ Computadora Moderna es 1.2 veces ‘\fontsize’.
+
+ El interlineado de espacio doble también es multiplicado por el
+ valor del parámetro ‘\baselinestretch’ cuando cambia el tamaño del
+ tipo de letra; el predeterminado es 1. Sin embargo, la mejor
+ manera de hacer un documento con “doble espacio”, si tiene la
+ suficiente mala suerte de tener que producirlo, es usar el paquete
+ ‘setspace’; vea
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace>.
+
+‘\linespread{FACTOR}’
+ Equivalente a ‘\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}’, y por lo
+ tanto debe estar seguido por ‘\selectfont’ para que tenga algún
+ efecto. Es mejor especificarlo en el preámbulo, o utilizar el
+ paquete ‘setspace’, justo como se acaba de describir anteriormente.
+
+ Las modificaciones introducidas por llamar a la fuente de las
+ instrucciones descritas anteriormente no entrará en vigor sino
+ hasta que se invoque a ‘\selectfont’.
+
+‘\usefont{codificación}{familia}{series}{forma}’
+ Lo mismo que invocar a ‘\fontencoding’, ‘\fontfamily’,
+ ‘\fontseries’ y ‘\fontshape’ con los parámetros dados, seguida por
+ ‘\selectfont’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Diseño, Next: Seccionado, Prev: Tipos de Letra, Up: Top
+
+6 Diseño
+********
+
+Varias instrucciones para controlar el diseño general de la página.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \onecolumn:: Utiliza un diseño de una columna.
+* \twocolumn:: Utiliza un diseño de dos columanas.
+* \flushbottom:: Hace que todas las páginas del texto tengan la misma altura.
+* \raggedbottom:: Permite que las páginas de texto tengan diferente altura.
+* Parámetros para el Diseño de Página:: ‘\headheight’ ‘\footskip’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \onecolumn, Next: \twocolumn, Up: Diseño
+
+6.1 ‘\onecolumn’
+================
+
+La declaración ‘\onecolumn’ comienza una nueva página y la produce con
+una sola columna. Este es el valor predeterminado.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \twocolumn, Next: \flushbottom, Prev: \onecolumn, Up: Diseño
+
+6.2 ‘\twocolumn’
+================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \twocolumn[TEXTOCOLUMNA1]
+
+ La declaración ‘\twocolumn’ comienza una nueva página y la produce
+con dos columnas. Si el argumento opcional TEXTOCOLUMNA1 está presente,
+esta es compuesta en modo de una columna antes de comenzar la
+composición de las dos columnas.
+
+ Estos parámetros controlan la tipografía en la producción de dos
+columnas:
+
+‘\columnsep’
+ La distancia entre las columnas (de manera predeterminada a 35pt).
+
+‘\columnseprule’
+ El ancho de la regla entre columnas; el predeterminado es 0pt, por
+ lo tanto no hay regla.
+
+‘\columnwidth’
+ El ancho de la columna actual; este es igual a ‘\textwidth’ en
+ texto de una sola columna.
+
+ Estos parámetros controlan el comportamiento de la flotación de las
+dos columnas producidas:
+
+‘\dbltopfraction’
+ Máxima fracción en la parte superior de una página de dos columna
+ que pueden ocupar los flotantes. El predeterminado es ‘.7’, puede
+ ser útil redefinirlo a (digamos) ‘.9’ para evitar llegar tan pronto
+ a páginas flotantes.
+
+‘\dblfloatpagefraction’
+ La mínima fracción de una página con flotantes que deben ocupar los
+ flotantes, para una página de dos columnas con flotantes. El
+ predeterminado es ‘.5’.
+
+‘\dblfloatsep’
+ Distancia entre flotantes en la parte superior o inferior de una
+ página de dos columnas con flotantes. Predeterminado a ‘12pt
+ plus2pt minus2pt’ para ‘10pt’ y ‘11pt’ para documentos, ‘14pt
+ plus2pt minus4pt’ para ‘12pt’.
+
+‘\dbltextfloatsep’
+ Distancia entre un flotante multicolumna en la parte superior o
+ inferior de una página y el texto principal. De manera
+ predeterminada es ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \flushbottom, Next: \raggedbottom, Prev: \twocolumn, Up: Diseño
+
+6.3 ‘\flushbottom’
+==================
+
+La declaración ‘\flushbottom’ hace que todas las páginas tengan la misma
+altura, añadiendo espacio vertical extra donde sea necesario para llenar
+la página.
+
+ Este es el predeterminado si se selecciona el modo ‘twocolumn’ (*note
+Opciones de Clase de Documento::).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \raggedbottom, Next: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página, Prev: \flushbottom, Up: Diseño
+
+6.4 ‘\raggedbottom’
+===================
+
+La declaración ‘\raggedbottom’ hace que todas las páginas tengan la
+altura natural del material en esa página. Sin longitudes flexibles que
+se deban ajustar.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página, Prev: \raggedbottom, Up: Diseño
+
+6.5 Parámetros para el Diseño de Página
+=======================================
+
+‘\headheight’
+ Altura de la caja que contiene el encabezado. El predeterminado es
+ ‘30pt’, salvo en la clase ‘book’, donde este varía con el tamaño de
+ letra.
+
+‘\headsep’
+ Distancia vertical entre la línea inferior de la cabecera y la
+ parte superior del texto principal. El predeterminado es ‘25pt’,
+ salvo en la clase ‘book’, donde este varía con el tamaño de letra.
+
+‘\footskip’
+ Distancia desde la línea base de la última línea de texto a la
+ línea base del pié de página. El predeterminado es ‘30pt’, salvo
+ en la clase ‘book’, donde este varía con el tamaño de letra.
+
+‘\linewidth’
+ Ancho de la línea actual; el predeterminado varía con el tamaño de
+ fuente, el ancho del papel, el modo two-column, etc. Para un
+ documento ‘article’ en ‘10pt’, este se establece a ‘345pt’; en modo
+ two-column, este cambia a ‘229.5pt’.
+
+‘\textheight’
+ La altura vertical normal del cuerpo de la página; el
+ predeterminado varía con el tamaño de letra, clase de documento,
+ etc. Para un documento ‘article’ o ‘report’ en ‘10pt’, este se
+ fija a ‘43\baselineskip’; para ‘book’, es ‘41\baselineskip’. Para
+ ‘11pt’, es ‘38\baselineskip’ y para ‘12pt’, ‘36\baselineskip’.
+
+‘\textwidth’
+ El ancho horizontal normal del cuerpo de la página; el
+ predeterminado varía de la manera usual. Para un documento
+ ‘article’ o ‘report’, es ‘345pt’ en ‘10pt’, ‘360pt’ en ‘11pt’ y
+ ‘390pt’ en ‘12pt’. Para un documento ‘book’, es ‘4.5in’ en ‘10pt’
+ y ‘5in’ en ‘11pt’ o ‘12pt’.
+
+‘\topmargin’
+ Espacio entre la parte superior de la página TeX (de manera
+ predeterminada, una pulgada en la parte superior del papel) y en la
+ parte superior del encabezado. El predeterminado se calcula
+ basándose en muchos otros parámetros: ‘\paperheight − 2in −
+ \headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip’, y luego se
+ divide entre dos.
+
+‘\topskip’
+ La distancia mínima entre la parte superior del cuerpo de la página
+ y la línea base de la primer línea de texto. Para clases estándar,
+ el predeterminado es el mismo que el tamaño de letra, por ejemplo,
+ ‘10pt’ en ‘10pt’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Seccionado, Next: Referencias Cruzadas, Prev: Diseño, Up: Top
+
+7 Seccionado
+************
+
+Las instrucciones de seccionado proporcionan los medios para estructurar
+su texto en unidades:
+
+‘\part’
+‘\chapter’
+ (únicamente las clases ‘report’ y ‘book’)
+‘\section’
+‘\subsection’
+‘\subsubsection’
+‘\paragraph’
+‘\subparagraph’
+
+ Todas las instrucciones de seccionado tienen la misma forma general,
+por ejemplo,
+
+ \chapter[TÍTULOBREVE]{TÍTULO}
+
+ Además de proporcionar el encabezado TÍTULO en el texto principal, el
+título de la sección puede aparecer en otros dos lugares:
+
+ 1. La tabla de contenido.
+ 2. El título breve en la parte superior de la página.
+
+ Tal vez no quiera el mismo texto en estos lugares como en el texto
+principal. Para controlar esto, las instrucciones de seccionado tienen
+un argumento opcional, TOCTITLE que, cuando se proporciona, especifica
+el texto de esos otros lugares.
+
+ Además, todas las instrucciones de seccionado tienen formas con ‘*’
+que imprimen el TÍTULO de la manera usual, pero no incluyen un número y
+no producen una entrada en la tabla de contenido. Por ejemplo:
+
+ \section*{Preámbulo}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\appendix’ cambia la manera en que se numeran las
+siguientes unidades de sección. La instrucción ‘\appendix’ en sí misma
+no genera texto y no afecta la númeración de las partes. El uso normal
+de esta instrucción es algo así como:
+
+ \chapter{Un Capítulo}
+ ...
+ \appendix
+ \chapter{El Primer Apéndice}
+
+ El contador ‘secnumdepth’ controla la impresión de los números de
+sección. La configuración
+
+ \setcounter{secnumdepth}{NIVEL}
+
+suprime los números en encabezados y cualquier profundidad > NIVEL,
+donde ‘chapter’ es el nivel cero. (*Note \setcounter::.)
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Referencias Cruzadas, Next: Entornos, Prev: Seccionado, Up: Top
+
+8 Referencias Cruzadas
+**********************
+
+Una razón para numerar cosas como figuras y ecuaciones es para referir
+al lector a ellas, como en “Vea la Figura 3 para más detalles”.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \label:: Asigna un nombre simbólico a una parte del texto.
+* \pageref:: Referencia a un número de página.
+* \ref:: Referencia a una sección, figura o similar.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \label, Next: \pageref, Up: Referencias Cruzadas
+
+8.1 ‘\label’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \label{CLAVE}
+
+ Una instrucción ‘\label’ que aparece en un texto normal asigna a
+CLAVE el número de la unidad de sección actual; que aparece dentro de un
+entorno numerado asignando ese número a CLAVE.
+
+ Un nombre de CLAVE puede consistir de cualquier secuencia de letras,
+dígitos, o caracteres de puntuación. Distingue entre letras mayúsculas
+y minúsculas.
+
+ Para evitar la creación accidental de dos etiquetas con el mismo
+nombre, es común el uso de etiquetas que consisten de un prefijo y un
+sufijo, separados por una coma o un punto. Algunos prefijos utilizados
+convencionalmente:
+
+‘ch’
+ para capítulos
+‘sec’
+ para instrucciones de seccionado de bajo nivel
+‘fig’
+ para figuras
+‘tab’
+ para tablas
+‘eq’
+ para ecuaciones
+
+ Por lo tanto, una etiqueta para una figura parecería como ‘fig:snark’
+o ‘fig.snark’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \pageref, Next: \ref, Prev: \label, Up: Referencias Cruzadas
+
+8.2 ‘\pageref{CLAVE}’
+=====================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \pageref{CLAVE}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\pageref’{CLAVE} produce el número de página del
+lugar en el texto en donde aparece la instrucción ‘\label’{CLAVE}.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \ref, Prev: \pageref, Up: Referencias Cruzadas
+
+8.3 ‘\ref{CLAVE}’
+=================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \ref{CLAVE}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\ref’ produce el número de la unidad de sección de la
+ecuación, pie de página, figura, ..., de la instrucción ‘\label’
+correspondiente (*note \label::). Esta no produce ningún texto, como
+por ejemplo la palabra ‘Sección’ o ‘figura’, únicamente el número.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Entornos, Next: Saltos de Línea, Prev: Referencias Cruzadas, Up: Top
+
+9 Entornos
+**********
+
+LaTeX proporciona muchos entornos para marcar cierto texto. Cada
+entorno comienza y termina de la misma manera:
+
+ \begin{NOMBREENTORNO}
+ ...
+ \end{NOMBREENTORNO}
+
+* Menu:
+
+* abstract:: Produce un resumen.
+* array:: Matrices Matemáticas.
+* center:: Líneas centradas.
+* description:: Listas etiquetadas.
+* displaymath:: Fórmulas que aparecen en su propia línea.
+* document:: Encierra todo el documento.
+* enumerate:: Listas numeradas.
+* eqnarray:: Secuencias de ecuaciones alineadas.
+* equation:: Ecuación mostrada.
+* figure:: Figuras flotantes.
+* filecontents:: Crear un archivo — instrucción inicial.
+* flushleft:: Líneas alineada a la izquierda.
+* flushright:: Líneas alineadas a la derecha.
+* itemize:: Listas con viñetas.
+* letter:: Cartas
+* list:: Entorno lista genérica.
+* math:: Matemáticas en línea.
+* minipage:: Página miniatura.
+* picture:: Imagen con texto, flechas, líneas y círculos.
+* quotation:: Entorno con sangría y párrafo con sangría.
+* quote:: Entorno con sangría sin sangría de párrafo.
+* tabbing:: Alineación de texto de manera arbitraria.
+* table:: Tablas flotantes.
+* tabular:: Alinea texto en columnas.
+* thebibliography:: Bibliografía o lista de referencia.
+* theorem:: Teoremas, lemas, etc.
+* titlepage:: Para elaborar portadas a mano.
+* verbatim:: Simulación de entrada con máquina de escribir.
+* verse:: Para poesía y otras cosas.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: abstract, Next: array, Up: Entornos
+
+9.1 ‘abstract’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+ \begin{abstract}
+ ...
+ \end{abstract}
+
+ Entorno para producir un resumen, posiblemente de varios párrafos.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: array, Next: center, Prev: abstract, Up: Entornos
+
+9.2 ‘array’
+===========
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{array}{PLANTILLA}
+ TEXTO COL1&TEXTO COL1&COLN}\\
+ ...
+ \end{array}
+
+ Las matrices matemáticas se producen con el entorno ‘array’,
+normalmente dentro de un entorno ‘equation’ (*note equation::). Tiene
+un único argumento PLANTILLA obligatorio que describe el número de
+columnas y la alineación dentro de ellas. Cada columna COL se
+especifica por una sola letra que indica cual formato debe tener cada
+linea en esta columna de la siguiente manera:
+
+‘c’
+ centrada
+‘l’
+ alineada a la izquierda
+‘r’
+ alineada a la derecha
+
+ La entradas de columna son separadas con ‘&’. Las entradas de
+columna pueden incluir otras instrucciones LaTeX. Cada fila de la
+matriz se termina con ‘\\’.
+
+ En la plantilla, la construcción ‘@{TEXTO}’ coloca TEXTO entre
+columnas en cada fila.
+
+ He aquí un ejemplo:
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \begin{array}{lrc}
+ izquierda1 & derecha1 & centrado1 \\
+ izquierda2 & derecha2 & centrado2 \\
+ \end{array}
+ \end{equation}
+
+ El parámetro ‘\arraycolsep’ define la mitad del ancho del espacio de
+separación entre columnas; el predeterminado es ‘5pt’. *Note tabular::,
+para otros parámetros que afectan el formato en entornos ‘array’, a
+saber ‘\arrayrulewidth’ y ‘\arraystretch’.
+
+ El entorno ‘array’ únicamente se puede utilizar en modo math.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: center, Next: description, Prev: array, Up: Entornos
+
+9.3 ‘center’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{center}
+ LÍNEA1 \\
+ LÍNEA2 \\
+ \end{center}
+
+ El entorno ‘center’ le permite crear un párrafo consistente de líneas
+que están centradas respecto al margen izquierdo y derecho de la página
+actual. Cada línea es terminada con dobles barras inversas ‘\\’.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \centering:: Forma declarativa para el entorno ‘center’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \centering, Up: center
+
+9.3.1 ‘\centering’
+------------------
+
+La declaración ‘\centering’ corresponde al entorno ‘center’. Esta
+declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un entorno tal como ‘quote’ o en
+un ‘parbox’. Por lo tanto, el texto de una figura o una tabla se puede
+centrar en la página poniendo una instrucción ‘\centering’ al principio
+de la figura o en el entorno table.
+
+ A diferencia del entorno ‘center’, la instrucción ‘\centering’ no
+comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta simplemente cambia el formato que LaTeX
+aplica a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar el formato de la unidad
+de párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe contener una línea en
+blanco o la instrucción ‘\end’ (de un entorno tal como quote), que
+finaliza la unidad de párrafo.
+
+ He aquí un ejemplo:
+
+ \begin{quote}
+ \centering
+ primer línea \\
+ segunda línea \\
+ \end{quote}
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: description, Next: displaymath, Prev: center, Up: Entornos
+
+9.4 ‘description’
+=================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{description}
+ \item [ETIQUETA1] ELEMENTO1
+ \item [ETIQUETA2] ELEMENTO2
+ ...
+ \end{description}
+
+ El entorno ‘description’ se utiliza para hacer listas etiquetadas.
+Cada ETIQUETA es compuesta tipográficamente en negrita, alineada a la
+derecha. El texto del ELEMENTO puede contener múltiples párrafos.
+
+ Otra variación: debido a que el estilo negrita se aplica a las
+etiquetas, si usted compone una etiqueta en máquina de escribir usando
+‘\texttt’, obtendrá una máquina de escribir en negrita:
+‘\item[\texttt{máquina de escribir y negrita}]’. Esta también puede
+estar en negrita, entre otras cuestiones. Para obtener sólo en máquina
+de escribir, use ‘\tt’, que restablece todas las variaciones de otros
+estilos: ‘\item[{\tt máquina de escribir simple}]’.
+
+ Para detalles acerca del espaciado en listas, vea *note itemize::.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: displaymath, Next: document, Prev: description, Up: Entornos
+
+9.5 ‘displaymath’
+=================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ FÓRMULA MATEMÁTICA
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+o
+
+ \[MATH\]
+
+ El entorno ‘displaymath’ (‘\[...\]’ es un sinónimo) de composición
+tipográfica de texto MATH en una línea independiente, centrada de manera
+predeterminada. La opción global ‘fleqn’ produce ecuaciones alineadas a
+la izquierda; vea *note Opciones de Clase de Documento::.
+
+ No se añade un número de ecuación al texto de ‘displaymath’; Para
+obtener un número de ecuación, utilice el entorno ‘equation’ (*note
+equation::).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: document, Next: enumerate, Prev: displaymath, Up: Entornos
+
+9.6 ‘document’
+==============
+
+El entorno ‘document’ encierra el cuerpo de un documento. este es
+obligatorio en cada documento LaTeX. *Note Iniciando y Finalizando::.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: enumerate, Next: eqnarray, Prev: document, Up: Entornos
+
+9.7 ‘enumerate’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item ELEMENTO1
+ \item ELEMENTO2
+ ...
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ El entorno ‘enumerate’ produce una lista numerada. Las enumeraciones
+se pueden anidar unas dentro de otras, hasta cuatro niveles de
+profundidad. Estas también se pueden anidar en otros entornos de
+párrafo, tal como ‘itemize’ (*note itemize::) y ‘description’ (*note
+description::).
+
+ Cada elemento de una lista enumerada comienza con una instrucción
+‘\item’. En el entorno por lo menos debe haber una instrucción ‘\item’.
+
+ De manera predeterminada, la numeración de cada nivel se hace de la
+siguiente manera:
+
+ 1. 1., 2., ...
+ 2. (a), (b), ...
+ 3. i., ii., ...
+ 4. A., B., ...
+
+ El entorno ‘enumerate’ usa los contadores ‘\enumi’ hasta ‘\enumiv’
+(*note Contadores::). Si se proporciona el argumento opcional a
+‘\item’, el contador no se incrementa por cada elemento.
+
+ El entorno ‘enumerate’ utiliza las instrucciones desde ‘\labelenumi’
+hasta ‘\labelenumiv’ para producir la etiqueta predeterminada. Por lo
+tanto, usted puede usar ‘\renewcommand’ para cambiar las etiquetas
+(*note \newcommand y \renewcommand::). Por ejemplo, para hacer que el
+primer nivel use letras mayúsculas:
+
+ \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: eqnarray, Next: equation, Prev: enumerate, Up: Entornos
+
+9.8 ‘eqnarray’
+==============
+
+ \begin{eqnarray} (o ‘eqnarray*’)
+ FÓRMULA1 \\
+ FÓRMULA2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{eqnarray}
+
+ El entorno ‘eqnarray’ se utiliza para mostrar una secuencia de
+ecuaciones o desigualdades. Es muy parecido a un entorno ‘array’ de
+tres columnas, con filas consecutivas separadas por ‘\\’ y elementos
+consecutivos en una fila, separados por un ‘&’.
+
+ también puede utilizar ‘\\*’ para separar ecuaciones independientes,
+con su propósito normal de no permitir saltos de página en esa línea.
+
+ Se coloca un número de ecuación en cada línea a menos que la línea
+tenga una instrucción ‘\nonumber’. Alternativamente, la forma del
+entorno con ‘*’ (‘\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}’) debe omitir
+por completo la numeración de la ecuación, al tiempo que el mismo
+comienza con ‘eqnarray’.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\lefteqn’ se utiliza para dividir grandes fórmulas a
+través de varias líneas. Su argumento de composición tipográfica en el
+estilo de visualización alinea a la izquierda en una caja de ancho cero.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: equation, Next: figure, Prev: eqnarray, Up: Entornos
+
+9.9 ‘equation’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ FÓRMULA-MATEMÁTICA
+ \end{equation}
+
+ El entorno ‘equation’ comienza un entorno ‘displaymath’ (*note
+displaymath::), por ejemplo, centrando en la página el texto MATH, y
+además colocando el número de ecuación en el margen derecho.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: figure, Next: filecontents, Prev: equation, Up: Entornos
+
+9.10 ‘figure’
+=============
+
+ \begin{figure[*]}[ÚBICACIÓN]
+ FIGBODY
+ \label{ETIQUETA}
+ \caption[TÍTULOBREVE]{TEXTO}
+ \end{figure}
+
+ Las figuras son objetos que no forman parte del texto normal, y en su
+lugar son “flotados” a un lugar conveniente, como en la parte superior
+de una página. Las figuras no se dividen entre dos páginas.
+
+ Cuando se compone tipográficamente en columnas dobles, la forma
+favorita produce un ancho completo (a través de las dos columnas).
+
+ El argumento opcional ‘[ubicación]’ determina donde debe tratar de
+colocar LaTeX su figura. Hay cuatro lugares donde LaTeX, posiblemente,
+pueda colocar un flotante:
+
+‘t’
+ (Top)—en lo alto de una página de texto.
+
+‘b’
+ (Bottom)—en la parte inferior de una página de texto. No obstante,
+ ‘b’ no se permite para flotantes de ancho completo (‘figure*’) en
+ entornos con columnas dobles. Para mejorar esto, utilice el
+ paquete ‘stfloats’ o ‘dblfloatfix’, pero vea el debate de
+ advertencias en el FAQ:
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat>.
+
+‘h’
+ (Here)—aquí, en la posición donde aparece el entorno ‘figure’ en el
+ texto. Sin embargo, este no está permitido por sí mismo,
+ automáticamente se añade ‘t’. Para forzar que una figura
+ absolutamente aparezca “aquí”, utilice el paquete ‘float’ y use la
+ letra de ubicación ‘H’. (Este paquete también ofrece otras
+ opciones).
+
+‘p’
+ (Página de flotantes)—en una página de flotantes separada, misma
+ que es una página que no contiene texto, únicamente flotantes.
+
+ Las clases estándar ‘report’ y ‘article’ utilizan la ubicación
+predeterminada ‘tbp’.
+
+ El cuerpo de la figura se compone de cualquier texto, instrucciones
+LaTeX, etc., que desee.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\caption’ especifica el TEXTO del título de la
+figura. El título de manera predeterminada lleva el número. Si
+LOFTITLE está presente, esta se utiliza en la lista de figuras en lugar
+del TEXTO (*note Tablas de Contenido::).
+
+ La fracción máxima de la página que se permite sea ocupada por
+ flotantes en la parte inferior; el predeterminado es ‘.3’.
+
+‘\floatpagefraction’
+ La fracción mínima de una página flotante que deben ocupar los
+ flotantes; predeterminado a ‘.5’.
+
+‘\floatsep’
+ Espacio entre flotantes en la parte superior o inferior de una
+ página; predeterminado a ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’.
+
+‘\intextsep’
+ Espacio por encima y por debajo de un flotante en medio del texto
+ principal; predeterminado a ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ para estilos de
+ ‘10pt’ y ‘11pt’, ‘14pt plus4pt minus4pt’ para ‘12pt’.
+
+‘\textfloatsep’
+ Espacio entre el último/primero flotante en la parte
+ superior/inferior de una página; de manera predeterminada a ‘20pt
+ plus2pt minus4pt’.
+
+‘\textfraction’
+ Mínima fracción de una página que debe ser texto; si los flotantes
+ ocupan mucho espacio preserva tanto texto como sea posible, para
+ que los flotantes sean trasladados a una página diferente. El
+ predeterminado es ‘.2’.
+
+‘\topfraction’
+ Máxima fracción en la parte superior de una página que se puede
+ ocupar antes de los flotantes; el predeterminado es ‘.7’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: filecontents, Next: flushleft, Prev: figure, Up: Entornos
+
+9.11 ‘filecontents’: Crear un archivo externo
+=============================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{filecontents}{NOMBRE-DEL-ARCHIVO}
+ TEXTO
+ \end{filecontents}
+
+ o
+
+ \begin{filecontents*}{NOMBRE-DEL-ARCHIVO}
+ TEXTO
+ \end{filecontents*}
+
+ LaTeX crea un archivo llamado NOMBRE-DEL-ARCHIVO cuyo contenido es
+TEXTO. El entorno sin ‘*’ pone comentario de cabecera ; ver el ejemplo
+más abajo. Con ‘*’ ‘filecontents*’ no incluye el comentario de
+cabecera.
+
+ Este entorno puede ser utilizado en cualquier lugar en el preámbulo,
+aunque aparezca en general antes de la instrucción ‘\documentclass’. Es
+típicamente utilizado cuando el archivo fuente necesita un archivo no
+estándar de estilo o de clase. El entorno permite escribir este archivo
+en el repertorio que contiene este archivo y así de devolver el código
+fuente autónoma. Otra utilización es incluir referencia al formato
+‘bib’ en el archivo fuente, lo mismo para hacerlo autónomo.
+
+ El entorno verifica si un archivo con lo mismo nombre ya existe, y si
+sí, no hace nada. Hay un paquete ‘filecontents’ quién vuelve a definir
+el entorno ‘filecontents’ de modo que en lugar de no hacer nada en este
+caso, sobrescribe en el archivo existente.
+
+ Por ejemplo, este documento
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \begin{filecontents}{JH.sty}
+ \newcommand{\minombre}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+ \end{filecontents}
+ \usepackage{JH}
+ \begin{document}
+ Un artículo de \minombre.
+ \end{document}
+
+ produce este archivo ‘JH.sty’.
+
+ %% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
+ %% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+ %% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
+ %%
+ \newcommand{\minombre}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: flushleft, Next: flushright, Prev: filecontents, Up: Entornos
+
+9.12 ‘flushleft’
+================
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ LÍNEA1 \\
+ LÍNEA2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ El entorno ‘flushleft’ le permite crear un párrafo consistente de
+líneas que están alineadas en el margen de la mano izquierda y no están
+justificadas a la derecha. Cada línea se debe terminar con ‘\\’.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \raggedright:: Forma declarativa del entorno ‘flushleft’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \raggedright, Up: flushleft
+
+9.12.1 ‘\raggedright’
+---------------------
+
+La declaración ‘\raggedright’ corresponde al entorno ‘flushleft’. Esta
+declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un entorno tal como ‘quote’ o en
+un ‘parbox’.
+
+ A diferencia del entorno ‘flushleft’, la instrucción ‘\raggedright’
+no comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta únicamente cambia como aplica LaTeX
+el formato a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar el formato de la
+unidad párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe contener una línea en
+blanco o la instrucción ‘\end’ que termina la unidad de párrafo.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: flushright, Next: itemize, Prev: flushleft, Up: Entornos
+
+9.13 ‘flushright’
+=================
+
+ \begin{flushright}
+ LÍNEA1 \\
+ LÍNEA2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{flushright}
+
+ El entorno ‘flushright’ le permite crear un párrafo consistente de
+líneas que están alineadas en el margen a mano derecha e irregulares a
+la izquierda. Cada línea se debe terminar con ‘\\’.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \raggedleft:: Forma declarativa del entorno ‘flushright’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \raggedleft, Up: flushright
+
+9.13.1 ‘\raggedleft’
+--------------------
+
+La declaración ‘\raggedleft’ corresponde al entorno ‘flushright’. Esta
+declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un entorno tal como ‘quote’ o en
+un ‘parbox’.
+
+ A diferencia del entorno ‘flushright’, la instrucción ‘\raggedleft’
+no comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta únicamente cambia como aplica LaTeX
+el formato a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar el formato de la
+unidad párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe contener una línea en
+blanco o la instrucción ‘\end’ que termina la unidad de párrafo.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: itemize, Next: letter, Prev: flushright, Up: Entornos
+
+9.14 ‘itemize’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item ELEMENTO1
+ \item ELEMENTO2
+ ...
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ El entorno ‘itemize’ produce una lista “no ordenada”, “con viñetas”.
+Se pueden anidar entorno itemize dentro de otros, hasta cuatro niveles
+de profundidad. También se pueden anidar en otros entornos que marcan
+párrafos, tal como ‘enumerate’ (*note enumerate::).
+
+ Cada elemento de una lista ‘itemize’ comienza con una instrucción
+‘\item’. En el entorno por lo menos debe haber una instrucción ‘\item’.
+
+ De forma predeterminada, las marcas en cada nivel tienen esta
+apariencia:
+
+ 1. • (bala)
+ 2. -- (guión en negrita)
+ 3. * (asterisco)
+ 4. . (punto centrado, aquí representado como un punto)
+
+ El entorno ‘itemize’ utiliza las instrucciones desde ‘\labelitemi’
+hasta ‘\labelitemiv’ para producir la etiqueta predeterminada. De modo
+que, usted puede usar ‘\renewcommand’ para cambiar las etiquetas. Por
+ejemplo, para que en primer nivel utilice diamantes:
+
+ \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
+
+ Los parámetros desde ‘\leftmargini’ hasta ‘\leftmarginvi’ definen la
+distancia entre el margen izquierdo del entorno envolvente y el margen
+izquierdo de la lista. Por convención, ‘\leftmargin’ se fija al
+‘\leftmarginN’ adecuado cuando ingresa a un nuevo nivel de anidamiento.
+
+ El predeterminado varía desde ‘.5em’ (el nivel de anidamiento
+superior) a ‘2.5em’ (el primer nivel), y se reduce un poco en modo
+two-column. En este ejemplo se reduce mucho el espacio del margen para
+las listas anidadas:
+
+ \setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % predeterminado 2.5em
+
+ Algunos parámetros que afectan el formato de la lista:
+
+‘\itemindent’
+ Sangrado extra antes de cada elemento de una lista; predeterminado
+ a cero.
+
+‘\labelsep’
+ Espacio entre la etiqueta y el texto de un elemento; predeterminado
+ a ‘.5em’.
+
+‘\labelwidth’
+ Ancho de la etiqueta; predeterminado a ‘2em’, o ‘1.5em’ en modo
+ two-column.
+
+‘\listparindent’
+ Sangría extra añadida al segundo y subsecuentes párrafos, dentro de
+ un elemento de la lista; predeterminado a ‘0pt’.
+
+‘\rightmargin’
+ Distancia horizontal entre el margen derecho de la lista y el
+ entorno envolvente; de manera predeterminada ‘0pt’, salbo en los
+ entornos ‘quote’, ‘quotation’ y ‘verse’, donde se hace igual a
+ ‘\leftmargin’.
+
+ Parámetros que afectan el espaciamiento vertical entre elementos de
+la lista (más bien libre, de manera predeterminada).
+
+‘\itemsep’
+ Espacio vertical entre elementos. El predeterminado es ‘2pt
+ plus1pt minus1pt’ para ‘10pt’ documentos, ‘3pt plus2pt minus1pt’
+ para ‘11pt’ y ‘4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt’ para ‘12pt’.
+
+‘\parsep’
+ Espacio vertical extra entre párrafos dentro de un elemento de la
+ lista. Los predeterminados son los mismos que para ‘\itemsep’.
+
+‘\topsep’
+ Espacio vertical entre el primer elemento y el párrafo anterior.
+
+ Para listas de nivel superior, el predeterminado es ‘8pt plus2pt
+ minus4pt’ para ‘10pt’ documentos, ‘9pt plus3pt minus5pt’ para
+ ‘11pt’ y ‘10pt plus4pt minus6pt’ para ‘12pt’. Estos se reducen en
+ listas anidadas.
+
+‘\partopsep’
+ Espacio extra añadido a ‘\topsep’ cuando el entorno lista comienza
+ un párrafo. El valor predeterminado es ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’ para
+ ‘10pt’ documentos, ‘3pt plus1pt minus1pt’ para ‘11pt’ y ‘3pt
+ plus2pt minus2pt’ para ‘12pt’.
+
+ Sobre todo para listas con elementos cortos, puede ser conveniente
+eludir los espacios entre ellos. He aquí un ejemplo de una definición
+del entorno ‘itemize*’ sin espacio extra entre elementos o entre
+párrafos dentro de un solo elemento (‘\parskip’ no es específico de la
+lista, *note \parskip::):
+
+ \newenvironment{itemize*}%
+ {\begin{itemize}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+ \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
+ {\end{itemize}}
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: letter, Next: list, Prev: itemize, Up: Entornos
+
+9.15 Entorno ‘letter’: Escribiendo Cartas
+=========================================
+
+Este entorno se utiliza para crear cartas. *Note Cartas::.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: list, Next: math, Prev: letter, Up: Entornos
+
+9.16 ‘list’
+===========
+
+El entorno ‘list’ es un entorno genérico que se utiliza para definir
+mucho de los entornos más específicos. Este rara vez se utiliza en
+documentos, pero a muy menudo en las macros.
+
+ \begin{list}{ETIQUETADO}{ESPACIADO}
+ \item ELEMENTO1
+ \item ELEMENTO2
+ ...
+ \end{list}
+
+ El argumento obligatorio ETIQUETADO especifica como se deben
+etiquetar los elementos (a menos que se especifique el argumento
+opcional ‘\item’). Este argumento es una pieza de texto que se inserta
+en una caja para formar la etiqueta. Este se puede y suele contener
+otras instrucciones LaTeX.
+
+ El argumento obligatorio SPACING contiene instrucciones para cambiar
+los parámetros de espaciado para la lista. Este argumento por lo
+regular está vacío, es decir, ‘{}’, lo cual deja el espaciado
+predeterminado.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: math, Next: minipage, Prev: list, Up: Entornos
+
+9.17 ‘math’
+===========
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{math}
+ FÓRMULA-MATEMÁTICA
+ \end{math}
+
+ El entorno ‘math’ inserta la fórmula MATH dada dentro del texto
+actual. ‘\(...\))’ y ‘$...$’ son sinónimos. *Note Fórmulas
+Matemáticas::.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: minipage, Next: picture, Prev: math, Up: Entornos
+
+9.18 ‘minipage’
+===============
+
+ \begin{minipage}[POSICIÓN][ALTO][POS-INTERNA]{ANCHO}
+ TEXTO
+ \end{minipage}
+
+ El entorno ‘minipage’ compone tipográficamente su cuerpo de TEXTO en
+un bloque que no debe abarcar varias páginas. Este es similar a la
+instrucción ‘\parbox’ (*note \parbox::), pero a diferencia de ‘\parbox’,
+se pueden utilizar otros entornos de marcado de párrafos dentro de una
+minipágina.
+
+ Los argumentos son los mismos que para ‘\parbox’ (*note \parbox::).
+
+ De forma predeterminada, en el entorno ‘minipage’ los párrafos no
+tienen sangría. Usted puede restablecer la sangría con una instrucción
+tal como ‘\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}’.
+
+ La notas al pie en un entorno ‘minipage’ son manipuladas de una
+manera que es especialmente útil para poner notas en figuras o tablas.
+Una instrucción ‘\footnote’ o ‘\footnotetext’ coloca la nota al pie en
+la parte inferior de la minipágina en lugar de en la parte inferior de
+la página, y esta utiliza el contador ‘\mpfootnote’ en lugar del
+contador normal ‘footnote’ (*note Contadores::).
+
+ No obstante, no ponga una minipágina dentro de otra si usted está
+usando notas al pie; estas pueden terminar mal en la parte inferior de
+la minipágina.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: picture, Next: quotation, Prev: minipage, Up: Entornos
+
+9.19 ‘picture’
+==============
+
+ \begin{picture}(ancho,alto)(desplazamiento x,desplazamiento y)
+ ... INSTRUCCIONES DE IMAGEN ...
+ \end{picture}
+
+ El entorno ‘picture’ le permite crear casi cualquier clase de imagen
+que desee que contenga su texto, lineas, flechas y círculos. Usted le
+dice a LaTeX dónde colocar las cosas en la imagen especificando sus
+coordenadas. Una coordenada es un número que puede tener un punto
+decimal y un signo menos — un número como ‘5’, ‘0.3’ o ‘-3.1416’. Una
+coordenada especifica una longitud en múltiplos de la unidad de longitud
+‘\unitlength’, por lo que si ‘\unitlength’ se ha establecido en ‘1cm’,
+entonces la coordenada 2.54 especifica una longitud de 2.54 centímetros.
+Sólo debe cambiar el valor de ‘\unitlength’, utilizando la instrucción
+‘\setlength’, fuera del entorno ‘picture’.
+
+ Una posición es un par de coordenadas, por ejemplo, ‘(2.4, -5)’, que
+especifican el punto con coordenada x ‘2.4’ y coordenada y ‘-5’. Las
+coordenadas se especifican en la forma habitual con respecto a un
+origen, que normalmente está en la esquina inferior izquierda de la
+imagen. Tenga en cuenta que cuando una posición se presenta como un
+argumento, no se encierra entre llaves; los paréntesis sirven para
+delimitar el argumento.
+
+ El entorno ‘picture’ tiene un argumento obligatorio, el cual es una
+‘posición’. este especifica el tamaño de la imagen. El entorno produce
+una caja rectangular con la anchura y altura determinada por los
+argumentos de las coordenadas x e y.
+
+ El entorno ‘picture’ también tiene un argumento opcional ‘posición’,
+seguido del argumento ‘tamaño’, que puede cambiar el origen. (A
+diferencia de los argumentos opcionales, este argumento no está
+contenido entre corchetes). El argumento opcional proporciona las
+coordenadas del punto en la esquina inferior izquierda de la imagen (con
+el cual se determina el origen). Por ejemplo, si ‘\unitlength’ se ha
+fijado a ‘1mm’, la instrucción
+
+ \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+
+produce una imagen de 100 milímetros de ancho y 200 milímetros de
+altura, cuya esquina inferior izquierda está en el punto (10,20) y cuya
+esquina superior derecha está en el punto (110,220). La primera vez que
+haga un dibujo, normalmente se omite el argumento opcional, dejando el
+origen en el ángulo inferior izquierdo. Si a continuación desea
+modificar su imagen, trasladando todo, basta con añadir el argumento
+opcional apropiado.
+
+ El argumento obligatorio del entorno determina el tamaño nominal de
+la imagen. Esta no necesita tener ninguna relación con el tamaño de la
+imagen real; Felizmente LaTeX le permitirá poner cosas fuera de la
+imagen, o incluso fuera de la página. El tamaño nominal de la imagen lo
+utiliza LaTeX para determinar cuánto espacio dejar para ello.
+
+ Todo lo que aparece en una imagen es dibujado por la instrucción
+‘\put’. La instrucción
+
+ \put (11.3,-.3){...}
+
+coloca el objeto especificado por ‘...’ en la imagen, con su punto de
+referencia en las coordenadas (11.3, -.3). Los puntos de referencia
+para distintos objetos se describen a continuación.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\put’ crea una “caja LR”. Puede poner cualquier cosa
+que vaya en una ‘\mbox’ (*note \mbox::) en el argumento texto de la
+instrucción ‘\put’. Al hacer esto, el punto de referencia será la
+esquina inferior izquierda de la caja.
+
+ Las instrucciones para ‘picture’ están descritas en las siguientes
+secciones.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \circle:: Dibuja un círculo.
+* \makebox (picture):: Dibuja un cuadro del tamaño especificado.
+* \framebox (picture):: Dibuja una caja rodeada con un marco.
+* \dashbox:: Dibuja un cuadro de líneas discontinuas.
+* \frame:: Dibuja un marco alrededor de un objeto.
+* \line:: Dibuja una línea recta.
+* \linethickness:: Ajusta el grosor de la línea.
+* \thicklines:: Una línea de espesor más grueso.
+* \thinlines:: El grosor de la línea predeterminado.
+* \multiput:: Dibuja varias instancias de un objeto.
+* \oval:: Dibuja una elipse.
+* \put:: Coloca un objeto en un determinado lugar.
+* \shortstack:: Hace un montón de objetos.
+* \vector:: Dibuja una línea con una flecha.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \circle, Next: \makebox (picture), Up: picture
+
+9.19.1 ‘\circle’
+----------------
+
+ \circle[*]{DIÁMETRO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\circle’ produce un círculo con un diámetro lo más
+cercano posible al especificado. La forma con ‘*’ de la instrucción
+dibuja un círculo sólido.
+
+ Se pueden dibujar círculos de hasta 40 pt.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \makebox (picture), Next: \framebox (picture), Prev: \circle, Up: picture
+
+9.19.2 ‘\makebox’
+-----------------
+
+ \makebox(ANCHO,ALTO)[POSICIÓN]{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\makebox’ para el entorno ‘picture’ es similar a la
+instrucción normal ‘\makebox’ excepto que usted debe especificar el
+ANCHO y ALTO en múltiplos de ‘\unitlength’.
+
+ El argumento opcional, ‘[POSICIÓN]’, especifica el cuadrante en el
+que debe aparecer el TEXTO. Usted puede seleccionar hasta dos de los
+siguientes:
+
+‘t’
+ Mueve el elemento a la parte superior del rectángulo.
+
+‘b’
+ Mueve el elemento a la parte inferior.
+
+‘l’
+ Mueve el elemento a la izquierda.
+
+‘r’
+ Mueve el elemento hacia la derecha.
+
+ *Note \makebox::.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \framebox (picture), Next: \dashbox, Prev: \makebox (picture), Up: picture
+
+9.19.3 ‘\framebox’
+------------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \framebox(ANCHO,ALTO)[POSICIÓN]{...}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\framebox’ es como ‘\makebox’ (vea la sección
+anterior), excepto que esta coloca un marco en el exterior alrededor de
+la caja que crea.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\framebox’ produce una regla de espesor ‘\fboxrule’,
+y deja un espacio ‘\fboxsep’ entre la regla y el contenido de la caja.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \dashbox, Next: \frame, Prev: \framebox (picture), Up: picture
+
+9.19.4 ‘\dashbox’
+-----------------
+
+Dibuja un cuadro con una línea discontinua. Sinopsis:
+
+ \dashbox{GLARGO}(RANCHO,RALTO)[POSICIÓN]{TEXTO}
+
+ ‘\dashbox’ crea un rectángulo discontinuo alrededor del TEXTO en un
+entorno ‘picture’. Los guiones son de GLARGO unidades de largo, y el
+rectángulo tiene una anchura total de RANCHO y una altura de RALTO. El
+TEXTO es posicionado en la POSICIÓN opcional.
+
+ Un cuadro de líneas discontinuas se ve mejor cuando RANCHO y RALTO
+son múltiplos de GLARGO.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \frame, Next: \line, Prev: \dashbox, Up: picture
+
+9.19.5 ‘\frame’
+---------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \frame{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\frame’ coloca un marco rectangular alrededor de
+TEXTO. El punto de referencia es la esquina inferior izquierda del
+marco. No añade espacio extra entre el marco y el objeto.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \line, Next: \linethickness, Prev: \frame, Up: picture
+
+9.19.6 ‘\line’
+--------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \line(DECLIVEX,DECLIVEY){LONGITUD}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\line’ dibuja una línea con la LONGITUD dada y
+declive DECLIVEX/DECLIVEY.
+
+ LaTeX estándar únicamente puede dibujar líneas con DECLIVE = x/y,
+donde x y y tienen valores enteros desde −6 hasta 6. Para líneas de
+cualquier declive, por no hablar de otras formas, vea el paquete
+‘curve2e’ y muchos, muchos otros paquetes en CTAN.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \linethickness, Next: \thicklines, Prev: \line, Up: picture
+
+9.19.7 ‘\linethickness’
+-----------------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\linethickness{ESPESOR}’ declara el grosor de las líneas
+horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture para que sean de
+ESPESOR, el cual debe ser una longitud positiva.
+
+ ‘\linethickness’ no afecta el espesor de las líneas inclinadas,
+círculos o los cuartos de círculo dibujados por ‘\oval’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \thicklines, Next: \thinlines, Prev: \linethickness, Up: picture
+
+9.19.8 ‘\thicklines’
+--------------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\thicklines’ es un espesor de línea alternativo para
+líneas horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture; compárese *note
+\linethickness:: y *note \thinlines::.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \thinlines, Next: \multiput, Prev: \thicklines, Up: picture
+
+9.19.9 ‘\thinlines’
+-------------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\thinlines’ es el espesor de línea predeterminado para
+líneas horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture; compárese *note
+\linethickness:: y *note \thicklines::.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \multiput, Next: \oval, Prev: \thinlines, Up: picture
+
+9.19.10 ‘\multiput’
+-------------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+ \multiput(X,Y)(DELTA_X,DELTA_Y){N}{OBJ}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\multiput’ copia el objeto OBJ en un patrón regular
+entre imágenes. primero se coloca OBJ en la posición (x,y), luego en la
+posición (x+\delta x,y+\delta y) y así sucesivamente, N veces.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \oval, Next: \put, Prev: \multiput, Up: picture
+
+9.19.11 ‘\oval’
+---------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \oval(ANCHO,ALTO)[PORCIÓN]
+
+ La instrucción ‘\oval’ produce un rectángulo con esquinas
+redondeadas. El argumento opcional PORCIÓN le permite seleccionar la
+parte del óvalo vía las siguientes letras:
+
+‘t’
+ selecciona la parte superior;
+‘b’
+ selecciona la parte inferior;
+‘r’
+ selecciona la parte derecha;
+‘l’
+ selecciona la parte izquierda.
+
+ Las “esquinas” del óvalo se hacen con cuartos de círculo con un radio
+máximo de 20pt, por lo tanto los “óvalos” grandes se parecen más a cajas
+con esquinas redondeadas.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \put, Next: \shortstack, Prev: \oval, Up: picture
+
+9.19.12 ‘\put’
+--------------
+
+‘\put(XCOORD,YCOORD){ ... }’
+
+ La instrucción ‘\put’ coloca el elemento especificado por el
+argumento obligatorio en las coordenadas XCOORD e YCOORD proporcionadas.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \shortstack, Next: \vector, Prev: \put, Up: picture
+
+9.19.13 ‘\shortstack’
+---------------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \shortstack[POSICIÓN]{...\\...\\...}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\shortstack’ produce un montón de objetos. Las
+posiciones válidas son:
+
+‘r’
+ Mueve los objetos a la derecha de la pila.
+‘l’
+ Mueve los objetos a la izquierda de la pila
+‘c’
+ Mueve los objetos hacia el centro de la pila (predeterminado)
+
+ Los objetos son separados con ‘\\’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \vector, Prev: \shortstack, Up: picture
+
+9.19.14 ‘\vector’
+-----------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \vector(DECLIVEX,DECLIVEY){LONGITUD}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\vector’ dibuja una línea con una flecha de la
+longitud y declive especificados. Los valores DECLIVEX i DECLIVEY deben
+estar entre −4 y +4 incluido.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: quotation, Next: quote, Prev: picture, Up: Entornos
+
+9.20 ‘quotation’
+================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{quotation}
+ TEXTO
+ \end{quotation}
+
+ A los márgenes del entorno ‘quotation’ se les aplica una sangría en
+ambos lados izquierdo y derecho. El texto está justificado en ambos
+márgenes. Dejar una línea en blanco entre el texto produce un nuevo
+párrafo.
+
+ A diferencia del entorno ‘quote’, cada párrafo normalmente tiene
+sangría.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: quote, Next: tabbing, Prev: quotation, Up: Entornos
+
+9.21 ‘quote’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{quote}
+ TEXTO
+ \end{quote}
+
+ A los márgenes del entorno ‘quote’ se les aplica una sangría en ambos
+lados izquierdo y derecho. El texto está justificado en ambos márgenes.
+Dejar una línea en blanco entre el texto produce un nuevo párrafo.
+
+ A diferencia del entorno ‘quotation’, a los párrafos no se les aplica
+una sangría.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: tabbing, Next: table, Prev: quote, Up: Entornos
+
+9.22 ‘tabbing’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ FILA1COL1 \= FILA1COL2 \= FILA1COL3 \= FILA1COL4 \\
+ FILA2COL1 \> \> FILA2COL3 \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+ El entorno ‘tabbing’ proporciona una manera de alinear el texto en
+columnas. Funciona mediante el establecimiento de tabuladores y
+tabulación tanto como si se hubiera hecho en una máquina de escribir
+común. Es el más adecuado para los casos en que el ancho de cada
+columna es constante y conocido de antemano.
+
+ Este entorno se puede dividir en varias páginas, a diferencia del
+entorno ‘tabular’.
+
+ Las siguientes instrucciones se pueden utilizar dentro de un entorno
+‘tabbing’:
+
+‘\\ tabbing’
+ Final de línea.
+
+‘\= (tabbing)’
+ Establece una tabulación en la posición actual.
+
+‘\> (tabbing)’
+ Avanza a la siguiente tabulación.
+
+‘\<’
+ Coloca el siguiente texto a la izquierda del margen local (sin
+ necesidad de cambiar el margen). Sólo se puede usar al comienzo de
+ la línea.
+
+‘\+’
+ Mueve hacia la derecha el margen izquierdo del siguiente y todas
+ las subsecuentes instrucciones de tabulación, empezando la línea de
+ tabulación, de ser necesario.
+
+‘\-’
+ Mueve el margen izquierdo hacia la izquierda de la siguiente y
+ todas las subsecuentes instrucciones de tabulación, comenzando con
+ la línea de tabulación si es necesario.
+
+‘\' (tabbing)’
+ Mueve todo lo que ha escrito hasta ahora en la columna actual, es
+ decir, cualquier cosa desde la instrucción ‘\>’, ‘\<’, ‘\'’, ‘\\’ o
+ ‘\kill’ más reciente, a la derecha de la columna anterior, a ras de
+ la tabulación de la columna actual.
+
+‘\` (tabbing)’
+ Permite poner texto alineado a la derecha contra cualquier
+ tabulación, incluyendo la tabulación 0. Sin embargo, no puede
+ mover el texto a la derecha de la última columna porque allí no hay
+ tabulación. La instrucción ‘\`’ mueve todo el texto que le sigue,
+ hasta la instrucción ‘\\’ o ‘\end{tabbing}’ que termina la línea,
+ al margen derecho del entorno tabbing. No debe haber instrucción
+ ‘\>’ o ‘\'’ entre el ‘\`’ y la instrucción que termina la línea.
+
+‘\a (tabbing)’
+ En un entorno ‘tabbing’, las instrucciones ‘\=’, ‘\'’ y ‘\`’ no
+ producen acentos en la manera usual (*note Acentos::). En su
+ lugar, se utilizan estas instrucciones ‘\a=’, ‘\a'’ y ‘\a`’.
+
+‘\kill’
+ Fija una tabulación sin producir texto. Trabaja igual que ‘\\’
+ salvo que esta desecha la línea actual en lugar de producir algo
+ útil. El efecto de cualquier instrucción ‘\=’, ‘\+’ o ‘\-’ en esa
+ línea seguirá en vigor.
+
+‘\poptabs’
+ Restaura las posiciones de tabulación salvadas por la última
+ ‘\pushtabs’.
+
+‘\pushtabs’
+ Guarda todas las posiciones de tabulación actuales. Útil para
+ cambiar temporalmente las posiciones de tabulación en medio de un
+ entorno ‘tabbing’.
+
+‘\tabbingsep’
+ Distancia a la izquierda de la tabulación movida por ‘\'’.
+
+ En este ejemplo se compone tipográficamente una función de Pascal en
+el formato tradicional:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \> begin \= \+ \\
+ \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: table, Next: tabular, Prev: tabbing, Up: Entornos
+
+9.23 ‘table’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{table}[ubicación]
+
+ cuerpo de la tabla
+
+ \caption{título de la tabla}
+ \end{table}
+
+ Las tablas son objetos que no forman parte del texto normal, y por lo
+general “flotan” a un lugar conveniente, como la parte superior de una
+página. Las tablas no se dividen en dos páginas.
+
+ El argumento opcional ‘[ubicación]’ determina dónde LaTeX trata de
+colocar su tabla. Hay cuatro lugares donde LaTeX, posiblemente, pueda
+colocar un flotante:; estos son los mismo que los utilizados con el
+entorno ‘figure’, y se describen allí (*note figure::).
+
+ Las clases ‘report’ y ‘article’ estándar utilizan la ubicación
+‘[tbp]’ predeterminada.
+
+ El cuerpo de la tabla se compone de cualquier texto, instrucciones
+LaTeX, etc., que usted desee. La instrucción ‘\caption’ le permite
+colocar un título a su tabla.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: tabular, Next: thebibliography, Prev: table, Up: Entornos
+
+9.24 ‘tabular’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{tabular}[ubicación]{columnas}
+ columna 1 entrada & columna 2 entrada ... & columna n entrada n \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ o
+
+ \begin{tabular*}{ancho}[posición]{columnas}
+ columna 1 entrada & columna 2 entrada ... & columna n entrada n \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabular*}
+
+ Estos entornos producen una caja consiste de una secuencia de filas
+de elementos, alineadas verticalmente en columnas.
+
+ Se debe utilizar ‘\\’ para especificar el final de cada fila de la
+tabla, salvo por la última, en que esta es opcional —a menos que le siga
+una instrucción ‘\hline’ (para colocar una raya bajo la tabla).
+
+ Los argumentos obligatorios y opcionales consisten de:
+
+‘ancho’
+ Especifica la anchura del entorno ‘tabular*’. Este debe tener
+ espacio entre las columnas que se puede estirar para llenar el
+ ancho especificado.
+
+‘posición’
+ Especifica la posición vertical; de manera predeterminada alinea al
+ centro el entorno.
+
+ ‘t’
+ alineado en la fila superior
+ ‘b’
+ alineado en la fila inferior
+
+‘columnas’
+ Especifica el formato de columna. Este consiste en una secuencia
+ de los siguientes especificadores, correspondientes a la secuencia
+ de columnas y el material intercolumna.
+
+ ‘l’
+ Una columna de elementos alineados a la izquierda.
+
+ ‘r’
+ Una columna de elementos alineados a la derecha.
+
+ ‘c’
+ Una columna de elementos centrados.
+
+ ‘|’
+ Una línea vertical que llena la altura y profundidad total del
+ entorno.
+
+ ‘@{TEXTO}’
+ Esta inserta TEXTO en cada fila. Una @-expresión suprime el
+ espacio intercolumnas insertado normalmente entre columnas;
+ cualquier espacio deseado entre el texto insertado y los
+ elementos adyacentes se deberá incluir en TEXTO. Una
+ instrucción ‘\extracolsep{ancho}’ en una @-expresión provoca
+ que aparezca un espacio extra de ancho ‘ancho’ a la izquierda
+ de todas las columnas subsecuentes, hasta que se anule por
+ otra instrucción ‘\extracolsep’. A diferencia del espacio
+ intercolumna ordinario, este espacio adicional no se suprime
+ por una @-expresión. Una instrucción ‘\extracolsep’
+ únicamente se pude utilizar en una @-expresión en el argumento
+ ‘columnas’.
+
+ ‘p{ANCHO}’
+ Produce una columna con cada elemento compuesto
+ tipográficamente en una parbox de ancho ANCHO, como si fuera
+ el argumento de una instrucción ‘\parbox[t]{ANCHO}’. Sin
+ embargo, una ‘\\’ en el elemento no puede, salvo en las
+ siguientes situaciones:
+
+ 1. Dentro de un entorno como ‘minipage’, ‘array’ o
+ ‘tabular’.
+ 2. Dentro de una ‘\parbox’ explícita.
+ 3. En el alcance de una declaración ‘\centering’,
+ ‘\raggedright’ o ‘\raggedleft’. La última declaración
+ debe aparecer dentro de llaves o un entorno cuando se
+ utiliza en un elemento ‘p’-columna.
+
+ ‘*{NÚMERO}{COLUMNAS}’
+ Equivalente a NÚMERO de copias de COLUMNAS, donde NÚMERO es un
+ entero positivo y COLUMNAS es cualquier lista de
+ especificadores de columna, la cual puede contener otra
+ ‘*-expresión’.
+
+ Parámetros que controlan el formato:
+
+‘\arrayrulewidth’
+ El espesor de la línea creada por ‘|’, ‘\hline’ y ‘\vline’ en los
+ entornos ‘tabular’ y ‘array’; el predeterminado es ‘.4pt’.
+
+‘\arraystretch’
+ El factor para escalar el espaciado entre hileras en los entornos
+ ‘tabular’ y ‘array’; el predeterminado es ‘1’, para no escalar.
+
+‘\doublerulesep’
+ Distancia horizontal entre las líneas verticles producidas por ‘||’
+ en los entornos ‘tabular’ y ‘array’; el predeterminado es ‘2pt’.
+
+‘\tabcolsep’
+ La mitad de la anchura del espacio entre las columnas; el
+ predeterminado es ‘6pt’.
+
+ Estas instrucciones se pueden utilizar en el interior de un entorno
+‘tabular’:
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \multicolumn:: Hace que un elemento abarque varias columnas.
+* \cline:: Dibuja una línea horizontal que abarca algunas columnas.
+* \hline:: Dibuja una línea horizontal que abarca todas las columnas.
+* \vline:: Dibuja una línea vertical.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \multicolumn, Next: \cline, Up: tabular
+
+9.24.1 ‘\multicolumn’
+---------------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+ \multicolumn{COLUMNAS}{POSICIÓN}{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\multicolumn’ provoca que una entrada se extienda por
+varias columnas. El primer argumento obligatorio, COLUMNAS, especifica
+es el número de columnas por abarcar. El segundo argumento obligatorio,
+POSICIÓN, especifica el formato de la entrada; ‘c’ para centrado, ‘l’
+para alineado a la izquierda, ‘r’ para alineado a la derecha. El tercer
+argumento obligatorio, TEXTO, especifica el texto a colocar en la
+entrada.
+
+ He aquí un ejemplo que muestra dos columnas separadas por un doble
+guión; ‘\multicolumn’ se utiliza para el encabezado:
+
+ \begin{tabular}{r@{--}l}
+ \multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr
+ 0x80&0x7FF \cr
+ 0x800&0xFFFF \cr
+ 0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr
+ \end{tabular}
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \cline, Next: \hline, Prev: \multicolumn, Up: tabular
+
+9.24.2 ‘\cline’
+---------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \cline{I-J}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\cline’ dibuja un línea horizontal a través de las
+columnas especificadas, comenzando en la colúmna I y terminando en la
+columna J, que son especificadas en el argumento obligatorio.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \hline, Next: \vline, Prev: \cline, Up: tabular
+
+9.24.3 ‘\hline’
+---------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\hline’ dibuja una línea horizontal del ancho del
+entorno ‘tabular’ o ‘array’ especificado. Se utiliza comúnmente para
+para dibujar una línea en la parte superior, inferior y entre filas de
+la tabla.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \vline, Prev: \hline, Up: tabular
+
+9.24.4 ‘\vline’
+---------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\vline’ dibuja una línea vertical extendida a la altura
+y profundidad total de su fila. Una instrucción ‘\hfill’ se puede
+utilizar para mover la línea hasta el borde de la columna. También se
+puede utilizar en una @-expresión.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: thebibliography, Next: theorem, Prev: tabular, Up: Entornos
+
+9.25 ‘thebibliography’
+======================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{thebibliography}{ETIQUETA-MÁS-AMPLIA}
+ \bibitem[ETIQUETA]{CLAVE-DE-CITA}
+ ...
+ \end{thebibliography}
+
+ El entorno ‘thebibliography’ produce una bibliografía o lista de
+referencia.
+
+ En las clase ‘article’, esta lista de referencia es etiquetada como
+“Referencias”; en la clase ‘report’, esta es etiquetada como
+“Bibliografía”. Usted puede cambiar la etiqueta (en las clases
+estándar) redefiniendo la instrucción ‘\refname’. Por ejemplo, la
+siguiente instrucción la elimina por completo:
+
+ \renewcommand{\refname}{}
+
+ El argumento obligatorio ETIQUETA-MÁS-AMPLIA es texto que, al momento
+de componerla tipográficamente, es tan ancho como la etiqueta producida
+por la instrucción ‘\bibitem’. Se suele dar como ‘9’ para bibliografías
+de menos de 10 referencias, ‘99’ para las que tienen menos de 100, etc.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \bibitem:: Especifica un elemento de la bibliografía.
+* \cite:: Hace referencia a un elemento bibliográfico.
+* \nocite:: Incluye un elemento en la bibliografía.
+* Usando BibTeX:: Generando bibliografías automáticamente.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \bibitem, Next: \cite, Up: thebibliography
+
+9.25.1 ‘\bibitem’
+-----------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+ \bibitem[ETIQUETA]{CLAVE-DE-CITA}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\bibitem’ genera una entrada etiquetada por ETIQUETA.
+Si se omite el argumento ETIQUETA, automáticamente se genera un número
+utilizando el contador ‘enumi’. La CLAVE-DE-CITA es cualquier secuencia
+de letras, números y signos de puntuación que no contenga una coma.
+
+ Esta instrucción escribe una entrada al archivo ‘.aux’ que contiene
+los elementos CLAVE-DE-CITA y etiqueta. Cuando la instrucción
+‘\begin{document}’ lee el archivo ‘.aux’, los elementos ‘etiqueta’ son
+asociados con ‘clave-de-cita’, produciendo referencias a CLAVE-DE-CITA
+con una instrucción ‘\cite’ (vea la siguiente sección) para producir la
+etiqueta asociada.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \cite, Next: \nocite, Prev: \bibitem, Up: thebibliography
+
+9.25.2 ‘\cite’
+--------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \cite[SUBCITA]{CLAVES
+
+ El argumento CLAVES es una lista de una o más claves de cita,
+separadas por comas. Esta instrucción genera una cita en el texto para
+referencias asociadas con CLAVES por medio de entradas en el archivo
+‘.aux’.
+
+ El argumento de texti opcional SUBCITA aparece después de la cita.
+Por ejemplo, ‘\cite[p.~314]{knuth}’ podría producir ‘[Knuth, p. 314]’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \nocite, Next: Usando BibTeX, Prev: \cite, Up: thebibliography
+
+9.25.3 ‘\nocite’
+----------------
+
+‘\nocite{lista-de-claves}’
+
+ La instrucción ‘\nocite’ no produce texto, pero escribe en el archivo
+‘.aux’ la ‘lista-de-claves’, que es una lista de una o más etiquetas de
+cita.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Usando BibTeX, Prev: \nocite, Up: thebibliography
+
+9.25.4 Usando BibTeX
+--------------------
+
+Si usted utiliza el programa BibTeX escrito por Oren Patashnik
+(altamente recomendable si necesita una bibliografía de más de un par de
+títulos) para mantener su bibliografía, no utilice el entorno
+‘thebibliography’ (*note thebibliography::). En su lugar, incluya las
+líneas
+
+ \bibliographystyle{ESTILO-DE-BIBLIOGRAFÍA}
+ \bibliography{ARCHIVO-DE-BIBLIOGRAFÍA-1,ARCHIVO-DE-BIBLIOGRAFÍA-2}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\bibliographystyle’ por sí misma no produce salida
+alguna. Por el contrario, define el estilo en que se producirá la
+bibliografía: ESTILO-DE-BIBLIOGRAFÍA se refiere a un archivo
+‘ESTILO-DE-BIBLIOGRAFÍA.bst’, en el que se define qué apariencia tendrán
+las citas. Los nombres de ESTILO estándar distribuidos con BibTeX son:
+
+‘alpha’
+ Ordenadas alfabéticamente. Las etiquetas están formadas por el
+ nombre del autor y año de publicación.
+‘plain’
+ Ordenadas alfabéticamente. Las etiquetas son numéricas.
+‘unsrt’
+ Al igual que ‘plain’, pero las entradas están en el orden citado.
+‘abbrv’
+ Igual que ‘plain’, pero con etiquetas más compactas.
+
+ Además, existen muchos otros archivos de estilo BibTeX adaptados a
+las demandas de diversas publicaciones. Vea
+<http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib>.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\bibliography’ es la que realmente produce la
+bibliografía. El argumento ‘\bibliography’ se refiere a archivos con el
+nombre ‘ARCHIVO-DE-BIBLIOGRAFÍA.bib’, el cual debe contener la base de
+datos en formato BibTeX. Sólo las entradas referidas a través de
+‘\cite’ y ‘\nocite’ serán incluidas en la bibliografía.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: theorem, Next: titlepage, Prev: thebibliography, Up: Entornos
+
+9.26 ‘theorem’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{theorem}
+ TEXTO-DEL-TEOREMA
+ \end{theorem}
+
+ El entorno ‘theorem’ produce “Teorema N” en negrita seguido por el
+TEXTO-DEL-TEOREMA, donde las posibilidades de numeración para N se
+describen bajo ‘\newtheorem’ (*note \newtheorem::).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: titlepage, Next: verbatim, Prev: theorem, Up: Entornos
+
+9.27 ‘titlepage’
+================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{titlepage}
+ TEXTO
+ \end{titlepage}
+
+ El entorno ‘titlepage’ crea una página de título, es decir, una
+página en la cual no se imprime el número de página ni el encabezado.
+También provoca que la página siguiente sea numerada como la página uno.
+El formato de la página del título se deja bajo su responsabilidad. La
+instrucción ‘\today’ puede ser útil en las páginas de título (*note
+\today::).
+
+ Usted puede utilizar la instrucción ‘\maketitle’ (*note \maketitle::)
+para producir una página de título estándar sin un entorno ‘titlepage’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: verbatim, Next: verse, Prev: titlepage, Up: Entornos
+
+9.28 ‘verbatim’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ TEXTO-LITERAL
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+ El entorno ‘verbatim’ es un entorno para crear párrafos en el cual
+LaTeX produce exactamente lo que usted escriba en él; Por ejemplo el
+carácter ‘\’ produce una ‘\’ impresa. Este cambia el modo en que LaTeX
+imprime los que usted escriba con retornos de carro y espacios en blanco
+con el mismo efecto que tendría en una máquina de escribir.
+
+ El entorno ‘verbatim’ utiliza una composición tipográfica con tipo de
+letra monoespacio (‘\tt’).
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \verb:: La forma macro del entorno ‘verbatim’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \verb, Up: verbatim
+
+9.28.1 ‘\verb’
+--------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \verbCARÁCTERTEXTO-LITERALCARÁCTER
+ \verb*CARÁCTERTEXTO-LITERALCARÁCTER
+
+ La instrucción ‘\verb’ compone tipográficamente el TEXTO-LITERAL como
+este se ha ingresado incluyendo caracteres especiales y espacios,
+utilizando el tipo de letra de máquina de escribir (‘\tt’). No se
+permiten espacios entre ‘\verb’ o ‘\verb*’ y el CARÁCTER delimitador, el
+cual comienza y termina el texto literal. El delimitador no debe
+aparecer en el TEXTO-LITERAL.
+
+ La forma con ‘*’ difiere únicamente en que los espacios son impresos
+con un carácter de “espacio visible”.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: verse, Prev: verbatim, Up: Entornos
+
+9.29 ‘verse’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{verse}
+ LÍNEA1 \\
+ LÍNEA2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{verse}
+
+ El entorno ‘verse’ está diseñado para poesía, aunque es posible que
+usted le encuentre alguna otra utilidad.
+
+ Los márgenes tienen sangría a la izquierda y derecha, a los párrafos
+no se les aplica sangría y el texto no está justificado. Separe las
+líneas de cada estrofa con ‘\\’ y use una o más líneas en blanco para
+separar las estrofas.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Saltos de Línea, Next: Saltos de Página, Prev: Entornos, Up: Top
+
+10 Saltos de Línea
+******************
+
+Lo primero que hace LaTeX cuando procesa texto normal es traducir el
+archivo de entrada en una secuencia de unidades gráficas y espacios.
+Para producir un documento impreso, esta secuencia se debe partir en
+líneas (y esas línea se deben dividir en páginas).
+
+ Normalmente LaTeX se encarga de los saltos de línea (y página), pero
+en algunos entornos, usted mismo determina los saltos de líneas con la
+instrucción ‘\\’, y siempre puede forzar los saltos de línea
+manualmente.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \\:: Inicia una nueva línea.
+* \obeycr y \restorecr:: Provoca que cada línea ingresada comience una nueva línea.
+* \newline:: Divide la línea \- (hyphenation):: Inserta un guión en la sílaba explicita.
+* \- (hyphenation)::
+* \fussy:: Es quisquilloso con la separación de línea.
+* \sloppy:: Es descuidado en la separación de la líneas.
+* \hyphenation:: Le dice a LaTeX cómo insertar un guión para separar una palabra.
+* \linebreak y \nolinebreak:: Forzando y evitando saltos de línea.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \\, Next: \obeycr y \restorecr, Up: Saltos de Línea
+
+10.1 ‘\\’[*][MÁS-ESPACIO]
+=========================
+
+La instrucción ‘\\’ le dice a LaTeX que comience una nueva línea. Esta
+tiene un argumento opcional, MÁS-ESPACIO, que especifica la cantidad de
+espacio vertical extra que se debe insertar antes de la siguiente línea.
+Este puede ser una cantidad negativa.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\\*’ es la misma que la instrucción ordinaria ‘\\’
+salvo que esta le dice a LaTeX que no comience una nueva página después
+de la línea.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \obeycr y \restorecr, Next: \newline, Prev: \\, Up: Saltos de Línea
+
+10.2 ‘\obeycr’ y ‘\restorecr’
+=============================
+
+La instrucción ‘\obeycr’ genera un retorno de carro en el archivo de
+entrada (‘^^M’, internamente) lo mismo que ‘\\’ (seguido por ‘\relax’).
+Por lo tanto, cada nueva línea en la entrada también será una nueva
+línea en la salida.
+
+ ‘\restorecr’ restaura el comportamiento de saltos de línea normal.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \newline, Next: \- (hyphenation), Prev: \obeycr y \restorecr, Up: Saltos de Línea
+
+10.3 ‘\newline’
+===============
+
+La instrucción ‘\newline’ rompe la línea en el punto actual, sin
+justificar el texto anterior. Sólo se puede utilizar en modo párrafo.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \- (hyphenation), Next: \fussy, Prev: \newline, Up: Saltos de Línea
+
+10.4 ‘\-’ (división silábica discrecional)
+==========================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\-’ le dice a LaTeX que puede dividir la palabra con un
+guión en ese punto. LaTeX cuenta con una muy buena separación silábica
+con guión, y por lo general en la mayoría de los casos encuentra los
+puntos correctos en la división de palabras, y casi nunca utiliza uno
+incorrecto. La instrucción ‘\-’ se utiliza para casos excepcionales.
+
+ Cuando usted inserta la instrucción ‘\-’ en una palabra, la palabra
+únicamente se debe dividir con guión en esos puntos y en ninguno de los
+puntos que LaTeX pudiera haber elegido de otro modo.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \fussy, Next: \sloppy, Prev: \- (hyphenation), Up: Saltos de Línea
+
+10.5 ‘\fussy’
+=============
+
+La declaración ‘\fussy’ (que es la predeterminada) provoca que TeX sea
+quisquilloso con los saltos de línea. Esto por lo general también evita
+el espacio entre palabras, a costa de un ocasional desbordamiento de
+caja.
+
+ Esta instrucción cancela el efecto de una instrucción ‘\sloppy’
+previa (*note \sloppy::.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \sloppy, Next: \hyphenation, Prev: \fussy, Up: Saltos de Línea
+
+10.6 ‘\sloppy’
+==============
+
+La declaración ‘\sloppy’ provoca que TeX sea menos cuidadoso con los
+saltos de línea. Esto evitará el desbordamiento de cajas, a costa de un
+mayor espaciamiento entre palabras.
+
+ Dura hasta que se utilice una instrucción ‘\fussy’ (*note \fussy::).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \hyphenation, Next: \linebreak y \nolinebreak, Prev: \sloppy, Up: Saltos de Línea
+
+10.7 ‘\hyphenation’
+===================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \hyphenation{PALABRA-UNO PALABRA-DOS}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\hyphenation’ declara los puntos dónde se permite la
+división de palabras por medio de un carácter ‘-’ en las palabras
+proporcionadas. Las palabras están separadas por espacios. TeX
+únicamente debe separar las palabras si la palabra coincide exactamente,
+sin juzgar las inflexiones. Múltiples instrucciones ‘\hyphenation’ son
+acumulativas. Algunos ejemplos (los patrones de separación silábica de
+TeX no se aplican a esas palabras):
+
+ \hyphenation{ap-én-dice col-umnas hiper-fragilís-tico-espiali-doso}
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \linebreak y \nolinebreak, Prev: \hyphenation, Up: Saltos de Línea
+
+10.8 ‘\linebreak’ y ‘\nolinebreak’
+==================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \linebreak[PRIORIDAD]
+ \nolinebreak[PRIORIDAD]
+
+ De manera predeterminada, la instrucción ‘\linebreak’
+(‘\nolinebreak’) fuerza (previene) un salto de línea en la posición
+actual. Para ‘\linebreak’, los espacios en la línea se expanden hasta
+el margen derecho de la manera normal.
+
+ Con el argumento opcional PRIORIDAD, usted puede convertir la
+instrucción de una petición a una demanda. La PRIORIDAD debe ser un
+número desde 0 hasta 4. Cuanto mayor sea el número, es más insistente
+la petición.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Saltos de Página, Next: Notas al Pie, Prev: Saltos de Línea, Up: Top
+
+11 Saltos de Página
+*******************
+
+LaTeX inicia nuevas páginas asincronicamente, cuando ha acumulado
+suficiente material para llenar una página. Por lo general, esto ocurre
+automáticamente, pero a veces, posiblemente, usted quiera influir en los
+saltos de página.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \cleardoublepage:: Inicia una nueva página a mano derecha.
+* \clearpage:: Inicia una nueva página.
+* \newpage:: Inicia una nueva página.
+* \enlargethispage:: Amplía un poco la página actual.
+* \pagebreak y \nopagebreak:: Forzando y evitando saltos de página.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \cleardoublepage, Next: \clearpage, Up: Saltos de Página
+
+11.1 ‘\cleardoublepage’
+=======================
+
+La instrucción ‘\cleardoublepage’ termina la página actual y provoca que
+se impriman todas las imágenes y tablas que han aparecido hasta el
+momento en el texto. En un estilo de Impresión a doble cara, este
+también hace que la siguiente página sea a mano derecha, página
+(impares), produciendo una página en blanco si es necesario.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \clearpage, Next: \newpage, Prev: \cleardoublepage, Up: Saltos de Página
+
+11.2 ‘\clearpage’
+=================
+
+La instrucción ‘\clearpage’ termina la página actual y provoca que todas
+la imágenes y tablas que han aparecido hasta ahora en la entrada sean
+impresas.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \newpage, Next: \enlargethispage, Prev: \clearpage, Up: Saltos de Página
+
+11.3 ‘\newpage’
+===============
+
+La instrucción ‘\newpage’ termina la página actual, pero no descarga
+flotantes (vea ‘\clearpage’ arriba).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \enlargethispage, Next: \pagebreak y \nopagebreak, Prev: \newpage, Up: Saltos de Página
+
+11.4 ‘\enlargethispage’
+=======================
+
+‘\enlargethispage{tamaño}’
+
+ ‘\enlargethispage*{tamaño}’
+
+ Amplía el ‘\textheight’ para la página actual por la cantidad
+especificada; por ejemplo ‘\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}’ permitirá
+una línea adicional.
+
+ La forma favorita trata de apretar el material en la página tanto
+como sea posible. Esta normalmente se utiliza junto con un ‘\pagebreak’
+explícito.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \pagebreak y \nopagebreak, Prev: \enlargethispage, Up: Saltos de Página
+
+11.5 ‘\pagebreak’ y ‘\nopagebreak’
+==================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \pagebreak[PRIORIDAD]
+ \nopagebreak[PRIORIDAD]
+
+ De forma predeterminada, la instrucción ‘\pagebreak’ (‘\nopagebreak’)
+fuerza (impide) un salto de página en la posición actual. Para
+‘\linebreak’, el espacio vertical en la página se estira cuanto sea
+posible de modo que se extienda hasta el margen inferior normal.
+
+ Con el argumento opcional PRIORIDAD, puede convertir la instrucción
+‘\pagebreak’ desde una petición a una demanda. El número debe ser un
+número desde 0 hasta 4. Cuanto mayor sea el número, más insistente es
+la petición.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Notas al Pie, Next: Definiciones, Prev: Saltos de Página, Up: Top
+
+12 Notas al Pie
+***************
+
+Las notas al pie se pueden producir en una de dos maneras. Se pueden
+producir con una sola instrucción, la instrucción ‘\footnote’. También
+se pueden producir con dos instrucciones, las instrucciones
+‘\footnotemark’ y ‘\footnotetext’.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \footnote:: Inserta una nota al pie.
+* \footnotemark:: Solamente Inserta la marca de nota.
+* \footnotetext:: Solamente Inserta el texto la nota.
+* Notas al Pie Simbólicas:: Usando símbolos en lugar de números para las notas.
+* Parámetros para Footnote:: Parámetros para el formato de la nota al pie.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \footnote, Next: \footnotemark, Up: Notas al Pie
+
+12.1 ‘\footnote’
+================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \footnote[NÚMERO]{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\footnote’ coloca una nota numerada con el TEXTO al
+pie de la página actual. El argumento opcional NÚMERO cambia el número
+predeterminado de la nota.
+
+ Esta instrucción sólo puede utilizarse fuera del modo párrafo; es
+decir, no se puede utilizar en el instrucciones de seccionado tal como
+‘\chapter’, en figuras, tablas o en un entorno ‘tabular’. (Vea las
+siguientes secciones).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \footnotemark, Next: \footnotetext, Prev: \footnote, Up: Notas al Pie
+
+12.2 ‘\footnotemark’
+====================
+
+Sin argumento opcional, la instrucción ‘\footnotemark’ coloca el número
+de nota actual en el texto. Esta instrucción se puede utilizar en modo
+párrafo. Usted proporciona el texto de la nota por separado, con la
+instrucción ‘\footnotetext’.
+
+ Esta instrucción se puede utilizar para producir varios marcadores de
+nota consecutivos refiriéndose a la misma nota
+
+ \footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+
+después de la primer instrucción ‘\footnote’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \footnotetext, Next: Notas al Pie Simbólicas, Prev: \footnotemark, Up: Notas al Pie
+
+12.3 ‘\footnotetext’
+====================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \footnotetext[NÚMERO]{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\footnotetext’ coloca el TEXTO en la parte inferior
+de la página como una nota al pie. Esta instrucción puede venir en
+cualquier lugar después de la instrucción ‘\footnotemark’. La
+instrucción ‘\footnotetext’ debe aparecer en el exterior del modo
+párrafo.
+
+ El argumento opcional NÚMERO cambia el número predeterminado de la
+nota.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Notas al Pie Simbólicas, Next: Parámetros para Footnote, Prev: \footnotetext, Up: Notas al Pie
+
+12.4 Notas al Pie Simbólicas
+============================
+
+Si desea utilizar símbolos para las notas al pie, en lugar de un número
+creciente, redefina ‘\thefootnote’ así:
+
+ \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\fnsymbol’ produce a serie predefinida de símbolos
+(*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::). Si desea
+utilizar un símbolo diferente como su marca de nota al pie, necesitará
+redefinir ‘\@fnsymbol’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Parámetros para Footnote, Prev: Notas al Pie Simbólicas, Up: Notas al Pie
+
+12.5 Parámetros para Footnote
+=============================
+
+‘\footnoterule’
+ Produce la línea que separa el texto principal en una página de las
+ notas al pie de la página. Dimensiones predeterminadas: ‘0.4pt’
+ espesor (o ancho), y longitud de ‘0.4\columnwidth’ en las clases de
+ documento estándar (salvo en ‘slides’, donde esta no aparece).
+
+‘\footnotesep’
+ La altura donde se coloca el puntal al comienzo de la nota al pie.
+ De forma predeterminada, se establece en el puntal del tipo de
+ letra normal ‘\footnotesize’ (*note Tamaños del Tipo de Letra::,
+ por lo tanto no hay espacio extra entre las notas. Este es
+ ‘6.65pt’ para ‘10pt’, ‘7.7pt’ para ‘11pt’ y ‘8.4pt’ para ‘12pt’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Definiciones, Next: Contadores, Prev: Notas al Pie, Up: Top
+
+13 Definiciones
+***************
+
+LaTeX tiene la capacidad para crear nuevas instrucciones de muchos tipos
+diferentes.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \newcommand y \renewcommand:: (Re)define una nueva instrucción.
+* \newcounter:: Define un nuevo contador.
+* \newlength:: Define una nueva longitud.
+* \newsavebox:: Define una nueva caja.
+* \newenvironment y \renewenvironment:: Definen un nuevo entorno.
+* \newtheorem:: Definen un nuevo entorno -como ‘theorem’.
+* \newfont:: Define un nuevo nombre de tipo de letra.
+* \protect:: Usando instrucciones astutas.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \newcommand y \renewcommand, Next: \newcounter, Up: Definiciones
+
+13.1 ‘\newcommand’ y ‘\renewcommand’
+====================================
+
+‘\newcommand’ y ‘\renewcommand’ define y redefine una instrucción,
+respectivamente.
+
+ Sinopsis:
+
+ \newcommand{INSTRUCCIÓN}[N-ARGUMENTOS]{DEFINICIÓN}
+ \renewcommand{INSTRUCCIÓN}[N-ARGUMENTOS]{DEFINICIÓN}
+ \newcommand{INSTRUCCIÓN}[N-ARGUMENTOS][PREDETERMINADO]{DEFINICIÓN}
+ \renewcommand{INSTRUCCIÓN}[N-ARGUMENTOS][PREDETERMINADO]{DEFINICIÓN}
+
+INSTRUCCIÓN
+ El nombre de la instrucción comenzando con ‘\’. Para
+ ‘\newcommand’, este no se debe haber definido y no debe comenzar
+ con ‘\end’; para ‘\renewcommand’, este ya tiene que estar definido.
+
+N-ARGUMENTOS
+ Un entero opcional entre 1 y 9 especificando el número de
+ argumentos que debe tomar la instrucción. El valor predeterminado
+ es para que la instrucción no tome argumentos.
+
+PREDETERMINADO
+ Si este parámetro opcional está presente, significa que el primer
+ argumento del comando es opcional. Cuando se invoca a la nueva
+ instrucción, el valor predeterminado del argumento opcional (es
+ decir, si no se especifica en la llamada) es la cadena
+ ‘definición’.
+
+DEFINICIÓN
+ El texto con el que se sustituirá cada aparición de ‘instrucción’;
+ una construcción de la forma ‘#N’ en DEFINICIÓN es reemplazada por
+ el texto del eNésimo argumento.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \newcounter, Next: \newlength, Prev: \newcommand y \renewcommand, Up: Definiciones
+
+13.2 ‘\newcounter’
+==================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \newcounter{NOMBRE-CONTADOR}[SUPER]
+
+ La instrucción ‘\newcounter’ define un nuevo contador llamado
+NOMBRE-CONTADOR. El nuevo contador se inicializa a cero.
+
+ Dado el argumento opcional ‘[SUPER]’, (NOMBRE-CONTADOR se
+restablecerá cuando el contador cuyo nomber es SUPER se incremente.
+
+ *Note Contadores::, para mayor información.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \newlength, Next: \newsavebox, Prev: \newcounter, Up: Definiciones
+
+13.3 ‘\newlength’
+=================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \newlength{\ARGUMENTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\newlength’ define el argumento obligatorio como una
+instrucción de “longitud” con un valor de ‘0in’. El argumento debe ser
+una secuencia de control, como en ‘\newlength{\foo}’. Ocurre un error
+si ‘\foo’ ya está definido.
+
+ *Note Longitudes::, para saber cómo fijar la nueva longitud a un
+valor distinto de cero, y para más información acerca de las longitudes
+en general.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \newsavebox, Next: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment, Prev: \newlength, Up: Definiciones
+
+13.4 ‘\newsavebox’
+==================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \newsavebox{INSTRUCCIÓN}
+
+ Define ‘\INSTRUCCIÓN’, el cual debe ser un nombre de instrucción que
+no se haya definido, para referirse a una nueva bandeja para almacenar
+cajas.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment, Next: \newtheorem, Prev: \newsavebox, Up: Definiciones
+
+13.5 ‘\newenvironment’ y ‘\renewenvironment’
+============================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+
+ \newenvironment{ENTORNO}[N-ARGUMENTOS]{ANTES-DEFINICIÓN}
+ {DESPUÉS-DEFINICIÓN}
+ \newenvironment{ENTORNO}[N-ARGUMENTOS][PREDETERMINADO]
+ {ANTES-DEFINICIÓN}{DESPUÉS-DEFINICIÓN}
+ \renewenvironment{ENTORNO}[N-ARGUMENTOS]
+ {ANTES-DEFINICIÓN}{DESPUÉS-DEFINICIÓN}
+
+ Estas instrucciones definen o redefinen un entorno ENTORNO, es decir,
+‘\begin{ENTORNO} ... \end{ENTORNO}’.
+
+ENTORNO
+ El nombre del entorno. Para ‘\newenvironment’, ENTORNO no debe ser
+ un entorno existente, y la instrucción ‘\ENTORNO’ debe ser una que
+ no se haya definido previamente. Para ‘\renewenvironment’, ENTORNO
+ debe ser el nombre de un entorno existente.
+
+N-ARGUMENTOS
+ Un entero desde 1 a 9 denotando el número de argumentos del nuevo
+ entorno definido. El valor predeterminado es ningún argumento.
+
+PREDETERMINADO
+ Si se especifica, el primer argumento es opcional, y PREDETERMINADO
+ proporciona el valor predeterminado para ese argumento.
+
+ANTES-DEFINICIÓN
+ El texto ampliado en cada aparición de ‘\begin{ENTORNO}’; una
+ construcción en forma ‘#N’ en ANTES-DEFINICIÓN es sustituido por el
+ texto del eNésimo argumento.
+
+DESPUÉS-DEFINICIÓN
+ El texto ampliado de cada aparición de ‘\end{ENTORNO}’. este no
+ debe contener ningún argumento para parámetros.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \newtheorem, Next: \newfont, Prev: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment, Up: Definiciones
+
+13.6 ‘\newtheorem’
+==================
+
+ \newtheorem{NUEVO-ENTORNO}{ETIQUETA}[CON]
+ \newtheorem{NUEVO-ENTORNO}[NUMERADO-COMO]{ETIQUETA}
+
+ Esta instrucción define un entorno parecido a teorema. Argumentos:
+
+NUEVOENTORNO
+ El nombre del nuevo entorno a definir; no debe ser el nombre de un
+ entorno existente o de lo contrario será redefinido.
+
+ETIQUETA
+ El texto a imprimir al inicio del entorno, antes del número. Por
+ ejemplo, ‘Teorema’.
+
+NUMERADO_COMO
+ (Opcional). El nombre de un entorno ya definido tal como teorema;
+
+ (Opcional). El nombre de un entorno ya definido tal como teorema
+ el nuevo entorno será numerado exactamente como NUMERADO_COMO.
+
+CON
+ (Opcional). El nombre de un contador definido previamente, una
+ unidad de seccionado. El nuevo contador de teorema será
+ restablecido al mismo tiempo que el contador CON.
+
+ Cuando menos uno de NUMERADO_COMO y CON se debe especificar, no
+ambos.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \newfont, Next: \protect, Prev: \newtheorem, Up: Definiciones
+
+13.7 ‘\newfont’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \newfont{INSTRUCCIÓN}{NOMBREDETIPO}
+
+ Define una secuencia de control ‘\INSTRUCCIÓN’, misma que no se debe
+haber definido, para hacer que NOMBREDETIPO sea el tipo de letra actual.
+El archivo bloqueado en el sistema es llamado ‘NOMBREDETIPO.tfm’.
+
+ Esta es una instrucción de bajo nivel para configurar el uso de un
+tipo de letra individual. Comúnmente, los tipos de letra se definen a
+través de familias de archivos ‘.fd’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \protect, Prev: \newfont, Up: Definiciones
+
+13.8 ‘\protect’
+===============
+
+Pies de página, saltos de línea, cualquier instrucción que tenga un
+argumento opcional, y muchas más de las así llamadas instrucciones
+“frágiles”. Cuando una instrucción frágil se utiliza en ciertos
+contextos, llamados “argumentos móviles”, estas se deben preceder con
+‘\protect’. Además, algunas instrucciones con argumentos frágiles deben
+tener su propia ‘\protect’.
+
+ Algunos ejemplos de argumentos móviles son ‘\caption’ (*note
+figure::), ‘\thanks’ (*note \maketitle::) y @-expresiones en entornos
+‘tabular’ y ‘array’ (*note tabular::).
+
+ Las instrucciones que no son frágiles se llaman “robustas”. Estas no
+se deben preceder con ‘\protect’.
+
+ Vea también:
+
+<http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html>
+<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect>
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Contadores, Next: Longitudes, Prev: Definiciones, Up: Top
+
+14 Contadores
+*************
+
+Cualquier cosa numerada por LaTeX tiene un contador asociado a ella. El
+nombre del contador es el mismo nombre que el nombre del entorno o
+instrucción que produce el número, salvo las que no comienzan con ‘\’.
+(‘enumi’–‘enumiv’ se utilizan para entornos enumerados anidados). A
+continuación hay una lista de los contadores utilizados en las clases de
+documentos estándar de LaTeX para controlar la numeración.
+
+ part paragraph figure enumi
+ chapter subparagraph table enumii
+ section page footnote enumiii
+ subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+ subsubsection
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol:: Imprimiendo el valor de un contador.
+* \usecounter:: Utiliza un contador especificado en un entorno de lista.
+* \value:: Utiliza el valor de un contador en una expresión.
+* \setcounter:: Establece el valor de un contador.
+* \addtocounter:: Añade un calificador a un contador.
+* \refstepcounter:: Añade un contador, restableciendo los contadores subsidiarios.
+* \stepcounter:: Añade un contador, restableciendo los contadores subsidiarios.
+* \day \month \year:: Valores numéricos de fecha.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Next: \usecounter, Up: Contadores
+
+14.1 ‘\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol’: Imprimiendo Contadores
+==========================================================================
+
+Todas estas instrucciones toman como argumento un solo contador, por
+ejemplo, ‘\alph{enumi}’.
+
+‘\alph’
+ imprime CONTADOR usando letras minúsculas: ‘a’, ‘b’, ...
+
+‘\Alph’
+ utiliza letras mayúsculas: ‘A’, ‘B’, ...
+
+‘\arabic’
+ utiliza números Arábigos: ‘1’, ‘2’, ...
+
+‘\roman’
+ utiliza números romanos en minúsculas: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ...
+
+‘\roman’
+ utiliza números romanos en mayúsculas: ‘I’, ‘II’, ...
+
+‘\fnsymbol’
+ imprime el valor de CONTADOR en una secuencia específica de nueve
+ símbolos (convencionalmente usada para etiquetar notas al pie de
+ página). El valor de CONTADOR debe estar entre 1 y 9 incluido.
+
+ Los símbolos no son compatibles en info principalmente, pero aquí
+ están los nombres:
+ asterix(*) dagger(†) ddagger(‡) section-sign(§) paragraph-sign(¶) parallel(‖)
+ double-asterix(**) double-dagger(††) double-ddagger(‡‡)
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \usecounter, Next: \value, Prev: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Up: Contadores
+
+14.2 ‘\usecounter{CONTADOR}’
+============================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \usecounter{CONTADOR}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\usecounter’ se utiliza en el segundo argumento del
+entorno ‘list’ para especificar el CONTADOR a utilizar para numerar los
+elementos de la lista.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \value, Next: \setcounter, Prev: \usecounter, Up: Contadores
+
+14.3 ‘\value{CONTADOR}’
+=======================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \value{CONTADOR}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\value’ produce el valor de CONTADOR. Esta se puede
+utilizar en cualquier lugar en que LaTeX espera un número, por ejemplo:
+
+ \setcounter{micontador}{3}
+ \addtocounter{micontador}{1}
+ \hspace{\value{micontador}\parindent}
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \setcounter, Next: \addtocounter, Prev: \value, Up: Contadores
+
+14.4 ‘\setcounter{\CONTADOR}{VALOR}’
+====================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \setcounter{CONTADOR}{VALOR}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\setcounter’ fija el valor de CONTADOR al argumento
+VALOR.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \addtocounter, Next: \refstepcounter, Prev: \setcounter, Up: Contadores
+
+14.5 ‘\addtocounter{CONTADOR}{VALOR}’
+=====================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\addtocounter’ incrementa CONTADOR por la cantidad
+especificada por el argumento VALOR, que puede ser un número negativo.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \refstepcounter, Next: \stepcounter, Prev: \addtocounter, Up: Contadores
+
+14.6 ‘\refstepcounter{CONTADOR}’
+================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\refstepcounter’ trabaja de la misma manera que
+‘\stepcounter’ *Note \stepcounter::, excepto que esta además define el
+valor actual de ‘\ref’ para que sea el resultado de ‘\thecounter’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \stepcounter, Next: \day \month \year, Prev: \refstepcounter, Up: Contadores
+
+14.7 ‘\stepcounter{CONTADOR}’
+=============================
+
+La instrucción ‘\stepcounter’ añade uno al CONTADOR y restablece todos
+los contadores subsidiarios.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \day \month \year, Prev: \stepcounter, Up: Contadores
+
+14.8 ‘\day \month \year’: Contadores Predefinidos
+=================================================
+
+LaTeX define contadores para el día del mes (‘\day’, 1–31), mes del año
+(‘\month’, 1–12), y año (‘\year’, Era Común). Al iniciar TeX, estas son
+establecidas a los valores actuales en el sistema donde se está
+ejecutando TeX. Estas no se actualizan conforme al progreso del
+trabajo.
+
+ La instrucción relacionada ‘\today’ produce una cadena de texto que
+representa el día actual (*note \today::).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Longitudes, Next: Haciendo Párrafos, Prev: Contadores, Up: Top
+
+15 Longitudes
+*************
+
+Una ‘longitud’ es una medida de distancia. Muchas instrucciones LaTeX
+toman una longitud como argumento.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \setlength:: Establece el valor de longitud.
+* \addtolength:: Añade una cantidad a longitud.
+* \settodepth:: Establece una longitud a la profundidad de algo más.
+* \settoheight:: Establece la longitud a la altura de algo más.
+* \settowidth:: Establece la longitud a la anchura de alguna otra cosa.
+* Longitudes Predeterminadas:: Longitudes que son, algo sí como, predefinidas.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \setlength, Next: \addtolength, Up: Longitudes
+
+15.1 ‘\setlength{\LARGO}{VALOR}’
+================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\setlength’ fija el valor de \LARGO al argumento VALOR,
+el cual se puede expresar en cualquier unidad que LaTeX entienda, es
+decir, pulgadas (‘in’), milímetros (‘mm’), puntos (‘pt’), puntos grandes
+(‘bp’, etc.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \addtolength, Next: \settodepth, Prev: \setlength, Up: Longitudes
+
+15.2 \addtolength{\LARGO}{CANTIDAD}
+===================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\addtolength’ incrementa la “instrucción de longitud”
+\LARGO por la cantidad especificada en el argumento CANTIDAD, misma que
+puede ser un valor negativo.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \settodepth, Next: \settoheight, Prev: \addtolength, Up: Longitudes
+
+15.3 ‘\settodepth’
+==================
+
+‘\settodepth{\gnat}{texto}’
+
+ La instrucción ‘\settodepth’ fija el valor de una instrucción de
+‘longitud’ igual a la profundidad del argumento ‘texto’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \settoheight, Next: \settowidth, Prev: \settodepth, Up: Longitudes
+
+15.4 ‘\settoheight’
+===================
+
+‘\settoheight{\gnat}{texto}’
+
+ La instrucción ‘\settoheight’ fija el valor de la instrucción de
+‘longitud’ igual a la altura del argumento ‘texto’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \settowidth, Next: Longitudes Predeterminadas, Prev: \settoheight, Up: Longitudes
+
+15.5 ‘\settowidth{\LARGO}{TEXTO}’
+=================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\settowidth’ establece el valor del la instrucción
+\LARGO al valor del argumento TEXTO.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Longitudes Predeterminadas, Prev: \settowidth, Up: Longitudes
+
+15.6 Longitudes Predeterminadas
+===============================
+
+‘\width’
+
+ ‘\height’
+
+ ‘\depth’
+
+ ‘\totalheight’
+
+ Estos parámetros de longitud se pueden utilizar en los argumentos de
+las instrucciones que dibujan cajas (*note Cajas::). Especifican el
+ancho natural, etc., del texto en la caja. ‘\totalheight’ es igual a
+‘\height’ + ‘\depth’. Para hacer una caja con el texto extendido hasta
+el doble del tamaño natural, por ejemplo, digamos
+
+ ‘\makebox[ancho\2]{Consiga una camilla}’
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Haciendo Párrafos, Next: Fórmulas Matemáticas, Prev: Longitudes, Up: Top
+
+16 Haciendo Párrafos
+********************
+
+Un párrafo se termina por medio de una o más líneas completamente en
+blanco —líneas que no contienen incluso un ‘%’. Una línea en blanco no
+debe aparecer donde no se puede iniciar un nuevo párrafo, tal como en
+modo math o en el argumento de una instrucción de seccionado.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \indent:: Sangrando este párrafo.
+* \noindent:: No sangra el siguiente párrafo.
+* \parskip:: Añade un espacio antes de párrafos.
+* Notas al Margen:: Coloca palabras en el margen.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \indent, Next: \noindent, Up: Haciendo Párrafos
+
+16.1 ‘\indent’
+==============
+
+‘\indent’ produce un espacio horizontal donde el ancho es igual la
+longitud de ‘\parindent’, la sangría de un párrafo normal. Esta se
+utiliza para añadir la sangría de párrafos donde esta debería suprimirse
+en otro caso.
+
+ El valor predeterminado para ‘\parindent’ es ‘1em’ en modo de dos
+columnas, de lo contrario ‘15pt’ para documentos de ‘10pt’, ‘17pt’ para
+‘11pt’ y ‘1.5em’ para ‘12pt’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \noindent, Next: \parskip, Prev: \indent, Up: Haciendo Párrafos
+
+16.2 ‘\noindent’
+================
+
+Cuando se utiliza al principio de un párrafo, ‘\noindent’ suprime
+cualquier sangría. Esta no tiene efecto cuando se utiliza en medio de
+un párrafo.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \parskip, Next: Notas al Margen, Prev: \noindent, Up: Haciendo Párrafos
+
+16.3 ‘\parskip’
+===============
+
+‘\parskip’ es una instrucción que preserva la longitud definiendo
+espacio vertical extra añadido antes de cada párrafo. El predeterminado
+es ‘0pt más 1pt’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Notas al Margen, Prev: \parskip, Up: Haciendo Párrafos
+
+16.4 Notas al Margen
+====================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \marginpar[IZQUIERDA]{DERECHA}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\marginpar’ crea una nota en el margen. La primera
+línea de una nota tiene que ser la misma línea base que la línea en el
+texto donde ocurre el ‘\marginpar’.
+
+ Cuando únicamente se especifica el argumento obligatorio RIGHT, el
+texto se deberá colocar
+
+ • en el margen derecho para diseños de un solo lado;
+ • en el margen externo para diseños de dos caras;
+ • en el margen más cercano en diseños de dos columnas.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\reversemarginpar’ coloca las subsecuentes notas al
+margen en el margen (dentro) opuesto. ‘\normalmarginpar’ las coloca en
+la posición predeterminada.
+
+ Cuando se especifican ambos argumentos, se utiliza LEFT para el
+margen izquierdo y se utiliza RIGHT para el margen derecho.
+
+ La primer palabra normalmente no se debe separar con guiones; usted
+puede habilitar la separación silábica con guiones comenzando la nota
+con ‘\hspace{0pt}’.
+
+ Los parámetros que afectan el formato de la nota son:
+
+‘\marginparpush’
+ El espacio mínimo vertical entre notas; el predeterminado es ‘7pt’
+ para documentos de ‘12pt’, de lo contrario ‘5pt’.
+
+‘\marginparsep’
+ Espacio horizontal entre el texto vertical y la nota;
+ predeterminado ‘11pt’ para ‘10pt’ documentos, en otro caso ‘10pt’.
+
+‘\marginparwidth’
+ El ancho de la nota en sí misma; el predeterminado para documentos
+ de un solo lado de ‘10pt’ es ‘90pt’, ‘83pt’ para ‘11pt’ y ‘68pt’
+ para ‘12pt’; ‘17pt’ más en cada caso para documentos de dos caras.
+ En el modo de dos columnas, el predeterminado es ‘48pt’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Fórmulas Matemáticas, Next: Modos, Prev: Haciendo Párrafos, Up: Top
+
+17 Fórmulas Matemáticas
+***********************
+
+Existen tres entornos que ponen a LaTeX en modo math:
+
+‘math’
+ Para fórmulas que aparecerán directamente en el texto.
+‘displaymath’
+ Para fórmulas que aparecerán en su propia línea.
+‘equation’
+ El mismo que el del entorno displaymath salvo que este añade un
+ número de ecuación en el margen derecho.
+
+ El entorno ‘math’ se pude utilizar tanto en párrafos como en modo LR,
+pero los entornos ‘displaymath’ y ‘equation’ se pueden utilizar
+únicamente en modo párrafo. Los entornos ‘math’ y ‘displaymath’ se
+utilizan tan a menudo que tienen las siguientes formas abreviadas:
+
+ \(...\) en lugar de \begin{math}...\end{math}
+ \[...\] en lugar de \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+
+ De hecho, el entorno ‘math’ es como una instrucción que tiene incluso
+una forma abreviada:
+
+ $ ... $ en lugar de \(...\)
+
+ La instrucción ‘\boldmath’ cambia letras y símbolos matemáticos en
+tipo de letra en negrita. Este se utiliza _fuera_ del modo math. Por
+el contrario, la instrucción ‘\unboldmath’ cambia los glifos matemáticos
+para estar en un tipo de letra normal; este también se utiliza _fuera_
+del modo math.
+
+ La declaración ‘\displaystyle’ presiona para que el tamaño y estilo
+de la fórmula sea el de ‘displaymath’, por ejemplo, con limites por
+encima y debajo de sumatorias. Por ejemplo
+ $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Subíndices y Superíndices:: También conocido como exponente o índice.
+* Símbolos Matemáticos:: Varios garabatos matemáticos.
+* Funciones Matemáticas:: Nombres de funciones Matemáticas como sin y exp.
+* Acentos Matemáticos:: Acentos en Matemáticas.
+* Espacios en Modo Math:: Espacios gruesos, medianos, delgados y negativos.
+* Miscelánea Math:: Cosas que no encajan en ninguna otra categoría.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Subíndices y Superíndices, Next: Símbolos Matemáticos, Up: Fórmulas Matemáticas
+
+17.1 Subíndices y Superíndices
+==============================
+
+Para hacer que una expresión exp aparezca como un subíndice, escriba
+‘_{’exp‘}’. Para hacer que exp aparezca como un exponente, escriba
+‘^{’exp‘}’. LaTeX maneja superíndices, subíndices y todas esas cosas de
+manera natural. Incluso hace lo correcto cuando algo tiene tanto un
+subíndice como un superíndice.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Símbolos Matemáticos, Next: Funciones Matemáticas, Prev: Subíndices y Superíndices, Up: Fórmulas Matemáticas
+
+17.2 Símbolos Matemáticos
+=========================
+
+LaTeX proporciona casi cualquier símbolo matemático que muy
+probablemente necesite. Las instrucciones para generarlas se pueden
+utilizar únicamente en modo math. Por ejemplo, si incluye ‘$\pi$’ en su
+archivo fuente, aparecerá el símbolo de pi (\pi) en su salida.
+
+‘\|’
+ \|
+
+‘\aleph’
+ \aleph
+
+‘\alpha’
+ \alpha
+
+‘\amalg’
+ \amalg (operación binaria)
+
+‘\angle’
+ \angle
+
+‘\approx’
+ \approx (relación)
+
+‘\ast’
+ \ast (operación binaria)
+
+‘\asymp’
+ \asymp (relación)
+
+‘\backslash’
+ \ (delimitador)
+
+‘\beta’
+ \beta
+
+‘\bigcap’
+ \bigcap
+
+‘\bigcirc’
+ \bigcirc (operación binaria)
+
+‘\bigcup’
+ \bigcup
+
+‘\bigodot’
+ \bigodot
+
+‘\bigoplus’
+ \bigoplus
+
+‘\bigotimes’
+ \bigotimes
+
+‘\bigtriangledown’
+ \bigtriangledown (operación binaria)
+
+‘\bigtriangleup’
+ \bigtriangleup (operación binaria)
+
+‘\bigsqcup’
+ \bigsqcup
+
+‘\biguplus’
+ \biguplus
+
+‘\bigcap’
+ \bigvee
+
+‘\bigwedge’
+ \bigwedge
+
+‘\bot’
+ \bot
+
+‘\bowtie’
+ \bowtie (relación)
+
+‘\Box’
+ (símbolo de caja cuadrada abierta)
+
+‘\bullet’
+ \bullet (operación binaria)
+
+‘\cap’
+ \cap (operación binaria)
+
+‘\cdot’
+ \cdot (operación binaria)
+
+‘\chi’
+ \chi
+
+‘\circ’
+ \circ (operación binaria)
+
+‘\clubsuit’
+ \clubsuit
+
+‘\cong’
+ \cong (relación)
+
+‘\coprod’
+ \coprod
+
+‘\cup’
+ \cup (operación binaria)
+
+‘\dagger’
+ \dagger (operación binaria)
+
+‘\dashv’
+ \dashv (relación)
+
+‘\ddagger’
+ \dagger (operación binaria)
+
+‘\Delta’
+ \Delta
+
+‘\delta’
+ \delta
+
+‘\Diamond’
+ \diamond más grande
+
+‘\diamond’
+ \diamond (operación binaria)
+
+‘\diamondsuit’
+ \diamondsuit
+
+‘\div’
+ \div (operación binaria)
+
+‘\doteq’
+ \doteq (relación)
+
+‘\downarrow’
+ \downarrow (delimitador)
+
+‘\Downarrow’
+ \Downarrow (delimitador)
+
+‘\ell’
+ \ell
+
+‘\emptyset’
+ \emptyset
+
+‘\epsilon’
+ \epsilon
+
+‘\equiv’
+ \equiv (relación)
+
+‘\eta’
+ \eta
+
+‘\exists’
+ \exists
+
+‘\flat’
+ \flat
+
+‘\forall’
+ \forall
+
+‘\frown’
+ \frown (relacion)
+
+‘\Gamma’
+ \Gamma
+
+‘\gamma’
+ \gamma
+
+‘\ge’
+ \ge
+
+‘\geq’
+ \geq (relación)
+
+‘\gets’
+ \gets
+
+‘\gg’
+ \gg (relación)
+
+‘\hbar’
+ \hbar
+
+‘\heartsuit’
+ \heartsuit
+
+‘\hookleftarrow’
+ \hookleftarrow
+
+‘\hookrightarrow’
+ \hookrightarrow
+
+‘\iff’
+ \iff
+
+‘\Im’
+ \Im
+
+‘\in’
+ \in (relación)
+
+‘\infty’
+ \infty
+
+‘\int’
+ \int
+
+‘\iota’
+ \iota
+
+‘\Join’
+ símbolo de corbata de moño condensado (relación)
+
+‘\kappa’
+ \kappa
+
+‘\Lambda’
+ \Lambda
+
+‘\lambda’
+ \lambda
+
+‘\land’
+ \land
+
+‘\langle’
+ \langle (delimitador)
+
+‘\lbrace’
+ \lbrace (delimitador)
+
+‘\lbrack’
+ \lbrack (delimitador)
+
+‘\lceil’
+ \lceil (delimitador)
+
+‘\le’
+ \le
+
+‘\leadsto’
+
+‘\Leftarrow’
+ \Leftarrow
+
+‘\leftarrow’
+ \leftarrow
+
+‘\leftharpoondown’
+ \leftharpoondown
+
+‘\leftharpoonup’
+ \leftharpoonup
+
+‘\Leftrightarrow’
+ \Leftrightarrow
+
+‘\Leftrightarrow’
+ \Leftrightarrow
+
+‘\leq’
+ \leq (relación)
+
+‘\lfloor’
+ \lfloor (delimitador)
+
+‘\lhd’
+ (flecha apuntando hacia arriba a la izquierda)
+
+‘\ll’
+ \ll (relación)
+
+‘\lnot’
+ \lnot
+
+‘\longleftarrow’
+ \longleftarrow
+
+‘\longleftrightarrow’
+ \longleftrightarrow
+
+‘\longmapsto’
+ \longmapsto
+
+‘\longrightarrow’
+ \longrightarrow
+
+‘\lor’
+ \lor
+
+‘\mapsto’
+ \mapsto
+
+‘\mho’
+
+‘\mid’
+ \mid (relación)
+
+‘\models’
+ \models (relación)
+
+‘\mp’
+ \mp (operación binaria)
+
+‘\mu’
+ \mu
+
+‘\nabla’
+ \nabla
+
+‘\natural’
+ \natural
+
+‘\ne’
+ \ne
+
+‘\nearrow’
+ \nearrow
+
+‘\neg’
+ \neg
+
+‘\neq’
+ \neq (relación)
+
+‘\ni’
+ \ni (relación)
+
+‘\not’
+ Superpone una / al siguiente operador, tal como \not=.
+
+‘\notin’
+ \ni
+
+‘\nu’
+ \nu
+
+‘\nwarrow’
+ \nwarrow
+
+‘\odot’
+ \odot (operación binaria)
+
+‘\oint’
+ \oint
+
+‘\Omega’
+ \Omega
+
+‘\omega’
+ \omega
+
+‘\ominus’
+ \ominus (operación binaria)
+
+‘\oplus’
+ \oplus (operación binaria)
+
+‘\oslash’
+ \oslash (operación binaria)
+
+‘\otimes’
+ \otimes (operación binaria)
+
+‘\owns’
+ \owns
+
+‘\parallel’
+ \parallel (relación)
+
+‘\partial’
+ \partial
+
+‘\perp’
+ \perp (relación)
+
+‘\phi’
+ \phi
+
+‘\Pi’
+ \Pi
+
+‘\pi’
+ \pi
+
+‘\pm’
+ \pm (operación binaria)
+
+‘\prec’
+ \prec (relación)
+
+‘\preceq’
+ \preceq (relación)
+
+‘\prime’
+ \prime
+
+‘\prod’
+ \prod
+
+‘\propto’
+ \propto (relación)
+
+‘\Psi’
+ \Psi
+
+‘\psi’
+ \psi
+
+‘\rangle’
+ \rangle (delimitador)
+
+‘\rbrace’
+ \rbrace (delimitador)
+
+‘\rbrack’
+ \rbrack (delimitador)
+
+‘\rceil’
+ \rceil (delimitador)
+
+‘\Re’
+ \Re
+
+‘\rfloor’
+ \rfloor
+
+‘\rhd’
+ (operación binaria)
+
+‘\rho’
+ \rho
+
+‘\Rightarrow’
+ \Rightarrow
+
+‘\rightarrow’
+ \rightarrow
+
+‘\rightharpoondown’
+ \rightharpoondown
+
+‘\rightharpoonup’
+ \rightharpoonup
+
+‘\rightleftharpoons’
+ \rightleftharpoons
+
+‘\searrow’
+ \searrow
+
+‘\setminus’
+ \setminus (operación binaria)
+
+‘\sharp’
+ \sharp
+
+‘\Sigma’
+ \Sigma
+
+‘\sigma’
+ \sigma
+
+‘\sim’
+ \sim (relación)
+
+‘\simeq’
+ \simeq (relación)
+
+‘\smallint’
+ \smallint
+
+‘\smile’
+ \smile (relación)
+
+‘\spadesuit’
+ \spadesuit
+
+‘\sqcap’
+ \sqcap (operación binaria)
+
+‘\sqcup’
+ \sqcup (operación binaria)
+
+‘\sqsubset’
+ (relación)
+
+‘\sqsubseteq’
+ \sqsubseteq (relación)
+
+‘\sqsupset’
+ (relación)
+
+‘\sqsupseteq’
+ \sqsupseteq (relación)
+
+‘\star’
+ \star (operación binaria)
+
+‘\subset’
+ \subset (relación)
+
+‘\subseteq’
+ \subseteq (relación)
+
+‘\succ’
+ \succ (relación)
+
+‘\succeq’
+ \succeq (relación)
+
+‘\sum’
+ \sum
+
+‘\supset’
+ \supset (relación)
+
+‘\supseteq’
+ \supseteq (relación)
+
+‘\surd’
+ \surd
+
+‘\swarrow’
+ \swarrow
+
+‘\tau’
+ \tau
+
+‘\theta’
+ \theta
+
+‘\times’
+ \times (operación binaria)
+
+‘\to’
+ \to
+
+‘\top’
+ \top
+
+‘\triangle’
+ \triangle
+
+‘\triangleleft’
+ \triangleleft (operación binaria)
+
+‘\triangleright’
+ \triangleright (operación binaria)
+
+‘\unlhd’
+ punta de flecha apuntando hacia la izquierda con una línea debajo
+ (operación binaria)
+
+‘\unrhd’
+ punta de flecha apuntando hacia la derecha con línea debajo
+ (operación binaria)
+
+‘\Uparrow’
+ \Uparrow (delimitador)
+
+‘\uparrow’
+ \uparrow (delimitador)
+
+‘\Updownarrow’
+ \Updownarrow (delimitador)
+
+‘\updownarrow’
+ \updownarrow (delimitador)
+
+‘\uplus’
+ \uplus (operación binaria)
+
+‘\Upsilon’
+ \Upsilon
+
+‘\upsilon’
+ \upsilon
+
+‘\varepsilon’
+ \varepsilon
+
+‘\varphi’
+ \varphi
+
+‘\varpi’
+ \varpi
+
+‘\varrho’
+ \varrho
+
+‘\varsigma’
+ \varsigma
+
+‘\vartheta’
+ \vartheta
+
+‘\vdash’
+ \vdash (relation)
+
+‘\vee’
+ \vee (operación binaria)
+
+‘\Vert’
+ \Vert (delimitador)
+
+‘\vert’
+ \vert (delimitador)
+
+‘\wedge’
+ \wedge (operación binaria)
+
+‘\wp’
+ \wp
+
+‘\wr’
+ \wr (operación binaria)
+
+‘\Xi’
+ \Xi
+
+‘\xi’
+ \xi
+
+‘\zeta’
+ \zeta
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Funciones Matemáticas, Next: Acentos Matemáticos, Prev: Símbolos Matemáticos, Up: Fórmulas Matemáticas
+
+17.3 Funciones Matemáticas
+==========================
+
+Estas instrucciones producen nombres de función romanos en modo math con
+el espaciado adecuado.
+
+‘\arccos’
+ \arccos
+
+‘\arcsin’
+ \arcsin
+
+‘\arctan’
+ \arctan
+
+‘\arg’
+ \arg
+
+‘\bmod’
+ Operador residuo binario (x \bmod y)
+
+‘\cos’
+ \cos
+
+‘\cosh’
+ \cosh
+
+‘\cot’
+ \cos
+
+‘\coth’
+ \cosh
+
+‘\csc’
+ \csc
+
+‘\deg’
+ \deg
+
+‘\det’
+ \deg
+
+‘\dim’
+ \dim
+
+‘\exp’
+ \exp
+
+‘\gcd’
+ \gcd
+
+‘\hom’
+ \hom
+
+‘\inf’
+ \inf
+
+‘\ker’
+ \ker
+
+‘\lg’
+ \lg
+
+‘\lim’
+ \lim
+
+‘\liminf’
+ \liminf
+
+‘\limsup’
+ \limsup
+
+‘\ln’
+ \ln
+
+‘\log’
+ \log
+
+‘\max’
+ \max
+
+‘\min’
+ \min
+
+‘\pmod’
+ residuo entre paréntesis, como en (\pmod 2^n - 1)
+
+‘\Pr’
+ \Pr
+
+‘\sec’
+ \sec
+
+‘\sin’
+ \sin
+
+‘\sinh’
+ \sinh
+
+‘\sup’
+ sup
+
+‘\tan’
+ \tan
+
+‘\tanh’
+ \tanh
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Acentos Matemáticos, Next: Espacios en Modo Math, Prev: Funciones Matemáticas, Up: Fórmulas Matemáticas
+
+17.4 Acentos Matemáticos
+========================
+
+LaTeX proporciona una variedad de instrucciones para producir letras
+acentuadas en matemáticas. Son distintas de los acentos en un texto
+normal (*note Acentos::).
+
+‘\acute’
+ Acento agudo en modo Math: \acute{x}.
+
+‘\bar’
+ Acento barra horizontal (macrón) en modo Math: \bar{x}.
+
+‘\breve’
+ Acento breve en modo Math: \breve{x}.
+
+‘\check’
+ Acento de verificación háček en modo Math: \check{x}.
+
+‘\ddot’
+ Acento diéresis en modo Math: \ddot{x}.
+
+‘\dot’
+ Acento punto superior en modo Math: \dot{x}.
+
+‘\grave’
+ Acento grave en modo Math: \grave{x}.
+
+‘\hat’
+ Acento circunflejo en modo Math: \hat{x}.
+
+‘\imath’
+ i sin punto en modo Math.
+
+‘\jmath’
+ j sin punto en modo Math.
+
+‘\tilde’
+ Acento tilde en modo Math: \tilde{x}.
+
+‘\vec’
+ Símbolo de vector en modo Math: \vec{x}.
+
+‘\widehat’
+ Acento circunflejo amplio en modo Math: \widehat{x+y}.
+
+‘\widetilde’
+ Acento tilde amplia en modo Math: \widetilde{x+y}.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Espacios en Modo Math, Next: Miscelánea Math, Prev: Acentos Matemáticos, Up: Fórmulas Matemáticas
+
+17.5 Espacios en Modo Math
+==========================
+
+En un entorno ‘math’, LaTeX ignora los espacios que usted escriba y
+coloca espacios de acuerdo a las reglas normales para texto matemático.
+Si desea un espaciado diferente, LaTeX proporciona las siguientes
+instrucciones para su uso en modo matemático:
+
+‘\;’
+ Un espacio de grosor (5\over18\,cuádruple).
+‘\:’
+‘\>’
+ Ambos producen un espacio medio (2\over9\,cuádruple).
+‘\,’
+ Un espacio fino (1\over6\,cuádruple); no se limita a modo
+ matemático.
+‘\!’
+ Un espacio fino negativo (-{1\over6}\,cuádruple).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Miscelánea Math, Prev: Espacios en Modo Math, Up: Fórmulas Matemáticas
+
+17.6 Miscelánea Math
+====================
+
+‘\*’
+ Un símbolo de multiplicación “discrecional”, en el que se permiten
+ saltos de línea.
+
+‘\cdots’
+ Puntos suspensivos horizontales con los puntos elevados al centro
+ de la línea.
+
+‘\ddots’
+ Puntos suspensivos en diagonal: \ddots.
+
+‘\frac{num}{den}’
+ Produce la fracción ‘num’ dividida entre ‘den’.
+
+‘\left DELIMITADOR1 ... \right DELIMITADOR2’
+ Los dos delimitadores no necesitan coincidir; ‘.’ actúa como un
+ delimitador nulo, sin producir salida. Los delimitadores son del
+ tamaño de acuerdo a las matemáticas en el medio. Ejemplo: ‘\left(
+ \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]’.
+
+‘\overbrace{TEXTO}’
+ Genera un par de TEXTO más. Por ejemplo, \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k
+ \rm\;veces}.
+
+‘\overline{TEXTO}’
+ Genera una línea horizontal sobre TEXO. Por ejemplo,
+ \overline{x+y}.
+
+‘\sqrt[RAÍZ]{argumento}’
+ Produce la representación de la raíz cuadrada de ARGUMENTO. El
+ argumento opcional RAÍZ determina qué raíz producir. Por ejemplo,
+ la raíz cúbica de ‘x+y’ se escribe como ‘$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$’.
+
+‘\stackrel{TEXTO}{RELACIÓN}’
+ Coloca el TEXTO sobre la RELACIÓN.
+
+ Por ejemplo, ‘\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}’.
+
+‘\underbrace{matemáticas}’
+ Genera MATEMÁTICAS con una llave por debajo.
+
+‘\underline{text}’
+ Provoca que se subraye el TEXTO, el cual bien puede estar en modo
+ math o no. La línea siempre está por debajo del texto, teniendo en
+ cuenta los descendientes.
+
+‘\vdots’
+ Produce puntos suspensivos verticales.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Modos, Next: Estilos de Página, Prev: Fórmulas Matemáticas, Up: Top
+
+18 Modos
+********
+
+Cuando LaTeX está procesando el texto fuente, este siempre está en uno
+de tres modos:
+
+ • Modo Párrafo
+ • Modo Math
+ • Modo de Izquierda a derecha (Left-to-Right), llamado modo LR para
+ abreviar
+
+ LaTeX cambia el modo sólo cuando sube o baja una escala a un
+diferente nivel, aunque no todos los cambios de nivel producen cambios
+de modo. Los cambios de modo sólo se producen al entrar o salir de un
+entorno, o cuando LaTeX está procesando el argumento de determinadas
+instrucciones que producen texto.
+
+ El “modo Párrafo” es el más común; es en el que LaTeX está cuando
+procesa texto ordinario. En ese modo, LaTeX rompe el texto en líneas y
+separa líneas en páginas. LaTeX está en “modo math” cuando está
+generando fórmulas matemáticas. En “modo LR”, como en modo párrafo,
+LaTeX considera que la salida que produce es una cadena de palabras con
+espacios entre ellas. Sin embargo, a diferencia del modo párrafo, LaTeX
+sigue yendo de izquierda a derecha; nunca inicia una nueva línea en modo
+LR. Incluso si usted pone un centenar de palabras en una ‘\mbox’, LaTeX
+mantendrá la composición de izquierda a derecha dentro de una caja
+única, y luego se quejará porque la caja resultante fue demasiado grande
+para caber en la línea.
+
+ LaTeX está en modo LR cuando comienza a hacer una caja con una
+instrucción ‘\mbox’. Usted puede conseguir introducirse en un modo
+diferente dentro de la caja —por ejemplo, usted puede hacerlo entrar en
+el modo matemático para poner una fórmula en la caja. También hay
+varias instrucciones productoras de texto y entornos para hacer una caja
+que ponga a LaTeX en el modo de párrafo. La caja hecha por medio de una
+de estas instrucciones o entornos se llama ‘parbox’. Cuando LaTeX está
+en el modo de párrafo mientras que hace una caja, se dice que está en
+“modo interno de párrafo”. Su modo de párrafo normal, que se inicia
+fuera de él, se llama el “modo de párrafo externo”.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Estilos de Página, Next: Espacios, Prev: Modos, Up: Top
+
+19 Estilos de Página
+********************
+
+La instrucción ‘\documentclass’ determina el tamaño y posición de las
+cabeceras y pies de página. El estilo de página determina lo que sucede
+en ellos.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \maketitle:: Genera una página de título.
+* \pagenumbering:: Fija el estilo utilizado para los números de página.
+* \pagestyle:: Cambia el estilo de las cabeceras/pies de página.
+* \thispagestyle:: Cambiar el estilo de las cabeceras/pies de página para esa página.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \maketitle, Next: \pagenumbering, Up: Estilos de Página
+
+19.1 ‘\maketitle’
+=================
+
+La instrucción ‘\maketitle’ genera un título en una página independiente
+— excepto en la clase ‘article’, donde se coloca el título en la parte
+superior de la primera página. La información utilizada para producir
+el título se obtiene de las siguientes declaraciones:
+
+‘\author{NOMBRE \and NOMBRE2}’
+ La instrucción ‘\author’ declara los autor(es) del documento, donde
+ el argumento es una lista de autores separados por instrucciones
+ ‘\and’. Use ‘\\’ para separar líneas con una única entrada de
+ autor —por ejemplo, para proporcionar las entidades de autor o
+ dirección.
+
+‘\date{TEXTO}’
+ La instrucción ‘\date’ declara el TEXTO para ser la fecha del
+ documento. Sin la instrucción ‘\date’, se utiliza la fecha actual
+ (*note \today::).
+
+‘\thanks{TEXTO}’
+ La instrucción ‘\thanks’ produce un pie de página (‘\footnote’)
+ para el título, normalmente utilizada para reconocimiento de
+ créditos.
+
+‘\title{TEXTO}’
+ La instrucción ‘\title’ declara TEXTO para ser el título del
+ documento. Use ‘\\’ para forzar un salto de línea, de la manera
+ usual.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \pagenumbering, Next: \pagestyle, Prev: \maketitle, Up: Estilos de Página
+
+19.2 ‘\pagenumbering’
+=====================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \pagenumbering{ESTILO}
+
+ Especifica el estilo de los números de página, de acuerdo a ESTILO.
+‘\pagenumbering’ tambien reinicializa le numero de pagína a 1. Los
+valores de ESTILO que se pueden utilizar son por ejemplo::
+
+‘arabic’
+ números arábigos
+‘roman’
+ números romanos en minúscula
+‘Roman’
+ numeros romanos en mayúscula
+‘alph’
+ letras en minúscula
+‘Alph’
+ letras en mayúscula
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \pagestyle, Next: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagenumbering, Up: Estilos de Página
+
+19.3 ‘\pagestyle’
+=================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \pagestyle{ESTILO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\pagestyle’ especifica como se componen
+tipográficamente las cabeceras y pies de página a partir de la página
+actual. Valores para ESTILO:
+
+‘plain’
+ Únicamente un número de página sencillo.
+
+‘empty’
+ Cabeceras y pies de página vacíos, por ejemplo, sin números de
+ página.
+
+‘headings’
+ Coloca encabezados en cada página. El estilo de documento
+ especifica lo que sucede en las cabeceras.
+
+‘myheadings’
+ Cabeceras personalizadas, especificadas via las instrucciones
+ ‘\markboth’ o ‘\markright’.
+
+ Aquí están las descripciones de ‘\markboth’ y ‘\markright’:
+
+‘\markboth{IZQUIERDA}{DERECHA}’
+ Establece ambas cabeceras izquierda y derecha. Una “cabecera a
+ mano izquierda” (IZQUIERDA) es generada por la última instrucción
+ ‘\markboth’ antes del final de la página, mientras que una
+ “cabecera a mano derecha” (DERECHA) es generada por la primera
+ ‘\markboth’ o ‘\markright’ que venga en la página si la hay, de
+ otra manera por la última antes de la página.
+
+‘\markright{DERECHA}’
+ Establece la cabecera de la derecha, dejando la cabecera de la
+ izquierda sin cambios.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagestyle, Up: Estilos de Página
+
+19.4 ‘\thispagestyle{ESTILO}’
+=============================
+
+La instrucción ‘\thispagestyle’ trabaja de la misma manera que la
+instrucción ‘\pagestyle’ (vea la sección previa) excepto que esta
+únicamente cambia el ESTILO de la página actual.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Espacios, Next: Cajas, Prev: Estilos de Página, Up: Top
+
+20 Espacios
+***********
+
+LaTeX tiene muchas formas de producir espacios en blanco (o llenos).
+
+ Otra instrucción que produce espacios es ‘\’ para producir un espacio
+“fino” (por lo general 1/6cuadrático). Se puede utilizar en modo texto,
+pero más a menudo es útil en modo matemático (*note Espacios en Modo
+Math::).
+
+* Menu:
+
+Espacio horizontal
+* \hspace:: Espacio horizontal fijo.
+* \hfill:: Espacio horizontal extensible.
+* \SPACE:: Espacio normal entre palabras.
+* \AT:: Finalizando una frase.
+* \thinspace:: Una sexta parte de una em.
+* \/:: Corrección cursiva por caracteres.
+* \hrulefill:: Regla horizontal extensible.
+* \dotfill:: Puntos horizontales extensibles.
+
+Espacio Vertical
+* \addvspace:: Añadiendo espacio vertical arbitrario si es necesario.
+* \bigskip \medskip \smallskip:: Espacio vertical fijo.
+* \vfill:: Espacio vertical infinitamente extensible.
+* \vspace:: Añadiendo espacio vertical arbitrario.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \hspace, Next: \hfill, Up: Espacios
+
+20.1 ‘\hspace’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \hspace[*]{LONGITUD}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\hspace’ añade espacio horizontal. El argumento
+LENGTH se puede expresar en cualquier término que LaTeX entienda:
+puntos, pulgadas, etc. Esta es la longitud a preservar. Usted puede
+agregar tanto espacios negativos como positivos con una instrucción
+‘\hspace’; agregar espacio negativo es como espacio hacia atrás.
+
+ LaTeX normalmente elimina el espacio horizontal que viene al
+principio o al final de una línea. Para preservar este espacio, use la
+forma opcional con ‘*’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \hfill, Next: \SPACE, Prev: \hspace, Up: Espacios
+
+20.2 ‘\hfill’
+=============
+
+La instrucción ‘\hfill’ produce un “relleno de longitud” que no tiene
+espacio natural sino que se puede extender o reducir en sentido
+horizontal en la medida necesaria.
+
+ El parámetro ‘\fill’ es la misma longitud a rellenar (técnicamente,
+el valor a agregar ‘0pt plus1fill’); es decir, ‘\hspace\fill’ es
+equivalente a ‘\hfill’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \SPACE, Next: \AT, Prev: \hfill, Up: Espacios
+
+20.3 ‘\SPACE’
+=============
+
+La instrucción ‘\ ’ (space) produce un espacio entre palabras normal.
+Es útil después de signos de puntuación que no deben terminar una
+oración. Por ejemplo, ‘Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ es
+fundamental’. Esta también se suele utilizar después de secuencias de
+control, como en ‘\TeX\ es un sistema agradable’.
+
+ En circunstancias normales, ‘\’<tab> y ‘\’<newline> son equivalentes
+a ‘\ ’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \AT, Next: \thinspace, Prev: \SPACE, Up: Espacios
+
+20.4 ‘\@’
+=========
+
+La instrucción ‘\@’ hace que el siguiente carácter de puntuación final
+una declaración incluso si normalmente no es así. Esto se suele
+utilizar después de una letra mayúscula. Aquí están lado a lado
+ejemplos con y sin ‘\@’:
+
+ ... en C\@. Pascal, aunque ...
+ ... en C. Pascal, aunque ...
+
+produce
+
+ ... en C. Pascal, aunque ... ... en C. Pascal, aunque ...
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \thinspace, Next: \/, Prev: \AT, Up: Espacios
+
+20.5 ‘\thinspace’
+=================
+
+‘\thinspace’ produce un espacio inviolable e inextensible que es de un
+1/6 de em. Este es el espacio adecuado para su uso en citas anidadas,
+como en ’”.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \/, Next: \hrulefill, Prev: \thinspace, Up: Espacios
+
+20.6 ‘\/’
+=========
+
+La instrucción ‘\/’ produce una “corrección en cursiva”. Este es un
+pequeño espacio definido por el diseñador de tipografías para un
+carácter determinado, para evitar chocar con el carácter que lo sigue.
+El carácter en cursiva f típicamente tiene un valor de corrección en
+cursiva grande.
+
+ Si el siguiente carácter es un punto o una coma, no es necesario
+insertar una corrección en cursiva, dado que estos símbolos tienen una
+puntuación de muy poca altura. Sin embargo, con punto y coma o dos
+puntos, así como letras normales, puede ayudar. Compare f: f; (en la
+salida TeX, las ‘f’s están separadas correctamente) con f: f;.
+
+ A pesar del nombre, los caracteres latinos también pueden tener una
+corrección en cursiva. Compare pdfTeX (en la TeX salida, hay un pequeño
+espacio después de la ‘f’) con pdfTeX.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \hrulefill, Next: \dotfill, Prev: \/, Up: Espacios
+
+20.7 ‘\hrulefill’
+=================
+
+La instrucción ‘\hrulefill’ produce un “relleno de longitud” el cual se
+puede estrechar o estirar horizontalmente. Este se llenará con una
+regla horizontal.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \dotfill, Next: \addvspace, Prev: \hrulefill, Up: Espacios
+
+20.8 ‘\dotfill’
+===============
+
+La instrucción ‘\dotfill’ produce un “relleno de longitud” la cual se
+rellena con puntos en lugar de sólo espacios en blanco.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \addvspace, Next: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Prev: \dotfill, Up: Espacios
+
+20.9 ‘\addvspace’
+=================
+
+‘\addvspace{longitud}’
+
+ La instrucción ‘\addvspace’ normalmente añade un espacio vertical de
+altura longitud. Sin embargo, si el espacio vertical ya se ha añadido
+al mismo punto en la salida por medio de una instrucción ‘\addvspace’
+anterior, esta instrucción no añade más espacio que el necesario para
+hacer que la longitud natural del espacio vertical total equivalente a
+‘longitud’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Next: \vfill, Prev: \addvspace, Up: Espacios
+
+20.10 ‘\bigskip \medskip \smallskip’
+====================================
+
+Estas instrucciones producen una determinada cantidad de espacio.
+
+‘\bigskip’
+ Al igual que ‘\vspace{bigskipamount}’, normalmente alrededor de un
+ espacio de línea (con estirar y encoger).
+
+‘\medskip’
+ Al igual que ‘\vspace{medskipamount}’, normalmente cerca de la
+ mitad del espacio de una línea (con estirar y encoger).
+
+‘\smallskip’
+ Al igual que ‘\vspace{smallskipamount}’, normalmente alrededor de
+ un cuarto del espacio de una línea (con estirar y encoger).
+
+ Los parámetros ‘\...cantidad’ están determinados por la clase de
+documento.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \vfill, Next: \vspace, Prev: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Up: Espacios
+
+20.11 ‘\vfill’
+==============
+
+La instrucción ‘\vfill’ produce un relleno de longitud (pegado) el cual
+se puede reducir y estirar verticalmente tanto como sea necesario. Este
+es equivalente a ‘\vspace{\fill}’ (*note \hfill::).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \vspace, Prev: \vfill, Up: Espacios
+
+20.12 ‘\vspace[*]{LONGITUD}’
+============================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \vspace[*]{LONGITUD}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\vspace’ añade el espacio vertical LENGTH, es decir,
+un relleno de longitud. LONGITUD puede ser positivo o negativo.
+
+ Normalmente, LaTeX remueve el espacio vertical añadido por ‘\vspace’
+en la parte superior o inferior de una página. Con el argumento
+opcional ‘*’, no se elimina el espacio.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Cajas, Next: Inserciones Especiales, Prev: Espacios, Up: Top
+
+21 Cajas
+********
+
+Todos los parámetros de longitud predeterminados (*note Longitudes
+Predeterminadas::) se pueden utilizar en los argumentos de las
+instrucciones que generan cajas.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \mbox:: Cajas horizontales.
+* \fbox y \framebox:: Coloca un marco alrededor de una caja.
+* lrbox:: Un entorno como ‘\sbox’.
+* \makebox:: Caja, de posición ajustable.
+* \parbox:: Caja con texto en modo párrafo.
+* \raisebox:: Sube o baja el texto.
+* \savebox:: Al igual que ‘\makebox’, pero guarda el texto para utilizarlo posteriormente.
+* \sbox:: Igual que ‘\mbox’, pero guarda el texto para utilizarlo posteriormente.
+* \usebox:: Imprime texto guardado.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \mbox, Next: \fbox y \framebox, Up: Cajas
+
+21.1 ‘\mbox{TEXTO}’
+===================
+
+La instrucción ‘\mbox’ crea una caja lo suficientemente ancha para
+contener el texto creado por sus argumentos. El TEXTO no se separa en
+líneas, por lo tanto este se puede utilizar para prevenir la separación
+silábica.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \fbox y \framebox, Next: lrbox, Prev: \mbox, Up: Cajas
+
+21.2 ‘\fbox’ y ‘\framebox’
+==========================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \fbox{TEXTO}
+ \framebox[ANCHO][POSICIÓN]{TEXTO}
+
+ Las instrucciones ‘\fbox’ y ‘\framebox’ son como ‘\mbox’, excepto que
+estas ponen un marco al rededor del exterior de la caja que se está
+creando.
+
+ Además, la instrucción ‘\framebox’ permite especificar explícitamente
+la anchura de la caja con el argumento opcional WIDTH (una dimensión), y
+la posiciona con el argumento opcional POSICIÓN.
+
+ Ambas instrucciones producen una regla de espesor ‘\fboxrule’
+(predeterminado a ‘.4pt’), y dejan un espacio de ‘\fboxsep’
+(predeterminado a ‘3pt’) entre la regla y el contenido de la caja.
+
+ *Note \framebox (picture)::, para la instrucción ‘\framebox’ en el
+entorno ‘picture’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: lrbox, Next: \makebox, Prev: \fbox y \framebox, Up: Cajas
+
+21.3 ‘lrbox’
+============
+
+‘\begin{lrbox}{instrucción} texto \end{lrbox}’
+
+ Esta es la forma de entorno de ‘\sbox’.
+
+ El texto dentro del entorno se guarda en la caja ‘instrucción’, misma
+que se debe haber declarado con ‘\newsavebox’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \makebox, Next: \parbox, Prev: lrbox, Up: Cajas
+
+21.4 ‘\makebox’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \makebox[ANCHO][POSICIÓN]{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\makebox’ crea una caja lo suficientemente ancha para
+contener el TEXTO especificado. La anchura de la caja es especificada
+por el argumento opcional ANCHO. La posición del texto dentro de la
+caja está determinada por el argumento opcional POSICIÓN, el cual puede
+tomar los siguientes valores:
+
+‘c’
+ Centrado (predeterminado).
+‘l’
+ Alineado a la izquierda
+‘r’
+ Alineado a la derecha
+‘s’
+ Alineado (justificado) a través de ANCHO; TEXTO debe contener
+ espacio elástico para que esto funcione.
+
+ ‘\makebox’ también se utiliza en el entorno picture *note \makebox
+(picture)::.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \parbox, Next: \raisebox, Prev: \makebox, Up: Cajas
+
+21.5 ‘\parbox’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \parbox[POSICIÓN][ALTO][POS-INTERNA]{ANCHO}{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\parbox’ produce una caja cuyo contenido es creado en
+modo ‘paragraph’. Se debe utilizar para hacer una caja de pequeñas
+piezas de texto, sin nada lujoso en el interior. En particular, no debe
+utilizar ningún entorno que genere párrafos dentro de un argumento
+‘\parbox’. Para grandes piezas de texto, incluyendo aquellas que
+contienen un entorno que genera párrafos, debe usar un entorno
+‘minipágina’ (*note minipage::).
+
+ ‘\parbox’ tiene dos argumentos obligatorios:
+
+ANCHO
+ la anchura de parbox;
+TEXTO
+ El texto que va dentro de la parbox.
+
+ El argumento opcional POSICIÓN le permite alinear la línea en la
+parte superior o inferior de parbox con la línea base del texto que lo
+rodea (de manera predeterminada es superior).
+
+ El argumento opcional ALTO reemplaza la altura natural de la caja.
+
+ Al argumento POS-INTERIOR controla la ubicación del texto dentro de
+la caja de la siguiente manera; Si no se especifica, se utiliza
+POSICIÓN.
+
+‘t’
+ El texto es colocado en la parte superior de la caja.
+‘c’
+ El texto se coloca al centro de la caja.
+‘b’
+ El texto se coloca en la parte inferior de la caja.
+‘s’
+ Se extiende verticalmente; el texto debe contener espacio vertical
+ extensible para que esto funcione.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \raisebox, Next: \savebox, Prev: \parbox, Up: Cajas
+
+21.6 ‘\raisebox’
+================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \raisebox{distancia}[ALTO][PROFUNDIDAD]{texto}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\raisebox’ aumenta o disminuye el TEXTO. El primer
+argumento obligatorio especifica a qué altura se va a levantar (o bajar
+si la cantidad es negativa) el TEXTO. El TEXTO mismo es procesado en
+modo LR.
+
+ Los argumentos opcionales ALTO y PROFUNDIDAD son dimensiones. Si se
+especifican, LaTeX trata a TEXTO como una ampliación de una distancia
+determinada sobre la línea base (alto) o bajo (profundidad), omitiendo
+su altura y profundidad natural.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \savebox, Next: \sbox, Prev: \raisebox, Up: Cajas
+
+21.7 ‘\savebox’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \savebox{\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA}[ANCHO][POSICIÓN]{TEXTO}
+
+ Esta instrucción fija la tipografía de TEXTO en una caja al igual que
+‘\makebox’ (*note \makebox::), excepto que el lugar de imprimir la caja
+resultante, esta la guarda en la caja etiquetada \INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA, que
+se debe haber declarado con ‘\newsavebox’ (*note \newsavebox::).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \sbox, Next: \usebox, Prev: \savebox, Up: Cajas
+
+21.8 ‘\sbox{\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA}{TEXTO}’
+======================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \sbox{\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA}{TEXTO}
+
+ ‘\sbox’ escribe el TEXTO en una caja tal como ‘\mbox’ (*note \mbox::)
+excepto que en lugar de incluir la caja resultante en la salida normal,
+esta la guarda en la caja etiquetada \INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA.
+\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA se debió declarar previamente con ‘\newsavebox’ (*note
+\newsavebox::).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \usebox, Prev: \sbox, Up: Cajas
+
+21.9 ‘\usebox{\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA}’
+=================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \usebox{\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA}
+
+ ‘\usebox’ produce la caja guardada más recientemente en el depósito
+\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA por una instrucción ‘\savebox’ (*note \savebox::).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Inserciones Especiales, Next: Dividiendo la Entrada, Prev: Cajas, Up: Top
+
+22 Inserciones Especiales
+*************************
+
+LaTeX proporciona instrucciones para insertar caracteres que tienen un
+significado especial que no corresponde a caracteres simples que usted
+puede escribir.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Caracteres Reservados:: Insertando # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+* Símbolos de Texto:: Insertando en el texto otros símbolos distintos a letras.
+* Acentos:: Insertando acentos.
+* Caracteres no Ingleses:: Insertando otros caracteres no Ingleses.
+* \rule:: Insertando líneas y rectángulos.
+* \today:: Insertando la fecha de hoy.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Caracteres Reservados, Next: Símbolos de Texto, Up: Inserciones Especiales
+
+22.1 Caracteres Reservados
+==========================
+
+Los siguientes caracteres desempeñan un papel especial en LaTeX y se
+llaman “caracteres reservados” o “caracteres especiales”.
+
+ # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+
+ Siempre que escriba en su archivo uno de estos caracteres, LaTeX debe
+hacer algo especial. Si simplemente desea imprimir el carácter en sí
+mismo, incluya un carácter ‘\’ anteponiéndolo a este. Por ejemplo, ‘\$’
+debe producir ‘$’ en su salida.
+
+ Una excepción a esta regla es la ‘\’ misma, debido a que ‘\’ tiene su
+propio significado especial (dependiente del contexto). Una \ romana es
+producida al escribir ‘$\backslash$’ en su archivo, y una ‘\’ de máquina
+de escribir es producida usando ‘\’ en una instrucción verbatim (*note
+verbatim::).
+
+ Además, ‘\~’ y ‘\^’ colocan acentos tilde y circunflejo sobre la
+siguiente letra, como en õ y ô (*note Acentos::); Para obtener una ‘~’ o
+‘^’ independiente, usted puede utilizar una instrucción verbatim.
+
+ Por último, puede acceder a cualquier carácter del tipo de letra
+actual una vez que sepa su número utilizando la instrucción ‘\symbol’.
+Por ejemplo, el carácter de espacio visibles utilizada en la instrucción
+‘\verb*’ tiene el código decimal 32, por lo tanto se puede escribir como
+‘\symbol{32}’.
+
+ También puede especificar números octales con ‘'’ o números
+hexadecimales con ‘"’, por lo que el ejemplo anterior también se podría
+escribir como ‘\symbol{'40}’ o ‘\symbol{"20}’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Símbolos de Texto, Next: Acentos, Prev: Caracteres Reservados, Up: Inserciones Especiales
+
+22.2 Símbolos de Texto
+======================
+
+LaTeX proporciona instrucciones para generar una serie símbolos
+distintos de letras, en el texto. Algunos de estos, especialmente los
+más oscuros, no están disponibles en OT1; posiblemente tenga que cargar
+el paquete ‘textcomp’.
+
+‘\copyright’
+‘\textcopyright’
+ El símbolo de copyright, ©.
+
+‘\dag’
+ El símbolo daga (en texto).
+
+‘\ddag’
+ El símbolo doble daga (en texto).
+
+‘\LaTeX’
+ El logotipo de LaTeX.
+
+‘\LaTeXe’
+ El logotypo de LaTeX2e.
+
+‘\guillemotleft («)’
+‘\guillemotright (»)’
+‘\guilsinglleft (‹)’
+‘\guilsinglright (›)’
+ Comillas tipográficas angulares dobles y simples, utilizadas
+ comúnmente en Francés: «, », ‹, ›.
+
+‘\ldots’
+‘\dots’
+‘\textellipsis’
+ Puntos suspensivos (tres puntos en la línea base): ‘...’. ‘\ldots’
+ y ‘\dots’ también trabajan en modo math.
+
+‘\lq’
+ Comilla izquierda (de apertura): ‘.
+
+‘\P’
+‘\textparagraph’
+ Signo de párrafo (antígrafo).
+
+‘\pounds’
+‘\textsterling’
+ Libras esterlinas en Inglés: £.
+
+‘\quotedblbase („)’
+‘\quotesinglbase (‚)’
+ Simple y dobles comillas en la línea base: „ y ‚.
+
+‘\rq’
+ Comilla derecha (de cierre): ’.
+
+‘\S’
+ Símbolo de sección.
+
+‘\TeX’
+ El logotipo de TeX.
+
+‘\textasciicircum’
+ Circunflejo ASCII: ^.
+
+‘\textasciitilde’
+ Tilde ASCII: ~.
+
+‘\textasteriskcentered’
+ Asterisco centrado: *.
+
+‘\textbackslash’
+ Barra inversa: \.
+
+‘\textbar’
+ Barra Vertical: |.
+
+‘\textbardbl’
+ Doble barra vertical.
+
+‘\textbigcircle’
+ Símbolo círculo grande.
+
+‘\textbraceleft’
+ Llave izquierda: {.
+
+‘\textbraceright’
+ Llave derecha: }.
+
+‘\textbullet’
+ Bala: •.
+
+‘\textcircled{LETRA}’
+ LETRA en un círculo, como en ®.
+
+‘\textcompwordmark’
+‘\textcapitalwordmark’
+‘\textascenderwordmark’
+ Marca de palabra compuesta (invisible). La forma ‘\textcapital...’
+ tiene la tapa del tipo de letra, mientras que la forma
+ ‘\textascender...’ tiene el ascender superior.
+
+‘\textdagger’
+ Daga: \dag.
+
+‘\textdaggerdbl’
+ Daga doble: \ddag.
+
+‘\textdollar (o ‘\$’)’
+ Signo de Dólar: $.
+
+‘\textemdash (o ‘---’)’
+ Em-dash: — (para puntuación).
+
+‘\textendash (o ‘--’)’
+ En-dash: — (para rangos).
+
+‘\texteuro’
+ El Símbolo del Euro: €.
+
+‘\textexclamdown (o ‘!`’)’
+ Signo de exclamación inicial: ¡.
+
+‘\textgreater’
+ Mayor que: >.
+
+‘\textless’
+ Menor que: <.
+
+‘\textleftarrow’
+ Flecha izquierda.
+
+‘\textordfeminine’
+‘\textordmasculine’
+ Símbolos ordinales femenino y masculino: ª, º.
+
+‘\textordfeminine’
+ Símbolo ordinal femenino: ª.
+
+‘\textperiodcentered’
+ Punto centrado: ·.
+
+‘\textquestiondown (o ‘?`’)’
+ Signo de interrogación inicial: ¿.
+
+‘\textquotedblleft (o ‘``’)’
+ Comillas dobles de apertura: “.
+
+‘\textquotedblright (o ‘'’)’
+ Dobles comillas de cierre: ”.
+
+‘\textquoteleft (o ‘`’)’
+ Comilla de apertura simple: ‘.
+
+‘\textquoteright (o ‘'’)’
+ Comilla de cierre simple: ’.
+
+‘\textquotestraightbase’
+‘\textquotestraightdblbase’
+ Líneas rectas simples y dobles en la línea base.
+
+‘\textregistered’
+ Símbolo de marca registrada: ®.
+
+‘\textrightarrow’
+ Flecha hacia la derecha.
+
+‘\textthreequartersemdash’
+ em-dash de “Tres cuartos”, entre en-dash y em-dash.
+
+‘\texttrademark’
+ Símbolo de marca comercial: ™.
+
+‘\texttwelveudash’
+ Xx 12u-.
+
+‘\textunderscore’
+ Subrayado: _.
+
+‘\textvisiblespace’
+ Símbolo de espacio visible.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Acentos, Next: Caracteres no Ingleses, Prev: Símbolos de Texto, Up: Inserciones Especiales
+
+22.3 Acentos
+============
+
+LaTeX tiene un amplio apoyo para muchos de los guiones de idiomas del
+mundo, a través del paquete ‘babel’ y de apoyo relacionados. Esta
+sección no pretende abarcar todas con las que es compatible. Este
+simplemente se limita a enumerar las principales instrucciones LaTeX
+para crear caracteres acentuados.
+
+ Las instrucciones ‘\capital...’ producen formas alternativas para su
+uso con letras mayúsculas. Estas no están disponibles con OT1.
+
+‘\"’
+‘\capitaldieresis’
+ Produce una diéresis, como en ö.
+
+‘\'’
+‘\capitalacute’
+ Produce un acento agudo, como en ó. En el entorno ‘tabbing’,
+ empuja la columna actual a la derecha de la columna anterior (*note
+ tabbing::).
+
+‘\.’
+ Produce un punto como acento sobre la siguiente, como en ȯ.
+
+‘\=’
+‘\capitalmacron’
+ Produce un acento macrón (una barra) sobre el siguiente, como en ō.
+
+‘\^’
+‘\capitalcircumflex’
+ Produce un acento circunflejo (sombrero) sobre la siguiente, como
+ en ô.
+
+‘\`’
+‘\capitalgrave’
+ Produce un acento grave sobre la siguiente, como en ò. En el
+ entorno ‘tabbing’, mueve el siguiente texto hacia el margen derecho
+ (*note tabbing::).
+
+‘\~’
+‘\capitaltilde’
+ Produce una tilde como acento sobre la siguiente, como en ñ.
+
+‘\b’
+ Produce una barra como acento debajo de la siguiente, como en o̲.
+ Vea también ‘\underbar’ a continuación
+
+‘\c’
+‘\capitalcedilla’
+ Produce una cedilla como acento sobre la siguiente, como en ç.
+
+‘\d’
+‘\capitaldotaccent’
+ Produce un círculo como acento sobre la siguiente, como en ọ.
+
+‘\H’
+‘\capitalhungarumlaut’
+ Produce un acento diéresis húngaro sobre la siguiente, como en ő.
+
+‘\i’
+ Produce una i sin punto, como en ‘ı’.
+
+‘\j’
+ Produce una j sin punto, como en ‘j’.
+
+‘\k’
+‘\capitalogonek’
+ Produce una letra con colita, como en ‘ǫ’. No disponible en la
+ codificación OT1.
+
+‘\r’
+‘\capitalring’
+ Produce un anillo como acento, como en ‘o̊’.
+
+‘\t’
+‘\capitaltie’
+‘\newtie’
+‘\capitalnewtie’
+ Produce una atadura con el siguiente como acento, como en ‘oo͡’. La
+ forma ‘\newtie’ está centrada en su caja.
+
+‘\u’
+‘\capitalbreve’
+ Produce un acento breve, como en ‘ŏ’.
+
+‘\underbar’
+ No es exactamente un acento, este produce una barra en el argumento
+ texto. El argumento siempre se procesa en modo horizontal. La
+ barra siempre está en una posición fija en la línea base, por lo
+ que cruza a través de los trazos descendentes. Vea también
+ ‘\underline’ en *note Miscelánea Math::. Vea también ‘\b’ aquí
+ antes
+
+‘\v’
+‘\capitalcaron’
+ Produce un acento háček (anticircunflejo, carón), como en ‘ǒ’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Caracteres no Ingleses, Next: \rule, Prev: Acentos, Up: Inserciones Especiales
+
+22.4 Caracteres no Ingleses
+===========================
+
+Estas son las instrucciones LaTeX básicas para insertar los caracteres
+más usados en idiomas distintos del Inglés.
+
+‘\aa’
+‘\AA’
+ å y Å.
+
+‘\ae’
+‘\AE’
+ æ y Æ.
+
+‘\dh’
+‘\DH’
+ Letra eth islandesa: ð y Ð.
+
+‘\dj’
+‘\DJ’
+ xxxx
+
+‘\ij’
+‘\IJ’
+ ij y IJ (salvo que un poco más juntas que como aparecen aquí).
+
+‘\l’
+‘\L’
+ ł y Ł.
+
+‘\ng’
+‘\NG’
+ xxxx
+
+‘\o’
+‘\O’
+ ø y Ø.
+
+‘\oe’
+‘\OE’
+ œ y Œ.
+
+‘\ss’
+‘\SS’
+ ß y SS.
+
+‘\th’
+‘\TH’
+ Letra espina Islandesa: þ y Þ.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \rule, Next: \today, Prev: Caracteres no Ingleses, Up: Inserciones Especiales
+
+22.5 ‘\rule’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \rule[AUMENTAR]{ANCHO}{ESPESOR}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\rule’ produce “reglas”, que son, líneas o
+rectángulos. Los argumentos son:
+
+AUMENTAR
+ Qué tanto aumentar la regla (opcional).
+
+ANCHO
+ La longitud de la regla (obligatorio).
+
+ESPESOR
+ El espesor de la regla (obligatorio).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \today, Prev: \rule, Up: Inserciones Especiales
+
+22.6 ‘\today’
+=============
+
+La instrucción ‘\today’ produce la fecha de hoy, en formato ‘MES DD,
+AAAA’; por ejemplo, ‘Julio 04 1976’. Utiliza los contadores
+predefinidos ‘\day’, ‘\month’, y ‘\year’ (*note \day \month \year::)
+para hacerlo. No se actualiza cuando se ejecuta el programa.
+
+ El paquete ‘datetime’, entre otros, puede producir una amplia
+variedad de formatos de fecha.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Dividiendo la Entrada, Next: Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada, Prev: Inserciones Especiales, Up: Top
+
+23 Dividiendo la Entrada
+************************
+
+Un documento de gran tamaño requiere una gran cantidad de insumos. En
+lugar de poner toda la entrada en un único archivo de gran tamaño, es
+más eficiente dividirlo en varios más pequeños. Independientemente del
+número de archivos separados que utilice, hay uno que es el archivo
+raíz; este es cuyo nombre se escribe cuando se ejecuta LaTeX.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \include:: Condicionalmente incluye un archivo.
+* \includeonly:: Determina qué archivos serán incluidos.
+* \input:: Incluiye incondicionalmente un archivo.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \include, Next: \includeonly, Up: Dividiendo la Entrada
+
+23.1 ‘\include’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \include{ARCHIVO}
+
+ No hay presente una instrucción ‘\includeonly’, la instrucción
+‘\include’ executa ‘\clearpage’ para iniciar una nueva página (*note
+\clearpage::), entonces lee el ARCHIVO, y luego hace otro ‘\clearpage’.
+
+ Dada una instrucción ‘\includeonly’, las acciones ‘\include’
+únicamente se ejecutan si ARCHIVO está listado como un argumento para
+‘\includeonly’. Consulte la siguiente sección.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\include’ no puede aparecer en el preámbulo o en un
+archivo leído por otra instrucción ‘\include’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \includeonly, Next: \input, Prev: \include, Up: Dividiendo la Entrada
+
+23.2 ‘\includeonly’
+===================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \includeonly{ARCHIVO1,ARCHIVO2,...}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\includeonly’ controla cuales archivos se deben leer
+en subsecuentes instrucciones ‘\include’. La lista de nombres de
+archivo se separa con comas. Cada ARCHIVO debe coincidir exactamente
+con un nombre de archivo especificado en una instrucción ‘\include’ para
+una selección eficaz.
+
+ Esta instrucción únicamente puede aparecer en el preámbulo.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \input, Prev: \includeonly, Up: Dividiendo la Entrada
+
+23.3 ‘\input’
+=============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \input{ARCHIVO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\input’ provoca que el ARCHIVO especificado sea leído
+y procesado, tal como si su contendido se hubiera insertado en ese punto
+en el archivo actual.
+
+ Si ARCHIVO no termina en ‘.tex ’ (por ejemplo, ‘foo’ o ‘foo.bar’),
+primero se intenta con esa extensión (‘foo.tex’ o ‘foo.bar.tex’). Si no
+se encuentra, el ARCHIVO original se intenta con (‘foo’ o ‘foo.bar’).
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada, Next: Cartas, Prev: Dividiendo la Entrada, Up: Top
+
+24 Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada
+***********************************
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Tablas de Contenido::
+* Glosarios::
+* Índices::
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Tablas de Contenido, Next: Glosarios, Up: Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada
+
+24.1 Tablas de Contenido
+========================
+
+Se produce una tabla de contenido con la instrucción ‘\tableofcontents’.
+Usted pone la instrucción adecuada donde desea que aparezca la tabla de
+contenido; LaTeX hace el resto para usted. Una ejecución previa habrá
+generado un archivo ‘.toc’.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\tableofcontents’ produce una sección, pero no inicia
+una nueva página automáticamente. Si desea una nueva página después de
+la tabla de contenido, escriba una instrucción código ‘\newpage’ después
+de la instrucción ‘\tableofcontents’.
+
+ Las instrucciones análogas ‘\listoffigures’ y ‘\listoftables’
+producen una lists de figuras y una lista de tablas, respectivamente.
+Cada una funciona exactamente igual que la tabla de contenido.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\nofiles’ reemplaza estas instrucciones, e _impide_
+que se genere cualquiera de estas listas.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \addcontentsline:: Agrega una entrada a la tabla de contenido, etc.
+* \addtocontents:: Añade texto directamente al archivo de la tabla de contenido, etc.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \addcontentsline, Next: \addtocontents, Up: Tablas de Contenido
+
+24.1.1 \addcontentsline
+-----------------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\addcontentsline’{EXTENSIÓN}{UNDAD}{TEXTO} añade una
+entrada a la lista o tabla donde:
+
+EXTENSIÓN
+ La extensión del archivo en el que se va a escribir la información,
+ por lo general una de: ‘toc’ (tabla de contenido), ‘lof’ (lista de
+ figuras) o ‘lot’ (lista de tablas).
+
+UNIDAD
+ El nombre de la unidad de sección a añadir, normalmente una de las
+ siguientes, coincidiendo con el valor del argumento EXTENSIÓN:
+
+ ‘toc’
+ El nombre de la unidad de sección: ‘part’, ‘chapter’,
+ ‘section’, ‘subsection’, ‘subsubsection’.
+ ‘lof’
+ Para la lista de figuras.
+ ‘lot’
+ Para la lista de tablas.
+
+TEXTO
+ El texto real de la entrada.
+
+ La instrucción que realmente escribe al archivo ‘.EXTENSIÓN’ es la
+instrucción ‘\contentsline{UNDAD}{NOMBRE}’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \addtocontents, Prev: \addcontentsline, Up: Tablas de Contenido
+
+24.1.2 \addtocontents
+---------------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\addtocontents’{EXTENSIÓN}{TEXTO} añade texto (o
+instrucciones de formato) directamente al archivo ‘.EXTENSIÓN’ que
+genera la tabla de contenido o listas de figuras o tablas.
+
+EXTENSIÓN
+ La extensión del archivo en el cual escribir la información: ‘toc’
+ (tabla de contenido), ‘lof’ (lista de figuras) o ‘lot’ (lista de
+ tablas).
+
+TEXTO
+ El texto a escribir.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Glosarios, Next: Índices, Prev: Tablas de Contenido, Up: Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada
+
+24.2 Glosarios
+==============
+
+La instrucción ‘\makeglossary’ habilita la creación de glosarios.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\glossary{TEXTO}’ escribe una entrada en el glosario
+para TEXTO a un archivo auxiliar con la extensión ‘.glo’.
+
+ Específicamente, la instrucción que escribe es
+‘\glossaryentry{TEXTO}{NO-DE-PÁGINA}’, donde NO-DE-PÁGINA es el valor de
+‘\thepage’.
+
+ El paquete ‘glossary’ en CTAN proporciona compatibilidad para
+glosarios más sofisticados.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Índices, Prev: Glosarios, Up: Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada
+
+24.3 Índices
+============
+
+La instrucción ‘\makeindex’ permite la creación de índices. Coloquela
+en el preámbulo.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\index{TEXTO}’ escribe una entrada en el índice para
+TEXTO en un archivo auxiliar con la extensión ‘.idx’.
+
+ Específicamente, la instrucción que escribe la entrada es
+‘\indexentry{TEXTO}{NO-DE-PÁGINA}’, donde NO-DE-PÁGINA es el valor
+actual de ‘\thepage’.
+
+ Para generar una entrada de índice para ‘bar’ que diga ‘Vea foo’,
+utilice una barra vertical: ‘\index{bar|see{foo}}’. Use ‘seealso’ en
+lugar de ‘see’ para producir una entrada ‘Vea también’.
+
+ El texto ‘Vea’ está definido por la macro ‘\seename’, y ‘Vea también’
+por la macro ‘\alsoname’. Estas se pueden redefinir para otros idiomas.
+
+ El archivo ‘.idx’ generado luego es ordenado con una instrucción
+externa, por lo general alguna instrucción ‘makeindex’
+(<http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex>) o (la de múltiples
+idiomas) ‘xindy’ (<http://xindy.sourceforge.net>). Esto resulta en un
+archivo ‘.ind’, que se puede leer para componer tipográficamente el
+índice.
+
+ El índice normalmente se genera con la instrucción ‘\printindex’.
+Esta instrucción está definida en el paquete ‘makeidx’, por lo tanto
+necesita colocar en el preámbulo la instrucción ‘\usepackage{makeidx}’.
+
+ La longitud de relleno ‘\indexspace’ se inserta antes de cada nueva
+letra en el índice impreso; letra en el índice impreso su valor
+predeterminado es ‘10pt plus5pt minus3pt’.
+
+ El paquete ‘showidx’ hace que cada entrada en el índice se muestre en
+el margen de la página donde aparece la entrada. Esto puede ayudar en
+la preparación del índice.
+
+ El paquete ‘multind’ es compatible con múltiples índices. Vea
+también la entrada de este tema en las preguntas frecuentes de TeX, en
+
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind>.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Cartas, Next: Entrada/Salida a la Terminal, Prev: Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada, Up: Top
+
+25 Cartas
+*********
+
+Usted puede utilizar LaTeX para componer tipográficamente cartas, para
+ambas personales y de negocios. La clase de documento ‘letter’ está
+diseñada para hacer una serie de cartas a la vez, aunque se puede hacer
+sólo una si así lo desea.
+
+ Su archivo fuente ‘.tex’ tiene las mismas instrucciones mínimas de
+clase que en cualquier otro documento, es decir, debe tener las
+siguientes instrucciones como mínimo:
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... cartas ...
+ \end{document}
+
+ Cada carta es un entorno ‘letter’, cuyo argumento es el nombre y
+dirección del destinatario. Por ejemplo, usted podría tener:
+
+ \begin{letter}{Sr. José Pérez\\ Calle Princesa N°2345.
+ \\ Edinburgo, EH1 1AA}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+
+ La carta en sí comienza con la instrucción ‘\opening’. Siguiéndole
+el texto de la carta. Este se escribe como una entrada de LaTeX
+ordinaria. Las instrucciones que no tienen sentido en una carta, como
+‘\chapter’, no funcionan. La carta se cierra con una instrucción
+‘\closing’.
+
+ Después de ‘closing’, usted puede colocar material adicional. La
+instrucción ‘\cc’ produce el usual “cc: ...”. También hay una
+instrucción ‘\encl’ similar para una lista de destinatarios. Con ambas
+instrucciones, use ‘\\’ para separar los elementos.
+
+ Estas instrucciones se utilizan con la clase ‘letter’.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \address:: La dirección del remitente.
+* \cc:: La lista Cc (Con copia para).
+* \closing:: Un mensaje de despedida.
+* \encl:: Lista de material adjunto.
+* \location:: La dirección de su organización.
+* \makelabels:: Produce etiquetas de dirección.
+* \name:: Su nombre, para la dirección de retorno.
+* \opening:: Saludando.
+* \ps:: Agrega una posdata.
+* \signature:: Su firma.
+* \startbreaks:: Permite saltos de página.
+* \stopbreaks:: No permite saltos de página.
+* \telephone:: Su número de teléfono.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \address, Next: \cc, Up: Cartas
+
+25.1 \address{DIRECCIÓN-DEL-REMITENTE}
+======================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\address’ especifica la dirección del remitente de la
+carta, como debería aparecer en la carta y el sobre. Separa las líneas
+de la dirección que deben estar separadas por instrucciones ‘\\’.
+
+ Si usted no proporciona una declaración ‘\address’, entonces, se
+aplicará a la carta el formato de copia en papel con el membrete
+estándar de su organización. (*Note Descripción::, para obtener
+detalles sobre la implementación local). Si usted proporciona una
+declaración ‘\address’, entonces, la carta será formateada como una
+carta personal.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \cc, Next: \closing, Prev: \address, Up: Cartas
+
+25.2 ‘\cc’
+==========
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \cc{NOMBRE\\NOMBRE2}
+
+ Produce una lista de NOMBREs a quienes enviar copias de la carta.
+Cada nombre se imprime en una línea separada.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \closing, Next: \encl, Prev: \cc, Up: Cartas
+
+25.3 ‘\closing’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \closing{texto}
+
+ Una carta se cierra con la instrucción ‘\closing’, por ejemplo,
+ \closing{Muy Atentamente,}
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \encl, Next: \location, Prev: \closing, Up: Cartas
+
+25.4 ‘\encl’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \encl{LÍNEA1\\LÍNEA2}
+
+ Declara una lista de más de un documento adjunto.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \location, Next: \makelabels, Prev: \encl, Up: Cartas
+
+25.5 ‘\location’
+================
+
+‘\location{dirección}’
+
+ Esta modifica la dirección estándar de su organización. Esto sólo
+aparece si el estilo de página ‘firstpage’ está seleccionado.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \makelabels, Next: \name, Prev: \location, Up: Cartas
+
+25.6 ‘\makelabels’
+==================
+
+‘\makelabels{número}’
+
+ Si ejecuta esta instrucción en el preámbulo, LaTeX creará una hoja de
+etiquetas con las direcciones. Esta hoja se emitirá antes que las
+cartas.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \name, Next: \opening, Prev: \makelabels, Up: Cartas
+
+25.7 ‘\name’
+============
+
+‘\name{June Davenport}’
+
+ Su nombre, utilizado en la impresión del sobre junto con la dirección
+del remitente.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \opening, Next: \ps, Prev: \name, Up: Cartas
+
+25.8 ‘\opening{TEXTO}’
+======================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \opening{TEXTO}
+
+ Una carta comienza con la instrucción ‘\opening’. El argumento
+obligatorio, TEXTO, es el texto con el que desea iniciar su carta. Por
+ejemplo:
+
+ \opening{Estimado José,}
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \ps, Next: \signature, Prev: \opening, Up: Cartas
+
+25.9 ‘\ps’
+==========
+
+Use la instrucción ‘\ps’ para iniciar una posdata en una carta, después
+de ‘\closing’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \signature, Next: \startbreaks, Prev: \ps, Up: Cartas
+
+25.10 ‘\signature{TEXTO}’
+=========================
+
+Su nombre, como debe aparecer al final de la carta debajo del espacio
+para su firma. ‘\\’ inicia una nueva línea dentro de TEXTO como de
+costumbre.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \startbreaks, Next: \stopbreaks, Prev: \signature, Up: Cartas
+
+25.11 ‘\startbreaks’
+====================
+
+‘\startbreaks’
+
+ Se usa después de una instrucción ‘\stopbreaks’ para permitir de
+nuevo los saltos de página.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \stopbreaks, Next: \telephone, Prev: \startbreaks, Up: Cartas
+
+25.12 ‘\stopbreaks’
+===================
+
+‘\stopbreaks’
+
+ Inhibe saltos de página hasta que aparezca una instrucción
+‘\startbreaks’.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \telephone, Prev: \stopbreaks, Up: Cartas
+
+25.13 ‘\telephone’
+==================
+
+‘\telephone{número}’
+
+ Este es su número de teléfono. Este sólo aparece si el estilo de
+página ‘firstpage’ está seleccionado.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Entrada/Salida a la Terminal, Next: Línea de Órdenes, Prev: Cartas, Up: Top
+
+26 Entrada/Salida a la Terminal
+*******************************
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \typein:: Lee texto desde la terminal.
+* \typeout:: Escribe texto en la terminal.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \typein, Next: \typeout, Up: Entrada/Salida a la Terminal
+
+26.1 ‘\typein[INSTRUCCIÓN]{MENSAJE}’
+====================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \typein[\INSTRUCCIÓN]{MENSAJE}
+
+ ‘\typein’ imprime el MENSAJE en la terminal y provoca que LaTeX se
+detenga y espere para que usted escriba una línea de entrada, terminando
+con “Intro”. Si se omite el argumento opcional \INSTRUCCIÓN, la entrada
+escrita se procesa como si se hubiera incluido en el archivo de entrada
+en lugar de la instrucción ‘\typein’. Si está presente el argumento
+\INSTRUCCIÓN, debe ser el nombre de una instrucción. Este nombre de
+instrucción entonces define o redefine la entrada escrita.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: \typeout, Prev: \typein, Up: Entrada/Salida a la Terminal
+
+26.2 ‘\typeout{MENSAJE}’
+========================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \typeout{MENSAJE}
+
+ Imprime el ‘mensaje’ en la terminal y en el archivo ‘log’. Las
+instrucciones en el ‘mensaje’ que están definidas con ‘\newcommand’ o
+‘\renewcommand’ (entre otras) se sustituyen por su definición antes de
+ser impresas.
+
+ Las reglas habituales de LaTeX para el tratamiento de varios espacios
+como un espacio único e ignorando espacios después de un nombre de
+instrucción también se aplican al ‘mensaje’. Una instrucción ‘\space’
+en ‘mensaje’ provoca la impresión de un espació sencillo,
+independientemente de los espacios circundantes. Una ‘^^J’ en ‘mensaje’
+imprime una nueva línea.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Línea de Órdenes, Next: Plantillas de Documento, Prev: Entrada/Salida a la Terminal, Up: Top
+
+27 Línea de Órdenes
+*******************
+
+La especificación de archivo de entrada indica el archivo al cual
+aplicar formato; TeX usa ‘.tex’ como extensión predeterminada. Si se
+omite el archivo de entrada completamente, TeX acepta entrada desde la
+terminal. Usted especifica opciones de instrucción mediante el
+suministro de una cadena como un parámetro para la instrucción; por
+ejemplo,
+
+ latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
+
+debe procesar ‘foo.tex’ sin hacer una pausa después de cada error.
+
+ Si LaTeX se detiene en medio del documento y le muestra un indicador
+‘*’, está esperando por una entrada. Usted puede escribir ‘\stop’ (e
+Intro) y este terminará el documento prematuramente.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Plantillas de Documento, Next: License translation, Prev: Línea de Órdenes, Up: Top
+
+Apéndice A Plantillas de Documento
+**********************************
+
+Aunque no es material de referencia, tal vez estas plantillas de
+documento serán de utilidad.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Plantilla book::
+* Plantilla beamer::
+* Plantilla tugboat::
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Plantilla book, Next: Plantilla beamer, Up: Plantillas de Documento
+
+A.1 Plantilla ‘book’
+====================
+
+\documentclass{book}
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+\title{Plantilla de Clase Book}
+\author{Autor Alex}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\chapter{Primero}
+Algún texto.
+
+\chapter{Segundo}
+Algún otro texto.
+
+\section{Un subtema}
+El final.
+\end{document}
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Plantilla beamer, Next: Plantilla tugboat, Prev: Plantilla book, Up: Plantillas de Documento
+
+A.2 Plantilla ‘beamer’
+======================
+
+La clase ‘beamer’ crea diapositivas de presentaciones.
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+
+\title{Plantilla de Clase Beamer}
+\author{Autor Alex}
+\date{Julio 31, 2010}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% sin [fragile], cualquier código {verbatim} provoca errores misteriosos.
+\begin{frame}[fragile]
+ \frametitle{Primer Diapositiva}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ ¡Esto está en \verbatim!
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Plantilla tugboat, Prev: Plantilla beamer, Up: Plantillas de Documento
+
+A.3 Plantilla ‘tugboat’
+=======================
+
+‘TUGboat’ es el diario del Grupo de Usuarios de TeX,
+<http://tug.org/TUGboat>.
+
+\documentclass{ltugboat} % para procedimientos ltugproc
+
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{ifpdf}
+\ifpdf
+ \usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,
+ urlcolor=black]{hyperref}
+\else
+ \usepackage{url}
+\fi
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Ejemplo de Articulo Regular \TUB\}
+
+% repetir información para cada autor.
+\author{First Last}
+\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
+\netaddress{user (at) ejemplo dot org}
+\personalURL{http://ejemplo.org/~user/}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% El resumen en ltugboat viene después de \maketitle.
+\begin{abstract}
+Este es un ejemplo del tema de un artículo \TUB{} ordinario.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introducción}
+
+Este es un artículo de ejemplo para \TUB, de
+\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
+
+Recomendamos el paquete graphicx para inclusión de imágenes y el
+paquete hyperref para urls activas (en la salida \acro{PDF}). \TUB\ se
+produce utilizando archivos \acro{PDF} exclusivamente, en la actualidad.
+
+Las clases \texttt{ltug*} proporcionan estas abreviaturas, entre muchas
+otras:
+
+{\small
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
+\BibTeX \CandT \CTAN \DTD \DVItoVDU \HTML
+\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \JoT \LAMSTeX \LaTeXe
+\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \pcMF \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas
+\PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS
+\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG
+\tug \UG \UNIX \VAX \VorTeX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+
+\Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag
+\careof \thinskip
+
+\acro{FRED} -> {\sc fred} % ¡Por favor úselas!
+\cs{fred} -> \fred
+\env{fred} -> \begin{fred}
+\meta{fred} -> <fred>
+\nth{n} -> 1st, 2nd, ...
+\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
+\booktitle{Libro de Fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+}
+
+Para mayor información, consulte el documento en ltubguid:
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat}
+
+Correo electrónico \verb|tugboat@tug.org| si incurre en problemas o tiene
+dudas.
+
+
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain} % recomendamos el estilo de bibliografía plain
+\nocite{book-minimal} % solo hace que la bibliografía no esté vacía
+\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib viene con BibTeX
+
+
+\makesignature % no en ltugproc
+\end{document}
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: License translation, Next: Plantillas de Documento, Prev: Índice de Conceptos, Up: Top
+
+Apéndice B Traducción de la licencia
+************************************
+
+La traducción que sigue es dada únicamente como informaciòn, y no
+reemplaza el texto en inglés dado al principio de este documento.
+
+ Se concede permiso para hacer y distribuir copias literales de este
+manual siempre que el aviso de copyright y esta nota de permiso se
+conserven en todas las copias.
+
+ Se concede permiso para copiar y distribuir versiones modificadas de
+este manual bajo las condiciones para una copia literal, a condición de
+que todo el trabajo derivado resultante se distribuya bajo los términos
+de una nota de permiso idéntica a ésta.
+
+ Se concede permiso para copiar y distribuir traducciones de este
+manual a otro idioma, con las condiciones anteriores para versiones
+modificadas.
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Índice de Conceptos, Next: Índice de Instrucciones, Prev: License translation, Up: Top
+
+Índice de Conceptos
+*******************
+
+
+* Menu:
+
+* * apuntador: Línea de Órdenes. (line 17)
+* \include anidada, no se permite: \include. (line 18)
+* ‘vea’ y ‘vea también’ entradas de índice: Índices. (line 16)
+* accediendo a cualquier carácter del tipo de letra: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 26)
+* acento agudo: Acentos. (line 21)
+* acento agudo, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 11)
+* acento anticircunflejo: Acentos. (line 99)
+* acento barra: Acentos. (line 48)
+* acento barra encima: Acentos. (line 30)
+* acento barra horizontal, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 14)
+* acento barra sobre: Acentos. (line 30)
+* acento breve, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 17)
+* acento cedilla: Acentos. (line 53)
+* acento circunflejo: Acentos. (line 34)
+* acento circunflejo <1>: Acentos. (line 34)
+* acento circunflejo amplio, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 47)
+* acento circunflejo, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 32)
+* acento circunflejo, math <1>: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 32)
+* acento círculo: Acentos. (line 57)
+* acento de verificación, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 20)
+* acento diéresis: Acentos. (line 17)
+* acento diéresis <1>: Acentos. (line 17)
+* acento diéresis húngara: Acentos. (line 61)
+* acento diéresis, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 23)
+* acento grave: Acentos. (line 39)
+* acento grave, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 29)
+* acento háček, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 20)
+* acento macrón: Acentos. (line 30)
+* acento macrón, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 14)
+* acento punto: Acentos. (line 26)
+* acento punto <1>: Acentos. (line 26)
+* acento punto superior, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 26)
+* acento tilde: Acentos. (line 45)
+* acento tilde amplia, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 50)
+* acento tilde, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 41)
+* acentos: Acentos. (line 6)
+* acentos matemáticos: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 6)
+* acentos, matemáticas: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 6)
+* alineando a través de tabulación: tabbing. (line 6)
+* alineando Ecuaciones: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* alineando texto en columnas con tabulaciones: tabbing. (line 6)
+* alineando texto en tablas: tabular. (line 6)
+* ampliando la página actual: \enlargethispage. (line 6)
+* anillo acento: Acentos. (line 76)
+* anticircunflejo acento: Acentos. (line 99)
+* antígrafo o simplemente signo de párrafo: Símbolos de Texto.
+ (line 45)
+* apuntador, *: Línea de Órdenes. (line 17)
+* apéndices, creando: Seccionado. (line 40)
+* archivo .glo: Glosarios. (line 8)
+* archivo .idx: Índices. (line 9)
+* archivo .ind: Índices. (line 23)
+* archivo de entrada: Dividiendo la Entrada.
+ (line 6)
+* argumentos móviles: \protect. (line 6)
+* ascender superior: Símbolos de Texto. (line 100)
+* ASCII circunflejo, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 65)
+* ash: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 11)
+* asterisco centrado, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 71)
+* asterisco, centrado, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 71)
+* atadura con siguiente acento: Acentos. (line 82)
+* autor, para titlepage: \maketitle. (line 12)
+* bala, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 92)
+* bar, vertical, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 77)
+* barra inversa, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 74)
+* barra vertical, doble, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 80)
+* barra vertical, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 77)
+* barra, vertical doble, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 80)
+* bibliografía, creando (automáticamente): Usando BibTeX. (line 6)
+* bibliografía, creando (manualmente): thebibliography. (line 6)
+* bibTeX, usando: Usando BibTeX. (line 6)
+* breve acento: Acentos. (line 87)
+* cajas: Cajas. (line 6)
+* caracteres especiales: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 6)
+* caracteres no Ingleses: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 6)
+* caracteres reservados: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 6)
+* caracteres, acentuados: Acentos. (line 6)
+* caracteres, no Ingleses: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 6)
+* caracteres, reservados: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 6)
+* cargando paquetes adicionales: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 74)
+* cartas: Cartas. (line 6)
+* cartas, iniciando: \opening. (line 6)
+* cartas, terminando: \closing. (line 6)
+* carón acento: Acentos. (line 99)
+* centrar texto, declaración para: \centering. (line 6)
+* centrar texto, entorno para: center. (line 6)
+* cerrando cartas: \closing. (line 6)
+* circunflejo, ASCII, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 65)
+* clases de documento: Clases de Documento. (line 6)
+* clases de documentos: Clases de Documento. (line 6)
+* colita: Acentos. (line 71)
+* comilla angular de apertura: Símbolos de Texto. (line 31)
+* comilla angular de cierre: Símbolos de Texto. (line 31)
+* comilla de apertura: Símbolos de Texto. (line 41)
+* comilla de apertura simple: Símbolos de Texto. (line 154)
+* comilla de cierre: Símbolos de Texto. (line 56)
+* comilla de cierre simple: Símbolos de Texto. (line 157)
+* comilla de cierre, simple: Símbolos de Texto. (line 157)
+* comilla derecha: Símbolos de Texto. (line 56)
+* comilla en línea base, simple y doble: Símbolos de Texto. (line 53)
+* comilla izquierda: Símbolos de Texto. (line 41)
+* comilla izquierda, sola: Símbolos de Texto. (line 154)
+* comilla simple en línea base: Símbolos de Texto. (line 53)
+* comilla, en la línea base (coma): Símbolos de Texto. (line 161)
+* comillas de cierre dobles: Símbolos de Texto. (line 151)
+* comillas de cierre, dobles: Símbolos de Texto. (line 151)
+* comillas dobles de apertura: Símbolos de Texto. (line 148)
+* comillas dobles en línea base: Símbolos de Texto. (line 53)
+* comillas tipográficas angulares: Símbolos de Texto. (line 31)
+* comillas tipográficas angulares simples: Símbolos de Texto. (line 31)
+* comillas tipográficas Francesas: Símbolos de Texto. (line 31)
+* comillas tipográficas simples: Símbolos de Texto. (line 31)
+* comillas tipográficas, Francesas: Símbolos de Texto. (line 31)
+* comillas tipográficas, latinas o angulares: Símbolos de Texto.
+ (line 31)
+* comillastraight quote, base: Símbolos de Texto. (line 161)
+* contadores, configurando: \setcounter. (line 6)
+* contadores, consiguiendo el valor de: \value. (line 6)
+* contadores, definiendo nuevos: \newcounter. (line 6)
+* contadores, una lista de: Contadores. (line 6)
+* creando cartas: Cartas. (line 6)
+* creando imágenes: picture. (line 6)
+* creando tablas: table. (line 6)
+* créditos al pie de página: \maketitle. (line 24)
+* código, composición tipográfica de: verbatim. (line 6)
+* daga doble, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 108)
+* daga, doble, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 108)
+* daga, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 16)
+* daga, en texto <1>: Símbolos de Texto. (line 105)
+* definiciones: Definiciones. (line 6)
+* definición de nuevos tipos de letra: \newfont. (line 6)
+* definiendo nuevos entornos: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* definiendo nuevos teoremas: \newtheorem. (line 6)
+* definiendo una nueva instrucción: \newcommand y \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
+* delimitador nulo: Miscelánea Math. (line 21)
+* descargando flotantes e iniciando una página: \clearpage. (line 6)
+* descripción de LaTeX: Descripción. (line 6)
+* diseño, parámetros de página para: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 6)
+* dividiendo el archivo de entrada: Dividiendo la Entrada.
+ (line 6)
+* dividiendo páginas: Saltos de Página. (line 6)
+* divisas, euro: Símbolos de Texto. (line 120)
+* división de sílabas con guión, definiendo: \hyphenation. (line 6)
+* división silábica, forzando: \- (hyphenation). (line 6)
+* división silábica, impidiendo: \mbox. (line 6)
+* doble barra vertical, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 80)
+* doble daga, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 19)
+* e-dash: Símbolos de Texto. (line 117)
+* ecuaciones, alineando: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* ecuaciones, entornos para: equation. (line 6)
+* ejecutando header y footer: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 6)
+* elementos numerados, especificando contador: \usecounter. (line 6)
+* em-dash: Símbolos de Texto. (line 114)
+* em-dash de tres cuartos: Símbolos de Texto. (line 170)
+* em-dash, tres cuartos: Símbolos de Texto. (line 170)
+* entornos: Entornos. (line 6)
+* entornos, definiendo: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* entrada/salida: Entrada/Salida a la Terminal.
+ (line 6)
+* entrada/salida desde la terminal: Entrada/Salida a la Terminal.
+ (line 6)
+* Equipo del Proyecto LaTeX: Acerca de este documento.
+ (line 6)
+* es-zet letra Alemana: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 47)
+* espacio dentro del modo math: Espacios en Modo Math.
+ (line 6)
+* espacio vertical: \addvspace. (line 6)
+* espacio vertical antes de párrafos: \parskip. (line 6)
+* espacio vertical, insertando: \addvspace. (line 6)
+* espacio visible: \verb. (line 18)
+* espacios: Espacios. (line 6)
+* espina Islandesa: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 51)
+* espina, letra Islandesa: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 51)
+* estilo de encabezado: \pagestyle. (line 6)
+* estilo de numeración de página: \pagenumbering. (line 6)
+* estilo del pie de página: \pagestyle. (line 6)
+* estilos de página: Estilos de Página. (line 6)
+* estilos de texto: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 6)
+* estilos de tipografía: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 6)
+* estilos del tipo de letra: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 6)
+* estilos, página: Estilos de Página. (line 6)
+* eth, letra islandesa: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 19)
+* etiquetas en máquina de escribir en listas: description. (line 18)
+* exclamación, inicial: Símbolos de Texto. (line 123)
+* exponente: Subíndices y Superíndices.
+ (line 6)
+* fecha, para la página de título: \maketitle. (line 19)
+* figuras, en notas al pie: minipage. (line 22)
+* figuras, insertando: figure. (line 6)
+* fijando contadores: \setcounter. (line 6)
+* finalizando e iniciando: Iniciando y Finalizando.
+ (line 6)
+* flecha derecha, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 167)
+* flecha hacia la derecha, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 167)
+* flecha hacia la izquierda, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 132)
+* flecha, izquierda, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 132)
+* footer, parámetros para: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 6)
+* forma con * de instrucciones de seccionado: Seccionado. (line 34)
+* funciones matemáticas: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 6)
+* funciones, matemáticas: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 6)
+* fórmulas en línea: math. (line 6)
+* fórmulas matemáticas: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 6)
+* fórmulas, entornos para: equation. (line 6)
+* fórmulas, matemáticas: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 6)
+* glosarios: Glosarios. (line 6)
+* guión doble, línea recta: Símbolos de Texto. (line 161)
+* haciendo párrafos: Haciendo Párrafos. (line 6)
+* haciendo una página de título: titlepage. (line 6)
+* header, parámetros para: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 6)
+* i sin punto: Acentos. (line 64)
+* i sin punto, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 35)
+* imágenes, creando: picture. (line 6)
+* informes de errores: Acerca de este documento.
+ (line 12)
+* iniciando una nueva página: \newpage. (line 6)
+* iniciando una nueva página y limpiando flotantes: \clearpage.
+ (line 6)
+* iniciando una página a mano derecha: \cleardoublepage. (line 6)
+* iniciando y finalizando: Iniciando y Finalizando.
+ (line 6)
+* insertando figuras: figure. (line 6)
+* Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 6)
+* instrucciones de diseño: Diseño. (line 6)
+* instrucciones de tipo de letra, de bajo nivel: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 6)
+* instrucciones frágiles: \protect. (line 6)
+* instrucciones robustas: \protect. (line 17)
+* instrucciones, definiendo nuevas: \newcommand y \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
+* interlineado doble: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 57)
+* interrogación, inicial: Símbolos de Texto. (line 145)
+* islandés eth: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 19)
+* j sin punto: Acentos. (line 67)
+* j sin punto, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 38)
+* justificación, alineando a la derecha: \raggedright. (line 6)
+* justificación, irregular a la izquierda: \raggedleft. (line 6)
+* justificando texto a la izquierda: \raggedright. (line 6)
+* justificar texto a la derecha, entorno para: flushright. (line 6)
+* justificar texto a la izquierda, entornos para: flushleft. (line 6)
+* Knuth, Donald E.: Acerca de este documento.
+ (line 6)
+* l Polaca: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 31)
+* Lamport, Leslie: Acerca de este documento.
+ (line 6)
+* LaTeX, descripción: Descripción. (line 6)
+* letra en círculo, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 95)
+* letra ij, Neerlandés: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 27)
+* letras caligráficas para math: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 85)
+* letras griegas: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 6)
+* letras S afiladas: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 47)
+* letras script para math: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 85)
+* letras, acentuadas: Acentos. (line 6)
+* letras, no Inglesas: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 6)
+* ligadura ae: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 15)
+* lista de documentos adjuntos: \encl. (line 6)
+* lista de elementos, especificando el contador: \usecounter. (line 6)
+* lista de elementos, numerados: enumerate. (line 6)
+* listas cc, en cartas: \cc. (line 6)
+* listas con viñetas: itemize. (line 6)
+* listas de descripción, creando: description. (line 6)
+* listas de elementos: itemize. (line 6)
+* listas de elementos, genéricas: list. (line 6)
+* listas etiquetadas, creando: description. (line 6)
+* listas no ordenadas: itemize. (line 6)
+* llave de apertura, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 86)
+* llave derecha, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 89)
+* llave, derecha, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 89)
+* llave, izquierda, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 86)
+* Logotipo de LaTeX: Símbolos de Texto. (line 22)
+* Logotipo de LaTeX2e: Símbolos de Texto. (line 25)
+* logotipo de TeX: Símbolos de Texto. (line 62)
+* logotipo, LaTeX: Símbolos de Texto. (line 22)
+* logotipo, LaTeX2e: Símbolos de Texto. (line 25)
+* logotipo, TeX: Símbolos de Texto. (line 62)
+* longitudes predeterminadas: Longitudes Predeterminadas.
+ (line 6)
+* longitudes, añadiendo a: \addtolength. (line 6)
+* longitudes, configurando: \setlength. (line 6)
+* longitudes, definiendo nuevas: \newlength. (line 6)
+* longitudes, definiendo y usando: Longitudes. (line 6)
+* longitudes, predefinidas: Longitudes Predeterminadas.
+ (line 6)
+* línea de órdenes: Línea de Órdenes. (line 6)
+* línea recta de guión doble, base: Símbolos de Texto. (line 161)
+* línea, saltos de: Saltos de Línea. (line 6)
+* líneas en tablas: tabular. (line 6)
+* makeindex programa: Índices. (line 23)
+* marca izquierda, doble: Símbolos de Texto. (line 148)
+* marca palabra compuesta, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 100)
+* matemáticas, negrita: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 71)
+* matrices, matemáticas: array. (line 6)
+* minipage, creando una: minipage. (line 6)
+* miscelánea math: Miscelánea Math. (line 6)
+* modo izquierda-a-derecha: Modos. (line 6)
+* modo lR: Modos. (line 6)
+* modo math: Modos. (line 6)
+* modo math mode, espaciado: Espacios en Modo Math.
+ (line 6)
+* modo math, ingresando al: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 6)
+* modo párrafo: Modos. (line 6)
+* modos: Modos. (line 6)
+* moneda, dólar: Símbolos de Texto. (line 111)
+* mostrando texto citado con sangría de párrafo: quotation. (line 6)
+* mostrando texto citado sin sangría de párrafo: quote. (line 6)
+* multiplicación discrecional: Miscelánea Math. (line 7)
+* máquina de escribir en negrita, evitando: description. (line 18)
+* negrita matemáticas: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 71)
+* notas al margen: Notas al Margen. (line 6)
+* notas al pie en figuras: minipage. (line 22)
+* notas al pie, creando: Notas al Pie. (line 6)
+* notas al pie, símbolos en lugar de números en: Notas al Pie Simbólicas.
+ (line 6)
+* notas en el margen: Notas al Margen. (line 6)
+* nueva línea, comenzando: \\. (line 6)
+* nueva línea, comenzando (modo de párrafo): \newline. (line 6)
+* nueva línea, salida como entrada: \obeycr y \restorecr.
+ (line 6)
+* nueva página, iniciando: \newpage. (line 6)
+* nuevas instrucciones, definiendo: \newcommand y \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
+* número de ecuación, referencias cruzadas: \ref. (line 6)
+* número de figura, referencias cruzadas: \ref. (line 6)
+* número de pie de página, referencias cruzadas: \ref. (line 6)
+* número de página, referencias cruzadas: \pageref. (line 6)
+* número de sección, referencias cruzadas: \ref. (line 6)
+* números de ecuación, omitiendo: eqnarray. (line 20)
+* números de sección, imprimiendo: Seccionado. (line 50)
+* observaciones en el margen: Notas al Margen. (line 6)
+* oe ligadura: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 43)
+* omitiendo, cajas negras: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 29)
+* opciones de clase: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 6)
+* opciones de clase de documento: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 6)
+* opciones globales: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 6)
+* opciones globales <1>: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 81)
+* opciones, clase de documento: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 6)
+* opciones, globales: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 81)
+* ordinales en español, femenino y masculino: Símbolos de Texto.
+ (line 136)
+* ordinales, femenino y masculino: Símbolos de Texto. (line 136)
+* oslash: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 39)
+* paquete datetime: \today. (line 11)
+* paquete float: figure. (line 35)
+* paquete makeidx: Índices. (line 30)
+* paquete multind: Índices. (line 42)
+* paquete setspace: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 57)
+* paquete showidx: Índices. (line 38)
+* paquetes, cargando: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 74)
+* parámetros de footnote: Parámetros para Footnote.
+ (line 6)
+* parámetros para el diseño de página: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 6)
+* parámetros, diseño de página: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 6)
+* parámetros, para footnote: Parámetros para Footnote.
+ (line 6)
+* plantillas de documentos: Plantillas de Documento.
+ (line 6)
+* poesía, un entorno para: verse. (line 6)
+* posdata, en cartas: \ps. (line 6)
+* preámbulo, definido: Iniciando y Finalizando.
+ (line 17)
+* produce dos columnas: \twocolumn. (line 6)
+* produce una columna: \onecolumn. (line 6)
+* programas de ordenador, composición tipográfica: verbatim. (line 6)
+* punto centrado, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 142)
+* punto superior acento, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 26)
+* punto, centrado, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 142)
+* puntos suspensivos: Símbolos de Texto. (line 37)
+* página de título, creando la: titlepage. (line 6)
+* párrafos: Haciendo Párrafos. (line 6)
+* redefiniendo entornos: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* reducción, omitiendo vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 6)
+* referencias cruzadas: Referencias Cruzadas.
+ (line 6)
+* referencias cruzadas con número de página: \pageref. (line 6)
+* referencias cruzadas, simbólicas: \ref. (line 6)
+* resúmenes: abstract. (line 6)
+* salto de página: Saltos de Página. (line 6)
+* saltos de línea: Saltos de Línea. (line 6)
+* saltos de línea, evitando: \linebreak y \nolinebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* saltos de línea, forzando: \linebreak y \nolinebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* saltos de página, evitando: \pagebreak y \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* saltos de página, forzando: \pagebreak y \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* sangría de párrafos, en minipage: minipage. (line 18)
+* sangría de párrafos, en minipage <1>: minipage. (line 18)
+* sangría, forzando la: \indent. (line 6)
+* sangría, suprimiendo la: \noindent. (line 6)
+* sangrías de párrafo en texto citado: quotation. (line 6)
+* sangrías de párrafo en texto citado, omitiendo: quote. (line 6)
+* seccionado: Seccionado. (line 6)
+* separación de línea, forzando: \\. (line 6)
+* signo de dólar: Símbolos de Texto. (line 111)
+* siguiendo el estilo de encabezado y pie de página: \pagestyle.
+ (line 6)
+* simulando texto escrito: verbatim. (line 6)
+* subrayado: Acentos. (line 90)
+* subrayado, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 179)
+* subíndice: Subíndices y Superíndices.
+ (line 6)
+* superíndice: Subíndices y Superíndices.
+ (line 6)
+* símbolo bala: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 87)
+* símbolo círculo grande, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 83)
+* símbolo de copyright: Símbolos de Texto. (line 13)
+* símbolo de círculo, grande, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 83)
+* símbolo de espacio visible, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 182)
+* símbolo de libra esterlina: Símbolos de Texto. (line 49)
+* símbolo de libra esterlina <1>: Símbolos de Texto. (line 49)
+* símbolo de marca comercial: Símbolos de Texto. (line 173)
+* símbolo de marca registrada: Símbolos de Texto. (line 164)
+* símbolo de multiplicación, con salto de línea discrecional: Miscelánea Math.
+ (line 7)
+* símbolo de párrafo: Símbolos de Texto. (line 45)
+* símbolo de sección: Símbolos de Texto. (line 59)
+* símbolo de vector, math: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 44)
+* símbolo del euro: Símbolos de Texto. (line 120)
+* símbolo femenino ordinal: Símbolos de Texto. (line 139)
+* símbolo mayor que, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 126)
+* símbolo menor que, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 129)
+* Símbolo ordinal femenino: Símbolos de Texto. (line 136)
+* símbolo ordinal masculino: Símbolos de Texto. (line 136)
+* símbolos de texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 6)
+* símbolos matemáticos: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 6)
+* símbolos, matemáticos: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 6)
+* tabla de contenido, agregando manualmente: \addcontentsline.
+ (line 6)
+* tabla de contenido, creando: Tablas de Contenido. (line 6)
+* tablas, creando: table. (line 6)
+* tabulaciones, utilizando: tabbing. (line 6)
+* tamaño del texto: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 6)
+* tamaños del tipo de letra: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 6)
+* tamaños del tipo de letra <1>: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 6)
+* tapa superior: Símbolos de Texto. (line 100)
+* teoremas, composición tipográfica de: theorem. (line 6)
+* teoremas, definiendo: \newtheorem. (line 6)
+* texto citado con sangría de párrafo, mostrando: quotation. (line 6)
+* texto citado sin sangría de párrafo, mostrando: quote. (line 6)
+* texto escrito, simulando: verbatim. (line 6)
+* texto irregular a la derecha: \raggedright. (line 6)
+* texto irregular a la derecha, entorno para: flushleft. (line 6)
+* texto irregular a la izquierda: \raggedleft. (line 6)
+* texto irregular a la izquierda, entorno para: flushright. (line 6)
+* texto justificado a la derecha: \raggedleft. (line 6)
+* texto literal: verbatim. (line 6)
+* texto literal, en línea: \verb. (line 6)
+* texto multicolumna: \twocolumn. (line 6)
+* thanks, para titlepage: \maketitle. (line 24)
+* tilde ASCII, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 68)
+* tilde, ASCII, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 68)
+* tipo de letra cursiva: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 91)
+* tipo de letra de ancho fijo: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 106)
+* tipo de letra de máquina de escribir: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 106)
+* tipo de letra monoespacio: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 106)
+* tipo de letra negrita: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 82)
+* tipo de letra oblicua: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 103)
+* tipo de letra oblicua <1>: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 103)
+* tipo de letra romana: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 94)
+* tipo de letra sans serif: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 100)
+* tipo de letra versales: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 97)
+* Tipos de Letra: Tipos de Letra. (line 6)
+* tipos de letra: Tipos de Letra. (line 6)
+* tipos de letra, nuevas instrucciones para: \newfont. (line 6)
+* title, para titlepage: \maketitle. (line 29)
+* títulos, haciendo: \maketitle. (line 6)
+* usando BibTeX: Usando BibTeX. (line 6)
+* variables, una lista de: Contadores. (line 6)
+* xindy programa: Índices. (line 23)
+* Énfasis: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 33)
+* énfasis: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 88)
+* índices: Índices. (line 6)
+
+
+File: latex2e-es.info, Node: Índice de Instrucciones, Prev: Índice de Conceptos, Up: Top
+
+Índice de Instrucciones
+***********************
+
+
+* Menu:
+
+* $: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 24)
+* @{...}: array. (line 31)
+* \" (acento diéresis): Acentos. (line 17)
+* \#: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 11)
+* \$: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 11)
+* \%: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 11)
+* \&: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 11)
+* \' (acento agudo): Acentos. (line 21)
+* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 50)
+* \(: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 16)
+* \): Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 16)
+* \*: Miscelánea Math. (line 6)
+* \+: tabbing. (line 40)
+* \,: Espacios en Modo Math.
+ (line 17)
+* \-: tabbing. (line 45)
+* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 6)
+* \. (acento punto encima): Acentos. (line 26)
+* \/: \/. (line 6)
+* \:: Espacios en Modo Math.
+ (line 15)
+* \;: Espacios en Modo Math.
+ (line 12)
+* \<: tabbing. (line 35)
+* \= (acento macrón): Acentos. (line 30)
+* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 29)
+* \>: tabbing. (line 33)
+* \> <1>: Espacios en Modo Math.
+ (line 15)
+* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 32)
+* \@: \AT. (line 6)
+* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 65)
+* \a' (acento agudo en tabulación): tabbing. (line 66)
+* \a= (acento macrón en tabbing): tabbing. (line 66)
+* \aa (å): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 11)
+* \AA (Å): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 11)
+* \acute: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 10)
+* \addcontentsline{EXTO}{UNIDAD}{TEXTO}: \addcontentsline. (line 6)
+* \address: \address. (line 6)
+* \addtocontents{EXTRA}{TEXTO}: \addtocontents. (line 6)
+* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 6)
+* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 6)
+* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 6)
+* \ae (æ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 15)
+* \AE (Æ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 15)
+* \aleph: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 14)
+* \alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 9)
+* \Alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 12)
+* \alpha: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 17)
+* \alsoname: Índices. (line 20)
+* \amalg: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 20)
+* \and para \author: \maketitle. (line 12)
+* \angle: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 23)
+* \appendix: Seccionado. (line 40)
+* \approx: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 26)
+* \arabic: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 15)
+* \arccos: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 9)
+* \arcsin: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 12)
+* \arctan: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 15)
+* \arg: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 18)
+* \arraycolsep: array. (line 43)
+* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 98)
+* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 102)
+* \ast: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 29)
+* \asymp: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 32)
+* \author{NOMBRE \and NOMBRE2}: \maketitle. (line 11)
+* \a` (acento grave en tabulación): tabbing. (line 66)
+* \b (acento barra): Acentos. (line 48)
+* \backslash: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 35)
+* \backslash <1>: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 16)
+* \bar: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 13)
+* \baselineskip: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 50)
+* \baselinestretch: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 57)
+* \begin: Entornos. (line 6)
+* \beta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 38)
+* \bf: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 81)
+* \bfseries: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 39)
+* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 6)
+* \bibliography: Usando BibTeX. (line 6)
+* \bibliographystyle: Usando BibTeX. (line 6)
+* \bigcap: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 41)
+* \bigcap <1>: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 71)
+* \bigcirc: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 44)
+* \bigcup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 47)
+* \bigodot: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 50)
+* \bigoplus: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 53)
+* \bigotimes: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 56)
+* \bigskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 9)
+* \bigskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 9)
+* \bigsqcup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 65)
+* \bigtriangledown: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 59)
+* \bigtriangleup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 62)
+* \biguplus: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 68)
+* \bigwedge: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 74)
+* \bmod: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 21)
+* \boldmath: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 29)
+* \bot: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 77)
+* \bottomfraction: figure. (line 57)
+* \bowtie: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 80)
+* \Box: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 83)
+* \breve: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 16)
+* \bullet: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 86)
+* \c (acento cedilla): Acentos. (line 53)
+* \cal: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 84)
+* \cap: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 89)
+* \capitalacute: Acentos. (line 21)
+* \capitalbreve: Acentos. (line 87)
+* \capitalcaron: Acentos. (line 99)
+* \capitalcedilla: Acentos. (line 53)
+* \capitalcircumflex: Acentos. (line 34)
+* \capitaldieresis: Acentos. (line 17)
+* \capitaldotaccent: Acentos. (line 57)
+* \capitalgrave: Acentos. (line 39)
+* \capitalhungarumlaut: Acentos. (line 61)
+* \capitalmacron: Acentos. (line 30)
+* \capitalnewtie: Acentos. (line 82)
+* \capitalogonek: Acentos. (line 71)
+* \capitalring: Acentos. (line 76)
+* \capitaltie: Acentos. (line 82)
+* \capitaltilde: Acentos. (line 45)
+* \caption: figure. (line 52)
+* \cc: \cc. (line 6)
+* \cdot: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 92)
+* \cdots: Miscelánea Math. (line 10)
+* \centering: \centering. (line 6)
+* \chapter: Seccionado. (line 10)
+* \check: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 19)
+* \chi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 95)
+* \circ: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 98)
+* \circle: \circle. (line 6)
+* \cite: \cite. (line 6)
+* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 6)
+* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 6)
+* \cline: \cline. (line 6)
+* \closing: \closing. (line 6)
+* \clubsuit: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 101)
+* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 18)
+* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 21)
+* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 25)
+* \cong: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 104)
+* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 29)
+* \coprod: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 107)
+* \copyright: Símbolos de Texto. (line 11)
+* \cos: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 24)
+* \cosh: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 27)
+* \cot: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 30)
+* \coth: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 33)
+* \csc: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 36)
+* \cup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 110)
+* \d (acento círculo): Acentos. (line 57)
+* \dag: Símbolos de Texto. (line 15)
+* \dagger: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 113)
+* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 6)
+* \dashv: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 116)
+* \date{TEXTO}: \maketitle. (line 18)
+* \day: \day \month \year. (line 6)
+* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 38)
+* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 43)
+* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 49)
+* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 32)
+* \ddag: Símbolos de Texto. (line 18)
+* \ddagger: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 119)
+* \ddot: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 22)
+* \ddots: Miscelánea Math. (line 14)
+* \deg: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 39)
+* \Delta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 122)
+* \delta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 125)
+* \depth: Longitudes Predeterminadas.
+ (line 10)
+* \det: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 42)
+* \dh (æ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 19)
+* \DH (Æ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 19)
+* \Diamond: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 128)
+* \diamond: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 131)
+* \diamondsuit: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 134)
+* \dim: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 45)
+* \displaystyle: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 35)
+* \div: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 137)
+* \dj: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 23)
+* \DJ: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 23)
+* \documentclass: Clases de Documento. (line 6)
+* \dot: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 25)
+* \doteq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 140)
+* \dotfill: \dotfill. (line 6)
+* \dots: Símbolos de Texto. (line 35)
+* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 106)
+* \downarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 143)
+* \Downarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 146)
+* \ell: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 149)
+* \em: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 87)
+* \emph: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 33)
+* \emptyset: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 152)
+* \encl: \encl. (line 6)
+* \end: Entornos. (line 6)
+* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6)
+* \enumi: enumerate. (line 31)
+* \enumii: enumerate. (line 31)
+* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 31)
+* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 31)
+* \epsilon: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 155)
+* \equiv: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 158)
+* \eta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 161)
+* \evensidemargin: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 54)
+* \exists: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 164)
+* \exp: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 48)
+* \fbox: \fbox y \framebox. (line 6)
+* \fboxrule: \framebox (picture). (line 14)
+* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox y \framebox. (line 19)
+* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture). (line 14)
+* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox y \framebox. (line 19)
+* \fill: \hfill. (line 10)
+* \flat: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 167)
+* \floatpagefraction: figure. (line 60)
+* \floatsep: figure. (line 64)
+* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 6)
+* \fnsymbol: Notas al Pie Simbólicas.
+ (line 11)
+* \fnsymbol <1>: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 24)
+* \fnsymbol, y notas al pie: Notas al Pie Simbólicas.
+ (line 11)
+* \fontencoding: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 11)
+* \fontfamily: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 15)
+* \fontseries: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 25)
+* \fontshape: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 37)
+* \fontsize: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 50)
+* \footnote: \footnote. (line 6)
+* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 6)
+* \footnoterule: Parámetros para Footnote.
+ (line 6)
+* \footnotesep: Parámetros para Footnote.
+ (line 12)
+* \footnotesize: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 12)
+* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 6)
+* \footskip: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 16)
+* \forall: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 170)
+* \frac: Miscelánea Math. (line 18)
+* \frac{num}{den}: Miscelánea Math. (line 17)
+* \frame: \frame. (line 6)
+* \framebox: \framebox (picture). (line 6)
+* \framebox <1>: \fbox y \framebox. (line 6)
+* \frown: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 173)
+* \fussy: \fussy. (line 6)
+* \Gamma: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 176)
+* \gamma: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 179)
+* \gcd: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 51)
+* \ge: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 182)
+* \geq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 185)
+* \gets: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 188)
+* \gg: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 191)
+* \glossary: Glosarios. (line 8)
+* \glossaryentry: Glosarios. (line 11)
+* \grave: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 28)
+* \guillemotleft («): Símbolos de Texto. (line 27)
+* \guillemotright (»): Símbolos de Texto. (line 28)
+* \guilsinglleft (‹): Símbolos de Texto. (line 29)
+* \guilsinglright (›): Símbolos de Texto. (line 30)
+* \H (acento diéresis Húngara): Acentos. (line 61)
+* \hat: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 31)
+* \hbar: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 194)
+* \headheight: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 6)
+* \headsep: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 11)
+* \heartsuit: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 197)
+* \height: Longitudes Predeterminadas.
+ (line 8)
+* \hfill: \hfill. (line 6)
+* \hline: \hline. (line 6)
+* \hom: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 54)
+* \hookleftarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 200)
+* \hookrightarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 203)
+* \hrulefill: \hrulefill. (line 6)
+* \hspace: \hspace. (line 6)
+* \huge: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 12)
+* \Huge: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 12)
+* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6)
+* \i (i sin punto): Acentos. (line 64)
+* \iff: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 206)
+* \ij (ij): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 27)
+* \IJ (IJ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 27)
+* \Im: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 209)
+* \imath: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 34)
+* \in: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 212)
+* \include: \include. (line 6)
+* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 6)
+* \indent: \indent. (line 6)
+* \index: Índices. (line 9)
+* \indexentry: Índices. (line 12)
+* \inf: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 57)
+* \infty: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 215)
+* \input: \input. (line 6)
+* \int: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 218)
+* \intextsep: figure. (line 68)
+* \iota: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 221)
+* \it: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 90)
+* \item: description. (line 14)
+* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 20)
+* \item <2>: itemize. (line 6)
+* \itemindent: itemize. (line 51)
+* \itemsep: itemize. (line 76)
+* \itshape: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 30)
+* \j (j sin punto): Acentos. (line 67)
+* \jmath: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 37)
+* \Join: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 224)
+* \k (colita —ogonek en polaco): Acentos. (line 71)
+* \kappa: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 227)
+* \ker: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 60)
+* \kill: tabbing. (line 70)
+* \l (ł): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 31)
+* \L (Ł): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 31)
+* \label: \label. (line 6)
+* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 35)
+* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 35)
+* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 35)
+* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 35)
+* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 30)
+* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 30)
+* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 30)
+* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 30)
+* \labelsep: itemize. (line 55)
+* \labelwidth: itemize. (line 59)
+* \Lambda: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 230)
+* \lambda: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 233)
+* \land: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 236)
+* \langle: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 239)
+* \large: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 12)
+* \Large: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 12)
+* \LARGE: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 12)
+* \LaTeX: Símbolos de Texto. (line 21)
+* \LaTeXe: Símbolos de Texto. (line 24)
+* \lbrace: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 242)
+* \lbrack: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 245)
+* \lceil: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 248)
+* \ldots: Símbolos de Texto. (line 34)
+* \le: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 251)
+* \leadsto: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 254)
+* \left DELIMITADOR1 ... \right DELIMITADOR2: Miscelánea Math.
+ (line 20)
+* \Leftarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 256)
+* \leftarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 259)
+* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 26)
+* \leftharpoondown: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 262)
+* \leftharpoonup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 265)
+* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 37)
+* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 37)
+* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 37)
+* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 37)
+* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 37)
+* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 37)
+* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 37)
+* \Leftrightarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 268)
+* \Leftrightarrow <1>: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 271)
+* \leq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 274)
+* \lfloor: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 277)
+* \lg: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 63)
+* \lhd: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 280)
+* \lim: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 66)
+* \liminf: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 69)
+* \limsup: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 72)
+* \line: \line. (line 6)
+* \linebreak: \linebreak y \nolinebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* \linespread: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 65)
+* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 6)
+* \linewidth: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 21)
+* \listoffigures: Tablas de Contenido. (line 16)
+* \listoftables: Tablas de Contenido. (line 16)
+* \listparindent: itemize. (line 63)
+* \ll: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 283)
+* \ln: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 75)
+* \lnot: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 286)
+* \location: \location. (line 6)
+* \log: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 78)
+* \longleftarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 289)
+* \longleftrightarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 292)
+* \longmapsto: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 295)
+* \longrightarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 298)
+* \lor: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 301)
+* \lq: Símbolos de Texto. (line 40)
+* \makebox: \makebox. (line 6)
+* \makebox (picture): \makebox (picture). (line 6)
+* \makeglossary: Glosarios. (line 6)
+* \makeindex: Índices. (line 6)
+* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 6)
+* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 6)
+* \mapsto: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 304)
+* \marginpar: Notas al Margen. (line 6)
+* \marginparpush: Notas al Margen. (line 34)
+* \marginparsep: Notas al Margen. (line 38)
+* \marginparwidth: Notas al Margen. (line 42)
+* \markboth{IZQUIERDA}{DERECHA}: \pagestyle. (line 31)
+* \markright{DERECHA}: \pagestyle. (line 39)
+* \mathbf: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 55)
+* \mathcal: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 69)
+* \mathnormal: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 66)
+* \mathrm: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 53)
+* \mathsf: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 57)
+* \mathtt: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 59)
+* \mathversion: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 71)
+* \max: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 81)
+* \mbox: \mbox. (line 6)
+* \mdseries: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 36)
+* \medskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 13)
+* \medskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 13)
+* \mho: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 307)
+* \mid: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 309)
+* \min: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 84)
+* \models: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 312)
+* \month: \day \month \year. (line 6)
+* \mp: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 315)
+* \mu: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 318)
+* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 6)
+* \multiput: \multiput. (line 6)
+* \nabla: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 321)
+* \name: \name. (line 6)
+* \natural: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 324)
+* \ne: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 327)
+* \nearrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 330)
+* \neg: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 333)
+* \neq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 336)
+* \newcommand: \newcommand y \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
+* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 6)
+* \newenvironment: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* \newfont: \newfont. (line 6)
+* \newlength: \newlength. (line 6)
+* \newline: \newline. (line 6)
+* \NEWLINE: \SPACE. (line 6)
+* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6)
+* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 6)
+* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 6)
+* \newtie: Acentos. (line 82)
+* \ng: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 35)
+* \NG: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 35)
+* \ni: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 339)
+* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6)
+* \nofiles: Tablas de Contenido. (line 20)
+* \noindent: \noindent. (line 6)
+* \nolinebreak: \linebreak y \nolinebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 20)
+* \nopagebreak: \pagebreak y \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* \normalfont: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 51)
+* \normalmarginpar: Notas al Margen. (line 21)
+* \normalsize: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 12)
+* \not: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 342)
+* \notin: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 345)
+* \nu: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 348)
+* \nwarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 351)
+* \o (ø): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 39)
+* \O (Ø): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 39)
+* \obeycr: \obeycr y \restorecr.
+ (line 6)
+* \oddsidemargin: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 54)
+* \odot: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 354)
+* \oe (œ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 43)
+* \OE (Œ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 43)
+* \oint: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 357)
+* \Omega: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 360)
+* \omega: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 363)
+* \ominus: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 366)
+* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 6)
+* \opening: \opening. (line 6)
+* \oplus: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 369)
+* \oslash: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 372)
+* \otimes: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 375)
+* \oval: \oval. (line 6)
+* \overbrace{TEXTO}: Miscelánea Math. (line 26)
+* \overline{TEXTO}: Miscelánea Math. (line 30)
+* \owns: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 378)
+* \P: Símbolos de Texto. (line 43)
+* \pagebreak: \pagebreak y \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 6)
+* \pageref: \pageref. (line 6)
+* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 6)
+* \paragraph: Seccionado. (line 15)
+* \parallel: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 381)
+* \parbox: \parbox. (line 6)
+* \parindent: minipage. (line 18)
+* \parindent <1>: \indent. (line 6)
+* \parsep: itemize. (line 81)
+* \parskip: \parskip. (line 6)
+* \part: Seccionado. (line 9)
+* \partial: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 384)
+* \partopsep: itemize. (line 93)
+* \perp: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 387)
+* \phi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 390)
+* \Pi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 393)
+* \pi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 396)
+* \pm: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 399)
+* \pmod: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 87)
+* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 76)
+* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 77)
+* \pounds: Símbolos de Texto. (line 47)
+* \Pr: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 90)
+* \prec: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 402)
+* \preceq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 405)
+* \prime: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 408)
+* \prod: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 411)
+* \propto: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 414)
+* \protect: \protect. (line 6)
+* \ps: \ps. (line 6)
+* \Psi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 417)
+* \psi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 420)
+* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 80)
+* \put: \put. (line 6)
+* \quotedblbase („): Símbolos de Texto. (line 51)
+* \quotesinglbase (‚): Símbolos de Texto. (line 52)
+* \r (acento anillo): Acentos. (line 76)
+* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 6)
+* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 6)
+* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 6)
+* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 6)
+* \rangle: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 423)
+* \rbrace: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 426)
+* \rbrack: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 429)
+* \rceil: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 432)
+* \Re: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 435)
+* \ref: \ref. (line 6)
+* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 6)
+* \renewenvironment: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* \restorecr: \obeycr y \restorecr.
+ (line 6)
+* \reversemarginpar: Notas al Margen. (line 21)
+* \rfloor: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 438)
+* \rhd: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 441)
+* \rho: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 444)
+* \right: Miscelánea Math. (line 21)
+* \Rightarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 447)
+* \rightarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 450)
+* \rightharpoondown: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 453)
+* \rightharpoonup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 456)
+* \rightleftharpoons: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 459)
+* \rightmargin: itemize. (line 67)
+* \rm: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 93)
+* \rmfamily: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 27)
+* \roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 18)
+* \roman <1>: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 21)
+* \rq: Símbolos de Texto. (line 55)
+* \rule: \rule. (line 6)
+* \S: Símbolos de Texto. (line 58)
+* \savebox: \savebox. (line 6)
+* \sbox: \sbox. (line 6)
+* \sc: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 96)
+* \scriptsize: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 12)
+* \scshape: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 47)
+* \searrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 462)
+* \sec: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 93)
+* \section: Seccionado. (line 12)
+* \seename: Índices. (line 20)
+* \selectfont: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 71)
+* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 6)
+* \setlength: \setlength. (line 6)
+* \setminus: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 465)
+* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 6)
+* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 6)
+* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 6)
+* \sf: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 99)
+* \sffamily: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 45)
+* \sharp: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 468)
+* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 6)
+* \Sigma: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 471)
+* \sigma: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 474)
+* \signature: \signature. (line 6)
+* \sim: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 477)
+* \simeq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 480)
+* \sin: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 96)
+* \sinh: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 99)
+* \sl: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 102)
+* \slshape: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 43)
+* \small: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 12)
+* \smallint: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 483)
+* \smallskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 17)
+* \smallskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 17)
+* \smile: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 486)
+* \SPACE: \SPACE. (line 6)
+* \spadesuit: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 489)
+* \sqcap: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 492)
+* \sqcup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 495)
+* \sqrt[RAÍZ]{argumento}: Miscelánea Math. (line 34)
+* \sqsubset: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 498)
+* \sqsubseteq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 501)
+* \sqsupset: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 504)
+* \sqsupseteq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 507)
+* \ss (ß): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 47)
+* \SS (SS): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 47)
+* \stackrel{TEXTO}{RELACIÓN}: Miscelánea Math. (line 39)
+* \star: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 510)
+* \startbreaks: \startbreaks. (line 6)
+* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 6)
+* \stop: Línea de Órdenes. (line 17)
+* \stopbreaks: \stopbreaks. (line 6)
+* \subparagraph: Seccionado. (line 16)
+* \subsection: Seccionado. (line 13)
+* \subset: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 513)
+* \subseteq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 516)
+* \subsubsection: Seccionado. (line 14)
+* \succ: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 519)
+* \succeq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 522)
+* \sum: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 525)
+* \sup: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 102)
+* \supset: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 528)
+* \supseteq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 531)
+* \surd: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 534)
+* \swarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 537)
+* \symbol: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 26)
+* \t (acento atadura con siguiente): Acentos. (line 82)
+* \TAB: \SPACE. (line 6)
+* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 85)
+* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 110)
+* \tableofcontents: Tablas de Contenido. (line 6)
+* \tan: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 105)
+* \tanh: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 108)
+* \tau: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 540)
+* \telephone: \telephone. (line 6)
+* \TeX: Símbolos de Texto. (line 61)
+* \textascenderwordmark: Símbolos de Texto. (line 99)
+* \textasciicircum: Símbolos de Texto. (line 64)
+* \textasciitilde: Símbolos de Texto. (line 67)
+* \textasteriskcentered: Símbolos de Texto. (line 70)
+* \textbackslash: Símbolos de Texto. (line 73)
+* \textbar: Símbolos de Texto. (line 76)
+* \textbardbl: Símbolos de Texto. (line 79)
+* \textbf: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 39)
+* \textbigcircle: Símbolos de Texto. (line 82)
+* \textbraceleft: Símbolos de Texto. (line 85)
+* \textbraceright: Símbolos de Texto. (line 88)
+* \textbullet: Símbolos de Texto. (line 91)
+* \textcapitalwordmark: Símbolos de Texto. (line 98)
+* \textcircled{LETRA}: Símbolos de Texto. (line 94)
+* \textcompwordmark: Símbolos de Texto. (line 97)
+* \textcopyright: Símbolos de Texto. (line 12)
+* \textdagger: Símbolos de Texto. (line 104)
+* \textdaggerdbl: Símbolos de Texto. (line 107)
+* \textdollar (o \$): Símbolos de Texto. (line 110)
+* \textellipsis: Símbolos de Texto. (line 36)
+* \textemdash (o ---): Símbolos de Texto. (line 113)
+* \textendash (o --): Símbolos de Texto. (line 116)
+* \texteuro: Símbolos de Texto. (line 119)
+* \textexclamdown (o !`): Símbolos de Texto. (line 122)
+* \textfloatsep: figure. (line 73)
+* \textfraction: figure. (line 78)
+* \textgreater: Símbolos de Texto. (line 125)
+* \textheight: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 27)
+* \textit: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 30)
+* \textleftarrow: Símbolos de Texto. (line 131)
+* \textless: Símbolos de Texto. (line 128)
+* \textmd: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 36)
+* \textnormal: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 51)
+* \textordfeminine: Símbolos de Texto. (line 134)
+* \textordfeminine <1>: Símbolos de Texto. (line 138)
+* \textordmasculine: Símbolos de Texto. (line 135)
+* \textparagraph: Símbolos de Texto. (line 44)
+* \textperiodcentered: Símbolos de Texto. (line 141)
+* \textquestiondown (o ?`): Símbolos de Texto. (line 144)
+* \textquotedblleft (o ``): Símbolos de Texto. (line 147)
+* \textquotedblright (o '): Símbolos de Texto. (line 150)
+* \textquoteleft (o `): Símbolos de Texto. (line 153)
+* \textquoteright (o '): Símbolos de Texto. (line 156)
+* \textquotestraightbase: Símbolos de Texto. (line 159)
+* \textquotestraightdblbase: Símbolos de Texto. (line 160)
+* \textregistered: Símbolos de Texto. (line 163)
+* \textrightarrow: Símbolos de Texto. (line 166)
+* \textrm: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 27)
+* \textsc: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 47)
+* \textsf: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 45)
+* \textsl: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 43)
+* \textsterling: Símbolos de Texto. (line 48)
+* \textthreequartersemdash: Símbolos de Texto. (line 169)
+* \texttrademark: Símbolos de Texto. (line 172)
+* \texttt: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 49)
+* \texttwelveudash: Símbolos de Texto. (line 175)
+* \textunderscore: Símbolos de Texto. (line 178)
+* \textup: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 41)
+* \textvisiblespace: Símbolos de Texto. (line 181)
+* \textwidth: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 34)
+* \th (þ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 51)
+* \TH (Þ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 51)
+* \thanks{TEXTO}: \maketitle. (line 23)
+* \theta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 543)
+* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 6)
+* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 6)
+* \thinspace: \thinspace. (line 6)
+* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 6)
+* \tilde: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 40)
+* \times: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 546)
+* \tiny: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 12)
+* \title{TEXTO}: \maketitle. (line 28)
+* \to: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 549)
+* \today: \today. (line 6)
+* \top: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 552)
+* \topfraction: figure. (line 84)
+* \topmargin: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 41)
+* \topsep: itemize. (line 85)
+* \topskip: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 49)
+* \totalheight: Longitudes Predeterminadas.
+ (line 12)
+* \triangle: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 555)
+* \triangleleft: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 558)
+* \triangleright: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 561)
+* \tt: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 105)
+* \ttfamily: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 49)
+* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 6)
+* \typein: \typein. (line 6)
+* \typeout: \typeout. (line 6)
+* \u (breve acento): Acentos. (line 87)
+* \unboldmath: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 29)
+* \underbar: Acentos. (line 90)
+* \underbrace{matemáticas}: Miscelánea Math. (line 44)
+* \underline{text}: Miscelánea Math. (line 47)
+* \unitlength: picture. (line 10)
+* \unlhd: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 564)
+* \unrhd: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 568)
+* \Uparrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 572)
+* \uparrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 575)
+* \Updownarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 578)
+* \updownarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 581)
+* \uplus: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 584)
+* \upshape: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 41)
+* \Upsilon: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 587)
+* \upsilon: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 590)
+* \usebox: \usebox. (line 6)
+* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 6)
+* \usefont: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 76)
+* \usepackage: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 74)
+* \v (breve acento): Acentos. (line 99)
+* \value: \value. (line 6)
+* \varepsilon: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 593)
+* \varphi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 596)
+* \varpi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 599)
+* \varrho: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 602)
+* \varsigma: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 605)
+* \vartheta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 608)
+* \vdash: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 611)
+* \vdots: Miscelánea Math. (line 52)
+* \vdots <1>: Miscelánea Math. (line 53)
+* \vec: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 43)
+* \vector: \vector. (line 6)
+* \vee: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 614)
+* \verb: \verb. (line 6)
+* \Vert: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 617)
+* \vert: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 620)
+* \vfill: \vfill. (line 6)
+* \vline: \vline. (line 6)
+* \vspace: \vspace. (line 6)
+* \wedge: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 623)
+* \widehat: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 46)
+* \widetilde: Acentos Matemáticos. (line 49)
+* \width: Longitudes Predeterminadas.
+ (line 6)
+* \wp: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 626)
+* \wr: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 629)
+* \Xi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 632)
+* \xi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 635)
+* \year: \day \month \year. (line 6)
+* \zeta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 638)
+* \[: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 16)
+* \\ (para array): array. (line 27)
+* \\ (para centrar): center. (line 13)
+* \\ (para eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 12)
+* \\ (para flushright): flushright. (line 12)
+* \\ (para objetos \shortstack): \shortstack. (line 20)
+* \\ forzar la separación de línea: \\. (line 6)
+* \\ para cartas: Cartas. (line 34)
+* \\ para flushleft: flushleft. (line 12)
+* \\ para tabular: tabular. (line 23)
+* \\ para verse: verse. (line 17)
+* \\ para \author: \maketitle. (line 12)
+* \\ para \title: \maketitle. (line 29)
+* \\ tabbing: tabbing. (line 26)
+* \\* (para eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 17)
+* \]: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 16)
+* \^: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 22)
+* \^ (acento circunflejo): Acentos. (line 34)
+* \_: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 11)
+* \` (acento grave): Acentos. (line 39)
+* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 56)
+* \{: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 11)
+* \|: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 11)
+* \}: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 11)
+* \~: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 22)
+* \~ (acento tilde): Acentos. (line 45)
+* ^: Subíndices y Superíndices.
+ (line 6)
+* _: Subíndices y Superíndices.
+ (line 6)
+* abstract, entorno: abstract. (line 6)
+* array, entorno: array. (line 6)
+* caja lR: picture. (line 67)
+* center, entorno: center. (line 6)
+* clase article: Clases de Documento. (line 13)
+* clase book: Clases de Documento. (line 13)
+* clase letter: Clases de Documento. (line 13)
+* clase report: Clases de Documento. (line 13)
+* clase slides: Clases de Documento. (line 13)
+* contador secnumdepth: Seccionado. (line 50)
+* description, entorno: description. (line 6)
+* displaymath, entorno: displaymath. (line 6)
+* displaymath, entorno <1>: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 6)
+* document, entorno: document. (line 6)
+* ejemplo \Alph: enumerate. (line 41)
+* ejemplo \parskip: itemize. (line 99)
+* entorno abstract: abstract. (line 6)
+* entorno array: array. (line 6)
+* entorno center: center. (line 6)
+* entorno description: description. (line 6)
+* entorno displaymath: displaymath. (line 6)
+* entorno displaymath <1>: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 6)
+* entorno document: document. (line 6)
+* entorno enumerate: enumerate. (line 6)
+* entorno eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* entorno equation: equation. (line 6)
+* entorno equation <1>: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 6)
+* entorno figure: figure. (line 6)
+* entorno filecontents: filecontents. (line 6)
+* entorno filecontents*: filecontents. (line 6)
+* entorno flushleft: flushleft. (line 6)
+* entorno flushright: flushright. (line 6)
+* entorno itemize: itemize. (line 6)
+* entorno letter: letter. (line 6)
+* entorno list: list. (line 6)
+* entorno math: math. (line 6)
+* entorno math <1>: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 6)
+* entorno minipage: minipage. (line 6)
+* entorno picture: picture. (line 6)
+* entorno quotation: quotation. (line 6)
+* entorno quote: quote. (line 6)
+* entorno tabbing: tabbing. (line 6)
+* entorno table: table. (line 6)
+* entorno tabular: tabular. (line 6)
+* entorno thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 6)
+* entorno theorem: theorem. (line 6)
+* entorno titlepage: titlepage. (line 6)
+* entorno verbatim: verbatim. (line 6)
+* entorno verse: verse. (line 6)
+* enumerate, entorno: enumerate. (line 6)
+* eqnarray, entorno: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* equation, entorno: equation. (line 6)
+* equation, entorno <1>: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 6)
+* figure, entorno: figure. (line 6)
+* filecontents*, entorno: filecontents. (line 6)
+* filecontents, entorno: filecontents. (line 6)
+* flushleft, entorno: flushleft. (line 6)
+* flushright, entorno: flushright. (line 6)
+* indexspace: Índices. (line 34)
+* itemize, entorno: itemize. (line 6)
+* <latexrefman@tug.org> dirección de correo electrónico: Acerca de este documento.
+ (line 12)
+* letter, entorno: letter. (line 6)
+* list, entorno: list. (line 6)
+* lrbox: lrbox. (line 6)
+* math, entorno: math. (line 6)
+* math, entorno <1>: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 6)
+* minipage, entorno: minipage. (line 6)
+* opción 10pt: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 15)
+* opción 11pt: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 15)
+* opción 12pt: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 15)
+* opción a4paper: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 21)
+* opción a5paper: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 21)
+* opción b5paper: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 21)
+* opción draft: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 26)
+* opción executivepaper: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 21)
+* opción final: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 26)
+* opción fleqn: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 26)
+* opción landscape: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 26)
+* opción legalpaper: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 21)
+* opción leqno: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 26)
+* opción letterpaper: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 21)
+* opción notitlepage: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 26)
+* opción onecolumn: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 47)
+* opción oneside: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 47)
+* opción openany: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 47)
+* opción openbib: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 26)
+* opción openright: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 47)
+* opción titlepage: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 26)
+* opción twocolumn: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 47)
+* opción twoside: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 47)
+* paquete textcomp: Símbolos de Texto. (line 6)
+* picture, entorno: picture. (line 6)
+* printindex: Índices. (line 30)
+* quotation, entorno: quotation. (line 6)
+* quote, entorno: quote. (line 6)
+* tabbing, entorno: tabbing. (line 6)
+* table, entorno: table. (line 6)
+* tabular, entorno: tabular. (line 6)
+* thebibliography, entorno: thebibliography. (line 6)
+* theorem, entorno: theorem. (line 6)
+* titlepage, entorno: titlepage. (line 6)
+* verbatim, entorno: verbatim. (line 6)
+* verse, entorno: verse. (line 6)
+
+
+
+Tag Table:
+Node: Top2027
+Node: Acerca de este documento4420
+Node: Descripción6007
+Node: Iniciando y Finalizando8375
+Node: Clases de Documento9007
+Node: Opciones de Clase de Documento9693
+Node: Tipos de Letra12897
+Node: Estilos del Tipo de Letra13476
+Node: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra16592
+Node: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra18241
+Node: Diseño21526
+Node: \onecolumn22107
+Node: \twocolumn22353
+Node: \flushbottom24269
+Node: \raggedbottom24692
+Node: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página25033
+Node: Seccionado27619
+Node: Referencias Cruzadas29483
+Node: \label29962
+Node: \pageref30976
+Node: \ref31303
+Node: Entornos31757
+Node: abstract33391
+Node: array33631
+Node: center35155
+Node: \centering35664
+Node: description36632
+Node: displaymath37671
+Node: document38369
+Node: enumerate38642
+Node: eqnarray40087
+Node: equation41294
+Node: figure41707
+Node: filecontents45206
+Node: flushleft47062
+Node: \raggedright47587
+Node: flushright48245
+Node: \raggedleft48750
+Node: itemize49406
+Node: letter53672
+Node: list53906
+Node: math54841
+Node: minipage55185
+Node: picture56561
+Node: \circle61055
+Node: \makebox (picture)61433
+Node: \framebox (picture)62232
+Node: \dashbox62764
+Node: \frame63385
+Node: \line63740
+Node: \linethickness64283
+Node: \thicklines64762
+Node: \thinlines65099
+Node: \multiput65432
+Node: \oval65841
+Node: \put66550
+Node: \shortstack66848
+Node: \vector67372
+Node: quotation67720
+Node: quote68227
+Node: tabbing68722
+Node: table72428
+Node: tabular73429
+Node: \multicolumn78113
+Node: \cline79045
+Node: \hline79412
+Node: \vline79767
+Node: thebibliography80133
+Node: \bibitem81458
+Node: \cite82322
+Node: \nocite82863
+Node: Usando BibTeX83199
+Node: theorem84991
+Node: titlepage85402
+Node: verbatim86141
+Node: \verb86882
+Node: verse87585
+Node: Saltos de Línea88142
+Node: \\89358
+Node: \obeycr y \restorecr89937
+Node: \newline90438
+Node: \- (hyphenation)90739
+Node: \fussy91511
+Node: \sloppy91974
+Node: \hyphenation92373
+Node: \linebreak y \nolinebreak93146
+Node: Saltos de Página93873
+Node: \cleardoublepage94589
+Node: \clearpage95080
+Node: \newpage95392
+Node: \enlargethispage95656
+Node: \pagebreak y \nopagebreak96233
+Node: Notas al Pie97012
+Node: \footnote97741
+Node: \footnotemark98329
+Node: \footnotetext98952
+Node: Notas al Pie Simbólicas99543
+Node: Parámetros para Footnote100154
+Node: Definiciones101042
+Node: \newcommand y \renewcommand101841
+Node: \newcounter103362
+Node: \newlength103890
+Node: \newsavebox104497
+Node: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment104867
+Node: \newtheorem106516
+Node: \newfont107613
+Node: \protect108210
+Node: Contadores109199
+Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol110615
+Node: \usecounter111870
+Node: \value112277
+Node: \setcounter112722
+Node: \addtocounter113030
+Node: \refstepcounter113364
+Node: \stepcounter113765
+Node: \day \month \year114050
+Node: Longitudes114670
+Node: \setlength115343
+Node: \addtolength115745
+Node: \settodepth116102
+Node: \settoheight116422
+Node: \settowidth116739
+Node: Longitudes Predeterminadas117041
+Node: Haciendo Párrafos117672
+Node: \indent118328
+Node: \noindent118888
+Node: \parskip119185
+Node: Notas al Margen119501
+Node: Fórmulas Matemáticas121345
+Node: Subíndices y Superíndices123405
+Node: Símbolos Matemáticos123924
+Node: Funciones Matemáticas131916
+Node: Acentos Matemáticos133074
+Node: Espacios en Modo Math134293
+Node: Miscelánea Math135039
+Node: Modos136803
+Node: Estilos de Página138936
+Node: \maketitle139542
+Node: \pagenumbering140867
+Node: \pagestyle141480
+Node: \thispagestyle142907
+Node: Espacios143259
+Node: \hspace144447
+Node: \hfill145108
+Node: \SPACE145585
+Node: \AT146143
+Node: \thinspace146645
+Node: \/146931
+Node: \hrulefill147897
+Node: \dotfill148194
+Node: \addvspace148463
+Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip149031
+Node: \vfill149823
+Node: \vspace150173
+Node: Cajas150677
+Node: \mbox151530
+Node: \fbox y \framebox151881
+Node: lrbox152782
+Node: \makebox153138
+Node: \parbox153959
+Node: \raisebox155467
+Node: \savebox156136
+Node: \sbox156624
+Node: \usebox157148
+Node: Inserciones Especiales157487
+Node: Caracteres Reservados158202
+Node: Símbolos de Texto159875
+Node: Acentos163823
+Node: Caracteres no Ingleses166840
+Node: \rule167605
+Node: \today168066
+Node: Dividiendo la Entrada168570
+Node: \include169311
+Node: \includeonly170031
+Node: \input170621
+Node: Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada171194
+Node: Tablas de Contenido171449
+Node: \addcontentsline172648
+Node: \addtocontents173691
+Node: Glosarios174254
+Node: Índices174873
+Node: Cartas176947
+Node: \address179198
+Node: \cc179933
+Node: \closing180199
+Node: \encl180455
+Node: \location180669
+Node: \makelabels180970
+Node: \name181284
+Node: \opening181524
+Node: \ps181875
+Node: \signature182086
+Node: \startbreaks182388
+Node: \stopbreaks182657
+Node: \telephone182904
+Node: Entrada/Salida a la Terminal183168
+Node: \typein183464
+Node: \typeout184191
+Node: Línea de Órdenes185015
+Node: Plantillas de Documento185867
+Node: Plantilla book186229
+Node: Plantilla beamer186735
+Node: Plantilla tugboat187465
+Node: License translation189963
+Node: Índice de Conceptos190882
+Node: Índice de Instrucciones230791
+
+End Tag Table
+
+
+Local Variables:
+coding: utf-8
+End:
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.pdf b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7e69d50f7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.txt b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dfaf38aad2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7230 @@
+LaTeX2e
+1 Acerca de este documento
+2 Descripción de LaTeX
+3 Iniciando y Finalizando
+4 Clases de Documento
+5 Tipos de Letra
+6 Diseño
+7 Seccionado
+8 Referencias Cruzadas
+9 Entornos
+10 Saltos de Línea
+11 Saltos de Página
+12 Notas al Pie
+13 Definiciones
+14 Contadores
+15 Longitudes
+16 Haciendo Párrafos
+17 Fórmulas Matemáticas
+18 Modos
+19 Estilos de Página
+20 Espacios
+21 Cajas
+22 Inserciones Especiales
+23 Dividiendo la Entrada
+24 Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada
+25 Cartas
+26 Entrada/Salida a la Terminal
+27 Línea de Órdenes
+Apéndice A Plantillas de Documento
+Apéndice B Traducción de la licencia
+Índice de Conceptos
+Índice de Instrucciones
+LaTeX2e
+1 Acerca de este documento
+2 Descripción de LaTeX
+3 Iniciando y Finalizando
+4 Clases de Documento
+ 4.1 Opciones de Clase de Documento
+5 Tipos de Letra
+ 5.1 Estilos del Tipo de Letra
+ 5.2 Tamaños del Tipo de Letra
+ 5.3 Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra
+6 Diseño
+ 6.1 ‘\onecolumn’
+ 6.2 ‘\twocolumn’
+ 6.3 ‘\flushbottom’
+ 6.4 ‘\raggedbottom’
+ 6.5 Parámetros para el Diseño de Página
+7 Seccionado
+8 Referencias Cruzadas
+ 8.1 ‘\label’
+ 8.2 ‘\pageref{CLAVE}’
+ 8.3 ‘\ref{CLAVE}’
+9 Entornos
+ 9.1 ‘abstract’
+ 9.2 ‘array’
+ 9.3 ‘center’
+ 9.3.1 ‘\centering’
+ 9.4 ‘description’
+ 9.5 ‘displaymath’
+ 9.6 ‘document’
+ 9.7 ‘enumerate’
+ 9.8 ‘eqnarray’
+ 9.9 ‘equation’
+ 9.10 ‘figure’
+ 9.11 ‘filecontents’: Crear un archivo externo
+ 9.12 ‘flushleft’
+ 9.12.1 ‘\raggedright’
+ 9.13 ‘flushright’
+ 9.13.1 ‘\raggedleft’
+ 9.14 ‘itemize’
+ 9.15 Entorno ‘letter’: Escribiendo Cartas
+ 9.16 ‘list’
+ 9.17 ‘math’
+ 9.18 ‘minipage’
+ 9.19 ‘picture’
+ 9.19.1 ‘\circle’
+ 9.19.2 ‘\makebox’
+ 9.19.3 ‘\framebox’
+ 9.19.4 ‘\dashbox’
+ 9.19.5 ‘\frame’
+ 9.19.6 ‘\line’
+ 9.19.7 ‘\linethickness’
+ 9.19.8 ‘\thicklines’
+ 9.19.9 ‘\thinlines’
+ 9.19.10 ‘\multiput’
+ 9.19.11 ‘\oval’
+ 9.19.12 ‘\put’
+ 9.19.13 ‘\shortstack’
+ 9.19.14 ‘\vector’
+ 9.20 ‘quotation’
+ 9.21 ‘quote’
+ 9.22 ‘tabbing’
+ 9.23 ‘table’
+ 9.24 ‘tabular’
+ 9.24.1 ‘\multicolumn’
+ 9.24.2 ‘\cline’
+ 9.24.3 ‘\hline’
+ 9.24.4 ‘\vline’
+ 9.25 ‘thebibliography’
+ 9.25.1 ‘\bibitem’
+ 9.25.2 ‘\cite’
+ 9.25.3 ‘\nocite’
+ 9.25.4 Usando BibTeX
+ 9.26 ‘theorem’
+ 9.27 ‘titlepage’
+ 9.28 ‘verbatim’
+ 9.28.1 ‘\verb’
+ 9.29 ‘verse’
+10 Saltos de Línea
+ 10.1 ‘\\’[*][MÁS-ESPACIO]
+ 10.2 ‘\obeycr’ y ‘\restorecr’
+ 10.3 ‘\newline’
+ 10.4 ‘\-’ (división silábica discrecional)
+ 10.5 ‘\fussy’
+ 10.6 ‘\sloppy’
+ 10.7 ‘\hyphenation’
+ 10.8 ‘\linebreak’ y ‘\nolinebreak’
+11 Saltos de Página
+ 11.1 ‘\cleardoublepage’
+ 11.2 ‘\clearpage’
+ 11.3 ‘\newpage’
+ 11.4 ‘\enlargethispage’
+ 11.5 ‘\pagebreak’ y ‘\nopagebreak’
+12 Notas al Pie
+ 12.1 ‘\footnote’
+ 12.2 ‘\footnotemark’
+ 12.3 ‘\footnotetext’
+ 12.4 Notas al Pie Simbólicas
+ 12.5 Parámetros para Footnote
+13 Definiciones
+ 13.1 ‘\newcommand’ y ‘\renewcommand’
+ 13.2 ‘\newcounter’
+ 13.3 ‘\newlength’
+ 13.4 ‘\newsavebox’
+ 13.5 ‘\newenvironment’ y ‘\renewenvironment’
+ 13.6 ‘\newtheorem’
+ 13.7 ‘\newfont’
+ 13.8 ‘\protect’
+14 Contadores
+ 14.1 ‘\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol’: Imprimiendo Contadores
+ 14.2 ‘\usecounter{CONTADOR}’
+ 14.3 ‘\value{CONTADOR}’
+ 14.4 ‘\setcounter{\CONTADOR}{VALOR}’
+ 14.5 ‘\addtocounter{CONTADOR}{VALOR}’
+ 14.6 ‘\refstepcounter{CONTADOR}’
+ 14.7 ‘\stepcounter{CONTADOR}’
+ 14.8 ‘\day \month \year’: Contadores Predefinidos
+15 Longitudes
+ 15.1 ‘\setlength{\LARGO}{VALOR}’
+ 15.2 \addtolength{\LARGO}{CANTIDAD}
+ 15.3 ‘\settodepth’
+ 15.4 ‘\settoheight’
+ 15.5 ‘\settowidth{\LARGO}{TEXTO}’
+ 15.6 Longitudes Predeterminadas
+16 Haciendo Párrafos
+ 16.1 ‘\indent’
+ 16.2 ‘\noindent’
+ 16.3 ‘\parskip’
+ 16.4 Notas al Margen
+17 Fórmulas Matemáticas
+ 17.1 Subíndices y Superíndices
+ 17.2 Símbolos Matemáticos
+ 17.3 Funciones Matemáticas
+ 17.4 Acentos Matemáticos
+ 17.5 Espacios en Modo Math
+ 17.6 Miscelánea Math
+18 Modos
+19 Estilos de Página
+ 19.1 ‘\maketitle’
+ 19.2 ‘\pagenumbering’
+ 19.3 ‘\pagestyle’
+ 19.4 ‘\thispagestyle{ESTILO}’
+20 Espacios
+ 20.1 ‘\hspace’
+ 20.2 ‘\hfill’
+ 20.3 ‘\SPACE’
+ 20.4 ‘\@’
+ 20.5 ‘\thinspace’
+ 20.6 ‘\/’
+ 20.7 ‘\hrulefill’
+ 20.8 ‘\dotfill’
+ 20.9 ‘\addvspace’
+ 20.10 ‘\bigskip \medskip \smallskip’
+ 20.11 ‘\vfill’
+ 20.12 ‘\vspace[*]{LONGITUD}’
+21 Cajas
+ 21.1 ‘\mbox{TEXTO}’
+ 21.2 ‘\fbox’ y ‘\framebox’
+ 21.3 ‘lrbox’
+ 21.4 ‘\makebox’
+ 21.5 ‘\parbox’
+ 21.6 ‘\raisebox’
+ 21.7 ‘\savebox’
+ 21.8 ‘\sbox{\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA}{TEXTO}’
+ 21.9 ‘\usebox{\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA}’
+22 Inserciones Especiales
+ 22.1 Caracteres Reservados
+ 22.2 Símbolos de Texto
+ 22.3 Acentos
+ 22.4 Caracteres no Ingleses
+ 22.5 ‘\rule’
+ 22.6 ‘\today’
+23 Dividiendo la Entrada
+ 23.1 ‘\include’
+ 23.2 ‘\includeonly’
+ 23.3 ‘\input’
+24 Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada
+ 24.1 Tablas de Contenido
+ 24.1.1 \addcontentsline
+ 24.1.2 \addtocontents
+ 24.2 Glosarios
+ 24.3 Índices
+25 Cartas
+ 25.1 \address{DIRECCIÓN-DEL-REMITENTE}
+ 25.2 ‘\cc’
+ 25.3 ‘\closing’
+ 25.4 ‘\encl’
+ 25.5 ‘\location’
+ 25.6 ‘\makelabels’
+ 25.7 ‘\name’
+ 25.8 ‘\opening{TEXTO}’
+ 25.9 ‘\ps’
+ 25.10 ‘\signature{TEXTO}’
+ 25.11 ‘\startbreaks’
+ 25.12 ‘\stopbreaks’
+ 25.13 ‘\telephone’
+26 Entrada/Salida a la Terminal
+ 26.1 ‘\typein[INSTRUCCIÓN]{MENSAJE}’
+ 26.2 ‘\typeout{MENSAJE}’
+27 Línea de Órdenes
+Apéndice A Plantillas de Documento
+ A.1 Plantilla ‘book’
+ A.2 Plantilla ‘beamer’
+ A.3 Plantilla ‘tugboat’
+Apéndice B Traducción de la licencia
+Índice de Conceptos
+Índice de Instrucciones
+LaTeX2e
+*******
+
+Este documento es un manual de referencia extraoficial para LaTeX, un
+sistema de preparación de documentos, versión Julio 2010. Este se
+pretende que cubra LaTeX2e, que ha sido la versión estándar de LaTeX por
+muchos años.
+
+1 Acerca de este documento
+**************************
+
+LaTeX está implementado como un paquete de macros por Donald E. Knuth’s
+para el programa de composición tipográfica TeX. LaTeX originalmente
+fue creado por Leslie Lamport; este ahora es mantenido por un grupo de
+voluntarios en (<http://latex-project.org>). La documentación oficial
+escrita por el proyecto LaTeX está disponible allí.
+
+ Una vez más, el presente documento no es oficial y no ha sido
+revisado por los responsables del proyecto LaTeX. No enviar informes de
+error o cualquier otra cosa sobre este documento a ellos. En su lugar,
+por favor, envíe todos comentarios a <latexrefman@tug.org>.
+
+ La página principal de este documento es
+<http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/>. Esa página tiene
+enlaces al resultado actual de la compilación de este documento en
+varios formatos, a fuentes, a listas de correo, y a otros
+infraestructura.
+
+ Por supuesto, hay muchas otras muchas fuentes de información sobre,
+LaTeX. Éstos son algunos de ellos:
+
+<http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr>
+ Dos páginas de referencias recomendadas a LaTeX documentación.
+
+<http://www.ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc>
+ Escribir su primer documento, con un poco de texto y matemáticas.
+
+<http://www.ctan.org/pkg/usrguide>
+ La guía para los autores de documentos mantenidos como parte de
+ LaTeX; hay varios otros.
+
+<http://tug.org/begin.html>
+ Introducción al TeX sistema, incluyendo LaTeX.
+
+2 Descripción de LaTeX
+**********************
+
+Las instrucciones LaTeX componen tipográficamente un archivo de texto
+usando el programa TeX y el “paquete de macros” LaTeX para TeX. Para
+ser más específicos, este procesa un archivo de entrada que contiene el
+texto de un documento con instrucciones intercaladas que describen cómo
+se debe dar formato al texto. Este produce al menos tres archivos de
+salida:
+
+ 1. Un archivo de salida principal, que es uno de:
+
+ 1. Si se invoca como ‘latex’, un archivo “independiente del
+ dispositivo” (‘.dvi’). Este contiene las instrucciones que se
+ pueden traducir en órdenes para una variedad de dispositivos
+ de salida. Usted puede ver estos archivos ‘.dvi’ producidos
+ por LaTeX utilizando un programa como ‘xdvi’ (visualización
+ directa) o ‘dvips’ (los convierte a PostScript).
+
+ 2. Si es invocado como ‘pdflatex’, produce un archivo de
+ “Documento de Formato Portátil” (‘.pdf’). Normalmente, este
+ es un archivo autocontenido, con todos los tipos de letra e
+ imágenes incrustadas. Este puede ser muy útil, pero hace que
+ produzca un archivo mucho más grande que el ‘.dvi’ producido a
+ partir del mismo documento.
+
+ Existen otras variantes menos comunes de LaTeX (y TeX), de modo que
+ puede producir HTML, XML y otras cosas.
+
+ 2. Un archivo de“transcripción” o ‘.log’ que contiene información
+ resumida y mensajes de diagnóstico para cualquier error descubierto
+ en el archivo de entrada.
+
+ 3. Un archivo “auxiliar” o ‘.aux’. Este es usado por LaTeX mismo,
+ para diversas cosas como el seccionado.
+
+ Una instrucción LaTeX comienza con el nombre de la instrucción, la
+cual consiste de una ‘\’ seguida por o bien (a) una cadena de letras o
+(b) un único carácter no letra. Los argumentos que figuran entre
+corchetes, ‘[]’, son opcionales, mientras que los argumentos contenidos
+entre llaves, ‘{}’, son obligatorios.
+
+ LaTeX es sensible a mayúsculas y minúsculas. Cuando ingresa
+instrucciones, use la caja de letras propia a cada instrucción —
+tradicionalmente es minúsculas.
+
+3 Iniciando y Finalizando
+*************************
+
+Un archivo de entrada mínimo tiene el siguiente aspecto:
+
+ \documentclass{CLASE}
+ \begin{document}
+ SU TEXTO
+ \end{document}
+
+donde CLASE es una clase de documento válida para LaTeX. *Note Clases
+de Documento::, para detalles de varias clases de documento disponibles
+localmente.
+
+ Usted puede incluir otras instrucciones LaTeX entre las instrucciones
+‘\documentclass’ y ‘\begin{document}’ (esta área se llama el
+“preámbulo”).
+
+4 Clases de Documento
+*********************
+
+La clase de un determinado documento se define con la instrucción:
+
+ \documentclass[OPCIONES]{CLASE}
+
+La instrucción ‘\documentclass’ debe ser la primer instrucción en un
+archivo fuente LaTeX.
+
+ Los nombres integrados de CLASES de documento LaTeX (muchas otras
+clases de documento están disponibles como complementos; *note
+Descripción::):
+
+ article report book letter slides
+
+ Las OPCIONES estándar están descritas más adelante.
+
+4.1 Opciones de Clase de Documento
+==================================
+
+Usted puede especificar las así llamadas “opciones globales” u “opciones
+de clase” en la instrucción ‘\documentclass’ encerrándolas entre
+corchetes de la manera usual. Para especificar más de una OPCIÓN,
+deberá separarlas con una coma:
+
+ \documentclass[OPCIÓN1,OPCIÓN2,...]{CLASE}
+
+ Esta es la lista de las opciones de clase estándar.
+
+ Todas las clases estándar salvo ‘slides’ aceptan las siguientes
+opciones para seleccionar el tamaño del tipo de letra (el predeterminado
+es ‘10pt’):
+
+ 10pt 11pt 12pt
+
+ Todas las clases estándar aceptan estas opciones para seleccionar el
+tamaño del papel (el predeterminado es ‘letterpaper’):
+
+ a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
+
+ Otras opciones diversas:
+
+‘draft, final’
+ marca/no marca el desbordamiento de cajas con una gran caja negra;
+ el predeterminado es ‘final’.
+‘fleqn’
+ Coloca las fórmulas mostradas alineadas a la izquierda; el
+ predeterminado es centrado.
+‘landscape’
+ Selecciona el formato apaisado; el predeterminado es vertical.
+‘leqno’
+ Coloca los números de ecuación en el lado izquierdo de las
+ ecuaciones; el predeterminado es el lado derecho.
+‘openbib’
+ Usa el formato de bibliografía “abierto”.
+‘titlepage, notitlepage’
+ Especifica si la página de título es independiente; de manera
+ predeterminada depende de la clase.
+
+ Estas opciones no están disponibles con la clase ‘slides’:
+
+‘onecolumn’
+‘twocolumn’
+ Composición tipográfica en una o dos columnas; el predeterminado es
+ ‘onecolumn’.
+
+‘oneside’
+‘twoside’
+ Selecciona el diseño de una o dos caras; el predeterminado es
+ ‘oneside’, excepto para la clase ‘book’.
+
+ El parámetro ‘\evensidemargin’ (‘\oddsidemargin’) determina la
+ distancia en páginas par (impar) numeradas entre el lado izquierdo
+ de la página y el margen excedente del texto. Los valores
+ predeterminados varían con el tamaño del papel y si el diseño
+ seleccionado es de uno o dos lados. Para imprimir texto en un lado
+ es centrado, para dos lados, ‘\oddsidemargin’ es 40% de la
+ diferencia entre ‘\paperwidth’ y ‘\textwidth’ con el resto de
+ ‘\evensidemargin’.
+
+‘openright’
+‘openany’
+ Determina si un capítulo debe iniciar en una página del lado
+ derecho; para ‘book’, el predeterminado es ‘openright’.
+
+ La clase ‘slides’ ofrece la opción ‘clock’ para imprimir la hora en
+la parte inferior de cada nota.
+
+ Los paquetes adicionales se cargan de la siguiente manera:
+
+ \usepackage[OPCIONES]{PAQUETE}
+
+ Para especificar más de un PAQUETE, usted puede separarlos con una
+coma, o utilizar múltiples instrucciones‘\usepackage’.
+
+ Cualquiera de las opciones que figuran en la instrucción
+‘\documentclass’ que no son conocidas por la clase de documento
+seleccionada son transmitidas a los paquetes cargados con ‘\usepackage’.
+
+5 Tipos de Letra
+****************
+
+Dos aspectos importantes de la selección de un “tipo de letra” son la
+especificación del tamaño y del estilo. Las instrucciones LaTeX para
+hacer esto se describen a continuación.
+
+5.1 Estilos del Tipo de Letra
+=============================
+
+Las siguientes instrucciones para el estilo del tipo de letra son
+compatibles con LaTeX.
+
+ Este primer grupo de instrucciones se utiliza normalmente con un
+argumento, como en ‘\textit{texto en cursiva}’. En la siguiente tabla,
+las instrucciones correspondientes entre paréntesis son la “forma
+declarativa”, la cual no toma argumentos. El ámbito de aplicación de la
+forma declarativa dura hasta la siguiente instucción para el estilo del
+tipo de letra o hasta el final del grupo actual.
+
+ Estos commandos, tanto en las formas con argumento o en las formas
+declarativas, son acumulativas; es decir, usted puede decir ya sea
+‘\sffamily\bfseries’ o ‘\bfseries\sffamily’ para obtener sans serif en
+negrita.
+
+ También puede utilizar la forma de entorno de las formas
+declarativas; por ejemplo, ‘\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}’.
+
+ Estas instrucciones proporcionan automáticamente una corrección en
+cursiva si es necesario.
+‘\textrm (\rmfamily)’
+ Romana.
+
+‘\textit (\itshape)’
+ cursivas.
+
+‘\emph’
+ Énfasis (cambia entre ‘\textit’ y ‘\textrm’).
+
+‘\textmd (\mdseries)’
+ Peso medio (predeterminado).
+
+‘\textbf (\bfseries)’
+ Negrita.
+‘\textup (\upshape)’
+ Vertical (predeterminado). Lo opuesto a inclinada.
+‘\textsl (\slshape)’
+ Oblicua.
+‘\textsf (\sffamily)’
+ Sans serif.
+‘\textsc (\scshape)’
+ Versales.
+‘\texttt (\ttfamily)’
+ Máquina de escribir.
+‘\textnormal (\normalfont)’
+ Tipo de letra principal del documento.
+‘\mathrm’
+ Romana, para usar en modo math.
+‘\mathbf’
+ Negrita, para usarse en modo math.
+‘\mathsf’
+ Sans serif, para usarse en modo math.
+‘\mathtt’
+ Máquina de escribir, para usarse en modo math.
+
+‘\mathit’
+‘(\mit)’
+ cursivas, para utilizarse en modo math.
+
+‘\mathnormal’
+ Para usarse en modo math, por ejemplo dentro de otra declaración de
+ estilo de letra.
+‘\mathcal’
+ Letras ‘caligráficas’, para usarse en modo math.
+
+ Además, la instrucción ‘\mathversion{bold}’ se pude utilizar para
+cambiar a letras y símbolos en negrita dentro de fórmulas.
+‘\mathversion{normal}’ restablece el valor predeterminado.
+
+ LaTeX también proporciona las siguientes instrucciones, que
+incondicionalmente cambian a determinado estilo, es decir, _no_ son
+acumulativas. Estas se utilizan de forma diferente que las
+instrucciones anteriores, también: ‘{\INSTRUCCIÓN ...}’ en lugar de
+‘\INSTRUCCIÓN{...}’. Son dos cosas muy distintas.
+
+‘\bf’
+ Cambia a tipo de letra negrita.
+
+‘\cal’
+ Cambia a letras caligráficas para math.
+
+‘\em’
+ Énfasis (cursivas con romana, romana con cursivas).
+
+‘\it’
+ cursivas.
+
+‘\rm’
+ Romana.
+
+‘\sc’
+ Versales.
+
+‘\sf’
+ Sans serif.
+
+‘\sl’
+ Oblicua (oblicua).
+
+‘\tt’
+ Máquina de escribir (monoespacio, de ancho fijo).
+
+5.2 Tamaños del Tipo de Letra
+=============================
+
+Las siguientes instrucciones para el tamaño del tipo de letra estándar
+son compatibles con LaTeX. La tabla muestra el nombre de la instrucción
+y el tamaño real (en puntos) del tipo de letra correspondiente utilizado
+con las opciones de tamaño del documento ‘10pt’, ‘11pt’ y ‘12pt’,
+respectivamente (*note Opciones de Clase de Documento:: ).
+
+Instrucción ‘10pt’ ‘11pt’ ‘12pt’
+---------------------------------------------------------
+‘\tiny’ 5 6 6
+‘\scriptsize’ 7 8 8
+‘\footnotesize’ 8 9 10
+‘\small’ 9 10 10.95
+‘\normalsize’ (predeterminado) 10 10.95 12
+‘\large’ 12 12 14.4
+‘\Large’ 14.4 14.4 17.28
+‘\LARGE’ 14.4 14.4 17.28
+‘\huge’ 20.74 20.74 24.88
+‘\Huge’ 24.88 24.88 24.88
+
+ Las instrucciones tal como están listadas aquí son “formas
+declarativas”. El ámbito de aplicación de la forma declarativa dura
+hasta la instrucción “end” del estilo del tipo de letra o hasta el final
+del grupo actual. También puede utilizar la forma de entorno en estas
+instrucciones; por ejemplo, ‘\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}’.
+
+5.3 Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra
+=====================================================
+
+Estas instrucciones están destinadas principalmente para los escritores
+de macros y paquetes. Las instrucciones listadas anteriormente son sólo
+un subconjunto de las disponibles.
+
+‘\fontencoding{codificación}’
+ Selecciona la codificación del tipo de letra. Las codificaciones
+ válidas incluyen a ‘OT1’ y ‘T1’.
+
+‘\fontfamily{familia}’
+ Selecciona la familia del tipo de letra. Las familias válidas
+ incluyen:
+
+ • ‘cmr’ para Romana de Computadora Moderna
+ • ‘cmss’ para Sans Serif de Computadora Moderna
+ • ‘cmtt’ para Máquina de Escribir de Computadora Moderna
+
+ y muchas otras.
+
+‘\fontseries{series}’
+ Selecciona las series del tipo de letra. Las series válidas
+ incluyen:
+
+ • ‘m’ Mediana (normal)
+ • ‘b’ Negrita
+ • ‘c’ Condensada
+ • ‘bc’ Negrita condensada
+ • ‘bx’ Negrita extendida
+
+ y otras combinaciones diferentes.
+
+‘\fontshape{forma}’
+ Selecciona la forma del tipo de letra. Las formas válidas son:
+
+ • ‘n’ Vertical (normal)
+ • ‘it’ Cursiva
+ • ‘sl’ Oblicua (oblicua)
+ • ‘sc’ Versales
+ • ‘ui’ Cursiva vertical
+ • ‘ol’ Esquema
+
+ Las dos últimas formas no están disponibles para la mayoría de las
+ familias de tipos de letra.
+
+‘\fontsize{tamaño}{espaciado}’
+ Establece el tamaño de letra. El primer parámetro es el tamaño a
+ cambiar el tipo de letra y el segundo es el espaciado de línea a
+ usar; este se almacena en un parámetro denominado ‘\baselineskip’.
+ La unidad de ambos parámetros de manera predeterminada es pt. El
+ valor predeterminado de ‘\baselineskip’ para el tipo de letra
+ Computadora Moderna es 1.2 veces ‘\fontsize’.
+
+ El interlineado de espacio doble también es multiplicado por el
+ valor del parámetro ‘\baselinestretch’ cuando cambia el tamaño del
+ tipo de letra; el predeterminado es 1. Sin embargo, la mejor
+ manera de hacer un documento con “doble espacio”, si tiene la
+ suficiente mala suerte de tener que producirlo, es usar el paquete
+ ‘setspace’; vea
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace>.
+
+‘\linespread{FACTOR}’
+ Equivalente a ‘\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}’, y por lo
+ tanto debe estar seguido por ‘\selectfont’ para que tenga algún
+ efecto. Es mejor especificarlo en el preámbulo, o utilizar el
+ paquete ‘setspace’, justo como se acaba de describir anteriormente.
+
+ Las modificaciones introducidas por llamar a la fuente de las
+ instrucciones descritas anteriormente no entrará en vigor sino
+ hasta que se invoque a ‘\selectfont’.
+
+‘\usefont{codificación}{familia}{series}{forma}’
+ Lo mismo que invocar a ‘\fontencoding’, ‘\fontfamily’,
+ ‘\fontseries’ y ‘\fontshape’ con los parámetros dados, seguida por
+ ‘\selectfont’.
+
+6 Diseño
+********
+
+Varias instrucciones para controlar el diseño general de la página.
+
+6.1 ‘\onecolumn’
+================
+
+La declaración ‘\onecolumn’ comienza una nueva página y la produce con
+una sola columna. Este es el valor predeterminado.
+
+6.2 ‘\twocolumn’
+================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \twocolumn[TEXTOCOLUMNA1]
+
+ La declaración ‘\twocolumn’ comienza una nueva página y la produce
+con dos columnas. Si el argumento opcional TEXTOCOLUMNA1 está presente,
+esta es compuesta en modo de una columna antes de comenzar la
+composición de las dos columnas.
+
+ Estos parámetros controlan la tipografía en la producción de dos
+columnas:
+
+‘\columnsep’
+ La distancia entre las columnas (de manera predeterminada a 35pt).
+
+‘\columnseprule’
+ El ancho de la regla entre columnas; el predeterminado es 0pt, por
+ lo tanto no hay regla.
+
+‘\columnwidth’
+ El ancho de la columna actual; este es igual a ‘\textwidth’ en
+ texto de una sola columna.
+
+ Estos parámetros controlan el comportamiento de la flotación de las
+dos columnas producidas:
+
+‘\dbltopfraction’
+ Máxima fracción en la parte superior de una página de dos columna
+ que pueden ocupar los flotantes. El predeterminado es ‘.7’, puede
+ ser útil redefinirlo a (digamos) ‘.9’ para evitar llegar tan pronto
+ a páginas flotantes.
+
+‘\dblfloatpagefraction’
+ La mínima fracción de una página con flotantes que deben ocupar los
+ flotantes, para una página de dos columnas con flotantes. El
+ predeterminado es ‘.5’.
+
+‘\dblfloatsep’
+ Distancia entre flotantes en la parte superior o inferior de una
+ página de dos columnas con flotantes. Predeterminado a ‘12pt
+ plus2pt minus2pt’ para ‘10pt’ y ‘11pt’ para documentos, ‘14pt
+ plus2pt minus4pt’ para ‘12pt’.
+
+‘\dbltextfloatsep’
+ Distancia entre un flotante multicolumna en la parte superior o
+ inferior de una página y el texto principal. De manera
+ predeterminada es ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’.
+
+6.3 ‘\flushbottom’
+==================
+
+La declaración ‘\flushbottom’ hace que todas las páginas tengan la misma
+altura, añadiendo espacio vertical extra donde sea necesario para llenar
+la página.
+
+ Este es el predeterminado si se selecciona el modo ‘twocolumn’ (*note
+Opciones de Clase de Documento::).
+
+6.4 ‘\raggedbottom’
+===================
+
+La declaración ‘\raggedbottom’ hace que todas las páginas tengan la
+altura natural del material en esa página. Sin longitudes flexibles que
+se deban ajustar.
+
+6.5 Parámetros para el Diseño de Página
+=======================================
+
+‘\headheight’
+ Altura de la caja que contiene el encabezado. El predeterminado es
+ ‘30pt’, salvo en la clase ‘book’, donde este varía con el tamaño de
+ letra.
+
+‘\headsep’
+ Distancia vertical entre la línea inferior de la cabecera y la
+ parte superior del texto principal. El predeterminado es ‘25pt’,
+ salvo en la clase ‘book’, donde este varía con el tamaño de letra.
+
+‘\footskip’
+ Distancia desde la línea base de la última línea de texto a la
+ línea base del pié de página. El predeterminado es ‘30pt’, salvo
+ en la clase ‘book’, donde este varía con el tamaño de letra.
+
+‘\linewidth’
+ Ancho de la línea actual; el predeterminado varía con el tamaño de
+ fuente, el ancho del papel, el modo two-column, etc. Para un
+ documento ‘article’ en ‘10pt’, este se establece a ‘345pt’; en modo
+ two-column, este cambia a ‘229.5pt’.
+
+‘\textheight’
+ La altura vertical normal del cuerpo de la página; el
+ predeterminado varía con el tamaño de letra, clase de documento,
+ etc. Para un documento ‘article’ o ‘report’ en ‘10pt’, este se
+ fija a ‘43\baselineskip’; para ‘book’, es ‘41\baselineskip’. Para
+ ‘11pt’, es ‘38\baselineskip’ y para ‘12pt’, ‘36\baselineskip’.
+
+‘\textwidth’
+ El ancho horizontal normal del cuerpo de la página; el
+ predeterminado varía de la manera usual. Para un documento
+ ‘article’ o ‘report’, es ‘345pt’ en ‘10pt’, ‘360pt’ en ‘11pt’ y
+ ‘390pt’ en ‘12pt’. Para un documento ‘book’, es ‘4.5in’ en ‘10pt’
+ y ‘5in’ en ‘11pt’ o ‘12pt’.
+
+‘\topmargin’
+ Espacio entre la parte superior de la página TeX (de manera
+ predeterminada, una pulgada en la parte superior del papel) y en la
+ parte superior del encabezado. El predeterminado se calcula
+ basándose en muchos otros parámetros: ‘\paperheight − 2in −
+ \headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip’, y luego se
+ divide entre dos.
+
+‘\topskip’
+ La distancia mínima entre la parte superior del cuerpo de la página
+ y la línea base de la primer línea de texto. Para clases estándar,
+ el predeterminado es el mismo que el tamaño de letra, por ejemplo,
+ ‘10pt’ en ‘10pt’.
+
+7 Seccionado
+************
+
+Las instrucciones de seccionado proporcionan los medios para estructurar
+su texto en unidades:
+
+‘\part’
+‘\chapter’
+ (únicamente las clases ‘report’ y ‘book’)
+‘\section’
+‘\subsection’
+‘\subsubsection’
+‘\paragraph’
+‘\subparagraph’
+
+ Todas las instrucciones de seccionado tienen la misma forma general,
+por ejemplo,
+
+ \chapter[TÍTULOBREVE]{TÍTULO}
+
+ Además de proporcionar el encabezado TÍTULO en el texto principal, el
+título de la sección puede aparecer en otros dos lugares:
+
+ 1. La tabla de contenido.
+ 2. El título breve en la parte superior de la página.
+
+ Tal vez no quiera el mismo texto en estos lugares como en el texto
+principal. Para controlar esto, las instrucciones de seccionado tienen
+un argumento opcional, TOCTITLE que, cuando se proporciona, especifica
+el texto de esos otros lugares.
+
+ Además, todas las instrucciones de seccionado tienen formas con ‘*’
+que imprimen el TÍTULO de la manera usual, pero no incluyen un número y
+no producen una entrada en la tabla de contenido. Por ejemplo:
+
+ \section*{Preámbulo}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\appendix’ cambia la manera en que se numeran las
+siguientes unidades de sección. La instrucción ‘\appendix’ en sí misma
+no genera texto y no afecta la númeración de las partes. El uso normal
+de esta instrucción es algo así como:
+
+ \chapter{Un Capítulo}
+ ...
+ \appendix
+ \chapter{El Primer Apéndice}
+
+ El contador ‘secnumdepth’ controla la impresión de los números de
+sección. La configuración
+
+ \setcounter{secnumdepth}{NIVEL}
+
+suprime los números en encabezados y cualquier profundidad > NIVEL,
+donde ‘chapter’ es el nivel cero. (*Note \setcounter::.)
+
+8 Referencias Cruzadas
+**********************
+
+Una razón para numerar cosas como figuras y ecuaciones es para referir
+al lector a ellas, como en “Vea la Figura 3 para más detalles”.
+
+8.1 ‘\label’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \label{CLAVE}
+
+ Una instrucción ‘\label’ que aparece en un texto normal asigna a
+CLAVE el número de la unidad de sección actual; que aparece dentro de un
+entorno numerado asignando ese número a CLAVE.
+
+ Un nombre de CLAVE puede consistir de cualquier secuencia de letras,
+dígitos, o caracteres de puntuación. Distingue entre letras mayúsculas
+y minúsculas.
+
+ Para evitar la creación accidental de dos etiquetas con el mismo
+nombre, es común el uso de etiquetas que consisten de un prefijo y un
+sufijo, separados por una coma o un punto. Algunos prefijos utilizados
+convencionalmente:
+
+‘ch’
+ para capítulos
+‘sec’
+ para instrucciones de seccionado de bajo nivel
+‘fig’
+ para figuras
+‘tab’
+ para tablas
+‘eq’
+ para ecuaciones
+
+ Por lo tanto, una etiqueta para una figura parecería como ‘fig:snark’
+o ‘fig.snark’.
+
+8.2 ‘\pageref{CLAVE}’
+=====================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \pageref{CLAVE}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\pageref’{CLAVE} produce el número de página del
+lugar en el texto en donde aparece la instrucción ‘\label’{CLAVE}.
+
+8.3 ‘\ref{CLAVE}’
+=================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \ref{CLAVE}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\ref’ produce el número de la unidad de sección de la
+ecuación, pie de página, figura, ..., de la instrucción ‘\label’
+correspondiente (*note \label::). Esta no produce ningún texto, como
+por ejemplo la palabra ‘Sección’ o ‘figura’, únicamente el número.
+
+9 Entornos
+**********
+
+LaTeX proporciona muchos entornos para marcar cierto texto. Cada
+entorno comienza y termina de la misma manera:
+
+ \begin{NOMBREENTORNO}
+ ...
+ \end{NOMBREENTORNO}
+
+9.1 ‘abstract’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+ \begin{abstract}
+ ...
+ \end{abstract}
+
+ Entorno para producir un resumen, posiblemente de varios párrafos.
+
+9.2 ‘array’
+===========
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{array}{PLANTILLA}
+ TEXTO COL1&TEXTO COL1&COLN}\\
+ ...
+ \end{array}
+
+ Las matrices matemáticas se producen con el entorno ‘array’,
+normalmente dentro de un entorno ‘equation’ (*note equation::). Tiene
+un único argumento PLANTILLA obligatorio que describe el número de
+columnas y la alineación dentro de ellas. Cada columna COL se
+especifica por una sola letra que indica cual formato debe tener cada
+linea en esta columna de la siguiente manera:
+
+‘c’
+ centrada
+‘l’
+ alineada a la izquierda
+‘r’
+ alineada a la derecha
+
+ La entradas de columna son separadas con ‘&’. Las entradas de
+columna pueden incluir otras instrucciones LaTeX. Cada fila de la
+matriz se termina con ‘\\’.
+
+ En la plantilla, la construcción ‘@{TEXTO}’ coloca TEXTO entre
+columnas en cada fila.
+
+ He aquí un ejemplo:
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \begin{array}{lrc}
+ izquierda1 & derecha1 & centrado1 \\
+ izquierda2 & derecha2 & centrado2 \\
+ \end{array}
+ \end{equation}
+
+ El parámetro ‘\arraycolsep’ define la mitad del ancho del espacio de
+separación entre columnas; el predeterminado es ‘5pt’. *Note tabular::,
+para otros parámetros que afectan el formato en entornos ‘array’, a
+saber ‘\arrayrulewidth’ y ‘\arraystretch’.
+
+ El entorno ‘array’ únicamente se puede utilizar en modo math.
+
+9.3 ‘center’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{center}
+ LÍNEA1 \\
+ LÍNEA2 \\
+ \end{center}
+
+ El entorno ‘center’ le permite crear un párrafo consistente de líneas
+que están centradas respecto al margen izquierdo y derecho de la página
+actual. Cada línea es terminada con dobles barras inversas ‘\\’.
+
+9.3.1 ‘\centering’
+------------------
+
+La declaración ‘\centering’ corresponde al entorno ‘center’. Esta
+declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un entorno tal como ‘quote’ o en
+un ‘parbox’. Por lo tanto, el texto de una figura o una tabla se puede
+centrar en la página poniendo una instrucción ‘\centering’ al principio
+de la figura o en el entorno table.
+
+ A diferencia del entorno ‘center’, la instrucción ‘\centering’ no
+comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta simplemente cambia el formato que LaTeX
+aplica a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar el formato de la unidad
+de párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe contener una línea en
+blanco o la instrucción ‘\end’ (de un entorno tal como quote), que
+finaliza la unidad de párrafo.
+
+ He aquí un ejemplo:
+
+ \begin{quote}
+ \centering
+ primer línea \\
+ segunda línea \\
+ \end{quote}
+
+9.4 ‘description’
+=================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{description}
+ \item [ETIQUETA1] ELEMENTO1
+ \item [ETIQUETA2] ELEMENTO2
+ ...
+ \end{description}
+
+ El entorno ‘description’ se utiliza para hacer listas etiquetadas.
+Cada ETIQUETA es compuesta tipográficamente en negrita, alineada a la
+derecha. El texto del ELEMENTO puede contener múltiples párrafos.
+
+ Otra variación: debido a que el estilo negrita se aplica a las
+etiquetas, si usted compone una etiqueta en máquina de escribir usando
+‘\texttt’, obtendrá una máquina de escribir en negrita:
+‘\item[\texttt{máquina de escribir y negrita}]’. Esta también puede
+estar en negrita, entre otras cuestiones. Para obtener sólo en máquina
+de escribir, use ‘\tt’, que restablece todas las variaciones de otros
+estilos: ‘\item[{\tt máquina de escribir simple}]’.
+
+ Para detalles acerca del espaciado en listas, vea *note itemize::.
+
+9.5 ‘displaymath’
+=================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ FÓRMULA MATEMÁTICA
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+o
+
+ \[MATH\]
+
+ El entorno ‘displaymath’ (‘\[...\]’ es un sinónimo) de composición
+tipográfica de texto MATH en una línea independiente, centrada de manera
+predeterminada. La opción global ‘fleqn’ produce ecuaciones alineadas a
+la izquierda; vea *note Opciones de Clase de Documento::.
+
+ No se añade un número de ecuación al texto de ‘displaymath’; Para
+obtener un número de ecuación, utilice el entorno ‘equation’ (*note
+equation::).
+
+9.6 ‘document’
+==============
+
+El entorno ‘document’ encierra el cuerpo de un documento. este es
+obligatorio en cada documento LaTeX. *Note Iniciando y Finalizando::.
+
+9.7 ‘enumerate’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item ELEMENTO1
+ \item ELEMENTO2
+ ...
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ El entorno ‘enumerate’ produce una lista numerada. Las enumeraciones
+se pueden anidar unas dentro de otras, hasta cuatro niveles de
+profundidad. Estas también se pueden anidar en otros entornos de
+párrafo, tal como ‘itemize’ (*note itemize::) y ‘description’ (*note
+description::).
+
+ Cada elemento de una lista enumerada comienza con una instrucción
+‘\item’. En el entorno por lo menos debe haber una instrucción ‘\item’.
+
+ De manera predeterminada, la numeración de cada nivel se hace de la
+siguiente manera:
+
+ 1. 1., 2., ...
+ 2. (a), (b), ...
+ 3. i., ii., ...
+ 4. A., B., ...
+
+ El entorno ‘enumerate’ usa los contadores ‘\enumi’ hasta ‘\enumiv’
+(*note Contadores::). Si se proporciona el argumento opcional a
+‘\item’, el contador no se incrementa por cada elemento.
+
+ El entorno ‘enumerate’ utiliza las instrucciones desde ‘\labelenumi’
+hasta ‘\labelenumiv’ para producir la etiqueta predeterminada. Por lo
+tanto, usted puede usar ‘\renewcommand’ para cambiar las etiquetas
+(*note \newcommand y \renewcommand::). Por ejemplo, para hacer que el
+primer nivel use letras mayúsculas:
+
+ \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
+
+9.8 ‘eqnarray’
+==============
+
+ \begin{eqnarray} (o ‘eqnarray*’)
+ FÓRMULA1 \\
+ FÓRMULA2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{eqnarray}
+
+ El entorno ‘eqnarray’ se utiliza para mostrar una secuencia de
+ecuaciones o desigualdades. Es muy parecido a un entorno ‘array’ de
+tres columnas, con filas consecutivas separadas por ‘\\’ y elementos
+consecutivos en una fila, separados por un ‘&’.
+
+ también puede utilizar ‘\\*’ para separar ecuaciones independientes,
+con su propósito normal de no permitir saltos de página en esa línea.
+
+ Se coloca un número de ecuación en cada línea a menos que la línea
+tenga una instrucción ‘\nonumber’. Alternativamente, la forma del
+entorno con ‘*’ (‘\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}’) debe omitir
+por completo la numeración de la ecuación, al tiempo que el mismo
+comienza con ‘eqnarray’.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\lefteqn’ se utiliza para dividir grandes fórmulas a
+través de varias líneas. Su argumento de composición tipográfica en el
+estilo de visualización alinea a la izquierda en una caja de ancho cero.
+
+9.9 ‘equation’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ FÓRMULA-MATEMÁTICA
+ \end{equation}
+
+ El entorno ‘equation’ comienza un entorno ‘displaymath’ (*note
+displaymath::), por ejemplo, centrando en la página el texto MATH, y
+además colocando el número de ecuación en el margen derecho.
+
+9.10 ‘figure’
+=============
+
+ \begin{figure[*]}[ÚBICACIÓN]
+ FIGBODY
+ \label{ETIQUETA}
+ \caption[TÍTULOBREVE]{TEXTO}
+ \end{figure}
+
+ Las figuras son objetos que no forman parte del texto normal, y en su
+lugar son “flotados” a un lugar conveniente, como en la parte superior
+de una página. Las figuras no se dividen entre dos páginas.
+
+ Cuando se compone tipográficamente en columnas dobles, la forma
+favorita produce un ancho completo (a través de las dos columnas).
+
+ El argumento opcional ‘[ubicación]’ determina donde debe tratar de
+colocar LaTeX su figura. Hay cuatro lugares donde LaTeX, posiblemente,
+pueda colocar un flotante:
+
+‘t’
+ (Top)—en lo alto de una página de texto.
+
+‘b’
+ (Bottom)—en la parte inferior de una página de texto. No obstante,
+ ‘b’ no se permite para flotantes de ancho completo (‘figure*’) en
+ entornos con columnas dobles. Para mejorar esto, utilice el
+ paquete ‘stfloats’ o ‘dblfloatfix’, pero vea el debate de
+ advertencias en el FAQ:
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat>.
+
+‘h’
+ (Here)—aquí, en la posición donde aparece el entorno ‘figure’ en el
+ texto. Sin embargo, este no está permitido por sí mismo,
+ automáticamente se añade ‘t’. Para forzar que una figura
+ absolutamente aparezca “aquí”, utilice el paquete ‘float’ y use la
+ letra de ubicación ‘H’. (Este paquete también ofrece otras
+ opciones).
+
+‘p’
+ (Página de flotantes)—en una página de flotantes separada, misma
+ que es una página que no contiene texto, únicamente flotantes.
+
+ Las clases estándar ‘report’ y ‘article’ utilizan la ubicación
+predeterminada ‘tbp’.
+
+ El cuerpo de la figura se compone de cualquier texto, instrucciones
+LaTeX, etc., que desee.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\caption’ especifica el TEXTO del título de la
+figura. El título de manera predeterminada lleva el número. Si
+LOFTITLE está presente, esta se utiliza en la lista de figuras en lugar
+del TEXTO (*note Tablas de Contenido::).
+
+ La fracción máxima de la página que se permite sea ocupada por
+ flotantes en la parte inferior; el predeterminado es ‘.3’.
+
+‘\floatpagefraction’
+ La fracción mínima de una página flotante que deben ocupar los
+ flotantes; predeterminado a ‘.5’.
+
+‘\floatsep’
+ Espacio entre flotantes en la parte superior o inferior de una
+ página; predeterminado a ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’.
+
+‘\intextsep’
+ Espacio por encima y por debajo de un flotante en medio del texto
+ principal; predeterminado a ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ para estilos de
+ ‘10pt’ y ‘11pt’, ‘14pt plus4pt minus4pt’ para ‘12pt’.
+
+‘\textfloatsep’
+ Espacio entre el último/primero flotante en la parte
+ superior/inferior de una página; de manera predeterminada a ‘20pt
+ plus2pt minus4pt’.
+
+‘\textfraction’
+ Mínima fracción de una página que debe ser texto; si los flotantes
+ ocupan mucho espacio preserva tanto texto como sea posible, para
+ que los flotantes sean trasladados a una página diferente. El
+ predeterminado es ‘.2’.
+
+‘\topfraction’
+ Máxima fracción en la parte superior de una página que se puede
+ ocupar antes de los flotantes; el predeterminado es ‘.7’.
+
+9.11 ‘filecontents’: Crear un archivo externo
+=============================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{filecontents}{NOMBRE-DEL-ARCHIVO}
+ TEXTO
+ \end{filecontents}
+
+ o
+
+ \begin{filecontents*}{NOMBRE-DEL-ARCHIVO}
+ TEXTO
+ \end{filecontents*}
+
+ LaTeX crea un archivo llamado NOMBRE-DEL-ARCHIVO cuyo contenido es
+TEXTO. El entorno sin ‘*’ pone comentario de cabecera ; ver el ejemplo
+más abajo. Con ‘*’ ‘filecontents*’ no incluye el comentario de
+cabecera.
+
+ Este entorno puede ser utilizado en cualquier lugar en el preámbulo,
+aunque aparezca en general antes de la instrucción ‘\documentclass’. Es
+típicamente utilizado cuando el archivo fuente necesita un archivo no
+estándar de estilo o de clase. El entorno permite escribir este archivo
+en el repertorio que contiene este archivo y así de devolver el código
+fuente autónoma. Otra utilización es incluir referencia al formato
+‘bib’ en el archivo fuente, lo mismo para hacerlo autónomo.
+
+ El entorno verifica si un archivo con lo mismo nombre ya existe, y si
+sí, no hace nada. Hay un paquete ‘filecontents’ quién vuelve a definir
+el entorno ‘filecontents’ de modo que en lugar de no hacer nada en este
+caso, sobrescribe en el archivo existente.
+
+ Por ejemplo, este documento
+
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \begin{filecontents}{JH.sty}
+ \newcommand{\minombre}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+ \end{filecontents}
+ \usepackage{JH}
+ \begin{document}
+ Un artículo de \minombre.
+ \end{document}
+
+ produce este archivo ‘JH.sty’.
+
+ %% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
+ %% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+ %% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
+ %%
+ \newcommand{\minombre}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+
+9.12 ‘flushleft’
+================
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ LÍNEA1 \\
+ LÍNEA2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ El entorno ‘flushleft’ le permite crear un párrafo consistente de
+líneas que están alineadas en el margen de la mano izquierda y no están
+justificadas a la derecha. Cada línea se debe terminar con ‘\\’.
+
+9.12.1 ‘\raggedright’
+---------------------
+
+La declaración ‘\raggedright’ corresponde al entorno ‘flushleft’. Esta
+declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un entorno tal como ‘quote’ o en
+un ‘parbox’.
+
+ A diferencia del entorno ‘flushleft’, la instrucción ‘\raggedright’
+no comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta únicamente cambia como aplica LaTeX
+el formato a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar el formato de la
+unidad párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe contener una línea en
+blanco o la instrucción ‘\end’ que termina la unidad de párrafo.
+
+9.13 ‘flushright’
+=================
+
+ \begin{flushright}
+ LÍNEA1 \\
+ LÍNEA2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{flushright}
+
+ El entorno ‘flushright’ le permite crear un párrafo consistente de
+líneas que están alineadas en el margen a mano derecha e irregulares a
+la izquierda. Cada línea se debe terminar con ‘\\’.
+
+9.13.1 ‘\raggedleft’
+--------------------
+
+La declaración ‘\raggedleft’ corresponde al entorno ‘flushright’. Esta
+declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un entorno tal como ‘quote’ o en
+un ‘parbox’.
+
+ A diferencia del entorno ‘flushright’, la instrucción ‘\raggedleft’
+no comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta únicamente cambia como aplica LaTeX
+el formato a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar el formato de la
+unidad párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe contener una línea en
+blanco o la instrucción ‘\end’ que termina la unidad de párrafo.
+
+9.14 ‘itemize’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item ELEMENTO1
+ \item ELEMENTO2
+ ...
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ El entorno ‘itemize’ produce una lista “no ordenada”, “con viñetas”.
+Se pueden anidar entorno itemize dentro de otros, hasta cuatro niveles
+de profundidad. También se pueden anidar en otros entornos que marcan
+párrafos, tal como ‘enumerate’ (*note enumerate::).
+
+ Cada elemento de una lista ‘itemize’ comienza con una instrucción
+‘\item’. En el entorno por lo menos debe haber una instrucción ‘\item’.
+
+ De forma predeterminada, las marcas en cada nivel tienen esta
+apariencia:
+
+ 1. • (bala)
+ 2. -- (guión en negrita)
+ 3. * (asterisco)
+ 4. . (punto centrado, aquí representado como un punto)
+
+ El entorno ‘itemize’ utiliza las instrucciones desde ‘\labelitemi’
+hasta ‘\labelitemiv’ para producir la etiqueta predeterminada. De modo
+que, usted puede usar ‘\renewcommand’ para cambiar las etiquetas. Por
+ejemplo, para que en primer nivel utilice diamantes:
+
+ \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
+
+ Los parámetros desde ‘\leftmargini’ hasta ‘\leftmarginvi’ definen la
+distancia entre el margen izquierdo del entorno envolvente y el margen
+izquierdo de la lista. Por convención, ‘\leftmargin’ se fija al
+‘\leftmarginN’ adecuado cuando ingresa a un nuevo nivel de anidamiento.
+
+ El predeterminado varía desde ‘.5em’ (el nivel de anidamiento
+superior) a ‘2.5em’ (el primer nivel), y se reduce un poco en modo
+two-column. En este ejemplo se reduce mucho el espacio del margen para
+las listas anidadas:
+
+ \setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % predeterminado 2.5em
+
+ Algunos parámetros que afectan el formato de la lista:
+
+‘\itemindent’
+ Sangrado extra antes de cada elemento de una lista; predeterminado
+ a cero.
+
+‘\labelsep’
+ Espacio entre la etiqueta y el texto de un elemento; predeterminado
+ a ‘.5em’.
+
+‘\labelwidth’
+ Ancho de la etiqueta; predeterminado a ‘2em’, o ‘1.5em’ en modo
+ two-column.
+
+‘\listparindent’
+ Sangría extra añadida al segundo y subsecuentes párrafos, dentro de
+ un elemento de la lista; predeterminado a ‘0pt’.
+
+‘\rightmargin’
+ Distancia horizontal entre el margen derecho de la lista y el
+ entorno envolvente; de manera predeterminada ‘0pt’, salbo en los
+ entornos ‘quote’, ‘quotation’ y ‘verse’, donde se hace igual a
+ ‘\leftmargin’.
+
+ Parámetros que afectan el espaciamiento vertical entre elementos de
+la lista (más bien libre, de manera predeterminada).
+
+‘\itemsep’
+ Espacio vertical entre elementos. El predeterminado es ‘2pt
+ plus1pt minus1pt’ para ‘10pt’ documentos, ‘3pt plus2pt minus1pt’
+ para ‘11pt’ y ‘4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt’ para ‘12pt’.
+
+‘\parsep’
+ Espacio vertical extra entre párrafos dentro de un elemento de la
+ lista. Los predeterminados son los mismos que para ‘\itemsep’.
+
+‘\topsep’
+ Espacio vertical entre el primer elemento y el párrafo anterior.
+
+ Para listas de nivel superior, el predeterminado es ‘8pt plus2pt
+ minus4pt’ para ‘10pt’ documentos, ‘9pt plus3pt minus5pt’ para
+ ‘11pt’ y ‘10pt plus4pt minus6pt’ para ‘12pt’. Estos se reducen en
+ listas anidadas.
+
+‘\partopsep’
+ Espacio extra añadido a ‘\topsep’ cuando el entorno lista comienza
+ un párrafo. El valor predeterminado es ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’ para
+ ‘10pt’ documentos, ‘3pt plus1pt minus1pt’ para ‘11pt’ y ‘3pt
+ plus2pt minus2pt’ para ‘12pt’.
+
+ Sobre todo para listas con elementos cortos, puede ser conveniente
+eludir los espacios entre ellos. He aquí un ejemplo de una definición
+del entorno ‘itemize*’ sin espacio extra entre elementos o entre
+párrafos dentro de un solo elemento (‘\parskip’ no es específico de la
+lista, *note \parskip::):
+
+ \newenvironment{itemize*}%
+ {\begin{itemize}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+ \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
+ {\end{itemize}}
+
+9.15 Entorno ‘letter’: Escribiendo Cartas
+=========================================
+
+Este entorno se utiliza para crear cartas. *Note Cartas::.
+
+9.16 ‘list’
+===========
+
+El entorno ‘list’ es un entorno genérico que se utiliza para definir
+mucho de los entornos más específicos. Este rara vez se utiliza en
+documentos, pero a muy menudo en las macros.
+
+ \begin{list}{ETIQUETADO}{ESPACIADO}
+ \item ELEMENTO1
+ \item ELEMENTO2
+ ...
+ \end{list}
+
+ El argumento obligatorio ETIQUETADO especifica como se deben
+etiquetar los elementos (a menos que se especifique el argumento
+opcional ‘\item’). Este argumento es una pieza de texto que se inserta
+en una caja para formar la etiqueta. Este se puede y suele contener
+otras instrucciones LaTeX.
+
+ El argumento obligatorio SPACING contiene instrucciones para cambiar
+los parámetros de espaciado para la lista. Este argumento por lo
+regular está vacío, es decir, ‘{}’, lo cual deja el espaciado
+predeterminado.
+
+9.17 ‘math’
+===========
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{math}
+ FÓRMULA-MATEMÁTICA
+ \end{math}
+
+ El entorno ‘math’ inserta la fórmula MATH dada dentro del texto
+actual. ‘\(...\))’ y ‘$...$’ son sinónimos. *Note Fórmulas
+Matemáticas::.
+
+9.18 ‘minipage’
+===============
+
+ \begin{minipage}[POSICIÓN][ALTO][POS-INTERNA]{ANCHO}
+ TEXTO
+ \end{minipage}
+
+ El entorno ‘minipage’ compone tipográficamente su cuerpo de TEXTO en
+un bloque que no debe abarcar varias páginas. Este es similar a la
+instrucción ‘\parbox’ (*note \parbox::), pero a diferencia de ‘\parbox’,
+se pueden utilizar otros entornos de marcado de párrafos dentro de una
+minipágina.
+
+ Los argumentos son los mismos que para ‘\parbox’ (*note \parbox::).
+
+ De forma predeterminada, en el entorno ‘minipage’ los párrafos no
+tienen sangría. Usted puede restablecer la sangría con una instrucción
+tal como ‘\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}’.
+
+ La notas al pie en un entorno ‘minipage’ son manipuladas de una
+manera que es especialmente útil para poner notas en figuras o tablas.
+Una instrucción ‘\footnote’ o ‘\footnotetext’ coloca la nota al pie en
+la parte inferior de la minipágina en lugar de en la parte inferior de
+la página, y esta utiliza el contador ‘\mpfootnote’ en lugar del
+contador normal ‘footnote’ (*note Contadores::).
+
+ No obstante, no ponga una minipágina dentro de otra si usted está
+usando notas al pie; estas pueden terminar mal en la parte inferior de
+la minipágina.
+
+9.19 ‘picture’
+==============
+
+ \begin{picture}(ancho,alto)(desplazamiento x,desplazamiento y)
+ ... INSTRUCCIONES DE IMAGEN ...
+ \end{picture}
+
+ El entorno ‘picture’ le permite crear casi cualquier clase de imagen
+que desee que contenga su texto, lineas, flechas y círculos. Usted le
+dice a LaTeX dónde colocar las cosas en la imagen especificando sus
+coordenadas. Una coordenada es un número que puede tener un punto
+decimal y un signo menos — un número como ‘5’, ‘0.3’ o ‘-3.1416’. Una
+coordenada especifica una longitud en múltiplos de la unidad de longitud
+‘\unitlength’, por lo que si ‘\unitlength’ se ha establecido en ‘1cm’,
+entonces la coordenada 2.54 especifica una longitud de 2.54 centímetros.
+Sólo debe cambiar el valor de ‘\unitlength’, utilizando la instrucción
+‘\setlength’, fuera del entorno ‘picture’.
+
+ Una posición es un par de coordenadas, por ejemplo, ‘(2.4, -5)’, que
+especifican el punto con coordenada x ‘2.4’ y coordenada y ‘-5’. Las
+coordenadas se especifican en la forma habitual con respecto a un
+origen, que normalmente está en la esquina inferior izquierda de la
+imagen. Tenga en cuenta que cuando una posición se presenta como un
+argumento, no se encierra entre llaves; los paréntesis sirven para
+delimitar el argumento.
+
+ El entorno ‘picture’ tiene un argumento obligatorio, el cual es una
+‘posición’. este especifica el tamaño de la imagen. El entorno produce
+una caja rectangular con la anchura y altura determinada por los
+argumentos de las coordenadas x e y.
+
+ El entorno ‘picture’ también tiene un argumento opcional ‘posición’,
+seguido del argumento ‘tamaño’, que puede cambiar el origen. (A
+diferencia de los argumentos opcionales, este argumento no está
+contenido entre corchetes). El argumento opcional proporciona las
+coordenadas del punto en la esquina inferior izquierda de la imagen (con
+el cual se determina el origen). Por ejemplo, si ‘\unitlength’ se ha
+fijado a ‘1mm’, la instrucción
+
+ \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+
+produce una imagen de 100 milímetros de ancho y 200 milímetros de
+altura, cuya esquina inferior izquierda está en el punto (10,20) y cuya
+esquina superior derecha está en el punto (110,220). La primera vez que
+haga un dibujo, normalmente se omite el argumento opcional, dejando el
+origen en el ángulo inferior izquierdo. Si a continuación desea
+modificar su imagen, trasladando todo, basta con añadir el argumento
+opcional apropiado.
+
+ El argumento obligatorio del entorno determina el tamaño nominal de
+la imagen. Esta no necesita tener ninguna relación con el tamaño de la
+imagen real; Felizmente LaTeX le permitirá poner cosas fuera de la
+imagen, o incluso fuera de la página. El tamaño nominal de la imagen lo
+utiliza LaTeX para determinar cuánto espacio dejar para ello.
+
+ Todo lo que aparece en una imagen es dibujado por la instrucción
+‘\put’. La instrucción
+
+ \put (11.3,-.3){...}
+
+coloca el objeto especificado por ‘...’ en la imagen, con su punto de
+referencia en las coordenadas (11.3, -.3). Los puntos de referencia
+para distintos objetos se describen a continuación.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\put’ crea una “caja LR”. Puede poner cualquier cosa
+que vaya en una ‘\mbox’ (*note \mbox::) en el argumento texto de la
+instrucción ‘\put’. Al hacer esto, el punto de referencia será la
+esquina inferior izquierda de la caja.
+
+ Las instrucciones para ‘picture’ están descritas en las siguientes
+secciones.
+
+9.19.1 ‘\circle’
+----------------
+
+ \circle[*]{DIÁMETRO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\circle’ produce un círculo con un diámetro lo más
+cercano posible al especificado. La forma con ‘*’ de la instrucción
+dibuja un círculo sólido.
+
+ Se pueden dibujar círculos de hasta 40 pt.
+
+9.19.2 ‘\makebox’
+-----------------
+
+ \makebox(ANCHO,ALTO)[POSICIÓN]{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\makebox’ para el entorno ‘picture’ es similar a la
+instrucción normal ‘\makebox’ excepto que usted debe especificar el
+ANCHO y ALTO en múltiplos de ‘\unitlength’.
+
+ El argumento opcional, ‘[POSICIÓN]’, especifica el cuadrante en el
+que debe aparecer el TEXTO. Usted puede seleccionar hasta dos de los
+siguientes:
+
+‘t’
+ Mueve el elemento a la parte superior del rectángulo.
+
+‘b’
+ Mueve el elemento a la parte inferior.
+
+‘l’
+ Mueve el elemento a la izquierda.
+
+‘r’
+ Mueve el elemento hacia la derecha.
+
+ *Note \makebox::.
+
+9.19.3 ‘\framebox’
+------------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \framebox(ANCHO,ALTO)[POSICIÓN]{...}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\framebox’ es como ‘\makebox’ (vea la sección
+anterior), excepto que esta coloca un marco en el exterior alrededor de
+la caja que crea.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\framebox’ produce una regla de espesor ‘\fboxrule’,
+y deja un espacio ‘\fboxsep’ entre la regla y el contenido de la caja.
+
+9.19.4 ‘\dashbox’
+-----------------
+
+Dibuja un cuadro con una línea discontinua. Sinopsis:
+
+ \dashbox{GLARGO}(RANCHO,RALTO)[POSICIÓN]{TEXTO}
+
+ ‘\dashbox’ crea un rectángulo discontinuo alrededor del TEXTO en un
+entorno ‘picture’. Los guiones son de GLARGO unidades de largo, y el
+rectángulo tiene una anchura total de RANCHO y una altura de RALTO. El
+TEXTO es posicionado en la POSICIÓN opcional.
+
+ Un cuadro de líneas discontinuas se ve mejor cuando RANCHO y RALTO
+son múltiplos de GLARGO.
+
+9.19.5 ‘\frame’
+---------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \frame{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\frame’ coloca un marco rectangular alrededor de
+TEXTO. El punto de referencia es la esquina inferior izquierda del
+marco. No añade espacio extra entre el marco y el objeto.
+
+9.19.6 ‘\line’
+--------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \line(DECLIVEX,DECLIVEY){LONGITUD}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\line’ dibuja una línea con la LONGITUD dada y
+declive DECLIVEX/DECLIVEY.
+
+ LaTeX estándar únicamente puede dibujar líneas con DECLIVE = x/y,
+donde x y y tienen valores enteros desde −6 hasta 6. Para líneas de
+cualquier declive, por no hablar de otras formas, vea el paquete
+‘curve2e’ y muchos, muchos otros paquetes en CTAN.
+
+9.19.7 ‘\linethickness’
+-----------------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\linethickness{ESPESOR}’ declara el grosor de las líneas
+horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture para que sean de
+ESPESOR, el cual debe ser una longitud positiva.
+
+ ‘\linethickness’ no afecta el espesor de las líneas inclinadas,
+círculos o los cuartos de círculo dibujados por ‘\oval’.
+
+9.19.8 ‘\thicklines’
+--------------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\thicklines’ es un espesor de línea alternativo para
+líneas horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture; compárese *note
+\linethickness:: y *note \thinlines::.
+
+9.19.9 ‘\thinlines’
+-------------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\thinlines’ es el espesor de línea predeterminado para
+líneas horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture; compárese *note
+\linethickness:: y *note \thicklines::.
+
+9.19.10 ‘\multiput’
+-------------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+ \multiput(X,Y)(DELTA_X,DELTA_Y){N}{OBJ}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\multiput’ copia el objeto OBJ en un patrón regular
+entre imágenes. primero se coloca OBJ en la posición (x,y), luego en la
+posición (x+\delta x,y+\delta y) y así sucesivamente, N veces.
+
+9.19.11 ‘\oval’
+---------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \oval(ANCHO,ALTO)[PORCIÓN]
+
+ La instrucción ‘\oval’ produce un rectángulo con esquinas
+redondeadas. El argumento opcional PORCIÓN le permite seleccionar la
+parte del óvalo vía las siguientes letras:
+
+‘t’
+ selecciona la parte superior;
+‘b’
+ selecciona la parte inferior;
+‘r’
+ selecciona la parte derecha;
+‘l’
+ selecciona la parte izquierda.
+
+ Las “esquinas” del óvalo se hacen con cuartos de círculo con un radio
+máximo de 20pt, por lo tanto los “óvalos” grandes se parecen más a cajas
+con esquinas redondeadas.
+
+9.19.12 ‘\put’
+--------------
+
+‘\put(XCOORD,YCOORD){ ... }’
+
+ La instrucción ‘\put’ coloca el elemento especificado por el
+argumento obligatorio en las coordenadas XCOORD e YCOORD proporcionadas.
+
+9.19.13 ‘\shortstack’
+---------------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \shortstack[POSICIÓN]{...\\...\\...}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\shortstack’ produce un montón de objetos. Las
+posiciones válidas son:
+
+‘r’
+ Mueve los objetos a la derecha de la pila.
+‘l’
+ Mueve los objetos a la izquierda de la pila
+‘c’
+ Mueve los objetos hacia el centro de la pila (predeterminado)
+
+ Los objetos son separados con ‘\\’.
+
+9.19.14 ‘\vector’
+-----------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \vector(DECLIVEX,DECLIVEY){LONGITUD}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\vector’ dibuja una línea con una flecha de la
+longitud y declive especificados. Los valores DECLIVEX i DECLIVEY deben
+estar entre −4 y +4 incluido.
+
+9.20 ‘quotation’
+================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{quotation}
+ TEXTO
+ \end{quotation}
+
+ A los márgenes del entorno ‘quotation’ se les aplica una sangría en
+ambos lados izquierdo y derecho. El texto está justificado en ambos
+márgenes. Dejar una línea en blanco entre el texto produce un nuevo
+párrafo.
+
+ A diferencia del entorno ‘quote’, cada párrafo normalmente tiene
+sangría.
+
+9.21 ‘quote’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{quote}
+ TEXTO
+ \end{quote}
+
+ A los márgenes del entorno ‘quote’ se les aplica una sangría en ambos
+lados izquierdo y derecho. El texto está justificado en ambos márgenes.
+Dejar una línea en blanco entre el texto produce un nuevo párrafo.
+
+ A diferencia del entorno ‘quotation’, a los párrafos no se les aplica
+una sangría.
+
+9.22 ‘tabbing’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ FILA1COL1 \= FILA1COL2 \= FILA1COL3 \= FILA1COL4 \\
+ FILA2COL1 \> \> FILA2COL3 \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+ El entorno ‘tabbing’ proporciona una manera de alinear el texto en
+columnas. Funciona mediante el establecimiento de tabuladores y
+tabulación tanto como si se hubiera hecho en una máquina de escribir
+común. Es el más adecuado para los casos en que el ancho de cada
+columna es constante y conocido de antemano.
+
+ Este entorno se puede dividir en varias páginas, a diferencia del
+entorno ‘tabular’.
+
+ Las siguientes instrucciones se pueden utilizar dentro de un entorno
+‘tabbing’:
+
+‘\\ tabbing’
+ Final de línea.
+
+‘\= (tabbing)’
+ Establece una tabulación en la posición actual.
+
+‘\> (tabbing)’
+ Avanza a la siguiente tabulación.
+
+‘\<’
+ Coloca el siguiente texto a la izquierda del margen local (sin
+ necesidad de cambiar el margen). Sólo se puede usar al comienzo de
+ la línea.
+
+‘\+’
+ Mueve hacia la derecha el margen izquierdo del siguiente y todas
+ las subsecuentes instrucciones de tabulación, empezando la línea de
+ tabulación, de ser necesario.
+
+‘\-’
+ Mueve el margen izquierdo hacia la izquierda de la siguiente y
+ todas las subsecuentes instrucciones de tabulación, comenzando con
+ la línea de tabulación si es necesario.
+
+‘\' (tabbing)’
+ Mueve todo lo que ha escrito hasta ahora en la columna actual, es
+ decir, cualquier cosa desde la instrucción ‘\>’, ‘\<’, ‘\'’, ‘\\’ o
+ ‘\kill’ más reciente, a la derecha de la columna anterior, a ras de
+ la tabulación de la columna actual.
+
+‘\` (tabbing)’
+ Permite poner texto alineado a la derecha contra cualquier
+ tabulación, incluyendo la tabulación 0. Sin embargo, no puede
+ mover el texto a la derecha de la última columna porque allí no hay
+ tabulación. La instrucción ‘\`’ mueve todo el texto que le sigue,
+ hasta la instrucción ‘\\’ o ‘\end{tabbing}’ que termina la línea,
+ al margen derecho del entorno tabbing. No debe haber instrucción
+ ‘\>’ o ‘\'’ entre el ‘\`’ y la instrucción que termina la línea.
+
+‘\a (tabbing)’
+ En un entorno ‘tabbing’, las instrucciones ‘\=’, ‘\'’ y ‘\`’ no
+ producen acentos en la manera usual (*note Acentos::). En su
+ lugar, se utilizan estas instrucciones ‘\a=’, ‘\a'’ y ‘\a`’.
+
+‘\kill’
+ Fija una tabulación sin producir texto. Trabaja igual que ‘\\’
+ salvo que esta desecha la línea actual en lugar de producir algo
+ útil. El efecto de cualquier instrucción ‘\=’, ‘\+’ o ‘\-’ en esa
+ línea seguirá en vigor.
+
+‘\poptabs’
+ Restaura las posiciones de tabulación salvadas por la última
+ ‘\pushtabs’.
+
+‘\pushtabs’
+ Guarda todas las posiciones de tabulación actuales. Útil para
+ cambiar temporalmente las posiciones de tabulación en medio de un
+ entorno ‘tabbing’.
+
+‘\tabbingsep’
+ Distancia a la izquierda de la tabulación movida por ‘\'’.
+
+ En este ejemplo se compone tipográficamente una función de Pascal en
+el formato tradicional:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \> begin \= \+ \\
+ \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+9.23 ‘table’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{table}[ubicación]
+
+ cuerpo de la tabla
+
+ \caption{título de la tabla}
+ \end{table}
+
+ Las tablas son objetos que no forman parte del texto normal, y por lo
+general “flotan” a un lugar conveniente, como la parte superior de una
+página. Las tablas no se dividen en dos páginas.
+
+ El argumento opcional ‘[ubicación]’ determina dónde LaTeX trata de
+colocar su tabla. Hay cuatro lugares donde LaTeX, posiblemente, pueda
+colocar un flotante:; estos son los mismo que los utilizados con el
+entorno ‘figure’, y se describen allí (*note figure::).
+
+ Las clases ‘report’ y ‘article’ estándar utilizan la ubicación
+‘[tbp]’ predeterminada.
+
+ El cuerpo de la tabla se compone de cualquier texto, instrucciones
+LaTeX, etc., que usted desee. La instrucción ‘\caption’ le permite
+colocar un título a su tabla.
+
+9.24 ‘tabular’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{tabular}[ubicación]{columnas}
+ columna 1 entrada & columna 2 entrada ... & columna n entrada n \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ o
+
+ \begin{tabular*}{ancho}[posición]{columnas}
+ columna 1 entrada & columna 2 entrada ... & columna n entrada n \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabular*}
+
+ Estos entornos producen una caja consiste de una secuencia de filas
+de elementos, alineadas verticalmente en columnas.
+
+ Se debe utilizar ‘\\’ para especificar el final de cada fila de la
+tabla, salvo por la última, en que esta es opcional —a menos que le siga
+una instrucción ‘\hline’ (para colocar una raya bajo la tabla).
+
+ Los argumentos obligatorios y opcionales consisten de:
+
+‘ancho’
+ Especifica la anchura del entorno ‘tabular*’. Este debe tener
+ espacio entre las columnas que se puede estirar para llenar el
+ ancho especificado.
+
+‘posición’
+ Especifica la posición vertical; de manera predeterminada alinea al
+ centro el entorno.
+
+ ‘t’
+ alineado en la fila superior
+ ‘b’
+ alineado en la fila inferior
+
+‘columnas’
+ Especifica el formato de columna. Este consiste en una secuencia
+ de los siguientes especificadores, correspondientes a la secuencia
+ de columnas y el material intercolumna.
+
+ ‘l’
+ Una columna de elementos alineados a la izquierda.
+
+ ‘r’
+ Una columna de elementos alineados a la derecha.
+
+ ‘c’
+ Una columna de elementos centrados.
+
+ ‘|’
+ Una línea vertical que llena la altura y profundidad total del
+ entorno.
+
+ ‘@{TEXTO}’
+ Esta inserta TEXTO en cada fila. Una @-expresión suprime el
+ espacio intercolumnas insertado normalmente entre columnas;
+ cualquier espacio deseado entre el texto insertado y los
+ elementos adyacentes se deberá incluir en TEXTO. Una
+ instrucción ‘\extracolsep{ancho}’ en una @-expresión provoca
+ que aparezca un espacio extra de ancho ‘ancho’ a la izquierda
+ de todas las columnas subsecuentes, hasta que se anule por
+ otra instrucción ‘\extracolsep’. A diferencia del espacio
+ intercolumna ordinario, este espacio adicional no se suprime
+ por una @-expresión. Una instrucción ‘\extracolsep’
+ únicamente se pude utilizar en una @-expresión en el argumento
+ ‘columnas’.
+
+ ‘p{ANCHO}’
+ Produce una columna con cada elemento compuesto
+ tipográficamente en una parbox de ancho ANCHO, como si fuera
+ el argumento de una instrucción ‘\parbox[t]{ANCHO}’. Sin
+ embargo, una ‘\\’ en el elemento no puede, salvo en las
+ siguientes situaciones:
+
+ 1. Dentro de un entorno como ‘minipage’, ‘array’ o
+ ‘tabular’.
+ 2. Dentro de una ‘\parbox’ explícita.
+ 3. En el alcance de una declaración ‘\centering’,
+ ‘\raggedright’ o ‘\raggedleft’. La última declaración
+ debe aparecer dentro de llaves o un entorno cuando se
+ utiliza en un elemento ‘p’-columna.
+
+ ‘*{NÚMERO}{COLUMNAS}’
+ Equivalente a NÚMERO de copias de COLUMNAS, donde NÚMERO es un
+ entero positivo y COLUMNAS es cualquier lista de
+ especificadores de columna, la cual puede contener otra
+ ‘*-expresión’.
+
+ Parámetros que controlan el formato:
+
+‘\arrayrulewidth’
+ El espesor de la línea creada por ‘|’, ‘\hline’ y ‘\vline’ en los
+ entornos ‘tabular’ y ‘array’; el predeterminado es ‘.4pt’.
+
+‘\arraystretch’
+ El factor para escalar el espaciado entre hileras en los entornos
+ ‘tabular’ y ‘array’; el predeterminado es ‘1’, para no escalar.
+
+‘\doublerulesep’
+ Distancia horizontal entre las líneas verticles producidas por ‘||’
+ en los entornos ‘tabular’ y ‘array’; el predeterminado es ‘2pt’.
+
+‘\tabcolsep’
+ La mitad de la anchura del espacio entre las columnas; el
+ predeterminado es ‘6pt’.
+
+ Estas instrucciones se pueden utilizar en el interior de un entorno
+‘tabular’:
+
+9.24.1 ‘\multicolumn’
+---------------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+ \multicolumn{COLUMNAS}{POSICIÓN}{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\multicolumn’ provoca que una entrada se extienda por
+varias columnas. El primer argumento obligatorio, COLUMNAS, especifica
+es el número de columnas por abarcar. El segundo argumento obligatorio,
+POSICIÓN, especifica el formato de la entrada; ‘c’ para centrado, ‘l’
+para alineado a la izquierda, ‘r’ para alineado a la derecha. El tercer
+argumento obligatorio, TEXTO, especifica el texto a colocar en la
+entrada.
+
+ He aquí un ejemplo que muestra dos columnas separadas por un doble
+guión; ‘\multicolumn’ se utiliza para el encabezado:
+
+ \begin{tabular}{r@{--}l}
+ \multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr
+ 0x80&0x7FF \cr
+ 0x800&0xFFFF \cr
+ 0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr
+ \end{tabular}
+
+9.24.2 ‘\cline’
+---------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \cline{I-J}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\cline’ dibuja un línea horizontal a través de las
+columnas especificadas, comenzando en la colúmna I y terminando en la
+columna J, que son especificadas en el argumento obligatorio.
+
+9.24.3 ‘\hline’
+---------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\hline’ dibuja una línea horizontal del ancho del
+entorno ‘tabular’ o ‘array’ especificado. Se utiliza comúnmente para
+para dibujar una línea en la parte superior, inferior y entre filas de
+la tabla.
+
+9.24.4 ‘\vline’
+---------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\vline’ dibuja una línea vertical extendida a la altura
+y profundidad total de su fila. Una instrucción ‘\hfill’ se puede
+utilizar para mover la línea hasta el borde de la columna. También se
+puede utilizar en una @-expresión.
+
+9.25 ‘thebibliography’
+======================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{thebibliography}{ETIQUETA-MÁS-AMPLIA}
+ \bibitem[ETIQUETA]{CLAVE-DE-CITA}
+ ...
+ \end{thebibliography}
+
+ El entorno ‘thebibliography’ produce una bibliografía o lista de
+referencia.
+
+ En las clase ‘article’, esta lista de referencia es etiquetada como
+“Referencias”; en la clase ‘report’, esta es etiquetada como
+“Bibliografía”. Usted puede cambiar la etiqueta (en las clases
+estándar) redefiniendo la instrucción ‘\refname’. Por ejemplo, la
+siguiente instrucción la elimina por completo:
+
+ \renewcommand{\refname}{}
+
+ El argumento obligatorio ETIQUETA-MÁS-AMPLIA es texto que, al momento
+de componerla tipográficamente, es tan ancho como la etiqueta producida
+por la instrucción ‘\bibitem’. Se suele dar como ‘9’ para bibliografías
+de menos de 10 referencias, ‘99’ para las que tienen menos de 100, etc.
+
+9.25.1 ‘\bibitem’
+-----------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+ \bibitem[ETIQUETA]{CLAVE-DE-CITA}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\bibitem’ genera una entrada etiquetada por ETIQUETA.
+Si se omite el argumento ETIQUETA, automáticamente se genera un número
+utilizando el contador ‘enumi’. La CLAVE-DE-CITA es cualquier secuencia
+de letras, números y signos de puntuación que no contenga una coma.
+
+ Esta instrucción escribe una entrada al archivo ‘.aux’ que contiene
+los elementos CLAVE-DE-CITA y etiqueta. Cuando la instrucción
+‘\begin{document}’ lee el archivo ‘.aux’, los elementos ‘etiqueta’ son
+asociados con ‘clave-de-cita’, produciendo referencias a CLAVE-DE-CITA
+con una instrucción ‘\cite’ (vea la siguiente sección) para producir la
+etiqueta asociada.
+
+9.25.2 ‘\cite’
+--------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \cite[SUBCITA]{CLAVES
+
+ El argumento CLAVES es una lista de una o más claves de cita,
+separadas por comas. Esta instrucción genera una cita en el texto para
+referencias asociadas con CLAVES por medio de entradas en el archivo
+‘.aux’.
+
+ El argumento de texti opcional SUBCITA aparece después de la cita.
+Por ejemplo, ‘\cite[p.~314]{knuth}’ podría producir ‘[Knuth, p. 314]’.
+
+9.25.3 ‘\nocite’
+----------------
+
+‘\nocite{lista-de-claves}’
+
+ La instrucción ‘\nocite’ no produce texto, pero escribe en el archivo
+‘.aux’ la ‘lista-de-claves’, que es una lista de una o más etiquetas de
+cita.
+
+9.25.4 Usando BibTeX
+--------------------
+
+Si usted utiliza el programa BibTeX escrito por Oren Patashnik
+(altamente recomendable si necesita una bibliografía de más de un par de
+títulos) para mantener su bibliografía, no utilice el entorno
+‘thebibliography’ (*note thebibliography::). En su lugar, incluya las
+líneas
+
+ \bibliographystyle{ESTILO-DE-BIBLIOGRAFÍA}
+ \bibliography{ARCHIVO-DE-BIBLIOGRAFÍA-1,ARCHIVO-DE-BIBLIOGRAFÍA-2}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\bibliographystyle’ por sí misma no produce salida
+alguna. Por el contrario, define el estilo en que se producirá la
+bibliografía: ESTILO-DE-BIBLIOGRAFÍA se refiere a un archivo
+‘ESTILO-DE-BIBLIOGRAFÍA.bst’, en el que se define qué apariencia tendrán
+las citas. Los nombres de ESTILO estándar distribuidos con BibTeX son:
+
+‘alpha’
+ Ordenadas alfabéticamente. Las etiquetas están formadas por el
+ nombre del autor y año de publicación.
+‘plain’
+ Ordenadas alfabéticamente. Las etiquetas son numéricas.
+‘unsrt’
+ Al igual que ‘plain’, pero las entradas están en el orden citado.
+‘abbrv’
+ Igual que ‘plain’, pero con etiquetas más compactas.
+
+ Además, existen muchos otros archivos de estilo BibTeX adaptados a
+las demandas de diversas publicaciones. Vea
+<http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib>.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\bibliography’ es la que realmente produce la
+bibliografía. El argumento ‘\bibliography’ se refiere a archivos con el
+nombre ‘ARCHIVO-DE-BIBLIOGRAFÍA.bib’, el cual debe contener la base de
+datos en formato BibTeX. Sólo las entradas referidas a través de
+‘\cite’ y ‘\nocite’ serán incluidas en la bibliografía.
+
+9.26 ‘theorem’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{theorem}
+ TEXTO-DEL-TEOREMA
+ \end{theorem}
+
+ El entorno ‘theorem’ produce “Teorema N” en negrita seguido por el
+TEXTO-DEL-TEOREMA, donde las posibilidades de numeración para N se
+describen bajo ‘\newtheorem’ (*note \newtheorem::).
+
+9.27 ‘titlepage’
+================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{titlepage}
+ TEXTO
+ \end{titlepage}
+
+ El entorno ‘titlepage’ crea una página de título, es decir, una
+página en la cual no se imprime el número de página ni el encabezado.
+También provoca que la página siguiente sea numerada como la página uno.
+El formato de la página del título se deja bajo su responsabilidad. La
+instrucción ‘\today’ puede ser útil en las páginas de título (*note
+\today::).
+
+ Usted puede utilizar la instrucción ‘\maketitle’ (*note \maketitle::)
+para producir una página de título estándar sin un entorno ‘titlepage’.
+
+9.28 ‘verbatim’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ TEXTO-LITERAL
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+ El entorno ‘verbatim’ es un entorno para crear párrafos en el cual
+LaTeX produce exactamente lo que usted escriba en él; Por ejemplo el
+carácter ‘\’ produce una ‘\’ impresa. Este cambia el modo en que LaTeX
+imprime los que usted escriba con retornos de carro y espacios en blanco
+con el mismo efecto que tendría en una máquina de escribir.
+
+ El entorno ‘verbatim’ utiliza una composición tipográfica con tipo de
+letra monoespacio (‘\tt’).
+
+9.28.1 ‘\verb’
+--------------
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \verbCARÁCTERTEXTO-LITERALCARÁCTER
+ \verb*CARÁCTERTEXTO-LITERALCARÁCTER
+
+ La instrucción ‘\verb’ compone tipográficamente el TEXTO-LITERAL como
+este se ha ingresado incluyendo caracteres especiales y espacios,
+utilizando el tipo de letra de máquina de escribir (‘\tt’). No se
+permiten espacios entre ‘\verb’ o ‘\verb*’ y el CARÁCTER delimitador, el
+cual comienza y termina el texto literal. El delimitador no debe
+aparecer en el TEXTO-LITERAL.
+
+ La forma con ‘*’ difiere únicamente en que los espacios son impresos
+con un carácter de “espacio visible”.
+
+9.29 ‘verse’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \begin{verse}
+ LÍNEA1 \\
+ LÍNEA2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{verse}
+
+ El entorno ‘verse’ está diseñado para poesía, aunque es posible que
+usted le encuentre alguna otra utilidad.
+
+ Los márgenes tienen sangría a la izquierda y derecha, a los párrafos
+no se les aplica sangría y el texto no está justificado. Separe las
+líneas de cada estrofa con ‘\\’ y use una o más líneas en blanco para
+separar las estrofas.
+
+10 Saltos de Línea
+******************
+
+Lo primero que hace LaTeX cuando procesa texto normal es traducir el
+archivo de entrada en una secuencia de unidades gráficas y espacios.
+Para producir un documento impreso, esta secuencia se debe partir en
+líneas (y esas línea se deben dividir en páginas).
+
+ Normalmente LaTeX se encarga de los saltos de línea (y página), pero
+en algunos entornos, usted mismo determina los saltos de líneas con la
+instrucción ‘\\’, y siempre puede forzar los saltos de línea
+manualmente.
+
+10.1 ‘\\’[*][MÁS-ESPACIO]
+=========================
+
+La instrucción ‘\\’ le dice a LaTeX que comience una nueva línea. Esta
+tiene un argumento opcional, MÁS-ESPACIO, que especifica la cantidad de
+espacio vertical extra que se debe insertar antes de la siguiente línea.
+Este puede ser una cantidad negativa.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\\*’ es la misma que la instrucción ordinaria ‘\\’
+salvo que esta le dice a LaTeX que no comience una nueva página después
+de la línea.
+
+10.2 ‘\obeycr’ y ‘\restorecr’
+=============================
+
+La instrucción ‘\obeycr’ genera un retorno de carro en el archivo de
+entrada (‘^^M’, internamente) lo mismo que ‘\\’ (seguido por ‘\relax’).
+Por lo tanto, cada nueva línea en la entrada también será una nueva
+línea en la salida.
+
+ ‘\restorecr’ restaura el comportamiento de saltos de línea normal.
+
+10.3 ‘\newline’
+===============
+
+La instrucción ‘\newline’ rompe la línea en el punto actual, sin
+justificar el texto anterior. Sólo se puede utilizar en modo párrafo.
+
+10.4 ‘\-’ (división silábica discrecional)
+==========================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\-’ le dice a LaTeX que puede dividir la palabra con un
+guión en ese punto. LaTeX cuenta con una muy buena separación silábica
+con guión, y por lo general en la mayoría de los casos encuentra los
+puntos correctos en la división de palabras, y casi nunca utiliza uno
+incorrecto. La instrucción ‘\-’ se utiliza para casos excepcionales.
+
+ Cuando usted inserta la instrucción ‘\-’ en una palabra, la palabra
+únicamente se debe dividir con guión en esos puntos y en ninguno de los
+puntos que LaTeX pudiera haber elegido de otro modo.
+
+10.5 ‘\fussy’
+=============
+
+La declaración ‘\fussy’ (que es la predeterminada) provoca que TeX sea
+quisquilloso con los saltos de línea. Esto por lo general también evita
+el espacio entre palabras, a costa de un ocasional desbordamiento de
+caja.
+
+ Esta instrucción cancela el efecto de una instrucción ‘\sloppy’
+previa (*note \sloppy::.
+
+10.6 ‘\sloppy’
+==============
+
+La declaración ‘\sloppy’ provoca que TeX sea menos cuidadoso con los
+saltos de línea. Esto evitará el desbordamiento de cajas, a costa de un
+mayor espaciamiento entre palabras.
+
+ Dura hasta que se utilice una instrucción ‘\fussy’ (*note \fussy::).
+
+10.7 ‘\hyphenation’
+===================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \hyphenation{PALABRA-UNO PALABRA-DOS}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\hyphenation’ declara los puntos dónde se permite la
+división de palabras por medio de un carácter ‘-’ en las palabras
+proporcionadas. Las palabras están separadas por espacios. TeX
+únicamente debe separar las palabras si la palabra coincide exactamente,
+sin juzgar las inflexiones. Múltiples instrucciones ‘\hyphenation’ son
+acumulativas. Algunos ejemplos (los patrones de separación silábica de
+TeX no se aplican a esas palabras):
+
+ \hyphenation{ap-én-dice col-umnas hiper-fragilís-tico-espiali-doso}
+
+10.8 ‘\linebreak’ y ‘\nolinebreak’
+==================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \linebreak[PRIORIDAD]
+ \nolinebreak[PRIORIDAD]
+
+ De manera predeterminada, la instrucción ‘\linebreak’
+(‘\nolinebreak’) fuerza (previene) un salto de línea en la posición
+actual. Para ‘\linebreak’, los espacios en la línea se expanden hasta
+el margen derecho de la manera normal.
+
+ Con el argumento opcional PRIORIDAD, usted puede convertir la
+instrucción de una petición a una demanda. La PRIORIDAD debe ser un
+número desde 0 hasta 4. Cuanto mayor sea el número, es más insistente
+la petición.
+
+11 Saltos de Página
+*******************
+
+LaTeX inicia nuevas páginas asincronicamente, cuando ha acumulado
+suficiente material para llenar una página. Por lo general, esto ocurre
+automáticamente, pero a veces, posiblemente, usted quiera influir en los
+saltos de página.
+
+11.1 ‘\cleardoublepage’
+=======================
+
+La instrucción ‘\cleardoublepage’ termina la página actual y provoca que
+se impriman todas las imágenes y tablas que han aparecido hasta el
+momento en el texto. En un estilo de Impresión a doble cara, este
+también hace que la siguiente página sea a mano derecha, página
+(impares), produciendo una página en blanco si es necesario.
+
+11.2 ‘\clearpage’
+=================
+
+La instrucción ‘\clearpage’ termina la página actual y provoca que todas
+la imágenes y tablas que han aparecido hasta ahora en la entrada sean
+impresas.
+
+11.3 ‘\newpage’
+===============
+
+La instrucción ‘\newpage’ termina la página actual, pero no descarga
+flotantes (vea ‘\clearpage’ arriba).
+
+11.4 ‘\enlargethispage’
+=======================
+
+‘\enlargethispage{tamaño}’
+
+ ‘\enlargethispage*{tamaño}’
+
+ Amplía el ‘\textheight’ para la página actual por la cantidad
+especificada; por ejemplo ‘\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}’ permitirá
+una línea adicional.
+
+ La forma favorita trata de apretar el material en la página tanto
+como sea posible. Esta normalmente se utiliza junto con un ‘\pagebreak’
+explícito.
+
+11.5 ‘\pagebreak’ y ‘\nopagebreak’
+==================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \pagebreak[PRIORIDAD]
+ \nopagebreak[PRIORIDAD]
+
+ De forma predeterminada, la instrucción ‘\pagebreak’ (‘\nopagebreak’)
+fuerza (impide) un salto de página en la posición actual. Para
+‘\linebreak’, el espacio vertical en la página se estira cuanto sea
+posible de modo que se extienda hasta el margen inferior normal.
+
+ Con el argumento opcional PRIORIDAD, puede convertir la instrucción
+‘\pagebreak’ desde una petición a una demanda. El número debe ser un
+número desde 0 hasta 4. Cuanto mayor sea el número, más insistente es
+la petición.
+
+12 Notas al Pie
+***************
+
+Las notas al pie se pueden producir en una de dos maneras. Se pueden
+producir con una sola instrucción, la instrucción ‘\footnote’. También
+se pueden producir con dos instrucciones, las instrucciones
+‘\footnotemark’ y ‘\footnotetext’.
+
+12.1 ‘\footnote’
+================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \footnote[NÚMERO]{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\footnote’ coloca una nota numerada con el TEXTO al
+pie de la página actual. El argumento opcional NÚMERO cambia el número
+predeterminado de la nota.
+
+ Esta instrucción sólo puede utilizarse fuera del modo párrafo; es
+decir, no se puede utilizar en el instrucciones de seccionado tal como
+‘\chapter’, en figuras, tablas o en un entorno ‘tabular’. (Vea las
+siguientes secciones).
+
+12.2 ‘\footnotemark’
+====================
+
+Sin argumento opcional, la instrucción ‘\footnotemark’ coloca el número
+de nota actual en el texto. Esta instrucción se puede utilizar en modo
+párrafo. Usted proporciona el texto de la nota por separado, con la
+instrucción ‘\footnotetext’.
+
+ Esta instrucción se puede utilizar para producir varios marcadores de
+nota consecutivos refiriéndose a la misma nota
+
+ \footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+
+después de la primer instrucción ‘\footnote’.
+
+12.3 ‘\footnotetext’
+====================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \footnotetext[NÚMERO]{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\footnotetext’ coloca el TEXTO en la parte inferior
+de la página como una nota al pie. Esta instrucción puede venir en
+cualquier lugar después de la instrucción ‘\footnotemark’. La
+instrucción ‘\footnotetext’ debe aparecer en el exterior del modo
+párrafo.
+
+ El argumento opcional NÚMERO cambia el número predeterminado de la
+nota.
+
+12.4 Notas al Pie Simbólicas
+============================
+
+Si desea utilizar símbolos para las notas al pie, en lugar de un número
+creciente, redefina ‘\thefootnote’ así:
+
+ \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\fnsymbol’ produce a serie predefinida de símbolos
+(*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::). Si desea
+utilizar un símbolo diferente como su marca de nota al pie, necesitará
+redefinir ‘\@fnsymbol’.
+
+12.5 Parámetros para Footnote
+=============================
+
+‘\footnoterule’
+ Produce la línea que separa el texto principal en una página de las
+ notas al pie de la página. Dimensiones predeterminadas: ‘0.4pt’
+ espesor (o ancho), y longitud de ‘0.4\columnwidth’ en las clases de
+ documento estándar (salvo en ‘slides’, donde esta no aparece).
+
+‘\footnotesep’
+ La altura donde se coloca el puntal al comienzo de la nota al pie.
+ De forma predeterminada, se establece en el puntal del tipo de
+ letra normal ‘\footnotesize’ (*note Tamaños del Tipo de Letra::,
+ por lo tanto no hay espacio extra entre las notas. Este es
+ ‘6.65pt’ para ‘10pt’, ‘7.7pt’ para ‘11pt’ y ‘8.4pt’ para ‘12pt’.
+
+13 Definiciones
+***************
+
+LaTeX tiene la capacidad para crear nuevas instrucciones de muchos tipos
+diferentes.
+
+13.1 ‘\newcommand’ y ‘\renewcommand’
+====================================
+
+‘\newcommand’ y ‘\renewcommand’ define y redefine una instrucción,
+respectivamente.
+
+ Sinopsis:
+
+ \newcommand{INSTRUCCIÓN}[N-ARGUMENTOS]{DEFINICIÓN}
+ \renewcommand{INSTRUCCIÓN}[N-ARGUMENTOS]{DEFINICIÓN}
+ \newcommand{INSTRUCCIÓN}[N-ARGUMENTOS][PREDETERMINADO]{DEFINICIÓN}
+ \renewcommand{INSTRUCCIÓN}[N-ARGUMENTOS][PREDETERMINADO]{DEFINICIÓN}
+
+INSTRUCCIÓN
+ El nombre de la instrucción comenzando con ‘\’. Para
+ ‘\newcommand’, este no se debe haber definido y no debe comenzar
+ con ‘\end’; para ‘\renewcommand’, este ya tiene que estar definido.
+
+N-ARGUMENTOS
+ Un entero opcional entre 1 y 9 especificando el número de
+ argumentos que debe tomar la instrucción. El valor predeterminado
+ es para que la instrucción no tome argumentos.
+
+PREDETERMINADO
+ Si este parámetro opcional está presente, significa que el primer
+ argumento del comando es opcional. Cuando se invoca a la nueva
+ instrucción, el valor predeterminado del argumento opcional (es
+ decir, si no se especifica en la llamada) es la cadena
+ ‘definición’.
+
+DEFINICIÓN
+ El texto con el que se sustituirá cada aparición de ‘instrucción’;
+ una construcción de la forma ‘#N’ en DEFINICIÓN es reemplazada por
+ el texto del eNésimo argumento.
+
+13.2 ‘\newcounter’
+==================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \newcounter{NOMBRE-CONTADOR}[SUPER]
+
+ La instrucción ‘\newcounter’ define un nuevo contador llamado
+NOMBRE-CONTADOR. El nuevo contador se inicializa a cero.
+
+ Dado el argumento opcional ‘[SUPER]’, (NOMBRE-CONTADOR se
+restablecerá cuando el contador cuyo nomber es SUPER se incremente.
+
+ *Note Contadores::, para mayor información.
+
+13.3 ‘\newlength’
+=================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \newlength{\ARGUMENTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\newlength’ define el argumento obligatorio como una
+instrucción de “longitud” con un valor de ‘0in’. El argumento debe ser
+una secuencia de control, como en ‘\newlength{\foo}’. Ocurre un error
+si ‘\foo’ ya está definido.
+
+ *Note Longitudes::, para saber cómo fijar la nueva longitud a un
+valor distinto de cero, y para más información acerca de las longitudes
+en general.
+
+13.4 ‘\newsavebox’
+==================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \newsavebox{INSTRUCCIÓN}
+
+ Define ‘\INSTRUCCIÓN’, el cual debe ser un nombre de instrucción que
+no se haya definido, para referirse a una nueva bandeja para almacenar
+cajas.
+
+13.5 ‘\newenvironment’ y ‘\renewenvironment’
+============================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+
+ \newenvironment{ENTORNO}[N-ARGUMENTOS]{ANTES-DEFINICIÓN}
+ {DESPUÉS-DEFINICIÓN}
+ \newenvironment{ENTORNO}[N-ARGUMENTOS][PREDETERMINADO]
+ {ANTES-DEFINICIÓN}{DESPUÉS-DEFINICIÓN}
+ \renewenvironment{ENTORNO}[N-ARGUMENTOS]
+ {ANTES-DEFINICIÓN}{DESPUÉS-DEFINICIÓN}
+
+ Estas instrucciones definen o redefinen un entorno ENTORNO, es decir,
+‘\begin{ENTORNO} ... \end{ENTORNO}’.
+
+ENTORNO
+ El nombre del entorno. Para ‘\newenvironment’, ENTORNO no debe ser
+ un entorno existente, y la instrucción ‘\ENTORNO’ debe ser una que
+ no se haya definido previamente. Para ‘\renewenvironment’, ENTORNO
+ debe ser el nombre de un entorno existente.
+
+N-ARGUMENTOS
+ Un entero desde 1 a 9 denotando el número de argumentos del nuevo
+ entorno definido. El valor predeterminado es ningún argumento.
+
+PREDETERMINADO
+ Si se especifica, el primer argumento es opcional, y PREDETERMINADO
+ proporciona el valor predeterminado para ese argumento.
+
+ANTES-DEFINICIÓN
+ El texto ampliado en cada aparición de ‘\begin{ENTORNO}’; una
+ construcción en forma ‘#N’ en ANTES-DEFINICIÓN es sustituido por el
+ texto del eNésimo argumento.
+
+DESPUÉS-DEFINICIÓN
+ El texto ampliado de cada aparición de ‘\end{ENTORNO}’. este no
+ debe contener ningún argumento para parámetros.
+
+13.6 ‘\newtheorem’
+==================
+
+ \newtheorem{NUEVO-ENTORNO}{ETIQUETA}[CON]
+ \newtheorem{NUEVO-ENTORNO}[NUMERADO-COMO]{ETIQUETA}
+
+ Esta instrucción define un entorno parecido a teorema. Argumentos:
+
+NUEVOENTORNO
+ El nombre del nuevo entorno a definir; no debe ser el nombre de un
+ entorno existente o de lo contrario será redefinido.
+
+ETIQUETA
+ El texto a imprimir al inicio del entorno, antes del número. Por
+ ejemplo, ‘Teorema’.
+
+NUMERADO_COMO
+ (Opcional). El nombre de un entorno ya definido tal como teorema;
+
+ (Opcional). El nombre de un entorno ya definido tal como teorema
+ el nuevo entorno será numerado exactamente como NUMERADO_COMO.
+
+CON
+ (Opcional). El nombre de un contador definido previamente, una
+ unidad de seccionado. El nuevo contador de teorema será
+ restablecido al mismo tiempo que el contador CON.
+
+ Cuando menos uno de NUMERADO_COMO y CON se debe especificar, no
+ambos.
+
+13.7 ‘\newfont’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \newfont{INSTRUCCIÓN}{NOMBREDETIPO}
+
+ Define una secuencia de control ‘\INSTRUCCIÓN’, misma que no se debe
+haber definido, para hacer que NOMBREDETIPO sea el tipo de letra actual.
+El archivo bloqueado en el sistema es llamado ‘NOMBREDETIPO.tfm’.
+
+ Esta es una instrucción de bajo nivel para configurar el uso de un
+tipo de letra individual. Comúnmente, los tipos de letra se definen a
+través de familias de archivos ‘.fd’.
+
+13.8 ‘\protect’
+===============
+
+Pies de página, saltos de línea, cualquier instrucción que tenga un
+argumento opcional, y muchas más de las así llamadas instrucciones
+“frágiles”. Cuando una instrucción frágil se utiliza en ciertos
+contextos, llamados “argumentos móviles”, estas se deben preceder con
+‘\protect’. Además, algunas instrucciones con argumentos frágiles deben
+tener su propia ‘\protect’.
+
+ Algunos ejemplos de argumentos móviles son ‘\caption’ (*note
+figure::), ‘\thanks’ (*note \maketitle::) y @-expresiones en entornos
+‘tabular’ y ‘array’ (*note tabular::).
+
+ Las instrucciones que no son frágiles se llaman “robustas”. Estas no
+se deben preceder con ‘\protect’.
+
+ Vea también:
+
+<http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html>
+<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect>
+
+14 Contadores
+*************
+
+Cualquier cosa numerada por LaTeX tiene un contador asociado a ella. El
+nombre del contador es el mismo nombre que el nombre del entorno o
+instrucción que produce el número, salvo las que no comienzan con ‘\’.
+(‘enumi’–‘enumiv’ se utilizan para entornos enumerados anidados). A
+continuación hay una lista de los contadores utilizados en las clases de
+documentos estándar de LaTeX para controlar la numeración.
+
+ part paragraph figure enumi
+ chapter subparagraph table enumii
+ section page footnote enumiii
+ subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+ subsubsection
+
+14.1 ‘\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol’: Imprimiendo Contadores
+==========================================================================
+
+Todas estas instrucciones toman como argumento un solo contador, por
+ejemplo, ‘\alph{enumi}’.
+
+‘\alph’
+ imprime CONTADOR usando letras minúsculas: ‘a’, ‘b’, ...
+
+‘\Alph’
+ utiliza letras mayúsculas: ‘A’, ‘B’, ...
+
+‘\arabic’
+ utiliza números Arábigos: ‘1’, ‘2’, ...
+
+‘\roman’
+ utiliza números romanos en minúsculas: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ...
+
+‘\roman’
+ utiliza números romanos en mayúsculas: ‘I’, ‘II’, ...
+
+‘\fnsymbol’
+ imprime el valor de CONTADOR en una secuencia específica de nueve
+ símbolos (convencionalmente usada para etiquetar notas al pie de
+ página). El valor de CONTADOR debe estar entre 1 y 9 incluido.
+
+ Los símbolos no son compatibles en info principalmente, pero aquí
+ están los nombres:
+ asterix(*) dagger(†) ddagger(‡) section-sign(§) paragraph-sign(¶) parallel(‖)
+ double-asterix(**) double-dagger(††) double-ddagger(‡‡)
+
+14.2 ‘\usecounter{CONTADOR}’
+============================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \usecounter{CONTADOR}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\usecounter’ se utiliza en el segundo argumento del
+entorno ‘list’ para especificar el CONTADOR a utilizar para numerar los
+elementos de la lista.
+
+14.3 ‘\value{CONTADOR}’
+=======================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \value{CONTADOR}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\value’ produce el valor de CONTADOR. Esta se puede
+utilizar en cualquier lugar en que LaTeX espera un número, por ejemplo:
+
+ \setcounter{micontador}{3}
+ \addtocounter{micontador}{1}
+ \hspace{\value{micontador}\parindent}
+
+14.4 ‘\setcounter{\CONTADOR}{VALOR}’
+====================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \setcounter{CONTADOR}{VALOR}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\setcounter’ fija el valor de CONTADOR al argumento
+VALOR.
+
+14.5 ‘\addtocounter{CONTADOR}{VALOR}’
+=====================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\addtocounter’ incrementa CONTADOR por la cantidad
+especificada por el argumento VALOR, que puede ser un número negativo.
+
+14.6 ‘\refstepcounter{CONTADOR}’
+================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\refstepcounter’ trabaja de la misma manera que
+‘\stepcounter’ *Note \stepcounter::, excepto que esta además define el
+valor actual de ‘\ref’ para que sea el resultado de ‘\thecounter’.
+
+14.7 ‘\stepcounter{CONTADOR}’
+=============================
+
+La instrucción ‘\stepcounter’ añade uno al CONTADOR y restablece todos
+los contadores subsidiarios.
+
+14.8 ‘\day \month \year’: Contadores Predefinidos
+=================================================
+
+LaTeX define contadores para el día del mes (‘\day’, 1–31), mes del año
+(‘\month’, 1–12), y año (‘\year’, Era Común). Al iniciar TeX, estas son
+establecidas a los valores actuales en el sistema donde se está
+ejecutando TeX. Estas no se actualizan conforme al progreso del
+trabajo.
+
+ La instrucción relacionada ‘\today’ produce una cadena de texto que
+representa el día actual (*note \today::).
+
+15 Longitudes
+*************
+
+Una ‘longitud’ es una medida de distancia. Muchas instrucciones LaTeX
+toman una longitud como argumento.
+
+15.1 ‘\setlength{\LARGO}{VALOR}’
+================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\setlength’ fija el valor de \LARGO al argumento VALOR,
+el cual se puede expresar en cualquier unidad que LaTeX entienda, es
+decir, pulgadas (‘in’), milímetros (‘mm’), puntos (‘pt’), puntos grandes
+(‘bp’, etc.
+
+15.2 \addtolength{\LARGO}{CANTIDAD}
+===================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\addtolength’ incrementa la “instrucción de longitud”
+\LARGO por la cantidad especificada en el argumento CANTIDAD, misma que
+puede ser un valor negativo.
+
+15.3 ‘\settodepth’
+==================
+
+‘\settodepth{\gnat}{texto}’
+
+ La instrucción ‘\settodepth’ fija el valor de una instrucción de
+‘longitud’ igual a la profundidad del argumento ‘texto’.
+
+15.4 ‘\settoheight’
+===================
+
+‘\settoheight{\gnat}{texto}’
+
+ La instrucción ‘\settoheight’ fija el valor de la instrucción de
+‘longitud’ igual a la altura del argumento ‘texto’.
+
+15.5 ‘\settowidth{\LARGO}{TEXTO}’
+=================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\settowidth’ establece el valor del la instrucción
+\LARGO al valor del argumento TEXTO.
+
+15.6 Longitudes Predeterminadas
+===============================
+
+‘\width’
+
+ ‘\height’
+
+ ‘\depth’
+
+ ‘\totalheight’
+
+ Estos parámetros de longitud se pueden utilizar en los argumentos de
+las instrucciones que dibujan cajas (*note Cajas::). Especifican el
+ancho natural, etc., del texto en la caja. ‘\totalheight’ es igual a
+‘\height’ + ‘\depth’. Para hacer una caja con el texto extendido hasta
+el doble del tamaño natural, por ejemplo, digamos
+
+ ‘\makebox[ancho\2]{Consiga una camilla}’
+
+16 Haciendo Párrafos
+********************
+
+Un párrafo se termina por medio de una o más líneas completamente en
+blanco —líneas que no contienen incluso un ‘%’. Una línea en blanco no
+debe aparecer donde no se puede iniciar un nuevo párrafo, tal como en
+modo math o en el argumento de una instrucción de seccionado.
+
+16.1 ‘\indent’
+==============
+
+‘\indent’ produce un espacio horizontal donde el ancho es igual la
+longitud de ‘\parindent’, la sangría de un párrafo normal. Esta se
+utiliza para añadir la sangría de párrafos donde esta debería suprimirse
+en otro caso.
+
+ El valor predeterminado para ‘\parindent’ es ‘1em’ en modo de dos
+columnas, de lo contrario ‘15pt’ para documentos de ‘10pt’, ‘17pt’ para
+‘11pt’ y ‘1.5em’ para ‘12pt’.
+
+16.2 ‘\noindent’
+================
+
+Cuando se utiliza al principio de un párrafo, ‘\noindent’ suprime
+cualquier sangría. Esta no tiene efecto cuando se utiliza en medio de
+un párrafo.
+
+16.3 ‘\parskip’
+===============
+
+‘\parskip’ es una instrucción que preserva la longitud definiendo
+espacio vertical extra añadido antes de cada párrafo. El predeterminado
+es ‘0pt más 1pt’.
+
+16.4 Notas al Margen
+====================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \marginpar[IZQUIERDA]{DERECHA}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\marginpar’ crea una nota en el margen. La primera
+línea de una nota tiene que ser la misma línea base que la línea en el
+texto donde ocurre el ‘\marginpar’.
+
+ Cuando únicamente se especifica el argumento obligatorio RIGHT, el
+texto se deberá colocar
+
+ • en el margen derecho para diseños de un solo lado;
+ • en el margen externo para diseños de dos caras;
+ • en el margen más cercano en diseños de dos columnas.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\reversemarginpar’ coloca las subsecuentes notas al
+margen en el margen (dentro) opuesto. ‘\normalmarginpar’ las coloca en
+la posición predeterminada.
+
+ Cuando se especifican ambos argumentos, se utiliza LEFT para el
+margen izquierdo y se utiliza RIGHT para el margen derecho.
+
+ La primer palabra normalmente no se debe separar con guiones; usted
+puede habilitar la separación silábica con guiones comenzando la nota
+con ‘\hspace{0pt}’.
+
+ Los parámetros que afectan el formato de la nota son:
+
+‘\marginparpush’
+ El espacio mínimo vertical entre notas; el predeterminado es ‘7pt’
+ para documentos de ‘12pt’, de lo contrario ‘5pt’.
+
+‘\marginparsep’
+ Espacio horizontal entre el texto vertical y la nota;
+ predeterminado ‘11pt’ para ‘10pt’ documentos, en otro caso ‘10pt’.
+
+‘\marginparwidth’
+ El ancho de la nota en sí misma; el predeterminado para documentos
+ de un solo lado de ‘10pt’ es ‘90pt’, ‘83pt’ para ‘11pt’ y ‘68pt’
+ para ‘12pt’; ‘17pt’ más en cada caso para documentos de dos caras.
+ En el modo de dos columnas, el predeterminado es ‘48pt’.
+
+17 Fórmulas Matemáticas
+***********************
+
+Existen tres entornos que ponen a LaTeX en modo math:
+
+‘math’
+ Para fórmulas que aparecerán directamente en el texto.
+‘displaymath’
+ Para fórmulas que aparecerán en su propia línea.
+‘equation’
+ El mismo que el del entorno displaymath salvo que este añade un
+ número de ecuación en el margen derecho.
+
+ El entorno ‘math’ se pude utilizar tanto en párrafos como en modo LR,
+pero los entornos ‘displaymath’ y ‘equation’ se pueden utilizar
+únicamente en modo párrafo. Los entornos ‘math’ y ‘displaymath’ se
+utilizan tan a menudo que tienen las siguientes formas abreviadas:
+
+ \(...\) en lugar de \begin{math}...\end{math}
+ \[...\] en lugar de \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+
+ De hecho, el entorno ‘math’ es como una instrucción que tiene incluso
+una forma abreviada:
+
+ $ ... $ en lugar de \(...\)
+
+ La instrucción ‘\boldmath’ cambia letras y símbolos matemáticos en
+tipo de letra en negrita. Este se utiliza _fuera_ del modo math. Por
+el contrario, la instrucción ‘\unboldmath’ cambia los glifos matemáticos
+para estar en un tipo de letra normal; este también se utiliza _fuera_
+del modo math.
+
+ La declaración ‘\displaystyle’ presiona para que el tamaño y estilo
+de la fórmula sea el de ‘displaymath’, por ejemplo, con limites por
+encima y debajo de sumatorias. Por ejemplo
+ $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
+
+17.1 Subíndices y Superíndices
+==============================
+
+Para hacer que una expresión exp aparezca como un subíndice, escriba
+‘_{’exp‘}’. Para hacer que exp aparezca como un exponente, escriba
+‘^{’exp‘}’. LaTeX maneja superíndices, subíndices y todas esas cosas de
+manera natural. Incluso hace lo correcto cuando algo tiene tanto un
+subíndice como un superíndice.
+
+17.2 Símbolos Matemáticos
+=========================
+
+LaTeX proporciona casi cualquier símbolo matemático que muy
+probablemente necesite. Las instrucciones para generarlas se pueden
+utilizar únicamente en modo math. Por ejemplo, si incluye ‘$\pi$’ en su
+archivo fuente, aparecerá el símbolo de pi (\pi) en su salida.
+
+‘\|’
+ \|
+
+‘\aleph’
+ \aleph
+
+‘\alpha’
+ \alpha
+
+‘\amalg’
+ \amalg (operación binaria)
+
+‘\angle’
+ \angle
+
+‘\approx’
+ \approx (relación)
+
+‘\ast’
+ \ast (operación binaria)
+
+‘\asymp’
+ \asymp (relación)
+
+‘\backslash’
+ \ (delimitador)
+
+‘\beta’
+ \beta
+
+‘\bigcap’
+ \bigcap
+
+‘\bigcirc’
+ \bigcirc (operación binaria)
+
+‘\bigcup’
+ \bigcup
+
+‘\bigodot’
+ \bigodot
+
+‘\bigoplus’
+ \bigoplus
+
+‘\bigotimes’
+ \bigotimes
+
+‘\bigtriangledown’
+ \bigtriangledown (operación binaria)
+
+‘\bigtriangleup’
+ \bigtriangleup (operación binaria)
+
+‘\bigsqcup’
+ \bigsqcup
+
+‘\biguplus’
+ \biguplus
+
+‘\bigcap’
+ \bigvee
+
+‘\bigwedge’
+ \bigwedge
+
+‘\bot’
+ \bot
+
+‘\bowtie’
+ \bowtie (relación)
+
+‘\Box’
+ (símbolo de caja cuadrada abierta)
+
+‘\bullet’
+ \bullet (operación binaria)
+
+‘\cap’
+ \cap (operación binaria)
+
+‘\cdot’
+ \cdot (operación binaria)
+
+‘\chi’
+ \chi
+
+‘\circ’
+ \circ (operación binaria)
+
+‘\clubsuit’
+ \clubsuit
+
+‘\cong’
+ \cong (relación)
+
+‘\coprod’
+ \coprod
+
+‘\cup’
+ \cup (operación binaria)
+
+‘\dagger’
+ \dagger (operación binaria)
+
+‘\dashv’
+ \dashv (relación)
+
+‘\ddagger’
+ \dagger (operación binaria)
+
+‘\Delta’
+ \Delta
+
+‘\delta’
+ \delta
+
+‘\Diamond’
+ \diamond más grande
+
+‘\diamond’
+ \diamond (operación binaria)
+
+‘\diamondsuit’
+ \diamondsuit
+
+‘\div’
+ \div (operación binaria)
+
+‘\doteq’
+ \doteq (relación)
+
+‘\downarrow’
+ \downarrow (delimitador)
+
+‘\Downarrow’
+ \Downarrow (delimitador)
+
+‘\ell’
+ \ell
+
+‘\emptyset’
+ \emptyset
+
+‘\epsilon’
+ \epsilon
+
+‘\equiv’
+ \equiv (relación)
+
+‘\eta’
+ \eta
+
+‘\exists’
+ \exists
+
+‘\flat’
+ \flat
+
+‘\forall’
+ \forall
+
+‘\frown’
+ \frown (relacion)
+
+‘\Gamma’
+ \Gamma
+
+‘\gamma’
+ \gamma
+
+‘\ge’
+ \ge
+
+‘\geq’
+ \geq (relación)
+
+‘\gets’
+ \gets
+
+‘\gg’
+ \gg (relación)
+
+‘\hbar’
+ \hbar
+
+‘\heartsuit’
+ \heartsuit
+
+‘\hookleftarrow’
+ \hookleftarrow
+
+‘\hookrightarrow’
+ \hookrightarrow
+
+‘\iff’
+ \iff
+
+‘\Im’
+ \Im
+
+‘\in’
+ \in (relación)
+
+‘\infty’
+ \infty
+
+‘\int’
+ \int
+
+‘\iota’
+ \iota
+
+‘\Join’
+ símbolo de corbata de moño condensado (relación)
+
+‘\kappa’
+ \kappa
+
+‘\Lambda’
+ \Lambda
+
+‘\lambda’
+ \lambda
+
+‘\land’
+ \land
+
+‘\langle’
+ \langle (delimitador)
+
+‘\lbrace’
+ \lbrace (delimitador)
+
+‘\lbrack’
+ \lbrack (delimitador)
+
+‘\lceil’
+ \lceil (delimitador)
+
+‘\le’
+ \le
+
+‘\leadsto’
+
+‘\Leftarrow’
+ \Leftarrow
+
+‘\leftarrow’
+ \leftarrow
+
+‘\leftharpoondown’
+ \leftharpoondown
+
+‘\leftharpoonup’
+ \leftharpoonup
+
+‘\Leftrightarrow’
+ \Leftrightarrow
+
+‘\Leftrightarrow’
+ \Leftrightarrow
+
+‘\leq’
+ \leq (relación)
+
+‘\lfloor’
+ \lfloor (delimitador)
+
+‘\lhd’
+ (flecha apuntando hacia arriba a la izquierda)
+
+‘\ll’
+ \ll (relación)
+
+‘\lnot’
+ \lnot
+
+‘\longleftarrow’
+ \longleftarrow
+
+‘\longleftrightarrow’
+ \longleftrightarrow
+
+‘\longmapsto’
+ \longmapsto
+
+‘\longrightarrow’
+ \longrightarrow
+
+‘\lor’
+ \lor
+
+‘\mapsto’
+ \mapsto
+
+‘\mho’
+
+‘\mid’
+ \mid (relación)
+
+‘\models’
+ \models (relación)
+
+‘\mp’
+ \mp (operación binaria)
+
+‘\mu’
+ \mu
+
+‘\nabla’
+ \nabla
+
+‘\natural’
+ \natural
+
+‘\ne’
+ \ne
+
+‘\nearrow’
+ \nearrow
+
+‘\neg’
+ \neg
+
+‘\neq’
+ \neq (relación)
+
+‘\ni’
+ \ni (relación)
+
+‘\not’
+ Superpone una / al siguiente operador, tal como \not=.
+
+‘\notin’
+ \ni
+
+‘\nu’
+ \nu
+
+‘\nwarrow’
+ \nwarrow
+
+‘\odot’
+ \odot (operación binaria)
+
+‘\oint’
+ \oint
+
+‘\Omega’
+ \Omega
+
+‘\omega’
+ \omega
+
+‘\ominus’
+ \ominus (operación binaria)
+
+‘\oplus’
+ \oplus (operación binaria)
+
+‘\oslash’
+ \oslash (operación binaria)
+
+‘\otimes’
+ \otimes (operación binaria)
+
+‘\owns’
+ \owns
+
+‘\parallel’
+ \parallel (relación)
+
+‘\partial’
+ \partial
+
+‘\perp’
+ \perp (relación)
+
+‘\phi’
+ \phi
+
+‘\Pi’
+ \Pi
+
+‘\pi’
+ \pi
+
+‘\pm’
+ \pm (operación binaria)
+
+‘\prec’
+ \prec (relación)
+
+‘\preceq’
+ \preceq (relación)
+
+‘\prime’
+ \prime
+
+‘\prod’
+ \prod
+
+‘\propto’
+ \propto (relación)
+
+‘\Psi’
+ \Psi
+
+‘\psi’
+ \psi
+
+‘\rangle’
+ \rangle (delimitador)
+
+‘\rbrace’
+ \rbrace (delimitador)
+
+‘\rbrack’
+ \rbrack (delimitador)
+
+‘\rceil’
+ \rceil (delimitador)
+
+‘\Re’
+ \Re
+
+‘\rfloor’
+ \rfloor
+
+‘\rhd’
+ (operación binaria)
+
+‘\rho’
+ \rho
+
+‘\Rightarrow’
+ \Rightarrow
+
+‘\rightarrow’
+ \rightarrow
+
+‘\rightharpoondown’
+ \rightharpoondown
+
+‘\rightharpoonup’
+ \rightharpoonup
+
+‘\rightleftharpoons’
+ \rightleftharpoons
+
+‘\searrow’
+ \searrow
+
+‘\setminus’
+ \setminus (operación binaria)
+
+‘\sharp’
+ \sharp
+
+‘\Sigma’
+ \Sigma
+
+‘\sigma’
+ \sigma
+
+‘\sim’
+ \sim (relación)
+
+‘\simeq’
+ \simeq (relación)
+
+‘\smallint’
+ \smallint
+
+‘\smile’
+ \smile (relación)
+
+‘\spadesuit’
+ \spadesuit
+
+‘\sqcap’
+ \sqcap (operación binaria)
+
+‘\sqcup’
+ \sqcup (operación binaria)
+
+‘\sqsubset’
+ (relación)
+
+‘\sqsubseteq’
+ \sqsubseteq (relación)
+
+‘\sqsupset’
+ (relación)
+
+‘\sqsupseteq’
+ \sqsupseteq (relación)
+
+‘\star’
+ \star (operación binaria)
+
+‘\subset’
+ \subset (relación)
+
+‘\subseteq’
+ \subseteq (relación)
+
+‘\succ’
+ \succ (relación)
+
+‘\succeq’
+ \succeq (relación)
+
+‘\sum’
+ \sum
+
+‘\supset’
+ \supset (relación)
+
+‘\supseteq’
+ \supseteq (relación)
+
+‘\surd’
+ \surd
+
+‘\swarrow’
+ \swarrow
+
+‘\tau’
+ \tau
+
+‘\theta’
+ \theta
+
+‘\times’
+ \times (operación binaria)
+
+‘\to’
+ \to
+
+‘\top’
+ \top
+
+‘\triangle’
+ \triangle
+
+‘\triangleleft’
+ \triangleleft (operación binaria)
+
+‘\triangleright’
+ \triangleright (operación binaria)
+
+‘\unlhd’
+ punta de flecha apuntando hacia la izquierda con una línea debajo
+ (operación binaria)
+
+‘\unrhd’
+ punta de flecha apuntando hacia la derecha con línea debajo
+ (operación binaria)
+
+‘\Uparrow’
+ \Uparrow (delimitador)
+
+‘\uparrow’
+ \uparrow (delimitador)
+
+‘\Updownarrow’
+ \Updownarrow (delimitador)
+
+‘\updownarrow’
+ \updownarrow (delimitador)
+
+‘\uplus’
+ \uplus (operación binaria)
+
+‘\Upsilon’
+ \Upsilon
+
+‘\upsilon’
+ \upsilon
+
+‘\varepsilon’
+ \varepsilon
+
+‘\varphi’
+ \varphi
+
+‘\varpi’
+ \varpi
+
+‘\varrho’
+ \varrho
+
+‘\varsigma’
+ \varsigma
+
+‘\vartheta’
+ \vartheta
+
+‘\vdash’
+ \vdash (relation)
+
+‘\vee’
+ \vee (operación binaria)
+
+‘\Vert’
+ \Vert (delimitador)
+
+‘\vert’
+ \vert (delimitador)
+
+‘\wedge’
+ \wedge (operación binaria)
+
+‘\wp’
+ \wp
+
+‘\wr’
+ \wr (operación binaria)
+
+‘\Xi’
+ \Xi
+
+‘\xi’
+ \xi
+
+‘\zeta’
+ \zeta
+
+17.3 Funciones Matemáticas
+==========================
+
+Estas instrucciones producen nombres de función romanos en modo math con
+el espaciado adecuado.
+
+‘\arccos’
+ \arccos
+
+‘\arcsin’
+ \arcsin
+
+‘\arctan’
+ \arctan
+
+‘\arg’
+ \arg
+
+‘\bmod’
+ Operador residuo binario (x \bmod y)
+
+‘\cos’
+ \cos
+
+‘\cosh’
+ \cosh
+
+‘\cot’
+ \cos
+
+‘\coth’
+ \cosh
+
+‘\csc’
+ \csc
+
+‘\deg’
+ \deg
+
+‘\det’
+ \deg
+
+‘\dim’
+ \dim
+
+‘\exp’
+ \exp
+
+‘\gcd’
+ \gcd
+
+‘\hom’
+ \hom
+
+‘\inf’
+ \inf
+
+‘\ker’
+ \ker
+
+‘\lg’
+ \lg
+
+‘\lim’
+ \lim
+
+‘\liminf’
+ \liminf
+
+‘\limsup’
+ \limsup
+
+‘\ln’
+ \ln
+
+‘\log’
+ \log
+
+‘\max’
+ \max
+
+‘\min’
+ \min
+
+‘\pmod’
+ residuo entre paréntesis, como en (\pmod 2^n - 1)
+
+‘\Pr’
+ \Pr
+
+‘\sec’
+ \sec
+
+‘\sin’
+ \sin
+
+‘\sinh’
+ \sinh
+
+‘\sup’
+ sup
+
+‘\tan’
+ \tan
+
+‘\tanh’
+ \tanh
+
+17.4 Acentos Matemáticos
+========================
+
+LaTeX proporciona una variedad de instrucciones para producir letras
+acentuadas en matemáticas. Son distintas de los acentos en un texto
+normal (*note Acentos::).
+
+‘\acute’
+ Acento agudo en modo Math: \acute{x}.
+
+‘\bar’
+ Acento barra horizontal (macrón) en modo Math: \bar{x}.
+
+‘\breve’
+ Acento breve en modo Math: \breve{x}.
+
+‘\check’
+ Acento de verificación háček en modo Math: \check{x}.
+
+‘\ddot’
+ Acento diéresis en modo Math: \ddot{x}.
+
+‘\dot’
+ Acento punto superior en modo Math: \dot{x}.
+
+‘\grave’
+ Acento grave en modo Math: \grave{x}.
+
+‘\hat’
+ Acento circunflejo en modo Math: \hat{x}.
+
+‘\imath’
+ i sin punto en modo Math.
+
+‘\jmath’
+ j sin punto en modo Math.
+
+‘\tilde’
+ Acento tilde en modo Math: \tilde{x}.
+
+‘\vec’
+ Símbolo de vector en modo Math: \vec{x}.
+
+‘\widehat’
+ Acento circunflejo amplio en modo Math: \widehat{x+y}.
+
+‘\widetilde’
+ Acento tilde amplia en modo Math: \widetilde{x+y}.
+
+17.5 Espacios en Modo Math
+==========================
+
+En un entorno ‘math’, LaTeX ignora los espacios que usted escriba y
+coloca espacios de acuerdo a las reglas normales para texto matemático.
+Si desea un espaciado diferente, LaTeX proporciona las siguientes
+instrucciones para su uso en modo matemático:
+
+‘\;’
+ Un espacio de grosor (5\over18\,cuádruple).
+‘\:’
+‘\>’
+ Ambos producen un espacio medio (2\over9\,cuádruple).
+‘\,’
+ Un espacio fino (1\over6\,cuádruple); no se limita a modo
+ matemático.
+‘\!’
+ Un espacio fino negativo (-{1\over6}\,cuádruple).
+
+17.6 Miscelánea Math
+====================
+
+‘\*’
+ Un símbolo de multiplicación “discrecional”, en el que se permiten
+ saltos de línea.
+
+‘\cdots’
+ Puntos suspensivos horizontales con los puntos elevados al centro
+ de la línea.
+
+‘\ddots’
+ Puntos suspensivos en diagonal: \ddots.
+
+‘\frac{num}{den}’
+ Produce la fracción ‘num’ dividida entre ‘den’.
+
+‘\left DELIMITADOR1 ... \right DELIMITADOR2’
+ Los dos delimitadores no necesitan coincidir; ‘.’ actúa como un
+ delimitador nulo, sin producir salida. Los delimitadores son del
+ tamaño de acuerdo a las matemáticas en el medio. Ejemplo: ‘\left(
+ \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]’.
+
+‘\overbrace{TEXTO}’
+ Genera un par de TEXTO más. Por ejemplo, \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k
+ \rm\;veces}.
+
+‘\overline{TEXTO}’
+ Genera una línea horizontal sobre TEXO. Por ejemplo,
+ \overline{x+y}.
+
+‘\sqrt[RAÍZ]{argumento}’
+ Produce la representación de la raíz cuadrada de ARGUMENTO. El
+ argumento opcional RAÍZ determina qué raíz producir. Por ejemplo,
+ la raíz cúbica de ‘x+y’ se escribe como ‘$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$’.
+
+‘\stackrel{TEXTO}{RELACIÓN}’
+ Coloca el TEXTO sobre la RELACIÓN.
+
+ Por ejemplo, ‘\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}’.
+
+‘\underbrace{matemáticas}’
+ Genera MATEMÁTICAS con una llave por debajo.
+
+‘\underline{text}’
+ Provoca que se subraye el TEXTO, el cual bien puede estar en modo
+ math o no. La línea siempre está por debajo del texto, teniendo en
+ cuenta los descendientes.
+
+‘\vdots’
+ Produce puntos suspensivos verticales.
+
+18 Modos
+********
+
+Cuando LaTeX está procesando el texto fuente, este siempre está en uno
+de tres modos:
+
+ • Modo Párrafo
+ • Modo Math
+ • Modo de Izquierda a derecha (Left-to-Right), llamado modo LR para
+ abreviar
+
+ LaTeX cambia el modo sólo cuando sube o baja una escala a un
+diferente nivel, aunque no todos los cambios de nivel producen cambios
+de modo. Los cambios de modo sólo se producen al entrar o salir de un
+entorno, o cuando LaTeX está procesando el argumento de determinadas
+instrucciones que producen texto.
+
+ El “modo Párrafo” es el más común; es en el que LaTeX está cuando
+procesa texto ordinario. En ese modo, LaTeX rompe el texto en líneas y
+separa líneas en páginas. LaTeX está en “modo math” cuando está
+generando fórmulas matemáticas. En “modo LR”, como en modo párrafo,
+LaTeX considera que la salida que produce es una cadena de palabras con
+espacios entre ellas. Sin embargo, a diferencia del modo párrafo, LaTeX
+sigue yendo de izquierda a derecha; nunca inicia una nueva línea en modo
+LR. Incluso si usted pone un centenar de palabras en una ‘\mbox’, LaTeX
+mantendrá la composición de izquierda a derecha dentro de una caja
+única, y luego se quejará porque la caja resultante fue demasiado grande
+para caber en la línea.
+
+ LaTeX está en modo LR cuando comienza a hacer una caja con una
+instrucción ‘\mbox’. Usted puede conseguir introducirse en un modo
+diferente dentro de la caja —por ejemplo, usted puede hacerlo entrar en
+el modo matemático para poner una fórmula en la caja. También hay
+varias instrucciones productoras de texto y entornos para hacer una caja
+que ponga a LaTeX en el modo de párrafo. La caja hecha por medio de una
+de estas instrucciones o entornos se llama ‘parbox’. Cuando LaTeX está
+en el modo de párrafo mientras que hace una caja, se dice que está en
+“modo interno de párrafo”. Su modo de párrafo normal, que se inicia
+fuera de él, se llama el “modo de párrafo externo”.
+
+19 Estilos de Página
+********************
+
+La instrucción ‘\documentclass’ determina el tamaño y posición de las
+cabeceras y pies de página. El estilo de página determina lo que sucede
+en ellos.
+
+19.1 ‘\maketitle’
+=================
+
+La instrucción ‘\maketitle’ genera un título en una página independiente
+— excepto en la clase ‘article’, donde se coloca el título en la parte
+superior de la primera página. La información utilizada para producir
+el título se obtiene de las siguientes declaraciones:
+
+‘\author{NOMBRE \and NOMBRE2}’
+ La instrucción ‘\author’ declara los autor(es) del documento, donde
+ el argumento es una lista de autores separados por instrucciones
+ ‘\and’. Use ‘\\’ para separar líneas con una única entrada de
+ autor —por ejemplo, para proporcionar las entidades de autor o
+ dirección.
+
+‘\date{TEXTO}’
+ La instrucción ‘\date’ declara el TEXTO para ser la fecha del
+ documento. Sin la instrucción ‘\date’, se utiliza la fecha actual
+ (*note \today::).
+
+‘\thanks{TEXTO}’
+ La instrucción ‘\thanks’ produce un pie de página (‘\footnote’)
+ para el título, normalmente utilizada para reconocimiento de
+ créditos.
+
+‘\title{TEXTO}’
+ La instrucción ‘\title’ declara TEXTO para ser el título del
+ documento. Use ‘\\’ para forzar un salto de línea, de la manera
+ usual.
+
+19.2 ‘\pagenumbering’
+=====================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \pagenumbering{ESTILO}
+
+ Especifica el estilo de los números de página, de acuerdo a ESTILO.
+‘\pagenumbering’ tambien reinicializa le numero de pagína a 1. Los
+valores de ESTILO que se pueden utilizar son por ejemplo::
+
+‘arabic’
+ números arábigos
+‘roman’
+ números romanos en minúscula
+‘Roman’
+ numeros romanos en mayúscula
+‘alph’
+ letras en minúscula
+‘Alph’
+ letras en mayúscula
+
+19.3 ‘\pagestyle’
+=================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \pagestyle{ESTILO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\pagestyle’ especifica como se componen
+tipográficamente las cabeceras y pies de página a partir de la página
+actual. Valores para ESTILO:
+
+‘plain’
+ Únicamente un número de página sencillo.
+
+‘empty’
+ Cabeceras y pies de página vacíos, por ejemplo, sin números de
+ página.
+
+‘headings’
+ Coloca encabezados en cada página. El estilo de documento
+ especifica lo que sucede en las cabeceras.
+
+‘myheadings’
+ Cabeceras personalizadas, especificadas via las instrucciones
+ ‘\markboth’ o ‘\markright’.
+
+ Aquí están las descripciones de ‘\markboth’ y ‘\markright’:
+
+‘\markboth{IZQUIERDA}{DERECHA}’
+ Establece ambas cabeceras izquierda y derecha. Una “cabecera a
+ mano izquierda” (IZQUIERDA) es generada por la última instrucción
+ ‘\markboth’ antes del final de la página, mientras que una
+ “cabecera a mano derecha” (DERECHA) es generada por la primera
+ ‘\markboth’ o ‘\markright’ que venga en la página si la hay, de
+ otra manera por la última antes de la página.
+
+‘\markright{DERECHA}’
+ Establece la cabecera de la derecha, dejando la cabecera de la
+ izquierda sin cambios.
+
+19.4 ‘\thispagestyle{ESTILO}’
+=============================
+
+La instrucción ‘\thispagestyle’ trabaja de la misma manera que la
+instrucción ‘\pagestyle’ (vea la sección previa) excepto que esta
+únicamente cambia el ESTILO de la página actual.
+
+20 Espacios
+***********
+
+LaTeX tiene muchas formas de producir espacios en blanco (o llenos).
+
+ Otra instrucción que produce espacios es ‘\’ para producir un espacio
+“fino” (por lo general 1/6cuadrático). Se puede utilizar en modo texto,
+pero más a menudo es útil en modo matemático (*note Espacios en Modo
+Math::).
+
+20.1 ‘\hspace’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \hspace[*]{LONGITUD}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\hspace’ añade espacio horizontal. El argumento
+LENGTH se puede expresar en cualquier término que LaTeX entienda:
+puntos, pulgadas, etc. Esta es la longitud a preservar. Usted puede
+agregar tanto espacios negativos como positivos con una instrucción
+‘\hspace’; agregar espacio negativo es como espacio hacia atrás.
+
+ LaTeX normalmente elimina el espacio horizontal que viene al
+principio o al final de una línea. Para preservar este espacio, use la
+forma opcional con ‘*’.
+
+20.2 ‘\hfill’
+=============
+
+La instrucción ‘\hfill’ produce un “relleno de longitud” que no tiene
+espacio natural sino que se puede extender o reducir en sentido
+horizontal en la medida necesaria.
+
+ El parámetro ‘\fill’ es la misma longitud a rellenar (técnicamente,
+el valor a agregar ‘0pt plus1fill’); es decir, ‘\hspace\fill’ es
+equivalente a ‘\hfill’.
+
+20.3 ‘\SPACE’
+=============
+
+La instrucción ‘\ ’ (space) produce un espacio entre palabras normal.
+Es útil después de signos de puntuación que no deben terminar una
+oración. Por ejemplo, ‘Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ es
+fundamental’. Esta también se suele utilizar después de secuencias de
+control, como en ‘\TeX\ es un sistema agradable’.
+
+ En circunstancias normales, ‘\’<tab> y ‘\’<newline> son equivalentes
+a ‘\ ’.
+
+20.4 ‘\@’
+=========
+
+La instrucción ‘\@’ hace que el siguiente carácter de puntuación final
+una declaración incluso si normalmente no es así. Esto se suele
+utilizar después de una letra mayúscula. Aquí están lado a lado
+ejemplos con y sin ‘\@’:
+
+ ... en C\@. Pascal, aunque ...
+ ... en C. Pascal, aunque ...
+
+produce
+
+ ... en C. Pascal, aunque ... ... en C. Pascal, aunque ...
+
+20.5 ‘\thinspace’
+=================
+
+‘\thinspace’ produce un espacio inviolable e inextensible que es de un
+1/6 de em. Este es el espacio adecuado para su uso en citas anidadas,
+como en ’”.
+
+20.6 ‘\/’
+=========
+
+La instrucción ‘\/’ produce una “corrección en cursiva”. Este es un
+pequeño espacio definido por el diseñador de tipografías para un
+carácter determinado, para evitar chocar con el carácter que lo sigue.
+El carácter en cursiva f típicamente tiene un valor de corrección en
+cursiva grande.
+
+ Si el siguiente carácter es un punto o una coma, no es necesario
+insertar una corrección en cursiva, dado que estos símbolos tienen una
+puntuación de muy poca altura. Sin embargo, con punto y coma o dos
+puntos, así como letras normales, puede ayudar. Compare f: f; (en la
+salida TeX, las ‘f’s están separadas correctamente) con f: f;.
+
+ A pesar del nombre, los caracteres latinos también pueden tener una
+corrección en cursiva. Compare pdfTeX (en la TeX salida, hay un pequeño
+espacio después de la ‘f’) con pdfTeX.
+
+20.7 ‘\hrulefill’
+=================
+
+La instrucción ‘\hrulefill’ produce un “relleno de longitud” el cual se
+puede estrechar o estirar horizontalmente. Este se llenará con una
+regla horizontal.
+
+20.8 ‘\dotfill’
+===============
+
+La instrucción ‘\dotfill’ produce un “relleno de longitud” la cual se
+rellena con puntos en lugar de sólo espacios en blanco.
+
+20.9 ‘\addvspace’
+=================
+
+‘\addvspace{longitud}’
+
+ La instrucción ‘\addvspace’ normalmente añade un espacio vertical de
+altura longitud. Sin embargo, si el espacio vertical ya se ha añadido
+al mismo punto en la salida por medio de una instrucción ‘\addvspace’
+anterior, esta instrucción no añade más espacio que el necesario para
+hacer que la longitud natural del espacio vertical total equivalente a
+‘longitud’.
+
+20.10 ‘\bigskip \medskip \smallskip’
+====================================
+
+Estas instrucciones producen una determinada cantidad de espacio.
+
+‘\bigskip’
+ Al igual que ‘\vspace{bigskipamount}’, normalmente alrededor de un
+ espacio de línea (con estirar y encoger).
+
+‘\medskip’
+ Al igual que ‘\vspace{medskipamount}’, normalmente cerca de la
+ mitad del espacio de una línea (con estirar y encoger).
+
+‘\smallskip’
+ Al igual que ‘\vspace{smallskipamount}’, normalmente alrededor de
+ un cuarto del espacio de una línea (con estirar y encoger).
+
+ Los parámetros ‘\...cantidad’ están determinados por la clase de
+documento.
+
+20.11 ‘\vfill’
+==============
+
+La instrucción ‘\vfill’ produce un relleno de longitud (pegado) el cual
+se puede reducir y estirar verticalmente tanto como sea necesario. Este
+es equivalente a ‘\vspace{\fill}’ (*note \hfill::).
+
+20.12 ‘\vspace[*]{LONGITUD}’
+============================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \vspace[*]{LONGITUD}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\vspace’ añade el espacio vertical LENGTH, es decir,
+un relleno de longitud. LONGITUD puede ser positivo o negativo.
+
+ Normalmente, LaTeX remueve el espacio vertical añadido por ‘\vspace’
+en la parte superior o inferior de una página. Con el argumento
+opcional ‘*’, no se elimina el espacio.
+
+21 Cajas
+********
+
+Todos los parámetros de longitud predeterminados (*note Longitudes
+Predeterminadas::) se pueden utilizar en los argumentos de las
+instrucciones que generan cajas.
+
+21.1 ‘\mbox{TEXTO}’
+===================
+
+La instrucción ‘\mbox’ crea una caja lo suficientemente ancha para
+contener el texto creado por sus argumentos. El TEXTO no se separa en
+líneas, por lo tanto este se puede utilizar para prevenir la separación
+silábica.
+
+21.2 ‘\fbox’ y ‘\framebox’
+==========================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \fbox{TEXTO}
+ \framebox[ANCHO][POSICIÓN]{TEXTO}
+
+ Las instrucciones ‘\fbox’ y ‘\framebox’ son como ‘\mbox’, excepto que
+estas ponen un marco al rededor del exterior de la caja que se está
+creando.
+
+ Además, la instrucción ‘\framebox’ permite especificar explícitamente
+la anchura de la caja con el argumento opcional WIDTH (una dimensión), y
+la posiciona con el argumento opcional POSICIÓN.
+
+ Ambas instrucciones producen una regla de espesor ‘\fboxrule’
+(predeterminado a ‘.4pt’), y dejan un espacio de ‘\fboxsep’
+(predeterminado a ‘3pt’) entre la regla y el contenido de la caja.
+
+ *Note \framebox (picture)::, para la instrucción ‘\framebox’ en el
+entorno ‘picture’.
+
+21.3 ‘lrbox’
+============
+
+‘\begin{lrbox}{instrucción} texto \end{lrbox}’
+
+ Esta es la forma de entorno de ‘\sbox’.
+
+ El texto dentro del entorno se guarda en la caja ‘instrucción’, misma
+que se debe haber declarado con ‘\newsavebox’.
+
+21.4 ‘\makebox’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \makebox[ANCHO][POSICIÓN]{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\makebox’ crea una caja lo suficientemente ancha para
+contener el TEXTO especificado. La anchura de la caja es especificada
+por el argumento opcional ANCHO. La posición del texto dentro de la
+caja está determinada por el argumento opcional POSICIÓN, el cual puede
+tomar los siguientes valores:
+
+‘c’
+ Centrado (predeterminado).
+‘l’
+ Alineado a la izquierda
+‘r’
+ Alineado a la derecha
+‘s’
+ Alineado (justificado) a través de ANCHO; TEXTO debe contener
+ espacio elástico para que esto funcione.
+
+ ‘\makebox’ también se utiliza en el entorno picture *note \makebox
+(picture)::.
+
+21.5 ‘\parbox’
+==============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \parbox[POSICIÓN][ALTO][POS-INTERNA]{ANCHO}{TEXTO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\parbox’ produce una caja cuyo contenido es creado en
+modo ‘paragraph’. Se debe utilizar para hacer una caja de pequeñas
+piezas de texto, sin nada lujoso en el interior. En particular, no debe
+utilizar ningún entorno que genere párrafos dentro de un argumento
+‘\parbox’. Para grandes piezas de texto, incluyendo aquellas que
+contienen un entorno que genera párrafos, debe usar un entorno
+‘minipágina’ (*note minipage::).
+
+ ‘\parbox’ tiene dos argumentos obligatorios:
+
+ANCHO
+ la anchura de parbox;
+TEXTO
+ El texto que va dentro de la parbox.
+
+ El argumento opcional POSICIÓN le permite alinear la línea en la
+parte superior o inferior de parbox con la línea base del texto que lo
+rodea (de manera predeterminada es superior).
+
+ El argumento opcional ALTO reemplaza la altura natural de la caja.
+
+ Al argumento POS-INTERIOR controla la ubicación del texto dentro de
+la caja de la siguiente manera; Si no se especifica, se utiliza
+POSICIÓN.
+
+‘t’
+ El texto es colocado en la parte superior de la caja.
+‘c’
+ El texto se coloca al centro de la caja.
+‘b’
+ El texto se coloca en la parte inferior de la caja.
+‘s’
+ Se extiende verticalmente; el texto debe contener espacio vertical
+ extensible para que esto funcione.
+
+21.6 ‘\raisebox’
+================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \raisebox{distancia}[ALTO][PROFUNDIDAD]{texto}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\raisebox’ aumenta o disminuye el TEXTO. El primer
+argumento obligatorio especifica a qué altura se va a levantar (o bajar
+si la cantidad es negativa) el TEXTO. El TEXTO mismo es procesado en
+modo LR.
+
+ Los argumentos opcionales ALTO y PROFUNDIDAD son dimensiones. Si se
+especifican, LaTeX trata a TEXTO como una ampliación de una distancia
+determinada sobre la línea base (alto) o bajo (profundidad), omitiendo
+su altura y profundidad natural.
+
+21.7 ‘\savebox’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \savebox{\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA}[ANCHO][POSICIÓN]{TEXTO}
+
+ Esta instrucción fija la tipografía de TEXTO en una caja al igual que
+‘\makebox’ (*note \makebox::), excepto que el lugar de imprimir la caja
+resultante, esta la guarda en la caja etiquetada \INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA, que
+se debe haber declarado con ‘\newsavebox’ (*note \newsavebox::).
+
+21.8 ‘\sbox{\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA}{TEXTO}’
+======================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \sbox{\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA}{TEXTO}
+
+ ‘\sbox’ escribe el TEXTO en una caja tal como ‘\mbox’ (*note \mbox::)
+excepto que en lugar de incluir la caja resultante en la salida normal,
+esta la guarda en la caja etiquetada \INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA.
+\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA se debió declarar previamente con ‘\newsavebox’ (*note
+\newsavebox::).
+
+21.9 ‘\usebox{\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA}’
+=================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \usebox{\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA}
+
+ ‘\usebox’ produce la caja guardada más recientemente en el depósito
+\INSTRUCCIÓN-CAJA por una instrucción ‘\savebox’ (*note \savebox::).
+
+22 Inserciones Especiales
+*************************
+
+LaTeX proporciona instrucciones para insertar caracteres que tienen un
+significado especial que no corresponde a caracteres simples que usted
+puede escribir.
+
+22.1 Caracteres Reservados
+==========================
+
+Los siguientes caracteres desempeñan un papel especial en LaTeX y se
+llaman “caracteres reservados” o “caracteres especiales”.
+
+ # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+
+ Siempre que escriba en su archivo uno de estos caracteres, LaTeX debe
+hacer algo especial. Si simplemente desea imprimir el carácter en sí
+mismo, incluya un carácter ‘\’ anteponiéndolo a este. Por ejemplo, ‘\$’
+debe producir ‘$’ en su salida.
+
+ Una excepción a esta regla es la ‘\’ misma, debido a que ‘\’ tiene su
+propio significado especial (dependiente del contexto). Una \ romana es
+producida al escribir ‘$\backslash$’ en su archivo, y una ‘\’ de máquina
+de escribir es producida usando ‘\’ en una instrucción verbatim (*note
+verbatim::).
+
+ Además, ‘\~’ y ‘\^’ colocan acentos tilde y circunflejo sobre la
+siguiente letra, como en õ y ô (*note Acentos::); Para obtener una ‘~’ o
+‘^’ independiente, usted puede utilizar una instrucción verbatim.
+
+ Por último, puede acceder a cualquier carácter del tipo de letra
+actual una vez que sepa su número utilizando la instrucción ‘\symbol’.
+Por ejemplo, el carácter de espacio visibles utilizada en la instrucción
+‘\verb*’ tiene el código decimal 32, por lo tanto se puede escribir como
+‘\symbol{32}’.
+
+ También puede especificar números octales con ‘'’ o números
+hexadecimales con ‘"’, por lo que el ejemplo anterior también se podría
+escribir como ‘\symbol{'40}’ o ‘\symbol{"20}’.
+
+22.2 Símbolos de Texto
+======================
+
+LaTeX proporciona instrucciones para generar una serie símbolos
+distintos de letras, en el texto. Algunos de estos, especialmente los
+más oscuros, no están disponibles en OT1; posiblemente tenga que cargar
+el paquete ‘textcomp’.
+
+‘\copyright’
+‘\textcopyright’
+ El símbolo de copyright, ©.
+
+‘\dag’
+ El símbolo daga (en texto).
+
+‘\ddag’
+ El símbolo doble daga (en texto).
+
+‘\LaTeX’
+ El logotipo de LaTeX.
+
+‘\LaTeXe’
+ El logotypo de LaTeX2e.
+
+‘\guillemotleft («)’
+‘\guillemotright (»)’
+‘\guilsinglleft (‹)’
+‘\guilsinglright (›)’
+ Comillas tipográficas angulares dobles y simples, utilizadas
+ comúnmente en Francés: «, », ‹, ›.
+
+‘\ldots’
+‘\dots’
+‘\textellipsis’
+ Puntos suspensivos (tres puntos en la línea base): ‘...’. ‘\ldots’
+ y ‘\dots’ también trabajan en modo math.
+
+‘\lq’
+ Comilla izquierda (de apertura): ‘.
+
+‘\P’
+‘\textparagraph’
+ Signo de párrafo (antígrafo).
+
+‘\pounds’
+‘\textsterling’
+ Libras esterlinas en Inglés: £.
+
+‘\quotedblbase („)’
+‘\quotesinglbase (‚)’
+ Simple y dobles comillas en la línea base: „ y ‚.
+
+‘\rq’
+ Comilla derecha (de cierre): ’.
+
+‘\S’
+ Símbolo de sección.
+
+‘\TeX’
+ El logotipo de TeX.
+
+‘\textasciicircum’
+ Circunflejo ASCII: ^.
+
+‘\textasciitilde’
+ Tilde ASCII: ~.
+
+‘\textasteriskcentered’
+ Asterisco centrado: *.
+
+‘\textbackslash’
+ Barra inversa: \.
+
+‘\textbar’
+ Barra Vertical: |.
+
+‘\textbardbl’
+ Doble barra vertical.
+
+‘\textbigcircle’
+ Símbolo círculo grande.
+
+‘\textbraceleft’
+ Llave izquierda: {.
+
+‘\textbraceright’
+ Llave derecha: }.
+
+‘\textbullet’
+ Bala: •.
+
+‘\textcircled{LETRA}’
+ LETRA en un círculo, como en ®.
+
+‘\textcompwordmark’
+‘\textcapitalwordmark’
+‘\textascenderwordmark’
+ Marca de palabra compuesta (invisible). La forma ‘\textcapital...’
+ tiene la tapa del tipo de letra, mientras que la forma
+ ‘\textascender...’ tiene el ascender superior.
+
+‘\textdagger’
+ Daga: \dag.
+
+‘\textdaggerdbl’
+ Daga doble: \ddag.
+
+‘\textdollar (o ‘\$’)’
+ Signo de Dólar: $.
+
+‘\textemdash (o ‘---’)’
+ Em-dash: — (para puntuación).
+
+‘\textendash (o ‘--’)’
+ En-dash: — (para rangos).
+
+‘\texteuro’
+ El Símbolo del Euro: €.
+
+‘\textexclamdown (o ‘!`’)’
+ Signo de exclamación inicial: ¡.
+
+‘\textgreater’
+ Mayor que: >.
+
+‘\textless’
+ Menor que: <.
+
+‘\textleftarrow’
+ Flecha izquierda.
+
+‘\textordfeminine’
+‘\textordmasculine’
+ Símbolos ordinales femenino y masculino: ª, º.
+
+‘\textordfeminine’
+ Símbolo ordinal femenino: ª.
+
+‘\textperiodcentered’
+ Punto centrado: ·.
+
+‘\textquestiondown (o ‘?`’)’
+ Signo de interrogación inicial: ¿.
+
+‘\textquotedblleft (o ‘``’)’
+ Comillas dobles de apertura: “.
+
+‘\textquotedblright (o ‘'’)’
+ Dobles comillas de cierre: ”.
+
+‘\textquoteleft (o ‘`’)’
+ Comilla de apertura simple: ‘.
+
+‘\textquoteright (o ‘'’)’
+ Comilla de cierre simple: ’.
+
+‘\textquotestraightbase’
+‘\textquotestraightdblbase’
+ Líneas rectas simples y dobles en la línea base.
+
+‘\textregistered’
+ Símbolo de marca registrada: ®.
+
+‘\textrightarrow’
+ Flecha hacia la derecha.
+
+‘\textthreequartersemdash’
+ em-dash de “Tres cuartos”, entre en-dash y em-dash.
+
+‘\texttrademark’
+ Símbolo de marca comercial: ™.
+
+‘\texttwelveudash’
+ Xx 12u-.
+
+‘\textunderscore’
+ Subrayado: _.
+
+‘\textvisiblespace’
+ Símbolo de espacio visible.
+
+22.3 Acentos
+============
+
+LaTeX tiene un amplio apoyo para muchos de los guiones de idiomas del
+mundo, a través del paquete ‘babel’ y de apoyo relacionados. Esta
+sección no pretende abarcar todas con las que es compatible. Este
+simplemente se limita a enumerar las principales instrucciones LaTeX
+para crear caracteres acentuados.
+
+ Las instrucciones ‘\capital...’ producen formas alternativas para su
+uso con letras mayúsculas. Estas no están disponibles con OT1.
+
+‘\"’
+‘\capitaldieresis’
+ Produce una diéresis, como en ö.
+
+‘\'’
+‘\capitalacute’
+ Produce un acento agudo, como en ó. En el entorno ‘tabbing’,
+ empuja la columna actual a la derecha de la columna anterior (*note
+ tabbing::).
+
+‘\.’
+ Produce un punto como acento sobre la siguiente, como en ȯ.
+
+‘\=’
+‘\capitalmacron’
+ Produce un acento macrón (una barra) sobre el siguiente, como en ō.
+
+‘\^’
+‘\capitalcircumflex’
+ Produce un acento circunflejo (sombrero) sobre la siguiente, como
+ en ô.
+
+‘\`’
+‘\capitalgrave’
+ Produce un acento grave sobre la siguiente, como en ò. En el
+ entorno ‘tabbing’, mueve el siguiente texto hacia el margen derecho
+ (*note tabbing::).
+
+‘\~’
+‘\capitaltilde’
+ Produce una tilde como acento sobre la siguiente, como en ñ.
+
+‘\b’
+ Produce una barra como acento debajo de la siguiente, como en o̲.
+ Vea también ‘\underbar’ a continuación
+
+‘\c’
+‘\capitalcedilla’
+ Produce una cedilla como acento sobre la siguiente, como en ç.
+
+‘\d’
+‘\capitaldotaccent’
+ Produce un círculo como acento sobre la siguiente, como en ọ.
+
+‘\H’
+‘\capitalhungarumlaut’
+ Produce un acento diéresis húngaro sobre la siguiente, como en ő.
+
+‘\i’
+ Produce una i sin punto, como en ‘ı’.
+
+‘\j’
+ Produce una j sin punto, como en ‘j’.
+
+‘\k’
+‘\capitalogonek’
+ Produce una letra con colita, como en ‘ǫ’. No disponible en la
+ codificación OT1.
+
+‘\r’
+‘\capitalring’
+ Produce un anillo como acento, como en ‘o̊’.
+
+‘\t’
+‘\capitaltie’
+‘\newtie’
+‘\capitalnewtie’
+ Produce una atadura con el siguiente como acento, como en ‘oo͡’. La
+ forma ‘\newtie’ está centrada en su caja.
+
+‘\u’
+‘\capitalbreve’
+ Produce un acento breve, como en ‘ŏ’.
+
+‘\underbar’
+ No es exactamente un acento, este produce una barra en el argumento
+ texto. El argumento siempre se procesa en modo horizontal. La
+ barra siempre está en una posición fija en la línea base, por lo
+ que cruza a través de los trazos descendentes. Vea también
+ ‘\underline’ en *note Miscelánea Math::. Vea también ‘\b’ aquí
+ antes
+
+‘\v’
+‘\capitalcaron’
+ Produce un acento háček (anticircunflejo, carón), como en ‘ǒ’.
+
+22.4 Caracteres no Ingleses
+===========================
+
+Estas son las instrucciones LaTeX básicas para insertar los caracteres
+más usados en idiomas distintos del Inglés.
+
+‘\aa’
+‘\AA’
+ å y Å.
+
+‘\ae’
+‘\AE’
+ æ y Æ.
+
+‘\dh’
+‘\DH’
+ Letra eth islandesa: ð y Ð.
+
+‘\dj’
+‘\DJ’
+ xxxx
+
+‘\ij’
+‘\IJ’
+ ij y IJ (salvo que un poco más juntas que como aparecen aquí).
+
+‘\l’
+‘\L’
+ ł y Ł.
+
+‘\ng’
+‘\NG’
+ xxxx
+
+‘\o’
+‘\O’
+ ø y Ø.
+
+‘\oe’
+‘\OE’
+ œ y Œ.
+
+‘\ss’
+‘\SS’
+ ß y SS.
+
+‘\th’
+‘\TH’
+ Letra espina Islandesa: þ y Þ.
+
+22.5 ‘\rule’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \rule[AUMENTAR]{ANCHO}{ESPESOR}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\rule’ produce “reglas”, que son, líneas o
+rectángulos. Los argumentos son:
+
+AUMENTAR
+ Qué tanto aumentar la regla (opcional).
+
+ANCHO
+ La longitud de la regla (obligatorio).
+
+ESPESOR
+ El espesor de la regla (obligatorio).
+
+22.6 ‘\today’
+=============
+
+La instrucción ‘\today’ produce la fecha de hoy, en formato ‘MES DD,
+AAAA’; por ejemplo, ‘Julio 04 1976’. Utiliza los contadores
+predefinidos ‘\day’, ‘\month’, y ‘\year’ (*note \day \month \year::)
+para hacerlo. No se actualiza cuando se ejecuta el programa.
+
+ El paquete ‘datetime’, entre otros, puede producir una amplia
+variedad de formatos de fecha.
+
+23 Dividiendo la Entrada
+************************
+
+Un documento de gran tamaño requiere una gran cantidad de insumos. En
+lugar de poner toda la entrada en un único archivo de gran tamaño, es
+más eficiente dividirlo en varios más pequeños. Independientemente del
+número de archivos separados que utilice, hay uno que es el archivo
+raíz; este es cuyo nombre se escribe cuando se ejecuta LaTeX.
+
+23.1 ‘\include’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \include{ARCHIVO}
+
+ No hay presente una instrucción ‘\includeonly’, la instrucción
+‘\include’ executa ‘\clearpage’ para iniciar una nueva página (*note
+\clearpage::), entonces lee el ARCHIVO, y luego hace otro ‘\clearpage’.
+
+ Dada una instrucción ‘\includeonly’, las acciones ‘\include’
+únicamente se ejecutan si ARCHIVO está listado como un argumento para
+‘\includeonly’. Consulte la siguiente sección.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\include’ no puede aparecer en el preámbulo o en un
+archivo leído por otra instrucción ‘\include’.
+
+23.2 ‘\includeonly’
+===================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \includeonly{ARCHIVO1,ARCHIVO2,...}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\includeonly’ controla cuales archivos se deben leer
+en subsecuentes instrucciones ‘\include’. La lista de nombres de
+archivo se separa con comas. Cada ARCHIVO debe coincidir exactamente
+con un nombre de archivo especificado en una instrucción ‘\include’ para
+una selección eficaz.
+
+ Esta instrucción únicamente puede aparecer en el preámbulo.
+
+23.3 ‘\input’
+=============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \input{ARCHIVO}
+
+ La instrucción ‘\input’ provoca que el ARCHIVO especificado sea leído
+y procesado, tal como si su contendido se hubiera insertado en ese punto
+en el archivo actual.
+
+ Si ARCHIVO no termina en ‘.tex ’ (por ejemplo, ‘foo’ o ‘foo.bar’),
+primero se intenta con esa extensión (‘foo.tex’ o ‘foo.bar.tex’). Si no
+se encuentra, el ARCHIVO original se intenta con (‘foo’ o ‘foo.bar’).
+
+24 Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada
+***********************************
+
+24.1 Tablas de Contenido
+========================
+
+Se produce una tabla de contenido con la instrucción ‘\tableofcontents’.
+Usted pone la instrucción adecuada donde desea que aparezca la tabla de
+contenido; LaTeX hace el resto para usted. Una ejecución previa habrá
+generado un archivo ‘.toc’.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\tableofcontents’ produce una sección, pero no inicia
+una nueva página automáticamente. Si desea una nueva página después de
+la tabla de contenido, escriba una instrucción código ‘\newpage’ después
+de la instrucción ‘\tableofcontents’.
+
+ Las instrucciones análogas ‘\listoffigures’ y ‘\listoftables’
+producen una lists de figuras y una lista de tablas, respectivamente.
+Cada una funciona exactamente igual que la tabla de contenido.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\nofiles’ reemplaza estas instrucciones, e _impide_
+que se genere cualquiera de estas listas.
+
+24.1.1 \addcontentsline
+-----------------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\addcontentsline’{EXTENSIÓN}{UNDAD}{TEXTO} añade una
+entrada a la lista o tabla donde:
+
+EXTENSIÓN
+ La extensión del archivo en el que se va a escribir la información,
+ por lo general una de: ‘toc’ (tabla de contenido), ‘lof’ (lista de
+ figuras) o ‘lot’ (lista de tablas).
+
+UNIDAD
+ El nombre de la unidad de sección a añadir, normalmente una de las
+ siguientes, coincidiendo con el valor del argumento EXTENSIÓN:
+
+ ‘toc’
+ El nombre de la unidad de sección: ‘part’, ‘chapter’,
+ ‘section’, ‘subsection’, ‘subsubsection’.
+ ‘lof’
+ Para la lista de figuras.
+ ‘lot’
+ Para la lista de tablas.
+
+TEXTO
+ El texto real de la entrada.
+
+ La instrucción que realmente escribe al archivo ‘.EXTENSIÓN’ es la
+instrucción ‘\contentsline{UNDAD}{NOMBRE}’.
+
+24.1.2 \addtocontents
+---------------------
+
+La instrucción ‘\addtocontents’{EXTENSIÓN}{TEXTO} añade texto (o
+instrucciones de formato) directamente al archivo ‘.EXTENSIÓN’ que
+genera la tabla de contenido o listas de figuras o tablas.
+
+EXTENSIÓN
+ La extensión del archivo en el cual escribir la información: ‘toc’
+ (tabla de contenido), ‘lof’ (lista de figuras) o ‘lot’ (lista de
+ tablas).
+
+TEXTO
+ El texto a escribir.
+
+24.2 Glosarios
+==============
+
+La instrucción ‘\makeglossary’ habilita la creación de glosarios.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\glossary{TEXTO}’ escribe una entrada en el glosario
+para TEXTO a un archivo auxiliar con la extensión ‘.glo’.
+
+ Específicamente, la instrucción que escribe es
+‘\glossaryentry{TEXTO}{NO-DE-PÁGINA}’, donde NO-DE-PÁGINA es el valor de
+‘\thepage’.
+
+ El paquete ‘glossary’ en CTAN proporciona compatibilidad para
+glosarios más sofisticados.
+
+24.3 Índices
+============
+
+La instrucción ‘\makeindex’ permite la creación de índices. Coloquela
+en el preámbulo.
+
+ La instrucción ‘\index{TEXTO}’ escribe una entrada en el índice para
+TEXTO en un archivo auxiliar con la extensión ‘.idx’.
+
+ Específicamente, la instrucción que escribe la entrada es
+‘\indexentry{TEXTO}{NO-DE-PÁGINA}’, donde NO-DE-PÁGINA es el valor
+actual de ‘\thepage’.
+
+ Para generar una entrada de índice para ‘bar’ que diga ‘Vea foo’,
+utilice una barra vertical: ‘\index{bar|see{foo}}’. Use ‘seealso’ en
+lugar de ‘see’ para producir una entrada ‘Vea también’.
+
+ El texto ‘Vea’ está definido por la macro ‘\seename’, y ‘Vea también’
+por la macro ‘\alsoname’. Estas se pueden redefinir para otros idiomas.
+
+ El archivo ‘.idx’ generado luego es ordenado con una instrucción
+externa, por lo general alguna instrucción ‘makeindex’
+(<http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex>) o (la de múltiples
+idiomas) ‘xindy’ (<http://xindy.sourceforge.net>). Esto resulta en un
+archivo ‘.ind’, que se puede leer para componer tipográficamente el
+índice.
+
+ El índice normalmente se genera con la instrucción ‘\printindex’.
+Esta instrucción está definida en el paquete ‘makeidx’, por lo tanto
+necesita colocar en el preámbulo la instrucción ‘\usepackage{makeidx}’.
+
+ La longitud de relleno ‘\indexspace’ se inserta antes de cada nueva
+letra en el índice impreso; letra en el índice impreso su valor
+predeterminado es ‘10pt plus5pt minus3pt’.
+
+ El paquete ‘showidx’ hace que cada entrada en el índice se muestre en
+el margen de la página donde aparece la entrada. Esto puede ayudar en
+la preparación del índice.
+
+ El paquete ‘multind’ es compatible con múltiples índices. Vea
+también la entrada de este tema en las preguntas frecuentes de TeX, en
+
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind>.
+
+25 Cartas
+*********
+
+Usted puede utilizar LaTeX para componer tipográficamente cartas, para
+ambas personales y de negocios. La clase de documento ‘letter’ está
+diseñada para hacer una serie de cartas a la vez, aunque se puede hacer
+sólo una si así lo desea.
+
+ Su archivo fuente ‘.tex’ tiene las mismas instrucciones mínimas de
+clase que en cualquier otro documento, es decir, debe tener las
+siguientes instrucciones como mínimo:
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... cartas ...
+ \end{document}
+
+ Cada carta es un entorno ‘letter’, cuyo argumento es el nombre y
+dirección del destinatario. Por ejemplo, usted podría tener:
+
+ \begin{letter}{Sr. José Pérez\\ Calle Princesa N°2345.
+ \\ Edinburgo, EH1 1AA}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+
+ La carta en sí comienza con la instrucción ‘\opening’. Siguiéndole
+el texto de la carta. Este se escribe como una entrada de LaTeX
+ordinaria. Las instrucciones que no tienen sentido en una carta, como
+‘\chapter’, no funcionan. La carta se cierra con una instrucción
+‘\closing’.
+
+ Después de ‘closing’, usted puede colocar material adicional. La
+instrucción ‘\cc’ produce el usual “cc: ...”. También hay una
+instrucción ‘\encl’ similar para una lista de destinatarios. Con ambas
+instrucciones, use ‘\\’ para separar los elementos.
+
+ Estas instrucciones se utilizan con la clase ‘letter’.
+
+25.1 \address{DIRECCIÓN-DEL-REMITENTE}
+======================================
+
+La instrucción ‘\address’ especifica la dirección del remitente de la
+carta, como debería aparecer en la carta y el sobre. Separa las líneas
+de la dirección que deben estar separadas por instrucciones ‘\\’.
+
+ Si usted no proporciona una declaración ‘\address’, entonces, se
+aplicará a la carta el formato de copia en papel con el membrete
+estándar de su organización. (*Note Descripción::, para obtener
+detalles sobre la implementación local). Si usted proporciona una
+declaración ‘\address’, entonces, la carta será formateada como una
+carta personal.
+
+25.2 ‘\cc’
+==========
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \cc{NOMBRE\\NOMBRE2}
+
+ Produce una lista de NOMBREs a quienes enviar copias de la carta.
+Cada nombre se imprime en una línea separada.
+
+25.3 ‘\closing’
+===============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \closing{texto}
+
+ Una carta se cierra con la instrucción ‘\closing’, por ejemplo,
+ \closing{Muy Atentamente,}
+
+25.4 ‘\encl’
+============
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \encl{LÍNEA1\\LÍNEA2}
+
+ Declara una lista de más de un documento adjunto.
+
+25.5 ‘\location’
+================
+
+‘\location{dirección}’
+
+ Esta modifica la dirección estándar de su organización. Esto sólo
+aparece si el estilo de página ‘firstpage’ está seleccionado.
+
+25.6 ‘\makelabels’
+==================
+
+‘\makelabels{número}’
+
+ Si ejecuta esta instrucción en el preámbulo, LaTeX creará una hoja de
+etiquetas con las direcciones. Esta hoja se emitirá antes que las
+cartas.
+
+25.7 ‘\name’
+============
+
+‘\name{June Davenport}’
+
+ Su nombre, utilizado en la impresión del sobre junto con la dirección
+del remitente.
+
+25.8 ‘\opening{TEXTO}’
+======================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \opening{TEXTO}
+
+ Una carta comienza con la instrucción ‘\opening’. El argumento
+obligatorio, TEXTO, es el texto con el que desea iniciar su carta. Por
+ejemplo:
+
+ \opening{Estimado José,}
+
+25.9 ‘\ps’
+==========
+
+Use la instrucción ‘\ps’ para iniciar una posdata en una carta, después
+de ‘\closing’.
+
+25.10 ‘\signature{TEXTO}’
+=========================
+
+Su nombre, como debe aparecer al final de la carta debajo del espacio
+para su firma. ‘\\’ inicia una nueva línea dentro de TEXTO como de
+costumbre.
+
+25.11 ‘\startbreaks’
+====================
+
+‘\startbreaks’
+
+ Se usa después de una instrucción ‘\stopbreaks’ para permitir de
+nuevo los saltos de página.
+
+25.12 ‘\stopbreaks’
+===================
+
+‘\stopbreaks’
+
+ Inhibe saltos de página hasta que aparezca una instrucción
+‘\startbreaks’.
+
+25.13 ‘\telephone’
+==================
+
+‘\telephone{número}’
+
+ Este es su número de teléfono. Este sólo aparece si el estilo de
+página ‘firstpage’ está seleccionado.
+
+26 Entrada/Salida a la Terminal
+*******************************
+
+26.1 ‘\typein[INSTRUCCIÓN]{MENSAJE}’
+====================================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \typein[\INSTRUCCIÓN]{MENSAJE}
+
+ ‘\typein’ imprime el MENSAJE en la terminal y provoca que LaTeX se
+detenga y espere para que usted escriba una línea de entrada, terminando
+con “Intro”. Si se omite el argumento opcional \INSTRUCCIÓN, la entrada
+escrita se procesa como si se hubiera incluido en el archivo de entrada
+en lugar de la instrucción ‘\typein’. Si está presente el argumento
+\INSTRUCCIÓN, debe ser el nombre de una instrucción. Este nombre de
+instrucción entonces define o redefine la entrada escrita.
+
+26.2 ‘\typeout{MENSAJE}’
+========================
+
+Sinopsis:
+
+ \typeout{MENSAJE}
+
+ Imprime el ‘mensaje’ en la terminal y en el archivo ‘log’. Las
+instrucciones en el ‘mensaje’ que están definidas con ‘\newcommand’ o
+‘\renewcommand’ (entre otras) se sustituyen por su definición antes de
+ser impresas.
+
+ Las reglas habituales de LaTeX para el tratamiento de varios espacios
+como un espacio único e ignorando espacios después de un nombre de
+instrucción también se aplican al ‘mensaje’. Una instrucción ‘\space’
+en ‘mensaje’ provoca la impresión de un espació sencillo,
+independientemente de los espacios circundantes. Una ‘^^J’ en ‘mensaje’
+imprime una nueva línea.
+
+27 Línea de Órdenes
+*******************
+
+La especificación de archivo de entrada indica el archivo al cual
+aplicar formato; TeX usa ‘.tex’ como extensión predeterminada. Si se
+omite el archivo de entrada completamente, TeX acepta entrada desde la
+terminal. Usted especifica opciones de instrucción mediante el
+suministro de una cadena como un parámetro para la instrucción; por
+ejemplo,
+
+ latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
+
+debe procesar ‘foo.tex’ sin hacer una pausa después de cada error.
+
+ Si LaTeX se detiene en medio del documento y le muestra un indicador
+‘*’, está esperando por una entrada. Usted puede escribir ‘\stop’ (e
+Intro) y este terminará el documento prematuramente.
+
+Apéndice A Plantillas de Documento
+**********************************
+
+Aunque no es material de referencia, tal vez estas plantillas de
+documento serán de utilidad.
+
+A.1 Plantilla ‘book’
+====================
+
+\documentclass{book}
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+\title{Plantilla de Clase Book}
+\author{Autor Alex}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\chapter{Primero}
+Algún texto.
+
+\chapter{Segundo}
+Algún otro texto.
+
+\section{Un subtema}
+El final.
+\end{document}
+
+A.2 Plantilla ‘beamer’
+======================
+
+La clase ‘beamer’ crea diapositivas de presentaciones.
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+
+\title{Plantilla de Clase Beamer}
+\author{Autor Alex}
+\date{Julio 31, 2010}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% sin [fragile], cualquier código {verbatim} provoca errores misteriosos.
+\begin{frame}[fragile]
+ \frametitle{Primer Diapositiva}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ ¡Esto está en \verbatim!
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
+A.3 Plantilla ‘tugboat’
+=======================
+
+‘TUGboat’ es el diario del Grupo de Usuarios de TeX,
+<http://tug.org/TUGboat>.
+
+\documentclass{ltugboat} % para procedimientos ltugproc
+
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{ifpdf}
+\ifpdf
+ \usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,
+ urlcolor=black]{hyperref}
+\else
+ \usepackage{url}
+\fi
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Ejemplo de Articulo Regular \TUB\}
+
+% repetir información para cada autor.
+\author{First Last}
+\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
+\netaddress{user (at) ejemplo dot org}
+\personalURL{http://ejemplo.org/~user/}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% El resumen en ltugboat viene después de \maketitle.
+\begin{abstract}
+Este es un ejemplo del tema de un artículo \TUB{} ordinario.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introducción}
+
+Este es un artículo de ejemplo para \TUB, de
+\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
+
+Recomendamos el paquete graphicx para inclusión de imágenes y el
+paquete hyperref para urls activas (en la salida \acro{PDF}). \TUB\ se
+produce utilizando archivos \acro{PDF} exclusivamente, en la actualidad.
+
+Las clases \texttt{ltug*} proporcionan estas abreviaturas, entre muchas
+otras:
+
+{\small
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
+\BibTeX \CandT \CTAN \DTD \DVItoVDU \HTML
+\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \JoT \LAMSTeX \LaTeXe
+\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \pcMF \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas
+\PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS
+\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG
+\tug \UG \UNIX \VAX \VorTeX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+
+\Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag
+\careof \thinskip
+
+\acro{FRED} -> {\sc fred} % ¡Por favor úselas!
+\cs{fred} -> \fred
+\env{fred} -> \begin{fred}
+\meta{fred} -> <fred>
+\nth{n} -> 1st, 2nd, ...
+\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
+\booktitle{Libro de Fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+}
+
+Para mayor información, consulte el documento en ltubguid:
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat}
+
+Correo electrónico \verb|tugboat@tug.org| si incurre en problemas o tiene
+dudas.
+
+
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain} % recomendamos el estilo de bibliografía plain
+\nocite{book-minimal} % solo hace que la bibliografía no esté vacía
+\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib viene con BibTeX
+
+
+\makesignature % no en ltugproc
+\end{document}
+
+Apéndice B Traducción de la licencia
+************************************
+
+La traducción que sigue es dada únicamente como informaciòn, y no
+reemplaza el texto en inglés dado al principio de este documento.
+
+ Se concede permiso para hacer y distribuir copias literales de este
+manual siempre que el aviso de copyright y esta nota de permiso se
+conserven en todas las copias.
+
+ Se concede permiso para copiar y distribuir versiones modificadas de
+este manual bajo las condiciones para una copia literal, a condición de
+que todo el trabajo derivado resultante se distribuya bajo los términos
+de una nota de permiso idéntica a ésta.
+
+ Se concede permiso para copiar y distribuir traducciones de este
+manual a otro idioma, con las condiciones anteriores para versiones
+modificadas.
+
+Índice de Conceptos
+*******************
+
+* Menu:
+
+* * apuntador: Línea de Órdenes. (line 5171)
+* \include anidada, no se permite: \include. (line 4805)
+* ‘vea’ y ‘vea también’ entradas de índice: Índices. (line 4933)
+* accediendo a cualquier carácter del tipo de letra: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4412)
+* acento agudo: Acentos. (line 4621)
+* acento agudo, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3799)
+* acento anticircunflejo: Acentos. (line 4699)
+* acento barra: Acentos. (line 4648)
+* acento barra encima: Acentos. (line 4630)
+* acento barra horizontal, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3802)
+* acento barra sobre: Acentos. (line 4630)
+* acento breve, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3805)
+* acento cedilla: Acentos. (line 4653)
+* acento circunflejo: Acentos. (line 4634)
+* acento circunflejo <1>: Acentos. (line 4634)
+* acento circunflejo amplio, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3835)
+* acento circunflejo, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3820)
+* acento circunflejo, math <1>: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3820)
+* acento círculo: Acentos. (line 4657)
+* acento de verificación, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3808)
+* acento diéresis: Acentos. (line 4617)
+* acento diéresis <1>: Acentos. (line 4617)
+* acento diéresis húngara: Acentos. (line 4661)
+* acento diéresis, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3811)
+* acento grave: Acentos. (line 4639)
+* acento grave, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3817)
+* acento háček, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3808)
+* acento macrón: Acentos. (line 4630)
+* acento macrón, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3802)
+* acento punto: Acentos. (line 4626)
+* acento punto <1>: Acentos. (line 4626)
+* acento punto superior, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3814)
+* acento tilde: Acentos. (line 4645)
+* acento tilde amplia, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3838)
+* acento tilde, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3829)
+* acentos: Acentos. (line 4606)
+* acentos matemáticos: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3794)
+* acentos, matemáticas: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3794)
+* alineando a través de tabulación: tabbing. (line 1817)
+* alineando Ecuaciones: eqnarray. (line 1113)
+* alineando texto en columnas con tabulaciones: tabbing. (line 1817)
+* alineando texto en tablas: tabular. (line 1943)
+* ampliando la página actual: \enlargethispage. (line 2441)
+* anillo acento: Acentos. (line 4676)
+* anticircunflejo acento: Acentos. (line 4699)
+* antígrafo o simplemente signo de párrafo: Símbolos de Texto.
+ (line 4464)
+* apuntador, *: Línea de Órdenes. (line 5171)
+* apéndices, creando: Seccionado. (line 832)
+* archivo .glo: Glosarios. (line 4910)
+* archivo .idx: Índices. (line 4926)
+* archivo .ind: Índices. (line 4940)
+* archivo de entrada: Dividiendo la Entrada.
+ (line 4784)
+* argumentos móviles: \protect. (line 2726)
+* ascender superior: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4519)
+* ASCII circunflejo, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4484)
+* ash: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4709)
+* asterisco centrado, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4490)
+* asterisco, centrado, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4490)
+* atadura con siguiente acento: Acentos. (line 4682)
+* autor, para titlepage: \maketitle. (line 3967)
+* bala, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4511)
+* bar, vertical, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4496)
+* barra inversa, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4493)
+* barra vertical, doble, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4499)
+* barra vertical, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4496)
+* barra, vertical doble, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4499)
+* bibliografía, creando (automáticamente): Usando BibTeX. (line 2176)
+* bibliografía, creando (manualmente): thebibliography. (line 2108)
+* bibTeX, usando: Usando BibTeX. (line 2176)
+* breve acento: Acentos. (line 4687)
+* cajas: Cajas. (line 4217)
+* caracteres especiales: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4704)
+* caracteres no Ingleses: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4704)
+* caracteres reservados: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4392)
+* caracteres, acentuados: Acentos. (line 4606)
+* caracteres, no Ingleses: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4704)
+* caracteres, reservados: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4392)
+* cargando paquetes adicionales: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 436)
+* cartas: Cartas. (line 4967)
+* cartas, iniciando: \opening. (line 5073)
+* cartas, terminando: \closing. (line 5029)
+* carón acento: Acentos. (line 4699)
+* centrar texto, declaración para: \centering. (line 996)
+* centrar texto, entorno para: center. (line 982)
+* cerrando cartas: \closing. (line 5029)
+* circunflejo, ASCII, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4484)
+* clases de documento: Clases de Documento.
+ (line 350)
+* clases de documentos: Clases de Documento.
+ (line 350)
+* colita: Acentos. (line 4671)
+* comilla angular de apertura: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4450)
+* comilla angular de cierre: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4450)
+* comilla de apertura: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4460)
+* comilla de apertura simple: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4573)
+* comilla de cierre: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4475)
+* comilla de cierre simple: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4576)
+* comilla de cierre, simple: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4576)
+* comilla derecha: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4475)
+* comilla en línea base, simple y doble: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4472)
+* comilla izquierda: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4460)
+* comilla izquierda, sola: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4573)
+* comilla simple en línea base: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4472)
+* comilla, en la línea base (coma): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4580)
+* comillas de cierre dobles: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4570)
+* comillas de cierre, dobles: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4570)
+* comillas dobles de apertura: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4567)
+* comillas dobles en línea base: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4472)
+* comillas tipográficas angulares: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4450)
+* comillas tipográficas angulares simples: Símbolos de Texto.
+ (line 4450)
+* comillas tipográficas Francesas: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4450)
+* comillas tipográficas simples: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4450)
+* comillas tipográficas, Francesas: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4450)
+* comillas tipográficas, latinas o angulares: Símbolos de Texto.
+ (line 4450)
+* comillastraight quote, base: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4580)
+* contadores, configurando: \setcounter. (line 2820)
+* contadores, consiguiendo el valor de: \value. (line 2806)
+* contadores, definiendo nuevos: \newcounter. (line 2600)
+* contadores, una lista de: Contadores. (line 2748)
+* creando cartas: Cartas. (line 4967)
+* creando imágenes: picture. (line 1523)
+* creando tablas: table. (line 1915)
+* créditos al pie de página: \maketitle. (line 3979)
+* código, composición tipográfica de: verbatim. (line 2246)
+* daga doble, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4527)
+* daga, doble, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4527)
+* daga, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4435)
+* daga, en texto <1>: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4524)
+* definiciones: Definiciones. (line 2559)
+* definición de nuevos tipos de letra: \newfont. (line 2711)
+* definiendo nuevos entornos: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment.
+ (line 2642)
+* definiendo nuevos teoremas: \newtheorem. (line 2681)
+* definiendo una nueva instrucción: \newcommand y \renewcommand.
+ (line 2565)
+* delimitador nulo: Miscelánea Math. (line 3877)
+* descargando flotantes e iniciando una página: \clearpage. (line 2428)
+* descripción de LaTeX: Descripción. (line 285)
+* diseño, parámetros de página para: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 746)
+* dividiendo el archivo de entrada: Dividiendo la Entrada.
+ (line 4784)
+* dividiendo páginas: Saltos de Página. (line 2411)
+* divisas, euro: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4539)
+* división de sílabas con guión, definiendo: \hyphenation. (line 2375)
+* división silábica, forzando: \- (hyphenation). (line 2342)
+* división silábica, impidiendo: \mbox. (line 4224)
+* doble barra vertical, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4499)
+* doble daga, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4438)
+* e-dash: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4536)
+* ecuaciones, alineando: eqnarray. (line 1113)
+* ecuaciones, entornos para: equation. (line 1140)
+* ejecutando header y footer: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 746)
+* elementos numerados, especificando contador: \usecounter. (line 2795)
+* em-dash: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4533)
+* em-dash de tres cuartos: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4589)
+* em-dash, tres cuartos: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4589)
+* entornos: Entornos. (line 915)
+* entornos, definiendo: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment.
+ (line 2642)
+* entrada/salida: Entrada/Salida a la Terminal.
+ (line 5123)
+* entrada/salida desde la terminal: Entrada/Salida a la Terminal.
+ (line 5123)
+* Equipo del Proyecto LaTeX: Acerca de este documento.
+ (line 249)
+* es-zet letra Alemana: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4745)
+* espacio dentro del modo math: Espacios en Modo Math.
+ (line 3843)
+* espacio vertical: \addvspace. (line 4164)
+* espacio vertical antes de párrafos: \parskip. (line 2950)
+* espacio vertical, insertando: \addvspace. (line 4164)
+* espacio visible: \verb. (line 2276)
+* espacios: Espacios. (line 4060)
+* espina Islandesa: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4749)
+* espina, letra Islandesa: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4749)
+* estilo de encabezado: \pagestyle. (line 4013)
+* estilo de numeración de página: \pagenumbering. (line 3991)
+* estilo del pie de página: \pagestyle. (line 4013)
+* estilos de página: Estilos de Página. (line 3954)
+* estilos de texto: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 457)
+* estilos de tipografía: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 457)
+* estilos del tipo de letra: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 457)
+* estilos, página: Estilos de Página. (line 3954)
+* eth, letra islandesa: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4717)
+* etiquetas en máquina de escribir en listas: description. (line 1032)
+* exclamación, inicial: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4542)
+* exponente: Subíndices y Superíndices.
+ (line 3039)
+* fecha, para la página de título: \maketitle. (line 3974)
+* figuras, en notas al pie: minipage. (line 1509)
+* figuras, insertando: figure. (line 1153)
+* fijando contadores: \setcounter. (line 2820)
+* finalizando e iniciando: Iniciando y Finalizando.
+ (line 332)
+* flecha derecha, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4586)
+* flecha hacia la derecha, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4586)
+* flecha hacia la izquierda, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4551)
+* flecha, izquierda, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4551)
+* footer, parámetros para: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 746)
+* forma con * de instrucciones de seccionado: Seccionado. (line 826)
+* funciones matemáticas: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3686)
+* funciones, matemáticas: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3686)
+* fórmulas en línea: math. (line 1480)
+* fórmulas matemáticas: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3002)
+* fórmulas, entornos para: equation. (line 1140)
+* fórmulas, matemáticas: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3002)
+* glosarios: Glosarios. (line 4908)
+* guión doble, línea recta: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4580)
+* haciendo párrafos: Haciendo Párrafos. (line 2923)
+* haciendo una página de título: titlepage. (line 2227)
+* header, parámetros para: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 746)
+* i sin punto: Acentos. (line 4664)
+* i sin punto, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3823)
+* imágenes, creando: picture. (line 1523)
+* informes de errores: Acerca de este documento.
+ (line 255)
+* iniciando una nueva página: \newpage. (line 2435)
+* iniciando una nueva página y limpiando flotantes: \clearpage.
+ (line 2428)
+* iniciando una página a mano derecha: \cleardoublepage. (line 2419)
+* iniciando y finalizando: Iniciando y Finalizando.
+ (line 332)
+* insertando figuras: figure. (line 1153)
+* Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 590)
+* instrucciones de diseño: Diseño. (line 667)
+* instrucciones de tipo de letra, de bajo nivel: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 590)
+* instrucciones frágiles: \protect. (line 2726)
+* instrucciones robustas: \protect. (line 2737)
+* instrucciones, definiendo nuevas: \newcommand y \renewcommand.
+ (line 2565)
+* interlineado doble: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 641)
+* interrogación, inicial: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4564)
+* islandés eth: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4717)
+* j sin punto: Acentos. (line 4667)
+* j sin punto, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3826)
+* justificación, alineando a la derecha: \raggedright. (line 1303)
+* justificación, irregular a la izquierda: \raggedleft. (line 1329)
+* justificando texto a la izquierda: \raggedright. (line 1303)
+* justificar texto a la derecha, entorno para: flushright. (line 1316)
+* justificar texto a la izquierda, entornos para: flushleft. (line 1290)
+* Knuth, Donald E.: Acerca de este documento.
+ (line 249)
+* l Polaca: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4729)
+* Lamport, Leslie: Acerca de este documento.
+ (line 249)
+* LaTeX, descripción: Descripción. (line 285)
+* letra en círculo, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4514)
+* letra ij, Neerlandés: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4725)
+* letras caligráficas para math: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 536)
+* letras griegas: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3048)
+* letras S afiladas: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4745)
+* letras script para math: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 536)
+* letras, acentuadas: Acentos. (line 4606)
+* letras, no Inglesas: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4704)
+* ligadura ae: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4713)
+* lista de documentos adjuntos: \encl. (line 5039)
+* lista de elementos, especificando el contador: \usecounter.
+ (line 2795)
+* lista de elementos, numerados: enumerate. (line 1073)
+* listas cc, en cartas: \cc. (line 5019)
+* listas con viñetas: itemize. (line 1342)
+* listas de descripción, creando: description. (line 1020)
+* listas de elementos: itemize. (line 1342)
+* listas de elementos, genéricas: list. (line 1456)
+* listas etiquetadas, creando: description. (line 1020)
+* listas no ordenadas: itemize. (line 1342)
+* llave de apertura, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4505)
+* llave derecha, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4508)
+* llave, derecha, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4508)
+* llave, izquierda, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4505)
+* Logotipo de LaTeX: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4441)
+* Logotipo de LaTeX2e: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4444)
+* logotipo de TeX: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4481)
+* logotipo, LaTeX: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4441)
+* logotipo, LaTeX2e: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4444)
+* logotipo, TeX: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4481)
+* longitudes predeterminadas: Longitudes Predeterminadas.
+ (line 2904)
+* longitudes, añadiendo a: \addtolength. (line 2875)
+* longitudes, configurando: \setlength. (line 2867)
+* longitudes, definiendo nuevas: \newlength. (line 2615)
+* longitudes, definiendo y usando: Longitudes. (line 2861)
+* longitudes, predefinidas: Longitudes Predeterminadas.
+ (line 2904)
+* línea de órdenes: Línea de Órdenes. (line 5160)
+* línea recta de guión doble, base: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4580)
+* línea, saltos de: Saltos de Línea. (line 2301)
+* líneas en tablas: tabular. (line 1943)
+* makeindex programa: Índices. (line 4940)
+* marca izquierda, doble: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4567)
+* marca palabra compuesta, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4519)
+* matemáticas, negrita: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 522)
+* matrices, matemáticas: array. (line 935)
+* minipage, creando una: minipage. (line 1493)
+* miscelánea math: Miscelánea Math. (line 3862)
+* modo izquierda-a-derecha: Modos. (line 3914)
+* modo lR: Modos. (line 3914)
+* modo math: Modos. (line 3914)
+* modo math mode, espaciado: Espacios en Modo Math.
+ (line 3843)
+* modo math, ingresando al: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3002)
+* modo párrafo: Modos. (line 3914)
+* modos: Modos. (line 3914)
+* moneda, dólar: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4530)
+* mostrando texto citado con sangría de párrafo: quotation. (line 1784)
+* mostrando texto citado sin sangría de párrafo: quote. (line 1801)
+* multiplicación discrecional: Miscelánea Math. (line 3863)
+* máquina de escribir en negrita, evitando: description. (line 1032)
+* negrita matemáticas: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 522)
+* notas al margen: Notas al Margen. (line 2957)
+* notas al pie en figuras: minipage. (line 1509)
+* notas al pie, creando: Notas al Pie. (line 2475)
+* notas al pie, símbolos en lugar de números en: Notas al Pie Simbólicas.
+ (line 2530)
+* notas en el margen: Notas al Margen. (line 2957)
+* nueva línea, comenzando: \\. (line 2314)
+* nueva línea, comenzando (modo de párrafo): \newline. (line 2336)
+* nueva línea, salida como entrada: \obeycr y \restorecr.
+ (line 2326)
+* nueva página, iniciando: \newpage. (line 2435)
+* nuevas instrucciones, definiendo: \newcommand y \renewcommand.
+ (line 2565)
+* número de ecuación, referencias cruzadas: \ref. (line 903)
+* número de figura, referencias cruzadas: \ref. (line 903)
+* número de pie de página, referencias cruzadas: \ref. (line 903)
+* número de página, referencias cruzadas: \pageref. (line 893)
+* número de sección, referencias cruzadas: \ref. (line 903)
+* números de ecuación, omitiendo: eqnarray. (line 1127)
+* números de sección, imprimiendo: Seccionado. (line 842)
+* observaciones en el margen: Notas al Margen. (line 2957)
+* oe ligadura: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4741)
+* omitiendo, cajas negras: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 391)
+* opciones de clase: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 368)
+* opciones de clase de documento: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 368)
+* opciones globales: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 368)
+* opciones globales <1>: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 443)
+* opciones, clase de documento: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 368)
+* opciones, globales: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 443)
+* ordinales en español, femenino y masculino: Símbolos de Texto.
+ (line 4555)
+* ordinales, femenino y masculino: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4555)
+* oslash: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4737)
+* paquete datetime: \today. (line 4778)
+* paquete float: figure. (line 1182)
+* paquete makeidx: Índices. (line 4947)
+* paquete multind: Índices. (line 4959)
+* paquete setspace: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 641)
+* paquete showidx: Índices. (line 4955)
+* paquetes, cargando: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 436)
+* parámetros de footnote: Parámetros para Footnote.
+ (line 2543)
+* parámetros para el diseño de página: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 746)
+* parámetros, diseño de página: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 746)
+* parámetros, para footnote: Parámetros para Footnote.
+ (line 2543)
+* plantillas de documentos: Plantillas de Documento.
+ (line 5178)
+* poesía, un entorno para: verse. (line 2282)
+* posdata, en cartas: \ps. (line 5086)
+* preámbulo, definido: Iniciando y Finalizando.
+ (line 343)
+* produce dos columnas: \twocolumn. (line 678)
+* produce una columna: \onecolumn. (line 672)
+* programas de ordenador, composición tipográfica: verbatim. (line 2246)
+* punto centrado, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4561)
+* punto superior acento, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3814)
+* punto, centrado, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4561)
+* puntos suspensivos: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4456)
+* página de título, creando la: titlepage. (line 2227)
+* párrafos: Haciendo Párrafos. (line 2923)
+* redefiniendo entornos: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment.
+ (line 2642)
+* reducción, omitiendo vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 739)
+* referencias cruzadas: Referencias Cruzadas.
+ (line 853)
+* referencias cruzadas con número de página: \pageref. (line 893)
+* referencias cruzadas, simbólicas: \ref. (line 903)
+* resúmenes: abstract. (line 925)
+* salto de página: Saltos de Página. (line 2411)
+* saltos de línea: Saltos de Línea. (line 2301)
+* saltos de línea, evitando: \linebreak y \nolinebreak.
+ (line 2392)
+* saltos de línea, forzando: \linebreak y \nolinebreak.
+ (line 2392)
+* saltos de página, evitando: \pagebreak y \nopagebreak.
+ (line 2456)
+* saltos de página, forzando: \pagebreak y \nopagebreak.
+ (line 2456)
+* sangría de párrafos, en minipage: minipage. (line 1505)
+* sangría de párrafos, en minipage <1>: minipage. (line 1505)
+* sangría, forzando la: \indent. (line 2931)
+* sangría, suprimiendo la: \noindent. (line 2943)
+* sangrías de párrafo en texto citado: quotation. (line 1784)
+* sangrías de párrafo en texto citado, omitiendo: quote. (line 1801)
+* seccionado: Seccionado. (line 798)
+* separación de línea, forzando: \\. (line 2314)
+* signo de dólar: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4530)
+* siguiendo el estilo de encabezado y pie de página: \pagestyle.
+ (line 4013)
+* simulando texto escrito: verbatim. (line 2246)
+* subrayado: Acentos. (line 4690)
+* subrayado, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4598)
+* subíndice: Subíndices y Superíndices.
+ (line 3039)
+* superíndice: Subíndices y Superíndices.
+ (line 3039)
+* símbolo bala: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3129)
+* símbolo círculo grande, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4502)
+* símbolo de copyright: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4432)
+* símbolo de círculo, grande, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4502)
+* símbolo de espacio visible, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4601)
+* símbolo de libra esterlina: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4468)
+* símbolo de libra esterlina <1>: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4468)
+* símbolo de marca comercial: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4592)
+* símbolo de marca registrada: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4583)
+* símbolo de multiplicación, con salto de línea discrecional: Miscelánea Math.
+ (line 3863)
+* símbolo de párrafo: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4464)
+* símbolo de sección: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4478)
+* símbolo de vector, math: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3832)
+* símbolo del euro: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4539)
+* símbolo femenino ordinal: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4558)
+* símbolo mayor que, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4545)
+* símbolo menor que, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4548)
+* Símbolo ordinal femenino: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4555)
+* símbolo ordinal masculino: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4555)
+* símbolos de texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4425)
+* símbolos matemáticos: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3048)
+* símbolos, matemáticos: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3048)
+* tabla de contenido, agregando manualmente: \addcontentsline.
+ (line 4864)
+* tabla de contenido, creando: Tablas de Contenido.
+ (line 4844)
+* tablas, creando: table. (line 1915)
+* tabulaciones, utilizando: tabbing. (line 1817)
+* tamaño del texto: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 562)
+* tamaños del tipo de letra: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 562)
+* tamaños del tipo de letra <1>: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 562)
+* tapa superior: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4519)
+* teoremas, composición tipográfica de: theorem. (line 2214)
+* teoremas, definiendo: \newtheorem. (line 2681)
+* texto citado con sangría de párrafo, mostrando: quotation. (line 1784)
+* texto citado sin sangría de párrafo, mostrando: quote. (line 1801)
+* texto escrito, simulando: verbatim. (line 2246)
+* texto irregular a la derecha: \raggedright. (line 1303)
+* texto irregular a la derecha, entorno para: flushleft. (line 1290)
+* texto irregular a la izquierda: \raggedleft. (line 1329)
+* texto irregular a la izquierda, entorno para: flushright. (line 1316)
+* texto justificado a la derecha: \raggedleft. (line 1329)
+* texto literal: verbatim. (line 2246)
+* texto literal, en línea: \verb. (line 2264)
+* texto multicolumna: \twocolumn. (line 678)
+* thanks, para titlepage: \maketitle. (line 3979)
+* tilde ASCII, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4487)
+* tilde, ASCII, en texto: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4487)
+* tipo de letra cursiva: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 542)
+* tipo de letra de ancho fijo: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 557)
+* tipo de letra de máquina de escribir: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 557)
+* tipo de letra monoespacio: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 557)
+* tipo de letra negrita: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 533)
+* tipo de letra oblicua: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 554)
+* tipo de letra oblicua <1>: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 554)
+* tipo de letra romana: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 545)
+* tipo de letra sans serif: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 551)
+* tipo de letra versales: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 548)
+* Tipos de Letra: Tipos de Letra. (line 450)
+* tipos de letra: Tipos de Letra. (line 450)
+* tipos de letra, nuevas instrucciones para: \newfont. (line 2711)
+* title, para titlepage: \maketitle. (line 3984)
+* títulos, haciendo: \maketitle. (line 3961)
+* usando BibTeX: Usando BibTeX. (line 2176)
+* variables, una lista de: Contadores. (line 2748)
+* xindy programa: Índices. (line 4940)
+* Énfasis: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 484)
+* énfasis: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 539)
+* índices: Índices. (line 4923)
+
+Índice de Instrucciones
+***********************
+
+* Menu:
+
+* $: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3020)
+* @{...}: array. (line 960)
+* \" (acento diéresis): Acentos. (line 4617)
+* \#: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4397)
+* \$: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4397)
+* \%: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4397)
+* \&: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4397)
+* \' (acento agudo): Acentos. (line 4621)
+* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1861)
+* \(: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3012)
+* \): Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3012)
+* \*: Miscelánea Math. (line 3862)
+* \+: tabbing. (line 1851)
+* \,: Espacios en Modo Math.
+ (line 3854)
+* \-: tabbing. (line 1856)
+* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 2342)
+* \. (acento punto encima): Acentos. (line 4626)
+* \/: \/. (line 4132)
+* \:: Espacios en Modo Math.
+ (line 3852)
+* \;: Espacios en Modo Math.
+ (line 3849)
+* \<: tabbing. (line 1846)
+* \= (acento macrón): Acentos. (line 4630)
+* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1840)
+* \>: tabbing. (line 1844)
+* \> <1>: Espacios en Modo Math.
+ (line 3852)
+* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1843)
+* \@: \AT. (line 4110)
+* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1876)
+* \a' (acento agudo en tabulación): tabbing. (line 1877)
+* \a= (acento macrón en tabbing): tabbing. (line 1877)
+* \aa (å): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4709)
+* \AA (Å): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4709)
+* \acute: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3798)
+* \addcontentsline{EXTO}{UNIDAD}{TEXTO}: \addcontentsline. (line 4864)
+* \address: \address. (line 5005)
+* \addtocontents{EXTRA}{TEXTO}: \addtocontents. (line 4893)
+* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 2830)
+* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 2875)
+* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 4164)
+* \ae (æ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4713)
+* \AE (Æ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4713)
+* \aleph: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3056)
+* \alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 2767)
+* \Alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 2770)
+* \alpha: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3059)
+* \alsoname: Índices. (line 4937)
+* \amalg: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3062)
+* \and para \author: \maketitle. (line 3967)
+* \angle: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3065)
+* \appendix: Seccionado. (line 832)
+* \approx: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3068)
+* \arabic: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 2773)
+* \arccos: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3689)
+* \arcsin: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3692)
+* \arctan: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3695)
+* \arg: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3698)
+* \arraycolsep: array. (line 972)
+* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 2035)
+* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 2039)
+* \ast: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3071)
+* \asymp: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3074)
+* \author{NOMBRE \and NOMBRE2}: \maketitle. (line 3966)
+* \a` (acento grave en tabulación): tabbing. (line 1877)
+* \b (acento barra): Acentos. (line 4648)
+* \backslash: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3077)
+* \backslash <1>: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4402)
+* \bar: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3801)
+* \baselineskip: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 634)
+* \baselinestretch: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 641)
+* \begin: Entornos. (line 915)
+* \beta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3080)
+* \bf: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 532)
+* \bfseries: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 490)
+* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 2134)
+* \bibliography: Usando BibTeX. (line 2176)
+* \bibliographystyle: Usando BibTeX. (line 2176)
+* \bigcap: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3083)
+* \bigcap <1>: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3113)
+* \bigcirc: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3086)
+* \bigcup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3089)
+* \bigodot: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3092)
+* \bigoplus: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3095)
+* \bigotimes: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3098)
+* \bigskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 4179)
+* \bigskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 4179)
+* \bigsqcup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3107)
+* \bigtriangledown: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3101)
+* \bigtriangleup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3104)
+* \biguplus: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3110)
+* \bigwedge: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3116)
+* \bmod: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3701)
+* \boldmath: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3025)
+* \bot: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3119)
+* \bottomfraction: figure. (line 1204)
+* \bowtie: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3122)
+* \Box: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3125)
+* \breve: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3804)
+* \bullet: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3128)
+* \c (acento cedilla): Acentos. (line 4653)
+* \cal: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 535)
+* \cap: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3131)
+* \capitalacute: Acentos. (line 4621)
+* \capitalbreve: Acentos. (line 4687)
+* \capitalcaron: Acentos. (line 4699)
+* \capitalcedilla: Acentos. (line 4653)
+* \capitalcircumflex: Acentos. (line 4634)
+* \capitaldieresis: Acentos. (line 4617)
+* \capitaldotaccent: Acentos. (line 4657)
+* \capitalgrave: Acentos. (line 4639)
+* \capitalhungarumlaut: Acentos. (line 4661)
+* \capitalmacron: Acentos. (line 4630)
+* \capitalnewtie: Acentos. (line 4682)
+* \capitalogonek: Acentos. (line 4671)
+* \capitalring: Acentos. (line 4676)
+* \capitaltie: Acentos. (line 4682)
+* \capitaltilde: Acentos. (line 4645)
+* \caption: figure. (line 1199)
+* \cc: \cc. (line 5019)
+* \cdot: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3134)
+* \cdots: Miscelánea Math. (line 3866)
+* \centering: \centering. (line 996)
+* \chapter: Seccionado. (line 802)
+* \check: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3807)
+* \chi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3137)
+* \circ: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3140)
+* \circle: \circle. (line 1595)
+* \cite: \cite. (line 2152)
+* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 2419)
+* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 2428)
+* \cline: \cline. (line 2081)
+* \closing: \closing. (line 5029)
+* \clubsuit: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3143)
+* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 690)
+* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 693)
+* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 697)
+* \cong: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3146)
+* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 4887)
+* \coprod: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3149)
+* \copyright: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4430)
+* \cos: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3704)
+* \cosh: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3707)
+* \cot: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3710)
+* \coth: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3713)
+* \csc: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3716)
+* \cup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3152)
+* \d (acento círculo): Acentos. (line 4657)
+* \dag: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4434)
+* \dagger: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3155)
+* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 1647)
+* \dashv: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3158)
+* \date{TEXTO}: \maketitle. (line 3973)
+* \day: \day \month \year. (line 2849)
+* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 710)
+* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 715)
+* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 721)
+* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 704)
+* \ddag: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4437)
+* \ddagger: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3161)
+* \ddot: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3810)
+* \ddots: Miscelánea Math. (line 3870)
+* \deg: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3719)
+* \Delta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3164)
+* \delta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3167)
+* \depth: Longitudes Predeterminadas.
+ (line 2908)
+* \det: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3722)
+* \dh (æ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4717)
+* \DH (Æ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4717)
+* \Diamond: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3170)
+* \diamond: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3173)
+* \diamondsuit: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3176)
+* \dim: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3725)
+* \displaystyle: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3031)
+* \div: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3179)
+* \dj: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4721)
+* \DJ: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4721)
+* \documentclass: Clases de Documento.
+ (line 350)
+* \dot: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3813)
+* \doteq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3182)
+* \dotfill: \dotfill. (line 4158)
+* \dots: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4454)
+* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 2043)
+* \downarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3185)
+* \Downarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3188)
+* \ell: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3191)
+* \em: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 538)
+* \emph: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 484)
+* \emptyset: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3194)
+* \encl: \encl. (line 5039)
+* \end: Entornos. (line 915)
+* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 2441)
+* \enumi: enumerate. (line 1098)
+* \enumii: enumerate. (line 1098)
+* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 1098)
+* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 1098)
+* \epsilon: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3197)
+* \equiv: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3200)
+* \eta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3203)
+* \evensidemargin: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 416)
+* \exists: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3206)
+* \exp: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3728)
+* \fbox: \fbox y \framebox. (line 4232)
+* \fboxrule: \framebox (picture).
+ (line 1641)
+* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox y \framebox. (line 4245)
+* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture).
+ (line 1641)
+* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox y \framebox. (line 4245)
+* \fill: \hfill. (line 4091)
+* \flat: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3209)
+* \floatpagefraction: figure. (line 1207)
+* \floatsep: figure. (line 1211)
+* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 729)
+* \fnsymbol: Notas al Pie Simbólicas.
+ (line 2535)
+* \fnsymbol <1>: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 2782)
+* \fnsymbol, y notas al pie: Notas al Pie Simbólicas.
+ (line 2535)
+* \fontencoding: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 595)
+* \fontfamily: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 599)
+* \fontseries: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 609)
+* \fontshape: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 621)
+* \fontsize: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 634)
+* \footnote: \footnote. (line 2483)
+* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 2499)
+* \footnoterule: Parámetros para Footnote.
+ (line 2543)
+* \footnotesep: Parámetros para Footnote.
+ (line 2549)
+* \footnotesize: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 568)
+* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 2514)
+* \footskip: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 756)
+* \forall: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3212)
+* \frac: Miscelánea Math. (line 3874)
+* \frac{num}{den}: Miscelánea Math. (line 3873)
+* \frame: \frame. (line 1662)
+* \framebox: \framebox (picture).
+ (line 1633)
+* \framebox <1>: \fbox y \framebox. (line 4232)
+* \frown: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3215)
+* \fussy: \fussy. (line 2355)
+* \Gamma: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3218)
+* \gamma: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3221)
+* \gcd: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3731)
+* \ge: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3224)
+* \geq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3227)
+* \gets: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3230)
+* \gg: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3233)
+* \glossary: Glosarios. (line 4910)
+* \glossaryentry: Glosarios. (line 4913)
+* \grave: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3816)
+* \guillemotleft («): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4446)
+* \guillemotright (»): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4447)
+* \guilsinglleft (‹): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4448)
+* \guilsinglright (›): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4449)
+* \H (acento diéresis Húngara): Acentos. (line 4661)
+* \hat: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3819)
+* \hbar: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3236)
+* \headheight: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 746)
+* \headsep: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 751)
+* \heartsuit: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3239)
+* \height: Longitudes Predeterminadas.
+ (line 2906)
+* \hfill: \hfill. (line 4087)
+* \hline: \hline. (line 2092)
+* \hom: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3734)
+* \hookleftarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3242)
+* \hookrightarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3245)
+* \hrulefill: \hrulefill. (line 4151)
+* \hspace: \hspace. (line 4070)
+* \huge: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 568)
+* \Huge: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 568)
+* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 2375)
+* \i (i sin punto): Acentos. (line 4664)
+* \iff: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3248)
+* \ij (ij): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4725)
+* \IJ (IJ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4725)
+* \Im: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3251)
+* \imath: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3822)
+* \in: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3254)
+* \include: \include. (line 4793)
+* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 4811)
+* \indent: \indent. (line 2931)
+* \index: Índices. (line 4926)
+* \indexentry: Índices. (line 4929)
+* \inf: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3737)
+* \infty: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3257)
+* \input: \input. (line 4826)
+* \int: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3260)
+* \intextsep: figure. (line 1215)
+* \iota: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3263)
+* \it: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 541)
+* \item: description. (line 1028)
+* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 1087)
+* \item <2>: itemize. (line 1342)
+* \itemindent: itemize. (line 1387)
+* \itemsep: itemize. (line 1412)
+* \itshape: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 481)
+* \j (j sin punto): Acentos. (line 4667)
+* \jmath: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3825)
+* \Join: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3266)
+* \k (colita —ogonek en polaco): Acentos. (line 4671)
+* \kappa: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3269)
+* \ker: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3740)
+* \kill: tabbing. (line 1881)
+* \l (ł): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4729)
+* \L (Ł): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4729)
+* \label: \label. (line 859)
+* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 1102)
+* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 1102)
+* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 1102)
+* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 1102)
+* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 1366)
+* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 1366)
+* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 1366)
+* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 1366)
+* \labelsep: itemize. (line 1391)
+* \labelwidth: itemize. (line 1395)
+* \Lambda: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3272)
+* \lambda: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3275)
+* \land: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3278)
+* \langle: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3281)
+* \large: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 568)
+* \Large: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 568)
+* \LARGE: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 568)
+* \LaTeX: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4440)
+* \LaTeXe: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4443)
+* \lbrace: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3284)
+* \lbrack: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3287)
+* \lceil: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3290)
+* \ldots: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4453)
+* \le: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3293)
+* \leadsto: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3296)
+* \left DELIMITADOR1 ... \right DELIMITADOR2: Miscelánea Math.
+ (line 3876)
+* \Leftarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3298)
+* \leftarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3301)
+* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 1133)
+* \leftharpoondown: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3304)
+* \leftharpoonup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3307)
+* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 1373)
+* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 1373)
+* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 1373)
+* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 1373)
+* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 1373)
+* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 1373)
+* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 1373)
+* \Leftrightarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3310)
+* \Leftrightarrow <1>: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3313)
+* \leq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3316)
+* \lfloor: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3319)
+* \lg: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3743)
+* \lhd: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3322)
+* \lim: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3746)
+* \liminf: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3749)
+* \limsup: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3752)
+* \line: \line. (line 1673)
+* \linebreak: \linebreak y \nolinebreak.
+ (line 2392)
+* \linespread: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 649)
+* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 1688)
+* \linewidth: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 761)
+* \listoffigures: Tablas de Contenido.
+ (line 4854)
+* \listoftables: Tablas de Contenido.
+ (line 4854)
+* \listparindent: itemize. (line 1399)
+* \ll: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3325)
+* \ln: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3755)
+* \lnot: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3328)
+* \location: \location. (line 5048)
+* \log: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3758)
+* \longleftarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3331)
+* \longleftrightarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3334)
+* \longmapsto: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3337)
+* \longrightarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3340)
+* \lor: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3343)
+* \lq: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4459)
+* \makebox: \makebox. (line 4265)
+* \makebox (picture): \makebox (picture). (line 1606)
+* \makeglossary: Glosarios. (line 4908)
+* \makeindex: Índices. (line 4923)
+* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 5056)
+* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 3961)
+* \mapsto: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3346)
+* \marginpar: Notas al Margen. (line 2957)
+* \marginparpush: Notas al Margen. (line 2985)
+* \marginparsep: Notas al Margen. (line 2989)
+* \marginparwidth: Notas al Margen. (line 2993)
+* \markboth{IZQUIERDA}{DERECHA}: \pagestyle. (line 4038)
+* \markright{DERECHA}: \pagestyle. (line 4046)
+* \mathbf: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 506)
+* \mathcal: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 520)
+* \mathnormal: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 517)
+* \mathrm: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 504)
+* \mathsf: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 508)
+* \mathtt: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 510)
+* \mathversion: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 522)
+* \max: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3761)
+* \mbox: \mbox. (line 4224)
+* \mdseries: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 487)
+* \medskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 4183)
+* \medskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 4183)
+* \mho: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3349)
+* \mid: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3351)
+* \min: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3764)
+* \models: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3354)
+* \month: \day \month \year. (line 2849)
+* \mp: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3357)
+* \mu: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3360)
+* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 2057)
+* \multiput: \multiput. (line 1712)
+* \nabla: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3363)
+* \name: \name. (line 5065)
+* \natural: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3366)
+* \ne: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3369)
+* \nearrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3372)
+* \neg: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3375)
+* \neq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3378)
+* \newcommand: \newcommand y \renewcommand.
+ (line 2565)
+* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 2600)
+* \newenvironment: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment.
+ (line 2642)
+* \newfont: \newfont. (line 2711)
+* \newlength: \newlength. (line 2615)
+* \newline: \newline. (line 2336)
+* \NEWLINE: \SPACE. (line 4098)
+* \newpage: \newpage. (line 2435)
+* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 2631)
+* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 2681)
+* \newtie: Acentos. (line 4682)
+* \ng: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4733)
+* \NG: Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4733)
+* \ni: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3381)
+* \nocite: \nocite. (line 2167)
+* \nofiles: Tablas de Contenido.
+ (line 4858)
+* \noindent: \noindent. (line 2943)
+* \nolinebreak: \linebreak y \nolinebreak.
+ (line 2392)
+* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 1127)
+* \nopagebreak: \pagebreak y \nopagebreak.
+ (line 2456)
+* \normalfont: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 502)
+* \normalmarginpar: Notas al Margen. (line 2972)
+* \normalsize: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 568)
+* \not: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3384)
+* \notin: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3387)
+* \nu: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3390)
+* \nwarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3393)
+* \o (ø): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4737)
+* \O (Ø): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4737)
+* \obeycr: \obeycr y \restorecr.
+ (line 2326)
+* \oddsidemargin: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 416)
+* \odot: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3396)
+* \oe (œ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4741)
+* \OE (Œ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4741)
+* \oint: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3399)
+* \Omega: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3402)
+* \omega: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3405)
+* \ominus: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3408)
+* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 672)
+* \opening: \opening. (line 5073)
+* \oplus: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3411)
+* \oslash: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3414)
+* \otimes: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3417)
+* \oval: \oval. (line 1722)
+* \overbrace{TEXTO}: Miscelánea Math. (line 3882)
+* \overline{TEXTO}: Miscelánea Math. (line 3886)
+* \owns: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3420)
+* \P: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4462)
+* \pagebreak: \pagebreak y \nopagebreak.
+ (line 2456)
+* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 3991)
+* \pageref: \pageref. (line 893)
+* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 4013)
+* \paragraph: Seccionado. (line 807)
+* \parallel: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3423)
+* \parbox: \parbox. (line 4291)
+* \parindent: minipage. (line 1505)
+* \parindent <1>: \indent. (line 2931)
+* \parsep: itemize. (line 1417)
+* \parskip: \parskip. (line 2950)
+* \part: Seccionado. (line 801)
+* \partial: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3426)
+* \partopsep: itemize. (line 1429)
+* \perp: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3429)
+* \phi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3432)
+* \Pi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3435)
+* \pi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3438)
+* \pm: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3441)
+* \pmod: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3767)
+* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 1887)
+* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 1888)
+* \pounds: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4466)
+* \Pr: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3770)
+* \prec: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3444)
+* \preceq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3447)
+* \prime: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3450)
+* \prod: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3453)
+* \propto: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3456)
+* \protect: \protect. (line 2726)
+* \ps: \ps. (line 5086)
+* \Psi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3459)
+* \psi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3462)
+* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 1891)
+* \put: \put. (line 1746)
+* \quotedblbase („): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4470)
+* \quotesinglbase (‚): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4471)
+* \r (acento anillo): Acentos. (line 4676)
+* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 739)
+* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 1329)
+* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 1303)
+* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 4333)
+* \rangle: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3465)
+* \rbrace: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3468)
+* \rbrack: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3471)
+* \rceil: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3474)
+* \Re: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3477)
+* \ref: \ref. (line 903)
+* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 2836)
+* \renewenvironment: \newenvironment y \renewenvironment.
+ (line 2642)
+* \restorecr: \obeycr y \restorecr.
+ (line 2326)
+* \reversemarginpar: Notas al Margen. (line 2972)
+* \rfloor: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3480)
+* \rhd: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3483)
+* \rho: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3486)
+* \right: Miscelánea Math. (line 3877)
+* \Rightarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3489)
+* \rightarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3492)
+* \rightharpoondown: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3495)
+* \rightharpoonup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3498)
+* \rightleftharpoons: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3501)
+* \rightmargin: itemize. (line 1403)
+* \rm: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 544)
+* \rmfamily: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 478)
+* \roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 2776)
+* \roman <1>: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 2779)
+* \rq: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4474)
+* \rule: \rule. (line 4754)
+* \S: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4477)
+* \savebox: \savebox. (line 4350)
+* \sbox: \sbox. (line 4362)
+* \sc: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 547)
+* \scriptsize: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 568)
+* \scshape: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 498)
+* \searrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3504)
+* \sec: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3773)
+* \section: Seccionado. (line 804)
+* \seename: Índices. (line 4937)
+* \selectfont: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 655)
+* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 2820)
+* \setlength: \setlength. (line 2867)
+* \setminus: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3507)
+* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 2882)
+* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 2890)
+* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 2898)
+* \sf: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 550)
+* \sffamily: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 496)
+* \sharp: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3510)
+* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 1754)
+* \Sigma: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3513)
+* \sigma: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3516)
+* \signature: \signature. (line 5092)
+* \sim: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3519)
+* \simeq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3522)
+* \sin: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3776)
+* \sinh: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3779)
+* \sl: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 553)
+* \slshape: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 494)
+* \small: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 568)
+* \smallint: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3525)
+* \smallskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 4187)
+* \smallskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 4187)
+* \smile: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3528)
+* \SPACE: \SPACE. (line 4098)
+* \spadesuit: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3531)
+* \sqcap: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3534)
+* \sqcup: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3537)
+* \sqrt[RAÍZ]{argumento}: Miscelánea Math. (line 3890)
+* \sqsubset: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3540)
+* \sqsubseteq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3543)
+* \sqsupset: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3546)
+* \sqsupseteq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3549)
+* \ss (ß): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4745)
+* \SS (SS): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4745)
+* \stackrel{TEXTO}{RELACIÓN}: Miscelánea Math. (line 3895)
+* \star: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3552)
+* \startbreaks: \startbreaks. (line 5099)
+* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 2843)
+* \stop: Línea de Órdenes. (line 5171)
+* \stopbreaks: \stopbreaks. (line 5107)
+* \subparagraph: Seccionado. (line 808)
+* \subsection: Seccionado. (line 805)
+* \subset: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3555)
+* \subseteq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3558)
+* \subsubsection: Seccionado. (line 806)
+* \succ: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3561)
+* \succeq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3564)
+* \sum: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3567)
+* \sup: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3782)
+* \supset: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3570)
+* \supseteq: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3573)
+* \surd: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3576)
+* \swarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3579)
+* \symbol: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4412)
+* \t (acento atadura con siguiente): Acentos. (line 4682)
+* \TAB: \SPACE. (line 4098)
+* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 1896)
+* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 2047)
+* \tableofcontents: Tablas de Contenido.
+ (line 4844)
+* \tan: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3785)
+* \tanh: Funciones Matemáticas.
+ (line 3788)
+* \tau: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3582)
+* \telephone: \telephone. (line 5115)
+* \TeX: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4480)
+* \textascenderwordmark: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4518)
+* \textasciicircum: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4483)
+* \textasciitilde: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4486)
+* \textasteriskcentered: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4489)
+* \textbackslash: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4492)
+* \textbar: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4495)
+* \textbardbl: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4498)
+* \textbf: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 490)
+* \textbigcircle: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4501)
+* \textbraceleft: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4504)
+* \textbraceright: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4507)
+* \textbullet: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4510)
+* \textcapitalwordmark: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4517)
+* \textcircled{LETRA}: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4513)
+* \textcompwordmark: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4516)
+* \textcopyright: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4431)
+* \textdagger: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4523)
+* \textdaggerdbl: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4526)
+* \textdollar (o \$): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4529)
+* \textellipsis: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4455)
+* \textemdash (o ---): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4532)
+* \textendash (o --): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4535)
+* \texteuro: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4538)
+* \textexclamdown (o !`): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4541)
+* \textfloatsep: figure. (line 1220)
+* \textfraction: figure. (line 1225)
+* \textgreater: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4544)
+* \textheight: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 767)
+* \textit: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 481)
+* \textleftarrow: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4550)
+* \textless: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4547)
+* \textmd: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 487)
+* \textnormal: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 502)
+* \textordfeminine: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4553)
+* \textordfeminine <1>: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4557)
+* \textordmasculine: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4554)
+* \textparagraph: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4463)
+* \textperiodcentered: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4560)
+* \textquestiondown (o ?`): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4563)
+* \textquotedblleft (o ``): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4566)
+* \textquotedblright (o '): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4569)
+* \textquoteleft (o `): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4572)
+* \textquoteright (o '): Símbolos de Texto. (line 4575)
+* \textquotestraightbase: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4578)
+* \textquotestraightdblbase: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4579)
+* \textregistered: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4582)
+* \textrightarrow: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4585)
+* \textrm: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 478)
+* \textsc: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 498)
+* \textsf: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 496)
+* \textsl: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 494)
+* \textsterling: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4467)
+* \textthreequartersemdash: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4588)
+* \texttrademark: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4591)
+* \texttt: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 500)
+* \texttwelveudash: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4594)
+* \textunderscore: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4597)
+* \textup: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 492)
+* \textvisiblespace: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4600)
+* \textwidth: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 774)
+* \th (þ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4749)
+* \TH (Þ): Caracteres no Ingleses.
+ (line 4749)
+* \thanks{TEXTO}: \maketitle. (line 3978)
+* \theta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3585)
+* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 1698)
+* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 1705)
+* \thinspace: \thinspace. (line 4125)
+* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 4053)
+* \tilde: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3828)
+* \times: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3588)
+* \tiny: Tamaños del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 568)
+* \title{TEXTO}: \maketitle. (line 3983)
+* \to: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3591)
+* \today: \today. (line 4773)
+* \top: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3594)
+* \topfraction: figure. (line 1231)
+* \topmargin: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 781)
+* \topsep: itemize. (line 1421)
+* \topskip: Parámetros para el Diseño de Página.
+ (line 789)
+* \totalheight: Longitudes Predeterminadas.
+ (line 2910)
+* \triangle: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3597)
+* \triangleleft: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3600)
+* \triangleright: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3603)
+* \tt: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 556)
+* \ttfamily: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 500)
+* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 678)
+* \typein: \typein. (line 5126)
+* \typeout: \typeout. (line 5141)
+* \u (breve acento): Acentos. (line 4687)
+* \unboldmath: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3025)
+* \underbar: Acentos. (line 4690)
+* \underbrace{matemáticas}: Miscelánea Math. (line 3900)
+* \underline{text}: Miscelánea Math. (line 3903)
+* \unitlength: picture. (line 1527)
+* \unlhd: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3606)
+* \unrhd: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3610)
+* \Uparrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3614)
+* \uparrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3617)
+* \Updownarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3620)
+* \updownarrow: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3623)
+* \uplus: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3626)
+* \upshape: Estilos del Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 492)
+* \Upsilon: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3629)
+* \upsilon: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3632)
+* \usebox: \usebox. (line 4375)
+* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 2795)
+* \usefont: Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra.
+ (line 660)
+* \usepackage: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 436)
+* \v (breve acento): Acentos. (line 4699)
+* \value: \value. (line 2806)
+* \varepsilon: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3635)
+* \varphi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3638)
+* \varpi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3641)
+* \varrho: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3644)
+* \varsigma: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3647)
+* \vartheta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3650)
+* \vdash: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3653)
+* \vdots: Miscelánea Math. (line 3908)
+* \vdots <1>: Miscelánea Math. (line 3909)
+* \vec: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3831)
+* \vector: \vector. (line 1773)
+* \vee: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3656)
+* \verb: \verb. (line 2264)
+* \Vert: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3659)
+* \vert: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3662)
+* \vfill: \vfill. (line 4196)
+* \vline: \vline. (line 2100)
+* \vspace: \vspace. (line 4203)
+* \wedge: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3665)
+* \widehat: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3834)
+* \widetilde: Acentos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3837)
+* \width: Longitudes Predeterminadas.
+ (line 2904)
+* \wp: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3668)
+* \wr: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3671)
+* \Xi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3674)
+* \xi: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3677)
+* \year: \day \month \year. (line 2849)
+* \zeta: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3680)
+* \[: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3012)
+* \\ (para array): array. (line 956)
+* \\ (para centrar): center. (line 989)
+* \\ (para eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 1119)
+* \\ (para flushright): flushright. (line 1322)
+* \\ (para objetos \shortstack): \shortstack. (line 1768)
+* \\ forzar la separación de línea: \\. (line 2314)
+* \\ para cartas: Cartas. (line 4995)
+* \\ para flushleft: flushleft. (line 1296)
+* \\ para tabular: tabular. (line 1960)
+* \\ para verse: verse. (line 2293)
+* \\ para \author: \maketitle. (line 3967)
+* \\ para \title: \maketitle. (line 3984)
+* \\ tabbing: tabbing. (line 1837)
+* \\* (para eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 1124)
+* \]: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3012)
+* \^: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4408)
+* \^ (acento circunflejo): Acentos. (line 4634)
+* \_: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4397)
+* \` (acento grave): Acentos. (line 4639)
+* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 1867)
+* \{: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4397)
+* \|: Símbolos Matemáticos.
+ (line 3053)
+* \}: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4397)
+* \~: Caracteres Reservados.
+ (line 4408)
+* \~ (acento tilde): Acentos. (line 4645)
+* ^: Subíndices y Superíndices.
+ (line 3039)
+* _: Subíndices y Superíndices.
+ (line 3039)
+* abstract, entorno: abstract. (line 925)
+* array, entorno: array. (line 935)
+* caja lR: picture. (line 1584)
+* center, entorno: center. (line 982)
+* clase article: Clases de Documento.
+ (line 357)
+* clase book: Clases de Documento.
+ (line 357)
+* clase letter: Clases de Documento.
+ (line 357)
+* clase report: Clases de Documento.
+ (line 357)
+* clase slides: Clases de Documento.
+ (line 357)
+* contador secnumdepth: Seccionado. (line 842)
+* description, entorno: description. (line 1020)
+* displaymath, entorno: displaymath. (line 1045)
+* displaymath, entorno <1>: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3002)
+* document, entorno: document. (line 1067)
+* ejemplo \Alph: enumerate. (line 1108)
+* ejemplo \parskip: itemize. (line 1435)
+* entorno abstract: abstract. (line 925)
+* entorno array: array. (line 935)
+* entorno center: center. (line 982)
+* entorno description: description. (line 1020)
+* entorno displaymath: displaymath. (line 1045)
+* entorno displaymath <1>: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3002)
+* entorno document: document. (line 1067)
+* entorno enumerate: enumerate. (line 1073)
+* entorno eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 1113)
+* entorno equation: equation. (line 1140)
+* entorno equation <1>: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3002)
+* entorno figure: figure. (line 1153)
+* entorno filecontents: filecontents. (line 1238)
+* entorno filecontents*: filecontents. (line 1238)
+* entorno flushleft: flushleft. (line 1290)
+* entorno flushright: flushright. (line 1316)
+* entorno itemize: itemize. (line 1342)
+* entorno letter: letter. (line 1451)
+* entorno list: list. (line 1456)
+* entorno math: math. (line 1480)
+* entorno math <1>: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3002)
+* entorno minipage: minipage. (line 1493)
+* entorno picture: picture. (line 1523)
+* entorno quotation: quotation. (line 1784)
+* entorno quote: quote. (line 1801)
+* entorno tabbing: tabbing. (line 1817)
+* entorno table: table. (line 1915)
+* entorno tabular: tabular. (line 1943)
+* entorno thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 2108)
+* entorno theorem: theorem. (line 2214)
+* entorno titlepage: titlepage. (line 2227)
+* entorno verbatim: verbatim. (line 2246)
+* entorno verse: verse. (line 2282)
+* enumerate, entorno: enumerate. (line 1073)
+* eqnarray, entorno: eqnarray. (line 1113)
+* equation, entorno: equation. (line 1140)
+* equation, entorno <1>: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3002)
+* figure, entorno: figure. (line 1153)
+* filecontents*, entorno: filecontents. (line 1238)
+* filecontents, entorno: filecontents. (line 1238)
+* flushleft, entorno: flushleft. (line 1290)
+* flushright, entorno: flushright. (line 1316)
+* indexspace: Índices. (line 4951)
+* itemize, entorno: itemize. (line 1342)
+* <latexrefman@tug.org> dirección de correo electrónico: Acerca de este documento.
+ (line 255)
+* letter, entorno: letter. (line 1451)
+* list, entorno: list. (line 1456)
+* lrbox: lrbox. (line 4255)
+* math, entorno: math. (line 1480)
+* math, entorno <1>: Fórmulas Matemáticas.
+ (line 3002)
+* minipage, entorno: minipage. (line 1493)
+* opción 10pt: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 377)
+* opción 11pt: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 377)
+* opción 12pt: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 377)
+* opción a4paper: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 383)
+* opción a5paper: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 383)
+* opción b5paper: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 383)
+* opción draft: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 388)
+* opción executivepaper: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 383)
+* opción final: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 388)
+* opción fleqn: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 388)
+* opción landscape: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 388)
+* opción legalpaper: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 383)
+* opción leqno: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 388)
+* opción letterpaper: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 383)
+* opción notitlepage: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 388)
+* opción onecolumn: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 409)
+* opción oneside: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 409)
+* opción openany: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 409)
+* opción openbib: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 388)
+* opción openright: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 409)
+* opción titlepage: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 388)
+* opción twocolumn: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 409)
+* opción twoside: Opciones de Clase de Documento.
+ (line 409)
+* paquete textcomp: Símbolos de Texto. (line 4425)
+* picture, entorno: picture. (line 1523)
+* printindex: Índices. (line 4947)
+* quotation, entorno: quotation. (line 1784)
+* quote, entorno: quote. (line 1801)
+* tabbing, entorno: tabbing. (line 1817)
+* table, entorno: table. (line 1915)
+* tabular, entorno: tabular. (line 1943)
+* thebibliography, entorno: thebibliography. (line 2108)
+* theorem, entorno: theorem. (line 2214)
+* titlepage, entorno: titlepage. (line 2227)
+* verbatim, entorno: verbatim. (line 2246)
+* verse, entorno: verse. (line 2282)
+
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.xml b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b29dfe6bc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/latex2e-es.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,7504 @@
+<?xml version="1.0"?>
+<!DOCTYPE texinfo PUBLIC "-//GNU//DTD TexinfoML V6.4//EN" "http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/dtd/6.4/texinfo.dtd">
+<texinfo xml:lang="es">
+<filename file="latex2e-es.xml"></filename>
+<preamble>\input texinfo
+</preamble><!-- c $Id: latex2e-es.texi 570 2017-07-30 22:40:51Z vincentb1 $ -->
+<!-- comment %**start of header (Esto es para ejecutar Texinfo en una región.) -->
+<setfilename file="latex2e-es.info" spaces=" ">latex2e-es.info</setfilename>
+<documentlanguage xml:lang="es" spaces=" ">es</documentlanguage>
+<documentencoding encoding="UTF-8" spaces=" ">UTF-8</documentencoding>
+<set name="UPDATED" line=" UPDATED Julio 2010">Julio 2010</set>
+<set name="LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE" line=" LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/
+">http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/</set>
+<set name="LTXREFMAN_BUGS" line=" LTXREFMAN_BUGS latexrefman@@tug.org
+">latexrefman@@tug.org</set>
+<clear name="HAS-MATH" line=" HAS-MATH
+"></clear>
+<macro name="iftexthenelse" line=" iftexthenelse {then,else}
+"><formalarg>then</formalarg><formalarg>else</formalarg>\else\@c
+</macro>
+
+
+<settitle spaces=" ">&latex;2e Manual de Referencia (Julio 2010)</settitle>
+<!-- comment %**end of header (Esto es para ejecutar Texinfo en una región.) -->
+
+<!-- c xx las instrucciones para latex 2.09 ahora deberían estar presentes, -->
+<!-- c xx pero aún faltan algunas de latex2e. -->
+<!-- c -->
+<!-- c xx mencionar \mathring -->
+<!-- c xx mencionar usrguide -->
+<!-- c xx mencionar ! combinar la colocación de flotantes, p.15 de la guía -->
+<!-- c xx de usuario en http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-info (paquete CTAN latex-info) -->
+<!-- c -->
+<!-- c xx La composición tipográfica de source2e debería tener un índice con -->
+<!-- c xx todas las instrucciones del kernel, lo cual debería se un buen -->
+<!-- c xx principio. en classes.dtx. define instrucciones adicionales, y -->
+<!-- c xx algunas de las instrucciones son internas del kernel y por tanto no -->
+<!-- c xx deben incluirse aquí. -->
+<!-- c -->
+<!-- c xx paquetes - requeridos, adicionales, útiles; oberdiek ... -->
+<!-- c xx tipos de letra - latexsys -->
+
+<macro name="vincentb" line=" vincentb {newtext,oldtext,date}"><formalarg>newtext</formalarg><formalarg>oldtext</formalarg><formalarg>date</formalarg>\newtext\
+</macro>
+
+<copying endspaces=" ">
+<para>Este documento es un manual de referencia extraoficial para &latex;, un
+sistema de preparación de documentos, para la
+versión de Julio 2010.
+</para>
+<para>Esto se tradujo originalmente del archivo <file>LATEX.HLP</file> v1.0a de la
+Biblioteca de Ayuda VMS. La versión pretraducción fue escrita por
+George&nbsp;D. Greenwade de Sam Houston State University. La versión de
+&latex;&nbsp;2.09 fue escrita por Stephen Gilmore. La versión de
+&latex;2e fue adaptada por Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry hizo la
+actualización y posteriores adiciones, y reconoce su agradecimiento a la
+utilización de <cite>Hypertext Help con &latex;</cite>, por Sheldon Green, y
+del <cite>&latex; Command Summary</cite> (para
+&latex; 2.09) por L.&nbsp;Botway y C.&nbsp;Biemesderfer (publicada por
+el Grupo de Usuarios &tex; como <cite>&tex;niques</cite> número 10), como
+material de referencia (no se copió texto directamente).
+</para>
+<para>Copyright 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 Nacho Pacheco &textmdash;Traducción.&linebreak;
+Copyright 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 Karl Berry.&linebreak;
+Copyright 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.&linebreak;
+Copyright 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
+</para>
+<para>A continuación se encuentra la licencia bajo la cual es
+distribuido este manual&comma; una traducción lo es dada en
+anexo&comma; ver <ref label="License-translation"><xrefnodename>License translation</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<!-- comment start of License -->
+<para>Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
+this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
+are preserved on all copies.
+</para>
+<ignore>
+Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
+results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
+notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
+</ignore>
+
+<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+</para>
+<para>Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
+<!-- comment end of License -->
+</para></copying>
+
+<dircategory spaces=" ">TeX</dircategory>
+<direntry endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menutitle separator=": ">LaTeX2e-es</menutitle><menunode separator=". ">(latex2e-es)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Manual de extraoficial de LaTeX.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></direntry>
+
+<tex endspaces=" ">
+</tex>
+
+<titlepage endspaces=" ">
+<title spaces=" ">&latex;: Documentos Estructurados para &tex;</title>
+<subtitle spaces=" ">Manual de Referencia Extraoficial de &latex;.</subtitle>
+<subtitle spaces=" ">Julio 2010</subtitle>
+<page></page>
+<vskip> 0pt plus 1filll</vskip>
+<insertcopying></insertcopying>
+</titlepage>
+
+<shortcontents></shortcontents>
+<contents></contents>
+
+<!-- c Best Effort Symbol -->
+<macro name="BES" line=" BES {utf8,math}"><formalarg>utf8</formalarg><formalarg>math</formalarg>\utf8\
+</macro>
+<macro name="BESU" line=" BESU {utf8,math}"><formalarg>utf8</formalarg><formalarg>math</formalarg>\utf8\
+</macro>
+<macro name="EnvIndex" line=" EnvIndex {env}"><formalarg>env</formalarg>@findex @r{entorno} @code{\env\}
+@findex @code{\env\}, @r{entorno}
+</macro>
+
+<node name="Top" spaces=" "><nodename>Top</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Acerca de este documento</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">(dir)</nodeup></node>
+<top spaces=" "><sectiontitle>&latex;2e</sectiontitle>
+
+<para>Este documento es un manual de referencia extraoficial para &latex;, un
+sistema de preparación de documentos, versión Julio 2010. Este se
+pretende que cubra &latex;2e, que ha sido la versión estándar de
+&latex; por muchos años.
+</para>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Acerca de este documento</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Acerca de este documento
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Descripción</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">¿Qués es &latex;?
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Iniciando y Finalizando</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">El principio y final estándar de un documento.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Clases de Documento</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Algunas de las diferentes clases disponibles.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Tipos de Letra</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Y tipos de letra, como negrita, cursiva, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Diseño</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Controlando el diseño de la página.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Seccionado</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Cómo seccionar adecuadamente.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Referencias Cruzadas</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Referencias automáticas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Entornos</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Tal como enumerate e itemize.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Saltos de Línea</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Influyendo en los saltos de línea.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Saltos de Página</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Influyendo en los saltos de página.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Notas al Pie</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Cómo producir notas al pie.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Definiciones</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Definiendo sus propias instrucciones, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Contadores</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Contadores internos utilizados por &latex;.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Longitudes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Las instrucciones de longitud.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Haciendo Párrafos</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Instrucciones de Párrafo.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Fórmulas Matemáticas</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Cómo crear fórmulas matemáticas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Modos</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Modos Párrafo, Matemáticas o de Escritura de Izquierda a Derecha.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Estilos de Página</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Varios estilos de diseño de página.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Espacios</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Espacio horizontal y vertical.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Cajas</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Haciendo cajas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Inserciones Especiales</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insertando caracteres reservados y especiales.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Dividiendo la Entrada</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Manejo de archivos de gran tamaño mediante su fraccionamiento.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Tablas de contenido, glosarios, índices.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Cartas</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">La clase <code>letter</code>.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Interacción del usuario.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Línea de Órdenes</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Comportamiento independiente del sistema de la línea de órdenes.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Plantillas de Documento</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Principales plantillas para diversas clases de documento.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menutitle separator=": ">Traducción de la licencia</menutitle><menunode separator=". ">License translation</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Una traducciòn como informaciòn de la licencia.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Índice de Conceptos</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Índice general.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Índice de Instrucciones</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Lista alfabética de instrucciones &latex;.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+<!-- c begin vincentb1 -->
+</top>
+<node name="Acerca-de-este-documento" spaces=" "><nodename>Acerca de este documento</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Descripción</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Top</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Acerca de este documento</sectiontitle>
+<!-- c end vincentb1 -->
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="1">Knuth, Donald E.</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="2">Lamport, Leslie</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="3">Equipo del Proyecto &latex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&latex; está implementado como un paquete de macros por
+Donald&nbsp;E.&nbsp;Knuth&textrsquo;s para el programa de composición tipográfica
+&tex;. &latex; originalmente fue creado por Leslie Lamport; este
+ahora es mantenido por un grupo de voluntarios en
+(<url><urefurl>http://latex-project.org</urefurl></url>). La documentación oficial escrita por
+el proyecto &latex; está disponible allí.
+</para>
+<!-- c begin vincentb1 -->
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="4">informes de errores</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="1"><email><emailaddress>latexrefman&arobase;tug.org</emailaddress></email> <r>dirección de correo electrónico</r></indexterm></findex>
+<!-- c end vincentb1 -->
+<para>Una vez más, el presente documento no es oficial y no ha sido revisado
+por los responsables del proyecto &latex;.
+<!-- c begin vincentb1 -->
+No enviar informes de error o cualquier otra cosa sobre este documento a
+ellos. En su lugar, por favor, envíe todos comentarios a
+<email><emailaddress>latexrefman&arobase;tug.org</emailaddress></email>.
+</para>
+<para>La página principal de este documento es
+<url><urefurl>http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/</urefurl></url>. Esa página tiene enlaces al
+resultado actual de la compilación de este documento en varios formatos,
+a fuentes, a listas de correo, y a otros infraestructura.
+</para>
+<para>Por supuesto, hay muchas otras muchas fuentes de información sobre,
+&latex;. Éstos son algunos de ellos:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="url" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Dos páginas de referencias recomendadas a &latex; documentación.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://www.ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Escribir su primer documento, con un poco de texto y matemáticas.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://www.ctan.org/pkg/usrguide</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>La guía para los autores de documentos mantenidos como parte de &latex;; hay
+varios otros.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="url">http://tug.org/begin.html</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Introducción al &tex; sistema, incluyendo &latex;.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+<!-- c end vincentb1 -->
+
+</chapter>
+<node name="Descripci_00f3n" spaces=" "><nodename>Descripción</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Iniciando y Finalizando</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Acerca de este documento</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Descripción de &latex;</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="5">descripción de &latex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="6">&latex;, descripción</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Las instrucciones &latex; componen tipográficamente un archivo de texto
+usando el programa &tex; y el &textldquo;paquete de macros&textrdquo; &latex; para
+&tex;. Para ser más específicos, este procesa un archivo de entrada que
+contiene el texto de un documento con instrucciones intercaladas que
+describen cómo se debe dar formato al texto.
+Este produce al menos tres archivos de salida:
+</para>
+<enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
+<listitem>
+<para>Un archivo de salida principal, que es uno de:
+</para>
+<enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
+<listitem>
+<para>Si se invoca como <command>latex</command>, un archivo &textldquo;independiente del
+dispositivo&textrdquo; (<file>.dvi</file>). Este contiene las instrucciones que se
+pueden traducir en órdenes para una variedad de dispositivos de salida.
+Usted puede ver estos archivos <file>.dvi</file> producidos por &latex;
+utilizando un programa como <command>xdvi</command> (visualización directa) o
+<command>dvips</command> (los convierte a PostScript).
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem>
+<para>Si es invocado como <command>pdflatex</command>, produce un archivo de
+&textldquo;Documento de Formato Portátil&textrdquo; (<file>.pdf</file>). Normalmente, este es
+un archivo autocontenido, con todos los tipos de letra e imágenes
+incrustadas. Este puede ser muy útil, pero hace que produzca un archivo
+mucho más grande que el <file>.dvi</file> producido a partir del mismo
+documento.
+</para></listitem></enumerate>
+
+<para>Existen otras variantes menos comunes de &latex; (y &tex;), de modo
+que puede producir HTML, XML y otras cosas.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem>
+<para>Un archivo de&textldquo;transcripción&textrdquo; o <file>.log</file> que contiene información
+resumida y mensajes de diagnóstico para cualquier error descubierto en el
+archivo de entrada.
+</para>
+</listitem><listitem>
+<para>Un archivo &textldquo;auxiliar&textrdquo; o <file>.aux</file>. Este es usado por &latex; mismo,
+para diversas cosas como el seccionado.
+</para></listitem></enumerate>
+
+<para>Una instrucción &latex; comienza con el nombre de la instrucción, la
+cual consiste de una <code>\</code> seguida por o bien (a)&nbsp;una cadena de
+letras o (b)&nbsp;un único carácter no letra. Los argumentos que
+figuran entre corchetes, <code>[]</code>, son opcionales, mientras que los
+argumentos contenidos entre llaves, <code>&lbrace;&rbrace;</code>, son obligatorios.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; es sensible a mayúsculas y minúsculas. Cuando ingresa
+instrucciones&comma; use la caja de letras propia a cada
+instrucción &textmdash; tradicionalmente es minúsculas.
+</para>
+
+</chapter>
+<node name="Iniciando-y-Finalizando" spaces=" "><nodename>Iniciando y Finalizando</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Clases de Documento</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Descripción</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Iniciando y Finalizando</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="7">iniciando y finalizando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="8">finalizando e iniciando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Un archivo de entrada mínimo tiene el siguiente aspecto:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;<var>clase</var>&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+<var>su texto</var>
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>donde <var>clase</var> es una clase de documento válida para &latex;.
+<xref label="Clases-de-Documento"><xrefnodename>Clases de Documento</xrefnodename></xref>, para detalles de varias clases de documento
+disponibles localmente.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="9">preámbulo, definido</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Usted puede incluir otras instrucciones &latex; entre las instrucciones
+<code>\documentclass</code> y <code>\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code> (esta área se llama el
+<dfn>preámbulo</dfn>).
+</para>
+
+</chapter>
+<node name="Clases-de-Documento" spaces=" "><nodename>Clases de Documento</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Tipos de Letra</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Iniciando y Finalizando</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Clases de Documento</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="10">clases de documento</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="11">clases de documentos</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="2">\documentclass</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La clase de un determinado documento se define con la instrucción:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass[<var>opciones</var>]&lbrace;<var>clase</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\documentclass</code> debe ser la primer instrucción en un
+archivo fuente &latex;.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="3"><r>clase</r> article</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="4"><r>clase</r> report</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="5"><r>clase</r> book</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="6"><r>clase</r> letter</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="7"><r>clase</r> slides</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Los nombres integrados de <var>clases</var> de documento &latex; (muchas
+otras clases de documento están disponibles como complementos;
+<pxref label="Descripci_00f3n"><xrefnodename>Descripción</xrefnodename></pxref>):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">article report book letter slides
+</pre></example>
+
+<!-- c xx describir brevemente cada una -->
+
+<para>Las <var>opciones</var> estándar están descritas más adelante.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Opciones de Clase de Documento</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Opciones globales.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento" spaces=" "><nodename>Opciones de Clase de Documento</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">Clases de Documento</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Opciones de Clase de Documento</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="12">opciones de clase de documento</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="13">opciones, clase de documento</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="14">opciones de clase</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="15">opciones globales</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Usted puede especificar las así llamadas <dfn>opciones globales</dfn> u
+<dfn>opciones de clase</dfn> en la instrucción <code>\documentclass</code>
+encerrándolas entre corchetes de la manera usual. Para especificar más
+de una <var>opción</var>, deberá separarlas con una coma:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass[<var>opción1</var>,<var>opción2</var>,...]&lbrace;<var>clase</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Esta es la lista de las opciones de clase estándar.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="8"><r>opción</r> 10pt</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="9"><r>opción</r> 11pt</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="10"><r>opción</r> 12pt</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Todas las clases estándar salvo <code>slides</code> aceptan las siguientes
+opciones para seleccionar el tamaño del tipo de letra (el predeterminado
+es <code>10pt</code>):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">10pt 11pt 12pt
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="11"><r>opción</r> a4paper</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="12"><r>opción</r> a5paper</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="13"><r>opción</r> b5paper</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="14"><r>opción</r> executivepaper</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="15"><r>opción</r> legalpaper</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="16"><r>opción</r> letterpaper</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Todas las clases estándar aceptan estas opciones para seleccionar el
+tamaño del papel (el predeterminado es <code>letterpaper</code>):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="17"><r>opción</r> draft</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="18"><r>opción</r> final</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="19"><r>opción</r> fleqn</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="20"><r>opción</r> landscape</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="21"><r>opción</r> leqno</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="22"><r>opción</r> openbib</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="23"><r>opción</r> titlepage</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="24"><r>opción</r> notitlepage</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Otras opciones diversas:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">draft, final</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="16">omitiendo, cajas negras</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>marca/no marca el desbordamiento de cajas con una gran caja negra; el
+predeterminado es <code>final</code>.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">fleqn</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Coloca las fórmulas mostradas alineadas a la izquierda; el
+predeterminado es centrado.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">landscape</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Selecciona el formato apaisado; el predeterminado es vertical.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">leqno</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Coloca los números de ecuación en el lado izquierdo de las ecuaciones;
+el predeterminado es el lado derecho.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">openbib</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Usa el formato de bibliografía &textldquo;abierto&textrdquo;.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">titlepage, notitlepage</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Especifica si la página de título es independiente; de manera
+predeterminada depende de la clase.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Estas opciones no están disponibles con la clase <code>slides</code>:
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="25"><r>opción</r> onecolumn</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="26"><r>opción</r> twocolumn</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="27"><r>opción</r> oneside</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="28"><r>opción</r> twoside</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="29"><r>opción</r> openright</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="30"><r>opción</r> openany</indexterm></findex>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">onecolumn</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">twocolumn</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Composición tipográfica en una o dos columnas; el predeterminado es
+<code>onecolumn</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">oneside</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">twoside</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="31">\evensidemargin</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="32">\oddsidemargin</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Selecciona el diseño de una o dos caras; el predeterminado es
+<code>oneside</code>, excepto para la clase <code>book</code>.
+</para>
+<para>El parámetro <code>\evensidemargin</code> (<code>\oddsidemargin</code>) determina la
+distancia en páginas par (impar) numeradas entre el lado izquierdo de la
+página y el margen excedente del texto. Los valores predeterminados
+varían con el tamaño del papel y si el diseño seleccionado es de uno o
+dos lados. Para imprimir texto en un lado es centrado, para dos lados,
+<code>\oddsidemargin</code> es 40% de la diferencia entre <code>\paperwidth</code> y
+<code>\textwidth</code> con el resto de <code>\evensidemargin</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">openright</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">openany</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Determina si un capítulo debe iniciar en una página del lado derecho;
+para <code>book</code>, el predeterminado es <code>openright</code>.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>La clase <code>slides</code> ofrece la opción <code>clock</code> para imprimir la
+hora en la parte inferior de cada nota.
+</para>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="17">paquetes, cargando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="18">cargando paquetes adicionales</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="33">\usepackage</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Los paquetes adicionales se cargan de la siguiente manera:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usepackage[<var>opciones</var>]&lbrace;<var>paquete</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Para especificar más de un <var>paquete</var>, usted puede separarlos con una
+coma, o utilizar múltiples instrucciones<code>\usepackage</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="19">opciones globales</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="20">opciones, globales</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Cualquiera de las opciones que figuran en la instrucción
+<code>\documentclass</code> que no son conocidas por la clase de documento
+seleccionada son transmitidas a los paquetes cargados con
+<code>\usepackage</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Tipos-de-Letra" spaces=" "><nodename>Tipos de Letra</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Diseño</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Clases de Documento</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Tipos de Letra</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="21">Tipos de Letra</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="22">tipos de letra</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Dos aspectos importantes de la selección de un <dfn>tipo de letra</dfn> son
+la especificación del tamaño y del estilo. Las
+instrucciones &latex; para hacer esto se describen a continuación.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Seleccionar romana, cursiva, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Seleccionando el tamaño del punto.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Seleccionando codificación, familia, series, apariencia.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Estilos-del-Tipo-de-Letra" spaces=" "><nodename>Estilos del Tipo de Letra</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Tipos de Letra</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Estilos del Tipo de Letra</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="23">estilos del tipo de letra</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="24">estilos de tipografía</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="25">estilos de texto</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Las siguientes instrucciones para el estilo del tipo de letra son
+compatibles con &latex;.
+</para>
+<para>Este primer grupo de instrucciones se utiliza normalmente con un
+argumento&comma; como en <code>\textit&lbrace;texto en cursiva&rbrace;</code>. En la
+siguiente tabla&comma; las instrucciones correspondientes
+entre paréntesis son la &textldquo;forma declarativa&textrdquo;, la cual no toma
+argumentos. El ámbito de aplicación de la forma declarativa dura hasta la siguiente instucción para el
+estilo del tipo de letra o hasta el final del grupo actual.
+</para>
+<para>Estos commandos&comma; tanto en las formas con argumento o en
+las formas declarativas&comma; son
+acumulativas; es decir, usted puede decir ya sea
+<code>\sffamily\bfseries</code> o <code>\bfseries\sffamily</code> para obtener sans
+serif en negrita.
+</para>
+<para>También puede utilizar la forma de entorno de las formas declarativas;
+por ejemplo, <code>\begin&lbrace;ttfamily&rbrace;...\end&lbrace;ttfamily&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Estas instrucciones proporcionan automáticamente una corrección en
+cursiva si es necesario.
+</para><table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textrm (\rmfamily)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="34">\textrm</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="35">\rmfamily</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Romana.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textit (\itshape)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="36">\textit</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="37">\itshape</indexterm></findex>
+<para>cursivas.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\emph</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="38">\emph</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="26">Énfasis</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Énfasis (cambia entre <code>\textit</code> y <code>\textrm</code>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textmd (\mdseries)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="39">\textmd</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="40">\mdseries</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Peso medio (predeterminado).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textbf (\bfseries)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="41">\textbf</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="42">\bfseries</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Negrita.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textup (\upshape)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="43">\textup</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="44">\upshape</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Vertical (predeterminado). Lo opuesto a inclinada.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textsl (\slshape)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="45">\textsl</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="46">\slshape</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Oblicua.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textsf (\sffamily)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="47">\textsf</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="48">\sffamily</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Sans serif.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textsc (\scshape)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="49">\textsc</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="50">\scshape</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Versales.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\texttt (\ttfamily)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="51">\texttt</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="52">\ttfamily</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Máquina de escribir.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\textnormal (\normalfont)</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="53">\textnormal</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="54">\normalfont</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Tipo de letra principal del documento.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathrm</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="55">\mathrm</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Romana, para usar en modo math.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathbf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="56">\mathbf</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Negrita, para usarse en modo math.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathsf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="57">\mathsf</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Sans serif, para usarse en modo math.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathtt</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="58">\mathtt</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Máquina de escribir, para usarse en modo math.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathit</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">(\mit)</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>cursivas, para utilizarse en modo math.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathnormal</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="59">\mathnormal</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Para usarse en modo math, por ejemplo dentro de otra declaración de
+estilo de letra.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\mathcal</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="60">\mathcal</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Letras &textlsquo;caligráficas&textrsquo;, para usarse en modo math.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Además, la instrucción <code>\mathversion&lbrace;bold&rbrace;</code>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="61">\mathversion</indexterm></findex>
+<!-- c begin vincentb1 20140226 -->
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="27">matemáticas, negrita</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="28">negrita matemáticas</indexterm></cindex>
+<!-- c end vincentb1 20140226 -->
+se pude utilizar para cambiar a letras y símbolos en negrita dentro de
+fórmulas. <code>\mathversion&lbrace;normal&rbrace;</code> restablece el valor
+predeterminado.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; también proporciona las siguientes
+instrucciones, que incondicionalmente cambian a determinado estilo, es
+decir, <emph>no</emph> son acumulativas. Estas se utilizan de forma diferente
+que las instrucciones anteriores, también: <code>&lbrace;\<var>instrucción</var>
+...&rbrace;</code> en lugar de <code>\<var>instrucción</var>&lbrace;...&rbrace;</code>. Son dos cosas muy
+distintas.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="62">\bf</indexterm>\bf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="29">tipo de letra negrita</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Cambia a <b>tipo de letra negrita</b>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="63">\cal</indexterm>\cal</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="30">letras script para math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="31">letras caligráficas para math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Cambia a letras caligráficas para math.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="64">\em</indexterm>\em</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="32">énfasis</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Énfasis (cursivas con romana, romana con cursivas).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="65">\it</indexterm>\it</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="33">tipo de letra cursiva</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>cursivas.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="66">\rm</indexterm>\rm</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="34">tipo de letra romana</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Romana.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="67">\sc</indexterm>\sc</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="35">tipo de letra versales</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Versales.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="68">\sf</indexterm>\sf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="36">tipo de letra sans serif</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Sans serif.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="69">\sl</indexterm>\sl</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="37">tipo de letra oblicua</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="38">tipo de letra oblicua</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Oblicua (oblicua).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="70">\tt</indexterm>\tt</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="39">tipo de letra de máquina de escribir</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="40">tipo de letra monoespacio</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="41">tipo de letra de ancho fijo</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Máquina de escribir (monoespacio, de ancho fijo).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra" spaces=" "><nodename>Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Estilos del Tipo de Letra</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Tipos de Letra</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="42">tamaños del tipo de letra</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="43">tamaños del tipo de letra</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="44">tamaño del texto</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Las siguientes instrucciones para el tamaño del tipo de letra estándar
+son compatibles con &latex;.
+La tabla muestra el nombre de la
+instrucción y el tamaño real (en puntos) del tipo de letra
+correspondiente utilizado con las opciones de tamaño del documento
+<samp>10pt</samp>, <samp>11pt</samp> y <samp>12pt</samp>, respectivamente (<pxref label="Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento"><xrefnodename>Opciones
+de Clase de Documento</xrefnodename></pxref> ).
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="71">\tiny</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="72">\scriptsize</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="73">\footnotesize</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="74">\small</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="75">\normalsize</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="76">\large</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="77">\Large</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="78">\LARGE</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="79">\huge</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="80">\Huge</indexterm></findex>
+
+<multitable spaces=" " endspaces=" "><columnprototypes><columnprototype bracketed="on"><code>\normalsize</code> (predeterminada)</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">24.88</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">24.88</columnprototype> <columnprototype bracketed="on">24.88</columnprototype></columnprototypes>
+<thead><row><entry command="headitem" spaces=" "><para>Instrucción </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>10pt</code> </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>11pt</code> </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para><code>12pt</code>
+</para></entry></row></thead><tbody><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\tiny</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>5 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>6 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>6
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\scriptsize</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>7 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>8 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>8
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\footnotesize</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>8 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>9 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>10
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\small</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>9 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>10 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>10.95
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\normalsize</code> (predeterminado)
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>10 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>10.95 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>12
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\large</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>12 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>12 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>14.4
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\Large</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>14.4 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>14.4 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>17.28
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\LARGE</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>14.4 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>14.4 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>17.28
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\huge</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>20.74 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>20.74 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>24.88
+</para></entry></row><row><entry command="item" spaces=" "><para><code>\Huge</code>
+</para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>24.88 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>24.88 </para></entry><entry command="tab" spaces=" "><para>24.88
+</para></entry></row></tbody></multitable>
+
+<para>Las instrucciones tal como están listadas aquí son &textldquo;formas
+declarativas&textrdquo;. El ámbito de aplicación de la forma declarativa dura
+hasta la instrucción &textldquo;end&textrdquo; del estilo del tipo de letra o hasta el
+final del grupo actual. También puede utilizar la forma de entorno en
+estas instrucciones; por ejemplo, <code>\begin&lbrace;tiny&rbrace;...\end&lbrace;tiny&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Instrucciones-de-Bajo-Nivel-para-el-Tipo-de-Letra" spaces=" "><nodename>Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Tipos de Letra</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="45">Instrucciones de Bajo Nivel para el Tipo de Letra</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="46">instrucciones de tipo de letra, de bajo nivel</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Estas instrucciones están destinadas principalmente para los escritores
+de macros y paquetes. Las instrucciones listadas anteriormente son sólo
+un subconjunto de las disponibles.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontencoding&lbrace;codificación&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="81">\fontencoding</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Selecciona la codificación del tipo de letra. Las codificaciones válidas
+incluyen a <code>OT1</code> y <code>T1</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontfamily&lbrace;familia&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="82">\fontfamily</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Selecciona la familia del tipo de letra. Las familias válidas incluyen:
+</para>
+<itemize commandarg="bullet" spaces=" " endspaces=" "><itemprepend><formattingcommand command="bullet"/></itemprepend>
+<listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>cmr</code> para Romana de Computadora Moderna
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>cmss</code> para Sans Serif de Computadora Moderna
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>cmtt</code> para Máquina de Escribir de Computadora Moderna
+</para></listitem></itemize>
+
+<para>y muchas otras.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontseries&lbrace;series&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="83">\fontseries</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Selecciona las series del tipo de letra. Las series válidas incluyen:
+</para>
+<itemize commandarg="bullet" spaces=" " endspaces=" "><itemprepend><formattingcommand command="bullet"/></itemprepend>
+<listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>m</code> Mediana (normal)
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>b</code> Negrita
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>c</code> Condensada
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>bc</code> Negrita condensada
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>bx</code> Negrita extendida
+</para></listitem></itemize>
+
+<para>y otras combinaciones diferentes.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontshape&lbrace;forma&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="84">\fontshape</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Selecciona la forma del tipo de letra. Las formas válidas son:
+</para>
+<itemize commandarg="bullet" spaces=" " endspaces=" "><itemprepend><formattingcommand command="bullet"/></itemprepend>
+<listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>n</code> Vertical (normal)
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>it</code> Cursiva
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>sl</code> Oblicua (oblicua)
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>sc</code> Versales
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>ui</code> Cursiva vertical
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><prepend>&bullet;</prepend><para><code>ol</code> Esquema
+</para></listitem></itemize>
+
+<para>Las dos últimas formas no están disponibles para la mayoría de las familias de tipos de letra.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\fontsize&lbrace;tamaño&rbrace;&lbrace;espaciado&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="85">\fontsize</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="86">\baselineskip</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Establece el tamaño de letra. El primer parámetro es el tamaño a cambiar
+el tipo de letra y el segundo es el espaciado de línea a usar; este se
+almacena en un parámetro denominado <code>\baselineskip</code>. La unidad de
+ambos parámetros de manera predeterminada es pt. El valor
+predeterminado de <code>\baselineskip</code> para el tipo de letra Computadora
+Moderna es 1.2 veces <code>\fontsize</code>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="87">\baselinestretch</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="47">paquete <code>setspace</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="48">interlineado doble</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El interlineado de espacio doble también es multiplicado por el valor
+del parámetro <code>\baselinestretch</code> cuando cambia el tamaño del tipo
+de letra; el predeterminado es 1. Sin embargo, la mejor manera de hacer
+un documento con &textldquo;doble espacio&textrdquo;, si tiene la suficiente mala suerte
+de tener que producirlo, es usar el paquete <code>setspace</code>; vea
+<url><urefurl>http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="88">\linespread</indexterm></findex>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\linespread&lbrace;<var>factor</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Equivalente a <code>\renewcommand&lbrace;\baselinestretch&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>factor</var>&rbrace;</code>,
+y por lo tanto debe estar seguido por <code>\selectfont</code> para que tenga
+algún efecto. Es mejor especificarlo en el preámbulo, o utilizar el
+paquete <code>setspace</code>, justo como se acaba de describir anteriormente.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="89">\selectfont</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Las modificaciones introducidas por llamar a la fuente de las
+instrucciones descritas anteriormente no entrará en vigor sino hasta que
+se invoque a <code>\selectfont</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\usefont&lbrace;codificación&rbrace;&lbrace;familia&rbrace;&lbrace;series&rbrace;&lbrace;forma&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="90">\usefont</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Lo mismo que invocar a <code>\fontencoding</code>, <code>\fontfamily</code>,
+<code>\fontseries</code> y <code>\fontshape</code> con los parámetros dados, seguida
+por <code>\selectfont</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Dise_00f1o" spaces=" "><nodename>Diseño</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Seccionado</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Tipos de Letra</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Diseño</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="49">instrucciones de diseño</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Varias instrucciones para controlar el diseño general de la página.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\onecolumn</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Utiliza un diseño de una columna.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\twocolumn</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Utiliza un diseño de dos columanas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\flushbottom</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Hace que todas las páginas del texto tengan la misma altura.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\raggedbottom</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Permite que las páginas de texto tengan diferente altura.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve"><code>\headheight</code> <code>\footskip</code>.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005conecolumn" spaces=" "><nodename>\onecolumn</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\twocolumn</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Diseño</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\onecolumn</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="91">\onecolumn</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="50">produce una columna</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La declaración <code>\onecolumn</code> comienza una nueva página y la produce
+con una sola columna. Este es el valor predeterminado.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005ctwocolumn" spaces=" "><nodename>\twocolumn</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\flushbottom</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\onecolumn</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Diseño</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\twocolumn</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="92">\twocolumn</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="51">texto multicolumna</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="52">produce dos columnas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\twocolumn[<var>textocolumna1</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La declaración <code>\twocolumn</code> comienza una nueva página y la produce
+con dos columnas. Si el argumento opcional <var>textocolumna1</var> está
+presente, esta es compuesta en modo de una columna antes de comenzar la
+composición de las dos columnas.
+</para>
+<para>Estos parámetros controlan la tipografía en la producción de dos
+columnas:
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="93">\columnsep</indexterm>\columnsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>La distancia entre las columnas (de manera predeterminada a 35pt).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="94">\columnseprule</indexterm>\columnseprule</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El ancho de la regla entre columnas; el predeterminado es 0pt, por lo
+tanto no hay regla.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="95">\columnwidth</indexterm>\columnwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El ancho de la columna actual; este es igual a <code>\textwidth</code>
+en texto de una sola columna.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>Estos parámetros controlan el comportamiento de la flotación de las dos
+columnas producidas:
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="96">\dbltopfraction</indexterm>\dbltopfraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Máxima fracción en la parte superior de una página de dos columna que
+pueden ocupar los flotantes. El predeterminado es <samp>.7</samp>, puede ser
+útil redefinirlo a (digamos) <samp>.9</samp> para evitar llegar tan pronto a
+páginas flotantes.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="97">\dblfloatpagefraction</indexterm>\dblfloatpagefraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>La mínima fracción de una página con flotantes que deben ocupar los
+flotantes, para una página de dos columnas con flotantes. El
+predeterminado es <samp>.5</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="98">\dblfloatsep</indexterm>\dblfloatsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Distancia entre flotantes en la parte superior o inferior de una página
+de dos columnas con flotantes. Predeterminado a <samp>12pt plus2pt
+minus2pt</samp> para <samp>10pt</samp> y <samp>11pt</samp> para documentos, <samp>14pt
+plus2pt minus4pt</samp> para <samp>12pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="99">\dbltextfloatsep</indexterm>\dbltextfloatsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Distancia entre un flotante multicolumna en la parte superior o inferior
+de una página y el texto principal. De manera predeterminada es
+<samp>20pt plus2pt minus4pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cflushbottom" spaces=" "><nodename>\flushbottom</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\raggedbottom</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\twocolumn</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Diseño</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\flushbottom</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="100">\flushbottom</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La declaración <code>\flushbottom</code> hace que todas las páginas tengan la
+misma altura, añadiendo espacio vertical extra donde sea necesario para
+llenar la página.
+</para>
+<para>Este es el predeterminado si se selecciona el modo <code>twocolumn</code>
+(<pxref label="Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento"><xrefnodename>Opciones de Clase de Documento</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005craggedbottom" spaces=" "><nodename>\raggedbottom</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\flushbottom</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Diseño</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\raggedbottom</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="101">\raggedbottom</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="53">reducción, omitiendo vertical</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La declaración <code>\raggedbottom</code> hace que todas las páginas tengan la
+altura natural del material en esa página. Sin longitudes flexibles que
+se deban ajustar.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Par_00e1metros-para-el-Dise_00f1o-de-P_00e1gina" spaces=" "><nodename>Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\raggedbottom</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Diseño</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Parámetros para el Diseño de Página</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="54">parámetros para el diseño de página</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="55">parámetros, diseño de página</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="56">diseño, parámetros de página para</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="57">header, parámetros para</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="58">footer, parámetros para</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="59">ejecutando header y footer</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="102">\headheight</indexterm>\headheight</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Altura de la caja que contiene el encabezado. El predeterminado es
+<samp>30pt</samp>, salvo en la clase <code>book</code>, donde este varía con el
+tamaño de letra.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="103">\headsep</indexterm>\headsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Distancia vertical entre la línea inferior de la cabecera y la parte
+superior del texto principal. El predeterminado es <samp>25pt</samp>, salvo
+en la clase <code>book</code>, donde este varía con el tamaño de letra.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="104">\footskip</indexterm>\footskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Distancia desde la línea base de la última línea de texto a la línea
+base del pié de página. El predeterminado es <samp>30pt</samp>, salvo en la
+clase <code>book</code>, donde este varía con el tamaño de letra.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="105">\linewidth</indexterm>\linewidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Ancho de la línea actual; el predeterminado varía con el tamaño de
+fuente, el ancho del papel, el modo two-column, etc. Para un documento
+<code>article</code> en <samp>10pt</samp>, este se establece a <samp>345pt</samp>; en modo
+two-column, este cambia a <samp>229.5pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="106">\textheight</indexterm>\textheight</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>La altura vertical normal del cuerpo de la página; el predeterminado
+varía con el tamaño de letra, clase de documento, etc. Para un
+documento <code>article</code> o <code>report</code> en <samp>10pt</samp>, este se fija a
+<samp>43\baselineskip</samp>; para <code>book</code>, es <samp>41\baselineskip</samp>.
+Para <samp>11pt</samp>, es <samp>38\baselineskip</samp> y para <samp>12pt</samp>,
+<samp>36\baselineskip</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="107">\textwidth</indexterm>\textwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El ancho horizontal normal del cuerpo de la página; el predeterminado
+varía de la manera usual. Para un documento <code>article</code> o
+<code>report</code>, es <samp>345pt</samp> en <samp>10pt</samp>, <samp>360pt</samp> en
+<samp>11pt</samp> y <samp>390pt</samp> en <samp>12pt</samp>. Para un documento
+<code>book</code>, es <samp>4.5in</samp> en <samp>10pt</samp> y <samp>5in</samp> en <samp>11pt</samp>
+o <samp>12pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="108">\topmargin</indexterm>\topmargin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Espacio entre la parte superior de la página &tex; (de manera
+predeterminada, una pulgada en la parte superior del papel) y en la
+parte superior del encabezado. El predeterminado se calcula basándose
+en muchos otros parámetros: <code>\paperheight &minus; 2in &minus;
+\headheight &minus; \headsep &minus; \textheight &minus; \footskip</code>,
+y luego se divide entre dos.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="109">\topskip</indexterm>\topskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>La distancia mínima entre la parte superior del cuerpo de la página y la
+línea base de la primer línea de texto. Para clases estándar, el
+predeterminado es el mismo que el tamaño de letra, por ejemplo,
+<samp>10pt</samp> en <samp>10pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Seccionado" spaces=" "><nodename>Seccionado</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Referencias Cruzadas</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Diseño</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Seccionado</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="60">seccionado</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Las instrucciones de seccionado proporcionan los medios para estructurar
+su texto en unidades:
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="110">\part</indexterm>\part</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="111">\chapter</indexterm>\chapter</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(únicamente las clases <code>report</code> y <code>book</code>)
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="112">\section</indexterm>\section</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="113">\subsection</indexterm>\subsection</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="114">\subsubsection</indexterm>\subsubsection</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="115">\paragraph</indexterm>\paragraph</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="116">\subparagraph</indexterm>\subparagraph</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>Todas las instrucciones de seccionado tienen la misma forma general, por
+ejemplo,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter[<var>títulobreve</var>]&lbrace;<var>título</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Además de proporcionar el encabezado <var>título</var> en el texto principal,
+el título de la sección puede aparecer en otros dos lugares:
+</para>
+<enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
+<listitem>
+<para>La tabla de contenido.
+</para></listitem><listitem>
+<para>El título breve en la parte superior de la página.
+</para></listitem></enumerate>
+
+<para>Tal vez no quiera el mismo texto en estos lugares como en el texto
+principal. Para controlar esto, las instrucciones de seccionado tienen
+un argumento opcional, <var>toctitle</var> que, cuando se proporciona,
+especifica el texto de esos otros lugares.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="61">forma con * de instrucciones de seccionado</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Además, todas las instrucciones de seccionado tienen formas con <code>*</code>
+que imprimen el <var>título</var> de la manera usual, pero no incluyen un
+número y no producen una entrada en la tabla de contenido. Por ejemplo:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\section*&lbrace;Preámbulo&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="117">\appendix</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="62">apéndices, creando</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\appendix</code> cambia la manera en que se numeran las
+siguientes unidades de sección. La instrucción <code>\appendix</code> en sí
+misma no genera texto y no afecta la númeración de las partes. El uso
+normal de esta instrucción es algo así como:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\chapter&lbrace;Un Capítulo&rbrace;
+&dots;
+\appendix
+\chapter&lbrace;El Primer Apéndice&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="118"><r>contador</r> secnumdepth</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="63">números de sección, imprimiendo</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El contador <code>secnumdepth</code> controla la impresión de los números de
+sección. La configuración
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setcounter&lbrace;secnumdepth&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>nivel</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>suprime los números en encabezados y cualquier profundidad <math>&gt;
+<var>nivel</var></math>, donde <code>chapter</code> es el nivel cero.
+(<xref label="_005csetcounter"><xrefnodename>\setcounter</xrefnodename></xref>.)
+</para>
+
+</chapter>
+<node name="Referencias-Cruzadas" spaces=" "><nodename>Referencias Cruzadas</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Entornos</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Seccionado</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Referencias Cruzadas</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="64">referencias cruzadas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Una razón para numerar cosas como figuras y ecuaciones es para referir
+al lector a ellas, como en &textldquo;Vea la Figura 3 para más detalles&textrdquo;.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\label</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Asigna un nombre simbólico a una parte del texto.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\pageref</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Referencia a un número de página.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\ref</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Referencia a una sección, figura o similar.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005clabel" spaces=" "><nodename>\label</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\pageref</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Referencias Cruzadas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\label</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="119">\label</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\label&lbrace;<var>clave</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Una instrucción <code>\label</code> que aparece en un texto normal asigna a
+<var>clave</var> el número de la unidad de sección actual; que aparece dentro
+de un entorno numerado asignando ese número a <var>clave</var>.
+</para>
+<para>Un nombre de <var>clave</var> puede consistir de cualquier secuencia de
+letras, dígitos, o caracteres de puntuación. Distingue entre letras
+mayúsculas y minúsculas.
+</para>
+<para>Para evitar la creación accidental de dos etiquetas con el mismo nombre,
+es común el uso de etiquetas que consisten de un prefijo y un sufijo,
+separados por una coma o un punto. Algunos prefijos utilizados
+convencionalmente:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">ch</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>para capítulos
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">sec</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>para instrucciones de seccionado de bajo nivel
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">fig</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>para figuras
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">tab</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>para tablas
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">eq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>para ecuaciones
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Por lo tanto, una etiqueta para una figura parecería como
+<code>fig:snark</code> o <code>fig.snark</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cpageref" spaces=" "><nodename>\pageref</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\ref</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\label</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Referencias Cruzadas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\pageref&lbrace;<var>clave</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="120">\pageref</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="65">referencias cruzadas con número de página</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="66">número de página, referencias cruzadas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\pageref&lbrace;<var>clave</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\pageref</code>&lbrace;<var>clave</var>&rbrace; produce el número de
+página del lugar en el texto en donde aparece la instrucción
+<code>\label</code>&lbrace;<var>clave</var>&rbrace;.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cref" spaces=" "><nodename>\ref</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\pageref</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Referencias Cruzadas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\ref&lbrace;<var>clave</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="121">\ref</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="67">referencias cruzadas, simbólicas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="68">número de sección, referencias cruzadas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="69">número de ecuación, referencias cruzadas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="70">número de figura, referencias cruzadas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="71">número de pie de página, referencias cruzadas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\ref&lbrace;<var>clave</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\ref</code> produce el número de la unidad de sección de
+la ecuación, pie de página, figura, &dots;, de la instrucción
+<code>\label</code> correspondiente (<pxref label="_005clabel"><xrefnodename>\label</xrefnodename></pxref>). Esta no produce ningún
+texto, como por ejemplo la palabra &textlsquo;Sección&textrsquo; o &textlsquo;figura&textrsquo;, únicamente el
+número.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Entornos" spaces=" "><nodename>Entornos</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Saltos de Línea</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Referencias Cruzadas</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Entornos</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="72">entornos</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="122">\begin</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="123">\end</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>&latex; proporciona muchos entornos para marcar cierto texto. Cada
+entorno comienza y termina de la misma manera:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;<var>nombreentorno</var>&rbrace;
+...
+\end&lbrace;<var>nombreentorno</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">abstract</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Produce un resumen.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">array</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Matrices Matemáticas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">center</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Líneas centradas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">description</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Listas etiquetadas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">displaymath</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Fórmulas que aparecen en su propia línea.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">document</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Encierra todo el documento.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">enumerate</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Listas numeradas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">eqnarray</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Secuencias de ecuaciones alineadas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">equation</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Ecuación mostrada.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">figure</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Figuras flotantes.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">filecontents</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Crear un archivo &textmdash; instrucción inicial.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">flushleft</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Líneas alineada a la izquierda.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">flushright</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Líneas alineadas a la derecha.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">itemize</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Listas con viñetas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">letter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Cartas
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">list</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Entorno lista genérica.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">math</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Matemáticas en línea.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">minipage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Página miniatura.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">picture</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Imagen con texto, flechas, líneas y círculos.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">quotation</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Entorno con sangría y párrafo con sangría.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">quote</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Entorno con sangría sin sangría de párrafo.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">tabbing</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Alineación de texto de manera arbitraria.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">table</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Tablas flotantes.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">tabular</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Alinea texto en columnas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">thebibliography</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Bibliografía o lista de referencia.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">theorem</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Teoremas, lemas, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">titlepage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Para elaborar portadas a mano.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">verbatim</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Simulación de entrada con máquina de escribir.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">verse</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Para poesía y otras cosas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="abstract" spaces=" "><nodename>abstract</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">array</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>abstract</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="124"><r>entorno</r> <code>abstract</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="125"><code>abstract</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="73">resúmenes</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para><example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;abstract&rbrace;
+...
+\end&lbrace;abstract&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Entorno para producir un resumen, posiblemente de varios párrafos.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="array" spaces=" "><nodename>array</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">center</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">abstract</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>array</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="126"><r>entorno</r> <code>array</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="127"><code>array</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="74">matrices, matemáticas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;array&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>plantilla</var>&rbrace;
+<var>texto col1</var>&amp;<var>texto col1</var>&amp;<var>coln</var>&rbrace;\\
+...
+\end&lbrace;array&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Las matrices matemáticas se producen con el entorno <code>array</code>,
+normalmente dentro de un entorno <code>equation</code> (<pxref label="equation"><xrefnodename>equation</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+Tiene un único argumento <var>plantilla</var> obligatorio que describe el
+número de columnas y la alineación dentro de ellas. Cada columna
+<var>col</var> se especifica por una sola letra que indica cual
+formato debe tener cada linea en esta columna de la siguiente manera:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>centrada
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>alineada a la izquierda
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>alineada a la derecha
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="128">\\ (para <code>array</code>)</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La entradas de columna son separadas con <code>&amp;</code>. Las entradas de
+columna pueden incluir otras instrucciones &latex;. Cada fila de la
+matriz se termina con <code>\\</code>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="129">&arobase;&lbrace;...&rbrace;</indexterm></findex>
+<para>En la plantilla, la construcción <code>&arobase;&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</code> coloca
+<var>texto</var> entre columnas en cada fila.
+</para>
+<para>He aquí un ejemplo:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;array&rbrace;&lbrace;lrc&rbrace;
+ izquierda1 &amp; derecha1 &amp; centrado1 \\
+ izquierda2 &amp; derecha2 &amp; centrado2 \\
+ \end&lbrace;array&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="130">\arraycolsep</indexterm></findex>
+<para>El parámetro <code>\arraycolsep</code> define la mitad del ancho del espacio
+de separación entre columnas; el predeterminado es <samp>5pt</samp>.
+<xref label="tabular"><xrefnodename>tabular</xrefnodename></xref>, para otros parámetros que afectan el formato en entornos
+<code>array</code>, a saber <code>\arrayrulewidth</code> y <code>\arraystretch</code>.
+</para>
+<para>El entorno <code>array</code> únicamente se puede utilizar en modo math.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="center" spaces=" "><nodename>center</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">description</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">array</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>center</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="131"><r>entorno</r> <code>center</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="132"><code>center</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="75">centrar texto, entorno para</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+<var>línea1</var> \\
+<var>línea2</var> \\
+\end&lbrace;center&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="133">\\ (para <code>centrar</code>)</indexterm></findex>
+<para>El entorno <code>center</code> le permite crear un párrafo consistente de
+líneas que están centradas respecto al margen izquierdo y derecho de la
+página actual. Cada línea es terminada con dobles barras inversas
+<code>\\</code>.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\centering</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Forma declarativa para el entorno <code>center</code>.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005ccentering" spaces=" "><nodename>\centering</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">center</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\centering</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="134">\centering</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="76">centrar texto, declaración para</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La declaración <code>\centering</code> corresponde al entorno <code>center</code>.
+Esta declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un entorno tal como
+<code>quote</code> o en un <code>parbox</code>. Por lo tanto, el texto de una
+figura o una tabla se puede centrar en la página poniendo una
+instrucción <code>\centering</code> al principio de la figura o en el entorno
+table.
+</para>
+<para>A diferencia del entorno <code>center</code>, la instrucción <code>\centering</code>
+no comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta simplemente cambia el formato que
+&latex; aplica a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar el formato de
+la unidad de párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe contener una
+línea en blanco o la instrucción <code>\end</code> (de un entorno tal como
+quote), que finaliza la unidad de párrafo.
+</para>
+<para>He aquí un ejemplo:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;quote&rbrace;
+\centering
+primer línea \\
+segunda línea \\
+\end&lbrace;quote&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="description" spaces=" "><nodename>description</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">displaymath</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">center</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>description</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="135"><r>entorno</r> <code>description</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="136"><code>description</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="77">listas etiquetadas, creando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="78">listas de descripción, creando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;description&rbrace;
+\item [<var>etiqueta1</var>] <var>elemento1</var>
+\item [<var>etiqueta2</var>] <var>elemento2</var>
+...
+\end&lbrace;description&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="137">\item</indexterm></findex>
+<para>El entorno <code>description</code> se utiliza para hacer listas etiquetadas.
+Cada <var>etiqueta</var> es compuesta tipográficamente en negrita, alineada a
+la derecha. El texto del <var>elemento</var> puede contener múltiples
+párrafos.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="79">máquina de escribir en negrita, evitando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="80">etiquetas en máquina de escribir en listas</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Otra variación: debido a que el estilo negrita se aplica a las
+etiquetas, si usted compone una etiqueta en máquina de escribir usando
+<code>\texttt</code>, obtendrá una máquina de escribir en negrita:
+<code>\item[\texttt&lbrace;máquina de escribir y negrita&rbrace;]</code>. Esta también
+puede estar en negrita, entre otras cuestiones. Para obtener sólo en
+máquina de escribir, use <code>\tt</code>, que restablece todas las
+variaciones de otros estilos: <code>\item[&lbrace;\tt máquina de escribir
+simple&rbrace;]</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Para detalles acerca del espaciado en listas, vea <ref label="itemize"><xrefnodename>itemize</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="displaymath" spaces=" "><nodename>displaymath</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">document</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">description</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>displaymath</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="138"><r>entorno</r> <code>displaymath</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="139"><code>displaymath</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+<var>fórmula matemática</var>
+\end&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent> <para>o
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\[<var>math</var>\]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>displaymath</code> (<code>\[...\]</code> es un sinónimo) de
+composición tipográfica de texto <var>math</var> en una línea independiente,
+centrada de manera predeterminada. La opción global <code>fleqn</code>
+produce ecuaciones alineadas a la izquierda; vea <ref label="Opciones-de-Clase-de-Documento"><xrefnodename>Opciones de Clase
+de Documento</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+<para>No se añade un número de ecuación al texto de <code>displaymath</code>; Para
+obtener un número de ecuación, utilice el entorno <code>equation</code>
+(<pxref label="equation"><xrefnodename>equation</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="document" spaces=" "><nodename>document</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">enumerate</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">displaymath</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>document</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="140"><r>entorno</r> <code>document</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="141"><code>document</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>document</code> encierra el cuerpo de un documento. este es
+obligatorio en cada documento &latex;. <xref label="Iniciando-y-Finalizando"><xrefnodename>Iniciando y Finalizando</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="enumerate" spaces=" "><nodename>enumerate</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">eqnarray</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">document</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>enumerate</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="142"><r>entorno</r> <code>enumerate</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="143"><code>enumerate</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="81">lista de elementos, numerados</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+\item <var>elemento1</var>
+\item <var>elemento2</var>
+...
+\end&lbrace;enumerate&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>enumerate</code> produce una lista numerada. Las
+enumeraciones se pueden anidar unas dentro de otras, hasta cuatro
+niveles de profundidad. Estas también se pueden anidar en otros
+entornos de párrafo, tal como <code>itemize</code> (<pxref label="itemize"><xrefnodename>itemize</xrefnodename></pxref>) y
+<code>description</code> (<pxref label="description"><xrefnodename>description</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="144">\item</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Cada elemento de una lista enumerada comienza con una instrucción
+<code>\item</code>. En el entorno por lo menos debe haber una instrucción
+<code>\item</code>.
+</para>
+<para>De manera predeterminada, la numeración de cada nivel se hace de la
+siguiente manera:
+</para>
+<enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
+<listitem spaces=" "><para>1., 2., &dots;
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>(a), (b), &dots;
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>i., ii., &dots;
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>A., B., &dots;
+</para></listitem></enumerate>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="145">\enumi</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="146">\enumii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="147">\enumiii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="148">\enumiv</indexterm></findex>
+<para>El entorno <code>enumerate</code> usa los contadores <code>\enumi</code> hasta
+<code>\enumiv</code> (<pxref label="Contadores"><xrefnodename>Contadores</xrefnodename></pxref>). Si se proporciona el argumento
+opcional a <code>\item</code>, el contador no se incrementa por cada elemento.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="149">\labelenumi</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="150">\labelenumii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="151">\labelenumiii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="152">\labelenumiv</indexterm></findex>
+<para>El entorno <code>enumerate</code> utiliza las instrucciones desde
+<code>\labelenumi</code> hasta <code>\labelenumiv</code> para producir la etiqueta
+predeterminada. Por lo tanto, usted puede usar <code>\renewcommand</code>
+para cambiar las etiquetas (<pxref label="_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand"><xrefnodename>\newcommand y \renewcommand</xrefnodename></pxref>). Por
+ejemplo, para hacer que el primer nivel use letras mayúsculas:
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="153"><r>ejemplo</r> \Alph</indexterm></findex>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand&lbrace;\labelenumi&rbrace;&lbrace;\Alph&lbrace;enumi&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="eqnarray" spaces=" "><nodename>eqnarray</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">equation</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">enumerate</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>eqnarray</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="154"><r>entorno</r> <code>eqnarray</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="155"><code>eqnarray</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="82">ecuaciones, alineando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="83">alineando Ecuaciones</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;eqnarray&rbrace; <r>(o <code>eqnarray*</code>)</r>
+<var>fórmula1</var> \\
+<var>fórmula2</var> \\
+...
+\end&lbrace;eqnarray&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="156">\\ (para <code>eqnarray</code>)</indexterm></findex>
+<para>El entorno <code>eqnarray</code> se utiliza para mostrar una secuencia de
+ecuaciones o desigualdades. Es muy parecido a un entorno <code>array</code>
+de tres columnas, con filas consecutivas separadas por <code>\\</code> y
+elementos consecutivos en una fila, separados por un <code>&amp;</code>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="157">\\* (para <code>eqnarray</code>)</indexterm></findex>
+<para>también puede utilizar <code>\\*</code> para separar ecuaciones
+independientes, con su propósito normal de no permitir saltos de página
+en esa línea.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="158">\nonumber</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="84">números de ecuación, omitiendo</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Se coloca un número de ecuación en cada línea a menos que la línea tenga
+una instrucción <code>\nonumber</code>. Alternativamente, la forma del
+entorno con <code>*</code> (<code>\begin&lbrace;eqnarray*&rbrace; ... \end&lbrace;eqnarray*&rbrace;</code>)
+debe omitir por completo la numeración de la ecuación, al tiempo que el
+mismo comienza con <code>eqnarray</code>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="159">\lefteqn</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\lefteqn</code> se utiliza para dividir grandes fórmulas
+a través de varias líneas. Su argumento de composición tipográfica en el
+estilo de visualización alinea a la izquierda en una caja de ancho cero.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="equation" spaces=" "><nodename>equation</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">figure</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">eqnarray</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>equation</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="160"><r>entorno</r> <code>equation</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="161"><code>equation</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="85">ecuaciones, entornos para</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="86">fórmulas, entornos para</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+<var>fórmula-matemática</var>
+\end&lbrace;equation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>equation</code> comienza un entorno <code>displaymath</code>
+(<pxref label="displaymath"><xrefnodename>displaymath</xrefnodename></pxref>), por ejemplo, centrando en la página el texto
+<var>math</var>, y además colocando el número de ecuación en el margen
+derecho.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="figure" spaces=" "><nodename>figure</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">filecontents</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">equation</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>figure</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="162"><r>entorno</r> <code>figure</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="163"><code>figure</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="87">insertando figuras</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="88">figuras, insertando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;figure[*]&rbrace;[<var>úbicación</var>]
+<var>figbody</var>
+\label&lbrace;<var>etiqueta&rbrace;</var>
+\caption[<var>títulobreve</var>]&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;figure&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Las figuras son objetos que no forman parte del texto normal, y en su
+lugar son &textldquo;flotados&textrdquo; a un lugar conveniente, como en la parte superior
+de una página. Las figuras no se dividen entre dos páginas.
+</para>
+<para>Cuando se compone tipográficamente en columnas dobles, la forma favorita
+produce un ancho completo (a través de las dos columnas).
+</para>
+<para>El argumento opcional <code>[ubicación]</code> determina donde debe tratar de
+colocar &latex; su figura. Hay cuatro lugares donde &latex;,
+posiblemente, pueda colocar un flotante:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(Top)&textmdash;en lo alto de una página de texto.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(Bottom)&textmdash;en la parte inferior de una página de texto. No obstante,
+<code>b</code> no se permite para flotantes de ancho completo (<code>figure*</code>)
+en entornos con columnas dobles. Para mejorar esto, utilice el paquete
+<code>stfloats</code> o <code>dblfloatfix</code>, pero vea el debate de advertencias
+en el FAQ:
+<url><urefurl>http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">h</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="89">paquete <code>float</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<para>(Here)&textmdash;aquí, en la posición donde aparece el entorno <code>figure</code> en el
+texto. Sin embargo, este no está permitido por sí mismo,
+automáticamente se añade <code>t</code>. Para forzar que una figura
+absolutamente aparezca &textldquo;aquí&textrdquo;, utilice el paquete <code>float</code> y use
+la letra de ubicación <code>H</code>. (Este paquete también ofrece otras
+opciones).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">p</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(Página de flotantes)&textmdash;en una página de flotantes separada, misma que
+es una página que no contiene texto, únicamente flotantes.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Las clases estándar <code>report</code> y <code>article</code> utilizan la ubicación
+predeterminada <code>tbp</code>.
+</para>
+<para>El cuerpo de la figura se compone de cualquier texto, instrucciones
+&latex;, etc., que desee.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="164">\caption</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\caption</code> especifica el <var>texto</var> del título de
+la figura. El título de manera predeterminada lleva el número. Si
+<var>loftitle</var> está presente, esta se utiliza en la lista de figuras en
+lugar del <var>texto</var> (<pxref label="Tablas-de-Contenido"><xrefnodename>Tablas de Contenido</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<!-- c xx ¿secciones float-placement, float-caption? -->
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="165">\bottomfraction</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La fracción máxima de la página que se permite sea ocupada por flotantes
+en la parte inferior; el predeterminado es <samp>.3</samp>.
+</para>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="166">\floatpagefraction</indexterm>\floatpagefraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>La fracción mínima de una página flotante que deben ocupar los
+flotantes; predeterminado a <samp>.5</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="167">\floatsep</indexterm>\floatsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Espacio entre flotantes en la parte superior o inferior de una página;
+predeterminado a <samp>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="168">\intextsep</indexterm>\intextsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Espacio por encima y por debajo de un flotante en medio del texto
+principal; predeterminado a <samp>12pt plus2pt minus2pt</samp> para estilos de
+<samp>10pt</samp> y <samp>11pt</samp>, <samp>14pt plus4pt minus4pt</samp> para
+<samp>12pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="169">\textfloatsep</indexterm>\textfloatsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Espacio entre el último/primero flotante en la parte superior/inferior
+de una página; de manera predeterminada a <samp>20pt plus2pt minus4pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="170">\textfraction</indexterm>\textfraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Mínima fracción de una página que debe ser texto; si los flotantes
+ocupan mucho espacio preserva tanto texto como sea posible, para que los
+flotantes sean trasladados a una página diferente. El predeterminado es
+<samp>.2</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="171">\topfraction</indexterm>\topfraction</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Máxima fracción en la parte superior de una página que se puede ocupar
+antes de los flotantes; el predeterminado es <samp>.7</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<!-- c begin vincentb1 20160403 -->
+</section>
+<node name="filecontents" spaces=" "><nodename>filecontents</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">flushleft</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">figure</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>filecontents</code>: Crear un archivo externo</sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="172"><r>entorno</r> <code>filecontents</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="173"><code>filecontents</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="174"><r>entorno</r> <code>filecontents*</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="175"><code>filecontents*</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;filecontents&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>nombre-del-archivo</var>&rbrace;
+<var>texto</var>
+\end&lbrace;filecontents&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>o
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;filecontents*&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>nombre-del-archivo</var>&rbrace;
+<var>texto</var>
+\end&lbrace;filecontents*&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>&latex; crea un archivo llamado <var>nombre-del-archivo</var> cuyo contenido
+es <var>texto</var>. El entorno sin <code>*</code> pone comentario de cabecera ;
+ver el ejemplo más abajo. Con <code>*</code> <code>filecontents*</code> no incluye
+el comentario de cabecera.
+</para>
+<para>Este entorno puede ser utilizado en cualquier lugar en el preámbulo,
+aunque aparezca en general antes de la instrucción
+<code>\documentclass</code>. Es típicamente utilizado cuando el archivo fuente
+necesita un archivo no estándar de estilo o de clase. El entorno permite
+escribir este archivo en el repertorio que contiene este archivo y así
+de devolver el código fuente autónoma. Otra utilización es incluir
+referencia al formato <code>bib</code> en el archivo fuente, lo mismo para
+hacerlo autónomo.
+</para>
+<para>El entorno verifica si un archivo con lo mismo nombre ya existe, y si
+sí, no hace nada. Hay un paquete <file>filecontents</file> quién vuelve a
+definir el entorno <code>filecontents</code> de modo que en lugar de no hacer
+nada en este caso, sobrescribe en el archivo existente.
+</para>
+<para>Por ejemplo, este documento
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\documentclass&lbrace;article&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;filecontents&rbrace;&lbrace;JH.sty&rbrace;
+\newcommand&lbrace;\minombre&rbrace;&lbrace;Jim Hef&lbrace;&rbrace;feron&rbrace;
+\end&lbrace;filecontents&rbrace;
+\usepackage&lbrace;JH&rbrace;
+\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+Un artículo de \minombre.
+\end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>produce este archivo <file>JH.sty</file>.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">%% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
+%% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+%% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
+%%
+\newcommand&lbrace;\minombre&rbrace;&lbrace;Jim Hef&lbrace;&rbrace;feron&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+<!-- c end vincentb1 20160403 -->
+
+</section>
+<node name="flushleft" spaces=" "><nodename>flushleft</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">flushright</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">filecontents</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>flushleft</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="176"><r>entorno</r> <code>flushleft</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="177"><code>flushleft</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="90">justificar texto a la izquierda, entornos para</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="91">texto irregular a la derecha, entorno para</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;flushleft&rbrace;
+<var>línea1</var> \\
+<var>línea2</var> \\
+...
+\end&lbrace;flushleft&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="178">\\ <r>para <code>flushleft</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>El entorno <code>flushleft</code> le permite crear un párrafo consistente de
+líneas que están alineadas en el margen de la mano izquierda y no están
+justificadas a la derecha. Cada línea se debe terminar con <code>\\</code>.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\raggedright</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Forma declarativa del entorno <code>flushleft</code>.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005craggedright" spaces=" "><nodename>\raggedright</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">flushleft</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\raggedright</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="179">\raggedright</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="92">texto irregular a la derecha</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="93">justificando texto a la izquierda</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="94">justificación, alineando a la derecha</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La declaración <code>\raggedright</code> corresponde al entorno
+<code>flushleft</code>. Esta declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un
+entorno tal como <code>quote</code> o en un <code>parbox</code>.
+</para>
+<para>A diferencia del entorno <code>flushleft</code>, la instrucción
+<code>\raggedright</code> no comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta únicamente cambia
+como aplica &latex; el formato a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar
+el formato de la unidad párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe
+contener una línea en blanco o la instrucción <code>\end</code> que termina la
+unidad de párrafo.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="flushright" spaces=" "><nodename>flushright</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">itemize</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">flushleft</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>flushright</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="180"><r>entorno</r> <code>flushright</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="181"><code>flushright</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="95">texto irregular a la izquierda, entorno para</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="96">justificar texto a la derecha, entorno para</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;flushright&rbrace;
+<var>línea1</var> \\
+<var>línea2</var> \\
+...
+\end&lbrace;flushright&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="182">\\ (para <code>flushright</code>)</indexterm></findex>
+<para>El entorno <code>flushright</code> le permite crear un párrafo consistente de
+líneas que están alineadas en el margen a mano derecha e irregulares a
+la izquierda. Cada línea se debe terminar con <code>\\</code>.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\raggedleft</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Forma declarativa del entorno <code>flushright</code>.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005craggedleft" spaces=" "><nodename>\raggedleft</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">flushright</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\raggedleft</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="183">\raggedleft</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="97">texto irregular a la izquierda</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="98">justificación, irregular a la izquierda</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="99">texto justificado a la derecha</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La declaración <code>\raggedleft</code> corresponde al entorno
+<code>flushright</code>. Esta declaración se puede utilizar dentro de un
+entorno tal como <code>quote</code> o en un <code>parbox</code>.
+</para>
+<para>A diferencia del entorno <code>flushright</code>, la instrucción
+<code>\raggedleft</code> no comienza un nuevo párrafo; esta únicamente cambia
+como aplica &latex; el formato a las unidades de párrafo. Para afectar
+el formato de la unidad párrafo, el alcance de la declaración debe
+contener una línea en blanco o la instrucción <code>\end</code> que termina la
+unidad de párrafo.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="itemize" spaces=" "><nodename>itemize</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">letter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">flushright</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>itemize</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="184"><r>entorno</r> <code>itemize</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="185"><code>itemize</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="186">\item</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="100">listas de elementos</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="101">listas no ordenadas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="102">listas con viñetas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;itemize&rbrace;
+\item <var>elemento1</var>
+\item <var>elemento2</var>
+...
+\end&lbrace;itemize&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>itemize</code> produce una lista &textldquo;no ordenada&textrdquo;, &textldquo;con
+viñetas&textrdquo;. Se pueden anidar entorno itemize dentro de otros, hasta
+cuatro niveles de profundidad. También se pueden anidar en otros
+entornos que marcan párrafos, tal como <code>enumerate</code>
+(<pxref label="enumerate"><xrefnodename>enumerate</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Cada elemento de una lista <code>itemize</code> comienza con una instrucción
+<code>\item</code>. En el entorno por lo menos debe haber una instrucción
+<code>\item</code>.
+</para>
+<para>De forma predeterminada, las marcas en cada nivel tienen esta
+apariencia:
+</para>
+<enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
+<listitem spaces=" "><para>&bullet; (bala)
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para><b>-<w>-</w></b> (guión en negrita)
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>* (asterisco)
+</para></listitem><listitem spaces=" "><para>. (punto centrado, aquí representado como un punto)
+</para></listitem></enumerate>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="187">\labelitemi</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="188">\labelitemii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="189">\labelitemiii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="190">\labelitemiv</indexterm></findex>
+<para>El entorno <code>itemize</code> utiliza las instrucciones desde
+<code>\labelitemi</code> hasta <code>\labelitemiv</code> para producir la etiqueta
+predeterminada. De modo que, usted puede usar <code>\renewcommand</code> para
+cambiar las etiquetas. Por ejemplo, para que en primer nivel utilice
+diamantes:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand&lbrace;\labelitemi&rbrace;&lbrace;$\diamond$&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="191">\leftmargin</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="192">\leftmargini</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="193">\leftmarginii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="194">\leftmarginiii</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="195">\leftmarginiv</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="196">\leftmarginv</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="197">\leftmarginvi</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Los parámetros desde <code>\leftmargini</code> hasta <code>\leftmarginvi</code>
+definen la distancia entre el margen izquierdo del entorno envolvente y
+el margen izquierdo de la lista. Por convención, <code>\leftmargin</code> se
+fija al <code>\leftmargin<var>N</var></code> adecuado cuando ingresa a un nuevo
+nivel de anidamiento.
+</para>
+
+<para>El predeterminado varía desde <samp>.5em</samp> (el nivel de anidamiento
+superior) a <samp>2.5em</samp> (el primer nivel), y se reduce un poco en modo
+two-column. En este ejemplo se reduce mucho el espacio del margen para
+las listas anidadas:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setlength&lbrace;\leftmargini&rbrace;&lbrace;1.25em&rbrace; % predeterminado 2.5em
+</pre></example>
+
+<!-- c xx debe estar en su propia sección genérica -->
+<para>Algunos parámetros que afectan el formato de la lista:
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="198">\itemindent</indexterm>\itemindent</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sangrado extra antes de cada elemento de una lista; predeterminado a
+cero.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="199">\labelsep</indexterm>\labelsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Espacio entre la etiqueta y el texto de un elemento; predeterminado a
+<samp>.5em</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="200">\labelwidth</indexterm>\labelwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Ancho de la etiqueta; predeterminado a <samp>2em</samp>, o <samp>1.5em</samp> en
+modo two-column.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="201">\listparindent</indexterm>\listparindent</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Sangría extra añadida al segundo y subsecuentes párrafos, dentro de un
+elemento de la lista; predeterminado a <samp>0pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="202">\rightmargin</indexterm>\rightmargin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Distancia horizontal entre el margen derecho de la lista y el entorno
+envolvente; de manera predeterminada <samp>0pt</samp>, salbo en los entornos
+<code>quote</code>, <code>quotation</code> y <code>verse</code>, donde se hace igual a
+<code>\leftmargin</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>Parámetros que afectan el espaciamiento vertical entre elementos de la
+lista (más bien libre, de manera predeterminada).
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="203">\itemsep</indexterm>\itemsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Espacio vertical entre elementos. El predeterminado es <code>2pt
+plus1pt minus1pt</code> para <code>10pt</code> documentos, <code>3pt plus2pt
+minus1pt</code> para <code>11pt</code> y <code>4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt</code> para
+<code>12pt</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="204">\parsep</indexterm>\parsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Espacio vertical extra entre párrafos dentro de un elemento de la lista.
+Los predeterminados son los mismos que para <code>\itemsep</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="205">\topsep</indexterm>\topsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Espacio vertical entre el primer elemento y el párrafo anterior.
+</para>
+<para>Para listas de nivel superior, el predeterminado es
+<code>8pt plus2pt minus4pt</code> para <code>10pt</code> documentos,
+<code>9pt plus3pt minus5pt</code> para <code>11pt</code> y
+<code>10pt plus4pt minus6pt</code> para <code>12pt</code>. Estos se reducen
+en listas anidadas.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="206">\partopsep</indexterm>\partopsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Espacio extra añadido a <code>\topsep</code> cuando el entorno lista comienza
+un párrafo. El valor predeterminado es <code>2pt plus1pt minus1pt</code> para
+<code>10pt</code> documentos, <code>3pt plus1pt minus1pt</code> para <code>11pt</code> y
+<code>3pt plus2pt minus2pt</code> para <code>12pt</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="207"><r>ejemplo</r> \parskip</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Sobre todo para listas con elementos cortos, puede ser conveniente
+eludir los espacios entre ellos. He aquí un ejemplo de una definición
+del entorno <code>itemize*</code> sin espacio extra entre elementos o entre
+párrafos dentro de un solo elemento (<code>\parskip</code> no es específico de
+la lista, <pxref label="_005cparskip"><xrefnodename>\parskip</xrefnodename></pxref>):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newenvironment&lbrace;itemize*&rbrace;%
+ &lbrace;\begin&lbrace;itemize&rbrace;%
+ \setlength&lbrace;\itemsep&rbrace;&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;%
+ \setlength&lbrace;\parsep&rbrace;&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;&rbrace;%
+ \setlength&lbrace;\parskip&rbrace;&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;&rbrace;%
+ &lbrace;\end&lbrace;itemize&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="letter" spaces=" "><nodename>letter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">list</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">itemize</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Entorno <code>letter</code>: Escribiendo Cartas</sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="208"><r>entorno</r> <code>letter</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="209"><code>letter</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Este entorno se utiliza para crear cartas. <xref label="Cartas"><xrefnodename>Cartas</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="list" spaces=" "><nodename>list</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">math</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">letter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>list</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="210"><r>entorno</r> <code>list</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="211"><code>list</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="103">listas de elementos, genéricas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>list</code> es un entorno genérico que se utiliza para
+definir mucho de los entornos más específicos. Este rara vez se utiliza
+en documentos, pero a muy menudo en las macros.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;list&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>etiquetado</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>espaciado</var>&rbrace;
+\item <var>elemento1</var>
+\item <var>elemento2</var>
+...
+\end&lbrace;list&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El argumento obligatorio <var>etiquetado</var> especifica como se deben
+etiquetar los elementos (a menos que se especifique el argumento
+opcional <code>\item</code>). Este argumento es una pieza de texto que se
+inserta en una caja para formar la etiqueta. Este se puede y suele
+contener otras instrucciones &latex;.
+</para>
+<para>El argumento obligatorio <var>spacing</var> contiene instrucciones para
+cambiar los parámetros de espaciado para la lista. Este argumento por
+lo regular está vacío, es decir, <code>&lbrace;&rbrace;</code>, lo cual deja el espaciado
+predeterminado.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="math" spaces=" "><nodename>math</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">minipage</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">list</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>math</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="212"><r>entorno</r> <code>math</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="213"><code>math</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="104">fórmulas en línea</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;math&rbrace;
+<var>fórmula-matemática</var>
+\end&lbrace;math&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>math</code> inserta la fórmula <var>math</var> dada dentro del
+texto actual. <code>\(...\))</code> y <code>$...$</code> son sinónimos.
+<xref label="F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas"><xrefnodename>Fórmulas Matemáticas</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="minipage" spaces=" "><nodename>minipage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">picture</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">math</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>minipage</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="214"><r>entorno</r> <code>minipage</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="215"><code>minipage</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="105">minipage, creando una</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;[<var>posición</var>][<var>alto</var>][<var>pos-interna</var>]&lbrace;<var>ancho</var>&rbrace;
+<var>texto</var>
+\end&lbrace;minipage&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>minipage</code> compone tipográficamente su cuerpo de
+<var>texto</var> en un bloque que no debe abarcar varias páginas. Este es
+similar a la instrucción <code>\parbox</code> (<pxref label="_005cparbox"><xrefnodename>\parbox</xrefnodename></pxref>), pero a
+diferencia de <code>\parbox</code>, se pueden utilizar otros entornos de
+marcado de párrafos dentro de una minipágina.
+</para>
+<!-- c (xxref posiciones) -->
+<para>Los argumentos son los mismos que para <code>\parbox</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cparbox"><xrefnodename>\parbox</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="106">sangría de párrafos, en minipage</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="107">sangría de párrafos, en minipage</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="216">\parindent</indexterm></findex>
+<para>De forma predeterminada, en el entorno <code>minipage</code> los párrafos no
+tienen sangría. Usted puede restablecer la sangría con una instrucción
+tal como <code>\setlength&lbrace;\parindent&rbrace;&lbrace;1pc&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="108">notas al pie en figuras</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="109">figuras, en notas al pie</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>La notas al pie en un entorno <code>minipage</code> son manipuladas de una
+manera que es especialmente útil para poner notas en figuras o tablas.
+Una instrucción <code>\footnote</code> o <code>\footnotetext</code> coloca la nota
+al pie en la parte inferior de la minipágina en lugar de en la parte
+inferior de la página, y esta utiliza el contador <code>\mpfootnote</code> en
+lugar del contador normal <code>footnote</code> (<pxref label="Contadores"><xrefnodename>Contadores</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>No obstante, no ponga una minipágina dentro de otra si usted está usando
+notas al pie; estas pueden terminar mal en la parte inferior de la
+minipágina.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="picture" spaces=" "><nodename>picture</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">quotation</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">minipage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>picture</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="217"><r>entorno</r> <code>picture</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="218"><code>picture</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="110">creando imágenes</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="111">imágenes, creando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(ancho,alto)(desplazamiento x,desplazamiento y)
+&dots; <var>instrucciones de imagen</var> &dots;
+\end&lbrace;picture&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="219">\unitlength</indexterm></findex>
+<para>El entorno <code>picture</code> le permite crear casi cualquier clase de
+imagen que desee que contenga su texto, lineas, flechas y círculos.
+Usted le dice a &latex; dónde colocar las cosas en la imagen
+especificando sus coordenadas. Una coordenada es un número que puede
+tener un punto decimal y un signo menos &textmdash; un número como <code>5</code>,
+<code>0.3</code> o <code>-3.1416</code>. Una coordenada especifica una longitud en
+múltiplos de la unidad de longitud <code>\unitlength</code>, por lo que si
+<code>\unitlength</code> se ha establecido en <code>1cm</code>, entonces la
+coordenada 2.54 especifica una longitud de 2.54 centímetros. Sólo debe
+cambiar el valor de <code>\unitlength</code>, utilizando la instrucción
+<code>\setlength</code>, fuera del entorno <code>picture</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Una posición es un par de coordenadas, por ejemplo, <code>(2.4, -5)</code>,
+que especifican el punto con coordenada x <code>2.4</code> y coordenada y
+<code>-5</code>. Las coordenadas se especifican en la forma habitual con
+respecto a un origen, que normalmente está en la esquina inferior
+izquierda de la imagen. Tenga en cuenta que cuando una posición se
+presenta como un argumento, no se encierra entre llaves; los paréntesis
+sirven para delimitar el argumento.
+</para>
+<para>El entorno <code>picture</code> tiene un argumento obligatorio, el cual es una
+<code>posición</code>. este especifica el tamaño de la imagen. El entorno
+produce una caja rectangular con la anchura y altura determinada por los
+argumentos de las coordenadas x e y.
+</para>
+<para>El entorno <code>picture</code> también tiene un argumento opcional
+<code>posición</code>, seguido del argumento <code>tamaño</code>, que puede cambiar
+el origen. (A diferencia de los argumentos opcionales, este argumento
+no está contenido entre corchetes). El argumento opcional proporciona
+las coordenadas del punto en la esquina inferior izquierda de la imagen
+(con el cual se determina el origen). Por ejemplo, si
+<code>\unitlength</code> se ha fijado a <code>1mm</code>, la instrucción
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;picture&rbrace;(100,200)(10,20)
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>produce una imagen de 100 milímetros de ancho y 200 milímetros de
+altura, cuya esquina inferior izquierda está en el punto (10,20) y cuya
+esquina superior derecha está en el punto (110,220). La primera vez que
+haga un dibujo, normalmente se omite el argumento opcional, dejando el
+origen en el ángulo inferior izquierdo. Si a continuación desea
+modificar su imagen, trasladando todo, basta con añadir el argumento
+opcional apropiado.
+</para>
+<para>El argumento obligatorio del entorno determina el tamaño nominal de la
+imagen. Esta no necesita tener ninguna relación con el tamaño de la
+imagen real; Felizmente &latex; le permitirá poner cosas fuera de la
+imagen, o incluso fuera de la página. El tamaño nominal de la imagen lo
+utiliza &latex; para determinar cuánto espacio dejar para ello.
+</para>
+<para>Todo lo que aparece en una imagen es dibujado por la instrucción
+<code>\put</code>. La instrucción
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\put (11.3,-.3)&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>coloca el objeto especificado por <code>...</code> en la imagen, con su punto
+de referencia en las coordenadas <math>(11.3, -.3)</math>. Los puntos de
+referencia para distintos objetos se describen a continuación.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="220">caja lR</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\put</code> crea una <dfn>caja LR</dfn>. Puede poner
+cualquier cosa que vaya en una <code>\mbox</code> (<pxref label="_005cmbox"><xrefnodename>\mbox</xrefnodename></pxref>) en el
+argumento texto de la instrucción <code>\put</code>. Al hacer esto, el punto
+de referencia será la esquina inferior izquierda de la caja.
+</para>
+<para>Las instrucciones para <code>picture</code> están descritas en las siguientes
+secciones.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\circle</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Dibuja un círculo.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\makebox (picture)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Dibuja un cuadro del tamaño especificado.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\framebox (picture)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Dibuja una caja rodeada con un marco.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\dashbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Dibuja un cuadro de líneas discontinuas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\frame</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Dibuja un marco alrededor de un objeto.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\line</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Dibuja una línea recta.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\linethickness</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Ajusta el grosor de la línea.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\thicklines</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Una línea de espesor más grueso.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\thinlines</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">El grosor de la línea predeterminado.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\multiput</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Dibuja varias instancias de un objeto.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\oval</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Dibuja una elipse.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\put</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Coloca un objeto en un determinado lugar.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\shortstack</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Hace un montón de objetos.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\vector</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Dibuja una línea con una flecha.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005ccircle" spaces=" "><nodename>\circle</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\makebox (picture)</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\circle</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="221">\circle</indexterm></findex>
+
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\circle[*]&lbrace;<var>diámetro</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\circle</code> produce un círculo con un diámetro lo más
+cercano posible al especificado. La forma con <code>*</code> de la
+instrucción dibuja un círculo sólido.
+</para>
+<para>Se pueden dibujar círculos de hasta 40 pt.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029" spaces=" "><nodename>\makebox (picture)</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\framebox (picture)</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\circle</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\makebox</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="222">\makebox (<code>picture</code>)</indexterm></findex>
+
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makebox(<var>ancho</var>,<var>alto</var>)[<var>posición</var>]&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\makebox</code> para el entorno <code>picture</code> es similar a la
+instrucción normal <code>\makebox</code> excepto que usted debe especificar el
+<var>ancho</var> y <var>alto</var> en múltiplos de <code>\unitlength</code>.
+</para>
+<para>El argumento opcional, <code>[<var>posición</var>]</code>, especifica el cuadrante en el
+que debe aparecer el <var>texto</var>. Usted puede seleccionar hasta dos de los
+siguientes:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Mueve el elemento a la parte superior del rectángulo.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Mueve el elemento a la parte inferior.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Mueve el elemento a la izquierda.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Mueve el elemento hacia la derecha.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para><xref label="_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\makebox</xrefnodename></xref>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029" spaces=" "><nodename>\framebox (picture)</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\dashbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\makebox (picture)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\framebox</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="223">\framebox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\framebox(<var>ancho</var>,<var>alto</var>)[<var>posición</var>]&lbrace;...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\framebox</code> es como <code>\makebox</code> (vea la sección
+anterior), excepto que esta coloca un marco en el exterior alrededor de
+la caja que crea.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="224">\fboxrule</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="225">\fboxsep</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\framebox</code> produce una regla de espesor
+<code>\fboxrule</code>, y deja un espacio <code>\fboxsep</code> entre la regla y el
+contenido de la caja.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cdashbox" spaces=" "><nodename>\dashbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\frame</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\framebox (picture)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\dashbox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="226">\dashbox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Dibuja un cuadro con una línea discontinua. Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\dashbox&lbrace;<var>glargo</var>&rbrace;(<var>rancho</var>,<var>ralto</var>)[<var>posición</var>]&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para><code>\dashbox</code> crea un rectángulo discontinuo alrededor del <var>texto</var>
+en un entorno <code>picture</code>. Los guiones son de <var>glargo</var> unidades
+de largo, y el rectángulo tiene una anchura total de <var>rancho</var> y una
+altura de <var>ralto</var>. El <var>texto</var> es posicionado en la
+<var>posición</var> opcional. <!-- c xx ref a posiciones. -->
+</para>
+<para>Un cuadro de líneas discontinuas se ve mejor cuando <var>rancho</var> y
+<var>ralto</var> son múltiplos de <var>glargo</var>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cframe" spaces=" "><nodename>\frame</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\line</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\dashbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\frame</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="227">\frame</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\frame&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\frame</code> coloca un marco rectangular alrededor de
+<var>texto</var>. El punto de referencia es la esquina inferior izquierda
+del marco. No añade espacio extra entre el marco y el objeto.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cline" spaces=" "><nodename>\line</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\linethickness</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\frame</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\line</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="228">\line</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\line(<var>declivex</var>,<var>declivey</var>)&lbrace;<var>longitud</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\line</code> dibuja una línea con la <var>longitud</var> dada
+y declive <var>declivex</var>/<var>declivey</var>.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; estándar únicamente puede dibujar líneas con
+<math><var>declive</var> = x/y</math>, donde <math>x</math> y <math>y</math> tienen valores
+enteros desde &minus;6 hasta&nbsp;6. Para líneas de cualquier declive,
+por no hablar de otras formas, vea el paquete <code>curve2e</code> y muchos,
+muchos otros paquetes en CTAN.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005clinethickness" spaces=" "><nodename>\linethickness</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thicklines</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\line</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\linethickness</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="229">\linethickness</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\linethickness&lbrace;<var>espesor</var>&rbrace;</code> declara el grosor
+de las líneas horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture para que
+sean de <var>espesor</var>, el cual debe ser una longitud positiva.
+</para>
+<para><code>\linethickness</code> no afecta el espesor de las líneas inclinadas,
+círculos o los cuartos de círculo dibujados por <code>\oval</code>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cthicklines" spaces=" "><nodename>\thicklines</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thinlines</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\linethickness</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thicklines</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="230">\thicklines</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\thicklines</code> es un espesor de línea alternativo
+para líneas horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture;
+compárese&nbsp;<ref label="_005clinethickness"><xrefnodename>\linethickness</xrefnodename></ref> y <ref label="_005cthinlines"><xrefnodename>\thinlines</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cthinlines" spaces=" "><nodename>\thinlines</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\multiput</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\thicklines</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thinlines</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="231">\thinlines</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\thinlines</code> es el espesor de línea predeterminado
+para líneas horizontales y verticales en un entorno picture;
+compárese&nbsp;<ref label="_005clinethickness"><xrefnodename>\linethickness</xrefnodename></ref> y <ref label="_005cthicklines"><xrefnodename>\thicklines</xrefnodename></ref>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cmultiput" spaces=" "><nodename>\multiput</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\oval</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\thinlines</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\multiput</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="232">\multiput</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para><example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\multiput(<var>x</var>,<var>y</var>)(<var>delta_x</var>,<var>delta_y</var>)&lbrace;<var>n</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>obj</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\multiput</code> copia el objeto <var>obj</var> en un patrón
+regular entre imágenes. primero se coloca <var>obj</var> en la posición
+<math>(x,y)</math>, luego en la posición <math>(x+\delta x,y+\delta y)</math> y así
+sucesivamente, <var>n</var> veces.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005coval" spaces=" "><nodename>\oval</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\put</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\multiput</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\oval</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="233">\oval</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\oval(<var>ancho</var>,<var>alto</var>)[<var>porción</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\oval</code> produce un rectángulo con esquinas
+redondeadas. El argumento opcional <var>porción</var> le permite seleccionar
+la parte del óvalo vía las siguientes letras:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>selecciona la parte superior;
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>selecciona la parte inferior;
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>selecciona la parte derecha;
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>selecciona la parte izquierda.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Las &textldquo;esquinas&textrdquo; del óvalo se hacen con cuartos de círculo con un radio
+máximo de 20<dmn>pt</dmn>, por lo tanto los &textldquo;óvalos&textrdquo; grandes se parecen más
+a cajas con esquinas redondeadas.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cput" spaces=" "><nodename>\put</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\shortstack</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\oval</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\put</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="234">\put</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para><code>\put(<var>xcoord</var>,<var>ycoord</var>)&lbrace; ... &rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\put</code> coloca el elemento especificado por el
+argumento obligatorio en las coordenadas <var>xcoord</var> e
+<var>ycoord</var> proporcionadas.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cshortstack" spaces=" "><nodename>\shortstack</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vector</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\put</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\shortstack</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="235">\shortstack</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\shortstack[<var>posición</var>]&lbrace;...\\...\\...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\shortstack</code> produce un montón de objetos. Las
+posiciones válidas son:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Mueve los objetos a la derecha de la pila.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Mueve los objetos a la izquierda de la pila
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Mueve los objetos hacia el centro de la pila (predeterminado)
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="236">\\ <r>(para objetos <code>\shortstack</code>)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Los objetos son separados con <code>\\</code>.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cvector" spaces=" "><nodename>\vector</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\shortstack</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">picture</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vector</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="237">\vector</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<!-- c vincentb1 20140824 please replace @comma{} by , when accepting @vincentb macro -->
+<!-- c vincentb1, also @backslashchar{} can be replaced by \ -->
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">&backslashchar;vector(<var>declivex</var>&comma;<var>declivey</var>)&lbrace;<var>longitud</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\vector</code> dibuja una línea con una flecha de la
+longitud y declive especificados. Los valores
+<math><var>declivex</var></math> i <math><var>declivey</var></math> deben
+estar entre &minus;4 y +4 incluido.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="quotation" spaces=" "><nodename>quotation</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">quote</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">picture</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>quotation</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="238"><r>entorno</r> <code>quotation</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="239"><code>quotation</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="112">texto citado con sangría de párrafo, mostrando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="113">mostrando texto citado con sangría de párrafo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="114">sangrías de párrafo en texto citado</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;quotation&rbrace;
+<var>texto</var>
+\end&lbrace;quotation&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>A los márgenes del entorno <code>quotation</code> se les aplica una sangría en
+ambos lados izquierdo y derecho. El texto está justificado en ambos
+márgenes. Dejar una línea en blanco entre el texto produce un nuevo
+párrafo.
+</para>
+<para>A diferencia del entorno <code>quote</code>, cada párrafo normalmente tiene
+sangría.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="quote" spaces=" "><nodename>quote</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">tabbing</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">quotation</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>quote</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="240"><r>entorno</r> <code>quote</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="241"><code>quote</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="115">texto citado sin sangría de párrafo, mostrando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="116">mostrando texto citado sin sangría de párrafo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="117">sangrías de párrafo en texto citado, omitiendo</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;quote&rbrace;
+<var>texto</var>
+\end&lbrace;quote&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>A los márgenes del entorno <code>quote</code> se les aplica una sangría en
+ambos lados izquierdo y derecho. El texto está justificado en ambos
+márgenes. Dejar una línea en blanco entre el texto produce un nuevo
+párrafo.
+</para>
+<para>A diferencia del entorno <code>quotation</code>, a los párrafos no se les
+aplica una sangría.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="tabbing" spaces=" "><nodename>tabbing</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">table</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">quote</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>tabbing</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="242"><r>entorno</r> <code>tabbing</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="243"><code>tabbing</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="118">tabulaciones, utilizando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="119">alineando texto en columnas con tabulaciones</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="120">alineando a través de tabulación</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;
+<var>fila1col1</var> \= <var>fila1col2</var> \= <var>fila1col3</var> \= <var>fila1col4</var> \\
+<var>fila2col1</var> \&gt; \&gt; <var>fila2col3</var> \\
+...
+\end&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>tabbing</code> proporciona una manera de alinear el texto en
+columnas. Funciona mediante el establecimiento de tabuladores y
+tabulación tanto como si se hubiera hecho en una máquina de escribir
+común. Es el más adecuado para los casos en que el ancho de cada
+columna es constante y conocido de antemano.
+</para>
+<para>Este entorno se puede dividir en varias páginas, a diferencia del
+entorno <code>tabular</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Las siguientes instrucciones se pueden utilizar dentro de un entorno
+<code>tabbing</code>:
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="244">\\ <r>tabbing</r></indexterm>\\ <r>tabbing</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Final de línea.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="245">\= <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\= <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Establece una tabulación en la posición actual.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="246">\&gt; <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\&gt; <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="247">\&gt;</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Avanza a la siguiente tabulación.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="248">\&lt;</indexterm>\&lt;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Coloca el siguiente texto a la izquierda del margen local (sin necesidad
+de cambiar el margen). Sólo se puede usar al comienzo de la línea.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="249">\+</indexterm>\+</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Mueve hacia la derecha el margen izquierdo del siguiente y todas las
+subsecuentes instrucciones de tabulación, empezando la línea de
+tabulación, de ser necesario.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="250">\-</indexterm>\-</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Mueve el margen izquierdo hacia la izquierda de la siguiente y todas las
+subsecuentes instrucciones de tabulación, comenzando con la línea de
+tabulación si es necesario.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="251">\' <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\' <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Mueve todo lo que ha escrito hasta ahora en la columna actual, es decir,
+cualquier cosa desde la instrucción <code>\&gt;</code>, <code>\&lt;</code>, <code>\'</code>,
+<code>\\</code> o <code>\kill</code> más reciente, a la derecha de la columna
+anterior, a ras de la tabulación de la columna actual.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="252">\` <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\` <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Permite poner texto alineado a la derecha contra cualquier tabulación,
+incluyendo la tabulación&nbsp;0. Sin embargo, no puede mover el texto a
+la derecha de la última columna porque allí no hay tabulación. La
+instrucción <code>\`</code> mueve todo el texto que le sigue, hasta la
+instrucción <code>\\</code> o <code>\end&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;</code> que termina la línea, al
+margen derecho del entorno tabbing. No debe haber instrucción <code>\&gt;</code>
+o <code>\'</code> entre el <code>\`</code> y la instrucción que termina la línea.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="253">\a <r>(tabbing)</r></indexterm>\a <r>(tabbing)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="254">\a' <r>(acento agudo en tabulación)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="255">\a` <r>(acento grave en tabulación)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="256">\a= <r>(acento macrón en tabbing)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>En un entorno <code>tabbing</code>, las instrucciones <code>\=</code>, <code>\'</code> y
+<code>\`</code> no producen acentos en la manera usual (<pxref label="Acentos"><xrefnodename>Acentos</xrefnodename></pxref>). En
+su lugar, se utilizan estas instrucciones <code>\a=</code>, <code>\a'</code> y
+<code>\a`</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="257">\kill</indexterm>\kill</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Fija una tabulación sin producir texto. Trabaja igual que <code>\\</code>
+salvo que esta desecha la línea actual en lugar de producir algo útil.
+El efecto de cualquier instrucción <code>\=</code>, <code>\+</code> o <code>\-</code> en
+esa línea seguirá en vigor.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="258">\poptabs</indexterm>\poptabs</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="259">\poptabs</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Restaura las posiciones de tabulación salvadas por la última
+<code>\pushtabs</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="260">\pushtabs</indexterm>\pushtabs</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Guarda todas las posiciones de tabulación actuales. Útil para cambiar
+temporalmente las posiciones de tabulación en medio de un entorno
+<code>tabbing</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="261">\tabbingsep</indexterm>\tabbingsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Distancia a la izquierda de la tabulación movida por <code>\'</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>En este ejemplo se compone tipográficamente una función de Pascal en el
+formato tradicional:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;
+function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \&gt; begin \= \+ \\
+ \&gt; if \= n $&gt;$ 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+\end&lbrace;tabbing&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="table" spaces=" "><nodename>table</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">tabular</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">tabbing</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>table</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="262"><r>entorno</r> <code>table</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="263"><code>table</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="121">tablas, creando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="122">creando tablas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"> \begin&lbrace;table&rbrace;[ubicación]
+
+ cuerpo de la tabla
+
+ \caption&lbrace;título de la tabla&rbrace;
+ \end&lbrace;table&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Las tablas son objetos que no forman parte del texto normal, y por lo
+general &textldquo;flotan&textrdquo; a un lugar conveniente, como la parte superior de una
+página. Las tablas no se dividen en dos páginas.
+</para>
+<para>El argumento opcional <code>[ubicación]</code> determina dónde &latex; trata
+de colocar su tabla. Hay cuatro lugares donde &latex;, posiblemente,
+pueda colocar un flotante:; estos son los mismo que los utilizados con
+el entorno <code>figure</code>, y se describen allí (<pxref label="figure"><xrefnodename>figure</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Las clases <code>report</code> y <code>article</code> estándar utilizan la ubicación
+<code>[tbp]</code> predeterminada.
+</para>
+<para>El cuerpo de la tabla se compone de cualquier texto, instrucciones
+&latex;, etc., que usted desee. La instrucción <code>\caption</code> le
+permite colocar un título a su tabla.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="tabular" spaces=" "><nodename>tabular</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">thebibliography</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">table</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>tabular</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="264"><r>entorno</r> <code>tabular</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="265"><code>tabular</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="123">líneas en tablas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="124">alineando texto en tablas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;[ubicación]&lbrace;columnas&rbrace;
+columna 1 entrada &amp; columna 2 entrada ... &amp; columna n entrada n \\
+...
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>o
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular*&rbrace;&lbrace;ancho&rbrace;[posición]&lbrace;columnas&rbrace;
+columna 1 entrada &amp; columna 2 entrada ... &amp; columna n entrada n \\
+...
+\end&lbrace;tabular*&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Estos entornos producen una caja consiste de una secuencia de filas de
+elementos, alineadas verticalmente en columnas.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="266">\\ <r>para <code>tabular</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Se debe utilizar <code>\\</code> para especificar el final de cada fila de la
+tabla, salvo por la última, en que esta es opcional &textmdash;a menos que le
+siga una instrucción <code>\hline</code> (para colocar una raya bajo la
+tabla).
+</para>
+<para>Los argumentos obligatorios y opcionales consisten de:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">ancho</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Especifica la anchura del entorno <code>tabular*</code>. Este debe tener
+espacio entre las columnas que se puede estirar para llenar el ancho
+especificado.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">posición</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Especifica la posición vertical; de manera predeterminada
+alinea al centro el entorno.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>alineado en la fila superior
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>alineado en la fila inferior
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">columnas</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Especifica el formato de columna. Este consiste en una secuencia de los
+siguientes especificadores, correspondientes a la secuencia de columnas
+y el material intercolumna.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Una columna de elementos alineados a la izquierda.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Una columna de elementos alineados a la derecha.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Una columna de elementos centrados.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">|</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Una línea vertical que llena la altura y profundidad total del entorno.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">&arobase;&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Esta inserta <var>texto</var> en cada fila. Una &arobase;-expresión suprime el
+espacio intercolumnas insertado normalmente entre columnas; cualquier
+espacio deseado entre el texto insertado y los elementos adyacentes se
+deberá incluir en <var>texto</var>. Una instrucción
+<code>\extracolsep&lbrace;ancho&rbrace;</code> en una &arobase;-expresión provoca que aparezca un
+espacio extra de ancho <code>ancho</code> a la izquierda de todas las columnas
+subsecuentes, hasta que se anule por otra instrucción
+<code>\extracolsep</code>. A diferencia del espacio intercolumna ordinario,
+este espacio adicional no se suprime por una &arobase;-expresión. Una
+instrucción <code>\extracolsep</code> únicamente se pude utilizar en una
+&arobase;-expresión en el argumento <code>columnas</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">p&lbrace;<var>ancho</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Produce una columna con cada elemento compuesto tipográficamente en una
+parbox de ancho <var>ancho</var>, como si fuera el argumento de una
+instrucción <code>\parbox[t]&lbrace;<var>ancho</var>&rbrace;</code>. Sin embargo, una
+<code>\\</code> en el elemento no puede, salvo en las siguientes situaciones:
+</para>
+<enumerate first="1" endspaces=" ">
+<listitem>
+<para>Dentro de un entorno como <code>minipage</code>, <code>array</code> o
+<code>tabular</code>.
+</para></listitem><listitem>
+<para>Dentro de una <code>\parbox</code> explícita.
+</para></listitem><listitem>
+<para>En el alcance de una declaración <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>
+o <code>\raggedleft</code>. La última declaración debe aparecer dentro de
+llaves o un entorno cuando se utiliza en un elemento <code>p</code>-columna.
+</para></listitem></enumerate>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">*&lbrace;<var>número</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>columnas</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Equivalente a <var>número</var> de copias de <var>columnas</var>, donde
+<var>número</var> es un entero positivo y <var>columnas</var> es cualquier lista
+de especificadores de columna, la cual puede contener otra
+<code>*-expresión</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Parámetros que controlan el formato:
+<!-- c xx predeterminado, ¿en su propio nodo (xref desde array)? -->
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="267">\arrayrulewidth</indexterm>\arrayrulewidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El espesor de la línea creada por <code>|</code>, <code>\hline</code> y
+<code>\vline</code> en los entornos <code>tabular</code> y <code>array</code>; el
+predeterminado es <samp>.4pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="268">\arraystretch</indexterm>\arraystretch</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El factor para escalar el espaciado entre hileras en los entornos
+<code>tabular</code> y <code>array</code>; el predeterminado es <samp>1</samp>, para no
+escalar.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="269">\doublerulesep</indexterm>\doublerulesep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Distancia horizontal entre las líneas verticles producidas por <code>||</code>
+en los entornos <code>tabular</code> y <code>array</code>; el predeterminado es
+<samp>2pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="270">\tabcolsep</indexterm>\tabcolsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>La mitad de la anchura del espacio entre las columnas; el predeterminado
+es <samp>6pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+<para>Estas instrucciones se pueden utilizar en el interior de un entorno
+<code>tabular</code>:
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\multicolumn</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Hace que un elemento abarque varias columnas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\cline</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Dibuja una línea horizontal que abarca algunas columnas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\hline</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Dibuja una línea horizontal que abarca todas las columnas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\vline</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Dibuja una línea vertical.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cmulticolumn" spaces=" "><nodename>\multicolumn</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\cline</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">tabular</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\multicolumn</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="271">\multicolumn</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para><example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\multicolumn&lbrace;<var>columnas</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>posición</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\multicolumn</code> provoca que una entrada se extienda
+por varias columnas. El primer argumento obligatorio, <var>columnas</var>,
+especifica es el número de columnas por abarcar. El segundo argumento
+obligatorio, <var>posición</var>, especifica el formato de la entrada;
+<code>c</code> para centrado, <code>l</code> para alineado a la izquierda, <code>r</code>
+para alineado a la derecha. El tercer argumento obligatorio,
+<var>texto</var>, especifica el texto a colocar en la entrada.
+</para>
+<para>He aquí un ejemplo que muestra dos columnas separadas por un doble
+guión; <code>\multicolumn</code> se utiliza para el encabezado:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;&lbrace;r&arobase;&lbrace;--&rbrace;l&rbrace;
+\multicolumn&lbrace;2&rbrace;&lbrace;c&rbrace;&lbrace;\bf Unicode&rbrace;\cr
+ 0x80&amp;0x7FF \cr
+ 0x800&amp;0xFFFF \cr
+0x10000&amp;0x1FFFF \cr
+\end&lbrace;tabular&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005ccline" spaces=" "><nodename>\cline</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hline</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\multicolumn</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">tabular</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\cline</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="272">\cline</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\cline&lbrace;<var>i</var>-<var>j</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\cline</code> dibuja un línea horizontal a través de las
+columnas especificadas, comenzando en la colúmna <var>i</var> y terminando en
+la columna <var>j</var>, que son especificadas en el argumento obligatorio.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005chline" spaces=" "><nodename>\hline</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vline</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\cline</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">tabular</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hline</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="273">\hline</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\hline</code> dibuja una línea horizontal del ancho del
+entorno <code>tabular</code> o <code>array</code> especificado. Se utiliza
+comúnmente para para dibujar una línea en la parte superior, inferior y
+entre filas de la tabla.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cvline" spaces=" "><nodename>\vline</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\hline</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">tabular</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vline</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="274">\vline</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\vline</code> dibuja una línea vertical extendida a la
+altura y profundidad total de su fila. Una instrucción <code>\hfill</code> se
+puede utilizar para mover la línea hasta el borde de la columna.
+También se puede utilizar en una &arobase;-expresión.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="thebibliography" spaces=" "><nodename>thebibliography</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">theorem</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">tabular</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>thebibliography</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="275"><r>entorno</r> <code>thebibliography</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="276"><code>thebibliography</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="125">bibliografía, creando (manualmente)</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;thebibliography&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>etiqueta-más-amplia</var>&rbrace;
+\bibitem[<var>etiqueta</var>]&lbrace;<var>clave-de-cita&rbrace;</var>
+...
+\end&lbrace;thebibliography&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>thebibliography</code> produce una bibliografía o lista de
+referencia.
+</para>
+<para>En las clase <code>article</code>, esta lista de referencia es etiquetada como
+&textldquo;Referencias&textrdquo;; en la clase <code>report</code>, esta es etiquetada como
+&textldquo;Bibliografía&textrdquo;. Usted puede cambiar la etiqueta (en las clases
+estándar) redefiniendo la instrucción <code>\refname</code>. Por ejemplo, la
+siguiente instrucción la elimina por completo:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand&lbrace;\refname&rbrace;&lbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El argumento obligatorio <var>etiqueta-más-amplia</var> es texto que, al
+momento de componerla tipográficamente, es tan ancho como la etiqueta
+producida por la instrucción <code>\bibitem</code>. Se suele dar como
+<code>9</code> para bibliografías de menos de 10 referencias, <code>99</code> para
+las que tienen menos de 100, etc.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\bibitem</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Especifica un elemento de la bibliografía.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\cite</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Hace referencia a un elemento bibliográfico.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\nocite</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Incluye un elemento en la bibliografía.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Usando BibTeX</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Generando bibliografías automáticamente.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cbibitem" spaces=" "><nodename>\bibitem</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\cite</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\bibitem</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="277">\bibitem</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para><example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\bibitem[<var>etiqueta</var>]&lbrace;<var>clave-de-cita</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\bibitem</code> genera una entrada etiquetada por
+<var>etiqueta</var>. Si se omite el argumento <var>etiqueta</var>,
+automáticamente se genera un número utilizando el contador <code>enumi</code>.
+La <var>clave-de-cita</var> es cualquier secuencia de letras, números y
+signos de puntuación que no contenga una coma.
+</para>
+<para>Esta instrucción escribe una entrada al archivo <file>.aux</file> que contiene
+los elementos <var>clave-de-cita</var> y etiqueta. Cuando la instrucción
+<code>\begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;</code> lee el archivo <file>.aux</file>, los elementos
+<code>etiqueta</code> son asociados con <code>clave-de-cita</code>, produciendo
+referencias a <var>clave-de-cita</var> con una instrucción <code>\cite</code> (vea
+la siguiente sección) para producir la etiqueta asociada.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005ccite" spaces=" "><nodename>\cite</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\nocite</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\bibitem</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\cite</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="278">\cite</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\cite[<var>subcita</var>]&lbrace;<var>claves</var>
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El argumento <var>claves</var> es una lista de una o más claves de cita,
+separadas por comas. Esta instrucción genera una cita en el texto para
+referencias asociadas con <var>claves</var> por medio de entradas en el
+archivo <file>.aux</file>.
+</para>
+<para>El argumento de texti opcional <var>subcita</var> aparece después de la cita.
+Por ejemplo, <code>\cite[p.~314]&lbrace;knuth&rbrace;</code> podría producir &textlsquo;[Knuth,
+p.&nbsp;314]&textrsquo;.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005cnocite" spaces=" "><nodename>\nocite</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Usando BibTeX</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\cite</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\nocite</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="279">\nocite</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para><code>\nocite&lbrace;lista-de-claves&rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\nocite</code> no produce texto, pero escribe en el archivo
+<file>.aux</file> la <code>lista-de-claves</code>, que es una lista de una o más
+etiquetas de cita.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="Usando-BibTeX" spaces=" "><nodename>Usando BibTeX</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\nocite</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Usando Bib&tex;</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="126">usando Bib&tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="127">bib&tex;, usando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="128">bibliografía, creando (automáticamente)</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="280">\bibliographystyle</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="281">\bibliography</indexterm></findex>
+
+
+<para>Si usted utiliza el programa Bib&tex; escrito por Oren Patashnik
+(altamente recomendable si necesita una bibliografía de más de un par de
+títulos) para mantener su bibliografía, no utilice el entorno
+<code>thebibliography</code> (<pxref label="thebibliography"><xrefnodename>thebibliography</xrefnodename></pxref>). En su lugar, incluya
+las líneas
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\bibliographystyle&lbrace;<var>estilo-de-bibliografía</var>&rbrace;
+\bibliography&lbrace;<var>archivo-de-bibliografía-1,</var><var>archivo-de-bibliografía-2</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\bibliographystyle</code> por sí misma no produce salida
+alguna. Por el contrario, define el estilo en que se producirá la
+bibliografía: <var>estilo-de-bibliografía</var> se refiere a un archivo
+<file><var>estilo-de-bibliografía</var>.bst</file>, en el que se define qué
+apariencia tendrán las citas. Los nombres de <var>estilo</var> estándar
+distribuidos con Bib&tex; son:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">alpha</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Ordenadas alfabéticamente. Las etiquetas están formadas por el nombre
+del autor y año de publicación.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">plain</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Ordenadas alfabéticamente. Las etiquetas son numéricas.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">unsrt</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Al igual que <code>plain</code>, pero las entradas están en el orden citado.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">abbrv</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Igual que <code>plain</code>, pero con etiquetas más compactas.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Además, existen muchos otros archivos de estilo Bib&tex; adaptados a
+las demandas de diversas publicaciones. Vea
+<url><urefurl>http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\bibliography</code> es la que realmente produce la
+bibliografía. El argumento <code>\bibliography</code> se refiere a archivos
+con el nombre <file><var>archivo-de-bibliografía</var>.bib</file>, el cual debe
+contener la base de datos en formato Bib&tex;. Sólo las entradas
+referidas a través de <code>\cite</code> y <code>\nocite</code> serán incluidas en
+la bibliografía.
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="theorem" spaces=" "><nodename>theorem</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">titlepage</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">thebibliography</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>theorem</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="282"><r>entorno</r> <code>theorem</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="283"><code>theorem</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="129">teoremas, composición tipográfica de</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;theorem&rbrace;
+<var>texto-del-teorema</var>
+\end&lbrace;theorem&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>theorem</code> produce &textldquo;Teorema <var>n</var>&textrdquo; en negrita seguido
+por el <var>texto-del-teorema</var>, donde las posibilidades de numeración
+para <var>n</var> se describen bajo <code>\newtheorem</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewtheorem"><xrefnodename>\newtheorem</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="titlepage" spaces=" "><nodename>titlepage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">verbatim</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">theorem</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>titlepage</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="284"><r>entorno</r> <code>titlepage</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="285"><code>titlepage</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="130">haciendo una página de título</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="131">página de título, creando la</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;titlepage&rbrace;
+<var>texto</var>
+\end&lbrace;titlepage&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>titlepage</code> crea una página de título, es decir, una
+página en la cual no se imprime el número de página ni el encabezado.
+También provoca que la página siguiente sea numerada como la página uno.
+El formato de la página del título se deja bajo su responsabilidad. La
+instrucción <code>\today</code> puede ser útil en las páginas de título
+(<pxref label="_005ctoday"><xrefnodename>\today</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para>Usted puede utilizar la instrucción <code>\maketitle</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cmaketitle"><xrefnodename>\maketitle</xrefnodename></pxref>) para producir una página de título estándar sin un
+entorno <code>titlepage</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="verbatim" spaces=" "><nodename>verbatim</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">verse</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">titlepage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>verbatim</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="286"><r>entorno</r> <code>verbatim</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="287"><code>verbatim</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="132">texto literal</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="133">simulando texto escrito</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="134">texto escrito, simulando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="135">código, composición tipográfica de</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="136">programas de ordenador, composición tipográfica</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;verbatim&rbrace;
+<var>texto-literal</var>
+\end&lbrace;verbatim&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>verbatim</code> es un entorno para crear párrafos en el cual
+&latex; produce exactamente lo que usted escriba en él; Por ejemplo el
+carácter <code>\</code> produce una <samp>\</samp> impresa. Este cambia el modo en
+que &latex; imprime los que usted escriba con retornos de carro y
+espacios en blanco con el mismo efecto que tendría en una máquina de
+escribir.
+</para>
+<para>El entorno <code>verbatim</code> utiliza una composición tipográfica con tipo
+de letra monoespacio (<code>\tt</code>).
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\verb</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">La forma macro del entorno <code>verbatim</code>.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+<node name="_005cverb" spaces=" "><nodename>\verb</nodename><nodeup automatic="on">verbatim</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\verb</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="288">\verb</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="137">texto literal, en línea</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\verb<var>carácter</var><var>texto-literal</var><var>carácter</var>
+\verb*<var>carácter</var><var>texto-literal</var><var>carácter</var>
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\verb</code> compone tipográficamente el
+<var>texto-literal</var> como este se ha ingresado incluyendo caracteres
+especiales y espacios, utilizando el tipo de letra de máquina de
+escribir (<code>\tt</code>). No se permiten espacios entre <code>\verb</code> o
+<code>\verb*</code> y el <var>carácter</var> delimitador, el cual comienza y
+termina el texto literal. El delimitador no debe aparecer en el
+<var>texto-literal</var>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="138">espacio visible</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>La forma con <code>*</code> difiere únicamente en que los espacios son
+impresos con un carácter de &textldquo;espacio visible&textrdquo;.
+<tex endspaces=" ">
+</tex>
+</para>
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="verse" spaces=" "><nodename>verse</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">verbatim</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entornos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>verse</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="289"><r>entorno</r> <code>verse</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="290"><code>verse</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="139">poesía, un entorno para</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\begin&lbrace;verse&rbrace;
+<var>línea1</var> \\
+<var>línea2</var> \\
+...
+\end&lbrace;verse&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>El entorno <code>verse</code> está diseñado para poesía, aunque es posible que
+usted le encuentre alguna otra utilidad.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="291">\\ <r>para <code>verse</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Los márgenes tienen sangría a la izquierda y derecha, a los párrafos no
+se les aplica sangría y el texto no está justificado. Separe las líneas
+de cada estrofa con <code>\\</code> y use una o más líneas en blanco para
+separar las estrofas.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Saltos-de-L_00ednea" spaces=" "><nodename>Saltos de Línea</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Saltos de Página</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Entornos</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Saltos de Línea</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="140">saltos de línea</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="141">línea, saltos de</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Lo primero que hace &latex; cuando procesa texto normal es traducir el
+archivo de entrada en una secuencia de unidades gráficas y espacios.
+Para producir un documento impreso, esta secuencia se debe partir en
+líneas (y esas línea se deben dividir en páginas).
+</para>
+<para>Normalmente &latex; se encarga de los saltos de línea (y página), pero
+en algunos entornos, usted mismo determina los saltos de líneas con la
+instrucción <code>\\</code>, y siempre puede forzar los saltos de línea
+manualmente.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\\</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inicia una nueva línea.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\obeycr y \restorecr</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Provoca que cada línea ingresada comience una nueva línea.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newline</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Divide la línea \- (hyphenation):: Inserta un guión en la sílaba explicita.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">\- (hyphenation)</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\fussy</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Es quisquilloso con la separación de línea.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\sloppy</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Es descuidado en la separación de la líneas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\hyphenation</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Le dice a &latex; cómo insertar un guión para separar una palabra.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\linebreak y \nolinebreak</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Forzando y evitando saltos de línea.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005c_005c" spaces=" "><nodename>\\</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\obeycr y \restorecr</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Saltos de Línea</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\\</code>[*][<var>más-espacio</var>]</sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="292">\\ <r>forzar la separación de línea</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="142">nueva línea, comenzando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="143">separación de línea, forzando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\\</code> le dice a &latex; que comience una nueva
+línea. Esta tiene un argumento opcional, <var>más-espacio</var>, que
+especifica la cantidad de espacio vertical extra que se debe insertar
+antes de la siguiente línea. Este puede ser una cantidad negativa.
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\\*</code> es la misma que la instrucción ordinaria
+<code>\\</code> salvo que esta le dice a &latex; que no comience una nueva
+página después de la línea.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cobeycr-y-_005crestorecr" spaces=" "><nodename>\obeycr y \restorecr</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newline</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\\</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Saltos de Línea</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\obeycr</code> y <code>\restorecr</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="293">\obeycr</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="294">\restorecr</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="144">nueva línea, salida como entrada</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\obeycr</code> genera un retorno de carro en el archivo
+de entrada (<samp>^^M</samp>, internamente) lo mismo que <code>\\</code> (seguido
+por <code>\relax</code>). Por lo tanto, cada nueva línea en la entrada
+también será una nueva línea en la salida.
+</para>
+<para><code>\restorecr</code> restaura el comportamiento de saltos de línea normal.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewline" spaces=" "><nodename>\newline</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\- (hyphenation)</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\obeycr y \restorecr</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Saltos de Línea</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newline</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="295">\newline</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="145">nueva línea, comenzando (modo de párrafo)</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\newline</code> rompe la línea en el punto actual, sin
+justificar el texto anterior. Sólo se puede utilizar en modo párrafo.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029" spaces=" "><nodename>\- (hyphenation)</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\fussy</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newline</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Saltos de Línea</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\-</code> (división silábica discrecional)</sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="296">\- <r>(hyphenation)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="146">división silábica, forzando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\-</code> le dice a &latex; que puede dividir la palabra
+con un guión en ese punto. &latex; cuenta con una muy buena separación
+silábica con guión, y por lo general en la mayoría de los casos
+encuentra los puntos correctos en la división de palabras, y casi nunca
+utiliza uno incorrecto. La instrucción <code>\-</code> se utiliza para casos
+excepcionales.
+</para>
+<para>Cuando usted inserta la instrucción <code>\-</code> en una palabra, la palabra
+únicamente se debe dividir con guión en esos puntos y en ninguno de los
+puntos que &latex; pudiera haber elegido de otro modo.
+</para>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cfussy" spaces=" "><nodename>\fussy</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\sloppy</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\- (hyphenation)</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Saltos de Línea</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\fussy</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="297">\fussy</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La declaración <code>\fussy</code> (que es la predeterminada) provoca que
+&tex; sea quisquilloso con los saltos de línea. Esto por lo general
+también evita el espacio entre palabras, a costa de un ocasional
+desbordamiento de caja.
+</para>
+<para>Esta instrucción cancela el efecto de una instrucción <code>\sloppy</code>
+previa (<pxref label="_005csloppy"><xrefnodename>\sloppy</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csloppy" spaces=" "><nodename>\sloppy</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hyphenation</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\fussy</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Saltos de Línea</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\sloppy</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<para>La declaración <code>\sloppy</code> provoca que &tex; sea menos cuidadoso con
+los saltos de línea. Esto evitará el desbordamiento de cajas, a costa de
+un mayor espaciamiento entre palabras.
+</para>
+<para>Dura hasta que se utilice una instrucción <code>\fussy</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cfussy"><xrefnodename>\fussy</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005chyphenation" spaces=" "><nodename>\hyphenation</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\linebreak y \nolinebreak</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\sloppy</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Saltos de Línea</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hyphenation</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="298">\hyphenation</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="147">división de sílabas con guión, definiendo</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hyphenation&lbrace;<var>palabra-uno</var> <var>palabra-dos</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\hyphenation</code> declara los puntos dónde se permite
+la división de palabras por medio de un carácter <code>-</code> en las
+palabras proporcionadas. Las palabras están separadas por espacios.
+&tex; únicamente debe separar las palabras si la palabra coincide
+exactamente, sin juzgar las inflexiones. Múltiples instrucciones
+<code>\hyphenation</code> son acumulativas. Algunos ejemplos (los patrones de
+separación silábica de &tex; no se aplican a esas palabras):
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hyphenation&lbrace;ap-én-dice col-umnas hiper-fragilís-tico-espiali-doso&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005clinebreak-y-_005cnolinebreak" spaces=" "><nodename>\linebreak y \nolinebreak</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\hyphenation</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Saltos de Línea</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\linebreak</code> y <code>\nolinebreak</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="299">\linebreak</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="300">\nolinebreak</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="148">saltos de línea, forzando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="149">saltos de línea, evitando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\linebreak[<var>prioridad</var>]
+\nolinebreak[<var>prioridad</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>De manera predeterminada, la instrucción <code>\linebreak</code>
+(<code>\nolinebreak</code>) fuerza (previene) un salto de línea en la posición
+actual. Para <code>\linebreak</code>, los espacios en la línea se expanden
+hasta el margen derecho de la manera normal.
+</para>
+<para>Con el argumento opcional <var>prioridad</var>, usted puede convertir la
+instrucción de una petición a una demanda. La <var>prioridad</var> debe ser
+un número desde 0 hasta&nbsp;4. Cuanto mayor sea el número, es más
+insistente la petición.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Saltos-de-P_00e1gina" spaces=" "><nodename>Saltos de Página</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Notas al Pie</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Saltos de Línea</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Saltos de Página</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="150">salto de página</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="151">dividiendo páginas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; inicia nuevas páginas asincronicamente, cuando ha acumulado
+suficiente material para llenar una página. Por lo general, esto ocurre
+automáticamente, pero a veces, posiblemente, usted quiera influir en los
+saltos de página.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\cleardoublepage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inicia una nueva página a mano derecha.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\clearpage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inicia una nueva página.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newpage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inicia una nueva página.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\enlargethispage</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Amplía un poco la página actual.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\pagebreak y \nopagebreak</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Forzando y evitando saltos de página.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005ccleardoublepage" spaces=" "><nodename>\cleardoublepage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\clearpage</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Saltos de Página</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\cleardoublepage</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="301">\cleardoublepage</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="152">iniciando una página a mano derecha</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\cleardoublepage</code> termina la página actual y
+provoca que se impriman todas las imágenes y tablas que han aparecido
+hasta el momento en el texto. En un estilo de Impresión a doble cara,
+este también hace que la siguiente página sea a mano derecha, página
+(impares), produciendo una página en blanco si es necesario.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cclearpage" spaces=" "><nodename>\clearpage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newpage</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\cleardoublepage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Saltos de Página</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\clearpage</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="302">\clearpage</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="153">descargando flotantes e iniciando una página</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="154">iniciando una nueva página y limpiando flotantes</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\clearpage</code> termina la página actual y provoca que
+todas la imágenes y tablas que han aparecido hasta ahora en la entrada
+sean impresas.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewpage" spaces=" "><nodename>\newpage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\enlargethispage</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\clearpage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Saltos de Página</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newpage</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="303">\newpage</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="155">nueva página, iniciando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="156">iniciando una nueva página</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\newpage</code> termina la página actual, pero no
+descarga flotantes (vea <code>\clearpage</code> arriba).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cenlargethispage" spaces=" "><nodename>\enlargethispage</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\pagebreak y \nopagebreak</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newpage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Saltos de Página</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\enlargethispage</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="304">\enlargethispage</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="157">ampliando la página actual</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para><code>\enlargethispage&lbrace;tamaño&rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+<para><code>\enlargethispage*&lbrace;tamaño&rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+<para>Amplía el <code>\textheight</code> para la página actual por la cantidad
+especificada; por ejemplo <code>\enlargethispage&lbrace;\baselineskip&rbrace;</code>
+permitirá una línea adicional.
+</para>
+<para>La forma favorita trata de apretar el material en la página tanto como
+sea posible. Esta normalmente se utiliza junto con un <code>\pagebreak</code>
+explícito.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cpagebreak-y-_005cnopagebreak" spaces=" "><nodename>\pagebreak y \nopagebreak</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\enlargethispage</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Saltos de Página</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\pagebreak</code> y <code>\nopagebreak</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="305">\pagebreak</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="306">\nopagebreak</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="158">saltos de página, forzando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="159">saltos de página, evitando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\pagebreak[<var>prioridad</var>]
+\nopagebreak[<var>prioridad</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>De forma predeterminada, la instrucción <code>\pagebreak</code>
+(<code>\nopagebreak</code>) fuerza (impide) un salto de página en la posición
+actual. Para <code>\linebreak</code>, el espacio vertical en la página se
+estira cuanto sea posible de modo que se extienda hasta el margen
+inferior normal.
+</para>
+<para>Con el argumento opcional <var>prioridad</var>, puede convertir la
+instrucción <code>\pagebreak</code> desde una petición a una demanda. El
+número debe ser un número desde 0 hasta&nbsp;4. Cuanto mayor sea el
+número, más insistente es la petición.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Notas-al-Pie" spaces=" "><nodename>Notas al Pie</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Definiciones</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Saltos de Página</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Notas al Pie</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="160">notas al pie, creando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Las notas al pie se pueden producir en una de dos maneras. Se pueden
+producir con una sola instrucción, la instrucción <code>\footnote</code>.
+También se pueden producir con dos instrucciones, las instrucciones
+<code>\footnotemark</code> y <code>\footnotetext</code>.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\footnote</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Inserta una nota al pie.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\footnotemark</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Solamente Inserta la marca de nota.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\footnotetext</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Solamente Inserta el texto la nota.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Notas al Pie Simbólicas</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Usando símbolos en lugar de números para las notas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Parámetros para Footnote</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Parámetros para el formato de la nota al pie.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cfootnote" spaces=" "><nodename>\footnote</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\footnotemark</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Notas al Pie</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\footnote</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="307">\footnote</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\footnote[<var>número</var>]&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\footnote</code> coloca una nota numerada con el
+<var>texto</var> al pie de la página actual. El argumento opcional
+<var>número</var> cambia el número predeterminado de la nota.
+</para>
+<para>Esta instrucción sólo puede utilizarse fuera del modo párrafo; es decir,
+no se puede utilizar en el instrucciones de seccionado tal como
+<code>\chapter</code>, en figuras, tablas o en un entorno <code>tabular</code>.
+(Vea las siguientes secciones).
+<!-- c xx mencione paquetes que corrijan esto -->
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cfootnotemark" spaces=" "><nodename>\footnotemark</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\footnotetext</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\footnote</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Notas al Pie</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\footnotemark</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="308">\footnotemark</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sin argumento opcional, la instrucción <code>\footnotemark</code> coloca el
+número de nota actual en el texto. Esta instrucción se puede utilizar
+en modo párrafo. Usted proporciona el texto de la nota por separado,
+con la instrucción <code>\footnotetext</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Esta instrucción se puede utilizar para producir varios marcadores de
+nota consecutivos refiriéndose a la misma nota
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\footnotemark[\value&lbrace;footnote&rbrace;]
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>después de la primer instrucción <code>\footnote</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cfootnotetext" spaces=" "><nodename>\footnotetext</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Notas al Pie Simbólicas</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\footnotemark</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Notas al Pie</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\footnotetext</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="309">\footnotetext</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\footnotetext[<var>número</var>]&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\footnotetext</code> coloca el <var>texto</var> en la parte
+inferior de la página como una nota al pie. Esta instrucción puede
+venir en cualquier lugar después de la instrucción <code>\footnotemark</code>.
+La instrucción <code>\footnotetext</code> debe aparecer en el exterior del
+modo párrafo.
+</para>
+<para>El argumento opcional <var>número</var> cambia el número predeterminado de la
+nota.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Notas-al-Pie-Simb_00f3licas" spaces=" "><nodename>Notas al Pie Simbólicas</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Parámetros para Footnote</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\footnotetext</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Notas al Pie</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Notas al Pie Simbólicas</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="161">notas al pie, símbolos en lugar de números en</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Si desea utilizar símbolos para las notas al pie, en lugar de un número
+creciente, redefina <code>\thefootnote</code> así:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\renewcommand&lbrace;\thefootnote&rbrace;&lbrace;\fnsymbol&lbrace;footnote&rbrace;&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="310">\fnsymbol<r>, y notas al pie</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="311">\fnsymbol</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\fnsymbol</code> produce a serie predefinida de símbolos
+(<pxref label="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol"><xrefnodename>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</xrefnodename></pxref>). Si desea
+utilizar un símbolo diferente como su marca de nota al pie, necesitará
+redefinir <code>\&arobase;fnsymbol</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Par_00e1metros-para-Footnote" spaces=" "><nodename>Parámetros para Footnote</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Notas al Pie Simbólicas</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Notas al Pie</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Parámetros para Footnote</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="162">parámetros de footnote</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="163">parámetros, para footnote</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="312">\footnoterule</indexterm>\footnoterule</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Produce la línea que separa el texto principal en una página de las
+notas al pie de la página. Dimensiones predeterminadas: <code>0.4pt</code>
+espesor (o ancho), y longitud de <code>0.4\columnwidth</code> en las clases de
+documento estándar (salvo en <code>slides</code>, donde esta no aparece).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="313">\footnotesep</indexterm>\footnotesep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>La altura donde se coloca el puntal al comienzo de la nota al pie. De
+forma predeterminada, se establece en el puntal del tipo de letra normal
+<code>\footnotesize</code> (<pxref label="Tama_00f1os-del-Tipo-de-Letra"><xrefnodename>Tamaños del Tipo de Letra</xrefnodename></pxref>, por lo tanto no
+hay espacio extra entre las notas. Este es <samp>6.65pt</samp> para
+<samp>10pt</samp>, <samp>7.7pt</samp> para <samp>11pt</samp> y <samp>8.4pt</samp> para
+<samp>12pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Definiciones" spaces=" "><nodename>Definiciones</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Contadores</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Notas al Pie</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Definiciones</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="164">definiciones</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; tiene la capacidad para crear nuevas instrucciones de muchos
+tipos diferentes.
+</para>
+<!-- c xx todo en este capítulo necesita ejemplos. -->
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newcommand y \renewcommand</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">(Re)define una nueva instrucción.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define un nuevo contador.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newlength</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define una nueva longitud.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newsavebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define una nueva caja.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newenvironment y \renewenvironment</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Definen un nuevo entorno.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newtheorem</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Definen un nuevo entorno -como <code>theorem</code>.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\newfont</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Define un nuevo nombre de tipo de letra.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\protect</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Usando instrucciones astutas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cnewcommand-y-_005crenewcommand" spaces=" "><nodename>\newcommand y \renewcommand</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newcounter</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Definiciones</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newcommand</code> y <code>\renewcommand</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="314">\newcommand</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="165">instrucciones, definiendo nuevas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="166">definiendo una nueva instrucción</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="167">nuevas instrucciones, definiendo</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para><code>\newcommand</code> y <code>\renewcommand</code> define y redefine una
+instrucción, respectivamente.
+</para>
+ <para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"> \newcommand&lbrace;<var>instrucción</var>&rbrace;[<var>n-argumentos</var>]&lbrace;<var>definición</var>&rbrace;
+\renewcommand&lbrace;<var>instrucción</var>&rbrace;[<var>n-argumentos</var>]&lbrace;<var>definición</var>&rbrace;
+ \newcommand&lbrace;<var>instrucción</var>&rbrace;[<var>n-argumentos</var>][<var>predeterminado</var>]&lbrace;<var>definición</var>&rbrace;
+\renewcommand&lbrace;<var>instrucción</var>&rbrace;[<var>n-argumentos</var>][<var>predeterminado</var>]&lbrace;<var>definición</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">instrucción</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El nombre de la instrucción comenzando con <code>\</code>. Para
+<code>\newcommand</code>, este no se debe haber definido y no debe comenzar
+con <code>\end</code>; para <code>\renewcommand</code>, este ya tiene que estar
+definido.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">n-argumentos</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Un entero opcional entre 1 y 9 especificando el número de argumentos que
+debe tomar la instrucción. El valor predeterminado es para que la
+instrucción no tome argumentos.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">predeterminado</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Si este parámetro opcional está presente, significa que el primer
+argumento del comando es opcional. Cuando se invoca a la nueva
+instrucción, el valor predeterminado del argumento opcional (es decir,
+si no se especifica en la llamada) es la cadena <samp>definición</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">definición</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El texto con el que se sustituirá cada aparición de <code>instrucción</code>;
+una construcción de la forma <code>#<var>n</var></code> en <var>definición</var> es
+reemplazada por el texto del e<var>n</var>ésimo argumento.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewcounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\newcounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newlength</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newcommand y \renewcommand</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definiciones</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newcounter</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="315">\newcounter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="168">contadores, definiendo nuevos</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newcounter&lbrace;<var>nombre-contador</var>&rbrace;[<var>super</var>]
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\newcounter</code> define un nuevo contador llamado
+<var>nombre-contador</var>. El nuevo contador se inicializa a cero.
+</para>
+<para>Dado el argumento opcional <code>[<var>super</var>]</code>, (<var>nombre-contador</var>
+se restablecerá cuando el contador cuyo nomber es
+<var>super</var> se incremente.
+</para>
+<para><xref label="Contadores"><xrefnodename>Contadores</xrefnodename></xref>, para mayor información.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewlength" spaces=" "><nodename>\newlength</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newsavebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definiciones</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newlength</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="316">\newlength</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="169">longitudes, definiendo nuevas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newlength&lbrace;\<var>argumento</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\newlength</code> define el argumento obligatorio como
+una instrucción de
+<dfn>longitud</dfn> con un valor de <code>0in</code>. El
+argumento debe ser una secuencia de control, como en
+<code>\newlength&lbrace;\foo&rbrace;</code>. Ocurre un error si <code>\foo</code> ya está
+definido.
+</para>
+<para><xref label="Longitudes"><xrefnodename>Longitudes</xrefnodename></xref>, para saber cómo fijar la nueva longitud a un valor
+distinto de cero, y para más información acerca de las longitudes en
+general.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewsavebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\newsavebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newenvironment y \renewenvironment</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newlength</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definiciones</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newsavebox</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="317">\newsavebox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newsavebox&lbrace;<var>instrucción</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Define <code>\<var>instrucción</var></code>, el cual debe ser un nombre de
+instrucción que no se haya definido, para referirse a una nueva bandeja
+para almacenar cajas.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewenvironment-y-_005crenewenvironment" spaces=" "><nodename>\newenvironment y \renewenvironment</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newtheorem</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newsavebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definiciones</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newenvironment</code> y <code>\renewenvironment</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="318">\newenvironment</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="319">\renewenvironment</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="170">entornos, definiendo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="171">definiendo nuevos entornos</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="172">redefiniendo entornos</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">
+\newenvironment&lbrace;<var>entorno</var>&rbrace;[<var>n-argumentos</var>]&lbrace;<var>antes-definición</var>&rbrace;
+ &lbrace;<var>después-definición</var>&rbrace;
+ \newenvironment&lbrace;<var>entorno</var>&rbrace;[<var>n-argumentos</var>][<var>predeterminado</var>]
+ &lbrace;<var>antes-definición</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>después-definición</var>&rbrace;
+\renewenvironment&lbrace;<var>entorno</var>&rbrace;[<var>n-argumentos</var>]
+ &lbrace;<var>antes-definición</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>después-definición</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Estas instrucciones definen o redefinen un entorno <var>entorno</var>, es
+decir, <code>\begin&lbrace;<var>entorno</var>&rbrace; &dots; \end&lbrace;<var>entorno</var>&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">entorno</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El nombre del entorno. Para <code>\newenvironment</code>, <var>entorno</var>
+no debe ser un entorno existente, y la instrucción <code>\<var>entorno</var></code>
+debe ser una que no se haya definido previamente.
+Para <code>\renewenvironment</code>,
+<var>entorno</var> debe ser el nombre de un entorno existente.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">n-argumentos</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Un entero desde 1 a 9 denotando el número de argumentos del nuevo
+entorno definido. El valor predeterminado es ningún argumento.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">predeterminado</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Si se especifica, el primer argumento es opcional, y
+<var>predeterminado</var> proporciona el valor predeterminado para ese
+argumento.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">antes-definición</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El texto ampliado en cada aparición de <code>\begin&lbrace;<var>entorno</var>&rbrace;</code>;
+una construcción en forma <code>#<var>n</var></code> en <var>antes-definición</var> es
+sustituido por el texto del e<var>n</var>ésimo argumento.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">después-definición</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El texto ampliado de cada aparición de <code>\end&lbrace;<var>entorno</var>&rbrace;</code>.
+este no debe contener ningún argumento para parámetros.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewtheorem" spaces=" "><nodename>\newtheorem</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\newfont</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newenvironment y \renewenvironment</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definiciones</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newtheorem</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="320">\newtheorem</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="173">teoremas, definiendo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="174">definiendo nuevos teoremas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newtheorem&lbrace;<var>nuevo-entorno</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>etiqueta</var>&rbrace;[<var>con</var>]
+\newtheorem&lbrace;<var>nuevo-entorno</var>&rbrace;[<var>numerado-como</var>]&lbrace;<var>etiqueta</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Esta instrucción define un entorno parecido a teorema. Argumentos:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">nuevoentorno</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El nombre del nuevo entorno a definir; no debe ser el nombre de un
+entorno existente o de lo contrario será redefinido.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">etiqueta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El texto a imprimir al inicio del entorno, antes del número. Por
+ejemplo, <samp>Teorema</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">numerado_como</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(Opcional). El nombre de un entorno ya definido tal como teorema;
+</para>
+<para>(Opcional). El nombre de un entorno ya definido tal como teorema el
+nuevo entorno será numerado exactamente como <var>numerado_como</var>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">con</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(Opcional). El nombre de un contador definido previamente, una unidad de
+seccionado. El nuevo contador de teorema será restablecido al mismo
+tiempo que el contador <var>con</var>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Cuando menos uno de <var>numerado_como</var> y <var>con</var> se debe especificar,
+no ambos.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnewfont" spaces=" "><nodename>\newfont</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\protect</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\newtheorem</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definiciones</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\newfont</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="321">\newfont</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="175">tipos de letra, nuevas instrucciones para</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="176">definición de nuevos tipos de letra</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\newfont&lbrace;<var>instrucción</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>nombredetipo</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Define una secuencia de control <code>\<var>instrucción</var></code>, misma que no
+se debe haber definido, para hacer que <var>nombredetipo</var> sea el tipo de
+letra actual. El archivo bloqueado en el sistema es llamado
+<file><var>nombredetipo</var>.tfm</file>.
+</para>
+<para>Esta es una instrucción de bajo nivel para configurar el uso de un tipo
+de letra individual. Comúnmente, los tipos de letra se definen a través
+de familias de archivos <file>.fd</file>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cprotect" spaces=" "><nodename>\protect</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\newfont</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Definiciones</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\protect</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="322">\protect</indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="177">instrucciones frágiles</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="178">argumentos móviles</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Pies de página, saltos de línea, cualquier instrucción que tenga un
+argumento opcional, y muchas más de las así llamadas instrucciones
+<dfn>frágiles</dfn>. Cuando una instrucción frágil se utiliza en ciertos
+contextos, llamados <dfn>argumentos móviles</dfn>, estas se deben preceder
+con <code>\protect</code>. Además, algunas instrucciones con argumentos
+frágiles deben tener su propia <code>\protect</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Algunos ejemplos de argumentos móviles son <code>\caption</code>
+(<pxref label="figure"><xrefnodename>figure</xrefnodename></pxref>), <code>\thanks</code> (<pxref label="_005cmaketitle"><xrefnodename>\maketitle</xrefnodename></pxref>) y &arobase;-expresiones
+en entornos <code>tabular</code> y <code>array</code> (<pxref label="tabular"><xrefnodename>tabular</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="179">instrucciones robustas</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Las instrucciones que no son frágiles se llaman <dfn>robustas</dfn>. Estas
+no se deben preceder con <code>\protect</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Vea también:
+</para>
+<smallexample endspaces=" ">
+<exdent spaces=" "><url><urefurl>http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html</urefurl></url></exdent>
+<exdent spaces=" "><url><urefurl>http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect</urefurl></url></exdent>
+</smallexample>
+
+<!-- c xx realmente necesita ejemplos. -->
+
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Contadores" spaces=" "><nodename>Contadores</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Longitudes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Definiciones</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Contadores</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="180">contadores, una lista de</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="181">variables, una lista de</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Cualquier cosa numerada por &latex; tiene un contador asociado a ella.
+El nombre del contador es el mismo nombre que el nombre del entorno o
+instrucción que produce el número, salvo las que no comienzan con
+<code>\</code>. (<code>enumi</code>&textndash;<code>enumiv</code> se utilizan para entornos
+enumerados anidados). A continuación hay una lista de los contadores
+utilizados en las clases de documentos estándar de &latex; para
+controlar la numeración.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">part paragraph figure enumi
+chapter subparagraph table enumii
+section page footnote enumiii
+subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+subsubsection
+</pre></example>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Imprimiendo el valor de un contador.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\usecounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Utiliza un contador especificado en un entorno de lista.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\value</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Utiliza el valor de un contador en una expresión.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\setcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Establece el valor de un contador.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\addtocounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Añade un calificador a un contador.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\refstepcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Añade un contador, restableciendo los contadores subsidiarios.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\stepcounter</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Añade un contador, restableciendo los contadores subsidiarios.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\day \month \year</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Valores numéricos de fecha.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005calph-_005cAlph-_005carabic-_005croman-_005cRoman-_005cfnsymbol" spaces=" "><nodename>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\usecounter</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Contadores</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</code>: Imprimiendo Contadores</sectiontitle>
+
+
+<para>Todas estas instrucciones toman como argumento un solo contador, por
+ejemplo, <code>\alph&lbrace;enumi&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="323">\alph</indexterm>\alph</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>imprime <var>contador</var> usando letras minúsculas: &textlsquo;a&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;b&textrsquo;, &enddots;
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="324">\Alph</indexterm>\Alph</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>utiliza letras mayúsculas: &textlsquo;A&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;B&textrsquo;, &enddots;
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="325">\arabic</indexterm>\arabic</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>utiliza números Arábigos: &textlsquo;1&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;2&textrsquo;, &enddots;
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="326">\roman</indexterm>\roman</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>utiliza números romanos en minúsculas: &textlsquo;i&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;ii&textrsquo;, &enddots;
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="327">\roman</indexterm>\roman</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>utiliza números romanos en mayúsculas: &textlsquo;I&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;II&textrsquo;, &enddots;
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="328">\fnsymbol</indexterm>\fnsymbol</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>imprime el valor de <var>contador</var> en una secuencia específica de nueve
+símbolos (convencionalmente usada para etiquetar notas al pie de
+página). El valor de <var>contador</var> debe estar entre&nbsp;1 y&nbsp;9
+incluido.
+</para>
+<tex endspaces=" ">
+</tex>
+<para>Los símbolos no son compatibles en info principalmente, pero aquí están
+los nombres:
+</para><display endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">asterix(*) dagger(†) ddagger(‡) section-sign(§) paragraph-sign(¶) parallel(‖)
+double-asterix(**) double-dagger(††) double-ddagger(‡‡)
+</pre></display>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cusecounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\usecounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\value</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Contadores</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\usecounter&lbrace;<var>contador</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="329">\usecounter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="182">lista de elementos, especificando el contador</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="183">elementos numerados, especificando contador</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usecounter&lbrace;<var>contador</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\usecounter</code> se utiliza en el segundo argumento del
+entorno <code>list</code> para especificar el <var>contador</var> a utilizar para
+numerar los elementos de la lista.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cvalue" spaces=" "><nodename>\value</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\setcounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\usecounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Contadores</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\value&lbrace;<var>contador</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="330">\value</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="184">contadores, consiguiendo el valor de</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\value&lbrace;<var>contador</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\value</code> produce el valor de <var>contador</var>. Esta
+se puede utilizar en cualquier lugar en que &latex; espera un número,
+por ejemplo:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setcounter&lbrace;micontador&rbrace;&lbrace;3&rbrace;
+\addtocounter&lbrace;micontador&rbrace;&lbrace;1&rbrace;
+\hspace&lbrace;\value&lbrace;micontador&rbrace;\parindent&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csetcounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\setcounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addtocounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\value</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Contadores</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\setcounter&lbrace;<var>\contador</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>valor</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="331">\setcounter</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="185">contadores, configurando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="186">fijando contadores</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\setcounter&lbrace;<var>contador</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>valor</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\setcounter</code> fija el valor de <var>contador</var> al
+argumento <var>valor</var>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005caddtocounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\addtocounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\refstepcounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\setcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Contadores</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addtocounter&lbrace;<var>contador</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>valor</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="332">\addtocounter</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\addtocounter</code> incrementa <var>contador</var> por la
+cantidad especificada por el argumento <var>valor</var>, que puede ser un
+número negativo.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005crefstepcounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\refstepcounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\stepcounter</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\addtocounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Contadores</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\refstepcounter&lbrace;<var>contador</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="333">\refstepcounter</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\refstepcounter</code> trabaja de la misma manera que
+<code>\stepcounter</code> <xref label="_005cstepcounter"><xrefnodename>\stepcounter</xrefnodename></xref>, excepto que esta además define
+el valor actual de <code>\ref</code> para que sea el resultado de
+<code>\thecounter</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cstepcounter" spaces=" "><nodename>\stepcounter</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\day \month \year</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\refstepcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Contadores</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\stepcounter&lbrace;<var>contador</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="334">\stepcounter</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\stepcounter</code> añade uno al <var>contador</var> y
+restablece todos los contadores subsidiarios.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear" spaces=" "><nodename>\day \month \year</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\stepcounter</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Contadores</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\day \month \year</code>: Contadores Predefinidos</sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="335">\day</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="336">\month</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="337">\year</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>&latex; define contadores para el día del mes (<code>\day</code>, 1&textndash;31), mes
+del año (<code>\month</code>, 1&textndash;12), y año (<code>\year</code>, Era Común). Al
+iniciar &tex;, estas son establecidas a los valores actuales en el
+sistema donde se está ejecutando &tex;. Estas no se actualizan
+conforme al progreso del trabajo.
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción relacionada <code>\today</code> produce una cadena de texto que
+representa el día actual (<pxref label="_005ctoday"><xrefnodename>\today</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Longitudes" spaces=" "><nodename>Longitudes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Haciendo Párrafos</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Contadores</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Longitudes</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="187">longitudes, definiendo y usando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Una <code>longitud</code> es una medida de distancia. Muchas instrucciones
+&latex; toman una longitud como argumento.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\setlength</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Establece el valor de longitud.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\addtolength</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Añade una cantidad a longitud.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\settodepth</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Establece una longitud a la profundidad de algo más.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\settoheight</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Establece la longitud a la altura de algo más.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\settowidth</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Establece la longitud a la anchura de alguna otra cosa.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Longitudes Predeterminadas</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Longitudes que son, algo sí como, predefinidas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005csetlength" spaces=" "><nodename>\setlength</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addtolength</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Longitudes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\setlength&lbrace;\<var>largo</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>valor</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="338">\setlength</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="188">longitudes, configurando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\setlength</code> fija el valor de <var>\largo</var> al
+argumento <var>valor</var>, el cual se puede expresar en cualquier unidad que
+&latex; entienda, es decir, pulgadas (<code>in</code>), milímetros
+(<code>mm</code>), puntos (<code>pt</code>), puntos grandes (<code>bp</code>, etc.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005caddtolength" spaces=" "><nodename>\addtolength</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\settodepth</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\setlength</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Longitudes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>\addtolength&lbrace;<var>\largo</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>cantidad</var>&rbrace;</sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="339">\addtolength</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="189">longitudes, añadiendo a</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\addtolength</code> incrementa la &textldquo;instrucción de
+longitud&textrdquo; <var>\largo</var> por la cantidad especificada en el argumento
+<var>cantidad</var>, misma que puede ser un valor negativo.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csettodepth" spaces=" "><nodename>\settodepth</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\settoheight</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\addtolength</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Longitudes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\settodepth</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="340">\settodepth</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para><code>\settodepth&lbrace;\gnat&rbrace;&lbrace;texto&rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\settodepth</code> fija el valor de una instrucción de
+<code>longitud</code> igual a la profundidad del argumento <code>texto</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csettoheight" spaces=" "><nodename>\settoheight</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\settowidth</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\settodepth</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Longitudes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\settoheight</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="341">\settoheight</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para><code>\settoheight&lbrace;\gnat&rbrace;&lbrace;texto&rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\settoheight</code> fija el valor de la instrucción de
+<code>longitud</code> igual a la altura del argumento <code>texto</code>.
+</para>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csettowidth" spaces=" "><nodename>\settowidth</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Longitudes Predeterminadas</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\settoheight</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Longitudes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\settowidth&lbrace;\<var>largo</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="342">\settowidth</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\settowidth</code> establece el valor del la instrucción
+<var>\largo</var> al valor del argumento <var>texto</var>.
+</para>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Longitudes-Predeterminadas" spaces=" "><nodename>Longitudes Predeterminadas</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\settowidth</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Longitudes</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Longitudes Predeterminadas</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="190">longitudes, predefinidas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="191">longitudes predeterminadas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para><code>\width</code>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="343">\width</indexterm></findex>
+</para>
+<para><code>\height</code>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="344">\height</indexterm></findex>
+</para>
+<para><code>\depth</code>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="345">\depth</indexterm></findex>
+</para>
+<para><code>\totalheight</code>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="346">\totalheight</indexterm></findex>
+</para>
+<para>Estos parámetros de longitud se pueden utilizar en los argumentos de las
+instrucciones que dibujan cajas (<pxref label="Cajas"><xrefnodename>Cajas</xrefnodename></pxref>). Especifican el ancho
+natural, etc., del texto en la caja. <code>\totalheight</code> es igual a
+<code>\height</code> + <code>\depth</code>. Para hacer una caja con el texto
+extendido hasta el doble del tamaño natural, por ejemplo, digamos
+</para>
+<para><code>\makebox[ancho\2]&lbrace;Consiga una camilla&rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Haciendo-P_00e1rrafos" spaces=" "><nodename>Haciendo Párrafos</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Fórmulas Matemáticas</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Longitudes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Haciendo Párrafos</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="192">haciendo párrafos</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="193">párrafos</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Un párrafo se termina por medio de una o más líneas completamente en
+blanco &textmdash;líneas que no contienen incluso un <code>%</code>. Una línea en
+blanco no debe aparecer donde no se puede iniciar un nuevo párrafo, tal
+como en modo math o en el argumento de una instrucción de seccionado.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\indent</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Sangrando este párrafo.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\noindent</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">No sangra el siguiente párrafo.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\parskip</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Añade un espacio antes de párrafos.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Notas al Margen</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Coloca palabras en el margen.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cindent" spaces=" "><nodename>\indent</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\noindent</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Haciendo Párrafos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\indent</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="347">\indent</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="348">\parindent</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="194">sangría, forzando la</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para><code>\indent</code> produce un espacio horizontal donde el ancho es igual la longitud de <code>\parindent</code>, la sangría de un párrafo
+normal. Esta se utiliza para añadir la sangría de párrafos donde esta
+debería suprimirse en otro caso.
+</para>
+<para>El valor predeterminado para <code>\parindent</code> es <code>1em</code> en modo de
+dos columnas, de lo contrario <code>15pt</code> para documentos de
+<code>10pt</code>, <code>17pt</code> para <code>11pt</code> y <code>1.5em</code> para
+<code>12pt</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cnoindent" spaces=" "><nodename>\noindent</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\parskip</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\indent</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Haciendo Párrafos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\noindent</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="349">\noindent</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="195">sangría, suprimiendo la</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Cuando se utiliza al principio de un párrafo, <code>\noindent</code> suprime
+cualquier sangría. Esta no tiene efecto cuando se utiliza en medio de
+un párrafo.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cparskip" spaces=" "><nodename>\parskip</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Notas al Margen</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\noindent</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Haciendo Párrafos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\parskip</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="350">\parskip</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="196">espacio vertical antes de párrafos</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para><code>\parskip</code> es una instrucción que preserva la longitud definiendo
+espacio vertical extra añadido antes de cada párrafo. El predeterminado
+es <code>0pt más 1pt</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="Notas-al-Margen" spaces=" "><nodename>Notas al Margen</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\parskip</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Haciendo Párrafos</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Notas al Margen</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="197">notas al margen</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="198">notas en el margen</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="199">observaciones en el margen</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="351">\marginpar</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\marginpar[<var>izquierda</var>]&lbrace;<var>derecha</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\marginpar</code> crea una nota en el margen. La primera
+línea de una nota tiene que ser la misma línea base que la línea en el
+texto donde ocurre el <code>\marginpar</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Cuando únicamente se especifica el argumento obligatorio <var>right</var>, el
+texto se deberá colocar
+</para>
+<itemize commandarg="bullet" spaces=" " endspaces=" "><itemprepend><formattingcommand command="bullet"/></itemprepend>
+<listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>en el margen derecho para diseños de un solo lado;
+</para></listitem><listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>en el margen externo para diseños de dos caras;
+</para></listitem><listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>en el margen más cercano en diseños de dos columnas.
+</para></listitem></itemize>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="352">\reversemarginpar</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="353">\normalmarginpar</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\reversemarginpar</code> coloca las subsecuentes notas al
+margen en el margen (dentro) opuesto. <code>\normalmarginpar</code> las
+coloca en la posición predeterminada.
+</para>
+<para>Cuando se especifican ambos argumentos, se utiliza <var>left</var> para el
+margen izquierdo y se utiliza <var>right</var> para el margen derecho.
+</para>
+<para>La primer palabra normalmente no se debe separar con guiones; usted
+puede habilitar la separación silábica con guiones comenzando la nota
+con <code>\hspace&lbrace;0pt&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Los parámetros que afectan el formato de la nota son:
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="354">\marginparpush</indexterm>\marginparpush</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El espacio mínimo vertical entre notas; el predeterminado es <samp>7pt</samp>
+para documentos de <samp>12pt</samp>, de lo contrario <samp>5pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="355">\marginparsep</indexterm>\marginparsep</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Espacio horizontal entre el texto vertical y la nota; predeterminado
+<samp>11pt</samp> para <samp>10pt</samp> documentos, en otro caso <samp>10pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="356">\marginparwidth</indexterm>\marginparwidth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El ancho de la nota en sí misma; el predeterminado para documentos de un
+solo lado de <samp>10pt</samp> es <samp>90pt</samp>, <samp>83pt</samp> para <samp>11pt</samp> y
+<samp>68pt</samp> para <samp>12pt</samp>; <samp>17pt</samp> más en cada caso para
+documentos de dos caras. En el modo de dos columnas, el predeterminado
+es <samp>48pt</samp>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="F_00f3rmulas-Matem_00e1ticas" spaces=" "><nodename>Fórmulas Matemáticas</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Modos</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Haciendo Párrafos</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Fórmulas Matemáticas</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="200">fórmulas matemáticas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="201">fórmulas, matemáticas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="202">modo math, ingresando al</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="357"><r>entorno</r> <code>math</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="358"><code>math</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="359"><r>entorno</r> <code>displaymath</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="360"><code>displaymath</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="361"><r>entorno</r> <code>equation</code></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="362"><code>equation</code>, <r>entorno</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Existen tres entornos que ponen a &latex; en modo math:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">math</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Para fórmulas que aparecerán directamente en el texto.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">displaymath</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Para fórmulas que aparecerán en su propia línea.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">equation</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El mismo que el del entorno displaymath salvo que este añade un número
+de ecuación en el margen derecho.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="363">\(</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="364">\)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="365">\[</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="366">\]</indexterm></findex>
+<para>El entorno <code>math</code> se pude utilizar tanto en párrafos como en modo
+LR, pero los entornos <code>displaymath</code> y <code>equation</code> se pueden
+utilizar únicamente en modo párrafo. Los entornos <code>math</code> y
+<code>displaymath</code> se utilizan tan a menudo que tienen las siguientes
+formas abreviadas:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\(...\) <r>en lugar de</r> \begin&lbrace;math&rbrace;...\end&lbrace;math&rbrace;
+\[...\] <r>en lugar de</r> \begin&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;...\end&lbrace;displaymath&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="367">$</indexterm></findex>
+<para>De hecho, el entorno <code>math</code> es como una instrucción que tiene
+incluso una forma abreviada:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">$ ... $ <r>en lugar de</r> \(...\)
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="368">\boldmath</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="369">\unboldmath</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\boldmath</code> cambia letras y símbolos matemáticos en
+tipo de letra en negrita. Este se utiliza <emph>fuera</emph> del modo math.
+Por el contrario, la instrucción <code>\unboldmath</code> cambia los glifos
+matemáticos para estar en un tipo de letra normal; este también se
+utiliza <emph>fuera</emph> del modo math.
+</para>
+<!-- c xx ¿propia sección? ¿tipos de letra en Math? -->
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="370">\displaystyle</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La declaración <code>\displaystyle</code> presiona para que el tamaño y estilo
+de la fórmula sea el de <code>displaymath</code>, por ejemplo, con limites por
+encima y debajo de sumatorias. Por ejemplo
+</para><example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">$\displaystyle \sum_&lbrace;n=0&rbrace;^\infty x_n $
+</pre></example>
+
+<!-- c xx vea además \cal, \mathcal -->
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Subíndices y Superíndices</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">También conocido como exponente o índice.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Símbolos Matemáticos</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Varios garabatos matemáticos.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Funciones Matemáticas</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Nombres de funciones Matemáticas como sin y exp.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Acentos Matemáticos</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Acentos en Matemáticas.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Espacios en Modo Math</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Espacios gruesos, medianos, delgados y negativos.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Miscelánea Math</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Cosas que no encajan en ninguna otra categoría.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Sub_00edndices-y-Super_00edndices" spaces=" "><nodename>Subíndices y Superíndices</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Símbolos Matemáticos</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Fórmulas Matemáticas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Subíndices y Superíndices</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="203">superíndice</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="204">subíndice</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="205">exponente</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="371">_</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="372">^</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Para hacer que una expresión <i>exp</i> aparezca como un subíndice, escriba
+<code>_&lbrace;</code><i>exp</i><code>&rbrace;</code>. Para hacer que <i>exp</i> aparezca como un
+exponente, escriba <code>^&lbrace;</code><i>exp</i><code>&rbrace;</code>. &latex; maneja
+superíndices, subíndices y todas esas cosas de manera natural. Incluso
+hace lo correcto cuando algo tiene tanto un subíndice como un
+superíndice.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="S_00edmbolos-Matem_00e1ticos" spaces=" "><nodename>Símbolos Matemáticos</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Funciones Matemáticas</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Subíndices y Superíndices</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Fórmulas Matemáticas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Símbolos Matemáticos</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="206">símbolos matemáticos</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="207">símbolos, matemáticos</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="208">letras griegas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; proporciona casi cualquier símbolo matemático que muy
+probablemente necesite. Las instrucciones para generarlas se pueden
+utilizar únicamente en modo math. Por ejemplo, si incluye <code>$\pi$</code>
+en su archivo fuente, aparecerá el símbolo de pi (<math>\pi</math>) en su
+salida.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="373">\|</indexterm>\|</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\|</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="374">\aleph</indexterm>\aleph</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\aleph</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="375">\alpha</indexterm>\alpha</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\alpha</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="376">\amalg</indexterm>\amalg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\amalg</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="377">\angle</indexterm>\angle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\angle</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="378">\approx</indexterm>\approx</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\approx</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="379">\ast</indexterm>\ast</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\ast</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="380">\asymp</indexterm>\asymp</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\asymp</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="381">\backslash</indexterm>\backslash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>\ (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="382">\beta</indexterm>\beta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\beta</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="383">\bigcap</indexterm>\bigcap</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\bigcap</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="384">\bigcirc</indexterm>\bigcirc</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\bigcirc</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="385">\bigcup</indexterm>\bigcup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\bigcup</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="386">\bigodot</indexterm>\bigodot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\bigodot</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="387">\bigoplus</indexterm>\bigoplus</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\bigoplus</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="388">\bigotimes</indexterm>\bigotimes</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\bigotimes</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="389">\bigtriangledown</indexterm>\bigtriangledown</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\bigtriangledown</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="390">\bigtriangleup</indexterm>\bigtriangleup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\bigtriangleup</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="391">\bigsqcup</indexterm>\bigsqcup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\bigsqcup</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="392">\biguplus</indexterm>\biguplus</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\biguplus</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="393">\bigcap</indexterm>\bigcap</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\bigvee</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="394">\bigwedge</indexterm>\bigwedge</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\bigwedge</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="395">\bot</indexterm>\bot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\bot</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="396">\bowtie</indexterm>\bowtie</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\bowtie</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="397">\Box</indexterm>\Box</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(símbolo de caja cuadrada abierta) <!-- c xx no en el simple -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="398">\bullet</indexterm>\bullet</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="209">símbolo bala</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><math>\bullet</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="399">\cap</indexterm>\cap</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\cap</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="400">\cdot</indexterm>\cdot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\cdot</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="401">\chi</indexterm>\chi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\chi</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="402">\circ</indexterm>\circ</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\circ</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="403">\clubsuit</indexterm>\clubsuit</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\clubsuit</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="404">\cong</indexterm>\cong</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\cong</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="405">\coprod</indexterm>\coprod</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\coprod</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="406">\cup</indexterm>\cup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\cup</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="407">\dagger</indexterm>\dagger</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\dagger</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="408">\dashv</indexterm>\dashv</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\dashv</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="409">\ddagger</indexterm>\ddagger</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\dagger</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="410">\Delta</indexterm>\Delta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Delta</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="411">\delta</indexterm>\delta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\delta</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="412">\Diamond</indexterm>\Diamond</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\diamond</math> más grande <!-- c xx no en el simple -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="413">\diamond</indexterm>\diamond</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\diamond</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="414">\diamondsuit</indexterm>\diamondsuit</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\diamondsuit</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="415">\div</indexterm>\div</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\div</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="416">\doteq</indexterm>\doteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\doteq</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="417">\downarrow</indexterm>\downarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\downarrow</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="418">\Downarrow</indexterm>\Downarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Downarrow</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="419">\ell</indexterm>\ell</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\ell</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="420">\emptyset</indexterm>\emptyset</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\emptyset</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="421">\epsilon</indexterm>\epsilon</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\epsilon</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="422">\equiv</indexterm>\equiv</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\equiv</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="423">\eta</indexterm>\eta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\eta</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="424">\exists</indexterm>\exists</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\exists</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="425">\flat</indexterm>\flat</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\flat</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="426">\forall</indexterm>\forall</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\forall</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="427">\frown</indexterm>\frown</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\frown</math> (relacion)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="428">\Gamma</indexterm>\Gamma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Gamma</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="429">\gamma</indexterm>\gamma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\gamma</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="430">\ge</indexterm>\ge</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\ge</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="431">\geq</indexterm>\geq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\geq</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="432">\gets</indexterm>\gets</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\gets</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="433">\gg</indexterm>\gg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\gg</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="434">\hbar</indexterm>\hbar</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\hbar</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="435">\heartsuit</indexterm>\heartsuit</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\heartsuit</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="436">\hookleftarrow</indexterm>\hookleftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\hookleftarrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="437">\hookrightarrow</indexterm>\hookrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\hookrightarrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="438">\iff</indexterm>\iff</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\iff</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="439">\Im</indexterm>\Im</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Im</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="440">\in</indexterm>\in</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\in</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="441">\infty</indexterm>\infty</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\infty</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="442">\int</indexterm>\int</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\int</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="443">\iota</indexterm>\iota</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\iota</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="444">\Join</indexterm>\Join</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>símbolo de corbata de moño condensado (relación) <!-- c xx no en el simple -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="445">\kappa</indexterm>\kappa</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\kappa</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="446">\Lambda</indexterm>\Lambda</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Lambda</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="447">\lambda</indexterm>\lambda</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\lambda</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="448">\land</indexterm>\land</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\land</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="449">\langle</indexterm>\langle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\langle</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="450">\lbrace</indexterm>\lbrace</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\lbrace</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="451">\lbrack</indexterm>\lbrack</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\lbrack</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="452">\lceil</indexterm>\lceil</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\lceil</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="453">\le</indexterm>\le</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\le</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="454">\leadsto</indexterm>\leadsto</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><!-- c xx falta de simple -->
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="455">\Leftarrow</indexterm>\Leftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Leftarrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="456">\leftarrow</indexterm>\leftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\leftarrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="457">\leftharpoondown</indexterm>\leftharpoondown</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\leftharpoondown</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="458">\leftharpoonup</indexterm>\leftharpoonup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\leftharpoonup</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="459">\Leftrightarrow</indexterm>\Leftrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Leftrightarrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="460">\Leftrightarrow</indexterm>\Leftrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Leftrightarrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="461">\leq</indexterm>\leq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\leq</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="462">\lfloor</indexterm>\lfloor</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\lfloor</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="463">\lhd</indexterm>\lhd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(flecha apuntando hacia arriba a la izquierda) <!-- c xx no en el simple -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="464">\ll</indexterm>\ll</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\ll</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="465">\lnot</indexterm>\lnot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\lnot</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="466">\longleftarrow</indexterm>\longleftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\longleftarrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="467">\longleftrightarrow</indexterm>\longleftrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\longleftrightarrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="468">\longmapsto</indexterm>\longmapsto</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\longmapsto</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="469">\longrightarrow</indexterm>\longrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\longrightarrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="470">\lor</indexterm>\lor</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\lor</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="471">\mapsto</indexterm>\mapsto</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\mapsto</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="472">\mho</indexterm>\mho</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><!-- c xx no en el simple -->
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="473">\mid</indexterm>\mid</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\mid</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="474">\models</indexterm>\models</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\models</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="475">\mp</indexterm>\mp</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\mp</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="476">\mu</indexterm>\mu</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\mu</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="477">\nabla</indexterm>\nabla</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\nabla</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="478">\natural</indexterm>\natural</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\natural</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="479">\ne</indexterm>\ne</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\ne</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="480">\nearrow</indexterm>\nearrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\nearrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="481">\neg</indexterm>\neg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\neg</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="482">\neq</indexterm>\neq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\neq</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="483">\ni</indexterm>\ni</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\ni</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="484">\not</indexterm>\not</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Superpone una / al siguiente operador, tal como <math>\not=</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="485">\notin</indexterm>\notin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\ni</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="486">\nu</indexterm>\nu</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\nu</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="487">\nwarrow</indexterm>\nwarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\nwarrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="488">\odot</indexterm>\odot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\odot</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="489">\oint</indexterm>\oint</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\oint</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="490">\Omega</indexterm>\Omega</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Omega</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="491">\omega</indexterm>\omega</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\omega</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="492">\ominus</indexterm>\ominus</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\ominus</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="493">\oplus</indexterm>\oplus</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\oplus</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="494">\oslash</indexterm>\oslash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\oslash</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="495">\otimes</indexterm>\otimes</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\otimes</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="496">\owns</indexterm>\owns</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\owns</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="497">\parallel</indexterm>\parallel</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\parallel</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="498">\partial</indexterm>\partial</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\partial</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="499">\perp</indexterm>\perp</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\perp</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="500">\phi</indexterm>\phi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\phi</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="501">\Pi</indexterm>\Pi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Pi</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="502">\pi</indexterm>\pi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\pi</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="503">\pm</indexterm>\pm</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\pm</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="504">\prec</indexterm>\prec</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\prec</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="505">\preceq</indexterm>\preceq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\preceq</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="506">\prime</indexterm>\prime</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\prime</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="507">\prod</indexterm>\prod</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\prod</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="508">\propto</indexterm>\propto</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\propto</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="509">\Psi</indexterm>\Psi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Psi</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="510">\psi</indexterm>\psi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\psi</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="511">\rangle</indexterm>\rangle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\rangle</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="512">\rbrace</indexterm>\rbrace</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\rbrace</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="513">\rbrack</indexterm>\rbrack</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\rbrack</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="514">\rceil</indexterm>\rceil</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\rceil</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="515">\Re</indexterm>\Re</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Re</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="516">\rfloor</indexterm>\rfloor</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\rfloor</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="517">\rhd</indexterm>\rhd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(operación binaria) <!-- c xx no en sencillo @math{\rhd} -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="518">\rho</indexterm>\rho</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\rho</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="519">\Rightarrow</indexterm>\Rightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Rightarrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="520">\rightarrow</indexterm>\rightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\rightarrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="521">\rightharpoondown</indexterm>\rightharpoondown</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\rightharpoondown</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="522">\rightharpoonup</indexterm>\rightharpoonup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\rightharpoonup</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="523">\rightleftharpoons</indexterm>\rightleftharpoons</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\rightleftharpoons</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="524">\searrow</indexterm>\searrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\searrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="525">\setminus</indexterm>\setminus</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\setminus</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="526">\sharp</indexterm>\sharp</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sharp</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="527">\Sigma</indexterm>\Sigma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Sigma</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="528">\sigma</indexterm>\sigma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sigma</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="529">\sim</indexterm>\sim</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sim</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="530">\simeq</indexterm>\simeq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\simeq</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="531">\smallint</indexterm>\smallint</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\smallint</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="532">\smile</indexterm>\smile</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\smile</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="533">\spadesuit</indexterm>\spadesuit</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\spadesuit</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="534">\sqcap</indexterm>\sqcap</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sqcap</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="535">\sqcup</indexterm>\sqcup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sqcup</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="536">\sqsubset</indexterm>\sqsubset</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(relación) <!-- c no en (@math{\sqsubset}) simple -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="537">\sqsubseteq</indexterm>\sqsubseteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sqsubseteq</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="538">\sqsupset</indexterm>\sqsupset</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>(relación) <!-- c no en (@math{\sqsupset}) simple -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="539">\sqsupseteq</indexterm>\sqsupseteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sqsupseteq</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="540">\star</indexterm>\star</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\star</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="541">\subset</indexterm>\subset</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\subset</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="542">\subseteq</indexterm>\subseteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\subseteq</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="543">\succ</indexterm>\succ</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\succ</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="544">\succeq</indexterm>\succeq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\succeq</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="545">\sum</indexterm>\sum</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sum</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="546">\supset</indexterm>\supset</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\supset</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="547">\supseteq</indexterm>\supseteq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\supseteq</math> (relación)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="548">\surd</indexterm>\surd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\surd</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="549">\swarrow</indexterm>\swarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\swarrow</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="550">\tau</indexterm>\tau</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\tau</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="551">\theta</indexterm>\theta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\theta</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="552">\times</indexterm>\times</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\times</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="553">\to</indexterm>\to</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\to</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="554">\top</indexterm>\top</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\top</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="555">\triangle</indexterm>\triangle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\triangle</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="556">\triangleleft</indexterm>\triangleleft</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\triangleleft</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="557">\triangleright</indexterm>\triangleright</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\triangleright</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="558">\unlhd</indexterm>\unlhd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>punta de flecha apuntando hacia la izquierda con una línea debajo
+(operación binaria) <!-- c no en sencillo -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="559">\unrhd</indexterm>\unrhd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>punta de flecha apuntando hacia la derecha con línea debajo
+(operación binaria) <!-- c no en sencillo -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="560">\Uparrow</indexterm>\Uparrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Uparrow</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="561">\uparrow</indexterm>\uparrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\uparrow</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="562">\Updownarrow</indexterm>\Updownarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Updownarrow</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="563">\updownarrow</indexterm>\updownarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\updownarrow</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="564">\uplus</indexterm>\uplus</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\uplus</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="565">\Upsilon</indexterm>\Upsilon</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Upsilon</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="566">\upsilon</indexterm>\upsilon</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\upsilon</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="567">\varepsilon</indexterm>\varepsilon</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\varepsilon</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="568">\varphi</indexterm>\varphi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\varphi</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="569">\varpi</indexterm>\varpi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\varpi</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="570">\varrho</indexterm>\varrho</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\varrho</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="571">\varsigma</indexterm>\varsigma</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\varsigma</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="572">\vartheta</indexterm>\vartheta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\vartheta</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="573">\vdash</indexterm>\vdash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\vdash</math> (relation)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="574">\vee</indexterm>\vee</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\vee</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="575">\Vert</indexterm>\Vert</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Vert</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="576">\vert</indexterm>\vert</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\vert</math> (delimitador)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="577">\wedge</indexterm>\wedge</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\wedge</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="578">\wp</indexterm>\wp</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\wp</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="579">\wr</indexterm>\wr</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\wr</math> (operación binaria)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="580">\Xi</indexterm>\Xi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Xi</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="581">\xi</indexterm>\xi</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\xi</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="582">\zeta</indexterm>\zeta</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\zeta</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Funciones-Matem_00e1ticas" spaces=" "><nodename>Funciones Matemáticas</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Acentos Matemáticos</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Símbolos Matemáticos</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Fórmulas Matemáticas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Funciones Matemáticas</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="210">funciones matemáticas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="211">funciones, matemáticas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Estas instrucciones producen nombres de función romanos en modo math con
+el espaciado adecuado.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="583">\arccos</indexterm>\arccos</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\arccos</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="584">\arcsin</indexterm>\arcsin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\arcsin</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="585">\arctan</indexterm>\arctan</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\arctan</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="586">\arg</indexterm>\arg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\arg</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="587">\bmod</indexterm>\bmod</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Operador residuo binario (<math>x \bmod y</math>)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="588">\cos</indexterm>\cos</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\cos</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="589">\cosh</indexterm>\cosh</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\cosh</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="590">\cot</indexterm>\cot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\cos</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="591">\coth</indexterm>\coth</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\cosh</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="592">\csc</indexterm>\csc</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\csc</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="593">\deg</indexterm>\deg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\deg</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="594">\det</indexterm>\det</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\deg</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="595">\dim</indexterm>\dim</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\dim</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="596">\exp</indexterm>\exp</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\exp</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="597">\gcd</indexterm>\gcd</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\gcd</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="598">\hom</indexterm>\hom</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\hom</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="599">\inf</indexterm>\inf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\inf</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="600">\ker</indexterm>\ker</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\ker</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="601">\lg</indexterm>\lg</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\lg</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="602">\lim</indexterm>\lim</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\lim</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="603">\liminf</indexterm>\liminf</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\liminf</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="604">\limsup</indexterm>\limsup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\limsup</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="605">\ln</indexterm>\ln</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\ln</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="606">\log</indexterm>\log</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\log</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="607">\max</indexterm>\max</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\max</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="608">\min</indexterm>\min</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\min</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="609">\pmod</indexterm>\pmod</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>residuo entre paréntesis, como en (<math>\pmod 2^n - 1</math>)
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="610">\Pr</indexterm>\Pr</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\Pr</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="611">\sec</indexterm>\sec</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sec</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="612">\sin</indexterm>\sin</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sin</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="613">\sinh</indexterm>\sinh</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\sinh</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="614">\sup</indexterm>\sup</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>sup
+<!-- c see comments in latex2e.texi. -->
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="615">\tan</indexterm>\tan</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\tan</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="616">\tanh</indexterm>\tanh</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para><math>\tanh</math>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Acentos-Matem_00e1ticos" spaces=" "><nodename>Acentos Matemáticos</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Espacios en Modo Math</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Funciones Matemáticas</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Fórmulas Matemáticas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Acentos Matemáticos</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="212">acentos matemáticos</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="213">acentos, matemáticas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; proporciona una variedad de instrucciones para producir letras
+acentuadas en matemáticas. Son distintas de los acentos en un texto normal
+(<pxref label="Acentos"><xrefnodename>Acentos</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="617">\acute</indexterm>\acute</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="214">acento agudo, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Acento agudo en modo Math: <math>\acute{x}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="618">\bar</indexterm>\bar</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="215">acento barra horizontal, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="216">acento macrón, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Acento barra horizontal (macrón) en modo Math: <math>\bar{x}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="619">\breve</indexterm>\breve</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="217">acento breve, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Acento breve en modo Math: <math>\breve{x}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="620">\check</indexterm>\check</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="218">acento de verificación, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="219">acento h<accent type="acute" bracketed="off">a</accent><accent type="caron">c</accent>ek, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Acento de verificación h<accent type="acute" bracketed="off">a</accent><accent type="caron">c</accent>ek en modo Math: <math>\check{x}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="621">\ddot</indexterm>\ddot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="220">acento diéresis, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Acento diéresis en modo Math: <math>\ddot{x}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="622">\dot</indexterm>\dot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="221">acento punto superior, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="222">punto superior acento, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Acento punto superior en modo Math: <math>\dot{x}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="623">\grave</indexterm>\grave</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="223">acento grave, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Acento grave en modo Math: <math>\grave{x}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="624">\hat</indexterm>\hat</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="224">acento circunflejo, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="225">acento circunflejo, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Acento circunflejo en modo Math: <math>\hat{x}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="625">\imath</indexterm>\imath</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="226">i sin punto, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>i sin punto en modo Math.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="626">\jmath</indexterm>\jmath</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="227">j sin punto, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>j sin punto en modo Math.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="627">\tilde</indexterm>\tilde</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="228">acento tilde, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Acento tilde en modo Math: <math>\tilde{x}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="628">\vec</indexterm>\vec</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="229">símbolo de vector, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Símbolo de vector en modo Math: <math>\vec{x}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="629">\widehat</indexterm>\widehat</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="230">acento circunflejo amplio, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Acento circunflejo amplio en modo Math: <math>\widehat{x+y}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="630">\widetilde</indexterm>\widetilde</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="231">acento tilde amplia, math</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Acento tilde amplia en modo Math: <math>\widetilde{x+y}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Espacios-en-Modo-Math" spaces=" "><nodename>Espacios en Modo Math</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Miscelánea Math</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Acentos Matemáticos</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Fórmulas Matemáticas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Espacios en Modo Math</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="232">espacio dentro del modo math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="233">modo math mode, espaciado</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>En un entorno <code>math</code>, &latex; ignora los espacios que usted
+escriba y coloca espacios de acuerdo a las reglas normales para texto
+matemático. Si desea un espaciado diferente, &latex; proporciona las
+siguientes instrucciones para su uso en modo matemático:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="631">\;</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Un espacio de grosor (<math>5\over18\,</math>cuádruple).
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\:</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\&gt;</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="632">\:</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="633">\&gt;</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Ambos producen un espacio medio (<math>2\over9\,</math>cuádruple).
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\,</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="634">\,</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Un espacio fino (<math>1\over6\,</math>cuádruple); no se limita a modo matemático.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\!</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Un espacio fino negativo (<math>-{1\over6}\,</math>cuádruple).
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Miscel_00e1nea-Math" spaces=" "><nodename>Miscelánea Math</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Espacios en Modo Math</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Fórmulas Matemáticas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Miscelánea Math</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="234">miscelánea math</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="635">\*</indexterm>\*</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="235">multiplicación discrecional</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="236">símbolo de multiplicación, con salto de línea discrecional</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Un símbolo de multiplicación &textldquo;discrecional&textrdquo;, en el que se permiten
+saltos de línea.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="636">\cdots</indexterm>\cdots</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Puntos suspensivos horizontales con los puntos elevados al centro de la
+línea.
+<tex endspaces=" ">
+</tex>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="637">\ddots</indexterm>\ddots</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Puntos suspensivos en diagonal: <math>\ddots</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="638">\frac&lbrace;num&rbrace;&lbrace;den&rbrace;</indexterm>\frac&lbrace;num&rbrace;&lbrace;den&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="639">\frac</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Produce la fracción <code>num</code> dividida entre <code>den</code>.
+</para>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="640">\left <var>delimitador1</var> ... \right <var>delimitador2</var></indexterm>\left <var>delimitador1</var> ... \right <var>delimitador2</var></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="641">\right</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="237">delimitador nulo</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Los dos delimitadores no necesitan coincidir; <samp>.</samp> actúa como un
+delimitador nulo, sin producir salida. Los delimitadores son del tamaño
+de acuerdo a las matemáticas en el medio. Ejemplo: <code>\left(
+\sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="642">\overbrace&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\overbrace&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Genera un par de <var>texto</var> más. Por ejemplo,
+<math>\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;veces}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="643">\overline&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\overline&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Genera una línea horizontal sobre <var>texo</var>. Por ejemplo,
+<math>\overline{x+y}</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="644">\sqrt[<var>raíz</var>]&lbrace;argumento&rbrace;</indexterm>\sqrt[<var>raíz</var>]&lbrace;argumento&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Produce la representación de la raíz cuadrada de <var>argumento</var>. El
+argumento opcional <var>raíz</var> determina qué raíz producir. Por ejemplo,
+la raíz cúbica de <code>x+y</code> se escribe como <code>$\sqrt[3]&lbrace;x+y&rbrace;$</code>.
+<tex endspaces=" ">
+</tex>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="645">\stackrel&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>relación</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\stackrel&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>relación</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Coloca el <var>texto</var> sobre la <var>relación</var>.
+</para>
+<para>Por ejemplo, <code>\stackrel&lbrace;f&rbrace;&lbrace;\longrightarrow&rbrace;</code>.
+<tex endspaces=" ">
+</tex>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="646">\underbrace&lbrace;matemáticas&rbrace;</indexterm>\underbrace&lbrace;matemáticas&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Genera <var>matemáticas</var> con una llave por debajo.
+<tex endspaces=" ">
+</tex>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="647">\underline&lbrace;text&rbrace;</indexterm>\underline&lbrace;text&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Provoca que se subraye el <var>texto</var>, el cual bien puede estar en modo
+math o no. La línea siempre está por debajo del texto, teniendo en
+cuenta los descendientes.
+<tex endspaces=" ">
+</tex>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="648">\vdots</indexterm>\vdots</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="649">\vdots</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Produce puntos suspensivos verticales.
+<tex endspaces=" ">
+</tex>
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Modos" spaces=" "><nodename>Modos</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Estilos de Página</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Fórmulas Matemáticas</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Modos</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="238">modos</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="239">modo párrafo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="240">modo math</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="241">modo izquierda-a-derecha</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="242">modo lR</indexterm></cindex>
+
+
+<para>Cuando &latex; está procesando el texto fuente, este siempre está en
+uno de tres modos:
+</para>
+<itemize commandarg="bullet" spaces=" " endspaces=" "><itemprepend><formattingcommand command="bullet"/></itemprepend>
+<listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>Modo Párrafo
+</para></listitem><listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>Modo Math
+</para></listitem><listitem><prepend>&bullet;</prepend>
+<para>Modo de Izquierda a derecha (Left-to-Right), llamado modo LR para
+abreviar
+</para></listitem></itemize>
+
+<para>&latex; cambia el modo sólo cuando sube o baja una escala a un
+diferente nivel, aunque no todos los cambios de nivel producen cambios
+de modo. Los cambios de modo sólo se producen al entrar o salir de un
+entorno, o cuando &latex; está procesando el argumento de determinadas
+instrucciones que producen texto.
+</para>
+<para>El &textldquo;modo Párrafo&textrdquo; es el más común; es en el que &latex; está cuando
+procesa texto ordinario. En ese modo, &latex; rompe el texto en líneas
+y separa líneas en páginas. &latex; está en &textldquo;modo math&textrdquo; cuando está
+generando fórmulas matemáticas. En &textldquo;modo LR&textrdquo;, como en modo párrafo,
+&latex; considera que la salida que produce es una cadena de palabras
+con espacios entre ellas. Sin embargo, a diferencia del modo párrafo,
+&latex; sigue yendo de izquierda a derecha; nunca inicia una nueva
+línea en modo LR. Incluso si usted pone un centenar de palabras en una
+<code>\mbox</code>, &latex; mantendrá la composición de izquierda a derecha
+dentro de una caja única, y luego se quejará porque la caja resultante
+fue demasiado grande para caber en la línea.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; está en modo LR cuando comienza a hacer una caja con una
+instrucción <code>\mbox</code>. Usted puede conseguir introducirse en un modo
+diferente dentro de la caja &textmdash;por ejemplo, usted puede hacerlo entrar
+en el modo matemático para poner una fórmula en la caja. También hay
+varias instrucciones productoras de texto y entornos para hacer una caja
+que ponga a &latex; en el modo de párrafo. La caja hecha por medio de
+una de estas instrucciones o entornos se llama <code>parbox</code>. Cuando
+&latex; está en el modo de párrafo mientras que hace una caja, se dice
+que está en &textldquo;modo interno de párrafo&textrdquo;. Su modo de párrafo normal, que
+se inicia fuera de él, se llama el &textldquo;modo de párrafo externo&textrdquo;.
+</para>
+
+</chapter>
+<node name="Estilos-de-P_00e1gina" spaces=" "><nodename>Estilos de Página</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Espacios</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Modos</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Estilos de Página</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="243">estilos, página</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="244">estilos de página</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\documentclass</code> determina el tamaño y posición de
+las cabeceras y pies de página. El estilo de página determina lo que
+sucede en ellos.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\maketitle</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Genera una página de título.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\pagenumbering</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Fija el estilo utilizado para los números de página.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\pagestyle</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Cambia el estilo de las cabeceras/pies de página.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\thispagestyle</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Cambiar el estilo de las cabeceras/pies de página para esa página.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cmaketitle" spaces=" "><nodename>\maketitle</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\pagenumbering</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Estilos de Página</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\maketitle</code></sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="245">títulos, haciendo</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="650">\maketitle</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\maketitle</code> genera un título en una página
+independiente &textmdash; excepto en la clase <code>article</code>, donde se coloca el
+título en la parte superior de la primera página. La información
+utilizada para producir el título se obtiene de las siguientes
+declaraciones:
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="651">\author&lbrace;<var>nombre</var> \and <var>nombre2</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\author&lbrace;<var>nombre</var> \and <var>nombre2</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="246">autor, para titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="652">\\ <r>para <code>\author</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="653">\and <r>para <code>\author</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\author</code> declara los autor(es) del documento, donde
+el argumento es una lista de autores separados por instrucciones
+<code>\and</code>. Use <code>\\</code> para separar líneas con una única entrada de
+autor &textmdash;por ejemplo, para proporcionar las entidades de autor o
+dirección.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="654">\date&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\date&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="247">fecha, para la página de título</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\date</code> declara el <var>texto</var> para ser la fecha del
+documento. Sin la instrucción <code>\date</code>, se utiliza la fecha actual
+(<pxref label="_005ctoday"><xrefnodename>\today</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="655">\thanks&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\thanks&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="248">thanks, para titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="249">créditos al pie de página</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\thanks</code> produce un pie de página
+(<code>\footnote</code>) para el título, normalmente utilizada para
+reconocimiento de créditos.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="656">\title&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\title&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="250">title, para titlepage</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="657">\\ <r>para <code>\title</code></r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\title</code> declara <var>texto</var> para ser el título del
+documento. Use <code>\\</code> para forzar un salto de línea, de la manera
+usual.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cpagenumbering" spaces=" "><nodename>\pagenumbering</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\pagestyle</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\maketitle</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Estilos de Página</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\pagenumbering</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="658">\pagenumbering</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="251">estilo de numeración de página</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\pagenumbering&lbrace;<var>estilo</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Especifica el estilo de los números de página, de acuerdo a
+<var>estilo</var>. <code>&backslashchar;pagenumbering</code> tambien
+reinicializa le numero de pagína a <math>1</math>. Los valores de <var>estilo</var>
+que se pueden utilizar son por ejemplo::
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">arabic</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>números arábigos
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">roman</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>números romanos en minúscula
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">Roman</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>numeros romanos en mayúscula
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">alph</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>letras en minúscula
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">Alph</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>letras en mayúscula
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cpagestyle" spaces=" "><nodename>\pagestyle</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thispagestyle</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\pagenumbering</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Estilos de Página</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\pagestyle</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="659">\pagestyle</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="252">estilo de encabezado</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="253">estilo del pie de página</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="254">siguiendo el estilo de encabezado y pie de página</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\pagestyle&lbrace;<var>estilo</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\pagestyle</code> especifica como se componen
+tipográficamente las cabeceras y pies de página a partir de la página
+actual. Valores para <var>estilo</var>:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">plain</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Únicamente un número de página sencillo.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">empty</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Cabeceras y pies de página vacíos, por ejemplo, sin números de página.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">headings</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Coloca encabezados en cada página. El estilo de documento especifica lo
+que sucede en las cabeceras.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">myheadings</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Cabeceras personalizadas, especificadas via las instrucciones
+<code>\markboth</code> o <code>\markright</code>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Aquí están las descripciones de <code>\markboth</code> y <code>\markright</code>:
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="660">\markboth&lbrace;<var>izquierda</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>derecha</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\markboth&lbrace;<var>izquierda</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>derecha</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Establece ambas cabeceras izquierda y derecha. Una &textldquo;cabecera a mano
+izquierda&textrdquo; (<var>izquierda</var>) es generada por la última instrucción
+<code>\markboth</code> antes del final de la página, mientras que una
+&textldquo;cabecera a mano derecha&textrdquo; (<var>derecha</var>) es generada por la primera
+<code>\markboth</code> o <code>\markright</code> que venga en la página si la hay,
+de otra manera por la última antes de la página.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="661">\markright&lbrace;<var>derecha</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\markright&lbrace;<var>derecha</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Establece la cabecera de la derecha, dejando la cabecera de la izquierda
+sin cambios.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cthispagestyle" spaces=" "><nodename>\thispagestyle</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\pagestyle</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Estilos de Página</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thispagestyle&lbrace;<var>estilo</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="662">\thispagestyle</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\thispagestyle</code> trabaja de la misma manera que la
+instrucción <code>\pagestyle</code> (vea la sección previa) excepto que esta
+únicamente cambia el <var>estilo</var> de la página actual.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Espacios" spaces=" "><nodename>Espacios</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Cajas</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Estilos de Página</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Espacios</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="255">espacios</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; tiene muchas formas de producir espacios en blanco (o llenos).
+</para>
+<para>Otra instrucción que produce espacios es <code>\</code> para producir un
+espacio &textldquo;fino&textrdquo; (por lo general 1/6<dmn>cuadrático</dmn>).
+<!-- c vincentb1: I don't think that quad should be translated in that context. -->
+Se puede
+utilizar en modo texto, pero más a menudo es útil en modo matemático
+(<pxref label="Espacios-en-Modo-Math"><xrefnodename>Espacios en Modo Math</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menucomment><pre xml:space="preserve">Espacio horizontal
+</pre></menucomment><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\hspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Espacio horizontal fijo.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\hfill</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Espacio horizontal extensible.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\SPACE</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Espacio normal entre palabras.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\AT</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Finalizando una frase.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\thinspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Una sexta parte de una <dmn>em</dmn>.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\/</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Corrección cursiva por caracteres.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\hrulefill</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Regla horizontal extensible.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\dotfill</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Puntos horizontales extensibles.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menucomment><pre xml:space="preserve">
+Espacio Vertical
+</pre></menucomment><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\addvspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Añadiendo espacio vertical arbitrario si es necesario.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Espacio vertical fijo.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\vfill</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Espacio vertical infinitamente extensible.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\vspace</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Añadiendo espacio vertical arbitrario.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005chspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\hspace</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hfill</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Espacios</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hspace</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="663">\hspace</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\hspace[*]&lbrace;<var>longitud</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\hspace</code> añade espacio horizontal. El argumento
+<var>length</var> se puede expresar en cualquier término que &latex;
+entienda: puntos, pulgadas, etc. Esta es la longitud a preservar.
+Usted puede agregar tanto espacios negativos como positivos con una
+instrucción <code>\hspace</code>; agregar espacio negativo es como espacio
+hacia atrás.
+</para>
+<para>&latex; normalmente elimina el espacio horizontal que viene al
+principio o al final de una línea. Para preservar este espacio, use la
+forma opcional con <code>*</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005chfill" spaces=" "><nodename>\hfill</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\SPACE</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hspace</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Espacios</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hfill</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="664">\hfill</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\hfill</code> produce un &textldquo;relleno de longitud&textrdquo; que no
+tiene espacio natural sino que se puede extender o reducir en sentido
+horizontal en la medida necesaria.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="665">\fill</indexterm></findex>
+<para>El parámetro <code>\fill</code> es la misma longitud a rellenar (técnicamente,
+el valor a agregar <samp>0pt plus1fill</samp>); es decir, <code>\hspace\fill</code>
+es equivalente a <code>\hfill</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cSPACE" spaces=" "><nodename>\SPACE</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\AT</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hfill</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Espacios</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\SPACE</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="666">\SPACE</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="667">\TAB</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="668">\NEWLINE</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\ </code> (space) produce un espacio entre palabras
+normal. Es útil después de signos de puntuación que no deben terminar
+una oración. Por ejemplo, <code>Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\
+Math\. Soc.\ es fundamental</code>. Esta también se suele utilizar después de
+secuencias de control, como en <code>\TeX\ es un sistema agradable</code>.
+</para>
+<para>En circunstancias normales, <code>\</code><key>tab</key> y <code>\</code><key>newline</key>
+son equivalentes a <code>\ </code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cAT" spaces=" "><nodename>\AT</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\thinspace</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\SPACE</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Espacios</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\&arobase;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="669">\&arobase;</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\&arobase;</code> hace que el siguiente carácter de puntuación
+final una declaración incluso si normalmente no es así. Esto se suele
+utilizar después de una letra mayúscula. Aquí están lado a lado
+ejemplos con y sin <code>\&arobase;</code>:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">&dots; en C\&arobase;. Pascal, aunque &dots;
+&dots; en C. Pascal, aunque &dots;
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent> <para>produce
+</para>
+<!-- c Texinfo lo hace de manera diferente, pero el resultado es el mismo. -->
+<quotation endspaces=" ">
+<para>&dots; en C&eosperiod; Pascal, aunque &dots;
+&dots; en C. Pascal, aunque &dots;
+</para></quotation>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cthinspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\thinspace</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\/</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\AT</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Espacios</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\thinspace</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="670">\thinspace</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para><code>\thinspace</code> produce un espacio inviolable e inextensible que es de
+un 1/6 de <dmn>em</dmn>. Este es el espacio adecuado para su uso en citas
+anidadas, como en &textrsquo;<dmn>&textrdquo;</dmn>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005c_002f" spaces=" "><nodename>\/</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\hrulefill</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\thinspace</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Espacios</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\/</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="671">\/</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\/</code> produce una <dfn>corrección en cursiva</dfn>. Este
+es un pequeño espacio definido por el diseñador de tipografías para un
+carácter determinado, para evitar chocar con el carácter que lo sigue.
+El carácter en cursiva <i>f</i> típicamente tiene un valor de corrección en
+cursiva grande.
+</para>
+<para>Si el siguiente carácter es un punto o una coma, no es necesario
+insertar una corrección en cursiva, dado que estos símbolos tienen una
+puntuación de muy poca altura. Sin embargo, con punto y coma o dos
+puntos, así como letras normales, puede ayudar. Compare
+<tex endspaces=" ">
+</tex>
+<i>f: f;</i> (en la salida &tex;, las &textlsquo;f&textrsquo;s están separadas correctamente)
+con <i>f: f;</i>.
+</para>
+<para>A pesar del nombre, los caracteres latinos también pueden tener una
+corrección en cursiva. Compare
+<tex endspaces=" ">
+</tex>
+pdf&tex; (en la &tex; salida, hay un pequeño espacio después de la
+&textlsquo;f&textrsquo;)
+con pdf&tex;.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005chrulefill" spaces=" "><nodename>\hrulefill</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\dotfill</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\/</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Espacios</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\hrulefill</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="672">\hrulefill</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\hrulefill</code> produce un &textldquo;relleno de longitud&textrdquo; el
+cual se puede estrechar o estirar horizontalmente. Este se llenará con
+una regla horizontal.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cdotfill" spaces=" "><nodename>\dotfill</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addvspace</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\hrulefill</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Espacios</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\dotfill</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="673">\dotfill</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\dotfill</code> produce un &textldquo;relleno de longitud&textrdquo; la
+cual se rellena con puntos en lugar de sólo espacios en blanco.
+</para>
+
+<!-- c xx deshacer -->
+</section>
+<node name="_005caddvspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\addvspace</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\dotfill</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Espacios</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\addvspace</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="674">\addvspace</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="256">espacio vertical</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="257">espacio vertical, insertando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para><code>\addvspace&lbrace;longitud&rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\addvspace</code> normalmente añade un espacio vertical
+de altura longitud. Sin embargo, si el espacio vertical ya se ha
+añadido al mismo punto en la salida por medio de una instrucción
+<code>\addvspace</code> anterior, esta instrucción no añade más espacio que el
+necesario para hacer que la longitud natural del espacio vertical total
+equivalente a <code>longitud</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cbigskip-_005cmedskip-_005csmallskip" spaces=" "><nodename>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vfill</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\addvspace</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Espacios</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<para>Estas instrucciones producen una determinada cantidad de espacio.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\bigskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="675">\bigskip</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="676">\bigskipamount</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Al igual que <code>\vspace&lbrace;bigskipamount&rbrace;</code>, normalmente alrededor de
+un espacio de línea (con estirar y encoger).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\medskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="677">\medskip</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="678">\medskipamount</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Al igual que <code>\vspace&lbrace;medskipamount&rbrace;</code>, normalmente cerca de la
+mitad del espacio de una línea (con estirar y encoger).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\smallskip</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="679">\smallskip</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="680">\smallskipamount</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Al igual que <code>\vspace&lbrace;smallskipamount&rbrace;</code>, normalmente alrededor de
+un cuarto del espacio de una línea (con estirar y encoger).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>Los parámetros <code>\...cantidad</code> están determinados por la clase de
+documento.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cvfill" spaces=" "><nodename>\vfill</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\vspace</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Espacios</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vfill</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="681">\vfill</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\vfill</code> produce un relleno de longitud (pegado) el
+cual se puede reducir y estirar verticalmente tanto como sea necesario.
+Este es equivalente a <code>\vspace&lbrace;\fill&rbrace;</code> (<pxref label="_005chfill"><xrefnodename>\hfill</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cvspace" spaces=" "><nodename>\vspace</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\vfill</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Espacios</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\vspace[*]&lbrace;<var>longitud</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="682">\vspace</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\vspace[*]&lbrace;<var>longitud</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\vspace</code> añade el espacio vertical <var>length</var>, es
+decir, un relleno de longitud. <var>longitud</var> puede ser positivo o
+negativo.
+</para>
+<para>Normalmente, &latex; remueve el espacio vertical añadido por
+<code>\vspace</code> en la parte superior o inferior de una página. Con el
+argumento opcional <code>*</code>, no se elimina el espacio.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Cajas" spaces=" "><nodename>Cajas</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Inserciones Especiales</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Espacios</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Cajas</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="258">cajas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Todos los parámetros de longitud predeterminados (<pxref label="Longitudes-Predeterminadas"><xrefnodename>Longitudes
+Predeterminadas</xrefnodename></pxref>) se pueden utilizar en los argumentos de las
+instrucciones que generan cajas.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\mbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Cajas horizontales.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\fbox y \framebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Coloca un marco alrededor de una caja.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">lrbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Un entorno como <code>\sbox</code>.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\makebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Caja, de posición ajustable.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\parbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Caja con texto en modo párrafo.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\raisebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Sube o baja el texto.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\savebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Al igual que <code>\makebox</code>, pero guarda el texto para utilizarlo posteriormente.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\sbox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Igual que <code>\mbox</code>, pero guarda el texto para utilizarlo posteriormente.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\usebox</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Imprime texto guardado.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cmbox" spaces=" "><nodename>\mbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\fbox y \framebox</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Cajas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\mbox&lbrace;<var>texto&rbrace;</var></code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="683">\mbox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="259">división silábica, impidiendo</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\mbox</code> crea una caja lo suficientemente ancha para
+contener el texto creado por sus argumentos. El <var>texto</var> no se
+separa en líneas, por lo tanto este se puede utilizar para prevenir la
+separación silábica.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cfbox-y-_005cframebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\fbox y \framebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">lrbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\mbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cajas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\fbox</code> y <code>\framebox</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="684">\fbox</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="685">\framebox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\fbox&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+\framebox[<var>ancho</var>][<var>posición</var>]&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Las instrucciones <code>\fbox</code> y <code>\framebox</code> son como <code>\mbox</code>,
+excepto que estas ponen un marco al rededor del exterior de la caja que
+se está creando.
+</para>
+<para>Además, la instrucción <code>\framebox</code> permite especificar
+explícitamente la anchura de la caja con el argumento opcional
+<var>width</var> (una dimensión), y la posiciona con el argumento opcional
+<var>posición</var>. <!-- c xx ref -->
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="686">\fboxrule</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="687">\fboxsep</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Ambas instrucciones producen una regla de espesor <code>\fboxrule</code>
+(predeterminado a <samp>.4pt</samp>), y dejan un espacio de <code>\fboxsep</code>
+(predeterminado a <samp>3pt</samp>) entre la regla y el contenido de la caja.
+</para>
+<para><xref label="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\framebox (picture)</xrefnodename></xref>, para la instrucción <code>\framebox</code> en el
+entorno <code>picture</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="lrbox" spaces=" "><nodename>lrbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\makebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\fbox y \framebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cajas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>lrbox</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="688">lrbox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para><code>\begin&lbrace;lrbox&rbrace;&lbrace;instrucción&rbrace; texto \end&lbrace;lrbox&rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+<para>Esta es la forma de entorno de <code>\sbox</code>.
+</para>
+<para>El texto dentro del entorno se guarda en la caja <code>instrucción</code>,
+misma que se debe haber declarado con <code>\newsavebox</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cmakebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\makebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\parbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">lrbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cajas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\makebox</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="689">\makebox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\makebox[<var>ancho</var>][<var>posición</var>]&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\makebox</code> crea una caja lo suficientemente ancha
+para contener el <var>texto</var> especificado. La anchura de la caja es
+especificada por el argumento opcional <var>ancho</var>. La posición del
+texto dentro de la caja está determinada por el argumento opcional
+<var>posición</var>, el cual puede tomar los siguientes valores:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Centrado (predeterminado).
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">l</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Alineado a la izquierda
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">r</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Alineado a la derecha
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">s</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Alineado (justificado) a través de <var>ancho</var>; <var>texto</var> debe
+contener espacio elástico para que esto funcione.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para><code>\makebox</code> también se utiliza en el entorno picture <pxref label="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"><xrefnodename>\makebox
+(picture)</xrefnodename></pxref>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cparbox" spaces=" "><nodename>\parbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\raisebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\makebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cajas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\parbox</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="690">\parbox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\parbox[<var>posición</var>][<var>alto</var>][<var>pos-interna</var>]&lbrace;<var>ancho</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\parbox</code> produce una caja cuyo contenido es creado
+en modo <code>paragraph</code>. Se debe utilizar para hacer una caja de
+pequeñas piezas de texto, sin nada lujoso en el interior. En
+particular, no debe utilizar ningún entorno que genere párrafos dentro
+de un argumento <code>\parbox</code>. Para grandes piezas de texto,
+incluyendo aquellas que contienen un entorno que genera párrafos, debe
+usar un entorno <code>minipágina</code> (<pxref label="minipage"><xrefnodename>minipage</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<para><code>\parbox</code> tiene dos argumentos obligatorios:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">ancho</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>la anchura de parbox;
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">texto</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El texto que va dentro de la parbox.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<para>El argumento opcional <var>posición</var> le permite alinear la línea en la
+parte superior o inferior de parbox con la línea base del texto que lo
+rodea (de manera predeterminada es superior).
+</para>
+<para>El argumento opcional <var>alto</var> reemplaza la altura natural de la caja.
+</para>
+<para>Al argumento <var>pos-interior</var> controla la ubicación del texto dentro
+de la caja de la siguiente manera; Si no se especifica, se utiliza
+<var>posición</var>.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">t</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El texto es colocado en la parte superior de la caja.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">c</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El texto se coloca al centro de la caja.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El texto se coloca en la parte inferior de la caja.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">s</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Se extiende verticalmente; el texto debe contener espacio vertical
+extensible para que esto funcione.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005craisebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\raisebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\savebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\parbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cajas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\raisebox</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="691">\raisebox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\raisebox&lbrace;distancia&rbrace;[<var>alto</var>][<var>profundidad</var>]&lbrace;texto&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\raisebox</code> aumenta o disminuye el <var>texto</var>. El
+primer argumento obligatorio especifica a qué altura se va a levantar (o
+bajar si la cantidad es negativa) el <var>texto</var>. El <var>texto</var> mismo
+es procesado en modo LR.
+</para>
+<para>Los argumentos opcionales <var>alto</var> y <var>profundidad</var> son
+dimensiones. Si se especifican, &latex; trata a <var>texto</var> como una
+ampliación de una distancia determinada sobre la línea base (alto) o
+bajo (profundidad), omitiendo su altura y profundidad natural.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csavebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\savebox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\sbox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\raisebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cajas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\savebox</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="692">\savebox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\savebox&lbrace;<var>\instrucción-caja</var>&rbrace;[<var>ancho</var>][<var>posición</var>]&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Esta instrucción fija la tipografía de <var>texto</var> en una caja al igual
+que <code>\makebox</code> (<pxref label="_005cmakebox"><xrefnodename>\makebox</xrefnodename></pxref>), excepto que el lugar de imprimir
+la caja resultante, esta la guarda en la caja etiquetada
+<var>\instrucción-caja</var>, que se debe haber declarado con
+<code>\newsavebox</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewsavebox"><xrefnodename>\newsavebox</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csbox" spaces=" "><nodename>\sbox</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\usebox</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\savebox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cajas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\sbox&lbrace;<var>\instrucción-caja</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="693">\sbox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\sbox&lbrace;<var>\instrucción-caja</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para><code>\sbox</code> escribe el <var>texto</var> en una caja tal como <code>\mbox</code>
+(<pxref label="_005cmbox"><xrefnodename>\mbox</xrefnodename></pxref>) excepto que en lugar de incluir la caja resultante en la
+salida normal, esta la guarda en la caja etiquetada
+<var>\instrucción-caja</var>. <var>\instrucción-caja</var> se debió declarar
+previamente con <code>\newsavebox</code> (<pxref label="_005cnewsavebox"><xrefnodename>\newsavebox</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cusebox" spaces=" "><nodename>\usebox</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\sbox</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cajas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\usebox&lbrace;<var>\instrucción-caja</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="694">\usebox</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\usebox&lbrace;<var>\instrucción-caja</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para><code>\usebox</code> produce la caja guardada más recientemente en el depósito
+<var>\instrucción-caja</var> por una instrucción <code>\savebox</code>
+(<pxref label="_005csavebox"><xrefnodename>\savebox</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Inserciones-Especiales" spaces=" "><nodename>Inserciones Especiales</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Dividiendo la Entrada</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Cajas</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Inserciones Especiales</sectiontitle>
+
+<para>&latex; proporciona instrucciones para insertar caracteres que tienen
+un significado especial que no corresponde a caracteres simples que
+usted puede escribir.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Caracteres Reservados</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insertando # $ % &amp; ~ _ ^ \ &lbrace; &rbrace;
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Símbolos de Texto</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insertando en el texto otros símbolos distintos a letras.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Acentos</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insertando acentos.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">Caracteres no Ingleses</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insertando otros caracteres no Ingleses.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\rule</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insertando líneas y rectángulos.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\today</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Insertando la fecha de hoy.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Caracteres-Reservados" spaces=" "><nodename>Caracteres Reservados</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Símbolos de Texto</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Inserciones Especiales</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Caracteres Reservados</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="260">caracteres reservados</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="261">caracteres, reservados</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Los siguientes caracteres desempeñan un papel especial en &latex; y se
+llaman &textldquo;caracteres reservados&textrdquo; o &textldquo;caracteres especiales&textrdquo;.
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"># $ % &amp; ~ _ ^ \ &lbrace; &rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="695">\#</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="696">\$</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="697">\%</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="698">\&amp;</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="699">\_</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="700">\&lbrace;</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="701">\&rbrace;</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Siempre que escriba en su archivo uno de estos caracteres, &latex; debe
+hacer algo especial. Si simplemente desea imprimir el carácter en sí
+mismo, incluya un carácter <code>\</code> anteponiéndolo a este. Por ejemplo,
+<code>\$</code> debe producir <code>$</code> en su salida.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="702">\backslash</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Una excepción a esta regla es la <code>\</code> misma, debido a que <code>\</code>
+tiene su propio significado especial (dependiente del contexto). Una \
+romana es producida al escribir <code>$\backslash$</code> en su archivo, y una
+<code>\</code> de máquina de escribir es producida usando <samp>\</samp> en una
+instrucción verbatim (<pxref label="verbatim"><xrefnodename>verbatim</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="703">\~</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="704">\^</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Además, <code>\~</code> y <code>\^</code> colocan acentos tilde y circunflejo sobre
+la siguiente letra, como en <accent type="tilde">o</accent> y <accent type="circ">o</accent> (<pxref label="Acentos"><xrefnodename>Acentos</xrefnodename></pxref>); Para
+obtener una <code>~</code> o <code>^</code> independiente, usted puede utilizar una
+instrucción verbatim.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="705">\symbol</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="262">accediendo a cualquier carácter del tipo de letra</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Por último, puede acceder a cualquier carácter del tipo de letra actual
+una vez que sepa su número utilizando la instrucción <code>\symbol</code>. Por
+ejemplo, el carácter de espacio visibles utilizada en la instrucción
+<code>\verb*</code> tiene el código decimal 32, por lo tanto se puede escribir
+como <code>\symbol&lbrace;32&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<para>También puede especificar números octales con <code>'</code> o números
+hexadecimales con <code>&quot;</code>, por lo que el ejemplo anterior también se
+podría escribir como <code>\symbol&lbrace;'40&rbrace;</code> o <code>\symbol&lbrace;&quot;20&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="S_00edmbolos-de-Texto" spaces=" "><nodename>Símbolos de Texto</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Acentos</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Caracteres Reservados</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Inserciones Especiales</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Símbolos de Texto</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="263">símbolos de texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="706"><r>paquete</r> textcomp</indexterm></findex>
+<para>&latex; proporciona instrucciones para generar una serie símbolos
+distintos de letras, en el texto. Algunos de estos, especialmente los
+más oscuros, no están disponibles en OT1; posiblemente tenga que cargar
+el paquete <code>textcomp</code>.
+</para>
+<ftable commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="707">\copyright</indexterm>\copyright</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="708">\textcopyright</indexterm>\textcopyright</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="264">símbolo de copyright</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El símbolo de copyright, &copyright;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="709">\dag</indexterm>\dag</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="265">daga, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El símbolo daga (en texto).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="710">\ddag</indexterm>\ddag</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="266">doble daga, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El símbolo doble daga (en texto).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="711">\LaTeX</indexterm>\LaTeX</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="267">Logotipo de &latex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="268">logotipo, &latex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El logotipo de &latex;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="712">\LaTeXe</indexterm>\LaTeXe</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="269">Logotipo de &latex;2e</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="270">logotipo, &latex;2e</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El logotypo de &latex;2e.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="713">\guillemotleft <r>(&laquo;)</r></indexterm>\guillemotleft <r>(&laquo;)</r></itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="714">\guillemotright <r>(&raquo;)</r></indexterm>\guillemotright <r>(&raquo;)</r></itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="715">\guilsinglleft <r>(&lsaquo;)</r></indexterm>\guilsinglleft <r>(&lsaquo;)</r></itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="716">\guilsinglright <r>(&rsaquo;)</r></indexterm>\guilsinglright <r>(&rsaquo;)</r></itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="271">comillas tipográficas, latinas o angulares</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="272">comillas tipográficas simples</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="273">comilla angular de apertura</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="274">comilla angular de cierre</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="275">comillas tipográficas angulares</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="276">comillas tipográficas angulares simples</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="277">comillas tipográficas Francesas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="278">comillas tipográficas, Francesas</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Comillas tipográficas angulares dobles y simples, utilizadas comúnmente
+en Francés: &laquo;, &raquo;, &lsaquo;,
+&rsaquo;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="717">\ldots</indexterm>\ldots</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="718">\dots</indexterm>\dots</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="719">\textellipsis</indexterm>\textellipsis</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="279">puntos suspensivos</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Puntos suspensivos (tres puntos en la línea base): &textlsquo;&dots;&textrsquo;.
+<code>\ldots</code> y <code>\dots</code> también trabajan en modo math.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="720">\lq</indexterm>\lq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="280">comilla izquierda</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="281">comilla de apertura</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Comilla izquierda (de apertura): &textlsquo;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="721">\P</indexterm>\P</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="722">\textparagraph</indexterm>\textparagraph</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="282">símbolo de párrafo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="283">antígrafo o simplemente signo de párrafo</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Signo de párrafo (antígrafo).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="723">\pounds</indexterm>\pounds</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="724">\textsterling</indexterm>\textsterling</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="284">símbolo de libra esterlina</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="285">símbolo de libra esterlina</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Libras esterlinas en Inglés: &pound;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="725">\quotedblbase <r>(&bdquo;)</r></indexterm>\quotedblbase <r>(&bdquo;)</r></itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="726">\quotesinglbase <r>(&sbquo;)</r></indexterm>\quotesinglbase <r>(&sbquo;)</r></itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="286">comillas dobles en línea base</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="287">comilla simple en línea base</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="288">comilla en línea base, simple y doble</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Simple y dobles comillas en la línea base:
+&bdquo; y &sbquo;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="727">\rq</indexterm>\rq</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="289">comilla derecha</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="290">comilla de cierre</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Comilla derecha (de cierre): &textrsquo;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="728">\S</indexterm>\S</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="291">símbolo de sección</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Símbolo de sección.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="729">\TeX</indexterm>\TeX</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="292">logotipo de &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="293">logotipo, &tex;</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El logotipo de &tex;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="730">\textasciicircum</indexterm>\textasciicircum</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="294">circunflejo, ASCII, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="295">ASCII circunflejo, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Circunflejo ASCII: ^.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="731">\textasciitilde</indexterm>\textasciitilde</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="296">tilde, ASCII, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="297">tilde ASCII, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Tilde ASCII: ~.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="732">\textasteriskcentered</indexterm>\textasteriskcentered</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="298">asterisco, centrado, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="299">asterisco centrado, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Asterisco centrado: *.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="733">\textbackslash</indexterm>\textbackslash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="300">barra inversa, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Barra inversa: \.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="734">\textbar</indexterm>\textbar</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="301">barra vertical, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="302">bar, vertical, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Barra Vertical: |.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="735">\textbardbl</indexterm>\textbardbl</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="303">barra vertical, doble, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="304">barra, vertical doble, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="305">doble barra vertical, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Doble barra vertical.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="736">\textbigcircle</indexterm>\textbigcircle</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="306">símbolo círculo grande, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="307">símbolo de círculo, grande, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Símbolo círculo grande.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="737">\textbraceleft</indexterm>\textbraceleft</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="308">llave de apertura, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="309">llave, izquierda, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Llave izquierda: &lbrace;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="738">\textbraceright</indexterm>\textbraceright</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="310">llave derecha, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="311">llave, derecha, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Llave derecha: &rbrace;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="739">\textbullet</indexterm>\textbullet</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="312">bala, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Bala: &bullet;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="740">\textcircled&lbrace;<var>letra</var>&rbrace;</indexterm>\textcircled&lbrace;<var>letra</var>&rbrace;</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="313">letra en círculo, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para><var>letra</var> en un círculo, como en &registered;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="741">\textcompwordmark</indexterm>\textcompwordmark</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="742">\textcapitalwordmark</indexterm>\textcapitalwordmark</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="743">\textascenderwordmark</indexterm>\textascenderwordmark</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="314">marca palabra compuesta, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="315">tapa superior</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="316">ascender superior</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Marca de palabra compuesta (invisible). La forma <code>\textcapital...</code>
+tiene la tapa del tipo de letra, mientras que la forma
+<code>\textascender...</code> tiene el ascender superior.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="744">\textdagger</indexterm>\textdagger</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="317">daga, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Daga: <math>\dag</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="745">\textdaggerdbl</indexterm>\textdaggerdbl</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="318">daga, doble, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="319">daga doble, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Daga doble: <math>\ddag</math>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="746">\textdollar <r>(o <code>\$</code>)</r></indexterm>\textdollar <r>(o <code>\$</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="320">signo de dólar</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="321">moneda, dólar</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Signo de Dólar: $.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="747">\textemdash <r>(o <code>---</code>)</r></indexterm>\textemdash <r>(o <code>---</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="322">em-dash</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Em-dash: &textmdash; (para puntuación).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="748">\textendash <r>(o <code>--</code>)</r></indexterm>\textendash <r>(o <code>--</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="323">e-dash</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>En-dash: &textmdash; (para rangos).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="749">\texteuro</indexterm>\texteuro</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="324">símbolo del euro</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="325">divisas, euro</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El Símbolo del Euro: &euro;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="750">\textexclamdown <r>(o <code>!`</code>)</r></indexterm>\textexclamdown <r>(o <code>!`</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="326">exclamación, inicial</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Signo de exclamación inicial: &iexcl;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="751">\textgreater</indexterm>\textgreater</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="327">símbolo mayor que, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Mayor que: &gt;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="752">\textless</indexterm>\textless</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="328">símbolo menor que, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Menor que: &lt;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="753">\textleftarrow</indexterm>\textleftarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="329">flecha, izquierda, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="330">flecha hacia la izquierda, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Flecha izquierda.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="754">\textordfeminine</indexterm>\textordfeminine</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="755">\textordmasculine</indexterm>\textordmasculine</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="331">Símbolo ordinal femenino</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="332">símbolo ordinal masculino</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="333">ordinales, femenino y masculino</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="334">ordinales en español, femenino y masculino</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Símbolos ordinales femenino y masculino: &ordf;, &ordm;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="756">\textordfeminine</indexterm>\textordfeminine</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="335">símbolo femenino ordinal</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Símbolo ordinal femenino: &ordf;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="757">\textperiodcentered</indexterm>\textperiodcentered</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="336">punto, centrado, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="337">punto centrado, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Punto centrado: ·.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="758">\textquestiondown <r>(o <code>?`</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquestiondown <r>(o <code>?`</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="338">interrogación, inicial</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Signo de interrogación inicial: &iquest;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="759">\textquotedblleft <r>(o <code>``</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquotedblleft <r>(o <code>``</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="339">marca izquierda, doble</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="340">comillas dobles de apertura</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Comillas dobles de apertura: &textldquo;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="760">\textquotedblright <r>(o <code>'</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquotedblright <r>(o <code>'</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="341">comillas de cierre, dobles</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="342">comillas de cierre dobles</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Dobles comillas de cierre: &textrdquo;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="761">\textquoteleft <r>(o <code>`</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquoteleft <r>(o <code>`</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="343">comilla izquierda, sola</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="344">comilla de apertura simple</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Comilla de apertura simple: &textlsquo;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="762">\textquoteright <r>(o <code>'</code>)</r></indexterm>\textquoteright <r>(o <code>'</code>)</r></itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="345">comilla de cierre, simple</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="346">comilla de cierre simple</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Comilla de cierre simple: &textrsquo;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="763">\textquotestraightbase</indexterm>\textquotestraightbase</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="764">\textquotestraightdblbase</indexterm>\textquotestraightdblbase</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="347">comilla, en la línea base (coma)</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="348">comillastraight quote, base</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="349">guión doble, línea recta</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="350">línea recta de guión doble, base</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Líneas rectas simples y dobles en la línea base.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="765">\textregistered</indexterm>\textregistered</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="351">símbolo de marca registrada</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Símbolo de marca registrada: &registered;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="766">\textrightarrow</indexterm>\textrightarrow</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="352">flecha derecha, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="353">flecha hacia la derecha, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Flecha hacia la derecha.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="767">\textthreequartersemdash</indexterm>\textthreequartersemdash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="354">em-dash de tres cuartos</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="355">em-dash, tres cuartos</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>em-dash de &textldquo;Tres cuartos&textrdquo;, entre en-dash y em-dash.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="768">\texttrademark</indexterm>\texttrademark</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="356">símbolo de marca comercial</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Símbolo de marca comercial: ™.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="769">\texttwelveudash</indexterm>\texttwelveudash</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Xx 12u-.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="770">\textunderscore</indexterm>\textunderscore</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="357">subrayado, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Subrayado: _.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code"><indexterm index="fn" number="771">\textvisiblespace</indexterm>\textvisiblespace</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="358">símbolo de espacio visible, en texto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Símbolo de espacio visible.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></ftable>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Acentos" spaces=" "><nodename>Acentos</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Caracteres no Ingleses</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Símbolos de Texto</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Inserciones Especiales</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Acentos</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="359">acentos</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="360">caracteres, acentuados</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="361">letras, acentuadas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>&latex; tiene un amplio apoyo para muchos de los guiones de idiomas del
+mundo, a través del paquete <code>babel</code> y de apoyo relacionados. Esta
+sección no pretende abarcar todas con las que es compatible. Este
+simplemente se limita a enumerar las principales instrucciones &latex;
+para crear caracteres acentuados.
+</para>
+<para>Las instrucciones <code>\capital...</code> producen formas alternativas para
+su uso con letras mayúsculas. Estas no están disponibles con OT1.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\&quot;</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitaldieresis</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="772">\&quot; <r>(acento diéresis)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="773">\capitaldieresis</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="362">acento diéresis</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="363">acento diéresis</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce una diéresis, como en <accent type="uml">o</accent>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\'</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalacute</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="774">\' <r>(acento agudo)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="775">\capitalacute</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="364">acento agudo</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce un acento agudo, como en <accent type="acute">o</accent>. En el entorno <code>tabbing</code>,
+empuja la columna actual a la derecha de la columna anterior
+(<pxref label="tabbing"><xrefnodename>tabbing</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\.</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="776">\. <r>(acento punto encima)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="365">acento punto</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="366">acento punto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce un punto como acento sobre la siguiente, como en <accent type="dotaccent">o</accent>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\=</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalmacron</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="777">\= <r>(acento macrón)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="778">\capitalmacron</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="367">acento macrón</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="368">acento barra encima</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="369">acento barra sobre</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce un acento macrón (una barra) sobre el siguiente, como en <accent type="macr">o</accent>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\^</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalcircumflex</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="779">\^ <r>(acento circunflejo)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="780">\capitalcircumflex</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="370">acento circunflejo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="371">acento circunflejo</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce un acento circunflejo (sombrero) sobre la siguiente, como en
+<accent type="circ">o</accent>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\`</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalgrave</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="781">\` <r>(acento grave)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="782">\capitalgrave</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="372">acento grave</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce un acento grave sobre la siguiente, como en <accent type="grave">o</accent>. En el
+entorno <code>tabbing</code>, mueve el siguiente texto hacia el margen derecho
+(<pxref label="tabbing"><xrefnodename>tabbing</xrefnodename></pxref>).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\~</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitaltilde</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="783">\~ <r>(acento tilde)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="784">\capitaltilde</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="373">acento tilde</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce una tilde como acento sobre la siguiente, como en <accent type="tilde">n</accent>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\b</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="785">\b <r>(acento barra)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="374">acento barra</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce una barra como acento debajo de la siguiente, como en
+<accent type="ubaraccent">o</accent>. Vea también <code>\underbar</code> a continuación
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\c</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalcedilla</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="786">\c <r>(acento cedilla)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="787">\capitalcedilla</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="375">acento cedilla</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce una cedilla como acento sobre la siguiente, como en <accent type="cedil">c</accent>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\d</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitaldotaccent</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="788">\d <r>(acento círculo)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="789">\capitaldotaccent</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="376">acento círculo</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce un círculo como acento sobre la siguiente, como en
+<accent type="udotaccent">o</accent>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\H</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalhungarumlaut</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="790">\H <r>(acento diéresis Húngara)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="791">\capitalhungarumlaut</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="377">acento diéresis húngara</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce un acento diéresis húngaro sobre la siguiente, como en <accent type="doubleacute">o</accent>.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\i</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="792">\i <r>(i sin punto)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="378">i sin punto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce una i sin punto, como en &textlsquo;<dotless>i</dotless>&textrsquo;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\j</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="793">\j <r>(j sin punto)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="379">j sin punto</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce una j sin punto, como en &textlsquo;<dotless>j</dotless>&textrsquo;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\k</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalogonek</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="794">\k <r>(colita &textmdash;ogonek en polaco)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="795">\capitalogonek</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="380">colita</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce una letra con colita, como en &textlsquo;<accent type="ogon">o</accent>&textrsquo;. No disponible en la
+codificación OT1.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\r</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalring</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="796">\r <r>(acento anillo)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="797">\capitalring</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="381">anillo acento</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce un anillo como acento, como en &textlsquo;<accent type="ring">o</accent>&textrsquo;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\t</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitaltie</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\newtie</itemformat></itemx>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalnewtie</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="798">\t <r>(acento atadura con siguiente)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="799">\capitaltie</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="800">\newtie</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="801">\capitalnewtie</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="382">atadura con siguiente acento</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce una atadura con el siguiente como acento, como en
+&textlsquo;<accent type="tieaccent">oo</accent>&textrsquo;. La forma <code>\newtie</code> está centrada en su caja.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\u</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalbreve</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="802">\u <r>(breve acento)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="803">\capitalbreve</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="383">breve acento</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce un acento breve, como en &textlsquo;<accent type="breve">o</accent>&textrsquo;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\underbar</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="804">\underbar</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="384">subrayado</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>No es exactamente un acento, este produce una barra en el argumento
+texto. El argumento siempre se procesa en modo horizontal. La barra
+siempre está en una posición fija en la línea base, por lo que cruza a
+través de los trazos descendentes. Vea también <code>\underline</code> en
+<ref label="Miscel_00e1nea-Math"><xrefnodename>Miscelánea Math</xrefnodename></ref>. Vea también <code>\b</code> aquí antes
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\v</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\capitalcaron</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="805">\v <r>(breve acento)</r></indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="806">\capitalcaron</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="385">acento anticircunflejo</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="386">anticircunflejo acento</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="387">carón acento</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Produce un acento h<accent type="acute" bracketed="off">a</accent><accent type="caron">c</accent>ek (anticircunflejo, carón), como en &textlsquo;<accent type="caron">o</accent>&textrsquo;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Caracteres-no-Ingleses" spaces=" "><nodename>Caracteres no Ingleses</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\rule</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Acentos</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Inserciones Especiales</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Caracteres no Ingleses</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="388">caracteres especiales</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="389">caracteres no Ingleses</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="390">caracteres, no Ingleses</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="391">letras, no Inglesas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Estas son las instrucciones &latex; básicas para insertar los
+caracteres más usados en idiomas distintos del Inglés.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<beforefirstitem>
+</beforefirstitem><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\aa</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\AA</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="807">\aa (&aring;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="808">\AA (&Aring;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="392">ash</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&aring; y &Aring;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ae</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\AE</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="809">\ae (&aelig;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="810">\AE (&AElig;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="393">ligadura ae</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&aelig; y &AElig;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\dh</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DH</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="811">\dh (&aelig;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="812">\DH (&AElig;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="394">islandés eth</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="395">eth, letra islandesa</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Letra eth islandesa: &eth; y &ETH;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\dj</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\DJ</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="813">\dj</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="814">\DJ</indexterm></findex>
+<para>xxxx
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ij</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\IJ</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="815">\ij (ij)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="816">\IJ (IJ)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="396">letra ij, Neerlandés</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>ij y IJ (salvo que un poco más juntas que como aparecen aquí).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\l</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\L</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="817">\l (&lslash;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="818">\L (&Lslash;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="397">l Polaca</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&lslash; y &Lslash;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ng</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\NG</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="819">\ng</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="820">\NG</indexterm></findex>
+<para>xxxx
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\o</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\O</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="821">\o (&oslash;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="822">\O (&Oslash;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="398">oslash</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&oslash; y &Oslash;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\oe</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\OE</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="823">\oe (&oelig;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="824">\OE (&OElig;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="399">oe ligadura</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&oelig; y &OElig;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\ss</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\SS</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="825">\ss (&szlig;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="826">\SS (SS)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="400">es-zet letra Alemana</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="401">letras S afiladas</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>&szlig; y SS.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\th</itemformat></item>
+<itemx spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">\TH</itemformat></itemx>
+</tableterm><tableitem><findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="827">\th (&thorn;)</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="828">\TH (&THORN;)</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="402">espina Islandesa</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="403">espina, letra Islandesa</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Letra espina Islandesa: &thorn; y &THORN;.
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005crule" spaces=" "><nodename>\rule</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\today</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Caracteres no Ingleses</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Inserciones Especiales</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\rule</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="829">\rule</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\rule[<var>aumentar</var>]&lbrace;<var>ancho</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>espesor</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\rule</code> produce <dfn>reglas</dfn>, que son, líneas o
+rectángulos. Los argumentos son:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">aumentar</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Qué tanto aumentar la regla (opcional).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">ancho</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>La longitud de la regla (obligatorio).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">espesor</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El espesor de la regla (obligatorio).
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005ctoday" spaces=" "><nodename>\today</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\rule</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Inserciones Especiales</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\today</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="830">\today</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\today</code> produce la fecha de hoy, en formato
+<samp><var>mes</var> <var>dd</var>, <var>aaaa</var></samp>; por ejemplo, &textlsquo;Julio 04 1976&textrsquo;.
+Utiliza los contadores predefinidos <code>\day</code>, <code>\month</code>, y
+<code>\year</code> (<pxref label="_005cday-_005cmonth-_005cyear"><xrefnodename>\day \month \year</xrefnodename></pxref>) para hacerlo. No se actualiza
+cuando se ejecuta el programa.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="404">paquete <code>datetime</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El paquete <code>datetime</code>, entre otros, puede producir una amplia
+variedad de formatos de fecha.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Dividiendo-la-Entrada" spaces=" "><nodename>Dividiendo la Entrada</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Inserciones Especiales</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Dividiendo la Entrada</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="405">dividiendo el archivo de entrada</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="406">archivo de entrada</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Un documento de gran tamaño requiere una gran cantidad de insumos. En
+lugar de poner toda la entrada en un único archivo de gran tamaño, es
+más eficiente dividirlo en varios más pequeños. Independientemente del
+número de archivos separados que utilice, hay uno que es el archivo
+raíz; este es cuyo nombre se escribe cuando se ejecuta &latex;.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\include</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Condicionalmente incluye un archivo.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\includeonly</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Determina qué archivos serán incluidos.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\input</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Incluiye incondicionalmente un archivo.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005cinclude" spaces=" "><nodename>\include</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\includeonly</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Dividiendo la Entrada</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\include</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="831">\include</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\include&lbrace;<var>archivo</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>No hay presente una instrucción <code>\includeonly</code>, la instrucción
+<code>\include</code> executa <code>\clearpage</code> para iniciar una nueva página
+(<pxref label="_005cclearpage"><xrefnodename>\clearpage</xrefnodename></pxref>), entonces lee el <var>archivo</var>, y luego hace otro
+<code>\clearpage</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Dada una instrucción <code>\includeonly</code>, las acciones <code>\include</code>
+únicamente se ejecutan si <var>archivo</var> está listado como un argumento
+para <code>\includeonly</code>. Consulte la siguiente sección.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="407"><code>\include</code> anidada, no se permite</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\include</code> no puede aparecer en el preámbulo o en un
+archivo leído por otra instrucción <code>\include</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cincludeonly" spaces=" "><nodename>\includeonly</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\input</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\include</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Dividiendo la Entrada</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\includeonly</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="832">\includeonly</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\includeonly&lbrace;<var>archivo1</var>,<var>archivo2</var>,...&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\includeonly</code> controla cuales archivos se deben
+leer en subsecuentes instrucciones <code>\include</code>. La lista de nombres
+de archivo se separa con comas. Cada <var>archivo</var> debe coincidir
+exactamente con un nombre de archivo especificado en una instrucción
+<code>\include</code> para una selección eficaz.
+</para>
+<para>Esta instrucción únicamente puede aparecer en el preámbulo.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cinput" spaces=" "><nodename>\input</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\includeonly</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Dividiendo la Entrada</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\input</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="833">\input</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\input&lbrace;<var>archivo</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\input</code> provoca que el <var>archivo</var> especificado
+sea leído y procesado, tal como si su contendido se hubiera insertado en
+ese punto en el archivo actual.
+</para>
+<para>Si <var>archivo</var> no termina en <samp>.tex </samp> (por ejemplo, <samp>foo</samp> o
+<samp>foo.bar</samp>), primero se intenta con esa extensión (<samp>foo.tex</samp> o
+<samp>foo.bar.tex</samp>). Si no se encuentra, el <var>archivo</var> original se
+intenta con (<samp>foo</samp> o <samp>foo.bar</samp>).
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Asuntos-de-Portada_002fContraportada" spaces=" "><nodename>Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Cartas</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Dividiendo la Entrada</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</sectiontitle>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">Tablas de Contenido</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">Glosarios</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">Índices</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Tablas-de-Contenido" spaces=" "><nodename>Tablas de Contenido</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Glosarios</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Tablas de Contenido</sectiontitle>
+
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="408">tabla de contenido, creando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="834">\tableofcontents</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Se produce una tabla de contenido con la instrucción
+<code>\tableofcontents</code>. Usted pone la instrucción adecuada donde desea
+que aparezca la tabla de contenido; &latex; hace el resto para usted.
+Una ejecución previa habrá generado un archivo <file>.toc</file>.
+</para>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\tableofcontents</code> produce una sección, pero no
+inicia una nueva página automáticamente. Si desea una nueva página
+después de la tabla de contenido, escriba una instrucción código
+<code>\newpage</code> después de la instrucción <code>\tableofcontents</code>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="835">\listoffigures</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="836">\listoftables</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Las instrucciones análogas <code>\listoffigures</code> y <code>\listoftables</code>
+producen una lists de figuras y una lista de tablas, respectivamente.
+Cada una funciona exactamente igual que la tabla de contenido.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="837">\nofiles</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\nofiles</code> reemplaza estas instrucciones, e
+<emph>impide</emph> que se genere cualquiera de estas listas.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\addcontentsline</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Agrega una entrada a la tabla de contenido, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\addtocontents</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Añade texto directamente al archivo de la tabla de contenido, etc.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005caddcontentsline" spaces=" "><nodename>\addcontentsline</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\addtocontents</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Tablas de Contenido</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>\addcontentsline</sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="838">\addcontentsline&lbrace;<var>exto</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>unidad</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="409">tabla de contenido, agregando manualmente</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La instrucción
+<code>\addcontentsline</code>&lbrace;<var>extensión</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>undad</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+añade una entrada a la lista o tabla donde:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">extensión</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>La extensión del archivo en el que se va a escribir la información, por
+lo general una de: <code>toc</code> (tabla de contenido), <code>lof</code> (lista de
+figuras) o <code>lot</code> (lista de tablas).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">unidad</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El nombre de la unidad de sección a añadir, normalmente una de las
+siguientes, coincidiendo con el valor del argumento <var>extensión</var>:
+</para>
+<table commandarg="code" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">toc</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El nombre de la unidad de sección: <code>part</code>, <code>chapter</code>,
+<code>section</code>, <code>subsection</code>, <code>subsubsection</code>.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">lof</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Para la lista de figuras.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="code">lot</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>Para la lista de tablas.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">texto</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El texto real de la entrada.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="839">\contentsline</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción que realmente escribe al archivo <file>.<var>extensión</var></file>
+es la instrucción <code>\contentsline&lbrace;<var>undad</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>nombre</var>&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<!-- c ?? ¿cómo están cableados estos valores? ¿otros nombres de unidad? -->
+
+
+</subsection>
+<node name="_005caddtocontents" spaces=" "><nodename>\addtocontents</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\addcontentsline</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Tablas de Contenido</nodeup></node>
+<subsection spaces=" "><sectiontitle>\addtocontents</sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="840">\addtocontents&lbrace;<var>extra</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\addtocontents</code>&lbrace;<var>extensión</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+añade texto (o instrucciones de formato) directamente al archivo
+<file>.<var>extensión</var></file> que genera la tabla de contenido o listas de
+figuras o tablas.
+</para>
+<table commandarg="var" spaces=" " endspaces=" ">
+<tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">extensión</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>La extensión del archivo en el cual escribir la información: <file>toc</file>
+(tabla de contenido), <file>lof</file> (lista de figuras) o <file>lot</file> (lista
+de tablas).
+</para>
+</tableitem></tableentry><tableentry><tableterm><item spaces=" "><itemformat command="var">texto</itemformat></item>
+</tableterm><tableitem><para>El texto a escribir.
+</para></tableitem></tableentry></table>
+
+
+</subsection>
+</section>
+<node name="Glosarios" spaces=" "><nodename>Glosarios</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Índices</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Tablas de Contenido</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Glosarios</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="410">glosarios</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="841">\makeglossary</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\makeglossary</code> habilita la creación de glosarios.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="842">\glossary</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="411">archivo <file>.glo</file></indexterm></cindex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\glossary&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</code> escribe una entrada en el
+glosario para <var>texto</var> a un archivo auxiliar con la extensión
+<file>.glo</file>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="843">\glossaryentry</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Específicamente, la instrucción que escribe es
+<code>\glossaryentry&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>no-de-página</var>&rbrace;</code>, donde
+<var>no-de-página</var> es el valor de <code>\thepage</code>.
+</para>
+<para>El paquete <code>glossary</code> en CTAN proporciona compatibilidad para
+glosarios más sofisticados.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_00cdndices" spaces=" "><nodename>Índices</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Glosarios</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Índices</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="412">índices</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="844">\makeindex</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\makeindex</code> permite la creación de índices.
+Coloquela en el preámbulo.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="845">\index</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="413">archivo <file>.idx</file></indexterm></cindex>
+<para>La instrucción <code>\index&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</code> escribe una entrada en el
+índice para <var>texto</var> en un archivo auxiliar con la extensión
+<file>.idx</file>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="846">\indexentry</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Específicamente, la instrucción que escribe la entrada es
+<code>\indexentry&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;&lbrace;<var>no-de-página</var>&rbrace;</code>, donde
+<var>no-de-página</var> es el valor actual de <code>\thepage</code>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="414">&textlsquo;vea&textrsquo; y &textlsquo;vea también&textrsquo; entradas de índice</indexterm></cindex>
+<para>Para generar una entrada de índice para &textlsquo;bar&textrsquo; que diga &textlsquo;Vea foo&textrsquo;,
+utilice una barra vertical: <code>\index&lbrace;bar|see&lbrace;foo&rbrace;&rbrace;</code>. Use
+<code>seealso</code> en lugar de <code>see</code> para producir una entrada &textlsquo;Vea
+también&textrsquo;.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="847">\seename</indexterm></findex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="848">\alsoname</indexterm></findex>
+<para>El texto &textlsquo;Vea&textrsquo; está definido por la macro <code>\seename</code>, y &textlsquo;Vea
+también&textrsquo; por la macro <code>\alsoname</code>. Estas se pueden redefinir para
+otros idiomas.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="415"><command>makeindex</command> programa</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="416"><command>xindy</command> programa</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="417">archivo <file>.ind</file></indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El archivo <file>.idx</file> generado luego es ordenado con una instrucción
+externa, por lo general alguna instrucción <command>makeindex</command>
+(<url><urefurl>http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex</urefurl></url>) o (la de múltiples
+idiomas) <command>xindy</command> (<url><urefurl>http://xindy.sourceforge.net</urefurl></url>). Esto
+resulta en un archivo <file>.ind</file>, que se puede leer para componer
+tipográficamente el índice.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="849">printindex</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="418">paquete <code>makeidx</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El índice normalmente se genera con la instrucción <code>\printindex</code>.
+Esta instrucción está definida en el paquete <code>makeidx</code>, por lo
+tanto necesita colocar en el preámbulo la instrucción
+<code>\usepackage&lbrace;makeidx&rbrace;</code>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="850">indexspace</indexterm></findex>
+<para>La longitud de relleno <code>\indexspace</code> se inserta antes de cada nueva
+letra en el índice impreso; letra en el índice impreso su valor
+predeterminado es <samp>10pt plus5pt minus3pt</samp>.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="419">paquete <code>showidx</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El paquete <code>showidx</code> hace que cada entrada en el índice se muestre
+en el margen de la página donde aparece la entrada. Esto puede ayudar
+en la preparación del índice.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="420">paquete <code>multind</code></indexterm></cindex>
+<para>El paquete <code>multind</code> es compatible con múltiples índices. Vea
+también la entrada de este tema en las preguntas frecuentes de &tex;,
+en
+</para>
+<para><url><urefurl>http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Cartas" spaces=" "><nodename>Cartas</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Asuntos de Portada/Contraportada</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Cartas</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="421">cartas</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="422">creando cartas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Usted puede utilizar &latex; para componer tipográficamente cartas,
+para ambas personales y de negocios. La clase de documento
+<code>letter</code> está diseñada para hacer una serie de cartas a la vez,
+aunque se puede hacer sólo una si así lo desea.
+</para>
+<para>Su archivo fuente <file>.tex</file> tiene las mismas instrucciones mínimas de
+clase que en cualquier otro documento, es decir, debe tener las
+siguientes instrucciones como mínimo:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"> \documentclass&lbrace;letter&rbrace;
+ \begin&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+ ... cartas ...
+ \end&lbrace;document&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Cada carta es un entorno <code>letter</code>, cuyo argumento es el nombre y
+dirección del destinatario. Por ejemplo, usted podría tener:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve"> \begin&lbrace;letter&rbrace;&lbrace;Sr. José Pérez\\ Calle Princesa N°2345.
+ \\ Edinburgo, EH1 1AA&rbrace;
+ ...
+ \end&lbrace;letter&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+<para>La carta en sí comienza con la instrucción <code>\opening</code>. Siguiéndole
+el texto de la carta. Este se escribe como una entrada de &latex;
+ordinaria. Las instrucciones que no tienen sentido en una carta, como
+<code>\chapter</code>, no funcionan. La carta se cierra con una instrucción
+<code>\closing</code>.
+</para>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="851">\\ <r>para cartas</r></indexterm></findex>
+<para>Después de <code>closing</code>, usted puede colocar material adicional. La
+instrucción <code>\cc</code> produce el usual &textldquo;cc: &dots;&textrdquo;. También hay
+una instrucción <code>\encl</code> similar para una lista de
+destinatarios. Con ambas instrucciones, use <code>\\</code> para separar los
+elementos.
+</para>
+<para>Estas instrucciones se utilizan con la clase <code>letter</code>.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\address</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">La dirección del remitente.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\cc</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">La lista Cc (Con copia para).
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\closing</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Un mensaje de despedida.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\encl</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Lista de material adjunto.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\location</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">La dirección de su organización.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\makelabels</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Produce etiquetas de dirección.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\name</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Su nombre, para la dirección de retorno.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\opening</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Saludando.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\ps</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Agrega una posdata.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\signature</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Su firma.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\startbreaks</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Permite saltos de página.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\stopbreaks</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">No permite saltos de página.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\telephone</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Su número de teléfono.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005caddress" spaces=" "><nodename>\address</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\cc</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Cartas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>\address&lbrace;<var>dirección-del-remitente&rbrace;</var></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="852">\address</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>La instrucción <code>\address</code> especifica la dirección del remitente de
+la carta, como debería aparecer en la carta y el sobre. Separa las
+líneas de la dirección que deben estar separadas por instrucciones
+<code>\\</code>.
+</para>
+<para>Si usted no proporciona una declaración <code>\address</code>, entonces, se
+aplicará a la carta el formato de copia en papel con el membrete
+estándar de su organización. (<xref label="Descripci_00f3n"><xrefnodename>Descripción</xrefnodename></xref>, para obtener detalles
+sobre la implementación local). Si usted proporciona una declaración
+<code>\address</code>, entonces, la carta será formateada como una carta
+personal.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005ccc" spaces=" "><nodename>\cc</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\closing</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\address</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cartas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\cc</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="853">\cc</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="423">listas cc, en cartas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\cc&lbrace;<var>nombre</var>\\<var>nombre2</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Produce una lista de <var>nombre</var>s a quienes enviar copias de la carta.
+Cada nombre se imprime en una línea separada.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cclosing" spaces=" "><nodename>\closing</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\encl</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\cc</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cartas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\closing</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="854">\closing</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="424">cartas, terminando</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="425">cerrando cartas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\closing&lbrace;texto&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Una carta se cierra con la instrucción <code>\closing</code>, por ejemplo,
+</para><example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\closing&lbrace;Muy Atentamente,&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cencl" spaces=" "><nodename>\encl</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\location</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\closing</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cartas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\encl</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="855">\encl</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="426">lista de documentos adjuntos</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\encl&lbrace;<var>línea1</var>\\<var>línea2</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Declara una lista de más de un documento adjunto.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005clocation" spaces=" "><nodename>\location</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\makelabels</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\encl</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cartas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\location</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="856">\location</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para><code>\location&lbrace;dirección&rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+<para>Esta modifica la dirección estándar de su organización. Esto sólo
+aparece si el estilo de página <code>firstpage</code> está seleccionado.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cmakelabels" spaces=" "><nodename>\makelabels</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\name</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\location</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cartas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\makelabels</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="857">\makelabels</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para><code>\makelabels&lbrace;número&rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+<para>Si ejecuta esta instrucción en el preámbulo, &latex; creará una hoja de
+etiquetas con las direcciones. Esta hoja se emitirá antes que las
+cartas.
+</para>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cname" spaces=" "><nodename>\name</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\opening</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\makelabels</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cartas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\name</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="858">\name</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para><code>\name&lbrace;June Davenport&rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+<para>Su nombre, utilizado en la impresión del sobre junto con la dirección
+del remitente.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005copening" spaces=" "><nodename>\opening</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\ps</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\name</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cartas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\opening&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="859">\opening</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="427">cartas, iniciando</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\opening&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Una carta comienza con la instrucción <code>\opening</code>. El argumento
+obligatorio, <var>texto</var>, es el texto con el que desea iniciar su carta.
+Por ejemplo:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\opening&lbrace;Estimado José,&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cps" spaces=" "><nodename>\ps</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\signature</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\opening</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cartas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\ps</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="860">\ps</indexterm></findex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="428">posdata, en cartas</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Use la instrucción <code>\ps</code> para iniciar una posdata en una carta,
+después de <code>\closing</code>.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005csignature" spaces=" "><nodename>\signature</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\startbreaks</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\ps</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cartas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\signature&lbrace;<var>texto</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="861">\signature</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Su nombre, como debe aparecer al final de la carta debajo del espacio
+para su firma. <code>\\</code> inicia una nueva línea dentro de <var>texto</var>
+como de costumbre.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cstartbreaks" spaces=" "><nodename>\startbreaks</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\stopbreaks</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\signature</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cartas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\startbreaks</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="862">\startbreaks</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para><code>\startbreaks</code>
+</para>
+<para>Se usa después de una instrucción <code>\stopbreaks</code> para permitir de
+nuevo los saltos de página.
+</para>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005cstopbreaks" spaces=" "><nodename>\stopbreaks</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\telephone</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">\startbreaks</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cartas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\stopbreaks</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="863">\stopbreaks</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para><code>\stopbreaks</code>
+</para>
+<para>Inhibe saltos de página hasta que aparezca una instrucción
+<code>\startbreaks</code>.
+</para>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005ctelephone" spaces=" "><nodename>\telephone</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\stopbreaks</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Cartas</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\telephone</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="864">\telephone</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para><code>\telephone&lbrace;número&rbrace;</code>
+</para>
+<para>Este es su número de teléfono. Este sólo aparece si el estilo de página
+<code>firstpage</code> está seleccionado.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="Entrada_002fSalida-a-la-Terminal" spaces=" "><nodename>Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Línea de Órdenes</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Cartas</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="429">entrada/salida</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="430">entrada/salida desde la terminal</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\typein</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Lee texto desde la terminal.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator=":: ">\typeout</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">Escribe texto en la terminal.
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="_005ctypein" spaces=" "><nodename>\typein</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">\typeout</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\typein[<var>instrucción</var>]&lbrace;<var>mensaje</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="865">\typein</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\typein[<var>\instrucción</var>]&lbrace;<var>mensaje</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para><code>\typein</code> imprime el <var>mensaje</var> en la terminal y provoca que
+&latex; se detenga y espere para que usted escriba una línea de
+entrada, terminando con &textldquo;Intro&textrdquo;. Si se omite el argumento opcional
+<var>\instrucción</var>, la entrada escrita se procesa como si se hubiera
+incluido en el archivo de entrada en lugar de la instrucción
+<code>\typein</code>. Si está presente el argumento <var>\instrucción</var>, debe
+ser el nombre de una instrucción. Este nombre de instrucción entonces
+define o redefine la entrada escrita.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+<node name="_005ctypeout" spaces=" "><nodename>\typeout</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">\typein</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle><code>\typeout&lbrace;<var>mensaje</var>&rbrace;</code></sectiontitle>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="866">\typeout</indexterm></findex>
+
+<para>Sinopsis:
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">\typeout&lbrace;<var>mensaje</var>&rbrace;
+</pre></example>
+
+<para>Imprime el <code>mensaje</code> en la terminal y en el archivo <code>log</code>.
+Las instrucciones en el <code>mensaje</code> que están definidas con
+<code>\newcommand</code> o <code>\renewcommand</code> (entre otras) se sustituyen
+por su definición antes de ser impresas.
+</para>
+<para>Las reglas habituales de &latex; para el tratamiento de varios espacios
+como un espacio único e ignorando espacios después de un nombre de
+instrucción también se aplican al <code>mensaje</code>. Una instrucción
+<code>\space</code> en <code>mensaje</code> provoca la impresión de un espació
+sencillo, independientemente de los espacios circundantes. Una
+<code>^^J</code> en <code>mensaje</code> imprime una nueva línea.
+</para>
+
+</section>
+</chapter>
+<node name="L_00ednea-de-_00d3rdenes" spaces=" "><nodename>Línea de Órdenes</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Plantillas de Documento</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Entrada/Salida a la Terminal</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<chapter spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Línea de Órdenes</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="431">línea de órdenes</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>La especificación de archivo de entrada indica el archivo al cual
+aplicar formato; &tex; usa <file>.tex</file> como extensión predeterminada.
+Si se omite el archivo de entrada completamente, &tex; acepta entrada
+desde la terminal. Usted especifica opciones de instrucción mediante el
+suministro de una cadena como un parámetro para la instrucción; por
+ejemplo,
+</para>
+<example endspaces=" ">
+<pre xml:space="preserve">latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
+</pre></example>
+
+<noindent></noindent>
+<para>debe procesar <file>foo.tex</file> sin hacer una pausa después de cada error.
+</para>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="432"><samp>*</samp> apuntador</indexterm></cindex>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="433">apuntador, <samp>*</samp></indexterm></cindex>
+<findex index="fn" spaces=" "><indexterm index="fn" number="867">\stop</indexterm></findex>
+<para>Si &latex; se detiene en medio del documento y le muestra un indicador
+<samp>*</samp>, está esperando por una entrada. Usted puede escribir
+<code>\stop</code> (e Intro) y este terminará el documento prematuramente.
+</para>
+
+
+</chapter>
+<node name="Plantillas-de-Documento" spaces=" "><nodename>Plantillas de Documento</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">License translation</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Línea de Órdenes</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<appendix spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Plantillas de Documento</sectiontitle>
+<cindex index="cp" spaces=" "><indexterm index="cp" number="434">plantillas de documentos</indexterm></cindex>
+
+<para>Aunque no es material de referencia, tal vez estas plantillas de
+documento serán de utilidad.
+</para>
+<menu endspaces=" ">
+<menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">Plantilla book</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">Plantilla beamer</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry><menuentry leadingtext="* "><menunode separator="::">Plantilla tugboat</menunode><menudescription><pre xml:space="preserve">
+</pre></menudescription></menuentry></menu>
+
+
+<node name="Plantilla-book" spaces=" "><nodename>Plantilla book</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Plantilla beamer</nodenext><nodeup automatic="on">Plantillas de Documento</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Plantilla <code>book</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<verbatim xml:space="preserve">
+\documentclass{book}
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+\title{Plantilla de Clase Book}
+\author{Autor Alex}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\chapter{Primero}
+Algún texto.
+
+\chapter{Segundo}
+Algún otro texto.
+
+\section{Un subtema}
+El final.
+\end{document}
+</verbatim>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Plantilla-beamer" spaces=" "><nodename>Plantilla beamer</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Plantilla tugboat</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">Plantilla book</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Plantillas de Documento</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Plantilla <code>beamer</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<para>La clase <code>beamer</code> crea diapositivas de presentaciones.
+</para>
+<verbatim xml:space="preserve">
+\documentclass{beamer}
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+
+\title{Plantilla de Clase Beamer}
+\author{Autor Alex}
+\date{Julio 31, 2010}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% sin [fragile], cualquier código {verbatim} provoca errores misteriosos.
+\begin{frame}[fragile]
+ \frametitle{Primer Diapositiva}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ ¡Esto está en \verbatim!
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+</verbatim>
+
+
+</section>
+<node name="Plantilla-tugboat" spaces=" "><nodename>Plantilla tugboat</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Plantilla beamer</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Plantillas de Documento</nodeup></node>
+<section spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Plantilla <code>tugboat</code></sectiontitle>
+
+<para><cite>TUGboat</cite> es el diario del Grupo de Usuarios de &tex;,
+<url><urefurl>http://tug.org/TUGboat</urefurl></url>.
+</para>
+<verbatim xml:space="preserve">
+\documentclass{ltugboat} % para procedimientos ltugproc
+
+\usepackage[spanish]{babel} % Para escribir en Español normal
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} % Codificación de caracteres
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{ifpdf}
+\ifpdf
+ \usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,
+ urlcolor=black]{hyperref}
+\else
+ \usepackage{url}
+\fi
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Ejemplo de Articulo Regular \TUB\}
+
+% repetir información para cada autor.
+\author{First Last}
+\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
+\netaddress{user (at) ejemplo dot org}
+\personalURL{http://ejemplo.org/~user/}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% El resumen en ltugboat viene después de \maketitle.
+\begin{abstract}
+Este es un ejemplo del tema de un artículo \TUB{} ordinario.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introducción}
+
+Este es un artículo de ejemplo para \TUB, de
+\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
+
+Recomendamos el paquete graphicx para inclusión de imágenes y el
+paquete hyperref para urls activas (en la salida \acro{PDF}). \TUB\ se
+produce utilizando archivos \acro{PDF} exclusivamente, en la actualidad.
+
+Las clases \texttt{ltug*} proporcionan estas abreviaturas, entre muchas
+otras:
+
+{\small
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
+\BibTeX \CandT \CTAN \DTD \DVItoVDU \HTML
+\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \JoT \LAMSTeX \LaTeXe
+\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \pcMF \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas
+\PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS
+\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG
+\tug \UG \UNIX \VAX \VorTeX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+
+\Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag
+\careof \thinskip
+
+\acro{FRED} -&gt; {\sc fred} % ¡Por favor úselas!
+\cs{fred} -&gt; \fred
+\env{fred} -&gt; \begin{fred}
+\meta{fred} -&gt; &lt;fred&gt;
+\nth{n} -&gt; 1st, 2nd, ...
+\sfrac{3/4} -&gt; 3/4
+\booktitle{Libro de Fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+}
+
+Para mayor información, consulte el documento en ltubguid:
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat}
+
+Correo electrónico \verb|tugboat@tug.org| si incurre en problemas o tiene
+dudas.
+
+
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain} % recomendamos el estilo de bibliografía plain
+\nocite{book-minimal} % solo hace que la bibliografía no esté vacía
+\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib viene con BibTeX
+
+
+\makesignature % no en ltugproc
+\end{document}
+</verbatim>
+
+<!-- c begin vincentb1 -->
+</section>
+</appendix>
+<node name="License-translation" spaces=" "><nodename>License translation</nodename><nodenext spaces=" ">Plantillas de Documento</nodenext><nodeprev spaces=" ">Índice de Conceptos</nodeprev><nodeup spaces=" ">Top</nodeup></node>
+<!-- comment node-name, next, previous, up -->
+<appendix spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Traducción de la licencia</sectiontitle>
+
+<para>La traducción que sigue es dada únicamente como informaciòn, y no
+reemplaza el texto en inglés dado al principio de este documento.
+<!-- c end vincentb1 -->
+</para>
+<para>Se concede permiso para hacer y distribuir copias literales de este
+manual siempre que el aviso de copyright y esta nota de permiso se
+conserven en todas las copias.
+</para>
+<ignore>
+Se concede permiso para procesar este archivo a través de TeX e imprimir
+los resultados, siempre que el documento impreso lleve la copia de aviso
+de permiso previa idéntica a ésta a excepción de la supresión de este
+párrafo (este párrafo no es pertinente para el manual impreso).
+</ignore>
+
+<para>Se concede permiso para copiar y distribuir versiones modificadas de
+este manual bajo las condiciones para una copia literal, a condición de
+que todo el trabajo derivado resultante se distribuya bajo los términos
+de una nota de permiso idéntica a ésta.
+</para>
+<para>Se concede permiso para copiar y distribuir traducciones de este manual
+a otro idioma, con las condiciones anteriores para versiones
+modificadas.
+</para>
+</appendix>
+<node name="_00cdndice-de-Conceptos" spaces=" "><nodename>Índice de Conceptos</nodename><nodenext automatic="on">Índice de Instrucciones</nodenext><nodeprev automatic="on">License translation</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<unnumbered spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Índice de Conceptos</sectiontitle>
+
+<printindex value="cp" line=" cp"></printindex>
+
+<!-- c El nombre del nodo `Índice de Instrucciones' NO se debe alterar para -->
+<!-- c ltx-help.el. -->
+</unnumbered>
+<node name="_00cdndice-de-Instrucciones" spaces=" "><nodename>Índice de Instrucciones</nodename><nodeprev automatic="on">Índice de Conceptos</nodeprev><nodeup automatic="on">Top</nodeup></node>
+<unnumbered spaces=" "><sectiontitle>Índice de Instrucciones</sectiontitle>
+
+<printindex value="fn" line=" fn"></printindex>
+
+</unnumbered>
+<bye></bye>
+</texinfo>